diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/TempleWare-CS2.vcxproj b/TempleWare-CS2/TempleWare-CS2.vcxproj index a2aa1d8..2dae834 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/TempleWare-CS2.vcxproj +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/TempleWare-CS2.vcxproj @@ -171,6 +171,7 @@ + @@ -228,6 +229,7 @@ + diff --git a/output/animationsystem_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/animationsystem_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.cs diff --git a/output/animationsystem_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/animationsystem_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/animationsystem_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/animationsystem_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.json diff --git a/output/animationsystem_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/animationsystem_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/animationsystem_dll.rs diff --git a/output/buttons.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/buttons.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.cs diff --git a/output/buttons.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/buttons.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.hpp diff --git a/output/buttons.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.json similarity index 100% rename from output/buttons.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.json diff --git a/output/buttons.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/buttons.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/buttons.rs diff --git a/output/client_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/client_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.cs diff --git a/output/client_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/client_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/client_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/client_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.json diff --git a/output/client_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/client_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/client_dll.rs diff --git a/output/engine2_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/engine2_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.cs diff --git a/output/engine2_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/engine2_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/engine2_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/engine2_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.json diff --git a/output/engine2_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/engine2_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/engine2_dll.rs diff --git a/output/host_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/host_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.cs diff --git a/output/host_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/host_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/host_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/host_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.json diff --git a/output/host_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/host_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/host_dll.rs diff --git a/output/info.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/info.json similarity index 100% rename from output/info.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/info.json diff --git a/output/interfaces.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/interfaces.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.cs diff --git a/output/interfaces.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/interfaces.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.hpp diff --git a/output/interfaces.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.json similarity index 100% rename from output/interfaces.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.json diff --git a/output/interfaces.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/interfaces.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/interfaces.rs diff --git a/output/materialsystem2_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/materialsystem2_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.cs diff --git a/output/materialsystem2_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/materialsystem2_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/materialsystem2_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/materialsystem2_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.json diff --git a/output/materialsystem2_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/materialsystem2_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/materialsystem2_dll.rs diff --git a/output/networksystem_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/networksystem_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.cs diff --git a/output/networksystem_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/networksystem_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/networksystem_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/networksystem_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.json diff --git a/output/networksystem_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/networksystem_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/networksystem_dll.rs diff --git a/output/offsets.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/offsets.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.cs diff --git a/output/offsets.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/offsets.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.hpp diff --git a/output/offsets.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.json similarity index 100% rename from output/offsets.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.json diff --git a/output/offsets.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/offsets.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/offsets.rs diff --git a/output/panorama_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/panorama_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.cs diff --git a/output/panorama_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/panorama_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/panorama_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/panorama_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.json diff --git a/output/panorama_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/panorama_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/panorama_dll.rs diff --git a/output/particles_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/particles_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.cs diff --git a/output/particles_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/particles_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/particles_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/particles_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.json diff --git a/output/particles_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/particles_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/particles_dll.rs diff --git a/output/pulse_system_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/pulse_system_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.cs diff --git a/output/pulse_system_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/pulse_system_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/pulse_system_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/pulse_system_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.json diff --git a/output/pulse_system_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/pulse_system_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/pulse_system_dll.rs diff --git a/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/rendersystemdx11_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.cs diff --git a/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/rendersystemdx11_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/rendersystemdx11_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.json diff --git a/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/rendersystemdx11_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/rendersystemdx11_dll.rs diff --git a/output/resourcesystem_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/resourcesystem_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.cs diff --git a/output/resourcesystem_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/resourcesystem_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/resourcesystem_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/resourcesystem_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.json diff --git a/output/resourcesystem_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/resourcesystem_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/resourcesystem_dll.rs diff --git a/output/scenesystem_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/scenesystem_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.cs diff --git a/output/scenesystem_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/scenesystem_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/scenesystem_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/scenesystem_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.json diff --git a/output/scenesystem_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/scenesystem_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/scenesystem_dll.rs diff --git a/output/schemasystem_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/schemasystem_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.cs diff --git a/output/schemasystem_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/schemasystem_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/schemasystem_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/schemasystem_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.json diff --git a/output/schemasystem_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/schemasystem_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/schemasystem_dll.rs diff --git a/output/server_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/server_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.cs diff --git a/output/server_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/server_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/server_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/server_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.json diff --git a/output/server_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/server_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/server_dll.rs diff --git a/output/soundsystem_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/soundsystem_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.cs diff --git a/output/soundsystem_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/soundsystem_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/soundsystem_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/soundsystem_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.json diff --git a/output/soundsystem_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/soundsystem_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/soundsystem_dll.rs diff --git a/output/vphysics2_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/vphysics2_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.cs diff --git a/output/vphysics2_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/vphysics2_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/vphysics2_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/vphysics2_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.json diff --git a/output/vphysics2_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/vphysics2_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/vphysics2_dll.rs diff --git a/output/worldrenderer_dll.cs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.cs similarity index 100% rename from output/worldrenderer_dll.cs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.cs diff --git a/output/worldrenderer_dll.hpp b/TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.hpp similarity index 100% rename from output/worldrenderer_dll.hpp rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.hpp diff --git a/output/worldrenderer_dll.json b/TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.json similarity index 100% rename from output/worldrenderer_dll.json rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.json diff --git a/output/worldrenderer_dll.rs b/TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.rs similarity index 100% rename from output/worldrenderer_dll.rs rename to TempleWare-CS2/output/worldrenderer_dll.rs diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/datatypes/keyvalues/keyvalues.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/datatypes/keyvalues/keyvalues.cpp index 628c16d..115f2d6 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/datatypes/keyvalues/keyvalues.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/datatypes/keyvalues/keyvalues.cpp @@ -34,7 +34,6 @@ CKeyValues3* CKeyValues3::create_material_from_resource() using fnSetTypeKV3 = CKeyValues3 * (__fastcall*)(CKeyValues3*, unsigned int, unsigned int); static const fnSetTypeKV3 oSetTypeKV3 = reinterpret_cast(M::FindPattern("tier0.dll", ("40 53 48 83 EC 30 48 8B D9 49"))); - - CKeyValues3* pKeyValue = new CKeyValues3[0x10]; + CKeyValues3* pKeyValue = new CKeyValues3; return oSetTypeKV3(pKeyValue, 1U, 6U); } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/CCSPlayerController/CCSPlayerController.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/CCSPlayerController/CCSPlayerController.h index 366f3d0..92fc6b8 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/CCSPlayerController/CCSPlayerController.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/CCSPlayerController/CCSPlayerController.h @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ #pragma once #include -#pragma once +#include "../handle.h" #include "../../../templeware/utils/memory/memorycommon.h" #include "../../../templeware/utils/math/vector/vector.h" #include "../../../templeware/utils/schema/schema.h" @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ public: SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(bool, IsLocalPlayer, 0x6F0); SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(CBaseHandle, m_hPawn, 0x62C); + SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(CBaseHandle, m_hObserverPawn, 0x48); SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(const char*, m_sSanitizedPlayerName, 0x778); private: diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/C_CSPlayerPawn/C_CSPlayerPawn.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/C_CSPlayerPawn/C_CSPlayerPawn.h index d9eaf64..63cd20d 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/C_CSPlayerPawn/C_CSPlayerPawn.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/cs2/entity/C_CSPlayerPawn/C_CSPlayerPawn.h @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ public: SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(Vector_t, m_vOldOrigin, 0x1324); SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(Vector_t, m_vecViewOffset, 0xCB0); SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(CCSPlayer_WeaponServices*, m_pWeaponServices, 0x11A8); + SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(CBaseHandle, m_hController, 0x133C); C_CSPlayerPawn(uintptr_t address); C_CSWeaponBase* GetActiveWeapon()const; diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/includes.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/includes.h index c14da4d..48814d2 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/includes.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/includes.h @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ #include "../external/imgui/imgui.h" #include "../external/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.h" #include "../external/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.h" +#include "cs2/entity/handle.h" typedef HRESULT(__stdcall* Present) (IDXGISwapChain* pSwapChain, UINT SyncInterval, UINT Flags); typedef LRESULT(CALLBACK* WNDPROC)(HWND, UINT, WPARAM, LPARAM); diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.cpp index c1cbd07..ae877a9 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.cpp @@ -63,5 +63,22 @@ namespace Config { bool triggerbot = false; bool always_on_triggerbot = false; int triggerbot_key = 0x05; // Например, VK_X или другой + int triggerbot_alt_key = 0x06; // Альтернативная кнопка по умолчанию (например, VK_Y) float triggerbot_delay = 0.0f; + int rcsActivationShots = 1; + + // --- Для отображения наблюдателей --- + bool showSpectators = true; + ImVec4 spectatorListColor = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f); + ImVec4 spectatorListBgColor = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.7f); + float spectatorListOpacity = 0.8f; + + bool silent_aim = true; + float silent_aim_fov = 90.0f; + float silent_aim_smooth = 0.0f; + int silent_aim_bone = Config::BONE_HEAD; + int silent_aim_key = 0x12; // VK_DELETE по умолчанию + bool always_on_silent_aim = false; + float silent_aim_smooth_slider = 0.0f; // Новый параметр для ползунка смуза + bool silent_shooterAfterAim = false; // Аналог shooterAfterAim для сайлент аимбота } diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.h index 898bfea..b4709b3 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/config.h @@ -70,5 +70,22 @@ namespace Config { extern bool triggerbot; extern bool always_on_triggerbot; extern int triggerbot_key; + extern int triggerbot_alt_key; // Альтернативная кнопка для триггербота extern float triggerbot_delay; + extern int rcsActivationShots; + + // --- Для отображения наблюдателей --- + extern bool showSpectators; + extern ImVec4 spectatorListColor; + extern ImVec4 spectatorListBgColor; + extern float spectatorListOpacity; + + extern bool silent_aim; + extern float silent_aim_fov; + extern float silent_aim_smooth; + extern int silent_aim_bone; + extern int silent_aim_key; + extern bool always_on_silent_aim; + extern float silent_aim_smooth_slider; // Новый параметр для ползунка смуза + extern bool silent_shooterAfterAim; // Аналог shooterAfterAim для сайлент аимбота } diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/configmanager.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/configmanager.h index 975d395..b70f299 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/configmanager.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/config/configmanager.h @@ -130,9 +130,11 @@ namespace internal_config j["showNameTags"] = Config::showNameTags; j["triggerbot_hold_lmb"] = Config::triggerbot_hold_lmb; j["shooterAfterAim"] = Config::shooterAfterAim; + j["silent_shooterAfterAim"] = Config::silent_shooterAfterAim; j["always_on_triggerbot"] = Config::always_on_triggerbot; j["triggerbot"] = Config::triggerbot; j["triggerbot_key"] = Config::triggerbot_key; + j["triggerbot_alt_key"] = Config::triggerbot_alt_key; j["triggerbot_delay"] = Config::triggerbot_delay; j["enemyChamsInvisible"] = Config::enemyChamsInvisible; @@ -170,6 +172,7 @@ namespace internal_config Config::fovCircleColor.z, Config::fovCircleColor.w }; + j["rcsActivationShots"] = Config::rcsActivationShots; auto filePath = GetConfigPath(configName); std::ofstream ofs(filePath); @@ -243,9 +246,11 @@ namespace internal_config Config::showNameTags = j.value("showNameTags", false); Config::triggerbot_hold_lmb = j.value("triggerbot_hold_lmb", false); Config::shooterAfterAim = j.value("shooterAfterAim", false); + Config::silent_shooterAfterAim = j.value("silent_shooterAfterAim", false); Config::always_on_triggerbot = j.value("always_on_triggerbot", false); Config::triggerbot = j.value("triggerbot", false); Config::triggerbot_key = j.value("triggerbot_key", 0x05); + Config::triggerbot_alt_key = j.value("triggerbot_alt_key", 0x06); Config::triggerbot_delay = j.value("triggerbot_delay", 0.0f); Config::antiflash = j.value("antiflash", false); @@ -315,6 +320,8 @@ namespace internal_config Config::fovCircleColor.w = arr[3].get(); } + Config::rcsActivationShots = j.value("rcsActivationShots", 1); + ifs.close(); } diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/CUserCmd.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/CUserCmd.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e030e48 --- /dev/null +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/CUserCmd.h @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +#pragma once +#include +#include +#include "../../../templeware/utils/math/vector/vector.h" + +struct CCmdQAngle { + QAngle_t angValue; +}; + +class CBaseUserCmdPB { +public: + char pad_0x00[0x40]; + CCmdQAngle* pViewangles; // 0x40 + // ... другие поля не нужны для silent aim +}; + +class CCSGOUserCmdPB { +public: + char pad_0x00[0x18]; + CBaseUserCmdPB* pBase; // 0x18 + // ... другие поля не нужны для silent aim +}; + +class CUserCmd { +public: + char pad_0x00[0x18]; + CCSGOUserCmdPB pBase; // 0x18 + // ... другие поля не нужны для silent aim +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.cpp index 42e290d..9bd40d3 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.cpp @@ -4,13 +4,33 @@ #include "../../../templeware/hooks/hooks.h" #include "../../../templeware/config/config.h" #include "../../utils/memory/patternscan/patternscan.h" +#include "../visuals/visuals.h" +#include "CUserCmd.h" +#include "../../../templeware/utils/schema/schema.h" #include #include -#include "../../menu/hud.h" -#include "../../menu/menu.h" #include #include +#include +#include "../../menu/hud.h" +#include "../../menu/menu.h" + +// Адреса из дампа (актуально для 2024-07-18) +#define DW_SENSITIVITY 0x1A6A9D8 +#define DW_SENSITIVITY_SENS 0x40 + +float GetGameSensitivity() { + static float fallback = 2.0f; + HMODULE hClient = GetModuleHandleA("client.dll"); + if (!hClient) return fallback; + uintptr_t sensBase = reinterpret_cast(hClient) + DW_SENSITIVITY; + uintptr_t sensPtr = *reinterpret_cast(sensBase); + if (!sensPtr) return fallback; + float sens = *reinterpret_cast(sensPtr + DW_SENSITIVITY_SENS); + if (sens < 0.01f || sens > 20.0f) return fallback; + return sens; +} // Индексы костей (актуально для CS2) constexpr int BONE_INDEX_HEAD = 6; // Head @@ -107,25 +127,30 @@ Vector_t GetEntityEyePos(const C_CSPlayerPawn* Entity) { return Result; } +// Удаляем все вспомогательные функции инкапсуляции + void Aimbot() { static C_CSPlayerPawn* lockedTarget = nullptr; static bool prevAimbotState = false; static bool targetWasLost = false; static QAngle_t last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; static int shotCount = 0; + float sensitivity = GetGameSensitivity(); bool aimbotActive = Config::always_on_aimbot ? true : Config::aimbot; // --- shooterAfterAim + triggerbot_key --- if (Config::shooterAfterAim && (GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_key) & 0x8000)) { aimbotActive = true; } C_CSPlayerPawn* lp = H::oGetLocalPlayer(0); + if (cached_players.empty() || !lp || !lp->handle().valid() || lp->getHealth() <= 0) + return; Vector_t lep = GetEntityEyePos(lp); QAngle_t* viewangles = (QAngle_t*)(modules.getModule("client") + 0x1A78650); bool isShooting = (GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_key) & 0x8000) || (GetAsyncKeyState(VK_LBUTTON) & 0x8000); int shotsFired = lp ? lp->getShotsFired() : 0; shotCount = shotsFired; - g_DebugString = "debug: " + std::to_string(shotsFired); + //g_DebugString = "debug: " + std::to_string(shotsFired) + "Sens: " + std::to_string(sensitivity); if (Config::aimbot_on_lmb && !Config::always_on_aimbot) { aimbotActive = isShooting; @@ -141,77 +166,54 @@ void Aimbot() { // --- Новый режим: always_on_aimbot --- if (Config::always_on_aimbot) { - int nMaxHighestEntity = I::GameEntity->Instance->GetHighestEntityIndex(); float bestFov = Config::aimbot_fov; - C_CSPlayerPawn* bestTarget = nullptr; + PlayerCache* bestTarget = nullptr; QAngle_t bestAngle = { 0, 0, 0 }; - - for (int i = 1; i <= nMaxHighestEntity; i++) { - auto Entity = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(i); - if (!Entity) + for (auto& Player : cached_players) { + if (!Player.handle.valid() || Player.health <= 0 || Player.handle.index() == INVALID_EHANDLE_INDEX) continue; - if (!Entity->handle().valid()) + if (Config::teamCheck && (Player.team_num == cached_local.team)) continue; - SchemaClassInfoData_t* _class = nullptr; - Entity->dump_class_info(&_class); - if (!_class) - continue; - const uint32_t hash = HASH(_class->szName); - if (hash == HASH("C_CSPlayerPawn")) { - C_CSPlayerPawn* pawn = (C_CSPlayerPawn*)Entity; - if (pawn->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle()) - continue; - if (pawn->getHealth() <= 0) - continue; - if (Config::team_check && pawn->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) - continue; - Vector_t target_pos = GetEntityEyePos(pawn);//GetAimbotTargetPos(pawn, lep); - QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); - angle.x *= -1.f; - angle.y += 180.f; - const float fov = GetFov(*viewangles, angle); - if (!std::isfinite(fov) || fov > bestFov) - continue; - bestFov = fov; - bestTarget = pawn; - bestAngle = angle; - } - } - if (bestTarget) { - Vector_t target_pos = GetAimbotTargetPos(bestTarget, lep, *viewangles); - //Vector_t target_pos = GetEntityEyePos(bestTarget); + Vector_t target_pos = Player.position + Player.viewOffset; QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); angle.x *= -1.f; angle.y += 180.f; - QAngle_t ang_punch_angle = *(QAngle_t*)((uintptr_t)lp + SchemaFinder::Get(hash_32_fnv1a_const("C_CSPlayerPawn->m_aimPunchAngle"))); - if (isShooting) { - last_punch_angle = ang_punch_angle; + const float fov = GetFov(*viewangles, angle); + if (!std::isfinite(fov) || fov > bestFov) + continue; + bestFov = fov; + bestTarget = &Player; + bestAngle = angle; + } + if (bestTarget) { + Vector_t target_pos = bestTarget->position + bestTarget->viewOffset; + QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); + angle.x *= -1.f; + angle.y += 180.f; + QAngle_t cur_punch_angle = *(QAngle_t*)((uintptr_t)lp + SchemaFinder::Get(hash_32_fnv1a_const("C_CSPlayerPawn->m_aimPunchAngle"))); + // --- RCS --- + bool rcsActive = false; + if (Config::shooterAfterAim && (GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_key) & 0x8000)) { + rcsActive = (Config::rcs || Config::shooterAfterAim) && (shotCount > Config::rcsActivationShots); + } else { + rcsActive = (Config::rcs || Config::shooterAfterAim) && (shotCount > Config::rcsActivationShots); + } + if (rcsActive && shotsFired > 1) { + // Для прямого изменения viewangles: делить НЕ нужно + //QAngle_t punchDelta = cur_punch_angle - last_punch_angle; + //g_DebugString = "debug: " + std::to_string(punchDelta.x); + angle -= cur_punch_angle * 2.f; + last_punch_angle = cur_punch_angle; } else { last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; } - // --- RCS --- - bool rcsActive = (Config::rcs || Config::shooterAfterAim) && (shotCount > 1); - if (rcsActive) - angle -= last_punch_angle * 2.f; angle.z = 0.f; angle = angle.Normalize(); - // --- RCS --- - QAngle_t delta = (angle - *viewangles).Normalize(); - if (rcsActive) { - float smooth_rcs = Config::aimbot_smooth; - if (Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth) { - float fov = sqrtf(delta.x * delta.x + delta.y * delta.y); - float maxFov = Config::aimbot_fov; - float factor = (maxFov > 0.01f) ? (fov / maxFov) : 0.f; - smooth_rcs = Config::aimbot_smooth + (Config::aimbot_smooth * factor * Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth_factor); - } - smooth_rcs = std::fmax(smooth_rcs / 10.f, 1.0f); - angle -= last_punch_angle * 2.f * smooth_rcs; - } + // --- Smooth --- + QAngle_t delta = (angle - *viewangles).Normalize(); if (Config::aimbot_smooth > 0.f) { QAngle_t cur = *viewangles; - QAngle_t delta = (angle - cur).Normalize(); float smooth = Config::aimbot_smooth; if (Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth) { float fov = sqrtf(delta.x * delta.x + delta.y * delta.y); @@ -251,12 +253,10 @@ void Aimbot() { const uint32_t hash = HASH(_class->szName); if (hash == HASH("C_CSPlayerPawn")) { C_CSPlayerPawn* pawn = (C_CSPlayerPawn*)Entity; - if (pawn->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle()) - continue; - if (pawn->getHealth() <= 0) - continue; - if (Config::team_check && pawn->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) - continue; + if (!pawn) continue; + if (pawn->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle()) continue; + if (pawn->getHealth() <= 0) continue; + if (Config::team_check && pawn->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) continue; Vector_t target_pos = GetEntityEyePos(pawn);//GetAimbotTargetPos(pawn, lep); QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); angle.x *= -1.f; @@ -287,10 +287,19 @@ void Aimbot() { // Если есть захваченная цель и кнопка удерживается if (aimbotActive && lockedTarget) { // Проверяем, что цель всё ещё валидна - if (!lockedTarget->handle().valid() || lockedTarget->getHealth() <= 0) { + if (!lp || !lp->handle().valid() || lp->getHealth() <= 0) { + lockedTarget = nullptr; + targetWasLost = false; + last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; + return; + } + if ( + lockedTarget->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle() || + lockedTarget->getHealth() <= 0 || + !lockedTarget->handle().valid() + ) { lockedTarget = nullptr; targetWasLost = true; - // Не ищем новую цель до повторного нажатия! last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; // сброс rcs } else { @@ -298,31 +307,25 @@ void Aimbot() { QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); angle.x *= -1.f; angle.y += 180.f; - QAngle_t ang_punch_angle = *(QAngle_t*)((uintptr_t)lp + SchemaFinder::Get(hash_32_fnv1a_const("C_CSPlayerPawn->m_aimPunchAngle"))); - if (isShooting) { - last_punch_angle = ang_punch_angle; + QAngle_t cur_punch_angle = *(QAngle_t*)((uintptr_t)lp + SchemaFinder::Get(hash_32_fnv1a_const("C_CSPlayerPawn->m_aimPunchAngle"))); + // --- RCS --- + bool rcsActive = false; + if (Config::shooterAfterAim && (GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_key) & 0x8000)) { + rcsActive = (Config::rcs || Config::shooterAfterAim) && (shotCount > Config::rcsActivationShots); + } else { + rcsActive = (Config::rcs || Config::shooterAfterAim) && (shotCount > Config::rcsActivationShots); + } + if (rcsActive && shotCount > 1) { + // Для прямого изменения viewangles: делить НЕ нужно + //QAngle_t punchDelta = cur_punch_angle - last_punch_angle; + //g_DebugString = "debug: " + std::to_string(punchDelta.x); + angle -= cur_punch_angle * 2.f; + last_punch_angle = cur_punch_angle; } else { last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; } - // --- RCS --- - bool rcsActive = (Config::rcs || Config::shooterAfterAim) && (shotCount > 1); - if (rcsActive) - angle -= last_punch_angle * 2.f; angle.z = 0.f; angle = angle.Normalize(); - // --- RCS --- - QAngle_t delta = (angle - *viewangles).Normalize(); - if (rcsActive) { - float smooth_rcs = Config::aimbot_smooth; - if (Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth) { - float fov = sqrtf(delta.x * delta.x + delta.y * delta.y); - float maxFov = Config::aimbot_fov; - float factor = (maxFov > 0.01f) ? (fov / maxFov) : 0.f; - smooth_rcs = Config::aimbot_smooth + (Config::aimbot_smooth * factor * Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth_factor); - } - smooth_rcs = std::fmax(smooth_rcs / 10.f, 1.0f); - angle -= last_punch_angle * 2.f * smooth_rcs; - } // --- Smooth --- if (Config::aimbot_smooth > 0.f) { QAngle_t cur = *viewangles; @@ -363,12 +366,10 @@ void Aimbot() { const uint32_t hash = HASH(_class->szName); if (hash == HASH("C_CSPlayerPawn")) { C_CSPlayerPawn* pawn = (C_CSPlayerPawn*)Entity; - if (pawn->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle()) - continue; - if (pawn->getHealth() <= 0) - continue; - if (Config::team_check && pawn->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) - continue; + if (!pawn) continue; + if (pawn->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle()) continue; + if (pawn->getHealth() <= 0) continue; + if (Config::team_check && pawn->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) continue; Vector_t target_pos = GetEntityEyePos(pawn);//GetAimbotTargetPos(pawn, lep); QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); angle.x *= -1.f; @@ -387,26 +388,139 @@ void Aimbot() { } prevAimbotState = aimbotActive; - - //if (Config::shooterAfterAim) { - // if (g_ShowMenu) return; - // C_CSPlayerPawn* lp = H::oGetLocalPlayer(0); - // bool onEnemy = false; - // if (lp) { - // int crosshairIdx = *(int*)((uintptr_t)lp + 0x1458); // m_iIDEntIndex - // if (crosshairIdx > 0) { - // auto target = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(crosshairIdx); - // if (target && target->getHealth() > 0 && (!Config::team_check || target->getTeam() != lp->getTeam())) - // onEnemy = true; - // } - // } - // // Если врага нет под прицелом — всегда блокируем ЛКМ - // if (!onEnemy && (GetAsyncKeyState(VK_LBUTTON) & 0x8000)) { - // INPUT input = { 0 }; - // input.type = INPUT_MOUSE; - // input.mi.dwFlags = MOUSEEVENTF_LEFTUP; - // SendInput(1, &input, sizeof(INPUT)); - // } - // // return; // Не делаем return, чтобы аимбот работал всегда - //} +} + +void SilentAimbot(CUserCmd* pCmd) { + if (!Config::silent_aim || !pCmd) return; + static C_CSPlayerPawn* lockedTarget = nullptr; + static bool prevSilentState = false; + static QAngle_t last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; + static int shotCount = 0; + C_CSPlayerPawn* lp = H::oGetLocalPlayer(0); + if (!lp || !lp->handle().valid() || lp->getHealth() <= 0) return; + Vector_t lep = GetEntityEyePos(lp); + QAngle_t* cur = (QAngle_t*)(modules.getModule("client") + 0x1A78650); + if (!cur) return; + bool silentActive = Config::always_on_silent_aim ? true : (GetAsyncKeyState(Config::silent_aim_key) & 0x8000); + // --- shooterAfterAim + triggerbot_key для сайлент аимбота --- + if (Config::silent_shooterAfterAim && (GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_key) & 0x8000)) { + silentActive = true; + } + int shotsFired = lp ? lp->getShotsFired() : 0; + shotCount = shotsFired; + + // Если кнопка только что нажата — ищем новую цель + if (silentActive && !prevSilentState) { + int nMaxHighestEntity = I::GameEntity->Instance->GetHighestEntityIndex(); + float bestFov = Config::aimbot_fov; + C_CSPlayerPawn* bestTarget = nullptr; + QAngle_t bestAngle = { 0, 0, 0 }; + for (int i = 1; i <= nMaxHighestEntity; i++) { + auto Entity = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(i); + if (!Entity) continue; + if (!Entity->handle().valid()) continue; + SchemaClassInfoData_t* _class = nullptr; + Entity->dump_class_info(&_class); + if (!_class) continue; + const uint32_t hash = HASH(_class->szName); + if (hash == HASH("C_CSPlayerPawn")) { + C_CSPlayerPawn* pawn = (C_CSPlayerPawn*)Entity; + if (!pawn) continue; + if (pawn->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle()) continue; + if (pawn->getHealth() <= 0) continue; + if (Config::team_check && pawn->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) continue; + Vector_t target_pos = GetAimbotTargetPos(pawn, lep, *cur); + QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); + angle.x *= -1.f; + angle.y += 180.f; + float fov = GetFov(*cur, angle); + if (!std::isfinite(fov) || fov > bestFov) continue; + bestFov = fov; + bestTarget = pawn; + bestAngle = angle; + } + } + lockedTarget = bestTarget; + last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; + } + + // Если кнопка зажата, цели нет — постоянный поиск цели + if (silentActive && !lockedTarget) { + int nMaxHighestEntity = I::GameEntity->Instance->GetHighestEntityIndex(); + float bestFov = Config::aimbot_fov; + C_CSPlayerPawn* bestTarget = nullptr; + QAngle_t bestAngle = { 0, 0, 0 }; + for (int i = 1; i <= nMaxHighestEntity; i++) { + auto Entity = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(i); + if (!Entity) continue; + if (!Entity->handle().valid()) continue; + SchemaClassInfoData_t* _class = nullptr; + Entity->dump_class_info(&_class); + if (!_class) continue; + const uint32_t hash = HASH(_class->szName); + if (hash == HASH("C_CSPlayerPawn")) { + C_CSPlayerPawn* pawn = (C_CSPlayerPawn*)Entity; + if (!pawn) continue; + if (pawn->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle()) continue; + if (pawn->getHealth() <= 0) continue; + if (Config::team_check && pawn->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) continue; + Vector_t target_pos = GetAimbotTargetPos(pawn, lep, *cur); + QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); + angle.x *= -1.f; + angle.y += 180.f; + float fov = GetFov(*cur, angle); + if (!std::isfinite(fov) || fov > bestFov) continue; + bestFov = fov; + bestTarget = pawn; + bestAngle = angle; + } + } + lockedTarget = bestTarget; + last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; + } + + // Если кнопка отпущена — сбрасываем захват + if (!silentActive) { + lockedTarget = nullptr; + last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; + } + + // Если есть захваченная цель и кнопка удерживается + if (silentActive && lockedTarget) { + // Проверяем, что цель всё ещё валидна + if (!lp || !lp->handle().valid() || lp->getHealth() <= 0 || + lockedTarget->get_entity_by_handle() == lp->get_entity_by_handle() || + lockedTarget->getHealth() <= 0 || + !lockedTarget->handle().valid() || + (Config::team_check && lockedTarget->getTeam() == lp->getTeam())) { + lockedTarget = nullptr; + last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; + prevSilentState = silentActive; + return; + } + Vector_t target_pos = GetAimbotTargetPos(lockedTarget, lep, *cur); + QAngle_t angle = CalcAngles(target_pos, lep); + angle.x *= -1.f; + angle.y += 180.f; + //QAngle_t cur_punch_angle = *(QAngle_t*)((uintptr_t)lp + SchemaFinder::Get(hash_32_fnv1a_const("C_CSPlayerPawn->m_aimPunchAngle"))); + //// --- RCS --- + //bool rcsActive = (Config::rcs || Config::silent_shooterAfterAim) && (shotCount > Config::rcsActivationShots); + //if (rcsActive && shotCount > 1) { + // angle -= cur_punch_angle * 2.f; + // last_punch_angle = cur_punch_angle; + //} else { + // last_punch_angle = {0,0,0}; + //} + //angle.z = 0.f; + //angle = angle.Normalize(); + // --- Smooth --- + if (Config::silent_aim_smooth > 0.f) { + QAngle_t delta = (angle - *cur).Normalize(); + float smooth = Config::silent_aim_smooth; + angle = *cur + delta * (1.f / smooth); + angle = angle.Normalize(); + } + *cur = angle; + } + prevSilentState = silentActive; } diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.h index 1dadf42..2d4fff9 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/aim/aim.h @@ -1,3 +1,6 @@ #pragma once +#include "CUserCmd.h" + void Aimbot(); +void SilentAimbot(CUserCmd* pCmd); diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/spectators/spectators.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/spectators/spectators.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fa8e491 --- /dev/null +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/spectators/spectators.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +#include "spectators.h" +#include "../../interfaces/interfaces.h" +#include "../../hooks/hooks.h" +#include "../../../../external/imgui/imgui.h" +#include "../../../cs2/entity/CCSPlayerController/CCSPlayerController.h" +#include "../visuals/visuals.h" +#include "../../menu/hud.h" +#include +#include +#include "../../players/players.h" +#include "../../../cs2/entity/C_CSPlayerPawn/C_CSPlayerPawn.h" + +namespace Spectators { + + bool IsPlayerSpectatingYou(CCSPlayerController* controller, C_CSPlayerPawn* localPlayer) { + if (!controller || !localPlayer) return false; + if (controller->IsLocalPlayer()) return false; + + uintptr_t pObserverServices = *reinterpret_cast( + reinterpret_cast(controller) + + SchemaFinder::Get(hash_32_fnv1a_const("CCSPlayerController->m_pObserverServices")) + ); + if (!pObserverServices) return false; + + CBaseHandle hObserverTarget = *reinterpret_cast( + pObserverServices + + SchemaFinder::Get(hash_32_fnv1a_const("CPlayer_ObserverServices->m_hObserverTarget")) + ); + if (!hObserverTarget.valid()) return false; + + g_DebugString = "pObserverServices"; + + // Получаем указатель на pawn, за которым наблюдают + auto* observerPawn = reinterpret_cast( + I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(hObserverTarget.index()) + ); + if (!observerPawn) return false; + + g_DebugString = "pObserverServices"; + + g_DebugString = observerPawn->handle().index() + " " + localPlayer->handle().index(); + // Сравниваем указатели + return observerPawn->handle().index() == localPlayer->handle().index(); + } + + std::vector GetSpectators() { + std::vector spectators; + if (!H::oGetLocalPlayer || !I::GameEntity || !I::GameEntity->Instance) { + g_DebugString = "[Spectators] Не инициализированы (GetSpectators): " + + std::string(!H::oGetLocalPlayer ? "oGetLocalPlayer " : "") + + std::string(!I::GameEntity ? "GameEntity " : "") + + std::string((I::GameEntity && !I::GameEntity->Instance) ? "GameEntity->Instance " : ""); + return spectators; + } + C_CSPlayerPawn* localPlayer = H::oGetLocalPlayer(0); + if (!localPlayer) { + g_DebugString = "[Spectators] localPlayer nullptr (GetSpectators)"; + return spectators; + } + + int maxIdx = I::GameEntity->Instance->GetHighestEntityIndex(); + + for (int i = 1; i <= maxIdx; ++i) { + auto* entity = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(i); + if (!entity) continue; + SchemaClassInfoData_t* classInfo = nullptr; + entity->dump_class_info(&classInfo); + if (!classInfo || strcmp(classInfo->szName, "CCSPlayerController") != 0) + continue; + auto* controller = reinterpret_cast(entity); + if (!controller) continue; + if (!controller->m_hPawn().valid()) continue; + + if (!IsPlayerSpectatingYou(controller, localPlayer)) + continue; + + const char* nameStr = controller->m_sSanitizedPlayerName(); + std::string name = (nameStr && strlen(nameStr) > 0) ? nameStr : "Unknown"; + + spectators.emplace_back(name, false, 0, 0); + } + return spectators; + } + + void RenderPlayersDebugList() { + ImGui::Begin("Players Debug List", nullptr, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize); + if (!H::oGetLocalPlayer) { + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 0, 0, 1), "[Spectators] oGetLocalPlayer не инициализирован"); + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + if (!I::GameEntity) { + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 0, 0, 1), "[Spectators] GameEntity не инициализирован"); + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + if (!I::GameEntity->Instance) { + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 0, 0, 1), "[Spectators] GameEntity->Instance не инициализирован"); + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + //if (!g_DebugString.empty()) { + // ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 0, 0, 1), "%s", g_DebugString.c_str()); + // ImGui::End(); + // return; + //} + ImGui::Text("Name | Team | Alive | Spectating You"); + ImGui::Separator(); + auto spectators = GetSpectators(); + for (const auto& spectator : spectators) { + ImGui::Text("%-20s | %4d | %5s | %s", + spectator.name.c_str(), + spectator.team, + spectator.isAlive ? "yes" : "no", + "yes"); // Все из GetSpectators наблюдают за вами + } + ImGui::End(); + } + +} // namespace Spectators \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/spectators/spectators.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/spectators/spectators.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f23dc5a --- /dev/null +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/spectators/spectators.h @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +#pragma once +#include "../../../../external/imgui/imgui.h" +#include "../../../cs2/entity/C_CSPlayerPawn/C_CSPlayerPawn.h" +#include "../../../cs2/entity/C_BaseEntity/C_BaseEntity.h" +#include "../../config/config.h" +#include "../../../cs2/entity/CCSPlayerController/CCSPlayerController.h" + +struct SpectatorInfo { + std::string name; + bool isLocalPlayer; + int team; + bool isAlive; + + SpectatorInfo(const std::string& n, bool local, int t, bool alive) + : name(n), isLocalPlayer(local), team(t), isAlive(alive) {} +}; + +namespace Spectators { + void RenderSpectatorList(); + std::vector GetSpectators(); + bool IsPlayerSpectatingYou(CCSPlayerController* controller, C_CSPlayerPawn* localPlayer); + void RenderPlayersDebugList(); +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/triggerbot/triggerbot.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/triggerbot/triggerbot.cpp index 3a867ea..ba83411 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/triggerbot/triggerbot.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/triggerbot/triggerbot.cpp @@ -32,67 +32,137 @@ void SimulateLMBUp() { SendInput(1, &input, sizeof(INPUT)); } +// Управление удержанием ЛКМ +void SetLMBHeld(bool held) { + static bool lmbHeld = false; + if (held && !lmbHeld) { + SimulateLMBDown(); + lmbHeld = true; + } else if (!held && lmbHeld) { + SimulateLMBUp(); + lmbHeld = false; + } +} + static DWORD lastShotTime = 0; void Triggerbot() { static DWORD lastShotTime = 0; - static bool lmbHeld = false; static bool firstShot = true; + // --- Альтернативная кнопка: триггербот по наведению на врага с задержкой --- + if (Config::triggerbot_alt_key && (GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_alt_key) & 0x8000)) { + C_CSPlayerPawn* lp = H::oGetLocalPlayer(0); + if (!lp || lp->getHealth() <= 0) { SetLMBHeld(false); return; } + int crosshairIdx = *(int*)((uintptr_t)lp + 0x1458); // m_iIDEntIndex + if (crosshairIdx <= 0) { SetLMBHeld(false); return; } + auto target = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(crosshairIdx); + if (!target) { SetLMBHeld(false); return; } + if (target->getHealth() <= 0) { SetLMBHeld(false); return; } + if (Config::team_check && target->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) { SetLMBHeld(false); return; } + DWORD64 now = GetTickCount64(); + static DWORD64 lastAltShotTime = 0; + if (now - lastAltShotTime < static_cast(Config::triggerbot_delay)) { + SetLMBHeld(false); + return; + } + SimulateLMBClick(); + lastAltShotTime = now; + return; + } if (!Config::triggerbot) return; - if (!Config::always_on_triggerbot && Config::triggerbot_key && !(GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_key) & 0x8000)) + if (!Config::always_on_triggerbot && Config::triggerbot_key && !(GetAsyncKeyState(Config::triggerbot_key) & 0x8000)) { + SetLMBHeld(false); + firstShot = true; return; + } if (GetAsyncKeyState(VK_LBUTTON) & 0x8000) { - if (lmbHeld) { - SimulateLMBUp(); - lmbHeld = false; - } + SetLMBHeld(false); firstShot = true; return; } C_CSPlayerPawn* lp = H::oGetLocalPlayer(0); - if (!lp || lp->getHealth() <= 0) { firstShot = true; return; } + if (!lp || lp->getHealth() <= 0) { firstShot = true; SetLMBHeld(false); return; } int crosshairIdx = *(int*)((uintptr_t)lp + 0x1458); // m_iIDEntIndex - //g_DebugString = "debug: " + std::to_string(crosshairIdx); - if (crosshairIdx <= 0) { - if (lmbHeld) { - SimulateLMBUp(); - lmbHeld = false; + int shotsFired = lp ? lp->getShotsFired() : 0; + DWORD64 now = GetTickCount64(); + if (Config::shooterAfterAim) { + if (shotsFired > 0) { + // После первого выстрела просто удерживаем ЛКМ, игнорируя все условия + SetLMBHeld(true); + return; + } else { + // До первого выстрела — обычная логика триггербота + if (crosshairIdx <= 0) { + SetLMBHeld(false); + firstShot = true; + return; + } + auto target = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(crosshairIdx); + if (!target) { + SetLMBHeld(false); + firstShot = true; + return; + } + if (target->getHealth() <= 0) { + SetLMBHeld(false); + firstShot = true; + return; + } + if (Config::team_check && target->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) { + SetLMBHeld(false); + firstShot = true; + return; + } + if (!Config::triggerbot_hold_lmb) { + if (now - lastShotTime < static_cast(Config::triggerbot_delay)) { + SetLMBHeld(false); + firstShot = true; + return; + } + } + if (Config::triggerbot_hold_lmb) { + if (firstShot) { + SimulateLMBClick(); + firstShot = false; + lastShotTime = now; + return; + } else { + SetLMBHeld(true); + } + lastShotTime = now; + return; + } + SimulateLMBClick(); + lastShotTime = now; + firstShot = true; + return; } + } + // --- Обычная логика триггербота, если shooterAfterAim выключен --- + if (crosshairIdx <= 0) { + SetLMBHeld(false); firstShot = true; return; } auto target = I::GameEntity->Instance->Get(crosshairIdx); if (!target) { - if (lmbHeld) { - SimulateLMBUp(); - lmbHeld = false; - } + SetLMBHeld(false); firstShot = true; return; } if (target->getHealth() <= 0) { - if (lmbHeld) { - SimulateLMBUp(); - lmbHeld = false; - } + SetLMBHeld(false); firstShot = true; return; } if (Config::team_check && target->getTeam() == lp->getTeam()) { - if (lmbHeld) { - SimulateLMBUp(); - lmbHeld = false; - } + SetLMBHeld(false); firstShot = true; return; } - DWORD64 now = GetTickCount64(); if (!Config::triggerbot_hold_lmb) { if (now - lastShotTime < static_cast(Config::triggerbot_delay)) { - if (lmbHeld) { - SimulateLMBUp(); - lmbHeld = false; - } + SetLMBHeld(false); firstShot = true; return; } @@ -103,9 +173,8 @@ void Triggerbot() { firstShot = false; lastShotTime = now; return; - } else if (!lmbHeld) { - SimulateLMBDown(); - lmbHeld = true; + } else { + SetLMBHeld(true); } lastShotTime = now; return; diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/visuals/visuals.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/visuals/visuals.cpp index 5eafb26..09c7b40 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/visuals/visuals.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/features/visuals/visuals.cpp @@ -40,20 +40,16 @@ void Esp::cache() if (!entityInfo) continue; if (strcmp(entityInfo->szName, "C_CSPlayerPawn") == 0) { - bool exists = std::any_of(Players::pawns.begin(), Players::pawns.end(), - [&](const C_CSPlayerPawn& pawn) { return pawn.getAddress() == entityPointer; }); - if (!exists) { - Players::pawns.emplace_back(entityPointer); + if (!Players::pawns.contains(entityPointer)) { + Players::pawns.insert(entityPointer); std::cout << "Added pawn " << Players::pawns.size() << "\n"; } continue; } if (strcmp(entityInfo->szName, "CCSPlayerController") == 0) { - bool exists = std::any_of(Players::controllers.begin(), Players::controllers.end(), - [&](const CCSPlayerController& controller) { return controller.getAddress() == entityPointer; }); - if (!exists) { - Players::controllers.emplace_back(entityPointer); + if (!Players::controllers.contains(entityPointer)) { + Players::controllers.insert(entityPointer); } continue; } diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.cpp index a3797f8..79cb2b8 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.cpp @@ -27,9 +27,6 @@ void __fastcall H::hkFrameStageNotify(void* a1, int stage) // frame_render_stage | 9 if (stage == 9 && oGetLocalPlayer(0)) { Esp::cache(); - - Aimbot(); - Triggerbot(); // <--- вызов триггербота } } @@ -41,6 +38,13 @@ void* __fastcall H::hkLevelInit(void* pClientModeShared, const char* szNewMap) { return LevelInit.GetOriginal()(pClientModeShared, szNewMap); } +bool __fastcall H::hkCreateMove(void* pInput, int nSlot, void* pCmd) { + //Aimbot(); + SilentAimbot(reinterpret_cast(pCmd)); + Triggerbot(); + return CreateMove.GetOriginal()(pInput, nSlot, pCmd); +} + void H::Hooks::init() { oGetWeaponData = *reinterpret_cast(M::patternScan("client", ("48 8B 81 ? ? ? ? 85 D2 78 ? 48 83 FA ? 73 ? F3 0F 10 84 90 ? ? ? ? C3 F3 0F 10 80 ? ? ? ? C3 CC CC CC CC")) + 0x3); @@ -53,6 +57,7 @@ void H::Hooks::init() { GetRenderFov.Add((void*)M::getAbsoluteAddress(M::patternScan("client", "E8 ? ? ? ? F3 0F 11 45 00 48 8B 5C 24 40"), 1), &hkGetRenderFov); LevelInit.Add((void*)M::getAbsoluteAddress(M::patternScan("client", "E8 ? ? ? ? C6 83 ? ? ? ? ? C6 83"), 1), &hkLevelInit); RenderFlashBangOverlay.Add((void*)M::patternScan("client", ("85 D2 0F 88 ? ? ? ? 55 56 41 55")), &hkRenderFlashbangOverlay); + CreateMove.Add((void*)M::patternScan("client", ("48 8B C4 4C 89 40 18 48 89 48 08 55 53 57 41 54 48 8D A8")), &hkCreateMove); MH_EnableHook(MH_ALL_HOOKS); } diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.h index f1be6d0..936f7b5 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/hooks/hooks.h @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ namespace H { void* __fastcall hkLevelInit(void* pClientModeShared, const char* szNewMap); void __fastcall hkChamsObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2); void __fastcall hkRenderFlashbangOverlay(void* a1, void* a2, void* a3, void* a4, void* a5); + bool __fastcall hkCreateMove(void* pInput, int nSlot, void* pCmd); inline float g_flActiveFov; float hkGetRenderFov(void* rcx); @@ -25,6 +26,7 @@ namespace H { inline CInlineHookObj GetRenderFov = { }; inline CInlineHookObj LevelInit = { }; inline CInlineHookObj RenderFlashBangOverlay = { }; + inline CInlineHookObj CreateMove = { }; // inline hooks inline int oGetWeaponData; diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.cpp index 098cf12..c184bac 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.cpp @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ #include #include #include +#include "../features/spectators/spectators.h" std::string g_DebugString; @@ -79,4 +80,16 @@ void Hud::render() { ImU32 debugColor = IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255); // жёлтый ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList()->AddText(debugPos, debugColor, g_DebugString.c_str()); } + + // Отображение списка наблюдателей + //Spectators::RenderSpectatorList(); + //Spectators::RenderPlayersDebugList(); + + + // Тестовая информация для отладки + //static int testCounter = 0; + //testCounter++; + //if (testCounter % 60 == 0) { // Каждую секунду (при 60 FPS) + // g_DebugString = "Spectator test: " + std::to_string(Spectators::GetSpectators().size()) + " players found"; + //} } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.h index a5af872..8eac84b 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/hud.h @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ #pragma once #include +#include "../features/spectators/spectators.h" extern std::string g_DebugString; class Hud { diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/menu.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/menu.cpp index a6d5fa0..e43dd57 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/menu.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/menu/menu.cpp @@ -131,10 +131,10 @@ void Menu::render() { ImGui::Separator(); - const char* tabNames[] = { "Aim", "Visuals", "Misc", "Config" }; + const char* tabNames[] = { "Aim", "Silent Aim", "Visuals", "Misc", "Config" }; if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MainTabBar", ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip)) { - for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) { + for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) { if (ImGui::BeginTabItem(tabNames[i])) { activeTab = i; ImGui::EndTabItem(); @@ -164,6 +164,7 @@ void Menu::render() { ImGui::Checkbox("Team Check", &Config::team_check); ImGui::Checkbox("Aimbot on LMB", &Config::aimbot_on_lmb); ImGui::SliderFloat("Smooth", &Config::aimbot_smooth, 0.f, 10.f, "%.2f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("Aimbot FOV", &Config::aimbot_fov, 1.f, 180.f, "%1.0f"); ImGui::Checkbox("Dynamic Smooth", &Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth); if (Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth) { ImGui::SliderFloat("Dynamic Smooth Factor", &Config::aimbot_dynamic_smooth_factor, 0.1f, 25.0f, "%.2f"); @@ -173,6 +174,7 @@ void Menu::render() { ImGui::ColorEdit4("Circle Color##FovColor", (float*)&Config::fovCircleColor); } ImGui::Checkbox("Recoil Control", &Config::rcs); + ImGui::SliderInt("RCS Activation Shots", &Config::rcsActivationShots, 0, 10); ImGui::EndChild(); ImGui::SameLine(); @@ -186,12 +188,35 @@ void Menu::render() { ImGui::Text("Key:"); ImGui::SameLine(); keybind.menuButton(Config::triggerbot_key); + ImGui::Text("Alt Key:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + keybind.menuButton(Config::triggerbot_alt_key); ImGui::SliderFloat("Delay (ms)", &Config::triggerbot_delay, 0.0f, 500.0f, "%.0f"); ImGui::EndChild(); } break; - case 1: + case 1: // Silent Aim + { + ImGui::BeginChild("SilentAimLeft", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f - 5, 0), true); + ImGui::Text("Silent Aim"); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Checkbox("Enable##SilentAim", &Config::silent_aim); + const char* boneNames[] = { "Head", "Neck", "Body", "Nearest" }; + ImGui::Combo("Silent Aim Bone", &Config::silent_aim_bone, boneNames, IM_ARRAYSIZE(boneNames)); + ImGui::Text("Key:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + keybind.menuButton(Config::silent_aim_key); + ImGui::Checkbox("Always On##SilentAim", &Config::always_on_silent_aim); + ImGui::Checkbox("Shooter After Aim##Silent", &Config::silent_shooterAfterAim); // Новый чекбокс + ImGui::SliderFloat("Smooth##SilentAim", &Config::silent_aim_smooth_slider, 0.f, 10.f, "%.2f"); + Config::silent_aim_smooth = Config::silent_aim_smooth_slider; // Применяем значение ползунка к логике + ImGui::SliderFloat("Silent Aim FOV", &Config::silent_aim_fov, 1.f, 180.f, "%1.0f"); + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + break; + + case 2: { ImGui::BeginChild("VisualsLeft", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f - 5, 0), true); ImGui::Text("Player ESP"); @@ -208,6 +233,17 @@ void Menu::render() { ImGui::Checkbox("Health Bar", &Config::showHealth); ImGui::Checkbox("Name Tags", &Config::showNameTags); + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImGui::Text("Spectators"); + ImGui::Separator(); + + ImGui::Checkbox("Show Spectators", &Config::showSpectators); + if (Config::showSpectators) { + ImGui::ColorEdit4("Spectator Text Color", (float*)&Config::spectatorListColor); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("Spectator Background Color", (float*)&Config::spectatorListBgColor); + ImGui::SliderFloat("Spectator List Opacity", &Config::spectatorListOpacity, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); + } + ImGui::Spacing(); ImGui::Text("World"); ImGui::Separator(); @@ -263,7 +299,7 @@ void Menu::render() { } break; - case 2: + case 3: { ImGui::BeginChild("MiscLeft", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f - 5, 0), true); ImGui::Text("Movement"); @@ -284,7 +320,7 @@ void Menu::render() { } break; - case 3: + case 4: { ImGui::BeginChild("ConfigLeft", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f - 5, 0), true); ImGui::Text("General"); diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.cpp b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.cpp index 6f850a6..a75f253 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.cpp +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.cpp @@ -1,5 +1,10 @@ #include "players.h" #include "../offsets/offsets.h" -//@not used anymore -//std::vector Players::controllers; -//std::vector Players::pawns; \ No newline at end of file +#include +std::unordered_set pawns; +std::unordered_set controllers; + +void ClearAll() { + pawns.clear(); + controllers.clear(); +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.h b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.h index 76b0536..f102df2 100644 --- a/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.h +++ b/TempleWare-CS2/source/templeware/players/players.h @@ -5,4 +5,10 @@ #include #include -//@not used anymore \ No newline at end of file +#include +//@not used anymore + +extern std::unordered_set pawns; +extern std::unordered_set controllers; + +void ClearAll(); \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.clang-format b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.clang-format new file mode 100644 index 0000000..984335c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.clang-format @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +# created by asphyxia for clang-format 15.0.2 version # +# alphabetically aranged (except global options) # +# https://clang.llvm.org/docs/ClangFormatStyleOptions.html # + +# global options +DisableFormat: false +BasedOnStyle: Microsoft +Language: Cpp +Standard: c++20 + +# @todo: remove variables that equal defaults + +AccessModifierOffset: -4 +AlignAfterOpenBracket: DontAlign # @test: use false # @note: when set to 'DontAlign', dependent on 'ContinuationIndentWidth' +AlignArrayOfStructures: None +AlignConsecutiveAssignments: None +AlignConsecutiveBitFields: None +AlignConsecutiveDeclarations: None +AlignConsecutiveMacros: None +AlignEscapedNewlines: Left +AlignOperands: DontAlign # @test: use false # @note: when set to 'DontAlign', dependent on 'ContinuationIndentWidth'; when set to 'AlignAfterOperator', dependent on 'BreakBeforeBinaryOperators' +AlignTrailingComments: false +AllowAllArgumentsOnNextLine: false # @note: ignores 'BinPackArguments' +AllowAllParametersOfDeclarationOnNextLine: false # @note: ignores 'BinPackArguments' +AllowShortBlocksOnASingleLine: Empty +AllowShortCaseLabelsOnASingleLine: false +AllowShortEnumsOnASingleLine: false +AllowShortFunctionsOnASingleLine: Empty +AllowShortIfStatementsOnASingleLine: Never +AllowShortLambdasOnASingleLine: Inline +AllowShortLoopsOnASingleLine: false +AlwaysBreakAfterReturnType: None # @note: when set to 'None', dependent on 'PenaltyReturnTypeOnItsOwnLine' +AlwaysBreakBeforeMultilineStrings: false # @note: if true, dependent on 'ContinuationIndentWidth' +#AlwaysBreakTemplateDeclarations: Yes # @test: to make it work correctly with 'RequiresClausePosition' leave it unspecified # @note: when set to 'No', dependent on 'PenaltyBreakTemplateDeclaration' +#AttributeMacros: # @todo: tweak +BinPackArguments: true +BinPackParameters: true +BitFieldColonSpacing: Both +BraceWrapping: + AfterCaseLabel: true + AfterControlStatement: Always + AfterEnum: true + AfterFunction: true + AfterNamespace: true + AfterStruct: true + AfterUnion: true + AfterExternBlock: true + BeforeCatch: true + BeforeElse: true + BeforeLambdaBody: true + BeforeWhile: false + IndentBraces: false + SplitEmptyFunction: false # @note: dependent on 'AfterFunction' and 'AllowShortFunctionsOnASingleLine' + SplitEmptyRecord: false # @note: dependent on 'AfterClass' + SplitEmptyNamespace: true # @note: dependent on 'AfterNamespace' +#BreakAfterAttributes: Never # @todo: clan-format 16 +#BreakArrays: false # @todo: clang-format 16 # @note: supported only for JSON +BreakBeforeBinaryOperators: None +BreakBeforeBraces: Custom # @note: when set to 'Custom', dependent on 'BraceWrapping' +BreakBeforeConceptDeclarations: Never +BreakBeforeTernaryOperators: false +BreakConstructorInitializers: AfterColon +#BreakInheritanceList: AfterComma # @note: to disable this, only leaving it unspecified works +BreakStringLiterals: false +ColumnLimit: 0 +CompactNamespaces: false # @test: what if i gonna use nested namespaces like Foo::Bar? +#ConstructorInitializerIndentWidth: 0 # @test: tweak +ContinuationIndentWidth: 0 +Cpp11BracedListStyle: false +DerivePointerAlignment: false # @note: if true, 'PointerAlignment' is only used as a fallback if none can be derived +EmptyLineAfterAccessModifier: Never # @note: when set to 'Leave' or 'Always', dependent on 'MaxEmptyLinesToKeep' +EmptyLineBeforeAccessModifier: LogicalBlock +FixNamespaceComments: false # @note: if true, dependent on 'ShortNamespaceLines' +IncludeBlocks: Regroup # @note: when set to 'Regroup', dependent on 'IncludeCategories' +#IncludeCategories: # @todo: tweak +#IncludeIsMainRegex: # @todo: tweak +IndentAccessModifiers: false # @note: if false, dependent on 'AccessModifierOffset'; if true, ignores 'AccessModifierOffset' +IndentCaseBlocks: false +IndentCaseLabels: false +IndentExternBlock: AfterExternBlock # @note: when set to 'AfterExternBlock', dependent on 'BraceWrapping.AfterExternBlock' +IndentGotoLabels: true +IndentPPDirectives: None +IndentRequiresClause: false # @note: if true, dependent on 'RequiresClausePosition' +IndentWidth: 4 +IndentWrappedFunctionNames: true +InsertBraces: false +InsertTrailingCommas: None # @note: when set to 'Wrapped', conflicts with 'BinPackArguments' +KeepEmptyLinesAtTheStartOfBlocks: false +LambdaBodyIndentation: Signature +#LineEnding: LF # @todo: clang-format 16 +MaxEmptyLinesToKeep: 1 +NamespaceIndentation: All +PPIndentWidth: -1 # @note: when set to '-1', dependent on 'IndentWidth' +PackConstructorInitializers: NextLine # @todo: after clang-format 16 set this to 'NextLineOnly' +# @test: tweak +# --- +PenaltyBreakAssignment: 0 +PenaltyBreakBeforeFirstCallParameter: 0 +PenaltyBreakComment: 0 +PenaltyBreakFirstLessLess: 0 +PenaltyBreakOpenParenthesis: 0 +PenaltyBreakString: 0 +PenaltyBreakTemplateDeclaration: 0 +PenaltyExcessCharacter: 0 +PenaltyIndentedWhitespace: 0 +PenaltyReturnTypeOnItsOwnLine: 0 +# --- +PointerAlignment: Left +QualifierAlignment: Custom # @note: when set to 'Custom', dependent on 'QualifierOrder'; warning! setting this option to something other than 'Leave' could lead to incorrect code formatting +QualifierOrder: ['inline', 'static', 'constexpr', 'const', 'volatile', 'type', 'restrict'] +ReferenceAlignment: Pointer # @note: when set to 'Pointer', dependent on 'PointerAlignment' +ReflowComments: false +#RemoveSemicolon: false # @todo: clang-format 16 # @note: warning! setting this option to true could lead to incorrect code formatting +RequiresClausePosition: WithPreceding # @test: this doesn't seem to work correctly when 'AlwaysBreakTemplateDeclarations' is set +#RequiresExpressionIndentation: OuterScope # @todo: clang-format 16 +SeparateDefinitionBlocks: Always # @todo: use 'Leave'? +ShortNamespaceLines: 0 +SortIncludes: Never # @test: CaseInsensitive +SortUsingDeclarations: true # @todo: after clang-format 16 change to 'Lexicographic' +SpaceAfterCStyleCast: false +SpaceAfterLogicalNot: false +SpaceAfterTemplateKeyword: true +SpaceAroundPointerQualifiers: Default # @note: when set to 'Default', dependent on 'PointerAlignment' +SpaceBeforeAssignmentOperators: true +SpaceBeforeCaseColon: false +SpaceBeforeCpp11BracedList: false +SpaceBeforeCtorInitializerColon: true +SpaceBeforeInheritanceColon: true +SpaceBeforeParens: Custom # @note: when set to 'Custom', dependent on 'SpaceBeforeParensOptions' +SpaceBeforeParensOptions: + AfterControlStatements: true + AfterForeachMacros: false + AfterFunctionDeclarationName: false + AfterIfMacros: false + AfterOverloadedOperator: false + AfterRequiresInClause: true + AfterRequiresInExpression: false + BeforeNonEmptyParentheses: false +SpaceBeforeRangeBasedForLoopColon: true +SpaceBeforeSquareBrackets: false +SpaceInEmptyBlock: true # @todo: this doesn't work for braced initilization for some reason +SpaceInEmptyParentheses: false +SpacesBeforeTrailingComments: 1 # @test: tweak +SpacesInAngles: Never +SpacesInCStyleCastParentheses: false +SpacesInConditionalStatement: false +SpacesInContainerLiterals: true +SpacesInLineCommentPrefix: # @note: dependent on 'ReflowComments' + Minimum: 1 + Maximum: -1 +SpacesInParentheses: false +SpacesInSquareBrackets: false +#TabWidth: # @todo: tweak or leave it as it is +UseCRLF: false # @todo: remove after clang-format 16 +UseTab: Always # @todo: tweak +#WhitespaceSensitiveMacros: # @todo: tweak diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.editorconfig b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.editorconfig new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2d59c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.editorconfig @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +root = true + +[*] +# Default parameters +indent_style = tab +indent_size = 4 +end_of_line = lf +trim_trailing_whitespace = true +insert_final_newline = true + +[*.{c,cc,cpp,cppm,cxx,h,hh,hpp,hxx,inl,ipp,ixx,tlh,tli,hlsl,hlsli}] + +# Code style parameters Visual C++ +cpp_generate_documentation_comments = doxygen_triple_slash + +# Formatting parameters Visual C++ +cpp_indent_braces = false +cpp_indent_multi_line_relative_to = innermost_parenthesis +cpp_indent_within_parentheses = indent +cpp_indent_preserve_within_parentheses = true +cpp_indent_case_contents = true +cpp_indent_case_labels = false +cpp_indent_case_contents_when_block = false +cpp_indent_lambda_braces_when_parameter = true +cpp_indent_goto_labels = one_left +cpp_indent_preprocessor = leftmost_column +cpp_indent_access_specifiers = false +cpp_indent_namespace_contents = true +cpp_indent_preserve_comments = false +cpp_new_line_before_open_brace_namespace = new_line +cpp_new_line_before_open_brace_type = new_line +cpp_new_line_before_open_brace_function = new_line +cpp_new_line_before_open_brace_block = new_line +cpp_new_line_before_open_brace_lambda = ignore +cpp_new_line_scope_braces_on_separate_lines = true +cpp_new_line_close_brace_same_line_empty_type = true +cpp_new_line_close_brace_same_line_empty_function = true +cpp_new_line_before_catch = true +cpp_new_line_before_else = true +cpp_new_line_before_while_in_do_while = false +cpp_space_before_function_open_parenthesis = remove +cpp_space_within_parameter_list_parentheses = false +cpp_space_between_empty_parameter_list_parentheses = false +cpp_space_after_keywords_in_control_flow_statements = true +cpp_space_within_control_flow_statement_parentheses = false +cpp_space_before_lambda_open_parenthesis = false +cpp_space_within_cast_parentheses = false +cpp_space_after_cast_close_parenthesis = false +cpp_space_within_expression_parentheses = false +cpp_space_before_block_open_brace = true +cpp_space_between_empty_braces = true +cpp_space_before_initializer_list_open_brace = false +cpp_space_within_initializer_list_braces = true +cpp_space_preserve_in_initializer_list = true +cpp_space_before_open_square_bracket = false +cpp_space_within_square_brackets = false +cpp_space_before_empty_square_brackets = false +cpp_space_between_empty_square_brackets = true +cpp_space_group_square_brackets = true +cpp_space_within_lambda_brackets = false +cpp_space_between_empty_lambda_brackets = true +cpp_space_before_comma = false +cpp_space_after_comma = true +cpp_space_remove_around_member_operators = true +cpp_space_before_inheritance_colon = true +cpp_space_before_constructor_colon = true +cpp_space_remove_before_semicolon = true +cpp_space_after_semicolon = true +cpp_space_remove_around_unary_operator = true +cpp_space_around_binary_operator = insert +cpp_space_around_assignment_operator = insert +cpp_space_pointer_reference_alignment = left +cpp_space_around_ternary_operator = insert +cpp_wrap_preserve_blocks = one_liners diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.gitattributes b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f37c2d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +############################################################################### +# Set default behavior to automatically normalize line endings. +############################################################################### +* text=auto + +############################################################################### +# Set default behavior for command prompt diff. +# +# This is need for earlier builds of msysgit that does not have it on by +# default for csharp files. +# Note: This is only used by command line +############################################################################### +#*.cs diff=csharp + +############################################################################### +# Set the merge driver for project and solution files +# +# Merging from the command prompt will add diff markers to the files if there +# are conflicts (Merging from VS is not affected by the settings below, in VS +# the diff markers are never inserted). Diff markers may cause the following +# file extensions to fail to load in VS. An alternative would be to treat +# these files as binary and thus will always conflict and require user +# intervention with every merge. To do so, just uncomment the entries below +############################################################################### +#*.sln merge=binary +#*.csproj merge=binary +#*.vbproj merge=binary +#*.vcxproj merge=binary +#*.vcproj merge=binary +#*.dbproj merge=binary +#*.fsproj merge=binary +#*.lsproj merge=binary +#*.wixproj merge=binary +#*.modelproj merge=binary +#*.sqlproj merge=binary +#*.wwaproj merge=binary + +############################################################################### +# behavior for image files +# +# image files are treated as binary by default. +############################################################################### +#*.jpg binary +#*.png binary +#*.gif binary + +############################################################################### +# diff behavior for common document formats +# +# Convert binary document formats to text before diffing them. This feature +# is only available from the command line. Turn it on by uncommenting the +# entries below. +############################################################################### +#*.doc diff=astextplain +#*.DOC diff=astextplain +#*.docx diff=astextplain +#*.DOCX diff=astextplain +#*.dot diff=astextplain +#*.DOT diff=astextplain +#*.pdf diff=astextplain +#*.PDF diff=astextplain +#*.rtf diff=astextplain +#*.RTF diff=astextplain +*.h linguist-language=C++ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/FUNDING.yml b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/FUNDING.yml new file mode 100644 index 0000000..746acc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/FUNDING.yml @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +ko_fi: maecry22 diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/bug_report.md b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/bug_report.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..99d8964 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/bug_report.md @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +--- +name: Bug report +about: Create a report to help us improve +title: '' +labels: bug +assignees: maecry + +--- + +**Describe the bug** +A clear and concise description of what the bug is. + +**To Reproduce** +Steps to reproduce the behavior: + +**Expected behavior** +A clear and concise description of what you expected to happen. + +**Screenshots** +If applicable, add screenshots to help explain your problem. + +**Additional context** +Add any other context about the problem here. diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/workflows/msbuild.yml b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/workflows/msbuild.yml new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03ff3a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.github/workflows/msbuild.yml @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +name: msbuild + +on: + push: + branches: [ "master" ] + pull_request: + branches: [ "master" ] +permissions: + contents: read +jobs: + build: + runs-on: windows-2022 + strategy: + matrix: + toolset: [v143, ClangCL] + configuration: [Debug, Release] + steps: + - name: setup actions + uses: actions/checkout@v3 + - name: setup environment + uses: microsoft/setup-msbuild@v1.1 + - name: build + shell: cmd + run: msbuild asphyxia.sln /p:Configuration=${{matrix.configuration}} /p:Platform=x64 /p:PlatformToolset=${{ matrix.toolset }} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.gitignore b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.gitignore new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9491a2f --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/.gitignore @@ -0,0 +1,363 @@ +## Ignore Visual Studio temporary files, build results, and +## files generated by popular Visual Studio add-ons. +## +## Get latest from https://github.com/github/gitignore/blob/master/VisualStudio.gitignore + +# User-specific files +*.rsuser +*.suo +*.user +*.userosscache +*.sln.docstates + +# User-specific files (MonoDevelop/Xamarin Studio) +*.userprefs + +# Mono auto generated files +mono_crash.* + +# Build results +[Dd]ebug/ +[Dd]ebugPublic/ +[Rr]elease/ +[Rr]eleases/ +x64/ +x86/ +[Ww][Ii][Nn]32/ +[Aa][Rr][Mm]/ +[Aa][Rr][Mm]64/ +bld/ +[Bb]in/ +[Oo]bj/ +[Oo]ut/ +[Ll]og/ +[Ll]ogs/ + +# Visual Studio 2015/2017 cache/options directory +.vs/ +# Uncomment if you have tasks that create the project's static files in wwwroot +#wwwroot/ + +# Visual Studio 2017 auto generated files +Generated\ Files/ + +# MSTest test Results +[Tt]est[Rr]esult*/ +[Bb]uild[Ll]og.* + +# NUnit +*.VisualState.xml +TestResult.xml +nunit-*.xml + +# Build Results of an ATL Project +[Dd]ebugPS/ +[Rr]eleasePS/ +dlldata.c + +# Benchmark Results +BenchmarkDotNet.Artifacts/ + +# .NET Core +project.lock.json +project.fragment.lock.json +artifacts/ + +# ASP.NET Scaffolding +ScaffoldingReadMe.txt + +# StyleCop +StyleCopReport.xml + +# Files built by Visual Studio +*_i.c +*_p.c +*_h.h +*.ilk +*.meta +*.obj +*.iobj +*.pch +*.pdb +*.ipdb +*.pgc +*.pgd +*.rsp +*.sbr +*.tlb +*.tli +*.tlh +*.tmp +*.tmp_proj +*_wpftmp.csproj +*.log +*.vspscc +*.vssscc +.builds +*.pidb +*.svclog +*.scc + +# Chutzpah Test files +_Chutzpah* + +# Visual C++ cache files +ipch/ +*.aps +*.ncb +*.opendb +*.opensdf +*.sdf +*.cachefile +*.VC.db +*.VC.VC.opendb + +# Visual Studio profiler +*.psess +*.vsp +*.vspx +*.sap + +# Visual Studio Trace Files +*.e2e + +# TFS 2012 Local Workspace +$tf/ + +# Guidance Automation Toolkit +*.gpState + +# ReSharper is a .NET coding add-in +_ReSharper*/ +*.[Rr]e[Ss]harper +*.DotSettings.user + +# TeamCity is a build add-in +_TeamCity* + +# DotCover is a Code Coverage Tool +*.dotCover + +# AxoCover is a Code Coverage Tool +.axoCover/* +!.axoCover/settings.json + +# Coverlet is a free, cross platform Code Coverage Tool +coverage*.json +coverage*.xml +coverage*.info + +# Visual Studio code coverage results +*.coverage +*.coveragexml + +# NCrunch +_NCrunch_* +.*crunch*.local.xml +nCrunchTemp_* + +# MightyMoose +*.mm.* +AutoTest.Net/ + +# Web workbench (sass) +.sass-cache/ + +# Installshield output folder +[Ee]xpress/ + +# DocProject is a documentation generator add-in +DocProject/buildhelp/ +DocProject/Help/*.HxT +DocProject/Help/*.HxC +DocProject/Help/*.hhc +DocProject/Help/*.hhk +DocProject/Help/*.hhp +DocProject/Help/Html2 +DocProject/Help/html + +# Click-Once directory +publish/ + +# Publish Web Output +*.[Pp]ublish.xml +*.azurePubxml +# Note: Comment the next line if you want to checkin your web deploy settings, +# but database connection strings (with potential passwords) will be unencrypted +*.pubxml +*.publishproj + +# Microsoft Azure Web App publish settings. Comment the next line if you want to +# checkin your Azure Web App publish settings, but sensitive information contained +# in these scripts will be unencrypted +PublishScripts/ + +# NuGet Packages +*.nupkg +# NuGet Symbol Packages +*.snupkg +# The packages folder can be ignored because of Package Restore +**/[Pp]ackages/* +# except build/, which is used as an MSBuild target. +!**/[Pp]ackages/build/ +# Uncomment if necessary however generally it will be regenerated when needed +#!**/[Pp]ackages/repositories.config +# NuGet v3's project.json files produces more ignorable files +*.nuget.props +*.nuget.targets + +# Microsoft Azure Build Output +csx/ +*.build.csdef + +# Microsoft Azure Emulator +ecf/ +rcf/ + +# Windows Store app package directories and files +AppPackages/ +BundleArtifacts/ +Package.StoreAssociation.xml +_pkginfo.txt +*.appx +*.appxbundle +*.appxupload + +# Visual Studio cache files +# files ending in .cache can be ignored +*.[Cc]ache +# but keep track of directories ending in .cache +!?*.[Cc]ache/ + +# Others +ClientBin/ +~$* +*~ +*.dbmdl +*.dbproj.schemaview +*.jfm +*.pfx +*.publishsettings +orleans.codegen.cs + +# Including strong name files can present a security risk +# (https://github.com/github/gitignore/pull/2483#issue-259490424) +#*.snk + +# Since there are multiple workflows, uncomment next line to ignore bower_components +# (https://github.com/github/gitignore/pull/1529#issuecomment-104372622) +#bower_components/ + +# RIA/Silverlight projects +Generated_Code/ + +# Backup & report files from converting an old project file +# to a newer Visual Studio version. Backup files are not needed, +# because we have git ;-) +_UpgradeReport_Files/ +Backup*/ +UpgradeLog*.XML +UpgradeLog*.htm +ServiceFabricBackup/ +*.rptproj.bak + +# SQL Server files +*.mdf +*.ldf +*.ndf + +# Business Intelligence projects +*.rdl.data +*.bim.layout +*.bim_*.settings +*.rptproj.rsuser +*- [Bb]ackup.rdl +*- [Bb]ackup ([0-9]).rdl +*- [Bb]ackup ([0-9][0-9]).rdl + +# Microsoft Fakes +FakesAssemblies/ + +# GhostDoc plugin setting file +*.GhostDoc.xml + +# Node.js Tools for Visual Studio +.ntvs_analysis.dat +node_modules/ + +# Visual Studio 6 build log +*.plg + +# Visual Studio 6 workspace options file +*.opt + +# Visual Studio 6 auto-generated workspace file (contains which files were open etc.) +*.vbw + +# Visual Studio LightSwitch build output +**/*.HTMLClient/GeneratedArtifacts +**/*.DesktopClient/GeneratedArtifacts +**/*.DesktopClient/ModelManifest.xml +**/*.Server/GeneratedArtifacts +**/*.Server/ModelManifest.xml +_Pvt_Extensions + +# Paket dependency manager +.paket/paket.exe +paket-files/ + +# FAKE - F# Make +.fake/ + +# CodeRush personal settings +.cr/personal + +# Python Tools for Visual Studio (PTVS) +__pycache__/ +*.pyc + +# Cake - Uncomment if you are using it +# tools/** +# !tools/packages.config + +# Tabs Studio +*.tss + +# Telerik's JustMock configuration file +*.jmconfig + +# BizTalk build output +*.btp.cs +*.btm.cs +*.odx.cs +*.xsd.cs + +# OpenCover UI analysis results +OpenCover/ + +# Azure Stream Analytics local run output +ASALocalRun/ + +# MSBuild Binary and Structured Log +*.binlog + +# NVidia Nsight GPU debugger configuration file +*.nvuser + +# MFractors (Xamarin productivity tool) working folder +.mfractor/ + +# Local History for Visual Studio +.localhistory/ + +# BeatPulse healthcheck temp database +healthchecksdb + +# Backup folder for Package Reference Convert tool in Visual Studio 2017 +MigrationBackup/ + +# Ionide (cross platform F# VS Code tools) working folder +.ionide/ + +# Fody - auto-generated XML schema +FodyWeavers.xsd \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/LICENSE b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/LICENSE new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3a9b63 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/LICENSE @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +MIT License + +Copyright (c) 2023 maecry + +Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy +of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal +in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights +to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell +copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is +furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: + +The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all +copies or substantial portions of the Software. + +THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER +LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, +OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE +SOFTWARE. diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/asphyxia.sln b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/asphyxia.sln new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e8ac9e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/asphyxia.sln @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +Microsoft Visual Studio Solution File, Format Version 12.00 +# Visual Studio Version 17 +Project("{8BC9CEB8-8B4A-11D0-8D11-00A0C91BC942}") = "cstrike", "cstrike\cstrike.vcxproj", "{DAC639DD-46A6-B878-4FBE-434FBB1C1FDA}" +EndProject +Global + GlobalSection(SolutionConfigurationPlatforms) = preSolution + Debug|x64 = Debug|x64 + Release|x64 = Release|x64 + EndGlobalSection + GlobalSection(ProjectConfigurationPlatforms) = postSolution + {DAC639DD-46A6-B878-4FBE-434FBB1C1FDA}.Debug|x64.ActiveCfg = Debug|x64 + {DAC639DD-46A6-B878-4FBE-434FBB1C1FDA}.Debug|x64.Build.0 = Debug|x64 + {DAC639DD-46A6-B878-4FBE-434FBB1C1FDA}.Release|x64.ActiveCfg = Release|x64 + {DAC639DD-46A6-B878-4FBE-434FBB1C1FDA}.Release|x64.Build.0 = Release|x64 + EndGlobalSection + GlobalSection(SolutionProperties) = preSolution + HideSolutionNode = FALSE + EndGlobalSection +EndGlobal diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/aimRangePainter.hpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/aimRangePainter.hpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a098c81 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/aimRangePainter.hpp @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +#pragma once +#include "painter.h" +#include "core/variables.h" +#include "core/interfaces.h" +#include "sdk/interfaces/iswapchaindx11.h" +class AimRangePainter : public Painter +{ +public: + virtual void Draw(ImDrawList* pDrawList) override + { + if (C_GET(bool, Vars.bLegitbot)) + { + DXGI_SWAP_CHAIN_DESC sd; + I::SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain->GetDesc(&sd); + pDrawList->AddCircle({ sd.BufferDesc.Width / 2.f, sd.BufferDesc.Height / 2.f }, C_GET(float , Vars.aim_range), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255), 0.3); + } + + + } + + +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/common.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/common.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..18cfc16 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/common.h @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ +#pragma once + +/* + * current build of cheat, change this when you made noticeable changes + * - used for automatic adaptation mechanism of configuration files from previous versions + */ + +#define CS_VERSION 1000 + +/* + * current build of CS2 + * - used to verify game version + */ + +#define CS_PRODUCTSTRINGVERSION CS_XOR("1.40.2.6") + +/* + * game's modules + */ +#define CLIENT_DLL CS_XOR(L"client.dll") +#define ENGINE2_DLL CS_XOR(L"engine2.dll") +#define SCHEMASYSTEM_DLL CS_XOR(L"schemasystem.dll") +#define INPUTSYSTEM_DLL CS_XOR(L"inputsystem.dll") +#define SDL3_DLL CS_XOR(L"SDL3.dll") +#define TIER0_DLL CS_XOR(L"tier0.dll") +#define NAVSYSTEM_DLL CS_XOR(L"navsystem.dll") +#define RENDERSYSTEM_DLL CS_XOR(L"rendersystemdx11.dll") +#define LOCALIZE_DLL CS_XOR(L"localize.dll") +#define DBGHELP_DLL CS_XOR(L"dbghelp.dll") +#define GAMEOVERLAYRENDERER_DLL CS_XOR(L"GameOverlayRenderer64.dll") +#define PARTICLES_DLL CS_XOR(L"particles.dll") +#define SCENESYSTEM_DLL CS_XOR(L"scenesystem.dll") +#define MATERIAL_SYSTEM2_DLL CS_XOR(L"materialsystem2.dll") +#define MATCHMAKING_DLL CS_XOR(L"matchmaking.dll") +#define RESOURCESYSTEM_DLL CS_XOR(L"resourcesystem.dll") +/* + * define to specify default string encryption + */ +#ifdef _DEBUG +#define CS_XOR(STRING) STRING +#else +#define JM_XORSTR_DISABLE_AVX_INTRINSICS +// used: string encryption +#include "xorstr.h" +#define CS_XOR(STRING) xorstr_(STRING) +#endif + +// define to enable logging output to console +#ifdef _DEBUG +#define CS_LOG_CONSOLE +#endif + +// define to enable logging output to file +#define CS_LOG_FILE + +// define to enable additional run-time checks +#ifdef _DEBUG +#define CS_PARANOID +#endif + +/* + * define to search all possible occurrences for pattern and log if pattern isn't unique + * - useful for keeping patterns up to date and preventing possible inconsistent behavior + */ +#ifdef _DEBUG +#define CS_PARANOID_PATTERN_UNIQUENESS +#endif + +/* + * define to overwrite configuration file formatter implementation + */ +#define CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY +// name of the default configuration file +#define CS_CONFIGURATION_DEFAULT_FILE_NAME L"default" + +// define to force disable behavior based on "Run-Time Type Information", even if available +//#define CS_NO_RTTI + +// @todo: use #warning instead of static asserts when c++23 comes out + +#pragma region common_architecture_specific +#if defined(i386) || defined(__i386__) || defined(__i486__) || defined(__i586__) || defined(__i686__) || defined(__i386) || defined(_M_IX86) || defined(_X86_) || defined(__THW_INTEL__) || defined(__I86__) || defined(__INTEL__) +#define CS_ARCH_X86 +#elif defined(__LP64__) || (defined(__x86_64__) && !defined(__ILP32__)) || defined(_M_X64) || defined(__ia64) || defined(_M_IA64) || defined(__aarch64__) || defined(__powerpc64__) +#define CS_ARCH_X64 +#else +static_assert(false, "could not determine the target architecture, consider define it manually!"); +#endif + +#pragma region common_compiler_specific +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#define CS_COMPILER_MSC +#endif +#ifdef __clang__ // @note: clang-cl have defined both 'CS_COMPILER_CLANG' and 'CS_COMPILER_MSC' +#define CS_COMPILER_CLANG +#endif + +#ifdef __has_builtin +#define CS_HAS_BUILTIN(BUILTIN) __has_builtin(BUILTIN) +#else +#define CS_HAS_BUILTIN(BUILTIN) 0 +#endif + +#ifdef CS_COMPILER_MSC +// treat "discarding return value of function with 'nodiscard' attribute" warning as error +#pragma warning(error : 4834) +#endif + +#ifdef CS_COMPILER_CLANG +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-private-field" +#endif + +#if defined(CS_COMPILER_MSC) || defined(CS_COMPILER_CLANG) +#define CS_NAKED __declspec(naked) +#endif + +// @todo: platform dependent / but currently we shouldn't give fuck on it +#define CS_CDECL __cdecl +#define CS_STDCALL __stdcall +#define CS_FASTCALL __fastcall +#define CS_THISCALL __thiscall +#define CS_VECTORCALL __vectorcall +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region common_implementation_specific +#define _CS_INTERNAL_CONCATENATE(LEFT, RIGHT) LEFT##RIGHT +#define _CS_INTERNAL_STRINGIFY(NAME) #NAME +#define _CS_INTERNAL_UNPARENTHESIZE(...) __VA_ARGS__ + +// convert plain text to string +#define CS_STRINGIFY(NAME) _CS_INTERNAL_STRINGIFY(NAME) +// concatenate plain text +#define CS_CONCATENATE(LEFT, RIGHT) _CS_INTERNAL_CONCATENATE(LEFT, RIGHT) +// unparenthesize variadic arguments +#define CS_UNPARENTHESIZE(...) _CS_INTERNAL_UNPARENTHESIZE(__VA_ARGS__) + +// calculate elements count of fixed-size C array +#define CS_ARRAYSIZE(ARRAY) (sizeof(ARRAY) / sizeof(ARRAY[0])) + +// calculate the offset of a struct member variable, in bytes +#if defined(_CRT_USE_BUILTIN_OFFSETOF) || CS_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_offsetof) +#define CS_OFFSETOF(STRUCT, MEMBER) __builtin_offsetof(STRUCT, MEMBER) +#else +#define CS_OFFSETOF(STRUCT, MEMBER) reinterpret_cast(std::addressof(static_cast(nullptr)->MEMBER)) +#endif + +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI +#if defined(CS_COMPILER_MSC) && !defined(_CPPRTTI) +#define CS_NO_RTTI +#elif defined(CS_COMPILER_CLANG) +#if !__has_feature(cxx_rtti) +#define CS_NO_RTTI +#endif +#endif +#endif + +#ifndef CS_INLINE +#if defined(CS_COMPILER_MSC) +#define CS_INLINE __forceinline +#else +// referenced to clang documentation, this is enough: https://clang.llvm.org/compatibility.html +#define CS_INLINE inline +#endif +#endif + +#ifndef CS_RETURN_ADDRESS +#if defined(CS_COMPILER_MSC) +#define CS_RETURN_ADDRESS() _ReturnAddress() +#elif defined(CS_COMPILER_CLANG) +#define CS_RETURN_ADDRESS() __builtin_return_address(0) +#else +static_assert(false, "it is expected you to define CS_RETURN_ADDRESS() into something that will get the return address off the stack!") +#define CS_RETURN_ADDRESS() +#endif +#endif + +#ifndef CS_FRAME_ADDRESS +#if defined(CS_COMPILER_MSC) +#define CS_FRAME_ADDRESS() _AddressOfReturnAddress() +#elif defined(CS_COMPILER_CLANG) +// @note: it isn't always what we're expecting, compiler dependent +#define CS_FRAME_ADDRESS() __builtin_frame_address(0) +#else +static_assert(false, "it is expected you to define CS_FRAME_ADDRESS() into something that will get the address of the method's stack frame!") +#define CS_FRAME_ADDRESS() +#endif +#endif + +#ifndef CS_DEBUG_BREAK +#if defined(CS_COMPILER_MSC) +#define CS_DEBUG_BREAK() __debugbreak() +#elif defined(CS_COMPILER_CLANG) +#define CS_DEBUG_BREAK() __builtin_debugtrap() +#else +static_assert(false, "it is expected you to define CS_DEBUG_BREAK() into something that will break in a debugger!"); +#define CS_DEBUG_BREAK() +#endif +#endif + +#ifndef CS_ASSERT +#ifdef _DEBUG +#define CS_ASSERT(EXPRESSION) static_cast(!!(EXPRESSION) || (CS_DEBUG_BREAK(), 0)) +#else +// disable assertion for release builds +#define CS_ASSERT(EXPRESSION) static_cast(0) +#endif +#endif + +#if !defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) && !defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) && !defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) +static_assert(false, "it is expected you to define one of the available configuration file formatters!"); + +// fallback to binary formatter by default +#define CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY +#endif + +#ifndef CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION +#if defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) +#define CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION L".bin" +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) +#define CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION L".json" +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) +#define CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION L".toml" +#endif +#endif +#pragma endregion + +/* + * explicitly delete the following constructors, to prevent attempts on using them: + * constructor, move-constructor, copy-constructor + */ +#define CS_CLASS_NO_CONSTRUCTOR(CLASS) \ + CLASS() = delete; \ + CLASS(CLASS&&) = delete; \ + CLASS(const CLASS&) = delete; + +/* + * explicitly delete the following assignment operators, to prevent attempts on using them: + * move-assignment, copy-assignment + */ +#define CS_CLASS_NO_ASSIGNMENT(CLASS) \ + CLASS& operator=(CLASS&&) = delete; \ + CLASS& operator=(const CLASS&) = delete; + +// explicitly delete any class initializer to prevent attempts on using them +#define CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CLASS) \ + CS_CLASS_NO_CONSTRUCTOR(CLASS) \ + CS_CLASS_NO_ASSIGNMENT(CLASS) + +// explicitly delete class heap allocator and deallocator, to prevent attempts on using class at heap memory +#define CS_CLASS_NO_ALLOC() \ + void* operator new(const std::size_t nSize) = delete; \ + void operator delete(void* pMemory) = delete; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ecbf424 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,261 @@ +// used: [win] shgetknownfolderpath +#include + +#include "core.h" + +// used: features setup +#include "features.h" +// used: string copy +#include "utilities/crt.h" +// used: mem +#include "utilities/memory.h" +// used: l_print +#include "utilities/log.h" +// used: inputsystem setup/restore +#include "utilities/inputsystem.h" +// used: draw destroy +#include "utilities/draw.h" + +// used: interfaces setup/destroy +#include "core/interfaces.h" +// used: sdk setup +#include "core/sdk.h" +// used: config setup & variables +#include "core/variables.h" +// used: hooks setup/destroy +#include "core/hooks.h" +// used: schema setup/dump +#include "core/schema.h" +// used: convar setup +#include "core/convars.h" +// used: menu +#include "core/menu.h" + +// used: product version +#include "sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" + +bool CORE::GetWorkingPath(wchar_t* wszDestination) +{ + //const wchar_t* wszModuleName = MEM::GetModuleBaseFileName(static_cast(hDll), true); + CRT::StringCopy(wszDestination, L"C:\\.asphyxia\\"); + // create directory if it doesn't exist + if (!::CreateDirectoryW(wszDestination, nullptr)) + { + if (const DWORD dwError = ::GetLastError(); dwError != ERROR_ALREADY_EXISTS) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to create default working directory, because one or more intermediate directories don't exist"); + return false; + } + } + + return true; +} + +static bool Setup(HMODULE hModule) +{ + +#if 1 +#ifdef CS_LOG_CONSOLE + if (!L::AttachConsole(CS_XOR(L"asphyxia developer-mode"))) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to attach console + return false; + } +#endif +#ifdef CS_LOG_FILE + if (!L::OpenFile(CS_XOR(L"asphyxia.log"))) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to open file + return false; + } +#endif + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("logging system initialization completed"); + + // setup game's exported functions + if (!MEM::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup memory system + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("memory system initialization completed"); + + if (!MATH::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup math system + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("math system initialization completed"); + + // grab game's interfaces + if (!I::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup interfaces + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("interfaces initialization completed"); + + if (!SDK::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup sdk + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("sdk initialization completed"); + + // setup input system and replace game's window messages processor with our + if (!IPT::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup input system + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("input system initialization completed"); + + // @note: sleep to wait finishing font building + D::Setup(IPT::hWindow, I::Device, I::DeviceContext); + MENU::UpdateStyle(nullptr); + while (D::bInitialized == false) + ::Sleep(200U); + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("renderer backend initialization completed"); + + // initialize feature-related stuff + if (!F::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup features + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("features initialization completed"); + + // iterate all valid modules for schema + std::vector vecNeededModules = { CS_XOR("client.dll"), CS_XOR("engine2.dll"), CS_XOR("schemasystem.dll") }; + for (auto& szModule : vecNeededModules) + { + if (!SCHEMA::Setup(CS_XOR(L"schema.txt"), szModule.c_str())) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup schema system + return false; + } + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("schema system initialization completed"); + + if (!CONVAR::Dump(CS_XOR(L"convars.txt"))) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup convars system + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("convars dumped completed, output: \"convars.txt\""); + + if (!CONVAR::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup convars system + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("convars system initialization completed"); + + // setup hooks + if (!H::Setup()) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // failed to setup hooks + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << CS_XOR("hooks initialization completed"); + + // setup values to save/load cheat variables into/from files and load default configuration + if (!C::Setup(CS_XOR(CS_CONFIGURATION_DEFAULT_FILE_NAME))) + // this error is not critical, only show that + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("failed to setup and/or load default configuration"); + else + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("configuration system initialization completed"); + + // @note: this doesn't affect much, but it's good to know if we're using different version of the game + if (CRT::StringCompare(I::Engine->GetProductVersionString(), CS_PRODUCTSTRINGVERSION) != 0) + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_YELLOW | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("version mismatch! local CS2 version: ") << CS_PRODUCTSTRINGVERSION << CS_XOR(", current CS2 version: ") << I::Engine->GetProductVersionString() << CS_XOR(". asphyxia might not function as normal."); + + L_PRINT(LOG_NONE) << L::SetColor(LOG_COLOR_FORE_CYAN | LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY) << CS_XOR("asphyxia initialization completed, version: ") << CS_STRINGIFY(CS_VERSION); + return true; +#endif + + + + +} + +// @todo: some of those may crash while closing process, because we dont have any dependencies from the game modules, it means them can be unloaded and destruct interfaces etc before our module | modify ldrlist? +static void Destroy() +{ + // restore window messages processor to original + IPT::Destroy(); + + // restore hooks + H::Destroy(); + + // destroy renderer backend + D::Destroy(); + + // destroy chams dependent stuff + F::Destroy(); + +#ifdef CS_LOG_CONSOLE + L::DetachConsole(); +#endif +#ifdef CS_LOG_FILE + L::CloseFile(); +#endif +} + +DWORD WINAPI PanicThread(LPVOID lpParameter) +{ + // don't let proceed unload until user press specified key + while (!IPT::IsKeyReleased(C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.nPanicKey))) + ::Sleep(500UL); + + // call detach code and exit this thread + ::FreeLibraryAndExitThread(static_cast(lpParameter), EXIT_SUCCESS); +} + +extern "C" BOOL WINAPI _CRT_INIT(HMODULE hModule, DWORD dwReason, LPVOID lpReserved); + +BOOL APIENTRY CoreEntryPoint(HMODULE hModule, DWORD dwReason, LPVOID lpReserved) +{ + // Disables the DLL_THREAD_ATTACH and DLL_THREAD_DETACH notifications for the specified dynamic-link library (DLL). This can reduce the size of the working set for some applications + DisableThreadLibraryCalls(hModule); + + // process destroy of the cheat before crt calls atexit table + if (dwReason == DLL_PROCESS_DETACH) + Destroy(); + + // dispatch reason for c-runtime, initialize/destroy static variables, TLS etc + if (!_CRT_INIT(hModule, dwReason, lpReserved)) + return FALSE; + + if (dwReason == DLL_PROCESS_ATTACH) + { + CORE::hProcess = MEM::GetModuleBaseHandle(nullptr); + + // basic process check + if (CORE::hProcess == nullptr) + return FALSE; + + /* + * check did all game modules have been loaded + * @note: navsystem.dll is the last loaded module + */ + if (MEM::GetModuleBaseHandle(NAVSYSTEM_DLL) == nullptr) + return FALSE; + + // save our module handle + CORE::hDll = hModule; + + // check did we perform main initialization successfully + if (!Setup(hModule)) + { + // undo the things we've done + Destroy(); + return FALSE; + } + + // create panic thread, it isn't critical error if it fails + if (const HANDLE hThread = ::CreateThread(nullptr, 0U, &PanicThread, hModule, 0UL, nullptr); hThread != nullptr) + ::CloseHandle(hThread); + } + + return TRUE; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aadd6f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core.h @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +#pragma once + +namespace CORE +{ + /* @section: get */ + /// @param[out] wszDestination output for working path where files will be saved (default: "%userprofile%\documents\.crown") + /// @returns: true if successfully got the path, false otherwise + bool GetWorkingPath(wchar_t* wszDestination); + + /* @section: values */ + // handle of self module + inline void* hDll = nullptr; + // current process handle + inline void* hProcess = nullptr; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/config.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/config.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9703b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/config.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,406 @@ +// used: [win] winapi +#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#endif +#include + +#include "config.h" +// used: getworkingpath +#include "../core.h" +// used: l_print +#include "../utilities/log.h" +// used: integertostring +#include "../utilities/crt.h" +// used: heapalloc, heapfree +#include "../utilities/memory.h" + +// used: formatter implementation +#if defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) +#include "../../extensions/binary.h" +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) +#include "../../extensions/json.h" +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) +#include "../../extensions/toml.h" +#endif + +// default configurations working path +static wchar_t wszConfigurationsPath[MAX_PATH]; + +#pragma region config_user_data_type + +std::size_t C::UserDataType_t::GetSerializationSize() const +{ + std::size_t nTotalDataSize = 0U; + + for (const UserDataMember_t& member : vecMembers) + nTotalDataSize += sizeof(FNV1A_t[2]) + member.nDataSize; + + return nTotalDataSize; +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region config_variable_object + +void C::VariableObject_t::SetStorage(const void* pValue) +{ + // check is available to store value in the local storage + if (this->nStorageSize <= sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)) + { + CRT::MemorySet(&this->storage.uLocal, 0U, sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)); + CRT::MemoryCopy(&this->storage.uLocal, pValue, this->nStorageSize); + } + // otherwise use heap memory to store it + else + { + CS_ASSERT(this->storage.pHeap != nullptr); // tried to access non allocated storage + + CRT::MemorySet(this->storage.pHeap, 0U, this->nStorageSize); + CRT::MemoryCopy(this->storage.pHeap, pValue, this->nStorageSize); + } +} + +std::size_t C::VariableObject_t::GetSerializationSize() const +{ + std::size_t nSerializationSize = this->nStorageSize; + + // denote a custom serialization size when it different from the storage size + switch (this->uTypeHash) + { + // lookup for array data type + case FNV1A::HashConst("bool[]"): + case FNV1A::HashConst("int[]"): + case FNV1A::HashConst("unsigned int[]"): + case FNV1A::HashConst("float[]"): + case FNV1A::HashConst("char[][]"): + // arrays also serialize their size + nSerializationSize += sizeof(std::size_t); + break; + // lookup for user-defined data type + default: + { + for (const UserDataType_t& userType : vecUserTypes) + { + if (userType.uTypeHash == this->uTypeHash) + { + nSerializationSize = sizeof(std::size_t) + userType.GetSerializationSize(); + break; + } + } + break; + } + } + + return nSerializationSize; +} + +#pragma endregion + +bool C::Setup(const wchar_t* wszDefaultFileName) +{ + if (!CORE::GetWorkingPath(wszConfigurationsPath)) + return false; + + CRT::StringCat(wszConfigurationsPath, CS_XOR(L"settings\\")); + + // create directory if it doesn't exist + if (!::CreateDirectoryW(wszConfigurationsPath, nullptr)) + { + if (::GetLastError() != ERROR_ALREADY_EXISTS) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to create configurations directory, because one or more intermediate directories don't exist"); + return false; + } + } + + // @note: define custom data types we want to serialize + AddUserType(FNV1A::HashConst("KeyBind_t"), + { + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("uKey"), FNV1A::HashConst("unsigned int"), &KeyBind_t::uKey }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("nMode"), FNV1A::HashConst("int"), &KeyBind_t::nMode } + }); + + AddUserType(FNV1A::HashConst("ColorPickerVar_t"), + { + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("bRainbow"), FNV1A::HashConst("bool"), &ColorPickerVar_t::bRainbow }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("flRainbowSpeed"), FNV1A::HashConst("float"), &ColorPickerVar_t::flRainbowSpeed }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colPrimary"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &ColorPickerVar_t::colValue }, + }); + + AddUserType(FNV1A::HashConst("TextOverlayVar_t"), + { + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("bEnable"), FNV1A::HashConst("bool"), &TextOverlayVar_t::bEnable }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("flThickness"), FNV1A::HashConst("float"), &TextOverlayVar_t::flThickness }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colPrimary"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &TextOverlayVar_t::colPrimary }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colOutline"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &TextOverlayVar_t::colOutline } + }); + + AddUserType(FNV1A::HashConst("FrameOverlayVar_t"), + { + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("bEnable"), FNV1A::HashConst("bool"), &FrameOverlayVar_t::bEnable }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("flThickness"), FNV1A::HashConst("float"), &FrameOverlayVar_t::flThickness }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("flRounding"), FNV1A::HashConst("float"), &FrameOverlayVar_t::flRounding }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colPrimary"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &FrameOverlayVar_t::colPrimary }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colOutline"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &FrameOverlayVar_t::colOutline } + }); + + AddUserType(FNV1A::HashConst("BarOverlayVar_t"), + { + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("bEnable"), FNV1A::HashConst("bool"), &BarOverlayVar_t::bEnable }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("bGradient"), FNV1A::HashConst("bool"), &BarOverlayVar_t::bGradient }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("bUseFactorColor"), FNV1A::HashConst("bool"), &BarOverlayVar_t::bUseFactorColor }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("flThickness"), FNV1A::HashConst("float"), &BarOverlayVar_t::flThickness }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colPrimary"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &BarOverlayVar_t::colPrimary }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colSecondary"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &BarOverlayVar_t::colSecondary }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colBackground"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &BarOverlayVar_t::colBackground }, + UserDataMember_t{ FNV1A::HashConst("colOutline"), FNV1A::HashConst("Color_t"), &BarOverlayVar_t::colOutline } + }); + + // create default configuration + if (!CreateFile(wszDefaultFileName)) + return false; + + // store existing configurations list + Refresh(); + + return true; +} + +#pragma region config_main + +void C::Refresh() +{ + // clear and free previous stored file names + vecFileNames.clear(); + + // make configuration files path filter + wchar_t wszPathFilter[MAX_PATH]; + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(wszPathFilter, wszConfigurationsPath), CS_XOR(L"*" CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION)); + + // iterate through all files with our filter + WIN32_FIND_DATAW findData; + if (const HANDLE hFindFile = ::FindFirstFileW(wszPathFilter, &findData); hFindFile != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) + { + do + { + vecFileNames.push_back(new wchar_t[CRT::StringLength(findData.cFileName) + 1U]); + CRT::StringCopy(vecFileNames.back(), findData.cFileName); + + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("found configuration file: \"") << findData.cFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + } while (::FindNextFileW(hFindFile, &findData)); + + ::FindClose(hFindFile); + } +} + +void C::AddUserType(const FNV1A_t uTypeHash, const std::initializer_list vecUserMembers) +{ + if (vecUserMembers.size() == 0U) + return; + + UserDataType_t userDataType; + userDataType.uTypeHash = uTypeHash; + + for (const auto& userDataMember : vecUserMembers) + userDataType.vecMembers.push_back(userDataMember); + + vecUserTypes.emplace_back(CRT::Move(userDataType)); +} + +bool C::SaveFileVariable(const std::size_t nFileIndex, const VariableObject_t& variable) +{ + const wchar_t* wszFileName = vecFileNames[nFileIndex]; + + wchar_t wszFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(wszFilePath, wszConfigurationsPath), wszFileName); + +#if defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) + if (BIN::SaveVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) + if (JSON::SaveVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) + if (TOML::SaveVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#endif + { + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +bool C::LoadFileVariable(const std::size_t nFileIndex, VariableObject_t& variable) +{ + const wchar_t* wszFileName = vecFileNames[nFileIndex]; + + wchar_t wszFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(wszFilePath, wszConfigurationsPath), wszFileName); + +#if defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) + if (BIN::LoadVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) + if (JSON::LoadVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) + if (TOML::LoadVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#endif + { + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +bool C::RemoveFileVariable(const std::size_t nFileIndex, const VariableObject_t& variable) +{ + const wchar_t* wszFileName = vecFileNames[nFileIndex]; + + wchar_t wszFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(wszFilePath, wszConfigurationsPath), wszFileName); + +#if defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) + if (BIN::RemoveVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) + if (JSON::RemoveVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) + if (TOML::RemoveVariable(wszFilePath, variable)) +#endif + { + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +bool C::CreateFile(const wchar_t* wszFileName) +{ + const wchar_t* wszFileExtension = CRT::StringCharR(wszFileName, L'.'); + + // get length of the given filename and strip out extension if there any + const std::size_t nFileNameLength = (wszFileExtension != nullptr ? wszFileExtension - wszFileName : CRT::StringLength(wszFileName)); + wchar_t* wszFullFileName = new wchar_t[nFileNameLength + CRT::StringLength(CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION) + 1U]; + + // copy filename without extension + wchar_t* wszFullFileNameEnd = CRT::StringCopyN(wszFullFileName, wszFileName, nFileNameLength); + *wszFullFileNameEnd = L'\0'; + // append correct extension to the filename + CRT::StringCat(wszFullFileNameEnd, CS_XOR(CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION)); + + // add filename to the list + vecFileNames.push_back(wszFullFileName); + + // create and save it by the index + if (SaveFile(vecFileNames.size() - 1U)) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("created configuration file: \"") << wszFullFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + return true; + } + + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("failed to create configuration file: \"") << wszFullFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + return false; +} + +bool C::SaveFile(const std::size_t nFileIndex) +{ + const wchar_t* wszFileName = vecFileNames[nFileIndex]; + + wchar_t wszFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(wszFilePath, wszConfigurationsPath), wszFileName); + +#if defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) + if (BIN::SaveFile(wszFilePath)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) + if (JSON::SaveFile(wszFilePath)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) + if (TOML::SaveFile(wszFilePath)) +#endif + { + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("saved configuration file: \"") << wszFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + return true; + } + + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("failed to save configuration file: \"") << wszFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + return false; +} + +bool C::LoadFile(const std::size_t nFileIndex) +{ + const wchar_t* wszFileName = vecFileNames[nFileIndex]; + + wchar_t wszFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(wszFilePath, wszConfigurationsPath), wszFileName); + +#if defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_BINARY) + if (BIN::LoadFile(wszFilePath)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_JSON) + if (JSON::LoadFile(wszFilePath)) +#elif defined(CS_CONFIGURATION_TOML) + if (TOML::LoadFile(wszFilePath)) +#endif + { + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("loaded configuration file: \"") << wszFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + return true; + } + + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("failed to load configuration file: \"") << wszFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + return false; +} + +void C::RemoveFile(const std::size_t nFileIndex) +{ + const wchar_t* wszFileName = vecFileNames[nFileIndex]; + + // unable to delete default config + if (CRT::StringCompare(wszFileName, CS_XOR(CS_CONFIGURATION_DEFAULT_FILE_NAME CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION)) == 0) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("unable to remove default configuration file: \"") << wszFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + return; + } + + wchar_t wszFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(wszFilePath, wszConfigurationsPath), wszFileName); + + if (::DeleteFileW(wszFilePath)) + { + // erase and free filename from the list + vecFileNames.erase(vecFileNames.cbegin() + nFileIndex); + + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("removed configuration file: \"") << wszFileName << CS_XOR("\""); + } +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region config_get + +std::size_t C::GetVariableIndex(const FNV1A_t uNameHash) +{ + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < vecVariables.size(); i++) + { + if (vecVariables[i].uNameHash == uNameHash) + return i; + } + + return C_INVALID_VARIABLE; +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region config_user_types +void ColorPickerVar_t::UpdateRainbow() +{ + // @todo: improve + optimize this code + // progress rainbow color + if (this->bRainbow) + { + const float flTime = static_cast(ImGui::GetTime()); + // create a rainbow color with copied alpha + float arrRainbowColors[] = { + sin(flTime * this->flRainbowSpeed) * 0.5f + 0.5f, + sin(flTime * this->flRainbowSpeed * MATH::_PI / 3) * 0.5f + 0.5f, + sin(flTime * this->flRainbowSpeed * MATH::_PI / 3) * 0.5f + 0.5f, + this->colValue.Base() + }; + + // set the rainbow color + this->colValue = Color_t::FromBase4(arrRainbowColors); + } +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/config.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/config.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0146c82 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/config.h @@ -0,0 +1,443 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [stl] vector +#include +// used: [stl] type_info +#include +// used: [win] undname_no_arguments +#include + +#include "../common.h" +#include "../sdk/datatypes/color.h" + +// used: l_print +#include "../utilities/log.h" +// used: heapalloc, heapfree +#include "../utilities/memory.h" +// used: fnv1a hashing +#include "../utilities/fnv1a.h" + +#pragma region config_definitions +#define C_ADD_VARIABLE(TYPE, NAME, DEFAULT) const std::size_t NAME = C::AddVariable(FNV1A::HashConst(#NAME), FNV1A::HashConst(#TYPE), DEFAULT); + +#define C_ADD_VARIABLE_ARRAY(TYPE, SIZE, NAME, DEFAULT) const std::size_t NAME = C::AddVariableArray(FNV1A::HashConst(#NAME), FNV1A::HashConst(#TYPE "[]"), DEFAULT); + +#define C_ADD_VARIABLE_ARRAY_ARRAY(TYPE, SIZE, SUBSIZE, NAME, DEFAULT) const std::size_t NAME = C::AddVariableArray(FNV1A::HashConst(#NAME), FNV1A::HashConst(#TYPE "[][]"), DEFAULT); + +#define C_INVALID_VARIABLE static_cast(-1) + +#define C_GET(TYPE, NAME) C::Get(NAME) + +#define C_GET_ARRAY(TYPE, SIZE, NAME, INDEX) C::Get(NAME)[INDEX] +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region config_user_types +enum class EKeyBindMode : int +{ + HOLD = 0, + TOGGLE +}; + +struct KeyBind_t +{ + constexpr KeyBind_t(const char* szName, const unsigned int uKey = 0U, const EKeyBindMode nMode = EKeyBindMode::HOLD) : + szName(szName), uKey(uKey), nMode(nMode) { } + + bool bEnable = false; + const char* szName = nullptr; + unsigned int uKey = 0U; + EKeyBindMode nMode = EKeyBindMode::HOLD; +}; + +struct ColorPickerVar_t +{ + // default constructor + constexpr ColorPickerVar_t(const Color_t& colValue = Color_t(255, 255, 255), const bool bRainbow = false, const float flRainbowSpeed = 0.5f) : + colValue(colValue), bRainbow(bRainbow), flRainbowSpeed(flRainbowSpeed) { } + + // @note: other contructors will only construct Color_t object and set rainbow to false and speed to 0.5f + + // 8-bit color constructor (in: [0 .. 255]) + constexpr ColorPickerVar_t(const std::uint8_t r, const std::uint8_t g, const std::uint8_t b, const std::uint8_t a = 255) : + colValue(r, g, b, a), bRainbow(false), flRainbowSpeed(0.5f) { } + + // 8-bit color constructor (in: [0 .. 255]) + constexpr ColorPickerVar_t(const int r, const int g, const int b, const int a = 255) : + colValue(r, g, b, a), bRainbow(false), flRainbowSpeed(0.5f) { } + + // 8-bit array color constructor (in: [0.0 .. 1.0]) + explicit constexpr ColorPickerVar_t(const std::uint8_t arrColor[4]) : + colValue(arrColor), bRainbow(false), flRainbowSpeed(0.5f) { } + + // 32-bit packed color constructor (in: 0x00000000 - 0xFFFFFFFF) + explicit constexpr ColorPickerVar_t(const ImU32 uPackedColor) : + colValue(uPackedColor), bRainbow(false), flRainbowSpeed(0.5f) { } + + // 32-bit color constructor (in: [0.0 .. 1.0]) + constexpr ColorPickerVar_t(const float r, const float g, const float b, const float a = 1.0f) : + colValue(r, g, b, a), bRainbow(false), flRainbowSpeed(0.5f) { } + + void UpdateRainbow(); + + Color_t colValue = Color_t(255, 255, 255); + bool bRainbow = false; + float flRainbowSpeed = 0.5f; +}; + +/// hold config variables for text component overlay +struct TextOverlayVar_t +{ + constexpr TextOverlayVar_t(const bool bEnable, const float flThickness = 1.f, const Color_t& colPrimary = Color_t(255, 255, 255), const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0)) : + bEnable(bEnable), flThickness(flThickness), colPrimary(colPrimary), colOutline(colOutline) { } + + bool bEnable = false; + float flThickness = 1.f; + + Color_t colPrimary = Color_t(255, 255, 255); + Color_t colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0); +}; + +/// hold config variables for frame/box component overlay +struct FrameOverlayVar_t +{ + constexpr FrameOverlayVar_t(const bool bEnable, const float flThickness = 1.f, const float flRounding = 0.f, const Color_t& colPrimary = Color_t(255, 255, 255), const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0)) : + bEnable(bEnable), flThickness(flThickness), flRounding(flRounding), colPrimary(colPrimary), colOutline(colOutline) { } + + bool bEnable = false; + float flThickness = 1.f; + float flRounding = 0.f; + + Color_t colPrimary = Color_t(255, 255, 255); + Color_t colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0); +}; + +/// hold config variables for bar component overlay +struct BarOverlayVar_t +{ + constexpr BarOverlayVar_t(const bool bEnable, const bool bGradient = false, const bool bUseFactorColor = false, const float flThickness = 1.f, const Color_t& colPrimary = Color_t(255, 255, 255), const Color_t& colSecondary = Color_t(255, 255, 255), const Color_t& colBackground = Color_t(), const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t()) : + bEnable(bEnable), bGradient(bGradient), bUseFactorColor(bUseFactorColor), flThickness(flThickness), colPrimary(colPrimary), colSecondary(colSecondary), colBackground(colBackground), colOutline(colOutline) { } + + bool bEnable = false; + bool bGradient = false; + bool bUseFactorColor = false; + + float flThickness = 1.f; + + Color_t colPrimary = Color_t(255, 255, 255); + Color_t colSecondary = Color_t(255, 255, 255); + + Color_t colBackground = Color_t{}; + Color_t colOutline = Color_t{}; +}; + +#pragma endregion + +/* + * CONFIGURATION + * - cheat variables serialization/de-serialization manager + */ +namespace C +{ + // member of user-defined custom serialization structure + struct UserDataMember_t + { + // @todo: not sure is it possible and how todo this with projections, so currently done with pointer-to-member thing, probably could be optimized + template + constexpr UserDataMember_t(const FNV1A_t uNameHash, const FNV1A_t uTypeHash, const T C::*pMember) : + uNameHash(uNameHash), uTypeHash(uTypeHash), nDataSize(sizeof(std::remove_pointer_t)), uBaseOffset(reinterpret_cast(std::addressof(static_cast(nullptr)->*pMember))) { } // @test: 'CS_OFFSETOF' must expand to the same result but for some reason it doesn't + + // hash of custom variable name + FNV1A_t uNameHash = 0U; + // hash of custom variable type + FNV1A_t uTypeHash = 0U; + // data size of custom variable type + std::size_t nDataSize = 0U; + // offset to the custom variable from the base of class + std::size_t uBaseOffset = 0U; + }; + + // user-defined custom serialization structure + struct UserDataType_t + { + [[nodiscard]] std::size_t GetSerializationSize() const; + + FNV1A_t uTypeHash = 0U; + std::vector vecMembers = {}; + }; + + // variable info and value storage holder + struct VariableObject_t + { + // @test: it's required value to be either trivially copyable or allocated/copied by new/placement-new operators, otherwise it may cause UB + template requires (!std::is_void_v && std::is_trivially_copyable_v) + VariableObject_t(const FNV1A_t uNameHash, const FNV1A_t uTypeHash, const T& valueDefault) : + uNameHash(uNameHash), uTypeHash(uTypeHash), nStorageSize(sizeof(T)) + { +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI + // store RTTI address if available + this->pTypeInfo = &typeid(std::remove_cvref_t); +#endif + + // @todo: do not call setstorage, instead construct it by placement-new operator + // allocate storage on the heap if it doesnt't fit on the local one + if constexpr (sizeof(T) > sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)) + this->storage.pHeap = MEM::HeapAlloc(this->nStorageSize); + + SetStorage(&valueDefault); + } + + VariableObject_t(VariableObject_t&& other) noexcept : + uNameHash(other.uNameHash), uTypeHash(other.uTypeHash), nStorageSize(other.nStorageSize) + { +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI + this->pTypeInfo = other.pTypeInfo; +#endif + + if (this->nStorageSize <= sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)) + CRT::MemoryCopy(&this->storage.uLocal, &other.storage.uLocal, sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)); + else + { + this->storage.pHeap = other.storage.pHeap; + + // prevent it from being freed when the moved object is destroyed + other.storage.pHeap = nullptr; + } + } + + VariableObject_t(const VariableObject_t& other) : + uNameHash(other.uNameHash), uTypeHash(other.uTypeHash), nStorageSize(other.nStorageSize) + { +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI + this->pTypeInfo = other.pTypeInfo; +#endif + + if (this->nStorageSize <= sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)) + CRT::MemoryCopy(&this->storage.uLocal, &other.storage.uLocal, sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)); + else if (other.storage.pHeap != nullptr) + { + this->storage.pHeap = MEM::HeapAlloc(this->nStorageSize); + CRT::MemoryCopy(this->storage.pHeap, other.storage.pHeap, this->nStorageSize); + } + } + + ~VariableObject_t() + { + // check if heap memory is in use and allocated + if (this->nStorageSize > sizeof(this->storage.uLocal) && this->storage.pHeap != nullptr) + MEM::HeapFree(this->storage.pHeap); + } + + VariableObject_t& operator=(VariableObject_t&& other) noexcept + { + // check if heap memory is in use and allocated + if (this->nStorageSize > sizeof(this->storage.uLocal) && this->storage.pHeap != nullptr) + MEM::HeapFree(this->storage.pHeap); + + this->uNameHash = other.uNameHash; + this->uTypeHash = other.uTypeHash; + this->nStorageSize = other.nStorageSize; + +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI + this->pTypeInfo = other.pTypeInfo; +#endif + + if (this->nStorageSize <= sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)) + CRT::MemoryCopy(&this->storage.uLocal, &other.storage.uLocal, sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)); + else + { + this->storage.pHeap = other.storage.pHeap; + + // prevent it from being freed when the moved object is destroyed + other.storage.pHeap = nullptr; + } + + return *this; + } + + VariableObject_t& operator=(const VariableObject_t& other) + { + // check if heap memory is in use and allocated + if (this->nStorageSize > sizeof(this->storage.uLocal) && this->storage.pHeap != nullptr) + MEM::HeapFree(this->storage.pHeap); + + this->uNameHash = other.uNameHash; + this->uTypeHash = other.uTypeHash; + this->nStorageSize = other.nStorageSize; + +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI + this->pTypeInfo = other.pTypeInfo; +#endif + + if (this->nStorageSize <= sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)) + CRT::MemoryCopy(&this->storage.uLocal, &other.storage.uLocal, sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)); + else if (other.storage.pHeap != nullptr) + { + this->storage.pHeap = MEM::HeapAlloc(this->nStorageSize); + CRT::MemoryCopy(this->storage.pHeap, other.storage.pHeap, this->nStorageSize); + } + + return *this; + } + + /// @tparam bTypeSafe if true, activates additional comparison of source and requested type information, requires RTTI + /// @returns: pointer to the value storage, null if @a'bTypeSafe' is active and the access type does not match the variable type + template requires (std::is_object_v) + [[nodiscard]] const T* GetStorage() const + { +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI + // sanity check of stored value type and asked value type + if constexpr (bTypeSafe) + { + if (const std::type_info& currentTypeInfo = typeid(std::remove_cvref_t); this->pTypeInfo != nullptr && CRT::StringCompare(this->pTypeInfo->raw_name(), currentTypeInfo.raw_name()) != 0) + { + if (char szPresentTypeName[64] = {}, szAccessTypeName[64] = {}; + MEM::fnUnDecorateSymbolName(this->pTypeInfo->raw_name() + 1U, szPresentTypeName, CS_ARRAYSIZE(szPresentTypeName), UNDNAME_NO_ARGUMENTS) != 0UL && + MEM::fnUnDecorateSymbolName(currentTypeInfo.raw_name() + 1U, szAccessTypeName, CS_ARRAYSIZE(szAccessTypeName), UNDNAME_NO_ARGUMENTS) != 0UL) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("accessing variable of type: \"") << szPresentTypeName << CS_XOR("\" with wrong type: \"") << szAccessTypeName << CS_XOR("\""); + } + + CS_ASSERT(false); // storage value and asked data type mismatch + return nullptr; + } + } +#endif + + // check is value stored in the local storage + if (this->nStorageSize <= sizeof(this->storage.uLocal)) + return reinterpret_cast*>(&this->storage.uLocal); + + // otherwise it is allocated in the heap memory + CS_ASSERT(this->storage.pHeap != nullptr); // tried to access non allocated storage + return static_cast*>(this->storage.pHeap); + } + + template requires (std::is_object_v) + [[nodiscard]] T* GetStorage() + { + return const_cast(static_cast(this)->GetStorage()); + } + + // replace variable contained value + void SetStorage(const void* pValue); + /// @returns: the size of the data to be serialized/de-serialized into/from the configuration file + [[nodiscard]] std::size_t GetSerializationSize() const; + + // hash of variable name + FNV1A_t uNameHash = 0x0; + // hash of value type + FNV1A_t uTypeHash = 0x0; +#ifndef CS_NO_RTTI + // address of RTTI type data for value type + const std::type_info* pTypeInfo = nullptr; +#endif + // value storage size in bytes + std::size_t nStorageSize = 0U; + + // value storage + union + { + void* pHeap; + std::uint8_t uLocal[sizeof(std::uintptr_t)]; // @test: expand local storage size to fit max possible size of trivial type so we can minimize heap allocations count + } storage = { nullptr }; + }; + + // create directories and default configuration file + bool Setup(const wchar_t* wszDefaultFileName); + + /* @section: main */ + // loop through directory content and store all user configurations filenames + void Refresh(); + /// register user-defined data structure type and it's member variables + /// @param[in] vecUserMembers member variables of structure that needs to be serialized/de-serialized + void AddUserType(const FNV1A_t uTypeHash, std::initializer_list vecUserMembers); + /// write/re-write single variable to existing configuration file + /// @returns: true if variable has been found or created and successfully written, false otherwise + bool SaveFileVariable(const std::size_t nFileIndex, const VariableObject_t& variable); + /// read single variable from existing configuration file + /// @remarks: when the version of cheat is greater than version of the configuration file and @a'variable' wasn't found, this function saves it and updates the version to the current one, note that it doesn't affect to return value + /// @returns: true if variable has been found and successfully read, false otherwise + bool LoadFileVariable(const std::size_t nFileIndex, VariableObject_t& variable); + /// erase single variable from existing configuration file + /// @returns: true if variable did not exist or was successfully removed, false otherwise + bool RemoveFileVariable(const std::size_t nFileIndex, const VariableObject_t& variable); + /// create a new configuration file and save it + /// @param[in] wszFileName file name of configuration file to save and write in + /// @returns: true if file has been successfully created and all variables were written to it, false otherwise + bool CreateFile(const wchar_t* wszFileName); + /// serialize variables into the configuration file + /// @param[in] nFileIndex index of the exist configuration file name + /// @returns: true if all variables were successfully written to the file, false otherwise + bool SaveFile(const std::size_t nFileIndex); + /// de-serialize variables from the configuration file + /// @param[in] nFileIndex index of the exist configuration file name + /// @returns: true if all variables were successfully loaded from the file, false otherwise + bool LoadFile(const std::size_t nFileIndex); + /// remove configuration file + /// @param[in] nFileIndex index of the exist configuration file name + void RemoveFile(const std::size_t nFileIndex); + + /* @section: values */ + // all user configuration filenames + inline std::vector vecFileNames = {}; + // custom user-defined serialization data types + inline std::vector vecUserTypes = {}; + // configuration variables storage + inline std::vector vecVariables = {}; + + /* @section: get */ + /// @returns: index of variable with given name hash if it exist, 'C_INVALID_VARIABLE' otherwise + [[nodiscard]] std::size_t GetVariableIndex(const FNV1A_t uNameHash); + + /// @tparam T type of variable we're going to get, must be exactly the same as when registered + /// @returns: variable value at given index + template + [[nodiscard]] T& Get(const std::size_t nIndex) + { + return *vecVariables[nIndex].GetStorage(); + } + + // @todo: get rid of templates, so it doesn't compile duplicates and we're able to merge things to .cpp + /// add new configuration variable + /// @returns: index of added variable + template requires (!std::is_array_v) + std::size_t AddVariable(const FNV1A_t uNameHash, const FNV1A_t uTypeHash, const T& valueDefault) + { + vecVariables.emplace_back(uNameHash, uTypeHash, valueDefault); + return vecVariables.size() - 1U; + } + + /// add new configuration array variable initialized by single value + /// @returns: index of added array variable + template requires (std::is_array_v) + std::size_t AddVariableArray(const FNV1A_t uNameHash, const FNV1A_t uTypeHash, const std::remove_pointer_t> valueDefault) + { + using BaseType_t = std::remove_pointer_t>; + + T arrValueDefault; + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < sizeof(T) / sizeof(BaseType_t); i++) + arrValueDefault[i] = valueDefault; + + vecVariables.emplace_back(uNameHash, uTypeHash, arrValueDefault); + return vecVariables.size() - 1U; + } + + /// add new configuration array variable with multiple values initialized + /// @returns: index of added array variable + template requires (std::is_array_v) + std::size_t AddVariableArray(const FNV1A_t uNameHash, const FNV1A_t uTypeHash, std::initializer_list>> vecValuesDefault) + { + using BaseType_t = std::remove_pointer_t>; + + T arrValueDefault; + CRT::MemorySet(arrValueDefault, 0U, sizeof(T)); + CRT::MemoryCopy(arrValueDefault, vecValuesDefault.begin(), vecValuesDefault.size() * sizeof(BaseType_t)); + + vecVariables.emplace_back(uNameHash, uTypeHash, arrValueDefault); + return vecVariables.size() - 1U; + } + + inline void RemoveVariable(const std::size_t nIndex) + { + vecVariables.erase(vecVariables.begin() + nIndex); + } +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/convars.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/convars.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..594c901 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/convars.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +// used: [stl] vector +#include +// used: [stl] find_if +#include + +#include "convars.h" + +// used: convar interface +#include "interfaces.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/ienginecvar.h" +// used: l_print +#include "../utilities/log.h" + +// used: getworkingpath +#include "../core.h" + +inline static void WriteConVarType(HANDLE hFile, const uint32_t nType) +{ + switch ((EConVarType)nType) + { + case EConVarType_Bool: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[bool] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[bool] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Int16: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[int16] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[int16] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_UInt16: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[uint16] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[uint16] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Int32: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[int32] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[int32] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_UInt32: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[uint32] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[uint32] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Int64: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[int64] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[int64] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_UInt64: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[uint64] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[uint64] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Float32: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[float32] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[float32] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Float64: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[float64] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[float64] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_String: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[string] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[string] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Color: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[color] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[color] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Vector2: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[vector2] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[vector2] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Vector3: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[vector3] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[vector3] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Vector4: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[vector4] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[vector4] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + case EConVarType_Qangle: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[qangle] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[qangle] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + default: + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[unknown-type] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[unknown-type] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + break; + } +} + +inline static void WriteConVarFlags(HANDLE hFile, const uint32_t nFlags) +{ + if (nFlags & FCVAR_CLIENTDLL) + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[client.dll] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[client.dll] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + else if (nFlags & FCVAR_GAMEDLL) + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[games's dll] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[games's dll] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + + if (nFlags & FCVAR_PROTECTED) + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[protected] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[protected] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + + if (nFlags & FCVAR_CHEAT) + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[cheat] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[cheat] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + + if (nFlags & FCVAR_HIDDEN) + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[hidden] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[hidden] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + + if (nFlags & FCVAR_DEVELOPMENTONLY) + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("[devonly] "), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("[devonly] ")), nullptr, nullptr); + + ::WriteFile(hFile, CS_XOR("\n"), CRT::StringLength(CS_XOR("\n")), nullptr, nullptr); +} + +bool CONVAR::Dump(const wchar_t* wszFileName) +{ + wchar_t wszDumpFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + if (!CORE::GetWorkingPath(wszDumpFilePath)) + return false; + + CRT::StringCat(wszDumpFilePath, wszFileName); + + HANDLE hOutFile = ::CreateFileW(wszDumpFilePath, GENERIC_WRITE, FILE_SHARE_READ, nullptr, CREATE_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, nullptr); + if (hOutFile == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) + return false; + + // @todo: maybe remove this redundant? and put it inside CRT::String_t c'tor + const std::time_t time = std::time(nullptr); + std::tm timePoint; + localtime_s(&timePoint, &time); + + CRT::String_t<64> szTimeBuffer(CS_XOR("[%d-%m-%Y %T] asphyxia | convars dump\n\n"), &timePoint); + + // write current date, time and info + ::WriteFile(hOutFile, szTimeBuffer.Data(), szTimeBuffer.Length(), nullptr, nullptr); + + for (int i = I::Cvar->listConvars.Head(); i != I::Cvar->listConvars.InvalidIndex(); i = I::Cvar->listConvars.Next(i)) + { + CConVar* pConVar = I::Cvar->listConvars.Element(i); + if (pConVar != nullptr) + { + // dump to file + WriteConVarType(hOutFile, pConVar->nType); + + CRT::String_t<526> szBuffer(CS_XOR("%s : \"%s\" "), pConVar->szName, pConVar->szDescription[0] == '\0' ? CS_XOR("no description") : pConVar->szDescription); + ::WriteFile(hOutFile, szBuffer.Data(), szBuffer.Length(), nullptr, nullptr); + + // write flags + WriteConVarFlags(hOutFile, pConVar->nFlags); + } + } + + ::CloseHandle(hOutFile); + + return true; +} + +bool CONVAR::Setup() +{ + bool bSuccess = true; + + m_pitch = I::Cvar->Find(FNV1A::HashConst("m_pitch")); + bSuccess &= m_pitch != nullptr; + + m_yaw = I::Cvar->Find(FNV1A::HashConst("m_yaw")); + bSuccess &= m_yaw != nullptr; + + sensitivity = I::Cvar->Find(FNV1A::HashConst("sensitivity")); + bSuccess &= sensitivity != nullptr; + + game_type = I::Cvar->Find(FNV1A::HashConst("game_type")); + bSuccess &= game_type != nullptr; + + game_mode = I::Cvar->Find(FNV1A::HashConst("game_mode")); + bSuccess &= game_mode != nullptr; + + mp_teammates_are_enemies = I::Cvar->Find(FNV1A::HashConst("mp_teammates_are_enemies")); + bSuccess &= mp_teammates_are_enemies != nullptr; + + sv_autobunnyhopping = I::Cvar->Find(FNV1A::HashConst("sv_autobunnyhopping")); + bSuccess &= sv_autobunnyhopping != nullptr; + + return bSuccess; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/convars.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/convars.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6da2069 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/convars.h @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +#pragma once + +class CConVar; + +namespace CONVAR +{ + // dump convars to file + bool Dump(const wchar_t* wszFileName); + // setup convars + bool Setup(); + + inline CConVar* m_pitch = nullptr; + inline CConVar* m_yaw = nullptr; + inline CConVar* sensitivity = nullptr; + + inline CConVar* game_type = nullptr; + inline CConVar* game_mode = nullptr; + + inline CConVar* mp_teammates_are_enemies = nullptr; + + inline CConVar* sv_autobunnyhopping = nullptr; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/hooks.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/hooks.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..76bfba8 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/hooks.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,303 @@ +#include "hooks.h" + +// used: variables +#include "variables.h" + +// used: game's sdk +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iswapchaindx11.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iviewrender.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/ccsgoinput.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iinputsystem.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/inetworkclientservice.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iglobalvars.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/imaterialsystem.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/ipvs.h" + +// used: viewsetup +#include "../sdk/datatypes/viewsetup.h" + +// used: entity +#include "../sdk/entity.h" + +// used: get virtual function, find pattern, ... +#include "../utilities/memory.h" +// used: inputsystem +#include "../utilities/inputsystem.h" +// used: draw +#include "../utilities/draw.h" + +// used: features callbacks +#include "../features.h" +// used: CRC rebuild +#include "../features/CRC.h" + +// used: game's interfaces +#include "interfaces.h" +#include "sdk.h" + +// used: menu +#include "menu.h" + +bool H::Setup() +{ + if (MH_Initialize() != MH_OK) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to initialize minhook"); + + return false; + } + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("minhook initialization completed"); + + if (!hkPresent.Create(MEM::GetVFunc(I::SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain, VTABLE::D3D::PRESENT), reinterpret_cast(&Present))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"Present\" hook has been created"); + + if (!hkResizeBuffers.Create(MEM::GetVFunc(I::SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain, VTABLE::D3D::RESIZEBUFFERS), reinterpret_cast(&ResizeBuffers))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"ResizeBuffers\" hook has been created"); + + // creat swap chain hook + IDXGIDevice* pDXGIDevice = NULL; + I::Device->QueryInterface(IID_PPV_ARGS(&pDXGIDevice)); + + IDXGIAdapter* pDXGIAdapter = NULL; + pDXGIDevice->GetAdapter(&pDXGIAdapter); + + IDXGIFactory* pIDXGIFactory = NULL; + pDXGIAdapter->GetParent(IID_PPV_ARGS(&pIDXGIFactory)); + + if (!hkCreateSwapChain.Create(MEM::GetVFunc(pIDXGIFactory, VTABLE::DXGI::CREATESWAPCHAIN), reinterpret_cast(&CreateSwapChain))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"CreateSwapChain\" hook has been created"); + + pDXGIDevice->Release(); + pDXGIDevice = nullptr; + pDXGIAdapter->Release(); + pDXGIAdapter = nullptr; + pIDXGIFactory->Release(); + pIDXGIFactory = nullptr; + + // @ida: class CViewRender->OnRenderStart call GetMatricesForView + if (!hkGetMatrixForView.Create(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("40 53 48 81 EC ? ? ? ? 49 8B C1")), reinterpret_cast(&GetMatrixForView))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"GetMatrixForView\" hook has been created"); + + // @ida: #STR: cl: CreateMove clamped invalid attack history index %d in frame history to -1. Was %d, frame history size %d.\n + if (!hkCreateMove.Create(MEM::GetVFunc(I::Input, VTABLE::CLIENT::CREATEMOVE), reinterpret_cast(&CreateMove))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"CreateMove\" hook has been created"); + + if (!hkMouseInputEnabled.Create(MEM::GetVFunc(I::Input, VTABLE::CLIENT::MOUSEINPUTENABLED), reinterpret_cast(&MouseInputEnabled))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"MouseInputEnabled\" hook has been created"); + + if (!hkFrameStageNotify.Create(MEM::GetVFunc(I::Client, VTABLE::CLIENT::FRAMESTAGENOTIFY), reinterpret_cast(&FrameStageNotify))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"FrameStageNotify\" hook has been created"); + + // @ida: ClientModeShared -> #STR: "mapname", "transition", "game_newmap" + if (!hkLevelInit.Create(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 ? 56 48 83 EC ? 48 8B 0D ? ? ? ? 48 8B F2")), reinterpret_cast(&LevelInit))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"LevelInit\" hook has been created"); + + // @ida: ClientModeShared -> #STR: "map_shutdown" + if (!hkLevelShutdown.Create(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 83 EC ? 48 8B 0D ? ? ? ? 48 8D 15 ? ? ? ? 45 33 C9 45 33 C0 48 8B 01 FF 50 ? 48 85 C0 74 ? 48 8B 0D ? ? ? ? 48 8B D0 4C 8B 01 41 FF 50 ? 48 83 C4")), reinterpret_cast(&LevelShutdown))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"LevelShutdown\" hook has been created"); + + // @note: seems to do nothing for now... + // @ida: ClientModeCSNormal->OverrideView idx 15 + //v21 = flSomeWidthSize * 0.5; + //v22 = *flSomeHeightSize * 0.5; + //*(float*)(pSetup + 0x49C) = v21; // m_OrthoRight + //*(float*)(pSetup + 0x494) = -v21; // m_OrthoLeft + //*(float*)(pSetup + 0x498) = -v22; // m_OrthoTop + //*(float*)(pSetup + 0x4A0) = v22; // m_OrthoBottom + //if (!hkOverrideView.Create(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 ? 48 89 6C 24 ? 48 89 74 24 ? 57 41 56 41 57 48 83 EC ? 48 8B FA E8")), reinterpret_cast(&OverrideView))) + // return false; + + //L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"OverrideView\" hook has been created"); + + if (!hkDrawObject.Create(MEM::FindPattern(SCENESYSTEM_DLL, CS_XOR("48 8B C4 53 41 54 41 55 48 81 EC ? ? ? ? 4D 63 E1")), reinterpret_cast(&DrawObject))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"DrawObject\" hook has been created"); + + if (!hkIsRelativeMouseMode.Create(MEM::GetVFunc(I::InputSystem, VTABLE::INPUTSYSTEM::ISRELATIVEMOUSEMODE), reinterpret_cast(&IsRelativeMouseMode))) + return false; + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("\"IsRelativeMouseMode\" hook has been created"); + + return true; +} + +void H::Destroy() +{ + MH_DisableHook(MH_ALL_HOOKS); + MH_RemoveHook(MH_ALL_HOOKS); + + MH_Uninitialize(); +} + +HRESULT __stdcall H::Present(IDXGISwapChain* pSwapChain, UINT uSyncInterval, UINT uFlags) +{ + const auto oPresent = hkPresent.GetOriginal(); + + // recreate it if it's not valid + if (I::RenderTargetView == nullptr) + I::CreateRenderTarget(); + + // set our render target + if (I::RenderTargetView != nullptr) + I::DeviceContext->OMSetRenderTargets(1, &I::RenderTargetView, nullptr); + + F::OnPresent(); + + return oPresent(I::SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain, uSyncInterval, uFlags); +} + +HRESULT CS_FASTCALL H::ResizeBuffers(IDXGISwapChain* pSwapChain, std::uint32_t nBufferCount, std::uint32_t nWidth, std::uint32_t nHeight, DXGI_FORMAT newFormat, std::uint32_t nFlags) +{ + const auto oResizeBuffer = hkResizeBuffers.GetOriginal(); + + auto hResult = oResizeBuffer(pSwapChain, nBufferCount, nWidth, nHeight, newFormat, nFlags); + if (SUCCEEDED(hResult)) + I::CreateRenderTarget(); + + return hResult; +} + +HRESULT __stdcall H::CreateSwapChain(IDXGIFactory* pFactory, IUnknown* pDevice, DXGI_SWAP_CHAIN_DESC* pDesc, IDXGISwapChain** ppSwapChain) +{ + const auto oCreateSwapChain = hkCreateSwapChain.GetOriginal(); + + I::DestroyRenderTarget(); + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("render target view has been destroyed"); + + return oCreateSwapChain(pFactory, pDevice, pDesc, ppSwapChain); +} + +long H::WndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam) +{ + if (D::OnWndProc(hWnd, uMsg, wParam, lParam)) + return 1L; + + return ::CallWindowProcW(IPT::pOldWndProc, hWnd, uMsg, wParam, lParam); +} + +ViewMatrix_t* CS_FASTCALL H::GetMatrixForView(CRenderGameSystem* pRenderGameSystem, IViewRender* pViewRender, ViewMatrix_t* pOutWorldToView, ViewMatrix_t* pOutViewToProjection, ViewMatrix_t* pOutWorldToProjection, ViewMatrix_t* pOutWorldToPixels) +{ + const auto oGetMatrixForView = hkGetMatrixForView.GetOriginal(); + ViewMatrix_t* matResult = oGetMatrixForView(pRenderGameSystem, pViewRender, pOutWorldToView, pOutViewToProjection, pOutWorldToProjection, pOutWorldToPixels); + + // get view matrix + SDK::ViewMatrix = *pOutWorldToProjection; + // get camera position + // @note: ida @GetMatrixForView(global_pointer, pRenderGameSystem + 16, ...) + SDK::CameraPosition = pViewRender->vecOrigin; + + return matResult; +} + +bool CS_FASTCALL H::CreateMove(CCSGOInput* pInput, int nSlot, bool bActive) +{ + const auto oCreateMove = hkCreateMove.GetOriginal(); + const bool bResult = oCreateMove(pInput, nSlot, bActive); + + if (!I::Engine->IsConnected() || !I::Engine->IsInGame()) + return bResult; + + CUserCmd* pCmd = SDK::Cmd = pInput->GetUserCmd(); + if (pCmd == nullptr) + return bResult; + + CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd = pCmd->csgoUserCmd.pBaseCmd; + if (pBaseCmd == nullptr) + return bResult; + + SDK::LocalController = CCSPlayerController::GetLocalPlayerController(); + if (SDK::LocalController == nullptr) + return bResult; + + SDK::LocalPawn = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(SDK::LocalController->GetPawnHandle()); + if (SDK::LocalPawn == nullptr) + return bResult; + + F::OnCreateMove(pCmd, pBaseCmd, SDK::LocalController); + + CRC::Save(pBaseCmd); + if (CRC::CalculateCRC(pBaseCmd) == true) + CRC::Apply(pCmd); + + return bResult; +} + +bool CS_FASTCALL H::MouseInputEnabled(void* pThisptr) +{ + const auto oMouseInputEnabled = hkMouseInputEnabled.GetOriginal(); + return MENU::bMainWindowOpened ? false : oMouseInputEnabled(pThisptr); +} + +void CS_FASTCALL H::FrameStageNotify(void* rcx, int nFrameStage) +{ + const auto oFrameStageNotify = hkFrameStageNotify.GetOriginal(); + F::OnFrameStageNotify(nFrameStage); + + return oFrameStageNotify(rcx, nFrameStage); +} + +__int64* CS_FASTCALL H::LevelInit(void* pClientModeShared, const char* szNewMap) +{ + const auto oLevelInit = hkLevelInit.GetOriginal(); + // if global variables are not captured during I::Setup or we join a new game, recapture it + if (I::GlobalVars == nullptr) + I::GlobalVars = *reinterpret_cast(MEM::ResolveRelativeAddress(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 0D ? ? ? ? 48 89 41")), 0x3, 0x7)); + + // disable model occlusion + I::PVS->Set(false); + + return oLevelInit(pClientModeShared, szNewMap); +} + +__int64 CS_FASTCALL H::LevelShutdown(void* pClientModeShared) +{ + const auto oLevelShutdown = hkLevelShutdown.GetOriginal(); + // reset global variables since it got discarded by the game + I::GlobalVars = nullptr; + + return oLevelShutdown(pClientModeShared); +} + +void CS_FASTCALL H::OverrideView(void* pClientModeCSNormal, CViewSetup* pSetup) +{ + const auto oOverrideView = hkOverrideView.GetOriginal(); + if (!I::Engine->IsConnected() || !I::Engine->IsInGame()) + return hkOverrideView.GetOriginal()(pClientModeCSNormal, pSetup); + + oOverrideView(pClientModeCSNormal, pSetup); +} + +void CS_FASTCALL H::DrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2) +{ + const auto oDrawObject = hkDrawObject.GetOriginal(); + if (!I::Engine->IsConnected() || !I::Engine->IsInGame()) + return oDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); + + if (SDK::LocalController == nullptr || SDK::LocalPawn == nullptr) + return oDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); + + if (!F::OnDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2)) + oDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); +} + +void* H::IsRelativeMouseMode(void* pThisptr, bool bActive) +{ + const auto oIsRelativeMouseMode = hkIsRelativeMouseMode.GetOriginal(); + + MENU::bMainActive = bActive; + + if (MENU::bMainWindowOpened) + return oIsRelativeMouseMode(pThisptr, false); + + return oIsRelativeMouseMode(pThisptr, bActive); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/hooks.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/hooks.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..408e26d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/hooks.h @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: [d3d] api +#include +#include + +// used: chookobject +#include "../utilities/detourhook.h" + +// used: viewmatrix_t +#include "../sdk/datatypes/matrix.h" + +namespace VTABLE +{ + namespace D3D + { + enum + { + PRESENT = 8U, + RESIZEBUFFERS = 13U, + RESIZEBUFFERS_CSTYLE = 39U, + }; + } + + namespace DXGI + { + enum + { + CREATESWAPCHAIN = 10U, + }; + } + + namespace CLIENT + { + enum + { + CREATEMOVE = 5U, + MOUSEINPUTENABLED = 16U, + FRAMESTAGENOTIFY = 36U, + }; + } + + namespace INPUTSYSTEM + { + enum + { + ISRELATIVEMOUSEMODE = 78U, + }; + } +} + +class CRenderGameSystem; +class IViewRender; +class CCSGOInput; +class CViewSetup; +class CMeshData; + +namespace H +{ + bool Setup(); + void Destroy(); + + /* @section: handlers */ + // d3d11 & wndproc + HRESULT WINAPI Present(IDXGISwapChain* pSwapChain, UINT uSyncInterval, UINT uFlags); + HRESULT CS_FASTCALL ResizeBuffers(IDXGISwapChain* pSwapChain, std::uint32_t nBufferCount, std::uint32_t nWidth, std::uint32_t nHeight, DXGI_FORMAT newFormat, std::uint32_t nFlags); + HRESULT WINAPI CreateSwapChain(IDXGIFactory* pFactory, IUnknown* pDevice, DXGI_SWAP_CHAIN_DESC* pDesc, IDXGISwapChain** ppSwapChain); + long CALLBACK WndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); + + // game's functions + ViewMatrix_t* CS_FASTCALL GetMatrixForView(CRenderGameSystem* pRenderGameSystem, IViewRender* pViewRender, ViewMatrix_t* pOutWorldToView, ViewMatrix_t* pOutViewToProjection, ViewMatrix_t* pOutWorldToProjection, ViewMatrix_t* pOutWorldToPixels); + bool CS_FASTCALL CreateMove(CCSGOInput* pInput, int nSlot, bool bActive); + bool CS_FASTCALL MouseInputEnabled(void* pThisptr); + void CS_FASTCALL FrameStageNotify(void* rcx, int nFrameStage); + __int64* CS_FASTCALL LevelInit(void* pClientModeShared, const char* szNewMap); + __int64 CS_FASTCALL LevelShutdown(void* pClientModeShared); + void CS_FASTCALL OverrideView(void* pClientModeCSNormal, CViewSetup* pSetup); + void CS_FASTCALL DrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2); + void* IsRelativeMouseMode(void* pThisptr, bool bActive); + + /* @section: managers */ + inline CBaseHookObject hkPresent = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkResizeBuffers = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkCreateSwapChain = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkWndProc = {}; + + inline CBaseHookObject hkGetMatrixForView = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkCreateMove = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkMouseInputEnabled = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkIsRelativeMouseMode = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkFrameStageNotify = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkLevelInit = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkLevelShutdown = {}; + inline CBaseHookObject hkOverrideView = {}; + + inline CBaseHookObject hkDrawObject = {}; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/interfaces.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/interfaces.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dfb30e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/interfaces.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +// used: [d3d] api +#include + +#include "interfaces.h" + +// used: findpattern, callvirtual, getvfunc... +#include "../utilities/memory.h" + +// used: l_print +#include "../utilities/log.h" + +// used: iswapchaindx11 +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iswapchaindx11.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iresourcesystem.h" + +#pragma region interfaces_get + +using InstantiateInterfaceFn_t = void* (*)(); + +class CInterfaceRegister +{ +public: + InstantiateInterfaceFn_t fnCreate; + const char* szName; + CInterfaceRegister* pNext; +}; + +static const CInterfaceRegister* GetRegisterList(const wchar_t* wszModuleName) +{ + void* hModule = MEM::GetModuleBaseHandle(wszModuleName); + if (hModule == nullptr) + return nullptr; + + std::uint8_t* pCreateInterface = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(hModule, CS_XOR("CreateInterface"))); + + if (pCreateInterface == nullptr) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to get \"CreateInterface\" address"); + return nullptr; + } + + return *reinterpret_cast(MEM::ResolveRelativeAddress(pCreateInterface, 0x3, 0x7)); +} + +template +T* Capture(const CInterfaceRegister* pModuleRegister, const char* szInterfaceName) +{ + for (const CInterfaceRegister* pRegister = pModuleRegister; pRegister != nullptr; pRegister = pRegister->pNext) + { + if (const std::size_t nInterfaceNameLength = CRT::StringLength(szInterfaceName); + // found needed interface + CRT::StringCompareN(szInterfaceName, pRegister->szName, nInterfaceNameLength) == 0 && + // and we've given full name with hardcoded digits + (CRT::StringLength(pRegister->szName) == nInterfaceNameLength || + // or it contains digits after name + CRT::StringToInteger(pRegister->szName + nInterfaceNameLength, nullptr, 10) > 0)) + { + // capture our interface + void* pInterface = pRegister->fnCreate(); + +#ifdef _DEBUG + // log interface address + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("captured \"") << pRegister->szName << CS_XOR("\" interface at address: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX) << reinterpret_cast(pInterface); +#else + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("captured \"") << pRegister->szName << CS_XOR("\" interface"); +#endif + + return static_cast(pInterface); + } + } + + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to find interface \"") << szInterfaceName << CS_XOR("\""); + return nullptr; +} + +#pragma endregion + +bool I::Setup() +{ + bool bSuccess = true; + +#pragma region interface_game_exported + const auto pTier0Handle = MEM::GetModuleBaseHandle(TIER0_DLL); + if (pTier0Handle == nullptr) + return false; + + MemAlloc = *reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(pTier0Handle, CS_XOR("g_pMemAlloc"))); + bSuccess &= (MemAlloc != nullptr); + + const auto pSchemaSystemRegisterList = GetRegisterList(SCHEMASYSTEM_DLL); + if (pSchemaSystemRegisterList == nullptr) + return false; + + SchemaSystem = Capture(pSchemaSystemRegisterList, SCHEMA_SYSTEM); + bSuccess &= (SchemaSystem != nullptr); + + const auto pInputSystemRegisterList = GetRegisterList(INPUTSYSTEM_DLL); + if (pInputSystemRegisterList == nullptr) + return false; + + InputSystem = Capture(pInputSystemRegisterList, INPUT_SYSTEM_VERSION); + bSuccess &= (InputSystem != nullptr); + + const auto pEngineRegisterList = GetRegisterList(ENGINE2_DLL); + if (pEngineRegisterList == nullptr) + return false; + + GameResourceService = Capture(pEngineRegisterList, GAME_RESOURCE_SERVICE_CLIENT); + bSuccess &= (GameResourceService != nullptr); + + Engine = Capture(pEngineRegisterList, SOURCE2_ENGINE_TO_CLIENT); + bSuccess &= (Engine != nullptr); + + NetworkClientService = Capture(pEngineRegisterList, NETWORK_CLIENT_SERVICE); + bSuccess &= (NetworkClientService != nullptr); + + const auto pTier0RegisterList = GetRegisterList(TIER0_DLL); + if (pTier0RegisterList == nullptr) + return false; + + Cvar = Capture(pTier0RegisterList, ENGINE_CVAR); + bSuccess &= (Cvar != nullptr); + + const auto pClientRegister = GetRegisterList(CLIENT_DLL); + if (pClientRegister == nullptr) + return false; + + Client = Capture(pClientRegister, SOURCE2_CLIENT); + bSuccess &= (Client != nullptr); + + const auto pMaterialSystem2Register = GetRegisterList(MATERIAL_SYSTEM2_DLL); + if (pMaterialSystem2Register == nullptr) + return false; + + MaterialSystem2 = Capture(pMaterialSystem2Register, MATERIAL_SYSTEM2); + bSuccess &= (MaterialSystem2 != nullptr); + + const auto pResourceSystemRegisterList = GetRegisterList(RESOURCESYSTEM_DLL); + if (pResourceSystemRegisterList == nullptr) + return false; + + ResourceSystem = Capture(pResourceSystemRegisterList, RESOURCE_SYSTEM); + bSuccess &= (ResourceSystem != nullptr); + + if (ResourceSystem != nullptr) + { + ResourceHandleUtils = reinterpret_cast(ResourceSystem->QueryInterface(RESOURCE_HANDLE_UTILS)); + bSuccess &= (ResourceHandleUtils != nullptr); + } + +#pragma endregion + + // @ida: #STR: "r_gpu_mem_stats", "-threads", "CTSListBase: Misaligned list\n", "CTSQueue: Misaligned queue\n", "Display GPU memory usage.", "-r_max_device_threads" + SwapChain = **reinterpret_cast(MEM::ResolveRelativeAddress(MEM::FindPattern(RENDERSYSTEM_DLL, CS_XOR("66 0F 7F 0D ? ? ? ? 66 0F 7F 05 ? ? ? ? 0F 1F 40")), 0x4, 0x8)); + bSuccess &= (SwapChain != nullptr); + + // grab's d3d11 interfaces for later use + if (SwapChain != nullptr) + { + if (FAILED(SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain->GetDevice(__uuidof(ID3D11Device), (void**)&Device))) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to get device from swapchain"); + CS_ASSERT(false); + return false; + } + else + // we successfully got device, so we can get immediate context + Device->GetImmediateContext(&DeviceContext); + } + bSuccess &= (Device != nullptr && DeviceContext != nullptr); + + Input = *reinterpret_cast(MEM::ResolveRelativeAddress(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 8B 0D ? ? ? ? E8 ? ? ? ? 8B BE 84 12 00 00")), 0x3, 0x7)); + bSuccess &= (Input != nullptr); + + // @ida: STR '%s: %f tick(%d) curtime(%f) OnSequenceCycleChanged: %s : %d=[%s]' + GlobalVars = *reinterpret_cast(MEM::ResolveRelativeAddress(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 0D ? ? ? ? 48 89 41")), 0x3, 0x7)); + bSuccess &= (GlobalVars != nullptr); + + PVS = reinterpret_cast(MEM::ResolveRelativeAddress(MEM::FindPattern(ENGINE2_DLL, CS_XOR("48 8D 0D ? ? ? ? 33 D2 FF 50")), 0x3, 0x7)); + bSuccess &= (PVS != nullptr); + + GameTraceManager = *reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetAbsoluteAddress(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("4C 8B 3D ? ? ? ? 24 C9 0C 49 66 0F 7F 45 ?")), 0x3, 0x0)); + bSuccess &= (GameTraceManager != nullptr); + + return bSuccess; +} + +void I::CreateRenderTarget() +{ + if (FAILED(SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain->GetDevice(__uuidof(ID3D11Device), (void**)&Device))) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to get device from swapchain"); + CS_ASSERT(false); + } + else + // we successfully got device, so we can get immediate context + Device->GetImmediateContext(&DeviceContext); + + // @note: i dont use this anywhere else so lambda is fine + static const auto GetCorrectDXGIFormat = [](DXGI_FORMAT eCurrentFormat) + { + switch (eCurrentFormat) + { + case DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_UNORM_SRGB: + return DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_UNORM; + } + + return eCurrentFormat; + }; + + DXGI_SWAP_CHAIN_DESC sd; + SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain->GetDesc(&sd); + + ID3D11Texture2D* pBackBuffer = nullptr; + if (SUCCEEDED(SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain->GetBuffer(0, IID_PPV_ARGS(&pBackBuffer)))) + { + if (pBackBuffer) + { + D3D11_RENDER_TARGET_VIEW_DESC desc{}; + desc.Format = static_cast(GetCorrectDXGIFormat(sd.BufferDesc.Format)); + desc.ViewDimension = D3D11_RTV_DIMENSION_TEXTURE2D; + if (FAILED(Device->CreateRenderTargetView(pBackBuffer, &desc, &RenderTargetView))) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("failed to create render target view with D3D11_RTV_DIMENSION_TEXTURE2D..."); + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("retrying to create render target view with D3D11_RTV_DIMENSION_TEXTURE2DMS..."); + desc.ViewDimension = D3D11_RTV_DIMENSION_TEXTURE2DMS; + if (FAILED(Device->CreateRenderTargetView(pBackBuffer, &desc, &RenderTargetView))) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("failed to create render target view with D3D11_RTV_DIMENSION_TEXTURE2D..."); + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("retrying..."); + if (FAILED(Device->CreateRenderTargetView(pBackBuffer, NULL, &RenderTargetView))) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to create render target view"); + CS_ASSERT(false); + } + } + } + pBackBuffer->Release(); + pBackBuffer = nullptr; + } + } +} + +void I::DestroyRenderTarget() +{ + if (RenderTargetView != nullptr) + { + RenderTargetView->Release(); + RenderTargetView = nullptr; + } +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/interfaces.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/interfaces.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8a88dd --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/interfaces.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +#pragma once + +#include "../common.h" + +// used: globalvariables +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iglobalvars.h" + +#pragma region sdk_definitons +#define GAME_RESOURCE_SERVICE_CLIENT CS_XOR("GameResourceServiceClientV00") +#define SOURCE2_CLIENT CS_XOR("Source2Client00") +#define SCHEMA_SYSTEM CS_XOR("SchemaSystem_00") +#define INPUT_SYSTEM_VERSION CS_XOR("InputSystemVersion00") +#define SOURCE2_ENGINE_TO_CLIENT CS_XOR("Source2EngineToClient00") +#define ENGINE_CVAR CS_XOR("VEngineCvar00") +#define LOCALIZE CS_XOR("Localize_00") +#define NETWORK_CLIENT_SERVICE CS_XOR("NetworkClientService_00") +#define MATERIAL_SYSTEM2 CS_XOR("VMaterialSystem2_00") +#define RESOURCE_SYSTEM CS_XOR("ResourceSystem013") +#define RESOURCE_HANDLE_UTILS CS_XOR("ResourceHandleUtils001") + +// @source: master/game/shared/shareddefs.h +#define TICK_INTERVAL 0.015625f +#define TIME_TO_TICKS(TIME) (static_cast(0.5f + static_cast(TIME) / TICK_INTERVAL)) +#define TICKS_TO_TIME(TICKS) (TICK_INTERVAL * static_cast(TICKS)) +#define ROUND_TO_TICKS(TIME) (TICK_INTERVAL * TIME_TO_TICKS(TIME)) +#define TICK_NEVER_THINK (-1) +#pragma endregion + +// game interfaces +class ISwapChainDx11; +class IMemAlloc; +class CCSGOInput; +class ISchemaSystem; +class IInputSystem; +class IGameResourceService; +class ISource2Client; +class IEngineClient; +class IEngineCVar; +class INetworkClientService; +class IMaterialSystem2; +class IResourceSystem; +class CResourceHandleUtils; +class CPVS; +class CGameTraceManager; + +// [d3d] struct +struct ID3D11Device; +struct ID3D11DeviceContext; +struct ID3D11RenderTargetView; + +namespace I +{ + bool Setup(); + + /* @section: helpers */ + // create and destroy render target view for handling resize + void CreateRenderTarget(); + void DestroyRenderTarget(); + + inline IMemAlloc* MemAlloc = nullptr; + inline ISwapChainDx11* SwapChain = nullptr; + inline ID3D11Device* Device = nullptr; + inline ID3D11DeviceContext* DeviceContext = nullptr; + inline ID3D11RenderTargetView* RenderTargetView = nullptr; + inline CCSGOInput* Input = nullptr; + inline ISchemaSystem* SchemaSystem = nullptr; + inline IGlobalVars* GlobalVars = nullptr; + inline IInputSystem* InputSystem = nullptr; + inline IGameResourceService* GameResourceService = nullptr; + inline ISource2Client* Client = nullptr; + inline IEngineClient* Engine = nullptr; + inline IEngineCVar* Cvar = nullptr; + inline INetworkClientService* NetworkClientService = nullptr; + inline IMaterialSystem2* MaterialSystem2 = nullptr; + inline IResourceSystem* ResourceSystem = nullptr; + inline CResourceHandleUtils* ResourceHandleUtils = nullptr; + inline CPVS* PVS = nullptr; + inline CGameTraceManager* GameTraceManager = nullptr; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/menu.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/menu.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1751b2c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/menu.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,744 @@ +#include "menu.h" + +// used: config variables +#include "variables.h" + +// used: iinputsystem +#include "interfaces.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/inetworkclientservice.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iglobalvars.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/ienginecvar.h" + +// used: overlay's context +#include "../features/visuals/overlay.h" + +// used: notifications +#include "../utilities/notify.h" + +#pragma region menu_array_entries +static constexpr const char* arrMiscDpiScale[] = { + "100%", + "125%", + "150%", + "175%", + "200%" +}; + +static const std::pair arrColors[] = { + { "[accent] - main", Vars.colAccent0 }, + { "[accent] - dark (hover)", Vars.colAccent1 }, + { "[accent] - darker (active)", Vars.colAccent2 }, + { "[primitive] - text", Vars.colPrimtv0 }, + { "[primitive] - background", Vars.colPrimtv1 }, + { "[primitive] - disabled", Vars.colPrimtv2 }, + { "[primitive] - frame background", Vars.colPrimtv3 }, + { "[primitive] - border", Vars.colPrimtv4 }, +}; + +static constexpr const char* arrMenuAddition[] = { + "dim", + "particle", + "glow" +}; +#pragma endregion + +void MENU::RenderMainWindow() +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + + // @test: we should always update the animation? + animMenuDimBackground.Update(io.DeltaTime, style.AnimationSpeed); + if (!bMainWindowOpened) + return; + + const ImVec2 vecScreenSize = io.DisplaySize; + const float flBackgroundAlpha = animMenuDimBackground.GetValue(1.f); + flDpiScale = D::CalculateDPI(C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale)); + + // @note: we call this every frame because we utilizing rainbow color as well! however it's not really performance friendly? + UpdateStyle(&style); + + if (flBackgroundAlpha > 0.f) + { + if (C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.bMenuAdditional) & MENU_ADDITION_DIM_BACKGROUND) + D::AddDrawListRect(ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList(), ImVec2(0, 0), vecScreenSize, C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv1).colValue.Set(125 * flBackgroundAlpha), DRAW_RECT_FILLED); + + if (C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.bMenuAdditional) & MENU_ADDITION_BACKGROUND_PARTICLE) + menuParticle.Render(ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList(), vecScreenSize, flBackgroundAlpha); + } + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, flBackgroundAlpha); + + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(vecScreenSize.x * 0.5f, vecScreenSize.y * 0.5f), ImGuiCond_Once, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(550 * flDpiScale, 350 * flDpiScale), ImGuiCond_Always); + + // handle main window get out of screen bound + // @note: we call this here so it will override the previous SetNextWindowPos + if (ImGuiWindow* pMainWindow = ImGui::FindWindowByName(CS_XOR("asphyxia")); pMainWindow != nullptr) + { + bool bRequireClamp = false; + ImVec2 vecWindowPos = pMainWindow->Pos; + if (pMainWindow->Pos.x < 0.0f) + { + bRequireClamp = true; + vecWindowPos.x = 0.0f; + } + else if (pMainWindow->Size.x + pMainWindow->Pos.x > vecScreenSize.x) + { + bRequireClamp = true; + vecWindowPos.x = vecScreenSize.x - pMainWindow->Size.x; + } + if (pMainWindow->Pos.y < 0.0f) + { + bRequireClamp = true; + vecWindowPos.y = 0.0f; + } + else if (pMainWindow->Size.y + pMainWindow->Pos.y > vecScreenSize.y) + { + bRequireClamp = true; + vecWindowPos.y = vecScreenSize.y - pMainWindow->Size.y; + } + + if (bRequireClamp) // Necessary to prevent window from constantly undocking itself if docked. + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(vecWindowPos, ImGuiCond_Always); + } + + // render main window + ImGui::Begin(CS_XOR("asphyxia"), &bMainWindowOpened, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse); + { + const ImVec2 vecMenuPos = ImGui::GetWindowPos(); + const ImVec2 vecMenuSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize(); + ImDrawList* pDrawList = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + + if (C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.bMenuAdditional) & MENU_ADDITION_GLOW) + D::AddDrawListShadowRect(ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList(), vecMenuPos, vecMenuPos + vecMenuSize, C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue, 64.f * flDpiScale, style.WindowRounding, ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground); + + const ImVec2 vecTitleSize = FONT::pMenu[C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale)]->CalcTextSizeA(12.f * flDpiScale, FLT_MAX, -1.f, CS_XOR("asphyxia")); + pDrawList->AddText(ImVec2(vecMenuPos.x + vecMenuSize.x - style.WindowPadding.x - vecTitleSize.x, vecMenuPos.y + style.WindowPadding.y), ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), CS_XOR("asphyxia")); + + static const CTab arrTabs[] = { + //{ "ragebot", &T::RageBot }, + { "legitbot", &T::LegitBot }, + { "visuals", &T::Visuals } + //{ "miscellaneous", &T::Miscellaneous }, + //{ "skins changer", &T::SkinsChanger } + }; + + T::Render(CS_XOR("##main_tabs"), arrTabs, CS_ARRAYSIZE(arrTabs), &nCurrentMainTab); + } + ImGui::End(); + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); +} + +void MENU::RenderOverlayPreviewWindow() +{ + using namespace F::VISUALS::OVERLAY; + + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + // @note: call this function inside rendermainwindow, else expect a crash... + const ImVec2 vecMenuPos = ImGui::GetWindowPos(); + const ImVec2 vecMenuSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize(); + + const ImVec2 vecOverlayPadding = ImVec2(30.f * flDpiScale, 50.f * flDpiScale); + + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(vecMenuPos.x + vecMenuSize.x + style.WindowPadding.x, vecMenuPos.y), ImGuiCond_Always); + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(175 * flDpiScale, vecMenuSize.y), ImGuiCond_Always); + ImGui::Begin(CS_XOR("preview"), &bMainWindowOpened, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize); + { + const ImVec2 vecWindowPos = ImGui::GetWindowPos(); + const ImVec2 vecWindowSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize(); + + ImDrawList* pDrawList = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + Context_t context; + + ImVec4 vecBox = { + vecWindowPos.x + vecOverlayPadding.x, + vecWindowPos.y + vecOverlayPadding.y, + vecWindowPos.x + vecWindowSize.x - vecOverlayPadding.x, + vecWindowPos.y + vecWindowSize.y - vecOverlayPadding.y + }; + + if (const auto& boxOverlayConfig = C_GET(FrameOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayBox); boxOverlayConfig.bEnable) + { + const bool bHovered = context.AddBoxComponent(pDrawList, vecBox, 1, boxOverlayConfig.flThickness, boxOverlayConfig.flRounding, boxOverlayConfig.colPrimary, boxOverlayConfig.colOutline); + if (bHovered && ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) + ImGui::OpenPopup(CS_XOR("context##box.component")); + } + + if (const auto& nameOverlayConfig = C_GET(TextOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayName); nameOverlayConfig.bEnable) + context.AddComponent(new CTextComponent(true, SIDE_TOP, DIR_TOP, FONT::pVisual, CS_XOR("asphyxia"), Vars.overlayName)); + + if (const auto& healthOverlayConfig = C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayHealthBar); healthOverlayConfig.bEnable) + { + const float flFactor = M_SIN(ImGui::GetTime() * 5.f) * 0.55f + 0.45f; + context.AddComponent(new CBarComponent(true, SIDE_LEFT, vecBox, flFactor, Vars.overlayHealthBar)); + } + + if (const auto& armorOverlayConfig = C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayArmorBar); armorOverlayConfig.bEnable) + { + const float flArmorFactor = M_SIN(ImGui::GetTime() * 5.f) * 0.55f + 0.45f; + context.AddComponent(new CBarComponent(false, SIDE_BOTTOM, vecBox, flArmorFactor, Vars.overlayArmorBar)); + } + + // only render context preview if overlay is enabled + context.Render(pDrawList, vecBox); + + if (ImGui::BeginPopup(CS_XOR("context##box.component"), ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove)) + { + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0)); + + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("primary color##box.component"), &C_GET(FrameOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayBox).colPrimary); + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("outline color##box.component"), &C_GET(FrameOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayBox).colOutline); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.75f); + ImGui::SliderFloat(CS_XOR("thickness##box.component"), &C_GET(FrameOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayBox).flThickness, 1.f, 5.f, CS_XOR("%.1f"), ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.75f); + ImGui::SliderFloat(CS_XOR("rounding##box.component"), &C_GET(FrameOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayBox).flRounding, 1.f, 5.f, CS_XOR("%.1f"), ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + } + ImGui::End(); +} + +void MENU::RenderWatermark() +{ + if (!C_GET(bool, Vars.bWatermark) || !bMainWindowOpened) + return; + + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg, ImVec4(0.f, 0.f, 0.f, 0.03f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_WindowBg, ImVec4(0.f, 0.f, 0.f, 0.03f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Border, ImVec4(0.f, 0.f, 0.f, 0.03f)); + ImGui::PushFont(FONT::pExtra); + ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar(); + { + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(1, 1)); + +#ifdef _DEBUG + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 0.5f, 0.0f, 1.0f), CS_XOR("debug")); +#endif + if (CRT::StringString(GetCommandLineW(), CS_XOR(L"-insecure")) != nullptr) + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f), CS_XOR("insecure")); + + if (I::Engine->IsInGame()) + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f), CS_XOR("in-game")); + + static ImVec2 vecNameSize = ImGui::CalcTextSize(CS_XOR("asphyxia | " __DATE__ " " __TIME__)); + ImGui::SameLine(ImGui::GetContentRegionMax().x - vecNameSize.x - style.FramePadding.x); + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f), CS_XOR("asphyxia | " __DATE__ " " __TIME__)); + } + ImGui::EndMainMenuBar(); + ImGui::PopFont(); + ImGui::PopStyleColor(3); +} + +void MENU::UpdateStyle(ImGuiStyle* pStyle) +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = pStyle != nullptr ? *pStyle : ImGui::GetStyle(); + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv0).colValue.GetVec4(1.f); // primtv 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv2).colValue.GetVec4(0.85f); // primtv 2 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.85f); // accent 1 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv3).colValue.GetVec4(0.95f); // primtv 3 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv1).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 1 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv1).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 1 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_WindowShadow] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(0.80f); // accent 3 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Border] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv4).colValue.GetVec4(0.50f); // primtv 4 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); // clear + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv3).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 3 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.8f); // accent 1 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(0.6f); // accent 0 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(0.20f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(0.50f); // accent 1 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.20f); // accent 1 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv1).colValue.GetVec4(0.70f); // primtv 1 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv3).colValue.GetVec4(0.30f); // primtv 3 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // accent 3 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.90f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(0.50f); // primtv 2 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_CheckMark] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // primtv 0 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrab] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.8f); // accent 1 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Button] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv3).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 3 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // accent 0 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Header] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 3 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Separator] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv3).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 3 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // accent 0 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.70f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // accent 1 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Tab] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv1).colValue.GetVec4(0.80f); // primtv 1 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.80f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(0.70f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).colValue.GetVec4(0.70f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(0.60f); // accent 0 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(0.50f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(1.00f); // accent 0 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.GetVec4(0.50f); // accent 0 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.GetVec4(0.80f); // accent 3 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv4).colValue.GetVec4(0.25f); // primtv 4 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ControlBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv2).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 3 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ControlBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv4).colValue.GetVec4(1.0f); // primtv 5 + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ControlBg] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv1).colValue.GetVec4(0.10f); // primtv 2 + + style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Triangle] = C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv0).colValue.GetVec4(1.f); // accent 0 + + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv0).UpdateRainbow(); // (text) + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv1).UpdateRainbow(); // (background) + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv2).UpdateRainbow(); // (disabled) + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv3).UpdateRainbow(); // (control bg) + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv4).UpdateRainbow(); // (border) + + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).UpdateRainbow(); // (main) + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent1).UpdateRainbow(); // (dark) + C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).UpdateRainbow(); // (darker) + + // update animation speed + style.AnimationSpeed = C_GET(float, Vars.flAnimationSpeed) / 10.f; +} + +#pragma region menu_tabs + +void T::Render(const char* szTabBar, const CTab* arrTabs, const unsigned long long nTabsCount, int* nCurrentTab, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags) +{ + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar(szTabBar, flags)) + { + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < nTabsCount; i++) + { + // add tab + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem(arrTabs[i].szName)) + { + // set current tab index + *nCurrentTab = (int)i; + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + } + + // render inner tab + if (arrTabs[*nCurrentTab].pRenderFunction != nullptr) + arrTabs[*nCurrentTab].pRenderFunction(); + + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } +} + +void T::RageBot() +{ } + +void T::LegitBot() +{ + ImGui::BeginChild(CS_XOR("legitbot.aimbot"), ImVec2{}, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted(CS_XOR("aimbot")); + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("enable##aimbot"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bLegitbot)); + ImGui::SliderFloat(CS_XOR("aim range"), &C_GET(float, Vars.aim_range), 5.f, 500.f); + + //ImGui::NewLine(); + // Key + //ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("always on##aimbot"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bLegitbotAlwaysOn)); + //ImGui::BeginDisabled(C_GET(bool, Vars.bLegitbotAlwaysOn)); + { + ImGui::HotKey(CS_XOR("toggle key"), &C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.nLegitbotActivationKey)); + } + //ImGui::EndDisabled(); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); +} + +void T::Visuals() +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + + MENU::RenderOverlayPreviewWindow(); + + ImGui::Columns(2, CS_XOR("##visuals_collumns"), false); + { + static float flOverlayChildSize = 0.f; + ImGui::BeginChild(CS_XOR("visuals.overlay"), ImVec2(0.f, flOverlayChildSize), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted("overlay"); + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0)); + + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("enable##overlay"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualOverlay)); + + ImGui::BeginDisabled(!C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualOverlay)); + { + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("bounding box"), &C_GET(FrameOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayBox).bEnable); + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("name"), &C_GET(TextOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayName).bEnable); + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("health bar"), &C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayHealthBar).bEnable); + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("armor bar"), &C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayArmorBar).bEnable); + } + ImGui::EndDisabled(); + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + + flOverlayChildSize = ImGui::GetCursorPosY() + style.ItemSpacing.y; + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + + ImGui::BeginChild(CS_XOR("visuals.chams"), ImVec2{}, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted("chams"); + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0)); + + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("enable##chams"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualChams)); + ImGui::Combo(CS_XOR("materials"), &C_GET(int, Vars.nVisualChamMaterial), CS_XOR("white\0illuminate\0")); + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("enable invisible chams##chams"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualChamsIgnoreZ)); + + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("visible color"), &C_GET(Color_t, Vars.colVisualChams)); + if (C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualChamsIgnoreZ)) + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("invisible color"), &C_GET(Color_t, Vars.colVisualChamsIgnoreZ)); + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + ImGui::NextColumn(); + { + } + ImGui::Columns(1); +} + +void T::Miscellaneous() +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + + ImGui::Columns(2, CS_XOR("##misc_collumns"), false); + { + ImGui::BeginChild(CS_XOR("misc.general"), ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().y / 2.f), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted(CS_XOR("general")); + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0)); + + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("watermark"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bWatermark)); + + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, ImVec4(1.f, 1.f, 0.f, 1.f)); + if (ImGui::Button(CS_XOR("unlock hidden cvars"), ImVec2(-1, 15 * MENU::flDpiScale))) + { + I::Cvar->UnlockHiddenCVars(); + NOTIFY::Push({ N_TYPE_INFO, CS_XOR("unlocked all hidden cvars") }); + } + + ImGui::PopStyleColor(); + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + + ImGui::BeginChild(CS_XOR("misc.movement"), ImVec2{}, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted(CS_XOR("movement")); + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, 0)); + + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("auto bunny-hopping"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bAutoBHop)); + if (C_GET(bool, Vars.bAutoBHop)) + ImGui::SliderInt(CS_XOR("chance"), &C_GET(int, Vars.nAutoBHopChance), 0, 100, CS_XOR("%d%%")); + + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("auto strafe"), &C_GET(bool, Vars.bAutoStrafe)); + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + ImGui::NextColumn(); + { + static int nCurrentSettingSubTab = 0; + ImGui::BeginChild(CS_XOR("misc.settings"), ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().y / 2.f), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted(CS_XOR("settings")); + + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + static const CTab arrSettingTabs[] = { + CTab{ "configuration", []() + { + ImGui::Columns(2, CS_XOR("#CONFIG"), false); + { + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1); + + // check selected configuration for magic value + if (nSelectedConfig == ~1U) + { + // set default configuration as selected on first use + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < C::vecFileNames.size(); i++) + { + if (CRT::StringCompare(C::vecFileNames[i], CS_XOR(CS_CONFIGURATION_DEFAULT_FILE_NAME CS_CONFIGURATION_FILE_EXTENSION)) == 0) + nSelectedConfig = i; + } + } + + if (ImGui::BeginListBox(CS_XOR("##config.list"), C::vecFileNames.size(), 5)) + { + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < C::vecFileNames.size(); i++) + { + // @todo: imgui cant work with wstring + const wchar_t* wszFileName = C::vecFileNames[i]; + + char szFileName[MAX_PATH] = {}; + CRT::StringUnicodeToMultiByte(szFileName, CS_ARRAYSIZE(szFileName), wszFileName); + + if (ImGui::Selectable(szFileName, (nSelectedConfig == i))) + nSelectedConfig = i; + } + + ImGui::EndListBox(); + } + + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + } + ImGui::NextColumn(); + { + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(ImGui::GetStyle().FramePadding.x, 0)); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1); + if (ImGui::InputTextWithHint(CS_XOR("##config.file"), CS_XOR("create new..."), szConfigFile, sizeof(szConfigFile), ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue)) + { + // check if the filename isn't empty + if (const std::size_t nConfigFileLength = CRT::StringLength(szConfigFile); nConfigFileLength > 0U) + { + CRT::WString_t wszConfigFile(szConfigFile); + + if (C::CreateFile(wszConfigFile.Data())) + // set created config as selected @todo: dependent on current 'C::CreateFile' behaviour, generally it must be replaced by search + nSelectedConfig = C::vecFileNames.size() - 1U; + + // clear string + CRT::MemorySet(szConfigFile, 0U, sizeof(szConfigFile)); + } + } + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) + ImGui::SetTooltip(CS_XOR("press enter to create new configuration")); + + if (ImGui::Button(CS_XOR("save"), ImVec2(-1, 15 * MENU::flDpiScale))) + C::SaveFile(nSelectedConfig); + + if (ImGui::Button(CS_XOR("load"), ImVec2(-1, 15 * MENU::flDpiScale))) + C::LoadFile(nSelectedConfig); + + if (ImGui::Button(CS_XOR("remove"), ImVec2(-1, 15 * MENU::flDpiScale))) + ImGui::OpenPopup(CS_XOR("confirmation##config.remove")); + + if (ImGui::Button(CS_XOR("refresh"), ImVec2(-1, 15 * MENU::flDpiScale))) + C::Refresh(); + + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + ImGui::Columns(1); + + if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal(CS_XOR("confirmation##config.remove"), nullptr, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove)) + { + CRT::String_t szCurrentConfig(C::vecFileNames[nSelectedConfig]); + + ImGui::Text(CS_XOR("are you sure you want to remove \"%s\" configuration?"), szCurrentConfig); + ImGui::Spacing(); + + if (ImGui::Button(CS_XOR("no"), ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x / 2.f, 0))) + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + + ImGui::SameLine(); + + if (ImGui::Button(CS_XOR("yes"), ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x, 0))) + { + C::RemoveFile(nSelectedConfig); + + // reset selected configuration index + nSelectedConfig = ~0U; + + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + } + + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + } }, + CTab{ "menu", []() + { + static int nSelectedColor = 0; + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(ImGui::GetStyle().FramePadding.x, 0)); + + ImGui::HotKey(CS_XOR("menu key"), &C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.nMenuKey)); + + if (ImGui::BeginCombo(CS_XOR("dpi scale"), arrMiscDpiScale[C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale)])) + { + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(arrMiscDpiScale); i++) + { + if (ImGui::Selectable(arrMiscDpiScale[i], (C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale) == i))) + C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale) = i; + } + + ImGui::EndCombo(); + } + + ImGui::MultiCombo(CS_XOR("additional settings"), &C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.bMenuAdditional), arrMenuAddition, CS_ARRAYSIZE(arrMenuAddition)); + + ImGui::SliderFloat(CS_XOR("animation speed"), &C_GET(float, Vars.flAnimationSpeed), 1.f, 10.f); + + ImGui::SeparatorText(CS_XOR("colors pallete")); + + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-1); + + if (ImGui::BeginListBox(CS_XOR("##themes.select"), CS_ARRAYSIZE(arrColors), 5)) + { + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < CS_ARRAYSIZE(arrColors); i++) + { + const char* szColorName = arrColors[i].first; + + if (ImGui::Selectable(szColorName, (i == nSelectedColor))) + nSelectedColor = (int)i; + } + + ImGui::EndListBox(); + } + + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("##themes.picker"), &C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, arrColors[nSelectedColor].second), ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB); + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } } + }; + + Render(CS_XOR("##misc.setttings.tab"), arrSettingTabs, CS_ARRAYSIZE(arrSettingTabs), &nCurrentSettingSubTab); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + ImGui::Columns(1); +} + +void T::SkinsChanger() +{ +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region menu_particle + +void MENU::ParticleContext_t::Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecScreenSize, const float flAlpha) +{ + if (this->vecParticles.empty()) + { + for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) + this->AddParticle(ImGui::GetIO().DisplaySize); + } + + for (auto& particle : this->vecParticles) + { + this->DrawParticle(pDrawList, particle, C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent0).colValue.Set(flAlpha * 255)); + this->UpdatePosition(particle, vecScreenSize); + this->FindConnections(pDrawList, particle, C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colAccent2).colValue.Set(flAlpha * 255), 200.f); + } +} + +void MENU::ParticleContext_t::AddParticle(const ImVec2& vecScreenSize) +{ + // exceeded limit + if (this->vecParticles.size() >= 200UL) + return; + + // @note: random speed value + static constexpr float flSpeed = 100.f; + this->vecParticles.emplace_back( + ImVec2(MATH::fnRandomFloat(0.f, vecScreenSize.x), MATH::fnRandomFloat(0.f, vecScreenSize.y)), + ImVec2(MATH::fnRandomFloat(-flSpeed, flSpeed), MATH::fnRandomFloat(-flSpeed, flSpeed))); +} + +void MENU::ParticleContext_t::DrawParticle(ImDrawList* pDrawList, ParticleData_t& particle, const Color_t& colPrimary) +{ + D::AddDrawListCircle(pDrawList, particle.vecPosition, 2.f, colPrimary, 12, DRAW_CIRCLE_OUTLINE | DRAW_CIRCLE_FILLED); +} + +void MENU::ParticleContext_t::FindConnections(ImDrawList* pDrawList, ParticleData_t& particle, const Color_t& colPrimary, float flMaxDistance) +{ + for (auto& currentParticle : this->vecParticles) + { + // skip current particle + if (¤tParticle == &particle) + continue; + + /// @note: calcuate length distance 2d, return FLT_MAX if failed + const float flDistance = ImLength(particle.vecPosition - currentParticle.vecPosition, FLT_MAX); + if (flDistance <= flMaxDistance) + this->DrawConnection(pDrawList, particle, currentParticle, (flMaxDistance - flDistance) / flMaxDistance, colPrimary); + } +} + +void MENU::ParticleContext_t::DrawConnection(ImDrawList* pDrawList, ParticleData_t& particle, ParticleData_t& otherParticle, float flAlpha, const Color_t& colPrimary) const +{ + D::AddDrawListLine(pDrawList, particle.vecPosition, otherParticle.vecPosition, colPrimary.Set(flAlpha * 255), 1.f); +} + +void MENU::ParticleContext_t::UpdatePosition(ParticleData_t& particle, const ImVec2& vecScreenSize) const +{ + this->ResolveScreenCollision(particle, vecScreenSize); + + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + + // move particle + particle.vecPosition.x += (particle.vecVelocity.x * style.AnimationSpeed * 10.f) * ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime; + particle.vecPosition.y += (particle.vecVelocity.y * style.AnimationSpeed * 10.f) * ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime; +} + +void MENU::ParticleContext_t::ResolveScreenCollision(ParticleData_t& particle, const ImVec2& vecScreenSize) const +{ + if (particle.vecPosition.x + particle.vecVelocity.x > vecScreenSize.x || particle.vecPosition.x + particle.vecVelocity.x < 0) + particle.vecVelocity.x = -particle.vecVelocity.x; + + if (particle.vecPosition.y + particle.vecVelocity.y > vecScreenSize.y || particle.vecPosition.y + particle.vecVelocity.y < 0) + particle.vecVelocity.y = -particle.vecVelocity.y; +} + +#pragma endregion diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/menu.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/menu.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6532e50 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/menu.h @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: [stl] vector +#include + +#include "../common.h" + +// used: [ext] imgui, draw, animation +#include "../utilities/draw.h" + +#define MENU_MAX_BACKGROUND_PARTICLES 100 + +class CTab +{ +public: + const char* szName; + void (*pRenderFunction)(); +}; + +namespace MENU +{ + void RenderMainWindow(); + void RenderOverlayPreviewWindow(); + void RenderWatermark(); + + void UpdateStyle(ImGuiStyle* pStyle = nullptr); + + /* @section: particles */ + struct ParticleData_t + { + ParticleData_t(const ImVec2& vecPosition, const ImVec2& vecVelocity) : + vecPosition(vecPosition), vecVelocity(vecVelocity) { } + + // current particle position + ImVec2 vecPosition = {}; + // current particle velocity + ImVec2 vecVelocity = {}; + }; + + struct ParticleContext_t + { + ParticleContext_t(const int nMaxParticles = 100) + { + // allocate memory for particles + this->vecParticles.reserve(nMaxParticles); + // create particles if needed + } + + ~ParticleContext_t() + { + // since no memory allocated, just clear vector + this->vecParticles.clear(); + } + + void Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecScreenSize, const float flAlpha); + + // create particle with random velocity/position + void AddParticle(const ImVec2& vecScreenSize); + // current size of particles + const size_t Count() const { return this->vecParticles.size(); } + private: + // draw particle (circle) + void DrawParticle(ImDrawList* pDrawList, ParticleData_t& particle, const Color_t& colPrimary); + + // find & draw connection as a line between particles + void FindConnections(ImDrawList* pDrawList, ParticleData_t& particle, const Color_t& colPrimary, float flMaxDistance); + void DrawConnection(ImDrawList* pDrawList, ParticleData_t& particle, ParticleData_t& otherParticle, float flAlpha, const Color_t& colPrimary) const; + + // update particle position/velocity + // reversed direction when particle is out of screen + void UpdatePosition(ParticleData_t& particle, const ImVec2& vecScreenSize) const; + void ResolveScreenCollision(ParticleData_t& particle, const ImVec2& vecScreenSize) const; + + // all our particles data + std::vector vecParticles; + }; + + inline bool bMainWindowOpened = false; + inline bool bMainActive = false; + inline int nCurrentMainTab = 0; + inline ParticleContext_t menuParticle = ParticleContext_t(MENU_MAX_BACKGROUND_PARTICLES); + inline AnimationHandler_t animMenuDimBackground; + inline float flDpiScale = 1.f; +} + +namespace T +{ + /* @section: main */ + void Render(const char* szTabBar, const CTab* arrTabs, const unsigned long long nTabsCount, int* nCurrentTab, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton | ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip); + + /* @section: tabs */ + void RageBot(); + void LegitBot(); + void Visuals(); + void Miscellaneous(); + void SkinsChanger(); + + /* @section: values */ + // user-defined configuration filename in miscellaneous tab + inline char szConfigFile[256U] = {}; + // current selected configuration in miscellaneous tab + inline unsigned long long nSelectedConfig = ~1U; + // current sub tab overlay in visuals tab + inline int nCurrentOverlaySubtab = 0; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/schema.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/schema.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..73bae28 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/schema.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +#include "schema.h" + +// used: [stl] vector +#include +// used: [stl] find_if +#include + +// used: getworkingpath +#include "../core.h" + +// used: ischemasystem +#include "interfaces.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/ischemasystem.h" + +// used: l_print +#include "../utilities/log.h" + +struct SchemaData_t +{ + FNV1A_t uHashedFieldName = 0x0ULL; + std::uint32_t uOffset = 0x0U; +}; + +static std::vector vecSchemaData; + +bool SCHEMA::Setup(const wchar_t* wszFileName, const char* szModuleName) +{ + wchar_t wszDumpFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + if (!CORE::GetWorkingPath(wszDumpFilePath)) + return false; + + CRT::StringCat(wszDumpFilePath, wszFileName); + + HANDLE hOutFile = ::CreateFileW(wszDumpFilePath, GENERIC_WRITE, FILE_SHARE_READ, nullptr, CREATE_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, nullptr); + if (hOutFile == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) + return false; + + // @todo: maybe remove this redundant? and put it inside CRT::String_t c'tor + const std::time_t time = std::time(nullptr); + std::tm timePoint; + localtime_s(&timePoint, &time); + + CRT::String_t<64> szTimeBuffer(CS_XOR("[%d-%m-%Y %T] asphyxia | schema dump\n\n"), &timePoint); + + // write current date, time and info + ::WriteFile(hOutFile, szTimeBuffer.Data(), szTimeBuffer.Length(), nullptr, nullptr); + + CSchemaSystemTypeScope* pTypeScope = I::SchemaSystem->FindTypeScopeForModule(szModuleName); + if (pTypeScope == nullptr) + return false; + + const int nTableSize = pTypeScope->hashClasses.Count(); + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("found \"") << nTableSize << CS_XOR("\" schema classes in module"); + + // allocate memory for elements + UtlTSHashHandle_t* pElements = new UtlTSHashHandle_t[nTableSize + 1U]; + const auto nElements = pTypeScope->hashClasses.GetElements(0, nTableSize, pElements); + + for (int i = 0; i < nElements; i++) + { + const UtlTSHashHandle_t hElement = pElements[i]; + + if (hElement == 0) + continue; + + CSchemaClassBinding* pClassBinding = pTypeScope->hashClasses[hElement]; + if (pClassBinding == nullptr) + continue; + + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pDeclaredClassInfo; + pTypeScope->FindDeclaredClass(&pDeclaredClassInfo, pClassBinding->szBinaryName); + + if (pDeclaredClassInfo == nullptr) + continue; + + if (pDeclaredClassInfo->nFieldSize == 0) + continue; + + CRT::String_t szClassBuffer(CS_XOR("class %s\n"), pDeclaredClassInfo->szName); + ::WriteFile(hOutFile, szClassBuffer.Data(), szClassBuffer.Length(), nullptr, nullptr); + + for (auto j = 0; j < pDeclaredClassInfo->nFieldSize; j++) + { + SchemaClassFieldData_t* pFields = pDeclaredClassInfo->pFields; + CRT::String_t szFieldClassBuffer(CS_XOR("%s->%s"), pClassBinding->szBinaryName, pFields[j].szName); + // store field info + vecSchemaData.emplace_back(FNV1A::Hash(szFieldClassBuffer.Data()), pFields[j].nSingleInheritanceOffset); + + CRT::String_t szFieldBuffer(CS_XOR(" %s %s = 0x%X\n"), pFields[j].pSchemaType->szName, pFields[j].szName, pFields[j].nSingleInheritanceOffset); + // write field info + ::WriteFile(hOutFile, szFieldBuffer.Data(), szFieldBuffer.Length(), nullptr, nullptr); + } + #ifdef _DEBUG + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("dumped \"") << pDeclaredClassInfo->szName << CS_XOR("\" (total: ") << pDeclaredClassInfo->nFieldSize << CS_XOR(" fields)"); + #endif + } + + // free allocated memory + delete[] pElements; + + // close file + ::CloseHandle(hOutFile); + + return true; +} + +std::uint32_t SCHEMA::GetOffset(const FNV1A_t uHashedFieldName) +{ + if (const auto it = std::ranges::find_if(vecSchemaData, [uHashedFieldName](const SchemaData_t& data) + { return data.uHashedFieldName == uHashedFieldName; }); + it != vecSchemaData.end()) + return it->uOffset; + + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to find offset for field with hash: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX | LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE) << uHashedFieldName; + CS_ASSERT(false); // schema field not found + return 0U; +} + +// @todo: optimize this, this is really poorly do and can be done much better? +std::uint32_t SCHEMA::GetForeignOffset(const char* szModulenName, const FNV1A_t uHashedClassName, const FNV1A_t uHashedFieldName) +{ + CSchemaSystemTypeScope* pTypeScope = I::SchemaSystem->FindTypeScopeForModule(szModulenName); + if (pTypeScope == nullptr) + return false; + + const int nTableSize = pTypeScope->hashClasses.Count(); + // allocate memory for elements + UtlTSHashHandle_t* pElements = new UtlTSHashHandle_t[nTableSize + 1U]; + const auto nElements = pTypeScope->hashClasses.GetElements(0, nTableSize, pElements); + std::uint32_t uOffset = 0x0; + + for (int i = 0; i < nElements; i++) + { + const UtlTSHashHandle_t hElement = pElements[i]; + + if (hElement == 0) + continue; + + CSchemaClassBinding* pClassBinding = pTypeScope->hashClasses[hElement]; + if (pClassBinding == nullptr) + continue; + + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pDeclaredClassInfo; + pTypeScope->FindDeclaredClass(&pDeclaredClassInfo, pClassBinding->szBinaryName); + + if (pDeclaredClassInfo == nullptr) + continue; + + if (pDeclaredClassInfo->nFieldSize == 0) + continue; + + for (auto j = 0; j < pDeclaredClassInfo->nFieldSize; j++) + { + SchemaClassFieldData_t* pFields = pDeclaredClassInfo->pFields; + if (pFields == nullptr) + continue; + + SchemaClassFieldData_t field = pFields[j]; + if (FNV1A::Hash(pClassBinding->szBinaryName) == uHashedClassName && FNV1A::Hash(field.szName) == uHashedFieldName) + uOffset = field.nSingleInheritanceOffset; + } + } + + if (uOffset == 0x0) + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("failed to find offset for field with hash: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX | LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE) << uHashedFieldName; + + return uOffset; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/schema.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/schema.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0ba79b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/schema.h @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +#pragma once + + +#include "../common.h" + +// used: fnv-1a hash +#include "../utilities/fnv1a.h" + +#define SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(TYPE, NAME, OFFSET) \ + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE std::add_lvalue_reference_t NAME() \ + { \ + static const std::uint32_t uOffset = OFFSET; \ + return *reinterpret_cast>(reinterpret_cast(this) + (uOffset)); \ + } + +#define SCHEMA_ADD_POFFSET(TYPE, NAME, OFFSET) \ + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE std::add_pointer_t NAME() \ + { \ + const static std::uint32_t uOffset = OFFSET; \ + return reinterpret_cast>(reinterpret_cast(this) + (uOffset)); \ + } + +#define SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD_OFFSET(TYPE, NAME, FIELD, ADDITIONAL) SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(TYPE, NAME, SCHEMA::GetOffset(FNV1A::HashConst(FIELD)) + ADDITIONAL) + +#define SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(TYPE, NAME, FIELD) SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD_OFFSET(TYPE, NAME, FIELD, 0U) + +#define SCHEMA_ADD_PFIELD_OFFSET(TYPE, NAME, FIELD, ADDITIONAL) SCHEMA_ADD_POFFSET(TYPE, NAME, SCHEMA::GetOffset(FNV1A::HashConst(FIELD)) + ADDITIONAL) + +#define SCHEMA_ADD_PFIELD(TYPE, NAME, FIELD) SCHEMA_ADD_PFIELD_OFFSET(TYPE, NAME, FIELD, 0U) + +// @todo: dump enums? +namespace SCHEMA +{ + // store the offset of the field in the class + // dump stored data to file + bool Setup(const wchar_t* wszFileName, const char* szModuleName); + + /* @section: get */ + // get offset of the field in the class + // @note: only client.dll class & fields + [[nodiscard]] std::uint32_t GetOffset(const FNV1A_t uHashedFieldName); + + // get foregin offset from other .dll + [[nodiscard]] std::uint32_t GetForeignOffset(const char* szModulenName, const FNV1A_t uHashedClassName, const FNV1A_t uHashedFieldName); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/sdk.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/sdk.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9381307 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/sdk.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +#include "sdk.h" + +// used: getmodulebasehandle +#include "../utilities/memory.h" + +bool SDK::Setup() +{ + bool bSuccess = true; + + const void* hTier0Lib = MEM::GetModuleBaseHandle(TIER0_DLL); + if (hTier0Lib == nullptr) + return false; + + fnConColorMsg = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(hTier0Lib, CS_XOR("?ConColorMsg@@YAXAEBVColor@@PEBDZZ"))); + bSuccess &= fnConColorMsg != nullptr; + + return bSuccess; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/sdk.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/sdk.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64dce26 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/sdk.h @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: viewmatrix_t +#include "../sdk/datatypes/matrix.h" +// used: color_t +#include "../sdk/datatypes/color.h" +// used: cmd +#include "../sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h" + +#pragma region sdk_definitions +// @source: master/public/worldsize.h +// world coordinate bounds +#define MAX_COORD_FLOAT 16'384.f +#define MIN_COORD_FLOAT (-MAX_COORD_FLOAT) + +// @source: master/public/vphysics_interface.h +// coordinates are in HL units. 1 unit == 1 inch +#define METERS_PER_INCH 0.0254f +#pragma endregion + +class CCSPlayerController; +class C_CSPlayerPawn; + +namespace SDK +{ + // capture game's exported functions + bool Setup(); + + inline ViewMatrix_t ViewMatrix = ViewMatrix_t(); + inline Vector_t CameraPosition = Vector_t(); + inline CCSPlayerController* LocalController = nullptr; + inline C_CSPlayerPawn* LocalPawn = nullptr; + inline CUserCmd* Cmd = nullptr; + + inline void(CS_CDECL* fnConColorMsg)(const Color_t&, const char*, ...) = nullptr; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/variables.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/variables.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a1517e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/core/variables.h @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +#pragma once + +#include "config.h" + +#pragma region variables_combo_entries +using VisualOverlayBox_t = int; + +enum EVisualOverlayBox : VisualOverlayBox_t +{ + VISUAL_OVERLAY_BOX_NONE = 0, + VISUAL_OVERLAY_BOX_FULL, + VISUAL_OVERLAY_BOX_CORNERS, + VISUAL_OVERLAY_BOX_MAX +}; + +using VisualChamMaterial_t = int; +enum EVisualsChamMaterials : VisualChamMaterial_t +{ + VISUAL_MATERIAL_PRIMARY_WHITE = 0, + VISUAL_MATERIAL_ILLUMINATE, + VISUAL_MATERIAL_MAX +}; + +using MiscDpiScale_t = int; + +enum EMiscDpiScale : MiscDpiScale_t +{ + MISC_DPISCALE_DEFAULT = 0, + MISC_DPISCALE_125, + MISC_DPISCALE_150, + MISC_DPISCALE_175, + MISC_DPISCALE_200, + MISC_DPISCALE_MAX +}; + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region variables_multicombo_entries +using MenuAddition_t = unsigned int; +enum EMenuAddition : MenuAddition_t +{ + MENU_ADDITION_NONE = 0U, + MENU_ADDITION_DIM_BACKGROUND = 1 << 0, + MENU_ADDITION_BACKGROUND_PARTICLE = 1 << 1, + MENU_ADDITION_GLOW = 1 << 2, + MENU_ADDITION_ALL = MENU_ADDITION_DIM_BACKGROUND | MENU_ADDITION_BACKGROUND_PARTICLE | MENU_ADDITION_GLOW +}; +#pragma endregion + +struct Variables_t +{ +#pragma region variables_visuals + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bVisualOverlay, false); + + C_ADD_VARIABLE(FrameOverlayVar_t, overlayBox, FrameOverlayVar_t(false)); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(TextOverlayVar_t, overlayName, TextOverlayVar_t(false)); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(BarOverlayVar_t, overlayHealthBar, BarOverlayVar_t(false, false, false, 1.f, Color_t(0, 255, 0), Color_t(255, 0, 0))); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(BarOverlayVar_t, overlayArmorBar, BarOverlayVar_t(false, false, false, 1.f, Color_t(0, 255, 255), Color_t(255, 0, 0))); + + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bVisualChams, false); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(int, nVisualChamMaterial, VISUAL_MATERIAL_PRIMARY_WHITE); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bVisualChamsIgnoreZ, false); // invisible chams + C_ADD_VARIABLE(Color_t, colVisualChams, Color_t(0, 255, 0)); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(Color_t, colVisualChamsIgnoreZ, Color_t(255, 0, 0)); +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region variables_misc + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bAntiUntrusted, true); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bWatermark, true); + + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bAutoBHop, false); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(int, nAutoBHopChance, 100); + + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bAutoStrafe, false); +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region variables_menu + C_ADD_VARIABLE(unsigned int, nMenuKey, VK_INSERT); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(unsigned int, nPanicKey, VK_END); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(int, nDpiScale, 0); + + /* + * color navigation: + * [definition N][purpose] + * 1. primitive: + * - primtv 0 (text) + * - primtv 1 (background) + * - primtv 2 (disabled) + * - primtv 3 (control bg) + * - primtv 4 (border) + * - primtv 5 (hover) + * + * 2. accents: + * - accent 0 (main) + * - accent 1 (dark) + * - accent 2 (darker) + */ + C_ADD_VARIABLE(unsigned int, bMenuAdditional, MENU_ADDITION_ALL); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(float, flAnimationSpeed, 1.f); + + + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colPrimtv0, ColorPickerVar_t(255, 255, 255)); // (text) + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colPrimtv1, ColorPickerVar_t(50, 55, 70)); // (background) + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colPrimtv2, ColorPickerVar_t(190, 190, 190)); // (disabled) + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colPrimtv3, ColorPickerVar_t(20, 20, 30)); // (control bg) + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colPrimtv4, ColorPickerVar_t(0, 0, 0)); // (border) + + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colAccent0, ColorPickerVar_t(85, 90, 160)); // (main) + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colAccent1, ColorPickerVar_t(100, 105, 175)); // (dark) + C_ADD_VARIABLE(ColorPickerVar_t, colAccent2, ColorPickerVar_t(115, 120, 190)); // (darker) +#pragma endregion +#pragma region variables_legitbot + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bLegitbot, false); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(float, flSmoothing, 10.0f); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(float, aim_range, 5.f); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(bool, bLegitbotAlwaysOn, false); + C_ADD_VARIABLE(unsigned int, nLegitbotActivationKey, VK_HOME); +#pragma endregion +}; + +inline Variables_t Vars = {}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/cstrike.vcxproj b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/cstrike.vcxproj new file mode 100644 index 0000000..029867d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/cstrike.vcxproj @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ + + + + + Debug + x64 + + + Release + x64 + + + + {DAC639DD-46A6-B878-4FBE-434FBB1C1FDA} + true + Win32Proj + cstrike + 10.0 + + + + DynamicLibrary + true + Unicode + v143 + + + DynamicLibrary + false + Unicode + v143 + true + + + + + + + + + + + + + false + true + $(SolutionDir)build\$(Configuration)\ + $(SolutionDir)intermediate\$(ProjectName)\$(Configuration)\ + cstrike + .dll + false + + + false + true + $(SolutionDir)build\$(Configuration)\ + $(SolutionDir)intermediate\$(ProjectName)\$(Configuration)\ + cstrike + .dll + false + + + + NotUsing + Level3 + NOMINMAX;_DEBUG;_HAS_EXCEPTIONS=0;%(PreprocessorDefinitions) + $(SolutionDir)dependencies;$(SolutionDir)dependencies\freetype\include;%(AdditionalIncludeDirectories) + ProgramDatabase + Disabled + false + false + MultiThreadedDebug + false + true + true + stdcpp20 + true + Level3 + + + Windows + DebugFull + d3d11.lib;freetype_debug.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies) + $(SolutionDir)dependencies\freetype\binary;%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories) + $(OutDir)$(TargetName).lib + CoreEntryPoint + + + + + NotUsing + Level3 + NOMINMAX;NDEBUG;_HAS_EXCEPTIONS=0;%(PreprocessorDefinitions) + $(SolutionDir)dependencies;$(SolutionDir)dependencies\freetype\include;%(AdditionalIncludeDirectories) + ProgramDatabase + MaxSpeed + true + true + false + true + MultiThreaded + false + false + true + stdcpp20 + true + Level3 + + + Windows + DebugFull + true + true + d3d11.lib;freetype.lib;%(AdditionalDependencies) + $(SolutionDir)dependencies\freetype\binary;%(AdditionalLibraryDirectories) + $(OutDir)$(TargetName).lib + CoreEntryPoint + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/cstrike.vcxproj.filters b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/cstrike.vcxproj.filters new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d621199 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/cstrike.vcxproj.filters @@ -0,0 +1,449 @@ + + + + + {4E40957C-3A77-960D-E363-7C10CF79120F} + + + {8CAD9F58-7810-2FFD-2196-67B30DD8FA7F} + + + {F6B312BD-E297-D312-4BF8-CD6537FBBD94} + + + {D08C9B77-BC1B-2541-653A-393C51A835E7} + + + {500251C1-3C27-A041-6572-85D151F69E5F} + + + {04AE61E7-F07A-BCF2-1994-AA9A05C0F180} + + + {5F23839A-CBE3-FED0-941E-484E009E43AD} + + + {9A07E0F7-8600-FF49-AF32-E4CE9B8ADE55} + + + {202B5BA7-8C95-0F1E-D5D3-C0C3417DED72} + + + {67A9880B-D3B2-887C-5C2E-9F7CC836947C} + + + {85931A81-F153-96B7-BA8E-DF34260EDB93} + + + {7A23D2D0-66F1-C5D6-4F85-36FD3BF2A13B} + + + {212A0ED3-8D94-C249-D6D2-73EF427CA09E} + + + {a0df371b-f244-4c53-b08d-762a0f9b6b0c} + + + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies + + + dependencies + + + dependencies\minhook + + + dependencies\minhook\hde + + + dependencies\minhook\hde + + + dependencies\minhook\hde + + + dependencies\minhook\hde + + + dependencies\minhook\hde + + + dependencies\minhook + + + dependencies\minhook + + + dependencies + + + dependencies + + + dependencies + + + resources + + + resources + + + resources + + + resources + + + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + + features + + + features\misc + + + features + + + features\visuals + + + features\visuals + + + sdk + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk + + + sdk + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + + + sdk\interfaces + + + sdk\interfaces + + + features + + + features\legitbot + + + + + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\imgui + + + dependencies\minhook + + + dependencies\minhook\hde + + + dependencies\minhook\hde + + + dependencies\minhook + + + dependencies\minhook + + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + core + + + + features + + + features\misc + + + features + + + features\visuals + + + features\visuals + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk\datatypes + + + sdk + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + utilities + + + + sdk\interfaces + + + features\legitbot + + + features + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9bfba83 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +#include "features.h" + +// used: draw callbacks +#include "utilities/draw.h" +// used: notify +#include "utilities/notify.h" + +// used: cheat variables +#include "core/variables.h" +// used: menu +#include "core/menu.h" + +// used: features callbacks +#include "features/visuals.h" +#include "features/misc.h" +#include "features/legitbot.h" + +// used: interfaces +#include "core/interfaces.h" +#include "sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" +#include "sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h" +#include "sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h" +#include "sdk/entity.h" +#include "aimRangePainter.hpp" + +bool F::Setup() +{ + if (!VISUALS::Setup()) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to setup visuals"); + return false; + } + + return true; +} + +void F::Destroy() +{ + VISUALS::OnDestroy(); +} + +void F::OnPresent() +{ + if (!D::bInitialized) + return; + + D::NewFrame(); + { + // render watermark + MENU::RenderWatermark(); + + // main window + ImGui::PushFont(FONT::pMenu[C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale)]); + // @note: here you can draw your stuff + MENU::RenderMainWindow(); + // render notifications + NOTIFY::Render(); + ImGui::PopFont(); + } + D::Render(); +} + +void F::OnFrameStageNotify(int nStage) +{ + F::VISUALS::OnFrame(nStage); +} + +void F::OnCreateMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController) +{ + C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(pLocalController->GetPawnHandle()); + if (pLocalPawn == nullptr) + return; + + F::MISC::OnMove(pCmd, pBaseCmd, pLocalController, pLocalPawn); + F::LEGITBOT::OnMove(pCmd, pBaseCmd, pLocalController, pLocalPawn); +} + +bool F::OnDrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2) +{ + return VISUALS::OnDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..73581a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features.h @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +#pragma once + +#include "common.h" + +class CUserCmd; +class CBaseUserCmdPB; +class CCSPlayerController; +class CMeshData; + +namespace F +{ + bool Setup(); + void Destroy(); + + void OnPresent(); + void OnFrameStageNotify(int nStage); + void OnCreateMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController); + bool OnDrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/CRC.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/CRC.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7879293 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/CRC.h @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +#pragma once + +#include +// used: MEM_PAD and virtual funcs +#include "../utilities/memory.h" +// used: CUtlBuffer +#include "../sdk/datatypes/utlbuffer.h" +// used: CBaseUserCmdPB +#include "../sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h"; + +namespace CRC +{ + struct CInButtonStateNoVTable + { + public: + std::uint64_t nValue; + std::uint64_t nValueChanged; + std::uint64_t nValueScroll; + }; + + struct SavedData_t + { + CInButtonStateNoVTable nButtons; + QAngle_t angView; + }; + + inline SavedData_t savedData; + + inline void Save(CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd) + { + if (pBaseCmd->pViewAngles != nullptr) + savedData.angView = pBaseCmd->pViewAngles->angValue; + + savedData.nButtons.nValue = pBaseCmd->pInButtonState->nValue; + savedData.nButtons.nValueChanged = pBaseCmd->pInButtonState->nValueChanged; + savedData.nButtons.nValueScroll = pBaseCmd->pInButtonState->nValueScroll; + } + + inline void Apply(CUserCmd* pCmd) + { + CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd = pCmd->csgoUserCmd.pBaseCmd; + if (pBaseCmd == nullptr) + return; + + pCmd->nButtons.nValue = savedData.nButtons.nValue; + pCmd->nButtons.nValueChanged = savedData.nButtons.nValueChanged; + pCmd->nButtons.nValueScroll = savedData.nButtons.nValueScroll; + + if (pBaseCmd->pViewAngles != nullptr) + pBaseCmd->pViewAngles->angValue = savedData.angView; + } + + inline bool CalculateCRC(CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd) + { + int nCalcualtedCRCSize = pBaseCmd->CalculateCmdCRCSize(); + CUtlBuffer protobufBuffer(0, 0, 0); + protobufBuffer.EnsureCapacity(nCalcualtedCRCSize + 1); + + using fnSerializePartialToArray = bool(__fastcall*)(CBaseUserCmdPB*, CUtlBuffer, int); + static const fnSerializePartialToArray oSerializePartialToArray = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 18 55 56 57 48 81 EC 90"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oSerializePartialToArray != nullptr); + #endif + + if (oSerializePartialToArray(pBaseCmd, protobufBuffer, nCalcualtedCRCSize)) + { + std::uintptr_t* pMessage = reinterpret_cast(I::MemAlloc->Alloc(0x18)); + pBaseCmd->nCachedBits |= 1; + auto nHasBits = static_cast(pBaseCmd->nHasBits & 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC); + if ((pBaseCmd->nHasBits & 1) != 0) + nHasBits = static_cast(nHasBits); + + using fnWriteMessage = void(__fastcall*)(std::uintptr_t*, CUtlBuffer, int); + static const fnWriteMessage oWriteMessage = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 10 48 89 6C 24 18 48 89 7C 24 20 41 56 48 83 EC 20 48 BF"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oWriteMessage != nullptr); + #endif + + using fnSetMessageData = std::string*(__fastcall*)(void*, std::uintptr_t*, void*); + static const fnSetMessageData oSetMessageData = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 20 55 56 57 48 83 EC 30 49"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oSetMessageData != nullptr); + #endif + + oWriteMessage(pMessage, protobufBuffer, nCalcualtedCRCSize); + pBaseCmd->strMoveCrc = oSetMessageData(&pBaseCmd->strMoveCrc, pMessage, &nHasBits); + I::MemAlloc->Free(pMessage); + + return true; + } + + return false; + } +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df07223 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +#include "legitbot.h" + +// used: movement callback +#include "legitbot/aim.h" + +void F::LEGITBOT::OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn) +{ + AIM::OnMove(pCmd, pBaseCmd, pLocalController, pLocalPawn); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..91eace0 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot.h @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +#pragma once +class CUserCmd; +class CBaseUserCmdPB; +class CCSPlayerController; +class C_CSPlayerPawn; + +namespace F::LEGITBOT +{ + void OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/aim.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/aim.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ee810f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/aim.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ +#include "aim.h" + +// used: sdk entity +#include "../../sdk/entity.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" +// used: cusercmd +#include "../../sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h" + +// used: activation button +#include "../../utilities/inputsystem.h" + +// used: cheat variables +#include "../../core/variables.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/ccsgoinput.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.h" +#include "../../utilities/draw.h" +#include "../../core/sdk.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/iswapchaindx11.h" +void F::LEGITBOT::AIM::OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn) +{ + // Check if the legitbot is enabled + if (!C_GET(bool, Vars.bLegitbot)) + return; + + if (!pLocalController->IsPawnAlive()) + return; + + AimAssist(pBaseCmd, pLocalPawn, pLocalController); +} + +QAngle_t GetAngularDifference(CBaseUserCmdPB* pCmd, Vector_t vecTarget, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocal) +{ + // The current position + Vector_t vecCurrent = pLocal->GetEyePosition(); + + // The new angle + QAngle_t vNewAngle = (vecTarget - vecCurrent).ToAngles(); + vNewAngle.Normalize(); // Normalise it so we don't jitter about + + // Store our current angles + QAngle_t vCurAngle = pCmd->pViewAngles->angValue; + + // Find the difference between the two angles (later useful when adding smoothing) + vNewAngle -= vCurAngle; + + return vNewAngle; +} + +float GetAngularDistance(CBaseUserCmdPB* pCmd, Vector_t vecTarget, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocal) +{ + return GetAngularDifference(pCmd, vecTarget, pLocal).Length2D(); +} + +void F::LEGITBOT::AIM::AimAssist(CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController) +{ + // Check if the activation key is down + if (!IPT::IsKeyDown(C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.nLegitbotActivationKey)) && !C_GET(bool, Vars.bLegitbotAlwaysOn)) + return; + + // The current best distance + float flDistance = INFINITY; + // The target we have chosen + CCSPlayerController* pTarget = nullptr; + // Cache'd position + Vector_t vecBestPosition = Vector_t(); + + // Entity loop + const int iHighestIndex = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->GetHighestEntityIndex(); + + for (int nIndex = 1; nIndex <= iHighestIndex; nIndex++) + { + // Get the entity + C_BaseEntity* pEntity = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(nIndex); + if (pEntity == nullptr) + continue; + + // Get the class info + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pClassInfo = nullptr; + pEntity->GetSchemaClassInfo(&pClassInfo); + if (pClassInfo == nullptr) + continue; + + // Get the hashed name + const FNV1A_t uHashedName = FNV1A::Hash(pClassInfo->szName); + + // Make sure they're a player controller + if (uHashedName != FNV1A::HashConst("CCSPlayerController")) + continue; + + // Cast to player controller + CCSPlayerController* pPlayer = reinterpret_cast(pEntity); + if (pPlayer == nullptr) + continue; + + // Check the entity is not us + if (pPlayer == pLocalController) + continue; + + // Get the player pawn + C_CSPlayerPawn* pPawn = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(pPlayer->GetPawnHandle()); + if (pPawn == nullptr) + continue; + + // Make sure they're alive + if (!pPlayer->IsPawnAlive()) + continue; + + // Check if they're an enemy + if (!pLocalPawn->IsOtherEnemy(pPawn)) + continue; + + // Check if they're dormant + CGameSceneNode* pCGameSceneNode = pPawn->GetGameSceneNode(); + if (pCGameSceneNode == nullptr || pCGameSceneNode->IsDormant()) + continue; + + // Get the position + + // Firstly, get the skeleton + CSkeletonInstance* pSkeleton = pCGameSceneNode->GetSkeletonInstance(); + if (pSkeleton == nullptr) + continue; + // Now the bones + Matrix2x4_t* pBoneCache = pSkeleton->pBoneCache; + if (pBoneCache == nullptr) + continue; + + const int iBone = 6; // You may wish to change this dynamically but for now let's target the head. + + // Get the bone's position + Vector_t vecPos = pBoneCache->GetOrigin(iBone); + + // @note: this is a simple example of how to check if the player is visible + + // initialize trace, construct filterr and initialize ray + GameTrace_t trace = GameTrace_t(); + TraceFilter_t filter = TraceFilter_t(0x1C3003, pLocalPawn, nullptr, 4); + Ray_t ray = Ray_t(); + + // cast a ray from local player eye positon -> player head bone + // @note: would recommend checking for nullptrs + I::GameTraceManager->TraceShape(&ray, pLocalPawn->GetEyePosition(), pPawn->GetGameSceneNode()->GetSkeletonInstance()->pBoneCache->GetOrigin(6), &filter, &trace); + // check if the hit entity is the one we wanted to check and if the trace end point is visible + if (trace.m_pHitEntity != pPawn || !trace.IsVisible()) + continue; + + + // Get the distance/weight of the move + //float flCurrentDistance = GetAngularDistance(pUserCmd, vecPos, pLocalPawn); + //if (flCurrentDistance > C_GET(float , Vars.aim_range) || flCurrentDistance > flDistance) + //{ + // continue; + //} + + + auto calculateDistance = [](double x1, double y1, double x2, double y2) + { + return std::sqrt((x2 - x1) * (x2 - x1) + (y2 - y1) * (y2 - y1)); + }; + ImVec2 vec{}; + if (!D::WorldToScreen(vecPos, &vec)) + { + continue; + } + DXGI_SWAP_CHAIN_DESC sd{}; + I::SwapChain->pDXGISwapChain->GetDesc(&sd); + + float flCurrentDistance = calculateDistance(sd.BufferDesc.Width / 2, sd.BufferDesc.Height / 2, vec.x, vec.y); + + if (flCurrentDistance > C_GET(float, Vars.aim_range) || flCurrentDistance > flDistance) + { + continue; + } + + // Better move found, override. + pTarget = pPlayer; + flDistance = flCurrentDistance; + vecBestPosition = vecPos; + } + + // Check if a target was found + if (pTarget == nullptr) + return; + + // Point at them + QAngle_t* pViewAngles = &(pUserCmd->pViewAngles->angValue); // Just for readability sake! + + // Find the change in angles + QAngle_t vNewAngles = GetAngularDifference(pUserCmd, vecBestPosition, pLocalPawn); + + // Get the smoothing + //const float flSmoothing = C_GET(float, Vars.flSmoothing); + + // Apply smoothing and set angles + //pViewAngles->x += vNewAngles.x / flSmoothing; + //pViewAngles->y += vNewAngles.y / flSmoothing; + + //pViewAngles->x += vNewAngles.x; + //pViewAngles->y += vNewAngles.y; + //pViewAngles->Normalize(); + + auto aim_punch = pLocalPawn->GetAimPuchAngle(); + + I::Input->GetUserCmd()->SetSubTickAngle({ pViewAngles->x + vNewAngles.x - aim_punch.x * 2.f , pViewAngles->y + vNewAngles.y - aim_punch.y * 2.f}); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/aim.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/aim.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..da95276 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/aim.h @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +#pragma once + +class CUserCmd; +class CBaseUserCmdPB; +class CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB; + +class CCSPlayerController; +class C_CSPlayerPawn; + +struct QAngle_t; + +namespace F::LEGITBOT::AIM +{ + void OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn); + + void AimAssist(CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/legitbot.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/legitbot.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ec84ea --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/legitbot/legitbot.h @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +#pragma once +class CUserCmd; +class CBaseUserCmdPB; +class CCSPlayerController; +class C_CSPlayerPawn; + +namespace F::LEGITBOT +{ + void OnMove(CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9b2ce84 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +#include "misc.h" + +// used: movement callback +#include "misc/movement.h" + +void F::MISC::OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn) +{ + // process movement + MOVEMENT::OnMove(pCmd, pBaseCmd, pLocalController, pLocalPawn); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cebd046 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc.h @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +#pragma once +class CUserCmd; +class CBaseUserCmdPB; +class CCSPlayerController; +class C_CSPlayerPawn; + +namespace F::MISC +{ + void OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc/movement.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc/movement.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff6d506 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc/movement.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +#include "movement.h" + +// used: sdk entity +#include "../../sdk/entity.h" +// used: cusercmd +#include "../../sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h" + +// used: convars +#include "../../core/convars.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/ienginecvar.h" + +// used: cheat variables +#include "../../core/variables.h" + +// movement correction angles +static QAngle_t angCorrectionView = {}; + +void F::MISC::MOVEMENT::OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn) +{ + if (!pLocalController->IsPawnAlive()) + return; + + // check if player is in noclip or on ladder or in water + if (const int32_t nMoveType = pLocalPawn->GetMoveType(); nMoveType == MOVETYPE_NOCLIP || nMoveType == MOVETYPE_LADDER || pLocalPawn->GetWaterLevel() >= WL_WAIST) + return; + + BunnyHop(pCmd, pBaseCmd, pLocalPawn); + AutoStrafe(pBaseCmd, pLocalPawn); + + // loop through all tick commands + for (int nSubTick = 0; nSubTick < pCmd->csgoUserCmd.inputHistoryField.pRep->nAllocatedSize; nSubTick++) + { + CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB* pInputEntry = pCmd->GetInputHistoryEntry(nSubTick); + if (pInputEntry == nullptr) + continue; + + // save view angles for movement correction + angCorrectionView = pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue; + + // movement correction & anti-untrusted + ValidateUserCommand(pCmd, pBaseCmd, pInputEntry); + } +} + +void F::MISC::MOVEMENT::BunnyHop(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn) +{ + if (!C_GET(bool, Vars.bAutoBHop) || CONVAR::sv_autobunnyhopping->value.i1) + return; + + // update random seed + //MATH::fnRandomSeed(pUserCmd->nRandomSeed); + + //// bypass of possible SMAC/VAC server anticheat detection + //if (static bool bShouldFakeJump = false; bShouldFakeJump) + //{ + // pCmd->nButtons.nValue |= IN_JUMP; + // bShouldFakeJump = false; + //} + //// check is player want to jump + //else if (pCmd->nButtons.nValue & IN_JUMP) + //{ + // // check is player on the ground + // if (pLocalPawn->GetFlags() & FL_ONGROUND) + // // note to fake jump at the next tick + // bShouldFakeJump = true; + // // check did random jump chance passed + // else if (MATH::fnRandomInt(0, 100) <= C_GET(int, Vars.nAutoBHopChance)) + // pCmd->nButtons.nValue &= ~IN_JUMP; + //} + + // im lazy so yea :D + if (pLocalPawn->GetFlags() & FL_ONGROUND) + { + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->SetBits(EButtonStatePBBits::BUTTON_STATE_PB_BITS_BUTTONSTATE1); + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->nValue &= ~IN_JUMP; + } +} + +void F::MISC::MOVEMENT::AutoStrafe(CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn) +{ + if (!C_GET(bool, Vars.bAutoStrafe) || pLocalPawn->GetFlags() & FL_ONGROUND) + return; + + pUserCmd->SetBits(EBaseCmdBits::BASE_BITS_LEFTMOVE); + pUserCmd->flSideMove = pUserCmd->nMousedX > 0 ? -1.0f : 1.0f; // a bit yanky, but works +} + +void F::MISC::MOVEMENT::ValidateUserCommand(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB* pInputEntry) +{ + if (pUserCmd == nullptr) + return; + + // clamp angle to avoid untrusted angle + if (C_GET(bool, Vars.bAntiUntrusted)) + { + pInputEntry->SetBits(EInputHistoryBits::INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_VIEWANGLES); + if (pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue.IsValid()) + { + pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue.Clamp(); + pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue.z = 0.f; + } + else + { + pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue = {}; + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("view angles have a NaN component, the value is reset"); + } + } + + MovementCorrection(pUserCmd, pInputEntry, angCorrectionView); + + // correct movement buttons while player move have different to buttons values + // clear all of the move buttons states + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->SetBits(EButtonStatePBBits::BUTTON_STATE_PB_BITS_BUTTONSTATE1); + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->nValue &= (~IN_FORWARD | ~IN_BACK | ~IN_LEFT | ~IN_RIGHT); + + // re-store buttons by active forward/side moves + if (pUserCmd->flForwardMove > 0.0f) + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->nValue |= IN_FORWARD; + else if (pUserCmd->flForwardMove < 0.0f) + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->nValue |= IN_BACK; + + if (pUserCmd->flSideMove > 0.0f) + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->nValue |= IN_RIGHT; + else if (pUserCmd->flSideMove < 0.0f) + pUserCmd->pInButtonState->nValue |= IN_LEFT; + + if (!pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue.IsZero()) + { + const float flDeltaX = std::remainderf(pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue.x - angCorrectionView.x, 360.f); + const float flDeltaY = std::remainderf(pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue.y - angCorrectionView.y, 360.f); + + float flPitch = CONVAR::m_pitch->value.fl; + float flYaw = CONVAR::m_yaw->value.fl; + + float flSensitivity = CONVAR::sensitivity->value.fl; + if (flSensitivity == 0.0f) + flSensitivity = 1.0f; + + pUserCmd->SetBits(EBaseCmdBits::BASE_BITS_MOUSEDX); + pUserCmd->nMousedX = static_cast(flDeltaX / (flSensitivity * flPitch)); + + pUserCmd->SetBits(EBaseCmdBits::BASE_BITS_MOUSEDY); + pUserCmd->nMousedY = static_cast(-flDeltaY / (flSensitivity * flYaw)); + } +} + +void F::MISC::MOVEMENT::MovementCorrection(CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB* pInputEntry, const QAngle_t& angDesiredViewPoint) +{ + if (pUserCmd == nullptr) + return; + + Vector_t vecForward = {}, vecRight = {}, vecUp = {}; + angDesiredViewPoint.ToDirections(&vecForward, &vecRight, &vecUp); + + // we don't attempt on forward/right roll, and on up pitch/yaw + vecForward.z = vecRight.z = vecUp.x = vecUp.y = 0.0f; + + vecForward.NormalizeInPlace(); + vecRight.NormalizeInPlace(); + vecUp.NormalizeInPlace(); + + Vector_t vecOldForward = {}, vecOldRight = {}, vecOldUp = {}; + pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue.ToDirections(&vecOldForward, &vecOldRight, &vecOldUp); + + // we don't attempt on forward/right roll, and on up pitch/yaw + vecOldForward.z = vecOldRight.z = vecOldUp.x = vecOldUp.y = 0.0f; + + vecOldForward.NormalizeInPlace(); + vecOldRight.NormalizeInPlace(); + vecOldUp.NormalizeInPlace(); + + const float flPitchForward = vecForward.x * pUserCmd->flForwardMove; + const float flYawForward = vecForward.y * pUserCmd->flForwardMove; + const float flPitchSide = vecRight.x * pUserCmd->flSideMove; + const float flYawSide = vecRight.y * pUserCmd->flSideMove; + const float flRollUp = vecUp.z * pUserCmd->flUpMove; + + // solve corrected movement speed + pUserCmd->SetBits(EBaseCmdBits::BASE_BITS_FORWARDMOVE); + pUserCmd->flForwardMove = vecOldForward.x * flPitchSide + vecOldForward.y * flYawSide + vecOldForward.x * flPitchForward + vecOldForward.y * flYawForward + vecOldForward.z * flRollUp; + + pUserCmd->SetBits(EBaseCmdBits::BASE_BITS_LEFTMOVE); + pUserCmd->flSideMove = vecOldRight.x * flPitchSide + vecOldRight.y * flYawSide + vecOldRight.x * flPitchForward + vecOldRight.y * flYawForward + vecOldRight.z * flRollUp; + + pUserCmd->SetBits(EBaseCmdBits::BASE_BITS_UPMOVE); + pUserCmd->flUpMove = vecOldUp.x * flYawSide + vecOldUp.y * flPitchSide + vecOldUp.x * flYawForward + vecOldUp.y * flPitchForward + vecOldUp.z * flRollUp; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc/movement.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc/movement.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fa0646f --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/misc/movement.h @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +#pragma once + +class CUserCmd; +class CBaseUserCmdPB; +class CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB; + +class CCSPlayerController; +class C_CSPlayerPawn; + +struct QAngle_t; + +namespace F::MISC::MOVEMENT +{ + void OnMove(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd, CCSPlayerController* pLocalController, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn); + + void BunnyHop(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn); + void AutoStrafe(CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn); + void MovementCorrection(CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB* pInputHistory, const QAngle_t& angDesiredViewPoint); + + // will call MovementCorrection && validate user's angView to avoid untrusted ban + void ValidateUserCommand(CUserCmd* pCmd, CBaseUserCmdPB* pUserCmd, CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB* pInputHistory); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..887eb05 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +#include "visuals.h" + +// used: source sdk +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" +#include "../sdk/entity.h" + +// used: overlay +#include "visuals/overlay.h" +#include "visuals/chams.h" + +#include "../core/sdk.h" +#include "../aimRangePainter.hpp" +using namespace F; + +bool F::VISUALS::Setup() +{ + if (!CHAMS::Initialize()) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to initialize chams"); + return false; + } + + return true; +} + +void F::VISUALS::OnDestroy() +{ + CHAMS::Destroy(); +} + +void VISUALS::OnFrame(const int nStage) +{ + if (nStage == FRAME_RENDER_END) + { + // check is render initialized + if (!D::bInitialized) + return; + + /* + * game and our gui are based on immediate render mode principe + * this means that we should always reset draw data from previous frame and re-store it again + */ + D::ResetDrawData(); + AimRangePainter aimRangePainter; + aimRangePainter.Draw(D::pDrawListActive); + if (CCSPlayerController* pLocal = CCSPlayerController::GetLocalPlayerController(); pLocal != nullptr) + { + OVERLAY::OnFrameStageNotify(pLocal); + } + + D::SwapDrawData(); + } +} + +bool F::VISUALS::OnDrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2) +{ + return CHAMS::OnDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2193213 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals.h @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +#pragma once + +class CMeshData; + +namespace F::VISUALS +{ + bool Setup(); + void OnDestroy(); + + void OnFrame(const int nStage); + bool OnDrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/chams.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/chams.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f45a7d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/chams.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ +#include "chams.h" + +// used: game's interfaces +#include "../../core/interfaces.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/imaterialsystem.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/igameresourceservice.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/iresourcesystem.h" +#include "../../core/sdk.h" +#include "../../sdk/entity.h" + +// used: original call in hooked function +#include "../../core/hooks.h" + +// used: cheat variables +#include "../../core/variables.h" + +CStrongHandle F::VISUALS::CHAMS::CreateMaterial(const char* szMaterialName, const char szVmatBuffer[]) +{ + CKeyValues3* pKeyValues3 = CKeyValues3::CreateMaterialResource(); + pKeyValues3->LoadFromBuffer(szVmatBuffer); + + CStrongHandle pCustomMaterial = {}; + MEM::fnCreateMaterial(nullptr, &pCustomMaterial, szMaterialName, pKeyValues3, 0, 1); + + return pCustomMaterial; +} + +struct CustomMaterial_t +{ + CStrongHandle pMaterial; + CStrongHandle pMaterialInvisible; +}; + +static CustomMaterial_t arrMaterials[VISUAL_MATERIAL_MAX]; + +bool F::VISUALS::CHAMS::Initialize() +{ + // check if we already initialized materials + if (bInitialized) + return bInitialized; + + arrMaterials[VISUAL_MATERIAL_PRIMARY_WHITE] = CustomMaterial_t{ + .pMaterial = CreateMaterial(CS_XOR("materials/dev/primary_white.vmat"), szVMatBufferWhiteVisible), + .pMaterialInvisible = CreateMaterial(CS_XOR("materials/dev/primary_white.vmat"), szVMatBufferWhiteInvisible) + }; + + arrMaterials[VISUAL_MATERIAL_ILLUMINATE] = CustomMaterial_t{ + .pMaterial = CreateMaterial(CS_XOR("materials/dev/primary_white.vmat"), szVMatBufferIlluminateVisible), + .pMaterialInvisible = CreateMaterial(CS_XOR("materials/dev/primary_white.vmat"), szVMatBufferIlluminateInvisible) + }; + + bInitialized = true; + for (auto& [pMaterial, pMaterialInvisible] : arrMaterials) + { + if (pMaterial == nullptr || pMaterialInvisible == nullptr) + bInitialized = false; + } + + return bInitialized; +} + +void F::VISUALS::CHAMS::Destroy() +{ + for (auto& [pVisible, pInvisible] : arrMaterials) + { + if (pVisible) + I::ResourceHandleUtils->DeleteResource(pVisible.pBinding); + + if (pInvisible) + I::ResourceHandleUtils->DeleteResource(pInvisible.pBinding); + } +} + +bool F::VISUALS::CHAMS::OnDrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2) +{ + if (!bInitialized) + return false; + + if (!C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualChams)) + return false; + + if (arrMeshDraw == nullptr) + return false; + + if (arrMeshDraw->pSceneAnimatableObject == nullptr) + return false; + + CBaseHandle hOwner = arrMeshDraw->pSceneAnimatableObject->hOwner; + + auto pEntity = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(hOwner); + if (pEntity == nullptr) + return false; + + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pClassInfo; + pEntity->GetSchemaClassInfo(&pClassInfo); + if (pClassInfo == nullptr) + return false; + + if (CRT::StringCompare(pClassInfo->szName, CS_XOR("C_CSPlayerPawn")) != 0) + return false; + + auto pPlayerPawn = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(hOwner); + if (pPlayerPawn == nullptr) + return false; + + if (!pPlayerPawn->IsOtherEnemy(SDK::LocalPawn)) + return false; + + // alive state + if (pPlayerPawn->GetHealth() <= 0) + return false; + + return OverrideMaterial(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); +} + +bool F::VISUALS::CHAMS::OverrideMaterial(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2) +{ + const auto oDrawObject = H::hkDrawObject.GetOriginal(); + const CustomMaterial_t customMaterial = arrMaterials[C_GET(int, Vars.nVisualChamMaterial)]; + + if (C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualChamsIgnoreZ)) + { + arrMeshDraw->pMaterial = customMaterial.pMaterialInvisible; + arrMeshDraw->colValue = C_GET(Color_t, Vars.colVisualChamsIgnoreZ); + oDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); + } + + arrMeshDraw->pMaterial = customMaterial.pMaterial; + arrMeshDraw->colValue = C_GET(Color_t, Vars.colVisualChams); + oDrawObject(pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, pDx11, arrMeshDraw, nDataCount, pSceneView, pSceneLayer, pUnk, pUnk2); + + return true; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/chams.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/chams.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df67c54 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/chams.h @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +#pragma once +// used: stronghandle +#include "../../sdk/datatypes/stronghandle.h" + +static constexpr char szVMatBufferWhiteVisible[] = +R"( +{ + shader = "csgo_unlitgeneric.vfx" + + F_PAINT_VERTEX_COLORS = 1 + F_TRANSLUCENT = 1 + F_BLEND_MODE = 1 + + g_vColorTint = [1, 1, 1, 1] + + TextureAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tColor = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tNormal = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tTintMask = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" +})"; + +static constexpr char szVMatBufferWhiteInvisible[] = +R"( +{ + shader = "csgo_unlitgeneric.vfx" + + F_PAINT_VERTEX_COLORS = 1 + F_TRANSLUCENT = 1 + F_BLEND_MODE = 1 + F_DISABLE_Z_BUFFERING = 1 + + g_vColorTint = [1, 1, 1, 1] + + TextureAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tColor = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tNormal = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tTintMask = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" +})"; + +static constexpr char szVMatBufferIlluminateVisible[] = +R"( +{ + shader = "csgo_complex.vfx" + + F_SELF_ILLUM = 1 + F_PAINT_VERTEX_COLORS = 1 + F_TRANSLUCENT = 1 + + g_vColorTint = [ 1.000000, 1.000000, 1.000000, 1.000000 ] + g_flSelfIllumScale = [ 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000 ] + g_flSelfIllumBrightness = [ 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000 ] + g_vSelfIllumTint = [ 10.000000, 10.000000, 10.000000, 10.000000 ] + + g_tColor = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tNormal = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tSelfIllumMask = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + TextureAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/debug/particleerror.vtex" + g_tAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/debug/particleerror.vtex" +})"; + +static constexpr char szVMatBufferIlluminateInvisible[] = +R"( +{ + shader = "csgo_complex.vfx" + + F_SELF_ILLUM = 1 + F_PAINT_VERTEX_COLORS = 1 + F_TRANSLUCENT = 1 + F_DISABLE_Z_BUFFERING = 1 + + g_vColorTint = [ 1.000000, 1.000000, 1.000000, 1.000000 ] + g_flSelfIllumScale = [ 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000 ] + g_flSelfIllumBrightness = [ 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000, 3.000000 ] + g_vSelfIllumTint = [ 10.000000, 10.000000, 10.000000, 10.000000 ] + + g_tColor = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tNormal = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + g_tSelfIllumMask = resource:"materials/default/default_mask_tga_fde710a5.vtex" + TextureAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/debug/particleerror.vtex" + g_tAmbientOcclusion = resource:"materials/debug/particleerror.vtex" +})"; + +class CMaterial2; +class CMeshData; + +namespace F::VISUALS::CHAMS +{ + bool Initialize(); + void Destroy(); + + bool OnDrawObject(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2); + + // @note: bDisableZBuffering == true to create invisible material + CStrongHandle CreateMaterial(const char* szMaterialName, const char szVmatBuffer[]); + + bool OverrideMaterial(void* pAnimatableSceneObjectDesc, void* pDx11, CMeshData* arrMeshDraw, int nDataCount, void* pSceneView, void* pSceneLayer, void* pUnk, void* pUnk2); + + inline bool bInitialized = false; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/overlay.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/overlay.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d939ec --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/overlay.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,627 @@ +// used: [stl] vector +#include +// used: [stl] sort +#include + +#include "overlay.h" + +// used: cheat variables +#include "../../core/variables.h" + +// used: entity +#include "../../sdk/entity.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" +#include "../../sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.h" + +// used: sdk variables +#include "../../core/sdk.h" + +// used: l_print +#include "../../utilities/log.h" +// used: inputsystem +#include "../../utilities/inputsystem.h" +// used: draw system +#include "../../utilities/draw.h" + +// used: mainwindowopened +#include "../../core/menu.h" + +using namespace F::VISUALS; + +#pragma region visual_overlay_components + +ImVec2 OVERLAY::CBaseComponent::GetBasePosition(const ImVec4& box) const +{ + return { box[this->nSide == SIDE_RIGHT ? SIDE_RIGHT : SIDE_LEFT], box[this->nSide == SIDE_BOTTOM ? SIDE_BOTTOM : SIDE_TOP] }; +} + +ImVec2 OVERLAY::CBaseDirectionalComponent::GetBasePosition(const ImVec4& box) const +{ + ImVec2 vecBasePosition = {}; + + if (this->nSide == SIDE_TOP || this->nSide == SIDE_BOTTOM) + { + CS_ASSERT(this->nDirection != (this->nSide ^ SIDE_BOTTOM) + 1); // this direction isn't supported for this side + vecBasePosition = { (box[SIDE_LEFT] + box[SIDE_RIGHT]) * 0.5f, box[this->nSide] }; + } + else if (this->nSide == SIDE_LEFT || this->nSide == SIDE_RIGHT) + { + CS_ASSERT(this->nDirection != (this->nSide ^ SIDE_RIGHT)); // this direction isn't supported for this side + vecBasePosition = { box[this->nSide], box[this->nDirection == DIR_TOP ? SIDE_BOTTOM : SIDE_TOP] }; + } + else + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("CBaseDirectionalComponent::GetBasePosition: invalid side: ") << this->nSide; + CS_ASSERT(false); // this side isn't supported for this component + return vecBasePosition; + } + + if (this->nSide != SIDE_RIGHT && this->nDirection != DIR_RIGHT) + vecBasePosition.x -= this->vecSize.x * ((static_cast(this->nDirection) == static_cast(this->nSide) && (this->nSide & 1U) == 1U) ? 0.5f : 1.0f); + + if (this->nSide == SIDE_TOP || this->nDirection == DIR_TOP) + vecBasePosition.y -= this->vecSize.y; + + return vecBasePosition; +} + +OVERLAY::CBarComponent::CBarComponent(const bool bIsMenuItem, const EAlignSide nAlignSide, const ImVec4& vecBox, const float flProgressFactor, const std::size_t uOverlayVarIndex) : + bIsMenuItem(bIsMenuItem), uOverlayVarIndex(uOverlayVarIndex), flProgressFactor(MATH::Clamp(flProgressFactor, 0.f, 1.f)) +{ + this->nSide = nAlignSide; + + const bool bIsHorizontal = ((nAlignSide & 1U) == 1U); + + const BarOverlayVar_t& overlayConfig = C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, uOverlayVarIndex); + this->vecSize = { (bIsHorizontal ? vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT] - vecBox[SIDE_LEFT] : overlayConfig.flThickness), (bIsHorizontal ? overlayConfig.flThickness : vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM] - vecBox[SIDE_TOP]) }; +} + +void OVERLAY::CBarComponent::Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecPosition) +{ + BarOverlayVar_t& overlayConfig = C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, uOverlayVarIndex); + const ImVec2 vecThicknessOffset = { overlayConfig.flThickness, overlayConfig.flThickness }; + ImVec2 vecMin = vecPosition, vecMax = vecPosition + this->vecSize; + + // background glow + pDrawList->AddShadowRect(vecMin, vecMax, overlayConfig.colBackground.GetU32(), 1.f, ImVec2(0, 0)); + // outline + pDrawList->AddRect(vecMin, vecMax, overlayConfig.colOutline.GetU32(), 0.f, ImDrawFlags_None, overlayConfig.flThickness); + + // account outline offset + vecMin += vecThicknessOffset; + vecMax -= vecThicknessOffset; + + const ImVec2 vecLineSize = vecMax - vecMin; + + // modify active side axis by factor + if ((this->nSide & 1U) == 0U) + vecMin.y += vecLineSize.y * (1.0f - this->flProgressFactor); + else + vecMax.x -= vecLineSize.x * (1.0f - this->flProgressFactor); + + // bar + if (overlayConfig.bGradient && !overlayConfig.bUseFactorColor) + { + if (this->nSide == SIDE_LEFT || this->nSide == SIDE_RIGHT) + pDrawList->AddRectFilledMultiColor(vecMin, vecMax, overlayConfig.colPrimary.GetU32(), overlayConfig.colPrimary.GetU32(), overlayConfig.colSecondary.GetU32(), overlayConfig.colSecondary.GetU32()); + else + pDrawList->AddRectFilledMultiColor(vecMin, vecMax, overlayConfig.colSecondary.GetU32(), overlayConfig.colPrimary.GetU32(), overlayConfig.colPrimary.GetU32(), overlayConfig.colSecondary.GetU32()); + } + else + { + const ImU32 u32Color = overlayConfig.bUseFactorColor ? Color_t::FromHSB((flProgressFactor * 120.f) / 360.f, 1.0f, 1.0f).GetU32() : overlayConfig.colPrimary.GetU32(); + pDrawList->AddRectFilled(vecMin, vecMax, u32Color, 0.f, ImDrawFlags_None); + } + + // only open menu item if menu is opened and overlay is enabled + bIsMenuItem &= (MENU::bMainWindowOpened && overlayConfig.bEnable); + if (bIsMenuItem) + { + // @note: padding 2.f incase the thickness is too small + this->bIsHovered = ImRect(vecPosition - ImVec2(2.f, 2.f), vecPosition + this->vecSize + ImVec2(2.f, 2.f)).Contains(ImGui::GetIO().MousePos); + // if component is hovered + right clicked + if (this->bIsHovered && ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) + ImGui::OpenPopup(CS_XOR("context##component.bar")); + + if (ImGui::BeginPopup(CS_XOR("context##component.bar"), ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove)) + { + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(ImGui::GetStyle().FramePadding.x, -1)); + + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("use factor color##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.bUseFactorColor); + if (!overlayConfig.bUseFactorColor) + ImGui::Checkbox(CS_XOR("use gradient##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.bGradient); + + ImGui::ColorEdit3(CS_XOR("primary color##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.colPrimary); + if (overlayConfig.bGradient && !overlayConfig.bUseFactorColor) + ImGui::ColorEdit3(CS_XOR("secondary color##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.colSecondary); + + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("outline color##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.colOutline); + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("background color##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.colBackground); + + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.75f); + ImGui::SliderFloat(CS_XOR("thickness##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.flThickness, 1.0f, 10.0f, CS_XOR("%.1f"), ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + } + else + // dont process hovered on menu close... + this->bIsHovered = false; +} + +OVERLAY::CTextComponent::CTextComponent(const bool bIsMenuItem, const EAlignSide nAlignSide, const EAlignDirection nAlignDirection, const ImFont* pFont, const char* szText, const std::size_t uOverlayVarIndex) : + bIsMenuItem(bIsMenuItem), pFont(pFont), uOverlayVarIndex(uOverlayVarIndex) +{ + // allocate own buffer to safely store a copy of the string + this->szText = new char[CRT::StringLength(szText) + 1U]; + CRT::StringCopy(this->szText, szText); + + this->nSide = nAlignSide; + this->nDirection = nAlignDirection; + this->vecSize = pFont->CalcTextSizeA(pFont->FontSize, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, szText) + C_GET(TextOverlayVar_t, uOverlayVarIndex).flThickness; +} + +OVERLAY::CTextComponent::~CTextComponent() +{ + // deallocate buffer of the copied string + delete[] this->szText; +} + +void OVERLAY::CTextComponent::Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecPosition) +{ + TextOverlayVar_t& overlayConfig = C_GET(TextOverlayVar_t, this->uOverlayVarIndex); + + const ImVec2 vecOutlineOffset = { overlayConfig.flThickness, overlayConfig.flThickness }; + + // @test: used for spacing debugging + //pDrawList->AddRect(vecPosition, vecPosition + this->vecSize, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255)); + + // @todo: fix this cringe shit after gui merge + if (overlayConfig.flThickness >= 1.0f) + { + pDrawList->AddText(this->pFont, this->pFont->FontSize, vecPosition, overlayConfig.colOutline.GetU32(), this->szText); + pDrawList->AddText(this->pFont, this->pFont->FontSize, vecPosition + vecOutlineOffset * 2.0f, overlayConfig.colOutline.GetU32(), this->szText); + } + + pDrawList->AddText(this->pFont, this->pFont->FontSize, vecPosition + vecOutlineOffset, overlayConfig.colPrimary.GetU32(), this->szText); + + // only open menu item if menu is opened and overlay is enabled + bIsMenuItem &= MENU::bMainWindowOpened && overlayConfig.bEnable; + if (bIsMenuItem) + { + this->bIsHovered = ImRect(vecPosition, vecPosition + this->vecSize).Contains(ImGui::GetIO().MousePos); + //pDrawList->AddRect(vecPosition, vecPosition + this->vecSize, IM_COL32(this->bIsHovered ? 0 : 255, this->bIsHovered ? 255 : 0, 0, 255)); + + // if component is hovered + right clicked + if (this->bIsHovered && ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) + ImGui::OpenPopup(CS_XOR("context##component.text")); + + if (ImGui::BeginPopup(CS_XOR("context##component.text"))) + { + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(ImGui::GetStyle().FramePadding.x, -1)); + + ImGui::ColorEdit3(CS_XOR("primary color##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.colPrimary); + ImGui::ColorEdit4(CS_XOR("outline color##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.colOutline); + + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.75f); + ImGui::SliderFloat(CS_XOR("outline thickness##component.bar"), &overlayConfig.flThickness, 1.0f, 10.0f, CS_XOR("%.1f"), ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput); + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + } +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region visual_overlay_context + +bool OVERLAY::Context_t::AddBoxComponent(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec4& vecBox, const int nType, float flThickness, float flRounding, const Color_t& colPrimary, const Color_t& colOutline) +{ + flThickness = std::floorf(flThickness); + const ImVec2 vecThicknessOffset = { flThickness, flThickness }; + + switch (nType) + { + case VISUAL_OVERLAY_BOX_FULL: + { + const ImVec2 vecBoxMin = { vecBox[SIDE_LEFT], vecBox[SIDE_TOP] }; + const ImVec2 vecBoxMax = { vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT], vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM] }; + + // inner outline + pDrawList->AddRect(vecBoxMin + vecThicknessOffset * 2.0f, vecBoxMax - vecThicknessOffset * 2.0f, colOutline.GetU32(), flRounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, flThickness); + // primary box + pDrawList->AddRect(vecBoxMin + vecThicknessOffset, vecBoxMax - vecThicknessOffset, colPrimary.GetU32(), flRounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, flThickness); + // outer outline + pDrawList->AddRect(vecBoxMin, vecBoxMax, colOutline.GetU32(), flRounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, flThickness); + + break; + } + case VISUAL_OVERLAY_BOX_CORNERS: + { + // corner part of the whole line + constexpr float flPartRatio = 0.25f; + + const float flCornerWidth = ((vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT] - vecBox[SIDE_LEFT]) * flPartRatio); + const float flCornerHeight = ((vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM] - vecBox[SIDE_TOP]) * flPartRatio); + + const ImVec2 arrCornerPoints[4][3] = { + // top-left + { ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_LEFT], vecBox[SIDE_TOP] + flCornerHeight) + vecThicknessOffset, ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_LEFT], vecBox[SIDE_TOP]) + vecThicknessOffset, ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_LEFT] + flCornerWidth, vecBox[SIDE_TOP]) + vecThicknessOffset }, + + // top-right + { ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT] - flCornerWidth - vecThicknessOffset.x, vecBox[SIDE_TOP] + vecThicknessOffset.y * 2.0f), ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT] - vecThicknessOffset.x, vecBox[SIDE_TOP] + vecThicknessOffset.y * 2.0f), ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT] - vecThicknessOffset.x, vecBox[SIDE_TOP] + flCornerHeight + vecThicknessOffset.y * 2.0f) }, + + // bottom-left + { ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_LEFT] + flCornerWidth + vecThicknessOffset.x, vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM] - vecThicknessOffset.y * 2.0f), ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_LEFT] + vecThicknessOffset.x, vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM] - vecThicknessOffset.y * 2.0f), ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_LEFT] + vecThicknessOffset.x, vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM] - flCornerHeight - vecThicknessOffset.y * 2.0f) }, + + // bottom-right + { ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT], vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM] - flCornerHeight) - vecThicknessOffset, ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT], vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM]) - vecThicknessOffset, ImVec2(vecBox[SIDE_RIGHT] - flCornerWidth, vecBox[SIDE_BOTTOM]) - vecThicknessOffset } + }; + + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < CS_ARRAYSIZE(arrCornerPoints); i++) + { + const auto& arrLinePoints = arrCornerPoints[i]; + const ImVec2 vecHalfPixelOffset = ((i & 1U) == 1U ? ImVec2(-0.5f, -0.5f) : ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + + // @todo: we can even do not clear path and reuse it + pDrawList->PathLineTo(arrLinePoints[0] + vecHalfPixelOffset); + pDrawList->PathLineTo(arrLinePoints[1] + vecHalfPixelOffset); + pDrawList->PathLineTo(arrLinePoints[2] + vecHalfPixelOffset); + pDrawList->PathStroke(colOutline.GetU32(), false, flThickness + 1.0f); + + pDrawList->PathLineTo(arrLinePoints[0] + vecHalfPixelOffset); + pDrawList->PathLineTo(arrLinePoints[1] + vecHalfPixelOffset); + pDrawList->PathLineTo(arrLinePoints[2] + vecHalfPixelOffset); + pDrawList->PathStroke(colPrimary.GetU32(), false, flThickness); + } + + break; + } + default: + break; + } + + // accumulate spacing for next side/directional components + for (float& flSidePadding : this->arrSidePaddings) + flSidePadding += this->flComponentSpacing; + + return ImRect(vecBox).Contains(ImGui::GetIO().MousePos); +} + +ImVec4 OVERLAY::Context_t::AddFrameComponent(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecScreen, const EAlignSide nSide, const Color_t& colBackground, const float flRounding, const ImDrawFlags nRoundingCorners) +{ + // calculate frame size by previously added components on active side + const ImVec2 vecFrameSize = this->GetTotalDirectionalSize(nSide); + + ImVec2 vecFrameMin = { vecScreen.x - vecFrameSize.x * 0.5f, vecScreen.y - vecFrameSize.y }; + ImVec2 vecFrameMax = { vecScreen.x + vecFrameSize.x * 0.5f, vecScreen.y }; + + pDrawList->AddRectFilled(vecFrameMin - this->flComponentSpacing, vecFrameMax + this->flComponentSpacing, colBackground.GetU32(), flRounding, nRoundingCorners); + + // accumulate spacing for next side/directional components + for (float& flSidePadding : this->arrSidePaddings) + flSidePadding += this->flComponentSpacing; + + return { vecFrameMin.x, vecFrameMin.y, vecFrameMax.x, vecFrameMax.y }; +} + +/* + * @todo: currently not well designed, make it more flexible for use cases where we need e.g. previous frame bar factor etc + * also to optimize this, allocate components at stack instead of heap + make all context units static and do not realloc components storage every frame, but reset (like memset idk) it at the end of frame + */ +void OVERLAY::Context_t::AddComponent(CBaseComponent* pComponent) +{ + // guarantee that first directional component on each side is in the primary direction + if (pComponent->IsDirectional()) + { + CBaseDirectionalComponent* pDirectionalComponent = static_cast(pComponent); + + // check if it's not an exception direction and there are no components in the primary direction + if (((pDirectionalComponent->nSide & 1U) == 1U || pDirectionalComponent->nDirection != DIR_TOP) && this->arrSideDirectionPaddings[pDirectionalComponent->nSide][pDirectionalComponent->nSide] == 0.0f) + pDirectionalComponent->nDirection = static_cast(pDirectionalComponent->nSide); + } + + float& flSidePadding = this->arrSidePaddings[pComponent->nSide]; + + if (pComponent->IsDirectional()) + { + CBaseDirectionalComponent* pDirectionalComponent = static_cast(pComponent); + float(&arrDirectionPaddings)[DIR_MAX] = this->arrSideDirectionPaddings[pDirectionalComponent->nSide]; + + // directional components don't change side paddings, but take them into account + pComponent->vecOffset[pDirectionalComponent->nSide & 1U] += ((pDirectionalComponent->nSide < 2U) ? -flSidePadding : flSidePadding); + + // check if the component is in the same direction as the side and it's the first component in this direction + if (static_cast(pDirectionalComponent->nDirection) == static_cast(pDirectionalComponent->nSide) && arrDirectionPaddings[pDirectionalComponent->nDirection] == 0.0f) + { + // accumulate paddings for sub-directions + for (std::uint8_t nSubDirection = DIR_LEFT; nSubDirection < DIR_MAX; nSubDirection++) + { + /* + * exclude conflicting sub-directions + * + * SIDE_LEFT[0]: DIR_LEFT[0], DIR_BOTTOM[3] | ~2 & ~1 + * SIDE_TOP[1]: DIR_LEFT[0], DIR_TOP[1], DIR_RIGHT[2] | ~3 + * SIDE_RIGHT[2]: DIR_RIGHT[2], DIR_BOTTOM[3] | ~0 & ~1 + * SIDE_BOTTOM[3]: DIR_LEFT[0], DIR_RIGHT[2], DIR_BOTTOM[3] | ~1 + */ + if (nSubDirection == pDirectionalComponent->nSide || nSubDirection == ((pDirectionalComponent->nSide + 2U) & 3U) || (nSubDirection == DIR_TOP && (pDirectionalComponent->nSide & 1U) == 0U)) + continue; + + arrDirectionPaddings[nSubDirection] += (pDirectionalComponent->vecSize[nSubDirection == DIR_BOTTOM ? SIDE_TOP : SIDE_LEFT] * (((pDirectionalComponent->nSide & 1U) == 1U) ? 0.5f : 1.0f) + this->flComponentSpacing); + } + } + + float& flSideDirectionPadding = arrDirectionPaddings[pDirectionalComponent->nDirection]; + + // append direction padding to offset + pComponent->vecOffset[pDirectionalComponent->nDirection & 1U] += ((pDirectionalComponent->nDirection < 2U) ? -flSideDirectionPadding : flSideDirectionPadding); + + // accumulate direction padding for next component + flSideDirectionPadding += pDirectionalComponent->vecSize[pDirectionalComponent->nDirection & 1U]; + + // accumulate spacing for next directional components + flSideDirectionPadding += this->flComponentSpacing; + } + else + { + // append side padding to offset + pComponent->vecOffset[pComponent->nSide & 1U] += ((pComponent->nSide < 2U) ? -(flSidePadding + pComponent->vecSize[pComponent->nSide]) : flSidePadding); + + // accumulate side padding for next component + flSidePadding += pComponent->vecSize[pComponent->nSide & 1U]; + + // accumulate spacing for next components + flSidePadding += this->flComponentSpacing; + } + + this->vecComponents.push_back(pComponent); +} + +ImVec2 OVERLAY::Context_t::GetTotalDirectionalSize(const EAlignSide nSide) const +{ + ImVec2 vecSideSize = {}; + + // @todo: we should peek max of bottom + side or top directions at horizontal sides + const float(&arrDirectionPaddings)[DIR_MAX] = this->arrSideDirectionPaddings[nSide]; + for (std::uint8_t nSubDirection = DIR_LEFT; nSubDirection < DIR_MAX; nSubDirection++) + vecSideSize[nSubDirection & 1U] += arrDirectionPaddings[nSubDirection]; + + return vecSideSize; +} + +void OVERLAY::Context_t::Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec4& vecBox) const +{ + bool bCenteredFirstSideDirectional[SIDE_MAX] = {}; + + for (CBaseComponent* const pComponent : this->vecComponents) + { + ImVec2 vecPosition = pComponent->GetBasePosition(vecBox); + + // check if the component is in the side that supports multi-component centering + if (pComponent->nSide == SIDE_TOP || pComponent->nSide == SIDE_BOTTOM) + { + // check if the component is directional + if (CBaseDirectionalComponent* const pDirectionalComponent = static_cast(pComponent); pDirectionalComponent->IsDirectional()) + { + const float(&arrDirectionPaddings)[DIR_MAX] = this->arrSideDirectionPaddings[pComponent->nSide]; + + // check if the component has horizontal direction + if (static_cast(pDirectionalComponent->nDirection) != static_cast(pDirectionalComponent->nSide)) + // add centering offset to the component's offset + pDirectionalComponent->vecOffset.x += (arrDirectionPaddings[DIR_LEFT] - arrDirectionPaddings[DIR_RIGHT]) * 0.5f; + // otherwise check if it's the first component in direction as side + else if (!bCenteredFirstSideDirectional[pDirectionalComponent->nSide]) + { + // add centering offset to the component's offset + pDirectionalComponent->vecOffset.x += (arrDirectionPaddings[DIR_LEFT] - arrDirectionPaddings[DIR_RIGHT]) * 0.5f; + + bCenteredFirstSideDirectional[pDirectionalComponent->nSide] = true; + } + } + } + + // add final component offset to the base position + vecPosition += pComponent->vecOffset; + + pComponent->Render(pDrawList, vecPosition); + } +} + +#pragma endregion + +void OVERLAY::OnFrameStageNotify(CCSPlayerController* pLocalController) +{ + // only render when in-game + if (!I::Engine->IsConnected() || !I::Engine->IsInGame()) + return; + + if (!C_GET(bool, Vars.bVisualOverlay)) + return; + + enum ESortEntityType : int + { + SORT_ENTITY_NONE = -1, + SORT_ENTITY_PLAYER = 0, + }; + + struct SortEntityObject_t + { + SortEntityObject_t(C_BaseEntity* pEntity, CBaseHandle hEntity, float flDistance, ESortEntityType nSortType) : + pEntity(pEntity), hEntity(hEntity), flDistance(flDistance), nSortType(nSortType) { } + + C_BaseEntity* pEntity; + CBaseHandle hEntity; + float flDistance; + ESortEntityType nSortType; + }; + + const int nHighestIndex = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->GetHighestEntityIndex(); + + std::vector vecSortedEntities = {}; + vecSortedEntities.reserve(nHighestIndex); + + // @note: 0 is resved for world entity 'CWorld' + for (int nIndex = 1; nIndex <= nHighestIndex; nIndex++) + { + C_BaseEntity* pEntity = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(nIndex); + if (pEntity == nullptr) + continue; + + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pClassInfo = nullptr; + pEntity->GetSchemaClassInfo(&pClassInfo); + if (pClassInfo == nullptr) + continue; + + const FNV1A_t uHashedName = FNV1A::Hash(pClassInfo->szName); + + ESortEntityType nEntityType = SORT_ENTITY_NONE; + Vector_t vecOrigin = Vector_t(); + + if (uHashedName == FNV1A::HashConst("CCSPlayerController")) + { + nEntityType = SORT_ENTITY_PLAYER; + CCSPlayerController* pPlayer = reinterpret_cast(pEntity); + if (pPlayer == nullptr) + continue; + + vecOrigin = pPlayer->GetPawnOrigin(); + } + + // only add sortable entities + if (nEntityType != SORT_ENTITY_NONE) + vecSortedEntities.emplace_back(pEntity, pEntity->GetRefEHandle(), SDK::CameraPosition.DistTo(vecOrigin), nEntityType); + } + + // sort entities by distance to draw them from the farthest to the nearest + std::ranges::sort(vecSortedEntities.begin(), vecSortedEntities.end(), std::ranges::greater{}, &SortEntityObject_t::flDistance); + + for (auto& [pEntity, hEntity, flDistance, nSortType] : vecSortedEntities) + { + // if the handle is invalid, skip this entity + if (!hEntity.IsValid()) + continue; + + switch (nSortType) + { + case SORT_ENTITY_PLAYER: + { + CCSPlayerController* pPlayer = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(hEntity); + if (pPlayer == nullptr) + break; + + if (!pPlayer->IsPawnAlive()) + break; + + Player(pLocalController, pPlayer, flDistance); + + break; + } + default: + break; + } + } +} + +bool OVERLAY::GetEntityBoundingBox(C_CSPlayerPawn* pEntity, ImVec4* pVecOut) +{ + CCollisionProperty* pCollision = pEntity->GetCollision(); + if (pCollision == nullptr) + return false; + + CGameSceneNode* pGameSceneNode = pEntity->GetGameSceneNode(); + if (pGameSceneNode == nullptr) + return false; + + CTransform nodeToWorldTransform = pGameSceneNode->GetNodeToWorld(); + const Matrix3x4_t matTransform = nodeToWorldTransform.quatOrientation.ToMatrix(nodeToWorldTransform.vecPosition); + + const Vector_t vecMins = pCollision->GetMins(); + const Vector_t vecMaxs = pCollision->GetMaxs(); + + pVecOut->x = pVecOut->y = std::numeric_limits::max(); + pVecOut->z = pVecOut->w = -std::numeric_limits::max(); + + for (int i = 0; i < 8; ++i) + { + const Vector_t vecPoint{ + i & 1 ? vecMaxs.x : vecMins.x, + i & 2 ? vecMaxs.y : vecMins.y, + i & 4 ? vecMaxs.z : vecMins.z + }; + ImVec2 vecScreen; + if (!D::WorldToScreen(vecPoint.Transform(matTransform), &vecScreen)) + return false; + + pVecOut->x = MATH::Min(pVecOut->x, vecScreen.x); + pVecOut->y = MATH::Min(pVecOut->y, vecScreen.y); + pVecOut->z = MATH::Max(pVecOut->z, vecScreen.x); + pVecOut->w = MATH::Max(pVecOut->w, vecScreen.y); + } + + return true; +} + +void OVERLAY::Player(CCSPlayerController* pLocal, CCSPlayerController* pPlayer, const float flDistance) +{ + C_CSPlayerPawn* pLocalPawn = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(pLocal->GetPawnHandle()); + C_CSPlayerPawn* pPlayerPawn = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(pPlayer->GetPawnHandle()); + + if (pLocalPawn == nullptr || pPlayerPawn == nullptr) + return; + + // @note: this is a simple example of how to check if the player is visible + + // initialize trace, construct filterr and initialize ray + //GameTrace_t trace = GameTrace_t(); + //TraceFilter_t filter = TraceFilter_t(0x1C3003, pLocalPawn, nullptr, 4); + //Ray_t ray = Ray_t(); + + // cast a ray from local player eye positon -> player head bone + // @note: would recommend checking for nullptrs + //I::GameTraceManager->TraceShape(&ray, pLocalPawn->GetEyePosition(), pPlayerPawn->GetGameSceneNode()->GetSkeletonInstance()->pBoneCache->GetOrigin(6), &filter, &trace); + // check if the hit entity is the one we wanted to check and if the trace end point is visible + //if (trace.m_pHitEntity != pPlayerPawn || !trace.IsVisible( )) + // return; + + bool bIsEnemy = (pLocalPawn->IsOtherEnemy(pPlayerPawn)); + + // @note: only enemy overlay for now + if (!bIsEnemy) + return; + + ImVec4 vecBox = {}; + if (!GetEntityBoundingBox(pPlayerPawn, &vecBox)) + return; + + Context_t context; + + if (const auto& frameOverlayConfig = C_GET(FrameOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayBox); frameOverlayConfig.bEnable) + context.AddBoxComponent(D::pDrawListActive, vecBox, 1, frameOverlayConfig.flThickness, frameOverlayConfig.flRounding, frameOverlayConfig.colPrimary, frameOverlayConfig.colOutline); + + if (const auto& nameOverlayConfig = C_GET(TextOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayName); nameOverlayConfig.bEnable) + { + const char* szPlayerName = pPlayer->GetPlayerName(); + context.AddComponent(new CTextComponent(false, SIDE_TOP, DIR_TOP, FONT::pVisual, szPlayerName, Vars.overlayName)); + } + + if (const auto& healthOverlayConfig = C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayHealthBar); healthOverlayConfig.bEnable) + { + // @note: pPlayerPawn->GetMaxHealth() sometime return 0.f + const float flHealthFactor = pPlayerPawn->GetHealth() / 100.f; + context.AddComponent(new CBarComponent(false, SIDE_LEFT, vecBox, flHealthFactor, Vars.overlayHealthBar)); + } + + if (const auto& armorOverlayConfig = C_GET(BarOverlayVar_t, Vars.overlayArmorBar); armorOverlayConfig.bEnable) + { + const float flArmorFactor = pPlayerPawn->GetArmorValue() / 100.f; + context.AddComponent(new CBarComponent(false, SIDE_BOTTOM, vecBox, flArmorFactor, Vars.overlayArmorBar)); + } + + // render all the context + context.Render(D::pDrawListActive, vecBox); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/overlay.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/overlay.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4533c49 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/features/visuals/overlay.h @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +#pragma once + +#include "../../common.h" + +// used: draw system +#include "../../utilities/draw.h" + +class CCSPlayerController; +class C_BaseEntity; +class C_CSPlayerPawn; + +namespace F::VISUALS::OVERLAY +{ + enum EAlignSide : std::uint8_t + { + SIDE_LEFT = 0U, + SIDE_TOP, + SIDE_RIGHT, + SIDE_BOTTOM, + SIDE_MAX + }; + + enum EAlignDirection : std::uint8_t + { + DIR_LEFT = 0U, + DIR_TOP, + DIR_RIGHT, + DIR_BOTTOM, + DIR_MAX = 4U // @todo: rework stuff based on this cuz one component can have only 3 possible directions at same time. vertical side: left & right + top | bottom, horizontal side: top & bottom + left | right + }; + + class CBaseComponent + { + public: + [[nodiscard]] virtual ImVec2 GetBasePosition(const ImVec4& box) const; + + [[nodiscard]] virtual bool IsDirectional() const + { + return false; + } + + virtual void Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecPosition) = 0; + + EAlignSide nSide = SIDE_TOP; + ImVec2 vecOffset = {}; + ImVec2 vecSize = {}; + }; + + class CBaseDirectionalComponent : public CBaseComponent + { + public: + [[nodiscard]] ImVec2 GetBasePosition(const ImVec4& box) const final; + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsDirectional() const final + { + return true; + } + + EAlignDirection nDirection = DIR_TOP; + }; + + class CBarComponent : public CBaseComponent + { + public: + CBarComponent(const bool bIsMenuItem, const EAlignSide nAlignSide, const ImVec4& vecBox, const float flProgressFactor, const std::size_t uOverlayVarIndex); + + void Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecPosition) final; + + private: + bool bIsMenuItem = false; + // bar progress + float flProgressFactor = 0.0f; + // hovered state for context menu + bool bIsHovered = false; + // config variables + std::size_t uOverlayVarIndex = 0ULL; + }; + + class CTextComponent : public CBaseDirectionalComponent + { + public: + CTextComponent(const bool bIsMenuItem, const EAlignSide nAlignSide, const EAlignDirection nAlignDirection, const ImFont* pFont, const char* szText, const std::size_t uOverlayVarIndex); + ~CTextComponent(); + + void Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecPosition) final; + + private: + bool bIsMenuItem = false; + // font & text for displaying + const ImFont* pFont = nullptr; + char* szText = nullptr; + // hovered state for context menu + bool bIsHovered = false; + // config variables + std::size_t uOverlayVarIndex = 0ULL; + }; + + /* + * overlay component auto-positioning system + * @note: was designed to support the reordering of components that can be implemented with minimal effort + * + * currently supported next sides and sub-directions: + * + * DIR_TOP + * ^ + * | + * DIR_LEFT <-o-> DIR_RIGHT + * DIR_LEFT <-o *---------* o-> DIR_RIGHT + * | | | | + * v | | v + * DIR_BOTTOM | | DIR_BOTTOM + * | | + * DIR_TOP | | DIR_TOP + * ^ | | ^ + * | | | | + * o *---------* o + * DIR_LEFT <-o-> DIR_RIGHT + * | + * v + * DIR_BOTTOM + */ + struct Context_t + { + /* @section: special case components */ + /// add the box component to overlay + /// @remarks: current implementation expects this to be first component, it's an immediate rendering component + /// @return: if the box component is hovered + bool AddBoxComponent(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec4& vecBox, const int nType, float flThickness, float flRounding, const Color_t& colPrimary, const Color_t& colOutline); + /// add the frame component to overlay + /// @remarks: current implementation expects this to be added after components that should be inside it, it's an immediate rendering component + /// @returns: size constraints of the added frame + ImVec4 AddFrameComponent(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecScreen, const EAlignSide nSide, const Color_t& colBackground, const float flRounding, const ImDrawFlags nRoundingCorners); + + /* @section: common components */ + /// add new component to overlay + /// @param[in] pComponent pointer to the one of supported component types + void AddComponent(CBaseComponent* pComponent); + + /* @section: get */ + /// @returns: size of the all directional components currently assigned to @a'nSide' + [[nodiscard]] ImVec2 GetTotalDirectionalSize(const EAlignSide nSide) const; + + // calculate final position of components and render them + void Render(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec4& vecBox) const; + + private: + // storage of all components + std::vector vecComponents = {}; + // additional spacing between components + float flComponentSpacing = 1.0f; + // summary padding of all align sides + float arrSidePaddings[SIDE_MAX] = {}; + // summary padding for all align directions of all align sides + float arrSideDirectionPaddings[SIDE_MAX][DIR_MAX] = {}; + }; + + /* @section: callbacks */ + void OnFrameStageNotify(CCSPlayerController* pLocalController); + + /* @section: get */ + /// get bounding box of entity + /// @returns: true if entity has collision and all points of box are visible on screen, false otherwise + bool GetEntityBoundingBox(C_CSPlayerPawn* pEntity, ImVec4* pVecOut); + + /* @section: main */ + // draw box, bars, text infos, etc at player position + void Player(CCSPlayerController* pLocal, CCSPlayerController* pPlayer, const float flDistance); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/painter.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/painter.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3cd690 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/painter.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +#include "painter.h" +#include "core/sdk.h" +#include "sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h" +Painter::Painter() +{ +} + + + diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/painter.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/painter.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..152db80 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/painter.h @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +#pragma once +#include "utilities/draw.h" +class Painter +{ + +public: + Painter(); + virtual void Draw(ImDrawList* pDrawList) = 0; + virtual ~Painter() = default; +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/const.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/const.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95f1d79 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/const.h @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +#pragma once + +// @source: master/game/shared/cstrike15/gametypes.h +#pragma region valve_gametypes + +enum EGameType : int +{ + GAMETYPE_UNKNOWN = -1, + GAMETYPE_CLASSIC, + GAMETYPE_GUNGAME, + GAMETYPE_TRAINING, + GAMETYPE_CUSTOM, + GAMETYPE_COOPERATIVE, + GAMETYPE_SKIRMISH, + GAMETYPE_FREEFORALL +}; + +enum EGameMode : int +{ + GAMEMODE_UNKNOWN = -1, + + // GAMETYPE_CLASSIC + GAMEMODE_CLASSIC_CASUAL = 0, + GAMEMODE_CLASSIC_COMPETITIVE, + GAMEMODE_CLASSIC_SCRIM_COMPETITIVE2V2, + GAMEMODE_CLASSIC_SCRIM_COMPETITIVE5V5, + + // GAMETYPE_GUNGAME + GAMEMODE_GUNGAME_PROGRESSIVE = 0, + GAMEMODE_GUNGAME_BOMB, + GAMEMODE_GUNGAME_DEATHMATCH, + + // GAMETYPE_TRAINING + GAMEMODE_TRAINING_DEFAULT = 0, + + // GAMETYPE_CUSTOM + GAMEMODE_CUSTOM_DEFAULT = 0, + + // GAMETYPE_COOPERATIVE + GAMEMODE_COOPERATIVE_DEFAULT = 0, + GAMEMODE_COOPERATIVE_MISSION, + + // GAMETYPE_SKIRMISH + GAMEMODE_SKIRMISH_DEFAULT = 0, + + // GAMETYPE_FREEFORALL + GAMEMODE_FREEFORALL_SURVIVAL = 0 +}; + +#pragma endregion + +enum ELifeState : int +{ + LIFE_ALIVE = 0, + LIFE_DYING, + LIFE_DEAD, + LIFE_RESPAWNABLE, + LIFE_DISCARDBODY +}; + +enum EFlags : int +{ + FL_ONGROUND = (1 << 0), // entity is at rest / on the ground + FL_DUCKING = (1 << 1), // player is fully crouched/uncrouched + FL_ANIMDUCKING = (1 << 2), // player is in the process of crouching or uncrouching but could be in transition + FL_WATERJUMP = (1 << 3), // player is jumping out of water + FL_ONTRAIN = (1 << 4), // player is controlling a train, so movement commands should be ignored on client during prediction + FL_INRAIN = (1 << 5), // entity is standing in rain + FL_FROZEN = (1 << 6), // player is frozen for 3rd-person camera + FL_ATCONTROLS = (1 << 7), // player can't move, but keeps key inputs for controlling another entity + FL_CLIENT = (1 << 8), // entity is a client (player) + FL_FAKECLIENT = (1 << 9), // entity is a fake client, simulated server side; don't send network messages to them + FL_INWATER = (1 << 10), // entity is in water + FL_FLY = (1 << 11), + FL_SWIM = (1 << 12), + FL_CONVEYOR = (1 << 13), + FL_NPC = (1 << 14), + FL_GODMODE = (1 << 15), + FL_NOTARGET = (1 << 16), + FL_AIMTARGET = (1 << 17), + FL_PARTIALGROUND = (1 << 18), // entity is standing on a place where not all corners are valid + FL_STATICPROP = (1 << 19), // entity is a static property + FL_GRAPHED = (1 << 20), + FL_GRENADE = (1 << 21), + FL_STEPMOVEMENT = (1 << 22), + FL_DONTTOUCH = (1 << 23), + FL_BASEVELOCITY = (1 << 24), // entity have applied base velocity this frame + FL_WORLDBRUSH = (1 << 25), // entity is not moveable/removeable brush (part of the world, but represented as an entity for transparency or something) + FL_OBJECT = (1 << 26), + FL_KILLME = (1 << 27), // entity is marked for death and will be freed by the game + FL_ONFIRE = (1 << 28), + FL_DISSOLVING = (1 << 29), + FL_TRANSRAGDOLL = (1 << 30), // entity is turning into client-side ragdoll + FL_UNBLOCKABLE_BY_PLAYER = (1 << 31) +}; + +enum EEFlags : int +{ + EFL_KILLME = (1 << 0), + EFL_DORMANT = (1 << 1), + EFL_NOCLIP_ACTIVE = (1 << 2), + EFL_SETTING_UP_BONES = (1 << 3), + EFL_KEEP_ON_RECREATE_ENTITIES = (1 << 4), + EFL_DIRTY_SHADOWUPDATE = (1 << 5), + EFL_NOTIFY = (1 << 6), + EFL_FORCE_CHECK_TRANSMIT = (1 << 7), + EFL_BOT_FROZEN = (1 << 8), + EFL_SERVER_ONLY = (1 << 9), + EFL_NO_AUTO_EDICT_ATTACH = (1 << 10), + EFL_DIRTY_ABSTRANSFORM = (1 << 11), + EFL_DIRTY_ABSVELOCITY = (1 << 12), + EFL_DIRTY_ABSANGVELOCITY = (1 << 13), + EFL_DIRTY_SURROUNDING_COLLISION_BOUNDS = (1 << 14), + EFL_DIRTY_SPATIAL_PARTITION = (1 << 15), + EFL_HAS_PLAYER_CHILD = (1 << 16), + EFL_IN_SKYBOX = (1 << 17), + EFL_USE_PARTITION_WHEN_NOT_SOLID = (1 << 18), + EFL_TOUCHING_FLUID = (1 << 19), + EFL_IS_BEING_LIFTED_BY_BARNACLE = (1 << 20), + EFL_NO_ROTORWASH_PUSH = (1 << 21), + EFL_NO_THINK_FUNCTION = (1 << 22), + EFL_NO_GAME_PHYSICS_SIMULATION = (1 << 23), + EFL_CHECK_UNTOUCH = (1 << 24), + EFL_DONTBLOCKLOS = (1 << 25), + EFL_DONTWALKON = (1 << 26), + EFL_NO_DISSOLVE = (1 << 27), + EFL_NO_MEGAPHYSCANNON_RAGDOLL = (1 << 28), + EFL_NO_WATER_VELOCITY_CHANGE = (1 << 29), + EFL_NO_PHYSCANNON_INTERACTION = (1 << 30), + EFL_NO_DAMAGE_FORCES = (1 << 31) +}; + +enum EMoveType : int +{ + MOVETYPE_NONE = 0, + MOVETYPE_ISOMETRIC, + MOVETYPE_WALK, + MOVETYPE_STEP, + MOVETYPE_FLY, // no gravity, but still collides with stuff + MOVETYPE_FLYGRAVITY, // flies through the air and is affected by gravity + MOVETYPE_VPHYSICS, + MOVETYPE_PUSH, // no clip to world, push and crush + MOVETYPE_NOCLIP, // no gravity, no collisions, still do velocity/absvelocity + MOVETYPE_LADDER, + MOVETYPE_OBSERVER, // observer movement, depends on player's observer mode + MOVETYPE_CUSTOM, + MOVETYPE_LAST = MOVETYPE_CUSTOM, + MOVETYPE_MAX_BITS = 4 +}; + +// identifies how submerged in water a player is +enum : int +{ + WL_NOTINWATER = 0, + WL_FEET, + WL_WAIST, + WL_EYES +}; + +enum ETeamID : int +{ + TEAM_UNK, + TEAM_SPECTATOR, + TEAM_TT, + TEAM_CT +}; + +using ItemDefinitionIndex_t = std::uint16_t; +enum EItemDefinitionIndexes : ItemDefinitionIndex_t +{ + WEAPON_NONE, + WEAPON_DESERT_EAGLE, + WEAPON_DUAL_BERETTAS, + WEAPON_FIVE_SEVEN, + WEAPON_GLOCK_18, + WEAPON_AK_47 = 7, + WEAPON_AUG, + WEAPON_AWP, + WEAPON_FAMAS, + WEAPON_G3SG1, + WEAPON_GALIL_AR = 13, + WEAPON_M249, + WEAPON_M4A4 = 16, + WEAPON_MAC_10, + WEAPON_P90 = 19, + WEAPON_REPULSOR_DEVICE, + WEAPON_MP5_SD = 23, + WEAPON_UMP_45, + WEAPON_XM1014, + WEAPON_PP_BIZON, + WEAPON_MAG_7, + WEAPON_NEGEV, + WEAPON_SAWED_OFF, + WEAPON_TEC_9, + WEAPON_ZEUS_X27, + WEAPON_P2000, + WEAPON_MP7, + WEAPON_MP9, + WEAPON_NOVA, + WEAPON_P250, + WEAPON_RIOT_SHIELD, + WEAPON_SCAR_20, + WEAPON_SG_553, + WEAPON_SSG_08, + WEAPON_KNIFE0, + WEAPON_KNIFE1, + WEAPON_FLASHBANG, + WEAPON_HIGH_EXPLOSIVE_GRENADE, + WEAPON_SMOKE_GRENADE, + WEAPON_MOLOTOV, + WEAPON_DECOY_GRENADE, + WEAPON_INCENDIARY_GRENADE, + WEAPON_C4_EXPLOSIVE, + WEAPON_KEVLAR_VEST, + WEAPON_KEVLAR_and_HELMET, + WEAPON_HEAVY_ASSAULT_SUIT, + WEAPON_NO_LOCALIZED_NAME0 = 54, + WEAPON_DEFUSE_KIT, + WEAPON_RESCUE_KIT, + WEAPON_MEDI_SHOT, + WEAPON_MUSIC_KIT, + WEAPON_KNIFE2, + WEAPON_M4A1_S, + WEAPON_USP_S, + WEAPON_TRADE_UP_CONTRACT, + WEAPON_CZ75_AUTO, + WEAPON_R8_REVOLVER, + WEAPON_TACTICAL_AWARENESS_GRENADE = 68, + WEAPON_BARE_HANDS, + WEAPON_BREACH_CHARGE, + WEAPON_TABLET = 72, + WEAPON_KNIFE3 = 74, + WEAPON_AXE, + WEAPON_HAMMER, + WEAPON_WRENCH = 78, + WEAPON_SPECTRAL_SHIV = 80, + WEAPON_FIRE_BOMB, + WEAPON_DIVERSION_DEVICE, + WEAPON_FRAG_GRENADE, + WEAPON_SNOWBALL, + WEAPON_BUMP_MINE, + WEAPON_BAYONET = 500, + WEAPON_CLASSIC_KNIFE = 503, + WEAPON_FLIP_KNIFE = 505, + WEAPON_GUT_KNIFE, + WEAPON_KARAMBIT, + WEAPON_M9_BAYONET, + WEAPON_HUNTSMAN_KNIFE, + WEAPON_FALCHION_KNIFE = 512, + WEAPON_BOWIE_KNIFE = 514, + WEAPON_BUTTERFLY_KNIFE, + WEAPON_SHADOW_DAGGERS, + WEAPON_PARACORD_KNIFE, + WEAPON_SURVIVAL_KNIFE, + WEAPON_URSUS_KNIFE, + WEAPON_NAVAJA_KNIFE, + WEAPON_NOMAD_KNIFE, + WEAPON_STILETTO_KNIFE, + WEAPON_TALON_KNIFE, + WEAPON_SKELETON_KNIFE = 525, +}; + +enum EWeaponType : std::uint32_t +{ + WEAPONTYPE_KNIFE = 0, + WEAPONTYPE_PISTOL = 1, + WEAPONTYPE_SUBMACHINEGUN = 2, + WEAPONTYPE_RIFLE = 3, + WEAPONTYPE_SHOTGUN = 4, + WEAPONTYPE_SNIPER_RIFLE = 5, + WEAPONTYPE_MACHINEGUN = 6, + WEAPONTYPE_C4 = 7, + WEAPONTYPE_TASER = 8, + WEAPONTYPE_GRENADE = 9, + WEAPONTYPE_EQUIPMENT = 10, + WEAPONTYPE_STACKABLEITEM = 11, + WEAPONTYPE_FISTS = 12, + WEAPONTYPE_BREACHCHARGE = 13, + WEAPONTYPE_BUMPMINE = 14, + WEAPONTYPE_TABLET = 15, + WEAPONTYPE_MELEE = 16, + WEAPONTYPE_SHIELD = 17, + WEAPONTYPE_ZONE_REPULSOR = 18, + WEAPONTYPE_UNKNOWN = 19 +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/color.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/color.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f6caa9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/color.h @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [crt] fmodf +#include +// used: bit_cast +#include + +#include "../../common.h" +// used: swap +#include "../../utilities/crt.h" +// used: [ext] imu32 +#include "../../../dependencies/imgui/imgui.h" + +enum +{ + COLOR_R = 0, + COLOR_G = 1, + COLOR_B = 2, + COLOR_A = 3 +}; + +struct ColorRGBExp32 +{ + std::uint8_t r, g, b; + std::int8_t iExponent; +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(ColorRGBExp32) == 0x4); + +struct Color_t +{ + Color_t() = default; + + // 8-bit color constructor (in: [0 .. 255]) + constexpr Color_t(const std::uint8_t r, const std::uint8_t g, const std::uint8_t b, const std::uint8_t a = 255) : + r(r), g(g), b(b), a(a) { } + + // 8-bit color constructor (in: [0 .. 255]) + constexpr Color_t(const int r, const int g, const int b, const int a = 255) : + r(static_cast(r)), g(static_cast(g)), b(static_cast(b)), a(static_cast(a)) { } + + // 8-bit array color constructor (in: [0.0 .. 1.0]) + explicit constexpr Color_t(const std::uint8_t arrColor[4]) : + r(arrColor[COLOR_R]), g(arrColor[COLOR_G]), b(arrColor[COLOR_B]), a(arrColor[COLOR_A]) { } + + // 32-bit packed color constructor (in: 0x00000000 - 0xFFFFFFFF) + explicit constexpr Color_t(const ImU32 uPackedColor) : + r(static_cast((uPackedColor >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF)), g(static_cast((uPackedColor >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF)), b(static_cast((uPackedColor >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF)), a(static_cast((uPackedColor >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF)) { } + + // 32-bit color constructor (in: [0.0 .. 1.0]) + constexpr Color_t(const float r, const float g, const float b, const float a = 1.0f) : + r(static_cast(r * 255.f)), g(static_cast(g * 255.f)), b(static_cast(b * 255.f)), a(static_cast(a * 255.f)) { } + + /// @returns: 32-bit packed integer representation of color + [[nodiscard]] constexpr ImU32 GetU32(const float flAlphaMultiplier = 1.0f) const + { + return IM_COL32(r, g, b, a * flAlphaMultiplier); + } + + /// @return: converted color to imgui vector + [[nodiscard]] ImVec4 GetVec4(const float flAlphaMultiplier = 1.0f) const + { + return ImVec4(this->Base(), this->Base(), this->Base(), this->Base() * flAlphaMultiplier); + } + + std::uint8_t& operator[](const std::uint8_t nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(nIndex <= COLOR_A); // given index is out of range + return reinterpret_cast(this)[nIndex]; + } + + const std::uint8_t& operator[](const std::uint8_t nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(nIndex <= COLOR_A); // given index is out of range + return reinterpret_cast(this)[nIndex]; + } + + bool operator==(const Color_t& colSecond) const + { + return (std::bit_cast(*this) == std::bit_cast(colSecond)); + } + + bool operator!=(const Color_t& colSecond) const + { + return (std::bit_cast(*this) != std::bit_cast(colSecond)); + } + + /// @returns: copy of color with certain R/G/B/A component changed to given value + template + [[nodiscard]] Color_t Set(const std::uint8_t nValue) const + { + static_assert(N >= COLOR_R && N <= COLOR_A, "color component index is out of range"); + + Color_t colCopy = *this; + colCopy[N] = nValue; + return colCopy; + } + + /// @returns: copy of color with certain R/G/B/A component multiplied by given value + template + [[nodiscard]] Color_t Multiplier(const float flValue) const + { + static_assert(N >= COLOR_R && N <= COLOR_A, "color component index is out of range"); + + Color_t colCopy = *this; + colCopy[N] = static_cast(static_cast(colCopy[N]) * flValue); + return colCopy; + } + + /// @returns: copy of color with certain R/G/B/A component divided by given value + template + [[nodiscard]] Color_t Divider(const int iValue) const + { + static_assert(N >= COLOR_R && N <= COLOR_A, "color component index is out of range"); + + Color_t colCopy = *this; + colCopy[N] /= iValue; + return colCopy; + } + + /// @returns: certain R/G/B/A float value (in: [0 .. 255], out: [0.0 .. 1.0]) + template + [[nodiscard]] float Base() const + { + static_assert(N >= COLOR_R && N <= COLOR_A, "color component index is out of range"); + return reinterpret_cast(this)[N] / 255.f; + } + + /// @param[out] arrBase output array of R/G/B color components converted to float (in: [0 .. 255], out: [0.0 .. 1.0]) + constexpr void Base(float (&arrBase)[3]) const + { + arrBase[COLOR_R] = static_cast(r) / 255.f; + arrBase[COLOR_G] = static_cast(g) / 255.f; + arrBase[COLOR_B] = static_cast(b) / 255.f; + } + + /// @returns: color created from float[3] array (in: [0.0 .. 1.0], out: [0 .. 255]) + static Color_t FromBase3(const float arrBase[3]) + { + return { arrBase[0], arrBase[1], arrBase[2] }; + } + + /// @param[out] arrBase output array of R/G/B/A color components converted to float (in: [0 .. 255], out: [0.0 .. 1.0]) + constexpr void BaseAlpha(float (&arrBase)[4]) const + { + arrBase[COLOR_R] = static_cast(r) / 255.f; + arrBase[COLOR_G] = static_cast(g) / 255.f; + arrBase[COLOR_B] = static_cast(b) / 255.f; + arrBase[COLOR_A] = static_cast(a) / 255.f; + } + + /// @returns : color created from float[3] array (in: [0.0 .. 1.0], out: [0 .. 255]) + static Color_t FromBase4(const float arrBase[4]) + { + return { arrBase[COLOR_R], arrBase[COLOR_G], arrBase[COLOR_B], arrBase[COLOR_A] }; + } + + /// @param[out] arrHSB output array of HSB/HSV color converted from RGB color + void ToHSB(float (&arrHSB)[3]) const + { + float arrBase[3] = {}; + Base(arrBase); + + float flKernel = 0.0f; + if (arrBase[COLOR_G] < arrBase[COLOR_B]) + { + CRT::Swap(arrBase[COLOR_G], arrBase[COLOR_B]); + flKernel = -1.0f; + } + if (arrBase[COLOR_R] < arrBase[COLOR_G]) + { + CRT::Swap(arrBase[COLOR_R], arrBase[COLOR_G]); + flKernel = -2.0f / 6.0f - flKernel; + } + + const float flChroma = arrBase[COLOR_R] - MATH::Min(arrBase[COLOR_G], arrBase[COLOR_B]); + arrHSB[COLOR_R] = std::fabsf(flKernel + (arrBase[COLOR_G] - arrBase[COLOR_B]) / (6.0f * flChroma + std::numeric_limits::epsilon())); + arrHSB[COLOR_G] = flChroma / (arrBase[COLOR_R] + std::numeric_limits::epsilon()); + arrHSB[COLOR_G] = arrBase[COLOR_R]; + } + + /// @returns: RGB color converted from HSB/HSV color + static Color_t FromHSB(const float flHue, const float flSaturation, const float flBrightness, const float flAlpha = 1.0f) + { + constexpr float flHueRange = (60.0f / 360.0f); + const float flHuePrime = std::fmodf(flHue, 1.0f) / flHueRange; + const int iRoundHuePrime = static_cast(flHuePrime); + const float flDelta = flHuePrime - static_cast(iRoundHuePrime); + + const float p = flBrightness * (1.0f - flSaturation); + const float q = flBrightness * (1.0f - flSaturation * flDelta); + const float t = flBrightness * (1.0f - flSaturation * (1.0f - flDelta)); + + float flRed, flGreen, flBlue; + switch (iRoundHuePrime) + { + case 0: + flRed = flBrightness; + flGreen = t; + flBlue = p; + break; + case 1: + flRed = q; + flGreen = flBrightness; + flBlue = p; + break; + case 2: + flRed = p; + flGreen = flBrightness; + flBlue = t; + break; + case 3: + flRed = p; + flGreen = q; + flBlue = flBrightness; + break; + case 4: + flRed = t; + flGreen = p; + flBlue = flBrightness; + break; + default: + flRed = flBrightness; + flGreen = p; + flBlue = q; + break; + } + + return { flRed, flGreen, flBlue, flAlpha }; + } + + std::uint8_t r = 0U, g = 0U, b = 0U, a = 0U; +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/keyvalue3.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/keyvalue3.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77eb2f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/keyvalue3.h @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +#pragma once +// used: MEM_PAD, FindPattern +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +struct KV3ID_t +{ + const char* szName; + std::uint64_t unk0; + std::uint64_t unk1; +}; + +class CKeyValues3 +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x100); + std::uint64_t uKey; + void* pValue; + MEM_PAD(0x8); + + void LoadFromBuffer(const char* szString); + bool LoadKV3(CUtlBuffer* buffer); + + static CKeyValues3* CreateMaterialResource() + { + using fnSetTypeKV3 = CKeyValues3*(CS_FASTCALL*)(CKeyValues3*, unsigned int, unsigned int); + static const fnSetTypeKV3 oSetTypeKV3 = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("40 53 48 83 EC 20 48 8B 01 48 8B D9 44"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oSetTypeKV3 != nullptr); + #endif + + CKeyValues3* pKeyValue = new CKeyValues3[0x10]; + return oSetTypeKV3(pKeyValue, 1U, 6U); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/keyvalues3.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/keyvalues3.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2c0561 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/keyvalues3.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +#include "keyvalue3.h" +// used: CRT +#include "../../utilities/crt.h" +// used: utlbuffer +#include "utlbuffer.h" + +void CKeyValues3::LoadFromBuffer(const char* szString) +{ + CUtlBuffer buffer(0, (CRT::StringLength(szString) + 10), 1); + buffer.PutString(szString); + LoadKV3(&buffer); +} + +bool CKeyValues3::LoadKV3(CUtlBuffer* buffer) +{ + using fnLoadKeyValues = bool(CS_FASTCALL*)(CKeyValues3*, void*, CUtlBuffer*, KV3ID_t*, void*, void*, void*, void*, const char*); + static const fnLoadKeyValues oLoadKeyValues = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetAbsoluteAddress(MEM::FindPattern(TIER0_DLL, CS_XOR("E8 ? ? ? ? EB 36 8B 43 10")), 0x1, 0x0)); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oLoadKeyValues != nullptr); + #endif + + const char* szName = CS_XOR(""); + KV3ID_t kv3ID = KV3ID_t(CS_XOR("generic"), 0x41B818518343427E, 0xB5F447C23C0CDF8C); + return oLoadKeyValues(this, nullptr, buffer, &kv3ID, nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, CS_XOR("")); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/matrix.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/matrix.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c040ff --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/matrix.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +#include "matrix.h" + +#include "qangle.h" + +// used: m_rad2deg +#include "../../utilities/math.h" + +[[nodiscard]] QAngle_t Matrix3x4_t::ToAngles() const +{ + // extract the basis vectors from the matrix. since we only need the z component of the up vector, we don't get x and y + const Vector_t vecForward = this->GetForward(); + const Vector_t vecLeft = this->GetLeft(); + const float flUpZ = this->arrData[2][2]; + + const float flLength2D = vecForward.Length2D(); + const float flPitch = M_RAD2DEG(std::atan2f(-vecForward.z, flLength2D)); + + // check is enough here to get angles + if (flLength2D > 0.001f) + return { flPitch, M_RAD2DEG(std::atan2f(vecForward.y, vecForward.x)), M_RAD2DEG(std::atan2f(vecLeft.z, flUpZ)) }; + + // forward is mostly Z, gimbal lock + // assume no roll in this case as one degree of freedom has been lost (i.e. yaw equals roll) + return { flPitch, M_RAD2DEG(std::atan2f(-vecLeft.x, vecLeft.y)), 0.0f }; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/matrix.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/matrix.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39a928c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/matrix.h @@ -0,0 +1,439 @@ +#pragma once +// used: sse2 intrinsics +#include +// used: bit_cast +#include + +#include "../../common.h" + +#include "vector.h" + +// forward declarations +struct QAngle_t; + +#pragma pack(push, 4) +using Matrix3x3_t = float[3][3]; + +struct Matrix3x4_t +{ + Matrix3x4_t() = default; + + constexpr Matrix3x4_t( + const float m00, const float m01, const float m02, const float m03, + const float m10, const float m11, const float m12, const float m13, + const float m20, const float m21, const float m22, const float m23) + { + arrData[0][0] = m00; + arrData[0][1] = m01; + arrData[0][2] = m02; + arrData[0][3] = m03; + arrData[1][0] = m10; + arrData[1][1] = m11; + arrData[1][2] = m12; + arrData[1][3] = m13; + arrData[2][0] = m20; + arrData[2][1] = m21; + arrData[2][2] = m22; + arrData[2][3] = m23; + } + + constexpr Matrix3x4_t(const Vector_t& vecForward, const Vector_t& vecLeft, const Vector_t& vecUp, const Vector_t& vecOrigin) + { + SetForward(vecForward); + SetLeft(vecLeft); + SetUp(vecUp); + SetOrigin(vecOrigin); + } + + [[nodiscard]] float* operator[](const int nIndex) + { + return arrData[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const float* operator[](const int nIndex) const + { + return arrData[nIndex]; + } + + constexpr void SetForward(const Vector_t& vecForward) + { + arrData[0][0] = vecForward.x; + arrData[1][0] = vecForward.y; + arrData[2][0] = vecForward.z; + } + + constexpr void SetLeft(const Vector_t& vecLeft) + { + arrData[0][1] = vecLeft.x; + arrData[1][1] = vecLeft.y; + arrData[2][1] = vecLeft.z; + } + + constexpr void SetUp(const Vector_t& vecUp) + { + arrData[0][2] = vecUp.x; + arrData[1][2] = vecUp.y; + arrData[2][2] = vecUp.z; + } + + constexpr void SetOrigin(const Vector_t& vecOrigin) + { + arrData[0][3] = vecOrigin.x; + arrData[1][3] = vecOrigin.y; + arrData[2][3] = vecOrigin.z; + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Vector_t GetForward() const + { + return { arrData[0][0], arrData[1][0], arrData[2][0] }; + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Vector_t GetLeft() const + { + return { arrData[0][1], arrData[1][1], arrData[2][1] }; + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Vector_t GetUp() const + { + return { arrData[0][2], arrData[1][2], arrData[2][2] }; + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Vector_t GetOrigin() const + { + return { arrData[0][3], arrData[1][3], arrData[2][3] }; + } + + constexpr void Invalidate() + { + for (auto& arrSubData : arrData) + { + for (auto& flData : arrSubData) + flData = std::numeric_limits::infinity(); + } + } + + /// concatenate transformations of two matrices into one + /// @returns: matrix with concatenated transformations + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Matrix3x4_t ConcatTransforms(const Matrix3x4_t& matOther) const + { + return { + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][0] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][0] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][0], + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][1] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][1] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][1], + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][2] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][2] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][2], + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][3] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][3] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][3] + arrData[0][3], + + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][0] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][0] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][0], + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][1] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][1] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][1], + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][2] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][2] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][2], + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][3] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][3] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][3] + arrData[1][3], + + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][0] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][0] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][0], + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][1] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][1] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][1], + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][2] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][2] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][2], + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][3] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][3] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][3] + arrData[2][3] + }; + } + + /// @returns: angles converted from this matrix + [[nodiscard]] QAngle_t ToAngles() const; + + float arrData[3][4] = {}; +}; + +#pragma pack(pop) + +class alignas(16) Matrix3x4a_t : public Matrix3x4_t +{ +public: + Matrix3x4a_t() = default; + + constexpr Matrix3x4a_t( + const float m00, const float m01, const float m02, const float m03, + const float m10, const float m11, const float m12, const float m13, + const float m20, const float m21, const float m22, const float m23) + { + arrData[0][0] = m00; + arrData[0][1] = m01; + arrData[0][2] = m02; + arrData[0][3] = m03; + arrData[1][0] = m10; + arrData[1][1] = m11; + arrData[1][2] = m12; + arrData[1][3] = m13; + arrData[2][0] = m20; + arrData[2][1] = m21; + arrData[2][2] = m22; + arrData[2][3] = m23; + } + + constexpr Matrix3x4a_t(const Matrix3x4_t& matSource) + { + *this = matSource; + } + + constexpr Matrix3x4a_t& operator=(const Matrix3x4_t& matSource) + { + arrData[0][0] = matSource.arrData[0][0]; + arrData[0][1] = matSource.arrData[0][1]; + arrData[0][2] = matSource.arrData[0][2]; + arrData[0][3] = matSource.arrData[0][3]; + arrData[1][0] = matSource.arrData[1][0]; + arrData[1][1] = matSource.arrData[1][1]; + arrData[1][2] = matSource.arrData[1][2]; + arrData[1][3] = matSource.arrData[1][3]; + arrData[2][0] = matSource.arrData[2][0]; + arrData[2][1] = matSource.arrData[2][1]; + arrData[2][2] = matSource.arrData[2][2]; + arrData[2][3] = matSource.arrData[2][3]; + return *this; + } + + /// concatenate transformations of two aligned matrices into one + /// @returns: aligned matrix with concatenated transformations + [[nodiscard]] Matrix3x4a_t ConcatTransforms(const Matrix3x4a_t& matOther) const + { + Matrix3x4a_t matOutput; + CS_ASSERT((reinterpret_cast(this) & 15U) == 0 && (reinterpret_cast(&matOther) & 15U) == 0 && (reinterpret_cast(&matOutput) & 15U) == 0); // matrices aren't aligned + + __m128 thisRow0 = _mm_load_ps(this->arrData[0]); + __m128 thisRow1 = _mm_load_ps(this->arrData[1]); + __m128 thisRow2 = _mm_load_ps(this->arrData[2]); + + __m128 otherRow0 = _mm_load_ps(matOther.arrData[0]); + __m128 otherRow1 = _mm_load_ps(matOther.arrData[1]); + __m128 otherRow2 = _mm_load_ps(matOther.arrData[2]); + + __m128 outRow0 = _mm_add_ps(_mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow0, thisRow0, _MM_SHUFFLE(0, 0, 0, 0)), otherRow0), _mm_add_ps(_mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow0, thisRow0, _MM_SHUFFLE(1, 1, 1, 1)), otherRow1), _mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow0, thisRow0, _MM_SHUFFLE(2, 2, 2, 2)), otherRow2))); + __m128 outRow1 = _mm_add_ps(_mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow1, thisRow1, _MM_SHUFFLE(0, 0, 0, 0)), otherRow0), _mm_add_ps(_mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow1, thisRow1, _MM_SHUFFLE(1, 1, 1, 1)), otherRow1), _mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow1, thisRow1, _MM_SHUFFLE(2, 2, 2, 2)), otherRow2))); + __m128 outRow2 = _mm_add_ps(_mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow2, thisRow2, _MM_SHUFFLE(0, 0, 0, 0)), otherRow0), _mm_add_ps(_mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow2, thisRow2, _MM_SHUFFLE(1, 1, 1, 1)), otherRow1), _mm_mul_ps(_mm_shuffle_ps(thisRow2, thisRow2, _MM_SHUFFLE(2, 2, 2, 2)), otherRow2))); + + // add in translation vector + constexpr std::uint32_t arrComponentMask[4] = { 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0xFFFFFFFF }; + outRow0 = _mm_add_ps(outRow0, _mm_and_ps(thisRow0, std::bit_cast<__m128>(arrComponentMask))); + outRow1 = _mm_add_ps(outRow1, _mm_and_ps(thisRow1, std::bit_cast<__m128>(arrComponentMask))); + outRow2 = _mm_add_ps(outRow2, _mm_and_ps(thisRow2, std::bit_cast<__m128>(arrComponentMask))); + + _mm_store_ps(matOutput.arrData[0], outRow0); + _mm_store_ps(matOutput.arrData[1], outRow1); + _mm_store_ps(matOutput.arrData[2], outRow2); + return matOutput; + } +}; + +static_assert(alignof(Matrix3x4a_t) == 16); + +#pragma pack(push, 4) + +struct ViewMatrix_t +{ + ViewMatrix_t() = default; + + constexpr ViewMatrix_t( + const float m00, const float m01, const float m02, const float m03, + const float m10, const float m11, const float m12, const float m13, + const float m20, const float m21, const float m22, const float m23, + const float m30, const float m31, const float m32, const float m33) + { + arrData[0][0] = m00; + arrData[0][1] = m01; + arrData[0][2] = m02; + arrData[0][3] = m03; + arrData[1][0] = m10; + arrData[1][1] = m11; + arrData[1][2] = m12; + arrData[1][3] = m13; + arrData[2][0] = m20; + arrData[2][1] = m21; + arrData[2][2] = m22; + arrData[2][3] = m23; + arrData[3][0] = m30; + arrData[3][1] = m31; + arrData[3][2] = m32; + arrData[3][3] = m33; + } + + constexpr ViewMatrix_t(const Matrix3x4_t& matFrom, const Vector4D_t& vecAdditionalRow = {}) + { + arrData[0][0] = matFrom.arrData[0][0]; + arrData[0][1] = matFrom.arrData[0][1]; + arrData[0][2] = matFrom.arrData[0][2]; + arrData[0][3] = matFrom.arrData[0][3]; + arrData[1][0] = matFrom.arrData[1][0]; + arrData[1][1] = matFrom.arrData[1][1]; + arrData[1][2] = matFrom.arrData[1][2]; + arrData[1][3] = matFrom.arrData[1][3]; + arrData[2][0] = matFrom.arrData[2][0]; + arrData[2][1] = matFrom.arrData[2][1]; + arrData[2][2] = matFrom.arrData[2][2]; + arrData[2][3] = matFrom.arrData[2][3]; + arrData[3][0] = vecAdditionalRow.x; + arrData[3][1] = vecAdditionalRow.y; + arrData[3][2] = vecAdditionalRow.z; + arrData[3][3] = vecAdditionalRow.w; + } + + [[nodiscard]] float* operator[](const int nIndex) + { + return arrData[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const float* operator[](const int nIndex) const + { + return arrData[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const bool operator==(const ViewMatrix_t& viewOther) const + { + return ( + arrData[0][0] == viewOther.arrData[0][0] && arrData[0][1] == viewOther.arrData[0][1] && arrData[0][2] == viewOther.arrData[0][2] && arrData[0][3] == viewOther.arrData[0][3] && + arrData[1][0] == viewOther.arrData[1][0] && arrData[1][1] == viewOther.arrData[1][1] && arrData[1][2] == viewOther.arrData[1][2] && arrData[1][3] == viewOther.arrData[1][3] && + arrData[2][0] == viewOther.arrData[2][0] && arrData[2][1] == viewOther.arrData[2][1] && arrData[2][2] == viewOther.arrData[2][2] && arrData[2][3] == viewOther.arrData[2][3] && + arrData[3][0] == viewOther.arrData[3][0] && arrData[3][1] == viewOther.arrData[3][1] && arrData[3][2] == viewOther.arrData[3][2] && arrData[3][3] == viewOther.arrData[3][3]); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const Matrix3x4_t& As3x4() const + { + return *reinterpret_cast(this); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Matrix3x4_t& As3x4() + { + return *reinterpret_cast(this); + } + + constexpr ViewMatrix_t& operator+=(const ViewMatrix_t& matAdd) + { + for (std::uint8_t c = 0U; c < 4U; c++) + { + for (std::uint8_t r = 0U; r < 4U; r++) + arrData[c][r] += matAdd[c][r]; + } + + return *this; + } + + constexpr ViewMatrix_t& operator-=(const ViewMatrix_t& matSubtract) + { + for (std::uint8_t c = 0U; c < 4U; c++) + { + for (std::uint8_t r = 0U; r < 4U; r++) + arrData[c][r] -= matSubtract[c][r]; + } + + return *this; + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Vector4D_t GetRow(const int nIndex) const + { + return { arrData[nIndex][0], arrData[nIndex][1], arrData[nIndex][2], arrData[nIndex][3] }; + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Vector4D_t GetColumn(const int nIndex) const + { + return { arrData[0][nIndex], arrData[1][nIndex], arrData[2][nIndex], arrData[3][nIndex] }; + } + + constexpr void Identity() + { + for (std::uint8_t c = 0U; c < 4U; c++) + { + for (std::uint8_t r = 0U; r < 4U; r++) + arrData[c][r] = (c == r) ? 1.0f : 0.0f; + } + } + + /// concatenate transformations of two matrices into one + /// @returns: matrix with concatenated transformations + [[nodiscard]] constexpr ViewMatrix_t ConcatTransforms(const ViewMatrix_t& matOther) const + { + return { + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][0] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][0] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][0] + arrData[0][3] * matOther.arrData[3][0], + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][1] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][1] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][1] + arrData[0][3] * matOther.arrData[3][1], + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][2] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][2] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][2] + arrData[0][3] * matOther.arrData[3][2], + arrData[0][0] * matOther.arrData[0][3] + arrData[0][1] * matOther.arrData[1][3] + arrData[0][2] * matOther.arrData[2][3] + arrData[0][3] * matOther.arrData[3][3], + + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][0] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][0] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][0] + arrData[1][3] * matOther.arrData[3][0], + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][1] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][1] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][1] + arrData[1][3] * matOther.arrData[3][1], + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][2] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][2] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][2] + arrData[1][3] * matOther.arrData[3][2], + arrData[1][0] * matOther.arrData[0][3] + arrData[1][1] * matOther.arrData[1][3] + arrData[1][2] * matOther.arrData[2][3] + arrData[1][3] * matOther.arrData[3][3], + + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][0] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][0] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][0] + arrData[2][3] * matOther.arrData[3][0], + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][1] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][1] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][1] + arrData[2][3] * matOther.arrData[3][1], + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][2] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][2] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][2] + arrData[2][3] * matOther.arrData[3][2], + arrData[2][0] * matOther.arrData[0][3] + arrData[2][1] * matOther.arrData[1][3] + arrData[2][2] * matOther.arrData[2][3] + arrData[2][3] * matOther.arrData[3][3], + + arrData[3][0] * matOther.arrData[0][0] + arrData[3][1] * matOther.arrData[1][0] + arrData[3][2] * matOther.arrData[2][0] + arrData[3][3] * matOther.arrData[3][0], + arrData[3][0] * matOther.arrData[0][1] + arrData[3][1] * matOther.arrData[1][1] + arrData[3][2] * matOther.arrData[2][1] + arrData[3][3] * matOther.arrData[3][1], + arrData[3][0] * matOther.arrData[0][2] + arrData[3][1] * matOther.arrData[1][2] + arrData[3][2] * matOther.arrData[2][2] + arrData[3][3] * matOther.arrData[3][2], + arrData[3][0] * matOther.arrData[0][3] + arrData[3][1] * matOther.arrData[1][3] + arrData[3][2] * matOther.arrData[2][3] + arrData[3][3] * matOther.arrData[3][3] + }; + } + + float arrData[4][4] = {}; +}; + +#pragma pack(pop) + +struct Matrix2x4_t +{ +public: + Matrix3x4_t TranslateToMatrix3x4() + { + Matrix3x4_t matrix = Matrix3x4_t(); + Vector4D_t vecRotation = Vector4D_t(); + Vector_t vecPosition = Vector_t(); + + vecRotation.x = this->_21; //rot.x + vecRotation.y = this->_22; //rot.y + vecRotation.z = this->_23; //rot.z + vecRotation.w = this->_24; //rot.w + + vecPosition.x = this->_11; //bonepos.x + vecPosition.y = this->_12; //bonepos.y + vecPosition.z = this->_13; //bonepos.z + + matrix[0][0] = 1.0f - 2.0f * vecRotation.y * vecRotation.y - 2.0f * vecRotation.z * vecRotation.z; + matrix[1][0] = 2.0f * vecRotation.x * vecRotation.y + 2.0f * vecRotation.w * vecRotation.z; + matrix[2][0] = 2.0f * vecRotation.x * vecRotation.z - 2.0f * vecRotation.w * vecRotation.y; + + matrix[0][1] = 2.0f * vecRotation.x * vecRotation.y - 2.0f * vecRotation.w * vecRotation.z; + matrix[1][1] = 1.0f - 2.0f * vecRotation.x * vecRotation.x - 2.0f * vecRotation.z * vecRotation.z; + matrix[2][1] = 2.0f * vecRotation.y * vecRotation.z + 2.0f * vecRotation.w * vecRotation.x; + + matrix[0][2] = 2.0f * vecRotation.x * vecRotation.z + 2.0f * vecRotation.w * vecRotation.y; + matrix[1][2] = 2.0f * vecRotation.y * vecRotation.z - 2.0f * vecRotation.w * vecRotation.x; + matrix[2][2] = 1.0f - 2.0f * vecRotation.x * vecRotation.x - 2.0f * vecRotation.y * vecRotation.y; + + matrix[0][3] = vecPosition.x; + matrix[1][3] = vecPosition.y; + matrix[2][3] = vecPosition.z; + + return matrix; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const Vector_t GetOrigin(int nIndex) + { + return Vector_t(this[nIndex]._11, this[nIndex]._12, this[nIndex]._13); + } + + const void SetOrigin(int nIndex, Vector_t vecValue) + { + this[nIndex]._11 = vecValue.x; + this[nIndex]._12 = vecValue.y; + this[nIndex]._13 = vecValue.z; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const Vector4D_t GetRotation(int nIndex) + { + return Vector4D_t(this[nIndex]._21, this[nIndex]._22, this[nIndex]._23, this[nIndex]._24); + } + + union + { + struct + { + float _11, _12, _13, _14; + float _21, _22, _23, _24; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/qangle.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/qangle.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..68b2634 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/qangle.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +#include "qangle.h" + +// used: [d3d] xmscalarsincos +#include + +#include "matrix.h" + +// used: m_deg2rad +#include "../../utilities/math.h" + +void QAngle_t::ToDirections(Vector_t* pvecForward, Vector_t* pvecRight, Vector_t* pvecUp) const +{ + float flPitchSin, flPitchCos, flYawSin, flYawCos, flRollSin, flRollCos; + DirectX::XMScalarSinCos(&flPitchSin, &flPitchCos, M_DEG2RAD(this->x)); + DirectX::XMScalarSinCos(&flYawSin, &flYawCos, M_DEG2RAD(this->y)); + DirectX::XMScalarSinCos(&flRollSin, &flRollCos, M_DEG2RAD(this->z)); + + if (pvecForward != nullptr) + { + pvecForward->x = flPitchCos * flYawCos; + pvecForward->y = flPitchCos * flYawSin; + pvecForward->z = -flPitchSin; + } + + if (pvecRight != nullptr) + { + pvecRight->x = (-flRollSin * flPitchSin * flYawCos) + (-flRollCos * -flYawSin); + pvecRight->y = (-flRollSin * flPitchSin * flYawSin) + (-flRollCos * flYawCos); + pvecRight->z = (-flRollSin * flPitchCos); + } + + if (pvecUp != nullptr) + { + pvecUp->x = (flRollCos * flPitchSin * flYawCos) + (-flRollSin * -flYawSin); + pvecUp->y = (flRollCos * flPitchSin * flYawSin) + (-flRollSin * flYawCos); + pvecUp->z = (flRollCos * flPitchCos); + } +} + +Matrix3x4_t QAngle_t::ToMatrix(const Vector_t& vecOrigin) const +{ + float flPitchSin, flPitchCos, flYawSin, flYawCos, flRollSin, flRollCos; + DirectX::XMScalarSinCos(&flPitchSin, &flPitchCos, M_DEG2RAD(this->x)); + DirectX::XMScalarSinCos(&flYawSin, &flYawCos, M_DEG2RAD(this->y)); + DirectX::XMScalarSinCos(&flRollSin, &flRollCos, M_DEG2RAD(this->z)); + + return { + (flPitchCos * flYawCos), (flRollSin * flPitchSin * flYawCos + flRollCos * -flYawSin), (flRollCos * flPitchSin * flYawCos + -flRollSin * -flYawSin), vecOrigin.x, + (flPitchCos * flYawSin), (flRollSin * flPitchSin * flYawSin + flRollCos * flYawCos), (flRollCos * flPitchSin * flYawSin + -flRollSin * flYawCos), vecOrigin.y, + (-flPitchSin), (flRollSin * flPitchCos), (flRollCos * flPitchCos), vecOrigin.z + }; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/qangle.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/qangle.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..49227a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/qangle.h @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [crt] isfinite, fmodf, remainderf +#include + +#include "vector.h" + +// used: clamp +#include "../../utilities/crt.h" + +// forward declarations +struct Matrix3x4_t; + +struct QAngle_t +{ + constexpr QAngle_t(float x = 0.f, float y = 0.f, float z = 0.f) : + x(x), y(y), z(z) { } + + constexpr QAngle_t(const float* arrAngles) : + x(arrAngles[0]), y(arrAngles[1]), z(arrAngles[2]) { } + +#pragma region qangle_array_operators + + [[nodiscard]] float& operator[](const int nIndex) + { + return reinterpret_cast(this)[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const float& operator[](const int nIndex) const + { + return reinterpret_cast(this)[nIndex]; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region qangle_relational_operators + + bool operator==(const QAngle_t& angBase) const + { + return this->IsEqual(angBase); + } + + bool operator!=(const QAngle_t& angBase) const + { + return !this->IsEqual(angBase); + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region qangle_assignment_operators + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator=(const QAngle_t& angBase) + { + this->x = angBase.x; + this->y = angBase.y; + this->z = angBase.z; + return *this; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region qangle_arithmetic_assignment_operators + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator+=(const QAngle_t& angBase) + { + this->x += angBase.x; + this->y += angBase.y; + this->z += angBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator-=(const QAngle_t& angBase) + { + this->x -= angBase.x; + this->y -= angBase.y; + this->z -= angBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator*=(const QAngle_t& angBase) + { + this->x *= angBase.x; + this->y *= angBase.y; + this->z *= angBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator/=(const QAngle_t& angBase) + { + this->x /= angBase.x; + this->y /= angBase.y; + this->z /= angBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator+=(const float flAdd) + { + this->x += flAdd; + this->y += flAdd; + this->z += flAdd; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator-=(const float flSubtract) + { + this->x -= flSubtract; + this->y -= flSubtract; + this->z -= flSubtract; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator*=(const float flMultiply) + { + this->x *= flMultiply; + this->y *= flMultiply; + this->z *= flMultiply; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator/=(const float flDivide) + { + this->x /= flDivide; + this->y /= flDivide; + this->z /= flDivide; + return *this; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region qangle_arithmetic_unary_operators + + constexpr QAngle_t& operator-() + { + this->x = -this->x; + this->y = -this->y; + this->z = -this->z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator-() const + { + return { -this->x, -this->y, -this->z }; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region qangle_arithmetic_ternary_operators + + constexpr QAngle_t operator+(const QAngle_t& angAdd) const + { + return { this->x + angAdd.x, this->y + angAdd.y, this->z + angAdd.z }; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator-(const QAngle_t& angSubtract) const + { + return { this->x - angSubtract.x, this->y - angSubtract.y, this->z - angSubtract.z }; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator*(const QAngle_t& angMultiply) const + { + return { this->x * angMultiply.x, this->y * angMultiply.y, this->z * angMultiply.z }; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator/(const QAngle_t& angDivide) const + { + return { this->x / angDivide.x, this->y / angDivide.y, this->z / angDivide.z }; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator+(const float flAdd) const + { + return { this->x + flAdd, this->y + flAdd, this->z + flAdd }; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator-(const float flSubtract) const + { + return { this->x - flSubtract, this->y - flSubtract, this->z - flSubtract }; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator*(const float flMultiply) const + { + return { this->x * flMultiply, this->y * flMultiply, this->z * flMultiply }; + } + + constexpr QAngle_t operator/(const float flDivide) const + { + return { this->x / flDivide, this->y / flDivide, this->z / flDivide }; + } + +#pragma endregion + + // @returns : true if each component of angle is finite, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValid() const + { + return (std::isfinite(this->x) && std::isfinite(this->y) && std::isfinite(this->z)); + } + + /// @returns: true if each component of angle equals to another, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] bool IsEqual(const QAngle_t& angEqual, const float flErrorMargin = std::numeric_limits::epsilon()) const + { + return (std::fabsf(this->x - angEqual.x) < flErrorMargin && std::fabsf(this->y - angEqual.y) < flErrorMargin && std::fabsf(this->z - angEqual.z) < flErrorMargin); + } + + /// @returns: true if each component of angle equals zero, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] bool IsZero() const + { + // @test: to make this implementation right, we should use fpclassify here, but game aren't doing same, probably it's better to keep this same, just ensure that it will be compiled same + return (this->x == 0.0f && this->y == 0.0f && this->z == 0.0f); + } + + /// @returns: length of hypotenuse + [[nodiscard]] float Length2D() const + { + return std::sqrtf(x * x + y * y); + } + + /// clamp each angle component by minimal/maximal allowed value for source sdk games + /// @returns: clamped angle + constexpr QAngle_t& Clamp() + { + this->x = MATH::Clamp(this->x, -89.f, 89.f); + this->y = MATH::Clamp(this->y, -180.f, 180.f); + this->z = MATH::Clamp(this->z, -45.f, 45.f); + return *this; + } + + /// map polar angles to the range of [-180, 180] degrees + /// @returns: normalized angle + QAngle_t& Normalize() + { + this->x = std::remainderf(this->x, 360.f); + this->y = std::remainderf(this->y, 360.f); + this->z = std::remainderf(this->z, 360.f); + return *this; + } + + /// convert angle to direction vectors + /// @param[out] pvecForward [optional] output for converted forward vector + /// @param[out] pvecRight [optional] output for converted right vector + /// @param[out] pvecUp [optional] output for converted up vector + void ToDirections(Vector_t* pvecForward, Vector_t* pvecRight = nullptr, Vector_t* pvecUp = nullptr) const; + + /// @param[in] vecOrigin [optional] origin for converted matrix + /// @returns: matrix converted from angle + [[nodiscard]] Matrix3x4_t ToMatrix(const Vector_t& vecOrigin = {}) const; + +public: + float x = 0.0f, y = 0.0f, z = 0.0f; +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/quaternion.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/quaternion.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9524360 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/quaternion.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +#pragma once + +struct Quaternion_t +{ + constexpr Quaternion_t(const float x = 0.0f, const float y = 0.0f, const float z = 0.0f, const float w = 0.0f) : + x(x), y(y), z(z), w(w) { } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValid() const + { + return (std::isfinite(x) && std::isfinite(y) && std::isfinite(z) && std::isfinite(w)); + } + + /// @param[in] vecOrigin [optional] translation for converted matrix + /// @returns: matrix converted from quaternion + [[nodiscard]] Matrix3x4_t ToMatrix(const Vector_t& vecOrigin = {}) const + { + CS_ASSERT(this->IsValid()); + + Matrix3x4_t matOut; + +#ifdef _DEBUG // precalculate common multiplications + const float x2 = this->x + this->x, y2 = this->y + this->y, z2 = this->z + this->z; + const float xx = this->x * x2, xy = this->x * y2, xz = this->x * z2; + const float yy = this->y * y2, yz = this->y * z2; + const float zz = this->z * z2; + const float wx = this->w * x2, wy = this->w * y2, wz = this->w * z2; + + matOut[0][0] = 1.0f - (yy + zz); + matOut[1][0] = xy + wz; + matOut[2][0] = xz - wy; + + matOut[0][1] = xy - wz; + matOut[1][1] = 1.0f - (xx + zz); + matOut[2][1] = yz + wx; + + matOut[0][2] = xz + wy; + matOut[1][2] = yz - wx; + matOut[2][2] = 1.0f - (xx + yy); +#else // let the compiler optimize calculations itself + matOut[0][0] = 1.0f - 2.0f * this->y * this->y - 2.0f * this->z * this->z; + matOut[1][0] = 2.0f * this->x * this->y + 2.0f * this->w * this->z; + matOut[2][0] = 2.0f * this->x * this->z - 2.0f * this->w * this->y; + + matOut[0][1] = 2.0f * this->x * this->y - 2.0f * this->w * this->z; + matOut[1][1] = 1.0f - 2.0f * this->x * this->x - 2.0f * this->z * this->z; + matOut[2][1] = 2.0f * this->y * this->z + 2.0f * this->w * this->x; + + matOut[0][2] = 2.0f * this->x * this->z + 2.0f * this->w * this->y; + matOut[1][2] = 2.0f * this->y * this->z - 2.0f * this->w * this->x; + matOut[2][2] = 1.0f - 2.0f * this->x * this->x - 2.0f * this->y * this->y; +#endif + + matOut[0][3] = vecOrigin.x; + matOut[1][3] = vecOrigin.y; + matOut[2][3] = vecOrigin.z; + return matOut; + } + + float x, y, z, w; +}; + +struct alignas(16) QuaternionAligned_t : Quaternion_t +{ + QuaternionAligned_t& operator=(const Quaternion_t& quatOther) + { + this->x = quatOther.x; + this->y = quatOther.y; + this->z = quatOther.z; + this->w = quatOther.w; + return *this; + } +}; + +static_assert(alignof(QuaternionAligned_t) == 16); \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/stronghandle.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/stronghandle.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a7f114 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/stronghandle.h @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +#pragma once + +struct ResourceBinding_t +{ + void* pData; +}; + +template +class CStrongHandle +{ +public: + operator T* () const + { + if (pBinding == nullptr) + return nullptr; + + return static_cast(pBinding->pData); + } + + T* operator->() const + { + if (pBinding == nullptr) + return nullptr; + + return static_cast(pBinding->pData); + } + + const ResourceBinding_t* pBinding; +}; + diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/transform.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/transform.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..54b387f --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/transform.h @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: matResult +#include "matrix.h" +// used: quaternion +#include "quaternion.h" + +class CTransform +{ +public: + VectorAligned_t vecPosition; + QuaternionAligned_t quatOrientation; +}; + +static_assert(alignof(CTransform) == 16); diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7324a7c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/usercmd.h @@ -0,0 +1,298 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: QAngle_t +#include "qangle.h" +// used: MEM_PAD +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" +// used: memalloc +#include "../../core/interfaces.h" +#include "../interfaces/imemalloc.h" + +// @source: master/game/shared/in_buttons.h +enum ECommandButtons : int +{ + IN_ATTACK = (1 << 0), + IN_JUMP = (1 << 1), + IN_DUCK = (1 << 2), + IN_FORWARD = (1 << 3), + IN_BACK = (1 << 4), + IN_USE = (1 << 5), + IN_CANCEL = (1 << 6), + IN_LEFT = (1 << 7), + IN_RIGHT = (1 << 8), + IN_MOVELEFT = (1 << 9), + IN_MOVERIGHT = (1 << 10), + IN_SECOND_ATTACK = (1 << 11), + IN_RUN = (1 << 12), + IN_RELOAD = (1 << 13), + IN_LEFT_ALT = (1 << 14), + IN_RIGHT_ALT = (1 << 15), + IN_SCORE = (1 << 16), + IN_SPEED = (1 << 17), + IN_WALK = (1 << 18), + IN_ZOOM = (1 << 19), + IN_FIRST_WEAPON = (1 << 20), + IN_SECOND_WEAPON = (1 << 21), + IN_BULLRUSH = (1 << 22), + IN_FIRST_GRENADE = (1 << 23), + IN_SECOND_GRENADE = (1 << 24), + IN_MIDDLE_ATTACK = (1 << 25), + IN_USE_OR_RELOAD = (1 << 26) +}; + +// compiled protobuf messages and looked at what bits are used in them +enum ESubtickMoveStepBits : std::uint32_t +{ + MOVESTEP_BITS_BUTTON = 0x1U, + MOVESTEP_BITS_PRESSED = 0x2U, + MOVESTEP_BITS_WHEN = 0x4U, + MOVESTEP_BITS_ANALOG_FORWARD_DELTA = 0x8U, + MOVESTEP_BITS_ANALOG_LEFT_DELTA = 0x10U +}; + +enum EInputHistoryBits : std::uint32_t +{ + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_VIEWANGLES = 0x1U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_SHOOTPOSITION = 0x2U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_TARGETHEADPOSITIONCHECK = 0x4U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_TARGETABSPOSITIONCHECK = 0x8U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_TARGETANGCHECK = 0x10U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_CL_INTERP = 0x20U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_SV_INTERP0 = 0x40U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_SV_INTERP1 = 0x80U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_PLAYER_INTERP = 0x100U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_RENDERTICKCOUNT = 0x200U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_RENDERTICKFRACTION = 0x400U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_PLAYERTICKCOUNT = 0x800U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_PLAYERTICKFRACTION = 0x1000U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_FRAMENUMBER = 0x2000U, + INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_TARGETENTINDEX = 0x4000U +}; + +enum EButtonStatePBBits : uint32_t +{ + BUTTON_STATE_PB_BITS_BUTTONSTATE1 = 0x1U, + BUTTON_STATE_PB_BITS_BUTTONSTATE2 = 0x2U, + BUTTON_STATE_PB_BITS_BUTTONSTATE3 = 0x4U +}; + +enum EBaseCmdBits : std::uint32_t +{ + BASE_BITS_MOVE_CRC = 0x1U, + BASE_BITS_BUTTONPB = 0x2U, + BASE_BITS_VIEWANGLES = 0x4U, + BASE_BITS_COMMAND_NUMBER = 0x8U, + BASE_BITS_CLIENT_TICK = 0x10U, + BASE_BITS_FORWARDMOVE = 0x20U, + BASE_BITS_LEFTMOVE = 0x40U, + BASE_BITS_UPMOVE = 0x80U, + BASE_BITS_IMPULSE = 0x100U, + BASE_BITS_WEAPON_SELECT = 0x200U, + BASE_BITS_RANDOM_SEED = 0x400U, + BASE_BITS_MOUSEDX = 0x800U, + BASE_BITS_MOUSEDY = 0x1000U, + BASE_BITS_CONSUMED_SERVER_ANGLE = 0x2000U, + BASE_BITS_CMD_FLAGS = 0x4000U, + BASE_BITS_ENTITY_HANDLE = 0x8000U +}; + +enum ECSGOUserCmdBits : std::uint32_t +{ + CSGOUSERCMD_BITS_BASECMD = 0x1U, + CSGOUSERCMD_BITS_LEFTHAND = 0x2U, + CSGOUSERCMD_BITS_ATTACK3START = 0x4U, + CSGOUSERCMD_BITS_ATTACK1START = 0x8U, + CSGOUSERCMD_BITS_ATTACK2START = 0x10U +}; + +template +struct RepeatedPtrField_t +{ + struct Rep_t + { + int nAllocatedSize; + T* tElements[(std::numeric_limits::max() - 2 * sizeof(int)) / sizeof(void*)]; + }; + + void* pArena; + int nCurrentSize; + int nTotalSize; + Rep_t* pRep; +}; + +class CBasePB +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x8) // 0x0 VTABLE + std::uint32_t nHasBits; // 0x8 + std::uint64_t nCachedBits; // 0xC + + void SetBits(std::uint64_t nBits) + { + // @note: you don't need to check if the bits are already set as bitwise OR will not change the value if the bit is already set + nCachedBits |= nBits; + } +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CBasePB) == 0x18); + +class CMsgQAngle : public CBasePB +{ +public: + QAngle_t angValue; // 0x18 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CMsgQAngle) == 0x28); + +class CMsgVector : public CBasePB +{ +public: + Vector4D_t vecValue; // 0x18 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CMsgVector) == 0x28); + +class CCSGOInterpolationInfoPB : public CBasePB +{ +public: + float flFraction; // 0x18 + int nSrcTick; // 0x1C + int nDstTick; // 0x20 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CCSGOInterpolationInfoPB) == 0x28); + +class CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB : public CBasePB +{ +public: + CMsgQAngle* pViewAngles; // 0x18 + CMsgVector* pShootPosition; // 0x20 + CMsgVector* pTargetHeadPositionCheck; // 0x28 + CMsgVector* pTargetAbsPositionCheck; // 0x30 + CMsgQAngle* pTargetAngPositionCheck; // 0x38 + CCSGOInterpolationInfoPB* cl_interp; // 0x40 + CCSGOInterpolationInfoPB* sv_interp0; // 0x48 + CCSGOInterpolationInfoPB* sv_interp1; // 0x50 + CCSGOInterpolationInfoPB* player_interp; // 0x58 + int nRenderTickCount; // 0x60 + float flRenderTickFraction; // 0x64 + int nPlayerTickCount; // 0x68 + float flPlayerTickFraction; // 0x6C + int nFrameNumber; // 0x70 + int nTargetEntIndex; // 0x74 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB) == 0x78); + +struct CInButtonStatePB : CBasePB +{ + std::uint64_t nValue; + std::uint64_t nValueChanged; + std::uint64_t nValueScroll; +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CInButtonStatePB) == 0x30); + +struct CSubtickMoveStep : CBasePB +{ +public: + std::uint64_t nButton; + bool bPressed; + float flWhen; + float flAnalogForwardDelta; + float flAnalogLeftDelta; +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CSubtickMoveStep) == 0x30); + +class CBaseUserCmdPB : public CBasePB +{ +public: + RepeatedPtrField_t subtickMovesField; + std::string* strMoveCrc; + CInButtonStatePB* pInButtonState; + CMsgQAngle* pViewAngles; + std::int32_t nLegacyCommandNumber; + std::int32_t nClientTick; + float flForwardMove; + float flSideMove; + float flUpMove; + std::int32_t nImpulse; + std::int32_t nWeaponSelect; + std::int32_t nRandomSeed; + std::int32_t nMousedX; + std::int32_t nMousedY; + std::uint32_t nConsumedServerAngleChanges; + std::int32_t nCmdFlags; + std::uint32_t nPawnEntityHandle; + + int CalculateCmdCRCSize() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(CBaseUserCmdPB) == 0x80); + +class CCSGOUserCmdPB +{ +public: + std::uint32_t nHasBits; + std::uint64_t nCachedSize; + RepeatedPtrField_t inputHistoryField; + CBaseUserCmdPB* pBaseCmd; + bool bLeftHandDesired; + std::int32_t nAttack3StartHistoryIndex; + std::int32_t nAttack1StartHistoryIndex; + std::int32_t nAttack2StartHistoryIndex; + + // @note: this function is used to check if the bits are set and set them if they are not + void CheckAndSetBits(std::uint32_t nBits) + { + if (!(nHasBits & nBits)) + nHasBits |= nBits; + } +}; +static_assert(sizeof(CCSGOUserCmdPB) == 0x40); + +struct CInButtonState +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x8) // 0x0 VTABLE + std::uint64_t nValue; // 0x8 + std::uint64_t nValueChanged; // 0x10 + std::uint64_t nValueScroll; // 0x18 +}; +static_assert(sizeof(CInButtonState) == 0x20); + +class CUserCmd +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x8); // 0x0 VTABLE + MEM_PAD(0x10); // TODO: find out what this is, added 14.08.2024 + CCSGOUserCmdPB csgoUserCmd; // 0x18 + CInButtonState nButtons; // 0x58 + MEM_PAD(0x20); // 0x78 + + CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB* GetInputHistoryEntry(int nIndex) + { + if (nIndex >= csgoUserCmd.inputHistoryField.pRep->nAllocatedSize || nIndex >= csgoUserCmd.inputHistoryField.nCurrentSize) + return nullptr; + + return csgoUserCmd.inputHistoryField.pRep->tElements[nIndex]; + } + + void SetSubTickAngle(const QAngle_t& angView) + { + for (int i = 0; i < this->csgoUserCmd.inputHistoryField.pRep->nAllocatedSize; i++) + { + CCSGOInputHistoryEntryPB* pInputEntry = this->GetInputHistoryEntry(i); + if (!pInputEntry || !pInputEntry->pViewAngles) + continue; + + pInputEntry->pViewAngles->angValue = angView; + pInputEntry->SetBits(EInputHistoryBits::INPUT_HISTORY_BITS_VIEWANGLES); + } + } +}; +static_assert(sizeof(CUserCmd) == 0x98); diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlbuffer.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlbuffer.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b84a3d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlbuffer.h @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +#pragma once +// used: MEM_PAD +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +class CUtlBuffer +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x80); + + CUtlBuffer(int a1, int nSize, int a3) + { + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(MEM::fnUtlBufferInit != nullptr); + #endif + + MEM::fnUtlBufferInit(this, a1, nSize, a3); + } + + void PutString(const char* szString) + { + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(MEM::fnUtlBufferPutString != nullptr); + #endif + + MEM::fnUtlBufferPutString(this, szString); + } + + void EnsureCapacity(int nSize) + { + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(MEM::fnUtlBufferEnsureCapacity != nullptr); + #endif + + MEM::fnUtlBufferEnsureCapacity(this, nSize); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlfixedmemory.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlfixedmemory.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f83f5b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlfixedmemory.h @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ +#pragma once +#include "../../common.h" + +// @test: using interfaces in the header | not critical but could blow up someday with thousands of errors or affect to compilation time etc +// used: interface handles +#include "../../core/interfaces.h" +// used: interface declarations +#include "../interfaces/imemalloc.h" + +// @source: master/public/tier1/utlfixedmemory.h + +template +class CUtlFixedMemory +{ +protected: + struct BlockHeader_t + { + BlockHeader_t* pNext; + std::intptr_t nBlockSize; + }; + +public: + class Iterator_t + { + public: + Iterator_t(BlockHeader_t* pBlockHeader, const std::intptr_t nIndex) : + pBlockHeader(pBlockHeader), nIndex(nIndex) { } + + bool operator==(const Iterator_t it) const + { + return pBlockHeader == it.pBlockHeader && nIndex == it.nIndex; + } + + bool operator!=(const Iterator_t it) const + { + return pBlockHeader != it.pBlockHeader || nIndex != it.nIndex; + } + + BlockHeader_t* pBlockHeader; + std::intptr_t nIndex; + }; + + CUtlFixedMemory(const int nGrowSize = 0, const int nInitAllocationCount = 0) : + pBlocks(nullptr), nAllocationCount(0), nGrowSize(nGrowSize) + { + Purge(); + Grow(nInitAllocationCount); + } + + ~CUtlFixedMemory() + { + Purge(); + } + + CS_CLASS_NO_ASSIGNMENT(CUtlFixedMemory) + + [[nodiscard]] T* Base() + { + return nullptr; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T* Base() const + { + return nullptr; + } + + T& operator[](std::intptr_t nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return *reinterpret_cast(nIndex); + } + + const T& operator[](std::intptr_t nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return *reinterpret_cast(nIndex); + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& Element(const std::intptr_t nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return *reinterpret_cast(nIndex); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& Element(const std::intptr_t nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return *reinterpret_cast(nIndex); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t First() const + { + return (pBlocks != nullptr ? Iterator_t(pBlocks, InvalidIndex()) : InvalidIterator()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t Next(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + if (!IsValidIterator(it)) + return InvalidIterator(); + + BlockHeader_t* pHeader = it.pBlockHeader; + + if (it.nIndex + 1 < pHeader->nBlockSize) + return Iterator_t(pHeader, it.nIndex + 1); + + return (pHeader->pNext != nullptr ? Iterator_t(pHeader->pNext, InvalidIndex()) : InvalidIterator()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] std::intptr_t GetIndex(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + if (!IsValidIterator(it)) + return InvalidIndex(); + + return reinterpret_cast(HeaderToBlock(it.pBlockHeader) + it.nIndex); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsIndexAfter(std::intptr_t nIndex, const Iterator_t& it) const + { + if (!IsValidIterator(it)) + return false; + + if (IsInBlock(nIndex, it.pBlockHeader)) + return nIndex > GetIndex(it); + + for (BlockHeader_t* pBlockHeader = it.pBlockHeader->pNext; pBlockHeader != nullptr; pBlockHeader = pBlockHeader->pNext) + { + if (IsInBlock(nIndex, pBlockHeader)) + return true; + } + + return false; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIterator(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return it.pBlockHeader != nullptr && it.nIndex >= 0 && it.nIndex < it.pBlockHeader->nBlockSize; + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t InvalidIterator() const + { + return Iterator_t(nullptr, InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIndex(const std::intptr_t nIndex) const + { + return nIndex != InvalidIndex(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] static std::intptr_t InvalidIndex() + { + return 0; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int Count() const + { + return nAllocationCount; + } + + void EnsureCapacity(const int nCapacity) + { + Grow(nCapacity - Count()); + } + + void Grow(const int nCount = 1) + { + if (nCount <= 0) + return; + + int nBlockSize = (nGrowSize == 0 ? (nAllocationCount > 0 ? nAllocationCount : (31 + sizeof(T)) / sizeof(T)) : nGrowSize); + + if (nBlockSize < nCount) + nBlockSize *= (nCount + nBlockSize - 1) / nBlockSize; + + nAllocationCount += nBlockSize; + + BlockHeader_t* pNewBlockHeader = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->Alloc(sizeof(BlockHeader_t) + nBlockSize * sizeof(T))); + CS_ASSERT(pNewBlockHeader != nullptr); // container overflow + + pNewBlockHeader->pNext = nullptr; + pNewBlockHeader->nBlockSize = nBlockSize; + + if (pBlocks == nullptr) + pBlocks = pNewBlockHeader; + else + { + BlockHeader_t* pBlockHeader = pBlocks; + + while (pBlockHeader->pNext != nullptr) + pBlockHeader = pBlockHeader->pNext; + + pBlockHeader->pNext = pNewBlockHeader; + } + } + + void Purge() + { + if (pBlocks == nullptr) + return; + + for (BlockHeader_t* pBlockHeader = pBlocks; pBlockHeader != nullptr;) + { + BlockHeader_t* pFree = pBlockHeader; + pBlockHeader = pBlockHeader->pNext; + I::MemAlloc->Free(pFree); + } + + pBlocks = nullptr; + nAllocationCount = 0; + } + +protected: + [[nodiscard]] bool IsInBlock(std::intptr_t nIndex, BlockHeader_t* pBlockHeader) const + { + T* pCurrent = reinterpret_cast(nIndex); + const T* pStart = HeaderToBlock(pBlockHeader); + const T* pEnd = pStart + pBlockHeader->nBlockSize; + + return (pCurrent >= pStart && pCurrent < pEnd); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T* HeaderToBlock(const BlockHeader_t* pHeader) const + { + return reinterpret_cast(pHeader + 1); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const BlockHeader_t* BlockToHeader(const T* pBlock) const + { + return reinterpret_cast(pBlock) - 1; + } + + BlockHeader_t* pBlocks; + int nAllocationCount; + int nGrowSize; +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utllinkedlist.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utllinkedlist.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b054ddc --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utllinkedlist.h @@ -0,0 +1,347 @@ +#pragma once +#include "utlmemory.h" +#include "utlfixedmemory.h" + +// @source: master/public/tier1/utllinkedlist.h + +template +struct UtlLinkedListElement_t +{ + UtlLinkedListElement_t(const UtlLinkedListElement_t&) = delete; + + T element; + I iPrevious; + I iNext; +}; + +template , I>> +class CUtlLinkedList +{ +public: + using ElemType_t = T; + using IndexType_t = S; + using IndexLocalType_t = I; + using MemoryAllocator_t = M; + + template + class ConstIterator_t + { + public: + typedef typename List_t::ElemType_t ElemType_t; + typedef typename List_t::IndexType_t IndexType_t; + + ConstIterator_t() : + pList(nullptr), nIndex(List_t::InvalidIndex()) { } + + ConstIterator_t(const List_t& list, IndexType_t nIndex) : + pList(&list), nIndex(nIndex) { } + + ConstIterator_t& operator++() + { + nIndex = pList->Next(nIndex); + return *this; + } + + ConstIterator_t operator++(int) + { + ConstIterator_t pCopy = *this; + ++(*this); + return pCopy; + } + + ConstIterator_t& operator--() + { + CS_ASSERT(nIndex != pList->Head()); + nIndex = (nIndex == pList->InvalidIndex() ? pList->Tail() : pList->Previous(nIndex)); + return *this; + } + + ConstIterator_t operator--(int) + { + ConstIterator_t pCopy = *this; + --(*this); + return pCopy; + } + + bool operator==(const ConstIterator_t& other) const + { + CS_ASSERT(pList == other.pList); + return nIndex == other.nIndex; + } + + bool operator!=(const ConstIterator_t& other) const + { + CS_ASSERT(pList == other.pList); + return nIndex != other.nIndex; + } + + const ElemType_t& operator*() const + { + return pList->Element(nIndex); + } + + const ElemType_t* operator->() const + { + return (&**this); + } + + protected: + const List_t* pList; + IndexType_t nIndex; + }; + + template + class Iterator_t : public ConstIterator_t + { + public: + using ElemType_t = typename List_t::ElemType_t; + using IndexType_t = typename List_t::IndexType_t; + using Base_t = ConstIterator_t; + + Iterator_t() { } + + Iterator_t(const List_t& list, IndexType_t nIndex) : + ConstIterator_t(list, nIndex) { } + + Iterator_t& operator++() + { + Base_t::nIndex = Base_t::pList->Next(Base_t::nIndex); + return *this; + } + + Iterator_t operator++(int) + { + Iterator_t pCopy = *this; + ++(*this); + return pCopy; + } + + Iterator_t& operator--() + { + Base_t::nIndex = (Base_t::nIndex == Base_t::pList->InvalidIndex() ? Base_t::pList->Tail() : Base_t::pList->Previous(Base_t::nIndex)); + return *this; + } + + Iterator_t operator--(int) + { + Iterator_t pCopy = *this; + --(*this); + return pCopy; + } + + ElemType_t& operator*() const + { + List_t* pMutableList = const_cast(Base_t::pList); + return pMutableList->Element(Base_t::nIndex); + } + + ElemType_t* operator->() const + { + return (&**this); + } + }; + + CUtlLinkedList(int nGrowSize = 0, int nSize = 0) : + memory(nGrowSize, nSize), iHead(InvalidIndex()), iTail(InvalidIndex()), iFirstFree(InvalidIndex()), nElementCount(0), nAllocated(0), itLastAlloc(memory.InvalidIterator()), pElements(memory.Base()) { } + + ~CUtlLinkedList() + { + RemoveAll(); + } + + CUtlLinkedList(const CUtlLinkedList&) = delete; + CUtlLinkedList& operator=(const CUtlLinkedList&) = delete; + + T& operator[](const I nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].element; + } + + const T& operator[](const I nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].element; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& Element(const I nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].element; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& Element(const I nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].element; + } + + [[nodiscard]] I Head() const + { + return iHead; + } + + [[nodiscard]] I Tail() const + { + return iTail; + } + + [[nodiscard]] I Previous(const I nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return InternalElement(nIndex).iPrevious; + } + + [[nodiscard]] I Next(const I nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return InternalElement(nIndex).iNext; + } + + [[nodiscard]] static S InvalidIndex() + { + return static_cast(M::InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIndex(const I nIndex) const + { + if (!memory.IsValidIndex(nIndex)) + return false; + + if (memory.IsIndexAfter(nIndex, itLastAlloc)) + return false; // don't read values that have been allocated, but not constructed + + return (memory[nIndex].iPrevious != nIndex) || (memory[nIndex].iNext == nIndex); + } + + [[nodiscard]] static bool IsIndexInRange(I nIndex) + { + static_assert(sizeof(I) >= sizeof(S)); + static_assert(sizeof(S) > 2 || static_cast(-1) > 0); + static_assert(M::InvalidIndex() == -1 || M::InvalidIndex() == static_cast(M::InvalidIndex())); + + return (static_cast(nIndex) == nIndex && static_cast(nIndex) != InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] I Find(const T& source) const + { + for (I i = iHead; i != InvalidIndex(); i = Next(i)) + { + if (Element(i) == source) + return i; + } + + return InvalidIndex(); + } + + void RemoveAll() + { + if (itLastAlloc == memory.InvalidIterator()) + { + CS_ASSERT(iHead == InvalidIndex() && iTail == InvalidIndex() && iFirstFree == InvalidIndex() && nElementCount == 0); + return; + } + + if constexpr (ML) + { + for (typename M::Iterator_t it = memory.First(); it != memory.InvalidIterator(); it = memory.Next(it)) + { + I i = memory.GetIndex(it); + + // skip elements already in the free list + if (IsValidIndex(i)) + { + ListElement_t& internalElement = InternalElement(i); + (&internalElement.element)->~T(); + internalElement.iPrevious = i; + internalElement.iNext = iFirstFree; + iFirstFree = i; + } + + // don't destruct elements that haven't ever been constructed + if (it == itLastAlloc) + break; + } + } + else + { + I i = iHead, iNext; + while (i != InvalidIndex()) + { + ListElement_t& internalElement = InternalElement(i); + (&internalElement.element)->~T(); + + internalElement.iPrevious = i; + iNext = Next(i); + internalElement.iNext = iNext == InvalidIndex() ? iFirstFree : iNext; + i = iNext; + } + + if (iHead != InvalidIndex()) + iFirstFree = iHead; + } + + // clear everything else out + iHead = InvalidIndex(); + iTail = InvalidIndex(); + nElementCount = 0; + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto begin() const + { + return ConstIterator_t>(*this, Head()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto begin() + { + return Iterator_t>(*this, Head()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto end() const + { + return ConstIterator_t>(*this, InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto end() + { + return Iterator_t>(*this, InvalidIndex()); + } + +protected: + using ListElement_t = UtlLinkedListElement_t; + + [[nodiscard]] ListElement_t& InternalElement(const I nIndex) + { + return memory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const ListElement_t& InternalElement(const I nIndex) const + { + return memory[nIndex]; + } + + M memory; + I iHead; + I iTail; + I iFirstFree; + I nElementCount; + I nAllocated; + typename M::Iterator_t itLastAlloc; + ListElement_t* pElements; +}; + +template +class CUtlFixedLinkedList : public CUtlLinkedList>> +{ +public: + CUtlFixedLinkedList(int nGrowSize = 0, int nInitAllocationCount = 0) : + CUtlLinkedList>>(nGrowSize, nInitAllocationCount) { } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIndex(std::intptr_t nIndex) const + { + if (!this->memory.IsIndexValid(nIndex)) + return false; + + return (this->memory[nIndex].iPrevious != nIndex) || (this->memory[nIndex].iNext == nIndex); + } +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlmap.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlmap.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c637dc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlmap.h @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +#pragma once +#include "utlrbtree.h" + +// @source: master/public/tier1/utlmap.h + +template +class CUtlMap +{ +public: + using KeyType_t = K; + using ElementType_t = T; + using IndexType_t = I; + + CUtlMap(int nGrowSize = 0, int nInitialSize = 0, const LessCallbackFn_t& fnLessCallback = nullptr) : + tree(nGrowSize, nInitialSize, CKeyLess(fnLessCallback)) { } + + CUtlMap(LessCallbackFn_t fnLessCallback) : + tree(CKeyLess(fnLessCallback)) { } + + [[nodiscard]] ElementType_t& operator[](IndexType_t nIndex) + { + return tree.Element(nIndex).nElement; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const ElementType_t& operator[](IndexType_t nIndex) const + { + return tree.Element(nIndex).nElement; + } + + [[nodiscard]] ElementType_t& Element(IndexType_t nIndex) + { + return tree.Element(nIndex).nElement; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const ElementType_t& Element(IndexType_t nIndex) const + { + return tree.Element(nIndex).nElement; + } + + [[nodiscard]] KeyType_t& Key(IndexType_t nIndex) + { + return tree.Element(nIndex).key; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const KeyType_t& Key(IndexType_t nIndex) const + { + return tree.Element(nIndex).key; + } + + [[nodiscard]] unsigned int Count() const + { + return tree.Count(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] IndexType_t MaxElement() const + { + return tree.MaxElement(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIndex(IndexType_t nIndex) const + { + return tree.IsValidIndex(nIndex); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValid() const + { + return tree.IsValid(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] static IndexType_t InvalidIndex() + { + return CUtlRBTree::InvalidIndex(); + } + + void EnsureCapacity(const int nCapacity) + { + tree.EnsureCapacity(nCapacity); + } + + [[nodiscard]] IndexType_t Find(const KeyType_t& key) const + { + Node_t dummyNode; + dummyNode.key = key; + return tree.Find(dummyNode); + } + + void RemoveAt(IndexType_t nIndex) + { + tree.RemoveAt(nIndex); + } + + bool Remove(const KeyType_t& key) + { + Node_t dummyNode = { key }; + return tree.Remove(dummyNode); + } + + void RemoveAll() + { + tree.RemoveAll(); + } + + void Purge() + { + tree.Purge(); + } + + struct Node_t + { + KeyType_t key; + ElementType_t nElement; + }; + + class CKeyLess + { + public: + CKeyLess(const LessCallbackFn_t& fnLessCallback) : + fnLessCallback(fnLessCallback) { } + + bool operator!() const + { + return !fnLessCallback; + } + + bool operator()(const Node_t& left, const Node_t& right) const + { + return fnLessCallback(left.key, right.key); + } + + LessCallbackFn_t fnLessCallback; + }; + +protected: + CUtlRBTree tree; // 0x00 +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlmemory.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlmemory.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8465c53 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlmemory.h @@ -0,0 +1,516 @@ +#pragma once +// used: memorycopy +#include "../../utilities/crt.h" + +// @test: using interfaces in the header | not critical but could blow up someday with thousands of errors or affect to compilation time etc +// used: interface handles +#include "../../core/interfaces.h" +// used: interface declarations +#include "../interfaces/imemalloc.h" + +// @source: master/public/tier1/utlmemory.h + +template +class CUtlMemory +{ + enum + { + EXTERNAL_BUFFER_MARKER = -1, + EXTERNAL_CONST_BUFFER_MARKER = -2, + }; + +public: + class Iterator_t + { + public: + Iterator_t(const N nIndex) : + nIndex(nIndex) { } + + bool operator==(const Iterator_t it) const + { + return nIndex == it.nIndex; + } + + bool operator!=(const Iterator_t it) const + { + return nIndex != it.nIndex; + } + + N nIndex; + }; + + CUtlMemory(const int nInitialGrowSize, const int nAllocationCount) : + pMemory(nullptr), nAllocationCount(nAllocationCount), nGrowSize(nInitialGrowSize) + { + CS_ASSERT(nInitialGrowSize >= 0); + + if (nAllocationCount > 0) + pMemory = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->Alloc(nAllocationCount * sizeof(T))); + } + + CUtlMemory(T* pMemory, const int nElements) : + pMemory(pMemory), nAllocationCount(nElements), nGrowSize(EXTERNAL_BUFFER_MARKER) { } + + CUtlMemory(const T* pMemory, const int nElements) : + pMemory(pMemory), nAllocationCount(nElements), nGrowSize(EXTERNAL_CONST_BUFFER_MARKER) { } + + ~CUtlMemory() + { + Purge(); + } + + CUtlMemory(const CUtlMemory&) = delete; + + CUtlMemory(CUtlMemory&& moveFrom) noexcept : + pMemory(moveFrom.pMemory), nAllocationCount(moveFrom.nAllocationCount), nGrowSize(moveFrom.nGrowSize) + { + moveFrom.pMemory = nullptr; + moveFrom.nAllocationCount = 0; + moveFrom.nGrowSize = 0; + } + + void* operator new(const std::size_t nSize) + { + return I::MemAlloc->Alloc(nSize); + } + + void operator delete(void* pMemory) + { + I::MemAlloc->Free(pMemory); + } + + CUtlMemory& operator=(const CUtlMemory&) = delete; + + CUtlMemory& operator=(CUtlMemory&& moveFrom) noexcept + { + // copy member variables to locals before purge to handle self-assignment + T* pMemoryTemp = moveFrom.pMemory; + const int nAllocationCountTemp = moveFrom.nAllocationCount; + const int nGrowSizeTemp = moveFrom.nGrowSize; + + moveFrom.pMemory = nullptr; + moveFrom.nAllocationCount = 0; + moveFrom.nGrowSize = 0; + + // if this is a self-assignment, Purge() is a no-op here + Purge(); + + pMemory = pMemoryTemp; + nAllocationCount = nAllocationCountTemp; + nGrowSize = nGrowSizeTemp; + return *this; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& operator[](const N nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return pMemory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& operator[](const N nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return pMemory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& Element(const N nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return pMemory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& Element(const N nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return pMemory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T* Base() + { + return pMemory; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T* Base() const + { + return pMemory; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int AllocationCount() const + { + return nAllocationCount; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsExternallyAllocated() const + { + return nGrowSize <= EXTERNAL_BUFFER_MARKER; + } + + [[nodiscard]] static N InvalidIndex() + { + return static_cast(-1); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIndex(N nIndex) const + { + return (nIndex >= 0) && (nIndex < nAllocationCount); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t First() const + { + return Iterator_t(IsValidIndex(0) ? 0 : InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t Next(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return Iterator_t(IsValidIndex(it.nIndex + 1) ? it.nIndex + 1 : InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] N GetIndex(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return it.nIndex; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsIndexAfter(N nIndex, const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return nIndex > it.nIndex; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIterator(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return IsValidIndex(it.index); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t InvalidIterator() const + { + return Iterator_t(InvalidIndex()); + } + + void Grow(const int nCount = 1) + { + if (IsExternallyAllocated()) + return; + + int nAllocationRequested = nAllocationCount + nCount; + int nNewAllocationCount = 0; + + if (nGrowSize) + nAllocationCount = ((1 + ((nAllocationRequested - 1) / nGrowSize)) * nGrowSize); + else + { + if (nAllocationCount == 0) + nAllocationCount = (31 + sizeof(T)) / sizeof(T); + + while (nAllocationCount < nAllocationRequested) + nAllocationCount <<= 1; + } + + if (static_cast(static_cast(nNewAllocationCount)) < nAllocationRequested) + { + if (static_cast(static_cast(nNewAllocationCount)) == 0 && static_cast(static_cast(nNewAllocationCount - 1)) >= nAllocationRequested) + --nNewAllocationCount; + else + { + if (static_cast(static_cast(nAllocationRequested)) != nAllocationRequested) + return; + + while (static_cast(static_cast(nNewAllocationCount)) < nAllocationRequested) + nNewAllocationCount = (nNewAllocationCount + nAllocationRequested) / 2; + } + } + + nAllocationCount = nNewAllocationCount; + + // @test: we can always call realloc, since it must allocate instead when passed null ptr + if (pMemory != nullptr) + pMemory = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->ReAlloc(pMemory, nAllocationCount * sizeof(T))); + else + pMemory = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->Alloc(nAllocationCount * sizeof(T))); + } + + void EnsureCapacity(const int nCapacity) + { + if (nAllocationCount >= nCapacity) + return; + + if (IsExternallyAllocated()) + { + // can't grow a buffer whose memory was externally allocated + CS_ASSERT(false); + return; + } + + nAllocationCount = nCapacity; + + // @test: we can always call realloc, since it must allocate instead when passed null ptr + if (pMemory != nullptr) + pMemory = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->ReAlloc(pMemory, nAllocationCount * sizeof(T))); + else + pMemory = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->Alloc(nAllocationCount * sizeof(T))); + } + + void ConvertToGrowableMemory(int nInitialGrowSize) + { + if (!IsExternallyAllocated()) + return; + + nGrowSize = nInitialGrowSize; + + if (nAllocationCount > 0) + { + const int nByteCount = nAllocationCount * sizeof(T); + T* pGrowableMemory = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->Alloc(nByteCount)); + CRT::MemoryCopy(pGrowableMemory, pMemory, nByteCount); + pMemory = pGrowableMemory; + } + else + pMemory = nullptr; + } + + void Purge() + { + if (IsExternallyAllocated()) + return; + + if (pMemory != nullptr) + { + I::MemAlloc->Free(static_cast(pMemory)); + pMemory = nullptr; + } + + nAllocationCount = 0; + } + + void Purge(const int nElements) + { + CS_ASSERT(nElements >= 0); + + if (nElements > nAllocationCount) + { + // ensure this isn't a grow request in disguise + CS_ASSERT(nElements <= nAllocationCount); + return; + } + + if (nElements == 0) + { + Purge(); + return; + } + + if (IsExternallyAllocated() || nElements == nAllocationCount) + return; + + if (pMemory == nullptr) + { + // allocation count is non zero, but memory is null + CS_ASSERT(false); + return; + } + + nAllocationCount = nElements; + pMemory = static_cast(I::MemAlloc->ReAlloc(pMemory, nAllocationCount * sizeof(T))); + } + +protected: + T* pMemory; // 0x00 + int nAllocationCount; // 0x04 + int nGrowSize; // 0x08 +}; + +template +class CUtlMemoryAligned : public CUtlMemory +{ +public: + // @note: not implemented + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CUtlMemoryAligned); +}; + +template +class CUtlMemoryFixedGrowable : public CUtlMemory +{ + typedef CUtlMemory BaseClass; + +public: + CUtlMemoryFixedGrowable(int nInitialGrowSize = 0, int nInitialSize = SIZE) : + BaseClass(arrFixedMemory, SIZE) + { + CS_ASSERT(nInitialSize == 0 || nInitialSize == SIZE); + nMallocGrowSize = nInitialGrowSize; + } + + void Grow(int nCount = 1) + { + if (this->IsExternallyAllocated()) + this->ConvertToGrowableMemory(nMallocGrowSize); + + BaseClass::Grow(nCount); + } + + void EnsureCapacity(int nCapacity) + { + if (CUtlMemory::nAllocationCount >= nCapacity) + return; + + if (this->IsExternallyAllocated()) + // can't grow a buffer whose memory was externally allocated + this->ConvertToGrowableMemory(nMallocGrowSize); + + BaseClass::EnsureCapacity(nCapacity); + } + +private: + int nMallocGrowSize; + T arrFixedMemory[SIZE]; +}; + +template +class CUtlMemoryFixed +{ +public: + CUtlMemoryFixed(const int nGrowSize = 0, const int nInitialCapacity = 0) + { + CS_ASSERT(nInitialCapacity == 0 || nInitialCapacity == SIZE); + } + + CUtlMemoryFixed(const T* pMemory, const int nElements) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); + } + + [[nodiscard]] static constexpr bool IsValidIndex(const int nIndex) + { + return (nIndex >= 0) && (nIndex < SIZE); + } + + // specify the invalid ('null') index that we'll only return on failure + static constexpr int INVALID_INDEX = -1; + + [[nodiscard]] static constexpr int InvalidIndex() + { + return INVALID_INDEX; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T* Base() + { + if (nAlignment == 0) + return reinterpret_cast(&pMemory[0]); + + return reinterpret_cast((reinterpret_cast(&pMemory[0]) + nAlignment - 1) & ~(nAlignment - 1)); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T* Base() const + { + if (nAlignment == 0) + return reinterpret_cast(&pMemory[0]); + + return reinterpret_cast((reinterpret_cast(&pMemory[0]) + nAlignment - 1) & ~(nAlignment - 1)); + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& operator[](int nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return Base()[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& operator[](int nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return Base()[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& Element(int nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return Base()[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& Element(int nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return Base()[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int AllocationCount() const + { + return SIZE; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int Count() const + { + return SIZE; + } + + void Grow(int nCount = 1) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); + } + + void EnsureCapacity(const int nCapacity) + { + CS_ASSERT(nCapacity <= SIZE); + } + + void Purge() { } + + void Purge(const int nElements) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsExternallyAllocated() const + { + return false; + } + + class Iterator_t + { + public: + Iterator_t(const int nIndex) : + nIndex(nIndex) { } + + bool operator==(const Iterator_t it) const + { + return nIndex == it.nIndex; + } + + bool operator!=(const Iterator_t it) const + { + return nIndex != it.nIndex; + } + + int nIndex; + }; + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t First() const + { + return Iterator_t(IsValidIndex(0) ? 0 : InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t Next(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return Iterator_t(IsValidIndex(it.nIndex + 1) ? it.nIndex + 1 : InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] int GetIndex(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return it.nIndex; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsIndexAfter(int i, const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return i > it.nIndex; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIterator(const Iterator_t& it) const + { + return IsValidIndex(it.nIndex); + } + + [[nodiscard]] Iterator_t InvalidIterator() const + { + return Iterator_t(InvalidIndex()); + } + +private: + char pMemory[SIZE * sizeof(T) + nAlignment]; +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlrbtree.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlrbtree.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0a2bc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlrbtree.h @@ -0,0 +1,244 @@ +#pragma once +#include "utlmemory.h" + +// @source: master/public/tier1/utlrbtree.h + +template +class CDefLess +{ +public: + CDefLess() { } + + CDefLess(int) { } + + CS_INLINE bool operator()(const T& left, const T& right) const + { + return (left < right); + } + + CS_INLINE bool operator!() const + { + return false; + } +}; + +template +struct UtlRBTreeLinks_t +{ + I iLeft; + I iRight; + I iParent; + I iTag; +}; + +template +struct UtlRBTreeNode_t : public UtlRBTreeLinks_t +{ + T data; +}; + +template , I>> +class CUtlRBTree +{ +public: + using KeyType_t = T; + using ElementType_t = T; + using IndexType_t = I; + using LessCallbackFn_t = L; + + enum NodeColor_t + { + RED = 0, + BLACK + }; + + explicit CUtlRBTree(int nGrowSize = 0, int nInitialSize = 0, const LessCallbackFn_t& fnLessCallback = nullptr) : + fnLessCallback(fnLessCallback), memory(nGrowSize, nInitialSize), iRoot(InvalidIndex()), nElements(0), iFirstFree(InvalidIndex()), itLastAlloc(memory.InvalidIterator()), pElements(memory.Base()) { } + + explicit CUtlRBTree(const LessCallbackFn_t& fnLessCallback) : + fnLessCallback(fnLessCallback), memory(0, 0), iRoot(InvalidIndex()), nElements(0), iFirstFree(InvalidIndex()), itLastAlloc(memory.InvalidIterator()), pElements(memory.Base()) { } + + ~CUtlRBTree() + { + Purge(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& operator[](I nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].data; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& operator[](I nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].data; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& Element(I nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].data; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& Element(I nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); + return memory[nIndex].data; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const UtlRBTreeLinks_t& Links(I nIndex) const + { + constexpr UtlRBTreeLinks_t linksSentinel = { + M::INVALID_INDEX, M::INVALID_INDEX, M::INVALID_INDEX, BLACK + }; + + return (nIndex != InvalidIndex()) ? memory[nIndex] : linksSentinel; + } + + [[nodiscard]] UtlRBTreeLinks_t& Links(I nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(nIndex != InvalidIndex()); + return memory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] I Parent(I nIndex) const + { + return (nIndex != InvalidIndex() ? memory[nIndex].iParent : InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] I LeftChild(I nIndex) const + { + return (nIndex != InvalidIndex() ? memory[nIndex].iLeft : InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] I RightChild(I nIndex) const + { + return (nIndex != InvalidIndex() ? memory[nIndex].iRight : InvalidIndex()); + } + + void SetParent(I nIndex, I iParent) + { + Links(nIndex).iParent = iParent; + } + + void SetLeftChild(I nIndex, I iChild) + { + Links(nIndex).iLeft = iChild; + } + + void SetRightChild(I nIndex, I iChild) + { + Links(nIndex).iRight = iChild; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsRoot(I nIndex) const + { + return nIndex == iRoot; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsLeaf(I nIndex) const + { + return (LeftChild(nIndex) == InvalidIndex()) && (RightChild(nIndex) == InvalidIndex()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] unsigned int Count() const + { + return nElements; + } + + [[nodiscard]] I MaxElement() const + { + return static_cast(memory.NumAllocated()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIndex(I nIndex) const + { + if (!memory.IsValidIndex(nIndex)) + return false; + + // don't read values that have been allocated, but not constructed + if (memory.IsIndexAfter(nIndex, itLastAlloc)) + return false; + + return LeftChild(nIndex) != nIndex; + } + + [[nodiscard]] static I InvalidIndex() + { + return static_cast(M::InvalidIndex()); + } + + void EnsureCapacity(const int nCapacity) + { + memory.EnsureCapacity(nCapacity); + } + + [[nodiscard]] I Find(const T& search) const + { + CS_ASSERT(!!fnLessCallback); + + I iCurrent = iRoot; + while (iCurrent != InvalidIndex()) + { + if (fnLessCallback(search, Element(iCurrent))) + iCurrent = LeftChild(iCurrent); + else if (fnLessCallback(Element(iCurrent), search)) + iCurrent = RightChild(iCurrent); + else + break; + } + + return iCurrent; + } + + void RemoveAll() + { + if (itLastAlloc == memory.InvalidIterator()) + { + CS_ASSERT(iRoot == InvalidIndex()); + CS_ASSERT(iFirstFree == InvalidIndex()); + CS_ASSERT(nElements == 0); + return; + } + + for (typename M::Iterator_t it = memory.First(); it != memory.InvalidIterator(); it = memory.Next(it)) + { + // skip elements in the free list + if (I nIndex = memory.GetIndex(it); IsValidIndex(nIndex)) + { + (&Element(nIndex))->~T(); + SetRightChild(nIndex, iFirstFree); + SetLeftChild(nIndex, nIndex); + iFirstFree = nIndex; + } + + // don't destruct elements that haven't ever been constucted + if (it == itLastAlloc) + break; + } + + // clear everything else out + iRoot = InvalidIndex(); + nElements = 0; + //CS_ASSERT(IsValid()); + } + + void Purge() + { + RemoveAll(); + iFirstFree = InvalidIndex(); + + memory.Purge(); + itLastAlloc = memory.InvalidIterator(); + } + +public: + LessCallbackFn_t fnLessCallback; // 0x00 + M memory; // 0x04 + I iRoot; // 0x10 + I nElements; + I iFirstFree; + typename M::Iterator_t itLastAlloc; + UtlRBTreeNode_t* pElements; +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlstring.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlstring.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..71f1f7c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlstring.h @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +#pragma once +#include "utlmemory.h" + +class CUtlBinaryBlock +{ +public: + CUtlBinaryBlock(const int nInitialGrowSize = 0, const int nInitialSize = 0) : + memory(nInitialGrowSize, nInitialSize), nLength(0) { } + + CUtlMemory memory; + int nLength; +}; + +class CUtlString +{ +public: + CUtlString() { } + + [[nodiscard]] const char* Get() const + { + if (storage.nLength == 0) + return ""; + + return reinterpret_cast(storage.memory.Base()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] int Length() const + { + return storage.nLength; + } + +private: + CUtlBinaryBlock storage; +}; + +template +class CUtlConstStringBase +{ +public: + CUtlConstStringBase() : + pString(nullptr) { } + + [[nodiscard]] const T* Get() const + { + return (pString != nullptr ? pString : static_cast("")); + } + + [[nodiscard]] operator const T*() const + { + return (pString != nullptr ? pString : static_cast("")); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool Empty() const + { + return (pString == nullptr); + } + +protected: + const T* pString; +}; + +using CUtlConstString = CUtlConstStringBase; +using CUtlConstWideString = CUtlConstStringBase; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlthash.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlthash.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6e00cc --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlthash.h @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +#pragma once + +#include +#include +#include + +class CUtlMemoryPool +{ +public: + int Count() const + { + return nBlocksAllocated; + } + + int PeakCount() const + { + return nPeakAlloc; + } + + int BlockSize() const + { + return nBlockSize; + } + +protected: + class CBlob + { + public: + CBlob* pPrev; + CBlob* pNext; + int nNumBytes; + char Data[1]; + char Padding[3]; + }; + + int nBlockSize; + int nBlocksPerBlob; + int nGrowMode; + int nBlocksAllocated; + int nPeakAlloc; + + unsigned short nAlignment; + unsigned short nNumBlobs; + + void* pHeadOfFreeList; + void* pAllocOwner; + CBlob BlobHead; +}; + +using UtlTSHashHandle_t = std::uintptr_t; + +inline unsigned HashIntConventional(const int n) +{ + unsigned hash = 0xAAAAAAAA + (n & 0xFF); + hash = (hash << 5) + hash + ((n >> 8) & 0xFF); + hash = (hash << 5) + hash + ((n >> 16) & 0xFF); + hash = (hash << 5) + hash + ((n >> 24) & 0xFF); + + return hash; +} + +template +class CUtlTSHashGenericHash +{ +public: + static int Hash(const tKey& Key, int nBucketMask) + { + int nHash = HashIntConventional(std::uintptr_t(Key)); + if (nBucketCount <= UINT16_MAX) + { + nHash ^= (nHash >> 16); + } + + if (nBucketCount <= UINT8_MAX) + { + nHash ^= (nHash >> 8); + } + + return (nHash & nBucketMask); + } + + static bool Compare(const tKey& lhs, const tKey& rhs) + { + return lhs == rhs; + } +}; + +template , int nAlignment = 0> +class CUtlTSHash +{ + static constexpr int nBucketMask = nBucketCount - 1; + +public: + static constexpr UtlTSHashHandle_t InvalidHandle() + { + return static_cast(0); + } + + UtlTSHashHandle_t Find(tKey uiKey) + { + int iBucket = tHashFuncs::Hash(uiKey, nBucketCount); + const HashBucket_t& hashBucket = aBuckets[iBucket]; + const UtlTSHashHandle_t hHash = Find(uiKey, hashBucket.pFirst, nullptr); + return hHash ? hHash : Find(uiKey, hashBucket.pFirstUncommited, hashBucket.pFirst); + } + + int Count() const + { + return EntryMemory.Count(); + } + + int GetElements(int nFirstElement, int nCount, UtlTSHashHandle_t* pHandles) const + { + int nIndex = 0; + for (int nBucketIndex = 0; nBucketIndex < nBucketCount; nBucketIndex++) + { + const HashBucket_t& hashBucket = aBuckets[nBucketIndex]; + + HashFixedData_t* pElement = hashBucket.pFirstUncommited; + for (; pElement; pElement = pElement->pNext) + { + if (--nFirstElement >= 0) + continue; + + pHandles[nIndex++] = reinterpret_cast(pElement); + + if (nIndex >= nCount) + return nIndex; + } + } + + return nIndex; + } + + tElement Element(UtlTSHashHandle_t hHash) + { + return ((HashFixedData_t*)(hHash))->Data; + } + + const tElement& Element(UtlTSHashHandle_t hHash) const + { + return reinterpret_cast(hHash)->Data; + } + + tElement& operator[](UtlTSHashHandle_t hHash) + { + return reinterpret_cast(hHash)->Data; + } + + const tElement& operator[](UtlTSHashHandle_t hHash) const + { + return reinterpret_cast(hHash)->Data; + } + + tKey GetID(UtlTSHashHandle_t hHash) const + { + return reinterpret_cast(hHash)->uiKey; + } + +private: + template + struct HashFixedDataInternal_t + { + tKey uiKey; + HashFixedDataInternal_t* pNext; + tData Data; + }; + + using HashFixedData_t = HashFixedDataInternal_t; + + struct HashBucket_t + { + private: + [[maybe_unused]] std::byte pad0[0x18]; + + public: + HashFixedData_t* pFirst; + HashFixedData_t* pFirstUncommited; + }; + + UtlTSHashHandle_t Find(tKey uiKey, HashFixedData_t* pFirstElement, HashFixedData_t* pLastElement) + { + for (HashFixedData_t* pElement = pFirstElement; pElement != pLastElement; pElement = pElement->pNext) + { + if (tHashFuncs::Compare(pElement->uiKey, uiKey)) + return reinterpret_cast(pElement); + } + + return InvalidHandle(); + } + + CUtlMemoryPool EntryMemory; + MEM_PAD(0x40); + HashBucket_t aBuckets[nBucketCount]; + bool bNeedsCommit; +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlvector.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlvector.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a39464 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/utlvector.h @@ -0,0 +1,346 @@ +#pragma once +#include "utlmemory.h" + +// used: memorymove +#include "../../utilities/crt.h" + +// @source: master/public/tier1/utlvector.h + +/* + * a growable array class which doubles in size by default. + * it will always keep all elements consecutive in memory, and may move the + * elements around in memory (via a realloc) when elements are inserted or removed. + * clients should therefore refer to the elements of the vector by index and not pointers + * + * @note: if variable that uses it intend to call any method that needs to allocate/deallocate should have overloaded constructor/destructor and/or new/delete operators respectively + */ +template > +class CUtlVector +{ + using CAllocator = A; + +public: + explicit CUtlVector(const int nGrowSize = 0, const int nInitialCapacity = 0) : + memory(nGrowSize, nInitialCapacity), nSize(0), pElements(memory.Base()) { } + + CUtlVector(T* pMemory, const int nInitialCapacity, const int nInitialCount = 0) : + memory(pMemory, nInitialCapacity), nSize(nInitialCount), pElements(memory.Base()) { } + + CUtlVector(const CUtlVector&) = delete; + + ~CUtlVector() + { + Purge(); + } + + CUtlVector& operator=(const CUtlVector& vecOther) + { + CS_ASSERT(&vecOther != this); // self-assignment isn't allowed + + const int nSourceCount = vecOther.Count(); + SetCount(nSourceCount); + + for (int i = 0; i < nSourceCount; i++) + (*this)[i] = vecOther[i]; + + return *this; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& operator[](const int nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); // given index is out of range + return memory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& operator[](const int nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); // given index is out of range + return memory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T& Element(const int nIndex) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); // given index is out of range + return memory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T& Element(const int nIndex) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nIndex)); // given index is out of range + return memory[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] T* Base() + { + return memory.Base(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const T* Base() const + { + return memory.Base(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] int Count() const + { + return nSize; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int& Size() + { + return nSize; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValidIndex(const int nIndex) const + { + return (nIndex >= 0) && (nIndex < nSize); + } + + void CopyFromArray(const T* pArraySource, int nArraySize) + { + // can't insert something that's in the list. reallocation may hose us + CS_ASSERT(memory.Base() == nullptr || pArraySource == nullptr || begin() >= (pArraySource + nArraySize) || pArraySource >= end()); + + // resize to accommodate array + SetCount(nArraySize); + + for (int i = 0; i < nArraySize; i++) + (*this)[i] = pArraySource[i]; + } + + void GrowVector(const int nCount = 1) + { + if (nSize + nCount > memory.AllocationCount()) + memory.Grow(nSize + nCount - memory.AllocationCount()); + + nSize += nCount; + pElements = memory.Base(); + } + + void EnsureCapacity(int nCapacity) + { + memory.EnsureCapacity(nCapacity); + pElements = memory.Base(); + } + + void Purge() + { + RemoveAll(); + memory.Purge(); + pElements = memory.Base(); + } + + void ShiftElementsRight(const int nElement, const int nShift = 1) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nElement) || nSize == 0 || nShift == 0); + + if (const int nToMove = nSize - nElement - nShift; nToMove > 0 && nShift > 0) + CRT::MemoryMove(&Element(nElement + nShift), &Element(nElement), nToMove * sizeof(T)); + } + + void ShiftElementsLeft(const int nElement, const int nShift = 1) + { + CS_ASSERT(IsValidIndex(nElement) || nSize == 0 || nShift == 0); + + if (const int nToMove = nSize - nElement - nShift; nToMove > 0 && nShift > 0) + CRT::MemoryMove(&Element(nElement), &Element(nElement + nShift), nToMove * sizeof(T)); + } + + int AddToHead() + { + return InsertBefore(0); + } + + int AddToHead(const T& source) + { + // can't insert something that's in the list. reallocation may hose us + CS_ASSERT(memory.Base() == nullptr || &source < begin() || &source >= end()); + return InsertBefore(0, source); + } + + int AddMultipleToHead(const int nCount) + { + return InsertMultipleBefore(0, nCount); + } + + int AddToTail() + { + return InsertBefore(nSize); + } + + int AddToTail(const T& source) + { + // can't insert something that's in the list. reallocation may hose us + CS_ASSERT(memory.Base() == nullptr || &source < begin() || &source >= end()); + return InsertBefore(nSize, source); + } + + int AddMultipleToTail(const int nCount) + { + return InsertMultipleBefore(nSize, nCount); + } + + void SetCount(const int nCount) + { + RemoveAll(); + AddMultipleToTail(nCount); + } + + int InsertBefore(const int nElement) + { + // can insert at the end + CS_ASSERT(nElement == nSize || IsValidIndex(nElement)); + + GrowVector(); + ShiftElementsRight(nElement); + new (&Element(nElement)) T; // @todo: all functions of game classes that using this should be wrapped with constraints 'requires (std::is_pointer_v || have_constructor_overload || have_new_overload)' + return nElement; + } + + int InsertMultipleBefore(const int nElement, const int nCount) + { + if (nCount == 0) + return nElement; + + // can insert at the end + CS_ASSERT(nElement == nSize || IsValidIndex(nElement)); + + GrowVector(nCount); + ShiftElementsRight(nElement, nCount); + + // invoke default constructors + for (int i = 0; i < nElement; ++i) + new (&Element(nElement + i)) T; + + return nElement; + } + + int InsertBefore(const int nElement, const T& source) + { + // can't insert something that's in the list. reallocation may hose us + CS_ASSERT(memory.Base() == nullptr || &source < begin() || &source >= end()); + + // can insert at the end + CS_ASSERT(nElement == nSize || IsValidIndex(nElement)); + + // reallocate if can't insert something that's in the list + GrowVector(); + ShiftElementsRight(nElement); + new (&Element(nElement)) T(source); + return nElement; + } + + int InsertMultipleBefore(const int nElement, const int nCount, const T* pSource) + { + if (nCount == 0) + return nElement; + + // can insert at the end + CS_ASSERT(nElement == nSize || IsValidIndex(nElement)); + + GrowVector(nCount); + ShiftElementsRight(nElement, nCount); + + // invoke default constructors + if (pSource == nullptr) + { + for (int i = 0; i < nCount; ++i) + new (&Element(nElement + i)) T; + } + else + { + for (int i = 0; i < nCount; i++) + new (&Element(nElement)) T(pSource[i]); + } + + return nElement; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int Find(const T& source) const + { + for (int i = 0; i < nSize; ++i) + { + if (Element(i) == source) + return i; + } + + return -1; + } + + bool FindAndRemove(const T& source) + { + if (const int nElement = Find(source); nElement != -1) + { + Remove(nElement); + return true; + } + + return false; + } + + void Remove(const int nElement) + { + (&Element(nElement))->~T(); + ShiftElementsLeft(nElement); + --nSize; + } + + void RemoveAll() + { + for (int i = nSize; --i >= 0;) + (&Element(i))->~T(); + + nSize = 0; + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto begin() noexcept + { + return memory.Base(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto end() noexcept + { + return memory.Base() + nSize; + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto begin() const noexcept + { + return memory.Base(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] auto end() const noexcept + { + return memory.Base() + nSize; + } + +protected: + int nSize; + CAllocator memory; + T* pElements; +}; + +template +class CUtlVectorAligned : public CUtlVector> +{ +}; + +//a array class with a fixed allocation scheme +template +class CUtlVectorFixed : public CUtlVector> +{ + using CBaseClass = CUtlVector>; + +public: + explicit CUtlVectorFixed(int nGrowSize = 0, int nInitialCapacity = 0) : + CBaseClass(nGrowSize, nInitialCapacity) { } + + CUtlVectorFixed(T* pMemory, int nElements) : + CBaseClass(pMemory, nElements) { } +}; + +template +class C_NetworkUtlVectorBase +{ +public: + std::uint32_t nSize; + T* pElements; +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/vector.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/vector.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d58a233 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/vector.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +#include "vector.h" + +#include "matrix.h" +#include "qangle.h" + +// used: m_rad2deg +#include "../../utilities/math.h" + +[[nodiscard]] Vector_t Vector_t::Transform(const Matrix3x4_t& matTransform) const +{ + return { + this->DotProduct(matTransform[0]) + matTransform[0][3], + this->DotProduct(matTransform[1]) + matTransform[1][3], + this->DotProduct(matTransform[2]) + matTransform[2][3] + }; +} + +[[nodiscard]] QAngle_t Vector_t::ToAngles() const +{ + float flPitch, flYaw; + if (this->x == 0.0f && this->y == 0.0f) + { + flPitch = (this->z > 0.0f) ? 270.f : 90.f; + flYaw = 0.0f; + } + else + { + flPitch = M_RAD2DEG(std::atan2f(-this->z, this->Length2D())); + + if (flPitch < 0.f) + flPitch += 360.f; + + flYaw = M_RAD2DEG(std::atan2f(this->y, this->x)); + + if (flYaw < 0.f) + flYaw += 360.f; + } + + return { flPitch, flYaw, 0.0f }; +} + +[[nodiscard]] Matrix3x4_t Vector_t::ToMatrix() const +{ + Vector_t vecRight = {}, vecUp = {}; + this->ToDirections(&vecRight, &vecUp); + + Matrix3x4a_t matOutput = {}; + matOutput.SetForward(*this); + matOutput.SetLeft(-vecRight); + matOutput.SetUp(vecUp); + return matOutput; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/vector.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/vector.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be43a87 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/vector.h @@ -0,0 +1,393 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [stl] numeric_limits +#include +// used: [crt] isfinite, fmodf, sqrtf +#include + +// forward declarations +struct QAngle_t; +struct Matrix3x4_t; + +// @source: master/public/mathlib/vector.h + +struct Vector2D_t +{ + constexpr Vector2D_t(const float x = 0.0f, const float y = 0.0f) : + x(x), y(y) { } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsZero() const + { + // @note: to make this implementation right, we should use fpclassify here, but game aren't doing same, probably it's better to keep this same, just ensure that it will be compiled same + return (this->x == 0.0f && this->y == 0.0f); + } + + float x = 0.0f, y = 0.0f; +}; + +struct Vector_t +{ + constexpr Vector_t(const float x = 0.0f, const float y = 0.0f, const float z = 0.0f) : + x(x), y(y), z(z) { } + + constexpr Vector_t(const float* arrVector) : + x(arrVector[0]), y(arrVector[1]), z(arrVector[2]) { } + + constexpr Vector_t(const Vector2D_t& vecBase2D) : + x(vecBase2D.x), y(vecBase2D.y) { } + +#pragma region vector_array_operators + + [[nodiscard]] float& operator[](const int nIndex) + { + return reinterpret_cast(this)[nIndex]; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const float& operator[](const int nIndex) const + { + return reinterpret_cast(this)[nIndex]; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region vector_relational_operators + + bool operator==(const Vector_t& vecBase) const + { + return this->IsEqual(vecBase); + } + + bool operator!=(const Vector_t& vecBase) const + { + return !this->IsEqual(vecBase); + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region vector_assignment_operators + + constexpr Vector_t& operator=(const Vector_t& vecBase) + { + this->x = vecBase.x; + this->y = vecBase.y; + this->z = vecBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator=(const Vector2D_t& vecBase2D) + { + this->x = vecBase2D.x; + this->y = vecBase2D.y; + this->z = 0.0f; + return *this; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region vector_arithmetic_assignment_operators + + constexpr Vector_t& operator+=(const Vector_t& vecBase) + { + this->x += vecBase.x; + this->y += vecBase.y; + this->z += vecBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator-=(const Vector_t& vecBase) + { + this->x -= vecBase.x; + this->y -= vecBase.y; + this->z -= vecBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator*=(const Vector_t& vecBase) + { + this->x *= vecBase.x; + this->y *= vecBase.y; + this->z *= vecBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator/=(const Vector_t& vecBase) + { + this->x /= vecBase.x; + this->y /= vecBase.y; + this->z /= vecBase.z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator+=(const float flAdd) + { + this->x += flAdd; + this->y += flAdd; + this->z += flAdd; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator-=(const float flSubtract) + { + this->x -= flSubtract; + this->y -= flSubtract; + this->z -= flSubtract; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator*=(const float flMultiply) + { + this->x *= flMultiply; + this->y *= flMultiply; + this->z *= flMultiply; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t& operator/=(const float flDivide) + { + this->x /= flDivide; + this->y /= flDivide; + this->z /= flDivide; + return *this; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region vector_arithmetic_unary_operators + + constexpr Vector_t& operator-() + { + this->x = -this->x; + this->y = -this->y; + this->z = -this->z; + return *this; + } + + constexpr Vector_t operator-() const + { + return { -this->x, -this->y, -this->z }; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region vector_arithmetic_ternary_operators + + Vector_t operator+(const Vector_t& vecAdd) const + { + return { this->x + vecAdd.x, this->y + vecAdd.y, this->z + vecAdd.z }; + } + + Vector_t operator-(const Vector_t& vecSubtract) const + { + return { this->x - vecSubtract.x, this->y - vecSubtract.y, this->z - vecSubtract.z }; + } + + Vector_t operator*(const Vector_t& vecMultiply) const + { + return { this->x * vecMultiply.x, this->y * vecMultiply.y, this->z * vecMultiply.z }; + } + + Vector_t operator/(const Vector_t& vecDivide) const + { + return { this->x / vecDivide.x, this->y / vecDivide.y, this->z / vecDivide.z }; + } + + Vector_t operator+(const float flAdd) const + { + return { this->x + flAdd, this->y + flAdd, this->z + flAdd }; + } + + Vector_t operator-(const float flSubtract) const + { + return { this->x - flSubtract, this->y - flSubtract, this->z - flSubtract }; + } + + Vector_t operator*(const float flMultiply) const + { + return { this->x * flMultiply, this->y * flMultiply, this->z * flMultiply }; + } + + Vector_t operator/(const float flDivide) const + { + return { this->x / flDivide, this->y / flDivide, this->z / flDivide }; + } + +#pragma endregion + + /// @returns: true if each component of the vector is finite, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValid() const + { + return std::isfinite(this->x) && std::isfinite(this->y) && std::isfinite(this->z); + } + + constexpr void Invalidate() + { + this->x = this->y = this->z = std::numeric_limits::infinity(); + } + + /// @returns: true if each component of the vector equals to another, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] bool IsEqual(const Vector_t& vecEqual, const float flErrorMargin = std::numeric_limits::epsilon()) const + { + return (std::fabsf(this->x - vecEqual.x) < flErrorMargin && std::fabsf(this->y - vecEqual.y) < flErrorMargin && std::fabsf(this->z - vecEqual.z) < flErrorMargin); + } + + /// @returns: true if each component of the vector equals to zero, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] bool IsZero() const + { + // @note: to make this implementation right, we should use fpclassify here, but game aren't doing same, probably it's better to keep this same, just ensure that it will be compiled same + return (this->x == 0.0f && this->y == 0.0f && this->z == 0.0f); + } + + [[nodiscard]] float Length() const + { + return std::sqrtf(this->LengthSqr()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr float LengthSqr() const + { + return DotProduct(*this); + } + + [[nodiscard]] float Length2D() const + { + return std::sqrtf(this->Length2DSqr()); + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr float Length2DSqr() const + { + return (this->x * this->x + this->y * this->y); + } + + [[nodiscard]] float DistTo(const Vector_t& vecEnd) const + { + return (*this - vecEnd).Length(); + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr float DistToSqr(const Vector_t& vecEnd) const + { + return (*this - vecEnd).LengthSqr(); + } + + /// normalize magnitude of each component of the vector + /// @returns: length of the vector + float NormalizeInPlace() + { + const float flLength = this->Length(); + const float flRadius = 1.0f / (flLength + std::numeric_limits::epsilon()); + + this->x *= flRadius; + this->y *= flRadius; + this->z *= flRadius; + + return flLength; + } + + /// normalize magnitude of each component of the vector + /// @returns: copy of the vector with normalized components + [[nodiscard]] Vector_t Normalized() const + { + Vector_t vecOut = *this; + vecOut.NormalizeInPlace(); + return vecOut; + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr float DotProduct(const Vector_t& vecDot) const + { + return (this->x * vecDot.x + this->y * vecDot.y + this->z * vecDot.z); + } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr Vector_t CrossProduct(const Vector_t& vecCross) const + { + return { this->y * vecCross.z - this->z * vecCross.y, this->z * vecCross.x - this->x * vecCross.z, this->x * vecCross.y - this->y * vecCross.x }; + } + + /// @returns: transformed vector by given transformation matrix + [[nodiscard]] Vector_t Transform(const Matrix3x4_t& matTransform) const; + + [[nodiscard]] Vector2D_t ToVector2D() const + { + return { this->x, this->y }; + } + + /// convert forward direction vector to other direction vectors + /// @param[out] pvecRight [optional] output for converted right vector + /// @param[out] pvecUp [optional] output for converted up vector + void ToDirections(Vector_t* pvecRight, Vector_t* pvecUp) const + { + if (std::fabsf(this->x) < 1e-6f && std::fabsf(this->y) < 1e-6f) + { + // pitch 90 degrees up/down from identity + if (pvecRight != nullptr) + { + pvecRight->x = 0.0f; + pvecRight->y = -1.0f; + pvecRight->z = 0.0f; + } + + if (pvecUp != nullptr) + { + pvecUp->x = -this->z; + pvecUp->y = 0.0f; + pvecUp->z = 0.0f; + } + } + else + { + if (pvecRight != nullptr) + { + pvecRight->x = this->y; + pvecRight->y = -this->x; + pvecRight->z = 0.0f; + pvecRight->NormalizeInPlace(); + } + + if (pvecUp != nullptr) + { + pvecUp->x = (-this->x) * this->z; + pvecUp->y = -(this->y * this->z); + pvecUp->z = this->y * this->y - (-this->x) * this->x; + pvecUp->NormalizeInPlace(); + } + } + } + + /// @returns: 2D angles converted from direction vector + [[nodiscard]] QAngle_t ToAngles() const; + + /// @returns: matrix converted from forward direction vector + [[nodiscard]] Matrix3x4_t ToMatrix() const; + + float x = 0.0f, y = 0.0f, z = 0.0f; +}; + +struct Vector4D_t +{ + constexpr Vector4D_t(const float x = 0.0f, const float y = 0.0f, const float z = 0.0f, const float w = 0.0f) : + x(x), y(y), z(z), w(w) { } + + float x = 0.0f, y = 0.0f, z = 0.0f, w = 0.0f; +}; + +struct alignas(16) VectorAligned_t : Vector_t +{ + VectorAligned_t() = default; + + explicit VectorAligned_t(const Vector_t& vecBase) + { + this->x = vecBase.x; + this->y = vecBase.y; + this->z = vecBase.z; + this->w = 0.0f; + } + + constexpr VectorAligned_t& operator=(const Vector_t& vecBase) + { + this->x = vecBase.x; + this->y = vecBase.y; + this->z = vecBase.z; + this->w = 0.0f; + return *this; + } + + float w = 0.0f; +}; + +static_assert(alignof(VectorAligned_t) == 16); diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/viewsetup.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/viewsetup.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15b985a --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/datatypes/viewsetup.h @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: mem_pad +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +// used: vector_t +#include "vector.h" +// used: qangle_t +#include "qangle.h" + +class CViewSetup +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x490); + float flOrthoLeft; // 0x0494 + float flOrthoTop; // 0x0498 + float flOrthoRight; // 0x049C + float flOrthoBottom; // 0x04A0 + MEM_PAD(0x38); + float flFov; // 0x04D8 + float flFovViewmodel; // 0x04DC + Vector_t vecOrigin; // 0x04E0 + MEM_PAD(0xC); // 0x04EC + QAngle_t angView; // 0x04F8 + MEM_PAD(0x14); // 0x0504 + float flAspectRatio; // 0x0518 +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1e18b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +#include "entity.h" + +// used: convars +#include "../core/convars.h" +#include "interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h" +#include "interfaces/ienginecvar.h" +#include "interfaces/iengineclient.h" + +// used: game's definitions, enums +#include "const.h" + +// global empty vector for when we can't get the origin +static Vector_t vecEmpty = Vector_t(0, 0, 0); + +CCSPlayerController* CCSPlayerController::GetLocalPlayerController() +{ + const int nIndex = I::Engine->GetLocalPlayer(); + return I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(nIndex); +} + +const Vector_t& CCSPlayerController::GetPawnOrigin() +{ + CBaseHandle hPawnHandle = this->GetPawnHandle(); + if (!hPawnHandle.IsValid()) + return vecEmpty; + + C_CSPlayerPawn* pPlayerPawn = I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(hPawnHandle); + if (pPlayerPawn == nullptr) + return vecEmpty; + + return pPlayerPawn->GetSceneOrigin(); +} + +C_BaseEntity* C_BaseEntity::GetLocalPlayer() +{ + const int nIndex = I::Engine->GetLocalPlayer(); + return I::GameResourceService->pGameEntitySystem->Get(nIndex); +} + +const Vector_t& C_BaseEntity::GetSceneOrigin() +{ + if (this->GetGameSceneNode()) + return GetGameSceneNode()->GetAbsOrigin(); + + return vecEmpty; +} + +bool C_CSPlayerPawn::IsOtherEnemy(C_CSPlayerPawn* pOther) +{ + // check are other player is invalid or we're comparing against ourselves + if (pOther == nullptr || this == pOther) + return false; + + if (CONVAR::game_type->value.i32 == GAMETYPE_FREEFORALL && CONVAR::game_mode->value.i32 == GAMEMODE_FREEFORALL_SURVIVAL) + // check is not teammate + return (this->GetSurvivalTeam() != pOther->GetSurvivalTeam()); + + // @todo: check is deathmatch + if (CONVAR::mp_teammates_are_enemies->value.i1) + return true; + + return this->GetAssociatedTeam() != pOther->GetAssociatedTeam(); +} + +int C_CSPlayerPawn::GetAssociatedTeam() +{ + const int nTeam = this->GetTeam(); + + // @todo: check is coaching, currently cs2 doesnt have sv_coaching_enabled, so just let it be for now... + //if (CONVAR::sv_coaching_enabled->GetBool() && nTeam == TEAM_SPECTATOR) + // return this->GetCoachingTeam(); + + return nTeam; +} + +bool C_CSPlayerPawn::CanAttack(const float flServerTime) +{ + // check is player ready to attack + if (CCSPlayer_WeaponServices* pWeaponServices = this->GetWeaponServices(); pWeaponServices != nullptr) + if (this->IsWaitForNoAttack() || pWeaponServices->GetNextAttack() > flServerTime) + return false; + + return true; +} + + +std::uint32_t C_CSPlayerPawn::GetOwnerHandleIndex() +{ + std::uint32_t Result = -1; + if (this && GetCollision() && !(GetCollision()->GetSolidFlags() & 4)) + Result = this->GetOwnerHandle().GetEntryIndex(); + + return Result; +} + +std::uint16_t C_CSPlayerPawn::GetCollisionMask() +{ + if (this && GetCollision()) + return GetCollision()->CollisionMask(); // Collision + 0x38 + + return 0; +} + +bool C_CSWeaponBaseGun::CanPrimaryAttack(const int nWeaponType, const float flServerTime) +{ + // check are weapon support burst mode and it's ready to attack + if (this->IsBurstMode()) + { + // check is it ready to attack + if (this->GetBurstShotsRemaining() > 0 /*&& this->GetNextBurstShotTime() <= flServerTime*/) + return true; + } + + // check is weapon ready to attack + if (this->GetNextPrimaryAttackTick() > TIME_TO_TICKS(flServerTime)) + return false; + + // we doesn't need additional checks for knives + if (nWeaponType == WEAPONTYPE_KNIFE) + return true; + + // check do weapon have ammo + if (this->GetClip1() <= 0) + return false; + + const ItemDefinitionIndex_t nDefinitionIndex = this->GetAttributeManager()->GetItem()->GetItemDefinitionIndex(); + + // check for revolver cocking ready + if (nDefinitionIndex == WEAPON_R8_REVOLVER && this->GetPostponeFireReadyFrac() > flServerTime) + return false; + + return true; +} + +bool C_CSWeaponBaseGun::CanSecondaryAttack(const int nWeaponType, const float flServerTime) +{ + // check is weapon ready to attack + if (this->GetNextSecondaryAttackTick() > TIME_TO_TICKS(flServerTime)) + return false; + + // we doesn't need additional checks for knives + if (nWeaponType == WEAPONTYPE_KNIFE) + return true; + + // check do weapon have ammo + if (this->GetClip1() <= 0) + return false; + + // only revolver is allowed weapon for secondary attack + if (this->GetAttributeManager()->GetItem()->GetItemDefinitionIndex() != WEAPON_R8_REVOLVER) + return false; + + return true; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..09b7fdb --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity.h @@ -0,0 +1,431 @@ +#pragma once + +// @test: using interfaces in the header | not critical but could blow up someday with thousands of errors or affect to compilation time etc +// used: cgameentitysystem, ischemasystem +#include "../core/interfaces.h" +#include "interfaces/igameresourceservice.h" +#include "interfaces/ischemasystem.h" + +// used: schema field +#include "../core/schema.h" + +// used: l_print +#include "../utilities/log.h" +// used: vector_t +#include "datatypes/vector.h" +// used: qangle_t +#include "datatypes/qangle.h" +// used: ctransform +#include "datatypes/transform.h" + +// used: cbasehandle +#include "entity_handle.h" +// used: game's definitions +#include "const.h" +// used: entity vdata +#include "vdata.h" + +using GameTime_t = std::float_t; +using GameTick_t = std::int32_t; + +class CEntityInstance; + +class CEntityIdentity +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CEntityIdentity); + + // @note: handle index is not entity index + SCHEMA_ADD_OFFSET(std::uint32_t, GetIndex, 0x10); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(const char*, GetDesignerName, "CEntityIdentity->m_designerName"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetFlags, "CEntityIdentity->m_flags"); + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValid() + { + return GetIndex() != INVALID_EHANDLE_INDEX; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int GetEntryIndex() + { + if (!IsValid()) + return ENT_ENTRY_MASK; + + return GetIndex() & ENT_ENTRY_MASK; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int GetSerialNumber() + { + return GetIndex() >> NUM_SERIAL_NUM_SHIFT_BITS; + } + + CEntityInstance* pInstance; // 0x00 +}; + +class CEntityInstance +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CEntityInstance); + + void GetSchemaClassInfo(SchemaClassInfoData_t** pReturn) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pReturn); + } + + [[nodiscard]] CBaseHandle GetRefEHandle() + { + CEntityIdentity* pIdentity = GetIdentity(); + if (pIdentity == nullptr) + return CBaseHandle(); + + return CBaseHandle(pIdentity->GetEntryIndex(), pIdentity->GetSerialNumber() - (pIdentity->GetFlags() & 1)); + } + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CEntityIdentity*, GetIdentity, "CEntityInstance->m_pEntity"); +}; + +class CCollisionProperty +{ +public: + std::uint16_t CollisionMask() + { + return *reinterpret_cast(reinterpret_cast(this) + 0x38); + } + + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CCollisionProperty); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetMins, "CCollisionProperty->m_vecMins"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetMaxs, "CCollisionProperty->m_vecMaxs"); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint8_t, GetSolidFlags, "CCollisionProperty->m_usSolidFlags"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint8_t, GetCollisionGroup, "CCollisionProperty->m_CollisionGroup"); +}; + +class CSkeletonInstance; +class CGameSceneNode +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CGameSceneNode); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CTransform, GetNodeToWorld, "CGameSceneNode->m_nodeToWorld"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CEntityInstance*, GetOwner, "CGameSceneNode->m_pOwner"); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetAbsOrigin, "CGameSceneNode->m_vecAbsOrigin"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetRenderOrigin, "CGameSceneNode->m_vRenderOrigin"); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(QAngle_t, GetAngleRotation, "CGameSceneNode->m_angRotation"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(QAngle_t, GetAbsAngleRotation, "CGameSceneNode->m_angAbsRotation"); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsDormant, "CGameSceneNode->m_bDormant"); + + CSkeletonInstance* GetSkeletonInstance() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } +}; + +class C_BaseEntity : public CEntityInstance +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_BaseEntity); + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsBasePlayerController() + { + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pClassInfo; + GetSchemaClassInfo(&pClassInfo); + if (pClassInfo == nullptr) + return false; + + return FNV1A::Hash(pClassInfo->szName) == FNV1A::HashConst("C_CSPlayerController"); + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsWeapon() + { + static SchemaClassInfoData_t* pWeaponBaseClass = nullptr; + if (pWeaponBaseClass == nullptr) + I::SchemaSystem->FindTypeScopeForModule(CS_XOR("client.dll"))->FindDeclaredClass(&pWeaponBaseClass, CS_XOR("C_CSWeaponBase")); + + + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pClassInfo; + GetSchemaClassInfo(&pClassInfo); + if (pClassInfo == nullptr) + return false; + + return (pClassInfo->InheritsFrom(pWeaponBaseClass)); + } + + static C_BaseEntity* GetLocalPlayer(); + + // get entity origin on scene + [[nodiscard]] const Vector_t& GetSceneOrigin(); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CGameSceneNode*, GetGameSceneNode, "C_BaseEntity->m_pGameSceneNode"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CCollisionProperty*, GetCollision, "C_BaseEntity->m_pCollision"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint8_t, GetTeam, "C_BaseEntity->m_iTeamNum"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CBaseHandle, GetOwnerHandle, "C_BaseEntity->m_hOwnerEntity"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetBaseVelocity, "C_BaseEntity->m_vecBaseVelocity"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetAbsVelocity, "C_BaseEntity->m_vecAbsVelocity"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsTakingDamage, "C_BaseEntity->m_bTakesDamage"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetFlags, "C_BaseEntity->m_fFlags"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetEflags, "C_BaseEntity->m_iEFlags"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetMoveType, "C_BaseEntity->m_MoveType"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint8_t, GetLifeState, "C_BaseEntity->m_lifeState"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetHealth, "C_BaseEntity->m_iHealth"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetMaxHealth, "C_BaseEntity->m_iMaxHealth"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetWaterLevel, "C_BaseEntity->m_flWaterLevel"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD_OFFSET(void*, GetVData, "C_BaseEntity->m_nSubclassID", 0x8); +}; + +class CGlowProperty; + +class C_BaseModelEntity : public C_BaseEntity +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_BaseModelEntity); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CCollisionProperty, GetCollisionInstance, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_Collision"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CGlowProperty, GetGlowProperty, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_Glow"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetViewOffset, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_vecViewOffset"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(GameTime_t, GetCreationTime, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_flCreateTime"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(GameTick_t, GetCreationTick, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_nCreationTick"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CBaseHandle, GetMoveParent, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_hOldMoveParent"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::float_t, GetAnimTime, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_flAnimTime"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::float_t, GetSimulationTime, "C_BaseModelEntity->m_flSimulationTime"); +}; + +class CPlayer_ItemServices; +class CPlayer_CameraServices; + +class CPlayer_WeaponServices +{ +public: + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CBaseHandle, GetActiveWeapon, "CPlayer_WeaponServices->m_hActiveWeapon"); +}; + +class CCSPlayer_WeaponServices : public CPlayer_WeaponServices +{ +public: + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(GameTime_t, GetNextAttack, "CCSPlayer_WeaponServices->m_flNextAttack"); +}; + +class C_BasePlayerPawn : public C_BaseModelEntity +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_BasePlayerPawn); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CBaseHandle, GetControllerHandle, "C_BasePlayerPawn->m_hController"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CCSPlayer_WeaponServices*, GetWeaponServices, "C_BasePlayerPawn->m_pWeaponServices"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CPlayer_ItemServices*, GetItemServices, "C_BasePlayerPawn->m_pItemServices"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CPlayer_CameraServices*, GetCameraServices, "C_BasePlayerPawn->m_pCameraServices"); + + [[nodiscard]] Vector_t GetEyePosition() + { + Vector_t vecEyePosition = Vector_t(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f); + MEM::CallVFunc(this, &vecEyePosition); + return vecEyePosition; + } +}; + +class CCSPlayer_ViewModelServices; + +class C_CSPlayerPawnBase : public C_BasePlayerPawn +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_CSPlayerPawnBase); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CCSPlayer_ViewModelServices*, GetViewModelServices, "C_CSPlayerPawnBase->m_pViewModelServices"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetLowerBodyYawTarget, "C_CSPlayerPawnBase->m_flLowerBodyYawTarget"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetFlashMaxAlpha, "C_CSPlayerPawnBase->m_flFlashMaxAlpha"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetFlashDuration, "C_CSPlayerPawnBase->m_flFlashDuration"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(Vector_t, GetLastSmokeOverlayColor, "C_CSPlayerPawnBase->m_vLastSmokeOverlayColor"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(int, GetSurvivalTeam, "C_CSPlayerPawnBase->m_nSurvivalTeam"); // danger zone +}; + +class C_CSPlayerPawn : public C_CSPlayerPawnBase +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_CSPlayerPawn); + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsOtherEnemy(C_CSPlayerPawn* pOther); + [[nodiscard]] int GetAssociatedTeam(); + [[nodiscard]] bool CanAttack(const float flServerTime); + [[nodiscard]] std::uint32_t GetOwnerHandleIndex(); + [[nodiscard]] std::uint16_t GetCollisionMask(); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsScoped, "C_CSPlayerPawn->m_bIsScoped"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsDefusing, "C_CSPlayerPawn->m_bIsDefusing"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsGrabbingHostage, "C_CSPlayerPawn->m_bIsGrabbingHostage"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsWaitForNoAttack, "C_CSPlayerPawn->m_bWaitForNoAttack"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(int, GetShotsFired, "C_CSPlayerPawn->m_iShotsFired"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetArmorValue, "C_CSPlayerPawn->m_ArmorValue"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(QAngle_t, GetAimPuchAngle, "C_CSPlayerPawn->m_aimPunchAngle"); +}; + +class CBasePlayerController : public C_BaseModelEntity +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CBasePlayerController); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint64_t, GetSteamId, "CBasePlayerController->m_steamID"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetTickBase, "CBasePlayerController->m_nTickBase"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CBaseHandle, GetPawnHandle, "CBasePlayerController->m_hPawn"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsLocalPlayerController, "CBasePlayerController->m_bIsLocalPlayerController"); +}; + +// forward decleration +class C_CSWeaponBaseGun; +class C_BasePlayerWeapon; +class CCSPlayerController : public CBasePlayerController +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CCSPlayerController); + + [[nodiscard]] static CCSPlayerController* GetLocalPlayerController(); + + // @note: always get origin from pawn not controller + [[nodiscard]] const Vector_t& GetPawnOrigin(); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetPing, "CCSPlayerController->m_iPing"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(const char*, GetPlayerName, "CCSPlayerController->m_sSanitizedPlayerName"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetPawnHealth, "CCSPlayerController->m_iPawnHealth"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetPawnArmor, "CCSPlayerController->m_iPawnArmor"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsPawnHasDefuser, "CCSPlayerController->m_bPawnHasDefuser"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsPawnHasHelmet, "CCSPlayerController->m_bPawnHasHelmet"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsPawnAlive, "CCSPlayerController->m_bPawnIsAlive"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CBaseHandle, GetPlayerPawnHandle, "CCSPlayerController->m_hPlayerPawn"); +}; + +class CBaseAnimGraph : public C_BaseModelEntity +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CBaseAnimGraph); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsClientRagdoll, "CBaseAnimGraph->m_bClientRagdoll"); +}; + +class C_BaseFlex : public CBaseAnimGraph +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_BaseFlex); + /* not implemented */ +}; + +class C_EconItemView +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_EconItemView); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint16_t, GetItemDefinitionIndex, "C_EconItemView->m_iItemDefinitionIndex"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint64_t, GetItemID, "C_EconItemView->m_iItemID"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetItemIDHigh, "C_EconItemView->m_iItemIDHigh"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetItemIDLow, "C_EconItemView->m_iItemIDLow"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetAccountID, "C_EconItemView->m_iAccountID"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(char[161], GetCustomName, "C_EconItemView->m_szCustomName"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(char[161], GetCustomNameOverride, "C_EconItemView->m_szCustomNameOverride"); +}; + +class CAttributeManager +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CAttributeManager); + virtual ~CAttributeManager() = 0; +}; +static_assert(sizeof(CAttributeManager) == 0x8); + +class C_AttributeContainer : public CAttributeManager +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_AttributeContainer); + + SCHEMA_ADD_PFIELD(C_EconItemView, GetItem, "C_AttributeContainer->m_Item"); +}; + +class C_EconEntity : public C_BaseFlex +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_EconEntity); + + SCHEMA_ADD_PFIELD(C_AttributeContainer, GetAttributeManager, "C_EconEntity->m_AttributeManager"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetOriginalOwnerXuidLow, "C_EconEntity->m_OriginalOwnerXuidLow"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::uint32_t, GetOriginalOwnerXuidHigh, "C_EconEntity->m_OriginalOwnerXuidHigh"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetFallbackPaintKit, "C_EconEntity->m_nFallbackPaintKit"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetFallbackSeed, "C_EconEntity->m_nFallbackSeed"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetFallbackWear, "C_EconEntity->m_flFallbackWear"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetFallbackStatTrak, "C_EconEntity->m_nFallbackStatTrak"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(CBaseHandle, GetViewModelAttachmentHandle, "C_EconEntity->m_hViewmodelAttachment"); +}; + +class C_EconWearable : public C_EconEntity +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_EconWearable); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetForceSkin, "C_EconWearable->m_nForceSkin"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsAlwaysAllow, "C_EconWearable->m_bAlwaysAllow"); +}; + +class C_BasePlayerWeapon : public C_EconEntity +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_BasePlayerWeapon); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(GameTick_t, GetNextPrimaryAttackTick, "C_BasePlayerWeapon->m_nNextPrimaryAttackTick"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetNextPrimaryAttackTickRatio, "C_BasePlayerWeapon->m_flNextPrimaryAttackTickRatio"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(GameTick_t, GetNextSecondaryAttackTick, "C_BasePlayerWeapon->m_nNextSecondaryAttackTick"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetNextSecondaryAttackTickRatio, "C_BasePlayerWeapon->m_flNextSecondaryAttackTickRatio"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetClip1, "C_BasePlayerWeapon->m_iClip1"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetClip2, "C_BasePlayerWeapon->m_iClip2"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t[2], GetReserveAmmo, "C_BasePlayerWeapon->m_pReserveAmmo"); +}; + +class C_CSWeaponBase : public C_BasePlayerWeapon +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_CSWeaponBase); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsInReload, "C_CSWeaponBase->m_bInReload"); + + CCSWeaponBaseVData* GetWeaponVData() + { + return static_cast(GetVData()); + } +}; + +class C_CSWeaponBaseGun : public C_CSWeaponBase +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_CSWeaponBaseGun); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetZoomLevel, "C_CSWeaponBaseGun->m_zoomLevel"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetBurstShotsRemaining, "C_CSWeaponBaseGun->m_iBurstShotsRemaining"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsBurstMode, "C_CSWeaponBase->m_bBurstMode"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetPostponeFireReadyFrac, "C_CSWeaponBase->m_flPostponeFireReadyFrac"); + + [[nodiscard]] bool CanPrimaryAttack(const int nWeaponType, const float flServerTime); + [[nodiscard]] bool CanSecondaryAttack(const int nWeaponType, const float flServerTime); +}; + +class C_BaseCSGrenade : public C_CSWeaponBase +{ +public: + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsHeldByPlayer, "C_BaseCSGrenade->m_bIsHeldByPlayer"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsPinPulled, "C_BaseCSGrenade->m_bPinPulled"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(GameTime_t, GetThrowTime, "C_BaseCSGrenade->m_fThrowTime"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetThrowStrength, "C_BaseCSGrenade->m_flThrowStrength"); +}; + +class C_BaseGrenade : public C_BaseFlex +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(C_BaseGrenade); +}; + +class CSkeletonInstance : public CGameSceneNode +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x1CC); //0x0000 + int nBoneCount; //0x01CC + MEM_PAD(0x18); //0x01D0 + int nMask; //0x01E8 + MEM_PAD(0x4); //0x01EC + Matrix2x4_t* pBoneCache; //0x01F0 +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity_handle.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity_handle.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8f95cb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/entity_handle.h @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +#pragma once + +#include "../common.h" + +#define INVALID_EHANDLE_INDEX 0xFFFFFFFF +#define ENT_ENTRY_MASK 0x7FFF +#define NUM_SERIAL_NUM_SHIFT_BITS 15 +// @source: https://developer.valvesoftware.com/wiki/Entity_limit#Source_2_limits +#define ENT_MAX_NETWORKED_ENTRY 16384 + +class CBaseHandle +{ +public: + CBaseHandle() noexcept : + nIndex(INVALID_EHANDLE_INDEX) { } + + CBaseHandle(const int nEntry, const int nSerial) noexcept + { + CS_ASSERT(nEntry >= 0 && (nEntry & ENT_ENTRY_MASK) == nEntry); + CS_ASSERT(nSerial >= 0 && nSerial < (1 << NUM_SERIAL_NUM_SHIFT_BITS)); + + nIndex = nEntry | (nSerial << NUM_SERIAL_NUM_SHIFT_BITS); + } + + bool operator!=(const CBaseHandle& other) const noexcept + { + return nIndex != other.nIndex; + } + + bool operator==(const CBaseHandle& other) const noexcept + { + return nIndex == other.nIndex; + } + + bool operator<(const CBaseHandle& other) const noexcept + { + return nIndex < other.nIndex; + } + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsValid() const noexcept + { + return nIndex != INVALID_EHANDLE_INDEX; + } + + [[nodiscard]] int GetEntryIndex() const noexcept + { + return static_cast(nIndex & ENT_ENTRY_MASK); + } + + [[nodiscard]] int GetSerialNumber() const noexcept + { + return static_cast(nIndex >> NUM_SERIAL_NUM_SHIFT_BITS); + } + +private: + std::uint32_t nIndex; +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ccsgoinput.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ccsgoinput.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0f2312 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ccsgoinput.h @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: mem_pad +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +// used: cusercmd +#include "../datatypes/usercmd.h" + +#define MULTIPLAYER_BACKUP 150 + +class CTinyMoveStepData +{ +public: + float flWhen; //0x0000 + MEM_PAD(0x4); //0x0004 + std::uint64_t nButton; //0x0008 + bool bPressed; //0x0010 + MEM_PAD(0x7); //0x0011 +}; //Size: 0x0018 + +class CMoveStepButtons +{ +public: + std::uint64_t nKeyboardPressed; //0x0000 + std::uint64_t nMouseWheelheelPressed; //0x0008 + std::uint64_t nUnPressed; //0x0010 + std::uint64_t nKeyboardCopy; //0x0018 +}; //Size: 0x0020 + +// @credits: www.unknowncheats.me/forum/members/2943409.html +class CExtendedMoveData : public CMoveStepButtons +{ +public: + float flForwardMove; //0x0020 + float flSideMove; //0x0024 + float flUpMove; //0x0028 + std::int32_t nMouseDeltaX; //0x002C + std::int32_t nMouseDeltaY; //0x0030 + std::int32_t nAdditionalStepMovesCount; //0x0034 + CTinyMoveStepData tinyMoveStepData[12]; //0x0038 + Vector_t vecViewAngle; //0x0158 + std::int32_t nTargetHandle; //0x0164 +}; //Size:0x0168 + +class CCSGOInput +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x250); + CUserCmd arrCommands[MULTIPLAYER_BACKUP]; + MEM_PAD(0x99) + bool bInThirdPerson; + MEM_PAD(0x6); + QAngle_t angThirdPersonAngles; + MEM_PAD(0xE); + std::int32_t nSequenceNumber; + std::int32_t nOldSequenceNumber; + MEM_PAD(0xA); + CExtendedMoveData currentMoveData; + std::int32_t nWeaponSwitchTick; + MEM_PAD(0x8C); + CExtendedMoveData* pExtendedMoveData; + + CUserCmd* GetUserCmd() + { + return &arrCommands[nSequenceNumber % MULTIPLAYER_BACKUP]; + } + + void SetViewAngle(QAngle_t& angView) + { + // @ida: this got called before GetMatricesForView + using fnSetViewAngle = std::int64_t(CS_FASTCALL*)(void*, std::int32_t, QAngle_t&); + static auto oSetViewAngle = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("85 D2 75 3F 48"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oSetViewAngle != nullptr); + #endif + + oSetViewAngle(this, 0, std::ref(angView)); + } + + QAngle_t GetViewAngles() + { + using fnGetViewAngles = std::int64_t(CS_FASTCALL*)(CCSGOInput*, std::int32_t); + static auto oGetViewAngles = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("4C 8B C1 85 D2 74 08 48 8D 05 ? ? ? ? C3"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oGetViewAngles != nullptr); + #endif + + return *reinterpret_cast(oGetViewAngles(this, 0)); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0b462f --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgameentitysystem.h @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: schema field +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +#include "../entity_handle.h" + +#define MAX_ENTITIES_IN_LIST 512 +#define MAX_ENTITY_LISTS 64 // 0x3F +#define MAX_TOTAL_ENTITIES MAX_ENTITIES_IN_LIST* MAX_ENTITY_LISTS + +class C_BaseEntity; + +class CGameEntitySystem +{ +public: + /// GetClientEntity + template + T* Get(int nIndex) + { + return reinterpret_cast(this->GetEntityByIndex(nIndex)); + } + + /// GetClientEntityFromHandle + template + T* Get(const CBaseHandle hHandle) + { + if (!hHandle.IsValid()) + return nullptr; + + return reinterpret_cast(this->GetEntityByIndex(hHandle.GetEntryIndex())); + } + + int GetHighestEntityIndex() + { + return *reinterpret_cast(reinterpret_cast(this) + 0x1510); + } + +private: + void* GetEntityByIndex(int nIndex) + { + //@ida: #STR: "(missing),", "(missing)", "Ent %3d: %s class %s name %s\n" | or find "cl_showents" cvar -> look for callback + // do { pEntity = GetBaseEntityByIndex(g_pGameEntitySystem, nCurrentIndex); ... } + using fnGetBaseEntity = void*(CS_THISCALL*)(void*, int); + static auto GetBaseEntity = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("81 FA ? ? ? ? 77 ? 8B C2 C1 F8 ? 83 F8 ? 77 ? 48 98 48 8B 4C C1 ? 48 85 C9 74 ? 8B C2 25 ? ? ? ? 48 6B C0 ? 48 03 C8 74 ? 8B 41 ? 25 ? ? ? ? 3B C2 75 ? 48 8B 01"))); + return GetBaseEntity(this, nIndex); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d814723 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +// used: game trace manager +#include "cgametracemanager.h" +// used: c_csplayerpawn +#include "../../sdk/entity.h" + +SurfaceData_t* GameTrace_t::GetSurfaceData() +{ + using fnGetSurfaceData = std::uint64_t(__fastcall*)(void*); + static fnGetSurfaceData oGetSurfaceData = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetAbsoluteAddress(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("E8 ? ? ? ? 48 85 C0 74 ? 44 38 60")), 0x1, 0x0)); + +#ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oGetSurfaceData != nullptr); +#endif + + return reinterpret_cast(oGetSurfaceData(m_pSurface)); +} + +int GameTrace_t::GetHitboxId() +{ + if (m_pHitboxData) + return m_pHitboxData->m_nHitboxId; + return 0; +} + +int GameTrace_t::GetHitgroup() +{ + if (m_pHitboxData) + return m_pHitboxData->m_nHitGroup; + return 0; +} + +bool GameTrace_t::IsVisible() const +{ + return (m_flFraction > 0.97f); +} + +TraceFilter_t::TraceFilter_t(std::uint64_t uMask, C_CSPlayerPawn* pSkip1, C_CSPlayerPawn* pSkip2, int nLayer) +{ + m_uTraceMask = uMask; + m_v1[0] = m_v1[1] = 0; + m_v2 = 7; + m_v3 = nLayer; + m_v4 = 0x49; + m_v5 = 0; + + if (pSkip1 != nullptr) + { + m_arrSkipHandles[0] = pSkip1->GetRefEHandle().GetEntryIndex(); + m_arrSkipHandles[2] = pSkip1->GetOwnerHandleIndex(); + m_arrCollisions[0] = pSkip1->GetCollisionMask(); + } + + if (pSkip2 != nullptr) + { + m_arrSkipHandles[0] = pSkip2->GetRefEHandle().GetEntryIndex(); + m_arrSkipHandles[2] = pSkip2->GetOwnerHandleIndex(); + m_arrCollisions[0] = pSkip2->GetCollisionMask(); + } +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41c253e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/cgametracemanager.h @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +#pragma once +// used: pad and findpattern +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" +// used: vector +#include "../../sdk/datatypes/vector.h" +// used: array +#include + +struct Ray_t +{ +public: + Vector_t m_vecStart; + Vector_t m_vecEnd; + Vector_t m_vecMins; + Vector_t m_vecMaxs; + MEM_PAD(0x4); + std::uint8_t UnkType; +}; +static_assert(sizeof(Ray_t) == 0x38); + +struct SurfaceData_t +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x8) + float m_flPenetrationModifier; + float m_flDamageModifier; + MEM_PAD(0x4) + int m_iMaterial; +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(SurfaceData_t) == 0x18); + +struct TraceHitboxData_t +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x38); + int m_nHitGroup; + MEM_PAD(0x4); + int m_nHitboxId; +}; +static_assert(sizeof(TraceHitboxData_t) == 0x44); + +class C_CSPlayerPawn; +struct GameTrace_t +{ +public: + GameTrace_t() = default; + + SurfaceData_t* GetSurfaceData(); + int GetHitboxId(); + int GetHitgroup(); + bool IsVisible() const; + + void* m_pSurface; + C_CSPlayerPawn* m_pHitEntity; + TraceHitboxData_t* m_pHitboxData; + MEM_PAD(0x38); + std::uint32_t m_uContents; + MEM_PAD(0x24); + Vector_t m_vecStartPos; + Vector_t m_vecEndPos; + Vector_t m_vecNormal; + Vector_t m_vecPosition; + MEM_PAD(0x4); + float m_flFraction; + MEM_PAD(0x6); + bool m_bAllSolid; + MEM_PAD(0x4D) +}; // Size: 0x108 + +static_assert(sizeof(GameTrace_t) == 0x108); + +struct TraceFilter_t +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x8); + std::int64_t m_uTraceMask; + std::array m_v1; + std::array m_arrSkipHandles; + std::array m_arrCollisions; + std::int16_t m_v2; + std::uint8_t m_v3; + std::uint8_t m_v4; + std::uint8_t m_v5; + + TraceFilter_t() = default; + TraceFilter_t(std::uint64_t uMask, C_CSPlayerPawn* pSkip1, C_CSPlayerPawn* pSkip2, int nLayer); +}; +static_assert(sizeof(TraceFilter_t) == 0x40); + +class CGameTraceManager +{ +public: + bool TraceShape(Ray_t* pRay, Vector_t vecStart, Vector_t vecEnd, TraceFilter_t* pFilter, GameTrace_t* pGameTrace) + { + using fnTraceShape = bool(__fastcall*)(CGameTraceManager*, Ray_t*, Vector_t*, Vector_t*, TraceFilter_t*, GameTrace_t*); + static fnTraceShape oTraceShape = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetAbsoluteAddress(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("E8 ? ? ? ? 80 7D ? ? 75 ? F3 0F 10 45")), 0x1, 0x0)); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oTraceShape != nullptr); + #endif + + return oTraceShape(this, pRay, &vecStart, &vecEnd, pFilter, pGameTrace); + } + + bool ClipRayToEntity(Ray_t* pRay, Vector_t vecStart, Vector_t vecEnd, C_CSPlayerPawn* pPawn, TraceFilter_t* pFilter, GameTrace_t* pGameTrace) + { + using fnClipRayToEntity = bool(__fastcall*)(CGameTraceManager*, Ray_t*, Vector_t*, Vector_t*, C_CSPlayerPawn*, TraceFilter_t*, GameTrace_t*); + static fnClipRayToEntity oClipRayToEntity = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(CLIENT_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 08 48 89 6C 24 10 48 89 74 24 18 48 89 7C 24 20 41 54 41 56 41 57 48 81 EC C0 00 00 00 48 8B 9C"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oClipRayToEntity != nullptr); + #endif + + return oClipRayToEntity(this, pRay, &vecStart, &vecEnd, pPawn, pFilter, pGameTrace); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/idebugoverlay.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/idebugoverlay.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..27a0eb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/idebugoverlay.h @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: find pattern, call virtual function +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +// used: vertor_t +#include "../datatypes/vector.h" +// used: color_t +#include "../datatypes/color.h" + +class IDebugOverlayGameSystem +{ +public: + // @todo: reverse this +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..148b780 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iengineclient.h @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: callvfunc +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +enum EClientFrameStage : int +{ + FRAME_UNDEFINED = -1, + FRAME_START, + // a network packet is being received + FRAME_NET_UPDATE_START, + // data has been received and we are going to start calling postdataupdate + FRAME_NET_UPDATE_POSTDATAUPDATE_START, + // data has been received and called postdataupdate on all data recipients + FRAME_NET_UPDATE_POSTDATAUPDATE_END, + // received all packets, we can now do interpolation, prediction, etc + FRAME_NET_UPDATE_END, + // start rendering the scene + FRAME_RENDER_START, + // finished rendering the scene + FRAME_RENDER_END, + FRAME_NET_FULL_FRAME_UPDATE_ON_REMOVE +}; + +class IEngineClient +{ +public: + int GetMaxClients() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } + + bool IsInGame() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } + + bool IsConnected() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } + + // return CBaseHandle index + int GetLocalPlayer() + { + int nIndex = -1; + + MEM::CallVFunc(this, std::ref(nIndex), 0); + + return nIndex + 1; + } + + [[nodiscard]] const char* GetLevelName() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const char* GetLevelNameShort() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } + + [[nodiscard]] const char* GetProductVersionString() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ienginecvar.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ienginecvar.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d508e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ienginecvar.h @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: cutllinkedlist +#include "../datatypes/utllinkedlist.h" +// used: fnv1a hashing +#include "../../utilities/fnv1a.h" + +// used: sdk datatypes +#include "../datatypes/color.h" +#include "../datatypes/vector.h" +#include "../datatypes/qangle.h" + +#pragma region convar_enumerations +// command to convars and concommands +enum EConVarFlag : int +{ + // convar systems + FCVAR_NONE = 0, + FCVAR_UNREGISTERED = (1 << 0), // if this is set, don't add to linked list, etc + FCVAR_DEVELOPMENTONLY = (1 << 1), // hidden in released products. flag is removed automatically if allow_development_cvars is defined + FCVAR_GAMEDLL = (1 << 2), // defined by the game dll + FCVAR_CLIENTDLL = (1 << 3), // defined by the client dll + FCVAR_HIDDEN = (1 << 4), // hidden. doesn't appear in find or autocomplete. like developmentonly, but can't be compiled out + + // convar only + FCVAR_PROTECTED = (1 << 5), // it's a server cvar, but we don't send the data since it's a password, etc. sends 1 if it's not bland/zero, 0 otherwise as value + FCVAR_SPONLY = (1 << 6), // this cvar cannot be changed by clients connected to a multiplayer server + FCVAR_ARCHIVE = (1 << 7), // set to cause it to be saved to vars.rc + FCVAR_NOTIFY = (1 << 8), // notifies players when changed + FCVAR_USERINFO = (1 << 9), // changes the client's info string + FCVAR_CHEAT = (1 << 14), // only useable in singleplayer/debug/multiplayer & sv_cheats + FCVAR_PRINTABLEONLY = (1 << 10), // this cvar's string cannot contain unprintable characters (e.g., used for player name etc) + FCVAR_UNLOGGED = (1 << 11), // if this is a fcvar_server, don't log changes to the log file / console if we are creating a log + FCVAR_NEVER_AS_STRING = (1 << 12), // never try to print that cvar + + // it's a convar that's shared between the client and the server. + // at signon, the values of all such convars are sent from the server to the client (skipped for local client, ofc) + // if a change is requested it must come from the console (i.e., no remote client changes) + // if a value is changed while a server is active, it's replicated to all connected clients + FCVAR_REPLICATED = (1 << 13), // server setting enforced on clients, replicated + // @todo: (1 << 14) used by the game, probably used as modification detection + FCVAR_DEMO = (1 << 16), // record this cvar when starting a demo file + FCVAR_DONTRECORD = (1 << 17), // don't record these command in demofiles + FCVAR_RELOAD_MATERIALS = (1 << 20), // if this cvar changes, it forces a material reload + FCVAR_RELOAD_TEXTURES = (1 << 21), // if this cvar changes, if forces a texture reload + FCVAR_NOT_CONNECTED = (1 << 22), // cvar cannot be changed by a client that is connected to a server + FCVAR_MATERIAL_SYSTEM_THREAD = (1 << 23), // indicates this cvar is read from the material system thread + FCVAR_ARCHIVE_XBOX = (1 << 24), // cvar written to config.cfg on the xbox + FCVAR_ACCESSIBLE_FROM_THREADS = (1 << 25), // used as a debugging tool necessary to check material system thread convars + FCVAR_SERVER_CAN_EXECUTE = (1 << 28), // the server is allowed to execute this command on clients via clientcommand/net_stringcmd/cbaseclientstate::processstringcmd + FCVAR_SERVER_CANNOT_QUERY = (1 << 29), // if this is set, then the server is not allowed to query this cvar's value (via iserverpluginhelpers::startquerycvarvalue) + FCVAR_CLIENTCMD_CAN_EXECUTE = (1 << 30), // ivengineclient::clientcmd is allowed to execute this command + FCVAR_MATERIAL_THREAD_MASK = (FCVAR_RELOAD_MATERIALS | FCVAR_RELOAD_TEXTURES | FCVAR_MATERIAL_SYSTEM_THREAD) +}; + +enum EConVarType : short +{ + EConVarType_Invalid = -1, + EConVarType_Bool, + EConVarType_Int16, + EConVarType_UInt16, + EConVarType_Int32, + EConVarType_UInt32, + EConVarType_Int64, + EConVarType_UInt64, + EConVarType_Float32, + EConVarType_Float64, + EConVarType_String, + EConVarType_Color, + EConVarType_Vector2, + EConVarType_Vector3, + EConVarType_Vector4, + EConVarType_Qangle, + EConVarType_MAX +}; + +#pragma endregion + +union CVValue_t +{ + bool i1; + short i16; + uint16_t u16; + int i32; + uint32_t u32; + int64_t i64; + uint64_t u64; + float fl; + double db; + const char* sz; + Color_t clr; + Vector2D_t vec2; + Vector_t vec3; + Vector4D_t vec4; + QAngle_t ang; +}; + +class CConVar +{ +public: + const char* szName; // 0x0000 + CConVar* m_pNext; // 0x0008 + MEM_PAD(0x10); // 0x0010 + const char* szDescription; // 0x0020 + uint32_t nType; // 0x28 + uint32_t nRegistered; // 0x2C + uint32_t nFlags; // 0x30 + MEM_PAD(0x8); // 0x34 + // @note: read-only, mofify with caution + CVValue_t value; // 0x40 +}; + +class IEngineCVar +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x40); + CUtlLinkedList listConvars; + + CConVar* Find(FNV1A_t uHashedName) + { + for (int i = I::Cvar->listConvars.Head(); i != I::Cvar->listConvars.InvalidIndex(); i = I::Cvar->listConvars.Next(i)) + { + CConVar* pConVar = I::Cvar->listConvars.Element(i); + if (pConVar == nullptr) + continue; + + if (FNV1A::Hash(pConVar->szName) == uHashedName) + return pConVar; + } + + CS_ASSERT(false); // invalid convar name + return nullptr; + } + + void UnlockHiddenCVars() + { + for (int i = I::Cvar->listConvars.Head(); i != I::Cvar->listConvars.InvalidIndex(); i = I::Cvar->listConvars.Next(i)) + { + CConVar* pConVar = I::Cvar->listConvars.Element(i); + if (pConVar == nullptr) + continue; + + if (pConVar->nFlags & FCVAR_HIDDEN) + pConVar->nFlags &= ~FCVAR_HIDDEN; + + if (pConVar->nFlags & FCVAR_DEVELOPMENTONLY) + pConVar->nFlags &= ~FCVAR_DEVELOPMENTONLY; + } + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/igameresourceservice.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/igameresourceservice.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a309464 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/igameresourceservice.h @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: mem_pad +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +class CGameEntitySystem; + +class IGameResourceService +{ +public: + MEM_PAD(0x58); + CGameEntitySystem* pGameEntitySystem; +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iglobalvars.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iglobalvars.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..70591ec --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iglobalvars.h @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: mem_pad +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +class IGlobalVars +{ +public: + float flRealTime; //0x0000 + int32_t nFrameCount; //0x0004 + float flFrameTime; //0x0008 + float flFrameTime2; //0x000C + int32_t nMaxClients; //0x0010 + MEM_PAD(0x1C); + float flFrameTime3; //0x0030 + float flCurrentTime; //0x0034 + float flCurrentTime2; //0x0038 + MEM_PAD(0xC); + int32_t nTickCount; //0x0048 +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iinputsystem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iinputsystem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3bacfe9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iinputsystem.h @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: getexportaddress +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +class IInputSystem +{ +public: + bool IsRelativeMouseMode() + { + // @ida: 'IInputSystem::SetRelativeMouseMode'. + return *reinterpret_cast(reinterpret_cast(this) + 0x4D); + } + + void* GetSDLWindow() + { + // @ida: IInputSystem::DebugSpew -> #STR: "Current coordinate bias %s: %g,%g scale %g,%g\n" + return *reinterpret_cast(reinterpret_cast(this) + 0x26A8); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/imaterialsystem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/imaterialsystem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad95d72 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/imaterialsystem.h @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: call virtual function +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +// used: color_t +#include "../datatypes/color.h" +// used: stronghandle +#include "../datatypes/stronghandle.h" +// used: keyvalue3 +#include "../datatypes/keyvalue3.h" +// used vector4d_t +#include "../datatypes/vector.h" + +// used: cbasehandle +#include "../entity_handle.h" + +class CMaterial2 +{ +public: + virtual const char* GetName() = 0; + virtual const char* GetShareName() = 0; +}; + +// idk +struct MaterialKeyVar_t +{ + std::uint64_t uKey; + const char* szName; + + MaterialKeyVar_t(std::uint64_t uKey, const char* szName) : + uKey(uKey), szName(szName) { } + + MaterialKeyVar_t(const char* szName, bool bShouldFindKey = false) : + szName(szName) + { + uKey = bShouldFindKey ? FindKey(szName) : 0x0; + } + + std::uint64_t FindKey(const char* szName) + { + using fnFindKeyVar = std::uint64_t(CS_FASTCALL*)(const char*, unsigned int, int); + static auto oFindKeyVar = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(PARTICLES_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 ? 57 48 81 EC ? ? ? ? 33 C0 8B DA"))); + +#ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oFindKeyVar != nullptr); +#endif + + // idk those enum flags, just saw it called like that soooo yea + return oFindKeyVar(szName, 0x12, 0x31415926); + } +}; + +class CObjectInfo +{ + MEM_PAD(0xB0); + int nId; +}; + +class CSceneAnimatableObject +{ + MEM_PAD(0xB8); + CBaseHandle hOwner; +}; + +// the naming is incorrect but i dont care atm +class CMeshData +{ +public: + void SetShaderType(const char* szShaderName) + { + // @ida: #STR: shader, spritecard.vfx + using fnSetMaterialShaderType = void(CS_FASTCALL*)(void*, MaterialKeyVar_t, const char*, int); + static auto oSetMaterialShaderType = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(PARTICLES_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 ? 48 89 6C 24 ? 56 57 41 54 41 56 41 57 48 83 EC ? 0F B6 01 45 0F B6 F9 8B 2A 4D 8B E0 4C 8B 72 ? 48 8B F9 C0 E8 ? 24 ? 3C ? 74 ? 41 B0 ? B2 ? E8 ? ? ? ? 0F B6 07 33 DB C0 E8 ? 24 ? 3C ? 75 ? 48 8B 77 ? EB ? 48 8B F3 4C 8D 44 24 ? C7 44 24 ? ? ? ? ? 48 8D 54 24 ? 89 6C 24 ? 48 8B CE 4C 89 74 24 ? E8 ? ? ? ? 8B D0 83 F8 ? 75 ? 45 33 C9 89 6C 24 ? 4C 8D 44 24 ? 4C 89 74 24 ? 48 8B D7 48 8B CE E8 ? ? ? ? 8B D0 0F B6 0F C0 E9 ? 80 E1 ? 80 F9 ? 75 ? 48 8B 4F ? EB ? 48 8B CB 8B 41 ? 85 C0 74 ? 48 8D 59 ? 83 F8 ? 76 ? 48 8B 1B 48 63 C2 4D 85 E4"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oSetMaterialShaderType != nullptr); + #endif + + MaterialKeyVar_t shaderVar(0x162C1777, CS_XOR("shader")); + oSetMaterialShaderType(this, shaderVar, szShaderName, 0x18); + } + + void SetMaterialFunction(const char* szFunctionName, int nValue) + { + using fnSetMaterialFunction = void(__fastcall*)(void*, MaterialKeyVar_t, int, int); + static auto oSetMaterialFunction = reinterpret_cast(MEM::FindPattern(PARTICLES_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 ? 48 89 6C 24 ? 56 57 41 54 41 56 41 57 48 83 EC ? 0F B6 01 45 0F B6 F9 8B 2A 48 8B F9"))); + + #ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(oSetMaterialFunction != nullptr); + #endif + + MaterialKeyVar_t functionVar(szFunctionName, true); + oSetMaterialFunction(this, functionVar, nValue, 0x18); + } + + MEM_PAD(0x18); // 0x0 + CSceneAnimatableObject* pSceneAnimatableObject; // 0x18 + CMaterial2* pMaterial; // 0x20 + MEM_PAD(0x18); // 0x28 + Color_t colValue; // 0x40 + MEM_PAD(0x4); // 0x44 + CObjectInfo* pObjectInfo; // 0x48 +}; + +class IMaterialSystem2 +{ +public: + CMaterial2*** FindOrCreateFromResource(CMaterial2*** pOutMaterial, const char* szMaterialName) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pOutMaterial, szMaterialName); + } + + CMaterial2** CreateMaterial(CMaterial2*** pOutMaterial, const char* szMaterialName, CMeshData* pData) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pOutMaterial, szMaterialName, pData, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1); + } + + void SetCreateDataByMaterial(const void* pData, CMaterial2*** const pInMaterial) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pInMaterial, pData); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/imemalloc.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/imemalloc.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fda04f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/imemalloc.h @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +#pragma once +// used: mem::CallVFunc +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" +#pragma warning(push) +#pragma warning(disable : 4191) + +class IMemAlloc +{ +public: + void* Alloc(std::size_t nSize) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, nSize); + } + + void* ReAlloc(const void* pMemory, std::size_t nSize) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pMemory, nSize); + } + + void Free(const void* pMemory) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pMemory); + } + + std::size_t GetSize(const void* pMemory) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pMemory); + } +}; + +#pragma warning(pop) \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/inetworkclientservice.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/inetworkclientservice.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb84e67 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/inetworkclientservice.h @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +#pragma once +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +class CNetworkGameClient +{ +public: + bool IsConnected() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } + + // force game to clear cache and reset delta tick + void FullUpdate() + { + // @ida: #STR: "Requesting full game update (%s)...\n" + MEM::CallVFunc(this, CS_XOR("unk")); + } + + int GetDeltaTick() + { + // @ida: offset in FullUpdate(); + // (nDeltaTick = -1) == FullUpdate() called + return *reinterpret_cast(reinterpret_cast(this) + 0x25C); + } +}; + +class INetworkClientService +{ +public: + [[nodiscard]] CNetworkGameClient* GetNetworkGameClient() + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ipvs.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ipvs.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f68eb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ipvs.h @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: MEM::CallVFunc +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +class CPVS +{ +public: + void Set(bool bState) + { + MEM::CallVFunc(this, bState); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iresourcesystem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iresourcesystem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2ad2c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iresourcesystem.h @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: callvfunc +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +struct ResourceBinding_t; + +class IResourceSystem +{ +public: + void* QueryInterface(const char* szInterfaceName) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, szInterfaceName); + } +}; + +class CResourceHandleUtils +{ +public: + void DeleteResource(const ResourceBinding_t* pBinding) + { + MEM::CallVFunc(this, pBinding); + } +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ischemasystem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ischemasystem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dc45c71 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/ischemasystem.h @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: utlthash +#include "../datatypes/utlthash.h" +// used: utlvector +#include "../datatypes/utlvector.h" +// used: callvfunc +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +#define SCHEMASYSTEM_TYPE_SCOPES_OFFSET 0x188 +#define SCHEMASYSTEMTYPESCOPE_OFF1 0x3F8 +#define SCHEMASYSTEMTYPESCOPE_OFF2 0x8 + +using SchemaString_t = const char*; +struct SchemaMetadataEntryData_t; + +class CSchemaSystemTypeScope; +class CSchemaType; + +struct CSchemaClassBinding +{ + CSchemaClassBinding* pParent; + const char* szBinaryName; // ex: C_World + const char* szModuleName; // ex: libclient.so + const char* szClassName; // ex: client + void* pClassInfoOldSynthesized; + void* pClassInfo; + void* pThisModuleBindingPointer; + CSchemaType* pSchemaType; +}; + +class CSchemaType +{ +public: + bool GetSizes(int* pOutSize, uint8_t* unkPtr) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pOutSize, unkPtr); + } + +public: + bool GetSize(int* out_size) + { + uint8_t smh = 0; + return GetSizes(out_size, &smh); + } + +public: + void* pVtable; // 0x0000 + const char* szName; // 0x0008 + + CSchemaSystemTypeScope* pSystemTypeScope; // 0x0010 + uint8_t nTypeCategory; // ETypeCategory 0x0018 + uint8_t nAatomicCategory; // EAtomicCategory 0x0019 +}; + +struct SchemaClassFieldData_t +{ + SchemaString_t szName; // 0x0000 + CSchemaType* pSchemaType; // 0x0008 + std::uint32_t nSingleInheritanceOffset; // 0x0010 + std::int32_t nMetadataSize; // 0x0014 + SchemaMetadataEntryData_t* pMetaData; // 0x0018 +}; + +struct SchemaClassInfoData_t; + +struct SchemaBaseClassInfoData_t +{ + int32_t nOffset; + SchemaClassInfoData_t* pClass; +}; + +struct SchemaClassInfoData_t +{ +private: + void* pVtable; // 0x0000 +public: + const char* szName; // 0x0008 + char* szDescription; // 0x0010 + + int m_nSize; // 0x0018 + std::int16_t nFieldSize; // 0x001C + std::int16_t nStaticSize; // 0x001E + std::int16_t nMetadataSize; // 0x0020 + + std::uint8_t nAlignOf; // 0x0022 + std::uint8_t nBaseClassesCount; // 0x0023 + char pad2[0x4]; // 0x0024 + SchemaClassFieldData_t* pFields; // 0x0028 + char pad3[0x8]; // 0x0030 + SchemaBaseClassInfoData_t* pBaseClasses; // 0x0038 + char pad4[0x28]; // 0x0040 + + //public: + //SchemaClassFieldData_t* pFields; // 0x0028 + + bool InheritsFrom(SchemaClassInfoData_t* pClassInfo) + { + if (pClassInfo == this && pClassInfo != nullptr) + return true; + else if (pBaseClasses == nullptr || pClassInfo == nullptr) + return false; + + for (int i = 0; i < nBaseClassesCount; i++) + { + auto& baseClass = pBaseClasses[i]; + if (baseClass.pClass->InheritsFrom(pClassInfo)) + return true; + } + + return false; + } +}; + +struct SchemaEnumeratorInfoData_t +{ + SchemaString_t szName; + + union + { + unsigned char value_char; + unsigned short value_short; + unsigned int value_int; + unsigned long long value; + }; + + MEM_PAD(0x10); // 0x0010 +}; + +class CSchemaEnumInfo +{ +public: + SchemaEnumeratorInfoData_t enumInfoData; +}; + +class CSchemaEnumBinding +{ +public: + virtual const char* GetBindingName() = 0; + virtual CSchemaClassBinding* AsClassBinding() = 0; + virtual CSchemaEnumBinding* AsEnumBinding() = 0; + virtual const char* GetBinaryName() = 0; + virtual const char* GetProjectName() = 0; + +public: + char* szBindingName_; // 0x0008 + char* szDllName_; // 0x0010 + std::int8_t nAlign_; // 0x0018 + MEM_PAD(0x3); // 0x0019 + std::int16_t nSize_; // 0x001C + std::int16_t nFlags_; // 0x001E + SchemaEnumeratorInfoData_t* pEnumInfo_; + MEM_PAD(0x8); // 0x0028 + CSchemaSystemTypeScope* pTypeScope_; // 0x0030 + MEM_PAD(0x8); // 0x0038 + std::int32_t unk1_; // 0x0040 +}; + +class CSchemaSystemTypeScope +{ +public: + void FindDeclaredClass(SchemaClassInfoData_t** pReturnClass, const char* szClassName) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, pReturnClass, szClassName); + } + + CSchemaType* FindSchemaTypeByName(const char* szName, std::uintptr_t* pSchema) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, szName, pSchema); + } + + CSchemaType* FindTypeDeclaredClass(const char* szName) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, szName); + } + + CSchemaType* FindTypeDeclaredEnum(const char* szName) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, szName); + } + + CSchemaClassBinding* FindRawClassBinding(const char* szName) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, szName); + } + + void* pVtable; // 0x0000 + char szName[256U]; // 0x0008 + MEM_PAD(SCHEMASYSTEMTYPESCOPE_OFF1); // 0x0108 + CUtlTSHash hashClasses; // 0x0588 + MEM_PAD(SCHEMASYSTEMTYPESCOPE_OFF2); // 0x05C8 + CUtlTSHash hashEnumes; // 0x2DD0 +}; + +class ISchemaSystem +{ +public: + CSchemaSystemTypeScope* FindTypeScopeForModule(const char* m_module_name) + { + return MEM::CallVFunc(this, m_module_name, nullptr); + } + +private: + MEM_PAD(SCHEMASYSTEM_TYPE_SCOPES_OFFSET); // 0x0000 +public: + // table of type scopes + CUtlVector vecTypeScopes; // SCHEMASYSTEM_TYPE_SCOPES_OFFSET +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iswapchaindx11.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iswapchaindx11.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5dd5ca --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iswapchaindx11.h @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: call virtual function +#include "../../utilities/memory.h" + +// forward declarations +struct IDXGISwapChain; + +class ISwapChainDx11 +{ + MEM_PAD(0x170); + IDXGISwapChain* pDXGISwapChain; +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iviewrender.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iviewrender.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..234fc28 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/interfaces/iviewrender.h @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +#pragma once + +#include "../datatypes/qangle.h" +#include "../datatypes/matrix.h" + +class IViewRender +{ +public: + Vector_t vecOrigin; // 0x0000 + QAngle_t vecAngles; // 0x000C + float flFov; // 0x0018 + char pad_0x001C[0x14]; // 0x001C + ViewMatrix_t matUNK1; // 0x0030 + char pad_0x0070[0x30]; // 0x0070 + ViewMatrix_t matUNK2; // 0x00A0 + char pad_0x00E0[0xC8]; // 0x00E0 + ViewMatrix_t matUNK3; // 0x01A8 + char pad_0x01E8[0x28]; // 0x01E8 +}; \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/vdata.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/vdata.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e8f1865 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/sdk/vdata.h @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: schema field +#include "../core/schema.h" +// used: rop +#include "../utilities/memory.h" + +using CFiringModeFloat = std::float_t[2]; +using CSkillFloat = std::float_t[4]; + +class CBasePlayerVData +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CBasePlayerVData); + + //CResourceNameTyped< CWeakHandle< InfoForResourceTypeCModel > > m_sModelName = 0x28 + //CSkillFloat m_flHeadDamageMultiplier = 0x108 + //CSkillFloat m_flChestDamageMultiplier = 0x118 + //CSkillFloat m_flStomachDamageMultiplier = 0x128 + //CSkillFloat m_flArmDamageMultiplier = 0x138 + //CSkillFloat m_flLegDamageMultiplier = 0x148 + //float32 m_flHoldBreathTime = 0x158 + //float32 m_flDrowningDamageInterval = 0x15C + //int32 m_nDrowningDamageInitial = 0x160 + //int32 m_nDrowningDamageMax = 0x164 + //int32 m_nWaterSpeed = 0x168 + //float32 m_flUseRange = 0x16C + //float32 m_flUseAngleTolerance = 0x170 + //float32 m_flCrouchTime = 0x174 +}; + +class CBasePlayerWeaponVData +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CBasePlayerWeaponVData); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(bool, IsFullAuto, "CBasePlayerWeaponVData->m_bIsFullAuto"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetMaxClip1, "CBasePlayerWeaponVData->m_iMaxClip1"); +}; + +class CCSWeaponBaseVData : public CBasePlayerWeaponVData +{ +public: + CS_CLASS_NO_INITIALIZER(CCSWeaponBaseVData); + + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(std::int32_t, GetWeaponType, "CCSWeaponBaseVData->m_WeaponType"); + SCHEMA_ADD_FIELD(float, GetRange, "CCSWeaponBaseVData->m_flRange"); +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/crt.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/crt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..383baf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/crt.h @@ -0,0 +1,1920 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [stl] string, string_view, wstring, wstring_view +#include +// used: [crt] va_list, va_start, va_end +#include + +#include "../common.h" + +#ifdef CS_COMPILER_MSC +#include +#endif + +// used: algorithm function +#include "math.h" +// used: stb_sprintf +#include "../../dependencies/stb_sprintf.h" + +// add support of syntax highlight to our string formatting methods +#ifdef CS_COMPILER_CLANG +#define CS_CRT_FORMAT_STRING_ATTRIBUTE(METHOD, STRING_INDEX, FIRST_INDEX) __attribute__((format(METHOD, STRING_INDEX, FIRST_INDEX))) +#elif defined(__RESHARPER__) +#define CS_CRT_FORMAT_STRING_ATTRIBUTE(METHOD, STRING_INDEX, FIRST_INDEX) [[rscpp::format(METHOD, STRING_INDEX, FIRST_INDEX)]] +#else +#define CS_CRT_FORMAT_STRING_ATTRIBUTE(METHOD, STRING_INDEX, FIRST_INDEX) +#endif + +// @todo: '__restrict' keyword to hint compiler on those +// @todo: disable msvc debug runtime checks for those + +/* + * C-RUNTIME + * - rebuild of C standard library and partially STL + */ +namespace CRT +{ + /* + * - according to IEEE-754: + * + * 1. binary32 floating point + * +/- exponent (+127) mantissa (fractional part) + * *-------*---*-----------------*-----------------------------------------------* + * | width | 1 | 8 | 23 | + * *-------*---*-----------------*-----------------------------------------------* + * | mask | 0 | 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 | 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 | + * *-------*---*-----------------*-----------------------------------------------* + * ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ + * 31 30 23 22 0 + * + * 2. binary64 floating point + * +/- exponent (+1023) mantissa (fractional part) + * *-------*---*-----------------------*---------------------------------------------------* + * | width | 1 | 11 | 52 | + * *-------*---*-----------------------*---------------------------------------------------* + * | mask | 0 | 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 | 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 ... | + * *-------*---*-----------------------*---------------------------------------------------* + * ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ + * 63 62 52 51 0 + */ + template requires (std::is_floating_point_v) + struct FloatSpecification_t + { + static_assert(std::numeric_limits::is_iec559); + static_assert(sizeof(long double) == 8, "CRT rebuild doesn't support binary128 format"); + + // bit equivalent integer type for given floating point type + using BitEquivalent_t = std::conditional_t || std::is_same_v, std::uint64_t, std::uint32_t>; + + static constexpr std::uint32_t MANTISSA_WIDTH = ((sizeof(T) == sizeof(double)) ? 52U : 23U); + static constexpr std::uint32_t EXPONENT_WIDTH = ((sizeof(T) == sizeof(double)) ? 11U : 8U); + static constexpr std::uint32_t SIGN_WIDTH = 1U; + static constexpr std::uint32_t TOTAL_WIDTH = MANTISSA_WIDTH + EXPONENT_WIDTH + SIGN_WIDTH; + static constexpr std::uint32_t EXPONENT_BIAS = (1U << (EXPONENT_WIDTH - 1U)) - 1U; + + static constexpr BitEquivalent_t MANTISSA_MASK = (BitEquivalent_t(1U) << MANTISSA_WIDTH) - 1U; + static constexpr BitEquivalent_t SIGN_MASK = (BitEquivalent_t(1U) << (EXPONENT_WIDTH + MANTISSA_WIDTH)); + static constexpr BitEquivalent_t EXPONENT_MASK = ~(SIGN_MASK | MANTISSA_MASK); + + static constexpr BitEquivalent_t QUIET_NAN_MASK = (BitEquivalent_t(1U) << (MANTISSA_WIDTH - 1U)); + }; + + /* @section: [internal] constants */ + // largest valid base + constexpr int _NUMBER_MAX_BASE = 36; + // every possible character to represent the number with the largest valid base + constexpr const char* _NUMBER_ALPHA = "0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ"; + // lookup table for fast integer to string conversion in range [00 .. 99] + constexpr char _TWO_DIGITS_LUT[] = + "0001020304050607080910111213141516171819" + "2021222324252627282930313233343536373839" + "4041424344454647484950515253545556575859" + "6061626364656667686970717273747576777879" + "8081828384858687888990919293949596979899"; + // lookup table for fast hex integer to string conversion in range [00 .. FF] + constexpr char _TWO_DIGITS_HEX_LUT[] = + "000102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718191A1B1C1D1E1F" + "202122232425262728292A2B2C2D2E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3F" + "404142434445464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595A5B5C5D5E5F" + "606162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F707172737475767778797A7B7C7D7E7F" + "808182838485868788898A8B8C8D8E8F909192939495969798999A9B9C9D9E9F" + "A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9AAABACADAEAFB0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9BABBBCBDBEBF" + "C0C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9CACBCCCDCECFD0D1D2D3D4D5D6D7D8D9DADBDCDDDEDF" + "E0E1E2E3E4E5E6E7E8E9EAEBECEDEEEFF0F1F2F3F4F5F6F7F8F9FAFBFCFDFEFF"; + + template requires (std::is_integral_v && BASE > 0U && BASE <= _NUMBER_MAX_BASE) + struct IntegerToString_t + { + // maximum count of characters, including terminating null and negative sign where appropriate, needed for integer-to-string conversion + static consteval std::size_t MaxCount() + { + std::size_t nDigitsCount = 0U; + + constexpr std::uint64_t ullNegativeMax = (std::is_unsigned_v ? (std::numeric_limits::max)() : (static_cast((std::numeric_limits::max)()) + 1ULL)); + + for (std::uint64_t nShift = ullNegativeMax; nShift > 0ULL; nShift /= BASE) + nDigitsCount++; + + return (nDigitsCount + (std::is_signed_v && BASE == 10U ? 1U : 0U) + 1U); + } + }; + + /* + * @section: utility + * - methods that provide general-purpose functionality + */ +#pragma region stl_utility + + // indicate that an object may be "moved from", i.e. allowing the efficient transfer of resources to another object, alternative of 'std::move' + template + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE constexpr std::remove_reference_t&& Move(T&& argument) noexcept + { + return static_cast&&>(argument); + } + + // forward an lvalue as either an lvalue or an rvalue, alternative of 'std::forward' + template + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE constexpr T&& Forward(std::remove_reference_t& argument) noexcept + { + return static_cast(argument); + } + + // forward an rvalue as an rvalue, alternative of 'std::forward' + template + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE constexpr T&& Forward(std::remove_reference_t&& argument) noexcept + { + static_assert(!std::is_lvalue_reference_v, "bad forward call"); + return static_cast(argument); + } + + /// swap value of @a'left' to @a'right' and @a'right' to @a'left', alternative of 'std::swap' + template + requires (std::is_move_constructible_v && std::is_move_assignable_v) + CS_INLINE constexpr void Swap(T& left, T& right) noexcept(std::is_nothrow_move_constructible_v&& std::is_nothrow_move_assignable_v) + { + T temporary = Move(left); + left = Move(right); + right = Move(temporary); + } + +#pragma endregion + + /* @section: memory */ +#pragma region crt_memory + + /// compare bytes in two buffers, alternative of 'memcmp()' + /// @remarks: compares the first count bytes of @a'pFirstBuffer' and @a'pRightBuffer' and return a value that indicates their relationship, performs unsigned character comparison + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'pFirstBuffer' less than @a'pRightBuffer', 0 - if @a'pFirstBuffer' identical to @a'pRightBuffer', >0 - if @a'pFirstBuffer' greater than @a'pRightBuffer' + CS_INLINE int MemoryCompare(const void* pLeftBuffer, const void* pRightBuffer, std::size_t nCount) + { + auto pLeftByte = static_cast(pLeftBuffer); + auto pRightByte = static_cast(pRightBuffer); + + while (nCount--) + { + if (*pLeftByte++ != *pRightByte++) + return pLeftByte[-1] - pRightByte[-1]; + } + + return 0; + } + + /// compare bytes in two buffers, alternative of 'wmemcmp()' + /// @remarks: compares the first count characters of @a'pwLeftBuffer' and @a'pwRightBuffer' and return a value that indicates their relationship, performs signed character comparison + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'pwLeftBuffer' less than @a'pwRightBuffer', 0 - if @a'pwLeftBuffer' identical to @a'pwRightBuffer', >0 - if @a'pwLeftBuffer' greater than @a'pwRightBuffer' + CS_INLINE int MemoryCompareW(const wchar_t* pwLeftBuffer, const wchar_t* pwRightBuffer, std::size_t nCount) + { + while (nCount--) + { + if (*pwLeftBuffer++ != *pwRightBuffer++) + return pwLeftBuffer[-1] - pwRightBuffer[-1]; + } + + return 0; + } + + /// find character in a buffer, alternative of 'memchr()' + /// @remarks: look for the first occurrence of @a'uSearch' character in the first @a'nCount' characters of buffer, performs unsigned comparison for elements + /// @returns: pointer to the found character on success, null otherwise + CS_INLINE void* MemoryChar(const void* pBuffer, const std::uint8_t uSearch, std::size_t nCount) + { + auto pByte = static_cast(pBuffer); + + while (nCount--) + { + if (*pByte == uSearch) + return const_cast(pByte); + + ++pByte; + } + + return nullptr; + } + + /// find wide character in a buffer, alternative of 'wmemchr()' + /// @remarks: look for the first occurrence of @a'wSearch' character in the first @a'nCount' wide characters of buffer, performs signed comparison for elements + /// @returns: pointer to the found wide character on success, null otherwise + CS_INLINE wchar_t* MemoryCharW(wchar_t* pwBuffer, const wchar_t wSearch, std::size_t nCount) + { + while (nCount--) + { + if (*pwBuffer == wSearch) + return pwBuffer; + + ++pwBuffer; + } + + return nullptr; + } + + /// set a buffer to a specified byte, alternative of 'memset()' + /// @remarks: sets the first @a'nCount' bytes of @a'pDestination' to the @a'uByte' + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'pDestination' + CS_INLINE void* MemorySet(void* pDestination, const std::uint8_t uByte, std::size_t nCount) + { +#ifdef CS_COMPILER_MSC + // @test: clang always tries to detect 'memset' like instructions and replace them with CRT's function call + if (const std::size_t nCountAlign = (nCount & 3U); nCountAlign == 0U) + { + auto pDestinationLong = static_cast(pDestination); + __stosd(pDestinationLong, static_cast(uByte) * 0x01010101, nCount >> 2U); + } + else if (nCountAlign == 2U) + { + auto pDestinationWord = static_cast(pDestination); + __stosw(pDestinationWord, static_cast(uByte | (uByte << 8U)), nCount >> 1U); + } + else + { + auto pDestinationByte = static_cast(pDestination); + __stosb(pDestinationByte, uByte, nCount); + } +#else + auto pDestinationByte = static_cast(pDestination); + + while (nCount--) + *pDestinationByte++ = uByte; +#endif + + return pDestination; + } + + /// copy one buffer to another, alternative of 'memcpy()' + /// @remarks: copies @a'nCount' bytes from @a'pSource' to @a'pDestination'. if the source and destination regions overlap, the behavior is undefined + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'pDestination' + CS_INLINE void* MemoryCopy(void* pDestination, const void* pSource, std::size_t nCount) + { +#ifdef CS_COMPILER_MSC + // @test: clang always tries to detect 'memcpy' like instructions and replace them with CRT's function call + if (const std::size_t nCountAlign = (nCount & 3U); nCountAlign == 0U) + { + auto pDestinationLong = static_cast(pDestination); + auto pSourceLong = static_cast(pSource); + __movsd(pDestinationLong, pSourceLong, nCount >> 2U); + } + else if (nCountAlign == 2U) + { + auto pDestinationWord = static_cast(pDestination); + auto pSourceWord = static_cast(pSource); + __movsw(pDestinationWord, pSourceWord, nCount >> 1U); + } + else + { + auto pDestinationByte = static_cast(pDestination); + auto pSourceByte = static_cast(pSource); + __movsb(pDestinationByte, pSourceByte, nCount); + } +#else + auto pDestinationByte = static_cast(pDestination); + auto pSourceByte = static_cast(pSource); + + while (nCount--) + *pDestinationByte++ = *pSourceByte++; +#endif + + return pDestination; + } + + /// move one buffer to another, alternative of 'memmove()' + /// @remarks: copies @a'nCount' bytes from @a'pSource' to @a'pDestination'. if some portions of the source and the destination regions overlap, both functions ensure that the original source bytes in the overlapping region are copied before being overwritten + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'pDestination' + CS_INLINE void* MemoryMove(void* pDestination, const void* pSource, std::size_t nCount) + { + auto pDestinationByte = static_cast(pDestination); + auto pSourceByte = static_cast(pSource); + + // perform copy when source greater than destination + if (pDestinationByte < pSourceByte) + { +#ifdef CS_COMPILER_MSC + // @todo: also check for available align for given nCount + __movsb(pDestinationByte, pSourceByte, nCount); +#else + while (nCount--) + *pDestinationByte++ = *pSourceByte++; +#endif + } + // inverse copy otherwise + else + { + std::uint8_t* pLastDestinationByte = pDestinationByte + (nCount - 1U); + const std::uint8_t* pLastSourceByte = pSourceByte + (nCount - 1U); + + while (nCount--) + *pLastDestinationByte-- = *pLastSourceByte--; + } + + return pDestination; + } + +#pragma endregion + + /* + * @section: character + * - valid only for default C locale + */ +#pragma region crt_characters + + /// alternative of 'iscntrl()', @todo: 'iswcntrl()' + /// @returns: true if given character is a control character, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsControl(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return (uChar <= 0x1F || uChar == 0x7F); + } + + /// alternative of 'isdigit()', @todo: 'iswdigit()' + /// @returns: true if given character is decimal digit, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsDigit(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return (uChar >= '0' && uChar <= '9'); + } + + /// alternative of 'isxdigit()', @todo: 'iswxdigit()' + /// @returns: true if given character is hexadecimal digit, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsHexDigit(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return ((uChar >= '0' && uChar <= '9') || (uChar >= 'A' && uChar <= 'F') || (uChar >= 'a' && uChar <= 'f')); + } + + /// alternative of 'isblank()', @todo: 'iswblank()' + /// @returns: true if given character is blank, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsBlank(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return (uChar == '\t' || uChar == ' '); + } + + /// alternative of 'isspace()', @todo: 'iswspace()' + /// @returns: true if given character is whitespace, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsSpace(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return ((uChar >= '\t' && uChar <= '\r') || uChar == ' '); + } + + /// alternative of 'isalpha()', @todo: 'iswalpha()' + /// @returns: true if given character is alphabetic, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsAlpha(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return ((uChar >= 'A' && uChar <= 'Z') || (uChar >= 'a' && uChar <= 'z')); + } + + /// alternative of 'isalnum()', @todo: 'iswalnum()' + /// @returns: true if given character is alphabetic or numeric, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsAlphaNum(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return ((uChar >= '0' && uChar <= '9') || (uChar >= 'A' && uChar <= 'Z') || (uChar >= 'a' && uChar <= 'z')); + } + + /// alternative of 'isprint()', @todo: 'iswprint()' + /// @returns: true if given character is printable, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsPrint(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return (uChar >= ' ' && uChar <= '~'); + } + + /// alternative of 'isgraph()', @todo: 'iswgraph()' + /// @returns: true if given character is graphic (has a graphical representation), false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsGraph(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return (uChar >= '!' && uChar <= '~'); + } + + /// alternative of 'ispunct()', @todo: 'iswpunct()' + /// @returns: true if given character is a punctuation character, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsPunct(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return ((uChar >= '!' && uChar <= '/') || (uChar >= ':' && uChar <= '@') || (uChar >= '[' && uChar <= '`') || (uChar >= '{' && uChar <= '~')); + } + + /// alternative of 'isupper()', @todo: 'iswupper()' + /// @returns: true if given alphabetic character is uppercase, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsUpper(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return (uChar >= 'A' && uChar <= 'Z'); + } + + /// alternative of 'islower()', @todo: 'iswlower()' + /// @returns: true if given alphabetic character is lowercase, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr bool IsLower(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return (uChar >= 'a' && uChar <= 'z'); + } + +#pragma endregion + + /* @section: character conversion */ +#pragma region crt_character_conversion + + /// convert single digit character to integer + /// @returns: converted value if character is digit, 0 otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr std::int32_t CharToInt(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return IsDigit(uChar) ? (uChar - '0') : 0; + } + + /// convert single hex digit character to integer + /// @returns: converted value if character is hex digit, 0 otherwise + [[nodiscard]] constexpr std::uint32_t CharToHexInt(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + const std::uint8_t uCharLower = (uChar | ('a' ^ 'A')); + return ((uCharLower >= 'a' && uCharLower <= 'f') ? (uCharLower - 'a' + 0xA) : (IsDigit(uChar) ? (uChar - '0') : 0x0)); + } + + // convert single character to uppercase, alternative of 'toupper()', @todo: 'towupper()' + [[nodiscard]] constexpr char CharToUpper(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return static_cast(IsLower(uChar) ? (uChar & ~('a' ^ 'A')) : uChar); + } + + // convert single character to lowercase, alternative of 'tolower()', @todo: 'towlower()' + [[nodiscard]] constexpr char CharToLower(const std::uint8_t uChar) + { + return static_cast(IsUpper(uChar) ? (uChar | ('a' ^ 'A')) : uChar); + } + +#pragma endregion + + /* + * @section: string + * - @note: return value of some methods correspond to the POSIX standard but not C standard, it was necessary to reduce time complexity of them + * - valid only for default C locale + */ +#pragma region crt_string + + /// get the length of a string, alternative of 'strlen()', 'wcslen()' + /// @returns: number of characters in the string, not including the terminating null character + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr std::size_t StringLength(const C* tszSource) + { + const C* tszSourceEnd = tszSource; + + while (*tszSourceEnd != C('\0')) + ++tszSourceEnd; + + return tszSourceEnd - tszSource; + } + + /// get the length of a string limited by max length, alternative of 'strnlen()', 'wcsnlen()' + /// @returns: number of characters in the string, not including the terminating null character. if there is no null terminator within the first @a'nMaxLength' bytes of the string, then @a'nMaxLength' is returned to indicate the error condition + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr std::size_t StringLengthN(const C* tszSource, const std::size_t nMaxLength) + { + std::size_t i = 0U; + + while (tszSource[i] != C('\0') && i < nMaxLength) + ++i; + + return i; + } + + /// compare two strings, alternative of 'strcmp()', 'wcscmp()' + /// @remarks: performs a signed/unsigned character comparison depending on the string type + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'tszLeft' less than @a'tszRight', 0 - if @a'tszLeft' is identical to @a'tszRight', >0 - if @a'tszLeft' greater than @a'tszRight' + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr int StringCompare(const C* tszLeft, const C* tszRight) + { + if (tszLeft == nullptr) + return -1; + + if (tszRight == nullptr) + return 1; + + using ComparisonType_t = std::conditional_t, std::uint8_t, std::conditional_t>; + + ComparisonType_t nLeft, nRight; + do + { + nLeft = static_cast(*tszLeft++); + nRight = static_cast(*tszRight++); + + if (nLeft == C('\0')) + break; + } while (nLeft == nRight); + + return nLeft - nRight; + } + + /// case-insensitive compare two strings, alternative of 'stricmp()', @todo: 'wcsicmp()' + /// @remarks: performs unsigned character comparison + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'szLeft' less than @a'szRight', 0 - if @a'szLeft' is identical to @a'szRight', >0 - if @a'szLeft' greater than @a'szRight' + constexpr int StringCompareI(const char* szLeft, const char* szRight) + { + std::uint8_t uLeft, uRight; + do + { + uLeft = static_cast(CharToLower(static_cast(*szLeft++))); + uRight = static_cast(CharToLower(static_cast(*szRight++))); + + if (uLeft == '\0') + break; + } while (uLeft == uRight); + + return uLeft - uRight; + } + + /// compare two strings up to the specified count of characters, alternative of 'strncmp()', 'wcsncmp()' + /// @remarks: performs a signed/unsigned character comparison depending on the string type + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'tszLeft' less than @a'tszRight', 0 - if 'tszLeft' is identical to @a'tszRight', >0 - if @a'tszLeft' greater than @a'tszRight' + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr int StringCompareN(const C* tszLeft, const C* tszRight, std::size_t nCount) + { + using ComparisonType_t = std::conditional_t, std::uint8_t, std::conditional_t>; + + ComparisonType_t nLeft, nRight; + while (nCount--) + { + nLeft = static_cast(*tszLeft++); + nRight = static_cast(*tszRight++); + + if (nLeft != nRight) + return nLeft - nRight; + + if (nLeft == C('\0')) + break; + } + + return 0; + } + + /// find a character in a string, alternative of 'strchr()', 'wcschr()' + /// @remarks: the null terminating character is included in the search, performs signed character comparison + /// @returns: pointer to the first found occurrence of @a'iSearch' character in @a'tszSource' on success, null otherwise + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr C* StringChar(const C* tszSource, const int iSearch) + { + while (*tszSource != C('\0')) + { + if (*tszSource == iSearch) + return const_cast(tszSource); + + ++tszSource; + } + + return nullptr; + } + + /// find a last occurrence of character in a string, alternative of 'strrchr()', 'wcsrchr()' + /// @remarks: the null terminating character is included in the search, performs signed character comparison + /// @returns: pointer to the last found occurrence of @a'iSearch' character in @a'tszSource' on success, null otherwise + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr C* StringCharR(const C* tszSource, const int iSearch) + { + C* tszLastOccurrence = nullptr; + + do + { + if (*tszSource == iSearch) + tszLastOccurrence = const_cast(tszSource); + } while (*tszSource++ != C('\0')); + + return tszLastOccurrence; + } + + /// search for one string inside another, alternative of 'strstr()', 'wcsstr()' + /// @remarks: finds the first occurrence of @a'tszSearch' in @a'tszSource'. the search does not include terminating null character, performs signed character comparison + /// @returns: pointer to the first found occurrence of @a'tszSearch' substring in @a'tszSource' on success, null otherwise + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr C* StringString(const C* tszSource, const C* tszSearch) + { + while (*tszSource != C('\0')) + { + while (*tszSearch != C('\0') && (*tszSource - *tszSearch) == C('\0')) + { + ++tszSource; + ++tszSearch; + } + + if (*tszSearch == C('\0')) + return const_cast(tszSource); + + ++tszSource; + } + + return nullptr; + } + + /// case-insensitive search for one string inside another, alternative of 'strcasestr()' + /// @remarks: finds the first occurrence of @a'szSearch' in @a'szSource'. the search does not include terminating null character, performs unsigned character comparison + /// @returns: pointer to the first found occurrence of @a'szSearch' substring in @a'szSource' on success, null otherwise + constexpr char* StringStringI(const char* szSource, const char* szSearch) + { + while (*szSource != '\0') + { + while (*szSearch != '\0' && CharToLower(static_cast(*szSource)) == CharToLower(static_cast(*szSearch))) + { + ++szSource; + ++szSearch; + } + + if (*szSearch == '\0') + return const_cast(szSource); + + ++szSource; + } + + return nullptr; + } + + /// copy a one string to another, alternative of 'stpcpy()', 'wcpcpy()' + /// @remarks: copies @a'szSource', including the terminating null character, to the location that's specified by @a'szDestination'. the behavior is undefined if the source and destination strings overlap + /// @returns: pointer to the terminating null in @a'tszDestination' + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr C* StringCopy(C* tszDestination, const C* tszSource) + { + while (*tszSource != C('\0')) + *tszDestination++ = *tszSource++; + + *tszDestination = C('\0'); + return tszDestination; + } + + /// copy a one string to another up to the specified count of characters, alternative of 'stpncpy()', 'wcpncpy()' + /// @remarks: copies the initial @a'nCount' characters of @a'tszSource' to @a'tszDestination'. if count is less than or equal to the length of @a'tszSource', a null character is not appended automatically to the copied string. if @a'nCount' is greater than the length of @a'tszSource', the destination string is padded with null characters up to length count. the behavior is undefined if the source and destination strings overlap + /// @returns: pointer to @a'tszDestination' + @a'nCount' + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr C* StringCopyN(C* tszDestination, const C* tszSource, std::size_t nCount) + { + while (nCount--) + *tszDestination++ = (*tszSource != C('\0') ? *tszSource++ : C('\0')); + + return tszDestination; + } + + /// append a one string to another, alternative of 'stpcat()', 'wcpcat()' + /// @remarks: appends @a'tszSource' to @a'tszDestination' and terminates the resulting string with a null character. the initial character of @a'tszSource' overwrites the terminating null character of @a'tszDestination'. the behavior is undefined if the source and destination strings overlap + /// @returns: pointer to the terminating null in @a'tszDestination' + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr C* StringCat(C* tszDestination, const C* tszSource) + { + while (*tszDestination != C('\0')) + ++tszDestination; + + while (*tszSource != C('\0')) + *tszDestination++ = *tszSource++; + + *tszDestination = C('\0'); + return tszDestination; + } + + /// append a one string to another up to the specified count of characters, alternative of 'stpncat()', 'wcpncat()' + /// @remarks: appends, at most, the first @a'nCount' characters of @a'tszSource' to @a'tszDestination'. the initial character of @a'tszSource' overwrites the terminating null character of @a'tszDestination'. if a null character appears in @a'tszSource' before @a'nCount' characters are appended, function appends all characters from @a'tszSource', up to the null character. if count is greater than the length of @a'tszSource', the length of @a'tszSource' is used in place of count. in all cases, the resulting string is terminated with a null character. if copying takes place between strings that overlap, the behavior is undefined + /// @returns: pointer to the terminating null in @a'tszDestination' + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + constexpr C* StringCatN(C* tszDestination, const C* tszSource, std::size_t nCount) + { + while (*tszDestination != C('\0')) + ++tszDestination; + + while (*tszSource != C('\0') && nCount--) + *tszDestination++ = *tszSource++; + + *tszDestination = C('\0'); + return tszDestination; + } + +#pragma endregion + + /* + * @section: string conversion + * - these methods can write past the end of a buffer that is too small. + * to prevent buffer overruns, ensure that buffer is large enough to hold the converted data and the trailing null-character. + * misuse of these methods can cause serious security issues in your code + * - valid only for default C locale + */ +#pragma region crt_string_conversion + + /// convert every char in the string to uppercase + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'szDestination' + constexpr char* StringToUpper(char* szDestination) + { + char* szDestinationOut = szDestination; + + while (*szDestinationOut++ != '\0') + *szDestinationOut = CharToUpper(static_cast(*szDestinationOut)); + + return szDestination; + } + + /// convert every char in the string to lowercase + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'szDestination' + constexpr char* StringToLower(char* szDestination) + { + char* szDestinationOut = szDestination; + + while (*szDestinationOut++ != '\0') + *szDestinationOut = CharToLower(static_cast(*szDestinationOut)); + + return szDestination; + } + + // @todo: rework sprintf like, with specific format right here + /// convert the integer to a string, alternative of 'to_string', '_itoa_s', '_ltoa_s', '_ultoa_s', '_i64toa_s', '_ui64toa_s' + /// @param[in] iBase numeric base to use to represent number in range [2 .. 36] + /// @returns: pointer to the begin of converted integer in the buffer + template requires std::is_integral_v + char* IntegerToString(const T value, char* szDestination, const std::size_t nDestinationLength, int iBase = 10) + { + if (iBase < 0 || iBase == 1 || iBase > _NUMBER_MAX_BASE) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // given number base is out of range + return szDestination; + } + + const bool bIsPositive = (value >= 0); + std::make_unsigned_t uValue = (bIsPositive ? static_cast>(value) : static_cast>(0 - value)); // @test: how it actually compiles, can avoid branch at compile time + + char* szDestinationEnd = szDestination + nDestinationLength; + *--szDestinationEnd = '\0'; + + if (uValue == 0U) + *--szDestinationEnd = '0'; + // for decimal base perform fast path write by two digits in a group + else if (iBase == 10) + { + while (uValue >= 100U) + { + const char* szTwoDigits = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(uValue % 100U) * 2U]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[1]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[0]; + uValue /= 100U; + } + + if (uValue < 10U) + *--szDestinationEnd = _NUMBER_ALPHA[uValue]; + else + { + const char* szTwoDigits = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[uValue * 2U]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[1]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[0]; + } + + // insert negative sign, only decimal base can have it + if (!bIsPositive) + *--szDestinationEnd = '-'; + } + // for hexadecimal base perform fast path write by two digits in a group + else if (iBase == 16) + { + while (uValue >= 0x100) + { + const char* szTwoDigits = &_TWO_DIGITS_HEX_LUT[(uValue % 0x100) * 2U]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[1]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[0]; + uValue /= 0x100; + } + + if (uValue < 0x10) + *--szDestinationEnd = _NUMBER_ALPHA[uValue]; + else + { + const char* szTwoDigits = &_TWO_DIGITS_HEX_LUT[uValue * 2U]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[1]; + *--szDestinationEnd = szTwoDigits[0]; + } + } + // for other bases perform write by single digit + else + { + while (uValue > 0U) + { + *--szDestinationEnd = _NUMBER_ALPHA[uValue % iBase]; + uValue /= iBase; + } + } + + return szDestinationEnd; + } + + // @todo: rework sprintf like, with specific format right here + /// convert the floating point to a string, alternative of 'to_string' + /// @returns: + template requires std::is_floating_point_v + char* FloatToString(const T value, char* szDestination, const std::size_t nDestinationSize, int iPrecision = std::numeric_limits::digits10) + { + // @todo: because i dont have time so yeah, would rebuild it some time + StringPrintN(szDestination, nDestinationSize, "%.*f", iPrecision, value); + return szDestination; + } + + /** + * convert the time point to a string, alternative of 'strftime', 'wcsftime' + * @param[in] tszFormat string specifying the format of conversion. formatting codes are: + * - '%a' abbreviated weekday name + * - '%A' full weekday name + * - '%b' abbreviated month name + * - '%B' full month name + * - '%c' date and time representation appropriate for locale + * - '%C' century as a decimal number [0 .. 99] + * - '%d' day of month as a decimal number [01 .. 31] + * - '%D' equivalent to "%m/%d/%y" + * - '%e' day of month as a decimal number [1 .. 31], where single digits are preceded by a space + * - '%F' equivalent to "%Y-%m-%d" + * - '%g' week-based year without century as a decimal number, the ISO 8601 time format [00 .. 99] + * - '%G' week-based year as a decimal number, the ISO 8601 time format [0000 .. 9999] + * - '%h' Abbreviated month name(equivalent to % b) + * - '%H' hour in 24-hour format [00 .. 23] + * - '%I' hour in 12-hour format [01 .. 12] + * - '%j' day of the year as a decimal number [001 .. 366] + * - '%m' month as a decimal number [01 .. 12] + * - '%M' minute as a decimal number [00 .. 59] + * - '%n' new line character escape + * - '%p' the locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock + * - '%r' the locale's 12-hour clock time + * - '%R' equivalent to "%H:%M" + * - '%S' second as decimal number [00 .. 59] + * - '%t' tab character escape + * - '%T' equivalent to "%H:%M:%S", the ISO 8601 time format + * - '%u' weekday as a decimal number, the ISO 8601 time format [1 .. 7] + * - '%U' week number of the year as a decimal number, where the first Sunday is the first day of week 1 [00 .. 53] + * - '%V' week number as a decimal number, the ISO 8601 time format [00 .. 53] + * - '%w' weekday as a decimal number [0 .. 6] + * - '%W' week number of the year as a decimal number, where the first Monday is the first day of week 1 [00 .. 53] + * - '%x' date representation for the locale + * - '%X' time representation for the locale + * - '%y' year without century, as decimal number [00 .. 99] + * - '%Y' year with century, as decimal number [1900 .. 9999] + * - '%z' the offset from UTC, the ISO 8601 format + * - '%Z' either the locale's time-zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings + * - '%%' percent character escape + * @returns: the number of characters placed in @a'szDestination' not including the terminating null, if the total number of characters, including the terminating null, is more than @a'nDestinationSize', returns 0 and the contents of @a'szDestination' are indeterminate + **/ + template requires (std::is_same_v || std::is_same_v) + std::size_t TimeToString(C* tszDestination, const std::size_t nDestinationSize, const C* tszFormat, const std::tm* pTime) + { + // full names of weekdays + constexpr const char* arrWeekdayNames[7] = { "Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday", "Wednesday", "Thursday", "Friday", "Saturday" }; + // full names of months + constexpr const char* arrMonthNames[12] = { "January", "February", "March", "April", "May", "June", "July", "August", "September", "October", "November", "December" }; + + C* tszDestinationOut = tszDestination; + C* tszFormatCurrent = nullptr; + + // try to find format token, at same time copy everything until it + while (*tszFormat != C('\0') && nDestinationSize > 0U) + { + if (*tszFormat == C('%')) + { + tszFormatCurrent = const_cast(tszFormat); + break; + } + + *tszDestinationOut++ = *tszFormat++; + } + + std::size_t nWroteCount = tszDestinationOut - tszDestination; + + // check do we have nothing to format + if (tszFormatCurrent == nullptr) + return tszDestinationOut - tszDestination; + + while (*tszFormatCurrent != C('\0') && nWroteCount < nDestinationSize) + { + // check is format token begin + if (*tszFormatCurrent == C('%')) + { + ++tszFormatCurrent; + + // we are don't support any locale and other modifiers + if (*tszFormatCurrent == C('#') || *tszFormatCurrent == C('0') || *tszFormatCurrent == C('E')) + ++tszFormatCurrent; + + const C* tszDestinationBefore = tszDestinationOut; + + /* + * handle format token + * @test: C standard and POSIX are very unclear and don't explicitly specify the behaviour when time components are negative + */ + switch (*tszFormatCurrent) + { + case C('a'): + { + const char* szWeekdayName = arrWeekdayNames[pTime->tm_wday]; + + std::size_t i = 3U; + while (i-- > 0U) + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(szWeekdayName[i]); + + break; + } + case C('A'): + { + const char* szWeekdayName = arrWeekdayNames[pTime->tm_wday]; + + while (*szWeekdayName != C('\0')) + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szWeekdayName++); + + break; + } + case C('b'): + case C('h'): // equivalent to "%b" + { + const char* szMonthName = arrMonthNames[pTime->tm_mon]; + + std::size_t i = 3U; + while (i-- > 0U) + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(szMonthName[i]); + + break; + } + case C('B'): + { + const char* szMonthName = arrMonthNames[pTime->tm_mon]; + + while (*szMonthName != C('\0')) + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMonthName++); + + break; + } + case C('c'): + { + // default locale equivalent to "%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Y" + + // @todo: is it possible to avoid these ugly branches and make string type dependent on template + if constexpr (std::is_same_v) + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), L"%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Y", pTime); + else + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), "%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Y", pTime); + + break; + } + case C('C'): + { + const int iYear = pTime->tm_year + 1900; + const int iCentury = iYear / 100; + + if (iYear >= -99 && iYear < 0) + { + *tszDestinationOut++ = C('-'); + *tszDestinationOut++ = C('0'); + } + else if (iCentury >= 0 && iCentury < 100) + { + const char* szCenturyNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[static_cast(iCentury) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szCenturyNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szCenturyNumber); + } + else + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(iCentury % 10U + '0'); + + break; + } + case C('d'): + { + const char* szMonthDayNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[static_cast(pTime->tm_mday) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMonthDayNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMonthDayNumber); + break; + } + case C('D'): + [[fallthrough]]; + case C('x'): + { + // default locale equivalent to "%m/%d/%y" + + if constexpr (std::is_same_v) + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), L"%m/%d/%y", pTime); + else + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), "%m/%d/%y", pTime); + + break; + } + case C('e'): + { + unsigned int uMonthDay = pTime->tm_mday; + + const char* szMonthDayNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[uMonthDay * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(uMonthDay < 10U ? ' ' : *szMonthDayNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMonthDayNumber); + break; + } + case C('F'): + { + // equivalent to "%Y-%m-%d" + + if constexpr (std::is_same_v) + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), L"%Y-%m-%d", pTime); + else + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), "%Y-%m-%d", pTime); + + break; + } + case C('g'): + [[fallthrough]]; + case C('G'): + [[fallthrough]]; + case C('V'): + { + unsigned int uYear = pTime->tm_year + 1900U; + int iDays = (pTime->tm_yday - (pTime->tm_yday - pTime->tm_wday + 382) % 7 + 3); + + if (iDays < 0) + { + uYear -= 1U; + + const int iPreviousYearEndDay = pTime->tm_yday + (365 + ((uYear & 3U) == 0U && (uYear % 100U != 0U || uYear % 400U == 0U))); + iDays = (iPreviousYearEndDay - (iPreviousYearEndDay - pTime->tm_wday + 382) % 7 + 3); + } + else + { + const int iCurrentYearEndDay = pTime->tm_yday - (365 + ((uYear & 3U) == 0U && (uYear % 100U != 0U || uYear % 400U == 0U))); + const int iNextDays = (iCurrentYearEndDay - (iCurrentYearEndDay - pTime->tm_wday + 382) % 7 + 3); + + if (iNextDays >= 0) + { + uYear += 1U; + iDays = iNextDays; + } + } + + switch (*tszFormatCurrent) + { + case C('G'): + { + const char* szCenturyNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(uYear / 100U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szCenturyNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szCenturyNumber); + [[fallthrough]]; + } + case C('g'): + { + const char* szYearNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(uYear % 100U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearNumber); + break; + } + default: + { + const char* szWeekNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(iDays / 7U + 1U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szWeekNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szWeekNumber); + break; + } + } + + break; + } + case C('H'): + { + const char* szHourNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[static_cast(pTime->tm_hour) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szHourNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szHourNumber); + break; + } + case C('I'): + { + unsigned int uHourFormat = pTime->tm_hour % 12U; + uHourFormat = ((uHourFormat == 0U) ? 12U : uHourFormat); + + const char* szHourNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[uHourFormat * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szHourNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szHourNumber); + break; + } + case C('j'): + { + unsigned int uYearDay = pTime->tm_yday + 1U; + + const char* szYearDayNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[uYearDay * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast((uYearDay / 100U) % 10U + '0'); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearDayNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearDayNumber); + break; + } + case C('m'): + { + const char* szMonthNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(pTime->tm_mon + 1U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMonthNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMonthNumber); + break; + } + case C('M'): + { + const char* szMinuteNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[static_cast(pTime->tm_min) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMinuteNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMinuteNumber); + break; + } + case C('n'): + { + *tszDestinationOut++ = C('\n'); + break; + } + case C('p'): + { + *tszDestinationOut++ = ((pTime->tm_hour < 12) ? C('A') : C('P')); + *tszDestinationOut++ = C('M'); + break; + } + case C('r'): + { + // default locale equivalent to "%I:%M:%S %p" + + if constexpr (std::is_same_v) + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), L"%I:%M:%S %p", pTime); + else + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), "%I:%M:%S %p", pTime); + + break; + } + case C('R'): + { + const char* szHourNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[static_cast(pTime->tm_hour) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szHourNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szHourNumber); + + const char* szMinuteNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[static_cast(pTime->tm_min) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMinuteNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szMinuteNumber); + break; + } + case C('S'): + { + const char* szSecondNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[static_cast(pTime->tm_sec) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szSecondNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szSecondNumber); + break; + } + case C('t'): + { + *tszDestinationOut++ = C('\t'); + break; + } + case C('T'): + [[fallthrough]]; + case C('X'): + { + // default locale equivalent to "%H:%M:%S" + + if constexpr (std::is_same_v) + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), L"%H:%M:%S", pTime); + else + tszDestinationOut += TimeToString(tszDestinationOut, nDestinationSize - (tszDestinationOut - tszDestination), "%H:%M:%S", pTime); + + break; + } + case C('u'): + { + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(((pTime->tm_wday + 6U) % 7U + 1U) + '0'); + break; + } + case C('U'): + { + const char* szWeekNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[((pTime->tm_yday - pTime->tm_wday + 7U) / 7U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szWeekNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szWeekNumber); + break; + } + case C('w'): + { + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(pTime->tm_wday + '0'); + break; + } + case C('W'): + { + const char* szWeekNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(((pTime->tm_yday - pTime->tm_wday - 6U) % 7U + 7U) / 7U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szWeekNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szWeekNumber); + break; + } + case C('y'): + { + const char* szYearNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[((pTime->tm_year + 1900U) % 100U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearNumber); + break; + } + case C('Y'): + { + unsigned int uYear = pTime->tm_year + 1900U; + + const char* szCenturyNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(uYear / 100U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szCenturyNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szCenturyNumber); + + const char* szYearNumber = &_TWO_DIGITS_LUT[(uYear % 100U) * 2U]; + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearNumber++); + *tszDestinationOut++ = static_cast(*szYearNumber); + break; + } + case C('z'): + // @todo: + break; + case C('Z'): + { + // @todo: + //if constexpr (requires { pTime->tm_zone; }) + //{ + // + //} + //else + //{ + // + //} + break; + } + case C('%'): // percent escape + { + *tszDestinationOut++ = *tszFormatCurrent; + break; + } + default: + CS_ASSERT(false); // unknown token! + break; + } + + // accumulate written characters count per token + nWroteCount += tszDestinationOut - tszDestinationBefore; + + ++tszFormatCurrent; + continue; + } + + *tszDestinationOut++ = *tszFormatCurrent++; + ++nWroteCount; + } + + // check is limit was reached before the entire string could be stored + if (nWroteCount > nDestinationSize) + return 0U; + + *tszDestinationOut = C('\0'); + return nWroteCount; + } + + /// convert the string to an integer, @todo: no wide yet alternative of 'atoi()', '_wtoi()', '_atoi64()', '_wtoi64()', 'atol()', '_wtol()', 'atoll()', '_wtoll()', 'strtol()', 'wcstol()', '_strtoi64()', '_wcstoi64()', 'strtoul()', 'wcstoul()', 'strtoull()', 'wcstoull()' + /// @todo: remarks about behaviour + /// @param[in] iBase number of digits used to represent number. 0 to automatically determine number base in range [2 .. 16] or value in range [2 .. 36] + /// @returns: integer converted from string + template requires (std::is_integral_v) + constexpr T StringToInteger(const char* szSourceBegin, char** pszSourceEnd = nullptr, int iBase = 0) + { + if (iBase < 0 || iBase == 1 || iBase > _NUMBER_MAX_BASE) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // given number base is out of range + return 0; + } + + const char* szSourceCurrent = szSourceBegin; + + // skip to first not whitespace + while (IsSpace(*szSourceCurrent)) + ++szSourceCurrent; + + // determine the sign and strip it + const bool bIsPositive = ((*szSourceCurrent == '+' || *szSourceCurrent == '-') ? (*szSourceCurrent++ == '+') : true); + constexpr bool bIsUnsigned = ((std::numeric_limits::min)() == 0U); + + // user provided exact number base + if (iBase > 0) + { + // strip 0x or 0X + if (iBase == 16 && *szSourceCurrent == '0' && (szSourceCurrent[1] | ('a' ^ 'A')) == 'x') + szSourceCurrent += 2; + } + // otherwise try to determine base automatically + else if (*szSourceCurrent == '0') + { + if (((*szSourceCurrent++) | ('a' ^ 'A')) == 'x') + { + // a hexadecimal number is defined as "the prefix 0x or 0X followed by a sequence of the decimal digits and the letters a (or A) through f (or F) with values 10 through 15 respectively" (C standard 6.4.4.1) + iBase = 16; + ++szSourceCurrent; + } + else + // an octal number is defined as "the prefix 0 optionally followed by a sequence of the digits 0 through 7 only" (C standard 6.4.4.1) and so any number that starts with 0, including just 0, is an octal number + iBase = 8; + } + else + // a decimal number is defined as beginning "with a nonzero digit and consisting of a sequence of decimal digits" (C standard 6.4.4.1) + iBase = 10; + + constexpr std::uint64_t ullNegativeMax = (bIsUnsigned ? (std::numeric_limits::max)() : (static_cast((std::numeric_limits::max)()) + 1ULL)); + const std::uint64_t ullAbsoluteMax = (bIsPositive ? (std::numeric_limits::max)() : ullNegativeMax); + const std::uint64_t ullAbsoluteMaxOfBase = ullAbsoluteMax / iBase; + + bool bIsNumber = false; + std::uint64_t ullResult = 0ULL; + + for (bool bIsDigit = false, bIsAlpha = false; ((bIsDigit = IsDigit(*szSourceCurrent))) || ((bIsAlpha = IsAlpha(*szSourceCurrent)));) // @note: looks slightly unsafe but have possibility to fast path, double parenthesis to suppress warnings + { + int iCurrentDigit = 0; + + if (bIsDigit) + iCurrentDigit = *szSourceCurrent - '0'; + else if (bIsAlpha) + iCurrentDigit = (*szSourceCurrent | ('a' ^ 'A')) - 'a' + 0xA; + + if (iCurrentDigit >= iBase) + break; + + bIsNumber = true; + ++szSourceCurrent; + + // if the number has already hit the maximum value for the current type then the result cannot change, but we still need to advance source to the end of the number + if (ullResult == ullAbsoluteMax) + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // numeric overflow + continue; + } + + if (ullResult <= ullAbsoluteMaxOfBase) + ullResult *= iBase; + else + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // numeric overflow + ullResult = ullAbsoluteMax; + } + + if (ullResult <= ullAbsoluteMax - iCurrentDigit) + ullResult += iCurrentDigit; + else + { + CS_ASSERT(false); // numeric overflow + ullResult = ullAbsoluteMax; + } + } + + if (pszSourceEnd != nullptr) + *pszSourceEnd = const_cast(bIsNumber ? szSourceCurrent : szSourceBegin); + + // clamp on overflow + if (ullResult == ullAbsoluteMax) + return ((bIsPositive || bIsUnsigned) ? (std::numeric_limits::max)() : (std::numeric_limits::min)()); + + return (bIsPositive ? static_cast(ullResult) : -static_cast(ullResult)); + } + +#pragma endregion + + /* + * @section: string encode/decode + * - valid only for default C locale + */ +#pragma region crt_string_encode_decode + + /// convert UTF-X multibyte string to a corresponding UTF-32 character, process single character input, alternative of 'mbtowc()' + /// @credits: github.com/skeeto/branchless-utf8 + /// @remarks: handles decoding error by skipping forward + /// @returns: the length in bytes of the converted character + template + std::ptrdiff_t CharMultiByteToUTF32(const C* tszBegin, const C* tszEnd, std::uint32_t* puOutChar) + { + // index from the high 5 bits of the first byte in a sequence to the length of the sequence. imperative that 0 == invalid + constexpr std::uint8_t arrSequenceLength[32] = { + 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, // [ 0 .. 15] [00000 .. 01111] + 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, // [16 .. 23] [10000 .. 10111] - 10XXX is only legal as prefixes for continuation bytes + 2, 2, 2, 2, // [24 .. 27] [11000 .. 11011] + 3, 3, // [28 .. 29] [11100 .. 11101] + 4, 0 // [30 .. 31] [11110 .. 11111] + }; + + constexpr std::uint8_t arrMask[] = { 0x00, 0x7F, 0x1F, 0x0F, 0x07 }; + constexpr std::uint32_t arrStartCodePoint[] = { 0x400000, 0, 0x80, 0x800, 0x10000 }; + constexpr std::uint8_t arrCharShift[] = { 0, 18, 12, 6, 0 }; + constexpr std::uint8_t arrErrorShift[] = { 0, 6, 4, 2, 0 }; + + const std::uint8_t nNextLength = arrSequenceLength[*reinterpret_cast(tszBegin) >> 3U]; + std::ptrdiff_t nLength = nNextLength + !nNextLength; + + unsigned char uString[4] = {}; + const std::ptrdiff_t nSourceLength = tszEnd - tszBegin; + + // copy at most 'nLength' bytes, stop copying at 0 or past end iterator. branch predictor does a good job here, so it is fast even with excessive branching + uString[0] = nSourceLength > 0 ? tszBegin[0] : 0; + uString[1] = nSourceLength > 1 ? tszBegin[1] : 0; + uString[2] = nSourceLength > 2 ? tszBegin[2] : 0; + uString[3] = nSourceLength > 3 ? tszBegin[3] : 0; + + // assume a four-byte character and load four bytes. unused bits are shifted out + *puOutChar = static_cast(uString[0] & arrMask[nNextLength]) << 18U; + *puOutChar |= static_cast(uString[1] & 0x3F) << 12U; + *puOutChar |= static_cast(uString[2] & 0x3F) << 6U; + *puOutChar |= static_cast(uString[3] & 0x3F); + *puOutChar >>= arrCharShift[nNextLength]; + + // accumulate the various error conditions + unsigned int uError = (*puOutChar < arrStartCodePoint[nNextLength]) << 6U; // non-canonical encoding + uError |= ((*puOutChar >> 11U) == 0x1B) << 7U; // surrogate half? + uError |= (*puOutChar > 0x10FFFF) << 8U; // out of range? + uError |= (uString[1] & 0xC0) >> 2U; + uError |= (uString[2] & 0xC0) >> 4U; + uError |= (uString[3]) >> 6U; + uError ^= 0x2A; // top two bits of each tail byte correct? + uError >>= arrErrorShift[nNextLength]; + + if (uError > 0U) + { + /* + * no bytes are consumed when string empty + * one byte is consumed in case of invalid first byte of begin + * all available bytes (at most 'nLength' bytes) are consumed on incomplete/invalid second to last bytes + * invalid or incomplete input may consume less bytes than wanted, therefore every byte has to be inspected in 'uString' + */ + nLength = MATH::Min(nLength, static_cast(!!uString[0] + !!uString[1] + !!uString[2] + !!uString[3])); + *puOutChar = 0xFFFD; + } + + return nLength; + } + + /// convert UTF-32 character to a corresponding multibyte UTF-8 string, process single character input, alternative of 'wctomb()' + /// @credits: github.com/nothings/stb + /// @remarks: locale-independent + /// @returns: the length in bytes of the UTF-32 character. if UTF-32 character is invalid it returns 0 + inline std::ptrdiff_t CharMultiByteFromUTF32(char* szOutBuffer, const std::size_t nOutBufferSize, const std::uint32_t uChar) + { + // utf-8 + if (uChar < 0x80) + { + szOutBuffer[0] = static_cast(uChar); + return 1; + } + // utf-16 + if (uChar < 0x800 && nOutBufferSize >= 2U) + { + szOutBuffer[0] = static_cast(0xC0 + (uChar >> 6U)); + szOutBuffer[1] = static_cast(0x80 + (uChar & 0x3F)); + return 2; + } + // utf-16 + if (uChar < 0x10000 && nOutBufferSize >= 3U) + { + szOutBuffer[0] = static_cast(0xE0 + (uChar >> 12U)); + szOutBuffer[1] = static_cast(0x80 + ((uChar >> 6U) & 0x3F)); + szOutBuffer[2] = static_cast(0x80 + (uChar & 0x3F)); + return 3; + } + // utf-32 + if (uChar <= 0x10FFFF && nOutBufferSize >= 4U) + { + szOutBuffer[0] = static_cast(0xF0 + (uChar >> 18U)); + szOutBuffer[1] = static_cast(0x80 + ((uChar >> 12U) & 0x3F)); + szOutBuffer[2] = static_cast(0x80 + ((uChar >> 6U) & 0x3F)); + szOutBuffer[3] = static_cast(0x80 + (uChar & 0x3F)); + return 4; + } + + // invalid code point + return 0; + } + + /// alternative of '_mbslen()' + /// @returns: UTF-8 characters count of UTF-16/UTF-32 string + template + int StringLengthMultiByte(const C* tszBegin, const C* tszEnd = nullptr) + { + int nOctetCount = 0; + + // go through each character until terminating null up to end if given + while (*tszBegin != C('\0') && (tszEnd == nullptr || tszBegin < tszEnd)) + { + if (const std::uint32_t uChar = static_cast(*tszBegin++); uChar < 0x80) + nOctetCount += 1; + else if (uChar < 0x800) + nOctetCount += 2; + else if (uChar < 0x10000) + nOctetCount += 3; + else if (uChar <= 0x7FFFFFFF) + nOctetCount += 4; + } + + return nOctetCount; + } + + /// @returns: valid unicode characters count of UTF-X string + template + int StringLengthUnicode(const C* tszBegin, const C* tszEnd) + { + int nCharCount = 0; + + std::uint32_t uChar = 0U; + while (*tszBegin != C('\0') && tszBegin < tszEnd) + { + tszBegin += CharMultiByteToUTF32(tszBegin, tszEnd, &uChar); + + if (uChar == 0U) + break; + + ++nCharCount; + } + + return nCharCount; + } + + /// convert UTF-8 string to UTF-X string, alternative of 'MultiByteToWideChar()', 'mbstowcs()' + /// @remarks: locale-independent + /// @todo: param desc + /// @returns: length of converted UTF-X string + CS_INLINE std::ptrdiff_t StringMultiByteToUnicode(wchar_t* szOutBuffer, const std::size_t nOutBufferLength, const char* szBegin, const char* szEnd) + { + wchar_t* pBufferBegin = szOutBuffer; + const wchar_t* pBufferEnd = szOutBuffer + nOutBufferLength; + + std::uint32_t uChar = 0U; + while (pBufferBegin < pBufferEnd - 1 && szBegin < szEnd && *szBegin != '\0') + { + szBegin += CharMultiByteToUTF32(szBegin, szEnd, &uChar); + + if (uChar == 0U) + break; + + *pBufferBegin++ = static_cast(uChar); + } + + *pBufferBegin = 0U; + return pBufferBegin - szOutBuffer; + } + + /// convert unicode string to UTF-8 string, alternative of 'WideToMultiByteChar()', 'wcstombs()' + /// @remarks: locale-independent + /// @todo: param desc + /// @returns: length of converted multibyte UTF-8 string + CS_INLINE std::ptrdiff_t StringUnicodeToMultiByte(char* szOutBuffer, const std::size_t nOutBufferLength, const wchar_t* wszBegin, const wchar_t* wszEnd = nullptr) + { + char* pBufferBegin = szOutBuffer; + const char* pBufferEnd = szOutBuffer + nOutBufferLength; + + while (pBufferBegin < pBufferEnd - 1 && (wszEnd == nullptr || wszBegin < wszEnd) && *wszBegin != L'\0') + pBufferBegin += CharMultiByteFromUTF32(pBufferBegin, pBufferEnd - pBufferBegin - 1, *wszBegin++); + + *pBufferBegin = '\0'; + return pBufferBegin - szOutBuffer; + } + + /// @remarks: locale-independent + /// @returns: unicode string (UTF-16 on Windows and UTF-32 on POSIX) converted from UTF-X + CS_INLINE std::wstring StringMultiByteToUnicode(const std::string_view strMultiByte) + { + const std::size_t nLength = StringLengthUnicode(strMultiByte.data(), strMultiByte.data() + strMultiByte.size()) + 1U; + std::wstring wstrUnicodeOut(nLength, L'\0'); + + StringMultiByteToUnicode(wstrUnicodeOut.data(), nLength, strMultiByte.data(), strMultiByte.data() + strMultiByte.size()); + return wstrUnicodeOut; + } + + /// @remarks: locale-independent + /// @returns: UTF-8 string converted from UTF-X + CS_INLINE std::string StringUnicodeToMultiByte(const std::wstring_view wstrUnicode) + { + const std::size_t nLength = StringLengthMultiByte(wstrUnicode.data(), wstrUnicode.data() + wstrUnicode.size()) + 1U; + std::string strMultiByteOut(nLength, '\0'); + + StringUnicodeToMultiByte(strMultiByteOut.data(), nLength, wstrUnicode.data(), wstrUnicode.data() + wstrUnicode.size()); + return strMultiByteOut; + } + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region string_format + + /// write formatted data to a string, alternative of 'sprintf' + /// @returns: the number of characters written to the formatted data string, not including the terminating null character. a return value of -1 indicates that an encoding error has occurred + inline CS_CRT_FORMAT_STRING_ATTRIBUTE(printf, 2, 3) int StringPrint(char* szBuffer, const char* const szFormat, ...) + { + va_list args; + va_start(args, szFormat); + + const int iReturn = stbsp_vsprintf(szBuffer, szFormat, args); + + va_end(args); + + return iReturn; + } + + /// write formatted data to a string up to the specified count of characters, alternative of 'snprintf' + /// @remarks: format and store @a'nCount' or fewer characters in @a'szBuffer'. always store a terminating null character, truncating the output if necessary. if copying occurs between strings that overlap, the behavior is undefined + /// @returns: if the buffer size specified by @a'nCount' isn't sufficiently large to contain the output specified by @a'szFormat', the return value is the number of characters that would be written, not including the terminating null character, if @a'nCount' were sufficiently large. if the return value is greater than @a'nCount' - 1, the output has been truncated. a return value of -1 indicates that an encoding error has occurred + CS_INLINE CS_CRT_FORMAT_STRING_ATTRIBUTE(printf, 3, 4) int StringPrintN(char* szBuffer, std::size_t nCount, const char* const szFormat, ...) + { + va_list args; + va_start(args, szFormat); + + const int iReturn = stbsp_vsnprintf(szBuffer, static_cast(nCount), szFormat, args); + + va_end(args); + + if (iReturn >= static_cast(nCount)) + return iReturn; + + return iReturn; + } + +#pragma endregion + + // wrapper of crt_string + template + struct String_t + { + String_t() + { + // empty string + szBuffer[0] = '\0'; + } + + String_t(const char* szStr) + { + StringCopy(this->szBuffer, szStr); + } + + String_t(const char* szFormat, ...) + { + va_list args; + va_start(args, szFormat); + + [[maybe_unused]] const int iReturn = stbsp_vsnprintf(this->szBuffer, static_cast(sizeof(this->szBuffer)), szFormat, args); + + va_end(args); + } + + String_t(const char* tszFormat, const std::tm* pTime) + { + TimeToString(this->szBuffer, sizeof(this->szBuffer), tszFormat, pTime); + } + + String_t(const wchar_t* wszStr) + { + FromMultiByte(wszStr); + } + + // no allocated memory so no need to deallocate + ~String_t() = default; + + const char* Format(const char* szFormat, ...) + { + va_list args; + va_start(args, szFormat); + + [[maybe_unused]] const int iReturn = stbsp_vsnprintf(this->szBuffer, static_cast(sizeof(this->szBuffer)), szFormat, args); + + va_end(args); + + return this->Data(); + } + + /// @returns: length of string + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Length() const + { + return StringLength(this->szBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: length of string + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Length() + { + return StringLength(this->szBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: size of data + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Size() const + { + return CS_ARRAYSIZE(this->szBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: size of data + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Size() + { + return CS_ARRAYSIZE(this->szBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: true if buffer is empty, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] const bool IsEmpty() const + { + return szBuffer[0] == '\0'; + } + + /// @returns: c-type string type + [[nodiscard]] const char* Data() const + { + return this->szBuffer; + } + + /// @returns: c-type string type + [[nodiscard]] const char* Data() + { + return this->szBuffer; + } + + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'Data()' less than @a'szRight', 0 - if @a'szSearch' is identical to @a'szSearch', >0 - if @a'szSearch' greater than @a'szSearch' + [[nodiscard]] const int Compare(const char* szData, bool bCaseSensitive = false) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + + return bCaseSensitive ? StringCompareI(this->Data(), szData) : StringCompare(this->Data(), szData); + } + + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'Data()' less than @a'szSearch', 0 - if @a'szSearch' is identical to @a'szSearch', >0 - if @a'szSearch' greater than @a'szSearch' + [[nodiscard]] const int CompareN(const char* szSearch) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + + return StringCompareN(this->Data(), szSearch, this->Size()); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the first found occurrence of @a'szSearch' substring in @a'Data()' on success, null otherwise + [[nodiscard]] const char* Find(const char* szSearch, bool bCaseSensitive = false) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + + return bCaseSensitive ? StringStringI(this->Data(), szSearch) : StringString(this->Data(), szSearch); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the terminating null in @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* Append(const char* szData) const + { + return StringCat(this->szBuffer, szData); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the terminating null in @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* AppendN(const char* szData) const + { + return StringCatN(this->szBuffer, szData, this->Size()); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* ToUpper() const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + return StringToUpper(this->szBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* ToLower() const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + return StringToLower(this->szBuffer); + } + + /// [UNSAFE] /// + /// @returns: converted buffer into multibyte + /// @note: delete the buffer after using, else in return we will have a memory leak + [[nodiscard]] const wchar_t* ToMultiByte() const + { + wchar_t* szOutBuffer = new wchar_t[this->Length() + 1U]; + StringMultiByteToUnicode(szOutBuffer, this->Length() + 1U, this->szBuffer, this->szBuffer + this->Length() + 1U); + + return szOutBuffer; + } + + /// converted from multibyte data + void FromMultiByte(const wchar_t* wszData) + { + StringUnicodeToMultiByte(this->szBuffer, this->Length(), wszData, wszData + this->Length()); + } + + void Clear() noexcept + { + MemorySet(szBuffer, 0U, sizeof(szBuffer)); + } + + char szBuffer[SIZE]; + }; + + // wrapper for wchar_t string + template + struct WString_t + { + WString_t() + { + // empty string + wszBuffer[0] = L'\0'; + } + + WString_t(const wchar_t* wszStr) + { + StringCopy(this->wszBuffer, wszStr); + } + + WString_t(const char* szStr) + { + FromUnicode(szStr); + } + + /// @returns: length of string + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Length() const + { + return StringLengthMultiByte(this->wszBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: length of string + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Length() + { + return StringLengthMultiByte(this->wszBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: size of data + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Size() const + { + return CS_ARRAYSIZE(this->wszBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: size of data + [[nodiscard]] const std::size_t Size() + { + return CS_ARRAYSIZE(this->wszBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: true if buffer is empty, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] const bool IsEmpty() const + { + return wszBuffer[0] == '\0'; + } + + /// @returns: c-type string type + [[nodiscard]] const wchar_t* Data() const + { + return this->wszBuffer; + } + + /// @returns: c-type string type + [[nodiscard]] const wchar_t* Data() + { + return this->wszBuffer; + } + + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'Data()' less than @a'szRight', 0 - if @a'szSearch' is identical to @a'szSearch', >0 - if @a'szSearch' greater than @a'szSearch' + [[nodiscard]] const int Compare(const wchar_t* szData, bool bCaseSensitive = false) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + + return bCaseSensitive ? StringCompareI(this->Data(), szData) : StringCompare(this->Data(), szData); + } + + /// @returns: <0 - if @a'Data()' less than @a'szSearch', 0 - if @a'szSearch' is identical to @a'szSearch', >0 - if @a'szSearch' greater than @a'szSearch' + [[nodiscard]] const int CompareN(const wchar_t* szSearch) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + + return StringCompareN(this->Data(), szSearch, this->Size()); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the first found occurrence of @a'szSearch' substring in @a'Data()' on success, null otherwise + [[nodiscard]] const char* Find(const wchar_t* szSearch, bool bCaseSensitive = false) const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + + return bCaseSensitive ? StringStringI(this->Data(), szSearch) : StringString(this->Data(), szSearch); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the terminating null in @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* Append(const wchar_t* szData) const + { + return StringCat(this->wszBuffer, szData); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the terminating null in @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* AppendN(const wchar_t* szData) const + { + return StringCatN(this->wszBuffer, szData, this->Size()); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* ToUpper() const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + return StringToUpper(this->wszBuffer); + } + + /// @returns: pointer to the @a'szBuffer' + [[nodiscard]] const char* ToLower() const + { + CS_ASSERT(IsEmpty()); // failed because of empty string + return StringToLower(this->wszBuffer); + } + + /// [UNSAFE] /// + /// @returns: converted buffer into multibyte + /// @note: delete the buffer after using, else in return we will have a memory leak + const char* ToUnicode() + { + char* szOutBuffer = new char[this->Length() + 1U]; + StringUnicodeToMultiByte(szOutBuffer, this->Length() + 1U, this->wszBuffer, this->wszBuffer + this->Length() + 1U); + + return szOutBuffer; + } + + /// conveted from multibyte data + void FromUnicode(const char* szStr) + { + StringMultiByteToUnicode(this->wszBuffer, this->Length(), szStr, szStr + this->Length()); + } + + wchar_t wszBuffer[SIZE]; + }; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/detourhook.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/detourhook.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d02763c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/detourhook.h @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [ext] minhook +// @credits: https://github.com/TsudaKageyu/minhook +#include "../../dependencies/minhook/minhook.h" + +// used: l_print +#include "log.h" + +template +class CBaseHookObject +{ +public: + /// setup hook and replace function + /// @returns: true if hook has been successfully created, false otherwise + bool Create(void* pFunction, void* pDetour) + { + if (pFunction == nullptr || pDetour == nullptr) + return false; + + pBaseFn = pFunction; + pReplaceFn = pDetour; + + if (const MH_STATUS status = MH_CreateHook(pBaseFn, pReplaceFn, &pOriginalFn); status != MH_OK) + { +#ifdef _DEBUG + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to create hook, status: \"") << MH_StatusToString(status) << CS_XOR("\" with base address: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX) << reinterpret_cast(pBaseFn); +#else + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to create hook"); +#endif + + CS_ASSERT(false); + return false; + } + + if (!Replace()) + return false; + + return true; + } + + /// patch memory to jump to our function instead of original + /// @returns: true if hook has been successfully applied, false otherwise + bool Replace() + { + // check is hook has been created + if (pBaseFn == nullptr) + return false; + + // check that function isn't already hooked + if (bIsHooked) + return false; + + if (const MH_STATUS status = MH_EnableHook(pBaseFn); status != MH_OK) + { +#ifdef _DEBUG + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to enable hook, status: \"") << MH_StatusToString(status) << CS_XOR("\" with base address: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX) << reinterpret_cast(pBaseFn); +#else + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to enable hook"); +#endif + + CS_ASSERT(false); + return false; + } + + // switch hook state + bIsHooked = true; + return true; + } + + /// restore original function call and cleanup hook data + /// @returns: true if hook has been successfully removed, false otherwise + bool Remove() + { + // restore it at first + if (!Restore()) + return false; + + if (const MH_STATUS status = MH_RemoveHook(pBaseFn); status != MH_OK) + { +#ifdef _DEBUG + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to remove hook, status: \"") << MH_StatusToString(status) << CS_XOR("\" with base address: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX) << reinterpret_cast(pBaseFn); +#else + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to remove hook"); +#endif + + CS_ASSERT(false); + return false; + } + + return true; + } + + /// restore patched memory to original function call + /// @returns: true if hook has been successfully restored, false otherwise + bool Restore() + { + // check that function is hooked + if (!bIsHooked) + return false; + + if (const MH_STATUS status = MH_DisableHook(pBaseFn); status != MH_OK) + { +#ifdef _DEBUG + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to restore hook, status: \"") << MH_StatusToString(status) << CS_XOR("\" with base address: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX) << reinterpret_cast(pBaseFn); +#else + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to restore hook"); +#endif + + CS_ASSERT(false); + return false; + } + + // switch hook state + bIsHooked = false; + return true; + } + + /// @returns: original, unwrapped function that would be called without the hook + CS_INLINE T GetOriginal() + { + return reinterpret_cast(pOriginalFn); + } + + /// @returns: true if hook is applied at the time, false otherwise + CS_INLINE bool IsHooked() const + { + return bIsHooked; + } + +private: + // current hook state + bool bIsHooked = false; + // function base handle + void* pBaseFn = nullptr; + // function that being replace the original call + void* pReplaceFn = nullptr; + // original function + void* pOriginalFn = nullptr; +}; diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/draw.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/draw.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e43aa9f --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/draw.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,830 @@ +#include "draw.h" + +// used: cheat variables +#include "../core/variables.h" +// used: viewmatrix +#include "../core/sdk.h" + +// used: m_deg2rad +#include "math.h" +// used: memoryset +#include "crt.h" +// used: easing +#include "easing.h" +// used: ipt +#include "inputsystem.h" + +// used: [ext] imgui +#include "../../dependencies/imgui/imgui_freetype.h" +#include "../../dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.h" +#include "../../dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.h" + +// used: [resouces] font awesome +#include "../../resources/fa_solid_900.h" +#include "../../resources/font_awesome_5.h" + +// used: iinputsystem +#include "../core/interfaces.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iinputsystem.h" +// used: bMainWindowOpened +#include "../core/menu.h" + +// used: hkIsRelativeMouseMode.GetOriginal(); +#include "../core/hooks.h" + +#pragma region imgui_extended +static constexpr const char* arrKeyNames[] = { + "", + "mouse 1", "mouse 2", "cancel", "mouse 3", "mouse 4", "mouse 5", "", + "backspace", "tab", "", "", "clear", "enter", "", "", + "shift", "control", "alt", "pause", "caps", "", "", "", "", "", "", + "escape", "", "", "", "", "space", "page up", "page down", + "end", "home", "left", "up", "right", "down", "", "", "", + "print", "insert", "delete", "", + "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", + "", "", "", "", "", "", "", + "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f", "g", "h", "i", "j", "k", + "l", "m", "n", "o", "p", "q", "r", "s", "t", "u", + "v", "w", "x", "y", "z", "lwin", "rwin", "", "", "", + "num0", "num1", "num2", "num3", "num4", "num5", + "num6", "num7", "num8", "num9", + "*", "+", "", "-", ".", "/", + "f1", "f2", "f3", "f4", "f5", "f6", "f7", "f8", + "f9", "f10", "f11", "f12", "f13", "f14", "f15", "f16", + "f17", "f18", "f19", "f20", "f21", "f22", "f23", "f24", + "", "", "", "", "", "", "", "", + "num lock", "scroll lock", + "", "", "", "", "", "", "", + "", "", "", "", "", "", "", + "lshift", "rshift", "lctrl", + "rctrl", "lmenu", "rmenu" +}; + +void ImGui::HelpMarker(const char* szDescription) +{ + TextDisabled(CS_XOR("(?)")); + if (IsItemHovered()) + { + BeginTooltip(); + PushTextWrapPos(450.f); + TextUnformatted(szDescription); + PopTextWrapPos(); + EndTooltip(); + } +} + +bool ImGui::HotKey(const char* szLabel, unsigned int* pValue) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* pWindow = g.CurrentWindow; + + if (pWindow->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID nIndex = pWindow->GetID(szLabel); + + const float flWidth = CalcItemWidth(); + const ImVec2 vecLabelSize = CalcTextSize(szLabel, nullptr, true); + + const ImRect rectFrame(pWindow->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(vecLabelSize.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + GetFrameHeight() : 0.0f, 0.0f), pWindow->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(flWidth, vecLabelSize.x > 0.0f ? vecLabelSize.y + style.FramePadding.y : 0.f)); + const ImRect rectTotal(rectFrame.Min, rectFrame.Max); + + ItemSize(rectTotal, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(rectTotal, nIndex, &rectFrame)) + return false; + + const bool bHovered = ItemHoverable(rectFrame, nIndex, ImGuiItemFlags_None); + if (bHovered) + { + SetHoveredID(nIndex); + g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput; + } + + const bool bClicked = bHovered && io.MouseClicked[0]; + const bool bDoubleClicked = bHovered && io.MouseDoubleClicked[0]; + if (bClicked || bDoubleClicked) + { + if (g.ActiveId != nIndex) + { + CRT::MemorySet(io.MouseDown, 0, sizeof(io.MouseDown)); + CRT::MemorySet(io.KeysDown, 0, sizeof(io.KeysDown)); + *pValue = 0U; + } + + SetActiveID(nIndex, pWindow); + FocusWindow(pWindow); + } + + bool bValueChanged = false; + if (unsigned int nKey = *pValue; g.ActiveId == nIndex) + { + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown); n++) + { + if (IsMouseDown(n)) + { + switch (n) + { + case 0: + nKey = VK_LBUTTON; + break; + case 1: + nKey = VK_RBUTTON; + break; + case 2: + nKey = VK_MBUTTON; + break; + case 3: + nKey = VK_XBUTTON1; + break; + case 4: + nKey = VK_XBUTTON2; + break; + } + + bValueChanged = true; + ClearActiveID(); + } + } + + if (!bValueChanged) + { + for (int n = VK_BACK; n <= VK_RMENU; n++) + { + if (IsKeyDown((ImGuiKey)n)) + { + nKey = n; + bValueChanged = true; + ClearActiveID(); + } + } + } + + if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) + { + *pValue = 0U; + ClearActiveID(); + } + else + *pValue = nKey; + } + + char szBuffer[64] = {}; + char* szBufferEnd = CRT::StringCopy(szBuffer, " "); + if (*pValue != 0 && g.ActiveId != nIndex) + szBufferEnd = CRT::StringCat(szBufferEnd, arrKeyNames[*pValue]); + else if (g.ActiveId == nIndex) + szBufferEnd = CRT::StringCat(szBufferEnd, CS_XOR("press")); + else + szBufferEnd = CRT::StringCat(szBufferEnd, CS_XOR("none")); + CRT::StringCat(szBufferEnd, " "); + + // modified by asphyxia + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, -1)); + + const ImVec2 vecBufferSize = CalcTextSize(szBuffer); + RenderFrame(ImVec2(rectFrame.Max.x - vecBufferSize.x, rectTotal.Min.y), ImVec2(rectFrame.Max.x, rectTotal.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y + vecBufferSize.y), GetColorU32((bHovered || bClicked || bDoubleClicked) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding); + pWindow->DrawList->AddText(ImVec2(rectFrame.Max.x - vecBufferSize.x, rectTotal.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == nIndex ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), szBuffer); + + if (vecLabelSize.x > 0.f) + RenderText(ImVec2(rectTotal.Min.x, rectTotal.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), szLabel); + + PopStyleVar(); + return bValueChanged; +} + +bool ImGui::HotKey(const char* szLabel, KeyBind_t* pKeyBind, const bool bAllowSwitch) +{ + const bool bValueChanged = HotKey(szLabel, &pKeyBind->uKey); + + if (bAllowSwitch) + { + char* szUniqueID = static_cast(MEM_STACKALLOC(CRT::StringLength(szLabel) + 6)); + CRT::StringCat(CRT::StringCopy(szUniqueID, CS_XOR("key##")), szLabel); + + if (IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) + OpenPopup(szUniqueID); + + if (BeginPopup(szUniqueID)) + { + SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.75f); + if (Combo(CS_XOR("##keybind.mode"), reinterpret_cast(&pKeyBind->nMode), CS_XOR("Hold\0Toggle\0\0"))) + CloseCurrentPopup(); + + EndPopup(); + } + + MEM_STACKFREE(szUniqueID); + } + + return bValueChanged; +} + +bool ImGui::MultiCombo(const char* szLabel, unsigned int* pFlags, const char* const* arrItems, int nItemsCount) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* pWindow = g.CurrentWindow; + + if (pWindow->SkipItems) + return false; + + IM_ASSERT(nItemsCount < 32); // bitflags shift overflow, decrease items count or change variable type + + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImVec2 vecLabelSize = CalcTextSize(szLabel, nullptr, true); + const float flActiveWidth = CalcItemWidth() - (vecLabelSize.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + GetFrameHeight() : 0.0f); + + std::vector vecActiveItems = {}; + + // collect active items + for (int i = 0; i < nItemsCount; i++) + { + if (*pFlags & (1 << i)) + vecActiveItems.push_back(arrItems[i]); + } + + // fuck it, stl still haven't boost::join, fmt::join replacement + std::string strBuffer = {}; + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < vecActiveItems.size(); i++) + { + strBuffer.append(vecActiveItems[i]); + + if (i < vecActiveItems.size() - 1U) + strBuffer.append(", "); + } + + if (strBuffer.empty()) + strBuffer.assign("none"); + else + { + const char* szWrapPosition = g.Font->CalcWordWrapPositionA(GetCurrentWindow()->FontWindowScale, strBuffer.data(), strBuffer.data() + strBuffer.length(), flActiveWidth - style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f); + const std::size_t nWrapLength = szWrapPosition - strBuffer.data(); + + if (nWrapLength > 0U && nWrapLength < strBuffer.length()) + { + strBuffer.resize(nWrapLength); + strBuffer.append("..."); + } + } + + bool bValueChanged = false; + if (BeginCombo(szLabel, strBuffer.c_str())) + { + for (int i = 0; i < nItemsCount; i++) + { + const int nCurrentFlag = (1 << i); + if (Selectable(arrItems[i], (*pFlags & nCurrentFlag), ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups)) + { + // flip bitflag + *pFlags ^= nCurrentFlag; + bValueChanged = true; + } + } + + EndCombo(); + } + + return bValueChanged; +} + +bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char* szLabel, int nItemsCount, int nHeightInItems) +{ + float height = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * ((nHeightInItems < 0 ? ImMin(nItemsCount, 7) : nHeightInItems) + 0.25f) + GetStyle().FramePadding.y * 2.0f; + return BeginListBox(szLabel, ImVec2(0.0f, height)); +} + +bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* szLabel, Color_t* pColor, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + return ColorEdit4(szLabel, pColor, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha); +} + +bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* szLabel, Color_t* pColor, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + float arrColor[4]; + pColor->BaseAlpha(arrColor); + + if (ColorEdit4(szLabel, &arrColor[0], flags)) + { + *pColor = Color_t::FromBase4(arrColor); + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* szLabel, ColorPickerVar_t* pColor, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + return ColorEdit4(szLabel, pColor, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha); +} + +bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* szLabel, ColorPickerVar_t* pColorVar, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + const bool bResult = ColorEdit4(szLabel, &pColorVar->colValue, flags); + + // switch rainbow mode on middle mouse click + if (IsItemHovered()) + { + // tooltip for turn on/off rainbow mode + BeginTooltip(); + { + PushTextWrapPos(450.f); + TextUnformatted(CS_XOR("use mouse middle-click to turn on/off rainbow mode!")); + PopTextWrapPos(); + } + EndTooltip(); + + if (IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Middle)) + pColorVar->bRainbow = !pColorVar->bRainbow; + } + + // open the context popup + OpenPopupOnItemClick(CS_XOR("context##color.picker"), ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + // @todo: cleaner code + SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2((pColorVar->bRainbow ? 120.f : 60.f) * D::CalculateDPI(C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale)), 0.f)); + if (BeginPopup(CS_XOR("context##color.picker"))) + { + if (Button(CS_XOR("copy##color.picker"), ImVec2(-1, 15 * D::CalculateDPI(C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale))))) + { + // @todo: im32 hex format is AARRGGBB, but we need RRGGBBAA + CRT::String_t<64U> szBuffer(CS_XOR("#%X"), pColorVar->colValue.GetU32()); + SetClipboardText(szBuffer.Data()); + szBuffer.Clear(); + + CloseCurrentPopup(); + } + + if (Button(CS_XOR("paste##color.picker"), ImVec2(-1, 15 * D::CalculateDPI(C_GET(int, Vars.nDpiScale))))) + { + const char* szClipboardText = GetClipboardText(); + // @note: +1U for '#' prefix skipping + const ImU32 uConvertedColor = CRT::StringToInteger(szClipboardText + 1U, nullptr, 16); + + pColorVar->colValue = Color_t(uConvertedColor); + CloseCurrentPopup(); + } + + if (pColorVar->bRainbow) + { + // @note: urgh padding moment idk + SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.90f + 1.f); + SliderFloat(CS_XOR("##speed.color.picker"), &pColorVar->flRainbowSpeed, 0.f, 5.f, CS_XOR("speed: %.1f"), ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + } + + EndPopup(); + } + + return bResult; +} + +#pragma endregion + +// thread-safe draw data mutex +static SRWLOCK drawLock = {}; + +static void* __cdecl ImGuiAllocWrapper(const std::size_t nSize, [[maybe_unused]] void* pUserData = nullptr) +{ + return MEM::HeapAlloc(nSize); +} + +static void __cdecl ImGuiFreeWrapper(void* pMemory, [[maybe_unused]] void* pUserData = nullptr) noexcept +{ + MEM::HeapFree(pMemory); +} + +bool D::Setup(HWND hWnd, ID3D11Device* pDevice, ID3D11DeviceContext* pContext) +{ + // check is it were already initialized + if (bInitialized) + return true; + + ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiAllocWrapper, ImGuiFreeWrapper); + + ImGui::CreateContext(); + + // setup platform and renderer bindings + if (!ImGui_ImplWin32_Init(hWnd)) + return false; + + if (!ImGui_ImplDX11_Init(pDevice, pContext)) + return false; + + // create draw data containers + pDrawListActive = IM_NEW(ImDrawList)(ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData()); + pDrawListSafe = IM_NEW(ImDrawList)(ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData()); + pDrawListRender = IM_NEW(ImDrawList)(ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData()); + + // setup styles +#pragma region draw_setup_style + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + style.Alpha = 1.0f; + style.WindowPadding = ImVec2(8, 8); + style.WindowRounding = 4.0f; + style.WindowBorderSize = 1.0f; + style.WindowMinSize = ImVec2(32, 32); + style.WindowTitleAlign = ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f); + style.ChildRounding = 4.0f; + style.ChildBorderSize = 1.0f; + style.PopupRounding = 4.0f; + style.PopupBorderSize = 1.0f; + style.FramePadding = ImVec2(4, 2); + style.FrameRounding = 4.0f; + style.FrameBorderSize = 1.0f; + style.ItemSpacing = ImVec2(8, 4); + style.ItemInnerSpacing = ImVec2(4, 4); + style.IndentSpacing = 6.0f; + style.ColumnsMinSpacing = 6.0f; + style.ScrollbarSize = 6.0f; + style.ScrollbarRounding = 9.0f; + style.GrabMinSize = 0.0f; + style.GrabRounding = 4.0f; + style.TabRounding = 4.0f; + style.TabBorderSize = 1.0f; + style.ButtonTextAlign = ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f); + style.SelectableTextAlign = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.5f); + style.WindowShadowSize = 0.f; + style.AntiAliasedLines = true; + style.AntiAliasedFill = true; + style.AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = true; + style.ColorButtonPosition = ImGuiDir_Right; +#pragma endregion + + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + + static const ImWchar icons_ranges[] = { ICON_MIN_FA, ICON_MAX_FA, 0 }; + ImFontConfig icons_config; + icons_config.MergeMode = true; + icons_config.PixelSnapH = true; + icons_config.FontDataOwnedByAtlas = false; + + io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange; + ImFontConfig imVerdanaConfig; + imVerdanaConfig.FontBuilderFlags = ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LightHinting; + for (int i = 0; i < CS_ARRAYSIZE(FONT::pMenu); i++) + { + const float flFontSize = 12.f * CalculateDPI(i); + FONT::pMenu[i] = io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF(CS_XOR("C:\\Windows\\Fonts\\Verdana.ttf"), flFontSize, &imVerdanaConfig, io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesCyrillic()); + io.Fonts->AddFontFromMemoryTTF((void*)fa_solid_900, sizeof(fa_solid_900), flFontSize, &icons_config, icons_ranges); + } + + imVerdanaConfig.FontBuilderFlags = ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bold; + FONT::pExtra = io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF(CS_XOR("C:\\Windows\\Fonts\\Verdana.ttf"), 14.f, &imVerdanaConfig, io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesCyrillic()); + + ImFontConfig imTahomaConfig; + imTahomaConfig.FontBuilderFlags = ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LightHinting; + FONT::pVisual = io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF(CS_XOR("C:\\Windows\\Fonts\\Tahoma.ttf"), 14.f, &imTahomaConfig, io.Fonts->GetGlyphRangesCyrillic()); + + io.Fonts->FontBuilderFlags = ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LightHinting; + bInitialized = io.Fonts->Build(); + return bInitialized; +} + +void D::Destroy() +{ + // check is it already destroyed or wasn't initialized at all + if (!bInitialized) + return; + + // free draw data containers + IM_DELETE(pDrawListActive); + IM_DELETE(pDrawListSafe); + IM_DELETE(pDrawListRender); + + // shutdown imgui directx9 renderer binding + ImGui_ImplDX11_Shutdown(); + + // shutdown imgui win32 platform binding + ImGui_ImplWin32_Shutdown(); + + // destroy imgui context + ImGui::DestroyContext(); + + bInitialized = false; +} + +#pragma region draw_callbacks + +extern IMGUI_IMPL_API LRESULT ImGui_ImplWin32_WndProcHandler(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); + +bool D::OnWndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam) +{ + // check is drawing initialized + if (!bInitialized) + return false; + + IPT::OnWndProc(hWnd, uMsg, wParam, lParam); + + // switch menu state + if (IPT::IsKeyReleased(C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.nMenuKey))) + { + MENU::bMainWindowOpened = !MENU::bMainWindowOpened; + // update animation + MENU::animMenuDimBackground.Switch(); + + // handle IsRelativeMouseMode original + const auto oIsRelativeMouseMode = H::hkIsRelativeMouseMode.GetOriginal(); + oIsRelativeMouseMode(I::InputSystem, MENU::bMainWindowOpened ? false : MENU::bMainActive); + } + + // handle ImGui's window messages and block game's input if menu is opened + return ImGui_ImplWin32_WndProcHandler(hWnd, uMsg, wParam, lParam) || MENU::bMainWindowOpened; +} + +void D::NewFrame() +{ + ImGui_ImplDX11_NewFrame(); + ImGui_ImplWin32_NewFrame(); + ImGui::NewFrame(); +} + +void D::Render() +{ + ImGui::Render(); + RenderDrawData(ImGui::GetDrawData()); + ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData(ImGui::GetDrawData()); +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region draw_main + +void D::RenderDrawData(ImDrawData* pDrawData) +{ + if (::TryAcquireSRWLockExclusive(&drawLock)) + { + *pDrawListRender = *pDrawListSafe; + ::ReleaseSRWLockExclusive(&drawLock); + } + + if (pDrawListRender->CmdBuffer.empty()) + return; + + // remove trailing command if unused + // @note: equivalent to pDrawList->_PopUnusedDrawCmd() + if (const ImDrawCmd& lastCommand = pDrawListRender->CmdBuffer.back(); lastCommand.ElemCount == 0 && lastCommand.UserCallback == nullptr) + { + pDrawListRender->CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + if (pDrawListRender->CmdBuffer.empty()) + return; + } + + ImGuiContext* pContext = ImGui::GetCurrentContext(); + ImGuiViewportP* pViewport = pContext->Viewports[0]; + ImVector* vecDrawLists = pViewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0]; + vecDrawLists->push_front(pDrawListRender); // this one being most background + + pDrawData->CmdLists.push_front(pDrawListRender); + pDrawData->CmdListsCount = vecDrawLists->Size; + pDrawData->TotalVtxCount += pDrawListRender->VtxBuffer.Size; + pDrawData->TotalIdxCount += pDrawListRender->IdxBuffer.Size; +} + +void D::ResetDrawData() +{ + pDrawListActive->_ResetForNewFrame(); + pDrawListActive->PushTextureID(ImGui::GetIO().Fonts->TexID); + pDrawListActive->PushClipRectFullScreen(); +} + +void D::SwapDrawData() +{ + ::AcquireSRWLockExclusive(&drawLock); + + IM_ASSERT(pDrawListActive->VtxBuffer.Size == 0 || pDrawListActive->_VtxWritePtr == pDrawListActive->VtxBuffer.Data + pDrawListActive->VtxBuffer.Size); + IM_ASSERT(pDrawListActive->IdxBuffer.Size == 0 || pDrawListActive->_IdxWritePtr == pDrawListActive->IdxBuffer.Data + pDrawListActive->IdxBuffer.Size); + + if (!(pDrawListActive->Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset)) + IM_ASSERT(static_cast(pDrawListActive->_VtxCurrentIdx) == pDrawListActive->VtxBuffer.Size); + + *pDrawListSafe = *pDrawListActive; + + ::ReleaseSRWLockExclusive(&drawLock); +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region draw_bindings + +bool D::WorldToScreen(const Vector_t& vecOrigin, ImVec2* pvecScreen) +{ + const float flWidth = SDK::ViewMatrix[3][0] * vecOrigin.x + SDK::ViewMatrix[3][1] * vecOrigin.y + SDK::ViewMatrix[3][2] * vecOrigin.z + SDK::ViewMatrix[3][3]; + + // check is point can't fit on screen, because it's behind us + if (flWidth < 0.001f) + return false; + + // compute the scene coordinates of a point in 3D + const float flInverse = 1.0f / flWidth; + pvecScreen->x = (SDK::ViewMatrix[0][0] * vecOrigin.x + SDK::ViewMatrix[0][1] * vecOrigin.y + SDK::ViewMatrix[0][2] * vecOrigin.z + SDK::ViewMatrix[0][3]) * flInverse; + pvecScreen->y = (SDK::ViewMatrix[1][0] * vecOrigin.x + SDK::ViewMatrix[1][1] * vecOrigin.y + SDK::ViewMatrix[1][2] * vecOrigin.z + SDK::ViewMatrix[1][3]) * flInverse; + + // screen transform + // get the screen position in pixels of given point + const ImVec2 vecDisplaySize = ImGui::GetIO().DisplaySize; + pvecScreen->x = (vecDisplaySize.x * 0.5f) + (pvecScreen->x * vecDisplaySize.x) * 0.5f; + pvecScreen->y = (vecDisplaySize.y * 0.5f) - (pvecScreen->y * vecDisplaySize.y) * 0.5f; + return true; +} + +float D::CalculateDPI(const int nScaleTarget) +{ + switch ((EMiscDpiScale)nScaleTarget) + { + case EMiscDpiScale::MISC_DPISCALE_DEFAULT: + return 1.f; + case EMiscDpiScale::MISC_DPISCALE_125: + return 1.25f; + case EMiscDpiScale::MISC_DPISCALE_150: + return 1.5f; + case EMiscDpiScale::MISC_DPISCALE_175: + return 1.75f; + case EMiscDpiScale::MISC_DPISCALE_200: + return 2.f; + default: + return 1.f; + } +} + +void D::AddDrawListRect(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecMin, const ImVec2& vecMax, const Color_t& colRect, const unsigned int uFlags, const Color_t& colOutline, const float flRounding, const ImDrawFlags roundingCorners, float flThickness, const float flOutlineThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + const ImU32 colRectPacked = colRect.GetU32(); + const ImU32 colOutlinePacked = colOutline.GetU32(); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_RECT_FILLED) + pDrawList->AddRectFilled(vecMin, vecMax, colRectPacked, flRounding, roundingCorners); + else + { + pDrawList->AddRect(vecMin, vecMax, colRectPacked, flRounding, roundingCorners, flThickness); + flThickness *= 0.5f; + } + + const float flHalfOutlineThickness = flOutlineThickness * 0.5f; + const ImVec2 vecThicknessOffset = { flThickness + flHalfOutlineThickness, flThickness + flHalfOutlineThickness }; + + if (uFlags & DRAW_RECT_BORDER) + pDrawList->AddRect(vecMin + vecThicknessOffset, vecMax - vecThicknessOffset, colOutlinePacked, flRounding, roundingCorners, flOutlineThickness); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_RECT_OUTLINE) + pDrawList->AddRect(vecMin - vecThicknessOffset, vecMax + vecThicknessOffset, colOutlinePacked, flRounding, roundingCorners, flOutlineThickness); +} + +void D::AddDrawListRectMultiColor(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecMin, const ImVec2& vecMax, const Color_t& colUpperLeft, const Color_t& colUpperRight, const Color_t& colBottomRight, const Color_t& colBottomLeft) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + pDrawList->AddRectFilledMultiColor(vecMin, vecMax, colUpperLeft.GetU32(), colUpperRight.GetU32(), colBottomRight.GetU32(), colBottomLeft.GetU32()); +} + +void D::AddDrawListCircle(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecCenter, const float flRadius, const Color_t& colCircle, const int nSegments, const unsigned int uFlags, const Color_t& colOutline, float flThickness, const float flOutlineThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + const ImU32 colCirclePacked = colCircle.GetU32(); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_CIRCLE_FILLED) + { + pDrawList->AddCircleFilled(vecCenter, flRadius, colCirclePacked, nSegments); + flThickness = 0.0f; + } + else + pDrawList->AddCircle(vecCenter, flRadius, colCirclePacked, nSegments, flThickness); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_CIRCLE_OUTLINE) + pDrawList->AddCircle(vecCenter, flRadius + flOutlineThickness, colOutline.GetU32(), nSegments, flThickness + flOutlineThickness); +} + +void D::AddDrawListArc(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecPosition, const float flRadius, const float flMinimumAngle, const float flMaximumAngle, const Color_t& colArc, const float flThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + pDrawList->PathArcTo(vecPosition, flRadius, M_DEG2RAD(flMinimumAngle), M_DEG2RAD(flMaximumAngle), 32); + pDrawList->PathStroke(colArc.GetU32(), false, flThickness); +} + +void D::AddDrawListLine(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecFirst, const ImVec2& vecSecond, const Color_t& colLine, const float flThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + pDrawList->AddLine(vecFirst, vecSecond, colLine.GetU32(), flThickness); +} + +void D::AddDrawListTriangle(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecFirst, const ImVec2& vecSecond, const ImVec2& vecThird, const Color_t& colTriangle, const unsigned int uFlags, const Color_t& colOutline, const float flThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + const ImU32 colTrianglePacked = colTriangle.GetU32(); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_TRIANGLE_FILLED) + pDrawList->AddTriangleFilled(vecFirst, vecSecond, vecThird, colTrianglePacked); + else + pDrawList->AddTriangle(vecFirst, vecSecond, vecThird, colTrianglePacked, flThickness); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_TRIANGLE_OUTLINE) + pDrawList->AddTriangle(vecFirst, vecSecond, vecThird, colOutline.GetU32(), flThickness + 1.0f); +} + +void D::AddDrawListQuad(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecFirst, const ImVec2& vecSecond, const ImVec2& vecThird, const ImVec2& vecFourth, const Color_t& colQuad, const unsigned int uFlags, const Color_t& colOutline, const float flThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + const ImU32 colQuadPacked = colQuad.GetU32(); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_QUAD_FILLED) + pDrawList->AddQuadFilled(vecFirst, vecSecond, vecThird, vecFourth, colQuadPacked); + else + pDrawList->AddQuad(vecFirst, vecSecond, vecThird, vecFourth, colQuadPacked, flThickness); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_QUAD_OUTLINE) + pDrawList->AddQuad(vecFirst, vecSecond, vecThird, vecFourth, colOutline.GetU32(), flThickness + 1.0f); +} + +void D::AddDrawListPolygon(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2* vecPoints, const int nPointsCount, const Color_t& colPolygon, unsigned int uFlags, const Color_t& colOutline, const bool bClosed, const float flThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + const ImU32 colPolygonPacked = colPolygon.GetU32(); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_POLYGON_FILLED) + pDrawList->AddConvexPolyFilled(vecPoints, nPointsCount, colPolygonPacked); + else + pDrawList->AddPolyline(vecPoints, nPointsCount, colPolygonPacked, bClosed, flThickness); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_POLYGON_OUTLINE) + pDrawList->AddPolyline(vecPoints, nPointsCount, colOutline.GetU32(), bClosed, flThickness + 1.0f); +} + +void D::AddDrawListText(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImFont* pFont, const ImVec2& vecPosition, const char* szText, const Color_t& colText, const unsigned int uFlags, const Color_t& colOutline, const float flThickness) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + // set font texture + pDrawList->PushTextureID(pFont->ContainerAtlas->TexID); + + const ImU32 colOutlinePacked = colOutline.GetU32(); + + if (uFlags & DRAW_TEXT_DROPSHADOW) + pDrawList->AddText(pFont, pFont->FontSize, vecPosition + ImVec2(flThickness, flThickness), colOutlinePacked, szText); + else if (uFlags & DRAW_TEXT_OUTLINE) + { + pDrawList->AddText(pFont, pFont->FontSize, vecPosition + ImVec2(flThickness, -flThickness), colOutlinePacked, szText); + pDrawList->AddText(pFont, pFont->FontSize, vecPosition + ImVec2(-flThickness, flThickness), colOutlinePacked, szText); + } + + pDrawList->AddText(pFont, pFont->FontSize, vecPosition, colText.GetU32(), szText); + pDrawList->PopTextureID(); +} + +void D::AddDrawListShadowRect(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecMin, const ImVec2& vecMax, const Color_t& colShadow, float flThickness, float flRounding, ImDrawFlags roundingCorners) +{ + if (pDrawList == nullptr) + pDrawList = pDrawListActive; + + pDrawList->AddShadowRect(vecMin, vecMax, colShadow.GetU32(), flThickness, ImVec2(0, 0), roundingCorners, flRounding); +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region draw_structures + +void AnimationHandler_t::Update(const float flDeltaTime, const float flDuration) +{ + if (fnEaseIn == nullptr) + fnEaseIn = &EASING::InSine; + + if (fnEaseOut == nullptr) + fnEaseOut = &EASING::OutSine; + + // Reset the elapsed time if the bool switches + if (bSwitch != bLastSwitch) + flElapsedTime = 0; + + flElapsedTime = MATH::Max(0.0f, MATH::Min(flElapsedTime, flDuration)); + float flTime = flElapsedTime / flDuration; + + // Determine the initial and target value based on the current state + float flInitialValue = bSwitch ? 0.1f : flValue; + float flTargetValue = bSwitch ? 1.0f : 0.1f; /*(1.0f is max value)*/ + + // Select the appropriate easing function based on the current state + EasingFunction_t fnCurrentEase = bSwitch ? fnEaseIn : fnEaseOut; + + // Apply the appropriate easing function based on fade-in or fade-out (with lerping, which is basically what's the math were doing) + flValue = (flInitialValue + (flTargetValue - flInitialValue)) * (float)fnCurrentEase(flTime); + flValue = MATH::Clamp(flValue, 0.1f, 1.0f); + + flElapsedTime += flDeltaTime; + bLastSwitch = bSwitch; +} + +#pragma endregion diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/draw.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/draw.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c70bd7f --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/draw.h @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: [d3d] +#include + +#include "../common.h" + +#include "../sdk/datatypes/color.h" +#include "../sdk/datatypes/vector.h" + +// used: [ext] imgui +#include "../../dependencies/imgui/imgui.h" +#include "../../dependencies/imgui/imgui_internal.h" + +// forward declarations +struct KeyBind_t; + +#pragma region draw_objects_enumerations + +enum ERectRenderFlags : unsigned int +{ + DRAW_RECT_NONE = 0, + DRAW_RECT_OUTLINE = (1 << 0), + DRAW_RECT_BORDER = (1 << 1), + DRAW_RECT_FILLED = (1 << 2) +}; + +enum ECircleRenderFlags : unsigned int +{ + DRAW_CIRCLE_NONE = 0, + DRAW_CIRCLE_OUTLINE = (1 << 0), + DRAW_CIRCLE_FILLED = (1 << 1) +}; + +enum ETriangleRenderFlags : unsigned int +{ + DRAW_TRIANGLE_NONE = 0, + DRAW_TRIANGLE_OUTLINE = (1 << 0), + DRAW_TRIANGLE_FILLED = (1 << 1) +}; + +enum EQuadRenderFlags : unsigned int +{ + DRAW_QUAD_NONE = 0, + DRAW_QUAD_OUTLINE = (1 << 0), + DRAW_QUAD_FILLED = (1 << 1) +}; + +enum EPolygonRenderFlags : unsigned int +{ + DRAW_POLYGON_NONE = 0, + DRAW_POLYGON_OUTLINE = (1 << 0), + DRAW_POLYGON_FILLED = (1 << 1) +}; + +enum ETextRenderFlags : unsigned int +{ + DRAW_TEXT_NONE = 0, + DRAW_TEXT_DROPSHADOW = (1 << 0), + DRAW_TEXT_OUTLINE = (1 << 1) +}; + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region draw_structures +// predefined custom user type +struct ColorPickerVar_t; + +typedef double (*EasingFunction_t)(double); +struct AnimationHandler_t +{ + // default: ease::in/outsine + AnimationHandler_t(EasingFunction_t fnIn = nullptr, EasingFunction_t fnOut = nullptr) : + fnEaseIn(fnIn), fnEaseOut(fnOut), bSwitch(false), bLastSwitch(false), flElapsedTime(0.f), flValue(0.1f){}; + ~AnimationHandler_t() = default; + + // Has to be called every frame + void Update(const float flDeltaTime, const float flDuration); + + // Get the current value multiplied by a scale + float GetValue(float flScale = 1.0f) + { + return flValue * flScale; + } + + const bool GetSwitch() const + { + return bSwitch; + } + + // switch state + void Switch() + { + bSwitch = !bSwitch; + } + + void SetSwitch(const bool bState) + { + bSwitch = bState; + } + +private: + // Set to true for ease-in animation, false for ease-out + bool bSwitch = 0; + bool bLastSwitch = bSwitch; + + float flElapsedTime = 0.f; + + // Current value of the animation + float flValue = 0.1f; + + // Ease in and out functions Declaration + EasingFunction_t fnEaseIn = nullptr; + EasingFunction_t fnEaseOut = nullptr; +}; + +#pragma endregion + +/* + * FONTS + */ +namespace FONT +{ + // 0. verdana, size: 12px * scaledDPI(1.0f->2.0f); lighthinting + inline ImFont* pMenu[5]; + // 1. verdana, size: 14px; bold + inline ImFont* pExtra; + // 2. tahoma, size: 16px; lighthinting + inline ImFont* pVisual; +} + +// extended imgui functionality +namespace ImGui +{ + /* @section: main */ + void HelpMarker(const char* szDescription); + bool HotKey(const char* szLabel, unsigned int* pValue); + bool HotKey(const char* szLabel, KeyBind_t* pKeyBind, const bool bAllowSwitch = true); + bool MultiCombo(const char* szLabel, unsigned int* pFlags, const char* const* arrItems, int nItemsCount); + bool BeginListBox(const char* szLabel, int nItemsCount, int nHeightInItems = -1); + + /* @section: wrappers */ + bool ColorEdit3(const char* szLabel, Color_t* pColor, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex); + bool ColorEdit4(const char* szLabel, Color_t* pColor, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar); + + bool ColorEdit3(const char* szLabel, ColorPickerVar_t* pColor, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex); + bool ColorEdit4(const char* szLabel, ColorPickerVar_t* pColorVar, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar); +} + +/* + * DRAW + * - rendering framework + */ +namespace D +{ + // initialize rendering engine, create fonts, set styles etc + bool Setup(HWND hWnd, ID3D11Device* pDevice, ID3D11DeviceContext* pContext); + // shutdown rendering engine + void Destroy(); + + /* @section: callbacks */ + // handle input window message and save keys states in array + bool OnWndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); + + /* @section: main */ + // render primitives by stored safe data + void RenderDrawData(ImDrawData* pDrawData); + // reset active draw data container + void ResetDrawData(); + // swap active draw data container to safe one + void SwapDrawData(); + // call it before rendering + void NewFrame(); + // call to render all primitives + void Render(); + + /* @section: get */ + /// convert world space to screen space coordinates by game's conversion matrix + /// @param[out] pvecScreen output for converted screen position + /// @returns: true if converted coordinates fit into display size, false otherwise + bool WorldToScreen(const Vector_t& vecOrigin, ImVec2* pvecScreen); + float CalculateDPI(const int nScaleTarget = 0); + + /* @section: bindings */ + void AddDrawListRect(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecMin, const ImVec2& vecMax, const Color_t& colRect, const unsigned int uFlags = DRAW_RECT_NONE, const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0, 255), const float flRounding = 0.f, const ImDrawFlags roundingCorners = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, float flThickness = 1.0f, const float flOutlineThickness = 1.0f); + void AddDrawListRectMultiColor(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecMin, const ImVec2& vecMax, const Color_t& colUpperLeft, const Color_t& colUpperRight, const Color_t& colBottomRight, const Color_t& colBottomLeft); + void AddDrawListCircle(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecCenter, const float flRadius, const Color_t& colCircle, const int nSegments, const unsigned int uFlags = DRAW_CIRCLE_NONE, const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0, 255), const float flThickness = 1.0f, const float flOutlineThickness = 1.0f); + void AddDrawListArc(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecPosition, const float flRadius, const float flMinimumAngle, const float flMaximumAngle, const Color_t& colArc = Color_t(255, 255, 255, 255), const float flThickness = 1.0f); + void AddDrawListLine(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecFirst, const ImVec2& vecSecond, const Color_t& colLine, const float flThickness = 1.0f); + void AddDrawListTriangle(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecFirst, const ImVec2& vecSecond, const ImVec2& vecThird, const Color_t& colTriangle, const unsigned int uFlags = DRAW_TRIANGLE_NONE, const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0, 255), const float flThickness = 0.f); + void AddDrawListQuad(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecFirst, const ImVec2& vecSecond, const ImVec2& vecThird, const ImVec2& vecFourth, const Color_t& colQuad, const unsigned int uFlags = DRAW_QUAD_NONE, const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0, 255), const float flThickness = 0.f); + void AddDrawListPolygon(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2* vecPoints, const int nPointsCount, const Color_t& colPolygon, unsigned int uFlags = DRAW_POLYGON_NONE, const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0, 255), const bool bClosed = true, const float flThickness = 1.0f); + void AddDrawListText(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImFont* pFont, const ImVec2& vecPosition, const char* szText, const Color_t& colText, const unsigned int uFlags = DRAW_TEXT_NONE, const Color_t& colOutline = Color_t(0, 0, 0, 255), const float flThickness = 1.0f); + void AddDrawListShadowRect(ImDrawList* pDrawList, const ImVec2& vecMin, const ImVec2& vecMax, const Color_t& colShadow, float flThickness = 32.f, float flRounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags roundingCorners = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll); + + /* @section: values */ + // rendering engine initialization state + inline bool bInitialized = false; + // active draw data container used to store + inline ImDrawList* pDrawListActive = nullptr; + // safe draw data container + inline ImDrawList* pDrawListSafe = nullptr; + // actual draw data container used to render + inline ImDrawList* pDrawListRender = nullptr; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/easing.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/easing.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..771d279 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/easing.h @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: math functions +#include "math.h" + +namespace EASING +{ + CS_INLINE double InSine(const double t) + { + return M_SIN(1.5707963 * t); + } + + CS_INLINE double OutSine(double t) + { + return 1 + M_SIN(1.5707963 * (--t)); + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutSine(const double t) + { + return 0.5 * (1 + M_SIN(3.1415926 * (t - 0.5))); + } + + CS_INLINE double InQuad(const double t) + { + return t * t; + } + + CS_INLINE double OutQuad(const double t) + { + return t * (2 - t); + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutQuad(const double t) + { + return t < 0.5 ? 2 * t * t : t * (4 - 2 * t) - 1; + } + + CS_INLINE double InCubic(const double t) + { + return t * t * t; + } + + CS_INLINE double OutCubic(double t) + { + return 1 + (--t) * t * t; + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutCubic(double t) + { + return t < 0.5 ? 4 * t * t * t : 1 + (--t) * (2 * (--t)) * (2 * t); + } + + CS_INLINE double InQuart(double t) + { + t *= t; + return t * t; + } + + CS_INLINE double OutQuart(double t) + { + t = (--t) * t; + return 1 - t * t; + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutQuart(double t) + { + if (t < 0.5) + { + t *= t; + return 8 * t * t; + } + else + { + t = (--t) * t; + return 1 - 8 * t * t; + } + } + + CS_INLINE double InQuint(const double t) + { + const double t2 = t * t; + return t * t2 * t2; + } + + CS_INLINE double OutQuint(double t) + { + const double t2 = (--t) * t; + return 1 + t * t2 * t2; + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutQuint(double t) + { + double t2; + if (t < 0.5) + { + t2 = t * t; + return 16 * t * t2 * t2; + } + else + { + t2 = (--t) * t; + return 1 + 16 * t * t2 * t2; + } + } + + CS_INLINE double InExpo(const double t) + { + return (M_POW(2.0, 8 * t) - 1) / 255; + } + + CS_INLINE double OutExpo(const double t) + { + return 1 - M_POW(2.0, -8 * t); + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutExpo(const double t) + { + if (t < 0.5) + { + return (M_POW(2.0, 16 * t) - 1) / 510; + } + else + { + return 1 - 0.5 * M_POW(2.0, -16 * (t - 0.5)); + } + } + + CS_INLINE double InCirc(const double t) + { + return 1 - M_SQRT(1 - t); + } + + CS_INLINE double OutCirc(const double t) + { + return M_SQRT(t); + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutCirc(const double t) + { + if (t < 0.5) + { + return (1 - M_SQRT(1 - 2 * t)) * 0.5; + } + else + { + return (1 + M_SQRT(2 * t - 1)) * 0.5; + } + } + + CS_INLINE double InBack(const double t) + { + return t * t * (2.70158 * t - 1.70158); + } + + CS_INLINE double OutBack(double t) + { + return 1 + (--t) * t * (2.70158 * t + 1.70158); + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutBack(double t) + { + if (t < 0.5) + { + return t * t * (7 * t - 2.5) * 2; + } + else + { + return 1 + (--t) * t * 2 * (7 * t + 2.5); + } + } + + CS_INLINE double InElastic(const double t) + { + const double t2 = t * t; + return t2 * t2 * M_SIN(t * MATH::_PI * 4.5); + } + + CS_INLINE double OutElastic(const double t) + { + const double t2 = (t - 1) * (t - 1); + return 1 - t2 * t2 * M_COS(t * MATH::_PI * 4.5); + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutElastic(const double t) + { + double t2; + if (t < 0.45) + { + t2 = t * t; + return 8 * t2 * t2 * M_SIN(t * MATH::_PI * 9); + } + else if (t < 0.55) + { + return 0.5 + 0.75 * M_SIN(t * MATH::_PI * 4); + } + else + { + t2 = (t - 1) * (t - 1); + return 1 - 8 * t2 * t2 * M_SIN(t * MATH::_PI * 9); + } + } + + CS_INLINE double InBounce(const double t) + { + return M_POW(2.0, 6 * (t - 1)) * M_ABS(M_SIN(t * MATH::_PI * 3.5)); + } + + CS_INLINE double OutBounce(const double t) + { + return 1 - M_POW(2.0, -6 * t) * M_ABS(M_COS(t * MATH::_PI * 3.5)); + } + + CS_INLINE double InOutBounce(const double t) + { + if (t < 0.5) + { + return 8 * M_POW(2.0, 8 * (t - 1)) * M_ABS(M_SIN(t * MATH::_PI * 7)); + } + else + { + return 1 - 8 * M_POW(2.0, -8 * t) * M_ABS(M_SIN(t * MATH::_PI * 7)); + } + } +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/fnv1a.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/fnv1a.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..86a4adc --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/fnv1a.h @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [stl] uint64_t +#include + +// used :CRT::StringLength +#include "crt.h" + +using FNV1A_t = std::uint64_t; + +/* + * 64-BIT FNV1A HASH + */ +namespace FNV1A +{ + /* @section: [internal] constants */ + constexpr FNV1A_t ullBasis = 0xCBF29CE484222325ULL; + constexpr FNV1A_t ullPrime = 0x100000001B3ULL; + + /* @section: get */ + /// @param[in] szString string for which you want to generate a hash + /// @param[in] uKey key of hash generation + /// @returns: calculated at compile-time hash of given string + consteval FNV1A_t HashConst(const char* szString, const FNV1A_t uKey = ullBasis) noexcept + { + return (szString[0] == '\0') ? uKey : HashConst(&szString[1], (uKey ^ static_cast(szString[0])) * ullPrime); + } + + /// @param[in] szString string for which you want to generate a hash + /// @param[in] uKey key of hash generation + /// @returns: calculated at run-time hash of given string + inline FNV1A_t Hash(const char* szString, FNV1A_t uKey = ullBasis) noexcept + { + const std::size_t nLength = CRT::StringLength(szString); + + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < nLength; ++i) + uKey = (uKey ^ szString[i]) * ullPrime; + + return uKey; + } +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/inputsystem.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/inputsystem.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..88742ff --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/inputsystem.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +// used: get_x_lparam, get_y_lparam +#include + +#include "inputsystem.h" + +// used: menu open/panic keys +#include "../core/variables.h" +// used: wndproc hook +#include "../core/hooks.h" +// used: menu variables +#include "../core/menu.h" +// used: iinputsystem +#include "../core/interfaces.h" +#include "../sdk/interfaces/iinputsystem.h" + +// used: [ext] imrect +#include "../dependencies/imgui/imgui_internal.h" + +static BOOL CALLBACK EnumWindowsCallback(HWND handle, LPARAM lParam) +{ + const auto MainWindow = [handle]() + { + return GetWindow(handle, GW_OWNER) == nullptr && + IsWindowVisible(handle) && handle != GetConsoleWindow(); + }; + + DWORD nPID = 0; + GetWindowThreadProcessId(handle, &nPID); + + if (GetCurrentProcessId() != nPID || !MainWindow()) + return TRUE; + + *reinterpret_cast(lParam) = handle; + return FALSE; +} + +bool IPT::Setup() +{ + while (hWindow == nullptr) + { + EnumWindows(::EnumWindowsCallback, reinterpret_cast(&hWindow)); + ::Sleep(200U); + } + + // change window message handle to our + pOldWndProc = reinterpret_cast(SetWindowLongPtrW(hWindow, GWLP_WNDPROC, reinterpret_cast(H::WndProc))); + if (pOldWndProc == nullptr) + return false; + + return true; +} + +void IPT::Destroy() +{ + MENU::bMainWindowOpened = false; + ::Sleep(200U); + + if (pOldWndProc != nullptr) + { + SetWindowLongPtrW(hWindow, GWLP_WNDPROC, reinterpret_cast(pOldWndProc)); + pOldWndProc = nullptr; + } +} + +bool IPT::OnWndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam) +{ + // prevent process when e.g. binding something in-menu + if (wParam != C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.nMenuKey) && wParam != C_GET(unsigned int, Vars.nPanicKey) && MENU::bMainWindowOpened) + return false; + + // current active key + int nKey = 0; + // current active key state + KeyState_t state = KEY_STATE_NONE; + + switch (uMsg) + { + case WM_KEYDOWN: + case WM_SYSKEYDOWN: + if (wParam < 256U) + { + nKey = static_cast(wParam); + state = KEY_STATE_DOWN; + } + break; + case WM_KEYUP: + case WM_SYSKEYUP: + if (wParam < 256U) + { + nKey = static_cast(wParam); + state = KEY_STATE_UP; + } + break; + case WM_LBUTTONDOWN: + case WM_LBUTTONUP: + case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK: + nKey = VK_LBUTTON; + state = uMsg == WM_LBUTTONUP ? KEY_STATE_UP : KEY_STATE_DOWN; + break; + case WM_RBUTTONDOWN: + case WM_RBUTTONUP: + case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK: + nKey = VK_RBUTTON; + state = uMsg == WM_RBUTTONUP ? KEY_STATE_UP : KEY_STATE_DOWN; + break; + case WM_MBUTTONDOWN: + case WM_MBUTTONUP: + case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK: + nKey = VK_MBUTTON; + state = uMsg == WM_MBUTTONUP ? KEY_STATE_UP : KEY_STATE_DOWN; + break; + case WM_XBUTTONDOWN: + case WM_XBUTTONUP: + case WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK: + nKey = (GET_XBUTTON_WPARAM(wParam) == XBUTTON1 ? VK_XBUTTON1 : VK_XBUTTON2); + state = uMsg == WM_XBUTTONUP ? KEY_STATE_UP : KEY_STATE_DOWN; + break; + default: + return false; + } + + // save key states + if (state == KEY_STATE_UP && arrKeyState[nKey] == KEY_STATE_DOWN) // if swap states it will be pressed state + arrKeyState[nKey] = KEY_STATE_RELEASED; + else + arrKeyState[nKey] = state; + + return true; +} + +bool IPT::GetBindState(KeyBind_t& keyBind) +{ + if (keyBind.uKey == 0U) + return false; + + switch (keyBind.nMode) + { + case EKeyBindMode::HOLD: + keyBind.bEnable = IsKeyDown(keyBind.uKey); + break; + case EKeyBindMode::TOGGLE: + if (IsKeyReleased(keyBind.uKey)) + keyBind.bEnable = !keyBind.bEnable; + break; + } + + return keyBind.bEnable; +} + +bool IPT::IsHovered(const ImVec2& vecPosition, const ImVec2& vecSize) +{ + const ImVec2 vecMousePosition = ImGui::GetMousePos(); + return ImRect(vecPosition, vecPosition + vecSize).Contains(vecMousePosition); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/inputsystem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/inputsystem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e1f2876 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/inputsystem.h @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [win] winapi +#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#endif +#include + +#include "../common.h" +// used: keybind_t +#include "../core/config.h" + +/* + * INPUT SYSTEM + * listen and handle key states + */ +namespace IPT +{ + using KeyState_t = std::uint8_t; + + enum EKeyState : KeyState_t + { + KEY_STATE_NONE, + KEY_STATE_DOWN, + KEY_STATE_UP, + KEY_STATE_RELEASED + }; + + /* @section: values */ + // current window + inline HWND hWindow = nullptr; + // saved window messages handler + inline WNDPROC pOldWndProc = nullptr; + // last processed key states + inline KeyState_t arrKeyState[256] = {}; + + // replace game window messages processor with our + bool Setup(); + // restore window messages processor to original + void Destroy(); + + /* @section: callbacks */ + // process input window message and save keys states in array + bool OnWndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); + + /* @section: get */ + /// @returns: true if keybind is active, false otherwise + bool GetBindState(KeyBind_t& keyBind); + + [[nodiscard]] bool IsHovered(const ImVec2& vecPosition, const ImVec2& vecSize); + + /// @returns: true if key is being held, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE bool IsKeyDown(const std::uint32_t uButtonCode) + { + return arrKeyState[uButtonCode] == KEY_STATE_DOWN; + } + + /// @returns: true if key has been just released, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE bool IsKeyReleased(const std::uint32_t uButtonCode) + { + if (arrKeyState[uButtonCode] == KEY_STATE_RELEASED) + { + arrKeyState[uButtonCode] = KEY_STATE_UP; + return true; + } + + return false; + } +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/log.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/log.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d120d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/log.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,258 @@ +// used: [crt] time_t, time, localtime_s +#include + +#include "log.h" +// using: mem_stackalloc, mem_stackfree +#include "memory.h" +// used: IsPowerOfTwo +#include "math.h" +// used: GetWorkingPath +#include "../core.h" + +// console write stream +static HANDLE hConsoleStream = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; +// file write stream +static HANDLE hFileStream = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; + +#pragma region log_main +bool L::AttachConsole(const wchar_t* wszWindowTitle) +{ + // allocate memory for console + if (::AllocConsole() != TRUE) + return false; + + // open console output stream + if (hConsoleStream = ::CreateFileW(L"CONOUT$", GENERIC_WRITE, FILE_SHARE_READ | FILE_SHARE_WRITE, nullptr, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, nullptr); hConsoleStream == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) + return false; + + // @test: unnecessary as fas as we don't use std::cout etc + if (::SetStdHandle(STD_OUTPUT_HANDLE, hConsoleStream) != TRUE) + return false; + + // set console window title + if (::SetConsoleTitleW(wszWindowTitle) != TRUE) + return false; + + return true; +} + +void L::DetachConsole() +{ + ::CloseHandle(hConsoleStream); + + // free allocated memory for console + if (::FreeConsole() != TRUE) + return; + + // close console window + if (const HWND hConsoleWindow = ::GetConsoleWindow(); hConsoleWindow != nullptr) + ::PostMessageW(hConsoleWindow, WM_CLOSE, 0U, 0L); +} + +bool L::OpenFile(const wchar_t* wszFileName) +{ + wchar_t wszFilePath[MAX_PATH]; + if (!CORE::GetWorkingPath(wszFilePath)) + return false; + + CRT::StringCat(wszFilePath, wszFileName); + + // @todo: append time/date to filename and always keep up to 3 files, otherwise delete with lowest date + // open file output stream + if (hFileStream = ::CreateFileW(wszFilePath, GENERIC_WRITE, FILE_SHARE_READ, nullptr, CREATE_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, nullptr); hFileStream == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) + return false; + + // insert UTF-8 BOM + ::WriteFile(hFileStream, "\xEF\xBB\xBF", 3UL, nullptr, nullptr); + + return true; +} + +void L::CloseFile() +{ + ::CloseHandle(hFileStream); +} + +void L::WriteMessage(const char* szMessage, const std::size_t nMessageLength) +{ +#ifdef CS_LOG_CONSOLE + ::WriteConsoleA(hConsoleStream, szMessage, nMessageLength, nullptr, nullptr); +#endif +#ifdef CS_LOG_FILE + ::WriteFile(hFileStream, szMessage, nMessageLength, nullptr, nullptr); +#endif +} +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region log_stream_control +L::Stream_t::ColorMarker_t L::SetColor(const LogColorFlags_t nColorFlags) +{ + return { nColorFlags }; +} + +L::Stream_t::PrecisionMarker_t L::SetPrecision(const int iPrecision) +{ + return { iPrecision }; +} + +L::Stream_t::ModeMarker_t L::AddFlags(const LogModeFlags_t nModeFlags) +{ + return { nModeFlags }; +} + +L::Stream_t::ModeMarker_t L::RemoveFlags(const LogModeFlags_t nModeFlags) +{ + return { static_cast(nModeFlags | LOG_MODE_REMOVE) }; +} +#pragma endregion + +L::Stream_t& L::Stream_t::operator()(const ELogLevel nLevel, const char* szFileBlock) +{ +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + // reset previous flags + nModeFlags = LOG_MODE_NONE; + + const char* szTypeBlock = nullptr; + [[maybe_unused]] LogColorFlags_t nTypeColorFlags = LOG_COLOR_DEFAULT; + + switch (nLevel) + { + case LOG_INFO: + szTypeBlock = "[info] "; + nTypeColorFlags = LOG_COLOR_FORE_CYAN; + break; + case LOG_WARNING: + szTypeBlock = "[warning] "; + nTypeColorFlags = LOG_COLOR_FORE_YELLOW; + break; + case LOG_ERROR: + szTypeBlock = "[error] "; + nTypeColorFlags = LOG_COLOR_FORE_RED; + break; + default: + break; + } + + const std::time_t time = std::time(nullptr); + std::tm timePoint; + localtime_s(&timePoint, &time); + + // @todo: no new line at first use / ghetto af but cheap enough but still ghetto uhhh + char szTimeBuffer[32]; + const std::size_t nTimeSize = CRT::TimeToString(szTimeBuffer, sizeof(szTimeBuffer), "\n[%d-%m-%Y %T] ", &timePoint) - bFirstPrint; + +#ifdef CS_LOG_CONSOLE + ::SetConsoleTextAttribute(hConsoleStream, FOREGROUND_GREEN | FOREGROUND_INTENSITY); + ::WriteConsoleA(hConsoleStream, szTimeBuffer + bFirstPrint, nTimeSize, nullptr, nullptr); + + if (szFileBlock != nullptr) + { + ::SetConsoleTextAttribute(hConsoleStream, FOREGROUND_INTENSITY); + ::WriteConsoleA(hConsoleStream, szFileBlock, CRT::StringLength(szFileBlock), nullptr, nullptr); + } + + if (szTypeBlock != nullptr) + { + ::SetConsoleTextAttribute(hConsoleStream, static_cast(nTypeColorFlags)); + ::WriteConsoleA(hConsoleStream, szTypeBlock, CRT::StringLength(szTypeBlock), nullptr, nullptr); + } + + ::SetConsoleTextAttribute(hConsoleStream, FOREGROUND_RED | FOREGROUND_GREEN | FOREGROUND_BLUE); +#endif +#ifdef CS_LOG_FILE + ::WriteFile(hFileStream, szTimeBuffer + bFirstPrint, nTimeSize, nullptr, nullptr); + + char szBlockBuffer[MAX_PATH] = { '\0' }; + char* szCurrentBlock = szBlockBuffer; + + if (szFileBlock != nullptr) + szCurrentBlock = CRT::StringCat(szCurrentBlock, szFileBlock); + + if (szTypeBlock != nullptr) + szCurrentBlock = CRT::StringCat(szCurrentBlock, szTypeBlock); + + if (szBlockBuffer[0] != '\0') + ::WriteFile(hFileStream, szBlockBuffer, static_cast(szCurrentBlock - szBlockBuffer), nullptr, nullptr); +#endif + + bFirstPrint = false; +#endif + return *this; +} + +L::Stream_t& L::Stream_t::operator<<(const ColorMarker_t colorMarker) +{ +#ifdef CS_LOG_CONSOLE + ::SetConsoleTextAttribute(hConsoleStream, static_cast(colorMarker.nColorFlags)); +#endif + return *this; +} + +L::Stream_t& L::Stream_t::operator<<(const PrecisionMarker_t precisionMarker) +{ +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + this->iPrecision = precisionMarker.iPrecision; +#endif + return *this; +} + +L::Stream_t& L::Stream_t::operator<<(const ModeMarker_t modeMarker) +{ +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + CS_ASSERT(nModeFlags == 0U || MATH::IsPowerOfTwo(nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_MASK)); // used conflicting format flags + + if (modeMarker.nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_REMOVE) + nModeFlags &= ~modeMarker.nModeFlags; + else + nModeFlags |= modeMarker.nModeFlags; +#endif + return *this; +} + +L::Stream_t& L::Stream_t::operator<<(const char* szMessage) +{ +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + WriteMessage(szMessage, CRT::StringLength(szMessage)); +#endif + return *this; +} + +L::Stream_t& L::Stream_t::operator<<(const wchar_t* wszMessage) +{ +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + /* + * to keep stream orientation always same, convert message to UTF-8 + * + * regarding to C++ standard: + * [C++11: 27.4.1/3]: + * mixing operations on corresponding wide- and narrow-character streams follows the same semantics as mixing such operations on 'FILE's, as specified in amendation [1] of the ISO C standard + * + * [1]: + * the definition of a stream was changed to include the concept of an orientation for both text and binary streams. + * after a stream is associated with a file, but before any operations are performed on the stream, the stream is without orientation. + * if a wide-character input or output function is applied to a stream without orientation, the stream becomes wide-oriented. + * likewise, if a byte input or output operation is applied to a stream with orientation, the stream becomes byte-oriented. + * thereafter, only the 'fwide()' or 'freopen()' functions can alter the orientation of a stream. + * byte input/output functions shall not be applied to a wide-oriented stream and wide-character input/output functions shall not be applied to a byte-oriented stream. + */ + const std::size_t nMessageLength = CRT::StringLengthMultiByte(wszMessage); + char* szMessage = static_cast(MEM_STACKALLOC(nMessageLength + 1U)); + CRT::StringUnicodeToMultiByte(szMessage, nMessageLength + 1U, wszMessage); + + WriteMessage(szMessage, nMessageLength); + + MEM_STACKFREE(szMessage); +#endif + return *this; +} + +L::Stream_t& L::Stream_t::operator<<(const bool bValue) +{ +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + const char* szBoolean = ((nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_BOOL_ALPHA) ? (bValue ? "true" : "false") : (bValue ? "1" : "0")); + const std::size_t nBooleanLength = CRT::StringLength(szBoolean); + + WriteMessage(szBoolean, nBooleanLength); +#endif + return *this; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/log.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/log.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ecc3d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/log.h @@ -0,0 +1,327 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [win] winapi +#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#endif +#include + +#include "../common.h" + +// using: stringcopy, stringcat, timetostring +#include "crt.h" + +// used: sdk datatypes +#include "../sdk/datatypes/color.h" +#include "../sdk/datatypes/vector.h" +#include "../sdk/datatypes/qangle.h" + +// @todo: poorly designed in case we don't need logging at all, xor continues wasteful compilation without any references | add smth like dummystream_t and unreference macro params? + +#pragma region log_definitions +#ifdef _DEBUG +#if defined(CS_COMPILER_CLANG) +#define L_PRINT(LEVEL) L::stream(LEVEL, "[" __FILE_NAME__ ":" CS_STRINGIFY(__LINE__) "] ") +#else +#define L_PRINT(LEVEL) L::stream(LEVEL, L::DETAIL::MakeFileBlock(L::DETAIL::GetFileName(__FILE__), CS_STRINGIFY(__LINE__)).Get()) +#endif +#else +#define L_PRINT(LEVEL) L::stream(LEVEL) +#endif +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region log_enumerations + +enum ELogLevel : std::uint8_t +{ + LOG_NONE = 0, + LOG_INFO, + LOG_WARNING, + LOG_ERROR +}; + +using LogModeFlags_t = std::uint16_t; + +enum ELogModeFlags : LogModeFlags_t +{ + LOG_MODE_NONE = 0U, + + // boolean formatting + LOG_MODE_BOOL_ALPHA = (1U << 0U), // switches between textual and numeric representation of booleans + + // integer formatting + LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE = (1U << 1U), // switches display of number base prefixes used by C++ literal constants + LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX = (1U << 2U), // switches integer numbers hexadecimal format + LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_DEC = (1U << 3U), // switches integer numbers decimal format + LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_OCT = (1U << 4U), // switches integer numbers octal format + LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_BIN = (1U << 5U), // switches integer numbers binary format + LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_MASK = (LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_DEC | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_OCT | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_BIN), + + // floating-point formatting + LOG_MODE_FLOAT_SHOWPOINT = (1U << 6U), // switches decimal point for those numbers whose decimal part is zero + LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_HEX = (1U << 7U), // switches floating-point numbers hexadecimal format + LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_FIXED = (1U << 8U), // switches floating-point numbers formatting in fixed-point notation + LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_SCIENTIFIC = (1U << 9U), // switches floating-point numbers formatting in scientific notation + LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_MASK = (LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_HEX | LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_FIXED | LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_SCIENTIFIC), + + // numerical formatting + LOG_MODE_NUM_SHOWPOSITIVE = (1U << 10U), // switches display of plus sign '+' in non-negative numbers + LOG_MODE_NUM_UPPERCASE = (1U << 11U), // switches uppercase characters in numbers + + /* [internal] */ + LOG_MODE_REMOVE = (1U << 15U) +}; + +using LogColorFlags_t = std::uint16_t; + +enum ELogColorFlags : LogColorFlags_t +{ + LOG_COLOR_FORE_BLUE = FOREGROUND_BLUE, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_GREEN = FOREGROUND_GREEN, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_RED = FOREGROUND_RED, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_INTENSITY = FOREGROUND_INTENSITY, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_GRAY = FOREGROUND_INTENSITY, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_CYAN = FOREGROUND_BLUE | FOREGROUND_GREEN, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_MAGENTA = FOREGROUND_BLUE | FOREGROUND_RED, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_YELLOW = FOREGROUND_GREEN | FOREGROUND_RED, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_BLACK = 0U, + LOG_COLOR_FORE_WHITE = FOREGROUND_RED | FOREGROUND_GREEN | FOREGROUND_BLUE, + + LOG_COLOR_BACK_BLUE = BACKGROUND_BLUE, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_GREEN = BACKGROUND_GREEN, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_RED = BACKGROUND_RED, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_INTENSITY = BACKGROUND_INTENSITY, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_GRAY = BACKGROUND_INTENSITY, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_CYAN = BACKGROUND_BLUE | BACKGROUND_GREEN, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_MAGENTA = BACKGROUND_BLUE | BACKGROUND_RED, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_YELLOW = BACKGROUND_GREEN | BACKGROUND_RED, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_BLACK = 0U, + LOG_COLOR_BACK_WHITE = BACKGROUND_RED | BACKGROUND_GREEN | BACKGROUND_BLUE, + + /* [internal] */ + LOG_COLOR_DEFAULT = LOG_COLOR_FORE_WHITE | LOG_COLOR_BACK_BLACK +}; + +#pragma endregion + +/* + * LOGGING + * - simple logging system with file and console output + * used for debugging and fetching values/errors at run-time + * @todo: currently not thread safe and can mess messages when used from different threads + */ +namespace L +{ + namespace DETAIL + { + // @todo: constructs string per-byte in the stack, how do we can optimize this? + template + struct FileBlockStorage_t + { + template + consteval explicit FileBlockStorage_t(const char* szFileName, const char* szLineNumber, std::index_sequence, std::index_sequence) : + szStorage{ '[', szFileName[I1]..., ':', szLineNumber[I2]..., ']', ' ', '\0' } { } + + [[nodiscard]] constexpr const char* Get() const + { + return szStorage; + } + + const char szStorage[N + 5U]; + }; + + // fail-free version of 'StringCharR' + consteval const char* GetFileName(const char* szFilePath) + { + const char* szLastPath = szFilePath; + + do + { + if (*szFilePath == '\\') + szLastPath = szFilePath + 1U; + } while (*szFilePath++ != '\0'); + + return szLastPath; + } + + // helper to generate file info block for logging message at compile-time + template + consteval auto MakeFileBlock(const char* szFileName, const char* szFileNumber) noexcept + { + return FileBlockStorage_t(szFileName, szFileNumber, std::make_index_sequence{}, std::make_index_sequence{}); + } + } + + /* @section: main */ + // attach console to current window with write permission and given title + bool AttachConsole(const wchar_t* wszWindowTitle); + // close write streams and detach console from current window + void DetachConsole(); + // open logging output file + bool OpenFile(const wchar_t* wszFileName); + // close logging output file + void CloseFile(); + // write message to the file or/and console + void WriteMessage(const char* szMessage, const std::size_t nMessageLength); + + // alternative of C++ 'std::cout' and other STL-like streams logging scheme + // @todo: is it faster to constantly call 'WriteMessage' instead of concatenating all of the output and print once? i dont think so, due to additional allocations, thread-safe requirements, conditions when we still should call print due to color/etc changes | but generally this should lead to better inlining and less complicated compiled code + struct Stream_t + { + // special unique return type markers to determine and handle change of those flags, just a snap for compile-time, inlined as underlying types at run-time + struct ColorMarker_t + { + LogColorFlags_t nColorFlags; + }; + + struct PrecisionMarker_t + { + int iPrecision; + }; + + struct ModeMarker_t + { + LogModeFlags_t nModeFlags; + }; + + // begin of each log message, puts time, file & line, level blocks + Stream_t& operator()(const ELogLevel nLevel, const char* szFileBlock = nullptr); + + // manipulators + Stream_t& operator<<(ColorMarker_t); + Stream_t& operator<<(PrecisionMarker_t); + Stream_t& operator<<(ModeMarker_t); + // message + Stream_t& operator<<(const char* szMessage); + Stream_t& operator<<(const wchar_t* wszMessage); + // conversion + Stream_t& operator<<(const bool bValue); + + template requires std::is_integral_v + Stream_t& operator<<(const T value) + { +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + int iBase = 10; + const char* szPrefix = nullptr; + + if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX) + { + iBase = 16; + szPrefix = "0x"; + } + else if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_OCT) + iBase = 8; + else if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_BIN) + { + iBase = 2; + szPrefix = "0b"; + } + + // @todo: LOG_MODE_NUM_UPPERCASE not handled + char szIntegerBuffer[CRT::IntegerToString_t::MaxCount() + 2U]; + char* szInteger = CRT::IntegerToString(value, szIntegerBuffer + 2U, sizeof(szIntegerBuffer) - 2U, iBase); + + // @todo: after int2str rework could be simplified | or completely replaced with strformat + if (szPrefix != nullptr && (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE)) + { + *--szInteger = szPrefix[1]; + *--szInteger = szPrefix[0]; + } + + if constexpr (std::is_signed_v) + { + if (value >= 0 && (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_NUM_SHOWPOSITIVE)) + *--szInteger = '+'; + } + + const std::size_t nIntegerLength = szIntegerBuffer + sizeof(szIntegerBuffer) - szInteger - 1; + WriteMessage(szInteger, nIntegerLength); +#endif + return *this; + } + + template requires std::is_floating_point_v + Stream_t& operator<<(const T value) + { +#if defined(CS_LOG_CONSOLE) || defined(CS_LOG_FILE) + //static_assert((nModeFlags & (LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_FIXED | LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_SCIENTIFIC)) && std::is_same_v); // expected 'double' or 'long double' + int iDesiredPrecision = /*((nModeFlags & (LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_FIXED | LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_SCIENTIFIC)) ? -1 : (*/ iPrecision > 0 ? iPrecision : FLT_DIG; //)); + + char szFormatBuffer[8]; + char* szFormat = szFormatBuffer; + *szFormat++ = '%'; + + if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_NUM_SHOWPOSITIVE) + *szFormat++ = '+'; + + if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_FLOAT_SHOWPOINT) + *szFormat++ = '#'; + + *szFormat++ = '.'; + *szFormat++ = '*'; + if constexpr (std::is_same_v) + *szFormat++ = 'L'; + + if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_FIXED) + *szFormat++ = 'f'; + else + { + const bool bIsUpperCase = (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_NUM_UPPERCASE); + + if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_HEX) + *szFormat++ = bIsUpperCase ? 'A' : 'a'; + else if (nModeFlags & LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_SCIENTIFIC) + *szFormat++ = bIsUpperCase ? 'E' : 'e'; + else + *szFormat++ = bIsUpperCase ? 'G' : 'g'; + } + *szFormat = '\0'; + + char szFloatBuffer[96]; + const int nFloatLength = CRT::StringPrintN(szFloatBuffer, sizeof(szFloatBuffer), szFormatBuffer, iDesiredPrecision, value); + + WriteMessage(szFloatBuffer, nFloatLength); +#endif + return *this; + } + + Stream_t& operator<<(const Vector_t& vecValue) + { + this->nModeFlags |= LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_FIXED; + this->iPrecision = 3; + *this << CS_XOR("vector3d: (") << vecValue.x << CS_XOR(" | ") << vecValue.y << CS_XOR(" | ") << vecValue.z << CS_XOR(")"); + return *this; + } + + Stream_t& operator<<(const QAngle_t& angValue) + { + this->nModeFlags |= LOG_MODE_FLOAT_FORMAT_FIXED; + this->iPrecision = 3; + *this << CS_XOR("qangle: (") << angValue.x << CS_XOR(" | ") << angValue.y << CS_XOR(" | ") << angValue.z << CS_XOR(")"); + return *this; + } + + Stream_t& operator<<(const Color_t& colValue) + { + *this << CS_XOR("color: (") << static_cast(colValue.r) << CS_XOR(" | ") << static_cast(colValue.g) << CS_XOR(" | ") << static_cast(colValue.b) << CS_XOR(" | ") << static_cast(colValue.a) << CS_XOR(")"); + return *this; + } + + bool bFirstPrint = true; + int iPrecision = 0; + LogModeFlags_t nModeFlags = LOG_MODE_NONE; + }; + + /* @section: stream control */ + // set console color flags for current stream, will reset on next message + Stream_t::ColorMarker_t SetColor(const LogColorFlags_t nColorFlags); + // set the decimal precision to be used to format floating-point values for current stream, will reset on next message + Stream_t::PrecisionMarker_t SetPrecision(const int m_iPrecision); + // add logging mode flags for current stream, will reset on next message + Stream_t::ModeMarker_t AddFlags(const LogModeFlags_t m_nModeFlags); + // remove logging mode flags for current stream + Stream_t::ModeMarker_t RemoveFlags(const LogModeFlags_t m_nModeFlags); + + /* @section: values */ + // primary logging stream + inline Stream_t stream; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/math.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/math.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..70e0df6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/math.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +#include "math.h" + +//used: getexportaddr +#include "memory.h" + +bool MATH::Setup() +{ + bool bSuccess = true; + + const void* hTier0Lib = MEM::GetModuleBaseHandle(TIER0_DLL); + if (hTier0Lib == nullptr) + return false; + + fnRandomSeed = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(hTier0Lib, CS_XOR("RandomSeed"))); + bSuccess &= (fnRandomSeed != nullptr); + + fnRandomFloat = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(hTier0Lib, CS_XOR("RandomFloat"))); + bSuccess &= (fnRandomFloat != nullptr); + + fnRandomFloatExp = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(hTier0Lib, CS_XOR("RandomFloatExp"))); + bSuccess &= (fnRandomFloatExp != nullptr); + + fnRandomInt = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(hTier0Lib, CS_XOR("RandomInt"))); + bSuccess &= (fnRandomInt != nullptr); + + fnRandomGaussianFloat = reinterpret_cast(MEM::GetExportAddress(hTier0Lib, CS_XOR("RandomGaussianFloat"))); + bSuccess &= (fnRandomGaussianFloat != nullptr); + + return bSuccess; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/math.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/math.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6874d99 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/math.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +#pragma once + +#include "../common.h" +// used: std::is_integral_v +#include +// used: sin, cos, pow, abs, sqrt +#include // used: MATH::Sin, cos, MATH::Pow, abs, sqrt +// used: rand, srand +#include +// used: time +#include + +// convert angle in degrees to radians +#define M_DEG2RAD(DEGREES) ((DEGREES) * (MATH::_PI / 180.f)) +// convert angle in radians to degrees +#define M_RAD2DEG(RADIANS) ((RADIANS) * (180.f / MATH::_PI)) +/// linearly interpolate the value between @a'X0' and @a'X1' by @a'FACTOR' +#define M_LERP(X0, X1, FACTOR) ((X0) + ((X1) - (X0)) * (FACTOR)) +/// trigonometry +#define M_COS(ANGLE) cos(ANGLE) +#define M_SIN(ANGLE) sin(ANGLE) +#define M_TAN(ANGLE) tan(ANGLE) +/// power +#define M_POW(BASE, EXPONENT) pow(BASE, EXPONENT) +/// absolute value +#define M_ABS(VALUE) abs(VALUE) +/// square root +#define M_SQRT(VALUE) sqrt(VALUE) +/// floor +#define M_FLOOR(VALUE) floor(VALUE) + +/* + * MATHEMATICS + * - basic trigonometry, algebraic mathematical functions and constants + */ +namespace MATH +{ + /* @section: constants */ + // pi value + inline constexpr float _PI = 3.141592654f; + // double of pi + inline constexpr float _2PI = 6.283185307f; + // half of pi + inline constexpr float _HPI = 1.570796327f; + // quarter of pi + inline constexpr float _QPI = 0.785398163f; + // reciprocal of double of pi + inline constexpr float _1DIV2PI = 0.159154943f; + // golden ratio + inline constexpr float _PHI = 1.618033988f; + + // capture game's exports + bool Setup(); + + /* @section: algorithm */ + /// alternative of 'std::min' + /// @returns : minimal value of the given comparable values + template + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE constexpr const T& Min(const T& left, const T& right) noexcept + { + return (right < left) ? right : left; + } + + /// alternative of 'std::max' + /// @returns : maximal value of the given comparable values + template + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE constexpr const T& Max(const T& left, const T& right) noexcept + { + return (right > left) ? right : left; + } + + /// alternative of 'std::clamp' + /// @returns : value clamped in range ['minimal' .. 'maximal'] + template + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE constexpr const T& Clamp(const T& value, const T& minimal, const T& maximal) noexcept + { + return (value < minimal) ? minimal : (value > maximal) ? maximal : + value; + } + + /* @section: exponential */ + /// @returns: true if given number is power of two, false otherwise + template requires (std::is_integral_v) + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE constexpr bool IsPowerOfTwo(const T value) noexcept + { + return value != 0 && (value & (value - 1)) == 0; + } + + /* @section: random using game's exports */ + inline int(CS_CDECL* fnRandomSeed)(int iSeed) = nullptr; + inline float(CS_CDECL* fnRandomFloat)(float flMinValue, float flMaxValue) = nullptr; + inline float(CS_CDECL* fnRandomFloatExp)(float flMinValue, float flMaxValue, float flExponent) = nullptr; + inline int(CS_CDECL* fnRandomInt)(int iMinValue, int iMaxValue) = nullptr; + inline float(CS_CDECL* fnRandomGaussianFloat)(float flMean, float flStdDev) = nullptr; +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/memory.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/memory.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c31b631 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/memory.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,499 @@ +// used: __readfsdword +#include +// used: d3d11 +#include + +#include "memory.h" + +// used: l_print +#include "log.h" +// used: chartohexint +#include "crt.h" +// used: pe64 +#include "pe64.h" + +bool MEM::Setup() +{ + bool bSuccess = true; + + const void* hDbgHelp = GetModuleBaseHandle(DBGHELP_DLL); + const void* hTier0 = GetModuleBaseHandle(TIER0_DLL); + if (hDbgHelp == nullptr || hTier0 == nullptr) + return false; + + fnUnDecorateSymbolName = reinterpret_cast(GetExportAddress(hDbgHelp, CS_XOR("UnDecorateSymbolName"))); + bSuccess &= (fnUnDecorateSymbolName != nullptr); + + fnLoadKV3 = reinterpret_cast(GetExportAddress(hTier0, CS_XOR("?LoadKV3@@YA_NPEAVKeyValues3@@PEAVCUtlString@@PEBDAEBUKV3ID_t@@2@Z"))); + bSuccess &= (fnLoadKV3 != nullptr); + + fnCreateMaterial = reinterpret_cast(FindPattern(MATERIAL_SYSTEM2_DLL, CS_XOR("48 89 5C 24 ? 48 89 6C 24 ? 56 57 41 56 48 81 EC ? ? ? ? 48 8B 05"))); + bSuccess &= (fnCreateMaterial != nullptr); + + fnUtlBufferInit = reinterpret_cast(GetExportAddress(hTier0, CS_XOR("??0CUtlBuffer@@QEAA@HHH@Z"))); + bSuccess &= (fnUtlBufferInit != nullptr); + + fnUtlBufferPutString = reinterpret_cast(GetExportAddress(hTier0, CS_XOR("?PutString@CUtlBuffer@@QEAAXPEBD@Z"))); + bSuccess &= (fnUtlBufferPutString != nullptr); + + fnUtlBufferEnsureCapacity = reinterpret_cast(GetExportAddress(hTier0, CS_XOR("?EnsureCapacity@CUtlBuffer@@QEAAXH@Z"))); + bSuccess &= (fnUtlBufferEnsureCapacity != nullptr); + + return bSuccess; +} + +#pragma region memory_allocation + +/* + * overload global new/delete operators with our allocators + * - @note: ensure that all sdk classes that can be instantiated have an overloaded constructor and/or game allocator, otherwise marked as non-constructible + */ +void* __cdecl operator new(const std::size_t nSize) +{ + return MEM::HeapAlloc(nSize); +} + +void* __cdecl operator new[](const std::size_t nSize) +{ + return MEM::HeapAlloc(nSize); +} + +void __cdecl operator delete(void* pMemory) noexcept +{ + MEM::HeapFree(pMemory); +} + +void __cdecl operator delete[](void* pMemory) noexcept +{ + MEM::HeapFree(pMemory); +} + +void* MEM::HeapAlloc(const std::size_t nSize) +{ + const HANDLE hHeap = ::GetProcessHeap(); + return ::HeapAlloc(hHeap, 0UL, nSize); +} + +void MEM::HeapFree(void* pMemory) +{ + if (pMemory != nullptr) + { + const HANDLE hHeap = ::GetProcessHeap(); + ::HeapFree(hHeap, 0UL, pMemory); + } +} + +void* MEM::HeapRealloc(void* pMemory, const std::size_t nNewSize) +{ + if (pMemory == nullptr) + return HeapAlloc(nNewSize); + + if (nNewSize == 0UL) + { + HeapFree(pMemory); + return nullptr; + } + + const HANDLE hHeap = ::GetProcessHeap(); + return ::HeapReAlloc(hHeap, 0UL, pMemory, nNewSize); +} + +#pragma endregion + +// @todo: move to win.cpp (or platform.cpp?) except getsectioninfo +#pragma region memory_get + +void* MEM::GetModuleBaseHandle(const wchar_t* wszModuleName) +{ + const _PEB* pPEB = reinterpret_cast<_PEB*>(__readgsqword(0x60)); + + if (wszModuleName == nullptr) + return pPEB->ImageBaseAddress; + + void* pModuleBase = nullptr; + for (LIST_ENTRY* pListEntry = pPEB->Ldr->InMemoryOrderModuleList.Flink; pListEntry != &pPEB->Ldr->InMemoryOrderModuleList; pListEntry = pListEntry->Flink) + { + const _LDR_DATA_TABLE_ENTRY* pEntry = CONTAINING_RECORD(pListEntry, _LDR_DATA_TABLE_ENTRY, InMemoryOrderLinks); + + if (pEntry->FullDllName.Buffer != nullptr && CRT::StringCompare(wszModuleName, pEntry->BaseDllName.Buffer) == 0) + { + pModuleBase = pEntry->DllBase; + break; + } + } + + if (pModuleBase == nullptr) + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("module base not found: \"") << wszModuleName << CS_XOR("\""); + + return pModuleBase; +} + +const wchar_t* MEM::GetModuleBaseFileName(const void* hModuleBase, const bool bGetFullPath) +{ + const _PEB* pPEB = reinterpret_cast<_PEB*>(__readgsqword(0x60)); + + if (hModuleBase == nullptr) + hModuleBase = pPEB->ImageBaseAddress; + + ::EnterCriticalSection(pPEB->LoaderLock); + + const wchar_t* wszModuleName = nullptr; + for (LIST_ENTRY* pListEntry = pPEB->Ldr->InMemoryOrderModuleList.Flink; pListEntry != &pPEB->Ldr->InMemoryOrderModuleList; pListEntry = pListEntry->Flink) + { + const _LDR_DATA_TABLE_ENTRY* pEntry = CONTAINING_RECORD(pListEntry, _LDR_DATA_TABLE_ENTRY, InMemoryOrderLinks); + + if (pEntry->DllBase == hModuleBase) + { + wszModuleName = bGetFullPath ? pEntry->FullDllName.Buffer : pEntry->BaseDllName.Buffer; + break; + } + } + + ::LeaveCriticalSection(pPEB->LoaderLock); + + return wszModuleName; +} + +void* MEM::GetExportAddress(const void* hModuleBase, const char* szProcedureName) +{ + const auto pBaseAddress = static_cast(hModuleBase); + + const auto pIDH = static_cast(hModuleBase); + if (pIDH->e_magic != IMAGE_DOS_SIGNATURE) + return nullptr; + + const auto pINH = reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pIDH->e_lfanew); + if (pINH->Signature != IMAGE_NT_SIGNATURE) + return nullptr; + + const IMAGE_OPTIONAL_HEADER64* pIOH = &pINH->OptionalHeader; + const std::uintptr_t nExportDirectorySize = pIOH->DataDirectory[IMAGE_DIRECTORY_ENTRY_EXPORT].Size; + const std::uintptr_t uExportDirectoryAddress = pIOH->DataDirectory[IMAGE_DIRECTORY_ENTRY_EXPORT].VirtualAddress; + + if (nExportDirectorySize == 0U || uExportDirectoryAddress == 0U) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("module has no exports: \"") << GetModuleBaseFileName(hModuleBase) << CS_XOR("\""); + return nullptr; + } + + const auto pIED = reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + uExportDirectoryAddress); + const auto pNamesRVA = reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pIED->AddressOfNames); + const auto pNameOrdinalsRVA = reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pIED->AddressOfNameOrdinals); + const auto pFunctionsRVA = reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pIED->AddressOfFunctions); + + // Perform binary search to find the export by name + std::size_t nRight = pIED->NumberOfNames, nLeft = 0U; + while (nRight != nLeft) + { + // Avoid INT_MAX/2 overflow + const std::size_t uMiddle = nLeft + ((nRight - nLeft) >> 1U); + const int iResult = CRT::StringCompare(szProcedureName, reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pNamesRVA[uMiddle])); + + if (iResult == 0) + { + const std::uint32_t uFunctionRVA = pFunctionsRVA[pNameOrdinalsRVA[uMiddle]]; + +#ifdef _DEBUG + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("export found: \"") << reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pNamesRVA[uMiddle]) << CS_XOR("\" in \"") << GetModuleBaseFileName(hModuleBase) << CS_XOR("\" at: ") << L::AddFlags(LOG_MODE_INT_SHOWBASE | LOG_MODE_INT_FORMAT_HEX) << uFunctionRVA; +#else + L_PRINT(LOG_INFO) << CS_XOR("export found: ") << szProcedureName; +#endif // _DEBUG + + // Check if it's a forwarded export + if (uFunctionRVA >= uExportDirectoryAddress && uFunctionRVA - uExportDirectoryAddress < nExportDirectorySize) + { + // Forwarded exports are not supported + break; + } + + return const_cast(pBaseAddress) + uFunctionRVA; + } + + if (iResult > 0) + nLeft = uMiddle + 1; + else + nRight = uMiddle; + } + + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("export not found: ") << szProcedureName; + + // Export not found + return nullptr; +} + +bool MEM::GetSectionInfo(const void* hModuleBase, const char* szSectionName, std::uint8_t** ppSectionStart, std::size_t* pnSectionSize) +{ + const auto pBaseAddress = static_cast(hModuleBase); + + const auto pIDH = static_cast(hModuleBase); + if (pIDH->e_magic != IMAGE_DOS_SIGNATURE) + return false; + + const auto pINH = reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pIDH->e_lfanew); + if (pINH->Signature != IMAGE_NT_SIGNATURE) + return false; + + const IMAGE_SECTION_HEADER* pISH = IMAGE_FIRST_SECTION(pINH); + + // go through all code sections + for (WORD i = 0U; i < pINH->FileHeader.NumberOfSections; i++, pISH++) + { + // @test: use case insensitive comparison instead? + if (CRT::StringCompareN(szSectionName, reinterpret_cast(pISH->Name), IMAGE_SIZEOF_SHORT_NAME) == 0) + { + if (ppSectionStart != nullptr) + *ppSectionStart = const_cast(pBaseAddress) + pISH->VirtualAddress; + + if (pnSectionSize != nullptr) + *pnSectionSize = pISH->SizeOfRawData; + + return true; + } + } + + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("code section not found: \"") << szSectionName << CS_XOR("\""); + return false; +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region memory_search + +std::uint8_t* MEM::FindPattern(const wchar_t* wszModuleName, const char* szPattern) +{ + // convert pattern string to byte array + const std::size_t nApproximateBufferSize = (CRT::StringLength(szPattern) >> 1U) + 1U; + std::uint8_t* arrByteBuffer = static_cast(MEM_STACKALLOC(nApproximateBufferSize)); + char* szMaskBuffer = static_cast(MEM_STACKALLOC(nApproximateBufferSize)); + PatternToBytes(szPattern, arrByteBuffer, szMaskBuffer); + + // @test: use search with straight in-place conversion? do not think it will be faster, cuz of bunch of new checks that gonna be performed for each iteration + return FindPattern(wszModuleName, reinterpret_cast(arrByteBuffer), szMaskBuffer); +} + +std::uint8_t* MEM::FindPattern(const wchar_t* wszModuleName, const char* szBytePattern, const char* szByteMask) +{ + const void* hModuleBase = GetModuleBaseHandle(wszModuleName); + + if (hModuleBase == nullptr) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to get module handle for: \"") << wszModuleName << CS_XOR("\""); + return nullptr; + } + + const auto pBaseAddress = static_cast(hModuleBase); + + const auto pIDH = static_cast(hModuleBase); + if (pIDH->e_magic != IMAGE_DOS_SIGNATURE) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to get module size, image is invalid"); + return nullptr; + } + + const auto pINH = reinterpret_cast(pBaseAddress + pIDH->e_lfanew); + if (pINH->Signature != IMAGE_NT_SIGNATURE) + { + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("failed to get module size, image is invalid"); + return nullptr; + } + + const std::uint8_t* arrByteBuffer = reinterpret_cast(szBytePattern); + const std::size_t nByteCount = CRT::StringLength(szByteMask); + + std::uint8_t* pFoundAddress = nullptr; + + // perform little overhead to keep all patterns unique +#ifdef CS_PARANOID_PATTERN_UNIQUENESS + const std::vector vecFoundOccurrences = FindPatternAllOccurrencesEx(pBaseAddress, pINH->OptionalHeader.SizeOfImage, arrByteBuffer, nByteCount, szByteMask); + + // notify user about non-unique pattern + if (!vecFoundOccurrences.empty()) + { + // notify user about non-unique pattern + if (vecFoundOccurrences.size() > 1U) + { + char* szPattern = static_cast(MEM_STACKALLOC((nByteCount << 1U) + nByteCount)); + [[maybe_unused]] const std::size_t nConvertedPatternLength = BytesToPattern(arrByteBuffer, nByteCount, szPattern); + + L_PRINT(LOG_WARNING) << CS_XOR("found more than one occurrence with \"") << szPattern << CS_XOR("\" pattern, consider updating it!"); + + MEM_STACKFREE(szPattern); + } + + // return first found occurrence + pFoundAddress = vecFoundOccurrences[0]; + } +#else + // @todo: we also can go through code sections and skip noexec pages, but will it really improve performance? / or at least for all occurrences search + // https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/winnt/ns-winnt-image_section_header +#if 0 + IMAGE_SECTION_HEADER* pCurrentSection = IMAGE_FIRST_SECTION(pINH); + for (WORD i = 0U; i != pINH->FileHeader.NumberOfSections; i++) + { + // check does page have executable code + if (pCurrentSection->Characteristics & IMAGE_SCN_CNT_CODE || pCurrentSection->Characteristics & IMAGE_SCN_MEM_EXECUTE) + { + pFoundAddress = FindPatternEx(pBaseAddress + pCurrentSection->VirtualAddress, pCurrentSection->SizeOfRawData, arrByteBuffer, nByteCount, szByteMask); + + if (pFoundAddress != nullptr) + break; + } + + ++pCurrentSection; + } +#else + pFoundAddress = FindPatternEx(pBaseAddress, pINH->OptionalHeader.SizeOfImage, arrByteBuffer, nByteCount, szByteMask); +#endif +#endif + + if (pFoundAddress == nullptr) + { + char* szPattern = static_cast(MEM_STACKALLOC((nByteCount << 1U) + nByteCount)); + [[maybe_unused]] const std::size_t nConvertedPatternLength = BytesToPattern(arrByteBuffer, nByteCount, szPattern); + + L_PRINT(LOG_ERROR) << CS_XOR("pattern not found: \"") << szPattern << CS_XOR("\""); + + MEM_STACKFREE(szPattern); + } + + return pFoundAddress; +} + +// @todo: msvc poorly optimizes this, it looks even better w/o optimization at all +std::uint8_t* MEM::FindPatternEx(const std::uint8_t* pRegionStart, const std::size_t nRegionSize, const std::uint8_t* arrByteBuffer, const std::size_t nByteCount, const char* szByteMask) +{ + std::uint8_t* pCurrentAddress = const_cast(pRegionStart); + const std::uint8_t* pRegionEnd = pRegionStart + nRegionSize - nByteCount; + const bool bIsMaskUsed = (szByteMask != nullptr); + + while (pCurrentAddress < pRegionEnd) + { + // check the first byte before entering the loop, otherwise if there two consecutive bytes of first byte in the buffer, we may skip both and fail the search + if ((bIsMaskUsed && *szByteMask == '?') || *pCurrentAddress == *arrByteBuffer) + { + if (nByteCount == 1) + return pCurrentAddress; + + // compare the least byte sequence and continue on wildcard or skip forward on first mismatched byte + std::size_t nComparedBytes = 0U; + while ((bIsMaskUsed && szByteMask[nComparedBytes + 1U] == '?') || pCurrentAddress[nComparedBytes + 1U] == arrByteBuffer[nComparedBytes + 1U]) + { + // check does byte sequence match + if (++nComparedBytes == nByteCount - 1U) + return pCurrentAddress; + } + + // skip non suitable bytes + pCurrentAddress += nComparedBytes; + } + + ++pCurrentAddress; + } + + return nullptr; +} + +std::vector MEM::FindPatternAllOccurrencesEx(const std::uint8_t* pRegionStart, const std::size_t nRegionSize, const std::uint8_t* arrByteBuffer, const std::size_t nByteCount, const char* szByteMask) +{ + const std::uint8_t* pRegionEnd = pRegionStart + nRegionSize - nByteCount; + const bool bIsMaskUsed = (szByteMask != nullptr); + + // container for addresses of the all found occurrences + std::vector vecOccurrences = {}; + + for (std::uint8_t* pCurrentByte = const_cast(pRegionStart); pCurrentByte < pRegionEnd; ++pCurrentByte) + { + // do a first byte check before entering the loop, otherwise if there two consecutive bytes of first byte in the buffer, we may skip both and fail the search + if ((!bIsMaskUsed || *szByteMask != '?') && *pCurrentByte != *arrByteBuffer) + continue; + + // check for bytes sequence match + bool bSequenceMatch = true; + for (std::size_t i = 1U; i < nByteCount; i++) + { + // compare sequence and continue on wildcard or skip forward on first mismatched byte + if ((!bIsMaskUsed || szByteMask[i] != '?') && pCurrentByte[i] != arrByteBuffer[i]) + { + // skip non suitable bytes + pCurrentByte += i - 1U; + + bSequenceMatch = false; + break; + } + } + + // check did we found address + if (bSequenceMatch) + vecOccurrences.push_back(pCurrentByte); + } + + return vecOccurrences; +} + +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region memory_extra + +std::size_t MEM::PatternToBytes(const char* szPattern, std::uint8_t* pOutByteBuffer, char* szOutMaskBuffer) +{ + std::uint8_t* pCurrentByte = pOutByteBuffer; + + while (*szPattern != '\0') + { + // check is a wildcard + if (*szPattern == '?') + { + ++szPattern; +#ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(*szPattern == '\0' || *szPattern == ' ' || *szPattern == '?'); // we're expect that next character either terminating null, whitespace or part of double wildcard (note that it's required if your pattern written without whitespaces) +#endif + + // ignore that + *pCurrentByte++ = 0U; + *szOutMaskBuffer++ = '?'; + } + // check is not space + else if (*szPattern != ' ') + { + // convert two consistent numbers in a row to byte value + std::uint8_t uByte = static_cast(CRT::CharToHexInt(*szPattern) << 4); + + ++szPattern; +#ifdef CS_PARANOID + CS_ASSERT(*szPattern != '\0' && *szPattern != '?' && *szPattern != ' '); // we're expect that byte always represented by two numbers in a row +#endif + + uByte |= static_cast(CRT::CharToHexInt(*szPattern)); + + *pCurrentByte++ = uByte; + *szOutMaskBuffer++ = 'x'; + } + + ++szPattern; + } + + // zero terminate both buffers + *pCurrentByte = 0U; + *szOutMaskBuffer = '\0'; + + return pCurrentByte - pOutByteBuffer; +} + +std::size_t MEM::BytesToPattern(const std::uint8_t* pByteBuffer, const std::size_t nByteCount, char* szOutBuffer) +{ + char* szCurrentPattern = szOutBuffer; + + for (std::size_t i = 0U; i < nByteCount; i++) + { + // manually convert byte to chars + const char* szHexByte = &CRT::_TWO_DIGITS_HEX_LUT[pByteBuffer[i] * 2U]; + *szCurrentPattern++ = szHexByte[0]; + *szCurrentPattern++ = szHexByte[1]; + *szCurrentPattern++ = ' '; + } + *--szCurrentPattern = '\0'; + + return szCurrentPattern - szOutBuffer; +} + +#pragma endregion diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/memory.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/memory.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dcf790b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/memory.h @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +#pragma once +// used: memory api +#include +// used: std::vector +#include + +#include "../common.h" + +#pragma region memory_definitions +#pragma warning(push) +#pragma warning(disable: 6255) // '_alloca' indicates failure by raising a stack overflow exception. consider using '_malloca' instead +#define MEM_STACKALLOC(SIZE) _malloca(SIZE) +#pragma warning(pop) +#define MEM_STACKFREE(MEMORY) static_cast(0) + +#define MEM_PAD(SIZE) \ +private: \ + char CS_CONCATENATE(pad_0, __COUNTER__)[SIZE]; \ +public: +#pragma endregion + +class CUtlBuffer; +class CKeyValues3; +struct KV3ID_t; + +namespace MEM +{ + bool Setup(); + + /* @section: allocation */ + // allocate a block of memory from a heap + [[nodiscard]] void* HeapAlloc(const std::size_t nSize); + // free a memory block allocated from a heap + void HeapFree(void* pMemory); + // reallocate a block of memory from a heap + // @note: we're expect this to allocate instead when passed null, and free if size is null + void* HeapRealloc(void* pMemory, const std::size_t nNewSize); + + /* @section: get */ + /// alternative of 'GetModuleHandle()' + /// @param[in] wszModuleName module name to search base handle for, null means current process + /// @returns: base handle of module with given name if it exist, null otherwise + [[nodiscard]] void* GetModuleBaseHandle(const wchar_t* wszModuleName); + /// alternative of 'GetModuleFileName()' + /// @param[in] hModuleBase module base to search filename for, null means current process + /// @returns: name of given module if it's valid, null otherwise + [[nodiscard]] const wchar_t* GetModuleBaseFileName(const void* hModuleBase, const bool bGetFullPath = false); + /// alternative of 'GetProcAddress()' + /// @remarks: doesn't support forwarded exports, this means you may need to manual call 'LoadLibrary'/'FreeLibrary' for export library + /// @returns: pointer to exported procedure + [[nodiscard]] void* GetExportAddress(const void* hModuleBase, const char* szProcedureName); + + /// @param[in] szSectionName section to get info of (e.g. ".rdata", ".text", etc) + /// @param[out] ppSectionStart output for section start address + /// @param[out] pnSectionSize output for section size + /// @returns: true if code section has been found, false otherwise + [[nodiscard]] bool GetSectionInfo(const void* hModuleBase, const char* szSectionName, std::uint8_t** ppSectionStart, std::size_t* pnSectionSize); + /// get absolute address from relative address + /// @param[in] pRelativeAddress pointer to relative address, e.g. destination address from JMP, JE, JNE and others instructions + /// @param[in] nPreOffset offset before relative address + /// @param[in] nPostOffset offset after relative address + /// @returns: pointer to absolute address + template + [[nodiscard]] T* GetAbsoluteAddress(T* pRelativeAddress, int nPreOffset = 0x0, int nPostOffset = 0x0) + { + pRelativeAddress += nPreOffset; + pRelativeAddress += sizeof(std::int32_t) + *reinterpret_cast(pRelativeAddress); + pRelativeAddress += nPostOffset; + return pRelativeAddress; + } + /// resolve rip relative address + /// @param[in] nAddressBytes as byte for the address we want to resolve + /// @param[in] nRVAOffset offset of the relative address + /// @param[in] nRIPOffset offset of the instruction pointer + /// @returns: pointer to resolved address + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE std::uint8_t* ResolveRelativeAddress(std::uint8_t* nAddressBytes, std::uint32_t nRVAOffset, std::uint32_t nRIPOffset) + { + std::uint32_t nRVA = *reinterpret_cast(nAddressBytes + nRVAOffset); + std::uint64_t nRIP = reinterpret_cast(nAddressBytes) + nRIPOffset; + + return reinterpret_cast(nRVA + nRIP); + } + + /// get pointer to function of virtual-function table + /// @returns: pointer to virtual function + template + [[nodiscard]] CS_INLINE T GetVFunc(const void* thisptr, std::size_t nIndex) + { + return (*static_cast(thisptr))[nIndex]; + } + /// call virtual function of specified class at given index + /// @note: reference and const reference arguments must be forwarded as pointers or wrapped with 'std::ref'/'std::cref' calls! + /// @returns: result of virtual function call + template + static CS_INLINE T CallVFunc(CBaseClass* thisptr, Args_t... argList) + { + using VirtualFn_t = T(__thiscall*)(const void*, decltype(argList)...); + return (*reinterpret_cast(reinterpret_cast(thisptr)))[nIndex](thisptr, argList...); + } + /* @section: search */ + /// ida style pattern byte comparison in a specific mo dule + /// @param[in] wszModuleName module name where to search for pattern + /// @param[in] szPattern ida style pattern, e.g. "55 8B 40 ? 30", wildcard can be either '?' or "??", bytes always presented by two numbers in a row [00 .. FF], whitespaces can be omitted (wildcards in this case should be two-character) + /// @returns: pointer to address of the first found occurrence with equal byte sequence on success, null otherwise + [[nodiscard]] std::uint8_t* FindPattern(const wchar_t* wszModuleName, const char* szPattern); + /// naive style pattern byte comparison in a specific module + /// @param[in] wszModuleName module name where to search for pattern + /// @param[in] szBytePattern naive style pattern, e.g. "\x55\x8B\x40\x00\x30", wildcard bytes value ignored + /// @param[in] szByteMask wildcard mask for byte array, e.g. "xxx?x", should always correspond to bytes count + /// @returns: pointer to address of the first found occurrence with equal byte sequence on success, null otherwise + [[nodiscard]] std::uint8_t* FindPattern(const wchar_t* wszModuleName, const char* szBytePattern, const char* szByteMask); + /// pattern byte comparison in the specific region + /// @param[in] arrByteBuffer byte sequence to search + /// @param[in] nByteCount count of search bytes + /// @param[in] szByteMask [optional] wildcard mask for byte array + /// @returns: pointer to address of the first found occurrence with equal byte sequence on success, null otherwise + [[nodiscard]] std::uint8_t* FindPatternEx(const std::uint8_t* pRegionStart, const std::size_t nRegionSize, const std::uint8_t* arrByteBuffer, const std::size_t nByteCount, const char* szByteMask = nullptr); + /// pattern byte comparison in the specific region + /// @param[in] arrByteBuffer byte sequence to search + /// @param[in] nByteCount count of search bytes + /// @param[in] szByteMask [optional] wildcard mask for byte array + /// @returns: pointers to addresses of the all found occurrences with equal byte sequence on success, empty otherwise + [[nodiscard]] std::vector FindPatternAllOccurrencesEx(const std::uint8_t* pRegionStart, const std::size_t nRegionSize, const std::uint8_t* arrByteBuffer, const std::size_t nByteCount, const char* szByteMask = nullptr); + /// class RTTI virtual table search in a specific module + /// @returns: pointer to the found virtual table on success, null otherwise + + /* @section: extra */ + /// convert ida-style pattern to byte array + /// @param[in] szPattern ida-style pattern, e.g. "55 8B 40 ? 30", wildcard can be either '?' or "??", bytes are always presented by two numbers in a row [00 .. FF], blank delimiters are ignored and not necessary (wildcard in this case should be two-character) + /// @param[out] pOutByteBuffer output for converted, zero-terminated byte array + /// @param[out] szOutMaskBuffer output for wildcard, zero-terminated byte mask + /// @returns: count of the converted bytes from the pattern + std::size_t PatternToBytes(const char* szPattern, std::uint8_t* pOutByteBuffer, char* szOutMaskBuffer); + /// convert byte array to ida-style pattern + /// @param[in] pByteBuffer buffer of bytes to convert + /// @param[in] nByteCount count of bytes to convert + /// @param[out] szOutBuffer output for converted pattern + /// @returns: length of the converted ida-style pattern, not including the terminating null + std::size_t BytesToPattern(const std::uint8_t* pByteBuffer, const std::size_t nByteCount, char* szOutBuffer); + + /* @section: game exports */ + inline unsigned long(CS_STDCALL* fnUnDecorateSymbolName)(const char* szName, char* pszOutput, unsigned long nMaxStringLength, unsigned long dwFlags) = nullptr; + + inline bool(CS_FASTCALL* fnLoadKV3)(CKeyValues3*, void*, const char*, const KV3ID_t*, const char*); + inline std::int64_t(CS_FASTCALL* fnCreateMaterial)(void*, void*, const char*, void*, unsigned int, unsigned int); + + inline void(CS_FASTCALL* fnUtlBufferInit)(CUtlBuffer*, int, int, int); + inline void(CS_FASTCALL* fnUtlBufferPutString)(CUtlBuffer*, const char*); + inline void(CS_FASTCALL* fnUtlBufferEnsureCapacity)(CUtlBuffer*, int); +} diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/notify.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/notify.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..905e832 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/notify.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +#include "notify.h" + +// used: cheat variables +#include "../core/variables.h" +// used: menu::bMainWindowOpened +#include "../core/menu.h" +// used: [resources] font awesome icons definitions +#include "../../resources/font_awesome_5.h" +// used: easingg library +#include "easing.h" + +inline static const float GetTime() noexcept +{ + return static_cast(clock() / 1000.f); +} + +inline static bool IsEmptyOrNullptr(const char* szText) +{ + return szText == nullptr || szText[0] == '\0'; +} + +NOTIFY::NotificationData_t::NotificationData_t(ENotificationType nType, const char* szFormat, ...) : + nType(nType), flCreateionTime(GetTime()), animHandler(&EASING::InQuad, &EASING::OutQuad) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, szFormat); + stbsp_vsnprintf(this->szBuffer, sizeof(szBuffer), szFormat, args); + va_end(args); +} + +const Color_t& NOTIFY::NotificationData_t::GetTypeColor() const +{ + switch (nType) + { + case N_TYPE_INFO: + // cyan + return Color_t(0, 255, 255); + case N_TYPE_SUCCESS: + // green + return Color_t(0, 255, 0); + case N_TYPE_WARNING: + // yellow + return Color_t(255, 255, 0); + case N_TYPE_ERROR: + // red + return Color_t(255, 0, 0); + default: + // white + return Color_t(255, 255, 255); + } +} + +const char* NOTIFY::NotificationData_t::Data() const +{ + return this->szBuffer; +} + +const char* NOTIFY::NotificationData_t::GetIcon() const +{ + switch (nType) + { + case N_TYPE_INFO: + return ICON_FA_INFO; + case N_TYPE_SUCCESS: + return ICON_FA_CHECK; + case N_TYPE_WARNING: + return ICON_FA_EXCLAMATION; + case N_TYPE_ERROR: + return ICON_FA_TIMES; + default: + return nullptr; + } +} + +const float NOTIFY::NotificationData_t::GetTimeDelta(const float flCurrentTime) const +{ + return flCurrentTime - this->flCreateionTime; +} + +void NOTIFY::Push(const NotificationData_t& notification) +{ + vecNotifications.push_back(notification); +} + +void NOTIFY::_Remove(size_t nIndex) +{ + vecNotifications.erase(vecNotifications.begin() + nIndex); +} + +void NOTIFY::Render() +{ + if (vecNotifications.empty()) + return; + + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + + // padding with menu watermark + float flPaddingY = (MENU::bMainWindowOpened && C_GET(bool, Vars.bWatermark)) ? ImGui::GetFrameHeight() : 0.f; + + for (size_t i = 0U; i < vecNotifications.size(); i++) + { + NotificationData_t* pData = &vecNotifications[i]; + + // shouldn't happen, but maybe it does + if (IsEmptyOrNullptr(pData->Data())) + continue; + + // handling animation + const float flTimeDelta = pData->GetTimeDelta(GetTime()); + pData->animHandler.Update(io.DeltaTime, style.AnimationSpeed); + + if (flTimeDelta >= (_MAX_TIME - 0.25f)) + pData->animHandler.SetSwitch(false); + else if (flTimeDelta <= 0.25f) + pData->animHandler.SetSwitch(true); + + const float flAnimValue = pData->animHandler.GetValue(1.f); + + // if animation is done, remove notification + if (!pData->animHandler.GetSwitch()) + { + _Remove(i); + continue; + } + + // render frame and notification + CRT::String_t<32U> szWindowName(CS_XOR("notification##%d"), i); + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(style.WindowPadding.x * flAnimValue, flPaddingY * flAnimValue), ImGuiCond_Always); + ImGui::Begin(szWindowName.Data(), nullptr, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing); + { + if (const char* szIcon = pData->GetIcon(); szIcon != nullptr) + { + ImGui::TextColored(pData->GetTypeColor().GetVec4(flAnimValue), szIcon); + ImGui::SameLine(); + } + + ImGui::TextColored(C_GET(ColorPickerVar_t, Vars.colPrimtv0).colValue.GetVec4(flAnimValue), pData->Data()); + + flPaddingY += ImGui::GetWindowHeight(); + } + ImGui::End(); + } +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/notify.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/notify.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80e1614 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/notify.h @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +#pragma once + +// used: [stl] vector +#include +// used: draw wrapper +#include "draw.h" + +#pragma region notify_definitions +#define NOFITY_TEXT_SIZE 64U // max size of notification text +// @todo: use ImStyle? +#define NOTIFY_ANIMATION_TIME 15.0 // time in ms to show/hide notification +#define NOTIFY_DELETE_TIME 30.0 // time in ms to delete notification +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region notify_enumerations +using NotificationType_t = int; + +enum ENotificationType : NotificationType_t +{ + N_TYPE_DEFAULT = 0, + N_TYPE_INFO, + N_TYPE_SUCCESS, + N_TYPE_WARNING, + N_TYPE_ERROR, + N_TYPE_MAX +}; + +using NotificationState_t = int; + +enum ENotificationState : NotificationState_t +{ + N_STATE_START = 0, + N_STATE_STAY, + N_STATE_END, + N_STATE_EXPIRED, + N_STATE_MAX +}; + +#pragma endregion + +namespace NOTIFY +{ + struct NotificationData_t + { + NotificationData_t(ENotificationType nType, const char* szFormat, ...); + + /// @return color of notification type + const Color_t& GetTypeColor() const; + /// @return c-type string of notification text + const char* Data() const; + /// @return icon of notification type + const char* GetIcon() const; + /// @return time difference between creation and current time + const float GetTimeDelta(const float flCurrentTime) const; + + int nType = 0; + char szBuffer[NOFITY_TEXT_SIZE]; + float flCreateionTime = 0.0; + AnimationHandler_t animHandler = AnimationHandler_t(); + }; + + /* @section: main */ + // push notification to queue + void Push(const NotificationData_t& notification); + // pop notification from queue + void _Remove(size_t nIndex); + // render notifications + void Render(); + + /* @section: values */ + // maximum time to show notification + inline constexpr float _MAX_TIME = 5.f; + // maximum count of notifications + inline std::vector vecNotifications = {}; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/pe64.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/pe64.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..306f701 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/cstrike/utilities/pe64.h @@ -0,0 +1,592 @@ +#pragma once +// used: [win] winapi +#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#endif +#include + +#pragma region winapi_nt_types +using NTSTATUS = LONG; +using MEMORY_INFORMATION_CLASS = INT; +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region winapi_nt_definitions +#define NtCurrentProcess() (reinterpret_cast(-1)) +#define NtCurrentThread() (reinterpret_cast(-2)) + +/* + * NT_SUCCESS = [0x00000000 .. 0x3FFFFFFF] + * NT_INFORMATION = [0x40000000 .. 0x7FFFFFFF] + * NT_WARNING = [0x80000000 .. 0xBFFFFFFF] + * NT_ERROR = [0xC0000000 .. 0xFFFFFFFF] + */ +#define NT_SUCCESS(STATUS) (static_cast(STATUS) >= 0) +#define NT_INFORMATION(STATUS) ((static_cast(STATUS) >> 30UL) == 1UL) +#define NT_WARNING(STATUS) ((static_cast(STATUS) >> 30UL) == 2UL) +#define NT_ERROR(STATUS) ((static_cast(STATUS) >> 30UL) == 3UL) +#pragma endregion + +#pragma region winapi_nt + +// @credits: https://www.vergiliusproject.com/kernels/x86/Windows%2010 + +typedef struct _UNICODE_STRING +{ + USHORT Length; // 0x0 + USHORT MaximumLength; // 0x2 + WCHAR* Buffer; // 0x8 +} UNICODE_STRING, *PUNICODE_STRING; + +static_assert(sizeof(_UNICODE_STRING) == 0x10); + +struct _RTL_BALANCED_NODE +{ + union + { + struct _RTL_BALANCED_NODE* Children[2]; //0x0 + + struct + { + struct _RTL_BALANCED_NODE* Left; //0x0 + struct _RTL_BALANCED_NODE* Right; //0x8 + }; + }; + + union + { + struct + { + UCHAR Red : 1; //0x10 + UCHAR Balance : 2; //0x10 + }; + + ULONGLONG ParentValue; //0x10 + }; +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_RTL_BALANCED_NODE) == 0x18); + +struct _LDR_DATA_TABLE_ENTRY +{ + struct _LIST_ENTRY InLoadOrderLinks; //0x0 + struct _LIST_ENTRY InMemoryOrderLinks; //0x10 + struct _LIST_ENTRY InInitializationOrderLinks; //0x20 + VOID* DllBase; //0x30 + VOID* EntryPoint; //0x38 + ULONG SizeOfImage; //0x40 + struct _UNICODE_STRING FullDllName; //0x48 + struct _UNICODE_STRING BaseDllName; //0x58 + + union + { + UCHAR FlagGroup[4]; //0x68 + ULONG Flags; //0x68 + + struct + { + ULONG PackagedBinary : 1; //0x68 + ULONG MarkedForRemoval : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ImageDll : 1; //0x68 + ULONG LoadNotificationsSent : 1; //0x68 + ULONG TelemetryEntryProcessed : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ProcessStaticImport : 1; //0x68 + ULONG InLegacyLists : 1; //0x68 + ULONG InIndexes : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ShimDll : 1; //0x68 + ULONG InExceptionTable : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ReservedFlags1 : 2; //0x68 + ULONG LoadInProgress : 1; //0x68 + ULONG LoadConfigProcessed : 1; //0x68 + ULONG EntryProcessed : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ProtectDelayLoad : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ReservedFlags3 : 2; //0x68 + ULONG DontCallForThreads : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ProcessAttachCalled : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ProcessAttachFailed : 1; //0x68 + ULONG CorDeferredValidate : 1; //0x68 + ULONG CorImage : 1; //0x68 + ULONG DontRelocate : 1; //0x68 + ULONG CorILOnly : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ChpeImage : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ChpeEmulatorImage : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ReservedFlags5 : 1; //0x68 + ULONG Redirected : 1; //0x68 + ULONG ReservedFlags6 : 2; //0x68 + ULONG CompatDatabaseProcessed : 1; //0x68 + }; + }; + + USHORT ObsoleteLoadCount; //0x6c + USHORT TlsIndex; //0x6e + struct _LIST_ENTRY HashLinks; //0x70 + ULONG TimeDateStamp; //0x80 + struct _ACTIVATION_CONTEXT* EntryPointActivationContext; //0x88 + VOID* Lock; //0x90 + struct _LDR_DDAG_NODE* DdagNode; //0x98 + struct _LIST_ENTRY NodeModuleLink; //0xa0 + struct _LDRP_LOAD_CONTEXT* LoadContext; //0xb0 + VOID* ParentDllBase; //0xb8 + VOID* SwitchBackContext; //0xc0 + _RTL_BALANCED_NODE BaseAddressIndexNode; //0xc8 + _RTL_BALANCED_NODE MappingInfoIndexNode; //0xe0 + ULONGLONG OriginalBase; //0xf8 + union _LARGE_INTEGER LoadTime; //0x100 + ULONG BaseNameHashValue; //0x108 + enum _LDR_DLL_LOAD_REASON LoadReason; //0x10c + ULONG ImplicitPathOptions; //0x110 + ULONG ReferenceCount; //0x114 + ULONG DependentLoadFlags; //0x118 + UCHAR SigningLevel; //0x11c + ULONG CheckSum; //0x120 + VOID* ActivePatchImageBase; //0x128 + enum _LDR_HOT_PATCH_STATE HotPatchState; //0x130 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_LDR_DATA_TABLE_ENTRY) == 0x138); + +struct _PEB_LDR_DATA +{ + ULONG Length; //0x0 + UCHAR Initialized; //0x4 + VOID* SsHandle; //0x8 + struct _LIST_ENTRY InLoadOrderModuleList; //0x10 + struct _LIST_ENTRY InMemoryOrderModuleList; //0x20 + struct _LIST_ENTRY InInitializationOrderModuleList; //0x30 + VOID* EntryInProgress; //0x40 + UCHAR ShutdownInProgress; //0x48 + VOID* ShutdownThreadId; //0x50 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_PEB_LDR_DATA) == 0x58); + +struct _CURDIR +{ + struct _UNICODE_STRING DosPath; //0x0 + VOID* Handle; //0x10 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_CURDIR) == 0x18); + +struct _STRING +{ + USHORT Length; //0x0 + USHORT MaximumLength; //0x2 + CHAR* Buffer; //0x8 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_STRING) == 0x10); + +struct _RTL_DRIVE_LETTER_CURDIR +{ + USHORT Flags; //0x0 + USHORT Length; //0x2 + ULONG TimeStamp; //0x4 + struct _STRING DosPath; //0x8 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_RTL_DRIVE_LETTER_CURDIR) == 0x18); + +struct _RTL_USER_PROCESS_PARAMETERS +{ + ULONG MaximumLength; //0x0 + ULONG Length; //0x4 + ULONG Flags; //0x8 + ULONG DebugFlags; //0xc + VOID* ConsoleHandle; //0x10 + ULONG ConsoleFlags; //0x18 + VOID* StandardInput; //0x20 + VOID* StandardOutput; //0x28 + VOID* StandardError; //0x30 + struct _CURDIR CurrentDirectory; //0x38 + struct _UNICODE_STRING DllPath; //0x50 + struct _UNICODE_STRING ImagePathName; //0x60 + struct _UNICODE_STRING CommandLine; //0x70 + VOID* Environment; //0x80 + ULONG StartingX; //0x88 + ULONG StartingY; //0x8c + ULONG CountX; //0x90 + ULONG CountY; //0x94 + ULONG CountCharsX; //0x98 + ULONG CountCharsY; //0x9c + ULONG FillAttribute; //0xa0 + ULONG WindowFlags; //0xa4 + ULONG ShowWindowFlags; //0xa8 + struct _UNICODE_STRING WindowTitle; //0xb0 + struct _UNICODE_STRING DesktopInfo; //0xc0 + struct _UNICODE_STRING ShellInfo; //0xd0 + struct _UNICODE_STRING RuntimeData; //0xe0 + struct _RTL_DRIVE_LETTER_CURDIR CurrentDirectores[32]; //0xf0 + ULONGLONG EnvironmentSize; //0x3f0 + ULONGLONG EnvironmentVersion; //0x3f8 + VOID* PackageDependencyData; //0x400 + ULONG ProcessGroupId; //0x408 + ULONG LoaderThreads; //0x40c + struct _UNICODE_STRING RedirectionDllName; //0x410 + struct _UNICODE_STRING HeapPartitionName; //0x420 + ULONGLONG* DefaultThreadpoolCpuSetMasks; //0x430 + ULONG DefaultThreadpoolCpuSetMaskCount; //0x438 + ULONG DefaultThreadpoolThreadMaximum; //0x43c + ULONG HeapMemoryTypeMask; //0x440 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_RTL_USER_PROCESS_PARAMETERS) == 0x448); + +struct _PEB +{ + UCHAR InheritedAddressSpace; //0x0 + UCHAR ReadImageFileExecOptions; //0x1 + UCHAR BeingDebugged; //0x2 + + union + { + UCHAR BitField; //0x3 + + struct + { + UCHAR ImageUsesLargePages : 1; //0x3 + UCHAR IsProtectedProcess : 1; //0x3 + UCHAR IsImageDynamicallyRelocated : 1; //0x3 + UCHAR SkipPatchingUser32Forwarders : 1; //0x3 + UCHAR IsPackagedProcess : 1; //0x3 + UCHAR IsAppContainer : 1; //0x3 + UCHAR IsProtectedProcessLight : 1; //0x3 + UCHAR IsLongPathAwareProcess : 1; //0x3 + }; + }; + + UCHAR Padding0[4]; //0x4 + VOID* Mutant; //0x8 + VOID* ImageBaseAddress; //0x10 + struct _PEB_LDR_DATA* Ldr; //0x18 + struct _RTL_USER_PROCESS_PARAMETERS* ProcessParameters; //0x20 + VOID* SubSystemData; //0x28 + VOID* ProcessHeap; //0x30 + struct _RTL_CRITICAL_SECTION* FastPebLock; //0x38 + union _SLIST_HEADER* volatile AtlThunkSListPtr; //0x40 + VOID* IFEOKey; //0x48 + + union + { + ULONG CrossProcessFlags; //0x50 + + struct + { + ULONG ProcessInJob : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ProcessInitializing : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ProcessUsingVEH : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ProcessUsingVCH : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ProcessUsingFTH : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ProcessPreviouslyThrottled : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ProcessCurrentlyThrottled : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ProcessImagesHotPatched : 1; //0x50 + ULONG ReservedBits0 : 24; //0x50 + }; + }; + + UCHAR Padding1[4]; //0x54 + + union + { + VOID* KernelCallbackTable; //0x58 + VOID* UserSharedInfoPtr; //0x58 + }; + + ULONG SystemReserved; //0x60 + ULONG AtlThunkSListPtr32; //0x64 + VOID* ApiSetMap; //0x68 + ULONG TlsExpansionCounter; //0x70 + UCHAR Padding2[4]; //0x74 + struct _RTL_BITMAP* TlsBitmap; //0x78 + ULONG TlsBitmapBits[2]; //0x80 + VOID* ReadOnlySharedMemoryBase; //0x88 + VOID* SharedData; //0x90 + VOID** ReadOnlyStaticServerData; //0x98 + VOID* AnsiCodePageData; //0xa0 + VOID* OemCodePageData; //0xa8 + VOID* UnicodeCaseTableData; //0xb0 + ULONG NumberOfProcessors; //0xb8 + ULONG NtGlobalFlag; //0xbc + union _LARGE_INTEGER CriticalSectionTimeout; //0xc0 + ULONGLONG HeapSegmentReserve; //0xc8 + ULONGLONG HeapSegmentCommit; //0xd0 + ULONGLONG HeapDeCommitTotalFreeThreshold; //0xd8 + ULONGLONG HeapDeCommitFreeBlockThreshold; //0xe0 + ULONG NumberOfHeaps; //0xe8 + ULONG MaximumNumberOfHeaps; //0xec + VOID** ProcessHeaps; //0xf0 + VOID* GdiSharedHandleTable; //0xf8 + VOID* ProcessStarterHelper; //0x100 + ULONG GdiDCAttributeList; //0x108 + UCHAR Padding3[4]; //0x10c + struct _RTL_CRITICAL_SECTION* LoaderLock; //0x110 + ULONG OSMajorVersion; //0x118 + ULONG OSMinorVersion; //0x11c + USHORT OSBuildNumber; //0x120 + USHORT OSCSDVersion; //0x122 + ULONG OSPlatformId; //0x124 + ULONG ImageSubsystem; //0x128 + ULONG ImageSubsystemMajorVersion; //0x12c + ULONG ImageSubsystemMinorVersion; //0x130 + UCHAR Padding4[4]; //0x134 + ULONGLONG ActiveProcessAffinityMask; //0x138 + ULONG GdiHandleBuffer[60]; //0x140 + VOID(*PostProcessInitRoutine) + (); //0x230 + struct _RTL_BITMAP* TlsExpansionBitmap; //0x238 + ULONG TlsExpansionBitmapBits[32]; //0x240 + ULONG SessionId; //0x2c0 + UCHAR Padding5[4]; //0x2c4 + union _ULARGE_INTEGER AppCompatFlags; //0x2c8 + union _ULARGE_INTEGER AppCompatFlagsUser; //0x2d0 + VOID* pShimData; //0x2d8 + VOID* AppCompatInfo; //0x2e0 + struct _UNICODE_STRING CSDVersion; //0x2e8 + struct _ACTIVATION_CONTEXT_DATA* ActivationContextData; //0x2f8 + struct _ASSEMBLY_STORAGE_MAP* ProcessAssemblyStorageMap; //0x300 + struct _ACTIVATION_CONTEXT_DATA* SystemDefaultActivationContextData; //0x308 + struct _ASSEMBLY_STORAGE_MAP* SystemAssemblyStorageMap; //0x310 + ULONGLONG MinimumStackCommit; //0x318 + VOID* SparePointers[2]; //0x320 + VOID* PatchLoaderData; //0x330 + struct _CHPEV2_PROCESS_INFO* ChpeV2ProcessInfo; //0x338 + ULONG AppModelFeatureState; //0x340 + ULONG SpareUlongs[2]; //0x344 + USHORT ActiveCodePage; //0x34c + USHORT OemCodePage; //0x34e + USHORT UseCaseMapping; //0x350 + USHORT UnusedNlsField; //0x352 + VOID* WerRegistrationData; //0x358 + VOID* WerShipAssertPtr; //0x360 + VOID* EcCodeBitMap; //0x368 + VOID* pImageHeaderHash; //0x370 + + union + { + ULONG TracingFlags; //0x378 + + struct + { + ULONG HeapTracingEnabled : 1; //0x378 + ULONG CritSecTracingEnabled : 1; //0x378 + ULONG LibLoaderTracingEnabled : 1; //0x378 + ULONG SpareTracingBits : 29; //0x378 + }; + }; + + UCHAR Padding6[4]; //0x37c + ULONGLONG CsrServerReadOnlySharedMemoryBase; //0x380 + ULONGLONG TppWorkerpListLock; //0x388 + struct _LIST_ENTRY TppWorkerpList; //0x390 + VOID* WaitOnAddressHashTable[128]; //0x3a0 + VOID* TelemetryCoverageHeader; //0x7a0 + ULONG CloudFileFlags; //0x7a8 + ULONG CloudFileDiagFlags; //0x7ac + CHAR PlaceholderCompatibilityMode; //0x7b0 + CHAR PlaceholderCompatibilityModeReserved[7]; //0x7b1 + struct _LEAP_SECOND_DATA* LeapSecondData; //0x7b8 + + union + { + ULONG LeapSecondFlags; //0x7c0 + + struct + { + ULONG SixtySecondEnabled : 1; //0x7c0 + ULONG Reserved : 31; //0x7c0 + }; + }; + + ULONG NtGlobalFlag2; //0x7c4 + ULONGLONG ExtendedFeatureDisableMask; //0x7c8 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_PEB) == 0x7d0); + +struct _CLIENT_ID +{ + PVOID UniqueProcess; // 0x0 + PVOID UniqueThread; // 0x8 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_CLIENT_ID) == 0x10); + +struct _GDI_TEB_BATCH +{ + ULONG Offset : 31; //0x0 + ULONG HasRenderingCommand : 1; //0x0 + ULONGLONG HDC; //0x8 + ULONG Buffer[310]; //0x10 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_GDI_TEB_BATCH) == 0x4E8); + +struct _ACTIVATION_CONTEXT_STACK +{ + struct _RTL_ACTIVATION_CONTEXT_STACK_FRAME* ActiveFrame; //0x0 + struct _LIST_ENTRY FrameListCache; //0x8 + ULONG Flags; //0x18 + ULONG NextCookieSequenceNumber; //0x1c + ULONG StackId; //0x20 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_ACTIVATION_CONTEXT_STACK) == 0x28); + +struct _TEB +{ + struct _NT_TIB NtTib; //0x0 + VOID* EnvironmentPointer; //0x38 + struct _CLIENT_ID ClientId; //0x40 + VOID* ActiveRpcHandle; //0x50 + VOID* ThreadLocalStoragePointer; //0x58 + struct _PEB* ProcessEnvironmentBlock; //0x60 + ULONG LastErrorValue; //0x68 + ULONG CountOfOwnedCriticalSections; //0x6c + VOID* CsrClientThread; //0x70 + VOID* Win32ThreadInfo; //0x78 + ULONG User32Reserved[26]; //0x80 + ULONG UserReserved[5]; //0xe8 + VOID* WOW32Reserved; //0x100 + ULONG CurrentLocale; //0x108 + ULONG FpSoftwareStatusRegister; //0x10c + VOID* ReservedForDebuggerInstrumentation[16]; //0x110 + VOID* SystemReserved1[30]; //0x190 + CHAR PlaceholderCompatibilityMode; //0x280 + UCHAR PlaceholderHydrationAlwaysExplicit; //0x281 + CHAR PlaceholderReserved[10]; //0x282 + ULONG ProxiedProcessId; //0x28c + struct _ACTIVATION_CONTEXT_STACK _ActivationStack; //0x290 + UCHAR WorkingOnBehalfTicket[8]; //0x2b8 + LONG ExceptionCode; //0x2c0 + UCHAR Padding0[4]; //0x2c4 + struct _ACTIVATION_CONTEXT_STACK* ActivationContextStackPointer; //0x2c8 + ULONGLONG InstrumentationCallbackSp; //0x2d0 + ULONGLONG InstrumentationCallbackPreviousPc; //0x2d8 + ULONGLONG InstrumentationCallbackPreviousSp; //0x2e0 + ULONG TxFsContext; //0x2e8 + UCHAR InstrumentationCallbackDisabled; //0x2ec + UCHAR UnalignedLoadStoreExceptions; //0x2ed + UCHAR Padding1[2]; //0x2ee + struct _GDI_TEB_BATCH GdiTebBatch; //0x2f0 + struct _CLIENT_ID RealClientId; //0x7d8 + VOID* GdiCachedProcessHandle; //0x7e8 + ULONG GdiClientPID; //0x7f0 + ULONG GdiClientTID; //0x7f4 + VOID* GdiThreadLocalInfo; //0x7f8 + ULONGLONG Win32ClientInfo[62]; //0x800 + VOID* glDispatchTable[233]; //0x9f0 + ULONGLONG glReserved1[29]; //0x1138 + VOID* glReserved2; //0x1220 + VOID* glSectionInfo; //0x1228 + VOID* glSection; //0x1230 + VOID* glTable; //0x1238 + VOID* glCurrentRC; //0x1240 + VOID* glContext; //0x1248 + ULONG LastStatusValue; //0x1250 + UCHAR Padding2[4]; //0x1254 + struct _UNICODE_STRING StaticUnicodeString; //0x1258 + WCHAR StaticUnicodeBuffer[261]; //0x1268 + UCHAR Padding3[6]; //0x1472 + VOID* DeallocationStack; //0x1478 + VOID* TlsSlots[64]; //0x1480 + struct _LIST_ENTRY TlsLinks; //0x1680 + VOID* Vdm; //0x1690 + VOID* ReservedForNtRpc; //0x1698 + VOID* DbgSsReserved[2]; //0x16a0 + ULONG HardErrorMode; //0x16b0 + UCHAR Padding4[4]; //0x16b4 + VOID* Instrumentation[11]; //0x16b8 + struct _GUID ActivityId; //0x1710 + VOID* SubProcessTag; //0x1720 + VOID* PerflibData; //0x1728 + VOID* EtwTraceData; //0x1730 + VOID* WinSockData; //0x1738 + ULONG GdiBatchCount; //0x1740 + + union + { + struct _PROCESSOR_NUMBER CurrentIdealProcessor; //0x1744 + ULONG IdealProcessorValue; //0x1744 + + struct + { + UCHAR ReservedPad0; //0x1744 + UCHAR ReservedPad1; //0x1745 + UCHAR ReservedPad2; //0x1746 + UCHAR IdealProcessor; //0x1747 + }; + }; + + ULONG GuaranteedStackBytes; //0x1748 + UCHAR Padding5[4]; //0x174c + VOID* ReservedForPerf; //0x1750 + VOID* ReservedForOle; //0x1758 + ULONG WaitingOnLoaderLock; //0x1760 + UCHAR Padding6[4]; //0x1764 + VOID* SavedPriorityState; //0x1768 + ULONGLONG ReservedForCodeCoverage; //0x1770 + VOID* ThreadPoolData; //0x1778 + VOID** TlsExpansionSlots; //0x1780 + struct _CHPEV2_CPUAREA_INFO* ChpeV2CpuAreaInfo; //0x1788 + VOID* Unused; //0x1790 + ULONG MuiGeneration; //0x1798 + ULONG IsImpersonating; //0x179c + VOID* NlsCache; //0x17a0 + VOID* pShimData; //0x17a8 + ULONG HeapData; //0x17b0 + UCHAR Padding7[4]; //0x17b4 + VOID* CurrentTransactionHandle; //0x17b8 + struct _TEB_ACTIVE_FRAME* ActiveFrame; //0x17c0 + VOID* FlsData; //0x17c8 + VOID* PreferredLanguages; //0x17d0 + VOID* UserPrefLanguages; //0x17d8 + VOID* MergedPrefLanguages; //0x17e0 + ULONG MuiImpersonation; //0x17e8 + + union + { + volatile USHORT CrossTebFlags; //0x17ec + USHORT SpareCrossTebBits : 16; //0x17ec + }; + + union + { + USHORT SameTebFlags; //0x17ee + + struct + { + USHORT SafeThunkCall : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT InDebugPrint : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT HasFiberData : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT SkipThreadAttach : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT WerInShipAssertCode : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT RanProcessInit : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT ClonedThread : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT SuppressDebugMsg : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT DisableUserStackWalk : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT RtlExceptionAttached : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT InitialThread : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT SessionAware : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT LoadOwner : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT LoaderWorker : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT SkipLoaderInit : 1; //0x17ee + USHORT SkipFileAPIBrokering : 1; //0x17ee + }; + }; + + VOID* TxnScopeEnterCallback; //0x17f0 + VOID* TxnScopeExitCallback; //0x17f8 + VOID* TxnScopeContext; //0x1800 + ULONG LockCount; //0x1808 + LONG WowTebOffset; //0x180c + VOID* ResourceRetValue; //0x1810 + VOID* ReservedForWdf; //0x1818 + ULONGLONG ReservedForCrt; //0x1820 + struct _GUID EffectiveContainerId; //0x1828 + ULONGLONG LastSleepCounter; //0x1838 + ULONG SpinCallCount; //0x1840 + UCHAR Padding8[4]; //0x1844 + ULONGLONG ExtendedFeatureDisableMask; //0x1848 +}; + +static_assert(sizeof(_TEB) == 0x1850); +#pragma endregion diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/binary/freetype.lib b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/binary/freetype.lib new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fbf9271 Binary files /dev/null and b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/binary/freetype.lib differ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/binary/freetype_debug.lib b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/binary/freetype_debug.lib new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2374012 Binary files /dev/null and b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/binary/freetype_debug.lib differ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftconfig.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftconfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9466603 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftconfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,575 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftconfig.h + * + * ANSI-specific configuration file (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This header file contains a number of macro definitions that are used by + * the rest of the engine. Most of the macros here are automatically + * determined at compile time, and you should not need to change it to port + * FreeType, except to compile the library with a non-ANSI compiler. + * + * Note however that if some specific modifications are needed, we advise + * you to place a modified copy in your build directory. + * + * The build directory is usually `builds/`, and contains + * system-specific files that are always included first when building the + * library. + * + * This ANSI version should stay in `include/config/`. + * + */ + +#ifndef FTCONFIG_H_ +#define FTCONFIG_H_ + +#include +#include FT_CONFIG_OPTIONS_H +#include FT_CONFIG_STANDARD_LIBRARY_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * PLATFORM-SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION MACROS + * + * These macros can be toggled to suit a specific system. The current ones + * are defaults used to compile FreeType in an ANSI C environment (16bit + * compilers are also supported). Copy this file to your own + * `builds/` directory, and edit it to port the engine. + * + */ + + + /* There are systems (like the Texas Instruments 'C54x) where a `char` */ + /* has 16~bits. ANSI~C says that `sizeof(char)` is always~1. Since an */ + /* `int` has 16~bits also for this system, `sizeof(int)` gives~1 which */ + /* is probably unexpected. */ + /* */ + /* `CHAR_BIT` (defined in `limits.h`) gives the number of bits in a */ + /* `char` type. */ + +#ifndef FT_CHAR_BIT +#define FT_CHAR_BIT CHAR_BIT +#endif + + + /* The size of an `int` type. */ +#if FT_UINT_MAX == 0xFFFFUL +#define FT_SIZEOF_INT ( 16 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) +#elif FT_UINT_MAX == 0xFFFFFFFFUL +#define FT_SIZEOF_INT ( 32 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) +#elif FT_UINT_MAX > 0xFFFFFFFFUL && FT_UINT_MAX == 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFUL +#define FT_SIZEOF_INT ( 64 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) +#else +#error "Unsupported size of `int' type!" +#endif + + /* The size of a `long` type. A five-byte `long` (as used e.g. on the */ + /* DM642) is recognized but avoided. */ +#if FT_ULONG_MAX == 0xFFFFFFFFUL +#define FT_SIZEOF_LONG ( 32 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) +#elif FT_ULONG_MAX > 0xFFFFFFFFUL && FT_ULONG_MAX == 0xFFFFFFFFFFUL +#define FT_SIZEOF_LONG ( 32 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) +#elif FT_ULONG_MAX > 0xFFFFFFFFUL && FT_ULONG_MAX == 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFUL +#define FT_SIZEOF_LONG ( 64 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) +#else +#error "Unsupported size of `long' type!" +#endif + + + /* `FT_UNUSED` indicates that a given parameter is not used -- */ + /* this is only used to get rid of unpleasant compiler warnings. */ +#ifndef FT_UNUSED +#define FT_UNUSED( arg ) ( (arg) = (arg) ) +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION MACROS + * + * These macros are computed from the ones defined above. Don't touch + * their definition, unless you know precisely what you are doing. No + * porter should need to mess with them. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Mac support + * + * This is the only necessary change, so it is defined here instead + * providing a new configuration file. + */ +#if defined( __APPLE__ ) || ( defined( __MWERKS__ ) && defined( macintosh ) ) + /* No Carbon frameworks for 64bit 10.4.x. */ + /* `AvailabilityMacros.h` is available since Mac OS X 10.2, */ + /* so guess the system version by maximum errno before inclusion. */ +#include +#ifdef ECANCELED /* defined since 10.2 */ +#include "AvailabilityMacros.h" +#endif +#if defined( __LP64__ ) && \ + ( MAC_OS_X_VERSION_MIN_REQUIRED <= MAC_OS_X_VERSION_10_4 ) +#undef FT_MACINTOSH +#endif + +#elif defined( __SC__ ) || defined( __MRC__ ) + /* Classic MacOS compilers */ +#include "ConditionalMacros.h" +#if TARGET_OS_MAC +#define FT_MACINTOSH 1 +#endif + +#endif + + + /* Fix compiler warning with sgi compiler. */ +#if defined( __sgi ) && !defined( __GNUC__ ) +#if defined( _COMPILER_VERSION ) && ( _COMPILER_VERSION >= 730 ) +#pragma set woff 3505 +#endif +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * basic_types + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Int16 + * + * @description: + * A typedef for a 16bit signed integer type. + */ + typedef signed short FT_Int16; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_UInt16 + * + * @description: + * A typedef for a 16bit unsigned integer type. + */ + typedef unsigned short FT_UInt16; + + /* */ + + + /* this #if 0 ... #endif clause is for documentation purposes */ +#if 0 + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Int32 + * + * @description: + * A typedef for a 32bit signed integer type. The size depends on the + * configuration. + */ + typedef signed XXX FT_Int32; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_UInt32 + * + * A typedef for a 32bit unsigned integer type. The size depends on the + * configuration. + */ + typedef unsigned XXX FT_UInt32; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Int64 + * + * A typedef for a 64bit signed integer type. The size depends on the + * configuration. Only defined if there is real 64bit support; + * otherwise, it gets emulated with a structure (if necessary). + */ + typedef signed XXX FT_Int64; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_UInt64 + * + * A typedef for a 64bit unsigned integer type. The size depends on the + * configuration. Only defined if there is real 64bit support; + * otherwise, it gets emulated with a structure (if necessary). + */ + typedef unsigned XXX FT_UInt64; + + /* */ + +#endif + +#if FT_SIZEOF_INT == ( 32 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) + + typedef signed int FT_Int32; + typedef unsigned int FT_UInt32; + +#elif FT_SIZEOF_LONG == ( 32 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) + + typedef signed long FT_Int32; + typedef unsigned long FT_UInt32; + +#else +#error "no 32bit type found -- please check your configuration files" +#endif + + + /* look up an integer type that is at least 32~bits */ +#if FT_SIZEOF_INT >= ( 32 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) + + typedef int FT_Fast; + typedef unsigned int FT_UFast; + +#elif FT_SIZEOF_LONG >= ( 32 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) + + typedef long FT_Fast; + typedef unsigned long FT_UFast; + +#endif + + + /* determine whether we have a 64-bit `int` type for platforms without */ + /* Autoconf */ +#if FT_SIZEOF_LONG == ( 64 / FT_CHAR_BIT ) + + /* `FT_LONG64` must be defined if a 64-bit type is available */ +#define FT_LONG64 +#define FT_INT64 long +#define FT_UINT64 unsigned long + + /************************************************************************** + * + * A 64-bit data type may create compilation problems if you compile in + * strict ANSI mode. To avoid them, we disable other 64-bit data types if + * `__STDC__` is defined. You can however ignore this rule by defining the + * `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_FORCE_INT64` configuration macro. + */ +#elif !defined( __STDC__ ) || defined( FT_CONFIG_OPTION_FORCE_INT64 ) + +#if defined( __STDC_VERSION__ ) && __STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L + +#define FT_LONG64 +#define FT_INT64 long long int +#define FT_UINT64 unsigned long long int + +#elif defined( _MSC_VER ) && _MSC_VER >= 900 /* Visual C++ (and Intel C++) */ + + /* this compiler provides the `__int64` type */ +#define FT_LONG64 +#define FT_INT64 __int64 +#define FT_UINT64 unsigned __int64 + +#elif defined( __BORLANDC__ ) /* Borland C++ */ + + /* XXXX: We should probably check the value of `__BORLANDC__` in order */ + /* to test the compiler version. */ + + /* this compiler provides the `__int64` type */ +#define FT_LONG64 +#define FT_INT64 __int64 +#define FT_UINT64 unsigned __int64 + +#elif defined( __WATCOMC__ ) /* Watcom C++ */ + + /* Watcom doesn't provide 64-bit data types */ + +#elif defined( __MWERKS__ ) /* Metrowerks CodeWarrior */ + +#define FT_LONG64 +#define FT_INT64 long long int +#define FT_UINT64 unsigned long long int + +#elif defined( __GNUC__ ) + + /* GCC provides the `long long` type */ +#define FT_LONG64 +#define FT_INT64 long long int +#define FT_UINT64 unsigned long long int + +#endif /* __STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L */ + +#endif /* FT_SIZEOF_LONG == (64 / FT_CHAR_BIT) */ + +#ifdef FT_LONG64 + typedef FT_INT64 FT_Int64; + typedef FT_UINT64 FT_UInt64; +#endif + + +#ifdef _WIN64 + /* only 64bit Windows uses the LLP64 data model, i.e., */ + /* 32bit integers, 64bit pointers */ +#define FT_UINT_TO_POINTER( x ) (void*)(unsigned __int64)(x) +#else +#define FT_UINT_TO_POINTER( x ) (void*)(unsigned long)(x) +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * miscellaneous + * + */ + + +#define FT_BEGIN_STMNT do { +#define FT_END_STMNT } while ( 0 ) +#define FT_DUMMY_STMNT FT_BEGIN_STMNT FT_END_STMNT + + + /* `typeof` condition taken from gnulib's `intprops.h` header file */ +#if ( ( defined( __GNUC__ ) && __GNUC__ >= 2 ) || \ + ( defined( __IBMC__ ) && __IBMC__ >= 1210 && \ + defined( __IBM__TYPEOF__ ) ) || \ + ( defined( __SUNPRO_C ) && __SUNPRO_C >= 0x5110 && !__STDC__ ) ) +#define FT_TYPEOF( type ) ( __typeof__ ( type ) ) +#else +#define FT_TYPEOF( type ) /* empty */ +#endif + + + /* Use `FT_LOCAL` and `FT_LOCAL_DEF` to declare and define, */ + /* respectively, a function that gets used only within the scope of a */ + /* module. Normally, both the header and source code files for such a */ + /* function are within a single module directory. */ + /* */ + /* Intra-module arrays should be tagged with `FT_LOCAL_ARRAY` and */ + /* `FT_LOCAL_ARRAY_DEF`. */ + /* */ +#ifdef FT_MAKE_OPTION_SINGLE_OBJECT + +#define FT_LOCAL( x ) static x +#define FT_LOCAL_DEF( x ) static x + +#else + +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_LOCAL( x ) extern "C" x +#define FT_LOCAL_DEF( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_LOCAL( x ) extern x +#define FT_LOCAL_DEF( x ) x +#endif + +#endif /* FT_MAKE_OPTION_SINGLE_OBJECT */ + +#define FT_LOCAL_ARRAY( x ) extern const x +#define FT_LOCAL_ARRAY_DEF( x ) const x + + + /* Use `FT_BASE` and `FT_BASE_DEF` to declare and define, respectively, */ + /* functions that are used in more than a single module. In the */ + /* current setup this implies that the declaration is in a header file */ + /* in the `include/freetype/internal` directory, and the function body */ + /* is in a file in `src/base`. */ + /* */ +#ifndef FT_BASE + +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_BASE( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_BASE( x ) extern x +#endif + +#endif /* !FT_BASE */ + + +#ifndef FT_BASE_DEF + +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_BASE_DEF( x ) x +#else +#define FT_BASE_DEF( x ) x +#endif + +#endif /* !FT_BASE_DEF */ + + + /* When compiling FreeType as a DLL or DSO with hidden visibility */ + /* some systems/compilers need a special attribute in front OR after */ + /* the return type of function declarations. */ + /* */ + /* Two macros are used within the FreeType source code to define */ + /* exported library functions: `FT_EXPORT` and `FT_EXPORT_DEF`. */ + /* */ + /* - `FT_EXPORT( return_type )` */ + /* */ + /* is used in a function declaration, as in */ + /* */ + /* ``` */ + /* FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) */ + /* FT_Init_FreeType( FT_Library* alibrary ); */ + /* ``` */ + /* */ + /* - `FT_EXPORT_DEF( return_type )` */ + /* */ + /* is used in a function definition, as in */ + /* */ + /* ``` */ + /* FT_EXPORT_DEF( FT_Error ) */ + /* FT_Init_FreeType( FT_Library* alibrary ) */ + /* { */ + /* ... some code ... */ + /* return FT_Err_Ok; */ + /* } */ + /* ``` */ + /* */ + /* You can provide your own implementation of `FT_EXPORT` and */ + /* `FT_EXPORT_DEF` here if you want. */ + /* */ + /* To export a variable, use `FT_EXPORT_VAR`. */ + /* */ +#ifndef FT_EXPORT + +#ifdef FT2_BUILD_LIBRARY + +#if defined( _WIN32 ) && defined( DLL_EXPORT ) +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) __declspec( dllexport ) x +#elif defined( __GNUC__ ) && __GNUC__ >= 4 +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) __attribute__(( visibility( "default" ) )) x +#elif defined( __SUNPRO_C ) && __SUNPRO_C >= 0x550 +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) __global x +#elif defined( __cplusplus ) +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) extern x +#endif + +#else + +#if defined( _WIN32 ) && defined( DLL_IMPORT ) +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) __declspec( dllimport ) x +#elif defined( __cplusplus ) +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_EXPORT( x ) extern x +#endif + +#endif + +#endif /* !FT_EXPORT */ + + +#ifndef FT_EXPORT_DEF + +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_EXPORT_DEF( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_EXPORT_DEF( x ) extern x +#endif + +#endif /* !FT_EXPORT_DEF */ + + +#ifndef FT_EXPORT_VAR + +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_EXPORT_VAR( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_EXPORT_VAR( x ) extern x +#endif + +#endif /* !FT_EXPORT_VAR */ + + + /* The following macros are needed to compile the library with a */ + /* C++ compiler and with 16bit compilers. */ + /* */ + + /* This is special. Within C++, you must specify `extern "C"` for */ + /* functions which are used via function pointers, and you also */ + /* must do that for structures which contain function pointers to */ + /* assure C linkage -- it's not possible to have (local) anonymous */ + /* functions which are accessed by (global) function pointers. */ + /* */ + /* */ + /* FT_CALLBACK_DEF is used to _define_ a callback function, */ + /* located in the same source code file as the structure that uses */ + /* it. */ + /* */ + /* FT_BASE_CALLBACK and FT_BASE_CALLBACK_DEF are used to declare */ + /* and define a callback function, respectively, in a similar way */ + /* as FT_BASE and FT_BASE_DEF work. */ + /* */ + /* FT_CALLBACK_TABLE is used to _declare_ a constant variable that */ + /* contains pointers to callback functions. */ + /* */ + /* FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF is used to _define_ a constant variable */ + /* that contains pointers to callback functions. */ + /* */ + /* */ + /* Some 16bit compilers have to redefine these macros to insert */ + /* the infamous `_cdecl` or `__fastcall` declarations. */ + /* */ +#ifndef FT_CALLBACK_DEF +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_CALLBACK_DEF( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_CALLBACK_DEF( x ) static x +#endif +#endif /* FT_CALLBACK_DEF */ + +#ifndef FT_BASE_CALLBACK +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_BASE_CALLBACK( x ) extern "C" x +#define FT_BASE_CALLBACK_DEF( x ) extern "C" x +#else +#define FT_BASE_CALLBACK( x ) extern x +#define FT_BASE_CALLBACK_DEF( x ) x +#endif +#endif /* FT_BASE_CALLBACK */ + +#ifndef FT_CALLBACK_TABLE +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_CALLBACK_TABLE extern "C" +#define FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF extern "C" +#else +#define FT_CALLBACK_TABLE extern +#define FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF /* nothing */ +#endif +#endif /* FT_CALLBACK_TABLE */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* FTCONFIG_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftheader.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftheader.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..696d6ba --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftheader.h @@ -0,0 +1,814 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftheader.h + * + * Build macros of the FreeType 2 library. + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + +#ifndef FTHEADER_H_ +#define FTHEADER_H_ + + + /*@***********************************************************************/ + /* */ + /* */ + /* FT_BEGIN_HEADER */ + /* */ + /* */ + /* This macro is used in association with @FT_END_HEADER in header */ + /* files to ensure that the declarations within are properly */ + /* encapsulated in an `extern "C" { .. }` block when included from a */ + /* C++ compiler. */ + /* */ +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_BEGIN_HEADER extern "C" { +#else +#define FT_BEGIN_HEADER /* nothing */ +#endif + + + /*@***********************************************************************/ + /* */ + /* */ + /* FT_END_HEADER */ + /* */ + /* */ + /* This macro is used in association with @FT_BEGIN_HEADER in header */ + /* files to ensure that the declarations within are properly */ + /* encapsulated in an `extern "C" { .. }` block when included from a */ + /* C++ compiler. */ + /* */ +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_END_HEADER } +#else +#define FT_END_HEADER /* nothing */ +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Aliases for the FreeType 2 public and configuration files. + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * header_file_macros + * + * @title: + * Header File Macros + * + * @abstract: + * Macro definitions used to `#include` specific header files. + * + * @description: + * The following macros are defined to the name of specific FreeType~2 + * header files. They can be used directly in `#include` statements as + * in: + * + * ``` + * #include FT_FREETYPE_H + * #include FT_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H + * #include FT_GLYPH_H + * ``` + * + * There are several reasons why we are now using macros to name public + * header files. The first one is that such macros are not limited to + * the infamous 8.3~naming rule required by DOS (and + * `FT_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H` is a lot more meaningful than `ftmm.h`). + * + * The second reason is that it allows for more flexibility in the way + * FreeType~2 is installed on a given system. + * + */ + + + /* configuration files */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_CONFIG_CONFIG_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * FreeType~2 configuration data. + * + */ +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_CONFIG_H +#define FT_CONFIG_CONFIG_H +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_CONFIG_STANDARD_LIBRARY_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * FreeType~2 interface to the standard C library functions. + * + */ +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_STANDARD_LIBRARY_H +#define FT_CONFIG_STANDARD_LIBRARY_H +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_CONFIG_OPTIONS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * FreeType~2 project-specific configuration options. + * + */ +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_OPTIONS_H +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTIONS_H +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_CONFIG_MODULES_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * list of FreeType~2 modules that are statically linked to new library + * instances in @FT_Init_FreeType. + * + */ +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_MODULES_H +#define FT_CONFIG_MODULES_H +#endif + + /* */ + + /* public headers */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_FREETYPE_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * base FreeType~2 API. + * + */ +#define FT_FREETYPE_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_ERRORS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * list of FreeType~2 error codes (and messages). + * + * It is included by @FT_FREETYPE_H. + * + */ +#define FT_ERRORS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_MODULE_ERRORS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * list of FreeType~2 module error offsets (and messages). + * + */ +#define FT_MODULE_ERRORS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_SYSTEM_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 interface to low-level operations (i.e., memory management + * and stream i/o). + * + * It is included by @FT_FREETYPE_H. + * + */ +#define FT_SYSTEM_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IMAGE_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing type + * definitions related to glyph images (i.e., bitmaps, outlines, + * scan-converter parameters). + * + * It is included by @FT_FREETYPE_H. + * + */ +#define FT_IMAGE_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_TYPES_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * basic data types defined by FreeType~2. + * + * It is included by @FT_FREETYPE_H. + * + */ +#define FT_TYPES_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_LIST_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * list management API of FreeType~2. + * + * (Most applications will never need to include this file.) + * + */ +#define FT_LIST_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_OUTLINE_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * scalable outline management API of FreeType~2. + * + */ +#define FT_OUTLINE_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_SIZES_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * API which manages multiple @FT_Size objects per face. + * + */ +#define FT_SIZES_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_MODULE_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * module management API of FreeType~2. + * + */ +#define FT_MODULE_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_RENDER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * renderer module management API of FreeType~2. + * + */ +#define FT_RENDER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DRIVER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * structures and macros related to the driver modules. + * + */ +#define FT_DRIVER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_AUTOHINTER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * structures and macros related to the auto-hinting module. + * + * Deprecated since version~2.9; use @FT_DRIVER_H instead. + * + */ +#define FT_AUTOHINTER_H FT_DRIVER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_CFF_DRIVER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * structures and macros related to the CFF driver module. + * + * Deprecated since version~2.9; use @FT_DRIVER_H instead. + * + */ +#define FT_CFF_DRIVER_H FT_DRIVER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_TRUETYPE_DRIVER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * structures and macros related to the TrueType driver module. + * + * Deprecated since version~2.9; use @FT_DRIVER_H instead. + * + */ +#define FT_TRUETYPE_DRIVER_H FT_DRIVER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_PCF_DRIVER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing + * structures and macros related to the PCF driver module. + * + * Deprecated since version~2.9; use @FT_DRIVER_H instead. + * + */ +#define FT_PCF_DRIVER_H FT_DRIVER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_TYPE1_TABLES_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * types and API specific to the Type~1 format. + * + */ +#define FT_TYPE1_TABLES_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_TRUETYPE_IDS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * enumeration values which identify name strings, languages, encodings, + * etc. This file really contains a _large_ set of constant macro + * definitions, taken from the TrueType and OpenType specifications. + * + */ +#define FT_TRUETYPE_IDS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * types and API specific to the TrueType (as well as OpenType) format. + * + */ +#define FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_TRUETYPE_TAGS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * definitions of TrueType four-byte 'tags' which identify blocks in + * SFNT-based font formats (i.e., TrueType and OpenType). + * + */ +#define FT_TRUETYPE_TAGS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_BDF_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * definitions of an API which accesses BDF-specific strings from a face. + * + */ +#define FT_BDF_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_CID_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * definitions of an API which access CID font information from a face. + * + */ +#define FT_CID_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_GZIP_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * definitions of an API which supports gzip-compressed files. + * + */ +#define FT_GZIP_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_LZW_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * definitions of an API which supports LZW-compressed files. + * + */ +#define FT_LZW_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_BZIP2_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * definitions of an API which supports bzip2-compressed files. + * + */ +#define FT_BZIP2_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_WINFONTS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * definitions of an API which supports Windows FNT files. + * + */ +#define FT_WINFONTS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_GLYPH_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * API of the optional glyph management component. + * + */ +#define FT_GLYPH_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_BITMAP_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * API of the optional bitmap conversion component. + * + */ +#define FT_BITMAP_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_BBOX_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * API of the optional exact bounding box computation routines. + * + */ +#define FT_BBOX_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_CACHE_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * API of the optional FreeType~2 cache sub-system. + * + */ +#define FT_CACHE_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_MAC_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * Macintosh-specific FreeType~2 API. The latter is used to access fonts + * embedded in resource forks. + * + * This header file must be explicitly included by client applications + * compiled on the Mac (note that the base API still works though). + * + */ +#define FT_MAC_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * optional multiple-masters management API of FreeType~2. + * + */ +#define FT_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_SFNT_NAMES_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * optional FreeType~2 API which accesses embedded 'name' strings in + * SFNT-based font formats (i.e., TrueType and OpenType). + * + */ +#define FT_SFNT_NAMES_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_OPENTYPE_VALIDATE_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * optional FreeType~2 API which validates OpenType tables ('BASE', + * 'GDEF', 'GPOS', 'GSUB', 'JSTF'). + * + */ +#define FT_OPENTYPE_VALIDATE_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_GX_VALIDATE_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * optional FreeType~2 API which validates TrueTypeGX/AAT tables ('feat', + * 'mort', 'morx', 'bsln', 'just', 'kern', 'opbd', 'trak', 'prop'). + * + */ +#define FT_GX_VALIDATE_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_PFR_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which accesses PFR-specific data. + * + */ +#define FT_PFR_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_STROKER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which provides functions to stroke outline paths. + */ +#define FT_STROKER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_SYNTHESIS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which performs artificial obliquing and emboldening. + */ +#define FT_SYNTHESIS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_FONT_FORMATS_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which provides functions specific to font formats. + */ +#define FT_FONT_FORMATS_H + + /* deprecated */ +#define FT_XFREE86_H FT_FONT_FORMATS_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_TRIGONOMETRY_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which performs trigonometric computations (e.g., + * cosines and arc tangents). + */ +#define FT_TRIGONOMETRY_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_LCD_FILTER_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which performs color filtering for subpixel rendering. + */ +#define FT_LCD_FILTER_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_INCREMENTAL_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which performs incremental glyph loading. + */ +#define FT_INCREMENTAL_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_GASP_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which returns entries from the TrueType GASP table. + */ +#define FT_GASP_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_ADVANCES_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which returns individual and ranged glyph advances. + */ +#define FT_ADVANCES_H + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_COLOR_H + * + * @description: + * A macro used in `#include` statements to name the file containing the + * FreeType~2 API which handles the OpenType 'CPAL' table. + */ +#define FT_COLOR_H + + + /* */ + + /* These header files don't need to be included by the user. */ +#define FT_ERROR_DEFINITIONS_H +#define FT_PARAMETER_TAGS_H + + /* Deprecated macros. */ +#define FT_UNPATENTED_HINTING_H +#define FT_TRUETYPE_UNPATENTED_H + + /* `FT_CACHE_H` is the only header file needed for the cache subsystem. */ +#define FT_CACHE_IMAGE_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_SMALL_BITMAPS_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_CHARMAP_H FT_CACHE_H + + /* The internals of the cache sub-system are no longer exposed. We */ + /* default to `FT_CACHE_H` at the moment just in case, but we know */ + /* of no rogue client that uses them. */ + /* */ +#define FT_CACHE_MANAGER_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_INTERNAL_MRU_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_INTERNAL_MANAGER_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_INTERNAL_CACHE_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_INTERNAL_GLYPH_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_INTERNAL_IMAGE_H FT_CACHE_H +#define FT_CACHE_INTERNAL_SBITS_H FT_CACHE_H + + + /* + * Include internal headers definitions from `` only when + * building the library. + */ +#ifdef FT2_BUILD_LIBRARY +#define FT_INTERNAL_INTERNAL_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_INTERNAL_H +#endif /* FT2_BUILD_LIBRARY */ + + +#endif /* FTHEADER_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftmodule.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftmodule.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c603e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftmodule.h @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +/* + * This file registers the FreeType modules compiled into the library. + * + * If you use GNU make, this file IS NOT USED! Instead, it is created in + * the objects directory (normally `/objs/`) based on information + * from `/modules.cfg`. + * + * Please read `docs/INSTALL.ANY` and `docs/CUSTOMIZE` how to compile + * FreeType without GNU make. + * + */ + +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Module_Class, autofit_module_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, tt_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, t1_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, cff_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, t1cid_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, pfr_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, t42_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, winfnt_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, pcf_driver_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Module_Class, psaux_module_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Module_Class, psnames_module_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Module_Class, pshinter_module_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Renderer_Class, ft_raster1_renderer_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Module_Class, sfnt_module_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Renderer_Class, ft_smooth_renderer_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Renderer_Class, ft_smooth_lcd_renderer_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Renderer_Class, ft_smooth_lcdv_renderer_class ) +FT_USE_MODULE( FT_Driver_ClassRec, bdf_driver_class ) + +/* EOF */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftoption.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftoption.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..12f47a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftoption.h @@ -0,0 +1,982 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftoption.h + * + * User-selectable configuration macros (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTOPTION_H_ +#define FTOPTION_H_ + + +#include + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * USER-SELECTABLE CONFIGURATION MACROS + * + * This file contains the default configuration macro definitions for a + * standard build of the FreeType library. There are three ways to use + * this file to build project-specific versions of the library: + * + * - You can modify this file by hand, but this is not recommended in + * cases where you would like to build several versions of the library + * from a single source directory. + * + * - You can put a copy of this file in your build directory, more + * precisely in `$BUILD/freetype/config/ftoption.h`, where `$BUILD` is + * the name of a directory that is included _before_ the FreeType include + * path during compilation. + * + * The default FreeType Makefiles and Jamfiles use the build directory + * `builds/` by default, but you can easily change that for your + * own projects. + * + * - Copy the file to `$BUILD/ft2build.h` and modify it + * slightly to pre-define the macro `FT_CONFIG_OPTIONS_H` used to locate + * this file during the build. For example, + * + * ``` + * #define FT_CONFIG_OPTIONS_H + * #include + * ``` + * + * will use `$BUILD/myftoptions.h` instead of this file for macro + * definitions. + * + * Note also that you can similarly pre-define the macro + * `FT_CONFIG_MODULES_H` used to locate the file listing of the modules + * that are statically linked to the library at compile time. By + * default, this file is ``. + * + * We highly recommend using the third method whenever possible. + * + */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** G E N E R A L F R E E T Y P E 2 C O N F I G U R A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /*#************************************************************************ + * + * If you enable this configuration option, FreeType recognizes an + * environment variable called `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES`, which can be used to + * control the various font drivers and modules. The controllable + * properties are listed in the section @properties. + * + * You have to undefine this configuration option on platforms that lack + * the concept of environment variables (and thus don't have the `getenv` + * function), for example Windows CE. + * + * `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` has the following syntax form (broken here into + * multiple lines for better readability). + * + * ``` + * + * ':' + * '=' + * + * ':' + * '=' + * ... + * ``` + * + * Example: + * + * ``` + * FREETYPE_PROPERTIES=truetype:interpreter-version=35 \ + * cff:no-stem-darkening=1 \ + * autofitter:warping=1 + * ``` + * + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_ENVIRONMENT_PROPERTIES + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Uncomment the line below if you want to activate LCD rendering + * technology similar to ClearType in this build of the library. This + * technology triples the resolution in the direction color subpixels. To + * mitigate color fringes inherent to this technology, you also need to + * explicitly set up LCD filtering. + * + * Note that this feature is covered by several Microsoft patents and + * should not be activated in any default build of the library. When this + * macro is not defined, FreeType offers alternative LCD rendering + * technology that produces excellent output without LCD filtering. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Many compilers provide a non-ANSI 64-bit data type that can be used by + * FreeType to speed up some computations. However, this will create some + * problems when compiling the library in strict ANSI mode. + * + * For this reason, the use of 64-bit integers is normally disabled when + * the `__STDC__` macro is defined. You can however disable this by + * defining the macro `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_FORCE_INT64` here. + * + * For most compilers, this will only create compilation warnings when + * building the library. + * + * ObNote: The compiler-specific 64-bit integers are detected in the + * file `ftconfig.h` either statically or through the `configure` + * script on supported platforms. + */ +#undef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_FORCE_INT64 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * If this macro is defined, do not try to use an assembler version of + * performance-critical functions (e.g., @FT_MulFix). You should only do + * that to verify that the assembler function works properly, or to execute + * benchmark tests of the various implementations. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_ASSEMBLER */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * If this macro is defined, try to use an inlined assembler version of the + * @FT_MulFix function, which is a 'hotspot' when loading and hinting + * glyphs, and which should be executed as fast as possible. + * + * Note that if your compiler or CPU is not supported, this will default to + * the standard and portable implementation found in `ftcalc.c`. + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_INLINE_MULFIX + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * LZW-compressed file support. + * + * FreeType now handles font files that have been compressed with the + * `compress` program. This is mostly used to parse many of the PCF + * files that come with various X11 distributions. The implementation + * uses NetBSD's `zopen` to partially uncompress the file on the fly (see + * `src/lzw/ftgzip.c`). + * + * Define this macro if you want to enable this 'feature'. + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_LZW + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Gzip-compressed file support. + * + * FreeType now handles font files that have been compressed with the + * `gzip` program. This is mostly used to parse many of the PCF files + * that come with XFree86. The implementation uses 'zlib' to partially + * uncompress the file on the fly (see `src/gzip/ftgzip.c`). + * + * Define this macro if you want to enable this 'feature'. See also the + * macro `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SYSTEM_ZLIB` below. + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_ZLIB + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * ZLib library selection + * + * This macro is only used when `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_ZLIB` is defined. + * It allows FreeType's 'ftgzip' component to link to the system's + * installation of the ZLib library. This is useful on systems like + * Unix or VMS where it generally is already available. + * + * If you let it undefined, the component will use its own copy of the + * zlib sources instead. These have been modified to be included + * directly within the component and **not** export external function + * names. This allows you to link any program with FreeType _and_ ZLib + * without linking conflicts. + * + * Do not `#undef` this macro here since the build system might define + * it for certain configurations only. + * + * If you use a build system like cmake or the `configure` script, + * options set by those programs have precedence, overwriting the value + * here with the configured one. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SYSTEM_ZLIB */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Bzip2-compressed file support. + * + * FreeType now handles font files that have been compressed with the + * `bzip2` program. This is mostly used to parse many of the PCF files + * that come with XFree86. The implementation uses `libbz2` to partially + * uncompress the file on the fly (see `src/bzip2/ftbzip2.c`). Contrary + * to gzip, bzip2 currently is not included and need to use the system + * available bzip2 implementation. + * + * Define this macro if you want to enable this 'feature'. + * + * If you use a build system like cmake or the `configure` script, + * options set by those programs have precedence, overwriting the value + * here with the configured one. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_BZIP2 */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define to disable the use of file stream functions and types, `FILE`, + * `fopen`, etc. Enables the use of smaller system libraries on embedded + * systems that have multiple system libraries, some with or without file + * stream support, in the cases where file stream support is not necessary + * such as memory loading of font files. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_DISABLE_STREAM_SUPPORT */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * PNG bitmap support. + * + * FreeType now handles loading color bitmap glyphs in the PNG format. + * This requires help from the external libpng library. Uncompressed + * color bitmaps do not need any external libraries and will be supported + * regardless of this configuration. + * + * Define this macro if you want to enable this 'feature'. + * + * If you use a build system like cmake or the `configure` script, + * options set by those programs have precedence, overwriting the value + * here with the configured one. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_PNG */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * HarfBuzz support. + * + * FreeType uses the HarfBuzz library to improve auto-hinting of OpenType + * fonts. If available, many glyphs not directly addressable by a font's + * character map will be hinted also. + * + * Define this macro if you want to enable this 'feature'. + * + * If you use a build system like cmake or the `configure` script, + * options set by those programs have precedence, overwriting the value + * here with the configured one. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_HARFBUZZ */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Glyph Postscript Names handling + * + * By default, FreeType 2 is compiled with the 'psnames' module. This + * module is in charge of converting a glyph name string into a Unicode + * value, or return a Macintosh standard glyph name for the use with the + * TrueType 'post' table. + * + * Undefine this macro if you do not want 'psnames' compiled in your + * build of FreeType. This has the following effects: + * + * - The TrueType driver will provide its own set of glyph names, if you + * build it to support postscript names in the TrueType 'post' table, + * but will not synthesize a missing Unicode charmap. + * + * - The Type~1 driver will not be able to synthesize a Unicode charmap + * out of the glyphs found in the fonts. + * + * You would normally undefine this configuration macro when building a + * version of FreeType that doesn't contain a Type~1 or CFF driver. + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_POSTSCRIPT_NAMES + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Postscript Names to Unicode Values support + * + * By default, FreeType~2 is built with the 'psnames' module compiled in. + * Among other things, the module is used to convert a glyph name into a + * Unicode value. This is especially useful in order to synthesize on + * the fly a Unicode charmap from the CFF/Type~1 driver through a big + * table named the 'Adobe Glyph List' (AGL). + * + * Undefine this macro if you do not want the Adobe Glyph List compiled + * in your 'psnames' module. The Type~1 driver will not be able to + * synthesize a Unicode charmap out of the glyphs found in the fonts. + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_ADOBE_GLYPH_LIST + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Support for Mac fonts + * + * Define this macro if you want support for outline fonts in Mac format + * (mac dfont, mac resource, macbinary containing a mac resource) on + * non-Mac platforms. + * + * Note that the 'FOND' resource isn't checked. + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_MAC_FONTS + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Guessing methods to access embedded resource forks + * + * Enable extra Mac fonts support on non-Mac platforms (e.g., GNU/Linux). + * + * Resource forks which include fonts data are stored sometimes in + * locations which users or developers don't expected. In some cases, + * resource forks start with some offset from the head of a file. In + * other cases, the actual resource fork is stored in file different from + * what the user specifies. If this option is activated, FreeType tries + * to guess whether such offsets or different file names must be used. + * + * Note that normal, direct access of resource forks is controlled via + * the `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_MAC_FONTS` option. + */ +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_MAC_FONTS +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_GUESSING_EMBEDDED_RFORK +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Allow the use of `FT_Incremental_Interface` to load typefaces that + * contain no glyph data, but supply it via a callback function. This is + * required by clients supporting document formats which supply font data + * incrementally as the document is parsed, such as the Ghostscript + * interpreter for the PostScript language. + */ +#define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_INCREMENTAL + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * The size in bytes of the render pool used by the scan-line converter to + * do all of its work. + */ +#define FT_RENDER_POOL_SIZE 16384L + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * FT_MAX_MODULES + * + * The maximum number of modules that can be registered in a single + * FreeType library object. 32~is the default. + */ +#define FT_MAX_MODULES 32 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Debug level + * + * FreeType can be compiled in debug or trace mode. In debug mode, + * errors are reported through the 'ftdebug' component. In trace mode, + * additional messages are sent to the standard output during execution. + * + * Define `FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR` to build the library in debug mode. + * Define `FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE` to build it in trace mode. + * + * Don't define any of these macros to compile in 'release' mode! + * + * Do not `#undef` these macros here since the build system might define + * them for certain configurations only. + */ +/* #define FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR */ +/* #define FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Autofitter debugging + * + * If `FT_DEBUG_AUTOFIT` is defined, FreeType provides some means to + * control the autofitter behaviour for debugging purposes with global + * boolean variables (consequently, you should **never** enable this + * while compiling in 'release' mode): + * + * ``` + * _af_debug_disable_horz_hints + * _af_debug_disable_vert_hints + * _af_debug_disable_blue_hints + * ``` + * + * Additionally, the following functions provide dumps of various + * internal autofit structures to stdout (using `printf`): + * + * ``` + * af_glyph_hints_dump_points + * af_glyph_hints_dump_segments + * af_glyph_hints_dump_edges + * af_glyph_hints_get_num_segments + * af_glyph_hints_get_segment_offset + * ``` + * + * As an argument, they use another global variable: + * + * ``` + * _af_debug_hints + * ``` + * + * Please have a look at the `ftgrid` demo program to see how those + * variables and macros should be used. + * + * Do not `#undef` these macros here since the build system might define + * them for certain configurations only. + */ +/* #define FT_DEBUG_AUTOFIT */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Memory Debugging + * + * FreeType now comes with an integrated memory debugger that is capable + * of detecting simple errors like memory leaks or double deletes. To + * compile it within your build of the library, you should define + * `FT_DEBUG_MEMORY` here. + * + * Note that the memory debugger is only activated at runtime when when + * the _environment_ variable `FT2_DEBUG_MEMORY` is defined also! + * + * Do not `#undef` this macro here since the build system might define it + * for certain configurations only. + */ +/* #define FT_DEBUG_MEMORY */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Module errors + * + * If this macro is set (which is _not_ the default), the higher byte of + * an error code gives the module in which the error has occurred, while + * the lower byte is the real error code. + * + * Setting this macro makes sense for debugging purposes only, since it + * would break source compatibility of certain programs that use + * FreeType~2. + * + * More details can be found in the files `ftmoderr.h` and `fterrors.h`. + */ +#undef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Error Strings + * + * If this macro is set, `FT_Error_String` will return meaningful + * descriptions. This is not enabled by default to reduce the overall + * size of FreeType. + * + * More details can be found in the file `fterrors.h`. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_ERROR_STRINGS */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** S F N T D R I V E R C O N F I G U R A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_EMBEDDED_BITMAPS` if you want to support + * embedded bitmaps in all formats using the 'sfnt' module (namely + * TrueType~& OpenType). + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_EMBEDDED_BITMAPS + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_COLOR_LAYERS` if you want to support coloured + * outlines (from the 'COLR'/'CPAL' tables) in all formats using the 'sfnt' + * module (namely TrueType~& OpenType). + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_COLOR_LAYERS + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_POSTSCRIPT_NAMES` if you want to be able to + * load and enumerate the glyph Postscript names in a TrueType or OpenType + * file. + * + * Note that when you do not compile the 'psnames' module by undefining the + * above `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_POSTSCRIPT_NAMES`, the 'sfnt' module will + * contain additional code used to read the PS Names table from a font. + * + * (By default, the module uses 'psnames' to extract glyph names.) + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_POSTSCRIPT_NAMES + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SFNT_NAMES` if your applications need to access + * the internal name table in a SFNT-based format like TrueType or + * OpenType. The name table contains various strings used to describe the + * font, like family name, copyright, version, etc. It does not contain + * any glyph name though. + * + * Accessing SFNT names is done through the functions declared in + * `ftsnames.h`. + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SFNT_NAMES + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * TrueType CMap support + * + * Here you can fine-tune which TrueType CMap table format shall be + * supported. + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_0 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_2 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_4 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_6 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_8 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_10 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_12 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_13 +#define TT_CONFIG_CMAP_FORMAT_14 + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** T R U E T Y P E D R I V E R C O N F I G U R A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BYTECODE_INTERPRETER` if you want to compile a + * bytecode interpreter in the TrueType driver. + * + * By undefining this, you will only compile the code necessary to load + * TrueType glyphs without hinting. + * + * Do not `#undef` this macro here, since the build system might define it + * for certain configurations only. + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BYTECODE_INTERPRETER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING` if you want to compile + * subpixel hinting support into the TrueType driver. This modifies the + * TrueType hinting mechanism when anything but `FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO` is + * requested. + * + * In particular, it modifies the bytecode interpreter to interpret (or + * not) instructions in a certain way so that all TrueType fonts look like + * they do in a Windows ClearType (DirectWrite) environment. See [1] for a + * technical overview on what this means. See `ttinterp.h` for more + * details on the LEAN option. + * + * There are three possible values. + * + * Value 1: + * This value is associated with the 'Infinality' moniker, contributed by + * an individual nicknamed Infinality with the goal of making TrueType + * fonts render better than on Windows. A high amount of configurability + * and flexibility, down to rules for single glyphs in fonts, but also + * very slow. Its experimental and slow nature and the original + * developer losing interest meant that this option was never enabled in + * default builds. + * + * The corresponding interpreter version is v38. + * + * Value 2: + * The new default mode for the TrueType driver. The Infinality code + * base was stripped to the bare minimum and all configurability removed + * in the name of speed and simplicity. The configurability was mainly + * aimed at legacy fonts like 'Arial', 'Times New Roman', or 'Courier'. + * Legacy fonts are fonts that modify vertical stems to achieve clean + * black-and-white bitmaps. The new mode focuses on applying a minimal + * set of rules to all fonts indiscriminately so that modern and web + * fonts render well while legacy fonts render okay. + * + * The corresponding interpreter version is v40. + * + * Value 3: + * Compile both, making both v38 and v40 available (the latter is the + * default). + * + * By undefining these, you get rendering behavior like on Windows without + * ClearType, i.e., Windows XP without ClearType enabled and Win9x + * (interpreter version v35). Or not, depending on how much hinting blood + * and testing tears the font designer put into a given font. If you + * define one or both subpixel hinting options, you can switch between + * between v35 and the ones you define (using `FT_Property_Set`). + * + * This option requires `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BYTECODE_INTERPRETER` to be + * defined. + * + * [1] + * https://www.microsoft.com/typography/cleartype/truetypecleartype.aspx + */ +/* #define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING 1 */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING 2 +/* #define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING ( 1 | 2 ) */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_COMPONENT_OFFSET_SCALED` to compile the + * TrueType glyph loader to use Apple's definition of how to handle + * component offsets in composite glyphs. + * + * Apple and MS disagree on the default behavior of component offsets in + * composites. Apple says that they should be scaled by the scaling + * factors in the transformation matrix (roughly, it's more complex) while + * MS says they should not. OpenType defines two bits in the composite + * flags array which can be used to disambiguate, but old fonts will not + * have them. + * + * https://www.microsoft.com/typography/otspec/glyf.htm + * https://developer.apple.com/fonts/TrueType-Reference-Manual/RM06/Chap6glyf.html + */ +#undef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_COMPONENT_OFFSET_SCALED + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_GX_VAR_SUPPORT` if you want to include support + * for Apple's distortable font technology ('fvar', 'gvar', 'cvar', and + * 'avar' tables). Tagged 'Font Variations', this is now part of OpenType + * also. This has many similarities to Type~1 Multiple Masters support. + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_GX_VAR_SUPPORT + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BDF` if you want to include support for an + * embedded 'BDF~' table within SFNT-based bitmap formats. + */ +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BDF + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Option `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_MAX_RUNNABLE_OPCODES` controls the maximum + * number of bytecode instructions executed for a single run of the + * bytecode interpreter, needed to prevent infinite loops. You don't want + * to change this except for very special situations (e.g., making a + * library fuzzer spend less time to handle broken fonts). + * + * It is not expected that this value is ever modified by a configuring + * script; instead, it gets surrounded with `#ifndef ... #endif` so that + * the value can be set as a preprocessor option on the compiler's command + * line. + */ +#ifndef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_MAX_RUNNABLE_OPCODES +#define TT_CONFIG_OPTION_MAX_RUNNABLE_OPCODES 1000000L +#endif + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** T Y P E 1 D R I V E R C O N F I G U R A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * `T1_MAX_DICT_DEPTH` is the maximum depth of nest dictionaries and arrays + * in the Type~1 stream (see `t1load.c`). A minimum of~4 is required. + */ +#define T1_MAX_DICT_DEPTH 5 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * `T1_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS` details the maximum number of nested sub-routine + * calls during glyph loading. + */ +#define T1_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS 16 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * `T1_MAX_CHARSTRING_OPERANDS` is the charstring stack's capacity. A + * minimum of~16 is required. + * + * The Chinese font 'MingTiEG-Medium' (covering the CNS 11643 character + * set) needs 256. + */ +#define T1_MAX_CHARSTRINGS_OPERANDS 256 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define this configuration macro if you want to prevent the compilation + * of the 't1afm' module, which is in charge of reading Type~1 AFM files + * into an existing face. Note that if set, the Type~1 driver will be + * unable to produce kerning distances. + */ +#undef T1_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_AFM + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define this configuration macro if you want to prevent the compilation + * of the Multiple Masters font support in the Type~1 driver. + */ +#undef T1_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_MM_SUPPORT + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * `T1_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE` controls whether the pre-Adobe Type~1 + * engine gets compiled into FreeType. If defined, it is possible to + * switch between the two engines using the `hinting-engine` property of + * the 'type1' driver module. + */ +/* #define T1_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** C F F D R I V E R C O N F I G U R A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Using `CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_{X,Y}{1,2,3,4}` it is + * possible to set up the default values of the four control points that + * define the stem darkening behaviour of the (new) CFF engine. For more + * details please read the documentation of the `darkening-parameters` + * property (file `ftdriver.h`), which allows the control at run-time. + * + * Do **not** undefine these macros! + */ +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X1 500 +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y1 400 + +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X2 1000 +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y2 275 + +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X3 1667 +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y3 275 + +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X4 2333 +#define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y4 0 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * `CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE` controls whether the pre-Adobe CFF engine + * gets compiled into FreeType. If defined, it is possible to switch + * between the two engines using the `hinting-engine` property of the 'cff' + * driver module. + */ +/* #define CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** P C F D R I V E R C O N F I G U R A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * There are many PCF fonts just called 'Fixed' which look completely + * different, and which have nothing to do with each other. When selecting + * 'Fixed' in KDE or Gnome one gets results that appear rather random, the + * style changes often if one changes the size and one cannot select some + * fonts at all. This option makes the 'pcf' module prepend the foundry + * name (plus a space) to the family name. + * + * We also check whether we have 'wide' characters; all put together, we + * get family names like 'Sony Fixed' or 'Misc Fixed Wide'. + * + * If this option is activated, it can be controlled with the + * `no-long-family-names` property of the 'pcf' driver module. + */ +/* #define PCF_CONFIG_OPTION_LONG_FAMILY_NAMES */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** A U T O F I T M O D U L E C O N F I G U R A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Compile 'autofit' module with CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) script + * support. + */ +#define AF_CONFIG_OPTION_CJK + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Compile 'autofit' module with fallback Indic script support, covering + * some scripts that the 'latin' submodule of the 'autofit' module doesn't + * (yet) handle. + */ +#define AF_CONFIG_OPTION_INDIC + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Compile 'autofit' module with warp hinting. The idea of the warping + * code is to slightly scale and shift a glyph within a single dimension so + * that as much of its segments are aligned (more or less) on the grid. To + * find out the optimal scaling and shifting value, various parameter + * combinations are tried and scored. + * + * You can switch warping on and off with the `warping` property of the + * auto-hinter (see file `ftdriver.h` for more information; by default it + * is switched off). + * + * This experimental option is not active if the rendering mode is + * `FT_RENDER_MODE_LIGHT`. + */ +#define AF_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_WARPER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Use TrueType-like size metrics for 'light' auto-hinting. + * + * It is strongly recommended to avoid this option, which exists only to + * help some legacy applications retain its appearance and behaviour with + * respect to auto-hinted TrueType fonts. + * + * The very reason this option exists at all are GNU/Linux distributions + * like Fedora that did not un-patch the following change (which was + * present in FreeType between versions 2.4.6 and 2.7.1, inclusive). + * + * ``` + * 2011-07-16 Steven Chu + * + * [truetype] Fix metrics on size request for scalable fonts. + * ``` + * + * This problematic commit is now reverted (more or less). + */ +/* #define AF_CONFIG_OPTION_TT_SIZE_METRICS */ + + /* */ + + + /* + * This macro is obsolete. Support has been removed in FreeType version + * 2.5. + */ +/* #define FT_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_INTERNALS */ + + + /* + * The next three macros are defined if native TrueType hinting is + * requested by the definitions above. Don't change this. + */ +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BYTECODE_INTERPRETER +#define TT_USE_BYTECODE_INTERPRETER + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING +#if TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING & 1 +#define TT_SUPPORT_SUBPIXEL_HINTING_INFINALITY +#endif + +#if TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING & 2 +#define TT_SUPPORT_SUBPIXEL_HINTING_MINIMAL +#endif +#endif +#endif + + + /* + * Check CFF darkening parameters. The checks are the same as in function + * `cff_property_set` in file `cffdrivr.c`. + */ +#if CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X1 < 0 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X2 < 0 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X3 < 0 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X4 < 0 || \ + \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y1 < 0 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y2 < 0 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y3 < 0 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y4 < 0 || \ + \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X1 > \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X2 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X2 > \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X3 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X3 > \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_X4 || \ + \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y1 > 500 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y2 > 500 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y3 > 500 || \ + CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETER_Y4 > 500 +#error "Invalid CFF darkening parameters!" +#endif + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* FTOPTION_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftstdlib.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftstdlib.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..438b614 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/config/ftstdlib.h @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftstdlib.h + * + * ANSI-specific library and header configuration file (specification + * only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This file is used to group all `#includes` to the ANSI~C library that + * FreeType normally requires. It also defines macros to rename the + * standard functions within the FreeType source code. + * + * Load a file which defines `FTSTDLIB_H_` before this one to override it. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTSTDLIB_H_ +#define FTSTDLIB_H_ + + +#include + +#define ft_ptrdiff_t ptrdiff_t + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * integer limits + * + * `UINT_MAX` and `ULONG_MAX` are used to automatically compute the size of + * `int` and `long` in bytes at compile-time. So far, this works for all + * platforms the library has been tested on. + * + * Note that on the extremely rare platforms that do not provide integer + * types that are _exactly_ 16 and 32~bits wide (e.g., some old Crays where + * `int` is 36~bits), we do not make any guarantee about the correct + * behaviour of FreeType~2 with all fonts. + * + * In these cases, `ftconfig.h` will refuse to compile anyway with a + * message like 'couldn't find 32-bit type' or something similar. + * + */ + + +#include + +#define FT_CHAR_BIT CHAR_BIT +#define FT_USHORT_MAX USHRT_MAX +#define FT_INT_MAX INT_MAX +#define FT_INT_MIN INT_MIN +#define FT_UINT_MAX UINT_MAX +#define FT_LONG_MIN LONG_MIN +#define FT_LONG_MAX LONG_MAX +#define FT_ULONG_MAX ULONG_MAX + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * character and string processing + * + */ + + +#include + +#define ft_memchr memchr +#define ft_memcmp memcmp +#define ft_memcpy memcpy +#define ft_memmove memmove +#define ft_memset memset +#define ft_strcat strcat +#define ft_strcmp strcmp +#define ft_strcpy strcpy +#define ft_strlen strlen +#define ft_strncmp strncmp +#define ft_strncpy strncpy +#define ft_strrchr strrchr +#define ft_strstr strstr + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * file handling + * + */ + + +#include + +#define FT_FILE FILE +#define ft_fclose fclose +#define ft_fopen fopen +#define ft_fread fread +#define ft_fseek fseek +#define ft_ftell ftell +#define ft_sprintf sprintf + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * sorting + * + */ + + +#include + +#define ft_qsort qsort + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * memory allocation + * + */ + + +#define ft_scalloc calloc +#define ft_sfree free +#define ft_smalloc malloc +#define ft_srealloc realloc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * miscellaneous + * + */ + + +#define ft_strtol strtol +#define ft_getenv getenv + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * execution control + * + */ + + +#include + +#define ft_jmp_buf jmp_buf /* note: this cannot be a typedef since */ + /* `jmp_buf` is defined as a macro */ + /* on certain platforms */ + +#define ft_longjmp longjmp +#define ft_setjmp( b ) setjmp( *(ft_jmp_buf*) &(b) ) /* same thing here */ + + + /* The following is only used for debugging purposes, i.e., if */ + /* `FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR` or `FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE` are defined. */ + +#include + + +#endif /* FTSTDLIB_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/freetype.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/freetype.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f2eaca --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/freetype.h @@ -0,0 +1,4880 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * freetype.h + * + * FreeType high-level API and common types (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FREETYPE_H_ +#define FREETYPE_H_ + + +#ifndef FT_FREETYPE_H +#error "`ft2build.h' hasn't been included yet!" +#error "Please always use macros to include FreeType header files." +#error "Example:" +#error " #include " +#error " #include FT_FREETYPE_H" +#endif + + +#include +#include FT_CONFIG_CONFIG_H +#include FT_TYPES_H +#include FT_ERRORS_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * header_inclusion + * + * @title: + * FreeType's header inclusion scheme + * + * @abstract: + * How client applications should include FreeType header files. + * + * @description: + * To be as flexible as possible (and for historical reasons), FreeType + * uses a very special inclusion scheme to load header files, for example + * + * ``` + * #include + * + * #include FT_FREETYPE_H + * #include FT_OUTLINE_H + * ``` + * + * A compiler and its preprocessor only needs an include path to find the + * file `ft2build.h`; the exact locations and names of the other FreeType + * header files are hidden by @header_file_macros, loaded by + * `ft2build.h`. The API documentation always gives the header macro + * name needed for a particular function. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * user_allocation + * + * @title: + * User allocation + * + * @abstract: + * How client applications should allocate FreeType data structures. + * + * @description: + * FreeType assumes that structures allocated by the user and passed as + * arguments are zeroed out except for the actual data. In other words, + * it is recommended to use `calloc` (or variants of it) instead of + * `malloc` for allocation. + * + */ + + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /* */ + /* B A S I C T Y P E S */ + /* */ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * base_interface + * + * @title: + * Base Interface + * + * @abstract: + * The FreeType~2 base font interface. + * + * @description: + * This section describes the most important public high-level API + * functions of FreeType~2. + * + * @order: + * FT_Library + * FT_Face + * FT_Size + * FT_GlyphSlot + * FT_CharMap + * FT_Encoding + * FT_ENC_TAG + * + * FT_FaceRec + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_SCALABLE + * FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_SIZES + * FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_WIDTH + * FT_FACE_FLAG_HORIZONTAL + * FT_FACE_FLAG_VERTICAL + * FT_FACE_FLAG_COLOR + * FT_FACE_FLAG_SFNT + * FT_FACE_FLAG_CID_KEYED + * FT_FACE_FLAG_TRICKY + * FT_FACE_FLAG_KERNING + * FT_FACE_FLAG_MULTIPLE_MASTERS + * FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION + * FT_FACE_FLAG_GLYPH_NAMES + * FT_FACE_FLAG_EXTERNAL_STREAM + * FT_FACE_FLAG_HINTER + * + * FT_HAS_HORIZONTAL + * FT_HAS_VERTICAL + * FT_HAS_KERNING + * FT_HAS_FIXED_SIZES + * FT_HAS_GLYPH_NAMES + * FT_HAS_COLOR + * FT_HAS_MULTIPLE_MASTERS + * + * FT_IS_SFNT + * FT_IS_SCALABLE + * FT_IS_FIXED_WIDTH + * FT_IS_CID_KEYED + * FT_IS_TRICKY + * FT_IS_NAMED_INSTANCE + * FT_IS_VARIATION + * + * FT_STYLE_FLAG_BOLD + * FT_STYLE_FLAG_ITALIC + * + * FT_SizeRec + * FT_Size_Metrics + * + * FT_GlyphSlotRec + * FT_Glyph_Metrics + * FT_SubGlyph + * + * FT_Bitmap_Size + * + * FT_Init_FreeType + * FT_Done_FreeType + * + * FT_New_Face + * FT_Done_Face + * FT_Reference_Face + * FT_New_Memory_Face + * FT_Face_Properties + * FT_Open_Face + * FT_Open_Args + * FT_Parameter + * FT_Attach_File + * FT_Attach_Stream + * + * FT_Set_Char_Size + * FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes + * FT_Request_Size + * FT_Select_Size + * FT_Size_Request_Type + * FT_Size_RequestRec + * FT_Size_Request + * FT_Set_Transform + * FT_Load_Glyph + * FT_Get_Char_Index + * FT_Get_First_Char + * FT_Get_Next_Char + * FT_Get_Name_Index + * FT_Load_Char + * + * FT_OPEN_MEMORY + * FT_OPEN_STREAM + * FT_OPEN_PATHNAME + * FT_OPEN_DRIVER + * FT_OPEN_PARAMS + * + * FT_LOAD_DEFAULT + * FT_LOAD_RENDER + * FT_LOAD_MONOCHROME + * FT_LOAD_LINEAR_DESIGN + * FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE + * FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING + * FT_LOAD_NO_BITMAP + * FT_LOAD_NO_AUTOHINT + * FT_LOAD_COLOR + * + * FT_LOAD_VERTICAL_LAYOUT + * FT_LOAD_IGNORE_TRANSFORM + * FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT + * FT_LOAD_NO_RECURSE + * FT_LOAD_PEDANTIC + * + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_NORMAL + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_LIGHT + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_LCD + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_LCD_V + * + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_MODE + * + * FT_Render_Glyph + * FT_Render_Mode + * FT_Get_Kerning + * FT_Kerning_Mode + * FT_Get_Track_Kerning + * FT_Get_Glyph_Name + * FT_Get_Postscript_Name + * + * FT_CharMapRec + * FT_Select_Charmap + * FT_Set_Charmap + * FT_Get_Charmap_Index + * + * FT_Get_FSType_Flags + * FT_Get_SubGlyph_Info + * + * FT_Face_Internal + * FT_Size_Internal + * FT_Slot_Internal + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_XXX + * FT_STYLE_FLAG_XXX + * FT_OPEN_XXX + * FT_LOAD_XXX + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_XXX + * FT_FSTYPE_XXX + * + * FT_HAS_FAST_GLYPHS + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Glyph_Metrics + * + * @description: + * A structure to model the metrics of a single glyph. The values are + * expressed in 26.6 fractional pixel format; if the flag + * @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE has been used while loading the glyph, values are + * expressed in font units instead. + * + * @fields: + * width :: + * The glyph's width. + * + * height :: + * The glyph's height. + * + * horiBearingX :: + * Left side bearing for horizontal layout. + * + * horiBearingY :: + * Top side bearing for horizontal layout. + * + * horiAdvance :: + * Advance width for horizontal layout. + * + * vertBearingX :: + * Left side bearing for vertical layout. + * + * vertBearingY :: + * Top side bearing for vertical layout. Larger positive values mean + * further below the vertical glyph origin. + * + * vertAdvance :: + * Advance height for vertical layout. Positive values mean the glyph + * has a positive advance downward. + * + * @note: + * If not disabled with @FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING, the values represent + * dimensions of the hinted glyph (in case hinting is applicable). + * + * Stroking a glyph with an outside border does not increase + * `horiAdvance` or `vertAdvance`; you have to manually adjust these + * values to account for the added width and height. + * + * FreeType doesn't use the 'VORG' table data for CFF fonts because it + * doesn't have an interface to quickly retrieve the glyph height. The + * y~coordinate of the vertical origin can be simply computed as + * `vertBearingY + height` after loading a glyph. + */ + typedef struct FT_Glyph_Metrics_ + { + FT_Pos width; + FT_Pos height; + + FT_Pos horiBearingX; + FT_Pos horiBearingY; + FT_Pos horiAdvance; + + FT_Pos vertBearingX; + FT_Pos vertBearingY; + FT_Pos vertAdvance; + + } FT_Glyph_Metrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Bitmap_Size + * + * @description: + * This structure models the metrics of a bitmap strike (i.e., a set of + * glyphs for a given point size and resolution) in a bitmap font. It is + * used for the `available_sizes` field of @FT_Face. + * + * @fields: + * height :: + * The vertical distance, in pixels, between two consecutive baselines. + * It is always positive. + * + * width :: + * The average width, in pixels, of all glyphs in the strike. + * + * size :: + * The nominal size of the strike in 26.6 fractional points. This + * field is not very useful. + * + * x_ppem :: + * The horizontal ppem (nominal width) in 26.6 fractional pixels. + * + * y_ppem :: + * The vertical ppem (nominal height) in 26.6 fractional pixels. + * + * @note: + * Windows FNT: + * The nominal size given in a FNT font is not reliable. If the driver + * finds it incorrect, it sets `size` to some calculated values, and + * `x_ppem` and `y_ppem` to the pixel width and height given in the + * font, respectively. + * + * TrueType embedded bitmaps: + * `size`, `width`, and `height` values are not contained in the bitmap + * strike itself. They are computed from the global font parameters. + */ + typedef struct FT_Bitmap_Size_ + { + FT_Short height; + FT_Short width; + + FT_Pos size; + + FT_Pos x_ppem; + FT_Pos y_ppem; + + } FT_Bitmap_Size; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /* */ + /* O B J E C T C L A S S E S */ + /* */ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Library + * + * @description: + * A handle to a FreeType library instance. Each 'library' is completely + * independent from the others; it is the 'root' of a set of objects like + * fonts, faces, sizes, etc. + * + * It also embeds a memory manager (see @FT_Memory), as well as a + * scan-line converter object (see @FT_Raster). + * + * [Since 2.5.6] In multi-threaded applications it is easiest to use one + * `FT_Library` object per thread. In case this is too cumbersome, a + * single `FT_Library` object across threads is possible also, as long as + * a mutex lock is used around @FT_New_Face and @FT_Done_Face. + * + * @note: + * Library objects are normally created by @FT_Init_FreeType, and + * destroyed with @FT_Done_FreeType. If you need reference-counting + * (cf. @FT_Reference_Library), use @FT_New_Library and @FT_Done_Library. + */ + typedef struct FT_LibraryRec_ *FT_Library; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * module_management + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Module + * + * @description: + * A handle to a given FreeType module object. A module can be a font + * driver, a renderer, or anything else that provides services to the + * former. + */ + typedef struct FT_ModuleRec_* FT_Module; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Driver + * + * @description: + * A handle to a given FreeType font driver object. A font driver is a + * module capable of creating faces from font files. + */ + typedef struct FT_DriverRec_* FT_Driver; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Renderer + * + * @description: + * A handle to a given FreeType renderer. A renderer is a module in + * charge of converting a glyph's outline image to a bitmap. It supports + * a single glyph image format, and one or more target surface depths. + */ + typedef struct FT_RendererRec_* FT_Renderer; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * base_interface + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Face + * + * @description: + * A handle to a typographic face object. A face object models a given + * typeface, in a given style. + * + * @note: + * A face object also owns a single @FT_GlyphSlot object, as well as one + * or more @FT_Size objects. + * + * Use @FT_New_Face or @FT_Open_Face to create a new face object from a + * given filepath or a custom input stream. + * + * Use @FT_Done_Face to destroy it (along with its slot and sizes). + * + * An `FT_Face` object can only be safely used from one thread at a time. + * Similarly, creation and destruction of `FT_Face` with the same + * @FT_Library object can only be done from one thread at a time. On the + * other hand, functions like @FT_Load_Glyph and its siblings are + * thread-safe and do not need the lock to be held as long as the same + * `FT_Face` object is not used from multiple threads at the same time. + * + * @also: + * See @FT_FaceRec for the publicly accessible fields of a given face + * object. + */ + typedef struct FT_FaceRec_* FT_Face; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Size + * + * @description: + * A handle to an object that models a face scaled to a given character + * size. + * + * @note: + * An @FT_Face has one _active_ @FT_Size object that is used by functions + * like @FT_Load_Glyph to determine the scaling transformation that in + * turn is used to load and hint glyphs and metrics. + * + * You can use @FT_Set_Char_Size, @FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes, @FT_Request_Size + * or even @FT_Select_Size to change the content (i.e., the scaling + * values) of the active @FT_Size. + * + * You can use @FT_New_Size to create additional size objects for a given + * @FT_Face, but they won't be used by other functions until you activate + * it through @FT_Activate_Size. Only one size can be activated at any + * given time per face. + * + * @also: + * See @FT_SizeRec for the publicly accessible fields of a given size + * object. + */ + typedef struct FT_SizeRec_* FT_Size; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_GlyphSlot + * + * @description: + * A handle to a given 'glyph slot'. A slot is a container that can hold + * any of the glyphs contained in its parent face. + * + * In other words, each time you call @FT_Load_Glyph or @FT_Load_Char, + * the slot's content is erased by the new glyph data, i.e., the glyph's + * metrics, its image (bitmap or outline), and other control information. + * + * @also: + * See @FT_GlyphSlotRec for the publicly accessible glyph fields. + */ + typedef struct FT_GlyphSlotRec_* FT_GlyphSlot; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_CharMap + * + * @description: + * A handle to a character map (usually abbreviated to 'charmap'). A + * charmap is used to translate character codes in a given encoding into + * glyph indexes for its parent's face. Some font formats may provide + * several charmaps per font. + * + * Each face object owns zero or more charmaps, but only one of them can + * be 'active', providing the data used by @FT_Get_Char_Index or + * @FT_Load_Char. + * + * The list of available charmaps in a face is available through the + * `face->num_charmaps` and `face->charmaps` fields of @FT_FaceRec. + * + * The currently active charmap is available as `face->charmap`. You + * should call @FT_Set_Charmap to change it. + * + * @note: + * When a new face is created (either through @FT_New_Face or + * @FT_Open_Face), the library looks for a Unicode charmap within the + * list and automatically activates it. If there is no Unicode charmap, + * FreeType doesn't set an 'active' charmap. + * + * @also: + * See @FT_CharMapRec for the publicly accessible fields of a given + * character map. + */ + typedef struct FT_CharMapRec_* FT_CharMap; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_ENC_TAG + * + * @description: + * This macro converts four-letter tags into an unsigned long. It is + * used to define 'encoding' identifiers (see @FT_Encoding). + * + * @note: + * Since many 16-bit compilers don't like 32-bit enumerations, you should + * redefine this macro in case of problems to something like this: + * + * ``` + * #define FT_ENC_TAG( value, a, b, c, d ) value + * ``` + * + * to get a simple enumeration without assigning special numbers. + */ + +#ifndef FT_ENC_TAG +#define FT_ENC_TAG( value, a, b, c, d ) \ + value = ( ( (FT_UInt32)(a) << 24 ) | \ + ( (FT_UInt32)(b) << 16 ) | \ + ( (FT_UInt32)(c) << 8 ) | \ + (FT_UInt32)(d) ) + +#endif /* FT_ENC_TAG */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Encoding + * + * @description: + * An enumeration to specify character sets supported by charmaps. Used + * in the @FT_Select_Charmap API function. + * + * @note: + * Despite the name, this enumeration lists specific character + * repertories (i.e., charsets), and not text encoding methods (e.g., + * UTF-8, UTF-16, etc.). + * + * Other encodings might be defined in the future. + * + * @values: + * FT_ENCODING_NONE :: + * The encoding value~0 is reserved for all formats except BDF, PCF, + * and Windows FNT; see below for more information. + * + * FT_ENCODING_UNICODE :: + * The Unicode character set. This value covers all versions of the + * Unicode repertoire, including ASCII and Latin-1. Most fonts include + * a Unicode charmap, but not all of them. + * + * For example, if you want to access Unicode value U+1F028 (and the + * font contains it), use value 0x1F028 as the input value for + * @FT_Get_Char_Index. + * + * FT_ENCODING_MS_SYMBOL :: + * Microsoft Symbol encoding, used to encode mathematical symbols and + * wingdings. For more information, see + * 'https://www.microsoft.com/typography/otspec/recom.htm', + * 'http://www.kostis.net/charsets/symbol.htm', and + * 'http://www.kostis.net/charsets/wingding.htm'. + * + * This encoding uses character codes from the PUA (Private Unicode + * Area) in the range U+F020-U+F0FF. + * + * FT_ENCODING_SJIS :: + * Shift JIS encoding for Japanese. More info at + * 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shift_JIS'. See note on multi-byte + * encodings below. + * + * FT_ENCODING_PRC :: + * Corresponds to encoding systems mainly for Simplified Chinese as + * used in People's Republic of China (PRC). The encoding layout is + * based on GB~2312 and its supersets GBK and GB~18030. + * + * FT_ENCODING_BIG5 :: + * Corresponds to an encoding system for Traditional Chinese as used in + * Taiwan and Hong Kong. + * + * FT_ENCODING_WANSUNG :: + * Corresponds to the Korean encoding system known as Extended Wansung + * (MS Windows code page 949). For more information see + * 'https://www.unicode.org/Public/MAPPINGS/VENDORS/MICSFT/WindowsBestFit/bestfit949.txt'. + * + * FT_ENCODING_JOHAB :: + * The Korean standard character set (KS~C 5601-1992), which + * corresponds to MS Windows code page 1361. This character set + * includes all possible Hangul character combinations. + * + * FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_LATIN_1 :: + * Corresponds to a Latin-1 encoding as defined in a Type~1 PostScript + * font. It is limited to 256 character codes. + * + * FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_STANDARD :: + * Adobe Standard encoding, as found in Type~1, CFF, and OpenType/CFF + * fonts. It is limited to 256 character codes. + * + * FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_EXPERT :: + * Adobe Expert encoding, as found in Type~1, CFF, and OpenType/CFF + * fonts. It is limited to 256 character codes. + * + * FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_CUSTOM :: + * Corresponds to a custom encoding, as found in Type~1, CFF, and + * OpenType/CFF fonts. It is limited to 256 character codes. + * + * FT_ENCODING_APPLE_ROMAN :: + * Apple roman encoding. Many TrueType and OpenType fonts contain a + * charmap for this 8-bit encoding, since older versions of Mac OS are + * able to use it. + * + * FT_ENCODING_OLD_LATIN_2 :: + * This value is deprecated and was neither used nor reported by + * FreeType. Don't use or test for it. + * + * FT_ENCODING_MS_SJIS :: + * Same as FT_ENCODING_SJIS. Deprecated. + * + * FT_ENCODING_MS_GB2312 :: + * Same as FT_ENCODING_PRC. Deprecated. + * + * FT_ENCODING_MS_BIG5 :: + * Same as FT_ENCODING_BIG5. Deprecated. + * + * FT_ENCODING_MS_WANSUNG :: + * Same as FT_ENCODING_WANSUNG. Deprecated. + * + * FT_ENCODING_MS_JOHAB :: + * Same as FT_ENCODING_JOHAB. Deprecated. + * + * @note: + * By default, FreeType enables a Unicode charmap and tags it with + * `FT_ENCODING_UNICODE` when it is either provided or can be generated + * from PostScript glyph name dictionaries in the font file. All other + * encodings are considered legacy and tagged only if explicitly defined + * in the font file. Otherwise, `FT_ENCODING_NONE` is used. + * + * `FT_ENCODING_NONE` is set by the BDF and PCF drivers if the charmap is + * neither Unicode nor ISO-8859-1 (otherwise it is set to + * `FT_ENCODING_UNICODE`). Use @FT_Get_BDF_Charset_ID to find out which + * encoding is really present. If, for example, the `cs_registry` field + * is 'KOI8' and the `cs_encoding` field is 'R', the font is encoded in + * KOI8-R. + * + * `FT_ENCODING_NONE` is always set (with a single exception) by the + * winfonts driver. Use @FT_Get_WinFNT_Header and examine the `charset` + * field of the @FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec structure to find out which encoding + * is really present. For example, @FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1251 (204) means + * Windows code page 1251 (for Russian). + * + * `FT_ENCODING_NONE` is set if `platform_id` is @TT_PLATFORM_MACINTOSH + * and `encoding_id` is not `TT_MAC_ID_ROMAN` (otherwise it is set to + * `FT_ENCODING_APPLE_ROMAN`). + * + * If `platform_id` is @TT_PLATFORM_MACINTOSH, use the function + * @FT_Get_CMap_Language_ID to query the Mac language ID that may be + * needed to be able to distinguish Apple encoding variants. See + * + * https://www.unicode.org/Public/MAPPINGS/VENDORS/APPLE/Readme.txt + * + * to get an idea how to do that. Basically, if the language ID is~0, + * don't use it, otherwise subtract 1 from the language ID. Then examine + * `encoding_id`. If, for example, `encoding_id` is `TT_MAC_ID_ROMAN` + * and the language ID (minus~1) is `TT_MAC_LANGID_GREEK`, it is the + * Greek encoding, not Roman. `TT_MAC_ID_ARABIC` with + * `TT_MAC_LANGID_FARSI` means the Farsi variant the Arabic encoding. + */ + typedef enum FT_Encoding_ + { + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_NONE, 0, 0, 0, 0 ), + + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_MS_SYMBOL, 's', 'y', 'm', 'b' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_UNICODE, 'u', 'n', 'i', 'c' ), + + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_SJIS, 's', 'j', 'i', 's' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_PRC, 'g', 'b', ' ', ' ' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_BIG5, 'b', 'i', 'g', '5' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_WANSUNG, 'w', 'a', 'n', 's' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_JOHAB, 'j', 'o', 'h', 'a' ), + + /* for backward compatibility */ + FT_ENCODING_GB2312 = FT_ENCODING_PRC, + FT_ENCODING_MS_SJIS = FT_ENCODING_SJIS, + FT_ENCODING_MS_GB2312 = FT_ENCODING_PRC, + FT_ENCODING_MS_BIG5 = FT_ENCODING_BIG5, + FT_ENCODING_MS_WANSUNG = FT_ENCODING_WANSUNG, + FT_ENCODING_MS_JOHAB = FT_ENCODING_JOHAB, + + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_STANDARD, 'A', 'D', 'O', 'B' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_EXPERT, 'A', 'D', 'B', 'E' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_CUSTOM, 'A', 'D', 'B', 'C' ), + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_LATIN_1, 'l', 'a', 't', '1' ), + + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_OLD_LATIN_2, 'l', 'a', 't', '2' ), + + FT_ENC_TAG( FT_ENCODING_APPLE_ROMAN, 'a', 'r', 'm', 'n' ) + + } FT_Encoding; + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding `FT_Encoding` */ + /* values instead */ +#define ft_encoding_none FT_ENCODING_NONE +#define ft_encoding_unicode FT_ENCODING_UNICODE +#define ft_encoding_symbol FT_ENCODING_MS_SYMBOL +#define ft_encoding_latin_1 FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_LATIN_1 +#define ft_encoding_latin_2 FT_ENCODING_OLD_LATIN_2 +#define ft_encoding_sjis FT_ENCODING_SJIS +#define ft_encoding_gb2312 FT_ENCODING_PRC +#define ft_encoding_big5 FT_ENCODING_BIG5 +#define ft_encoding_wansung FT_ENCODING_WANSUNG +#define ft_encoding_johab FT_ENCODING_JOHAB + +#define ft_encoding_adobe_standard FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_STANDARD +#define ft_encoding_adobe_expert FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_EXPERT +#define ft_encoding_adobe_custom FT_ENCODING_ADOBE_CUSTOM +#define ft_encoding_apple_roman FT_ENCODING_APPLE_ROMAN + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_CharMapRec + * + * @description: + * The base charmap structure. + * + * @fields: + * face :: + * A handle to the parent face object. + * + * encoding :: + * An @FT_Encoding tag identifying the charmap. Use this with + * @FT_Select_Charmap. + * + * platform_id :: + * An ID number describing the platform for the following encoding ID. + * This comes directly from the TrueType specification and gets + * emulated for other formats. + * + * encoding_id :: + * A platform-specific encoding number. This also comes from the + * TrueType specification and gets emulated similarly. + */ + typedef struct FT_CharMapRec_ + { + FT_Face face; + FT_Encoding encoding; + FT_UShort platform_id; + FT_UShort encoding_id; + + } FT_CharMapRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /* */ + /* B A S E O B J E C T C L A S S E S */ + /* */ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Face_Internal + * + * @description: + * An opaque handle to an `FT_Face_InternalRec` structure that models the + * private data of a given @FT_Face object. + * + * This structure might change between releases of FreeType~2 and is not + * generally available to client applications. + */ + typedef struct FT_Face_InternalRec_* FT_Face_Internal; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_FaceRec + * + * @description: + * FreeType root face class structure. A face object models a typeface + * in a font file. + * + * @fields: + * num_faces :: + * The number of faces in the font file. Some font formats can have + * multiple faces in a single font file. + * + * face_index :: + * This field holds two different values. Bits 0-15 are the index of + * the face in the font file (starting with value~0). They are set + * to~0 if there is only one face in the font file. + * + * [Since 2.6.1] Bits 16-30 are relevant to GX and OpenType variation + * fonts only, holding the named instance index for the current face + * index (starting with value~1; value~0 indicates font access without + * a named instance). For non-variation fonts, bits 16-30 are ignored. + * If we have the third named instance of face~4, say, `face_index` is + * set to 0x00030004. + * + * Bit 31 is always zero (this is, `face_index` is always a positive + * value). + * + * [Since 2.9] Changing the design coordinates with + * @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates or @FT_Set_Var_Blend_Coordinates does + * not influence the named instance index value (only + * @FT_Set_Named_Instance does that). + * + * face_flags :: + * A set of bit flags that give important information about the face; + * see @FT_FACE_FLAG_XXX for the details. + * + * style_flags :: + * The lower 16~bits contain a set of bit flags indicating the style of + * the face; see @FT_STYLE_FLAG_XXX for the details. + * + * [Since 2.6.1] Bits 16-30 hold the number of named instances + * available for the current face if we have a GX or OpenType variation + * (sub)font. Bit 31 is always zero (this is, `style_flags` is always + * a positive value). Note that a variation font has always at least + * one named instance, namely the default instance. + * + * num_glyphs :: + * The number of glyphs in the face. If the face is scalable and has + * sbits (see `num_fixed_sizes`), it is set to the number of outline + * glyphs. + * + * For CID-keyed fonts (not in an SFNT wrapper) this value gives the + * highest CID used in the font. + * + * family_name :: + * The face's family name. This is an ASCII string, usually in + * English, that describes the typeface's family (like 'Times New + * Roman', 'Bodoni', 'Garamond', etc). This is a least common + * denominator used to list fonts. Some formats (TrueType & OpenType) + * provide localized and Unicode versions of this string. Applications + * should use the format-specific interface to access them. Can be + * `NULL` (e.g., in fonts embedded in a PDF file). + * + * In case the font doesn't provide a specific family name entry, + * FreeType tries to synthesize one, deriving it from other name + * entries. + * + * style_name :: + * The face's style name. This is an ASCII string, usually in English, + * that describes the typeface's style (like 'Italic', 'Bold', + * 'Condensed', etc). Not all font formats provide a style name, so + * this field is optional, and can be set to `NULL`. As for + * `family_name`, some formats provide localized and Unicode versions + * of this string. Applications should use the format-specific + * interface to access them. + * + * num_fixed_sizes :: + * The number of bitmap strikes in the face. Even if the face is + * scalable, there might still be bitmap strikes, which are called + * 'sbits' in that case. + * + * available_sizes :: + * An array of @FT_Bitmap_Size for all bitmap strikes in the face. It + * is set to `NULL` if there is no bitmap strike. + * + * Note that FreeType tries to sanitize the strike data since they are + * sometimes sloppy or incorrect, but this can easily fail. + * + * num_charmaps :: + * The number of charmaps in the face. + * + * charmaps :: + * An array of the charmaps of the face. + * + * generic :: + * A field reserved for client uses. See the @FT_Generic type + * description. + * + * bbox :: + * The font bounding box. Coordinates are expressed in font units (see + * `units_per_EM`). The box is large enough to contain any glyph from + * the font. Thus, `bbox.yMax` can be seen as the 'maximum ascender', + * and `bbox.yMin` as the 'minimum descender'. Only relevant for + * scalable formats. + * + * Note that the bounding box might be off by (at least) one pixel for + * hinted fonts. See @FT_Size_Metrics for further discussion. + * + * units_per_EM :: + * The number of font units per EM square for this face. This is + * typically 2048 for TrueType fonts, and 1000 for Type~1 fonts. Only + * relevant for scalable formats. + * + * ascender :: + * The typographic ascender of the face, expressed in font units. For + * font formats not having this information, it is set to `bbox.yMax`. + * Only relevant for scalable formats. + * + * descender :: + * The typographic descender of the face, expressed in font units. For + * font formats not having this information, it is set to `bbox.yMin`. + * Note that this field is negative for values below the baseline. + * Only relevant for scalable formats. + * + * height :: + * This value is the vertical distance between two consecutive + * baselines, expressed in font units. It is always positive. Only + * relevant for scalable formats. + * + * If you want the global glyph height, use `ascender - descender`. + * + * max_advance_width :: + * The maximum advance width, in font units, for all glyphs in this + * face. This can be used to make word wrapping computations faster. + * Only relevant for scalable formats. + * + * max_advance_height :: + * The maximum advance height, in font units, for all glyphs in this + * face. This is only relevant for vertical layouts, and is set to + * `height` for fonts that do not provide vertical metrics. Only + * relevant for scalable formats. + * + * underline_position :: + * The position, in font units, of the underline line for this face. + * It is the center of the underlining stem. Only relevant for + * scalable formats. + * + * underline_thickness :: + * The thickness, in font units, of the underline for this face. Only + * relevant for scalable formats. + * + * glyph :: + * The face's associated glyph slot(s). + * + * size :: + * The current active size for this face. + * + * charmap :: + * The current active charmap for this face. + * + * @note: + * Fields may be changed after a call to @FT_Attach_File or + * @FT_Attach_Stream. + * + * For an OpenType variation font, the values of the following fields can + * change after a call to @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates (and friends) if + * the font contains an 'MVAR' table: `ascender`, `descender`, `height`, + * `underline_position`, and `underline_thickness`. + * + * Especially for TrueType fonts see also the documentation for + * @FT_Size_Metrics. + */ + typedef struct FT_FaceRec_ + { + FT_Long num_faces; + FT_Long face_index; + + FT_Long face_flags; + FT_Long style_flags; + + FT_Long num_glyphs; + + FT_String* family_name; + FT_String* style_name; + + FT_Int num_fixed_sizes; + FT_Bitmap_Size* available_sizes; + + FT_Int num_charmaps; + FT_CharMap* charmaps; + + FT_Generic generic; + + /*# The following member variables (down to `underline_thickness`) */ + /*# are only relevant to scalable outlines; cf. @FT_Bitmap_Size */ + /*# for bitmap fonts. */ + FT_BBox bbox; + + FT_UShort units_per_EM; + FT_Short ascender; + FT_Short descender; + FT_Short height; + + FT_Short max_advance_width; + FT_Short max_advance_height; + + FT_Short underline_position; + FT_Short underline_thickness; + + FT_GlyphSlot glyph; + FT_Size size; + FT_CharMap charmap; + + /*@private begin */ + + FT_Driver driver; + FT_Memory memory; + FT_Stream stream; + + FT_ListRec sizes_list; + + FT_Generic autohint; /* face-specific auto-hinter data */ + void* extensions; /* unused */ + + FT_Face_Internal internal; + + /*@private end */ + + } FT_FaceRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_FACE_FLAG_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit flags used in the `face_flags` field of the @FT_FaceRec + * structure. They inform client applications of properties of the + * corresponding face. + * + * @values: + * FT_FACE_FLAG_SCALABLE :: + * The face contains outline glyphs. Note that a face can contain + * bitmap strikes also, i.e., a face can have both this flag and + * @FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_SIZES set. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_SIZES :: + * The face contains bitmap strikes. See also the `num_fixed_sizes` + * and `available_sizes` fields of @FT_FaceRec. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_WIDTH :: + * The face contains fixed-width characters (like Courier, Lucida, + * MonoType, etc.). + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_SFNT :: + * The face uses the SFNT storage scheme. For now, this means TrueType + * and OpenType. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_HORIZONTAL :: + * The face contains horizontal glyph metrics. This should be set for + * all common formats. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_VERTICAL :: + * The face contains vertical glyph metrics. This is only available in + * some formats, not all of them. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_KERNING :: + * The face contains kerning information. If set, the kerning distance + * can be retrieved using the function @FT_Get_Kerning. Otherwise the + * function always return the vector (0,0). Note that FreeType doesn't + * handle kerning data from the SFNT 'GPOS' table (as present in many + * OpenType fonts). + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_FAST_GLYPHS :: + * THIS FLAG IS DEPRECATED. DO NOT USE OR TEST IT. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_MULTIPLE_MASTERS :: + * The face contains multiple masters and is capable of interpolating + * between them. Supported formats are Adobe MM, TrueType GX, and + * OpenType variation fonts. + * + * See section @multiple_masters for API details. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_GLYPH_NAMES :: + * The face contains glyph names, which can be retrieved using + * @FT_Get_Glyph_Name. Note that some TrueType fonts contain broken + * glyph name tables. Use the function @FT_Has_PS_Glyph_Names when + * needed. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_EXTERNAL_STREAM :: + * Used internally by FreeType to indicate that a face's stream was + * provided by the client application and should not be destroyed when + * @FT_Done_Face is called. Don't read or test this flag. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_HINTER :: + * The font driver has a hinting machine of its own. For example, with + * TrueType fonts, it makes sense to use data from the SFNT 'gasp' + * table only if the native TrueType hinting engine (with the bytecode + * interpreter) is available and active. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_CID_KEYED :: + * The face is CID-keyed. In that case, the face is not accessed by + * glyph indices but by CID values. For subsetted CID-keyed fonts this + * has the consequence that not all index values are a valid argument + * to @FT_Load_Glyph. Only the CID values for which corresponding + * glyphs in the subsetted font exist make `FT_Load_Glyph` return + * successfully; in all other cases you get an + * `FT_Err_Invalid_Argument` error. + * + * Note that CID-keyed fonts that are in an SFNT wrapper (this is, all + * OpenType/CFF fonts) don't have this flag set since the glyphs are + * accessed in the normal way (using contiguous indices); the + * 'CID-ness' isn't visible to the application. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_TRICKY :: + * The face is 'tricky', this is, it always needs the font format's + * native hinting engine to get a reasonable result. A typical example + * is the old Chinese font `mingli.ttf` (but not `mingliu.ttc`) that + * uses TrueType bytecode instructions to move and scale all of its + * subglyphs. + * + * It is not possible to auto-hint such fonts using + * @FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT; it will also ignore @FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING. + * You have to set both @FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING and @FT_LOAD_NO_AUTOHINT to + * really disable hinting; however, you probably never want this except + * for demonstration purposes. + * + * Currently, there are about a dozen TrueType fonts in the list of + * tricky fonts; they are hard-coded in file `ttobjs.c`. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_COLOR :: + * [Since 2.5.1] The face has color glyph tables. See @FT_LOAD_COLOR + * for more information. + * + * FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION :: + * [Since 2.9] Set if the current face (or named instance) has been + * altered with @FT_Set_MM_Design_Coordinates, + * @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates, or @FT_Set_Var_Blend_Coordinates. + * This flag is unset by a call to @FT_Set_Named_Instance. + */ +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_SCALABLE ( 1L << 0 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_SIZES ( 1L << 1 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_WIDTH ( 1L << 2 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_SFNT ( 1L << 3 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_HORIZONTAL ( 1L << 4 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_VERTICAL ( 1L << 5 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_KERNING ( 1L << 6 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_FAST_GLYPHS ( 1L << 7 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_MULTIPLE_MASTERS ( 1L << 8 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_GLYPH_NAMES ( 1L << 9 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_EXTERNAL_STREAM ( 1L << 10 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_HINTER ( 1L << 11 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_CID_KEYED ( 1L << 12 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_TRICKY ( 1L << 13 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_COLOR ( 1L << 14 ) +#define FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION ( 1L << 15 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_HORIZONTAL + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains horizontal + * metrics (this is true for all font formats though). + * + * @also: + * @FT_HAS_VERTICAL can be used to check for vertical metrics. + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_HORIZONTAL( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_HORIZONTAL ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_VERTICAL + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains real + * vertical metrics (and not only synthesized ones). + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_VERTICAL( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_VERTICAL ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_KERNING + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains kerning data + * that can be accessed with @FT_Get_Kerning. + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_KERNING( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_KERNING ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IS_SCALABLE + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains a scalable + * font face (true for TrueType, Type~1, Type~42, CID, OpenType/CFF, and + * PFR font formats). + * + */ +#define FT_IS_SCALABLE( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_SCALABLE ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IS_SFNT + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains a font whose + * format is based on the SFNT storage scheme. This usually means: + * TrueType fonts, OpenType fonts, as well as SFNT-based embedded bitmap + * fonts. + * + * If this macro is true, all functions defined in @FT_SFNT_NAMES_H and + * @FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H are available. + * + */ +#define FT_IS_SFNT( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_SFNT ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IS_FIXED_WIDTH + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains a font face + * that contains fixed-width (or 'monospace', 'fixed-pitch', etc.) + * glyphs. + * + */ +#define FT_IS_FIXED_WIDTH( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_WIDTH ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_FIXED_SIZES + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains some + * embedded bitmaps. See the `available_sizes` field of the @FT_FaceRec + * structure. + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_FIXED_SIZES( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_SIZES ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_FAST_GLYPHS + * + * @description: + * Deprecated. + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_FAST_GLYPHS( face ) 0 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_GLYPH_NAMES + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains some glyph + * names that can be accessed through @FT_Get_Glyph_Name. + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_GLYPH_NAMES( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_GLYPH_NAMES ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_MULTIPLE_MASTERS + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains some + * multiple masters. The functions provided by @FT_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H + * are then available to choose the exact design you want. + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_MULTIPLE_MASTERS( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_MULTIPLE_MASTERS ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IS_NAMED_INSTANCE + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object is a named instance + * of a GX or OpenType variation font. + * + * [Since 2.9] Changing the design coordinates with + * @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates or @FT_Set_Var_Blend_Coordinates does + * not influence the return value of this macro (only + * @FT_Set_Named_Instance does that). + * + * @since: + * 2.7 + * + */ +#define FT_IS_NAMED_INSTANCE( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_index & 0x7FFF0000L ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IS_VARIATION + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object has been altered by + * @FT_Set_MM_Design_Coordinates, @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates, or + * @FT_Set_Var_Blend_Coordinates. + * + * @since: + * 2.9 + * + */ +#define FT_IS_VARIATION( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IS_CID_KEYED + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains a CID-keyed + * font. See the discussion of @FT_FACE_FLAG_CID_KEYED for more details. + * + * If this macro is true, all functions defined in @FT_CID_H are + * available. + * + */ +#define FT_IS_CID_KEYED( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_CID_KEYED ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IS_TRICKY + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face represents a 'tricky' font. + * See the discussion of @FT_FACE_FLAG_TRICKY for more details. + * + */ +#define FT_IS_TRICKY( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_TRICKY ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_HAS_COLOR + * + * @description: + * A macro that returns true whenever a face object contains tables for + * color glyphs. + * + * @since: + * 2.5.1 + * + */ +#define FT_HAS_COLOR( face ) \ + ( (face)->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_COLOR ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_STYLE_FLAG_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit flags to indicate the style of a given face. These are + * used in the `style_flags` field of @FT_FaceRec. + * + * @values: + * FT_STYLE_FLAG_ITALIC :: + * The face style is italic or oblique. + * + * FT_STYLE_FLAG_BOLD :: + * The face is bold. + * + * @note: + * The style information as provided by FreeType is very basic. More + * details are beyond the scope and should be done on a higher level (for + * example, by analyzing various fields of the 'OS/2' table in SFNT based + * fonts). + */ +#define FT_STYLE_FLAG_ITALIC ( 1 << 0 ) +#define FT_STYLE_FLAG_BOLD ( 1 << 1 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Size_Internal + * + * @description: + * An opaque handle to an `FT_Size_InternalRec` structure, used to model + * private data of a given @FT_Size object. + */ + typedef struct FT_Size_InternalRec_* FT_Size_Internal; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Size_Metrics + * + * @description: + * The size metrics structure gives the metrics of a size object. + * + * @fields: + * x_ppem :: + * The width of the scaled EM square in pixels, hence the term 'ppem' + * (pixels per EM). It is also referred to as 'nominal width'. + * + * y_ppem :: + * The height of the scaled EM square in pixels, hence the term 'ppem' + * (pixels per EM). It is also referred to as 'nominal height'. + * + * x_scale :: + * A 16.16 fractional scaling value to convert horizontal metrics from + * font units to 26.6 fractional pixels. Only relevant for scalable + * font formats. + * + * y_scale :: + * A 16.16 fractional scaling value to convert vertical metrics from + * font units to 26.6 fractional pixels. Only relevant for scalable + * font formats. + * + * ascender :: + * The ascender in 26.6 fractional pixels, rounded up to an integer + * value. See @FT_FaceRec for the details. + * + * descender :: + * The descender in 26.6 fractional pixels, rounded down to an integer + * value. See @FT_FaceRec for the details. + * + * height :: + * The height in 26.6 fractional pixels, rounded to an integer value. + * See @FT_FaceRec for the details. + * + * max_advance :: + * The maximum advance width in 26.6 fractional pixels, rounded to an + * integer value. See @FT_FaceRec for the details. + * + * @note: + * The scaling values, if relevant, are determined first during a size + * changing operation. The remaining fields are then set by the driver. + * For scalable formats, they are usually set to scaled values of the + * corresponding fields in @FT_FaceRec. Some values like ascender or + * descender are rounded for historical reasons; more precise values (for + * outline fonts) can be derived by scaling the corresponding @FT_FaceRec + * values manually, with code similar to the following. + * + * ``` + * scaled_ascender = FT_MulFix( face->ascender, + * size_metrics->y_scale ); + * ``` + * + * Note that due to glyph hinting and the selected rendering mode these + * values are usually not exact; consequently, they must be treated as + * unreliable with an error margin of at least one pixel! + * + * Indeed, the only way to get the exact metrics is to render _all_ + * glyphs. As this would be a definite performance hit, it is up to + * client applications to perform such computations. + * + * The `FT_Size_Metrics` structure is valid for bitmap fonts also. + * + * + * **TrueType fonts with native bytecode hinting** + * + * All applications that handle TrueType fonts with native hinting must + * be aware that TTFs expect different rounding of vertical font + * dimensions. The application has to cater for this, especially if it + * wants to rely on a TTF's vertical data (for example, to properly align + * box characters vertically). + * + * Only the application knows _in advance_ that it is going to use native + * hinting for TTFs! FreeType, on the other hand, selects the hinting + * mode not at the time of creating an @FT_Size object but much later, + * namely while calling @FT_Load_Glyph. + * + * Here is some pseudo code that illustrates a possible solution. + * + * ``` + * font_format = FT_Get_Font_Format( face ); + * + * if ( !strcmp( font_format, "TrueType" ) && + * do_native_bytecode_hinting ) + * { + * ascender = ROUND( FT_MulFix( face->ascender, + * size_metrics->y_scale ) ); + * descender = ROUND( FT_MulFix( face->descender, + * size_metrics->y_scale ) ); + * } + * else + * { + * ascender = size_metrics->ascender; + * descender = size_metrics->descender; + * } + * + * height = size_metrics->height; + * max_advance = size_metrics->max_advance; + * ``` + */ + typedef struct FT_Size_Metrics_ + { + FT_UShort x_ppem; /* horizontal pixels per EM */ + FT_UShort y_ppem; /* vertical pixels per EM */ + + FT_Fixed x_scale; /* scaling values used to convert font */ + FT_Fixed y_scale; /* units to 26.6 fractional pixels */ + + FT_Pos ascender; /* ascender in 26.6 frac. pixels */ + FT_Pos descender; /* descender in 26.6 frac. pixels */ + FT_Pos height; /* text height in 26.6 frac. pixels */ + FT_Pos max_advance; /* max horizontal advance, in 26.6 pixels */ + + } FT_Size_Metrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_SizeRec + * + * @description: + * FreeType root size class structure. A size object models a face + * object at a given size. + * + * @fields: + * face :: + * Handle to the parent face object. + * + * generic :: + * A typeless pointer, unused by the FreeType library or any of its + * drivers. It can be used by client applications to link their own + * data to each size object. + * + * metrics :: + * Metrics for this size object. This field is read-only. + */ + typedef struct FT_SizeRec_ + { + FT_Face face; /* parent face object */ + FT_Generic generic; /* generic pointer for client uses */ + FT_Size_Metrics metrics; /* size metrics */ + FT_Size_Internal internal; + + } FT_SizeRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_SubGlyph + * + * @description: + * The subglyph structure is an internal object used to describe + * subglyphs (for example, in the case of composites). + * + * @note: + * The subglyph implementation is not part of the high-level API, hence + * the forward structure declaration. + * + * You can however retrieve subglyph information with + * @FT_Get_SubGlyph_Info. + */ + typedef struct FT_SubGlyphRec_* FT_SubGlyph; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Slot_Internal + * + * @description: + * An opaque handle to an `FT_Slot_InternalRec` structure, used to model + * private data of a given @FT_GlyphSlot object. + */ + typedef struct FT_Slot_InternalRec_* FT_Slot_Internal; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_GlyphSlotRec + * + * @description: + * FreeType root glyph slot class structure. A glyph slot is a container + * where individual glyphs can be loaded, be they in outline or bitmap + * format. + * + * @fields: + * library :: + * A handle to the FreeType library instance this slot belongs to. + * + * face :: + * A handle to the parent face object. + * + * next :: + * In some cases (like some font tools), several glyph slots per face + * object can be a good thing. As this is rare, the glyph slots are + * listed through a direct, single-linked list using its `next` field. + * + * glyph_index :: + * [Since 2.10] The glyph index passed as an argument to @FT_Load_Glyph + * while initializing the glyph slot. + * + * generic :: + * A typeless pointer unused by the FreeType library or any of its + * drivers. It can be used by client applications to link their own + * data to each glyph slot object. + * + * metrics :: + * The metrics of the last loaded glyph in the slot. The returned + * values depend on the last load flags (see the @FT_Load_Glyph API + * function) and can be expressed either in 26.6 fractional pixels or + * font units. + * + * Note that even when the glyph image is transformed, the metrics are + * not. + * + * linearHoriAdvance :: + * The advance width of the unhinted glyph. Its value is expressed in + * 16.16 fractional pixels, unless @FT_LOAD_LINEAR_DESIGN is set when + * loading the glyph. This field can be important to perform correct + * WYSIWYG layout. Only relevant for outline glyphs. + * + * linearVertAdvance :: + * The advance height of the unhinted glyph. Its value is expressed in + * 16.16 fractional pixels, unless @FT_LOAD_LINEAR_DESIGN is set when + * loading the glyph. This field can be important to perform correct + * WYSIWYG layout. Only relevant for outline glyphs. + * + * advance :: + * This shorthand is, depending on @FT_LOAD_IGNORE_TRANSFORM, the + * transformed (hinted) advance width for the glyph, in 26.6 fractional + * pixel format. As specified with @FT_LOAD_VERTICAL_LAYOUT, it uses + * either the `horiAdvance` or the `vertAdvance` value of `metrics` + * field. + * + * format :: + * This field indicates the format of the image contained in the glyph + * slot. Typically @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP, @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE, + * or @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_COMPOSITE, but other values are possible. + * + * bitmap :: + * This field is used as a bitmap descriptor. Note that the address + * and content of the bitmap buffer can change between calls of + * @FT_Load_Glyph and a few other functions. + * + * bitmap_left :: + * The bitmap's left bearing expressed in integer pixels. + * + * bitmap_top :: + * The bitmap's top bearing expressed in integer pixels. This is the + * distance from the baseline to the top-most glyph scanline, upwards + * y~coordinates being **positive**. + * + * outline :: + * The outline descriptor for the current glyph image if its format is + * @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE. Once a glyph is loaded, `outline` can be + * transformed, distorted, emboldened, etc. However, it must not be + * freed. + * + * num_subglyphs :: + * The number of subglyphs in a composite glyph. This field is only + * valid for the composite glyph format that should normally only be + * loaded with the @FT_LOAD_NO_RECURSE flag. + * + * subglyphs :: + * An array of subglyph descriptors for composite glyphs. There are + * `num_subglyphs` elements in there. Currently internal to FreeType. + * + * control_data :: + * Certain font drivers can also return the control data for a given + * glyph image (e.g. TrueType bytecode, Type~1 charstrings, etc.). + * This field is a pointer to such data; it is currently internal to + * FreeType. + * + * control_len :: + * This is the length in bytes of the control data. Currently internal + * to FreeType. + * + * other :: + * Reserved. + * + * lsb_delta :: + * The difference between hinted and unhinted left side bearing while + * auto-hinting is active. Zero otherwise. + * + * rsb_delta :: + * The difference between hinted and unhinted right side bearing while + * auto-hinting is active. Zero otherwise. + * + * @note: + * If @FT_Load_Glyph is called with default flags (see @FT_LOAD_DEFAULT) + * the glyph image is loaded in the glyph slot in its native format + * (e.g., an outline glyph for TrueType and Type~1 formats). [Since 2.9] + * The prospective bitmap metrics are calculated according to + * @FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX and other flags even for the outline glyph, even + * if @FT_LOAD_RENDER is not set. + * + * This image can later be converted into a bitmap by calling + * @FT_Render_Glyph. This function searches the current renderer for the + * native image's format, then invokes it. + * + * The renderer is in charge of transforming the native image through the + * slot's face transformation fields, then converting it into a bitmap + * that is returned in `slot->bitmap`. + * + * Note that `slot->bitmap_left` and `slot->bitmap_top` are also used to + * specify the position of the bitmap relative to the current pen + * position (e.g., coordinates (0,0) on the baseline). Of course, + * `slot->format` is also changed to @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP. + * + * Here is a small pseudo code fragment that shows how to use `lsb_delta` + * and `rsb_delta` to do fractional positioning of glyphs: + * + * ``` + * FT_GlyphSlot slot = face->glyph; + * FT_Pos origin_x = 0; + * + * + * for all glyphs do + * + * + * FT_Outline_Translate( slot->outline, origin_x & 63, 0 ); + * + * + * + * + * + * origin_x += slot->advance.x; + * origin_x += slot->lsb_delta - slot->rsb_delta; + * endfor + * ``` + * + * Here is another small pseudo code fragment that shows how to use + * `lsb_delta` and `rsb_delta` to improve integer positioning of glyphs: + * + * ``` + * FT_GlyphSlot slot = face->glyph; + * FT_Pos origin_x = 0; + * FT_Pos prev_rsb_delta = 0; + * + * + * for all glyphs do + * + * + * + * + * if ( prev_rsb_delta - slot->lsb_delta > 32 ) + * origin_x -= 64; + * else if ( prev_rsb_delta - slot->lsb_delta < -31 ) + * origin_x += 64; + * + * prev_rsb_delta = slot->rsb_delta; + * + * + * + * origin_x += slot->advance.x; + * endfor + * ``` + * + * If you use strong auto-hinting, you **must** apply these delta values! + * Otherwise you will experience far too large inter-glyph spacing at + * small rendering sizes in most cases. Note that it doesn't harm to use + * the above code for other hinting modes also, since the delta values + * are zero then. + */ + typedef struct FT_GlyphSlotRec_ + { + FT_Library library; + FT_Face face; + FT_GlyphSlot next; + FT_UInt glyph_index; /* new in 2.10; was reserved previously */ + FT_Generic generic; + + FT_Glyph_Metrics metrics; + FT_Fixed linearHoriAdvance; + FT_Fixed linearVertAdvance; + FT_Vector advance; + + FT_Glyph_Format format; + + FT_Bitmap bitmap; + FT_Int bitmap_left; + FT_Int bitmap_top; + + FT_Outline outline; + + FT_UInt num_subglyphs; + FT_SubGlyph subglyphs; + + void* control_data; + long control_len; + + FT_Pos lsb_delta; + FT_Pos rsb_delta; + + void* other; + + FT_Slot_Internal internal; + + } FT_GlyphSlotRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /* */ + /* F U N C T I O N S */ + /* */ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Init_FreeType + * + * @description: + * Initialize a new FreeType library object. The set of modules that are + * registered by this function is determined at build time. + * + * @output: + * alibrary :: + * A handle to a new library object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * In case you want to provide your own memory allocating routines, use + * @FT_New_Library instead, followed by a call to @FT_Add_Default_Modules + * (or a series of calls to @FT_Add_Module) and + * @FT_Set_Default_Properties. + * + * See the documentation of @FT_Library and @FT_Face for multi-threading + * issues. + * + * If you need reference-counting (cf. @FT_Reference_Library), use + * @FT_New_Library and @FT_Done_Library. + * + * If compilation option `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_ENVIRONMENT_PROPERTIES` is + * set, this function reads the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable to control driver properties. See section @properties for + * more. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Init_FreeType( FT_Library *alibrary ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_FreeType + * + * @description: + * Destroy a given FreeType library object and all of its children, + * including resources, drivers, faces, sizes, etc. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the target library object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Done_FreeType( FT_Library library ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_OPEN_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit field constants used within the `flags` field of the + * @FT_Open_Args structure. + * + * @values: + * FT_OPEN_MEMORY :: + * This is a memory-based stream. + * + * FT_OPEN_STREAM :: + * Copy the stream from the `stream` field. + * + * FT_OPEN_PATHNAME :: + * Create a new input stream from a C~path name. + * + * FT_OPEN_DRIVER :: + * Use the `driver` field. + * + * FT_OPEN_PARAMS :: + * Use the `num_params` and `params` fields. + * + * @note: + * The `FT_OPEN_MEMORY`, `FT_OPEN_STREAM`, and `FT_OPEN_PATHNAME` flags + * are mutually exclusive. + */ +#define FT_OPEN_MEMORY 0x1 +#define FT_OPEN_STREAM 0x2 +#define FT_OPEN_PATHNAME 0x4 +#define FT_OPEN_DRIVER 0x8 +#define FT_OPEN_PARAMS 0x10 + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding `FT_OPEN_XXX` */ + /* values instead */ +#define ft_open_memory FT_OPEN_MEMORY +#define ft_open_stream FT_OPEN_STREAM +#define ft_open_pathname FT_OPEN_PATHNAME +#define ft_open_driver FT_OPEN_DRIVER +#define ft_open_params FT_OPEN_PARAMS + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Parameter + * + * @description: + * A simple structure to pass more or less generic parameters to + * @FT_Open_Face and @FT_Face_Properties. + * + * @fields: + * tag :: + * A four-byte identification tag. + * + * data :: + * A pointer to the parameter data. + * + * @note: + * The ID and function of parameters are driver-specific. See section + * @parameter_tags for more information. + */ + typedef struct FT_Parameter_ + { + FT_ULong tag; + FT_Pointer data; + + } FT_Parameter; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Open_Args + * + * @description: + * A structure to indicate how to open a new font file or stream. A + * pointer to such a structure can be used as a parameter for the + * functions @FT_Open_Face and @FT_Attach_Stream. + * + * @fields: + * flags :: + * A set of bit flags indicating how to use the structure. + * + * memory_base :: + * The first byte of the file in memory. + * + * memory_size :: + * The size in bytes of the file in memory. + * + * pathname :: + * A pointer to an 8-bit file pathname. + * + * stream :: + * A handle to a source stream object. + * + * driver :: + * This field is exclusively used by @FT_Open_Face; it simply specifies + * the font driver to use for opening the face. If set to `NULL`, + * FreeType tries to load the face with each one of the drivers in its + * list. + * + * num_params :: + * The number of extra parameters. + * + * params :: + * Extra parameters passed to the font driver when opening a new face. + * + * @note: + * The stream type is determined by the contents of `flags` that are + * tested in the following order by @FT_Open_Face: + * + * If the @FT_OPEN_MEMORY bit is set, assume that this is a memory file + * of `memory_size` bytes, located at `memory_address`. The data are not + * copied, and the client is responsible for releasing and destroying + * them _after_ the corresponding call to @FT_Done_Face. + * + * Otherwise, if the @FT_OPEN_STREAM bit is set, assume that a custom + * input stream `stream` is used. + * + * Otherwise, if the @FT_OPEN_PATHNAME bit is set, assume that this is a + * normal file and use `pathname` to open it. + * + * If the @FT_OPEN_DRIVER bit is set, @FT_Open_Face only tries to open + * the file with the driver whose handler is in `driver`. + * + * If the @FT_OPEN_PARAMS bit is set, the parameters given by + * `num_params` and `params` is used. They are ignored otherwise. + * + * Ideally, both the `pathname` and `params` fields should be tagged as + * 'const'; this is missing for API backward compatibility. In other + * words, applications should treat them as read-only. + */ + typedef struct FT_Open_Args_ + { + FT_UInt flags; + const FT_Byte* memory_base; + FT_Long memory_size; + FT_String* pathname; + FT_Stream stream; + FT_Module driver; + FT_Int num_params; + FT_Parameter* params; + + } FT_Open_Args; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Face + * + * @description: + * Call @FT_Open_Face to open a font by its pathname. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library resource. + * + * @input: + * pathname :: + * A path to the font file. + * + * face_index :: + * See @FT_Open_Face for a detailed description of this parameter. + * + * @output: + * aface :: + * A handle to a new face object. If `face_index` is greater than or + * equal to zero, it must be non-`NULL`. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Use @FT_Done_Face to destroy the created @FT_Face object (along with + * its slot and sizes). + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Face( FT_Library library, + const char* filepathname, + FT_Long face_index, + FT_Face *aface ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Memory_Face + * + * @description: + * Call @FT_Open_Face to open a font that has been loaded into memory. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library resource. + * + * @input: + * file_base :: + * A pointer to the beginning of the font data. + * + * file_size :: + * The size of the memory chunk used by the font data. + * + * face_index :: + * See @FT_Open_Face for a detailed description of this parameter. + * + * @output: + * aface :: + * A handle to a new face object. If `face_index` is greater than or + * equal to zero, it must be non-`NULL`. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You must not deallocate the memory before calling @FT_Done_Face. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Memory_Face( FT_Library library, + const FT_Byte* file_base, + FT_Long file_size, + FT_Long face_index, + FT_Face *aface ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Open_Face + * + * @description: + * Create a face object from a given resource described by @FT_Open_Args. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library resource. + * + * @input: + * args :: + * A pointer to an `FT_Open_Args` structure that must be filled by the + * caller. + * + * face_index :: + * This field holds two different values. Bits 0-15 are the index of + * the face in the font file (starting with value~0). Set it to~0 if + * there is only one face in the font file. + * + * [Since 2.6.1] Bits 16-30 are relevant to GX and OpenType variation + * fonts only, specifying the named instance index for the current face + * index (starting with value~1; value~0 makes FreeType ignore named + * instances). For non-variation fonts, bits 16-30 are ignored. + * Assuming that you want to access the third named instance in face~4, + * `face_index` should be set to 0x00030004. If you want to access + * face~4 without variation handling, simply set `face_index` to + * value~4. + * + * `FT_Open_Face` and its siblings can be used to quickly check whether + * the font format of a given font resource is supported by FreeType. + * In general, if the `face_index` argument is negative, the function's + * return value is~0 if the font format is recognized, or non-zero + * otherwise. The function allocates a more or less empty face handle + * in `*aface` (if `aface` isn't `NULL`); the only two useful fields in + * this special case are `face->num_faces` and `face->style_flags`. + * For any negative value of `face_index`, `face->num_faces` gives the + * number of faces within the font file. For the negative value + * '-(N+1)' (with 'N' a non-negative 16-bit value), bits 16-30 in + * `face->style_flags` give the number of named instances in face 'N' + * if we have a variation font (or zero otherwise). After examination, + * the returned @FT_Face structure should be deallocated with a call to + * @FT_Done_Face. + * + * @output: + * aface :: + * A handle to a new face object. If `face_index` is greater than or + * equal to zero, it must be non-`NULL`. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Unlike FreeType 1.x, this function automatically creates a glyph slot + * for the face object that can be accessed directly through + * `face->glyph`. + * + * Each new face object created with this function also owns a default + * @FT_Size object, accessible as `face->size`. + * + * One @FT_Library instance can have multiple face objects, this is, + * @FT_Open_Face and its siblings can be called multiple times using the + * same `library` argument. + * + * See the discussion of reference counters in the description of + * @FT_Reference_Face. + * + * @example: + * To loop over all faces, use code similar to the following snippet + * (omitting the error handling). + * + * ``` + * ... + * FT_Face face; + * FT_Long i, num_faces; + * + * + * error = FT_Open_Face( library, args, -1, &face ); + * if ( error ) { ... } + * + * num_faces = face->num_faces; + * FT_Done_Face( face ); + * + * for ( i = 0; i < num_faces; i++ ) + * { + * ... + * error = FT_Open_Face( library, args, i, &face ); + * ... + * FT_Done_Face( face ); + * ... + * } + * ``` + * + * To loop over all valid values for `face_index`, use something similar + * to the following snippet, again without error handling. The code + * accesses all faces immediately (thus only a single call of + * `FT_Open_Face` within the do-loop), with and without named instances. + * + * ``` + * ... + * FT_Face face; + * + * FT_Long num_faces = 0; + * FT_Long num_instances = 0; + * + * FT_Long face_idx = 0; + * FT_Long instance_idx = 0; + * + * + * do + * { + * FT_Long id = ( instance_idx << 16 ) + face_idx; + * + * + * error = FT_Open_Face( library, args, id, &face ); + * if ( error ) { ... } + * + * num_faces = face->num_faces; + * num_instances = face->style_flags >> 16; + * + * ... + * + * FT_Done_Face( face ); + * + * if ( instance_idx < num_instances ) + * instance_idx++; + * else + * { + * face_idx++; + * instance_idx = 0; + * } + * + * } while ( face_idx < num_faces ) + * ``` + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Open_Face( FT_Library library, + const FT_Open_Args* args, + FT_Long face_index, + FT_Face *aface ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Attach_File + * + * @description: + * Call @FT_Attach_Stream to attach a file. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * @input: + * filepathname :: + * The pathname. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Attach_File( FT_Face face, + const char* filepathname ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Attach_Stream + * + * @description: + * 'Attach' data to a face object. Normally, this is used to read + * additional information for the face object. For example, you can + * attach an AFM file that comes with a Type~1 font to get the kerning + * values and other metrics. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * @input: + * parameters :: + * A pointer to @FT_Open_Args that must be filled by the caller. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The meaning of the 'attach' (i.e., what really happens when the new + * file is read) is not fixed by FreeType itself. It really depends on + * the font format (and thus the font driver). + * + * Client applications are expected to know what they are doing when + * invoking this function. Most drivers simply do not implement file or + * stream attachments. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Attach_Stream( FT_Face face, + FT_Open_Args* parameters ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Reference_Face + * + * @description: + * A counter gets initialized to~1 at the time an @FT_Face structure is + * created. This function increments the counter. @FT_Done_Face then + * only destroys a face if the counter is~1, otherwise it simply + * decrements the counter. + * + * This function helps in managing life-cycles of structures that + * reference @FT_Face objects. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to a target face object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.2 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Reference_Face( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_Face + * + * @description: + * Discard a given face object, as well as all of its child slots and + * sizes. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to a target face object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * See the discussion of reference counters in the description of + * @FT_Reference_Face. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Done_Face( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Select_Size + * + * @description: + * Select a bitmap strike. To be more precise, this function sets the + * scaling factors of the active @FT_Size object in a face so that + * bitmaps from this particular strike are taken by @FT_Load_Glyph and + * friends. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to a target face object. + * + * @input: + * strike_index :: + * The index of the bitmap strike in the `available_sizes` field of + * @FT_FaceRec structure. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * For bitmaps embedded in outline fonts it is common that only a subset + * of the available glyphs at a given ppem value is available. FreeType + * silently uses outlines if there is no bitmap for a given glyph index. + * + * For GX and OpenType variation fonts, a bitmap strike makes sense only + * if the default instance is active (this is, no glyph variation takes + * place); otherwise, FreeType simply ignores bitmap strikes. The same + * is true for all named instances that are different from the default + * instance. + * + * Don't use this function if you are using the FreeType cache API. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Select_Size( FT_Face face, + FT_Int strike_index ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Size_Request_Type + * + * @description: + * An enumeration type that lists the supported size request types, i.e., + * what input size (in font units) maps to the requested output size (in + * pixels, as computed from the arguments of @FT_Size_Request). + * + * @values: + * FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_NOMINAL :: + * The nominal size. The `units_per_EM` field of @FT_FaceRec is used + * to determine both scaling values. + * + * This is the standard scaling found in most applications. In + * particular, use this size request type for TrueType fonts if they + * provide optical scaling or something similar. Note, however, that + * `units_per_EM` is a rather abstract value which bears no relation to + * the actual size of the glyphs in a font. + * + * FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_REAL_DIM :: + * The real dimension. The sum of the `ascender` and (minus of) the + * `descender` fields of @FT_FaceRec is used to determine both scaling + * values. + * + * FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_BBOX :: + * The font bounding box. The width and height of the `bbox` field of + * @FT_FaceRec are used to determine the horizontal and vertical + * scaling value, respectively. + * + * FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_CELL :: + * The `max_advance_width` field of @FT_FaceRec is used to determine + * the horizontal scaling value; the vertical scaling value is + * determined the same way as @FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_REAL_DIM does. + * Finally, both scaling values are set to the smaller one. This type + * is useful if you want to specify the font size for, say, a window of + * a given dimension and 80x24 cells. + * + * FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_SCALES :: + * Specify the scaling values directly. + * + * @note: + * The above descriptions only apply to scalable formats. For bitmap + * formats, the behaviour is up to the driver. + * + * See the note section of @FT_Size_Metrics if you wonder how size + * requesting relates to scaling values. + */ + typedef enum FT_Size_Request_Type_ + { + FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_NOMINAL, + FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_REAL_DIM, + FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_BBOX, + FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_CELL, + FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_SCALES, + + FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_MAX + + } FT_Size_Request_Type; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Size_RequestRec + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a size request. + * + * @fields: + * type :: + * See @FT_Size_Request_Type. + * + * width :: + * The desired width, given as a 26.6 fractional point value (with 72pt + * = 1in). + * + * height :: + * The desired height, given as a 26.6 fractional point value (with + * 72pt = 1in). + * + * horiResolution :: + * The horizontal resolution (dpi, i.e., pixels per inch). If set to + * zero, `width` is treated as a 26.6 fractional **pixel** value, which + * gets internally rounded to an integer. + * + * vertResolution :: + * The vertical resolution (dpi, i.e., pixels per inch). If set to + * zero, `height` is treated as a 26.6 fractional **pixel** value, + * which gets internally rounded to an integer. + * + * @note: + * If `width` is zero, the horizontal scaling value is set equal to the + * vertical scaling value, and vice versa. + * + * If `type` is `FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_SCALES`, `width` and `height` are + * interpreted directly as 16.16 fractional scaling values, without any + * further modification, and both `horiResolution` and `vertResolution` + * are ignored. + */ + typedef struct FT_Size_RequestRec_ + { + FT_Size_Request_Type type; + FT_Long width; + FT_Long height; + FT_UInt horiResolution; + FT_UInt vertResolution; + + } FT_Size_RequestRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Size_Request + * + * @description: + * A handle to a size request structure. + */ + typedef struct FT_Size_RequestRec_ *FT_Size_Request; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Request_Size + * + * @description: + * Resize the scale of the active @FT_Size object in a face. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to a target face object. + * + * @input: + * req :: + * A pointer to a @FT_Size_RequestRec. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Although drivers may select the bitmap strike matching the request, + * you should not rely on this if you intend to select a particular + * bitmap strike. Use @FT_Select_Size instead in that case. + * + * The relation between the requested size and the resulting glyph size + * is dependent entirely on how the size is defined in the source face. + * The font designer chooses the final size of each glyph relative to + * this size. For more information refer to + * 'https://www.freetype.org/freetype2/docs/glyphs/glyphs-2.html'. + * + * Contrary to @FT_Set_Char_Size, this function doesn't have special code + * to normalize zero-valued widths, heights, or resolutions (which lead + * to errors in most cases). + * + * Don't use this function if you are using the FreeType cache API. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Request_Size( FT_Face face, + FT_Size_Request req ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Char_Size + * + * @description: + * Call @FT_Request_Size to request the nominal size (in points). + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to a target face object. + * + * @input: + * char_width :: + * The nominal width, in 26.6 fractional points. + * + * char_height :: + * The nominal height, in 26.6 fractional points. + * + * horz_resolution :: + * The horizontal resolution in dpi. + * + * vert_resolution :: + * The vertical resolution in dpi. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * While this function allows fractional points as input values, the + * resulting ppem value for the given resolution is always rounded to the + * nearest integer. + * + * If either the character width or height is zero, it is set equal to + * the other value. + * + * If either the horizontal or vertical resolution is zero, it is set + * equal to the other value. + * + * A character width or height smaller than 1pt is set to 1pt; if both + * resolution values are zero, they are set to 72dpi. + * + * Don't use this function if you are using the FreeType cache API. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_Char_Size( FT_Face face, + FT_F26Dot6 char_width, + FT_F26Dot6 char_height, + FT_UInt horz_resolution, + FT_UInt vert_resolution ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes + * + * @description: + * Call @FT_Request_Size to request the nominal size (in pixels). + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * @input: + * pixel_width :: + * The nominal width, in pixels. + * + * pixel_height :: + * The nominal height, in pixels. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You should not rely on the resulting glyphs matching or being + * constrained to this pixel size. Refer to @FT_Request_Size to + * understand how requested sizes relate to actual sizes. + * + * Don't use this function if you are using the FreeType cache API. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt pixel_width, + FT_UInt pixel_height ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Load_Glyph + * + * @description: + * Load a glyph into the glyph slot of a face object. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object where the glyph is loaded. + * + * @input: + * glyph_index :: + * The index of the glyph in the font file. For CID-keyed fonts + * (either in PS or in CFF format) this argument specifies the CID + * value. + * + * load_flags :: + * A flag indicating what to load for this glyph. The @FT_LOAD_XXX + * constants can be used to control the glyph loading process (e.g., + * whether the outline should be scaled, whether to load bitmaps or + * not, whether to hint the outline, etc). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The loaded glyph may be transformed. See @FT_Set_Transform for the + * details. + * + * For subsetted CID-keyed fonts, `FT_Err_Invalid_Argument` is returned + * for invalid CID values (this is, for CID values that don't have a + * corresponding glyph in the font). See the discussion of the + * @FT_FACE_FLAG_CID_KEYED flag for more details. + * + * If you receive `FT_Err_Glyph_Too_Big`, try getting the glyph outline + * at EM size, then scale it manually and fill it as a graphics + * operation. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Load_Glyph( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Int32 load_flags ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Load_Char + * + * @description: + * Load a glyph into the glyph slot of a face object, accessed by its + * character code. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to a target face object where the glyph is loaded. + * + * @input: + * char_code :: + * The glyph's character code, according to the current charmap used in + * the face. + * + * load_flags :: + * A flag indicating what to load for this glyph. The @FT_LOAD_XXX + * constants can be used to control the glyph loading process (e.g., + * whether the outline should be scaled, whether to load bitmaps or + * not, whether to hint the outline, etc). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function simply calls @FT_Get_Char_Index and @FT_Load_Glyph. + * + * Many fonts contain glyphs that can't be loaded by this function since + * its glyph indices are not listed in any of the font's charmaps. + * + * If no active cmap is set up (i.e., `face->charmap` is zero), the call + * to @FT_Get_Char_Index is omitted, and the function behaves identically + * to @FT_Load_Glyph. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Load_Char( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong char_code, + FT_Int32 load_flags ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_LOAD_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit field constants for @FT_Load_Glyph to indicate what kind + * of operations to perform during glyph loading. + * + * @values: + * FT_LOAD_DEFAULT :: + * Corresponding to~0, this value is used as the default glyph load + * operation. In this case, the following happens: + * + * 1. FreeType looks for a bitmap for the glyph corresponding to the + * face's current size. If one is found, the function returns. The + * bitmap data can be accessed from the glyph slot (see note below). + * + * 2. If no embedded bitmap is searched for or found, FreeType looks + * for a scalable outline. If one is found, it is loaded from the font + * file, scaled to device pixels, then 'hinted' to the pixel grid in + * order to optimize it. The outline data can be accessed from the + * glyph slot (see note below). + * + * Note that by default the glyph loader doesn't render outlines into + * bitmaps. The following flags are used to modify this default + * behaviour to more specific and useful cases. + * + * FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE :: + * Don't scale the loaded outline glyph but keep it in font units. + * + * This flag implies @FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING and @FT_LOAD_NO_BITMAP, and + * unsets @FT_LOAD_RENDER. + * + * If the font is 'tricky' (see @FT_FACE_FLAG_TRICKY for more), using + * `FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE` usually yields meaningless outlines because the + * subglyphs must be scaled and positioned with hinting instructions. + * This can be solved by loading the font without `FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE` + * and setting the character size to `font->units_per_EM`. + * + * FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING :: + * Disable hinting. This generally generates 'blurrier' bitmap glyphs + * when the glyph are rendered in any of the anti-aliased modes. See + * also the note below. + * + * This flag is implied by @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE. + * + * FT_LOAD_RENDER :: + * Call @FT_Render_Glyph after the glyph is loaded. By default, the + * glyph is rendered in @FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL mode. This can be + * overridden by @FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX or @FT_LOAD_MONOCHROME. + * + * This flag is unset by @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE. + * + * FT_LOAD_NO_BITMAP :: + * Ignore bitmap strikes when loading. Bitmap-only fonts ignore this + * flag. + * + * @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE always sets this flag. + * + * FT_LOAD_VERTICAL_LAYOUT :: + * Load the glyph for vertical text layout. In particular, the + * `advance` value in the @FT_GlyphSlotRec structure is set to the + * `vertAdvance` value of the `metrics` field. + * + * In case @FT_HAS_VERTICAL doesn't return true, you shouldn't use this + * flag currently. Reason is that in this case vertical metrics get + * synthesized, and those values are not always consistent across + * various font formats. + * + * FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT :: + * Prefer the auto-hinter over the font's native hinter. See also the + * note below. + * + * FT_LOAD_PEDANTIC :: + * Make the font driver perform pedantic verifications during glyph + * loading and hinting. This is mostly used to detect broken glyphs in + * fonts. By default, FreeType tries to handle broken fonts also. + * + * In particular, errors from the TrueType bytecode engine are not + * passed to the application if this flag is not set; this might result + * in partially hinted or distorted glyphs in case a glyph's bytecode + * is buggy. + * + * FT_LOAD_NO_RECURSE :: + * Don't load composite glyphs recursively. Instead, the font driver + * fills the `num_subglyph` and `subglyphs` values of the glyph slot; + * it also sets `glyph->format` to @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_COMPOSITE. The + * description of subglyphs can then be accessed with + * @FT_Get_SubGlyph_Info. + * + * Don't use this flag for retrieving metrics information since some + * font drivers only return rudimentary data. + * + * This flag implies @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE and @FT_LOAD_IGNORE_TRANSFORM. + * + * FT_LOAD_IGNORE_TRANSFORM :: + * Ignore the transform matrix set by @FT_Set_Transform. + * + * FT_LOAD_MONOCHROME :: + * This flag is used with @FT_LOAD_RENDER to indicate that you want to + * render an outline glyph to a 1-bit monochrome bitmap glyph, with + * 8~pixels packed into each byte of the bitmap data. + * + * Note that this has no effect on the hinting algorithm used. You + * should rather use @FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO so that the + * monochrome-optimized hinting algorithm is used. + * + * FT_LOAD_LINEAR_DESIGN :: + * Keep `linearHoriAdvance` and `linearVertAdvance` fields of + * @FT_GlyphSlotRec in font units. See @FT_GlyphSlotRec for details. + * + * FT_LOAD_NO_AUTOHINT :: + * Disable the auto-hinter. See also the note below. + * + * FT_LOAD_COLOR :: + * Load colored glyphs. There are slight differences depending on the + * font format. + * + * [Since 2.5] Load embedded color bitmap images. The resulting color + * bitmaps, if available, will have the @FT_PIXEL_MODE_BGRA format, + * with pre-multiplied color channels. If the flag is not set and + * color bitmaps are found, they are converted to 256-level gray + * bitmaps, using the @FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY format. + * + * [Since 2.10, experimental] If the glyph index contains an entry in + * the face's 'COLR' table with a 'CPAL' palette table (as defined in + * the OpenType specification), make @FT_Render_Glyph provide a default + * blending of the color glyph layers associated with the glyph index, + * using the same bitmap format as embedded color bitmap images. This + * is mainly for convenience; for full control of color layers use + * @FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer and FreeType's color functions like + * @FT_Palette_Select instead of setting @FT_LOAD_COLOR for rendering + * so that the client application can handle blending by itself. + * + * FT_LOAD_COMPUTE_METRICS :: + * [Since 2.6.1] Compute glyph metrics from the glyph data, without the + * use of bundled metrics tables (for example, the 'hdmx' table in + * TrueType fonts). This flag is mainly used by font validating or + * font editing applications, which need to ignore, verify, or edit + * those tables. + * + * Currently, this flag is only implemented for TrueType fonts. + * + * FT_LOAD_BITMAP_METRICS_ONLY :: + * [Since 2.7.1] Request loading of the metrics and bitmap image + * information of a (possibly embedded) bitmap glyph without allocating + * or copying the bitmap image data itself. No effect if the target + * glyph is not a bitmap image. + * + * This flag unsets @FT_LOAD_RENDER. + * + * FT_LOAD_CROP_BITMAP :: + * Ignored. Deprecated. + * + * FT_LOAD_IGNORE_GLOBAL_ADVANCE_WIDTH :: + * Ignored. Deprecated. + * + * @note: + * By default, hinting is enabled and the font's native hinter (see + * @FT_FACE_FLAG_HINTER) is preferred over the auto-hinter. You can + * disable hinting by setting @FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING or change the + * precedence by setting @FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT. You can also set + * @FT_LOAD_NO_AUTOHINT in case you don't want the auto-hinter to be used + * at all. + * + * See the description of @FT_FACE_FLAG_TRICKY for a special exception + * (affecting only a handful of Asian fonts). + * + * Besides deciding which hinter to use, you can also decide which + * hinting algorithm to use. See @FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX for details. + * + * Note that the auto-hinter needs a valid Unicode cmap (either a native + * one or synthesized by FreeType) for producing correct results. If a + * font provides an incorrect mapping (for example, assigning the + * character code U+005A, LATIN CAPITAL LETTER~Z, to a glyph depicting a + * mathematical integral sign), the auto-hinter might produce useless + * results. + * + */ +#define FT_LOAD_DEFAULT 0x0 +#define FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE ( 1L << 0 ) +#define FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING ( 1L << 1 ) +#define FT_LOAD_RENDER ( 1L << 2 ) +#define FT_LOAD_NO_BITMAP ( 1L << 3 ) +#define FT_LOAD_VERTICAL_LAYOUT ( 1L << 4 ) +#define FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT ( 1L << 5 ) +#define FT_LOAD_CROP_BITMAP ( 1L << 6 ) +#define FT_LOAD_PEDANTIC ( 1L << 7 ) +#define FT_LOAD_IGNORE_GLOBAL_ADVANCE_WIDTH ( 1L << 9 ) +#define FT_LOAD_NO_RECURSE ( 1L << 10 ) +#define FT_LOAD_IGNORE_TRANSFORM ( 1L << 11 ) +#define FT_LOAD_MONOCHROME ( 1L << 12 ) +#define FT_LOAD_LINEAR_DESIGN ( 1L << 13 ) +#define FT_LOAD_NO_AUTOHINT ( 1L << 15 ) + /* Bits 16-19 are used by `FT_LOAD_TARGET_` */ +#define FT_LOAD_COLOR ( 1L << 20 ) +#define FT_LOAD_COMPUTE_METRICS ( 1L << 21 ) +#define FT_LOAD_BITMAP_METRICS_ONLY ( 1L << 22 ) + + /* */ + + /* used internally only by certain font drivers */ +#define FT_LOAD_ADVANCE_ONLY ( 1L << 8 ) +#define FT_LOAD_SBITS_ONLY ( 1L << 14 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of values to select a specific hinting algorithm for the + * hinter. You should OR one of these values to your `load_flags` when + * calling @FT_Load_Glyph. + * + * Note that a font's native hinters may ignore the hinting algorithm you + * have specified (e.g., the TrueType bytecode interpreter). You can set + * @FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT to ensure that the auto-hinter is used. + * + * @values: + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_NORMAL :: + * The default hinting algorithm, optimized for standard gray-level + * rendering. For monochrome output, use @FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO instead. + * + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_LIGHT :: + * A lighter hinting algorithm for gray-level modes. Many generated + * glyphs are fuzzier but better resemble their original shape. This + * is achieved by snapping glyphs to the pixel grid only vertically + * (Y-axis), as is done by FreeType's new CFF engine or Microsoft's + * ClearType font renderer. This preserves inter-glyph spacing in + * horizontal text. The snapping is done either by the native font + * driver, if the driver itself and the font support it, or by the + * auto-hinter. + * + * Advance widths are rounded to integer values; however, using the + * `lsb_delta` and `rsb_delta` fields of @FT_GlyphSlotRec, it is + * possible to get fractional advance widths for subpixel positioning + * (which is recommended to use). + * + * If configuration option `AF_CONFIG_OPTION_TT_SIZE_METRICS` is + * active, TrueType-like metrics are used to make this mode behave + * similarly as in unpatched FreeType versions between 2.4.6 and 2.7.1 + * (inclusive). + * + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO :: + * Strong hinting algorithm that should only be used for monochrome + * output. The result is probably unpleasant if the glyph is rendered + * in non-monochrome modes. + * + * Note that for outline fonts only the TrueType font driver has proper + * monochrome hinting support, provided the TTFs contain hints for B/W + * rendering (which most fonts no longer provide). If these conditions + * are not met it is very likely that you get ugly results at smaller + * sizes. + * + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_LCD :: + * A variant of @FT_LOAD_TARGET_LIGHT optimized for horizontally + * decimated LCD displays. + * + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_LCD_V :: + * A variant of @FT_LOAD_TARGET_NORMAL optimized for vertically + * decimated LCD displays. + * + * @note: + * You should use only _one_ of the `FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX` values in your + * `load_flags`. They can't be ORed. + * + * If @FT_LOAD_RENDER is also set, the glyph is rendered in the + * corresponding mode (i.e., the mode that matches the used algorithm + * best). An exception is `FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO` since it implies + * @FT_LOAD_MONOCHROME. + * + * You can use a hinting algorithm that doesn't correspond to the same + * rendering mode. As an example, it is possible to use the 'light' + * hinting algorithm and have the results rendered in horizontal LCD + * pixel mode, with code like + * + * ``` + * FT_Load_Glyph( face, glyph_index, + * load_flags | FT_LOAD_TARGET_LIGHT ); + * + * FT_Render_Glyph( face->glyph, FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD ); + * ``` + * + * In general, you should stick with one rendering mode. For example, + * switching between @FT_LOAD_TARGET_NORMAL and @FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO + * enforces a lot of recomputation for TrueType fonts, which is slow. + * Another reason is caching: Selecting a different mode usually causes + * changes in both the outlines and the rasterized bitmaps; it is thus + * necessary to empty the cache after a mode switch to avoid false hits. + * + */ +#define FT_LOAD_TARGET_( x ) ( (FT_Int32)( (x) & 15 ) << 16 ) + +#define FT_LOAD_TARGET_NORMAL FT_LOAD_TARGET_( FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL ) +#define FT_LOAD_TARGET_LIGHT FT_LOAD_TARGET_( FT_RENDER_MODE_LIGHT ) +#define FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO FT_LOAD_TARGET_( FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO ) +#define FT_LOAD_TARGET_LCD FT_LOAD_TARGET_( FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD ) +#define FT_LOAD_TARGET_LCD_V FT_LOAD_TARGET_( FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD_V ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_LOAD_TARGET_MODE + * + * @description: + * Return the @FT_Render_Mode corresponding to a given + * @FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX value. + * + */ +#define FT_LOAD_TARGET_MODE( x ) ( (FT_Render_Mode)( ( (x) >> 16 ) & 15 ) ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Transform + * + * @description: + * Set the transformation that is applied to glyph images when they are + * loaded into a glyph slot through @FT_Load_Glyph. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @input: + * matrix :: + * A pointer to the transformation's 2x2 matrix. Use `NULL` for the + * identity matrix. + * delta :: + * A pointer to the translation vector. Use `NULL` for the null vector. + * + * @note: + * The transformation is only applied to scalable image formats after the + * glyph has been loaded. It means that hinting is unaltered by the + * transformation and is performed on the character size given in the + * last call to @FT_Set_Char_Size or @FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes. + * + * Note that this also transforms the `face.glyph.advance` field, but + * **not** the values in `face.glyph.metrics`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Set_Transform( FT_Face face, + FT_Matrix* matrix, + FT_Vector* delta ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Render_Mode + * + * @description: + * Render modes supported by FreeType~2. Each mode corresponds to a + * specific type of scanline conversion performed on the outline. + * + * For bitmap fonts and embedded bitmaps the `bitmap->pixel_mode` field + * in the @FT_GlyphSlotRec structure gives the format of the returned + * bitmap. + * + * All modes except @FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO use 256 levels of opacity, + * indicating pixel coverage. Use linear alpha blending and gamma + * correction to correctly render non-monochrome glyph bitmaps onto a + * surface; see @FT_Render_Glyph. + * + * @values: + * FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL :: + * Default render mode; it corresponds to 8-bit anti-aliased bitmaps. + * + * FT_RENDER_MODE_LIGHT :: + * This is equivalent to @FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL. It is only defined as + * a separate value because render modes are also used indirectly to + * define hinting algorithm selectors. See @FT_LOAD_TARGET_XXX for + * details. + * + * FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO :: + * This mode corresponds to 1-bit bitmaps (with 2~levels of opacity). + * + * FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD :: + * This mode corresponds to horizontal RGB and BGR subpixel displays + * like LCD screens. It produces 8-bit bitmaps that are 3~times the + * width of the original glyph outline in pixels, and which use the + * @FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD mode. + * + * FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD_V :: + * This mode corresponds to vertical RGB and BGR subpixel displays + * (like PDA screens, rotated LCD displays, etc.). It produces 8-bit + * bitmaps that are 3~times the height of the original glyph outline in + * pixels and use the @FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD_V mode. + * + * @note: + * Should you define `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING` in your + * `ftoption.h`, which enables patented ClearType-style rendering, the + * LCD-optimized glyph bitmaps should be filtered to reduce color fringes + * inherent to this technology. You can either set up LCD filtering with + * @FT_Library_SetLcdFilter or @FT_Face_Properties, or do the filtering + * yourself. The default FreeType LCD rendering technology does not + * require filtering. + * + * The selected render mode only affects vector glyphs of a font. + * Embedded bitmaps often have a different pixel mode like + * @FT_PIXEL_MODE_MONO. You can use @FT_Bitmap_Convert to transform them + * into 8-bit pixmaps. + */ + typedef enum FT_Render_Mode_ + { + FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL = 0, + FT_RENDER_MODE_LIGHT, + FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO, + FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD, + FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD_V, + + FT_RENDER_MODE_MAX + + } FT_Render_Mode; + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `FT_Render_Mode` values instead */ +#define ft_render_mode_normal FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL +#define ft_render_mode_mono FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Render_Glyph + * + * @description: + * Convert a given glyph image to a bitmap. It does so by inspecting the + * glyph image format, finding the relevant renderer, and invoking it. + * + * @inout: + * slot :: + * A handle to the glyph slot containing the image to convert. + * + * @input: + * render_mode :: + * The render mode used to render the glyph image into a bitmap. See + * @FT_Render_Mode for a list of possible values. + * + * If @FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL is used, a previous call of @FT_Load_Glyph + * with flag @FT_LOAD_COLOR makes FT_Render_Glyph provide a default + * blending of colored glyph layers associated with the current glyph + * slot (provided the font contains such layers) instead of rendering + * the glyph slot's outline. This is an experimental feature; see + * @FT_LOAD_COLOR for more information. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * To get meaningful results, font scaling values must be set with + * functions like @FT_Set_Char_Size before calling `FT_Render_Glyph`. + * + * When FreeType outputs a bitmap of a glyph, it really outputs an alpha + * coverage map. If a pixel is completely covered by a filled-in + * outline, the bitmap contains 0xFF at that pixel, meaning that + * 0xFF/0xFF fraction of that pixel is covered, meaning the pixel is 100% + * black (or 0% bright). If a pixel is only 50% covered (value 0x80), + * the pixel is made 50% black (50% bright or a middle shade of grey). + * 0% covered means 0% black (100% bright or white). + * + * On high-DPI screens like on smartphones and tablets, the pixels are so + * small that their chance of being completely covered and therefore + * completely black are fairly good. On the low-DPI screens, however, + * the situation is different. The pixels are too large for most of the + * details of a glyph and shades of gray are the norm rather than the + * exception. + * + * This is relevant because all our screens have a second problem: they + * are not linear. 1~+~1 is not~2. Twice the value does not result in + * twice the brightness. When a pixel is only 50% covered, the coverage + * map says 50% black, and this translates to a pixel value of 128 when + * you use 8~bits per channel (0-255). However, this does not translate + * to 50% brightness for that pixel on our sRGB and gamma~2.2 screens. + * Due to their non-linearity, they dwell longer in the darks and only a + * pixel value of about 186 results in 50% brightness -- 128 ends up too + * dark on both bright and dark backgrounds. The net result is that dark + * text looks burnt-out, pixely and blotchy on bright background, bright + * text too frail on dark backgrounds, and colored text on colored + * background (for example, red on green) seems to have dark halos or + * 'dirt' around it. The situation is especially ugly for diagonal stems + * like in 'w' glyph shapes where the quality of FreeType's anti-aliasing + * depends on the correct display of grays. On high-DPI screens where + * smaller, fully black pixels reign supreme, this doesn't matter, but on + * our low-DPI screens with all the gray shades, it does. 0% and 100% + * brightness are the same things in linear and non-linear space, just + * all the shades in-between aren't. + * + * The blending function for placing text over a background is + * + * ``` + * dst = alpha * src + (1 - alpha) * dst , + * ``` + * + * which is known as the OVER operator. + * + * To correctly composite an antialiased pixel of a glyph onto a surface, + * + * 1. take the foreground and background colors (e.g., in sRGB space) + * and apply gamma to get them in a linear space, + * + * 2. use OVER to blend the two linear colors using the glyph pixel + * as the alpha value (remember, the glyph bitmap is an alpha coverage + * bitmap), and + * + * 3. apply inverse gamma to the blended pixel and write it back to + * the image. + * + * Internal testing at Adobe found that a target inverse gamma of~1.8 for + * step~3 gives good results across a wide range of displays with an sRGB + * gamma curve or a similar one. + * + * This process can cost performance. There is an approximation that + * does not need to know about the background color; see + * https://bel.fi/alankila/lcd/ and + * https://bel.fi/alankila/lcd/alpcor.html for details. + * + * **ATTENTION**: Linear blending is even more important when dealing + * with subpixel-rendered glyphs to prevent color-fringing! A + * subpixel-rendered glyph must first be filtered with a filter that + * gives equal weight to the three color primaries and does not exceed a + * sum of 0x100, see section @lcd_rendering. Then the only difference to + * gray linear blending is that subpixel-rendered linear blending is done + * 3~times per pixel: red foreground subpixel to red background subpixel + * and so on for green and blue. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Render_Glyph( FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Render_Mode render_mode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Kerning_Mode + * + * @description: + * An enumeration to specify the format of kerning values returned by + * @FT_Get_Kerning. + * + * @values: + * FT_KERNING_DEFAULT :: + * Return grid-fitted kerning distances in 26.6 fractional pixels. + * + * FT_KERNING_UNFITTED :: + * Return un-grid-fitted kerning distances in 26.6 fractional pixels. + * + * FT_KERNING_UNSCALED :: + * Return the kerning vector in original font units. + * + * @note: + * `FT_KERNING_DEFAULT` returns full pixel values; it also makes FreeType + * heuristically scale down kerning distances at small ppem values so + * that they don't become too big. + * + * Both `FT_KERNING_DEFAULT` and `FT_KERNING_UNFITTED` use the current + * horizontal scaling factor (as set e.g. with @FT_Set_Char_Size) to + * convert font units to pixels. + */ + typedef enum FT_Kerning_Mode_ + { + FT_KERNING_DEFAULT = 0, + FT_KERNING_UNFITTED, + FT_KERNING_UNSCALED + + } FT_Kerning_Mode; + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `FT_Kerning_Mode` values instead */ +#define ft_kerning_default FT_KERNING_DEFAULT +#define ft_kerning_unfitted FT_KERNING_UNFITTED +#define ft_kerning_unscaled FT_KERNING_UNSCALED + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Kerning + * + * @description: + * Return the kerning vector between two glyphs of the same face. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to a source face object. + * + * left_glyph :: + * The index of the left glyph in the kern pair. + * + * right_glyph :: + * The index of the right glyph in the kern pair. + * + * kern_mode :: + * See @FT_Kerning_Mode for more information. Determines the scale and + * dimension of the returned kerning vector. + * + * @output: + * akerning :: + * The kerning vector. This is either in font units, fractional pixels + * (26.6 format), or pixels for scalable formats, and in pixels for + * fixed-sizes formats. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Only horizontal layouts (left-to-right & right-to-left) are supported + * by this method. Other layouts, or more sophisticated kernings, are + * out of the scope of this API function -- they can be implemented + * through format-specific interfaces. + * + * Kerning for OpenType fonts implemented in a 'GPOS' table is not + * supported; use @FT_HAS_KERNING to find out whether a font has data + * that can be extracted with `FT_Get_Kerning`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Kerning( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt left_glyph, + FT_UInt right_glyph, + FT_UInt kern_mode, + FT_Vector *akerning ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Track_Kerning + * + * @description: + * Return the track kerning for a given face object at a given size. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to a source face object. + * + * point_size :: + * The point size in 16.16 fractional points. + * + * degree :: + * The degree of tightness. Increasingly negative values represent + * tighter track kerning, while increasingly positive values represent + * looser track kerning. Value zero means no track kerning. + * + * @output: + * akerning :: + * The kerning in 16.16 fractional points, to be uniformly applied + * between all glyphs. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Currently, only the Type~1 font driver supports track kerning, using + * data from AFM files (if attached with @FT_Attach_File or + * @FT_Attach_Stream). + * + * Only very few AFM files come with track kerning data; please refer to + * Adobe's AFM specification for more details. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Track_Kerning( FT_Face face, + FT_Fixed point_size, + FT_Int degree, + FT_Fixed* akerning ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Glyph_Name + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the ASCII name of a given glyph in a face. This only works + * for those faces where @FT_HAS_GLYPH_NAMES(face) returns~1. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to a source face object. + * + * glyph_index :: + * The glyph index. + * + * buffer_max :: + * The maximum number of bytes available in the buffer. + * + * @output: + * buffer :: + * A pointer to a target buffer where the name is copied to. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * An error is returned if the face doesn't provide glyph names or if the + * glyph index is invalid. In all cases of failure, the first byte of + * `buffer` is set to~0 to indicate an empty name. + * + * The glyph name is truncated to fit within the buffer if it is too + * long. The returned string is always zero-terminated. + * + * Be aware that FreeType reorders glyph indices internally so that glyph + * index~0 always corresponds to the 'missing glyph' (called '.notdef'). + * + * This function always returns an error if the config macro + * `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_GLYPH_NAMES` is not defined in `ftoption.h`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Glyph_Name( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Pointer buffer, + FT_UInt buffer_max ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Postscript_Name + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the ASCII PostScript name of a given face, if available. + * This only works with PostScript, TrueType, and OpenType fonts. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @return: + * A pointer to the face's PostScript name. `NULL` if unavailable. + * + * @note: + * The returned pointer is owned by the face and is destroyed with it. + * + * For variation fonts, this string changes if you select a different + * instance, and you have to call `FT_Get_PostScript_Name` again to + * retrieve it. FreeType follows Adobe TechNote #5902, 'Generating + * PostScript Names for Fonts Using OpenType Font Variations'. + * + * https://download.macromedia.com/pub/developer/opentype/tech-notes/5902.AdobePSNameGeneration.html + * + * [Since 2.9] Special PostScript names for named instances are only + * returned if the named instance is set with @FT_Set_Named_Instance (and + * the font has corresponding entries in its 'fvar' table). If + * @FT_IS_VARIATION returns true, the algorithmically derived PostScript + * name is provided, not looking up special entries for named instances. + */ + FT_EXPORT( const char* ) + FT_Get_Postscript_Name( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Select_Charmap + * + * @description: + * Select a given charmap by its encoding tag (as listed in + * `freetype.h`). + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @input: + * encoding :: + * A handle to the selected encoding. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function returns an error if no charmap in the face corresponds + * to the encoding queried here. + * + * Because many fonts contain more than a single cmap for Unicode + * encoding, this function has some special code to select the one that + * covers Unicode best ('best' in the sense that a UCS-4 cmap is + * preferred to a UCS-2 cmap). It is thus preferable to @FT_Set_Charmap + * in this case. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Select_Charmap( FT_Face face, + FT_Encoding encoding ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Charmap + * + * @description: + * Select a given charmap for character code to glyph index mapping. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @input: + * charmap :: + * A handle to the selected charmap. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function returns an error if the charmap is not part of the face + * (i.e., if it is not listed in the `face->charmaps` table). + * + * It also fails if an OpenType type~14 charmap is selected (which + * doesn't map character codes to glyph indices at all). + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_Charmap( FT_Face face, + FT_CharMap charmap ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Charmap_Index + * + * @description: + * Retrieve index of a given charmap. + * + * @input: + * charmap :: + * A handle to a charmap. + * + * @return: + * The index into the array of character maps within the face to which + * `charmap` belongs. If an error occurs, -1 is returned. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Int ) + FT_Get_Charmap_Index( FT_CharMap charmap ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Char_Index + * + * @description: + * Return the glyph index of a given character code. This function uses + * the currently selected charmap to do the mapping. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * charcode :: + * The character code. + * + * @return: + * The glyph index. 0~means 'undefined character code'. + * + * @note: + * If you use FreeType to manipulate the contents of font files directly, + * be aware that the glyph index returned by this function doesn't always + * correspond to the internal indices used within the file. This is done + * to ensure that value~0 always corresponds to the 'missing glyph'. If + * the first glyph is not named '.notdef', then for Type~1 and Type~42 + * fonts, '.notdef' will be moved into the glyph ID~0 position, and + * whatever was there will be moved to the position '.notdef' had. For + * Type~1 fonts, if there is no '.notdef' glyph at all, then one will be + * created at index~0 and whatever was there will be moved to the last + * index -- Type~42 fonts are considered invalid under this condition. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt ) + FT_Get_Char_Index( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong charcode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_First_Char + * + * @description: + * Return the first character code in the current charmap of a given + * face, together with its corresponding glyph index. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @output: + * agindex :: + * Glyph index of first character code. 0~if charmap is empty. + * + * @return: + * The charmap's first character code. + * + * @note: + * You should use this function together with @FT_Get_Next_Char to parse + * all character codes available in a given charmap. The code should + * look like this: + * + * ``` + * FT_ULong charcode; + * FT_UInt gindex; + * + * + * charcode = FT_Get_First_Char( face, &gindex ); + * while ( gindex != 0 ) + * { + * ... do something with (charcode,gindex) pair ... + * + * charcode = FT_Get_Next_Char( face, charcode, &gindex ); + * } + * ``` + * + * Be aware that character codes can have values up to 0xFFFFFFFF; this + * might happen for non-Unicode or malformed cmaps. However, even with + * regular Unicode encoding, so-called 'last resort fonts' (using SFNT + * cmap format 13, see function @FT_Get_CMap_Format) normally have + * entries for all Unicode characters up to 0x1FFFFF, which can cause *a + * lot* of iterations. + * + * Note that `*agindex` is set to~0 if the charmap is empty. The result + * itself can be~0 in two cases: if the charmap is empty or if the + * value~0 is the first valid character code. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_ULong ) + FT_Get_First_Char( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt *agindex ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Next_Char + * + * @description: + * Return the next character code in the current charmap of a given face + * following the value `char_code`, as well as the corresponding glyph + * index. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * char_code :: + * The starting character code. + * + * @output: + * agindex :: + * Glyph index of next character code. 0~if charmap is empty. + * + * @return: + * The charmap's next character code. + * + * @note: + * You should use this function with @FT_Get_First_Char to walk over all + * character codes available in a given charmap. See the note for that + * function for a simple code example. + * + * Note that `*agindex` is set to~0 when there are no more codes in the + * charmap. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_ULong ) + FT_Get_Next_Char( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong char_code, + FT_UInt *agindex ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_Properties + * + * @description: + * Set or override certain (library or module-wide) properties on a + * face-by-face basis. Useful for finer-grained control and avoiding + * locks on shared structures (threads can modify their own faces as they + * see fit). + * + * Contrary to @FT_Property_Set, this function uses @FT_Parameter so that + * you can pass multiple properties to the target face in one call. Note + * that only a subset of the available properties can be controlled. + * + * * @FT_PARAM_TAG_STEM_DARKENING (stem darkening, corresponding to the + * property `no-stem-darkening` provided by the 'autofit', 'cff', + * 'type1', and 't1cid' modules; see @no-stem-darkening). + * + * * @FT_PARAM_TAG_LCD_FILTER_WEIGHTS (LCD filter weights, corresponding + * to function @FT_Library_SetLcdFilterWeights). + * + * * @FT_PARAM_TAG_RANDOM_SEED (seed value for the CFF, Type~1, and CID + * 'random' operator, corresponding to the `random-seed` property + * provided by the 'cff', 'type1', and 't1cid' modules; see + * @random-seed). + * + * Pass `NULL` as `data` in @FT_Parameter for a given tag to reset the + * option and use the library or module default again. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * num_properties :: + * The number of properties that follow. + * + * properties :: + * A handle to an @FT_Parameter array with `num_properties` elements. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @example: + * Here is an example that sets three properties. You must define + * `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING` to make the LCD filter examples + * work. + * + * ``` + * FT_Parameter property1; + * FT_Bool darken_stems = 1; + * + * FT_Parameter property2; + * FT_LcdFiveTapFilter custom_weight = + * { 0x11, 0x44, 0x56, 0x44, 0x11 }; + * + * FT_Parameter property3; + * FT_Int32 random_seed = 314159265; + * + * FT_Parameter properties[3] = { property1, + * property2, + * property3 }; + * + * + * property1.tag = FT_PARAM_TAG_STEM_DARKENING; + * property1.data = &darken_stems; + * + * property2.tag = FT_PARAM_TAG_LCD_FILTER_WEIGHTS; + * property2.data = custom_weight; + * + * property3.tag = FT_PARAM_TAG_RANDOM_SEED; + * property3.data = &random_seed; + * + * FT_Face_Properties( face, 3, properties ); + * ``` + * + * The next example resets a single property to its default value. + * + * ``` + * FT_Parameter property; + * + * + * property.tag = FT_PARAM_TAG_LCD_FILTER_WEIGHTS; + * property.data = NULL; + * + * FT_Face_Properties( face, 1, &property ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Face_Properties( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_properties, + FT_Parameter* properties ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Name_Index + * + * @description: + * Return the glyph index of a given glyph name. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * glyph_name :: + * The glyph name. + * + * @return: + * The glyph index. 0~means 'undefined character code'. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt ) + FT_Get_Name_Index( FT_Face face, + FT_String* glyph_name ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of constants describing subglyphs. Please refer to the 'glyf' + * table description in the OpenType specification for the meaning of the + * various flags (which get synthesized for non-OpenType subglyphs). + * + * https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/glyf#composite-glyph-description + * + * @values: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_ARGS_ARE_WORDS :: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_ARGS_ARE_XY_VALUES :: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_ROUND_XY_TO_GRID :: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_SCALE :: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_XY_SCALE :: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_2X2 :: + * FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_USE_MY_METRICS :: + * + */ +#define FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_ARGS_ARE_WORDS 1 +#define FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_ARGS_ARE_XY_VALUES 2 +#define FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_ROUND_XY_TO_GRID 4 +#define FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_SCALE 8 +#define FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_XY_SCALE 0x40 +#define FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_2X2 0x80 +#define FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_USE_MY_METRICS 0x200 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_SubGlyph_Info + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a description of a given subglyph. Only use it if + * `glyph->format` is @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_COMPOSITE; an error is returned + * otherwise. + * + * @input: + * glyph :: + * The source glyph slot. + * + * sub_index :: + * The index of the subglyph. Must be less than + * `glyph->num_subglyphs`. + * + * @output: + * p_index :: + * The glyph index of the subglyph. + * + * p_flags :: + * The subglyph flags, see @FT_SUBGLYPH_FLAG_XXX. + * + * p_arg1 :: + * The subglyph's first argument (if any). + * + * p_arg2 :: + * The subglyph's second argument (if any). + * + * p_transform :: + * The subglyph transformation (if any). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The values of `*p_arg1`, `*p_arg2`, and `*p_transform` must be + * interpreted depending on the flags returned in `*p_flags`. See the + * OpenType specification for details. + * + * https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/glyf#composite-glyph-description + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_SubGlyph_Info( FT_GlyphSlot glyph, + FT_UInt sub_index, + FT_Int *p_index, + FT_UInt *p_flags, + FT_Int *p_arg1, + FT_Int *p_arg2, + FT_Matrix *p_transform ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * layer_management + * + * @title: + * Glyph Layer Management + * + * @abstract: + * Retrieving and manipulating OpenType's 'COLR' table data. + * + * @description: + * The functions described here allow access of colored glyph layer data + * in OpenType's 'COLR' tables. + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_LayerIterator + * + * @description: + * This iterator object is needed for @FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer. + * + * @fields: + * num_layers :: + * The number of glyph layers for the requested glyph index. Will be + * set by @FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer. + * + * layer :: + * The current layer. Will be set by @FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer. + * + * p :: + * An opaque pointer into 'COLR' table data. The caller must set this + * to `NULL` before the first call of @FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer. + */ + typedef struct FT_LayerIterator_ + { + FT_UInt num_layers; + FT_UInt layer; + FT_Byte* p; + + } FT_LayerIterator; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer + * + * @description: + * This is an interface to the 'COLR' table in OpenType fonts to + * iteratively retrieve the colored glyph layers associated with the + * current glyph slot. + * + * https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/typography/opentype/spec/colr + * + * The glyph layer data for a given glyph index, if present, provides an + * alternative, multi-colour glyph representation: Instead of rendering + * the outline or bitmap with the given glyph index, glyphs with the + * indices and colors returned by this function are rendered layer by + * layer. + * + * The returned elements are ordered in the z~direction from bottom to + * top; the 'n'th element should be rendered with the associated palette + * color and blended on top of the already rendered layers (elements 0, + * 1, ..., n-1). + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the parent face object. + * + * base_glyph :: + * The glyph index the colored glyph layers are associated with. + * + * @inout: + * iterator :: + * An @FT_LayerIterator object. For the first call you should set + * `iterator->p` to `NULL`. For all following calls, simply use the + * same object again. + * + * @output: + * aglyph_index :: + * The glyph index of the current layer. + * + * acolor_index :: + * The color index into the font face's color palette of the current + * layer. The value 0xFFFF is special; it doesn't reference a palette + * entry but indicates that the text foreground color should be used + * instead (to be set up by the application outside of FreeType). + * + * The color palette can be retrieved with @FT_Palette_Select. + * + * @return: + * Value~1 if everything is OK. If there are no more layers (or if there + * are no layers at all), value~0 gets returned. In case of an error, + * value~0 is returned also. + * + * @note: + * This function is necessary if you want to handle glyph layers by + * yourself. In particular, functions that operate with @FT_GlyphRec + * objects (like @FT_Get_Glyph or @FT_Glyph_To_Bitmap) don't have access + * to this information. + * + * Note that @FT_Render_Glyph is able to handle colored glyph layers + * automatically if the @FT_LOAD_COLOR flag is passed to a previous call + * to @FT_Load_Glyph. [This is an experimental feature.] + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Color* palette; + * FT_LayerIterator iterator; + * + * FT_Bool have_layers; + * FT_UInt layer_glyph_index; + * FT_UInt layer_color_index; + * + * + * error = FT_Palette_Select( face, palette_index, &palette ); + * if ( error ) + * palette = NULL; + * + * iterator.p = NULL; + * have_layers = FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer( face, + * glyph_index, + * &layer_glyph_index, + * &layer_color_index, + * &iterator ); + * + * if ( palette && have_layers ) + * { + * do + * { + * FT_Color layer_color; + * + * + * if ( layer_color_index == 0xFFFF ) + * layer_color = text_foreground_color; + * else + * layer_color = palette[layer_color_index]; + * + * // Load and render glyph `layer_glyph_index', then + * // blend resulting pixmap (using color `layer_color') + * // with previously created pixmaps. + * + * } while ( FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer( face, + * glyph_index, + * &layer_glyph_index, + * &layer_color_index, + * &iterator ) ); + * } + * ``` + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Bool ) + FT_Get_Color_Glyph_Layer( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt base_glyph, + FT_UInt *aglyph_index, + FT_UInt *acolor_index, + FT_LayerIterator* iterator ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * base_interface + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_FSTYPE_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit flags used in the `fsType` field of the OS/2 table in a + * TrueType or OpenType font and the `FSType` entry in a PostScript font. + * These bit flags are returned by @FT_Get_FSType_Flags; they inform + * client applications of embedding and subsetting restrictions + * associated with a font. + * + * See + * https://www.adobe.com/content/dam/Adobe/en/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/FontPolicies.pdf + * for more details. + * + * @values: + * FT_FSTYPE_INSTALLABLE_EMBEDDING :: + * Fonts with no fsType bit set may be embedded and permanently + * installed on the remote system by an application. + * + * FT_FSTYPE_RESTRICTED_LICENSE_EMBEDDING :: + * Fonts that have only this bit set must not be modified, embedded or + * exchanged in any manner without first obtaining permission of the + * font software copyright owner. + * + * FT_FSTYPE_PREVIEW_AND_PRINT_EMBEDDING :: + * The font may be embedded and temporarily loaded on the remote + * system. Documents containing Preview & Print fonts must be opened + * 'read-only'; no edits can be applied to the document. + * + * FT_FSTYPE_EDITABLE_EMBEDDING :: + * The font may be embedded but must only be installed temporarily on + * other systems. In contrast to Preview & Print fonts, documents + * containing editable fonts may be opened for reading, editing is + * permitted, and changes may be saved. + * + * FT_FSTYPE_NO_SUBSETTING :: + * The font may not be subsetted prior to embedding. + * + * FT_FSTYPE_BITMAP_EMBEDDING_ONLY :: + * Only bitmaps contained in the font may be embedded; no outline data + * may be embedded. If there are no bitmaps available in the font, + * then the font is unembeddable. + * + * @note: + * The flags are ORed together, thus more than a single value can be + * returned. + * + * While the `fsType` flags can indicate that a font may be embedded, a + * license with the font vendor may be separately required to use the + * font in this way. + */ +#define FT_FSTYPE_INSTALLABLE_EMBEDDING 0x0000 +#define FT_FSTYPE_RESTRICTED_LICENSE_EMBEDDING 0x0002 +#define FT_FSTYPE_PREVIEW_AND_PRINT_EMBEDDING 0x0004 +#define FT_FSTYPE_EDITABLE_EMBEDDING 0x0008 +#define FT_FSTYPE_NO_SUBSETTING 0x0100 +#define FT_FSTYPE_BITMAP_EMBEDDING_ONLY 0x0200 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_FSType_Flags + * + * @description: + * Return the `fsType` flags for a font. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @return: + * The `fsType` flags, see @FT_FSTYPE_XXX. + * + * @note: + * Use this function rather than directly reading the `fs_type` field in + * the @PS_FontInfoRec structure, which is only guaranteed to return the + * correct results for Type~1 fonts. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.8 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UShort ) + FT_Get_FSType_Flags( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * glyph_variants + * + * @title: + * Unicode Variation Sequences + * + * @abstract: + * The FreeType~2 interface to Unicode Variation Sequences (UVS), using + * the SFNT cmap format~14. + * + * @description: + * Many characters, especially for CJK scripts, have variant forms. They + * are a sort of grey area somewhere between being totally irrelevant and + * semantically distinct; for this reason, the Unicode consortium decided + * to introduce Variation Sequences (VS), consisting of a Unicode base + * character and a variation selector instead of further extending the + * already huge number of characters. + * + * Unicode maintains two different sets, namely 'Standardized Variation + * Sequences' and registered 'Ideographic Variation Sequences' (IVS), + * collected in the 'Ideographic Variation Database' (IVD). + * + * https://unicode.org/Public/UCD/latest/ucd/StandardizedVariants.txt + * https://unicode.org/reports/tr37/ https://unicode.org/ivd/ + * + * To date (January 2017), the character with the most ideographic + * variations is U+9089, having 32 such IVS. + * + * Three Mongolian Variation Selectors have the values U+180B-U+180D; 256 + * generic Variation Selectors are encoded in the ranges U+FE00-U+FE0F + * and U+E0100-U+E01EF. IVS currently use Variation Selectors from the + * range U+E0100-U+E01EF only. + * + * A VS consists of the base character value followed by a single + * Variation Selector. For example, to get the first variation of + * U+9089, you have to write the character sequence `U+9089 U+E0100`. + * + * Adobe and MS decided to support both standardized and ideographic VS + * with a new cmap subtable (format~14). It is an odd subtable because + * it is not a mapping of input code points to glyphs, but contains lists + * of all variations supported by the font. + * + * A variation may be either 'default' or 'non-default' for a given font. + * A default variation is the one you will get for that code point if you + * look it up in the standard Unicode cmap. A non-default variation is a + * different glyph. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_GetCharVariantIndex + * + * @description: + * Return the glyph index of a given character code as modified by the + * variation selector. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * charcode :: + * The character code point in Unicode. + * + * variantSelector :: + * The Unicode code point of the variation selector. + * + * @return: + * The glyph index. 0~means either 'undefined character code', or + * 'undefined selector code', or 'no variation selector cmap subtable', + * or 'current CharMap is not Unicode'. + * + * @note: + * If you use FreeType to manipulate the contents of font files directly, + * be aware that the glyph index returned by this function doesn't always + * correspond to the internal indices used within the file. This is done + * to ensure that value~0 always corresponds to the 'missing glyph'. + * + * This function is only meaningful if + * a) the font has a variation selector cmap sub table, and + * b) the current charmap has a Unicode encoding. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.6 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt ) + FT_Face_GetCharVariantIndex( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong charcode, + FT_ULong variantSelector ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_GetCharVariantIsDefault + * + * @description: + * Check whether this variation of this Unicode character is the one to + * be found in the charmap. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * charcode :: + * The character codepoint in Unicode. + * + * variantSelector :: + * The Unicode codepoint of the variation selector. + * + * @return: + * 1~if found in the standard (Unicode) cmap, 0~if found in the variation + * selector cmap, or -1 if it is not a variation. + * + * @note: + * This function is only meaningful if the font has a variation selector + * cmap subtable. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.6 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Int ) + FT_Face_GetCharVariantIsDefault( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong charcode, + FT_ULong variantSelector ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_GetVariantSelectors + * + * @description: + * Return a zero-terminated list of Unicode variation selectors found in + * the font. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @return: + * A pointer to an array of selector code points, or `NULL` if there is + * no valid variation selector cmap subtable. + * + * @note: + * The last item in the array is~0; the array is owned by the @FT_Face + * object but can be overwritten or released on the next call to a + * FreeType function. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.6 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt32* ) + FT_Face_GetVariantSelectors( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_GetVariantsOfChar + * + * @description: + * Return a zero-terminated list of Unicode variation selectors found for + * the specified character code. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * charcode :: + * The character codepoint in Unicode. + * + * @return: + * A pointer to an array of variation selector code points that are + * active for the given character, or `NULL` if the corresponding list is + * empty. + * + * @note: + * The last item in the array is~0; the array is owned by the @FT_Face + * object but can be overwritten or released on the next call to a + * FreeType function. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.6 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt32* ) + FT_Face_GetVariantsOfChar( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong charcode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_GetCharsOfVariant + * + * @description: + * Return a zero-terminated list of Unicode character codes found for the + * specified variation selector. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * variantSelector :: + * The variation selector code point in Unicode. + * + * @return: + * A list of all the code points that are specified by this selector + * (both default and non-default codes are returned) or `NULL` if there + * is no valid cmap or the variation selector is invalid. + * + * @note: + * The last item in the array is~0; the array is owned by the @FT_Face + * object but can be overwritten or released on the next call to a + * FreeType function. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.6 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt32* ) + FT_Face_GetCharsOfVariant( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong variantSelector ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * computations + * + * @title: + * Computations + * + * @abstract: + * Crunching fixed numbers and vectors. + * + * @description: + * This section contains various functions used to perform computations + * on 16.16 fixed-float numbers or 2d vectors. + * + * **Attention**: Most arithmetic functions take `FT_Long` as arguments. + * For historical reasons, FreeType was designed under the assumption + * that `FT_Long` is a 32-bit integer; results can thus be undefined if + * the arguments don't fit into 32 bits. + * + * @order: + * FT_MulDiv + * FT_MulFix + * FT_DivFix + * FT_RoundFix + * FT_CeilFix + * FT_FloorFix + * FT_Vector_Transform + * FT_Matrix_Multiply + * FT_Matrix_Invert + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_MulDiv + * + * @description: + * Compute `(a*b)/c` with maximum accuracy, using a 64-bit intermediate + * integer whenever necessary. + * + * This function isn't necessarily as fast as some processor-specific + * operations, but is at least completely portable. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * The first multiplier. + * + * b :: + * The second multiplier. + * + * c :: + * The divisor. + * + * @return: + * The result of `(a*b)/c`. This function never traps when trying to + * divide by zero; it simply returns 'MaxInt' or 'MinInt' depending on + * the signs of `a` and `b`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Long ) + FT_MulDiv( FT_Long a, + FT_Long b, + FT_Long c ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_MulFix + * + * @description: + * Compute `(a*b)/0x10000` with maximum accuracy. Its main use is to + * multiply a given value by a 16.16 fixed-point factor. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * The first multiplier. + * + * b :: + * The second multiplier. Use a 16.16 factor here whenever possible + * (see note below). + * + * @return: + * The result of `(a*b)/0x10000`. + * + * @note: + * This function has been optimized for the case where the absolute value + * of `a` is less than 2048, and `b` is a 16.16 scaling factor. As this + * happens mainly when scaling from notional units to fractional pixels + * in FreeType, it resulted in noticeable speed improvements between + * versions 2.x and 1.x. + * + * As a conclusion, always try to place a 16.16 factor as the _second_ + * argument of this function; this can make a great difference. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Long ) + FT_MulFix( FT_Long a, + FT_Long b ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_DivFix + * + * @description: + * Compute `(a*0x10000)/b` with maximum accuracy. Its main use is to + * divide a given value by a 16.16 fixed-point factor. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * The numerator. + * + * b :: + * The denominator. Use a 16.16 factor here. + * + * @return: + * The result of `(a*0x10000)/b`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Long ) + FT_DivFix( FT_Long a, + FT_Long b ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_RoundFix + * + * @description: + * Round a 16.16 fixed number. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * The number to be rounded. + * + * @return: + * `a` rounded to the nearest 16.16 fixed integer, halfway cases away + * from zero. + * + * @note: + * The function uses wrap-around arithmetic. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Fixed ) + FT_RoundFix( FT_Fixed a ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_CeilFix + * + * @description: + * Compute the smallest following integer of a 16.16 fixed number. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * The number for which the ceiling function is to be computed. + * + * @return: + * `a` rounded towards plus infinity. + * + * @note: + * The function uses wrap-around arithmetic. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Fixed ) + FT_CeilFix( FT_Fixed a ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_FloorFix + * + * @description: + * Compute the largest previous integer of a 16.16 fixed number. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * The number for which the floor function is to be computed. + * + * @return: + * `a` rounded towards minus infinity. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Fixed ) + FT_FloorFix( FT_Fixed a ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Vector_Transform + * + * @description: + * Transform a single vector through a 2x2 matrix. + * + * @inout: + * vector :: + * The target vector to transform. + * + * @input: + * matrix :: + * A pointer to the source 2x2 matrix. + * + * @note: + * The result is undefined if either `vector` or `matrix` is invalid. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Vector_Transform( FT_Vector* vector, + const FT_Matrix* matrix ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * version + * + * @title: + * FreeType Version + * + * @abstract: + * Functions and macros related to FreeType versions. + * + * @description: + * Note that those functions and macros are of limited use because even a + * new release of FreeType with only documentation changes increases the + * version number. + * + * @order: + * FT_Library_Version + * + * FREETYPE_MAJOR + * FREETYPE_MINOR + * FREETYPE_PATCH + * + * FT_Face_CheckTrueTypePatents + * FT_Face_SetUnpatentedHinting + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FREETYPE_XXX + * + * @description: + * These three macros identify the FreeType source code version. Use + * @FT_Library_Version to access them at runtime. + * + * @values: + * FREETYPE_MAJOR :: + * The major version number. + * FREETYPE_MINOR :: + * The minor version number. + * FREETYPE_PATCH :: + * The patch level. + * + * @note: + * The version number of FreeType if built as a dynamic link library with + * the 'libtool' package is _not_ controlled by these three macros. + * + */ +#define FREETYPE_MAJOR 2 +#define FREETYPE_MINOR 10 +#define FREETYPE_PATCH 0 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Library_Version + * + * @description: + * Return the version of the FreeType library being used. This is useful + * when dynamically linking to the library, since one cannot use the + * macros @FREETYPE_MAJOR, @FREETYPE_MINOR, and @FREETYPE_PATCH. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A source library handle. + * + * @output: + * amajor :: + * The major version number. + * + * aminor :: + * The minor version number. + * + * apatch :: + * The patch version number. + * + * @note: + * The reason why this function takes a `library` argument is because + * certain programs implement library initialization in a custom way that + * doesn't use @FT_Init_FreeType. + * + * In such cases, the library version might not be available before the + * library object has been created. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Library_Version( FT_Library library, + FT_Int *amajor, + FT_Int *aminor, + FT_Int *apatch ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_CheckTrueTypePatents + * + * @description: + * Deprecated, does nothing. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A face handle. + * + * @return: + * Always returns false. + * + * @note: + * Since May 2010, TrueType hinting is no longer patented. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.5 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Bool ) + FT_Face_CheckTrueTypePatents( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Face_SetUnpatentedHinting + * + * @description: + * Deprecated, does nothing. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A face handle. + * + * value :: + * New boolean setting. + * + * @return: + * Always returns false. + * + * @note: + * Since May 2010, TrueType hinting is no longer patented. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.5 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Bool ) + FT_Face_SetUnpatentedHinting( FT_Face face, + FT_Bool value ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FREETYPE_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftadvanc.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftadvanc.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95c38f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftadvanc.h @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftadvanc.h + * + * Quick computation of advance widths (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2008-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTADVANC_H_ +#define FTADVANC_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * quick_advance + * + * @title: + * Quick retrieval of advance values + * + * @abstract: + * Retrieve horizontal and vertical advance values without processing + * glyph outlines, if possible. + * + * @description: + * This section contains functions to quickly extract advance values + * without handling glyph outlines, if possible. + * + * @order: + * FT_Get_Advance + * FT_Get_Advances + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_ADVANCE_FLAG_FAST_ONLY + * + * @description: + * A bit-flag to be OR-ed with the `flags` parameter of the + * @FT_Get_Advance and @FT_Get_Advances functions. + * + * If set, it indicates that you want these functions to fail if the + * corresponding hinting mode or font driver doesn't allow for very quick + * advance computation. + * + * Typically, glyphs that are either unscaled, unhinted, bitmapped, or + * light-hinted can have their advance width computed very quickly. + * + * Normal and bytecode hinted modes that require loading, scaling, and + * hinting of the glyph outline, are extremely slow by comparison. + */ +#define FT_ADVANCE_FLAG_FAST_ONLY 0x20000000L + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Advance + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the advance value of a given glyph outline in an @FT_Face. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source @FT_Face handle. + * + * gindex :: + * The glyph index. + * + * load_flags :: + * A set of bit flags similar to those used when calling + * @FT_Load_Glyph, used to determine what kind of advances you need. + * @output: + * padvance :: + * The advance value. If scaling is performed (based on the value of + * `load_flags`), the advance value is in 16.16 format. Otherwise, it + * is in font units. + * + * If @FT_LOAD_VERTICAL_LAYOUT is set, this is the vertical advance + * corresponding to a vertical layout. Otherwise, it is the horizontal + * advance in a horizontal layout. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * This function may fail if you use @FT_ADVANCE_FLAG_FAST_ONLY and if + * the corresponding font backend doesn't have a quick way to retrieve + * the advances. + * + * A scaled advance is returned in 16.16 format but isn't transformed by + * the affine transformation specified by @FT_Set_Transform. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Advance( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int32 load_flags, + FT_Fixed *padvance ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Advances + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the advance values of several glyph outlines in an @FT_Face. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source @FT_Face handle. + * + * start :: + * The first glyph index. + * + * count :: + * The number of advance values you want to retrieve. + * + * load_flags :: + * A set of bit flags similar to those used when calling + * @FT_Load_Glyph. + * + * @output: + * padvance :: + * The advance values. This array, to be provided by the caller, must + * contain at least `count` elements. + * + * If scaling is performed (based on the value of `load_flags`), the + * advance values are in 16.16 format. Otherwise, they are in font + * units. + * + * If @FT_LOAD_VERTICAL_LAYOUT is set, these are the vertical advances + * corresponding to a vertical layout. Otherwise, they are the + * horizontal advances in a horizontal layout. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * This function may fail if you use @FT_ADVANCE_FLAG_FAST_ONLY and if + * the corresponding font backend doesn't have a quick way to retrieve + * the advances. + * + * Scaled advances are returned in 16.16 format but aren't transformed by + * the affine transformation specified by @FT_Set_Transform. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Advances( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt start, + FT_UInt count, + FT_Int32 load_flags, + FT_Fixed *padvances ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTADVANC_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbbox.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbbox.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..22da70c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbbox.h @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftbbox.h + * + * FreeType exact bbox computation (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This component has a _single_ role: to compute exact outline bounding + * boxes. + * + * It is separated from the rest of the engine for various technical + * reasons. It may well be integrated in 'ftoutln' later. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTBBOX_H_ +#define FTBBOX_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * outline_processing + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Get_BBox + * + * @description: + * Compute the exact bounding box of an outline. This is slower than + * computing the control box. However, it uses an advanced algorithm + * that returns _very_ quickly when the two boxes coincide. Otherwise, + * the outline Bezier arcs are traversed to extract their extrema. + * + * @input: + * outline :: + * A pointer to the source outline. + * + * @output: + * abbox :: + * The outline's exact bounding box. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If the font is tricky and the glyph has been loaded with + * @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE, the resulting BBox is meaningless. To get + * reasonable values for the BBox it is necessary to load the glyph at a + * large ppem value (so that the hinting instructions can properly shift + * and scale the subglyphs), then extracting the BBox, which can be + * eventually converted back to font units. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Get_BBox( FT_Outline* outline, + FT_BBox *abbox ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTBBOX_H_ */ + + +/* END */ + + +/* Local Variables: */ +/* coding: utf-8 */ +/* End: */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbdf.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbdf.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c46da5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbdf.h @@ -0,0 +1,213 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftbdf.h + * + * FreeType API for accessing BDF-specific strings (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTBDF_H_ +#define FTBDF_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * bdf_fonts + * + * @title: + * BDF and PCF Files + * + * @abstract: + * BDF and PCF specific API. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of functions specific to BDF and + * PCF fonts. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * BDF_PropertyType + * + * @description: + * A list of BDF property types. + * + * @values: + * BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_NONE :: + * Value~0 is used to indicate a missing property. + * + * BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_ATOM :: + * Property is a string atom. + * + * BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_INTEGER :: + * Property is a 32-bit signed integer. + * + * BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_CARDINAL :: + * Property is a 32-bit unsigned integer. + */ + typedef enum BDF_PropertyType_ + { + BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_NONE = 0, + BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_ATOM = 1, + BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_INTEGER = 2, + BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_CARDINAL = 3 + + } BDF_PropertyType; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * BDF_Property + * + * @description: + * A handle to a @BDF_PropertyRec structure to model a given BDF/PCF + * property. + */ + typedef struct BDF_PropertyRec_* BDF_Property; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * BDF_PropertyRec + * + * @description: + * This structure models a given BDF/PCF property. + * + * @fields: + * type :: + * The property type. + * + * u.atom :: + * The atom string, if type is @BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_ATOM. May be + * `NULL`, indicating an empty string. + * + * u.integer :: + * A signed integer, if type is @BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_INTEGER. + * + * u.cardinal :: + * An unsigned integer, if type is @BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_CARDINAL. + */ + typedef struct BDF_PropertyRec_ + { + BDF_PropertyType type; + union { + const char* atom; + FT_Int32 integer; + FT_UInt32 cardinal; + + } u; + + } BDF_PropertyRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_BDF_Charset_ID + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a BDF font character set identity, according to the BDF + * specification. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * @output: + * acharset_encoding :: + * Charset encoding, as a C~string, owned by the face. + * + * acharset_registry :: + * Charset registry, as a C~string, owned by the face. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function only works with BDF faces, returning an error otherwise. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_BDF_Charset_ID( FT_Face face, + const char* *acharset_encoding, + const char* *acharset_registry ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_BDF_Property + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a BDF property from a BDF or PCF font file. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * name :: + * The property name. + * + * @output: + * aproperty :: + * The property. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function works with BDF _and_ PCF fonts. It returns an error + * otherwise. It also returns an error if the property is not in the + * font. + * + * A 'property' is a either key-value pair within the STARTPROPERTIES + * ... ENDPROPERTIES block of a BDF font or a key-value pair from the + * `info->props` array within a `FontRec` structure of a PCF font. + * + * Integer properties are always stored as 'signed' within PCF fonts; + * consequently, @BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_CARDINAL is a possible return value + * for BDF fonts only. + * + * In case of error, `aproperty->type` is always set to + * @BDF_PROPERTY_TYPE_NONE. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_BDF_Property( FT_Face face, + const char* prop_name, + BDF_PropertyRec *aproperty ); + + /* */ + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTBDF_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbitmap.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbitmap.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6acdb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbitmap.h @@ -0,0 +1,330 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftbitmap.h + * + * FreeType utility functions for bitmaps (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTBITMAP_H_ +#define FTBITMAP_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H +#include FT_COLOR_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * bitmap_handling + * + * @title: + * Bitmap Handling + * + * @abstract: + * Handling FT_Bitmap objects. + * + * @description: + * This section contains functions for handling @FT_Bitmap objects, + * automatically adjusting the target's bitmap buffer size as needed. + * + * Note that none of the functions changes the bitmap's 'flow' (as + * indicated by the sign of the `pitch` field in @FT_Bitmap). + * + * To set the flow, assign an appropriate positive or negative value to + * the `pitch` field of the target @FT_Bitmap object after calling + * @FT_Bitmap_Init but before calling any of the other functions + * described here. + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Bitmap_Init + * + * @description: + * Initialize a pointer to an @FT_Bitmap structure. + * + * @inout: + * abitmap :: + * A pointer to the bitmap structure. + * + * @note: + * A deprecated name for the same function is `FT_Bitmap_New`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Bitmap_Init( FT_Bitmap *abitmap ); + + + /* deprecated */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Bitmap_New( FT_Bitmap *abitmap ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Bitmap_Copy + * + * @description: + * Copy a bitmap into another one. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a library object. + * + * source :: + * A handle to the source bitmap. + * + * @output: + * target :: + * A handle to the target bitmap. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * `source->buffer` and `target->buffer` must neither be equal nor + * overlap. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Bitmap_Copy( FT_Library library, + const FT_Bitmap *source, + FT_Bitmap *target ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Bitmap_Embolden + * + * @description: + * Embolden a bitmap. The new bitmap will be about `xStrength` pixels + * wider and `yStrength` pixels higher. The left and bottom borders are + * kept unchanged. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a library object. + * + * xStrength :: + * How strong the glyph is emboldened horizontally. Expressed in 26.6 + * pixel format. + * + * yStrength :: + * How strong the glyph is emboldened vertically. Expressed in 26.6 + * pixel format. + * + * @inout: + * bitmap :: + * A handle to the target bitmap. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The current implementation restricts `xStrength` to be less than or + * equal to~8 if bitmap is of pixel_mode @FT_PIXEL_MODE_MONO. + * + * If you want to embolden the bitmap owned by a @FT_GlyphSlotRec, you + * should call @FT_GlyphSlot_Own_Bitmap on the slot first. + * + * Bitmaps in @FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY2 and @FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY@ format are + * converted to @FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY format (i.e., 8bpp). + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Bitmap_Embolden( FT_Library library, + FT_Bitmap* bitmap, + FT_Pos xStrength, + FT_Pos yStrength ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Bitmap_Convert + * + * @description: + * Convert a bitmap object with depth 1bpp, 2bpp, 4bpp, 8bpp or 32bpp to + * a bitmap object with depth 8bpp, making the number of used bytes per + * line (a.k.a. the 'pitch') a multiple of `alignment`. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a library object. + * + * source :: + * The source bitmap. + * + * alignment :: + * The pitch of the bitmap is a multiple of this argument. Common + * values are 1, 2, or 4. + * + * @output: + * target :: + * The target bitmap. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * It is possible to call @FT_Bitmap_Convert multiple times without + * calling @FT_Bitmap_Done (the memory is simply reallocated). + * + * Use @FT_Bitmap_Done to finally remove the bitmap object. + * + * The `library` argument is taken to have access to FreeType's memory + * handling functions. + * + * `source->buffer` and `target->buffer` must neither be equal nor + * overlap. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Bitmap_Convert( FT_Library library, + const FT_Bitmap *source, + FT_Bitmap *target, + FT_Int alignment ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Bitmap_Blend + * + * @description: + * Blend a bitmap onto another bitmap, using a given color. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a library object. + * + * source :: + * The source bitmap, which can have any @FT_Pixel_Mode format. + * + * source_offset :: + * The offset vector to the upper left corner of the source bitmap in + * 26.6 pixel format. It should represent an integer offset; the + * function will set the lowest six bits to zero to enforce that. + * + * color :: + * The color used to draw `source` onto `target`. + * + * @inout: + * target :: + * A handle to an `FT_Bitmap` object. It should be either initialized + * as empty with a call to @FT_Bitmap_Init, or it should be of type + * @FT_PIXEL_MODE_BGRA. + * + * atarget_offset :: + * The offset vector to the upper left corner of the target bitmap in + * 26.6 pixel format. It should represent an integer offset; the + * function will set the lowest six bits to zero to enforce that. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function doesn't perform clipping. + * + * The bitmap in `target` gets allocated or reallocated as needed; the + * vector `atarget_offset` is updated accordingly. + * + * In case of allocation or reallocation, the bitmap's pitch is set to + * `4 * width`. Both `source` and `target` must have the same bitmap + * flow (as indicated by the sign of the `pitch` field). + * + * `source->buffer` and `target->buffer` must neither be equal nor + * overlap. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Bitmap_Blend( FT_Library library, + const FT_Bitmap* source, + const FT_Vector source_offset, + FT_Bitmap* target, + FT_Vector *atarget_offset, + FT_Color color ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_GlyphSlot_Own_Bitmap + * + * @description: + * Make sure that a glyph slot owns `slot->bitmap`. + * + * @input: + * slot :: + * The glyph slot. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function is to be used in combination with @FT_Bitmap_Embolden. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_GlyphSlot_Own_Bitmap( FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Bitmap_Done + * + * @description: + * Destroy a bitmap object initialized with @FT_Bitmap_Init. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a library object. + * + * bitmap :: + * The bitmap object to be freed. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The `library` argument is taken to have access to FreeType's memory + * handling functions. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Bitmap_Done( FT_Library library, + FT_Bitmap *bitmap ); + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTBITMAP_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbzip2.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbzip2.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae88cfd --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftbzip2.h @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftbzip2.h + * + * Bzip2-compressed stream support. + * + * Copyright (C) 2010-2019 by + * Joel Klinghed. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTBZIP2_H_ +#define FTBZIP2_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * bzip2 + * + * @title: + * BZIP2 Streams + * + * @abstract: + * Using bzip2-compressed font files. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of Bzip2-specific functions. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stream_OpenBzip2 + * + * @description: + * Open a new stream to parse bzip2-compressed font files. This is + * mainly used to support the compressed `*.pcf.bz2` fonts that come with + * XFree86. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * The target embedding stream. + * + * source :: + * The source stream. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The source stream must be opened _before_ calling this function. + * + * Calling the internal function `FT_Stream_Close` on the new stream will + * **not** call `FT_Stream_Close` on the source stream. None of the + * stream objects will be released to the heap. + * + * The stream implementation is very basic and resets the decompression + * process each time seeking backwards is needed within the stream. + * + * In certain builds of the library, bzip2 compression recognition is + * automatically handled when calling @FT_New_Face or @FT_Open_Face. + * This means that if no font driver is capable of handling the raw + * compressed file, the library will try to open a bzip2 compressed + * stream from it and re-open the face with it. + * + * This function may return `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` if your build + * of FreeType was not compiled with bzip2 support. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_OpenBzip2( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Stream source ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTBZIP2_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcache.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcache.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d589d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcache.h @@ -0,0 +1,1088 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftcache.h + * + * FreeType Cache subsystem (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTCACHE_H_ +#define FTCACHE_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_GLYPH_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * cache_subsystem + * + * @title: + * Cache Sub-System + * + * @abstract: + * How to cache face, size, and glyph data with FreeType~2. + * + * @description: + * This section describes the FreeType~2 cache sub-system, which is used + * to limit the number of concurrently opened @FT_Face and @FT_Size + * objects, as well as caching information like character maps and glyph + * images while limiting their maximum memory usage. + * + * Note that all types and functions begin with the `FTC_` prefix. + * + * The cache is highly portable and thus doesn't know anything about the + * fonts installed on your system, or how to access them. This implies + * the following scheme: + * + * First, available or installed font faces are uniquely identified by + * @FTC_FaceID values, provided to the cache by the client. Note that + * the cache only stores and compares these values, and doesn't try to + * interpret them in any way. + * + * Second, the cache calls, only when needed, a client-provided function + * to convert an @FTC_FaceID into a new @FT_Face object. The latter is + * then completely managed by the cache, including its termination + * through @FT_Done_Face. To monitor termination of face objects, the + * finalizer callback in the `generic` field of the @FT_Face object can + * be used, which might also be used to store the @FTC_FaceID of the + * face. + * + * Clients are free to map face IDs to anything else. The most simple + * usage is to associate them to a (pathname,face_index) pair that is + * used to call @FT_New_Face. However, more complex schemes are also + * possible. + * + * Note that for the cache to work correctly, the face ID values must be + * **persistent**, which means that the contents they point to should not + * change at runtime, or that their value should not become invalid. + * + * If this is unavoidable (e.g., when a font is uninstalled at runtime), + * you should call @FTC_Manager_RemoveFaceID as soon as possible, to let + * the cache get rid of any references to the old @FTC_FaceID it may keep + * internally. Failure to do so will lead to incorrect behaviour or even + * crashes. + * + * To use the cache, start with calling @FTC_Manager_New to create a new + * @FTC_Manager object, which models a single cache instance. You can + * then look up @FT_Face and @FT_Size objects with + * @FTC_Manager_LookupFace and @FTC_Manager_LookupSize, respectively. + * + * If you want to use the charmap caching, call @FTC_CMapCache_New, then + * later use @FTC_CMapCache_Lookup to perform the equivalent of + * @FT_Get_Char_Index, only much faster. + * + * If you want to use the @FT_Glyph caching, call @FTC_ImageCache, then + * later use @FTC_ImageCache_Lookup to retrieve the corresponding + * @FT_Glyph objects from the cache. + * + * If you need lots of small bitmaps, it is much more memory efficient to + * call @FTC_SBitCache_New followed by @FTC_SBitCache_Lookup. This + * returns @FTC_SBitRec structures, which are used to store small bitmaps + * directly. (A small bitmap is one whose metrics and dimensions all fit + * into 8-bit integers). + * + * We hope to also provide a kerning cache in the near future. + * + * + * @order: + * FTC_Manager + * FTC_FaceID + * FTC_Face_Requester + * + * FTC_Manager_New + * FTC_Manager_Reset + * FTC_Manager_Done + * FTC_Manager_LookupFace + * FTC_Manager_LookupSize + * FTC_Manager_RemoveFaceID + * + * FTC_Node + * FTC_Node_Unref + * + * FTC_ImageCache + * FTC_ImageCache_New + * FTC_ImageCache_Lookup + * + * FTC_SBit + * FTC_SBitCache + * FTC_SBitCache_New + * FTC_SBitCache_Lookup + * + * FTC_CMapCache + * FTC_CMapCache_New + * FTC_CMapCache_Lookup + * + *************************************************************************/ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** BASIC TYPE DEFINITIONS *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_FaceID + * + * @description: + * An opaque pointer type that is used to identity face objects. The + * contents of such objects is application-dependent. + * + * These pointers are typically used to point to a user-defined structure + * containing a font file path, and face index. + * + * @note: + * Never use `NULL` as a valid @FTC_FaceID. + * + * Face IDs are passed by the client to the cache manager that calls, + * when needed, the @FTC_Face_Requester to translate them into new + * @FT_Face objects. + * + * If the content of a given face ID changes at runtime, or if the value + * becomes invalid (e.g., when uninstalling a font), you should + * immediately call @FTC_Manager_RemoveFaceID before any other cache + * function. + * + * Failure to do so will result in incorrect behaviour or even memory + * leaks and crashes. + */ + typedef FT_Pointer FTC_FaceID; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FTC_Face_Requester + * + * @description: + * A callback function provided by client applications. It is used by + * the cache manager to translate a given @FTC_FaceID into a new valid + * @FT_Face object, on demand. + * + * @input: + * face_id :: + * The face ID to resolve. + * + * library :: + * A handle to a FreeType library object. + * + * req_data :: + * Application-provided request data (see note below). + * + * @output: + * aface :: + * A new @FT_Face handle. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The third parameter `req_data` is the same as the one passed by the + * client when @FTC_Manager_New is called. + * + * The face requester should not perform funny things on the returned + * face object, like creating a new @FT_Size for it, or setting a + * transformation through @FT_Set_Transform! + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FTC_Face_Requester)( FTC_FaceID face_id, + FT_Library library, + FT_Pointer req_data, + FT_Face* aface ); + + /* */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** CACHE MANAGER OBJECT *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_Manager + * + * @description: + * This object corresponds to one instance of the cache-subsystem. It is + * used to cache one or more @FT_Face objects, along with corresponding + * @FT_Size objects. + * + * The manager intentionally limits the total number of opened @FT_Face + * and @FT_Size objects to control memory usage. See the `max_faces` and + * `max_sizes` parameters of @FTC_Manager_New. + * + * The manager is also used to cache 'nodes' of various types while + * limiting their total memory usage. + * + * All limitations are enforced by keeping lists of managed objects in + * most-recently-used order, and flushing old nodes to make room for new + * ones. + */ + typedef struct FTC_ManagerRec_* FTC_Manager; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_Node + * + * @description: + * An opaque handle to a cache node object. Each cache node is + * reference-counted. A node with a count of~0 might be flushed out of a + * full cache whenever a lookup request is performed. + * + * If you look up nodes, you have the ability to 'acquire' them, i.e., to + * increment their reference count. This will prevent the node from + * being flushed out of the cache until you explicitly 'release' it (see + * @FTC_Node_Unref). + * + * See also @FTC_SBitCache_Lookup and @FTC_ImageCache_Lookup. + */ + typedef struct FTC_NodeRec_* FTC_Node; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_Manager_New + * + * @description: + * Create a new cache manager. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * The parent FreeType library handle to use. + * + * max_faces :: + * Maximum number of opened @FT_Face objects managed by this cache + * instance. Use~0 for defaults. + * + * max_sizes :: + * Maximum number of opened @FT_Size objects managed by this cache + * instance. Use~0 for defaults. + * + * max_bytes :: + * Maximum number of bytes to use for cached data nodes. Use~0 for + * defaults. Note that this value does not account for managed + * @FT_Face and @FT_Size objects. + * + * requester :: + * An application-provided callback used to translate face IDs into + * real @FT_Face objects. + * + * req_data :: + * A generic pointer that is passed to the requester each time it is + * called (see @FTC_Face_Requester). + * + * @output: + * amanager :: + * A handle to a new manager object. 0~in case of failure. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_Manager_New( FT_Library library, + FT_UInt max_faces, + FT_UInt max_sizes, + FT_ULong max_bytes, + FTC_Face_Requester requester, + FT_Pointer req_data, + FTC_Manager *amanager ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_Manager_Reset + * + * @description: + * Empty a given cache manager. This simply gets rid of all the + * currently cached @FT_Face and @FT_Size objects within the manager. + * + * @inout: + * manager :: + * A handle to the manager. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FTC_Manager_Reset( FTC_Manager manager ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_Manager_Done + * + * @description: + * Destroy a given manager after emptying it. + * + * @input: + * manager :: + * A handle to the target cache manager object. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FTC_Manager_Done( FTC_Manager manager ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_Manager_LookupFace + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the @FT_Face object that corresponds to a given face ID + * through a cache manager. + * + * @input: + * manager :: + * A handle to the cache manager. + * + * face_id :: + * The ID of the face object. + * + * @output: + * aface :: + * A handle to the face object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The returned @FT_Face object is always owned by the manager. You + * should never try to discard it yourself. + * + * The @FT_Face object doesn't necessarily have a current size object + * (i.e., face->size can be~0). If you need a specific 'font size', use + * @FTC_Manager_LookupSize instead. + * + * Never change the face's transformation matrix (i.e., never call the + * @FT_Set_Transform function) on a returned face! If you need to + * transform glyphs, do it yourself after glyph loading. + * + * When you perform a lookup, out-of-memory errors are detected _within_ + * the lookup and force incremental flushes of the cache until enough + * memory is released for the lookup to succeed. + * + * If a lookup fails with `FT_Err_Out_Of_Memory` the cache has already + * been completely flushed, and still no memory was available for the + * operation. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_Manager_LookupFace( FTC_Manager manager, + FTC_FaceID face_id, + FT_Face *aface ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FTC_ScalerRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to describe a given character size in either pixels + * or points to the cache manager. See @FTC_Manager_LookupSize. + * + * @fields: + * face_id :: + * The source face ID. + * + * width :: + * The character width. + * + * height :: + * The character height. + * + * pixel :: + * A Boolean. If 1, the `width` and `height` fields are interpreted as + * integer pixel character sizes. Otherwise, they are expressed as + * 1/64th of points. + * + * x_res :: + * Only used when `pixel` is value~0 to indicate the horizontal + * resolution in dpi. + * + * y_res :: + * Only used when `pixel` is value~0 to indicate the vertical + * resolution in dpi. + * + * @note: + * This type is mainly used to retrieve @FT_Size objects through the + * cache manager. + */ + typedef struct FTC_ScalerRec_ + { + FTC_FaceID face_id; + FT_UInt width; + FT_UInt height; + FT_Int pixel; + FT_UInt x_res; + FT_UInt y_res; + + } FTC_ScalerRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FTC_Scaler + * + * @description: + * A handle to an @FTC_ScalerRec structure. + */ + typedef struct FTC_ScalerRec_* FTC_Scaler; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_Manager_LookupSize + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the @FT_Size object that corresponds to a given + * @FTC_ScalerRec pointer through a cache manager. + * + * @input: + * manager :: + * A handle to the cache manager. + * + * scaler :: + * A scaler handle. + * + * @output: + * asize :: + * A handle to the size object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The returned @FT_Size object is always owned by the manager. You + * should never try to discard it by yourself. + * + * You can access the parent @FT_Face object simply as `size->face` if + * you need it. Note that this object is also owned by the manager. + * + * @note: + * When you perform a lookup, out-of-memory errors are detected _within_ + * the lookup and force incremental flushes of the cache until enough + * memory is released for the lookup to succeed. + * + * If a lookup fails with `FT_Err_Out_Of_Memory` the cache has already + * been completely flushed, and still no memory is available for the + * operation. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_Manager_LookupSize( FTC_Manager manager, + FTC_Scaler scaler, + FT_Size *asize ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_Node_Unref + * + * @description: + * Decrement a cache node's internal reference count. When the count + * reaches 0, it is not destroyed but becomes eligible for subsequent + * cache flushes. + * + * @input: + * node :: + * The cache node handle. + * + * manager :: + * The cache manager handle. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FTC_Node_Unref( FTC_Node node, + FTC_Manager manager ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_Manager_RemoveFaceID + * + * @description: + * A special function used to indicate to the cache manager that a given + * @FTC_FaceID is no longer valid, either because its content changed, or + * because it was deallocated or uninstalled. + * + * @input: + * manager :: + * The cache manager handle. + * + * face_id :: + * The @FTC_FaceID to be removed. + * + * @note: + * This function flushes all nodes from the cache corresponding to this + * `face_id`, with the exception of nodes with a non-null reference + * count. + * + * Such nodes are however modified internally so as to never appear in + * later lookups with the same `face_id` value, and to be immediately + * destroyed when released by all their users. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FTC_Manager_RemoveFaceID( FTC_Manager manager, + FTC_FaceID face_id ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_CMapCache + * + * @description: + * An opaque handle used to model a charmap cache. This cache is to hold + * character codes -> glyph indices mappings. + * + */ + typedef struct FTC_CMapCacheRec_* FTC_CMapCache; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_CMapCache_New + * + * @description: + * Create a new charmap cache. + * + * @input: + * manager :: + * A handle to the cache manager. + * + * @output: + * acache :: + * A new cache handle. `NULL` in case of error. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Like all other caches, this one will be destroyed with the cache + * manager. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_CMapCache_New( FTC_Manager manager, + FTC_CMapCache *acache ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_CMapCache_Lookup + * + * @description: + * Translate a character code into a glyph index, using the charmap + * cache. + * + * @input: + * cache :: + * A charmap cache handle. + * + * face_id :: + * The source face ID. + * + * cmap_index :: + * The index of the charmap in the source face. Any negative value + * means to use the cache @FT_Face's default charmap. + * + * char_code :: + * The character code (in the corresponding charmap). + * + * @return: + * Glyph index. 0~means 'no glyph'. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt ) + FTC_CMapCache_Lookup( FTC_CMapCache cache, + FTC_FaceID face_id, + FT_Int cmap_index, + FT_UInt32 char_code ); + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** IMAGE CACHE OBJECT *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FTC_ImageTypeRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to model the type of images in a glyph cache. + * + * @fields: + * face_id :: + * The face ID. + * + * width :: + * The width in pixels. + * + * height :: + * The height in pixels. + * + * flags :: + * The load flags, as in @FT_Load_Glyph. + * + */ + typedef struct FTC_ImageTypeRec_ + { + FTC_FaceID face_id; + FT_UInt width; + FT_UInt height; + FT_Int32 flags; + + } FTC_ImageTypeRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_ImageType + * + * @description: + * A handle to an @FTC_ImageTypeRec structure. + * + */ + typedef struct FTC_ImageTypeRec_* FTC_ImageType; + + + /* */ + + +#define FTC_IMAGE_TYPE_COMPARE( d1, d2 ) \ + ( (d1)->face_id == (d2)->face_id && \ + (d1)->width == (d2)->width && \ + (d1)->flags == (d2)->flags ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_ImageCache + * + * @description: + * A handle to a glyph image cache object. They are designed to hold + * many distinct glyph images while not exceeding a certain memory + * threshold. + */ + typedef struct FTC_ImageCacheRec_* FTC_ImageCache; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_ImageCache_New + * + * @description: + * Create a new glyph image cache. + * + * @input: + * manager :: + * The parent manager for the image cache. + * + * @output: + * acache :: + * A handle to the new glyph image cache object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_ImageCache_New( FTC_Manager manager, + FTC_ImageCache *acache ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_ImageCache_Lookup + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a given glyph image from a glyph image cache. + * + * @input: + * cache :: + * A handle to the source glyph image cache. + * + * type :: + * A pointer to a glyph image type descriptor. + * + * gindex :: + * The glyph index to retrieve. + * + * @output: + * aglyph :: + * The corresponding @FT_Glyph object. 0~in case of failure. + * + * anode :: + * Used to return the address of the corresponding cache node after + * incrementing its reference count (see note below). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The returned glyph is owned and managed by the glyph image cache. + * Never try to transform or discard it manually! You can however create + * a copy with @FT_Glyph_Copy and modify the new one. + * + * If `anode` is _not_ `NULL`, it receives the address of the cache node + * containing the glyph image, after increasing its reference count. + * This ensures that the node (as well as the @FT_Glyph) will always be + * kept in the cache until you call @FTC_Node_Unref to 'release' it. + * + * If `anode` is `NULL`, the cache node is left unchanged, which means + * that the @FT_Glyph could be flushed out of the cache on the next call + * to one of the caching sub-system APIs. Don't assume that it is + * persistent! + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_ImageCache_Lookup( FTC_ImageCache cache, + FTC_ImageType type, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Glyph *aglyph, + FTC_Node *anode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_ImageCache_LookupScaler + * + * @description: + * A variant of @FTC_ImageCache_Lookup that uses an @FTC_ScalerRec to + * specify the face ID and its size. + * + * @input: + * cache :: + * A handle to the source glyph image cache. + * + * scaler :: + * A pointer to a scaler descriptor. + * + * load_flags :: + * The corresponding load flags. + * + * gindex :: + * The glyph index to retrieve. + * + * @output: + * aglyph :: + * The corresponding @FT_Glyph object. 0~in case of failure. + * + * anode :: + * Used to return the address of the corresponding cache node after + * incrementing its reference count (see note below). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The returned glyph is owned and managed by the glyph image cache. + * Never try to transform or discard it manually! You can however create + * a copy with @FT_Glyph_Copy and modify the new one. + * + * If `anode` is _not_ `NULL`, it receives the address of the cache node + * containing the glyph image, after increasing its reference count. + * This ensures that the node (as well as the @FT_Glyph) will always be + * kept in the cache until you call @FTC_Node_Unref to 'release' it. + * + * If `anode` is `NULL`, the cache node is left unchanged, which means + * that the @FT_Glyph could be flushed out of the cache on the next call + * to one of the caching sub-system APIs. Don't assume that it is + * persistent! + * + * Calls to @FT_Set_Char_Size and friends have no effect on cached + * glyphs; you should always use the FreeType cache API instead. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_ImageCache_LookupScaler( FTC_ImageCache cache, + FTC_Scaler scaler, + FT_ULong load_flags, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Glyph *aglyph, + FTC_Node *anode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_SBit + * + * @description: + * A handle to a small bitmap descriptor. See the @FTC_SBitRec structure + * for details. + */ + typedef struct FTC_SBitRec_* FTC_SBit; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FTC_SBitRec + * + * @description: + * A very compact structure used to describe a small glyph bitmap. + * + * @fields: + * width :: + * The bitmap width in pixels. + * + * height :: + * The bitmap height in pixels. + * + * left :: + * The horizontal distance from the pen position to the left bitmap + * border (a.k.a. 'left side bearing', or 'lsb'). + * + * top :: + * The vertical distance from the pen position (on the baseline) to the + * upper bitmap border (a.k.a. 'top side bearing'). The distance is + * positive for upwards y~coordinates. + * + * format :: + * The format of the glyph bitmap (monochrome or gray). + * + * max_grays :: + * Maximum gray level value (in the range 1 to~255). + * + * pitch :: + * The number of bytes per bitmap line. May be positive or negative. + * + * xadvance :: + * The horizontal advance width in pixels. + * + * yadvance :: + * The vertical advance height in pixels. + * + * buffer :: + * A pointer to the bitmap pixels. + */ + typedef struct FTC_SBitRec_ + { + FT_Byte width; + FT_Byte height; + FT_Char left; + FT_Char top; + + FT_Byte format; + FT_Byte max_grays; + FT_Short pitch; + FT_Char xadvance; + FT_Char yadvance; + + FT_Byte* buffer; + + } FTC_SBitRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FTC_SBitCache + * + * @description: + * A handle to a small bitmap cache. These are special cache objects + * used to store small glyph bitmaps (and anti-aliased pixmaps) in a much + * more efficient way than the traditional glyph image cache implemented + * by @FTC_ImageCache. + */ + typedef struct FTC_SBitCacheRec_* FTC_SBitCache; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_SBitCache_New + * + * @description: + * Create a new cache to store small glyph bitmaps. + * + * @input: + * manager :: + * A handle to the source cache manager. + * + * @output: + * acache :: + * A handle to the new sbit cache. `NULL` in case of error. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_SBitCache_New( FTC_Manager manager, + FTC_SBitCache *acache ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_SBitCache_Lookup + * + * @description: + * Look up a given small glyph bitmap in a given sbit cache and 'lock' it + * to prevent its flushing from the cache until needed. + * + * @input: + * cache :: + * A handle to the source sbit cache. + * + * type :: + * A pointer to the glyph image type descriptor. + * + * gindex :: + * The glyph index. + * + * @output: + * sbit :: + * A handle to a small bitmap descriptor. + * + * anode :: + * Used to return the address of the corresponding cache node after + * incrementing its reference count (see note below). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The small bitmap descriptor and its bit buffer are owned by the cache + * and should never be freed by the application. They might as well + * disappear from memory on the next cache lookup, so don't treat them as + * persistent data. + * + * The descriptor's `buffer` field is set to~0 to indicate a missing + * glyph bitmap. + * + * If `anode` is _not_ `NULL`, it receives the address of the cache node + * containing the bitmap, after increasing its reference count. This + * ensures that the node (as well as the image) will always be kept in + * the cache until you call @FTC_Node_Unref to 'release' it. + * + * If `anode` is `NULL`, the cache node is left unchanged, which means + * that the bitmap could be flushed out of the cache on the next call to + * one of the caching sub-system APIs. Don't assume that it is + * persistent! + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_SBitCache_Lookup( FTC_SBitCache cache, + FTC_ImageType type, + FT_UInt gindex, + FTC_SBit *sbit, + FTC_Node *anode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FTC_SBitCache_LookupScaler + * + * @description: + * A variant of @FTC_SBitCache_Lookup that uses an @FTC_ScalerRec to + * specify the face ID and its size. + * + * @input: + * cache :: + * A handle to the source sbit cache. + * + * scaler :: + * A pointer to the scaler descriptor. + * + * load_flags :: + * The corresponding load flags. + * + * gindex :: + * The glyph index. + * + * @output: + * sbit :: + * A handle to a small bitmap descriptor. + * + * anode :: + * Used to return the address of the corresponding cache node after + * incrementing its reference count (see note below). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The small bitmap descriptor and its bit buffer are owned by the cache + * and should never be freed by the application. They might as well + * disappear from memory on the next cache lookup, so don't treat them as + * persistent data. + * + * The descriptor's `buffer` field is set to~0 to indicate a missing + * glyph bitmap. + * + * If `anode` is _not_ `NULL`, it receives the address of the cache node + * containing the bitmap, after increasing its reference count. This + * ensures that the node (as well as the image) will always be kept in + * the cache until you call @FTC_Node_Unref to 'release' it. + * + * If `anode` is `NULL`, the cache node is left unchanged, which means + * that the bitmap could be flushed out of the cache on the next call to + * one of the caching sub-system APIs. Don't assume that it is + * persistent! + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FTC_SBitCache_LookupScaler( FTC_SBitCache cache, + FTC_Scaler scaler, + FT_ULong load_flags, + FT_UInt gindex, + FTC_SBit *sbit, + FTC_Node *anode ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTCACHE_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftchapters.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftchapters.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2ee2697 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftchapters.h @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * This file defines the structure of the FreeType reference. + * It is used by the python script that generates the HTML files. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @chapter: + * general_remarks + * + * @title: + * General Remarks + * + * @sections: + * header_inclusion + * user_allocation + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @chapter: + * core_api + * + * @title: + * Core API + * + * @sections: + * version + * basic_types + * base_interface + * glyph_variants + * color_management + * layer_management + * glyph_management + * mac_specific + * sizes_management + * header_file_macros + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @chapter: + * format_specific + * + * @title: + * Format-Specific API + * + * @sections: + * multiple_masters + * truetype_tables + * type1_tables + * sfnt_names + * bdf_fonts + * cid_fonts + * pfr_fonts + * winfnt_fonts + * font_formats + * gasp_table + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @chapter: + * module_specific + * + * @title: + * Controlling FreeType Modules + * + * @sections: + * auto_hinter + * cff_driver + * t1_cid_driver + * tt_driver + * pcf_driver + * properties + * parameter_tags + * lcd_rendering + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @chapter: + * cache_subsystem + * + * @title: + * Cache Sub-System + * + * @sections: + * cache_subsystem + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @chapter: + * support_api + * + * @title: + * Support API + * + * @sections: + * computations + * list_processing + * outline_processing + * quick_advance + * bitmap_handling + * raster + * glyph_stroker + * system_interface + * module_management + * gzip + * lzw + * bzip2 + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @chapter: + * error_codes + * + * @title: + * Error Codes + * + * @sections: + * error_enumerations + * error_code_values + * + */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcid.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcid.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8eafc1c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcid.h @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftcid.h + * + * FreeType API for accessing CID font information (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2007-2019 by + * Dereg Clegg and Michael Toftdal. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTCID_H_ +#define FTCID_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * cid_fonts + * + * @title: + * CID Fonts + * + * @abstract: + * CID-keyed font-specific API. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of CID-keyed font-specific + * functions. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_CID_Registry_Ordering_Supplement + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the Registry/Ordering/Supplement triple (also known as the + * "R/O/S") from a CID-keyed font. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * @output: + * registry :: + * The registry, as a C~string, owned by the face. + * + * ordering :: + * The ordering, as a C~string, owned by the face. + * + * supplement :: + * The supplement. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function only works with CID faces, returning an error + * otherwise. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.6 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_CID_Registry_Ordering_Supplement( FT_Face face, + const char* *registry, + const char* *ordering, + FT_Int *supplement ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_CID_Is_Internally_CID_Keyed + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the type of the input face, CID keyed or not. In contrast + * to the @FT_IS_CID_KEYED macro this function returns successfully also + * for CID-keyed fonts in an SFNT wrapper. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * @output: + * is_cid :: + * The type of the face as an @FT_Bool. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function only works with CID faces and OpenType fonts, returning + * an error otherwise. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.9 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_CID_Is_Internally_CID_Keyed( FT_Face face, + FT_Bool *is_cid ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_CID_From_Glyph_Index + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the CID of the input glyph index. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * glyph_index :: + * The input glyph index. + * + * @output: + * cid :: + * The CID as an @FT_UInt. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function only works with CID faces and OpenType fonts, returning + * an error otherwise. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.9 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_CID_From_Glyph_Index( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_UInt *cid ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTCID_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcolor.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcolor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cf18021 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftcolor.h @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftcolor.h + * + * FreeType's glyph color management (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2018-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTCOLOR_H_ +#define FTCOLOR_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * color_management + * + * @title: + * Glyph Color Management + * + * @abstract: + * Retrieving and manipulating OpenType's 'CPAL' table data. + * + * @description: + * The functions described here allow access and manipulation of color + * palette entries in OpenType's 'CPAL' tables. + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Color + * + * @description: + * This structure models a BGRA color value of a 'CPAL' palette entry. + * + * The used color space is sRGB; the colors are not pre-multiplied, and + * alpha values must be explicitly set. + * + * @fields: + * blue :: + * Blue value. + * + * green :: + * Green value. + * + * red :: + * Red value. + * + * alpha :: + * Alpha value, giving the red, green, and blue color's opacity. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + typedef struct FT_Color_ + { + FT_Byte blue; + FT_Byte green; + FT_Byte red; + FT_Byte alpha; + + } FT_Color; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PALETTE_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit field constants used in the `palette_flags` array of the + * @FT_Palette_Data structure to indicate for which background a palette + * with a given index is usable. + * + * @values: + * FT_PALETTE_FOR_LIGHT_BACKGROUND :: + * The palette is appropriate to use when displaying the font on a + * light background such as white. + * + * FT_PALETTE_FOR_DARK_BACKGROUND :: + * The palette is appropriate to use when displaying the font on a dark + * background such as black. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ +#define FT_PALETTE_FOR_LIGHT_BACKGROUND 0x01 +#define FT_PALETTE_FOR_DARK_BACKGROUND 0x02 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Palette_Data + * + * @description: + * This structure holds the data of the 'CPAL' table. + * + * @fields: + * num_palettes :: + * The number of palettes. + * + * palette_name_ids :: + * A read-only array of palette name IDs with `num_palettes` elements, + * corresponding to entries like 'dark' or 'light' in the font's 'name' + * table. + * + * An empty name ID in the 'CPAL' table gets represented as value + * 0xFFFF. + * + * `NULL` if the font's 'CPAL' table doesn't contain appropriate data. + * + * palette_flags :: + * A read-only array of palette flags with `num_palettes` elements. + * Possible values are an ORed combination of + * @FT_PALETTE_FOR_LIGHT_BACKGROUND and + * @FT_PALETTE_FOR_DARK_BACKGROUND. + * + * `NULL` if the font's 'CPAL' table doesn't contain appropriate data. + * + * num_palette_entries :: + * The number of entries in a single palette. All palettes have the + * same size. + * + * palette_entry_name_ids :: + * A read-only array of palette entry name IDs with + * `num_palette_entries`. In each palette, entries with the same index + * have the same function. For example, index~0 might correspond to + * string 'outline' in the font's 'name' table to indicate that this + * palette entry is used for outlines, index~1 might correspond to + * 'fill' to indicate the filling color palette entry, etc. + * + * An empty entry name ID in the 'CPAL' table gets represented as value + * 0xFFFF. + * + * `NULL` if the font's 'CPAL' table doesn't contain appropriate data. + * + * @note: + * Use function @FT_Get_Sfnt_Name to map name IDs and entry name IDs to + * name strings. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + typedef struct FT_Palette_Data_ { + FT_UShort num_palettes; + const FT_UShort* palette_name_ids; + const FT_UShort* palette_flags; + + FT_UShort num_palette_entries; + const FT_UShort* palette_entry_name_ids; + + } FT_Palette_Data; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Palette_Data_Get + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the face's color palette data. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source face handle. + * + * @output: + * apalette :: + * A pointer to an @FT_Palette_Data structure. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * All arrays in the returned @FT_Palette_Data structure are read-only. + * + * This function always returns an error if the config macro + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_COLOR_LAYERS` is not defined in `ftoption.h`. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Palette_Data_Get( FT_Face face, + FT_Palette_Data *apalette ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Palette_Select + * + * @description: + * This function has two purposes. + * + * (1) It activates a palette for rendering color glyphs, and + * + * (2) it retrieves all (unmodified) color entries of this palette. This + * function returns a read-write array, which means that a calling + * application can modify the palette entries on demand. + * + * A corollary of (2) is that calling the function, then modifying some + * values, then calling the function again with the same arguments resets + * all color entries to the original 'CPAL' values; all user modifications + * are lost. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source face handle. + * + * palette_index :: + * The palette index. + * + * @output: + * apalette :: + * An array of color entries for a palette with index `palette_index`, + * having `num_palette_entries` elements (as found in the + * `FT_Palette_Data` structure). If `apalette` is set to `NULL`, no + * array gets returned (and no color entries can be modified). + * + * In case the font doesn't support color palettes, `NULL` is returned. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The array pointed to by `apalette_entries` is owned and managed by + * FreeType. + * + * This function always returns an error if the config macro + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_COLOR_LAYERS` is not defined in `ftoption.h`. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Palette_Select( FT_Face face, + FT_UShort palette_index, + FT_Color* *apalette ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Palette_Set_Foreground_Color + * + * @description: + * 'COLR' uses palette index 0xFFFF to indicate a 'text foreground + * color'. This function sets this value. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source face handle. + * + * foreground_color :: + * An `FT_Color` structure to define the text foreground color. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If this function isn't called, the text foreground color is set to + * white opaque (BGRA value 0xFFFFFFFF) if + * @FT_PALETTE_FOR_DARK_BACKGROUND is present for the current palette, + * and black opaque (BGRA value 0x000000FF) otherwise, including the case + * that no palette types are available in the 'CPAL' table. + * + * This function always returns an error if the config macro + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_COLOR_LAYERS` is not defined in `ftoption.h`. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Palette_Set_Foreground_Color( FT_Face face, + FT_Color foreground_color ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTCOLOR_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftdriver.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftdriver.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..497bde9 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftdriver.h @@ -0,0 +1,1232 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftdriver.h + * + * FreeType API for controlling driver modules (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2017-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTDRIVER_H_ +#define FTDRIVER_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H +#include FT_PARAMETER_TAGS_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * auto_hinter + * + * @title: + * The auto-hinter + * + * @abstract: + * Controlling the auto-hinting module. + * + * @description: + * While FreeType's auto-hinter doesn't expose API functions by itself, + * it is possible to control its behaviour with @FT_Property_Set and + * @FT_Property_Get. The following lists the available properties + * together with the necessary macros and structures. + * + * Note that the auto-hinter's module name is 'autofitter' for historical + * reasons. + * + * Available properties are @increase-x-height, @no-stem-darkening + * (experimental), @darkening-parameters (experimental), @warping + * (experimental), @glyph-to-script-map (experimental), @fallback-script + * (experimental), and @default-script (experimental), as documented in + * the @properties section. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * cff_driver + * + * @title: + * The CFF driver + * + * @abstract: + * Controlling the CFF driver module. + * + * @description: + * While FreeType's CFF driver doesn't expose API functions by itself, it + * is possible to control its behaviour with @FT_Property_Set and + * @FT_Property_Get. + * + * The CFF driver's module name is 'cff'. + * + * Available properties are @hinting-engine, @no-stem-darkening, + * @darkening-parameters, and @random-seed, as documented in the + * @properties section. + * + * + * **Hinting and antialiasing principles of the new engine** + * + * The rasterizer is positioning horizontal features (e.g., ascender + * height & x-height, or crossbars) on the pixel grid and minimizing the + * amount of antialiasing applied to them, while placing vertical + * features (vertical stems) on the pixel grid without hinting, thus + * representing the stem position and weight accurately. Sometimes the + * vertical stems may be only partially black. In this context, + * 'antialiasing' means that stems are not positioned exactly on pixel + * borders, causing a fuzzy appearance. + * + * There are two principles behind this approach. + * + * 1) No hinting in the horizontal direction: Unlike 'superhinted' + * TrueType, which changes glyph widths to accommodate regular + * inter-glyph spacing, Adobe's approach is 'faithful to the design' in + * representing both the glyph width and the inter-glyph spacing designed + * for the font. This makes the screen display as close as it can be to + * the result one would get with infinite resolution, while preserving + * what is considered the key characteristics of each glyph. Note that + * the distances between unhinted and grid-fitted positions at small + * sizes are comparable to kerning values and thus would be noticeable + * (and distracting) while reading if hinting were applied. + * + * One of the reasons to not hint horizontally is antialiasing for LCD + * screens: The pixel geometry of modern displays supplies three vertical + * subpixels as the eye moves horizontally across each visible pixel. On + * devices where we can be certain this characteristic is present a + * rasterizer can take advantage of the subpixels to add increments of + * weight. In Western writing systems this turns out to be the more + * critical direction anyway; the weights and spacing of vertical stems + * (see above) are central to Armenian, Cyrillic, Greek, and Latin type + * designs. Even when the rasterizer uses greyscale antialiasing instead + * of color (a necessary compromise when one doesn't know the screen + * characteristics), the unhinted vertical features preserve the design's + * weight and spacing much better than aliased type would. + * + * 2) Alignment in the vertical direction: Weights and spacing along the + * y~axis are less critical; what is much more important is the visual + * alignment of related features (like cap-height and x-height). The + * sense of alignment for these is enhanced by the sharpness of grid-fit + * edges, while the cruder vertical resolution (full pixels instead of + * 1/3 pixels) is less of a problem. + * + * On the technical side, horizontal alignment zones for ascender, + * x-height, and other important height values (traditionally called + * 'blue zones') as defined in the font are positioned independently, + * each being rounded to the nearest pixel edge, taking care of overshoot + * suppression at small sizes, stem darkening, and scaling. + * + * Hstems (this is, hint values defined in the font to help align + * horizontal features) that fall within a blue zone are said to be + * 'captured' and are aligned to that zone. Uncaptured stems are moved + * in one of four ways, top edge up or down, bottom edge up or down. + * Unless there are conflicting hstems, the smallest movement is taken to + * minimize distortion. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * pcf_driver + * + * @title: + * The PCF driver + * + * @abstract: + * Controlling the PCF driver module. + * + * @description: + * While FreeType's PCF driver doesn't expose API functions by itself, it + * is possible to control its behaviour with @FT_Property_Set and + * @FT_Property_Get. Right now, there is a single property + * @no-long-family-names available if FreeType is compiled with + * PCF_CONFIG_OPTION_LONG_FAMILY_NAMES. + * + * The PCF driver's module name is 'pcf'. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * t1_cid_driver + * + * @title: + * The Type 1 and CID drivers + * + * @abstract: + * Controlling the Type~1 and CID driver modules. + * + * @description: + * It is possible to control the behaviour of FreeType's Type~1 and + * Type~1 CID drivers with @FT_Property_Set and @FT_Property_Get. + * + * Behind the scenes, both drivers use the Adobe CFF engine for hinting; + * however, the used properties must be specified separately. + * + * The Type~1 driver's module name is 'type1'; the CID driver's module + * name is 't1cid'. + * + * Available properties are @hinting-engine, @no-stem-darkening, + * @darkening-parameters, and @random-seed, as documented in the + * @properties section. + * + * Please see the @cff_driver section for more details on the new hinting + * engine. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * tt_driver + * + * @title: + * The TrueType driver + * + * @abstract: + * Controlling the TrueType driver module. + * + * @description: + * While FreeType's TrueType driver doesn't expose API functions by + * itself, it is possible to control its behaviour with @FT_Property_Set + * and @FT_Property_Get. The following lists the available properties + * together with the necessary macros and structures. + * + * The TrueType driver's module name is 'truetype'. + * + * A single property @interpreter-version is available, as documented in + * the @properties section. + * + * We start with a list of definitions, kindly provided by Greg + * Hitchcock. + * + * _Bi-Level Rendering_ + * + * Monochromatic rendering, exclusively used in the early days of + * TrueType by both Apple and Microsoft. Microsoft's GDI interface + * supported hinting of the right-side bearing point, such that the + * advance width could be non-linear. Most often this was done to + * achieve some level of glyph symmetry. To enable reasonable + * performance (e.g., not having to run hinting on all glyphs just to get + * the widths) there was a bit in the head table indicating if the side + * bearing was hinted, and additional tables, 'hdmx' and 'LTSH', to cache + * hinting widths across multiple sizes and device aspect ratios. + * + * _Font Smoothing_ + * + * Microsoft's GDI implementation of anti-aliasing. Not traditional + * anti-aliasing as the outlines were hinted before the sampling. The + * widths matched the bi-level rendering. + * + * _ClearType Rendering_ + * + * Technique that uses physical subpixels to improve rendering on LCD + * (and other) displays. Because of the higher resolution, many methods + * of improving symmetry in glyphs through hinting the right-side bearing + * were no longer necessary. This lead to what GDI calls 'natural + * widths' ClearType, see + * http://rastertragedy.com/RTRCh4.htm#Sec21. Since hinting + * has extra resolution, most non-linearity went away, but it is still + * possible for hints to change the advance widths in this mode. + * + * _ClearType Compatible Widths_ + * + * One of the earliest challenges with ClearType was allowing the + * implementation in GDI to be selected without requiring all UI and + * documents to reflow. To address this, a compatible method of + * rendering ClearType was added where the font hints are executed once + * to determine the width in bi-level rendering, and then re-run in + * ClearType, with the difference in widths being absorbed in the font + * hints for ClearType (mostly in the white space of hints); see + * http://rastertragedy.com/RTRCh4.htm#Sec20. Somewhat by + * definition, compatible width ClearType allows for non-linear widths, + * but only when the bi-level version has non-linear widths. + * + * _ClearType Subpixel Positioning_ + * + * One of the nice benefits of ClearType is the ability to more crisply + * display fractional widths; unfortunately, the GDI model of integer + * bitmaps did not support this. However, the WPF and Direct Write + * frameworks do support fractional widths. DWrite calls this 'natural + * mode', not to be confused with GDI's 'natural widths'. Subpixel + * positioning, in the current implementation of Direct Write, + * unfortunately does not support hinted advance widths, see + * http://rastertragedy.com/RTRCh4.htm#Sec22. Note that the + * TrueType interpreter fully allows the advance width to be adjusted in + * this mode, just the DWrite client will ignore those changes. + * + * _ClearType Backward Compatibility_ + * + * This is a set of exceptions made in the TrueType interpreter to + * minimize hinting techniques that were problematic with the extra + * resolution of ClearType; see + * http://rastertragedy.com/RTRCh4.htm#Sec1 and + * https://www.microsoft.com/typography/cleartype/truetypecleartype.aspx. + * This technique is not to be confused with ClearType compatible widths. + * ClearType backward compatibility has no direct impact on changing + * advance widths, but there might be an indirect impact on disabling + * some deltas. This could be worked around in backward compatibility + * mode. + * + * _Native ClearType Mode_ + * + * (Not to be confused with 'natural widths'.) This mode removes all the + * exceptions in the TrueType interpreter when running with ClearType. + * Any issues on widths would still apply, though. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * properties + * + * @title: + * Driver properties + * + * @abstract: + * Controlling driver modules. + * + * @description: + * Driver modules can be controlled by setting and unsetting properties, + * using the functions @FT_Property_Set and @FT_Property_Get. This + * section documents the available properties, together with auxiliary + * macros and structures. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_HINTING_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of constants used for the @hinting-engine property to select + * the hinting engine for CFF, Type~1, and CID fonts. + * + * @values: + * FT_HINTING_FREETYPE :: + * Use the old FreeType hinting engine. + * + * FT_HINTING_ADOBE :: + * Use the hinting engine contributed by Adobe. + * + * @since: + * 2.9 + * + */ +#define FT_HINTING_FREETYPE 0 +#define FT_HINTING_ADOBE 1 + + /* these constants (introduced in 2.4.12) are deprecated */ +#define FT_CFF_HINTING_FREETYPE FT_HINTING_FREETYPE +#define FT_CFF_HINTING_ADOBE FT_HINTING_ADOBE + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * hinting-engine + * + * @description: + * Thanks to Adobe, which contributed a new hinting (and parsing) engine, + * an application can select between 'freetype' and 'adobe' if compiled + * with `CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE`. If this configuration macro + * isn't defined, 'hinting-engine' does nothing. + * + * The same holds for the Type~1 and CID modules if compiled with + * `T1_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE`. + * + * For the 'cff' module, the default engine is 'freetype' if + * `CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE` is defined, and 'adobe' otherwise. + * + * For both the 'type1' and 't1cid' modules, the default engine is + * 'freetype' if `T1_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE` is defined, and 'adobe' + * otherwise. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * This property can be set via the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable (using values 'adobe' or 'freetype'). + * + * @example: + * The following example code demonstrates how to select Adobe's hinting + * engine for the 'cff' module (omitting the error handling). + * + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_UInt hinting_engine = FT_HINTING_ADOBE; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "cff", + * "hinting-engine", &hinting_engine ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.4.12 (for 'cff' module) + * + * 2.9 (for 'type1' and 't1cid' modules) + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * no-stem-darkening + * + * @description: + * All glyphs that pass through the auto-hinter will be emboldened unless + * this property is set to TRUE. The same is true for the CFF, Type~1, + * and CID font modules if the 'Adobe' engine is selected (which is the + * default). + * + * Stem darkening emboldens glyphs at smaller sizes to make them more + * readable on common low-DPI screens when using linear alpha blending + * and gamma correction, see @FT_Render_Glyph. When not using linear + * alpha blending and gamma correction, glyphs will appear heavy and + * fuzzy! + * + * Gamma correction essentially lightens fonts since shades of grey are + * shifted to higher pixel values (=~higher brightness) to match the + * original intention to the reality of our screens. The side-effect is + * that glyphs 'thin out'. Mac OS~X and Adobe's proprietary font + * rendering library implement a counter-measure: stem darkening at + * smaller sizes where shades of gray dominate. By emboldening a glyph + * slightly in relation to its pixel size, individual pixels get higher + * coverage of filled-in outlines and are therefore 'blacker'. This + * counteracts the 'thinning out' of glyphs, making text remain readable + * at smaller sizes. + * + * By default, the Adobe engines for CFF, Type~1, and CID fonts darken + * stems at smaller sizes, regardless of hinting, to enhance contrast. + * Setting this property, stem darkening gets switched off. + * + * For the auto-hinter, stem-darkening is experimental currently and thus + * switched off by default (this is, `no-stem-darkening` is set to TRUE + * by default). Total consistency with the CFF driver is not achieved + * right now because the emboldening method differs and glyphs must be + * scaled down on the Y-axis to keep outline points inside their + * precomputed blue zones. The smaller the size (especially 9ppem and + * down), the higher the loss of emboldening versus the CFF driver. + * + * Note that stem darkening is never applied if @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE is set. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * This property can be set via the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable (using values 1 and 0 for 'on' and 'off', respectively). It + * can also be set per face using @FT_Face_Properties with + * @FT_PARAM_TAG_STEM_DARKENING. + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_Bool no_stem_darkening = TRUE; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "cff", + * "no-stem-darkening", &no_stem_darkening ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.4.12 (for 'cff' module) + * + * 2.6.2 (for 'autofitter' module) + * + * 2.9 (for 'type1' and 't1cid' modules) + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * darkening-parameters + * + * @description: + * By default, the Adobe hinting engine, as used by the CFF, Type~1, and + * CID font drivers, darkens stems as follows (if the `no-stem-darkening` + * property isn't set): + * + * ``` + * stem width <= 0.5px: darkening amount = 0.4px + * stem width = 1px: darkening amount = 0.275px + * stem width = 1.667px: darkening amount = 0.275px + * stem width >= 2.333px: darkening amount = 0px + * ``` + * + * and piecewise linear in-between. At configuration time, these four + * control points can be set with the macro + * `CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_DARKENING_PARAMETERS`; the CFF, Type~1, and CID + * drivers share these values. At runtime, the control points can be + * changed using the `darkening-parameters` property (see the example + * below that demonstrates this for the Type~1 driver). + * + * The x~values give the stem width, and the y~values the darkening + * amount. The unit is 1000th of pixels. All coordinate values must be + * positive; the x~values must be monotonically increasing; the y~values + * must be monotonically decreasing and smaller than or equal to 500 + * (corresponding to half a pixel); the slope of each linear piece must + * be shallower than -1 (e.g., -.4). + * + * The auto-hinter provides this property, too, as an experimental + * feature. See @no-stem-darkening for more. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * This property can be set via the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable, using eight comma-separated integers without spaces. Here + * the above example, using `\` to break the line for readability. + * + * ``` + * FREETYPE_PROPERTIES=\ + * type1:darkening-parameters=500,300,1000,200,1500,100,2000,0 + * ``` + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_Int darken_params[8] = { 500, 300, // x1, y1 + * 1000, 200, // x2, y2 + * 1500, 100, // x3, y3 + * 2000, 0 }; // x4, y4 + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "type1", + * "darkening-parameters", darken_params ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.5.1 (for 'cff' module) + * + * 2.6.2 (for 'autofitter' module) + * + * 2.9 (for 'type1' and 't1cid' modules) + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * random-seed + * + * @description: + * By default, the seed value for the CFF 'random' operator and the + * similar '0 28 callothersubr pop' command for the Type~1 and CID + * drivers is set to a random value. However, mainly for debugging + * purposes, it is often necessary to use a known value as a seed so that + * the pseudo-random number sequences generated by 'random' are + * repeatable. + * + * The `random-seed` property does that. Its argument is a signed 32bit + * integer; if the value is zero or negative, the seed given by the + * `intitialRandomSeed` private DICT operator in a CFF file gets used (or + * a default value if there is no such operator). If the value is + * positive, use it instead of `initialRandomSeed`, which is consequently + * ignored. + * + * @note: + * This property can be set via the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable. It can also be set per face using @FT_Face_Properties with + * @FT_PARAM_TAG_RANDOM_SEED. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 (for 'cff' module) + * + * 2.9 (for 'type1' and 't1cid' modules) + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * no-long-family-names + * + * @description: + * If `PCF_CONFIG_OPTION_LONG_FAMILY_NAMES` is active while compiling + * FreeType, the PCF driver constructs long family names. + * + * There are many PCF fonts just called 'Fixed' which look completely + * different, and which have nothing to do with each other. When + * selecting 'Fixed' in KDE or Gnome one gets results that appear rather + * random, the style changes often if one changes the size and one cannot + * select some fonts at all. The improve this situation, the PCF module + * prepends the foundry name (plus a space) to the family name. It also + * checks whether there are 'wide' characters; all put together, family + * names like 'Sony Fixed' or 'Misc Fixed Wide' are constructed. + * + * If `no-long-family-names` is set, this feature gets switched off. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * This property can be set via the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable (using values 1 and 0 for 'on' and 'off', respectively). + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_Bool no_long_family_names = TRUE; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "pcf", + * "no-long-family-names", + * &no_long_family_names ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of constants used for the @interpreter-version property to + * select the hinting engine for Truetype fonts. + * + * The numeric value in the constant names represents the version number + * as returned by the 'GETINFO' bytecode instruction. + * + * @values: + * TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_35 :: + * Version~35 corresponds to MS rasterizer v.1.7 as used e.g. in + * Windows~98; only grayscale and B/W rasterizing is supported. + * + * TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_38 :: + * Version~38 corresponds to MS rasterizer v.1.9; it is roughly + * equivalent to the hinting provided by DirectWrite ClearType (as can + * be found, for example, in the Internet Explorer~9 running on + * Windows~7). It is used in FreeType to select the 'Infinality' + * subpixel hinting code. The code may be removed in a future version. + * + * TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_40 :: + * Version~40 corresponds to MS rasterizer v.2.1; it is roughly + * equivalent to the hinting provided by DirectWrite ClearType (as can + * be found, for example, in Microsoft's Edge Browser on Windows~10). + * It is used in FreeType to select the 'minimal' subpixel hinting + * code, a stripped-down and higher performance version of the + * 'Infinality' code. + * + * @note: + * This property controls the behaviour of the bytecode interpreter and + * thus how outlines get hinted. It does **not** control how glyph get + * rasterized! In particular, it does not control subpixel color + * filtering. + * + * If FreeType has not been compiled with the configuration option + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING`, selecting version~38 or~40 causes + * an `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` error. + * + * Depending on the graphics framework, Microsoft uses different bytecode + * and rendering engines. As a consequence, the version numbers returned + * by a call to the 'GETINFO' bytecode instruction are more convoluted + * than desired. + * + * Here are two tables that try to shed some light on the possible values + * for the MS rasterizer engine, together with the additional features + * introduced by it. + * + * ``` + * GETINFO framework version feature + * ------------------------------------------------------------------- + * 3 GDI (Win 3.1), v1.0 16-bit, first version + * TrueImage + * 33 GDI (Win NT 3.1), v1.5 32-bit + * HP Laserjet + * 34 GDI (Win 95) v1.6 font smoothing, + * new SCANTYPE opcode + * 35 GDI (Win 98/2000) v1.7 (UN)SCALED_COMPONENT_OFFSET + * bits in composite glyphs + * 36 MGDI (Win CE 2) v1.6+ classic ClearType + * 37 GDI (XP and later), v1.8 ClearType + * GDI+ old (before Vista) + * 38 GDI+ old (Vista, Win 7), v1.9 subpixel ClearType, + * WPF Y-direction ClearType, + * additional error checking + * 39 DWrite (before Win 8) v2.0 subpixel ClearType flags + * in GETINFO opcode, + * bug fixes + * 40 GDI+ (after Win 7), v2.1 Y-direction ClearType flag + * DWrite (Win 8) in GETINFO opcode, + * Gray ClearType + * ``` + * + * The 'version' field gives a rough orientation only, since some + * applications provided certain features much earlier (as an example, + * Microsoft Reader used subpixel and Y-direction ClearType already in + * Windows 2000). Similarly, updates to a given framework might include + * improved hinting support. + * + * ``` + * version sampling rendering comment + * x y x y + * -------------------------------------------------------------- + * v1.0 normal normal B/W B/W bi-level + * v1.6 high high gray gray grayscale + * v1.8 high normal color-filter B/W (GDI) ClearType + * v1.9 high high color-filter gray Color ClearType + * v2.1 high normal gray B/W Gray ClearType + * v2.1 high high gray gray Gray ClearType + * ``` + * + * Color and Gray ClearType are the two available variants of + * 'Y-direction ClearType', meaning grayscale rasterization along the + * Y-direction; the name used in the TrueType specification for this + * feature is 'symmetric smoothing'. 'Classic ClearType' is the original + * algorithm used before introducing a modified version in Win~XP. + * Another name for v1.6's grayscale rendering is 'font smoothing', and + * 'Color ClearType' is sometimes also called 'DWrite ClearType'. To + * differentiate between today's Color ClearType and the earlier + * ClearType variant with B/W rendering along the vertical axis, the + * latter is sometimes called 'GDI ClearType'. + * + * 'Normal' and 'high' sampling describe the (virtual) resolution to + * access the rasterized outline after the hinting process. 'Normal' + * means 1 sample per grid line (i.e., B/W). In the current Microsoft + * implementation, 'high' means an extra virtual resolution of 16x16 (or + * 16x1) grid lines per pixel for bytecode instructions like 'MIRP'. + * After hinting, these 16 grid lines are mapped to 6x5 (or 6x1) grid + * lines for color filtering if Color ClearType is activated. + * + * Note that 'Gray ClearType' is essentially the same as v1.6's grayscale + * rendering. However, the GETINFO instruction handles it differently: + * v1.6 returns bit~12 (hinting for grayscale), while v2.1 returns + * bits~13 (hinting for ClearType), 18 (symmetrical smoothing), and~19 + * (Gray ClearType). Also, this mode respects bits 2 and~3 for the + * version~1 gasp table exclusively (like Color ClearType), while v1.6 + * only respects the values of version~0 (bits 0 and~1). + * + * Keep in mind that the features of the above interpreter versions might + * not map exactly to FreeType features or behavior because it is a + * fundamentally different library with different internals. + * + */ +#define TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_35 35 +#define TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_38 38 +#define TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_40 40 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * interpreter-version + * + * @description: + * Currently, three versions are available, two representing the bytecode + * interpreter with subpixel hinting support (old 'Infinality' code and + * new stripped-down and higher performance 'minimal' code) and one + * without, respectively. The default is subpixel support if + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_HINTING` is defined, and no subpixel + * support otherwise (since it isn't available then). + * + * If subpixel hinting is on, many TrueType bytecode instructions behave + * differently compared to B/W or grayscale rendering (except if 'native + * ClearType' is selected by the font). Microsoft's main idea is to + * render at a much increased horizontal resolution, then sampling down + * the created output to subpixel precision. However, many older fonts + * are not suited to this and must be specially taken care of by applying + * (hardcoded) tweaks in Microsoft's interpreter. + * + * Details on subpixel hinting and some of the necessary tweaks can be + * found in Greg Hitchcock's whitepaper at + * 'https://www.microsoft.com/typography/cleartype/truetypecleartype.aspx'. + * Note that FreeType currently doesn't really 'subpixel hint' (6x1, 6x2, + * or 6x5 supersampling) like discussed in the paper. Depending on the + * chosen interpreter, it simply ignores instructions on vertical stems + * to arrive at very similar results. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * This property can be set via the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable (using values '35', '38', or '40'). + * + * @example: + * The following example code demonstrates how to deactivate subpixel + * hinting (omitting the error handling). + * + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_Face face; + * FT_UInt interpreter_version = TT_INTERPRETER_VERSION_35; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "truetype", + * "interpreter-version", + * &interpreter_version ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.5 + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * glyph-to-script-map + * + * @description: + * **Experimental only** + * + * The auto-hinter provides various script modules to hint glyphs. + * Examples of supported scripts are Latin or CJK. Before a glyph is + * auto-hinted, the Unicode character map of the font gets examined, and + * the script is then determined based on Unicode character ranges, see + * below. + * + * OpenType fonts, however, often provide much more glyphs than character + * codes (small caps, superscripts, ligatures, swashes, etc.), to be + * controlled by so-called 'features'. Handling OpenType features can be + * quite complicated and thus needs a separate library on top of + * FreeType. + * + * The mapping between glyph indices and scripts (in the auto-hinter + * sense, see the @FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_XXX values) is stored as an array + * with `num_glyphs` elements, as found in the font's @FT_Face structure. + * The `glyph-to-script-map` property returns a pointer to this array, + * which can be modified as needed. Note that the modification should + * happen before the first glyph gets processed by the auto-hinter so + * that the global analysis of the font shapes actually uses the modified + * mapping. + * + * @example: + * The following example code demonstrates how to access it (omitting the + * error handling). + * + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_Face face; + * FT_Prop_GlyphToScriptMap prop; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * FT_New_Face( library, "foo.ttf", 0, &face ); + * + * prop.face = face; + * + * FT_Property_Get( library, "autofitter", + * "glyph-to-script-map", &prop ); + * + * // adjust `prop.map' as needed right here + * + * FT_Load_Glyph( face, ..., FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.4.11 + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_XXX + * + * @description: + * **Experimental only** + * + * A list of constants used for the @glyph-to-script-map property to + * specify the script submodule the auto-hinter should use for hinting a + * particular glyph. + * + * @values: + * FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_NONE :: + * Don't auto-hint this glyph. + * + * FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_LATIN :: + * Apply the latin auto-hinter. For the auto-hinter, 'latin' is a very + * broad term, including Cyrillic and Greek also since characters from + * those scripts share the same design constraints. + * + * By default, characters from the following Unicode ranges are + * assigned to this submodule. + * + * ``` + * U+0020 - U+007F // Basic Latin (no control characters) + * U+00A0 - U+00FF // Latin-1 Supplement (no control characters) + * U+0100 - U+017F // Latin Extended-A + * U+0180 - U+024F // Latin Extended-B + * U+0250 - U+02AF // IPA Extensions + * U+02B0 - U+02FF // Spacing Modifier Letters + * U+0300 - U+036F // Combining Diacritical Marks + * U+0370 - U+03FF // Greek and Coptic + * U+0400 - U+04FF // Cyrillic + * U+0500 - U+052F // Cyrillic Supplement + * U+1D00 - U+1D7F // Phonetic Extensions + * U+1D80 - U+1DBF // Phonetic Extensions Supplement + * U+1DC0 - U+1DFF // Combining Diacritical Marks Supplement + * U+1E00 - U+1EFF // Latin Extended Additional + * U+1F00 - U+1FFF // Greek Extended + * U+2000 - U+206F // General Punctuation + * U+2070 - U+209F // Superscripts and Subscripts + * U+20A0 - U+20CF // Currency Symbols + * U+2150 - U+218F // Number Forms + * U+2460 - U+24FF // Enclosed Alphanumerics + * U+2C60 - U+2C7F // Latin Extended-C + * U+2DE0 - U+2DFF // Cyrillic Extended-A + * U+2E00 - U+2E7F // Supplemental Punctuation + * U+A640 - U+A69F // Cyrillic Extended-B + * U+A720 - U+A7FF // Latin Extended-D + * U+FB00 - U+FB06 // Alphab. Present. Forms (Latin Ligatures) + * U+1D400 - U+1D7FF // Mathematical Alphanumeric Symbols + * U+1F100 - U+1F1FF // Enclosed Alphanumeric Supplement + * ``` + * + * FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_CJK :: + * Apply the CJK auto-hinter, covering Chinese, Japanese, Korean, old + * Vietnamese, and some other scripts. + * + * By default, characters from the following Unicode ranges are + * assigned to this submodule. + * + * ``` + * U+1100 - U+11FF // Hangul Jamo + * U+2E80 - U+2EFF // CJK Radicals Supplement + * U+2F00 - U+2FDF // Kangxi Radicals + * U+2FF0 - U+2FFF // Ideographic Description Characters + * U+3000 - U+303F // CJK Symbols and Punctuation + * U+3040 - U+309F // Hiragana + * U+30A0 - U+30FF // Katakana + * U+3100 - U+312F // Bopomofo + * U+3130 - U+318F // Hangul Compatibility Jamo + * U+3190 - U+319F // Kanbun + * U+31A0 - U+31BF // Bopomofo Extended + * U+31C0 - U+31EF // CJK Strokes + * U+31F0 - U+31FF // Katakana Phonetic Extensions + * U+3200 - U+32FF // Enclosed CJK Letters and Months + * U+3300 - U+33FF // CJK Compatibility + * U+3400 - U+4DBF // CJK Unified Ideographs Extension A + * U+4DC0 - U+4DFF // Yijing Hexagram Symbols + * U+4E00 - U+9FFF // CJK Unified Ideographs + * U+A960 - U+A97F // Hangul Jamo Extended-A + * U+AC00 - U+D7AF // Hangul Syllables + * U+D7B0 - U+D7FF // Hangul Jamo Extended-B + * U+F900 - U+FAFF // CJK Compatibility Ideographs + * U+FE10 - U+FE1F // Vertical forms + * U+FE30 - U+FE4F // CJK Compatibility Forms + * U+FF00 - U+FFEF // Halfwidth and Fullwidth Forms + * U+1B000 - U+1B0FF // Kana Supplement + * U+1D300 - U+1D35F // Tai Xuan Hing Symbols + * U+1F200 - U+1F2FF // Enclosed Ideographic Supplement + * U+20000 - U+2A6DF // CJK Unified Ideographs Extension B + * U+2A700 - U+2B73F // CJK Unified Ideographs Extension C + * U+2B740 - U+2B81F // CJK Unified Ideographs Extension D + * U+2F800 - U+2FA1F // CJK Compatibility Ideographs Supplement + * ``` + * + * FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_INDIC :: + * Apply the indic auto-hinter, covering all major scripts from the + * Indian sub-continent and some other related scripts like Thai, Lao, + * or Tibetan. + * + * By default, characters from the following Unicode ranges are + * assigned to this submodule. + * + * ``` + * U+0900 - U+0DFF // Indic Range + * U+0F00 - U+0FFF // Tibetan + * U+1900 - U+194F // Limbu + * U+1B80 - U+1BBF // Sundanese + * U+A800 - U+A82F // Syloti Nagri + * U+ABC0 - U+ABFF // Meetei Mayek + * U+11800 - U+118DF // Sharada + * ``` + * + * Note that currently Indic support is rudimentary only, missing blue + * zone support. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.11 + * + */ +#define FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_NONE 0 +#define FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_LATIN 1 +#define FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_CJK 2 +#define FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_INDIC 3 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Prop_GlyphToScriptMap + * + * @description: + * **Experimental only** + * + * The data exchange structure for the @glyph-to-script-map property. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.11 + * + */ + typedef struct FT_Prop_GlyphToScriptMap_ + { + FT_Face face; + FT_UShort* map; + + } FT_Prop_GlyphToScriptMap; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * fallback-script + * + * @description: + * **Experimental only** + * + * If no auto-hinter script module can be assigned to a glyph, a fallback + * script gets assigned to it (see also the @glyph-to-script-map + * property). By default, this is @FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_CJK. Using the + * `fallback-script` property, this fallback value can be changed. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * It's important to use the right timing for changing this value: The + * creation of the glyph-to-script map that eventually uses the fallback + * script value gets triggered either by setting or reading a + * face-specific property like @glyph-to-script-map, or by auto-hinting + * any glyph from that face. In particular, if you have already created + * an @FT_Face structure but not loaded any glyph (using the + * auto-hinter), a change of the fallback script will affect this face. + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_UInt fallback_script = FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_NONE; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "autofitter", + * "fallback-script", &fallback_script ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.4.11 + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * default-script + * + * @description: + * **Experimental only** + * + * If FreeType gets compiled with `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_HARFBUZZ` to make + * the HarfBuzz library access OpenType features for getting better glyph + * coverages, this property sets the (auto-fitter) script to be used for + * the default (OpenType) script data of a font's GSUB table. Features + * for the default script are intended for all scripts not explicitly + * handled in GSUB; an example is a 'dlig' feature, containing the + * combination of the characters 'T', 'E', and 'L' to form a 'TEL' + * ligature. + * + * By default, this is @FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_LATIN. Using the + * `default-script` property, this default value can be changed. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * It's important to use the right timing for changing this value: The + * creation of the glyph-to-script map that eventually uses the default + * script value gets triggered either by setting or reading a + * face-specific property like @glyph-to-script-map, or by auto-hinting + * any glyph from that face. In particular, if you have already created + * an @FT_Face structure but not loaded any glyph (using the + * auto-hinter), a change of the default script will affect this face. + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_UInt default_script = FT_AUTOHINTER_SCRIPT_NONE; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "autofitter", + * "default-script", &default_script ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.5.3 + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * increase-x-height + * + * @description: + * For ppem values in the range 6~<= ppem <= `increase-x-height`, round + * up the font's x~height much more often than normally. If the value is + * set to~0, which is the default, this feature is switched off. Use + * this property to improve the legibility of small font sizes if + * necessary. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * Set this value right after calling @FT_Set_Char_Size, but before + * loading any glyph (using the auto-hinter). + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_Face face; + * FT_Prop_IncreaseXHeight prop; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * FT_New_Face( library, "foo.ttf", 0, &face ); + * FT_Set_Char_Size( face, 10 * 64, 0, 72, 0 ); + * + * prop.face = face; + * prop.limit = 14; + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "autofitter", + * "increase-x-height", &prop ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.4.11 + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Prop_IncreaseXHeight + * + * @description: + * The data exchange structure for the @increase-x-height property. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_Prop_IncreaseXHeight_ + { + FT_Face face; + FT_UInt limit; + + } FT_Prop_IncreaseXHeight; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @property: + * warping + * + * @description: + * **Experimental only** + * + * If FreeType gets compiled with option `AF_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_WARPER` to + * activate the warp hinting code in the auto-hinter, this property + * switches warping on and off. + * + * Warping only works in 'normal' auto-hinting mode replacing it. The + * idea of the code is to slightly scale and shift a glyph along the + * non-hinted dimension (which is usually the horizontal axis) so that as + * much of its segments are aligned (more or less) to the grid. To find + * out a glyph's optimal scaling and shifting value, various parameter + * combinations are tried and scored. + * + * By default, warping is off. + * + * @note: + * This property can be used with @FT_Property_Get also. + * + * This property can be set via the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable (using values 1 and 0 for 'on' and 'off', respectively). + * + * The warping code can also change advance widths. Have a look at the + * `lsb_delta` and `rsb_delta` fields in the @FT_GlyphSlotRec structure + * for details on improving inter-glyph distances while rendering. + * + * Since warping is a global property of the auto-hinter it is best to + * change its value before rendering any face. Otherwise, you should + * reload all faces that get auto-hinted in 'normal' hinting mode. + * + * @example: + * This example shows how to switch on warping (omitting the error + * handling). + * + * ``` + * FT_Library library; + * FT_Bool warping = 1; + * + * + * FT_Init_FreeType( &library ); + * + * FT_Property_Set( library, "autofitter", "warping", &warping ); + * ``` + * + * @since: + * 2.6 + * + */ + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* FTDRIVER_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fterrdef.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fterrdef.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9bc7dc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fterrdef.h @@ -0,0 +1,279 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * fterrdef.h + * + * FreeType error codes (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * error_code_values + * + * @title: + * Error Code Values + * + * @abstract: + * All possible error codes returned by FreeType functions. + * + * @description: + * The list below is taken verbatim from the file `fterrdef.h` (loaded + * automatically by including `FT_FREETYPE_H`). The first argument of the + * `FT_ERROR_DEF_` macro is the error label; by default, the prefix + * `FT_Err_` gets added so that you get error names like + * `FT_Err_Cannot_Open_Resource`. The second argument is the error code, + * and the last argument an error string, which is not used by FreeType. + * + * Within your application you should **only** use error names and + * **never** its numeric values! The latter might (and actually do) + * change in forthcoming FreeType versions. + * + * Macro `FT_NOERRORDEF_` defines `FT_Err_Ok`, which is always zero. See + * the 'Error Enumerations' subsection how to automatically generate a + * list of error strings. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Err_XXX + * + */ + + /* generic errors */ + + FT_NOERRORDEF_( Ok, 0x00, + "no error" ) + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Cannot_Open_Resource, 0x01, + "cannot open resource" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Unknown_File_Format, 0x02, + "unknown file format" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_File_Format, 0x03, + "broken file" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Version, 0x04, + "invalid FreeType version" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Lower_Module_Version, 0x05, + "module version is too low" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Argument, 0x06, + "invalid argument" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Unimplemented_Feature, 0x07, + "unimplemented feature" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Table, 0x08, + "broken table" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Offset, 0x09, + "broken offset within table" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Array_Too_Large, 0x0A, + "array allocation size too large" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Module, 0x0B, + "missing module" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Property, 0x0C, + "missing property" ) + + /* glyph/character errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Glyph_Index, 0x10, + "invalid glyph index" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Character_Code, 0x11, + "invalid character code" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Glyph_Format, 0x12, + "unsupported glyph image format" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Cannot_Render_Glyph, 0x13, + "cannot render this glyph format" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Outline, 0x14, + "invalid outline" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Composite, 0x15, + "invalid composite glyph" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Too_Many_Hints, 0x16, + "too many hints" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Pixel_Size, 0x17, + "invalid pixel size" ) + + /* handle errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Handle, 0x20, + "invalid object handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Library_Handle, 0x21, + "invalid library handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Driver_Handle, 0x22, + "invalid module handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Face_Handle, 0x23, + "invalid face handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Size_Handle, 0x24, + "invalid size handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Slot_Handle, 0x25, + "invalid glyph slot handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_CharMap_Handle, 0x26, + "invalid charmap handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Cache_Handle, 0x27, + "invalid cache manager handle" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Stream_Handle, 0x28, + "invalid stream handle" ) + + /* driver errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Too_Many_Drivers, 0x30, + "too many modules" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Too_Many_Extensions, 0x31, + "too many extensions" ) + + /* memory errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Out_Of_Memory, 0x40, + "out of memory" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Unlisted_Object, 0x41, + "unlisted object" ) + + /* stream errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Cannot_Open_Stream, 0x51, + "cannot open stream" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Stream_Seek, 0x52, + "invalid stream seek" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Stream_Skip, 0x53, + "invalid stream skip" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Stream_Read, 0x54, + "invalid stream read" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Stream_Operation, 0x55, + "invalid stream operation" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Frame_Operation, 0x56, + "invalid frame operation" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Nested_Frame_Access, 0x57, + "nested frame access" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Frame_Read, 0x58, + "invalid frame read" ) + + /* raster errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Raster_Uninitialized, 0x60, + "raster uninitialized" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Raster_Corrupted, 0x61, + "raster corrupted" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Raster_Overflow, 0x62, + "raster overflow" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Raster_Negative_Height, 0x63, + "negative height while rastering" ) + + /* cache errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Too_Many_Caches, 0x70, + "too many registered caches" ) + + /* TrueType and SFNT errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Opcode, 0x80, + "invalid opcode" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Too_Few_Arguments, 0x81, + "too few arguments" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Stack_Overflow, 0x82, + "stack overflow" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Code_Overflow, 0x83, + "code overflow" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Bad_Argument, 0x84, + "bad argument" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Divide_By_Zero, 0x85, + "division by zero" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Reference, 0x86, + "invalid reference" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Debug_OpCode, 0x87, + "found debug opcode" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( ENDF_In_Exec_Stream, 0x88, + "found ENDF opcode in execution stream" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Nested_DEFS, 0x89, + "nested DEFS" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_CodeRange, 0x8A, + "invalid code range" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Execution_Too_Long, 0x8B, + "execution context too long" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Too_Many_Function_Defs, 0x8C, + "too many function definitions" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Too_Many_Instruction_Defs, 0x8D, + "too many instruction definitions" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Table_Missing, 0x8E, + "SFNT font table missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Horiz_Header_Missing, 0x8F, + "horizontal header (hhea) table missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Locations_Missing, 0x90, + "locations (loca) table missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Name_Table_Missing, 0x91, + "name table missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( CMap_Table_Missing, 0x92, + "character map (cmap) table missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Hmtx_Table_Missing, 0x93, + "horizontal metrics (hmtx) table missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Post_Table_Missing, 0x94, + "PostScript (post) table missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Horiz_Metrics, 0x95, + "invalid horizontal metrics" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_CharMap_Format, 0x96, + "invalid character map (cmap) format" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_PPem, 0x97, + "invalid ppem value" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Vert_Metrics, 0x98, + "invalid vertical metrics" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Could_Not_Find_Context, 0x99, + "could not find context" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Post_Table_Format, 0x9A, + "invalid PostScript (post) table format" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Invalid_Post_Table, 0x9B, + "invalid PostScript (post) table" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( DEF_In_Glyf_Bytecode, 0x9C, + "found FDEF or IDEF opcode in glyf bytecode" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Bitmap, 0x9D, + "missing bitmap in strike" ) + + /* CFF, CID, and Type 1 errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Syntax_Error, 0xA0, + "opcode syntax error" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Stack_Underflow, 0xA1, + "argument stack underflow" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Ignore, 0xA2, + "ignore" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( No_Unicode_Glyph_Name, 0xA3, + "no Unicode glyph name found" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Glyph_Too_Big, 0xA4, + "glyph too big for hinting" ) + + /* BDF errors */ + + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Startfont_Field, 0xB0, + "`STARTFONT' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Font_Field, 0xB1, + "`FONT' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Size_Field, 0xB2, + "`SIZE' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Fontboundingbox_Field, 0xB3, + "`FONTBOUNDINGBOX' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Chars_Field, 0xB4, + "`CHARS' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Startchar_Field, 0xB5, + "`STARTCHAR' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Encoding_Field, 0xB6, + "`ENCODING' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Missing_Bbx_Field, 0xB7, + "`BBX' field missing" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Bbx_Too_Big, 0xB8, + "`BBX' too big" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Corrupted_Font_Header, 0xB9, + "Font header corrupted or missing fields" ) + FT_ERRORDEF_( Corrupted_Font_Glyphs, 0xBA, + "Font glyphs corrupted or missing fields" ) + + /* */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fterrors.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fterrors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..58f5a3e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fterrors.h @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * fterrors.h + * + * FreeType error code handling (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * error_enumerations + * + * @title: + * Error Enumerations + * + * @abstract: + * How to handle errors and error strings. + * + * @description: + * The header file `fterrors.h` (which is automatically included by + * `freetype.h` defines the handling of FreeType's enumeration + * constants. It can also be used to generate error message strings + * with a small macro trick explained below. + * + * **Error Formats** + * + * The configuration macro `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS` can be + * defined in `ftoption.h` in order to make the higher byte indicate the + * module where the error has happened (this is not compatible with + * standard builds of FreeType~2, however). See the file `ftmoderr.h` + * for more details. + * + * **Error Message Strings** + * + * Error definitions are set up with special macros that allow client + * applications to build a table of error message strings. The strings + * are not included in a normal build of FreeType~2 to save space (most + * client applications do not use them). + * + * To do so, you have to define the following macros before including + * this file. + * + * ``` + * FT_ERROR_START_LIST + * ``` + * + * This macro is called before anything else to define the start of the + * error list. It is followed by several `FT_ERROR_DEF` calls. + * + * ``` + * FT_ERROR_DEF( e, v, s ) + * ``` + * + * This macro is called to define one single error. 'e' is the error + * code identifier (e.g., `Invalid_Argument`), 'v' is the error's + * numerical value, and 's' is the corresponding error string. + * + * ``` + * FT_ERROR_END_LIST + * ``` + * + * This macro ends the list. + * + * Additionally, you have to undefine `FTERRORS_H_` before #including + * this file. + * + * Here is a simple example. + * + * ``` + * #undef FTERRORS_H_ + * #define FT_ERRORDEF( e, v, s ) { e, s }, + * #define FT_ERROR_START_LIST { + * #define FT_ERROR_END_LIST { 0, NULL } }; + * + * const struct + * { + * int err_code; + * const char* err_msg; + * } ft_errors[] = + * + * #include FT_ERRORS_H + * ``` + * + * An alternative to using an array is a switch statement. + * + * ``` + * #undef FTERRORS_H_ + * #define FT_ERROR_START_LIST switch ( error_code ) { + * #define FT_ERRORDEF( e, v, s ) case v: return s; + * #define FT_ERROR_END_LIST } + * ``` + * + * If you use `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS`, `error_code` should + * be replaced with `FT_ERROR_BASE(error_code)` in the last example. + */ + + /* */ + + /* In previous FreeType versions we used `__FTERRORS_H__`. However, */ + /* using two successive underscores in a non-system symbol name */ + /* violates the C (and C++) standard, so it was changed to the */ + /* current form. In spite of this, we have to make */ + /* */ + /* ``` */ + /* #undefine __FTERRORS_H__ */ + /* ``` */ + /* */ + /* work for backward compatibility. */ + /* */ +#if !( defined( FTERRORS_H_ ) && defined ( __FTERRORS_H__ ) ) +#define FTERRORS_H_ +#define __FTERRORS_H__ + + + /* include module base error codes */ +#include FT_MODULE_ERRORS_H + + + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** SETUP MACROS *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + + +#undef FT_NEED_EXTERN_C + + + /* FT_ERR_PREFIX is used as a prefix for error identifiers. */ + /* By default, we use `FT_Err_`. */ + /* */ +#ifndef FT_ERR_PREFIX +#define FT_ERR_PREFIX FT_Err_ +#endif + + + /* FT_ERR_BASE is used as the base for module-specific errors. */ + /* */ +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS + +#ifndef FT_ERR_BASE +#define FT_ERR_BASE FT_Mod_Err_Base +#endif + +#else + +#undef FT_ERR_BASE +#define FT_ERR_BASE 0 + +#endif /* FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS */ + + + /* If FT_ERRORDEF is not defined, we need to define a simple */ + /* enumeration type. */ + /* */ +#ifndef FT_ERRORDEF + +#define FT_INCLUDE_ERR_PROTOS + +#define FT_ERRORDEF( e, v, s ) e = v, +#define FT_ERROR_START_LIST enum { +#define FT_ERROR_END_LIST FT_ERR_CAT( FT_ERR_PREFIX, Max ) }; + +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_NEED_EXTERN_C + extern "C" { +#endif + +#endif /* !FT_ERRORDEF */ + + + /* this macro is used to define an error */ +#define FT_ERRORDEF_( e, v, s ) \ + FT_ERRORDEF( FT_ERR_CAT( FT_ERR_PREFIX, e ), v + FT_ERR_BASE, s ) + + /* this is only used for _Err_Ok, which must be 0! */ +#define FT_NOERRORDEF_( e, v, s ) \ + FT_ERRORDEF( FT_ERR_CAT( FT_ERR_PREFIX, e ), v, s ) + + +#ifdef FT_ERROR_START_LIST + FT_ERROR_START_LIST +#endif + + + /* now include the error codes */ +#include FT_ERROR_DEFINITIONS_H + + +#ifdef FT_ERROR_END_LIST + FT_ERROR_END_LIST +#endif + + + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** SIMPLE CLEANUP *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + +#ifdef FT_NEED_EXTERN_C + } +#endif + +#undef FT_ERROR_START_LIST +#undef FT_ERROR_END_LIST + +#undef FT_ERRORDEF +#undef FT_ERRORDEF_ +#undef FT_NOERRORDEF_ + +#undef FT_NEED_EXTERN_C +#undef FT_ERR_BASE + + /* FT_ERR_PREFIX is needed internally */ +#ifndef FT2_BUILD_LIBRARY +#undef FT_ERR_PREFIX +#endif + + /* FT_INCLUDE_ERR_PROTOS: Control if function prototypes should be */ + /* included with `#include FT_ERRORS_H'. This is */ + /* only true where `FT_ERRORDEF` is undefined. */ + /* FT_ERR_PROTOS_DEFINED: Actual multiple-inclusion protection of */ + /* `fterrors.h`. */ +#ifdef FT_INCLUDE_ERR_PROTOS +#undef FT_INCLUDE_ERR_PROTOS + +#ifndef FT_ERR_PROTOS_DEFINED +#define FT_ERR_PROTOS_DEFINED + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Error_String + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the description of a valid FreeType error code. + * + * @input: + * error_code :: + * A valid FreeType error code. + * + * @return: + * A C~string or `NULL`, if any error occurred. + * + * @note: + * FreeType has to be compiled with `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_ERROR_STRINGS` or + * `FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR` to get meaningful descriptions. + * 'error_string' will be `NULL` otherwise. + * + * Module identification will be ignored: + * + * ```c + * strcmp( FT_Error_String( FT_Err_Unknown_File_Format ), + * FT_Error_String( BDF_Err_Unknown_File_Format ) ) == 0; + * ``` + */ + FT_EXPORT( const char* ) + FT_Error_String( FT_Error error_code ); + + +#endif /* FT_ERR_PROTOS_DEFINED */ + +#endif /* FT_INCLUDE_ERR_PROTOS */ + +#endif /* !(FTERRORS_H_ && __FTERRORS_H__) */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftfntfmt.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftfntfmt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aae0b13 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftfntfmt.h @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftfntfmt.h + * + * Support functions for font formats. + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTFNTFMT_H_ +#define FTFNTFMT_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * font_formats + * + * @title: + * Font Formats + * + * @abstract: + * Getting the font format. + * + * @description: + * The single function in this section can be used to get the font format. + * Note that this information is not needed normally; however, there are + * special cases (like in PDF devices) where it is important to + * differentiate, in spite of FreeType's uniform API. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Font_Format + * + * @description: + * Return a string describing the format of a given face. Possible values + * are 'TrueType', 'Type~1', 'BDF', 'PCF', 'Type~42', 'CID~Type~1', 'CFF', + * 'PFR', and 'Windows~FNT'. + * + * The return value is suitable to be used as an X11 FONT_PROPERTY. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * Input face handle. + * + * @return: + * Font format string. `NULL` in case of error. + * + * @note: + * A deprecated name for the same function is `FT_Get_X11_Font_Format`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( const char* ) + FT_Get_Font_Format( FT_Face face ); + + + /* deprecated */ + FT_EXPORT( const char* ) + FT_Get_X11_Font_Format( FT_Face face ); + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTFNTFMT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgasp.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgasp.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24673d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgasp.h @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftgasp.h + * + * Access of TrueType's 'gasp' table (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2007-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTGASP_H_ +#define FTGASP_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * gasp_table + * + * @title: + * Gasp Table + * + * @abstract: + * Retrieving TrueType 'gasp' table entries. + * + * @description: + * The function @FT_Get_Gasp can be used to query a TrueType or OpenType + * font for specific entries in its 'gasp' table, if any. This is mainly + * useful when implementing native TrueType hinting with the bytecode + * interpreter to duplicate the Windows text rendering results. + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_GASP_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of values and/or bit-flags returned by the @FT_Get_Gasp + * function. + * + * @values: + * FT_GASP_NO_TABLE :: + * This special value means that there is no GASP table in this face. + * It is up to the client to decide what to do. + * + * FT_GASP_DO_GRIDFIT :: + * Grid-fitting and hinting should be performed at the specified ppem. + * This **really** means TrueType bytecode interpretation. If this bit + * is not set, no hinting gets applied. + * + * FT_GASP_DO_GRAY :: + * Anti-aliased rendering should be performed at the specified ppem. + * If not set, do monochrome rendering. + * + * FT_GASP_SYMMETRIC_SMOOTHING :: + * If set, smoothing along multiple axes must be used with ClearType. + * + * FT_GASP_SYMMETRIC_GRIDFIT :: + * Grid-fitting must be used with ClearType's symmetric smoothing. + * + * @note: + * The bit-flags `FT_GASP_DO_GRIDFIT` and `FT_GASP_DO_GRAY` are to be + * used for standard font rasterization only. Independently of that, + * `FT_GASP_SYMMETRIC_SMOOTHING` and `FT_GASP_SYMMETRIC_GRIDFIT` are to + * be used if ClearType is enabled (and `FT_GASP_DO_GRIDFIT` and + * `FT_GASP_DO_GRAY` are consequently ignored). + * + * 'ClearType' is Microsoft's implementation of LCD rendering, partly + * protected by patents. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.0 + */ +#define FT_GASP_NO_TABLE -1 +#define FT_GASP_DO_GRIDFIT 0x01 +#define FT_GASP_DO_GRAY 0x02 +#define FT_GASP_SYMMETRIC_GRIDFIT 0x04 +#define FT_GASP_SYMMETRIC_SMOOTHING 0x08 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Gasp + * + * @description: + * For a TrueType or OpenType font file, return the rasterizer behaviour + * flags from the font's 'gasp' table corresponding to a given character + * pixel size. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source face handle. + * + * ppem :: + * The vertical character pixel size. + * + * @return: + * Bit flags (see @FT_GASP_XXX), or @FT_GASP_NO_TABLE if there is no + * 'gasp' table in the face. + * + * @note: + * If you want to use the MM functionality of OpenType variation fonts + * (i.e., using @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates and friends), call this + * function **after** setting an instance since the return values can + * change. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.0 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Int ) + FT_Get_Gasp( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt ppem ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTGASP_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftglyph.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftglyph.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4067c2e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftglyph.h @@ -0,0 +1,665 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftglyph.h + * + * FreeType convenience functions to handle glyphs (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This file contains the definition of several convenience functions that + * can be used by client applications to easily retrieve glyph bitmaps and + * outlines from a given face. + * + * These functions should be optional if you are writing a font server or + * text layout engine on top of FreeType. However, they are pretty handy + * for many other simple uses of the library. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTGLYPH_H_ +#define FTGLYPH_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * glyph_management + * + * @title: + * Glyph Management + * + * @abstract: + * Generic interface to manage individual glyph data. + * + * @description: + * This section contains definitions used to manage glyph data through + * generic @FT_Glyph objects. Each of them can contain a bitmap, + * a vector outline, or even images in other formats. These objects are + * detached from @FT_Face, contrary to @FT_GlyphSlot. + * + */ + + + /* forward declaration to a private type */ + typedef struct FT_Glyph_Class_ FT_Glyph_Class; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Glyph + * + * @description: + * Handle to an object used to model generic glyph images. It is a + * pointer to the @FT_GlyphRec structure and can contain a glyph bitmap + * or pointer. + * + * @note: + * Glyph objects are not owned by the library. You must thus release + * them manually (through @FT_Done_Glyph) _before_ calling + * @FT_Done_FreeType. + */ + typedef struct FT_GlyphRec_* FT_Glyph; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_GlyphRec + * + * @description: + * The root glyph structure contains a given glyph image plus its advance + * width in 16.16 fixed-point format. + * + * @fields: + * library :: + * A handle to the FreeType library object. + * + * clazz :: + * A pointer to the glyph's class. Private. + * + * format :: + * The format of the glyph's image. + * + * advance :: + * A 16.16 vector that gives the glyph's advance width. + */ + typedef struct FT_GlyphRec_ + { + FT_Library library; + const FT_Glyph_Class* clazz; + FT_Glyph_Format format; + FT_Vector advance; + + } FT_GlyphRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_BitmapGlyph + * + * @description: + * A handle to an object used to model a bitmap glyph image. This is a + * sub-class of @FT_Glyph, and a pointer to @FT_BitmapGlyphRec. + */ + typedef struct FT_BitmapGlyphRec_* FT_BitmapGlyph; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_BitmapGlyphRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used for bitmap glyph images. This really is a + * 'sub-class' of @FT_GlyphRec. + * + * @fields: + * root :: + * The root @FT_Glyph fields. + * + * left :: + * The left-side bearing, i.e., the horizontal distance from the + * current pen position to the left border of the glyph bitmap. + * + * top :: + * The top-side bearing, i.e., the vertical distance from the current + * pen position to the top border of the glyph bitmap. This distance + * is positive for upwards~y! + * + * bitmap :: + * A descriptor for the bitmap. + * + * @note: + * You can typecast an @FT_Glyph to @FT_BitmapGlyph if you have + * `glyph->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP`. This lets you access the + * bitmap's contents easily. + * + * The corresponding pixel buffer is always owned by @FT_BitmapGlyph and + * is thus created and destroyed with it. + */ + typedef struct FT_BitmapGlyphRec_ + { + FT_GlyphRec root; + FT_Int left; + FT_Int top; + FT_Bitmap bitmap; + + } FT_BitmapGlyphRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_OutlineGlyph + * + * @description: + * A handle to an object used to model an outline glyph image. This is a + * sub-class of @FT_Glyph, and a pointer to @FT_OutlineGlyphRec. + */ + typedef struct FT_OutlineGlyphRec_* FT_OutlineGlyph; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_OutlineGlyphRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used for outline (vectorial) glyph images. This really is + * a 'sub-class' of @FT_GlyphRec. + * + * @fields: + * root :: + * The root @FT_Glyph fields. + * + * outline :: + * A descriptor for the outline. + * + * @note: + * You can typecast an @FT_Glyph to @FT_OutlineGlyph if you have + * `glyph->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE`. This lets you access the + * outline's content easily. + * + * As the outline is extracted from a glyph slot, its coordinates are + * expressed normally in 26.6 pixels, unless the flag @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE + * was used in @FT_Load_Glyph() or @FT_Load_Char(). + * + * The outline's tables are always owned by the object and are destroyed + * with it. + */ + typedef struct FT_OutlineGlyphRec_ + { + FT_GlyphRec root; + FT_Outline outline; + + } FT_OutlineGlyphRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Glyph + * + * @description: + * A function used to create a new empty glyph image. Note that the + * created @FT_Glyph object must be released with @FT_Done_Glyph. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the FreeType library object. + * + * format :: + * The format of the glyph's image. + * + * @output: + * aglyph :: + * A handle to the glyph object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Glyph( FT_Library library, + FT_Glyph_Format format, + FT_Glyph *aglyph ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Glyph + * + * @description: + * A function used to extract a glyph image from a slot. Note that the + * created @FT_Glyph object must be released with @FT_Done_Glyph. + * + * @input: + * slot :: + * A handle to the source glyph slot. + * + * @output: + * aglyph :: + * A handle to the glyph object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Because `*aglyph->advance.x` and `*aglyph->advance.y` are 16.16 + * fixed-point numbers, `slot->advance.x` and `slot->advance.y` (which + * are in 26.6 fixed-point format) must be in the range ]-32768;32768[. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Glyph( FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Glyph *aglyph ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Glyph_Copy + * + * @description: + * A function used to copy a glyph image. Note that the created + * @FT_Glyph object must be released with @FT_Done_Glyph. + * + * @input: + * source :: + * A handle to the source glyph object. + * + * @output: + * target :: + * A handle to the target glyph object. 0~in case of error. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Glyph_Copy( FT_Glyph source, + FT_Glyph *target ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Glyph_Transform + * + * @description: + * Transform a glyph image if its format is scalable. + * + * @inout: + * glyph :: + * A handle to the target glyph object. + * + * @input: + * matrix :: + * A pointer to a 2x2 matrix to apply. + * + * delta :: + * A pointer to a 2d vector to apply. Coordinates are expressed in + * 1/64th of a pixel. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code (if not 0, the glyph format is not scalable). + * + * @note: + * The 2x2 transformation matrix is also applied to the glyph's advance + * vector. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Glyph_Transform( FT_Glyph glyph, + FT_Matrix* matrix, + FT_Vector* delta ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Glyph_BBox_Mode + * + * @description: + * The mode how the values of @FT_Glyph_Get_CBox are returned. + * + * @values: + * FT_GLYPH_BBOX_UNSCALED :: + * Return unscaled font units. + * + * FT_GLYPH_BBOX_SUBPIXELS :: + * Return unfitted 26.6 coordinates. + * + * FT_GLYPH_BBOX_GRIDFIT :: + * Return grid-fitted 26.6 coordinates. + * + * FT_GLYPH_BBOX_TRUNCATE :: + * Return coordinates in integer pixels. + * + * FT_GLYPH_BBOX_PIXELS :: + * Return grid-fitted pixel coordinates. + */ + typedef enum FT_Glyph_BBox_Mode_ + { + FT_GLYPH_BBOX_UNSCALED = 0, + FT_GLYPH_BBOX_SUBPIXELS = 0, + FT_GLYPH_BBOX_GRIDFIT = 1, + FT_GLYPH_BBOX_TRUNCATE = 2, + FT_GLYPH_BBOX_PIXELS = 3 + + } FT_Glyph_BBox_Mode; + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `FT_Glyph_BBox_Mode` values instead */ +#define ft_glyph_bbox_unscaled FT_GLYPH_BBOX_UNSCALED +#define ft_glyph_bbox_subpixels FT_GLYPH_BBOX_SUBPIXELS +#define ft_glyph_bbox_gridfit FT_GLYPH_BBOX_GRIDFIT +#define ft_glyph_bbox_truncate FT_GLYPH_BBOX_TRUNCATE +#define ft_glyph_bbox_pixels FT_GLYPH_BBOX_PIXELS + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Glyph_Get_CBox + * + * @description: + * Return a glyph's 'control box'. The control box encloses all the + * outline's points, including Bezier control points. Though it + * coincides with the exact bounding box for most glyphs, it can be + * slightly larger in some situations (like when rotating an outline that + * contains Bezier outside arcs). + * + * Computing the control box is very fast, while getting the bounding box + * can take much more time as it needs to walk over all segments and arcs + * in the outline. To get the latter, you can use the 'ftbbox' + * component, which is dedicated to this single task. + * + * @input: + * glyph :: + * A handle to the source glyph object. + * + * mode :: + * The mode that indicates how to interpret the returned bounding box + * values. + * + * @output: + * acbox :: + * The glyph coordinate bounding box. Coordinates are expressed in + * 1/64th of pixels if it is grid-fitted. + * + * @note: + * Coordinates are relative to the glyph origin, using the y~upwards + * convention. + * + * If the glyph has been loaded with @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE, `bbox_mode` must + * be set to @FT_GLYPH_BBOX_UNSCALED to get unscaled font units in 26.6 + * pixel format. The value @FT_GLYPH_BBOX_SUBPIXELS is another name for + * this constant. + * + * If the font is tricky and the glyph has been loaded with + * @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE, the resulting CBox is meaningless. To get + * reasonable values for the CBox it is necessary to load the glyph at a + * large ppem value (so that the hinting instructions can properly shift + * and scale the subglyphs), then extracting the CBox, which can be + * eventually converted back to font units. + * + * Note that the maximum coordinates are exclusive, which means that one + * can compute the width and height of the glyph image (be it in integer + * or 26.6 pixels) as: + * + * ``` + * width = bbox.xMax - bbox.xMin; + * height = bbox.yMax - bbox.yMin; + * ``` + * + * Note also that for 26.6 coordinates, if `bbox_mode` is set to + * @FT_GLYPH_BBOX_GRIDFIT, the coordinates will also be grid-fitted, + * which corresponds to: + * + * ``` + * bbox.xMin = FLOOR(bbox.xMin); + * bbox.yMin = FLOOR(bbox.yMin); + * bbox.xMax = CEILING(bbox.xMax); + * bbox.yMax = CEILING(bbox.yMax); + * ``` + * + * To get the bbox in pixel coordinates, set `bbox_mode` to + * @FT_GLYPH_BBOX_TRUNCATE. + * + * To get the bbox in grid-fitted pixel coordinates, set `bbox_mode` to + * @FT_GLYPH_BBOX_PIXELS. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Glyph_Get_CBox( FT_Glyph glyph, + FT_UInt bbox_mode, + FT_BBox *acbox ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Glyph_To_Bitmap + * + * @description: + * Convert a given glyph object to a bitmap glyph object. + * + * @inout: + * the_glyph :: + * A pointer to a handle to the target glyph. + * + * @input: + * render_mode :: + * An enumeration that describes how the data is rendered. + * + * origin :: + * A pointer to a vector used to translate the glyph image before + * rendering. Can be~0 (if no translation). The origin is expressed + * in 26.6 pixels. + * + * destroy :: + * A boolean that indicates that the original glyph image should be + * destroyed by this function. It is never destroyed in case of error. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function does nothing if the glyph format isn't scalable. + * + * The glyph image is translated with the `origin` vector before + * rendering. + * + * The first parameter is a pointer to an @FT_Glyph handle, that will be + * _replaced_ by this function (with newly allocated data). Typically, + * you would use (omitting error handling): + * + * ``` + * FT_Glyph glyph; + * FT_BitmapGlyph glyph_bitmap; + * + * + * // load glyph + * error = FT_Load_Char( face, glyph_index, FT_LOAD_DEFAULT ); + * + * // extract glyph image + * error = FT_Get_Glyph( face->glyph, &glyph ); + * + * // convert to a bitmap (default render mode + destroying old) + * if ( glyph->format != FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP ) + * { + * error = FT_Glyph_To_Bitmap( &glyph, FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL, + * 0, 1 ); + * if ( error ) // `glyph' unchanged + * ... + * } + * + * // access bitmap content by typecasting + * glyph_bitmap = (FT_BitmapGlyph)glyph; + * + * // do funny stuff with it, like blitting/drawing + * ... + * + * // discard glyph image (bitmap or not) + * FT_Done_Glyph( glyph ); + * ``` + * + * Here is another example, again without error handling: + * + * ``` + * FT_Glyph glyphs[MAX_GLYPHS] + * + * + * ... + * + * for ( idx = 0; i < MAX_GLYPHS; i++ ) + * error = FT_Load_Glyph( face, idx, FT_LOAD_DEFAULT ) || + * FT_Get_Glyph ( face->glyph, &glyphs[idx] ); + * + * ... + * + * for ( idx = 0; i < MAX_GLYPHS; i++ ) + * { + * FT_Glyph bitmap = glyphs[idx]; + * + * + * ... + * + * // after this call, `bitmap' no longer points into + * // the `glyphs' array (and the old value isn't destroyed) + * FT_Glyph_To_Bitmap( &bitmap, FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO, 0, 0 ); + * + * ... + * + * FT_Done_Glyph( bitmap ); + * } + * + * ... + * + * for ( idx = 0; i < MAX_GLYPHS; i++ ) + * FT_Done_Glyph( glyphs[idx] ); + * ``` + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Glyph_To_Bitmap( FT_Glyph* the_glyph, + FT_Render_Mode render_mode, + FT_Vector* origin, + FT_Bool destroy ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_Glyph + * + * @description: + * Destroy a given glyph. + * + * @input: + * glyph :: + * A handle to the target glyph object. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Done_Glyph( FT_Glyph glyph ); + + /* */ + + + /* other helpful functions */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * computations + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Matrix_Multiply + * + * @description: + * Perform the matrix operation `b = a*b`. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * A pointer to matrix `a`. + * + * @inout: + * b :: + * A pointer to matrix `b`. + * + * @note: + * The result is undefined if either `a` or `b` is zero. + * + * Since the function uses wrap-around arithmetic, results become + * meaningless if the arguments are very large. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Matrix_Multiply( const FT_Matrix* a, + FT_Matrix* b ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Matrix_Invert + * + * @description: + * Invert a 2x2 matrix. Return an error if it can't be inverted. + * + * @inout: + * matrix :: + * A pointer to the target matrix. Remains untouched in case of error. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Matrix_Invert( FT_Matrix* matrix ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTGLYPH_H_ */ + + +/* END */ + + +/* Local Variables: */ +/* coding: utf-8 */ +/* End: */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgxval.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgxval.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b14f637 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgxval.h @@ -0,0 +1,355 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftgxval.h + * + * FreeType API for validating TrueTypeGX/AAT tables (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * Masatake YAMATO, Redhat K.K, + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + +/**************************************************************************** + * + * gxvalid is derived from both gxlayout module and otvalid module. + * Development of gxlayout is supported by the Information-technology + * Promotion Agency(IPA), Japan. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTGXVAL_H_ +#define FTGXVAL_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * gx_validation + * + * @title: + * TrueTypeGX/AAT Validation + * + * @abstract: + * An API to validate TrueTypeGX/AAT tables. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of functions to validate some + * TrueTypeGX tables (feat, mort, morx, bsln, just, kern, opbd, trak, + * prop, lcar). + * + * @order: + * FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate + * FT_TrueTypeGX_Free + * + * FT_ClassicKern_Validate + * FT_ClassicKern_Free + * + * FT_VALIDATE_GX_LENGTH + * FT_VALIDATE_GXXXX + * FT_VALIDATE_CKERNXXX + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * + * Warning: Use `FT_VALIDATE_XXX` to validate a table. + * Following definitions are for gxvalid developers. + * + * + */ + +#define FT_VALIDATE_feat_INDEX 0 +#define FT_VALIDATE_mort_INDEX 1 +#define FT_VALIDATE_morx_INDEX 2 +#define FT_VALIDATE_bsln_INDEX 3 +#define FT_VALIDATE_just_INDEX 4 +#define FT_VALIDATE_kern_INDEX 5 +#define FT_VALIDATE_opbd_INDEX 6 +#define FT_VALIDATE_trak_INDEX 7 +#define FT_VALIDATE_prop_INDEX 8 +#define FT_VALIDATE_lcar_INDEX 9 +#define FT_VALIDATE_GX_LAST_INDEX FT_VALIDATE_lcar_INDEX + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_VALIDATE_GX_LENGTH + * + * @description: + * The number of tables checked in this module. Use it as a parameter + * for the `table-length` argument of function @FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate. + */ +#define FT_VALIDATE_GX_LENGTH ( FT_VALIDATE_GX_LAST_INDEX + 1 ) + + /* */ + + /* Up to 0x1000 is used by otvalid. + Ox2xxx is reserved for feature OT extension. */ +#define FT_VALIDATE_GX_START 0x4000 +#define FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( tag ) \ + ( FT_VALIDATE_GX_START << FT_VALIDATE_##tag##_INDEX ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_VALIDATE_GXXXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit-field constants used with @FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate to + * indicate which TrueTypeGX/AAT Type tables should be validated. + * + * @values: + * FT_VALIDATE_feat :: + * Validate 'feat' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_mort :: + * Validate 'mort' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_morx :: + * Validate 'morx' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_bsln :: + * Validate 'bsln' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_just :: + * Validate 'just' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_kern :: + * Validate 'kern' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_opbd :: + * Validate 'opbd' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_trak :: + * Validate 'trak' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_prop :: + * Validate 'prop' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_lcar :: + * Validate 'lcar' table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_GX :: + * Validate all TrueTypeGX tables (feat, mort, morx, bsln, just, kern, + * opbd, trak, prop and lcar). + * + */ + +#define FT_VALIDATE_feat FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( feat ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_mort FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( mort ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_morx FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( morx ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_bsln FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( bsln ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_just FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( just ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_kern FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( kern ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_opbd FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( opbd ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_trak FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( trak ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_prop FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( prop ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_lcar FT_VALIDATE_GX_BITFIELD( lcar ) + +#define FT_VALIDATE_GX ( FT_VALIDATE_feat | \ + FT_VALIDATE_mort | \ + FT_VALIDATE_morx | \ + FT_VALIDATE_bsln | \ + FT_VALIDATE_just | \ + FT_VALIDATE_kern | \ + FT_VALIDATE_opbd | \ + FT_VALIDATE_trak | \ + FT_VALIDATE_prop | \ + FT_VALIDATE_lcar ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate + * + * @description: + * Validate various TrueTypeGX tables to assure that all offsets and + * indices are valid. The idea is that a higher-level library that + * actually does the text layout can access those tables without error + * checking (which can be quite time consuming). + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * validation_flags :: + * A bit field that specifies the tables to be validated. See + * @FT_VALIDATE_GXXXX for possible values. + * + * table_length :: + * The size of the `tables` array. Normally, @FT_VALIDATE_GX_LENGTH + * should be passed. + * + * @output: + * tables :: + * The array where all validated sfnt tables are stored. The array + * itself must be allocated by a client. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function only works with TrueTypeGX fonts, returning an error + * otherwise. + * + * After use, the application should deallocate the buffers pointed to by + * each `tables` element, by calling @FT_TrueTypeGX_Free. A `NULL` value + * indicates that the table either doesn't exist in the font, the + * application hasn't asked for validation, or the validator doesn't have + * the ability to validate the sfnt table. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt validation_flags, + FT_Bytes tables[FT_VALIDATE_GX_LENGTH], + FT_UInt table_length ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_TrueTypeGX_Free + * + * @description: + * Free the buffer allocated by TrueTypeGX validator. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * table :: + * The pointer to the buffer allocated by @FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate. + * + * @note: + * This function must be used to free the buffer allocated by + * @FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate only. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_TrueTypeGX_Free( FT_Face face, + FT_Bytes table ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_VALIDATE_CKERNXXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit-field constants used with @FT_ClassicKern_Validate to + * indicate the classic kern dialect or dialects. If the selected type + * doesn't fit, @FT_ClassicKern_Validate regards the table as invalid. + * + * @values: + * FT_VALIDATE_MS :: + * Handle the 'kern' table as a classic Microsoft kern table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_APPLE :: + * Handle the 'kern' table as a classic Apple kern table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_CKERN :: + * Handle the 'kern' as either classic Apple or Microsoft kern table. + */ +#define FT_VALIDATE_MS ( FT_VALIDATE_GX_START << 0 ) +#define FT_VALIDATE_APPLE ( FT_VALIDATE_GX_START << 1 ) + +#define FT_VALIDATE_CKERN ( FT_VALIDATE_MS | FT_VALIDATE_APPLE ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_ClassicKern_Validate + * + * @description: + * Validate classic (16-bit format) kern table to assure that the + * offsets and indices are valid. The idea is that a higher-level + * library that actually does the text layout can access those tables + * without error checking (which can be quite time consuming). + * + * The 'kern' table validator in @FT_TrueTypeGX_Validate deals with both + * the new 32-bit format and the classic 16-bit format, while + * FT_ClassicKern_Validate only supports the classic 16-bit format. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * validation_flags :: + * A bit field that specifies the dialect to be validated. See + * @FT_VALIDATE_CKERNXXX for possible values. + * + * @output: + * ckern_table :: + * A pointer to the kern table. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * After use, the application should deallocate the buffers pointed to by + * `ckern_table`, by calling @FT_ClassicKern_Free. A `NULL` value + * indicates that the table doesn't exist in the font. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_ClassicKern_Validate( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt validation_flags, + FT_Bytes *ckern_table ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_ClassicKern_Free + * + * @description: + * Free the buffer allocated by classic Kern validator. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * table :: + * The pointer to the buffer that is allocated by + * @FT_ClassicKern_Validate. + * + * @note: + * This function must be used to free the buffer allocated by + * @FT_ClassicKern_Validate only. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_ClassicKern_Free( FT_Face face, + FT_Bytes table ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTGXVAL_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgzip.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgzip.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..418c612 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftgzip.h @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftgzip.h + * + * Gzip-compressed stream support. + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTGZIP_H_ +#define FTGZIP_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * gzip + * + * @title: + * GZIP Streams + * + * @abstract: + * Using gzip-compressed font files. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of Gzip-specific functions. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stream_OpenGzip + * + * @description: + * Open a new stream to parse gzip-compressed font files. This is mainly + * used to support the compressed `*.pcf.gz` fonts that come with + * XFree86. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * The target embedding stream. + * + * source :: + * The source stream. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The source stream must be opened _before_ calling this function. + * + * Calling the internal function `FT_Stream_Close` on the new stream will + * **not** call `FT_Stream_Close` on the source stream. None of the + * stream objects will be released to the heap. + * + * The stream implementation is very basic and resets the decompression + * process each time seeking backwards is needed within the stream. + * + * In certain builds of the library, gzip compression recognition is + * automatically handled when calling @FT_New_Face or @FT_Open_Face. + * This means that if no font driver is capable of handling the raw + * compressed file, the library will try to open a gzipped stream from it + * and re-open the face with it. + * + * This function may return `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` if your build + * of FreeType was not compiled with zlib support. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_OpenGzip( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Stream source ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Gzip_Uncompress + * + * @description: + * Decompress a zipped input buffer into an output buffer. This function + * is modeled after zlib's `uncompress` function. + * + * @input: + * memory :: + * A FreeType memory handle. + * + * input :: + * The input buffer. + * + * input_len :: + * The length of the input buffer. + * + * @output: + * output :: + * The output buffer. + * + * @inout: + * output_len :: + * Before calling the function, this is the total size of the output + * buffer, which must be large enough to hold the entire uncompressed + * data (so the size of the uncompressed data must be known in + * advance). After calling the function, `output_len` is the size of + * the used data in `output`. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function may return `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` if your build + * of FreeType was not compiled with zlib support. + * + * @since: + * 2.5.1 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Gzip_Uncompress( FT_Memory memory, + FT_Byte* output, + FT_ULong* output_len, + const FT_Byte* input, + FT_ULong input_len ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTGZIP_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftimage.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftimage.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d640b0b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftimage.h @@ -0,0 +1,1240 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftimage.h + * + * FreeType glyph image formats and default raster interface + * (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Note: A 'raster' is simply a scan-line converter, used to render + * FT_Outlines into FT_Bitmaps. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTIMAGE_H_ +#define FTIMAGE_H_ + + + /* STANDALONE_ is from ftgrays.c */ +#ifndef STANDALONE_ +#include +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * basic_types + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Pos + * + * @description: + * The type FT_Pos is used to store vectorial coordinates. Depending on + * the context, these can represent distances in integer font units, or + * 16.16, or 26.6 fixed-point pixel coordinates. + */ + typedef signed long FT_Pos; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Vector + * + * @description: + * A simple structure used to store a 2D vector; coordinates are of the + * FT_Pos type. + * + * @fields: + * x :: + * The horizontal coordinate. + * y :: + * The vertical coordinate. + */ + typedef struct FT_Vector_ + { + FT_Pos x; + FT_Pos y; + + } FT_Vector; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_BBox + * + * @description: + * A structure used to hold an outline's bounding box, i.e., the + * coordinates of its extrema in the horizontal and vertical directions. + * + * @fields: + * xMin :: + * The horizontal minimum (left-most). + * + * yMin :: + * The vertical minimum (bottom-most). + * + * xMax :: + * The horizontal maximum (right-most). + * + * yMax :: + * The vertical maximum (top-most). + * + * @note: + * The bounding box is specified with the coordinates of the lower left + * and the upper right corner. In PostScript, those values are often + * called (llx,lly) and (urx,ury), respectively. + * + * If `yMin` is negative, this value gives the glyph's descender. + * Otherwise, the glyph doesn't descend below the baseline. Similarly, + * if `ymax` is positive, this value gives the glyph's ascender. + * + * `xMin` gives the horizontal distance from the glyph's origin to the + * left edge of the glyph's bounding box. If `xMin` is negative, the + * glyph extends to the left of the origin. + */ + typedef struct FT_BBox_ + { + FT_Pos xMin, yMin; + FT_Pos xMax, yMax; + + } FT_BBox; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Pixel_Mode + * + * @description: + * An enumeration type used to describe the format of pixels in a given + * bitmap. Note that additional formats may be added in the future. + * + * @values: + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_NONE :: + * Value~0 is reserved. + * + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_MONO :: + * A monochrome bitmap, using 1~bit per pixel. Note that pixels are + * stored in most-significant order (MSB), which means that the + * left-most pixel in a byte has value 128. + * + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY :: + * An 8-bit bitmap, generally used to represent anti-aliased glyph + * images. Each pixel is stored in one byte. Note that the number of + * 'gray' levels is stored in the `num_grays` field of the @FT_Bitmap + * structure (it generally is 256). + * + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY2 :: + * A 2-bit per pixel bitmap, used to represent embedded anti-aliased + * bitmaps in font files according to the OpenType specification. We + * haven't found a single font using this format, however. + * + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY4 :: + * A 4-bit per pixel bitmap, representing embedded anti-aliased bitmaps + * in font files according to the OpenType specification. We haven't + * found a single font using this format, however. + * + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD :: + * An 8-bit bitmap, representing RGB or BGR decimated glyph images used + * for display on LCD displays; the bitmap is three times wider than + * the original glyph image. See also @FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD. + * + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD_V :: + * An 8-bit bitmap, representing RGB or BGR decimated glyph images used + * for display on rotated LCD displays; the bitmap is three times + * taller than the original glyph image. See also + * @FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD_V. + * + * FT_PIXEL_MODE_BGRA :: + * [Since 2.5] An image with four 8-bit channels per pixel, + * representing a color image (such as emoticons) with alpha channel. + * For each pixel, the format is BGRA, which means, the blue channel + * comes first in memory. The color channels are pre-multiplied and in + * the sRGB colorspace. For example, full red at half-translucent + * opacity will be represented as '00,00,80,80', not '00,00,FF,80'. + * See also @FT_LOAD_COLOR. + */ + typedef enum FT_Pixel_Mode_ + { + FT_PIXEL_MODE_NONE = 0, + FT_PIXEL_MODE_MONO, + FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY, + FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY2, + FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY4, + FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD, + FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD_V, + FT_PIXEL_MODE_BGRA, + + FT_PIXEL_MODE_MAX /* do not remove */ + + } FT_Pixel_Mode; + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding `FT_Pixel_Mode` */ + /* values instead. */ +#define ft_pixel_mode_none FT_PIXEL_MODE_NONE +#define ft_pixel_mode_mono FT_PIXEL_MODE_MONO +#define ft_pixel_mode_grays FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY +#define ft_pixel_mode_pal2 FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY2 +#define ft_pixel_mode_pal4 FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY4 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Bitmap + * + * @description: + * A structure used to describe a bitmap or pixmap to the raster. Note + * that we now manage pixmaps of various depths through the `pixel_mode` + * field. + * + * @fields: + * rows :: + * The number of bitmap rows. + * + * width :: + * The number of pixels in bitmap row. + * + * pitch :: + * The pitch's absolute value is the number of bytes taken by one + * bitmap row, including padding. However, the pitch is positive when + * the bitmap has a 'down' flow, and negative when it has an 'up' flow. + * In all cases, the pitch is an offset to add to a bitmap pointer in + * order to go down one row. + * + * Note that 'padding' means the alignment of a bitmap to a byte + * border, and FreeType functions normally align to the smallest + * possible integer value. + * + * For the B/W rasterizer, `pitch` is always an even number. + * + * To change the pitch of a bitmap (say, to make it a multiple of 4), + * use @FT_Bitmap_Convert. Alternatively, you might use callback + * functions to directly render to the application's surface; see the + * file `example2.cpp` in the tutorial for a demonstration. + * + * buffer :: + * A typeless pointer to the bitmap buffer. This value should be + * aligned on 32-bit boundaries in most cases. + * + * num_grays :: + * This field is only used with @FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY; it gives the + * number of gray levels used in the bitmap. + * + * pixel_mode :: + * The pixel mode, i.e., how pixel bits are stored. See @FT_Pixel_Mode + * for possible values. + * + * palette_mode :: + * This field is intended for paletted pixel modes; it indicates how + * the palette is stored. Not used currently. + * + * palette :: + * A typeless pointer to the bitmap palette; this field is intended for + * paletted pixel modes. Not used currently. + */ + typedef struct FT_Bitmap_ + { + unsigned int rows; + unsigned int width; + int pitch; + unsigned char* buffer; + unsigned short num_grays; + unsigned char pixel_mode; + unsigned char palette_mode; + void* palette; + + } FT_Bitmap; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * outline_processing + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Outline + * + * @description: + * This structure is used to describe an outline to the scan-line + * converter. + * + * @fields: + * n_contours :: + * The number of contours in the outline. + * + * n_points :: + * The number of points in the outline. + * + * points :: + * A pointer to an array of `n_points` @FT_Vector elements, giving the + * outline's point coordinates. + * + * tags :: + * A pointer to an array of `n_points` chars, giving each outline + * point's type. + * + * If bit~0 is unset, the point is 'off' the curve, i.e., a Bezier + * control point, while it is 'on' if set. + * + * Bit~1 is meaningful for 'off' points only. If set, it indicates a + * third-order Bezier arc control point; and a second-order control + * point if unset. + * + * If bit~2 is set, bits 5-7 contain the drop-out mode (as defined in + * the OpenType specification; the value is the same as the argument to + * the 'SCANMODE' instruction). + * + * Bits 3 and~4 are reserved for internal purposes. + * + * contours :: + * An array of `n_contours` shorts, giving the end point of each + * contour within the outline. For example, the first contour is + * defined by the points '0' to `contours[0]`, the second one is + * defined by the points `contours[0]+1` to `contours[1]`, etc. + * + * flags :: + * A set of bit flags used to characterize the outline and give hints + * to the scan-converter and hinter on how to convert/grid-fit it. See + * @FT_OUTLINE_XXX. + * + * @note: + * The B/W rasterizer only checks bit~2 in the `tags` array for the first + * point of each contour. The drop-out mode as given with + * @FT_OUTLINE_IGNORE_DROPOUTS, @FT_OUTLINE_SMART_DROPOUTS, and + * @FT_OUTLINE_INCLUDE_STUBS in `flags` is then overridden. + */ + typedef struct FT_Outline_ + { + short n_contours; /* number of contours in glyph */ + short n_points; /* number of points in the glyph */ + + FT_Vector* points; /* the outline's points */ + char* tags; /* the points flags */ + short* contours; /* the contour end points */ + + int flags; /* outline masks */ + + } FT_Outline; + + /* */ + + /* Following limits must be consistent with */ + /* FT_Outline.{n_contours,n_points} */ +#define FT_OUTLINE_CONTOURS_MAX SHRT_MAX +#define FT_OUTLINE_POINTS_MAX SHRT_MAX + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_OUTLINE_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit-field constants used for the flags in an outline's + * `flags` field. + * + * @values: + * FT_OUTLINE_NONE :: + * Value~0 is reserved. + * + * FT_OUTLINE_OWNER :: + * If set, this flag indicates that the outline's field arrays (i.e., + * `points`, `flags`, and `contours`) are 'owned' by the outline + * object, and should thus be freed when it is destroyed. + * + * FT_OUTLINE_EVEN_ODD_FILL :: + * By default, outlines are filled using the non-zero winding rule. If + * set to 1, the outline will be filled using the even-odd fill rule + * (only works with the smooth rasterizer). + * + * FT_OUTLINE_REVERSE_FILL :: + * By default, outside contours of an outline are oriented in + * clock-wise direction, as defined in the TrueType specification. + * This flag is set if the outline uses the opposite direction + * (typically for Type~1 fonts). This flag is ignored by the scan + * converter. + * + * FT_OUTLINE_IGNORE_DROPOUTS :: + * By default, the scan converter will try to detect drop-outs in an + * outline and correct the glyph bitmap to ensure consistent shape + * continuity. If set, this flag hints the scan-line converter to + * ignore such cases. See below for more information. + * + * FT_OUTLINE_SMART_DROPOUTS :: + * Select smart dropout control. If unset, use simple dropout control. + * Ignored if @FT_OUTLINE_IGNORE_DROPOUTS is set. See below for more + * information. + * + * FT_OUTLINE_INCLUDE_STUBS :: + * If set, turn pixels on for 'stubs', otherwise exclude them. Ignored + * if @FT_OUTLINE_IGNORE_DROPOUTS is set. See below for more + * information. + * + * FT_OUTLINE_HIGH_PRECISION :: + * This flag indicates that the scan-line converter should try to + * convert this outline to bitmaps with the highest possible quality. + * It is typically set for small character sizes. Note that this is + * only a hint that might be completely ignored by a given + * scan-converter. + * + * FT_OUTLINE_SINGLE_PASS :: + * This flag is set to force a given scan-converter to only use a + * single pass over the outline to render a bitmap glyph image. + * Normally, it is set for very large character sizes. It is only a + * hint that might be completely ignored by a given scan-converter. + * + * @note: + * The flags @FT_OUTLINE_IGNORE_DROPOUTS, @FT_OUTLINE_SMART_DROPOUTS, and + * @FT_OUTLINE_INCLUDE_STUBS are ignored by the smooth rasterizer. + * + * There exists a second mechanism to pass the drop-out mode to the B/W + * rasterizer; see the `tags` field in @FT_Outline. + * + * Please refer to the description of the 'SCANTYPE' instruction in the + * OpenType specification (in file `ttinst1.doc`) how simple drop-outs, + * smart drop-outs, and stubs are defined. + */ +#define FT_OUTLINE_NONE 0x0 +#define FT_OUTLINE_OWNER 0x1 +#define FT_OUTLINE_EVEN_ODD_FILL 0x2 +#define FT_OUTLINE_REVERSE_FILL 0x4 +#define FT_OUTLINE_IGNORE_DROPOUTS 0x8 +#define FT_OUTLINE_SMART_DROPOUTS 0x10 +#define FT_OUTLINE_INCLUDE_STUBS 0x20 + +#define FT_OUTLINE_HIGH_PRECISION 0x100 +#define FT_OUTLINE_SINGLE_PASS 0x200 + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `FT_OUTLINE_XXX` values instead */ +#define ft_outline_none FT_OUTLINE_NONE +#define ft_outline_owner FT_OUTLINE_OWNER +#define ft_outline_even_odd_fill FT_OUTLINE_EVEN_ODD_FILL +#define ft_outline_reverse_fill FT_OUTLINE_REVERSE_FILL +#define ft_outline_ignore_dropouts FT_OUTLINE_IGNORE_DROPOUTS +#define ft_outline_high_precision FT_OUTLINE_HIGH_PRECISION +#define ft_outline_single_pass FT_OUTLINE_SINGLE_PASS + + /* */ + +#define FT_CURVE_TAG( flag ) ( flag & 0x03 ) + + /* see the `tags` field in `FT_Outline` for a description of the values */ +#define FT_CURVE_TAG_ON 0x01 +#define FT_CURVE_TAG_CONIC 0x00 +#define FT_CURVE_TAG_CUBIC 0x02 + +#define FT_CURVE_TAG_HAS_SCANMODE 0x04 + +#define FT_CURVE_TAG_TOUCH_X 0x08 /* reserved for TrueType hinter */ +#define FT_CURVE_TAG_TOUCH_Y 0x10 /* reserved for TrueType hinter */ + +#define FT_CURVE_TAG_TOUCH_BOTH ( FT_CURVE_TAG_TOUCH_X | \ + FT_CURVE_TAG_TOUCH_Y ) + /* values 0x20, 0x40, and 0x80 are reserved */ + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `FT_CURVE_TAG_XXX` values instead */ +#define FT_Curve_Tag_On FT_CURVE_TAG_ON +#define FT_Curve_Tag_Conic FT_CURVE_TAG_CONIC +#define FT_Curve_Tag_Cubic FT_CURVE_TAG_CUBIC +#define FT_Curve_Tag_Touch_X FT_CURVE_TAG_TOUCH_X +#define FT_Curve_Tag_Touch_Y FT_CURVE_TAG_TOUCH_Y + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Outline_MoveToFunc + * + * @description: + * A function pointer type used to describe the signature of a 'move to' + * function during outline walking/decomposition. + * + * A 'move to' is emitted to start a new contour in an outline. + * + * @input: + * to :: + * A pointer to the target point of the 'move to'. + * + * user :: + * A typeless pointer, which is passed from the caller of the + * decomposition function. + * + * @return: + * Error code. 0~means success. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Outline_MoveToFunc)( const FT_Vector* to, + void* user ); + +#define FT_Outline_MoveTo_Func FT_Outline_MoveToFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Outline_LineToFunc + * + * @description: + * A function pointer type used to describe the signature of a 'line to' + * function during outline walking/decomposition. + * + * A 'line to' is emitted to indicate a segment in the outline. + * + * @input: + * to :: + * A pointer to the target point of the 'line to'. + * + * user :: + * A typeless pointer, which is passed from the caller of the + * decomposition function. + * + * @return: + * Error code. 0~means success. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Outline_LineToFunc)( const FT_Vector* to, + void* user ); + +#define FT_Outline_LineTo_Func FT_Outline_LineToFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Outline_ConicToFunc + * + * @description: + * A function pointer type used to describe the signature of a 'conic to' + * function during outline walking or decomposition. + * + * A 'conic to' is emitted to indicate a second-order Bezier arc in the + * outline. + * + * @input: + * control :: + * An intermediate control point between the last position and the new + * target in `to`. + * + * to :: + * A pointer to the target end point of the conic arc. + * + * user :: + * A typeless pointer, which is passed from the caller of the + * decomposition function. + * + * @return: + * Error code. 0~means success. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Outline_ConicToFunc)( const FT_Vector* control, + const FT_Vector* to, + void* user ); + +#define FT_Outline_ConicTo_Func FT_Outline_ConicToFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Outline_CubicToFunc + * + * @description: + * A function pointer type used to describe the signature of a 'cubic to' + * function during outline walking or decomposition. + * + * A 'cubic to' is emitted to indicate a third-order Bezier arc. + * + * @input: + * control1 :: + * A pointer to the first Bezier control point. + * + * control2 :: + * A pointer to the second Bezier control point. + * + * to :: + * A pointer to the target end point. + * + * user :: + * A typeless pointer, which is passed from the caller of the + * decomposition function. + * + * @return: + * Error code. 0~means success. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Outline_CubicToFunc)( const FT_Vector* control1, + const FT_Vector* control2, + const FT_Vector* to, + void* user ); + +#define FT_Outline_CubicTo_Func FT_Outline_CubicToFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Outline_Funcs + * + * @description: + * A structure to hold various function pointers used during outline + * decomposition in order to emit segments, conic, and cubic Beziers. + * + * @fields: + * move_to :: + * The 'move to' emitter. + * + * line_to :: + * The segment emitter. + * + * conic_to :: + * The second-order Bezier arc emitter. + * + * cubic_to :: + * The third-order Bezier arc emitter. + * + * shift :: + * The shift that is applied to coordinates before they are sent to the + * emitter. + * + * delta :: + * The delta that is applied to coordinates before they are sent to the + * emitter, but after the shift. + * + * @note: + * The point coordinates sent to the emitters are the transformed version + * of the original coordinates (this is important for high accuracy + * during scan-conversion). The transformation is simple: + * + * ``` + * x' = (x << shift) - delta + * y' = (y << shift) - delta + * ``` + * + * Set the values of `shift` and `delta` to~0 to get the original point + * coordinates. + */ + typedef struct FT_Outline_Funcs_ + { + FT_Outline_MoveToFunc move_to; + FT_Outline_LineToFunc line_to; + FT_Outline_ConicToFunc conic_to; + FT_Outline_CubicToFunc cubic_to; + + int shift; + FT_Pos delta; + + } FT_Outline_Funcs; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * basic_types + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_IMAGE_TAG + * + * @description: + * This macro converts four-letter tags to an unsigned long type. + * + * @note: + * Since many 16-bit compilers don't like 32-bit enumerations, you should + * redefine this macro in case of problems to something like this: + * + * ``` + * #define FT_IMAGE_TAG( value, _x1, _x2, _x3, _x4 ) value + * ``` + * + * to get a simple enumeration without assigning special numbers. + */ +#ifndef FT_IMAGE_TAG +#define FT_IMAGE_TAG( value, _x1, _x2, _x3, _x4 ) \ + value = ( ( (unsigned long)_x1 << 24 ) | \ + ( (unsigned long)_x2 << 16 ) | \ + ( (unsigned long)_x3 << 8 ) | \ + (unsigned long)_x4 ) +#endif /* FT_IMAGE_TAG */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Glyph_Format + * + * @description: + * An enumeration type used to describe the format of a given glyph + * image. Note that this version of FreeType only supports two image + * formats, even though future font drivers will be able to register + * their own format. + * + * @values: + * FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_NONE :: + * The value~0 is reserved. + * + * FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_COMPOSITE :: + * The glyph image is a composite of several other images. This format + * is _only_ used with @FT_LOAD_NO_RECURSE, and is used to report + * compound glyphs (like accented characters). + * + * FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP :: + * The glyph image is a bitmap, and can be described as an @FT_Bitmap. + * You generally need to access the `bitmap` field of the + * @FT_GlyphSlotRec structure to read it. + * + * FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE :: + * The glyph image is a vectorial outline made of line segments and + * Bezier arcs; it can be described as an @FT_Outline; you generally + * want to access the `outline` field of the @FT_GlyphSlotRec structure + * to read it. + * + * FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_PLOTTER :: + * The glyph image is a vectorial path with no inside and outside + * contours. Some Type~1 fonts, like those in the Hershey family, + * contain glyphs in this format. These are described as @FT_Outline, + * but FreeType isn't currently capable of rendering them correctly. + */ + typedef enum FT_Glyph_Format_ + { + FT_IMAGE_TAG( FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_NONE, 0, 0, 0, 0 ), + + FT_IMAGE_TAG( FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_COMPOSITE, 'c', 'o', 'm', 'p' ), + FT_IMAGE_TAG( FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP, 'b', 'i', 't', 's' ), + FT_IMAGE_TAG( FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE, 'o', 'u', 't', 'l' ), + FT_IMAGE_TAG( FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_PLOTTER, 'p', 'l', 'o', 't' ) + + } FT_Glyph_Format; + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `FT_Glyph_Format` values instead. */ +#define ft_glyph_format_none FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_NONE +#define ft_glyph_format_composite FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_COMPOSITE +#define ft_glyph_format_bitmap FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP +#define ft_glyph_format_outline FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE +#define ft_glyph_format_plotter FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_PLOTTER + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** R A S T E R D E F I N I T I O N S *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * A raster is a scan converter, in charge of rendering an outline into a + * bitmap. This section contains the public API for rasters. + * + * Note that in FreeType 2, all rasters are now encapsulated within + * specific modules called 'renderers'. See `ftrender.h` for more details + * on renderers. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * raster + * + * @title: + * Scanline Converter + * + * @abstract: + * How vectorial outlines are converted into bitmaps and pixmaps. + * + * @description: + * This section contains technical definitions. + * + * @order: + * FT_Raster + * FT_Span + * FT_SpanFunc + * + * FT_Raster_Params + * FT_RASTER_FLAG_XXX + * + * FT_Raster_NewFunc + * FT_Raster_DoneFunc + * FT_Raster_ResetFunc + * FT_Raster_SetModeFunc + * FT_Raster_RenderFunc + * FT_Raster_Funcs + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Raster + * + * @description: + * An opaque handle (pointer) to a raster object. Each object can be + * used independently to convert an outline into a bitmap or pixmap. + */ + typedef struct FT_RasterRec_* FT_Raster; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Span + * + * @description: + * A structure used to model a single span of gray pixels when rendering + * an anti-aliased bitmap. + * + * @fields: + * x :: + * The span's horizontal start position. + * + * len :: + * The span's length in pixels. + * + * coverage :: + * The span color/coverage, ranging from 0 (background) to 255 + * (foreground). + * + * @note: + * This structure is used by the span drawing callback type named + * @FT_SpanFunc that takes the y~coordinate of the span as a parameter. + * + * The coverage value is always between 0 and 255. If you want less gray + * values, the callback function has to reduce them. + */ + typedef struct FT_Span_ + { + short x; + unsigned short len; + unsigned char coverage; + + } FT_Span; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_SpanFunc + * + * @description: + * A function used as a call-back by the anti-aliased renderer in order + * to let client applications draw themselves the gray pixel spans on + * each scan line. + * + * @input: + * y :: + * The scanline's y~coordinate. + * + * count :: + * The number of spans to draw on this scanline. + * + * spans :: + * A table of `count` spans to draw on the scanline. + * + * user :: + * User-supplied data that is passed to the callback. + * + * @note: + * This callback allows client applications to directly render the gray + * spans of the anti-aliased bitmap to any kind of surfaces. + * + * This can be used to write anti-aliased outlines directly to a given + * background bitmap, and even perform translucency. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_SpanFunc)( int y, + int count, + const FT_Span* spans, + void* user ); + +#define FT_Raster_Span_Func FT_SpanFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Raster_BitTest_Func + * + * @description: + * Deprecated, unimplemented. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Raster_BitTest_Func)( int y, + int x, + void* user ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Raster_BitSet_Func + * + * @description: + * Deprecated, unimplemented. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_Raster_BitSet_Func)( int y, + int x, + void* user ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_RASTER_FLAG_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit flag constants as used in the `flags` field of a + * @FT_Raster_Params structure. + * + * @values: + * FT_RASTER_FLAG_DEFAULT :: + * This value is 0. + * + * FT_RASTER_FLAG_AA :: + * This flag is set to indicate that an anti-aliased glyph image should + * be generated. Otherwise, it will be monochrome (1-bit). + * + * FT_RASTER_FLAG_DIRECT :: + * This flag is set to indicate direct rendering. In this mode, client + * applications must provide their own span callback. This lets them + * directly draw or compose over an existing bitmap. If this bit is + * not set, the target pixmap's buffer _must_ be zeroed before + * rendering. + * + * Direct rendering is only possible with anti-aliased glyphs. + * + * FT_RASTER_FLAG_CLIP :: + * This flag is only used in direct rendering mode. If set, the output + * will be clipped to a box specified in the `clip_box` field of the + * @FT_Raster_Params structure. + * + * Note that by default, the glyph bitmap is clipped to the target + * pixmap, except in direct rendering mode where all spans are + * generated if no clipping box is set. + */ +#define FT_RASTER_FLAG_DEFAULT 0x0 +#define FT_RASTER_FLAG_AA 0x1 +#define FT_RASTER_FLAG_DIRECT 0x2 +#define FT_RASTER_FLAG_CLIP 0x4 + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `FT_RASTER_FLAG_XXX` values instead */ +#define ft_raster_flag_default FT_RASTER_FLAG_DEFAULT +#define ft_raster_flag_aa FT_RASTER_FLAG_AA +#define ft_raster_flag_direct FT_RASTER_FLAG_DIRECT +#define ft_raster_flag_clip FT_RASTER_FLAG_CLIP + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Raster_Params + * + * @description: + * A structure to hold the arguments used by a raster's render function. + * + * @fields: + * target :: + * The target bitmap. + * + * source :: + * A pointer to the source glyph image (e.g., an @FT_Outline). + * + * flags :: + * The rendering flags. + * + * gray_spans :: + * The gray span drawing callback. + * + * black_spans :: + * Unused. + * + * bit_test :: + * Unused. + * + * bit_set :: + * Unused. + * + * user :: + * User-supplied data that is passed to each drawing callback. + * + * clip_box :: + * An optional clipping box. It is only used in direct rendering mode. + * Note that coordinates here should be expressed in _integer_ pixels + * (and not in 26.6 fixed-point units). + * + * @note: + * An anti-aliased glyph bitmap is drawn if the @FT_RASTER_FLAG_AA bit + * flag is set in the `flags` field, otherwise a monochrome bitmap is + * generated. + * + * If the @FT_RASTER_FLAG_DIRECT bit flag is set in `flags`, the raster + * will call the `gray_spans` callback to draw gray pixel spans. This + * allows direct composition over a pre-existing bitmap through + * user-provided callbacks to perform the span drawing and composition. + * Not supported by the monochrome rasterizer. + */ + typedef struct FT_Raster_Params_ + { + const FT_Bitmap* target; + const void* source; + int flags; + FT_SpanFunc gray_spans; + FT_SpanFunc black_spans; /* unused */ + FT_Raster_BitTest_Func bit_test; /* unused */ + FT_Raster_BitSet_Func bit_set; /* unused */ + void* user; + FT_BBox clip_box; + + } FT_Raster_Params; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Raster_NewFunc + * + * @description: + * A function used to create a new raster object. + * + * @input: + * memory :: + * A handle to the memory allocator. + * + * @output: + * raster :: + * A handle to the new raster object. + * + * @return: + * Error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The `memory` parameter is a typeless pointer in order to avoid + * un-wanted dependencies on the rest of the FreeType code. In practice, + * it is an @FT_Memory object, i.e., a handle to the standard FreeType + * memory allocator. However, this field can be completely ignored by a + * given raster implementation. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Raster_NewFunc)( void* memory, + FT_Raster* raster ); + +#define FT_Raster_New_Func FT_Raster_NewFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Raster_DoneFunc + * + * @description: + * A function used to destroy a given raster object. + * + * @input: + * raster :: + * A handle to the raster object. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_Raster_DoneFunc)( FT_Raster raster ); + +#define FT_Raster_Done_Func FT_Raster_DoneFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Raster_ResetFunc + * + * @description: + * FreeType used to provide an area of memory called the 'render pool' + * available to all registered rasterizers. This was not thread safe, + * however, and now FreeType never allocates this pool. + * + * This function is called after a new raster object is created. + * + * @input: + * raster :: + * A handle to the new raster object. + * + * pool_base :: + * Previously, the address in memory of the render pool. Set this to + * `NULL`. + * + * pool_size :: + * Previously, the size in bytes of the render pool. Set this to 0. + * + * @note: + * Rasterizers should rely on dynamic or stack allocation if they want to + * (a handle to the memory allocator is passed to the rasterizer + * constructor). + */ + typedef void + (*FT_Raster_ResetFunc)( FT_Raster raster, + unsigned char* pool_base, + unsigned long pool_size ); + +#define FT_Raster_Reset_Func FT_Raster_ResetFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Raster_SetModeFunc + * + * @description: + * This function is a generic facility to change modes or attributes in a + * given raster. This can be used for debugging purposes, or simply to + * allow implementation-specific 'features' in a given raster module. + * + * @input: + * raster :: + * A handle to the new raster object. + * + * mode :: + * A 4-byte tag used to name the mode or property. + * + * args :: + * A pointer to the new mode/property to use. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Raster_SetModeFunc)( FT_Raster raster, + unsigned long mode, + void* args ); + +#define FT_Raster_Set_Mode_Func FT_Raster_SetModeFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Raster_RenderFunc + * + * @description: + * Invoke a given raster to scan-convert a given glyph image into a + * target bitmap. + * + * @input: + * raster :: + * A handle to the raster object. + * + * params :: + * A pointer to an @FT_Raster_Params structure used to store the + * rendering parameters. + * + * @return: + * Error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The exact format of the source image depends on the raster's glyph + * format defined in its @FT_Raster_Funcs structure. It can be an + * @FT_Outline or anything else in order to support a large array of + * glyph formats. + * + * Note also that the render function can fail and return a + * `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` error code if the raster used does not + * support direct composition. + */ + typedef int + (*FT_Raster_RenderFunc)( FT_Raster raster, + const FT_Raster_Params* params ); + +#define FT_Raster_Render_Func FT_Raster_RenderFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Raster_Funcs + * + * @description: + * A structure used to describe a given raster class to the library. + * + * @fields: + * glyph_format :: + * The supported glyph format for this raster. + * + * raster_new :: + * The raster constructor. + * + * raster_reset :: + * Used to reset the render pool within the raster. + * + * raster_render :: + * A function to render a glyph into a given bitmap. + * + * raster_done :: + * The raster destructor. + */ + typedef struct FT_Raster_Funcs_ + { + FT_Glyph_Format glyph_format; + + FT_Raster_NewFunc raster_new; + FT_Raster_ResetFunc raster_reset; + FT_Raster_SetModeFunc raster_set_mode; + FT_Raster_RenderFunc raster_render; + FT_Raster_DoneFunc raster_done; + + } FT_Raster_Funcs; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTIMAGE_H_ */ + + +/* END */ + + +/* Local Variables: */ +/* coding: utf-8 */ +/* End: */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftincrem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftincrem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4db02b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftincrem.h @@ -0,0 +1,344 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftincrem.h + * + * FreeType incremental loading (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTINCREM_H_ +#define FTINCREM_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H +#include FT_PARAMETER_TAGS_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * incremental + * + * @title: + * Incremental Loading + * + * @abstract: + * Custom Glyph Loading. + * + * @description: + * This section contains various functions used to perform so-called + * 'incremental' glyph loading. This is a mode where all glyphs loaded + * from a given @FT_Face are provided by the client application. + * + * Apart from that, all other tables are loaded normally from the font + * file. This mode is useful when FreeType is used within another + * engine, e.g., a PostScript Imaging Processor. + * + * To enable this mode, you must use @FT_Open_Face, passing an + * @FT_Parameter with the @FT_PARAM_TAG_INCREMENTAL tag and an + * @FT_Incremental_Interface value. See the comments for + * @FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec for an example. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Incremental + * + * @description: + * An opaque type describing a user-provided object used to implement + * 'incremental' glyph loading within FreeType. This is used to support + * embedded fonts in certain environments (e.g., PostScript + * interpreters), where the glyph data isn't in the font file, or must be + * overridden by different values. + * + * @note: + * It is up to client applications to create and implement + * @FT_Incremental objects, as long as they provide implementations for + * the methods @FT_Incremental_GetGlyphDataFunc, + * @FT_Incremental_FreeGlyphDataFunc and + * @FT_Incremental_GetGlyphMetricsFunc. + * + * See the description of @FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec to understand how + * to use incremental objects with FreeType. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_IncrementalRec_* FT_Incremental; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Incremental_MetricsRec + * + * @description: + * A small structure used to contain the basic glyph metrics returned by + * the @FT_Incremental_GetGlyphMetricsFunc method. + * + * @fields: + * bearing_x :: + * Left bearing, in font units. + * + * bearing_y :: + * Top bearing, in font units. + * + * advance :: + * Horizontal component of glyph advance, in font units. + * + * advance_v :: + * Vertical component of glyph advance, in font units. + * + * @note: + * These correspond to horizontal or vertical metrics depending on the + * value of the `vertical` argument to the function + * @FT_Incremental_GetGlyphMetricsFunc. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_Incremental_MetricsRec_ + { + FT_Long bearing_x; + FT_Long bearing_y; + FT_Long advance; + FT_Long advance_v; /* since 2.3.12 */ + + } FT_Incremental_MetricsRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Incremental_Metrics + * + * @description: + * A handle to an @FT_Incremental_MetricsRec structure. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_Incremental_MetricsRec_* FT_Incremental_Metrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Incremental_GetGlyphDataFunc + * + * @description: + * A function called by FreeType to access a given glyph's data bytes + * during @FT_Load_Glyph or @FT_Load_Char if incremental loading is + * enabled. + * + * Note that the format of the glyph's data bytes depends on the font + * file format. For TrueType, it must correspond to the raw bytes within + * the 'glyf' table. For PostScript formats, it must correspond to the + * **unencrypted** charstring bytes, without any `lenIV` header. It is + * undefined for any other format. + * + * @input: + * incremental :: + * Handle to an opaque @FT_Incremental handle provided by the client + * application. + * + * glyph_index :: + * Index of relevant glyph. + * + * @output: + * adata :: + * A structure describing the returned glyph data bytes (which will be + * accessed as a read-only byte block). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If this function returns successfully the method + * @FT_Incremental_FreeGlyphDataFunc will be called later to release the + * data bytes. + * + * Nested calls to @FT_Incremental_GetGlyphDataFunc can happen for + * compound glyphs. + * + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Incremental_GetGlyphDataFunc)( FT_Incremental incremental, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Data* adata ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Incremental_FreeGlyphDataFunc + * + * @description: + * A function used to release the glyph data bytes returned by a + * successful call to @FT_Incremental_GetGlyphDataFunc. + * + * @input: + * incremental :: + * A handle to an opaque @FT_Incremental handle provided by the client + * application. + * + * data :: + * A structure describing the glyph data bytes (which will be accessed + * as a read-only byte block). + * + */ + typedef void + (*FT_Incremental_FreeGlyphDataFunc)( FT_Incremental incremental, + FT_Data* data ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Incremental_GetGlyphMetricsFunc + * + * @description: + * A function used to retrieve the basic metrics of a given glyph index + * before accessing its data. This is necessary because, in certain + * formats like TrueType, the metrics are stored in a different place + * from the glyph images proper. + * + * @input: + * incremental :: + * A handle to an opaque @FT_Incremental handle provided by the client + * application. + * + * glyph_index :: + * Index of relevant glyph. + * + * vertical :: + * If true, return vertical metrics. + * + * ametrics :: + * This parameter is used for both input and output. The original + * glyph metrics, if any, in font units. If metrics are not available + * all the values must be set to zero. + * + * @output: + * ametrics :: + * The replacement glyph metrics in font units. + * + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Incremental_GetGlyphMetricsFunc) + ( FT_Incremental incremental, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Bool vertical, + FT_Incremental_MetricsRec *ametrics ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Incremental_FuncsRec + * + * @description: + * A table of functions for accessing fonts that load data incrementally. + * Used in @FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec. + * + * @fields: + * get_glyph_data :: + * The function to get glyph data. Must not be null. + * + * free_glyph_data :: + * The function to release glyph data. Must not be null. + * + * get_glyph_metrics :: + * The function to get glyph metrics. May be null if the font does not + * provide overriding glyph metrics. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_Incremental_FuncsRec_ + { + FT_Incremental_GetGlyphDataFunc get_glyph_data; + FT_Incremental_FreeGlyphDataFunc free_glyph_data; + FT_Incremental_GetGlyphMetricsFunc get_glyph_metrics; + + } FT_Incremental_FuncsRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec + * + * @description: + * A structure to be used with @FT_Open_Face to indicate that the user + * wants to support incremental glyph loading. You should use it with + * @FT_PARAM_TAG_INCREMENTAL as in the following example: + * + * ``` + * FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec inc_int; + * FT_Parameter parameter; + * FT_Open_Args open_args; + * + * + * // set up incremental descriptor + * inc_int.funcs = my_funcs; + * inc_int.object = my_object; + * + * // set up optional parameter + * parameter.tag = FT_PARAM_TAG_INCREMENTAL; + * parameter.data = &inc_int; + * + * // set up FT_Open_Args structure + * open_args.flags = FT_OPEN_PATHNAME | FT_OPEN_PARAMS; + * open_args.pathname = my_font_pathname; + * open_args.num_params = 1; + * open_args.params = ¶meter; // we use one optional argument + * + * // open the font + * error = FT_Open_Face( library, &open_args, index, &face ); + * ... + * ``` + * + */ + typedef struct FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec_ + { + const FT_Incremental_FuncsRec* funcs; + FT_Incremental object; + + } FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Incremental_Interface + * + * @description: + * A pointer to an @FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec structure. + * + */ + typedef FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec* FT_Incremental_Interface; + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTINCREM_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlcdfil.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlcdfil.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a19d04 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlcdfil.h @@ -0,0 +1,328 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftlcdfil.h + * + * FreeType API for color filtering of subpixel bitmap glyphs + * (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2006-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTLCDFIL_H_ +#define FTLCDFIL_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H +#include FT_PARAMETER_TAGS_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * lcd_rendering + * + * @title: + * Subpixel Rendering + * + * @abstract: + * API to control subpixel rendering. + * + * @description: + * FreeType provides two alternative subpixel rendering technologies. + * Should you define `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING` in your + * `ftoption.h` file, this enables patented ClearType-style rendering. + * Otherwise, Harmony LCD rendering is enabled. These technologies are + * controlled differently and API described below, although always + * available, performs its function when appropriate method is enabled + * and does nothing otherwise. + * + * ClearType-style LCD rendering exploits the color-striped structure of + * LCD pixels, increasing the available resolution in the direction of + * the stripe (usually horizontal RGB) by a factor of~3. Using the + * subpixels coverages unfiltered can create severe color fringes + * especially when rendering thin features. Indeed, to produce + * black-on-white text, the nearby color subpixels must be dimmed + * equally. + * + * A good 5-tap FIR filter should be applied to subpixel coverages + * regardless of pixel boundaries and should have these properties: + * + * 1. It should be symmetrical, like {~a, b, c, b, a~}, to avoid + * any shifts in appearance. + * + * 2. It should be color-balanced, meaning a~+ b~=~c, to reduce color + * fringes by distributing the computed coverage for one subpixel to + * all subpixels equally. + * + * 3. It should be normalized, meaning 2a~+ 2b~+ c~=~1.0 to maintain + * overall brightness. + * + * Boxy 3-tap filter {0, 1/3, 1/3, 1/3, 0} is sharper but is less + * forgiving of non-ideal gamma curves of a screen (and viewing angles), + * beveled filters are fuzzier but more tolerant. + * + * Use the @FT_Library_SetLcdFilter or @FT_Library_SetLcdFilterWeights + * API to specify a low-pass filter, which is then applied to + * subpixel-rendered bitmaps generated through @FT_Render_Glyph. + * + * Harmony LCD rendering is suitable to panels with any regular subpixel + * structure, not just monitors with 3 color striped subpixels, as long + * as the color subpixels have fixed positions relative to the pixel + * center. In this case, each color channel is then rendered separately + * after shifting the outline opposite to the subpixel shift so that the + * coverage maps are aligned. This method is immune to color fringes + * because the shifts do not change integral coverage. + * + * The subpixel geometry must be specified by xy-coordinates for each + * subpixel. By convention they may come in the RGB order: {{-1/3, 0}, + * {0, 0}, {1/3, 0}} for standard RGB striped panel or {{-1/6, 1/4}, + * {-1/6, -1/4}, {1/3, 0}} for a certain PenTile panel. + * + * Use the @FT_Library_SetLcdGeometry API to specify subpixel positions. + * If one follows the RGB order convention, the same order applies to the + * resulting @FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD and @FT_PIXEL_MODE_LCD_V bitmaps. Note, + * however, that the coordinate frame for the latter must be rotated + * clockwise. Harmony with default LCD geometry is equivalent to + * ClearType with light filter. + * + * As a result of ClearType filtering or Harmony rendering, the + * dimensions of LCD bitmaps can be either wider or taller than the + * dimensions of the corresponding outline with regard to the pixel grid. + * For example, for @FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD, the filter adds 2~subpixels to + * the left, and 2~subpixels to the right. The bitmap offset values are + * adjusted accordingly, so clients shouldn't need to modify their layout + * and glyph positioning code when enabling the filter. + * + * The ClearType and Harmony rendering is applicable to glyph bitmaps + * rendered through @FT_Render_Glyph, @FT_Load_Glyph, @FT_Load_Char, and + * @FT_Glyph_To_Bitmap, when @FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD or @FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD_V + * is specified. This API does not control @FT_Outline_Render and + * @FT_Outline_Get_Bitmap. + * + * The described algorithms can completely remove color artefacts when + * combined with gamma-corrected alpha blending in linear space. Each of + * the 3~alpha values (subpixels) must by independently used to blend one + * color channel. That is, red alpha blends the red channel of the text + * color with the red channel of the background pixel. + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_LcdFilter + * + * @description: + * A list of values to identify various types of LCD filters. + * + * @values: + * FT_LCD_FILTER_NONE :: + * Do not perform filtering. When used with subpixel rendering, this + * results in sometimes severe color fringes. + * + * FT_LCD_FILTER_DEFAULT :: + * This is a beveled, normalized, and color-balanced five-tap filter + * with weights of [0x08 0x4D 0x56 0x4D 0x08] in 1/256th units. + * + * FT_LCD_FILTER_LIGHT :: + * this is a boxy, normalized, and color-balanced three-tap filter with + * weights of [0x00 0x55 0x56 0x55 0x00] in 1/256th units. + * + * FT_LCD_FILTER_LEGACY :: + * FT_LCD_FILTER_LEGACY1 :: + * This filter corresponds to the original libXft color filter. It + * provides high contrast output but can exhibit really bad color + * fringes if glyphs are not extremely well hinted to the pixel grid. + * This filter is only provided for comparison purposes, and might be + * disabled or stay unsupported in the future. The second value is + * provided for compatibility with FontConfig, which historically used + * different enumeration, sometimes incorrectly forwarded to FreeType. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.0 (`FT_LCD_FILTER_LEGACY1` since 2.6.2) + */ + typedef enum FT_LcdFilter_ + { + FT_LCD_FILTER_NONE = 0, + FT_LCD_FILTER_DEFAULT = 1, + FT_LCD_FILTER_LIGHT = 2, + FT_LCD_FILTER_LEGACY1 = 3, + FT_LCD_FILTER_LEGACY = 16, + + FT_LCD_FILTER_MAX /* do not remove */ + + } FT_LcdFilter; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Library_SetLcdFilter + * + * @description: + * This function is used to apply color filtering to LCD decimated + * bitmaps, like the ones used when calling @FT_Render_Glyph with + * @FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD or @FT_RENDER_MODE_LCD_V. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the target library instance. + * + * filter :: + * The filter type. + * + * You can use @FT_LCD_FILTER_NONE here to disable this feature, or + * @FT_LCD_FILTER_DEFAULT to use a default filter that should work well + * on most LCD screens. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This feature is always disabled by default. Clients must make an + * explicit call to this function with a `filter` value other than + * @FT_LCD_FILTER_NONE in order to enable it. + * + * Due to **PATENTS** covering subpixel rendering, this function doesn't + * do anything except returning `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` if the + * configuration macro `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING` is not + * defined in your build of the library, which should correspond to all + * default builds of FreeType. + * + * @since: + * 2.3.0 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Library_SetLcdFilter( FT_Library library, + FT_LcdFilter filter ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Library_SetLcdFilterWeights + * + * @description: + * This function can be used to enable LCD filter with custom weights, + * instead of using presets in @FT_Library_SetLcdFilter. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the target library instance. + * + * weights :: + * A pointer to an array; the function copies the first five bytes and + * uses them to specify the filter weights in 1/256th units. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Due to **PATENTS** covering subpixel rendering, this function doesn't + * do anything except returning `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` if the + * configuration macro `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING` is not + * defined in your build of the library, which should correspond to all + * default builds of FreeType. + * + * LCD filter weights can also be set per face using @FT_Face_Properties + * with @FT_PARAM_TAG_LCD_FILTER_WEIGHTS. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.0 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Library_SetLcdFilterWeights( FT_Library library, + unsigned char *weights ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_LcdFiveTapFilter + * + * @description: + * A typedef for passing the five LCD filter weights to + * @FT_Face_Properties within an @FT_Parameter structure. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + * + */ +#define FT_LCD_FILTER_FIVE_TAPS 5 + + typedef FT_Byte FT_LcdFiveTapFilter[FT_LCD_FILTER_FIVE_TAPS]; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Library_SetLcdGeometry + * + * @description: + * This function can be used to modify default positions of color + * subpixels, which controls Harmony LCD rendering. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the target library instance. + * + * sub :: + * A pointer to an array of 3 vectors in 26.6 fractional pixel format; + * the function modifies the default values, see the note below. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Subpixel geometry examples: + * + * - {{-21, 0}, {0, 0}, {21, 0}} is the default, corresponding to 3 color + * stripes shifted by a third of a pixel. This could be an RGB panel. + * + * - {{21, 0}, {0, 0}, {-21, 0}} looks the same as the default but can + * specify a BGR panel instead, while keeping the bitmap in the same + * RGB888 format. + * + * - {{0, 21}, {0, 0}, {0, -21}} is the vertical RGB, but the bitmap + * stays RGB888 as a result. + * + * - {{-11, 16}, {-11, -16}, {22, 0}} is a certain PenTile arrangement. + * + * This function does nothing and returns `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` + * in the context of ClearType-style subpixel rendering when + * `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING` is defined in your build of the + * library. + * + * @since: + * 2.10.0 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Library_SetLcdGeometry( FT_Library library, + FT_Vector sub[3] ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTLCDFIL_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlist.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlist.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4782892 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlist.h @@ -0,0 +1,297 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftlist.h + * + * Generic list support for FreeType (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This file implements functions relative to list processing. Its data + * structures are defined in `freetype.h`. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTLIST_H_ +#define FTLIST_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * list_processing + * + * @title: + * List Processing + * + * @abstract: + * Simple management of lists. + * + * @description: + * This section contains various definitions related to list processing + * using doubly-linked nodes. + * + * @order: + * FT_List + * FT_ListNode + * FT_ListRec + * FT_ListNodeRec + * + * FT_List_Add + * FT_List_Insert + * FT_List_Find + * FT_List_Remove + * FT_List_Up + * FT_List_Iterate + * FT_List_Iterator + * FT_List_Finalize + * FT_List_Destructor + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_List_Find + * + * @description: + * Find the list node for a given listed object. + * + * @input: + * list :: + * A pointer to the parent list. + * data :: + * The address of the listed object. + * + * @return: + * List node. `NULL` if it wasn't found. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_ListNode ) + FT_List_Find( FT_List list, + void* data ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_List_Add + * + * @description: + * Append an element to the end of a list. + * + * @inout: + * list :: + * A pointer to the parent list. + * node :: + * The node to append. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_List_Add( FT_List list, + FT_ListNode node ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_List_Insert + * + * @description: + * Insert an element at the head of a list. + * + * @inout: + * list :: + * A pointer to parent list. + * node :: + * The node to insert. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_List_Insert( FT_List list, + FT_ListNode node ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_List_Remove + * + * @description: + * Remove a node from a list. This function doesn't check whether the + * node is in the list! + * + * @input: + * node :: + * The node to remove. + * + * @inout: + * list :: + * A pointer to the parent list. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_List_Remove( FT_List list, + FT_ListNode node ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_List_Up + * + * @description: + * Move a node to the head/top of a list. Used to maintain LRU lists. + * + * @inout: + * list :: + * A pointer to the parent list. + * node :: + * The node to move. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_List_Up( FT_List list, + FT_ListNode node ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_List_Iterator + * + * @description: + * An FT_List iterator function that is called during a list parse by + * @FT_List_Iterate. + * + * @input: + * node :: + * The current iteration list node. + * + * user :: + * A typeless pointer passed to @FT_List_Iterate. Can be used to point + * to the iteration's state. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_List_Iterator)( FT_ListNode node, + void* user ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_List_Iterate + * + * @description: + * Parse a list and calls a given iterator function on each element. + * Note that parsing is stopped as soon as one of the iterator calls + * returns a non-zero value. + * + * @input: + * list :: + * A handle to the list. + * iterator :: + * An iterator function, called on each node of the list. + * user :: + * A user-supplied field that is passed as the second argument to the + * iterator. + * + * @return: + * The result (a FreeType error code) of the last iterator call. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_List_Iterate( FT_List list, + FT_List_Iterator iterator, + void* user ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_List_Destructor + * + * @description: + * An @FT_List iterator function that is called during a list + * finalization by @FT_List_Finalize to destroy all elements in a given + * list. + * + * @input: + * system :: + * The current system object. + * + * data :: + * The current object to destroy. + * + * user :: + * A typeless pointer passed to @FT_List_Iterate. It can be used to + * point to the iteration's state. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_List_Destructor)( FT_Memory memory, + void* data, + void* user ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_List_Finalize + * + * @description: + * Destroy all elements in the list as well as the list itself. + * + * @input: + * list :: + * A handle to the list. + * + * destroy :: + * A list destructor that will be applied to each element of the list. + * Set this to `NULL` if not needed. + * + * memory :: + * The current memory object that handles deallocation. + * + * user :: + * A user-supplied field that is passed as the last argument to the + * destructor. + * + * @note: + * This function expects that all nodes added by @FT_List_Add or + * @FT_List_Insert have been dynamically allocated. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_List_Finalize( FT_List list, + FT_List_Destructor destroy, + FT_Memory memory, + void* user ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTLIST_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlzw.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlzw.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd22968 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftlzw.h @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftlzw.h + * + * LZW-compressed stream support. + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTLZW_H_ +#define FTLZW_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * lzw + * + * @title: + * LZW Streams + * + * @abstract: + * Using LZW-compressed font files. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of LZW-specific functions. + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stream_OpenLZW + * + * @description: + * Open a new stream to parse LZW-compressed font files. This is mainly + * used to support the compressed `*.pcf.Z` fonts that come with XFree86. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * The target embedding stream. + * + * source :: + * The source stream. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The source stream must be opened _before_ calling this function. + * + * Calling the internal function `FT_Stream_Close` on the new stream will + * **not** call `FT_Stream_Close` on the source stream. None of the + * stream objects will be released to the heap. + * + * The stream implementation is very basic and resets the decompression + * process each time seeking backwards is needed within the stream + * + * In certain builds of the library, LZW compression recognition is + * automatically handled when calling @FT_New_Face or @FT_Open_Face. + * This means that if no font driver is capable of handling the raw + * compressed file, the library will try to open a LZW stream from it and + * re-open the face with it. + * + * This function may return `FT_Err_Unimplemented_Feature` if your build + * of FreeType was not compiled with LZW support. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_OpenLZW( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Stream source ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTLZW_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmac.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmac.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..92b9f3d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmac.h @@ -0,0 +1,290 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftmac.h + * + * Additional Mac-specific API. + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * Just van Rossum, David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +/**************************************************************************** + * + * NOTE: Include this file after `FT_FREETYPE_H` and after any + * Mac-specific headers (because this header uses Mac types such as + * 'Handle', 'FSSpec', 'FSRef', etc.) + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTMAC_H_ +#define FTMAC_H_ + + +#include + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* gcc-3.1 and later can warn about functions tagged as deprecated */ +#ifndef FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE +#if defined( __GNUC__ ) && \ + ( ( __GNUC__ >= 4 ) || \ + ( ( __GNUC__ == 3 ) && ( __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 1 ) ) ) +#define FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE __attribute__(( deprecated )) +#else +#define FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * mac_specific + * + * @title: + * Mac Specific Interface + * + * @abstract: + * Only available on the Macintosh. + * + * @description: + * The following definitions are only available if FreeType is compiled + * on a Macintosh. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Face_From_FOND + * + * @description: + * Create a new face object from a FOND resource. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library resource. + * + * @input: + * fond :: + * A FOND resource. + * + * face_index :: + * Only supported for the -1 'sanity check' special case. + * + * @output: + * aface :: + * A handle to a new face object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @example: + * This function can be used to create @FT_Face objects from fonts that + * are installed in the system as follows. + * + * ``` + * fond = GetResource( 'FOND', fontName ); + * error = FT_New_Face_From_FOND( library, fond, 0, &face ); + * ``` + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Face_From_FOND( FT_Library library, + Handle fond, + FT_Long face_index, + FT_Face *aface ) + FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_GetFile_From_Mac_Name + * + * @description: + * Return an FSSpec for the disk file containing the named font. + * + * @input: + * fontName :: + * Mac OS name of the font (e.g., Times New Roman Bold). + * + * @output: + * pathSpec :: + * FSSpec to the file. For passing to @FT_New_Face_From_FSSpec. + * + * face_index :: + * Index of the face. For passing to @FT_New_Face_From_FSSpec. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_GetFile_From_Mac_Name( const char* fontName, + FSSpec* pathSpec, + FT_Long* face_index ) + FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_GetFile_From_Mac_ATS_Name + * + * @description: + * Return an FSSpec for the disk file containing the named font. + * + * @input: + * fontName :: + * Mac OS name of the font in ATS framework. + * + * @output: + * pathSpec :: + * FSSpec to the file. For passing to @FT_New_Face_From_FSSpec. + * + * face_index :: + * Index of the face. For passing to @FT_New_Face_From_FSSpec. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_GetFile_From_Mac_ATS_Name( const char* fontName, + FSSpec* pathSpec, + FT_Long* face_index ) + FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_GetFilePath_From_Mac_ATS_Name + * + * @description: + * Return a pathname of the disk file and face index for given font name + * that is handled by ATS framework. + * + * @input: + * fontName :: + * Mac OS name of the font in ATS framework. + * + * @output: + * path :: + * Buffer to store pathname of the file. For passing to @FT_New_Face. + * The client must allocate this buffer before calling this function. + * + * maxPathSize :: + * Lengths of the buffer `path` that client allocated. + * + * face_index :: + * Index of the face. For passing to @FT_New_Face. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_GetFilePath_From_Mac_ATS_Name( const char* fontName, + UInt8* path, + UInt32 maxPathSize, + FT_Long* face_index ) + FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Face_From_FSSpec + * + * @description: + * Create a new face object from a given resource and typeface index + * using an FSSpec to the font file. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library resource. + * + * @input: + * spec :: + * FSSpec to the font file. + * + * face_index :: + * The index of the face within the resource. The first face has + * index~0. + * @output: + * aface :: + * A handle to a new face object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * @FT_New_Face_From_FSSpec is identical to @FT_New_Face except it + * accepts an FSSpec instead of a path. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Face_From_FSSpec( FT_Library library, + const FSSpec *spec, + FT_Long face_index, + FT_Face *aface ) + FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Face_From_FSRef + * + * @description: + * Create a new face object from a given resource and typeface index + * using an FSRef to the font file. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library resource. + * + * @input: + * spec :: + * FSRef to the font file. + * + * face_index :: + * The index of the face within the resource. The first face has + * index~0. + * @output: + * aface :: + * A handle to a new face object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * @FT_New_Face_From_FSRef is identical to @FT_New_Face except it accepts + * an FSRef instead of a path. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Face_From_FSRef( FT_Library library, + const FSRef *ref, + FT_Long face_index, + FT_Face *aface ) + FT_DEPRECATED_ATTRIBUTE; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* FTMAC_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmm.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmm.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2e16b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmm.h @@ -0,0 +1,753 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftmm.h + * + * FreeType Multiple Master font interface (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTMM_H_ +#define FTMM_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_TYPE1_TABLES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * multiple_masters + * + * @title: + * Multiple Masters + * + * @abstract: + * How to manage Multiple Masters fonts. + * + * @description: + * The following types and functions are used to manage Multiple Master + * fonts, i.e., the selection of specific design instances by setting + * design axis coordinates. + * + * Besides Adobe MM fonts, the interface supports Apple's TrueType GX and + * OpenType variation fonts. Some of the routines only work with Adobe + * MM fonts, others will work with all three types. They are similar + * enough that a consistent interface makes sense. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_MM_Axis + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a given axis in design space for Multiple Masters + * fonts. + * + * This structure can't be used for TrueType GX or OpenType variation + * fonts. + * + * @fields: + * name :: + * The axis's name. + * + * minimum :: + * The axis's minimum design coordinate. + * + * maximum :: + * The axis's maximum design coordinate. + */ + typedef struct FT_MM_Axis_ + { + FT_String* name; + FT_Long minimum; + FT_Long maximum; + + } FT_MM_Axis; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Multi_Master + * + * @description: + * A structure to model the axes and space of a Multiple Masters font. + * + * This structure can't be used for TrueType GX or OpenType variation + * fonts. + * + * @fields: + * num_axis :: + * Number of axes. Cannot exceed~4. + * + * num_designs :: + * Number of designs; should be normally 2^num_axis even though the + * Type~1 specification strangely allows for intermediate designs to be + * present. This number cannot exceed~16. + * + * axis :: + * A table of axis descriptors. + */ + typedef struct FT_Multi_Master_ + { + FT_UInt num_axis; + FT_UInt num_designs; + FT_MM_Axis axis[T1_MAX_MM_AXIS]; + + } FT_Multi_Master; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Var_Axis + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a given axis in design space for Multiple + * Masters, TrueType GX, and OpenType variation fonts. + * + * @fields: + * name :: + * The axis's name. Not always meaningful for TrueType GX or OpenType + * variation fonts. + * + * minimum :: + * The axis's minimum design coordinate. + * + * def :: + * The axis's default design coordinate. FreeType computes meaningful + * default values for Adobe MM fonts. + * + * maximum :: + * The axis's maximum design coordinate. + * + * tag :: + * The axis's tag (the equivalent to 'name' for TrueType GX and + * OpenType variation fonts). FreeType provides default values for + * Adobe MM fonts if possible. + * + * strid :: + * The axis name entry in the font's 'name' table. This is another + * (and often better) version of the 'name' field for TrueType GX or + * OpenType variation fonts. Not meaningful for Adobe MM fonts. + * + * @note: + * The fields `minimum`, `def`, and `maximum` are 16.16 fractional values + * for TrueType GX and OpenType variation fonts. For Adobe MM fonts, the + * values are integers. + */ + typedef struct FT_Var_Axis_ + { + FT_String* name; + + FT_Fixed minimum; + FT_Fixed def; + FT_Fixed maximum; + + FT_ULong tag; + FT_UInt strid; + + } FT_Var_Axis; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Var_Named_Style + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a named instance in a TrueType GX or OpenType + * variation font. + * + * This structure can't be used for Adobe MM fonts. + * + * @fields: + * coords :: + * The design coordinates for this instance. This is an array with one + * entry for each axis. + * + * strid :: + * The entry in 'name' table identifying this instance. + * + * psid :: + * The entry in 'name' table identifying a PostScript name for this + * instance. Value 0xFFFF indicates a missing entry. + */ + typedef struct FT_Var_Named_Style_ + { + FT_Fixed* coords; + FT_UInt strid; + FT_UInt psid; /* since 2.7.1 */ + + } FT_Var_Named_Style; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_MM_Var + * + * @description: + * A structure to model the axes and space of an Adobe MM, TrueType GX, + * or OpenType variation font. + * + * Some fields are specific to one format and not to the others. + * + * @fields: + * num_axis :: + * The number of axes. The maximum value is~4 for Adobe MM fonts; no + * limit in TrueType GX or OpenType variation fonts. + * + * num_designs :: + * The number of designs; should be normally 2^num_axis for Adobe MM + * fonts. Not meaningful for TrueType GX or OpenType variation fonts + * (where every glyph could have a different number of designs). + * + * num_namedstyles :: + * The number of named styles; a 'named style' is a tuple of design + * coordinates that has a string ID (in the 'name' table) associated + * with it. The font can tell the user that, for example, + * [Weight=1.5,Width=1.1] is 'Bold'. Another name for 'named style' is + * 'named instance'. + * + * For Adobe Multiple Masters fonts, this value is always zero because + * the format does not support named styles. + * + * axis :: + * An axis descriptor table. TrueType GX and OpenType variation fonts + * contain slightly more data than Adobe MM fonts. Memory management + * of this pointer is done internally by FreeType. + * + * namedstyle :: + * A named style (instance) table. Only meaningful for TrueType GX and + * OpenType variation fonts. Memory management of this pointer is done + * internally by FreeType. + */ + typedef struct FT_MM_Var_ + { + FT_UInt num_axis; + FT_UInt num_designs; + FT_UInt num_namedstyles; + FT_Var_Axis* axis; + FT_Var_Named_Style* namedstyle; + + } FT_MM_Var; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Multi_Master + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a variation descriptor of a given Adobe MM font. + * + * This function can't be used with TrueType GX or OpenType variation + * fonts. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * @output: + * amaster :: + * The Multiple Masters descriptor. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Multi_Master( FT_Face face, + FT_Multi_Master *amaster ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_MM_Var + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a variation descriptor for a given font. + * + * This function works with all supported variation formats. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * @output: + * amaster :: + * The variation descriptor. Allocates a data structure, which the + * user must deallocate with a call to @FT_Done_MM_Var after use. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_MM_Var( FT_Face face, + FT_MM_Var* *amaster ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_MM_Var + * + * @description: + * Free the memory allocated by @FT_Get_MM_Var. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle of the face's parent library object that was used in the + * call to @FT_Get_MM_Var to create `amaster`. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Done_MM_Var( FT_Library library, + FT_MM_Var *amaster ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_MM_Design_Coordinates + * + * @description: + * For Adobe MM fonts, choose an interpolated font design through design + * coordinates. + * + * This function can't be used with TrueType GX or OpenType variation + * fonts. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * @input: + * num_coords :: + * The number of available design coordinates. If it is larger than + * the number of axes, ignore the excess values. If it is smaller than + * the number of axes, use default values for the remaining axes. + * + * coords :: + * An array of design coordinates. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * [Since 2.8.1] To reset all axes to the default values, call the + * function with `num_coords` set to zero and `coords` set to `NULL`. + * + * [Since 2.9] If `num_coords` is larger than zero, this function sets + * the @FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION bit in @FT_Face's `face_flags` field + * (i.e., @FT_IS_VARIATION will return true). If `num_coords` is zero, + * this bit flag gets unset. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_MM_Design_Coordinates( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Long* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates + * + * @description: + * Choose an interpolated font design through design coordinates. + * + * This function works with all supported variation formats. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * @input: + * num_coords :: + * The number of available design coordinates. If it is larger than + * the number of axes, ignore the excess values. If it is smaller than + * the number of axes, use default values for the remaining axes. + * + * coords :: + * An array of design coordinates. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * [Since 2.8.1] To reset all axes to the default values, call the + * function with `num_coords` set to zero and `coords` set to `NULL`. + * [Since 2.9] 'Default values' means the currently selected named + * instance (or the base font if no named instance is selected). + * + * [Since 2.9] If `num_coords` is larger than zero, this function sets + * the @FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION bit in @FT_Face's `face_flags` field + * (i.e., @FT_IS_VARIATION will return true). If `num_coords` is zero, + * this bit flag gets unset. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Var_Design_Coordinates + * + * @description: + * Get the design coordinates of the currently selected interpolated + * font. + * + * This function works with all supported variation formats. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * num_coords :: + * The number of design coordinates to retrieve. If it is larger than + * the number of axes, set the excess values to~0. + * + * @output: + * coords :: + * The design coordinates array. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @since: + * 2.7.1 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Var_Design_Coordinates( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_MM_Blend_Coordinates + * + * @description: + * Choose an interpolated font design through normalized blend + * coordinates. + * + * This function works with all supported variation formats. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * @input: + * num_coords :: + * The number of available design coordinates. If it is larger than + * the number of axes, ignore the excess values. If it is smaller than + * the number of axes, use default values for the remaining axes. + * + * coords :: + * The design coordinates array (each element must be between 0 and 1.0 + * for Adobe MM fonts, and between -1.0 and 1.0 for TrueType GX and + * OpenType variation fonts). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * [Since 2.8.1] To reset all axes to the default values, call the + * function with `num_coords` set to zero and `coords` set to `NULL`. + * [Since 2.9] 'Default values' means the currently selected named + * instance (or the base font if no named instance is selected). + * + * [Since 2.9] If `num_coords` is larger than zero, this function sets + * the @FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION bit in @FT_Face's `face_flags` field + * (i.e., @FT_IS_VARIATION will return true). If `num_coords` is zero, + * this bit flag gets unset. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_MM_Blend_Coordinates( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_MM_Blend_Coordinates + * + * @description: + * Get the normalized blend coordinates of the currently selected + * interpolated font. + * + * This function works with all supported variation formats. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * num_coords :: + * The number of normalized blend coordinates to retrieve. If it is + * larger than the number of axes, set the excess values to~0.5 for + * Adobe MM fonts, and to~0 for TrueType GX and OpenType variation + * fonts. + * + * @output: + * coords :: + * The normalized blend coordinates array. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @since: + * 2.7.1 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_MM_Blend_Coordinates( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Var_Blend_Coordinates + * + * @description: + * This is another name of @FT_Set_MM_Blend_Coordinates. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_Var_Blend_Coordinates( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Var_Blend_Coordinates + * + * @description: + * This is another name of @FT_Get_MM_Blend_Coordinates. + * + * @since: + * 2.7.1 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Var_Blend_Coordinates( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_MM_WeightVector + * + * @description: + * For Adobe MM fonts, choose an interpolated font design by directly + * setting the weight vector. + * + * This function can't be used with TrueType GX or OpenType variation + * fonts. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * @input: + * len :: + * The length of the weight vector array. If it is larger than the + * number of designs, the extra values are ignored. If it is less than + * the number of designs, the remaining values are set to zero. + * + * weightvector :: + * An array representing the weight vector. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Adobe Multiple Master fonts limit the number of designs, and thus the + * length of the weight vector to~16. + * + * If `len` is zero and `weightvector` is `NULL`, the weight vector array + * is reset to the default values. + * + * The Adobe documentation also states that the values in the + * WeightVector array must total 1.0 +/-~0.001. In practice this does + * not seem to be enforced, so is not enforced here, either. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_MM_WeightVector( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt len, + FT_Fixed* weightvector ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_MM_WeightVector + * + * @description: + * For Adobe MM fonts, retrieve the current weight vector of the font. + * + * This function can't be used with TrueType GX or OpenType variation + * fonts. + * + * @inout: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * len :: + * A pointer to the size of the array to be filled. If the size of the + * array is less than the number of designs, `FT_Err_Invalid_Argument` + * is returned, and `len` is set to the required size (the number of + * designs). If the size of the array is greater than the number of + * designs, the remaining entries are set to~0. On successful + * completion, `len` is set to the number of designs (i.e., the number + * of values written to the array). + * + * @output: + * weightvector :: + * An array to be filled. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * Adobe Multiple Master fonts limit the number of designs, and thus the + * length of the WeightVector to~16. + * + * @since: + * 2.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_MM_WeightVector( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt* len, + FT_Fixed* weightvector ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_VAR_AXIS_FLAG_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit flags used in the return value of + * @FT_Get_Var_Axis_Flags. + * + * @values: + * FT_VAR_AXIS_FLAG_HIDDEN :: + * The variation axis should not be exposed to user interfaces. + * + * @since: + * 2.8.1 + */ +#define FT_VAR_AXIS_FLAG_HIDDEN 1 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Var_Axis_Flags + * + * @description: + * Get the 'flags' field of an OpenType Variation Axis Record. + * + * Not meaningful for Adobe MM fonts (`*flags` is always zero). + * + * @input: + * master :: + * The variation descriptor. + * + * axis_index :: + * The index of the requested variation axis. + * + * @output: + * flags :: + * The 'flags' field. See @FT_VAR_AXIS_FLAG_XXX for possible values. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @since: + * 2.8.1 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Var_Axis_Flags( FT_MM_Var* master, + FT_UInt axis_index, + FT_UInt* flags ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Named_Instance + * + * @description: + * Set or change the current named instance. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * instance_index :: + * The index of the requested instance, starting with value 1. If set + * to value 0, FreeType switches to font access without a named + * instance. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The function uses the value of `instance_index` to set bits 16-30 of + * the face's `face_index` field. It also resets any variation applied + * to the font, and the @FT_FACE_FLAG_VARIATION bit of the face's + * `face_flags` field gets reset to zero (i.e., @FT_IS_VARIATION will + * return false). + * + * For Adobe MM fonts (which don't have named instances) this function + * simply resets the current face to the default instance. + * + * @since: + * 2.9 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_Named_Instance( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt instance_index ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTMM_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmodapi.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmodapi.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..88488bf --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmodapi.h @@ -0,0 +1,785 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftmodapi.h + * + * FreeType modules public interface (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTMODAPI_H_ +#define FTMODAPI_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * module_management + * + * @title: + * Module Management + * + * @abstract: + * How to add, upgrade, remove, and control modules from FreeType. + * + * @description: + * The definitions below are used to manage modules within FreeType. + * Modules can be added, upgraded, and removed at runtime. Additionally, + * some module properties can be controlled also. + * + * Here is a list of possible values of the `module_name` field in the + * @FT_Module_Class structure. + * + * ``` + * autofitter + * bdf + * cff + * gxvalid + * otvalid + * pcf + * pfr + * psaux + * pshinter + * psnames + * raster1 + * sfnt + * smooth, smooth-lcd, smooth-lcdv + * truetype + * type1 + * type42 + * t1cid + * winfonts + * ``` + * + * Note that the FreeType Cache sub-system is not a FreeType module. + * + * @order: + * FT_Module + * FT_Module_Constructor + * FT_Module_Destructor + * FT_Module_Requester + * FT_Module_Class + * + * FT_Add_Module + * FT_Get_Module + * FT_Remove_Module + * FT_Add_Default_Modules + * + * FT_Property_Set + * FT_Property_Get + * FT_Set_Default_Properties + * + * FT_New_Library + * FT_Done_Library + * FT_Reference_Library + * + * FT_Renderer + * FT_Renderer_Class + * + * FT_Get_Renderer + * FT_Set_Renderer + * + * FT_Set_Debug_Hook + * + */ + + + /* module bit flags */ +#define FT_MODULE_FONT_DRIVER 1 /* this module is a font driver */ +#define FT_MODULE_RENDERER 2 /* this module is a renderer */ +#define FT_MODULE_HINTER 4 /* this module is a glyph hinter */ +#define FT_MODULE_STYLER 8 /* this module is a styler */ + +#define FT_MODULE_DRIVER_SCALABLE 0x100 /* the driver supports */ + /* scalable fonts */ +#define FT_MODULE_DRIVER_NO_OUTLINES 0x200 /* the driver does not */ + /* support vector outlines */ +#define FT_MODULE_DRIVER_HAS_HINTER 0x400 /* the driver provides its */ + /* own hinter */ +#define FT_MODULE_DRIVER_HINTS_LIGHTLY 0x800 /* the driver's hinter */ + /* produces LIGHT hints */ + + + /* deprecated values */ +#define ft_module_font_driver FT_MODULE_FONT_DRIVER +#define ft_module_renderer FT_MODULE_RENDERER +#define ft_module_hinter FT_MODULE_HINTER +#define ft_module_styler FT_MODULE_STYLER + +#define ft_module_driver_scalable FT_MODULE_DRIVER_SCALABLE +#define ft_module_driver_no_outlines FT_MODULE_DRIVER_NO_OUTLINES +#define ft_module_driver_has_hinter FT_MODULE_DRIVER_HAS_HINTER +#define ft_module_driver_hints_lightly FT_MODULE_DRIVER_HINTS_LIGHTLY + + + typedef FT_Pointer FT_Module_Interface; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Module_Constructor + * + * @description: + * A function used to initialize (not create) a new module object. + * + * @input: + * module :: + * The module to initialize. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Module_Constructor)( FT_Module module ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Module_Destructor + * + * @description: + * A function used to finalize (not destroy) a given module object. + * + * @input: + * module :: + * The module to finalize. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_Module_Destructor)( FT_Module module ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Module_Requester + * + * @description: + * A function used to query a given module for a specific interface. + * + * @input: + * module :: + * The module to be searched. + * + * name :: + * The name of the interface in the module. + */ + typedef FT_Module_Interface + (*FT_Module_Requester)( FT_Module module, + const char* name ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Module_Class + * + * @description: + * The module class descriptor. While being a public structure necessary + * for FreeType's module bookkeeping, most of the fields are essentially + * internal, not to be used directly by an application. + * + * @fields: + * module_flags :: + * Bit flags describing the module. + * + * module_size :: + * The size of one module object/instance in bytes. + * + * module_name :: + * The name of the module. + * + * module_version :: + * The version, as a 16.16 fixed number (major.minor). + * + * module_requires :: + * The version of FreeType this module requires, as a 16.16 fixed + * number (major.minor). Starts at version 2.0, i.e., 0x20000. + * + * module_interface :: + * A typeless pointer to a structure (which varies between different + * modules) that holds the module's interface functions. This is + * essentially what `get_interface` returns. + * + * module_init :: + * The initializing function. + * + * module_done :: + * The finalizing function. + * + * get_interface :: + * The interface requesting function. + */ + typedef struct FT_Module_Class_ + { + FT_ULong module_flags; + FT_Long module_size; + const FT_String* module_name; + FT_Fixed module_version; + FT_Fixed module_requires; + + const void* module_interface; + + FT_Module_Constructor module_init; + FT_Module_Destructor module_done; + FT_Module_Requester get_interface; + + } FT_Module_Class; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Add_Module + * + * @description: + * Add a new module to a given library instance. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library object. + * + * @input: + * clazz :: + * A pointer to class descriptor for the module. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * An error will be returned if a module already exists by that name, or + * if the module requires a version of FreeType that is too great. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Add_Module( FT_Library library, + const FT_Module_Class* clazz ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Module + * + * @description: + * Find a module by its name. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the library object. + * + * module_name :: + * The module's name (as an ASCII string). + * + * @return: + * A module handle. 0~if none was found. + * + * @note: + * FreeType's internal modules aren't documented very well, and you + * should look up the source code for details. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Module ) + FT_Get_Module( FT_Library library, + const char* module_name ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Remove_Module + * + * @description: + * Remove a given module from a library instance. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to a library object. + * + * @input: + * module :: + * A handle to a module object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The module object is destroyed by the function in case of success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Remove_Module( FT_Library library, + FT_Module module ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Property_Set + * + * @description: + * Set a property for a given module. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the library the module is part of. + * + * module_name :: + * The module name. + * + * property_name :: + * The property name. Properties are described in section + * @properties. + * + * Note that only a few modules have properties. + * + * value :: + * A generic pointer to a variable or structure that gives the new + * value of the property. The exact definition of `value` is + * dependent on the property; see section @properties. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If `module_name` isn't a valid module name, or `property_name` + * doesn't specify a valid property, or if `value` doesn't represent a + * valid value for the given property, an error is returned. + * + * The following example sets property 'bar' (a simple integer) in + * module 'foo' to value~1. + * + * ``` + * FT_UInt bar; + * + * + * bar = 1; + * FT_Property_Set( library, "foo", "bar", &bar ); + * ``` + * + * Note that the FreeType Cache sub-system doesn't recognize module + * property changes. To avoid glyph lookup confusion within the cache + * you should call @FTC_Manager_Reset to completely flush the cache if a + * module property gets changed after @FTC_Manager_New has been called. + * + * It is not possible to set properties of the FreeType Cache sub-system + * itself with FT_Property_Set; use @FTC_Property_Set instead. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.11 + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Property_Set( FT_Library library, + const FT_String* module_name, + const FT_String* property_name, + const void* value ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Property_Get + * + * @description: + * Get a module's property value. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the library the module is part of. + * + * module_name :: + * The module name. + * + * property_name :: + * The property name. Properties are described in section + * @properties. + * + * @inout: + * value :: + * A generic pointer to a variable or structure that gives the value + * of the property. The exact definition of `value` is dependent on + * the property; see section @properties. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If `module_name` isn't a valid module name, or `property_name` + * doesn't specify a valid property, or if `value` doesn't represent a + * valid value for the given property, an error is returned. + * + * The following example gets property 'baz' (a range) in module 'foo'. + * + * ``` + * typedef range_ + * { + * FT_Int32 min; + * FT_Int32 max; + * + * } range; + * + * range baz; + * + * + * FT_Property_Get( library, "foo", "baz", &baz ); + * ``` + * + * It is not possible to retrieve properties of the FreeType Cache + * sub-system with FT_Property_Get; use @FTC_Property_Get instead. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.11 + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Property_Get( FT_Library library, + const FT_String* module_name, + const FT_String* property_name, + void* value ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Default_Properties + * + * @description: + * If compilation option `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_ENVIRONMENT_PROPERTIES` is + * set, this function reads the `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` environment + * variable to control driver properties. See section @properties for + * more. + * + * If the compilation option is not set, this function does nothing. + * + * `FREETYPE_PROPERTIES` has the following syntax form (broken here into + * multiple lines for better readability). + * + * ``` + * + * ':' + * '=' + * + * ':' + * '=' + * ... + * ``` + * + * Example: + * + * ``` + * FREETYPE_PROPERTIES=truetype:interpreter-version=35 \ + * cff:no-stem-darkening=1 \ + * autofitter:warping=1 + * ``` + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to a new library object. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Set_Default_Properties( FT_Library library ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Reference_Library + * + * @description: + * A counter gets initialized to~1 at the time an @FT_Library structure + * is created. This function increments the counter. @FT_Done_Library + * then only destroys a library if the counter is~1, otherwise it simply + * decrements the counter. + * + * This function helps in managing life-cycles of structures that + * reference @FT_Library objects. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a target library object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.2 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Reference_Library( FT_Library library ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Library + * + * @description: + * This function is used to create a new FreeType library instance from a + * given memory object. It is thus possible to use libraries with + * distinct memory allocators within the same program. Note, however, + * that the used @FT_Memory structure is expected to remain valid for the + * life of the @FT_Library object. + * + * Normally, you would call this function (followed by a call to + * @FT_Add_Default_Modules or a series of calls to @FT_Add_Module, and a + * call to @FT_Set_Default_Properties) instead of @FT_Init_FreeType to + * initialize the FreeType library. + * + * Don't use @FT_Done_FreeType but @FT_Done_Library to destroy a library + * instance. + * + * @input: + * memory :: + * A handle to the original memory object. + * + * @output: + * alibrary :: + * A pointer to handle of a new library object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * See the discussion of reference counters in the description of + * @FT_Reference_Library. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Library( FT_Memory memory, + FT_Library *alibrary ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_Library + * + * @description: + * Discard a given library object. This closes all drivers and discards + * all resource objects. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the target library. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * See the discussion of reference counters in the description of + * @FT_Reference_Library. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Done_Library( FT_Library library ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_DebugHook_Func + * + * @description: + * A drop-in replacement (or rather a wrapper) for the bytecode or + * charstring interpreter's main loop function. + * + * Its job is essentially + * + * - to activate debug mode to enforce single-stepping, + * + * - to call the main loop function to interpret the next opcode, and + * + * - to show the changed context to the user. + * + * An example for such a main loop function is `TT_RunIns` (declared in + * FreeType's internal header file `src/truetype/ttinterp.h`). + * + * Have a look at the source code of the `ttdebug` FreeType demo program + * for an example of a drop-in replacement. + * + * @inout: + * arg :: + * A typeless pointer, to be cast to the main loop function's data + * structure (which depends on the font module). For TrueType fonts + * it is bytecode interpreter's execution context, `TT_ExecContext`, + * which is declared in FreeType's internal header file `tttypes.h`. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_DebugHook_Func)( void* arg ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_DEBUG_HOOK_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of named debug hook indices. + * + * @values: + * FT_DEBUG_HOOK_TRUETYPE:: + * This hook index identifies the TrueType bytecode debugger. + */ +#define FT_DEBUG_HOOK_TRUETYPE 0 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Debug_Hook + * + * @description: + * Set a debug hook function for debugging the interpreter of a font + * format. + * + * While this is a public API function, an application needs access to + * FreeType's internal header files to do something useful. + * + * Have a look at the source code of the `ttdebug` FreeType demo program + * for an example of its usage. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library object. + * + * @input: + * hook_index :: + * The index of the debug hook. You should use defined enumeration + * macros like @FT_DEBUG_HOOK_TRUETYPE. + * + * debug_hook :: + * The function used to debug the interpreter. + * + * @note: + * Currently, four debug hook slots are available, but only one (for the + * TrueType interpreter) is defined. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Set_Debug_Hook( FT_Library library, + FT_UInt hook_index, + FT_DebugHook_Func debug_hook ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Add_Default_Modules + * + * @description: + * Add the set of default drivers to a given library object. This is + * only useful when you create a library object with @FT_New_Library + * (usually to plug a custom memory manager). + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to a new library object. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Add_Default_Modules( FT_Library library ); + + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * truetype_engine + * + * @title: + * The TrueType Engine + * + * @abstract: + * TrueType bytecode support. + * + * @description: + * This section contains a function used to query the level of TrueType + * bytecode support compiled in this version of the library. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_TrueTypeEngineType + * + * @description: + * A list of values describing which kind of TrueType bytecode engine is + * implemented in a given FT_Library instance. It is used by the + * @FT_Get_TrueType_Engine_Type function. + * + * @values: + * FT_TRUETYPE_ENGINE_TYPE_NONE :: + * The library doesn't implement any kind of bytecode interpreter. + * + * FT_TRUETYPE_ENGINE_TYPE_UNPATENTED :: + * Deprecated and removed. + * + * FT_TRUETYPE_ENGINE_TYPE_PATENTED :: + * The library implements a bytecode interpreter that covers the full + * instruction set of the TrueType virtual machine (this was governed + * by patents until May 2010, hence the name). + * + * @since: + * 2.2 + * + */ + typedef enum FT_TrueTypeEngineType_ + { + FT_TRUETYPE_ENGINE_TYPE_NONE = 0, + FT_TRUETYPE_ENGINE_TYPE_UNPATENTED, + FT_TRUETYPE_ENGINE_TYPE_PATENTED + + } FT_TrueTypeEngineType; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_TrueType_Engine_Type + * + * @description: + * Return an @FT_TrueTypeEngineType value to indicate which level of the + * TrueType virtual machine a given library instance supports. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A library instance. + * + * @return: + * A value indicating which level is supported. + * + * @since: + * 2.2 + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_TrueTypeEngineType ) + FT_Get_TrueType_Engine_Type( FT_Library library ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTMODAPI_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmoderr.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmoderr.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e169935 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftmoderr.h @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftmoderr.h + * + * FreeType module error offsets (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2001-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This file is used to define the FreeType module error codes. + * + * If the macro `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS` in `ftoption.h` is + * set, the lower byte of an error value identifies the error code as + * usual. In addition, the higher byte identifies the module. For + * example, the error `FT_Err_Invalid_File_Format` has value 0x0003, the + * error `TT_Err_Invalid_File_Format` has value 0x1303, the error + * `T1_Err_Invalid_File_Format` has value 0x1403, etc. + * + * Note that `FT_Err_Ok`, `TT_Err_Ok`, etc. are always equal to zero, + * including the high byte. + * + * If `FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS` isn't set, the higher byte of an + * error value is set to zero. + * + * To hide the various `XXX_Err_` prefixes in the source code, FreeType + * provides some macros in `fttypes.h`. + * + * FT_ERR( err ) + * + * Add current error module prefix (as defined with the `FT_ERR_PREFIX` + * macro) to `err`. For example, in the BDF module the line + * + * ``` + * error = FT_ERR( Invalid_Outline ); + * ``` + * + * expands to + * + * ``` + * error = BDF_Err_Invalid_Outline; + * ``` + * + * For simplicity, you can always use `FT_Err_Ok` directly instead of + * `FT_ERR( Ok )`. + * + * FT_ERR_EQ( errcode, err ) + * FT_ERR_NEQ( errcode, err ) + * + * Compare error code `errcode` with the error `err` for equality and + * inequality, respectively. Example: + * + * ``` + * if ( FT_ERR_EQ( error, Invalid_Outline ) ) + * ... + * ``` + * + * Using this macro you don't have to think about error prefixes. Of + * course, if module errors are not active, the above example is the + * same as + * + * ``` + * if ( error == FT_Err_Invalid_Outline ) + * ... + * ``` + * + * FT_ERROR_BASE( errcode ) + * FT_ERROR_MODULE( errcode ) + * + * Get base error and module error code, respectively. + * + * It can also be used to create a module error message table easily with + * something like + * + * ``` + * #undef FTMODERR_H_ + * #define FT_MODERRDEF( e, v, s ) { FT_Mod_Err_ ## e, s }, + * #define FT_MODERR_START_LIST { + * #define FT_MODERR_END_LIST { 0, 0 } }; + * + * const struct + * { + * int mod_err_offset; + * const char* mod_err_msg + * } ft_mod_errors[] = + * + * #include FT_MODULE_ERRORS_H + * ``` + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTMODERR_H_ +#define FTMODERR_H_ + + + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** SETUP MACROS *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + + +#undef FT_NEED_EXTERN_C + +#ifndef FT_MODERRDEF + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_USE_MODULE_ERRORS +#define FT_MODERRDEF( e, v, s ) FT_Mod_Err_ ## e = v, +#else +#define FT_MODERRDEF( e, v, s ) FT_Mod_Err_ ## e = 0, +#endif + +#define FT_MODERR_START_LIST enum { +#define FT_MODERR_END_LIST FT_Mod_Err_Max }; + +#ifdef __cplusplus +#define FT_NEED_EXTERN_C + extern "C" { +#endif + +#endif /* !FT_MODERRDEF */ + + + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** LIST MODULE ERROR BASES *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + + +#ifdef FT_MODERR_START_LIST + FT_MODERR_START_LIST +#endif + + + FT_MODERRDEF( Base, 0x000, "base module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Autofit, 0x100, "autofitter module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( BDF, 0x200, "BDF module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Bzip2, 0x300, "Bzip2 module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Cache, 0x400, "cache module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( CFF, 0x500, "CFF module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( CID, 0x600, "CID module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Gzip, 0x700, "Gzip module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( LZW, 0x800, "LZW module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( OTvalid, 0x900, "OpenType validation module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( PCF, 0xA00, "PCF module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( PFR, 0xB00, "PFR module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( PSaux, 0xC00, "PS auxiliary module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( PShinter, 0xD00, "PS hinter module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( PSnames, 0xE00, "PS names module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Raster, 0xF00, "raster module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( SFNT, 0x1000, "SFNT module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Smooth, 0x1100, "smooth raster module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( TrueType, 0x1200, "TrueType module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Type1, 0x1300, "Type 1 module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Type42, 0x1400, "Type 42 module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( Winfonts, 0x1500, "Windows FON/FNT module" ) + FT_MODERRDEF( GXvalid, 0x1600, "GX validation module" ) + + +#ifdef FT_MODERR_END_LIST + FT_MODERR_END_LIST +#endif + + + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** CLEANUP *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*******************************************************************/ + /*******************************************************************/ + + +#ifdef FT_NEED_EXTERN_C + } +#endif + +#undef FT_MODERR_START_LIST +#undef FT_MODERR_END_LIST +#undef FT_MODERRDEF +#undef FT_NEED_EXTERN_C + + +#endif /* FTMODERR_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftotval.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftotval.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c034f48 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftotval.h @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftotval.h + * + * FreeType API for validating OpenType tables (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +/**************************************************************************** + * + * + * Warning: This module might be moved to a different library in the + * future to avoid a tight dependency between FreeType and the + * OpenType specification. + * + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTOTVAL_H_ +#define FTOTVAL_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * ot_validation + * + * @title: + * OpenType Validation + * + * @abstract: + * An API to validate OpenType tables. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of functions to validate some + * OpenType tables (BASE, GDEF, GPOS, GSUB, JSTF, MATH). + * + * @order: + * FT_OpenType_Validate + * FT_OpenType_Free + * + * FT_VALIDATE_OTXXX + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_VALIDATE_OTXXX + * + * @description: + * A list of bit-field constants used with @FT_OpenType_Validate to + * indicate which OpenType tables should be validated. + * + * @values: + * FT_VALIDATE_BASE :: + * Validate BASE table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_GDEF :: + * Validate GDEF table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_GPOS :: + * Validate GPOS table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_GSUB :: + * Validate GSUB table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_JSTF :: + * Validate JSTF table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_MATH :: + * Validate MATH table. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_OT :: + * Validate all OpenType tables (BASE, GDEF, GPOS, GSUB, JSTF, MATH). + * + */ +#define FT_VALIDATE_BASE 0x0100 +#define FT_VALIDATE_GDEF 0x0200 +#define FT_VALIDATE_GPOS 0x0400 +#define FT_VALIDATE_GSUB 0x0800 +#define FT_VALIDATE_JSTF 0x1000 +#define FT_VALIDATE_MATH 0x2000 + +#define FT_VALIDATE_OT ( FT_VALIDATE_BASE | \ + FT_VALIDATE_GDEF | \ + FT_VALIDATE_GPOS | \ + FT_VALIDATE_GSUB | \ + FT_VALIDATE_JSTF | \ + FT_VALIDATE_MATH ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_OpenType_Validate + * + * @description: + * Validate various OpenType tables to assure that all offsets and + * indices are valid. The idea is that a higher-level library that + * actually does the text layout can access those tables without error + * checking (which can be quite time consuming). + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * validation_flags :: + * A bit field that specifies the tables to be validated. See + * @FT_VALIDATE_OTXXX for possible values. + * + * @output: + * BASE_table :: + * A pointer to the BASE table. + * + * GDEF_table :: + * A pointer to the GDEF table. + * + * GPOS_table :: + * A pointer to the GPOS table. + * + * GSUB_table :: + * A pointer to the GSUB table. + * + * JSTF_table :: + * A pointer to the JSTF table. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function only works with OpenType fonts, returning an error + * otherwise. + * + * After use, the application should deallocate the five tables with + * @FT_OpenType_Free. A `NULL` value indicates that the table either + * doesn't exist in the font, or the application hasn't asked for + * validation. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_OpenType_Validate( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt validation_flags, + FT_Bytes *BASE_table, + FT_Bytes *GDEF_table, + FT_Bytes *GPOS_table, + FT_Bytes *GSUB_table, + FT_Bytes *JSTF_table ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_OpenType_Free + * + * @description: + * Free the buffer allocated by OpenType validator. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * table :: + * The pointer to the buffer that is allocated by + * @FT_OpenType_Validate. + * + * @note: + * This function must be used to free the buffer allocated by + * @FT_OpenType_Validate only. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_OpenType_Free( FT_Face face, + FT_Bytes table ); + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTOTVAL_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftoutln.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftoutln.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..75c3d01 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftoutln.h @@ -0,0 +1,593 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftoutln.h + * + * Support for the FT_Outline type used to store glyph shapes of + * most scalable font formats (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTOUTLN_H_ +#define FTOUTLN_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * outline_processing + * + * @title: + * Outline Processing + * + * @abstract: + * Functions to create, transform, and render vectorial glyph images. + * + * @description: + * This section contains routines used to create and destroy scalable + * glyph images known as 'outlines'. These can also be measured, + * transformed, and converted into bitmaps and pixmaps. + * + * @order: + * FT_Outline + * FT_Outline_New + * FT_Outline_Done + * FT_Outline_Copy + * FT_Outline_Translate + * FT_Outline_Transform + * FT_Outline_Embolden + * FT_Outline_EmboldenXY + * FT_Outline_Reverse + * FT_Outline_Check + * + * FT_Outline_Get_CBox + * FT_Outline_Get_BBox + * + * FT_Outline_Get_Bitmap + * FT_Outline_Render + * FT_Outline_Decompose + * FT_Outline_Funcs + * FT_Outline_MoveToFunc + * FT_Outline_LineToFunc + * FT_Outline_ConicToFunc + * FT_Outline_CubicToFunc + * + * FT_Orientation + * FT_Outline_Get_Orientation + * + * FT_OUTLINE_XXX + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Decompose + * + * @description: + * Walk over an outline's structure to decompose it into individual + * segments and Bezier arcs. This function also emits 'move to' + * operations to indicate the start of new contours in the outline. + * + * @input: + * outline :: + * A pointer to the source target. + * + * func_interface :: + * A table of 'emitters', i.e., function pointers called during + * decomposition to indicate path operations. + * + * @inout: + * user :: + * A typeless pointer that is passed to each emitter during the + * decomposition. It can be used to store the state during the + * decomposition. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * A contour that contains a single point only is represented by a 'move + * to' operation followed by 'line to' to the same point. In most cases, + * it is best to filter this out before using the outline for stroking + * purposes (otherwise it would result in a visible dot when round caps + * are used). + * + * Similarly, the function returns success for an empty outline also + * (doing nothing, this is, not calling any emitter); if necessary, you + * should filter this out, too. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Decompose( FT_Outline* outline, + const FT_Outline_Funcs* func_interface, + void* user ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_New + * + * @description: + * Create a new outline of a given size. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the library object from where the outline is allocated. + * Note however that the new outline will **not** necessarily be + * **freed**, when destroying the library, by @FT_Done_FreeType. + * + * numPoints :: + * The maximum number of points within the outline. Must be smaller + * than or equal to 0xFFFF (65535). + * + * numContours :: + * The maximum number of contours within the outline. This value must + * be in the range 0 to `numPoints`. + * + * @output: + * anoutline :: + * A handle to the new outline. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The reason why this function takes a `library` parameter is simply to + * use the library's memory allocator. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_New( FT_Library library, + FT_UInt numPoints, + FT_Int numContours, + FT_Outline *anoutline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Done + * + * @description: + * Destroy an outline created with @FT_Outline_New. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle of the library object used to allocate the outline. + * + * outline :: + * A pointer to the outline object to be discarded. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If the outline's 'owner' field is not set, only the outline descriptor + * will be released. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Done( FT_Library library, + FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Check + * + * @description: + * Check the contents of an outline descriptor. + * + * @input: + * outline :: + * A handle to a source outline. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * An empty outline, or an outline with a single point only is also + * valid. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Check( FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Get_CBox + * + * @description: + * Return an outline's 'control box'. The control box encloses all the + * outline's points, including Bezier control points. Though it + * coincides with the exact bounding box for most glyphs, it can be + * slightly larger in some situations (like when rotating an outline that + * contains Bezier outside arcs). + * + * Computing the control box is very fast, while getting the bounding box + * can take much more time as it needs to walk over all segments and arcs + * in the outline. To get the latter, you can use the 'ftbbox' + * component, which is dedicated to this single task. + * + * @input: + * outline :: + * A pointer to the source outline descriptor. + * + * @output: + * acbox :: + * The outline's control box. + * + * @note: + * See @FT_Glyph_Get_CBox for a discussion of tricky fonts. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Outline_Get_CBox( const FT_Outline* outline, + FT_BBox *acbox ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Translate + * + * @description: + * Apply a simple translation to the points of an outline. + * + * @inout: + * outline :: + * A pointer to the target outline descriptor. + * + * @input: + * xOffset :: + * The horizontal offset. + * + * yOffset :: + * The vertical offset. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Outline_Translate( const FT_Outline* outline, + FT_Pos xOffset, + FT_Pos yOffset ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Copy + * + * @description: + * Copy an outline into another one. Both objects must have the same + * sizes (number of points & number of contours) when this function is + * called. + * + * @input: + * source :: + * A handle to the source outline. + * + * @output: + * target :: + * A handle to the target outline. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Copy( const FT_Outline* source, + FT_Outline *target ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Transform + * + * @description: + * Apply a simple 2x2 matrix to all of an outline's points. Useful for + * applying rotations, slanting, flipping, etc. + * + * @inout: + * outline :: + * A pointer to the target outline descriptor. + * + * @input: + * matrix :: + * A pointer to the transformation matrix. + * + * @note: + * You can use @FT_Outline_Translate if you need to translate the + * outline's points. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Outline_Transform( const FT_Outline* outline, + const FT_Matrix* matrix ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Embolden + * + * @description: + * Embolden an outline. The new outline will be at most 4~times + * `strength` pixels wider and higher. You may think of the left and + * bottom borders as unchanged. + * + * Negative `strength` values to reduce the outline thickness are + * possible also. + * + * @inout: + * outline :: + * A handle to the target outline. + * + * @input: + * strength :: + * How strong the glyph is emboldened. Expressed in 26.6 pixel format. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The used algorithm to increase or decrease the thickness of the glyph + * doesn't change the number of points; this means that certain + * situations like acute angles or intersections are sometimes handled + * incorrectly. + * + * If you need 'better' metrics values you should call + * @FT_Outline_Get_CBox or @FT_Outline_Get_BBox. + * + * To get meaningful results, font scaling values must be set with + * functions like @FT_Set_Char_Size before calling FT_Render_Glyph. + * + * @example: + * ``` + * FT_Load_Glyph( face, index, FT_LOAD_DEFAULT ); + * + * if ( face->glyph->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE ) + * FT_Outline_Embolden( &face->glyph->outline, strength ); + * ``` + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Embolden( FT_Outline* outline, + FT_Pos strength ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_EmboldenXY + * + * @description: + * Embolden an outline. The new outline will be `xstrength` pixels wider + * and `ystrength` pixels higher. Otherwise, it is similar to + * @FT_Outline_Embolden, which uses the same strength in both directions. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.10 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_EmboldenXY( FT_Outline* outline, + FT_Pos xstrength, + FT_Pos ystrength ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Reverse + * + * @description: + * Reverse the drawing direction of an outline. This is used to ensure + * consistent fill conventions for mirrored glyphs. + * + * @inout: + * outline :: + * A pointer to the target outline descriptor. + * + * @note: + * This function toggles the bit flag @FT_OUTLINE_REVERSE_FILL in the + * outline's `flags` field. + * + * It shouldn't be used by a normal client application, unless it knows + * what it is doing. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Outline_Reverse( FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Get_Bitmap + * + * @description: + * Render an outline within a bitmap. The outline's image is simply + * OR-ed to the target bitmap. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a FreeType library object. + * + * outline :: + * A pointer to the source outline descriptor. + * + * @inout: + * abitmap :: + * A pointer to the target bitmap descriptor. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function does **not create** the bitmap, it only renders an + * outline image within the one you pass to it! Consequently, the + * various fields in `abitmap` should be set accordingly. + * + * It will use the raster corresponding to the default glyph format. + * + * The value of the `num_grays` field in `abitmap` is ignored. If you + * select the gray-level rasterizer, and you want less than 256 gray + * levels, you have to use @FT_Outline_Render directly. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Get_Bitmap( FT_Library library, + FT_Outline* outline, + const FT_Bitmap *abitmap ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Render + * + * @description: + * Render an outline within a bitmap using the current scan-convert. + * This function uses an @FT_Raster_Params structure as an argument, + * allowing advanced features like direct composition, translucency, etc. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to a FreeType library object. + * + * outline :: + * A pointer to the source outline descriptor. + * + * @inout: + * params :: + * A pointer to an @FT_Raster_Params structure used to describe the + * rendering operation. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You should know what you are doing and how @FT_Raster_Params works to + * use this function. + * + * The field `params.source` will be set to `outline` before the scan + * converter is called, which means that the value you give to it is + * actually ignored. + * + * The gray-level rasterizer always uses 256 gray levels. If you want + * less gray levels, you have to provide your own span callback. See the + * @FT_RASTER_FLAG_DIRECT value of the `flags` field in the + * @FT_Raster_Params structure for more details. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Outline_Render( FT_Library library, + FT_Outline* outline, + FT_Raster_Params* params ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Orientation + * + * @description: + * A list of values used to describe an outline's contour orientation. + * + * The TrueType and PostScript specifications use different conventions + * to determine whether outline contours should be filled or unfilled. + * + * @values: + * FT_ORIENTATION_TRUETYPE :: + * According to the TrueType specification, clockwise contours must be + * filled, and counter-clockwise ones must be unfilled. + * + * FT_ORIENTATION_POSTSCRIPT :: + * According to the PostScript specification, counter-clockwise + * contours must be filled, and clockwise ones must be unfilled. + * + * FT_ORIENTATION_FILL_RIGHT :: + * This is identical to @FT_ORIENTATION_TRUETYPE, but is used to + * remember that in TrueType, everything that is to the right of the + * drawing direction of a contour must be filled. + * + * FT_ORIENTATION_FILL_LEFT :: + * This is identical to @FT_ORIENTATION_POSTSCRIPT, but is used to + * remember that in PostScript, everything that is to the left of the + * drawing direction of a contour must be filled. + * + * FT_ORIENTATION_NONE :: + * The orientation cannot be determined. That is, different parts of + * the glyph have different orientation. + * + */ + typedef enum FT_Orientation_ + { + FT_ORIENTATION_TRUETYPE = 0, + FT_ORIENTATION_POSTSCRIPT = 1, + FT_ORIENTATION_FILL_RIGHT = FT_ORIENTATION_TRUETYPE, + FT_ORIENTATION_FILL_LEFT = FT_ORIENTATION_POSTSCRIPT, + FT_ORIENTATION_NONE + + } FT_Orientation; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_Get_Orientation + * + * @description: + * This function analyzes a glyph outline and tries to compute its fill + * orientation (see @FT_Orientation). This is done by integrating the + * total area covered by the outline. The positive integral corresponds + * to the clockwise orientation and @FT_ORIENTATION_POSTSCRIPT is + * returned. The negative integral corresponds to the counter-clockwise + * orientation and @FT_ORIENTATION_TRUETYPE is returned. + * + * Note that this will return @FT_ORIENTATION_TRUETYPE for empty + * outlines. + * + * @input: + * outline :: + * A handle to the source outline. + * + * @return: + * The orientation. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Orientation ) + FT_Outline_Get_Orientation( FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTOUTLN_H_ */ + + +/* END */ + + +/* Local Variables: */ +/* coding: utf-8 */ +/* End: */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftparams.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftparams.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c374ee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftparams.h @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftparams.h + * + * FreeType API for possible FT_Parameter tags (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2017-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTPARAMS_H_ +#define FTPARAMS_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * parameter_tags + * + * @title: + * Parameter Tags + * + * @abstract: + * Macros for driver property and font loading parameter tags. + * + * @description: + * This section contains macros for the @FT_Parameter structure that are + * used with various functions to activate some special functionality or + * different behaviour of various components of FreeType. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_TYPOGRAPHIC_FAMILY + * + * @description: + * A tag for @FT_Parameter to make @FT_Open_Face ignore typographic + * family names in the 'name' table (introduced in OpenType version 1.4). + * Use this for backward compatibility with legacy systems that have a + * four-faces-per-family restriction. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + * + */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_TYPOGRAPHIC_FAMILY \ + FT_MAKE_TAG( 'i', 'g', 'p', 'f' ) + + + /* this constant is deprecated */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_PREFERRED_FAMILY \ + FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_TYPOGRAPHIC_FAMILY + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_TYPOGRAPHIC_SUBFAMILY + * + * @description: + * A tag for @FT_Parameter to make @FT_Open_Face ignore typographic + * subfamily names in the 'name' table (introduced in OpenType version + * 1.4). Use this for backward compatibility with legacy systems that + * have a four-faces-per-family restriction. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + * + */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_TYPOGRAPHIC_SUBFAMILY \ + FT_MAKE_TAG( 'i', 'g', 'p', 's' ) + + + /* this constant is deprecated */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_PREFERRED_SUBFAMILY \ + FT_PARAM_TAG_IGNORE_TYPOGRAPHIC_SUBFAMILY + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PARAM_TAG_INCREMENTAL + * + * @description: + * An @FT_Parameter tag to be used with @FT_Open_Face to indicate + * incremental glyph loading. + * + */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_INCREMENTAL \ + FT_MAKE_TAG( 'i', 'n', 'c', 'r' ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PARAM_TAG_LCD_FILTER_WEIGHTS + * + * @description: + * An @FT_Parameter tag to be used with @FT_Face_Properties. The + * corresponding argument specifies the five LCD filter weights for a + * given face (if using @FT_LOAD_TARGET_LCD, for example), overriding the + * global default values or the values set up with + * @FT_Library_SetLcdFilterWeights. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + * + */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_LCD_FILTER_WEIGHTS \ + FT_MAKE_TAG( 'l', 'c', 'd', 'f' ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PARAM_TAG_RANDOM_SEED + * + * @description: + * An @FT_Parameter tag to be used with @FT_Face_Properties. The + * corresponding 32bit signed integer argument overrides the font + * driver's random seed value with a face-specific one; see @random-seed. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + * + */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_RANDOM_SEED \ + FT_MAKE_TAG( 's', 'e', 'e', 'd' ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PARAM_TAG_STEM_DARKENING + * + * @description: + * An @FT_Parameter tag to be used with @FT_Face_Properties. The + * corresponding Boolean argument specifies whether to apply stem + * darkening, overriding the global default values or the values set up + * with @FT_Property_Set (see @no-stem-darkening). + * + * This is a passive setting that only takes effect if the font driver or + * autohinter honors it, which the CFF, Type~1, and CID drivers always + * do, but the autohinter only in 'light' hinting mode (as of version + * 2.9). + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + * + */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_STEM_DARKENING \ + FT_MAKE_TAG( 'd', 'a', 'r', 'k' ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_PARAM_TAG_UNPATENTED_HINTING + * + * @description: + * Deprecated, no effect. + * + * Previously: A constant used as the tag of an @FT_Parameter structure + * to indicate that unpatented methods only should be used by the + * TrueType bytecode interpreter for a typeface opened by @FT_Open_Face. + * + */ +#define FT_PARAM_TAG_UNPATENTED_HINTING \ + FT_MAKE_TAG( 'u', 'n', 'p', 'a' ) + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* FTPARAMS_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftpfr.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftpfr.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4eca76 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftpfr.h @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftpfr.h + * + * FreeType API for accessing PFR-specific data (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTPFR_H_ +#define FTPFR_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * pfr_fonts + * + * @title: + * PFR Fonts + * + * @abstract: + * PFR/TrueDoc-specific API. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of PFR-specific functions. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_PFR_Metrics + * + * @description: + * Return the outline and metrics resolutions of a given PFR face. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * Handle to the input face. It can be a non-PFR face. + * + * @output: + * aoutline_resolution :: + * Outline resolution. This is equivalent to `face->units_per_EM` for + * non-PFR fonts. Optional (parameter can be `NULL`). + * + * ametrics_resolution :: + * Metrics resolution. This is equivalent to `outline_resolution` for + * non-PFR fonts. Optional (parameter can be `NULL`). + * + * ametrics_x_scale :: + * A 16.16 fixed-point number used to scale distance expressed in + * metrics units to device subpixels. This is equivalent to + * `face->size->x_scale`, but for metrics only. Optional (parameter + * can be `NULL`). + * + * ametrics_y_scale :: + * Same as `ametrics_x_scale` but for the vertical direction. + * optional (parameter can be `NULL`). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If the input face is not a PFR, this function will return an error. + * However, in all cases, it will return valid values. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_PFR_Metrics( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt *aoutline_resolution, + FT_UInt *ametrics_resolution, + FT_Fixed *ametrics_x_scale, + FT_Fixed *ametrics_y_scale ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_PFR_Kerning + * + * @description: + * Return the kerning pair corresponding to two glyphs in a PFR face. + * The distance is expressed in metrics units, unlike the result of + * @FT_Get_Kerning. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * left :: + * Index of the left glyph. + * + * right :: + * Index of the right glyph. + * + * @output: + * avector :: + * A kerning vector. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function always return distances in original PFR metrics units. + * This is unlike @FT_Get_Kerning with the @FT_KERNING_UNSCALED mode, + * which always returns distances converted to outline units. + * + * You can use the value of the `x_scale` and `y_scale` parameters + * returned by @FT_Get_PFR_Metrics to scale these to device subpixels. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_PFR_Kerning( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt left, + FT_UInt right, + FT_Vector *avector ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_PFR_Advance + * + * @description: + * Return a given glyph advance, expressed in original metrics units, + * from a PFR font. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * gindex :: + * The glyph index. + * + * @output: + * aadvance :: + * The glyph advance in metrics units. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You can use the `x_scale` or `y_scale` results of @FT_Get_PFR_Metrics + * to convert the advance to device subpixels (i.e., 1/64th of pixels). + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_PFR_Advance( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Pos *aadvance ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTPFR_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftrender.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftrender.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a01c774 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftrender.h @@ -0,0 +1,245 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftrender.h + * + * FreeType renderer modules public interface (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTRENDER_H_ +#define FTRENDER_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_MODULE_H +#include FT_GLYPH_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * module_management + * + */ + + + /* create a new glyph object */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Glyph_InitFunc)( FT_Glyph glyph, + FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + /* destroys a given glyph object */ + typedef void + (*FT_Glyph_DoneFunc)( FT_Glyph glyph ); + + typedef void + (*FT_Glyph_TransformFunc)( FT_Glyph glyph, + const FT_Matrix* matrix, + const FT_Vector* delta ); + + typedef void + (*FT_Glyph_GetBBoxFunc)( FT_Glyph glyph, + FT_BBox* abbox ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Glyph_CopyFunc)( FT_Glyph source, + FT_Glyph target ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Glyph_PrepareFunc)( FT_Glyph glyph, + FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + +/* deprecated */ +#define FT_Glyph_Init_Func FT_Glyph_InitFunc +#define FT_Glyph_Done_Func FT_Glyph_DoneFunc +#define FT_Glyph_Transform_Func FT_Glyph_TransformFunc +#define FT_Glyph_BBox_Func FT_Glyph_GetBBoxFunc +#define FT_Glyph_Copy_Func FT_Glyph_CopyFunc +#define FT_Glyph_Prepare_Func FT_Glyph_PrepareFunc + + + struct FT_Glyph_Class_ + { + FT_Long glyph_size; + FT_Glyph_Format glyph_format; + + FT_Glyph_InitFunc glyph_init; + FT_Glyph_DoneFunc glyph_done; + FT_Glyph_CopyFunc glyph_copy; + FT_Glyph_TransformFunc glyph_transform; + FT_Glyph_GetBBoxFunc glyph_bbox; + FT_Glyph_PrepareFunc glyph_prepare; + }; + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Renderer_RenderFunc)( FT_Renderer renderer, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Render_Mode mode, + const FT_Vector* origin ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Renderer_TransformFunc)( FT_Renderer renderer, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + const FT_Matrix* matrix, + const FT_Vector* delta ); + + + typedef void + (*FT_Renderer_GetCBoxFunc)( FT_Renderer renderer, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_BBox* cbox ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Renderer_SetModeFunc)( FT_Renderer renderer, + FT_ULong mode_tag, + FT_Pointer mode_ptr ); + +/* deprecated identifiers */ +#define FTRenderer_render FT_Renderer_RenderFunc +#define FTRenderer_transform FT_Renderer_TransformFunc +#define FTRenderer_getCBox FT_Renderer_GetCBoxFunc +#define FTRenderer_setMode FT_Renderer_SetModeFunc + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Renderer_Class + * + * @description: + * The renderer module class descriptor. + * + * @fields: + * root :: + * The root @FT_Module_Class fields. + * + * glyph_format :: + * The glyph image format this renderer handles. + * + * render_glyph :: + * A method used to render the image that is in a given glyph slot into + * a bitmap. + * + * transform_glyph :: + * A method used to transform the image that is in a given glyph slot. + * + * get_glyph_cbox :: + * A method used to access the glyph's cbox. + * + * set_mode :: + * A method used to pass additional parameters. + * + * raster_class :: + * For @FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE renderers only. This is a pointer to + * its raster's class. + */ + typedef struct FT_Renderer_Class_ + { + FT_Module_Class root; + + FT_Glyph_Format glyph_format; + + FT_Renderer_RenderFunc render_glyph; + FT_Renderer_TransformFunc transform_glyph; + FT_Renderer_GetCBoxFunc get_glyph_cbox; + FT_Renderer_SetModeFunc set_mode; + + FT_Raster_Funcs* raster_class; + + } FT_Renderer_Class; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Renderer + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the current renderer for a given glyph format. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the library object. + * + * format :: + * The glyph format. + * + * @return: + * A renderer handle. 0~if none found. + * + * @note: + * An error will be returned if a module already exists by that name, or + * if the module requires a version of FreeType that is too great. + * + * To add a new renderer, simply use @FT_Add_Module. To retrieve a + * renderer by its name, use @FT_Get_Module. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Renderer ) + FT_Get_Renderer( FT_Library library, + FT_Glyph_Format format ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Set_Renderer + * + * @description: + * Set the current renderer to use, and set additional mode. + * + * @inout: + * library :: + * A handle to the library object. + * + * @input: + * renderer :: + * A handle to the renderer object. + * + * num_params :: + * The number of additional parameters. + * + * parameters :: + * Additional parameters. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * In case of success, the renderer will be used to convert glyph images + * in the renderer's known format into bitmaps. + * + * This doesn't change the current renderer for other formats. + * + * Currently, no FreeType renderer module uses `parameters`; you should + * thus always pass `NULL` as the value. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Set_Renderer( FT_Library library, + FT_Renderer renderer, + FT_UInt num_params, + FT_Parameter* parameters ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTRENDER_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsizes.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsizes.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c63cef --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsizes.h @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftsizes.h + * + * FreeType size objects management (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Typical application would normally not need to use these functions. + * However, they have been placed in a public API for the rare cases where + * they are needed. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTSIZES_H_ +#define FTSIZES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * sizes_management + * + * @title: + * Size Management + * + * @abstract: + * Managing multiple sizes per face. + * + * @description: + * When creating a new face object (e.g., with @FT_New_Face), an @FT_Size + * object is automatically created and used to store all pixel-size + * dependent information, available in the `face->size` field. + * + * It is however possible to create more sizes for a given face, mostly + * in order to manage several character pixel sizes of the same font + * family and style. See @FT_New_Size and @FT_Done_Size. + * + * Note that @FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes and @FT_Set_Char_Size only modify the + * contents of the current 'active' size; you thus need to use + * @FT_Activate_Size to change it. + * + * 99% of applications won't need the functions provided here, especially + * if they use the caching sub-system, so be cautious when using these. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Size + * + * @description: + * Create a new size object from a given face object. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to a parent face object. + * + * @output: + * asize :: + * A handle to a new size object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You need to call @FT_Activate_Size in order to select the new size for + * upcoming calls to @FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes, @FT_Set_Char_Size, + * @FT_Load_Glyph, @FT_Load_Char, etc. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_New_Size( FT_Face face, + FT_Size* size ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_Size + * + * @description: + * Discard a given size object. Note that @FT_Done_Face automatically + * discards all size objects allocated with @FT_New_Size. + * + * @input: + * size :: + * A handle to a target size object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Done_Size( FT_Size size ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Activate_Size + * + * @description: + * Even though it is possible to create several size objects for a given + * face (see @FT_New_Size for details), functions like @FT_Load_Glyph or + * @FT_Load_Char only use the one that has been activated last to + * determine the 'current character pixel size'. + * + * This function can be used to 'activate' a previously created size + * object. + * + * @input: + * size :: + * A handle to a target size object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If `face` is the size's parent face object, this function changes the + * value of `face->size` to the input size handle. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Activate_Size( FT_Size size ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTSIZES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsnames.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsnames.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d43602 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsnames.h @@ -0,0 +1,273 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftsnames.h + * + * Simple interface to access SFNT 'name' tables (which are used + * to hold font names, copyright info, notices, etc.) (specification). + * + * This is _not_ used to retrieve glyph names! + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTSNAMES_H_ +#define FTSNAMES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H +#include FT_PARAMETER_TAGS_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * sfnt_names + * + * @title: + * SFNT Names + * + * @abstract: + * Access the names embedded in TrueType and OpenType files. + * + * @description: + * The TrueType and OpenType specifications allow the inclusion of a + * special names table ('name') in font files. This table contains + * textual (and internationalized) information regarding the font, like + * family name, copyright, version, etc. + * + * The definitions below are used to access them if available. + * + * Note that this has nothing to do with glyph names! + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_SfntName + * + * @description: + * A structure used to model an SFNT 'name' table entry. + * + * @fields: + * platform_id :: + * The platform ID for `string`. See @TT_PLATFORM_XXX for possible + * values. + * + * encoding_id :: + * The encoding ID for `string`. See @TT_APPLE_ID_XXX, @TT_MAC_ID_XXX, + * @TT_ISO_ID_XXX, @TT_MS_ID_XXX, and @TT_ADOBE_ID_XXX for possible + * values. + * + * language_id :: + * The language ID for `string`. See @TT_MAC_LANGID_XXX and + * @TT_MS_LANGID_XXX for possible values. + * + * Registered OpenType values for `language_id` are always smaller than + * 0x8000; values equal or larger than 0x8000 usually indicate a + * language tag string (introduced in OpenType version 1.6). Use + * function @FT_Get_Sfnt_LangTag with `language_id` as its argument to + * retrieve the associated language tag. + * + * name_id :: + * An identifier for `string`. See @TT_NAME_ID_XXX for possible + * values. + * + * string :: + * The 'name' string. Note that its format differs depending on the + * (platform,encoding) pair, being either a string of bytes (without a + * terminating `NULL` byte) or containing UTF-16BE entities. + * + * string_len :: + * The length of `string` in bytes. + * + * @note: + * Please refer to the TrueType or OpenType specification for more + * details. + */ + typedef struct FT_SfntName_ + { + FT_UShort platform_id; + FT_UShort encoding_id; + FT_UShort language_id; + FT_UShort name_id; + + FT_Byte* string; /* this string is *not* null-terminated! */ + FT_UInt string_len; /* in bytes */ + + } FT_SfntName; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Sfnt_Name_Count + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the number of name strings in the SFNT 'name' table. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * @return: + * The number of strings in the 'name' table. + * + * @note: + * This function always returns an error if the config macro + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SFNT_NAMES` is not defined in `ftoption.h`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_UInt ) + FT_Get_Sfnt_Name_Count( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Sfnt_Name + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a string of the SFNT 'name' table for a given index. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * idx :: + * The index of the 'name' string. + * + * @output: + * aname :: + * The indexed @FT_SfntName structure. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The `string` array returned in the `aname` structure is not + * null-terminated. Note that you don't have to deallocate `string` by + * yourself; FreeType takes care of it if you call @FT_Done_Face. + * + * Use @FT_Get_Sfnt_Name_Count to get the total number of available + * 'name' table entries, then do a loop until you get the right platform, + * encoding, and name ID. + * + * 'name' table format~1 entries can use language tags also, see + * @FT_Get_Sfnt_LangTag. + * + * This function always returns an error if the config macro + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SFNT_NAMES` is not defined in `ftoption.h`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Sfnt_Name( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt idx, + FT_SfntName *aname ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_SfntLangTag + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a language tag entry from an SFNT 'name' table. + * + * @fields: + * string :: + * The language tag string, encoded in UTF-16BE (without trailing + * `NULL` bytes). + * + * string_len :: + * The length of `string` in **bytes**. + * + * @note: + * Please refer to the TrueType or OpenType specification for more + * details. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + */ + typedef struct FT_SfntLangTag_ + { + FT_Byte* string; /* this string is *not* null-terminated! */ + FT_UInt string_len; /* in bytes */ + + } FT_SfntLangTag; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Sfnt_LangTag + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the language tag associated with a language ID of an SFNT + * 'name' table entry. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * langID :: + * The language ID, as returned by @FT_Get_Sfnt_Name. This is always a + * value larger than 0x8000. + * + * @output: + * alangTag :: + * The language tag associated with the 'name' table entry's language + * ID. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The `string` array returned in the `alangTag` structure is not + * null-terminated. Note that you don't have to deallocate `string` by + * yourself; FreeType takes care of it if you call @FT_Done_Face. + * + * Only 'name' table format~1 supports language tags. For format~0 + * tables, this function always returns FT_Err_Invalid_Table. For + * invalid format~1 language ID values, FT_Err_Invalid_Argument is + * returned. + * + * This function always returns an error if the config macro + * `TT_CONFIG_OPTION_SFNT_NAMES` is not defined in `ftoption.h`. + * + * @since: + * 2.8 + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_Sfnt_LangTag( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt langID, + FT_SfntLangTag *alangTag ); + + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTSNAMES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftstroke.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftstroke.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01a9c18 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftstroke.h @@ -0,0 +1,772 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftstroke.h + * + * FreeType path stroker (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTSTROKE_H_ +#define FTSTROKE_H_ + +#include +#include FT_OUTLINE_H +#include FT_GLYPH_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * glyph_stroker + * + * @title: + * Glyph Stroker + * + * @abstract: + * Generating bordered and stroked glyphs. + * + * @description: + * This component generates stroked outlines of a given vectorial glyph. + * It also allows you to retrieve the 'outside' and/or the 'inside' + * borders of the stroke. + * + * This can be useful to generate 'bordered' glyph, i.e., glyphs + * displayed with a coloured (and anti-aliased) border around their + * shape. + * + * @order: + * FT_Stroker + * + * FT_Stroker_LineJoin + * FT_Stroker_LineCap + * FT_StrokerBorder + * + * FT_Outline_GetInsideBorder + * FT_Outline_GetOutsideBorder + * + * FT_Glyph_Stroke + * FT_Glyph_StrokeBorder + * + * FT_Stroker_New + * FT_Stroker_Set + * FT_Stroker_Rewind + * FT_Stroker_ParseOutline + * FT_Stroker_Done + * + * FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath + * FT_Stroker_EndSubPath + * + * FT_Stroker_LineTo + * FT_Stroker_ConicTo + * FT_Stroker_CubicTo + * + * FT_Stroker_GetBorderCounts + * FT_Stroker_ExportBorder + * FT_Stroker_GetCounts + * FT_Stroker_Export + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Stroker + * + * @description: + * Opaque handle to a path stroker object. + */ + typedef struct FT_StrokerRec_* FT_Stroker; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Stroker_LineJoin + * + * @description: + * These values determine how two joining lines are rendered in a + * stroker. + * + * @values: + * FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_ROUND :: + * Used to render rounded line joins. Circular arcs are used to join + * two lines smoothly. + * + * FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_BEVEL :: + * Used to render beveled line joins. The outer corner of the joined + * lines is filled by enclosing the triangular region of the corner + * with a straight line between the outer corners of each stroke. + * + * FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_FIXED :: + * Used to render mitered line joins, with fixed bevels if the miter + * limit is exceeded. The outer edges of the strokes for the two + * segments are extended until they meet at an angle. If the segments + * meet at too sharp an angle (such that the miter would extend from + * the intersection of the segments a distance greater than the product + * of the miter limit value and the border radius), then a bevel join + * (see above) is used instead. This prevents long spikes being + * created. `FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_FIXED` generates a miter line + * join as used in PostScript and PDF. + * + * FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_VARIABLE :: + * FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER :: + * Used to render mitered line joins, with variable bevels if the miter + * limit is exceeded. The intersection of the strokes is clipped at a + * line perpendicular to the bisector of the angle between the strokes, + * at the distance from the intersection of the segments equal to the + * product of the miter limit value and the border radius. This + * prevents long spikes being created. + * `FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_VARIABLE` generates a mitered line join + * as used in XPS. `FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER` is an alias for + * `FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_VARIABLE`, retained for backward + * compatibility. + */ + typedef enum FT_Stroker_LineJoin_ + { + FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_ROUND = 0, + FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_BEVEL = 1, + FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_VARIABLE = 2, + FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER = FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_VARIABLE, + FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_FIXED = 3 + + } FT_Stroker_LineJoin; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Stroker_LineCap + * + * @description: + * These values determine how the end of opened sub-paths are rendered in + * a stroke. + * + * @values: + * FT_STROKER_LINECAP_BUTT :: + * The end of lines is rendered as a full stop on the last point + * itself. + * + * FT_STROKER_LINECAP_ROUND :: + * The end of lines is rendered as a half-circle around the last point. + * + * FT_STROKER_LINECAP_SQUARE :: + * The end of lines is rendered as a square around the last point. + */ + typedef enum FT_Stroker_LineCap_ + { + FT_STROKER_LINECAP_BUTT = 0, + FT_STROKER_LINECAP_ROUND, + FT_STROKER_LINECAP_SQUARE + + } FT_Stroker_LineCap; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_StrokerBorder + * + * @description: + * These values are used to select a given stroke border in + * @FT_Stroker_GetBorderCounts and @FT_Stroker_ExportBorder. + * + * @values: + * FT_STROKER_BORDER_LEFT :: + * Select the left border, relative to the drawing direction. + * + * FT_STROKER_BORDER_RIGHT :: + * Select the right border, relative to the drawing direction. + * + * @note: + * Applications are generally interested in the 'inside' and 'outside' + * borders. However, there is no direct mapping between these and the + * 'left' and 'right' ones, since this really depends on the glyph's + * drawing orientation, which varies between font formats. + * + * You can however use @FT_Outline_GetInsideBorder and + * @FT_Outline_GetOutsideBorder to get these. + */ + typedef enum FT_StrokerBorder_ + { + FT_STROKER_BORDER_LEFT = 0, + FT_STROKER_BORDER_RIGHT + + } FT_StrokerBorder; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_GetInsideBorder + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the @FT_StrokerBorder value corresponding to the 'inside' + * borders of a given outline. + * + * @input: + * outline :: + * The source outline handle. + * + * @return: + * The border index. @FT_STROKER_BORDER_RIGHT for empty or invalid + * outlines. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_StrokerBorder ) + FT_Outline_GetInsideBorder( FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Outline_GetOutsideBorder + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the @FT_StrokerBorder value corresponding to the 'outside' + * borders of a given outline. + * + * @input: + * outline :: + * The source outline handle. + * + * @return: + * The border index. @FT_STROKER_BORDER_LEFT for empty or invalid + * outlines. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_StrokerBorder ) + FT_Outline_GetOutsideBorder( FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_New + * + * @description: + * Create a new stroker object. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * FreeType library handle. + * + * @output: + * astroker :: + * A new stroker object handle. `NULL` in case of error. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_New( FT_Library library, + FT_Stroker *astroker ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_Set + * + * @description: + * Reset a stroker object's attributes. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * radius :: + * The border radius. + * + * line_cap :: + * The line cap style. + * + * line_join :: + * The line join style. + * + * miter_limit :: + * The miter limit for the `FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_FIXED` and + * `FT_STROKER_LINEJOIN_MITER_VARIABLE` line join styles, expressed as + * 16.16 fixed-point value. + * + * @note: + * The radius is expressed in the same units as the outline coordinates. + * + * This function calls @FT_Stroker_Rewind automatically. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Stroker_Set( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Fixed radius, + FT_Stroker_LineCap line_cap, + FT_Stroker_LineJoin line_join, + FT_Fixed miter_limit ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_Rewind + * + * @description: + * Reset a stroker object without changing its attributes. You should + * call this function before beginning a new series of calls to + * @FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath or @FT_Stroker_EndSubPath. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Stroker_Rewind( FT_Stroker stroker ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_ParseOutline + * + * @description: + * A convenience function used to parse a whole outline with the stroker. + * The resulting outline(s) can be retrieved later by functions like + * @FT_Stroker_GetCounts and @FT_Stroker_Export. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * outline :: + * The source outline. + * + * opened :: + * A boolean. If~1, the outline is treated as an open path instead of + * a closed one. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If `opened` is~0 (the default), the outline is treated as a closed + * path, and the stroker generates two distinct 'border' outlines. + * + * If `opened` is~1, the outline is processed as an open path, and the + * stroker generates a single 'stroke' outline. + * + * This function calls @FT_Stroker_Rewind automatically. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_ParseOutline( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Outline* outline, + FT_Bool opened ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath + * + * @description: + * Start a new sub-path in the stroker. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * to :: + * A pointer to the start vector. + * + * open :: + * A boolean. If~1, the sub-path is treated as an open one. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function is useful when you need to stroke a path that is not + * stored as an @FT_Outline object. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Vector* to, + FT_Bool open ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_EndSubPath + * + * @description: + * Close the current sub-path in the stroker. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You should call this function after @FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath. If the + * subpath was not 'opened', this function 'draws' a single line segment + * to the start position when needed. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_EndSubPath( FT_Stroker stroker ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_LineTo + * + * @description: + * 'Draw' a single line segment in the stroker's current sub-path, from + * the last position. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * to :: + * A pointer to the destination point. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You should call this function between @FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath and + * @FT_Stroker_EndSubPath. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_LineTo( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Vector* to ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_ConicTo + * + * @description: + * 'Draw' a single quadratic Bezier in the stroker's current sub-path, + * from the last position. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * control :: + * A pointer to a Bezier control point. + * + * to :: + * A pointer to the destination point. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You should call this function between @FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath and + * @FT_Stroker_EndSubPath. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_ConicTo( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Vector* control, + FT_Vector* to ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_CubicTo + * + * @description: + * 'Draw' a single cubic Bezier in the stroker's current sub-path, from + * the last position. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * control1 :: + * A pointer to the first Bezier control point. + * + * control2 :: + * A pointer to second Bezier control point. + * + * to :: + * A pointer to the destination point. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * You should call this function between @FT_Stroker_BeginSubPath and + * @FT_Stroker_EndSubPath. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_CubicTo( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Vector* control1, + FT_Vector* control2, + FT_Vector* to ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_GetBorderCounts + * + * @description: + * Call this function once you have finished parsing your paths with the + * stroker. It returns the number of points and contours necessary to + * export one of the 'border' or 'stroke' outlines generated by the + * stroker. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * border :: + * The border index. + * + * @output: + * anum_points :: + * The number of points. + * + * anum_contours :: + * The number of contours. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * When an outline, or a sub-path, is 'closed', the stroker generates two + * independent 'border' outlines, named 'left' and 'right'. + * + * When the outline, or a sub-path, is 'opened', the stroker merges the + * 'border' outlines with caps. The 'left' border receives all points, + * while the 'right' border becomes empty. + * + * Use the function @FT_Stroker_GetCounts instead if you want to retrieve + * the counts associated to both borders. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_GetBorderCounts( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_StrokerBorder border, + FT_UInt *anum_points, + FT_UInt *anum_contours ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_ExportBorder + * + * @description: + * Call this function after @FT_Stroker_GetBorderCounts to export the + * corresponding border to your own @FT_Outline structure. + * + * Note that this function appends the border points and contours to your + * outline, but does not try to resize its arrays. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * border :: + * The border index. + * + * outline :: + * The target outline handle. + * + * @note: + * Always call this function after @FT_Stroker_GetBorderCounts to get + * sure that there is enough room in your @FT_Outline object to receive + * all new data. + * + * When an outline, or a sub-path, is 'closed', the stroker generates two + * independent 'border' outlines, named 'left' and 'right'. + * + * When the outline, or a sub-path, is 'opened', the stroker merges the + * 'border' outlines with caps. The 'left' border receives all points, + * while the 'right' border becomes empty. + * + * Use the function @FT_Stroker_Export instead if you want to retrieve + * all borders at once. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Stroker_ExportBorder( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_StrokerBorder border, + FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_GetCounts + * + * @description: + * Call this function once you have finished parsing your paths with the + * stroker. It returns the number of points and contours necessary to + * export all points/borders from the stroked outline/path. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * @output: + * anum_points :: + * The number of points. + * + * anum_contours :: + * The number of contours. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Stroker_GetCounts( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_UInt *anum_points, + FT_UInt *anum_contours ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_Export + * + * @description: + * Call this function after @FT_Stroker_GetBorderCounts to export all + * borders to your own @FT_Outline structure. + * + * Note that this function appends the border points and contours to your + * outline, but does not try to resize its arrays. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * The target stroker handle. + * + * outline :: + * The target outline handle. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Stroker_Export( FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Outline* outline ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Stroker_Done + * + * @description: + * Destroy a stroker object. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * A stroker handle. Can be `NULL`. + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Stroker_Done( FT_Stroker stroker ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Glyph_Stroke + * + * @description: + * Stroke a given outline glyph object with a given stroker. + * + * @inout: + * pglyph :: + * Source glyph handle on input, new glyph handle on output. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * A stroker handle. + * + * destroy :: + * A Boolean. If~1, the source glyph object is destroyed on success. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The source glyph is untouched in case of error. + * + * Adding stroke may yield a significantly wider and taller glyph + * depending on how large of a radius was used to stroke the glyph. You + * may need to manually adjust horizontal and vertical advance amounts to + * account for this added size. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Glyph_Stroke( FT_Glyph *pglyph, + FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Bool destroy ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Glyph_StrokeBorder + * + * @description: + * Stroke a given outline glyph object with a given stroker, but only + * return either its inside or outside border. + * + * @inout: + * pglyph :: + * Source glyph handle on input, new glyph handle on output. + * + * @input: + * stroker :: + * A stroker handle. + * + * inside :: + * A Boolean. If~1, return the inside border, otherwise the outside + * border. + * + * destroy :: + * A Boolean. If~1, the source glyph object is destroyed on success. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The source glyph is untouched in case of error. + * + * Adding stroke may yield a significantly wider and taller glyph + * depending on how large of a radius was used to stroke the glyph. You + * may need to manually adjust horizontal and vertical advance amounts to + * account for this added size. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Glyph_StrokeBorder( FT_Glyph *pglyph, + FT_Stroker stroker, + FT_Bool inside, + FT_Bool destroy ); + + /* */ + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTSTROKE_H_ */ + + +/* END */ + + +/* Local Variables: */ +/* coding: utf-8 */ +/* End: */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsynth.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsynth.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8754f97 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsynth.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftsynth.h + * + * FreeType synthesizing code for emboldening and slanting + * (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2000-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /********* *********/ + /********* WARNING, THIS IS ALPHA CODE! THIS API *********/ + /********* IS DUE TO CHANGE UNTIL STRICTLY NOTIFIED BY THE *********/ + /********* FREETYPE DEVELOPMENT TEAM *********/ + /********* *********/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /* Main reason for not lifting the functions in this module to a */ + /* 'standard' API is that the used parameters for emboldening and */ + /* slanting are not configurable. Consider the functions as a */ + /* code resource that should be copied into the application and */ + /* adapted to the particular needs. */ + + +#ifndef FTSYNTH_H_ +#define FTSYNTH_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /* Embolden a glyph by a 'reasonable' value (which is highly a matter of */ + /* taste). This function is actually a convenience function, providing */ + /* a wrapper for @FT_Outline_Embolden and @FT_Bitmap_Embolden. */ + /* */ + /* For emboldened outlines the height, width, and advance metrics are */ + /* increased by the strength of the emboldening -- this even affects */ + /* mono-width fonts! */ + /* */ + /* You can also call @FT_Outline_Get_CBox to get precise values. */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_GlyphSlot_Embolden( FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + /* Slant an outline glyph to the right by about 12 degrees. */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_GlyphSlot_Oblique( FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTSYNTH_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsystem.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsystem.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..889a6ba --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftsystem.h @@ -0,0 +1,353 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftsystem.h + * + * FreeType low-level system interface definition (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTSYSTEM_H_ +#define FTSYSTEM_H_ + + +#include + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * system_interface + * + * @title: + * System Interface + * + * @abstract: + * How FreeType manages memory and i/o. + * + * @description: + * This section contains various definitions related to memory management + * and i/o access. You need to understand this information if you want to + * use a custom memory manager or you own i/o streams. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * M E M O R Y M A N A G E M E N T + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Memory + * + * @description: + * A handle to a given memory manager object, defined with an + * @FT_MemoryRec structure. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_MemoryRec_* FT_Memory; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Alloc_Func + * + * @description: + * A function used to allocate `size` bytes from `memory`. + * + * @input: + * memory :: + * A handle to the source memory manager. + * + * size :: + * The size in bytes to allocate. + * + * @return: + * Address of new memory block. 0~in case of failure. + * + */ + typedef void* + (*FT_Alloc_Func)( FT_Memory memory, + long size ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Free_Func + * + * @description: + * A function used to release a given block of memory. + * + * @input: + * memory :: + * A handle to the source memory manager. + * + * block :: + * The address of the target memory block. + * + */ + typedef void + (*FT_Free_Func)( FT_Memory memory, + void* block ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Realloc_Func + * + * @description: + * A function used to re-allocate a given block of memory. + * + * @input: + * memory :: + * A handle to the source memory manager. + * + * cur_size :: + * The block's current size in bytes. + * + * new_size :: + * The block's requested new size. + * + * block :: + * The block's current address. + * + * @return: + * New block address. 0~in case of memory shortage. + * + * @note: + * In case of error, the old block must still be available. + * + */ + typedef void* + (*FT_Realloc_Func)( FT_Memory memory, + long cur_size, + long new_size, + void* block ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_MemoryRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to describe a given memory manager to FreeType~2. + * + * @fields: + * user :: + * A generic typeless pointer for user data. + * + * alloc :: + * A pointer type to an allocation function. + * + * free :: + * A pointer type to an memory freeing function. + * + * realloc :: + * A pointer type to a reallocation function. + * + */ + struct FT_MemoryRec_ + { + void* user; + FT_Alloc_Func alloc; + FT_Free_Func free; + FT_Realloc_Func realloc; + }; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * I / O M A N A G E M E N T + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Stream + * + * @description: + * A handle to an input stream. + * + * @also: + * See @FT_StreamRec for the publicly accessible fields of a given stream + * object. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_StreamRec_* FT_Stream; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_StreamDesc + * + * @description: + * A union type used to store either a long or a pointer. This is used + * to store a file descriptor or a `FILE*` in an input stream. + * + */ + typedef union FT_StreamDesc_ + { + long value; + void* pointer; + + } FT_StreamDesc; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Stream_IoFunc + * + * @description: + * A function used to seek and read data from a given input stream. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * A handle to the source stream. + * + * offset :: + * The offset of read in stream (always from start). + * + * buffer :: + * The address of the read buffer. + * + * count :: + * The number of bytes to read from the stream. + * + * @return: + * The number of bytes effectively read by the stream. + * + * @note: + * This function might be called to perform a seek or skip operation with + * a `count` of~0. A non-zero return value then indicates an error. + * + */ + typedef unsigned long + (*FT_Stream_IoFunc)( FT_Stream stream, + unsigned long offset, + unsigned char* buffer, + unsigned long count ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Stream_CloseFunc + * + * @description: + * A function used to close a given input stream. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * A handle to the target stream. + * + */ + typedef void + (*FT_Stream_CloseFunc)( FT_Stream stream ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_StreamRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to describe an input stream. + * + * @input: + * base :: + * For memory-based streams, this is the address of the first stream + * byte in memory. This field should always be set to `NULL` for + * disk-based streams. + * + * size :: + * The stream size in bytes. + * + * In case of compressed streams where the size is unknown before + * actually doing the decompression, the value is set to 0x7FFFFFFF. + * (Note that this size value can occur for normal streams also; it is + * thus just a hint.) + * + * pos :: + * The current position within the stream. + * + * descriptor :: + * This field is a union that can hold an integer or a pointer. It is + * used by stream implementations to store file descriptors or `FILE*` + * pointers. + * + * pathname :: + * This field is completely ignored by FreeType. However, it is often + * useful during debugging to use it to store the stream's filename + * (where available). + * + * read :: + * The stream's input function. + * + * close :: + * The stream's close function. + * + * memory :: + * The memory manager to use to preload frames. This is set internally + * by FreeType and shouldn't be touched by stream implementations. + * + * cursor :: + * This field is set and used internally by FreeType when parsing + * frames. In particular, the `FT_GET_XXX` macros use this instead of + * the `pos` field. + * + * limit :: + * This field is set and used internally by FreeType when parsing + * frames. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_StreamRec_ + { + unsigned char* base; + unsigned long size; + unsigned long pos; + + FT_StreamDesc descriptor; + FT_StreamDesc pathname; + FT_Stream_IoFunc read; + FT_Stream_CloseFunc close; + + FT_Memory memory; + unsigned char* cursor; + unsigned char* limit; + + } FT_StreamRec; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTSYSTEM_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fttrigon.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fttrigon.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..37e1412 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fttrigon.h @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * fttrigon.h + * + * FreeType trigonometric functions (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2001-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTTRIGON_H_ +#define FTTRIGON_H_ + +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * computations + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Angle + * + * @description: + * This type is used to model angle values in FreeType. Note that the + * angle is a 16.16 fixed-point value expressed in degrees. + * + */ + typedef FT_Fixed FT_Angle; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_ANGLE_PI + * + * @description: + * The angle pi expressed in @FT_Angle units. + * + */ +#define FT_ANGLE_PI ( 180L << 16 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_ANGLE_2PI + * + * @description: + * The angle 2*pi expressed in @FT_Angle units. + * + */ +#define FT_ANGLE_2PI ( FT_ANGLE_PI * 2 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_ANGLE_PI2 + * + * @description: + * The angle pi/2 expressed in @FT_Angle units. + * + */ +#define FT_ANGLE_PI2 ( FT_ANGLE_PI / 2 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_ANGLE_PI4 + * + * @description: + * The angle pi/4 expressed in @FT_Angle units. + * + */ +#define FT_ANGLE_PI4 ( FT_ANGLE_PI / 4 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Sin + * + * @description: + * Return the sinus of a given angle in fixed-point format. + * + * @input: + * angle :: + * The input angle. + * + * @return: + * The sinus value. + * + * @note: + * If you need both the sinus and cosinus for a given angle, use the + * function @FT_Vector_Unit. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Fixed ) + FT_Sin( FT_Angle angle ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Cos + * + * @description: + * Return the cosinus of a given angle in fixed-point format. + * + * @input: + * angle :: + * The input angle. + * + * @return: + * The cosinus value. + * + * @note: + * If you need both the sinus and cosinus for a given angle, use the + * function @FT_Vector_Unit. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Fixed ) + FT_Cos( FT_Angle angle ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Tan + * + * @description: + * Return the tangent of a given angle in fixed-point format. + * + * @input: + * angle :: + * The input angle. + * + * @return: + * The tangent value. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Fixed ) + FT_Tan( FT_Angle angle ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Atan2 + * + * @description: + * Return the arc-tangent corresponding to a given vector (x,y) in the 2d + * plane. + * + * @input: + * x :: + * The horizontal vector coordinate. + * + * y :: + * The vertical vector coordinate. + * + * @return: + * The arc-tangent value (i.e. angle). + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Angle ) + FT_Atan2( FT_Fixed x, + FT_Fixed y ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Angle_Diff + * + * @description: + * Return the difference between two angles. The result is always + * constrained to the ]-PI..PI] interval. + * + * @input: + * angle1 :: + * First angle. + * + * angle2 :: + * Second angle. + * + * @return: + * Constrained value of `angle2-angle1`. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Angle ) + FT_Angle_Diff( FT_Angle angle1, + FT_Angle angle2 ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Vector_Unit + * + * @description: + * Return the unit vector corresponding to a given angle. After the + * call, the value of `vec.x` will be `cos(angle)`, and the value of + * `vec.y` will be `sin(angle)`. + * + * This function is useful to retrieve both the sinus and cosinus of a + * given angle quickly. + * + * @output: + * vec :: + * The address of target vector. + * + * @input: + * angle :: + * The input angle. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Vector_Unit( FT_Vector* vec, + FT_Angle angle ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Vector_Rotate + * + * @description: + * Rotate a vector by a given angle. + * + * @inout: + * vec :: + * The address of target vector. + * + * @input: + * angle :: + * The input angle. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Vector_Rotate( FT_Vector* vec, + FT_Angle angle ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Vector_Length + * + * @description: + * Return the length of a given vector. + * + * @input: + * vec :: + * The address of target vector. + * + * @return: + * The vector length, expressed in the same units that the original + * vector coordinates. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Fixed ) + FT_Vector_Length( FT_Vector* vec ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Vector_Polarize + * + * @description: + * Compute both the length and angle of a given vector. + * + * @input: + * vec :: + * The address of source vector. + * + * @output: + * length :: + * The vector length. + * + * angle :: + * The vector angle. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Vector_Polarize( FT_Vector* vec, + FT_Fixed *length, + FT_Angle *angle ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Vector_From_Polar + * + * @description: + * Compute vector coordinates from a length and angle. + * + * @output: + * vec :: + * The address of source vector. + * + * @input: + * length :: + * The vector length. + * + * angle :: + * The vector angle. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( void ) + FT_Vector_From_Polar( FT_Vector* vec, + FT_Fixed length, + FT_Angle angle ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTTRIGON_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fttypes.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fttypes.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1057150 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/fttypes.h @@ -0,0 +1,615 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * fttypes.h + * + * FreeType simple types definitions (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTTYPES_H_ +#define FTTYPES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_CONFIG_CONFIG_H +#include FT_SYSTEM_H +#include FT_IMAGE_H + +#include + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * basic_types + * + * @title: + * Basic Data Types + * + * @abstract: + * The basic data types defined by the library. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the basic data types defined by FreeType~2, + * ranging from simple scalar types to bitmap descriptors. More + * font-specific structures are defined in a different section. + * + * @order: + * FT_Byte + * FT_Bytes + * FT_Char + * FT_Int + * FT_UInt + * FT_Int16 + * FT_UInt16 + * FT_Int32 + * FT_UInt32 + * FT_Int64 + * FT_UInt64 + * FT_Short + * FT_UShort + * FT_Long + * FT_ULong + * FT_Bool + * FT_Offset + * FT_PtrDist + * FT_String + * FT_Tag + * FT_Error + * FT_Fixed + * FT_Pointer + * FT_Pos + * FT_Vector + * FT_BBox + * FT_Matrix + * FT_FWord + * FT_UFWord + * FT_F2Dot14 + * FT_UnitVector + * FT_F26Dot6 + * FT_Data + * + * FT_MAKE_TAG + * + * FT_Generic + * FT_Generic_Finalizer + * + * FT_Bitmap + * FT_Pixel_Mode + * FT_Palette_Mode + * FT_Glyph_Format + * FT_IMAGE_TAG + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Bool + * + * @description: + * A typedef of unsigned char, used for simple booleans. As usual, + * values 1 and~0 represent true and false, respectively. + */ + typedef unsigned char FT_Bool; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_FWord + * + * @description: + * A signed 16-bit integer used to store a distance in original font + * units. + */ + typedef signed short FT_FWord; /* distance in FUnits */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_UFWord + * + * @description: + * An unsigned 16-bit integer used to store a distance in original font + * units. + */ + typedef unsigned short FT_UFWord; /* unsigned distance */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Char + * + * @description: + * A simple typedef for the _signed_ char type. + */ + typedef signed char FT_Char; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Byte + * + * @description: + * A simple typedef for the _unsigned_ char type. + */ + typedef unsigned char FT_Byte; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Bytes + * + * @description: + * A typedef for constant memory areas. + */ + typedef const FT_Byte* FT_Bytes; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Tag + * + * @description: + * A typedef for 32-bit tags (as used in the SFNT format). + */ + typedef FT_UInt32 FT_Tag; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_String + * + * @description: + * A simple typedef for the char type, usually used for strings. + */ + typedef char FT_String; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Short + * + * @description: + * A typedef for signed short. + */ + typedef signed short FT_Short; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_UShort + * + * @description: + * A typedef for unsigned short. + */ + typedef unsigned short FT_UShort; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Int + * + * @description: + * A typedef for the int type. + */ + typedef signed int FT_Int; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_UInt + * + * @description: + * A typedef for the unsigned int type. + */ + typedef unsigned int FT_UInt; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Long + * + * @description: + * A typedef for signed long. + */ + typedef signed long FT_Long; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_ULong + * + * @description: + * A typedef for unsigned long. + */ + typedef unsigned long FT_ULong; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_F2Dot14 + * + * @description: + * A signed 2.14 fixed-point type used for unit vectors. + */ + typedef signed short FT_F2Dot14; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_F26Dot6 + * + * @description: + * A signed 26.6 fixed-point type used for vectorial pixel coordinates. + */ + typedef signed long FT_F26Dot6; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Fixed + * + * @description: + * This type is used to store 16.16 fixed-point values, like scaling + * values or matrix coefficients. + */ + typedef signed long FT_Fixed; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Error + * + * @description: + * The FreeType error code type. A value of~0 is always interpreted as a + * successful operation. + */ + typedef int FT_Error; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Pointer + * + * @description: + * A simple typedef for a typeless pointer. + */ + typedef void* FT_Pointer; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_Offset + * + * @description: + * This is equivalent to the ANSI~C `size_t` type, i.e., the largest + * _unsigned_ integer type used to express a file size or position, or a + * memory block size. + */ + typedef size_t FT_Offset; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_PtrDist + * + * @description: + * This is equivalent to the ANSI~C `ptrdiff_t` type, i.e., the largest + * _signed_ integer type used to express the distance between two + * pointers. + */ + typedef ft_ptrdiff_t FT_PtrDist; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_UnitVector + * + * @description: + * A simple structure used to store a 2D vector unit vector. Uses + * FT_F2Dot14 types. + * + * @fields: + * x :: + * Horizontal coordinate. + * + * y :: + * Vertical coordinate. + */ + typedef struct FT_UnitVector_ + { + FT_F2Dot14 x; + FT_F2Dot14 y; + + } FT_UnitVector; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Matrix + * + * @description: + * A simple structure used to store a 2x2 matrix. Coefficients are in + * 16.16 fixed-point format. The computation performed is: + * + * ``` + * x' = x*xx + y*xy + * y' = x*yx + y*yy + * ``` + * + * @fields: + * xx :: + * Matrix coefficient. + * + * xy :: + * Matrix coefficient. + * + * yx :: + * Matrix coefficient. + * + * yy :: + * Matrix coefficient. + */ + typedef struct FT_Matrix_ + { + FT_Fixed xx, xy; + FT_Fixed yx, yy; + + } FT_Matrix; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Data + * + * @description: + * Read-only binary data represented as a pointer and a length. + * + * @fields: + * pointer :: + * The data. + * + * length :: + * The length of the data in bytes. + */ + typedef struct FT_Data_ + { + const FT_Byte* pointer; + FT_Int length; + + } FT_Data; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_Generic_Finalizer + * + * @description: + * Describe a function used to destroy the 'client' data of any FreeType + * object. See the description of the @FT_Generic type for details of + * usage. + * + * @input: + * The address of the FreeType object that is under finalization. Its + * client data is accessed through its `generic` field. + */ + typedef void (*FT_Generic_Finalizer)( void* object ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Generic + * + * @description: + * Client applications often need to associate their own data to a + * variety of FreeType core objects. For example, a text layout API + * might want to associate a glyph cache to a given size object. + * + * Some FreeType object contains a `generic` field, of type `FT_Generic`, + * which usage is left to client applications and font servers. + * + * It can be used to store a pointer to client-specific data, as well as + * the address of a 'finalizer' function, which will be called by + * FreeType when the object is destroyed (for example, the previous + * client example would put the address of the glyph cache destructor in + * the `finalizer` field). + * + * @fields: + * data :: + * A typeless pointer to any client-specified data. This field is + * completely ignored by the FreeType library. + * + * finalizer :: + * A pointer to a 'generic finalizer' function, which will be called + * when the object is destroyed. If this field is set to `NULL`, no + * code will be called. + */ + typedef struct FT_Generic_ + { + void* data; + FT_Generic_Finalizer finalizer; + + } FT_Generic; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_MAKE_TAG + * + * @description: + * This macro converts four-letter tags that are used to label TrueType + * tables into an unsigned long, to be used within FreeType. + * + * @note: + * The produced values **must** be 32-bit integers. Don't redefine this + * macro. + */ +#define FT_MAKE_TAG( _x1, _x2, _x3, _x4 ) \ + (FT_Tag) \ + ( ( (FT_ULong)_x1 << 24 ) | \ + ( (FT_ULong)_x2 << 16 ) | \ + ( (FT_ULong)_x3 << 8 ) | \ + (FT_ULong)_x4 ) + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /* */ + /* L I S T M A N A G E M E N T */ + /* */ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * list_processing + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_ListNode + * + * @description: + * Many elements and objects in FreeType are listed through an @FT_List + * record (see @FT_ListRec). As its name suggests, an FT_ListNode is a + * handle to a single list element. + */ + typedef struct FT_ListNodeRec_* FT_ListNode; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * FT_List + * + * @description: + * A handle to a list record (see @FT_ListRec). + */ + typedef struct FT_ListRec_* FT_List; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_ListNodeRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to hold a single list element. + * + * @fields: + * prev :: + * The previous element in the list. `NULL` if first. + * + * next :: + * The next element in the list. `NULL` if last. + * + * data :: + * A typeless pointer to the listed object. + */ + typedef struct FT_ListNodeRec_ + { + FT_ListNode prev; + FT_ListNode next; + void* data; + + } FT_ListNodeRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_ListRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to hold a simple doubly-linked list. These are used + * in many parts of FreeType. + * + * @fields: + * head :: + * The head (first element) of doubly-linked list. + * + * tail :: + * The tail (last element) of doubly-linked list. + */ + typedef struct FT_ListRec_ + { + FT_ListNode head; + FT_ListNode tail; + + } FT_ListRec; + + /* */ + + +#define FT_IS_EMPTY( list ) ( (list).head == 0 ) +#define FT_BOOL( x ) ( (FT_Bool)( (x) != 0 ) ) + + /* concatenate C tokens */ +#define FT_ERR_XCAT( x, y ) x ## y +#define FT_ERR_CAT( x, y ) FT_ERR_XCAT( x, y ) + + /* see `ftmoderr.h` for descriptions of the following macros */ + +#define FT_ERR( e ) FT_ERR_CAT( FT_ERR_PREFIX, e ) + +#define FT_ERROR_BASE( x ) ( (x) & 0xFF ) +#define FT_ERROR_MODULE( x ) ( (x) & 0xFF00U ) + +#define FT_ERR_EQ( x, e ) \ + ( FT_ERROR_BASE( x ) == FT_ERROR_BASE( FT_ERR( e ) ) ) +#define FT_ERR_NEQ( x, e ) \ + ( FT_ERROR_BASE( x ) != FT_ERROR_BASE( FT_ERR( e ) ) ) + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTTYPES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftwinfnt.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftwinfnt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3437913 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ftwinfnt.h @@ -0,0 +1,277 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftwinfnt.h + * + * FreeType API for accessing Windows fnt-specific data. + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTWINFNT_H_ +#define FTWINFNT_H_ + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * winfnt_fonts + * + * @title: + * Window FNT Files + * + * @abstract: + * Windows FNT-specific API. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the declaration of Windows FNT-specific + * functions. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_WinFNT_ID_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of valid values for the `charset` byte in @FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec. + * Exact mapping tables for the various 'cpXXXX' encodings (except for + * 'cp1361') can be found at 'ftp://ftp.unicode.org/Public' in the + * `MAPPINGS/VENDORS/MICSFT/WINDOWS` subdirectory. 'cp1361' is roughly a + * superset of `MAPPINGS/OBSOLETE/EASTASIA/KSC/JOHAB.TXT`. + * + * @values: + * FT_WinFNT_ID_DEFAULT :: + * This is used for font enumeration and font creation as a 'don't + * care' value. Valid font files don't contain this value. When + * querying for information about the character set of the font that is + * currently selected into a specified device context, this return + * value (of the related Windows API) simply denotes failure. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_SYMBOL :: + * There is no known mapping table available. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_MAC :: + * Mac Roman encoding. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_OEM :: + * From Michael Poettgen : + * + * The 'Windows Font Mapping' article says that `FT_WinFNT_ID_OEM` is + * used for the charset of vector fonts, like `modern.fon`, + * `roman.fon`, and `script.fon` on Windows. + * + * The 'CreateFont' documentation says: The `FT_WinFNT_ID_OEM` value + * specifies a character set that is operating-system dependent. + * + * The 'IFIMETRICS' documentation from the 'Windows Driver Development + * Kit' says: This font supports an OEM-specific character set. The + * OEM character set is system dependent. + * + * In general OEM, as opposed to ANSI (i.e., 'cp1252'), denotes the + * second default codepage that most international versions of Windows + * have. It is one of the OEM codepages from + * + * https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/desktop/intl/code-page-identifiers + * , + * + * and is used for the 'DOS boxes', to support legacy applications. A + * German Windows version for example usually uses ANSI codepage 1252 + * and OEM codepage 850. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP874 :: + * A superset of Thai TIS 620 and ISO 8859-11. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP932 :: + * A superset of Japanese Shift-JIS (with minor deviations). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP936 :: + * A superset of simplified Chinese GB 2312-1980 (with different + * ordering and minor deviations). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP949 :: + * A superset of Korean Hangul KS~C 5601-1987 (with different ordering + * and minor deviations). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP950 :: + * A superset of traditional Chinese Big~5 ETen (with different + * ordering and minor deviations). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1250 :: + * A superset of East European ISO 8859-2 (with slightly different + * ordering). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1251 :: + * A superset of Russian ISO 8859-5 (with different ordering). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1252 :: + * ANSI encoding. A superset of ISO 8859-1. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1253 :: + * A superset of Greek ISO 8859-7 (with minor modifications). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1254 :: + * A superset of Turkish ISO 8859-9. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1255 :: + * A superset of Hebrew ISO 8859-8 (with some modifications). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1256 :: + * A superset of Arabic ISO 8859-6 (with different ordering). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1257 :: + * A superset of Baltic ISO 8859-13 (with some deviations). + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1258 :: + * For Vietnamese. This encoding doesn't cover all necessary + * characters. + * + * FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1361 :: + * Korean (Johab). + */ + +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1252 0 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_DEFAULT 1 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_SYMBOL 2 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_MAC 77 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP932 128 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP949 129 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1361 130 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP936 134 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP950 136 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1253 161 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1254 162 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1258 163 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1255 177 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1256 178 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1257 186 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1251 204 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP874 222 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_CP1250 238 +#define FT_WinFNT_ID_OEM 255 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec + * + * @description: + * Windows FNT Header info. + */ + typedef struct FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec_ + { + FT_UShort version; + FT_ULong file_size; + FT_Byte copyright[60]; + FT_UShort file_type; + FT_UShort nominal_point_size; + FT_UShort vertical_resolution; + FT_UShort horizontal_resolution; + FT_UShort ascent; + FT_UShort internal_leading; + FT_UShort external_leading; + FT_Byte italic; + FT_Byte underline; + FT_Byte strike_out; + FT_UShort weight; + FT_Byte charset; + FT_UShort pixel_width; + FT_UShort pixel_height; + FT_Byte pitch_and_family; + FT_UShort avg_width; + FT_UShort max_width; + FT_Byte first_char; + FT_Byte last_char; + FT_Byte default_char; + FT_Byte break_char; + FT_UShort bytes_per_row; + FT_ULong device_offset; + FT_ULong face_name_offset; + FT_ULong bits_pointer; + FT_ULong bits_offset; + FT_Byte reserved; + FT_ULong flags; + FT_UShort A_space; + FT_UShort B_space; + FT_UShort C_space; + FT_UShort color_table_offset; + FT_ULong reserved1[4]; + + } FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_WinFNT_Header + * + * @description: + * A handle to an @FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec structure. + */ + typedef struct FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec_* FT_WinFNT_Header; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_WinFNT_Header + * + * @description: + * Retrieve a Windows FNT font info header. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the input face. + * + * @output: + * aheader :: + * The WinFNT header. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * This function only works with Windows FNT faces, returning an error + * otherwise. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_WinFNT_Header( FT_Face face, + FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec *aheader ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTWINFNT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ + + +/* Local Variables: */ +/* coding: utf-8 */ +/* End: */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/autohint.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/autohint.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f64c28b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/autohint.h @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * autohint.h + * + * High-level 'autohint' module-specific interface (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * The auto-hinter is used to load and automatically hint glyphs if a + * format-specific hinter isn't available. + * + */ + + +#ifndef AUTOHINT_H_ +#define AUTOHINT_H_ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * A small technical note regarding automatic hinting in order to clarify + * this module interface. + * + * An automatic hinter might compute two kinds of data for a given face: + * + * - global hints: Usually some metrics that describe global properties + * of the face. It is computed by scanning more or less + * aggressively the glyphs in the face, and thus can be + * very slow to compute (even if the size of global hints + * is really small). + * + * - glyph hints: These describe some important features of the glyph + * outline, as well as how to align them. They are + * generally much faster to compute than global hints. + * + * The current FreeType auto-hinter does a pretty good job while performing + * fast computations for both global and glyph hints. However, we might be + * interested in introducing more complex and powerful algorithms in the + * future, like the one described in the John D. Hobby paper, which + * unfortunately requires a lot more horsepower. + * + * Because a sufficiently sophisticated font management system would + * typically implement an LRU cache of opened face objects to reduce memory + * usage, it is a good idea to be able to avoid recomputing global hints + * every time the same face is re-opened. + * + * We thus provide the ability to cache global hints outside of the face + * object, in order to speed up font re-opening time. Of course, this + * feature is purely optional, so most client programs won't even notice + * it. + * + * I initially thought that it would be a good idea to cache the glyph + * hints too. However, my general idea now is that if you really need to + * cache these too, you are simply in need of a new font format, where all + * this information could be stored within the font file and decoded on the + * fly. + * + */ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + typedef struct FT_AutoHinterRec_ *FT_AutoHinter; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_AutoHinter_GlobalGetFunc + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the global hints computed for a given face object. The + * resulting data is dissociated from the face and will survive a call to + * FT_Done_Face(). It must be discarded through the API + * FT_AutoHinter_GlobalDoneFunc(). + * + * @input: + * hinter :: + * A handle to the source auto-hinter. + * + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * @output: + * global_hints :: + * A typeless pointer to the global hints. + * + * global_len :: + * The size in bytes of the global hints. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_AutoHinter_GlobalGetFunc)( FT_AutoHinter hinter, + FT_Face face, + void** global_hints, + long* global_len ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_AutoHinter_GlobalDoneFunc + * + * @description: + * Discard the global hints retrieved through + * FT_AutoHinter_GlobalGetFunc(). This is the only way these hints are + * freed from memory. + * + * @input: + * hinter :: + * A handle to the auto-hinter module. + * + * global :: + * A pointer to retrieved global hints to discard. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_AutoHinter_GlobalDoneFunc)( FT_AutoHinter hinter, + void* global ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_AutoHinter_GlobalResetFunc + * + * @description: + * This function is used to recompute the global metrics in a given font. + * This is useful when global font data changes (e.g. Multiple Masters + * fonts where blend coordinates change). + * + * @input: + * hinter :: + * A handle to the source auto-hinter. + * + * face :: + * A handle to the face. + */ + typedef void + (*FT_AutoHinter_GlobalResetFunc)( FT_AutoHinter hinter, + FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * FT_AutoHinter_GlyphLoadFunc + * + * @description: + * This function is used to load, scale, and automatically hint a glyph + * from a given face. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the face. + * + * glyph_index :: + * The glyph index. + * + * load_flags :: + * The load flags. + * + * @note: + * This function is capable of loading composite glyphs by hinting each + * sub-glyph independently (which improves quality). + * + * It will call the font driver with @FT_Load_Glyph, with + * @FT_LOAD_NO_SCALE set. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_AutoHinter_GlyphLoadFunc)( FT_AutoHinter hinter, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Size size, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Int32 load_flags ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_AutoHinter_InterfaceRec + * + * @description: + * The auto-hinter module's interface. + */ + typedef struct FT_AutoHinter_InterfaceRec_ + { + FT_AutoHinter_GlobalResetFunc reset_face; + FT_AutoHinter_GlobalGetFunc get_global_hints; + FT_AutoHinter_GlobalDoneFunc done_global_hints; + FT_AutoHinter_GlyphLoadFunc load_glyph; + + } FT_AutoHinter_InterfaceRec, *FT_AutoHinter_Interface; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_AUTOHINTER_INTERFACE( \ + class_, \ + reset_face_, \ + get_global_hints_, \ + done_global_hints_, \ + load_glyph_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF \ + const FT_AutoHinter_InterfaceRec class_ = \ + { \ + reset_face_, \ + get_global_hints_, \ + done_global_hints_, \ + load_glyph_ \ + }; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* AUTOHINT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/cffotypes.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/cffotypes.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b26893e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/cffotypes.h @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * cffotypes.h + * + * Basic OpenType/CFF object type definitions (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2017-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef CFFOTYPES_H_ +#define CFFOTYPES_H_ + +#include +#include FT_INTERNAL_OBJECTS_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_CFF_TYPES_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_TRUETYPE_TYPES_H +#include FT_SERVICE_POSTSCRIPT_CMAPS_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_POSTSCRIPT_HINTS_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + typedef TT_Face CFF_Face; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * CFF_Size + * + * @description: + * A handle to an OpenType size object. + */ + typedef struct CFF_SizeRec_ + { + FT_SizeRec root; + FT_ULong strike_index; /* 0xFFFFFFFF to indicate invalid */ + + } CFF_SizeRec, *CFF_Size; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * CFF_GlyphSlot + * + * @description: + * A handle to an OpenType glyph slot object. + */ + typedef struct CFF_GlyphSlotRec_ + { + FT_GlyphSlotRec root; + + FT_Bool hint; + FT_Bool scaled; + + FT_Fixed x_scale; + FT_Fixed y_scale; + + } CFF_GlyphSlotRec, *CFF_GlyphSlot; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * CFF_Internal + * + * @description: + * The interface to the 'internal' field of `FT_Size`. + */ + typedef struct CFF_InternalRec_ + { + PSH_Globals topfont; + PSH_Globals subfonts[CFF_MAX_CID_FONTS]; + + } CFF_InternalRec, *CFF_Internal; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Subglyph transformation record. + */ + typedef struct CFF_Transform_ + { + FT_Fixed xx, xy; /* transformation matrix coefficients */ + FT_Fixed yx, yy; + FT_F26Dot6 ox, oy; /* offsets */ + + } CFF_Transform; + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* CFFOTYPES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/cfftypes.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/cfftypes.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2fc905e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/cfftypes.h @@ -0,0 +1,417 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * cfftypes.h + * + * Basic OpenType/CFF type definitions and interface (specification + * only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef CFFTYPES_H_ +#define CFFTYPES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H +#include FT_TYPE1_TABLES_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_SERVICE_POSTSCRIPT_CMAPS_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_POSTSCRIPT_HINTS_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_TYPE1_TYPES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CFF_IndexRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to model a CFF Index table. + * + * @fields: + * stream :: + * The source input stream. + * + * start :: + * The position of the first index byte in the input stream. + * + * count :: + * The number of elements in the index. + * + * off_size :: + * The size in bytes of object offsets in index. + * + * data_offset :: + * The position of first data byte in the index's bytes. + * + * data_size :: + * The size of the data table in this index. + * + * offsets :: + * A table of element offsets in the index. Must be loaded explicitly. + * + * bytes :: + * If the index is loaded in memory, its bytes. + */ + typedef struct CFF_IndexRec_ + { + FT_Stream stream; + FT_ULong start; + FT_UInt hdr_size; + FT_UInt count; + FT_Byte off_size; + FT_ULong data_offset; + FT_ULong data_size; + + FT_ULong* offsets; + FT_Byte* bytes; + + } CFF_IndexRec, *CFF_Index; + + + typedef struct CFF_EncodingRec_ + { + FT_UInt format; + FT_ULong offset; + + FT_UInt count; + FT_UShort sids [256]; /* avoid dynamic allocations */ + FT_UShort codes[256]; + + } CFF_EncodingRec, *CFF_Encoding; + + + typedef struct CFF_CharsetRec_ + { + + FT_UInt format; + FT_ULong offset; + + FT_UShort* sids; + FT_UShort* cids; /* the inverse mapping of `sids'; only needed */ + /* for CID-keyed fonts */ + FT_UInt max_cid; + FT_UInt num_glyphs; + + } CFF_CharsetRec, *CFF_Charset; + + + /* cf. similar fields in file `ttgxvar.h' from the `truetype' module */ + + typedef struct CFF_VarData_ + { +#if 0 + FT_UInt itemCount; /* not used; always zero */ + FT_UInt shortDeltaCount; /* not used; always zero */ +#endif + + FT_UInt regionIdxCount; /* number of region indexes */ + FT_UInt* regionIndices; /* array of `regionIdxCount' indices; */ + /* these index `varRegionList' */ + } CFF_VarData; + + + /* contribution of one axis to a region */ + typedef struct CFF_AxisCoords_ + { + FT_Fixed startCoord; + FT_Fixed peakCoord; /* zero peak means no effect (factor = 1) */ + FT_Fixed endCoord; + + } CFF_AxisCoords; + + + typedef struct CFF_VarRegion_ + { + CFF_AxisCoords* axisList; /* array of axisCount records */ + + } CFF_VarRegion; + + + typedef struct CFF_VStoreRec_ + { + FT_UInt dataCount; + CFF_VarData* varData; /* array of dataCount records */ + /* vsindex indexes this array */ + FT_UShort axisCount; + FT_UInt regionCount; /* total number of regions defined */ + CFF_VarRegion* varRegionList; + + } CFF_VStoreRec, *CFF_VStore; + + + /* forward reference */ + typedef struct CFF_FontRec_* CFF_Font; + + + /* This object manages one cached blend vector. */ + /* */ + /* There is a BlendRec for Private DICT parsing in each subfont */ + /* and a BlendRec for charstrings in CF2_Font instance data. */ + /* A cached BV may be used across DICTs or Charstrings if inputs */ + /* have not changed. */ + /* */ + /* `usedBV' is reset at the start of each parse or charstring. */ + /* vsindex cannot be changed after a BV is used. */ + /* */ + /* Note: NDV is long (32/64 bit), while BV is 16.16 (FT_Int32). */ + typedef struct CFF_BlendRec_ + { + FT_Bool builtBV; /* blendV has been built */ + FT_Bool usedBV; /* blendV has been used */ + CFF_Font font; /* top level font struct */ + FT_UInt lastVsindex; /* last vsindex used */ + FT_UInt lenNDV; /* normDV length (aka numAxes) */ + FT_Fixed* lastNDV; /* last NDV used */ + FT_UInt lenBV; /* BlendV length (aka numMasters) */ + FT_Int32* BV; /* current blendV (per DICT/glyph) */ + + } CFF_BlendRec, *CFF_Blend; + + + typedef struct CFF_FontRecDictRec_ + { + FT_UInt version; + FT_UInt notice; + FT_UInt copyright; + FT_UInt full_name; + FT_UInt family_name; + FT_UInt weight; + FT_Bool is_fixed_pitch; + FT_Fixed italic_angle; + FT_Fixed underline_position; + FT_Fixed underline_thickness; + FT_Int paint_type; + FT_Int charstring_type; + FT_Matrix font_matrix; + FT_Bool has_font_matrix; + FT_ULong units_per_em; /* temporarily used as scaling value also */ + FT_Vector font_offset; + FT_ULong unique_id; + FT_BBox font_bbox; + FT_Pos stroke_width; + FT_ULong charset_offset; + FT_ULong encoding_offset; + FT_ULong charstrings_offset; + FT_ULong private_offset; + FT_ULong private_size; + FT_Long synthetic_base; + FT_UInt embedded_postscript; + + /* these should only be used for the top-level font dictionary */ + FT_UInt cid_registry; + FT_UInt cid_ordering; + FT_Long cid_supplement; + + FT_Long cid_font_version; + FT_Long cid_font_revision; + FT_Long cid_font_type; + FT_ULong cid_count; + FT_ULong cid_uid_base; + FT_ULong cid_fd_array_offset; + FT_ULong cid_fd_select_offset; + FT_UInt cid_font_name; + + /* the next fields come from the data of the deprecated */ + /* `MultipleMaster' operator; they are needed to parse the (also */ + /* deprecated) `blend' operator in Type 2 charstrings */ + FT_UShort num_designs; + FT_UShort num_axes; + + /* fields for CFF2 */ + FT_ULong vstore_offset; + FT_UInt maxstack; + + } CFF_FontRecDictRec, *CFF_FontRecDict; + + + /* forward reference */ + typedef struct CFF_SubFontRec_* CFF_SubFont; + + + typedef struct CFF_PrivateRec_ + { + FT_Byte num_blue_values; + FT_Byte num_other_blues; + FT_Byte num_family_blues; + FT_Byte num_family_other_blues; + + FT_Pos blue_values[14]; + FT_Pos other_blues[10]; + FT_Pos family_blues[14]; + FT_Pos family_other_blues[10]; + + FT_Fixed blue_scale; + FT_Pos blue_shift; + FT_Pos blue_fuzz; + FT_Pos standard_width; + FT_Pos standard_height; + + FT_Byte num_snap_widths; + FT_Byte num_snap_heights; + FT_Pos snap_widths[13]; + FT_Pos snap_heights[13]; + FT_Bool force_bold; + FT_Fixed force_bold_threshold; + FT_Int lenIV; + FT_Int language_group; + FT_Fixed expansion_factor; + FT_Long initial_random_seed; + FT_ULong local_subrs_offset; + FT_Pos default_width; + FT_Pos nominal_width; + + /* fields for CFF2 */ + FT_UInt vsindex; + CFF_SubFont subfont; + + } CFF_PrivateRec, *CFF_Private; + + + typedef struct CFF_FDSelectRec_ + { + FT_Byte format; + FT_UInt range_count; + + /* that's the table, taken from the file `as is' */ + FT_Byte* data; + FT_UInt data_size; + + /* small cache for format 3 only */ + FT_UInt cache_first; + FT_UInt cache_count; + FT_Byte cache_fd; + + } CFF_FDSelectRec, *CFF_FDSelect; + + + /* A SubFont packs a font dict and a private dict together. They are */ + /* needed to support CID-keyed CFF fonts. */ + typedef struct CFF_SubFontRec_ + { + CFF_FontRecDictRec font_dict; + CFF_PrivateRec private_dict; + + /* fields for CFF2 */ + CFF_BlendRec blend; /* current blend vector */ + FT_UInt lenNDV; /* current length NDV or zero */ + FT_Fixed* NDV; /* ptr to current NDV or NULL */ + + /* `blend_stack' is a writable buffer to hold blend results. */ + /* This buffer is to the side of the normal cff parser stack; */ + /* `cff_parse_blend' and `cff_blend_doBlend' push blend results here. */ + /* The normal stack then points to these values instead of the DICT */ + /* because all other operators in Private DICT clear the stack. */ + /* `blend_stack' could be cleared at each operator other than blend. */ + /* Blended values are stored as 5-byte fixed point values. */ + + FT_Byte* blend_stack; /* base of stack allocation */ + FT_Byte* blend_top; /* first empty slot */ + FT_UInt blend_used; /* number of bytes in use */ + FT_UInt blend_alloc; /* number of bytes allocated */ + + CFF_IndexRec local_subrs_index; + FT_Byte** local_subrs; /* array of pointers */ + /* into Local Subrs INDEX data */ + + FT_UInt32 random; + + } CFF_SubFontRec; + + +#define CFF_MAX_CID_FONTS 256 + + + typedef struct CFF_FontRec_ + { + FT_Library library; + FT_Stream stream; + FT_Memory memory; /* TODO: take this from stream->memory? */ + FT_ULong base_offset; /* offset to start of CFF */ + FT_UInt num_faces; + FT_UInt num_glyphs; + + FT_Byte version_major; + FT_Byte version_minor; + FT_Byte header_size; + + FT_UInt top_dict_length; /* cff2 only */ + + FT_Bool cff2; + + CFF_IndexRec name_index; + CFF_IndexRec top_dict_index; + CFF_IndexRec global_subrs_index; + + CFF_EncodingRec encoding; + CFF_CharsetRec charset; + + CFF_IndexRec charstrings_index; + CFF_IndexRec font_dict_index; + CFF_IndexRec private_index; + CFF_IndexRec local_subrs_index; + + FT_String* font_name; + + /* array of pointers into Global Subrs INDEX data */ + FT_Byte** global_subrs; + + /* array of pointers into String INDEX data stored at string_pool */ + FT_UInt num_strings; + FT_Byte** strings; + FT_Byte* string_pool; + FT_ULong string_pool_size; + + CFF_SubFontRec top_font; + FT_UInt num_subfonts; + CFF_SubFont subfonts[CFF_MAX_CID_FONTS]; + + CFF_FDSelectRec fd_select; + + /* interface to PostScript hinter */ + PSHinter_Service pshinter; + + /* interface to Postscript Names service */ + FT_Service_PsCMaps psnames; + + /* interface to CFFLoad service */ + const void* cffload; + + /* since version 2.3.0 */ + PS_FontInfoRec* font_info; /* font info dictionary */ + + /* since version 2.3.6 */ + FT_String* registry; + FT_String* ordering; + + /* since version 2.4.12 */ + FT_Generic cf2_instance; + + /* since version 2.7.1 */ + CFF_VStoreRec vstore; /* parsed vstore structure */ + + /* since version 2.9 */ + PS_FontExtraRec* font_extra; + + } CFF_FontRec; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* CFFTYPES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftcalc.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftcalc.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2986ec3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftcalc.h @@ -0,0 +1,510 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftcalc.h + * + * Arithmetic computations (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTCALC_H_ +#define FTCALC_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * FT_MulDiv() and FT_MulFix() are declared in freetype.h. + * + */ + +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_ASSEMBLER + /* Provide assembler fragments for performance-critical functions. */ + /* These must be defined `static __inline__' with GCC. */ + +#if defined( __CC_ARM ) || defined( __ARMCC__ ) /* RVCT */ + +#define FT_MULFIX_ASSEMBLER FT_MulFix_arm + + /* documentation is in freetype.h */ + + static __inline FT_Int32 + FT_MulFix_arm( FT_Int32 a, + FT_Int32 b ) + { + FT_Int32 t, t2; + + + __asm + { + smull t2, t, b, a /* (lo=t2,hi=t) = a*b */ + mov a, t, asr #31 /* a = (hi >> 31) */ + add a, a, #0x8000 /* a += 0x8000 */ + adds t2, t2, a /* t2 += a */ + adc t, t, #0 /* t += carry */ + mov a, t2, lsr #16 /* a = t2 >> 16 */ + orr a, a, t, lsl #16 /* a |= t << 16 */ + } + return a; + } + +#endif /* __CC_ARM || __ARMCC__ */ + + +#ifdef __GNUC__ + +#if defined( __arm__ ) && \ + ( !defined( __thumb__ ) || defined( __thumb2__ ) ) && \ + !( defined( __CC_ARM ) || defined( __ARMCC__ ) ) + +#define FT_MULFIX_ASSEMBLER FT_MulFix_arm + + /* documentation is in freetype.h */ + + static __inline__ FT_Int32 + FT_MulFix_arm( FT_Int32 a, + FT_Int32 b ) + { + FT_Int32 t, t2; + + + __asm__ __volatile__ ( + "smull %1, %2, %4, %3\n\t" /* (lo=%1,hi=%2) = a*b */ + "mov %0, %2, asr #31\n\t" /* %0 = (hi >> 31) */ +#if defined( __clang__ ) && defined( __thumb2__ ) + "add.w %0, %0, #0x8000\n\t" /* %0 += 0x8000 */ +#else + "add %0, %0, #0x8000\n\t" /* %0 += 0x8000 */ +#endif + "adds %1, %1, %0\n\t" /* %1 += %0 */ + "adc %2, %2, #0\n\t" /* %2 += carry */ + "mov %0, %1, lsr #16\n\t" /* %0 = %1 >> 16 */ + "orr %0, %0, %2, lsl #16\n\t" /* %0 |= %2 << 16 */ + : "=r"(a), "=&r"(t2), "=&r"(t) + : "r"(a), "r"(b) + : "cc" ); + return a; + } + +#endif /* __arm__ && */ + /* ( __thumb2__ || !__thumb__ ) && */ + /* !( __CC_ARM || __ARMCC__ ) */ + + +#if defined( __i386__ ) + +#define FT_MULFIX_ASSEMBLER FT_MulFix_i386 + + /* documentation is in freetype.h */ + + static __inline__ FT_Int32 + FT_MulFix_i386( FT_Int32 a, + FT_Int32 b ) + { + FT_Int32 result; + + + __asm__ __volatile__ ( + "imul %%edx\n" + "movl %%edx, %%ecx\n" + "sarl $31, %%ecx\n" + "addl $0x8000, %%ecx\n" + "addl %%ecx, %%eax\n" + "adcl $0, %%edx\n" + "shrl $16, %%eax\n" + "shll $16, %%edx\n" + "addl %%edx, %%eax\n" + : "=a"(result), "=d"(b) + : "a"(a), "d"(b) + : "%ecx", "cc" ); + return result; + } + +#endif /* i386 */ + +#endif /* __GNUC__ */ + + +#ifdef _MSC_VER /* Visual C++ */ + +#ifdef _M_IX86 + +#define FT_MULFIX_ASSEMBLER FT_MulFix_i386 + + /* documentation is in freetype.h */ + + static __inline FT_Int32 + FT_MulFix_i386( FT_Int32 a, + FT_Int32 b ) + { + FT_Int32 result; + + __asm + { + mov eax, a + mov edx, b + imul edx + mov ecx, edx + sar ecx, 31 + add ecx, 8000h + add eax, ecx + adc edx, 0 + shr eax, 16 + shl edx, 16 + add eax, edx + mov result, eax + } + return result; + } + +#endif /* _M_IX86 */ + +#endif /* _MSC_VER */ + + +#if defined( __GNUC__ ) && defined( __x86_64__ ) + +#define FT_MULFIX_ASSEMBLER FT_MulFix_x86_64 + + static __inline__ FT_Int32 + FT_MulFix_x86_64( FT_Int32 a, + FT_Int32 b ) + { + /* Temporarily disable the warning that C90 doesn't support */ + /* `long long'. */ +#if __GNUC__ > 4 || ( __GNUC__ == 4 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 6 ) +#pragma GCC diagnostic push +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wlong-long" +#endif + +#if 1 + /* Technically not an assembly fragment, but GCC does a really good */ + /* job at inlining it and generating good machine code for it. */ + long long ret, tmp; + + + ret = (long long)a * b; + tmp = ret >> 63; + ret += 0x8000 + tmp; + + return (FT_Int32)( ret >> 16 ); +#else + + /* For some reason, GCC 4.6 on Ubuntu 12.04 generates invalid machine */ + /* code from the lines below. The main issue is that `wide_a' is not */ + /* properly initialized by sign-extending `a'. Instead, the generated */ + /* machine code assumes that the register that contains `a' on input */ + /* can be used directly as a 64-bit value, which is wrong most of the */ + /* time. */ + long long wide_a = (long long)a; + long long wide_b = (long long)b; + long long result; + + + __asm__ __volatile__ ( + "imul %2, %1\n" + "mov %1, %0\n" + "sar $63, %0\n" + "lea 0x8000(%1, %0), %0\n" + "sar $16, %0\n" + : "=&r"(result), "=&r"(wide_a) + : "r"(wide_b) + : "cc" ); + + return (FT_Int32)result; +#endif + +#if __GNUC__ > 4 || ( __GNUC__ == 4 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 6 ) +#pragma GCC diagnostic pop +#endif + } + +#endif /* __GNUC__ && __x86_64__ */ + +#endif /* !FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_ASSEMBLER */ + + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_INLINE_MULFIX +#ifdef FT_MULFIX_ASSEMBLER +#define FT_MulFix( a, b ) FT_MULFIX_ASSEMBLER( (FT_Int32)(a), (FT_Int32)(b) ) +#endif +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_MulDiv_No_Round + * + * @description: + * A very simple function used to perform the computation '(a*b)/c' + * (without rounding) with maximum accuracy (it uses a 64-bit + * intermediate integer whenever necessary). + * + * This function isn't necessarily as fast as some processor-specific + * operations, but is at least completely portable. + * + * @input: + * a :: + * The first multiplier. + * b :: + * The second multiplier. + * c :: + * The divisor. + * + * @return: + * The result of '(a*b)/c'. This function never traps when trying to + * divide by zero; it simply returns 'MaxInt' or 'MinInt' depending on + * the signs of 'a' and 'b'. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Long ) + FT_MulDiv_No_Round( FT_Long a, + FT_Long b, + FT_Long c ); + + + /* + * A variant of FT_Matrix_Multiply which scales its result afterwards. The + * idea is that both `a' and `b' are scaled by factors of 10 so that the + * values are as precise as possible to get a correct result during the + * 64bit multiplication. Let `sa' and `sb' be the scaling factors of `a' + * and `b', respectively, then the scaling factor of the result is `sa*sb'. + */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Matrix_Multiply_Scaled( const FT_Matrix* a, + FT_Matrix *b, + FT_Long scaling ); + + + /* + * Check a matrix. If the transformation would lead to extreme shear or + * extreme scaling, for example, return 0. If everything is OK, return 1. + * + * Based on geometric considerations we use the following inequality to + * identify a degenerate matrix. + * + * 50 * abs(xx*yy - xy*yx) < xx^2 + xy^2 + yx^2 + yy^2 + * + * Value 50 is heuristic. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Bool ) + FT_Matrix_Check( const FT_Matrix* matrix ); + + + /* + * A variant of FT_Vector_Transform. See comments for + * FT_Matrix_Multiply_Scaled. + */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Vector_Transform_Scaled( FT_Vector* vector, + const FT_Matrix* matrix, + FT_Long scaling ); + + + /* + * This function normalizes a vector and returns its original length. The + * normalized vector is a 16.16 fixed-point unit vector with length close + * to 0x10000. The accuracy of the returned length is limited to 16 bits + * also. The function utilizes quick inverse square root approximation + * without divisions and square roots relying on Newton's iterations + * instead. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_UInt32 ) + FT_Vector_NormLen( FT_Vector* vector ); + + + /* + * Return -1, 0, or +1, depending on the orientation of a given corner. We + * use the Cartesian coordinate system, with positive vertical values going + * upwards. The function returns +1 if the corner turns to the left, -1 to + * the right, and 0 for undecidable cases. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Int ) + ft_corner_orientation( FT_Pos in_x, + FT_Pos in_y, + FT_Pos out_x, + FT_Pos out_y ); + + + /* + * Return TRUE if a corner is flat or nearly flat. This is equivalent to + * saying that the corner point is close to its neighbors, or inside an + * ellipse defined by the neighbor focal points to be more precise. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Int ) + ft_corner_is_flat( FT_Pos in_x, + FT_Pos in_y, + FT_Pos out_x, + FT_Pos out_y ); + + + /* + * Return the most significant bit index. + */ + +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_ASSEMBLER + +#if defined( __GNUC__ ) && \ + ( __GNUC__ > 3 || ( __GNUC__ == 3 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 4 ) ) + +#if FT_SIZEOF_INT == 4 + +#define FT_MSB( x ) ( 31 - __builtin_clz( x ) ) + +#elif FT_SIZEOF_LONG == 4 + +#define FT_MSB( x ) ( 31 - __builtin_clzl( x ) ) + +#endif /* __GNUC__ */ + + +#elif defined( _MSC_VER ) && ( _MSC_VER >= 1400 ) + +#if FT_SIZEOF_INT == 4 + +#include + + static __inline FT_Int32 + FT_MSB_i386( FT_UInt32 x ) + { + unsigned long where; + + + /* not available in older VC versions */ + _BitScanReverse( &where, x ); + + return (FT_Int32)where; + } + +#define FT_MSB( x ) ( FT_MSB_i386( x ) ) + +#endif + +#endif /* _MSC_VER */ + + +#endif /* !FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_ASSEMBLER */ + +#ifndef FT_MSB + + FT_BASE( FT_Int ) + FT_MSB( FT_UInt32 z ); + +#endif + + + /* + * Return sqrt(x*x+y*y), which is the same as `FT_Vector_Length' but uses + * two fixed-point arguments instead. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Fixed ) + FT_Hypot( FT_Fixed x, + FT_Fixed y ); + + +#if 0 + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_SqrtFixed + * + * @description: + * Computes the square root of a 16.16 fixed-point value. + * + * @input: + * x :: + * The value to compute the root for. + * + * @return: + * The result of 'sqrt(x)'. + * + * @note: + * This function is not very fast. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Int32 ) + FT_SqrtFixed( FT_Int32 x ); + +#endif /* 0 */ + + +#define INT_TO_F26DOT6( x ) ( (FT_Long)(x) * 64 ) /* << 6 */ +#define INT_TO_F2DOT14( x ) ( (FT_Long)(x) * 16384 ) /* << 14 */ +#define INT_TO_FIXED( x ) ( (FT_Long)(x) * 65536 ) /* << 16 */ +#define F2DOT14_TO_FIXED( x ) ( (FT_Long)(x) * 4 ) /* << 2 */ +#define FIXED_TO_INT( x ) ( FT_RoundFix( x ) >> 16 ) + +#define ROUND_F26DOT6( x ) ( x >= 0 ? ( ( (x) + 32 ) & -64 ) \ + : ( -( ( 32 - (x) ) & -64 ) ) ) + + /* + * The following macros have two purposes. + * + * - Tag places where overflow is expected and harmless. + * + * - Avoid run-time sanitizer errors. + * + * Use with care! + */ +#define ADD_INT( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int)( (FT_UInt)(a) + (FT_UInt)(b) ) +#define SUB_INT( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int)( (FT_UInt)(a) - (FT_UInt)(b) ) +#define MUL_INT( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int)( (FT_UInt)(a) * (FT_UInt)(b) ) +#define NEG_INT( a ) \ + (FT_Int)( (FT_UInt)0 - (FT_UInt)(a) ) + +#define ADD_LONG( a, b ) \ + (FT_Long)( (FT_ULong)(a) + (FT_ULong)(b) ) +#define SUB_LONG( a, b ) \ + (FT_Long)( (FT_ULong)(a) - (FT_ULong)(b) ) +#define MUL_LONG( a, b ) \ + (FT_Long)( (FT_ULong)(a) * (FT_ULong)(b) ) +#define NEG_LONG( a ) \ + (FT_Long)( (FT_ULong)0 - (FT_ULong)(a) ) + +#define ADD_INT32( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int32)( (FT_UInt32)(a) + (FT_UInt32)(b) ) +#define SUB_INT32( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int32)( (FT_UInt32)(a) - (FT_UInt32)(b) ) +#define MUL_INT32( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int32)( (FT_UInt32)(a) * (FT_UInt32)(b) ) +#define NEG_INT32( a ) \ + (FT_Int32)( (FT_UInt32)0 - (FT_UInt32)(a) ) + +#ifdef FT_LONG64 + +#define ADD_INT64( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int64)( (FT_UInt64)(a) + (FT_UInt64)(b) ) +#define SUB_INT64( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int64)( (FT_UInt64)(a) - (FT_UInt64)(b) ) +#define MUL_INT64( a, b ) \ + (FT_Int64)( (FT_UInt64)(a) * (FT_UInt64)(b) ) +#define NEG_INT64( a ) \ + (FT_Int64)( (FT_UInt64)0 - (FT_UInt64)(a) ) + +#endif /* FT_LONG64 */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTCALC_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftdebug.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftdebug.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..54a9673 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftdebug.h @@ -0,0 +1,283 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftdebug.h + * + * Debugging and logging component (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + * + * IMPORTANT: A description of FreeType's debugging support can be + * found in 'docs/DEBUG.TXT'. Read it if you need to use or + * understand this code. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTDEBUG_H_ +#define FTDEBUG_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_CONFIG_CONFIG_H +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* force the definition of FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR if FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE */ + /* is already defined; this simplifies the following #ifdefs */ + /* */ +#ifdef FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE +#undef FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR +#define FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define the trace enums as well as the trace levels array when they are + * needed. + * + */ + +#ifdef FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE + +#define FT_TRACE_DEF( x ) trace_ ## x , + + /* defining the enumeration */ + typedef enum FT_Trace_ + { +#include FT_INTERNAL_TRACE_H + trace_count + + } FT_Trace; + + + /* a pointer to the array of trace levels, */ + /* provided by `src/base/ftdebug.c' */ + extern int* ft_trace_levels; + +#undef FT_TRACE_DEF + +#endif /* FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define the FT_TRACE macro + * + * IMPORTANT! + * + * Each component must define the macro FT_COMPONENT to a valid FT_Trace + * value before using any TRACE macro. + * + */ + +#ifdef FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE + + /* we need two macros here to make cpp expand `FT_COMPONENT' */ +#define FT_TRACE_COMP( x ) FT_TRACE_COMP_( x ) +#define FT_TRACE_COMP_( x ) trace_ ## x + +#define FT_TRACE( level, varformat ) \ + do \ + { \ + if ( ft_trace_levels[FT_TRACE_COMP( FT_COMPONENT )] >= level ) \ + FT_Message varformat; \ + } while ( 0 ) + +#else /* !FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE */ + +#define FT_TRACE( level, varformat ) do { } while ( 0 ) /* nothing */ + +#endif /* !FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Trace_Get_Count + * + * @description: + * Return the number of available trace components. + * + * @return: + * The number of trace components. 0 if FreeType 2 is not built with + * FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE definition. + * + * @note: + * This function may be useful if you want to access elements of the + * internal trace levels array by an index. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Int ) + FT_Trace_Get_Count( void ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Trace_Get_Name + * + * @description: + * Return the name of a trace component. + * + * @input: + * The index of the trace component. + * + * @return: + * The name of the trace component. This is a statically allocated + * C~string, so do not free it after use. `NULL` if FreeType is not + * built with FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_TRACE definition. + * + * @note: + * Use @FT_Trace_Get_Count to get the number of available trace + * components. + */ + FT_BASE( const char* ) + FT_Trace_Get_Name( FT_Int idx ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Trace_Disable + * + * @description: + * Switch off tracing temporarily. It can be activated again with + * @FT_Trace_Enable. + */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Trace_Disable( void ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Trace_Enable + * + * @description: + * Activate tracing. Use it after tracing has been switched off with + * @FT_Trace_Disable. + */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Trace_Enable( void ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * You need two opening and closing parentheses! + * + * Example: FT_TRACE0(( "Value is %i", foo )) + * + * Output of the FT_TRACEX macros is sent to stderr. + * + */ + +#define FT_TRACE0( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 0, varformat ) +#define FT_TRACE1( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 1, varformat ) +#define FT_TRACE2( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 2, varformat ) +#define FT_TRACE3( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 3, varformat ) +#define FT_TRACE4( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 4, varformat ) +#define FT_TRACE5( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 5, varformat ) +#define FT_TRACE6( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 6, varformat ) +#define FT_TRACE7( varformat ) FT_TRACE( 7, varformat ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define the FT_ERROR macro. + * + * Output of this macro is sent to stderr. + * + */ + +#ifdef FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR + +#define FT_ERROR( varformat ) FT_Message varformat + +#else /* !FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR */ + +#define FT_ERROR( varformat ) do { } while ( 0 ) /* nothing */ + +#endif /* !FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define the FT_ASSERT and FT_THROW macros. The call to `FT_Throw` makes + * it possible to easily set a breakpoint at this function. + * + */ + +#ifdef FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR + +#define FT_ASSERT( condition ) \ + do \ + { \ + if ( !( condition ) ) \ + FT_Panic( "assertion failed on line %d of file %s\n", \ + __LINE__, __FILE__ ); \ + } while ( 0 ) + +#define FT_THROW( e ) \ + ( FT_Throw( FT_ERR_CAT( FT_ERR_PREFIX, e ), \ + __LINE__, \ + __FILE__ ) | \ + FT_ERR_CAT( FT_ERR_PREFIX, e ) ) + +#else /* !FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR */ + +#define FT_ASSERT( condition ) do { } while ( 0 ) + +#define FT_THROW( e ) FT_ERR_CAT( FT_ERR_PREFIX, e ) + +#endif /* !FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Define `FT_Message` and `FT_Panic` when needed. + * + */ + +#ifdef FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR + +#include "stdio.h" /* for vfprintf() */ + + /* print a message */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Message( const char* fmt, + ... ); + + /* print a message and exit */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Panic( const char* fmt, + ... ); + + /* report file name and line number of an error */ + FT_BASE( int ) + FT_Throw( FT_Error error, + int line, + const char* file ); + +#endif /* FT_DEBUG_LEVEL_ERROR */ + + + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_debug_init( void ); + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTDEBUG_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftdrv.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftdrv.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..09e846e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftdrv.h @@ -0,0 +1,288 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftdrv.h + * + * FreeType internal font driver interface (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTDRV_H_ +#define FTDRV_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_MODULE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Face_InitFunc)( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Face face, + FT_Int typeface_index, + FT_Int num_params, + FT_Parameter* parameters ); + + typedef void + (*FT_Face_DoneFunc)( FT_Face face ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Size_InitFunc)( FT_Size size ); + + typedef void + (*FT_Size_DoneFunc)( FT_Size size ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Slot_InitFunc)( FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + typedef void + (*FT_Slot_DoneFunc)( FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Size_RequestFunc)( FT_Size size, + FT_Size_Request req ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Size_SelectFunc)( FT_Size size, + FT_ULong size_index ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Slot_LoadFunc)( FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Size size, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Int32 load_flags ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Face_GetKerningFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt left_glyph, + FT_UInt right_glyph, + FT_Vector* kerning ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Face_AttachFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_Stream stream ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Face_GetAdvancesFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt first, + FT_UInt count, + FT_Int32 flags, + FT_Fixed* advances ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Driver_ClassRec + * + * @description: + * The font driver class. This structure mostly contains pointers to + * driver methods. + * + * @fields: + * root :: + * The parent module. + * + * face_object_size :: + * The size of a face object in bytes. + * + * size_object_size :: + * The size of a size object in bytes. + * + * slot_object_size :: + * The size of a glyph object in bytes. + * + * init_face :: + * The format-specific face constructor. + * + * done_face :: + * The format-specific face destructor. + * + * init_size :: + * The format-specific size constructor. + * + * done_size :: + * The format-specific size destructor. + * + * init_slot :: + * The format-specific slot constructor. + * + * done_slot :: + * The format-specific slot destructor. + * + * + * load_glyph :: + * A function handle to load a glyph to a slot. This field is + * mandatory! + * + * get_kerning :: + * A function handle to return the unscaled kerning for a given pair of + * glyphs. Can be set to 0 if the format doesn't support kerning. + * + * attach_file :: + * This function handle is used to read additional data for a face from + * another file/stream. For example, this can be used to add data from + * AFM or PFM files on a Type 1 face, or a CIDMap on a CID-keyed face. + * + * get_advances :: + * A function handle used to return advance widths of 'count' glyphs + * (in font units), starting at 'first'. The 'vertical' flag must be + * set to get vertical advance heights. The 'advances' buffer is + * caller-allocated. The idea of this function is to be able to + * perform device-independent text layout without loading a single + * glyph image. + * + * request_size :: + * A handle to a function used to request the new character size. Can + * be set to 0 if the scaling done in the base layer suffices. + * + * select_size :: + * A handle to a function used to select a new fixed size. It is used + * only if @FT_FACE_FLAG_FIXED_SIZES is set. Can be set to 0 if the + * scaling done in the base layer suffices. + * @note: + * Most function pointers, with the exception of `load_glyph`, can be set + * to 0 to indicate a default behaviour. + */ + typedef struct FT_Driver_ClassRec_ + { + FT_Module_Class root; + + FT_Long face_object_size; + FT_Long size_object_size; + FT_Long slot_object_size; + + FT_Face_InitFunc init_face; + FT_Face_DoneFunc done_face; + + FT_Size_InitFunc init_size; + FT_Size_DoneFunc done_size; + + FT_Slot_InitFunc init_slot; + FT_Slot_DoneFunc done_slot; + + FT_Slot_LoadFunc load_glyph; + + FT_Face_GetKerningFunc get_kerning; + FT_Face_AttachFunc attach_file; + FT_Face_GetAdvancesFunc get_advances; + + /* since version 2.2 */ + FT_Size_RequestFunc request_size; + FT_Size_SelectFunc select_size; + + } FT_Driver_ClassRec, *FT_Driver_Class; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DECLARE_DRIVER + * + * @description: + * Used to create a forward declaration of an FT_Driver_ClassRec struct + * instance. + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_DRIVER + * + * @description: + * Used to initialize an instance of FT_Driver_ClassRec struct. + * + * `ftinit.c` (ft_create_default_module_classes) already contains a + * mechanism to call these functions for the default modules described in + * `ftmodule.h`. + * + * The struct will be allocated in the global scope (or the scope where + * the macro is used). + */ +#define FT_DECLARE_DRIVER( class_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE \ + const FT_Driver_ClassRec class_; + +#define FT_DEFINE_DRIVER( \ + class_, \ + flags_, \ + size_, \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + interface_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_, \ + face_object_size_, \ + size_object_size_, \ + slot_object_size_, \ + init_face_, \ + done_face_, \ + init_size_, \ + done_size_, \ + init_slot_, \ + done_slot_, \ + load_glyph_, \ + get_kerning_, \ + attach_file_, \ + get_advances_, \ + request_size_, \ + select_size_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF \ + const FT_Driver_ClassRec class_ = \ + { \ + FT_DEFINE_ROOT_MODULE( flags_, \ + size_, \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + interface_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_ ) \ + \ + face_object_size_, \ + size_object_size_, \ + slot_object_size_, \ + \ + init_face_, \ + done_face_, \ + \ + init_size_, \ + done_size_, \ + \ + init_slot_, \ + done_slot_, \ + \ + load_glyph_, \ + \ + get_kerning_, \ + attach_file_, \ + get_advances_, \ + \ + request_size_, \ + select_size_ \ + }; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTDRV_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftgloadr.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftgloadr.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..770871d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftgloadr.h @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftgloadr.h + * + * The FreeType glyph loader (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTGLOADR_H_ +#define FTGLOADR_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_GlyphLoader + * + * @description: + * The glyph loader is an internal object used to load several glyphs + * together (for example, in the case of composites). + */ + typedef struct FT_SubGlyphRec_ + { + FT_Int index; + FT_UShort flags; + FT_Int arg1; + FT_Int arg2; + FT_Matrix transform; + + } FT_SubGlyphRec; + + + typedef struct FT_GlyphLoadRec_ + { + FT_Outline outline; /* outline */ + FT_Vector* extra_points; /* extra points table */ + FT_Vector* extra_points2; /* second extra points table */ + FT_UInt num_subglyphs; /* number of subglyphs */ + FT_SubGlyph subglyphs; /* subglyphs */ + + } FT_GlyphLoadRec, *FT_GlyphLoad; + + + typedef struct FT_GlyphLoaderRec_ + { + FT_Memory memory; + FT_UInt max_points; + FT_UInt max_contours; + FT_UInt max_subglyphs; + FT_Bool use_extra; + + FT_GlyphLoadRec base; + FT_GlyphLoadRec current; + + void* other; /* for possible future extension? */ + + } FT_GlyphLoaderRec, *FT_GlyphLoader; + + + /* create new empty glyph loader */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_GlyphLoader_New( FT_Memory memory, + FT_GlyphLoader *aloader ); + + /* add an extra points table to a glyph loader */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_GlyphLoader_CreateExtra( FT_GlyphLoader loader ); + + /* destroy a glyph loader */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_GlyphLoader_Done( FT_GlyphLoader loader ); + + /* reset a glyph loader (frees everything int it) */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_GlyphLoader_Reset( FT_GlyphLoader loader ); + + /* rewind a glyph loader */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_GlyphLoader_Rewind( FT_GlyphLoader loader ); + + /* check that there is enough space to add `n_points' and `n_contours' */ + /* to the glyph loader */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_GlyphLoader_CheckPoints( FT_GlyphLoader loader, + FT_UInt n_points, + FT_UInt n_contours ); + + +#define FT_GLYPHLOADER_CHECK_P( _loader, _count ) \ + ( (_count) == 0 || \ + ( (FT_UInt)(_loader)->base.outline.n_points + \ + (FT_UInt)(_loader)->current.outline.n_points + \ + (FT_UInt)(_count) ) <= (_loader)->max_points ) + +#define FT_GLYPHLOADER_CHECK_C( _loader, _count ) \ + ( (_count) == 0 || \ + ( (FT_UInt)(_loader)->base.outline.n_contours + \ + (FT_UInt)(_loader)->current.outline.n_contours + \ + (FT_UInt)(_count) ) <= (_loader)->max_contours ) + +#define FT_GLYPHLOADER_CHECK_POINTS( _loader, _points, _contours ) \ + ( ( FT_GLYPHLOADER_CHECK_P( _loader, _points ) && \ + FT_GLYPHLOADER_CHECK_C( _loader, _contours ) ) \ + ? 0 \ + : FT_GlyphLoader_CheckPoints( (_loader), \ + (FT_UInt)(_points), \ + (FT_UInt)(_contours) ) ) + + + /* check that there is enough space to add `n_subs' sub-glyphs to */ + /* a glyph loader */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_GlyphLoader_CheckSubGlyphs( FT_GlyphLoader loader, + FT_UInt n_subs ); + + /* prepare a glyph loader, i.e. empty the current glyph */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_GlyphLoader_Prepare( FT_GlyphLoader loader ); + + /* add the current glyph to the base glyph */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_GlyphLoader_Add( FT_GlyphLoader loader ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTGLOADR_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/fthash.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/fthash.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2491880 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/fthash.h @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * fthash.h + * + * Hashing functions (specification). + * + */ + +/* + * Copyright 2000 Computing Research Labs, New Mexico State University + * Copyright 2001-2015 + * Francesco Zappa Nardelli + * + * Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a + * copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), + * to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation + * the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, + * and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the + * Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: + * + * The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in + * all copies or substantial portions of the Software. + * + * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR + * IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, + * FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL + * THE COMPUTING RESEARCH LAB OR NEW MEXICO STATE UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY + * CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT + * OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR + * THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This file is based on code from bdf.c,v 1.22 2000/03/16 20:08:50 + * + * taken from Mark Leisher's xmbdfed package + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTHASH_H_ +#define FTHASH_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + typedef union FT_Hashkey_ + { + FT_Int num; + const char* str; + + } FT_Hashkey; + + + typedef struct FT_HashnodeRec_ + { + FT_Hashkey key; + size_t data; + + } FT_HashnodeRec; + + typedef struct FT_HashnodeRec_ *FT_Hashnode; + + + typedef FT_ULong + (*FT_Hash_LookupFunc)( FT_Hashkey* key ); + + typedef FT_Bool + (*FT_Hash_CompareFunc)( FT_Hashkey* a, + FT_Hashkey* b ); + + + typedef struct FT_HashRec_ + { + FT_UInt limit; + FT_UInt size; + FT_UInt used; + + FT_Hash_LookupFunc lookup; + FT_Hash_CompareFunc compare; + + FT_Hashnode* table; + + } FT_HashRec; + + typedef struct FT_HashRec_ *FT_Hash; + + + FT_Error + ft_hash_str_init( FT_Hash hash, + FT_Memory memory ); + + FT_Error + ft_hash_num_init( FT_Hash hash, + FT_Memory memory ); + + void + ft_hash_str_free( FT_Hash hash, + FT_Memory memory ); + +#define ft_hash_num_free ft_hash_str_free + + FT_Error + ft_hash_str_insert( const char* key, + size_t data, + FT_Hash hash, + FT_Memory memory ); + + FT_Error + ft_hash_num_insert( FT_Int num, + size_t data, + FT_Hash hash, + FT_Memory memory ); + + size_t* + ft_hash_str_lookup( const char* key, + FT_Hash hash ); + + size_t* + ft_hash_num_lookup( FT_Int num, + FT_Hash hash ); + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* FTHASH_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftmemory.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftmemory.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..78bd3bc --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftmemory.h @@ -0,0 +1,392 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftmemory.h + * + * The FreeType memory management macros (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTMEMORY_H_ +#define FTMEMORY_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_CONFIG_CONFIG_H +#include FT_TYPES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_SET_ERROR + * + * @description: + * This macro is used to set an implicit 'error' variable to a given + * expression's value (usually a function call), and convert it to a + * boolean which is set whenever the value is != 0. + */ +#undef FT_SET_ERROR +#define FT_SET_ERROR( expression ) \ + ( ( error = (expression) ) != 0 ) + + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** M E M O R Y ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /* + * C++ refuses to handle statements like p = (void*)anything, with `p' a + * typed pointer. Since we don't have a `typeof' operator in standard C++, + * we have to use a template to emulate it. + */ + +#ifdef __cplusplus + +extern "C++" +{ + template inline T* + cplusplus_typeof( T*, + void *v ) + { + return static_cast ( v ); + } +} + +#define FT_ASSIGNP( p, val ) (p) = cplusplus_typeof( (p), (val) ) + +#else + +#define FT_ASSIGNP( p, val ) (p) = (val) + +#endif + + + +#ifdef FT_DEBUG_MEMORY + + FT_BASE( const char* ) _ft_debug_file; + FT_BASE( long ) _ft_debug_lineno; + +#define FT_DEBUG_INNER( exp ) ( _ft_debug_file = __FILE__, \ + _ft_debug_lineno = __LINE__, \ + (exp) ) + +#define FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( p, exp ) ( _ft_debug_file = __FILE__, \ + _ft_debug_lineno = __LINE__, \ + FT_ASSIGNP( p, exp ) ) + +#else /* !FT_DEBUG_MEMORY */ + +#define FT_DEBUG_INNER( exp ) (exp) +#define FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( p, exp ) FT_ASSIGNP( p, exp ) + +#endif /* !FT_DEBUG_MEMORY */ + + + /* + * The allocation functions return a pointer, and the error code is written + * to through the `p_error' parameter. + */ + + /* The `q' variants of the functions below (`q' for `quick') don't fill */ + /* the allocated or reallocated memory with zero bytes. */ + + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_mem_alloc( FT_Memory memory, + FT_Long size, + FT_Error *p_error ); + + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_mem_qalloc( FT_Memory memory, + FT_Long size, + FT_Error *p_error ); + + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_mem_realloc( FT_Memory memory, + FT_Long item_size, + FT_Long cur_count, + FT_Long new_count, + void* block, + FT_Error *p_error ); + + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_mem_qrealloc( FT_Memory memory, + FT_Long item_size, + FT_Long cur_count, + FT_Long new_count, + void* block, + FT_Error *p_error ); + + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_mem_free( FT_Memory memory, + const void* P ); + + + /* The `Q' variants of the macros below (`Q' for `quick') don't fill */ + /* the allocated or reallocated memory with zero bytes. */ + +#define FT_MEM_ALLOC( ptr, size ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_alloc( memory, \ + (FT_Long)(size), \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_FREE( ptr ) \ + FT_BEGIN_STMNT \ + ft_mem_free( memory, (ptr) ); \ + (ptr) = NULL; \ + FT_END_STMNT + +#define FT_MEM_NEW( ptr ) \ + FT_MEM_ALLOC( ptr, sizeof ( *(ptr) ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_REALLOC( ptr, cursz, newsz ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_realloc( memory, \ + 1, \ + (FT_Long)(cursz), \ + (FT_Long)(newsz), \ + (ptr), \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_QALLOC( ptr, size ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_qalloc( memory, \ + (FT_Long)(size), \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_QNEW( ptr ) \ + FT_MEM_QALLOC( ptr, sizeof ( *(ptr) ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_QREALLOC( ptr, cursz, newsz ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_qrealloc( memory, \ + 1, \ + (FT_Long)(cursz), \ + (FT_Long)(newsz), \ + (ptr), \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_ALLOC_MULT( ptr, count, item_size ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_realloc( memory, \ + (FT_Long)(item_size), \ + 0, \ + (FT_Long)(count), \ + NULL, \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_REALLOC_MULT( ptr, oldcnt, newcnt, itmsz ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_realloc( memory, \ + (FT_Long)(itmsz), \ + (FT_Long)(oldcnt), \ + (FT_Long)(newcnt), \ + (ptr), \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_QALLOC_MULT( ptr, count, item_size ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_qrealloc( memory, \ + (FT_Long)(item_size), \ + 0, \ + (FT_Long)(count), \ + NULL, \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_QREALLOC_MULT( ptr, oldcnt, newcnt, itmsz ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_qrealloc( memory, \ + (FT_Long)(itmsz), \ + (FT_Long)(oldcnt), \ + (FT_Long)(newcnt), \ + (ptr), \ + &error ) ) + + +#define FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( cond ) ( (cond), error != 0 ) + + +#define FT_MEM_SET( dest, byte, count ) \ + ft_memset( dest, byte, (FT_Offset)(count) ) + +#define FT_MEM_COPY( dest, source, count ) \ + ft_memcpy( dest, source, (FT_Offset)(count) ) + +#define FT_MEM_MOVE( dest, source, count ) \ + ft_memmove( dest, source, (FT_Offset)(count) ) + + +#define FT_MEM_ZERO( dest, count ) FT_MEM_SET( dest, 0, count ) + +#define FT_ZERO( p ) FT_MEM_ZERO( p, sizeof ( *(p) ) ) + + +#define FT_ARRAY_ZERO( dest, count ) \ + FT_MEM_ZERO( dest, \ + (FT_Offset)(count) * sizeof ( *(dest) ) ) + +#define FT_ARRAY_COPY( dest, source, count ) \ + FT_MEM_COPY( dest, \ + source, \ + (FT_Offset)(count) * sizeof ( *(dest) ) ) + +#define FT_ARRAY_MOVE( dest, source, count ) \ + FT_MEM_MOVE( dest, \ + source, \ + (FT_Offset)(count) * sizeof ( *(dest) ) ) + + + /* + * Return the maximum number of addressable elements in an array. We limit + * ourselves to INT_MAX, rather than UINT_MAX, to avoid any problems. + */ +#define FT_ARRAY_MAX( ptr ) ( FT_INT_MAX / sizeof ( *(ptr) ) ) + +#define FT_ARRAY_CHECK( ptr, count ) ( (count) <= FT_ARRAY_MAX( ptr ) ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * The following functions macros expect that their pointer argument is + * _typed_ in order to automatically compute array element sizes. + */ + +#define FT_MEM_NEW_ARRAY( ptr, count ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_realloc( memory, \ + sizeof ( *(ptr) ), \ + 0, \ + (FT_Long)(count), \ + NULL, \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_RENEW_ARRAY( ptr, cursz, newsz ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_realloc( memory, \ + sizeof ( *(ptr) ), \ + (FT_Long)(cursz), \ + (FT_Long)(newsz), \ + (ptr), \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_QNEW_ARRAY( ptr, count ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_qrealloc( memory, \ + sizeof ( *(ptr) ), \ + 0, \ + (FT_Long)(count), \ + NULL, \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_QRENEW_ARRAY( ptr, cursz, newsz ) \ + FT_ASSIGNP_INNER( ptr, ft_mem_qrealloc( memory, \ + sizeof ( *(ptr) ), \ + (FT_Long)(cursz), \ + (FT_Long)(newsz), \ + (ptr), \ + &error ) ) + +#define FT_ALLOC( ptr, size ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_ALLOC( ptr, size ) ) + +#define FT_REALLOC( ptr, cursz, newsz ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_REALLOC( ptr, cursz, newsz ) ) + +#define FT_ALLOC_MULT( ptr, count, item_size ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_ALLOC_MULT( ptr, count, item_size ) ) + +#define FT_REALLOC_MULT( ptr, oldcnt, newcnt, itmsz ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_REALLOC_MULT( ptr, oldcnt, \ + newcnt, itmsz ) ) + +#define FT_QALLOC( ptr, size ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_QALLOC( ptr, size ) ) + +#define FT_QREALLOC( ptr, cursz, newsz ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_QREALLOC( ptr, cursz, newsz ) ) + +#define FT_QALLOC_MULT( ptr, count, item_size ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_QALLOC_MULT( ptr, count, item_size ) ) + +#define FT_QREALLOC_MULT( ptr, oldcnt, newcnt, itmsz ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_QREALLOC_MULT( ptr, oldcnt, \ + newcnt, itmsz ) ) + +#define FT_FREE( ptr ) FT_MEM_FREE( ptr ) + +#define FT_NEW( ptr ) FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_NEW( ptr ) ) + +#define FT_NEW_ARRAY( ptr, count ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_NEW_ARRAY( ptr, count ) ) + +#define FT_RENEW_ARRAY( ptr, curcnt, newcnt ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_RENEW_ARRAY( ptr, curcnt, newcnt ) ) + +#define FT_QNEW( ptr ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_QNEW( ptr ) ) + +#define FT_QNEW_ARRAY( ptr, count ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_NEW_ARRAY( ptr, count ) ) + +#define FT_QRENEW_ARRAY( ptr, curcnt, newcnt ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_RENEW_ARRAY( ptr, curcnt, newcnt ) ) + + + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_mem_strdup( FT_Memory memory, + const char* str, + FT_Error *p_error ); + + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_mem_dup( FT_Memory memory, + const void* address, + FT_ULong size, + FT_Error *p_error ); + + +#define FT_MEM_STRDUP( dst, str ) \ + (dst) = (char*)ft_mem_strdup( memory, (const char*)(str), &error ) + +#define FT_STRDUP( dst, str ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_STRDUP( dst, str ) ) + +#define FT_MEM_DUP( dst, address, size ) \ + (dst) = ft_mem_dup( memory, (address), (FT_ULong)(size), &error ) + +#define FT_DUP( dst, address, size ) \ + FT_MEM_SET_ERROR( FT_MEM_DUP( dst, address, size ) ) + + + /* Return >= 1 if a truncation occurs. */ + /* Return 0 if the source string fits the buffer. */ + /* This is *not* the same as strlcpy(). */ + FT_BASE( FT_Int ) + ft_mem_strcpyn( char* dst, + const char* src, + FT_ULong size ); + +#define FT_STRCPYN( dst, src, size ) \ + ft_mem_strcpyn( (char*)dst, (const char*)(src), (FT_ULong)(size) ) + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTMEMORY_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftobjs.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftobjs.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3a41b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftobjs.h @@ -0,0 +1,1236 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftobjs.h + * + * The FreeType private base classes (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This file contains the definition of all internal FreeType classes. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTOBJS_H_ +#define FTOBJS_H_ + +#include +#include FT_RENDER_H +#include FT_SIZES_H +#include FT_LCD_FILTER_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_MEMORY_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_GLYPH_LOADER_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_DRIVER_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_AUTOHINT_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_CALC_H + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_INCREMENTAL +#include FT_INCREMENTAL_H +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Some generic definitions. + */ +#ifndef TRUE +#define TRUE 1 +#endif + +#ifndef FALSE +#define FALSE 0 +#endif + +#ifndef NULL +#define NULL (void*)0 +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * The min and max functions missing in C. As usual, be careful not to + * write things like FT_MIN( a++, b++ ) to avoid side effects. + */ +#define FT_MIN( a, b ) ( (a) < (b) ? (a) : (b) ) +#define FT_MAX( a, b ) ( (a) > (b) ? (a) : (b) ) + +#define FT_ABS( a ) ( (a) < 0 ? -(a) : (a) ) + + /* + * Approximate sqrt(x*x+y*y) using the `alpha max plus beta min' algorithm. + * We use alpha = 1, beta = 3/8, giving us results with a largest error + * less than 7% compared to the exact value. + */ +#define FT_HYPOT( x, y ) \ + ( x = FT_ABS( x ), \ + y = FT_ABS( y ), \ + x > y ? x + ( 3 * y >> 3 ) \ + : y + ( 3 * x >> 3 ) ) + + /* we use FT_TYPEOF to suppress signedness compilation warnings */ +#define FT_PAD_FLOOR( x, n ) ( (x) & ~FT_TYPEOF( x )( (n) - 1 ) ) +#define FT_PAD_ROUND( x, n ) FT_PAD_FLOOR( (x) + (n) / 2, n ) +#define FT_PAD_CEIL( x, n ) FT_PAD_FLOOR( (x) + (n) - 1, n ) + +#define FT_PIX_FLOOR( x ) ( (x) & ~FT_TYPEOF( x )63 ) +#define FT_PIX_ROUND( x ) FT_PIX_FLOOR( (x) + 32 ) +#define FT_PIX_CEIL( x ) FT_PIX_FLOOR( (x) + 63 ) + + /* specialized versions (for signed values) */ + /* that don't produce run-time errors due to integer overflow */ +#define FT_PAD_ROUND_LONG( x, n ) FT_PAD_FLOOR( ADD_LONG( (x), (n) / 2 ), \ + n ) +#define FT_PAD_CEIL_LONG( x, n ) FT_PAD_FLOOR( ADD_LONG( (x), (n) - 1 ), \ + n ) +#define FT_PIX_ROUND_LONG( x ) FT_PIX_FLOOR( ADD_LONG( (x), 32 ) ) +#define FT_PIX_CEIL_LONG( x ) FT_PIX_FLOOR( ADD_LONG( (x), 63 ) ) + +#define FT_PAD_ROUND_INT32( x, n ) FT_PAD_FLOOR( ADD_INT32( (x), (n) / 2 ), \ + n ) +#define FT_PAD_CEIL_INT32( x, n ) FT_PAD_FLOOR( ADD_INT32( (x), (n) - 1 ), \ + n ) +#define FT_PIX_ROUND_INT32( x ) FT_PIX_FLOOR( ADD_INT32( (x), 32 ) ) +#define FT_PIX_CEIL_INT32( x ) FT_PIX_FLOOR( ADD_INT32( (x), 63 ) ) + + + /* + * character classification functions -- since these are used to parse font + * files, we must not use those in which are locale-dependent + */ +#define ft_isdigit( x ) ( ( (unsigned)(x) - '0' ) < 10U ) + +#define ft_isxdigit( x ) ( ( (unsigned)(x) - '0' ) < 10U || \ + ( (unsigned)(x) - 'a' ) < 6U || \ + ( (unsigned)(x) - 'A' ) < 6U ) + + /* the next two macros assume ASCII representation */ +#define ft_isupper( x ) ( ( (unsigned)(x) - 'A' ) < 26U ) +#define ft_islower( x ) ( ( (unsigned)(x) - 'a' ) < 26U ) + +#define ft_isalpha( x ) ( ft_isupper( x ) || ft_islower( x ) ) +#define ft_isalnum( x ) ( ft_isdigit( x ) || ft_isalpha( x ) ) + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** C H A R M A P S ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /* handle to internal charmap object */ + typedef struct FT_CMapRec_* FT_CMap; + + /* handle to charmap class structure */ + typedef const struct FT_CMap_ClassRec_* FT_CMap_Class; + + /* internal charmap object structure */ + typedef struct FT_CMapRec_ + { + FT_CharMapRec charmap; + FT_CMap_Class clazz; + + } FT_CMapRec; + + /* typecast any pointer to a charmap handle */ +#define FT_CMAP( x ) ( (FT_CMap)( x ) ) + + /* obvious macros */ +#define FT_CMAP_PLATFORM_ID( x ) FT_CMAP( x )->charmap.platform_id +#define FT_CMAP_ENCODING_ID( x ) FT_CMAP( x )->charmap.encoding_id +#define FT_CMAP_ENCODING( x ) FT_CMAP( x )->charmap.encoding +#define FT_CMAP_FACE( x ) FT_CMAP( x )->charmap.face + + + /* class method definitions */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_CMap_InitFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_Pointer init_data ); + + typedef void + (*FT_CMap_DoneFunc)( FT_CMap cmap ); + + typedef FT_UInt + (*FT_CMap_CharIndexFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_UInt32 char_code ); + + typedef FT_UInt + (*FT_CMap_CharNextFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_UInt32 *achar_code ); + + typedef FT_UInt + (*FT_CMap_CharVarIndexFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_CMap unicode_cmap, + FT_UInt32 char_code, + FT_UInt32 variant_selector ); + + typedef FT_Int + (*FT_CMap_CharVarIsDefaultFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_UInt32 char_code, + FT_UInt32 variant_selector ); + + typedef FT_UInt32 * + (*FT_CMap_VariantListFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_Memory mem ); + + typedef FT_UInt32 * + (*FT_CMap_CharVariantListFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_Memory mem, + FT_UInt32 char_code ); + + typedef FT_UInt32 * + (*FT_CMap_VariantCharListFunc)( FT_CMap cmap, + FT_Memory mem, + FT_UInt32 variant_selector ); + + + typedef struct FT_CMap_ClassRec_ + { + FT_ULong size; + + FT_CMap_InitFunc init; + FT_CMap_DoneFunc done; + FT_CMap_CharIndexFunc char_index; + FT_CMap_CharNextFunc char_next; + + /* Subsequent entries are special ones for format 14 -- the variant */ + /* selector subtable which behaves like no other */ + + FT_CMap_CharVarIndexFunc char_var_index; + FT_CMap_CharVarIsDefaultFunc char_var_default; + FT_CMap_VariantListFunc variant_list; + FT_CMap_CharVariantListFunc charvariant_list; + FT_CMap_VariantCharListFunc variantchar_list; + + } FT_CMap_ClassRec; + + +#define FT_DECLARE_CMAP_CLASS( class_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE const FT_CMap_ClassRec class_; + +#define FT_DEFINE_CMAP_CLASS( \ + class_, \ + size_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + char_index_, \ + char_next_, \ + char_var_index_, \ + char_var_default_, \ + variant_list_, \ + charvariant_list_, \ + variantchar_list_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF \ + const FT_CMap_ClassRec class_ = \ + { \ + size_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + char_index_, \ + char_next_, \ + char_var_index_, \ + char_var_default_, \ + variant_list_, \ + charvariant_list_, \ + variantchar_list_ \ + }; + + + /* create a new charmap and add it to charmap->face */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_CMap_New( FT_CMap_Class clazz, + FT_Pointer init_data, + FT_CharMap charmap, + FT_CMap *acmap ); + + /* destroy a charmap and remove it from face's list */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_CMap_Done( FT_CMap cmap ); + + + /* add LCD padding to CBox */ + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_lcd_padding( FT_BBox* cbox, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Render_Mode mode ); + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING + + typedef void (*FT_Bitmap_LcdFilterFunc)( FT_Bitmap* bitmap, + FT_Render_Mode render_mode, + FT_Byte* weights ); + + + /* This is the default LCD filter, an in-place, 5-tap FIR filter. */ + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_lcd_filter_fir( FT_Bitmap* bitmap, + FT_Render_Mode mode, + FT_LcdFiveTapFilter weights ); + +#endif /* FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Face_InternalRec + * + * @description: + * This structure contains the internal fields of each FT_Face object. + * These fields may change between different releases of FreeType. + * + * @fields: + * max_points :: + * The maximum number of points used to store the vectorial outline of + * any glyph in this face. If this value cannot be known in advance, + * or if the face isn't scalable, this should be set to 0. Only + * relevant for scalable formats. + * + * max_contours :: + * The maximum number of contours used to store the vectorial outline + * of any glyph in this face. If this value cannot be known in + * advance, or if the face isn't scalable, this should be set to 0. + * Only relevant for scalable formats. + * + * transform_matrix :: + * A 2x2 matrix of 16.16 coefficients used to transform glyph outlines + * after they are loaded from the font. Only used by the convenience + * functions. + * + * transform_delta :: + * A translation vector used to transform glyph outlines after they are + * loaded from the font. Only used by the convenience functions. + * + * transform_flags :: + * Some flags used to classify the transform. Only used by the + * convenience functions. + * + * services :: + * A cache for frequently used services. It should be only accessed + * with the macro `FT_FACE_LOOKUP_SERVICE`. + * + * incremental_interface :: + * If non-null, the interface through which glyph data and metrics are + * loaded incrementally for faces that do not provide all of this data + * when first opened. This field exists only if + * @FT_CONFIG_OPTION_INCREMENTAL is defined. + * + * no_stem_darkening :: + * Overrides the module-level default, see @stem-darkening[cff], for + * example. FALSE and TRUE toggle stem darkening on and off, + * respectively, value~-1 means to use the module/driver default. + * + * random_seed :: + * If positive, override the seed value for the CFF 'random' operator. + * Value~0 means to use the font's value. Value~-1 means to use the + * CFF driver's default. + * + * lcd_weights :: + * lcd_filter_func :: + * These fields specify the LCD filtering weights and callback function + * for ClearType-style subpixel rendering. + * + * refcount :: + * A counter initialized to~1 at the time an @FT_Face structure is + * created. @FT_Reference_Face increments this counter, and + * @FT_Done_Face only destroys a face if the counter is~1, otherwise it + * simply decrements it. + */ + typedef struct FT_Face_InternalRec_ + { + FT_Matrix transform_matrix; + FT_Vector transform_delta; + FT_Int transform_flags; + + FT_ServiceCacheRec services; + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_INCREMENTAL + FT_Incremental_InterfaceRec* incremental_interface; +#endif + + FT_Char no_stem_darkening; + FT_Int32 random_seed; + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING + FT_LcdFiveTapFilter lcd_weights; /* filter weights, if any */ + FT_Bitmap_LcdFilterFunc lcd_filter_func; /* filtering callback */ +#endif + + FT_Int refcount; + + } FT_Face_InternalRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Slot_InternalRec + * + * @description: + * This structure contains the internal fields of each FT_GlyphSlot + * object. These fields may change between different releases of + * FreeType. + * + * @fields: + * loader :: + * The glyph loader object used to load outlines into the glyph slot. + * + * flags :: + * Possible values are zero or FT_GLYPH_OWN_BITMAP. The latter + * indicates that the FT_GlyphSlot structure owns the bitmap buffer. + * + * glyph_transformed :: + * Boolean. Set to TRUE when the loaded glyph must be transformed + * through a specific font transformation. This is _not_ the same as + * the face transform set through FT_Set_Transform(). + * + * glyph_matrix :: + * The 2x2 matrix corresponding to the glyph transformation, if + * necessary. + * + * glyph_delta :: + * The 2d translation vector corresponding to the glyph transformation, + * if necessary. + * + * glyph_hints :: + * Format-specific glyph hints management. + * + * load_flags :: + * The load flags passed as an argument to @FT_Load_Glyph while + * initializing the glyph slot. + */ + +#define FT_GLYPH_OWN_BITMAP 0x1U + + typedef struct FT_Slot_InternalRec_ + { + FT_GlyphLoader loader; + FT_UInt flags; + FT_Bool glyph_transformed; + FT_Matrix glyph_matrix; + FT_Vector glyph_delta; + void* glyph_hints; + + FT_Int32 load_flags; + + } FT_GlyphSlot_InternalRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_Size_InternalRec + * + * @description: + * This structure contains the internal fields of each FT_Size object. + * + * @fields: + * module_data :: + * Data specific to a driver module. + * + * autohint_mode :: + * The used auto-hinting mode. + * + * autohint_metrics :: + * Metrics used by the auto-hinter. + * + */ + + typedef struct FT_Size_InternalRec_ + { + void* module_data; + + FT_Render_Mode autohint_mode; + FT_Size_Metrics autohint_metrics; + + } FT_Size_InternalRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** M O D U L E S ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_ModuleRec + * + * @description: + * A module object instance. + * + * @fields: + * clazz :: + * A pointer to the module's class. + * + * library :: + * A handle to the parent library object. + * + * memory :: + * A handle to the memory manager. + */ + typedef struct FT_ModuleRec_ + { + FT_Module_Class* clazz; + FT_Library library; + FT_Memory memory; + + } FT_ModuleRec; + + + /* typecast an object to an FT_Module */ +#define FT_MODULE( x ) ( (FT_Module)(x) ) + +#define FT_MODULE_CLASS( x ) FT_MODULE( x )->clazz +#define FT_MODULE_LIBRARY( x ) FT_MODULE( x )->library +#define FT_MODULE_MEMORY( x ) FT_MODULE( x )->memory + + +#define FT_MODULE_IS_DRIVER( x ) ( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_FONT_DRIVER ) + +#define FT_MODULE_IS_RENDERER( x ) ( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_RENDERER ) + +#define FT_MODULE_IS_HINTER( x ) ( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_HINTER ) + +#define FT_MODULE_IS_STYLER( x ) ( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_STYLER ) + +#define FT_DRIVER_IS_SCALABLE( x ) ( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_DRIVER_SCALABLE ) + +#define FT_DRIVER_USES_OUTLINES( x ) !( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_DRIVER_NO_OUTLINES ) + +#define FT_DRIVER_HAS_HINTER( x ) ( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_DRIVER_HAS_HINTER ) + +#define FT_DRIVER_HINTS_LIGHTLY( x ) ( FT_MODULE_CLASS( x )->module_flags & \ + FT_MODULE_DRIVER_HINTS_LIGHTLY ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Module_Interface + * + * @description: + * Finds a module and returns its specific interface as a typeless + * pointer. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A handle to the library object. + * + * module_name :: + * The module's name (as an ASCII string). + * + * @return: + * A module-specific interface if available, 0 otherwise. + * + * @note: + * You should better be familiar with FreeType internals to know which + * module to look for, and what its interface is :-) + */ + FT_BASE( const void* ) + FT_Get_Module_Interface( FT_Library library, + const char* mod_name ); + + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_module_get_service( FT_Module module, + const char* service_id, + FT_Bool global ); + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_ENVIRONMENT_PROPERTIES + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + ft_property_string_set( FT_Library library, + const FT_String* module_name, + const FT_String* property_name, + FT_String* value ); +#endif + + /* */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** F A C E, S I Z E & G L Y P H S L O T O B J E C T S ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /* a few macros used to perform easy typecasts with minimal brain damage */ + +#define FT_FACE( x ) ( (FT_Face)(x) ) +#define FT_SIZE( x ) ( (FT_Size)(x) ) +#define FT_SLOT( x ) ( (FT_GlyphSlot)(x) ) + +#define FT_FACE_DRIVER( x ) FT_FACE( x )->driver +#define FT_FACE_LIBRARY( x ) FT_FACE_DRIVER( x )->root.library +#define FT_FACE_MEMORY( x ) FT_FACE( x )->memory +#define FT_FACE_STREAM( x ) FT_FACE( x )->stream + +#define FT_SIZE_FACE( x ) FT_SIZE( x )->face +#define FT_SLOT_FACE( x ) FT_SLOT( x )->face + +#define FT_FACE_SLOT( x ) FT_FACE( x )->glyph +#define FT_FACE_SIZE( x ) FT_FACE( x )->size + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_GlyphSlot + * + * @description: + * It is sometimes useful to have more than one glyph slot for a given + * face object. This function is used to create additional slots. All + * of them are automatically discarded when the face is destroyed. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to a parent face object. + * + * @output: + * aslot :: + * A handle to a new glyph slot object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_New_GlyphSlot( FT_Face face, + FT_GlyphSlot *aslot ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_GlyphSlot + * + * @description: + * Destroys a given glyph slot. Remember however that all slots are + * automatically destroyed with its parent. Using this function is not + * always mandatory. + * + * @input: + * slot :: + * A handle to a target glyph slot. + */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Done_GlyphSlot( FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + /* */ + +#define FT_REQUEST_WIDTH( req ) \ + ( (req)->horiResolution \ + ? ( (req)->width * (FT_Pos)(req)->horiResolution + 36 ) / 72 \ + : (req)->width ) + +#define FT_REQUEST_HEIGHT( req ) \ + ( (req)->vertResolution \ + ? ( (req)->height * (FT_Pos)(req)->vertResolution + 36 ) / 72 \ + : (req)->height ) + + + /* Set the metrics according to a bitmap strike. */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Select_Metrics( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong strike_index ); + + + /* Set the metrics according to a size request. */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Request_Metrics( FT_Face face, + FT_Size_Request req ); + + + /* Match a size request against `available_sizes'. */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Match_Size( FT_Face face, + FT_Size_Request req, + FT_Bool ignore_width, + FT_ULong* size_index ); + + + /* Use the horizontal metrics to synthesize the vertical metrics. */ + /* If `advance' is zero, it is also synthesized. */ + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_synthesize_vertical_metrics( FT_Glyph_Metrics* metrics, + FT_Pos advance ); + + + /* Free the bitmap of a given glyphslot when needed (i.e., only when it */ + /* was allocated with ft_glyphslot_alloc_bitmap). */ + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_glyphslot_free_bitmap( FT_GlyphSlot slot ); + + + /* Preset bitmap metrics of an outline glyphslot prior to rendering */ + /* and check whether the truncated bbox is too large for rendering. */ + FT_BASE( FT_Bool ) + ft_glyphslot_preset_bitmap( FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Render_Mode mode, + const FT_Vector* origin ); + + /* Allocate a new bitmap buffer in a glyph slot. */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + ft_glyphslot_alloc_bitmap( FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_ULong size ); + + + /* Set the bitmap buffer in a glyph slot to a given pointer. The buffer */ + /* will not be freed by a later call to ft_glyphslot_free_bitmap. */ + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_glyphslot_set_bitmap( FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Byte* buffer ); + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** R E N D E R E R S ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + +#define FT_RENDERER( x ) ( (FT_Renderer)(x) ) +#define FT_GLYPH( x ) ( (FT_Glyph)(x) ) +#define FT_BITMAP_GLYPH( x ) ( (FT_BitmapGlyph)(x) ) +#define FT_OUTLINE_GLYPH( x ) ( (FT_OutlineGlyph)(x) ) + + + typedef struct FT_RendererRec_ + { + FT_ModuleRec root; + FT_Renderer_Class* clazz; + FT_Glyph_Format glyph_format; + FT_Glyph_Class glyph_class; + + FT_Raster raster; + FT_Raster_Render_Func raster_render; + FT_Renderer_RenderFunc render; + + } FT_RendererRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** F O N T D R I V E R S ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /* typecast a module into a driver easily */ +#define FT_DRIVER( x ) ( (FT_Driver)(x) ) + + /* typecast a module as a driver, and get its driver class */ +#define FT_DRIVER_CLASS( x ) FT_DRIVER( x )->clazz + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_DriverRec + * + * @description: + * The root font driver class. A font driver is responsible for managing + * and loading font files of a given format. + * + * @fields: + * root :: + * Contains the fields of the root module class. + * + * clazz :: + * A pointer to the font driver's class. Note that this is NOT + * root.clazz. 'class' wasn't used as it is a reserved word in C++. + * + * faces_list :: + * The list of faces currently opened by this driver. + * + * glyph_loader :: + * Unused. Used to be glyph loader for all faces managed by this + * driver. + */ + typedef struct FT_DriverRec_ + { + FT_ModuleRec root; + FT_Driver_Class clazz; + FT_ListRec faces_list; + FT_GlyphLoader glyph_loader; + + } FT_DriverRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** L I B R A R I E S ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * FT_LibraryRec + * + * @description: + * The FreeType library class. This is the root of all FreeType data. + * Use FT_New_Library() to create a library object, and FT_Done_Library() + * to discard it and all child objects. + * + * @fields: + * memory :: + * The library's memory object. Manages memory allocation. + * + * version_major :: + * The major version number of the library. + * + * version_minor :: + * The minor version number of the library. + * + * version_patch :: + * The current patch level of the library. + * + * num_modules :: + * The number of modules currently registered within this library. + * This is set to 0 for new libraries. New modules are added through + * the FT_Add_Module() API function. + * + * modules :: + * A table used to store handles to the currently registered + * modules. Note that each font driver contains a list of its opened + * faces. + * + * renderers :: + * The list of renderers currently registered within the library. + * + * cur_renderer :: + * The current outline renderer. This is a shortcut used to avoid + * parsing the list on each call to FT_Outline_Render(). It is a + * handle to the current renderer for the FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE + * format. + * + * auto_hinter :: + * The auto-hinter module interface. + * + * debug_hooks :: + * An array of four function pointers that allow debuggers to hook into + * a font format's interpreter. Currently, only the TrueType bytecode + * debugger uses this. + * + * lcd_weights :: + * The LCD filter weights for ClearType-style subpixel rendering. + * + * lcd_filter_func :: + * The LCD filtering callback function for for ClearType-style subpixel + * rendering. + * + * lcd_geometry :: + * This array specifies LCD subpixel geometry and controls Harmony LCD + * rendering technique, alternative to ClearType. + * + * pic_container :: + * Contains global structs and tables, instead of defining them + * globally. + * + * refcount :: + * A counter initialized to~1 at the time an @FT_Library structure is + * created. @FT_Reference_Library increments this counter, and + * @FT_Done_Library only destroys a library if the counter is~1, + * otherwise it simply decrements it. + */ + typedef struct FT_LibraryRec_ + { + FT_Memory memory; /* library's memory manager */ + + FT_Int version_major; + FT_Int version_minor; + FT_Int version_patch; + + FT_UInt num_modules; + FT_Module modules[FT_MAX_MODULES]; /* module objects */ + + FT_ListRec renderers; /* list of renderers */ + FT_Renderer cur_renderer; /* current outline renderer */ + FT_Module auto_hinter; + + FT_DebugHook_Func debug_hooks[4]; + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_SUBPIXEL_RENDERING + FT_LcdFiveTapFilter lcd_weights; /* filter weights, if any */ + FT_Bitmap_LcdFilterFunc lcd_filter_func; /* filtering callback */ +#else + FT_Vector lcd_geometry[3]; /* RGB subpixel positions */ +#endif + + FT_Int refcount; + + } FT_LibraryRec; + + + FT_BASE( FT_Renderer ) + FT_Lookup_Renderer( FT_Library library, + FT_Glyph_Format format, + FT_ListNode* node ); + + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Render_Glyph_Internal( FT_Library library, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Render_Mode render_mode ); + + typedef const char* + (*FT_Face_GetPostscriptNameFunc)( FT_Face face ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Face_GetGlyphNameFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Pointer buffer, + FT_UInt buffer_max ); + + typedef FT_UInt + (*FT_Face_GetGlyphNameIndexFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_String* glyph_name ); + + +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_DEFAULT_SYSTEM + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_New_Memory + * + * @description: + * Creates a new memory object. + * + * @return: + * A pointer to the new memory object. 0 in case of error. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Memory ) + FT_New_Memory( void ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Done_Memory + * + * @description: + * Discards memory manager. + * + * @input: + * memory :: + * A handle to the memory manager. + */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Done_Memory( FT_Memory memory ); + +#endif /* !FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_DEFAULT_SYSTEM */ + + + /* Define default raster's interface. The default raster is located in */ + /* `src/base/ftraster.c'. */ + /* */ + /* Client applications can register new rasters through the */ + /* FT_Set_Raster() API. */ + +#ifndef FT_NO_DEFAULT_RASTER + FT_EXPORT_VAR( FT_Raster_Funcs ) ft_default_raster; +#endif + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_OUTLINE_FUNCS + * + * @description: + * Used to initialize an instance of FT_Outline_Funcs struct. The struct + * will be allocated in the global scope (or the scope where the macro is + * used). + */ +#define FT_DEFINE_OUTLINE_FUNCS( \ + class_, \ + move_to_, \ + line_to_, \ + conic_to_, \ + cubic_to_, \ + shift_, \ + delta_ ) \ + static const FT_Outline_Funcs class_ = \ + { \ + move_to_, \ + line_to_, \ + conic_to_, \ + cubic_to_, \ + shift_, \ + delta_ \ + }; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_RASTER_FUNCS + * + * @description: + * Used to initialize an instance of FT_Raster_Funcs struct. The struct + * will be allocated in the global scope (or the scope where the macro is + * used). + */ +#define FT_DEFINE_RASTER_FUNCS( \ + class_, \ + glyph_format_, \ + raster_new_, \ + raster_reset_, \ + raster_set_mode_, \ + raster_render_, \ + raster_done_ ) \ + const FT_Raster_Funcs class_ = \ + { \ + glyph_format_, \ + raster_new_, \ + raster_reset_, \ + raster_set_mode_, \ + raster_render_, \ + raster_done_ \ + }; + + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_GLYPH + * + * @description: + * The struct will be allocated in the global scope (or the scope where + * the macro is used). + */ +#define FT_DEFINE_GLYPH( \ + class_, \ + size_, \ + format_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + copy_, \ + transform_, \ + bbox_, \ + prepare_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF \ + const FT_Glyph_Class class_ = \ + { \ + size_, \ + format_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + copy_, \ + transform_, \ + bbox_, \ + prepare_ \ + }; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DECLARE_RENDERER + * + * @description: + * Used to create a forward declaration of a FT_Renderer_Class struct + * instance. + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_RENDERER + * + * @description: + * Used to initialize an instance of FT_Renderer_Class struct. + * + * The struct will be allocated in the global scope (or the scope where + * the macro is used). + */ +#define FT_DECLARE_RENDERER( class_ ) \ + FT_EXPORT_VAR( const FT_Renderer_Class ) class_; + +#define FT_DEFINE_RENDERER( \ + class_, \ + flags_, \ + size_, \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + interface_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_, \ + glyph_format_, \ + render_glyph_, \ + transform_glyph_, \ + get_glyph_cbox_, \ + set_mode_, \ + raster_class_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF \ + const FT_Renderer_Class class_ = \ + { \ + FT_DEFINE_ROOT_MODULE( flags_, \ + size_, \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + interface_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_ ) \ + glyph_format_, \ + \ + render_glyph_, \ + transform_glyph_, \ + get_glyph_cbox_, \ + set_mode_, \ + \ + raster_class_ \ + }; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DECLARE_MODULE + * + * @description: + * Used to create a forward declaration of a FT_Module_Class struct + * instance. + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_MODULE + * + * @description: + * Used to initialize an instance of an FT_Module_Class struct. + * + * The struct will be allocated in the global scope (or the scope where + * the macro is used). + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_ROOT_MODULE + * + * @description: + * Used to initialize an instance of an FT_Module_Class struct inside + * another struct that contains it or in a function that initializes that + * containing struct. + */ +#define FT_DECLARE_MODULE( class_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE \ + const FT_Module_Class class_; + +#define FT_DEFINE_ROOT_MODULE( \ + flags_, \ + size_, \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + interface_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_ ) \ + { \ + flags_, \ + size_, \ + \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + \ + interface_, \ + \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_, \ + }, + +#define FT_DEFINE_MODULE( \ + class_, \ + flags_, \ + size_, \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + interface_, \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_ ) \ + FT_CALLBACK_TABLE_DEF \ + const FT_Module_Class class_ = \ + { \ + flags_, \ + size_, \ + \ + name_, \ + version_, \ + requires_, \ + \ + interface_, \ + \ + init_, \ + done_, \ + get_interface_, \ + }; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTOBJS_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftpsprop.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftpsprop.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..574837f --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftpsprop.h @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftpsprop.h + * + * Get and set properties of PostScript drivers (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2017-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTPSPROP_H_ +#define FTPSPROP_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + FT_BASE_CALLBACK( FT_Error ) + ps_property_set( FT_Module module, /* PS_Driver */ + const char* property_name, + const void* value, + FT_Bool value_is_string ); + + FT_BASE_CALLBACK( FT_Error ) + ps_property_get( FT_Module module, /* PS_Driver */ + const char* property_name, + void* value ); + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* FTPSPROP_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftrfork.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftrfork.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..75b3e53 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftrfork.h @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftrfork.h + * + * Embedded resource forks accessor (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * Masatake YAMATO and Redhat K.K. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + +/**************************************************************************** + * Development of the code in this file is support of + * Information-technology Promotion Agency, Japan. + */ + + +#ifndef FTRFORK_H_ +#define FTRFORK_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_INTERNAL_OBJECTS_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* Number of guessing rules supported in `FT_Raccess_Guess'. */ + /* Don't forget to increment the number if you add a new guessing rule. */ +#define FT_RACCESS_N_RULES 9 + + + /* A structure to describe a reference in a resource by its resource ID */ + /* and internal offset. The `POST' resource expects to be concatenated */ + /* by the order of resource IDs instead of its appearance in the file. */ + + typedef struct FT_RFork_Ref_ + { + FT_Short res_id; + FT_Long offset; + + } FT_RFork_Ref; + + +#ifdef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_GUESSING_EMBEDDED_RFORK + typedef FT_Error + (*ft_raccess_guess_func)( FT_Library library, + FT_Stream stream, + char *base_file_name, + char **result_file_name, + FT_Long *result_offset ); + + typedef enum FT_RFork_Rule_ { + FT_RFork_Rule_invalid = -2, + FT_RFork_Rule_uknown, /* -1 */ + FT_RFork_Rule_apple_double, + FT_RFork_Rule_apple_single, + FT_RFork_Rule_darwin_ufs_export, + FT_RFork_Rule_darwin_newvfs, + FT_RFork_Rule_darwin_hfsplus, + FT_RFork_Rule_vfat, + FT_RFork_Rule_linux_cap, + FT_RFork_Rule_linux_double, + FT_RFork_Rule_linux_netatalk + } FT_RFork_Rule; + + /* For fast translation between rule index and rule type, + * the macros FT_RFORK_xxx should be kept consistent with the + * raccess_guess_funcs table + */ + typedef struct ft_raccess_guess_rec_ { + ft_raccess_guess_func func; + FT_RFork_Rule type; + } ft_raccess_guess_rec; + + +#define CONST_FT_RFORK_RULE_ARRAY_BEGIN( name, type ) \ + static const type name[] = { +#define CONST_FT_RFORK_RULE_ARRAY_ENTRY( func_suffix, type_suffix ) \ + { raccess_guess_ ## func_suffix, \ + FT_RFork_Rule_ ## type_suffix }, + /* this array is a storage, thus a final `;' is needed */ +#define CONST_FT_RFORK_RULE_ARRAY_END }; + +#endif /* FT_CONFIG_OPTION_GUESSING_EMBEDDED_RFORK */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Raccess_Guess + * + * @description: + * Guess a file name and offset where the actual resource fork is stored. + * The macro FT_RACCESS_N_RULES holds the number of guessing rules; the + * guessed result for the Nth rule is represented as a triplet: a new + * file name (new_names[N]), a file offset (offsets[N]), and an error + * code (errors[N]). + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A FreeType library instance. + * + * stream :: + * A file stream containing the resource fork. + * + * base_name :: + * The (base) file name of the resource fork used for some guessing + * rules. + * + * @output: + * new_names :: + * An array of guessed file names in which the resource forks may + * exist. If 'new_names[N]' is `NULL`, the guessed file name is equal + * to `base_name`. + * + * offsets :: + * An array of guessed file offsets. 'offsets[N]' holds the file + * offset of the possible start of the resource fork in file + * 'new_names[N]'. + * + * errors :: + * An array of FreeType error codes. 'errors[N]' is the error code of + * Nth guessing rule function. If 'errors[N]' is not FT_Err_Ok, + * 'new_names[N]' and 'offsets[N]' are meaningless. + */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Raccess_Guess( FT_Library library, + FT_Stream stream, + char* base_name, + char** new_names, + FT_Long* offsets, + FT_Error* errors ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Raccess_Get_HeaderInfo + * + * @description: + * Get the information from the header of resource fork. The information + * includes the file offset where the resource map starts, and the file + * offset where the resource data starts. `FT_Raccess_Get_DataOffsets` + * requires these two data. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A FreeType library instance. + * + * stream :: + * A file stream containing the resource fork. + * + * rfork_offset :: + * The file offset where the resource fork starts. + * + * @output: + * map_offset :: + * The file offset where the resource map starts. + * + * rdata_pos :: + * The file offset where the resource data starts. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. FT_Err_Ok means success. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Raccess_Get_HeaderInfo( FT_Library library, + FT_Stream stream, + FT_Long rfork_offset, + FT_Long *map_offset, + FT_Long *rdata_pos ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Raccess_Get_DataOffsets + * + * @description: + * Get the data offsets for a tag in a resource fork. Offsets are stored + * in an array because, in some cases, resources in a resource fork have + * the same tag. + * + * @input: + * library :: + * A FreeType library instance. + * + * stream :: + * A file stream containing the resource fork. + * + * map_offset :: + * The file offset where the resource map starts. + * + * rdata_pos :: + * The file offset where the resource data starts. + * + * tag :: + * The resource tag. + * + * sort_by_res_id :: + * A Boolean to sort the fragmented resource by their ids. The + * fragmented resources for 'POST' resource should be sorted to restore + * Type1 font properly. For 'sfnt' resources, sorting may induce a + * different order of the faces in comparison to that by QuickDraw API. + * + * @output: + * offsets :: + * The stream offsets for the resource data specified by 'tag'. This + * array is allocated by the function, so you have to call @ft_mem_free + * after use. + * + * count :: + * The length of offsets array. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. FT_Err_Ok means success. + * + * @note: + * Normally you should use `FT_Raccess_Get_HeaderInfo` to get the value + * for `map_offset` and `rdata_pos`. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Raccess_Get_DataOffsets( FT_Library library, + FT_Stream stream, + FT_Long map_offset, + FT_Long rdata_pos, + FT_Long tag, + FT_Bool sort_by_res_id, + FT_Long **offsets, + FT_Long *count ); + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTRFORK_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftserv.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftserv.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8836cf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftserv.h @@ -0,0 +1,521 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftserv.h + * + * The FreeType services (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Each module can export one or more 'services'. Each service is + * identified by a constant string and modeled by a pointer; the latter + * generally corresponds to a structure containing function pointers. + * + * Note that a service's data cannot be a mere function pointer because in + * C it is possible that function pointers might be implemented differently + * than data pointers (e.g. 48 bits instead of 32). + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTSERV_H_ +#define FTSERV_H_ + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_FACE_FIND_SERVICE + * + * @description: + * This macro is used to look up a service from a face's driver module. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source face handle. + * + * id :: + * A string describing the service as defined in the service's header + * files (e.g. FT_SERVICE_ID_MULTI_MASTERS which expands to + * 'multi-masters'). It is automatically prefixed with + * `FT_SERVICE_ID_`. + * + * @output: + * ptr :: + * A variable that receives the service pointer. Will be `NULL` if not + * found. + */ +#ifdef __cplusplus + +#define FT_FACE_FIND_SERVICE( face, ptr, id ) \ + FT_BEGIN_STMNT \ + FT_Module module = FT_MODULE( FT_FACE( face )->driver ); \ + FT_Pointer _tmp_ = NULL; \ + FT_Pointer* _pptr_ = (FT_Pointer*)&(ptr); \ + \ + \ + if ( module->clazz->get_interface ) \ + _tmp_ = module->clazz->get_interface( module, FT_SERVICE_ID_ ## id ); \ + *_pptr_ = _tmp_; \ + FT_END_STMNT + +#else /* !C++ */ + +#define FT_FACE_FIND_SERVICE( face, ptr, id ) \ + FT_BEGIN_STMNT \ + FT_Module module = FT_MODULE( FT_FACE( face )->driver ); \ + FT_Pointer _tmp_ = NULL; \ + \ + if ( module->clazz->get_interface ) \ + _tmp_ = module->clazz->get_interface( module, FT_SERVICE_ID_ ## id ); \ + ptr = _tmp_; \ + FT_END_STMNT + +#endif /* !C++ */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_FACE_FIND_GLOBAL_SERVICE + * + * @description: + * This macro is used to look up a service from all modules. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source face handle. + * + * id :: + * A string describing the service as defined in the service's header + * files (e.g. FT_SERVICE_ID_MULTI_MASTERS which expands to + * 'multi-masters'). It is automatically prefixed with + * `FT_SERVICE_ID_`. + * + * @output: + * ptr :: + * A variable that receives the service pointer. Will be `NULL` if not + * found. + */ +#ifdef __cplusplus + +#define FT_FACE_FIND_GLOBAL_SERVICE( face, ptr, id ) \ + FT_BEGIN_STMNT \ + FT_Module module = FT_MODULE( FT_FACE( face )->driver ); \ + FT_Pointer _tmp_; \ + FT_Pointer* _pptr_ = (FT_Pointer*)&(ptr); \ + \ + \ + _tmp_ = ft_module_get_service( module, FT_SERVICE_ID_ ## id, 1 ); \ + *_pptr_ = _tmp_; \ + FT_END_STMNT + +#else /* !C++ */ + +#define FT_FACE_FIND_GLOBAL_SERVICE( face, ptr, id ) \ + FT_BEGIN_STMNT \ + FT_Module module = FT_MODULE( FT_FACE( face )->driver ); \ + FT_Pointer _tmp_; \ + \ + \ + _tmp_ = ft_module_get_service( module, FT_SERVICE_ID_ ## id, 1 ); \ + ptr = _tmp_; \ + FT_END_STMNT + +#endif /* !C++ */ + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** S E R V I C E D E S C R I P T O R S *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /* + * The following structure is used to _describe_ a given service to the + * library. This is useful to build simple static service lists. + */ + typedef struct FT_ServiceDescRec_ + { + const char* serv_id; /* service name */ + const void* serv_data; /* service pointer/data */ + + } FT_ServiceDescRec; + + typedef const FT_ServiceDescRec* FT_ServiceDesc; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC1 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC2 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC3 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC4 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC5 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC6 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC7 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC8 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC9 + * FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC10 + * + * @description: + * Used to initialize an array of FT_ServiceDescRec structures. + * + * The array will be allocated in the global scope (or the scope where + * the macro is used). + */ +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC1( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC2( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC3( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC4( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3, \ + serv_id_4, serv_data_4 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { serv_id_4, serv_data_4 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC5( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3, \ + serv_id_4, serv_data_4, \ + serv_id_5, serv_data_5 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { serv_id_4, serv_data_4 }, \ + { serv_id_5, serv_data_5 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC6( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3, \ + serv_id_4, serv_data_4, \ + serv_id_5, serv_data_5, \ + serv_id_6, serv_data_6 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { serv_id_4, serv_data_4 }, \ + { serv_id_5, serv_data_5 }, \ + { serv_id_6, serv_data_6 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC7( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3, \ + serv_id_4, serv_data_4, \ + serv_id_5, serv_data_5, \ + serv_id_6, serv_data_6, \ + serv_id_7, serv_data_7 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { serv_id_4, serv_data_4 }, \ + { serv_id_5, serv_data_5 }, \ + { serv_id_6, serv_data_6 }, \ + { serv_id_7, serv_data_7 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC8( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3, \ + serv_id_4, serv_data_4, \ + serv_id_5, serv_data_5, \ + serv_id_6, serv_data_6, \ + serv_id_7, serv_data_7, \ + serv_id_8, serv_data_8 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { serv_id_4, serv_data_4 }, \ + { serv_id_5, serv_data_5 }, \ + { serv_id_6, serv_data_6 }, \ + { serv_id_7, serv_data_7 }, \ + { serv_id_8, serv_data_8 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC9( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3, \ + serv_id_4, serv_data_4, \ + serv_id_5, serv_data_5, \ + serv_id_6, serv_data_6, \ + serv_id_7, serv_data_7, \ + serv_id_8, serv_data_8, \ + serv_id_9, serv_data_9 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { serv_id_4, serv_data_4 }, \ + { serv_id_5, serv_data_5 }, \ + { serv_id_6, serv_data_6 }, \ + { serv_id_7, serv_data_7 }, \ + { serv_id_8, serv_data_8 }, \ + { serv_id_9, serv_data_9 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICEDESCREC10( class_, \ + serv_id_1, serv_data_1, \ + serv_id_2, serv_data_2, \ + serv_id_3, serv_data_3, \ + serv_id_4, serv_data_4, \ + serv_id_5, serv_data_5, \ + serv_id_6, serv_data_6, \ + serv_id_7, serv_data_7, \ + serv_id_8, serv_data_8, \ + serv_id_9, serv_data_9, \ + serv_id_10, serv_data_10 ) \ + static const FT_ServiceDescRec class_[] = \ + { \ + { serv_id_1, serv_data_1 }, \ + { serv_id_2, serv_data_2 }, \ + { serv_id_3, serv_data_3 }, \ + { serv_id_4, serv_data_4 }, \ + { serv_id_5, serv_data_5 }, \ + { serv_id_6, serv_data_6 }, \ + { serv_id_7, serv_data_7 }, \ + { serv_id_8, serv_data_8 }, \ + { serv_id_9, serv_data_9 }, \ + { serv_id_10, serv_data_10 }, \ + { NULL, NULL } \ + }; + + + /* + * Parse a list of FT_ServiceDescRec descriptors and look for a specific + * service by ID. Note that the last element in the array must be { NULL, + * NULL }, and that the function should return NULL if the service isn't + * available. + * + * This function can be used by modules to implement their `get_service' + * method. + */ + FT_BASE( FT_Pointer ) + ft_service_list_lookup( FT_ServiceDesc service_descriptors, + const char* service_id ); + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** S E R V I C E S C A C H E *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /* + * This structure is used to store a cache for several frequently used + * services. It is the type of `face->internal->services'. You should + * only use FT_FACE_LOOKUP_SERVICE to access it. + * + * All fields should have the type FT_Pointer to relax compilation + * dependencies. We assume the developer isn't completely stupid. + * + * Each field must be named `service_XXXX' where `XXX' corresponds to the + * correct FT_SERVICE_ID_XXXX macro. See the definition of + * FT_FACE_LOOKUP_SERVICE below how this is implemented. + * + */ + typedef struct FT_ServiceCacheRec_ + { + FT_Pointer service_POSTSCRIPT_FONT_NAME; + FT_Pointer service_MULTI_MASTERS; + FT_Pointer service_METRICS_VARIATIONS; + FT_Pointer service_GLYPH_DICT; + FT_Pointer service_PFR_METRICS; + FT_Pointer service_WINFNT; + + } FT_ServiceCacheRec, *FT_ServiceCache; + + + /* + * A magic number used within the services cache. + */ + + /* ensure that value `1' has the same width as a pointer */ +#define FT_SERVICE_UNAVAILABLE ((FT_Pointer)~(FT_PtrDist)1) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @macro: + * FT_FACE_LOOKUP_SERVICE + * + * @description: + * This macro is used to look up a service from a face's driver module + * using its cache. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The source face handle containing the cache. + * + * field :: + * The field name in the cache. + * + * id :: + * The service ID. + * + * @output: + * ptr :: + * A variable receiving the service data. `NULL` if not available. + */ +#ifdef __cplusplus + +#define FT_FACE_LOOKUP_SERVICE( face, ptr, id ) \ + FT_BEGIN_STMNT \ + FT_Pointer svc; \ + FT_Pointer* Pptr = (FT_Pointer*)&(ptr); \ + \ + \ + svc = FT_FACE( face )->internal->services. service_ ## id; \ + if ( svc == FT_SERVICE_UNAVAILABLE ) \ + svc = NULL; \ + else if ( svc == NULL ) \ + { \ + FT_FACE_FIND_SERVICE( face, svc, id ); \ + \ + FT_FACE( face )->internal->services. service_ ## id = \ + (FT_Pointer)( svc != NULL ? svc \ + : FT_SERVICE_UNAVAILABLE ); \ + } \ + *Pptr = svc; \ + FT_END_STMNT + +#else /* !C++ */ + +#define FT_FACE_LOOKUP_SERVICE( face, ptr, id ) \ + FT_BEGIN_STMNT \ + FT_Pointer svc; \ + \ + \ + svc = FT_FACE( face )->internal->services. service_ ## id; \ + if ( svc == FT_SERVICE_UNAVAILABLE ) \ + svc = NULL; \ + else if ( svc == NULL ) \ + { \ + FT_FACE_FIND_SERVICE( face, svc, id ); \ + \ + FT_FACE( face )->internal->services. service_ ## id = \ + (FT_Pointer)( svc != NULL ? svc \ + : FT_SERVICE_UNAVAILABLE ); \ + } \ + ptr = svc; \ + FT_END_STMNT + +#endif /* !C++ */ + + /* + * A macro used to define new service structure types. + */ + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( name ) \ + typedef struct FT_Service_ ## name ## Rec_ \ + FT_Service_ ## name ## Rec ; \ + typedef struct FT_Service_ ## name ## Rec_ \ + const * FT_Service_ ## name ; \ + struct FT_Service_ ## name ## Rec_ + + /* */ + + /* + * The header files containing the services. + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_BDF_H +#define FT_SERVICE_CFF_TABLE_LOAD_H +#define FT_SERVICE_CID_H +#define FT_SERVICE_FONT_FORMAT_H +#define FT_SERVICE_GLYPH_DICT_H +#define FT_SERVICE_GX_VALIDATE_H +#define FT_SERVICE_KERNING_H +#define FT_SERVICE_METRICS_VARIATIONS_H +#define FT_SERVICE_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H +#define FT_SERVICE_OPENTYPE_VALIDATE_H +#define FT_SERVICE_PFR_H +#define FT_SERVICE_POSTSCRIPT_CMAPS_H +#define FT_SERVICE_POSTSCRIPT_INFO_H +#define FT_SERVICE_POSTSCRIPT_NAME_H +#define FT_SERVICE_PROPERTIES_H +#define FT_SERVICE_SFNT_H +#define FT_SERVICE_TRUETYPE_ENGINE_H +#define FT_SERVICE_TRUETYPE_GLYF_H +#define FT_SERVICE_TT_CMAP_H +#define FT_SERVICE_WINFNT_H + + /* */ + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTSERV_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftstream.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftstream.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4dca0b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftstream.h @@ -0,0 +1,561 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftstream.h + * + * Stream handling (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTSTREAM_H_ +#define FTSTREAM_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_SYSTEM_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_OBJECTS_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* format of an 8-bit frame_op value: */ + /* */ + /* bit 76543210 */ + /* xxxxxxes */ + /* */ + /* s is set to 1 if the value is signed. */ + /* e is set to 1 if the value is little-endian. */ + /* xxx is a command. */ + +#define FT_FRAME_OP_SHIFT 2 +#define FT_FRAME_OP_SIGNED 1 +#define FT_FRAME_OP_LITTLE 2 +#define FT_FRAME_OP_COMMAND( x ) ( x >> FT_FRAME_OP_SHIFT ) + +#define FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( command, little, sign ) \ + ( ( command << FT_FRAME_OP_SHIFT ) | ( little << 1 ) | sign ) + +#define FT_FRAME_OP_END 0 +#define FT_FRAME_OP_START 1 /* start a new frame */ +#define FT_FRAME_OP_BYTE 2 /* read 1-byte value */ +#define FT_FRAME_OP_SHORT 3 /* read 2-byte value */ +#define FT_FRAME_OP_LONG 4 /* read 4-byte value */ +#define FT_FRAME_OP_OFF3 5 /* read 3-byte value */ +#define FT_FRAME_OP_BYTES 6 /* read a bytes sequence */ + + + typedef enum FT_Frame_Op_ + { + ft_frame_end = 0, + ft_frame_start = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_START, 0, 0 ), + + ft_frame_byte = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_BYTE, 0, 0 ), + ft_frame_schar = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_BYTE, 0, 1 ), + + ft_frame_ushort_be = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_SHORT, 0, 0 ), + ft_frame_short_be = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_SHORT, 0, 1 ), + ft_frame_ushort_le = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_SHORT, 1, 0 ), + ft_frame_short_le = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_SHORT, 1, 1 ), + + ft_frame_ulong_be = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_LONG, 0, 0 ), + ft_frame_long_be = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_LONG, 0, 1 ), + ft_frame_ulong_le = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_LONG, 1, 0 ), + ft_frame_long_le = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_LONG, 1, 1 ), + + ft_frame_uoff3_be = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_OFF3, 0, 0 ), + ft_frame_off3_be = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_OFF3, 0, 1 ), + ft_frame_uoff3_le = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_OFF3, 1, 0 ), + ft_frame_off3_le = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_OFF3, 1, 1 ), + + ft_frame_bytes = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_BYTES, 0, 0 ), + ft_frame_skip = FT_MAKE_FRAME_OP( FT_FRAME_OP_BYTES, 0, 1 ) + + } FT_Frame_Op; + + + typedef struct FT_Frame_Field_ + { + FT_Byte value; + FT_Byte size; + FT_UShort offset; + + } FT_Frame_Field; + + + /* Construct an FT_Frame_Field out of a structure type and a field name. */ + /* The structure type must be set in the FT_STRUCTURE macro before */ + /* calling the FT_FRAME_START() macro. */ + /* */ +#define FT_FIELD_SIZE( f ) \ + (FT_Byte)sizeof ( ((FT_STRUCTURE*)0)->f ) + +#define FT_FIELD_SIZE_DELTA( f ) \ + (FT_Byte)sizeof ( ((FT_STRUCTURE*)0)->f[0] ) + +#define FT_FIELD_OFFSET( f ) \ + (FT_UShort)( offsetof( FT_STRUCTURE, f ) ) + +#define FT_FRAME_FIELD( frame_op, field ) \ + { \ + frame_op, \ + FT_FIELD_SIZE( field ), \ + FT_FIELD_OFFSET( field ) \ + } + +#define FT_MAKE_EMPTY_FIELD( frame_op ) { frame_op, 0, 0 } + +#define FT_FRAME_START( size ) { ft_frame_start, 0, size } +#define FT_FRAME_END { ft_frame_end, 0, 0 } + +#define FT_FRAME_LONG( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_long_be, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_ULONG( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_ulong_be, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_SHORT( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_short_be, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_USHORT( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_ushort_be, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_OFF3( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_off3_be, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_UOFF3( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_uoff3_be, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_BYTE( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_byte, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_CHAR( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_schar, f ) + +#define FT_FRAME_LONG_LE( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_long_le, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_ULONG_LE( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_ulong_le, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_SHORT_LE( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_short_le, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_USHORT_LE( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_ushort_le, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_OFF3_LE( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_off3_le, f ) +#define FT_FRAME_UOFF3_LE( f ) FT_FRAME_FIELD( ft_frame_uoff3_le, f ) + +#define FT_FRAME_SKIP_LONG { ft_frame_long_be, 0, 0 } +#define FT_FRAME_SKIP_SHORT { ft_frame_short_be, 0, 0 } +#define FT_FRAME_SKIP_BYTE { ft_frame_byte, 0, 0 } + +#define FT_FRAME_BYTES( field, count ) \ + { \ + ft_frame_bytes, \ + count, \ + FT_FIELD_OFFSET( field ) \ + } + +#define FT_FRAME_SKIP_BYTES( count ) { ft_frame_skip, count, 0 } + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Integer extraction macros -- the 'buffer' parameter must ALWAYS be of + * type 'char*' or equivalent (1-byte elements). + */ + +#define FT_BYTE_( p, i ) ( ((const FT_Byte*)(p))[(i)] ) + +#define FT_INT16( x ) ( (FT_Int16)(x) ) +#define FT_UINT16( x ) ( (FT_UInt16)(x) ) +#define FT_INT32( x ) ( (FT_Int32)(x) ) +#define FT_UINT32( x ) ( (FT_UInt32)(x) ) + + +#define FT_BYTE_U16( p, i, s ) ( FT_UINT16( FT_BYTE_( p, i ) ) << (s) ) +#define FT_BYTE_U32( p, i, s ) ( FT_UINT32( FT_BYTE_( p, i ) ) << (s) ) + + + /* + * `FT_PEEK_XXX' are generic macros to get data from a buffer position. No + * safety checks are performed. + */ +#define FT_PEEK_SHORT( p ) FT_INT16( FT_BYTE_U16( p, 0, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U16( p, 1, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_USHORT( p ) FT_UINT16( FT_BYTE_U16( p, 0, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U16( p, 1, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_LONG( p ) FT_INT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 24 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 3, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_ULONG( p ) FT_UINT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 24 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 3, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_OFF3( p ) FT_INT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_UOFF3( p ) FT_UINT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_SHORT_LE( p ) FT_INT16( FT_BYTE_U16( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U16( p, 0, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_USHORT_LE( p ) FT_UINT16( FT_BYTE_U16( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U16( p, 0, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_LONG_LE( p ) FT_INT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 3, 24 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_ULONG_LE( p ) FT_UINT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 3, 24 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_OFF3_LE( p ) FT_INT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 0 ) ) + +#define FT_PEEK_UOFF3_LE( p ) FT_UINT32( FT_BYTE_U32( p, 2, 16 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 1, 8 ) | \ + FT_BYTE_U32( p, 0, 0 ) ) + + /* + * `FT_NEXT_XXX' are generic macros to get data from a buffer position + * which is then increased appropriately. No safety checks are performed. + */ +#define FT_NEXT_CHAR( buffer ) \ + ( (signed char)*buffer++ ) + +#define FT_NEXT_BYTE( buffer ) \ + ( (unsigned char)*buffer++ ) + +#define FT_NEXT_SHORT( buffer ) \ + ( (short)( buffer += 2, FT_PEEK_SHORT( buffer - 2 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_USHORT( buffer ) \ + ( (unsigned short)( buffer += 2, FT_PEEK_USHORT( buffer - 2 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_OFF3( buffer ) \ + ( (long)( buffer += 3, FT_PEEK_OFF3( buffer - 3 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_UOFF3( buffer ) \ + ( (unsigned long)( buffer += 3, FT_PEEK_UOFF3( buffer - 3 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_LONG( buffer ) \ + ( (long)( buffer += 4, FT_PEEK_LONG( buffer - 4 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_ULONG( buffer ) \ + ( (unsigned long)( buffer += 4, FT_PEEK_ULONG( buffer - 4 ) ) ) + + +#define FT_NEXT_SHORT_LE( buffer ) \ + ( (short)( buffer += 2, FT_PEEK_SHORT_LE( buffer - 2 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_USHORT_LE( buffer ) \ + ( (unsigned short)( buffer += 2, FT_PEEK_USHORT_LE( buffer - 2 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_OFF3_LE( buffer ) \ + ( (long)( buffer += 3, FT_PEEK_OFF3_LE( buffer - 3 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_UOFF3_LE( buffer ) \ + ( (unsigned long)( buffer += 3, FT_PEEK_UOFF3_LE( buffer - 3 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_LONG_LE( buffer ) \ + ( (long)( buffer += 4, FT_PEEK_LONG_LE( buffer - 4 ) ) ) + +#define FT_NEXT_ULONG_LE( buffer ) \ + ( (unsigned long)( buffer += 4, FT_PEEK_ULONG_LE( buffer - 4 ) ) ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * The `FT_GET_XXX` macros use an implicit 'stream' variable. + * + * Note that a call to `FT_STREAM_SEEK` or `FT_STREAM_POS` has **no** + * effect on `FT_GET_XXX`! They operate on `stream->pos`, while + * `FT_GET_XXX` use `stream->cursor`. + */ +#if 0 +#define FT_GET_MACRO( type ) FT_NEXT_ ## type ( stream->cursor ) + +#define FT_GET_CHAR() FT_GET_MACRO( CHAR ) +#define FT_GET_BYTE() FT_GET_MACRO( BYTE ) +#define FT_GET_SHORT() FT_GET_MACRO( SHORT ) +#define FT_GET_USHORT() FT_GET_MACRO( USHORT ) +#define FT_GET_OFF3() FT_GET_MACRO( OFF3 ) +#define FT_GET_UOFF3() FT_GET_MACRO( UOFF3 ) +#define FT_GET_LONG() FT_GET_MACRO( LONG ) +#define FT_GET_ULONG() FT_GET_MACRO( ULONG ) +#define FT_GET_TAG4() FT_GET_MACRO( ULONG ) + +#define FT_GET_SHORT_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( SHORT_LE ) +#define FT_GET_USHORT_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( USHORT_LE ) +#define FT_GET_LONG_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( LONG_LE ) +#define FT_GET_ULONG_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( ULONG_LE ) + +#else +#define FT_GET_MACRO( func, type ) ( (type)func( stream ) ) + +#define FT_GET_CHAR() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetChar, FT_Char ) +#define FT_GET_BYTE() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetChar, FT_Byte ) +#define FT_GET_SHORT() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetUShort, FT_Short ) +#define FT_GET_USHORT() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetUShort, FT_UShort ) +#define FT_GET_OFF3() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetUOffset, FT_Long ) +#define FT_GET_UOFF3() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetUOffset, FT_ULong ) +#define FT_GET_LONG() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetULong, FT_Long ) +#define FT_GET_ULONG() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetULong, FT_ULong ) +#define FT_GET_TAG4() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetULong, FT_ULong ) + +#define FT_GET_SHORT_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetUShortLE, FT_Short ) +#define FT_GET_USHORT_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetUShortLE, FT_UShort ) +#define FT_GET_LONG_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetULongLE, FT_Long ) +#define FT_GET_ULONG_LE() FT_GET_MACRO( FT_Stream_GetULongLE, FT_ULong ) +#endif + + +#define FT_READ_MACRO( func, type, var ) \ + ( var = (type)func( stream, &error ), \ + error != FT_Err_Ok ) + + /* + * The `FT_READ_XXX' macros use implicit `stream' and `error' variables. + * + * `FT_READ_XXX' can be controlled with `FT_STREAM_SEEK' and + * `FT_STREAM_POS'. They use the full machinery to check whether a read is + * valid. + */ +#define FT_READ_BYTE( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadChar, FT_Byte, var ) +#define FT_READ_CHAR( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadChar, FT_Char, var ) +#define FT_READ_SHORT( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadUShort, FT_Short, var ) +#define FT_READ_USHORT( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadUShort, FT_UShort, var ) +#define FT_READ_OFF3( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadUOffset, FT_Long, var ) +#define FT_READ_UOFF3( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadUOffset, FT_ULong, var ) +#define FT_READ_LONG( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadULong, FT_Long, var ) +#define FT_READ_ULONG( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadULong, FT_ULong, var ) + +#define FT_READ_SHORT_LE( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadUShortLE, FT_Short, var ) +#define FT_READ_USHORT_LE( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadUShortLE, FT_UShort, var ) +#define FT_READ_LONG_LE( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadULongLE, FT_Long, var ) +#define FT_READ_ULONG_LE( var ) FT_READ_MACRO( FT_Stream_ReadULongLE, FT_ULong, var ) + + +#ifndef FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_DEFAULT_SYSTEM + + /* initialize a stream for reading a regular system stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_Open( FT_Stream stream, + const char* filepathname ); + +#endif /* FT_CONFIG_OPTION_NO_DEFAULT_SYSTEM */ + + + /* create a new (input) stream from an FT_Open_Args structure */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_New( FT_Library library, + const FT_Open_Args* args, + FT_Stream *astream ); + + /* free a stream */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Stream_Free( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Int external ); + + /* initialize a stream for reading in-memory data */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Stream_OpenMemory( FT_Stream stream, + const FT_Byte* base, + FT_ULong size ); + + /* close a stream (does not destroy the stream structure) */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Stream_Close( FT_Stream stream ); + + + /* seek within a stream. position is relative to start of stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_Seek( FT_Stream stream, + FT_ULong pos ); + + /* skip bytes in a stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_Skip( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Long distance ); + + /* return current stream position */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_Pos( FT_Stream stream ); + + /* read bytes from a stream into a user-allocated buffer, returns an */ + /* error if not all bytes could be read. */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_Read( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Byte* buffer, + FT_ULong count ); + + /* read bytes from a stream at a given position */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_ReadAt( FT_Stream stream, + FT_ULong pos, + FT_Byte* buffer, + FT_ULong count ); + + /* try to read bytes at the end of a stream; return number of bytes */ + /* really available */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_TryRead( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Byte* buffer, + FT_ULong count ); + + /* Enter a frame of `count' consecutive bytes in a stream. Returns an */ + /* error if the frame could not be read/accessed. The caller can use */ + /* the `FT_Stream_GetXXX' functions to retrieve frame data without */ + /* error checks. */ + /* */ + /* You must _always_ call `FT_Stream_ExitFrame' once you have entered */ + /* a stream frame! */ + /* */ + /* Nested frames are not permitted. */ + /* */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_EnterFrame( FT_Stream stream, + FT_ULong count ); + + /* exit a stream frame */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Stream_ExitFrame( FT_Stream stream ); + + + /* Extract a stream frame. If the stream is disk-based, a heap block */ + /* is allocated and the frame bytes are read into it. If the stream */ + /* is memory-based, this function simply sets a pointer to the data. */ + /* */ + /* Useful to optimize access to memory-based streams transparently. */ + /* */ + /* `FT_Stream_GetXXX' functions can't be used. */ + /* */ + /* An extracted frame must be `freed' with a call to the function */ + /* `FT_Stream_ReleaseFrame'. */ + /* */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_ExtractFrame( FT_Stream stream, + FT_ULong count, + FT_Byte** pbytes ); + + /* release an extract frame (see `FT_Stream_ExtractFrame') */ + FT_BASE( void ) + FT_Stream_ReleaseFrame( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Byte** pbytes ); + + + /* read a byte from an entered frame */ + FT_BASE( FT_Char ) + FT_Stream_GetChar( FT_Stream stream ); + + /* read a 16-bit big-endian unsigned integer from an entered frame */ + FT_BASE( FT_UShort ) + FT_Stream_GetUShort( FT_Stream stream ); + + /* read a 24-bit big-endian unsigned integer from an entered frame */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_GetUOffset( FT_Stream stream ); + + /* read a 32-bit big-endian unsigned integer from an entered frame */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_GetULong( FT_Stream stream ); + + /* read a 16-bit little-endian unsigned integer from an entered frame */ + FT_BASE( FT_UShort ) + FT_Stream_GetUShortLE( FT_Stream stream ); + + /* read a 32-bit little-endian unsigned integer from an entered frame */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_GetULongLE( FT_Stream stream ); + + + /* read a byte from a stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_Char ) + FT_Stream_ReadChar( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Error* error ); + + /* read a 16-bit big-endian unsigned integer from a stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_UShort ) + FT_Stream_ReadUShort( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Error* error ); + + /* read a 24-bit big-endian unsigned integer from a stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_ReadUOffset( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Error* error ); + + /* read a 32-bit big-endian integer from a stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_ReadULong( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Error* error ); + + /* read a 16-bit little-endian unsigned integer from a stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_UShort ) + FT_Stream_ReadUShortLE( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Error* error ); + + /* read a 32-bit little-endian unsigned integer from a stream */ + FT_BASE( FT_ULong ) + FT_Stream_ReadULongLE( FT_Stream stream, + FT_Error* error ); + + /* Read a structure from a stream. The structure must be described */ + /* by an array of FT_Frame_Field records. */ + FT_BASE( FT_Error ) + FT_Stream_ReadFields( FT_Stream stream, + const FT_Frame_Field* fields, + void* structure ); + + +#define FT_STREAM_POS() \ + FT_Stream_Pos( stream ) + +#define FT_STREAM_SEEK( position ) \ + FT_SET_ERROR( FT_Stream_Seek( stream, \ + (FT_ULong)(position) ) ) + +#define FT_STREAM_SKIP( distance ) \ + FT_SET_ERROR( FT_Stream_Skip( stream, \ + (FT_Long)(distance) ) ) + +#define FT_STREAM_READ( buffer, count ) \ + FT_SET_ERROR( FT_Stream_Read( stream, \ + (FT_Byte*)(buffer), \ + (FT_ULong)(count) ) ) + +#define FT_STREAM_READ_AT( position, buffer, count ) \ + FT_SET_ERROR( FT_Stream_ReadAt( stream, \ + (FT_ULong)(position), \ + (FT_Byte*)(buffer), \ + (FT_ULong)(count) ) ) + +#define FT_STREAM_READ_FIELDS( fields, object ) \ + FT_SET_ERROR( FT_Stream_ReadFields( stream, fields, object ) ) + + +#define FT_FRAME_ENTER( size ) \ + FT_SET_ERROR( \ + FT_DEBUG_INNER( FT_Stream_EnterFrame( stream, \ + (FT_ULong)(size) ) ) ) + +#define FT_FRAME_EXIT() \ + FT_DEBUG_INNER( FT_Stream_ExitFrame( stream ) ) + +#define FT_FRAME_EXTRACT( size, bytes ) \ + FT_SET_ERROR( \ + FT_DEBUG_INNER( FT_Stream_ExtractFrame( stream, \ + (FT_ULong)(size), \ + (FT_Byte**)&(bytes) ) ) ) + +#define FT_FRAME_RELEASE( bytes ) \ + FT_DEBUG_INNER( FT_Stream_ReleaseFrame( stream, \ + (FT_Byte**)&(bytes) ) ) + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTSTREAM_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/fttrace.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/fttrace.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8089bab --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/fttrace.h @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * fttrace.h + * + * Tracing handling (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2002-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /* definitions of trace levels for FreeType 2 */ + + /* the first level must always be `trace_any' */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( any ) + + /* base components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( calc ) /* calculations (ftcalc.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( gloader ) /* glyph loader (ftgloadr.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( glyph ) /* glyph management (ftglyph.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( memory ) /* memory manager (ftobjs.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( init ) /* initialization (ftinit.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( io ) /* i/o interface (ftsystem.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( list ) /* list management (ftlist.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( objs ) /* base objects (ftobjs.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( outline ) /* outline management (ftoutln.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( stream ) /* stream manager (ftstream.c) */ + +FT_TRACE_DEF( bitmap ) /* bitmap manipulation (ftbitmap.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( checksum ) /* bitmap checksum (ftobjs.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( mm ) /* MM interface (ftmm.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( psprops ) /* PS driver properties (ftpsprop.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( raccess ) /* resource fork accessor (ftrfork.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( raster ) /* monochrome rasterizer (ftraster.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( smooth ) /* anti-aliasing raster (ftgrays.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( synth ) /* bold/slant synthesizer (ftsynth.c) */ + + /* Cache sub-system */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( cache ) /* cache sub-system (ftcache.c, etc.) */ + + /* SFNT driver components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( sfdriver ) /* SFNT font driver (sfdriver.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( sfobjs ) /* SFNT object handler (sfobjs.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttbdf ) /* TrueType embedded BDF (ttbdf.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttcmap ) /* charmap handler (ttcmap.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttcolr ) /* glyph layer table (ttcolr.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttcpal ) /* color palette table (ttcpal.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttkern ) /* kerning handler (ttkern.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttload ) /* basic TrueType tables (ttload.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttmtx ) /* metrics-related tables (ttmtx.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttpost ) /* PS table processing (ttpost.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttsbit ) /* TrueType sbit handling (ttsbit.c) */ + + /* TrueType driver components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttdriver ) /* TT font driver (ttdriver.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttgload ) /* TT glyph loader (ttgload.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttgxvar ) /* TrueType GX var handler (ttgxvar.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttinterp ) /* bytecode interpreter (ttinterp.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttobjs ) /* TT objects manager (ttobjs.c) */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ttpload ) /* TT data/program loader (ttpload.c) */ + + /* Type 1 driver components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( t1afm ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( t1driver ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( t1gload ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( t1load ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( t1objs ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( t1parse ) + + /* PostScript helper module `psaux' */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( cffdecode ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( psconv ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( psobjs ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( t1decode ) + + /* PostScript hinting module `pshinter' */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( pshalgo ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( pshrec ) + + /* Type 2 driver components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( cffdriver ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cffgload ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cffload ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cffobjs ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cffparse ) + +FT_TRACE_DEF( cf2blues ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cf2hints ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cf2interp ) + + /* Type 42 driver component */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( t42 ) + + /* CID driver components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( ciddriver ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cidgload ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cidload ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cidobjs ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( cidparse ) + + /* Windows font component */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( winfnt ) + + /* PCF font components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( pcfdriver ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( pcfread ) + + /* BDF font components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( bdfdriver ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( bdflib ) + + /* PFR font component */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( pfr ) + + /* OpenType validation components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvcommon ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvbase ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvgdef ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvgpos ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvgsub ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvjstf ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvmath ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( otvmodule ) + + /* TrueTypeGX/AAT validation components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvbsln ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvcommon ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvfeat ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvjust ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvkern ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvmodule ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvmort ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvmorx ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvlcar ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvopbd ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvprop ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( gxvtrak ) + + /* autofit components */ +FT_TRACE_DEF( afcjk ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( afglobal ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( afhints ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( afmodule ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( aflatin ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( aflatin2 ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( afshaper ) +FT_TRACE_DEF( afwarp ) + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftvalid.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftvalid.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..38aa06c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/ftvalid.h @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ftvalid.h + * + * FreeType validation support (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef FTVALID_H_ +#define FTVALID_H_ + +#include +#include FT_CONFIG_STANDARD_LIBRARY_H /* for ft_setjmp and ft_longjmp */ + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** V A L I D A T I O N ****/ + /**** ****/ + /**** ****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /* handle to a validation object */ + typedef struct FT_ValidatorRec_ volatile* FT_Validator; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * There are three distinct validation levels defined here: + * + * FT_VALIDATE_DEFAULT :: + * A table that passes this validation level can be used reliably by + * FreeType. It generally means that all offsets have been checked to + * prevent out-of-bound reads, that array counts are correct, etc. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_TIGHT :: + * A table that passes this validation level can be used reliably and + * doesn't contain invalid data. For example, a charmap table that + * returns invalid glyph indices will not pass, even though it can be + * used with FreeType in default mode (the library will simply return an + * error later when trying to load the glyph). + * + * It also checks that fields which must be a multiple of 2, 4, or 8, + * don't have incorrect values, etc. + * + * FT_VALIDATE_PARANOID :: + * Only for font debugging. Checks that a table follows the + * specification by 100%. Very few fonts will be able to pass this level + * anyway but it can be useful for certain tools like font + * editors/converters. + */ + typedef enum FT_ValidationLevel_ + { + FT_VALIDATE_DEFAULT = 0, + FT_VALIDATE_TIGHT, + FT_VALIDATE_PARANOID + + } FT_ValidationLevel; + + +#if defined( _MSC_VER ) /* Visual C++ (and Intel C++) */ + /* We disable the warning `structure was padded due to */ + /* __declspec(align())' in order to compile cleanly with */ + /* the maximum level of warnings. */ +#pragma warning( push ) +#pragma warning( disable : 4324 ) +#endif /* _MSC_VER */ + + /* validator structure */ + typedef struct FT_ValidatorRec_ + { + ft_jmp_buf jump_buffer; /* used for exception handling */ + + const FT_Byte* base; /* address of table in memory */ + const FT_Byte* limit; /* `base' + sizeof(table) in memory */ + FT_ValidationLevel level; /* validation level */ + FT_Error error; /* error returned. 0 means success */ + + } FT_ValidatorRec; + +#if defined( _MSC_VER ) +#pragma warning( pop ) +#endif + +#define FT_VALIDATOR( x ) ( (FT_Validator)( x ) ) + + + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_validator_init( FT_Validator valid, + const FT_Byte* base, + const FT_Byte* limit, + FT_ValidationLevel level ); + + /* Do not use this. It's broken and will cause your validator to crash */ + /* if you run it on an invalid font. */ + FT_BASE( FT_Int ) + ft_validator_run( FT_Validator valid ); + + /* Sets the error field in a validator, then calls `longjmp' to return */ + /* to high-level caller. Using `setjmp/longjmp' avoids many stupid */ + /* error checks within the validation routines. */ + /* */ + FT_BASE( void ) + ft_validator_error( FT_Validator valid, + FT_Error error ); + + + /* Calls ft_validate_error. Assumes that the `valid' local variable */ + /* holds a pointer to the current validator object. */ + /* */ +#define FT_INVALID( _error ) FT_INVALID_( _error ) +#define FT_INVALID_( _error ) \ + ft_validator_error( valid, FT_THROW( _error ) ) + + /* called when a broken table is detected */ +#define FT_INVALID_TOO_SHORT \ + FT_INVALID( Invalid_Table ) + + /* called when an invalid offset is detected */ +#define FT_INVALID_OFFSET \ + FT_INVALID( Invalid_Offset ) + + /* called when an invalid format/value is detected */ +#define FT_INVALID_FORMAT \ + FT_INVALID( Invalid_Table ) + + /* called when an invalid glyph index is detected */ +#define FT_INVALID_GLYPH_ID \ + FT_INVALID( Invalid_Glyph_Index ) + + /* called when an invalid field value is detected */ +#define FT_INVALID_DATA \ + FT_INVALID( Invalid_Table ) + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* FTVALID_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/internal.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/internal.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..173d8ad --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/internal.h @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * internal.h + * + * Internal header files (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This file is automatically included by `ft2build.h`. Do not include it + * manually! + * + */ + + +#define FT_INTERNAL_OBJECTS_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_STREAM_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_MEMORY_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_DEBUG_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_CALC_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_HASH_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_DRIVER_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_TRACE_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_GLYPH_LOADER_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_SFNT_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_RFORK_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_VALIDATE_H + +#define FT_INTERNAL_TRUETYPE_TYPES_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_TYPE1_TYPES_H + +#define FT_INTERNAL_POSTSCRIPT_AUX_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_POSTSCRIPT_HINTS_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_POSTSCRIPT_PROPS_H + +#define FT_INTERNAL_AUTOHINT_H + +#define FT_INTERNAL_CFF_TYPES_H +#define FT_INTERNAL_CFF_OBJECTS_TYPES_H + + +#if defined( _MSC_VER ) /* Visual C++ (and Intel C++) */ + + /* We disable the warning `conditional expression is constant' here */ + /* in order to compile cleanly with the maximum level of warnings. */ + /* In particular, the warning complains about stuff like `while(0)' */ + /* which is very useful in macro definitions. There is no benefit */ + /* in having it enabled. */ +#pragma warning( disable : 4127 ) + +#endif /* _MSC_VER */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/psaux.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/psaux.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ab01c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/psaux.h @@ -0,0 +1,1439 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * psaux.h + * + * Auxiliary functions and data structures related to PostScript fonts + * (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef PSAUX_H_ +#define PSAUX_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_INTERNAL_OBJECTS_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_TYPE1_TYPES_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_HASH_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_TRUETYPE_TYPES_H +#include FT_SERVICE_POSTSCRIPT_CMAPS_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_CFF_TYPES_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_CFF_OBJECTS_TYPES_H + + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * PostScript modules driver class. + */ + typedef struct PS_DriverRec_ + { + FT_DriverRec root; + + FT_UInt hinting_engine; + FT_Bool no_stem_darkening; + FT_Int darken_params[8]; + FT_Int32 random_seed; + + } PS_DriverRec, *PS_Driver; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** T1_TABLE *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + typedef struct PS_TableRec_* PS_Table; + typedef const struct PS_Table_FuncsRec_* PS_Table_Funcs; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_Table_FuncsRec + * + * @description: + * A set of function pointers to manage PS_Table objects. + * + * @fields: + * table_init :: + * Used to initialize a table. + * + * table_done :: + * Finalizes resp. destroy a given table. + * + * table_add :: + * Adds a new object to a table. + * + * table_release :: + * Releases table data, then finalizes it. + */ + typedef struct PS_Table_FuncsRec_ + { + FT_Error + (*init)( PS_Table table, + FT_Int count, + FT_Memory memory ); + + void + (*done)( PS_Table table ); + + FT_Error + (*add)( PS_Table table, + FT_Int idx, + void* object, + FT_UInt length ); + + void + (*release)( PS_Table table ); + + } PS_Table_FuncsRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_TableRec + * + * @description: + * A PS_Table is a simple object used to store an array of objects in a + * single memory block. + * + * @fields: + * block :: + * The address in memory of the growheap's block. This can change + * between two object adds, due to reallocation. + * + * cursor :: + * The current top of the grow heap within its block. + * + * capacity :: + * The current size of the heap block. Increments by 1kByte chunks. + * + * init :: + * Set to 0xDEADBEEF if 'elements' and 'lengths' have been allocated. + * + * max_elems :: + * The maximum number of elements in table. + * + * num_elems :: + * The current number of elements in table. + * + * elements :: + * A table of element addresses within the block. + * + * lengths :: + * A table of element sizes within the block. + * + * memory :: + * The object used for memory operations (alloc/realloc). + * + * funcs :: + * A table of method pointers for this object. + */ + typedef struct PS_TableRec_ + { + FT_Byte* block; /* current memory block */ + FT_Offset cursor; /* current cursor in memory block */ + FT_Offset capacity; /* current size of memory block */ + FT_ULong init; + + FT_Int max_elems; + FT_Int num_elems; + FT_Byte** elements; /* addresses of table elements */ + FT_UInt* lengths; /* lengths of table elements */ + + FT_Memory memory; + PS_Table_FuncsRec funcs; + + } PS_TableRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** T1 FIELDS & TOKENS *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + typedef struct PS_ParserRec_* PS_Parser; + + typedef struct T1_TokenRec_* T1_Token; + + typedef struct T1_FieldRec_* T1_Field; + + + /* simple enumeration type used to identify token types */ + typedef enum T1_TokenType_ + { + T1_TOKEN_TYPE_NONE = 0, + T1_TOKEN_TYPE_ANY, + T1_TOKEN_TYPE_STRING, + T1_TOKEN_TYPE_ARRAY, + T1_TOKEN_TYPE_KEY, /* aka `name' */ + + /* do not remove */ + T1_TOKEN_TYPE_MAX + + } T1_TokenType; + + + /* a simple structure used to identify tokens */ + typedef struct T1_TokenRec_ + { + FT_Byte* start; /* first character of token in input stream */ + FT_Byte* limit; /* first character after the token */ + T1_TokenType type; /* type of token */ + + } T1_TokenRec; + + + /* enumeration type used to identify object fields */ + typedef enum T1_FieldType_ + { + T1_FIELD_TYPE_NONE = 0, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_BOOL, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_INTEGER, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_FIXED, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_FIXED_1000, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_STRING, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_KEY, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_BBOX, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_MM_BBOX, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_INTEGER_ARRAY, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_FIXED_ARRAY, + T1_FIELD_TYPE_CALLBACK, + + /* do not remove */ + T1_FIELD_TYPE_MAX + + } T1_FieldType; + + + typedef enum T1_FieldLocation_ + { + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_CID_INFO, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_FONT_DICT, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_FONT_EXTRA, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_FONT_INFO, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_PRIVATE, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_BBOX, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_LOADER, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_FACE, + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_BLEND, + + /* do not remove */ + T1_FIELD_LOCATION_MAX + + } T1_FieldLocation; + + + typedef void + (*T1_Field_ParseFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_Pointer parser ); + + + /* structure type used to model object fields */ + typedef struct T1_FieldRec_ + { + const char* ident; /* field identifier */ + T1_FieldLocation location; + T1_FieldType type; /* type of field */ + T1_Field_ParseFunc reader; + FT_UInt offset; /* offset of field in object */ + FT_Byte size; /* size of field in bytes */ + FT_UInt array_max; /* maximum number of elements for */ + /* array */ + FT_UInt count_offset; /* offset of element count for */ + /* arrays; must not be zero if in */ + /* use -- in other words, a */ + /* `num_FOO' element must not */ + /* start the used structure if we */ + /* parse a `FOO' array */ + FT_UInt dict; /* where we expect it */ + } T1_FieldRec; + +#define T1_FIELD_DICT_FONTDICT ( 1 << 0 ) /* also FontInfo and FDArray */ +#define T1_FIELD_DICT_PRIVATE ( 1 << 1 ) + + + +#define T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, _type, _fname, _dict ) \ + { \ + _ident, T1CODE, _type, \ + 0, \ + FT_FIELD_OFFSET( _fname ), \ + FT_FIELD_SIZE( _fname ), \ + 0, 0, \ + _dict \ + }, + +#define T1_NEW_CALLBACK_FIELD( _ident, _reader, _dict ) \ + { \ + _ident, T1CODE, T1_FIELD_TYPE_CALLBACK, \ + (T1_Field_ParseFunc)_reader, \ + 0, 0, \ + 0, 0, \ + _dict \ + }, + +#define T1_NEW_TABLE_FIELD( _ident, _type, _fname, _max, _dict ) \ + { \ + _ident, T1CODE, _type, \ + 0, \ + FT_FIELD_OFFSET( _fname ), \ + FT_FIELD_SIZE_DELTA( _fname ), \ + _max, \ + FT_FIELD_OFFSET( num_ ## _fname ), \ + _dict \ + }, + +#define T1_NEW_TABLE_FIELD2( _ident, _type, _fname, _max, _dict ) \ + { \ + _ident, T1CODE, _type, \ + 0, \ + FT_FIELD_OFFSET( _fname ), \ + FT_FIELD_SIZE_DELTA( _fname ), \ + _max, 0, \ + _dict \ + }, + + +#define T1_FIELD_BOOL( _ident, _fname, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_BOOL, _fname, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_NUM( _ident, _fname, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_INTEGER, _fname, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_FIXED( _ident, _fname, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_FIXED, _fname, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_FIXED_1000( _ident, _fname, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_FIXED_1000, _fname, \ + _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_STRING( _ident, _fname, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_STRING, _fname, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_KEY( _ident, _fname, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_KEY, _fname, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_BBOX( _ident, _fname, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_SIMPLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_BBOX, _fname, _dict ) + + +#define T1_FIELD_NUM_TABLE( _ident, _fname, _fmax, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_TABLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_INTEGER_ARRAY, \ + _fname, _fmax, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_FIXED_TABLE( _ident, _fname, _fmax, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_TABLE_FIELD( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_FIXED_ARRAY, \ + _fname, _fmax, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_NUM_TABLE2( _ident, _fname, _fmax, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_TABLE_FIELD2( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_INTEGER_ARRAY, \ + _fname, _fmax, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_FIXED_TABLE2( _ident, _fname, _fmax, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_TABLE_FIELD2( _ident, T1_FIELD_TYPE_FIXED_ARRAY, \ + _fname, _fmax, _dict ) + +#define T1_FIELD_CALLBACK( _ident, _name, _dict ) \ + T1_NEW_CALLBACK_FIELD( _ident, _name, _dict ) + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** T1 PARSER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + typedef const struct PS_Parser_FuncsRec_* PS_Parser_Funcs; + + typedef struct PS_Parser_FuncsRec_ + { + void + (*init)( PS_Parser parser, + FT_Byte* base, + FT_Byte* limit, + FT_Memory memory ); + + void + (*done)( PS_Parser parser ); + + void + (*skip_spaces)( PS_Parser parser ); + void + (*skip_PS_token)( PS_Parser parser ); + + FT_Long + (*to_int)( PS_Parser parser ); + FT_Fixed + (*to_fixed)( PS_Parser parser, + FT_Int power_ten ); + + FT_Error + (*to_bytes)( PS_Parser parser, + FT_Byte* bytes, + FT_Offset max_bytes, + FT_ULong* pnum_bytes, + FT_Bool delimiters ); + + FT_Int + (*to_coord_array)( PS_Parser parser, + FT_Int max_coords, + FT_Short* coords ); + FT_Int + (*to_fixed_array)( PS_Parser parser, + FT_Int max_values, + FT_Fixed* values, + FT_Int power_ten ); + + void + (*to_token)( PS_Parser parser, + T1_Token token ); + void + (*to_token_array)( PS_Parser parser, + T1_Token tokens, + FT_UInt max_tokens, + FT_Int* pnum_tokens ); + + FT_Error + (*load_field)( PS_Parser parser, + const T1_Field field, + void** objects, + FT_UInt max_objects, + FT_ULong* pflags ); + + FT_Error + (*load_field_table)( PS_Parser parser, + const T1_Field field, + void** objects, + FT_UInt max_objects, + FT_ULong* pflags ); + + } PS_Parser_FuncsRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_ParserRec + * + * @description: + * A PS_Parser is an object used to parse a Type 1 font very quickly. + * + * @fields: + * cursor :: + * The current position in the text. + * + * base :: + * Start of the processed text. + * + * limit :: + * End of the processed text. + * + * error :: + * The last error returned. + * + * memory :: + * The object used for memory operations (alloc/realloc). + * + * funcs :: + * A table of functions for the parser. + */ + typedef struct PS_ParserRec_ + { + FT_Byte* cursor; + FT_Byte* base; + FT_Byte* limit; + FT_Error error; + FT_Memory memory; + + PS_Parser_FuncsRec funcs; + + } PS_ParserRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** PS BUILDER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + typedef struct PS_Builder_ PS_Builder; + typedef const struct PS_Builder_FuncsRec_* PS_Builder_Funcs; + + typedef struct PS_Builder_FuncsRec_ + { + void + (*init)( PS_Builder* ps_builder, + void* builder, + FT_Bool is_t1 ); + + void + (*done)( PS_Builder* builder ); + + } PS_Builder_FuncsRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_Builder + * + * @description: + * A structure used during glyph loading to store its outline. + * + * @fields: + * memory :: + * The current memory object. + * + * face :: + * The current face object. + * + * glyph :: + * The current glyph slot. + * + * loader :: + * XXX + * + * base :: + * The base glyph outline. + * + * current :: + * The current glyph outline. + * + * pos_x :: + * The horizontal translation (if composite glyph). + * + * pos_y :: + * The vertical translation (if composite glyph). + * + * left_bearing :: + * The left side bearing point. + * + * advance :: + * The horizontal advance vector. + * + * bbox :: + * Unused. + * + * path_begun :: + * A flag which indicates that a new path has begun. + * + * load_points :: + * If this flag is not set, no points are loaded. + * + * no_recurse :: + * Set but not used. + * + * metrics_only :: + * A boolean indicating that we only want to compute the metrics of a + * given glyph, not load all of its points. + * + * is_t1 :: + * Set if current font type is Type 1. + * + * funcs :: + * An array of function pointers for the builder. + */ + struct PS_Builder_ + { + FT_Memory memory; + FT_Face face; + CFF_GlyphSlot glyph; + FT_GlyphLoader loader; + FT_Outline* base; + FT_Outline* current; + + FT_Pos* pos_x; + FT_Pos* pos_y; + + FT_Vector* left_bearing; + FT_Vector* advance; + + FT_BBox* bbox; /* bounding box */ + FT_Bool path_begun; + FT_Bool load_points; + FT_Bool no_recurse; + + FT_Bool metrics_only; + FT_Bool is_t1; + + PS_Builder_FuncsRec funcs; + + }; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** PS DECODER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + +#define PS_MAX_OPERANDS 48 +#define PS_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS 16 /* maximum subroutine nesting; */ + /* only 10 are allowed but there exist */ + /* fonts like `HiraKakuProN-W3.ttf' */ + /* (Hiragino Kaku Gothic ProN W3; */ + /* 8.2d6e1; 2014-12-19) that exceed */ + /* this limit */ + + /* execution context charstring zone */ + + typedef struct PS_Decoder_Zone_ + { + FT_Byte* base; + FT_Byte* limit; + FT_Byte* cursor; + + } PS_Decoder_Zone; + + + typedef FT_Error + (*CFF_Decoder_Get_Glyph_Callback)( TT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Byte** pointer, + FT_ULong* length ); + + typedef void + (*CFF_Decoder_Free_Glyph_Callback)( TT_Face face, + FT_Byte** pointer, + FT_ULong length ); + + + typedef struct PS_Decoder_ + { + PS_Builder builder; + + FT_Fixed stack[PS_MAX_OPERANDS + 1]; + FT_Fixed* top; + + PS_Decoder_Zone zones[PS_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS + 1]; + PS_Decoder_Zone* zone; + + FT_Int flex_state; + FT_Int num_flex_vectors; + FT_Vector flex_vectors[7]; + + CFF_Font cff; + CFF_SubFont current_subfont; /* for current glyph_index */ + FT_Generic* cf2_instance; + + FT_Pos* glyph_width; + FT_Bool width_only; + FT_Int num_hints; + + FT_UInt num_locals; + FT_UInt num_globals; + + FT_Int locals_bias; + FT_Int globals_bias; + + FT_Byte** locals; + FT_Byte** globals; + + FT_Byte** glyph_names; /* for pure CFF fonts only */ + FT_UInt num_glyphs; /* number of glyphs in font */ + + FT_Render_Mode hint_mode; + + FT_Bool seac; + + CFF_Decoder_Get_Glyph_Callback get_glyph_callback; + CFF_Decoder_Free_Glyph_Callback free_glyph_callback; + + /* Type 1 stuff */ + FT_Service_PsCMaps psnames; /* for seac */ + + FT_Int lenIV; /* internal for sub routine calls */ + FT_UInt* locals_len; /* array of subrs length (optional) */ + FT_Hash locals_hash; /* used if `num_subrs' was massaged */ + + FT_Matrix font_matrix; + FT_Vector font_offset; + + PS_Blend blend; /* for multiple master support */ + + FT_Long* buildchar; + FT_UInt len_buildchar; + + } PS_Decoder; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** T1 BUILDER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + typedef struct T1_BuilderRec_* T1_Builder; + + + typedef FT_Error + (*T1_Builder_Check_Points_Func)( T1_Builder builder, + FT_Int count ); + + typedef void + (*T1_Builder_Add_Point_Func)( T1_Builder builder, + FT_Pos x, + FT_Pos y, + FT_Byte flag ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*T1_Builder_Add_Point1_Func)( T1_Builder builder, + FT_Pos x, + FT_Pos y ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*T1_Builder_Add_Contour_Func)( T1_Builder builder ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*T1_Builder_Start_Point_Func)( T1_Builder builder, + FT_Pos x, + FT_Pos y ); + + typedef void + (*T1_Builder_Close_Contour_Func)( T1_Builder builder ); + + + typedef const struct T1_Builder_FuncsRec_* T1_Builder_Funcs; + + typedef struct T1_Builder_FuncsRec_ + { + void + (*init)( T1_Builder builder, + FT_Face face, + FT_Size size, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Bool hinting ); + + void + (*done)( T1_Builder builder ); + + T1_Builder_Check_Points_Func check_points; + T1_Builder_Add_Point_Func add_point; + T1_Builder_Add_Point1_Func add_point1; + T1_Builder_Add_Contour_Func add_contour; + T1_Builder_Start_Point_Func start_point; + T1_Builder_Close_Contour_Func close_contour; + + } T1_Builder_FuncsRec; + + + /* an enumeration type to handle charstring parsing states */ + typedef enum T1_ParseState_ + { + T1_Parse_Start, + T1_Parse_Have_Width, + T1_Parse_Have_Moveto, + T1_Parse_Have_Path + + } T1_ParseState; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * T1_BuilderRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used during glyph loading to store its outline. + * + * @fields: + * memory :: + * The current memory object. + * + * face :: + * The current face object. + * + * glyph :: + * The current glyph slot. + * + * loader :: + * XXX + * + * base :: + * The base glyph outline. + * + * current :: + * The current glyph outline. + * + * max_points :: + * maximum points in builder outline + * + * max_contours :: + * Maximum number of contours in builder outline. + * + * pos_x :: + * The horizontal translation (if composite glyph). + * + * pos_y :: + * The vertical translation (if composite glyph). + * + * left_bearing :: + * The left side bearing point. + * + * advance :: + * The horizontal advance vector. + * + * bbox :: + * Unused. + * + * parse_state :: + * An enumeration which controls the charstring parsing state. + * + * load_points :: + * If this flag is not set, no points are loaded. + * + * no_recurse :: + * Set but not used. + * + * metrics_only :: + * A boolean indicating that we only want to compute the metrics of a + * given glyph, not load all of its points. + * + * funcs :: + * An array of function pointers for the builder. + */ + typedef struct T1_BuilderRec_ + { + FT_Memory memory; + FT_Face face; + FT_GlyphSlot glyph; + FT_GlyphLoader loader; + FT_Outline* base; + FT_Outline* current; + + FT_Pos pos_x; + FT_Pos pos_y; + + FT_Vector left_bearing; + FT_Vector advance; + + FT_BBox bbox; /* bounding box */ + T1_ParseState parse_state; + FT_Bool load_points; + FT_Bool no_recurse; + + FT_Bool metrics_only; + + void* hints_funcs; /* hinter-specific */ + void* hints_globals; /* hinter-specific */ + + T1_Builder_FuncsRec funcs; + + } T1_BuilderRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** T1 DECODER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + +#if 0 + + /************************************************************************** + * + * T1_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS details the maximum number of nested sub-routine + * calls during glyph loading. + */ +#define T1_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS 8 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * T1_MAX_CHARSTRING_OPERANDS is the charstring stack's capacity. A + * minimum of 16 is required. + */ +#define T1_MAX_CHARSTRINGS_OPERANDS 32 + +#endif /* 0 */ + + + typedef struct T1_Decoder_ZoneRec_ + { + FT_Byte* cursor; + FT_Byte* base; + FT_Byte* limit; + + } T1_Decoder_ZoneRec, *T1_Decoder_Zone; + + + typedef struct T1_DecoderRec_* T1_Decoder; + typedef const struct T1_Decoder_FuncsRec_* T1_Decoder_Funcs; + + + typedef FT_Error + (*T1_Decoder_Callback)( T1_Decoder decoder, + FT_UInt glyph_index ); + + + typedef struct T1_Decoder_FuncsRec_ + { + FT_Error + (*init)( T1_Decoder decoder, + FT_Face face, + FT_Size size, + FT_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Byte** glyph_names, + PS_Blend blend, + FT_Bool hinting, + FT_Render_Mode hint_mode, + T1_Decoder_Callback callback ); + + void + (*done)( T1_Decoder decoder ); + +#ifdef T1_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE + FT_Error + (*parse_charstrings_old)( T1_Decoder decoder, + FT_Byte* base, + FT_UInt len ); +#else + FT_Error + (*parse_metrics)( T1_Decoder decoder, + FT_Byte* base, + FT_UInt len ); +#endif + + FT_Error + (*parse_charstrings)( PS_Decoder* decoder, + FT_Byte* charstring_base, + FT_ULong charstring_len ); + + + } T1_Decoder_FuncsRec; + + + typedef struct T1_DecoderRec_ + { + T1_BuilderRec builder; + + FT_Long stack[T1_MAX_CHARSTRINGS_OPERANDS]; + FT_Long* top; + + T1_Decoder_ZoneRec zones[T1_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS + 1]; + T1_Decoder_Zone zone; + + FT_Service_PsCMaps psnames; /* for seac */ + FT_UInt num_glyphs; + FT_Byte** glyph_names; + + FT_Int lenIV; /* internal for sub routine calls */ + FT_Int num_subrs; + FT_Byte** subrs; + FT_UInt* subrs_len; /* array of subrs length (optional) */ + FT_Hash subrs_hash; /* used if `num_subrs' was massaged */ + + FT_Matrix font_matrix; + FT_Vector font_offset; + + FT_Int flex_state; + FT_Int num_flex_vectors; + FT_Vector flex_vectors[7]; + + PS_Blend blend; /* for multiple master support */ + + FT_Render_Mode hint_mode; + + T1_Decoder_Callback parse_callback; + T1_Decoder_FuncsRec funcs; + + FT_Long* buildchar; + FT_UInt len_buildchar; + + FT_Bool seac; + + FT_Generic cf2_instance; + + } T1_DecoderRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** CFF BUILDER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + typedef struct CFF_Builder_ CFF_Builder; + + + typedef FT_Error + (*CFF_Builder_Check_Points_Func)( CFF_Builder* builder, + FT_Int count ); + + typedef void + (*CFF_Builder_Add_Point_Func)( CFF_Builder* builder, + FT_Pos x, + FT_Pos y, + FT_Byte flag ); + typedef FT_Error + (*CFF_Builder_Add_Point1_Func)( CFF_Builder* builder, + FT_Pos x, + FT_Pos y ); + typedef FT_Error + (*CFF_Builder_Start_Point_Func)( CFF_Builder* builder, + FT_Pos x, + FT_Pos y ); + typedef void + (*CFF_Builder_Close_Contour_Func)( CFF_Builder* builder ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*CFF_Builder_Add_Contour_Func)( CFF_Builder* builder ); + + typedef const struct CFF_Builder_FuncsRec_* CFF_Builder_Funcs; + + typedef struct CFF_Builder_FuncsRec_ + { + void + (*init)( CFF_Builder* builder, + TT_Face face, + CFF_Size size, + CFF_GlyphSlot glyph, + FT_Bool hinting ); + + void + (*done)( CFF_Builder* builder ); + + CFF_Builder_Check_Points_Func check_points; + CFF_Builder_Add_Point_Func add_point; + CFF_Builder_Add_Point1_Func add_point1; + CFF_Builder_Add_Contour_Func add_contour; + CFF_Builder_Start_Point_Func start_point; + CFF_Builder_Close_Contour_Func close_contour; + + } CFF_Builder_FuncsRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CFF_Builder + * + * @description: + * A structure used during glyph loading to store its outline. + * + * @fields: + * memory :: + * The current memory object. + * + * face :: + * The current face object. + * + * glyph :: + * The current glyph slot. + * + * loader :: + * The current glyph loader. + * + * base :: + * The base glyph outline. + * + * current :: + * The current glyph outline. + * + * pos_x :: + * The horizontal translation (if composite glyph). + * + * pos_y :: + * The vertical translation (if composite glyph). + * + * left_bearing :: + * The left side bearing point. + * + * advance :: + * The horizontal advance vector. + * + * bbox :: + * Unused. + * + * path_begun :: + * A flag which indicates that a new path has begun. + * + * load_points :: + * If this flag is not set, no points are loaded. + * + * no_recurse :: + * Set but not used. + * + * metrics_only :: + * A boolean indicating that we only want to compute the metrics of a + * given glyph, not load all of its points. + * + * hints_funcs :: + * Auxiliary pointer for hinting. + * + * hints_globals :: + * Auxiliary pointer for hinting. + * + * funcs :: + * A table of method pointers for this object. + */ + struct CFF_Builder_ + { + FT_Memory memory; + TT_Face face; + CFF_GlyphSlot glyph; + FT_GlyphLoader loader; + FT_Outline* base; + FT_Outline* current; + + FT_Pos pos_x; + FT_Pos pos_y; + + FT_Vector left_bearing; + FT_Vector advance; + + FT_BBox bbox; /* bounding box */ + + FT_Bool path_begun; + FT_Bool load_points; + FT_Bool no_recurse; + + FT_Bool metrics_only; + + void* hints_funcs; /* hinter-specific */ + void* hints_globals; /* hinter-specific */ + + CFF_Builder_FuncsRec funcs; + }; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** CFF DECODER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + +#define CFF_MAX_OPERANDS 48 +#define CFF_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS 16 /* maximum subroutine nesting; */ + /* only 10 are allowed but there exist */ + /* fonts like `HiraKakuProN-W3.ttf' */ + /* (Hiragino Kaku Gothic ProN W3; */ + /* 8.2d6e1; 2014-12-19) that exceed */ + /* this limit */ +#define CFF_MAX_TRANS_ELEMENTS 32 + + /* execution context charstring zone */ + + typedef struct CFF_Decoder_Zone_ + { + FT_Byte* base; + FT_Byte* limit; + FT_Byte* cursor; + + } CFF_Decoder_Zone; + + + typedef struct CFF_Decoder_ + { + CFF_Builder builder; + CFF_Font cff; + + FT_Fixed stack[CFF_MAX_OPERANDS + 1]; + FT_Fixed* top; + + CFF_Decoder_Zone zones[CFF_MAX_SUBRS_CALLS + 1]; + CFF_Decoder_Zone* zone; + + FT_Int flex_state; + FT_Int num_flex_vectors; + FT_Vector flex_vectors[7]; + + FT_Pos glyph_width; + FT_Pos nominal_width; + + FT_Bool read_width; + FT_Bool width_only; + FT_Int num_hints; + FT_Fixed buildchar[CFF_MAX_TRANS_ELEMENTS]; + + FT_UInt num_locals; + FT_UInt num_globals; + + FT_Int locals_bias; + FT_Int globals_bias; + + FT_Byte** locals; + FT_Byte** globals; + + FT_Byte** glyph_names; /* for pure CFF fonts only */ + FT_UInt num_glyphs; /* number of glyphs in font */ + + FT_Render_Mode hint_mode; + + FT_Bool seac; + + CFF_SubFont current_subfont; /* for current glyph_index */ + + CFF_Decoder_Get_Glyph_Callback get_glyph_callback; + CFF_Decoder_Free_Glyph_Callback free_glyph_callback; + + } CFF_Decoder; + + + typedef const struct CFF_Decoder_FuncsRec_* CFF_Decoder_Funcs; + + typedef struct CFF_Decoder_FuncsRec_ + { + void + (*init)( CFF_Decoder* decoder, + TT_Face face, + CFF_Size size, + CFF_GlyphSlot slot, + FT_Bool hinting, + FT_Render_Mode hint_mode, + CFF_Decoder_Get_Glyph_Callback get_callback, + CFF_Decoder_Free_Glyph_Callback free_callback ); + + FT_Error + (*prepare)( CFF_Decoder* decoder, + CFF_Size size, + FT_UInt glyph_index ); + +#ifdef CFF_CONFIG_OPTION_OLD_ENGINE + FT_Error + (*parse_charstrings_old)( CFF_Decoder* decoder, + FT_Byte* charstring_base, + FT_ULong charstring_len, + FT_Bool in_dict ); +#endif + + FT_Error + (*parse_charstrings)( PS_Decoder* decoder, + FT_Byte* charstring_base, + FT_ULong charstring_len ); + + } CFF_Decoder_FuncsRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** AFM PARSER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + typedef struct AFM_ParserRec_* AFM_Parser; + + typedef struct AFM_Parser_FuncsRec_ + { + FT_Error + (*init)( AFM_Parser parser, + FT_Memory memory, + FT_Byte* base, + FT_Byte* limit ); + + void + (*done)( AFM_Parser parser ); + + FT_Error + (*parse)( AFM_Parser parser ); + + } AFM_Parser_FuncsRec; + + + typedef struct AFM_StreamRec_* AFM_Stream; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * AFM_ParserRec + * + * @description: + * An AFM_Parser is a parser for the AFM files. + * + * @fields: + * memory :: + * The object used for memory operations (alloc and realloc). + * + * stream :: + * This is an opaque object. + * + * FontInfo :: + * The result will be stored here. + * + * get_index :: + * A user provided function to get a glyph index by its name. + */ + typedef struct AFM_ParserRec_ + { + FT_Memory memory; + AFM_Stream stream; + + AFM_FontInfo FontInfo; + + FT_Int + (*get_index)( const char* name, + FT_Offset len, + void* user_data ); + + void* user_data; + + } AFM_ParserRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** TYPE1 CHARMAPS *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + typedef const struct T1_CMap_ClassesRec_* T1_CMap_Classes; + + typedef struct T1_CMap_ClassesRec_ + { + FT_CMap_Class standard; + FT_CMap_Class expert; + FT_CMap_Class custom; + FT_CMap_Class unicode; + + } T1_CMap_ClassesRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** PSAux Module Interface *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + typedef struct PSAux_ServiceRec_ + { + /* don't use `PS_Table_Funcs' and friends to avoid compiler warnings */ + const PS_Table_FuncsRec* ps_table_funcs; + const PS_Parser_FuncsRec* ps_parser_funcs; + const T1_Builder_FuncsRec* t1_builder_funcs; + const T1_Decoder_FuncsRec* t1_decoder_funcs; + + void + (*t1_decrypt)( FT_Byte* buffer, + FT_Offset length, + FT_UShort seed ); + + FT_UInt32 + (*cff_random)( FT_UInt32 r ); + + void + (*ps_decoder_init)( PS_Decoder* ps_decoder, + void* decoder, + FT_Bool is_t1 ); + + void + (*t1_make_subfont)( FT_Face face, + PS_Private priv, + CFF_SubFont subfont ); + + T1_CMap_Classes t1_cmap_classes; + + /* fields after this comment line were added after version 2.1.10 */ + const AFM_Parser_FuncsRec* afm_parser_funcs; + + const CFF_Decoder_FuncsRec* cff_decoder_funcs; + + } PSAux_ServiceRec, *PSAux_Service; + + /* backward compatible type definition */ + typedef PSAux_ServiceRec PSAux_Interface; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** Some convenience functions *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + +#define IS_PS_NEWLINE( ch ) \ + ( (ch) == '\r' || \ + (ch) == '\n' ) + +#define IS_PS_SPACE( ch ) \ + ( (ch) == ' ' || \ + IS_PS_NEWLINE( ch ) || \ + (ch) == '\t' || \ + (ch) == '\f' || \ + (ch) == '\0' ) + +#define IS_PS_SPECIAL( ch ) \ + ( (ch) == '/' || \ + (ch) == '(' || (ch) == ')' || \ + (ch) == '<' || (ch) == '>' || \ + (ch) == '[' || (ch) == ']' || \ + (ch) == '{' || (ch) == '}' || \ + (ch) == '%' ) + +#define IS_PS_DELIM( ch ) \ + ( IS_PS_SPACE( ch ) || \ + IS_PS_SPECIAL( ch ) ) + +#define IS_PS_DIGIT( ch ) \ + ( (ch) >= '0' && (ch) <= '9' ) + +#define IS_PS_XDIGIT( ch ) \ + ( IS_PS_DIGIT( ch ) || \ + ( (ch) >= 'A' && (ch) <= 'F' ) || \ + ( (ch) >= 'a' && (ch) <= 'f' ) ) + +#define IS_PS_BASE85( ch ) \ + ( (ch) >= '!' && (ch) <= 'u' ) + +#define IS_PS_TOKEN( cur, limit, token ) \ + ( (char)(cur)[0] == (token)[0] && \ + ( (cur) + sizeof ( (token) ) == (limit) || \ + ( (cur) + sizeof( (token) ) < (limit) && \ + IS_PS_DELIM( (cur)[sizeof ( (token) ) - 1] ) ) ) && \ + ft_strncmp( (char*)(cur), (token), sizeof ( (token) ) - 1 ) == 0 ) + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* PSAUX_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/pshints.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/pshints.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..699acea --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/pshints.h @@ -0,0 +1,700 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * pshints.h + * + * Interface to Postscript-specific (Type 1 and Type 2) hints + * recorders (specification only). These are used to support native + * T1/T2 hints in the 'type1', 'cid', and 'cff' font drivers. + * + * Copyright (C) 2001-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef PSHINTS_H_ +#define PSHINTS_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H +#include FT_TYPE1_TABLES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** INTERNAL REPRESENTATION OF GLOBALS *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + typedef struct PSH_GlobalsRec_* PSH_Globals; + + typedef FT_Error + (*PSH_Globals_NewFunc)( FT_Memory memory, + T1_Private* private_dict, + PSH_Globals* aglobals ); + + typedef void + (*PSH_Globals_SetScaleFunc)( PSH_Globals globals, + FT_Fixed x_scale, + FT_Fixed y_scale, + FT_Fixed x_delta, + FT_Fixed y_delta ); + + typedef void + (*PSH_Globals_DestroyFunc)( PSH_Globals globals ); + + + typedef struct PSH_Globals_FuncsRec_ + { + PSH_Globals_NewFunc create; + PSH_Globals_SetScaleFunc set_scale; + PSH_Globals_DestroyFunc destroy; + + } PSH_Globals_FuncsRec, *PSH_Globals_Funcs; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** PUBLIC TYPE 1 HINTS RECORDER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * T1_Hints + * + * @description: + * This is a handle to an opaque structure used to record glyph hints + * from a Type 1 character glyph character string. + * + * The methods used to operate on this object are defined by the + * @T1_Hints_FuncsRec structure. Recording glyph hints is normally + * achieved through the following scheme: + * + * - Open a new hint recording session by calling the 'open' method. + * This rewinds the recorder and prepare it for new input. + * + * - For each hint found in the glyph charstring, call the corresponding + * method ('stem', 'stem3', or 'reset'). Note that these functions do + * not return an error code. + * + * - Close the recording session by calling the 'close' method. It + * returns an error code if the hints were invalid or something strange + * happened (e.g., memory shortage). + * + * The hints accumulated in the object can later be used by the + * PostScript hinter. + * + */ + typedef struct T1_HintsRec_* T1_Hints; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * T1_Hints_Funcs + * + * @description: + * A pointer to the @T1_Hints_FuncsRec structure that defines the API of + * a given @T1_Hints object. + * + */ + typedef const struct T1_Hints_FuncsRec_* T1_Hints_Funcs; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T1_Hints_OpenFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T1_Hints class used to prepare it for a new Type 1 + * hints recording session. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 1 hints recorder. + * + * @note: + * You should always call the @T1_Hints_CloseFunc method in order to + * close an opened recording session. + * + */ + typedef void + (*T1_Hints_OpenFunc)( T1_Hints hints ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T1_Hints_SetStemFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T1_Hints class used to record a new horizontal or + * vertical stem. This corresponds to the Type 1 'hstem' and 'vstem' + * operators. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 1 hints recorder. + * + * dimension :: + * 0 for horizontal stems (hstem), 1 for vertical ones (vstem). + * + * coords :: + * Array of 2 coordinates in 16.16 format, used as (position,length) + * stem descriptor. + * + * @note: + * Use vertical coordinates (y) for horizontal stems (dim=0). Use + * horizontal coordinates (x) for vertical stems (dim=1). + * + * 'coords[0]' is the absolute stem position (lowest coordinate); + * 'coords[1]' is the length. + * + * The length can be negative, in which case it must be either -20 or + * -21. It is interpreted as a 'ghost' stem, according to the Type 1 + * specification. + * + * If the length is -21 (corresponding to a bottom ghost stem), then the + * real stem position is 'coords[0]+coords[1]'. + * + */ + typedef void + (*T1_Hints_SetStemFunc)( T1_Hints hints, + FT_UInt dimension, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T1_Hints_SetStem3Func + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T1_Hints class used to record three + * counter-controlled horizontal or vertical stems at once. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 1 hints recorder. + * + * dimension :: + * 0 for horizontal stems, 1 for vertical ones. + * + * coords :: + * An array of 6 values in 16.16 format, holding 3 (position,length) + * pairs for the counter-controlled stems. + * + * @note: + * Use vertical coordinates (y) for horizontal stems (dim=0). Use + * horizontal coordinates (x) for vertical stems (dim=1). + * + * The lengths cannot be negative (ghost stems are never + * counter-controlled). + * + */ + typedef void + (*T1_Hints_SetStem3Func)( T1_Hints hints, + FT_UInt dimension, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T1_Hints_ResetFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T1_Hints class used to reset the stems hints in a + * recording session. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 1 hints recorder. + * + * end_point :: + * The index of the last point in the input glyph in which the + * previously defined hints apply. + * + */ + typedef void + (*T1_Hints_ResetFunc)( T1_Hints hints, + FT_UInt end_point ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T1_Hints_CloseFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T1_Hints class used to close a hint recording + * session. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 1 hints recorder. + * + * end_point :: + * The index of the last point in the input glyph. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * The error code is set to indicate that an error occurred during the + * recording session. + * + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*T1_Hints_CloseFunc)( T1_Hints hints, + FT_UInt end_point ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T1_Hints_ApplyFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T1_Hints class used to apply hints to the + * corresponding glyph outline. Must be called once all hints have been + * recorded. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 1 hints recorder. + * + * outline :: + * A pointer to the target outline descriptor. + * + * globals :: + * The hinter globals for this font. + * + * hint_mode :: + * Hinting information. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * On input, all points within the outline are in font coordinates. On + * output, they are in 1/64th of pixels. + * + * The scaling transformation is taken from the 'globals' object which + * must correspond to the same font as the glyph. + * + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*T1_Hints_ApplyFunc)( T1_Hints hints, + FT_Outline* outline, + PSH_Globals globals, + FT_Render_Mode hint_mode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * T1_Hints_FuncsRec + * + * @description: + * The structure used to provide the API to @T1_Hints objects. + * + * @fields: + * hints :: + * A handle to the T1 Hints recorder. + * + * open :: + * The function to open a recording session. + * + * close :: + * The function to close a recording session. + * + * stem :: + * The function to set a simple stem. + * + * stem3 :: + * The function to set counter-controlled stems. + * + * reset :: + * The function to reset stem hints. + * + * apply :: + * The function to apply the hints to the corresponding glyph outline. + * + */ + typedef struct T1_Hints_FuncsRec_ + { + T1_Hints hints; + T1_Hints_OpenFunc open; + T1_Hints_CloseFunc close; + T1_Hints_SetStemFunc stem; + T1_Hints_SetStem3Func stem3; + T1_Hints_ResetFunc reset; + T1_Hints_ApplyFunc apply; + + } T1_Hints_FuncsRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /***** *****/ + /***** PUBLIC TYPE 2 HINTS RECORDER *****/ + /***** *****/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * T2_Hints + * + * @description: + * This is a handle to an opaque structure used to record glyph hints + * from a Type 2 character glyph character string. + * + * The methods used to operate on this object are defined by the + * @T2_Hints_FuncsRec structure. Recording glyph hints is normally + * achieved through the following scheme: + * + * - Open a new hint recording session by calling the 'open' method. + * This rewinds the recorder and prepare it for new input. + * + * - For each hint found in the glyph charstring, call the corresponding + * method ('stems', 'hintmask', 'counters'). Note that these functions + * do not return an error code. + * + * - Close the recording session by calling the 'close' method. It + * returns an error code if the hints were invalid or something strange + * happened (e.g., memory shortage). + * + * The hints accumulated in the object can later be used by the + * Postscript hinter. + * + */ + typedef struct T2_HintsRec_* T2_Hints; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * T2_Hints_Funcs + * + * @description: + * A pointer to the @T2_Hints_FuncsRec structure that defines the API of + * a given @T2_Hints object. + * + */ + typedef const struct T2_Hints_FuncsRec_* T2_Hints_Funcs; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T2_Hints_OpenFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T2_Hints class used to prepare it for a new Type 2 + * hints recording session. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 2 hints recorder. + * + * @note: + * You should always call the @T2_Hints_CloseFunc method in order to + * close an opened recording session. + * + */ + typedef void + (*T2_Hints_OpenFunc)( T2_Hints hints ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T2_Hints_StemsFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T2_Hints class used to set the table of stems in + * either the vertical or horizontal dimension. Equivalent to the + * 'hstem', 'vstem', 'hstemhm', and 'vstemhm' Type 2 operators. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 2 hints recorder. + * + * dimension :: + * 0 for horizontal stems (hstem), 1 for vertical ones (vstem). + * + * count :: + * The number of stems. + * + * coords :: + * An array of 'count' (position,length) pairs in 16.16 format. + * + * @note: + * Use vertical coordinates (y) for horizontal stems (dim=0). Use + * horizontal coordinates (x) for vertical stems (dim=1). + * + * There are '2*count' elements in the 'coords' array. Each even element + * is an absolute position in font units, each odd element is a length in + * font units. + * + * A length can be negative, in which case it must be either -20 or -21. + * It is interpreted as a 'ghost' stem, according to the Type 1 + * specification. + * + */ + typedef void + (*T2_Hints_StemsFunc)( T2_Hints hints, + FT_UInt dimension, + FT_Int count, + FT_Fixed* coordinates ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T2_Hints_MaskFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T2_Hints class used to set a given hintmask (this + * corresponds to the 'hintmask' Type 2 operator). + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 2 hints recorder. + * + * end_point :: + * The glyph index of the last point to which the previously defined or + * activated hints apply. + * + * bit_count :: + * The number of bits in the hint mask. + * + * bytes :: + * An array of bytes modelling the hint mask. + * + * @note: + * If the hintmask starts the charstring (before any glyph point + * definition), the value of `end_point` should be 0. + * + * `bit_count` is the number of meaningful bits in the 'bytes' array; it + * must be equal to the total number of hints defined so far (i.e., + * horizontal+verticals). + * + * The 'bytes' array can come directly from the Type 2 charstring and + * respects the same format. + * + */ + typedef void + (*T2_Hints_MaskFunc)( T2_Hints hints, + FT_UInt end_point, + FT_UInt bit_count, + const FT_Byte* bytes ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T2_Hints_CounterFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T2_Hints class used to set a given counter mask (this + * corresponds to the 'hintmask' Type 2 operator). + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 2 hints recorder. + * + * end_point :: + * A glyph index of the last point to which the previously defined or + * active hints apply. + * + * bit_count :: + * The number of bits in the hint mask. + * + * bytes :: + * An array of bytes modelling the hint mask. + * + * @note: + * If the hintmask starts the charstring (before any glyph point + * definition), the value of `end_point` should be 0. + * + * `bit_count` is the number of meaningful bits in the 'bytes' array; it + * must be equal to the total number of hints defined so far (i.e., + * horizontal+verticals). + * + * The 'bytes' array can come directly from the Type 2 charstring and + * respects the same format. + * + */ + typedef void + (*T2_Hints_CounterFunc)( T2_Hints hints, + FT_UInt bit_count, + const FT_Byte* bytes ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T2_Hints_CloseFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T2_Hints class used to close a hint recording + * session. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 2 hints recorder. + * + * end_point :: + * The index of the last point in the input glyph. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * The error code is set to indicate that an error occurred during the + * recording session. + * + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*T2_Hints_CloseFunc)( T2_Hints hints, + FT_UInt end_point ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * T2_Hints_ApplyFunc + * + * @description: + * A method of the @T2_Hints class used to apply hints to the + * corresponding glyph outline. Must be called after the 'close' method. + * + * @input: + * hints :: + * A handle to the Type 2 hints recorder. + * + * outline :: + * A pointer to the target outline descriptor. + * + * globals :: + * The hinter globals for this font. + * + * hint_mode :: + * Hinting information. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * On input, all points within the outline are in font coordinates. On + * output, they are in 1/64th of pixels. + * + * The scaling transformation is taken from the 'globals' object which + * must correspond to the same font than the glyph. + * + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*T2_Hints_ApplyFunc)( T2_Hints hints, + FT_Outline* outline, + PSH_Globals globals, + FT_Render_Mode hint_mode ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * T2_Hints_FuncsRec + * + * @description: + * The structure used to provide the API to @T2_Hints objects. + * + * @fields: + * hints :: + * A handle to the T2 hints recorder object. + * + * open :: + * The function to open a recording session. + * + * close :: + * The function to close a recording session. + * + * stems :: + * The function to set the dimension's stems table. + * + * hintmask :: + * The function to set hint masks. + * + * counter :: + * The function to set counter masks. + * + * apply :: + * The function to apply the hints on the corresponding glyph outline. + * + */ + typedef struct T2_Hints_FuncsRec_ + { + T2_Hints hints; + T2_Hints_OpenFunc open; + T2_Hints_CloseFunc close; + T2_Hints_StemsFunc stems; + T2_Hints_MaskFunc hintmask; + T2_Hints_CounterFunc counter; + T2_Hints_ApplyFunc apply; + + } T2_Hints_FuncsRec; + + + /* */ + + + typedef struct PSHinter_Interface_ + { + PSH_Globals_Funcs (*get_globals_funcs)( FT_Module module ); + T1_Hints_Funcs (*get_t1_funcs) ( FT_Module module ); + T2_Hints_Funcs (*get_t2_funcs) ( FT_Module module ); + + } PSHinter_Interface; + + typedef PSHinter_Interface* PSHinter_Service; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_PSHINTER_INTERFACE( \ + class_, \ + get_globals_funcs_, \ + get_t1_funcs_, \ + get_t2_funcs_ ) \ + static const PSHinter_Interface class_ = \ + { \ + get_globals_funcs_, \ + get_t1_funcs_, \ + get_t2_funcs_ \ + }; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* PSHINTS_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svbdf.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svbdf.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4786ed --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svbdf.h @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svbdf.h + * + * The FreeType BDF services (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVBDF_H_ +#define SVBDF_H_ + +#include FT_BDF_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_BDF "bdf" + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_BDF_GetCharsetIdFunc)( FT_Face face, + const char* *acharset_encoding, + const char* *acharset_registry ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_BDF_GetPropertyFunc)( FT_Face face, + const char* prop_name, + BDF_PropertyRec *aproperty ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( BDF ) + { + FT_BDF_GetCharsetIdFunc get_charset_id; + FT_BDF_GetPropertyFunc get_property; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_BDFRec( class_, \ + get_charset_id_, \ + get_property_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_BDFRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_charset_id_, get_property_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVBDF_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svcfftl.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svcfftl.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c62173 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svcfftl.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svcfftl.h + * + * The FreeType CFF tables loader service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2017-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVCFFTL_H_ +#define SVCFFTL_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_CFF_TYPES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_CFF_LOAD "cff-load" + + + typedef FT_UShort + (*FT_Get_Standard_Encoding_Func)( FT_UInt charcode ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Load_Private_Dict_Func)( CFF_Font font, + CFF_SubFont subfont, + FT_UInt lenNDV, + FT_Fixed* NDV ); + + typedef FT_Byte + (*FT_FD_Select_Get_Func)( CFF_FDSelect fdselect, + FT_UInt glyph_index ); + + typedef FT_Bool + (*FT_Blend_Check_Vector_Func)( CFF_Blend blend, + FT_UInt vsindex, + FT_UInt lenNDV, + FT_Fixed* NDV ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Blend_Build_Vector_Func)( CFF_Blend blend, + FT_UInt vsindex, + FT_UInt lenNDV, + FT_Fixed* NDV ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( CFFLoad ) + { + FT_Get_Standard_Encoding_Func get_standard_encoding; + FT_Load_Private_Dict_Func load_private_dict; + FT_FD_Select_Get_Func fd_select_get; + FT_Blend_Check_Vector_Func blend_check_vector; + FT_Blend_Build_Vector_Func blend_build_vector; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_CFFLOADREC( class_, \ + get_standard_encoding_, \ + load_private_dict_, \ + fd_select_get_, \ + blend_check_vector_, \ + blend_build_vector_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_CFFLoadRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_standard_encoding_, \ + load_private_dict_, \ + fd_select_get_, \ + blend_check_vector_, \ + blend_build_vector_ \ + }; + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svcid.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svcid.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..555a5af --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svcid.h @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svcid.h + * + * The FreeType CID font services (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2007-2019 by + * Derek Clegg and Michael Toftdal. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVCID_H_ +#define SVCID_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_CID "CID" + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_CID_GetRegistryOrderingSupplementFunc)( FT_Face face, + const char* *registry, + const char* *ordering, + FT_Int *supplement ); + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_CID_GetIsInternallyCIDKeyedFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_Bool *is_cid ); + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_CID_GetCIDFromGlyphIndexFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_UInt *cid ); + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( CID ) + { + FT_CID_GetRegistryOrderingSupplementFunc get_ros; + FT_CID_GetIsInternallyCIDKeyedFunc get_is_cid; + FT_CID_GetCIDFromGlyphIndexFunc get_cid_from_glyph_index; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_CIDREC( class_, \ + get_ros_, \ + get_is_cid_, \ + get_cid_from_glyph_index_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_CIDRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_ros_, get_is_cid_, get_cid_from_glyph_index_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVCID_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svfntfmt.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svfntfmt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f4285e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svfntfmt.h @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svfntfmt.h + * + * The FreeType font format service (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVFNTFMT_H_ +#define SVFNTFMT_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* + * A trivial service used to return the name of a face's font driver, + * according to the XFree86 nomenclature. Note that the service data is a + * simple constant string pointer. + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_FONT_FORMAT "font-format" + +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_TRUETYPE "TrueType" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_TYPE_1 "Type 1" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_BDF "BDF" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_PCF "PCF" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_TYPE_42 "Type 42" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_CID "CID Type 1" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_CFF "CFF" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_PFR "PFR" +#define FT_FONT_FORMAT_WINFNT "Windows FNT" + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVFNTFMT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svgldict.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svgldict.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca8edf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svgldict.h @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svgldict.h + * + * The FreeType glyph dictionary services (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVGLDICT_H_ +#define SVGLDICT_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* + * A service used to retrieve glyph names, as well as to find the index of + * a given glyph name in a font. + * + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_GLYPH_DICT "glyph-dict" + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_GlyphDict_GetNameFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_Pointer buffer, + FT_UInt buffer_max ); + + typedef FT_UInt + (*FT_GlyphDict_NameIndexFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_String* glyph_name ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( GlyphDict ) + { + FT_GlyphDict_GetNameFunc get_name; + FT_GlyphDict_NameIndexFunc name_index; /* optional */ + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_GLYPHDICTREC( class_, \ + get_name_, \ + name_index_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_GlyphDictRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_name_, name_index_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVGLDICT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svgxval.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svgxval.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0bb76f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svgxval.h @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svgxval.h + * + * FreeType API for validating TrueTypeGX/AAT tables (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * Masatake YAMATO, Red Hat K.K., + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + +/**************************************************************************** + * + * gxvalid is derived from both gxlayout module and otvalid module. + * Development of gxlayout is supported by the Information-technology + * Promotion Agency(IPA), Japan. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVGXVAL_H_ +#define SVGXVAL_H_ + +#include FT_GX_VALIDATE_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_VALIDATE_H + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_GX_VALIDATE "truetypegx-validate" +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_CLASSICKERN_VALIDATE "classickern-validate" + + typedef FT_Error + (*gxv_validate_func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gx_flags, + FT_Bytes tables[FT_VALIDATE_GX_LENGTH], + FT_UInt table_length ); + + + typedef FT_Error + (*ckern_validate_func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt ckern_flags, + FT_Bytes *ckern_table ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( GXvalidate ) + { + gxv_validate_func validate; + }; + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( CKERNvalidate ) + { + ckern_validate_func validate; + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVGXVAL_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svkern.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svkern.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f992a32 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svkern.h @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svkern.h + * + * The FreeType Kerning service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2006-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVKERN_H_ +#define SVKERN_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_KERNING "kerning" + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Kerning_TrackGetFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_Fixed point_size, + FT_Int degree, + FT_Fixed* akerning ); + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( Kerning ) + { + FT_Kerning_TrackGetFunc get_track; + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVKERN_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svmetric.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svmetric.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d688bc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svmetric.h @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svmetric.h + * + * The FreeType services for metrics variations (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2016-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVMETRIC_H_ +#define SVMETRIC_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* + * A service to manage the `HVAR, `MVAR', and `VVAR' OpenType tables. + * + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_METRICS_VARIATIONS "metrics-variations" + + + /* HVAR */ + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_HAdvance_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int *avalue ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_LSB_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int *avalue ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_RSB_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int *avalue ); + + /* VVAR */ + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_VAdvance_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int *avalue ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_TSB_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int *avalue ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_BSB_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int *avalue ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_VOrg_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Int *avalue ); + + /* MVAR */ + + typedef void + (*FT_Metrics_Adjust_Func)( FT_Face face ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( MetricsVariations ) + { + FT_HAdvance_Adjust_Func hadvance_adjust; + FT_LSB_Adjust_Func lsb_adjust; + FT_RSB_Adjust_Func rsb_adjust; + + FT_VAdvance_Adjust_Func vadvance_adjust; + FT_TSB_Adjust_Func tsb_adjust; + FT_BSB_Adjust_Func bsb_adjust; + FT_VOrg_Adjust_Func vorg_adjust; + + FT_Metrics_Adjust_Func metrics_adjust; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_METRICSVARIATIONSREC( class_, \ + hadvance_adjust_, \ + lsb_adjust_, \ + rsb_adjust_, \ + vadvance_adjust_, \ + tsb_adjust_, \ + bsb_adjust_, \ + vorg_adjust_, \ + metrics_adjust_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_MetricsVariationsRec class_ = \ + { \ + hadvance_adjust_, \ + lsb_adjust_, \ + rsb_adjust_, \ + vadvance_adjust_, \ + tsb_adjust_, \ + bsb_adjust_, \ + vorg_adjust_, \ + metrics_adjust_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* SVMETRIC_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svmm.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svmm.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3652f20 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svmm.h @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svmm.h + * + * The FreeType Multiple Masters and GX var services (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVMM_H_ +#define SVMM_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* + * A service used to manage multiple-masters data in a given face. + * + * See the related APIs in `ftmm.h' (FT_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H). + * + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_MULTI_MASTERS "multi-masters" + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Get_MM_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_Multi_Master* master ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Get_MM_Var_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_MM_Var* *master ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Set_MM_Design_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Long* coords ); + + /* use return value -1 to indicate that the new coordinates */ + /* are equal to the current ones; no changes are thus needed */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Set_Var_Design_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + /* use return value -1 to indicate that the new coordinates */ + /* are equal to the current ones; no changes are thus needed */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Set_MM_Blend_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Long* coords ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Get_Var_Design_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Fixed* coords ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Set_Instance_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt instance_index ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Get_MM_Blend_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt num_coords, + FT_Long* coords ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Get_Var_Blend_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt *num_coords, + FT_Fixed* *coords, + FT_Fixed* *normalizedcoords, + FT_MM_Var* *mm_var ); + + typedef void + (*FT_Done_Blend_Func)( FT_Face ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Set_MM_WeightVector_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt len, + FT_Fixed* weight_vector ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Get_MM_WeightVector_Func)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt* len, + FT_Fixed* weight_vector ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( MultiMasters ) + { + FT_Get_MM_Func get_mm; + FT_Set_MM_Design_Func set_mm_design; + FT_Set_MM_Blend_Func set_mm_blend; + FT_Get_MM_Blend_Func get_mm_blend; + FT_Get_MM_Var_Func get_mm_var; + FT_Set_Var_Design_Func set_var_design; + FT_Get_Var_Design_Func get_var_design; + FT_Set_Instance_Func set_instance; + FT_Set_MM_WeightVector_Func set_mm_weightvector; + FT_Get_MM_WeightVector_Func get_mm_weightvector; + + /* for internal use; only needed for code sharing between modules */ + FT_Get_Var_Blend_Func get_var_blend; + FT_Done_Blend_Func done_blend; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_MULTIMASTERSREC( class_, \ + get_mm_, \ + set_mm_design_, \ + set_mm_blend_, \ + get_mm_blend_, \ + get_mm_var_, \ + set_var_design_, \ + get_var_design_, \ + set_instance_, \ + set_weightvector_, \ + get_weightvector_, \ + get_var_blend_, \ + done_blend_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_MultiMastersRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_mm_, \ + set_mm_design_, \ + set_mm_blend_, \ + get_mm_blend_, \ + get_mm_var_, \ + set_var_design_, \ + get_var_design_, \ + set_instance_, \ + set_weightvector_, \ + get_weightvector_, \ + get_var_blend_, \ + done_blend_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* SVMM_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svotval.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svotval.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cab4c6e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svotval.h @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svotval.h + * + * The FreeType OpenType validation service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2004-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVOTVAL_H_ +#define SVOTVAL_H_ + +#include FT_OPENTYPE_VALIDATE_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_VALIDATE_H + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_OPENTYPE_VALIDATE "opentype-validate" + + + typedef FT_Error + (*otv_validate_func)( FT_Face volatile face, + FT_UInt ot_flags, + FT_Bytes *base, + FT_Bytes *gdef, + FT_Bytes *gpos, + FT_Bytes *gsub, + FT_Bytes *jstf ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( OTvalidate ) + { + otv_validate_func validate; + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVOTVAL_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpfr.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpfr.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd01d61 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpfr.h @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svpfr.h + * + * Internal PFR service functions (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVPFR_H_ +#define SVPFR_H_ + +#include FT_PFR_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_PFR_METRICS "pfr-metrics" + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_PFR_GetMetricsFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt *aoutline, + FT_UInt *ametrics, + FT_Fixed *ax_scale, + FT_Fixed *ay_scale ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_PFR_GetKerningFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt left, + FT_UInt right, + FT_Vector *avector ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_PFR_GetAdvanceFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Pos *aadvance ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( PfrMetrics ) + { + FT_PFR_GetMetricsFunc get_metrics; + FT_PFR_GetKerningFunc get_kerning; + FT_PFR_GetAdvanceFunc get_advance; + + }; + + /* */ + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* SVPFR_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpostnm.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpostnm.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..18e3843 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpostnm.h @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svpostnm.h + * + * The FreeType PostScript name services (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVPOSTNM_H_ +#define SVPOSTNM_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /* + * A trivial service used to retrieve the PostScript name of a given font + * when available. The `get_name' field should never be `NULL`. + * + * The corresponding function can return `NULL` to indicate that the + * PostScript name is not available. + * + * The name is owned by the face and will be destroyed with it. + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_POSTSCRIPT_FONT_NAME "postscript-font-name" + + + typedef const char* + (*FT_PsName_GetFunc)( FT_Face face ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( PsFontName ) + { + FT_PsName_GetFunc get_ps_font_name; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_PSFONTNAMEREC( class_, get_ps_font_name_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_PsFontNameRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_ps_font_name_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVPOSTNM_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svprop.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svprop.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e48d015 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svprop.h @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svprop.h + * + * The FreeType property service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2012-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVPROP_H_ +#define SVPROP_H_ + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_PROPERTIES "properties" + + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Properties_SetFunc)( FT_Module module, + const char* property_name, + const void* value, + FT_Bool value_is_string ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_Properties_GetFunc)( FT_Module module, + const char* property_name, + void* value ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( Properties ) + { + FT_Properties_SetFunc set_property; + FT_Properties_GetFunc get_property; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_PROPERTIESREC( class_, \ + set_property_, \ + get_property_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_PropertiesRec class_ = \ + { \ + set_property_, \ + get_property_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVPROP_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpscmap.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpscmap.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dfac3ba --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpscmap.h @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svpscmap.h + * + * The FreeType PostScript charmap service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVPSCMAP_H_ +#define SVPSCMAP_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_OBJECTS_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_POSTSCRIPT_CMAPS "postscript-cmaps" + + + /* + * Adobe glyph name to unicode value. + */ + typedef FT_UInt32 + (*PS_Unicode_ValueFunc)( const char* glyph_name ); + + /* + * Macintosh name id to glyph name. `NULL` if invalid index. + */ + typedef const char* + (*PS_Macintosh_NameFunc)( FT_UInt name_index ); + + /* + * Adobe standard string ID to glyph name. `NULL` if invalid index. + */ + typedef const char* + (*PS_Adobe_Std_StringsFunc)( FT_UInt string_index ); + + + /* + * Simple unicode -> glyph index charmap built from font glyph names table. + */ + typedef struct PS_UniMap_ + { + FT_UInt32 unicode; /* bit 31 set: is glyph variant */ + FT_UInt glyph_index; + + } PS_UniMap; + + + typedef struct PS_UnicodesRec_* PS_Unicodes; + + typedef struct PS_UnicodesRec_ + { + FT_CMapRec cmap; + FT_UInt num_maps; + PS_UniMap* maps; + + } PS_UnicodesRec; + + + /* + * A function which returns a glyph name for a given index. Returns + * `NULL` if invalid index. + */ + typedef const char* + (*PS_GetGlyphNameFunc)( FT_Pointer data, + FT_UInt string_index ); + + /* + * A function used to release the glyph name returned by + * PS_GetGlyphNameFunc, when needed + */ + typedef void + (*PS_FreeGlyphNameFunc)( FT_Pointer data, + const char* name ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*PS_Unicodes_InitFunc)( FT_Memory memory, + PS_Unicodes unicodes, + FT_UInt num_glyphs, + PS_GetGlyphNameFunc get_glyph_name, + PS_FreeGlyphNameFunc free_glyph_name, + FT_Pointer glyph_data ); + + typedef FT_UInt + (*PS_Unicodes_CharIndexFunc)( PS_Unicodes unicodes, + FT_UInt32 unicode ); + + typedef FT_UInt32 + (*PS_Unicodes_CharNextFunc)( PS_Unicodes unicodes, + FT_UInt32 *unicode ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( PsCMaps ) + { + PS_Unicode_ValueFunc unicode_value; + + PS_Unicodes_InitFunc unicodes_init; + PS_Unicodes_CharIndexFunc unicodes_char_index; + PS_Unicodes_CharNextFunc unicodes_char_next; + + PS_Macintosh_NameFunc macintosh_name; + PS_Adobe_Std_StringsFunc adobe_std_strings; + const unsigned short* adobe_std_encoding; + const unsigned short* adobe_expert_encoding; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_PSCMAPSREC( class_, \ + unicode_value_, \ + unicodes_init_, \ + unicodes_char_index_, \ + unicodes_char_next_, \ + macintosh_name_, \ + adobe_std_strings_, \ + adobe_std_encoding_, \ + adobe_expert_encoding_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_PsCMapsRec class_ = \ + { \ + unicode_value_, unicodes_init_, \ + unicodes_char_index_, unicodes_char_next_, macintosh_name_, \ + adobe_std_strings_, adobe_std_encoding_, adobe_expert_encoding_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVPSCMAP_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpsinfo.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpsinfo.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb4e0e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svpsinfo.h @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svpsinfo.h + * + * The FreeType PostScript info service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVPSINFO_H_ +#define SVPSINFO_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_TYPE1_TYPES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_POSTSCRIPT_INFO "postscript-info" + + + typedef FT_Error + (*PS_GetFontInfoFunc)( FT_Face face, + PS_FontInfoRec* afont_info ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*PS_GetFontExtraFunc)( FT_Face face, + PS_FontExtraRec* afont_extra ); + + typedef FT_Int + (*PS_HasGlyphNamesFunc)( FT_Face face ); + + typedef FT_Error + (*PS_GetFontPrivateFunc)( FT_Face face, + PS_PrivateRec* afont_private ); + + typedef FT_Long + (*PS_GetFontValueFunc)( FT_Face face, + PS_Dict_Keys key, + FT_UInt idx, + void *value, + FT_Long value_len ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( PsInfo ) + { + PS_GetFontInfoFunc ps_get_font_info; + PS_GetFontExtraFunc ps_get_font_extra; + PS_HasGlyphNamesFunc ps_has_glyph_names; + PS_GetFontPrivateFunc ps_get_font_private; + PS_GetFontValueFunc ps_get_font_value; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_PSINFOREC( class_, \ + get_font_info_, \ + ps_get_font_extra_, \ + has_glyph_names_, \ + get_font_private_, \ + get_font_value_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_PsInfoRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_font_info_, ps_get_font_extra_, has_glyph_names_, \ + get_font_private_, get_font_value_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVPSINFO_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svsfnt.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svsfnt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..464aa20 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svsfnt.h @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svsfnt.h + * + * The FreeType SFNT table loading service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVSFNT_H_ +#define SVSFNT_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* + * SFNT table loading service. + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_SFNT_TABLE "sfnt-table" + + + /* + * Used to implement FT_Load_Sfnt_Table(). + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_SFNT_TableLoadFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong tag, + FT_Long offset, + FT_Byte* buffer, + FT_ULong* length ); + + /* + * Used to implement FT_Get_Sfnt_Table(). + */ + typedef void* + (*FT_SFNT_TableGetFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_Sfnt_Tag tag ); + + + /* + * Used to implement FT_Sfnt_Table_Info(). + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_SFNT_TableInfoFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt idx, + FT_ULong *tag, + FT_ULong *offset, + FT_ULong *length ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( SFNT_Table ) + { + FT_SFNT_TableLoadFunc load_table; + FT_SFNT_TableGetFunc get_table; + FT_SFNT_TableInfoFunc table_info; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_SFNT_TABLEREC( class_, load_, get_, info_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_SFNT_TableRec class_ = \ + { \ + load_, get_, info_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVSFNT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svttcmap.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svttcmap.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fcb813 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svttcmap.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svttcmap.h + * + * The FreeType TrueType/sfnt cmap extra information service. + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * Masatake YAMATO, Redhat K.K., + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + +/* Development of this service is support of + Information-technology Promotion Agency, Japan. */ + +#ifndef SVTTCMAP_H_ +#define SVTTCMAP_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_TT_CMAP "tt-cmaps" + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_CMapInfo + * + * @description: + * A structure used to store TrueType/sfnt specific cmap information + * which is not covered by the generic @FT_CharMap structure. This + * structure can be accessed with the @FT_Get_TT_CMap_Info function. + * + * @fields: + * language :: + * The language ID used in Mac fonts. Definitions of values are in + * `ttnameid.h`. + * + * format :: + * The cmap format. OpenType 1.6 defines the formats 0 (byte encoding + * table), 2~(high-byte mapping through table), 4~(segment mapping to + * delta values), 6~(trimmed table mapping), 8~(mixed 16-bit and 32-bit + * coverage), 10~(trimmed array), 12~(segmented coverage), 13~(last + * resort font), and 14 (Unicode Variation Sequences). + */ + typedef struct TT_CMapInfo_ + { + FT_ULong language; + FT_Long format; + + } TT_CMapInfo; + + + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_CMap_Info_GetFunc)( FT_CharMap charmap, + TT_CMapInfo *cmap_info ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( TTCMaps ) + { + TT_CMap_Info_GetFunc get_cmap_info; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_TTCMAPSREC( class_, get_cmap_info_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_TTCMapsRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_cmap_info_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* SVTTCMAP_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svtteng.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svtteng.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a852f5c --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svtteng.h @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svtteng.h + * + * The FreeType TrueType engine query service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2006-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVTTENG_H_ +#define SVTTENG_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_MODULE_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /* + * SFNT table loading service. + */ + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_TRUETYPE_ENGINE "truetype-engine" + + /* + * Used to implement FT_Get_TrueType_Engine_Type + */ + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( TrueTypeEngine ) + { + FT_TrueTypeEngineType engine_type; + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVTTENG_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svttglyf.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svttglyf.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c879877 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svttglyf.h @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svttglyf.h + * + * The FreeType TrueType glyph service. + * + * Copyright (C) 2007-2019 by + * David Turner. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + +#ifndef SVTTGLYF_H_ +#define SVTTGLYF_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_TT_GLYF "tt-glyf" + + + typedef FT_ULong + (*TT_Glyf_GetLocationFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_ULong *psize ); + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( TTGlyf ) + { + TT_Glyf_GetLocationFunc get_location; + }; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SERVICE_TTGLYFREC( class_, get_location_ ) \ + static const FT_Service_TTGlyfRec class_ = \ + { \ + get_location_ \ + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* SVTTGLYF_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svwinfnt.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svwinfnt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..38ee020 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/services/svwinfnt.h @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * svwinfnt.h + * + * The FreeType Windows FNT/FONT service (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 2003-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SVWINFNT_H_ +#define SVWINFNT_H_ + +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_WINFONTS_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define FT_SERVICE_ID_WINFNT "winfonts" + + typedef FT_Error + (*FT_WinFnt_GetHeaderFunc)( FT_Face face, + FT_WinFNT_HeaderRec *aheader ); + + + FT_DEFINE_SERVICE( WinFnt ) + { + FT_WinFnt_GetHeaderFunc get_header; + }; + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + + +#endif /* SVWINFNT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/sfnt.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/sfnt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..225f40d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/sfnt.h @@ -0,0 +1,875 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * sfnt.h + * + * High-level 'sfnt' driver interface (specification). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef SFNT_H_ +#define SFNT_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_INTERNAL_DRIVER_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_TRUETYPE_TYPES_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Init_Face_Func + * + * @description: + * First part of the SFNT face object initialization. This finds the + * face in a SFNT file or collection, and load its format tag in + * face->format_tag. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * The input stream. + * + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * face_index :: + * The index of the TrueType font, if we are opening a collection, in + * bits 0-15. The numbered instance index~+~1 of a GX (sub)font, if + * applicable, in bits 16-30. + * + * num_params :: + * The number of additional parameters. + * + * params :: + * Optional additional parameters. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * The stream cursor must be at the font file's origin. + * + * This function recognizes fonts embedded in a 'TrueType collection'. + * + * Once the format tag has been validated by the font driver, it should + * then call the TT_Load_Face_Func() callback to read the rest of the + * SFNT tables in the object. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Init_Face_Func)( FT_Stream stream, + TT_Face face, + FT_Int face_index, + FT_Int num_params, + FT_Parameter* params ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Load_Face_Func + * + * @description: + * Second part of the SFNT face object initialization. This loads the + * common SFNT tables (head, OS/2, maxp, metrics, etc.) in the face + * object. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * The input stream. + * + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * face_index :: + * The index of the TrueType font, if we are opening a collection, in + * bits 0-15. The numbered instance index~+~1 of a GX (sub)font, if + * applicable, in bits 16-30. + * + * num_params :: + * The number of additional parameters. + * + * params :: + * Optional additional parameters. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * This function must be called after TT_Init_Face_Func(). + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Load_Face_Func)( FT_Stream stream, + TT_Face face, + FT_Int face_index, + FT_Int num_params, + FT_Parameter* params ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Done_Face_Func + * + * @description: + * A callback used to delete the common SFNT data from a face. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * @note: + * This function does NOT destroy the face object. + */ + typedef void + (*TT_Done_Face_Func)( TT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Load_Any_Func + * + * @description: + * Load any font table into client memory. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The face object to look for. + * + * tag :: + * The tag of table to load. Use the value 0 if you want to access the + * whole font file, else set this parameter to a valid TrueType table + * tag that you can forge with the MAKE_TT_TAG macro. + * + * offset :: + * The starting offset in the table (or the file if tag == 0). + * + * length :: + * The address of the decision variable: + * + * If `length == NULL`: Loads the whole table. Returns an error if + * 'offset' == 0! + * + * If `*length == 0`: Exits immediately; returning the length of the + * given table or of the font file, depending on the value of 'tag'. + * + * If `*length != 0`: Loads the next 'length' bytes of table or font, + * starting at offset 'offset' (in table or font too). + * + * @output: + * buffer :: + * The address of target buffer. + * + * @return: + * TrueType error code. 0 means success. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Load_Any_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_ULong tag, + FT_Long offset, + FT_Byte *buffer, + FT_ULong* length ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Find_SBit_Image_Func + * + * @description: + * Check whether an embedded bitmap (an 'sbit') exists for a given glyph, + * at a given strike. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * glyph_index :: + * The glyph index. + * + * strike_index :: + * The current strike index. + * + * @output: + * arange :: + * The SBit range containing the glyph index. + * + * astrike :: + * The SBit strike containing the glyph index. + * + * aglyph_offset :: + * The offset of the glyph data in 'EBDT' table. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. Returns + * SFNT_Err_Invalid_Argument if no sbit exists for the requested glyph. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Find_SBit_Image_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_ULong strike_index, + TT_SBit_Range *arange, + TT_SBit_Strike *astrike, + FT_ULong *aglyph_offset ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Load_SBit_Metrics_Func + * + * @description: + * Get the big metrics for a given embedded bitmap. + * + * @input: + * stream :: + * The input stream. + * + * range :: + * The SBit range containing the glyph. + * + * @output: + * big_metrics :: + * A big SBit metrics structure for the glyph. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * The stream cursor must be positioned at the glyph's offset within the + * 'EBDT' table before the call. + * + * If the image format uses variable metrics, the stream cursor is + * positioned just after the metrics header in the 'EBDT' table on + * function exit. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Load_SBit_Metrics_Func)( FT_Stream stream, + TT_SBit_Range range, + TT_SBit_Metrics metrics ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Load_SBit_Image_Func + * + * @description: + * Load a given glyph sbit image from the font resource. This also + * returns its metrics. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * strike_index :: + * The strike index. + * + * glyph_index :: + * The current glyph index. + * + * load_flags :: + * The current load flags. + * + * stream :: + * The input stream. + * + * @output: + * amap :: + * The target pixmap. + * + * ametrics :: + * A big sbit metrics structure for the glyph image. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. Returns an error if no glyph + * sbit exists for the index. + * + * @note: + * The `map.buffer` field is always freed before the glyph is loaded. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Load_SBit_Image_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_ULong strike_index, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_UInt load_flags, + FT_Stream stream, + FT_Bitmap *amap, + TT_SBit_MetricsRec *ametrics ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Set_SBit_Strike_Func + * + * @description: + * Select an sbit strike for a given size request. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * req :: + * The size request. + * + * @output: + * astrike_index :: + * The index of the sbit strike. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. Returns an error if no sbit + * strike exists for the selected ppem values. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Set_SBit_Strike_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_Size_Request req, + FT_ULong* astrike_index ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Load_Strike_Metrics_Func + * + * @description: + * Load the metrics of a given strike. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * strike_index :: + * The strike index. + * + * @output: + * metrics :: + * the metrics of the strike. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. Returns an error if no such + * sbit strike exists. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Load_Strike_Metrics_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_ULong strike_index, + FT_Size_Metrics* metrics ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Get_PS_Name_Func + * + * @description: + * Get the PostScript glyph name of a glyph. + * + * @input: + * idx :: + * The glyph index. + * + * PSname :: + * The address of a string pointer. Will be `NULL` in case of error, + * otherwise it is a pointer to the glyph name. + * + * You must not modify the returned string! + * + * @output: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Get_PS_Name_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_UInt idx, + FT_String** PSname ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Load_Metrics_Func + * + * @description: + * Load a metrics table, which is a table with a horizontal and a + * vertical version. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * stream :: + * The input stream. + * + * vertical :: + * A boolean flag. If set, load the vertical one. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Load_Metrics_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_Stream stream, + FT_Bool vertical ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Get_Metrics_Func + * + * @description: + * Load the horizontal or vertical header in a face object. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * vertical :: + * A boolean flag. If set, load vertical metrics. + * + * gindex :: + * The glyph index. + * + * @output: + * abearing :: + * The horizontal (or vertical) bearing. Set to zero in case of error. + * + * aadvance :: + * The horizontal (or vertical) advance. Set to zero in case of error. + */ + typedef void + (*TT_Get_Metrics_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_Bool vertical, + FT_UInt gindex, + FT_Short* abearing, + FT_UShort* aadvance ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Set_Palette_Func + * + * @description: + * Load the colors into `face->palette` for a given palette index. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * idx :: + * The palette index. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Set_Palette_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_UInt idx ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Get_Colr_Layer_Func + * + * @description: + * Iteratively get the color layer data of a given glyph index. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * base_glyph :: + * The glyph index the colored glyph layers are associated with. + * + * @inout: + * iterator :: + * An @FT_LayerIterator object. For the first call you should set + * `iterator->p` to `NULL`. For all following calls, simply use the + * same object again. + * + * @output: + * aglyph_index :: + * The glyph index of the current layer. + * + * acolor_index :: + * The color index into the font face's color palette of the current + * layer. The value 0xFFFF is special; it doesn't reference a palette + * entry but indicates that the text foreground color should be used + * instead (to be set up by the application outside of FreeType). + * + * @return: + * Value~1 if everything is OK. If there are no more layers (or if there + * are no layers at all), value~0 gets returned. In case of an error, + * value~0 is returned also. + */ + typedef FT_Bool + (*TT_Get_Colr_Layer_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_UInt base_glyph, + FT_UInt *aglyph_index, + FT_UInt *acolor_index, + FT_LayerIterator* iterator ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Blend_Colr_Func + * + * @description: + * Blend the bitmap in `new_glyph` into `base_glyph` using the color + * specified by `color_index`. If `color_index` is 0xFFFF, use + * `face->foreground_color` if `face->have_foreground_color` is set. + * Otherwise check `face->palette_data.palette_flags`: If present and + * @FT_PALETTE_FOR_DARK_BACKGROUND is set, use BGRA value 0xFFFFFFFF + * (white opaque). Otherwise use BGRA value 0x000000FF (black opaque). + * + * @input: + * face :: + * The target face object. + * + * color_index :: + * Color index from the COLR table. + * + * base_glyph :: + * Slot for bitmap to be merged into. The underlying bitmap may get + * reallocated. + * + * new_glyph :: + * Slot to be incooperated into `base_glyph`. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. Returns an error if + * color_index is invalid or reallocation fails. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Blend_Colr_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_UInt color_index, + FT_GlyphSlot base_glyph, + FT_GlyphSlot new_glyph ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Get_Name_Func + * + * @description: + * From the 'name' table, return a given ENGLISH name record in ASCII. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * nameid :: + * The name id of the name record to return. + * + * @inout: + * name :: + * The address of an allocated string pointer. `NULL` if no name is + * present. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Get_Name_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_UShort nameid, + FT_String** name ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Get_Name_ID_Func + * + * @description: + * Search whether an ENGLISH version for a given name ID is in the 'name' + * table. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * nameid :: + * The name id of the name record to return. + * + * @output: + * win :: + * If non-negative, an index into the 'name' table with the + * corresponding (3,1) or (3,0) Windows entry. + * + * apple :: + * If non-negative, an index into the 'name' table with the + * corresponding (1,0) Apple entry. + * + * @return: + * 1 if there is either a win or apple entry (or both), 0 otheriwse. + */ + typedef FT_Bool + (*TT_Get_Name_ID_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_UShort nameid, + FT_Int *win, + FT_Int *apple ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Load_Table_Func + * + * @description: + * Load a given TrueType table. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * stream :: + * The input stream. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * The function uses `face->goto_table` to seek the stream to the start + * of the table, except while loading the font directory. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Load_Table_Func)( TT_Face face, + FT_Stream stream ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Free_Table_Func + * + * @description: + * Free a given TrueType table. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + */ + typedef void + (*TT_Free_Table_Func)( TT_Face face ); + + + /* + * @functype: + * TT_Face_GetKerningFunc + * + * @description: + * Return the horizontal kerning value between two glyphs. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face object. + * + * left_glyph :: + * The left glyph index. + * + * right_glyph :: + * The right glyph index. + * + * @return: + * The kerning value in font units. + */ + typedef FT_Int + (*TT_Face_GetKerningFunc)( TT_Face face, + FT_UInt left_glyph, + FT_UInt right_glyph ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * SFNT_Interface + * + * @description: + * This structure holds pointers to the functions used to load and free + * the basic tables that are required in a 'sfnt' font file. + * + * @fields: + * Check the various xxx_Func() descriptions for details. + */ + typedef struct SFNT_Interface_ + { + TT_Loader_GotoTableFunc goto_table; + + TT_Init_Face_Func init_face; + TT_Load_Face_Func load_face; + TT_Done_Face_Func done_face; + FT_Module_Requester get_interface; + + TT_Load_Any_Func load_any; + + /* these functions are called by `load_face' but they can also */ + /* be called from external modules, if there is a need to do so */ + TT_Load_Table_Func load_head; + TT_Load_Metrics_Func load_hhea; + TT_Load_Table_Func load_cmap; + TT_Load_Table_Func load_maxp; + TT_Load_Table_Func load_os2; + TT_Load_Table_Func load_post; + + TT_Load_Table_Func load_name; + TT_Free_Table_Func free_name; + + /* this field was called `load_kerning' up to version 2.1.10 */ + TT_Load_Table_Func load_kern; + + TT_Load_Table_Func load_gasp; + TT_Load_Table_Func load_pclt; + + /* see `ttload.h'; this field was called `load_bitmap_header' up to */ + /* version 2.1.10 */ + TT_Load_Table_Func load_bhed; + + TT_Load_SBit_Image_Func load_sbit_image; + + /* see `ttpost.h' */ + TT_Get_PS_Name_Func get_psname; + TT_Free_Table_Func free_psnames; + + /* starting here, the structure differs from version 2.1.7 */ + + /* this field was introduced in version 2.1.8, named `get_psname' */ + TT_Face_GetKerningFunc get_kerning; + + /* new elements introduced after version 2.1.10 */ + + /* load the font directory, i.e., the offset table and */ + /* the table directory */ + TT_Load_Table_Func load_font_dir; + TT_Load_Metrics_Func load_hmtx; + + TT_Load_Table_Func load_eblc; + TT_Free_Table_Func free_eblc; + + TT_Set_SBit_Strike_Func set_sbit_strike; + TT_Load_Strike_Metrics_Func load_strike_metrics; + + TT_Load_Table_Func load_cpal; + TT_Load_Table_Func load_colr; + TT_Free_Table_Func free_cpal; + TT_Free_Table_Func free_colr; + TT_Set_Palette_Func set_palette; + TT_Get_Colr_Layer_Func get_colr_layer; + TT_Blend_Colr_Func colr_blend; + + TT_Get_Metrics_Func get_metrics; + + TT_Get_Name_Func get_name; + TT_Get_Name_ID_Func get_name_id; + + } SFNT_Interface; + + + /* transitional */ + typedef SFNT_Interface* SFNT_Service; + + +#define FT_DEFINE_SFNT_INTERFACE( \ + class_, \ + goto_table_, \ + init_face_, \ + load_face_, \ + done_face_, \ + get_interface_, \ + load_any_, \ + load_head_, \ + load_hhea_, \ + load_cmap_, \ + load_maxp_, \ + load_os2_, \ + load_post_, \ + load_name_, \ + free_name_, \ + load_kern_, \ + load_gasp_, \ + load_pclt_, \ + load_bhed_, \ + load_sbit_image_, \ + get_psname_, \ + free_psnames_, \ + get_kerning_, \ + load_font_dir_, \ + load_hmtx_, \ + load_eblc_, \ + free_eblc_, \ + set_sbit_strike_, \ + load_strike_metrics_, \ + load_cpal_, \ + load_colr_, \ + free_cpal_, \ + free_colr_, \ + set_palette_, \ + get_colr_layer_, \ + colr_blend_, \ + get_metrics_, \ + get_name_, \ + get_name_id_ ) \ + static const SFNT_Interface class_ = \ + { \ + goto_table_, \ + init_face_, \ + load_face_, \ + done_face_, \ + get_interface_, \ + load_any_, \ + load_head_, \ + load_hhea_, \ + load_cmap_, \ + load_maxp_, \ + load_os2_, \ + load_post_, \ + load_name_, \ + free_name_, \ + load_kern_, \ + load_gasp_, \ + load_pclt_, \ + load_bhed_, \ + load_sbit_image_, \ + get_psname_, \ + free_psnames_, \ + get_kerning_, \ + load_font_dir_, \ + load_hmtx_, \ + load_eblc_, \ + free_eblc_, \ + set_sbit_strike_, \ + load_strike_metrics_, \ + load_cpal_, \ + load_colr_, \ + free_cpal_, \ + free_colr_, \ + set_palette_, \ + get_colr_layer_, \ + colr_blend_, \ + get_metrics_, \ + get_name_, \ + get_name_id_ \ + }; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* SFNT_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/t1types.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/t1types.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e197a1a --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/t1types.h @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * t1types.h + * + * Basic Type1/Type2 type definitions and interface (specification + * only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef T1TYPES_H_ +#define T1TYPES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_TYPE1_TABLES_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_POSTSCRIPT_HINTS_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_SERVICE_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_HASH_H +#include FT_SERVICE_POSTSCRIPT_CMAPS_H + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** REQUIRED TYPE1/TYPE2 TABLES DEFINITIONS ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * T1_EncodingRec + * + * @description: + * A structure modeling a custom encoding. + * + * @fields: + * num_chars :: + * The number of character codes in the encoding. Usually 256. + * + * code_first :: + * The lowest valid character code in the encoding. + * + * code_last :: + * The highest valid character code in the encoding + 1. When equal to + * code_first there are no valid character codes. + * + * char_index :: + * An array of corresponding glyph indices. + * + * char_name :: + * An array of corresponding glyph names. + */ + typedef struct T1_EncodingRecRec_ + { + FT_Int num_chars; + FT_Int code_first; + FT_Int code_last; + + FT_UShort* char_index; + FT_String** char_name; + + } T1_EncodingRec, *T1_Encoding; + + + /* used to hold extra data of PS_FontInfoRec that + * cannot be stored in the publicly defined structure. + * + * Note these can't be blended with multiple-masters. + */ + typedef struct PS_FontExtraRec_ + { + FT_UShort fs_type; + + } PS_FontExtraRec; + + + typedef struct T1_FontRec_ + { + PS_FontInfoRec font_info; /* font info dictionary */ + PS_FontExtraRec font_extra; /* font info extra fields */ + PS_PrivateRec private_dict; /* private dictionary */ + FT_String* font_name; /* top-level dictionary */ + + T1_EncodingType encoding_type; + T1_EncodingRec encoding; + + FT_Byte* subrs_block; + FT_Byte* charstrings_block; + FT_Byte* glyph_names_block; + + FT_Int num_subrs; + FT_Byte** subrs; + FT_UInt* subrs_len; + FT_Hash subrs_hash; + + FT_Int num_glyphs; + FT_String** glyph_names; /* array of glyph names */ + FT_Byte** charstrings; /* array of glyph charstrings */ + FT_UInt* charstrings_len; + + FT_Byte paint_type; + FT_Byte font_type; + FT_Matrix font_matrix; + FT_Vector font_offset; + FT_BBox font_bbox; + FT_Long font_id; + + FT_Fixed stroke_width; + + } T1_FontRec, *T1_Font; + + + typedef struct CID_SubrsRec_ + { + FT_Int num_subrs; + FT_Byte** code; + + } CID_SubrsRec, *CID_Subrs; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** AFM FONT INFORMATION STRUCTURES ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + typedef struct AFM_TrackKernRec_ + { + FT_Int degree; + FT_Fixed min_ptsize; + FT_Fixed min_kern; + FT_Fixed max_ptsize; + FT_Fixed max_kern; + + } AFM_TrackKernRec, *AFM_TrackKern; + + typedef struct AFM_KernPairRec_ + { + FT_UInt index1; + FT_UInt index2; + FT_Int x; + FT_Int y; + + } AFM_KernPairRec, *AFM_KernPair; + + typedef struct AFM_FontInfoRec_ + { + FT_Bool IsCIDFont; + FT_BBox FontBBox; + FT_Fixed Ascender; + FT_Fixed Descender; + AFM_TrackKern TrackKerns; /* free if non-NULL */ + FT_UInt NumTrackKern; + AFM_KernPair KernPairs; /* free if non-NULL */ + FT_UInt NumKernPair; + + } AFM_FontInfoRec, *AFM_FontInfo; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ORIGINAL T1_FACE CLASS DEFINITION ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + typedef struct T1_FaceRec_* T1_Face; + typedef struct CID_FaceRec_* CID_Face; + + + typedef struct T1_FaceRec_ + { + FT_FaceRec root; + T1_FontRec type1; + const void* psnames; + const void* psaux; + const void* afm_data; + FT_CharMapRec charmaprecs[2]; + FT_CharMap charmaps[2]; + + /* support for Multiple Masters fonts */ + PS_Blend blend; + + /* undocumented, optional: indices of subroutines that express */ + /* the NormalizeDesignVector and the ConvertDesignVector procedure, */ + /* respectively, as Type 2 charstrings; -1 if keywords not present */ + FT_Int ndv_idx; + FT_Int cdv_idx; + + /* undocumented, optional: has the same meaning as len_buildchar */ + /* for Type 2 fonts; manipulated by othersubrs 19, 24, and 25 */ + FT_UInt len_buildchar; + FT_Long* buildchar; + + /* since version 2.1 - interface to PostScript hinter */ + const void* pshinter; + + } T1_FaceRec; + + + typedef struct CID_FaceRec_ + { + FT_FaceRec root; + void* psnames; + void* psaux; + CID_FaceInfoRec cid; + PS_FontExtraRec font_extra; +#if 0 + void* afm_data; +#endif + CID_Subrs subrs; + + /* since version 2.1 - interface to PostScript hinter */ + void* pshinter; + + /* since version 2.1.8, but was originally positioned after `afm_data' */ + FT_Byte* binary_data; /* used if hex data has been converted */ + FT_Stream cid_stream; + + } CID_FaceRec; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* T1TYPES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/tttypes.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/tttypes.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e9f40e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/internal/tttypes.h @@ -0,0 +1,1854 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * tttypes.h + * + * Basic SFNT/TrueType type definitions and interface (specification + * only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef TTTYPES_H_ +#define TTTYPES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_TRUETYPE_TABLES_H +#include FT_INTERNAL_OBJECTS_H +#include FT_COLOR_H + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_GX_VAR_SUPPORT +#include FT_MULTIPLE_MASTERS_H +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** REQUIRED TRUETYPE/OPENTYPE TABLES DEFINITIONS ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TTC_HeaderRec + * + * @description: + * TrueType collection header. This table contains the offsets of the + * font headers of each distinct TrueType face in the file. + * + * @fields: + * tag :: + * Must be 'ttc~' to indicate a TrueType collection. + * + * version :: + * The version number. + * + * count :: + * The number of faces in the collection. The specification says this + * should be an unsigned long, but we use a signed long since we need + * the value -1 for specific purposes. + * + * offsets :: + * The offsets of the font headers, one per face. + */ + typedef struct TTC_HeaderRec_ + { + FT_ULong tag; + FT_Fixed version; + FT_Long count; + FT_ULong* offsets; + + } TTC_HeaderRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * SFNT_HeaderRec + * + * @description: + * SFNT file format header. + * + * @fields: + * format_tag :: + * The font format tag. + * + * num_tables :: + * The number of tables in file. + * + * search_range :: + * Must be '16 * (max power of 2 <= num_tables)'. + * + * entry_selector :: + * Must be log2 of 'search_range / 16'. + * + * range_shift :: + * Must be 'num_tables * 16 - search_range'. + */ + typedef struct SFNT_HeaderRec_ + { + FT_ULong format_tag; + FT_UShort num_tables; + FT_UShort search_range; + FT_UShort entry_selector; + FT_UShort range_shift; + + FT_ULong offset; /* not in file */ + + } SFNT_HeaderRec, *SFNT_Header; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_TableRec + * + * @description: + * This structure describes a given table of a TrueType font. + * + * @fields: + * Tag :: + * A four-bytes tag describing the table. + * + * CheckSum :: + * The table checksum. This value can be ignored. + * + * Offset :: + * The offset of the table from the start of the TrueType font in its + * resource. + * + * Length :: + * The table length (in bytes). + */ + typedef struct TT_TableRec_ + { + FT_ULong Tag; /* table type */ + FT_ULong CheckSum; /* table checksum */ + FT_ULong Offset; /* table file offset */ + FT_ULong Length; /* table length */ + + } TT_TableRec, *TT_Table; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * WOFF_HeaderRec + * + * @description: + * WOFF file format header. + * + * @fields: + * See + * + * https://www.w3.org/TR/WOFF/#WOFFHeader + */ + typedef struct WOFF_HeaderRec_ + { + FT_ULong signature; + FT_ULong flavor; + FT_ULong length; + FT_UShort num_tables; + FT_UShort reserved; + FT_ULong totalSfntSize; + FT_UShort majorVersion; + FT_UShort minorVersion; + FT_ULong metaOffset; + FT_ULong metaLength; + FT_ULong metaOrigLength; + FT_ULong privOffset; + FT_ULong privLength; + + } WOFF_HeaderRec, *WOFF_Header; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * WOFF_TableRec + * + * @description: + * This structure describes a given table of a WOFF font. + * + * @fields: + * Tag :: + * A four-bytes tag describing the table. + * + * Offset :: + * The offset of the table from the start of the WOFF font in its + * resource. + * + * CompLength :: + * Compressed table length (in bytes). + * + * OrigLength :: + * Uncompressed table length (in bytes). + * + * CheckSum :: + * The table checksum. This value can be ignored. + * + * OrigOffset :: + * The uncompressed table file offset. This value gets computed while + * constructing the (uncompressed) SFNT header. It is not contained in + * the WOFF file. + */ + typedef struct WOFF_TableRec_ + { + FT_ULong Tag; /* table ID */ + FT_ULong Offset; /* table file offset */ + FT_ULong CompLength; /* compressed table length */ + FT_ULong OrigLength; /* uncompressed table length */ + FT_ULong CheckSum; /* uncompressed checksum */ + + FT_ULong OrigOffset; /* uncompressed table file offset */ + /* (not in the WOFF file) */ + } WOFF_TableRec, *WOFF_Table; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_LongMetricsRec + * + * @description: + * A structure modeling the long metrics of the 'hmtx' and 'vmtx' + * TrueType tables. The values are expressed in font units. + * + * @fields: + * advance :: + * The advance width or height for the glyph. + * + * bearing :: + * The left-side or top-side bearing for the glyph. + */ + typedef struct TT_LongMetricsRec_ + { + FT_UShort advance; + FT_Short bearing; + + } TT_LongMetricsRec, *TT_LongMetrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * TT_ShortMetrics + * + * @description: + * A simple type to model the short metrics of the 'hmtx' and 'vmtx' + * tables. + */ + typedef FT_Short TT_ShortMetrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_NameRec + * + * @description: + * A structure modeling TrueType name records. Name records are used to + * store important strings like family name, style name, copyright, + * etc. in _localized_ versions (i.e., language, encoding, etc). + * + * @fields: + * platformID :: + * The ID of the name's encoding platform. + * + * encodingID :: + * The platform-specific ID for the name's encoding. + * + * languageID :: + * The platform-specific ID for the name's language. + * + * nameID :: + * The ID specifying what kind of name this is. + * + * stringLength :: + * The length of the string in bytes. + * + * stringOffset :: + * The offset to the string in the 'name' table. + * + * string :: + * A pointer to the string's bytes. Note that these are usually UTF-16 + * encoded characters. + */ + typedef struct TT_NameRec_ + { + FT_UShort platformID; + FT_UShort encodingID; + FT_UShort languageID; + FT_UShort nameID; + FT_UShort stringLength; + FT_ULong stringOffset; + + /* this last field is not defined in the spec */ + /* but used by the FreeType engine */ + + FT_Byte* string; + + } TT_NameRec, *TT_Name; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_LangTagRec + * + * @description: + * A structure modeling language tag records in SFNT 'name' tables, + * introduced in OpenType version 1.6. + * + * @fields: + * stringLength :: + * The length of the string in bytes. + * + * stringOffset :: + * The offset to the string in the 'name' table. + * + * string :: + * A pointer to the string's bytes. Note that these are UTF-16BE + * encoded characters. + */ + typedef struct TT_LangTagRec_ + { + FT_UShort stringLength; + FT_ULong stringOffset; + + /* this last field is not defined in the spec */ + /* but used by the FreeType engine */ + + FT_Byte* string; + + } TT_LangTagRec, *TT_LangTag; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_NameTableRec + * + * @description: + * A structure modeling the TrueType name table. + * + * @fields: + * format :: + * The format of the name table. + * + * numNameRecords :: + * The number of names in table. + * + * storageOffset :: + * The offset of the name table in the 'name' TrueType table. + * + * names :: + * An array of name records. + * + * numLangTagRecords :: + * The number of language tags in table. + * + * langTags :: + * An array of language tag records. + * + * stream :: + * The file's input stream. + */ + typedef struct TT_NameTableRec_ + { + FT_UShort format; + FT_UInt numNameRecords; + FT_UInt storageOffset; + TT_NameRec* names; + FT_UInt numLangTagRecords; + TT_LangTagRec* langTags; + FT_Stream stream; + + } TT_NameTableRec, *TT_NameTable; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** OPTIONAL TRUETYPE/OPENTYPE TABLES DEFINITIONS ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_GaspRangeRec + * + * @description: + * A tiny structure used to model a gasp range according to the TrueType + * specification. + * + * @fields: + * maxPPEM :: + * The maximum ppem value to which `gaspFlag` applies. + * + * gaspFlag :: + * A flag describing the grid-fitting and anti-aliasing modes to be + * used. + */ + typedef struct TT_GaspRangeRec_ + { + FT_UShort maxPPEM; + FT_UShort gaspFlag; + + } TT_GaspRangeRec, *TT_GaspRange; + + +#define TT_GASP_GRIDFIT 0x01 +#define TT_GASP_DOGRAY 0x02 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_GaspRec + * + * @description: + * A structure modeling the TrueType 'gasp' table used to specify + * grid-fitting and anti-aliasing behaviour. + * + * @fields: + * version :: + * The version number. + * + * numRanges :: + * The number of gasp ranges in table. + * + * gaspRanges :: + * An array of gasp ranges. + */ + typedef struct TT_Gasp_ + { + FT_UShort version; + FT_UShort numRanges; + TT_GaspRange gaspRanges; + + } TT_GaspRec; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** EMBEDDED BITMAPS SUPPORT ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_SBit_MetricsRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to hold the big metrics of a given glyph bitmap in a + * TrueType or OpenType font. These are usually found in the 'EBDT' + * (Microsoft) or 'bloc' (Apple) table. + * + * @fields: + * height :: + * The glyph height in pixels. + * + * width :: + * The glyph width in pixels. + * + * horiBearingX :: + * The horizontal left bearing. + * + * horiBearingY :: + * The horizontal top bearing. + * + * horiAdvance :: + * The horizontal advance. + * + * vertBearingX :: + * The vertical left bearing. + * + * vertBearingY :: + * The vertical top bearing. + * + * vertAdvance :: + * The vertical advance. + */ + typedef struct TT_SBit_MetricsRec_ + { + FT_UShort height; + FT_UShort width; + + FT_Short horiBearingX; + FT_Short horiBearingY; + FT_UShort horiAdvance; + + FT_Short vertBearingX; + FT_Short vertBearingY; + FT_UShort vertAdvance; + + } TT_SBit_MetricsRec, *TT_SBit_Metrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_SBit_SmallMetricsRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to hold the small metrics of a given glyph bitmap in + * a TrueType or OpenType font. These are usually found in the 'EBDT' + * (Microsoft) or the 'bdat' (Apple) table. + * + * @fields: + * height :: + * The glyph height in pixels. + * + * width :: + * The glyph width in pixels. + * + * bearingX :: + * The left-side bearing. + * + * bearingY :: + * The top-side bearing. + * + * advance :: + * The advance width or height. + */ + typedef struct TT_SBit_Small_Metrics_ + { + FT_Byte height; + FT_Byte width; + + FT_Char bearingX; + FT_Char bearingY; + FT_Byte advance; + + } TT_SBit_SmallMetricsRec, *TT_SBit_SmallMetrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_SBit_LineMetricsRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to describe the text line metrics of a given bitmap + * strike, for either a horizontal or vertical layout. + * + * @fields: + * ascender :: + * The ascender in pixels. + * + * descender :: + * The descender in pixels. + * + * max_width :: + * The maximum glyph width in pixels. + * + * caret_slope_enumerator :: + * Rise of the caret slope, typically set to 1 for non-italic fonts. + * + * caret_slope_denominator :: + * Rise of the caret slope, typically set to 0 for non-italic fonts. + * + * caret_offset :: + * Offset in pixels to move the caret for proper positioning. + * + * min_origin_SB :: + * Minimum of horiBearingX (resp. vertBearingY). + * min_advance_SB :: + * Minimum of + * + * horizontal advance - ( horiBearingX + width ) + * + * resp. + * + * vertical advance - ( vertBearingY + height ) + * + * max_before_BL :: + * Maximum of horiBearingY (resp. vertBearingY). + * + * min_after_BL :: + * Minimum of + * + * horiBearingY - height + * + * resp. + * + * vertBearingX - width + * + * pads :: + * Unused (to make the size of the record a multiple of 32 bits. + */ + typedef struct TT_SBit_LineMetricsRec_ + { + FT_Char ascender; + FT_Char descender; + FT_Byte max_width; + FT_Char caret_slope_numerator; + FT_Char caret_slope_denominator; + FT_Char caret_offset; + FT_Char min_origin_SB; + FT_Char min_advance_SB; + FT_Char max_before_BL; + FT_Char min_after_BL; + FT_Char pads[2]; + + } TT_SBit_LineMetricsRec, *TT_SBit_LineMetrics; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_SBit_RangeRec + * + * @description: + * A TrueType/OpenType subIndexTable as defined in the 'EBLC' (Microsoft) + * or 'bloc' (Apple) tables. + * + * @fields: + * first_glyph :: + * The first glyph index in the range. + * + * last_glyph :: + * The last glyph index in the range. + * + * index_format :: + * The format of index table. Valid values are 1 to 5. + * + * image_format :: + * The format of 'EBDT' image data. + * + * image_offset :: + * The offset to image data in 'EBDT'. + * + * image_size :: + * For index formats 2 and 5. This is the size in bytes of each glyph + * bitmap. + * + * big_metrics :: + * For index formats 2 and 5. This is the big metrics for each glyph + * bitmap. + * + * num_glyphs :: + * For index formats 4 and 5. This is the number of glyphs in the code + * array. + * + * glyph_offsets :: + * For index formats 1 and 3. + * + * glyph_codes :: + * For index formats 4 and 5. + * + * table_offset :: + * The offset of the index table in the 'EBLC' table. Only used during + * strike loading. + */ + typedef struct TT_SBit_RangeRec_ + { + FT_UShort first_glyph; + FT_UShort last_glyph; + + FT_UShort index_format; + FT_UShort image_format; + FT_ULong image_offset; + + FT_ULong image_size; + TT_SBit_MetricsRec metrics; + FT_ULong num_glyphs; + + FT_ULong* glyph_offsets; + FT_UShort* glyph_codes; + + FT_ULong table_offset; + + } TT_SBit_RangeRec, *TT_SBit_Range; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_SBit_StrikeRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used describe a given bitmap strike in the 'EBLC' + * (Microsoft) or 'bloc' (Apple) tables. + * + * @fields: + * num_index_ranges :: + * The number of index ranges. + * + * index_ranges :: + * An array of glyph index ranges. + * + * color_ref :: + * Unused. `color_ref` is put in for future enhancements, but these + * fields are already in use by other platforms (e.g. Newton). For + * details, please see + * + * https://developer.apple.com/fonts/TrueType-Reference-Manual/RM06/Chap6bloc.html + * + * hori :: + * The line metrics for horizontal layouts. + * + * vert :: + * The line metrics for vertical layouts. + * + * start_glyph :: + * The lowest glyph index for this strike. + * + * end_glyph :: + * The highest glyph index for this strike. + * + * x_ppem :: + * The number of horizontal pixels per EM. + * + * y_ppem :: + * The number of vertical pixels per EM. + * + * bit_depth :: + * The bit depth. Valid values are 1, 2, 4, and 8. + * + * flags :: + * Is this a vertical or horizontal strike? For details, please see + * + * https://developer.apple.com/fonts/TrueType-Reference-Manual/RM06/Chap6bloc.html + */ + typedef struct TT_SBit_StrikeRec_ + { + FT_Int num_ranges; + TT_SBit_Range sbit_ranges; + FT_ULong ranges_offset; + + FT_ULong color_ref; + + TT_SBit_LineMetricsRec hori; + TT_SBit_LineMetricsRec vert; + + FT_UShort start_glyph; + FT_UShort end_glyph; + + FT_Byte x_ppem; + FT_Byte y_ppem; + + FT_Byte bit_depth; + FT_Char flags; + + } TT_SBit_StrikeRec, *TT_SBit_Strike; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_SBit_ComponentRec + * + * @description: + * A simple structure to describe a compound sbit element. + * + * @fields: + * glyph_code :: + * The element's glyph index. + * + * x_offset :: + * The element's left bearing. + * + * y_offset :: + * The element's top bearing. + */ + typedef struct TT_SBit_ComponentRec_ + { + FT_UShort glyph_code; + FT_Char x_offset; + FT_Char y_offset; + + } TT_SBit_ComponentRec, *TT_SBit_Component; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_SBit_ScaleRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used describe a given bitmap scaling table, as defined in + * the 'EBSC' table. + * + * @fields: + * hori :: + * The horizontal line metrics. + * + * vert :: + * The vertical line metrics. + * + * x_ppem :: + * The number of horizontal pixels per EM. + * + * y_ppem :: + * The number of vertical pixels per EM. + * + * x_ppem_substitute :: + * Substitution x_ppem value. + * + * y_ppem_substitute :: + * Substitution y_ppem value. + */ + typedef struct TT_SBit_ScaleRec_ + { + TT_SBit_LineMetricsRec hori; + TT_SBit_LineMetricsRec vert; + + FT_Byte x_ppem; + FT_Byte y_ppem; + + FT_Byte x_ppem_substitute; + FT_Byte y_ppem_substitute; + + } TT_SBit_ScaleRec, *TT_SBit_Scale; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** POSTSCRIPT GLYPH NAMES SUPPORT ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_Post_20Rec + * + * @description: + * Postscript names sub-table, format 2.0. Stores the PS name of each + * glyph in the font face. + * + * @fields: + * num_glyphs :: + * The number of named glyphs in the table. + * + * num_names :: + * The number of PS names stored in the table. + * + * glyph_indices :: + * The indices of the glyphs in the names arrays. + * + * glyph_names :: + * The PS names not in Mac Encoding. + */ + typedef struct TT_Post_20Rec_ + { + FT_UShort num_glyphs; + FT_UShort num_names; + FT_UShort* glyph_indices; + FT_Char** glyph_names; + + } TT_Post_20Rec, *TT_Post_20; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_Post_25Rec + * + * @description: + * Postscript names sub-table, format 2.5. Stores the PS name of each + * glyph in the font face. + * + * @fields: + * num_glyphs :: + * The number of glyphs in the table. + * + * offsets :: + * An array of signed offsets in a normal Mac Postscript name encoding. + */ + typedef struct TT_Post_25_ + { + FT_UShort num_glyphs; + FT_Char* offsets; + + } TT_Post_25Rec, *TT_Post_25; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_Post_NamesRec + * + * @description: + * Postscript names table, either format 2.0 or 2.5. + * + * @fields: + * loaded :: + * A flag to indicate whether the PS names are loaded. + * + * format_20 :: + * The sub-table used for format 2.0. + * + * format_25 :: + * The sub-table used for format 2.5. + */ + typedef struct TT_Post_NamesRec_ + { + FT_Bool loaded; + + union + { + TT_Post_20Rec format_20; + TT_Post_25Rec format_25; + + } names; + + } TT_Post_NamesRec, *TT_Post_Names; + + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** GX VARIATION TABLE SUPPORT ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_GX_VAR_SUPPORT + typedef struct GX_BlendRec_ *GX_Blend; +#endif + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** EMBEDDED BDF PROPERTIES TABLE SUPPORT ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + /* + * These types are used to support a `BDF ' table that isn't part of the + * official TrueType specification. It is mainly used in SFNT-based bitmap + * fonts that were generated from a set of BDF fonts. + * + * The format of the table is as follows. + * + * USHORT version `BDF ' table version number, should be 0x0001. USHORT + * strikeCount Number of strikes (bitmap sizes) in this table. ULONG + * stringTable Offset (from start of BDF table) to string + * table. + * + * This is followed by an array of `strikeCount' descriptors, having the + * following format. + * + * USHORT ppem Vertical pixels per EM for this strike. USHORT numItems + * Number of items for this strike (properties and + * atoms). Maximum is 255. + * + * This array in turn is followed by `strikeCount' value sets. Each `value + * set' is an array of `numItems' items with the following format. + * + * ULONG item_name Offset in string table to item name. + * USHORT item_type The item type. Possible values are + * 0 => string (e.g., COMMENT) + * 1 => atom (e.g., FONT or even SIZE) + * 2 => int32 + * 3 => uint32 + * 0x10 => A flag to indicate a properties. This + * is ORed with the above values. + * ULONG item_value For strings => Offset into string table without + * the corresponding double quotes. + * For atoms => Offset into string table. + * For integers => Direct value. + * + * All strings in the string table consist of bytes and are + * zero-terminated. + * + */ + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BDF + + typedef struct TT_BDFRec_ + { + FT_Byte* table; + FT_Byte* table_end; + FT_Byte* strings; + FT_ULong strings_size; + FT_UInt num_strikes; + FT_Bool loaded; + + } TT_BDFRec, *TT_BDF; + +#endif /* TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BDF */ + + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ORIGINAL TT_FACE CLASS DEFINITION ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*** ***/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + /*************************************************************************/ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This structure/class is defined here because it is common to the + * following formats: TTF, OpenType-TT, and OpenType-CFF. + * + * Note, however, that the classes TT_Size and TT_GlyphSlot are not shared + * between font drivers, and are thus defined in `ttobjs.h`. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * TT_Face + * + * @description: + * A handle to a TrueType face/font object. A TT_Face encapsulates the + * resolution and scaling independent parts of a TrueType font resource. + * + * @note: + * The TT_Face structure is also used as a 'parent class' for the + * OpenType-CFF class (T2_Face). + */ + typedef struct TT_FaceRec_* TT_Face; + + + /* a function type used for the truetype bytecode interpreter hooks */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Interpreter)( void* exec_context ); + + /* forward declaration */ + typedef struct TT_LoaderRec_* TT_Loader; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Loader_GotoTableFunc + * + * @description: + * Seeks a stream to the start of a given TrueType table. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the target face object. + * + * tag :: + * A 4-byte tag used to name the table. + * + * stream :: + * The input stream. + * + * @output: + * length :: + * The length of the table in bytes. Set to 0 if not needed. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * The stream cursor must be at the font file's origin. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Loader_GotoTableFunc)( TT_Face face, + FT_ULong tag, + FT_Stream stream, + FT_ULong* length ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Loader_StartGlyphFunc + * + * @description: + * Seeks a stream to the start of a given glyph element, and opens a + * frame for it. + * + * @input: + * loader :: + * The current TrueType glyph loader object. + * + * glyph index :: The index of the glyph to access. + * + * offset :: + * The offset of the glyph according to the 'locations' table. + * + * byte_count :: + * The size of the frame in bytes. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + * + * @note: + * This function is normally equivalent to FT_STREAM_SEEK(offset) + * followed by FT_FRAME_ENTER(byte_count) with the loader's stream, but + * alternative formats (e.g. compressed ones) might use something + * different. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Loader_StartGlyphFunc)( TT_Loader loader, + FT_UInt glyph_index, + FT_ULong offset, + FT_UInt byte_count ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Loader_ReadGlyphFunc + * + * @description: + * Reads one glyph element (its header, a simple glyph, or a composite) + * from the loader's current stream frame. + * + * @input: + * loader :: + * The current TrueType glyph loader object. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0 means success. + */ + typedef FT_Error + (*TT_Loader_ReadGlyphFunc)( TT_Loader loader ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @functype: + * TT_Loader_EndGlyphFunc + * + * @description: + * Closes the current loader stream frame for the glyph. + * + * @input: + * loader :: + * The current TrueType glyph loader object. + */ + typedef void + (*TT_Loader_EndGlyphFunc)( TT_Loader loader ); + + + typedef enum TT_SbitTableType_ + { + TT_SBIT_TABLE_TYPE_NONE = 0, + TT_SBIT_TABLE_TYPE_EBLC, /* `EBLC' (Microsoft), */ + /* `bloc' (Apple) */ + TT_SBIT_TABLE_TYPE_CBLC, /* `CBLC' (Google) */ + TT_SBIT_TABLE_TYPE_SBIX, /* `sbix' (Apple) */ + + /* do not remove */ + TT_SBIT_TABLE_TYPE_MAX + + } TT_SbitTableType; + + + /* OpenType 1.8 brings new tables for variation font support; */ + /* to make the old MM and GX fonts still work we need to check */ + /* the presence (and validity) of the functionality provided */ + /* by those tables. The following flag macros are for the */ + /* field `variation_support'. */ + /* */ + /* Note that `fvar' gets checked immediately at font loading, */ + /* while the other features are only loaded if MM support is */ + /* actually requested. */ + + /* FVAR */ +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_FVAR ( 1 << 0 ) + + /* HVAR */ +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_HADVANCE ( 1 << 1 ) +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_LSB ( 1 << 2 ) +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_RSB ( 1 << 3 ) + + /* VVAR */ +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_VADVANCE ( 1 << 4 ) +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_TSB ( 1 << 5 ) +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_BSB ( 1 << 6 ) +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_VORG ( 1 << 7 ) + + /* MVAR */ +#define TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_MVAR ( 1 << 8 ) + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * TrueType Face Type + * + * @struct: + * TT_Face + * + * @description: + * The TrueType face class. These objects model the resolution and + * point-size independent data found in a TrueType font file. + * + * @fields: + * root :: + * The base FT_Face structure, managed by the base layer. + * + * ttc_header :: + * The TrueType collection header, used when the file is a 'ttc' rather + * than a 'ttf'. For ordinary font files, the field `ttc_header.count` + * is set to 0. + * + * format_tag :: + * The font format tag. + * + * num_tables :: + * The number of TrueType tables in this font file. + * + * dir_tables :: + * The directory of TrueType tables for this font file. + * + * header :: + * The font's font header ('head' table). Read on font opening. + * + * horizontal :: + * The font's horizontal header ('hhea' table). This field also + * contains the associated horizontal metrics table ('hmtx'). + * + * max_profile :: + * The font's maximum profile table. Read on font opening. Note that + * some maximum values cannot be taken directly from this table. We + * thus define additional fields below to hold the computed maxima. + * + * vertical_info :: + * A boolean which is set when the font file contains vertical metrics. + * If not, the value of the 'vertical' field is undefined. + * + * vertical :: + * The font's vertical header ('vhea' table). This field also contains + * the associated vertical metrics table ('vmtx'), if found. + * IMPORTANT: The contents of this field is undefined if the + * `vertical_info` field is unset. + * + * num_names :: + * The number of name records within this TrueType font. + * + * name_table :: + * The table of name records ('name'). + * + * os2 :: + * The font's OS/2 table ('OS/2'). + * + * postscript :: + * The font's PostScript table ('post' table). The PostScript glyph + * names are not loaded by the driver on face opening. See the + * 'ttpost' module for more details. + * + * cmap_table :: + * Address of the face's 'cmap' SFNT table in memory (it's an extracted + * frame). + * + * cmap_size :: + * The size in bytes of the `cmap_table` described above. + * + * goto_table :: + * A function called by each TrueType table loader to position a + * stream's cursor to the start of a given table according to its tag. + * It defaults to TT_Goto_Face but can be different for strange formats + * (e.g. Type 42). + * + * access_glyph_frame :: + * A function used to access the frame of a given glyph within the + * face's font file. + * + * forget_glyph_frame :: + * A function used to forget the frame of a given glyph when all data + * has been loaded. + * + * read_glyph_header :: + * A function used to read a glyph header. It must be called between + * an 'access' and 'forget'. + * + * read_simple_glyph :: + * A function used to read a simple glyph. It must be called after the + * header was read, and before the 'forget'. + * + * read_composite_glyph :: + * A function used to read a composite glyph. It must be called after + * the header was read, and before the 'forget'. + * + * sfnt :: + * A pointer to the SFNT service. + * + * psnames :: + * A pointer to the PostScript names service. + * + * mm :: + * A pointer to the Multiple Masters service. + * + * var :: + * A pointer to the Metrics Variations service. + * + * hdmx :: + * The face's horizontal device metrics ('hdmx' table). This table is + * optional in TrueType/OpenType fonts. + * + * gasp :: + * The grid-fitting and scaling properties table ('gasp'). This table + * is optional in TrueType/OpenType fonts. + * + * pclt :: + * The 'pclt' SFNT table. + * + * num_sbit_scales :: + * The number of sbit scales for this font. + * + * sbit_scales :: + * Array of sbit scales embedded in this font. This table is optional + * in a TrueType/OpenType font. + * + * postscript_names :: + * A table used to store the Postscript names of the glyphs for this + * font. See the file `ttconfig.h` for comments on the + * TT_CONFIG_OPTION_POSTSCRIPT_NAMES option. + * + * palette_data :: + * Some fields from the 'CPAL' table that are directly indexed. + * + * palette_index :: + * The current palette index, as set by @FT_Palette_Select. + * + * palette :: + * An array containing the current palette's colors. + * + * have_foreground_color :: + * There was a call to @FT_Palette_Set_Foreground_Color. + * + * foreground_color :: + * The current foreground color corresponding to 'CPAL' color index + * 0xFFFF. Only valid if `have_foreground_color` is set. + * + * font_program_size :: + * Size in bytecodes of the face's font program. 0 if none defined. + * Ignored for Type 2 fonts. + * + * font_program :: + * The face's font program (bytecode stream) executed at load time, + * also used during glyph rendering. Comes from the 'fpgm' table. + * Ignored for Type 2 font fonts. + * + * cvt_program_size :: + * The size in bytecodes of the face's cvt program. Ignored for Type 2 + * fonts. + * + * cvt_program :: + * The face's cvt program (bytecode stream) executed each time an + * instance/size is changed/reset. Comes from the 'prep' table. + * Ignored for Type 2 fonts. + * + * cvt_size :: + * Size of the control value table (in entries). Ignored for Type 2 + * fonts. + * + * cvt :: + * The face's original control value table. Coordinates are expressed + * in unscaled font units. Comes from the 'cvt~' table. Ignored for + * Type 2 fonts. + * + * interpreter :: + * A pointer to the TrueType bytecode interpreters field is also used + * to hook the debugger in 'ttdebug'. + * + * extra :: + * Reserved for third-party font drivers. + * + * postscript_name :: + * The PS name of the font. Used by the postscript name service. + * + * glyf_len :: + * The length of the 'glyf' table. Needed for malformed 'loca' tables. + * + * glyf_offset :: + * The file offset of the 'glyf' table. + * + * is_cff2 :: + * Set if the font format is CFF2. + * + * doblend :: + * A boolean which is set if the font should be blended (this is for GX + * var). + * + * blend :: + * Contains the data needed to control GX variation tables (rather like + * Multiple Master data). + * + * variation_support :: + * Flags that indicate which OpenType functionality related to font + * variation support is present, valid, and usable. For example, + * TT_FACE_FLAG_VAR_FVAR is only set if we have at least one design + * axis. + * + * var_postscript_prefix :: + * The PostScript name prefix needed for constructing a variation font + * instance's PS name . + * + * var_postscript_prefix_len :: + * The length of the `var_postscript_prefix` string. + * + * horz_metrics_size :: + * The size of the 'hmtx' table. + * + * vert_metrics_size :: + * The size of the 'vmtx' table. + * + * num_locations :: + * The number of glyph locations in this TrueType file. This should be + * identical to the number of glyphs. Ignored for Type 2 fonts. + * + * glyph_locations :: + * An array of longs. These are offsets to glyph data within the + * 'glyf' table. Ignored for Type 2 font faces. + * + * hdmx_table :: + * A pointer to the 'hdmx' table. + * + * hdmx_table_size :: + * The size of the 'hdmx' table. + * + * hdmx_record_count :: + * The number of hdmx records. + * + * hdmx_record_size :: + * The size of a single hdmx record. + * + * hdmx_record_sizes :: + * An array holding the ppem sizes available in the 'hdmx' table. + * + * sbit_table :: + * A pointer to the font's embedded bitmap location table. + * + * sbit_table_size :: + * The size of `sbit_table`. + * + * sbit_table_type :: + * The sbit table type (CBLC, sbix, etc.). + * + * sbit_num_strikes :: + * The number of sbit strikes exposed by FreeType's API, omitting + * invalid strikes. + * + * sbit_strike_map :: + * A mapping between the strike indices exposed by the API and the + * indices used in the font's sbit table. + * + * cpal :: + * A pointer to data related to the 'CPAL' table. `NULL` if the table + * is not available. + * + * colr :: + * A pointer to data related to the 'COLR' table. `NULL` if the table + * is not available. + * + * kern_table :: + * A pointer to the 'kern' table. + * + * kern_table_size :: + * The size of the 'kern' table. + * + * num_kern_tables :: + * The number of supported kern subtables (up to 32; FreeType + * recognizes only horizontal ones with format 0). + * + * kern_avail_bits :: + * The availability status of kern subtables; if bit n is set, table n + * is available. + * + * kern_order_bits :: + * The sortedness status of kern subtables; if bit n is set, table n is + * sorted. + * + * bdf :: + * Data related to an SFNT font's 'bdf' table; see `tttypes.h`. + * + * horz_metrics_offset :: + * The file offset of the 'hmtx' table. + * + * vert_metrics_offset :: + * The file offset of the 'vmtx' table. + * + * sph_found_func_flags :: + * Flags identifying special bytecode functions (used by the v38 + * implementation of the bytecode interpreter). + * + * sph_compatibility_mode :: + * This flag is set if we are in ClearType backward compatibility mode + * (used by the v38 implementation of the bytecode interpreter). + * + * ebdt_start :: + * The file offset of the sbit data table (CBDT, bdat, etc.). + * + * ebdt_size :: + * The size of the sbit data table. + */ + typedef struct TT_FaceRec_ + { + FT_FaceRec root; + + TTC_HeaderRec ttc_header; + + FT_ULong format_tag; + FT_UShort num_tables; + TT_Table dir_tables; + + TT_Header header; /* TrueType header table */ + TT_HoriHeader horizontal; /* TrueType horizontal header */ + + TT_MaxProfile max_profile; + + FT_Bool vertical_info; + TT_VertHeader vertical; /* TT Vertical header, if present */ + + FT_UShort num_names; /* number of name records */ + TT_NameTableRec name_table; /* name table */ + + TT_OS2 os2; /* TrueType OS/2 table */ + TT_Postscript postscript; /* TrueType Postscript table */ + + FT_Byte* cmap_table; /* extracted `cmap' table */ + FT_ULong cmap_size; + + TT_Loader_GotoTableFunc goto_table; + + TT_Loader_StartGlyphFunc access_glyph_frame; + TT_Loader_EndGlyphFunc forget_glyph_frame; + TT_Loader_ReadGlyphFunc read_glyph_header; + TT_Loader_ReadGlyphFunc read_simple_glyph; + TT_Loader_ReadGlyphFunc read_composite_glyph; + + /* a typeless pointer to the SFNT_Interface table used to load */ + /* the basic TrueType tables in the face object */ + void* sfnt; + + /* a typeless pointer to the FT_Service_PsCMapsRec table used to */ + /* handle glyph names <-> unicode & Mac values */ + void* psnames; + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_GX_VAR_SUPPORT + /* a typeless pointer to the FT_Service_MultiMasters table used to */ + /* handle variation fonts */ + void* mm; + + /* a typeless pointer to the FT_Service_MetricsVariationsRec table */ + /* used to handle the HVAR, VVAR, and MVAR OpenType tables */ + void* var; +#endif + + /* a typeless pointer to the PostScript Aux service */ + void* psaux; + + + /************************************************************************ + * + * Optional TrueType/OpenType tables + * + */ + + /* grid-fitting and scaling table */ + TT_GaspRec gasp; /* the `gasp' table */ + + /* PCL 5 table */ + TT_PCLT pclt; + + /* embedded bitmaps support */ + FT_ULong num_sbit_scales; + TT_SBit_Scale sbit_scales; + + /* postscript names table */ + TT_Post_NamesRec postscript_names; + + /* glyph colors */ + FT_Palette_Data palette_data; /* since 2.10 */ + FT_UShort palette_index; + FT_Color* palette; + FT_Bool have_foreground_color; + FT_Color foreground_color; + + + /************************************************************************ + * + * TrueType-specific fields (ignored by the CFF driver) + * + */ + + /* the font program, if any */ + FT_ULong font_program_size; + FT_Byte* font_program; + + /* the cvt program, if any */ + FT_ULong cvt_program_size; + FT_Byte* cvt_program; + + /* the original, unscaled, control value table */ + FT_ULong cvt_size; + FT_Short* cvt; + + /* A pointer to the bytecode interpreter to use. This is also */ + /* used to hook the debugger for the `ttdebug' utility. */ + TT_Interpreter interpreter; + + + /************************************************************************ + * + * Other tables or fields. This is used by derivative formats like + * OpenType. + * + */ + + FT_Generic extra; + + const char* postscript_name; + + FT_ULong glyf_len; + FT_ULong glyf_offset; /* since 2.7.1 */ + + FT_Bool is_cff2; /* since 2.7.1 */ + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_GX_VAR_SUPPORT + FT_Bool doblend; + GX_Blend blend; + + FT_UInt32 variation_support; /* since 2.7.1 */ + + const char* var_postscript_prefix; /* since 2.7.2 */ + FT_UInt var_postscript_prefix_len; /* since 2.7.2 */ + +#endif + + /* since version 2.2 */ + + FT_ULong horz_metrics_size; + FT_ULong vert_metrics_size; + + FT_ULong num_locations; /* in broken TTF, gid > 0xFFFF */ + FT_Byte* glyph_locations; + + FT_Byte* hdmx_table; + FT_ULong hdmx_table_size; + FT_UInt hdmx_record_count; + FT_ULong hdmx_record_size; + FT_Byte* hdmx_record_sizes; + + FT_Byte* sbit_table; + FT_ULong sbit_table_size; + TT_SbitTableType sbit_table_type; + FT_UInt sbit_num_strikes; + FT_UInt* sbit_strike_map; + + FT_Byte* kern_table; + FT_ULong kern_table_size; + FT_UInt num_kern_tables; + FT_UInt32 kern_avail_bits; + FT_UInt32 kern_order_bits; + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BDF + TT_BDFRec bdf; +#endif /* TT_CONFIG_OPTION_BDF */ + + /* since 2.3.0 */ + FT_ULong horz_metrics_offset; + FT_ULong vert_metrics_offset; + +#ifdef TT_SUPPORT_SUBPIXEL_HINTING_INFINALITY + /* since 2.4.12 */ + FT_ULong sph_found_func_flags; /* special functions found */ + /* for this face */ + FT_Bool sph_compatibility_mode; +#endif /* TT_SUPPORT_SUBPIXEL_HINTING_INFINALITY */ + +#ifdef TT_CONFIG_OPTION_EMBEDDED_BITMAPS + /* since 2.7 */ + FT_ULong ebdt_start; /* either `CBDT', `EBDT', or `bdat' */ + FT_ULong ebdt_size; +#endif + + /* since 2.10 */ + void* cpal; + void* colr; + + } TT_FaceRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_GlyphZoneRec + * + * @description: + * A glyph zone is used to load, scale and hint glyph outline + * coordinates. + * + * @fields: + * memory :: + * A handle to the memory manager. + * + * max_points :: + * The maximum size in points of the zone. + * + * max_contours :: + * Max size in links contours of the zone. + * + * n_points :: + * The current number of points in the zone. + * + * n_contours :: + * The current number of contours in the zone. + * + * org :: + * The original glyph coordinates (font units/scaled). + * + * cur :: + * The current glyph coordinates (scaled/hinted). + * + * tags :: + * The point control tags. + * + * contours :: + * The contours end points. + * + * first_point :: + * Offset of the current subglyph's first point. + */ + typedef struct TT_GlyphZoneRec_ + { + FT_Memory memory; + FT_UShort max_points; + FT_Short max_contours; + FT_UShort n_points; /* number of points in zone */ + FT_Short n_contours; /* number of contours */ + + FT_Vector* org; /* original point coordinates */ + FT_Vector* cur; /* current point coordinates */ + FT_Vector* orus; /* original (unscaled) point coordinates */ + + FT_Byte* tags; /* current touch flags */ + FT_UShort* contours; /* contour end points */ + + FT_UShort first_point; /* offset of first (#0) point */ + + } TT_GlyphZoneRec, *TT_GlyphZone; + + + /* handle to execution context */ + typedef struct TT_ExecContextRec_* TT_ExecContext; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @type: + * TT_Size + * + * @description: + * A handle to a TrueType size object. + */ + typedef struct TT_SizeRec_* TT_Size; + + + /* glyph loader structure */ + typedef struct TT_LoaderRec_ + { + TT_Face face; + TT_Size size; + FT_GlyphSlot glyph; + FT_GlyphLoader gloader; + + FT_ULong load_flags; + FT_UInt glyph_index; + + FT_Stream stream; + FT_Int byte_len; + + FT_Short n_contours; + FT_BBox bbox; + FT_Int left_bearing; + FT_Int advance; + FT_Int linear; + FT_Bool linear_def; + FT_Vector pp1; + FT_Vector pp2; + + /* the zone where we load our glyphs */ + TT_GlyphZoneRec base; + TT_GlyphZoneRec zone; + + TT_ExecContext exec; + FT_Byte* instructions; + FT_ULong ins_pos; + + /* for possible extensibility in other formats */ + void* other; + + /* since version 2.1.8 */ + FT_Int top_bearing; + FT_Int vadvance; + FT_Vector pp3; + FT_Vector pp4; + + /* since version 2.2.1 */ + FT_Byte* cursor; + FT_Byte* limit; + + /* since version 2.6.2 */ + FT_ListRec composites; + + } TT_LoaderRec; + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* TTTYPES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/t1tables.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/t1tables.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..645e645 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/t1tables.h @@ -0,0 +1,774 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * t1tables.h + * + * Basic Type 1/Type 2 tables definitions and interface (specification + * only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef T1TABLES_H_ +#define T1TABLES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * type1_tables + * + * @title: + * Type 1 Tables + * + * @abstract: + * Type~1-specific font tables. + * + * @description: + * This section contains the definition of Type~1-specific tables, + * including structures related to other PostScript font formats. + * + * @order: + * PS_FontInfoRec + * PS_FontInfo + * PS_PrivateRec + * PS_Private + * + * CID_FaceDictRec + * CID_FaceDict + * CID_FaceInfoRec + * CID_FaceInfo + * + * FT_Has_PS_Glyph_Names + * FT_Get_PS_Font_Info + * FT_Get_PS_Font_Private + * FT_Get_PS_Font_Value + * + * T1_Blend_Flags + * T1_EncodingType + * PS_Dict_Keys + * + */ + + + /* Note that we separate font data in PS_FontInfoRec and PS_PrivateRec */ + /* structures in order to support Multiple Master fonts. */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_FontInfoRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to model a Type~1 or Type~2 FontInfo dictionary. + * Note that for Multiple Master fonts, each instance has its own + * FontInfo dictionary. + */ + typedef struct PS_FontInfoRec_ + { + FT_String* version; + FT_String* notice; + FT_String* full_name; + FT_String* family_name; + FT_String* weight; + FT_Long italic_angle; + FT_Bool is_fixed_pitch; + FT_Short underline_position; + FT_UShort underline_thickness; + + } PS_FontInfoRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_FontInfo + * + * @description: + * A handle to a @PS_FontInfoRec structure. + */ + typedef struct PS_FontInfoRec_* PS_FontInfo; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * T1_FontInfo + * + * @description: + * This type is equivalent to @PS_FontInfoRec. It is deprecated but kept + * to maintain source compatibility between various versions of FreeType. + */ + typedef PS_FontInfoRec T1_FontInfo; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_PrivateRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to model a Type~1 or Type~2 private dictionary. Note + * that for Multiple Master fonts, each instance has its own Private + * dictionary. + */ + typedef struct PS_PrivateRec_ + { + FT_Int unique_id; + FT_Int lenIV; + + FT_Byte num_blue_values; + FT_Byte num_other_blues; + FT_Byte num_family_blues; + FT_Byte num_family_other_blues; + + FT_Short blue_values[14]; + FT_Short other_blues[10]; + + FT_Short family_blues [14]; + FT_Short family_other_blues[10]; + + FT_Fixed blue_scale; + FT_Int blue_shift; + FT_Int blue_fuzz; + + FT_UShort standard_width[1]; + FT_UShort standard_height[1]; + + FT_Byte num_snap_widths; + FT_Byte num_snap_heights; + FT_Bool force_bold; + FT_Bool round_stem_up; + + FT_Short snap_widths [13]; /* including std width */ + FT_Short snap_heights[13]; /* including std height */ + + FT_Fixed expansion_factor; + + FT_Long language_group; + FT_Long password; + + FT_Short min_feature[2]; + + } PS_PrivateRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * PS_Private + * + * @description: + * A handle to a @PS_PrivateRec structure. + */ + typedef struct PS_PrivateRec_* PS_Private; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * T1_Private + * + * @description: + * This type is equivalent to @PS_PrivateRec. It is deprecated but kept + * to maintain source compatibility between various versions of FreeType. + */ + typedef PS_PrivateRec T1_Private; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * T1_Blend_Flags + * + * @description: + * A set of flags used to indicate which fields are present in a given + * blend dictionary (font info or private). Used to support Multiple + * Masters fonts. + * + * @values: + * T1_BLEND_UNDERLINE_POSITION :: + * T1_BLEND_UNDERLINE_THICKNESS :: + * T1_BLEND_ITALIC_ANGLE :: + * T1_BLEND_BLUE_VALUES :: + * T1_BLEND_OTHER_BLUES :: + * T1_BLEND_STANDARD_WIDTH :: + * T1_BLEND_STANDARD_HEIGHT :: + * T1_BLEND_STEM_SNAP_WIDTHS :: + * T1_BLEND_STEM_SNAP_HEIGHTS :: + * T1_BLEND_BLUE_SCALE :: + * T1_BLEND_BLUE_SHIFT :: + * T1_BLEND_FAMILY_BLUES :: + * T1_BLEND_FAMILY_OTHER_BLUES :: + * T1_BLEND_FORCE_BOLD :: + */ + typedef enum T1_Blend_Flags_ + { + /* required fields in a FontInfo blend dictionary */ + T1_BLEND_UNDERLINE_POSITION = 0, + T1_BLEND_UNDERLINE_THICKNESS, + T1_BLEND_ITALIC_ANGLE, + + /* required fields in a Private blend dictionary */ + T1_BLEND_BLUE_VALUES, + T1_BLEND_OTHER_BLUES, + T1_BLEND_STANDARD_WIDTH, + T1_BLEND_STANDARD_HEIGHT, + T1_BLEND_STEM_SNAP_WIDTHS, + T1_BLEND_STEM_SNAP_HEIGHTS, + T1_BLEND_BLUE_SCALE, + T1_BLEND_BLUE_SHIFT, + T1_BLEND_FAMILY_BLUES, + T1_BLEND_FAMILY_OTHER_BLUES, + T1_BLEND_FORCE_BOLD, + + T1_BLEND_MAX /* do not remove */ + + } T1_Blend_Flags; + + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding */ + /* `T1_Blend_Flags` values instead */ +#define t1_blend_underline_position T1_BLEND_UNDERLINE_POSITION +#define t1_blend_underline_thickness T1_BLEND_UNDERLINE_THICKNESS +#define t1_blend_italic_angle T1_BLEND_ITALIC_ANGLE +#define t1_blend_blue_values T1_BLEND_BLUE_VALUES +#define t1_blend_other_blues T1_BLEND_OTHER_BLUES +#define t1_blend_standard_widths T1_BLEND_STANDARD_WIDTH +#define t1_blend_standard_height T1_BLEND_STANDARD_HEIGHT +#define t1_blend_stem_snap_widths T1_BLEND_STEM_SNAP_WIDTHS +#define t1_blend_stem_snap_heights T1_BLEND_STEM_SNAP_HEIGHTS +#define t1_blend_blue_scale T1_BLEND_BLUE_SCALE +#define t1_blend_blue_shift T1_BLEND_BLUE_SHIFT +#define t1_blend_family_blues T1_BLEND_FAMILY_BLUES +#define t1_blend_family_other_blues T1_BLEND_FAMILY_OTHER_BLUES +#define t1_blend_force_bold T1_BLEND_FORCE_BOLD +#define t1_blend_max T1_BLEND_MAX + + /* */ + + + /* maximum number of Multiple Masters designs, as defined in the spec */ +#define T1_MAX_MM_DESIGNS 16 + + /* maximum number of Multiple Masters axes, as defined in the spec */ +#define T1_MAX_MM_AXIS 4 + + /* maximum number of elements in a design map */ +#define T1_MAX_MM_MAP_POINTS 20 + + + /* this structure is used to store the BlendDesignMap entry for an axis */ + typedef struct PS_DesignMap_ + { + FT_Byte num_points; + FT_Long* design_points; + FT_Fixed* blend_points; + + } PS_DesignMapRec, *PS_DesignMap; + + /* backward compatible definition */ + typedef PS_DesignMapRec T1_DesignMap; + + + typedef struct PS_BlendRec_ + { + FT_UInt num_designs; + FT_UInt num_axis; + + FT_String* axis_names[T1_MAX_MM_AXIS]; + FT_Fixed* design_pos[T1_MAX_MM_DESIGNS]; + PS_DesignMapRec design_map[T1_MAX_MM_AXIS]; + + FT_Fixed* weight_vector; + FT_Fixed* default_weight_vector; + + PS_FontInfo font_infos[T1_MAX_MM_DESIGNS + 1]; + PS_Private privates [T1_MAX_MM_DESIGNS + 1]; + + FT_ULong blend_bitflags; + + FT_BBox* bboxes [T1_MAX_MM_DESIGNS + 1]; + + /* since 2.3.0 */ + + /* undocumented, optional: the default design instance; */ + /* corresponds to default_weight_vector -- */ + /* num_default_design_vector == 0 means it is not present */ + /* in the font and associated metrics files */ + FT_UInt default_design_vector[T1_MAX_MM_DESIGNS]; + FT_UInt num_default_design_vector; + + } PS_BlendRec, *PS_Blend; + + + /* backward compatible definition */ + typedef PS_BlendRec T1_Blend; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CID_FaceDictRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to represent data in a CID top-level dictionary. In + * most cases, they are part of the font's '/FDArray' array. Within a + * CID font file, such (internal) subfont dictionaries are enclosed by + * '%ADOBeginFontDict' and '%ADOEndFontDict' comments. + * + * Note that `CID_FaceDictRec` misses a field for the '/FontName' + * keyword, specifying the subfont's name (the top-level font name is + * given by the '/CIDFontName' keyword). This is an oversight, but it + * doesn't limit the 'cid' font module's functionality because FreeType + * neither needs this entry nor gives access to CID subfonts. + */ + typedef struct CID_FaceDictRec_ + { + PS_PrivateRec private_dict; + + FT_UInt len_buildchar; + FT_Fixed forcebold_threshold; + FT_Pos stroke_width; + FT_Fixed expansion_factor; /* this is a duplicate of */ + /* `private_dict->expansion_factor' */ + FT_Byte paint_type; + FT_Byte font_type; + FT_Matrix font_matrix; + FT_Vector font_offset; + + FT_UInt num_subrs; + FT_ULong subrmap_offset; + FT_Int sd_bytes; + + } CID_FaceDictRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CID_FaceDict + * + * @description: + * A handle to a @CID_FaceDictRec structure. + */ + typedef struct CID_FaceDictRec_* CID_FaceDict; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CID_FontDict + * + * @description: + * This type is equivalent to @CID_FaceDictRec. It is deprecated but + * kept to maintain source compatibility between various versions of + * FreeType. + */ + typedef CID_FaceDictRec CID_FontDict; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CID_FaceInfoRec + * + * @description: + * A structure used to represent CID Face information. + */ + typedef struct CID_FaceInfoRec_ + { + FT_String* cid_font_name; + FT_Fixed cid_version; + FT_Int cid_font_type; + + FT_String* registry; + FT_String* ordering; + FT_Int supplement; + + PS_FontInfoRec font_info; + FT_BBox font_bbox; + FT_ULong uid_base; + + FT_Int num_xuid; + FT_ULong xuid[16]; + + FT_ULong cidmap_offset; + FT_Int fd_bytes; + FT_Int gd_bytes; + FT_ULong cid_count; + + FT_Int num_dicts; + CID_FaceDict font_dicts; + + FT_ULong data_offset; + + } CID_FaceInfoRec; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CID_FaceInfo + * + * @description: + * A handle to a @CID_FaceInfoRec structure. + */ + typedef struct CID_FaceInfoRec_* CID_FaceInfo; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * CID_Info + * + * @description: + * This type is equivalent to @CID_FaceInfoRec. It is deprecated but kept + * to maintain source compatibility between various versions of FreeType. + */ + typedef CID_FaceInfoRec CID_Info; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Has_PS_Glyph_Names + * + * @description: + * Return true if a given face provides reliable PostScript glyph names. + * This is similar to using the @FT_HAS_GLYPH_NAMES macro, except that + * certain fonts (mostly TrueType) contain incorrect glyph name tables. + * + * When this function returns true, the caller is sure that the glyph + * names returned by @FT_Get_Glyph_Name are reliable. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * face handle + * + * @return: + * Boolean. True if glyph names are reliable. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Int ) + FT_Has_PS_Glyph_Names( FT_Face face ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_PS_Font_Info + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the @PS_FontInfoRec structure corresponding to a given + * PostScript font. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * PostScript face handle. + * + * @output: + * afont_info :: + * Output font info structure pointer. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * String pointers within the @PS_FontInfoRec structure are owned by the + * face and don't need to be freed by the caller. Missing entries in + * the font's FontInfo dictionary are represented by `NULL` pointers. + * + * If the font's format is not PostScript-based, this function will + * return the `FT_Err_Invalid_Argument` error code. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_PS_Font_Info( FT_Face face, + PS_FontInfo afont_info ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_PS_Font_Private + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the @PS_PrivateRec structure corresponding to a given + * PostScript font. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * PostScript face handle. + * + * @output: + * afont_private :: + * Output private dictionary structure pointer. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * The string pointers within the @PS_PrivateRec structure are owned by + * the face and don't need to be freed by the caller. + * + * If the font's format is not PostScript-based, this function returns + * the `FT_Err_Invalid_Argument` error code. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Get_PS_Font_Private( FT_Face face, + PS_Private afont_private ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * T1_EncodingType + * + * @description: + * An enumeration describing the 'Encoding' entry in a Type 1 dictionary. + * + * @values: + * T1_ENCODING_TYPE_NONE :: + * T1_ENCODING_TYPE_ARRAY :: + * T1_ENCODING_TYPE_STANDARD :: + * T1_ENCODING_TYPE_ISOLATIN1 :: + * T1_ENCODING_TYPE_EXPERT :: + * + * @since: + * 2.4.8 + */ + typedef enum T1_EncodingType_ + { + T1_ENCODING_TYPE_NONE = 0, + T1_ENCODING_TYPE_ARRAY, + T1_ENCODING_TYPE_STANDARD, + T1_ENCODING_TYPE_ISOLATIN1, + T1_ENCODING_TYPE_EXPERT + + } T1_EncodingType; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * PS_Dict_Keys + * + * @description: + * An enumeration used in calls to @FT_Get_PS_Font_Value to identify the + * Type~1 dictionary entry to retrieve. + * + * @values: + * PS_DICT_FONT_TYPE :: + * PS_DICT_FONT_MATRIX :: + * PS_DICT_FONT_BBOX :: + * PS_DICT_PAINT_TYPE :: + * PS_DICT_FONT_NAME :: + * PS_DICT_UNIQUE_ID :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_CHAR_STRINGS :: + * PS_DICT_CHAR_STRING_KEY :: + * PS_DICT_CHAR_STRING :: + * PS_DICT_ENCODING_TYPE :: + * PS_DICT_ENCODING_ENTRY :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_SUBRS :: + * PS_DICT_SUBR :: + * PS_DICT_STD_HW :: + * PS_DICT_STD_VW :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_BLUE_VALUES :: + * PS_DICT_BLUE_VALUE :: + * PS_DICT_BLUE_FUZZ :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_OTHER_BLUES :: + * PS_DICT_OTHER_BLUE :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_FAMILY_BLUES :: + * PS_DICT_FAMILY_BLUE :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_FAMILY_OTHER_BLUES :: + * PS_DICT_FAMILY_OTHER_BLUE :: + * PS_DICT_BLUE_SCALE :: + * PS_DICT_BLUE_SHIFT :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_STEM_SNAP_H :: + * PS_DICT_STEM_SNAP_H :: + * PS_DICT_NUM_STEM_SNAP_V :: + * PS_DICT_STEM_SNAP_V :: + * PS_DICT_FORCE_BOLD :: + * PS_DICT_RND_STEM_UP :: + * PS_DICT_MIN_FEATURE :: + * PS_DICT_LEN_IV :: + * PS_DICT_PASSWORD :: + * PS_DICT_LANGUAGE_GROUP :: + * PS_DICT_VERSION :: + * PS_DICT_NOTICE :: + * PS_DICT_FULL_NAME :: + * PS_DICT_FAMILY_NAME :: + * PS_DICT_WEIGHT :: + * PS_DICT_IS_FIXED_PITCH :: + * PS_DICT_UNDERLINE_POSITION :: + * PS_DICT_UNDERLINE_THICKNESS :: + * PS_DICT_FS_TYPE :: + * PS_DICT_ITALIC_ANGLE :: + * + * @since: + * 2.4.8 + */ + typedef enum PS_Dict_Keys_ + { + /* conventionally in the font dictionary */ + PS_DICT_FONT_TYPE, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_FONT_MATRIX, /* FT_Fixed */ + PS_DICT_FONT_BBOX, /* FT_Fixed */ + PS_DICT_PAINT_TYPE, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_FONT_NAME, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_UNIQUE_ID, /* FT_Int */ + PS_DICT_NUM_CHAR_STRINGS, /* FT_Int */ + PS_DICT_CHAR_STRING_KEY, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_CHAR_STRING, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_ENCODING_TYPE, /* T1_EncodingType */ + PS_DICT_ENCODING_ENTRY, /* FT_String* */ + + /* conventionally in the font Private dictionary */ + PS_DICT_NUM_SUBRS, /* FT_Int */ + PS_DICT_SUBR, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_STD_HW, /* FT_UShort */ + PS_DICT_STD_VW, /* FT_UShort */ + PS_DICT_NUM_BLUE_VALUES, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_BLUE_VALUE, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_BLUE_FUZZ, /* FT_Int */ + PS_DICT_NUM_OTHER_BLUES, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_OTHER_BLUE, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_NUM_FAMILY_BLUES, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_FAMILY_BLUE, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_NUM_FAMILY_OTHER_BLUES, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_FAMILY_OTHER_BLUE, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_BLUE_SCALE, /* FT_Fixed */ + PS_DICT_BLUE_SHIFT, /* FT_Int */ + PS_DICT_NUM_STEM_SNAP_H, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_STEM_SNAP_H, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_NUM_STEM_SNAP_V, /* FT_Byte */ + PS_DICT_STEM_SNAP_V, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_FORCE_BOLD, /* FT_Bool */ + PS_DICT_RND_STEM_UP, /* FT_Bool */ + PS_DICT_MIN_FEATURE, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_LEN_IV, /* FT_Int */ + PS_DICT_PASSWORD, /* FT_Long */ + PS_DICT_LANGUAGE_GROUP, /* FT_Long */ + + /* conventionally in the font FontInfo dictionary */ + PS_DICT_VERSION, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_NOTICE, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_FULL_NAME, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_FAMILY_NAME, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_WEIGHT, /* FT_String* */ + PS_DICT_IS_FIXED_PITCH, /* FT_Bool */ + PS_DICT_UNDERLINE_POSITION, /* FT_Short */ + PS_DICT_UNDERLINE_THICKNESS, /* FT_UShort */ + PS_DICT_FS_TYPE, /* FT_UShort */ + PS_DICT_ITALIC_ANGLE, /* FT_Long */ + + PS_DICT_MAX = PS_DICT_ITALIC_ANGLE + + } PS_Dict_Keys; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_PS_Font_Value + * + * @description: + * Retrieve the value for the supplied key from a PostScript font. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * PostScript face handle. + * + * key :: + * An enumeration value representing the dictionary key to retrieve. + * + * idx :: + * For array values, this specifies the index to be returned. + * + * value :: + * A pointer to memory into which to write the value. + * + * valen_len :: + * The size, in bytes, of the memory supplied for the value. + * + * @output: + * value :: + * The value matching the above key, if it exists. + * + * @return: + * The amount of memory (in bytes) required to hold the requested value + * (if it exists, -1 otherwise). + * + * @note: + * The values returned are not pointers into the internal structures of + * the face, but are 'fresh' copies, so that the memory containing them + * belongs to the calling application. This also enforces the + * 'read-only' nature of these values, i.e., this function cannot be + * used to manipulate the face. + * + * `value` is a void pointer because the values returned can be of + * various types. + * + * If either `value` is `NULL` or `value_len` is too small, just the + * required memory size for the requested entry is returned. + * + * The `idx` parameter is used, not only to retrieve elements of, for + * example, the FontMatrix or FontBBox, but also to retrieve name keys + * from the CharStrings dictionary, and the charstrings themselves. It + * is ignored for atomic values. + * + * `PS_DICT_BLUE_SCALE` returns a value that is scaled up by 1000. To + * get the value as in the font stream, you need to divide by 65536000.0 + * (to remove the FT_Fixed scale, and the x1000 scale). + * + * IMPORTANT: Only key/value pairs read by the FreeType interpreter can + * be retrieved. So, for example, PostScript procedures such as NP, ND, + * and RD are not available. Arbitrary keys are, obviously, not be + * available either. + * + * If the font's format is not PostScript-based, this function returns + * the `FT_Err_Invalid_Argument` error code. + * + * @since: + * 2.4.8 + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Long ) + FT_Get_PS_Font_Value( FT_Face face, + PS_Dict_Keys key, + FT_UInt idx, + void *value, + FT_Long value_len ); + + /* */ + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* T1TABLES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ttnameid.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ttnameid.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc677de --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/ttnameid.h @@ -0,0 +1,1236 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ttnameid.h + * + * TrueType name ID definitions (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef TTNAMEID_H_ +#define TTNAMEID_H_ + + +#include + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * truetype_tables + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * Possible values for the 'platform' identifier code in the name records + * of an SFNT 'name' table. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_PLATFORM_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of valid values for the `platform_id` identifier code in + * @FT_CharMapRec and @FT_SfntName structures. + * + * @values: + * TT_PLATFORM_APPLE_UNICODE :: + * Used by Apple to indicate a Unicode character map and/or name entry. + * See @TT_APPLE_ID_XXX for corresponding `encoding_id` values. Note + * that name entries in this format are coded as big-endian UCS-2 + * character codes _only_. + * + * TT_PLATFORM_MACINTOSH :: + * Used by Apple to indicate a MacOS-specific charmap and/or name + * entry. See @TT_MAC_ID_XXX for corresponding `encoding_id` values. + * Note that most TrueType fonts contain an Apple roman charmap to be + * usable on MacOS systems (even if they contain a Microsoft charmap as + * well). + * + * TT_PLATFORM_ISO :: + * This value was used to specify ISO/IEC 10646 charmaps. It is + * however now deprecated. See @TT_ISO_ID_XXX for a list of + * corresponding `encoding_id` values. + * + * TT_PLATFORM_MICROSOFT :: + * Used by Microsoft to indicate Windows-specific charmaps. See + * @TT_MS_ID_XXX for a list of corresponding `encoding_id` values. + * Note that most fonts contain a Unicode charmap using + * (`TT_PLATFORM_MICROSOFT`, @TT_MS_ID_UNICODE_CS). + * + * TT_PLATFORM_CUSTOM :: + * Used to indicate application-specific charmaps. + * + * TT_PLATFORM_ADOBE :: + * This value isn't part of any font format specification, but is used + * by FreeType to report Adobe-specific charmaps in an @FT_CharMapRec + * structure. See @TT_ADOBE_ID_XXX. + */ + +#define TT_PLATFORM_APPLE_UNICODE 0 +#define TT_PLATFORM_MACINTOSH 1 +#define TT_PLATFORM_ISO 2 /* deprecated */ +#define TT_PLATFORM_MICROSOFT 3 +#define TT_PLATFORM_CUSTOM 4 +#define TT_PLATFORM_ADOBE 7 /* artificial */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_APPLE_ID_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of valid values for the `encoding_id` for + * @TT_PLATFORM_APPLE_UNICODE charmaps and name entries. + * + * @values: + * TT_APPLE_ID_DEFAULT :: + * Unicode version 1.0. + * + * TT_APPLE_ID_UNICODE_1_1 :: + * Unicode 1.1; specifies Hangul characters starting at U+34xx. + * + * TT_APPLE_ID_ISO_10646 :: + * Deprecated (identical to preceding). + * + * TT_APPLE_ID_UNICODE_2_0 :: + * Unicode 2.0 and beyond (UTF-16 BMP only). + * + * TT_APPLE_ID_UNICODE_32 :: + * Unicode 3.1 and beyond, using UTF-32. + * + * TT_APPLE_ID_VARIANT_SELECTOR :: + * From Adobe, not Apple. Not a normal cmap. Specifies variations on + * a real cmap. + * + * TT_APPLE_ID_FULL_UNICODE :: + * Used for fallback fonts that provide complete Unicode coverage with + * a type~13 cmap. + */ + +#define TT_APPLE_ID_DEFAULT 0 /* Unicode 1.0 */ +#define TT_APPLE_ID_UNICODE_1_1 1 /* specify Hangul at U+34xx */ +#define TT_APPLE_ID_ISO_10646 2 /* deprecated */ +#define TT_APPLE_ID_UNICODE_2_0 3 /* or later */ +#define TT_APPLE_ID_UNICODE_32 4 /* 2.0 or later, full repertoire */ +#define TT_APPLE_ID_VARIANT_SELECTOR 5 /* variation selector data */ +#define TT_APPLE_ID_FULL_UNICODE 6 /* used with type 13 cmaps */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_MAC_ID_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of valid values for the `encoding_id` for + * @TT_PLATFORM_MACINTOSH charmaps and name entries. + */ + +#define TT_MAC_ID_ROMAN 0 +#define TT_MAC_ID_JAPANESE 1 +#define TT_MAC_ID_TRADITIONAL_CHINESE 2 +#define TT_MAC_ID_KOREAN 3 +#define TT_MAC_ID_ARABIC 4 +#define TT_MAC_ID_HEBREW 5 +#define TT_MAC_ID_GREEK 6 +#define TT_MAC_ID_RUSSIAN 7 +#define TT_MAC_ID_RSYMBOL 8 +#define TT_MAC_ID_DEVANAGARI 9 +#define TT_MAC_ID_GURMUKHI 10 +#define TT_MAC_ID_GUJARATI 11 +#define TT_MAC_ID_ORIYA 12 +#define TT_MAC_ID_BENGALI 13 +#define TT_MAC_ID_TAMIL 14 +#define TT_MAC_ID_TELUGU 15 +#define TT_MAC_ID_KANNADA 16 +#define TT_MAC_ID_MALAYALAM 17 +#define TT_MAC_ID_SINHALESE 18 +#define TT_MAC_ID_BURMESE 19 +#define TT_MAC_ID_KHMER 20 +#define TT_MAC_ID_THAI 21 +#define TT_MAC_ID_LAOTIAN 22 +#define TT_MAC_ID_GEORGIAN 23 +#define TT_MAC_ID_ARMENIAN 24 +#define TT_MAC_ID_MALDIVIAN 25 +#define TT_MAC_ID_SIMPLIFIED_CHINESE 25 +#define TT_MAC_ID_TIBETAN 26 +#define TT_MAC_ID_MONGOLIAN 27 +#define TT_MAC_ID_GEEZ 28 +#define TT_MAC_ID_SLAVIC 29 +#define TT_MAC_ID_VIETNAMESE 30 +#define TT_MAC_ID_SINDHI 31 +#define TT_MAC_ID_UNINTERP 32 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_ISO_ID_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of valid values for the `encoding_id` for @TT_PLATFORM_ISO + * charmaps and name entries. + * + * Their use is now deprecated. + * + * @values: + * TT_ISO_ID_7BIT_ASCII :: + * ASCII. + * TT_ISO_ID_10646 :: + * ISO/10646. + * TT_ISO_ID_8859_1 :: + * Also known as Latin-1. + */ + +#define TT_ISO_ID_7BIT_ASCII 0 +#define TT_ISO_ID_10646 1 +#define TT_ISO_ID_8859_1 2 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_MS_ID_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of valid values for the `encoding_id` for + * @TT_PLATFORM_MICROSOFT charmaps and name entries. + * + * @values: + * TT_MS_ID_SYMBOL_CS :: + * Microsoft symbol encoding. See @FT_ENCODING_MS_SYMBOL. + * + * TT_MS_ID_UNICODE_CS :: + * Microsoft WGL4 charmap, matching Unicode. See @FT_ENCODING_UNICODE. + * + * TT_MS_ID_SJIS :: + * Shift JIS Japanese encoding. See @FT_ENCODING_SJIS. + * + * TT_MS_ID_PRC :: + * Chinese encodings as used in the People's Republic of China (PRC). + * This means the encodings GB~2312 and its supersets GBK and GB~18030. + * See @FT_ENCODING_PRC. + * + * TT_MS_ID_BIG_5 :: + * Traditional Chinese as used in Taiwan and Hong Kong. See + * @FT_ENCODING_BIG5. + * + * TT_MS_ID_WANSUNG :: + * Korean Extended Wansung encoding. See @FT_ENCODING_WANSUNG. + * + * TT_MS_ID_JOHAB :: + * Korean Johab encoding. See @FT_ENCODING_JOHAB. + * + * TT_MS_ID_UCS_4 :: + * UCS-4 or UTF-32 charmaps. This has been added to the OpenType + * specification version 1.4 (mid-2001). + */ + +#define TT_MS_ID_SYMBOL_CS 0 +#define TT_MS_ID_UNICODE_CS 1 +#define TT_MS_ID_SJIS 2 +#define TT_MS_ID_PRC 3 +#define TT_MS_ID_BIG_5 4 +#define TT_MS_ID_WANSUNG 5 +#define TT_MS_ID_JOHAB 6 +#define TT_MS_ID_UCS_4 10 + + /* this value is deprecated */ +#define TT_MS_ID_GB2312 TT_MS_ID_PRC + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_ADOBE_ID_XXX + * + * @description: + * A list of valid values for the `encoding_id` for @TT_PLATFORM_ADOBE + * charmaps. This is a FreeType-specific extension! + * + * @values: + * TT_ADOBE_ID_STANDARD :: + * Adobe standard encoding. + * TT_ADOBE_ID_EXPERT :: + * Adobe expert encoding. + * TT_ADOBE_ID_CUSTOM :: + * Adobe custom encoding. + * TT_ADOBE_ID_LATIN_1 :: + * Adobe Latin~1 encoding. + */ + +#define TT_ADOBE_ID_STANDARD 0 +#define TT_ADOBE_ID_EXPERT 1 +#define TT_ADOBE_ID_CUSTOM 2 +#define TT_ADOBE_ID_LATIN_1 3 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_MAC_LANGID_XXX + * + * @description: + * Possible values of the language identifier field in the name records + * of the SFNT 'name' table if the 'platform' identifier code is + * @TT_PLATFORM_MACINTOSH. These values are also used as return values + * for function @FT_Get_CMap_Language_ID. + * + * The canonical source for Apple's IDs is + * + * https://developer.apple.com/fonts/TrueType-Reference-Manual/RM06/Chap6name.html + */ + +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ENGLISH 0 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_FRENCH 1 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GERMAN 2 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ITALIAN 3 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_DUTCH 4 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SWEDISH 5 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SPANISH 6 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_DANISH 7 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_PORTUGUESE 8 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_NORWEGIAN 9 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_HEBREW 10 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_JAPANESE 11 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ARABIC 12 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_FINNISH 13 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GREEK 14 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ICELANDIC 15 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MALTESE 16 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TURKISH 17 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_CROATIAN 18 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_CHINESE_TRADITIONAL 19 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_URDU 20 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_HINDI 21 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_THAI 22 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_KOREAN 23 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_LITHUANIAN 24 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_POLISH 25 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_HUNGARIAN 26 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ESTONIAN 27 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_LETTISH 28 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SAAMISK 29 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_FAEROESE 30 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_FARSI 31 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_RUSSIAN 32 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED 33 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_FLEMISH 34 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_IRISH 35 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ALBANIAN 36 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ROMANIAN 37 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_CZECH 38 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SLOVAK 39 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SLOVENIAN 40 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_YIDDISH 41 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SERBIAN 42 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MACEDONIAN 43 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_BULGARIAN 44 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_UKRAINIAN 45 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_BYELORUSSIAN 46 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_UZBEK 47 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_KAZAKH 48 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_AZERBAIJANI 49 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_AZERBAIJANI_CYRILLIC_SCRIPT 49 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_AZERBAIJANI_ARABIC_SCRIPT 50 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ARMENIAN 51 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GEORGIAN 52 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MOLDAVIAN 53 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_KIRGHIZ 54 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TAJIKI 55 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TURKMEN 56 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MONGOLIAN 57 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MONGOLIAN_MONGOLIAN_SCRIPT 57 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MONGOLIAN_CYRILLIC_SCRIPT 58 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_PASHTO 59 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_KURDISH 60 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_KASHMIRI 61 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SINDHI 62 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TIBETAN 63 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_NEPALI 64 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SANSKRIT 65 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MARATHI 66 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_BENGALI 67 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ASSAMESE 68 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GUJARATI 69 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_PUNJABI 70 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ORIYA 71 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MALAYALAM 72 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_KANNADA 73 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TAMIL 74 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TELUGU 75 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SINHALESE 76 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_BURMESE 77 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_KHMER 78 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_LAO 79 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_VIETNAMESE 80 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_INDONESIAN 81 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TAGALOG 82 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MALAY_ROMAN_SCRIPT 83 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MALAY_ARABIC_SCRIPT 84 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_AMHARIC 85 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TIGRINYA 86 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GALLA 87 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SOMALI 88 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SWAHILI 89 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_RUANDA 90 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_RUNDI 91 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_CHEWA 92 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MALAGASY 93 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_ESPERANTO 94 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_WELSH 128 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_BASQUE 129 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_CATALAN 130 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_LATIN 131 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_QUECHUA 132 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GUARANI 133 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_AYMARA 134 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TATAR 135 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_UIGHUR 136 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_DZONGKHA 137 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_JAVANESE 138 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SUNDANESE 139 + + /* The following codes are new as of 2000-03-10 */ +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GALICIAN 140 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_AFRIKAANS 141 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_BRETON 142 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_INUKTITUT 143 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_SCOTTISH_GAELIC 144 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_MANX_GAELIC 145 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_IRISH_GAELIC 146 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_TONGAN 147 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GREEK_POLYTONIC 148 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_GREELANDIC 149 +#define TT_MAC_LANGID_AZERBAIJANI_ROMAN_SCRIPT 150 + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_MS_LANGID_XXX + * + * @description: + * Possible values of the language identifier field in the name records + * of the SFNT 'name' table if the 'platform' identifier code is + * @TT_PLATFORM_MICROSOFT. These values are also used as return values + * for function @FT_Get_CMap_Language_ID. + * + * The canonical source for Microsoft's IDs is + * + * https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/desktop/Intl/language-identifier-constants-and-strings , + * + * however, we only provide macros for language identifiers present in + * the OpenType specification: Microsoft has abandoned the concept of + * LCIDs (language code identifiers), and format~1 of the 'name' table + * provides a better mechanism for languages not covered here. + * + * More legacy values not listed in the reference can be found in the + * @FT_TRUETYPE_IDS_H header file. + */ + +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_SAUDI_ARABIA 0x0401 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_IRAQ 0x0801 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_EGYPT 0x0C01 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_LIBYA 0x1001 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_ALGERIA 0x1401 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_MOROCCO 0x1801 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_TUNISIA 0x1C01 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_OMAN 0x2001 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_YEMEN 0x2401 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_SYRIA 0x2801 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_JORDAN 0x2C01 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_LEBANON 0x3001 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_KUWAIT 0x3401 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_UAE 0x3801 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_BAHRAIN 0x3C01 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_QATAR 0x4001 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BULGARIAN_BULGARIA 0x0402 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CATALAN_CATALAN 0x0403 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_TAIWAN 0x0404 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_PRC 0x0804 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_HONG_KONG 0x0C04 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_SINGAPORE 0x1004 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_MACAO 0x1404 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CZECH_CZECH_REPUBLIC 0x0405 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_DANISH_DENMARK 0x0406 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GERMAN_GERMANY 0x0407 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GERMAN_SWITZERLAND 0x0807 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GERMAN_AUSTRIA 0x0C07 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GERMAN_LUXEMBOURG 0x1007 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GERMAN_LIECHTENSTEIN 0x1407 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GREEK_GREECE 0x0408 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_UNITED_STATES 0x0409 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_UNITED_KINGDOM 0x0809 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_AUSTRALIA 0x0C09 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_CANADA 0x1009 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_NEW_ZEALAND 0x1409 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_IRELAND 0x1809 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x1C09 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_JAMAICA 0x2009 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_CARIBBEAN 0x2409 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_BELIZE 0x2809 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_TRINIDAD 0x2C09 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_ZIMBABWE 0x3009 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_PHILIPPINES 0x3409 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_INDIA 0x4009 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_MALAYSIA 0x4409 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_SINGAPORE 0x4809 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_SPAIN_TRADITIONAL_SORT 0x040A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_MEXICO 0x080A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_SPAIN_MODERN_SORT 0x0C0A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_GUATEMALA 0x100A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_COSTA_RICA 0x140A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_PANAMA 0x180A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_DOMINICAN_REPUBLIC 0x1C0A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_VENEZUELA 0x200A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_COLOMBIA 0x240A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_PERU 0x280A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_ARGENTINA 0x2C0A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_ECUADOR 0x300A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_CHILE 0x340A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_URUGUAY 0x380A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_PARAGUAY 0x3C0A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_BOLIVIA 0x400A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_EL_SALVADOR 0x440A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_HONDURAS 0x480A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_NICARAGUA 0x4C0A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_PUERTO_RICO 0x500A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_UNITED_STATES 0x540A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FINNISH_FINLAND 0x040B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_FRANCE 0x040C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_BELGIUM 0x080C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_CANADA 0x0C0C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_SWITZERLAND 0x100C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_LUXEMBOURG 0x140C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_MONACO 0x180C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_HEBREW_ISRAEL 0x040D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_HUNGARIAN_HUNGARY 0x040E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ICELANDIC_ICELAND 0x040F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ITALIAN_ITALY 0x0410 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ITALIAN_SWITZERLAND 0x0810 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_JAPANESE_JAPAN 0x0411 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KOREAN_KOREA 0x0412 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_DUTCH_NETHERLANDS 0x0413 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_DUTCH_BELGIUM 0x0813 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_NORWEGIAN_NORWAY_BOKMAL 0x0414 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_NORWEGIAN_NORWAY_NYNORSK 0x0814 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_POLISH_POLAND 0x0415 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_PORTUGUESE_BRAZIL 0x0416 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_PORTUGUESE_PORTUGAL 0x0816 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ROMANSH_SWITZERLAND 0x0417 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ROMANIAN_ROMANIA 0x0418 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_RUSSIAN_RUSSIA 0x0419 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CROATIAN_CROATIA 0x041A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SERBIAN_SERBIA_LATIN 0x081A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SERBIAN_SERBIA_CYRILLIC 0x0C1A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CROATIAN_BOSNIA_HERZEGOVINA 0x101A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BOSNIAN_BOSNIA_HERZEGOVINA 0x141A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SERBIAN_BOSNIA_HERZ_LATIN 0x181A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SERBIAN_BOSNIA_HERZ_CYRILLIC 0x1C1A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BOSNIAN_BOSNIA_HERZ_CYRILLIC 0x201A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SLOVAK_SLOVAKIA 0x041B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ALBANIAN_ALBANIA 0x041C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SWEDISH_SWEDEN 0x041D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SWEDISH_FINLAND 0x081D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_THAI_THAILAND 0x041E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TURKISH_TURKEY 0x041F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_URDU_PAKISTAN 0x0420 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_INDONESIAN_INDONESIA 0x0421 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_UKRAINIAN_UKRAINE 0x0422 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BELARUSIAN_BELARUS 0x0423 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SLOVENIAN_SLOVENIA 0x0424 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ESTONIAN_ESTONIA 0x0425 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_LATVIAN_LATVIA 0x0426 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_LITHUANIAN_LITHUANIA 0x0427 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TAJIK_TAJIKISTAN 0x0428 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_VIETNAMESE_VIET_NAM 0x042A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARMENIAN_ARMENIA 0x042B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_AZERI_AZERBAIJAN_LATIN 0x042C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_AZERI_AZERBAIJAN_CYRILLIC 0x082C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BASQUE_BASQUE 0x042D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_UPPER_SORBIAN_GERMANY 0x042E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_LOWER_SORBIAN_GERMANY 0x082E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MACEDONIAN_MACEDONIA 0x042F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SETSWANA_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x0432 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ISIXHOSA_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x0434 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ISIZULU_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x0435 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_AFRIKAANS_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x0436 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GEORGIAN_GEORGIA 0x0437 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FAEROESE_FAEROE_ISLANDS 0x0438 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_HINDI_INDIA 0x0439 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MALTESE_MALTA 0x043A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_NORTHERN_NORWAY 0x043B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_NORTHERN_SWEDEN 0x083B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_NORTHERN_FINLAND 0x0C3B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_LULE_NORWAY 0x103B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_LULE_SWEDEN 0x143B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_SOUTHERN_NORWAY 0x183B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_SOUTHERN_SWEDEN 0x1C3B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_SKOLT_FINLAND 0x203B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAMI_INARI_FINLAND 0x243B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_IRISH_IRELAND 0x083C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MALAY_MALAYSIA 0x043E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MALAY_BRUNEI_DARUSSALAM 0x083E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KAZAKH_KAZAKHSTAN 0x043F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KYRGYZ_KYRGYZSTAN /* Cyrillic*/ 0x0440 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KISWAHILI_KENYA 0x0441 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TURKMEN_TURKMENISTAN 0x0442 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_UZBEK_UZBEKISTAN_LATIN 0x0443 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_UZBEK_UZBEKISTAN_CYRILLIC 0x0843 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TATAR_RUSSIA 0x0444 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BENGALI_INDIA 0x0445 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BENGALI_BANGLADESH 0x0845 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_PUNJABI_INDIA 0x0446 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GUJARATI_INDIA 0x0447 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ODIA_INDIA 0x0448 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TAMIL_INDIA 0x0449 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TELUGU_INDIA 0x044A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KANNADA_INDIA 0x044B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MALAYALAM_INDIA 0x044C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ASSAMESE_INDIA 0x044D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MARATHI_INDIA 0x044E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SANSKRIT_INDIA 0x044F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MONGOLIAN_MONGOLIA /* Cyrillic */ 0x0450 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MONGOLIAN_PRC 0x0850 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TIBETAN_PRC 0x0451 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_WELSH_UNITED_KINGDOM 0x0452 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KHMER_CAMBODIA 0x0453 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_LAO_LAOS 0x0454 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GALICIAN_GALICIAN 0x0456 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KONKANI_INDIA 0x0457 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SYRIAC_SYRIA 0x045A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SINHALA_SRI_LANKA 0x045B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_INUKTITUT_CANADA 0x045D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_INUKTITUT_CANADA_LATIN 0x085D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_AMHARIC_ETHIOPIA 0x045E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TAMAZIGHT_ALGERIA 0x085F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_NEPALI_NEPAL 0x0461 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRISIAN_NETHERLANDS 0x0462 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_PASHTO_AFGHANISTAN 0x0463 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FILIPINO_PHILIPPINES 0x0464 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_DHIVEHI_MALDIVES 0x0465 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_HAUSA_NIGERIA 0x0468 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_YORUBA_NIGERIA 0x046A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_QUECHUA_BOLIVIA 0x046B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_QUECHUA_ECUADOR 0x086B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_QUECHUA_PERU 0x0C6B +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SESOTHO_SA_LEBOA_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x046C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BASHKIR_RUSSIA 0x046D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_LUXEMBOURGISH_LUXEMBOURG 0x046E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GREENLANDIC_GREENLAND 0x046F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_IGBO_NIGERIA 0x0470 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_YI_PRC 0x0478 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MAPUDUNGUN_CHILE 0x047A +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MOHAWK_MOHAWK 0x047C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BRETON_FRANCE 0x047E +#define TT_MS_LANGID_UIGHUR_PRC 0x0480 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MAORI_NEW_ZEALAND 0x0481 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_OCCITAN_FRANCE 0x0482 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CORSICAN_FRANCE 0x0483 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ALSATIAN_FRANCE 0x0484 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_YAKUT_RUSSIA 0x0485 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KICHE_GUATEMALA 0x0486 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KINYARWANDA_RWANDA 0x0487 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_WOLOF_SENEGAL 0x0488 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_DARI_AFGHANISTAN 0x048C + + /* */ + + + /* legacy macro definitions not present in OpenType 1.8.1 */ +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ARABIC_GENERAL 0x0001 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CATALAN_SPAIN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_CATALAN_CATALAN +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_GENERAL 0x0004 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_MACAU \ + TT_MS_LANGID_CHINESE_MACAO +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GERMAN_LIECHTENSTEI \ + TT_MS_LANGID_GERMAN_LIECHTENSTEIN +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_GENERAL 0x0009 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_INDONESIA 0x3809 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ENGLISH_HONG_KONG 0x3C09 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_SPAIN_INTERNATIONAL_SORT \ + TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_SPAIN_MODERN_SORT +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SPANISH_LATIN_AMERICA 0xE40AU +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_WEST_INDIES 0x1C0C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_REUNION 0x200C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_CONGO 0x240C + /* which was formerly: */ +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_ZAIRE \ + TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_CONGO +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_SENEGAL 0x280C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_CAMEROON 0x2C0C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_COTE_D_IVOIRE 0x300C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_MALI 0x340C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_MOROCCO 0x380C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_HAITI 0x3C0C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FRENCH_NORTH_AFRICA 0xE40CU +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KOREAN_EXTENDED_WANSUNG_KOREA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_KOREAN_KOREA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KOREAN_JOHAB_KOREA 0x0812 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_RHAETO_ROMANIC_SWITZERLAND \ + TT_MS_LANGID_ROMANSH_SWITZERLAND +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MOLDAVIAN_MOLDAVIA 0x0818 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_RUSSIAN_MOLDAVIA 0x0819 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_URDU_INDIA 0x0820 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CLASSIC_LITHUANIAN_LITHUANIA 0x0827 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SLOVENE_SLOVENIA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_SLOVENIAN_SLOVENIA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FARSI_IRAN 0x0429 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BASQUE_SPAIN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_BASQUE_BASQUE +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SORBIAN_GERMANY \ + TT_MS_LANGID_UPPER_SORBIAN_GERMANY +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SUTU_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x0430 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TSONGA_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x0431 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TSWANA_SOUTH_AFRICA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_SETSWANA_SOUTH_AFRICA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_VENDA_SOUTH_AFRICA 0x0433 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_XHOSA_SOUTH_AFRICA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_ISIXHOSA_SOUTH_AFRICA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ZULU_SOUTH_AFRICA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_ISIZULU_SOUTH_AFRICA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SAAMI_LAPONIA 0x043B + /* the next two values are incorrectly inverted */ +#define TT_MS_LANGID_IRISH_GAELIC_IRELAND 0x043C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SCOTTISH_GAELIC_UNITED_KINGDOM 0x083C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_YIDDISH_GERMANY 0x043D +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KAZAK_KAZAKSTAN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_KAZAKH_KAZAKHSTAN +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KIRGHIZ_KIRGHIZ_REPUBLIC \ + TT_MS_LANGID_KYRGYZ_KYRGYZSTAN +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KIRGHIZ_KIRGHIZSTAN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_KYRGYZ_KYRGYZSTAN +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SWAHILI_KENYA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_KISWAHILI_KENYA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TATAR_TATARSTAN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_TATAR_RUSSIA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_PUNJABI_ARABIC_PAKISTAN 0x0846 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_ORIYA_INDIA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_ODIA_INDIA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MONGOLIAN_MONGOLIA_MONGOLIAN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_MONGOLIAN_PRC +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TIBETAN_CHINA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_TIBETAN_PRC +#define TT_MS_LANGID_DZONGHKA_BHUTAN 0x0851 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TIBETAN_BHUTAN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_DZONGHKA_BHUTAN +#define TT_MS_LANGID_WELSH_WALES \ + TT_MS_LANGID_WELSH_UNITED_KINGDOM +#define TT_MS_LANGID_BURMESE_MYANMAR 0x0455 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GALICIAN_SPAIN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_GALICIAN_GALICIAN +#define TT_MS_LANGID_MANIPURI_INDIA /* Bengali */ 0x0458 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SINDHI_INDIA /* Arabic */ 0x0459 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SINDHI_PAKISTAN 0x0859 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SINHALESE_SRI_LANKA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_SINHALA_SRI_LANKA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_CHEROKEE_UNITED_STATES 0x045C +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TAMAZIGHT_MOROCCO /* Arabic */ 0x045F +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TAMAZIGHT_MOROCCO_LATIN \ + TT_MS_LANGID_TAMAZIGHT_ALGERIA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KASHMIRI_PAKISTAN /* Arabic */ 0x0460 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KASHMIRI_SASIA 0x0860 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KASHMIRI_INDIA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_KASHMIRI_SASIA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_NEPALI_INDIA 0x0861 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_DIVEHI_MALDIVES \ + TT_MS_LANGID_DHIVEHI_MALDIVES +#define TT_MS_LANGID_EDO_NIGERIA 0x0466 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_FULFULDE_NIGERIA 0x0467 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_IBIBIO_NIGERIA 0x0469 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SEPEDI_SOUTH_AFRICA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_SESOTHO_SA_LEBOA_SOUTH_AFRICA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SOTHO_SOUTHERN_SOUTH_AFRICA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_SESOTHO_SA_LEBOA_SOUTH_AFRICA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_KANURI_NIGERIA 0x0471 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_OROMO_ETHIOPIA 0x0472 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TIGRIGNA_ETHIOPIA 0x0473 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TIGRIGNA_ERYTHREA 0x0873 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_TIGRIGNA_ERYTREA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_TIGRIGNA_ERYTHREA +#define TT_MS_LANGID_GUARANI_PARAGUAY 0x0474 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_HAWAIIAN_UNITED_STATES 0x0475 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_LATIN 0x0476 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_SOMALI_SOMALIA 0x0477 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_YI_CHINA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_YI_PRC +#define TT_MS_LANGID_PAPIAMENTU_NETHERLANDS_ANTILLES 0x0479 +#define TT_MS_LANGID_UIGHUR_CHINA \ + TT_MS_LANGID_UIGHUR_PRC + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_NAME_ID_XXX + * + * @description: + * Possible values of the 'name' identifier field in the name records of + * an SFNT 'name' table. These values are platform independent. + */ + +#define TT_NAME_ID_COPYRIGHT 0 +#define TT_NAME_ID_FONT_FAMILY 1 +#define TT_NAME_ID_FONT_SUBFAMILY 2 +#define TT_NAME_ID_UNIQUE_ID 3 +#define TT_NAME_ID_FULL_NAME 4 +#define TT_NAME_ID_VERSION_STRING 5 +#define TT_NAME_ID_PS_NAME 6 +#define TT_NAME_ID_TRADEMARK 7 + + /* the following values are from the OpenType spec */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_MANUFACTURER 8 +#define TT_NAME_ID_DESIGNER 9 +#define TT_NAME_ID_DESCRIPTION 10 +#define TT_NAME_ID_VENDOR_URL 11 +#define TT_NAME_ID_DESIGNER_URL 12 +#define TT_NAME_ID_LICENSE 13 +#define TT_NAME_ID_LICENSE_URL 14 + /* number 15 is reserved */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_TYPOGRAPHIC_FAMILY 16 +#define TT_NAME_ID_TYPOGRAPHIC_SUBFAMILY 17 +#define TT_NAME_ID_MAC_FULL_NAME 18 + + /* The following code is new as of 2000-01-21 */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_SAMPLE_TEXT 19 + + /* This is new in OpenType 1.3 */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_CID_FINDFONT_NAME 20 + + /* This is new in OpenType 1.5 */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_WWS_FAMILY 21 +#define TT_NAME_ID_WWS_SUBFAMILY 22 + + /* This is new in OpenType 1.7 */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_LIGHT_BACKGROUND 23 +#define TT_NAME_ID_DARK_BACKGROUND 24 + + /* This is new in OpenType 1.8 */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_VARIATIONS_PREFIX 25 + + /* these two values are deprecated */ +#define TT_NAME_ID_PREFERRED_FAMILY TT_NAME_ID_TYPOGRAPHIC_FAMILY +#define TT_NAME_ID_PREFERRED_SUBFAMILY TT_NAME_ID_TYPOGRAPHIC_SUBFAMILY + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * TT_UCR_XXX + * + * @description: + * Possible bit mask values for the `ulUnicodeRangeX` fields in an SFNT + * 'OS/2' table. + */ + + /* ulUnicodeRange1 */ + /* --------------- */ + + /* Bit 0 Basic Latin */ +#define TT_UCR_BASIC_LATIN (1L << 0) /* U+0020-U+007E */ + /* Bit 1 C1 Controls and Latin-1 Supplement */ +#define TT_UCR_LATIN1_SUPPLEMENT (1L << 1) /* U+0080-U+00FF */ + /* Bit 2 Latin Extended-A */ +#define TT_UCR_LATIN_EXTENDED_A (1L << 2) /* U+0100-U+017F */ + /* Bit 3 Latin Extended-B */ +#define TT_UCR_LATIN_EXTENDED_B (1L << 3) /* U+0180-U+024F */ + /* Bit 4 IPA Extensions */ + /* Phonetic Extensions */ + /* Phonetic Extensions Supplement */ +#define TT_UCR_IPA_EXTENSIONS (1L << 4) /* U+0250-U+02AF */ + /* U+1D00-U+1D7F */ + /* U+1D80-U+1DBF */ + /* Bit 5 Spacing Modifier Letters */ + /* Modifier Tone Letters */ +#define TT_UCR_SPACING_MODIFIER (1L << 5) /* U+02B0-U+02FF */ + /* U+A700-U+A71F */ + /* Bit 6 Combining Diacritical Marks */ + /* Combining Diacritical Marks Supplement */ +#define TT_UCR_COMBINING_DIACRITICAL_MARKS (1L << 6) /* U+0300-U+036F */ + /* U+1DC0-U+1DFF */ + /* Bit 7 Greek and Coptic */ +#define TT_UCR_GREEK (1L << 7) /* U+0370-U+03FF */ + /* Bit 8 Coptic */ +#define TT_UCR_COPTIC (1L << 8) /* U+2C80-U+2CFF */ + /* Bit 9 Cyrillic */ + /* Cyrillic Supplement */ + /* Cyrillic Extended-A */ + /* Cyrillic Extended-B */ +#define TT_UCR_CYRILLIC (1L << 9) /* U+0400-U+04FF */ + /* U+0500-U+052F */ + /* U+2DE0-U+2DFF */ + /* U+A640-U+A69F */ + /* Bit 10 Armenian */ +#define TT_UCR_ARMENIAN (1L << 10) /* U+0530-U+058F */ + /* Bit 11 Hebrew */ +#define TT_UCR_HEBREW (1L << 11) /* U+0590-U+05FF */ + /* Bit 12 Vai */ +#define TT_UCR_VAI (1L << 12) /* U+A500-U+A63F */ + /* Bit 13 Arabic */ + /* Arabic Supplement */ +#define TT_UCR_ARABIC (1L << 13) /* U+0600-U+06FF */ + /* U+0750-U+077F */ + /* Bit 14 NKo */ +#define TT_UCR_NKO (1L << 14) /* U+07C0-U+07FF */ + /* Bit 15 Devanagari */ +#define TT_UCR_DEVANAGARI (1L << 15) /* U+0900-U+097F */ + /* Bit 16 Bengali */ +#define TT_UCR_BENGALI (1L << 16) /* U+0980-U+09FF */ + /* Bit 17 Gurmukhi */ +#define TT_UCR_GURMUKHI (1L << 17) /* U+0A00-U+0A7F */ + /* Bit 18 Gujarati */ +#define TT_UCR_GUJARATI (1L << 18) /* U+0A80-U+0AFF */ + /* Bit 19 Oriya */ +#define TT_UCR_ORIYA (1L << 19) /* U+0B00-U+0B7F */ + /* Bit 20 Tamil */ +#define TT_UCR_TAMIL (1L << 20) /* U+0B80-U+0BFF */ + /* Bit 21 Telugu */ +#define TT_UCR_TELUGU (1L << 21) /* U+0C00-U+0C7F */ + /* Bit 22 Kannada */ +#define TT_UCR_KANNADA (1L << 22) /* U+0C80-U+0CFF */ + /* Bit 23 Malayalam */ +#define TT_UCR_MALAYALAM (1L << 23) /* U+0D00-U+0D7F */ + /* Bit 24 Thai */ +#define TT_UCR_THAI (1L << 24) /* U+0E00-U+0E7F */ + /* Bit 25 Lao */ +#define TT_UCR_LAO (1L << 25) /* U+0E80-U+0EFF */ + /* Bit 26 Georgian */ + /* Georgian Supplement */ +#define TT_UCR_GEORGIAN (1L << 26) /* U+10A0-U+10FF */ + /* U+2D00-U+2D2F */ + /* Bit 27 Balinese */ +#define TT_UCR_BALINESE (1L << 27) /* U+1B00-U+1B7F */ + /* Bit 28 Hangul Jamo */ +#define TT_UCR_HANGUL_JAMO (1L << 28) /* U+1100-U+11FF */ + /* Bit 29 Latin Extended Additional */ + /* Latin Extended-C */ + /* Latin Extended-D */ +#define TT_UCR_LATIN_EXTENDED_ADDITIONAL (1L << 29) /* U+1E00-U+1EFF */ + /* U+2C60-U+2C7F */ + /* U+A720-U+A7FF */ + /* Bit 30 Greek Extended */ +#define TT_UCR_GREEK_EXTENDED (1L << 30) /* U+1F00-U+1FFF */ + /* Bit 31 General Punctuation */ + /* Supplemental Punctuation */ +#define TT_UCR_GENERAL_PUNCTUATION (1L << 31) /* U+2000-U+206F */ + /* U+2E00-U+2E7F */ + + /* ulUnicodeRange2 */ + /* --------------- */ + + /* Bit 32 Superscripts And Subscripts */ +#define TT_UCR_SUPERSCRIPTS_SUBSCRIPTS (1L << 0) /* U+2070-U+209F */ + /* Bit 33 Currency Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_CURRENCY_SYMBOLS (1L << 1) /* U+20A0-U+20CF */ + /* Bit 34 Combining Diacritical Marks For Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_COMBINING_DIACRITICAL_MARKS_SYMB \ + (1L << 2) /* U+20D0-U+20FF */ + /* Bit 35 Letterlike Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_LETTERLIKE_SYMBOLS (1L << 3) /* U+2100-U+214F */ + /* Bit 36 Number Forms */ +#define TT_UCR_NUMBER_FORMS (1L << 4) /* U+2150-U+218F */ + /* Bit 37 Arrows */ + /* Supplemental Arrows-A */ + /* Supplemental Arrows-B */ + /* Miscellaneous Symbols and Arrows */ +#define TT_UCR_ARROWS (1L << 5) /* U+2190-U+21FF */ + /* U+27F0-U+27FF */ + /* U+2900-U+297F */ + /* U+2B00-U+2BFF */ + /* Bit 38 Mathematical Operators */ + /* Supplemental Mathematical Operators */ + /* Miscellaneous Mathematical Symbols-A */ + /* Miscellaneous Mathematical Symbols-B */ +#define TT_UCR_MATHEMATICAL_OPERATORS (1L << 6) /* U+2200-U+22FF */ + /* U+2A00-U+2AFF */ + /* U+27C0-U+27EF */ + /* U+2980-U+29FF */ + /* Bit 39 Miscellaneous Technical */ +#define TT_UCR_MISCELLANEOUS_TECHNICAL (1L << 7) /* U+2300-U+23FF */ + /* Bit 40 Control Pictures */ +#define TT_UCR_CONTROL_PICTURES (1L << 8) /* U+2400-U+243F */ + /* Bit 41 Optical Character Recognition */ +#define TT_UCR_OCR (1L << 9) /* U+2440-U+245F */ + /* Bit 42 Enclosed Alphanumerics */ +#define TT_UCR_ENCLOSED_ALPHANUMERICS (1L << 10) /* U+2460-U+24FF */ + /* Bit 43 Box Drawing */ +#define TT_UCR_BOX_DRAWING (1L << 11) /* U+2500-U+257F */ + /* Bit 44 Block Elements */ +#define TT_UCR_BLOCK_ELEMENTS (1L << 12) /* U+2580-U+259F */ + /* Bit 45 Geometric Shapes */ +#define TT_UCR_GEOMETRIC_SHAPES (1L << 13) /* U+25A0-U+25FF */ + /* Bit 46 Miscellaneous Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_MISCELLANEOUS_SYMBOLS (1L << 14) /* U+2600-U+26FF */ + /* Bit 47 Dingbats */ +#define TT_UCR_DINGBATS (1L << 15) /* U+2700-U+27BF */ + /* Bit 48 CJK Symbols and Punctuation */ +#define TT_UCR_CJK_SYMBOLS (1L << 16) /* U+3000-U+303F */ + /* Bit 49 Hiragana */ +#define TT_UCR_HIRAGANA (1L << 17) /* U+3040-U+309F */ + /* Bit 50 Katakana */ + /* Katakana Phonetic Extensions */ +#define TT_UCR_KATAKANA (1L << 18) /* U+30A0-U+30FF */ + /* U+31F0-U+31FF */ + /* Bit 51 Bopomofo */ + /* Bopomofo Extended */ +#define TT_UCR_BOPOMOFO (1L << 19) /* U+3100-U+312F */ + /* U+31A0-U+31BF */ + /* Bit 52 Hangul Compatibility Jamo */ +#define TT_UCR_HANGUL_COMPATIBILITY_JAMO (1L << 20) /* U+3130-U+318F */ + /* Bit 53 Phags-Pa */ +#define TT_UCR_CJK_MISC (1L << 21) /* U+A840-U+A87F */ +#define TT_UCR_KANBUN TT_UCR_CJK_MISC /* deprecated */ +#define TT_UCR_PHAGSPA + /* Bit 54 Enclosed CJK Letters and Months */ +#define TT_UCR_ENCLOSED_CJK_LETTERS_MONTHS (1L << 22) /* U+3200-U+32FF */ + /* Bit 55 CJK Compatibility */ +#define TT_UCR_CJK_COMPATIBILITY (1L << 23) /* U+3300-U+33FF */ + /* Bit 56 Hangul Syllables */ +#define TT_UCR_HANGUL (1L << 24) /* U+AC00-U+D7A3 */ + /* Bit 57 High Surrogates */ + /* High Private Use Surrogates */ + /* Low Surrogates */ + + /* According to OpenType specs v.1.3+, */ + /* setting bit 57 implies that there is */ + /* at least one codepoint beyond the */ + /* Basic Multilingual Plane that is */ + /* supported by this font. So it really */ + /* means >= U+10000. */ +#define TT_UCR_SURROGATES (1L << 25) /* U+D800-U+DB7F */ + /* U+DB80-U+DBFF */ + /* U+DC00-U+DFFF */ +#define TT_UCR_NON_PLANE_0 TT_UCR_SURROGATES + /* Bit 58 Phoenician */ +#define TT_UCR_PHOENICIAN (1L << 26) /*U+10900-U+1091F*/ + /* Bit 59 CJK Unified Ideographs */ + /* CJK Radicals Supplement */ + /* Kangxi Radicals */ + /* Ideographic Description Characters */ + /* CJK Unified Ideographs Extension A */ + /* CJK Unified Ideographs Extension B */ + /* Kanbun */ +#define TT_UCR_CJK_UNIFIED_IDEOGRAPHS (1L << 27) /* U+4E00-U+9FFF */ + /* U+2E80-U+2EFF */ + /* U+2F00-U+2FDF */ + /* U+2FF0-U+2FFF */ + /* U+3400-U+4DB5 */ + /*U+20000-U+2A6DF*/ + /* U+3190-U+319F */ + /* Bit 60 Private Use */ +#define TT_UCR_PRIVATE_USE (1L << 28) /* U+E000-U+F8FF */ + /* Bit 61 CJK Strokes */ + /* CJK Compatibility Ideographs */ + /* CJK Compatibility Ideographs Supplement */ +#define TT_UCR_CJK_COMPATIBILITY_IDEOGRAPHS (1L << 29) /* U+31C0-U+31EF */ + /* U+F900-U+FAFF */ + /*U+2F800-U+2FA1F*/ + /* Bit 62 Alphabetic Presentation Forms */ +#define TT_UCR_ALPHABETIC_PRESENTATION_FORMS (1L << 30) /* U+FB00-U+FB4F */ + /* Bit 63 Arabic Presentation Forms-A */ +#define TT_UCR_ARABIC_PRESENTATION_FORMS_A (1L << 31) /* U+FB50-U+FDFF */ + + /* ulUnicodeRange3 */ + /* --------------- */ + + /* Bit 64 Combining Half Marks */ +#define TT_UCR_COMBINING_HALF_MARKS (1L << 0) /* U+FE20-U+FE2F */ + /* Bit 65 Vertical forms */ + /* CJK Compatibility Forms */ +#define TT_UCR_CJK_COMPATIBILITY_FORMS (1L << 1) /* U+FE10-U+FE1F */ + /* U+FE30-U+FE4F */ + /* Bit 66 Small Form Variants */ +#define TT_UCR_SMALL_FORM_VARIANTS (1L << 2) /* U+FE50-U+FE6F */ + /* Bit 67 Arabic Presentation Forms-B */ +#define TT_UCR_ARABIC_PRESENTATION_FORMS_B (1L << 3) /* U+FE70-U+FEFE */ + /* Bit 68 Halfwidth and Fullwidth Forms */ +#define TT_UCR_HALFWIDTH_FULLWIDTH_FORMS (1L << 4) /* U+FF00-U+FFEF */ + /* Bit 69 Specials */ +#define TT_UCR_SPECIALS (1L << 5) /* U+FFF0-U+FFFD */ + /* Bit 70 Tibetan */ +#define TT_UCR_TIBETAN (1L << 6) /* U+0F00-U+0FFF */ + /* Bit 71 Syriac */ +#define TT_UCR_SYRIAC (1L << 7) /* U+0700-U+074F */ + /* Bit 72 Thaana */ +#define TT_UCR_THAANA (1L << 8) /* U+0780-U+07BF */ + /* Bit 73 Sinhala */ +#define TT_UCR_SINHALA (1L << 9) /* U+0D80-U+0DFF */ + /* Bit 74 Myanmar */ +#define TT_UCR_MYANMAR (1L << 10) /* U+1000-U+109F */ + /* Bit 75 Ethiopic */ + /* Ethiopic Supplement */ + /* Ethiopic Extended */ +#define TT_UCR_ETHIOPIC (1L << 11) /* U+1200-U+137F */ + /* U+1380-U+139F */ + /* U+2D80-U+2DDF */ + /* Bit 76 Cherokee */ +#define TT_UCR_CHEROKEE (1L << 12) /* U+13A0-U+13FF */ + /* Bit 77 Unified Canadian Aboriginal Syllabics */ +#define TT_UCR_CANADIAN_ABORIGINAL_SYLLABICS (1L << 13) /* U+1400-U+167F */ + /* Bit 78 Ogham */ +#define TT_UCR_OGHAM (1L << 14) /* U+1680-U+169F */ + /* Bit 79 Runic */ +#define TT_UCR_RUNIC (1L << 15) /* U+16A0-U+16FF */ + /* Bit 80 Khmer */ + /* Khmer Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_KHMER (1L << 16) /* U+1780-U+17FF */ + /* U+19E0-U+19FF */ + /* Bit 81 Mongolian */ +#define TT_UCR_MONGOLIAN (1L << 17) /* U+1800-U+18AF */ + /* Bit 82 Braille Patterns */ +#define TT_UCR_BRAILLE (1L << 18) /* U+2800-U+28FF */ + /* Bit 83 Yi Syllables */ + /* Yi Radicals */ +#define TT_UCR_YI (1L << 19) /* U+A000-U+A48F */ + /* U+A490-U+A4CF */ + /* Bit 84 Tagalog */ + /* Hanunoo */ + /* Buhid */ + /* Tagbanwa */ +#define TT_UCR_PHILIPPINE (1L << 20) /* U+1700-U+171F */ + /* U+1720-U+173F */ + /* U+1740-U+175F */ + /* U+1760-U+177F */ + /* Bit 85 Old Italic */ +#define TT_UCR_OLD_ITALIC (1L << 21) /*U+10300-U+1032F*/ + /* Bit 86 Gothic */ +#define TT_UCR_GOTHIC (1L << 22) /*U+10330-U+1034F*/ + /* Bit 87 Deseret */ +#define TT_UCR_DESERET (1L << 23) /*U+10400-U+1044F*/ + /* Bit 88 Byzantine Musical Symbols */ + /* Musical Symbols */ + /* Ancient Greek Musical Notation */ +#define TT_UCR_MUSICAL_SYMBOLS (1L << 24) /*U+1D000-U+1D0FF*/ + /*U+1D100-U+1D1FF*/ + /*U+1D200-U+1D24F*/ + /* Bit 89 Mathematical Alphanumeric Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_MATH_ALPHANUMERIC_SYMBOLS (1L << 25) /*U+1D400-U+1D7FF*/ + /* Bit 90 Private Use (plane 15) */ + /* Private Use (plane 16) */ +#define TT_UCR_PRIVATE_USE_SUPPLEMENTARY (1L << 26) /*U+F0000-U+FFFFD*/ + /*U+100000-U+10FFFD*/ + /* Bit 91 Variation Selectors */ + /* Variation Selectors Supplement */ +#define TT_UCR_VARIATION_SELECTORS (1L << 27) /* U+FE00-U+FE0F */ + /*U+E0100-U+E01EF*/ + /* Bit 92 Tags */ +#define TT_UCR_TAGS (1L << 28) /*U+E0000-U+E007F*/ + /* Bit 93 Limbu */ +#define TT_UCR_LIMBU (1L << 29) /* U+1900-U+194F */ + /* Bit 94 Tai Le */ +#define TT_UCR_TAI_LE (1L << 30) /* U+1950-U+197F */ + /* Bit 95 New Tai Lue */ +#define TT_UCR_NEW_TAI_LUE (1L << 31) /* U+1980-U+19DF */ + + /* ulUnicodeRange4 */ + /* --------------- */ + + /* Bit 96 Buginese */ +#define TT_UCR_BUGINESE (1L << 0) /* U+1A00-U+1A1F */ + /* Bit 97 Glagolitic */ +#define TT_UCR_GLAGOLITIC (1L << 1) /* U+2C00-U+2C5F */ + /* Bit 98 Tifinagh */ +#define TT_UCR_TIFINAGH (1L << 2) /* U+2D30-U+2D7F */ + /* Bit 99 Yijing Hexagram Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_YIJING (1L << 3) /* U+4DC0-U+4DFF */ + /* Bit 100 Syloti Nagri */ +#define TT_UCR_SYLOTI_NAGRI (1L << 4) /* U+A800-U+A82F */ + /* Bit 101 Linear B Syllabary */ + /* Linear B Ideograms */ + /* Aegean Numbers */ +#define TT_UCR_LINEAR_B (1L << 5) /*U+10000-U+1007F*/ + /*U+10080-U+100FF*/ + /*U+10100-U+1013F*/ + /* Bit 102 Ancient Greek Numbers */ +#define TT_UCR_ANCIENT_GREEK_NUMBERS (1L << 6) /*U+10140-U+1018F*/ + /* Bit 103 Ugaritic */ +#define TT_UCR_UGARITIC (1L << 7) /*U+10380-U+1039F*/ + /* Bit 104 Old Persian */ +#define TT_UCR_OLD_PERSIAN (1L << 8) /*U+103A0-U+103DF*/ + /* Bit 105 Shavian */ +#define TT_UCR_SHAVIAN (1L << 9) /*U+10450-U+1047F*/ + /* Bit 106 Osmanya */ +#define TT_UCR_OSMANYA (1L << 10) /*U+10480-U+104AF*/ + /* Bit 107 Cypriot Syllabary */ +#define TT_UCR_CYPRIOT_SYLLABARY (1L << 11) /*U+10800-U+1083F*/ + /* Bit 108 Kharoshthi */ +#define TT_UCR_KHAROSHTHI (1L << 12) /*U+10A00-U+10A5F*/ + /* Bit 109 Tai Xuan Jing Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_TAI_XUAN_JING (1L << 13) /*U+1D300-U+1D35F*/ + /* Bit 110 Cuneiform */ + /* Cuneiform Numbers and Punctuation */ +#define TT_UCR_CUNEIFORM (1L << 14) /*U+12000-U+123FF*/ + /*U+12400-U+1247F*/ + /* Bit 111 Counting Rod Numerals */ +#define TT_UCR_COUNTING_ROD_NUMERALS (1L << 15) /*U+1D360-U+1D37F*/ + /* Bit 112 Sundanese */ +#define TT_UCR_SUNDANESE (1L << 16) /* U+1B80-U+1BBF */ + /* Bit 113 Lepcha */ +#define TT_UCR_LEPCHA (1L << 17) /* U+1C00-U+1C4F */ + /* Bit 114 Ol Chiki */ +#define TT_UCR_OL_CHIKI (1L << 18) /* U+1C50-U+1C7F */ + /* Bit 115 Saurashtra */ +#define TT_UCR_SAURASHTRA (1L << 19) /* U+A880-U+A8DF */ + /* Bit 116 Kayah Li */ +#define TT_UCR_KAYAH_LI (1L << 20) /* U+A900-U+A92F */ + /* Bit 117 Rejang */ +#define TT_UCR_REJANG (1L << 21) /* U+A930-U+A95F */ + /* Bit 118 Cham */ +#define TT_UCR_CHAM (1L << 22) /* U+AA00-U+AA5F */ + /* Bit 119 Ancient Symbols */ +#define TT_UCR_ANCIENT_SYMBOLS (1L << 23) /*U+10190-U+101CF*/ + /* Bit 120 Phaistos Disc */ +#define TT_UCR_PHAISTOS_DISC (1L << 24) /*U+101D0-U+101FF*/ + /* Bit 121 Carian */ + /* Lycian */ + /* Lydian */ +#define TT_UCR_OLD_ANATOLIAN (1L << 25) /*U+102A0-U+102DF*/ + /*U+10280-U+1029F*/ + /*U+10920-U+1093F*/ + /* Bit 122 Domino Tiles */ + /* Mahjong Tiles */ +#define TT_UCR_GAME_TILES (1L << 26) /*U+1F030-U+1F09F*/ + /*U+1F000-U+1F02F*/ + /* Bit 123-127 Reserved for process-internal usage */ + + /* */ + + /* for backward compatibility with older FreeType versions */ +#define TT_UCR_ARABIC_PRESENTATION_A \ + TT_UCR_ARABIC_PRESENTATION_FORMS_A +#define TT_UCR_ARABIC_PRESENTATION_B \ + TT_UCR_ARABIC_PRESENTATION_FORMS_B + +#define TT_UCR_COMBINING_DIACRITICS \ + TT_UCR_COMBINING_DIACRITICAL_MARKS +#define TT_UCR_COMBINING_DIACRITICS_SYMB \ + TT_UCR_COMBINING_DIACRITICAL_MARKS_SYMB + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* TTNAMEID_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/tttables.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/tttables.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d04f810 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/tttables.h @@ -0,0 +1,856 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * tttables.h + * + * Basic SFNT/TrueType tables definitions and interface + * (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef TTTABLES_H_ +#define TTTABLES_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @section: + * truetype_tables + * + * @title: + * TrueType Tables + * + * @abstract: + * TrueType-specific table types and functions. + * + * @description: + * This section contains definitions of some basic tables specific to + * TrueType and OpenType as well as some routines used to access and + * process them. + * + * @order: + * TT_Header + * TT_HoriHeader + * TT_VertHeader + * TT_OS2 + * TT_Postscript + * TT_PCLT + * TT_MaxProfile + * + * FT_Sfnt_Tag + * FT_Get_Sfnt_Table + * FT_Load_Sfnt_Table + * FT_Sfnt_Table_Info + * + * FT_Get_CMap_Language_ID + * FT_Get_CMap_Format + * + * FT_PARAM_TAG_UNPATENTED_HINTING + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_Header + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a TrueType font header table. All fields follow + * the OpenType specification. The 64-bit timestamps are stored in + * two-element arrays `Created` and `Modified`, first the upper then + * the lower 32~bits. + */ + typedef struct TT_Header_ + { + FT_Fixed Table_Version; + FT_Fixed Font_Revision; + + FT_Long CheckSum_Adjust; + FT_Long Magic_Number; + + FT_UShort Flags; + FT_UShort Units_Per_EM; + + FT_ULong Created [2]; + FT_ULong Modified[2]; + + FT_Short xMin; + FT_Short yMin; + FT_Short xMax; + FT_Short yMax; + + FT_UShort Mac_Style; + FT_UShort Lowest_Rec_PPEM; + + FT_Short Font_Direction; + FT_Short Index_To_Loc_Format; + FT_Short Glyph_Data_Format; + + } TT_Header; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_HoriHeader + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a TrueType horizontal header, the 'hhea' table, + * as well as the corresponding horizontal metrics table, 'hmtx'. + * + * @fields: + * Version :: + * The table version. + * + * Ascender :: + * The font's ascender, i.e., the distance from the baseline to the + * top-most of all glyph points found in the font. + * + * This value is invalid in many fonts, as it is usually set by the + * font designer, and often reflects only a portion of the glyphs found + * in the font (maybe ASCII). + * + * You should use the `sTypoAscender` field of the 'OS/2' table instead + * if you want the correct one. + * + * Descender :: + * The font's descender, i.e., the distance from the baseline to the + * bottom-most of all glyph points found in the font. It is negative. + * + * This value is invalid in many fonts, as it is usually set by the + * font designer, and often reflects only a portion of the glyphs found + * in the font (maybe ASCII). + * + * You should use the `sTypoDescender` field of the 'OS/2' table + * instead if you want the correct one. + * + * Line_Gap :: + * The font's line gap, i.e., the distance to add to the ascender and + * descender to get the BTB, i.e., the baseline-to-baseline distance + * for the font. + * + * advance_Width_Max :: + * This field is the maximum of all advance widths found in the font. + * It can be used to compute the maximum width of an arbitrary string + * of text. + * + * min_Left_Side_Bearing :: + * The minimum left side bearing of all glyphs within the font. + * + * min_Right_Side_Bearing :: + * The minimum right side bearing of all glyphs within the font. + * + * xMax_Extent :: + * The maximum horizontal extent (i.e., the 'width' of a glyph's + * bounding box) for all glyphs in the font. + * + * caret_Slope_Rise :: + * The rise coefficient of the cursor's slope of the cursor + * (slope=rise/run). + * + * caret_Slope_Run :: + * The run coefficient of the cursor's slope. + * + * caret_Offset :: + * The cursor's offset for slanted fonts. + * + * Reserved :: + * 8~reserved bytes. + * + * metric_Data_Format :: + * Always~0. + * + * number_Of_HMetrics :: + * Number of HMetrics entries in the 'hmtx' table -- this value can be + * smaller than the total number of glyphs in the font. + * + * long_metrics :: + * A pointer into the 'hmtx' table. + * + * short_metrics :: + * A pointer into the 'hmtx' table. + * + * @note: + * For an OpenType variation font, the values of the following fields can + * change after a call to @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates (and friends) if + * the font contains an 'MVAR' table: `caret_Slope_Rise`, + * `caret_Slope_Run`, and `caret_Offset`. + */ + typedef struct TT_HoriHeader_ + { + FT_Fixed Version; + FT_Short Ascender; + FT_Short Descender; + FT_Short Line_Gap; + + FT_UShort advance_Width_Max; /* advance width maximum */ + + FT_Short min_Left_Side_Bearing; /* minimum left-sb */ + FT_Short min_Right_Side_Bearing; /* minimum right-sb */ + FT_Short xMax_Extent; /* xmax extents */ + FT_Short caret_Slope_Rise; + FT_Short caret_Slope_Run; + FT_Short caret_Offset; + + FT_Short Reserved[4]; + + FT_Short metric_Data_Format; + FT_UShort number_Of_HMetrics; + + /* The following fields are not defined by the OpenType specification */ + /* but they are used to connect the metrics header to the relevant */ + /* 'hmtx' table. */ + + void* long_metrics; + void* short_metrics; + + } TT_HoriHeader; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_VertHeader + * + * @description: + * A structure used to model a TrueType vertical header, the 'vhea' + * table, as well as the corresponding vertical metrics table, 'vmtx'. + * + * @fields: + * Version :: + * The table version. + * + * Ascender :: + * The font's ascender, i.e., the distance from the baseline to the + * top-most of all glyph points found in the font. + * + * This value is invalid in many fonts, as it is usually set by the + * font designer, and often reflects only a portion of the glyphs found + * in the font (maybe ASCII). + * + * You should use the `sTypoAscender` field of the 'OS/2' table instead + * if you want the correct one. + * + * Descender :: + * The font's descender, i.e., the distance from the baseline to the + * bottom-most of all glyph points found in the font. It is negative. + * + * This value is invalid in many fonts, as it is usually set by the + * font designer, and often reflects only a portion of the glyphs found + * in the font (maybe ASCII). + * + * You should use the `sTypoDescender` field of the 'OS/2' table + * instead if you want the correct one. + * + * Line_Gap :: + * The font's line gap, i.e., the distance to add to the ascender and + * descender to get the BTB, i.e., the baseline-to-baseline distance + * for the font. + * + * advance_Height_Max :: + * This field is the maximum of all advance heights found in the font. + * It can be used to compute the maximum height of an arbitrary string + * of text. + * + * min_Top_Side_Bearing :: + * The minimum top side bearing of all glyphs within the font. + * + * min_Bottom_Side_Bearing :: + * The minimum bottom side bearing of all glyphs within the font. + * + * yMax_Extent :: + * The maximum vertical extent (i.e., the 'height' of a glyph's + * bounding box) for all glyphs in the font. + * + * caret_Slope_Rise :: + * The rise coefficient of the cursor's slope of the cursor + * (slope=rise/run). + * + * caret_Slope_Run :: + * The run coefficient of the cursor's slope. + * + * caret_Offset :: + * The cursor's offset for slanted fonts. + * + * Reserved :: + * 8~reserved bytes. + * + * metric_Data_Format :: + * Always~0. + * + * number_Of_VMetrics :: + * Number of VMetrics entries in the 'vmtx' table -- this value can be + * smaller than the total number of glyphs in the font. + * + * long_metrics :: + * A pointer into the 'vmtx' table. + * + * short_metrics :: + * A pointer into the 'vmtx' table. + * + * @note: + * For an OpenType variation font, the values of the following fields can + * change after a call to @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates (and friends) if + * the font contains an 'MVAR' table: `Ascender`, `Descender`, + * `Line_Gap`, `caret_Slope_Rise`, `caret_Slope_Run`, and `caret_Offset`. + */ + typedef struct TT_VertHeader_ + { + FT_Fixed Version; + FT_Short Ascender; + FT_Short Descender; + FT_Short Line_Gap; + + FT_UShort advance_Height_Max; /* advance height maximum */ + + FT_Short min_Top_Side_Bearing; /* minimum top-sb */ + FT_Short min_Bottom_Side_Bearing; /* minimum bottom-sb */ + FT_Short yMax_Extent; /* ymax extents */ + FT_Short caret_Slope_Rise; + FT_Short caret_Slope_Run; + FT_Short caret_Offset; + + FT_Short Reserved[4]; + + FT_Short metric_Data_Format; + FT_UShort number_Of_VMetrics; + + /* The following fields are not defined by the OpenType specification */ + /* but they are used to connect the metrics header to the relevant */ + /* 'vmtx' table. */ + + void* long_metrics; + void* short_metrics; + + } TT_VertHeader; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_OS2 + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a TrueType 'OS/2' table. All fields comply to + * the OpenType specification. + * + * Note that we now support old Mac fonts that do not include an 'OS/2' + * table. In this case, the `version` field is always set to 0xFFFF. + * + * @note: + * For an OpenType variation font, the values of the following fields can + * change after a call to @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates (and friends) if + * the font contains an 'MVAR' table: `sCapHeight`, `sTypoAscender`, + * `sTypoDescender`, `sTypoLineGap`, `sxHeight`, `usWinAscent`, + * `usWinDescent`, `yStrikeoutPosition`, `yStrikeoutSize`, + * `ySubscriptXOffset`, `ySubScriptXSize`, `ySubscriptYOffset`, + * `ySubscriptYSize`, `ySuperscriptXOffset`, `ySuperscriptXSize`, + * `ySuperscriptYOffset`, and `ySuperscriptYSize`. + * + * Possible values for bits in the `ulUnicodeRangeX` fields are given by + * the @TT_UCR_XXX macros. + */ + + typedef struct TT_OS2_ + { + FT_UShort version; /* 0x0001 - more or 0xFFFF */ + FT_Short xAvgCharWidth; + FT_UShort usWeightClass; + FT_UShort usWidthClass; + FT_UShort fsType; + FT_Short ySubscriptXSize; + FT_Short ySubscriptYSize; + FT_Short ySubscriptXOffset; + FT_Short ySubscriptYOffset; + FT_Short ySuperscriptXSize; + FT_Short ySuperscriptYSize; + FT_Short ySuperscriptXOffset; + FT_Short ySuperscriptYOffset; + FT_Short yStrikeoutSize; + FT_Short yStrikeoutPosition; + FT_Short sFamilyClass; + + FT_Byte panose[10]; + + FT_ULong ulUnicodeRange1; /* Bits 0-31 */ + FT_ULong ulUnicodeRange2; /* Bits 32-63 */ + FT_ULong ulUnicodeRange3; /* Bits 64-95 */ + FT_ULong ulUnicodeRange4; /* Bits 96-127 */ + + FT_Char achVendID[4]; + + FT_UShort fsSelection; + FT_UShort usFirstCharIndex; + FT_UShort usLastCharIndex; + FT_Short sTypoAscender; + FT_Short sTypoDescender; + FT_Short sTypoLineGap; + FT_UShort usWinAscent; + FT_UShort usWinDescent; + + /* only version 1 and higher: */ + + FT_ULong ulCodePageRange1; /* Bits 0-31 */ + FT_ULong ulCodePageRange2; /* Bits 32-63 */ + + /* only version 2 and higher: */ + + FT_Short sxHeight; + FT_Short sCapHeight; + FT_UShort usDefaultChar; + FT_UShort usBreakChar; + FT_UShort usMaxContext; + + /* only version 5 and higher: */ + + FT_UShort usLowerOpticalPointSize; /* in twips (1/20th points) */ + FT_UShort usUpperOpticalPointSize; /* in twips (1/20th points) */ + + } TT_OS2; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_Postscript + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a TrueType 'post' table. All fields comply to + * the OpenType specification. This structure does not reference a + * font's PostScript glyph names; use @FT_Get_Glyph_Name to retrieve + * them. + * + * @note: + * For an OpenType variation font, the values of the following fields can + * change after a call to @FT_Set_Var_Design_Coordinates (and friends) if + * the font contains an 'MVAR' table: `underlinePosition` and + * `underlineThickness`. + */ + typedef struct TT_Postscript_ + { + FT_Fixed FormatType; + FT_Fixed italicAngle; + FT_Short underlinePosition; + FT_Short underlineThickness; + FT_ULong isFixedPitch; + FT_ULong minMemType42; + FT_ULong maxMemType42; + FT_ULong minMemType1; + FT_ULong maxMemType1; + + /* Glyph names follow in the 'post' table, but we don't */ + /* load them by default. */ + + } TT_Postscript; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_PCLT + * + * @description: + * A structure to model a TrueType 'PCLT' table. All fields comply to + * the OpenType specification. + */ + typedef struct TT_PCLT_ + { + FT_Fixed Version; + FT_ULong FontNumber; + FT_UShort Pitch; + FT_UShort xHeight; + FT_UShort Style; + FT_UShort TypeFamily; + FT_UShort CapHeight; + FT_UShort SymbolSet; + FT_Char TypeFace[16]; + FT_Char CharacterComplement[8]; + FT_Char FileName[6]; + FT_Char StrokeWeight; + FT_Char WidthType; + FT_Byte SerifStyle; + FT_Byte Reserved; + + } TT_PCLT; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @struct: + * TT_MaxProfile + * + * @description: + * The maximum profile ('maxp') table contains many max values, which can + * be used to pre-allocate arrays for speeding up glyph loading and + * hinting. + * + * @fields: + * version :: + * The version number. + * + * numGlyphs :: + * The number of glyphs in this TrueType font. + * + * maxPoints :: + * The maximum number of points in a non-composite TrueType glyph. See + * also `maxCompositePoints`. + * + * maxContours :: + * The maximum number of contours in a non-composite TrueType glyph. + * See also `maxCompositeContours`. + * + * maxCompositePoints :: + * The maximum number of points in a composite TrueType glyph. See + * also `maxPoints`. + * + * maxCompositeContours :: + * The maximum number of contours in a composite TrueType glyph. See + * also `maxContours`. + * + * maxZones :: + * The maximum number of zones used for glyph hinting. + * + * maxTwilightPoints :: + * The maximum number of points in the twilight zone used for glyph + * hinting. + * + * maxStorage :: + * The maximum number of elements in the storage area used for glyph + * hinting. + * + * maxFunctionDefs :: + * The maximum number of function definitions in the TrueType bytecode + * for this font. + * + * maxInstructionDefs :: + * The maximum number of instruction definitions in the TrueType + * bytecode for this font. + * + * maxStackElements :: + * The maximum number of stack elements used during bytecode + * interpretation. + * + * maxSizeOfInstructions :: + * The maximum number of TrueType opcodes used for glyph hinting. + * + * maxComponentElements :: + * The maximum number of simple (i.e., non-composite) glyphs in a + * composite glyph. + * + * maxComponentDepth :: + * The maximum nesting depth of composite glyphs. + * + * @note: + * This structure is only used during font loading. + */ + typedef struct TT_MaxProfile_ + { + FT_Fixed version; + FT_UShort numGlyphs; + FT_UShort maxPoints; + FT_UShort maxContours; + FT_UShort maxCompositePoints; + FT_UShort maxCompositeContours; + FT_UShort maxZones; + FT_UShort maxTwilightPoints; + FT_UShort maxStorage; + FT_UShort maxFunctionDefs; + FT_UShort maxInstructionDefs; + FT_UShort maxStackElements; + FT_UShort maxSizeOfInstructions; + FT_UShort maxComponentElements; + FT_UShort maxComponentDepth; + + } TT_MaxProfile; + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @enum: + * FT_Sfnt_Tag + * + * @description: + * An enumeration to specify indices of SFNT tables loaded and parsed by + * FreeType during initialization of an SFNT font. Used in the + * @FT_Get_Sfnt_Table API function. + * + * @values: + * FT_SFNT_HEAD :: + * To access the font's @TT_Header structure. + * + * FT_SFNT_MAXP :: + * To access the font's @TT_MaxProfile structure. + * + * FT_SFNT_OS2 :: + * To access the font's @TT_OS2 structure. + * + * FT_SFNT_HHEA :: + * To access the font's @TT_HoriHeader structure. + * + * FT_SFNT_VHEA :: + * To access the font's @TT_VertHeader structure. + * + * FT_SFNT_POST :: + * To access the font's @TT_Postscript structure. + * + * FT_SFNT_PCLT :: + * To access the font's @TT_PCLT structure. + */ + typedef enum FT_Sfnt_Tag_ + { + FT_SFNT_HEAD, + FT_SFNT_MAXP, + FT_SFNT_OS2, + FT_SFNT_HHEA, + FT_SFNT_VHEA, + FT_SFNT_POST, + FT_SFNT_PCLT, + + FT_SFNT_MAX + + } FT_Sfnt_Tag; + + /* these constants are deprecated; use the corresponding `FT_Sfnt_Tag` */ + /* values instead */ +#define ft_sfnt_head FT_SFNT_HEAD +#define ft_sfnt_maxp FT_SFNT_MAXP +#define ft_sfnt_os2 FT_SFNT_OS2 +#define ft_sfnt_hhea FT_SFNT_HHEA +#define ft_sfnt_vhea FT_SFNT_VHEA +#define ft_sfnt_post FT_SFNT_POST +#define ft_sfnt_pclt FT_SFNT_PCLT + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_Sfnt_Table + * + * @description: + * Return a pointer to a given SFNT table stored within a face. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source. + * + * tag :: + * The index of the SFNT table. + * + * @return: + * A type-less pointer to the table. This will be `NULL` in case of + * error, or if the corresponding table was not found **OR** loaded from + * the file. + * + * Use a typecast according to `tag` to access the structure elements. + * + * @note: + * The table is owned by the face object and disappears with it. + * + * This function is only useful to access SFNT tables that are loaded by + * the sfnt, truetype, and opentype drivers. See @FT_Sfnt_Tag for a + * list. + * + * @example: + * Here is an example demonstrating access to the 'vhea' table. + * + * ``` + * TT_VertHeader* vert_header; + * + * + * vert_header = + * (TT_VertHeader*)FT_Get_Sfnt_Table( face, FT_SFNT_VHEA ); + * ``` + */ + FT_EXPORT( void* ) + FT_Get_Sfnt_Table( FT_Face face, + FT_Sfnt_Tag tag ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Load_Sfnt_Table + * + * @description: + * Load any SFNT font table into client memory. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * tag :: + * The four-byte tag of the table to load. Use value~0 if you want to + * access the whole font file. Otherwise, you can use one of the + * definitions found in the @FT_TRUETYPE_TAGS_H file, or forge a new + * one with @FT_MAKE_TAG. + * + * offset :: + * The starting offset in the table (or file if tag~==~0). + * + * @output: + * buffer :: + * The target buffer address. The client must ensure that the memory + * array is big enough to hold the data. + * + * @inout: + * length :: + * If the `length` parameter is `NULL`, try to load the whole table. + * Return an error code if it fails. + * + * Else, if `*length` is~0, exit immediately while returning the + * table's (or file) full size in it. + * + * Else the number of bytes to read from the table or file, from the + * starting offset. + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * If you need to determine the table's length you should first call this + * function with `*length` set to~0, as in the following example: + * + * ``` + * FT_ULong length = 0; + * + * + * error = FT_Load_Sfnt_Table( face, tag, 0, NULL, &length ); + * if ( error ) { ... table does not exist ... } + * + * buffer = malloc( length ); + * if ( buffer == NULL ) { ... not enough memory ... } + * + * error = FT_Load_Sfnt_Table( face, tag, 0, buffer, &length ); + * if ( error ) { ... could not load table ... } + * ``` + * + * Note that structures like @TT_Header or @TT_OS2 can't be used with + * this function; they are limited to @FT_Get_Sfnt_Table. Reason is that + * those structures depend on the processor architecture, with varying + * size (e.g. 32bit vs. 64bit) or order (big endian vs. little endian). + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Load_Sfnt_Table( FT_Face face, + FT_ULong tag, + FT_Long offset, + FT_Byte* buffer, + FT_ULong* length ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Sfnt_Table_Info + * + * @description: + * Return information on an SFNT table. + * + * @input: + * face :: + * A handle to the source face. + * + * table_index :: + * The index of an SFNT table. The function returns + * FT_Err_Table_Missing for an invalid value. + * + * @inout: + * tag :: + * The name tag of the SFNT table. If the value is `NULL`, + * `table_index` is ignored, and `length` returns the number of SFNT + * tables in the font. + * + * @output: + * length :: + * The length of the SFNT table (or the number of SFNT tables, + * depending on `tag`). + * + * @return: + * FreeType error code. 0~means success. + * + * @note: + * While parsing fonts, FreeType handles SFNT tables with length zero as + * missing. + * + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Error ) + FT_Sfnt_Table_Info( FT_Face face, + FT_UInt table_index, + FT_ULong *tag, + FT_ULong *length ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_CMap_Language_ID + * + * @description: + * Return cmap language ID as specified in the OpenType standard. + * Definitions of language ID values are in file @FT_TRUETYPE_IDS_H. + * + * @input: + * charmap :: + * The target charmap. + * + * @return: + * The language ID of `charmap`. If `charmap` doesn't belong to an SFNT + * face, just return~0 as the default value. + * + * For a format~14 cmap (to access Unicode IVS), the return value is + * 0xFFFFFFFF. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_ULong ) + FT_Get_CMap_Language_ID( FT_CharMap charmap ); + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * @function: + * FT_Get_CMap_Format + * + * @description: + * Return the format of an SFNT 'cmap' table. + * + * @input: + * charmap :: + * The target charmap. + * + * @return: + * The format of `charmap`. If `charmap` doesn't belong to an SFNT face, + * return -1. + */ + FT_EXPORT( FT_Long ) + FT_Get_CMap_Format( FT_CharMap charmap ); + + /* */ + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* TTTABLES_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/tttags.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/tttags.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bd0986e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/freetype/tttags.h @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * tttags.h + * + * Tags for TrueType and OpenType tables (specification only). + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + +#ifndef TTAGS_H_ +#define TTAGS_H_ + + +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H + +#ifdef FREETYPE_H +#error "freetype.h of FreeType 1 has been loaded!" +#error "Please fix the directory search order for header files" +#error "so that freetype.h of FreeType 2 is found first." +#endif + + +FT_BEGIN_HEADER + + +#define TTAG_avar FT_MAKE_TAG( 'a', 'v', 'a', 'r' ) +#define TTAG_BASE FT_MAKE_TAG( 'B', 'A', 'S', 'E' ) +#define TTAG_bdat FT_MAKE_TAG( 'b', 'd', 'a', 't' ) +#define TTAG_BDF FT_MAKE_TAG( 'B', 'D', 'F', ' ' ) +#define TTAG_bhed FT_MAKE_TAG( 'b', 'h', 'e', 'd' ) +#define TTAG_bloc FT_MAKE_TAG( 'b', 'l', 'o', 'c' ) +#define TTAG_bsln FT_MAKE_TAG( 'b', 's', 'l', 'n' ) +#define TTAG_CBDT FT_MAKE_TAG( 'C', 'B', 'D', 'T' ) +#define TTAG_CBLC FT_MAKE_TAG( 'C', 'B', 'L', 'C' ) +#define TTAG_CFF FT_MAKE_TAG( 'C', 'F', 'F', ' ' ) +#define TTAG_CFF2 FT_MAKE_TAG( 'C', 'F', 'F', '2' ) +#define TTAG_CID FT_MAKE_TAG( 'C', 'I', 'D', ' ' ) +#define TTAG_cmap FT_MAKE_TAG( 'c', 'm', 'a', 'p' ) +#define TTAG_COLR FT_MAKE_TAG( 'C', 'O', 'L', 'R' ) +#define TTAG_CPAL FT_MAKE_TAG( 'C', 'P', 'A', 'L' ) +#define TTAG_cvar FT_MAKE_TAG( 'c', 'v', 'a', 'r' ) +#define TTAG_cvt FT_MAKE_TAG( 'c', 'v', 't', ' ' ) +#define TTAG_DSIG FT_MAKE_TAG( 'D', 'S', 'I', 'G' ) +#define TTAG_EBDT FT_MAKE_TAG( 'E', 'B', 'D', 'T' ) +#define TTAG_EBLC FT_MAKE_TAG( 'E', 'B', 'L', 'C' ) +#define TTAG_EBSC FT_MAKE_TAG( 'E', 'B', 'S', 'C' ) +#define TTAG_feat FT_MAKE_TAG( 'f', 'e', 'a', 't' ) +#define TTAG_FOND FT_MAKE_TAG( 'F', 'O', 'N', 'D' ) +#define TTAG_fpgm FT_MAKE_TAG( 'f', 'p', 'g', 'm' ) +#define TTAG_fvar FT_MAKE_TAG( 'f', 'v', 'a', 'r' ) +#define TTAG_gasp FT_MAKE_TAG( 'g', 'a', 's', 'p' ) +#define TTAG_GDEF FT_MAKE_TAG( 'G', 'D', 'E', 'F' ) +#define TTAG_glyf FT_MAKE_TAG( 'g', 'l', 'y', 'f' ) +#define TTAG_GPOS FT_MAKE_TAG( 'G', 'P', 'O', 'S' ) +#define TTAG_GSUB FT_MAKE_TAG( 'G', 'S', 'U', 'B' ) +#define TTAG_gvar FT_MAKE_TAG( 'g', 'v', 'a', 'r' ) +#define TTAG_HVAR FT_MAKE_TAG( 'H', 'V', 'A', 'R' ) +#define TTAG_hdmx FT_MAKE_TAG( 'h', 'd', 'm', 'x' ) +#define TTAG_head FT_MAKE_TAG( 'h', 'e', 'a', 'd' ) +#define TTAG_hhea FT_MAKE_TAG( 'h', 'h', 'e', 'a' ) +#define TTAG_hmtx FT_MAKE_TAG( 'h', 'm', 't', 'x' ) +#define TTAG_JSTF FT_MAKE_TAG( 'J', 'S', 'T', 'F' ) +#define TTAG_just FT_MAKE_TAG( 'j', 'u', 's', 't' ) +#define TTAG_kern FT_MAKE_TAG( 'k', 'e', 'r', 'n' ) +#define TTAG_lcar FT_MAKE_TAG( 'l', 'c', 'a', 'r' ) +#define TTAG_loca FT_MAKE_TAG( 'l', 'o', 'c', 'a' ) +#define TTAG_LTSH FT_MAKE_TAG( 'L', 'T', 'S', 'H' ) +#define TTAG_LWFN FT_MAKE_TAG( 'L', 'W', 'F', 'N' ) +#define TTAG_MATH FT_MAKE_TAG( 'M', 'A', 'T', 'H' ) +#define TTAG_maxp FT_MAKE_TAG( 'm', 'a', 'x', 'p' ) +#define TTAG_META FT_MAKE_TAG( 'M', 'E', 'T', 'A' ) +#define TTAG_MMFX FT_MAKE_TAG( 'M', 'M', 'F', 'X' ) +#define TTAG_MMSD FT_MAKE_TAG( 'M', 'M', 'S', 'D' ) +#define TTAG_mort FT_MAKE_TAG( 'm', 'o', 'r', 't' ) +#define TTAG_morx FT_MAKE_TAG( 'm', 'o', 'r', 'x' ) +#define TTAG_MVAR FT_MAKE_TAG( 'M', 'V', 'A', 'R' ) +#define TTAG_name FT_MAKE_TAG( 'n', 'a', 'm', 'e' ) +#define TTAG_opbd FT_MAKE_TAG( 'o', 'p', 'b', 'd' ) +#define TTAG_OS2 FT_MAKE_TAG( 'O', 'S', '/', '2' ) +#define TTAG_OTTO FT_MAKE_TAG( 'O', 'T', 'T', 'O' ) +#define TTAG_PCLT FT_MAKE_TAG( 'P', 'C', 'L', 'T' ) +#define TTAG_POST FT_MAKE_TAG( 'P', 'O', 'S', 'T' ) +#define TTAG_post FT_MAKE_TAG( 'p', 'o', 's', 't' ) +#define TTAG_prep FT_MAKE_TAG( 'p', 'r', 'e', 'p' ) +#define TTAG_prop FT_MAKE_TAG( 'p', 'r', 'o', 'p' ) +#define TTAG_sbix FT_MAKE_TAG( 's', 'b', 'i', 'x' ) +#define TTAG_sfnt FT_MAKE_TAG( 's', 'f', 'n', 't' ) +#define TTAG_SING FT_MAKE_TAG( 'S', 'I', 'N', 'G' ) +#define TTAG_trak FT_MAKE_TAG( 't', 'r', 'a', 'k' ) +#define TTAG_true FT_MAKE_TAG( 't', 'r', 'u', 'e' ) +#define TTAG_ttc FT_MAKE_TAG( 't', 't', 'c', ' ' ) +#define TTAG_ttcf FT_MAKE_TAG( 't', 't', 'c', 'f' ) +#define TTAG_TYP1 FT_MAKE_TAG( 'T', 'Y', 'P', '1' ) +#define TTAG_typ1 FT_MAKE_TAG( 't', 'y', 'p', '1' ) +#define TTAG_VDMX FT_MAKE_TAG( 'V', 'D', 'M', 'X' ) +#define TTAG_vhea FT_MAKE_TAG( 'v', 'h', 'e', 'a' ) +#define TTAG_vmtx FT_MAKE_TAG( 'v', 'm', 't', 'x' ) +#define TTAG_VVAR FT_MAKE_TAG( 'V', 'V', 'A', 'R' ) +#define TTAG_wOFF FT_MAKE_TAG( 'w', 'O', 'F', 'F' ) + +/* used by "Keyboard.dfont" on legacy Mac OS X */ +#define TTAG_0xA5kbd FT_MAKE_TAG( 0xA5, 'k', 'b', 'd' ) + +/* used by "LastResort.dfont" on legacy Mac OS X */ +#define TTAG_0xA5lst FT_MAKE_TAG( 0xA5, 'l', 's', 't' ) + + +FT_END_HEADER + +#endif /* TTAGS_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/ft2build.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/ft2build.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3f4887 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/freetype/include/ft2build.h @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/**************************************************************************** + * + * ft2build.h + * + * FreeType 2 build and setup macros. + * + * Copyright (C) 1996-2019 by + * David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. + * + * This file is part of the FreeType project, and may only be used, + * modified, and distributed under the terms of the FreeType project + * license, LICENSE.TXT. By continuing to use, modify, or distribute + * this file you indicate that you have read the license and + * understand and accept it fully. + * + */ + + + /************************************************************************** + * + * This is the 'entry point' for FreeType header file inclusions. It is + * the only header file which should be included directly; all other + * FreeType header files should be accessed with macro names (after + * including `ft2build.h`). + * + * A typical example is + * + * ``` + * #include + * #include FT_FREETYPE_H + * ``` + * + */ + + +#ifndef FT2BUILD_H_ +#define FT2BUILD_H_ + +#include + +#endif /* FT2BUILD_H_ */ + + +/* END */ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imconfig.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imconfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..daa8de3 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imconfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// DEAR IMGUI COMPILE-TIME OPTIONS +// Runtime options (clipboard callbacks, enabling various features, etc.) can generally be set via the ImGuiIO structure. +// You can use ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions() before calling ImGui::CreateContext() to rewire memory allocation functions. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// A) You may edit imconfig.h (and not overwrite it when updating Dear ImGui, or maintain a patch/rebased branch with your modifications to it) +// B) or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "my_imgui_config.h"' in your project and then add directives in your own file without touching this template. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// You need to make sure that configuration settings are defined consistently _everywhere_ Dear ImGui is used, which include the imgui*.cpp +// files but also _any_ of your code that uses Dear ImGui. This is because some compile-time options have an affect on data structures. +// Defining those options in imconfig.h will ensure every compilation unit gets to see the same data structure layouts. +// Call IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() from your .cpp file to verify that the data structures your files are using are matching the ones imgui.cpp is using. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#pragma once + +//---- Define assertion handler. Defaults to calling assert(). +// If your macro uses multiple statements, make sure is enclosed in a 'do { .. } while (0)' block so it can be used as a single statement. +//#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR) MyAssert(_EXPR) +//#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR) ((void)(_EXPR)) // Disable asserts + +//---- Define attributes of all API symbols declarations, e.g. for DLL under Windows +// Using Dear ImGui via a shared library is not recommended, because of function call overhead and because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility. +// DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions() +// for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for more details. +//#define IMGUI_API __declspec( dllexport ) +//#define IMGUI_API __declspec( dllimport ) + +//---- Don't define obsolete functions/enums/behaviors. Consider enabling from time to time after updating to clean your code of obsolete function/names. +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO // 1.87: disable legacy io.KeyMap[]+io.KeysDown[] in favor io.AddKeyEvent(). This will be folded into IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS in a few versions. + +//---- Disable all of Dear ImGui or don't implement standard windows/tools. +// It is very strongly recommended to NOT disable the demo windows and debug tool during development. They are extremely useful in day to day work. Please read comments in imgui_demo.cpp. +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE // Disable everything: all headers and source files will be empty. +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS // Disable demo windows: ShowDemoWindow()/ShowStyleEditor() will be empty. +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS // Disable metrics/debugger and other debug tools: ShowMetricsWindow(), ShowDebugLogWindow() and ShowStackToolWindow() will be empty (this was called IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW before 1.88). + +//---- Don't implement some functions to reduce linkage requirements. +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] Don't implement default clipboard handler. Won't use and link with OpenClipboard/GetClipboardData/CloseClipboard etc. (user32.lib/.a, kernel32.lib/.a) +//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] [Default with Visual Studio] Implement default IME handler (require imm32.lib/.a, auto-link for Visual Studio, -limm32 on command-line for MinGW) +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] [Default with non-Visual Studio compilers] Don't implement default IME handler (won't require imm32.lib/.a) +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS // [Win32] Won't use and link with any Win32 function (clipboard, IME). +//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_OSX_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS // [OSX] Implement default OSX clipboard handler (need to link with '-framework ApplicationServices', this is why this is not the default). +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS // Don't implement ImFormatString/ImFormatStringV so you can implement them yourself (e.g. if you don't want to link with vsnprintf) +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS // Don't implement ImFabs/ImSqrt/ImPow/ImFmod/ImCos/ImSin/ImAcos/ImAtan2 so you can implement them yourself. +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS // Don't implement ImFileOpen/ImFileClose/ImFileRead/ImFileWrite and ImFileHandle at all (replace them with dummies) +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS // Don't implement ImFileOpen/ImFileClose/ImFileRead/ImFileWrite and ImFileHandle so you can implement them yourself if you don't want to link with fopen/fclose/fread/fwrite. This will also disable the LogToTTY() function. +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS // Don't implement default allocators calling malloc()/free() to avoid linking with them. You will need to call ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions(). +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_SSE // Disable use of SSE intrinsics even if available + +//---- Include imgui_user.h at the end of imgui.h as a convenience +//#define IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_H + +//---- Pack colors to BGRA8 instead of RGBA8 (to avoid converting from one to another) +//#define IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR + +//---- Use 32-bit for ImWchar (default is 16-bit) to support unicode planes 1-16. (e.g. point beyond 0xFFFF like emoticons, dingbats, symbols, shapes, ancient languages, etc...) +//#define IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32 + +//---- Avoid multiple STB libraries implementations, or redefine path/filenames to prioritize another version +// By default the embedded implementations are declared static and not available outside of Dear ImGui sources files. +//#define IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME "my_folder/stb_truetype.h" +//#define IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME "my_folder/stb_rect_pack.h" +#define IMGUI_STB_SPRINTF_FILENAME "../stb_sprintf.h" // only used if IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF is defined. +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_SPRINTF_IMPLEMENTATION // only disabled if IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF is defined. + +//---- Use stb_sprintf.h for a faster implementation of vsnprintf instead of the one from libc (unless IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS is defined) +// Compatibility checks of arguments and formats done by clang and GCC will be disabled in order to support the extra formats provided by stb_sprintf.h. +#define IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF + +//---- Use FreeType to build and rasterize the font atlas (instead of stb_truetype which is embedded by default in Dear ImGui) +// Requires FreeType headers to be available in the include path. Requires program to be compiled with 'misc/freetype/imgui_freetype.cpp' (in this repository) + the FreeType library (not provided). +// On Windows you may use vcpkg with 'vcpkg install freetype --triplet=x64-windows' + 'vcpkg integrate install'. +#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE + +//---- Use FreeType+lunasvg library to render OpenType SVG fonts (SVGinOT) +// Requires lunasvg headers to be available in the include path + program to be linked with the lunasvg library (not provided). +// Only works in combination with IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE. +// (implementation is based on Freetype's rsvg-port.c which is licensed under CeCILL-C Free Software License Agreement) +//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG + +//---- Use stb_truetype to build and rasterize the font atlas (default) +// The only purpose of this define is if you want force compilation of the stb_truetype backend ALONG with the FreeType backend. +//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE + +//---- Define constructor and implicit cast operators to convert back<>forth between your math types and ImVec2/ImVec4. +// This will be inlined as part of ImVec2 and ImVec4 class declarations. +/* +#define IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA \ + constexpr ImVec2(const MyVec2& f) : x(f.x), y(f.y) {} \ + operator MyVec2() const { return MyVec2(x,y); } + +#define IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA \ + constexpr ImVec4(const MyVec4& f) : x(f.x), y(f.y), z(f.z), w(f.w) {} \ + operator MyVec4() const { return MyVec4(x,y,z,w); } +*/ +//---- ...Or use Dear ImGui's own very basic math operators. +#define IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA \ + ImVec2& operator+(const float flAdd) \ + { \ + x += flAdd; \ + y += flAdd; \ + return *this; \ + } \ + ImVec2& operator-(const float flSub) \ + { \ + x -= flSub; \ + y -= flSub; \ + return *this; \ + } + +#define IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA \ + float operator[](size_t idx) const \ + { \ + IM_ASSERT(idx <= 3); \ + return (&x)[idx]; \ + } \ + float& operator[](size_t idx) \ + { \ + IM_ASSERT(idx <= 3); \ + return (&x)[idx]; \ + } +#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS + +//---- Use 32-bit vertex indices (default is 16-bit) is one way to allow large meshes with more than 64K vertices. +// Your renderer backend will need to support it (most example renderer backends support both 16/32-bit indices). +// Another way to allow large meshes while keeping 16-bit indices is to handle ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset in your renderer. +// Read about ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset for details. +//#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int + +//---- Override ImDrawCallback signature (will need to modify renderer backends accordingly) +//struct ImDrawList; +//struct ImDrawCmd; +//typedef void (*MyImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImDrawCmd* cmd, void* my_renderer_user_data); +//#define ImDrawCallback MyImDrawCallback + +//---- Debug Tools: Macro to break in Debugger (we provide a default implementation of this in the codebase) +// (use 'Metrics->Tools->Item Picker' to pick widgets with the mouse and break into them for easy debugging.) +//#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK IM_ASSERT(0) +//#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK __debugbreak() + +//---- Debug Tools: Enable slower asserts +//#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID + +//---- Tip: You can add extra functions within the ImGui:: namespace from anywhere (e.g. your own sources/header files) +/* +namespace ImGui +{ + void MyFunction(const char* name, MyMatrix44* mtx); +} +*/ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..28b1e40 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,15006 @@ +// dear imgui, v1.89.9 +// (main code and documentation) + +// Help: +// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.com/faq +// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' below for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase. +// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that. +// Read imgui.cpp for details, links and comments. + +// Resources: +// - FAQ http://dearimgui.com/faq +// - Homepage https://github.com/ocornut/imgui +// - Releases & changelog https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases +// - Gallery https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6478 (please post your screenshots/video there!) +// - Wiki https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki (lots of good stuff there) +// - Getting Started https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started +// - Glossary https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary +// - Issues & support https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues +// - Tests & Automation https://github.com/ocornut/imgui_test_engine + +// Getting Started? +// - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started +// - For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running/loading fonts: +// please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above. + +// Developed by Omar Cornut and every direct or indirect contributors to the GitHub. +// See LICENSE.txt for copyright and licensing details (standard MIT License). +// This library is free but needs your support to sustain development and maintenance. +// Businesses: you can support continued development via B2B invoiced technical support, maintenance and sponsoring contracts. +// PLEASE reach out at contact AT dearimgui DOT com. See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Sponsors +// Businesses: you can also purchase licenses for the Dear ImGui Automation/Test Engine. + +// It is recommended that you don't modify imgui.cpp! It will become difficult for you to update the library. +// Note that 'ImGui::' being a namespace, you can add functions into the namespace from your own source files, without +// modifying imgui.h or imgui.cpp. You may include imgui_internal.h to access internal data structures, but it doesn't +// come with any guarantee of forward compatibility. Discussing your changes on the GitHub Issue Tracker may lead you +// to a better solution or official support for them. + +/* + +Index of this file: + +DOCUMENTATION + +- MISSION STATEMENT +- CONTROLS GUIDE +- PROGRAMMER GUIDE + - READ FIRST + - HOW TO UPDATE TO A NEWER VERSION OF DEAR IMGUI + - GETTING STARTED WITH INTEGRATING DEAR IMGUI IN YOUR CODE/ENGINE + - HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE + - HOW A SIMPLE RENDERING FUNCTION MAY LOOK LIKE +- API BREAKING CHANGES (read me when you update!) +- FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) + - Read all answers online: https://www.dearimgui.com/faq, or in docs/FAQ.md (with a Markdown viewer) + +CODE +(search for "[SECTION]" in the code to find them) + +// [SECTION] INCLUDES +// [SECTION] FORWARD DECLARATIONS +// [SECTION] CONTEXT AND MEMORY ALLOCATORS +// [SECTION] USER FACING STRUCTURES (ImGuiStyle, ImGuiIO) +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Geometry functions) +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (String, Format, Hash functions) +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (File functions) +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (ImText* functions) +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Color functions) +// [SECTION] ImGuiStorage +// [SECTION] ImGuiTextFilter +// [SECTION] ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiTextIndex +// [SECTION] ImGuiListClipper +// [SECTION] STYLING +// [SECTION] RENDER HELPERS +// [SECTION] INITIALIZATION, SHUTDOWN +// [SECTION] MAIN CODE (most of the code! lots of stuff, needs tidying up!) +// [SECTION] INPUTS +// [SECTION] ERROR CHECKING +// [SECTION] LAYOUT +// [SECTION] SCROLLING +// [SECTION] TOOLTIPS +// [SECTION] POPUPS +// [SECTION] KEYBOARD/GAMEPAD NAVIGATION +// [SECTION] DRAG AND DROP +// [SECTION] LOGGING/CAPTURING +// [SECTION] SETTINGS +// [SECTION] LOCALIZATION +// [SECTION] VIEWPORTS, PLATFORM WINDOWS +// [SECTION] PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS +// [SECTION] METRICS/DEBUGGER WINDOW +// [SECTION] DEBUG LOG WINDOW +// [SECTION] OTHER DEBUG TOOLS (ITEM PICKER, STACK TOOL) + +*/ + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// DOCUMENTATION +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +/* + + MISSION STATEMENT + ================= + + - Easy to use to create code-driven and data-driven tools. + - Easy to use to create ad hoc short-lived tools and long-lived, more elaborate tools. + - Easy to hack and improve. + - Minimize setup and maintenance. + - Minimize state storage on user side. + - Minimize state synchronization. + - Portable, minimize dependencies, run on target (consoles, phones, etc.). + - Efficient runtime and memory consumption. + + Designed primarily for developers and content-creators, not the typical end-user! + Some of the current weaknesses (which we aim to address in the future) includes: + + - Doesn't look fancy. + - Limited layout features, intricate layouts are typically crafted in code. + + + CONTROLS GUIDE + ============== + + - MOUSE CONTROLS + - Mouse wheel: Scroll vertically. + - SHIFT+Mouse wheel: Scroll horizontally. + - Click [X]: Close a window, available when 'bool* p_open' is passed to ImGui::Begin(). + - Click ^, Double-Click title: Collapse window. + - Drag on corner/border: Resize window (double-click to auto fit window to its contents). + - Drag on any empty space: Move window (unless io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly = true). + - Left-click outside popup: Close popup stack (right-click over underlying popup: Partially close popup stack). + + - TEXT EDITOR + - Hold SHIFT or Drag Mouse: Select text. + - CTRL+Left/Right: Word jump. + - CTRL+Shift+Left/Right: Select words. + - CTRL+A or Double-Click: Select All. + - CTRL+X, CTRL+C, CTRL+V: Use OS clipboard. + - CTRL+Z, CTRL+Y: Undo, Redo. + - ESCAPE: Revert text to its original value. + - On OSX, controls are automatically adjusted to match standard OSX text editing shortcuts and behaviors. + + - KEYBOARD CONTROLS + - Basic: + - Tab, SHIFT+Tab Cycle through text editable fields. + - CTRL+Tab, CTRL+Shift+Tab Cycle through windows. + - CTRL+Click Input text into a Slider or Drag widget. + - Extended features with `io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard`: + - Tab, SHIFT+Tab: Cycle through every items. + - Arrow keys Move through items using directional navigation. Tweak value. + - Arrow keys + Alt, Shift Tweak slower, tweak faster (when using arrow keys). + - Enter Activate item (prefer text input when possible). + - Space Activate item (prefer tweaking with arrows when possible). + - Escape Deactivate item, leave child window, close popup. + - Page Up, Page Down Previous page, next page. + - Home, End Scroll to top, scroll to bottom. + - Alt Toggle between scrolling layer and menu layer. + - CTRL+Tab then Ctrl+Arrows Move window. Hold SHIFT to resize instead of moving. + - Output when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard set, + - io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag is set when keyboard is claimed. + - io.NavActive: true when a window is focused and it doesn't have the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag set. + - io.NavVisible: true when the navigation cursor is visible (usually goes to back false when mouse is used). + + - GAMEPAD CONTROLS + - Enable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad'. + - Particularly useful to use Dear ImGui on a console system (e.g. PlayStation, Switch, Xbox) without a mouse! + - Download controller mapping PNG/PSD at http://dearimgui.com/controls_sheets + - Backend support: backend needs to: + - Set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad' + call io.AddKeyEvent/AddKeyAnalogEvent() with ImGuiKey_Gamepad_XXX keys. + - For analog values (0.0f to 1.0f), backend is responsible to handling a dead-zone and rescaling inputs accordingly. + Backend code will probably need to transform your raw inputs (such as e.g. remapping your 0.2..0.9 raw input range to 0.0..1.0 imgui range, etc.). + - BEFORE 1.87, BACKENDS USED TO WRITE TO io.NavInputs[]. This is now obsolete. Please call io functions instead! + - If you need to share inputs between your game and the Dear ImGui interface, the easiest approach is to go all-or-nothing, + with a buttons combo to toggle the target. Please reach out if you think the game vs navigation input sharing could be improved. + + - REMOTE INPUTS SHARING & MOUSE EMULATION + - PS4/PS5 users: Consider emulating a mouse cursor with DualShock touch pad or a spare analog stick as a mouse-emulation fallback. + - Consoles/Tablet/Phone users: Consider using a Synergy 1.x server (on your PC) + run examples/libs/synergy/uSynergy.c (on your console/tablet/phone app) + in order to share your PC mouse/keyboard. + - See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Useful-Extensions#remoting for other remoting solutions. + - On a TV/console system where readability may be lower or mouse inputs may be awkward, you may want to set the ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag. + Enabling ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos + ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos instructs Dear ImGui to move your mouse cursor along with navigation movements. + When enabled, the NewFrame() function may alter 'io.MousePos' and set 'io.WantSetMousePos' to notify you that it wants the mouse cursor to be moved. + When that happens your backend NEEDS to move the OS or underlying mouse cursor on the next frame. Some of the backends in examples/ do that. + (If you set the NavEnableSetMousePos flag but don't honor 'io.WantSetMousePos' properly, Dear ImGui will misbehave as it will see your mouse moving back & forth!) + (In a setup when you may not have easy control over the mouse cursor, e.g. uSynergy.c doesn't expose moving remote mouse cursor, you may want + to set a boolean to ignore your other external mouse positions until the external source is moved again.) + + + PROGRAMMER GUIDE + ================ + + READ FIRST + ---------- + - Remember to check the wonderful Wiki (https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki) + - Your code creates the UI every frame of your application loop, if your code doesn't run the UI is gone! + The UI can be highly dynamic, there are no construction or destruction steps, less superfluous + data retention on your side, less state duplication, less state synchronization, fewer bugs. + - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() for demo code demonstrating most features. + Or browse https://pthom.github.io/imgui_manual_online/manual/imgui_manual.html for interactive web version. + - The library is designed to be built from sources. Avoid pre-compiled binaries and packaged versions. See imconfig.h to configure your build. + - Dear ImGui is an implementation of the IMGUI paradigm (immediate-mode graphical user interface, a term coined by Casey Muratori). + You can learn about IMGUI principles at http://www.johno.se/book/imgui.html, http://mollyrocket.com/861 & more links in Wiki. + - Dear ImGui is a "single pass" rasterizing implementation of the IMGUI paradigm, aimed at ease of use and high-performances. + For every application frame, your UI code will be called only once. This is in contrast to e.g. Unity's implementation of an IMGUI, + where the UI code is called multiple times ("multiple passes") from a single entry point. There are pros and cons to both approaches. + - Our origin is on the top-left. In axis aligned bounding boxes, Min = top-left, Max = bottom-right. + - Please make sure you have asserts enabled (IM_ASSERT redirects to assert() by default, but can be redirected). + If you get an assert, read the messages and comments around the assert. + - This codebase aims to be highly optimized: + - A typical idle frame should never call malloc/free. + - We rely on a maximum of constant-time or O(N) algorithms. Limiting searches/scans as much as possible. + - We put particular energy in making sure performances are decent with typical "Debug" build settings as well. + Which mean we tend to avoid over-relying on "zero-cost abstraction" as they aren't zero-cost at all. + - This codebase aims to be both highly opinionated and highly flexible: + - This code works because of the things it choose to solve or not solve. + - C++: this is a pragmatic C-ish codebase: we don't use fancy C++ features, we don't include C++ headers, + and ImGui:: is a namespace. We rarely use member functions (and when we did, I am mostly regretting it now). + This is to increase compatibility, increase maintainability and facilitate use from other languages. + - C++: ImVec2/ImVec4 do not expose math operators by default, because it is expected that you use your own math types. + See FAQ "How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4?" for details about setting up imconfig.h for that. + We can can optionally export math operators for ImVec2/ImVec4 using IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS, which we use internally. + - C++: pay attention that ImVector<> manipulates plain-old-data and does not honor construction/destruction + (so don't use ImVector in your code or at our own risk!). + - Building: We don't use nor mandate a build system for the main library. + This is in an effort to ensure that it works in the real world aka with any esoteric build setup. + This is also because providing a build system for the main library would be of little-value. + The build problems are almost never coming from the main library but from specific backends. + + + HOW TO UPDATE TO A NEWER VERSION OF DEAR IMGUI + ---------------------------------------------- + - Update submodule or copy/overwrite every file. + - About imconfig.h: + - You may modify your copy of imconfig.h, in this case don't overwrite it. + - or you may locally branch to modify imconfig.h and merge/rebase latest. + - or you may '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "my_config_file.h"' globally from your build system to + specify a custom path for your imconfig.h file and instead not have to modify the default one. + + - Overwrite all the sources files except for imconfig.h (if you have modified your copy of imconfig.h) + - Or maintain your own branch where you have imconfig.h modified as a top-most commit which you can regularly rebase over "master". + - You can also use '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "my_config_file.h" to redirect configuration to your own file. + - Read the "API BREAKING CHANGES" section (below). This is where we list occasional API breaking changes. + If a function/type has been renamed / or marked obsolete, try to fix the name in your code before it is permanently removed + from the public API. If you have a problem with a missing function/symbols, search for its name in the code, there will + likely be a comment about it. Please report any issue to the GitHub page! + - To find out usage of old API, you can add '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' in your configuration file. + - Try to keep your copy of Dear ImGui reasonably up to date! + + + GETTING STARTED WITH INTEGRATING DEAR IMGUI IN YOUR CODE/ENGINE + --------------------------------------------------------------- + - See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started. + - Run and study the examples and demo in imgui_demo.cpp to get acquainted with the library. + - In the majority of cases you should be able to use unmodified backends files available in the backends/ folder. + - Add the Dear ImGui source files + selected backend source files to your projects or using your preferred build system. + It is recommended you build and statically link the .cpp files as part of your project and NOT as a shared library (DLL). + - You can later customize the imconfig.h file to tweak some compile-time behavior, such as integrating Dear ImGui types with your own maths types. + - When using Dear ImGui, your programming IDE is your friend: follow the declaration of variables, functions and types to find comments about them. + - Dear ImGui never touches or knows about your GPU state. The only function that knows about GPU is the draw function that you provide. + Effectively it means you can create widgets at any time in your code, regardless of considerations of being in "update" vs "render" + phases of your own application. All rendering information is stored into command-lists that you will retrieve after calling ImGui::Render(). + - Refer to the backends and demo applications in the examples/ folder for instruction on how to setup your code. + - If you are running over a standard OS with a common graphics API, you should be able to use unmodified imgui_impl_*** files from the examples/ folder. + + + HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE + -------------------------------------- + EXHIBIT 1: USING THE EXAMPLE BACKENDS (= imgui_impl_XXX.cpp files from the backends/ folder). + The sub-folders in examples/ contain examples applications following this structure. + + // Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts + ImGui::CreateContext(); + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls. + // TODO: Fill optional fields of the io structure later. + // TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font. + + // Initialize helper Platform and Renderer backends (here we are using imgui_impl_win32.cpp and imgui_impl_dx11.cpp) + ImGui_ImplWin32_Init(hwnd); + ImGui_ImplDX11_Init(g_pd3dDevice, g_pd3dDeviceContext); + + // Application main loop + while (true) + { + // Feed inputs to dear imgui, start new frame + ImGui_ImplDX11_NewFrame(); + ImGui_ImplWin32_NewFrame(); + ImGui::NewFrame(); + + // Any application code here + ImGui::Text("Hello, world!"); + + // Render dear imgui into screen + ImGui::Render(); + ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData(ImGui::GetDrawData()); + g_pSwapChain->Present(1, 0); + } + + // Shutdown + ImGui_ImplDX11_Shutdown(); + ImGui_ImplWin32_Shutdown(); + ImGui::DestroyContext(); + + EXHIBIT 2: IMPLEMENTING CUSTOM BACKEND / CUSTOM ENGINE + + // Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts + ImGui::CreateContext(); + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls. + // TODO: Fill optional fields of the io structure later. + // TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font. + + // Build and load the texture atlas into a texture + // (In the examples/ app this is usually done within the ImGui_ImplXXX_Init() function from one of the demo Renderer) + int width, height; + unsigned char* pixels = nullptr; + io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height); + + // At this point you've got the texture data and you need to upload that to your graphic system: + // After we have created the texture, store its pointer/identifier (_in whichever format your engine uses_) in 'io.Fonts->TexID'. + // This will be passed back to your via the renderer. Basically ImTextureID == void*. Read FAQ for details about ImTextureID. + MyTexture* texture = MyEngine::CreateTextureFromMemoryPixels(pixels, width, height, TEXTURE_TYPE_RGBA32) + io.Fonts->SetTexID((void*)texture); + + // Application main loop + while (true) + { + // Setup low-level inputs, e.g. on Win32: calling GetKeyboardState(), or write to those fields from your Windows message handlers, etc. + // (In the examples/ app this is usually done within the ImGui_ImplXXX_NewFrame() function from one of the demo Platform Backends) + io.DeltaTime = 1.0f/60.0f; // set the time elapsed since the previous frame (in seconds) + io.DisplaySize.x = 1920.0f; // set the current display width + io.DisplaySize.y = 1280.0f; // set the current display height here + io.AddMousePosEvent(mouse_x, mouse_y); // update mouse position + io.AddMouseButtonEvent(0, mouse_b[0]); // update mouse button states + io.AddMouseButtonEvent(1, mouse_b[1]); // update mouse button states + + // Call NewFrame(), after this point you can use ImGui::* functions anytime + // (So you want to try calling NewFrame() as early as you can in your main loop to be able to use Dear ImGui everywhere) + ImGui::NewFrame(); + + // Most of your application code here + ImGui::Text("Hello, world!"); + MyGameUpdate(); // may use any Dear ImGui functions, e.g. ImGui::Begin("My window"); ImGui::Text("Hello, world!"); ImGui::End(); + MyGameRender(); // may use any Dear ImGui functions as well! + + // Render dear imgui, swap buffers + // (You want to try calling EndFrame/Render as late as you can, to be able to use Dear ImGui in your own game rendering code) + ImGui::EndFrame(); + ImGui::Render(); + ImDrawData* draw_data = ImGui::GetDrawData(); + MyImGuiRenderFunction(draw_data); + SwapBuffers(); + } + + // Shutdown + ImGui::DestroyContext(); + + To decide whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard inputs to Dear ImGui to the rest of your application, + you should read the 'io.WantCaptureMouse', 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' and 'io.WantTextInput' flags! + Please read the FAQ and example applications for details about this! + + + HOW A SIMPLE RENDERING FUNCTION MAY LOOK LIKE + --------------------------------------------- + The backends in impl_impl_XXX.cpp files contain many working implementations of a rendering function. + + void MyImGuiRenderFunction(ImDrawData* draw_data) + { + // TODO: Setup render state: alpha-blending enabled, no face culling, no depth testing, scissor enabled + // TODO: Setup texture sampling state: sample with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering). Use 'io.Fonts->Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines;' to allow point/nearest filtering. + // TODO: Setup viewport covering draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize + // TODO: Setup orthographic projection matrix cover draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize + // TODO: Setup shader: vertex { float2 pos, float2 uv, u32 color }, fragment shader sample color from 1 texture, multiply by vertex color. + ImVec2 clip_off = draw_data->DisplayPos; + for (int n = 0; n < draw_data->CmdListsCount; n++) + { + const ImDrawList* cmd_list = draw_data->CmdLists[n]; + const ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Data; // vertex buffer generated by Dear ImGui + const ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Data; // index buffer generated by Dear ImGui + for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++) + { + const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = &cmd_list->CmdBuffer[cmd_i]; + if (pcmd->UserCallback) + { + pcmd->UserCallback(cmd_list, pcmd); + } + else + { + // Project scissor/clipping rectangles into framebuffer space + ImVec2 clip_min(pcmd->ClipRect.x - clip_off.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y - clip_off.y); + ImVec2 clip_max(pcmd->ClipRect.z - clip_off.x, pcmd->ClipRect.w - clip_off.y); + if (clip_max.x <= clip_min.x || clip_max.y <= clip_min.y) + continue; + + // We are using scissoring to clip some objects. All low-level graphics API should support it. + // - If your engine doesn't support scissoring yet, you may ignore this at first. You will get some small glitches + // (some elements visible outside their bounds) but you can fix that once everything else works! + // - Clipping coordinates are provided in imgui coordinates space: + // - For a given viewport, draw_data->DisplayPos == viewport->Pos and draw_data->DisplaySize == viewport->Size + // - In a single viewport application, draw_data->DisplayPos == (0,0) and draw_data->DisplaySize == io.DisplaySize, but always use GetMainViewport()->Pos/Size instead of hardcoding those values. + // - In the interest of supporting multi-viewport applications (see 'docking' branch on github), + // always subtract draw_data->DisplayPos from clipping bounds to convert them to your viewport space. + // - Note that pcmd->ClipRect contains Min+Max bounds. Some graphics API may use Min+Max, other may use Min+Size (size being Max-Min) + MyEngineSetScissor(clip_min.x, clip_min.y, clip_max.x, clip_max.y); + + // The texture for the draw call is specified by pcmd->GetTexID(). + // The vast majority of draw calls will use the Dear ImGui texture atlas, which value you have set yourself during initialization. + MyEngineBindTexture((MyTexture*)pcmd->GetTexID()); + + // Render 'pcmd->ElemCount/3' indexed triangles. + // By default the indices ImDrawIdx are 16-bit, you can change them to 32-bit in imconfig.h if your engine doesn't support 16-bit indices. + MyEngineDrawIndexedTriangles(pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer + pcmd->IdxOffset, vtx_buffer, pcmd->VtxOffset); + } + } + } + } + + + API BREAKING CHANGES + ==================== + + Occasionally introducing changes that are breaking the API. We try to make the breakage minor and easy to fix. + Below is a change-log of API breaking changes only. If you are using one of the functions listed, expect to have to fix some code. + When you are not sure about an old symbol or function name, try using the Search/Find function of your IDE to look for comments or references in all imgui files. + You can read releases logs https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases for more details. + + - 2023/08/25 (1.89.9) - Clipper: Renamed IncludeRangeByIndices() (also called ForceDisplayRangeByIndices() before 1.89.6) to IncludeItemsByIndex(). Kept inline redirection function. Sorry! + - 2023/07/12 (1.89.8) - ImDrawData: CmdLists now owned, changed from ImDrawList** to ImVector. Majority of users shouldn't be affected, but you cannot compare to NULL nor reassign manually anymore. Instead use AddDrawList(). (#6406, #4879, #1878) + - 2023/06/28 (1.89.7) - overlapping items: obsoleted 'SetItemAllowOverlap()' (called after item) in favor of calling 'SetNextItemAllowOverlap()' (called before item). 'SetItemAllowOverlap()' didn't and couldn't work reliably since 1.89 (2022-11-15). + - 2023/06/28 (1.89.7) - overlapping items: renamed 'ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap' to 'ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap', 'ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap' to 'ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap'. Kept redirecting enums (will obsolete). + - 2023/06/28 (1.89.7) - overlapping items: IsItemHovered() now by default return false when querying an item using AllowOverlap mode which is being overlapped. Use ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem to revert to old behavior. + - 2023/06/28 (1.89.7) - overlapping items: Selectable and TreeNode don't allow overlap when active so overlapping widgets won't appear as hovered. While this fixes a common small visual issue, it also means that calling IsItemHovered() after a non-reactive elements - e.g. Text() - overlapping an active one may fail if you don't use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem). (#6610) + - 2023/06/20 (1.89.7) - moved io.HoverDelayShort/io.HoverDelayNormal to style.HoverDelayShort/style.HoverDelayNormal. As the fields were added in 1.89 and expected to be left unchanged by most users, or only tweaked once during app initialization, we are exceptionally accepting the breakage. + - 2023/05/30 (1.89.6) - backends: renamed "imgui_impl_sdlrenderer.cpp" to "imgui_impl_sdlrenderer2.cpp" and "imgui_impl_sdlrenderer.h" to "imgui_impl_sdlrenderer2.h". This is in prevision for the future release of SDL3. + - 2023/05/22 (1.89.6) - listbox: commented out obsolete/redirecting functions that were marked obsolete more than two years ago: + - ListBoxHeader() -> use BeginListBox() (note how two variants of ListBoxHeader() existed. Check commented versions in imgui.h for reference) + - ListBoxFooter() -> use EndListBox() + - 2023/05/15 (1.89.6) - clipper: commented out obsolete redirection constructor 'ImGuiListClipper(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f)' that was marked obsolete in 1.79. Use default constructor + clipper.Begin(). + - 2023/05/15 (1.89.6) - clipper: renamed ImGuiListClipper::ForceDisplayRangeByIndices() to ImGuiListClipper::IncludeRangeByIndices(). + - 2023/03/14 (1.89.4) - commented out redirecting enums/functions names that were marked obsolete two years ago: + - ImGuiSliderFlags_ClampOnInput -> use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp + - ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode -> use ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite + - ImDrawList::AddBezierCurve() -> use ImDrawList::AddBezierCubic() + - ImDrawList::PathBezierCurveTo() -> use ImDrawList::PathBezierCubicCurveTo() + - 2023/03/09 (1.89.4) - renamed PushAllowKeyboardFocus()/PopAllowKeyboardFocus() to PushTabStop()/PopTabStop(). Kept inline redirection functions (will obsolete). + - 2023/03/09 (1.89.4) - tooltips: Added 'bool' return value to BeginTooltip() for API consistency. Please only submit contents and call EndTooltip() if BeginTooltip() returns true. In reality the function will _currently_ always return true, but further changes down the line may change this, best to clarify API sooner. + - 2023/02/15 (1.89.4) - moved the optional "courtesy maths operators" implementation from imgui_internal.h in imgui.h. + Even though we encourage using your own maths types and operators by setting up IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA, + it has been frequently requested by people to use our own. We had an opt-in define which was + previously fulfilled in imgui_internal.h. It is now fulfilled in imgui.h. (#6164) + - OK: #define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS / #include "imgui.h" / #include "imgui_internal.h" + - Error: #include "imgui.h" / #define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS / #include "imgui_internal.h" + - 2023/02/07 (1.89.3) - backends: renamed "imgui_impl_sdl.cpp" to "imgui_impl_sdl2.cpp" and "imgui_impl_sdl.h" to "imgui_impl_sdl2.h". (#6146) This is in prevision for the future release of SDL3. + - 2022/10/26 (1.89) - commented out redirecting OpenPopupContextItem() which was briefly the name of OpenPopupOnItemClick() from 1.77 to 1.79. + - 2022/10/12 (1.89) - removed runtime patching of invalid "%f"/"%0.f" format strings for DragInt()/SliderInt(). This was obsoleted in 1.61 (May 2018). See 1.61 changelog for details. + - 2022/09/26 (1.89) - renamed and merged keyboard modifiers key enums and flags into a same set. Kept inline redirection enums (will obsolete). + - ImGuiKey_ModCtrl and ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl -> ImGuiMod_Ctrl + - ImGuiKey_ModShift and ImGuiModFlags_Shift -> ImGuiMod_Shift + - ImGuiKey_ModAlt and ImGuiModFlags_Alt -> ImGuiMod_Alt + - ImGuiKey_ModSuper and ImGuiModFlags_Super -> ImGuiMod_Super + the ImGuiKey_ModXXX were introduced in 1.87 and mostly used by backends. + the ImGuiModFlags_XXX have been exposed in imgui.h but not really used by any public api only by third-party extensions. + exceptionally commenting out the older ImGuiKeyModFlags_XXX names ahead of obsolescence schedule to reduce confusion and because they were not meant to be used anyway. + - 2022/09/20 (1.89) - ImGuiKey is now a typed enum, allowing ImGuiKey_XXX symbols to be named in debuggers. + this will require uses of legacy backend-dependent indices to be casted, e.g. + - with imgui_impl_glfw: IsKeyPressed(GLFW_KEY_A) -> IsKeyPressed((ImGuiKey)GLFW_KEY_A); + - with imgui_impl_win32: IsKeyPressed('A') -> IsKeyPressed((ImGuiKey)'A') + - etc. However if you are upgrading code you might well use the better, backend-agnostic IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_A) now! + - 2022/09/12 (1.89) - removed the bizarre legacy default argument for 'TreePush(const void* ptr = NULL)', always pass a pointer value explicitly. NULL/nullptr is ok but require cast, e.g. TreePush((void*)nullptr); + - 2022/09/05 (1.89) - commented out redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.77 and 1.78 (June 2020): + - DragScalar(), DragScalarN(), DragFloat(), DragFloat2(), DragFloat3(), DragFloat4(): For old signatures ending with (..., const char* format, float power = 1.0f) -> use (..., format ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) if power != 1.0f. + - SliderScalar(), SliderScalarN(), SliderFloat(), SliderFloat2(), SliderFloat3(), SliderFloat4(): For old signatures ending with (..., const char* format, float power = 1.0f) -> use (..., format ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) if power != 1.0f. + - BeginPopupContextWindow(const char*, ImGuiMouseButton, bool) -> use BeginPopupContextWindow(const char*, ImGuiPopupFlags) + - 2022/09/02 (1.89) - obsoleted using SetCursorPos()/SetCursorScreenPos() to extend parent window/cell boundaries. + this relates to when moving the cursor position beyond current boundaries WITHOUT submitting an item. + - previously this would make the window content size ~200x200: + Begin(...) + SetCursorScreenPos(GetCursorScreenPos() + ImVec2(200,200)) + End(); + - instead, please submit an item: + Begin(...) + SetCursorScreenPos(GetCursorScreenPos() + ImVec2(200,200)) + Dummy(ImVec2(0,0)) + End(); + - alternative: + Begin(...) + Dummy(ImVec2(200,200)) + End(); + - content size is now only extended when submitting an item! + - with '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' this will now be detected and assert. + - without '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' this will silently be fixed until we obsolete it. + - 2022/08/03 (1.89) - changed signature of ImageButton() function. Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - added 'const char* str_id' parameter + removed 'int frame_padding = -1' parameter. + - old signature: bool ImageButton(ImTextureID tex_id, ImVec2 size, ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2(1,1), int frame_padding = -1, ImVec4 bg_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0), ImVec4 tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1)); + - used the ImTextureID value to create an ID. This was inconsistent with other functions, led to ID conflicts, and caused problems with engines using transient ImTextureID values. + - had a FramePadding override which was inconsistent with other functions and made the already-long signature even longer. + - new signature: bool ImageButton(const char* str_id, ImTextureID tex_id, ImVec2 size, ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2(1,1), ImVec4 bg_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0), ImVec4 tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1)); + - requires an explicit identifier. You may still use e.g. PushID() calls and then pass an empty identifier. + - always uses style.FramePadding for padding, to be consistent with other buttons. You may use PushStyleVar() to alter this. + - 2022/07/08 (1.89) - inputs: removed io.NavInputs[] and ImGuiNavInput enum (following 1.87 changes). + - Official backends from 1.87+ -> no issue. + - Official backends from 1.60 to 1.86 -> will build and convert gamepad inputs, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined. Need updating! + - Custom backends not writing to io.NavInputs[] -> no issue. + - Custom backends writing to io.NavInputs[] -> will build and convert gamepad inputs, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined. Need fixing! + - TL;DR: Backends should call io.AddKeyEvent()/io.AddKeyAnalogEvent() with ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX values instead of filling io.NavInput[]. + - 2022/06/15 (1.88) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS for correctness. kept support for old define (will obsolete). + - 2022/05/03 (1.88) - backends: osx: removed ImGui_ImplOSX_HandleEvent() from backend API in favor of backend automatically handling event capture. All ImGui_ImplOSX_HandleEvent() calls should be removed as they are now unnecessary. + - 2022/04/05 (1.88) - inputs: renamed ImGuiKeyModFlags to ImGuiModFlags. Kept inline redirection enums (will obsolete). This was never used in public API functions but technically present in imgui.h and ImGuiIO. + - 2022/01/20 (1.87) - inputs: reworded gamepad IO. + - Backend writing to io.NavInputs[] -> backend should call io.AddKeyEvent()/io.AddKeyAnalogEvent() with ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX values. + - 2022/01/19 (1.87) - sliders, drags: removed support for legacy arithmetic operators (+,+-,*,/) when inputing text. This doesn't break any api/code but a feature that used to be accessible by end-users (which seemingly no one used). + - 2022/01/17 (1.87) - inputs: reworked mouse IO. + - Backend writing to io.MousePos -> backend should call io.AddMousePosEvent() + - Backend writing to io.MouseDown[] -> backend should call io.AddMouseButtonEvent() + - Backend writing to io.MouseWheel -> backend should call io.AddMouseWheelEvent() + - Backend writing to io.MouseHoveredViewport -> backend should call io.AddMouseViewportEvent() [Docking branch w/ multi-viewports only] + note: for all calls to IO new functions, the Dear ImGui context should be bound/current. + read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4921 for details. + - 2022/01/10 (1.87) - inputs: reworked keyboard IO. Removed io.KeyMap[], io.KeysDown[] in favor of calling io.AddKeyEvent(). Removed GetKeyIndex(), now unecessary. All IsKeyXXX() functions now take ImGuiKey values. All features are still functional until IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined. Read Changelog and Release Notes for details. + - IsKeyPressed(MY_NATIVE_KEY_XXX) -> use IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_XXX) + - IsKeyPressed(GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey_XXX)) -> use IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_XXX) + - Backend writing to io.KeyMap[],io.KeysDown[] -> backend should call io.AddKeyEvent() (+ call io.SetKeyEventNativeData() if you want legacy user code to stil function with legacy key codes). + - Backend writing to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift.. -> backend should call io.AddKeyEvent() with ImGuiMod_XXX values. *IF YOU PULLED CODE BETWEEN 2021/01/10 and 2021/01/27: We used to have a io.AddKeyModsEvent() function which was now replaced by io.AddKeyEvent() with ImGuiMod_XXX values.* + - one case won't work with backward compatibility: if your custom backend used ImGuiKey as mock native indices (e.g. "io.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_A] = ImGuiKey_A") because those values are now larger than the legacy KeyDown[] array. Will assert. + - inputs: added ImGuiKey_ModCtrl/ImGuiKey_ModShift/ImGuiKey_ModAlt/ImGuiKey_ModSuper values to submit keyboard modifiers using io.AddKeyEvent(), instead of writing directly to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift, io.KeyAlt, io.KeySuper. + - 2022/01/05 (1.87) - inputs: renamed ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter to ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter to align with new symbols. Kept redirection enum. + - 2022/01/05 (1.87) - removed io.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn() in favor of more flexible io.SetPlatformImeDataFn(). Removed 'void* io.ImeWindowHandle' in favor of writing to 'void* ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw'. + - 2022/01/01 (1.87) - commented out redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.69, 1.70, 1.71, 1.72 (March-July 2019) + - ImGui::SetNextTreeNodeOpen() -> use ImGui::SetNextItemOpen() + - ImGui::GetContentRegionAvailWidth() -> use ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x + - ImGui::TreeAdvanceToLabelPos() -> use ImGui::SetCursorPosX(ImGui::GetCursorPosX() + ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); + - ImFontAtlas::CustomRect -> use ImFontAtlasCustomRect + - ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB/HSV/HEX -> use ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB/HSV/Hex + - 2021/12/20 (1.86) - backends: removed obsolete Marmalade backend (imgui_impl_marmalade.cpp) + example. Find last supported version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Bindings + - 2021/11/04 (1.86) - removed CalcListClipping() function. Prefer using ImGuiListClipper which can return non-contiguous ranges. Please open an issue if you think you really need this function. + - 2021/08/23 (1.85) - removed GetWindowContentRegionWidth() function. keep inline redirection helper. can use 'GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x' instead for generally 'GetContentRegionAvail().x' is more useful. + - 2021/07/26 (1.84) - commented out redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.67 and 1.69 (March 2019): + - ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList() -> use ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList() + - ImFont::GlyphRangesBuilder -> use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder + - 2021/05/19 (1.83) - backends: obsoleted direct access to ImDrawCmd::TextureId in favor of calling ImDrawCmd::GetTexID(). + - if you are using official backends from the source tree: you have nothing to do. + - if you have copied old backend code or using your own: change access to draw_cmd->TextureId to draw_cmd->GetTexID(). + - 2021/03/12 (1.82) - upgraded ImDrawList::AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect() to use ImDrawFlags instead of ImDrawCornersFlags. + - ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft -> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft + - ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight -> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight + - ImDrawCornerFlags_None -> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone etc. + flags now sanely defaults to 0 instead of 0x0F, consistent with all other flags in the API. + breaking: the default with rounding > 0.0f is now "round all corners" vs old implicit "round no corners": + - rounding == 0.0f + flags == 0 --> meant no rounding --> unchanged (common use) + - rounding > 0.0f + flags != 0 --> meant rounding --> unchanged (common use) + - rounding == 0.0f + flags != 0 --> meant no rounding --> unchanged (unlikely use) + - rounding > 0.0f + flags == 0 --> meant no rounding --> BREAKING (unlikely use): will now round all corners --> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone or rounding == 0.0f. + this ONLY matters for hard coded use of 0 + rounding > 0.0f. Use of named ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone (new) or ImDrawCornerFlags_None (old) are ok. + the old ImDrawCornersFlags used awkward default values of ~0 or 0xF (4 lower bits set) to signify "round all corners" and we sometimes encouraged using them as shortcuts. + legacy path still support use of hard coded ~0 or any value from 0x1 or 0xF. They will behave the same with legacy paths enabled (will assert otherwise). + - 2021/03/11 (1.82) - removed redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.66 (September 2018): + - ImGui::SetScrollHere() -> use ImGui::SetScrollHereY() + - 2021/03/11 (1.82) - clarified that ImDrawList::PathArcTo(), ImDrawList::PathArcToFast() won't render with radius < 0.0f. Previously it sorts of accidentally worked but would generally lead to counter-clockwise paths and have an effect on anti-aliasing. + - 2021/03/10 (1.82) - upgraded ImDrawList::AddPolyline() and PathStroke() "bool closed" parameter to "ImDrawFlags flags". The matching ImDrawFlags_Closed value is guaranteed to always stay == 1 in the future. + - 2021/02/22 (1.82) - (*undone in 1.84*) win32+mingw: Re-enabled IME functions by default even under MinGW. In July 2016, issue #738 had me incorrectly disable those default functions for MinGW. MinGW users should: either link with -limm32, either set their imconfig file with '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS'. + - 2021/02/17 (1.82) - renamed rarely used style.CircleSegmentMaxError (old default = 1.60f) to style.CircleTessellationMaxError (new default = 0.30f) as the meaning of the value changed. + - 2021/02/03 (1.81) - renamed ListBoxHeader(const char* label, ImVec2 size) to BeginListBox(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - removed ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1) in favor of specifying size. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - renamed ListBoxFooter() to EndListBox(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2021/01/26 (1.81) - removed ImGuiFreeType::BuildFontAtlas(). Kept inline redirection function. Prefer using '#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE', but there's a runtime selection path available too. The shared extra flags parameters (very rarely used) are now stored in ImFontAtlas::FontBuilderFlags. + - renamed ImFontConfig::RasterizerFlags (used by FreeType) to ImFontConfig::FontBuilderFlags. + - renamed ImGuiFreeType::XXX flags to ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_XXX for consistency with other API. + - 2020/10/12 (1.80) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.63 (August 2018): + - ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() -> use ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(). + - ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening -> use ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg + - ImGuiInputTextCallback -> use ImGuiTextEditCallback + - ImGuiInputTextCallbackData -> use ImGuiTextEditCallbackData + - 2020/12/21 (1.80) - renamed ImDrawList::AddBezierCurve() to AddBezierCubic(), and PathBezierCurveTo() to PathBezierCubicCurveTo(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2020/12/04 (1.80) - added imgui_tables.cpp file! Manually constructed project files will need the new file added! + - 2020/11/18 (1.80) - renamed undocumented/internals ImGuiColumnsFlags_* to ImGuiOldColumnFlags_* in prevision of incoming Tables API. + - 2020/11/03 (1.80) - renamed io.ConfigWindowsMemoryCompactTimer to io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer as the feature will apply to other data structures + - 2020/10/14 (1.80) - backends: moved all backends files (imgui_impl_XXXX.cpp, imgui_impl_XXXX.h) from examples/ to backends/. + - 2020/10/12 (1.80) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.60 (April 2018): + - io.RenderDrawListsFn pointer -> use ImGui::GetDrawData() value and call the render function of your backend + - ImGui::IsAnyWindowFocused() -> use ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow) + - ImGui::IsAnyWindowHovered() -> use ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow) + - ImGuiStyleVar_Count_ -> use ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT + - ImGuiMouseCursor_Count_ -> use ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT + - removed redirecting functions names that were marked obsolete in 1.61 (May 2018): + - InputFloat (... int decimal_precision ...) -> use InputFloat (... const char* format ...) with format = "%.Xf" where X is your value for decimal_precision. + - same for InputFloat2()/InputFloat3()/InputFloat4() variants taking a `int decimal_precision` parameter. + - 2020/10/05 (1.79) - removed ImGuiListClipper: Renamed constructor parameters which created an ambiguous alternative to using the ImGuiListClipper::Begin() function, with misleading edge cases (note: imgui_memory_editor <0.40 from imgui_club/ used this old clipper API. Update your copy if needed). + - 2020/09/25 (1.79) - renamed ImGuiSliderFlags_ClampOnInput to ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete sooner because previous name was added recently). + - 2020/09/25 (1.79) - renamed style.TabMinWidthForUnselectedCloseButton to style.TabMinWidthForCloseButton. + - 2020/09/21 (1.79) - renamed OpenPopupContextItem() back to OpenPopupOnItemClick(), reverting the change from 1.77. For varieties of reason this is more self-explanatory. + - 2020/09/21 (1.79) - removed return value from OpenPopupOnItemClick() - returned true on mouse release on an item - because it is inconsistent with other popup APIs and makes others misleading. It's also and unnecessary: you can use IsWindowAppearing() after BeginPopup() for a similar result. + - 2020/09/17 (1.79) - removed ImFont::DisplayOffset in favor of ImFontConfig::GlyphOffset. DisplayOffset was applied after scaling and not very meaningful/useful outside of being needed by the default ProggyClean font. If you scaled this value after calling AddFontDefault(), this is now done automatically. It was also getting in the way of better font scaling, so let's get rid of it now! + - 2020/08/17 (1.78) - obsoleted use of the trailing 'float power=1.0f' parameter for DragFloat(), DragFloat2(), DragFloat3(), DragFloat4(), DragFloatRange2(), DragScalar(), DragScalarN(), SliderFloat(), SliderFloat2(), SliderFloat3(), SliderFloat4(), SliderScalar(), SliderScalarN(), VSliderFloat() and VSliderScalar(). + replaced the 'float power=1.0f' argument with integer-based flags defaulting to 0 (as with all our flags). + worked out a backward-compatibility scheme so hopefully most C++ codebase should not be affected. in short, when calling those functions: + - if you omitted the 'power' parameter (likely!), you are not affected. + - if you set the 'power' parameter to 1.0f (same as previous default value): 1/ your compiler may warn on float>int conversion, 2/ everything else will work. 3/ you can replace the 1.0f value with 0 to fix the warning, and be technically correct. + - if you set the 'power' parameter to >1.0f (to enable non-linear editing): 1/ your compiler may warn on float>int conversion, 2/ code will assert at runtime, 3/ in case asserts are disabled, the code will not crash and enable the _Logarithmic flag. 4/ you can replace the >1.0f value with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic to fix the warning/assert and get a _similar_ effect as previous uses of power >1.0f. + see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 for all details. + kept inline redirection functions (will obsolete) apart for: DragFloatRange2(), VSliderFloat(), VSliderScalar(). For those three the 'float power=1.0f' version was removed directly as they were most unlikely ever used. + for shared code, you can version check at compile-time with `#if IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 17704`. + - obsoleted use of v_min > v_max in DragInt, DragFloat, DragScalar to lock edits (introduced in 1.73, was not demoed nor documented very), will be replaced by a more generic ReadOnly feature. You may use the ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly internal flag in the meantime. + - 2020/06/23 (1.77) - removed BeginPopupContextWindow(const char*, int mouse_button, bool also_over_items) in favor of BeginPopupContextWindow(const char*, ImGuiPopupFlags flags) with ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOverItems. + - 2020/06/15 (1.77) - renamed OpenPopupOnItemClick() to OpenPopupContextItem(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). [NOTE: THIS WAS REVERTED IN 1.79] + - 2020/06/15 (1.77) - removed CalcItemRectClosestPoint() entry point which was made obsolete and asserting in December 2017. + - 2020/04/23 (1.77) - removed unnecessary ID (first arg) of ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectRegular(). + - 2020/01/22 (1.75) - ImDrawList::AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() functions don't accept negative radius any more. + - 2019/12/17 (1.75) - [undid this change in 1.76] made Columns() limited to 64 columns by asserting above that limit. While the current code technically supports it, future code may not so we're putting the restriction ahead. + - 2019/12/13 (1.75) - [imgui_internal.h] changed ImRect() default constructor initializes all fields to 0.0f instead of (FLT_MAX,FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX). If you used ImRect::Add() to create bounding boxes by adding multiple points into it, you may need to fix your initial value. + - 2019/12/08 (1.75) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.53 (December 2017): + - ShowTestWindow() -> use ShowDemoWindow() + - IsRootWindowFocused() -> use IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow) + - IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused() -> use IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows) + - SetNextWindowContentWidth(w) -> use SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(w, 0.0f) + - GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing() -> use GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() + - ImGuiCol_ChildWindowBg -> use ImGuiCol_ChildBg + - ImGuiStyleVar_ChildWindowRounding -> use ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding + - ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlapMode -> use ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap + - IMGUI_DISABLE_TEST_WINDOWS -> use IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS + - 2019/12/08 (1.75) - obsoleted calling ImDrawList::PrimReserve() with a negative count (which was vaguely documented and rarely if ever used). Instead, we added an explicit PrimUnreserve() API. + - 2019/12/06 (1.75) - removed implicit default parameter to IsMouseDragging(int button = 0) to be consistent with other mouse functions (none of the other functions have it). + - 2019/11/21 (1.74) - ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectRegular() now requires an ID larger than 0x110000 (instead of 0x10000) to conform with supporting Unicode planes 1-16 in a future update. ID below 0x110000 will now assert. + - 2019/11/19 (1.74) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS for consistency. + - 2019/11/19 (1.74) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_MATH_FUNCTIONS to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS for consistency. + - 2019/10/22 (1.74) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.52 (October 2017): + - Begin() [old 5 args version] -> use Begin() [3 args], use SetNextWindowSize() SetNextWindowBgAlpha() if needed + - IsRootWindowOrAnyChildHovered() -> use IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows) + - AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets() -> use AlignTextToFramePadding() + - SetNextWindowPosCenter() -> use SetNextWindowPos() with a pivot of (0.5f, 0.5f) + - ImFont::Glyph -> use ImFontGlyph + - 2019/10/14 (1.74) - inputs: Fixed a miscalculation in the keyboard/mouse "typematic" repeat delay/rate calculation, used by keys and e.g. repeating mouse buttons as well as the GetKeyPressedAmount() function. + if you were using a non-default value for io.KeyRepeatRate (previous default was 0.250), you can add +io.KeyRepeatDelay to it to compensate for the fix. + The function was triggering on: 0.0 and (delay+rate*N) where (N>=1). Fixed formula responds to (N>=0). Effectively it made io.KeyRepeatRate behave like it was set to (io.KeyRepeatRate + io.KeyRepeatDelay). + If you never altered io.KeyRepeatRate nor used GetKeyPressedAmount() this won't affect you. + - 2019/07/15 (1.72) - removed TreeAdvanceToLabelPos() which is rarely used and only does SetCursorPosX(GetCursorPosX() + GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2019/07/12 (1.72) - renamed ImFontAtlas::CustomRect to ImFontAtlasCustomRect. Kept redirection typedef (will obsolete). + - 2019/06/14 (1.72) - removed redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.51 (June 2017): ImGuiCol_Column*, ImGuiSetCond_*, IsItemHoveredRect(), IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(), IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow(), IsMouseHoveringWindow(), IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME. Grep this log for details and new names, or see how they were implemented until 1.71. + - 2019/06/07 (1.71) - rendering of child window outer decorations (bg color, border, scrollbars) is now performed as part of the parent window. If you have + overlapping child windows in a same parent, and relied on their relative z-order to be mapped to their submission order, this will affect your rendering. + This optimization is disabled if the parent window has no visual output, because it appears to be the most common situation leading to the creation of overlapping child windows. + Please reach out if you are affected. + - 2019/05/13 (1.71) - renamed SetNextTreeNodeOpen() to SetNextItemOpen(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2019/05/11 (1.71) - changed io.AddInputCharacter(unsigned short c) signature to io.AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c). + - 2019/04/29 (1.70) - improved ImDrawList thick strokes (>1.0f) preserving correct thickness up to 90 degrees angles (e.g. rectangles). If you have custom rendering using thick lines, they will appear thicker now. + - 2019/04/29 (1.70) - removed GetContentRegionAvailWidth(), use GetContentRegionAvail().x instead. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2019/03/04 (1.69) - renamed GetOverlayDrawList() to GetForegroundDrawList(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2019/02/26 (1.69) - renamed ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB/ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV/ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX to ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB/ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV/ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete). + - 2019/02/14 (1.68) - made it illegal/assert when io.DisplayTime == 0.0f (with an exception for the first frame). If for some reason your time step calculation gives you a zero value, replace it with an arbitrarily small value! + - 2019/02/01 (1.68) - removed io.DisplayVisibleMin/DisplayVisibleMax (which were marked obsolete and removed from viewport/docking branch already). + - 2019/01/06 (1.67) - renamed io.InputCharacters[], marked internal as was always intended. Please don't access directly, and use AddInputCharacter() instead! + - 2019/01/06 (1.67) - renamed ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder to ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder. Kept redirection typedef (will obsolete). + - 2018/12/20 (1.67) - made it illegal to call Begin("") with an empty string. This somehow half-worked before but had various undesirable side-effects. + - 2018/12/10 (1.67) - renamed io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges to io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges as we are doing a large pass on configuration flags. + - 2018/10/12 (1.66) - renamed misc/stl/imgui_stl.* to misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.* in prevision for other C++ helper files. + - 2018/09/28 (1.66) - renamed SetScrollHere() to SetScrollHereY(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2018/09/06 (1.65) - renamed stb_truetype.h to imstb_truetype.h, stb_textedit.h to imstb_textedit.h, and stb_rect_pack.h to imstb_rectpack.h. + If you were conveniently using the imgui copy of those STB headers in your project you will have to update your include paths. + - 2018/09/05 (1.65) - renamed io.OptCursorBlink/io.ConfigCursorBlink to io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink. (#1427) + - 2018/08/31 (1.64) - added imgui_widgets.cpp file, extracted and moved widgets code out of imgui.cpp into imgui_widgets.cpp. Re-ordered some of the code remaining in imgui.cpp. + NONE OF THE FUNCTIONS HAVE CHANGED. THE CODE IS SEMANTICALLY 100% IDENTICAL, BUT _EVERY_ FUNCTION HAS BEEN MOVED. + Because of this, any local modifications to imgui.cpp will likely conflict when you update. Read docs/CHANGELOG.txt for suggestions. + - 2018/08/22 (1.63) - renamed IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() to IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() for consistency with new IsItemEdited() API. Kept redirection function (will obsolete soonish as IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() is very recent). + - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - renamed ImGuiTextEditCallback to ImGuiInputTextCallback, ImGuiTextEditCallbackData to ImGuiInputTextCallbackData for consistency. Kept redirection types (will obsolete). + - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - removed ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ReadOnly since it is a duplication of (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly). + - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - removed per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide beta flag in favor of a global io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges [update 1.67 renamed to ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges] to enable the feature. + - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - renamed io.OptCursorBlink to io.ConfigCursorBlink [-> io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink in 1.65], io.OptMacOSXBehaviors to ConfigMacOSXBehaviors for consistency. + - 2018/07/22 (1.63) - changed ImGui::GetTime() return value from float to double to avoid accumulating floating point imprecisions over time. + - 2018/07/08 (1.63) - style: renamed ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening to ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg for consistency with other features. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete). + - 2018/06/08 (1.62) - examples: the imgui_impl_XXX files have been split to separate platform (Win32, GLFW, SDL2, etc.) from renderer (DX11, OpenGL, Vulkan, etc.). + old backends will still work as is, however prefer using the separated backends as they will be updated to support multi-viewports. + when adopting new backends follow the main.cpp code of your preferred examples/ folder to know which functions to call. + in particular, note that old backends called ImGui::NewFrame() at the end of their ImGui_ImplXXXX_NewFrame() function. + - 2018/06/06 (1.62) - renamed GetGlyphRangesChinese() to GetGlyphRangesChineseFull() to distinguish other variants and discourage using the full set. + - 2018/06/06 (1.62) - TreeNodeEx()/TreeNodeBehavior(): the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader helper now include the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag. See Changelog for details. + - 2018/05/03 (1.61) - DragInt(): the default compile-time format string has been changed from "%.0f" to "%d", as we are not using integers internally any more. + If you used DragInt() with custom format strings, make sure you change them to use %d or an integer-compatible format. + To honor backward-compatibility, the DragInt() code will currently parse and modify format strings to replace %*f with %d, giving time to users to upgrade their code. + If you have IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS enabled, the code will instead assert! You may run a reg-exp search on your codebase for e.g. "DragInt.*%f" to help you find them. + - 2018/04/28 (1.61) - obsoleted InputFloat() functions taking an optional "int decimal_precision" in favor of an equivalent and more flexible "const char* format", + consistent with other functions. Kept redirection functions (will obsolete). + - 2018/04/09 (1.61) - IM_DELETE() helper function added in 1.60 doesn't clear the input _pointer_ reference, more consistent with expectation and allows passing r-value. + - 2018/03/20 (1.60) - renamed io.WantMoveMouse to io.WantSetMousePos for consistency and ease of understanding (was added in 1.52, _not_ used by core and only honored by some backend ahead of merging the Nav branch). + - 2018/03/12 (1.60) - removed ImGuiCol_CloseButton, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonActive, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonHovered as the closing cross uses regular button colors now. + - 2018/03/08 (1.60) - changed ImFont::DisplayOffset.y to default to 0 instead of +1. Fixed rounding of Ascent/Descent to match TrueType renderer. If you were adding or subtracting to ImFont::DisplayOffset check if your fonts are correctly aligned vertically. + - 2018/03/03 (1.60) - renamed ImGuiStyleVar_Count_ to ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT and ImGuiMouseCursor_Count_ to ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT for consistency with other public enums. + - 2018/02/18 (1.60) - BeginDragDropSource(): temporarily removed the optional mouse_button=0 parameter because it is not really usable in many situations at the moment. + - 2018/02/16 (1.60) - obsoleted the io.RenderDrawListsFn callback, you can call your graphics engine render function after ImGui::Render(). Use ImGui::GetDrawData() to retrieve the ImDrawData* to display. + - 2018/02/07 (1.60) - reorganized context handling to be more explicit, + - YOU NOW NEED TO CALL ImGui::CreateContext() AT THE BEGINNING OF YOUR APP, AND CALL ImGui::DestroyContext() AT THE END. + - removed Shutdown() function, as DestroyContext() serve this purpose. + - you may pass a ImFontAtlas* pointer to CreateContext() to share a font atlas between contexts. Otherwise CreateContext() will create its own font atlas instance. + - removed allocator parameters from CreateContext(), they are now setup with SetAllocatorFunctions(), and shared by all contexts. + - removed the default global context and font atlas instance, which were confusing for users of DLL reloading and users of multiple contexts. + - 2018/01/31 (1.60) - moved sample TTF files from extra_fonts/ to misc/fonts/. If you loaded files directly from the imgui repo you may need to update your paths. + - 2018/01/11 (1.60) - obsoleted IsAnyWindowHovered() in favor of IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2018/01/11 (1.60) - obsoleted IsAnyWindowFocused() in favor of IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2018/01/03 (1.60) - renamed ImGunSizeConstraintCallback to ImGunSizeCallback, ImGunSizeConstraintCallbackData to ImGunSizeCallbackData. + - 2017/12/29 (1.60) - removed CalcItemRectClosestPoint() which was weird and not really used by anyone except demo code. If you need it it's easy to replicate on your side. + - 2017/12/24 (1.53) - renamed the emblematic ShowTestWindow() function to ShowDemoWindow(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2017/12/21 (1.53) - ImDrawList: renamed style.AntiAliasedShapes to style.AntiAliasedFill for consistency and as a way to explicitly break code that manipulate those flag at runtime. You can now manipulate ImDrawList::Flags + - 2017/12/21 (1.53) - ImDrawList: removed 'bool anti_aliased = true' final parameter of ImDrawList::AddPolyline() and ImDrawList::AddConvexPolyFilled(). Prefer manipulating ImDrawList::Flags if you need to toggle them during the frame. + - 2017/12/14 (1.53) - using the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag on a child window forwards the mouse wheel event to the parent window, unless either ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs or ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar are also set. + - 2017/12/13 (1.53) - renamed GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing() to GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2017/12/13 (1.53) - obsoleted IsRootWindowFocused() in favor of using IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - obsoleted IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused() in favor of using IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2017/12/12 (1.53) - renamed ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlapMode to ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete). + - 2017/12/10 (1.53) - removed SetNextWindowContentWidth(), prefer using SetNextWindowContentSize(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2017/11/27 (1.53) - renamed ImGuiTextBuffer::append() helper to appendf(), appendv() to appendfv(). If you copied the 'Log' demo in your code, it uses appendv() so that needs to be renamed. + - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style, Begin: removed ImGuiWindowFlags_ShowBorders window flag. Borders are now fully set up in the ImGuiStyle structure (see e.g. style.FrameBorderSize, style.WindowBorderSize). Use ImGui::ShowStyleEditor() to look them up. + Please note that the style system will keep evolving (hopefully stabilizing in Q1 2018), and so custom styles will probably subtly break over time. It is recommended you use the StyleColorsClassic(), StyleColorsDark(), StyleColorsLight() functions. + - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: removed ImGuiCol_ComboBg in favor of combo boxes using ImGuiCol_PopupBg for consistency. + - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: renamed ImGuiCol_ChildWindowBg to ImGuiCol_ChildBg. + - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: renamed style.ChildWindowRounding to style.ChildRounding, ImGuiStyleVar_ChildWindowRounding to ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding. + - 2017/11/02 (1.53) - obsoleted IsRootWindowOrAnyChildHovered() in favor of using IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows); + - 2017/10/24 (1.52) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCS/IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCS to IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS/IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS for consistency. + - 2017/10/20 (1.52) - changed IsWindowHovered() default parameters behavior to return false if an item is active in another window (e.g. click-dragging item from another window to this window). You can use the newly introduced IsWindowHovered() flags to requests this specific behavior if you need it. + - 2017/10/20 (1.52) - marked IsItemHoveredRect()/IsMouseHoveringWindow() as obsolete, in favor of using the newly introduced flags for IsItemHovered() and IsWindowHovered(). See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1382 for details. + removed the IsItemRectHovered()/IsWindowRectHovered() names introduced in 1.51 since they were merely more consistent names for the two functions we are now obsoleting. + IsItemHoveredRect() --> IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly) + IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow() --> IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow) + IsMouseHoveringWindow() --> IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) [weird, old behavior] + - 2017/10/17 (1.52) - marked the old 5-parameters version of Begin() as obsolete (still available). Use SetNextWindowSize()+Begin() instead! + - 2017/10/11 (1.52) - renamed AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets() to AlignTextToFramePadding(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2017/09/26 (1.52) - renamed ImFont::Glyph to ImFontGlyph. Kept redirection typedef (will obsolete). + - 2017/09/25 (1.52) - removed SetNextWindowPosCenter() because SetNextWindowPos() now has the optional pivot information to do the same and more. Kept redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2017/08/25 (1.52) - io.MousePos needs to be set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) when mouse is unavailable/missing. Previously ImVec2(-1,-1) was enough but we now accept negative mouse coordinates. In your backend if you need to support unavailable mouse, make sure to replace "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-1,-1)" with "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX)". + - 2017/08/22 (1.51) - renamed IsItemHoveredRect() to IsItemRectHovered(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). -> (1.52) use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly)! + - renamed IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow() to IsAnyWindowHovered() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - renamed IsMouseHoveringWindow() to IsWindowRectHovered() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2017/08/20 (1.51) - renamed GetStyleColName() to GetStyleColorName() for consistency. + - 2017/08/20 (1.51) - added PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col) overload, which _might_ cause an "ambiguous call" compilation error if you are using ImColor() with implicit cast. Cast to ImU32 or ImVec4 explicily to fix. + - 2017/08/15 (1.51) - marked the weird IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME helper macro as obsolete. prefer using the more explicit ImGuiOnceUponAFrame type. + - 2017/08/15 (1.51) - changed parameter order for BeginPopupContextWindow() from (const char*,int buttons,bool also_over_items) to (const char*,int buttons,bool also_over_items). Note that most calls relied on default parameters completely. + - 2017/08/13 (1.51) - renamed ImGuiCol_Column to ImGuiCol_Separator, ImGuiCol_ColumnHovered to ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered, ImGuiCol_ColumnActive to ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete). + - 2017/08/11 (1.51) - renamed ImGuiSetCond_Always to ImGuiCond_Always, ImGuiSetCond_Once to ImGuiCond_Once, ImGuiSetCond_FirstUseEver to ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, ImGuiSetCond_Appearing to ImGuiCond_Appearing. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete). + - 2017/08/09 (1.51) - removed ValueColor() helpers, they are equivalent to calling Text(label) + SameLine() + ColorButton(). + - 2017/08/08 (1.51) - removed ColorEditMode() and ImGuiColorEditMode in favor of ImGuiColorEditFlags and parameters to the various Color*() functions. The SetColorEditOptions() allows to initialize default but the user can still change them with right-click context menu. + - changed prototype of 'ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], bool show_alpha = true)' to 'ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0)', where passing flags = 0x01 is a safe no-op (hello dodgy backward compatibility!). - check and run the demo window, under "Color/Picker Widgets", to understand the various new options. + - changed prototype of rarely used 'ColorButton(ImVec4 col, bool small_height = false, bool outline_border = true)' to 'ColorButton(const char* desc_id, ImVec4 col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, ImVec2 size = ImVec2(0, 0))' + - 2017/07/20 (1.51) - removed IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(ImVec2), which was partly broken and misleading. ASSERT + redirect user to io.WantCaptureMouse + - 2017/05/26 (1.50) - removed ImFontConfig::MergeGlyphCenterV in favor of a more multipurpose ImFontConfig::GlyphOffset. + - 2017/05/01 (1.50) - renamed ImDrawList::PathFill() (rarely used directly) to ImDrawList::PathFillConvex() for clarity. + - 2016/11/06 (1.50) - BeginChild(const char*) now applies the stack id to the provided label, consistently with other functions as it should always have been. It shouldn't affect you unless (extremely unlikely) you were appending multiple times to a same child from different locations of the stack id. If that's the case, generate an id with GetID() and use it instead of passing string to BeginChild(). + - 2016/10/15 (1.50) - avoid 'void* user_data' parameter to io.SetClipboardTextFn/io.GetClipboardTextFn pointers. We pass io.ClipboardUserData to it. + - 2016/09/25 (1.50) - style.WindowTitleAlign is now a ImVec2 (ImGuiAlign enum was removed). set to (0.5f,0.5f) for horizontal+vertical centering, (0.0f,0.0f) for upper-left, etc. + - 2016/07/30 (1.50) - SameLine(x) with x>0.0f is now relative to left of column/group if any, and not always to left of window. This was sort of always the intent and hopefully, breakage should be minimal. + - 2016/05/12 (1.49) - title bar (using ImGuiCol_TitleBg/ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive colors) isn't rendered over a window background (ImGuiCol_WindowBg color) anymore. + If your TitleBg/TitleBgActive alpha was 1.0f or you are using the default theme it will not affect you, otherwise if <1.0f you need to tweak your custom theme to readjust for the fact that we don't draw a WindowBg background behind the title bar. + This helper function will convert an old TitleBg/TitleBgActive color into a new one with the same visual output, given the OLD color and the OLD WindowBg color: + ImVec4 ConvertTitleBgCol(const ImVec4& win_bg_col, const ImVec4& title_bg_col) { float new_a = 1.0f - ((1.0f - win_bg_col.w) * (1.0f - title_bg_col.w)), k = title_bg_col.w / new_a; return ImVec4((win_bg_col.x * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.x) * k, (win_bg_col.y * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.y) * k, (win_bg_col.z * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.z) * k, new_a); } + If this is confusing, pick the RGB value from title bar from an old screenshot and apply this as TitleBg/TitleBgActive. Or you may just create TitleBgActive from a tweaked TitleBg color. + - 2016/05/07 (1.49) - removed confusing set of GetInternalState(), GetInternalStateSize(), SetInternalState() functions. Now using CreateContext(), DestroyContext(), GetCurrentContext(), SetCurrentContext(). + - 2016/05/02 (1.49) - renamed SetNextTreeNodeOpened() to SetNextTreeNodeOpen(), no redirection. + - 2016/05/01 (1.49) - obsoleted old signature of CollapsingHeader(const char* label, const char* str_id = NULL, bool display_frame = true, bool default_open = false) as extra parameters were badly designed and rarely used. You can replace the "default_open = true" flag in new API with CollapsingHeader(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen). + - 2016/04/26 (1.49) - changed ImDrawList::PushClipRect(ImVec4 rect) to ImDrawList::PushClipRect(Imvec2 min,ImVec2 max,bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect=false). Note that higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() is preferable because it will clip at logic/widget level, whereas ImDrawList::PushClipRect() only affect your renderer. + - 2016/04/03 (1.48) - removed style.WindowFillAlphaDefault setting which was redundant. Bake default BG alpha inside style.Colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] and all other Bg color values. (ref GitHub issue #337). + - 2016/04/03 (1.48) - renamed ImGuiCol_TooltipBg to ImGuiCol_PopupBg, used by popups/menus and tooltips. popups/menus were previously using ImGuiCol_WindowBg. (ref github issue #337) + - 2016/03/21 (1.48) - renamed GetWindowFont() to GetFont(), GetWindowFontSize() to GetFontSize(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2016/03/02 (1.48) - InputText() completion/history/always callbacks: if you modify the text buffer manually (without using DeleteChars()/InsertChars() helper) you need to maintain the BufTextLen field. added an assert. + - 2016/01/23 (1.48) - fixed not honoring exact width passed to PushItemWidth(), previously it would add extra FramePadding.x*2 over that width. if you had manual pixel-perfect alignment in place it might affect you. + - 2015/12/27 (1.48) - fixed ImDrawList::AddRect() which used to render a rectangle 1 px too large on each axis. + - 2015/12/04 (1.47) - renamed Color() helpers to ValueColor() - dangerously named, rarely used and probably to be made obsolete. + - 2015/08/29 (1.45) - with the addition of horizontal scrollbar we made various fixes to inconsistencies with dealing with cursor position. + GetCursorPos()/SetCursorPos() functions now include the scrolled amount. It shouldn't affect the majority of users, but take note that SetCursorPosX(100.0f) puts you at +100 from the starting x position which may include scrolling, not at +100 from the window left side. + GetContentRegionMax()/GetWindowContentRegionMin()/GetWindowContentRegionMax() functions allow include the scrolled amount. Typically those were used in cases where no scrolling would happen so it may not be a problem, but watch out! + - 2015/08/29 (1.45) - renamed style.ScrollbarWidth to style.ScrollbarSize + - 2015/08/05 (1.44) - split imgui.cpp into extra files: imgui_demo.cpp imgui_draw.cpp imgui_internal.h that you need to add to your project. + - 2015/07/18 (1.44) - fixed angles in ImDrawList::PathArcTo(), PathArcToFast() (introduced in 1.43) being off by an extra PI for no justifiable reason + - 2015/07/14 (1.43) - add new ImFontAtlas::AddFont() API. For the old AddFont***, moved the 'font_no' parameter of ImFontAtlas::AddFont** functions to the ImFontConfig structure. + you need to render your textured triangles with bilinear filtering to benefit from sub-pixel positioning of text. + - 2015/07/08 (1.43) - switched rendering data to use indexed rendering. this is saving a fair amount of CPU/GPU and enables us to get anti-aliasing for a marginal cost. + this necessary change will break your rendering function! the fix should be very easy. sorry for that :( + - if you are using a vanilla copy of one of the imgui_impl_XXX.cpp provided in the example, you just need to update your copy and you can ignore the rest. + - the signature of the io.RenderDrawListsFn handler has changed! + old: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawList** const cmd_lists, int cmd_lists_count) + new: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawData* draw_data). + parameters: 'cmd_lists' becomes 'draw_data->CmdLists', 'cmd_lists_count' becomes 'draw_data->CmdListsCount' + ImDrawList: 'commands' becomes 'CmdBuffer', 'vtx_buffer' becomes 'VtxBuffer', 'IdxBuffer' is new. + ImDrawCmd: 'vtx_count' becomes 'ElemCount', 'clip_rect' becomes 'ClipRect', 'user_callback' becomes 'UserCallback', 'texture_id' becomes 'TextureId'. + - each ImDrawList now contains both a vertex buffer and an index buffer. For each command, render ElemCount/3 triangles using indices from the index buffer. + - if you REALLY cannot render indexed primitives, you can call the draw_data->DeIndexAllBuffers() method to de-index the buffers. This is slow and a waste of CPU/GPU. Prefer using indexed rendering! + - refer to code in the examples/ folder or ask on the GitHub if you are unsure of how to upgrade. please upgrade! + - 2015/07/10 (1.43) - changed SameLine() parameters from int to float. + - 2015/07/02 (1.42) - renamed SetScrollPosHere() to SetScrollFromCursorPos(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2015/07/02 (1.42) - renamed GetScrollPosY() to GetScrollY(). Necessary to reduce confusion along with other scrolling functions, because positions (e.g. cursor position) are not equivalent to scrolling amount. + - 2015/06/14 (1.41) - changed ImageButton() default bg_col parameter from (0,0,0,1) (black) to (0,0,0,0) (transparent) - makes a difference when texture have transparence + - 2015/06/14 (1.41) - changed Selectable() API from (label, selected, size) to (label, selected, flags, size). Size override should have been rarely used. Sorry! + - 2015/05/31 (1.40) - renamed GetWindowCollapsed() to IsWindowCollapsed() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2015/05/31 (1.40) - renamed IsRectClipped() to IsRectVisible() for consistency. Note that return value is opposite! Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). + - 2015/05/27 (1.40) - removed the third 'repeat_if_held' parameter from Button() - sorry! it was rarely used and inconsistent. Use PushButtonRepeat(true) / PopButtonRepeat() to enable repeat on desired buttons. + - 2015/05/11 (1.40) - changed BeginPopup() API, takes a string identifier instead of a bool. ImGui needs to manage the open/closed state of popups. Call OpenPopup() to actually set the "open" state of a popup. BeginPopup() returns true if the popup is opened. + - 2015/05/03 (1.40) - removed style.AutoFitPadding, using style.WindowPadding makes more sense (the default values were already the same). + - 2015/04/13 (1.38) - renamed IsClipped() to IsRectClipped(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50. + - 2015/04/09 (1.38) - renamed ImDrawList::AddArc() to ImDrawList::AddArcFast() for compatibility with future API + - 2015/04/03 (1.38) - removed ImGuiCol_CheckHovered, ImGuiCol_CheckActive, replaced with the more general ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive. + - 2014/04/03 (1.38) - removed support for passing -FLT_MAX..+FLT_MAX as the range for a SliderFloat(). Use DragFloat() or Inputfloat() instead. + - 2015/03/17 (1.36) - renamed GetItemBoxMin()/GetItemBoxMax()/IsMouseHoveringBox() to GetItemRectMin()/GetItemRectMax()/IsMouseHoveringRect(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50. + - 2015/03/15 (1.36) - renamed style.TreeNodeSpacing to style.IndentSpacing, ImGuiStyleVar_TreeNodeSpacing to ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing + - 2015/03/13 (1.36) - renamed GetWindowIsFocused() to IsWindowFocused(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50. + - 2015/03/08 (1.35) - renamed style.ScrollBarWidth to style.ScrollbarWidth (casing) + - 2015/02/27 (1.34) - renamed OpenNextNode(bool) to SetNextTreeNodeOpened(bool, ImGuiSetCond). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50. + - 2015/02/27 (1.34) - renamed ImGuiSetCondition_*** to ImGuiSetCond_***, and _FirstUseThisSession becomes _Once. + - 2015/02/11 (1.32) - changed text input callback ImGuiTextEditCallback return type from void-->int. reserved for future use, return 0 for now. + - 2015/02/10 (1.32) - renamed GetItemWidth() to CalcItemWidth() to clarify its evolving behavior + - 2015/02/08 (1.31) - renamed GetTextLineSpacing() to GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() + - 2015/02/01 (1.31) - removed IO.MemReallocFn (unused) + - 2015/01/19 (1.30) - renamed ImGuiStorage::GetIntPtr()/GetFloatPtr() to GetIntRef()/GetIntRef() because Ptr was conflicting with actual pointer storage functions. + - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - big font/image API change! now loads TTF file. allow for multiple fonts. no need for a PNG loader. + - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - removed GetDefaultFontData(). uses io.Fonts->GetTextureData*() API to retrieve uncompressed pixels. + - old: const void* png_data; unsigned int png_size; ImGui::GetDefaultFontData(NULL, NULL, &png_data, &png_size); [..Upload texture to GPU..]; + - new: unsigned char* pixels; int width, height; io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height); [..Upload texture to GPU..]; io.Fonts->SetTexID(YourTexIdentifier); + you now have more flexibility to load multiple TTF fonts and manage the texture buffer for internal needs. It is now recommended that you sample the font texture with bilinear interpolation. + - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - added texture identifier in ImDrawCmd passed to your render function (we can now render images). make sure to call io.Fonts->SetTexID() + - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - removed IO.PixelCenterOffset (unnecessary, can be handled in user projection matrix) + - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - removed ImGui::IsItemFocused() in favor of ImGui::IsItemActive() which handles all widgets + - 2014/12/10 (1.18) - removed SetNewWindowDefaultPos() in favor of new generic API SetNextWindowPos(pos, ImGuiSetCondition_FirstUseEver) + - 2014/11/28 (1.17) - moved IO.Font*** options to inside the IO.Font-> structure (FontYOffset, FontTexUvForWhite, FontBaseScale, FontFallbackGlyph) + - 2014/11/26 (1.17) - reworked syntax of IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME helper macro to increase compiler compatibility + - 2014/11/07 (1.15) - renamed IsHovered() to IsItemHovered() + - 2014/10/02 (1.14) - renamed IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_CPP to IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_INL and imgui_user.cpp to imgui_user.inl (more IDE friendly) + - 2014/09/25 (1.13) - removed 'text_end' parameter from IO.SetClipboardTextFn (the string is now always zero-terminated for simplicity) + - 2014/09/24 (1.12) - renamed SetFontScale() to SetWindowFontScale() + - 2014/09/24 (1.12) - moved IM_MALLOC/IM_REALLOC/IM_FREE preprocessor defines to IO.MemAllocFn/IO.MemReallocFn/IO.MemFreeFn + - 2014/08/30 (1.09) - removed IO.FontHeight (now computed automatically) + - 2014/08/30 (1.09) - moved IMGUI_FONT_TEX_UV_FOR_WHITE preprocessor define to IO.FontTexUvForWhite + - 2014/08/28 (1.09) - changed the behavior of IO.PixelCenterOffset following various rendering fixes + + + FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) + ================================ + + Read all answers online: + https://www.dearimgui.com/faq or https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/blob/master/docs/FAQ.md (same url) + Read all answers locally (with a text editor or ideally a Markdown viewer): + docs/FAQ.md + Some answers are copied down here to facilitate searching in code. + + Q&A: Basics + =========== + + Q: Where is the documentation? + A: This library is poorly documented at the moment and expects the user to be acquainted with C/C++. + - Run the examples/ applications and explore them. + - Read Getting Started (https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started) guide. + - See demo code in imgui_demo.cpp and particularly the ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() function. + - The demo covers most features of Dear ImGui, so you can read the code and see its output. + - See documentation and comments at the top of imgui.cpp + effectively imgui.h. + - 20+ standalone example applications using e.g. OpenGL/DirectX are provided in the + examples/ folder to explain how to integrate Dear ImGui with your own engine/application. + - The Wiki (https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki) has many resources and links. + - The Glossary (https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary) page also may be useful. + - Your programming IDE is your friend, find the type or function declaration to find comments + associated with it. + + Q: What is this library called? + Q: Which version should I get? + >> This library is called "Dear ImGui", please don't call it "ImGui" :) + >> See https://www.dearimgui.com/faq for details. + + Q&A: Integration + ================ + + Q: How to get started? + A: Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started. Read 'PROGRAMMER GUIDE' above. Read examples/README.txt. + + Q: How can I tell whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard to Dear ImGui or my application? + A: You should read the 'io.WantCaptureMouse', 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' and 'io.WantTextInput' flags! + >> See https://www.dearimgui.com/faq for a fully detailed answer. You really want to read this. + + Q. How can I enable keyboard or gamepad controls? + Q: How can I use this on a machine without mouse, keyboard or screen? (input share, remote display) + Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and little squares are showing instead of text... + Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are clipping or disappearing when I move windows around... + Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are displaying outside their expected windows boundaries... + >> See https://www.dearimgui.com/faq + + Q&A: Usage + ---------- + + Q: About the ID Stack system.. + - Why is my widget not reacting when I click on it? + - How can I have widgets with an empty label? + - How can I have multiple widgets with the same label? + - How can I have multiple windows with the same label? + Q: How can I display an image? What is ImTextureID, how does it work? + Q: How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2? + Q: How can I interact with standard C++ types (such as std::string and std::vector)? + Q: How can I display custom shapes? (using low-level ImDrawList API) + >> See https://www.dearimgui.com/faq + + Q&A: Fonts, Text + ================ + + Q: How should I handle DPI in my application? + Q: How can I load a different font than the default? + Q: How can I easily use icons in my application? + Q: How can I load multiple fonts? + Q: How can I display and input non-Latin characters such as Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic? + >> See https://www.dearimgui.com/faq and https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/edit/master/docs/FONTS.md + + Q&A: Concerns + ============= + + Q: Who uses Dear ImGui? + Q: Can you create elaborate/serious tools with Dear ImGui? + Q: Can you reskin the look of Dear ImGui? + Q: Why using C++ (as opposed to C)? + >> See https://www.dearimgui.com/faq + + Q&A: Community + ============== + + Q: How can I help? + A: - Businesses: please reach out to "contact AT dearimgui.com" if you work in a place using Dear ImGui! + We can discuss ways for your company to fund development via invoiced technical support, maintenance or sponsoring contacts. + This is among the most useful thing you can do for Dear ImGui. With increased funding, we sustain and grow work on this project. + Also see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Sponsors + - Businesses: you can also purchase licenses for the Dear ImGui Automation/Test Engine. + - If you are experienced with Dear ImGui and C++, look at the GitHub issues, look at the Wiki, and see how you want to help and can help! + - Disclose your usage of Dear ImGui via a dev blog post, a tweet, a screenshot, a mention somewhere etc. + You may post screenshot or links in the gallery threads. Visuals are ideal as they inspire other programmers. + But even without visuals, disclosing your use of dear imgui helps the library grow credibility, and help other teams and programmers with taking decisions. + - If you have issues or if you need to hack into the library, even if you don't expect any support it is useful that you share your issues (on GitHub or privately). + +*/ + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] INCLUDES +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS) +#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS +#endif + +#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#endif + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE +#include "imgui_internal.h" + +// System includes +#include // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf +#include // intptr_t + +// [Windows] On non-Visual Studio compilers, we default to IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS unless explicitly enabled +#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(IMGUI_ENABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS) +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS +#endif + +// [Windows] OS specific includes (optional) +#if defined(_WIN32) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS +#endif +#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) +#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#endif +#ifndef NOMINMAX +#define NOMINMAX +#endif +#ifndef __MINGW32__ +#include // _wfopen, OpenClipboard +#else +#include +#endif +#if defined(WINAPI_FAMILY) && (WINAPI_FAMILY == WINAPI_FAMILY_APP) // UWP doesn't have all Win32 functions +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS +#endif +#endif + +// [Apple] OS specific includes +#if defined(__APPLE__) +#include +#endif + +// Visual Studio warnings +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant +#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later +#pragma warning (disable: 5054) // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types +#endif +#pragma warning (disable: 26451) // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to an 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2). +#pragma warning (disable: 26495) // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6). +#pragma warning (disable: 26812) // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). +#endif + +// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything +#if defined(__clang__) +#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option") +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great! +#endif +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning: use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format string is not a string literal // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wexit-time-destructors" // warning: declaration requires an exit-time destructor // exit-time destruction order is undefined. if MemFree() leads to users code that has been disabled before exit it might cause problems. ImGui coding style welcomes static/globals. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wglobal-constructors" // warning: declaration requires a global destructor // similar to above, not sure what the exact difference is. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-pedantic" // warning: format specifies type 'void *' but the argument has type 'xxxx *' // unreasonable, would lead to casting every %p arg to void*. probably enabled by -pedantic. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast" // warning: cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type 'int' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning: zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0 +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +// We disable -Wpragmas because GCC doesn't provide a has_warning equivalent and some forks/patches may not follow the warning/version association. +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-pointer-cast" // warning: cast to pointer from integer of different size +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat" // warning: format '%p' expects argument of type 'void*', but argument 6 has type 'ImGuiWindow*' +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wconversion" // warning: conversion to 'xxxx' from 'xxxx' may alter its value +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wstrict-overflow" // warning: assuming signed overflow does not occur when assuming that (X - c) > X is always false +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead +#endif + +// Debug options +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING 0 // Display navigation scoring preview when hovering items. Display last moving direction matches when holding CTRL +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS 0 // Display the reference navigation rectangle for each window + +// When using CTRL+TAB (or Gamepad Square+L/R) we delay the visual a little in order to reduce visual noise doing a fast switch. +static const float NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY = 0.20f; // Time before the highlight and screen dimming starts fading in +static const float NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY = 0.15f; // Time before the window list starts to appear + +// Window resizing from edges (when io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = true and ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors is set in io.BackendFlags by backend) +static const float WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING = 4.0f; // Extend outside window for hovering/resizing (maxxed with TouchPadding) and inside windows for borders. Affect FindHoveredWindow(). +static const float WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_FEEDBACK_TIMER = 0.04f; // Reduce visual noise by only highlighting the border after a certain time. +static const float WINDOWS_MOUSE_WHEEL_SCROLL_LOCK_TIMER = 0.70f; // Lock scrolled window (so it doesn't pick child windows that are scrolling through) for a certain time, unless mouse moved. + +// Tooltip offset +static const ImVec2 TOOLTIP_DEFAULT_OFFSET = ImVec2(16, 10); // Multiplied by g.Style.MouseCursorScale + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] FORWARD DECLARATIONS +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +static void SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window); +static void FindHoveredWindow(); +static ImGuiWindow* CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImGuiWindowFlags flags); +static ImVec2 CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window); + +static void AddWindowToSortBuffer(ImVector* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window); + +// Settings +static void WindowSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*); +static void* WindowSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name); +static void WindowSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line); +static void WindowSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*); +static void WindowSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf); + +// Platform Dependents default implementation for IO functions +static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data_ctx); +static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data_ctx, const char* text); +static void SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data); + +namespace ImGui +{ +// Navigation +static void NavUpdate(); +static void NavUpdateWindowing(); +static void NavUpdateWindowingOverlay(); +static void NavUpdateCancelRequest(); +static void NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest(); +static void NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest(); +static float NavUpdatePageUpPageDown(); +static inline void NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); +static void NavUpdateCreateWrappingRequest(); +static void NavEndFrame(); +static bool NavScoreItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result); +static void NavApplyItemToResult(ImGuiNavItemData* result); +static void NavProcessItem(); +static void NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest(ImGuiID id, ImGuiItemFlags item_flags, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags); +static ImVec2 NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); +static void NavSaveLastChildNavWindowIntoParent(ImGuiWindow* nav_window); +static ImGuiWindow* NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window); +static void NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer layer); +static void NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); +static int FindWindowFocusIndex(ImGuiWindow* window); + +// Error Checking and Debug Tools +static void ErrorCheckNewFrameSanityChecks(); +static void ErrorCheckEndFrameSanityChecks(); +static void UpdateDebugToolItemPicker(); +static void UpdateDebugToolStackQueries(); + +// Inputs +static void UpdateKeyboardInputs(); +static void UpdateMouseInputs(); +static void UpdateMouseWheel(); +static void UpdateKeyRoutingTable(ImGuiKeyRoutingTable* rt); + +// Misc +static void UpdateSettings(); +static bool UpdateWindowManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], const ImRect& visibility_rect); +static void RenderWindowShadow(ImGuiWindow* window); +static void RenderWindowOuterBorders(ImGuiWindow* window); +static void RenderWindowDecorations(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, bool title_bar_is_highlight, bool handle_borders_and_resize_grips, int resize_grip_count, const ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], float resize_grip_draw_size); +static void RenderWindowTitleBarContents(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, const char* name, bool* p_open); +static void RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, ImU32 col); +static void RenderDimmedBackgrounds(); + +// Viewports +static void UpdateViewportsNewFrame(); + +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] CONTEXT AND MEMORY ALLOCATORS +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// DLL users: +// - Heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! +// - You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions() for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. +// - Same applies for hot-reloading mechanisms that are reliant on reloading DLL (note that many hot-reloading mechanisms work without DLL). +// - Using Dear ImGui via a shared library is not recommended, because of function call overhead and because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility. +// - Confused? In a debugger: add GImGui to your watch window and notice how its value changes depending on your current location (which DLL boundary you are in). + +// Current context pointer. Implicitly used by all Dear ImGui functions. Always assumed to be != NULL. +// - ImGui::CreateContext() will automatically set this pointer if it is NULL. +// Change to a different context by calling ImGui::SetCurrentContext(). +// - Important: Dear ImGui functions are not thread-safe because of this pointer. +// If you want thread-safety to allow N threads to access N different contexts: +// - Change this variable to use thread local storage so each thread can refer to a different context, in your imconfig.h: +// struct ImGuiContext; +// extern thread_local ImGuiContext* MyImGuiTLS; +// #define GImGui MyImGuiTLS +// And then define MyImGuiTLS in one of your cpp files. Note that thread_local is a C++11 keyword, earlier C++ uses compiler-specific keyword. +// - Future development aims to make this context pointer explicit to all calls. Also read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/586 +// - If you need a finite number of contexts, you may compile and use multiple instances of the ImGui code from a different namespace. +// - DLL users: read comments above. +#ifndef GImGui +ImGuiContext* GImGui = NULL; +#endif + +// Memory Allocator functions. Use SetAllocatorFunctions() to change them. +// - You probably don't want to modify that mid-program, and if you use global/static e.g. ImVector<> instances you may need to keep them accessible during program destruction. +// - DLL users: read comments above. +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS +static void* MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); return malloc(size); } +static void FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); free(ptr); } +#else +static void* MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); IM_UNUSED(size); IM_ASSERT(0); return NULL; } +static void FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); IM_UNUSED(ptr); IM_ASSERT(0); } +#endif +static ImGuiMemAllocFunc GImAllocatorAllocFunc = MallocWrapper; +static ImGuiMemFreeFunc GImAllocatorFreeFunc = FreeWrapper; +static void* GImAllocatorUserData = NULL; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] USER FACING STRUCTURES (ImGuiStyle, ImGuiIO) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImGuiStyle::ImGuiStyle() +{ + Alpha = 1.0f; // Global alpha applies to everything in Dear ImGui. + DisabledAlpha = 0.60f; // Additional alpha multiplier applied by BeginDisabled(). Multiply over current value of Alpha. + WindowPadding = ImVec2(8,8); // Padding within a window + WindowRounding = 0.0f; // Radius of window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows. Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and are not recommended. + WindowBorderSize = 1.0f; // Thickness of border around windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested. + WindowMinSize = ImVec2(32,32); // Minimum window size + WindowTitleAlign = ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f);// Alignment for title bar text + WindowMenuButtonPosition= ImGuiDir_Left; // Position of the collapsing/docking button in the title bar (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Left. + ChildRounding = 0.0f; // Radius of child window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular child windows + ChildBorderSize = 1.0f; // Thickness of border around child windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested. + PopupRounding = 0.0f; // Radius of popup window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular child windows + PopupBorderSize = 1.0f; // Thickness of border around popup or tooltip windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested. + FramePadding = ImVec2(4,3); // Padding within a framed rectangle (used by most widgets) + FrameRounding = 0.0f; // Radius of frame corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular frames (used by most widgets). + FrameBorderSize = 0.0f; // Thickness of border around frames. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested. + ItemSpacing = ImVec2(8,4); // Horizontal and vertical spacing between widgets/lines + ItemInnerSpacing = ImVec2(4,4); // Horizontal and vertical spacing between within elements of a composed widget (e.g. a slider and its label) + CellPadding = ImVec2(4,2); // Padding within a table cell. CellPadding.y may be altered between different rows. + TouchExtraPadding = ImVec2(0,0); // Expand reactive bounding box for touch-based system where touch position is not accurate enough. Unfortunately we don't sort widgets so priority on overlap will always be given to the first widget. So don't grow this too much! + IndentSpacing = 21.0f; // Horizontal spacing when e.g. entering a tree node. Generally == (FontSize + FramePadding.x*2). + ColumnsMinSpacing = 6.0f; // Minimum horizontal spacing between two columns. Preferably > (FramePadding.x + 1). + ScrollbarSize = 14.0f; // Width of the vertical scrollbar, Height of the horizontal scrollbar + ScrollbarRounding = 9.0f; // Radius of grab corners rounding for scrollbar + GrabMinSize = 12.0f; // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar + GrabRounding = 0.0f; // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs. + LogSliderDeadzone = 4.0f; // The size in pixels of the dead-zone around zero on logarithmic sliders that cross zero. + TabRounding = 4.0f; // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs. + TabBorderSize = 0.0f; // Thickness of border around tabs. + TabMinWidthForCloseButton = 0.0f; // Minimum width for close button to appear on an unselected tab when hovered. Set to 0.0f to always show when hovering, set to FLT_MAX to never show close button unless selected. + ColorButtonPosition = ImGuiDir_Right; // Side of the color button in the ColorEdit4 widget (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Right. + ButtonTextAlign = ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f);// Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. + SelectableTextAlign = ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f);// Alignment of selectable text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned). It's generally important to keep this left-aligned if you want to lay multiple items on a same line. + SeparatorTextBorderSize = 3.0f; // Thickkness of border in SeparatorText() + SeparatorTextAlign = ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f);// Alignment of text within the separator. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.5f) (left aligned, center). + SeparatorTextPadding = ImVec2(20.0f,3.f);// Horizontal offset of text from each edge of the separator + spacing on other axis. Generally small values. .y is recommended to be == FramePadding.y. + DisplayWindowPadding = ImVec2(19,19); // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area or monitors by at least this amount. Only applies to regular windows. + DisplaySafeAreaPadding = ImVec2(3,3); // If you cannot see the edge of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Covers popups/tooltips as well regular windows. + MouseCursorScale = 1.0f; // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). May be removed later. + AntiAliasedLines = true; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders. Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. + AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = true; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures where possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering). + AntiAliasedFill = true; // Enable anti-aliased filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles, etc.). + CurveTessellationTol = 1.25f; // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() without a specific number of segments. Decrease for highly tessellated curves (higher quality, more polygons), increase to reduce quality. + CircleTessellationMaxError = 0.30f; // Maximum error (in pixels) allowed when using AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() or drawing rounded corner rectangles with no explicit segment count specified. Decrease for higher quality but more geometry. + WindowShadowSize = 100.0f; // Size (in pixels) of window shadows. + WindowShadowOffsetDist = 0.0f; // Offset distance (in pixels) of window shadows from casting window. + WindowShadowOffsetAngle = IM_PI * 0.25f; // Offset angle of window shadows from casting window (0.0f = left, 0.5f*PI = bottom, 1.0f*PI = right, 1.5f*PI = top). + + // Behaviors + HoverStationaryDelay = 0.15f; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary). Time required to consider mouse stationary. + HoverDelayShort = 0.15f; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort). Usually used along with HoverStationaryDelay. + HoverDelayNormal = 0.40f; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal). " + HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse = ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort; // Default flags when using IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) or BeginItemTooltip()/SetItemTooltip() while using mouse. + HoverFlagsForTooltipNav = ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal; // Default flags when using IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) or BeginItemTooltip()/SetItemTooltip() while using keyboard/gamepad. + + // Default theme + ImGui::StyleColorsDark(this); +} + +// To scale your entire UI (e.g. if you want your app to use High DPI or generally be DPI aware) you may use this helper function. Scaling the fonts is done separately and is up to you. +// Important: This operation is lossy because we round all sizes to integer. If you need to change your scale multiples, call this over a freshly initialized ImGuiStyle structure rather than scaling multiple times. +void ImGuiStyle::ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor) +{ + WindowPadding = ImFloor(WindowPadding * scale_factor); + WindowRounding = ImFloor(WindowRounding * scale_factor); + WindowMinSize = ImFloor(WindowMinSize * scale_factor); + ChildRounding = ImFloor(ChildRounding * scale_factor); + PopupRounding = ImFloor(PopupRounding * scale_factor); + FramePadding = ImFloor(FramePadding * scale_factor); + FrameRounding = ImFloor(FrameRounding * scale_factor); + ItemSpacing = ImFloor(ItemSpacing * scale_factor); + ItemInnerSpacing = ImFloor(ItemInnerSpacing * scale_factor); + CellPadding = ImFloor(CellPadding * scale_factor); + TouchExtraPadding = ImFloor(TouchExtraPadding * scale_factor); + IndentSpacing = ImFloor(IndentSpacing * scale_factor); + ColumnsMinSpacing = ImFloor(ColumnsMinSpacing * scale_factor); + ScrollbarSize = ImFloor(ScrollbarSize * scale_factor); + ScrollbarRounding = ImFloor(ScrollbarRounding * scale_factor); + GrabMinSize = ImFloor(GrabMinSize * scale_factor); + GrabRounding = ImFloor(GrabRounding * scale_factor); + LogSliderDeadzone = ImFloor(LogSliderDeadzone * scale_factor); + TabRounding = ImFloor(TabRounding * scale_factor); + TabMinWidthForCloseButton = (TabMinWidthForCloseButton != FLT_MAX) ? ImFloor(TabMinWidthForCloseButton * scale_factor) : FLT_MAX; + SeparatorTextPadding = ImFloor(SeparatorTextPadding * scale_factor); + DisplayWindowPadding = ImFloor(DisplayWindowPadding * scale_factor); + DisplaySafeAreaPadding = ImFloor(DisplaySafeAreaPadding * scale_factor); + MouseCursorScale = ImFloor(MouseCursorScale * scale_factor); +} + +ImGuiIO::ImGuiIO() +{ + // Most fields are initialized with zero + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); + IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(ImGuiIO::MouseDown) == ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT && IM_ARRAYSIZE(ImGuiIO::MouseClicked) == ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT); + + // Settings + ConfigFlags = ImGuiConfigFlags_None; + BackendFlags = ImGuiBackendFlags_None; + DisplaySize = ImVec2(-1.0f, -1.0f); + DeltaTime = 1.0f / 60.0f; + IniSavingRate = 5.0f; + IniFilename = "imgui.ini"; // Important: "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir, most apps will want to lock this to an absolute path (e.g. same path as executables). + LogFilename = "imgui_log.txt"; +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiKey_COUNT; i++) + KeyMap[i] = -1; +#endif + UserData = NULL; + + Fonts = NULL; + FontGlobalScale = 1.0f; + FontDefault = NULL; + FontAllowUserScaling = false; + DisplayFramebufferScale = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f); + + MouseDoubleClickTime = 0.30f; + MouseDoubleClickMaxDist = 6.0f; + MouseDragThreshold = 6.0f; + KeyRepeatDelay = 0.275f; + KeyRepeatRate = 0.050f; + + // Miscellaneous options + MouseDrawCursor = false; +#ifdef __APPLE__ + ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = true; // Set Mac OS X style defaults based on __APPLE__ compile time flag +#else + ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = false; +#endif + ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue = true; + ConfigInputTextCursorBlink = true; + ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive = false; + ConfigDragClickToInputText = false; + ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = true; + ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly = false; + ConfigMemoryCompactTimer = 60.0f; + ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueOnce = false; + ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop = false; + + // Platform Functions + // Note: Initialize() will setup default clipboard/ime handlers. + BackendPlatformName = BackendRendererName = NULL; + BackendPlatformUserData = BackendRendererUserData = BackendLanguageUserData = NULL; + PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint = '.'; + + // Input (NB: we already have memset zero the entire structure!) + MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + MousePosPrev = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + MouseSource = ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse; + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(MouseDownDuration); i++) MouseDownDuration[i] = MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = -1.0f; + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(KeysData); i++) { KeysData[i].DownDuration = KeysData[i].DownDurationPrev = -1.0f; } + AppAcceptingEvents = true; + BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays = (ImS8)-1; + BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray = true; // assume using legacy array until proven wrong +} + +// Pass in translated ASCII characters for text input. +// - with glfw you can get those from the callback set in glfwSetCharCallback() +// - on Windows you can get those using ToAscii+keyboard state, or via the WM_CHAR message +// FIXME: Should in theory be called "AddCharacterEvent()" to be consistent with new API +void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c) +{ + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + if (c == 0 || !AppAcceptingEvents) + return; + + ImGuiInputEvent e; + e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_Text; + e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard; + e.EventId = g.InputEventsNextEventId++; + e.Text.Char = c; + g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e); +} + +// UTF16 strings use surrogate pairs to encode codepoints >= 0x10000, so +// we should save the high surrogate. +void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharacterUTF16(ImWchar16 c) +{ + if ((c == 0 && InputQueueSurrogate == 0) || !AppAcceptingEvents) + return; + + if ((c & 0xFC00) == 0xD800) // High surrogate, must save + { + if (InputQueueSurrogate != 0) + AddInputCharacter(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID); + InputQueueSurrogate = c; + return; + } + + ImWchar cp = c; + if (InputQueueSurrogate != 0) + { + if ((c & 0xFC00) != 0xDC00) // Invalid low surrogate + { + AddInputCharacter(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID); + } + else + { +#if IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX == 0xFFFF + cp = IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID; // Codepoint will not fit in ImWchar +#else + cp = (ImWchar)(((InputQueueSurrogate - 0xD800) << 10) + (c - 0xDC00) + 0x10000); +#endif + } + + InputQueueSurrogate = 0; + } + AddInputCharacter((unsigned)cp); +} + +void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* utf8_chars) +{ + if (!AppAcceptingEvents) + return; + while (*utf8_chars != 0) + { + unsigned int c = 0; + utf8_chars += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, utf8_chars, NULL); + AddInputCharacter(c); + } +} + +// Clear all incoming events. +void ImGuiIO::ClearEventsQueue() +{ + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + g.InputEventsQueue.clear(); +} + +// Clear current keyboard/mouse/gamepad state + current frame text input buffer. Equivalent to releasing all keys/buttons. +void ImGuiIO::ClearInputKeys() +{ +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + memset(KeysDown, 0, sizeof(KeysDown)); +#endif + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(KeysData); n++) + { + KeysData[n].Down = false; + KeysData[n].DownDuration = -1.0f; + KeysData[n].DownDurationPrev = -1.0f; + } + KeyCtrl = KeyShift = KeyAlt = KeySuper = false; + KeyMods = ImGuiMod_None; + MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(MouseDown); n++) + { + MouseDown[n] = false; + MouseDownDuration[n] = MouseDownDurationPrev[n] = -1.0f; + } + MouseWheel = MouseWheelH = 0.0f; + InputQueueCharacters.resize(0); // Behavior of old ClearInputCharacters(). +} + +// Removed this as it is ambiguous/misleading and generally incorrect to use with the existence of a higher-level input queue. +// Current frame character buffer is now also cleared by ClearInputKeys(). +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS +void ImGuiIO::ClearInputCharacters() +{ + InputQueueCharacters.resize(0); +} +#endif + +static ImGuiInputEvent* FindLatestInputEvent(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiInputEventType type, int arg = -1) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (int n = g.InputEventsQueue.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--) + { + ImGuiInputEvent* e = &g.InputEventsQueue[n]; + if (e->Type != type) + continue; + if (type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key && e->Key.Key != arg) + continue; + if (type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton && e->MouseButton.Button != arg) + continue; + return e; + } + return NULL; +} + +// Queue a new key down/up event. +// - ImGuiKey key: Translated key (as in, generally ImGuiKey_A matches the key end-user would use to emit an 'A' character) +// - bool down: Is the key down? use false to signify a key release. +// - float analog_value: 0.0f..1.0f +// IMPORTANT: THIS FUNCTION AND OTHER "ADD" GRABS THE CONTEXT FROM OUR INSTANCE. +// WE NEED TO ENSURE THAT ALL FUNCTION CALLS ARE FULLFILLING THIS, WHICH IS WHY GetKeyData() HAS AN EXPLICIT CONTEXT. +void ImGuiIO::AddKeyAnalogEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down, float analog_value) +{ + //if (e->Down) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("AddKeyEvent() Key='%s' %d, NativeKeycode = %d, NativeScancode = %d\n", ImGui::GetKeyName(e->Key), e->Down, e->NativeKeycode, e->NativeScancode); } + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + if (key == ImGuiKey_None || !AppAcceptingEvents) + return; + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + IM_ASSERT(ImGui::IsNamedKeyOrModKey(key)); // Backend needs to pass a valid ImGuiKey_ constant. 0..511 values are legacy native key codes which are not accepted by this API. + IM_ASSERT(ImGui::IsAliasKey(key) == false); // Backend cannot submit ImGuiKey_MouseXXX values they are automatically inferred from AddMouseXXX() events. + IM_ASSERT(key != ImGuiMod_Shortcut); // We could easily support the translation here but it seems saner to not accept it (TestEngine perform a translation itself) + + // Verify that backend isn't mixing up using new io.AddKeyEvent() api and old io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[] data. +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + IM_ASSERT((BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == -1 || BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 0) && "Backend needs to either only use io.AddKeyEvent(), either only fill legacy io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[]. Not both!"); + if (BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == -1) + for (int n = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; n++) + IM_ASSERT(KeyMap[n] == -1 && "Backend needs to either only use io.AddKeyEvent(), either only fill legacy io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[]. Not both!"); + BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays = 0; +#endif + if (ImGui::IsGamepadKey(key)) + BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray = false; + + // Filter duplicate (in particular: key mods and gamepad analog values are commonly spammed) + const ImGuiInputEvent* latest_event = FindLatestInputEvent(&g, ImGuiInputEventType_Key, (int)key); + const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = ImGui::GetKeyData(&g, key); + const bool latest_key_down = latest_event ? latest_event->Key.Down : key_data->Down; + const float latest_key_analog = latest_event ? latest_event->Key.AnalogValue : key_data->AnalogValue; + if (latest_key_down == down && latest_key_analog == analog_value) + return; + + // Add event + ImGuiInputEvent e; + e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_Key; + e.Source = ImGui::IsGamepadKey(key) ? ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad : ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard; + e.EventId = g.InputEventsNextEventId++; + e.Key.Key = key; + e.Key.Down = down; + e.Key.AnalogValue = analog_value; + g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e); +} + +void ImGuiIO::AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down) +{ + if (!AppAcceptingEvents) + return; + AddKeyAnalogEvent(key, down, down ? 1.0f : 0.0f); +} + +// [Optional] Call after AddKeyEvent(). +// Specify native keycode, scancode + Specify index for legacy <1.87 IsKeyXXX() functions with native indices. +// If you are writing a backend in 2022 or don't use IsKeyXXX() with native values that are not ImGuiKey values, you can avoid calling this. +void ImGuiIO::SetKeyEventNativeData(ImGuiKey key, int native_keycode, int native_scancode, int native_legacy_index) +{ + if (key == ImGuiKey_None) + return; + IM_ASSERT(ImGui::IsNamedKey(key)); // >= 512 + IM_ASSERT(native_legacy_index == -1 || ImGui::IsLegacyKey((ImGuiKey)native_legacy_index)); // >= 0 && <= 511 + IM_UNUSED(native_keycode); // Yet unused + IM_UNUSED(native_scancode); // Yet unused + + // Build native->imgui map so old user code can still call key functions with native 0..511 values. +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + const int legacy_key = (native_legacy_index != -1) ? native_legacy_index : native_keycode; + if (!ImGui::IsLegacyKey((ImGuiKey)legacy_key)) + return; + KeyMap[legacy_key] = key; + KeyMap[key] = legacy_key; +#else + IM_UNUSED(key); + IM_UNUSED(native_legacy_index); +#endif +} + +// Set master flag for accepting key/mouse/text events (default to true). Useful if you have native dialog boxes that are interrupting your application loop/refresh, and you want to disable events being queued while your app is frozen. +void ImGuiIO::SetAppAcceptingEvents(bool accepting_events) +{ + AppAcceptingEvents = accepting_events; +} + +// Queue a mouse move event +void ImGuiIO::AddMousePosEvent(float x, float y) +{ + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + if (!AppAcceptingEvents) + return; + + // Apply same flooring as UpdateMouseInputs() + ImVec2 pos((x > -FLT_MAX) ? ImFloorSigned(x) : x, (y > -FLT_MAX) ? ImFloorSigned(y) : y); + + // Filter duplicate + const ImGuiInputEvent* latest_event = FindLatestInputEvent(&g, ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos); + const ImVec2 latest_pos = latest_event ? ImVec2(latest_event->MousePos.PosX, latest_event->MousePos.PosY) : g.IO.MousePos; + if (latest_pos.x == pos.x && latest_pos.y == pos.y) + return; + + ImGuiInputEvent e; + e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos; + e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Mouse; + e.EventId = g.InputEventsNextEventId++; + e.MousePos.PosX = pos.x; + e.MousePos.PosY = pos.y; + e.MousePos.MouseSource = g.InputEventsNextMouseSource; + g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e); +} + +void ImGuiIO::AddMouseButtonEvent(int mouse_button, bool down) +{ + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + IM_ASSERT(mouse_button >= 0 && mouse_button < ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT); + if (!AppAcceptingEvents) + return; + + // Filter duplicate + const ImGuiInputEvent* latest_event = FindLatestInputEvent(&g, ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton, (int)mouse_button); + const bool latest_button_down = latest_event ? latest_event->MouseButton.Down : g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button]; + if (latest_button_down == down) + return; + + ImGuiInputEvent e; + e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton; + e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Mouse; + e.EventId = g.InputEventsNextEventId++; + e.MouseButton.Button = mouse_button; + e.MouseButton.Down = down; + e.MouseButton.MouseSource = g.InputEventsNextMouseSource; + g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e); +} + +// Queue a mouse wheel event (some mouse/API may only have a Y component) +void ImGuiIO::AddMouseWheelEvent(float wheel_x, float wheel_y) +{ + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + + // Filter duplicate (unlike most events, wheel values are relative and easy to filter) + if (!AppAcceptingEvents || (wheel_x == 0.0f && wheel_y == 0.0f)) + return; + + ImGuiInputEvent e; + e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel; + e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Mouse; + e.EventId = g.InputEventsNextEventId++; + e.MouseWheel.WheelX = wheel_x; + e.MouseWheel.WheelY = wheel_y; + e.MouseWheel.MouseSource = g.InputEventsNextMouseSource; + g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e); +} + +// This is not a real event, the data is latched in order to be stored in actual Mouse events. +// This is so that duplicate events (e.g. Windows sending extraneous WM_MOUSEMOVE) gets filtered and are not leading to actual source changes. +void ImGuiIO::AddMouseSourceEvent(ImGuiMouseSource source) +{ + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + g.InputEventsNextMouseSource = source; +} + +void ImGuiIO::AddFocusEvent(bool focused) +{ + IM_ASSERT(Ctx != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + + // Filter duplicate + const ImGuiInputEvent* latest_event = FindLatestInputEvent(&g, ImGuiInputEventType_Focus); + const bool latest_focused = latest_event ? latest_event->AppFocused.Focused : !g.IO.AppFocusLost; + if (latest_focused == focused || (ConfigDebugIgnoreFocusLoss && !focused)) + return; + + ImGuiInputEvent e; + e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_Focus; + e.EventId = g.InputEventsNextEventId++; + e.AppFocused.Focused = focused; + g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Geometry functions) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImVec2 ImBezierCubicClosestPoint(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, int num_segments) +{ + IM_ASSERT(num_segments > 0); // Use ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau() + ImVec2 p_last = p1; + ImVec2 p_closest; + float p_closest_dist2 = FLT_MAX; + float t_step = 1.0f / (float)num_segments; + for (int i_step = 1; i_step <= num_segments; i_step++) + { + ImVec2 p_current = ImBezierCubicCalc(p1, p2, p3, p4, t_step * i_step); + ImVec2 p_line = ImLineClosestPoint(p_last, p_current, p); + float dist2 = ImLengthSqr(p - p_line); + if (dist2 < p_closest_dist2) + { + p_closest = p_line; + p_closest_dist2 = dist2; + } + p_last = p_current; + } + return p_closest; +} + +// Closely mimics PathBezierToCasteljau() in imgui_draw.cpp +static void ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(const ImVec2& p, ImVec2& p_closest, ImVec2& p_last, float& p_closest_dist2, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float x4, float y4, float tess_tol, int level) +{ + float dx = x4 - x1; + float dy = y4 - y1; + float d2 = ((x2 - x4) * dy - (y2 - y4) * dx); + float d3 = ((x3 - x4) * dy - (y3 - y4) * dx); + d2 = (d2 >= 0) ? d2 : -d2; + d3 = (d3 >= 0) ? d3 : -d3; + if ((d2 + d3) * (d2 + d3) < tess_tol * (dx * dx + dy * dy)) + { + ImVec2 p_current(x4, y4); + ImVec2 p_line = ImLineClosestPoint(p_last, p_current, p); + float dist2 = ImLengthSqr(p - p_line); + if (dist2 < p_closest_dist2) + { + p_closest = p_line; + p_closest_dist2 = dist2; + } + p_last = p_current; + } + else if (level < 10) + { + float x12 = (x1 + x2)*0.5f, y12 = (y1 + y2)*0.5f; + float x23 = (x2 + x3)*0.5f, y23 = (y2 + y3)*0.5f; + float x34 = (x3 + x4)*0.5f, y34 = (y3 + y4)*0.5f; + float x123 = (x12 + x23)*0.5f, y123 = (y12 + y23)*0.5f; + float x234 = (x23 + x34)*0.5f, y234 = (y23 + y34)*0.5f; + float x1234 = (x123 + x234)*0.5f, y1234 = (y123 + y234)*0.5f; + ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(p, p_closest, p_last, p_closest_dist2, x1, y1, x12, y12, x123, y123, x1234, y1234, tess_tol, level + 1); + ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(p, p_closest, p_last, p_closest_dist2, x1234, y1234, x234, y234, x34, y34, x4, y4, tess_tol, level + 1); + } +} + +// tess_tol is generally the same value you would find in ImGui::GetStyle().CurveTessellationTol +// Because those ImXXX functions are lower-level than ImGui:: we cannot access this value automatically. +ImVec2 ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, float tess_tol) +{ + IM_ASSERT(tess_tol > 0.0f); + ImVec2 p_last = p1; + ImVec2 p_closest; + float p_closest_dist2 = FLT_MAX; + ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(p, p_closest, p_last, p_closest_dist2, p1.x, p1.y, p2.x, p2.y, p3.x, p3.y, p4.x, p4.y, tess_tol, 0); + return p_closest; +} + +ImVec2 ImLineClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& p) +{ + ImVec2 ap = p - a; + ImVec2 ab_dir = b - a; + float dot = ap.x * ab_dir.x + ap.y * ab_dir.y; + if (dot < 0.0f) + return a; + float ab_len_sqr = ab_dir.x * ab_dir.x + ab_dir.y * ab_dir.y; + if (dot > ab_len_sqr) + return b; + return a + ab_dir * dot / ab_len_sqr; +} + +bool ImTriangleContainsPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p) +{ + bool b1 = ((p.x - b.x) * (a.y - b.y) - (p.y - b.y) * (a.x - b.x)) < 0.0f; + bool b2 = ((p.x - c.x) * (b.y - c.y) - (p.y - c.y) * (b.x - c.x)) < 0.0f; + bool b3 = ((p.x - a.x) * (c.y - a.y) - (p.y - a.y) * (c.x - a.x)) < 0.0f; + return ((b1 == b2) && (b2 == b3)); +} + +void ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p, float& out_u, float& out_v, float& out_w) +{ + ImVec2 v0 = b - a; + ImVec2 v1 = c - a; + ImVec2 v2 = p - a; + const float denom = v0.x * v1.y - v1.x * v0.y; + out_v = (v2.x * v1.y - v1.x * v2.y) / denom; + out_w = (v0.x * v2.y - v2.x * v0.y) / denom; + out_u = 1.0f - out_v - out_w; +} + +ImVec2 ImTriangleClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p) +{ + ImVec2 proj_ab = ImLineClosestPoint(a, b, p); + ImVec2 proj_bc = ImLineClosestPoint(b, c, p); + ImVec2 proj_ca = ImLineClosestPoint(c, a, p); + float dist2_ab = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_ab); + float dist2_bc = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_bc); + float dist2_ca = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_ca); + float m = ImMin(dist2_ab, ImMin(dist2_bc, dist2_ca)); + if (m == dist2_ab) + return proj_ab; + if (m == dist2_bc) + return proj_bc; + return proj_ca; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (String, Format, Hash functions) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Consider using _stricmp/_strnicmp under Windows or strcasecmp/strncasecmp. We don't actually use either ImStricmp/ImStrnicmp in the codebase any more. +int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2) +{ + int d; + while ((d = ImToUpper(*str2) - ImToUpper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; } + return d; +} + +int ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count) +{ + int d = 0; + while (count > 0 && (d = ImToUpper(*str2) - ImToUpper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; count--; } + return d; +} + +void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count) +{ + if (count < 1) + return; + if (count > 1) + strncpy(dst, src, count - 1); + dst[count - 1] = 0; +} + +char* ImStrdup(const char* str) +{ + size_t len = strlen(str); + void* buf = IM_ALLOC(len + 1); + return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)str, len + 1); +} + +char* ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* src) +{ + size_t dst_buf_size = p_dst_size ? *p_dst_size : strlen(dst) + 1; + size_t src_size = strlen(src) + 1; + if (dst_buf_size < src_size) + { + IM_FREE(dst); + dst = (char*)IM_ALLOC(src_size); + if (p_dst_size) + *p_dst_size = src_size; + } + return (char*)memcpy(dst, (const void*)src, src_size); +} + +const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str, const char* str_end, char c) +{ + const char* p = (const char*)memchr(str, (int)c, str_end - str); + return p; +} + +int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str) +{ + //return (int)wcslen((const wchar_t*)str); // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit + int n = 0; + while (*str++) n++; + return n; +} + +// Find end-of-line. Return pointer will point to either first \n, either str_end. +const char* ImStreolRange(const char* str, const char* str_end) +{ + const char* p = (const char*)memchr(str, '\n', str_end - str); + return p ? p : str_end; +} + +const ImWchar* ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin) // find beginning-of-line +{ + while (buf_mid_line > buf_begin && buf_mid_line[-1] != '\n') + buf_mid_line--; + return buf_mid_line; +} + +const char* ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end) +{ + if (!needle_end) + needle_end = needle + strlen(needle); + + const char un0 = (char)ImToUpper(*needle); + while ((!haystack_end && *haystack) || (haystack_end && haystack < haystack_end)) + { + if (ImToUpper(*haystack) == un0) + { + const char* b = needle + 1; + for (const char* a = haystack + 1; b < needle_end; a++, b++) + if (ImToUpper(*a) != ImToUpper(*b)) + break; + if (b == needle_end) + return haystack; + } + haystack++; + } + return NULL; +} + +// Trim str by offsetting contents when there's leading data + writing a \0 at the trailing position. We use this in situation where the cost is negligible. +void ImStrTrimBlanks(char* buf) +{ + char* p = buf; + while (p[0] == ' ' || p[0] == '\t') // Leading blanks + p++; + char* p_start = p; + while (*p != 0) // Find end of string + p++; + while (p > p_start && (p[-1] == ' ' || p[-1] == '\t')) // Trailing blanks + p--; + if (p_start != buf) // Copy memory if we had leading blanks + memmove(buf, p_start, p - p_start); + buf[p - p_start] = 0; // Zero terminate +} + +const char* ImStrSkipBlank(const char* str) +{ + while (str[0] == ' ' || str[0] == '\t') + str++; + return str; +} + +// A) MSVC version appears to return -1 on overflow, whereas glibc appears to return total count (which may be >= buf_size). +// Ideally we would test for only one of those limits at runtime depending on the behavior the vsnprintf(), but trying to deduct it at compile time sounds like a pandora can of worm. +// B) When buf==NULL vsnprintf() will return the output size. +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS + +// We support stb_sprintf which is much faster (see: https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/stb_sprintf.h) +// You may set IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF to use our default wrapper, or set IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS +// and setup the wrapper yourself. (FIXME-OPT: Some of our high-level operations such as ImGuiTextBuffer::appendfv() are +// designed using two-passes worst case, which probably could be improved using the stbsp_vsprintfcb() function.) +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_SPRINTF_IMPLEMENTATION +#define STB_SPRINTF_IMPLEMENTATION +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_STB_SPRINTF_FILENAME +#include IMGUI_STB_SPRINTF_FILENAME +#else +#include "stb_sprintf.h" +#endif +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(vsnprintf) +#define vsnprintf _vsnprintf +#endif + +int ImFormatString(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF + int w = stbsp_vsnprintf(buf, (int)buf_size, fmt, args); +#else + int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args); +#endif + va_end(args); + if (buf == NULL) + return w; + if (w == -1 || w >= (int)buf_size) + w = (int)buf_size - 1; + buf[w] = 0; + return w; +} + +int ImFormatStringV(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF + int w = stbsp_vsnprintf(buf, (int)buf_size, fmt, args); +#else + int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args); +#endif + if (buf == NULL) + return w; + if (w == -1 || w >= (int)buf_size) + w = (int)buf_size - 1; + buf[w] = 0; + return w; +} +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS + +void ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == 's' && fmt[2] == 0) + { + const char* buf = va_arg(args, const char*); // Skip formatting when using "%s" + *out_buf = buf; + if (out_buf_end) { *out_buf_end = buf + strlen(buf); } + } + else + { + int buf_len = ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer.Data, g.TempBuffer.Size, fmt, args); + *out_buf = g.TempBuffer.Data; + if (out_buf_end) { *out_buf_end = g.TempBuffer.Data + buf_len; } + } + va_end(args); +} + +void ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == 's' && fmt[2] == 0) + { + const char* buf = va_arg(args, const char*); // Skip formatting when using "%s" + *out_buf = buf; + if (out_buf_end) { *out_buf_end = buf + strlen(buf); } + } + else + { + int buf_len = ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer.Data, g.TempBuffer.Size, fmt, args); + *out_buf = g.TempBuffer.Data; + if (out_buf_end) { *out_buf_end = g.TempBuffer.Data + buf_len; } + } +} + +// CRC32 needs a 1KB lookup table (not cache friendly) +// Although the code to generate the table is simple and shorter than the table itself, using a const table allows us to easily: +// - avoid an unnecessary branch/memory tap, - keep the ImHashXXX functions usable by static constructors, - make it thread-safe. +static const ImU32 GCrc32LookupTable[256] = +{ + 0x00000000,0x77073096,0xEE0E612C,0x990951BA,0x076DC419,0x706AF48F,0xE963A535,0x9E6495A3,0x0EDB8832,0x79DCB8A4,0xE0D5E91E,0x97D2D988,0x09B64C2B,0x7EB17CBD,0xE7B82D07,0x90BF1D91, + 0x1DB71064,0x6AB020F2,0xF3B97148,0x84BE41DE,0x1ADAD47D,0x6DDDE4EB,0xF4D4B551,0x83D385C7,0x136C9856,0x646BA8C0,0xFD62F97A,0x8A65C9EC,0x14015C4F,0x63066CD9,0xFA0F3D63,0x8D080DF5, + 0x3B6E20C8,0x4C69105E,0xD56041E4,0xA2677172,0x3C03E4D1,0x4B04D447,0xD20D85FD,0xA50AB56B,0x35B5A8FA,0x42B2986C,0xDBBBC9D6,0xACBCF940,0x32D86CE3,0x45DF5C75,0xDCD60DCF,0xABD13D59, + 0x26D930AC,0x51DE003A,0xC8D75180,0xBFD06116,0x21B4F4B5,0x56B3C423,0xCFBA9599,0xB8BDA50F,0x2802B89E,0x5F058808,0xC60CD9B2,0xB10BE924,0x2F6F7C87,0x58684C11,0xC1611DAB,0xB6662D3D, + 0x76DC4190,0x01DB7106,0x98D220BC,0xEFD5102A,0x71B18589,0x06B6B51F,0x9FBFE4A5,0xE8B8D433,0x7807C9A2,0x0F00F934,0x9609A88E,0xE10E9818,0x7F6A0DBB,0x086D3D2D,0x91646C97,0xE6635C01, + 0x6B6B51F4,0x1C6C6162,0x856530D8,0xF262004E,0x6C0695ED,0x1B01A57B,0x8208F4C1,0xF50FC457,0x65B0D9C6,0x12B7E950,0x8BBEB8EA,0xFCB9887C,0x62DD1DDF,0x15DA2D49,0x8CD37CF3,0xFBD44C65, + 0x4DB26158,0x3AB551CE,0xA3BC0074,0xD4BB30E2,0x4ADFA541,0x3DD895D7,0xA4D1C46D,0xD3D6F4FB,0x4369E96A,0x346ED9FC,0xAD678846,0xDA60B8D0,0x44042D73,0x33031DE5,0xAA0A4C5F,0xDD0D7CC9, + 0x5005713C,0x270241AA,0xBE0B1010,0xC90C2086,0x5768B525,0x206F85B3,0xB966D409,0xCE61E49F,0x5EDEF90E,0x29D9C998,0xB0D09822,0xC7D7A8B4,0x59B33D17,0x2EB40D81,0xB7BD5C3B,0xC0BA6CAD, + 0xEDB88320,0x9ABFB3B6,0x03B6E20C,0x74B1D29A,0xEAD54739,0x9DD277AF,0x04DB2615,0x73DC1683,0xE3630B12,0x94643B84,0x0D6D6A3E,0x7A6A5AA8,0xE40ECF0B,0x9309FF9D,0x0A00AE27,0x7D079EB1, + 0xF00F9344,0x8708A3D2,0x1E01F268,0x6906C2FE,0xF762575D,0x806567CB,0x196C3671,0x6E6B06E7,0xFED41B76,0x89D32BE0,0x10DA7A5A,0x67DD4ACC,0xF9B9DF6F,0x8EBEEFF9,0x17B7BE43,0x60B08ED5, + 0xD6D6A3E8,0xA1D1937E,0x38D8C2C4,0x4FDFF252,0xD1BB67F1,0xA6BC5767,0x3FB506DD,0x48B2364B,0xD80D2BDA,0xAF0A1B4C,0x36034AF6,0x41047A60,0xDF60EFC3,0xA867DF55,0x316E8EEF,0x4669BE79, + 0xCB61B38C,0xBC66831A,0x256FD2A0,0x5268E236,0xCC0C7795,0xBB0B4703,0x220216B9,0x5505262F,0xC5BA3BBE,0xB2BD0B28,0x2BB45A92,0x5CB36A04,0xC2D7FFA7,0xB5D0CF31,0x2CD99E8B,0x5BDEAE1D, + 0x9B64C2B0,0xEC63F226,0x756AA39C,0x026D930A,0x9C0906A9,0xEB0E363F,0x72076785,0x05005713,0x95BF4A82,0xE2B87A14,0x7BB12BAE,0x0CB61B38,0x92D28E9B,0xE5D5BE0D,0x7CDCEFB7,0x0BDBDF21, + 0x86D3D2D4,0xF1D4E242,0x68DDB3F8,0x1FDA836E,0x81BE16CD,0xF6B9265B,0x6FB077E1,0x18B74777,0x88085AE6,0xFF0F6A70,0x66063BCA,0x11010B5C,0x8F659EFF,0xF862AE69,0x616BFFD3,0x166CCF45, + 0xA00AE278,0xD70DD2EE,0x4E048354,0x3903B3C2,0xA7672661,0xD06016F7,0x4969474D,0x3E6E77DB,0xAED16A4A,0xD9D65ADC,0x40DF0B66,0x37D83BF0,0xA9BCAE53,0xDEBB9EC5,0x47B2CF7F,0x30B5FFE9, + 0xBDBDF21C,0xCABAC28A,0x53B39330,0x24B4A3A6,0xBAD03605,0xCDD70693,0x54DE5729,0x23D967BF,0xB3667A2E,0xC4614AB8,0x5D681B02,0x2A6F2B94,0xB40BBE37,0xC30C8EA1,0x5A05DF1B,0x2D02EF8D, +}; + +// Known size hash +// It is ok to call ImHashData on a string with known length but the ### operator won't be supported. +// FIXME-OPT: Replace with e.g. FNV1a hash? CRC32 pretty much randomly access 1KB. Need to do proper measurements. +ImGuiID ImHashData(const void* data_p, size_t data_size, ImGuiID seed) +{ + ImU32 crc = ~seed; + const unsigned char* data = (const unsigned char*)data_p; + const ImU32* crc32_lut = GCrc32LookupTable; + while (data_size-- != 0) + crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ *data++]; + return ~crc; +} + +// Zero-terminated string hash, with support for ### to reset back to seed value +// We support a syntax of "label###id" where only "###id" is included in the hash, and only "label" gets displayed. +// Because this syntax is rarely used we are optimizing for the common case. +// - If we reach ### in the string we discard the hash so far and reset to the seed. +// - We don't do 'current += 2; continue;' after handling ### to keep the code smaller/faster (measured ~10% diff in Debug build) +// FIXME-OPT: Replace with e.g. FNV1a hash? CRC32 pretty much randomly access 1KB. Need to do proper measurements. +ImGuiID ImHashStr(const char* data_p, size_t data_size, ImGuiID seed) +{ + seed = ~seed; + ImU32 crc = seed; + const unsigned char* data = (const unsigned char*)data_p; + const ImU32* crc32_lut = GCrc32LookupTable; + if (data_size != 0) + { + while (data_size-- != 0) + { + unsigned char c = *data++; + if (c == '#' && data_size >= 2 && data[0] == '#' && data[1] == '#') + crc = seed; + crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ c]; + } + } + else + { + while (unsigned char c = *data++) + { + if (c == '#' && data[0] == '#' && data[1] == '#') + crc = seed; + crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ c]; + } + } + return ~crc; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (File functions) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Default file functions +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS + +ImFileHandle ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* mode) +{ +#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(__CYGWIN__) && !defined(__GNUC__) + // We need a fopen() wrapper because MSVC/Windows fopen doesn't handle UTF-8 filenames. + // Previously we used ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8/ImTextStrFromUtf8 here but we now need to support ImWchar16 and ImWchar32! + const int filename_wsize = ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, filename, -1, NULL, 0); + const int mode_wsize = ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, mode, -1, NULL, 0); + ImVector buf; + buf.resize(filename_wsize + mode_wsize); + ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, filename, -1, (wchar_t*)&buf[0], filename_wsize); + ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, mode, -1, (wchar_t*)&buf[filename_wsize], mode_wsize); + return ::_wfopen((const wchar_t*)&buf[0], (const wchar_t*)&buf[filename_wsize]); +#else + return fopen(filename, mode); +#endif +} + +// We should in theory be using fseeko()/ftello() with off_t and _fseeki64()/_ftelli64() with __int64, waiting for the PR that does that in a very portable pre-C++11 zero-warnings way. +bool ImFileClose(ImFileHandle f) { return fclose(f) == 0; } +ImU64 ImFileGetSize(ImFileHandle f) { long off = 0, sz = 0; return ((off = ftell(f)) != -1 && !fseek(f, 0, SEEK_END) && (sz = ftell(f)) != -1 && !fseek(f, off, SEEK_SET)) ? (ImU64)sz : (ImU64)-1; } +ImU64 ImFileRead(void* data, ImU64 sz, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle f) { return fread(data, (size_t)sz, (size_t)count, f); } +ImU64 ImFileWrite(const void* data, ImU64 sz, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle f) { return fwrite(data, (size_t)sz, (size_t)count, f); } +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS + +// Helper: Load file content into memory +// Memory allocated with IM_ALLOC(), must be freed by user using IM_FREE() == ImGui::MemFree() +// This can't really be used with "rt" because fseek size won't match read size. +void* ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* mode, size_t* out_file_size, int padding_bytes) +{ + IM_ASSERT(filename && mode); + if (out_file_size) + *out_file_size = 0; + + ImFileHandle f; + if ((f = ImFileOpen(filename, mode)) == NULL) + return NULL; + + size_t file_size = (size_t)ImFileGetSize(f); + if (file_size == (size_t)-1) + { + ImFileClose(f); + return NULL; + } + + void* file_data = IM_ALLOC(file_size + padding_bytes); + if (file_data == NULL) + { + ImFileClose(f); + return NULL; + } + if (ImFileRead(file_data, 1, file_size, f) != file_size) + { + ImFileClose(f); + IM_FREE(file_data); + return NULL; + } + if (padding_bytes > 0) + memset((void*)(((char*)file_data) + file_size), 0, (size_t)padding_bytes); + + ImFileClose(f); + if (out_file_size) + *out_file_size = file_size; + + return file_data; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (ImText* functions) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF + +// Convert UTF-8 to 32-bit character, process single character input. +// A nearly-branchless UTF-8 decoder, based on work of Christopher Wellons (https://github.com/skeeto/branchless-utf8). +// We handle UTF-8 decoding error by skipping forward. +int ImTextCharFromUtf8(unsigned int* out_char, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end) +{ + static const char lengths[32] = { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 0 }; + static const int masks[] = { 0x00, 0x7f, 0x1f, 0x0f, 0x07 }; + static const uint32_t mins[] = { 0x400000, 0, 0x80, 0x800, 0x10000 }; + static const int shiftc[] = { 0, 18, 12, 6, 0 }; + static const int shifte[] = { 0, 6, 4, 2, 0 }; + int len = lengths[*(const unsigned char*)in_text >> 3]; + int wanted = len + (len ? 0 : 1); + + if (in_text_end == NULL) + in_text_end = in_text + wanted; // Max length, nulls will be taken into account. + + // Copy at most 'len' bytes, stop copying at 0 or past in_text_end. Branch predictor does a good job here, + // so it is fast even with excessive branching. + unsigned char s[4]; + s[0] = in_text + 0 < in_text_end ? in_text[0] : 0; + s[1] = in_text + 1 < in_text_end ? in_text[1] : 0; + s[2] = in_text + 2 < in_text_end ? in_text[2] : 0; + s[3] = in_text + 3 < in_text_end ? in_text[3] : 0; + + // Assume a four-byte character and load four bytes. Unused bits are shifted out. + *out_char = (uint32_t)(s[0] & masks[len]) << 18; + *out_char |= (uint32_t)(s[1] & 0x3f) << 12; + *out_char |= (uint32_t)(s[2] & 0x3f) << 6; + *out_char |= (uint32_t)(s[3] & 0x3f) << 0; + *out_char >>= shiftc[len]; + + // Accumulate the various error conditions. + int e = 0; + e = (*out_char < mins[len]) << 6; // non-canonical encoding + e |= ((*out_char >> 11) == 0x1b) << 7; // surrogate half? + e |= (*out_char > IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX) << 8; // out of range? + e |= (s[1] & 0xc0) >> 2; + e |= (s[2] & 0xc0) >> 4; + e |= (s[3] ) >> 6; + e ^= 0x2a; // top two bits of each tail byte correct? + e >>= shifte[len]; + + if (e) + { + // No bytes are consumed when *in_text == 0 || in_text == in_text_end. + // One byte is consumed in case of invalid first byte of in_text. + // All available bytes (at most `len` bytes) are consumed on incomplete/invalid second to last bytes. + // Invalid or incomplete input may consume less bytes than wanted, therefore every byte has to be inspected in s. + wanted = ImMin(wanted, !!s[0] + !!s[1] + !!s[2] + !!s[3]); + *out_char = IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID; + } + + return wanted; +} + +int ImTextStrFromUtf8(ImWchar* buf, int buf_size, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end, const char** in_text_remaining) +{ + ImWchar* buf_out = buf; + ImWchar* buf_end = buf + buf_size; + while (buf_out < buf_end - 1 && (!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text) + { + unsigned int c; + in_text += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, in_text, in_text_end); + *buf_out++ = (ImWchar)c; + } + *buf_out = 0; + if (in_text_remaining) + *in_text_remaining = in_text; + return (int)(buf_out - buf); +} + +int ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end) +{ + int char_count = 0; + while ((!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text) + { + unsigned int c; + in_text += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, in_text, in_text_end); + char_count++; + } + return char_count; +} + +// Based on stb_to_utf8() from github.com/nothings/stb/ +static inline int ImTextCharToUtf8_inline(char* buf, int buf_size, unsigned int c) +{ + if (c < 0x80) + { + buf[0] = (char)c; + return 1; + } + if (c < 0x800) + { + if (buf_size < 2) return 0; + buf[0] = (char)(0xc0 + (c >> 6)); + buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + (c & 0x3f)); + return 2; + } + if (c < 0x10000) + { + if (buf_size < 3) return 0; + buf[0] = (char)(0xe0 + (c >> 12)); + buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f)); + buf[2] = (char)(0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f)); + return 3; + } + if (c <= 0x10FFFF) + { + if (buf_size < 4) return 0; + buf[0] = (char)(0xf0 + (c >> 18)); + buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 12) & 0x3f)); + buf[2] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f)); + buf[3] = (char)(0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f)); + return 4; + } + // Invalid code point, the max unicode is 0x10FFFF + return 0; +} + +const char* ImTextCharToUtf8(char out_buf[5], unsigned int c) +{ + int count = ImTextCharToUtf8_inline(out_buf, 5, c); + out_buf[count] = 0; + return out_buf; +} + +// Not optimal but we very rarely use this function. +int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end) +{ + unsigned int unused = 0; + return ImTextCharFromUtf8(&unused, in_text, in_text_end); +} + +static inline int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(unsigned int c) +{ + if (c < 0x80) return 1; + if (c < 0x800) return 2; + if (c < 0x10000) return 3; + if (c <= 0x10FFFF) return 4; + return 3; +} + +int ImTextStrToUtf8(char* out_buf, int out_buf_size, const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end) +{ + char* buf_p = out_buf; + const char* buf_end = out_buf + out_buf_size; + while (buf_p < buf_end - 1 && (!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text) + { + unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*in_text++); + if (c < 0x80) + *buf_p++ = (char)c; + else + buf_p += ImTextCharToUtf8_inline(buf_p, (int)(buf_end - buf_p - 1), c); + } + *buf_p = 0; + return (int)(buf_p - out_buf); +} + +int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end) +{ + int bytes_count = 0; + while ((!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text) + { + unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*in_text++); + if (c < 0x80) + bytes_count++; + else + bytes_count += ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(c); + } + return bytes_count; +} +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Color functions) +// Note: The Convert functions are early design which are not consistent with other API. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +IMGUI_API ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColors(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b) +{ + float t = ((col_b >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) / 255.f; + int r = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t); + int g = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t); + int b = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t); + return IM_COL32(r, g, b, 0xFF); +} + +ImVec4 ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in) +{ + float s = 1.0f / 255.0f; + return ImVec4( + ((in >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s, + ((in >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s, + ((in >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s, + ((in >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s); +} + +ImU32 ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4& in) +{ + ImU32 out; + out = ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.x)) << IM_COL32_R_SHIFT; + out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.y)) << IM_COL32_G_SHIFT; + out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.z)) << IM_COL32_B_SHIFT; + out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.w)) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT; + return out; +} + +// Convert rgb floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]) to hsv floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]), from Foley & van Dam p592 +// Optimized http://lolengine.net/blog/2013/01/13/fast-rgb-to-hsv +void ImGui::ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v) +{ + float K = 0.f; + if (g < b) + { + ImSwap(g, b); + K = -1.f; + } + if (r < g) + { + ImSwap(r, g); + K = -2.f / 6.f - K; + } + + const float chroma = r - (g < b ? g : b); + out_h = ImFabs(K + (g - b) / (6.f * chroma + 1e-20f)); + out_s = chroma / (r + 1e-20f); + out_v = r; +} + +// Convert hsv floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]) to rgb floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]), from Foley & van Dam p593 +// also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HSL_and_HSV +void ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float& out_r, float& out_g, float& out_b) +{ + if (s == 0.0f) + { + // gray + out_r = out_g = out_b = v; + return; + } + + h = ImFmod(h, 1.0f) / (60.0f / 360.0f); + int i = (int)h; + float f = h - (float)i; + float p = v * (1.0f - s); + float q = v * (1.0f - s * f); + float t = v * (1.0f - s * (1.0f - f)); + + switch (i) + { + case 0: out_r = v; out_g = t; out_b = p; break; + case 1: out_r = q; out_g = v; out_b = p; break; + case 2: out_r = p; out_g = v; out_b = t; break; + case 3: out_r = p; out_g = q; out_b = v; break; + case 4: out_r = t; out_g = p; out_b = v; break; + case 5: default: out_r = v; out_g = p; out_b = q; break; + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiStorage +// Helper: Key->value storage +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// std::lower_bound but without the bullshit +static ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* LowerBound(ImVector& data, ImGuiID key) +{ + ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* first = data.Data; + ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* last = data.Data + data.Size; + size_t count = (size_t)(last - first); + while (count > 0) + { + size_t count2 = count >> 1; + ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* mid = first + count2; + if (mid->key < key) + { + first = ++mid; + count -= count2 + 1; + } + else + { + count = count2; + } + } + return first; +} + +// For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once. +void ImGuiStorage::BuildSortByKey() +{ + struct StaticFunc + { + static int IMGUI_CDECL PairComparerByID(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) + { + // We can't just do a subtraction because qsort uses signed integers and subtracting our ID doesn't play well with that. + if (((const ImGuiStoragePair*)lhs)->key > ((const ImGuiStoragePair*)rhs)->key) return +1; + if (((const ImGuiStoragePair*)lhs)->key < ((const ImGuiStoragePair*)rhs)->key) return -1; + return 0; + } + }; + ImQsort(Data.Data, (size_t)Data.Size, sizeof(ImGuiStoragePair), StaticFunc::PairComparerByID); +} + +int ImGuiStorage::GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val) const +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(const_cast&>(Data), key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + return default_val; + return it->val_i; +} + +bool ImGuiStorage::GetBool(ImGuiID key, bool default_val) const +{ + return GetInt(key, default_val ? 1 : 0) != 0; +} + +float ImGuiStorage::GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val) const +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(const_cast&>(Data), key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + return default_val; + return it->val_f; +} + +void* ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(const_cast&>(Data), key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + return NULL; + return it->val_p; +} + +// References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer. +int* ImGuiStorage::GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val) +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + it = Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, default_val)); + return &it->val_i; +} + +bool* ImGuiStorage::GetBoolRef(ImGuiID key, bool default_val) +{ + return (bool*)GetIntRef(key, default_val ? 1 : 0); +} + +float* ImGuiStorage::GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val) +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + it = Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, default_val)); + return &it->val_f; +} + +void** ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val) +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + it = Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, default_val)); + return &it->val_p; +} + +// FIXME-OPT: Need a way to reuse the result of lower_bound when doing GetInt()/SetInt() - not too bad because it only happens on explicit interaction (maximum one a frame) +void ImGuiStorage::SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val) +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + { + Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, val)); + return; + } + it->val_i = val; +} + +void ImGuiStorage::SetBool(ImGuiID key, bool val) +{ + SetInt(key, val ? 1 : 0); +} + +void ImGuiStorage::SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val) +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + { + Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, val)); + return; + } + it->val_f = val; +} + +void ImGuiStorage::SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void* val) +{ + ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key); + if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key) + { + Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, val)); + return; + } + it->val_p = val; +} + +void ImGuiStorage::SetAllInt(int v) +{ + for (int i = 0; i < Data.Size; i++) + Data[i].val_i = v; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiTextFilter +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]" +ImGuiTextFilter::ImGuiTextFilter(const char* default_filter) //-V1077 +{ + InputBuf[0] = 0; + CountGrep = 0; + if (default_filter) + { + ImStrncpy(InputBuf, default_filter, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf)); + Build(); + } +} + +bool ImGuiTextFilter::Draw(const char* label, float width) +{ + if (width != 0.0f) + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(width); + bool value_changed = ImGui::InputText(label, InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf)); + if (value_changed) + Build(); + return value_changed; +} + +void ImGuiTextFilter::ImGuiTextRange::split(char separator, ImVector* out) const +{ + out->resize(0); + const char* wb = b; + const char* we = wb; + while (we < e) + { + if (*we == separator) + { + out->push_back(ImGuiTextRange(wb, we)); + wb = we + 1; + } + we++; + } + if (wb != we) + out->push_back(ImGuiTextRange(wb, we)); +} + +void ImGuiTextFilter::Build() +{ + Filters.resize(0); + ImGuiTextRange input_range(InputBuf, InputBuf + strlen(InputBuf)); + input_range.split(',', &Filters); + + CountGrep = 0; + for (ImGuiTextRange& f : Filters) + { + while (f.b < f.e && ImCharIsBlankA(f.b[0])) + f.b++; + while (f.e > f.b && ImCharIsBlankA(f.e[-1])) + f.e--; + if (f.empty()) + continue; + if (f.b[0] != '-') + CountGrep += 1; + } +} + +bool ImGuiTextFilter::PassFilter(const char* text, const char* text_end) const +{ + if (Filters.empty()) + return true; + + if (text == NULL) + text = ""; + + for (const ImGuiTextRange& f : Filters) + { + if (f.empty()) + continue; + if (f.b[0] == '-') + { + // Subtract + if (ImStristr(text, text_end, f.b + 1, f.e) != NULL) + return false; + } + else + { + // Grep + if (ImStristr(text, text_end, f.b, f.e) != NULL) + return true; + } + } + + // Implicit * grep + if (CountGrep == 0) + return true; + + return false; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiTextIndex +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// On some platform vsnprintf() takes va_list by reference and modifies it. +// va_copy is the 'correct' way to copy a va_list but Visual Studio prior to 2013 doesn't have it. +#ifndef va_copy +#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__) +#define va_copy(dest, src) __builtin_va_copy(dest, src) +#else +#define va_copy(dest, src) (dest = src) +#endif +#endif + +char ImGuiTextBuffer::EmptyString[1] = { 0 }; + +void ImGuiTextBuffer::append(const char* str, const char* str_end) +{ + int len = str_end ? (int)(str_end - str) : (int)strlen(str); + + // Add zero-terminator the first time + const int write_off = (Buf.Size != 0) ? Buf.Size : 1; + const int needed_sz = write_off + len; + if (write_off + len >= Buf.Capacity) + { + int new_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2; + Buf.reserve(needed_sz > new_capacity ? needed_sz : new_capacity); + } + + Buf.resize(needed_sz); + memcpy(&Buf[write_off - 1], str, (size_t)len); + Buf[write_off - 1 + len] = 0; +} + +void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendf(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + appendfv(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +// Helper: Text buffer for logging/accumulating text +void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + va_list args_copy; + va_copy(args_copy, args); + + int len = ImFormatStringV(NULL, 0, fmt, args); // FIXME-OPT: could do a first pass write attempt, likely successful on first pass. + if (len <= 0) + { + va_end(args_copy); + return; + } + + // Add zero-terminator the first time + const int write_off = (Buf.Size != 0) ? Buf.Size : 1; + const int needed_sz = write_off + len; + if (write_off + len >= Buf.Capacity) + { + int new_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2; + Buf.reserve(needed_sz > new_capacity ? needed_sz : new_capacity); + } + + Buf.resize(needed_sz); + ImFormatStringV(&Buf[write_off - 1], (size_t)len + 1, fmt, args_copy); + va_end(args_copy); +} + +void ImGuiTextIndex::append(const char* base, int old_size, int new_size) +{ + IM_ASSERT(old_size >= 0 && new_size >= old_size && new_size >= EndOffset); + if (old_size == new_size) + return; + if (EndOffset == 0 || base[EndOffset - 1] == '\n') + LineOffsets.push_back(EndOffset); + const char* base_end = base + new_size; + for (const char* p = base + old_size; (p = (const char*)memchr(p, '\n', base_end - p)) != 0; ) + if (++p < base_end) // Don't push a trailing offset on last \n + LineOffsets.push_back((int)(intptr_t)(p - base)); + EndOffset = ImMax(EndOffset, new_size); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiListClipper +// This is currently not as flexible/powerful as it should be and really confusing/spaghetti, mostly because we changed +// the API mid-way through development and support two ways to using the clipper, needs some rework (see TODO) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// FIXME-TABLE: This prevents us from using ImGuiListClipper _inside_ a table cell. +// The problem we have is that without a Begin/End scheme for rows using the clipper is ambiguous. +static bool GetSkipItemForListClipping() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (g.CurrentTable ? g.CurrentTable->HostSkipItems : g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems); +} + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS +// Legacy helper to calculate coarse clipping of large list of evenly sized items. +// This legacy API is not ideal because it assumes we will return a single contiguous rectangle. +// Prefer using ImGuiListClipper which can returns non-contiguous ranges. +void ImGui::CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (g.LogEnabled) + { + // If logging is active, do not perform any clipping + *out_items_display_start = 0; + *out_items_display_end = items_count; + return; + } + if (GetSkipItemForListClipping()) + { + *out_items_display_start = *out_items_display_end = 0; + return; + } + + // We create the union of the ClipRect and the scoring rect which at worst should be 1 page away from ClipRect + // We don't include g.NavId's rectangle in there (unless g.NavJustMovedToId is set) because the rectangle enlargement can get costly. + ImRect rect = window->ClipRect; + if (g.NavMoveScoringItems) + rect.Add(g.NavScoringNoClipRect); + if (g.NavJustMovedToId && window->NavLastIds[0] == g.NavJustMovedToId) + rect.Add(WindowRectRelToAbs(window, window->NavRectRel[0])); // Could store and use NavJustMovedToRectRel + + const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + int start = (int)((rect.Min.y - pos.y) / items_height); + int end = (int)((rect.Max.y - pos.y) / items_height); + + // When performing a navigation request, ensure we have one item extra in the direction we are moving to + // FIXME: Verify this works with tabbing + const bool is_nav_request = (g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav); + if (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Up) + start--; + if (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Down) + end++; + + start = ImClamp(start, 0, items_count); + end = ImClamp(end + 1, start, items_count); + *out_items_display_start = start; + *out_items_display_end = end; +} +#endif + +static void ImGuiListClipper_SortAndFuseRanges(ImVector& ranges, int offset = 0) +{ + if (ranges.Size - offset <= 1) + return; + + // Helper to order ranges and fuse them together if possible (bubble sort is fine as we are only sorting 2-3 entries) + for (int sort_end = ranges.Size - offset - 1; sort_end > 0; --sort_end) + for (int i = offset; i < sort_end + offset; ++i) + if (ranges[i].Min > ranges[i + 1].Min) + ImSwap(ranges[i], ranges[i + 1]); + + // Now fuse ranges together as much as possible. + for (int i = 1 + offset; i < ranges.Size; i++) + { + IM_ASSERT(!ranges[i].PosToIndexConvert && !ranges[i - 1].PosToIndexConvert); + if (ranges[i - 1].Max < ranges[i].Min) + continue; + ranges[i - 1].Min = ImMin(ranges[i - 1].Min, ranges[i].Min); + ranges[i - 1].Max = ImMax(ranges[i - 1].Max, ranges[i].Max); + ranges.erase(ranges.Data + i); + i--; + } +} + +static void ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorAndSetupPrevLine(float pos_y, float line_height) +{ + // Set cursor position and a few other things so that SetScrollHereY() and Columns() can work when seeking cursor. + // FIXME: It is problematic that we have to do that here, because custom/equivalent end-user code would stumble on the same issue. + // The clipper should probably have a final step to display the last item in a regular manner, maybe with an opt-out flag for data sets which may have costly seek? + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + float off_y = pos_y - window->DC.CursorPos.y; + window->DC.CursorPos.y = pos_y; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, pos_y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y); + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y - line_height; // Setting those fields so that SetScrollHereY() can properly function after the end of our clipper usage. + window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = (line_height - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y); // If we end up needing more accurate data (to e.g. use SameLine) we may as well make the clipper have a fourth step to let user process and display the last item in their list. + if (ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns) + columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y; // Setting this so that cell Y position are set properly + if (ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable) + { + if (table->IsInsideRow) + ImGui::TableEndRow(table); + table->RowPosY2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + const int row_increase = (int)((off_y / line_height) + 0.5f); + //table->CurrentRow += row_increase; // Can't do without fixing TableEndRow() + table->RowBgColorCounter += row_increase; + } +} + +static void ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(ImGuiListClipper* clipper, int item_n) +{ + // StartPosY starts from ItemsFrozen hence the subtraction + // Perform the add and multiply with double to allow seeking through larger ranges + ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)clipper->TempData; + float pos_y = (float)((double)clipper->StartPosY + data->LossynessOffset + (double)(item_n - data->ItemsFrozen) * clipper->ItemsHeight); + ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorAndSetupPrevLine(pos_y, clipper->ItemsHeight); +} + +ImGuiListClipper::ImGuiListClipper() +{ + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); +} + +ImGuiListClipper::~ImGuiListClipper() +{ + End(); +} + +void ImGuiListClipper::Begin(int items_count, float items_height) +{ + if (Ctx == NULL) + Ctx = ImGui::GetCurrentContext(); + + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_CLIPPER("Clipper: Begin(%d,%.2f) in '%s'\n", items_count, items_height, window->Name); + + if (ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable) + if (table->IsInsideRow) + ImGui::TableEndRow(table); + + StartPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + ItemsHeight = items_height; + ItemsCount = items_count; + DisplayStart = -1; + DisplayEnd = 0; + + // Acquire temporary buffer + if (++g.ClipperTempDataStacked > g.ClipperTempData.Size) + g.ClipperTempData.resize(g.ClipperTempDataStacked, ImGuiListClipperData()); + ImGuiListClipperData* data = &g.ClipperTempData[g.ClipperTempDataStacked - 1]; + data->Reset(this); + data->LossynessOffset = window->DC.CursorStartPosLossyness.y; + TempData = data; +} + +void ImGuiListClipper::End() +{ + if (ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)TempData) + { + // In theory here we should assert that we are already at the right position, but it seems saner to just seek at the end and not assert/crash the user. + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_CLIPPER("Clipper: End() in '%s'\n", g.CurrentWindow->Name); + if (ItemsCount >= 0 && ItemsCount < INT_MAX && DisplayStart >= 0) + ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(this, ItemsCount); + + // Restore temporary buffer and fix back pointers which may be invalidated when nesting + IM_ASSERT(data->ListClipper == this); + data->StepNo = data->Ranges.Size; + if (--g.ClipperTempDataStacked > 0) + { + data = &g.ClipperTempData[g.ClipperTempDataStacked - 1]; + data->ListClipper->TempData = data; + } + TempData = NULL; + } + ItemsCount = -1; +} + +void ImGuiListClipper::IncludeItemsByIndex(int item_begin, int item_end) +{ + ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)TempData; + IM_ASSERT(DisplayStart < 0); // Only allowed after Begin() and if there has not been a specified range yet. + IM_ASSERT(item_begin <= item_end); + if (item_begin < item_end) + data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(item_begin, item_end)); +} + +static bool ImGuiListClipper_StepInternal(ImGuiListClipper* clipper) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *clipper->Ctx; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)clipper->TempData; + IM_ASSERT(data != NULL && "Called ImGuiListClipper::Step() too many times, or before ImGuiListClipper::Begin() ?"); + + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (table && table->IsInsideRow) + ImGui::TableEndRow(table); + + // No items + if (clipper->ItemsCount == 0 || GetSkipItemForListClipping()) + return false; + + // While we are in frozen row state, keep displaying items one by one, unclipped + // FIXME: Could be stored as a table-agnostic state. + if (data->StepNo == 0 && table != NULL && !table->IsUnfrozenRows) + { + clipper->DisplayStart = data->ItemsFrozen; + clipper->DisplayEnd = ImMin(data->ItemsFrozen + 1, clipper->ItemsCount); + if (clipper->DisplayStart < clipper->DisplayEnd) + data->ItemsFrozen++; + return true; + } + + // Step 0: Let you process the first element (regardless of it being visible or not, so we can measure the element height) + bool calc_clipping = false; + if (data->StepNo == 0) + { + clipper->StartPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + if (clipper->ItemsHeight <= 0.0f) + { + // Submit the first item (or range) so we can measure its height (generally the first range is 0..1) + data->Ranges.push_front(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(data->ItemsFrozen, data->ItemsFrozen + 1)); + clipper->DisplayStart = ImMax(data->Ranges[0].Min, data->ItemsFrozen); + clipper->DisplayEnd = ImMin(data->Ranges[0].Max, clipper->ItemsCount); + data->StepNo = 1; + return true; + } + calc_clipping = true; // If on the first step with known item height, calculate clipping. + } + + // Step 1: Let the clipper infer height from first range + if (clipper->ItemsHeight <= 0.0f) + { + IM_ASSERT(data->StepNo == 1); + if (table) + IM_ASSERT(table->RowPosY1 == clipper->StartPosY && table->RowPosY2 == window->DC.CursorPos.y); + + clipper->ItemsHeight = (window->DC.CursorPos.y - clipper->StartPosY) / (float)(clipper->DisplayEnd - clipper->DisplayStart); + bool affected_by_floating_point_precision = ImIsFloatAboveGuaranteedIntegerPrecision(clipper->StartPosY) || ImIsFloatAboveGuaranteedIntegerPrecision(window->DC.CursorPos.y); + if (affected_by_floating_point_precision) + clipper->ItemsHeight = window->DC.PrevLineSize.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y; // FIXME: Technically wouldn't allow multi-line entries. + + IM_ASSERT(clipper->ItemsHeight > 0.0f && "Unable to calculate item height! First item hasn't moved the cursor vertically!"); + calc_clipping = true; // If item height had to be calculated, calculate clipping afterwards. + } + + // Step 0 or 1: Calculate the actual ranges of visible elements. + const int already_submitted = clipper->DisplayEnd; + if (calc_clipping) + { + if (g.LogEnabled) + { + // If logging is active, do not perform any clipping + data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(0, clipper->ItemsCount)); + } + else + { + // Add range selected to be included for navigation + const bool is_nav_request = (g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav); + if (is_nav_request) + data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromPositions(g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Min.y, g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Max.y, 0, 0)); + if (is_nav_request && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) && g.NavTabbingDir == -1) + data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(clipper->ItemsCount - 1, clipper->ItemsCount)); + + // Add focused/active item + ImRect nav_rect_abs = ImGui::WindowRectRelToAbs(window, window->NavRectRel[0]); + if (g.NavId != 0 && window->NavLastIds[0] == g.NavId) + data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromPositions(nav_rect_abs.Min.y, nav_rect_abs.Max.y, 0, 0)); + + // Add visible range + const int off_min = (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? -1 : 0; + const int off_max = (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? 1 : 0; + data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromPositions(window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y, off_min, off_max)); + } + + // Convert position ranges to item index ranges + // - Very important: when a starting position is after our maximum item, we set Min to (ItemsCount - 1). This allows us to handle most forms of wrapping. + // - Due to how Selectable extra padding they tend to be "unaligned" with exact unit in the item list, + // which with the flooring/ceiling tend to lead to 2 items instead of one being submitted. + for (ImGuiListClipperRange& range : data->Ranges) + if (range.PosToIndexConvert) + { + int m1 = (int)(((double)range.Min - window->DC.CursorPos.y - data->LossynessOffset) / clipper->ItemsHeight); + int m2 = (int)((((double)range.Max - window->DC.CursorPos.y - data->LossynessOffset) / clipper->ItemsHeight) + 0.999999f); + range.Min = ImClamp(already_submitted + m1 + range.PosToIndexOffsetMin, already_submitted, clipper->ItemsCount - 1); + range.Max = ImClamp(already_submitted + m2 + range.PosToIndexOffsetMax, range.Min + 1, clipper->ItemsCount); + range.PosToIndexConvert = false; + } + ImGuiListClipper_SortAndFuseRanges(data->Ranges, data->StepNo); + } + + // Step 0+ (if item height is given in advance) or 1+: Display the next range in line. + while (data->StepNo < data->Ranges.Size) + { + clipper->DisplayStart = ImMax(data->Ranges[data->StepNo].Min, already_submitted); + clipper->DisplayEnd = ImMin(data->Ranges[data->StepNo].Max, clipper->ItemsCount); + if (clipper->DisplayStart > already_submitted) //-V1051 + ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(clipper, clipper->DisplayStart); + data->StepNo++; + if (clipper->DisplayStart == clipper->DisplayEnd && data->StepNo < data->Ranges.Size) + continue; + return true; + } + + // After the last step: Let the clipper validate that we have reached the expected Y position (corresponding to element DisplayEnd), + // Advance the cursor to the end of the list and then returns 'false' to end the loop. + if (clipper->ItemsCount < INT_MAX) + ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(clipper, clipper->ItemsCount); + + return false; +} + +bool ImGuiListClipper::Step() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + bool need_items_height = (ItemsHeight <= 0.0f); + bool ret = ImGuiListClipper_StepInternal(this); + if (ret && (DisplayStart == DisplayEnd)) + ret = false; + if (g.CurrentTable && g.CurrentTable->IsUnfrozenRows == false) + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_CLIPPER("Clipper: Step(): inside frozen table row.\n"); + if (need_items_height && ItemsHeight > 0.0f) + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_CLIPPER("Clipper: Step(): computed ItemsHeight: %.2f.\n", ItemsHeight); + if (ret) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_CLIPPER("Clipper: Step(): display %d to %d.\n", DisplayStart, DisplayEnd); + } + else + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_CLIPPER("Clipper: Step(): End.\n"); + End(); + } + return ret; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] STYLING +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImGuiStyle& ImGui::GetStyle() +{ + IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() and ImGui::SetCurrentContext() ?"); + return GImGui->Style; +} + +ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul) +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style; + ImVec4 c = style.Colors[idx]; + c.w *= style.Alpha * alpha_mul; + return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c); +} + +ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col) +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style; + ImVec4 c = col; + c.w *= style.Alpha; + return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c); +} + +const ImVec4& ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx) +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style; + return style.Colors[idx]; +} + +ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImU32 col) +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style; + if (style.Alpha >= 1.0f) + return col; + ImU32 a = (col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT; + a = (ImU32)(a * style.Alpha); // We don't need to clamp 0..255 because Style.Alpha is in 0..1 range. + return (col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (a << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT); +} + +// FIXME: This may incur a round-trip (if the end user got their data from a float4) but eventually we aim to store the in-flight colors as ImU32 +void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiColorMod backup; + backup.Col = idx; + backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx]; + g.ColorStack.push_back(backup); + g.Style.Colors[idx] = ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col); +} + +void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiColorMod backup; + backup.Col = idx; + backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx]; + g.ColorStack.push_back(backup); + g.Style.Colors[idx] = col; +} + +void ImGui::PopStyleColor(int count) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.ColorStack.Size < count) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.ColorStack.Size > count, "Calling PopStyleColor() too many times: stack underflow."); + count = g.ColorStack.Size; + } + while (count > 0) + { + ImGuiColorMod& backup = g.ColorStack.back(); + g.Style.Colors[backup.Col] = backup.BackupValue; + g.ColorStack.pop_back(); + count--; + } +} + +static const ImGuiDataVarInfo GStyleVarInfo[] = +{ + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, Alpha) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, DisabledAlpha) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_DisabledAlpha + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowPadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowMinSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowTitleAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FramePadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameBorderSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemInnerSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, IndentSpacing) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, CellPadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabMinSize) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, TabRounding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ButtonTextAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, SelectableTextAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, SeparatorTextBorderSize) },// ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextBorderSize + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, SeparatorTextAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextAlign + { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, SeparatorTextPadding) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextPadding +}; + +const ImGuiDataVarInfo* ImGui::GetStyleVarInfo(ImGuiStyleVar idx) +{ + IM_ASSERT(idx >= 0 && idx < ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT); + IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GStyleVarInfo) == ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT); + return &GStyleVarInfo[idx]; +} + +void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiDataVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx); + if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 1) + { + float* pvar = (float*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style); + g.StyleVarStack.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar)); + *pvar = val; + return; + } + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(0, "Called PushStyleVar() variant with wrong type!"); +} + +void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiDataVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx); + if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 2) + { + ImVec2* pvar = (ImVec2*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style); + g.StyleVarStack.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar)); + *pvar = val; + return; + } + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(0, "Called PushStyleVar() variant with wrong type!"); +} + +void ImGui::PopStyleVar(int count) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.StyleVarStack.Size < count) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.StyleVarStack.Size > count, "Calling PopStyleVar() too many times: stack underflow."); + count = g.StyleVarStack.Size; + } + while (count > 0) + { + // We avoid a generic memcpy(data, &backup.Backup.., GDataTypeSize[info->Type] * info->Count), the overhead in Debug is not worth it. + ImGuiStyleMod& backup = g.StyleVarStack.back(); + const ImGuiDataVarInfo* info = GetStyleVarInfo(backup.VarIdx); + void* data = info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style); + if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 1) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; } + else if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 2) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; ((float*)data)[1] = backup.BackupFloat[1]; } + g.StyleVarStack.pop_back(); + count--; + } +} + +const char* ImGui::GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx) +{ + // Create switch-case from enum with regexp: ImGuiCol_{.*}, --> case ImGuiCol_\1: return "\1"; + switch (idx) + { + case ImGuiCol_Text: return "Text"; + case ImGuiCol_TextDisabled: return "TextDisabled"; + case ImGuiCol_WindowBg: return "WindowBg"; + case ImGuiCol_ChildBg: return "ChildBg"; + case ImGuiCol_PopupBg: return "PopupBg"; + case ImGuiCol_Border: return "Border"; + case ImGuiCol_BorderShadow: return "BorderShadow"; + case ImGuiCol_FrameBg: return "FrameBg"; + case ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered: return "FrameBgHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive: return "FrameBgActive"; + case ImGuiCol_TitleBg: return "TitleBg"; + case ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive: return "TitleBgActive"; + case ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed: return "TitleBgCollapsed"; + case ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg: return "MenuBarBg"; + case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg: return "ScrollbarBg"; + case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab: return "ScrollbarGrab"; + case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered: return "ScrollbarGrabHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive: return "ScrollbarGrabActive"; + case ImGuiCol_CheckMark: return "CheckMark"; + case ImGuiCol_SliderGrab: return "SliderGrab"; + case ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive: return "SliderGrabActive"; + case ImGuiCol_Button: return "Button"; + case ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered: return "ButtonHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_ButtonActive: return "ButtonActive"; + case ImGuiCol_Header: return "Header"; + case ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered: return "HeaderHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_HeaderActive: return "HeaderActive"; + case ImGuiCol_Separator: return "Separator"; + case ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered: return "SeparatorHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive: return "SeparatorActive"; + case ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip: return "ResizeGrip"; + case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered: return "ResizeGripHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive: return "ResizeGripActive"; + case ImGuiCol_Tab: return "Tab"; + case ImGuiCol_TabHovered: return "TabHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_TabActive: return "TabActive"; + case ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused: return "TabUnfocused"; + case ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive: return "TabUnfocusedActive"; + case ImGuiCol_PlotLines: return "PlotLines"; + case ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered: return "PlotLinesHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram: return "PlotHistogram"; + case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered: return "PlotHistogramHovered"; + case ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg: return "TableHeaderBg"; + case ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong: return "TableBorderStrong"; + case ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight: return "TableBorderLight"; + case ImGuiCol_TableRowBg: return "TableRowBg"; + case ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt: return "TableRowBgAlt"; + case ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg: return "TextSelectedBg"; + case ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget: return "DragDropTarget"; + case ImGuiCol_NavHighlight: return "NavHighlight"; + case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight: return "NavWindowingHighlight"; + case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg: return "NavWindowingDimBg"; + case ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg: return "ModalWindowDimBg"; + case ImGuiCol_WindowShadow: return "WindowShadow"; + } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return "Unknown"; +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] RENDER HELPERS +// Some of those (internal) functions are currently quite a legacy mess - their signature and behavior will change, +// we need a nicer separation between low-level functions and high-level functions relying on the ImGui context. +// Also see imgui_draw.cpp for some more which have been reworked to not rely on ImGui:: context. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +const char* ImGui::FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end) +{ + const char* text_display_end = text; + if (!text_end) + text_end = (const char*)-1; + + while (text_display_end < text_end && *text_display_end != '\0' && (text_display_end[0] != '#' || text_display_end[1] != '#')) + text_display_end++; + return text_display_end; +} + +// Internal ImGui functions to render text +// RenderText***() functions calls ImDrawList::AddText() calls ImBitmapFont::RenderText() +void ImGui::RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_hash) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + // Hide anything after a '##' string + const char* text_display_end; + if (hide_text_after_hash) + { + text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end); + } + else + { + if (!text_end) + text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT + text_display_end = text_end; + } + + if (text != text_display_end) + { + window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_display_end); + } +} + +void ImGui::RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + if (!text_end) + text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT + + if (text != text_end) + { + window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_end, wrap_width); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_end); + } +} + +// Default clip_rect uses (pos_min,pos_max) +// Handle clipping on CPU immediately (vs typically let the GPU clip the triangles that are overlapping the clipping rectangle edges) +// FIXME-OPT: Since we have or calculate text_size we could coarse clip whole block immediately, especally for text above draw_list->DrawList. +// Effectively as this is called from widget doing their own coarse clipping it's not very valuable presently. Next time function will take +// better advantage of the render function taking size into account for coarse clipping. +void ImGui::RenderTextClippedEx(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_display_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect) +{ + // Perform CPU side clipping for single clipped element to avoid using scissor state + ImVec2 pos = pos_min; + const ImVec2 text_size = text_size_if_known ? *text_size_if_known : CalcTextSize(text, text_display_end, false, 0.0f); + + const ImVec2* clip_min = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Min : &pos_min; + const ImVec2* clip_max = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Max : &pos_max; + bool need_clipping = (pos.x + text_size.x >= clip_max->x) || (pos.y + text_size.y >= clip_max->y); + if (clip_rect) // If we had no explicit clipping rectangle then pos==clip_min + need_clipping |= (pos.x < clip_min->x) || (pos.y < clip_min->y); + + // Align whole block. We should defer that to the better rendering function when we'll have support for individual line alignment. + if (align.x > 0.0f) pos.x = ImMax(pos.x, pos.x + (pos_max.x - pos.x - text_size.x) * align.x); + if (align.y > 0.0f) pos.y = ImMax(pos.y, pos.y + (pos_max.y - pos.y - text_size.y) * align.y); + + // Render + if (need_clipping) + { + ImVec4 fine_clip_rect(clip_min->x, clip_min->y, clip_max->x, clip_max->y); + draw_list->AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, &fine_clip_rect); + } + else + { + draw_list->AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, NULL); + } +} + +void ImGui::RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect) +{ + // Hide anything after a '##' string + const char* text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end); + const int text_len = (int)(text_display_end - text); + if (text_len == 0) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + RenderTextClippedEx(window->DrawList, pos_min, pos_max, text, text_display_end, text_size_if_known, align, clip_rect); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(&pos_min, text, text_display_end); +} + +// Another overly complex function until we reorganize everything into a nice all-in-one helper. +// This is made more complex because we have dissociated the layout rectangle (pos_min..pos_max) which define _where_ the ellipsis is, from actual clipping of text and limit of the ellipsis display. +// This is because in the context of tabs we selectively hide part of the text when the Close Button appears, but we don't want the ellipsis to move. +void ImGui::RenderTextEllipsis(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, float clip_max_x, float ellipsis_max_x, const char* text, const char* text_end_full, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (text_end_full == NULL) + text_end_full = FindRenderedTextEnd(text); + const ImVec2 text_size = text_size_if_known ? *text_size_if_known : CalcTextSize(text, text_end_full, false, 0.0f); + + //draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(pos_max.x, pos_min.y - 4), ImVec2(pos_max.x, pos_max.y + 4), IM_COL32(0, 0, 255, 255)); + //draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(ellipsis_max_x, pos_min.y-2), ImVec2(ellipsis_max_x, pos_max.y+2), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); + //draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_min.y), ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_max.y), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); + // FIXME: We could technically remove (last_glyph->AdvanceX - last_glyph->X1) from text_size.x here and save a few pixels. + if (text_size.x > pos_max.x - pos_min.x) + { + // Hello wo... + // | | | + // min max ellipsis_max + // <-> this is generally some padding value + + const ImFont* font = draw_list->_Data->Font; + const float font_size = draw_list->_Data->FontSize; + const float font_scale = font_size / font->FontSize; + const char* text_end_ellipsis = NULL; + const float ellipsis_width = font->EllipsisWidth * font_scale; + + // We can now claim the space between pos_max.x and ellipsis_max.x + const float text_avail_width = ImMax((ImMax(pos_max.x, ellipsis_max_x) - ellipsis_width) - pos_min.x, 1.0f); + float text_size_clipped_x = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, text_avail_width, 0.0f, text, text_end_full, &text_end_ellipsis).x; + if (text == text_end_ellipsis && text_end_ellipsis < text_end_full) + { + // Always display at least 1 character if there's no room for character + ellipsis + text_end_ellipsis = text + ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(text, text_end_full); + text_size_clipped_x = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, text, text_end_ellipsis).x; + } + while (text_end_ellipsis > text && ImCharIsBlankA(text_end_ellipsis[-1])) + { + // Trim trailing space before ellipsis (FIXME: Supporting non-ascii blanks would be nice, for this we need a function to backtrack in UTF-8 text) + text_end_ellipsis--; + text_size_clipped_x -= font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, text_end_ellipsis, text_end_ellipsis + 1).x; // Ascii blanks are always 1 byte + } + + // Render text, render ellipsis + RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, pos_min, ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_max.y), text, text_end_ellipsis, &text_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); + ImVec2 ellipsis_pos = ImFloor(ImVec2(pos_min.x + text_size_clipped_x, pos_min.y)); + if (ellipsis_pos.x + ellipsis_width <= ellipsis_max_x) + for (int i = 0; i < font->EllipsisCharCount; i++, ellipsis_pos.x += font->EllipsisCharStep * font_scale) + font->RenderChar(draw_list, font_size, ellipsis_pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), font->EllipsisChar); + } + else + { + RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, pos_min, ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_max.y), text, text_end_full, &text_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); + } + + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(&pos_min, text, text_end_full); +} + +// Render a rectangle shaped with optional rounding and borders +void ImGui::RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border, float rounding) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, fill_col, rounding); + const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize; + if (border && border_size > 0.0f) + { + window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min + ImVec2(1, 1), p_max + ImVec2(1, 1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, 0, border_size); + window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, 0, border_size); + } +} + +void ImGui::RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize; + if (border_size > 0.0f) + { + window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min + ImVec2(1, 1), p_max + ImVec2(1, 1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, 0, border_size); + window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, 0, border_size); + } +} + +void ImGui::RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (id != g.NavId) + return; + if (g.NavDisableHighlight && !(flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw)) + return; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame) + return; + + float rounding = (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding) ? 0.0f : g.Style.FrameRounding; + ImRect display_rect = bb; + display_rect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect); + if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault) + { + const float THICKNESS = 2.0f; + const float DISTANCE = 3.0f + THICKNESS * 0.5f; + display_rect.Expand(ImVec2(DISTANCE, DISTANCE)); + bool fully_visible = window->ClipRect.Contains(display_rect); + if (!fully_visible) + window->DrawList->PushClipRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max); + window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min + ImVec2(THICKNESS * 0.5f, THICKNESS * 0.5f), display_rect.Max - ImVec2(THICKNESS * 0.5f, THICKNESS * 0.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, 0, THICKNESS); + if (!fully_visible) + window->DrawList->PopClipRect(); + } + if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin) + { + window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, 0, 1.0f); + } +} + +void ImGui::RenderMouseCursor(ImVec2 base_pos, float base_scale, ImGuiMouseCursor mouse_cursor, ImU32 col_fill, ImU32 col_border, ImU32 col_shadow) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(mouse_cursor > ImGuiMouseCursor_None && mouse_cursor < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT); + ImFontAtlas* font_atlas = g.DrawListSharedData.Font->ContainerAtlas; + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + { + // We scale cursor with current viewport/monitor, however Windows 10 for its own hardware cursor seems to be using a different scale factor. + ImVec2 offset, size, uv[4]; + if (!font_atlas->GetMouseCursorTexData(mouse_cursor, &offset, &size, &uv[0], &uv[2])) + continue; + const ImVec2 pos = base_pos - offset; + const float scale = base_scale; + if (!viewport->GetMainRect().Overlaps(ImRect(pos, pos + ImVec2(size.x + 2, size.y + 2) * scale))) + continue; + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(viewport); + ImTextureID tex_id = font_atlas->TexID; + draw_list->PushTextureID(tex_id); + draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(1, 0) * scale, pos + (ImVec2(1, 0) + size) * scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_shadow); + draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(2, 0) * scale, pos + (ImVec2(2, 0) + size) * scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_shadow); + draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos, pos + size * scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_border); + draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos, pos + size * scale, uv[0], uv[1], col_fill); + draw_list->PopTextureID(); + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] INITIALIZATION, SHUTDOWN +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Internal state access - if you want to share Dear ImGui state between modules (e.g. DLL) or allocate it yourself +// Note that we still point to some static data and members (such as GFontAtlas), so the state instance you end up using will point to the static data within its module +ImGuiContext* ImGui::GetCurrentContext() +{ + return GImGui; +} + +void ImGui::SetCurrentContext(ImGuiContext* ctx) +{ +#ifdef IMGUI_SET_CURRENT_CONTEXT_FUNC + IMGUI_SET_CURRENT_CONTEXT_FUNC(ctx); // For custom thread-based hackery you may want to have control over this. +#else + GImGui = ctx; +#endif +} + +void ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc free_func, void* user_data) +{ + GImAllocatorAllocFunc = alloc_func; + GImAllocatorFreeFunc = free_func; + GImAllocatorUserData = user_data; +} + +// This is provided to facilitate copying allocators from one static/DLL boundary to another (e.g. retrieve default allocator of your executable address space) +void ImGui::GetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc* p_alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc* p_free_func, void** p_user_data) +{ + *p_alloc_func = GImAllocatorAllocFunc; + *p_free_func = GImAllocatorFreeFunc; + *p_user_data = GImAllocatorUserData; +} + +ImGuiContext* ImGui::CreateContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas) +{ + ImGuiContext* prev_ctx = GetCurrentContext(); + ImGuiContext* ctx = IM_NEW(ImGuiContext)(shared_font_atlas); + SetCurrentContext(ctx); + Initialize(); + if (prev_ctx != NULL) + SetCurrentContext(prev_ctx); // Restore previous context if any, else keep new one. + return ctx; +} + +void ImGui::DestroyContext(ImGuiContext* ctx) +{ + ImGuiContext* prev_ctx = GetCurrentContext(); + if (ctx == NULL) //-V1051 + ctx = prev_ctx; + SetCurrentContext(ctx); + Shutdown(); + SetCurrentContext((prev_ctx != ctx) ? prev_ctx : NULL); + IM_DELETE(ctx); +} + +// IMPORTANT: ###xxx suffixes must be same in ALL languages +static const ImGuiLocEntry GLocalizationEntriesEnUS[] = +{ + { ImGuiLocKey_VersionStr, "Dear ImGui " IMGUI_VERSION " (" IM_STRINGIFY(IMGUI_VERSION_NUM) ")" }, + { ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeOne, "Size column to fit###SizeOne" }, + { ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeAllFit, "Size all columns to fit###SizeAll" }, + { ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeAllDefault, "Size all columns to default###SizeAll" }, + { ImGuiLocKey_TableResetOrder, "Reset order###ResetOrder" }, + { ImGuiLocKey_WindowingMainMenuBar, "(Main menu bar)" }, + { ImGuiLocKey_WindowingPopup, "(Popup)" }, + { ImGuiLocKey_WindowingUntitled, "(Untitled)" }, +}; + +void ImGui::Initialize() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(!g.Initialized && !g.SettingsLoaded); + + // Add .ini handle for ImGuiWindow and ImGuiTable types + { + ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler; + ini_handler.TypeName = "Window"; + ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHashStr("Window"); + ini_handler.ClearAllFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ClearAll; + ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ReadOpen; + ini_handler.ReadLineFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ReadLine; + ini_handler.ApplyAllFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ApplyAll; + ini_handler.WriteAllFn = WindowSettingsHandler_WriteAll; + AddSettingsHandler(&ini_handler); + } + TableSettingsAddSettingsHandler(); + + // Setup default localization table + LocalizeRegisterEntries(GLocalizationEntriesEnUS, IM_ARRAYSIZE(GLocalizationEntriesEnUS)); + + // Setup default platform clipboard/IME handlers. + g.IO.GetClipboardTextFn = GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl; // Platform dependent default implementations + g.IO.SetClipboardTextFn = SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl; + g.IO.ClipboardUserData = (void*)&g; // Default implementation use the ImGuiContext as user data (ideally those would be arguments to the function) + g.IO.SetPlatformImeDataFn = SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl; + + // Create default viewport + ImGuiViewportP* viewport = IM_NEW(ImGuiViewportP)(); + g.Viewports.push_back(viewport); + g.TempBuffer.resize(1024 * 3 + 1, 0); + +#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK +#endif + + g.Initialized = true; +} + +// This function is merely here to free heap allocations. +void ImGui::Shutdown() +{ + // The fonts atlas can be used prior to calling NewFrame(), so we clear it even if g.Initialized is FALSE (which would happen if we never called NewFrame) + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.IO.Fonts && g.FontAtlasOwnedByContext) + { + g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false; + IM_DELETE(g.IO.Fonts); + } + g.IO.Fonts = NULL; + g.DrawListSharedData.TempBuffer.clear(); + + // Cleanup of other data are conditional on actually having initialized Dear ImGui. + if (!g.Initialized) + return; + + // Save settings (unless we haven't attempted to load them: CreateContext/DestroyContext without a call to NewFrame shouldn't save an empty file) + if (g.SettingsLoaded && g.IO.IniFilename != NULL) + SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename); + + CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_Shutdown); + + // Clear everything else + g.Windows.clear_delete(); + g.WindowsFocusOrder.clear(); + g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.clear(); + g.CurrentWindow = NULL; + g.CurrentWindowStack.clear(); + g.WindowsById.Clear(); + g.NavWindow = NULL; + g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = NULL; + g.ActiveIdWindow = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL; + g.MovingWindow = NULL; + + g.KeysRoutingTable.Clear(); + + g.ColorStack.clear(); + g.StyleVarStack.clear(); + g.FontStack.clear(); + g.OpenPopupStack.clear(); + g.BeginPopupStack.clear(); + g.NavTreeNodeStack.clear(); + + g.Viewports.clear_delete(); + + g.TabBars.Clear(); + g.CurrentTabBarStack.clear(); + g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.clear(); + + g.ClipperTempData.clear_destruct(); + + g.Tables.Clear(); + g.TablesTempData.clear_destruct(); + g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.clear(); + + g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear(); + g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.clear(); + g.InputTextState.ClearFreeMemory(); + g.InputTextDeactivatedState.ClearFreeMemory(); + + g.SettingsWindows.clear(); + g.SettingsHandlers.clear(); + + if (g.LogFile) + { +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS + if (g.LogFile != stdout) +#endif + ImFileClose(g.LogFile); + g.LogFile = NULL; + } + g.LogBuffer.clear(); + g.DebugLogBuf.clear(); + g.DebugLogIndex.clear(); + + g.Initialized = false; +} + +// No specific ordering/dependency support, will see as needed +ImGuiID ImGui::AddContextHook(ImGuiContext* ctx, const ImGuiContextHook* hook) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + IM_ASSERT(hook->Callback != NULL && hook->HookId == 0 && hook->Type != ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_); + g.Hooks.push_back(*hook); + g.Hooks.back().HookId = ++g.HookIdNext; + return g.HookIdNext; +} + +// Deferred removal, avoiding issue with changing vector while iterating it +void ImGui::RemoveContextHook(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID hook_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + IM_ASSERT(hook_id != 0); + for (ImGuiContextHook& hook : g.Hooks) + if (hook.HookId == hook_id) + hook.Type = ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_; +} + +// Call context hooks (used by e.g. test engine) +// We assume a small number of hooks so all stored in same array +void ImGui::CallContextHooks(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiContextHookType hook_type) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (ImGuiContextHook& hook : g.Hooks) + if (hook.Type == hook_type) + hook.Callback(&g, &hook); +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] MAIN CODE (most of the code! lots of stuff, needs tidying up!) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// ImGuiWindow is mostly a dumb struct. It merely has a constructor and a few helper methods +ImGuiWindow::ImGuiWindow(ImGuiContext* ctx, const char* name) : DrawListInst(NULL) +{ + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); + Ctx = ctx; + Name = ImStrdup(name); + NameBufLen = (int)strlen(name) + 1; + ID = ImHashStr(name); + IDStack.push_back(ID); + MoveId = GetID("#MOVE"); + ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + ScrollTargetCenterRatio = ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f); + AutoFitFramesX = AutoFitFramesY = -1; + AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None; + SetWindowPosAllowFlags = SetWindowSizeAllowFlags = SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = 0; + SetWindowPosVal = SetWindowPosPivot = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + LastFrameActive = -1; + LastTimeActive = -1.0f; + FontWindowScale = 1.0f; + SettingsOffset = -1; + DrawList = &DrawListInst; + DrawList->_Data = &Ctx->DrawListSharedData; + DrawList->_OwnerName = Name; + NavPreferredScoringPosRel[0] = NavPreferredScoringPosRel[1] = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); +} + +ImGuiWindow::~ImGuiWindow() +{ + IM_ASSERT(DrawList == &DrawListInst); + IM_DELETE(Name); + ColumnsStorage.clear_destruct(); +} + +ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const char* str, const char* str_end) +{ + ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back(); + ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(str, str_end ? (str_end - str) : 0, seed); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id) + ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_String, str, str_end); + return id; +} + +ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const void* ptr) +{ + ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back(); + ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&ptr, sizeof(void*), seed); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id) + ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_Pointer, ptr, NULL); + return id; +} + +ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(int n) +{ + ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back(); + ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&n, sizeof(n), seed); + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id) + ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)(intptr_t)n, NULL); + return id; +} + +// This is only used in rare/specific situations to manufacture an ID out of nowhere. +ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetIDFromRectangle(const ImRect& r_abs) +{ + ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back(); + ImRect r_rel = ImGui::WindowRectAbsToRel(this, r_abs); + ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&r_rel, sizeof(r_rel), seed); + return id; +} + +static void SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.CurrentWindow = window; + g.CurrentTable = window && window->DC.CurrentTableIdx != -1 ? g.Tables.GetByIndex(window->DC.CurrentTableIdx) : NULL; + if (window) + { + g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize(); + ImGui::NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX(); + } +} + +void ImGui::GcCompactTransientMiscBuffers() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.ItemFlagsStack.clear(); + g.GroupStack.clear(); + TableGcCompactSettings(); +} + +// Free up/compact internal window buffers, we can use this when a window becomes unused. +// Not freed: +// - ImGuiWindow, ImGuiWindowSettings, Name, StateStorage, ColumnsStorage (may hold useful data) +// This should have no noticeable visual effect. When the window reappear however, expect new allocation/buffer growth/copy cost. +void ImGui::GcCompactTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + window->MemoryCompacted = true; + window->MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity = window->DrawList->IdxBuffer.Capacity; + window->MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity = window->DrawList->VtxBuffer.Capacity; + window->IDStack.clear(); + window->DrawList->_ClearFreeMemory(); + window->DC.ChildWindows.clear(); + window->DC.ItemWidthStack.clear(); + window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.clear(); +} + +void ImGui::GcAwakeTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + // We stored capacity of the ImDrawList buffer to reduce growth-caused allocation/copy when awakening. + // The other buffers tends to amortize much faster. + window->MemoryCompacted = false; + window->DrawList->IdxBuffer.reserve(window->MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity); + window->DrawList->VtxBuffer.reserve(window->MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity); + window->MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity = window->MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity = 0; +} + +void ImGui::SetActiveID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Clear previous active id + if (g.ActiveId != 0) + { + // While most behaved code would make an effort to not steal active id during window move/drag operations, + // we at least need to be resilient to it. Canceling the move is rather aggressive and users of 'master' branch + // may prefer the weird ill-defined half working situation ('docking' did assert), so may need to rework that. + if (g.MovingWindow != NULL && g.ActiveId == g.MovingWindow->MoveId) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("SetActiveID() cancel MovingWindow\n"); + g.MovingWindow = NULL; + } + + // This could be written in a more general way (e.g associate a hook to ActiveId), + // but since this is currently quite an exception we'll leave it as is. + // One common scenario leading to this is: pressing Key ->NavMoveRequestApplyResult() -> ClearActiveId() + if (g.InputTextState.ID == g.ActiveId) + InputTextDeactivateHook(g.ActiveId); + } + + // Set active id + g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = (g.ActiveId != id); + if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("SetActiveID() old:0x%08X (window \"%s\") -> new:0x%08X (window \"%s\")\n", g.ActiveId, g.ActiveIdWindow ? g.ActiveIdWindow->Name : "", id, window ? window->Name : ""); + g.ActiveIdTimer = 0.0f; + g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = false; + g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore = false; + g.ActiveIdMouseButton = -1; + if (id != 0) + { + g.LastActiveId = id; + g.LastActiveIdTimer = 0.0f; + } + } + g.ActiveId = id; + g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false; + g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = false; + g.ActiveIdWindow = window; + g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = false; + if (id) + { + g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id; + g.ActiveIdSource = (g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavJustMovedToId == id) ? g.NavInputSource : ImGuiInputSource_Mouse; + IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveIdSource != ImGuiInputSource_None); + } + + // Clear declaration of inputs claimed by the widget + // (Please note that this is WIP and not all keys/inputs are thoroughly declared by all widgets yet) + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = 0x00; + g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys = false; +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask = 0x00; +#endif +} + +void ImGui::ClearActiveID() +{ + SetActiveID(0, NULL); // g.ActiveId = 0; +} + +void ImGui::SetHoveredID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.HoveredId = id; + g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false; + if (id != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id) + g.HoveredIdTimer = g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f; +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetHoveredID() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.HoveredId ? g.HoveredId : g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame; +} + +// This is called by ItemAdd(). +// Code not using ItemAdd() may need to call this manually otherwise ActiveId will be cleared. In IMGUI_VERSION_NUM < 18717 this was called by GetID(). +void ImGui::KeepAliveID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.ActiveId == id) + g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id; + if (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == id) + g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = true; +} + +void ImGui::MarkItemEdited(ImGuiID id) +{ + // This marking is solely to be able to provide info for IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(). + // ActiveId might have been released by the time we call this (as in the typical press/release button behavior) but still need to fill the data. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.LockMarkEdited > 0) + return; + if (g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == 0) + { + g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = true; + g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore = true; + } + + // We accept a MarkItemEdited() on drag and drop targets (see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1875#issuecomment-978243343) + // We accept 'ActiveIdPreviousFrame == id' for InputText() returning an edit after it has been taken ActiveId away (#4714) + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == id); + + //IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId == id); + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited; +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowContentHoverable(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiHoveredFlags flags) +{ + // An active popup disable hovering on other windows (apart from its own children) + // FIXME-OPT: This could be cached/stored within the window. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.NavWindow) + if (ImGuiWindow* focused_root_window = g.NavWindow->RootWindow) + if (focused_root_window->WasActive && focused_root_window != window->RootWindow) + { + // For the purpose of those flags we differentiate "standard popup" from "modal popup" + // NB: The 'else' is important because Modal windows are also Popups. + bool want_inhibit = false; + if (focused_root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) + want_inhibit = true; + else if ((focused_root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup)) + want_inhibit = true; + + // Inhibit hover unless the window is within the stack of our modal/popup + if (want_inhibit) + if (!IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(window->RootWindow, focused_root_window)) + return false; + } + return true; +} + +static inline float CalcDelayFromHoveredFlags(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort) + return g.Style.HoverDelayShort; + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal) + return g.Style.HoverDelayNormal; + return 0.0f; +} + +// This is roughly matching the behavior of internal-facing ItemHoverable() +// - we allow hovering to be true when ActiveId==window->MoveID, so that clicking on non-interactive items such as a Text() item still returns true with IsItemHovered() +// - this should work even for non-interactive items that have no ID, so we cannot use LastItemId +bool ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT((flags & ~ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowedMaskForIsItemHovered) == 0 && "Invalid flags for IsItemHovered()!"); + + if (g.NavDisableMouseHover && !g.NavDisableHighlight && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoNavOverride)) + { + if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled)) + return false; + if (!IsItemFocused()) + return false; + + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) + flags |= g.Style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav; + } + else + { + // Test for bounding box overlap, as updated as ItemAdd() + ImGuiItemStatusFlags status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags; + if (!(status_flags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect)) + return false; + + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) + flags |= g.Style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse; + + IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy)) == 0); // Flags not supported by this function + + // Done with rectangle culling so we can perform heavier checks now + // Test if we are hovering the right window (our window could be behind another window) + // [2021/03/02] Reworked / reverted the revert, finally. Note we want e.g. BeginGroup/ItemAdd/EndGroup to work as well. (#3851) + // [2017/10/16] Reverted commit 344d48be3 and testing RootWindow instead. I believe it is correct to NOT test for RootWindow but this leaves us unable + // to use IsItemHovered() after EndChild() itself. Until a solution is found I believe reverting to the test from 2017/09/27 is safe since this was + // the test that has been running for a long while. + if (g.HoveredWindow != window && (status_flags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow) == 0) + if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByWindow) == 0) + return false; + + // Test if another item is active (e.g. being dragged) + const ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID; + if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) == 0) + if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != id && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != window->MoveId) + return false; + + // Test if interactions on this window are blocked by an active popup or modal. + // The ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup flag will be tested here. + if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(window, flags) && !(g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck)) + return false; + + // Test if the item is disabled + if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled)) + return false; + + // Special handling for calling after Begin() which represent the title bar or tab. + // When the window is skipped/collapsed (SkipItems==true) that last item will never be overwritten so we need to detect the case. + if (id == window->MoveId && window->WriteAccessed) + return false; + + // Test if using AllowOverlap and overlapped + if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap) && id != 0) + if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem) == 0) + if (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != g.LastItemData.ID) + return false; + } + + // Handle hover delay + // (some ideas: https://www.nngroup.com/articles/timing-exposing-content) + const float delay = CalcDelayFromHoveredFlags(flags); + if (delay > 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary)) + { + ImGuiID hover_delay_id = (g.LastItemData.ID != 0) ? g.LastItemData.ID : window->GetIDFromRectangle(g.LastItemData.Rect); + if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay) && (g.HoverItemDelayIdPreviousFrame != hover_delay_id)) + g.HoverItemDelayTimer = 0.0f; + g.HoverItemDelayId = hover_delay_id; + + // When changing hovered item we requires a bit of stationary delay before activating hover timer, + // but once unlocked on a given item we also moving. + //if (g.HoverDelayTimer >= delay && (g.HoverDelayTimer - g.IO.DeltaTime < delay || g.MouseStationaryTimer - g.IO.DeltaTime < g.Style.HoverStationaryDelay)) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("HoverDelayTimer = %f/%f, MouseStationaryTimer = %f\n", g.HoverDelayTimer, delay, g.MouseStationaryTimer); } + if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary) != 0 && g.HoverItemUnlockedStationaryId != hover_delay_id) + return false; + + if (g.HoverItemDelayTimer < delay) + return false; + } + + return true; +} + +// Internal facing ItemHoverable() used when submitting widgets. Differs slightly from IsItemHovered(). +// (this does not rely on LastItemData it can be called from a ButtonBehavior() call not following an ItemAdd() call) +// FIXME-LEGACY: the 'ImGuiItemFlags item_flags' parameter was added on 2023-06-28. +// If you used this in your legacy/custom widgets code: +// - Commonly: if your ItemHoverable() call comes after an ItemAdd() call: pass 'item_flags = g.LastItemData.InFlags'. +// - Rare: otherwise you may pass 'item_flags = 0' (ImGuiItemFlags_None) unless you want to benefit from special behavior handled by ItemHoverable. +bool ImGui::ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiItemFlags item_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (g.HoveredWindow != window) + return false; + if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max)) + return false; + + if (g.HoveredId != 0 && g.HoveredId != id && !g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap) + return false; + if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != id && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap) + return false; + + // Done with rectangle culling so we can perform heavier checks now. + if (!(item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck) && !IsWindowContentHoverable(window, ImGuiHoveredFlags_None)) + { + g.HoveredIdDisabled = true; + return false; + } + + // We exceptionally allow this function to be called with id==0 to allow using it for easy high-level + // hover test in widgets code. We could also decide to split this function is two. + if (id != 0) + { + // Drag source doesn't report as hovered + if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover)) + return false; + + SetHoveredID(id); + + // AllowOverlap mode (rarely used) requires previous frame HoveredId to be null or to match. + // This allows using patterns where a later submitted widget overlaps a previous one. Generally perceived as a front-to-back hit-test. + if (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap) + { + g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = true; + if (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id) + return false; + } + } + + // When disabled we'll return false but still set HoveredId + if (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) + { + // Release active id if turning disabled + if (g.ActiveId == id && id != 0) + ClearActiveID(); + g.HoveredIdDisabled = true; + return false; + } + + if (id != 0) + { + // [DEBUG] Item Picker tool! + // We perform the check here because SetHoveredID() is not frequently called (1~ time a frame), making + // the cost of this tool near-zero. We can get slightly better call-stack and support picking non-hovered + // items if we performed the test in ItemAdd(), but that would incur a small runtime cost. + if (g.DebugItemPickerActive && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id) + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + if (g.DebugItemPickerBreakId == id) + IM_DEBUG_BREAK(); + } + + if (g.NavDisableMouseHover) + return false; + + return true; +} + +// FIXME: This is inlined/duplicated in ItemAdd() +bool ImGui::IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (!bb.Overlaps(window->ClipRect)) + if (id == 0 || (id != g.ActiveId && id != g.NavId)) + if (!g.LogEnabled) + return true; + return false; +} + +// This is also inlined in ItemAdd() +// Note: if ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect is set, user needs to set g.LastItemData.DisplayRect. +void ImGui::SetLastItemData(ImGuiID item_id, ImGuiItemFlags in_flags, ImGuiItemStatusFlags item_flags, const ImRect& item_rect) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.LastItemData.ID = item_id; + g.LastItemData.InFlags = in_flags; + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = item_flags; + g.LastItemData.Rect = g.LastItemData.NavRect = item_rect; +} + +float ImGui::CalcWrapWidthForPos(const ImVec2& pos, float wrap_pos_x) +{ + if (wrap_pos_x < 0.0f) + return 0.0f; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (wrap_pos_x == 0.0f) + { + // We could decide to setup a default wrapping max point for auto-resizing windows, + // or have auto-wrap (with unspecified wrapping pos) behave as a ContentSize extending function? + //if (window->Hidden && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) + // wrap_pos_x = ImMax(window->WorkRect.Min.x + g.FontSize * 10.0f, window->WorkRect.Max.x); + //else + wrap_pos_x = window->WorkRect.Max.x; + } + else if (wrap_pos_x > 0.0f) + { + wrap_pos_x += window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x; // wrap_pos_x is provided is window local space + } + + return ImMax(wrap_pos_x - pos.x, 1.0f); +} + +// IM_ALLOC() == ImGui::MemAlloc() +void* ImGui::MemAlloc(size_t size) +{ + if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui) + ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations++; + return (*GImAllocatorAllocFunc)(size, GImAllocatorUserData); +} + +// IM_FREE() == ImGui::MemFree() +void ImGui::MemFree(void* ptr) +{ + if (ptr) + if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui) + ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations--; + return (*GImAllocatorFreeFunc)(ptr, GImAllocatorUserData); +} + +const char* ImGui::GetClipboardText() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.IO.GetClipboardTextFn ? g.IO.GetClipboardTextFn(g.IO.ClipboardUserData) : ""; +} + +void ImGui::SetClipboardText(const char* text) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.IO.SetClipboardTextFn) + g.IO.SetClipboardTextFn(g.IO.ClipboardUserData, text); +} + +const char* ImGui::GetVersion() +{ + return IMGUI_VERSION; +} + +ImGuiIO& ImGui::GetIO() +{ + IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() and ImGui::SetCurrentContext() ?"); + return GImGui->IO; +} + +// Pass this to your backend rendering function! Valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame() +ImDrawData* ImGui::GetDrawData() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[0]; + return viewport->DrawDataP.Valid ? &viewport->DrawDataP : NULL; +} + +double ImGui::GetTime() +{ + return GImGui->Time; +} + +int ImGui::GetFrameCount() +{ + return GImGui->FrameCount; +} + +static ImDrawList* GetViewportBgFgDrawList(ImGuiViewportP* viewport, size_t drawlist_no, const char* drawlist_name) +{ + // Create the draw list on demand, because they are not frequently used for all viewports + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(drawlist_no < IM_ARRAYSIZE(viewport->BgFgDrawLists)); + ImDrawList* draw_list = viewport->BgFgDrawLists[drawlist_no]; + if (draw_list == NULL) + { + draw_list = IM_NEW(ImDrawList)(&g.DrawListSharedData); + draw_list->_OwnerName = drawlist_name; + viewport->BgFgDrawLists[drawlist_no] = draw_list; + } + + // Our ImDrawList system requires that there is always a command + if (viewport->BgFgDrawListsLastFrame[drawlist_no] != g.FrameCount) + { + draw_list->_ResetForNewFrame(); + draw_list->PushTextureID(g.IO.Fonts->TexID); + draw_list->PushClipRect(viewport->Pos, viewport->Pos + viewport->Size, false); + viewport->BgFgDrawListsLastFrame[drawlist_no] = g.FrameCount; + } + return draw_list; +} + +ImDrawList* ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport) +{ + return GetViewportBgFgDrawList((ImGuiViewportP*)viewport, 0, "##Background"); +} + +ImDrawList* ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return GetBackgroundDrawList(g.Viewports[0]); +} + +ImDrawList* ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport) +{ + return GetViewportBgFgDrawList((ImGuiViewportP*)viewport, 1, "##Foreground"); +} + +ImDrawList* ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return GetForegroundDrawList(g.Viewports[0]); +} + +ImDrawListSharedData* ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() +{ + return &GImGui->DrawListSharedData; +} + +void ImGui::StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + // Set ActiveId even if the _NoMove flag is set. Without it, dragging away from a window with _NoMove would activate hover on other windows. + // We _also_ call this when clicking in a window empty space when io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly is set, but clear g.MovingWindow afterward. + // This is because we want ActiveId to be set even when the window is not permitted to move. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + FocusWindow(window); + SetActiveID(window->MoveId, window); + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; + g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - window->RootWindow->Pos; + g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = true; + SetActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys(); + + bool can_move_window = true; + if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove) || (window->RootWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove)) + can_move_window = false; + if (can_move_window) + g.MovingWindow = window; +} + +// Handle mouse moving window +// Note: moving window with the navigation keys (Square + d-pad / CTRL+TAB + Arrows) are processed in NavUpdateWindowing() +// FIXME: We don't have strong guarantee that g.MovingWindow stay synched with g.ActiveId == g.MovingWindow->MoveId. +// This is currently enforced by the fact that BeginDragDropSource() is setting all g.ActiveIdUsingXXXX flags to inhibit navigation inputs, +// but if we should more thoroughly test cases where g.ActiveId or g.MovingWindow gets changed and not the other. +void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.MovingWindow != NULL) + { + // We actually want to move the root window. g.MovingWindow == window we clicked on (could be a child window). + // We track it to preserve Focus and so that generally ActiveIdWindow == MovingWindow and ActiveId == MovingWindow->MoveId for consistency. + KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId); + IM_ASSERT(g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->RootWindow); + ImGuiWindow* moving_window = g.MovingWindow->RootWindow; + if (g.IO.MouseDown[0] && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos)) + { + ImVec2 pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset; + SetWindowPos(moving_window, pos, ImGuiCond_Always); + FocusWindow(g.MovingWindow); + } + else + { + g.MovingWindow = NULL; + ClearActiveID(); + } + } + else + { + // When clicking/dragging from a window that has the _NoMove flag, we still set the ActiveId in order to prevent hovering others. + if (g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->MoveId == g.ActiveId) + { + KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId); + if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0]) + ClearActiveID(); + } + } +} + +// Initiate moving window when clicking on empty space or title bar. +// Handle left-click and right-click focus. +void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.ActiveId != 0 || g.HoveredId != 0) + return; + + // Unless we just made a window/popup appear + if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->Appearing) + return; + + // Click on empty space to focus window and start moving + // (after we're done with all our widgets) + if (g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) + { + // Handle the edge case of a popup being closed while clicking in its empty space. + // If we try to focus it, FocusWindow() > ClosePopupsOverWindow() will accidentally close any parent popups because they are not linked together any more. + ImGuiWindow* root_window = g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow : NULL; + const bool is_closed_popup = root_window && (root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !IsPopupOpen(root_window->PopupId, ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel); + + if (root_window != NULL && !is_closed_popup) + { + StartMouseMovingWindow(g.HoveredWindow); //-V595 + + // Cancel moving if clicked outside of title bar + if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly && !(root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) + if (!root_window->TitleBarRect().Contains(g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0])) + g.MovingWindow = NULL; + + // Cancel moving if clicked over an item which was disabled or inhibited by popups (note that we know HoveredId == 0 already) + if (g.HoveredIdDisabled) + g.MovingWindow = NULL; + } + else if (root_window == NULL && g.NavWindow != NULL) + { + // Clicking on void disable focus + FocusWindow(NULL, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_UnlessBelowModal); + } + } + + // With right mouse button we close popups without changing focus based on where the mouse is aimed + // Instead, focus will be restored to the window under the bottom-most closed popup. + // (The left mouse button path calls FocusWindow on the hovered window, which will lead NewFrame->ClosePopupsOverWindow to trigger) + if (g.IO.MouseClicked[1]) + { + // Find the top-most window between HoveredWindow and the top-most Modal Window. + // This is where we can trim the popup stack. + ImGuiWindow* modal = GetTopMostPopupModal(); + bool hovered_window_above_modal = g.HoveredWindow && (modal == NULL || IsWindowAbove(g.HoveredWindow, modal)); + ClosePopupsOverWindow(hovered_window_above_modal ? g.HoveredWindow : modal, true); + } +} + +static bool IsWindowActiveAndVisible(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + return (window->Active) && (!window->Hidden); +} + +// The reason this is exposed in imgui_internal.h is: on touch-based system that don't have hovering, we want to dispatch inputs to the right target (imgui vs imgui+app) +void ImGui::UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + g.WindowsHoverPadding = ImMax(g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, ImVec2(WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING, WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING)); + + // Find the window hovered by mouse: + // - Child windows can extend beyond the limit of their parent so we need to derive HoveredRootWindow from HoveredWindow. + // - When moving a window we can skip the search, which also conveniently bypasses the fact that window->WindowRectClipped is lagging as this point of the frame. + // - We also support the moved window toggling the NoInputs flag after moving has started in order to be able to detect windows below it, which is useful for e.g. docking mechanisms. + bool clear_hovered_windows = false; + FindHoveredWindow(); + + // Modal windows prevents mouse from hovering behind them. + ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetTopMostPopupModal(); + if (modal_window && g.HoveredWindow && !IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow, modal_window)) + clear_hovered_windows = true; + + // Disabled mouse? + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse) + clear_hovered_windows = true; + + // We track click ownership. When clicked outside of a window the click is owned by the application and + // won't report hovering nor request capture even while dragging over our windows afterward. + const bool has_open_popup = (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0); + const bool has_open_modal = (modal_window != NULL); + int mouse_earliest_down = -1; + bool mouse_any_down = false; + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown); i++) + { + if (io.MouseClicked[i]) + { + io.MouseDownOwned[i] = (g.HoveredWindow != NULL) || has_open_popup; + io.MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[i] = (g.HoveredWindow != NULL) || has_open_modal; + } + mouse_any_down |= io.MouseDown[i]; + if (io.MouseDown[i]) + if (mouse_earliest_down == -1 || io.MouseClickedTime[i] < io.MouseClickedTime[mouse_earliest_down]) + mouse_earliest_down = i; + } + const bool mouse_avail = (mouse_earliest_down == -1) || io.MouseDownOwned[mouse_earliest_down]; + const bool mouse_avail_unless_popup_close = (mouse_earliest_down == -1) || io.MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[mouse_earliest_down]; + + // If mouse was first clicked outside of ImGui bounds we also cancel out hovering. + // FIXME: For patterns of drag and drop across OS windows, we may need to rework/remove this test (first committed 311c0ca9 on 2015/02) + const bool mouse_dragging_extern_payload = g.DragDropActive && (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern) != 0; + if (!mouse_avail && !mouse_dragging_extern_payload) + clear_hovered_windows = true; + + if (clear_hovered_windows) + g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = NULL; + + // Update io.WantCaptureMouse for the user application (true = dispatch mouse info to Dear ImGui only, false = dispatch mouse to Dear ImGui + underlying app) + // Update io.WantCaptureMouseAllowPopupClose (experimental) to give a chance for app to react to popup closure with a drag + if (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != -1) + { + io.WantCaptureMouse = io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose = (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != 0); + } + else + { + io.WantCaptureMouse = (mouse_avail && (g.HoveredWindow != NULL || mouse_any_down)) || has_open_popup; + io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose = (mouse_avail_unless_popup_close && (g.HoveredWindow != NULL || mouse_any_down)) || has_open_modal; + } + + // Update io.WantCaptureKeyboard for the user application (true = dispatch keyboard info to Dear ImGui only, false = dispatch keyboard info to Dear ImGui + underlying app) + if (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != -1) + io.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != 0); + else + io.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.ActiveId != 0) || (modal_window != NULL); + if (io.NavActive && (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) && !(io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard)) + io.WantCaptureKeyboard = true; + + // Update io.WantTextInput flag, this is to allow systems without a keyboard (e.g. mobile, hand-held) to show a software keyboard if possible + io.WantTextInput = (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != -1) ? (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != 0) : false; +} + +void ImGui::NewFrame() +{ + IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() and ImGui::SetCurrentContext() ?"); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Remove pending delete hooks before frame start. + // This deferred removal avoid issues of removal while iterating the hook vector + for (int n = g.Hooks.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--) + if (g.Hooks[n].Type == ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_) + g.Hooks.erase(&g.Hooks[n]); + + CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePre); + + // Check and assert for various common IO and Configuration mistakes + ErrorCheckNewFrameSanityChecks(); + + // Load settings on first frame, save settings when modified (after a delay) + UpdateSettings(); + + g.Time += g.IO.DeltaTime; + g.WithinFrameScope = true; + g.FrameCount += 1; + g.TooltipOverrideCount = 0; + g.WindowsActiveCount = 0; + g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.resize(0); + + // Calculate frame-rate for the user, as a purely luxurious feature + g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum += g.IO.DeltaTime - g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx]; + g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx] = g.IO.DeltaTime; + g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx + 1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame); + g.FramerateSecPerFrameCount = ImMin(g.FramerateSecPerFrameCount + 1, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame)); + g.IO.Framerate = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum > 0.0f) ? (1.0f / (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum / (float)g.FramerateSecPerFrameCount)) : FLT_MAX; + + // Process input queue (trickle as many events as possible), turn events into writes to IO structure + g.InputEventsTrail.resize(0); + UpdateInputEvents(g.IO.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue); + + // Update viewports (after processing input queue, so io.MouseHoveredViewport is set) + UpdateViewportsNewFrame(); + + // Setup current font and draw list shared data + g.IO.Fonts->Locked = true; + SetCurrentFont(GetDefaultFont()); + IM_ASSERT(g.Font->IsLoaded()); + ImRect virtual_space(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + virtual_space.Add(viewport->GetMainRect()); + g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen = virtual_space.ToVec4(); + g.DrawListSharedData.CurveTessellationTol = g.Style.CurveTessellationTol; + g.DrawListSharedData.SetCircleTessellationMaxError(g.Style.CircleTessellationMaxError); + g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags = ImDrawListFlags_None; + if (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines) + g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; + if (g.Style.AntiAliasedLinesUseTex && !(g.Font->ContainerAtlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines)) + g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex; + if (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill) + g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill; + if (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset) + g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset; + + // Mark rendering data as invalid to prevent user who may have a handle on it to use it. + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + viewport->DrawDataP.Valid = false; + + // Drag and drop keep the source ID alive so even if the source disappear our state is consistent + if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == g.ActiveId) + KeepAliveID(g.DragDropPayload.SourceId); + + // Update HoveredId data + if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame) + g.HoveredIdTimer = 0.0f; + if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame || (g.HoveredId && g.ActiveId == g.HoveredId)) + g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f; + if (g.HoveredId) + g.HoveredIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime; + if (g.HoveredId && g.ActiveId != g.HoveredId) + g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime; + g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame = g.HoveredId; + g.HoveredId = 0; + g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false; + g.HoveredIdDisabled = false; + + // Clear ActiveID if the item is not alive anymore. + // In 1.87, the common most call to KeepAliveID() was moved from GetID() to ItemAdd(). + // As a result, custom widget using ButtonBehavior() _without_ ItemAdd() need to call KeepAliveID() themselves. + if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == g.ActiveId) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("NewFrame(): ClearActiveID() because it isn't marked alive anymore!\n"); + ClearActiveID(); + } + + // Update ActiveId data (clear reference to active widget if the widget isn't alive anymore) + if (g.ActiveId) + g.ActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime; + g.LastActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime; + g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame = g.ActiveId; + g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = g.ActiveIdWindow; + g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore = g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore; + g.ActiveIdIsAlive = 0; + g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = false; + g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false; + g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false; + if (g.TempInputId != 0 && g.ActiveId != g.TempInputId) + g.TempInputId = 0; + if (g.ActiveId == 0) + { + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = 0x00; + g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys = false; +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask = 0x00; +#endif + } + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + if (g.ActiveId == 0) + g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask = 0; + else if (g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask != 0) + { + // If your custom widget code used: { g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask |= (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel); } + // Since IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18804 it should be: { SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_Escape, g.ActiveId); SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel, g.ActiveId); } + if (g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask & (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel)) + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_Escape, g.ActiveId); + if (g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask & ~(1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel)) + IM_ASSERT(0); // Other values unsupported + } +#endif + + // Record when we have been stationary as this state is preserved while over same item. + // FIXME: The way this is expressed means user cannot alter HoverStationaryDelay during the frame to use varying values. + // To allow this we should store HoverItemMaxStationaryTime+ID and perform the >= check in IsItemHovered() function. + if (g.HoverItemDelayId != 0 && g.MouseStationaryTimer >= g.Style.HoverStationaryDelay) + g.HoverItemUnlockedStationaryId = g.HoverItemDelayId; + else if (g.HoverItemDelayId == 0) + g.HoverItemUnlockedStationaryId = 0; + if (g.HoveredWindow != NULL && g.MouseStationaryTimer >= g.Style.HoverStationaryDelay) + g.HoverWindowUnlockedStationaryId = g.HoveredWindow->ID; + else if (g.HoveredWindow == NULL) + g.HoverWindowUnlockedStationaryId = 0; + + // Update hover delay for IsItemHovered() with delays and tooltips + g.HoverItemDelayIdPreviousFrame = g.HoverItemDelayId; + if (g.HoverItemDelayId != 0) + { + g.HoverItemDelayTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime; + g.HoverItemDelayClearTimer = 0.0f; + g.HoverItemDelayId = 0; + } + else if (g.HoverItemDelayTimer > 0.0f) + { + // This gives a little bit of leeway before clearing the hover timer, allowing mouse to cross gaps + // We could expose 0.25f as style.HoverClearDelay but I am not sure of the logic yet, this is particularly subtle. + g.HoverItemDelayClearTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime; + if (g.HoverItemDelayClearTimer >= ImMax(0.25f, g.IO.DeltaTime * 2.0f)) // ~7 frames at 30 Hz + allow for low framerate + g.HoverItemDelayTimer = g.HoverItemDelayClearTimer = 0.0f; // May want a decaying timer, in which case need to clamp at max first, based on max of caller last requested timer. + } + + // Drag and drop + g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr; + g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = 0; + g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX; + g.DragDropWithinSource = false; + g.DragDropWithinTarget = false; + g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId = 0; + + // Close popups on focus lost (currently wip/opt-in) + //if (g.IO.AppFocusLost) + // ClosePopupsExceptModals(); + + // Update keyboard input state + UpdateKeyboardInputs(); + + //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyCtrl == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightCtrl)); + //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyShift == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftShift) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightShift)); + //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyAlt == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftAlt) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightAlt)); + //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeySuper == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftSuper) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightSuper)); + + // Update gamepad/keyboard navigation + NavUpdate(); + + // Update mouse input state + UpdateMouseInputs(); + + // Find hovered window + // (needs to be before UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame so we fill g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow on the mouse release frame) + UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags(); + + // Handle user moving window with mouse (at the beginning of the frame to avoid input lag or sheering) + UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame(); + + // Background darkening/whitening + if (GetTopMostPopupModal() != NULL || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha > 0.0f)) + g.DimBgRatio = ImMin(g.DimBgRatio + g.IO.DeltaTime * 6.0f, 1.0f); + else + g.DimBgRatio = ImMax(g.DimBgRatio - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f); + + g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow; + g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = g.WantTextInputNextFrame = -1; + + // Platform IME data: reset for the frame + g.PlatformImeDataPrev = g.PlatformImeData; + g.PlatformImeData.WantVisible = false; + + // Mouse wheel scrolling, scale + UpdateMouseWheel(); + + // Mark all windows as not visible and compact unused memory. + IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size <= g.Windows.Size); + const float memory_compact_start_time = (g.GcCompactAll || g.IO.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer < 0.0f) ? FLT_MAX : (float)g.Time - g.IO.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer; + for (ImGuiWindow* window : g.Windows) + { + window->WasActive = window->Active; + window->Active = false; + window->WriteAccessed = false; + window->BeginCountPreviousFrame = window->BeginCount; + window->BeginCount = 0; + + // Garbage collect transient buffers of recently unused windows + if (!window->WasActive && !window->MemoryCompacted && window->LastTimeActive < memory_compact_start_time) + GcCompactTransientWindowBuffers(window); + } + + // Garbage collect transient buffers of recently unused tables + for (int i = 0; i < g.TablesLastTimeActive.Size; i++) + if (g.TablesLastTimeActive[i] >= 0.0f && g.TablesLastTimeActive[i] < memory_compact_start_time) + TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(g.Tables.GetByIndex(i)); + for (ImGuiTableTempData& table_temp_data : g.TablesTempData) + if (table_temp_data.LastTimeActive >= 0.0f && table_temp_data.LastTimeActive < memory_compact_start_time) + TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(&table_temp_data); + if (g.GcCompactAll) + GcCompactTransientMiscBuffers(); + g.GcCompactAll = false; + + // Closing the focused window restore focus to the first active root window in descending z-order + if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->WasActive) + FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(NULL, NULL, NULL, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild); + + // No window should be open at the beginning of the frame. + // But in order to allow the user to call NewFrame() multiple times without calling Render(), we are doing an explicit clear. + g.CurrentWindowStack.resize(0); + g.BeginPopupStack.resize(0); + g.ItemFlagsStack.resize(0); + g.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(ImGuiItemFlags_None); + g.GroupStack.resize(0); + + // [DEBUG] Update debug features + UpdateDebugToolItemPicker(); + UpdateDebugToolStackQueries(); + if (g.DebugLocateFrames > 0 && --g.DebugLocateFrames == 0) + g.DebugLocateId = 0; + if (g.DebugLogClipperAutoDisableFrames > 0 && --g.DebugLogClipperAutoDisableFrames == 0) + { + DebugLog("(Auto-disabled ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventClipper to avoid spamming)\n"); + g.DebugLogFlags &= ~ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventClipper; + } + + // Create implicit/fallback window - which we will only render it if the user has added something to it. + // We don't use "Debug" to avoid colliding with user trying to create a "Debug" window with custom flags. + // This fallback is particularly important as it prevents ImGui:: calls from crashing. + g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow = true; + SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(400, 400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + Begin("Debug##Default"); + IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->IsFallbackWindow == true); + + // [DEBUG] When io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValue is set, we make Begin()/BeginChild() return false at different level of the window-stack, + // allowing to validate correct Begin/End behavior in user code. + if (g.IO.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop) + g.DebugBeginReturnValueCullDepth = (g.DebugBeginReturnValueCullDepth == -1) ? 0 : ((g.DebugBeginReturnValueCullDepth + ((g.FrameCount % 4) == 0 ? 1 : 0)) % 10); + else + g.DebugBeginReturnValueCullDepth = -1; + + CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePost); +} + +// FIXME: Add a more explicit sort order in the window structure. +static int IMGUI_CDECL ChildWindowComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) +{ + const ImGuiWindow* const a = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)lhs; + const ImGuiWindow* const b = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)rhs; + if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) + return d; + if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) + return d; + return (a->BeginOrderWithinParent - b->BeginOrderWithinParent); +} + +static void AddWindowToSortBuffer(ImVector* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + out_sorted_windows->push_back(window); + if (window->Active) + { + int count = window->DC.ChildWindows.Size; + ImQsort(window->DC.ChildWindows.Data, (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiWindow*), ChildWindowComparer); + for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) + { + ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i]; + if (child->Active) + AddWindowToSortBuffer(out_sorted_windows, child); + } + } +} + +static void AddWindowToDrawData(ImGuiWindow* window, int layer) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[0]; + g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows++; + if (window->DrawList->_Splitter._Count > 1) + window->DrawList->ChannelsMerge(); // Merge if user forgot to merge back. Also required in Docking branch for ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost windows. + ImGui::AddDrawListToDrawDataEx(&viewport->DrawDataP, viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[layer], window->DrawList); + for (ImGuiWindow* child : window->DC.ChildWindows) + if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(child)) // Clipped children may have been marked not active + AddWindowToDrawData(child, layer); +} + +static inline int GetWindowDisplayLayer(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + return (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) ? 1 : 0; +} + +// Layer is locked for the root window, however child windows may use a different viewport (e.g. extruding menu) +static inline void AddRootWindowToDrawData(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + AddWindowToDrawData(window, GetWindowDisplayLayer(window)); +} + +static void FlattenDrawDataIntoSingleLayer(ImDrawDataBuilder* builder) +{ + int n = builder->Layers[0]->Size; + int full_size = n; + for (int i = 1; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(builder->Layers); i++) + full_size += builder->Layers[i]->Size; + builder->Layers[0]->resize(full_size); + for (int layer_n = 1; layer_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(builder->Layers); layer_n++) + { + ImVector* layer = builder->Layers[layer_n]; + if (layer->empty()) + continue; + memcpy(builder->Layers[0]->Data + n, layer->Data, layer->Size * sizeof(ImDrawList*)); + n += layer->Size; + layer->resize(0); + } +} + +static void InitViewportDrawData(ImGuiViewportP* viewport) +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImDrawData* draw_data = &viewport->DrawDataP; + + viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0] = &draw_data->CmdLists; + viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[1] = &viewport->DrawDataBuilder.LayerData1; + viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0]->resize(0); + viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[1]->resize(0); + + draw_data->Valid = true; + draw_data->CmdListsCount = 0; + draw_data->TotalVtxCount = draw_data->TotalIdxCount = 0; + draw_data->DisplayPos = viewport->Pos; + draw_data->DisplaySize = viewport->Size; + draw_data->FramebufferScale = io.DisplayFramebufferScale; + draw_data->OwnerViewport = viewport; +} + +// Push a clipping rectangle for both ImGui logic (hit-testing etc.) and low-level ImDrawList rendering. +// - When using this function it is sane to ensure that float are perfectly rounded to integer values, +// so that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render produce correct result. +// - If the code here changes, may need to update code of functions like NextColumn() and PushColumnClipRect(): +// some frequently called functions which to modify both channels and clipping simultaneously tend to use the +// more specialized SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel() to avoid extraneous updates of underlying ImDrawCmds. +void ImGui::PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DrawList->PushClipRect(clip_rect_min, clip_rect_max, intersect_with_current_clip_rect); + window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back(); +} + +void ImGui::PopClipRect() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DrawList->PopClipRect(); + window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back(); +} + +static void ImGui::RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, ImU32 col) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)GetMainViewport(); + ImRect viewport_rect = viewport->GetMainRect(); + + // Draw behind window by moving the draw command at the FRONT of the draw list + { + // We've already called AddWindowToDrawData() which called DrawList->ChannelsMerge() on DockNodeHost windows, + // and draw list have been trimmed already, hence the explicit recreation of a draw command if missing. + // FIXME: This is creating complication, might be simpler if we could inject a drawlist in drawdata at a given position and not attempt to manipulate ImDrawCmd order. + ImDrawList* draw_list = window->RootWindow->DrawList; + if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0) + draw_list->AddDrawCmd(); + draw_list->PushClipRect(viewport_rect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), viewport_rect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), false); // FIXME: Need to stricty ensure ImDrawCmd are not merged (ElemCount==6 checks below will verify that) + draw_list->AddRectFilled(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, col); + ImDrawCmd cmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.back(); + IM_ASSERT(cmd.ElemCount == 6); + draw_list->CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + draw_list->CmdBuffer.push_front(cmd); + draw_list->AddDrawCmd(); // We need to create a command as CmdBuffer.back().IdxOffset won't be correct if we append to same command. + draw_list->PopClipRect(); + } +} + +ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindBottomMostVisibleWindowWithinBeginStack(ImGuiWindow* parent_window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* bottom_most_visible_window = parent_window; + for (int i = FindWindowDisplayIndex(parent_window); i >= 0; i--) + { + ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i]; + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + continue; + if (!IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(window, parent_window)) + break; + if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window) && GetWindowDisplayLayer(window) <= GetWindowDisplayLayer(parent_window)) + bottom_most_visible_window = window; + } + return bottom_most_visible_window; +} + +static void ImGui::RenderDimmedBackgrounds() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetTopMostAndVisiblePopupModal(); + if (g.DimBgRatio <= 0.0f && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha <= 0.0f) + return; + const bool dim_bg_for_modal = (modal_window != NULL); + const bool dim_bg_for_window_list = (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim != NULL && g.NavWindowingTargetAnim->Active); + if (!dim_bg_for_modal && !dim_bg_for_window_list) + return; + + if (dim_bg_for_modal) + { + // Draw dimming behind modal or a begin stack child, whichever comes first in draw order. + ImGuiWindow* dim_behind_window = FindBottomMostVisibleWindowWithinBeginStack(modal_window); + RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(dim_behind_window, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg, g.DimBgRatio)); + } + else if (dim_bg_for_window_list) + { + // Draw dimming behind CTRL+Tab target window + RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(g.NavWindowingTargetAnim, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, g.DimBgRatio)); + + // Draw border around CTRL+Tab target window + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim; + ImGuiViewport* viewport = GetMainViewport(); + float distance = g.FontSize; + ImRect bb = window->Rect(); + bb.Expand(distance); + if (bb.GetWidth() >= viewport->Size.x && bb.GetHeight() >= viewport->Size.y) + bb.Expand(-distance - 1.0f); // If a window fits the entire viewport, adjust its highlight inward + if (window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size == 0) + window->DrawList->AddDrawCmd(); + window->DrawList->PushClipRect(viewport->Pos, viewport->Pos + viewport->Size); + window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha), window->WindowRounding, 0, 3.0f); + window->DrawList->PopClipRect(); + } +} + +// This is normally called by Render(). You may want to call it directly if you want to avoid calling Render() but the gain will be very minimal. +void ImGui::EndFrame() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized); + + // Don't process EndFrame() multiple times. + if (g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount) + return; + IM_ASSERT(g.WithinFrameScope && "Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()?"); + + CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePre); + + ErrorCheckEndFrameSanityChecks(); + + // Notify Platform/OS when our Input Method Editor cursor has moved (e.g. CJK inputs using Microsoft IME) + ImGuiPlatformImeData* ime_data = &g.PlatformImeData; + if (g.IO.SetPlatformImeDataFn && memcmp(ime_data, &g.PlatformImeDataPrev, sizeof(ImGuiPlatformImeData)) != 0) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] Calling io.SetPlatformImeDataFn(): WantVisible: %d, InputPos (%.2f,%.2f)\n", ime_data->WantVisible, ime_data->InputPos.x, ime_data->InputPos.y); + ImGuiViewport* viewport = GetMainViewport(); +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + if (viewport->PlatformHandleRaw == NULL && g.IO.ImeWindowHandle != NULL) + { + viewport->PlatformHandleRaw = g.IO.ImeWindowHandle; + g.IO.SetPlatformImeDataFn(viewport, ime_data); + viewport->PlatformHandleRaw = NULL; + } + else +#endif + { + g.IO.SetPlatformImeDataFn(viewport, ime_data); + } + } + + // Hide implicit/fallback "Debug" window if it hasn't been used + g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow = false; + if (g.CurrentWindow && !g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed) + g.CurrentWindow->Active = false; + End(); + + // Update navigation: CTRL+Tab, wrap-around requests + NavEndFrame(); + + // Drag and Drop: Elapse payload (if delivered, or if source stops being submitted) + if (g.DragDropActive) + { + bool is_delivered = g.DragDropPayload.Delivery; + bool is_elapsed = (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount + 1 < g.FrameCount) && ((g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload) || !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton)); + if (is_delivered || is_elapsed) + ClearDragDrop(); + } + + // Drag and Drop: Fallback for source tooltip. This is not ideal but better than nothing. + if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropSourceFrameCount < g.FrameCount && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip)) + { + g.DragDropWithinSource = true; + SetTooltip("..."); + g.DragDropWithinSource = false; + } + + // End frame + g.WithinFrameScope = false; + g.FrameCountEnded = g.FrameCount; + + // Initiate moving window + handle left-click and right-click focus + UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame(); + + // Sort the window list so that all child windows are after their parent + // We cannot do that on FocusWindow() because children may not exist yet + g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.resize(0); + g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.reserve(g.Windows.Size); + for (ImGuiWindow* window : g.Windows) + { + if (window->Active && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) // if a child is active its parent will add it + continue; + AddWindowToSortBuffer(&g.WindowsTempSortBuffer, window); + } + + // This usually assert if there is a mismatch between the ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow / ParentWindow values and DC.ChildWindows[] in parents, aka we've done something wrong. + IM_ASSERT(g.Windows.Size == g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.Size); + g.Windows.swap(g.WindowsTempSortBuffer); + g.IO.MetricsActiveWindows = g.WindowsActiveCount; + + // Unlock font atlas + g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false; + + // Clear Input data for next frame + g.IO.AppFocusLost = false; + g.IO.MouseWheel = g.IO.MouseWheelH = 0.0f; + g.IO.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0); + + CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePost); +} + +// Prepare the data for rendering so you can call GetDrawData() +// (As with anything within the ImGui:: namspace this doesn't touch your GPU or graphics API at all: +// it is the role of the ImGui_ImplXXXX_RenderDrawData() function provided by the renderer backend) +void ImGui::Render() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized); + + if (g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount) + EndFrame(); + if (g.FrameCountRendered == g.FrameCount) + return; + g.FrameCountRendered = g.FrameCount; + + g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows = 0; + CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPre); + + // Draw modal/window whitening backgrounds + RenderDimmedBackgrounds(); + + // Add background ImDrawList (for each active viewport) + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + { + InitViewportDrawData(viewport); + if (viewport->BgFgDrawLists[0] != NULL) + AddDrawListToDrawDataEx(&viewport->DrawDataP, viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], GetBackgroundDrawList(viewport)); + } + + // Add ImDrawList to render + ImGuiWindow* windows_to_render_top_most[2]; + windows_to_render_top_most[0] = (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)) ? g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow : NULL; + windows_to_render_top_most[1] = (g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingListWindow : NULL); + for (ImGuiWindow* window : g.Windows) + { + IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6011); // Static Analysis false positive "warning C6011: Dereferencing NULL pointer 'window'" + if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0 && window != windows_to_render_top_most[0] && window != windows_to_render_top_most[1]) + AddRootWindowToDrawData(window); + } + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(windows_to_render_top_most); n++) + if (windows_to_render_top_most[n] && IsWindowActiveAndVisible(windows_to_render_top_most[n])) // NavWindowingTarget is always temporarily displayed as the top-most window + AddRootWindowToDrawData(windows_to_render_top_most[n]); + + // Draw software mouse cursor if requested by io.MouseDrawCursor flag + if (g.IO.MouseDrawCursor && g.MouseCursor != ImGuiMouseCursor_None) + RenderMouseCursor(g.IO.MousePos, g.Style.MouseCursorScale, g.MouseCursor, IM_COL32_WHITE, IM_COL32_BLACK, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 48)); + + // Setup ImDrawData structures for end-user + g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = 0; + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + { + FlattenDrawDataIntoSingleLayer(&viewport->DrawDataBuilder); + + // Add foreground ImDrawList (for each active viewport) + if (viewport->BgFgDrawLists[1] != NULL) + AddDrawListToDrawDataEx(&viewport->DrawDataP, viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], GetForegroundDrawList(viewport)); + + // We call _PopUnusedDrawCmd() last thing, as RenderDimmedBackgrounds() rely on a valid command being there (especially in docking branch). + ImDrawData* draw_data = &viewport->DrawDataP; + IM_ASSERT(draw_data->CmdLists.Size == draw_data->CmdListsCount); + for (ImDrawList* draw_list : draw_data->CmdLists) + draw_list->_PopUnusedDrawCmd(); + + g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices += draw_data->TotalVtxCount; + g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices += draw_data->TotalIdxCount; + } + + CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPost); +} + +// Calculate text size. Text can be multi-line. Optionally ignore text after a ## marker. +// CalcTextSize("") should return ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize) +ImVec2 ImGui::CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_double_hash, float wrap_width) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + const char* text_display_end; + if (hide_text_after_double_hash) + text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end); // Hide anything after a '##' string + else + text_display_end = text_end; + + ImFont* font = g.Font; + const float font_size = g.FontSize; + if (text == text_display_end) + return ImVec2(0.0f, font_size); + ImVec2 text_size = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, wrap_width, text, text_display_end, NULL); + + // Round + // FIXME: This has been here since Dec 2015 (7b0bf230) but down the line we want this out. + // FIXME: Investigate using ceilf or e.g. + // - https://git.musl-libc.org/cgit/musl/tree/src/math/ceilf.c + // - https://embarkstudios.github.io/rust-gpu/api/src/libm/math/ceilf.rs.html + text_size.x = IM_FLOOR(text_size.x + 0.99999f); + + return text_size; +} + +// Find window given position, search front-to-back +// FIXME: Note that we have an inconsequential lag here: OuterRectClipped is updated in Begin(), so windows moved programmatically +// with SetWindowPos() and not SetNextWindowPos() will have that rectangle lagging by a frame at the time FindHoveredWindow() is +// called, aka before the next Begin(). Moving window isn't affected. +static void FindHoveredWindow() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = NULL; + ImGuiWindow* hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window = NULL; + if (g.MovingWindow && !(g.MovingWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs)) + hovered_window = g.MovingWindow; + + ImVec2 padding_regular = g.Style.TouchExtraPadding; + ImVec2 padding_for_resize = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? g.WindowsHoverPadding : padding_regular; + for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--) + { + ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i]; + IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(28182); // [Static Analyzer] Dereferencing NULL pointer. + if (!window->Active || window->Hidden) + continue; + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs) + continue; + + // Using the clipped AABB, a child window will typically be clipped by its parent (not always) + ImRect bb(window->OuterRectClipped); + if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) + bb.Expand(padding_regular); + else + bb.Expand(padding_for_resize); + if (!bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos)) + continue; + + // Support for one rectangular hole in any given window + // FIXME: Consider generalizing hit-testing override (with more generic data, callback, etc.) (#1512) + if (window->HitTestHoleSize.x != 0) + { + ImVec2 hole_pos(window->Pos.x + (float)window->HitTestHoleOffset.x, window->Pos.y + (float)window->HitTestHoleOffset.y); + ImVec2 hole_size((float)window->HitTestHoleSize.x, (float)window->HitTestHoleSize.y); + if (ImRect(hole_pos, hole_pos + hole_size).Contains(g.IO.MousePos)) + continue; + } + + if (hovered_window == NULL) + hovered_window = window; + IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(28182); // [Static Analyzer] Dereferencing NULL pointer. + if (hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window == NULL && (!g.MovingWindow || window->RootWindow != g.MovingWindow->RootWindow)) + hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window = window; + if (hovered_window && hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window) + break; + } + + g.HoveredWindow = hovered_window; + g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window; +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemActive() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.ActiveId) + return g.ActiveId == g.LastItemData.ID; + return false; +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemActivated() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.ActiveId) + if (g.ActiveId == g.LastItemData.ID && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != g.LastItemData.ID) + return true; + return false; +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivated() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated) + return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated) != 0; + return (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == g.LastItemData.ID && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.ActiveId != g.LastItemData.ID); +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return IsItemDeactivated() && (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore || (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore)); +} + +// == GetItemID() == GetFocusID() +bool ImGui::IsItemFocused() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.NavId != g.LastItemData.ID || g.NavId == 0) + return false; + return true; +} + +// Important: this can be useful but it is NOT equivalent to the behavior of e.g.Button()! +// Most widgets have specific reactions based on mouse-up/down state, mouse position etc. +bool ImGui::IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button) +{ + return IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_None); +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen) ? true : false; +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemToggledSelection() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection) ? true : false; +} + +bool ImGui::IsAnyItemHovered() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.HoveredId != 0 || g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0; +} + +bool ImGui::IsAnyItemActive() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.ActiveId != 0; +} + +bool ImGui::IsAnyItemFocused() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight; +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemVisible() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible) != 0; +} + +bool ImGui::IsItemEdited() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited) != 0; +} + +// Allow next item to be overlapped by subsequent items. +// This works by requiring HoveredId to match for two subsequent frames, +// so if a following items overwrite it our interactions will naturally be disabled. +void ImGui::SetNextItemAllowOverlap() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextItemData.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap; +} + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS +// Allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. Both may be activated during the same frame before the later one takes priority. +// FIXME-LEGACY: Use SetNextItemAllowOverlap() *before* your item instead. +void ImGui::SetItemAllowOverlap() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID; + if (g.HoveredId == id) + g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = true; + if (g.ActiveId == id) // Before we made this obsolete, most calls to SetItemAllowOverlap() used to avoid this path by testing g.ActiveId != id. + g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = true; +} +#endif + +// FIXME: It might be undesirable that this will likely disable KeyOwner-aware shortcuts systems. Consider a more fine-tuned version for the two users of this function. +void ImGui::SetActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId != 0); + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = (1 << ImGuiDir_COUNT) - 1; + g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys = true; + NavMoveRequestCancel(); +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetItemID() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.LastItemData.ID; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMin() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.LastItemData.Rect.Min; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMax() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.LastItemData.Rect.Max; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectSize() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.LastItemData.Rect.GetSize(); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow; + + flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow; + flags |= (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove); // Inherit the NoMove flag + + // Size + const ImVec2 content_avail = GetContentRegionAvail(); + ImVec2 size = ImFloor(size_arg); + const int auto_fit_axises = ((size.x == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_X) : 0x00) | ((size.y == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y) : 0x00); + if (size.x <= 0.0f) + size.x = ImMax(content_avail.x + size.x, 4.0f); // Arbitrary minimum child size (0.0f causing too many issues) + if (size.y <= 0.0f) + size.y = ImMax(content_avail.y + size.y, 4.0f); + SetNextWindowSize(size); + + // Build up name. If you need to append to a same child from multiple location in the ID stack, use BeginChild(ImGuiID id) with a stable value. + const char* temp_window_name; + if (name) + ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(&temp_window_name, NULL, "%s/%s_%08X", parent_window->Name, name, id); + else + ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(&temp_window_name, NULL, "%s/%08X", parent_window->Name, id); + + const float backup_border_size = g.Style.ChildBorderSize; + if (!border) + g.Style.ChildBorderSize = 0.0f; + bool ret = Begin(temp_window_name, NULL, flags); + g.Style.ChildBorderSize = backup_border_size; + + ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.CurrentWindow; + child_window->ChildId = id; + child_window->AutoFitChildAxises = (ImS8)auto_fit_axises; + + // Set the cursor to handle case where the user called SetNextWindowPos()+BeginChild() manually. + // While this is not really documented/defined, it seems that the expected thing to do. + if (child_window->BeginCount == 1) + parent_window->DC.CursorPos = child_window->Pos; + + // Process navigation-in immediately so NavInit can run on first frame + // Can enter a child if (A) it has navigatable items or (B) it can be scrolled. + const ImGuiID temp_id_for_activation = ImHashStr("##Child", 0, id); + if (g.ActiveId == temp_id_for_activation) + ClearActiveID(); + if (g.NavActivateId == id && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) && (child_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask != 0 || child_window->DC.NavWindowHasScrollY)) + { + FocusWindow(child_window); + NavInitWindow(child_window, false); + SetActiveID(temp_id_for_activation, child_window); // Steal ActiveId with another arbitrary id so that key-press won't activate child item + g.ActiveIdSource = g.NavInputSource; + } + return ret; +} + +bool ImGui::BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + return BeginChildEx(str_id, window->GetID(str_id), size_arg, border, extra_flags); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags) +{ + IM_ASSERT(id != 0); + return BeginChildEx(NULL, id, size_arg, border, extra_flags); +} + +void ImGui::EndChild() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + IM_ASSERT(g.WithinEndChild == false); + IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow); // Mismatched BeginChild()/EndChild() calls + + g.WithinEndChild = true; + if (window->BeginCount > 1) + { + End(); + } + else + { + ImVec2 sz = window->Size; + if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_X)) // Arbitrary minimum zero-ish child size of 4.0f causes less trouble than a 0.0f + sz.x = ImMax(4.0f, sz.x); + if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y)) + sz.y = ImMax(4.0f, sz.y); + End(); + + ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImRect bb(parent_window->DC.CursorPos, parent_window->DC.CursorPos + sz); + ItemSize(sz); + if ((window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask != 0 || window->DC.NavWindowHasScrollY) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)) + { + ItemAdd(bb, window->ChildId); + RenderNavHighlight(bb, window->ChildId); + + // When browsing a window that has no activable items (scroll only) we keep a highlight on the child (pass g.NavId to trick into always displaying) + if (window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask == 0 && window == g.NavWindow) + RenderNavHighlight(ImRect(bb.Min - ImVec2(2, 2), bb.Max + ImVec2(2, 2)), g.NavId, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin); + } + else + { + // Not navigable into + ItemAdd(bb, 0); + + // But when flattened we directly reach items, adjust active layer mask accordingly + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) + parent_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext |= window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext; + } + if (g.HoveredWindow == window) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow; + } + g.WithinEndChild = false; + g.LogLinePosY = -FLT_MAX; // To enforce a carriage return +} + +// Helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame. +bool ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, style.FramePadding); + bool ret = BeginChild(id, size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | extra_flags); + PopStyleVar(3); + PopStyleColor(); + return ret; +} + +void ImGui::EndChildFrame() +{ + EndChild(); +} + +static void SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiCond flags, bool enabled) +{ + window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & ~flags); + window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & ~flags); + window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & ~flags); +} + +ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (ImGuiWindow*)g.WindowsById.GetVoidPtr(id); +} + +ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByName(const char* name) +{ + ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(name); + return FindWindowByID(id); +} + +static void ApplyWindowSettings(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowSettings* settings) +{ + window->Pos = ImFloor(ImVec2(settings->Pos.x, settings->Pos.y)); + if (settings->Size.x > 0 && settings->Size.y > 0) + window->Size = window->SizeFull = ImFloor(ImVec2(settings->Size.x, settings->Size.y)); + window->Collapsed = settings->Collapsed; +} + +static void UpdateWindowInFocusOrderList(ImGuiWindow* window, bool just_created, ImGuiWindowFlags new_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + const bool new_is_explicit_child = (new_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0 && ((new_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) == 0 || (new_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0); + const bool child_flag_changed = new_is_explicit_child != window->IsExplicitChild; + if ((just_created || child_flag_changed) && !new_is_explicit_child) + { + IM_ASSERT(!g.WindowsFocusOrder.contains(window)); + g.WindowsFocusOrder.push_back(window); + window->FocusOrder = (short)(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1); + } + else if (!just_created && child_flag_changed && new_is_explicit_child) + { + IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[window->FocusOrder] == window); + for (int n = window->FocusOrder + 1; n < g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size; n++) + g.WindowsFocusOrder[n]->FocusOrder--; + g.WindowsFocusOrder.erase(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Data + window->FocusOrder); + window->FocusOrder = -1; + } + window->IsExplicitChild = new_is_explicit_child; +} + +static void InitOrLoadWindowSettings(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowSettings* settings) +{ + // Initial window state with e.g. default/arbitrary window position + // Use SetNextWindowPos() with the appropriate condition flag to change the initial position of a window. + const ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport(); + window->Pos = main_viewport->Pos + ImVec2(60, 60); + window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags = window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags = window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = ImGuiCond_Always | ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing; + + if (settings != NULL) + { + SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, false); + ApplyWindowSettings(window, settings); + } + window->DC.CursorStartPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.IdealMaxPos = window->Pos; // So first call to CalcWindowContentSizes() doesn't return crazy values + + if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) != 0) + { + window->AutoFitFramesX = window->AutoFitFramesY = 2; + window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false; + } + else + { + if (window->Size.x <= 0.0f) + window->AutoFitFramesX = 2; + if (window->Size.y <= 0.0f) + window->AutoFitFramesY = 2; + window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) || (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0); + } +} + +static ImGuiWindow* CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImGuiWindowFlags flags) +{ + // Create window the first time + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("CreateNewWindow '%s', flags = 0x%08X\n", name, flags); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = IM_NEW(ImGuiWindow)(&g, name); + window->Flags = flags; + g.WindowsById.SetVoidPtr(window->ID, window); + + ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = NULL; + if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)) + if ((settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettingsByWindow(window)) != 0) + window->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsWindows.offset_from_ptr(settings); + + InitOrLoadWindowSettings(window, settings); + + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus) + g.Windows.push_front(window); // Quite slow but rare and only once + else + g.Windows.push_back(window); + + return window; +} + +static ImVec2 CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_desired) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImVec2 new_size = size_desired; + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint) + { + // Using -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size. + ImRect cr = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect; + new_size.x = (cr.Min.x >= 0 && cr.Max.x >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.x, cr.Min.x, cr.Max.x) : window->SizeFull.x; + new_size.y = (cr.Min.y >= 0 && cr.Max.y >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.y, cr.Min.y, cr.Max.y) : window->SizeFull.y; + if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback) + { + ImGunSizeCallbackData data; + data.UserData = g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData; + data.Pos = window->Pos; + data.CurrentSize = window->SizeFull; + data.DesiredSize = new_size; + g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback(&data); + new_size = data.DesiredSize; + } + new_size.x = IM_FLOOR(new_size.x); + new_size.y = IM_FLOOR(new_size.y); + } + + // Minimum size + if (!(window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))) + { + ImGuiWindow* window_for_height = window; + new_size = ImMax(new_size, g.Style.WindowMinSize); + const float minimum_height = window_for_height->TitleBarHeight() + window_for_height->MenuBarHeight() + ImMax(0.0f, g.Style.WindowRounding - 1.0f); + new_size.y = ImMax(new_size.y, minimum_height); // Reduce artifacts with very small windows + } + return new_size; +} + +static void CalcWindowContentSizes(ImGuiWindow* window, ImVec2* content_size_current, ImVec2* content_size_ideal) +{ + bool preserve_old_content_sizes = false; + if (window->Collapsed && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0) + preserve_old_content_sizes = true; + else if (window->Hidden && window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems == 0 && window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0) + preserve_old_content_sizes = true; + if (preserve_old_content_sizes) + { + *content_size_current = window->ContentSize; + *content_size_ideal = window->ContentSizeIdeal; + return; + } + + content_size_current->x = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : IM_FLOOR(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x - window->DC.CursorStartPos.x); + content_size_current->y = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : IM_FLOOR(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y - window->DC.CursorStartPos.y); + content_size_ideal->x = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : IM_FLOOR(ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x) - window->DC.CursorStartPos.x); + content_size_ideal->y = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : IM_FLOOR(ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.IdealMaxPos.y) - window->DC.CursorStartPos.y); +} + +static ImVec2 CalcWindowAutoFitSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_contents) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const float decoration_w_without_scrollbars = window->DecoOuterSizeX1 + window->DecoOuterSizeX2 - window->ScrollbarSizes.x; + const float decoration_h_without_scrollbars = window->DecoOuterSizeY1 + window->DecoOuterSizeY2 - window->ScrollbarSizes.y; + ImVec2 size_pad = window->WindowPadding * 2.0f; + ImVec2 size_desired = size_contents + size_pad + ImVec2(decoration_w_without_scrollbars, decoration_h_without_scrollbars); + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) + { + // Tooltip always resize + return size_desired; + } + else + { + // Maximum window size is determined by the viewport size or monitor size + const bool is_popup = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0; + const bool is_menu = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0; + ImVec2 size_min = style.WindowMinSize; + if (is_popup || is_menu) // Popups and menus bypass style.WindowMinSize by default, but we give then a non-zero minimum size to facilitate understanding problematic cases (e.g. empty popups) + size_min = ImMin(size_min, ImVec2(4.0f, 4.0f)); + + ImVec2 avail_size = ImGui::GetMainViewport()->WorkSize; + ImVec2 size_auto_fit = ImClamp(size_desired, size_min, ImMax(size_min, avail_size - style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding * 2.0f)); + + // When the window cannot fit all contents (either because of constraints, either because screen is too small), + // we are growing the size on the other axis to compensate for expected scrollbar. FIXME: Might turn bigger than ViewportSize-WindowPadding. + ImVec2 size_auto_fit_after_constraint = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit); + bool will_have_scrollbar_x = (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.x - size_pad.x - decoration_w_without_scrollbars < size_contents.x && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar)) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar); + bool will_have_scrollbar_y = (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.y - size_pad.y - decoration_h_without_scrollbars < size_contents.y && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar)) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar); + if (will_have_scrollbar_x) + size_auto_fit.y += style.ScrollbarSize; + if (will_have_scrollbar_y) + size_auto_fit.x += style.ScrollbarSize; + return size_auto_fit; + } +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::CalcWindowNextAutoFitSize(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImVec2 size_contents_current; + ImVec2 size_contents_ideal; + CalcWindowContentSizes(window, &size_contents_current, &size_contents_ideal); + ImVec2 size_auto_fit = CalcWindowAutoFitSize(window, size_contents_ideal); + ImVec2 size_final = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit); + return size_final; +} + +static ImGuiCol GetWindowBgColorIdx(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) + return ImGuiCol_PopupBg; + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + return ImGuiCol_ChildBg; + return ImGuiCol_WindowBg; +} + +static void CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& corner_target, const ImVec2& corner_norm, ImVec2* out_pos, ImVec2* out_size) +{ + ImVec2 pos_min = ImLerp(corner_target, window->Pos, corner_norm); // Expected window upper-left + ImVec2 pos_max = ImLerp(window->Pos + window->Size, corner_target, corner_norm); // Expected window lower-right + ImVec2 size_expected = pos_max - pos_min; + ImVec2 size_constrained = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_expected); + *out_pos = pos_min; + if (corner_norm.x == 0.0f) + out_pos->x -= (size_constrained.x - size_expected.x); + if (corner_norm.y == 0.0f) + out_pos->y -= (size_constrained.y - size_expected.y); + *out_size = size_constrained; +} + +// Data for resizing from corner +struct ImGuiResizeGripDef +{ + ImVec2 CornerPosN; + ImVec2 InnerDir; + int AngleMin12, AngleMax12; +}; +static const ImGuiResizeGripDef resize_grip_def[4] = +{ + { ImVec2(1, 1), ImVec2(-1, -1), 0, 3 }, // Lower-right + { ImVec2(0, 1), ImVec2(+1, -1), 3, 6 }, // Lower-left + { ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(+1, +1), 6, 9 }, // Upper-left (Unused) + { ImVec2(1, 0), ImVec2(-1, +1), 9, 12 } // Upper-right (Unused) +}; + +// Data for resizing from borders +struct ImGuiResizeBorderDef +{ + ImVec2 InnerDir; + ImVec2 SegmentN1, SegmentN2; + float OuterAngle; +}; +static const ImGuiResizeBorderDef resize_border_def[4] = +{ + { ImVec2(+1, 0), ImVec2(0, 1), ImVec2(0, 0), IM_PI * 1.00f }, // Left + { ImVec2(-1, 0), ImVec2(1, 0), ImVec2(1, 1), IM_PI * 0.00f }, // Right + { ImVec2(0, +1), ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(1, 0), IM_PI * 1.50f }, // Up + { ImVec2(0, -1), ImVec2(1, 1), ImVec2(0, 1), IM_PI * 0.50f } // Down +}; + +static ImRect GetResizeBorderRect(ImGuiWindow* window, int border_n, float perp_padding, float thickness) +{ + ImRect rect = window->Rect(); + if (thickness == 0.0f) + rect.Max -= ImVec2(1, 1); + if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Left) { return ImRect(rect.Min.x - thickness, rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Min.x + thickness, rect.Max.y - perp_padding); } + if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Right) { return ImRect(rect.Max.x - thickness, rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Max.x + thickness, rect.Max.y - perp_padding); } + if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Up) { return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Min.y - thickness, rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Min.y + thickness); } + if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Down) { return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Max.y - thickness, rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Max.y + thickness); } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return ImRect(); +} + +// 0..3: corners (Lower-right, Lower-left, Unused, Unused) +ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowResizeCornerID(ImGuiWindow* window, int n) +{ + IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < 4); + ImGuiID id = window->ID; + id = ImHashStr("#RESIZE", 0, id); + id = ImHashData(&n, sizeof(int), id); + return id; +} + +// Borders (Left, Right, Up, Down) +ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowResizeBorderID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDir dir) +{ + IM_ASSERT(dir >= 0 && dir < 4); + int n = (int)dir + 4; + ImGuiID id = window->ID; + id = ImHashStr("#RESIZE", 0, id); + id = ImHashData(&n, sizeof(int), id); + return id; +} + +// Handle resize for: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad +// Return true when using auto-fit (double-click on resize grip) +static bool ImGui::UpdateWindowManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], const ImRect& visibility_rect) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags; + + if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) || window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0) + return false; + if (window->WasActive == false) // Early out to avoid running this code for e.g. a hidden implicit/fallback Debug window. + return false; + + bool ret_auto_fit = false; + const int resize_border_count = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? 4 : 0; + const float grip_draw_size = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f)); + const float grip_hover_inner_size = IM_FLOOR(grip_draw_size * 0.75f); + const float grip_hover_outer_size = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING : 0.0f; + + ImRect clamp_rect = visibility_rect; + const bool window_move_from_title_bar = g.IO.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar); + if (window_move_from_title_bar) + clamp_rect.Min.y -= window->TitleBarHeight(); + + ImVec2 pos_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + ImVec2 size_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + + // Resize grips and borders are on layer 1 + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu; + + // Manual resize grips + PushID("#RESIZE"); + for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++) + { + const ImGuiResizeGripDef& def = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n]; + const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, def.CornerPosN); + + // Using the FlattenChilds button flag we make the resize button accessible even if we are hovering over a child window + bool hovered, held; + ImRect resize_rect(corner - def.InnerDir * grip_hover_outer_size, corner + def.InnerDir * grip_hover_inner_size); + if (resize_rect.Min.x > resize_rect.Max.x) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.x, resize_rect.Max.x); + if (resize_rect.Min.y > resize_rect.Max.y) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.y, resize_rect.Max.y); + ImGuiID resize_grip_id = window->GetID(resize_grip_n); // == GetWindowResizeCornerID() + ItemAdd(resize_rect, resize_grip_id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav); + ButtonBehavior(resize_rect, resize_grip_id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus); + //GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(resize_rect.Min, resize_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + if (hovered || held) + g.MouseCursor = (resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE; + + if (held && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2 && resize_grip_n == 0) + { + // Manual auto-fit when double-clicking + size_target = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit); + ret_auto_fit = true; + ClearActiveID(); + } + else if (held) + { + // Resize from any of the four corners + // We don't use an incremental MouseDelta but rather compute an absolute target size based on mouse position + ImVec2 clamp_min = ImVec2(def.CornerPosN.x == 1.0f ? clamp_rect.Min.x : -FLT_MAX, (def.CornerPosN.y == 1.0f || (def.CornerPosN.y == 0.0f && window_move_from_title_bar)) ? clamp_rect.Min.y : -FLT_MAX); + ImVec2 clamp_max = ImVec2(def.CornerPosN.x == 0.0f ? clamp_rect.Max.x : +FLT_MAX, def.CornerPosN.y == 0.0f ? clamp_rect.Max.y : +FLT_MAX); + ImVec2 corner_target = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset + ImLerp(def.InnerDir * grip_hover_outer_size, def.InnerDir * -grip_hover_inner_size, def.CornerPosN); // Corner of the window corresponding to our corner grip + corner_target = ImClamp(corner_target, clamp_min, clamp_max); + CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, corner_target, def.CornerPosN, &pos_target, &size_target); + } + + // Only lower-left grip is visible before hovering/activating + if (resize_grip_n == 0 || held || hovered) + resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n] = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered : ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip); + } + for (int border_n = 0; border_n < resize_border_count; border_n++) + { + const ImGuiResizeBorderDef& def = resize_border_def[border_n]; + const ImGuiAxis axis = (border_n == ImGuiDir_Left || border_n == ImGuiDir_Right) ? ImGuiAxis_X : ImGuiAxis_Y; + + bool hovered, held; + ImRect border_rect = GetResizeBorderRect(window, border_n, grip_hover_inner_size, WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING); + ImGuiID border_id = window->GetID(border_n + 4); // == GetWindowResizeBorderID() + ItemAdd(border_rect, border_id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav); + ButtonBehavior(border_rect, border_id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus); + //GetForegroundDrawLists(window)->AddRect(border_rect.Min, border_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + if ((hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer > WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_FEEDBACK_TIMER) || held) + { + g.MouseCursor = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS; + if (held) + *border_held = border_n; + } + if (held) + { + ImVec2 clamp_min(border_n == ImGuiDir_Right ? clamp_rect.Min.x : -FLT_MAX, border_n == ImGuiDir_Down || (border_n == ImGuiDir_Up && window_move_from_title_bar) ? clamp_rect.Min.y : -FLT_MAX); + ImVec2 clamp_max(border_n == ImGuiDir_Left ? clamp_rect.Max.x : +FLT_MAX, border_n == ImGuiDir_Up ? clamp_rect.Max.y : +FLT_MAX); + ImVec2 border_target = window->Pos; + border_target[axis] = g.IO.MousePos[axis] - g.ActiveIdClickOffset[axis] + WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING; + border_target = ImClamp(border_target, clamp_min, clamp_max); + CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, border_target, ImMin(def.SegmentN1, def.SegmentN2), &pos_target, &size_target); + } + } + PopID(); + + // Restore nav layer + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + + // Navigation resize (keyboard/gamepad) + // FIXME: This cannot be moved to NavUpdateWindowing() because CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint() need to callback into user. + // Not even sure the callback works here. + if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow == window) + { + ImVec2 nav_resize_dir; + if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard && g.IO.KeyShift) + nav_resize_dir = GetKeyMagnitude2d(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiKey_RightArrow, ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiKey_DownArrow); + if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + nav_resize_dir = GetKeyMagnitude2d(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown); + if (nav_resize_dir.x != 0.0f || nav_resize_dir.y != 0.0f) + { + const float NAV_RESIZE_SPEED = 600.0f; + const float resize_step = NAV_RESIZE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y); + g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize += nav_resize_dir * resize_step; + g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize = ImMax(g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize, clamp_rect.Min - window->Pos - window->Size); // We need Pos+Size >= clmap_rect.Min, so Size >= clmap_rect.Min - Pos, so size_delta >= clmap_rect.Min - window->Pos - window->Size + g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false; + g.NavDisableMouseHover = true; + resize_grip_col[0] = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive); + ImVec2 accum_floored = ImFloor(g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize); + if (accum_floored.x != 0.0f || accum_floored.y != 0.0f) + { + // FIXME-NAV: Should store and accumulate into a separate size buffer to handle sizing constraints properly, right now a constraint will make us stuck. + size_target = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull + accum_floored); + g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize -= accum_floored; + } + } + } + + // Apply back modified position/size to window + if (size_target.x != FLT_MAX) + { + window->SizeFull = size_target; + MarkIniSettingsDirty(window); + } + if (pos_target.x != FLT_MAX) + { + window->Pos = ImFloor(pos_target); + MarkIniSettingsDirty(window); + } + + window->Size = window->SizeFull; + return ret_auto_fit; +} + +static inline void ClampWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& visibility_rect) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImVec2 size_for_clamping = window->Size; + if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) + size_for_clamping.y = window->TitleBarHeight(); + window->Pos = ImClamp(window->Pos, visibility_rect.Min - size_for_clamping, visibility_rect.Max); +} + +static void ImGui::RenderWindowOuterBorders(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + float rounding = window->WindowRounding; + float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize; + if (border_size > 0.0f && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground)) + window->DrawList->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, 0, border_size); + + int border_held = window->ResizeBorderHeld; + if (border_held != -1) + { + const ImGuiResizeBorderDef& def = resize_border_def[border_held]; + ImRect border_r = GetResizeBorderRect(window, border_held, rounding, 0.0f); + window->DrawList->PathArcTo(ImLerp(border_r.Min, border_r.Max, def.SegmentN1) + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) + def.InnerDir * rounding, rounding, def.OuterAngle - IM_PI * 0.25f, def.OuterAngle); + window->DrawList->PathArcTo(ImLerp(border_r.Min, border_r.Max, def.SegmentN2) + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) + def.InnerDir * rounding, rounding, def.OuterAngle, def.OuterAngle + IM_PI * 0.25f); + window->DrawList->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive), 0, ImMax(2.0f, border_size)); // Thicker than usual + } + if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0 && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) + { + float y = window->Pos.y + window->TitleBarHeight() - 1; + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(window->Pos.x + border_size, y), ImVec2(window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - border_size, y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), g.Style.FrameBorderSize); + } +} + +// Draw background and borders +// Draw and handle scrollbars +void ImGui::RenderWindowDecorations(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, bool title_bar_is_highlight, bool handle_borders_and_resize_grips, int resize_grip_count, const ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], float resize_grip_draw_size) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags; + + // Ensure that ScrollBar doesn't read last frame's SkipItems + IM_ASSERT(window->BeginCount == 0); + window->SkipItems = false; + + // Draw window + handle manual resize + // As we highlight the title bar when want_focus is set, multiple reappearing windows will have their title bar highlighted on their reappearing frame. + const float window_rounding = window->WindowRounding; + const float window_border_size = window->WindowBorderSize; + if (window->Collapsed) + { + // Title bar only + const float backup_border_size = style.FrameBorderSize; + g.Style.FrameBorderSize = window->WindowBorderSize; + ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32((title_bar_is_highlight && !g.NavDisableHighlight) ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed); + RenderFrame(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, true, window_rounding); + g.Style.FrameBorderSize = backup_border_size; + } + else + { + // Window background + if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground)) + { + ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(GetWindowBgColorIdx(window)); + bool override_alpha = false; + float alpha = 1.0f; + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasBgAlpha) + { + alpha = g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal; + override_alpha = true; + } + if (override_alpha) + bg_col = (bg_col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(window->Pos + ImVec2(0, window->TitleBarHeight()), window->Pos + window->Size, bg_col, window_rounding, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom); + } + + // Draw window shadow + if (style.WindowShadowSize > 0.0f && (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))) + if (style.Colors[ImGuiCol_WindowShadow].w > 0.0f) + RenderWindowShadow(window); + + // Title bar + if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) + { + ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32(title_bar_is_highlight ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, window_rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop); + } + + // Menu bar + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) + { + ImRect menu_bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect(); + menu_bar_rect.ClipWith(window->Rect()); // Soft clipping, in particular child window don't have minimum size covering the menu bar so this is useful for them. + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(menu_bar_rect.Min + ImVec2(window_border_size, 0), menu_bar_rect.Max - ImVec2(window_border_size, 0), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg), (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? window_rounding : 0.0f, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop); + if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f && menu_bar_rect.Max.y < window->Pos.y + window->Size.y) + window->DrawList->AddLine(menu_bar_rect.GetBL(), menu_bar_rect.GetBR(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), style.FrameBorderSize); + } + + // Scrollbars + if (window->ScrollbarX) + Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis_X); + if (window->ScrollbarY) + Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis_Y); + + // Render resize grips (after their input handling so we don't have a frame of latency) + if (handle_borders_and_resize_grips && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize)) + { + for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++) + { + const ImU32 col = resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n]; + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + continue; + const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n]; + const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPosN); + window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(window_border_size, resize_grip_draw_size) : ImVec2(resize_grip_draw_size, window_border_size))); + window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(resize_grip_draw_size, window_border_size) : ImVec2(window_border_size, resize_grip_draw_size))); + window->DrawList->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(corner.x + grip.InnerDir.x * (window_rounding + window_border_size), corner.y + grip.InnerDir.y * (window_rounding + window_border_size)), window_rounding, grip.AngleMin12, grip.AngleMax12); + window->DrawList->PathFillConvex(col); + } + } + + // Borders + if (handle_borders_and_resize_grips) + RenderWindowOuterBorders(window); + } +} + +void ImGui::RenderWindowShadow(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + float shadow_size = style.WindowShadowSize; + ImU32 shadow_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_WindowShadow); + ImVec2 shadow_offset = ImVec2(ImCos(style.WindowShadowOffsetAngle), ImSin(style.WindowShadowOffsetAngle)) * style.WindowShadowOffsetDist; + window->DrawList->AddShadowRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, shadow_col, shadow_size, shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground, window->WindowRounding); +} + +// Render title text, collapse button, close button +void ImGui::RenderWindowTitleBarContents(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, const char* name, bool* p_open) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags; + + const bool has_close_button = (p_open != NULL); + const bool has_collapse_button = !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse) && (style.WindowMenuButtonPosition != ImGuiDir_None); + + // Close & Collapse button are on the Menu NavLayer and don't default focus (unless there's nothing else on that layer) + // FIXME-NAV: Might want (or not?) to set the equivalent of ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus so that mouse clicks on standard title bar items don't necessarily set nav/keyboard ref? + const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = g.CurrentItemFlags; + g.CurrentItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus; + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu; + + // Layout buttons + // FIXME: Would be nice to generalize the subtleties expressed here into reusable code. + float pad_l = style.FramePadding.x; + float pad_r = style.FramePadding.x; + float button_sz = g.FontSize; + ImVec2 close_button_pos; + ImVec2 collapse_button_pos; + if (has_close_button) + { + close_button_pos = ImVec2(title_bar_rect.Max.x - pad_r - button_sz, title_bar_rect.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y); + pad_r += button_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + } + if (has_collapse_button && style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Right) + { + collapse_button_pos = ImVec2(title_bar_rect.Max.x - pad_r - button_sz, title_bar_rect.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y); + pad_r += button_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + } + if (has_collapse_button && style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left) + { + collapse_button_pos = ImVec2(title_bar_rect.Min.x + pad_l, title_bar_rect.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y); + pad_l += button_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + } + + // Collapse button (submitting first so it gets priority when choosing a navigation init fallback) + if (has_collapse_button) + if (CollapseButton(window->GetID("#COLLAPSE"), collapse_button_pos)) + window->WantCollapseToggle = true; // Defer actual collapsing to next frame as we are too far in the Begin() function + + // Close button + if (has_close_button) + if (CloseButton(window->GetID("#CLOSE"), close_button_pos)) + *p_open = false; + + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + g.CurrentItemFlags = item_flags_backup; + + // Title bar text (with: horizontal alignment, avoiding collapse/close button, optional "unsaved document" marker) + // FIXME: Refactor text alignment facilities along with RenderText helpers, this is WAY too much messy code.. + const float marker_size_x = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument) ? button_sz * 0.80f : 0.0f; + const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(name, NULL, true) + ImVec2(marker_size_x, 0.0f); + + // As a nice touch we try to ensure that centered title text doesn't get affected by visibility of Close/Collapse button, + // while uncentered title text will still reach edges correctly. + if (pad_l > style.FramePadding.x) + pad_l += g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + if (pad_r > style.FramePadding.x) + pad_r += g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + if (style.WindowTitleAlign.x > 0.0f && style.WindowTitleAlign.x < 1.0f) + { + float centerness = ImSaturate(1.0f - ImFabs(style.WindowTitleAlign.x - 0.5f) * 2.0f); // 0.0f on either edges, 1.0f on center + float pad_extend = ImMin(ImMax(pad_l, pad_r), title_bar_rect.GetWidth() - pad_l - pad_r - text_size.x); + pad_l = ImMax(pad_l, pad_extend * centerness); + pad_r = ImMax(pad_r, pad_extend * centerness); + } + + ImRect layout_r(title_bar_rect.Min.x + pad_l, title_bar_rect.Min.y, title_bar_rect.Max.x - pad_r, title_bar_rect.Max.y); + ImRect clip_r(layout_r.Min.x, layout_r.Min.y, ImMin(layout_r.Max.x + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, title_bar_rect.Max.x), layout_r.Max.y); + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument) + { + ImVec2 marker_pos; + marker_pos.x = ImClamp(layout_r.Min.x + (layout_r.GetWidth() - text_size.x) * style.WindowTitleAlign.x + text_size.x, layout_r.Min.x, layout_r.Max.x); + marker_pos.y = (layout_r.Min.y + layout_r.Max.y) * 0.5f; + if (marker_pos.x > layout_r.Min.x) + { + RenderBullet(window->DrawList, marker_pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text)); + clip_r.Max.x = ImMin(clip_r.Max.x, marker_pos.x - (int)(marker_size_x * 0.5f)); + } + } + //if (g.IO.KeyShift) window->DrawList->AddRect(layout_r.Min, layout_r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 128, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG] + //if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) window->DrawList->AddRect(clip_r.Min, clip_r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 128, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG] + RenderTextClipped(layout_r.Min, layout_r.Max, name, NULL, &text_size, style.WindowTitleAlign, &clip_r); +} + +void ImGui::UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window) +{ + window->ParentWindow = parent_window; + window->RootWindow = window->RootWindowPopupTree = window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = window->RootWindowForNav = window; + if (parent_window && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) + window->RootWindow = parent_window->RootWindow; + if (parent_window && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) + window->RootWindowPopupTree = parent_window->RootWindowPopupTree; + if (parent_window && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))) + window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = parent_window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight; + while (window->RootWindowForNav->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) + { + IM_ASSERT(window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow != NULL); + window->RootWindowForNav = window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow; + } +} + +// When a modal popup is open, newly created windows that want focus (i.e. are not popups and do not specify ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing) +// should be positioned behind that modal window, unless the window was created inside the modal begin-stack. +// In case of multiple stacked modals newly created window honors begin stack order and does not go below its own modal parent. +// - WindowA // FindBlockingModal() returns Modal1 +// - WindowB // .. returns Modal1 +// - Modal1 // .. returns Modal2 +// - WindowC // .. returns Modal2 +// - WindowD // .. returns Modal2 +// - Modal2 // .. returns Modal2 +// - WindowE // .. returns NULL +// Notes: +// - FindBlockingModal(NULL) == NULL is generally equivalent to GetTopMostPopupModal() == NULL. +// Only difference is here we check for ->Active/WasActive but it may be unecessary. +ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindBlockingModal(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= 0) + return NULL; + + // Find a modal that has common parent with specified window. Specified window should be positioned behind that modal. + for (ImGuiPopupData& popup_data : g.OpenPopupStack) + { + ImGuiWindow* popup_window = popup_data.Window; + if (popup_window == NULL || !(popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) + continue; + if (!popup_window->Active && !popup_window->WasActive) // Check WasActive, because this code may run before popup renders on current frame, also check Active to handle newly created windows. + continue; + if (window == NULL) // FindBlockingModal(NULL) test for if FocusWindow(NULL) is naturally possible via a mouse click. + return popup_window; + if (IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(window, popup_window)) // Window may be over modal + continue; + return popup_window; // Place window right below first block modal + } + return NULL; +} + +// Push a new Dear ImGui window to add widgets to. +// - A default window called "Debug" is automatically stacked at the beginning of every frame so you can use widgets without explicitly calling a Begin/End pair. +// - Begin/End can be called multiple times during the frame with the same window name to append content. +// - The window name is used as a unique identifier to preserve window information across frames (and save rudimentary information to the .ini file). +// You can use the "##" or "###" markers to use the same label with different id, or same id with different label. See documentation at the top of this file. +// - Return false when window is collapsed, so you can early out in your code. You always need to call ImGui::End() even if false is returned. +// - Passing 'bool* p_open' displays a Close button on the upper-right corner of the window, the pointed value will be set to false when the button is pressed. +bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + IM_ASSERT(name != NULL && name[0] != '\0'); // Window name required + IM_ASSERT(g.WithinFrameScope); // Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame() + IM_ASSERT(g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount); // Called ImGui::Render() or ImGui::EndFrame() and haven't called ImGui::NewFrame() again yet + + // Find or create + ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name); + const bool window_just_created = (window == NULL); + if (window_just_created) + window = CreateNewWindow(name, flags); + + // Automatically disable manual moving/resizing when NoInputs is set + if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs) == ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs) + flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize; + + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) + IM_ASSERT(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow); + + const int current_frame = g.FrameCount; + const bool first_begin_of_the_frame = (window->LastFrameActive != current_frame); + window->IsFallbackWindow = (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 0 && g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow); + + // Update the Appearing flag + bool window_just_activated_by_user = (window->LastFrameActive < current_frame - 1); // Not using !WasActive because the implicit "Debug" window would always toggle off->on + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) + { + ImGuiPopupData& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size]; + window_just_activated_by_user |= (window->PopupId != popup_ref.PopupId); // We recycle popups so treat window as activated if popup id changed + window_just_activated_by_user |= (window != popup_ref.Window); + } + window->Appearing = window_just_activated_by_user; + if (window->Appearing) + SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, true); + + // Update Flags, LastFrameActive, BeginOrderXXX fields + if (first_begin_of_the_frame) + { + UpdateWindowInFocusOrderList(window, window_just_created, flags); + window->Flags = (ImGuiWindowFlags)flags; + window->LastFrameActive = current_frame; + window->LastTimeActive = (float)g.Time; + window->BeginOrderWithinParent = 0; + window->BeginOrderWithinContext = (short)(g.WindowsActiveCount++); + } + else + { + flags = window->Flags; + } + + // Parent window is latched only on the first call to Begin() of the frame, so further append-calls can be done from a different window stack + ImGuiWindow* parent_window_in_stack = g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back().Window; + ImGuiWindow* parent_window = first_begin_of_the_frame ? ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) ? parent_window_in_stack : NULL) : window->ParentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(parent_window != NULL || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)); + + // We allow window memory to be compacted so recreate the base stack when needed. + if (window->IDStack.Size == 0) + window->IDStack.push_back(window->ID); + + // Add to stack + // We intentionally set g.CurrentWindow to NULL to prevent usage until when the viewport is set, then will call SetCurrentWindow() + g.CurrentWindow = window; + ImGuiWindowStackData window_stack_data; + window_stack_data.Window = window; + window_stack_data.ParentLastItemDataBackup = g.LastItemData; + window_stack_data.StackSizesOnBegin.SetToContextState(&g); + g.CurrentWindowStack.push_back(window_stack_data); + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) + g.BeginMenuCount++; + + // Update ->RootWindow and others pointers (before any possible call to FocusWindow) + if (first_begin_of_the_frame) + { + UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, flags, parent_window); + window->ParentWindowInBeginStack = parent_window_in_stack; + } + + // Add to focus scope stack + PushFocusScope(window->ID); + window->NavRootFocusScopeId = g.CurrentFocusScopeId; + g.CurrentWindow = NULL; + + // Add to popup stack + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) + { + ImGuiPopupData& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size]; + popup_ref.Window = window; + popup_ref.ParentNavLayer = parent_window_in_stack->DC.NavLayerCurrent; + g.BeginPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref); + window->PopupId = popup_ref.PopupId; + } + + // Process SetNextWindow***() calls + // (FIXME: Consider splitting the HasXXX flags into X/Y components + bool window_pos_set_by_api = false; + bool window_size_x_set_by_api = false, window_size_y_set_by_api = false; + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos) + { + window_pos_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.PosCond) != 0; + if (window_pos_set_by_api && ImLengthSqr(g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal) > 0.00001f) + { + // May be processed on the next frame if this is our first frame and we are measuring size + // FIXME: Look into removing the branch so everything can go through this same code path for consistency. + window->SetWindowPosVal = g.NextWindowData.PosVal; + window->SetWindowPosPivot = g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal; + window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing); + } + else + { + SetWindowPos(window, g.NextWindowData.PosVal, g.NextWindowData.PosCond); + } + } + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize) + { + window_size_x_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.x > 0.0f); + window_size_y_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.y > 0.0f); + SetWindowSize(window, g.NextWindowData.SizeVal, g.NextWindowData.SizeCond); + } + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasScroll) + { + if (g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.x >= 0.0f) + { + window->ScrollTarget.x = g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.x; + window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f; + } + if (g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.y >= 0.0f) + { + window->ScrollTarget.y = g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.y; + window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f; + } + } + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasContentSize) + window->ContentSizeExplicit = g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal; + else if (first_begin_of_the_frame) + window->ContentSizeExplicit = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasCollapsed) + SetWindowCollapsed(window, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond); + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasFocus) + FocusWindow(window); + if (window->Appearing) + SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, false); + + // When reusing window again multiple times a frame, just append content (don't need to setup again) + if (first_begin_of_the_frame) + { + // Initialize + const bool window_is_child_tooltip = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // FIXME-WIP: Undocumented behavior of Child+Tooltip for pinned tooltip (#1345) + const bool window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize = (window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0); + window->Active = true; + window->HasCloseButton = (p_open != NULL); + window->ClipRect = ImVec4(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX); + window->IDStack.resize(1); + window->DrawList->_ResetForNewFrame(); + window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = -1; + + // Restore buffer capacity when woken from a compacted state, to avoid + if (window->MemoryCompacted) + GcAwakeTransientWindowBuffers(window); + + // Update stored window name when it changes (which can _only_ happen with the "###" operator, so the ID would stay unchanged). + // The title bar always display the 'name' parameter, so we only update the string storage if it needs to be visible to the end-user elsewhere. + bool window_title_visible_elsewhere = false; + if (g.NavWindowingListWindow != NULL && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus) == 0) // Window titles visible when using CTRL+TAB + window_title_visible_elsewhere = true; + if (window_title_visible_elsewhere && !window_just_created && strcmp(name, window->Name) != 0) + { + size_t buf_len = (size_t)window->NameBufLen; + window->Name = ImStrdupcpy(window->Name, &buf_len, name); + window->NameBufLen = (int)buf_len; + } + + // UPDATE CONTENTS SIZE, UPDATE HIDDEN STATUS + + // Update contents size from last frame for auto-fitting (or use explicit size) + CalcWindowContentSizes(window, &window->ContentSize, &window->ContentSizeIdeal); + if (window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0) + window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems--; + if (window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0) + window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems--; + if (window->HiddenFramesForRenderOnly > 0) + window->HiddenFramesForRenderOnly--; + + // Hide new windows for one frame until they calculate their size + if (window_just_created && (!window_size_x_set_by_api || !window_size_y_set_by_api)) + window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems = 1; + + // Hide popup/tooltip window when re-opening while we measure size (because we recycle the windows) + // We reset Size/ContentSize for reappearing popups/tooltips early in this function, so further code won't be tempted to use the old size. + if (window_just_activated_by_user && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) != 0) + { + window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems = 1; + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) + { + if (!window_size_x_set_by_api) + window->Size.x = window->SizeFull.x = 0.f; + if (!window_size_y_set_by_api) + window->Size.y = window->SizeFull.y = 0.f; + window->ContentSize = window->ContentSizeIdeal = ImVec2(0.f, 0.f); + } + } + + // SELECT VIEWPORT + // FIXME-VIEWPORT: In the docking/viewport branch, this is the point where we select the current viewport (which may affect the style) + + ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)GetMainViewport(); + SetWindowViewport(window, viewport); + SetCurrentWindow(window); + + // LOCK BORDER SIZE AND PADDING FOR THE FRAME (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies) + + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + window->WindowBorderSize = style.ChildBorderSize; + else + window->WindowBorderSize = ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupBorderSize : style.WindowBorderSize; + window->WindowPadding = style.WindowPadding; + if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) && window->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f) + window->WindowPadding = ImVec2(0.0f, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? style.WindowPadding.y : 0.0f); + + // Lock menu offset so size calculation can use it as menu-bar windows need a minimum size. + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = ImMax(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, style.ItemSpacing.x), g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.x); + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y = g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y; + + bool use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = window_just_created; + bool use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = window_just_created; + + // Collapse window by double-clicking on title bar + // At this point we don't have a clipping rectangle setup yet, so we can use the title bar area for hit detection and drawing + if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse)) + { + // We don't use a regular button+id to test for double-click on title bar (mostly due to legacy reason, could be fixed), so verify that we don't have items over the title bar. + ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect(); + if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredId == 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == 0 && IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2) + window->WantCollapseToggle = true; + if (window->WantCollapseToggle) + { + window->Collapsed = !window->Collapsed; + if (!window->Collapsed) + use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = true; + MarkIniSettingsDirty(window); + } + } + else + { + window->Collapsed = false; + } + window->WantCollapseToggle = false; + + // SIZE + + // Outer Decoration Sizes + // (we need to clear ScrollbarSize immediatly as CalcWindowAutoFitSize() needs it and can be called from other locations). + const ImVec2 scrollbar_sizes_from_last_frame = window->ScrollbarSizes; + window->DecoOuterSizeX1 = 0.0f; + window->DecoOuterSizeX2 = 0.0f; + window->DecoOuterSizeY1 = window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight(); + window->DecoOuterSizeY2 = 0.0f; + window->ScrollbarSizes = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + + // Calculate auto-fit size, handle automatic resize + const ImVec2 size_auto_fit = CalcWindowAutoFitSize(window, window->ContentSizeIdeal); + if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && !window->Collapsed) + { + // Using SetNextWindowSize() overrides ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize, so it can be used on tooltips/popups, etc. + if (!window_size_x_set_by_api) + { + window->SizeFull.x = size_auto_fit.x; + use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = true; + } + if (!window_size_y_set_by_api) + { + window->SizeFull.y = size_auto_fit.y; + use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = true; + } + } + else if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0) + { + // Auto-fit may only grow window during the first few frames + // We still process initial auto-fit on collapsed windows to get a window width, but otherwise don't honor ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize when collapsed. + if (!window_size_x_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) + { + window->SizeFull.x = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, size_auto_fit.x) : size_auto_fit.x; + use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = true; + } + if (!window_size_y_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesY > 0) + { + window->SizeFull.y = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, size_auto_fit.y) : size_auto_fit.y; + use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = true; + } + if (!window->Collapsed) + MarkIniSettingsDirty(window); + } + + // Apply minimum/maximum window size constraints and final size + window->SizeFull = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull); + window->Size = window->Collapsed && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? window->TitleBarRect().GetSize() : window->SizeFull; + + // POSITION + + // Popup latch its initial position, will position itself when it appears next frame + if (window_just_activated_by_user) + { + window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None; + if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && !window_pos_set_by_api) // FIXME: BeginPopup() could use SetNextWindowPos() + window->Pos = g.BeginPopupStack.back().OpenPopupPos; + } + + // Position child window + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + { + IM_ASSERT(parent_window && parent_window->Active); + window->BeginOrderWithinParent = (short)parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size; + parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.push_back(window); + if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip) + window->Pos = parent_window->DC.CursorPos; + } + + const bool window_pos_with_pivot = (window->SetWindowPosVal.x != FLT_MAX && window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems == 0); + if (window_pos_with_pivot) + SetWindowPos(window, window->SetWindowPosVal - window->Size * window->SetWindowPosPivot, 0); // Position given a pivot (e.g. for centering) + else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0) + window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window); + else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize) + window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window); + else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip) + window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window); + + // Calculate the range of allowed position for that window (to be movable and visible past safe area padding) + // When clamping to stay visible, we will enforce that window->Pos stays inside of visibility_rect. + ImRect viewport_rect(viewport->GetMainRect()); + ImRect viewport_work_rect(viewport->GetWorkRect()); + ImVec2 visibility_padding = ImMax(style.DisplayWindowPadding, style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding); + ImRect visibility_rect(viewport_work_rect.Min + visibility_padding, viewport_work_rect.Max - visibility_padding); + + // Clamp position/size so window stays visible within its viewport or monitor + // Ignore zero-sized display explicitly to avoid losing positions if a window manager reports zero-sized window when initializing or minimizing. + if (!window_pos_set_by_api && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) + if (viewport_rect.GetWidth() > 0.0f && viewport_rect.GetHeight() > 0.0f) + ClampWindowPos(window, visibility_rect); + window->Pos = ImFloor(window->Pos); + + // Lock window rounding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies) + // Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and are not recommended. + window->WindowRounding = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildRounding : ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupRounding : style.WindowRounding; + + // For windows with title bar or menu bar, we clamp to FrameHeight(FontSize + FramePadding.y * 2.0f) to completely hide artifacts. + //if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) || !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) + // window->WindowRounding = ImMin(window->WindowRounding, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); + + // Apply window focus (new and reactivated windows are moved to front) + bool want_focus = false; + if (window_just_activated_by_user && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing)) + { + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) + want_focus = true; + else if ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) == 0) + want_focus = true; + } + + // [Test Engine] Register whole window in the item system (before submitting further decorations) +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE + if (g.TestEngineHookItems) + { + IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size == 1); + window->IDStack.Size = 0; // As window->IDStack[0] == window->ID here, make sure TestEngine doesn't erroneously see window as parent of itself. + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(window->ID, window->Rect(), NULL); + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->ID, window->Name, (g.HoveredWindow == window) ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect : 0); + window->IDStack.Size = 1; + } +#endif + + // Handle manual resize: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad + int border_held = -1; + ImU32 resize_grip_col[4] = {}; + const int resize_grip_count = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? 2 : 1; // Allow resize from lower-left if we have the mouse cursor feedback for it. + const float resize_grip_draw_size = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.10f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f)); + if (!window->Collapsed) + if (UpdateWindowManualResize(window, size_auto_fit, &border_held, resize_grip_count, &resize_grip_col[0], visibility_rect)) + use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = true; + window->ResizeBorderHeld = (signed char)border_held; + + // SCROLLBAR VISIBILITY + + // Update scrollbar visibility (based on the Size that was effective during last frame or the auto-resized Size). + if (!window->Collapsed) + { + // When reading the current size we need to read it after size constraints have been applied. + // Intentionally use previous frame values for InnerRect and ScrollbarSizes. + // And when we use window->DecorationUp here it doesn't have ScrollbarSizes.y applied yet. + ImVec2 avail_size_from_current_frame = ImVec2(window->SizeFull.x, window->SizeFull.y - (window->DecoOuterSizeY1 + window->DecoOuterSizeY2)); + ImVec2 avail_size_from_last_frame = window->InnerRect.GetSize() + scrollbar_sizes_from_last_frame; + ImVec2 needed_size_from_last_frame = window_just_created ? ImVec2(0, 0) : window->ContentSize + window->WindowPadding * 2.0f; + float size_x_for_scrollbars = use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x ? avail_size_from_current_frame.x : avail_size_from_last_frame.x; + float size_y_for_scrollbars = use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y ? avail_size_from_current_frame.y : avail_size_from_last_frame.y; + //bool scrollbar_y_from_last_frame = window->ScrollbarY; // FIXME: May want to use that in the ScrollbarX expression? How many pros vs cons? + window->ScrollbarY = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar) || ((needed_size_from_last_frame.y > size_y_for_scrollbars) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar)); + window->ScrollbarX = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar) || ((needed_size_from_last_frame.x > size_x_for_scrollbars - (window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar)); + if (window->ScrollbarX && !window->ScrollbarY) + window->ScrollbarY = (needed_size_from_last_frame.y > size_y_for_scrollbars) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar); + window->ScrollbarSizes = ImVec2(window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f, window->ScrollbarX ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f); + + // Amend the partially filled window->DecorationXXX values. + window->DecoOuterSizeX2 += window->ScrollbarSizes.x; + window->DecoOuterSizeY2 += window->ScrollbarSizes.y; + } + + // UPDATE RECTANGLES (1- THOSE NOT AFFECTED BY SCROLLING) + // Update various regions. Variables they depend on should be set above in this function. + // We set this up after processing the resize grip so that our rectangles doesn't lag by a frame. + + // Outer rectangle + // Not affected by window border size. Used by: + // - FindHoveredWindow() (w/ extra padding when border resize is enabled) + // - Begin() initial clipping rect for drawing window background and borders. + // - Begin() clipping whole child + const ImRect host_rect = ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_is_child_tooltip) ? parent_window->ClipRect : viewport_rect; + const ImRect outer_rect = window->Rect(); + const ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect(); + window->OuterRectClipped = outer_rect; + window->OuterRectClipped.ClipWith(host_rect); + + // Inner rectangle + // Not affected by window border size. Used by: + // - InnerClipRect + // - ScrollToRectEx() + // - NavUpdatePageUpPageDown() + // - Scrollbar() + window->InnerRect.Min.x = window->Pos.x + window->DecoOuterSizeX1; + window->InnerRect.Min.y = window->Pos.y + window->DecoOuterSizeY1; + window->InnerRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - window->DecoOuterSizeX2; + window->InnerRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y + window->Size.y - window->DecoOuterSizeY2; + + // Inner clipping rectangle. + // Will extend a little bit outside the normal work region. + // This is to allow e.g. Selectable or CollapsingHeader or some separators to cover that space. + // Force round operator last to ensure that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render code produce correct result. + // Note that if our window is collapsed we will end up with an inverted (~null) clipping rectangle which is the correct behavior. + // Affected by window/frame border size. Used by: + // - Begin() initial clip rect + float top_border_size = (((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) ? style.FrameBorderSize : window->WindowBorderSize); + window->InnerClipRect.Min.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Min.x + ImMax(ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f), window->WindowBorderSize)); + window->InnerClipRect.Min.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Min.y + top_border_size); + window->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Max.x - ImMax(ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f), window->WindowBorderSize)); + window->InnerClipRect.Max.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Max.y - window->WindowBorderSize); + window->InnerClipRect.ClipWithFull(host_rect); + + // Default item width. Make it proportional to window size if window manually resizes + if (window->Size.x > 0.0f && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) + window->ItemWidthDefault = ImFloor(window->Size.x * 0.65f); + else + window->ItemWidthDefault = ImFloor(g.FontSize * 16.0f); + + // SCROLLING + + // Lock down maximum scrolling + // The value of ScrollMax are ahead from ScrollbarX/ScrollbarY which is intentionally using InnerRect from previous rect in order to accommodate + // for right/bottom aligned items without creating a scrollbar. + window->ScrollMax.x = ImMax(0.0f, window->ContentSize.x + window->WindowPadding.x * 2.0f - window->InnerRect.GetWidth()); + window->ScrollMax.y = ImMax(0.0f, window->ContentSize.y + window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f - window->InnerRect.GetHeight()); + + // Apply scrolling + window->Scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window); + window->ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + window->DecoInnerSizeX1 = window->DecoInnerSizeY1 = 0.0f; + + // DRAWING + + // Setup draw list and outer clipping rectangle + IM_ASSERT(window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size == 1 && window->DrawList->CmdBuffer[0].ElemCount == 0); + window->DrawList->PushTextureID(g.Font->ContainerAtlas->TexID); + PushClipRect(host_rect.Min, host_rect.Max, false); + + // Child windows can render their decoration (bg color, border, scrollbars, etc.) within their parent to save a draw call (since 1.71) + // When using overlapping child windows, this will break the assumption that child z-order is mapped to submission order. + // FIXME: User code may rely on explicit sorting of overlapping child window and would need to disable this somehow. Please get in contact if you are affected (github #4493) + { + bool render_decorations_in_parent = false; + if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_is_child_tooltip) + { + // - We test overlap with the previous child window only (testing all would end up being O(log N) not a good investment here) + // - We disable this when the parent window has zero vertices, which is a common pattern leading to laying out multiple overlapping childs + ImGuiWindow* previous_child = parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size >= 2 ? parent_window->DC.ChildWindows[parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size - 2] : NULL; + bool previous_child_overlapping = previous_child ? previous_child->Rect().Overlaps(window->Rect()) : false; + bool parent_is_empty = (parent_window->DrawList->VtxBuffer.Size == 0); + if (window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && !parent_is_empty && !previous_child_overlapping) + render_decorations_in_parent = true; + } + if (render_decorations_in_parent) + window->DrawList = parent_window->DrawList; + + // Handle title bar, scrollbar, resize grips and resize borders + const ImGuiWindow* window_to_highlight = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget : g.NavWindow; + const bool title_bar_is_highlight = want_focus || (window_to_highlight && window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == window_to_highlight->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight); + const bool handle_borders_and_resize_grips = true; // This exists to facilitate merge with 'docking' branch. + RenderWindowDecorations(window, title_bar_rect, title_bar_is_highlight, handle_borders_and_resize_grips, resize_grip_count, resize_grip_col, resize_grip_draw_size); + + if (render_decorations_in_parent) + window->DrawList = &window->DrawListInst; + } + + // UPDATE RECTANGLES (2- THOSE AFFECTED BY SCROLLING) + + // Work rectangle. + // Affected by window padding and border size. Used by: + // - Columns() for right-most edge + // - TreeNode(), CollapsingHeader() for right-most edge + // - BeginTabBar() for right-most edge + const bool allow_scrollbar_x = !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar); + const bool allow_scrollbar_y = !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar); + const float work_rect_size_x = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : ImMax(allow_scrollbar_x ? window->ContentSize.x : 0.0f, window->Size.x - window->WindowPadding.x * 2.0f - (window->DecoOuterSizeX1 + window->DecoOuterSizeX2))); + const float work_rect_size_y = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : ImMax(allow_scrollbar_y ? window->ContentSize.y : 0.0f, window->Size.y - window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f - (window->DecoOuterSizeY1 + window->DecoOuterSizeY2))); + window->WorkRect.Min.x = ImFloor(window->InnerRect.Min.x - window->Scroll.x + ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, window->WindowBorderSize)); + window->WorkRect.Min.y = ImFloor(window->InnerRect.Min.y - window->Scroll.y + ImMax(window->WindowPadding.y, window->WindowBorderSize)); + window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Min.x + work_rect_size_x; + window->WorkRect.Max.y = window->WorkRect.Min.y + work_rect_size_y; + window->ParentWorkRect = window->WorkRect; + + // [LEGACY] Content Region + // FIXME-OBSOLETE: window->ContentRegionRect.Max is currently very misleading / partly faulty, but some BeginChild() patterns relies on it. + // Unless explicit content size is specified by user, this currently represent the region leading to no scrolling. + // Used by: + // - Mouse wheel scrolling + many other things + window->ContentRegionRect.Min.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + window->WindowPadding.x + window->DecoOuterSizeX1; + window->ContentRegionRect.Min.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + window->WindowPadding.y + window->DecoOuterSizeY1; + window->ContentRegionRect.Max.x = window->ContentRegionRect.Min.x + (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : (window->Size.x - window->WindowPadding.x * 2.0f - (window->DecoOuterSizeX1 + window->DecoOuterSizeX2))); + window->ContentRegionRect.Max.y = window->ContentRegionRect.Min.y + (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : (window->Size.y - window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f - (window->DecoOuterSizeY1 + window->DecoOuterSizeY2))); + + // Setup drawing context + // (NB: That term "drawing context / DC" lost its meaning a long time ago. Initially was meant to hold transient data only. Nowadays difference between window-> and window->DC-> is dubious.) + window->DC.Indent.x = window->DecoOuterSizeX1 + window->WindowPadding.x - window->Scroll.x; + window->DC.GroupOffset.x = 0.0f; + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f; + + // Record the loss of precision of CursorStartPos which can happen due to really large scrolling amount. + // This is used by clipper to compensate and fix the most common use case of large scroll area. Easy and cheap, next best thing compared to switching everything to double or ImU64. + double start_pos_highp_x = (double)window->Pos.x + window->WindowPadding.x - (double)window->Scroll.x + window->DecoOuterSizeX1 + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x; + double start_pos_highp_y = (double)window->Pos.y + window->WindowPadding.y - (double)window->Scroll.y + window->DecoOuterSizeY1; + window->DC.CursorStartPos = ImVec2((float)start_pos_highp_x, (float)start_pos_highp_y); + window->DC.CursorStartPosLossyness = ImVec2((float)(start_pos_highp_x - window->DC.CursorStartPos.x), (float)(start_pos_highp_y - window->DC.CursorStartPos.y)); + window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos; + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPos; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos; + window->DC.IdealMaxPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos; + window->DC.CurrLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f; + window->DC.IsSameLine = window->DC.IsSetPos = false; + + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask = window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext; + window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext = 0x00; + window->DC.NavIsScrollPushableX = true; + window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = false; + window->DC.NavWindowHasScrollY = (window->ScrollMax.y > 0.0f); + + window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false; + window->DC.MenuColumns.Update(style.ItemSpacing.x, window_just_activated_by_user); + window->DC.TreeDepth = 0; + window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask = 0x00; + window->DC.ChildWindows.resize(0); + window->DC.StateStorage = &window->StateStorage; + window->DC.CurrentColumns = NULL; + window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical; + window->DC.ParentLayoutType = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.LayoutType : ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical; + + window->DC.ItemWidth = window->ItemWidthDefault; + window->DC.TextWrapPos = -1.0f; // disabled + window->DC.ItemWidthStack.resize(0); + window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.resize(0); + + if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) + window->AutoFitFramesX--; + if (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0) + window->AutoFitFramesY--; + + // Apply focus (we need to call FocusWindow() AFTER setting DC.CursorStartPos so our initial navigation reference rectangle can start around there) + // We ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_UnlessBelowModal to: + // - Avoid focusing a window that is created outside of a modal. This will prevent active modal from being closed. + // - Position window behind the modal that is not a begin-parent of this window. + if (want_focus) + FocusWindow(window, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_UnlessBelowModal); + if (want_focus && window == g.NavWindow) + NavInitWindow(window, false); // <-- this is in the way for us to be able to defer and sort reappearing FocusWindow() calls + + // Title bar + if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) + RenderWindowTitleBarContents(window, ImRect(title_bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize, title_bar_rect.Min.y, title_bar_rect.Max.x - window->WindowBorderSize, title_bar_rect.Max.y), name, p_open); + + // Clear hit test shape every frame + window->HitTestHoleSize.x = window->HitTestHoleSize.y = 0; + + // Pressing CTRL+C while holding on a window copy its content to the clipboard + // This works but 1. doesn't handle multiple Begin/End pairs, 2. recursing into another Begin/End pair - so we need to work that out and add better logging scope. + // Maybe we can support CTRL+C on every element? + /* + //if (g.NavWindow == window && g.ActiveId == 0) + if (g.ActiveId == window->MoveId) + if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C)) + LogToClipboard(); + */ + + // We fill last item data based on Title Bar/Tab, in order for IsItemHovered() and IsItemActive() to be usable after Begin(). + // This is useful to allow creating context menus on title bar only, etc. + SetLastItemData(window->MoveId, g.CurrentItemFlags, IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, false) ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect : 0, title_bar_rect); + + // [DEBUG] +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + if (g.DebugLocateId != 0 && (window->ID == g.DebugLocateId || window->MoveId == g.DebugLocateId)) + DebugLocateItemResolveWithLastItem(); +#endif + + // [Test Engine] Register title bar / tab with MoveId. +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE + if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(g.LastItemData.ID, g.LastItemData.Rect, &g.LastItemData); +#endif + } + else + { + // Append + SetCurrentWindow(window); + } + + PushClipRect(window->InnerClipRect.Min, window->InnerClipRect.Max, true); + + // Clear 'accessed' flag last thing (After PushClipRect which will set the flag. We want the flag to stay false when the default "Debug" window is unused) + window->WriteAccessed = false; + window->BeginCount++; + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); + + // Update visibility + if (first_begin_of_the_frame) + { + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + { + // Child window can be out of sight and have "negative" clip windows. + // Mark them as collapsed so commands are skipped earlier (we can't manually collapse them because they have no title bar). + IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) != 0); + if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0) // FIXME: Doesn't make sense for ChildWindow?? + { + const bool nav_request = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) && (g.NavAnyRequest && g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav); + if (!g.LogEnabled && !nav_request) + if (window->OuterRectClipped.Min.x >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.x || window->OuterRectClipped.Min.y >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.y) + window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1; + } + + // Hide along with parent or if parent is collapsed + if (parent_window && (parent_window->Collapsed || parent_window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0)) + window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1; + if (parent_window && (parent_window->Collapsed || parent_window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0)) + window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems = 1; + } + + // Don't render if style alpha is 0.0 at the time of Begin(). This is arbitrary and inconsistent but has been there for a long while (may remove at some point) + if (style.Alpha <= 0.0f) + window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1; + + // Update the Hidden flag + bool hidden_regular = (window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0) || (window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0); + window->Hidden = hidden_regular || (window->HiddenFramesForRenderOnly > 0); + + // Disable inputs for requested number of frames + if (window->DisableInputsFrames > 0) + { + window->DisableInputsFrames--; + window->Flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs; + } + + // Update the SkipItems flag, used to early out of all items functions (no layout required) + bool skip_items = false; + if (window->Collapsed || !window->Active || hidden_regular) + if (window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0 && window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems <= 0) + skip_items = true; + window->SkipItems = skip_items; + } + + // [DEBUG] io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValue override return value to test Begin/End and BeginChild/EndChild behaviors. + // (The implicit fallback window is NOT automatically ended allowing it to always be able to receive commands without crashing) + if (!window->IsFallbackWindow && ((g.IO.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueOnce && window_just_created) || (g.IO.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop && g.DebugBeginReturnValueCullDepth == g.CurrentWindowStack.Size))) + { + if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) { window->AutoFitFramesX++; } + if (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0) { window->AutoFitFramesY++; } + return false; + } + + return !window->SkipItems; +} + +void ImGui::End() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + // Error checking: verify that user hasn't called End() too many times! + if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size <= 1 && g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1, "Calling End() too many times!"); + return; + } + IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 0); + + // Error checking: verify that user doesn't directly call End() on a child window. + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.WithinEndChild, "Must call EndChild() and not End()!"); + + // Close anything that is open + if (window->DC.CurrentColumns) + EndColumns(); + PopClipRect(); // Inner window clip rectangle + PopFocusScope(); + + // Stop logging + if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) // FIXME: add more options for scope of logging + LogFinish(); + + if (window->DC.IsSetPos) + ErrorCheckUsingSetCursorPosToExtendParentBoundaries(); + + // Pop from window stack + g.LastItemData = g.CurrentWindowStack.back().ParentLastItemDataBackup; + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) + g.BeginMenuCount--; + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) + g.BeginPopupStack.pop_back(); + g.CurrentWindowStack.back().StackSizesOnBegin.CompareWithContextState(&g); + g.CurrentWindowStack.pop_back(); + SetCurrentWindow(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 0 ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back().Window); +} + +void ImGui::BringWindowToFocusFront(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(window == window->RootWindow); + + const int cur_order = window->FocusOrder; + IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[cur_order] == window); + if (g.WindowsFocusOrder.back() == window) + return; + + const int new_order = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1; + for (int n = cur_order; n < new_order; n++) + { + g.WindowsFocusOrder[n] = g.WindowsFocusOrder[n + 1]; + g.WindowsFocusOrder[n]->FocusOrder--; + IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[n]->FocusOrder == n); + } + g.WindowsFocusOrder[new_order] = window; + window->FocusOrder = (short)new_order; +} + +void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayFront(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* current_front_window = g.Windows.back(); + if (current_front_window == window || current_front_window->RootWindow == window) // Cheap early out (could be better) + return; + for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 2; i >= 0; i--) // We can ignore the top-most window + if (g.Windows[i] == window) + { + memmove(&g.Windows[i], &g.Windows[i + 1], (size_t)(g.Windows.Size - i - 1) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*)); + g.Windows[g.Windows.Size - 1] = window; + break; + } +} + +void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayBack(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.Windows[0] == window) + return; + for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++) + if (g.Windows[i] == window) + { + memmove(&g.Windows[1], &g.Windows[0], (size_t)i * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*)); + g.Windows[0] = window; + break; + } +} + +void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayBehind(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* behind_window) +{ + IM_ASSERT(window != NULL && behind_window != NULL); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + window = window->RootWindow; + behind_window = behind_window->RootWindow; + int pos_wnd = FindWindowDisplayIndex(window); + int pos_beh = FindWindowDisplayIndex(behind_window); + if (pos_wnd < pos_beh) + { + size_t copy_bytes = (pos_beh - pos_wnd - 1) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*); + memmove(&g.Windows.Data[pos_wnd], &g.Windows.Data[pos_wnd + 1], copy_bytes); + g.Windows[pos_beh - 1] = window; + } + else + { + size_t copy_bytes = (pos_wnd - pos_beh) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*); + memmove(&g.Windows.Data[pos_beh + 1], &g.Windows.Data[pos_beh], copy_bytes); + g.Windows[pos_beh] = window; + } +} + +int ImGui::FindWindowDisplayIndex(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.Windows.index_from_ptr(g.Windows.find(window)); +} + +// Moving window to front of display and set focus (which happens to be back of our sorted list) +void ImGui::FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Modal check? + if ((flags & ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_UnlessBelowModal) && (g.NavWindow != window)) // Early out in common case. + if (ImGuiWindow* blocking_modal = FindBlockingModal(window)) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("[focus] FocusWindow(\"%s\", UnlessBelowModal): prevented by \"%s\".\n", window ? window->Name : "", blocking_modal->Name); + if (window && window == window->RootWindow && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus) == 0) + BringWindowToDisplayBehind(window, blocking_modal); // Still bring to right below modal. + return; + } + + // Find last focused child (if any) and focus it instead. + if ((flags & ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild) && window != NULL) + window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(window); + + // Apply focus + if (g.NavWindow != window) + { + SetNavWindow(window); + if (window && g.NavDisableMouseHover) + g.NavMousePosDirty = true; + g.NavId = window ? window->NavLastIds[0] : 0; // Restore NavId + g.NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + g.NavFocusScopeId = window ? window->NavRootFocusScopeId : 0; + g.NavIdIsAlive = false; + + // Close popups if any + ClosePopupsOverWindow(window, false); + } + + // Move the root window to the top of the pile + IM_ASSERT(window == NULL || window->RootWindow != NULL); + ImGuiWindow* focus_front_window = window ? window->RootWindow : NULL; // NB: In docking branch this is window->RootWindowDockStop + ImGuiWindow* display_front_window = window ? window->RootWindow : NULL; + + // Steal active widgets. Some of the cases it triggers includes: + // - Focus a window while an InputText in another window is active, if focus happens before the old InputText can run. + // - When using Nav to activate menu items (due to timing of activating on press->new window appears->losing ActiveId) + if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow != focus_front_window) + if (!g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss) + ClearActiveID(); + + // Passing NULL allow to disable keyboard focus + if (!window) + return; + + // Bring to front + BringWindowToFocusFront(focus_front_window); + if (((window->Flags | display_front_window->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus) == 0) + BringWindowToDisplayFront(display_front_window); +} + +void ImGui::FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(ImGuiWindow* under_this_window, ImGuiWindow* ignore_window, ImGuiViewport* filter_viewport, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_UNUSED(filter_viewport); // Unused in master branch. + int start_idx = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1; + if (under_this_window != NULL) + { + // Aim at root window behind us, if we are in a child window that's our own root (see #4640) + int offset = -1; + while (under_this_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + { + under_this_window = under_this_window->ParentWindow; + offset = 0; + } + start_idx = FindWindowFocusIndex(under_this_window) + offset; + } + for (int i = start_idx; i >= 0; i--) + { + // We may later decide to test for different NoXXXInputs based on the active navigation input (mouse vs nav) but that may feel more confusing to the user. + ImGuiWindow* window = g.WindowsFocusOrder[i]; + IM_ASSERT(window == window->RootWindow); + if (window == ignore_window || !window->WasActive) + continue; + if ((window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) != (ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) + { + FocusWindow(window, flags); + return; + } + } + FocusWindow(NULL, flags); +} + +// Important: this alone doesn't alter current ImDrawList state. This is called by PushFont/PopFont only. +void ImGui::SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(font && font->IsLoaded()); // Font Atlas not created. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32 / GetTexDataAsAlpha8 ? + IM_ASSERT(font->Scale > 0.0f); + g.Font = font; + g.FontBaseSize = ImMax(1.0f, g.IO.FontGlobalScale * g.Font->FontSize * g.Font->Scale); + g.FontSize = g.CurrentWindow ? g.CurrentWindow->CalcFontSize() : 0.0f; + + ImFontAtlas* atlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas; + g.DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel = atlas->TexUvWhitePixel; + g.DrawListSharedData.TexUvLines = atlas->TexUvLines; + g.DrawListSharedData.Font = g.Font; + g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = g.FontSize; + g.DrawListSharedData.ShadowRectIds = &atlas->ShadowRectIds[0]; + g.DrawListSharedData.ShadowRectUvs = &atlas->ShadowRectUvs[0]; +} + +void ImGui::PushFont(ImFont* font) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!font) + font = GetDefaultFont(); + SetCurrentFont(font); + g.FontStack.push_back(font); + g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PushTextureID(font->ContainerAtlas->TexID); +} + +void ImGui::PopFont() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PopTextureID(); + g.FontStack.pop_back(); + SetCurrentFont(g.FontStack.empty() ? GetDefaultFont() : g.FontStack.back()); +} + +void ImGui::PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags option, bool enabled) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = g.CurrentItemFlags; + IM_ASSERT(item_flags == g.ItemFlagsStack.back()); + if (enabled) + item_flags |= option; + else + item_flags &= ~option; + g.CurrentItemFlags = item_flags; + g.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(item_flags); +} + +void ImGui::PopItemFlag() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.ItemFlagsStack.Size > 1); // Too many calls to PopItemFlag() - we always leave a 0 at the bottom of the stack. + g.ItemFlagsStack.pop_back(); + g.CurrentItemFlags = g.ItemFlagsStack.back(); +} + +// BeginDisabled()/EndDisabled() +// - Those can be nested but it cannot be used to enable an already disabled section (a single BeginDisabled(true) in the stack is enough to keep everything disabled) +// - Visually this is currently altering alpha, but it is expected that in a future styling system this would work differently. +// - Feedback welcome at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/211 +// - BeginDisabled(false) essentially does nothing useful but is provided to facilitate use of boolean expressions. If you can avoid calling BeginDisabled(False)/EndDisabled() best to avoid it. +// - Optimized shortcuts instead of PushStyleVar() + PushItemFlag() +void ImGui::BeginDisabled(bool disabled) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + bool was_disabled = (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) != 0; + if (!was_disabled && disabled) + { + g.DisabledAlphaBackup = g.Style.Alpha; + g.Style.Alpha *= g.Style.DisabledAlpha; // PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, g.Style.Alpha * g.Style.DisabledAlpha); + } + if (was_disabled || disabled) + g.CurrentItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled; + g.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(g.CurrentItemFlags); + g.DisabledStackSize++; +} + +void ImGui::EndDisabled() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.DisabledStackSize > 0); + g.DisabledStackSize--; + bool was_disabled = (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) != 0; + //PopItemFlag(); + g.ItemFlagsStack.pop_back(); + g.CurrentItemFlags = g.ItemFlagsStack.back(); + if (was_disabled && (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) == 0) + g.Style.Alpha = g.DisabledAlphaBackup; //PopStyleVar(); +} + +void ImGui::PushTabStop(bool tab_stop) +{ + PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop, !tab_stop); +} + +void ImGui::PopTabStop() +{ + PopItemFlag(); +} + +void ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat) +{ + PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat, repeat); +} + +void ImGui::PopButtonRepeat() +{ + PopItemFlag(); +} + +void ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_pos_x) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.push_back(window->DC.TextWrapPos); + window->DC.TextWrapPos = wrap_pos_x; +} + +void ImGui::PopTextWrapPos() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.TextWrapPos = window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.back(); + window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.pop_back(); +} + +static ImGuiWindow* GetCombinedRootWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool popup_hierarchy) +{ + ImGuiWindow* last_window = NULL; + while (last_window != window) + { + last_window = window; + window = window->RootWindow; + if (popup_hierarchy) + window = window->RootWindowPopupTree; + } + return window; +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent, bool popup_hierarchy) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window_root = GetCombinedRootWindow(window, popup_hierarchy); + if (window_root == potential_parent) + return true; + while (window != NULL) + { + if (window == potential_parent) + return true; + if (window == window_root) // end of chain + return false; + window = window->ParentWindow; + } + return false; +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent) +{ + if (window->RootWindow == potential_parent) + return true; + while (window != NULL) + { + if (window == potential_parent) + return true; + window = window->ParentWindowInBeginStack; + } + return false; +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowAbove(ImGuiWindow* potential_above, ImGuiWindow* potential_below) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // It would be saner to ensure that display layer is always reflected in the g.Windows[] order, which would likely requires altering all manipulations of that array + const int display_layer_delta = GetWindowDisplayLayer(potential_above) - GetWindowDisplayLayer(potential_below); + if (display_layer_delta != 0) + return display_layer_delta > 0; + + for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--) + { + ImGuiWindow* candidate_window = g.Windows[i]; + if (candidate_window == potential_above) + return true; + if (candidate_window == potential_below) + return false; + } + return false; +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags) +{ + IM_ASSERT((flags & ~ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowedMaskForIsWindowHovered) == 0 && "Invalid flags for IsWindowHovered()!"); + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* ref_window = g.HoveredWindow; + ImGuiWindow* cur_window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (ref_window == NULL) + return false; + + if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow) == 0) + { + IM_ASSERT(cur_window); // Not inside a Begin()/End() + const bool popup_hierarchy = (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy) == 0; + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow) + cur_window = GetCombinedRootWindow(cur_window, popup_hierarchy); + + bool result; + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows) + result = IsWindowChildOf(ref_window, cur_window, popup_hierarchy); + else + result = (ref_window == cur_window); + if (!result) + return false; + } + + if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(ref_window, flags)) + return false; + if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem)) + if (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != ref_window->MoveId) + return false; + + // When changing hovered window we requires a bit of stationary delay before activating hover timer. + // FIXME: We don't support delay other than stationary one for now, other delay would need a way + // to fullfill the possibility that multiple IsWindowHovered() with varying flag could return true + // for different windows of the hierarchy. Possibly need a Hash(Current+Flags) ==> (Timer) cache. + // We can implement this for _Stationary because the data is linked to HoveredWindow rather than CurrentWindow. + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) + flags |= g.Style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse; + if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary) != 0 && g.HoverWindowUnlockedStationaryId != ref_window->ID) + return false; + + return true; +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* ref_window = g.NavWindow; + ImGuiWindow* cur_window = g.CurrentWindow; + + if (ref_window == NULL) + return false; + if (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow) + return true; + + IM_ASSERT(cur_window); // Not inside a Begin()/End() + const bool popup_hierarchy = (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy) == 0; + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow) + cur_window = GetCombinedRootWindow(cur_window, popup_hierarchy); + + if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows) + return IsWindowChildOf(ref_window, cur_window, popup_hierarchy); + else + return (ref_window == cur_window); +} + +// Can we focus this window with CTRL+TAB (or PadMenu + PadFocusPrev/PadFocusNext) +// Note that NoNavFocus makes the window not reachable with CTRL+TAB but it can still be focused with mouse or programmatically. +// If you want a window to never be focused, you may use the e.g. NoInputs flag. +bool ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + return window->WasActive && window == window->RootWindow && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus); +} + +float ImGui::GetWindowWidth() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->Size.x; +} + +float ImGui::GetWindowHeight() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->Size.y; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowPos() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + return window->Pos; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time + if (cond && (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & cond) == 0) + return; + + IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags. + window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing); + window->SetWindowPosVal = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + + // Set + const ImVec2 old_pos = window->Pos; + window->Pos = ImFloor(pos); + ImVec2 offset = window->Pos - old_pos; + if (offset.x == 0.0f && offset.y == 0.0f) + return; + MarkIniSettingsDirty(window); + window->DC.CursorPos += offset; // As we happen to move the window while it is being appended to (which is a bad idea - will smear) let's at least offset the cursor + window->DC.CursorMaxPos += offset; // And more importantly we need to offset CursorMaxPos/CursorStartPos this so ContentSize calculation doesn't get affected. + window->DC.IdealMaxPos += offset; + window->DC.CursorStartPos += offset; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond); +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name)) + SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond); +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowSize() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->Size; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time + if (cond && (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & cond) == 0) + return; + + IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags. + window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing); + + // Set + ImVec2 old_size = window->SizeFull; + window->AutoFitFramesX = (size.x <= 0.0f) ? 2 : 0; + window->AutoFitFramesY = (size.y <= 0.0f) ? 2 : 0; + if (size.x <= 0.0f) + window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false; + else + window->SizeFull.x = IM_FLOOR(size.x); + if (size.y <= 0.0f) + window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false; + else + window->SizeFull.y = IM_FLOOR(size.y); + if (old_size.x != window->SizeFull.x || old_size.y != window->SizeFull.y) + MarkIniSettingsDirty(window); +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + SetWindowSize(GImGui->CurrentWindow, size, cond); +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name)) + SetWindowSize(window, size, cond); +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time + if (cond && (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & cond) == 0) + return; + window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing); + + // Set + window->Collapsed = collapsed; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowHitTestHole(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& size) +{ + IM_ASSERT(window->HitTestHoleSize.x == 0); // We don't support multiple holes/hit test filters + window->HitTestHoleSize = ImVec2ih(size); + window->HitTestHoleOffset = ImVec2ih(pos - window->Pos); +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowHiddendAndSkipItemsForCurrentFrame(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + window->Hidden = window->SkipItems = true; + window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + SetWindowCollapsed(GImGui->CurrentWindow, collapsed, cond); +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowCollapsed() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->Collapsed; +} + +bool ImGui::IsWindowAppearing() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->Appearing; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name)) + SetWindowCollapsed(window, collapsed, cond); +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowFocus() +{ + FocusWindow(GImGui->CurrentWindow); +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowFocus(const char* name) +{ + if (name) + { + if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name)) + FocusWindow(window); + } + else + { + FocusWindow(NULL); + } +} + +void ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond, const ImVec2& pivot) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags. + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos; + g.NextWindowData.PosVal = pos; + g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal = pivot; + g.NextWindowData.PosCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always; +} + +void ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags. + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize; + g.NextWindowData.SizeVal = size; + g.NextWindowData.SizeCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always; +} + +void ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGunSizeCallback custom_callback, void* custom_callback_user_data) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint; + g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect = ImRect(size_min, size_max); + g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback = custom_callback; + g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData = custom_callback_user_data; +} + +// Content size = inner scrollable rectangle, padded with WindowPadding. +// SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(100,100) + ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize will always allow submitting a 100x100 item. +void ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasContentSize; + g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal = ImFloor(size); +} + +void ImGui::SetNextWindowScroll(const ImVec2& scroll) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasScroll; + g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal = scroll; +} + +void ImGui::SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags. + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasCollapsed; + g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal = collapsed; + g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always; +} + +void ImGui::SetNextWindowFocus() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasFocus; +} + +void ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasBgAlpha; + g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal = alpha; +} + +ImDrawList* ImGui::GetWindowDrawList() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + return window->DrawList; +} + +ImFont* ImGui::GetFont() +{ + return GImGui->Font; +} + +float ImGui::GetFontSize() +{ + return GImGui->FontSize; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetFontTexUvWhitePixel() +{ + return GImGui->DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(float scale) +{ + IM_ASSERT(scale > 0.0f); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->FontWindowScale = scale; + g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize(); +} + +void ImGui::PushFocusScope(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.FocusScopeStack.push_back(id); + g.CurrentFocusScopeId = id; +} + +void ImGui::PopFocusScope() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.FocusScopeStack.Size > 0); // Too many PopFocusScope() ? + g.FocusScopeStack.pop_back(); + g.CurrentFocusScopeId = g.FocusScopeStack.Size ? g.FocusScopeStack.back() : 0; +} + +// Focus = move navigation cursor, set scrolling, set focus window. +void ImGui::FocusItem() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("FocusItem(0x%08x) in window \"%s\"\n", g.LastItemData.ID, window->Name); + if (g.DragDropActive || g.MovingWindow != NULL) // FIXME: Opt-in flags for this? + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("FocusItem() ignored while DragDropActive!\n"); + return; + } + + ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSelect; + ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags = window->Appearing ? ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY : ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY; + SetNavWindow(window); + NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir_None, ImGuiDir_Up, move_flags, scroll_flags); + NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocal); +} + +void ImGui::ActivateItemByID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NavNextActivateId = id; + g.NavNextActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None; +} + +// Note: this will likely be called ActivateItem() once we rework our Focus/Activation system! +// But ActivateItem() should function without altering scroll/focus? +void ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(offset >= -1); // -1 is allowed but not below + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("SetKeyboardFocusHere(%d) in window \"%s\"\n", offset, window->Name); + + // It makes sense in the vast majority of cases to never interrupt a drag and drop. + // When we refactor this function into ActivateItem() we may want to make this an option. + // MovingWindow is protected from most user inputs using SetActiveIdUsingNavAndKeys(), but + // is also automatically dropped in the event g.ActiveId is stolen. + if (g.DragDropActive || g.MovingWindow != NULL) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("SetKeyboardFocusHere() ignored while DragDropActive!\n"); + return; + } + + SetNavWindow(window); + + ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Activate | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi; + ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags = window->Appearing ? ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY : ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY; + NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir_None, offset < 0 ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down, move_flags, scroll_flags); // FIXME-NAV: Once we refactor tabbing, add LegacyApi flag to not activate non-inputable. + if (offset == -1) + { + NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocal); + } + else + { + g.NavTabbingDir = 1; + g.NavTabbingCounter = offset + 1; + } +} + +void ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (!window->Appearing) + return; + if (g.NavWindow != window->RootWindowForNav || (!g.NavInitRequest && g.NavInitResult.ID == 0) || g.NavLayer != window->DC.NavLayerCurrent) + return; + + g.NavInitRequest = false; + NavApplyItemToResult(&g.NavInitResult); + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); + + // Scroll could be done in NavInitRequestApplyResult() via an opt-in flag (we however don't want regular init requests to scroll) + if (!window->ClipRect.Contains(g.LastItemData.Rect)) + ScrollToRectEx(window, g.LastItemData.Rect, ImGuiScrollFlags_None); +} + +void ImGui::SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* tree) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + window->DC.StateStorage = tree ? tree : &window->StateStorage; +} + +ImGuiStorage* ImGui::GetStateStorage() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->DC.StateStorage; +} + +void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id); + window->IDStack.push_back(id); +} + +void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end); + window->IDStack.push_back(id); +} + +void ImGui::PushID(const void* ptr_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(ptr_id); + window->IDStack.push_back(id); +} + +void ImGui::PushID(int int_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(int_id); + window->IDStack.push_back(id); +} + +// Push a given id value ignoring the ID stack as a seed. +void ImGui::PushOverrideID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id) + DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_ID, NULL, NULL); + window->IDStack.push_back(id); +} + +// Helper to avoid a common series of PushOverrideID -> GetID() -> PopID() call +// (note that when using this pattern, TestEngine's "Stack Tool" will tend to not display the intermediate stack level. +// for that to work we would need to do PushOverrideID() -> ItemAdd() -> PopID() which would alter widget code a little more) +ImGuiID ImGui::GetIDWithSeed(const char* str, const char* str_end, ImGuiID seed) +{ + ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(str, str_end ? (str_end - str) : 0, seed); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id) + DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_String, str, str_end); + return id; +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetIDWithSeed(int n, ImGuiID seed) +{ + ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&n, sizeof(n), seed); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id) + DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)(intptr_t)n, NULL); + return id; +} + +void ImGui::PopID() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // Too many PopID(), or could be popping in a wrong/different window? + window->IDStack.pop_back(); +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->GetID(str_id); +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end); +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const void* ptr_id) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->GetID(ptr_id); +} + +bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size)); +} + +bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(rect_min, rect_max)); +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] INPUTS +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - GetKeyData() [Internal] +// - GetKeyIndex() [Internal] +// - GetKeyName() +// - GetKeyChordName() [Internal] +// - CalcTypematicRepeatAmount() [Internal] +// - GetTypematicRepeatRate() [Internal] +// - GetKeyPressedAmount() [Internal] +// - GetKeyMagnitude2d() [Internal] +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - UpdateKeyRoutingTable() [Internal] +// - GetRoutingIdFromOwnerId() [Internal] +// - GetShortcutRoutingData() [Internal] +// - CalcRoutingScore() [Internal] +// - SetShortcutRouting() [Internal] +// - TestShortcutRouting() [Internal] +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - IsKeyDown() +// - IsKeyPressed() +// - IsKeyReleased() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - IsMouseDown() +// - IsMouseClicked() +// - IsMouseReleased() +// - IsMouseDoubleClicked() +// - GetMouseClickedCount() +// - IsMouseHoveringRect() [Internal] +// - IsMouseDragPastThreshold() [Internal] +// - IsMouseDragging() +// - GetMousePos() +// - GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup() +// - IsMousePosValid() +// - IsAnyMouseDown() +// - GetMouseDragDelta() +// - ResetMouseDragDelta() +// - GetMouseCursor() +// - SetMouseCursor() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - UpdateAliasKey() +// - GetMergedModsFromKeys() +// - UpdateKeyboardInputs() +// - UpdateMouseInputs() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - LockWheelingWindow [Internal] +// - FindBestWheelingWindow [Internal] +// - UpdateMouseWheel() [Internal] +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard() +// - SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - GetInputSourceName() [Internal] +// - DebugPrintInputEvent() [Internal] +// - UpdateInputEvents() [Internal] +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - GetKeyOwner() [Internal] +// - TestKeyOwner() [Internal] +// - SetKeyOwner() [Internal] +// - SetItemKeyOwner() [Internal] +// - Shortcut() [Internal] +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImGuiKeyData* ImGui::GetKeyData(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiKey key) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + + // Special storage location for mods + if (key & ImGuiMod_Mask_) + key = ConvertSingleModFlagToKey(ctx, key); + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + IM_ASSERT(key >= ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END); + if (IsLegacyKey(key) && g.IO.KeyMap[key] != -1) + key = (ImGuiKey)g.IO.KeyMap[key]; // Remap native->imgui or imgui->native +#else + IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key) && "Support for user key indices was dropped in favor of ImGuiKey. Please update backend & user code."); +#endif + return &g.IO.KeysData[key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET]; +} + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO +ImGuiKey ImGui::GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key)); + const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key); + return (ImGuiKey)(key_data - g.IO.KeysData); +} +#endif + +// Those names a provided for debugging purpose and are not meant to be saved persistently not compared. +static const char* const GKeyNames[] = +{ + "Tab", "LeftArrow", "RightArrow", "UpArrow", "DownArrow", "PageUp", "PageDown", + "Home", "End", "Insert", "Delete", "Backspace", "Space", "Enter", "Escape", + "LeftCtrl", "LeftShift", "LeftAlt", "LeftSuper", "RightCtrl", "RightShift", "RightAlt", "RightSuper", "Menu", + "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", "F", "G", "H", + "I", "J", "K", "L", "M", "N", "O", "P", "Q", "R", "S", "T", "U", "V", "W", "X", "Y", "Z", + "F1", "F2", "F3", "F4", "F5", "F6", "F7", "F8", "F9", "F10", "F11", "F12", + "Apostrophe", "Comma", "Minus", "Period", "Slash", "Semicolon", "Equal", "LeftBracket", + "Backslash", "RightBracket", "GraveAccent", "CapsLock", "ScrollLock", "NumLock", "PrintScreen", + "Pause", "Keypad0", "Keypad1", "Keypad2", "Keypad3", "Keypad4", "Keypad5", "Keypad6", + "Keypad7", "Keypad8", "Keypad9", "KeypadDecimal", "KeypadDivide", "KeypadMultiply", + "KeypadSubtract", "KeypadAdd", "KeypadEnter", "KeypadEqual", + "GamepadStart", "GamepadBack", + "GamepadFaceLeft", "GamepadFaceRight", "GamepadFaceUp", "GamepadFaceDown", + "GamepadDpadLeft", "GamepadDpadRight", "GamepadDpadUp", "GamepadDpadDown", + "GamepadL1", "GamepadR1", "GamepadL2", "GamepadR2", "GamepadL3", "GamepadR3", + "GamepadLStickLeft", "GamepadLStickRight", "GamepadLStickUp", "GamepadLStickDown", + "GamepadRStickLeft", "GamepadRStickRight", "GamepadRStickUp", "GamepadRStickDown", + "MouseLeft", "MouseRight", "MouseMiddle", "MouseX1", "MouseX2", "MouseWheelX", "MouseWheelY", + "ModCtrl", "ModShift", "ModAlt", "ModSuper", // ReservedForModXXX are showing the ModXXX names. +}; +IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT == IM_ARRAYSIZE(GKeyNames)); + +const char* ImGui::GetKeyName(ImGuiKey key) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + IM_ASSERT((IsNamedKeyOrModKey(key) || key == ImGuiKey_None) && "Support for user key indices was dropped in favor of ImGuiKey. Please update backend and user code."); +#else + if (IsLegacyKey(key)) + { + if (g.IO.KeyMap[key] == -1) + return "N/A"; + IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey((ImGuiKey)g.IO.KeyMap[key])); + key = (ImGuiKey)g.IO.KeyMap[key]; + } +#endif + if (key == ImGuiKey_None) + return "None"; + if (key & ImGuiMod_Mask_) + key = ConvertSingleModFlagToKey(&g, key); + if (!IsNamedKey(key)) + return "Unknown"; + + return GKeyNames[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN]; +} + +// ImGuiMod_Shortcut is translated to either Ctrl or Super. +void ImGui::GetKeyChordName(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, char* out_buf, int out_buf_size) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Shortcut) + key_chord = ConvertShortcutMod(key_chord); + ImFormatString(out_buf, (size_t)out_buf_size, "%s%s%s%s%s", + (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Ctrl) ? "Ctrl+" : "", + (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Shift) ? "Shift+" : "", + (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Alt) ? "Alt+" : "", + (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Super) ? (g.IO.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors ? "Cmd+" : "Super+") : "", + GetKeyName((ImGuiKey)(key_chord & ~ImGuiMod_Mask_))); +} + +// t0 = previous time (e.g.: g.Time - g.IO.DeltaTime) +// t1 = current time (e.g.: g.Time) +// An event is triggered at: +// t = 0.0f t = repeat_delay, t = repeat_delay + repeat_rate*N +int ImGui::CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(float t0, float t1, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate) +{ + if (t1 == 0.0f) + return 1; + if (t0 >= t1) + return 0; + if (repeat_rate <= 0.0f) + return (t0 < repeat_delay) && (t1 >= repeat_delay); + const int count_t0 = (t0 < repeat_delay) ? -1 : (int)((t0 - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate); + const int count_t1 = (t1 < repeat_delay) ? -1 : (int)((t1 - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate); + const int count = count_t1 - count_t0; + return count; +} + +void ImGui::GetTypematicRepeatRate(ImGuiInputFlags flags, float* repeat_delay, float* repeat_rate) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + switch (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateMask_) + { + case ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavMove: *repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.72f; *repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.80f; return; + case ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak: *repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.72f; *repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.30f; return; + case ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateDefault: default: *repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 1.00f; *repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 1.00f; return; + } +} + +// Return value representing the number of presses in the last time period, for the given repeat rate +// (most often returns 0 or 1. The result is generally only >1 when RepeatRate is smaller than DeltaTime, aka large DeltaTime or fast RepeatRate) +int ImGui::GetKeyPressedAmount(ImGuiKey key, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key); + if (!key_data->Down) // In theory this should already be encoded as (DownDuration < 0.0f), but testing this facilitates eating mechanism (until we finish work on key ownership) + return 0; + const float t = key_data->DownDuration; + return CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(t - g.IO.DeltaTime, t, repeat_delay, repeat_rate); +} + +// Return 2D vector representing the combination of four cardinal direction, with analog value support (for e.g. ImGuiKey_GamepadLStick* values). +ImVec2 ImGui::GetKeyMagnitude2d(ImGuiKey key_left, ImGuiKey key_right, ImGuiKey key_up, ImGuiKey key_down) +{ + return ImVec2( + GetKeyData(key_right)->AnalogValue - GetKeyData(key_left)->AnalogValue, + GetKeyData(key_down)->AnalogValue - GetKeyData(key_up)->AnalogValue); +} + +// Rewrite routing data buffers to strip old entries + sort by key to make queries not touch scattered data. +// Entries D,A,B,B,A,C,B --> A,A,B,B,B,C,D +// Index A:1 B:2 C:5 D:0 --> A:0 B:2 C:5 D:6 +// See 'Metrics->Key Owners & Shortcut Routing' to visualize the result of that operation. +static void ImGui::UpdateKeyRoutingTable(ImGuiKeyRoutingTable* rt) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + rt->EntriesNext.resize(0); + for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) + { + const int new_routing_start_idx = rt->EntriesNext.Size; + ImGuiKeyRoutingData* routing_entry; + for (int old_routing_idx = rt->Index[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN]; old_routing_idx != -1; old_routing_idx = routing_entry->NextEntryIndex) + { + routing_entry = &rt->Entries[old_routing_idx]; + routing_entry->RoutingCurr = routing_entry->RoutingNext; // Update entry + routing_entry->RoutingNext = ImGuiKeyOwner_None; + routing_entry->RoutingNextScore = 255; + if (routing_entry->RoutingCurr == ImGuiKeyOwner_None) + continue; + rt->EntriesNext.push_back(*routing_entry); // Write alive ones into new buffer + + // Apply routing to owner if there's no owner already (RoutingCurr == None at this point) + if (routing_entry->Mods == g.IO.KeyMods) + { + ImGuiKeyOwnerData* owner_data = GetKeyOwnerData(&g, key); + if (owner_data->OwnerCurr == ImGuiKeyOwner_None) + owner_data->OwnerCurr = routing_entry->RoutingCurr; + } + } + + // Rewrite linked-list + rt->Index[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN] = (ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex)(new_routing_start_idx < rt->EntriesNext.Size ? new_routing_start_idx : -1); + for (int n = new_routing_start_idx; n < rt->EntriesNext.Size; n++) + rt->EntriesNext[n].NextEntryIndex = (ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex)((n + 1 < rt->EntriesNext.Size) ? n + 1 : -1); + } + rt->Entries.swap(rt->EntriesNext); // Swap new and old indexes +} + +// owner_id may be None/Any, but routing_id needs to be always be set, so we default to GetCurrentFocusScope(). +static inline ImGuiID GetRoutingIdFromOwnerId(ImGuiID owner_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (owner_id != ImGuiKeyOwner_None && owner_id != ImGuiKeyOwner_Any) ? owner_id : g.CurrentFocusScopeId; +} + +ImGuiKeyRoutingData* ImGui::GetShortcutRoutingData(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord) +{ + // Majority of shortcuts will be Key + any number of Mods + // We accept _Single_ mod with ImGuiKey_None. + // - Shortcut(ImGuiKey_S | ImGuiMod_Ctrl); // Legal + // - Shortcut(ImGuiKey_S | ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiMod_Shift); // Legal + // - Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Ctrl); // Legal + // - Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiMod_Shift); // Not legal + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiKeyRoutingTable* rt = &g.KeysRoutingTable; + ImGuiKeyRoutingData* routing_data; + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Shortcut) + key_chord = ConvertShortcutMod(key_chord); + ImGuiKey key = (ImGuiKey)(key_chord & ~ImGuiMod_Mask_); + ImGuiKey mods = (ImGuiKey)(key_chord & ImGuiMod_Mask_); + if (key == ImGuiKey_None) + key = ConvertSingleModFlagToKey(&g, mods); + IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key)); + + // Get (in the majority of case, the linked list will have one element so this should be 2 reads. + // Subsequent elements will be contiguous in memory as list is sorted/rebuilt in NewFrame). + for (ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex idx = rt->Index[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN]; idx != -1; idx = routing_data->NextEntryIndex) + { + routing_data = &rt->Entries[idx]; + if (routing_data->Mods == mods) + return routing_data; + } + + // Add to linked-list + ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex routing_data_idx = (ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex)rt->Entries.Size; + rt->Entries.push_back(ImGuiKeyRoutingData()); + routing_data = &rt->Entries[routing_data_idx]; + routing_data->Mods = (ImU16)mods; + routing_data->NextEntryIndex = rt->Index[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN]; // Setup linked list + rt->Index[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN] = routing_data_idx; + return routing_data; +} + +// Current score encoding (lower is highest priority): +// - 0: ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalHigh +// - 1: ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused (if item active) +// - 2: ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobal +// - 3+: ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused (if window in focus-stack) +// - 254: ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalLow +// - 255: never route +// 'flags' should include an explicit routing policy +static int CalcRoutingScore(ImGuiWindow* location, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + if (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused) + { + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* focused = g.NavWindow; + + // ActiveID gets top priority + // (we don't check g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeys here. Routing is applied but if input ownership is tested later it may discard it) + if (owner_id != 0 && g.ActiveId == owner_id) + return 1; + + // Score based on distance to focused window (lower is better) + // Assuming both windows are submitting a routing request, + // - When Window....... is focused -> Window scores 3 (best), Window/ChildB scores 255 (no match) + // - When Window/ChildB is focused -> Window scores 4, Window/ChildB scores 3 (best) + // Assuming only WindowA is submitting a routing request, + // - When Window/ChildB is focused -> Window scores 4 (best), Window/ChildB doesn't have a score. + if (focused != NULL && focused->RootWindow == location->RootWindow) + for (int next_score = 3; focused != NULL; next_score++) + { + if (focused == location) + { + IM_ASSERT(next_score < 255); + return next_score; + } + focused = (focused->RootWindow != focused) ? focused->ParentWindow : NULL; // FIXME: This could be later abstracted as a focus path + } + return 255; + } + + // ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalHigh is default, so calls without flags are not conditional + if (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobal) + return 2; + if (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalLow) + return 254; + return 0; +} + +// Request a desired route for an input chord (key + mods). +// Return true if the route is available this frame. +// - Routes and key ownership are attributed at the beginning of next frame based on best score and mod state. +// (Conceptually this does a "Submit for next frame" + "Test for current frame". +// As such, it could be called TrySetXXX or SubmitXXX, or the Submit and Test operations should be separate.) +// - Using 'owner_id == ImGuiKeyOwner_Any/0': auto-assign an owner based on current focus scope (each window has its focus scope by default) +// - Using 'owner_id == ImGuiKeyOwner_None': allows disabling/locking a shortcut. +bool ImGui::SetShortcutRouting(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if ((flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalHigh; // IMPORTANT: This is the default for SetShortcutRouting() but NOT Shortcut() + else + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteMask_)); // Check that only 1 routing flag is used + + if (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteUnlessBgFocused) + if (g.NavWindow == NULL) + return false; + if (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteAlways) + return true; + + const int score = CalcRoutingScore(g.CurrentWindow, owner_id, flags); + if (score == 255) + return false; + + // Submit routing for NEXT frame (assuming score is sufficient) + // FIXME: Could expose a way to use a "serve last" policy for same score resolution (using <= instead of <). + ImGuiKeyRoutingData* routing_data = GetShortcutRoutingData(key_chord); + const ImGuiID routing_id = GetRoutingIdFromOwnerId(owner_id); + //const bool set_route = (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_ServeLast) ? (score <= routing_data->RoutingNextScore) : (score < routing_data->RoutingNextScore); + if (score < routing_data->RoutingNextScore) + { + routing_data->RoutingNext = routing_id; + routing_data->RoutingNextScore = (ImU8)score; + } + + // Return routing state for CURRENT frame + return routing_data->RoutingCurr == routing_id; +} + +// Currently unused by core (but used by tests) +// Note: this cannot be turned into GetShortcutRouting() because we do the owner_id->routing_id translation, name would be more misleading. +bool ImGui::TestShortcutRouting(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id) +{ + const ImGuiID routing_id = GetRoutingIdFromOwnerId(owner_id); + ImGuiKeyRoutingData* routing_data = GetShortcutRoutingData(key_chord); // FIXME: Could avoid creating entry. + return routing_data->RoutingCurr == routing_id; +} + +// Note that Dear ImGui doesn't know the meaning/semantic of ImGuiKey from 0..511: they are legacy native keycodes. +// Consider transitioning from 'IsKeyDown(MY_ENGINE_KEY_A)' (<1.87) to IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_A) (>= 1.87) +bool ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key) +{ + return IsKeyDown(key, ImGuiKeyOwner_Any); +} + +bool ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id) +{ + const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key); + if (!key_data->Down) + return false; + if (!TestKeyOwner(key, owner_id)) + return false; + return true; +} + +bool ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat) +{ + return IsKeyPressed(key, ImGuiKeyOwner_Any, repeat ? ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat : ImGuiInputFlags_None); +} + +// Important: unless legacy IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey, bool repeat=true) which DEFAULT to repeat, this requires EXPLICIT repeat. +bool ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key); + if (!key_data->Down) // In theory this should already be encoded as (DownDuration < 0.0f), but testing this facilitates eating mechanism (until we finish work on key ownership) + return false; + const float t = key_data->DownDuration; + if (t < 0.0f) + return false; + IM_ASSERT((flags & ~ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedByIsKeyPressed) == 0); // Passing flags not supported by this function! + + bool pressed = (t == 0.0f); + if (!pressed && ((flags & ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat) != 0)) + { + float repeat_delay, repeat_rate; + GetTypematicRepeatRate(flags, &repeat_delay, &repeat_rate); + pressed = (t > repeat_delay) && GetKeyPressedAmount(key, repeat_delay, repeat_rate) > 0; + } + if (!pressed) + return false; + if (!TestKeyOwner(key, owner_id)) + return false; + return true; +} + +bool ImGui::IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key) +{ + return IsKeyReleased(key, ImGuiKeyOwner_Any); +} + +bool ImGui::IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id) +{ + const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key); + if (key_data->DownDurationPrev < 0.0f || key_data->Down) + return false; + if (!TestKeyOwner(key, owner_id)) + return false; + return true; +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + return g.IO.MouseDown[button] && TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(button), ImGuiKeyOwner_Any); // should be same as IsKeyDown(MouseButtonToKey(button), ImGuiKeyOwner_Any), but this allows legacy code hijacking the io.Mousedown[] array. +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + return g.IO.MouseDown[button] && TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(button), owner_id); // Should be same as IsKeyDown(MouseButtonToKey(button), owner_id), but this allows legacy code hijacking the io.Mousedown[] array. +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, bool repeat) +{ + return IsMouseClicked(button, ImGuiKeyOwner_Any, repeat ? ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat : ImGuiInputFlags_None); +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + if (!g.IO.MouseDown[button]) // In theory this should already be encoded as (DownDuration < 0.0f), but testing this facilitates eating mechanism (until we finish work on key ownership) + return false; + const float t = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[button]; + if (t < 0.0f) + return false; + IM_ASSERT((flags & ~ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedByIsKeyPressed) == 0); // Passing flags not supported by this function! + + const bool repeat = (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat) != 0; + const bool pressed = (t == 0.0f) || (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay && CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(t - g.IO.DeltaTime, t, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0); + if (!pressed) + return false; + + if (!TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(button), owner_id)) + return false; + + return true; +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + return g.IO.MouseReleased[button] && TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(button), ImGuiKeyOwner_Any); // Should be same as IsKeyReleased(MouseButtonToKey(button), ImGuiKeyOwner_Any) +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + return g.IO.MouseReleased[button] && TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(button), owner_id); // Should be same as IsKeyReleased(MouseButtonToKey(button), owner_id) +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + return g.IO.MouseClickedCount[button] == 2 && TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(button), ImGuiKeyOwner_Any); +} + +int ImGui::GetMouseClickedCount(ImGuiMouseButton button) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + return g.IO.MouseClickedCount[button]; +} + +// Test if mouse cursor is hovering given rectangle +// NB- Rectangle is clipped by our current clip setting +// NB- Expand the rectangle to be generous on imprecise inputs systems (g.Style.TouchExtraPadding) +bool ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Clip + ImRect rect_clipped(r_min, r_max); + if (clip) + rect_clipped.ClipWith(g.CurrentWindow->ClipRect); + + // Expand for touch input + const ImRect rect_for_touch(rect_clipped.Min - g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, rect_clipped.Max + g.Style.TouchExtraPadding); + if (!rect_for_touch.Contains(g.IO.MousePos)) + return false; + return true; +} + +// Return if a mouse click/drag went past the given threshold. Valid to call during the MouseReleased frame. +// [Internal] This doesn't test if the button is pressed +bool ImGui::IsMouseDragPastThreshold(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + if (lock_threshold < 0.0f) + lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold; + return g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold; +} + +bool ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + if (!g.IO.MouseDown[button]) + return false; + return IsMouseDragPastThreshold(button, lock_threshold); +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePos() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.IO.MousePos; +} + +// NB: prefer to call right after BeginPopup(). At the time Selectable/MenuItem is activated, the popup is already closed! +ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.BeginPopupStack.Size > 0) + return g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1].OpenMousePos; + return g.IO.MousePos; +} + +// We typically use ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote an invalid mouse position. +bool ImGui::IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos) +{ + // The assert is only to silence a false-positive in XCode Static Analysis. + // Because GImGui is not dereferenced in every code path, the static analyzer assume that it may be NULL (which it doesn't for other functions). + IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL); + const float MOUSE_INVALID = -256000.0f; + ImVec2 p = mouse_pos ? *mouse_pos : GImGui->IO.MousePos; + return p.x >= MOUSE_INVALID && p.y >= MOUSE_INVALID; +} + +// [WILL OBSOLETE] This was designed for backends, but prefer having backend maintain a mask of held mouse buttons, because upcoming input queue system will make this invalid. +bool ImGui::IsAnyMouseDown() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); n++) + if (g.IO.MouseDown[n]) + return true; + return false; +} + +// Return the delta from the initial clicking position while the mouse button is clicked or was just released. +// This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance threshold at least once. +// NB: This is only valid if IsMousePosValid(). backends in theory should always keep mouse position valid when dragging even outside the client window. +ImVec2 ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + if (lock_threshold < 0.0f) + lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold; + if (g.IO.MouseDown[button] || g.IO.MouseReleased[button]) + if (g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold) + if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button])) + return g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button]; + return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); +} + +void ImGui::ResetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown)); + // NB: We don't need to reset g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr + g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button] = g.IO.MousePos; +} + +// Get desired mouse cursor shape. +// Important: this is meant to be used by a platform backend, it is reset in ImGui::NewFrame(), +// updated during the frame, and locked in EndFrame()/Render(). +// If you use software rendering by setting io.MouseDrawCursor then Dear ImGui will render those for you +ImGuiMouseCursor ImGui::GetMouseCursor() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.MouseCursor; +} + +void ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.MouseCursor = cursor_type; +} + +static void UpdateAliasKey(ImGuiKey key, bool v, float analog_value) +{ + IM_ASSERT(ImGui::IsAliasKey(key)); + ImGuiKeyData* key_data = ImGui::GetKeyData(key); + key_data->Down = v; + key_data->AnalogValue = analog_value; +} + +// [Internal] Do not use directly +static ImGuiKeyChord GetMergedModsFromKeys() +{ + ImGuiKeyChord mods = 0; + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiMod_Ctrl)) { mods |= ImGuiMod_Ctrl; } + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiMod_Shift)) { mods |= ImGuiMod_Shift; } + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiMod_Alt)) { mods |= ImGuiMod_Alt; } + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiMod_Super)) { mods |= ImGuiMod_Super; } + return mods; +} + +static void ImGui::UpdateKeyboardInputs() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + + // Import legacy keys or verify they are not used +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + if (io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 0) + { + // Backend used new io.AddKeyEvent() API: Good! Verify that old arrays are never written to externally. + for (int n = 0; n < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; n++) + IM_ASSERT((io.KeysDown[n] == false || IsKeyDown((ImGuiKey)n)) && "Backend needs to either only use io.AddKeyEvent(), either only fill legacy io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[]. Not both!"); + } + else + { + if (g.FrameCount == 0) + for (int n = ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; n++) + IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[n] == -1 && "Backend is not allowed to write to io.KeyMap[0..511]!"); + + // Build reverse KeyMap (Named -> Legacy) + for (int n = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; n++) + if (io.KeyMap[n] != -1) + { + IM_ASSERT(IsLegacyKey((ImGuiKey)io.KeyMap[n])); + io.KeyMap[io.KeyMap[n]] = n; + } + + // Import legacy keys into new ones + for (int n = ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; n++) + if (io.KeysDown[n] || io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 1) + { + const ImGuiKey key = (ImGuiKey)(io.KeyMap[n] != -1 ? io.KeyMap[n] : n); + IM_ASSERT(io.KeyMap[n] == -1 || IsNamedKey(key)); + io.KeysData[key].Down = io.KeysDown[n]; + if (key != n) + io.KeysDown[key] = io.KeysDown[n]; // Allow legacy code using io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex()] with old backends + io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays = 1; + } + if (io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 1) + { + GetKeyData(ImGuiMod_Ctrl)->Down = io.KeyCtrl; + GetKeyData(ImGuiMod_Shift)->Down = io.KeyShift; + GetKeyData(ImGuiMod_Alt)->Down = io.KeyAlt; + GetKeyData(ImGuiMod_Super)->Down = io.KeySuper; + } + } + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0; + if (io.BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray && nav_gamepad_active) + { + #define MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(_KEY, _NAV1) do { io.KeysData[_KEY].Down = (io.NavInputs[_NAV1] > 0.0f); io.KeysData[_KEY].AnalogValue = io.NavInputs[_NAV1]; } while (0) + #define MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY2(_KEY, _NAV1, _NAV2) do { io.KeysData[_KEY].Down = (io.NavInputs[_NAV1] > 0.0f) || (io.NavInputs[_NAV2] > 0.0f); io.KeysData[_KEY].AnalogValue = ImMax(io.NavInputs[_NAV1], io.NavInputs[_NAV2]); } while (0) + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, ImGuiNavInput_Activate); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, ImGuiNavInput_Cancel); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, ImGuiNavInput_Menu); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, ImGuiNavInput_Input); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown, ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY2(ImGuiKey_GamepadL1, ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY2(ImGuiKey_GamepadR1, ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp); + MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown, ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown); + #undef NAV_MAP_KEY + } +#endif +#endif + + // Update aliases + for (int n = 0; n < ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT; n++) + UpdateAliasKey(MouseButtonToKey(n), io.MouseDown[n], io.MouseDown[n] ? 1.0f : 0.0f); + UpdateAliasKey(ImGuiKey_MouseWheelX, io.MouseWheelH != 0.0f, io.MouseWheelH); + UpdateAliasKey(ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY, io.MouseWheel != 0.0f, io.MouseWheel); + + // Synchronize io.KeyMods and io.KeyXXX values. + // - New backends (1.87+): send io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiMod_XXX) -> -> (here) deriving io.KeyMods + io.KeyXXX from key array. + // - Legacy backends: set io.KeyXXX bools -> (above) set key array from io.KeyXXX -> (here) deriving io.KeyMods + io.KeyXXX from key array. + // So with legacy backends the 4 values will do a unnecessary back-and-forth but it makes the code simpler and future facing. + io.KeyMods = GetMergedModsFromKeys(); + io.KeyCtrl = (io.KeyMods & ImGuiMod_Ctrl) != 0; + io.KeyShift = (io.KeyMods & ImGuiMod_Shift) != 0; + io.KeyAlt = (io.KeyMods & ImGuiMod_Alt) != 0; + io.KeySuper = (io.KeyMods & ImGuiMod_Super) != 0; + + // Clear gamepad data if disabled + if ((io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) == 0) + for (int i = ImGuiKey_Gamepad_BEGIN; i < ImGuiKey_Gamepad_END; i++) + { + io.KeysData[i - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET].Down = false; + io.KeysData[i - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET].AnalogValue = 0.0f; + } + + // Update keys + for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE; i++) + { + ImGuiKeyData* key_data = &io.KeysData[i]; + key_data->DownDurationPrev = key_data->DownDuration; + key_data->DownDuration = key_data->Down ? (key_data->DownDuration < 0.0f ? 0.0f : key_data->DownDuration + io.DeltaTime) : -1.0f; + } + + // Update keys/input owner (named keys only): one entry per key + for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) + { + ImGuiKeyData* key_data = &io.KeysData[key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET]; + ImGuiKeyOwnerData* owner_data = &g.KeysOwnerData[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN]; + owner_data->OwnerCurr = owner_data->OwnerNext; + if (!key_data->Down) // Important: ownership is released on the frame after a release. Ensure a 'MouseDown -> CloseWindow -> MouseUp' chain doesn't lead to someone else seeing the MouseUp. + owner_data->OwnerNext = ImGuiKeyOwner_None; + owner_data->LockThisFrame = owner_data->LockUntilRelease = owner_data->LockUntilRelease && key_data->Down; // Clear LockUntilRelease when key is not Down anymore + } + + UpdateKeyRoutingTable(&g.KeysRoutingTable); +} + +static void ImGui::UpdateMouseInputs() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + + // Mouse Wheel swapping flag + // As a standard behavior holding SHIFT while using Vertical Mouse Wheel triggers Horizontal scroll instead + // - We avoid doing it on OSX as it the OS input layer handles this already. + // - FIXME: However this means when running on OSX over Emscripten, Shift+WheelY will incur two swapping (1 in OS, 1 here), canceling the feature. + // - FIXME: When we can distinguish e.g. touchpad scroll events from mouse ones, we'll set this accordingly based on input source. + io.MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap = io.KeyShift && !io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors; + + // Round mouse position to avoid spreading non-rounded position (e.g. UpdateManualResize doesn't support them well) + if (IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos)) + io.MousePos = g.MouseLastValidPos = ImFloorSigned(io.MousePos); + + // If mouse just appeared or disappeared (usually denoted by -FLT_MAX components) we cancel out movement in MouseDelta + if (IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePosPrev)) + io.MouseDelta = io.MousePos - io.MousePosPrev; + else + io.MouseDelta = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + + // Update stationary timer. + // FIXME: May need to rework again to have some tolerance for occasional small movement, while being functional on high-framerates. + const float mouse_stationary_threshold = (io.MouseSource == ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse) ? 2.0f : 3.0f; // Slightly higher threshold for ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen/ImGuiMouseSource_Pen, may need rework. + const bool mouse_stationary = (ImLengthSqr(io.MouseDelta) <= mouse_stationary_threshold * mouse_stationary_threshold); + g.MouseStationaryTimer = mouse_stationary ? (g.MouseStationaryTimer + io.DeltaTime) : 0.0f; + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("%.4f\n", g.MouseStationaryTimer); + + // If mouse moved we re-enable mouse hovering in case it was disabled by gamepad/keyboard. In theory should use a >0.0f threshold but would need to reset in everywhere we set this to true. + if (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f) + g.NavDisableMouseHover = false; + + io.MousePosPrev = io.MousePos; + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown); i++) + { + io.MouseClicked[i] = io.MouseDown[i] && io.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f; + io.MouseClickedCount[i] = 0; // Will be filled below + io.MouseReleased[i] = !io.MouseDown[i] && io.MouseDownDuration[i] >= 0.0f; + io.MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = io.MouseDownDuration[i]; + io.MouseDownDuration[i] = io.MouseDown[i] ? (io.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : io.MouseDownDuration[i] + io.DeltaTime) : -1.0f; + if (io.MouseClicked[i]) + { + bool is_repeated_click = false; + if ((float)(g.Time - io.MouseClickedTime[i]) < io.MouseDoubleClickTime) + { + ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) ? (io.MousePos - io.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + if (ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos) < io.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist * io.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist) + is_repeated_click = true; + } + if (is_repeated_click) + io.MouseClickedLastCount[i]++; + else + io.MouseClickedLastCount[i] = 1; + io.MouseClickedTime[i] = g.Time; + io.MouseClickedPos[i] = io.MousePos; + io.MouseClickedCount[i] = io.MouseClickedLastCount[i]; + io.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = 0.0f; + } + else if (io.MouseDown[i]) + { + // Maintain the maximum distance we reaching from the initial click position, which is used with dragging threshold + float delta_sqr_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) ? ImLengthSqr(io.MousePos - io.MouseClickedPos[i]) : 0.0f; + io.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = ImMax(io.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i], delta_sqr_click_pos); + } + + // We provide io.MouseDoubleClicked[] as a legacy service + io.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = (io.MouseClickedCount[i] == 2); + + // Clicking any mouse button reactivate mouse hovering which may have been deactivated by gamepad/keyboard navigation + if (io.MouseClicked[i]) + g.NavDisableMouseHover = false; + } +} + +static void LockWheelingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, float wheel_amount) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (window) + g.WheelingWindowReleaseTimer = ImMin(g.WheelingWindowReleaseTimer + ImAbs(wheel_amount) * WINDOWS_MOUSE_WHEEL_SCROLL_LOCK_TIMER, WINDOWS_MOUSE_WHEEL_SCROLL_LOCK_TIMER); + else + g.WheelingWindowReleaseTimer = 0.0f; + if (g.WheelingWindow == window) + return; + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] LockWheelingWindow() \"%s\"\n", window ? window->Name : "NULL"); + g.WheelingWindow = window; + g.WheelingWindowRefMousePos = g.IO.MousePos; + if (window == NULL) + { + g.WheelingWindowStartFrame = -1; + g.WheelingAxisAvg = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + } +} + +static ImGuiWindow* FindBestWheelingWindow(const ImVec2& wheel) +{ + // For each axis, find window in the hierarchy that may want to use scrolling + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* windows[2] = { NULL, NULL }; + for (int axis = 0; axis < 2; axis++) + if (wheel[axis] != 0.0f) + for (ImGuiWindow* window = windows[axis] = g.HoveredWindow; window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow; window = windows[axis] = window->ParentWindow) + { + // Bubble up into parent window if: + // - a child window doesn't allow any scrolling. + // - a child window has the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag. + //// - a child window doesn't need scrolling because it is already at the edge for the direction we are going in (FIXME-WIP) + const bool has_scrolling = (window->ScrollMax[axis] != 0.0f); + const bool inputs_disabled = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs); + //const bool scrolling_past_limits = (wheel_v < 0.0f) ? (window->Scroll[axis] <= 0.0f) : (window->Scroll[axis] >= window->ScrollMax[axis]); + if (has_scrolling && !inputs_disabled) // && !scrolling_past_limits) + break; // select this window + } + if (windows[0] == NULL && windows[1] == NULL) + return NULL; + + // If there's only one window or only one axis then there's no ambiguity + if (windows[0] == windows[1] || windows[0] == NULL || windows[1] == NULL) + return windows[1] ? windows[1] : windows[0]; + + // If candidate are different windows we need to decide which one to prioritize + // - First frame: only find a winner if one axis is zero. + // - Subsequent frames: only find a winner when one is more than the other. + if (g.WheelingWindowStartFrame == -1) + g.WheelingWindowStartFrame = g.FrameCount; + if ((g.WheelingWindowStartFrame == g.FrameCount && wheel.x != 0.0f && wheel.y != 0.0f) || (g.WheelingAxisAvg.x == g.WheelingAxisAvg.y)) + { + g.WheelingWindowWheelRemainder = wheel; + return NULL; + } + return (g.WheelingAxisAvg.x > g.WheelingAxisAvg.y) ? windows[0] : windows[1]; +} + +// Called by NewFrame() +void ImGui::UpdateMouseWheel() +{ + // Reset the locked window if we move the mouse or after the timer elapses. + // FIXME: Ideally we could refactor to have one timer for "changing window w/ same axis" and a shorter timer for "changing window or axis w/ other axis" (#3795) + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.WheelingWindow != NULL) + { + g.WheelingWindowReleaseTimer -= g.IO.DeltaTime; + if (IsMousePosValid() && ImLengthSqr(g.IO.MousePos - g.WheelingWindowRefMousePos) > g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * g.IO.MouseDragThreshold) + g.WheelingWindowReleaseTimer = 0.0f; + if (g.WheelingWindowReleaseTimer <= 0.0f) + LockWheelingWindow(NULL, 0.0f); + } + + ImVec2 wheel; + wheel.x = TestKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseWheelX, ImGuiKeyOwner_None) ? g.IO.MouseWheelH : 0.0f; + wheel.y = TestKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY, ImGuiKeyOwner_None) ? g.IO.MouseWheel : 0.0f; + + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("MouseWheel X:%.3f Y:%.3f\n", wheel_x, wheel_y); + ImGuiWindow* mouse_window = g.WheelingWindow ? g.WheelingWindow : g.HoveredWindow; + if (!mouse_window || mouse_window->Collapsed) + return; + + // Zoom / Scale window + // FIXME-OBSOLETE: This is an old feature, it still works but pretty much nobody is using it and may be best redesigned. + if (wheel.y != 0.0f && g.IO.KeyCtrl && g.IO.FontAllowUserScaling) + { + LockWheelingWindow(mouse_window, wheel.y); + ImGuiWindow* window = mouse_window; + const float new_font_scale = ImClamp(window->FontWindowScale + g.IO.MouseWheel * 0.10f, 0.50f, 2.50f); + const float scale = new_font_scale / window->FontWindowScale; + window->FontWindowScale = new_font_scale; + if (window == window->RootWindow) + { + const ImVec2 offset = window->Size * (1.0f - scale) * (g.IO.MousePos - window->Pos) / window->Size; + SetWindowPos(window, window->Pos + offset, 0); + window->Size = ImFloor(window->Size * scale); + window->SizeFull = ImFloor(window->SizeFull * scale); + } + return; + } + if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) + return; + + // Mouse wheel scrolling + // Read about io.MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap and its issue on Mac+Emscripten in UpdateMouseInputs() + if (g.IO.MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap) + wheel = ImVec2(wheel.y, 0.0f); + + // Maintain a rough average of moving magnitude on both axises + // FIXME: should by based on wall clock time rather than frame-counter + g.WheelingAxisAvg.x = ImExponentialMovingAverage(g.WheelingAxisAvg.x, ImAbs(wheel.x), 30); + g.WheelingAxisAvg.y = ImExponentialMovingAverage(g.WheelingAxisAvg.y, ImAbs(wheel.y), 30); + + // In the rare situation where FindBestWheelingWindow() had to defer first frame of wheeling due to ambiguous main axis, reinject it now. + wheel += g.WheelingWindowWheelRemainder; + g.WheelingWindowWheelRemainder = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + if (wheel.x == 0.0f && wheel.y == 0.0f) + return; + + // Mouse wheel scrolling: find target and apply + // - don't renew lock if axis doesn't apply on the window. + // - select a main axis when both axises are being moved. + if (ImGuiWindow* window = (g.WheelingWindow ? g.WheelingWindow : FindBestWheelingWindow(wheel))) + if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs)) + { + bool do_scroll[2] = { wheel.x != 0.0f && window->ScrollMax.x != 0.0f, wheel.y != 0.0f && window->ScrollMax.y != 0.0f }; + if (do_scroll[ImGuiAxis_X] && do_scroll[ImGuiAxis_Y]) + do_scroll[(g.WheelingAxisAvg.x > g.WheelingAxisAvg.y) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X] = false; + if (do_scroll[ImGuiAxis_X]) + { + LockWheelingWindow(window, wheel.x); + float max_step = window->InnerRect.GetWidth() * 0.67f; + float scroll_step = ImFloor(ImMin(2 * window->CalcFontSize(), max_step)); + SetScrollX(window, window->Scroll.x - wheel.x * scroll_step); + } + if (do_scroll[ImGuiAxis_Y]) + { + LockWheelingWindow(window, wheel.y); + float max_step = window->InnerRect.GetHeight() * 0.67f; + float scroll_step = ImFloor(ImMin(5 * window->CalcFontSize(), max_step)); + SetScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y - wheel.y * scroll_step); + } + } +} + +void ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(bool want_capture_keyboard) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = want_capture_keyboard ? 1 : 0; +} + +void ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(bool want_capture_mouse) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = want_capture_mouse ? 1 : 0; +} + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS +static const char* GetInputSourceName(ImGuiInputSource source) +{ + const char* input_source_names[] = { "None", "Mouse", "Keyboard", "Gamepad", "Clipboard" }; + IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(input_source_names) == ImGuiInputSource_COUNT && source >= 0 && source < ImGuiInputSource_COUNT); + return input_source_names[source]; +} +static const char* GetMouseSourceName(ImGuiMouseSource source) +{ + const char* mouse_source_names[] = { "Mouse", "TouchScreen", "Pen" }; + IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(mouse_source_names) == ImGuiMouseSource_COUNT && source >= 0 && source < ImGuiMouseSource_COUNT); + return mouse_source_names[source]; +} +static void DebugPrintInputEvent(const char* prefix, const ImGuiInputEvent* e) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos) { if (e->MousePos.PosX == -FLT_MAX && e->MousePos.PosY == -FLT_MAX) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] %s: MousePos (-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX)\n", prefix); else IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] %s: MousePos (%.1f, %.1f) (%s)\n", prefix, e->MousePos.PosX, e->MousePos.PosY, GetMouseSourceName(e->MousePos.MouseSource)); return; } + if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] %s: MouseButton %d %s (%s)\n", prefix, e->MouseButton.Button, e->MouseButton.Down ? "Down" : "Up", GetMouseSourceName(e->MouseButton.MouseSource)); return; } + if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] %s: MouseWheel (%.3f, %.3f) (%s)\n", prefix, e->MouseWheel.WheelX, e->MouseWheel.WheelY, GetMouseSourceName(e->MouseWheel.MouseSource)); return; } + if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] %s: Key \"%s\" %s\n", prefix, ImGui::GetKeyName(e->Key.Key), e->Key.Down ? "Down" : "Up"); return; } + if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Text) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] %s: Text: %c (U+%08X)\n", prefix, e->Text.Char, e->Text.Char); return; } + if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Focus) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("[io] %s: AppFocused %d\n", prefix, e->AppFocused.Focused); return; } +} +#endif + +// Process input queue +// We always call this with the value of 'bool g.IO.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue'. +// - trickle_fast_inputs = false : process all events, turn into flattened input state (e.g. successive down/up/down/up will be lost) +// - trickle_fast_inputs = true : process as many events as possible (successive down/up/down/up will be trickled over several frames so nothing is lost) (new feature in 1.87) +void ImGui::UpdateInputEvents(bool trickle_fast_inputs) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + + // Only trickle chars<>key when working with InputText() + // FIXME: InputText() could parse event trail? + // FIXME: Could specialize chars<>keys trickling rules for control keys (those not typically associated to characters) + const bool trickle_interleaved_keys_and_text = (trickle_fast_inputs && g.WantTextInputNextFrame == 1); + + bool mouse_moved = false, mouse_wheeled = false, key_changed = false, text_inputted = false; + int mouse_button_changed = 0x00; + ImBitArray key_changed_mask; + + int event_n = 0; + for (; event_n < g.InputEventsQueue.Size; event_n++) + { + ImGuiInputEvent* e = &g.InputEventsQueue[event_n]; + if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos) + { + // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we already handled a mouse button change + ImVec2 event_pos(e->MousePos.PosX, e->MousePos.PosY); + if (trickle_fast_inputs && (mouse_button_changed != 0 || mouse_wheeled || key_changed || text_inputted)) + break; + io.MousePos = event_pos; + io.MouseSource = e->MousePos.MouseSource; + mouse_moved = true; + } + else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton) + { + // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we got multiple action on the same button + const ImGuiMouseButton button = e->MouseButton.Button; + IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT); + if (trickle_fast_inputs && ((mouse_button_changed & (1 << button)) || mouse_wheeled)) + break; + if (trickle_fast_inputs && e->MouseButton.MouseSource == ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen && mouse_moved) // #2702: TouchScreen have no initial hover. + break; + io.MouseDown[button] = e->MouseButton.Down; + io.MouseSource = e->MouseButton.MouseSource; + mouse_button_changed |= (1 << button); + } + else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel) + { + // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we got multiple action on the event + if (trickle_fast_inputs && (mouse_moved || mouse_button_changed != 0)) + break; + io.MouseWheelH += e->MouseWheel.WheelX; + io.MouseWheel += e->MouseWheel.WheelY; + io.MouseSource = e->MouseWheel.MouseSource; + mouse_wheeled = true; + } + else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key) + { + // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we got multiple action on the same button + ImGuiKey key = e->Key.Key; + IM_ASSERT(key != ImGuiKey_None); + ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key); + const int key_data_index = (int)(key_data - g.IO.KeysData); + if (trickle_fast_inputs && key_data->Down != e->Key.Down && (key_changed_mask.TestBit(key_data_index) || text_inputted || mouse_button_changed != 0)) + break; + key_data->Down = e->Key.Down; + key_data->AnalogValue = e->Key.AnalogValue; + key_changed = true; + key_changed_mask.SetBit(key_data_index); + + // Allow legacy code using io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex()] with new backends +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + io.KeysDown[key_data_index] = key_data->Down; + if (io.KeyMap[key_data_index] != -1) + io.KeysDown[io.KeyMap[key_data_index]] = key_data->Down; +#endif + } + else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Text) + { + // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if keys/mouse have been interacted with + if (trickle_fast_inputs && ((key_changed && trickle_interleaved_keys_and_text) || mouse_button_changed != 0 || mouse_moved || mouse_wheeled)) + break; + unsigned int c = e->Text.Char; + io.InputQueueCharacters.push_back(c <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX ? (ImWchar)c : IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID); + if (trickle_interleaved_keys_and_text) + text_inputted = true; + } + else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Focus) + { + // We intentionally overwrite this and process in NewFrame(), in order to give a chance + // to multi-viewports backends to queue AddFocusEvent(false) + AddFocusEvent(true) in same frame. + const bool focus_lost = !e->AppFocused.Focused; + io.AppFocusLost = focus_lost; + } + else + { + IM_ASSERT(0 && "Unknown event!"); + } + } + + // Record trail (for domain-specific applications wanting to access a precise trail) + //if (event_n != 0) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("Processed: %d / Remaining: %d\n", event_n, g.InputEventsQueue.Size - event_n); + for (int n = 0; n < event_n; n++) + g.InputEventsTrail.push_back(g.InputEventsQueue[n]); + + // [DEBUG] +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + if (event_n != 0 && (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO)) + for (int n = 0; n < g.InputEventsQueue.Size; n++) + DebugPrintInputEvent(n < event_n ? "Processed" : "Remaining", &g.InputEventsQueue[n]); +#endif + + // Remaining events will be processed on the next frame + if (event_n == g.InputEventsQueue.Size) + g.InputEventsQueue.resize(0); + else + g.InputEventsQueue.erase(g.InputEventsQueue.Data, g.InputEventsQueue.Data + event_n); + + // Clear buttons state when focus is lost + // - this is useful so e.g. releasing Alt after focus loss on Alt-Tab doesn't trigger the Alt menu toggle. + // - we clear in EndFrame() and not now in order allow application/user code polling this flag + // (e.g. custom backend may want to clear additional data, custom widgets may want to react with a "canceling" event). + if (g.IO.AppFocusLost) + g.IO.ClearInputKeys(); +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key) +{ + if (!IsNamedKeyOrModKey(key)) + return ImGuiKeyOwner_None; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiKeyOwnerData* owner_data = GetKeyOwnerData(&g, key); + ImGuiID owner_id = owner_data->OwnerCurr; + + if (g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys && owner_id != g.ActiveId && owner_id != ImGuiKeyOwner_Any) + if (key >= ImGuiKey_Keyboard_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_Keyboard_END) + return ImGuiKeyOwner_None; + + return owner_id; +} + +// TestKeyOwner(..., ID) : (owner == None || owner == ID) +// TestKeyOwner(..., None) : (owner == None) +// TestKeyOwner(..., Any) : no owner test +// All paths are also testing for key not being locked, for the rare cases that key have been locked with using ImGuiInputFlags_LockXXX flags. +bool ImGui::TestKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id) +{ + if (!IsNamedKeyOrModKey(key)) + return true; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys && owner_id != g.ActiveId && owner_id != ImGuiKeyOwner_Any) + if (key >= ImGuiKey_Keyboard_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_Keyboard_END) + return false; + + ImGuiKeyOwnerData* owner_data = GetKeyOwnerData(&g, key); + if (owner_id == ImGuiKeyOwner_Any) + return (owner_data->LockThisFrame == false); + + // Note: SetKeyOwner() sets OwnerCurr. It is not strictly required for most mouse routing overlap (because of ActiveId/HoveredId + // are acting as filter before this has a chance to filter), but sane as soon as user tries to look into things. + // Setting OwnerCurr in SetKeyOwner() is more consistent than testing OwnerNext here: would be inconsistent with getter and other functions. + if (owner_data->OwnerCurr != owner_id) + { + if (owner_data->LockThisFrame) + return false; + if (owner_data->OwnerCurr != ImGuiKeyOwner_None) + return false; + } + + return true; +} + +// _LockXXX flags are useful to lock keys away from code which is not input-owner aware. +// When using _LockXXX flags, you can use ImGuiKeyOwner_Any to lock keys from everyone. +// - SetKeyOwner(..., None) : clears owner +// - SetKeyOwner(..., Any, !Lock) : illegal (assert) +// - SetKeyOwner(..., Any or None, Lock) : set lock +void ImGui::SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKeyOrModKey(key) && (owner_id != ImGuiKeyOwner_Any || (flags & (ImGuiInputFlags_LockThisFrame | ImGuiInputFlags_LockUntilRelease)))); // Can only use _Any with _LockXXX flags (to eat a key away without an ID to retrieve it) + IM_ASSERT((flags & ~ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedBySetKeyOwner) == 0); // Passing flags not supported by this function! + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiKeyOwnerData* owner_data = GetKeyOwnerData(&g, key); + owner_data->OwnerCurr = owner_data->OwnerNext = owner_id; + + // We cannot lock by default as it would likely break lots of legacy code. + // In the case of using LockUntilRelease while key is not down we still lock during the frame (no key_data->Down test) + owner_data->LockUntilRelease = (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_LockUntilRelease) != 0; + owner_data->LockThisFrame = (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_LockThisFrame) != 0 || (owner_data->LockUntilRelease); +} + +// Rarely used helper +void ImGui::SetKeyOwnersForKeyChord(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Ctrl) { SetKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Ctrl, owner_id, flags); } + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Shift) { SetKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Shift, owner_id, flags); } + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Alt) { SetKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Alt, owner_id, flags); } + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Super) { SetKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Super, owner_id, flags); } + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Shortcut) { SetKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Shortcut, owner_id, flags); } + if (key_chord & ~ImGuiMod_Mask_) { SetKeyOwner((ImGuiKey)(key_chord & ~ImGuiMod_Mask_), owner_id, flags); } +} + +// This is more or less equivalent to: +// if (IsItemHovered() || IsItemActive()) +// SetKeyOwner(key, GetItemID()); +// Extensive uses of that (e.g. many calls for a single item) may want to manually perform the tests once and then call SetKeyOwner() multiple times. +// More advanced usage scenarios may want to call SetKeyOwner() manually based on different condition. +// Worth noting is that only one item can be hovered and only one item can be active, therefore this usage pattern doesn't need to bother with routing and priority. +void ImGui::SetItemKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID; + if (id == 0 || (g.HoveredId != id && g.ActiveId != id)) + return; + if ((flags & ImGuiInputFlags_CondMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiInputFlags_CondDefault_; + if ((g.HoveredId == id && (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_CondHovered)) || (g.ActiveId == id && (flags & ImGuiInputFlags_CondActive))) + { + IM_ASSERT((flags & ~ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedBySetItemKeyOwner) == 0); // Passing flags not supported by this function! + SetKeyOwner(key, id, flags & ~ImGuiInputFlags_CondMask_); + } +} + +bool ImGui::Shortcut(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // When using (owner_id == 0/Any): SetShortcutRouting() will use CurrentFocusScopeId and filter with this, so IsKeyPressed() is fine with he 0/Any. + if ((flags & ImGuiInputFlags_RouteMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused; + if (!SetShortcutRouting(key_chord, owner_id, flags)) + return false; + + if (key_chord & ImGuiMod_Shortcut) + key_chord = ConvertShortcutMod(key_chord); + ImGuiKey mods = (ImGuiKey)(key_chord & ImGuiMod_Mask_); + if (g.IO.KeyMods != mods) + return false; + + // Special storage location for mods + ImGuiKey key = (ImGuiKey)(key_chord & ~ImGuiMod_Mask_); + if (key == ImGuiKey_None) + key = ConvertSingleModFlagToKey(&g, mods); + + if (!IsKeyPressed(key, owner_id, (flags & (ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat | (ImGuiInputFlags)ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateMask_)))) + return false; + IM_ASSERT((flags & ~ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedByShortcut) == 0); // Passing flags not supported by this function! + + return true; +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ERROR CHECKING +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Helper function to verify ABI compatibility between caller code and compiled version of Dear ImGui. +// Verify that the type sizes are matching between the calling file's compilation unit and imgui.cpp's compilation unit +// If this triggers you have an issue: +// - Most commonly: mismatched headers and compiled code version. +// - Or: mismatched configuration #define, compilation settings, packing pragma etc. +// The configuration settings mentioned in imconfig.h must be set for all compilation units involved with Dear ImGui, +// which is way it is required you put them in your imconfig file (and not just before including imgui.h). +// Otherwise it is possible that different compilation units would see different structure layout +bool ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char* version, size_t sz_io, size_t sz_style, size_t sz_vec2, size_t sz_vec4, size_t sz_vert, size_t sz_idx) +{ + bool error = false; + if (strcmp(version, IMGUI_VERSION) != 0) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(strcmp(version, IMGUI_VERSION) == 0 && "Mismatched version string!"); } + if (sz_io != sizeof(ImGuiIO)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_io == sizeof(ImGuiIO) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); } + if (sz_style != sizeof(ImGuiStyle)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_style == sizeof(ImGuiStyle) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); } + if (sz_vec2 != sizeof(ImVec2)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vec2 == sizeof(ImVec2) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); } + if (sz_vec4 != sizeof(ImVec4)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vec4 == sizeof(ImVec4) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); } + if (sz_vert != sizeof(ImDrawVert)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vert == sizeof(ImDrawVert) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); } + if (sz_idx != sizeof(ImDrawIdx)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_idx == sizeof(ImDrawIdx) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); } + return !error; +} + +// Until 1.89 (IMGUI_VERSION_NUM < 18814) it was legal to use SetCursorPos() to extend the boundary of a parent (e.g. window or table cell) +// This is causing issues and ambiguity and we need to retire that. +// See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/5548 for more details. +// [Scenario 1] +// Previously this would make the window content size ~200x200: +// Begin(...) + SetCursorScreenPos(GetCursorScreenPos() + ImVec2(200,200)) + End(); // NOT OK +// Instead, please submit an item: +// Begin(...) + SetCursorScreenPos(GetCursorScreenPos() + ImVec2(200,200)) + Dummy(ImVec2(0,0)) + End(); // OK +// Alternative: +// Begin(...) + Dummy(ImVec2(200,200)) + End(); // OK +// [Scenario 2] +// For reference this is one of the issue what we aim to fix with this change: +// BeginGroup() + SomeItem("foobar") + SetCursorScreenPos(GetCursorScreenPos()) + EndGroup() +// The previous logic made SetCursorScreenPos(GetCursorScreenPos()) have a side-effect! It would erroneously incorporate ItemSpacing.y after the item into content size, making the group taller! +// While this code is a little twisted, no-one would expect SetXXX(GetXXX()) to have a side-effect. Using vertical alignment patterns could trigger this issue. +void ImGui::ErrorCheckUsingSetCursorPosToExtendParentBoundaries() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(window->DC.IsSetPos); + window->DC.IsSetPos = false; +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + if (window->DC.CursorPos.x <= window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x && window->DC.CursorPos.y <= window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y) + return; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + IM_ASSERT(0 && "Code uses SetCursorPos()/SetCursorScreenPos() to extend window/parent boundaries. Please submit an item e.g. Dummy() to validate extent."); +#else + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos); +#endif +} + +static void ImGui::ErrorCheckNewFrameSanityChecks() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Check user IM_ASSERT macro + // (IF YOU GET A WARNING OR COMPILE ERROR HERE: it means your assert macro is incorrectly defined! + // If your macro uses multiple statements, it NEEDS to be surrounded by a 'do { ... } while (0)' block. + // This is a common C/C++ idiom to allow multiple statements macros to be used in control flow blocks.) + // #define IM_ASSERT(EXPR) if (SomeCode(EXPR)) SomeMoreCode(); // Wrong! + // #define IM_ASSERT(EXPR) do { if (SomeCode(EXPR)) SomeMoreCode(); } while (0) // Correct! + if (true) IM_ASSERT(1); else IM_ASSERT(0); + + // Emscripten backends are often imprecise in their submission of DeltaTime. (#6114, #3644) + // Ideally the Emscripten app/backend should aim to fix or smooth this value and avoid feeding zero, but we tolerate it. +#ifdef __EMSCRIPTEN__ + if (g.IO.DeltaTime <= 0.0f && g.FrameCount > 0) + g.IO.DeltaTime = 0.00001f; +#endif + + // Check user data + // (We pass an error message in the assert expression to make it visible to programmers who are not using a debugger, as most assert handlers display their argument) + IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized); + IM_ASSERT((g.IO.DeltaTime > 0.0f || g.FrameCount == 0) && "Need a positive DeltaTime!"); + IM_ASSERT((g.FrameCount == 0 || g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount) && "Forgot to call Render() or EndFrame() at the end of the previous frame?"); + IM_ASSERT(g.IO.DisplaySize.x >= 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y >= 0.0f && "Invalid DisplaySize value!"); + IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->IsBuilt() && "Font Atlas not built! Make sure you called ImGui_ImplXXXX_NewFrame() function for renderer backend, which should call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8()"); + IM_ASSERT(g.Style.CurveTessellationTol > 0.0f && "Invalid style setting!"); + IM_ASSERT(g.Style.CircleTessellationMaxError > 0.0f && "Invalid style setting!"); + IM_ASSERT(g.Style.Alpha >= 0.0f && g.Style.Alpha <= 1.0f && "Invalid style setting!"); // Allows us to avoid a few clamps in color computations + IM_ASSERT(g.Style.WindowMinSize.x >= 1.0f && g.Style.WindowMinSize.y >= 1.0f && "Invalid style setting."); + IM_ASSERT(g.Style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_None || g.Style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left || g.Style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Right); + IM_ASSERT(g.Style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left || g.Style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Right); +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + for (int n = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_COUNT; n++) + IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[n] >= -1 && g.IO.KeyMap[n] < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END && "io.KeyMap[] contains an out of bound value (need to be 0..511, or -1 for unmapped key)"); + + // Check: required key mapping (we intentionally do NOT check all keys to not pressure user into setting up everything, but Space is required and was only added in 1.60 WIP) + if ((g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) && g.IO.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 1) + IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_Space] != -1 && "ImGuiKey_Space is not mapped, required for keyboard navigation."); +#endif + + // Check: the io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges option requires backend to honor mouse cursor changes and set the ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors flag accordingly. + if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges && !(g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors)) + g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = false; +} + +static void ImGui::ErrorCheckEndFrameSanityChecks() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Verify that io.KeyXXX fields haven't been tampered with. Key mods should not be modified between NewFrame() and EndFrame() + // One possible reason leading to this assert is that your backends update inputs _AFTER_ NewFrame(). + // It is known that when some modal native windows called mid-frame takes focus away, some backends such as GLFW will + // send key release events mid-frame. This would normally trigger this assertion and lead to sheared inputs. + // We silently accommodate for this case by ignoring the case where all io.KeyXXX modifiers were released (aka key_mod_flags == 0), + // while still correctly asserting on mid-frame key press events. + const ImGuiKeyChord key_mods = GetMergedModsFromKeys(); + IM_ASSERT((key_mods == 0 || g.IO.KeyMods == key_mods) && "Mismatching io.KeyCtrl/io.KeyShift/io.KeyAlt/io.KeySuper vs io.KeyMods"); + IM_UNUSED(key_mods); + + // [EXPERIMENTAL] Recover from errors: You may call this yourself before EndFrame(). + //ErrorCheckEndFrameRecover(); + + // Report when there is a mismatch of Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls. Important: Remember that the Begin/BeginChild API requires you + // to always call End/EndChild even if Begin/BeginChild returns false! (this is unfortunately inconsistent with most other Begin* API). + if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size != 1) + { + if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1) + { + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindowStack.back().Window; // <-- This window was not Ended! + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1, "Mismatched Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls: did you forget to call End/EndChild?"); + IM_UNUSED(window); + while (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1) + End(); + } + else + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1, "Mismatched Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls: did you call End/EndChild too much?"); + } + } + + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.GroupStack.Size == 0, "Missing EndGroup call!"); +} + +// Experimental recovery from incorrect usage of BeginXXX/EndXXX/PushXXX/PopXXX calls. +// Must be called during or before EndFrame(). +// This is generally flawed as we are not necessarily End/Popping things in the right order. +// FIXME: Can't recover from inside BeginTabItem/EndTabItem yet. +// FIXME: Can't recover from interleaved BeginTabBar/Begin +void ImGui::ErrorCheckEndFrameRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data) +{ + // PVS-Studio V1044 is "Loop break conditions do not depend on the number of iterations" + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + while (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 0) //-V1044 + { + ErrorCheckEndWindowRecover(log_callback, user_data); + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1) + { + IM_ASSERT(window->IsFallbackWindow); + break; + } + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndChild() for '%s'", window->Name); + EndChild(); + } + else + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing End() for '%s'", window->Name); + End(); + } + } +} + +// Must be called before End()/EndChild() +void ImGui::ErrorCheckEndWindowRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + while (g.CurrentTable && (g.CurrentTable->OuterWindow == g.CurrentWindow || g.CurrentTable->InnerWindow == g.CurrentWindow)) + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndTable() in '%s'", g.CurrentTable->OuterWindow->Name); + EndTable(); + } + + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiStackSizes* stack_sizes = &g.CurrentWindowStack.back().StackSizesOnBegin; + IM_ASSERT(window != NULL); + while (g.CurrentTabBar != NULL) //-V1044 + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndTabBar() in '%s'", window->Name); + EndTabBar(); + } + while (window->DC.TreeDepth > 0) + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing TreePop() in '%s'", window->Name); + TreePop(); + } + while (g.GroupStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfGroupStack) //-V1044 + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndGroup() in '%s'", window->Name); + EndGroup(); + } + while (window->IDStack.Size > 1) + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopID() in '%s'", window->Name); + PopID(); + } + while (g.DisabledStackSize > stack_sizes->SizeOfDisabledStack) //-V1044 + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndDisabled() in '%s'", window->Name); + EndDisabled(); + } + while (g.ColorStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfColorStack) + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopStyleColor() in '%s' for ImGuiCol_%s", window->Name, GetStyleColorName(g.ColorStack.back().Col)); + PopStyleColor(); + } + while (g.ItemFlagsStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfItemFlagsStack) //-V1044 + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopItemFlag() in '%s'", window->Name); + PopItemFlag(); + } + while (g.StyleVarStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfStyleVarStack) //-V1044 + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopStyleVar() in '%s'", window->Name); + PopStyleVar(); + } + while (g.FontStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfFontStack) //-V1044 + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopFont() in '%s'", window->Name); + PopFont(); + } + while (g.FocusScopeStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfFocusScopeStack + 1) //-V1044 + { + if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopFocusScope() in '%s'", window->Name); + PopFocusScope(); + } +} + +// Save current stack sizes for later compare +void ImGuiStackSizes::SetToContextState(ImGuiContext* ctx) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + SizeOfIDStack = (short)window->IDStack.Size; + SizeOfColorStack = (short)g.ColorStack.Size; + SizeOfStyleVarStack = (short)g.StyleVarStack.Size; + SizeOfFontStack = (short)g.FontStack.Size; + SizeOfFocusScopeStack = (short)g.FocusScopeStack.Size; + SizeOfGroupStack = (short)g.GroupStack.Size; + SizeOfItemFlagsStack = (short)g.ItemFlagsStack.Size; + SizeOfBeginPopupStack = (short)g.BeginPopupStack.Size; + SizeOfDisabledStack = (short)g.DisabledStackSize; +} + +// Compare to detect usage errors +void ImGuiStackSizes::CompareWithContextState(ImGuiContext* ctx) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_UNUSED(window); + + // Window stacks + // NOT checking: DC.ItemWidth, DC.TextWrapPos (per window) to allow user to conveniently push once and not pop (they are cleared on Begin) + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfIDStack == window->IDStack.Size && "PushID/PopID or TreeNode/TreePop Mismatch!"); + + // Global stacks + // For color, style and font stacks there is an incentive to use Push/Begin/Pop/.../End patterns, so we relax our checks a little to allow them. + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfGroupStack == g.GroupStack.Size && "BeginGroup/EndGroup Mismatch!"); + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfBeginPopupStack == g.BeginPopupStack.Size && "BeginPopup/EndPopup or BeginMenu/EndMenu Mismatch!"); + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfDisabledStack == g.DisabledStackSize && "BeginDisabled/EndDisabled Mismatch!"); + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfItemFlagsStack >= g.ItemFlagsStack.Size && "PushItemFlag/PopItemFlag Mismatch!"); + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfColorStack >= g.ColorStack.Size && "PushStyleColor/PopStyleColor Mismatch!"); + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfStyleVarStack >= g.StyleVarStack.Size && "PushStyleVar/PopStyleVar Mismatch!"); + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfFontStack >= g.FontStack.Size && "PushFont/PopFont Mismatch!"); + IM_ASSERT(SizeOfFocusScopeStack == g.FocusScopeStack.Size && "PushFocusScope/PopFocusScope Mismatch!"); +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] LAYOUT +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ItemSize() +// - ItemAdd() +// - SameLine() +// - GetCursorScreenPos() +// - SetCursorScreenPos() +// - GetCursorPos(), GetCursorPosX(), GetCursorPosY() +// - SetCursorPos(), SetCursorPosX(), SetCursorPosY() +// - GetCursorStartPos() +// - Indent() +// - Unindent() +// - SetNextItemWidth() +// - PushItemWidth() +// - PushMultiItemsWidths() +// - PopItemWidth() +// - CalcItemWidth() +// - CalcItemSize() +// - GetTextLineHeight() +// - GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() +// - GetFrameHeight() +// - GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() +// - GetContentRegionMax() +// - GetContentRegionMaxAbs() [Internal] +// - GetContentRegionAvail(), +// - GetWindowContentRegionMin(), GetWindowContentRegionMax() +// - BeginGroup() +// - EndGroup() +// Also see in imgui_widgets: tab bars, and in imgui_tables: tables, columns. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Advance cursor given item size for layout. +// Register minimum needed size so it can extend the bounding box used for auto-fit calculation. +// See comments in ItemAdd() about how/why the size provided to ItemSize() vs ItemAdd() may often different. +void ImGui::ItemSize(const ImVec2& size, float text_baseline_y) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + // We increase the height in this function to accommodate for baseline offset. + // In theory we should be offsetting the starting position (window->DC.CursorPos), that will be the topic of a larger refactor, + // but since ItemSize() is not yet an API that moves the cursor (to handle e.g. wrapping) enlarging the height has the same effect. + const float offset_to_match_baseline_y = (text_baseline_y >= 0) ? ImMax(0.0f, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset - text_baseline_y) : 0.0f; + + const float line_y1 = window->DC.IsSameLine ? window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y : window->DC.CursorPos.y; + const float line_height = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, /*ImMax(*/window->DC.CursorPos.y - line_y1/*, 0.0f)*/ + size.y + offset_to_match_baseline_y); + + // Always align ourselves on pixel boundaries + //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(size.x, line_height), IM_COL32(255,0,0,200)); // [DEBUG] + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x + size.x; + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y = line_y1; + window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x); // Next line + window->DC.CursorPos.y = IM_FLOOR(line_y1 + line_height + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y); // Next line + window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x); + window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y); + //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddCircle(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, 3.0f, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), 4); // [DEBUG] + + window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = line_height; + window->DC.CurrLineSize.y = 0.0f; + window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, text_baseline_y); + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f; + window->DC.IsSameLine = window->DC.IsSetPos = false; + + // Horizontal layout mode + if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) + SameLine(); +} + +// Declare item bounding box for clipping and interaction. +// Note that the size can be different than the one provided to ItemSize(). Typically, widgets that spread over available surface +// declare their minimum size requirement to ItemSize() and provide a larger region to ItemAdd() which is used drawing/interaction. +bool ImGui::ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb_arg, ImGuiItemFlags extra_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + // Set item data + // (DisplayRect is left untouched, made valid when ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect is set) + g.LastItemData.ID = id; + g.LastItemData.Rect = bb; + g.LastItemData.NavRect = nav_bb_arg ? *nav_bb_arg : bb; + g.LastItemData.InFlags = g.CurrentItemFlags | g.NextItemData.ItemFlags | extra_flags; + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = ImGuiItemStatusFlags_None; + + // Directional navigation processing + if (id != 0) + { + KeepAliveID(id); + + // Runs prior to clipping early-out + // (a) So that NavInitRequest can be honored, for newly opened windows to select a default widget + // (b) So that we can scroll up/down past clipped items. This adds a small O(N) cost to regular navigation requests + // unfortunately, but it is still limited to one window. It may not scale very well for windows with ten of + // thousands of item, but at least NavMoveRequest is only set on user interaction, aka maximum once a frame. + // We could early out with "if (is_clipped && !g.NavInitRequest) return false;" but when we wouldn't be able + // to reach unclipped widgets. This would work if user had explicit scrolling control (e.g. mapped on a stick). + // We intentionally don't check if g.NavWindow != NULL because g.NavAnyRequest should only be set when it is non null. + // If we crash on a NULL g.NavWindow we need to fix the bug elsewhere. + if (!(g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav)) + { + window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext |= (1 << window->DC.NavLayerCurrent); + if (g.NavId == id || g.NavAnyRequest) + if (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav) + if (window == g.NavWindow || ((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)) + NavProcessItem(); + } + + // [DEBUG] People keep stumbling on this problem and using "" as identifier in the root of a window instead of "##something". + // Empty identifier are valid and useful in a small amount of cases, but 99.9% of the time you want to use "##something". + // READ THE FAQ: https://dearimgui.com/faq + IM_ASSERT(id != window->ID && "Cannot have an empty ID at the root of a window. If you need an empty label, use ## and read the FAQ about how the ID Stack works!"); + } + g.NextItemData.Flags = ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None; + g.NextItemData.ItemFlags = ImGuiItemFlags_None; + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE + if (id != 0) + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(id, g.LastItemData.NavRect, &g.LastItemData); +#endif + + // Clipping test + // (FIXME: This is a modified copy of IsClippedEx() so we can reuse the is_rect_visible value) + //const bool is_clipped = IsClippedEx(bb, id); + //if (is_clipped) + // return false; + const bool is_rect_visible = bb.Overlaps(window->ClipRect); + if (!is_rect_visible) + if (id == 0 || (id != g.ActiveId && id != g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame && id != g.NavId)) + if (!g.LogEnabled) + return false; + + // [DEBUG] +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + if (id != 0 && id == g.DebugLocateId) + DebugLocateItemResolveWithLastItem(); +#endif + //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,120)); // [DEBUG] + //if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav) == 0) + // window->DrawList->AddRect(g.LastItemData.NavRect.Min, g.LastItemData.NavRect.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,255)); // [DEBUG] + + // We need to calculate this now to take account of the current clipping rectangle (as items like Selectable may change them) + if (is_rect_visible) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible; + if (IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max)) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect; + return true; +} + +// Gets back to previous line and continue with horizontal layout +// offset_from_start_x == 0 : follow right after previous item +// offset_from_start_x != 0 : align to specified x position (relative to window/group left) +// spacing_w < 0 : use default spacing if offset_from_start_x == 0, no spacing if offset_from_start_x != 0 +// spacing_w >= 0 : enforce spacing amount +void ImGui::SameLine(float offset_from_start_x, float spacing_w) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + if (offset_from_start_x != 0.0f) + { + if (spacing_w < 0.0f) + spacing_w = 0.0f; + window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + offset_from_start_x + spacing_w + window->DC.GroupOffset.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x; + window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y; + } + else + { + if (spacing_w < 0.0f) + spacing_w = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x; + window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x + spacing_w; + window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y; + } + window->DC.CurrLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize; + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset; + window->DC.IsSameLine = true; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->DC.CursorPos; +} + +void ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.CursorPos = pos; + //window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos); + window->DC.IsSetPos = true; +} + +// User generally sees positions in window coordinates. Internally we store CursorPos in absolute screen coordinates because it is more convenient. +// Conversion happens as we pass the value to user, but it makes our naming convention confusing because GetCursorPos() == (DC.CursorPos - window.Pos). May want to rename 'DC.CursorPos'. +ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorPos() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos + window->Scroll; +} + +float ImGui::GetCursorPosX() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x; +} + +float ImGui::GetCursorPosY() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->DC.CursorPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y; +} + +void ImGui::SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.CursorPos = window->Pos - window->Scroll + local_pos; + //window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos); + window->DC.IsSetPos = true; +} + +void ImGui::SetCursorPosX(float x) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + x; + //window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.x); + window->DC.IsSetPos = true; +} + +void ImGui::SetCursorPosY(float y) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + y; + //window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y); + window->DC.IsSetPos = true; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorStartPos() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->DC.CursorStartPos - window->Pos; +} + +void ImGui::Indent(float indent_w) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.Indent.x += (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing; + window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x; +} + +void ImGui::Unindent(float indent_w) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.Indent.x -= (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing; + window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x; +} + +// Affect large frame+labels widgets only. +void ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(float item_width) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextItemData.Flags |= ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth; + g.NextItemData.Width = item_width; +} + +// FIXME: Remove the == 0.0f behavior? +void ImGui::PushItemWidth(float item_width) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemWidth); // Backup current width + window->DC.ItemWidth = (item_width == 0.0f ? window->ItemWidthDefault : item_width); + g.NextItemData.Flags &= ~ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth; +} + +void ImGui::PushMultiItemsWidths(int components, float w_full) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR((w_full - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)) / (float)components)); + const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(w_full - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1))); + window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemWidth); // Backup current width + window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_last); + for (int i = 0; i < components - 2; i++) + window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_one); + window->DC.ItemWidth = (components == 1) ? w_item_last : w_item_one; + g.NextItemData.Flags &= ~ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth; +} + +void ImGui::PopItemWidth() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back(); + window->DC.ItemWidthStack.pop_back(); +} + +// Calculate default item width given value passed to PushItemWidth() or SetNextItemWidth(). +// The SetNextItemWidth() data is generally cleared/consumed by ItemAdd() or NextItemData.ClearFlags() +float ImGui::CalcItemWidth() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + float w; + if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth) + w = g.NextItemData.Width; + else + w = window->DC.ItemWidth; + if (w < 0.0f) + { + float region_max_x = GetContentRegionMaxAbs().x; + w = ImMax(1.0f, region_max_x - window->DC.CursorPos.x + w); + } + w = IM_FLOOR(w); + return w; +} + +// [Internal] Calculate full item size given user provided 'size' parameter and default width/height. Default width is often == CalcItemWidth(). +// Those two functions CalcItemWidth vs CalcItemSize are awkwardly named because they are not fully symmetrical. +// Note that only CalcItemWidth() is publicly exposed. +// The 4.0f here may be changed to match CalcItemWidth() and/or BeginChild() (right now we have a mismatch which is harmless but undesirable) +ImVec2 ImGui::CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_w, float default_h) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + ImVec2 region_max; + if (size.x < 0.0f || size.y < 0.0f) + region_max = GetContentRegionMaxAbs(); + + if (size.x == 0.0f) + size.x = default_w; + else if (size.x < 0.0f) + size.x = ImMax(4.0f, region_max.x - window->DC.CursorPos.x + size.x); + + if (size.y == 0.0f) + size.y = default_h; + else if (size.y < 0.0f) + size.y = ImMax(4.0f, region_max.y - window->DC.CursorPos.y + size.y); + + return size; +} + +float ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.FontSize; +} + +float ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y; +} + +float ImGui::GetFrameHeight() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f; +} + +float ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y; +} + +// FIXME: All the Contents Region function are messy or misleading. WE WILL AIM TO OBSOLETE ALL OF THEM WITH A NEW "WORK RECT" API. Thanks for your patience! + +// FIXME: This is in window space (not screen space!). +ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionMax() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImVec2 mx = (window->DC.CurrentColumns || g.CurrentTable) ? window->WorkRect.Max : window->ContentRegionRect.Max; + return mx - window->Pos; +} + +// [Internal] Absolute coordinate. Saner. This is not exposed until we finishing refactoring work rect features. +ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionMaxAbs() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImVec2 mx = (window->DC.CurrentColumns || g.CurrentTable) ? window->WorkRect.Max : window->ContentRegionRect.Max; + return mx; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return GetContentRegionMaxAbs() - window->DC.CursorPos; +} + +// In window space (not screen space!) +ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMin() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->ContentRegionRect.Min - window->Pos; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->ContentRegionRect.Max - window->Pos; +} + +// Lock horizontal starting position + capture group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.) +// Groups are currently a mishmash of functionalities which should perhaps be clarified and separated. +// FIXME-OPT: Could we safely early out on ->SkipItems? +void ImGui::BeginGroup() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + g.GroupStack.resize(g.GroupStack.Size + 1); + ImGuiGroupData& group_data = g.GroupStack.back(); + group_data.WindowID = window->ID; + group_data.BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos; + group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos; + group_data.BackupIndent = window->DC.Indent; + group_data.BackupGroupOffset = window->DC.GroupOffset; + group_data.BackupCurrLineSize = window->DC.CurrLineSize; + group_data.BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset; + group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive = g.ActiveIdIsAlive; + group_data.BackupHoveredIdIsAlive = g.HoveredId != 0; + group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive; + group_data.EmitItem = true; + + window->DC.GroupOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x - window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x; + window->DC.Indent = window->DC.GroupOffset; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos; + window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + if (g.LogEnabled) + g.LogLinePosY = -FLT_MAX; // To enforce a carriage return +} + +void ImGui::EndGroup() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(g.GroupStack.Size > 0); // Mismatched BeginGroup()/EndGroup() calls + + ImGuiGroupData& group_data = g.GroupStack.back(); + IM_ASSERT(group_data.WindowID == window->ID); // EndGroup() in wrong window? + + if (window->DC.IsSetPos) + ErrorCheckUsingSetCursorPosToExtendParentBoundaries(); + + ImRect group_bb(group_data.BackupCursorPos, ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, group_data.BackupCursorPos)); + + window->DC.CursorPos = group_data.BackupCursorPos; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos); + window->DC.Indent = group_data.BackupIndent; + window->DC.GroupOffset = group_data.BackupGroupOffset; + window->DC.CurrLineSize = group_data.BackupCurrLineSize; + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = group_data.BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset; + if (g.LogEnabled) + g.LogLinePosY = -FLT_MAX; // To enforce a carriage return + + if (!group_data.EmitItem) + { + g.GroupStack.pop_back(); + return; + } + + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset, group_data.BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset); // FIXME: Incorrect, we should grab the base offset from the *first line* of the group but it is hard to obtain now. + ItemSize(group_bb.GetSize()); + ItemAdd(group_bb, 0, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop); + + // If the current ActiveId was declared within the boundary of our group, we copy it to LastItemId so IsItemActive(), IsItemDeactivated() etc. will be functional on the entire group. + // It would be neater if we replaced window.DC.LastItemId by e.g. 'bool LastItemIsActive', but would put a little more burden on individual widgets. + // Also if you grep for LastItemId you'll notice it is only used in that context. + // (The two tests not the same because ActiveIdIsAlive is an ID itself, in order to be able to handle ActiveId being overwritten during the frame.) + const bool group_contains_curr_active_id = (group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId) && (g.ActiveIdIsAlive == g.ActiveId) && g.ActiveId; + const bool group_contains_prev_active_id = (group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive == false) && (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive == true); + if (group_contains_curr_active_id) + g.LastItemData.ID = g.ActiveId; + else if (group_contains_prev_active_id) + g.LastItemData.ID = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame; + g.LastItemData.Rect = group_bb; + + // Forward Hovered flag + const bool group_contains_curr_hovered_id = (group_data.BackupHoveredIdIsAlive == false) && g.HoveredId != 0; + if (group_contains_curr_hovered_id) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow; + + // Forward Edited flag + if (group_contains_curr_active_id && g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited; + + // Forward Deactivated flag + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated; + if (group_contains_prev_active_id && g.ActiveId != g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated; + + g.GroupStack.pop_back(); + //window->DrawList->AddRect(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255)); // [Debug] +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] SCROLLING +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Helper to snap on edges when aiming at an item very close to the edge, +// So the difference between WindowPadding and ItemSpacing will be in the visible area after scrolling. +// When we refactor the scrolling API this may be configurable with a flag? +// Note that the effect for this won't be visible on X axis with default Style settings as WindowPadding.x == ItemSpacing.x by default. +static float CalcScrollEdgeSnap(float target, float snap_min, float snap_max, float snap_threshold, float center_ratio) +{ + if (target <= snap_min + snap_threshold) + return ImLerp(snap_min, target, center_ratio); + if (target >= snap_max - snap_threshold) + return ImLerp(target, snap_max, center_ratio); + return target; +} + +static ImVec2 CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImVec2 scroll = window->Scroll; + ImVec2 decoration_size(window->DecoOuterSizeX1 + window->DecoInnerSizeX1 + window->DecoOuterSizeX2, window->DecoOuterSizeY1 + window->DecoInnerSizeY1 + window->DecoOuterSizeY2); + for (int axis = 0; axis < 2; axis++) + { + if (window->ScrollTarget[axis] < FLT_MAX) + { + float center_ratio = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio[axis]; + float scroll_target = window->ScrollTarget[axis]; + if (window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist[axis] > 0.0f) + { + float snap_min = 0.0f; + float snap_max = window->ScrollMax[axis] + window->SizeFull[axis] - decoration_size[axis]; + scroll_target = CalcScrollEdgeSnap(scroll_target, snap_min, snap_max, window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist[axis], center_ratio); + } + scroll[axis] = scroll_target - center_ratio * (window->SizeFull[axis] - decoration_size[axis]); + } + scroll[axis] = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(scroll[axis], 0.0f)); + if (!window->Collapsed && !window->SkipItems) + scroll[axis] = ImMin(scroll[axis], window->ScrollMax[axis]); + } + return scroll; +} + +void ImGui::ScrollToItem(ImGuiScrollFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ScrollToRectEx(window, g.LastItemData.NavRect, flags); +} + +void ImGui::ScrollToRect(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& item_rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags) +{ + ScrollToRectEx(window, item_rect, flags); +} + +// Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view +ImVec2 ImGui::ScrollToRectEx(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& item_rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImRect scroll_rect(window->InnerRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), window->InnerRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1)); + scroll_rect.Min.x = ImMin(scroll_rect.Min.x + window->DecoInnerSizeX1, scroll_rect.Max.x); + scroll_rect.Min.y = ImMin(scroll_rect.Min.y + window->DecoInnerSizeY1, scroll_rect.Max.y); + //GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(item_rect.Min, item_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), 0.0f, 0, 5.0f); // [DEBUG] + //GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(scroll_rect.Min, scroll_rect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE); // [DEBUG] + + // Check that only one behavior is selected per axis + IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_) == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_)); + IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_) == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_)); + + // Defaults + ImGuiScrollFlags in_flags = flags; + if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_) == 0 && window->ScrollbarX) + flags |= ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX; + if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_) == 0) + flags |= window->Appearing ? ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY : ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY; + + const bool fully_visible_x = item_rect.Min.x >= scroll_rect.Min.x && item_rect.Max.x <= scroll_rect.Max.x; + const bool fully_visible_y = item_rect.Min.y >= scroll_rect.Min.y && item_rect.Max.y <= scroll_rect.Max.y; + const bool can_be_fully_visible_x = (item_rect.GetWidth() + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f) <= scroll_rect.GetWidth() || (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) != 0; + const bool can_be_fully_visible_y = (item_rect.GetHeight() + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y * 2.0f) <= scroll_rect.GetHeight() || (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) != 0; + + if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX) && !fully_visible_x) + { + if (item_rect.Min.x < scroll_rect.Min.x || !can_be_fully_visible_x) + SetScrollFromPosX(window, item_rect.Min.x - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x - window->Pos.x, 0.0f); + else if (item_rect.Max.x >= scroll_rect.Max.x) + SetScrollFromPosX(window, item_rect.Max.x + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x - window->Pos.x, 1.0f); + } + else if (((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX) && !fully_visible_x) || (flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX)) + { + if (can_be_fully_visible_x) + SetScrollFromPosX(window, ImFloor((item_rect.Min.x + item_rect.Max.x) * 0.5f) - window->Pos.x, 0.5f); + else + SetScrollFromPosX(window, item_rect.Min.x - window->Pos.x, 0.0f); + } + + if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY) && !fully_visible_y) + { + if (item_rect.Min.y < scroll_rect.Min.y || !can_be_fully_visible_y) + SetScrollFromPosY(window, item_rect.Min.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y - window->Pos.y, 0.0f); + else if (item_rect.Max.y >= scroll_rect.Max.y) + SetScrollFromPosY(window, item_rect.Max.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y - window->Pos.y, 1.0f); + } + else if (((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY) && !fully_visible_y) || (flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY)) + { + if (can_be_fully_visible_y) + SetScrollFromPosY(window, ImFloor((item_rect.Min.y + item_rect.Max.y) * 0.5f) - window->Pos.y, 0.5f); + else + SetScrollFromPosY(window, item_rect.Min.y - window->Pos.y, 0.0f); + } + + ImVec2 next_scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window); + ImVec2 delta_scroll = next_scroll - window->Scroll; + + // Also scroll parent window to keep us into view if necessary + if (!(flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_NoScrollParent) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) + { + // FIXME-SCROLL: May be an option? + if ((in_flags & (ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX)) != 0) + in_flags = (in_flags & ~ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_) | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX; + if ((in_flags & (ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY)) != 0) + in_flags = (in_flags & ~ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_) | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY; + delta_scroll += ScrollToRectEx(window->ParentWindow, ImRect(item_rect.Min - delta_scroll, item_rect.Max - delta_scroll), in_flags); + } + + return delta_scroll; +} + +float ImGui::GetScrollX() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->Scroll.x; +} + +float ImGui::GetScrollY() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->Scroll.y; +} + +float ImGui::GetScrollMaxX() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->ScrollMax.x; +} + +float ImGui::GetScrollMaxY() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->ScrollMax.y; +} + +void ImGui::SetScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_x) +{ + window->ScrollTarget.x = scroll_x; + window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f; + window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x = 0.0f; +} + +void ImGui::SetScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_y) +{ + window->ScrollTarget.y = scroll_y; + window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f; + window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y = 0.0f; +} + +void ImGui::SetScrollX(float scroll_x) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + SetScrollX(g.CurrentWindow, scroll_x); +} + +void ImGui::SetScrollY(float scroll_y) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + SetScrollY(g.CurrentWindow, scroll_y); +} + +// Note that a local position will vary depending on initial scroll value, +// This is a little bit confusing so bear with us: +// - local_pos = (absolution_pos - window->Pos) +// - So local_x/local_y are 0.0f for a position at the upper-left corner of a window, +// and generally local_x/local_y are >(padding+decoration) && <(size-padding-decoration) when in the visible area. +// - They mostly exist because of legacy API. +// Following the rules above, when trying to work with scrolling code, consider that: +// - SetScrollFromPosY(0.0f) == SetScrollY(0.0f + scroll.y) == has no effect! +// - SetScrollFromPosY(-scroll.y) == SetScrollY(-scroll.y + scroll.y) == SetScrollY(0.0f) == reset scroll. Of course writing SetScrollY(0.0f) directly then makes more sense +// We store a target position so centering and clamping can occur on the next frame when we are guaranteed to have a known window size +void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosX(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_x, float center_x_ratio) +{ + IM_ASSERT(center_x_ratio >= 0.0f && center_x_ratio <= 1.0f); + window->ScrollTarget.x = IM_FLOOR(local_x - window->DecoOuterSizeX1 - window->DecoInnerSizeX1 + window->Scroll.x); // Convert local position to scroll offset + window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = center_x_ratio; + window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x = 0.0f; +} + +void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_y, float center_y_ratio) +{ + IM_ASSERT(center_y_ratio >= 0.0f && center_y_ratio <= 1.0f); + window->ScrollTarget.y = IM_FLOOR(local_y - window->DecoOuterSizeY1 - window->DecoInnerSizeY1 + window->Scroll.y); // Convert local position to scroll offset + window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = center_y_ratio; + window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y = 0.0f; +} + +void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosX(float local_x, float center_x_ratio) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + SetScrollFromPosX(g.CurrentWindow, local_x, center_x_ratio); +} + +void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(float local_y, float center_y_ratio) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + SetScrollFromPosY(g.CurrentWindow, local_y, center_y_ratio); +} + +// center_x_ratio: 0.0f left of last item, 0.5f horizontal center of last item, 1.0f right of last item. +void ImGui::SetScrollHereX(float center_x_ratio) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + float spacing_x = ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, g.Style.ItemSpacing.x); + float target_pos_x = ImLerp(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x - spacing_x, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max.x + spacing_x, center_x_ratio); + SetScrollFromPosX(window, target_pos_x - window->Pos.x, center_x_ratio); // Convert from absolute to local pos + + // Tweak: snap on edges when aiming at an item very close to the edge + window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x = ImMax(0.0f, window->WindowPadding.x - spacing_x); +} + +// center_y_ratio: 0.0f top of last item, 0.5f vertical center of last item, 1.0f bottom of last item. +void ImGui::SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + float spacing_y = ImMax(window->WindowPadding.y, g.Style.ItemSpacing.y); + float target_pos_y = ImLerp(window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y - spacing_y, window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y + window->DC.PrevLineSize.y + spacing_y, center_y_ratio); + SetScrollFromPosY(window, target_pos_y - window->Pos.y, center_y_ratio); // Convert from absolute to local pos + + // Tweak: snap on edges when aiming at an item very close to the edge + window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y = ImMax(0.0f, window->WindowPadding.y - spacing_y); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] TOOLTIPS +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +bool ImGui::BeginTooltip() +{ + return BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_None, ImGuiWindowFlags_None); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginItemTooltip() +{ + if (!IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip)) + return false; + return BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_None, ImGuiWindowFlags_None); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags tooltip_flags, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_window_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + if (g.DragDropWithinSource || g.DragDropWithinTarget) + { + // Drag and Drop tooltips are positioning differently than other tooltips: + // - offset visibility to increase visibility around mouse. + // - never clamp within outer viewport boundary. + // We call SetNextWindowPos() to enforce position and disable clamping. + // See FindBestWindowPosForPopup() for positionning logic of other tooltips (not drag and drop ones). + //ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - g.Style.WindowPadding; + ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos + TOOLTIP_DEFAULT_OFFSET * g.Style.MouseCursorScale; + SetNextWindowPos(tooltip_pos); + SetNextWindowBgAlpha(g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg].w * 0.60f); + //PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, g.Style.Alpha * 0.60f); // This would be nice but e.g ColorButton with checkboard has issue with transparent colors :( + tooltip_flags |= ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePrevious; + } + + char window_name[16]; + ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", g.TooltipOverrideCount); + if (tooltip_flags & ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePrevious) + if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(window_name)) + if (window->Active) + { + // Hide previous tooltip from being displayed. We can't easily "reset" the content of a window so we create a new one. + SetWindowHiddendAndSkipItemsForCurrentFrame(window); + ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", ++g.TooltipOverrideCount); + } + ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize; + Begin(window_name, NULL, flags | extra_window_flags); + // 2023-03-09: Added bool return value to the API, but currently always returning true. + // If this ever returns false we need to update BeginDragDropSource() accordingly. + //if (!ret) + // End(); + //return ret; + return true; +} + +void ImGui::EndTooltip() +{ + IM_ASSERT(GetCurrentWindowRead()->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // Mismatched BeginTooltip()/EndTooltip() calls + End(); +} + +void ImGui::SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + SetTooltipV(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + if (!BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePrevious, ImGuiWindowFlags_None)) + return; + TextV(fmt, args); + EndTooltip(); +} + +// Shortcut to use 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav'. +// Defaults to == ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort when using the mouse. +void ImGui::SetItemTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip)) + SetTooltipV(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::SetItemTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip)) + SetTooltipV(fmt, args); +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] POPUPS +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Supported flags: ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId, ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel +bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId) + { + // Return true if any popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack + // This may be used to e.g. test for another popups already opened to handle popups priorities at the same level. + IM_ASSERT(id == 0); + if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel) + return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0; + else + return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size; + } + else + { + if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel) + { + // Return true if the popup is open anywhere in the popup stack + for (int n = 0; n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; n++) + if (g.OpenPopupStack[n].PopupId == id) + return true; + return false; + } + else + { + // Return true if the popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack (this is the most-common query) + return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].PopupId == id; + } + } +} + +bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiID id = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId) ? 0 : g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id); + if ((popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel) && id != 0) + IM_ASSERT(0 && "Cannot use IsPopupOpen() with a string id and ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel."); // But non-string version is legal and used internally + return IsPopupOpen(id, popup_flags); +} + +// Also see FindBlockingModal(NULL) +ImGuiWindow* ImGui::GetTopMostPopupModal() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + for (int n = g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--) + if (ImGuiWindow* popup = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[n].Window) + if (popup->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) + return popup; + return NULL; +} + +// See Demo->Stacked Modal to confirm what this is for. +ImGuiWindow* ImGui::GetTopMostAndVisiblePopupModal() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + for (int n = g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--) + if (ImGuiWindow* popup = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[n].Window) + if ((popup->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && IsWindowActiveAndVisible(popup)) + return popup; + return NULL; +} + +void ImGui::OpenPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiID id = g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id); + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] OpenPopup(\"%s\" -> 0x%08X)\n", str_id, id); + OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags); +} + +void ImGui::OpenPopup(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags); +} + +// Mark popup as open (toggle toward open state). +// Popups are closed when user click outside, or activate a pressable item, or CloseCurrentPopup() is called within a BeginPopup()/EndPopup() block. +// Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID-stack (so OpenPopup and BeginPopup needs to be at the same level). +// One open popup per level of the popup hierarchy (NB: when assigning we reset the Window member of ImGuiPopupRef to NULL) +void ImGui::OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow; + const int current_stack_size = g.BeginPopupStack.Size; + + if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup) + if (IsPopupOpen((ImGuiID)0, ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId)) + return; + + ImGuiPopupData popup_ref; // Tagged as new ref as Window will be set back to NULL if we write this into OpenPopupStack. + popup_ref.PopupId = id; + popup_ref.Window = NULL; + popup_ref.BackupNavWindow = g.NavWindow; // When popup closes focus may be restored to NavWindow (depend on window type). + popup_ref.OpenFrameCount = g.FrameCount; + popup_ref.OpenParentId = parent_window->IDStack.back(); + popup_ref.OpenPopupPos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); + popup_ref.OpenMousePos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? g.IO.MousePos : popup_ref.OpenPopupPos; + + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] OpenPopupEx(0x%08X)\n", id); + if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size < current_stack_size + 1) + { + g.OpenPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref); + } + else + { + // Gently handle the user mistakenly calling OpenPopup() every frame. It is a programming mistake! However, if we were to run the regular code path, the ui + // would become completely unusable because the popup will always be in hidden-while-calculating-size state _while_ claiming focus. Which would be a very confusing + // situation for the programmer. Instead, we silently allow the popup to proceed, it will keep reappearing and the programming error will be more obvious to understand. + if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id && g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1) + { + g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount = popup_ref.OpenFrameCount; + } + else + { + // Close child popups if any, then flag popup for open/reopen + ClosePopupToLevel(current_stack_size, false); + g.OpenPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref); + } + + // When reopening a popup we first refocus its parent, otherwise if its parent is itself a popup it would get closed by ClosePopupsOverWindow(). + // This is equivalent to what ClosePopupToLevel() does. + //if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id) + // FocusWindow(parent_window); + } +} + +// When popups are stacked, clicking on a lower level popups puts focus back to it and close popups above it. +// This function closes any popups that are over 'ref_window'. +void ImGui::ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size == 0) + return; + + // Don't close our own child popup windows. + int popup_count_to_keep = 0; + if (ref_window) + { + // Find the highest popup which is a descendant of the reference window (generally reference window = NavWindow) + for (; popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; popup_count_to_keep++) + { + ImGuiPopupData& popup = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_count_to_keep]; + if (!popup.Window) + continue; + IM_ASSERT((popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0); + if (popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + continue; + + // Trim the stack unless the popup is a direct parent of the reference window (the reference window is often the NavWindow) + // - With this stack of window, clicking/focusing Popup1 will close Popup2 and Popup3: + // Window -> Popup1 -> Popup2 -> Popup3 + // - Each popups may contain child windows, which is why we compare ->RootWindow! + // Window -> Popup1 -> Popup1_Child -> Popup2 -> Popup2_Child + bool ref_window_is_descendent_of_popup = false; + for (int n = popup_count_to_keep; n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; n++) + if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[n].Window) + if (IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(ref_window, popup_window)) + { + ref_window_is_descendent_of_popup = true; + break; + } + if (!ref_window_is_descendent_of_popup) + break; + } + } + if (popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) // This test is not required but it allows to set a convenient breakpoint on the statement below + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] ClosePopupsOverWindow(\"%s\")\n", ref_window ? ref_window->Name : ""); + ClosePopupToLevel(popup_count_to_keep, restore_focus_to_window_under_popup); + } +} + +void ImGui::ClosePopupsExceptModals() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + int popup_count_to_keep; + for (popup_count_to_keep = g.OpenPopupStack.Size; popup_count_to_keep > 0; popup_count_to_keep--) + { + ImGuiWindow* window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_count_to_keep - 1].Window; + if (!window || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) + break; + } + if (popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) // This test is not required but it allows to set a convenient breakpoint on the statement below + ClosePopupToLevel(popup_count_to_keep, true); +} + +void ImGui::ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] ClosePopupToLevel(%d), restore_focus_to_window_under_popup=%d\n", remaining, restore_focus_to_window_under_popup); + IM_ASSERT(remaining >= 0 && remaining < g.OpenPopupStack.Size); + + // Trim open popup stack + ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[remaining].Window; + ImGuiWindow* popup_backup_nav_window = g.OpenPopupStack[remaining].BackupNavWindow; + g.OpenPopupStack.resize(remaining); + + if (restore_focus_to_window_under_popup) + { + ImGuiWindow* focus_window = (popup_window && popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? popup_window->ParentWindow : popup_backup_nav_window; + if (focus_window && !focus_window->WasActive && popup_window) + FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(popup_window, NULL, NULL, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild); // Fallback + else + FocusWindow(focus_window, (g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main) ? ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild : ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_None); + } +} + +// Close the popup we have begin-ed into. +void ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + int popup_idx = g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1; + if (popup_idx < 0 || popup_idx >= g.OpenPopupStack.Size || g.BeginPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId != g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId) + return; + + // Closing a menu closes its top-most parent popup (unless a modal) + while (popup_idx > 0) + { + ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].Window; + ImGuiWindow* parent_popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx - 1].Window; + bool close_parent = false; + if (popup_window && (popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) + if (parent_popup_window && !(parent_popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) + close_parent = true; + if (!close_parent) + break; + popup_idx--; + } + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] CloseCurrentPopup %d -> %d\n", g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1, popup_idx); + ClosePopupToLevel(popup_idx, true); + + // A common pattern is to close a popup when selecting a menu item/selectable that will open another window. + // To improve this usage pattern, we avoid nav highlight for a single frame in the parent window. + // Similarly, we could avoid mouse hover highlight in this window but it is less visually problematic. + if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow) + window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = true; +} + +// Attention! BeginPopup() adds default flags which BeginPopupEx()! +bool ImGui::BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None)) + { + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values + return false; + } + + char name[20]; + if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) + ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Menu_%02d", g.BeginMenuCount); // Recycle windows based on depth + else + ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Popup_%08x", id); // Not recycling, so we can close/open during the same frame + + flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup; + bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, flags); + if (!is_open) // NB: Begin can return false when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display) + EndPopup(); + + return is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.BeginPopupStack.Size) // Early out for performance + { + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values + return false; + } + flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings; + ImGuiID id = g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id); + return BeginPopupEx(id, flags); +} + +// If 'p_open' is specified for a modal popup window, the popup will have a regular close button which will close the popup. +// Note that popup visibility status is owned by Dear ImGui (and manipulated with e.g. OpenPopup) so the actual value of *p_open is meaningless here. +bool ImGui::BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(name); + if (!IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None)) + { + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values + return false; + } + + // Center modal windows by default for increased visibility + // (this won't really last as settings will kick in, and is mostly for backward compatibility. user may do the same themselves) + // FIXME: Should test for (PosCond & window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags) with the upcoming window. + if ((g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos) == 0) + { + const ImGuiViewport* viewport = GetMainViewport(); + SetNextWindowPos(viewport->GetCenter(), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + } + + flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse; + const bool is_open = Begin(name, p_open, flags); + if (!is_open || (p_open && !*p_open)) // NB: is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display) + { + EndPopup(); + if (is_open) + ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true); + return false; + } + return is_open; +} + +void ImGui::EndPopup() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup); // Mismatched BeginPopup()/EndPopup() calls + IM_ASSERT(g.BeginPopupStack.Size > 0); + + // Make all menus and popups wrap around for now, may need to expose that policy (e.g. focus scope could include wrap/loop policy flags used by new move requests) + if (g.NavWindow == window) + NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY); + + // Child-popups don't need to be laid out + IM_ASSERT(g.WithinEndChild == false); + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) + g.WithinEndChild = true; + End(); + g.WithinEndChild = false; +} + +// Helper to open a popup if mouse button is released over the item +// - This is essentially the same as BeginPopupContextItem() but without the trailing BeginPopup() +void ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_); + if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup)) + { + ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : g.LastItemData.ID; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict! + IM_ASSERT(id != 0); // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item) + OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags); + } +} + +// This is a helper to handle the simplest case of associating one named popup to one given widget. +// - To create a popup associated to the last item, you generally want to pass a NULL value to str_id. +// - To create a popup with a specific identifier, pass it in str_id. +// - This is useful when using using BeginPopupContextItem() on an item which doesn't have an identifier, e.g. a Text() call. +// - This is useful when multiple code locations may want to manipulate/open the same popup, given an explicit id. +// - You may want to handle the whole on user side if you have specific needs (e.g. tweaking IsItemHovered() parameters). +// This is essentially the same as: +// id = str_id ? GetID(str_id) : GetItemID(); +// OpenPopupOnItemClick(str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); +// return BeginPopup(id); +// Which is essentially the same as: +// id = str_id ? GetID(str_id) : GetItemID(); +// if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) +// OpenPopup(id); +// return BeginPopup(id); +// The main difference being that this is tweaked to avoid computing the ID twice. +bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : g.LastItemData.ID; // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict! + IM_ASSERT(id != 0); // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item) + int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_); + if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup)) + OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags); + return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (!str_id) + str_id = "window_context"; + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id); + int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_); + if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup)) + if (!(popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems) || !IsAnyItemHovered()) + OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags); + return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (!str_id) + str_id = "void_context"; + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id); + int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_); + if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && !IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow)) + if (GetTopMostPopupModal() == NULL) + OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags); + return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings); +} + +// r_avoid = the rectangle to avoid (e.g. for tooltip it is a rectangle around the mouse cursor which we want to avoid. for popups it's a small point around the cursor.) +// r_outer = the visible area rectangle, minus safe area padding. If our popup size won't fit because of safe area padding we ignore it. +// (r_outer is usually equivalent to the viewport rectangle minus padding, but when multi-viewports are enabled and monitor +// information are available, it may represent the entire platform monitor from the frame of reference of the current viewport. +// this allows us to have tooltips/popups displayed out of the parent viewport.) +ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy) +{ + ImVec2 base_pos_clamped = ImClamp(ref_pos, r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max - size); + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r_avoid.Min, r_avoid.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255)); + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max, IM_COL32(0,255,0,255)); + + // Combo Box policy (we want a connecting edge) + if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox) + { + const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Left, ImGuiDir_Up }; + for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++) + { + const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n]; + if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction? + continue; + ImVec2 pos; + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Right (default) + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Right + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Left + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Left + if (!r_outer.Contains(ImRect(pos, pos + size))) + continue; + *last_dir = dir; + return pos; + } + } + + // Tooltip and Default popup policy + // (Always first try the direction we used on the last frame, if any) + if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip || policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default) + { + const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Up, ImGuiDir_Left }; + for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++) + { + const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n]; + if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction? + continue; + + const float avail_w = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left ? r_avoid.Min.x : r_outer.Max.x) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Right ? r_avoid.Max.x : r_outer.Min.x); + const float avail_h = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up ? r_avoid.Min.y : r_outer.Max.y) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Down ? r_avoid.Max.y : r_outer.Min.y); + + // If there's not enough room on one axis, there's no point in positioning on a side on this axis (e.g. when not enough width, use a top/bottom position to maximize available width) + if (avail_w < size.x && (dir == ImGuiDir_Left || dir == ImGuiDir_Right)) + continue; + if (avail_h < size.y && (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Down)) + continue; + + ImVec2 pos; + pos.x = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? r_avoid.Min.x - size.x : (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? r_avoid.Max.x : base_pos_clamped.x; + pos.y = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? r_avoid.Min.y - size.y : (dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? r_avoid.Max.y : base_pos_clamped.y; + + // Clamp top-left corner of popup + pos.x = ImMax(pos.x, r_outer.Min.x); + pos.y = ImMax(pos.y, r_outer.Min.y); + + *last_dir = dir; + return pos; + } + } + + // Fallback when not enough room: + *last_dir = ImGuiDir_None; + + // For tooltip we prefer avoiding the cursor at all cost even if it means that part of the tooltip won't be visible. + if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip) + return ref_pos + ImVec2(2, 2); + + // Otherwise try to keep within display + ImVec2 pos = ref_pos; + pos.x = ImMax(ImMin(pos.x + size.x, r_outer.Max.x) - size.x, r_outer.Min.x); + pos.y = ImMax(ImMin(pos.y + size.y, r_outer.Max.y) - size.y, r_outer.Min.y); + return pos; +} + +// Note that this is used for popups, which can overlap the non work-area of individual viewports. +ImRect ImGui::GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_UNUSED(window); + ImRect r_screen = ((ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)GetMainViewport())->GetMainRect(); + ImVec2 padding = g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding; + r_screen.Expand(ImVec2((r_screen.GetWidth() > padding.x * 2) ? -padding.x : 0.0f, (r_screen.GetHeight() > padding.y * 2) ? -padding.y : 0.0f)); + return r_screen; +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + ImRect r_outer = GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(window); + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) + { + // Child menus typically request _any_ position within the parent menu item, and then we move the new menu outside the parent bounds. + // This is how we end up with child menus appearing (most-commonly) on the right of the parent menu. + IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == window); + ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindowStack[g.CurrentWindowStack.Size - 2].Window; + float horizontal_overlap = g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; // We want some overlap to convey the relative depth of each menu (currently the amount of overlap is hard-coded to style.ItemSpacing.x). + ImRect r_avoid; + if (parent_window->DC.MenuBarAppending) + r_avoid = ImRect(-FLT_MAX, parent_window->ClipRect.Min.y, FLT_MAX, parent_window->ClipRect.Max.y); // Avoid parent menu-bar. If we wanted multi-line menu-bar, we may instead want to have the calling window setup e.g. a NextWindowData.PosConstraintAvoidRect field + else + r_avoid = ImRect(parent_window->Pos.x + horizontal_overlap, -FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.x + parent_window->Size.x - horizontal_overlap - parent_window->ScrollbarSizes.x, FLT_MAX); + return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default); + } + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) + { + return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, ImRect(window->Pos, window->Pos), ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default); // Ideally we'd disable r_avoid here + } + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) + { + // Position tooltip (always follows mouse + clamp within outer boundaries) + // Note that drag and drop tooltips are NOT using this path: BeginTooltipEx() manually sets their position. + // In theory we could handle both cases in same location, but requires a bit of shuffling as drag and drop tooltips are calling SetWindowPos() leading to 'window_pos_set_by_api' being set in Begin() + IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == window); + const float scale = g.Style.MouseCursorScale; + const ImVec2 ref_pos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); + const ImVec2 tooltip_pos = ref_pos + TOOLTIP_DEFAULT_OFFSET * scale; + ImRect r_avoid; + if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos)) + r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 16, ref_pos.y + 8); + else + r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 24 * scale, ref_pos.y + 24 * scale); // FIXME: Hard-coded based on mouse cursor shape expectation. Exact dimension not very important. + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r_avoid.Min, r_avoid.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, 255)); + return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(tooltip_pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip); + } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return window->Pos; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] KEYBOARD/GAMEPAD NAVIGATION +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// FIXME-NAV: The existence of SetNavID vs SetFocusID vs FocusWindow() needs to be clarified/reworked. +// In our terminology those should be interchangeable, yet right now this is super confusing. +// Those two functions are merely a legacy artifact, so at minimum naming should be clarified. + +void ImGui::SetNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.NavWindow != window) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("[focus] SetNavWindow(\"%s\")\n", window ? window->Name : ""); + g.NavWindow = window; + } + g.NavInitRequest = g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = false; + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); +} + +void ImGui::NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis axis) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav->NavPreferredScoringPosRel[g.NavLayer][axis] = FLT_MAX; +} + +void ImGui::SetNavID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer, ImGuiID focus_scope_id, const ImRect& rect_rel) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL); + IM_ASSERT(nav_layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main || nav_layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu); + g.NavId = id; + g.NavLayer = nav_layer; + g.NavFocusScopeId = focus_scope_id; + g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[nav_layer] = id; + g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[nav_layer] = rect_rel; + + // Clear preferred scoring position (NavMoveRequestApplyResult() will tend to restore it) + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_X); + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_Y); +} + +void ImGui::SetFocusID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(id != 0); + + if (g.NavWindow != window) + SetNavWindow(window); + + // Assume that SetFocusID() is called in the context where its window->DC.NavLayerCurrent and g.CurrentFocusScopeId are valid. + // Note that window may be != g.CurrentWindow (e.g. SetFocusID call in InputTextEx for multi-line text) + const ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent; + g.NavId = id; + g.NavLayer = nav_layer; + g.NavFocusScopeId = g.CurrentFocusScopeId; + window->NavLastIds[nav_layer] = id; + if (g.LastItemData.ID == id) + window->NavRectRel[nav_layer] = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, g.LastItemData.NavRect); + + if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + g.NavDisableMouseHover = true; + else + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; + + // Clear preferred scoring position (NavMoveRequestApplyResult() will tend to restore it) + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_X); + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_Y); +} + +static ImGuiDir ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(float dx, float dy) +{ + if (ImFabs(dx) > ImFabs(dy)) + return (dx > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Left; + return (dy > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Up; +} + +static float inline NavScoreItemDistInterval(float cand_min, float cand_max, float curr_min, float curr_max) +{ + if (cand_max < curr_min) + return cand_max - curr_min; + if (curr_max < cand_min) + return cand_min - curr_max; + return 0.0f; +} + +// Scoring function for gamepad/keyboard directional navigation. Based on https://gist.github.com/rygorous/6981057 +static bool ImGui::NavScoreItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (g.NavLayer != window->DC.NavLayerCurrent) + return false; + + // FIXME: Those are not good variables names + ImRect cand = g.LastItemData.NavRect; // Current item nav rectangle + const ImRect curr = g.NavScoringRect; // Current modified source rect (NB: we've applied Max.x = Min.x in NavUpdate() to inhibit the effect of having varied item width) + g.NavScoringDebugCount++; + + // When entering through a NavFlattened border, we consider child window items as fully clipped for scoring + if (window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow) + { + IM_ASSERT((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened); + if (!window->ClipRect.Overlaps(cand)) + return false; + cand.ClipWithFull(window->ClipRect); // This allows the scored item to not overlap other candidates in the parent window + } + + // Compute distance between boxes + // FIXME-NAV: Introducing biases for vertical navigation, needs to be removed. + float dbx = NavScoreItemDistInterval(cand.Min.x, cand.Max.x, curr.Min.x, curr.Max.x); + float dby = NavScoreItemDistInterval(ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.8f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.8f)); // Scale down on Y to keep using box-distance for vertically touching items + if (dby != 0.0f && dbx != 0.0f) + dbx = (dbx / 1000.0f) + ((dbx > 0.0f) ? +1.0f : -1.0f); + float dist_box = ImFabs(dbx) + ImFabs(dby); + + // Compute distance between centers (this is off by a factor of 2, but we only compare center distances with each other so it doesn't matter) + float dcx = (cand.Min.x + cand.Max.x) - (curr.Min.x + curr.Max.x); + float dcy = (cand.Min.y + cand.Max.y) - (curr.Min.y + curr.Max.y); + float dist_center = ImFabs(dcx) + ImFabs(dcy); // L1 metric (need this for our connectedness guarantee) + + // Determine which quadrant of 'curr' our candidate item 'cand' lies in based on distance + ImGuiDir quadrant; + float dax = 0.0f, day = 0.0f, dist_axial = 0.0f; + if (dbx != 0.0f || dby != 0.0f) + { + // For non-overlapping boxes, use distance between boxes + dax = dbx; + day = dby; + dist_axial = dist_box; + quadrant = ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(dbx, dby); + } + else if (dcx != 0.0f || dcy != 0.0f) + { + // For overlapping boxes with different centers, use distance between centers + dax = dcx; + day = dcy; + dist_axial = dist_center; + quadrant = ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(dcx, dcy); + } + else + { + // Degenerate case: two overlapping buttons with same center, break ties arbitrarily (note that LastItemId here is really the _previous_ item order, but it doesn't matter) + quadrant = (g.LastItemData.ID < g.NavId) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Right; + } + + const ImGuiDir move_dir = g.NavMoveDir; +#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING + char buf[200]; + if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) // Hold CTRL to preview score in matching quadrant. CTRL+Arrow to rotate. + { + if (quadrant == move_dir) + { + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%.0f/%.0f", dist_box, dist_center); + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 80)); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Min, cand.Min + CalcTextSize(buf), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200)); + draw_list->AddText(cand.Min, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf); + } + } + const bool debug_hovering = IsMouseHoveringRect(cand.Min, cand.Max); + const bool debug_tty = (g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space)); + if (debug_hovering || debug_tty) + { + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), + "d-box (%7.3f,%7.3f) -> %7.3f\nd-center (%7.3f,%7.3f) -> %7.3f\nd-axial (%7.3f,%7.3f) -> %7.3f\nnav %c, quadrant %c", + dbx, dby, dist_box, dcx, dcy, dist_center, dax, day, dist_axial, "-WENS"[move_dir+1], "-WENS"[quadrant+1]); + if (debug_hovering) + { + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window); + draw_list->AddRect(curr.Min, curr.Max, IM_COL32(255, 200, 0, 100)); + draw_list->AddRect(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 200)); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Max - ImVec2(4, 4), cand.Max + CalcTextSize(buf) + ImVec2(4, 4), IM_COL32(40, 0, 0, 200)); + draw_list->AddText(cand.Max, ~0U, buf); + } + if (debug_tty) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("id 0x%08X\n%s\n", g.LastItemData.ID, buf); } + } +#endif + + // Is it in the quadrant we're interested in moving to? + bool new_best = false; + if (quadrant == move_dir) + { + // Does it beat the current best candidate? + if (dist_box < result->DistBox) + { + result->DistBox = dist_box; + result->DistCenter = dist_center; + return true; + } + if (dist_box == result->DistBox) + { + // Try using distance between center points to break ties + if (dist_center < result->DistCenter) + { + result->DistCenter = dist_center; + new_best = true; + } + else if (dist_center == result->DistCenter) + { + // Still tied! we need to be extra-careful to make sure everything gets linked properly. We consistently break ties by symbolically moving "later" items + // (with higher index) to the right/downwards by an infinitesimal amount since we the current "best" button already (so it must have a lower index), + // this is fairly easy. This rule ensures that all buttons with dx==dy==0 will end up being linked in order of appearance along the x axis. + if (((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? dby : dbx) < 0.0f) // moving bj to the right/down decreases distance + new_best = true; + } + } + } + + // Axial check: if 'curr' has no link at all in some direction and 'cand' lies roughly in that direction, add a tentative link. This will only be kept if no "real" matches + // are found, so it only augments the graph produced by the above method using extra links. (important, since it doesn't guarantee strong connectedness) + // This is just to avoid buttons having no links in a particular direction when there's a suitable neighbor. you get good graphs without this too. + // 2017/09/29: FIXME: This now currently only enabled inside menu bars, ideally we'd disable it everywhere. Menus in particular need to catch failure. For general navigation it feels awkward. + // Disabling it may lead to disconnected graphs when nodes are very spaced out on different axis. Perhaps consider offering this as an option? + if (result->DistBox == FLT_MAX && dist_axial < result->DistAxial) // Check axial match + if (g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) + if ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left && dax < 0.0f) || (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right && dax > 0.0f) || (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up && day < 0.0f) || (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Down && day > 0.0f)) + { + result->DistAxial = dist_axial; + new_best = true; + } + + return new_best; +} + +static void ImGui::NavApplyItemToResult(ImGuiNavItemData* result) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + result->Window = window; + result->ID = g.LastItemData.ID; + result->FocusScopeId = g.CurrentFocusScopeId; + result->InFlags = g.LastItemData.InFlags; + result->RectRel = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, g.LastItemData.NavRect); +} + +// True when current work location may be scrolled horizontally when moving left / right. +// This is generally always true UNLESS within a column. We don't have a vertical equivalent. +void ImGui::NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + window->DC.NavIsScrollPushableX = (g.CurrentTable == NULL && window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL); +} + +// We get there when either NavId == id, or when g.NavAnyRequest is set (which is updated by NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag above) +// This is called after LastItemData is set. +static void ImGui::NavProcessItem() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + const ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID; + const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = g.LastItemData.InFlags; + + // When inside a container that isn't scrollable with Left<>Right, clip NavRect accordingly (#2221) + if (window->DC.NavIsScrollPushableX == false) + { + g.LastItemData.NavRect.Min.x = ImClamp(g.LastItemData.NavRect.Min.x, window->ClipRect.Min.x, window->ClipRect.Max.x); + g.LastItemData.NavRect.Max.x = ImClamp(g.LastItemData.NavRect.Max.x, window->ClipRect.Min.x, window->ClipRect.Max.x); + } + const ImRect nav_bb = g.LastItemData.NavRect; + + // Process Init Request + if (g.NavInitRequest && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent && (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) == 0) + { + // Even if 'ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus' is on (typically collapse/close button) we record the first ResultId so they can be used as a fallback + const bool candidate_for_nav_default_focus = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus) == 0; + if (candidate_for_nav_default_focus || g.NavInitResult.ID == 0) + { + NavApplyItemToResult(&g.NavInitResult); + } + if (candidate_for_nav_default_focus) + { + g.NavInitRequest = false; // Found a match, clear request + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); + } + } + + // Process Move Request (scoring for navigation) + // FIXME-NAV: Consider policy for double scoring (scoring from NavScoringRect + scoring from a rect wrapped according to current wrapping policy) + if (g.NavMoveScoringItems && (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) == 0) + { + const bool is_tabbing = (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) != 0; + if (is_tabbing) + { + NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest(id, item_flags, g.NavMoveFlags); + } + else if (g.NavId != id || (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId)) + { + ImGuiNavItemData* result = (window == g.NavWindow) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther; + if (NavScoreItem(result)) + NavApplyItemToResult(result); + + // Features like PageUp/PageDown need to maintain a separate score for the visible set of items. + const float VISIBLE_RATIO = 0.70f; + if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet) && window->ClipRect.Overlaps(nav_bb)) + if (ImClamp(nav_bb.Max.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) - ImClamp(nav_bb.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) >= (nav_bb.Max.y - nav_bb.Min.y) * VISIBLE_RATIO) + if (NavScoreItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible)) + NavApplyItemToResult(&g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible); + } + } + + // Update information for currently focused/navigated item + if (g.NavId == id) + { + if (g.NavWindow != window) + SetNavWindow(window); // Always refresh g.NavWindow, because some operations such as FocusItem() may not have a window. + g.NavLayer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent; + g.NavFocusScopeId = g.CurrentFocusScopeId; + g.NavIdIsAlive = true; + window->NavRectRel[window->DC.NavLayerCurrent] = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, nav_bb); // Store item bounding box (relative to window position) + } +} + +// Handle "scoring" of an item for a tabbing/focusing request initiated by NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest(). +// Note that SetKeyboardFocusHere() API calls are considered tabbing requests! +// - Case 1: no nav/active id: set result to first eligible item, stop storing. +// - Case 2: tab forward: on ref id set counter, on counter elapse store result +// - Case 3: tab forward wrap: set result to first eligible item (preemptively), on ref id set counter, on next frame if counter hasn't elapsed store result. // FIXME-TABBING: Could be done as a next-frame forwarded request +// - Case 4: tab backward: store all results, on ref id pick prev, stop storing +// - Case 5: tab backward wrap: store all results, on ref id if no result keep storing until last // FIXME-TABBING: Could be done as next-frame forwarded requested +void ImGui::NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest(ImGuiID id, ImGuiItemFlags item_flags, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + if ((move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi) == 0) + if (g.NavLayer != g.CurrentWindow->DC.NavLayerCurrent) + return; + + // - Can always land on an item when using API call. + // - Tabbing with _NavEnableKeyboard (space/enter/arrows): goes through every item. + // - Tabbing without _NavEnableKeyboard: goes through inputable items only. + bool can_stop; + if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi) + can_stop = true; + else + can_stop = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop) == 0 && ((g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) || (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable)); + + // Always store in NavMoveResultLocal (unlike directional request which uses NavMoveResultOther on sibling/flattened windows) + ImGuiNavItemData* result = &g.NavMoveResultLocal; + if (g.NavTabbingDir == +1) + { + // Tab Forward or SetKeyboardFocusHere() with >= 0 + if (can_stop && g.NavTabbingResultFirst.ID == 0) + NavApplyItemToResult(&g.NavTabbingResultFirst); + if (can_stop && g.NavTabbingCounter > 0 && --g.NavTabbingCounter == 0) + NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(result); + else if (g.NavId == id) + g.NavTabbingCounter = 1; + } + else if (g.NavTabbingDir == -1) + { + // Tab Backward + if (g.NavId == id) + { + if (result->ID) + { + g.NavMoveScoringItems = false; + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); + } + } + else if (can_stop) + { + // Keep applying until reaching NavId + NavApplyItemToResult(result); + } + } + else if (g.NavTabbingDir == 0) + { + if (can_stop && g.NavId == id) + NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(result); + if (can_stop && g.NavTabbingResultFirst.ID == 0) // Tab init + NavApplyItemToResult(&g.NavTabbingResultFirst); + } +} + +bool ImGui::NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0; +} + +// FIXME: ScoringRect is not set +void ImGui::NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL); + + if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) + move_flags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId; + + g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = true; + g.NavMoveDir = move_dir; + g.NavMoveDirForDebug = move_dir; + g.NavMoveClipDir = clip_dir; + g.NavMoveFlags = move_flags; + g.NavMoveScrollFlags = scroll_flags; + g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = false; + g.NavMoveKeyMods = g.IO.KeyMods; + g.NavMoveResultLocal.Clear(); + g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible.Clear(); + g.NavMoveResultOther.Clear(); + g.NavTabbingCounter = 0; + g.NavTabbingResultFirst.Clear(); + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); +} + +void ImGui::NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NavMoveScoringItems = false; // Ensure request doesn't need more processing + NavApplyItemToResult(result); + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); +} + +// Called by TreePop() to implement ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere +void ImGui::NavMoveRequestResolveWithPastTreeNode(ImGuiNavItemData* result, ImGuiNavTreeNodeData* tree_node_data) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NavMoveScoringItems = false; + g.LastItemData.ID = tree_node_data->ID; + g.LastItemData.InFlags = tree_node_data->InFlags; + g.LastItemData.NavRect = tree_node_data->NavRect; + NavApplyItemToResult(result); // Result this instead of implementing a NavApplyPastTreeNodeToResult() + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_Y); + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); +} + +void ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = false; + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); +} + +// Forward will reuse the move request again on the next frame (generally with modifications done to it) +void ImGui::NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame == false); + NavMoveRequestCancel(); + g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = true; + g.NavMoveDir = move_dir; + g.NavMoveClipDir = clip_dir; + g.NavMoveFlags = move_flags | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded; + g.NavMoveScrollFlags = scroll_flags; +} + +// Navigation wrap-around logic is delayed to the end of the frame because this operation is only valid after entire +// popup is assembled and in case of appended popups it is not clear which EndPopup() call is final. +void ImGui::NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags wrap_flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT((wrap_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapMask_ ) != 0 && (wrap_flags & ~ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapMask_) == 0); // Call with _WrapX, _WrapY, _LoopX, _LoopY + + // In theory we should test for NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() but there's no point doing it: + // as NavEndFrame() will do the same test. It will end up calling NavUpdateCreateWrappingRequest(). + if (g.NavWindow == window && g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main) + g.NavMoveFlags = (g.NavMoveFlags & ~ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapMask_) | wrap_flags; +} + +// FIXME: This could be replaced by updating a frame number in each window when (window == NavWindow) and (NavLayer == 0). +// This way we could find the last focused window among our children. It would be much less confusing this way? +static void ImGui::NavSaveLastChildNavWindowIntoParent(ImGuiWindow* nav_window) +{ + ImGuiWindow* parent = nav_window; + while (parent && parent->RootWindow != parent && (parent->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0) + parent = parent->ParentWindow; + if (parent && parent != nav_window) + parent->NavLastChildNavWindow = nav_window; +} + +// Restore the last focused child. +// Call when we are expected to land on the Main Layer (0) after FocusWindow() +static ImGuiWindow* ImGui::NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + if (window->NavLastChildNavWindow && window->NavLastChildNavWindow->WasActive) + return window->NavLastChildNavWindow; + return window; +} + +void ImGui::NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer layer) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main) + { + ImGuiWindow* prev_nav_window = g.NavWindow; + g.NavWindow = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow); // FIXME-NAV: Should clear ongoing nav requests? + if (prev_nav_window) + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("[focus] NavRestoreLayer: from \"%s\" to SetNavWindow(\"%s\")\n", prev_nav_window->Name, g.NavWindow->Name); + } + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow; + if (window->NavLastIds[layer] != 0) + { + SetNavID(window->NavLastIds[layer], layer, 0, window->NavRectRel[layer]); + } + else + { + g.NavLayer = layer; + NavInitWindow(window, true); + } +} + +void ImGui::NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NavDisableHighlight = false; + g.NavDisableMouseHover = g.NavMousePosDirty = true; +} + +static inline void ImGui::NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NavAnyRequest = g.NavMoveScoringItems || g.NavInitRequest || (IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING && g.NavWindow != NULL); + if (g.NavAnyRequest) + IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL); +} + +// This needs to be called before we submit any widget (aka in or before Begin) +void ImGui::NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(window == g.NavWindow); + + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) + { + g.NavId = 0; + g.NavFocusScopeId = window->NavRootFocusScopeId; + return; + } + + bool init_for_nav = false; + if (window == window->RootWindow || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || (window->NavLastIds[0] == 0) || force_reinit) + init_for_nav = true; + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavInitRequest: from NavInitWindow(), init_for_nav=%d, window=\"%s\", layer=%d\n", init_for_nav, window->Name, g.NavLayer); + if (init_for_nav) + { + SetNavID(0, g.NavLayer, window->NavRootFocusScopeId, ImRect()); + g.NavInitRequest = true; + g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false; + g.NavInitResult.ID = 0; + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); + } + else + { + g.NavId = window->NavLastIds[0]; + g.NavFocusScopeId = window->NavRootFocusScopeId; + } +} + +static ImVec2 ImGui::NavCalcPreferredRefPos() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow; + if (g.NavDisableHighlight || !g.NavDisableMouseHover || !window) + { + // Mouse (we need a fallback in case the mouse becomes invalid after being used) + // The +1.0f offset when stored by OpenPopupEx() allows reopening this or another popup (same or another mouse button) while not moving the mouse, it is pretty standard. + // In theory we could move that +1.0f offset in OpenPopupEx() + ImVec2 p = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? g.IO.MousePos : g.MouseLastValidPos; + return ImVec2(p.x + 1.0f, p.y); + } + else + { + // When navigation is active and mouse is disabled, pick a position around the bottom left of the currently navigated item + // Take account of upcoming scrolling (maybe set mouse pos should be done in EndFrame?) + ImRect rect_rel = WindowRectRelToAbs(window, window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]); + if (window->LastFrameActive != g.FrameCount && (window->ScrollTarget.x != FLT_MAX || window->ScrollTarget.y != FLT_MAX)) + { + ImVec2 next_scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window); + rect_rel.Translate(window->Scroll - next_scroll); + } + ImVec2 pos = ImVec2(rect_rel.Min.x + ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.x * 4, rect_rel.GetWidth()), rect_rel.Max.y - ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.y, rect_rel.GetHeight())); + ImGuiViewport* viewport = GetMainViewport(); + return ImFloor(ImClamp(pos, viewport->Pos, viewport->Pos + viewport->Size)); // ImFloor() is important because non-integer mouse position application in backend might be lossy and result in undesirable non-zero delta. + } +} + +float ImGui::GetNavTweakPressedAmount(ImGuiAxis axis) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + float repeat_delay, repeat_rate; + GetTypematicRepeatRate(ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak, &repeat_delay, &repeat_rate); + + ImGuiKey key_less, key_more; + if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + { + key_less = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft : ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp; + key_more = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight : ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown; + } + else + { + key_less = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_LeftArrow : ImGuiKey_UpArrow; + key_more = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_RightArrow : ImGuiKey_DownArrow; + } + float amount = (float)GetKeyPressedAmount(key_more, repeat_delay, repeat_rate) - (float)GetKeyPressedAmount(key_less, repeat_delay, repeat_rate); + if (amount != 0.0f && IsKeyDown(key_less) && IsKeyDown(key_more)) // Cancel when opposite directions are held, regardless of repeat phase + amount = 0.0f; + return amount; +} + +static void ImGui::NavUpdate() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + + io.WantSetMousePos = false; + //if (g.NavScoringDebugCount > 0) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavScoringDebugCount %d for '%s' layer %d (Init:%d, Move:%d)\n", g.NavScoringDebugCount, g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL", g.NavLayer, g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0, g.NavMoveRequest); + + // Set input source based on which keys are last pressed (as some features differs when used with Gamepad vs Keyboard) + // FIXME-NAV: Now that keys are separated maybe we can get rid of NavInputSource? + const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0; + const ImGuiKey nav_gamepad_keys_to_change_source[] = { ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown }; + if (nav_gamepad_active) + for (ImGuiKey key : nav_gamepad_keys_to_change_source) + if (IsKeyDown(key)) + g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad; + const bool nav_keyboard_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0; + const ImGuiKey nav_keyboard_keys_to_change_source[] = { ImGuiKey_Space, ImGuiKey_Enter, ImGuiKey_Escape, ImGuiKey_RightArrow, ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiKey_DownArrow }; + if (nav_keyboard_active) + for (ImGuiKey key : nav_keyboard_keys_to_change_source) + if (IsKeyDown(key)) + g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard; + + // Process navigation init request (select first/default focus) + g.NavJustMovedToId = 0; + if (g.NavInitResult.ID != 0) + NavInitRequestApplyResult(); + g.NavInitRequest = false; + g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false; + g.NavInitResult.ID = 0; + + // Process navigation move request + if (g.NavMoveSubmitted) + NavMoveRequestApplyResult(); + g.NavTabbingCounter = 0; + g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = false; + + // Schedule mouse position update (will be done at the bottom of this function, after 1) processing all move requests and 2) updating scrolling) + bool set_mouse_pos = false; + if (g.NavMousePosDirty && g.NavIdIsAlive) + if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow) + set_mouse_pos = true; + g.NavMousePosDirty = false; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main || g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu); + + // Store our return window (for returning from Menu Layer to Main Layer) and clear it as soon as we step back in our own Layer 0 + if (g.NavWindow) + NavSaveLastChildNavWindowIntoParent(g.NavWindow); + if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow != NULL && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main) + g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow = NULL; + + // Update CTRL+TAB and Windowing features (hold Square to move/resize/etc.) + NavUpdateWindowing(); + + // Set output flags for user application + io.NavActive = (nav_keyboard_active || nav_gamepad_active) && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs); + io.NavVisible = (io.NavActive && g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight) || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL); + + // Process NavCancel input (to close a popup, get back to parent, clear focus) + NavUpdateCancelRequest(); + + // Process manual activation request + g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = 0; + g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None; + if (g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) + { + const bool activate_down = (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Space)) || (nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate)); + const bool activate_pressed = activate_down && ((nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space, false)) || (nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate, false))); + const bool input_down = (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Enter)) || (nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput)); + const bool input_pressed = input_down && ((nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter, false)) || (nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput, false))); + if (g.ActiveId == 0 && activate_pressed) + { + g.NavActivateId = g.NavId; + g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferTweak; + } + if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && input_pressed) + { + g.NavActivateId = g.NavId; + g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput; + } + if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && (activate_down || input_down)) + g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavId; + if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && (activate_pressed || input_pressed)) + g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavId; + } + if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; + if (g.NavActivateId != 0) + IM_ASSERT(g.NavActivateDownId == g.NavActivateId); + + // Process programmatic activation request + // FIXME-NAV: Those should eventually be queued (unlike focus they don't cancel each others) + if (g.NavNextActivateId != 0) + { + g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavNextActivateId; + g.NavActivateFlags = g.NavNextActivateFlags; + } + g.NavNextActivateId = 0; + + // Process move requests + NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest(); + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None) + NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest(); + NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag(); + g.NavIdIsAlive = false; + + // Scrolling + if (g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget) + { + // *Fallback* manual-scroll with Nav directional keys when window has no navigable item + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow; + const float scroll_speed = IM_ROUND(window->CalcFontSize() * 100 * io.DeltaTime); // We need round the scrolling speed because sub-pixel scroll isn't reliably supported. + const ImGuiDir move_dir = g.NavMoveDir; + if (window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavWindowHasScrollY && move_dir != ImGuiDir_None) + { + if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right) + SetScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed)); + if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Down) + SetScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed)); + } + + // *Normal* Manual scroll with LStick + // Next movement request will clamp the NavId reference rectangle to the visible area, so navigation will resume within those bounds. + if (nav_gamepad_active) + { + const ImVec2 scroll_dir = GetKeyMagnitude2d(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown); + const float tweak_factor = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow) ? 1.0f / 10.0f : IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast) ? 10.0f : 1.0f; + if (scroll_dir.x != 0.0f && window->ScrollbarX) + SetScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + scroll_dir.x * scroll_speed * tweak_factor)); + if (scroll_dir.y != 0.0f) + SetScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + scroll_dir.y * scroll_speed * tweak_factor)); + } + } + + // Always prioritize mouse highlight if navigation is disabled + if (!nav_keyboard_active && !nav_gamepad_active) + { + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; + g.NavDisableMouseHover = set_mouse_pos = false; + } + + // Update mouse position if requested + // (This will take into account the possibility that a Scroll was queued in the window to offset our absolute mouse position before scroll has been applied) + if (set_mouse_pos && (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos)) + { + io.MousePos = io.MousePosPrev = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); + io.WantSetMousePos = true; + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("SetMousePos: (%.1f,%.1f)\n", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y); + } + + // [DEBUG] + g.NavScoringDebugCount = 0; +#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS + if (ImGuiWindow* debug_window = g.NavWindow) + { + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(debug_window); + int layer = g.NavLayer; /* for (int layer = 0; layer < 2; layer++)*/ { ImRect r = WindowRectRelToAbs(debug_window, debug_window->NavRectRel[layer]); draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 200, 0, 255)); } + //if (1) { ImU32 col = (!debug_window->Hidden) ? IM_COL32(255,0,255,255) : IM_COL32(255,0,0,255); ImVec2 p = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); char buf[32]; ImFormatString(buf, 32, "%d", g.NavLayer); draw_list->AddCircleFilled(p, 3.0f, col); draw_list->AddText(NULL, 13.0f, p + ImVec2(8,-4), col, buf); } + } +#endif +} + +void ImGui::NavInitRequestApplyResult() +{ + // In very rare cases g.NavWindow may be null (e.g. clearing focus after requesting an init request, which does happen when releasing Alt while clicking on void) + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!g.NavWindow) + return; + + ImGuiNavItemData* result = &g.NavInitResult; + if (g.NavId != result->ID) + { + g.NavJustMovedToId = result->ID; + g.NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId = result->FocusScopeId; + g.NavJustMovedToKeyMods = 0; + } + + // Apply result from previous navigation init request (will typically select the first item, unless SetItemDefaultFocus() has been called) + // FIXME-NAV: On _NavFlattened windows, g.NavWindow will only be updated during subsequent frame. Not a problem currently. + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavInitRequest: ApplyResult: NavID 0x%08X in Layer %d Window \"%s\"\n", result->ID, g.NavLayer, g.NavWindow->Name); + SetNavID(result->ID, g.NavLayer, result->FocusScopeId, result->RectRel); + g.NavIdIsAlive = true; // Mark as alive from previous frame as we got a result + if (g.NavInitRequestFromMove) + NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); +} + +// Bias scoring rect ahead of scoring + update preferred pos (if missing) using source position +static void NavBiasScoringRect(ImRect& r, ImVec2& preferred_pos_rel, ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags) +{ + // Bias initial rect + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImVec2 rel_to_abs_offset = g.NavWindow->DC.CursorStartPos; + + // Initialize bias on departure if we don't have any. So mouse-click + arrow will record bias. + // - We default to L/U bias, so moving down from a large source item into several columns will land on left-most column. + // - But each successful move sets new bias on one axis, only cleared when using mouse. + if ((move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded) == 0) + { + if (preferred_pos_rel.x == FLT_MAX) + preferred_pos_rel.x = ImMin(r.Min.x + 1.0f, r.Max.x) - rel_to_abs_offset.x; + if (preferred_pos_rel.y == FLT_MAX) + preferred_pos_rel.y = r.GetCenter().y - rel_to_abs_offset.y; + } + + // Apply general bias on the other axis + if ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Down) && preferred_pos_rel.x != FLT_MAX) + r.Min.x = r.Max.x = preferred_pos_rel.x + rel_to_abs_offset.x; + else if ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right) && preferred_pos_rel.y != FLT_MAX) + r.Min.y = r.Max.y = preferred_pos_rel.y + rel_to_abs_offset.y; +} + +void ImGui::NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow; + const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0; + const bool nav_keyboard_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0; + + if (g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame && window != NULL) + { + // Forwarding previous request (which has been modified, e.g. wrap around menus rewrite the requests with a starting rectangle at the other side of the window) + // (preserve most state, which were already set by the NavMoveRequestForward() function) + IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None && g.NavMoveClipDir != ImGuiDir_None); + IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded); + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavMoveRequestForward %d\n", g.NavMoveDir); + } + else + { + // Initiate directional inputs request + g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_None; + g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None; + g.NavMoveScrollFlags = ImGuiScrollFlags_None; + if (window && !g.NavWindowingTarget && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) + { + const ImGuiInputFlags repeat_mode = ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat | (ImGuiInputFlags)ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavMove; + if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Left) && ((nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)) || (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Left; } + if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Right) && ((nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)) || (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_RightArrow, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Right; } + if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Up) && ((nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)) || (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; } + if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Down) && ((nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)) || (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_DownArrow, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, repeat_mode)))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; } + } + g.NavMoveClipDir = g.NavMoveDir; + g.NavScoringNoClipRect = ImRect(+FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + } + + // Update PageUp/PageDown/Home/End scroll + // FIXME-NAV: Consider enabling those keys even without the master ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard flag? + float scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f; + if (window && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None && nav_keyboard_active) + scoring_rect_offset_y = NavUpdatePageUpPageDown(); + if (scoring_rect_offset_y != 0.0f) + { + g.NavScoringNoClipRect = window->InnerRect; + g.NavScoringNoClipRect.TranslateY(scoring_rect_offset_y); + } + + // [DEBUG] Always send a request when holding CTRL. Hold CTRL + Arrow change the direction. +#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING + //if (io.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C)) + // g.NavMoveDirForDebug = (ImGuiDir)((g.NavMoveDirForDebug + 1) & 3); + if (io.KeyCtrl) + { + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None) + g.NavMoveDir = g.NavMoveDirForDebug; + g.NavMoveClipDir = g.NavMoveDir; + g.NavMoveFlags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DebugNoResult; + } +#endif + + // Submit + g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = false; + if (g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None) + NavMoveRequestSubmit(g.NavMoveDir, g.NavMoveClipDir, g.NavMoveFlags, g.NavMoveScrollFlags); + + // Moving with no reference triggers an init request (will be used as a fallback if the direction fails to find a match) + if (g.NavMoveSubmitted && g.NavId == 0) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavInitRequest: from move, window \"%s\", layer=%d\n", window ? window->Name : "", g.NavLayer); + g.NavInitRequest = g.NavInitRequestFromMove = true; + g.NavInitResult.ID = 0; + g.NavDisableHighlight = false; + } + + // When using gamepad, we project the reference nav bounding box into window visible area. + // This is to allow resuming navigation inside the visible area after doing a large amount of scrolling, + // since with gamepad all movements are relative (can't focus a visible object like we can with the mouse). + if (g.NavMoveSubmitted && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main && window != NULL)// && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded)) + { + bool clamp_x = (g.NavMoveFlags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX)) == 0; + bool clamp_y = (g.NavMoveFlags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY)) == 0; + ImRect inner_rect_rel = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, ImRect(window->InnerRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), window->InnerRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1))); + + // Take account of changing scroll to handle triggering a new move request on a scrolling frame. (#6171) + // Otherwise 'inner_rect_rel' would be off on the move result frame. + inner_rect_rel.Translate(CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window) - window->Scroll); + + if ((clamp_x || clamp_y) && !inner_rect_rel.Contains(window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer])) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavMoveRequest: clamp NavRectRel for gamepad move\n"); + float pad_x = ImMin(inner_rect_rel.GetWidth(), window->CalcFontSize() * 0.5f); + float pad_y = ImMin(inner_rect_rel.GetHeight(), window->CalcFontSize() * 0.5f); // Terrible approximation for the intent of starting navigation from first fully visible item + inner_rect_rel.Min.x = clamp_x ? (inner_rect_rel.Min.x + pad_x) : -FLT_MAX; + inner_rect_rel.Max.x = clamp_x ? (inner_rect_rel.Max.x - pad_x) : +FLT_MAX; + inner_rect_rel.Min.y = clamp_y ? (inner_rect_rel.Min.y + pad_y) : -FLT_MAX; + inner_rect_rel.Max.y = clamp_y ? (inner_rect_rel.Max.y - pad_y) : +FLT_MAX; + window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].ClipWithFull(inner_rect_rel); + g.NavId = 0; + } + } + + // For scoring we use a single segment on the left side our current item bounding box (not touching the edge to avoid box overlap with zero-spaced items) + ImRect scoring_rect; + if (window != NULL) + { + ImRect nav_rect_rel = !window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].IsInverted() ? window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] : ImRect(0, 0, 0, 0); + scoring_rect = WindowRectRelToAbs(window, nav_rect_rel); + scoring_rect.TranslateY(scoring_rect_offset_y); + if (g.NavMoveSubmitted) + NavBiasScoringRect(scoring_rect, window->RootWindowForNav->NavPreferredScoringPosRel[g.NavLayer], g.NavMoveDir, g.NavMoveFlags); + IM_ASSERT(!scoring_rect.IsInverted()); // Ensure we have a non-inverted bounding box here will allow us to remove extraneous ImFabs() calls in NavScoreItem(). + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(scoring_rect.Min, scoring_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); // [DEBUG] + //if (!g.NavScoringNoClipRect.IsInverted()) { GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Min, g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 200, 0, 255)); } // [DEBUG] + } + g.NavScoringRect = scoring_rect; + g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Add(scoring_rect); +} + +void ImGui::NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None); + if (window == NULL || g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) + return; + + const bool tab_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat) && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyAlt; + if (!tab_pressed) + return; + + // Initiate tabbing request + // (this is ALWAYS ENABLED, regardless of ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard flag!) + // Initially this was designed to use counters and modulo arithmetic, but that could not work with unsubmitted items (list clipper). Instead we use a strategy close to other move requests. + // See NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest() for a description of the various forward/backward tabbing cases with and without wrapping. + const bool nav_keyboard_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0; + if (nav_keyboard_active) + g.NavTabbingDir = g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : (g.NavDisableHighlight == true && g.ActiveId == 0) ? 0 : +1; + else + g.NavTabbingDir = g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : (g.ActiveId == 0) ? 0 : +1; + ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Activate; + ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags = window->Appearing ? ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY : ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY; + ImGuiDir clip_dir = (g.NavTabbingDir < 0) ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down; + NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir_None, clip_dir, move_flags, scroll_flags); // FIXME-NAV: Once we refactor tabbing, add LegacyApi flag to not activate non-inputable. + g.NavTabbingCounter = -1; +} + +// Apply result from previous frame navigation directional move request. Always called from NavUpdate() +void ImGui::NavMoveRequestApplyResult() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; +#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING + if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DebugNoResult) // [DEBUG] Scoring all items in NavWindow at all times + return; +#endif + + // Select which result to use + ImGuiNavItemData* result = (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID != 0) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : (g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0) ? &g.NavMoveResultOther : NULL; + + // Tabbing forward wrap + if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) && result == NULL) + if ((g.NavTabbingCounter == 1 || g.NavTabbingDir == 0) && g.NavTabbingResultFirst.ID) + result = &g.NavTabbingResultFirst; + + // In a situation when there are no results but NavId != 0, re-enable the Navigation highlight (because g.NavId is not considered as a possible result) + const ImGuiAxis axis = (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X; + if (result == NULL) + { + if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) + g.NavMoveFlags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSetNavHighlight; + if (g.NavId != 0 && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSetNavHighlight) == 0) + NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(axis); // On a failed move, clear preferred pos for this axis. + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavMoveSubmitted but not led to a result!\n"); + return; + } + + // PageUp/PageDown behavior first jumps to the bottom/top mostly visible item, _otherwise_ use the result from the previous/next page. + if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet) + if (g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible.ID != g.NavId) + result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible; + + // Maybe entering a flattened child from the outside? In this case solve the tie using the regular scoring rules. + if (result != &g.NavMoveResultOther && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.Window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow) + if ((g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox < result->DistBox) || (g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox == result->DistBox && g.NavMoveResultOther.DistCenter < result->DistCenter)) + result = &g.NavMoveResultOther; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow && result->Window); + + // Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view. + if (g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main) + { + ImRect rect_abs = WindowRectRelToAbs(result->Window, result->RectRel); + ScrollToRectEx(result->Window, rect_abs, g.NavMoveScrollFlags); + + if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY) + { + // FIXME: Should remove this? Or make more precise: use ScrollToRectEx() with edge? + float scroll_target = (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? result->Window->ScrollMax.y : 0.0f; + SetScrollY(result->Window, scroll_target); + } + } + + if (g.NavWindow != result->Window) + { + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("[focus] NavMoveRequest: SetNavWindow(\"%s\")\n", result->Window->Name); + g.NavWindow = result->Window; + } + if (g.ActiveId != result->ID) + ClearActiveID(); + + // Don't set NavJustMovedToId if just landed on the same spot (which may happen with ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId) + // PageUp/PageDown however sets always set NavJustMovedTo (vs Home/End which doesn't) mimicking Windows behavior. + if ((g.NavId != result->ID || (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsPageMove)) && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSelect) == 0) + { + g.NavJustMovedToId = result->ID; + g.NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId = result->FocusScopeId; + g.NavJustMovedToKeyMods = g.NavMoveKeyMods; + } + + // Apply new NavID/Focus + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavMoveRequest: result NavID 0x%08X in Layer %d Window \"%s\"\n", result->ID, g.NavLayer, g.NavWindow->Name); + ImVec2 preferred_scoring_pos_rel = g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav->NavPreferredScoringPosRel[g.NavLayer]; + SetNavID(result->ID, g.NavLayer, result->FocusScopeId, result->RectRel); + + // Restore last preferred position for current axis + // (storing in RootWindowForNav-> as the info is desirable at the beginning of a Move Request. In theory all storage should use RootWindowForNav..) + if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) == 0) + { + preferred_scoring_pos_rel[axis] = result->RectRel.GetCenter()[axis]; + g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav->NavPreferredScoringPosRel[g.NavLayer] = preferred_scoring_pos_rel; + } + + // Tabbing: Activates Inputable, otherwise only Focus + if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) && (result->InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable) == 0) + g.NavMoveFlags &= ~ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Activate; + + // Activate + if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Activate) + { + g.NavNextActivateId = result->ID; + g.NavNextActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None; + g.NavMoveFlags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSetNavHighlight; + if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing) + g.NavNextActivateFlags |= ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput | ImGuiActivateFlags_TryToPreserveState; + } + + // Enable nav highlight + if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSetNavHighlight) == 0) + NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); +} + +// Process NavCancel input (to close a popup, get back to parent, clear focus) +// FIXME: In order to support e.g. Escape to clear a selection we'll need: +// - either to store the equivalent of ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask for a FocusScope and test for it. +// - either to move most/all of those tests to the epilogue/end functions of the scope they are dealing with (e.g. exit child window in EndChild()) or in EndFrame(), to allow an earlier intercept +static void ImGui::NavUpdateCancelRequest() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const bool nav_gamepad_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0; + const bool nav_keyboard_active = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0; + if (!(nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape, ImGuiKeyOwner_None)) && !(nav_gamepad_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel, ImGuiKeyOwner_None))) + return; + + IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavUpdateCancelRequest()\n"); + if (g.ActiveId != 0) + { + ClearActiveID(); + } + else if (g.NavLayer != ImGuiNavLayer_Main) + { + // Leave the "menu" layer + NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer_Main); + NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); + } + else if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow != g.NavWindow->RootWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow) + { + // Exit child window + ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.NavWindow; + ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.NavWindow->ParentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(child_window->ChildId != 0); + ImRect child_rect = child_window->Rect(); + FocusWindow(parent_window); + SetNavID(child_window->ChildId, ImGuiNavLayer_Main, 0, WindowRectAbsToRel(parent_window, child_rect)); + NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); + } + else if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0 && g.OpenPopupStack.back().Window != NULL && !(g.OpenPopupStack.back().Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) + { + // Close open popup/menu + ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1, true); + } + else + { + // Clear NavLastId for popups but keep it for regular child window so we can leave one and come back where we were + if (g.NavWindow && ((g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))) + g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] = 0; + g.NavId = 0; + } +} + +// Handle PageUp/PageDown/Home/End keys +// Called from NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest() which will use our output to create a move request +// FIXME-NAV: This doesn't work properly with NavFlattened siblings as we use NavWindow rectangle for reference +// FIXME-NAV: how to get Home/End to aim at the beginning/end of a 2D grid? +static float ImGui::NavUpdatePageUpPageDown() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow; + if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) || g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL) + return 0.0f; + + const bool page_up_held = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_PageUp, ImGuiKeyOwner_None); + const bool page_down_held = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_PageDown, ImGuiKeyOwner_None); + const bool home_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Home, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat); + const bool end_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_End, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat); + if (page_up_held == page_down_held && home_pressed == end_pressed) // Proceed if either (not both) are pressed, otherwise early out + return 0.0f; + + if (g.NavLayer != ImGuiNavLayer_Main) + NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer_Main); + + if (window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavWindowHasScrollY) + { + // Fallback manual-scroll when window has no navigable item + if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageUp, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat)) + SetScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y - window->InnerRect.GetHeight()); + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageDown, ImGuiKeyOwner_None, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat)) + SetScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y + window->InnerRect.GetHeight()); + else if (home_pressed) + SetScrollY(window, 0.0f); + else if (end_pressed) + SetScrollY(window, window->ScrollMax.y); + } + else + { + ImRect& nav_rect_rel = window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]; + const float page_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->InnerRect.GetHeight() - window->CalcFontSize() * 1.0f + nav_rect_rel.GetHeight()); + float nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f; + if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageUp, true)) + { + nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = -page_offset_y; + g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; // Because our scoring rect is offset up, we request the down direction (so we can always land on the last item) + g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Up; + g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsPageMove; + } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageDown, true)) + { + nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = +page_offset_y; + g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; // Because our scoring rect is offset down, we request the up direction (so we can always land on the last item) + g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Down; + g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsPageMove; + } + else if (home_pressed) + { + // FIXME-NAV: handling of Home/End is assuming that the top/bottom most item will be visible with Scroll.y == 0/ScrollMax.y + // Scrolling will be handled via the ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY flag, we don't scroll immediately to avoid scrolling happening before nav result. + // Preserve current horizontal position if we have any. + nav_rect_rel.Min.y = nav_rect_rel.Max.y = 0.0f; + if (nav_rect_rel.IsInverted()) + nav_rect_rel.Min.x = nav_rect_rel.Max.x = 0.0f; + g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; + g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY; + // FIXME-NAV: MoveClipDir left to _None, intentional? + } + else if (end_pressed) + { + nav_rect_rel.Min.y = nav_rect_rel.Max.y = window->ContentSize.y; + if (nav_rect_rel.IsInverted()) + nav_rect_rel.Min.x = nav_rect_rel.Max.x = 0.0f; + g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; + g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY; + // FIXME-NAV: MoveClipDir left to _None, intentional? + } + return nav_scoring_rect_offset_y; + } + return 0.0f; +} + +static void ImGui::NavEndFrame() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Show CTRL+TAB list window + if (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL) + NavUpdateWindowingOverlay(); + + // Perform wrap-around in menus + // FIXME-NAV: Wrap may need to apply a weight bias on the other axis. e.g. 4x4 grid with 2 last items missing on last item won't handle LoopY/WrapY correctly. + // FIXME-NAV: Wrap (not Loop) support could be handled by the scoring function and then WrapX would function without an extra frame. + if (g.NavWindow && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapMask_) && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded) == 0) + NavUpdateCreateWrappingRequest(); +} + +static void ImGui::NavUpdateCreateWrappingRequest() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow; + + bool do_forward = false; + ImRect bb_rel = window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]; + ImGuiDir clip_dir = g.NavMoveDir; + + const ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags = g.NavMoveFlags; + //const ImGuiAxis move_axis = (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X; + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX))) + { + bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = window->ContentSize.x + window->WindowPadding.x; + if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) + { + bb_rel.TranslateY(-bb_rel.GetHeight()); // Previous row + clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Up; + } + do_forward = true; + } + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX))) + { + bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = -window->WindowPadding.x; + if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX) + { + bb_rel.TranslateY(+bb_rel.GetHeight()); // Next row + clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Down; + } + do_forward = true; + } + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY))) + { + bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = window->ContentSize.y + window->WindowPadding.y; + if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) + { + bb_rel.TranslateX(-bb_rel.GetWidth()); // Previous column + clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Left; + } + do_forward = true; + } + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY))) + { + bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = -window->WindowPadding.y; + if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY) + { + bb_rel.TranslateX(+bb_rel.GetWidth()); // Next column + clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Right; + } + do_forward = true; + } + if (!do_forward) + return; + window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = bb_rel; + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_X); + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_Y); + NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, move_flags, g.NavMoveScrollFlags); +} + +static int ImGui::FindWindowFocusIndex(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_UNUSED(g); + int order = window->FocusOrder; + IM_ASSERT(window->RootWindow == window); // No child window (not testing _ChildWindow because of docking) + IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[order] == window); + return order; +} + +static ImGuiWindow* FindWindowNavFocusable(int i_start, int i_stop, int dir) // FIXME-OPT O(N) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + for (int i = i_start; i >= 0 && i < g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size && i != i_stop; i += dir) + if (ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(g.WindowsFocusOrder[i])) + return g.WindowsFocusOrder[i]; + return NULL; +} + +static void NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(int focus_change_dir) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget); + if (g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) + return; + + const int i_current = ImGui::FindWindowFocusIndex(g.NavWindowingTarget); + ImGuiWindow* window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable(i_current + focus_change_dir, -INT_MAX, focus_change_dir); + if (!window_target) + window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable((focus_change_dir < 0) ? (g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1) : 0, i_current, focus_change_dir); + if (window_target) // Don't reset windowing target if there's a single window in the list + { + g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window_target; + g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos = g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + } + g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false; +} + +// Windowing management mode +// Keyboard: CTRL+Tab (change focus/move/resize), Alt (toggle menu layer) +// Gamepad: Hold Menu/Square (change focus/move/resize), Tap Menu/Square (toggle menu layer) +static void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowing() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + + ImGuiWindow* apply_focus_window = NULL; + bool apply_toggle_layer = false; + + ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetTopMostPopupModal(); + bool allow_windowing = (modal_window == NULL); // FIXME: This prevent CTRL+TAB from being usable with windows that are inside the Begin-stack of that modal. + if (!allow_windowing) + g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL; + + // Fade out + if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && g.NavWindowingTarget == NULL) + { + g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha - io.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f); + if (g.DimBgRatio <= 0.0f && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha <= 0.0f) + g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = NULL; + } + + // Start CTRL+Tab or Square+L/R window selection + const ImGuiID owner_id = ImHashStr("###NavUpdateWindowing"); + const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0; + const bool nav_keyboard_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0; + const bool keyboard_next_window = allow_windowing && g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyNext && Shortcut(g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyNext, owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteAlways); + const bool keyboard_prev_window = allow_windowing && g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyPrev && Shortcut(g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyPrev, owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteAlways); + const bool start_windowing_with_gamepad = allow_windowing && nav_gamepad_active && !g.NavWindowingTarget && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadMenu, 0, ImGuiInputFlags_None); + const bool start_windowing_with_keyboard = allow_windowing && !g.NavWindowingTarget && (keyboard_next_window || keyboard_prev_window); // Note: enabled even without NavEnableKeyboard! + if (start_windowing_with_gamepad || start_windowing_with_keyboard) + if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow : FindWindowNavFocusable(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1, -INT_MAX, -1)) + { + g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window->RootWindow; + g.NavWindowingTimer = g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f; + g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos = g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = start_windowing_with_gamepad ? true : false; // Gamepad starts toggling layer + g.NavInputSource = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard : ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad; + + // Register ownership of our mods. Using ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalHigh in the Shortcut() calls instead would probably be correct but may have more side-effects. + if (keyboard_next_window || keyboard_prev_window) + SetKeyOwnersForKeyChord((g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyNext | g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyPrev) & ImGuiMod_Mask_, owner_id); + } + + // Gamepad update + g.NavWindowingTimer += io.DeltaTime; + if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + { + // Highlight only appears after a brief time holding the button, so that a fast tap on PadMenu (to toggle NavLayer) doesn't add visual noise + g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f)); + + // Select window to focus + const int focus_change_dir = (int)IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadL1) - (int)IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadR1); + if (focus_change_dir != 0) + { + NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(focus_change_dir); + g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 1.0f; + } + + // Single press toggles NavLayer, long press with L/R apply actual focus on release (until then the window was merely rendered top-most) + if (!IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadMenu)) + { + g.NavWindowingToggleLayer &= (g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha < 1.0f); // Once button was held long enough we don't consider it a tap-to-toggle-layer press anymore. + if (g.NavWindowingToggleLayer && g.NavWindow) + apply_toggle_layer = true; + else if (!g.NavWindowingToggleLayer) + apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget; + g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL; + } + } + + // Keyboard: Focus + if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard) + { + // Visuals only appears after a brief time after pressing TAB the first time, so that a fast CTRL+TAB doesn't add visual noise + ImGuiKeyChord shared_mods = ((g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyNext ? g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyNext : ImGuiMod_Mask_) & (g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyPrev ? g.ConfigNavWindowingKeyPrev : ImGuiMod_Mask_)) & ImGuiMod_Mask_; + IM_ASSERT(shared_mods != 0); // Next/Prev shortcut currently needs a shared modifier to "hold", otherwise Prev actions would keep cycling between two windows. + g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f)); // 1.0f + if (keyboard_next_window || keyboard_prev_window) + NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(keyboard_next_window ? -1 : +1); + else if ((io.KeyMods & shared_mods) != shared_mods) + apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget; + } + + // Keyboard: Press and Release ALT to toggle menu layer + // - Testing that only Alt is tested prevents Alt+Shift or AltGR from toggling menu layer. + // - AltGR is normally Alt+Ctrl but we can't reliably detect it (not all backends/systems/layout emit it as Alt+Ctrl). But even on keyboards without AltGR we don't want Alt+Ctrl to open menu anyway. + if (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiMod_Alt, ImGuiKeyOwner_None)) + { + g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = true; + g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard; + } + if (g.NavWindowingToggleLayer && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard) + { + // We cancel toggling nav layer when any text has been typed (generally while holding Alt). (See #370) + // We cancel toggling nav layer when other modifiers are pressed. (See #4439) + // We cancel toggling nav layer if an owner has claimed the key. + if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0 || io.KeyCtrl || io.KeyShift || io.KeySuper || TestKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Alt, ImGuiKeyOwner_None) == false) + g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false; + + // Apply layer toggle on release + // Important: as before version <18314 we lacked an explicit IO event for focus gain/loss, we also compare mouse validity to detect old backends clearing mouse pos on focus loss. + if (IsKeyReleased(ImGuiMod_Alt) && g.NavWindowingToggleLayer) + if (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap) + if (IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) == IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePosPrev)) + apply_toggle_layer = true; + if (!IsKeyDown(ImGuiMod_Alt)) + g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false; + } + + // Move window + if (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove)) + { + ImVec2 nav_move_dir; + if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard && !io.KeyShift) + nav_move_dir = GetKeyMagnitude2d(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiKey_RightArrow, ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiKey_DownArrow); + if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + nav_move_dir = GetKeyMagnitude2d(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown); + if (nav_move_dir.x != 0.0f || nav_move_dir.y != 0.0f) + { + const float NAV_MOVE_SPEED = 800.0f; + const float move_step = NAV_MOVE_SPEED * io.DeltaTime * ImMin(io.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, io.DisplayFramebufferScale.y); + g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos += nav_move_dir * move_step; + g.NavDisableMouseHover = true; + ImVec2 accum_floored = ImFloor(g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos); + if (accum_floored.x != 0.0f || accum_floored.y != 0.0f) + { + ImGuiWindow* moving_window = g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindow; + SetWindowPos(moving_window, moving_window->Pos + accum_floored, ImGuiCond_Always); + g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos -= accum_floored; + } + } + } + + // Apply final focus + if (apply_focus_window && (g.NavWindow == NULL || apply_focus_window != g.NavWindow->RootWindow)) + { + ClearActiveID(); + NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); + ClosePopupsOverWindow(apply_focus_window, false); + FocusWindow(apply_focus_window, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild); + apply_focus_window = g.NavWindow; + if (apply_focus_window->NavLastIds[0] == 0) + NavInitWindow(apply_focus_window, false); + + // If the window has ONLY a menu layer (no main layer), select it directly + // Use NavLayersActiveMaskNext since windows didn't have a chance to be Begin()-ed on this frame, + // so CTRL+Tab where the keys are only held for 1 frame will be able to use correct layers mask since + // the target window as already been previewed once. + // FIXME-NAV: This should be done in NavInit.. or in FocusWindow... However in both of those cases, + // we won't have a guarantee that windows has been visible before and therefore NavLayersActiveMask* + // won't be valid. + if (apply_focus_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext == (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu)) + g.NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu; + } + if (apply_focus_window) + g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL; + + // Apply menu/layer toggle + if (apply_toggle_layer && g.NavWindow) + { + ClearActiveID(); + + // Move to parent menu if necessary + ImGuiWindow* new_nav_window = g.NavWindow; + while (new_nav_window->ParentWindow + && (new_nav_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask & (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu)) == 0 + && (new_nav_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0 + && (new_nav_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0) + new_nav_window = new_nav_window->ParentWindow; + if (new_nav_window != g.NavWindow) + { + ImGuiWindow* old_nav_window = g.NavWindow; + FocusWindow(new_nav_window); + new_nav_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = old_nav_window; + } + + // Toggle layer + const ImGuiNavLayer new_nav_layer = (g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayersActiveMask & (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu)) ? (ImGuiNavLayer)((int)g.NavLayer ^ 1) : ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + if (new_nav_layer != g.NavLayer) + { + // Reinitialize navigation when entering menu bar with the Alt key (FIXME: could be a properly of the layer?) + if (new_nav_layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu) + g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[new_nav_layer] = 0; + NavRestoreLayer(new_nav_layer); + NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove(); + } + } +} + +// Window has already passed the IsWindowNavFocusable() +static const char* GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) + return ImGui::LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_WindowingPopup); + if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) && strcmp(window->Name, "##MainMenuBar") == 0) + return ImGui::LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_WindowingMainMenuBar); + return ImGui::LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_WindowingUntitled); +} + +// Overlay displayed when using CTRL+TAB. Called by EndFrame(). +void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowingOverlay() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL); + + if (g.NavWindowingTimer < NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY) + return; + + if (g.NavWindowingListWindow == NULL) + g.NavWindowingListWindow = FindWindowByName("###NavWindowingList"); + const ImGuiViewport* viewport = GetMainViewport(); + SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(viewport->Size.x * 0.20f, viewport->Size.y * 0.20f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX)); + SetNextWindowPos(viewport->GetCenter(), ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, g.Style.WindowPadding * 2.0f); + Begin("###NavWindowingList", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings); + for (int n = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--) + { + ImGuiWindow* window = g.WindowsFocusOrder[n]; + IM_ASSERT(window != NULL); // Fix static analyzers + if (!IsWindowNavFocusable(window)) + continue; + const char* label = window->Name; + if (label == FindRenderedTextEnd(label)) + label = GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(window); + Selectable(label, g.NavWindowingTarget == window); + } + End(); + PopStyleVar(); +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] DRAG AND DROP +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +bool ImGui::IsDragDropActive() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.DragDropActive; +} + +void ImGui::ClearDragDrop() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.DragDropActive = false; + g.DragDropPayload.Clear(); + g.DragDropAcceptFlags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_None; + g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = 0; + g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX; + g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = -1; + + g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.clear(); + memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal)); +} + +// When this returns true you need to: a) call SetDragDropPayload() exactly once, b) you may render the payload visual/description, c) call EndDragDropSource() +// If the item has an identifier: +// - This assume/require the item to be activated (typically via ButtonBehavior). +// - Therefore if you want to use this with a mouse button other than left mouse button, it is up to the item itself to activate with another button. +// - We then pull and use the mouse button that was used to activate the item and use it to carry on the drag. +// If the item has no identifier: +// - Currently always assume left mouse button. +bool ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + // FIXME-DRAGDROP: While in the common-most "drag from non-zero active id" case we can tell the mouse button, + // in both SourceExtern and id==0 cases we may requires something else (explicit flags or some heuristic). + ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button = ImGuiMouseButton_Left; + + bool source_drag_active = false; + ImGuiID source_id = 0; + ImGuiID source_parent_id = 0; + if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern)) + { + source_id = g.LastItemData.ID; + if (source_id != 0) + { + // Common path: items with ID + if (g.ActiveId != source_id) + return false; + if (g.ActiveIdMouseButton != -1) + mouse_button = g.ActiveIdMouseButton; + if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button] == false || window->SkipItems) + return false; + g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false; + } + else + { + // Uncommon path: items without ID + if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button] == false || window->SkipItems) + return false; + if ((g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) == 0 && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdWindow != window)) + return false; + + // If you want to use BeginDragDropSource() on an item with no unique identifier for interaction, such as Text() or Image(), you need to: + // A) Read the explanation below, B) Use the ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID flag. + if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID)) + { + IM_ASSERT(0); + return false; + } + + // Magic fallback to handle items with no assigned ID, e.g. Text(), Image() + // We build a throwaway ID based on current ID stack + relative AABB of items in window. + // THE IDENTIFIER WON'T SURVIVE ANY REPOSITIONING/RESIZINGG OF THE WIDGET, so if your widget moves your dragging operation will be canceled. + // We don't need to maintain/call ClearActiveID() as releasing the button will early out this function and trigger !ActiveIdIsAlive. + // Rely on keeping other window->LastItemXXX fields intact. + source_id = g.LastItemData.ID = window->GetIDFromRectangle(g.LastItemData.Rect); + KeepAliveID(source_id); + bool is_hovered = ItemHoverable(g.LastItemData.Rect, source_id, g.LastItemData.InFlags); + if (is_hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[mouse_button]) + { + SetActiveID(source_id, window); + FocusWindow(window); + } + if (g.ActiveId == source_id) // Allow the underlying widget to display/return hovered during the mouse release frame, else we would get a flicker. + g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = is_hovered; + } + if (g.ActiveId != source_id) + return false; + source_parent_id = window->IDStack.back(); + source_drag_active = IsMouseDragging(mouse_button); + + // Disable navigation and key inputs while dragging + cancel existing request if any + SetActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys(); + } + else + { + window = NULL; + source_id = ImHashStr("#SourceExtern"); + source_drag_active = true; + } + + if (source_drag_active) + { + if (!g.DragDropActive) + { + IM_ASSERT(source_id != 0); + ClearDragDrop(); + ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload; + payload.SourceId = source_id; + payload.SourceParentId = source_parent_id; + g.DragDropActive = true; + g.DragDropSourceFlags = flags; + g.DragDropMouseButton = mouse_button; + if (payload.SourceId == g.ActiveId) + g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = true; + } + g.DragDropSourceFrameCount = g.FrameCount; + g.DragDropWithinSource = true; + + if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip)) + { + // Target can request the Source to not display its tooltip (we use a dedicated flag to make this request explicit) + // We unfortunately can't just modify the source flags and skip the call to BeginTooltip, as caller may be emitting contents. + bool ret = BeginTooltip(); + IM_ASSERT(ret); // FIXME-NEWBEGIN: If this ever becomes false, we need to Begin("##Hidden", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) + SetWindowHiddendAndSkipItemsForCurrentFrame(). + IM_UNUSED(ret); + + if (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev && (g.DragDropAcceptFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip)) + SetWindowHiddendAndSkipItemsForCurrentFrame(g.CurrentWindow); + } + + if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover) && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern)) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags &= ~ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect; + + return true; + } + return false; +} + +void ImGui::EndDragDropSource() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive); + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSource && "Not after a BeginDragDropSource()?"); + + if (!(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip)) + EndTooltip(); + + // Discard the drag if have not called SetDragDropPayload() + if (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount == -1) + ClearDragDrop(); + g.DragDropWithinSource = false; +} + +// Use 'cond' to choose to submit payload on drag start or every frame +bool ImGui::SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t data_size, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload; + if (cond == 0) + cond = ImGuiCond_Always; + + IM_ASSERT(type != NULL); + IM_ASSERT(strlen(type) < IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType) && "Payload type can be at most 32 characters long"); + IM_ASSERT((data != NULL && data_size > 0) || (data == NULL && data_size == 0)); + IM_ASSERT(cond == ImGuiCond_Always || cond == ImGuiCond_Once); + IM_ASSERT(payload.SourceId != 0); // Not called between BeginDragDropSource() and EndDragDropSource() + + if (cond == ImGuiCond_Always || payload.DataFrameCount == -1) + { + // Copy payload + ImStrncpy(payload.DataType, type, IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType)); + g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize(0); + if (data_size > sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal)) + { + // Store in heap + g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize((int)data_size); + payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.Data; + memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size); + } + else if (data_size > 0) + { + // Store locally + memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal)); + payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal; + memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size); + } + else + { + payload.Data = NULL; + } + payload.DataSize = (int)data_size; + } + payload.DataFrameCount = g.FrameCount; + + // Return whether the payload has been accepted + return (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount) || (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!g.DragDropActive) + return false; + + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow; + if (hovered_window == NULL || window->RootWindow != hovered_window->RootWindow) + return false; + IM_ASSERT(id != 0); + if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max) || (id == g.DragDropPayload.SourceId)) + return false; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinTarget == false); + g.DragDropTargetRect = bb; + g.DragDropTargetId = id; + g.DragDropWithinTarget = true; + return true; +} + +// We don't use BeginDragDropTargetCustom() and duplicate its code because: +// 1) we use LastItemRectHoveredRect which handles items that push a temporarily clip rectangle in their code. Calling BeginDragDropTargetCustom(LastItemRect) would not handle them. +// 2) and it's faster. as this code may be very frequently called, we want to early out as fast as we can. +// Also note how the HoveredWindow test is positioned differently in both functions (in both functions we optimize for the cheapest early out case) +bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!g.DragDropActive) + return false; + + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (!(g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect)) + return false; + ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow; + if (hovered_window == NULL || window->RootWindow != hovered_window->RootWindow || window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const ImRect& display_rect = (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect) ? g.LastItemData.DisplayRect : g.LastItemData.Rect; + ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID; + if (id == 0) + { + id = window->GetIDFromRectangle(display_rect); + KeepAliveID(id); + } + if (g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id) + return false; + + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinTarget == false); + g.DragDropTargetRect = display_rect; + g.DragDropTargetId = id; + g.DragDropWithinTarget = true; + return true; +} + +bool ImGui::IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev != 0; +} + +const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload; + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive); // Not called between BeginDragDropTarget() and EndDragDropTarget() ? + IM_ASSERT(payload.DataFrameCount != -1); // Forgot to call EndDragDropTarget() ? + if (type != NULL && !payload.IsDataType(type)) + return NULL; + + // Accept smallest drag target bounding box, this allows us to nest drag targets conveniently without ordering constraints. + // NB: We currently accept NULL id as target. However, overlapping targets requires a unique ID to function! + const bool was_accepted_previously = (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev == g.DragDropTargetId); + ImRect r = g.DragDropTargetRect; + float r_surface = r.GetWidth() * r.GetHeight(); + if (r_surface > g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface) + return NULL; + + g.DragDropAcceptFlags = flags; + g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropTargetId; + g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = r_surface; + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("AcceptDragDropPayload(): %08X: accept\n", g.DragDropTargetId); + + // Render default drop visuals + payload.Preview = was_accepted_previously; + flags |= (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect); // Source can also inhibit the preview (useful for external sources that live for 1 frame) + if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect) && payload.Preview) + window->DrawList->AddRect(r.Min - ImVec2(3.5f,3.5f), r.Max + ImVec2(3.5f, 3.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f); + + g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = g.FrameCount; + payload.Delivery = was_accepted_previously && !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton); // For extern drag sources affecting OS window focus, it's easier to just test !IsMouseDown() instead of IsMouseReleased() + if (!payload.Delivery && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery)) + return NULL; + + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("AcceptDragDropPayload(): %08X: return payload\n", g.DragDropTargetId); + return &payload; +} + +// FIXME-DRAGDROP: Settle on a proper default visuals for drop target. +void ImGui::RenderDragDropTargetRect(const ImRect& bb) +{ + GetWindowDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min - ImVec2(3.5f, 3.5f), bb.Max + ImVec2(3.5f, 3.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f); +} + +const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::GetDragDropPayload() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount != -1) ? &g.DragDropPayload : NULL; +} + +void ImGui::EndDragDropTarget() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive); + IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinTarget); + g.DragDropWithinTarget = false; + + // Clear drag and drop state payload right after delivery + if (g.DragDropPayload.Delivery) + ClearDragDrop(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] LOGGING/CAPTURING +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard. +// By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Pass text data straight to log (without being displayed) +static inline void LogTextV(ImGuiContext& g, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + if (g.LogFile) + { + g.LogBuffer.Buf.resize(0); + g.LogBuffer.appendfv(fmt, args); + ImFileWrite(g.LogBuffer.c_str(), sizeof(char), (ImU64)g.LogBuffer.size(), g.LogFile); + } + else + { + g.LogBuffer.appendfv(fmt, args); + } +} + +void ImGui::LogText(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!g.LogEnabled) + return; + + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + LogTextV(g, fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::LogTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!g.LogEnabled) + return; + + LogTextV(g, fmt, args); +} + +// Internal version that takes a position to decide on newline placement and pad items according to their depth. +// We split text into individual lines to add current tree level padding +// FIXME: This code is a little complicated perhaps, considering simplifying the whole system. +void ImGui::LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + const char* prefix = g.LogNextPrefix; + const char* suffix = g.LogNextSuffix; + g.LogNextPrefix = g.LogNextSuffix = NULL; + + if (!text_end) + text_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end); + + const bool log_new_line = ref_pos && (ref_pos->y > g.LogLinePosY + g.Style.FramePadding.y + 1); + if (ref_pos) + g.LogLinePosY = ref_pos->y; + if (log_new_line) + { + LogText(IM_NEWLINE); + g.LogLineFirstItem = true; + } + + if (prefix) + LogRenderedText(ref_pos, prefix, prefix + strlen(prefix)); // Calculate end ourself to ensure "##" are included here. + + // Re-adjust padding if we have popped out of our starting depth + if (g.LogDepthRef > window->DC.TreeDepth) + g.LogDepthRef = window->DC.TreeDepth; + const int tree_depth = (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogDepthRef); + + const char* text_remaining = text; + for (;;) + { + // Split the string. Each new line (after a '\n') is followed by indentation corresponding to the current depth of our log entry. + // We don't add a trailing \n yet to allow a subsequent item on the same line to be captured. + const char* line_start = text_remaining; + const char* line_end = ImStreolRange(line_start, text_end); + const bool is_last_line = (line_end == text_end); + if (line_start != line_end || !is_last_line) + { + const int line_length = (int)(line_end - line_start); + const int indentation = g.LogLineFirstItem ? tree_depth * 4 : 1; + LogText("%*s%.*s", indentation, "", line_length, line_start); + g.LogLineFirstItem = false; + if (*line_end == '\n') + { + LogText(IM_NEWLINE); + g.LogLineFirstItem = true; + } + } + if (is_last_line) + break; + text_remaining = line_end + 1; + } + + if (suffix) + LogRenderedText(ref_pos, suffix, suffix + strlen(suffix)); +} + +// Start logging/capturing text output +void ImGui::LogBegin(ImGuiLogType type, int auto_open_depth) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(g.LogEnabled == false); + IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL); + IM_ASSERT(g.LogBuffer.empty()); + g.LogEnabled = true; + g.LogType = type; + g.LogNextPrefix = g.LogNextSuffix = NULL; + g.LogDepthRef = window->DC.TreeDepth; + g.LogDepthToExpand = ((auto_open_depth >= 0) ? auto_open_depth : g.LogDepthToExpandDefault); + g.LogLinePosY = FLT_MAX; + g.LogLineFirstItem = true; +} + +// Important: doesn't copy underlying data, use carefully (prefix/suffix must be in scope at the time of the next LogRenderedText) +void ImGui::LogSetNextTextDecoration(const char* prefix, const char* suffix) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.LogNextPrefix = prefix; + g.LogNextSuffix = suffix; +} + +void ImGui::LogToTTY(int auto_open_depth) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.LogEnabled) + return; + IM_UNUSED(auto_open_depth); +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS + LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_TTY, auto_open_depth); + g.LogFile = stdout; +#endif +} + +// Start logging/capturing text output to given file +void ImGui::LogToFile(int auto_open_depth, const char* filename) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.LogEnabled) + return; + + // FIXME: We could probably open the file in text mode "at", however note that clipboard/buffer logging will still + // be subject to outputting OS-incompatible carriage return if within strings the user doesn't use IM_NEWLINE. + // By opening the file in binary mode "ab" we have consistent output everywhere. + if (!filename) + filename = g.IO.LogFilename; + if (!filename || !filename[0]) + return; + ImFileHandle f = ImFileOpen(filename, "ab"); + if (!f) + { + IM_ASSERT(0); + return; + } + + LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_File, auto_open_depth); + g.LogFile = f; +} + +// Start logging/capturing text output to clipboard +void ImGui::LogToClipboard(int auto_open_depth) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.LogEnabled) + return; + LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_Clipboard, auto_open_depth); +} + +void ImGui::LogToBuffer(int auto_open_depth) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.LogEnabled) + return; + LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_Buffer, auto_open_depth); +} + +void ImGui::LogFinish() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!g.LogEnabled) + return; + + LogText(IM_NEWLINE); + switch (g.LogType) + { + case ImGuiLogType_TTY: +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS + fflush(g.LogFile); +#endif + break; + case ImGuiLogType_File: + ImFileClose(g.LogFile); + break; + case ImGuiLogType_Buffer: + break; + case ImGuiLogType_Clipboard: + if (!g.LogBuffer.empty()) + SetClipboardText(g.LogBuffer.begin()); + break; + case ImGuiLogType_None: + IM_ASSERT(0); + break; + } + + g.LogEnabled = false; + g.LogType = ImGuiLogType_None; + g.LogFile = NULL; + g.LogBuffer.clear(); +} + +// Helper to display logging buttons +// FIXME-OBSOLETE: We should probably obsolete this and let the user have their own helper (this is one of the oldest function alive!) +void ImGui::LogButtons() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + PushID("LogButtons"); +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS + const bool log_to_tty = Button("Log To TTY"); SameLine(); +#else + const bool log_to_tty = false; +#endif + const bool log_to_file = Button("Log To File"); SameLine(); + const bool log_to_clipboard = Button("Log To Clipboard"); SameLine(); + PushTabStop(false); + SetNextItemWidth(80.0f); + SliderInt("Default Depth", &g.LogDepthToExpandDefault, 0, 9, NULL); + PopTabStop(); + PopID(); + + // Start logging at the end of the function so that the buttons don't appear in the log + if (log_to_tty) + LogToTTY(); + if (log_to_file) + LogToFile(); + if (log_to_clipboard) + LogToClipboard(); +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] SETTINGS +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - UpdateSettings() [Internal] +// - MarkIniSettingsDirty() [Internal] +// - FindSettingsHandler() [Internal] +// - ClearIniSettings() [Internal] +// - LoadIniSettingsFromDisk() +// - LoadIniSettingsFromMemory() +// - SaveIniSettingsToDisk() +// - SaveIniSettingsToMemory() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - CreateNewWindowSettings() [Internal] +// - FindWindowSettingsByID() [Internal] +// - FindWindowSettingsByWindow() [Internal] +// - ClearWindowSettings() [Internal] +// - WindowSettingsHandler_***() [Internal] +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Called by NewFrame() +void ImGui::UpdateSettings() +{ + // Load settings on first frame (if not explicitly loaded manually before) + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!g.SettingsLoaded) + { + IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsWindows.empty()); + if (g.IO.IniFilename) + LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(g.IO.IniFilename); + g.SettingsLoaded = true; + } + + // Save settings (with a delay after the last modification, so we don't spam disk too much) + if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer > 0.0f) + { + g.SettingsDirtyTimer -= g.IO.DeltaTime; + if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f) + { + if (g.IO.IniFilename != NULL) + SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename); + else + g.IO.WantSaveIniSettings = true; // Let user know they can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory(). user will need to clear io.WantSaveIniSettings themselves. + g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f; + } + } +} + +void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f) + g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate; +} + +void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)) + if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f) + g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate; +} + +void ImGui::AddSettingsHandler(const ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(FindSettingsHandler(handler->TypeName) == NULL); + g.SettingsHandlers.push_back(*handler); +} + +void ImGui::RemoveSettingsHandler(const char* type_name) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler = FindSettingsHandler(type_name)) + g.SettingsHandlers.erase(handler); +} + +ImGuiSettingsHandler* ImGui::FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiID type_hash = ImHashStr(type_name); + for (ImGuiSettingsHandler& handler : g.SettingsHandlers) + if (handler.TypeHash == type_hash) + return &handler; + return NULL; +} + +// Clear all settings (windows, tables, docking etc.) +void ImGui::ClearIniSettings() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.SettingsIniData.clear(); + for (ImGuiSettingsHandler& handler : g.SettingsHandlers) + if (handler.ClearAllFn != NULL) + handler.ClearAllFn(&g, &handler); +} + +void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename) +{ + size_t file_data_size = 0; + char* file_data = (char*)ImFileLoadToMemory(ini_filename, "rb", &file_data_size); + if (!file_data) + return; + if (file_data_size > 0) + LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(file_data, (size_t)file_data_size); + IM_FREE(file_data); +} + +// Zero-tolerance, no error reporting, cheap .ini parsing +// Set ini_size==0 to let us use strlen(ini_data). Do not call this function with a 0 if your buffer is actually empty! +void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized); + //IM_ASSERT(!g.WithinFrameScope && "Cannot be called between NewFrame() and EndFrame()"); + //IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsLoaded == false && g.FrameCount == 0); + + // For user convenience, we allow passing a non zero-terminated string (hence the ini_size parameter). + // For our convenience and to make the code simpler, we'll also write zero-terminators within the buffer. So let's create a writable copy.. + if (ini_size == 0) + ini_size = strlen(ini_data); + g.SettingsIniData.Buf.resize((int)ini_size + 1); + char* const buf = g.SettingsIniData.Buf.Data; + char* const buf_end = buf + ini_size; + memcpy(buf, ini_data, ini_size); + buf_end[0] = 0; + + // Call pre-read handlers + // Some types will clear their data (e.g. dock information) some types will allow merge/override (window) + for (ImGuiSettingsHandler& handler : g.SettingsHandlers) + if (handler.ReadInitFn != NULL) + handler.ReadInitFn(&g, &handler); + + void* entry_data = NULL; + ImGuiSettingsHandler* entry_handler = NULL; + + char* line_end = NULL; + for (char* line = buf; line < buf_end; line = line_end + 1) + { + // Skip new lines markers, then find end of the line + while (*line == '\n' || *line == '\r') + line++; + line_end = line; + while (line_end < buf_end && *line_end != '\n' && *line_end != '\r') + line_end++; + line_end[0] = 0; + if (line[0] == ';') + continue; + if (line[0] == '[' && line_end > line && line_end[-1] == ']') + { + // Parse "[Type][Name]". Note that 'Name' can itself contains [] characters, which is acceptable with the current format and parsing code. + line_end[-1] = 0; + const char* name_end = line_end - 1; + const char* type_start = line + 1; + char* type_end = (char*)(void*)ImStrchrRange(type_start, name_end, ']'); + const char* name_start = type_end ? ImStrchrRange(type_end + 1, name_end, '[') : NULL; + if (!type_end || !name_start) + continue; + *type_end = 0; // Overwrite first ']' + name_start++; // Skip second '[' + entry_handler = FindSettingsHandler(type_start); + entry_data = entry_handler ? entry_handler->ReadOpenFn(&g, entry_handler, name_start) : NULL; + } + else if (entry_handler != NULL && entry_data != NULL) + { + // Let type handler parse the line + entry_handler->ReadLineFn(&g, entry_handler, entry_data, line); + } + } + g.SettingsLoaded = true; + + // [DEBUG] Restore untouched copy so it can be browsed in Metrics (not strictly necessary) + memcpy(buf, ini_data, ini_size); + + // Call post-read handlers + for (ImGuiSettingsHandler& handler : g.SettingsHandlers) + if (handler.ApplyAllFn != NULL) + handler.ApplyAllFn(&g, &handler); +} + +void ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f; + if (!ini_filename) + return; + + size_t ini_data_size = 0; + const char* ini_data = SaveIniSettingsToMemory(&ini_data_size); + ImFileHandle f = ImFileOpen(ini_filename, "wt"); + if (!f) + return; + ImFileWrite(ini_data, sizeof(char), ini_data_size, f); + ImFileClose(f); +} + +// Call registered handlers (e.g. SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll() + custom handlers) to write their stuff into a text buffer +const char* ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_size) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f; + g.SettingsIniData.Buf.resize(0); + g.SettingsIniData.Buf.push_back(0); + for (ImGuiSettingsHandler& handler : g.SettingsHandlers) + handler.WriteAllFn(&g, &handler, &g.SettingsIniData); + if (out_size) + *out_size = (size_t)g.SettingsIniData.size(); + return g.SettingsIniData.c_str(); +} + +ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + if (g.IO.ConfigDebugIniSettings == false) + { + // Skip to the "###" marker if any. We don't skip past to match the behavior of GetID() + // Preserve the full string when ConfigDebugVerboseIniSettings is set to make .ini inspection easier. + if (const char* p = strstr(name, "###")) + name = p; + } + const size_t name_len = strlen(name); + + // Allocate chunk + const size_t chunk_size = sizeof(ImGuiWindowSettings) + name_len + 1; + ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.alloc_chunk(chunk_size); + IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(settings) ImGuiWindowSettings(); + settings->ID = ImHashStr(name, name_len); + memcpy(settings->GetName(), name, name_len + 1); // Store with zero terminator + + return settings; +} + +// We don't provide a FindWindowSettingsByName() because Docking system doesn't always hold on names. +// This is called once per window .ini entry + once per newly instantiated window. +ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindWindowSettingsByID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings)) + if (settings->ID == id && !settings->WantDelete) + return settings; + return NULL; +} + +// This is faster if you are holding on a Window already as we don't need to perform a search. +ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindWindowSettingsByWindow(ImGuiWindow* window) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (window->SettingsOffset != -1) + return g.SettingsWindows.ptr_from_offset(window->SettingsOffset); + return FindWindowSettingsByID(window->ID); +} + +// This will revert window to its initial state, including enabling the ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver/ImGuiCond_Once conditions once more. +void ImGui::ClearWindowSettings(const char* name) +{ + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("ClearWindowSettings('%s')\n", name); + ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name); + if (window != NULL) + { + window->Flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings; + InitOrLoadWindowSettings(window, NULL); + } + if (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = window ? FindWindowSettingsByWindow(window) : FindWindowSettingsByID(ImHashStr(name))) + settings->WantDelete = true; +} + +static void WindowSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (ImGuiWindow* window : g.Windows) + window->SettingsOffset = -1; + g.SettingsWindows.clear(); +} + +static void* WindowSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name) +{ + ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(name); + ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettingsByID(id); + if (settings) + *settings = ImGuiWindowSettings(); // Clear existing if recycling previous entry + else + settings = ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(name); + settings->ID = id; + settings->WantApply = true; + return (void*)settings; +} + +static void WindowSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line) +{ + ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (ImGuiWindowSettings*)entry; + int x, y; + int i; + if (sscanf(line, "Pos=%i,%i", &x, &y) == 2) { settings->Pos = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); } + else if (sscanf(line, "Size=%i,%i", &x, &y) == 2) { settings->Size = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); } + else if (sscanf(line, "Collapsed=%d", &i) == 1) { settings->Collapsed = (i != 0); } +} + +// Apply to existing windows (if any) +static void WindowSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings)) + if (settings->WantApply) + { + if (ImGuiWindow* window = ImGui::FindWindowByID(settings->ID)) + ApplyWindowSettings(window, settings); + settings->WantApply = false; + } +} + +static void WindowSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf) +{ + // Gather data from windows that were active during this session + // (if a window wasn't opened in this session we preserve its settings) + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (ImGuiWindow* window : g.Windows) + { + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) + continue; + + ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettingsByWindow(window); + if (!settings) + { + settings = ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(window->Name); + window->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsWindows.offset_from_ptr(settings); + } + IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == window->ID); + settings->Pos = ImVec2ih(window->Pos); + settings->Size = ImVec2ih(window->SizeFull); + + settings->Collapsed = window->Collapsed; + settings->WantDelete = false; + } + + // Write to text buffer + buf->reserve(buf->size() + g.SettingsWindows.size() * 6); // ballpark reserve + for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings)) + { + if (settings->WantDelete) + continue; + const char* settings_name = settings->GetName(); + buf->appendf("[%s][%s]\n", handler->TypeName, settings_name); + buf->appendf("Pos=%d,%d\n", settings->Pos.x, settings->Pos.y); + buf->appendf("Size=%d,%d\n", settings->Size.x, settings->Size.y); + buf->appendf("Collapsed=%d\n", settings->Collapsed); + buf->append("\n"); + } +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] LOCALIZATION +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::LocalizeRegisterEntries(const ImGuiLocEntry* entries, int count) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + for (int n = 0; n < count; n++) + g.LocalizationTable[entries[n].Key] = entries[n].Text; +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] VIEWPORTS, PLATFORM WINDOWS +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - GetMainViewport() +// - SetWindowViewport() [Internal] +// - UpdateViewportsNewFrame() [Internal] +// (this section is more complete in the 'docking' branch) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImGuiViewport* ImGui::GetMainViewport() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.Viewports[0]; +} + +void ImGui::SetWindowViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport) +{ + window->Viewport = viewport; +} + +// Update viewports and monitor infos +static void ImGui::UpdateViewportsNewFrame() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.Viewports.Size == 1); + + // Update main viewport with current platform position. + // FIXME-VIEWPORT: Size is driven by backend/user code for backward-compatibility but we should aim to make this more consistent. + ImGuiViewportP* main_viewport = g.Viewports[0]; + main_viewport->Flags = ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow | ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp; + main_viewport->Pos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + main_viewport->Size = g.IO.DisplaySize; + + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + { + // Lock down space taken by menu bars and status bars, reset the offset for fucntions like BeginMainMenuBar() to alter them again. + viewport->WorkOffsetMin = viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMin; + viewport->WorkOffsetMax = viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMax; + viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMin = viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMax = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + viewport->UpdateWorkRect(); + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] DOCKING +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// (this section is filled in the 'docking' branch) + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS) + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma comment(lib, "user32") +#pragma comment(lib, "kernel32") +#endif + +// Win32 clipboard implementation +// We use g.ClipboardHandlerData for temporary storage to ensure it is freed on Shutdown() +static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data_ctx) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *(ImGuiContext*)user_data_ctx; + g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear(); + if (!::OpenClipboard(NULL)) + return NULL; + HANDLE wbuf_handle = ::GetClipboardData(CF_UNICODETEXT); + if (wbuf_handle == NULL) + { + ::CloseClipboard(); + return NULL; + } + if (const WCHAR* wbuf_global = (const WCHAR*)::GlobalLock(wbuf_handle)) + { + int buf_len = ::WideCharToMultiByte(CP_UTF8, 0, wbuf_global, -1, NULL, 0, NULL, NULL); + g.ClipboardHandlerData.resize(buf_len); + ::WideCharToMultiByte(CP_UTF8, 0, wbuf_global, -1, g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data, buf_len, NULL, NULL); + } + ::GlobalUnlock(wbuf_handle); + ::CloseClipboard(); + return g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data; +} + +static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*, const char* text) +{ + if (!::OpenClipboard(NULL)) + return; + const int wbuf_length = ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, text, -1, NULL, 0); + HGLOBAL wbuf_handle = ::GlobalAlloc(GMEM_MOVEABLE, (SIZE_T)wbuf_length * sizeof(WCHAR)); + if (wbuf_handle == NULL) + { + ::CloseClipboard(); + return; + } + WCHAR* wbuf_global = (WCHAR*)::GlobalLock(wbuf_handle); + ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, text, -1, wbuf_global, wbuf_length); + ::GlobalUnlock(wbuf_handle); + ::EmptyClipboard(); + if (::SetClipboardData(CF_UNICODETEXT, wbuf_handle) == NULL) + ::GlobalFree(wbuf_handle); + ::CloseClipboard(); +} + +#elif defined(__APPLE__) && TARGET_OS_OSX && defined(IMGUI_ENABLE_OSX_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS) + +#include // Use old API to avoid need for separate .mm file +static PasteboardRef main_clipboard = 0; + +// OSX clipboard implementation +// If you enable this you will need to add '-framework ApplicationServices' to your linker command-line! +static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*, const char* text) +{ + if (!main_clipboard) + PasteboardCreate(kPasteboardClipboard, &main_clipboard); + PasteboardClear(main_clipboard); + CFDataRef cf_data = CFDataCreate(kCFAllocatorDefault, (const UInt8*)text, strlen(text)); + if (cf_data) + { + PasteboardPutItemFlavor(main_clipboard, (PasteboardItemID)1, CFSTR("public.utf8-plain-text"), cf_data, 0); + CFRelease(cf_data); + } +} + +static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data_ctx) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *(ImGuiContext*)user_data_ctx; + if (!main_clipboard) + PasteboardCreate(kPasteboardClipboard, &main_clipboard); + PasteboardSynchronize(main_clipboard); + + ItemCount item_count = 0; + PasteboardGetItemCount(main_clipboard, &item_count); + for (ItemCount i = 0; i < item_count; i++) + { + PasteboardItemID item_id = 0; + PasteboardGetItemIdentifier(main_clipboard, i + 1, &item_id); + CFArrayRef flavor_type_array = 0; + PasteboardCopyItemFlavors(main_clipboard, item_id, &flavor_type_array); + for (CFIndex j = 0, nj = CFArrayGetCount(flavor_type_array); j < nj; j++) + { + CFDataRef cf_data; + if (PasteboardCopyItemFlavorData(main_clipboard, item_id, CFSTR("public.utf8-plain-text"), &cf_data) == noErr) + { + g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear(); + int length = (int)CFDataGetLength(cf_data); + g.ClipboardHandlerData.resize(length + 1); + CFDataGetBytes(cf_data, CFRangeMake(0, length), (UInt8*)g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data); + g.ClipboardHandlerData[length] = 0; + CFRelease(cf_data); + return g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data; + } + } + } + return NULL; +} + +#else + +// Local Dear ImGui-only clipboard implementation, if user hasn't defined better clipboard handlers. +static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data_ctx) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *(ImGuiContext*)user_data_ctx; + return g.ClipboardHandlerData.empty() ? NULL : g.ClipboardHandlerData.begin(); +} + +static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data_ctx, const char* text) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *(ImGuiContext*)user_data_ctx; + g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear(); + const char* text_end = text + strlen(text); + g.ClipboardHandlerData.resize((int)(text_end - text) + 1); + memcpy(&g.ClipboardHandlerData[0], text, (size_t)(text_end - text)); + g.ClipboardHandlerData[(int)(text_end - text)] = 0; +} + +#endif + +// Win32 API IME support (for Asian languages, etc.) +#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS) + +#include +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma comment(lib, "imm32") +#endif + +static void SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data) +{ + // Notify OS Input Method Editor of text input position + HWND hwnd = (HWND)viewport->PlatformHandleRaw; + if (hwnd == 0) + return; + + //::ImmAssociateContextEx(hwnd, NULL, data->WantVisible ? IACE_DEFAULT : 0); + if (HIMC himc = ::ImmGetContext(hwnd)) + { + COMPOSITIONFORM composition_form = {}; + composition_form.ptCurrentPos.x = (LONG)data->InputPos.x; + composition_form.ptCurrentPos.y = (LONG)data->InputPos.y; + composition_form.dwStyle = CFS_FORCE_POSITION; + ::ImmSetCompositionWindow(himc, &composition_form); + CANDIDATEFORM candidate_form = {}; + candidate_form.dwStyle = CFS_CANDIDATEPOS; + candidate_form.ptCurrentPos.x = (LONG)data->InputPos.x; + candidate_form.ptCurrentPos.y = (LONG)data->InputPos.y; + ::ImmSetCandidateWindow(himc, &candidate_form); + ::ImmReleaseContext(hwnd, himc); + } +} + +#else + +static void SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl(ImGuiViewport*, ImGuiPlatformImeData*) {} + +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] METRICS/DEBUGGER WINDOW +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - RenderViewportThumbnail() [Internal] +// - RenderViewportsThumbnails() [Internal] +// - DebugTextEncoding() +// - MetricsHelpMarker() [Internal] +// - ShowFontAtlas() [Internal] +// - ShowMetricsWindow() +// - DebugNodeColumns() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeDrawList() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeFont() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeFontGlyph() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeStorage() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeTabBar() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeViewport() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeWindow() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeWindowSettings() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeWindowsList() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent() [Internal] +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + +void ImGui::DebugRenderViewportThumbnail(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImRect& bb) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + ImVec2 scale = bb.GetSize() / viewport->Size; + ImVec2 off = bb.Min - viewport->Pos * scale; + float alpha_mul = 1.0f; + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border, alpha_mul * 0.40f)); + for (ImGuiWindow* thumb_window : g.Windows) + { + if (!thumb_window->WasActive || (thumb_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) + continue; + + ImRect thumb_r = thumb_window->Rect(); + ImRect title_r = thumb_window->TitleBarRect(); + thumb_r = ImRect(ImFloor(off + thumb_r.Min * scale), ImFloor(off + thumb_r.Max * scale)); + title_r = ImRect(ImFloor(off + title_r.Min * scale), ImFloor(off + ImVec2(title_r.Max.x, title_r.Min.y) * scale) + ImVec2(0,5)); // Exaggerate title bar height + thumb_r.ClipWithFull(bb); + title_r.ClipWithFull(bb); + const bool window_is_focused = (g.NavWindow && thumb_window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == g.NavWindow->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(thumb_r.Min, thumb_r.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_WindowBg, alpha_mul)); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_r.Min, title_r.Max, GetColorU32(window_is_focused ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg, alpha_mul)); + window->DrawList->AddRect(thumb_r.Min, thumb_r.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border, alpha_mul)); + window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize * 1.0f, title_r.Min, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text, alpha_mul), thumb_window->Name, FindRenderedTextEnd(thumb_window->Name)); + } + draw_list->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border, alpha_mul)); +} + +static void RenderViewportsThumbnails() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + // We don't display full monitor bounds (we could, but it often looks awkward), instead we display just enough to cover all of our viewports. + float SCALE = 1.0f / 8.0f; + ImRect bb_full(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + bb_full.Add(viewport->GetMainRect()); + ImVec2 p = window->DC.CursorPos; + ImVec2 off = p - bb_full.Min * SCALE; + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + { + ImRect viewport_draw_bb(off + (viewport->Pos) * SCALE, off + (viewport->Pos + viewport->Size) * SCALE); + ImGui::DebugRenderViewportThumbnail(window->DrawList, viewport, viewport_draw_bb); + } + ImGui::Dummy(bb_full.GetSize() * SCALE); +} + +// Draw an arbitrary US keyboard layout to visualize translated keys +void ImGui::DebugRenderKeyboardPreview(ImDrawList* draw_list) +{ + const ImVec2 key_size = ImVec2(35.0f, 35.0f); + const float key_rounding = 3.0f; + const ImVec2 key_face_size = ImVec2(25.0f, 25.0f); + const ImVec2 key_face_pos = ImVec2(5.0f, 3.0f); + const float key_face_rounding = 2.0f; + const ImVec2 key_label_pos = ImVec2(7.0f, 4.0f); + const ImVec2 key_step = ImVec2(key_size.x - 1.0f, key_size.y - 1.0f); + const float key_row_offset = 9.0f; + + ImVec2 board_min = GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImVec2 board_max = ImVec2(board_min.x + 3 * key_step.x + 2 * key_row_offset + 10.0f, board_min.y + 3 * key_step.y + 10.0f); + ImVec2 start_pos = ImVec2(board_min.x + 5.0f - key_step.x, board_min.y); + + struct KeyLayoutData { int Row, Col; const char* Label; ImGuiKey Key; }; + const KeyLayoutData keys_to_display[] = + { + { 0, 0, "", ImGuiKey_Tab }, { 0, 1, "Q", ImGuiKey_Q }, { 0, 2, "W", ImGuiKey_W }, { 0, 3, "E", ImGuiKey_E }, { 0, 4, "R", ImGuiKey_R }, + { 1, 0, "", ImGuiKey_CapsLock }, { 1, 1, "A", ImGuiKey_A }, { 1, 2, "S", ImGuiKey_S }, { 1, 3, "D", ImGuiKey_D }, { 1, 4, "F", ImGuiKey_F }, + { 2, 0, "", ImGuiKey_LeftShift },{ 2, 1, "Z", ImGuiKey_Z }, { 2, 2, "X", ImGuiKey_X }, { 2, 3, "C", ImGuiKey_C }, { 2, 4, "V", ImGuiKey_V } + }; + + // Elements rendered manually via ImDrawList API are not clipped automatically. + // While not strictly necessary, here IsItemVisible() is used to avoid rendering these shapes when they are out of view. + Dummy(board_max - board_min); + if (!IsItemVisible()) + return; + draw_list->PushClipRect(board_min, board_max, true); + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(keys_to_display); n++) + { + const KeyLayoutData* key_data = &keys_to_display[n]; + ImVec2 key_min = ImVec2(start_pos.x + key_data->Col * key_step.x + key_data->Row * key_row_offset, start_pos.y + key_data->Row * key_step.y); + ImVec2 key_max = key_min + key_size; + draw_list->AddRectFilled(key_min, key_max, IM_COL32(204, 204, 204, 255), key_rounding); + draw_list->AddRect(key_min, key_max, IM_COL32(24, 24, 24, 255), key_rounding); + ImVec2 face_min = ImVec2(key_min.x + key_face_pos.x, key_min.y + key_face_pos.y); + ImVec2 face_max = ImVec2(face_min.x + key_face_size.x, face_min.y + key_face_size.y); + draw_list->AddRect(face_min, face_max, IM_COL32(193, 193, 193, 255), key_face_rounding, ImDrawFlags_None, 2.0f); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(face_min, face_max, IM_COL32(252, 252, 252, 255), key_face_rounding); + ImVec2 label_min = ImVec2(key_min.x + key_label_pos.x, key_min.y + key_label_pos.y); + draw_list->AddText(label_min, IM_COL32(64, 64, 64, 255), key_data->Label); + if (IsKeyDown(key_data->Key)) + draw_list->AddRectFilled(key_min, key_max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 128), key_rounding); + } + draw_list->PopClipRect(); +} + +// Helper tool to diagnose between text encoding issues and font loading issues. Pass your UTF-8 string and verify that there are correct. +void ImGui::DebugTextEncoding(const char* str) +{ + Text("Text: \"%s\"", str); + if (!BeginTable("##DebugTextEncoding", 4, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)) + return; + TableSetupColumn("Offset"); + TableSetupColumn("UTF-8"); + TableSetupColumn("Glyph"); + TableSetupColumn("Codepoint"); + TableHeadersRow(); + for (const char* p = str; *p != 0; ) + { + unsigned int c; + const int c_utf8_len = ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, p, NULL); + TableNextColumn(); + Text("%d", (int)(p - str)); + TableNextColumn(); + for (int byte_index = 0; byte_index < c_utf8_len; byte_index++) + { + if (byte_index > 0) + SameLine(); + Text("0x%02X", (int)(unsigned char)p[byte_index]); + } + TableNextColumn(); + if (GetFont()->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)c)) + TextUnformatted(p, p + c_utf8_len); + else + TextUnformatted((c == IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID) ? "[invalid]" : "[missing]"); + TableNextColumn(); + Text("U+%04X", (int)c); + p += c_utf8_len; + } + EndTable(); +} + +// Avoid naming collision with imgui_demo.cpp's HelpMarker() for unity builds. +static void MetricsHelpMarker(const char* desc) +{ + ImGui::TextDisabled("(?)"); + if (ImGui::BeginItemTooltip()) + { + ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 35.0f); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(desc); + ImGui::PopTextWrapPos(); + ImGui::EndTooltip(); + } +} + +// [DEBUG] List fonts in a font atlas and display its texture +void ImGui::ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + for (ImFont* font : atlas->Fonts) + { + PushID(font); + DebugNodeFont(font); + PopID(); + } + if (TreeNode("Font Atlas", "Font Atlas (%dx%d pixels)", atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight)) + { + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiMetricsConfig* cfg = &g.DebugMetricsConfig; + Checkbox("Tint with Text Color", &cfg->ShowAtlasTintedWithTextColor); // Using text color ensure visibility of core atlas data, but will alter custom colored icons + ImVec4 tint_col = cfg->ShowAtlasTintedWithTextColor ? GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_Text) : ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f); + ImVec4 border_col = GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_Border); + Image(atlas->TexID, ImVec2((float)atlas->TexWidth, (float)atlas->TexHeight), ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f), tint_col, border_col); + TreePop(); + } +} + +void ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + ImGuiMetricsConfig* cfg = &g.DebugMetricsConfig; + if (cfg->ShowDebugLog) + ShowDebugLogWindow(&cfg->ShowDebugLog); + if (cfg->ShowStackTool) + ShowStackToolWindow(&cfg->ShowStackTool); + + if (!Begin("Dear ImGui Metrics/Debugger", p_open) || GetCurrentWindow()->BeginCount > 1) + { + End(); + return; + } + + // Basic info + Text("Dear ImGui %s", GetVersion()); + Text("Application average %.3f ms/frame (%.1f FPS)", 1000.0f / io.Framerate, io.Framerate); + Text("%d vertices, %d indices (%d triangles)", io.MetricsRenderVertices, io.MetricsRenderIndices, io.MetricsRenderIndices / 3); + Text("%d visible windows, %d active allocations", io.MetricsRenderWindows, io.MetricsActiveAllocations); + //SameLine(); if (SmallButton("GC")) { g.GcCompactAll = true; } + + Separator(); + + // Debugging enums + enum { WRT_OuterRect, WRT_OuterRectClipped, WRT_InnerRect, WRT_InnerClipRect, WRT_WorkRect, WRT_Content, WRT_ContentIdeal, WRT_ContentRegionRect, WRT_Count }; // Windows Rect Type + const char* wrt_rects_names[WRT_Count] = { "OuterRect", "OuterRectClipped", "InnerRect", "InnerClipRect", "WorkRect", "Content", "ContentIdeal", "ContentRegionRect" }; + enum { TRT_OuterRect, TRT_InnerRect, TRT_WorkRect, TRT_HostClipRect, TRT_InnerClipRect, TRT_BackgroundClipRect, TRT_ColumnsRect, TRT_ColumnsWorkRect, TRT_ColumnsClipRect, TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersUsed, TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersIdeal, TRT_ColumnsContentFrozen, TRT_ColumnsContentUnfrozen, TRT_Count }; // Tables Rect Type + const char* trt_rects_names[TRT_Count] = { "OuterRect", "InnerRect", "WorkRect", "HostClipRect", "InnerClipRect", "BackgroundClipRect", "ColumnsRect", "ColumnsWorkRect", "ColumnsClipRect", "ColumnsContentHeadersUsed", "ColumnsContentHeadersIdeal", "ColumnsContentFrozen", "ColumnsContentUnfrozen" }; + if (cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType < 0) + cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType = WRT_WorkRect; + if (cfg->ShowTablesRectsType < 0) + cfg->ShowTablesRectsType = TRT_WorkRect; + + struct Funcs + { + static ImRect GetTableRect(ImGuiTable* table, int rect_type, int n) + { + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); // Always using last submitted instance + if (rect_type == TRT_OuterRect) { return table->OuterRect; } + else if (rect_type == TRT_InnerRect) { return table->InnerRect; } + else if (rect_type == TRT_WorkRect) { return table->WorkRect; } + else if (rect_type == TRT_HostClipRect) { return table->HostClipRect; } + else if (rect_type == TRT_InnerClipRect) { return table->InnerClipRect; } + else if (rect_type == TRT_BackgroundClipRect) { return table->BgClipRect; } + else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsRect) { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->MinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->MaxX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastOuterHeight); } + else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsWorkRect) { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->WorkRect.Min.y, c->WorkMaxX, table->WorkRect.Max.y); } + else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsClipRect) { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return c->ClipRect; } + else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersUsed){ ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight); } // Note: y1/y2 not always accurate + else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersIdeal){ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight); } + else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentFrozen) { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->ContentMaxXFrozen, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFrozenHeight); } + else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentUnfrozen) { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFrozenHeight, c->ContentMaxXUnfrozen, table->InnerClipRect.Max.y); } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return ImRect(); + } + + static ImRect GetWindowRect(ImGuiWindow* window, int rect_type) + { + if (rect_type == WRT_OuterRect) { return window->Rect(); } + else if (rect_type == WRT_OuterRectClipped) { return window->OuterRectClipped; } + else if (rect_type == WRT_InnerRect) { return window->InnerRect; } + else if (rect_type == WRT_InnerClipRect) { return window->InnerClipRect; } + else if (rect_type == WRT_WorkRect) { return window->WorkRect; } + else if (rect_type == WRT_Content) { ImVec2 min = window->InnerRect.Min - window->Scroll + window->WindowPadding; return ImRect(min, min + window->ContentSize); } + else if (rect_type == WRT_ContentIdeal) { ImVec2 min = window->InnerRect.Min - window->Scroll + window->WindowPadding; return ImRect(min, min + window->ContentSizeIdeal); } + else if (rect_type == WRT_ContentRegionRect) { return window->ContentRegionRect; } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return ImRect(); + } + }; + + // Tools + if (TreeNode("Tools")) + { + bool show_encoding_viewer = TreeNode("UTF-8 Encoding viewer"); + SameLine(); + MetricsHelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::DebugTextEncoding() from your code with a given string to test that your UTF-8 encoding settings are correct."); + if (show_encoding_viewer) + { + static char buf[100] = ""; + SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); + InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + if (buf[0] != 0) + DebugTextEncoding(buf); + TreePop(); + } + + // The Item Picker tool is super useful to visually select an item and break into the call-stack of where it was submitted. + if (Checkbox("Show Item Picker", &g.DebugItemPickerActive) && g.DebugItemPickerActive) + DebugStartItemPicker(); + SameLine(); + MetricsHelpMarker("Will call the IM_DEBUG_BREAK() macro to break in debugger.\nWarning: If you don't have a debugger attached, this will probably crash."); + + // Stack Tool is your best friend! + Checkbox("Show Debug Log", &cfg->ShowDebugLog); + SameLine(); + MetricsHelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow() from your code."); + + // Stack Tool is your best friend! + Checkbox("Show Stack Tool", &cfg->ShowStackTool); + SameLine(); + MetricsHelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow() from your code."); + + Checkbox("Show windows begin order", &cfg->ShowWindowsBeginOrder); + Checkbox("Show windows rectangles", &cfg->ShowWindowsRects); + SameLine(); + SetNextItemWidth(GetFontSize() * 12); + cfg->ShowWindowsRects |= Combo("##show_windows_rect_type", &cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType, wrt_rects_names, WRT_Count, WRT_Count); + if (cfg->ShowWindowsRects && g.NavWindow != NULL) + { + BulletText("'%s':", g.NavWindow->Name); + Indent(); + for (int rect_n = 0; rect_n < WRT_Count; rect_n++) + { + ImRect r = Funcs::GetWindowRect(g.NavWindow, rect_n); + Text("(%6.1f,%6.1f) (%6.1f,%6.1f) Size (%6.1f,%6.1f) %s", r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y, r.GetWidth(), r.GetHeight(), wrt_rects_names[rect_n]); + } + Unindent(); + } + + Checkbox("Show tables rectangles", &cfg->ShowTablesRects); + SameLine(); + SetNextItemWidth(GetFontSize() * 12); + cfg->ShowTablesRects |= Combo("##show_table_rects_type", &cfg->ShowTablesRectsType, trt_rects_names, TRT_Count, TRT_Count); + if (cfg->ShowTablesRects && g.NavWindow != NULL) + { + for (int table_n = 0; table_n < g.Tables.GetMapSize(); table_n++) + { + ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(table_n); + if (table == NULL || table->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount - 1 || (table->OuterWindow != g.NavWindow && table->InnerWindow != g.NavWindow)) + continue; + + BulletText("Table 0x%08X (%d columns, in '%s')", table->ID, table->ColumnsCount, table->OuterWindow->Name); + if (IsItemHovered()) + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(table->OuterRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), table->OuterRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f); + Indent(); + char buf[128]; + for (int rect_n = 0; rect_n < TRT_Count; rect_n++) + { + if (rect_n >= TRT_ColumnsRect) + { + if (rect_n != TRT_ColumnsRect && rect_n != TRT_ColumnsClipRect) + continue; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, rect_n, column_n); + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%6.1f,%6.1f) (%6.1f,%6.1f) Size (%6.1f,%6.1f) Col %d %s", r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y, r.GetWidth(), r.GetHeight(), column_n, trt_rects_names[rect_n]); + Selectable(buf); + if (IsItemHovered()) + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), r.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f); + } + } + else + { + ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, rect_n, -1); + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%6.1f,%6.1f) (%6.1f,%6.1f) Size (%6.1f,%6.1f) %s", r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y, r.GetWidth(), r.GetHeight(), trt_rects_names[rect_n]); + Selectable(buf); + if (IsItemHovered()) + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), r.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f); + } + } + Unindent(); + } + } + + Checkbox("Debug Begin/BeginChild return value", &io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop); + SameLine(); + MetricsHelpMarker("Some calls to Begin()/BeginChild() will return false.\n\nWill cycle through window depths then repeat. Windows should be flickering while running."); + + TreePop(); + } + + // Windows + if (TreeNode("Windows", "Windows (%d)", g.Windows.Size)) + { + //SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); + DebugNodeWindowsList(&g.Windows, "By display order"); + DebugNodeWindowsList(&g.WindowsFocusOrder, "By focus order (root windows)"); + if (TreeNode("By submission order (begin stack)")) + { + // Here we display windows in their submitted order/hierarchy, however note that the Begin stack doesn't constitute a Parent<>Child relationship! + ImVector& temp_buffer = g.WindowsTempSortBuffer; + temp_buffer.resize(0); + for (ImGuiWindow* window : g.Windows) + if (window->LastFrameActive + 1 >= g.FrameCount) + temp_buffer.push_back(window); + struct Func { static int IMGUI_CDECL WindowComparerByBeginOrder(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) { return ((int)(*(const ImGuiWindow* const *)lhs)->BeginOrderWithinContext - (*(const ImGuiWindow* const*)rhs)->BeginOrderWithinContext); } }; + ImQsort(temp_buffer.Data, (size_t)temp_buffer.Size, sizeof(ImGuiWindow*), Func::WindowComparerByBeginOrder); + DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(temp_buffer.Data, temp_buffer.Size, NULL); + TreePop(); + } + + TreePop(); + } + + // DrawLists + int drawlist_count = 0; + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + drawlist_count += viewport->DrawDataP.CmdLists.Size; + if (TreeNode("DrawLists", "DrawLists (%d)", drawlist_count)) + { + Checkbox("Show ImDrawCmd mesh when hovering", &cfg->ShowDrawCmdMesh); + Checkbox("Show ImDrawCmd bounding boxes when hovering", &cfg->ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes); + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + for (ImDrawList* draw_list : viewport->DrawDataP.CmdLists) + DebugNodeDrawList(NULL, viewport, draw_list, "DrawList"); + TreePop(); + } + + // Viewports + if (TreeNode("Viewports", "Viewports (%d)", g.Viewports.Size)) + { + Indent(GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); + RenderViewportsThumbnails(); + Unindent(GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); + for (ImGuiViewportP* viewport : g.Viewports) + DebugNodeViewport(viewport); + TreePop(); + } + + // Details for Popups + if (TreeNode("Popups", "Popups (%d)", g.OpenPopupStack.Size)) + { + for (const ImGuiPopupData& popup_data : g.OpenPopupStack) + { + // As it's difficult to interact with tree nodes while popups are open, we display everything inline. + ImGuiWindow* window = popup_data.Window; + BulletText("PopupID: %08x, Window: '%s' (%s%s), BackupNavWindow '%s', ParentWindow '%s'", + popup_data.PopupId, window ? window->Name : "NULL", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? "Child;" : "", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? "Menu;" : "", + popup_data.BackupNavWindow ? popup_data.BackupNavWindow->Name : "NULL", window && window->ParentWindow ? window->ParentWindow->Name : "NULL"); + } + TreePop(); + } + + // Details for TabBars + if (TreeNode("TabBars", "Tab Bars (%d)", g.TabBars.GetAliveCount())) + { + for (int n = 0; n < g.TabBars.GetMapSize(); n++) + if (ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.TryGetMapData(n)) + { + PushID(tab_bar); + DebugNodeTabBar(tab_bar, "TabBar"); + PopID(); + } + TreePop(); + } + + // Details for Tables + if (TreeNode("Tables", "Tables (%d)", g.Tables.GetAliveCount())) + { + for (int n = 0; n < g.Tables.GetMapSize(); n++) + if (ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(n)) + DebugNodeTable(table); + TreePop(); + } + + // Details for Fonts + ImFontAtlas* atlas = g.IO.Fonts; + if (TreeNode("Fonts", "Fonts (%d)", atlas->Fonts.Size)) + { + ShowFontAtlas(atlas); + TreePop(); + } + + // Details for InputText + if (TreeNode("InputText")) + { + DebugNodeInputTextState(&g.InputTextState); + TreePop(); + } + + // Details for Docking +#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK + if (TreeNode("Docking")) + { + TreePop(); + } +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK + + // Settings + if (TreeNode("Settings")) + { + if (SmallButton("Clear")) + ClearIniSettings(); + SameLine(); + if (SmallButton("Save to memory")) + SaveIniSettingsToMemory(); + SameLine(); + if (SmallButton("Save to disk")) + SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename); + SameLine(); + if (g.IO.IniFilename) + Text("\"%s\"", g.IO.IniFilename); + else + TextUnformatted(""); + Checkbox("io.ConfigDebugIniSettings", &io.ConfigDebugIniSettings); + Text("SettingsDirtyTimer %.2f", g.SettingsDirtyTimer); + if (TreeNode("SettingsHandlers", "Settings handlers: (%d)", g.SettingsHandlers.Size)) + { + for (ImGuiSettingsHandler& handler : g.SettingsHandlers) + BulletText("\"%s\"", handler.TypeName); + TreePop(); + } + if (TreeNode("SettingsWindows", "Settings packed data: Windows: %d bytes", g.SettingsWindows.size())) + { + for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings)) + DebugNodeWindowSettings(settings); + TreePop(); + } + + if (TreeNode("SettingsTables", "Settings packed data: Tables: %d bytes", g.SettingsTables.size())) + { + for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings)) + DebugNodeTableSettings(settings); + TreePop(); + } + +#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK + + if (TreeNode("SettingsIniData", "Settings unpacked data (.ini): %d bytes", g.SettingsIniData.size())) + { + InputTextMultiline("##Ini", (char*)(void*)g.SettingsIniData.c_str(), g.SettingsIniData.Buf.Size, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, GetTextLineHeight() * 20), ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly); + TreePop(); + } + TreePop(); + } + + if (TreeNode("Inputs")) + { + Text("KEYBOARD/GAMEPAD/MOUSE KEYS"); + { + // We iterate both legacy native range and named ImGuiKey ranges, which is a little odd but this allows displaying the data for old/new backends. + // User code should never have to go through such hoops! You can generally iterate between ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN and ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END. + Indent(); +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + struct funcs { static bool IsLegacyNativeDupe(ImGuiKey) { return false; } }; +#else + struct funcs { static bool IsLegacyNativeDupe(ImGuiKey key) { return key < 512 && GetIO().KeyMap[key] != -1; } }; // Hide Native<>ImGuiKey duplicates when both exists in the array + //Text("Legacy raw:"); for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key++) { if (io.KeysDown[key]) { SameLine(); Text("\"%s\" %d", GetKeyName(key), key); } } +#endif + Text("Keys down:"); for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) { if (funcs::IsLegacyNativeDupe(key) || !IsKeyDown(key)) continue; SameLine(); Text(IsNamedKey(key) ? "\"%s\"" : "\"%s\" %d", GetKeyName(key), key); SameLine(); Text("(%.02f)", GetKeyData(key)->DownDuration); } + Text("Keys pressed:"); for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) { if (funcs::IsLegacyNativeDupe(key) || !IsKeyPressed(key)) continue; SameLine(); Text(IsNamedKey(key) ? "\"%s\"" : "\"%s\" %d", GetKeyName(key), key); } + Text("Keys released:"); for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) { if (funcs::IsLegacyNativeDupe(key) || !IsKeyReleased(key)) continue; SameLine(); Text(IsNamedKey(key) ? "\"%s\"" : "\"%s\" %d", GetKeyName(key), key); } + Text("Keys mods: %s%s%s%s", io.KeyCtrl ? "CTRL " : "", io.KeyShift ? "SHIFT " : "", io.KeyAlt ? "ALT " : "", io.KeySuper ? "SUPER " : ""); + Text("Chars queue:"); for (int i = 0; i < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; i++) { ImWchar c = io.InputQueueCharacters[i]; SameLine(); Text("\'%c\' (0x%04X)", (c > ' ' && c <= 255) ? (char)c : '?', c); } // FIXME: We should convert 'c' to UTF-8 here but the functions are not public. + DebugRenderKeyboardPreview(GetWindowDrawList()); + Unindent(); + } + + Text("MOUSE STATE"); + { + Indent(); + if (IsMousePosValid()) + Text("Mouse pos: (%g, %g)", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y); + else + Text("Mouse pos: "); + Text("Mouse delta: (%g, %g)", io.MouseDelta.x, io.MouseDelta.y); + int count = IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown); + Text("Mouse down:"); for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) if (IsMouseDown(i)) { SameLine(); Text("b%d (%.02f secs)", i, io.MouseDownDuration[i]); } + Text("Mouse clicked:"); for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) if (IsMouseClicked(i)) { SameLine(); Text("b%d (%d)", i, io.MouseClickedCount[i]); } + Text("Mouse released:"); for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) if (IsMouseReleased(i)) { SameLine(); Text("b%d", i); } + Text("Mouse wheel: %.1f", io.MouseWheel); + Text("MouseStationaryTimer: %.2f", g.MouseStationaryTimer); + Text("Mouse source: %s", GetMouseSourceName(io.MouseSource)); + Text("Pen Pressure: %.1f", io.PenPressure); // Note: currently unused + Unindent(); + } + + Text("MOUSE WHEELING"); + { + Indent(); + Text("WheelingWindow: '%s'", g.WheelingWindow ? g.WheelingWindow->Name : "NULL"); + Text("WheelingWindowReleaseTimer: %.2f", g.WheelingWindowReleaseTimer); + Text("WheelingAxisAvg[] = { %.3f, %.3f }, Main Axis: %s", g.WheelingAxisAvg.x, g.WheelingAxisAvg.y, (g.WheelingAxisAvg.x > g.WheelingAxisAvg.y) ? "X" : (g.WheelingAxisAvg.x < g.WheelingAxisAvg.y) ? "Y" : ""); + Unindent(); + } + + Text("KEY OWNERS"); + { + Indent(); + if (BeginListBox("##owners", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 6))) + { + for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) + { + ImGuiKeyOwnerData* owner_data = GetKeyOwnerData(&g, key); + if (owner_data->OwnerCurr == ImGuiKeyOwner_None) + continue; + Text("%s: 0x%08X%s", GetKeyName(key), owner_data->OwnerCurr, + owner_data->LockUntilRelease ? " LockUntilRelease" : owner_data->LockThisFrame ? " LockThisFrame" : ""); + DebugLocateItemOnHover(owner_data->OwnerCurr); + } + EndListBox(); + } + Unindent(); + } + Text("SHORTCUT ROUTING"); + { + Indent(); + if (BeginListBox("##routes", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 6))) + { + for (ImGuiKey key = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) + { + ImGuiKeyRoutingTable* rt = &g.KeysRoutingTable; + for (ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex idx = rt->Index[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN]; idx != -1; ) + { + char key_chord_name[64]; + ImGuiKeyRoutingData* routing_data = &rt->Entries[idx]; + GetKeyChordName(key | routing_data->Mods, key_chord_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(key_chord_name)); + Text("%s: 0x%08X", key_chord_name, routing_data->RoutingCurr); + DebugLocateItemOnHover(routing_data->RoutingCurr); + idx = routing_data->NextEntryIndex; + } + } + EndListBox(); + } + Text("(ActiveIdUsing: AllKeyboardKeys: %d, NavDirMask: 0x%X)", g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys, g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask); + Unindent(); + } + TreePop(); + } + + if (TreeNode("Internal state")) + { + Text("WINDOWING"); + Indent(); + Text("HoveredWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->Name : "NULL"); + Text("HoveredWindow->Root: '%s'", g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow->Name : "NULL"); + Text("HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow ? g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow->Name : "NULL"); + Text("MovingWindow: '%s'", g.MovingWindow ? g.MovingWindow->Name : "NULL"); + Unindent(); + + Text("ITEMS"); + Indent(); + Text("ActiveId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d, Source: %s", g.ActiveId, g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame, g.ActiveIdTimer, g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap, GetInputSourceName(g.ActiveIdSource)); + DebugLocateItemOnHover(g.ActiveId); + Text("ActiveIdWindow: '%s'", g.ActiveIdWindow ? g.ActiveIdWindow->Name : "NULL"); + Text("ActiveIdUsing: AllKeyboardKeys: %d, NavDirMask: %X", g.ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys, g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask); + Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d", g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame, g.HoveredIdTimer, g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap); // Not displaying g.HoveredId as it is update mid-frame + Text("HoverItemDelayId: 0x%08X, Timer: %.2f, ClearTimer: %.2f", g.HoverItemDelayId, g.HoverItemDelayTimer, g.HoverItemDelayClearTimer); + Text("DragDrop: %d, SourceId = 0x%08X, Payload \"%s\" (%d bytes)", g.DragDropActive, g.DragDropPayload.SourceId, g.DragDropPayload.DataType, g.DragDropPayload.DataSize); + DebugLocateItemOnHover(g.DragDropPayload.SourceId); + Unindent(); + + Text("NAV,FOCUS"); + Indent(); + Text("NavWindow: '%s'", g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL"); + Text("NavId: 0x%08X, NavLayer: %d", g.NavId, g.NavLayer); + DebugLocateItemOnHover(g.NavId); + Text("NavInputSource: %s", GetInputSourceName(g.NavInputSource)); + Text("NavActive: %d, NavVisible: %d", g.IO.NavActive, g.IO.NavVisible); + Text("NavActivateId/DownId/PressedId: %08X/%08X/%08X", g.NavActivateId, g.NavActivateDownId, g.NavActivatePressedId); + Text("NavActivateFlags: %04X", g.NavActivateFlags); + Text("NavDisableHighlight: %d, NavDisableMouseHover: %d", g.NavDisableHighlight, g.NavDisableMouseHover); + Text("NavFocusScopeId = 0x%08X", g.NavFocusScopeId); + Text("NavWindowingTarget: '%s'", g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget->Name : "NULL"); + Unindent(); + + TreePop(); + } + + // Overlay: Display windows Rectangles and Begin Order + if (cfg->ShowWindowsRects || cfg->ShowWindowsBeginOrder) + { + for (ImGuiWindow* window : g.Windows) + { + if (!window->WasActive) + continue; + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window); + if (cfg->ShowWindowsRects) + { + ImRect r = Funcs::GetWindowRect(window, cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType); + draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 128, 255)); + } + if (cfg->ShowWindowsBeginOrder && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)) + { + char buf[32]; + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%d", window->BeginOrderWithinContext); + float font_size = GetFontSize(); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(window->Pos, window->Pos + ImVec2(font_size, font_size), IM_COL32(200, 100, 100, 255)); + draw_list->AddText(window->Pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf); + } + } + } + + // Overlay: Display Tables Rectangles + if (cfg->ShowTablesRects) + { + for (int table_n = 0; table_n < g.Tables.GetMapSize(); table_n++) + { + ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(table_n); + if (table == NULL || table->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount - 1) + continue; + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(table->OuterWindow); + if (cfg->ShowTablesRectsType >= TRT_ColumnsRect) + { + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, cfg->ShowTablesRectsType, column_n); + ImU32 col = (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n) ? IM_COL32(255, 255, 128, 255) : IM_COL32(255, 0, 128, 255); + float thickness = (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n) ? 3.0f : 1.0f; + draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, col, 0.0f, 0, thickness); + } + } + else + { + ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, cfg->ShowTablesRectsType, -1); + draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 128, 255)); + } + } + } + +#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK + // Overlay: Display Docking info + if (show_docking_nodes && g.IO.KeyCtrl) + { + } +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK + + End(); +} + +// [DEBUG] Display contents of Columns +void ImGui::DebugNodeColumns(ImGuiOldColumns* columns) +{ + if (!TreeNode((void*)(uintptr_t)columns->ID, "Columns Id: 0x%08X, Count: %d, Flags: 0x%04X", columns->ID, columns->Count, columns->Flags)) + return; + BulletText("Width: %.1f (MinX: %.1f, MaxX: %.1f)", columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMaxX); + for (ImGuiOldColumnData& column : columns->Columns) + BulletText("Column %02d: OffsetNorm %.3f (= %.1f px)", (int)columns->Columns.index_from_ptr(&column), column.OffsetNorm, GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, column.OffsetNorm)); + TreePop(); +} + +// [DEBUG] Display contents of ImDrawList +void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const char* label) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_UNUSED(viewport); // Used in docking branch + ImGuiMetricsConfig* cfg = &g.DebugMetricsConfig; + int cmd_count = draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size; + if (cmd_count > 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL) + cmd_count--; + bool node_open = TreeNode(draw_list, "%s: '%s' %d vtx, %d indices, %d cmds", label, draw_list->_OwnerName ? draw_list->_OwnerName : "", draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size, cmd_count); + if (draw_list == GetWindowDrawList()) + { + SameLine(); + TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f), "CURRENTLY APPENDING"); // Can't display stats for active draw list! (we don't have the data double-buffered) + if (node_open) + TreePop(); + return; + } + + ImDrawList* fg_draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window); // Render additional visuals into the top-most draw list + if (window && IsItemHovered() && fg_draw_list) + fg_draw_list->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + if (!node_open) + return; + + if (window && !window->WasActive) + TextDisabled("Warning: owning Window is inactive. This DrawList is not being rendered!"); + + for (const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data; pcmd < draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data + cmd_count; pcmd++) + { + if (pcmd->UserCallback) + { + BulletText("Callback %p, user_data %p", pcmd->UserCallback, pcmd->UserCallbackData); + continue; + } + + char buf[300]; + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "DrawCmd:%5d tris, Tex 0x%p, ClipRect (%4.0f,%4.0f)-(%4.0f,%4.0f)", + pcmd->ElemCount / 3, (void*)(intptr_t)pcmd->TextureId, + pcmd->ClipRect.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y, pcmd->ClipRect.z, pcmd->ClipRect.w); + bool pcmd_node_open = TreeNode((void*)(pcmd - draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin()), "%s", buf); + if (IsItemHovered() && (cfg->ShowDrawCmdMesh || cfg->ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes) && fg_draw_list) + DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(fg_draw_list, draw_list, pcmd, cfg->ShowDrawCmdMesh, cfg->ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes); + if (!pcmd_node_open) + continue; + + // Calculate approximate coverage area (touched pixel count) + // This will be in pixels squared as long there's no post-scaling happening to the renderer output. + const ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = (draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0) ? draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data : NULL; + const ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + pcmd->VtxOffset; + float total_area = 0.0f; + for (unsigned int idx_n = pcmd->IdxOffset; idx_n < pcmd->IdxOffset + pcmd->ElemCount; ) + { + ImVec2 triangle[3]; + for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, idx_n++) + triangle[n] = vtx_buffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[idx_n] : idx_n].pos; + total_area += ImTriangleArea(triangle[0], triangle[1], triangle[2]); + } + + // Display vertex information summary. Hover to get all triangles drawn in wire-frame + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "Mesh: ElemCount: %d, VtxOffset: +%d, IdxOffset: +%d, Area: ~%0.f px", pcmd->ElemCount, pcmd->VtxOffset, pcmd->IdxOffset, total_area); + Selectable(buf); + if (IsItemHovered() && fg_draw_list) + DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(fg_draw_list, draw_list, pcmd, true, false); + + // Display individual triangles/vertices. Hover on to get the corresponding triangle highlighted. + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(pcmd->ElemCount / 3); // Manually coarse clip our print out of individual vertices to save CPU, only items that may be visible. + while (clipper.Step()) + for (int prim = clipper.DisplayStart, idx_i = pcmd->IdxOffset + clipper.DisplayStart * 3; prim < clipper.DisplayEnd; prim++) + { + char* buf_p = buf, * buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf); + ImVec2 triangle[3]; + for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, idx_i++) + { + const ImDrawVert& v = vtx_buffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[idx_i] : idx_i]; + triangle[n] = v.pos; + buf_p += ImFormatString(buf_p, buf_end - buf_p, "%s %04d: pos (%8.2f,%8.2f), uv (%.6f,%.6f), col %08X\n", + (n == 0) ? "Vert:" : " ", idx_i, v.pos.x, v.pos.y, v.uv.x, v.uv.y, v.col); + } + + Selectable(buf, false); + if (fg_draw_list && IsItemHovered()) + { + ImDrawListFlags backup_flags = fg_draw_list->Flags; + fg_draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; // Disable AA on triangle outlines is more readable for very large and thin triangles. + fg_draw_list->AddPolyline(triangle, 3, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), ImDrawFlags_Closed, 1.0f); + fg_draw_list->Flags = backup_flags; + } + } + TreePop(); + } + TreePop(); +} + +// [DEBUG] Display mesh/aabb of a ImDrawCmd +void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(ImDrawList* out_draw_list, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd, bool show_mesh, bool show_aabb) +{ + IM_ASSERT(show_mesh || show_aabb); + + // Draw wire-frame version of all triangles + ImRect clip_rect = draw_cmd->ClipRect; + ImRect vtxs_rect(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + ImDrawListFlags backup_flags = out_draw_list->Flags; + out_draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; // Disable AA on triangle outlines is more readable for very large and thin triangles. + for (unsigned int idx_n = draw_cmd->IdxOffset, idx_end = draw_cmd->IdxOffset + draw_cmd->ElemCount; idx_n < idx_end; ) + { + ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = (draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0) ? draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data : NULL; // We don't hold on those pointers past iterations as ->AddPolyline() may invalidate them if out_draw_list==draw_list + ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + draw_cmd->VtxOffset; + + ImVec2 triangle[3]; + for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, idx_n++) + vtxs_rect.Add((triangle[n] = vtx_buffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[idx_n] : idx_n].pos)); + if (show_mesh) + out_draw_list->AddPolyline(triangle, 3, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), ImDrawFlags_Closed, 1.0f); // In yellow: mesh triangles + } + // Draw bounding boxes + if (show_aabb) + { + out_draw_list->AddRect(ImFloor(clip_rect.Min), ImFloor(clip_rect.Max), IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, 255)); // In pink: clipping rectangle submitted to GPU + out_draw_list->AddRect(ImFloor(vtxs_rect.Min), ImFloor(vtxs_rect.Max), IM_COL32(0, 255, 255, 255)); // In cyan: bounding box of triangles + } + out_draw_list->Flags = backup_flags; +} + +// [DEBUG] Display details for a single font, called by ShowStyleEditor(). +void ImGui::DebugNodeFont(ImFont* font) +{ + bool opened = TreeNode(font, "Font: \"%s\"\n%.2f px, %d glyphs, %d file(s)", + font->ConfigData ? font->ConfigData[0].Name : "", font->FontSize, font->Glyphs.Size, font->ConfigDataCount); + SameLine(); + if (SmallButton("Set as default")) + GetIO().FontDefault = font; + if (!opened) + return; + + // Display preview text + PushFont(font); + Text("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog"); + PopFont(); + + // Display details + SetNextItemWidth(GetFontSize() * 8); + DragFloat("Font scale", &font->Scale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.1f"); + SameLine(); MetricsHelpMarker( + "Note than the default embedded font is NOT meant to be scaled.\n\n" + "Font are currently rendered into bitmaps at a given size at the time of building the atlas. " + "You may oversample them to get some flexibility with scaling. " + "You can also render at multiple sizes and select which one to use at runtime.\n\n" + "(Glimmer of hope: the atlas system will be rewritten in the future to make scaling more flexible.)"); + Text("Ascent: %f, Descent: %f, Height: %f", font->Ascent, font->Descent, font->Ascent - font->Descent); + char c_str[5]; + Text("Fallback character: '%s' (U+%04X)", ImTextCharToUtf8(c_str, font->FallbackChar), font->FallbackChar); + Text("Ellipsis character: '%s' (U+%04X)", ImTextCharToUtf8(c_str, font->EllipsisChar), font->EllipsisChar); + const int surface_sqrt = (int)ImSqrt((float)font->MetricsTotalSurface); + Text("Texture Area: about %d px ~%dx%d px", font->MetricsTotalSurface, surface_sqrt, surface_sqrt); + for (int config_i = 0; config_i < font->ConfigDataCount; config_i++) + if (font->ConfigData) + if (const ImFontConfig* cfg = &font->ConfigData[config_i]) + BulletText("Input %d: \'%s\', Oversample: (%d,%d), PixelSnapH: %d, Offset: (%.1f,%.1f)", + config_i, cfg->Name, cfg->OversampleH, cfg->OversampleV, cfg->PixelSnapH, cfg->GlyphOffset.x, cfg->GlyphOffset.y); + + // Display all glyphs of the fonts in separate pages of 256 characters + if (TreeNode("Glyphs", "Glyphs (%d)", font->Glyphs.Size)) + { + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetWindowDrawList(); + const ImU32 glyph_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text); + const float cell_size = font->FontSize * 1; + const float cell_spacing = GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y; + for (unsigned int base = 0; base <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX; base += 256) + { + // Skip ahead if a large bunch of glyphs are not present in the font (test in chunks of 4k) + // This is only a small optimization to reduce the number of iterations when IM_UNICODE_MAX_CODEPOINT + // is large // (if ImWchar==ImWchar32 we will do at least about 272 queries here) + if (!(base & 4095) && font->IsGlyphRangeUnused(base, base + 4095)) + { + base += 4096 - 256; + continue; + } + + int count = 0; + for (unsigned int n = 0; n < 256; n++) + if (font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base + n))) + count++; + if (count <= 0) + continue; + if (!TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)base, "U+%04X..U+%04X (%d %s)", base, base + 255, count, count > 1 ? "glyphs" : "glyph")) + continue; + + // Draw a 16x16 grid of glyphs + ImVec2 base_pos = GetCursorScreenPos(); + for (unsigned int n = 0; n < 256; n++) + { + // We use ImFont::RenderChar as a shortcut because we don't have UTF-8 conversion functions + // available here and thus cannot easily generate a zero-terminated UTF-8 encoded string. + ImVec2 cell_p1(base_pos.x + (n % 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing), base_pos.y + (n / 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing)); + ImVec2 cell_p2(cell_p1.x + cell_size, cell_p1.y + cell_size); + const ImFontGlyph* glyph = font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base + n)); + draw_list->AddRect(cell_p1, cell_p2, glyph ? IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 100) : IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 50)); + if (!glyph) + continue; + font->RenderChar(draw_list, cell_size, cell_p1, glyph_col, (ImWchar)(base + n)); + if (IsMouseHoveringRect(cell_p1, cell_p2) && BeginTooltip()) + { + DebugNodeFontGlyph(font, glyph); + EndTooltip(); + } + } + Dummy(ImVec2((cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16, (cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16)); + TreePop(); + } + TreePop(); + } + TreePop(); +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeFontGlyph(ImFont*, const ImFontGlyph* glyph) +{ + Text("Codepoint: U+%04X", glyph->Codepoint); + Separator(); + Text("Visible: %d", glyph->Visible); + Text("AdvanceX: %.1f", glyph->AdvanceX); + Text("Pos: (%.2f,%.2f)->(%.2f,%.2f)", glyph->X0, glyph->Y0, glyph->X1, glyph->Y1); + Text("UV: (%.3f,%.3f)->(%.3f,%.3f)", glyph->U0, glyph->V0, glyph->U1, glyph->V1); +} + +// [DEBUG] Display contents of ImGuiStorage +void ImGui::DebugNodeStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage, const char* label) +{ + if (!TreeNode(label, "%s: %d entries, %d bytes", label, storage->Data.Size, storage->Data.size_in_bytes())) + return; + for (const ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair& p : storage->Data) + BulletText("Key 0x%08X Value { i: %d }", p.key, p.val_i); // Important: we currently don't store a type, real value may not be integer. + TreePop(); +} + +// [DEBUG] Display contents of ImGuiTabBar +void ImGui::DebugNodeTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label) +{ + // Standalone tab bars (not associated to docking/windows functionality) currently hold no discernible strings. + char buf[256]; + char* p = buf; + const char* buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf); + const bool is_active = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible >= GetFrameCount() - 2); + p += ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, "%s 0x%08X (%d tabs)%s {", label, tab_bar->ID, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, is_active ? "" : " *Inactive*"); + for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < ImMin(tab_bar->Tabs.Size, 3); tab_n++) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n]; + p += ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, "%s'%s'", tab_n > 0 ? ", " : "", TabBarGetTabName(tab_bar, tab)); + } + p += ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, (tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 3) ? " ... }" : " } "); + if (!is_active) { PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled)); } + bool open = TreeNode(label, "%s", buf); + if (!is_active) { PopStyleColor(); } + if (is_active && IsItemHovered()) + { + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(); + draw_list->AddRect(tab_bar->BarRect.Min, tab_bar->BarRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); + } + if (open) + { + for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n]; + PushID(tab); + if (SmallButton("<")) { TabBarQueueReorder(tab_bar, tab, -1); } SameLine(0, 2); + if (SmallButton(">")) { TabBarQueueReorder(tab_bar, tab, +1); } SameLine(); + Text("%02d%c Tab 0x%08X '%s' Offset: %.2f, Width: %.2f/%.2f", + tab_n, (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId) ? '*' : ' ', tab->ID, TabBarGetTabName(tab_bar, tab), tab->Offset, tab->Width, tab->ContentWidth); + PopID(); + } + TreePop(); + } +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport) +{ + SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); + if (TreeNode("viewport0", "Viewport #%d", 0)) + { + ImGuiWindowFlags flags = viewport->Flags; + BulletText("Main Pos: (%.0f,%.0f), Size: (%.0f,%.0f)\nWorkArea Offset Left: %.0f Top: %.0f, Right: %.0f, Bottom: %.0f", + viewport->Pos.x, viewport->Pos.y, viewport->Size.x, viewport->Size.y, + viewport->WorkOffsetMin.x, viewport->WorkOffsetMin.y, viewport->WorkOffsetMax.x, viewport->WorkOffsetMax.y); + BulletText("Flags: 0x%04X =%s%s%s", viewport->Flags, + (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow) ? " IsPlatformWindow" : "", + (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformMonitor) ? " IsPlatformMonitor" : "", + (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp) ? " OwnedByApp" : ""); + for (ImDrawList* draw_list : viewport->DrawDataP.CmdLists) + DebugNodeDrawList(NULL, viewport, draw_list, "DrawList"); + TreePop(); + } +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label) +{ + if (window == NULL) + { + BulletText("%s: NULL", label); + return; + } + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const bool is_active = window->WasActive; + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags tree_node_flags = (window == g.NavWindow) ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected : ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None; + if (!is_active) { PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled)); } + const bool open = TreeNodeEx(label, tree_node_flags, "%s '%s'%s", label, window->Name, is_active ? "" : " *Inactive*"); + if (!is_active) { PopStyleColor(); } + if (IsItemHovered() && is_active) + GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + if (!open) + return; + + if (window->MemoryCompacted) + TextDisabled("Note: some memory buffers have been compacted/freed."); + + ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags; + DebugNodeDrawList(window, window->Viewport, window->DrawList, "DrawList"); + BulletText("Pos: (%.1f,%.1f), Size: (%.1f,%.1f), ContentSize (%.1f,%.1f) Ideal (%.1f,%.1f)", window->Pos.x, window->Pos.y, window->Size.x, window->Size.y, window->ContentSize.x, window->ContentSize.y, window->ContentSizeIdeal.x, window->ContentSizeIdeal.y); + BulletText("Flags: 0x%08X (%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s..)", flags, + (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? "Child " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) ? "Tooltip " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) ? "Popup " : "", + (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) ? "Modal " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? "ChildMenu " : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) ? "NoSavedSettings " : "", + (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs)? "NoMouseInputs":"", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) ? "NoNavInputs" : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) ? "AlwaysAutoResize" : ""); + BulletText("Scroll: (%.2f/%.2f,%.2f/%.2f) Scrollbar:%s%s", window->Scroll.x, window->ScrollMax.x, window->Scroll.y, window->ScrollMax.y, window->ScrollbarX ? "X" : "", window->ScrollbarY ? "Y" : ""); + BulletText("Active: %d/%d, WriteAccessed: %d, BeginOrderWithinContext: %d", window->Active, window->WasActive, window->WriteAccessed, (window->Active || window->WasActive) ? window->BeginOrderWithinContext : -1); + BulletText("Appearing: %d, Hidden: %d (CanSkip %d Cannot %d), SkipItems: %d", window->Appearing, window->Hidden, window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems, window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems, window->SkipItems); + for (int layer = 0; layer < ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT; layer++) + { + ImRect r = window->NavRectRel[layer]; + if (r.Min.x >= r.Max.y && r.Min.y >= r.Max.y) + BulletText("NavLastIds[%d]: 0x%08X", layer, window->NavLastIds[layer]); + else + BulletText("NavLastIds[%d]: 0x%08X at +(%.1f,%.1f)(%.1f,%.1f)", layer, window->NavLastIds[layer], r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y); + DebugLocateItemOnHover(window->NavLastIds[layer]); + } + const ImVec2* pr = window->NavPreferredScoringPosRel; + for (int layer = 0; layer < ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT; layer++) + BulletText("NavPreferredScoringPosRel[%d] = {%.1f,%.1f)", layer, (pr[layer].x == FLT_MAX ? -99999.0f : pr[layer].x), (pr[layer].y == FLT_MAX ? -99999.0f : pr[layer].y)); // Display as 99999.0f so it looks neater. + BulletText("NavLayersActiveMask: %X, NavLastChildNavWindow: %s", window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask, window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow->Name : "NULL"); + if (window->RootWindow != window) { DebugNodeWindow(window->RootWindow, "RootWindow"); } + if (window->ParentWindow != NULL) { DebugNodeWindow(window->ParentWindow, "ParentWindow"); } + if (window->DC.ChildWindows.Size > 0) { DebugNodeWindowsList(&window->DC.ChildWindows, "ChildWindows"); } + if (window->ColumnsStorage.Size > 0 && TreeNode("Columns", "Columns sets (%d)", window->ColumnsStorage.Size)) + { + for (ImGuiOldColumns& columns : window->ColumnsStorage) + DebugNodeColumns(&columns); + TreePop(); + } + DebugNodeStorage(&window->StateStorage, "Storage"); + TreePop(); +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowSettings(ImGuiWindowSettings* settings) +{ + if (settings->WantDelete) + BeginDisabled(); + Text("0x%08X \"%s\" Pos (%d,%d) Size (%d,%d) Collapsed=%d", + settings->ID, settings->GetName(), settings->Pos.x, settings->Pos.y, settings->Size.x, settings->Size.y, settings->Collapsed); + if (settings->WantDelete) + EndDisabled(); +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowsList(ImVector* windows, const char* label) +{ + if (!TreeNode(label, "%s (%d)", label, windows->Size)) + return; + for (int i = windows->Size - 1; i >= 0; i--) // Iterate front to back + { + PushID((*windows)[i]); + DebugNodeWindow((*windows)[i], "Window"); + PopID(); + } + TreePop(); +} + +// FIXME-OPT: This is technically suboptimal, but it is simpler this way. +void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(ImGuiWindow** windows, int windows_size, ImGuiWindow* parent_in_begin_stack) +{ + for (int i = 0; i < windows_size; i++) + { + ImGuiWindow* window = windows[i]; + if (window->ParentWindowInBeginStack != parent_in_begin_stack) + continue; + char buf[20]; + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "[%04d] Window", window->BeginOrderWithinContext); + //BulletText("[%04d] Window '%s'", window->BeginOrderWithinContext, window->Name); + DebugNodeWindow(window, buf); + Indent(); + DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(windows + i + 1, windows_size - i - 1, window); + Unindent(); + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] DEBUG LOG WINDOW +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::DebugLog(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + DebugLogV(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::DebugLogV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const int old_size = g.DebugLogBuf.size(); + g.DebugLogBuf.appendf("[%05d] ", g.FrameCount); + g.DebugLogBuf.appendfv(fmt, args); + if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTTY) + IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF("%s", g.DebugLogBuf.begin() + old_size); + g.DebugLogIndex.append(g.DebugLogBuf.c_str(), old_size, g.DebugLogBuf.size()); +} + +void ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow(bool* p_open) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize)) + SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(0.0f, GetFontSize() * 12.0f), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + if (!Begin("Dear ImGui Debug Log", p_open) || GetCurrentWindow()->BeginCount > 1) + { + End(); + return; + } + + CheckboxFlags("All", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventMask_); + SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("ActiveId", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId); + SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Focus", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus); + SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Popup", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup); + SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Nav", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav); + SameLine(); if (CheckboxFlags("Clipper", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventClipper)) { g.DebugLogClipperAutoDisableFrames = 2; } if (IsItemHovered()) SetTooltip("Clipper log auto-disabled after 2 frames"); + //SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Selection", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventSelection); + SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("IO", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO); + + if (SmallButton("Clear")) + { + g.DebugLogBuf.clear(); + g.DebugLogIndex.clear(); + } + SameLine(); + if (SmallButton("Copy")) + SetClipboardText(g.DebugLogBuf.c_str()); + BeginChild("##log", ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar); + + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(g.DebugLogIndex.size()); + while (clipper.Step()) + for (int line_no = clipper.DisplayStart; line_no < clipper.DisplayEnd; line_no++) + { + const char* line_begin = g.DebugLogIndex.get_line_begin(g.DebugLogBuf.c_str(), line_no); + const char* line_end = g.DebugLogIndex.get_line_end(g.DebugLogBuf.c_str(), line_no); + TextUnformatted(line_begin, line_end); + ImRect text_rect = g.LastItemData.Rect; + if (IsItemHovered()) + for (const char* p = line_begin; p <= line_end - 10; p++) + { + ImGuiID id = 0; + if (p[0] != '0' || (p[1] != 'x' && p[1] != 'X') || sscanf(p + 2, "%X", &id) != 1) + continue; + ImVec2 p0 = CalcTextSize(line_begin, p); + ImVec2 p1 = CalcTextSize(p, p + 10); + g.LastItemData.Rect = ImRect(text_rect.Min + ImVec2(p0.x, 0.0f), text_rect.Min + ImVec2(p0.x + p1.x, p1.y)); + if (IsMouseHoveringRect(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max, true)) + DebugLocateItemOnHover(id); + p += 10; + } + } + if (GetScrollY() >= GetScrollMaxY()) + SetScrollHereY(1.0f); + EndChild(); + + End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] OTHER DEBUG TOOLS (ITEM PICKER, STACK TOOL) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Draw a small cross at current CursorPos in current window's DrawList +void ImGui::DebugDrawCursorPos(ImU32 col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - 3.0f), ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y + 4.0f), col, 1.0f); + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(pos.x - 3.0f, pos.y), ImVec2(pos.x + 4.0f, pos.y), col, 1.0f); +} + +// Draw a 10px wide rectangle around CurposPos.x using Line Y1/Y2 in current window's DrawList +void ImGui::DebugDrawLineExtents(ImU32 col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + float curr_x = window->DC.CursorPos.x; + float line_y1 = (window->DC.IsSameLine ? window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y : window->DC.CursorPos.y); + float line_y2 = line_y1 + (window->DC.IsSameLine ? window->DC.PrevLineSize.y : window->DC.CurrLineSize.y); + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(curr_x - 5.0f, line_y1), ImVec2(curr_x + 5.0f, line_y1), col, 1.0f); + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(curr_x - 0.5f, line_y1), ImVec2(curr_x - 0.5f, line_y2), col, 1.0f); + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(curr_x - 5.0f, line_y2), ImVec2(curr_x + 5.0f, line_y2), col, 1.0f); +} + +// Draw last item rect in ForegroundDrawList (so it is always visible) +void ImGui::DebugDrawItemRect(ImU32 col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max, col); +} + +// [DEBUG] Locate item position/rectangle given an ID. +static const ImU32 DEBUG_LOCATE_ITEM_COLOR = IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255); // Green + +void ImGui::DebugLocateItem(ImGuiID target_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.DebugLocateId = target_id; + g.DebugLocateFrames = 2; +} + +void ImGui::DebugLocateItemOnHover(ImGuiID target_id) +{ + if (target_id == 0 || !IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup)) + return; + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + DebugLocateItem(target_id); + GetForegroundDrawList(g.CurrentWindow)->AddRect(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min - ImVec2(3.0f, 3.0f), g.LastItemData.Rect.Max + ImVec2(3.0f, 3.0f), DEBUG_LOCATE_ITEM_COLOR); +} + +void ImGui::DebugLocateItemResolveWithLastItem() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiLastItemData item_data = g.LastItemData; + g.DebugLocateId = 0; + ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(g.CurrentWindow); + ImRect r = item_data.Rect; + r.Expand(3.0f); + ImVec2 p1 = g.IO.MousePos; + ImVec2 p2 = ImVec2((p1.x < r.Min.x) ? r.Min.x : (p1.x > r.Max.x) ? r.Max.x : p1.x, (p1.y < r.Min.y) ? r.Min.y : (p1.y > r.Max.y) ? r.Max.y : p1.y); + draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, DEBUG_LOCATE_ITEM_COLOR); + draw_list->AddLine(p1, p2, DEBUG_LOCATE_ITEM_COLOR); +} + +// [DEBUG] Item picker tool - start with DebugStartItemPicker() - useful to visually select an item and break into its call-stack. +void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolItemPicker() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.DebugItemPickerBreakId = 0; + if (!g.DebugItemPickerActive) + return; + + const ImGuiID hovered_id = g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame; + SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand); + if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) + g.DebugItemPickerActive = false; + const bool change_mapping = g.IO.KeyMods == (ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiMod_Shift); + if (!change_mapping && IsMouseClicked(g.DebugItemPickerMouseButton) && hovered_id) + { + g.DebugItemPickerBreakId = hovered_id; + g.DebugItemPickerActive = false; + } + for (int mouse_button = 0; mouse_button < 3; mouse_button++) + if (change_mapping && IsMouseClicked(mouse_button)) + g.DebugItemPickerMouseButton = (ImU8)mouse_button; + SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.70f); + if (!BeginTooltip()) + return; + Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X", hovered_id); + Text("Press ESC to abort picking."); + const char* mouse_button_names[] = { "Left", "Right", "Middle" }; + if (change_mapping) + Text("Remap w/ Ctrl+Shift: click anywhere to select new mouse button."); + else + TextColored(GetStyleColorVec4(hovered_id ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), "Click %s Button to break in debugger! (remap w/ Ctrl+Shift)", mouse_button_names[g.DebugItemPickerMouseButton]); + EndTooltip(); +} + +// [DEBUG] Stack Tool: update queries. Called by NewFrame() +void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolStackQueries() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStackTool* tool = &g.DebugStackTool; + + // Clear hook when stack tool is not visible + g.DebugHookIdInfo = 0; + if (g.FrameCount != tool->LastActiveFrame + 1) + return; + + // Update queries. The steps are: -1: query Stack, >= 0: query each stack item + // We can only perform 1 ID Info query every frame. This is designed so the GetID() tests are cheap and constant-time + const ImGuiID query_id = g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame ? g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame : g.ActiveId; + if (tool->QueryId != query_id) + { + tool->QueryId = query_id; + tool->StackLevel = -1; + tool->Results.resize(0); + } + if (query_id == 0) + return; + + // Advance to next stack level when we got our result, or after 2 frames (in case we never get a result) + int stack_level = tool->StackLevel; + if (stack_level >= 0 && stack_level < tool->Results.Size) + if (tool->Results[stack_level].QuerySuccess || tool->Results[stack_level].QueryFrameCount > 2) + tool->StackLevel++; + + // Update hook + stack_level = tool->StackLevel; + if (stack_level == -1) + g.DebugHookIdInfo = query_id; + if (stack_level >= 0 && stack_level < tool->Results.Size) + { + g.DebugHookIdInfo = tool->Results[stack_level].ID; + tool->Results[stack_level].QueryFrameCount++; + } +} + +// [DEBUG] Stack tool: hooks called by GetID() family functions +void ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_id, const void* data_id_end) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiStackTool* tool = &g.DebugStackTool; + + // Step 0: stack query + // This assumes that the ID was computed with the current ID stack, which tends to be the case for our widget. + if (tool->StackLevel == -1) + { + tool->StackLevel++; + tool->Results.resize(window->IDStack.Size + 1, ImGuiStackLevelInfo()); + for (int n = 0; n < window->IDStack.Size + 1; n++) + tool->Results[n].ID = (n < window->IDStack.Size) ? window->IDStack[n] : id; + return; + } + + // Step 1+: query for individual level + IM_ASSERT(tool->StackLevel >= 0); + if (tool->StackLevel != window->IDStack.Size) + return; + ImGuiStackLevelInfo* info = &tool->Results[tool->StackLevel]; + IM_ASSERT(info->ID == id && info->QueryFrameCount > 0); + + switch (data_type) + { + case ImGuiDataType_S32: + ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "%d", (int)(intptr_t)data_id); + break; + case ImGuiDataType_String: + ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "%.*s", data_id_end ? (int)((const char*)data_id_end - (const char*)data_id) : (int)strlen((const char*)data_id), (const char*)data_id); + break; + case ImGuiDataType_Pointer: + ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "(void*)0x%p", data_id); + break; + case ImGuiDataType_ID: + if (info->Desc[0] != 0) // PushOverrideID() is often used to avoid hashing twice, which would lead to 2 calls to DebugHookIdInfo(). We prioritize the first one. + return; + ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "0x%08X [override]", id); + break; + default: + IM_ASSERT(0); + } + info->QuerySuccess = true; + info->DataType = data_type; +} + +static int StackToolFormatLevelInfo(ImGuiStackTool* tool, int n, bool format_for_ui, char* buf, size_t buf_size) +{ + ImGuiStackLevelInfo* info = &tool->Results[n]; + ImGuiWindow* window = (info->Desc[0] == 0 && n == 0) ? ImGui::FindWindowByID(info->ID) : NULL; + if (window) // Source: window name (because the root ID don't call GetID() and so doesn't get hooked) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format_for_ui ? "\"%s\" [window]" : "%s", window->Name); + if (info->QuerySuccess) // Source: GetID() hooks (prioritize over ItemInfo() because we frequently use patterns like: PushID(str), Button("") where they both have same id) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, (format_for_ui && info->DataType == ImGuiDataType_String) ? "\"%s\"" : "%s", info->Desc); + if (tool->StackLevel < tool->Results.Size) // Only start using fallback below when all queries are done, so during queries we don't flickering ??? markers. + return (*buf = 0); +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE + if (const char* label = ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(GImGui, info->ID)) // Source: ImGuiTestEngine's ItemInfo() + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format_for_ui ? "??? \"%s\"" : "%s", label); +#endif + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, "???"); +} + +// Stack Tool: Display UI +void ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow(bool* p_open) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize)) + SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(0.0f, GetFontSize() * 8.0f), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + if (!Begin("Dear ImGui Stack Tool", p_open) || GetCurrentWindow()->BeginCount > 1) + { + End(); + return; + } + + // Display hovered/active status + ImGuiStackTool* tool = &g.DebugStackTool; + const ImGuiID hovered_id = g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame; + const ImGuiID active_id = g.ActiveId; +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE + Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X (\"%s\"), ActiveId: 0x%08X (\"%s\")", hovered_id, hovered_id ? ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(&g, hovered_id) : "", active_id, active_id ? ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(&g, active_id) : ""); +#else + Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X, ActiveId: 0x%08X", hovered_id, active_id); +#endif + SameLine(); + MetricsHelpMarker("Hover an item with the mouse to display elements of the ID Stack leading to the item's final ID.\nEach level of the stack correspond to a PushID() call.\nAll levels of the stack are hashed together to make the final ID of a widget (ID displayed at the bottom level of the stack).\nRead FAQ entry about the ID stack for details."); + + // CTRL+C to copy path + const float time_since_copy = (float)g.Time - tool->CopyToClipboardLastTime; + Checkbox("Ctrl+C: copy path to clipboard", &tool->CopyToClipboardOnCtrlC); + SameLine(); + TextColored((time_since_copy >= 0.0f && time_since_copy < 0.75f && ImFmod(time_since_copy, 0.25f) < 0.25f * 0.5f) ? ImVec4(1.f, 1.f, 0.3f, 1.f) : ImVec4(), "*COPIED*"); + if (tool->CopyToClipboardOnCtrlC && IsKeyDown(ImGuiMod_Ctrl) && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C)) + { + tool->CopyToClipboardLastTime = (float)g.Time; + char* p = g.TempBuffer.Data; + char* p_end = p + g.TempBuffer.Size; + for (int stack_n = 0; stack_n < tool->Results.Size && p + 3 < p_end; stack_n++) + { + *p++ = '/'; + char level_desc[256]; + StackToolFormatLevelInfo(tool, stack_n, false, level_desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(level_desc)); + for (int n = 0; level_desc[n] && p + 2 < p_end; n++) + { + if (level_desc[n] == '/') + *p++ = '\\'; + *p++ = level_desc[n]; + } + } + *p = '\0'; + SetClipboardText(g.TempBuffer.Data); + } + + // Display decorated stack + tool->LastActiveFrame = g.FrameCount; + if (tool->Results.Size > 0 && BeginTable("##table", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + const float id_width = CalcTextSize("0xDDDDDDDD").x; + TableSetupColumn("Seed", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, id_width); + TableSetupColumn("PushID", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch); + TableSetupColumn("Result", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, id_width); + TableHeadersRow(); + for (int n = 0; n < tool->Results.Size; n++) + { + ImGuiStackLevelInfo* info = &tool->Results[n]; + TableNextColumn(); + Text("0x%08X", (n > 0) ? tool->Results[n - 1].ID : 0); + TableNextColumn(); + StackToolFormatLevelInfo(tool, n, true, g.TempBuffer.Data, g.TempBuffer.Size); + TextUnformatted(g.TempBuffer.Data); + TableNextColumn(); + Text("0x%08X", info->ID); + if (n == tool->Results.Size - 1) + TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Header)); + } + EndTable(); + } + End(); +} + +#else + +void ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(bool*) {} +void ImGui::ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeColumns(ImGuiOldColumns*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow*, ImGuiViewportP*, const ImDrawList*, const char*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(ImDrawList*, const ImDrawList*, const ImDrawCmd*, bool, bool) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeFont(ImFont*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeStorage(ImGuiStorage*, const char*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeTabBar(ImGuiTabBar*, const char*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeWindow(ImGuiWindow*, const char*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowSettings(ImGuiWindowSettings*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowsList(ImVector*, const char*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeViewport(ImGuiViewportP*) {} + +void ImGui::DebugLog(const char*, ...) {} +void ImGui::DebugLogV(const char*, va_list) {} +void ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow(bool*) {} +void ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow(bool*) {} +void ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(ImGuiID, ImGuiDataType, const void*, const void*) {} +void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolItemPicker() {} +void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolStackQueries() {} + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Include imgui_user.inl at the end of imgui.cpp to access private data/functions that aren't exposed. +// Prefer just including imgui_internal.h from your code rather than using this define. If a declaration is missing from imgui_internal.h add it or request it on the github. +#ifdef IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_INL +#include "imgui_user.inl" +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d2f81a --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui.h @@ -0,0 +1,3271 @@ +// dear imgui, v1.89.9 +// (headers) + +// Help: +// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.com/faq +// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase. +// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that. +// Read imgui.cpp for details, links and comments. + +// Resources: +// - FAQ http://dearimgui.com/faq +// - Homepage https://github.com/ocornut/imgui +// - Releases & changelog https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases +// - Gallery https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6478 (please post your screenshots/video there!) +// - Wiki https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki (lots of good stuff there) +// - Getting Started https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started +// - Glossary https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary +// - Issues & support https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues +// - Tests & Automation https://github.com/ocornut/imgui_test_engine + +// Getting Started? +// - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started +// - For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running/loading fonts: +// please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above. + +// Library Version +// (Integer encoded as XYYZZ for use in #if preprocessor conditionals, e.g. '#if IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 12345') +#define IMGUI_VERSION "1.89.9" +#define IMGUI_VERSION_NUM 18990 +#define IMGUI_HAS_TABLE + +/* + +Index of this file: +// [SECTION] Header mess +// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types +// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions +// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations +// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<> +// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle +// [SECTION] ImGuiIO +// [SECTION] Misc data structures (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData, ImGunSizeCallbackData, ImGuiPayload, ImGuiTableSortSpecs, ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs) +// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, Math Operators, ImColor) +// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCallback, ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawFlags, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData) +// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFont) +// [SECTION] Viewports (ImGuiViewportFlags, ImGuiViewport) +// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces (ImGuiPlatformImeData) +// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types + +*/ + +#pragma once + +// Configuration file with compile-time options +// (edit imconfig.h or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "myfilename.h" from your build system') +#ifdef IMGUI_USER_CONFIG +#include IMGUI_USER_CONFIG +#endif +#include "imconfig.h" + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Header mess +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Includes +#include // FLT_MIN, FLT_MAX +#include // va_list, va_start, va_end +#include // ptrdiff_t, NULL +#include // memset, memmove, memcpy, strlen, strchr, strcpy, strcmp + +// Define attributes of all API symbols declarations (e.g. for DLL under Windows) +// IMGUI_API is used for core imgui functions, IMGUI_IMPL_API is used for the default backends files (imgui_impl_xxx.h) +// Using dear imgui via a shared library is not recommended, because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility (also function call overhead, as dear imgui is a call-heavy API) +#ifndef IMGUI_API +#define IMGUI_API +#endif +#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_API +#define IMGUI_IMPL_API IMGUI_API +#endif + +// Helper Macros +#ifndef IM_ASSERT +#include +#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR) assert(_EXPR) // You can override the default assert handler by editing imconfig.h +#endif +#define IM_ARRAYSIZE(_ARR) ((int)(sizeof(_ARR) / sizeof(*(_ARR)))) // Size of a static C-style array. Don't use on pointers! +#define IM_UNUSED(_VAR) ((void)(_VAR)) // Used to silence "unused variable warnings". Often useful as asserts may be stripped out from final builds. +#define IM_OFFSETOF(_TYPE,_MEMBER) offsetof(_TYPE, _MEMBER) // Offset of _MEMBER within _TYPE. Standardized as offsetof() in C++11 +#define IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(IMGUI_VERSION, sizeof(ImGuiIO), sizeof(ImGuiStyle), sizeof(ImVec2), sizeof(ImVec4), sizeof(ImDrawVert), sizeof(ImDrawIdx)) + +// Helper Macros - IM_FMTARGS, IM_FMTLIST: Apply printf-style warnings to our formatting functions. +#if !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && defined(__MINGW32__) && !defined(__clang__) +#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT) __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, FMT+1))) +#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT) __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, 0))) +#elif !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && (defined(__clang__) || defined(__GNUC__)) +#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT) __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, FMT+1))) +#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT) __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, 0))) +#else +#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT) +#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT) +#endif + +// Disable some of MSVC most aggressive Debug runtime checks in function header/footer (used in some simple/low-level functions) +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__) && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && !defined(IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID) +#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF __pragma(runtime_checks("",off)) __pragma(check_stack(off)) __pragma(strict_gs_check(push,off)) +#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE __pragma(runtime_checks("",restore)) __pragma(check_stack()) __pragma(strict_gs_check(pop)) +#else +#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF +#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE +#endif + +// Warnings +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (push) +#pragma warning (disable: 26495) // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6). +#endif +#if defined(__clang__) +#pragma clang diagnostic push +#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option") +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#endif +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-identifier" // warning: identifier '_Xxx' is reserved because it starts with '_' followed by a capital letter +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic push +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Forward declarations +struct ImDrawChannel; // Temporary storage to output draw commands out of order, used by ImDrawListSplitter and ImDrawList::ChannelsSplit() +struct ImDrawCmd; // A single draw command within a parent ImDrawList (generally maps to 1 GPU draw call, unless it is a callback) +struct ImDrawData; // All draw command lists required to render the frame + pos/size coordinates to use for the projection matrix. +struct ImDrawList; // A single draw command list (generally one per window, conceptually you may see this as a dynamic "mesh" builder) +struct ImDrawListSharedData; // Data shared among multiple draw lists (typically owned by parent ImGui context, but you may create one yourself) +struct ImDrawListSplitter; // Helper to split a draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order, then flattened back. +struct ImDrawVert; // A single vertex (pos + uv + col = 20 bytes by default. Override layout with IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT) +struct ImFont; // Runtime data for a single font within a parent ImFontAtlas +struct ImFontAtlas; // Runtime data for multiple fonts, bake multiple fonts into a single texture, TTF/OTF font loader +struct ImFontBuilderIO; // Opaque interface to a font builder (stb_truetype or FreeType). +struct ImFontConfig; // Configuration data when adding a font or merging fonts +struct ImFontGlyph; // A single font glyph (code point + coordinates within in ImFontAtlas + offset) +struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder; // Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data +struct ImColor; // Helper functions to create a color that can be converted to either u32 or float4 (*OBSOLETE* please avoid using) +struct ImGuiContext; // Dear ImGui context (opaque structure, unless including imgui_internal.h) +struct ImGuiIO; // Main configuration and I/O between your application and ImGui +struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData; // Shared state of InputText() when using custom ImGuiInputTextCallback (rare/advanced use) +struct ImGuiKeyData; // Storage for ImGuiIO and IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions. +struct ImGuiListClipper; // Helper to manually clip large list of items +struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame; // Helper for running a block of code not more than once a frame +struct ImGuiPayload; // User data payload for drag and drop operations +struct ImGuiPlatformImeData; // Platform IME data for io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function. +struct ImGunSizeCallbackData; // Callback data when using SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() (rare/advanced use) +struct ImGuiStorage; // Helper for key->value storage +struct ImGuiStyle; // Runtime data for styling/colors +struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs; // Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more) +struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs; // Sorting specification for one column of a table +struct ImGuiTextBuffer; // Helper to hold and append into a text buffer (~string builder) +struct ImGuiTextFilter; // Helper to parse and apply text filters (e.g. "aaaaa[,bbbbb][,ccccc]") +struct ImGuiViewport; // A Platform Window (always only one in 'master' branch), in the future may represent Platform Monitor + +// Enumerations +// - We don't use strongly typed enums much because they add constraints (can't extend in private code, can't store typed in bit fields, extra casting on iteration) +// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _central column_ below to find the actual flags/enum lists! +// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot. +// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments. +enum ImGuiKey : int; // -> enum ImGuiKey // Enum: A key identifier (ImGuiKey_XXX or ImGuiMod_XXX value) +enum ImGuiMouseSource : int; // -> enum ImGuiMouseSource // Enum; A mouse input source identifier (Mouse, TouchScreen, Pen) +typedef int ImGuiCol; // -> enum ImGuiCol_ // Enum: A color identifier for styling +typedef int ImGuiCond; // -> enum ImGuiCond_ // Enum: A condition for many Set*() functions +typedef int ImGuiDataType; // -> enum ImGuiDataType_ // Enum: A primary data type +typedef int ImGuiDir; // -> enum ImGuiDir_ // Enum: A cardinal direction +typedef int ImGuiMouseButton; // -> enum ImGuiMouseButton_ // Enum: A mouse button identifier (0=left, 1=right, 2=middle) +typedef int ImGuiMouseCursor; // -> enum ImGuiMouseCursor_ // Enum: A mouse cursor shape +typedef int ImGuiSortDirection; // -> enum ImGuiSortDirection_ // Enum: A sorting direction (ascending or descending) +typedef int ImGuiStyleVar; // -> enum ImGuiStyleVar_ // Enum: A variable identifier for styling +typedef int ImGuiTableBgTarget; // -> enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_ // Enum: A color target for TableSetBgColor() + +// Flags (declared as int for compatibility with old C++, to allow using as flags without overhead, and to not pollute the top of this file) +// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _central column_ below to find the actual flags/enum lists! +// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot. +// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments. +typedef int ImDrawFlags; // -> enum ImDrawFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList functions +typedef int ImDrawListFlags; // -> enum ImDrawListFlags_ // Flags: for ImDrawList instance +typedef int ImFontAtlasFlags; // -> enum ImFontAtlasFlags_ // Flags: for ImFontAtlas build +typedef int ImGuiBackendFlags; // -> enum ImGuiBackendFlags_ // Flags: for io.BackendFlags +typedef int ImGuiButtonFlags; // -> enum ImGuiButtonFlags_ // Flags: for InvisibleButton() +typedef int ImGuiColorEditFlags; // -> enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ // Flags: for ColorEdit4(), ColorPicker4() etc. +typedef int ImGuiConfigFlags; // -> enum ImGuiConfigFlags_ // Flags: for io.ConfigFlags +typedef int ImGuiComboFlags; // -> enum ImGuiComboFlags_ // Flags: for BeginCombo() +typedef int ImGuiDragDropFlags; // -> enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_ // Flags: for BeginDragDropSource(), AcceptDragDropPayload() +typedef int ImGuiFocusedFlags; // -> enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_ // Flags: for IsWindowFocused() +typedef int ImGuiHoveredFlags; // -> enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_ // Flags: for IsItemHovered(), IsWindowHovered() etc. +typedef int ImGuiInputTextFlags; // -> enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_ // Flags: for InputText(), InputTextMultiline() +typedef int ImGuiKeyChord; // -> ImGuiKey | ImGuiMod_XXX // Flags: for storage only for now: an ImGuiKey optionally OR-ed with one or more ImGuiMod_XXX values. +typedef int ImGuiPopupFlags; // -> enum ImGuiPopupFlags_ // Flags: for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen() +typedef int ImGuiSelectableFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_ // Flags: for Selectable() +typedef int ImGuiSliderFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSliderFlags_ // Flags: for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc. +typedef int ImGuiTabBarFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabBar() +typedef int ImGuiTabItemFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTabItem() +typedef int ImGuiTableFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableFlags_ // Flags: For BeginTable() +typedef int ImGuiTableColumnFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_// Flags: For TableSetupColumn() +typedef int ImGuiTableRowFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_ // Flags: For TableNextRow() +typedef int ImGuiTreeNodeFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ // Flags: for TreeNode(), TreeNodeEx(), CollapsingHeader() +typedef int ImGuiViewportFlags; // -> enum ImGuiViewportFlags_ // Flags: for ImGuiViewport +typedef int ImGuiWindowFlags; // -> enum ImGuiWindowFlags_ // Flags: for Begin(), BeginChild() + +// ImTexture: user data for renderer backend to identify a texture [Compile-time configurable type] +// - To use something else than an opaque void* pointer: override with e.g. '#define ImTextureID MyTextureType*' in your imconfig.h file. +// - This can be whatever to you want it to be! read the FAQ about ImTextureID for details. +#ifndef ImTextureID +typedef void* ImTextureID; // Default: store a pointer or an integer fitting in a pointer (most renderer backends are ok with that) +#endif + +// ImDrawIdx: vertex index. [Compile-time configurable type] +// - To use 16-bit indices + allow large meshes: backend need to set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' and handle ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset (recommended). +// - To use 32-bit indices: override with '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' in your imconfig.h file. +#ifndef ImDrawIdx +typedef unsigned short ImDrawIdx; // Default: 16-bit (for maximum compatibility with renderer backends) +#endif + +// Scalar data types +typedef unsigned int ImGuiID;// A unique ID used by widgets (typically the result of hashing a stack of string) +typedef signed char ImS8; // 8-bit signed integer +typedef unsigned char ImU8; // 8-bit unsigned integer +typedef signed short ImS16; // 16-bit signed integer +typedef unsigned short ImU16; // 16-bit unsigned integer +typedef signed int ImS32; // 32-bit signed integer == int +typedef unsigned int ImU32; // 32-bit unsigned integer (often used to store packed colors) +typedef signed long long ImS64; // 64-bit signed integer +typedef unsigned long long ImU64; // 64-bit unsigned integer + +// Character types +// (we generally use UTF-8 encoded string in the API. This is storage specifically for a decoded character used for keyboard input and display) +typedef unsigned short ImWchar16; // A single decoded U16 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings. +typedef unsigned int ImWchar32; // A single decoded U32 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings. +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32 // ImWchar [configurable type: override in imconfig.h with '#define IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32' to support Unicode planes 1-16] +typedef ImWchar32 ImWchar; +#else +typedef ImWchar16 ImWchar; +#endif + +// Callback and functions types +typedef int (*ImGuiInputTextCallback)(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data); // Callback function for ImGui::InputText() +typedef void (*ImGunSizeCallback)(ImGunSizeCallbackData* data); // Callback function for ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() +typedef void* (*ImGuiMemAllocFunc)(size_t sz, void* user_data); // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions() +typedef void (*ImGuiMemFreeFunc)(void* ptr, void* user_data); // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions() + +// ImVec2: 2D vector used to store positions, sizes etc. [Compile-time configurable type] +// This is a frequently used type in the API. Consider using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA to create implicit cast from/to our preferred type. +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF +struct ImVec2 +{ + float x, y; + constexpr ImVec2() : x(0.0f), y(0.0f) { } + constexpr ImVec2(float _x, float _y) : x(_x), y(_y) { } + float& operator[] (size_t idx) { IM_ASSERT(idx == 0 || idx == 1); return ((float*)(void*)(char*)this)[idx]; } // We very rarely use this [] operator, so the assert overhead is fine. + float operator[] (size_t idx) const { IM_ASSERT(idx == 0 || idx == 1); return ((const float*)(const void*)(const char*)this)[idx]; } +#ifdef IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA + IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and ImVec2. +#endif +}; + +// ImVec4: 4D vector used to store clipping rectangles, colors etc. [Compile-time configurable type] +struct ImVec4 +{ + float x, y, z, w; + constexpr ImVec4() : x(0.0f), y(0.0f), z(0.0f), w(0.0f) { } + constexpr ImVec4(float _x, float _y, float _z, float _w) : x(_x), y(_y), z(_z), w(_w) { } +#ifdef IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA + IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and ImVec4. +#endif +}; +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions +// (Note that ImGui:: being a namespace, you can add extra ImGui:: functions in your own separate file. Please don't modify imgui source files!) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +namespace ImGui +{ + // Context creation and access + // - Each context create its own ImFontAtlas by default. You may instance one yourself and pass it to CreateContext() to share a font atlas between contexts. + // - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions() + // for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for details. + IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* CreateContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas = NULL); + IMGUI_API void DestroyContext(ImGuiContext* ctx = NULL); // NULL = destroy current context + IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* GetCurrentContext(); + IMGUI_API void SetCurrentContext(ImGuiContext* ctx); + + // Main + IMGUI_API ImGuiIO& GetIO(); // access the IO structure (mouse/keyboard/gamepad inputs, time, various configuration options/flags) + IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle& GetStyle(); // access the Style structure (colors, sizes). Always use PushStyleCol(), PushStyleVar() to modify style mid-frame! + IMGUI_API void NewFrame(); // start a new Dear ImGui frame, you can submit any command from this point until Render()/EndFrame(). + IMGUI_API void EndFrame(); // ends the Dear ImGui frame. automatically called by Render(). If you don't need to render data (skipping rendering) you may call EndFrame() without Render()... but you'll have wasted CPU already! If you don't need to render, better to not create any windows and not call NewFrame() at all! + IMGUI_API void Render(); // ends the Dear ImGui frame, finalize the draw data. You can then get call GetDrawData(). + IMGUI_API ImDrawData* GetDrawData(); // valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame(). this is what you have to render. + + // Demo, Debug, Information + IMGUI_API void ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Demo window. demonstrate most ImGui features. call this to learn about the library! try to make it always available in your application! + IMGUI_API void ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Metrics/Debugger window. display Dear ImGui internals: windows, draw commands, various internal state, etc. + IMGUI_API void ShowDebugLogWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Debug Log window. display a simplified log of important dear imgui events. + IMGUI_API void ShowStackToolWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create Stack Tool window. hover items with mouse to query information about the source of their unique ID. + IMGUI_API void ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open = NULL); // create About window. display Dear ImGui version, credits and build/system information. + IMGUI_API void ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref = NULL); // add style editor block (not a window). you can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare to, revert to and save to (else it uses the default style) + IMGUI_API bool ShowStyleSelector(const char* label); // add style selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the default styles. + IMGUI_API void ShowFontSelector(const char* label); // add font selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the loaded fonts. + IMGUI_API void ShowUserGuide(); // add basic help/info block (not a window): how to manipulate ImGui as an end-user (mouse/keyboard controls). + IMGUI_API const char* GetVersion(); // get the compiled version string e.g. "1.80 WIP" (essentially the value for IMGUI_VERSION from the compiled version of imgui.cpp) + + // Styles + IMGUI_API void StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // new, recommended style (default) + IMGUI_API void StyleColorsLight(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // best used with borders and a custom, thicker font + IMGUI_API void StyleColorsClassic(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // classic imgui style + + // Windows + // - Begin() = push window to the stack and start appending to it. End() = pop window from the stack. + // - Passing 'bool* p_open != NULL' shows a window-closing widget in the upper-right corner of the window, + // which clicking will set the boolean to false when clicked. + // - You may append multiple times to the same window during the same frame by calling Begin()/End() pairs multiple times. + // Some information such as 'flags' or 'p_open' will only be considered by the first call to Begin(). + // - Begin() return false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting + // anything to the window. Always call a matching End() for each Begin() call, regardless of its return value! + // [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu, + // BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function + // returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.] + // - Note that the bottom of window stack always contains a window called "Debug". + IMGUI_API bool Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void End(); + + // Child Windows + // - Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window. Child windows can embed their own child. + // - For each independent axis of 'size': ==0.0f: use remaining host window size / >0.0f: fixed size / <0.0f: use remaining window size minus abs(size) / Each axis can use a different mode, e.g. ImVec2(0,400). + // - BeginChild() returns false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting anything to the window. + // Always call a matching EndChild() for each BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value. + // [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu, + // BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function + // returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.] + IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void EndChild(); + + // Windows Utilities + // - 'current window' = the window we are appending into while inside a Begin()/End() block. 'next window' = next window we will Begin() into. + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowAppearing(); + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowCollapsed(); + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags=0); // is current window focused? or its root/child, depending on flags. see flags for options. + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags=0); // is current window hovered (and typically: not blocked by a popup/modal)? see flags for options. NB: If you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to imgui or to your app, you should use the 'io.WantCaptureMouse' boolean for that! Please read the FAQ! + IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetWindowDrawList(); // get draw list associated to the current window, to append your own drawing primitives + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowPos(); // get current window position in screen space (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using current layout pos instead, GetScreenCursorPos()) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowSize(); // get current window size (note: it is unlikely you need to use this. Consider using GetScreenCursorPos() and e.g. GetContentRegionAvail() instead) + IMGUI_API float GetWindowWidth(); // get current window width (shortcut for GetWindowSize().x) + IMGUI_API float GetWindowHeight(); // get current window height (shortcut for GetWindowSize().y) + + // Window manipulation + // - Prefer using SetNextXXX functions (before Begin) rather that SetXXX functions (after Begin). + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0, const ImVec2& pivot = ImVec2(0, 0)); // set next window position. call before Begin(). use pivot=(0.5f,0.5f) to center on given point, etc. + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis. call before Begin() + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGunSizeCallback custom_callback = NULL, void* custom_callback_data = NULL); // set next window size limits. use -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size. Sizes will be rounded down. Use callback to apply non-trivial programmatic constraints. + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size); // set next window content size (~ scrollable client area, which enforce the range of scrollbars). Not including window decorations (title bar, menu bar, etc.) nor WindowPadding. set an axis to 0.0f to leave it automatic. call before Begin() + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next window collapsed state. call before Begin() + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowFocus(); // set next window to be focused / top-most. call before Begin() + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowScroll(const ImVec2& scroll); // set next window scrolling value (use < 0.0f to not affect a given axis). + IMGUI_API void SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha); // set next window background color alpha. helper to easily override the Alpha component of ImGuiCol_WindowBg/ChildBg/PopupBg. you may also use ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground. + IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window position - call within Begin()/End(). prefer using SetNextWindowPos(), as this may incur tearing and side-effects. + IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window size - call within Begin()/End(). set to ImVec2(0, 0) to force an auto-fit. prefer using SetNextWindowSize(), as this may incur tearing and minor side-effects. + IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // (not recommended) set current window collapsed state. prefer using SetNextWindowCollapsed(). + IMGUI_API void SetWindowFocus(); // (not recommended) set current window to be focused / top-most. prefer using SetNextWindowFocus(). + IMGUI_API void SetWindowFontScale(float scale); // [OBSOLETE] set font scale. Adjust IO.FontGlobalScale if you want to scale all windows. This is an old API! For correct scaling, prefer to reload font + rebuild ImFontAtlas + call style.ScaleAllSizes(). + IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window position. + IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis. + IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set named window collapsed state + IMGUI_API void SetWindowFocus(const char* name); // set named window to be focused / top-most. use NULL to remove focus. + + // Content region + // - Retrieve available space from a given point. GetContentRegionAvail() is frequently useful. + // - Those functions are bound to be redesigned (they are confusing, incomplete and the Min/Max return values are in local window coordinates which increases confusion) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetContentRegionAvail(); // == GetContentRegionMax() - GetCursorPos() + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetContentRegionMax(); // current content boundaries (typically window boundaries including scrolling, or current column boundaries), in windows coordinates + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowContentRegionMin(); // content boundaries min for the full window (roughly (0,0)-Scroll), in window coordinates + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetWindowContentRegionMax(); // content boundaries max for the full window (roughly (0,0)+Size-Scroll) where Size can be overridden with SetNextWindowContentSize(), in window coordinates + + // Windows Scrolling + // - Any change of Scroll will be applied at the beginning of next frame in the first call to Begin(). + // - You may instead use SetNextWindowScroll() prior to calling Begin() to avoid this delay, as an alternative to using SetScrollX()/SetScrollY(). + IMGUI_API float GetScrollX(); // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()] + IMGUI_API float GetScrollY(); // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()] + IMGUI_API void SetScrollX(float scroll_x); // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()] + IMGUI_API void SetScrollY(float scroll_y); // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()] + IMGUI_API float GetScrollMaxX(); // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.x - WindowSize.x - DecorationsSize.x + IMGUI_API float GetScrollMaxY(); // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.y - WindowSize.y - DecorationsSize.y + IMGUI_API void SetScrollHereX(float center_x_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_x_ratio=0.0: left, 0.5: center, 1.0: right. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead. + IMGUI_API void SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_y_ratio=0.0: top, 0.5: center, 1.0: bottom. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead. + IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosX(float local_x, float center_x_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position. + IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosY(float local_y, float center_y_ratio = 0.5f); // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position. + + // Parameters stacks (shared) + IMGUI_API void PushFont(ImFont* font); // use NULL as a shortcut to push default font + IMGUI_API void PopFont(); + IMGUI_API void PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col); // modify a style color. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame(). + IMGUI_API void PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col); + IMGUI_API void PopStyleColor(int count = 1); + IMGUI_API void PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val); // modify a style float variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame(). + IMGUI_API void PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val); // modify a style ImVec2 variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame(). + IMGUI_API void PopStyleVar(int count = 1); + IMGUI_API void PushTabStop(bool tab_stop); // == tab stop enable. Allow focusing using TAB/Shift-TAB, enabled by default but you can disable it for certain widgets + IMGUI_API void PopTabStop(); + IMGUI_API void PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat); // in 'repeat' mode, Button*() functions return repeated true in a typematic manner (using io.KeyRepeatDelay/io.KeyRepeatRate setting). Note that you can call IsItemActive() after any Button() to tell if the button is held in the current frame. + IMGUI_API void PopButtonRepeat(); + + // Parameters stacks (current window) + IMGUI_API void PushItemWidth(float item_width); // push width of items for common large "item+label" widgets. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side). + IMGUI_API void PopItemWidth(); + IMGUI_API void SetNextItemWidth(float item_width); // set width of the _next_ common large "item+label" widget. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side) + IMGUI_API float CalcItemWidth(); // width of item given pushed settings and current cursor position. NOT necessarily the width of last item unlike most 'Item' functions. + IMGUI_API void PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_local_pos_x = 0.0f); // push word-wrapping position for Text*() commands. < 0.0f: no wrapping; 0.0f: wrap to end of window (or column); > 0.0f: wrap at 'wrap_pos_x' position in window local space + IMGUI_API void PopTextWrapPos(); + + // Style read access + // - Use the ShowStyleEditor() function to interactively see/edit the colors. + IMGUI_API ImFont* GetFont(); // get current font + IMGUI_API float GetFontSize(); // get current font size (= height in pixels) of current font with current scale applied + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetFontTexUvWhitePixel(); // get UV coordinate for a while pixel, useful to draw custom shapes via the ImDrawList API + IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul = 1.0f); // retrieve given style color with style alpha applied and optional extra alpha multiplier, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList + IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col); // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList + IMGUI_API ImU32 GetColorU32(ImU32 col); // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList + IMGUI_API const ImVec4& GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx); // retrieve style color as stored in ImGuiStyle structure. use to feed back into PushStyleColor(), otherwise use GetColorU32() to get style color with style alpha baked in. + + // Cursor / Layout + // - By "cursor" we mean the current output position. + // - The typical widget behavior is to output themselves at the current cursor position, then move the cursor one line down. + // - You can call SameLine() between widgets to undo the last carriage return and output at the right of the preceding widget. + // - Attention! We currently have inconsistencies between window-local and absolute positions we will aim to fix with future API: + // Window-local coordinates: SameLine(), GetCursorPos(), SetCursorPos(), GetCursorStartPos(), GetContentRegionMax(), GetWindowContentRegion*(), PushTextWrapPos() + // Absolute coordinate: GetCursorScreenPos(), SetCursorScreenPos(), all ImDrawList:: functions. + IMGUI_API void Separator(); // separator, generally horizontal. inside a menu bar or in horizontal layout mode, this becomes a vertical separator. + IMGUI_API void SameLine(float offset_from_start_x=0.0f, float spacing=-1.0f); // call between widgets or groups to layout them horizontally. X position given in window coordinates. + IMGUI_API void NewLine(); // undo a SameLine() or force a new line when in a horizontal-layout context. + IMGUI_API void Spacing(); // add vertical spacing. + IMGUI_API void Dummy(const ImVec2& size); // add a dummy item of given size. unlike InvisibleButton(), Dummy() won't take the mouse click or be navigable into. + IMGUI_API void Indent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position toward the right, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0 + IMGUI_API void Unindent(float indent_w = 0.0f); // move content position back to the left, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0 + IMGUI_API void BeginGroup(); // lock horizontal starting position + IMGUI_API void EndGroup(); // unlock horizontal starting position + capture the whole group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorPos(); // cursor position in window coordinates (relative to window position) + IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosX(); // (some functions are using window-relative coordinates, such as: GetCursorPos, GetCursorStartPos, GetContentRegionMax, GetWindowContentRegion* etc. + IMGUI_API float GetCursorPosY(); // other functions such as GetCursorScreenPos or everything in ImDrawList:: + IMGUI_API void SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos); // are using the main, absolute coordinate system. + IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosX(float local_x); // GetWindowPos() + GetCursorPos() == GetCursorScreenPos() etc.) + IMGUI_API void SetCursorPosY(float local_y); // + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorStartPos(); // initial cursor position in window coordinates + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetCursorScreenPos(); // cursor position in absolute coordinates (useful to work with ImDrawList API). generally top-left == GetMainViewport()->Pos == (0,0) in single viewport mode, and bottom-right == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size == io.DisplaySize in single-viewport mode. + IMGUI_API void SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos); // cursor position in absolute coordinates + IMGUI_API void AlignTextToFramePadding(); // vertically align upcoming text baseline to FramePadding.y so that it will align properly to regularly framed items (call if you have text on a line before a framed item) + IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeight(); // ~ FontSize + IMGUI_API float GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of text) + IMGUI_API float GetFrameHeight(); // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2 + IMGUI_API float GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2 + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of framed widgets) + + // ID stack/scopes + // Read the FAQ (docs/FAQ.md or http://dearimgui.com/faq) for more details about how ID are handled in dear imgui. + // - Those questions are answered and impacted by understanding of the ID stack system: + // - "Q: Why is my widget not reacting when I click on it?" + // - "Q: How can I have widgets with an empty label?" + // - "Q: How can I have multiple widgets with the same label?" + // - Short version: ID are hashes of the entire ID stack. If you are creating widgets in a loop you most likely + // want to push a unique identifier (e.g. object pointer, loop index) to uniquely differentiate them. + // - You can also use the "Label##foobar" syntax within widget label to distinguish them from each others. + // - In this header file we use the "label"/"name" terminology to denote a string that will be displayed + used as an ID, + // whereas "str_id" denote a string that is only used as an ID and not normally displayed. + IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string). + IMGUI_API void PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end); // push string into the ID stack (will hash string). + IMGUI_API void PushID(const void* ptr_id); // push pointer into the ID stack (will hash pointer). + IMGUI_API void PushID(int int_id); // push integer into the ID stack (will hash integer). + IMGUI_API void PopID(); // pop from the ID stack. + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const char* str_id); // calculate unique ID (hash of whole ID stack + given parameter). e.g. if you want to query into ImGuiStorage yourself + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end); + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetID(const void* ptr_id); + + // Widgets: Text + IMGUI_API void TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // raw text without formatting. Roughly equivalent to Text("%s", text) but: A) doesn't require null terminated string if 'text_end' is specified, B) it's faster, no memory copy is done, no buffer size limits, recommended for long chunks of text. + IMGUI_API void Text(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // formatted text + IMGUI_API void TextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + IMGUI_API void TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor(); + IMGUI_API void TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2); + IMGUI_API void TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor(); + IMGUI_API void TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + IMGUI_API void TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushTextWrapPos(0.0f); Text(fmt, ...); PopTextWrapPos();. Note that this won't work on an auto-resizing window if there's no other widgets to extend the window width, yoy may need to set a size using SetNextWindowSize(). + IMGUI_API void TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + IMGUI_API void LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // display text+label aligned the same way as value+label widgets + IMGUI_API void LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2); + IMGUI_API void BulletText(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for Bullet()+Text() + IMGUI_API void BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + IMGUI_API void SeparatorText(const char* label); // currently: formatted text with an horizontal line + + // Widgets: Main + // - Most widgets return true when the value has been changed or when pressed/selected + // - You may also use one of the many IsItemXXX functions (e.g. IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.) to query widget state. + IMGUI_API bool Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // button + IMGUI_API bool SmallButton(const char* label); // button with FramePadding=(0,0) to easily embed within text + IMGUI_API bool InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); // flexible button behavior without the visuals, frequently useful to build custom behaviors using the public api (along with IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.) + IMGUI_API bool ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir); // square button with an arrow shape + IMGUI_API bool Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v); + IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, int* flags, int flags_value); + IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value); + IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char* label, bool active); // use with e.g. if (RadioButton("one", my_value==1)) { my_value = 1; } + IMGUI_API bool RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button); // shortcut to handle the above pattern when value is an integer + IMGUI_API void ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0), const char* overlay = NULL); + IMGUI_API void Bullet(); // draw a small circle + keep the cursor on the same line. advance cursor x position by GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(), same distance that TreeNode() uses + + // Widgets: Images + // - Read about ImTextureID here: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Image-Loading-and-Displaying-Examples + IMGUI_API void Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1), const ImVec4& border_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0)); + IMGUI_API bool ImageButton(const char* str_id, ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1)); + + // Widgets: Combo Box (Dropdown) + // - The BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() items. + // - The old Combo() api are helpers over BeginCombo()/EndCombo() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analogous to how ListBox are created. + IMGUI_API bool BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void EndCombo(); // only call EndCombo() if BeginCombo() returns true! + IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1); + IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1); // Separate items with \0 within a string, end item-list with \0\0. e.g. "One\0Two\0Three\0" + IMGUI_API bool Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool(*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1); + + // Widgets: Drag Sliders + // - CTRL+Click on any drag box to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp. + // - For all the Float2/Float3/Float4/Int2/Int3/Int4 versions of every function, note that a 'float v[X]' function argument is the same as 'float* v', + // the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can pass address of your first element out of a contiguous set, e.g. &myvector.x + // - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc. + // - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d"). + // - Speed are per-pixel of mouse movement (v_speed=0.2f: mouse needs to move by 5 pixels to increase value by 1). For gamepad/keyboard navigation, minimum speed is Max(v_speed, minimum_step_at_given_precision). + // - Use v_min < v_max to clamp edits to given limits. Note that CTRL+Click manual input can override those limits if ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is not used. + // - Use v_max = FLT_MAX / INT_MAX etc to avoid clamping to a maximum, same with v_min = -FLT_MAX / INT_MIN to avoid clamping to a minimum. + // - We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them. + // - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are DragXXX() function signatures that take a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0' argument. + // If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 + IMGUI_API bool DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound + IMGUI_API bool DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", const char* format_max = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound + IMGUI_API bool DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", const char* format_max = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed = 1.0f, const void* p_min = NULL, const void* p_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed = 1.0f, const void* p_min = NULL, const void* p_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + + // Widgets: Regular Sliders + // - CTRL+Click on any slider to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp. + // - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc. + // - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d"). + // - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are SliderXXX() function signatures that take a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0' argument. + // If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 + IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); // adjust format to decorate the value with a prefix or a suffix for in-slider labels or unit display. + IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min = -360.0f, float v_degrees_max = +360.0f, const char* format = "%.0f deg", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0); + + // Widgets: Input with Keyboard + // - If you want to use InputText() with std::string or any custom dynamic string type, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h and comments in imgui_demo.cpp. + // - Most of the ImGuiInputTextFlags flags are only useful for InputText() and not for InputFloatX, InputIntX, InputDouble etc. + IMGUI_API bool InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL); + IMGUI_API bool InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL); + IMGUI_API bool InputTextWithHint(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL); + IMGUI_API bool InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step = 0.0f, float step_fast = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step = 1, int step_fast = 100, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step = 0.0, double step_fast = 0.0, const char* format = "%.6f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_step = NULL, const void* p_step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_step = NULL, const void* p_step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0); + + // Widgets: Color Editor/Picker (tip: the ColorEdit* functions have a little color square that can be left-clicked to open a picker, and right-clicked to open an option menu.) + // - Note that in C++ a 'float v[X]' function argument is the _same_ as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. + // - You can pass the address of a first float element out of a contiguous structure, e.g. &myvector.x + IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, const float* ref_col = NULL); + IMGUI_API bool ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // display a color square/button, hover for details, return true when pressed. + IMGUI_API void SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags); // initialize current options (generally on application startup) if you want to select a default format, picker type, etc. User will be able to change many settings, unless you pass the _NoOptions flag to your calls. + + // Widgets: Trees + // - TreeNode functions return true when the node is open, in which case you need to also call TreePop() when you are finished displaying the tree node contents. + IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char* label); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // helper variation to easily decorelate the id from the displayed string. Read the FAQ about why and how to use ID. to align arbitrary text at the same level as a TreeNode() you can use Bullet(). + IMGUI_API bool TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); // " + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3); + IMGUI_API void TreePush(const char* str_id); // ~ Indent()+PushId(). Already called by TreeNode() when returning true, but you can call TreePush/TreePop yourself if desired. + IMGUI_API void TreePush(const void* ptr_id); // " + IMGUI_API void TreePop(); // ~ Unindent()+PopId() + IMGUI_API float GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(); // horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode*() or Bullet() == (g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x*2) for a regular unframed TreeNode + IMGUI_API bool CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // if returning 'true' the header is open. doesn't indent nor push on ID stack. user doesn't have to call TreePop(). + IMGUI_API bool CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_visible, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // when 'p_visible != NULL': if '*p_visible==true' display an additional small close button on upper right of the header which will set the bool to false when clicked, if '*p_visible==false' don't display the header. + IMGUI_API void SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state. + + // Widgets: Selectables + // - A selectable highlights when hovered, and can display another color when selected. + // - Neighbors selectable extend their highlight bounds in order to leave no gap between them. This is so a series of selected Selectable appear contiguous. + IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char* label, bool selected = false, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool selected" carry the selection state (read-only). Selectable() is clicked is returns true so you can modify your selection state. size.x==0.0: use remaining width, size.x>0.0: specify width. size.y==0.0: use label height, size.y>0.0: specify height + IMGUI_API bool Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool* p_selected" point to the selection state (read-write), as a convenient helper. + + // Widgets: List Boxes + // - This is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild/EndChild with some stylistic changes. + // - The BeginListBox()/EndListBox() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() or any items. + // - The simplified/old ListBox() api are helpers over BeginListBox()/EndListBox() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analoguous to how Combos are created. + // - Choose frame width: size.x > 0.0f: custom / size.x < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: right-align / size.x = 0.0f (default): use current ItemWidth + // - Choose frame height: size.y > 0.0f: custom / size.y < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: bottom-align / size.y = 0.0f (default): arbitrary default height which can fit ~7 items + IMGUI_API bool BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // open a framed scrolling region + IMGUI_API void EndListBox(); // only call EndListBox() if BeginListBox() returned true! + IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items = -1); + IMGUI_API bool ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1); + + // Widgets: Data Plotting + // - Consider using ImPlot (https://github.com/epezent/implot) which is much better! + IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float)); + IMGUI_API void PlotLines(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0)); + IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float)); + IMGUI_API void PlotHistogram(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0)); + + // Widgets: Value() Helpers. + // - Those are merely shortcut to calling Text() with a format string. Output single value in "name: value" format (tip: freely declare more in your code to handle your types. you can add functions to the ImGui namespace) + IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, bool b); + IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, int v); + IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v); + IMGUI_API void Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format = NULL); + + // Widgets: Menus + // - Use BeginMenuBar() on a window ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar to append to its menu bar. + // - Use BeginMainMenuBar() to create a menu bar at the top of the screen and append to it. + // - Use BeginMenu() to create a menu. You can call BeginMenu() multiple time with the same identifier to append more items to it. + // - Not that MenuItem() keyboardshortcuts are displayed as a convenience but _not processed_ by Dear ImGui at the moment. + IMGUI_API bool BeginMenuBar(); // append to menu-bar of current window (requires ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar flag set on parent window). + IMGUI_API void EndMenuBar(); // only call EndMenuBar() if BeginMenuBar() returns true! + IMGUI_API bool BeginMainMenuBar(); // create and append to a full screen menu-bar. + IMGUI_API void EndMainMenuBar(); // only call EndMainMenuBar() if BeginMainMenuBar() returns true! + IMGUI_API bool BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled = true); // create a sub-menu entry. only call EndMenu() if this returns true! + IMGUI_API void EndMenu(); // only call EndMenu() if BeginMenu() returns true! + IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut = NULL, bool selected = false, bool enabled = true); // return true when activated. + IMGUI_API bool MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled = true); // return true when activated + toggle (*p_selected) if p_selected != NULL + + // Tooltips + // - Tooltips are windows following the mouse. They do not take focus away. + // - A tooltip window can contain items of any types. SetTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (BeginTooltip()) { Text(...); EndTooltip(); }' idiom. + IMGUI_API bool BeginTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window. + IMGUI_API void EndTooltip(); // only call EndTooltip() if BeginTooltip()/BeginItemTooltip() returns true! + IMGUI_API void SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip. Often used after a ImGui::IsItemHovered() check. Override any previous call to SetTooltip(). + IMGUI_API void SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + + // Tooltips: helpers for showing a tooltip when hovering an item + // - BeginItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip) && BeginTooltip())' idiom. + // - SetItemTooltip() is a shortcut for the 'if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip)) { SetTooltip(...); }' idiom. + // - Where 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip' itself is a shortcut to use 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' depending on active input type. For mouse it defaults to 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort'. + IMGUI_API bool BeginItemTooltip(); // begin/append a tooltip window if preceding item was hovered. + IMGUI_API void SetItemTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // set a text-only tooltip if preceeding item was hovered. override any previous call to SetTooltip(). + IMGUI_API void SetItemTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + + // Popups, Modals + // - They block normal mouse hovering detection (and therefore most mouse interactions) behind them. + // - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE. + // - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally instead of being held by the programmer as we are used to with regular Begin*() calls. + // - The 3 properties above are related: we need to retain popup visibility state in the library because popups may be closed as any time. + // - You can bypass the hovering restriction by using ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup when calling IsItemHovered() or IsWindowHovered(). + // - IMPORTANT: Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID stack, so OpenPopup and BeginPopup generally needs to be at the same level of the stack. + // This is sometimes leading to confusing mistakes. May rework this in the future. + + // Popups: begin/end functions + // - BeginPopup(): query popup state, if open start appending into the window. Call EndPopup() afterwards. ImGuiWindowFlags are forwarded to the window. + // - BeginPopupModal(): block every interaction behind the window, cannot be closed by user, add a dimming background, has a title bar. + IMGUI_API bool BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the popup is open, and you can start outputting to it. + IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the modal is open, and you can start outputting to it. + IMGUI_API void EndPopup(); // only call EndPopup() if BeginPopupXXX() returns true! + + // Popups: open/close functions + // - OpenPopup(): set popup state to open. ImGuiPopupFlags are available for opening options. + // - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE. + // - CloseCurrentPopup(): use inside the BeginPopup()/EndPopup() scope to close manually. + // - CloseCurrentPopup() is called by default by Selectable()/MenuItem() when activated (FIXME: need some options). + // - Use ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup to avoid opening a popup if there's already one at the same level. This is equivalent to e.g. testing for !IsAnyPopupOpen() prior to OpenPopup(). + // - Use IsWindowAppearing() after BeginPopup() to tell if a window just opened. + // - IMPORTANT: Notice that for OpenPopupOnItemClick() we exceptionally default flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility with older API taking 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter + IMGUI_API void OpenPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0); // call to mark popup as open (don't call every frame!). + IMGUI_API void OpenPopup(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0); // id overload to facilitate calling from nested stacks + IMGUI_API void OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // helper to open popup when clicked on last item. Default to ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight == 1. (note: actually triggers on the mouse _released_ event to be consistent with popup behaviors) + IMGUI_API void CloseCurrentPopup(); // manually close the popup we have begin-ed into. + + // Popups: open+begin combined functions helpers + // - Helpers to do OpenPopup+BeginPopup where the Open action is triggered by e.g. hovering an item and right-clicking. + // - They are convenient to easily create context menus, hence the name. + // - IMPORTANT: Notice that BeginPopupContextXXX takes ImGuiPopupFlags just like OpenPopup() and unlike BeginPopup(). For full consistency, we may add ImGuiWindowFlags to the BeginPopupContextXXX functions in the future. + // - IMPORTANT: Notice that we exceptionally default their flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility with older API taking 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter, so if you add other flags remember to re-add the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight. + IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // open+begin popup when clicked on last item. Use str_id==NULL to associate the popup to previous item. If you want to use that on a non-interactive item such as Text() you need to pass in an explicit ID here. read comments in .cpp! + IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1);// open+begin popup when clicked on current window. + IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1); // open+begin popup when clicked in void (where there are no windows). + + // Popups: query functions + // - IsPopupOpen(): return true if the popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack. + // - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId: return true if any popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack. + // - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId + ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel: return true if any popup is open. + IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags flags = 0); // return true if the popup is open. + + // Tables + // - Full-featured replacement for old Columns API. + // - See Demo->Tables for demo code. See top of imgui_tables.cpp for general commentary. + // - See ImGuiTableFlags_ and ImGuiTableColumnFlags_ enums for a description of available flags. + // The typical call flow is: + // - 1. Call BeginTable(), early out if returning false. + // - 2. Optionally call TableSetupColumn() to submit column name/flags/defaults. + // - 3. Optionally call TableSetupScrollFreeze() to request scroll freezing of columns/rows. + // - 4. Optionally call TableHeadersRow() to submit a header row. Names are pulled from TableSetupColumn() data. + // - 5. Populate contents: + // - In most situations you can use TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex(N) to start appending into a column. + // - If you are using tables as a sort of grid, where every column is holding the same type of contents, + // you may prefer using TableNextColumn() instead of TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex(). + // TableNextColumn() will automatically wrap-around into the next row if needed. + // - IMPORTANT: Comparatively to the old Columns() API, we need to call TableNextColumn() for the first column! + // - Summary of possible call flow: + // -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + // TableNextRow() -> TableSetColumnIndex(0) -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableSetColumnIndex(1) -> Text("Hello 1") // OK + // TableNextRow() -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 1") // OK + // TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn() -> Text("Hello 1") // OK: TableNextColumn() automatically gets to next row! + // TableNextRow() -> Text("Hello 0") // Not OK! Missing TableSetColumnIndex() or TableNextColumn()! Text will not appear! + // -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + // - 5. Call EndTable() + IMGUI_API bool BeginTable(const char* str_id, int column, ImGuiTableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), float inner_width = 0.0f); + IMGUI_API void EndTable(); // only call EndTable() if BeginTable() returns true! + IMGUI_API void TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags row_flags = 0, float min_row_height = 0.0f); // append into the first cell of a new row. + IMGUI_API bool TableNextColumn(); // append into the next column (or first column of next row if currently in last column). Return true when column is visible. + IMGUI_API bool TableSetColumnIndex(int column_n); // append into the specified column. Return true when column is visible. + + // Tables: Headers & Columns declaration + // - Use TableSetupColumn() to specify label, resizing policy, default width/weight, id, various other flags etc. + // - Use TableHeadersRow() to create a header row and automatically submit a TableHeader() for each column. + // Headers are required to perform: reordering, sorting, and opening the context menu. + // The context menu can also be made available in columns body using ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody. + // - You may manually submit headers using TableNextRow() + TableHeader() calls, but this is only useful in + // some advanced use cases (e.g. adding custom widgets in header row). + // - Use TableSetupScrollFreeze() to lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled. + IMGUI_API void TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = 0, float init_width_or_weight = 0.0f, ImGuiID user_id = 0); + IMGUI_API void TableSetupScrollFreeze(int cols, int rows); // lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled. + IMGUI_API void TableHeadersRow(); // submit all headers cells based on data provided to TableSetupColumn() + submit context menu + IMGUI_API void TableHeader(const char* label); // submit one header cell manually (rarely used) + + // Tables: Sorting & Miscellaneous functions + // - Sorting: call TableGetSortSpecs() to retrieve latest sort specs for the table. NULL when not sorting. + // When 'sort_specs->SpecsDirty == true' you should sort your data. It will be true when sorting specs have + // changed since last call, or the first time. Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting, + // else you may wastefully sort your data every frame! + // - Functions args 'int column_n' treat the default value of -1 as the same as passing the current column index. + IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSortSpecs* TableGetSortSpecs(); // get latest sort specs for the table (NULL if not sorting). Lifetime: don't hold on this pointer over multiple frames or past any subsequent call to BeginTable(). + IMGUI_API int TableGetColumnCount(); // return number of columns (value passed to BeginTable) + IMGUI_API int TableGetColumnIndex(); // return current column index. + IMGUI_API int TableGetRowIndex(); // return current row index. + IMGUI_API const char* TableGetColumnName(int column_n = -1); // return "" if column didn't have a name declared by TableSetupColumn(). Pass -1 to use current column. + IMGUI_API ImGuiTableColumnFlags TableGetColumnFlags(int column_n = -1); // return column flags so you can query their Enabled/Visible/Sorted/Hovered status flags. Pass -1 to use current column. + IMGUI_API void TableSetColumnEnabled(int column_n, bool v);// change user accessible enabled/disabled state of a column. Set to false to hide the column. User can use the context menu to change this themselves (right-click in headers, or right-click in columns body with ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody) + IMGUI_API void TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget target, ImU32 color, int column_n = -1); // change the color of a cell, row, or column. See ImGuiTableBgTarget_ flags for details. + + // Legacy Columns API (prefer using Tables!) + // - You can also use SameLine(pos_x) to mimic simplified columns. + IMGUI_API void Columns(int count = 1, const char* id = NULL, bool border = true); + IMGUI_API void NextColumn(); // next column, defaults to current row or next row if the current row is finished + IMGUI_API int GetColumnIndex(); // get current column index + IMGUI_API float GetColumnWidth(int column_index = -1); // get column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column + IMGUI_API void SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width); // set column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column + IMGUI_API float GetColumnOffset(int column_index = -1); // get position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column, otherwise 0..GetColumnsCount() inclusive. column 0 is typically 0.0f + IMGUI_API void SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset_x); // set position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column + IMGUI_API int GetColumnsCount(); + + // Tab Bars, Tabs + // - Note: Tabs are automatically created by the docking system (when in 'docking' branch). Use this to create tab bars/tabs yourself. + IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags = 0); // create and append into a TabBar + IMGUI_API void EndTabBar(); // only call EndTabBar() if BeginTabBar() returns true! + IMGUI_API bool BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0); // create a Tab. Returns true if the Tab is selected. + IMGUI_API void EndTabItem(); // only call EndTabItem() if BeginTabItem() returns true! + IMGUI_API bool TabItemButton(const char* label, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0); // create a Tab behaving like a button. return true when clicked. cannot be selected in the tab bar. + IMGUI_API void SetTabItemClosed(const char* tab_or_docked_window_label); // notify TabBar or Docking system of a closed tab/window ahead (useful to reduce visual flicker on reorderable tab bars). For tab-bar: call after BeginTabBar() and before Tab submissions. Otherwise call with a window name. + + // Logging/Capture + // - All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard. By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging. + IMGUI_API void LogToTTY(int auto_open_depth = -1); // start logging to tty (stdout) + IMGUI_API void LogToFile(int auto_open_depth = -1, const char* filename = NULL); // start logging to file + IMGUI_API void LogToClipboard(int auto_open_depth = -1); // start logging to OS clipboard + IMGUI_API void LogFinish(); // stop logging (close file, etc.) + IMGUI_API void LogButtons(); // helper to display buttons for logging to tty/file/clipboard + IMGUI_API void LogText(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); // pass text data straight to log (without being displayed) + IMGUI_API void LogTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + + // Drag and Drop + // - On source items, call BeginDragDropSource(), if it returns true also call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource(). + // - On target candidates, call BeginDragDropTarget(), if it returns true also call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget(). + // - If you stop calling BeginDragDropSource() the payload is preserved however it won't have a preview tooltip (we currently display a fallback "..." tooltip, see #1725) + // - An item can be both drag source and drop target. + IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // call after submitting an item which may be dragged. when this return true, you can call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource() + IMGUI_API bool SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t sz, ImGuiCond cond = 0); // type is a user defined string of maximum 32 characters. Strings starting with '_' are reserved for dear imgui internal types. Data is copied and held by imgui. Return true when payload has been accepted. + IMGUI_API void EndDragDropSource(); // only call EndDragDropSource() if BeginDragDropSource() returns true! + IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTarget(); // call after submitting an item that may receive a payload. If this returns true, you can call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget() + IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0); // accept contents of a given type. If ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery is set you can peek into the payload before the mouse button is released. + IMGUI_API void EndDragDropTarget(); // only call EndDragDropTarget() if BeginDragDropTarget() returns true! + IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload* GetDragDropPayload(); // peek directly into the current payload from anywhere. may return NULL. use ImGuiPayload::IsDataType() to test for the payload type. + + // Disabling [BETA API] + // - Disable all user interactions and dim items visuals (applying style.DisabledAlpha over current colors) + // - Those can be nested but it cannot be used to enable an already disabled section (a single BeginDisabled(true) in the stack is enough to keep everything disabled) + // - BeginDisabled(false) essentially does nothing useful but is provided to facilitate use of boolean expressions. If you can avoid calling BeginDisabled(False)/EndDisabled() best to avoid it. + IMGUI_API void BeginDisabled(bool disabled = true); + IMGUI_API void EndDisabled(); + + // Clipping + // - Mouse hovering is affected by ImGui::PushClipRect() calls, unlike direct calls to ImDrawList::PushClipRect() which are render only. + IMGUI_API void PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect); + IMGUI_API void PopClipRect(); + + // Focus, Activation + // - Prefer using "SetItemDefaultFocus()" over "if (IsWindowAppearing()) SetScrollHereY()" when applicable to signify "this is the default item" + IMGUI_API void SetItemDefaultFocus(); // make last item the default focused item of a window. + IMGUI_API void SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset = 0); // focus keyboard on the next widget. Use positive 'offset' to access sub components of a multiple component widget. Use -1 to access previous widget. + + // Overlapping mode + IMGUI_API void SetNextItemAllowOverlap(); // allow next item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. Useful with invisible buttons, selectable, treenode covering an area where subsequent items may need to be added. Note that both Selectable() and TreeNode() have dedicated flags doing this. + + // Item/Widgets Utilities and Query Functions + // - Most of the functions are referring to the previous Item that has been submitted. + // - See Demo Window under "Widgets->Querying Status" for an interactive visualization of most of those functions. + IMGUI_API bool IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags = 0); // is the last item hovered? (and usable, aka not blocked by a popup, etc.). See ImGuiHoveredFlags for more options. + IMGUI_API bool IsItemActive(); // is the last item active? (e.g. button being held, text field being edited. This will continuously return true while holding mouse button on an item. Items that don't interact will always return false) + IMGUI_API bool IsItemFocused(); // is the last item focused for keyboard/gamepad navigation? + IMGUI_API bool IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button = 0); // is the last item hovered and mouse clicked on? (**) == IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered()Important. (**) this is NOT equivalent to the behavior of e.g. Button(). Read comments in function definition. + IMGUI_API bool IsItemVisible(); // is the last item visible? (items may be out of sight because of clipping/scrolling) + IMGUI_API bool IsItemEdited(); // did the last item modify its underlying value this frame? or was pressed? This is generally the same as the "bool" return value of many widgets. + IMGUI_API bool IsItemActivated(); // was the last item just made active (item was previously inactive). + IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivated(); // was the last item just made inactive (item was previously active). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that require continuous editing. + IMGUI_API bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); // was the last item just made inactive and made a value change when it was active? (e.g. Slider/Drag moved). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that require continuous editing. Note that you may get false positives (some widgets such as Combo()/ListBox()/Selectable() will return true even when clicking an already selected item). + IMGUI_API bool IsItemToggledOpen(); // was the last item open state toggled? set by TreeNode(). + IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemHovered(); // is any item hovered? + IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemActive(); // is any item active? + IMGUI_API bool IsAnyItemFocused(); // is any item focused? + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetItemID(); // get ID of last item (~~ often same ImGui::GetID(label) beforehand) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMin(); // get upper-left bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectMax(); // get lower-right bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetItemRectSize(); // get size of last item + + // Viewports + // - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows. + // - In 'docking' branch with multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports. + // - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode. + IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport* GetMainViewport(); // return primary/default viewport. This can never be NULL. + + // Background/Foreground Draw Lists + IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetBackgroundDrawList(); // this draw list will be the first rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text behind dear imgui contents. + IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetForegroundDrawList(); // this draw list will be the last rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text over dear imgui contents. + + // Miscellaneous Utilities + IMGUI_API bool IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size); // test if rectangle (of given size, starting from cursor position) is visible / not clipped. + IMGUI_API bool IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max); // test if rectangle (in screen space) is visible / not clipped. to perform coarse clipping on user's side. + IMGUI_API double GetTime(); // get global imgui time. incremented by io.DeltaTime every frame. + IMGUI_API int GetFrameCount(); // get global imgui frame count. incremented by 1 every frame. + IMGUI_API ImDrawListSharedData* GetDrawListSharedData(); // you may use this when creating your own ImDrawList instances. + IMGUI_API const char* GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx); // get a string corresponding to the enum value (for display, saving, etc.). + IMGUI_API void SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage); // replace current window storage with our own (if you want to manipulate it yourself, typically clear subsection of it) + IMGUI_API ImGuiStorage* GetStateStorage(); + IMGUI_API bool BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame + IMGUI_API void EndChildFrame(); // always call EndChildFrame() regardless of BeginChildFrame() return values (which indicates a collapsed/clipped window) + + // Text Utilities + IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_double_hash = false, float wrap_width = -1.0f); + + // Color Utilities + IMGUI_API ImVec4 ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in); + IMGUI_API ImU32 ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4& in); + IMGUI_API void ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v); + IMGUI_API void ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float& out_r, float& out_g, float& out_b); + + // Inputs Utilities: Keyboard/Mouse/Gamepad + // - the ImGuiKey enum contains all possible keyboard, mouse and gamepad inputs (e.g. ImGuiKey_A, ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp...). + // - before v1.87, we used ImGuiKey to carry native/user indices as defined by each backends. About use of those legacy ImGuiKey values: + // - without IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO (legacy support): you can still use your legacy native/user indices (< 512) according to how your backend/engine stored them in io.KeysDown[], but need to cast them to ImGuiKey. + // - with IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO (this is the way forward): any use of ImGuiKey will assert with key < 512. GetKeyIndex() is pass-through and therefore deprecated (gone if IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined). + IMGUI_API bool IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key); // is key being held. + IMGUI_API bool IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true); // was key pressed (went from !Down to Down)? if repeat=true, uses io.KeyRepeatDelay / KeyRepeatRate + IMGUI_API bool IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key); // was key released (went from Down to !Down)? + IMGUI_API int GetKeyPressedAmount(ImGuiKey key, float repeat_delay, float rate); // uses provided repeat rate/delay. return a count, most often 0 or 1 but might be >1 if RepeatRate is small enough that DeltaTime > RepeatRate + IMGUI_API const char* GetKeyName(ImGuiKey key); // [DEBUG] returns English name of the key. Those names a provided for debugging purpose and are not meant to be saved persistently not compared. + IMGUI_API void SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(bool want_capture_keyboard); // Override io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag next frame (said flag is left for your application to handle, typically when true it instructs your app to ignore inputs). e.g. force capture keyboard when your widget is being hovered. This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureKeyboard = want_capture_keyboard"; after the next NewFrame() call. + + // Inputs Utilities: Mouse specific + // - To refer to a mouse button, you may use named enums in your code e.g. ImGuiMouseButton_Left, ImGuiMouseButton_Right. + // - You can also use regular integer: it is forever guaranteed that 0=Left, 1=Right, 2=Middle. + // - Dragging operations are only reported after mouse has moved a certain distance away from the initial clicking position (see 'lock_threshold' and 'io.MouseDraggingThreshold') + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button); // is mouse button held? + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, bool repeat = false); // did mouse button clicked? (went from !Down to Down). Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 1. + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button); // did mouse button released? (went from Down to !Down) + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button); // did mouse button double-clicked? Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 2. (note that a double-click will also report IsMouseClicked() == true) + IMGUI_API int GetMouseClickedCount(ImGuiMouseButton button); // return the number of successive mouse-clicks at the time where a click happen (otherwise 0). + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip = true);// is mouse hovering given bounding rect (in screen space). clipped by current clipping settings, but disregarding of other consideration of focus/window ordering/popup-block. + IMGUI_API bool IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos = NULL); // by convention we use (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote that there is no mouse available + IMGUI_API bool IsAnyMouseDown(); // [WILL OBSOLETE] is any mouse button held? This was designed for backends, but prefer having backend maintain a mask of held mouse buttons, because upcoming input queue system will make this invalid. + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePos(); // shortcut to ImGui::GetIO().MousePos provided by user, to be consistent with other calls + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup(); // retrieve mouse position at the time of opening popup we have BeginPopup() into (helper to avoid user backing that value themselves) + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // is mouse dragging? (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); // return the delta from the initial clicking position while the mouse button is pressed or was just released. This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance threshold at least once (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold) + IMGUI_API void ResetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0); // + IMGUI_API ImGuiMouseCursor GetMouseCursor(); // get desired mouse cursor shape. Important: reset in ImGui::NewFrame(), this is updated during the frame. valid before Render(). If you use software rendering by setting io.MouseDrawCursor ImGui will render those for you + IMGUI_API void SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type); // set desired mouse cursor shape + IMGUI_API void SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(bool want_capture_mouse); // Override io.WantCaptureMouse flag next frame (said flag is left for your application to handle, typical when true it instucts your app to ignore inputs). This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureMouse = want_capture_mouse;" after the next NewFrame() call. + + // Clipboard Utilities + // - Also see the LogToClipboard() function to capture GUI into clipboard, or easily output text data to the clipboard. + IMGUI_API const char* GetClipboardText(); + IMGUI_API void SetClipboardText(const char* text); + + // Settings/.Ini Utilities + // - The disk functions are automatically called if io.IniFilename != NULL (default is "imgui.ini"). + // - Set io.IniFilename to NULL to load/save manually. Read io.WantSaveIniSettings description about handling .ini saving manually. + // - Important: default value "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir! Most apps will want to lock this to an absolute path (e.g. same path as executables). + IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame(). NewFrame() automatically calls LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(io.IniFilename). + IMGUI_API void LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size=0); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame() to provide .ini data from your own data source. + IMGUI_API void SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename); // this is automatically called (if io.IniFilename is not empty) a few seconds after any modification that should be reflected in the .ini file (and also by DestroyContext). + IMGUI_API const char* SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_ini_size = NULL); // return a zero-terminated string with the .ini data which you can save by your own mean. call when io.WantSaveIniSettings is set, then save data by your own mean and clear io.WantSaveIniSettings. + + // Debug Utilities + IMGUI_API void DebugTextEncoding(const char* text); + IMGUI_API bool DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char* version_str, size_t sz_io, size_t sz_style, size_t sz_vec2, size_t sz_vec4, size_t sz_drawvert, size_t sz_drawidx); // This is called by IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() macro. + + // Memory Allocators + // - Those functions are not reliant on the current context. + // - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions() + // for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for more details. + IMGUI_API void SetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc free_func, void* user_data = NULL); + IMGUI_API void GetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc* p_alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc* p_free_func, void** p_user_data); + IMGUI_API void* MemAlloc(size_t size); + IMGUI_API void MemFree(void* ptr); + +} // namespace ImGui + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Flags for ImGui::Begin() +// (Those are per-window flags. There are shared flags in ImGuiIO: io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges and io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly) +enum ImGuiWindowFlags_ +{ + ImGuiWindowFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar = 1 << 0, // Disable title-bar + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize = 1 << 1, // Disable user resizing with the lower-right grip + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove = 1 << 2, // Disable user moving the window + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar = 1 << 3, // Disable scrollbars (window can still scroll with mouse or programmatically) + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse = 1 << 4, // Disable user vertically scrolling with mouse wheel. On child window, mouse wheel will be forwarded to the parent unless NoScrollbar is also set. + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse = 1 << 5, // Disable user collapsing window by double-clicking on it. Also referred to as Window Menu Button (e.g. within a docking node). + ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize = 1 << 6, // Resize every window to its content every frame + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground = 1 << 7, // Disable drawing background color (WindowBg, etc.) and outside border. Similar as using SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f). + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings = 1 << 8, // Never load/save settings in .ini file + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs = 1 << 9, // Disable catching mouse, hovering test with pass through. + ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar = 1 << 10, // Has a menu-bar + ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar = 1 << 11, // Allow horizontal scrollbar to appear (off by default). You may use SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(width,0.0f)); prior to calling Begin() to specify width. Read code in imgui_demo in the "Horizontal Scrolling" section. + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing = 1 << 12, // Disable taking focus when transitioning from hidden to visible state + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus = 1 << 13, // Disable bringing window to front when taking focus (e.g. clicking on it or programmatically giving it focus) + ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar= 1 << 14, // Always show vertical scrollbar (even if ContentSize.y < Size.y) + ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar=1<< 15, // Always show horizontal scrollbar (even if ContentSize.x < Size.x) + ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding = 1 << 16, // Ensure child windows without border uses style.WindowPadding (ignored by default for non-bordered child windows, because more convenient) + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs = 1 << 18, // No gamepad/keyboard navigation within the window + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus = 1 << 19, // No focusing toward this window with gamepad/keyboard navigation (e.g. skipped by CTRL+TAB) + ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 20, // Display a dot next to the title. When used in a tab/docking context, tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar. + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus, + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse, + ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus, + + // [Internal] + ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened = 1 << 23, // [BETA] On child window: allow gamepad/keyboard navigation to cross over parent border to this child or between sibling child windows. + ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow = 1 << 24, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginChild() + ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip = 1 << 25, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginTooltip() + ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup = 1 << 26, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopup() + ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal = 1 << 27, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopupModal() + ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu = 1 << 28, // Don't use! For internal use by BeginMenu() +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::InputText() +// (Those are per-item flags. There are shared flags in ImGuiIO: io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink and io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive) +enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_ +{ + ImGuiInputTextFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal = 1 << 0, // Allow 0123456789.+-*/ + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal = 1 << 1, // Allow 0123456789ABCDEFabcdef + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase = 1 << 2, // Turn a..z into A..Z + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank = 1 << 3, // Filter out spaces, tabs + ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll = 1 << 4, // Select entire text when first taking mouse focus + ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue = 1 << 5, // Return 'true' when Enter is pressed (as opposed to every time the value was modified). Consider looking at the IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() function. + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion = 1 << 6, // Callback on pressing TAB (for completion handling) + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory = 1 << 7, // Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows (for history handling) + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways = 1 << 8, // Callback on each iteration. User code may query cursor position, modify text buffer. + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter = 1 << 9, // Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard. + ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput = 1 << 10, // Pressing TAB input a '\t' character into the text field + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine = 1 << 11, // In multi-line mode, unfocus with Enter, add new line with Ctrl+Enter (default is opposite: unfocus with Ctrl+Enter, add line with Enter). + ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll = 1 << 12, // Disable following the cursor horizontally + ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite = 1 << 13, // Overwrite mode + ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly = 1 << 14, // Read-only mode + ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password = 1 << 15, // Password mode, display all characters as '*' + ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo = 1 << 16, // Disable undo/redo. Note that input text owns the text data while active, if you want to provide your own undo/redo stack you need e.g. to call ClearActiveID(). + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific = 1 << 17, // Allow 0123456789.+-*/eE (Scientific notation input) + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize = 1 << 18, // Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow. Notify when the string wants to be resized (for string types which hold a cache of their Size). You will be provided a new BufSize in the callback and NEED to honor it. (see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example of using this) + ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit = 1 << 19, // Callback on any edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active) + ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll = 1 << 20, // Escape key clears content if not empty, and deactivate otherwise (contrast to default behavior of Escape to revert) + + // Obsolete names + //ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite // [renamed in 1.82] name was not matching behavior +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::TreeNodeEx(), ImGui::CollapsingHeader*() +enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ +{ + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected = 1 << 0, // Draw as selected + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed = 1 << 1, // Draw frame with background (e.g. for CollapsingHeader) + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap = 1 << 2, // Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen = 1 << 3, // Don't do a TreePush() when open (e.g. for CollapsingHeader) = no extra indent nor pushing on ID stack + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog = 1 << 4, // Don't automatically and temporarily open node when Logging is active (by default logging will automatically open tree nodes) + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen = 1 << 5, // Default node to be open + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick = 1 << 6, // Need double-click to open node + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow = 1 << 7, // Only open when clicking on the arrow part. If ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick is also set, single-click arrow or double-click all box to open. + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf = 1 << 8, // No collapsing, no arrow (use as a convenience for leaf nodes). + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet = 1 << 9, // Display a bullet instead of arrow. IMPORTANT: node can still be marked open/close if you don't set the _Leaf flag! + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding = 1 << 10, // Use FramePadding (even for an unframed text node) to vertically align text baseline to regular widget height. Equivalent to calling AlignTextToFramePadding(). + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth = 1 << 11, // Extend hit box to the right-most edge, even if not framed. This is not the default in order to allow adding other items on the same line. In the future we may refactor the hit system to be front-to-back, allowing natural overlaps and then this can become the default. + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth = 1 << 12, // Extend hit box to the left-most and right-most edges (bypass the indented area). + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere = 1 << 13, // (WIP) Nav: left direction may move to this TreeNode() from any of its child (items submitted between TreeNode and TreePop) + //ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoScrollOnOpen = 1 << 14, // FIXME: TODO: Disable automatic scroll on TreePop() if node got just open and contents is not visible + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog, + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap, // Renamed in 1.89.7 +#endif +}; + +// Flags for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen() functions. +// - To be backward compatible with older API which took an 'int mouse_button = 1' argument, we need to treat +// small flags values as a mouse button index, so we encode the mouse button in the first few bits of the flags. +// It is therefore guaranteed to be legal to pass a mouse button index in ImGuiPopupFlags. +// - For the same reason, we exceptionally default the ImGuiPopupFlags argument of BeginPopupContextXXX functions to 1 instead of 0. +// IMPORTANT: because the default parameter is 1 (==ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight), if you rely on the default parameter +// and want to use another flag, you need to pass in the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight flag explicitly. +// - Multiple buttons currently cannot be combined/or-ed in those functions (we could allow it later). +enum ImGuiPopupFlags_ +{ + ImGuiPopupFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonLeft = 0, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Left Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 0 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Left) + ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight = 1, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Right Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 1 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Right) + ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMiddle = 2, // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Middle Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 2 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Middle) + ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_ = 0x1F, + ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonDefault_ = 1, + ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup = 1 << 5, // For OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(): don't open if there's already a popup at the same level of the popup stack + ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems = 1 << 6, // For BeginPopupContextWindow(): don't return true when hovering items, only when hovering empty space + ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId = 1 << 7, // For IsPopupOpen(): ignore the ImGuiID parameter and test for any popup. + ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel = 1 << 8, // For IsPopupOpen(): search/test at any level of the popup stack (default test in the current level) + ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopup = ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId | ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel, +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::Selectable() +enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_ +{ + ImGuiSelectableFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups = 1 << 0, // Clicking this doesn't close parent popup window + ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 1, // Selectable frame can span all columns (text will still fit in current column) + ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick = 1 << 2, // Generate press events on double clicks too + ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled = 1 << 3, // Cannot be selected, display grayed out text + ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap = 1 << 4, // (WIP) Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap = ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap, // Renamed in 1.89.7 +#endif +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::BeginCombo() +enum ImGuiComboFlags_ +{ + ImGuiComboFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft = 1 << 0, // Align the popup toward the left by default + ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall = 1 << 1, // Max ~4 items visible. Tip: If you want your combo popup to be a specific size you can use SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() prior to calling BeginCombo() + ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular = 1 << 2, // Max ~8 items visible (default) + ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge = 1 << 3, // Max ~20 items visible + ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest = 1 << 4, // As many fitting items as possible + ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton = 1 << 5, // Display on the preview box without the square arrow button + ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview = 1 << 6, // Display only a square arrow button + ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_ = ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest, +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabBar() +enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_ +{ + ImGuiTabBarFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable = 1 << 0, // Allow manually dragging tabs to re-order them + New tabs are appended at the end of list + ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs = 1 << 1, // Automatically select new tabs when they appear + ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton = 1 << 2, // Disable buttons to open the tab list popup + ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton = 1 << 3, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false. + ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons = 1 << 4, // Disable scrolling buttons (apply when fitting policy is ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll) + ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 5, // Disable tooltips when hovering a tab + ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown = 1 << 6, // Resize tabs when they don't fit + ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll = 1 << 7, // Add scroll buttons when tabs don't fit + ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown | ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll, + ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_ = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown, +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabItem() +enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_ +{ + ImGuiTabItemFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument = 1 << 0, // Display a dot next to the title + tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar. + ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected = 1 << 1, // Trigger flag to programmatically make the tab selected when calling BeginTabItem() + ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton = 1 << 2, // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false. + ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId = 1 << 3, // Don't call PushID(tab->ID)/PopID() on BeginTabItem()/EndTabItem() + ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 4, // Disable tooltip for the given tab + ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder = 1 << 5, // Disable reordering this tab or having another tab cross over this tab + ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading = 1 << 6, // Enforce the tab position to the left of the tab bar (after the tab list popup button) + ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing = 1 << 7, // Enforce the tab position to the right of the tab bar (before the scrolling buttons) +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::BeginTable() +// - Important! Sizing policies have complex and subtle side effects, much more so than you would expect. +// Read comments/demos carefully + experiment with live demos to get acquainted with them. +// - The DEFAULT sizing policies are: +// - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit if ScrollX is on, or if host window has ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize. +// - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame if ScrollX is off. +// - When ScrollX is off: +// - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch with same weight. +// - Columns sizing policy allowed: Stretch (default), Fixed/Auto. +// - Fixed Columns (if any) will generally obtain their requested width (unless the table cannot fit them all). +// - Stretch Columns will share the remaining width according to their respective weight. +// - Mixed Fixed/Stretch columns is possible but has various side-effects on resizing behaviors. +// The typical use of mixing sizing policies is: any number of LEADING Fixed columns, followed by one or two TRAILING Stretch columns. +// (this is because the visible order of columns have subtle but necessary effects on how they react to manual resizing). +// - When ScrollX is on: +// - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed +// - Columns sizing policy allowed: Fixed/Auto mostly. +// - Fixed Columns can be enlarged as needed. Table will show a horizontal scrollbar if needed. +// - When using auto-resizing (non-resizable) fixed columns, querying the content width to use item right-alignment e.g. SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN) doesn't make sense, would create a feedback loop. +// - Using Stretch columns OFTEN DOES NOT MAKE SENSE if ScrollX is on, UNLESS you have specified a value for 'inner_width' in BeginTable(). +// If you specify a value for 'inner_width' then effectively the scrolling space is known and Stretch or mixed Fixed/Stretch columns become meaningful again. +// - Read on documentation at the top of imgui_tables.cpp for details. +enum ImGuiTableFlags_ +{ + // Features + ImGuiTableFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable = 1 << 0, // Enable resizing columns. + ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable = 1 << 1, // Enable reordering columns in header row (need calling TableSetupColumn() + TableHeadersRow() to display headers) + ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable = 1 << 2, // Enable hiding/disabling columns in context menu. + ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable = 1 << 3, // Enable sorting. Call TableGetSortSpecs() to obtain sort specs. Also see ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti and ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate. + ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings = 1 << 4, // Disable persisting columns order, width and sort settings in the .ini file. + ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody = 1 << 5, // Right-click on columns body/contents will display table context menu. By default it is available in TableHeadersRow(). + // Decorations + ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg = 1 << 6, // Set each RowBg color with ImGuiCol_TableRowBg or ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt (equivalent of calling TableSetBgColor with ImGuiTableBgFlags_RowBg0 on each row manually) + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH = 1 << 7, // Draw horizontal borders between rows. + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH = 1 << 8, // Draw horizontal borders at the top and bottom. + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV = 1 << 9, // Draw vertical borders between columns. + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV = 1 << 10, // Draw vertical borders on the left and right sides. + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw horizontal borders. + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV, // Draw vertical borders. + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH, // Draw inner borders. + ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw outer borders. + ImGuiTableFlags_Borders = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter, // Draw all borders. + ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody = 1 << 11, // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appear in Headers). -> May move to style + ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize = 1 << 12, // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appear in Headers). -> May move to style + // Sizing Policy (read above for defaults) + ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit = 1 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching contents width. + ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame = 2 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching the maximum contents width of all columns. Implicitly enable ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible. + ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp = 3 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights proportional to each columns contents widths. + ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame = 4 << 13, // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights all equal, unless overridden by TableSetupColumn(). + // Sizing Extra Options + ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX = 1 << 16, // Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value. Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used. + ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY = 1 << 17, // Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit). Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible. + ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible = 1 << 18, // Disable keeping column always minimally visible when ScrollX is off and table gets too small. Not recommended if columns are resizable. + ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths = 1 << 19, // Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34. With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth. + // Clipping + ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip = 1 << 20, // Disable clipping rectangle for every individual columns (reduce draw command count, items will be able to overflow into other columns). Generally incompatible with TableSetupScrollFreeze(). + // Padding + ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX = 1 << 21, // Default if BordersOuterV is on. Enable outermost padding. Generally desirable if you have headers. + ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX = 1 << 22, // Default if BordersOuterV is off. Disable outermost padding. + ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX = 1 << 23, // Disable inner padding between columns (double inner padding if BordersOuterV is on, single inner padding if BordersOuterV is off). + // Scrolling + ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX = 1 << 24, // Enable horizontal scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size. Changes default sizing policy. Because this creates a child window, ScrollY is currently generally recommended when using ScrollX. + ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY = 1 << 25, // Enable vertical scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size. + // Sorting + ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti = 1 << 26, // Hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1). + ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate = 1 << 27, // Allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0). + + // [Internal] Combinations and masks + ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_ = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame, +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::TableSetupColumn() +enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_ +{ + // Input configuration flags + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled = 1 << 0, // Overriding/master disable flag: hide column, won't show in context menu (unlike calling TableSetColumnEnabled() which manipulates the user accessible state) + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide = 1 << 1, // Default as a hidden/disabled column. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort = 1 << 2, // Default as a sorting column. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch = 1 << 3, // Column will stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling disabled (default if table sizing policy is _SizingStretchSame or _SizingStretchProp). + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed = 1 << 4, // Column will not stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling enabled (default if table sizing policy is _SizingFixedFit and table is resizable). + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize = 1 << 5, // Disable manual resizing. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder = 1 << 6, // Disable manual reordering this column, this will also prevent other columns from crossing over this column. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide = 1 << 7, // Disable ability to hide/disable this column. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip = 1 << 8, // Disable clipping for this column (all NoClip columns will render in a same draw command). + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort = 1 << 9, // Disable ability to sort on this field (even if ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable is set on the table). + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending = 1 << 10, // Disable ability to sort in the ascending direction. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending = 1 << 11, // Disable ability to sort in the descending direction. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel = 1 << 12, // TableHeadersRow() will not submit label for this column. Convenient for some small columns. Name will still appear in context menu. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth = 1 << 13, // Disable header text width contribution to automatic column width. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending = 1 << 14, // Make the initial sort direction Ascending when first sorting on this column (default). + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending = 1 << 15, // Make the initial sort direction Descending when first sorting on this column. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable = 1 << 16, // Use current Indent value when entering cell (default for column 0). + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable = 1 << 17, // Ignore current Indent value when entering cell (default for columns > 0). Indentation changes _within_ the cell will still be honored. + + // Output status flags, read-only via TableGetColumnFlags() + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled = 1 << 24, // Status: is enabled == not hidden by user/api (referred to as "Hide" in _DefaultHide and _NoHide) flags. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible = 1 << 25, // Status: is visible == is enabled AND not clipped by scrolling. + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted = 1 << 26, // Status: is currently part of the sort specs + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered = 1 << 27, // Status: is hovered by mouse + + // [Internal] Combinations and masks + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable, + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_ = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered, + ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_ = 1 << 30, // [Internal] Disable user resizing this column directly (it may however we resized indirectly from its left edge) +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::TableNextRow() +enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_ +{ + ImGuiTableRowFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers = 1 << 0, // Identify header row (set default background color + width of its contents accounted differently for auto column width) +}; + +// Enum for ImGui::TableSetBgColor() +// Background colors are rendering in 3 layers: +// - Layer 0: draw with RowBg0 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg0 if set. +// - Layer 1: draw with RowBg1 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg1 if set. +// - Layer 2: draw with CellBg color if set. +// The purpose of the two row/columns layers is to let you decide if a background color change should override or blend with the existing color. +// When using ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg on the table, each row has the RowBg0 color automatically set for odd/even rows. +// If you set the color of RowBg0 target, your color will override the existing RowBg0 color. +// If you set the color of RowBg1 or ColumnBg1 target, your color will blend over the RowBg0 color. +enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_ +{ + ImGuiTableBgTarget_None = 0, + ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0 = 1, // Set row background color 0 (generally used for background, automatically set when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is used) + ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1 = 2, // Set row background color 1 (generally used for selection marking) + ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg = 3, // Set cell background color (top-most color) +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::IsWindowFocused() +enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_ +{ + ImGuiFocusedFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows = 1 << 0, // Return true if any children of the window is focused + ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow = 1 << 1, // Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy) + ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // Return true if any window is focused. Important: If you are trying to tell how to dispatch your low-level inputs, do NOT use this. Use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please read the FAQ! + ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy = 1 << 3, // Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow) + //ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy = 1 << 4, // Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked window) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow) + ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows = ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows, +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsWindowHovered() +// Note: if you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to Dear ImGui or to your app, you should use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please read the FAQ! +// Note: windows with the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs flag are ignored by IsWindowHovered() calls. +enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_ +{ + ImGuiHoveredFlags_None = 0, // Return true if directly over the item/window, not obstructed by another window, not obstructed by an active popup or modal blocking inputs under them. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows = 1 << 0, // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any children of the window is hovered + ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow = 1 << 1, // IsWindowHovered() only: Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy) + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow = 1 << 2, // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any window is hovered + ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy = 1 << 3, // IsWindowHovered() only: Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow) + //ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy = 1 << 4, // IsWindowHovered() only: Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked window) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow) + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup = 1 << 5, // Return true even if a popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window + //ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByModal = 1 << 6, // Return true even if a modal popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window. FIXME-TODO: Unavailable yet. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem = 1 << 7, // Return true even if an active item is blocking access to this item/window. Useful for Drag and Drop patterns. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem = 1 << 8, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the item uses AllowOverlap mode and is overlapped by another hoverable item. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByWindow = 1 << 9, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the position is obstructed or overlapped by another window. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled = 1 << 10, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the item is disabled + ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoNavOverride = 1 << 11, // IsItemHovered() only: Disable using gamepad/keyboard navigation state when active, always query mouse + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped = ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByWindow, + ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly = ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped, + ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows = ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows, + + // Tooltips mode + // - typically used in IsItemHovered() + SetTooltip() sequence. + // - this is a shortcut to pull flags from 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' where you can reconfigure desired behavior. + // e.g. 'TooltipHoveredFlagsForMouse' defaults to 'ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort'. + // - for frequently actioned or hovered items providing a tooltip, you want may to use ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip (stationary + delay) so the tooltip doesn't show too often. + // - for items which main purpose is to be hovered, or items with low affordance, or in less consistent apps, prefer no delay or shorter delay. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip = 1 << 12, // Shortcut for standard flags when using IsItemHovered() + SetTooltip() sequence. + + // (Advanced) Mouse Hovering delays. + // - generally you can use ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip to use application-standardized flags. + // - use those if you need specific overrides. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary = 1 << 13, // Require mouse to be stationary for style.HoverStationaryDelay (~0.15 sec) _at least one time_. After this, can move on same item/window. Using the stationary test tends to reduces the need for a long delay. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNone = 1 << 14, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true immediately (default). As this is the default you generally ignore this. + ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort = 1 << 15, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true after style.HoverDelayShort elapsed (~0.15 sec) (shared between items) + requires mouse to be stationary for style.HoverStationaryDelay (once per item). + ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal = 1 << 16, // IsItemHovered() only: Return true after style.HoverDelayNormal elapsed (~0.40 sec) (shared between items) + requires mouse to be stationary for style.HoverStationaryDelay (once per item). + ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay = 1 << 17, // IsItemHovered() only: Disable shared delay system where moving from one item to the next keeps the previous timer for a short time (standard for tooltips with long delays) +}; + +// Flags for ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(), ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload() +enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_ +{ + ImGuiDragDropFlags_None = 0, + // BeginDragDropSource() flags + ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip = 1 << 0, // Disable preview tooltip. By default, a successful call to BeginDragDropSource opens a tooltip so you can display a preview or description of the source contents. This flag disables this behavior. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover = 1 << 1, // By default, when dragging we clear data so that IsItemHovered() will return false, to avoid subsequent user code submitting tooltips. This flag disables this behavior so you can still call IsItemHovered() on the source item. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers = 1 << 2, // Disable the behavior that allows to open tree nodes and collapsing header by holding over them while dragging a source item. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID = 1 << 3, // Allow items such as Text(), Image() that have no unique identifier to be used as drag source, by manufacturing a temporary identifier based on their window-relative position. This is extremely unusual within the dear imgui ecosystem and so we made it explicit. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern = 1 << 4, // External source (from outside of dear imgui), won't attempt to read current item/window info. Will always return true. Only one Extern source can be active simultaneously. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload = 1 << 5, // Automatically expire the payload if the source cease to be submitted (otherwise payloads are persisting while being dragged) + // AcceptDragDropPayload() flags + ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery = 1 << 10, // AcceptDragDropPayload() will returns true even before the mouse button is released. You can then call IsDelivery() to test if the payload needs to be delivered. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect = 1 << 11, // Do not draw the default highlight rectangle when hovering over target. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip = 1 << 12, // Request hiding the BeginDragDropSource tooltip from the BeginDragDropTarget site. + ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptPeekOnly = ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery | ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect, // For peeking ahead and inspecting the payload before delivery. +}; + +// Standard Drag and Drop payload types. You can define you own payload types using short strings. Types starting with '_' are defined by Dear ImGui. +#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F "_COL3F" // float[3]: Standard type for colors, without alpha. User code may use this type. +#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F "_COL4F" // float[4]: Standard type for colors. User code may use this type. + +// A primary data type +enum ImGuiDataType_ +{ + ImGuiDataType_S8, // signed char / char (with sensible compilers) + ImGuiDataType_U8, // unsigned char + ImGuiDataType_S16, // short + ImGuiDataType_U16, // unsigned short + ImGuiDataType_S32, // int + ImGuiDataType_U32, // unsigned int + ImGuiDataType_S64, // long long / __int64 + ImGuiDataType_U64, // unsigned long long / unsigned __int64 + ImGuiDataType_Float, // float + ImGuiDataType_Double, // double + ImGuiDataType_COUNT +}; + +// A cardinal direction +enum ImGuiDir_ +{ + ImGuiDir_None = -1, + ImGuiDir_Left = 0, + ImGuiDir_Right = 1, + ImGuiDir_Up = 2, + ImGuiDir_Down = 3, + ImGuiDir_COUNT +}; + +// A sorting direction +enum ImGuiSortDirection_ +{ + ImGuiSortDirection_None = 0, + ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending = 1, // Ascending = 0->9, A->Z etc. + ImGuiSortDirection_Descending = 2 // Descending = 9->0, Z->A etc. +}; + +// A key identifier (ImGuiKey_XXX or ImGuiMod_XXX value): can represent Keyboard, Mouse and Gamepad values. +// All our named keys are >= 512. Keys value 0 to 511 are left unused as legacy native/opaque key values (< 1.87). +// Since >= 1.89 we increased typing (went from int to enum), some legacy code may need a cast to ImGuiKey. +// Read details about the 1.87 and 1.89 transition : https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4921 +// Note that "Keys" related to physical keys and are not the same concept as input "Characters", the later are submitted via io.AddInputCharacter(). +enum ImGuiKey : int +{ + // Keyboard + ImGuiKey_None = 0, + ImGuiKey_Tab = 512, // == ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN + ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, + ImGuiKey_RightArrow, + ImGuiKey_UpArrow, + ImGuiKey_DownArrow, + ImGuiKey_PageUp, + ImGuiKey_PageDown, + ImGuiKey_Home, + ImGuiKey_End, + ImGuiKey_Insert, + ImGuiKey_Delete, + ImGuiKey_Backspace, + ImGuiKey_Space, + ImGuiKey_Enter, + ImGuiKey_Escape, + ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, ImGuiKey_LeftShift, ImGuiKey_LeftAlt, ImGuiKey_LeftSuper, + ImGuiKey_RightCtrl, ImGuiKey_RightShift, ImGuiKey_RightAlt, ImGuiKey_RightSuper, + ImGuiKey_Menu, + ImGuiKey_0, ImGuiKey_1, ImGuiKey_2, ImGuiKey_3, ImGuiKey_4, ImGuiKey_5, ImGuiKey_6, ImGuiKey_7, ImGuiKey_8, ImGuiKey_9, + ImGuiKey_A, ImGuiKey_B, ImGuiKey_C, ImGuiKey_D, ImGuiKey_E, ImGuiKey_F, ImGuiKey_G, ImGuiKey_H, ImGuiKey_I, ImGuiKey_J, + ImGuiKey_K, ImGuiKey_L, ImGuiKey_M, ImGuiKey_N, ImGuiKey_O, ImGuiKey_P, ImGuiKey_Q, ImGuiKey_R, ImGuiKey_S, ImGuiKey_T, + ImGuiKey_U, ImGuiKey_V, ImGuiKey_W, ImGuiKey_X, ImGuiKey_Y, ImGuiKey_Z, + ImGuiKey_F1, ImGuiKey_F2, ImGuiKey_F3, ImGuiKey_F4, ImGuiKey_F5, ImGuiKey_F6, + ImGuiKey_F7, ImGuiKey_F8, ImGuiKey_F9, ImGuiKey_F10, ImGuiKey_F11, ImGuiKey_F12, + ImGuiKey_Apostrophe, // ' + ImGuiKey_Comma, // , + ImGuiKey_Minus, // - + ImGuiKey_Period, // . + ImGuiKey_Slash, // / + ImGuiKey_Semicolon, // ; + ImGuiKey_Equal, // = + ImGuiKey_LeftBracket, // [ + ImGuiKey_Backslash, // \ (this text inhibit multiline comment caused by backslash) + ImGuiKey_RightBracket, // ] + ImGuiKey_GraveAccent, // ` + ImGuiKey_CapsLock, + ImGuiKey_ScrollLock, + ImGuiKey_NumLock, + ImGuiKey_PrintScreen, + ImGuiKey_Pause, + ImGuiKey_Keypad0, ImGuiKey_Keypad1, ImGuiKey_Keypad2, ImGuiKey_Keypad3, ImGuiKey_Keypad4, + ImGuiKey_Keypad5, ImGuiKey_Keypad6, ImGuiKey_Keypad7, ImGuiKey_Keypad8, ImGuiKey_Keypad9, + ImGuiKey_KeypadDecimal, + ImGuiKey_KeypadDivide, + ImGuiKey_KeypadMultiply, + ImGuiKey_KeypadSubtract, + ImGuiKey_KeypadAdd, + ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter, + ImGuiKey_KeypadEqual, + + // Gamepad (some of those are analog values, 0.0f to 1.0f) // NAVIGATION ACTION + // (download controller mapping PNG/PSD at http://dearimgui.com/controls_sheets) + ImGuiKey_GamepadStart, // Menu (Xbox) + (Switch) Start/Options (PS) + ImGuiKey_GamepadBack, // View (Xbox) - (Switch) Share (PS) + ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, // X (Xbox) Y (Switch) Square (PS) // Tap: Toggle Menu. Hold: Windowing mode (Focus/Move/Resize windows) + ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, // B (Xbox) A (Switch) Circle (PS) // Cancel / Close / Exit + ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, // Y (Xbox) X (Switch) Triangle (PS) // Text Input / On-screen Keyboard + ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, // A (Xbox) B (Switch) Cross (PS) // Activate / Open / Toggle / Tweak + ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, // D-pad Left // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, // D-pad Right // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, // D-pad Up // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown, // D-pad Down // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadL1, // L Bumper (Xbox) L (Switch) L1 (PS) // Tweak Slower / Focus Previous (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadR1, // R Bumper (Xbox) R (Switch) R1 (PS) // Tweak Faster / Focus Next (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadL2, // L Trig. (Xbox) ZL (Switch) L2 (PS) [Analog] + ImGuiKey_GamepadR2, // R Trig. (Xbox) ZR (Switch) R2 (PS) [Analog] + ImGuiKey_GamepadL3, // L Stick (Xbox) L3 (Switch) L3 (PS) + ImGuiKey_GamepadR3, // R Stick (Xbox) R3 (Switch) R3 (PS) + ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown, // [Analog] // Move Window (in Windowing mode) + ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickLeft, // [Analog] + ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickRight, // [Analog] + ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickUp, // [Analog] + ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown, // [Analog] + + // Aliases: Mouse Buttons (auto-submitted from AddMouseButtonEvent() calls) + // - This is mirroring the data also written to io.MouseDown[], io.MouseWheel, in a format allowing them to be accessed via standard key API. + ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, ImGuiKey_MouseRight, ImGuiKey_MouseMiddle, ImGuiKey_MouseX1, ImGuiKey_MouseX2, ImGuiKey_MouseWheelX, ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY, + + // [Internal] Reserved for mod storage + ImGuiKey_ReservedForModCtrl, ImGuiKey_ReservedForModShift, ImGuiKey_ReservedForModAlt, ImGuiKey_ReservedForModSuper, + ImGuiKey_COUNT, + + // Keyboard Modifiers (explicitly submitted by backend via AddKeyEvent() calls) + // - This is mirroring the data also written to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift, io.KeyAlt, io.KeySuper, in a format allowing + // them to be accessed via standard key API, allowing calls such as IsKeyPressed(), IsKeyReleased(), querying duration etc. + // - Code polling every key (e.g. an interface to detect a key press for input mapping) might want to ignore those + // and prefer using the real keys (e.g. ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, ImGuiKey_RightCtrl instead of ImGuiMod_Ctrl). + // - In theory the value of keyboard modifiers should be roughly equivalent to a logical or of the equivalent left/right keys. + // In practice: it's complicated; mods are often provided from different sources. Keyboard layout, IME, sticky keys and + // backends tend to interfere and break that equivalence. The safer decision is to relay that ambiguity down to the end-user... + ImGuiMod_None = 0, + ImGuiMod_Ctrl = 1 << 12, // Ctrl + ImGuiMod_Shift = 1 << 13, // Shift + ImGuiMod_Alt = 1 << 14, // Option/Menu + ImGuiMod_Super = 1 << 15, // Cmd/Super/Windows + ImGuiMod_Shortcut = 1 << 11, // Alias for Ctrl (non-macOS) _or_ Super (macOS). + ImGuiMod_Mask_ = 0xF800, // 5-bits + + // [Internal] Prior to 1.87 we required user to fill io.KeysDown[512] using their own native index + the io.KeyMap[] array. + // We are ditching this method but keeping a legacy path for user code doing e.g. IsKeyPressed(MY_NATIVE_KEY_CODE) + // If you need to iterate all keys (for e.g. an input mapper) you may use ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN..ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END. + ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN = 512, + ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END = ImGuiKey_COUNT, + ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN, +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT, // Size of KeysData[]: only hold named keys + ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN, // Accesses to io.KeysData[] must use (key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET) index. +#else + ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE = ImGuiKey_COUNT, // Size of KeysData[]: hold legacy 0..512 keycodes + named keys + ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET = 0, // Accesses to io.KeysData[] must use (key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET) index. +#endif + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + ImGuiKey_ModCtrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl, ImGuiKey_ModShift = ImGuiMod_Shift, ImGuiKey_ModAlt = ImGuiMod_Alt, ImGuiKey_ModSuper = ImGuiMod_Super, // Renamed in 1.89 + ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter = ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter, // Renamed in 1.87 +#endif +}; + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO +// OBSOLETED in 1.88 (from July 2022): ImGuiNavInput and io.NavInputs[]. +// Official backends between 1.60 and 1.86: will keep working and feed gamepad inputs as long as IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is not set. +// Custom backends: feed gamepad inputs via io.AddKeyEvent() and ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX enums. +enum ImGuiNavInput +{ + ImGuiNavInput_Activate, ImGuiNavInput_Cancel, ImGuiNavInput_Input, ImGuiNavInput_Menu, ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight, ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp, ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown, + ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft, ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight, ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp, ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown, ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow, ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast, + ImGuiNavInput_COUNT, +}; +#endif + +// Configuration flags stored in io.ConfigFlags. Set by user/application. +enum ImGuiConfigFlags_ +{ + ImGuiConfigFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard = 1 << 0, // Master keyboard navigation enable flag. Enable full Tabbing + directional arrows + space/enter to activate. + ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad = 1 << 1, // Master gamepad navigation enable flag. Backend also needs to set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad. + ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos = 1 << 2, // Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. May be useful on TV/console systems where moving a virtual mouse is awkward. Will update io.MousePos and set io.WantSetMousePos=true. If enabled you MUST honor io.WantSetMousePos requests in your backend, otherwise ImGui will react as if the mouse is jumping around back and forth. + ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard = 1 << 3, // Instruct navigation to not set the io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag when io.NavActive is set. + ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse = 1 << 4, // Instruct imgui to clear mouse position/buttons in NewFrame(). This allows ignoring the mouse information set by the backend. + ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange = 1 << 5, // Instruct backend to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility. Use if the backend cursor changes are interfering with yours and you don't want to use SetMouseCursor() to change mouse cursor. You may want to honor requests from imgui by reading GetMouseCursor() yourself instead. + + // User storage (to allow your backend/engine to communicate to code that may be shared between multiple projects. Those flags are NOT used by core Dear ImGui) + ImGuiConfigFlags_IsSRGB = 1 << 20, // Application is SRGB-aware. + ImGuiConfigFlags_IsTouchScreen = 1 << 21, // Application is using a touch screen instead of a mouse. +}; + +// Backend capabilities flags stored in io.BackendFlags. Set by imgui_impl_xxx or custom backend. +enum ImGuiBackendFlags_ +{ + ImGuiBackendFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad = 1 << 0, // Backend Platform supports gamepad and currently has one connected. + ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors = 1 << 1, // Backend Platform supports honoring GetMouseCursor() value to change the OS cursor shape. + ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos = 1 << 2, // Backend Platform supports io.WantSetMousePos requests to reposition the OS mouse position (only used if ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos is set). + ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset = 1 << 3, // Backend Renderer supports ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset. This enables output of large meshes (64K+ vertices) while still using 16-bit indices. +}; + +// Enumeration for PushStyleColor() / PopStyleColor() +enum ImGuiCol_ +{ + ImGuiCol_Text, + ImGuiCol_TextDisabled, + ImGuiCol_WindowBg, // Background of normal windows + ImGuiCol_ChildBg, // Background of child windows + ImGuiCol_PopupBg, // Background of popups, menus, tooltips windows + ImGuiCol_Border, + ImGuiCol_BorderShadow, + ImGuiCol_FrameBg, // Background of checkbox, radio button, plot, slider, text input + ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, + ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive, + ImGuiCol_TitleBg, + ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive, + ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed, + ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg, + ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg, + ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab, + ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered, + ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive, + ImGuiCol_CheckMark, + ImGuiCol_SliderGrab, + ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive, + ImGuiCol_Button, + ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, + ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, + ImGuiCol_Header, // Header* colors are used for CollapsingHeader, TreeNode, Selectable, MenuItem + ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered, + ImGuiCol_HeaderActive, + ImGuiCol_Separator, + ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered, + ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive, + ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip, // Resize grip in lower-right and lower-left corners of windows. + ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered, + ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive, + ImGuiCol_Tab, // TabItem in a TabBar + ImGuiCol_TabHovered, + ImGuiCol_TabActive, + ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused, + ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive, + ImGuiCol_PlotLines, + ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered, + ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram, + ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered, + ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg, // Table header background + ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong, // Table outer and header borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here) + ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight, // Table inner borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here) + ImGuiCol_TableRowBg, // Table row background (even rows) + ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt, // Table row background (odd rows) + ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg, + ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget, // Rectangle highlighting a drop target + ImGuiCol_NavHighlight, // Gamepad/keyboard: current highlighted item + ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, // Highlight window when using CTRL+TAB + ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, // Darken/colorize entire screen behind the CTRL+TAB window list, when active + ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg, // Darken/colorize entire screen behind a modal window, when one is active + ImGuiCol_WindowShadow, // Window shadows + // modified by asphyxia + ImGuiCol_ControlBg, + ImGuiCol_ControlBgActive, + ImGuiCol_ControlBgHovered, + ImGuiCol_Triangle, + ImGuiCol_COUNT +}; + +// Enumeration for PushStyleVar() / PopStyleVar() to temporarily modify the ImGuiStyle structure. +// - The enum only refers to fields of ImGuiStyle which makes sense to be pushed/popped inside UI code. +// During initialization or between frames, feel free to just poke into ImGuiStyle directly. +// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _second column_ below to find the actual members and their description. +// In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot. +// With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments. +// - When changing this enum, you need to update the associated internal table GStyleVarInfo[] accordingly. This is where we link enum values to members offset/type. +enum ImGuiStyleVar_ +{ + // Enum name --------------------- // Member in ImGuiStyle structure (see ImGuiStyle for descriptions) + ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, // float Alpha + ImGuiStyleVar_DisabledAlpha, // float DisabledAlpha + ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, // ImVec2 WindowPadding + ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, // float WindowRounding + ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize, // float WindowBorderSize + ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, // ImVec2 WindowMinSize + ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign, // ImVec2 WindowTitleAlign + ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, // float ChildRounding + ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, // float ChildBorderSize + ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding, // float PopupRounding + ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize, // float PopupBorderSize + ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, // ImVec2 FramePadding + ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, // float FrameRounding + ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize, // float FrameBorderSize + ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, // ImVec2 ItemSpacing + ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing, // ImVec2 ItemInnerSpacing + ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing, // float IndentSpacing + ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding, // ImVec2 CellPadding + ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize, // float ScrollbarSize + ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding, // float ScrollbarRounding + ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, // float GrabMinSize + ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding, // float GrabRounding + ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding, // float TabRounding + ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign, // ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign + ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, // ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign + ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextBorderSize,// float SeparatorTextBorderSize + ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextAlign, // ImVec2 SeparatorTextAlign + ImGuiStyleVar_SeparatorTextPadding,// ImVec2 SeparatorTextPadding + ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT +}; + +// Flags for InvisibleButton() [extended in imgui_internal.h] +enum ImGuiButtonFlags_ +{ + ImGuiButtonFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft = 1 << 0, // React on left mouse button (default) + ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight = 1 << 1, // React on right mouse button + ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle = 1 << 2, // React on center mouse button + + // [Internal] + ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMask_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle, + ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonDefault_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft, +}; + +// Flags for ColorEdit3() / ColorEdit4() / ColorPicker3() / ColorPicker4() / ColorButton() +enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ +{ + ImGuiColorEditFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha = 1 << 1, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: ignore Alpha component (will only read 3 components from the input pointer). + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker = 1 << 2, // // ColorEdit: disable picker when clicking on color square. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions = 1 << 3, // // ColorEdit: disable toggling options menu when right-clicking on inputs/small preview. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview = 1 << 4, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable color square preview next to the inputs. (e.g. to show only the inputs) + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs = 1 << 5, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable inputs sliders/text widgets (e.g. to show only the small preview color square). + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip = 1 << 6, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: disable tooltip when hovering the preview. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel = 1 << 7, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable display of inline text label (the label is still forwarded to the tooltip and picker). + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview = 1 << 8, // // ColorPicker: disable bigger color preview on right side of the picker, use small color square preview instead. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop = 1 << 9, // // ColorEdit: disable drag and drop target. ColorButton: disable drag and drop source. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder = 1 << 10, // // ColorButton: disable border (which is enforced by default) + + // User Options (right-click on widget to change some of them). + ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar = 1 << 16, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: show vertical alpha bar/gradient in picker. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview = 1 << 17, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display preview as a transparent color over a checkerboard, instead of opaque. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf= 1 << 18, // // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display half opaque / half checkerboard, instead of opaque. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR = 1 << 19, // // (WIP) ColorEdit: Currently only disable 0.0f..1.0f limits in RGBA edition (note: you probably want to use ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float flag as well). + ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB = 1 << 20, // [Display] // ColorEdit: override _display_ type among RGB/HSV/Hex. ColorPicker: select any combination using one or more of RGB/HSV/Hex. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV = 1 << 21, // [Display] // " + ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex = 1 << 22, // [Display] // " + ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 = 1 << 23, // [DataType] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0..255. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float = 1 << 24, // [DataType] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0.0f..1.0f floats instead of 0..255 integers. No round-trip of value via integers. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar = 1 << 25, // [Picker] // ColorPicker: bar for Hue, rectangle for Sat/Value. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel = 1 << 26, // [Picker] // ColorPicker: wheel for Hue, triangle for Sat/Value. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB = 1 << 27, // [Input] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in RGB format. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV = 1 << 28, // [Input] // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in HSV format. + + // Defaults Options. You can set application defaults using SetColorEditOptions(). The intent is that you probably don't want to + // override them in most of your calls. Let the user choose via the option menu and/or call SetColorEditOptions() once during startup. + ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar, + + // [Internal] Masks + ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex, + ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float, + ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar, + ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV, + + // Obsolete names + //ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex // [renamed in 1.69] +}; + +// Flags for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc. +// We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them. +// (Those are per-item flags. There are shared flags in ImGuiIO: io.ConfigDragClickToInputText) +enum ImGuiSliderFlags_ +{ + ImGuiSliderFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp = 1 << 4, // Clamp value to min/max bounds when input manually with CTRL+Click. By default CTRL+Click allows going out of bounds. + ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic = 1 << 5, // Make the widget logarithmic (linear otherwise). Consider using ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat with this if using a format-string with small amount of digits. + ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat = 1 << 6, // Disable rounding underlying value to match precision of the display format string (e.g. %.3f values are rounded to those 3 digits) + ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput = 1 << 7, // Disable CTRL+Click or Enter key allowing to input text directly into the widget + ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_ = 0x7000000F, // [Internal] We treat using those bits as being potentially a 'float power' argument from the previous API that has got miscast to this enum, and will trigger an assert if needed. + + // Obsolete names + //ImGuiSliderFlags_ClampOnInput = ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp, // [renamed in 1.79] +}; + +// Identify a mouse button. +// Those values are guaranteed to be stable and we frequently use 0/1 directly. Named enums provided for convenience. +enum ImGuiMouseButton_ +{ + ImGuiMouseButton_Left = 0, + ImGuiMouseButton_Right = 1, + ImGuiMouseButton_Middle = 2, + ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT = 5 +}; + +// Enumeration for GetMouseCursor() +// User code may request backend to display given cursor by calling SetMouseCursor(), which is why we have some cursors that are marked unused here +enum ImGuiMouseCursor_ +{ + ImGuiMouseCursor_None = -1, + ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow = 0, + ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput, // When hovering over InputText, etc. + ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll, // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions) + ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS, // When hovering over a horizontal border + ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW, // When hovering over a vertical border or a column + ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW, // When hovering over the bottom-left corner of a window + ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE, // When hovering over the bottom-right corner of a window + ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand, // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions. Use for e.g. hyperlinks) + ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed, // When hovering something with disallowed interaction. Usually a crossed circle. + ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT +}; + +// Enumeration for AddMouseSourceEvent() actual source of Mouse Input data. +// Historically we use "Mouse" terminology everywhere to indicate pointer data, e.g. MousePos, IsMousePressed(), io.AddMousePosEvent() +// But that "Mouse" data can come from different source which occasionally may be useful for application to know about. +// You can submit a change of pointer type using io.AddMouseSourceEvent(). +enum ImGuiMouseSource : int +{ + ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse = 0, // Input is coming from an actual mouse. + ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen, // Input is coming from a touch screen (no hovering prior to initial press, less precise initial press aiming, dual-axis wheeling possible). + ImGuiMouseSource_Pen, // Input is coming from a pressure/magnetic pen (often used in conjunction with high-sampling rates). + ImGuiMouseSource_COUNT +}; + +// Enumeration for ImGui::SetWindow***(), SetNextWindow***(), SetNextItem***() functions +// Represent a condition. +// Important: Treat as a regular enum! Do NOT combine multiple values using binary operators! All the functions above treat 0 as a shortcut to ImGuiCond_Always. +enum ImGuiCond_ +{ + ImGuiCond_None = 0, // No condition (always set the variable), same as _Always + ImGuiCond_Always = 1 << 0, // No condition (always set the variable), same as _None + ImGuiCond_Once = 1 << 1, // Set the variable once per runtime session (only the first call will succeed) + ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver = 1 << 2, // Set the variable if the object/window has no persistently saved data (no entry in .ini file) + ImGuiCond_Appearing = 1 << 3, // Set the variable if the object/window is appearing after being hidden/inactive (or the first time) +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<> +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// IM_MALLOC(), IM_FREE(), IM_NEW(), IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(), IM_DELETE() +// We call C++ constructor on own allocated memory via the placement "new(ptr) Type()" syntax. +// Defining a custom placement new() with a custom parameter allows us to bypass including which on some platforms complains when user has disabled exceptions. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +struct ImNewWrapper {}; +inline void* operator new(size_t, ImNewWrapper, void* ptr) { return ptr; } +inline void operator delete(void*, ImNewWrapper, void*) {} // This is only required so we can use the symmetrical new() +#define IM_ALLOC(_SIZE) ImGui::MemAlloc(_SIZE) +#define IM_FREE(_PTR) ImGui::MemFree(_PTR) +#define IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(_PTR) new(ImNewWrapper(), _PTR) +#define IM_NEW(_TYPE) new(ImNewWrapper(), ImGui::MemAlloc(sizeof(_TYPE))) _TYPE +template void IM_DELETE(T* p) { if (p) { p->~T(); ImGui::MemFree(p); } } + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// ImVector<> +// Lightweight std::vector<>-like class to avoid dragging dependencies (also, some implementations of STL with debug enabled are absurdly slow, we bypass it so our code runs fast in debug). +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - You generally do NOT need to care or use this ever. But we need to make it available in imgui.h because some of our public structures are relying on it. +// - We use std-like naming convention here, which is a little unusual for this codebase. +// - Important: clear() frees memory, resize(0) keep the allocated buffer. We use resize(0) a lot to intentionally recycle allocated buffers across frames and amortize our costs. +// - Important: our implementation does NOT call C++ constructors/destructors, we treat everything as raw data! This is intentional but be extra mindful of that, +// Do NOT use this class as a std::vector replacement in your own code! Many of the structures used by dear imgui can be safely initialized by a zero-memset. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF +template +struct ImVector +{ + int Size; + int Capacity; + T* Data; + + // Provide standard typedefs but we don't use them ourselves. + typedef T value_type; + typedef value_type* iterator; + typedef const value_type* const_iterator; + + // Constructors, destructor + inline ImVector() { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; } + inline ImVector(const ImVector& src) { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; operator=(src); } + inline ImVector& operator=(const ImVector& src) { clear(); resize(src.Size); if (src.Data) memcpy(Data, src.Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); return *this; } + inline ~ImVector() { if (Data) IM_FREE(Data); } // Important: does not destruct anything + + inline void clear() { if (Data) { Size = Capacity = 0; IM_FREE(Data); Data = NULL; } } // Important: does not destruct anything + inline void clear_delete() { for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++) IM_DELETE(Data[n]); clear(); } // Important: never called automatically! always explicit. + inline void clear_destruct() { for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++) Data[n].~T(); clear(); } // Important: never called automatically! always explicit. + + inline bool empty() const { return Size == 0; } + inline int size() const { return Size; } + inline int size_in_bytes() const { return Size * (int)sizeof(T); } + inline int max_size() const { return 0x7FFFFFFF / (int)sizeof(T); } + inline int capacity() const { return Capacity; } + inline T& operator[](int i) { IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size); return Data[i]; } + inline const T& operator[](int i) const { IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size); return Data[i]; } + + inline T* begin() { return Data; } + inline const T* begin() const { return Data; } + inline T* end() { return Data + Size; } + inline const T* end() const { return Data + Size; } + inline T& front() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; } + inline const T& front() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; } + inline T& back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; } + inline const T& back() const { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; } + inline void swap(ImVector& rhs) { int rhs_size = rhs.Size; rhs.Size = Size; Size = rhs_size; int rhs_cap = rhs.Capacity; rhs.Capacity = Capacity; Capacity = rhs_cap; T* rhs_data = rhs.Data; rhs.Data = Data; Data = rhs_data; } + + inline int _grow_capacity(int sz) const { int new_capacity = Capacity ? (Capacity + Capacity / 2) : 8; return new_capacity > sz ? new_capacity : sz; } + inline void resize(int new_size) { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); Size = new_size; } + inline void resize(int new_size, const T& v) { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); if (new_size > Size) for (int n = Size; n < new_size; n++) memcpy(&Data[n], &v, sizeof(v)); Size = new_size; } + inline void shrink(int new_size) { IM_ASSERT(new_size <= Size); Size = new_size; } // Resize a vector to a smaller size, guaranteed not to cause a reallocation + inline void reserve(int new_capacity) { if (new_capacity <= Capacity) return; T* new_data = (T*)IM_ALLOC((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T)); if (Data) { memcpy(new_data, Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); IM_FREE(Data); } Data = new_data; Capacity = new_capacity; } + inline void reserve_discard(int new_capacity) { if (new_capacity <= Capacity) return; if (Data) IM_FREE(Data); Data = (T*)IM_ALLOC((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T)); Capacity = new_capacity; } + + // NB: It is illegal to call push_back/push_front/insert with a reference pointing inside the ImVector data itself! e.g. v.push_back(v[10]) is forbidden. + inline void push_back(const T& v) { if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); memcpy(&Data[Size], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; } + inline void pop_back() { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); Size--; } + inline void push_front(const T& v) { if (Size == 0) push_back(v); else insert(Data, v); } + inline T* erase(const T* it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + 1, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - 1) * sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; } + inline T* erase(const T* it, const T* it_last){ IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size && it_last >= it && it_last <= Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t count = it_last - it; const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + count, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - (size_t)count) * sizeof(T)); Size -= (int)count; return Data + off; } + inline T* erase_unsorted(const T* it) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (it < Data + Size - 1) memcpy(Data + off, Data + Size - 1, sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; } + inline T* insert(const T* it, const T& v) { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); if (off < (int)Size) memmove(Data + off + 1, Data + off, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off) * sizeof(T)); memcpy(&Data[off], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; return Data + off; } + inline bool contains(const T& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data++ == v) return true; return false; } + inline T* find(const T& v) { T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; } + inline const T* find(const T& v) const { const T* data = Data; const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; } + inline bool find_erase(const T& v) { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase(it); return true; } return false; } + inline bool find_erase_unsorted(const T& v) { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase_unsorted(it); return true; } return false; } + inline int index_from_ptr(const T* it) const { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; } +}; +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// You may modify the ImGui::GetStyle() main instance during initialization and before NewFrame(). +// During the frame, use ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_XXXX)/PopStyleVar() to alter the main style values, +// and ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_XXX)/PopStyleColor() for colors. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +struct ImGuiStyle +{ + float Alpha; // Global alpha applies to everything in Dear ImGui. + float DisabledAlpha; // Additional alpha multiplier applied by BeginDisabled(). Multiply over current value of Alpha. + ImVec2 WindowPadding; // Padding within a window. + float WindowRounding; // Radius of window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows. Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and are not recommended. + float WindowBorderSize; // Thickness of border around windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly). + ImVec2 WindowMinSize; // Minimum window size. This is a global setting. If you want to constrain individual windows, use SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). + ImVec2 WindowTitleAlign; // Alignment for title bar text. Defaults to (0.0f,0.5f) for left-aligned,vertically centered. + ImGuiDir WindowMenuButtonPosition; // Side of the collapsing/docking button in the title bar (None/Left/Right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Left. + float ChildRounding; // Radius of child window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows. + float ChildBorderSize; // Thickness of border around child windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly). + float PopupRounding; // Radius of popup window corners rounding. (Note that tooltip windows use WindowRounding) + float PopupBorderSize; // Thickness of border around popup/tooltip windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly). + ImVec2 FramePadding; // Padding within a framed rectangle (used by most widgets). + float FrameRounding; // Radius of frame corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular frame (used by most widgets). + float FrameBorderSize; // Thickness of border around frames. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly). + ImVec2 ItemSpacing; // Horizontal and vertical spacing between widgets/lines. + ImVec2 ItemInnerSpacing; // Horizontal and vertical spacing between within elements of a composed widget (e.g. a slider and its label). + ImVec2 CellPadding; // Padding within a table cell. CellPadding.y may be altered between different rows. + ImVec2 TouchExtraPadding; // Expand reactive bounding box for touch-based system where touch position is not accurate enough. Unfortunately we don't sort widgets so priority on overlap will always be given to the first widget. So don't grow this too much! + float IndentSpacing; // Horizontal indentation when e.g. entering a tree node. Generally == (FontSize + FramePadding.x*2). + float ColumnsMinSpacing; // Minimum horizontal spacing between two columns. Preferably > (FramePadding.x + 1). + float ScrollbarSize; // Width of the vertical scrollbar, Height of the horizontal scrollbar. + float ScrollbarRounding; // Radius of grab corners for scrollbar. + float GrabMinSize; // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar. + float GrabRounding; // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs. + float LogSliderDeadzone; // The size in pixels of the dead-zone around zero on logarithmic sliders that cross zero. + float TabRounding; // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs. + float TabBorderSize; // Thickness of border around tabs. + float TabMinWidthForCloseButton; // Minimum width for close button to appear on an unselected tab when hovered. Set to 0.0f to always show when hovering, set to FLT_MAX to never show close button unless selected. + ImGuiDir ColorButtonPosition; // Side of the color button in the ColorEdit4 widget (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Right. + ImVec2 ButtonTextAlign; // Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. Defaults to (0.5f, 0.5f) (centered). + ImVec2 SelectableTextAlign; // Alignment of selectable text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned). It's generally important to keep this left-aligned if you want to lay multiple items on a same line. + float SeparatorTextBorderSize; // Thickkness of border in SeparatorText() + ImVec2 SeparatorTextAlign; // Alignment of text within the separator. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.5f) (left aligned, center). + ImVec2 SeparatorTextPadding; // Horizontal offset of text from each edge of the separator + spacing on other axis. Generally small values. .y is recommended to be == FramePadding.y. + ImVec2 DisplayWindowPadding; // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area or monitors by at least this amount. Only applies to regular windows. + ImVec2 DisplaySafeAreaPadding; // If you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Apply to popups/tooltips as well regular windows. NB: Prefer configuring your TV sets correctly! + float MouseCursorScale; // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). May be removed later. + bool AntiAliasedLines; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders. Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList). + bool AntiAliasedLinesUseTex; // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures where possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering). Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList). + bool AntiAliasedFill; // Enable anti-aliased edges around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles, etc.). Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList). + float CurveTessellationTol; // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() without a specific number of segments. Decrease for highly tessellated curves (higher quality, more polygons), increase to reduce quality. + float CircleTessellationMaxError; // Maximum error (in pixels) allowed when using AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() or drawing rounded corner rectangles with no explicit segment count specified. Decrease for higher quality but more geometry. + float WindowShadowSize; // Size (in pixels) of window shadows. Set this to zero to disable shadows. + float WindowShadowOffsetDist; // Offset distance (in pixels) of window shadows from casting window. + float WindowShadowOffsetAngle; // Offset angle of window shadows from casting window (0.0f = left, 0.5f*PI = bottom, 1.0f*PI = right, 1.5f*PI = top). + ImVec4 Colors[ImGuiCol_COUNT]; + + // Behaviors + // (It is possible to modify those fields mid-frame if specific behavior need it, unlike e.g. configuration fields in ImGuiIO) + float HoverStationaryDelay; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary). Time required to consider mouse stationary. + float HoverDelayShort; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort). Usually used along with HoverStationaryDelay. + float HoverDelayNormal; // Delay for IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal). " + ImGuiHoveredFlags HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse;// Default flags when using IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) or BeginItemTooltip()/SetItemTooltip() while using mouse. + ImGuiHoveredFlags HoverFlagsForTooltipNav; // Default flags when using IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip) or BeginItemTooltip()/SetItemTooltip() while using keyboard/gamepad. + + // modified by asphyxia + float AnimationSpeed = 1.f; // default animation duration = 1.f + + IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle(); + IMGUI_API void ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor); +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiIO +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Communicate most settings and inputs/outputs to Dear ImGui using this structure. +// Access via ImGui::GetIO(). Read 'Programmer guide' section in .cpp file for general usage. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// [Internal] Storage used by IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions. +// If prior to 1.87 you used io.KeysDownDuration[] (which was marked as internal), you should use GetKeyData(key)->DownDuration and *NOT* io.KeysData[key]->DownDuration. +struct ImGuiKeyData +{ + bool Down; // True for if key is down + float DownDuration; // Duration the key has been down (<0.0f: not pressed, 0.0f: just pressed, >0.0f: time held) + float DownDurationPrev; // Last frame duration the key has been down + float AnalogValue; // 0.0f..1.0f for gamepad values +}; + +struct ImGuiIO +{ + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + // Configuration // Default value + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + + ImGuiConfigFlags ConfigFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiConfigFlags_ enum. Set by user/application. Gamepad/keyboard navigation options, etc. + ImGuiBackendFlags BackendFlags; // = 0 // See ImGuiBackendFlags_ enum. Set by backend (imgui_impl_xxx files or custom backend) to communicate features supported by the backend. + ImVec2 DisplaySize; // // Main display size, in pixels (generally == GetMainViewport()->Size). May change every frame. + float DeltaTime; // = 1.0f/60.0f // Time elapsed since last frame, in seconds. May change every frame. + float IniSavingRate; // = 5.0f // Minimum time between saving positions/sizes to .ini file, in seconds. + const char* IniFilename; // = "imgui.ini" // Path to .ini file (important: default "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir!). Set NULL to disable automatic .ini loading/saving or if you want to manually call LoadIniSettingsXXX() / SaveIniSettingsXXX() functions. + const char* LogFilename; // = "imgui_log.txt"// Path to .log file (default parameter to ImGui::LogToFile when no file is specified). + void* UserData; // = NULL // Store your own data. + + ImFontAtlas*Fonts; // // Font atlas: load, rasterize and pack one or more fonts into a single texture. + float FontGlobalScale; // = 1.0f // Global scale all fonts + bool FontAllowUserScaling; // = false // Allow user scaling text of individual window with CTRL+Wheel. + ImFont* FontDefault; // = NULL // Font to use on NewFrame(). Use NULL to uses Fonts->Fonts[0]. + ImVec2 DisplayFramebufferScale; // = (1, 1) // For retina display or other situations where window coordinates are different from framebuffer coordinates. This generally ends up in ImDrawData::FramebufferScale. + + // Miscellaneous options + bool MouseDrawCursor; // = false // Request ImGui to draw a mouse cursor for you (if you are on a platform without a mouse cursor). Cannot be easily renamed to 'io.ConfigXXX' because this is frequently used by backend implementations. + bool ConfigMacOSXBehaviors; // = defined(__APPLE__) // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl, Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl, Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End, Double click selects by word instead of selecting whole text, Multi-selection in lists uses Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl. + bool ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue; // = true // Enable input queue trickling: some types of events submitted during the same frame (e.g. button down + up) will be spread over multiple frames, improving interactions with low framerates. + bool ConfigInputTextCursorBlink; // = true // Enable blinking cursor (optional as some users consider it to be distracting). + bool ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive; // = false // [BETA] Pressing Enter will keep item active and select contents (single-line only). + bool ConfigDragClickToInputText; // = false // [BETA] Enable turning DragXXX widgets into text input with a simple mouse click-release (without moving). Not desirable on devices without a keyboard. + bool ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges; // = true // Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner. This requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback. (This used to be a per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide flag) + bool ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly; // = false // Enable allowing to move windows only when clicking on their title bar. Does not apply to windows without a title bar. + float ConfigMemoryCompactTimer; // = 60.0f // Timer (in seconds) to free transient windows/tables memory buffers when unused. Set to -1.0f to disable. + + // Inputs Behaviors + // (other variables, ones which are expected to be tweaked within UI code, are exposed in ImGuiStyle) + float MouseDoubleClickTime; // = 0.30f // Time for a double-click, in seconds. + float MouseDoubleClickMaxDist; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold to stay in to validate a double-click, in pixels. + float MouseDragThreshold; // = 6.0f // Distance threshold before considering we are dragging. + float KeyRepeatDelay; // = 0.275f // When holding a key/button, time before it starts repeating, in seconds (for buttons in Repeat mode, etc.). + float KeyRepeatRate; // = 0.050f // When holding a key/button, rate at which it repeats, in seconds. + + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + // Debug options + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + + // Tools to test correct Begin/End and BeginChild/EndChild behaviors. + // Presently Begin()/End() and BeginChild()/EndChild() needs to ALWAYS be called in tandem, regardless of return value of BeginXXX() + // This is inconsistent with other BeginXXX functions and create confusion for many users. + // We expect to update the API eventually. In the meanwhile we provide tools to facilitate checking user-code behavior. + bool ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueOnce;// = false // First-time calls to Begin()/BeginChild() will return false. NEEDS TO BE SET AT APPLICATION BOOT TIME if you don't want to miss windows. + bool ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop;// = false // Some calls to Begin()/BeginChild() will return false. Will cycle through window depths then repeat. Suggested use: add "io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValue = io.KeyShift" in your main loop then occasionally press SHIFT. Windows should be flickering while running. + + // Option to deactivate io.AddFocusEvent(false) handling. May facilitate interactions with a debugger when focus loss leads to clearing inputs data. + // Backends may have other side-effects on focus loss, so this will reduce side-effects but not necessary remove all of them. + // Consider using e.g. Win32's IsDebuggerPresent() as an additional filter (or see ImOsIsDebuggerPresent() in imgui_test_engine/imgui_te_utils.cpp for a Unix compatible version). + bool ConfigDebugIgnoreFocusLoss; // = false // Ignore io.AddFocusEvent(false), consequently not calling io.ClearInputKeys() in input processing. + + // Options to audit .ini data + bool ConfigDebugIniSettings; // = false // Save .ini data with extra comments (particularly helpful for Docking, but makes saving slower) + + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + // Platform Functions + // (the imgui_impl_xxxx backend files are setting those up for you) + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + + // Optional: Platform/Renderer backend name (informational only! will be displayed in About Window) + User data for backend/wrappers to store their own stuff. + const char* BackendPlatformName; // = NULL + const char* BackendRendererName; // = NULL + void* BackendPlatformUserData; // = NULL // User data for platform backend + void* BackendRendererUserData; // = NULL // User data for renderer backend + void* BackendLanguageUserData; // = NULL // User data for non C++ programming language backend + + // Optional: Access OS clipboard + // (default to use native Win32 clipboard on Windows, otherwise uses a private clipboard. Override to access OS clipboard on other architectures) + const char* (*GetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data); + void (*SetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data, const char* text); + void* ClipboardUserData; + + // Optional: Notify OS Input Method Editor of the screen position of your cursor for text input position (e.g. when using Japanese/Chinese IME on Windows) + // (default to use native imm32 api on Windows) + void (*SetPlatformImeDataFn)(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data); +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + void* ImeWindowHandle; // = NULL // [Obsolete] Set ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw instead. Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor positioning. +#else + void* _UnusedPadding; // Unused field to keep data structure the same size. +#endif + + // Optional: Platform locale + ImWchar PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint; // '.' // [Experimental] Configure decimal point e.g. '.' or ',' useful for some languages (e.g. German), generally pulled from *localeconv()->decimal_point + + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + // Input - Call before calling NewFrame() + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + + // Input Functions + IMGUI_API void AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down); // Queue a new key down/up event. Key should be "translated" (as in, generally ImGuiKey_A matches the key end-user would use to emit an 'A' character) + IMGUI_API void AddKeyAnalogEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down, float v); // Queue a new key down/up event for analog values (e.g. ImGuiKey_Gamepad_ values). Dead-zones should be handled by the backend. + IMGUI_API void AddMousePosEvent(float x, float y); // Queue a mouse position update. Use -FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX to signify no mouse (e.g. app not focused and not hovered) + IMGUI_API void AddMouseButtonEvent(int button, bool down); // Queue a mouse button change + IMGUI_API void AddMouseWheelEvent(float wheel_x, float wheel_y); // Queue a mouse wheel update. wheel_y<0: scroll down, wheel_y>0: scroll up, wheel_x<0: scroll right, wheel_x>0: scroll left. + IMGUI_API void AddMouseSourceEvent(ImGuiMouseSource source); // Queue a mouse source change (Mouse/TouchScreen/Pen) + IMGUI_API void AddFocusEvent(bool focused); // Queue a gain/loss of focus for the application (generally based on OS/platform focus of your window) + IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c); // Queue a new character input + IMGUI_API void AddInputCharacterUTF16(ImWchar16 c); // Queue a new character input from a UTF-16 character, it can be a surrogate + IMGUI_API void AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* str); // Queue a new characters input from a UTF-8 string + + IMGUI_API void SetKeyEventNativeData(ImGuiKey key, int native_keycode, int native_scancode, int native_legacy_index = -1); // [Optional] Specify index for legacy <1.87 IsKeyXXX() functions with native indices + specify native keycode, scancode. + IMGUI_API void SetAppAcceptingEvents(bool accepting_events); // Set master flag for accepting key/mouse/text events (default to true). Useful if you have native dialog boxes that are interrupting your application loop/refresh, and you want to disable events being queued while your app is frozen. + IMGUI_API void ClearEventsQueue(); // Clear all incoming events. + IMGUI_API void ClearInputKeys(); // Clear current keyboard/mouse/gamepad state + current frame text input buffer. Equivalent to releasing all keys/buttons. +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + IMGUI_API void ClearInputCharacters(); // [Obsolete] Clear the current frame text input buffer. Now included within ClearInputKeys(). +#endif + + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + // Output - Updated by NewFrame() or EndFrame()/Render() + // (when reading from the io.WantCaptureMouse, io.WantCaptureKeyboard flags to dispatch your inputs, it is + // generally easier and more correct to use their state BEFORE calling NewFrame(). See FAQ for details!) + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + + bool WantCaptureMouse; // Set when Dear ImGui will use mouse inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way, always pass on mouse inputs to imgui). (e.g. unclicked mouse is hovering over an imgui window, widget is active, mouse was clicked over an imgui window, etc.). + bool WantCaptureKeyboard; // Set when Dear ImGui will use keyboard inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way, always pass keyboard inputs to imgui). (e.g. InputText active, or an imgui window is focused and navigation is enabled, etc.). + bool WantTextInput; // Mobile/console: when set, you may display an on-screen keyboard. This is set by Dear ImGui when it wants textual keyboard input to happen (e.g. when a InputText widget is active). + bool WantSetMousePos; // MousePos has been altered, backend should reposition mouse on next frame. Rarely used! Set only when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag is enabled. + bool WantSaveIniSettings; // When manual .ini load/save is active (io.IniFilename == NULL), this will be set to notify your application that you can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory() and save yourself. Important: clear io.WantSaveIniSettings yourself after saving! + bool NavActive; // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is currently allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events) = a window is focused and it doesn't use the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag. + bool NavVisible; // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is visible and allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events). + float Framerate; // Estimate of application framerate (rolling average over 60 frames, based on io.DeltaTime), in frame per second. Solely for convenience. Slow applications may not want to use a moving average or may want to reset underlying buffers occasionally. + int MetricsRenderVertices; // Vertices output during last call to Render() + int MetricsRenderIndices; // Indices output during last call to Render() = number of triangles * 3 + int MetricsRenderWindows; // Number of visible windows + int MetricsActiveWindows; // Number of active windows + int MetricsActiveAllocations; // Number of active allocations, updated by MemAlloc/MemFree based on current context. May be off if you have multiple imgui contexts. + ImVec2 MouseDelta; // Mouse delta. Note that this is zero if either current or previous position are invalid (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX), so a disappearing/reappearing mouse won't have a huge delta. + + // Legacy: before 1.87, we required backend to fill io.KeyMap[] (imgui->native map) during initialization and io.KeysDown[] (native indices) every frame. + // This is still temporarily supported as a legacy feature. However the new preferred scheme is for backend to call io.AddKeyEvent(). + // Old (<1.87): ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGui::GetIO().KeyMap[ImGuiKey_Space]) --> New (1.87+) ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space) +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + int KeyMap[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Input: map of indices into the KeysDown[512] entries array which represent your "native" keyboard state. The first 512 are now unused and should be kept zero. Legacy backend will write into KeyMap[] using ImGuiKey_ indices which are always >512. + bool KeysDown[ImGuiKey_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Input: Keyboard keys that are pressed (ideally left in the "native" order your engine has access to keyboard keys, so you can use your own defines/enums for keys). This used to be [512] sized. It is now ImGuiKey_COUNT to allow legacy io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex(...)] to work without an overflow. + float NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT]; // [LEGACY] Since 1.88, NavInputs[] was removed. Backends from 1.60 to 1.86 won't build. Feed gamepad inputs via io.AddKeyEvent() and ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX enums. +#endif + + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + // [Internal] Dear ImGui will maintain those fields. Forward compatibility not guaranteed! + //------------------------------------------------------------------ + + ImGuiContext* Ctx; // Parent UI context (needs to be set explicitly by parent). + + // Main Input State + // (this block used to be written by backend, since 1.87 it is best to NOT write to those directly, call the AddXXX functions above instead) + // (reading from those variables is fair game, as they are extremely unlikely to be moving anywhere) + ImVec2 MousePos; // Mouse position, in pixels. Set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX) if mouse is unavailable (on another screen, etc.) + bool MouseDown[5]; // Mouse buttons: 0=left, 1=right, 2=middle + extras (ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT == 5). Dear ImGui mostly uses left and right buttons. Other buttons allow us to track if the mouse is being used by your application + available to user as a convenience via IsMouse** API. + float MouseWheel; // Mouse wheel Vertical: 1 unit scrolls about 5 lines text. >0 scrolls Up, <0 scrolls Down. Hold SHIFT to turn vertical scroll into horizontal scroll. + float MouseWheelH; // Mouse wheel Horizontal. >0 scrolls Left, <0 scrolls Right. Most users don't have a mouse with a horizontal wheel, may not be filled by all backends. + ImGuiMouseSource MouseSource; // Mouse actual input peripheral (Mouse/TouchScreen/Pen). + bool KeyCtrl; // Keyboard modifier down: Control + bool KeyShift; // Keyboard modifier down: Shift + bool KeyAlt; // Keyboard modifier down: Alt + bool KeySuper; // Keyboard modifier down: Cmd/Super/Windows + + // Other state maintained from data above + IO function calls + ImGuiKeyChord KeyMods; // Key mods flags (any of ImGuiMod_Ctrl/ImGuiMod_Shift/ImGuiMod_Alt/ImGuiMod_Super flags, same as io.KeyCtrl/KeyShift/KeyAlt/KeySuper but merged into flags. DOES NOT CONTAINS ImGuiMod_Shortcut which is pretranslated). Read-only, updated by NewFrame() + ImGuiKeyData KeysData[ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE]; // Key state for all known keys. Use IsKeyXXX() functions to access this. + bool WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose; // Alternative to WantCaptureMouse: (WantCaptureMouse == true && WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose == false) when a click over void is expected to close a popup. + ImVec2 MousePosPrev; // Previous mouse position (note that MouseDelta is not necessary == MousePos-MousePosPrev, in case either position is invalid) + ImVec2 MouseClickedPos[5]; // Position at time of clicking + double MouseClickedTime[5]; // Time of last click (used to figure out double-click) + bool MouseClicked[5]; // Mouse button went from !Down to Down (same as MouseClickedCount[x] != 0) + bool MouseDoubleClicked[5]; // Has mouse button been double-clicked? (same as MouseClickedCount[x] == 2) + ImU16 MouseClickedCount[5]; // == 0 (not clicked), == 1 (same as MouseClicked[]), == 2 (double-clicked), == 3 (triple-clicked) etc. when going from !Down to Down + ImU16 MouseClickedLastCount[5]; // Count successive number of clicks. Stays valid after mouse release. Reset after another click is done. + bool MouseReleased[5]; // Mouse button went from Down to !Down + bool MouseDownOwned[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window or over void blocked by a popup. We don't request mouse capture from the application if click started outside ImGui bounds. + bool MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[5]; // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window. + bool MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap; // On a non-Mac system, holding SHIFT requests WheelY to perform the equivalent of a WheelX event. On a Mac system this is already enforced by the system. + float MouseDownDuration[5]; // Duration the mouse button has been down (0.0f == just clicked) + float MouseDownDurationPrev[5]; // Previous time the mouse button has been down + float MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[5]; // Squared maximum distance of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point (used for moving thresholds) + float PenPressure; // Touch/Pen pressure (0.0f to 1.0f, should be >0.0f only when MouseDown[0] == true). Helper storage currently unused by Dear ImGui. + bool AppFocusLost; // Only modify via AddFocusEvent() + bool AppAcceptingEvents; // Only modify via SetAppAcceptingEvents() + ImS8 BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays; // -1: unknown, 0: using AddKeyEvent(), 1: using legacy io.KeysDown[] + bool BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray; // 0: using AddKeyAnalogEvent(), 1: writing to legacy io.NavInputs[] directly + ImWchar16 InputQueueSurrogate; // For AddInputCharacterUTF16() + ImVector InputQueueCharacters; // Queue of _characters_ input (obtained by platform backend). Fill using AddInputCharacter() helper. + + IMGUI_API ImGuiIO(); +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Misc data structures +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Shared state of InputText(), passed as an argument to your callback when a ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* flag is used. +// The callback function should return 0 by default. +// Callbacks (follow a flag name and see comments in ImGuiInputTextFlags_ declarations for more details) +// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit: Callback on buffer edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active) +// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways: Callback on each iteration +// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion: Callback on pressing TAB +// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory: Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows +// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter: Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard. +// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize: Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow. +struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData +{ + ImGuiContext* Ctx; // Parent UI context + ImGuiInputTextFlags EventFlag; // One ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* // Read-only + ImGuiInputTextFlags Flags; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only + void* UserData; // What user passed to InputText() // Read-only + + // Arguments for the different callback events + // - To modify the text buffer in a callback, prefer using the InsertChars() / DeleteChars() function. InsertChars() will take care of calling the resize callback if necessary. + // - If you know your edits are not going to resize the underlying buffer allocation, you may modify the contents of 'Buf[]' directly. You need to update 'BufTextLen' accordingly (0 <= BufTextLen < BufSize) and set 'BufDirty'' to true so InputText can update its internal state. + ImWchar EventChar; // Character input // Read-write // [CharFilter] Replace character with another one, or set to zero to drop. return 1 is equivalent to setting EventChar=0; + ImGuiKey EventKey; // Key pressed (Up/Down/TAB) // Read-only // [Completion,History] + char* Buf; // Text buffer // Read-write // [Resize] Can replace pointer / [Completion,History,Always] Only write to pointed data, don't replace the actual pointer! + int BufTextLen; // Text length (in bytes) // Read-write // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Exclude zero-terminator storage. In C land: == strlen(some_text), in C++ land: string.length() + int BufSize; // Buffer size (in bytes) = capacity+1 // Read-only // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Include zero-terminator storage. In C land == ARRAYSIZE(my_char_array), in C++ land: string.capacity()+1 + bool BufDirty; // Set if you modify Buf/BufTextLen! // Write // [Completion,History,Always] + int CursorPos; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always] + int SelectionStart; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always] == to SelectionEnd when no selection) + int SelectionEnd; // // Read-write // [Completion,History,Always] + + // Helper functions for text manipulation. + // Use those function to benefit from the CallbackResize behaviors. Calling those function reset the selection. + IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextCallbackData(); + IMGUI_API void DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count); + IMGUI_API void InsertChars(int pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); + void SelectAll() { SelectionStart = 0; SelectionEnd = BufTextLen; } + void ClearSelection() { SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = BufTextLen; } + bool HasSelection() const { return SelectionStart != SelectionEnd; } +}; + +// Resizing callback data to apply custom constraint. As enabled by SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Callback is called during the next Begin(). +// NB: For basic min/max size constraint on each axis you don't need to use the callback! The SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() parameters are enough. +struct ImGunSizeCallbackData +{ + void* UserData; // Read-only. What user passed to SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Generally store an integer or float in here (need reinterpret_cast<>). + ImVec2 Pos; // Read-only. Window position, for reference. + ImVec2 CurrentSize; // Read-only. Current window size. + ImVec2 DesiredSize; // Read-write. Desired size, based on user's mouse position. Write to this field to restrain resizing. +}; + +// Data payload for Drag and Drop operations: AcceptDragDropPayload(), GetDragDropPayload() +struct ImGuiPayload +{ + // Members + void* Data; // Data (copied and owned by dear imgui) + int DataSize; // Data size + + // [Internal] + ImGuiID SourceId; // Source item id + ImGuiID SourceParentId; // Source parent id (if available) + int DataFrameCount; // Data timestamp + char DataType[32 + 1]; // Data type tag (short user-supplied string, 32 characters max) + bool Preview; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse has been hovering the target item (nb: handle overlapping drag targets) + bool Delivery; // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse button is released over the target item. + + ImGuiPayload() { Clear(); } + void Clear() { SourceId = SourceParentId = 0; Data = NULL; DataSize = 0; memset(DataType, 0, sizeof(DataType)); DataFrameCount = -1; Preview = Delivery = false; } + bool IsDataType(const char* type) const { return DataFrameCount != -1 && strcmp(type, DataType) == 0; } + bool IsPreview() const { return Preview; } + bool IsDelivery() const { return Delivery; } +}; + +// Sorting specification for one column of a table (sizeof == 12 bytes) +struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs +{ + ImGuiID ColumnUserID; // User id of the column (if specified by a TableSetupColumn() call) + ImS16 ColumnIndex; // Index of the column + ImS16 SortOrder; // Index within parent ImGuiTableSortSpecs (always stored in order starting from 0, tables sorted on a single criteria will always have a 0 here) + ImGuiSortDirection SortDirection : 8; // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending (you can use this or SortSign, whichever is more convenient for your sort function) + + ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +// Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more) +// Obtained by calling TableGetSortSpecs(). +// When 'SpecsDirty == true' you can sort your data. It will be true with sorting specs have changed since last call, or the first time. +// Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting, else you may wastefully sort your data every frame! +struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs +{ + const ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* Specs; // Pointer to sort spec array. + int SpecsCount; // Sort spec count. Most often 1. May be > 1 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti is enabled. May be == 0 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate is enabled. + bool SpecsDirty; // Set to true when specs have changed since last time! Use this to sort again, then clear the flag. + + ImGuiTableSortSpecs() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, Math Operators, ImColor) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Helper: Unicode defines +#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID 0xFFFD // Invalid Unicode code point (standard value). +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32 +#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX 0x10FFFF // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build. +#else +#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX 0xFFFF // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build. +#endif + +// Helper: Execute a block of code at maximum once a frame. Convenient if you want to quickly create a UI within deep-nested code that runs multiple times every frame. +// Usage: static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame oaf; if (oaf) ImGui::Text("This will be called only once per frame"); +struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame +{ + ImGuiOnceUponAFrame() { RefFrame = -1; } + mutable int RefFrame; + operator bool() const { int current_frame = ImGui::GetFrameCount(); if (RefFrame == current_frame) return false; RefFrame = current_frame; return true; } +}; + +// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]" +struct ImGuiTextFilter +{ + IMGUI_API ImGuiTextFilter(const char* default_filter = ""); + IMGUI_API bool Draw(const char* label = "Filter (inc,-exc)", float width = 0.0f); // Helper calling InputText+Build + IMGUI_API bool PassFilter(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL) const; + IMGUI_API void Build(); + void Clear() { InputBuf[0] = 0; Build(); } + bool IsActive() const { return !Filters.empty(); } + + // [Internal] + struct ImGuiTextRange + { + const char* b; + const char* e; + + ImGuiTextRange() { b = e = NULL; } + ImGuiTextRange(const char* _b, const char* _e) { b = _b; e = _e; } + bool empty() const { return b == e; } + IMGUI_API void split(char separator, ImVector* out) const; + }; + char InputBuf[256]; + ImVectorFilters; + int CountGrep; +}; + +// Helper: Growable text buffer for logging/accumulating text +// (this could be called 'ImGuiTextBuilder' / 'ImGuiStringBuilder') +struct ImGuiTextBuffer +{ + ImVector Buf; + IMGUI_API static char EmptyString[1]; + + ImGuiTextBuffer() { } + inline char operator[](int i) const { IM_ASSERT(Buf.Data != NULL); return Buf.Data[i]; } + const char* begin() const { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.front() : EmptyString; } + const char* end() const { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.back() : EmptyString; } // Buf is zero-terminated, so end() will point on the zero-terminator + int size() const { return Buf.Size ? Buf.Size - 1 : 0; } + bool empty() const { return Buf.Size <= 1; } + void clear() { Buf.clear(); } + void reserve(int capacity) { Buf.reserve(capacity); } + const char* c_str() const { return Buf.Data ? Buf.Data : EmptyString; } + IMGUI_API void append(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL); + IMGUI_API void appendf(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2); + IMGUI_API void appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2); +}; + +// Helper: Key->Value storage +// Typically you don't have to worry about this since a storage is held within each Window. +// We use it to e.g. store collapse state for a tree (Int 0/1) +// This is optimized for efficient lookup (dichotomy into a contiguous buffer) and rare insertion (typically tied to user interactions aka max once a frame) +// You can use it as custom user storage for temporary values. Declare your own storage if, for example: +// - You want to manipulate the open/close state of a particular sub-tree in your interface (tree node uses Int 0/1 to store their state). +// - You want to store custom debug data easily without adding or editing structures in your code (probably not efficient, but convenient) +// Types are NOT stored, so it is up to you to make sure your Key don't collide with different types. +struct ImGuiStorage +{ + // [Internal] + struct ImGuiStoragePair + { + ImGuiID key; + union { int val_i; float val_f; void* val_p; }; + ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, int _val_i) { key = _key; val_i = _val_i; } + ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, float _val_f) { key = _key; val_f = _val_f; } + ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, void* _val_p) { key = _key; val_p = _val_p; } + }; + + ImVector Data; + + // - Get***() functions find pair, never add/allocate. Pairs are sorted so a query is O(log N) + // - Set***() functions find pair, insertion on demand if missing. + // - Sorted insertion is costly, paid once. A typical frame shouldn't need to insert any new pair. + void Clear() { Data.clear(); } + IMGUI_API int GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0) const; + IMGUI_API void SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val); + IMGUI_API bool GetBool(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false) const; + IMGUI_API void SetBool(ImGuiID key, bool val); + IMGUI_API float GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f) const; + IMGUI_API void SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val); + IMGUI_API void* GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const; // default_val is NULL + IMGUI_API void SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void* val); + + // - Get***Ref() functions finds pair, insert on demand if missing, return pointer. Useful if you intend to do Get+Set. + // - References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer. + // - A typical use case where this is convenient for quick hacking (e.g. add storage during a live Edit&Continue session if you can't modify existing struct) + // float* pvar = ImGui::GetFloatRef(key); ImGui::SliderFloat("var", pvar, 0, 100.0f); some_var += *pvar; + IMGUI_API int* GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0); + IMGUI_API bool* GetBoolRef(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false); + IMGUI_API float* GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f); + IMGUI_API void** GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val = NULL); + + // Use on your own storage if you know only integer are being stored (open/close all tree nodes) + IMGUI_API void SetAllInt(int val); + + // For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once. + IMGUI_API void BuildSortByKey(); +}; + +// Helper: Manually clip large list of items. +// If you have lots evenly spaced items and you have random access to the list, you can perform coarse +// clipping based on visibility to only submit items that are in view. +// The clipper calculates the range of visible items and advance the cursor to compensate for the non-visible items we have skipped. +// (Dear ImGui already clip items based on their bounds but: it needs to first layout the item to do so, and generally +// fetching/submitting your own data incurs additional cost. Coarse clipping using ImGuiListClipper allows you to easily +// scale using lists with tens of thousands of items without a problem) +// Usage: +// ImGuiListClipper clipper; +// clipper.Begin(1000); // We have 1000 elements, evenly spaced. +// while (clipper.Step()) +// for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++) +// ImGui::Text("line number %d", i); +// Generally what happens is: +// - Clipper lets you process the first element (DisplayStart = 0, DisplayEnd = 1) regardless of it being visible or not. +// - User code submit that one element. +// - Clipper can measure the height of the first element +// - Clipper calculate the actual range of elements to display based on the current clipping rectangle, position the cursor before the first visible element. +// - User code submit visible elements. +// - The clipper also handles various subtleties related to keyboard/gamepad navigation, wrapping etc. +struct ImGuiListClipper +{ + ImGuiContext* Ctx; // Parent UI context + int DisplayStart; // First item to display, updated by each call to Step() + int DisplayEnd; // End of items to display (exclusive) + int ItemsCount; // [Internal] Number of items + float ItemsHeight; // [Internal] Height of item after a first step and item submission can calculate it + float StartPosY; // [Internal] Cursor position at the time of Begin() or after table frozen rows are all processed + void* TempData; // [Internal] Internal data + + // items_count: Use INT_MAX if you don't know how many items you have (in which case the cursor won't be advanced in the final step) + // items_height: Use -1.0f to be calculated automatically on first step. Otherwise pass in the distance between your items, typically GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() or GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(). + IMGUI_API ImGuiListClipper(); + IMGUI_API ~ImGuiListClipper(); + IMGUI_API void Begin(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f); + IMGUI_API void End(); // Automatically called on the last call of Step() that returns false. + IMGUI_API bool Step(); // Call until it returns false. The DisplayStart/DisplayEnd fields will be set and you can process/draw those items. + + // Call IncludeItemByIndex() or IncludeItemsByIndex() *BEFORE* first call to Step() if you need a range of items to not be clipped, regardless of their visibility. + // (Due to alignment / padding of certain items it is possible that an extra item may be included on either end of the display range). + inline void IncludeItemByIndex(int item_index) { IncludeItemsByIndex(item_index, item_index + 1); } + IMGUI_API void IncludeItemsByIndex(int item_begin, int item_end); // item_end is exclusive e.g. use (42, 42+1) to make item 42 never clipped. + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + inline void IncludeRangeByIndices(int item_begin, int item_end) { IncludeItemsByIndex(item_begin, item_end); } // [renamed in 1.89.9] + inline void ForceDisplayRangeByIndices(int item_begin, int item_end) { IncludeItemsByIndex(item_begin, item_end); } // [renamed in 1.89.6] + //inline ImGuiListClipper(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f) { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ItemsCount = -1; Begin(items_count, items_height); } // [removed in 1.79] +#endif +}; + +// Helpers: ImVec2/ImVec4 operators +// - It is important that we are keeping those disabled by default so they don't leak in user space. +// - This is in order to allow user enabling implicit cast operators between ImVec2/ImVec4 and their own types (using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA in imconfig.h) +// - You can use '#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS' to import our operators, provided as a courtesy. +#ifdef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS_IMPLEMENTED +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF +static inline ImVec2 operator*(const ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs, lhs.y * rhs); } +static inline ImVec2 operator/(const ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x / rhs, lhs.y / rhs); } +static inline ImVec2 operator+(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x + rhs.x, lhs.y + rhs.y); } +static inline ImVec2 operator-(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x - rhs.x, lhs.y - rhs.y); } +static inline ImVec2 operator*(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y); } +static inline ImVec2 operator/(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x / rhs.x, lhs.y / rhs.y); } +static inline ImVec2 operator-(const ImVec2& lhs) { return ImVec2(-lhs.x, -lhs.y); } +static inline ImVec2& operator*=(ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs) { lhs.x *= rhs; lhs.y *= rhs; return lhs; } +static inline ImVec2& operator/=(ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs) { lhs.x /= rhs; lhs.y /= rhs; return lhs; } +static inline ImVec2& operator+=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { lhs.x += rhs.x; lhs.y += rhs.y; return lhs; } +static inline ImVec2& operator-=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { lhs.x -= rhs.x; lhs.y -= rhs.y; return lhs; } +static inline ImVec2& operator*=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { lhs.x *= rhs.x; lhs.y *= rhs.y; return lhs; } +static inline ImVec2& operator/=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { lhs.x /= rhs.x; lhs.y /= rhs.y; return lhs; } +static inline ImVec4 operator+(const ImVec4& lhs, const ImVec4& rhs) { return ImVec4(lhs.x + rhs.x, lhs.y + rhs.y, lhs.z + rhs.z, lhs.w + rhs.w); } +static inline ImVec4 operator-(const ImVec4& lhs, const ImVec4& rhs) { return ImVec4(lhs.x - rhs.x, lhs.y - rhs.y, lhs.z - rhs.z, lhs.w - rhs.w); } +static inline ImVec4 operator*(const ImVec4& lhs, const ImVec4& rhs) { return ImVec4(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y, lhs.z * rhs.z, lhs.w * rhs.w); } +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE +#endif + +// Helpers macros to generate 32-bit encoded colors +// User can declare their own format by #defining the 5 _SHIFT/_MASK macros in their imconfig file. +#ifndef IM_COL32_R_SHIFT +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR +#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT 16 +#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT 8 +#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT 0 +#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT 24 +#define IM_COL32_A_MASK 0xFF000000 +#else +#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT 0 +#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT 8 +#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT 16 +#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT 24 +#define IM_COL32_A_MASK 0xFF000000 +#endif +#endif +#define IM_COL32(R,G,B,A) (((ImU32)(A)<> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f), (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f), (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f), (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * (1.0f / 255.0f)) {} + inline operator ImU32() const { return ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(Value); } + inline operator ImVec4() const { return Value; } + + // FIXME-OBSOLETE: May need to obsolete/cleanup those helpers. + inline void SetHSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f){ ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, Value.x, Value.y, Value.z); Value.w = a; } + static ImColor HSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f) { float r, g, b; ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, r, g, b); return ImColor(r, g, b, a); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData) +// Hold a series of drawing commands. The user provides a renderer for ImDrawData which essentially contains an array of ImDrawList. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// The maximum line width to bake anti-aliased textures for. Build atlas with ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines to disable baking. +#ifndef IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX +#define IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX (63) +#endif + +// ImDrawCallback: Draw callbacks for advanced uses [configurable type: override in imconfig.h] +// NB: You most likely do NOT need to use draw callbacks just to create your own widget or customized UI rendering, +// you can poke into the draw list for that! Draw callback may be useful for example to: +// A) Change your GPU render state, +// B) render a complex 3D scene inside a UI element without an intermediate texture/render target, etc. +// The expected behavior from your rendering function is 'if (cmd.UserCallback != NULL) { cmd.UserCallback(parent_list, cmd); } else { RenderTriangles() }' +// If you want to override the signature of ImDrawCallback, you can simply use e.g. '#define ImDrawCallback MyDrawCallback' (in imconfig.h) + update rendering backend accordingly. +#ifndef ImDrawCallback +typedef void (*ImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList* parent_list, const ImDrawCmd* cmd); +#endif + +// Special Draw callback value to request renderer backend to reset the graphics/render state. +// The renderer backend needs to handle this special value, otherwise it will crash trying to call a function at this address. +// This is useful for example if you submitted callbacks which you know have altered the render state and you want it to be restored. +// It is not done by default because they are many perfectly useful way of altering render state for imgui contents (e.g. changing shader/blending settings before an Image call). +#define ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState (ImDrawCallback)(-1) + +// Typically, 1 command = 1 GPU draw call (unless command is a callback) +// - VtxOffset: When 'io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled, +// this fields allow us to render meshes larger than 64K vertices while keeping 16-bit indices. +// Backends made for <1.71. will typically ignore the VtxOffset fields. +// - The ClipRect/TextureId/VtxOffset fields must be contiguous as we memcmp() them together (this is asserted for). +struct ImDrawCmd +{ + ImVec4 ClipRect; // 4*4 // Clipping rectangle (x1, y1, x2, y2). Subtract ImDrawData->DisplayPos to get clipping rectangle in "viewport" coordinates + ImTextureID TextureId; // 4-8 // User-provided texture ID. Set by user in ImfontAtlas::SetTexID() for fonts or passed to Image*() functions. Ignore if never using images or multiple fonts atlas. + unsigned int VtxOffset; // 4 // Start offset in vertex buffer. ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset: always 0, otherwise may be >0 to support meshes larger than 64K vertices with 16-bit indices. + unsigned int IdxOffset; // 4 // Start offset in index buffer. + unsigned int ElemCount; // 4 // Number of indices (multiple of 3) to be rendered as triangles. Vertices are stored in the callee ImDrawList's vtx_buffer[] array, indices in idx_buffer[]. + ImDrawCallback UserCallback; // 4-8 // If != NULL, call the function instead of rendering the vertices. clip_rect and texture_id will be set normally. + void* UserCallbackData; // 4-8 // The draw callback code can access this. + + ImDrawCmd() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } // Also ensure our padding fields are zeroed + + // Since 1.83: returns ImTextureID associated with this draw call. Warning: DO NOT assume this is always same as 'TextureId' (we will change this function for an upcoming feature) + inline ImTextureID GetTexID() const { return TextureId; } +}; + +// Vertex layout +#ifndef IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT +struct ImDrawVert +{ + ImVec2 pos; + ImVec2 uv; + ImU32 col; +}; +#else +// You can override the vertex format layout by defining IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT in imconfig.h +// The code expect ImVec2 pos (8 bytes), ImVec2 uv (8 bytes), ImU32 col (4 bytes), but you can re-order them or add other fields as needed to simplify integration in your engine. +// The type has to be described within the macro (you can either declare the struct or use a typedef). This is because ImVec2/ImU32 are likely not declared at the time you'd want to set your type up. +// NOTE: IMGUI DOESN'T CLEAR THE STRUCTURE AND DOESN'T CALL A CONSTRUCTOR SO ANY CUSTOM FIELD WILL BE UNINITIALIZED. IF YOU ADD EXTRA FIELDS (SUCH AS A 'Z' COORDINATES) YOU WILL NEED TO CLEAR THEM DURING RENDER OR TO IGNORE THEM. +IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT; +#endif + +// [Internal] For use by ImDrawList +struct ImDrawCmdHeader +{ + ImVec4 ClipRect; + ImTextureID TextureId; + unsigned int VtxOffset; +}; + +// [Internal] For use by ImDrawListSplitter +struct ImDrawChannel +{ + ImVector _CmdBuffer; + ImVector _IdxBuffer; +}; + + +// Split/Merge functions are used to split the draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order. +// This is used by the Columns/Tables API, so items of each column can be batched together in a same draw call. +struct ImDrawListSplitter +{ + int _Current; // Current channel number (0) + int _Count; // Number of active channels (1+) + ImVector _Channels; // Draw channels (not resized down so _Count might be < Channels.Size) + + inline ImDrawListSplitter() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + inline ~ImDrawListSplitter() { ClearFreeMemory(); } + inline void Clear() { _Current = 0; _Count = 1; } // Do not clear Channels[] so our allocations are reused next frame + IMGUI_API void ClearFreeMemory(); + IMGUI_API void Split(ImDrawList* draw_list, int count); + IMGUI_API void Merge(ImDrawList* draw_list); + IMGUI_API void SetCurrentChannel(ImDrawList* draw_list, int channel_idx); +}; + +// Flags for ImDrawList functions +// (Legacy: bit 0 must always correspond to ImDrawFlags_Closed to be backward compatible with old API using a bool. Bits 1..3 must be unused) +enum ImDrawFlags_ +{ + ImDrawFlags_None = 0, + ImDrawFlags_Closed = 1 << 0, // PathStroke(), AddPolyline(): specify that shape should be closed (Important: this is always == 1 for legacy reason) + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft = 1 << 4, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x01. + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight = 1 << 5, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x02. + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft = 1 << 6, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x04. + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight = 1 << 7, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Wax 0x08. + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone = 1 << 8, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): disable rounding on all corners (when rounding > 0.0f). This is NOT zero, NOT an implicit flag! + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight, + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight, + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft, + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight, + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight, + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersDefault_ = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Default to ALL corners if none of the _RoundCornersXX flags are specified. + ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_ = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone, + ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground = 1 << 9, // Do not render the shadow shape under the objects to be shadowed to save on fill-rate or facilitate blending. Slower on CPU. +}; + +// Flags for ImDrawList instance. Those are set automatically by ImGui:: functions from ImGuiIO settings, and generally not manipulated directly. +// It is however possible to temporarily alter flags between calls to ImDrawList:: functions. +enum ImDrawListFlags_ +{ + ImDrawListFlags_None = 0, + ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines = 1 << 0, // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders (*2 the number of triangles for 1.0f wide line or lines thin enough to be drawn using textures, otherwise *3 the number of triangles) + ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = 1 << 1, // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures when possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering). + ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill = 1 << 2, // Enable anti-aliased edge around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles). + ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset = 1 << 3, // Can emit 'VtxOffset > 0' to allow large meshes. Set when 'ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled. +}; + +// Draw command list +// This is the low-level list of polygons that ImGui:: functions are filling. At the end of the frame, +// all command lists are passed to your ImGuiIO::RenderDrawListFn function for rendering. +// Each dear imgui window contains its own ImDrawList. You can use ImGui::GetWindowDrawList() to +// access the current window draw list and draw custom primitives. +// You can interleave normal ImGui:: calls and adding primitives to the current draw list. +// In single viewport mode, top-left is == GetMainViewport()->Pos (generally 0,0), bottom-right is == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size (generally io.DisplaySize). +// You are totally free to apply whatever transformation matrix to want to the data (depending on the use of the transformation you may want to apply it to ClipRect as well!) +// Important: Primitives are always added to the list and not culled (culling is done at higher-level by ImGui:: functions), if you use this API a lot consider coarse culling your drawn objects. +struct ImDrawList +{ + // This is what you have to render + ImVector CmdBuffer; // Draw commands. Typically 1 command = 1 GPU draw call, unless the command is a callback. + ImVector IdxBuffer; // Index buffer. Each command consume ImDrawCmd::ElemCount of those + ImVector VtxBuffer; // Vertex buffer. + ImDrawListFlags Flags; // Flags, you may poke into these to adjust anti-aliasing settings per-primitive. + + // [Internal, used while building lists] + unsigned int _VtxCurrentIdx; // [Internal] generally == VtxBuffer.Size unless we are past 64K vertices, in which case this gets reset to 0. + ImDrawListSharedData* _Data; // Pointer to shared draw data (you can use ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() to get the one from current ImGui context) + const char* _OwnerName; // Pointer to owner window's name for debugging + ImDrawVert* _VtxWritePtr; // [Internal] point within VtxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much) + ImDrawIdx* _IdxWritePtr; // [Internal] point within IdxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much) + ImVector _ClipRectStack; // [Internal] + ImVector _TextureIdStack; // [Internal] + ImVector _Path; // [Internal] current path building + ImDrawCmdHeader _CmdHeader; // [Internal] template of active commands. Fields should match those of CmdBuffer.back(). + ImDrawListSplitter _Splitter; // [Internal] for channels api (note: prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter!) + float _FringeScale; // [Internal] anti-alias fringe is scaled by this value, this helps to keep things sharp while zooming at vertex buffer content + + // If you want to create ImDrawList instances, pass them ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() or create and use your own ImDrawListSharedData (so you can use ImDrawList without ImGui) + ImDrawList(ImDrawListSharedData* shared_data) { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); _Data = shared_data; } + + ~ImDrawList() { _ClearFreeMemory(); } + IMGUI_API void PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect = false); // Render-level scissoring. This is passed down to your render function but not used for CPU-side coarse clipping. Prefer using higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() to affect logic (hit-testing and widget culling) + IMGUI_API void PushClipRectFullScreen(); + IMGUI_API void PopClipRect(); + IMGUI_API void PushTextureID(ImTextureID texture_id); + IMGUI_API void PopTextureID(); + inline ImVec2 GetClipRectMin() const { const ImVec4& cr = _ClipRectStack.back(); return ImVec2(cr.x, cr.y); } + inline ImVec2 GetClipRectMax() const { const ImVec4& cr = _ClipRectStack.back(); return ImVec2(cr.z, cr.w); } + + // Primitives + // - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing. + // - For rectangular primitives, "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners. + // - For circle primitives, use "num_segments == 0" to automatically calculate tessellation (preferred). + // In older versions (until Dear ImGui 1.77) the AddCircle functions defaulted to num_segments == 12. + // In future versions we will use textures to provide cheaper and higher-quality circles. + // Use AddNgon() and AddNgonFilled() functions if you need to guarantee a specific number of sides. + IMGUI_API void AddLine(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f); + IMGUI_API void AddRect(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f); // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size) + IMGUI_API void AddRectFilled(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0); // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size) + IMGUI_API void AddRectFilledMultiColor(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left); + // modified by asphyxia + IMGUI_API void AddRectFilledMultiColorRounded(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags); + IMGUI_API void AddQuad(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f); + IMGUI_API void AddQuadFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col); + IMGUI_API void AddTriangle(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f); + IMGUI_API void AddTriangleFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col); + IMGUI_API void AddCircle(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0, float thickness = 1.0f); + IMGUI_API void AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0); + IMGUI_API void AddNgon(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness = 1.0f); + IMGUI_API void AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments); + IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL); + IMGUI_API void AddText(const ImFont* font, float font_size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, float wrap_width = 0.0f, const ImVec4* cpu_fine_clip_rect = NULL); + // modified by asphyxia + IMGUI_API void AddMultiColorText(const ImFont* pFont, const float flFontSize, const ImVec2& vecPosition, const char* szText, const ImU32 colRight, const ImU32 colLeft); + IMGUI_API void AddPolyline(const ImVec2* points, int num_points, ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness); + IMGUI_API void AddConvexPolyFilled(const ImVec2* points, int num_points, ImU32 col); + IMGUI_API void AddBezierCubic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points) + IMGUI_API void AddBezierQuadratic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0); // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points) + + // Image primitives + // - Read FAQ to understand what ImTextureID is. + // - "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners of the rectangle. + // - "uv_min" and "uv_max" represent the normalized texture coordinates to use for those corners. Using (0,0)->(1,1) texture coordinates will generally display the entire texture. + IMGUI_API void AddImage(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv_max = ImVec2(1, 1), ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE); + IMGUI_API void AddImageQuad(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv2 = ImVec2(1, 0), const ImVec2& uv3 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec2& uv4 = ImVec2(0, 1), ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE); + IMGUI_API void AddImageRounded(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min, const ImVec2& uv_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags = 0); + + // Shadows primitives + // [BETA] API + // - Add shadow for a object, with min/max or center/radius describing the object extents, and offset shifting the shadow. + // - Rounding parameters refer to the object itself, not the shadow! + // - By default, the area under the object is filled, because this is simpler to process. + // Using the ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground flag makes the function not render this area and leave a hole under the object. + // - Shadows w/ fill under the object: a bit faster for CPU, more pixels rendered, visible/darkening if used behind a transparent shape. + // Typically used by: small, frequent objects, opaque objects, transparent objects if shadow darkening isn't an issue. + // - Shadows w/ hole under the object: a bit slower for CPU, less pixels rendered, no difference if used behind a transparent shape. + // Typically used by: large, infrequent objects, transparent objects if exact blending/color matter. + // - FIXME-SHADOWS: 'offset' + ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground are not currently supported together with AddShadowCircle(), AddShadowConvexPoly(), AddShadowNGon(). + #define IMGUI_HAS_SHADOWS 1 + IMGUI_API void AddShadowRect(const ImVec2& obj_min, const ImVec2& obj_max, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float obj_rounding = 0.0f); + IMGUI_API void AddShadowCircle(const ImVec2& obj_center, float obj_radius, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, int obj_num_segments = 12); + IMGUI_API void AddShadowConvexPoly(const ImVec2* points, int points_count, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void AddShadowNGon(const ImVec2& obj_center, float obj_radius, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags, int obj_num_segments); + + // Stateful path API, add points then finish with PathFillConvex() or PathStroke() + // - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing. + inline void PathClear() { _Path.Size = 0; } + inline void PathLineTo(const ImVec2& pos) { _Path.push_back(pos); } + inline void PathLineToMergeDuplicate(const ImVec2& pos) { if (_Path.Size == 0 || memcmp(&_Path.Data[_Path.Size - 1], &pos, 8) != 0) _Path.push_back(pos); } + inline void PathFillConvex(ImU32 col) { AddConvexPolyFilled(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col); _Path.Size = 0; } + inline void PathStroke(ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f) { AddPolyline(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col, flags, thickness); _Path.Size = 0; } + IMGUI_API void PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments = 0); + IMGUI_API void PathArcToFast(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12); // Use precomputed angles for a 12 steps circle + IMGUI_API void PathBezierCubicCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points) + IMGUI_API void PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, int num_segments = 0); // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points) + IMGUI_API void PathRect(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0); + + // Advanced + IMGUI_API void AddCallback(ImDrawCallback callback, void* callback_data); // Your rendering function must check for 'UserCallback' in ImDrawCmd and call the function instead of rendering triangles. + IMGUI_API void AddDrawCmd(); // This is useful if you need to forcefully create a new draw call (to allow for dependent rendering / blending). Otherwise primitives are merged into the same draw-call as much as possible + IMGUI_API ImDrawList* CloneOutput() const; // Create a clone of the CmdBuffer/IdxBuffer/VtxBuffer. + + // Advanced: Channels + // - Use to split render into layers. By switching channels to can render out-of-order (e.g. submit FG primitives before BG primitives) + // - Use to minimize draw calls (e.g. if going back-and-forth between multiple clipping rectangles, prefer to append into separate channels then merge at the end) + // - This API shouldn't have been in ImDrawList in the first place! + // Prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter as you can stack them. + // Using the ImDrawList::ChannelsXXXX you cannot stack a split over another. + inline void ChannelsSplit(int count) { _Splitter.Split(this, count); } + inline void ChannelsMerge() { _Splitter.Merge(this); } + inline void ChannelsSetCurrent(int n) { _Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(this, n); } + + // Advanced: Primitives allocations + // - We render triangles (three vertices) + // - All primitives needs to be reserved via PrimReserve() beforehand. + IMGUI_API void PrimReserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count); + IMGUI_API void PrimUnreserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count); + IMGUI_API void PrimRect(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, ImU32 col); // Axis aligned rectangle (composed of two triangles) + IMGUI_API void PrimRectUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, ImU32 col); + IMGUI_API void PrimQuadUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& d, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, const ImVec2& uv_c, const ImVec2& uv_d, ImU32 col); + inline void PrimWriteVtx(const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& uv, ImU32 col) { _VtxWritePtr->pos = pos; _VtxWritePtr->uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr->col = col; _VtxWritePtr++; _VtxCurrentIdx++; } + inline void PrimWriteIdx(ImDrawIdx idx) { *_IdxWritePtr = idx; _IdxWritePtr++; } + inline void PrimVtx(const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& uv, ImU32 col) { PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx); PrimWriteVtx(pos, uv, col); } // Write vertex with unique index + + // Obsolete names + //inline void AddBezierCurve(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0) { AddBezierCubic(p1, p2, p3, p4, col, thickness, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021) + //inline void PathBezierCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0) { PathBezierCubicCurveTo(p2, p3, p4, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021) + + // [Internal helpers] + IMGUI_API void _ResetForNewFrame(); + IMGUI_API void _ClearFreeMemory(); + IMGUI_API void _PopUnusedDrawCmd(); + IMGUI_API void _TryMergeDrawCmds(); + IMGUI_API void _OnChangedClipRect(); + IMGUI_API void _OnChangedTextureID(); + IMGUI_API void _OnChangedVtxOffset(); + IMGUI_API int _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(float radius) const; + IMGUI_API void _PathArcToFastEx(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_sample, int a_max_sample, int a_step); + IMGUI_API void _PathArcToN(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments); +}; + +// All draw data to render a Dear ImGui frame +// (NB: the style and the naming convention here is a little inconsistent, we currently preserve them for backward compatibility purpose, +// as this is one of the oldest structure exposed by the library! Basically, ImDrawList == CmdList) +struct ImDrawData +{ + bool Valid; // Only valid after Render() is called and before the next NewFrame() is called. + int CmdListsCount; // Number of ImDrawList* to render (should always be == CmdLists.size) + int TotalIdxCount; // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's IdxBuffer.Size + int TotalVtxCount; // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's VtxBuffer.Size + ImVector CmdLists; // Array of ImDrawList* to render. The ImDrawLists are owned by ImGuiContext and only pointed to from here. + ImVec2 DisplayPos; // Top-left position of the viewport to render (== top-left of the orthogonal projection matrix to use) (== GetMainViewport()->Pos for the main viewport, == (0.0) in most single-viewport applications) + ImVec2 DisplaySize; // Size of the viewport to render (== GetMainViewport()->Size for the main viewport, == io.DisplaySize in most single-viewport applications) + ImVec2 FramebufferScale; // Amount of pixels for each unit of DisplaySize. Based on io.DisplayFramebufferScale. Generally (1,1) on normal display, (2,2) on OSX with Retina display. + ImGuiViewport* OwnerViewport; // Viewport carrying the ImDrawData instance, might be of use to the renderer (generally not). + + // Functions + ImDrawData() { Clear(); } + IMGUI_API void Clear(); + IMGUI_API void AddDrawList(ImDrawList* draw_list); // Helper to add an external draw list into an existing ImDrawData. + IMGUI_API void DeIndexAllBuffers(); // Helper to convert all buffers from indexed to non-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering! + IMGUI_API void ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& fb_scale); // Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than Dear ImGui expects, or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution. +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFont) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// [Internal] Shadow texture baking config +struct ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig +{ + int TexCornerSize; // Size of the corner areas. + int TexEdgeSize; // Size of the edge areas (and by extension the center). Changing this is normally unnecessary. + float TexFalloffPower; // The power factor for the shadow falloff curve. + float TexDistanceFieldOffset; // How much to offset the distance field by (allows over/under-shadowing, potentially useful for accommodating rounded corners on the "casting" shape). + bool TexBlur; // Do we want to Gaussian blur the shadow texture? + + inline ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + IMGUI_API void SetupDefaults(); + int GetRectTexPadding() const { return 2; } // Number of pixels of padding to add to the rectangular texture to avoid sampling artifacts at the edges. + int CalcRectTexSize() const { return TexCornerSize + TexEdgeSize + GetRectTexPadding(); } // The size of the texture area required for the actual 2x2 rectangle shadow texture (after the redundant corners have been removed). Padding is required here to avoid sampling artifacts at the edge adjoining the removed corners. int CalcConvexTexWidth() const; // The width of the texture area required for the convex shape shadow texture. + int GetConvexTexPadding() const { return 8; } // Number of pixels of padding to add to the convex shape texture to avoid sampling artifacts at the edges. This also acts as padding for the expanded corner triangles. + int CalcConvexTexWidth() const; // The width of the texture area required for the convex shape shadow texture. + int CalcConvexTexHeight() const; // The height of the texture area required for the convex shape shadow texture. +}; + +struct ImFontConfig +{ + void* FontData; // // TTF/OTF data + int FontDataSize; // // TTF/OTF data size + bool FontDataOwnedByAtlas; // true // TTF/OTF data ownership taken by the container ImFontAtlas (will delete memory itself). + int FontNo; // 0 // Index of font within TTF/OTF file + float SizePixels; // // Size in pixels for rasterizer (more or less maps to the resulting font height). + int OversampleH; // 2 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. Note the difference between 2 and 3 is minimal. You can reduce this to 1 for large glyphs save memory. Read https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/tests/oversample/README.md for details. + int OversampleV; // 1 // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. This is not really useful as we don't use sub-pixel positions on the Y axis. + bool PixelSnapH; // false // Align every glyph to pixel boundary. Useful e.g. if you are merging a non-pixel aligned font with the default font. If enabled, you can set OversampleH/V to 1. + ImVec2 GlyphExtraSpacing; // 0, 0 // Extra spacing (in pixels) between glyphs. Only X axis is supported for now. + ImVec2 GlyphOffset; // 0, 0 // Offset all glyphs from this font input. + const ImWchar* GlyphRanges; // NULL // THE ARRAY DATA NEEDS TO PERSIST AS LONG AS THE FONT IS ALIVE. Pointer to a user-provided list of Unicode range (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list). + float GlyphMinAdvanceX; // 0 // Minimum AdvanceX for glyphs, set Min to align font icons, set both Min/Max to enforce mono-space font + float GlyphMaxAdvanceX; // FLT_MAX // Maximum AdvanceX for glyphs + bool MergeMode; // false // Merge into previous ImFont, so you can combine multiple inputs font into one ImFont (e.g. ASCII font + icons + Japanese glyphs). You may want to use GlyphOffset.y when merge font of different heights. + unsigned int FontBuilderFlags; // 0 // Settings for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILDER IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Leave as zero if unsure. + float RasterizerMultiply; // 1.0f // Brighten (>1.0f) or darken (<1.0f) font output. Brightening small fonts may be a good workaround to make them more readable. + ImWchar EllipsisChar; // -1 // Explicitly specify unicode codepoint of ellipsis character. When fonts are being merged first specified ellipsis will be used. + + // [Internal] + char Name[40]; // Name (strictly to ease debugging) + ImFont* DstFont; + + IMGUI_API ImFontConfig(); +}; + +// Hold rendering data for one glyph. +// (Note: some language parsers may fail to convert the 31+1 bitfield members, in this case maybe drop store a single u32 or we can rework this) +struct ImFontGlyph +{ + unsigned int Colored : 1; // Flag to indicate glyph is colored and should generally ignore tinting (make it usable with no shift on little-endian as this is used in loops) + unsigned int Visible : 1; // Flag to indicate glyph has no visible pixels (e.g. space). Allow early out when rendering. + unsigned int Codepoint : 30; // 0x0000..0x10FFFF + float AdvanceX; // Distance to next character (= data from font + ImFontConfig::GlyphExtraSpacing.x baked in) + float X0, Y0, X1, Y1; // Glyph corners + float U0, V0, U1, V1; // Texture coordinates +}; + +// Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data. Feed your application strings/characters to it then call BuildRanges(). +// This is essentially a tightly packed of vector of 64k booleans = 8KB storage. +struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder +{ + ImVector UsedChars; // Store 1-bit per Unicode code point (0=unused, 1=used) + + ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder() { Clear(); } + inline void Clear() { int size_in_bytes = (IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX + 1) / 8; UsedChars.resize(size_in_bytes / (int)sizeof(ImU32)); memset(UsedChars.Data, 0, (size_t)size_in_bytes); } + inline bool GetBit(size_t n) const { int off = (int)(n >> 5); ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31); return (UsedChars[off] & mask) != 0; } // Get bit n in the array + inline void SetBit(size_t n) { int off = (int)(n >> 5); ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31); UsedChars[off] |= mask; } // Set bit n in the array + inline void AddChar(ImWchar c) { SetBit(c); } // Add character + IMGUI_API void AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // Add string (each character of the UTF-8 string are added) + IMGUI_API void AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges); // Add ranges, e.g. builder.AddRanges(ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault()) to force add all of ASCII/Latin+Ext + IMGUI_API void BuildRanges(ImVector* out_ranges); // Output new ranges +}; + +// See ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectXXX functions. +struct ImFontAtlasCustomRect +{ + unsigned short Width, Height; // Input // Desired rectangle dimension + unsigned short X, Y; // Output // Packed position in Atlas + unsigned int GlyphID; // Input // For custom font glyphs only (ID < 0x110000) + float GlyphAdvanceX; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: glyph xadvance + ImVec2 GlyphOffset; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: glyph display offset + ImFont* Font; // Input // For custom font glyphs only: target font + ImFontAtlasCustomRect() { Width = Height = 0; X = Y = 0xFFFF; GlyphID = 0; GlyphAdvanceX = 0.0f; GlyphOffset = ImVec2(0, 0); Font = NULL; } + bool IsPacked() const { return X != 0xFFFF; } +}; + +// Flags for ImFontAtlas build +enum ImFontAtlasFlags_ +{ + ImFontAtlasFlags_None = 0, + ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight = 1 << 0, // Don't round the height to next power of two + ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors = 1 << 1, // Don't build software mouse cursors into the atlas (save a little texture memory) + ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines = 1 << 2, // Don't build thick line textures into the atlas (save a little texture memory, allow support for point/nearest filtering). The AntiAliasedLinesUseTex features uses them, otherwise they will be rendered using polygons (more expensive for CPU/GPU). +}; + +// Load and rasterize multiple TTF/OTF fonts into a same texture. The font atlas will build a single texture holding: +// - One or more fonts. +// - Custom graphics data needed to render the shapes needed by Dear ImGui. +// - Mouse cursor shapes for software cursor rendering (unless setting 'Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors' in the font atlas). +// It is the user-code responsibility to setup/build the atlas, then upload the pixel data into a texture accessible by your graphics api. +// - Optionally, call any of the AddFont*** functions. If you don't call any, the default font embedded in the code will be loaded for you. +// - Call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32() to build and retrieve pixels data. +// - Upload the pixels data into a texture within your graphics system (see imgui_impl_xxxx.cpp examples) +// - Call SetTexID(my_tex_id); and pass the pointer/identifier to your texture in a format natural to your graphics API. +// This value will be passed back to you during rendering to identify the texture. Read FAQ entry about ImTextureID for more details. +// Common pitfalls: +// - If you pass a 'glyph_ranges' array to AddFont*** functions, you need to make sure that your array persist up until the +// atlas is build (when calling GetTexData*** or Build()). We only copy the pointer, not the data. +// - Important: By default, AddFontFromMemoryTTF() takes ownership of the data. Even though we are not writing to it, we will free the pointer on destruction. +// You can set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed, +// - Even though many functions are suffixed with "TTF", OTF data is supported just as well. +// - This is an old API and it is currently awkward for those and various other reasons! We will address them in the future! +struct ImFontAtlas +{ + IMGUI_API ImFontAtlas(); + IMGUI_API ~ImFontAtlas(); + IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg); + IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL); + IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); + IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after destruction of the atlas. Set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed. + IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_font_data, int compressed_font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp. + IMGUI_API ImFont* AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char* compressed_font_data_base85, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data_base85' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp with -base85 parameter. + IMGUI_API void ClearInputData(); // Clear input data (all ImFontConfig structures including sizes, TTF data, glyph ranges, etc.) = all the data used to build the texture and fonts. + IMGUI_API void ClearTexData(); // Clear output texture data (CPU side). Saves RAM once the texture has been copied to graphics memory. + IMGUI_API void ClearFonts(); // Clear output font data (glyphs storage, UV coordinates). + IMGUI_API void Clear(); // Clear all input and output. + + // Build atlas, retrieve pixel data. + // User is in charge of copying the pixels into graphics memory (e.g. create a texture with your engine). Then store your texture handle with SetTexID(). + // The pitch is always = Width * BytesPerPixels (1 or 4) + // Building in RGBA32 format is provided for convenience and compatibility, but note that unless you manually manipulate or copy color data into + // the texture (e.g. when using the AddCustomRect*** api), then the RGB pixels emitted will always be white (~75% of memory/bandwidth waste. + IMGUI_API bool Build(); // Build pixels data. This is called automatically for you by the GetTexData*** functions. + IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsAlpha8(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 1 byte per-pixel + IMGUI_API void GetTexDataAsRGBA32(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL); // 4 bytes-per-pixel + bool IsBuilt() const { return Fonts.Size > 0 && TexReady; } // Bit ambiguous: used to detect when user didn't build texture but effectively we should check TexID != 0 except that would be backend dependent... + void SetTexID(ImTextureID id) { TexID = id; } + + //------------------------------------------- + // Glyph Ranges + //------------------------------------------- + + // Helpers to retrieve list of common Unicode ranges (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list) + // NB: Make sure that your string are UTF-8 and NOT in your local code page. + // Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/blob/master/docs/FONTS.md/#about-utf-8-encoding for details. + // NB: Consider using ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to build glyph ranges from textual data. + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesDefault(); // Basic Latin, Extended Latin + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesGreek(); // Default + Greek and Coptic + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesKorean(); // Default + Korean characters + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesJapanese(); // Default + Hiragana, Katakana, Half-Width, Selection of 2999 Ideographs + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesChineseFull(); // Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + full set of about 21000 CJK Unified Ideographs + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesChineseSimplifiedCommon();// Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + set of 2500 CJK Unified Ideographs for common simplified Chinese + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesCyrillic(); // Default + about 400 Cyrillic characters + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesThai(); // Default + Thai characters + IMGUI_API const ImWchar* GetGlyphRangesVietnamese(); // Default + Vietnamese characters + + //------------------------------------------- + // [BETA] Custom Rectangles/Glyphs API + //------------------------------------------- + + // You can request arbitrary rectangles to be packed into the atlas, for your own purposes. + // - After calling Build(), you can query the rectangle position and render your pixels. + // - If you render colored output, set 'atlas->TexPixelsUseColors = true' as this may help some backends decide of prefered texture format. + // - You can also request your rectangles to be mapped as font glyph (given a font + Unicode point), + // so you can render e.g. custom colorful icons and use them as regular glyphs. + // - Read docs/FONTS.md for more details about using colorful icons. + // - Note: this API may be redesigned later in order to support multi-monitor varying DPI settings. + IMGUI_API int AddCustomRectRegular(int width, int height); + IMGUI_API int AddCustomRectFontGlyph(ImFont* font, ImWchar id, int width, int height, float advance_x, const ImVec2& offset = ImVec2(0, 0)); + ImFontAtlasCustomRect* GetCustomRectByIndex(int index) { IM_ASSERT(index >= 0); return &CustomRects[index]; } + + // [Internal] + IMGUI_API void CalcCustomRectUV(const ImFontAtlasCustomRect* rect, ImVec2* out_uv_min, ImVec2* out_uv_max) const; + IMGUI_API bool GetMouseCursorTexData(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor, ImVec2* out_offset, ImVec2* out_size, ImVec2 out_uv_border[2], ImVec2 out_uv_fill[2]); + + //------------------------------------------- + // Members + //------------------------------------------- + + ImFontAtlasFlags Flags; // Build flags (see ImFontAtlasFlags_) + ImTextureID TexID; // User data to refer to the texture once it has been uploaded to user's graphic systems. It is passed back to you during rendering via the ImDrawCmd structure. + int TexDesiredWidth; // Texture width desired by user before Build(). Must be a power-of-two. If have many glyphs your graphics API have texture size restrictions you may want to increase texture width to decrease height. + int TexGlyphPadding; // Padding between glyphs within texture in pixels. Defaults to 1. If your rendering method doesn't rely on bilinear filtering you may set this to 0 (will also need to set AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = false). + bool Locked; // Marked as Locked by ImGui::NewFrame() so attempt to modify the atlas will assert. + void* UserData; // Store your own atlas related user-data (if e.g. you have multiple font atlas). + + // [Internal] + // NB: Access texture data via GetTexData*() calls! Which will setup a default font for you. + bool TexReady; // Set when texture was built matching current font input + bool TexPixelsUseColors; // Tell whether our texture data is known to use colors (rather than just alpha channel), in order to help backend select a format. + unsigned char* TexPixelsAlpha8; // 1 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight + unsigned int* TexPixelsRGBA32; // 4 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight * 4 + int TexWidth; // Texture width calculated during Build(). + int TexHeight; // Texture height calculated during Build(). + ImVec2 TexUvScale; // = (1.0f/TexWidth, 1.0f/TexHeight) + ImVec2 TexUvWhitePixel; // Texture coordinates to a white pixel + ImVector Fonts; // Hold all the fonts returned by AddFont*. Fonts[0] is the default font upon calling ImGui::NewFrame(), use ImGui::PushFont()/PopFont() to change the current font. + ImVector CustomRects; // Rectangles for packing custom texture data into the atlas. + ImVector ConfigData; // Configuration data + ImVec4 TexUvLines[IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1]; // UVs for baked anti-aliased lines + + // [Internal] Font builder + const ImFontBuilderIO* FontBuilderIO; // Opaque interface to a font builder (default to stb_truetype, can be changed to use FreeType by defining IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE). + unsigned int FontBuilderFlags; // Shared flags (for all fonts) for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILD IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Per-font override is also available in ImFontConfig. + + // [Internal] Packing data + int PackIdMouseCursors; // Custom texture rectangle ID for white pixel and mouse cursors + int PackIdLines; // Custom texture rectangle ID for baked anti-aliased lines + + // [Internal] Shadow data + int ShadowRectIds[2]; // IDs of rect for shadow textures + ImVec4 ShadowRectUvs[10]; // UV coordinates for shadow textures, 9 for the rectangle shadows and the final entry for the convex shape shadows + ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig ShadowTexConfig; // Shadow texture baking config + + // [Obsolete] + //typedef ImFontAtlasCustomRect CustomRect; // OBSOLETED in 1.72+ + //typedef ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder GlyphRangesBuilder; // OBSOLETED in 1.67+ +}; + +// Font runtime data and rendering +// ImFontAtlas automatically loads a default embedded font for you when you call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32(). +struct ImFont +{ + // Members: Hot ~20/24 bytes (for CalcTextSize) + ImVector IndexAdvanceX; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Glyphs->AdvanceX in a directly indexable way (cache-friendly for CalcTextSize functions which only this this info, and are often bottleneck in large UI). + float FallbackAdvanceX; // 4 // out // = FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX + float FontSize; // 4 // in // // Height of characters/line, set during loading (don't change after loading) + + // Members: Hot ~28/40 bytes (for CalcTextSize + render loop) + ImVector IndexLookup; // 12-16 // out // // Sparse. Index glyphs by Unicode code-point. + ImVector Glyphs; // 12-16 // out // // All glyphs. + const ImFontGlyph* FallbackGlyph; // 4-8 // out // = FindGlyph(FontFallbackChar) + + // Members: Cold ~32/40 bytes + ImFontAtlas* ContainerAtlas; // 4-8 // out // // What we has been loaded into + const ImFontConfig* ConfigData; // 4-8 // in // // Pointer within ContainerAtlas->ConfigData + short ConfigDataCount; // 2 // in // ~ 1 // Number of ImFontConfig involved in creating this font. Bigger than 1 when merging multiple font sources into one ImFont. + ImWchar FallbackChar; // 2 // out // = FFFD/'?' // Character used if a glyph isn't found. + ImWchar EllipsisChar; // 2 // out // = '...'/'.'// Character used for ellipsis rendering. + short EllipsisCharCount; // 1 // out // 1 or 3 + float EllipsisWidth; // 4 // out // Width + float EllipsisCharStep; // 4 // out // Step between characters when EllipsisCount > 0 + bool DirtyLookupTables; // 1 // out // + float Scale; // 4 // in // = 1.f // Base font scale, multiplied by the per-window font scale which you can adjust with SetWindowFontScale() + float Ascent, Descent; // 4+4 // out // // Ascent: distance from top to bottom of e.g. 'A' [0..FontSize] + int MetricsTotalSurface;// 4 // out // // Total surface in pixels to get an idea of the font rasterization/texture cost (not exact, we approximate the cost of padding between glyphs) + ImU8 Used4kPagesMap[(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX+1)/4096/8]; // 2 bytes if ImWchar=ImWchar16, 34 bytes if ImWchar==ImWchar32. Store 1-bit for each block of 4K codepoints that has one active glyph. This is mainly used to facilitate iterations across all used codepoints. + + // Methods + IMGUI_API ImFont(); + IMGUI_API ~ImFont(); + IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyph(ImWchar c) const; + IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyphNoFallback(ImWchar c) const; + float GetCharAdvance(ImWchar c) const { return ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size) ? IndexAdvanceX[(int)c] : FallbackAdvanceX; } + bool IsLoaded() const { return ContainerAtlas != NULL; } + const char* GetDebugName() const { return ConfigData ? ConfigData->Name : ""; } + + // 'max_width' stops rendering after a certain width (could be turned into a 2d size). FLT_MAX to disable. + // 'wrap_width' enable automatic word-wrapping across multiple lines to fit into given width. 0.0f to disable. + IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcTextSizeA(float size, float max_width, float wrap_width, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, const char** remaining = NULL) const; // utf8 + IMGUI_API const char* CalcWordWrapPositionA(float scale, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width) const; + IMGUI_API void RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const; + IMGUI_API void RenderText(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const ImVec4& clip_rect, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width = 0.0f, bool cpu_fine_clip = false) const; + + // [Internal] Don't use! + IMGUI_API void BuildLookupTable(); + IMGUI_API void ClearOutputData(); + IMGUI_API void GrowIndex(int new_size); + IMGUI_API void AddGlyph(const ImFontConfig* src_cfg, ImWchar c, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float u0, float v0, float u1, float v1, float advance_x); + IMGUI_API void AddRemapChar(ImWchar dst, ImWchar src, bool overwrite_dst = true); // Makes 'dst' character/glyph points to 'src' character/glyph. Currently needs to be called AFTER fonts have been built. + IMGUI_API void SetGlyphVisible(ImWchar c, bool visible); + IMGUI_API bool IsGlyphRangeUnused(unsigned int c_begin, unsigned int c_last); +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Viewports +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Flags stored in ImGuiViewport::Flags, giving indications to the platform backends. +enum ImGuiViewportFlags_ +{ + ImGuiViewportFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow = 1 << 0, // Represent a Platform Window + ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformMonitor = 1 << 1, // Represent a Platform Monitor (unused yet) + ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp = 1 << 2, // Platform Window: is created/managed by the application (rather than a dear imgui backend) +}; + +// - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows. +// - In 'docking' branch with multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports. +// - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode. +// - About Main Area vs Work Area: +// - Main Area = entire viewport. +// - Work Area = entire viewport minus sections used by main menu bars (for platform windows), or by task bar (for platform monitor). +// - Windows are generally trying to stay within the Work Area of their host viewport. +struct ImGuiViewport +{ + ImGuiViewportFlags Flags; // See ImGuiViewportFlags_ + ImVec2 Pos; // Main Area: Position of the viewport (Dear ImGui coordinates are the same as OS desktop/native coordinates) + ImVec2 Size; // Main Area: Size of the viewport. + ImVec2 WorkPos; // Work Area: Position of the viewport minus task bars, menus bars, status bars (>= Pos) + ImVec2 WorkSize; // Work Area: Size of the viewport minus task bars, menu bars, status bars (<= Size) + + // Platform/Backend Dependent Data + void* PlatformHandleRaw; // void* to hold lower-level, platform-native window handle (under Win32 this is expected to be a HWND, unused for other platforms) + + ImGuiViewport() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + + // Helpers + ImVec2 GetCenter() const { return ImVec2(Pos.x + Size.x * 0.5f, Pos.y + Size.y * 0.5f); } + ImVec2 GetWorkCenter() const { return ImVec2(WorkPos.x + WorkSize.x * 0.5f, WorkPos.y + WorkSize.y * 0.5f); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// (Optional) Support for IME (Input Method Editor) via the io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function. +struct ImGuiPlatformImeData +{ + bool WantVisible; // A widget wants the IME to be visible + ImVec2 InputPos; // Position of the input cursor + float InputLineHeight; // Line height + + ImGuiPlatformImeData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types +// (Will be removed! Read 'API BREAKING CHANGES' section in imgui.cpp for details) +// Please keep your copy of dear imgui up to date! Occasionally set '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' in imconfig.h to stay ahead. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +namespace ImGui +{ +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + IMGUI_API ImGuiKey GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key); // map ImGuiKey_* values into legacy native key index. == io.KeyMap[key] +#else + static inline ImGuiKey GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key) { IM_ASSERT(key >= ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END && "ImGuiKey and native_index was merged together and native_index is disabled by IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO. Please switch to ImGuiKey."); return key; } +#endif +} + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS +namespace ImGui +{ + // OBSOLETED in 1.89.7 (from June 2023) + IMGUI_API void SetItemAllowOverlap(); // Use SetNextItemAllowOverlap() before item. + // OBSOLETED in 1.89.4 (from March 2023) + static inline void PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool tab_stop) { PushTabStop(tab_stop); } + static inline void PopAllowKeyboardFocus() { PopTabStop(); } + // OBSOLETED in 1.89 (from August 2022) + IMGUI_API bool ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1, 1), int frame_padding = -1, const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1, 1, 1, 1)); // Use new ImageButton() signature (explicit item id, regular FramePadding) + // OBSOLETED in 1.88 (from May 2022) + static inline void CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool want_capture_keyboard = true) { SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(want_capture_keyboard); } // Renamed as name was misleading + removed default value. + static inline void CaptureMouseFromApp(bool want_capture_mouse = true) { SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(want_capture_mouse); } // Renamed as name was misleading + removed default value. + // OBSOLETED in 1.86 (from November 2021) + IMGUI_API void CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end); // Calculate coarse clipping for large list of evenly sized items. Prefer using ImGuiListClipper. + // OBSOLETED in 1.85 (from August 2021) + static inline float GetWindowContentRegionWidth() { return GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x; } + + // Some of the older obsolete names along with their replacement (commented out so they are not reported in IDE) + //-- OBSOLETED in 1.81 (from February 2021) + //static inline bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)) { return BeginListBox(label, size); } + //static inline bool ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1) { float height = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * ((height_in_items < 0 ? ImMin(items_count, 7) : height_in_items) + 0.25f) + GetStyle().FramePadding.y * 2.0f; return BeginListBox(label, ImVec2(0.0f, height)); } // Helper to calculate size from items_count and height_in_items + //static inline void ListBoxFooter() { EndListBox(); } + //-- OBSOLETED in 1.79 (from August 2020) + //static inline void OpenPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiMouseButton mb = 1) { OpenPopupOnItemClick(str_id, mb); } // Bool return value removed. Use IsWindowAppearing() in BeginPopup() instead. Renamed in 1.77, renamed back in 1.79. Sorry! + //-- OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020): Old drag/sliders functions that took a 'float power > 1.0f' argument instead of ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic. See github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 for details. + //IMGUI_API bool DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //IMGUI_API bool DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f); // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //IMGUI_API bool SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f); // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //IMGUI_API bool SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f); // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //static inline bool SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power = 1.0f) { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); } // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020) + //-- OBSOLETED in 1.77 and before + //static inline bool BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, ImGuiMouseButton mb, bool over_items) { return BeginPopupContextWindow(str_id, mb | (over_items ? 0 : ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.77 (from June 2020) + //static inline void TreeAdvanceToLabelPos() { SetCursorPosX(GetCursorPosX() + GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); } // OBSOLETED in 1.72 (from July 2019) + //static inline void SetNextTreeNodeOpen(bool open, ImGuiCond cond = 0) { SetNextItemOpen(open, cond); } // OBSOLETED in 1.71 (from June 2019) + //static inline float GetContentRegionAvailWidth() { return GetContentRegionAvail().x; } // OBSOLETED in 1.70 (from May 2019) + //static inline ImDrawList* GetOverlayDrawList() { return GetForegroundDrawList(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.69 (from Mar 2019) + //static inline void SetScrollHere(float ratio = 0.5f) { SetScrollHereY(ratio); } // OBSOLETED in 1.66 (from Nov 2018) + //static inline bool IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() { return IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.63 (from Aug 2018) + //-- OBSOLETED in 1.60 and before + //static inline bool IsAnyWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (from Apr 2018) + //static inline bool IsAnyWindowHovered() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (between Dec 2017 and Apr 2018) + //static inline void ShowTestWindow() { return ShowDemoWindow(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) + //static inline bool IsRootWindowFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) + //static inline bool IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused() { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) + //static inline void SetNextWindowContentWidth(float w) { SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(w, 0.0f)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) + //static inline float GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing() { return GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017) + //IMGUI_API bool Begin(char* name, bool* p_open, ImVec2 size_first_use, float bg_alpha = -1.0f, ImGuiWindowFlags flags=0); // OBSOLETED in 1.52 (between Aug 2017 and Oct 2017): Equivalent of using SetNextWindowSize(size, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver) and SetNextWindowBgAlpha(). + //static inline bool IsRootWindowOrAnyChildHovered() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows); } // OBSOLETED in 1.52 (between Aug 2017 and Oct 2017) + //static inline void AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets() { AlignTextToFramePadding(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.52 (between Aug 2017 and Oct 2017) + //static inline void SetNextWindowPosCenter(ImGuiCond c=0) { SetNextWindowPos(GetMainViewport()->GetCenter(), c, ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.52 (between Aug 2017 and Oct 2017) + //static inline bool IsItemHoveredRect() { return IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly); } // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug 2017) + //static inline bool IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(const ImVec2&) { IM_ASSERT(0); return false; } // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug 2017): This was misleading and partly broken. You probably want to use the io.WantCaptureMouse flag instead. + //static inline bool IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); } // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug 2017) + //static inline bool IsMouseHoveringWindow() { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem); } // OBSOLETED in 1.51 (between Jun 2017 and Aug 2017) + //-- OBSOLETED in 1.50 and before + //static inline bool CollapsingHeader(char* label, const char* str_id, bool framed = true, bool default_open = false) { return CollapsingHeader(label, (default_open ? (1 << 5) : 0)); } // OBSOLETED in 1.49 + //static inline ImFont*GetWindowFont() { return GetFont(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.48 + //static inline float GetWindowFontSize() { return GetFontSize(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.48 + //static inline void SetScrollPosHere() { SetScrollHere(); } // OBSOLETED in 1.42 +} + +// OBSOLETED in 1.82 (from Mars 2021): flags for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), AddImageRounded(), PathRect() +typedef ImDrawFlags ImDrawCornerFlags; +enum ImDrawCornerFlags_ +{ + ImDrawCornerFlags_None = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone, // Was == 0 prior to 1.82, this is now == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone which is != 0 and not implicit + ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft, // Was == 0x01 (1 << 0) prior to 1.82. Order matches ImDrawFlags_NoRoundCorner* flag (we exploit this internally). + ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight, // Was == 0x02 (1 << 1) prior to 1.82. + ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft, // Was == 0x04 (1 << 2) prior to 1.82. + ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight, // Was == 0x08 (1 << 3) prior to 1.82. + ImDrawCornerFlags_All = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Was == 0x0F prior to 1.82 + ImDrawCornerFlags_Top = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight, + ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight, + ImDrawCornerFlags_Left = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft, + ImDrawCornerFlags_Right = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight, +}; + +// RENAMED and MERGED both ImGuiKey_ModXXX and ImGuiModFlags_XXX into ImGuiMod_XXX (from September 2022) +// RENAMED ImGuiKeyModFlags -> ImGuiModFlags in 1.88 (from April 2022). Exceptionally commented out ahead of obscolescence schedule to reduce confusion and because they were not meant to be used in the first place. +typedef ImGuiKeyChord ImGuiModFlags; // == int. We generally use ImGuiKeyChord to mean "a ImGuiKey or-ed with any number of ImGuiMod_XXX value", but you may store only mods in there. +enum ImGuiModFlags_ { ImGuiModFlags_None = 0, ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl, ImGuiModFlags_Shift = ImGuiMod_Shift, ImGuiModFlags_Alt = ImGuiMod_Alt, ImGuiModFlags_Super = ImGuiMod_Super }; +//typedef ImGuiKeyChord ImGuiKeyModFlags; // == int +//enum ImGuiKeyModFlags_ { ImGuiKeyModFlags_None = 0, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiMod_Ctrl, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Shift = ImGuiMod_Shift, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Alt = ImGuiMod_Alt, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Super = ImGuiMod_Super }; + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + +// RENAMED IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW > IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS in 1.88 (from June 2022) +#if defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS) +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS +#endif +#if defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS) +#error IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW was renamed to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS, please use new name. +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#if defined(__clang__) +#pragma clang diagnostic pop +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic pop +#endif + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (pop) +#endif + +// Include imgui_user.h at the end of imgui.h (convenient for user to only explicitly include vanilla imgui.h) +#ifdef IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_H +#include "imgui_user.h" +#endif + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_demo.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_demo.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a816c22 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_demo.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,8432 @@ +// dear imgui, v1.89.9 +// (demo code) + +// Help: +// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.com/faq +// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that. +// - Need help integrating Dear ImGui in your codebase? +// - Read Getting Started https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Getting-Started +// - Read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase. +// Read imgui.cpp for more details, documentation and comments. +// Get the latest version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui + +//--------------------------------------------------- +// PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE THIS FILE FROM YOUR PROJECT! +//--------------------------------------------------- +// Message to the person tempted to delete this file when integrating Dear ImGui into their codebase: +// Think again! It is the most useful reference code that you and other coders will want to refer to and call. +// Have the ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() function wired in an always-available debug menu of your game/app! +// Also include Metrics! ItemPicker! DebugLog! and other debug features. +// Removing this file from your project is hindering access to documentation for everyone in your team, +// likely leading you to poorer usage of the library. +// Everything in this file will be stripped out by the linker if you don't call ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(). +// If you want to link core Dear ImGui in your shipped builds but want a thorough guarantee that the demo will not be +// linked, you can setup your imconfig.h with #define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS and those functions will be empty. +// In another situation, whenever you have Dear ImGui available you probably want this to be available for reference. +// Thank you, +// -Your beloved friend, imgui_demo.cpp (which you won't delete) + +//-------------------------------------------- +// ABOUT THE MEANING OF THE 'static' KEYWORD: +//-------------------------------------------- +// In this demo code, we frequently use 'static' variables inside functions. +// A static variable persists across calls. It is essentially a global variable but declared inside the scope of the function. +// Think of "static int n = 0;" as "global int n = 0;" ! +// We do this IN THE DEMO because we want: +// - to gather code and data in the same place. +// - to make the demo source code faster to read, faster to change, smaller in size. +// - it is also a convenient way of storing simple UI related information as long as your function +// doesn't need to be reentrant or used in multiple threads. +// This might be a pattern you will want to use in your code, but most of the data you would be working +// with in a complex codebase is likely going to be stored outside your functions. + +//----------------------------------------- +// ABOUT THE CODING STYLE OF OUR DEMO CODE +//----------------------------------------- +// The Demo code in this file is designed to be easy to copy-and-paste into your application! +// Because of this: +// - We never omit the ImGui:: prefix when calling functions, even though most code here is in the same namespace. +// - We try to declare static variables in the local scope, as close as possible to the code using them. +// - We never use any of the helpers/facilities used internally by Dear ImGui, unless available in the public API. +// - We never use maths operators on ImVec2/ImVec4. For our other sources files we use them, and they are provided +// by imgui.h using the IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS define. For your own sources file they are optional +// and require you either enable those, either provide your own via IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA in imconfig.h. +// Because we can't assume anything about your support of maths operators, we cannot use them in imgui_demo.cpp. + +// Navigating this file: +// - In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot. +// - With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments. + +/* + +Index of this file: + +// [SECTION] Forward Declarations +// [SECTION] Helpers +// [SECTION] Demo Window / ShowDemoWindow() +// - ShowDemoWindow() +// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowWidgets() +// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowLayout() +// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowPopups() +// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowTables() +// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowInputs() +// [SECTION] About Window / ShowAboutWindow() +// [SECTION] Style Editor / ShowStyleEditor() +// [SECTION] User Guide / ShowUserGuide() +// [SECTION] Example App: Main Menu Bar / ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar() +// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Console / ShowExampleAppConsole() +// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Log / ShowExampleAppLog() +// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Layout / ShowExampleAppLayout() +// [SECTION] Example App: Property Editor / ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor() +// [SECTION] Example App: Long Text / ShowExampleAppLongText() +// [SECTION] Example App: Auto Resize / ShowExampleAppAutoResize() +// [SECTION] Example App: Constrained Resize / ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize() +// [SECTION] Example App: Simple overlay / ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay() +// [SECTION] Example App: Fullscreen window / ShowExampleAppFullscreen() +// [SECTION] Example App: Manipulating window titles / ShowExampleAppWindowTitles() +// [SECTION] Example App: Custom Rendering using ImDrawList API / ShowExampleAppCustomRendering() +// [SECTION] Example App: Documents Handling / ShowExampleAppDocuments() + +*/ + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS) +#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS +#endif + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE + +// System includes +#include // toupper +#include // INT_MIN, INT_MAX +#include // sqrtf, powf, cosf, sinf, floorf, ceilf +#include // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf +#include // NULL, malloc, free, atoi +#include // intptr_t +#if !defined(_MSC_VER) || _MSC_VER >= 1800 +#include // PRId64/PRIu64, not avail in some MinGW headers. +#endif + +// Visual Studio warnings +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant +#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen +#pragma warning (disable: 26451) // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to an 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2). +#endif + +// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything +#if defined(__clang__) +#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option") +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great! +#endif +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning: use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-declarations" // warning: 'xx' is deprecated: The POSIX name for this.. // for strdup used in demo code (so user can copy & paste the code) +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast" // warning: cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-security" // warning: format string is not a string literal +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wexit-time-destructors" // warning: declaration requires an exit-time destructor // exit-time destruction order is undefined. if MemFree() leads to users code that has been disabled before exit it might cause problems. ImGui coding style welcomes static/globals. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-macros" // warning: macro is not used // we define snprintf/vsnprintf on Windows so they are available, but not always used. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning: zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0 +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-id-macro" // warning: macro name is a reserved identifier +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-pointer-cast" // warning: cast to pointer from integer of different size +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-security" // warning: format string is not a string literal (potentially insecure) +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wconversion" // warning: conversion to 'xxxx' from 'xxxx' may alter its value +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wmisleading-indentation" // [__GNUC__ >= 6] warning: this 'if' clause does not guard this statement // GCC 6.0+ only. See #883 on GitHub. +#endif + +// Play it nice with Windows users (Update: May 2018, Notepad now supports Unix-style carriage returns!) +#ifdef _WIN32 +#define IM_NEWLINE "\r\n" +#else +#define IM_NEWLINE "\n" +#endif + +// Helpers +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(snprintf) +#define snprintf _snprintf +#endif +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(vsnprintf) +#define vsnprintf _vsnprintf +#endif + +// Format specifiers for 64-bit values (hasn't been decently standardized before VS2013) +#if !defined(PRId64) && defined(_MSC_VER) +#define PRId64 "I64d" +#define PRIu64 "I64u" +#elif !defined(PRId64) +#define PRId64 "lld" +#define PRIu64 "llu" +#endif + +// Helpers macros +// We normally try to not use many helpers in imgui_demo.cpp in order to make code easier to copy and paste, +// but making an exception here as those are largely simplifying code... +// In other imgui sources we can use nicer internal functions from imgui_internal.h (ImMin/ImMax) but not in the demo. +#define IM_MIN(A, B) (((A) < (B)) ? (A) : (B)) +#define IM_MAX(A, B) (((A) >= (B)) ? (A) : (B)) +#define IM_CLAMP(V, MN, MX) ((V) < (MN) ? (MN) : (V) > (MX) ? (MX) : (V)) + +// Enforce cdecl calling convention for functions called by the standard library, in case compilation settings changed the default to e.g. __vectorcall +#ifndef IMGUI_CDECL +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#define IMGUI_CDECL __cdecl +#else +#define IMGUI_CDECL +#endif +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Forward Declarations, Helpers +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#if !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS) + +// Forward Declarations +static void ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar(); +static void ShowExampleAppConsole(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppDocuments(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppLog(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppLayout(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppAutoResize(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppFullscreen(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppLongText(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleAppWindowTitles(bool* p_open); +static void ShowExampleMenuFile(); + +// We split the contents of the big ShowDemoWindow() function into smaller functions +// (because the link time of very large functions grow non-linearly) +static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets(); +static void ShowDemoWindowLayout(); +static void ShowDemoWindowPopups(); +static void ShowDemoWindowTables(); +static void ShowDemoWindowColumns(); +static void ShowDemoWindowInputs(); + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Helpers +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Helper to display a little (?) mark which shows a tooltip when hovered. +// In your own code you may want to display an actual icon if you are using a merged icon fonts (see docs/FONTS.md) +static void HelpMarker(const char* desc) +{ + ImGui::TextDisabled("(?)"); + if (ImGui::BeginItemTooltip()) + { + ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 35.0f); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(desc); + ImGui::PopTextWrapPos(); + ImGui::EndTooltip(); + } +} + +// Helper to wire demo markers located in code to an interactive browser +typedef void (*ImGuiDemoMarkerCallback)(const char* file, int line, const char* section, void* user_data); +extern ImGuiDemoMarkerCallback GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback; +extern void* GImGuiDemoMarkerCallbackUserData; +ImGuiDemoMarkerCallback GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback = NULL; +void* GImGuiDemoMarkerCallbackUserData = NULL; +#define IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER(section) do { if (GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback != NULL) GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback(__FILE__, __LINE__, section, GImGuiDemoMarkerCallbackUserData); } while (0) + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Demo Window / ShowDemoWindow() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ShowDemoWindow() +// - ShowDemoWindowWidgets() +// - ShowDemoWindowLayout() +// - ShowDemoWindowPopups() +// - ShowDemoWindowTables() +// - ShowDemoWindowColumns() +// - ShowDemoWindowInputs() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate most Dear ImGui features (this is big function!) +// You may execute this function to experiment with the UI and understand what it does. +// You may then search for keywords in the code when you are interested by a specific feature. +void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open) +{ + // Exceptionally add an extra assert here for people confused about initial Dear ImGui setup + // Most functions would normally just assert/crash if the context is missing. + IM_ASSERT(ImGui::GetCurrentContext() != NULL && "Missing Dear ImGui context. Refer to examples app!"); + + // Examples Apps (accessible from the "Examples" menu) + static bool show_app_main_menu_bar = false; + static bool show_app_console = false; + static bool show_app_custom_rendering = false; + static bool show_app_documents = false; + static bool show_app_log = false; + static bool show_app_layout = false; + static bool show_app_property_editor = false; + static bool show_app_simple_overlay = false; + static bool show_app_auto_resize = false; + static bool show_app_constrained_resize = false; + static bool show_app_fullscreen = false; + static bool show_app_long_text = false; + static bool show_app_window_titles = false; + + if (show_app_main_menu_bar) ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar(); + if (show_app_documents) ShowExampleAppDocuments(&show_app_documents); + if (show_app_console) ShowExampleAppConsole(&show_app_console); + if (show_app_custom_rendering) ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(&show_app_custom_rendering); + if (show_app_log) ShowExampleAppLog(&show_app_log); + if (show_app_layout) ShowExampleAppLayout(&show_app_layout); + if (show_app_property_editor) ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor(&show_app_property_editor); + if (show_app_simple_overlay) ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay(&show_app_simple_overlay); + if (show_app_auto_resize) ShowExampleAppAutoResize(&show_app_auto_resize); + if (show_app_constrained_resize) ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(&show_app_constrained_resize); + if (show_app_fullscreen) ShowExampleAppFullscreen(&show_app_fullscreen); + if (show_app_long_text) ShowExampleAppLongText(&show_app_long_text); + if (show_app_window_titles) ShowExampleAppWindowTitles(&show_app_window_titles); + + // Dear ImGui Tools (accessible from the "Tools" menu) + static bool show_tool_metrics = false; + static bool show_tool_debug_log = false; + static bool show_tool_stack_tool = false; + static bool show_tool_style_editor = false; + static bool show_tool_about = false; + + if (show_tool_metrics) + ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(&show_tool_metrics); + if (show_tool_debug_log) + ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow(&show_tool_debug_log); + if (show_tool_stack_tool) + ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow(&show_tool_stack_tool); + if (show_tool_style_editor) + { + ImGui::Begin("Dear ImGui Style Editor", &show_tool_style_editor); + ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(); + ImGui::End(); + } + if (show_tool_about) + ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(&show_tool_about); + + // Demonstrate the various window flags. Typically you would just use the default! + static bool no_titlebar = false; + static bool no_scrollbar = false; + static bool no_menu = false; + static bool no_move = false; + static bool no_resize = false; + static bool no_collapse = false; + static bool no_close = false; + static bool no_nav = false; + static bool no_background = false; + static bool no_bring_to_front = false; + static bool unsaved_document = false; + + ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = 0; + if (no_titlebar) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar; + if (no_scrollbar) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar; + if (!no_menu) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar; + if (no_move) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove; + if (no_resize) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize; + if (no_collapse) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse; + if (no_nav) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav; + if (no_background) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground; + if (no_bring_to_front) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus; + if (unsaved_document) window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument; + if (no_close) p_open = NULL; // Don't pass our bool* to Begin + + // We specify a default position/size in case there's no data in the .ini file. + // We only do it to make the demo applications a little more welcoming, but typically this isn't required. + const ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport(); + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(main_viewport->WorkPos.x + 650, main_viewport->WorkPos.y + 20), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(550, 680), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + + // Main body of the Demo window starts here. + if (!ImGui::Begin("Dear ImGui Demo", p_open, window_flags)) + { + // Early out if the window is collapsed, as an optimization. + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + + // Most "big" widgets share a common width settings by default. See 'Demo->Layout->Widgets Width' for details. + // e.g. Use 2/3 of the space for widgets and 1/3 for labels (right align) + //ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.35f); + // e.g. Leave a fixed amount of width for labels (by passing a negative value), the rest goes to widgets. + ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * -12); + + // Menu Bar + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Menu/File"); + ShowExampleMenuFile(); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Examples")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Menu/Examples"); + ImGui::MenuItem("Main menu bar", NULL, &show_app_main_menu_bar); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Mini apps"); + ImGui::MenuItem("Console", NULL, &show_app_console); + ImGui::MenuItem("Custom rendering", NULL, &show_app_custom_rendering); + ImGui::MenuItem("Documents", NULL, &show_app_documents); + ImGui::MenuItem("Log", NULL, &show_app_log); + ImGui::MenuItem("Property editor", NULL, &show_app_property_editor); + ImGui::MenuItem("Simple layout", NULL, &show_app_layout); + ImGui::MenuItem("Simple overlay", NULL, &show_app_simple_overlay); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Concepts"); + ImGui::MenuItem("Auto-resizing window", NULL, &show_app_auto_resize); + ImGui::MenuItem("Constrained-resizing window", NULL, &show_app_constrained_resize); + ImGui::MenuItem("Fullscreen window", NULL, &show_app_fullscreen); + ImGui::MenuItem("Long text display", NULL, &show_app_long_text); + ImGui::MenuItem("Manipulating window titles", NULL, &show_app_window_titles); + + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + //if (ImGui::MenuItem("MenuItem")) {} // You can also use MenuItem() inside a menu bar! + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Tools")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Menu/Tools"); +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + const bool has_debug_tools = true; +#else + const bool has_debug_tools = false; +#endif + ImGui::MenuItem("Metrics/Debugger", NULL, &show_tool_metrics, has_debug_tools); + ImGui::MenuItem("Debug Log", NULL, &show_tool_debug_log, has_debug_tools); + ImGui::MenuItem("Stack Tool", NULL, &show_tool_stack_tool, has_debug_tools); + ImGui::MenuItem("Style Editor", NULL, &show_tool_style_editor); + ImGui::MenuItem("About Dear ImGui", NULL, &show_tool_about); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + ImGui::Text("dear imgui says hello! (%s) (%d)", IMGUI_VERSION, IMGUI_VERSION_NUM); + ImGui::Spacing(); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Help"); + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Help")) + { + ImGui::SeparatorText("ABOUT THIS DEMO:"); + ImGui::BulletText("Sections below are demonstrating many aspects of the library."); + ImGui::BulletText("The \"Examples\" menu above leads to more demo contents."); + ImGui::BulletText("The \"Tools\" menu above gives access to: About Box, Style Editor,\n" + "and Metrics/Debugger (general purpose Dear ImGui debugging tool)."); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("PROGRAMMER GUIDE:"); + ImGui::BulletText("See the ShowDemoWindow() code in imgui_demo.cpp. <- you are here!"); + ImGui::BulletText("See comments in imgui.cpp."); + ImGui::BulletText("See example applications in the examples/ folder."); + ImGui::BulletText("Read the FAQ at http://www.dearimgui.com/faq/"); + ImGui::BulletText("Set 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableKeyboard' for keyboard controls."); + ImGui::BulletText("Set 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableGamepad' for gamepad controls."); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("USER GUIDE:"); + ImGui::ShowUserGuide(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration"); + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Configuration")) + { + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Configuration##2")) + { + ImGui::SeparatorText("General"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableKeyboard", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable keyboard controls."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableGamepad", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable gamepad controls. Require backend to set io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad.\n\nRead instructions in imgui.cpp for details."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableSetMousePos", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. See comment for ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NoMouse", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse) + { + // The "NoMouse" option can get us stuck with a disabled mouse! Let's provide an alternative way to fix it: + if (fmodf((float)ImGui::GetTime(), 0.40f) < 0.20f) + { + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("<>"); + } + if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space)) + io.ConfigFlags &= ~ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse; + } + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NoMouseCursorChange", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Instruct backend to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue", &io.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable input queue trickling: some types of events submitted during the same frame (e.g. button down + up) will be spread over multiple frames, improving interactions with low framerates."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.MouseDrawCursor", &io.MouseDrawCursor); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Instruct Dear ImGui to render a mouse cursor itself. Note that a mouse cursor rendered via your application GPU rendering path will feel more laggy than hardware cursor, but will be more in sync with your other visuals.\n\nSome desktop applications may use both kinds of cursors (e.g. enable software cursor only when resizing/dragging something)."); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Widgets"); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink", &io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable blinking cursor (optional as some users consider it to be distracting)."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive", &io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Pressing Enter will keep item active and select contents (single-line only)."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDragClickToInputText", &io.ConfigDragClickToInputText); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable turning DragXXX widgets into text input with a simple mouse click-release (without moving)."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges", &io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner.\nThis requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly", &io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors", &io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors); + ImGui::Text("Also see Style->Rendering for rendering options."); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Debug"); + ImGui::BeginDisabled(); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueOnce", &io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueOnce); // . + ImGui::EndDisabled(); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("First calls to Begin()/BeginChild() will return false.\n\nTHIS OPTION IS DISABLED because it needs to be set at application boot-time to make sense. Showing the disabled option is a way to make this feature easier to discover"); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop", &io.ConfigDebugBeginReturnValueLoop); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Some calls to Begin()/BeginChild() will return false.\n\nWill cycle through window depths then repeat. Windows should be flickering while running."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDebugIgnoreFocusLoss", &io.ConfigDebugIgnoreFocusLoss); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Option to deactivate io.AddFocusEvent(false) handling. May facilitate interactions with a debugger when focus loss leads to clearing inputs data."); + ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDebugIniSettings", &io.ConfigDebugIniSettings); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Option to save .ini data with extra comments (particularly helpful for Docking, but makes saving slower)."); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + ImGui::Spacing(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration/Backend Flags"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Backend Flags")) + { + HelpMarker( + "Those flags are set by the backends (imgui_impl_xxx files) to specify their capabilities.\n" + "Here we expose them as read-only fields to avoid breaking interactions with your backend."); + + // FIXME: Maybe we need a BeginReadonly() equivalent to keep label bright? + ImGui::BeginDisabled(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasGamepad", &io.BackendFlags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasMouseCursors", &io.BackendFlags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasSetMousePos", &io.BackendFlags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: RendererHasVtxOffset", &io.BackendFlags, ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset); + ImGui::EndDisabled(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + ImGui::Spacing(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration/Style"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Style")) + { + HelpMarker("The same contents can be accessed in 'Tools->Style Editor' or by calling the ShowStyleEditor() function."); + ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + ImGui::Spacing(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration/Capture, Logging"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Capture/Logging")) + { + HelpMarker( + "The logging API redirects all text output so you can easily capture the content of " + "a window or a block. Tree nodes can be automatically expanded.\n" + "Try opening any of the contents below in this window and then click one of the \"Log To\" button."); + ImGui::LogButtons(); + + HelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::LogText() to output directly to the log without a visual output."); + if (ImGui::Button("Copy \"Hello, world!\" to clipboard")) + { + ImGui::LogToClipboard(); + ImGui::LogText("Hello, world!"); + ImGui::LogFinish(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Window options"); + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Window options")) + { + if (ImGui::BeginTable("split", 3)) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No titlebar", &no_titlebar); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No scrollbar", &no_scrollbar); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No menu", &no_menu); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No move", &no_move); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No resize", &no_resize); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No collapse", &no_collapse); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No close", &no_close); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No nav", &no_nav); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No background", &no_background); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No bring to front", &no_bring_to_front); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("Unsaved document", &unsaved_document); + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + } + + // All demo contents + ShowDemoWindowWidgets(); + ShowDemoWindowLayout(); + ShowDemoWindowPopups(); + ShowDemoWindowTables(); + ShowDemoWindowInputs(); + + // End of ShowDemoWindow() + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + ImGui::End(); +} + +static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets() +{ + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets"); + if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Widgets")) + return; + + static bool disable_all = false; // The Checkbox for that is inside the "Disabled" section at the bottom + if (disable_all) + ImGui::BeginDisabled(); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic")) + { + ImGui::SeparatorText("General"); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Button"); + static int clicked = 0; + if (ImGui::Button("Button")) + clicked++; + if (clicked & 1) + { + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Thanks for clicking me!"); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Checkbox"); + static bool check = true; + ImGui::Checkbox("checkbox", &check); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/RadioButton"); + static int e = 0; + ImGui::RadioButton("radio a", &e, 0); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::RadioButton("radio b", &e, 1); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::RadioButton("radio c", &e, 2); + + // Color buttons, demonstrate using PushID() to add unique identifier in the ID stack, and changing style. + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Buttons (Colored)"); + for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++) + { + if (i > 0) + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID(i); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.6f, 0.6f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.7f, 0.7f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f)); + ImGui::Button("Click"); + ImGui::PopStyleColor(3); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + // Use AlignTextToFramePadding() to align text baseline to the baseline of framed widgets elements + // (otherwise a Text+SameLine+Button sequence will have the text a little too high by default!) + // See 'Demo->Layout->Text Baseline Alignment' for details. + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + ImGui::Text("Hold to repeat:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + + // Arrow buttons with Repeater + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Buttons (Repeating)"); + static int counter = 0; + float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x; + ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true); + if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##left", ImGuiDir_Left)) { counter--; } + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); + if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##right", ImGuiDir_Right)) { counter++; } + ImGui::PopButtonRepeat(); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("%d", counter); + + ImGui::Button("Tooltip"); + ImGui::SetItemTooltip("I am a tooltip"); + + ImGui::LabelText("label", "Value"); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Inputs"); + + { + // To wire InputText() with std::string or any other custom string type, + // see the "Text Input > Resize Callback" section of this demo, and the misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h file. + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/InputText"); + static char str0[128] = "Hello, world!"; + ImGui::InputText("input text", str0, IM_ARRAYSIZE(str0)); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "USER:\n" + "Hold SHIFT or use mouse to select text.\n" + "CTRL+Left/Right to word jump.\n" + "CTRL+A or Double-Click to select all.\n" + "CTRL+X,CTRL+C,CTRL+V clipboard.\n" + "CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y undo/redo.\n" + "ESCAPE to revert.\n\n" + "PROGRAMMER:\n" + "You can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize facility if you need to wire InputText() " + "to a dynamic string type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example (this is not demonstrated " + "in imgui_demo.cpp)."); + + static char str1[128] = ""; + ImGui::InputTextWithHint("input text (w/ hint)", "enter text here", str1, IM_ARRAYSIZE(str1)); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/InputInt, InputFloat"); + static int i0 = 123; + ImGui::InputInt("input int", &i0); + + static float f0 = 0.001f; + ImGui::InputFloat("input float", &f0, 0.01f, 1.0f, "%.3f"); + + static double d0 = 999999.00000001; + ImGui::InputDouble("input double", &d0, 0.01f, 1.0f, "%.8f"); + + static float f1 = 1.e10f; + ImGui::InputFloat("input scientific", &f1, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%e"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "You can input value using the scientific notation,\n" + " e.g. \"1e+8\" becomes \"100000000\"."); + + static float vec4a[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f }; + ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4a); + } + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Drags"); + + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/DragInt, DragFloat"); + static int i1 = 50, i2 = 42; + ImGui::DragInt("drag int", &i1, 1); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "Click and drag to edit value.\n" + "Hold SHIFT/ALT for faster/slower edit.\n" + "Double-click or CTRL+click to input value."); + + ImGui::DragInt("drag int 0..100", &i2, 1, 0, 100, "%d%%", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + + static float f1 = 1.00f, f2 = 0.0067f; + ImGui::DragFloat("drag float", &f1, 0.005f); + ImGui::DragFloat("drag small float", &f2, 0.0001f, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%.06f ns"); + } + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Sliders"); + + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/SliderInt, SliderFloat"); + static int i1 = 0; + ImGui::SliderInt("slider int", &i1, -1, 3); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("CTRL+click to input value."); + + static float f1 = 0.123f, f2 = 0.0f; + ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float", &f1, 0.0f, 1.0f, "ratio = %.3f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float (log)", &f2, -10.0f, 10.0f, "%.4f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/SliderAngle"); + static float angle = 0.0f; + ImGui::SliderAngle("slider angle", &angle); + + // Using the format string to display a name instead of an integer. + // Here we completely omit '%d' from the format string, so it'll only display a name. + // This technique can also be used with DragInt(). + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Slider (enum)"); + enum Element { Element_Fire, Element_Earth, Element_Air, Element_Water, Element_COUNT }; + static int elem = Element_Fire; + const char* elems_names[Element_COUNT] = { "Fire", "Earth", "Air", "Water" }; + const char* elem_name = (elem >= 0 && elem < Element_COUNT) ? elems_names[elem] : "Unknown"; + ImGui::SliderInt("slider enum", &elem, 0, Element_COUNT - 1, elem_name); // Use ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput flag to disable CTRL+Click here. + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Using the format string parameter to display a name instead of the underlying integer."); + } + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Selectors/Pickers"); + + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/ColorEdit3, ColorEdit4"); + static float col1[3] = { 1.0f, 0.0f, 0.2f }; + static float col2[4] = { 0.4f, 0.7f, 0.0f, 0.5f }; + ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "Click on the color square to open a color picker.\n" + "Click and hold to use drag and drop.\n" + "Right-click on the color square to show options.\n" + "CTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n"); + + ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2); + } + + { + // Using the _simplified_ one-liner Combo() api here + // See "Combo" section for examples of how to use the more flexible BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api. + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Combo"); + const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIIIIII", "JJJJ", "KKKKKKK" }; + static int item_current = 0; + ImGui::Combo("combo", &item_current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "Using the simplified one-liner Combo API here.\nRefer to the \"Combo\" section below for an explanation of how to use the more flexible and general BeginCombo/EndCombo API."); + } + + { + // Using the _simplified_ one-liner ListBox() api here + // See "List boxes" section for examples of how to use the more flexible BeginListBox()/EndListBox() api. + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/ListBox"); + const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi", "Mango", "Orange", "Pineapple", "Strawberry", "Watermelon" }; + static int item_current = 1; + ImGui::ListBox("listbox", &item_current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items), 4); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "Using the simplified one-liner ListBox API here.\nRefer to the \"List boxes\" section below for an explanation of how to use the more flexible and general BeginListBox/EndListBox API."); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tooltips"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tooltips")) + { + // Tooltips are windows following the mouse. They do not take focus away. + ImGui::SeparatorText("General"); + + // Typical use cases: + // - Short-form (text only): SetItemTooltip("Hello"); + // - Short-form (any contents): if (BeginItemTooltip()) { Text("Hello"); EndTooltip(); } + + // - Full-form (text only): if (IsItemHovered(...)) { SetTooltip("Hello"); } + // - Full-form (any contents): if (IsItemHovered(...) && BeginTooltip()) { Text("Hello"); EndTooltip(); } + + HelpMarker( + "Tooltip are typically created by using a IsItemHovered() + SetTooltip() sequence.\n\n" + "We provide a helper SetItemTooltip() function to perform the two with standards flags."); + + ImVec2 sz = ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f); + + ImGui::Button("Basic", sz); + ImGui::SetItemTooltip("I am a tooltip"); + + ImGui::Button("Fancy", sz); + if (ImGui::BeginItemTooltip()) + { + ImGui::Text("I am a fancy tooltip"); + static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f }; + ImGui::PlotLines("Curve", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr)); + ImGui::Text("Sin(time) = %f", sinf((float)ImGui::GetTime())); + ImGui::EndTooltip(); + } + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Always On"); + + // Showcase NOT relying on a IsItemHovered() to emit a tooltip. + // Here the tooltip is always emitted when 'always_on == true'. + static int always_on = 0; + ImGui::RadioButton("Off", &always_on, 0); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::RadioButton("Always On (Simple)", &always_on, 1); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::RadioButton("Always On (Advanced)", &always_on, 2); + if (always_on == 1) + ImGui::SetTooltip("I am following you around."); + else if (always_on == 2 && ImGui::BeginTooltip()) + { + ImGui::ProgressBar(sinf((float)ImGui::GetTime()) * 0.5f + 0.5f, ImVec2(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 25, 0.0f)); + ImGui::EndTooltip(); + } + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Custom"); + + // The following examples are passed for documentation purpose but may not be useful to most users. + // Passing ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip to IsItemHovered() will pull ImGuiHoveredFlags flags values from + // 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse' or 'style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav' depending on whether mouse or gamepad/keyboard is being used. + // With default settings, ImGuiHoveredFlags_Tooltip is equivalent to ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort + ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary. + ImGui::Button("Manual", sz); + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip)) + ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a manually emitted tooltip"); + + ImGui::Button("DelayNone", sz); + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNone)) + ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip with no delay."); + + ImGui::Button("DelayShort", sz); + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay)) + ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip with a short delay (%0.2f sec).", ImGui::GetStyle().HoverDelayShort); + + ImGui::Button("DelayLong", sz); + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay)) + ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip with a long delay (%0.2f sec)", ImGui::GetStyle().HoverDelayNormal); + + ImGui::Button("Stationary", sz); + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary)) + ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip requiring mouse to be stationary before activating."); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Testing ImGuiOnceUponAFrame helper. + //static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame once; + //for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) + // if (once) + // ImGui::Text("This will be displayed only once."); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Trees")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees/Basic trees"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic trees")) + { + for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) + { + // Use SetNextItemOpen() so set the default state of a node to be open. We could + // also use TreeNodeEx() with the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen flag to achieve the same thing! + if (i == 0) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); + + if (ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)i, "Child %d", i)) + { + ImGui::Text("blah blah"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::SmallButton("button")) {} + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees/Advanced, with Selectable nodes"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced, with Selectable nodes")) + { + HelpMarker( + "This is a more typical looking tree with selectable nodes.\n" + "Click to select, CTRL+Click to toggle, click on arrows or double-click to open."); + static ImGuiTreeNodeFlags base_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth; + static bool align_label_with_current_x_position = false; + static bool test_drag_and_drop = false; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Extend hit area to all available width instead of allowing more items to be laid out after the node."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth); + ImGui::Checkbox("Align label with current X position", &align_label_with_current_x_position); + ImGui::Checkbox("Test tree node as drag source", &test_drag_and_drop); + ImGui::Text("Hello!"); + if (align_label_with_current_x_position) + ImGui::Unindent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); + + // 'selection_mask' is dumb representation of what may be user-side selection state. + // You may retain selection state inside or outside your objects in whatever format you see fit. + // 'node_clicked' is temporary storage of what node we have clicked to process selection at the end + /// of the loop. May be a pointer to your own node type, etc. + static int selection_mask = (1 << 2); + int node_clicked = -1; + for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++) + { + // Disable the default "open on single-click behavior" + set Selected flag according to our selection. + // To alter selection we use IsItemClicked() && !IsItemToggledOpen(), so clicking on an arrow doesn't alter selection. + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags node_flags = base_flags; + const bool is_selected = (selection_mask & (1 << i)) != 0; + if (is_selected) + node_flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected; + if (i < 3) + { + // Items 0..2 are Tree Node + bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Node %d", i); + if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() && !ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen()) + node_clicked = i; + if (test_drag_and_drop && ImGui::BeginDragDropSource()) + { + ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("_TREENODE", NULL, 0); + ImGui::Text("This is a drag and drop source"); + ImGui::EndDragDropSource(); + } + if (node_open) + { + ImGui::BulletText("Blah blah\nBlah Blah"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + } + else + { + // Items 3..5 are Tree Leaves + // The only reason we use TreeNode at all is to allow selection of the leaf. Otherwise we can + // use BulletText() or advance the cursor by GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing() and call Text(). + node_flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen; // ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet + ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Leaf %d", i); + if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() && !ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen()) + node_clicked = i; + if (test_drag_and_drop && ImGui::BeginDragDropSource()) + { + ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("_TREENODE", NULL, 0); + ImGui::Text("This is a drag and drop source"); + ImGui::EndDragDropSource(); + } + } + } + if (node_clicked != -1) + { + // Update selection state + // (process outside of tree loop to avoid visual inconsistencies during the clicking frame) + if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) + selection_mask ^= (1 << node_clicked); // CTRL+click to toggle + else //if (!(selection_mask & (1 << node_clicked))) // Depending on selection behavior you want, may want to preserve selection when clicking on item that is part of the selection + selection_mask = (1 << node_clicked); // Click to single-select + } + if (align_label_with_current_x_position) + ImGui::Indent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Collapsing Headers"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Collapsing Headers")) + { + static bool closable_group = true; + ImGui::Checkbox("Show 2nd header", &closable_group); + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None)) + { + ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered()); + for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) + ImGui::Text("Some content %d", i); + } + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header with a close button", &closable_group)) + { + ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered()); + for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) + ImGui::Text("More content %d", i); + } + /* + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header with a bullet", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)) + ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered()); + */ + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Bullets"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Bullets")) + { + ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 1"); + ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 2\nOn multiple lines"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree node")) + { + ImGui::BulletText("Another bullet point"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Text("Bullet point 3 (two calls)"); + ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::SmallButton("Button"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text/Colored Text"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Colorful Text")) + { + // Using shortcut. You can use PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() for more flexibility. + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f), "Pink"); + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f), "Yellow"); + ImGui::TextDisabled("Disabled"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("The TextDisabled color is stored in ImGuiStyle."); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text/Word Wrapping"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word Wrapping")) + { + // Using shortcut. You can use PushTextWrapPos()/PopTextWrapPos() for more flexibility. + ImGui::TextWrapped( + "This text should automatically wrap on the edge of the window. The current implementation " + "for text wrapping follows simple rules suitable for English and possibly other languages."); + ImGui::Spacing(); + + static float wrap_width = 200.0f; + ImGui::SliderFloat("Wrap width", &wrap_width, -20, 600, "%.0f"); + + ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++) + { + ImGui::Text("Test paragraph %d:", n); + ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImVec2 marker_min = ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width, pos.y); + ImVec2 marker_max = ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width + 10, pos.y + ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()); + ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetCursorPos().x + wrap_width); + if (n == 0) + ImGui::Text("The lazy dog is a good dog. This paragraph should fit within %.0f pixels. Testing a 1 character word. The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.", wrap_width); + else + ImGui::Text("aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb, c cccccccc,dddddddd. d eeeeeeee ffffffff. gggggggg!hhhhhhhh"); + + // Draw actual text bounding box, following by marker of our expected limit (should not overlap!) + draw_list->AddRect(ImGui::GetItemRectMin(), ImGui::GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(marker_min, marker_max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, 255)); + ImGui::PopTextWrapPos(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text/UTF-8 Text"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("UTF-8 Text")) + { + // UTF-8 test with Japanese characters + // (Needs a suitable font? Try "Google Noto" or "Arial Unicode". See docs/FONTS.md for details.) + // - From C++11 you can use the u8"my text" syntax to encode literal strings as UTF-8 + // - For earlier compiler, you may be able to encode your sources as UTF-8 (e.g. in Visual Studio, you + // can save your source files as 'UTF-8 without signature'). + // - FOR THIS DEMO FILE ONLY, BECAUSE WE WANT TO SUPPORT OLD COMPILERS, WE ARE *NOT* INCLUDING RAW UTF-8 + // CHARACTERS IN THIS SOURCE FILE. Instead we are encoding a few strings with hexadecimal constants. + // Don't do this in your application! Please use u8"text in any language" in your application! + // Note that characters values are preserved even by InputText() if the font cannot be displayed, + // so you can safely copy & paste garbled characters into another application. + ImGui::TextWrapped( + "CJK text will only appear if the font was loaded with the appropriate CJK character ranges. " + "Call io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF() manually to load extra character ranges. " + "Read docs/FONTS.md for details."); + ImGui::Text("Hiragana: \xe3\x81\x8b\xe3\x81\x8d\xe3\x81\x8f\xe3\x81\x91\xe3\x81\x93 (kakikukeko)"); // Normally we would use u8"blah blah" with the proper characters directly in the string. + ImGui::Text("Kanjis: \xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e (nihongo)"); + static char buf[32] = "\xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e"; + //static char buf[32] = u8"NIHONGO"; // <- this is how you would write it with C++11, using real kanjis + ImGui::InputText("UTF-8 input", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Images"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Images")) + { + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGui::TextWrapped( + "Below we are displaying the font texture (which is the only texture we have access to in this demo). " + "Use the 'ImTextureID' type as storage to pass pointers or identifier to your own texture data. " + "Hover the texture for a zoomed view!"); + + // Below we are displaying the font texture because it is the only texture we have access to inside the demo! + // Remember that ImTextureID is just storage for whatever you want it to be. It is essentially a value that + // will be passed to the rendering backend via the ImDrawCmd structure. + // If you use one of the default imgui_impl_XXXX.cpp rendering backend, they all have comments at the top + // of their respective source file to specify what they expect to be stored in ImTextureID, for example: + // - The imgui_impl_dx11.cpp renderer expect a 'ID3D11ShaderResourceView*' pointer + // - The imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp renderer expect a GLuint OpenGL texture identifier, etc. + // More: + // - If you decided that ImTextureID = MyEngineTexture*, then you can pass your MyEngineTexture* pointers + // to ImGui::Image(), and gather width/height through your own functions, etc. + // - You can use ShowMetricsWindow() to inspect the draw data that are being passed to your renderer, + // it will help you debug issues if you are confused about it. + // - Consider using the lower-level ImDrawList::AddImage() API, via ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddImage(). + // - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/blob/master/docs/FAQ.md + // - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Image-Loading-and-Displaying-Examples + ImTextureID my_tex_id = io.Fonts->TexID; + float my_tex_w = (float)io.Fonts->TexWidth; + float my_tex_h = (float)io.Fonts->TexHeight; + { + static bool use_text_color_for_tint = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Use Text Color for Tint", &use_text_color_for_tint); + ImGui::Text("%.0fx%.0f", my_tex_w, my_tex_h); + ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImVec2 uv_min = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); // Top-left + ImVec2 uv_max = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f); // Lower-right + ImVec4 tint_col = use_text_color_for_tint ? ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_Text) : ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f); // No tint + ImVec4 border_col = ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_Border); + ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(my_tex_w, my_tex_h), uv_min, uv_max, tint_col, border_col); + if (ImGui::BeginItemTooltip()) + { + float region_sz = 32.0f; + float region_x = io.MousePos.x - pos.x - region_sz * 0.5f; + float region_y = io.MousePos.y - pos.y - region_sz * 0.5f; + float zoom = 4.0f; + if (region_x < 0.0f) { region_x = 0.0f; } + else if (region_x > my_tex_w - region_sz) { region_x = my_tex_w - region_sz; } + if (region_y < 0.0f) { region_y = 0.0f; } + else if (region_y > my_tex_h - region_sz) { region_y = my_tex_h - region_sz; } + ImGui::Text("Min: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x, region_y); + ImGui::Text("Max: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x + region_sz, region_y + region_sz); + ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2((region_x) / my_tex_w, (region_y) / my_tex_h); + ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2((region_x + region_sz) / my_tex_w, (region_y + region_sz) / my_tex_h); + ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(region_sz * zoom, region_sz * zoom), uv0, uv1, tint_col, border_col); + ImGui::EndTooltip(); + } + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Images/Textured buttons"); + ImGui::TextWrapped("And now some textured buttons.."); + static int pressed_count = 0; + for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++) + { + // UV coordinates are often (0.0f, 0.0f) and (1.0f, 1.0f) to display an entire textures. + // Here are trying to display only a 32x32 pixels area of the texture, hence the UV computation. + // Read about UV coordinates here: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Image-Loading-and-Displaying-Examples + ImGui::PushID(i); + if (i > 0) + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(i - 1.0f, i - 1.0f)); + ImVec2 size = ImVec2(32.0f, 32.0f); // Size of the image we want to make visible + ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); // UV coordinates for lower-left + ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2(32.0f / my_tex_w, 32.0f / my_tex_h); // UV coordinates for (32,32) in our texture + ImVec4 bg_col = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f); // Black background + ImVec4 tint_col = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f); // No tint + if (ImGui::ImageButton("", my_tex_id, size, uv0, uv1, bg_col, tint_col)) + pressed_count += 1; + if (i > 0) + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + ImGui::PopID(); + ImGui::SameLine(); + } + ImGui::NewLine(); + ImGui::Text("Pressed %d times.", pressed_count); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Combo"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Combo")) + { + // Combo Boxes are also called "Dropdown" in other systems + // Expose flags as checkbox for the demo + static ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Only makes a difference if the popup is larger than the combo"); + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton)) + flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) + flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both + + // Using the generic BeginCombo() API, you have full control over how to display the combo contents. + // (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag intrusively + // stored in the object itself, etc.) + const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" }; + static int item_current_idx = 0; // Here we store our selection data as an index. + const char* combo_preview_value = items[item_current_idx]; // Pass in the preview value visible before opening the combo (it could be anything) + if (ImGui::BeginCombo("combo 1", combo_preview_value, flags)) + { + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++) + { + const bool is_selected = (item_current_idx == n); + if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected)) + item_current_idx = n; + + // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus) + if (is_selected) + ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus(); + } + ImGui::EndCombo(); + } + + // Simplified one-liner Combo() API, using values packed in a single constant string + // This is a convenience for when the selection set is small and known at compile-time. + static int item_current_2 = 0; + ImGui::Combo("combo 2 (one-liner)", &item_current_2, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0"); + + // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an array of const char* + // This is not very useful (may obsolete): prefer using BeginCombo()/EndCombo() for full control. + static int item_current_3 = -1; // If the selection isn't within 0..count, Combo won't display a preview + ImGui::Combo("combo 3 (array)", &item_current_3, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); + + // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an accessor function + struct Funcs { static bool ItemGetter(void* data, int n, const char** out_str) { *out_str = ((const char**)data)[n]; return true; } }; + static int item_current_4 = 0; + ImGui::Combo("combo 4 (function)", &item_current_4, &Funcs::ItemGetter, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/List Boxes"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("List boxes")) + { + // Using the generic BeginListBox() API, you have full control over how to display the combo contents. + // (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag intrusively + // stored in the object itself, etc.) + const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" }; + static int item_current_idx = 0; // Here we store our selection data as an index. + if (ImGui::BeginListBox("listbox 1")) + { + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++) + { + const bool is_selected = (item_current_idx == n); + if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected)) + item_current_idx = n; + + // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus) + if (is_selected) + ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus(); + } + ImGui::EndListBox(); + } + + // Custom size: use all width, 5 items tall + ImGui::Text("Full-width:"); + if (ImGui::BeginListBox("##listbox 2", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 5 * ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()))) + { + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++) + { + const bool is_selected = (item_current_idx == n); + if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected)) + item_current_idx = n; + + // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus) + if (is_selected) + ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus(); + } + ImGui::EndListBox(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selectables")) + { + // Selectable() has 2 overloads: + // - The one taking "bool selected" as a read-only selection information. + // When Selectable() has been clicked it returns true and you can alter selection state accordingly. + // - The one taking "bool* p_selected" as a read-write selection information (convenient in some cases) + // The earlier is more flexible, as in real application your selection may be stored in many different ways + // and not necessarily inside a bool value (e.g. in flags within objects, as an external list, etc). + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Basic"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic")) + { + static bool selection[5] = { false, true, false, false }; + ImGui::Selectable("1. I am selectable", &selection[0]); + ImGui::Selectable("2. I am selectable", &selection[1]); + ImGui::Selectable("3. I am selectable", &selection[2]); + if (ImGui::Selectable("4. I am double clickable", selection[3], ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick)) + if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(0)) + selection[3] = !selection[3]; + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Single Selection"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Single Selection")) + { + static int selected = -1; + for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++) + { + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n); + if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selected == n)) + selected = n; + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Multiple Selection"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Multiple Selection")) + { + HelpMarker("Hold CTRL and click to select multiple items."); + static bool selection[5] = { false, false, false, false, false }; + for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++) + { + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n); + if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selection[n])) + { + if (!ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) // Clear selection when CTRL is not held + memset(selection, 0, sizeof(selection)); + selection[n] ^= 1; + } + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Rendering more items on the same line"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Rendering more items on the same line")) + { + // (1) Using SetNextItemAllowOverlap() + // (2) Using the Selectable() override that takes "bool* p_selected" parameter, the bool value is toggled automatically. + static bool selected[3] = { false, false, false }; + ImGui::SetNextItemAllowOverlap(); ImGui::Selectable("main.c", &selected[0]); ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::SmallButton("Link 1"); + ImGui::SetNextItemAllowOverlap(); ImGui::Selectable("Hello.cpp", &selected[1]); ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::SmallButton("Link 2"); + ImGui::SetNextItemAllowOverlap(); ImGui::Selectable("Hello.h", &selected[2]); ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::SmallButton("Link 3"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/In columns"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("In columns")) + { + static bool selected[10] = {}; + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("split1", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++) + { + char label[32]; + sprintf(label, "Item %d", i); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Selectable(label, &selected[i]); // FIXME-TABLE: Selection overlap + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::Spacing(); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("split2", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++) + { + char label[32]; + sprintf(label, "Item %d", i); + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Selectable(label, &selected[i], ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Some other contents"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("123456"); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Grid"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Grid")) + { + static char selected[4][4] = { { 1, 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 1, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 1, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0, 1 } }; + + // Add in a bit of silly fun... + const float time = (float)ImGui::GetTime(); + const bool winning_state = memchr(selected, 0, sizeof(selected)) == NULL; // If all cells are selected... + if (winning_state) + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, ImVec2(0.5f + 0.5f * cosf(time * 2.0f), 0.5f + 0.5f * sinf(time * 3.0f))); + + for (int y = 0; y < 4; y++) + for (int x = 0; x < 4; x++) + { + if (x > 0) + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID(y * 4 + x); + if (ImGui::Selectable("Sailor", selected[y][x] != 0, 0, ImVec2(50, 50))) + { + // Toggle clicked cell + toggle neighbors + selected[y][x] ^= 1; + if (x > 0) { selected[y][x - 1] ^= 1; } + if (x < 3) { selected[y][x + 1] ^= 1; } + if (y > 0) { selected[y - 1][x] ^= 1; } + if (y < 3) { selected[y + 1][x] ^= 1; } + } + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + if (winning_state) + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Alignment"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Alignment")) + { + HelpMarker( + "By default, Selectables uses style.SelectableTextAlign but it can be overridden on a per-item " + "basis using PushStyleVar(). You'll probably want to always keep your default situation to " + "left-align otherwise it becomes difficult to layout multiple items on a same line"); + static bool selected[3 * 3] = { true, false, true, false, true, false, true, false, true }; + for (int y = 0; y < 3; y++) + { + for (int x = 0; x < 3; x++) + { + ImVec2 alignment = ImVec2((float)x / 2.0f, (float)y / 2.0f); + char name[32]; + sprintf(name, "(%.1f,%.1f)", alignment.x, alignment.y); + if (x > 0) ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, alignment); + ImGui::Selectable(name, &selected[3 * y + x], ImGuiSelectableFlags_None, ImVec2(80, 80)); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // To wire InputText() with std::string or any other custom string type, + // see the "Text Input > Resize Callback" section of this demo, and the misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h file. + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text Input")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Multi-line Text Input"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-line Text Input")) + { + // Note: we are using a fixed-sized buffer for simplicity here. See ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize + // and the code in misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for how to setup InputText() for dynamically resizing strings. + static char text[1024 * 16] = + "/*\n" + " The Pentium F00F bug, shorthand for F0 0F C7 C8,\n" + " the hexadecimal encoding of one offending instruction,\n" + " more formally, the invalid operand with locked CMPXCHG8B\n" + " instruction bug, is a design flaw in the majority of\n" + " Intel Pentium, Pentium MMX, and Pentium OverDrive\n" + " processors (all in the P5 microarchitecture).\n" + "*/\n\n" + "label:\n" + "\tlock cmpxchg8b eax\n"; + + static ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput; + HelpMarker("You can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize facility if you need to wire InputTextMultiline() to a dynamic string type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example. (This is not demonstrated in imgui_demo.cpp because we don't want to include in here)"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine); + ImGui::InputTextMultiline("##source", text, IM_ARRAYSIZE(text), ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() * 16), flags); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Filtered Text Input"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Filtered Text Input")) + { + struct TextFilters + { + // Modify character input by altering 'data->Eventchar' (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter callback) + static int FilterCasingSwap(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) + { + if (data->EventChar >= 'a' && data->EventChar <= 'z') { data->EventChar -= 'a' - 'A'; } // Lowercase becomes uppercase + else if (data->EventChar >= 'A' && data->EventChar <= 'Z') { data->EventChar += 'a' - 'A'; } // Uppercase becomes lowercase + return 0; + } + + // Return 0 (pass) if the character is 'i' or 'm' or 'g' or 'u' or 'i', otherwise return 1 (filter out) + static int FilterImGuiLetters(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) + { + if (data->EventChar < 256 && strchr("imgui", (char)data->EventChar)) + return 0; + return 1; + } + }; + + static char buf1[32] = ""; ImGui::InputText("default", buf1, 32); + static char buf2[32] = ""; ImGui::InputText("decimal", buf2, 32, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal); + static char buf3[32] = ""; ImGui::InputText("hexadecimal", buf3, 32, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase); + static char buf4[32] = ""; ImGui::InputText("uppercase", buf4, 32, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase); + static char buf5[32] = ""; ImGui::InputText("no blank", buf5, 32, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank); + static char buf6[32] = ""; ImGui::InputText("casing swap", buf6, 32, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter, TextFilters::FilterCasingSwap); // Use CharFilter callback to replace characters. + static char buf7[32] = ""; ImGui::InputText("\"imgui\"", buf7, 32, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter, TextFilters::FilterImGuiLetters); // Use CharFilter callback to disable some characters. + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Password input"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Password Input")) + { + static char password[64] = "password123"; + ImGui::InputText("password", password, IM_ARRAYSIZE(password), ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Display all characters as '*'.\nDisable clipboard cut and copy.\nDisable logging.\n"); + ImGui::InputTextWithHint("password (w/ hint)", "", password, IM_ARRAYSIZE(password), ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password); + ImGui::InputText("password (clear)", password, IM_ARRAYSIZE(password)); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Completion, History, Edit Callbacks"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Completion, History, Edit Callbacks")) + { + struct Funcs + { + static int MyCallback(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) + { + if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) + { + data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, ".."); + } + else if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) + { + if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_UpArrow) + { + data->DeleteChars(0, data->BufTextLen); + data->InsertChars(0, "Pressed Up!"); + data->SelectAll(); + } + else if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_DownArrow) + { + data->DeleteChars(0, data->BufTextLen); + data->InsertChars(0, "Pressed Down!"); + data->SelectAll(); + } + } + else if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit) + { + // Toggle casing of first character + char c = data->Buf[0]; + if ((c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') || (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z')) data->Buf[0] ^= 32; + data->BufDirty = true; + + // Increment a counter + int* p_int = (int*)data->UserData; + *p_int = *p_int + 1; + } + return 0; + } + }; + static char buf1[64]; + ImGui::InputText("Completion", buf1, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion, Funcs::MyCallback); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Here we append \"..\" each time Tab is pressed. See 'Examples>Console' for a more meaningful demonstration of using this callback."); + + static char buf2[64]; + ImGui::InputText("History", buf2, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory, Funcs::MyCallback); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Here we replace and select text each time Up/Down are pressed. See 'Examples>Console' for a more meaningful demonstration of using this callback."); + + static char buf3[64]; + static int edit_count = 0; + ImGui::InputText("Edit", buf3, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit, Funcs::MyCallback, (void*)&edit_count); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Here we toggle the casing of the first character on every edit + count edits."); + ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("(%d)", edit_count); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Resize Callback"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resize Callback")) + { + // To wire InputText() with std::string or any other custom string type, + // you can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag + create a custom ImGui::InputText() wrapper + // using your preferred type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an implementation of this using std::string. + HelpMarker( + "Using ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize to wire your custom string type to InputText().\n\n" + "See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an implementation of this for std::string."); + struct Funcs + { + static int MyResizeCallback(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) + { + if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) + { + ImVector* my_str = (ImVector*)data->UserData; + IM_ASSERT(my_str->begin() == data->Buf); + my_str->resize(data->BufSize); // NB: On resizing calls, generally data->BufSize == data->BufTextLen + 1 + data->Buf = my_str->begin(); + } + return 0; + } + + // Note: Because ImGui:: is a namespace you would typically add your own function into the namespace. + // For example, you code may declare a function 'ImGui::InputText(const char* label, MyString* my_str)' + static bool MyInputTextMultiline(const char* label, ImVector* my_str, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0) + { + IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) == 0); + return ImGui::InputTextMultiline(label, my_str->begin(), (size_t)my_str->size(), size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize, Funcs::MyResizeCallback, (void*)my_str); + } + }; + + // For this demo we are using ImVector as a string container. + // Note that because we need to store a terminating zero character, our size/capacity are 1 more + // than usually reported by a typical string class. + static ImVector my_str; + if (my_str.empty()) + my_str.push_back(0); + Funcs::MyInputTextMultiline("##MyStr", &my_str, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() * 16)); + ImGui::Text("Data: %p\nSize: %d\nCapacity: %d", (void*)my_str.begin(), my_str.size(), my_str.capacity()); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Miscellaneous"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Miscellaneous")) + { + static char buf1[16]; + static ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo); + ImGui::InputText("Hello", buf1, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf1), flags); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Tabs + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tabs")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs/Basic"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic")) + { + ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_None; + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags)) + { + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Avocado")) + { + ImGui::Text("This is the Avocado tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah"); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Broccoli")) + { + ImGui::Text("This is the Broccoli tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah"); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Cucumber")) + { + ImGui::Text("This is the Cucumber tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah"); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs/Advanced & Close Button"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced & Close Button")) + { + // Expose a couple of the available flags. In most cases you may just call BeginTabBar() with no flags (0). + static ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton); + if ((tab_bar_flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0) + tab_bar_flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_; + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown)) + tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown); + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll)) + tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll); + + // Tab Bar + const char* names[4] = { "Artichoke", "Beetroot", "Celery", "Daikon" }; + static bool opened[4] = { true, true, true, true }; // Persistent user state + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(opened); n++) + { + if (n > 0) { ImGui::SameLine(); } + ImGui::Checkbox(names[n], &opened[n]); + } + + // Passing a bool* to BeginTabItem() is similar to passing one to Begin(): + // the underlying bool will be set to false when the tab is closed. + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags)) + { + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(opened); n++) + if (opened[n] && ImGui::BeginTabItem(names[n], &opened[n], ImGuiTabItemFlags_None)) + { + ImGui::Text("This is the %s tab!", names[n]); + if (n & 1) + ImGui::Text("I am an odd tab."); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs/TabItemButton & Leading-Trailing flags"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("TabItemButton & Leading/Trailing flags")) + { + static ImVector active_tabs; + static int next_tab_id = 0; + if (next_tab_id == 0) // Initialize with some default tabs + for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) + active_tabs.push_back(next_tab_id++); + + // TabItemButton() and Leading/Trailing flags are distinct features which we will demo together. + // (It is possible to submit regular tabs with Leading/Trailing flags, or TabItemButton tabs without Leading/Trailing flags... + // but they tend to make more sense together) + static bool show_leading_button = true; + static bool show_trailing_button = true; + ImGui::Checkbox("Show Leading TabItemButton()", &show_leading_button); + ImGui::Checkbox("Show Trailing TabItemButton()", &show_trailing_button); + + // Expose some other flags which are useful to showcase how they interact with Leading/Trailing tabs + static ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs | ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton); + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown)) + tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown); + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll)) + tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll); + + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags)) + { + // Demo a Leading TabItemButton(): click the "?" button to open a menu + if (show_leading_button) + if (ImGui::TabItemButton("?", ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip)) + ImGui::OpenPopup("MyHelpMenu"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("MyHelpMenu")) + { + ImGui::Selectable("Hello!"); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // Demo Trailing Tabs: click the "+" button to add a new tab (in your app you may want to use a font icon instead of the "+") + // Note that we submit it before the regular tabs, but because of the ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing flag it will always appear at the end. + if (show_trailing_button) + if (ImGui::TabItemButton("+", ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing | ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip)) + active_tabs.push_back(next_tab_id++); // Add new tab + + // Submit our regular tabs + for (int n = 0; n < active_tabs.Size; ) + { + bool open = true; + char name[16]; + snprintf(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "%04d", active_tabs[n]); + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem(name, &open, ImGuiTabItemFlags_None)) + { + ImGui::Text("This is the %s tab!", name); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (!open) + active_tabs.erase(active_tabs.Data + n); + else + n++; + } + + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Plot/Graph widgets are not very good. + // Consider using a third-party library such as ImPlot: https://github.com/epezent/implot + // (see others https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Useful-Extensions) + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Plotting"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Plotting")) + { + static bool animate = true; + ImGui::Checkbox("Animate", &animate); + + // Plot as lines and plot as histogram + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Plotting/PlotLines, PlotHistogram"); + static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f }; + ImGui::PlotLines("Frame Times", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr)); + ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80.0f)); + + // Fill an array of contiguous float values to plot + // Tip: If your float aren't contiguous but part of a structure, you can pass a pointer to your first float + // and the sizeof() of your structure in the "stride" parameter. + static float values[90] = {}; + static int values_offset = 0; + static double refresh_time = 0.0; + if (!animate || refresh_time == 0.0) + refresh_time = ImGui::GetTime(); + while (refresh_time < ImGui::GetTime()) // Create data at fixed 60 Hz rate for the demo + { + static float phase = 0.0f; + values[values_offset] = cosf(phase); + values_offset = (values_offset + 1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(values); + phase += 0.10f * values_offset; + refresh_time += 1.0f / 60.0f; + } + + // Plots can display overlay texts + // (in this example, we will display an average value) + { + float average = 0.0f; + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(values); n++) + average += values[n]; + average /= (float)IM_ARRAYSIZE(values); + char overlay[32]; + sprintf(overlay, "avg %f", average); + ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), values_offset, overlay, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80.0f)); + } + + // Use functions to generate output + // FIXME: This is actually VERY awkward because current plot API only pass in indices. + // We probably want an API passing floats and user provide sample rate/count. + struct Funcs + { + static float Sin(void*, int i) { return sinf(i * 0.1f); } + static float Saw(void*, int i) { return (i & 1) ? 1.0f : -1.0f; } + }; + static int func_type = 0, display_count = 70; + ImGui::SeparatorText("Functions"); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8); + ImGui::Combo("func", &func_type, "Sin\0Saw\0"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SliderInt("Sample count", &display_count, 1, 400); + float (*func)(void*, int) = (func_type == 0) ? Funcs::Sin : Funcs::Saw; + ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80)); + ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80)); + ImGui::Separator(); + + // Animate a simple progress bar + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Plotting/ProgressBar"); + static float progress = 0.0f, progress_dir = 1.0f; + if (animate) + { + progress += progress_dir * 0.4f * ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime; + if (progress >= +1.1f) { progress = +1.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; } + if (progress <= -0.1f) { progress = -0.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; } + } + + // Typically we would use ImVec2(-1.0f,0.0f) or ImVec2(-FLT_MIN,0.0f) to use all available width, + // or ImVec2(width,0.0f) for a specified width. ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f) uses ItemWidth. + ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x); + ImGui::Text("Progress Bar"); + + float progress_saturated = IM_CLAMP(progress, 0.0f, 1.0f); + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "%d/%d", (int)(progress_saturated * 1753), 1753); + ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.f, 0.f), buf); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Color/Picker Widgets")) + { + static ImVec4 color = ImVec4(114.0f / 255.0f, 144.0f / 255.0f, 154.0f / 255.0f, 200.0f / 255.0f); + + static bool alpha_preview = true; + static bool alpha_half_preview = false; + static bool drag_and_drop = true; + static bool options_menu = true; + static bool hdr = false; + ImGui::SeparatorText("Options"); + ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Preview", &alpha_preview); + ImGui::Checkbox("With Half Alpha Preview", &alpha_half_preview); + ImGui::Checkbox("With Drag and Drop", &drag_and_drop); + ImGui::Checkbox("With Options Menu", &options_menu); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Right-click on the individual color widget to show options."); + ImGui::Checkbox("With HDR", &hdr); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Currently all this does is to lift the 0..1 limits on dragging widgets."); + ImGuiColorEditFlags misc_flags = (hdr ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR : 0) | (drag_and_drop ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) | (alpha_half_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf : (alpha_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview : 0)) | (options_menu ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorEdit"); + ImGui::SeparatorText("Inline color editor"); + ImGui::Text("Color widget:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "Click on the color square to open a color picker.\n" + "CTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n"); + ImGui::ColorEdit3("MyColor##1", (float*)&color, misc_flags); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorEdit (HSV, with Alpha)"); + ImGui::Text("Color widget HSV with Alpha:"); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | misc_flags); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorEdit (float display)"); + ImGui::Text("Color widget with Float Display:"); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2f", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | misc_flags); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorButton (with Picker)"); + ImGui::Text("Color button with Picker:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "With the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs flag you can hide all the slider/text inputs.\n" + "With the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel flag you can pass a non-empty label which will only " + "be used for the tooltip and picker popup."); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##3", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | misc_flags); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorButton (with custom Picker popup)"); + ImGui::Text("Color button with Custom Picker Popup:"); + + // Generate a default palette. The palette will persist and can be edited. + static bool saved_palette_init = true; + static ImVec4 saved_palette[32] = {}; + if (saved_palette_init) + { + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++) + { + ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(n / 31.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f, + saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z); + saved_palette[n].w = 1.0f; // Alpha + } + saved_palette_init = false; + } + + static ImVec4 backup_color; + bool open_popup = ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3b", color, misc_flags); + ImGui::SameLine(0, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x); + open_popup |= ImGui::Button("Palette"); + if (open_popup) + { + ImGui::OpenPopup("mypicker"); + backup_color = color; + } + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("mypicker")) + { + ImGui::Text("MY CUSTOM COLOR PICKER WITH AN AMAZING PALETTE!"); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::ColorPicker4("##picker", (float*)&color, misc_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview); + ImGui::SameLine(); + + ImGui::BeginGroup(); // Lock X position + ImGui::Text("Current"); + ImGui::ColorButton("##current", color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60, 40)); + ImGui::Text("Previous"); + if (ImGui::ColorButton("##previous", backup_color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60, 40))) + color = backup_color; + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("Palette"); + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++) + { + ImGui::PushID(n); + if ((n % 8) != 0) + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y); + + ImGuiColorEditFlags palette_button_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip; + if (ImGui::ColorButton("##palette", saved_palette[n], palette_button_flags, ImVec2(20, 20))) + color = ImVec4(saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z, color.w); // Preserve alpha! + + // Allow user to drop colors into each palette entry. Note that ColorButton() is already a + // drag source by default, unless specifying the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop flag. + if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget()) + { + if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F)) + memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3); + if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F)) + memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 4); + ImGui::EndDragDropTarget(); + } + + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::EndGroup(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorButton (simple)"); + ImGui::Text("Color button only:"); + static bool no_border = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder", &no_border); + ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3c", *(ImVec4*)&color, misc_flags | (no_border ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder : 0), ImVec2(80, 80)); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorPicker"); + ImGui::SeparatorText("Color picker"); + static bool alpha = true; + static bool alpha_bar = true; + static bool side_preview = true; + static bool ref_color = false; + static ImVec4 ref_color_v(1.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f, 0.5f); + static int display_mode = 0; + static int picker_mode = 0; + ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha", &alpha); + ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Bar", &alpha_bar); + ImGui::Checkbox("With Side Preview", &side_preview); + if (side_preview) + { + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Checkbox("With Ref Color", &ref_color); + if (ref_color) + { + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("##RefColor", &ref_color_v.x, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | misc_flags); + } + } + ImGui::Combo("Display Mode", &display_mode, "Auto/Current\0None\0RGB Only\0HSV Only\0Hex Only\0"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "ColorEdit defaults to displaying RGB inputs if you don't specify a display mode, " + "but the user can change it with a right-click on those inputs.\n\nColorPicker defaults to displaying RGB+HSV+Hex " + "if you don't specify a display mode.\n\nYou can change the defaults using SetColorEditOptions()."); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When not specified explicitly (Auto/Current mode), user can right-click the picker to change mode."); + ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = misc_flags; + if (!alpha) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha; // This is by default if you call ColorPicker3() instead of ColorPicker4() + if (alpha_bar) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar; + if (!side_preview) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview; + if (picker_mode == 1) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar; + if (picker_mode == 2) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel; + if (display_mode == 1) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs; // Disable all RGB/HSV/Hex displays + if (display_mode == 2) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB; // Override display mode + if (display_mode == 3) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV; + if (display_mode == 4) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex; + ImGui::ColorPicker4("MyColor##4", (float*)&color, flags, ref_color ? &ref_color_v.x : NULL); + + ImGui::Text("Set defaults in code:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "SetColorEditOptions() is designed to allow you to set boot-time default.\n" + "We don't have Push/Pop functions because you can force options on a per-widget basis if needed," + "and the user can change non-forced ones with the options menu.\nWe don't have a getter to avoid" + "encouraging you to persistently save values that aren't forward-compatible."); + if (ImGui::Button("Default: Uint8 + HSV + Hue Bar")) + ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar); + if (ImGui::Button("Default: Float + HDR + Hue Wheel")) + ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel); + + // Always both a small version of both types of pickers (to make it more visible in the demo to people who are skimming quickly through it) + ImGui::Text("Both types:"); + float w = (ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y) * 0.40f; + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(w); + ImGui::ColorPicker3("##MyColor##5", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(w); + ImGui::ColorPicker3("##MyColor##6", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha); + + // HSV encoded support (to avoid RGB<>HSV round trips and singularities when S==0 or V==0) + static ImVec4 color_hsv(0.23f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f); // Stored as HSV! + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImGui::Text("HSV encoded colors"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "By default, colors are given to ColorEdit and ColorPicker in RGB, but ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV" + "allows you to store colors as HSV and pass them to ColorEdit and ColorPicker as HSV. This comes with the" + "added benefit that you can manipulate hue values with the picker even when saturation or value are zero."); + ImGui::Text("Color widget with InputHSV:"); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("HSV shown as RGB##1", (float*)&color_hsv, ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("HSV shown as HSV##1", (float*)&color_hsv, ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float); + ImGui::DragFloat4("Raw HSV values", (float*)&color_hsv, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and Slider Flags"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag/Slider Flags")) + { + // Demonstrate using advanced flags for DragXXX and SliderXXX functions. Note that the flags are the same! + static ImGuiSliderFlags flags = ImGuiSliderFlags_None; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Always clamp value to min/max bounds (if any) when input manually with CTRL+Click."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable logarithmic editing (more precision for small values)."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable rounding underlying value to match precision of the format string (e.g. %.3f values are rounded to those 3 digits)."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable CTRL+Click or Enter key allowing to input text directly into the widget."); + + // Drags + static float drag_f = 0.5f; + static int drag_i = 50; + ImGui::Text("Underlying float value: %f", drag_f); + ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (0 -> 1)", &drag_f, 0.005f, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.3f", flags); + ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (0 -> +inf)", &drag_f, 0.005f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX, "%.3f", flags); + ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (-inf -> 1)", &drag_f, 0.005f, -FLT_MAX, 1.0f, "%.3f", flags); + ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (-inf -> +inf)", &drag_f, 0.005f, -FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, "%.3f", flags); + ImGui::DragInt("DragInt (0 -> 100)", &drag_i, 0.5f, 0, 100, "%d", flags); + + // Sliders + static float slider_f = 0.5f; + static int slider_i = 50; + ImGui::Text("Underlying float value: %f", slider_f); + ImGui::SliderFloat("SliderFloat (0 -> 1)", &slider_f, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.3f", flags); + ImGui::SliderInt("SliderInt (0 -> 100)", &slider_i, 0, 100, "%d", flags); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Range Widgets"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Range Widgets")) + { + static float begin = 10, end = 90; + static int begin_i = 100, end_i = 1000; + ImGui::DragFloatRange2("range float", &begin, &end, 0.25f, 0.0f, 100.0f, "Min: %.1f %%", "Max: %.1f %%", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + ImGui::DragIntRange2("range int", &begin_i, &end_i, 5, 0, 1000, "Min: %d units", "Max: %d units"); + ImGui::DragIntRange2("range int (no bounds)", &begin_i, &end_i, 5, 0, 0, "Min: %d units", "Max: %d units"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Data Types")) + { + // DragScalar/InputScalar/SliderScalar functions allow various data types + // - signed/unsigned + // - 8/16/32/64-bits + // - integer/float/double + // To avoid polluting the public API with all possible combinations, we use the ImGuiDataType enum + // to pass the type, and passing all arguments by pointer. + // This is the reason the test code below creates local variables to hold "zero" "one" etc. for each type. + // In practice, if you frequently use a given type that is not covered by the normal API entry points, + // you can wrap it yourself inside a 1 line function which can take typed argument as value instead of void*, + // and then pass their address to the generic function. For example: + // bool MySliderU64(const char *label, u64* value, u64 min = 0, u64 max = 0, const char* format = "%lld") + // { + // return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_U64, value, &min, &max, format); + // } + + // Setup limits (as helper variables so we can take their address, as explained above) + // Note: SliderScalar() functions have a maximum usable range of half the natural type maximum, hence the /2. + #ifndef LLONG_MIN + ImS64 LLONG_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1; + ImS64 LLONG_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL; + ImU64 ULLONG_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1); + #endif + const char s8_zero = 0, s8_one = 1, s8_fifty = 50, s8_min = -128, s8_max = 127; + const ImU8 u8_zero = 0, u8_one = 1, u8_fifty = 50, u8_min = 0, u8_max = 255; + const short s16_zero = 0, s16_one = 1, s16_fifty = 50, s16_min = -32768, s16_max = 32767; + const ImU16 u16_zero = 0, u16_one = 1, u16_fifty = 50, u16_min = 0, u16_max = 65535; + const ImS32 s32_zero = 0, s32_one = 1, s32_fifty = 50, s32_min = INT_MIN/2, s32_max = INT_MAX/2, s32_hi_a = INT_MAX/2 - 100, s32_hi_b = INT_MAX/2; + const ImU32 u32_zero = 0, u32_one = 1, u32_fifty = 50, u32_min = 0, u32_max = UINT_MAX/2, u32_hi_a = UINT_MAX/2 - 100, u32_hi_b = UINT_MAX/2; + const ImS64 s64_zero = 0, s64_one = 1, s64_fifty = 50, s64_min = LLONG_MIN/2, s64_max = LLONG_MAX/2, s64_hi_a = LLONG_MAX/2 - 100, s64_hi_b = LLONG_MAX/2; + const ImU64 u64_zero = 0, u64_one = 1, u64_fifty = 50, u64_min = 0, u64_max = ULLONG_MAX/2, u64_hi_a = ULLONG_MAX/2 - 100, u64_hi_b = ULLONG_MAX/2; + const float f32_zero = 0.f, f32_one = 1.f, f32_lo_a = -10000000000.0f, f32_hi_a = +10000000000.0f; + const double f64_zero = 0., f64_one = 1., f64_lo_a = -1000000000000000.0, f64_hi_a = +1000000000000000.0; + + // State + static char s8_v = 127; + static ImU8 u8_v = 255; + static short s16_v = 32767; + static ImU16 u16_v = 65535; + static ImS32 s32_v = -1; + static ImU32 u32_v = (ImU32)-1; + static ImS64 s64_v = -1; + static ImU64 u64_v = (ImU64)-1; + static float f32_v = 0.123f; + static double f64_v = 90000.01234567890123456789; + + const float drag_speed = 0.2f; + static bool drag_clamp = false; + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types/Drags"); + ImGui::SeparatorText("Drags"); + ImGui::Checkbox("Clamp integers to 0..50", &drag_clamp); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "As with every widget in dear imgui, we never modify values unless there is a user interaction.\n" + "You can override the clamping limits by using CTRL+Click to input a value."); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag s8", ImGuiDataType_S8, &s8_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s8_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s8_fifty : NULL); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag u8", ImGuiDataType_U8, &u8_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u8_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u8_fifty : NULL, "%u ms"); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag s16", ImGuiDataType_S16, &s16_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s16_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s16_fifty : NULL); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag u16", ImGuiDataType_U16, &u16_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u16_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u16_fifty : NULL, "%u ms"); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag s32", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s32_fifty : NULL); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag s32 hex", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s32_fifty : NULL, "0x%08X"); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag u32", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u32_fifty : NULL, "%u ms"); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag s64", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s64_fifty : NULL); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag u64", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u64_fifty : NULL); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag float", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, 0.005f, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f"); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag float log", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, 0.005f, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag double", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, NULL, "%.10f grams"); + ImGui::DragScalar("drag double log",ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "0 < %.10f < 1", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types/Sliders"); + ImGui::SeparatorText("Sliders"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s8 full", ImGuiDataType_S8, &s8_v, &s8_min, &s8_max, "%d"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u8 full", ImGuiDataType_U8, &u8_v, &u8_min, &u8_max, "%u"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s16 full", ImGuiDataType_S16, &s16_v, &s16_min, &s16_max, "%d"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u16 full", ImGuiDataType_U16, &u16_v, &u16_min, &u16_max, "%u"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 low", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_zero, &s32_fifty,"%d"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 high", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_hi_a, &s32_hi_b, "%d"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 full", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_min, &s32_max, "%d"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 hex", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_zero, &s32_fifty, "0x%04X"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 low", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_zero, &u32_fifty,"%u"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 high", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_hi_a, &u32_hi_b, "%u"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 full", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_min, &u32_max, "%u"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 low", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_zero, &s64_fifty,"%" PRId64); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 high", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_hi_a, &s64_hi_b, "%" PRId64); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 full", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_min, &s64_max, "%" PRId64); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 low", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_zero, &u64_fifty,"%" PRIu64 " ms"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 high", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_hi_a, &u64_hi_b, "%" PRIu64 " ms"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 full", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_min, &u64_max, "%" PRIu64 " ms"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low log", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%.10f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float high", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, &f32_lo_a, &f32_hi_a, "%e"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "%.10f grams"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low log",ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "%.10f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double high", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_lo_a, &f64_hi_a, "%e grams"); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Sliders (reverse)"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s8 reverse", ImGuiDataType_S8, &s8_v, &s8_max, &s8_min, "%d"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u8 reverse", ImGuiDataType_U8, &u8_v, &u8_max, &u8_min, "%u"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 reverse", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, &s32_fifty, &s32_zero, "%d"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 reverse", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, &u32_fifty, &u32_zero, "%u"); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 reverse", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, &s64_fifty, &s64_zero, "%" PRId64); + ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 reverse", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, &u64_fifty, &u64_zero, "%" PRIu64 " ms"); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types/Inputs"); + static bool inputs_step = true; + ImGui::SeparatorText("Inputs"); + ImGui::Checkbox("Show step buttons", &inputs_step); + ImGui::InputScalar("input s8", ImGuiDataType_S8, &s8_v, inputs_step ? &s8_one : NULL, NULL, "%d"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input u8", ImGuiDataType_U8, &u8_v, inputs_step ? &u8_one : NULL, NULL, "%u"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input s16", ImGuiDataType_S16, &s16_v, inputs_step ? &s16_one : NULL, NULL, "%d"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input u16", ImGuiDataType_U16, &u16_v, inputs_step ? &u16_one : NULL, NULL, "%u"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input s32", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%d"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input s32 hex", ImGuiDataType_S32, &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%04X"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input u32", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%u"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input u32 hex", ImGuiDataType_U32, &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%08X"); + ImGui::InputScalar("input s64", ImGuiDataType_S64, &s64_v, inputs_step ? &s64_one : NULL); + ImGui::InputScalar("input u64", ImGuiDataType_U64, &u64_v, inputs_step ? &u64_one : NULL); + ImGui::InputScalar("input float", ImGuiDataType_Float, &f32_v, inputs_step ? &f32_one : NULL); + ImGui::InputScalar("input double", ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, inputs_step ? &f64_one : NULL); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Multi-component Widgets"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-component Widgets")) + { + static float vec4f[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f }; + static int vec4i[4] = { 1, 5, 100, 255 }; + + ImGui::SeparatorText("2-wide"); + ImGui::InputFloat2("input float2", vec4f); + ImGui::DragFloat2("drag float2", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("slider float2", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::InputInt2("input int2", vec4i); + ImGui::DragInt2("drag int2", vec4i, 1, 0, 255); + ImGui::SliderInt2("slider int2", vec4i, 0, 255); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("3-wide"); + ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4f); + ImGui::DragFloat3("drag float3", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::SliderFloat3("slider float3", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::InputInt3("input int3", vec4i); + ImGui::DragInt3("drag int3", vec4i, 1, 0, 255); + ImGui::SliderInt3("slider int3", vec4i, 0, 255); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("4-wide"); + ImGui::InputFloat4("input float4", vec4f); + ImGui::DragFloat4("drag float4", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::SliderFloat4("slider float4", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::InputInt4("input int4", vec4i); + ImGui::DragInt4("drag int4", vec4i, 1, 0, 255); + ImGui::SliderInt4("slider int4", vec4i, 0, 255); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Vertical Sliders"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical Sliders")) + { + const float spacing = 4; + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(spacing, spacing)); + + static int int_value = 0; + ImGui::VSliderInt("##int", ImVec2(18, 160), &int_value, 0, 5); + ImGui::SameLine(); + + static float values[7] = { 0.0f, 0.60f, 0.35f, 0.9f, 0.70f, 0.20f, 0.0f }; + ImGui::PushID("set1"); + for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++) + { + if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID(i); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBg, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.5f, 0.5f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.6f, 0.5f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.7f, 0.5f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_SliderGrab, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.9f, 0.9f)); + ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(18, 160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, ""); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive() || ImGui::IsItemHovered()) + ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values[i]); + ImGui::PopStyleColor(4); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID("set2"); + static float values2[4] = { 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.40f, 0.25f }; + const int rows = 3; + const ImVec2 small_slider_size(18, (float)(int)((160.0f - (rows - 1) * spacing) / rows)); + for (int nx = 0; nx < 4; nx++) + { + if (nx > 0) ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::BeginGroup(); + for (int ny = 0; ny < rows; ny++) + { + ImGui::PushID(nx * rows + ny); + ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", small_slider_size, &values2[nx], 0.0f, 1.0f, ""); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive() || ImGui::IsItemHovered()) + ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values2[nx]); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::EndGroup(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID("set3"); + for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) + { + if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID(i); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, 40); + ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(40, 160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f\nsec"); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and drop"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and Drop")) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and drop/Standard widgets"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and drop in standard widgets")) + { + // ColorEdit widgets automatically act as drag source and drag target. + // They are using standardized payload strings IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F and IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F + // to allow your own widgets to use colors in their drag and drop interaction. + // Also see 'Demo->Widgets->Color/Picker Widgets->Palette' demo. + HelpMarker("You can drag from the color squares."); + static float col1[3] = { 1.0f, 0.0f, 0.2f }; + static float col2[4] = { 0.4f, 0.7f, 0.0f, 0.5f }; + ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and drop/Copy-swap items"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and drop to copy/swap items")) + { + enum Mode + { + Mode_Copy, + Mode_Move, + Mode_Swap + }; + static int mode = 0; + if (ImGui::RadioButton("Copy", mode == Mode_Copy)) { mode = Mode_Copy; } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::RadioButton("Move", mode == Mode_Move)) { mode = Mode_Move; } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::RadioButton("Swap", mode == Mode_Swap)) { mode = Mode_Swap; } + static const char* names[9] = + { + "Bobby", "Beatrice", "Betty", + "Brianna", "Barry", "Bernard", + "Bibi", "Blaine", "Bryn" + }; + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); n++) + { + ImGui::PushID(n); + if ((n % 3) != 0) + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button(names[n], ImVec2(60, 60)); + + // Our buttons are both drag sources and drag targets here! + if (ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags_None)) + { + // Set payload to carry the index of our item (could be anything) + ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL", &n, sizeof(int)); + + // Display preview (could be anything, e.g. when dragging an image we could decide to display + // the filename and a small preview of the image, etc.) + if (mode == Mode_Copy) { ImGui::Text("Copy %s", names[n]); } + if (mode == Mode_Move) { ImGui::Text("Move %s", names[n]); } + if (mode == Mode_Swap) { ImGui::Text("Swap %s", names[n]); } + ImGui::EndDragDropSource(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget()) + { + if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL")) + { + IM_ASSERT(payload->DataSize == sizeof(int)); + int payload_n = *(const int*)payload->Data; + if (mode == Mode_Copy) + { + names[n] = names[payload_n]; + } + if (mode == Mode_Move) + { + names[n] = names[payload_n]; + names[payload_n] = ""; + } + if (mode == Mode_Swap) + { + const char* tmp = names[n]; + names[n] = names[payload_n]; + names[payload_n] = tmp; + } + } + ImGui::EndDragDropTarget(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and Drop/Drag to reorder items (simple)"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag to reorder items (simple)")) + { + // Simple reordering + HelpMarker( + "We don't use the drag and drop api at all here! " + "Instead we query when the item is held but not hovered, and order items accordingly."); + static const char* item_names[] = { "Item One", "Item Two", "Item Three", "Item Four", "Item Five" }; + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names); n++) + { + const char* item = item_names[n]; + ImGui::Selectable(item); + + if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && !ImGui::IsItemHovered()) + { + int n_next = n + (ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0).y < 0.f ? -1 : 1); + if (n_next >= 0 && n_next < IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names)) + { + item_names[n] = item_names[n_next]; + item_names[n_next] = item; + ImGui::ResetMouseDragDelta(); + } + } + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Querying Item Status (Edited,Active,Hovered etc.)"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Querying Item Status (Edited/Active/Hovered etc.)")) + { + // Select an item type + const char* item_names[] = + { + "Text", "Button", "Button (w/ repeat)", "Checkbox", "SliderFloat", "InputText", "InputTextMultiline", "InputFloat", + "InputFloat3", "ColorEdit4", "Selectable", "MenuItem", "TreeNode", "TreeNode (w/ double-click)", "Combo", "ListBox" + }; + static int item_type = 4; + static bool item_disabled = false; + ImGui::Combo("Item Type", &item_type, item_names, IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names), IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names)); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Testing how various types of items are interacting with the IsItemXXX functions. Note that the bool return value of most ImGui function is generally equivalent to calling ImGui::IsItemHovered()."); + ImGui::Checkbox("Item Disabled", &item_disabled); + + // Submit selected items so we can query their status in the code following it. + bool ret = false; + static bool b = false; + static float col4f[4] = { 1.0f, 0.5, 0.0f, 1.0f }; + static char str[16] = {}; + if (item_disabled) + ImGui::BeginDisabled(true); + if (item_type == 0) { ImGui::Text("ITEM: Text"); } // Testing text items with no identifier/interaction + if (item_type == 1) { ret = ImGui::Button("ITEM: Button"); } // Testing button + if (item_type == 2) { ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true); ret = ImGui::Button("ITEM: Button"); ImGui::PopButtonRepeat(); } // Testing button (with repeater) + if (item_type == 3) { ret = ImGui::Checkbox("ITEM: Checkbox", &b); } // Testing checkbox + if (item_type == 4) { ret = ImGui::SliderFloat("ITEM: SliderFloat", &col4f[0], 0.0f, 1.0f); } // Testing basic item + if (item_type == 5) { ret = ImGui::InputText("ITEM: InputText", &str[0], IM_ARRAYSIZE(str)); } // Testing input text (which handles tabbing) + if (item_type == 6) { ret = ImGui::InputTextMultiline("ITEM: InputTextMultiline", &str[0], IM_ARRAYSIZE(str)); } // Testing input text (which uses a child window) + if (item_type == 7) { ret = ImGui::InputFloat("ITEM: InputFloat", col4f, 1.0f); } // Testing +/- buttons on scalar input + if (item_type == 8) { ret = ImGui::InputFloat3("ITEM: InputFloat3", col4f); } // Testing multi-component items (IsItemXXX flags are reported merged) + if (item_type == 9) { ret = ImGui::ColorEdit4("ITEM: ColorEdit4", col4f); } // Testing multi-component items (IsItemXXX flags are reported merged) + if (item_type == 10){ ret = ImGui::Selectable("ITEM: Selectable"); } // Testing selectable item + if (item_type == 11){ ret = ImGui::MenuItem("ITEM: MenuItem"); } // Testing menu item (they use ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease button policy) + if (item_type == 12){ ret = ImGui::TreeNode("ITEM: TreeNode"); if (ret) ImGui::TreePop(); } // Testing tree node + if (item_type == 13){ ret = ImGui::TreeNodeEx("ITEM: TreeNode w/ ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen); } // Testing tree node with ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick button policy. + if (item_type == 14){ const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi" }; static int current = 1; ret = ImGui::Combo("ITEM: Combo", ¤t, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); } + if (item_type == 15){ const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi" }; static int current = 1; ret = ImGui::ListBox("ITEM: ListBox", ¤t, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items), IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); } + + bool hovered_delay_none = ImGui::IsItemHovered(); + bool hovered_delay_stationary = ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary); + bool hovered_delay_short = ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort); + bool hovered_delay_normal = ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal); + bool hovered_delay_tooltip = ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip); // = Normal + Stationary + + // Display the values of IsItemHovered() and other common item state functions. + // Note that the ImGuiHoveredFlags_XXX flags can be combined. + // Because BulletText is an item itself and that would affect the output of IsItemXXX functions, + // we query every state in a single call to avoid storing them and to simplify the code. + ImGui::BulletText( + "Return value = %d\n" + "IsItemFocused() = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered() = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenOverlappedByWindow) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenDisabled) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_RectOnly) = %d\n" + "IsItemActive() = %d\n" + "IsItemEdited() = %d\n" + "IsItemActivated() = %d\n" + "IsItemDeactivated() = %d\n" + "IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() = %d\n" + "IsItemVisible() = %d\n" + "IsItemClicked() = %d\n" + "IsItemToggledOpen() = %d\n" + "GetItemRectMin() = (%.1f, %.1f)\n" + "GetItemRectMax() = (%.1f, %.1f)\n" + "GetItemRectSize() = (%.1f, %.1f)", + ret, + ImGui::IsItemFocused(), + ImGui::IsItemHovered(), + ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup), + ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem), + ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByItem), + ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlappedByWindow), + ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled), + ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly), + ImGui::IsItemActive(), + ImGui::IsItemEdited(), + ImGui::IsItemActivated(), + ImGui::IsItemDeactivated(), + ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(), + ImGui::IsItemVisible(), + ImGui::IsItemClicked(), + ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen(), + ImGui::GetItemRectMin().x, ImGui::GetItemRectMin().y, + ImGui::GetItemRectMax().x, ImGui::GetItemRectMax().y, + ImGui::GetItemRectSize().x, ImGui::GetItemRectSize().y + ); + ImGui::BulletText( + "with Hovering Delay or Stationary test:\n" + "IsItemHovered() = = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_Stationary) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_DelayShort) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_DelayNormal) = %d\n" + "IsItemHovered(_Tooltip) = %d", + hovered_delay_none, hovered_delay_stationary, hovered_delay_short, hovered_delay_normal, hovered_delay_tooltip); + + if (item_disabled) + ImGui::EndDisabled(); + + char buf[1] = ""; + ImGui::InputText("unused", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("This widget is only here to be able to tab-out of the widgets above and see e.g. Deactivated() status."); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Querying Window Status (Focused,Hovered etc.)"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Querying Window Status (Focused/Hovered etc.)")) + { + static bool embed_all_inside_a_child_window = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Embed everything inside a child window for testing _RootWindow flag.", &embed_all_inside_a_child_window); + if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window) + ImGui::BeginChild("outer_child", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20.0f), true); + + // Testing IsWindowFocused() function with its various flags. + ImGui::BulletText( + "IsWindowFocused() = %d\n" + "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows) = %d\n" + "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n" + "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n" + "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n" + "IsWindowFocused(_RootWindow) = %d\n" + "IsWindowFocused(_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n" + "IsWindowFocused(_AnyWindow) = %d\n", + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(), + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows), + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy), + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow), + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy), + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow), + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy), + ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow)); + + // Testing IsWindowHovered() function with its various flags. + ImGui::BulletText( + "IsWindowHovered() = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_RootWindow) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_AnyWindow) = %d\n" + "IsWindowHovered(_Stationary) = %d\n", + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow), + ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary)); + + ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 50), true); + ImGui::Text("This is another child window for testing the _ChildWindows flag."); + ImGui::EndChild(); + if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window) + ImGui::EndChild(); + + // Calling IsItemHovered() after begin returns the hovered status of the title bar. + // This is useful in particular if you want to create a context menu associated to the title bar of a window. + static bool test_window = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Hovered/Active tests after Begin() for title bar testing", &test_window); + if (test_window) + { + ImGui::Begin("Title bar Hovered/Active tests", &test_window); + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) // <-- This is using IsItemHovered() + { + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close")) { test_window = false; } + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + ImGui::Text( + "IsItemHovered() after begin = %d (== is title bar hovered)\n" + "IsItemActive() after begin = %d (== is window being clicked/moved)\n", + ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsItemActive()); + ImGui::End(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Demonstrate BeginDisabled/EndDisabled using a checkbox located at the bottom of the section (which is a bit odd: + // logically we'd have this checkbox at the top of the section, but we don't want this feature to steal that space) + if (disable_all) + ImGui::EndDisabled(); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Disable Block"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Disable block")) + { + ImGui::Checkbox("Disable entire section above", &disable_all); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Demonstrate using BeginDisabled()/EndDisabled() across this section."); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Filter"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text Filter")) + { + // Helper class to easy setup a text filter. + // You may want to implement a more feature-full filtering scheme in your own application. + HelpMarker("Not a widget per-se, but ImGuiTextFilter is a helper to perform simple filtering on text strings."); + static ImGuiTextFilter filter; + ImGui::Text("Filter usage:\n" + " \"\" display all lines\n" + " \"xxx\" display lines containing \"xxx\"\n" + " \"xxx,yyy\" display lines containing \"xxx\" or \"yyy\"\n" + " \"-xxx\" hide lines containing \"xxx\""); + filter.Draw(); + const char* lines[] = { "aaa1.c", "bbb1.c", "ccc1.c", "aaa2.cpp", "bbb2.cpp", "ccc2.cpp", "abc.h", "hello, world" }; + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(lines); i++) + if (filter.PassFilter(lines[i])) + ImGui::BulletText("%s", lines[i]); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } +} + +static void ShowDemoWindowLayout() +{ + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout"); + if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Layout & Scrolling")) + return; + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Child windows"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Child windows")) + { + ImGui::SeparatorText("Child windows"); + + HelpMarker("Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window."); + static bool disable_mouse_wheel = false; + static bool disable_menu = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Mouse Wheel", &disable_mouse_wheel); + ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Menu", &disable_menu); + + // Child 1: no border, enable horizontal scrollbar + { + ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar; + if (disable_mouse_wheel) + window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse; + ImGui::BeginChild("ChildL", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f, 260), false, window_flags); + for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) + ImGui::Text("%04d: scrollable region", i); + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + + ImGui::SameLine(); + + // Child 2: rounded border + { + ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_None; + if (disable_mouse_wheel) + window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse; + if (!disable_menu) + window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar; + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, 5.0f); + ImGui::BeginChild("ChildR", ImVec2(0, 260), true, window_flags); + if (!disable_menu && ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu")) + { + ShowExampleMenuFile(); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginTable("split", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings)) + { + for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) + { + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "%03d", i); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f)); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Misc/Advanced"); + + // Demonstrate a few extra things + // - Changing ImGuiCol_ChildBg (which is transparent black in default styles) + // - Using SetCursorPos() to position child window (the child window is an item from the POV of parent window) + // You can also call SetNextWindowPos() to position the child window. The parent window will effectively + // layout from this position. + // - Using ImGui::GetItemRectMin/Max() to query the "item" state (because the child window is an item from + // the POV of the parent window). See 'Demo->Querying Status (Edited/Active/Hovered etc.)' for details. + { + static int offset_x = 0; + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8); + ImGui::DragInt("Offset X", &offset_x, 1.0f, -1000, 1000); + + ImGui::SetCursorPosX(ImGui::GetCursorPosX() + (float)offset_x); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 100)); + ImGui::BeginChild("Red", ImVec2(200, 100), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_None); + for (int n = 0; n < 50; n++) + ImGui::Text("Some test %d", n); + ImGui::EndChild(); + bool child_is_hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered(); + ImVec2 child_rect_min = ImGui::GetItemRectMin(); + ImVec2 child_rect_max = ImGui::GetItemRectMax(); + ImGui::PopStyleColor(); + ImGui::Text("Hovered: %d", child_is_hovered); + ImGui::Text("Rect of child window is: (%.0f,%.0f) (%.0f,%.0f)", child_rect_min.x, child_rect_min.y, child_rect_max.x, child_rect_max.y); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Widgets Width"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Widgets Width")) + { + static float f = 0.0f; + static bool show_indented_items = true; + ImGui::Checkbox("Show indented items", &show_indented_items); + + // Use SetNextItemWidth() to set the width of a single upcoming item. + // Use PushItemWidth()/PopItemWidth() to set the width of a group of items. + // In real code use you'll probably want to choose width values that are proportional to your font size + // e.g. Using '20.0f * GetFontSize()' as width instead of '200.0f', etc. + + ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(100)"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Fixed width."); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(100); + ImGui::DragFloat("float##1b", &f); + if (show_indented_items) + { + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##1b", &f); + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(-100)"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Align to right edge minus 100"); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-100); + ImGui::DragFloat("float##2a", &f); + if (show_indented_items) + { + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##2b", &f); + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f)"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Half of available width.\n(~ right-cursor_pos)\n(works within a column set)"); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f); + ImGui::DragFloat("float##3a", &f); + if (show_indented_items) + { + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##3b", &f); + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(-GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f)"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Align to right edge minus half"); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f); + ImGui::DragFloat("float##4a", &f); + if (show_indented_items) + { + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##4b", &f); + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + // Demonstrate using PushItemWidth to surround three items. + // Calling SetNextItemWidth() before each of them would have the same effect. + ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(-FLT_MIN)"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Align to right edge"); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); + ImGui::DragFloat("##float5a", &f); + if (show_indented_items) + { + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##5b", &f); + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic Horizontal Layout")) + { + ImGui::TextWrapped("(Use ImGui::SameLine() to keep adding items to the right of the preceding item)"); + + // Text + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/SameLine"); + ImGui::Text("Two items: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 1, 0, 1), "Sailor"); + + // Adjust spacing + ImGui::Text("More spacing: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine(0, 20); + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 1, 0, 1), "Sailor"); + + // Button + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + ImGui::Text("Normal buttons"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Apple"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Corniflower"); + + // Button + ImGui::Text("Small buttons"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SmallButton("Like this one"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("can fit within a text block."); + + // Aligned to arbitrary position. Easy/cheap column. + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/SameLine (with offset)"); + ImGui::Text("Aligned"); + ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::Text("x=150"); + ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text("x=300"); + ImGui::Text("Aligned"); + ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::SmallButton("x=150"); + ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::SmallButton("x=300"); + + // Checkbox + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/SameLine (more)"); + static bool c1 = false, c2 = false, c3 = false, c4 = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("My", &c1); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Checkbox("Tailor", &c2); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Checkbox("Is", &c3); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Checkbox("Rich", &c4); + + // Various + static float f0 = 1.0f, f1 = 2.0f, f2 = 3.0f; + ImGui::PushItemWidth(80); + const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD" }; + static int item = -1; + ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SliderFloat("X", &f0, 0.0f, 5.0f); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SliderFloat("Y", &f1, 0.0f, 5.0f); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SliderFloat("Z", &f2, 0.0f, 5.0f); + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + ImGui::PushItemWidth(80); + ImGui::Text("Lists:"); + static int selection[4] = { 0, 1, 2, 3 }; + for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) + { + if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID(i); + ImGui::ListBox("", &selection[i], items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); + ImGui::PopID(); + //ImGui::SetItemTooltip("ListBox %d hovered", i); + } + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + // Dummy + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/Dummy"); + ImVec2 button_sz(40, 40); + ImGui::Button("A", button_sz); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Dummy(button_sz); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("B", button_sz); + + // Manually wrapping + // (we should eventually provide this as an automatic layout feature, but for now you can do it manually) + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/Manual wrapping"); + ImGui::Text("Manual wrapping:"); + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + int buttons_count = 20; + float window_visible_x2 = ImGui::GetWindowPos().x + ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax().x; + for (int n = 0; n < buttons_count; n++) + { + ImGui::PushID(n); + ImGui::Button("Box", button_sz); + float last_button_x2 = ImGui::GetItemRectMax().x; + float next_button_x2 = last_button_x2 + style.ItemSpacing.x + button_sz.x; // Expected position if next button was on same line + if (n + 1 < buttons_count && next_button_x2 < window_visible_x2) + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Groups"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Groups")) + { + HelpMarker( + "BeginGroup() basically locks the horizontal position for new line. " + "EndGroup() bundles the whole group so that you can use \"item\" functions such as " + "IsItemHovered()/IsItemActive() or SameLine() etc. on the whole group."); + ImGui::BeginGroup(); + { + ImGui::BeginGroup(); + ImGui::Button("AAA"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("BBB"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::BeginGroup(); + ImGui::Button("CCC"); + ImGui::Button("DDD"); + ImGui::EndGroup(); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("EEE"); + ImGui::EndGroup(); + ImGui::SetItemTooltip("First group hovered"); + } + // Capture the group size and create widgets using the same size + ImVec2 size = ImGui::GetItemRectSize(); + const float values[5] = { 0.5f, 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.60f, 0.25f }; + ImGui::PlotHistogram("##values", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, size); + + ImGui::Button("ACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x) * 0.5f, size.y)); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("REACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x) * 0.5f, size.y)); + ImGui::EndGroup(); + ImGui::SameLine(); + + ImGui::Button("LEVERAGE\nBUZZWORD", size); + ImGui::SameLine(); + + if (ImGui::BeginListBox("List", size)) + { + ImGui::Selectable("Selected", true); + ImGui::Selectable("Not Selected", false); + ImGui::EndListBox(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Text Baseline Alignment"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text Baseline Alignment")) + { + { + ImGui::BulletText("Text baseline:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "This is testing the vertical alignment that gets applied on text to keep it aligned with widgets. " + "Lines only composed of text or \"small\" widgets use less vertical space than lines with framed widgets."); + ImGui::Indent(); + + ImGui::Text("KO Blahblah"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Some framed item"); ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Baseline of button will look misaligned with text.."); + + // If your line starts with text, call AlignTextToFramePadding() to align text to upcoming widgets. + // (because we don't know what's coming after the Text() statement, we need to move the text baseline + // down by FramePadding.y ahead of time) + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + ImGui::Text("OK Blahblah"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Some framed item"); ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("We call AlignTextToFramePadding() to vertically align the text baseline by +FramePadding.y"); + + // SmallButton() uses the same vertical padding as Text + ImGui::Button("TEST##1"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("TEST"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SmallButton("TEST##2"); + + // If your line starts with text, call AlignTextToFramePadding() to align text to upcoming widgets. + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + ImGui::Text("Text aligned to framed item"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Item##1"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Item"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SmallButton("Item##2"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Item##3"); + + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + + ImGui::Spacing(); + + { + ImGui::BulletText("Multi-line text:"); + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Banana"); + + ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree"); + + ImGui::Button("HOP##1"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Banana"); + + ImGui::Button("HOP##2"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Banana"); + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + + ImGui::Spacing(); + + { + ImGui::BulletText("Misc items:"); + ImGui::Indent(); + + // SmallButton() sets FramePadding to zero. Text baseline is aligned to match baseline of previous Button. + ImGui::Button("80x80", ImVec2(80, 80)); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("50x50", ImVec2(50, 50)); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Button("Button()"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SmallButton("SmallButton()"); + + // Tree + const float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x; + ImGui::Button("Button##1"); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Node##1")) + { + // Placeholder tree data + for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++) + ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Vertically align text node a bit lower so it'll be vertically centered with upcoming widget. + // Otherwise you can use SmallButton() (smaller fit). + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + + // Common mistake to avoid: if we want to SameLine after TreeNode we need to do it before we add + // other contents below the node. + bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Node##2"); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##2"); + if (node_open) + { + // Placeholder tree data + for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++) + ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Bullet + ImGui::Button("Button##3"); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); + ImGui::BulletText("Bullet text"); + + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + ImGui::BulletText("Node"); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##4"); + ImGui::Unindent(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Scrolling")) + { + // Vertical scroll functions + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Vertical"); + HelpMarker("Use SetScrollHereY() or SetScrollFromPosY() to scroll to a given vertical position."); + + static int track_item = 50; + static bool enable_track = true; + static bool enable_extra_decorations = false; + static float scroll_to_off_px = 0.0f; + static float scroll_to_pos_px = 200.0f; + + ImGui::Checkbox("Decoration", &enable_extra_decorations); + + ImGui::Checkbox("Track", &enable_track); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(100); + ImGui::SameLine(140); enable_track |= ImGui::DragInt("##item", &track_item, 0.25f, 0, 99, "Item = %d"); + + bool scroll_to_off = ImGui::Button("Scroll Offset"); + ImGui::SameLine(140); scroll_to_off |= ImGui::DragFloat("##off", &scroll_to_off_px, 1.00f, 0, FLT_MAX, "+%.0f px"); + + bool scroll_to_pos = ImGui::Button("Scroll To Pos"); + ImGui::SameLine(140); scroll_to_pos |= ImGui::DragFloat("##pos", &scroll_to_pos_px, 1.00f, -10, FLT_MAX, "X/Y = %.0f px"); + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + if (scroll_to_off || scroll_to_pos) + enable_track = false; + + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + float child_w = (ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x - 4 * style.ItemSpacing.x) / 5; + if (child_w < 1.0f) + child_w = 1.0f; + ImGui::PushID("##VerticalScrolling"); + for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) + { + if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::BeginGroup(); + const char* names[] = { "Top", "25%", "Center", "75%", "Bottom" }; + ImGui::TextUnformatted(names[i]); + + const ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = enable_extra_decorations ? ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar : 0; + const ImGuiID child_id = ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i); + const bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(child_w, 200.0f), true, child_flags); + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted("abc"); + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + if (scroll_to_off) + ImGui::SetScrollY(scroll_to_off_px); + if (scroll_to_pos) + ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(ImGui::GetCursorStartPos().y + scroll_to_pos_px, i * 0.25f); + if (child_is_visible) // Avoid calling SetScrollHereY when running with culled items + { + for (int item = 0; item < 100; item++) + { + if (enable_track && item == track_item) + { + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 1, 0, 1), "Item %d", item); + ImGui::SetScrollHereY(i * 0.25f); // 0.0f:top, 0.5f:center, 1.0f:bottom + } + else + { + ImGui::Text("Item %d", item); + } + } + } + float scroll_y = ImGui::GetScrollY(); + float scroll_max_y = ImGui::GetScrollMaxY(); + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::Text("%.0f/%.0f", scroll_y, scroll_max_y); + ImGui::EndGroup(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + + // Horizontal scroll functions + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Horizontal"); + ImGui::Spacing(); + HelpMarker( + "Use SetScrollHereX() or SetScrollFromPosX() to scroll to a given horizontal position.\n\n" + "Because the clipping rectangle of most window hides half worth of WindowPadding on the " + "left/right, using SetScrollFromPosX(+1) will usually result in clipped text whereas the " + "equivalent SetScrollFromPosY(+1) wouldn't."); + ImGui::PushID("##HorizontalScrolling"); + for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) + { + float child_height = ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() + style.ScrollbarSize + style.WindowPadding.y * 2.0f; + ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar | (enable_extra_decorations ? ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar : 0); + ImGuiID child_id = ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i); + bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(-100, child_height), true, child_flags); + if (scroll_to_off) + ImGui::SetScrollX(scroll_to_off_px); + if (scroll_to_pos) + ImGui::SetScrollFromPosX(ImGui::GetCursorStartPos().x + scroll_to_pos_px, i * 0.25f); + if (child_is_visible) // Avoid calling SetScrollHereY when running with culled items + { + for (int item = 0; item < 100; item++) + { + if (item > 0) + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (enable_track && item == track_item) + { + ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 1, 0, 1), "Item %d", item); + ImGui::SetScrollHereX(i * 0.25f); // 0.0f:left, 0.5f:center, 1.0f:right + } + else + { + ImGui::Text("Item %d", item); + } + } + } + float scroll_x = ImGui::GetScrollX(); + float scroll_max_x = ImGui::GetScrollMaxX(); + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::SameLine(); + const char* names[] = { "Left", "25%", "Center", "75%", "Right" }; + ImGui::Text("%s\n%.0f/%.0f", names[i], scroll_x, scroll_max_x); + ImGui::Spacing(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + + // Miscellaneous Horizontal Scrolling Demo + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Horizontal (more)"); + HelpMarker( + "Horizontal scrolling for a window is enabled via the ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar flag.\n\n" + "You may want to also explicitly specify content width by using SetNextWindowContentWidth() before Begin()."); + static int lines = 7; + ImGui::SliderInt("Lines", &lines, 1, 15); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, 3.0f); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2.0f, 1.0f)); + ImVec2 scrolling_child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() * 7 + 30); + ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", scrolling_child_size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar); + for (int line = 0; line < lines; line++) + { + // Display random stuff. For the sake of this trivial demo we are using basic Button() + SameLine() + // If you want to create your own time line for a real application you may be better off manipulating + // the cursor position yourself, aka using SetCursorPos/SetCursorScreenPos to position the widgets + // yourself. You may also want to use the lower-level ImDrawList API. + int num_buttons = 10 + ((line & 1) ? line * 9 : line * 3); + for (int n = 0; n < num_buttons; n++) + { + if (n > 0) ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID(n + line * 1000); + char num_buf[16]; + sprintf(num_buf, "%d", n); + const char* label = (!(n % 15)) ? "FizzBuzz" : (!(n % 3)) ? "Fizz" : (!(n % 5)) ? "Buzz" : num_buf; + float hue = n * 0.05f; + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.6f, 0.6f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.7f, 0.7f)); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.8f, 0.8f)); + ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(40.0f + sinf((float)(line + n)) * 20.0f, 0.0f)); + ImGui::PopStyleColor(3); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + } + float scroll_x = ImGui::GetScrollX(); + float scroll_max_x = ImGui::GetScrollMaxX(); + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(2); + float scroll_x_delta = 0.0f; + ImGui::SmallButton("<<"); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) + scroll_x_delta = -ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f; + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Scroll from code"); ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SmallButton(">>"); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) + scroll_x_delta = +ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f; + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("%.0f/%.0f", scroll_x, scroll_max_x); + if (scroll_x_delta != 0.0f) + { + // Demonstrate a trick: you can use Begin to set yourself in the context of another window + // (here we are already out of your child window) + ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling"); + ImGui::SetScrollX(ImGui::GetScrollX() + scroll_x_delta); + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + ImGui::Spacing(); + + static bool show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Show Horizontal contents size demo window", &show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window); + + if (show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window) + { + static bool show_h_scrollbar = true; + static bool show_button = true; + static bool show_tree_nodes = true; + static bool show_text_wrapped = false; + static bool show_columns = true; + static bool show_tab_bar = true; + static bool show_child = false; + static bool explicit_content_size = false; + static float contents_size_x = 300.0f; + if (explicit_content_size) + ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(contents_size_x, 0.0f)); + ImGui::Begin("Horizontal contents size demo window", &show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window, show_h_scrollbar ? ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar : 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Horizontal contents size demo window"); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(2, 0)); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2, 0)); + HelpMarker("Test of different widgets react and impact the work rectangle growing when horizontal scrolling is enabled.\n\nUse 'Metrics->Tools->Show windows rectangles' to visualize rectangles."); + ImGui::Checkbox("H-scrollbar", &show_h_scrollbar); + ImGui::Checkbox("Button", &show_button); // Will grow contents size (unless explicitly overwritten) + ImGui::Checkbox("Tree nodes", &show_tree_nodes); // Will grow contents size and display highlight over full width + ImGui::Checkbox("Text wrapped", &show_text_wrapped);// Will grow and use contents size + ImGui::Checkbox("Columns", &show_columns); // Will use contents size + ImGui::Checkbox("Tab bar", &show_tab_bar); // Will use contents size + ImGui::Checkbox("Child", &show_child); // Will grow and use contents size + ImGui::Checkbox("Explicit content size", &explicit_content_size); + ImGui::Text("Scroll %.1f/%.1f %.1f/%.1f", ImGui::GetScrollX(), ImGui::GetScrollMaxX(), ImGui::GetScrollY(), ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()); + if (explicit_content_size) + { + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(100); + ImGui::DragFloat("##csx", &contents_size_x); + ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(p, ImVec2(p.x + 10, p.y + 10), IM_COL32_WHITE); + ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(p.x + contents_size_x - 10, p.y), ImVec2(p.x + contents_size_x, p.y + 10), IM_COL32_WHITE); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(0, 10)); + } + ImGui::PopStyleVar(2); + ImGui::Separator(); + if (show_button) + { + ImGui::Button("this is a 300-wide button", ImVec2(300, 0)); + } + if (show_tree_nodes) + { + bool open = true; + if (ImGui::TreeNode("this is a tree node")) + { + if (ImGui::TreeNode("another one of those tree node...")) + { + ImGui::Text("Some tree contents"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::CollapsingHeader("CollapsingHeader", &open); + } + if (show_text_wrapped) + { + ImGui::TextWrapped("This text should automatically wrap on the edge of the work rectangle."); + } + if (show_columns) + { + ImGui::Text("Tables:"); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table", 4, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Width %.2f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::Text("Columns:"); + ImGui::Columns(4); + for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++) + { + ImGui::Text("Width %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnWidth()); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + } + ImGui::Columns(1); + } + if (show_tab_bar && ImGui::BeginTabBar("Hello")) + { + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("OneOneOne")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); } + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("TwoTwoTwo")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); } + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("ThreeThreeThree")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); } + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("FourFourFour")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); } + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + if (show_child) + { + ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 0), true); + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + ImGui::End(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Clipping"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Clipping")) + { + static ImVec2 size(100.0f, 100.0f); + static ImVec2 offset(30.0f, 30.0f); + ImGui::DragFloat2("size", (float*)&size, 0.5f, 1.0f, 200.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::TextWrapped("(Click and drag to scroll)"); + + HelpMarker( + "(Left) Using ImGui::PushClipRect():\n" + "Will alter ImGui hit-testing logic + ImDrawList rendering.\n" + "(use this if you want your clipping rectangle to affect interactions)\n\n" + "(Center) Using ImDrawList::PushClipRect():\n" + "Will alter ImDrawList rendering only.\n" + "(use this as a shortcut if you are only using ImDrawList calls)\n\n" + "(Right) Using ImDrawList::AddText() with a fine ClipRect:\n" + "Will alter only this specific ImDrawList::AddText() rendering.\n" + "This is often used internally to avoid altering the clipping rectangle and minimize draw calls."); + + for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++) + { + if (n > 0) + ImGui::SameLine(); + + ImGui::PushID(n); + ImGui::InvisibleButton("##canvas", size); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left)) + { + offset.x += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.x; + offset.y += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.y; + } + ImGui::PopID(); + if (!ImGui::IsItemVisible()) // Skip rendering as ImDrawList elements are not clipped. + continue; + + const ImVec2 p0 = ImGui::GetItemRectMin(); + const ImVec2 p1 = ImGui::GetItemRectMax(); + const char* text_str = "Line 1 hello\nLine 2 clip me!"; + const ImVec2 text_pos = ImVec2(p0.x + offset.x, p0.y + offset.y); + ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + switch (n) + { + case 0: + ImGui::PushClipRect(p0, p1, true); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, IM_COL32(90, 90, 120, 255)); + draw_list->AddText(text_pos, IM_COL32_WHITE, text_str); + ImGui::PopClipRect(); + break; + case 1: + draw_list->PushClipRect(p0, p1, true); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, IM_COL32(90, 90, 120, 255)); + draw_list->AddText(text_pos, IM_COL32_WHITE, text_str); + draw_list->PopClipRect(); + break; + case 2: + ImVec4 clip_rect(p0.x, p0.y, p1.x, p1.y); // AddText() takes a ImVec4* here so let's convert. + draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, IM_COL32(90, 90, 120, 255)); + draw_list->AddText(ImGui::GetFont(), ImGui::GetFontSize(), text_pos, IM_COL32_WHITE, text_str, NULL, 0.0f, &clip_rect); + break; + } + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Overlap Mode"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Overlap Mode")) + { + static bool enable_allow_overlap = true; + + HelpMarker( + "Hit-testing is by default performed in item submission order, which generally is perceived as 'back-to-front'.\n\n" + "By using SetNextItemAllowOverlap() you can notify that an item may be overlapped by another. Doing so alters the hovering logic: items using AllowOverlap mode requires an extra frame to accept hovered state."); + ImGui::Checkbox("Enable AllowOverlap", &enable_allow_overlap); + + ImVec2 button1_pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImVec2 button2_pos = ImVec2(button1_pos.x + 50.0f, button1_pos.y + 50.0f); + if (enable_allow_overlap) + ImGui::SetNextItemAllowOverlap(); + ImGui::Button("Button 1", ImVec2(80, 80)); + ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(button2_pos); + ImGui::Button("Button 2", ImVec2(80, 80)); + + // This is typically used with width-spanning items. + // (note that Selectable() has a dedicated flag ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap, which is a shortcut + // for using SetNextItemAllowOverlap(). For demo purpose we use SetNextItemAllowOverlap() here.) + if (enable_allow_overlap) + ImGui::SetNextItemAllowOverlap(); + ImGui::Selectable("Some Selectable", false); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SmallButton("++"); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } +} + +static void ShowDemoWindowPopups() +{ + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups"); + if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Popups & Modal windows")) + return; + + // The properties of popups windows are: + // - They block normal mouse hovering detection outside them. (*) + // - Unless modal, they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE. + // - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally by Dear ImGui instead of being held by the programmer as + // we are used to with regular Begin() calls. User can manipulate the visibility state by calling OpenPopup(). + // (*) One can use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) to bypass it and detect hovering even + // when normally blocked by a popup. + // Those three properties are connected. The library needs to hold their visibility state BECAUSE it can close + // popups at any time. + + // Typical use for regular windows: + // bool my_tool_is_active = false; if (ImGui::Button("Open")) my_tool_is_active = true; [...] if (my_tool_is_active) Begin("My Tool", &my_tool_is_active) { [...] } End(); + // Typical use for popups: + // if (ImGui::Button("Open")) ImGui::OpenPopup("MyPopup"); if (ImGui::BeginPopup("MyPopup") { [...] EndPopup(); } + + // With popups we have to go through a library call (here OpenPopup) to manipulate the visibility state. + // This may be a bit confusing at first but it should quickly make sense. Follow on the examples below. + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Popups"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Popups")) + { + ImGui::TextWrapped( + "When a popup is active, it inhibits interacting with windows that are behind the popup. " + "Clicking outside the popup closes it."); + + static int selected_fish = -1; + const char* names[] = { "Bream", "Haddock", "Mackerel", "Pollock", "Tilefish" }; + static bool toggles[] = { true, false, false, false, false }; + + // Simple selection popup (if you want to show the current selection inside the Button itself, + // you may want to build a string using the "###" operator to preserve a constant ID with a variable label) + if (ImGui::Button("Select..")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("my_select_popup"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(selected_fish == -1 ? "" : names[selected_fish]); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_select_popup")) + { + ImGui::SeparatorText("Aquarium"); + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++) + if (ImGui::Selectable(names[i])) + selected_fish = i; + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // Showing a menu with toggles + if (ImGui::Button("Toggle..")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("my_toggle_popup"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_toggle_popup")) + { + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++) + ImGui::MenuItem(names[i], "", &toggles[i]); + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Sub-menu")) + { + ImGui::MenuItem("Click me"); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("Tooltip here"); + ImGui::SetItemTooltip("I am a tooltip over a popup"); + + if (ImGui::Button("Stacked Popup")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("another popup"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("another popup")) + { + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++) + ImGui::MenuItem(names[i], "", &toggles[i]); + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Sub-menu")) + { + ImGui::MenuItem("Click me"); + if (ImGui::Button("Stacked Popup")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("another popup"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("another popup")) + { + ImGui::Text("I am the last one here."); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // Call the more complete ShowExampleMenuFile which we use in various places of this demo + if (ImGui::Button("With a menu..")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("my_file_popup"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_file_popup", ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File")) + { + ShowExampleMenuFile(); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Edit")) + { + ImGui::MenuItem("Dummy"); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + ImGui::Text("Hello from popup!"); + ImGui::Button("This is a dummy button.."); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Context menus"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Context menus")) + { + HelpMarker("\"Context\" functions are simple helpers to associate a Popup to a given Item or Window identifier."); + + // BeginPopupContextItem() is a helper to provide common/simple popup behavior of essentially doing: + // if (id == 0) + // id = GetItemID(); // Use last item id + // if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) + // OpenPopup(id); + // return BeginPopup(id); + // For advanced uses you may want to replicate and customize this code. + // See more details in BeginPopupContextItem(). + + // Example 1 + // When used after an item that has an ID (e.g. Button), we can skip providing an ID to BeginPopupContextItem(), + // and BeginPopupContextItem() will use the last item ID as the popup ID. + { + const char* names[5] = { "Label1", "Label2", "Label3", "Label4", "Label5" }; + static int selected = -1; + for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++) + { + if (ImGui::Selectable(names[n], selected == n)) + selected = n; + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) // <-- use last item id as popup id + { + selected = n; + ImGui::Text("This a popup for \"%s\"!", names[n]); + if (ImGui::Button("Close")) + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + ImGui::SetItemTooltip("Right-click to open popup"); + } + } + + // Example 2 + // Popup on a Text() element which doesn't have an identifier: we need to provide an identifier to BeginPopupContextItem(). + // Using an explicit identifier is also convenient if you want to activate the popups from different locations. + { + HelpMarker("Text() elements don't have stable identifiers so we need to provide one."); + static float value = 0.5f; + ImGui::Text("Value = %.3f <-- (1) right-click this text", value); + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem("my popup")) + { + if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to zero")) value = 0.0f; + if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to PI")) value = 3.1415f; + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); + ImGui::DragFloat("##Value", &value, 0.1f, 0.0f, 0.0f); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // We can also use OpenPopupOnItemClick() to toggle the visibility of a given popup. + // Here we make it that right-clicking this other text element opens the same popup as above. + // The popup itself will be submitted by the code above. + ImGui::Text("(2) Or right-click this text"); + ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("my popup", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + + // Back to square one: manually open the same popup. + if (ImGui::Button("(3) Or click this button")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("my popup"); + } + + // Example 3 + // When using BeginPopupContextItem() with an implicit identifier (NULL == use last item ID), + // we need to make sure your item identifier is stable. + // In this example we showcase altering the item label while preserving its identifier, using the ### operator (see FAQ). + { + HelpMarker("Showcase using a popup ID linked to item ID, with the item having a changing label + stable ID using the ### operator."); + static char name[32] = "Label1"; + char buf[64]; + sprintf(buf, "Button: %s###Button", name); // ### operator override ID ignoring the preceding label + ImGui::Button(buf); + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) + { + ImGui::Text("Edit name:"); + ImGui::InputText("##edit", name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name)); + if (ImGui::Button("Close")) + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("(<-- right-click here)"); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Modals"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Modals")) + { + ImGui::TextWrapped("Modal windows are like popups but the user cannot close them by clicking outside."); + + if (ImGui::Button("Delete..")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("Delete?"); + + // Always center this window when appearing + ImVec2 center = ImGui::GetMainViewport()->GetCenter(); + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(center, ImGuiCond_Appearing, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + + if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Delete?", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) + { + ImGui::Text("All those beautiful files will be deleted.\nThis operation cannot be undone!"); + ImGui::Separator(); + + //static int unused_i = 0; + //ImGui::Combo("Combo", &unused_i, "Delete\0Delete harder\0"); + + static bool dont_ask_me_next_time = false; + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); + ImGui::Checkbox("Don't ask me next time", &dont_ask_me_next_time); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + + if (ImGui::Button("OK", ImVec2(120, 0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); } + ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus(); + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Cancel", ImVec2(120, 0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); } + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + if (ImGui::Button("Stacked modals..")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 1"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 1", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File")) + { + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Some menu item")) {} + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The First\nUsing style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] behind it."); + + // Testing behavior of widgets stacking their own regular popups over the modal. + static int item = 1; + static float color[4] = { 0.4f, 0.7f, 0.0f, 0.5f }; + ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0"); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("color", color); + + if (ImGui::Button("Add another modal..")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 2"); + + // Also demonstrate passing a bool* to BeginPopupModal(), this will create a regular close button which + // will close the popup. Note that the visibility state of popups is owned by imgui, so the input value + // of the bool actually doesn't matter here. + bool unused_open = true; + if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 2", &unused_open)) + { + ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The Second!"); + if (ImGui::Button("Close")) + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + if (ImGui::Button("Close")) + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Menus inside a regular window"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Menus inside a regular window")) + { + ImGui::TextWrapped("Below we are testing adding menu items to a regular window. It's rather unusual but should work!"); + ImGui::Separator(); + + ImGui::MenuItem("Menu item", "CTRL+M"); + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu inside a regular window")) + { + ShowExampleMenuFile(); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } +} + +// Dummy data structure that we use for the Table demo. +// (pre-C++11 doesn't allow us to instantiate ImVector template if this structure is defined inside the demo function) +namespace +{ +// We are passing our own identifier to TableSetupColumn() to facilitate identifying columns in the sorting code. +// This identifier will be passed down into ImGuiTableSortSpec::ColumnUserID. +// But it is possible to omit the user id parameter of TableSetupColumn() and just use the column index instead! (ImGuiTableSortSpec::ColumnIndex) +// If you don't use sorting, you will generally never care about giving column an ID! +enum MyItemColumnID +{ + MyItemColumnID_ID, + MyItemColumnID_Name, + MyItemColumnID_Action, + MyItemColumnID_Quantity, + MyItemColumnID_Description +}; + +struct MyItem +{ + int ID; + const char* Name; + int Quantity; + + // We have a problem which is affecting _only this demo_ and should not affect your code: + // As we don't rely on std:: or other third-party library to compile dear imgui, we only have reliable access to qsort(), + // however qsort doesn't allow passing user data to comparing function. + // As a workaround, we are storing the sort specs in a static/global for the comparing function to access. + // In your own use case you would probably pass the sort specs to your sorting/comparing functions directly and not use a global. + // We could technically call ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs() in CompareWithSortSpecs(), but considering that this function is called + // very often by the sorting algorithm it would be a little wasteful. + static const ImGuiTableSortSpecs* s_current_sort_specs; + + static void SortWithSortSpecs(ImGuiTableSortSpecs* sort_specs, MyItem* items, int items_count) + { + s_current_sort_specs = sort_specs; // Store in variable accessible by the sort function. + if (items_count > 1) + qsort(items, (size_t)items_count, sizeof(items[0]), MyItem::CompareWithSortSpecs); + s_current_sort_specs = NULL; + } + + // Compare function to be used by qsort() + static int IMGUI_CDECL CompareWithSortSpecs(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) + { + const MyItem* a = (const MyItem*)lhs; + const MyItem* b = (const MyItem*)rhs; + for (int n = 0; n < s_current_sort_specs->SpecsCount; n++) + { + // Here we identify columns using the ColumnUserID value that we ourselves passed to TableSetupColumn() + // We could also choose to identify columns based on their index (sort_spec->ColumnIndex), which is simpler! + const ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* sort_spec = &s_current_sort_specs->Specs[n]; + int delta = 0; + switch (sort_spec->ColumnUserID) + { + case MyItemColumnID_ID: delta = (a->ID - b->ID); break; + case MyItemColumnID_Name: delta = (strcmp(a->Name, b->Name)); break; + case MyItemColumnID_Quantity: delta = (a->Quantity - b->Quantity); break; + case MyItemColumnID_Description: delta = (strcmp(a->Name, b->Name)); break; + default: IM_ASSERT(0); break; + } + if (delta > 0) + return (sort_spec->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? +1 : -1; + if (delta < 0) + return (sort_spec->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? -1 : +1; + } + + // qsort() is instable so always return a way to differenciate items. + // Your own compare function may want to avoid fallback on implicit sort specs e.g. a Name compare if it wasn't already part of the sort specs. + return (a->ID - b->ID); + } +}; +const ImGuiTableSortSpecs* MyItem::s_current_sort_specs = NULL; +} + +// Make the UI compact because there are so many fields +static void PushStyleCompact() +{ + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, (float)(int)(style.FramePadding.y * 0.60f))); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x, (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.y * 0.60f))); +} + +static void PopStyleCompact() +{ + ImGui::PopStyleVar(2); +} + +// Show a combo box with a choice of sizing policies +static void EditTableSizingFlags(ImGuiTableFlags* p_flags) +{ + struct EnumDesc { ImGuiTableFlags Value; const char* Name; const char* Tooltip; }; + static const EnumDesc policies[] = + { + { ImGuiTableFlags_None, "Default", "Use default sizing policy:\n- ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit if ScrollX is on or if host window has ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize.\n- ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame otherwise." }, + { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit", "Columns default to _WidthFixed (if resizable) or _WidthAuto (if not resizable), matching contents width." }, + { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame, "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame", "Columns are all the same width, matching the maximum contents width.\nImplicitly disable ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable and enable ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible." }, + { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp, "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp", "Columns default to _WidthStretch with weights proportional to their widths." }, + { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame, "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame", "Columns default to _WidthStretch with same weights." } + }; + int idx; + for (idx = 0; idx < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies); idx++) + if (policies[idx].Value == (*p_flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_)) + break; + const char* preview_text = (idx < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies)) ? policies[idx].Name + (idx > 0 ? strlen("ImGuiTableFlags") : 0) : ""; + if (ImGui::BeginCombo("Sizing Policy", preview_text)) + { + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies); n++) + if (ImGui::Selectable(policies[n].Name, idx == n)) + *p_flags = (*p_flags & ~ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) | policies[n].Value; + ImGui::EndCombo(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::TextDisabled("(?)"); + if (ImGui::BeginItemTooltip()) + { + ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 50.0f); + for (int m = 0; m < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies); m++) + { + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("%s:", policies[m].Name); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::SetCursorPosX(ImGui::GetCursorPosX() + ImGui::GetStyle().IndentSpacing * 0.5f); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(policies[m].Tooltip); + } + ImGui::PopTextWrapPos(); + ImGui::EndTooltip(); + } +} + +static void EditTableColumnsFlags(ImGuiTableColumnFlags* p_flags) +{ + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_Disabled", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Master disable flag (also hide from context menu)"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_DefaultHide", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_DefaultSort", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort); + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_WidthStretch", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)) + *p_flags &= ~(ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_ ^ ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch); + if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_WidthFixed", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed)) + *p_flags &= ~(ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_ ^ ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoResize", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoReorder", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoHide", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoClip", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoSort", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoSortAscending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoSortDescending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoHeaderLabel", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoHeaderWidth", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_PreferSortAscending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_PreferSortDescending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IndentEnable", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Default for column 0"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IndentDisable", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Default for column >0"); +} + +static void ShowTableColumnsStatusFlags(ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags) +{ + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsEnabled", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsVisible", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsSorted", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsHovered", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered); +} + +static void ShowDemoWindowTables() +{ + //ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables"); + if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Tables & Columns")) + return; + + // Using those as a base value to create width/height that are factor of the size of our font + const float TEXT_BASE_WIDTH = ImGui::CalcTextSize("A").x; + const float TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT = ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing(); + + ImGui::PushID("Tables"); + + int open_action = -1; + if (ImGui::Button("Open all")) + open_action = 1; + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Close all")) + open_action = 0; + ImGui::SameLine(); + + // Options + static bool disable_indent = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Disable tree indentation", &disable_indent); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Disable the indenting of tree nodes so demo tables can use the full window width."); + ImGui::Separator(); + if (disable_indent) + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing, 0.0f); + + // About Styling of tables + // Most settings are configured on a per-table basis via the flags passed to BeginTable() and TableSetupColumns APIs. + // There are however a few settings that a shared and part of the ImGuiStyle structure: + // style.CellPadding // Padding within each cell + // style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg] // Table header background + // style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong] // Table outer and header borders + // style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight] // Table inner borders + // style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg] // Table row background when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is enabled (even rows) + // style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt] // Table row background when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is enabled (odds rows) + + // Demos + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Basic"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic")) + { + // Here we will showcase three different ways to output a table. + // They are very simple variations of a same thing! + + // [Method 1] Using TableNextRow() to create a new row, and TableSetColumnIndex() to select the column. + // In many situations, this is the most flexible and easy to use pattern. + HelpMarker("Using TableNextRow() + calling TableSetColumnIndex() _before_ each cell, in a loop."); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Row %d Column %d", row, column); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + // [Method 2] Using TableNextColumn() called multiple times, instead of using a for loop + TableSetColumnIndex(). + // This is generally more convenient when you have code manually submitting the contents of each column. + HelpMarker("Using TableNextRow() + calling TableNextColumn() _before_ each cell, manually."); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Row %d", row); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Some contents"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("123.456"); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + // [Method 3] We call TableNextColumn() _before_ each cell. We never call TableNextRow(), + // as TableNextColumn() will automatically wrap around and create new rows as needed. + // This is generally more convenient when your cells all contains the same type of data. + HelpMarker( + "Only using TableNextColumn(), which tends to be convenient for tables where every cell contains the same type of contents.\n" + "This is also more similar to the old NextColumn() function of the Columns API, and provided to facilitate the Columns->Tables API transition."); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table3", 3)) + { + for (int item = 0; item < 14; item++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Item %d", item); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Borders, background"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Borders, background")) + { + // Expose a few Borders related flags interactively + enum ContentsType { CT_Text, CT_FillButton }; + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg; + static bool display_headers = false; + static int contents_type = CT_Text; + + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders\n = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV\n | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV\n | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV\n | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH"); + ImGui::Indent(); + + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH); + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH); + ImGui::Unindent(); + + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV); + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV); + ImGui::Unindent(); + + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner); + ImGui::Unindent(); + + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); ImGui::Text("Cell contents:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::RadioButton("Text", &contents_type, CT_Text); + ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::RadioButton("FillButton", &contents_type, CT_FillButton); + ImGui::Checkbox("Display headers", &display_headers); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appear in Headers"); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags)) + { + // Display headers so we can inspect their interaction with borders. + // (Headers are not the main purpose of this section of the demo, so we are not elaborating on them too much. See other sections for details) + if (display_headers) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + } + + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "Hello %d,%d", column, row); + if (contents_type == CT_Text) + ImGui::TextUnformatted(buf); + else if (contents_type == CT_FillButton) + ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f)); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Resizable, stretch"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resizable, stretch")) + { + // By default, if we don't enable ScrollX the sizing policy for each column is "Stretch" + // All columns maintain a sizing weight, and they will occupy all available width. + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Using the _Resizable flag automatically enables the _BordersInnerV flag as well, this is why the resize borders are still showing when unchecking this."); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Resizable, fixed"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resizable, fixed")) + { + // Here we use ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit (even though _ScrollX is not set) + // So columns will adopt the "Fixed" policy and will maintain a fixed width regardless of the whole available width (unless table is small) + // If there is not enough available width to fit all columns, they will however be resized down. + // FIXME-TABLE: Providing a stretch-on-init would make sense especially for tables which don't have saved settings + HelpMarker( + "Using _Resizable + _SizingFixedFit flags.\n" + "Fixed-width columns generally makes more sense if you want to use horizontal scrolling.\n\n" + "Double-click a column border to auto-fit the column to its contents."); + PushStyleCompact(); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Resizable, mixed"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resizable, mixed")) + { + HelpMarker( + "Using TableSetupColumn() to alter resizing policy on a per-column basis.\n\n" + "When combining Fixed and Stretch columns, generally you only want one, maybe two trailing columns to use _WidthStretch."); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable; + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("AAA", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("BBB", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("CCC", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("%s %d,%d", (column == 2) ? "Stretch" : "Fixed", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 6, flags)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("AAA", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("BBB", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("CCC", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("DDD", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("EEE", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("FFF", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 6; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("%s %d,%d", (column >= 3) ? "Stretch" : "Fixed", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Reorderable, hideable, with headers"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Reorderable, hideable, with headers")) + { + HelpMarker( + "Click and drag column headers to reorder columns.\n\n" + "Right-click on a header to open a context menu."); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appear in Headers)"); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags)) + { + // Submit columns name with TableSetupColumn() and call TableHeadersRow() to create a row with a header in each column. + // (Later we will show how TableSetupColumn() has other uses, optional flags, sizing weight etc.) + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int row = 0; row < 6; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + // Use outer_size.x == 0.0f instead of default to make the table as tight as possible (only valid when no scrolling and no stretch column) + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3, flags | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f))) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int row = 0; row < 6; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Fixed %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Padding"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Padding")) + { + // First example: showcase use of padding flags and effect of BorderOuterV/BorderInnerV on X padding. + // We don't expose BorderOuterH/BorderInnerH here because they have no effect on X padding. + HelpMarker( + "We often want outer padding activated when any using features which makes the edges of a column visible:\n" + "e.g.:\n" + "- BorderOuterV\n" + "- any form of row selection\n" + "Because of this, activating BorderOuterV sets the default to PadOuterX. Using PadOuterX or NoPadOuterX you can override the default.\n\n" + "Actual padding values are using style.CellPadding.\n\n" + "In this demo we don't show horizontal borders to emphasize how they don't affect default horizontal padding."); + + static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable outer-most padding (default if ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV is set)"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable outer-most padding (default if ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV is not set)"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable inner padding between columns (double inner padding if BordersOuterV is on, single inner padding if BordersOuterV is off)"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV); + static bool show_headers = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("show_headers", &show_headers); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_padding", 3, flags1)) + { + if (show_headers) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + } + + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + if (row == 0) + { + ImGui::Text("Avail %.2f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x); + } + else + { + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "Hello %d,%d", column, row); + ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f)); + } + //if (ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags() & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered) + // ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, IM_COL32(0, 100, 0, 255)); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + // Second example: set style.CellPadding to (0.0) or a custom value. + // FIXME-TABLE: Vertical border effectively not displayed the same way as horizontal one... + HelpMarker("Setting style.CellPadding to (0,0) or a custom value."); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg; + static ImVec2 cell_padding(0.0f, 0.0f); + static bool show_widget_frame_bg = true; + + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::Checkbox("show_widget_frame_bg", &show_widget_frame_bg); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("CellPadding", &cell_padding.x, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f"); + PopStyleCompact(); + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding, cell_padding); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_padding_2", 3, flags2)) + { + static char text_bufs[3 * 5][16]; // Mini text storage for 3x5 cells + static bool init = true; + if (!show_widget_frame_bg) + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBg, 0); + for (int cell = 0; cell < 3 * 5; cell++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + if (init) + strcpy(text_bufs[cell], "edit me"); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); + ImGui::PushID(cell); + ImGui::InputText("##cell", text_bufs[cell], IM_ARRAYSIZE(text_bufs[cell])); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + if (!show_widget_frame_bg) + ImGui::PopStyleColor(); + init = false; + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Explicit widths"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Sizing policies")) + { + static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX); + PopStyleCompact(); + + static ImGuiTableFlags sizing_policy_flags[4] = { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame }; + for (int table_n = 0; table_n < 4; table_n++) + { + ImGui::PushID(table_n); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30); + EditTableSizingFlags(&sizing_policy_flags[table_n]); + + // To make it easier to understand the different sizing policy, + // For each policy: we display one table where the columns have equal contents width, and one where the columns have different contents width. + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, sizing_policy_flags[table_n] | flags1)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("Oh dear"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("Oh dear"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("Oh dear"); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3, sizing_policy_flags[table_n] | flags1)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("AAAA"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("BBBBBBBB"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("CCCCCCCCCCCC"); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImGui::TextUnformatted("Advanced"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("This section allows you to interact and see the effect of various sizing policies depending on whether Scroll is enabled and the contents of your columns."); + + enum ContentsType { CT_ShowWidth, CT_ShortText, CT_LongText, CT_Button, CT_FillButton, CT_InputText }; + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable; + static int contents_type = CT_ShowWidth; + static int column_count = 3; + + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::PushID("Advanced"); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30); + EditTableSizingFlags(&flags); + ImGui::Combo("Contents", &contents_type, "Show width\0Short Text\0Long Text\0Button\0Fill Button\0InputText\0"); + if (contents_type == CT_FillButton) + { + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Be mindful that using right-alignment (e.g. size.x = -FLT_MIN) creates a feedback loop where contents width can feed into auto-column width can feed into contents width."); + } + ImGui::DragInt("Columns", &column_count, 0.1f, 1, 64, "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34. With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip); + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + ImGui::PopID(); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", column_count, flags, ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 7))) + { + for (int cell = 0; cell < 10 * column_count; cell++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + int column = ImGui::TableGetColumnIndex(); + int row = ImGui::TableGetRowIndex(); + + ImGui::PushID(cell); + char label[32]; + static char text_buf[32] = ""; + sprintf(label, "Hello %d,%d", column, row); + switch (contents_type) + { + case CT_ShortText: ImGui::TextUnformatted(label); break; + case CT_LongText: ImGui::Text("Some %s text %d,%d\nOver two lines..", column == 0 ? "long" : "longeeer", column, row); break; + case CT_ShowWidth: ImGui::Text("W: %.1f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x); break; + case CT_Button: ImGui::Button(label); break; + case CT_FillButton: ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f)); break; + case CT_InputText: ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); ImGui::InputText("##", text_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(text_buf)); break; + } + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Vertical scrolling, with clipping"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical scrolling, with clipping")) + { + HelpMarker("Here we activate ScrollY, which will create a child window container to allow hosting scrollable contents.\n\nWe also demonstrate using ImGuiListClipper to virtualize the submission of many items."); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable; + + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY); + PopStyleCompact(); + + // When using ScrollX or ScrollY we need to specify a size for our table container! + // Otherwise by default the table will fit all available space, like a BeginChild() call. + ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 8); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_scrolly", 3, flags, outer_size)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(0, 1); // Make top row always visible + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + // Demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(1000); + while (clipper.Step()) + { + for (int row = clipper.DisplayStart; row < clipper.DisplayEnd; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Horizontal scrolling"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal scrolling")) + { + HelpMarker( + "When ScrollX is enabled, the default sizing policy becomes ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, " + "as automatically stretching columns doesn't make much sense with horizontal scrolling.\n\n" + "Also note that as of the current version, you will almost always want to enable ScrollY along with ScrollX," + "because the container window won't automatically extend vertically to fix contents (this may be improved in future versions)."); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable; + static int freeze_cols = 1; + static int freeze_rows = 1; + + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight()); + ImGui::DragInt("freeze_cols", &freeze_cols, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight()); + ImGui::DragInt("freeze_rows", &freeze_rows, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput); + PopStyleCompact(); + + // When using ScrollX or ScrollY we need to specify a size for our table container! + // Otherwise by default the table will fit all available space, like a BeginChild() call. + ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 8); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_scrollx", 7, flags, outer_size)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(freeze_cols, freeze_rows); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Line #", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide); // Make the first column not hideable to match our use of TableSetupScrollFreeze() + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Four"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Five"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Six"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int row = 0; row < 20; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 7; column++) + { + // Both TableNextColumn() and TableSetColumnIndex() return true when a column is visible or performing width measurement. + // Because here we know that: + // - A) all our columns are contributing the same to row height + // - B) column 0 is always visible, + // We only always submit this one column and can skip others. + // More advanced per-column clipping behaviors may benefit from polling the status flags via TableGetColumnFlags(). + if (!ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column) && column > 0) + continue; + if (column == 0) + ImGui::Text("Line %d", row); + else + ImGui::Text("Hello world %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImGui::TextUnformatted("Stretch + ScrollX"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker( + "Showcase using Stretch columns + ScrollX together: " + "this is rather unusual and only makes sense when specifying an 'inner_width' for the table!\n" + "Without an explicit value, inner_width is == outer_size.x and therefore using Stretch columns + ScrollX together doesn't make sense."); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody; + static float inner_width = 1000.0f; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::PushID("flags3"); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX); + ImGui::DragFloat("inner_width", &inner_width, 1.0f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX, "%.1f"); + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + ImGui::PopID(); + PopStyleCompact(); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 7, flags2, outer_size, inner_width)) + { + for (int cell = 0; cell < 20 * 7; cell++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Hello world %d,%d", ImGui::TableGetColumnIndex(), ImGui::TableGetRowIndex()); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Columns flags"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Columns flags")) + { + // Create a first table just to show all the options/flags we want to make visible in our example! + const int column_count = 3; + const char* column_names[column_count] = { "One", "Two", "Three" }; + static ImGuiTableColumnFlags column_flags[column_count] = { ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide }; + static ImGuiTableColumnFlags column_flags_out[column_count] = { 0, 0, 0 }; // Output from TableGetColumnFlags() + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_columns_flags_checkboxes", column_count, ImGuiTableFlags_None)) + { + PushStyleCompact(); + for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::PushID(column); + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); // FIXME-TABLE: Workaround for wrong text baseline propagation across columns + ImGui::Text("'%s'", column_names[column]); + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImGui::Text("Input flags:"); + EditTableColumnsFlags(&column_flags[column]); + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImGui::Text("Output flags:"); + ImGui::BeginDisabled(); + ShowTableColumnsStatusFlags(column_flags_out[column]); + ImGui::EndDisabled(); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + PopStyleCompact(); + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + // Create the real table we care about for the example! + // We use a scrolling table to be able to showcase the difference between the _IsEnabled and _IsVisible flags above, otherwise in + // a non-scrolling table columns are always visible (unless using ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible + resizing the parent window down) + const ImGuiTableFlags flags + = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY + | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV + | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable; + ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 9); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_columns_flags", column_count, flags, outer_size)) + { + for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++) + ImGui::TableSetupColumn(column_names[column], column_flags[column]); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++) + column_flags_out[column] = ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(column); + float indent_step = (float)((int)TEXT_BASE_WIDTH / 2); + for (int row = 0; row < 8; row++) + { + ImGui::Indent(indent_step); // Add some indentation to demonstrate usage of per-column IndentEnable/IndentDisable flags. + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("%s %s", (column == 0) ? "Indented" : "Hello", ImGui::TableGetColumnName(column)); + } + } + ImGui::Unindent(indent_step * 8.0f); + + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Columns widths"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Columns widths")) + { + HelpMarker("Using TableSetupColumn() to setup default width."); + + static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize); + PopStyleCompact(); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags1)) + { + // We could also set ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit on the table and all columns will default to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed. + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("one", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 100.0f); // Default to 100.0f + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("two", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 200.0f); // Default to 200.0f + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("three", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed); // Default to auto + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + if (row == 0) + ImGui::Text("(w: %5.1f)", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x); + else + ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + HelpMarker("Using TableSetupColumn() to setup explicit width.\n\nUnless _NoKeepColumnsVisible is set, fixed columns with set width may still be shrunk down if there's not enough space in the host."); + + static ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_None; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV); + PopStyleCompact(); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 4, flags2)) + { + // We could also set ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit on the table and all columns will default to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed. + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 100.0f); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 15.0f); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30.0f); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 15.0f); + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 4; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + if (row == 0) + ImGui::Text("(w: %5.1f)", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x); + else + ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Nested tables"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Nested tables")) + { + HelpMarker("This demonstrates embedding a table into another table cell."); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_nested1", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("A0"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("A1"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("A0 Row 0"); + { + float rows_height = TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 2; + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_nested2", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("B0"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("B1"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, rows_height); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("B0 Row 0"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("B1 Row 0"); + ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, rows_height); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("B0 Row 1"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("B1 Row 1"); + + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + } + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("A1 Row 0"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("A0 Row 1"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("A1 Row 1"); + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Row height"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Row height")) + { + HelpMarker("You can pass a 'min_row_height' to TableNextRow().\n\nRows are padded with 'style.CellPadding.y' on top and bottom, so effectively the minimum row height will always be >= 'style.CellPadding.y * 2.0f'.\n\nWe cannot honor a _maximum_ row height as that would require a unique clipping rectangle per row."); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_row_height", 1, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 8; row++) + { + float min_row_height = (float)(int)(TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 0.30f * row); + ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, min_row_height); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("min_row_height = %.2f", min_row_height); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + HelpMarker("Showcase using SameLine(0,0) to share Current Line Height between cells.\n\nPlease note that Tables Row Height is not the same thing as Current Line Height, as a table cell may contains multiple lines."); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_share_lineheight", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::ColorButton("##1", ImVec4(0.13f, 0.26f, 0.40f, 1.0f), ImGuiColorEditFlags_None, ImVec2(40, 40)); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Line 1"); + ImGui::Text("Line 2"); + + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::ColorButton("##2", ImVec4(0.13f, 0.26f, 0.40f, 1.0f), ImGuiColorEditFlags_None, ImVec2(40, 40)); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, 0.0f); // Reuse line height from previous column + ImGui::Text("Line 1, with SameLine(0,0)"); + ImGui::Text("Line 2"); + + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + HelpMarker("Showcase altering CellPadding.y between rows. Note that CellPadding.x is locked for the entire table."); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_changing_cellpadding_y", 1, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + for (int row = 0; row < 8; row++) + { + if ((row % 3) == 2) + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding, ImVec2(style.CellPadding.x, 20.0f)); + ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("CellPadding.y = %.2f", style.CellPadding.y); + if ((row % 3) == 2) + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Outer size"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Outer size")) + { + // Showcasing use of ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX and ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY + // Important to that note how the two flags have slightly different behaviors! + ImGui::Text("Using NoHostExtendX and NoHostExtendY:"); + PushStyleCompact(); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value.\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit).\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible."); + PopStyleCompact(); + + ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 5.5f); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags, outer_size)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 10; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Text("Hello!"); + + ImGui::Spacing(); + + ImGui::Text("Using explicit size:"); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg, ImVec2(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30, 0.0f))) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table3", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg, ImVec2(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30, 0.0f))) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(0, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 1.5f); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Background color"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Background color")) + { + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg; + static int row_bg_type = 1; + static int row_bg_target = 1; + static int cell_bg_type = 1; + + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg automatically sets RowBg0 to alternative colors pulled from the Style."); + ImGui::Combo("row bg type", (int*)&row_bg_type, "None\0Red\0Gradient\0"); + ImGui::Combo("row bg target", (int*)&row_bg_target, "RowBg0\0RowBg1\0"); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Target RowBg0 to override the alternating odd/even colors,\nTarget RowBg1 to blend with them."); + ImGui::Combo("cell bg type", (int*)&cell_bg_type, "None\0Blue\0"); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("We are colorizing cells to B1->C2 here."); + IM_ASSERT(row_bg_type >= 0 && row_bg_type <= 2); + IM_ASSERT(row_bg_target >= 0 && row_bg_target <= 1); + IM_ASSERT(cell_bg_type >= 0 && cell_bg_type <= 1); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 5, flags)) + { + for (int row = 0; row < 6; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + + // Demonstrate setting a row background color with 'ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBgX, ...)' + // We use a transparent color so we can see the one behind in case our target is RowBg1 and RowBg0 was already targeted by the ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg flag. + if (row_bg_type != 0) + { + ImU32 row_bg_color = ImGui::GetColorU32(row_bg_type == 1 ? ImVec4(0.7f, 0.3f, 0.3f, 0.65f) : ImVec4(0.2f + row * 0.1f, 0.2f, 0.2f, 0.65f)); // Flat or Gradient? + ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0 + row_bg_target, row_bg_color); + } + + // Fill cells + for (int column = 0; column < 5; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("%c%c", 'A' + row, '0' + column); + + // Change background of Cells B1->C2 + // Demonstrate setting a cell background color with 'ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, ...)' + // (the CellBg color will be blended over the RowBg and ColumnBg colors) + // We can also pass a column number as a third parameter to TableSetBgColor() and do this outside the column loop. + if (row >= 1 && row <= 2 && column >= 1 && column <= 2 && cell_bg_type == 1) + { + ImU32 cell_bg_color = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.3f, 0.3f, 0.7f, 0.65f)); + ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, cell_bg_color); + } + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Tree view"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree view")) + { + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody; + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("3ways", 3, flags)) + { + // The first column will use the default _WidthStretch when ScrollX is Off and _WidthFixed when ScrollX is On + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Size", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 12.0f); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Type", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 18.0f); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + // Simple storage to output a dummy file-system. + struct MyTreeNode + { + const char* Name; + const char* Type; + int Size; + int ChildIdx; + int ChildCount; + static void DisplayNode(const MyTreeNode* node, const MyTreeNode* all_nodes) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + const bool is_folder = (node->ChildCount > 0); + if (is_folder) + { + bool open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::TextDisabled("--"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(node->Type); + if (open) + { + for (int child_n = 0; child_n < node->ChildCount; child_n++) + DisplayNode(&all_nodes[node->ChildIdx + child_n], all_nodes); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + } + else + { + ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("%d", node->Size); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(node->Type); + } + } + }; + static const MyTreeNode nodes[] = + { + { "Root", "Folder", -1, 1, 3 }, // 0 + { "Music", "Folder", -1, 4, 2 }, // 1 + { "Textures", "Folder", -1, 6, 3 }, // 2 + { "desktop.ini", "System file", 1024, -1,-1 }, // 3 + { "File1_a.wav", "Audio file", 123000, -1,-1 }, // 4 + { "File1_b.wav", "Audio file", 456000, -1,-1 }, // 5 + { "Image001.png", "Image file", 203128, -1,-1 }, // 6 + { "Copy of Image001.png", "Image file", 203256, -1,-1 }, // 7 + { "Copy of Image001 (Final2).png","Image file", 203512, -1,-1 }, // 8 + }; + + MyTreeNode::DisplayNode(&nodes[0], nodes); + + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Item width"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Item width")) + { + HelpMarker( + "Showcase using PushItemWidth() and how it is preserved on a per-column basis.\n\n" + "Note that on auto-resizing non-resizable fixed columns, querying the content width for e.g. right-alignment doesn't make sense."); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_item_width", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("small"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("half"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("right-align"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + if (row == 0) + { + // Setup ItemWidth once (instead of setting up every time, which is also possible but less efficient) + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 3.0f); // Small + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(2); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); // Right-aligned + } + + // Draw our contents + static float dummy_f = 0.0f; + ImGui::PushID(row); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0); + ImGui::SliderFloat("float0", &dummy_f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1); + ImGui::SliderFloat("float1", &dummy_f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(2); + ImGui::SliderFloat("##float2", &dummy_f, 0.0f, 1.0f); // No visible label since right-aligned + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Demonstrate using TableHeader() calls instead of TableHeadersRow() + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Custom headers"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Custom headers")) + { + const int COLUMNS_COUNT = 3; + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_custom_headers", COLUMNS_COUNT, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Apricot"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Banana"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Cherry"); + + // Dummy entire-column selection storage + // FIXME: It would be nice to actually demonstrate full-featured selection using those checkbox. + static bool column_selected[3] = {}; + + // Instead of calling TableHeadersRow() we'll submit custom headers ourselves + ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers); + for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + const char* column_name = ImGui::TableGetColumnName(column); // Retrieve name passed to TableSetupColumn() + ImGui::PushID(column); + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); + ImGui::Checkbox("##checkall", &column_selected[column]); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x); + ImGui::TableHeader(column_name); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++) + { + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "Cell %d,%d", column, row); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Selectable(buf, column_selected[column]); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Demonstrate creating custom context menus inside columns, while playing it nice with context menus provided by TableHeadersRow()/TableHeader() + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Context menus"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Context menus")) + { + HelpMarker("By default, right-clicking over a TableHeadersRow()/TableHeader() line will open the default context-menu.\nUsing ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody we also allow right-clicking over columns body."); + static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody; + + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody); + PopStyleCompact(); + + // Context Menus: first example + // [1.1] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu. + // [1.2] Right-click in columns also open the default table context menu (if ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody is set) + const int COLUMNS_COUNT = 3; + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_context_menu", COLUMNS_COUNT, flags1)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + + // [1.1]] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu. + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + // Submit dummy contents + for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT; column++) + { + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row); + } + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + + // Context Menus: second example + // [2.1] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu. + // [2.2] Right-click on the ".." to open a custom popup + // [2.3] Right-click in columns to open another custom popup + HelpMarker("Demonstrate mixing table context menu (over header), item context button (over button) and custom per-colum context menu (over column body)."); + ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders; + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_context_menu_2", COLUMNS_COUNT, flags2)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + + // [2.1] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu. + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++) + { + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT; column++) + { + // Submit dummy contents + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column); + ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row); + ImGui::SameLine(); + + // [2.2] Right-click on the ".." to open a custom popup + ImGui::PushID(row * COLUMNS_COUNT + column); + ImGui::SmallButton(".."); + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) + { + ImGui::Text("This is the popup for Button(\"..\") in Cell %d,%d", column, row); + if (ImGui::Button("Close")) + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + } + } + + // [2.3] Right-click anywhere in columns to open another custom popup + // (instead of testing for !IsAnyItemHovered() we could also call OpenPopup() with ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup + // to manage popup priority as the popups triggers, here "are we hovering a column" are overlapping) + int hovered_column = -1; + for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT + 1; column++) + { + ImGui::PushID(column); + if (ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(column) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered) + hovered_column = column; + if (hovered_column == column && !ImGui::IsAnyItemHovered() && ImGui::IsMouseReleased(1)) + ImGui::OpenPopup("MyPopup"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("MyPopup")) + { + if (column == COLUMNS_COUNT) + ImGui::Text("This is a custom popup for unused space after the last column."); + else + ImGui::Text("This is a custom popup for Column %d", column); + if (ImGui::Button("Close")) + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + ImGui::EndTable(); + ImGui::Text("Hovered column: %d", hovered_column); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Demonstrate creating multiple tables with the same ID + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Synced instances"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Synced instances")) + { + HelpMarker("Multiple tables with the same identifier will share their settings, width, visibility, order etc."); + + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit); + for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++) + { + char buf[32]; + sprintf(buf, "Synced Table %d", n); + bool open = ImGui::CollapsingHeader(buf, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen); + if (open && ImGui::BeginTable("Table", 3, flags, ImVec2(0.0f, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 5))) + { + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + const int cell_count = (n == 1) ? 27 : 9; // Make second table have a scrollbar to verify that additional decoration is not affecting column positions. + for (int cell = 0; cell < cell_count; cell++) + { + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("this cell %d", cell); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Demonstrate using Sorting facilities + // This is a simplified version of the "Advanced" example, where we mostly focus on the code necessary to handle sorting. + // Note that the "Advanced" example also showcase manually triggering a sort (e.g. if item quantities have been modified) + static const char* template_items_names[] = + { + "Banana", "Apple", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Grapefruit", "Strawberry", "Mango", + "Kiwi", "Orange", "Pineapple", "Blueberry", "Plum", "Coconut", "Pear", "Apricot" + }; + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Sorting"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Sorting")) + { + // Create item list + static ImVector items; + if (items.Size == 0) + { + items.resize(50, MyItem()); + for (int n = 0; n < items.Size; n++) + { + const int template_n = n % IM_ARRAYSIZE(template_items_names); + MyItem& item = items[n]; + item.ID = n; + item.Name = template_items_names[template_n]; + item.Quantity = (n * n - n) % 20; // Assign default quantities + } + } + + // Options + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = + ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable | ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti + | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody + | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY; + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1)."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0)."); + PopStyleCompact(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_sorting", 4, flags, ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 15), 0.0f)) + { + // Declare columns + // We use the "user_id" parameter of TableSetupColumn() to specify a user id that will be stored in the sort specifications. + // This is so our sort function can identify a column given our own identifier. We could also identify them based on their index! + // Demonstrate using a mixture of flags among available sort-related flags: + // - ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort + // - ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort / ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending / ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending + // - ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending / ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("ID", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_ID); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Name); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Action", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Action); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Quantity", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Quantity); + ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(0, 1); // Make row always visible + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + // Sort our data if sort specs have been changed! + if (ImGuiTableSortSpecs* sort_specs = ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs()) + if (sort_specs->SpecsDirty) + { + MyItem::SortWithSortSpecs(sort_specs, items.Data, items.Size); + sort_specs->SpecsDirty = false; + } + + // Demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(items.Size); + while (clipper.Step()) + for (int row_n = clipper.DisplayStart; row_n < clipper.DisplayEnd; row_n++) + { + // Display a data item + MyItem* item = &items[row_n]; + ImGui::PushID(item->ID); + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("%04d", item->ID); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(item->Name); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::SmallButton("None"); + ImGui::TableNextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("%d", item->Quantity); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // In this example we'll expose most table flags and settings. + // For specific flags and settings refer to the corresponding section for more detailed explanation. + // This section is mostly useful to experiment with combining certain flags or settings with each others. + //ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); // [DEBUG] + if (open_action != -1) + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Advanced"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced")) + { + static ImGuiTableFlags flags = + ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable + | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable | ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti + | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody + | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY + | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit; + + enum ContentsType { CT_Text, CT_Button, CT_SmallButton, CT_FillButton, CT_Selectable, CT_SelectableSpanRow }; + static int contents_type = CT_SelectableSpanRow; + const char* contents_type_names[] = { "Text", "Button", "SmallButton", "FillButton", "Selectable", "Selectable (span row)" }; + static int freeze_cols = 1; + static int freeze_rows = 1; + static int items_count = IM_ARRAYSIZE(template_items_names) * 2; + static ImVec2 outer_size_value = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 12); + static float row_min_height = 0.0f; // Auto + static float inner_width_with_scroll = 0.0f; // Auto-extend + static bool outer_size_enabled = true; + static bool show_headers = true; + static bool show_wrapped_text = false; + //static ImGuiTextFilter filter; + //ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); // FIXME-TABLE: Enabling this results in initial clipped first pass on table which tend to affect column sizing + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Options")) + { + // Make the UI compact because there are so many fields + PushStyleCompact(); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 28.0f); + + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Features:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen)) + { + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Decorations:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen)) + { + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appear in Headers"); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appear in Headers)"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Sizing:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen)) + { + EditTableSizingFlags(&flags); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("In the Advanced demo we override the policy of each column so those table-wide settings have less effect that typical."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value.\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit).\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Only available if ScrollX is disabled."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34. With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable clipping rectangle for every individual columns (reduce draw command count, items will be able to overflow into other columns). Generally incompatible with ScrollFreeze options."); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Padding:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen)) + { + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Scrolling:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen)) + { + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight()); + ImGui::DragInt("freeze_cols", &freeze_cols, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight()); + ImGui::DragInt("freeze_rows", &freeze_rows, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Sorting:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen)) + { + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1)."); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0)."); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Other:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen)) + { + ImGui::Checkbox("show_headers", &show_headers); + ImGui::Checkbox("show_wrapped_text", &show_wrapped_text); + + ImGui::DragFloat2("##OuterSize", &outer_size_value.x); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x); + ImGui::Checkbox("outer_size", &outer_size_enabled); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("If scrolling is disabled (ScrollX and ScrollY not set):\n" + "- The table is output directly in the parent window.\n" + "- OuterSize.x < 0.0f will right-align the table.\n" + "- OuterSize.x = 0.0f will narrow fit the table unless there are any Stretch columns.\n" + "- OuterSize.y then becomes the minimum size for the table, which will extend vertically if there are more rows (unless NoHostExtendY is set)."); + + // From a user point of view we will tend to use 'inner_width' differently depending on whether our table is embedding scrolling. + // To facilitate toying with this demo we will actually pass 0.0f to the BeginTable() when ScrollX is disabled. + ImGui::DragFloat("inner_width (when ScrollX active)", &inner_width_with_scroll, 1.0f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX); + + ImGui::DragFloat("row_min_height", &row_min_height, 1.0f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Specify height of the Selectable item."); + + ImGui::DragInt("items_count", &items_count, 0.1f, 0, 9999); + ImGui::Combo("items_type (first column)", &contents_type, contents_type_names, IM_ARRAYSIZE(contents_type_names)); + //filter.Draw("filter"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + PopStyleCompact(); + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Update item list if we changed the number of items + static ImVector items; + static ImVector selection; + static bool items_need_sort = false; + if (items.Size != items_count) + { + items.resize(items_count, MyItem()); + for (int n = 0; n < items_count; n++) + { + const int template_n = n % IM_ARRAYSIZE(template_items_names); + MyItem& item = items[n]; + item.ID = n; + item.Name = template_items_names[template_n]; + item.Quantity = (template_n == 3) ? 10 : (template_n == 4) ? 20 : 0; // Assign default quantities + } + } + + const ImDrawList* parent_draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + const int parent_draw_list_draw_cmd_count = parent_draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size; + ImVec2 table_scroll_cur, table_scroll_max; // For debug display + const ImDrawList* table_draw_list = NULL; // " + + // Submit table + const float inner_width_to_use = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? inner_width_with_scroll : 0.0f; + if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_advanced", 6, flags, outer_size_enabled ? outer_size_value : ImVec2(0, 0), inner_width_to_use)) + { + // Declare columns + // We use the "user_id" parameter of TableSetupColumn() to specify a user id that will be stored in the sort specifications. + // This is so our sort function can identify a column given our own identifier. We could also identify them based on their index! + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("ID", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_ID); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Name); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Action", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Action); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Quantity", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Quantity); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Description", (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX) ? 0 : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Description); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Hidden", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort); + ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(freeze_cols, freeze_rows); + + // Sort our data if sort specs have been changed! + ImGuiTableSortSpecs* sort_specs = ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs(); + if (sort_specs && sort_specs->SpecsDirty) + items_need_sort = true; + if (sort_specs && items_need_sort && items.Size > 1) + { + MyItem::SortWithSortSpecs(sort_specs, items.Data, items.Size); + sort_specs->SpecsDirty = false; + } + items_need_sort = false; + + // Take note of whether we are currently sorting based on the Quantity field, + // we will use this to trigger sorting when we know the data of this column has been modified. + const bool sorts_specs_using_quantity = (ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(3) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted) != 0; + + // Show headers + if (show_headers) + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + // Show data + // FIXME-TABLE FIXME-NAV: How we can get decent up/down even though we have the buttons here? + ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true); +#if 1 + // Demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(items.Size); + while (clipper.Step()) + { + for (int row_n = clipper.DisplayStart; row_n < clipper.DisplayEnd; row_n++) +#else + // Without clipper + { + for (int row_n = 0; row_n < items.Size; row_n++) +#endif + { + MyItem* item = &items[row_n]; + //if (!filter.PassFilter(item->Name)) + // continue; + + const bool item_is_selected = selection.contains(item->ID); + ImGui::PushID(item->ID); + ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, row_min_height); + + // For the demo purpose we can select among different type of items submitted in the first column + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0); + char label[32]; + sprintf(label, "%04d", item->ID); + if (contents_type == CT_Text) + ImGui::TextUnformatted(label); + else if (contents_type == CT_Button) + ImGui::Button(label); + else if (contents_type == CT_SmallButton) + ImGui::SmallButton(label); + else if (contents_type == CT_FillButton) + ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f)); + else if (contents_type == CT_Selectable || contents_type == CT_SelectableSpanRow) + { + ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags = (contents_type == CT_SelectableSpanRow) ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns | ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap : ImGuiSelectableFlags_None; + if (ImGui::Selectable(label, item_is_selected, selectable_flags, ImVec2(0, row_min_height))) + { + if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) + { + if (item_is_selected) + selection.find_erase_unsorted(item->ID); + else + selection.push_back(item->ID); + } + else + { + selection.clear(); + selection.push_back(item->ID); + } + } + } + + if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1)) + ImGui::TextUnformatted(item->Name); + + // Here we demonstrate marking our data set as needing to be sorted again if we modified a quantity, + // and we are currently sorting on the column showing the Quantity. + // To avoid triggering a sort while holding the button, we only trigger it when the button has been released. + // You will probably need a more advanced system in your code if you want to automatically sort when a specific entry changes. + if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(2)) + { + if (ImGui::SmallButton("Chop")) { item->Quantity += 1; } + if (sorts_specs_using_quantity && ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) { items_need_sort = true; } + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::SmallButton("Eat")) { item->Quantity -= 1; } + if (sorts_specs_using_quantity && ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) { items_need_sort = true; } + } + + if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(3)) + ImGui::Text("%d", item->Quantity); + + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(4); + if (show_wrapped_text) + ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet"); + else + ImGui::Text("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet"); + + if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(5)) + ImGui::Text("1234"); + + ImGui::PopID(); + } + } + ImGui::PopButtonRepeat(); + + // Store some info to display debug details below + table_scroll_cur = ImVec2(ImGui::GetScrollX(), ImGui::GetScrollY()); + table_scroll_max = ImVec2(ImGui::GetScrollMaxX(), ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()); + table_draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + static bool show_debug_details = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Debug details", &show_debug_details); + if (show_debug_details && table_draw_list) + { + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, 0.0f); + const int table_draw_list_draw_cmd_count = table_draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size; + if (table_draw_list == parent_draw_list) + ImGui::Text(": DrawCmd: +%d (in same window)", + table_draw_list_draw_cmd_count - parent_draw_list_draw_cmd_count); + else + ImGui::Text(": DrawCmd: +%d (in child window), Scroll: (%.f/%.f) (%.f/%.f)", + table_draw_list_draw_cmd_count - 1, table_scroll_cur.x, table_scroll_max.x, table_scroll_cur.y, table_scroll_max.y); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + ImGui::PopID(); + + ShowDemoWindowColumns(); + + if (disable_indent) + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); +} + +// Demonstrate old/legacy Columns API! +// [2020: Columns are under-featured and not maintained. Prefer using the more flexible and powerful BeginTable() API!] +static void ShowDemoWindowColumns() +{ + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)"); + bool open = ImGui::TreeNode("Legacy Columns API"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Columns() is an old API! Prefer using the more flexible and powerful BeginTable() API!"); + if (!open) + return; + + // Basic columns + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Basic"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic")) + { + ImGui::Text("Without border:"); + ImGui::Columns(3, "mycolumns3", false); // 3-ways, no border + ImGui::Separator(); + for (int n = 0; n < 14; n++) + { + char label[32]; + sprintf(label, "Item %d", n); + if (ImGui::Selectable(label)) {} + //if (ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN,0.0f))) {} + ImGui::NextColumn(); + } + ImGui::Columns(1); + ImGui::Separator(); + + ImGui::Text("With border:"); + ImGui::Columns(4, "mycolumns"); // 4-ways, with border + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("ID"); ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Name"); ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Path"); ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Hovered"); ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Separator(); + const char* names[3] = { "One", "Two", "Three" }; + const char* paths[3] = { "/path/one", "/path/two", "/path/three" }; + static int selected = -1; + for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) + { + char label[32]; + sprintf(label, "%04d", i); + if (ImGui::Selectable(label, selected == i, ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns)) + selected = i; + bool hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered(); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text(names[i]); ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text(paths[i]); ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("%d", hovered); ImGui::NextColumn(); + } + ImGui::Columns(1); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Borders"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Borders")) + { + // NB: Future columns API should allow automatic horizontal borders. + static bool h_borders = true; + static bool v_borders = true; + static int columns_count = 4; + const int lines_count = 3; + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8); + ImGui::DragInt("##columns_count", &columns_count, 0.1f, 2, 10, "%d columns"); + if (columns_count < 2) + columns_count = 2; + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Checkbox("horizontal", &h_borders); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::Checkbox("vertical", &v_borders); + ImGui::Columns(columns_count, NULL, v_borders); + for (int i = 0; i < columns_count * lines_count; i++) + { + if (h_borders && ImGui::GetColumnIndex() == 0) + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("%c%c%c", 'a' + i, 'a' + i, 'a' + i); + ImGui::Text("Width %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnWidth()); + ImGui::Text("Avail %.2f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x); + ImGui::Text("Offset %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnOffset()); + ImGui::Text("Long text that is likely to clip"); + ImGui::Button("Button", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f)); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + } + ImGui::Columns(1); + if (h_borders) + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Create multiple items in a same cell before switching to next column + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Mixed items"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Mixed items")) + { + ImGui::Columns(3, "mixed"); + ImGui::Separator(); + + ImGui::Text("Hello"); + ImGui::Button("Banana"); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + + ImGui::Text("ImGui"); + ImGui::Button("Apple"); + static float foo = 1.0f; + ImGui::InputFloat("red", &foo, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f"); + ImGui::Text("An extra line here."); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + + ImGui::Text("Sailor"); + ImGui::Button("Corniflower"); + static float bar = 1.0f; + ImGui::InputFloat("blue", &bar, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f"); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category A")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn(); + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category B")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn(); + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category C")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Columns(1); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Word wrapping + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Word-wrapping"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word-wrapping")) + { + ImGui::Columns(2, "word-wrapping"); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog."); + ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Left"); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog."); + ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Right"); + ImGui::Columns(1); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Horizontal Scrolling"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal Scrolling")) + { + ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(1500.0f, 0.0f)); + ImVec2 child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20.0f); + ImGui::BeginChild("##ScrollingRegion", child_size, false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar); + ImGui::Columns(10); + + // Also demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists + int ITEMS_COUNT = 2000; + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(ITEMS_COUNT); + while (clipper.Step()) + { + for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++) + for (int j = 0; j < 10; j++) + { + ImGui::Text("Line %d Column %d...", i, j); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + } + } + ImGui::Columns(1); + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Tree"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree")) + { + ImGui::Columns(2, "tree", true); + for (int x = 0; x < 3; x++) + { + bool open1 = ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)x, "Node%d", x); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Node contents"); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + if (open1) + { + for (int y = 0; y < 3; y++) + { + bool open2 = ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)y, "Node%d.%d", x, y); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + ImGui::Text("Node contents"); + if (open2) + { + ImGui::Text("Even more contents"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree in column")) + { + ImGui::Text("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog"); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + } + ImGui::NextColumn(); + if (open2) + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + } + ImGui::Columns(1); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + ImGui::TreePop(); +} + +static void ShowDemoWindowInputs() +{ + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus"); + if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Inputs & Focus")) + { + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + + // Display inputs submitted to ImGuiIO + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus/Inputs"); + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Inputs")) + { + HelpMarker( + "This is a simplified view. See more detailed input state:\n" + "- in 'Tools->Metrics/Debugger->Inputs'.\n" + "- in 'Tools->Debug Log->IO'."); + if (ImGui::IsMousePosValid()) + ImGui::Text("Mouse pos: (%g, %g)", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y); + else + ImGui::Text("Mouse pos: "); + ImGui::Text("Mouse delta: (%g, %g)", io.MouseDelta.x, io.MouseDelta.y); + ImGui::Text("Mouse down:"); + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown); i++) if (ImGui::IsMouseDown(i)) { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("b%d (%.02f secs)", i, io.MouseDownDuration[i]); } + ImGui::Text("Mouse wheel: %.1f", io.MouseWheel); + + // We iterate both legacy native range and named ImGuiKey ranges, which is a little odd but this allows displaying the data for old/new backends. + // User code should never have to go through such hoops! You can generally iterate between ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN and ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END. +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + struct funcs { static bool IsLegacyNativeDupe(ImGuiKey) { return false; } }; + ImGuiKey start_key = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; +#else + struct funcs { static bool IsLegacyNativeDupe(ImGuiKey key) { return key < 512 && ImGui::GetIO().KeyMap[key] != -1; } }; // Hide Native<>ImGuiKey duplicates when both exists in the array + ImGuiKey start_key = (ImGuiKey)0; +#endif + ImGui::Text("Keys down:"); for (ImGuiKey key = start_key; key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; key = (ImGuiKey)(key + 1)) { if (funcs::IsLegacyNativeDupe(key) || !ImGui::IsKeyDown(key)) continue; ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text((key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN) ? "\"%s\"" : "\"%s\" %d", ImGui::GetKeyName(key), key); } + ImGui::Text("Keys mods: %s%s%s%s", io.KeyCtrl ? "CTRL " : "", io.KeyShift ? "SHIFT " : "", io.KeyAlt ? "ALT " : "", io.KeySuper ? "SUPER " : ""); + ImGui::Text("Chars queue:"); for (int i = 0; i < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; i++) { ImWchar c = io.InputQueueCharacters[i]; ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("\'%c\' (0x%04X)", (c > ' ' && c <= 255) ? (char)c : '?', c); } // FIXME: We should convert 'c' to UTF-8 here but the functions are not public. + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Display ImGuiIO output flags + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus/Outputs"); + ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Outputs")) + { + HelpMarker( + "The value of io.WantCaptureMouse and io.WantCaptureKeyboard are normally set by Dear ImGui " + "to instruct your application of how to route inputs. Typically, when a value is true, it means " + "Dear ImGui wants the corresponding inputs and we expect the underlying application to ignore them.\n\n" + "The most typical case is: when hovering a window, Dear ImGui set io.WantCaptureMouse to true, " + "and underlying application should ignore mouse inputs (in practice there are many and more subtle " + "rules leading to how those flags are set)."); + ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureMouse: %d", io.WantCaptureMouse); + ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose: %d", io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose); + ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureKeyboard: %d", io.WantCaptureKeyboard); + ImGui::Text("io.WantTextInput: %d", io.WantTextInput); + ImGui::Text("io.WantSetMousePos: %d", io.WantSetMousePos); + ImGui::Text("io.NavActive: %d, io.NavVisible: %d", io.NavActive, io.NavVisible); + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus/Outputs/WantCapture override"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("WantCapture override")) + { + HelpMarker( + "Hovering the colored canvas will override io.WantCaptureXXX fields.\n" + "Notice how normally (when set to none), the value of io.WantCaptureKeyboard would be false when hovering and true when clicking."); + static int capture_override_mouse = -1; + static int capture_override_keyboard = -1; + const char* capture_override_desc[] = { "None", "Set to false", "Set to true" }; + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 15); + ImGui::SliderInt("SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse() on hover", &capture_override_mouse, -1, +1, capture_override_desc[capture_override_mouse + 1], ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 15); + ImGui::SliderInt("SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard() on hover", &capture_override_keyboard, -1, +1, capture_override_desc[capture_override_keyboard + 1], ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + + ImGui::ColorButton("##panel", ImVec4(0.7f, 0.1f, 0.7f, 1.0f), ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop, ImVec2(128.0f, 96.0f)); // Dummy item + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() && capture_override_mouse != -1) + ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(capture_override_mouse == 1); + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() && capture_override_keyboard != -1) + ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(capture_override_keyboard == 1); + + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + // Display mouse cursors + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus/Mouse Cursors"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Mouse Cursors")) + { + const char* mouse_cursors_names[] = { "Arrow", "TextInput", "ResizeAll", "ResizeNS", "ResizeEW", "ResizeNESW", "ResizeNWSE", "Hand", "NotAllowed" }; + IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(mouse_cursors_names) == ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT); + + ImGuiMouseCursor current = ImGui::GetMouseCursor(); + ImGui::Text("Current mouse cursor = %d: %s", current, mouse_cursors_names[current]); + ImGui::BeginDisabled(true); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasMouseCursors", &io.BackendFlags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors); + ImGui::EndDisabled(); + + ImGui::Text("Hover to see mouse cursors:"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker( + "Your application can render a different mouse cursor based on what ImGui::GetMouseCursor() returns. " + "If software cursor rendering (io.MouseDrawCursor) is set ImGui will draw the right cursor for you, " + "otherwise your backend needs to handle it."); + for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT; i++) + { + char label[32]; + sprintf(label, "Mouse cursor %d: %s", i, mouse_cursors_names[i]); + ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Selectable(label, false); + if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) + ImGui::SetMouseCursor(i); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus/Tabbing"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tabbing")) + { + ImGui::Text("Use TAB/SHIFT+TAB to cycle through keyboard editable fields."); + static char buf[32] = "hello"; + ImGui::InputText("1", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + ImGui::InputText("2", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + ImGui::InputText("3", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + ImGui::PushTabStop(false); + ImGui::InputText("4 (tab skip)", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Item won't be cycled through when using TAB or Shift+Tab."); + ImGui::PopTabStop(); + ImGui::InputText("5", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus/Focus from code"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Focus from code")) + { + bool focus_1 = ImGui::Button("Focus on 1"); ImGui::SameLine(); + bool focus_2 = ImGui::Button("Focus on 2"); ImGui::SameLine(); + bool focus_3 = ImGui::Button("Focus on 3"); + int has_focus = 0; + static char buf[128] = "click on a button to set focus"; + + if (focus_1) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(); + ImGui::InputText("1", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) has_focus = 1; + + if (focus_2) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(); + ImGui::InputText("2", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) has_focus = 2; + + ImGui::PushTabStop(false); + if (focus_3) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(); + ImGui::InputText("3 (tab skip)", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) has_focus = 3; + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Item won't be cycled through when using TAB or Shift+Tab."); + ImGui::PopTabStop(); + + if (has_focus) + ImGui::Text("Item with focus: %d", has_focus); + else + ImGui::Text("Item with focus: "); + + // Use >= 0 parameter to SetKeyboardFocusHere() to focus an upcoming item + static float f3[3] = { 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f }; + int focus_ahead = -1; + if (ImGui::Button("Focus on X")) { focus_ahead = 0; } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Y")) { focus_ahead = 1; } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Z")) { focus_ahead = 2; } + if (focus_ahead != -1) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(focus_ahead); + ImGui::SliderFloat3("Float3", &f3[0], 0.0f, 1.0f); + + ImGui::TextWrapped("NB: Cursor & selection are preserved when refocusing last used item in code."); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs & Focus/Dragging"); + if (ImGui::TreeNode("Dragging")) + { + ImGui::TextWrapped("You can use ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0) to query for the dragged amount on any widget."); + for (int button = 0; button < 3; button++) + { + ImGui::Text("IsMouseDragging(%d):", button); + ImGui::Text(" w/ default threshold: %d,", ImGui::IsMouseDragging(button)); + ImGui::Text(" w/ zero threshold: %d,", ImGui::IsMouseDragging(button, 0.0f)); + ImGui::Text(" w/ large threshold: %d,", ImGui::IsMouseDragging(button, 20.0f)); + } + + ImGui::Button("Drag Me"); + if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) + ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList()->AddLine(io.MouseClickedPos[0], io.MousePos, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Button), 4.0f); // Draw a line between the button and the mouse cursor + + // Drag operations gets "unlocked" when the mouse has moved past a certain threshold + // (the default threshold is stored in io.MouseDragThreshold). You can request a lower or higher + // threshold using the second parameter of IsMouseDragging() and GetMouseDragDelta(). + ImVec2 value_raw = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0, 0.0f); + ImVec2 value_with_lock_threshold = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0); + ImVec2 mouse_delta = io.MouseDelta; + ImGui::Text("GetMouseDragDelta(0):"); + ImGui::Text(" w/ default threshold: (%.1f, %.1f)", value_with_lock_threshold.x, value_with_lock_threshold.y); + ImGui::Text(" w/ zero threshold: (%.1f, %.1f)", value_raw.x, value_raw.y); + ImGui::Text("io.MouseDelta: (%.1f, %.1f)", mouse_delta.x, mouse_delta.y); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] About Window / ShowAboutWindow() +// Access from Dear ImGui Demo -> Tools -> About +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open) +{ + if (!ImGui::Begin("About Dear ImGui", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tools/About Dear ImGui"); + ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s (%d)", IMGUI_VERSION, IMGUI_VERSION_NUM); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("By Omar Cornut and all Dear ImGui contributors."); + ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui is licensed under the MIT License, see LICENSE for more information."); + ImGui::Text("If your company uses this, please consider sponsoring the project!"); + + static bool show_config_info = false; + ImGui::Checkbox("Config/Build Information", &show_config_info); + if (show_config_info) + { + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + + bool copy_to_clipboard = ImGui::Button("Copy to clipboard"); + ImVec2 child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 18); + ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGui::GetID("cfg_infos"), child_size, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove); + if (copy_to_clipboard) + { + ImGui::LogToClipboard(); + ImGui::LogText("```\n"); // Back quotes will make text appears without formatting when pasting on GitHub + } + + ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s (%d)", IMGUI_VERSION, IMGUI_VERSION_NUM); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("sizeof(size_t): %d, sizeof(ImDrawIdx): %d, sizeof(ImDrawVert): %d", (int)sizeof(size_t), (int)sizeof(ImDrawIdx), (int)sizeof(ImDrawVert)); + ImGui::Text("define: __cplusplus=%d", (int)__cplusplus); +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS"); +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR + ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR"); +#endif +#ifdef _WIN32 + ImGui::Text("define: _WIN32"); +#endif +#ifdef _WIN64 + ImGui::Text("define: _WIN64"); +#endif +#ifdef __linux__ + ImGui::Text("define: __linux__"); +#endif +#ifdef __APPLE__ + ImGui::Text("define: __APPLE__"); +#endif +#ifdef _MSC_VER + ImGui::Text("define: _MSC_VER=%d", _MSC_VER); +#endif +#ifdef _MSVC_LANG + ImGui::Text("define: _MSVC_LANG=%d", (int)_MSVC_LANG); +#endif +#ifdef __MINGW32__ + ImGui::Text("define: __MINGW32__"); +#endif +#ifdef __MINGW64__ + ImGui::Text("define: __MINGW64__"); +#endif +#ifdef __GNUC__ + ImGui::Text("define: __GNUC__=%d", (int)__GNUC__); +#endif +#ifdef __clang_version__ + ImGui::Text("define: __clang_version__=%s", __clang_version__); +#endif +#ifdef __EMSCRIPTEN__ + ImGui::Text("define: __EMSCRIPTEN__"); +#endif + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("io.BackendPlatformName: %s", io.BackendPlatformName ? io.BackendPlatformName : "NULL"); + ImGui::Text("io.BackendRendererName: %s", io.BackendRendererName ? io.BackendRendererName : "NULL"); + ImGui::Text("io.ConfigFlags: 0x%08X", io.ConfigFlags); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) ImGui::Text(" NavEnableKeyboard"); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) ImGui::Text(" NavEnableGamepad"); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) ImGui::Text(" NavEnableSetMousePos"); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard) ImGui::Text(" NavNoCaptureKeyboard"); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse) ImGui::Text(" NoMouse"); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange) ImGui::Text(" NoMouseCursorChange"); + if (io.MouseDrawCursor) ImGui::Text("io.MouseDrawCursor"); + if (io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors"); + if (io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink"); + if (io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges"); + if (io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly"); + if (io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer >= 0.0f) ImGui::Text("io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer = %.1f", io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer); + ImGui::Text("io.BackendFlags: 0x%08X", io.BackendFlags); + if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) ImGui::Text(" HasGamepad"); + if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) ImGui::Text(" HasMouseCursors"); + if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos) ImGui::Text(" HasSetMousePos"); + if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset) ImGui::Text(" RendererHasVtxOffset"); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("io.Fonts: %d fonts, Flags: 0x%08X, TexSize: %d,%d", io.Fonts->Fonts.Size, io.Fonts->Flags, io.Fonts->TexWidth, io.Fonts->TexHeight); + ImGui::Text("io.DisplaySize: %.2f,%.2f", io.DisplaySize.x, io.DisplaySize.y); + ImGui::Text("io.DisplayFramebufferScale: %.2f,%.2f", io.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, io.DisplayFramebufferScale.y); + ImGui::Separator(); + ImGui::Text("style.WindowPadding: %.2f,%.2f", style.WindowPadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y); + ImGui::Text("style.WindowBorderSize: %.2f", style.WindowBorderSize); + ImGui::Text("style.FramePadding: %.2f,%.2f", style.FramePadding.x, style.FramePadding.y); + ImGui::Text("style.FrameRounding: %.2f", style.FrameRounding); + ImGui::Text("style.FrameBorderSize: %.2f", style.FrameBorderSize); + ImGui::Text("style.ItemSpacing: %.2f,%.2f", style.ItemSpacing.x, style.ItemSpacing.y); + ImGui::Text("style.ItemInnerSpacing: %.2f,%.2f", style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, style.ItemInnerSpacing.y); + + if (copy_to_clipboard) + { + ImGui::LogText("\n```\n"); + ImGui::LogFinish(); + } + ImGui::EndChildFrame(); + } + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Style Editor / ShowStyleEditor() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ShowFontSelector() +// - ShowStyleSelector() +// - ShowStyleEditor() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Forward declare ShowFontAtlas() which isn't worth putting in public API yet +namespace ImGui { IMGUI_API void ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas* atlas); } + +// Demo helper function to select among loaded fonts. +// Here we use the regular BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api which is the more flexible one. +void ImGui::ShowFontSelector(const char* label) +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImFont* font_current = ImGui::GetFont(); + if (ImGui::BeginCombo(label, font_current->GetDebugName())) + { + for (ImFont* font : io.Fonts->Fonts) + { + ImGui::PushID((void*)font); + if (ImGui::Selectable(font->GetDebugName(), font == font_current)) + io.FontDefault = font; + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::EndCombo(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker( + "- Load additional fonts with io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF().\n" + "- The font atlas is built when calling io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsXXXX() or io.Fonts->Build().\n" + "- Read FAQ and docs/FONTS.md for more details.\n" + "- If you need to add/remove fonts at runtime (e.g. for DPI change), do it before calling NewFrame()."); +} + +// Demo helper function to select among default colors. See ShowStyleEditor() for more advanced options. +// Here we use the simplified Combo() api that packs items into a single literal string. +// Useful for quick combo boxes where the choices are known locally. +bool ImGui::ShowStyleSelector(const char* label) +{ + static int style_idx = -1; + if (ImGui::Combo(label, &style_idx, "Dark\0Light\0Classic\0")) + { + switch (style_idx) + { + case 0: ImGui::StyleColorsDark(); break; + case 1: ImGui::StyleColorsLight(); break; + case 2: ImGui::StyleColorsClassic(); break; + } + return true; + } + return false; +} + +void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref) +{ + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tools/Style Editor"); + // You can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare to, revert to and save to + // (without a reference style pointer, we will use one compared locally as a reference) + ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle(); + static ImGuiStyle ref_saved_style; + + // Default to using internal storage as reference + static bool init = true; + if (init && ref == NULL) + ref_saved_style = style; + init = false; + if (ref == NULL) + ref = &ref_saved_style; + + ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.50f); + + if (ImGui::ShowStyleSelector("Colors##Selector")) + ref_saved_style = style; + ImGui::ShowFontSelector("Fonts##Selector"); + + // Simplified Settings (expose floating-pointer border sizes as boolean representing 0.0f or 1.0f) + if (ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameRounding", &style.FrameRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f")) + style.GrabRounding = style.FrameRounding; // Make GrabRounding always the same value as FrameRounding + { bool border = (style.WindowBorderSize > 0.0f); if (ImGui::Checkbox("WindowBorder", &border)) { style.WindowBorderSize = border ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } } + ImGui::SameLine(); + { bool border = (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f); if (ImGui::Checkbox("FrameBorder", &border)) { style.FrameBorderSize = border ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } } + ImGui::SameLine(); + { bool border = (style.PopupBorderSize > 0.0f); if (ImGui::Checkbox("PopupBorder", &border)) { style.PopupBorderSize = border ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } } + + // Save/Revert button + if (ImGui::Button("Save Ref")) + *ref = ref_saved_style = style; + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Revert Ref")) + style = *ref; + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker( + "Save/Revert in local non-persistent storage. Default Colors definition are not affected. " + "Use \"Export\" below to save them somewhere."); + + ImGui::Separator(); + + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##tabs", ImGuiTabBarFlags_None)) + { + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Sizes")) + { + ImGui::SeparatorText("Main"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowPadding", (float*)&style.WindowPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("FramePadding", (float*)&style.FramePadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("CellPadding", (float*)&style.CellPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemInnerSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemInnerSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("TouchExtraPadding", (float*)&style.TouchExtraPadding, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("IndentSpacing", &style.IndentSpacing, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarSize", &style.ScrollbarSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabMinSize", &style.GrabMinSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f"); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Borders"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowBorderSize", &style.WindowBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildBorderSize", &style.ChildBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupBorderSize", &style.PopupBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameBorderSize", &style.FrameBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("TabBorderSize", &style.TabBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f"); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Rounding"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowRounding", &style.WindowRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildRounding", &style.ChildRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameRounding", &style.FrameRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupRounding", &style.PopupRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarRounding", &style.ScrollbarRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabRounding", &style.GrabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("TabRounding", &style.TabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Widgets"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowTitleAlign", (float*)&style.WindowTitleAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); + int window_menu_button_position = style.WindowMenuButtonPosition + 1; + if (ImGui::Combo("WindowMenuButtonPosition", (int*)&window_menu_button_position, "None\0Left\0Right\0")) + style.WindowMenuButtonPosition = window_menu_button_position - 1; + ImGui::Combo("ColorButtonPosition", (int*)&style.ColorButtonPosition, "Left\0Right\0"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("ButtonTextAlign", (float*)&style.ButtonTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Alignment applies when a button is larger than its text content."); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("SelectableTextAlign", (float*)&style.SelectableTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Alignment applies when a selectable is larger than its text content."); + ImGui::SliderFloat("SeparatorTextBorderSize", &style.SeparatorTextBorderSize, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("SeparatorTextAlign", (float*)&style.SeparatorTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("SeparatorTextPadding", (float*)&style.SeparatorTextPadding, 0.0f, 40.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat("LogSliderDeadzone", &style.LogSliderDeadzone, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"); + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Tooltips"); + for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++) + if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx(n == 0 ? "HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse" : "HoverFlagsForTooltipNav")) + { + ImGuiHoveredFlags* p = (n == 0) ? &style.HoverFlagsForTooltipMouse : &style.HoverFlagsForTooltipNav; + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNone", p, ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNone); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort", p, ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal", p, ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary", p, ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay", p, ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay); + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + + ImGui::SeparatorText("Misc"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("DisplaySafeAreaPadding", (float*)&style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f"); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Adjust if you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV where scaling has not been configured)."); + + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Colors")) + { + static int output_dest = 0; + static bool output_only_modified = true; + if (ImGui::Button("Export")) + { + if (output_dest == 0) + ImGui::LogToClipboard(); + else + ImGui::LogToTTY(); + ImGui::LogText("ImVec4* colors = ImGui::GetStyle().Colors;" IM_NEWLINE); + for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++) + { + const ImVec4& col = style.Colors[i]; + const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i); + if (!output_only_modified || memcmp(&col, &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0) + ImGui::LogText("colors[ImGuiCol_%s]%*s= ImVec4(%.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff);" IM_NEWLINE, + name, 23 - (int)strlen(name), "", col.x, col.y, col.z, col.w); + } + ImGui::LogFinish(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(120); ImGui::Combo("##output_type", &output_dest, "To Clipboard\0To TTY\0"); + ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Checkbox("Only Modified Colors", &output_only_modified); + + static ImGuiTextFilter filter; + filter.Draw("Filter colors", ImGui::GetFontSize() * 16); + + static ImGuiColorEditFlags alpha_flags = 0; + if (ImGui::RadioButton("Opaque", alpha_flags == ImGuiColorEditFlags_None)) { alpha_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_None; } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::RadioButton("Alpha", alpha_flags == ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview)) { alpha_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview; } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::RadioButton("Both", alpha_flags == ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) { alpha_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf; } ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker( + "In the color list:\n" + "Left-click on color square to open color picker,\n" + "Right-click to open edit options menu."); + + ImGui::BeginChild("##colors", ImVec2(0, 0), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-160); + for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++) + { + const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i); + if (!filter.PassFilter(name)) + continue; + ImGui::PushID(i); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("##color", (float*)&style.Colors[i], ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar | alpha_flags); + if (memcmp(&style.Colors[i], &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0) + { + // Tips: in a real user application, you may want to merge and use an icon font into the main font, + // so instead of "Save"/"Revert" you'd use icons! + // Read the FAQ and docs/FONTS.md about using icon fonts. It's really easy and super convenient! + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Save")) { ref->Colors[i] = style.Colors[i]; } + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Revert")) { style.Colors[i] = ref->Colors[i]; } + } + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(name); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + ImGui::EndChild(); + + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Fonts")) + { + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImFontAtlas* atlas = io.Fonts; + HelpMarker("Read FAQ and docs/FONTS.md for details on font loading."); + ImGui::ShowFontAtlas(atlas); + + // Post-baking font scaling. Note that this is NOT the nice way of scaling fonts, read below. + // (we enforce hard clamping manually as by default DragFloat/SliderFloat allows CTRL+Click text to get out of bounds). + const float MIN_SCALE = 0.3f; + const float MAX_SCALE = 2.0f; + HelpMarker( + "Those are old settings provided for convenience.\n" + "However, the _correct_ way of scaling your UI is currently to reload your font at the designed size, " + "rebuild the font atlas, and call style.ScaleAllSizes() on a reference ImGuiStyle structure.\n" + "Using those settings here will give you poor quality results."); + static float window_scale = 1.0f; + ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8); + if (ImGui::DragFloat("window scale", &window_scale, 0.005f, MIN_SCALE, MAX_SCALE, "%.2f", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp)) // Scale only this window + ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(window_scale); + ImGui::DragFloat("global scale", &io.FontGlobalScale, 0.005f, MIN_SCALE, MAX_SCALE, "%.2f", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); // Scale everything + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Rendering")) + { + ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased lines", &style.AntiAliasedLines); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("When disabling anti-aliasing lines, you'll probably want to disable borders in your style as well."); + + ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased lines use texture", &style.AntiAliasedLinesUseTex); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Faster lines using texture data. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (not point/nearest filtering)."); + + ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased fill", &style.AntiAliasedFill); + ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8); + ImGui::DragFloat("Curve Tessellation Tolerance", &style.CurveTessellationTol, 0.02f, 0.10f, 10.0f, "%.2f"); + if (style.CurveTessellationTol < 0.10f) style.CurveTessellationTol = 0.10f; + + // When editing the "Circle Segment Max Error" value, draw a preview of its effect on auto-tessellated circles. + ImGui::DragFloat("Circle Tessellation Max Error", &style.CircleTessellationMaxError , 0.005f, 0.10f, 5.0f, "%.2f", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); + const bool show_samples = ImGui::IsItemActive(); + if (show_samples) + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos()); + if (show_samples && ImGui::BeginTooltip()) + { + ImGui::TextUnformatted("(R = radius, N = number of segments)"); + ImGui::Spacing(); + ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + const float min_widget_width = ImGui::CalcTextSize("N: MMM\nR: MMM").x; + for (int n = 0; n < 8; n++) + { + const float RAD_MIN = 5.0f; + const float RAD_MAX = 70.0f; + const float rad = RAD_MIN + (RAD_MAX - RAD_MIN) * (float)n / (8.0f - 1.0f); + + ImGui::BeginGroup(); + + ImGui::Text("R: %.f\nN: %d", rad, draw_list->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(rad)); + + const float canvas_width = IM_MAX(min_widget_width, rad * 2.0f); + const float offset_x = floorf(canvas_width * 0.5f); + const float offset_y = floorf(RAD_MAX); + + const ImVec2 p1 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(p1.x + offset_x, p1.y + offset_y), rad, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text)); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(canvas_width, RAD_MAX * 2)); + + /* + const ImVec2 p2 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(p2.x + offset_x, p2.y + offset_y), rad, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text)); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(canvas_width, RAD_MAX * 2)); + */ + + ImGui::EndGroup(); + ImGui::SameLine(); + } + ImGui::EndTooltip(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("When drawing circle primitives with \"num_segments == 0\" tesselation will be calculated automatically."); + + ImGui::DragFloat("Global Alpha", &style.Alpha, 0.005f, 0.20f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); // Not exposing zero here so user doesn't "lose" the UI (zero alpha clips all widgets). But application code could have a toggle to switch between zero and non-zero. + ImGui::DragFloat("Disabled Alpha", &style.DisabledAlpha, 0.005f, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Additional alpha multiplier for disabled items (multiply over current value of Alpha)."); + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Shadows")) + { + ImGui::Text("Window shadows:"); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("Color", (float*)&style.Colors[ImGuiCol_WindowShadow], ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Same as 'WindowShadow' in Colors tab."); + + ImGui::SliderFloat("Size", &style.WindowShadowSize, 0.0f, 128.0f, "%.1f"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Set shadow size to zero to disable shadows."); + ImGui::SliderFloat("Offset distance", &style.WindowShadowOffsetDist, 0.0f, 64.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::SliderAngle("Offset angle", &style.WindowShadowOffsetAngle); + + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] User Guide / ShowUserGuide() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::ShowUserGuide() +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGui::BulletText("Double-click on title bar to collapse window."); + ImGui::BulletText( + "Click and drag on lower corner to resize window\n" + "(double-click to auto fit window to its contents)."); + ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Click on a slider or drag box to input value as text."); + ImGui::BulletText("TAB/SHIFT+TAB to cycle through keyboard editable fields."); + ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Tab to select a window."); + if (io.FontAllowUserScaling) + ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Mouse Wheel to zoom window contents."); + ImGui::BulletText("While inputing text:\n"); + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Left/Right to word jump."); + ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+A or double-click to select all."); + ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+X/C/V to use clipboard cut/copy/paste."); + ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y to undo/redo."); + ImGui::BulletText("ESCAPE to revert."); + ImGui::Unindent(); + ImGui::BulletText("With keyboard navigation enabled:"); + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::BulletText("Arrow keys to navigate."); + ImGui::BulletText("Space to activate a widget."); + ImGui::BulletText("Return to input text into a widget."); + ImGui::BulletText("Escape to deactivate a widget, close popup, exit child window."); + ImGui::BulletText("Alt to jump to the menu layer of a window."); + ImGui::Unindent(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Main Menu Bar / ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar() +// - ShowExampleMenuFile() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate creating a "main" fullscreen menu bar and populating it. +// Note the difference between BeginMainMenuBar() and BeginMenuBar(): +// - BeginMenuBar() = menu-bar inside current window (which needs the ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar flag!) +// - BeginMainMenuBar() = helper to create menu-bar-sized window at the top of the main viewport + call BeginMenuBar() into it. +static void ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar() +{ + if (ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File")) + { + ShowExampleMenuFile(); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Edit")) + { + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Undo", "CTRL+Z")) {} + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Redo", "CTRL+Y", false, false)) {} // Disabled item + ImGui::Separator(); + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Cut", "CTRL+X")) {} + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Copy", "CTRL+C")) {} + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Paste", "CTRL+V")) {} + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMainMenuBar(); + } +} + +// Note that shortcuts are currently provided for display only +// (future version will add explicit flags to BeginMenu() to request processing shortcuts) +static void ShowExampleMenuFile() +{ + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu"); + ImGui::MenuItem("(demo menu)", NULL, false, false); + if (ImGui::MenuItem("New")) {} + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Open", "Ctrl+O")) {} + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Open Recent")) + { + ImGui::MenuItem("fish_hat.c"); + ImGui::MenuItem("fish_hat.inl"); + ImGui::MenuItem("fish_hat.h"); + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("More..")) + { + ImGui::MenuItem("Hello"); + ImGui::MenuItem("Sailor"); + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Recurse..")) + { + ShowExampleMenuFile(); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save", "Ctrl+S")) {} + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save As..")) {} + + ImGui::Separator(); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu/Options"); + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Options")) + { + static bool enabled = true; + ImGui::MenuItem("Enabled", "", &enabled); + ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 60), true); + for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++) + ImGui::Text("Scrolling Text %d", i); + ImGui::EndChild(); + static float f = 0.5f; + static int n = 0; + ImGui::SliderFloat("Value", &f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + ImGui::InputFloat("Input", &f, 0.1f); + ImGui::Combo("Combo", &n, "Yes\0No\0Maybe\0\0"); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu/Colors"); + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Colors")) + { + float sz = ImGui::GetTextLineHeight(); + for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++) + { + const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName((ImGuiCol)i); + ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(p, ImVec2(p.x + sz, p.y + sz), ImGui::GetColorU32((ImGuiCol)i)); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(sz, sz)); + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::MenuItem(name); + } + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + + // Here we demonstrate appending again to the "Options" menu (which we already created above) + // Of course in this demo it is a little bit silly that this function calls BeginMenu("Options") twice. + // In a real code-base using it would make senses to use this feature from very different code locations. + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Options")) // <-- Append! + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu/Append to an existing menu"); + static bool b = true; + ImGui::Checkbox("SomeOption", &b); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Disabled", false)) // Disabled + { + IM_ASSERT(0); + } + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Checked", NULL, true)) {} + ImGui::Separator(); + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Quit", "Alt+F4")) {} +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Console / ShowExampleAppConsole() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate creating a simple console window, with scrolling, filtering, completion and history. +// For the console example, we are using a more C++ like approach of declaring a class to hold both data and functions. +struct ExampleAppConsole +{ + char InputBuf[256]; + ImVector Items; + ImVector Commands; + ImVector History; + int HistoryPos; // -1: new line, 0..History.Size-1 browsing history. + ImGuiTextFilter Filter; + bool AutoScroll; + bool ScrollToBottom; + + ExampleAppConsole() + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Console"); + ClearLog(); + memset(InputBuf, 0, sizeof(InputBuf)); + HistoryPos = -1; + + // "CLASSIFY" is here to provide the test case where "C"+[tab] completes to "CL" and display multiple matches. + Commands.push_back("HELP"); + Commands.push_back("HISTORY"); + Commands.push_back("CLEAR"); + Commands.push_back("CLASSIFY"); + AutoScroll = true; + ScrollToBottom = false; + AddLog("Welcome to Dear ImGui!"); + } + ~ExampleAppConsole() + { + ClearLog(); + for (int i = 0; i < History.Size; i++) + free(History[i]); + } + + // Portable helpers + static int Stricmp(const char* s1, const char* s2) { int d; while ((d = toupper(*s2) - toupper(*s1)) == 0 && *s1) { s1++; s2++; } return d; } + static int Strnicmp(const char* s1, const char* s2, int n) { int d = 0; while (n > 0 && (d = toupper(*s2) - toupper(*s1)) == 0 && *s1) { s1++; s2++; n--; } return d; } + static char* Strdup(const char* s) { IM_ASSERT(s); size_t len = strlen(s) + 1; void* buf = malloc(len); IM_ASSERT(buf); return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)s, len); } + static void Strtrim(char* s) { char* str_end = s + strlen(s); while (str_end > s && str_end[-1] == ' ') str_end--; *str_end = 0; } + + void ClearLog() + { + for (int i = 0; i < Items.Size; i++) + free(Items[i]); + Items.clear(); + } + + void AddLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2) + { + // FIXME-OPT + char buf[1024]; + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + vsnprintf(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), fmt, args); + buf[IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)-1] = 0; + va_end(args); + Items.push_back(Strdup(buf)); + } + + void Draw(const char* title, bool* p_open) + { + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(520, 600), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + if (!ImGui::Begin(title, p_open)) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + + // As a specific feature guaranteed by the library, after calling Begin() the last Item represent the title bar. + // So e.g. IsItemHovered() will return true when hovering the title bar. + // Here we create a context menu only available from the title bar. + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) + { + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close Console")) + *p_open = false; + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + ImGui::TextWrapped( + "This example implements a console with basic coloring, completion (TAB key) and history (Up/Down keys). A more elaborate " + "implementation may want to store entries along with extra data such as timestamp, emitter, etc."); + ImGui::TextWrapped("Enter 'HELP' for help."); + + // TODO: display items starting from the bottom + + if (ImGui::SmallButton("Add Debug Text")) { AddLog("%d some text", Items.Size); AddLog("some more text"); AddLog("display very important message here!"); } + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::SmallButton("Add Debug Error")) { AddLog("[error] something went wrong"); } + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::SmallButton("Clear")) { ClearLog(); } + ImGui::SameLine(); + bool copy_to_clipboard = ImGui::SmallButton("Copy"); + //static float t = 0.0f; if (ImGui::GetTime() - t > 0.02f) { t = ImGui::GetTime(); AddLog("Spam %f", t); } + + ImGui::Separator(); + + // Options menu + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("Options")) + { + ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-scroll", &AutoScroll); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // Options, Filter + if (ImGui::Button("Options")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("Options"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + Filter.Draw("Filter (\"incl,-excl\") (\"error\")", 180); + ImGui::Separator(); + + // Reserve enough left-over height for 1 separator + 1 input text + const float footer_height_to_reserve = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y + ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); + if (ImGui::BeginChild("ScrollingRegion", ImVec2(0, -footer_height_to_reserve), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar)) + { + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow()) + { + if (ImGui::Selectable("Clear")) ClearLog(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // Display every line as a separate entry so we can change their color or add custom widgets. + // If you only want raw text you can use ImGui::TextUnformatted(log.begin(), log.end()); + // NB- if you have thousands of entries this approach may be too inefficient and may require user-side clipping + // to only process visible items. The clipper will automatically measure the height of your first item and then + // "seek" to display only items in the visible area. + // To use the clipper we can replace your standard loop: + // for (int i = 0; i < Items.Size; i++) + // With: + // ImGuiListClipper clipper; + // clipper.Begin(Items.Size); + // while (clipper.Step()) + // for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++) + // - That your items are evenly spaced (same height) + // - That you have cheap random access to your elements (you can access them given their index, + // without processing all the ones before) + // You cannot this code as-is if a filter is active because it breaks the 'cheap random-access' property. + // We would need random-access on the post-filtered list. + // A typical application wanting coarse clipping and filtering may want to pre-compute an array of indices + // or offsets of items that passed the filtering test, recomputing this array when user changes the filter, + // and appending newly elements as they are inserted. This is left as a task to the user until we can manage + // to improve this example code! + // If your items are of variable height: + // - Split them into same height items would be simpler and facilitate random-seeking into your list. + // - Consider using manual call to IsRectVisible() and skipping extraneous decoration from your items. + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(4, 1)); // Tighten spacing + if (copy_to_clipboard) + ImGui::LogToClipboard(); + for (const char* item : Items) + { + if (!Filter.PassFilter(item)) + continue; + + // Normally you would store more information in your item than just a string. + // (e.g. make Items[] an array of structure, store color/type etc.) + ImVec4 color; + bool has_color = false; + if (strstr(item, "[error]")) { color = ImVec4(1.0f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f); has_color = true; } + else if (strncmp(item, "# ", 2) == 0) { color = ImVec4(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.6f, 1.0f); has_color = true; } + if (has_color) + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, color); + ImGui::TextUnformatted(item); + if (has_color) + ImGui::PopStyleColor(); + } + if (copy_to_clipboard) + ImGui::LogFinish(); + + // Keep up at the bottom of the scroll region if we were already at the bottom at the beginning of the frame. + // Using a scrollbar or mouse-wheel will take away from the bottom edge. + if (ScrollToBottom || (AutoScroll && ImGui::GetScrollY() >= ImGui::GetScrollMaxY())) + ImGui::SetScrollHereY(1.0f); + ScrollToBottom = false; + + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::Separator(); + + // Command-line + bool reclaim_focus = false; + ImGuiInputTextFlags input_text_flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue | ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory; + if (ImGui::InputText("Input", InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf), input_text_flags, &TextEditCallbackStub, (void*)this)) + { + char* s = InputBuf; + Strtrim(s); + if (s[0]) + ExecCommand(s); + strcpy(s, ""); + reclaim_focus = true; + } + + // Auto-focus on window apparition + ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus(); + if (reclaim_focus) + ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(-1); // Auto focus previous widget + + ImGui::End(); + } + + void ExecCommand(const char* command_line) + { + AddLog("# %s\n", command_line); + + // Insert into history. First find match and delete it so it can be pushed to the back. + // This isn't trying to be smart or optimal. + HistoryPos = -1; + for (int i = History.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--) + if (Stricmp(History[i], command_line) == 0) + { + free(History[i]); + History.erase(History.begin() + i); + break; + } + History.push_back(Strdup(command_line)); + + // Process command + if (Stricmp(command_line, "CLEAR") == 0) + { + ClearLog(); + } + else if (Stricmp(command_line, "HELP") == 0) + { + AddLog("Commands:"); + for (int i = 0; i < Commands.Size; i++) + AddLog("- %s", Commands[i]); + } + else if (Stricmp(command_line, "HISTORY") == 0) + { + int first = History.Size - 10; + for (int i = first > 0 ? first : 0; i < History.Size; i++) + AddLog("%3d: %s\n", i, History[i]); + } + else + { + AddLog("Unknown command: '%s'\n", command_line); + } + + // On command input, we scroll to bottom even if AutoScroll==false + ScrollToBottom = true; + } + + // In C++11 you'd be better off using lambdas for this sort of forwarding callbacks + static int TextEditCallbackStub(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) + { + ExampleAppConsole* console = (ExampleAppConsole*)data->UserData; + return console->TextEditCallback(data); + } + + int TextEditCallback(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data) + { + //AddLog("cursor: %d, selection: %d-%d", data->CursorPos, data->SelectionStart, data->SelectionEnd); + switch (data->EventFlag) + { + case ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion: + { + // Example of TEXT COMPLETION + + // Locate beginning of current word + const char* word_end = data->Buf + data->CursorPos; + const char* word_start = word_end; + while (word_start > data->Buf) + { + const char c = word_start[-1]; + if (c == ' ' || c == '\t' || c == ',' || c == ';') + break; + word_start--; + } + + // Build a list of candidates + ImVector candidates; + for (int i = 0; i < Commands.Size; i++) + if (Strnicmp(Commands[i], word_start, (int)(word_end - word_start)) == 0) + candidates.push_back(Commands[i]); + + if (candidates.Size == 0) + { + // No match + AddLog("No match for \"%.*s\"!\n", (int)(word_end - word_start), word_start); + } + else if (candidates.Size == 1) + { + // Single match. Delete the beginning of the word and replace it entirely so we've got nice casing. + data->DeleteChars((int)(word_start - data->Buf), (int)(word_end - word_start)); + data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, candidates[0]); + data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, " "); + } + else + { + // Multiple matches. Complete as much as we can.. + // So inputing "C"+Tab will complete to "CL" then display "CLEAR" and "CLASSIFY" as matches. + int match_len = (int)(word_end - word_start); + for (;;) + { + int c = 0; + bool all_candidates_matches = true; + for (int i = 0; i < candidates.Size && all_candidates_matches; i++) + if (i == 0) + c = toupper(candidates[i][match_len]); + else if (c == 0 || c != toupper(candidates[i][match_len])) + all_candidates_matches = false; + if (!all_candidates_matches) + break; + match_len++; + } + + if (match_len > 0) + { + data->DeleteChars((int)(word_start - data->Buf), (int)(word_end - word_start)); + data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, candidates[0], candidates[0] + match_len); + } + + // List matches + AddLog("Possible matches:\n"); + for (int i = 0; i < candidates.Size; i++) + AddLog("- %s\n", candidates[i]); + } + + break; + } + case ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory: + { + // Example of HISTORY + const int prev_history_pos = HistoryPos; + if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_UpArrow) + { + if (HistoryPos == -1) + HistoryPos = History.Size - 1; + else if (HistoryPos > 0) + HistoryPos--; + } + else if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_DownArrow) + { + if (HistoryPos != -1) + if (++HistoryPos >= History.Size) + HistoryPos = -1; + } + + // A better implementation would preserve the data on the current input line along with cursor position. + if (prev_history_pos != HistoryPos) + { + const char* history_str = (HistoryPos >= 0) ? History[HistoryPos] : ""; + data->DeleteChars(0, data->BufTextLen); + data->InsertChars(0, history_str); + } + } + } + return 0; + } +}; + +static void ShowExampleAppConsole(bool* p_open) +{ + static ExampleAppConsole console; + console.Draw("Example: Console", p_open); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Log / ShowExampleAppLog() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Usage: +// static ExampleAppLog my_log; +// my_log.AddLog("Hello %d world\n", 123); +// my_log.Draw("title"); +struct ExampleAppLog +{ + ImGuiTextBuffer Buf; + ImGuiTextFilter Filter; + ImVector LineOffsets; // Index to lines offset. We maintain this with AddLog() calls. + bool AutoScroll; // Keep scrolling if already at the bottom. + + ExampleAppLog() + { + AutoScroll = true; + Clear(); + } + + void Clear() + { + Buf.clear(); + LineOffsets.clear(); + LineOffsets.push_back(0); + } + + void AddLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2) + { + int old_size = Buf.size(); + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + Buf.appendfv(fmt, args); + va_end(args); + for (int new_size = Buf.size(); old_size < new_size; old_size++) + if (Buf[old_size] == '\n') + LineOffsets.push_back(old_size + 1); + } + + void Draw(const char* title, bool* p_open = NULL) + { + if (!ImGui::Begin(title, p_open)) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + + // Options menu + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("Options")) + { + ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-scroll", &AutoScroll); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // Main window + if (ImGui::Button("Options")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("Options"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + bool clear = ImGui::Button("Clear"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + bool copy = ImGui::Button("Copy"); + ImGui::SameLine(); + Filter.Draw("Filter", -100.0f); + + ImGui::Separator(); + + if (ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", ImVec2(0, 0), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar)) + { + if (clear) + Clear(); + if (copy) + ImGui::LogToClipboard(); + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0)); + const char* buf = Buf.begin(); + const char* buf_end = Buf.end(); + if (Filter.IsActive()) + { + // In this example we don't use the clipper when Filter is enabled. + // This is because we don't have random access to the result of our filter. + // A real application processing logs with ten of thousands of entries may want to store the result of + // search/filter.. especially if the filtering function is not trivial (e.g. reg-exp). + for (int line_no = 0; line_no < LineOffsets.Size; line_no++) + { + const char* line_start = buf + LineOffsets[line_no]; + const char* line_end = (line_no + 1 < LineOffsets.Size) ? (buf + LineOffsets[line_no + 1] - 1) : buf_end; + if (Filter.PassFilter(line_start, line_end)) + ImGui::TextUnformatted(line_start, line_end); + } + } + else + { + // The simplest and easy way to display the entire buffer: + // ImGui::TextUnformatted(buf_begin, buf_end); + // And it'll just work. TextUnformatted() has specialization for large blob of text and will fast-forward + // to skip non-visible lines. Here we instead demonstrate using the clipper to only process lines that are + // within the visible area. + // If you have tens of thousands of items and their processing cost is non-negligible, coarse clipping them + // on your side is recommended. Using ImGuiListClipper requires + // - A) random access into your data + // - B) items all being the same height, + // both of which we can handle since we have an array pointing to the beginning of each line of text. + // When using the filter (in the block of code above) we don't have random access into the data to display + // anymore, which is why we don't use the clipper. Storing or skimming through the search result would make + // it possible (and would be recommended if you want to search through tens of thousands of entries). + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(LineOffsets.Size); + while (clipper.Step()) + { + for (int line_no = clipper.DisplayStart; line_no < clipper.DisplayEnd; line_no++) + { + const char* line_start = buf + LineOffsets[line_no]; + const char* line_end = (line_no + 1 < LineOffsets.Size) ? (buf + LineOffsets[line_no + 1] - 1) : buf_end; + ImGui::TextUnformatted(line_start, line_end); + } + } + clipper.End(); + } + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + + // Keep up at the bottom of the scroll region if we were already at the bottom at the beginning of the frame. + // Using a scrollbar or mouse-wheel will take away from the bottom edge. + if (AutoScroll && ImGui::GetScrollY() >= ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()) + ImGui::SetScrollHereY(1.0f); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::End(); + } +}; + +// Demonstrate creating a simple log window with basic filtering. +static void ShowExampleAppLog(bool* p_open) +{ + static ExampleAppLog log; + + // For the demo: add a debug button _BEFORE_ the normal log window contents + // We take advantage of a rarely used feature: multiple calls to Begin()/End() are appending to the _same_ window. + // Most of the contents of the window will be added by the log.Draw() call. + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + ImGui::Begin("Example: Log", p_open); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Log"); + if (ImGui::SmallButton("[Debug] Add 5 entries")) + { + static int counter = 0; + const char* categories[3] = { "info", "warn", "error" }; + const char* words[] = { "Bumfuzzled", "Cattywampus", "Snickersnee", "Abibliophobia", "Absquatulate", "Nincompoop", "Pauciloquent" }; + for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++) + { + const char* category = categories[counter % IM_ARRAYSIZE(categories)]; + const char* word = words[counter % IM_ARRAYSIZE(words)]; + log.AddLog("[%05d] [%s] Hello, current time is %.1f, here's a word: '%s'\n", + ImGui::GetFrameCount(), category, ImGui::GetTime(), word); + counter++; + } + } + ImGui::End(); + + // Actually call in the regular Log helper (which will Begin() into the same window as we just did) + log.Draw("Example: Log", p_open); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Layout / ShowExampleAppLayout() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate create a window with multiple child windows. +static void ShowExampleAppLayout(bool* p_open) +{ + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 440), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Simple layout", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Simple layout"); + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File")) + { + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close", "Ctrl+W")) { *p_open = false; } + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + // Left + static int selected = 0; + { + ImGui::BeginChild("left pane", ImVec2(150, 0), true); + for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) + { + // FIXME: Good candidate to use ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav + char label[128]; + sprintf(label, "MyObject %d", i); + if (ImGui::Selectable(label, selected == i)) + selected = i; + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + + // Right + { + ImGui::BeginGroup(); + ImGui::BeginChild("item view", ImVec2(0, -ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing())); // Leave room for 1 line below us + ImGui::Text("MyObject: %d", selected); + ImGui::Separator(); + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##Tabs", ImGuiTabBarFlags_None)) + { + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Description")) + { + ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. "); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Details")) + { + ImGui::Text("ID: 0123456789"); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + if (ImGui::Button("Revert")) {} + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Save")) {} + ImGui::EndGroup(); + } + } + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Property Editor / ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +static void ShowPlaceholderObject(const char* prefix, int uid) +{ + // Use object uid as identifier. Most commonly you could also use the object pointer as a base ID. + ImGui::PushID(uid); + + // Text and Tree nodes are less high than framed widgets, using AlignTextToFramePadding() we add vertical spacing to make the tree lines equal high. + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0); + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Object", "%s_%u", prefix, uid); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1); + ImGui::Text("my sailor is rich"); + + if (node_open) + { + static float placeholder_members[8] = { 0.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f, 3.1416f, 100.0f, 999.0f }; + for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++) + { + ImGui::PushID(i); // Use field index as identifier. + if (i < 2) + { + ShowPlaceholderObject("Child", 424242); + } + else + { + // Here we use a TreeNode to highlight on hover (we could use e.g. Selectable as well) + ImGui::TableNextRow(); + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0); + ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet; + ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Field", flags, "Field_%d", i); + + ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); + if (i >= 5) + ImGui::InputFloat("##value", &placeholder_members[i], 1.0f); + else + ImGui::DragFloat("##value", &placeholder_members[i], 0.01f); + ImGui::NextColumn(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); + } + ImGui::TreePop(); + } + ImGui::PopID(); +} + +// Demonstrate create a simple property editor. +// This demo is a bit lackluster nowadays, would be nice to improve. +static void ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor(bool* p_open) +{ + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(430, 450), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Property editor", p_open)) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Property Editor"); + HelpMarker( + "This example shows how you may implement a property editor using two columns.\n" + "All objects/fields data are dummies here.\n"); + + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2, 2)); + if (ImGui::BeginTable("##split", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) + { + ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(0, 1); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Object"); + ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Contents"); + ImGui::TableHeadersRow(); + + // Iterate placeholder objects (all the same data) + for (int obj_i = 0; obj_i < 4; obj_i++) + ShowPlaceholderObject("Object", obj_i); + + ImGui::EndTable(); + } + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Long Text / ShowExampleAppLongText() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate/test rendering huge amount of text, and the incidence of clipping. +static void ShowExampleAppLongText(bool* p_open) +{ + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(520, 600), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Long text display", p_open)) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Long text display"); + + static int test_type = 0; + static ImGuiTextBuffer log; + static int lines = 0; + ImGui::Text("Printing unusually long amount of text."); + ImGui::Combo("Test type", &test_type, + "Single call to TextUnformatted()\0" + "Multiple calls to Text(), clipped\0" + "Multiple calls to Text(), not clipped (slow)\0"); + ImGui::Text("Buffer contents: %d lines, %d bytes", lines, log.size()); + if (ImGui::Button("Clear")) { log.clear(); lines = 0; } + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Add 1000 lines")) + { + for (int i = 0; i < 1000; i++) + log.appendf("%i The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog\n", lines + i); + lines += 1000; + } + ImGui::BeginChild("Log"); + switch (test_type) + { + case 0: + // Single call to TextUnformatted() with a big buffer + ImGui::TextUnformatted(log.begin(), log.end()); + break; + case 1: + { + // Multiple calls to Text(), manually coarsely clipped - demonstrate how to use the ImGuiListClipper helper. + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0)); + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(lines); + while (clipper.Step()) + for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++) + ImGui::Text("%i The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog", i); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + break; + } + case 2: + // Multiple calls to Text(), not clipped (slow) + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0)); + for (int i = 0; i < lines; i++) + ImGui::Text("%i The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog", i); + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + break; + } + ImGui::EndChild(); + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Auto Resize / ShowExampleAppAutoResize() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate creating a window which gets auto-resized according to its content. +static void ShowExampleAppAutoResize(bool* p_open) +{ + if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Auto-resizing window", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Auto-resizing window"); + + static int lines = 10; + ImGui::TextUnformatted( + "Window will resize every-frame to the size of its content.\n" + "Note that you probably don't want to query the window size to\n" + "output your content because that would create a feedback loop."); + ImGui::SliderInt("Number of lines", &lines, 1, 20); + for (int i = 0; i < lines; i++) + ImGui::Text("%*sThis is line %d", i * 4, "", i); // Pad with space to extend size horizontally + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Constrained Resize / ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate creating a window with custom resize constraints. +// Note that size constraints currently don't work on a docked window (when in 'docking' branch) +static void ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(bool* p_open) +{ + struct CustomConstraints + { + // Helper functions to demonstrate programmatic constraints + // FIXME: This doesn't take account of decoration size (e.g. title bar), library should make this easier. + static void AspectRatio(ImGunSizeCallbackData* data) { float aspect_ratio = *(float*)data->UserData; data->DesiredSize.x = IM_MAX(data->CurrentSize.x, data->CurrentSize.y); data->DesiredSize.y = (float)(int)(data->DesiredSize.x / aspect_ratio); } + static void Square(ImGunSizeCallbackData* data) { data->DesiredSize.x = data->DesiredSize.y = IM_MAX(data->CurrentSize.x, data->CurrentSize.y); } + static void Step(ImGunSizeCallbackData* data) { float step = *(float*)data->UserData; data->DesiredSize = ImVec2((int)(data->CurrentSize.x / step + 0.5f) * step, (int)(data->CurrentSize.y / step + 0.5f) * step); } + }; + + const char* test_desc[] = + { + "Between 100x100 and 500x500", + "At least 100x100", + "Resize vertical only", + "Resize horizontal only", + "Width Between 400 and 500", + "Custom: Aspect Ratio 16:9", + "Custom: Always Square", + "Custom: Fixed Steps (100)", + }; + + // Options + static bool auto_resize = false; + static bool window_padding = true; + static int type = 5; // Aspect Ratio + static int display_lines = 10; + + // Submit constraint + float aspect_ratio = 16.0f / 9.0f; + float fixed_step = 100.0f; + if (type == 0) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(100, 100), ImVec2(500, 500)); // Between 100x100 and 500x500 + if (type == 1) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(100, 100), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX)); // Width > 100, Height > 100 + if (type == 2) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(-1, 0), ImVec2(-1, FLT_MAX)); // Vertical only + if (type == 3) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, -1), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, -1)); // Horizontal only + if (type == 4) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(400, -1), ImVec2(500, -1)); // Width Between and 400 and 500 + if (type == 5) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::AspectRatio, (void*)&aspect_ratio); // Aspect ratio + if (type == 6) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Square); // Always Square + if (type == 7) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Step, (void*)&fixed_step); // Fixed Step + + // Submit window + if (!window_padding) + ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); + const ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = auto_resize ? ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize : 0; + const bool window_open = ImGui::Begin("Example: Constrained Resize", p_open, window_flags); + if (!window_padding) + ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + if (window_open) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Constrained Resizing window"); + if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyShift) + { + // Display a dummy viewport (in your real app you would likely use ImageButton() to display a texture. + ImVec2 avail_size = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail(); + ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImGui::ColorButton("viewport", ImVec4(0.5f, 0.2f, 0.5f, 1.0f), ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop, avail_size); + ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(pos.x + 10, pos.y + 10)); + ImGui::Text("%.2f x %.2f", avail_size.x, avail_size.y); + } + else + { + ImGui::Text("(Hold SHIFT to display a dummy viewport)"); + if (ImGui::Button("Set 200x200")) { ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImVec2(200, 200)); } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Set 500x500")) { ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 500)); } ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Set 800x200")) { ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImVec2(800, 200)); } + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20); + ImGui::Combo("Constraint", &type, test_desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(test_desc)); + ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20); + ImGui::DragInt("Lines", &display_lines, 0.2f, 1, 100); + ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-resize", &auto_resize); + ImGui::Checkbox("Window padding", &window_padding); + for (int i = 0; i < display_lines; i++) + ImGui::Text("%*sHello, sailor! Making this line long enough for the example.", i * 4, ""); + } + } + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Simple overlay / ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate creating a simple static window with no decoration +// + a context-menu to choose which corner of the screen to use. +static void ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay(bool* p_open) +{ + static int location = 0; + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav; + if (location >= 0) + { + const float PAD = 10.0f; + const ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport(); + ImVec2 work_pos = viewport->WorkPos; // Use work area to avoid menu-bar/task-bar, if any! + ImVec2 work_size = viewport->WorkSize; + ImVec2 window_pos, window_pos_pivot; + window_pos.x = (location & 1) ? (work_pos.x + work_size.x - PAD) : (work_pos.x + PAD); + window_pos.y = (location & 2) ? (work_pos.y + work_size.y - PAD) : (work_pos.y + PAD); + window_pos_pivot.x = (location & 1) ? 1.0f : 0.0f; + window_pos_pivot.y = (location & 2) ? 1.0f : 0.0f; + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(window_pos, ImGuiCond_Always, window_pos_pivot); + window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove; + } + else if (location == -2) + { + // Center window + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImGui::GetMainViewport()->GetCenter(), ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove; + } + ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.35f); // Transparent background + if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Simple overlay", p_open, window_flags)) + { + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Simple Overlay"); + ImGui::Text("Simple overlay\n" "(right-click to change position)"); + ImGui::Separator(); + if (ImGui::IsMousePosValid()) + ImGui::Text("Mouse Position: (%.1f,%.1f)", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y); + else + ImGui::Text("Mouse Position: "); + if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow()) + { + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Custom", NULL, location == -1)) location = -1; + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Center", NULL, location == -2)) location = -2; + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Top-left", NULL, location == 0)) location = 0; + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Top-right", NULL, location == 1)) location = 1; + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Bottom-left", NULL, location == 2)) location = 2; + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Bottom-right", NULL, location == 3)) location = 3; + if (p_open && ImGui::MenuItem("Close")) *p_open = false; + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + } + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Fullscreen window / ShowExampleAppFullscreen() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate creating a window covering the entire screen/viewport +static void ShowExampleAppFullscreen(bool* p_open) +{ + static bool use_work_area = true; + static ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings; + + // We demonstrate using the full viewport area or the work area (without menu-bars, task-bars etc.) + // Based on your use case you may want one or the other. + const ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport(); + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(use_work_area ? viewport->WorkPos : viewport->Pos); + ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(use_work_area ? viewport->WorkSize : viewport->Size); + + if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Fullscreen window", p_open, flags)) + { + ImGui::Checkbox("Use work area instead of main area", &use_work_area); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Main Area = entire viewport,\nWork Area = entire viewport minus sections used by the main menu bars, task bars etc.\n\nEnable the main-menu bar in Examples menu to see the difference."); + + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration); + ImGui::Indent(); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse); + ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar); + ImGui::Unindent(); + + if (p_open && ImGui::Button("Close this window")) + *p_open = false; + } + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Manipulating Window Titles / ShowExampleAppWindowTitles() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate the use of "##" and "###" in identifiers to manipulate ID generation. +// This applies to all regular items as well. +// Read FAQ section "How can I have multiple widgets with the same label?" for details. +static void ShowExampleAppWindowTitles(bool*) +{ + const ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport(); + const ImVec2 base_pos = viewport->Pos; + + // By default, Windows are uniquely identified by their title. + // You can use the "##" and "###" markers to manipulate the display/ID. + + // Using "##" to display same title but have unique identifier. + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(base_pos.x + 100, base_pos.y + 100), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + ImGui::Begin("Same title as another window##1"); + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Manipulating window titles"); + ImGui::Text("This is window 1.\nMy title is the same as window 2, but my identifier is unique."); + ImGui::End(); + + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(base_pos.x + 100, base_pos.y + 200), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + ImGui::Begin("Same title as another window##2"); + ImGui::Text("This is window 2.\nMy title is the same as window 1, but my identifier is unique."); + ImGui::End(); + + // Using "###" to display a changing title but keep a static identifier "AnimatedTitle" + char buf[128]; + sprintf(buf, "Animated title %c %d###AnimatedTitle", "|/-\\"[(int)(ImGui::GetTime() / 0.25f) & 3], ImGui::GetFrameCount()); + ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(base_pos.x + 100, base_pos.y + 300), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver); + ImGui::Begin(buf); + ImGui::Text("This window has a changing title."); + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Custom Rendering using ImDrawList API / ShowExampleAppCustomRendering() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Demonstrate using the low-level ImDrawList to draw custom shapes. +static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open) +{ + if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Custom rendering", p_open)) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Custom Rendering"); + + // Tip: If you do a lot of custom rendering, you probably want to use your own geometrical types and benefit of + // overloaded operators, etc. Define IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA in imconfig.h to create implicit conversions between your + // types and ImVec2/ImVec4. Dear ImGui defines overloaded operators but they are internal to imgui.cpp and not + // exposed outside (to avoid messing with your types) In this example we are not using the maths operators! + + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##TabBar")) + { + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Primitives")) + { + ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetFontSize() * 15); + ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + + // Draw gradients + // (note that those are currently exacerbating our sRGB/Linear issues) + // Calling ImGui::GetColorU32() multiplies the given colors by the current Style Alpha, but you may pass the IM_COL32() directly as well.. + ImGui::Text("Gradients"); + ImVec2 gradient_size = ImVec2(ImGui::CalcItemWidth(), ImGui::GetFrameHeight()); + { + ImVec2 p0 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImVec2 p1 = ImVec2(p0.x + gradient_size.x, p0.y + gradient_size.y); + ImU32 col_a = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255)); + ImU32 col_b = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255)); + draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(p0, p1, col_a, col_b, col_b, col_a); + ImGui::InvisibleButton("##gradient1", gradient_size); + } + { + ImVec2 p0 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImVec2 p1 = ImVec2(p0.x + gradient_size.x, p0.y + gradient_size.y); + ImU32 col_a = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); + ImU32 col_b = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); + draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(p0, p1, col_a, col_b, col_b, col_a); + ImGui::InvisibleButton("##gradient2", gradient_size); + } + + // Draw a bunch of primitives + ImGui::Text("All primitives"); + static float sz = 36.0f; + static float thickness = 3.0f; + static int ngon_sides = 6; + static bool circle_segments_override = false; + static int circle_segments_override_v = 12; + static bool curve_segments_override = false; + static int curve_segments_override_v = 8; + static ImVec4 colf = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 0.4f, 1.0f); + ImGui::DragFloat("Size", &sz, 0.2f, 2.0f, 100.0f, "%.0f"); + ImGui::DragFloat("Thickness", &thickness, 0.05f, 1.0f, 8.0f, "%.02f"); + ImGui::SliderInt("N-gon sides", &ngon_sides, 3, 12); + ImGui::Checkbox("##circlesegmentoverride", &circle_segments_override); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x); + circle_segments_override |= ImGui::SliderInt("Circle segments override", &circle_segments_override_v, 3, 40); + ImGui::Checkbox("##curvessegmentoverride", &curve_segments_override); + ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x); + curve_segments_override |= ImGui::SliderInt("Curves segments override", &curve_segments_override_v, 3, 40); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("Color", &colf.x); + + const ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + const ImU32 col = ImColor(colf); + const float spacing = 10.0f; + const ImDrawFlags corners_tl_br = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight; + const float rounding = sz / 5.0f; + const int circle_segments = circle_segments_override ? circle_segments_override_v : 0; + const int curve_segments = curve_segments_override ? curve_segments_override_v : 0; + float x = p.x + 4.0f; + float y = p.y + 4.0f; + for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++) + { + // First line uses a thickness of 1.0f, second line uses the configurable thickness + float th = (n == 0) ? 1.0f : thickness; + draw_list->AddNgon(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, ngon_sides, th); x += sz + spacing; // N-gon + draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, circle_segments, th); x += sz + spacing; // Circle + draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 0.0f, ImDrawFlags_None, th); x += sz + spacing; // Square + draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_None, th); x += sz + spacing; // Square with all rounded corners + draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, rounding, corners_tl_br, th); x += sz + spacing; // Square with two rounded corners + draw_list->AddTriangle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f,y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), col, th);x += sz + spacing; // Triangle + //draw_list->AddTriangle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.2f,y), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x+sz*0.4f, y+sz-0.5f), col, th);x+= sz*0.4f + spacing; // Thin triangle + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y), col, th); x += sz + spacing; // Horizontal line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!) + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x, y + sz), col, th); x += spacing; // Vertical line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!) + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, th); x += sz + spacing; // Diagonal line + + // Quadratic Bezier Curve (3 control points) + ImVec2 cp3[3] = { ImVec2(x, y + sz * 0.6f), ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y - sz * 0.4f), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz) }; + draw_list->AddBezierQuadratic(cp3[0], cp3[1], cp3[2], col, th, curve_segments); x += sz + spacing; + + // Cubic Bezier Curve (4 control points) + ImVec2 cp4[4] = { ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz * 1.3f, y + sz * 0.3f), ImVec2(x + sz - sz * 1.3f, y + sz - sz * 0.3f), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz) }; + draw_list->AddBezierCubic(cp4[0], cp4[1], cp4[2], cp4[3], col, th, curve_segments); + + x = p.x + 4; + y += sz + spacing; + } + draw_list->AddNgonFilled(ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y + sz * 0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, ngon_sides); x += sz + spacing; // N-gon + draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, circle_segments); x += sz + spacing; // Circle + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col); x += sz + spacing; // Square + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 10.0f); x += sz + spacing; // Square with all rounded corners + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 10.0f, corners_tl_br); x += sz + spacing; // Square with two rounded corners + draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f,y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), col); x += sz + spacing; // Triangle + //draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(x+sz*0.2f,y), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x+sz*0.4f, y+sz-0.5f), col); x += sz*0.4f + spacing; // Thin triangle + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + thickness), col); x += sz + spacing; // Horizontal line (faster than AddLine, but only handle integer thickness) + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + thickness, y + sz), col); x += spacing * 2.0f;// Vertical line (faster than AddLine, but only handle integer thickness) + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + 1, y + 1), col); x += sz; // Pixel (faster than AddLine) + draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); + + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2((sz + spacing) * 10.2f, (sz + spacing) * 3.0f)); + ImGui::PopItemWidth(); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Canvas")) + { + static ImVector points; + static ImVec2 scrolling(0.0f, 0.0f); + static bool opt_enable_grid = true; + static bool opt_enable_context_menu = true; + static bool adding_line = false; + + ImGui::Checkbox("Enable grid", &opt_enable_grid); + ImGui::Checkbox("Enable context menu", &opt_enable_context_menu); + ImGui::Text("Mouse Left: drag to add lines,\nMouse Right: drag to scroll, click for context menu."); + + // Typically you would use a BeginChild()/EndChild() pair to benefit from a clipping region + own scrolling. + // Here we demonstrate that this can be replaced by simple offsetting + custom drawing + PushClipRect/PopClipRect() calls. + // To use a child window instead we could use, e.g: + // ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Disable padding + // ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255)); // Set a background color + // ImGui::BeginChild("canvas", ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove); + // ImGui::PopStyleColor(); + // ImGui::PopStyleVar(); + // [...] + // ImGui::EndChild(); + + // Using InvisibleButton() as a convenience 1) it will advance the layout cursor and 2) allows us to use IsItemHovered()/IsItemActive() + ImVec2 canvas_p0 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); // ImDrawList API uses screen coordinates! + ImVec2 canvas_sz = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail(); // Resize canvas to what's available + if (canvas_sz.x < 50.0f) canvas_sz.x = 50.0f; + if (canvas_sz.y < 50.0f) canvas_sz.y = 50.0f; + ImVec2 canvas_p1 = ImVec2(canvas_p0.x + canvas_sz.x, canvas_p0.y + canvas_sz.y); + + // Draw border and background color + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(canvas_p0, canvas_p1, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255)); + draw_list->AddRect(canvas_p0, canvas_p1, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255)); + + // This will catch our interactions + ImGui::InvisibleButton("canvas", canvas_sz, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight); + const bool is_hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered(); // Hovered + const bool is_active = ImGui::IsItemActive(); // Held + const ImVec2 origin(canvas_p0.x + scrolling.x, canvas_p0.y + scrolling.y); // Lock scrolled origin + const ImVec2 mouse_pos_in_canvas(io.MousePos.x - origin.x, io.MousePos.y - origin.y); + + // Add first and second point + if (is_hovered && !adding_line && ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left)) + { + points.push_back(mouse_pos_in_canvas); + points.push_back(mouse_pos_in_canvas); + adding_line = true; + } + if (adding_line) + { + points.back() = mouse_pos_in_canvas; + if (!ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left)) + adding_line = false; + } + + // Pan (we use a zero mouse threshold when there's no context menu) + // You may decide to make that threshold dynamic based on whether the mouse is hovering something etc. + const float mouse_threshold_for_pan = opt_enable_context_menu ? -1.0f : 0.0f; + if (is_active && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Right, mouse_threshold_for_pan)) + { + scrolling.x += io.MouseDelta.x; + scrolling.y += io.MouseDelta.y; + } + + // Context menu (under default mouse threshold) + ImVec2 drag_delta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton_Right); + if (opt_enable_context_menu && drag_delta.x == 0.0f && drag_delta.y == 0.0f) + ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + if (ImGui::BeginPopup("context")) + { + if (adding_line) + points.resize(points.size() - 2); + adding_line = false; + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Remove one", NULL, false, points.Size > 0)) { points.resize(points.size() - 2); } + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Remove all", NULL, false, points.Size > 0)) { points.clear(); } + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + + // Draw grid + all lines in the canvas + draw_list->PushClipRect(canvas_p0, canvas_p1, true); + if (opt_enable_grid) + { + const float GRID_STEP = 64.0f; + for (float x = fmodf(scrolling.x, GRID_STEP); x < canvas_sz.x; x += GRID_STEP) + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(canvas_p0.x + x, canvas_p0.y), ImVec2(canvas_p0.x + x, canvas_p1.y), IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 40)); + for (float y = fmodf(scrolling.y, GRID_STEP); y < canvas_sz.y; y += GRID_STEP) + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(canvas_p0.x, canvas_p0.y + y), ImVec2(canvas_p1.x, canvas_p0.y + y), IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 40)); + } + for (int n = 0; n < points.Size; n += 2) + draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(origin.x + points[n].x, origin.y + points[n].y), ImVec2(origin.x + points[n + 1].x, origin.y + points[n + 1].y), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 2.0f); + draw_list->PopClipRect(); + + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Shadows")) + { + static float shadow_thickness = 40.0f; + static ImVec4 shadow_color = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f); + static bool shadow_filled = false; + static ImVec4 shape_color = ImVec4(0.9f, 0.6f, 0.3f, 1.0f); + static float shape_rounding = 0.0f; + static ImVec2 shadow_offset(0.0f, 0.0f); + static ImVec4 background_color = ImVec4(0.5f, 0.5f, 0.7f, 1.0f); + static bool wireframe = false; + static bool aa = true; + static int poly_shape_index = 0; + ImGui::Checkbox("Shadow filled", &shadow_filled); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("This will fill the section behind the shape to shadow. It's often unnecessary and wasteful but provided for consistency."); + ImGui::Checkbox("Wireframe shapes", &wireframe); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("This draws the shapes in wireframe so you can see the shadow underneath."); + ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliasing", &aa); + + ImGui::DragFloat("Shadow Thickness", &shadow_thickness, 1.0f, 0.0f, 100.0f, "%.02f"); + ImGui::SliderFloat2("Offset", (float*)&shadow_offset, -32.0f, 32.0f); + ImGui::SameLine(); + HelpMarker("Note that currently circles/convex shapes do not support non-zero offsets for unfilled shadows."); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("Background Color", &background_color.x); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("Shadow Color", &shadow_color.x); + ImGui::ColorEdit4("Shape Color", &shape_color.x); + ImGui::DragFloat("Shape Rounding", &shape_rounding, 1.0f, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.02f"); + ImGui::Combo("Convex shape", &poly_shape_index, "Shape 1\0Shape 2\0Shape 3\0Shape 4\0Shape 4 (winding reversed)"); + + ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + ImDrawListFlags old_flags = draw_list->Flags; + + if (aa) + draw_list->Flags |= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill; + else + draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill; + + // Fill a strip of background + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos().x, ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos().y), ImVec2(ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos().x + ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax().x, ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos().y + 200.0f), ImGui::GetColorU32(background_color)); + + // Rectangle + { + ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(200.0f, 200.0f)); + + ImVec2 r1(p.x + 50.0f, p.y + 50.0f); + ImVec2 r2(p.x + 150.0f, p.y + 150.0f); + ImDrawFlags draw_flags = shadow_filled ? ImDrawFlags_None : ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground; + draw_list->AddShadowRect(r1, r2, ImGui::GetColorU32(shadow_color), shadow_thickness, shadow_offset, draw_flags, shape_rounding); + + if (wireframe) + draw_list->AddRect(r1, r2, ImGui::GetColorU32(shape_color), shape_rounding); + else + draw_list->AddRectFilled(r1, r2, ImGui::GetColorU32(shape_color), shape_rounding); + } + + ImGui::SameLine(); + + // Circle + { + ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(200.0f, 200.0f)); + + // FIXME-SHADOWS: Offset forced to zero when shadow is not filled because it isn't supported + float off = 10.0f; + ImVec2 r1(p.x + 50.0f + off, p.y + 50.0f + off); + ImVec2 r2(p.x + 150.0f - off, p.y + 150.0f - off); + ImVec2 center(p.x + 100.0f, p.y + 100.0f); + ImDrawFlags draw_flags = shadow_filled ? ImDrawFlags_None : ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground; + draw_list->AddShadowCircle(center, 50.0f, ImGui::GetColorU32(shadow_color), shadow_thickness, shadow_filled ? shadow_offset : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), draw_flags, 0); + + if (wireframe) + draw_list->AddCircle(center, 50.0f, ImGui::GetColorU32(shape_color), 0); + else + draw_list->AddCircleFilled(center, 50.0f, ImGui::GetColorU32(shape_color), 0); + } + + ImGui::SameLine(); + + // Convex shape + { + ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(200.0f, 200.0f)); + + const ImVec2 poly_centre(pos.x + 50.0f, pos.y + 100.0f); + ImVec2 poly_points[8]; + int poly_points_count = 0; + + switch (poly_shape_index) + { + default: + case 0: + { + poly_points[0] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 32.0f, poly_centre.y); + poly_points[1] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 24.0f, poly_centre.y + 24.0f); + poly_points[2] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x, poly_centre.y + 32.0f); + poly_points[3] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 24.0f, poly_centre.y + 24.0f); + poly_points[4] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 32.0f, poly_centre.y); + poly_points[5] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 24.0f, poly_centre.y - 24.0f); + poly_points[6] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x, poly_centre.y - 32.0f); + poly_points[7] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 32.0f, poly_centre.y - 32.0f); + poly_points_count = 8; + break; + } + case 1: + { + poly_points[0] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 40.0f, poly_centre.y - 20.0f); + poly_points[1] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x, poly_centre.y + 32.0f); + poly_points[2] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 24.0f, poly_centre.y - 32.0f); + poly_points_count = 3; + break; + } + case 2: + { + poly_points[0] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 32.0f, poly_centre.y); + poly_points[1] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x, poly_centre.y + 32.0f); + poly_points[2] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 32.0f, poly_centre.y); + poly_points[3] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x, poly_centre.y - 32.0f); + poly_points_count = 4; + break; + } + case 3: + { + poly_points[0] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 4.0f, poly_centre.y - 20.0f); + poly_points[1] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 12.0f, poly_centre.y + 2.0f); + poly_points[2] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 8.0f, poly_centre.y + 16.0f); + poly_points[3] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x, poly_centre.y + 32.0f); + poly_points[4] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 16.0f, poly_centre.y - 32.0f); + poly_points_count = 5; + break; + } + case 4: // Same as test case 3 but with reversed winding + { + poly_points[0] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 16.0f, poly_centre.y - 32.0f); + poly_points[1] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x, poly_centre.y + 32.0f); + poly_points[2] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 8.0f, poly_centre.y + 16.0f); + poly_points[3] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x + 12.0f, poly_centre.y + 2.0f); + poly_points[4] = ImVec2(poly_centre.x - 4.0f, poly_centre.y - 20.0f); + poly_points_count = 5; + break; + } + } + + // FIXME-SHADOWS: Offset forced to zero when shadow is not filled because it isn't supported + ImDrawFlags draw_flags = shadow_filled ? ImDrawFlags_None : ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground; + draw_list->AddShadowConvexPoly(poly_points, poly_points_count, ImGui::GetColorU32(shadow_color), shadow_thickness, shadow_filled ? shadow_offset : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), draw_flags); + + if (wireframe) + draw_list->AddPolyline(poly_points, poly_points_count, ImGui::GetColorU32(shape_color), true, 1.0f); + else + draw_list->AddConvexPolyFilled(poly_points, poly_points_count, ImGui::GetColorU32(shape_color)); + } + + draw_list->Flags = old_flags; + + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("BG/FG draw lists")) + { + static bool draw_bg = true; + static bool draw_fg = true; + ImGui::Checkbox("Draw in Background draw list", &draw_bg); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("The Background draw list will be rendered below every Dear ImGui windows."); + ImGui::Checkbox("Draw in Foreground draw list", &draw_fg); + ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("The Foreground draw list will be rendered over every Dear ImGui windows."); + ImVec2 window_pos = ImGui::GetWindowPos(); + ImVec2 window_size = ImGui::GetWindowSize(); + ImVec2 window_center = ImVec2(window_pos.x + window_size.x * 0.5f, window_pos.y + window_size.y * 0.5f); + if (draw_bg) + ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList()->AddCircle(window_center, window_size.x * 0.6f, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200), 0, 10 + 4); + if (draw_fg) + ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList()->AddCircle(window_center, window_size.y * 0.6f, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 200), 0, 10); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + // Demonstrate out-of-order rendering via channels splitting + // We use functions in ImDrawList as each draw list contains a convenience splitter, + // but you can also instantiate your own ImDrawListSplitter if you need to nest them. + if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Draw Channels")) + { + ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList(); + { + ImGui::Text("Blue shape is drawn first: appears in back"); + ImGui::Text("Red shape is drawn after: appears in front"); + ImVec2 p0 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(p0.x, p0.y), ImVec2(p0.x + 50, p0.y + 50), IM_COL32(0, 0, 255, 255)); // Blue + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(p0.x + 25, p0.y + 25), ImVec2(p0.x + 75, p0.y + 75), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); // Red + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(75, 75)); + } + ImGui::Separator(); + { + ImGui::Text("Blue shape is drawn first, into channel 1: appears in front"); + ImGui::Text("Red shape is drawn after, into channel 0: appears in back"); + ImVec2 p1 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos(); + + // Create 2 channels and draw a Blue shape THEN a Red shape. + // You can create any number of channels. Tables API use 1 channel per column in order to better batch draw calls. + draw_list->ChannelsSplit(2); + draw_list->ChannelsSetCurrent(1); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(p1.x, p1.y), ImVec2(p1.x + 50, p1.y + 50), IM_COL32(0, 0, 255, 255)); // Blue + draw_list->ChannelsSetCurrent(0); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(p1.x + 25, p1.y + 25), ImVec2(p1.x + 75, p1.y + 75), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); // Red + + // Flatten/reorder channels. Red shape is in channel 0 and it appears below the Blue shape in channel 1. + // This works by copying draw indices only (vertices are not copied). + draw_list->ChannelsMerge(); + ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(75, 75)); + ImGui::Text("After reordering, contents of channel 0 appears below channel 1."); + } + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + + ImGui::End(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Example App: Documents Handling / ShowExampleAppDocuments() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Simplified structure to mimic a Document model +struct MyDocument +{ + const char* Name; // Document title + bool Open; // Set when open (we keep an array of all available documents to simplify demo code!) + bool OpenPrev; // Copy of Open from last update. + bool Dirty; // Set when the document has been modified + bool WantClose; // Set when the document + ImVec4 Color; // An arbitrary variable associated to the document + + MyDocument(const char* name, bool open = true, const ImVec4& color = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f)) + { + Name = name; + Open = OpenPrev = open; + Dirty = false; + WantClose = false; + Color = color; + } + void DoOpen() { Open = true; } + void DoQueueClose() { WantClose = true; } + void DoForceClose() { Open = false; Dirty = false; } + void DoSave() { Dirty = false; } + + // Display placeholder contents for the Document + static void DisplayContents(MyDocument* doc) + { + ImGui::PushID(doc); + ImGui::Text("Document \"%s\"", doc->Name); + ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, doc->Color); + ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua."); + ImGui::PopStyleColor(); + if (ImGui::Button("Modify", ImVec2(100, 0))) + doc->Dirty = true; + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Save", ImVec2(100, 0))) + doc->DoSave(); + ImGui::ColorEdit3("color", &doc->Color.x); // Useful to test drag and drop and hold-dragged-to-open-tab behavior. + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + // Display context menu for the Document + static void DisplayContextMenu(MyDocument* doc) + { + if (!ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) + return; + + char buf[256]; + sprintf(buf, "Save %s", doc->Name); + if (ImGui::MenuItem(buf, "CTRL+S", false, doc->Open)) + doc->DoSave(); + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close", "CTRL+W", false, doc->Open)) + doc->DoQueueClose(); + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } +}; + +struct ExampleAppDocuments +{ + ImVector Documents; + + ExampleAppDocuments() + { + Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Lettuce", true, ImVec4(0.4f, 0.8f, 0.4f, 1.0f))); + Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Eggplant", true, ImVec4(0.8f, 0.5f, 1.0f, 1.0f))); + Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Carrot", true, ImVec4(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.5f, 1.0f))); + Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Tomato", false, ImVec4(1.0f, 0.3f, 0.4f, 1.0f))); + Documents.push_back(MyDocument("A Rather Long Title", false)); + Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Some Document", false)); + } +}; + +// [Optional] Notify the system of Tabs/Windows closure that happened outside the regular tab interface. +// If a tab has been closed programmatically (aka closed from another source such as the Checkbox() in the demo, +// as opposed to clicking on the regular tab closing button) and stops being submitted, it will take a frame for +// the tab bar to notice its absence. During this frame there will be a gap in the tab bar, and if the tab that has +// disappeared was the selected one, the tab bar will report no selected tab during the frame. This will effectively +// give the impression of a flicker for one frame. +// We call SetTabItemClosed() to manually notify the Tab Bar or Docking system of removed tabs to avoid this glitch. +// Note that this completely optional, and only affect tab bars with the ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable flag. +static void NotifyOfDocumentsClosedElsewhere(ExampleAppDocuments& app) +{ + for (MyDocument& doc : app.Documents) + { + if (!doc.Open && doc.OpenPrev) + ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(doc.Name); + doc.OpenPrev = doc.Open; + } +} + +void ShowExampleAppDocuments(bool* p_open) +{ + static ExampleAppDocuments app; + + // Options + static bool opt_reorderable = true; + static ImGuiTabBarFlags opt_fitting_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_; + + bool window_contents_visible = ImGui::Begin("Example: Documents", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + if (!window_contents_visible) + { + ImGui::End(); + return; + } + + // Menu + if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar()) + { + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File")) + { + int open_count = 0; + for (MyDocument& doc : app.Documents) + open_count += doc.Open ? 1 : 0; + + if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Open", open_count < app.Documents.Size)) + { + for (MyDocument& doc : app.Documents) + if (!doc.Open && ImGui::MenuItem(doc.Name)) + doc.DoOpen(); + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close All Documents", NULL, false, open_count > 0)) + for (MyDocument& doc : app.Documents) + doc.DoQueueClose(); + if (ImGui::MenuItem("Exit", "Ctrl+F4") && p_open) + *p_open = false; + ImGui::EndMenu(); + } + ImGui::EndMenuBar(); + } + + // [Debug] List documents with one checkbox for each + for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++) + { + MyDocument& doc = app.Documents[doc_n]; + if (doc_n > 0) + ImGui::SameLine(); + ImGui::PushID(&doc); + if (ImGui::Checkbox(doc.Name, &doc.Open)) + if (!doc.Open) + doc.DoForceClose(); + ImGui::PopID(); + } + + ImGui::Separator(); + + // About the ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument / ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument flags. + // They have multiple effects: + // - Display a dot next to the title. + // - Tab is selected when clicking the X close button. + // - Closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). + // Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar. + // We need to assume closure by default otherwise waiting for "lack of submission" on the next frame would leave an empty + // hole for one-frame, both in the tab-bar and in tab-contents when closing a tab/window. + // The rarely used SetTabItemClosed() function is a way to notify of programmatic closure to avoid the one-frame hole. + + // Submit Tab Bar and Tabs + { + ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = (opt_fitting_flags) | (opt_reorderable ? ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable : 0); + if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##tabs", tab_bar_flags)) + { + if (opt_reorderable) + NotifyOfDocumentsClosedElsewhere(app); + + // [DEBUG] Stress tests + //if ((ImGui::GetFrameCount() % 30) == 0) docs[1].Open ^= 1; // [DEBUG] Automatically show/hide a tab. Test various interactions e.g. dragging with this on. + //if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) ImGui::SetTabItemSelected(docs[1].Name); // [DEBUG] Test SetTabItemSelected(), probably not very useful as-is anyway.. + + // Submit Tabs + for (MyDocument& doc : app.Documents) + { + if (!doc.Open) + continue; + + ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_flags = (doc.Dirty ? ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument : 0); + bool visible = ImGui::BeginTabItem(doc.Name, &doc.Open, tab_flags); + + // Cancel attempt to close when unsaved add to save queue so we can display a popup. + if (!doc.Open && doc.Dirty) + { + doc.Open = true; + doc.DoQueueClose(); + } + + MyDocument::DisplayContextMenu(&doc); + if (visible) + { + MyDocument::DisplayContents(&doc); + ImGui::EndTabItem(); + } + } + + ImGui::EndTabBar(); + } + } + + // Update closing queue + static ImVector close_queue; + if (close_queue.empty()) + { + // Close queue is locked once we started a popup + for (MyDocument& doc : app.Documents) + if (doc.WantClose) + { + doc.WantClose = false; + close_queue.push_back(&doc); + } + } + + // Display closing confirmation UI + if (!close_queue.empty()) + { + int close_queue_unsaved_documents = 0; + for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++) + if (close_queue[n]->Dirty) + close_queue_unsaved_documents++; + + if (close_queue_unsaved_documents == 0) + { + // Close documents when all are unsaved + for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++) + close_queue[n]->DoForceClose(); + close_queue.clear(); + } + else + { + if (!ImGui::IsPopupOpen("Save?")) + ImGui::OpenPopup("Save?"); + if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Save?", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) + { + ImGui::Text("Save change to the following items?"); + float item_height = ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing(); + if (ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGui::GetID("frame"), ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 6.25f * item_height))) + { + for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++) + if (close_queue[n]->Dirty) + ImGui::Text("%s", close_queue[n]->Name); + } + ImGui::EndChildFrame(); + + ImVec2 button_size(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 7.0f, 0.0f); + if (ImGui::Button("Yes", button_size)) + { + for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++) + { + if (close_queue[n]->Dirty) + close_queue[n]->DoSave(); + close_queue[n]->DoForceClose(); + } + close_queue.clear(); + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("No", button_size)) + { + for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++) + close_queue[n]->DoForceClose(); + close_queue.clear(); + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + } + ImGui::SameLine(); + if (ImGui::Button("Cancel", button_size)) + { + close_queue.clear(); + ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); + } + ImGui::EndPopup(); + } + } + } + + ImGui::End(); +} + +// End of Demo code +#else + +void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool*) {} +void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool*) {} +void ImGui::ShowUserGuide() {} +void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle*) {} + +#endif + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_draw.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_draw.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec6f523 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_draw.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,5295 @@ +// dear imgui, v1.89.9 +// (drawing and font code) + +/* + +Index of this file: + +// [SECTION] STB libraries implementation +// [SECTION] Style functions +// [SECTION] ImDrawList +// [SECTION] ImDrawList Shadow Primitives +// [SECTION] ImDrawListSplitter +// [SECTION] ImDrawData +// [SECTION] Helpers ShadeVertsXXX functions +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig +// [SECTION] ImFontConfig +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas glyph ranges helpers +// [SECTION] ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder +// [SECTION] ImFont +// [SECTION] ImGui Internal Render Helpers +// [SECTION] Decompression code +// [SECTION] Default font data (ProggyClean.ttf) + +*/ + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS) +#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS +#endif + +#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#endif + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE +#include "imgui_internal.h" +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE +#include "imgui_freetype.h" +#endif + +#include // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf + +// Visual Studio warnings +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant +#pragma warning (disable: 4505) // unreferenced local function has been removed (stb stuff) +#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen +#pragma warning (disable: 26451) // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2). +#pragma warning (disable: 26812) // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). [MSVC Static Analyzer) +#endif + +// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything +#if defined(__clang__) +#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option") +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great! +#endif +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning: use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants ok. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wglobal-constructors" // warning: declaration requires a global destructor // similar to above, not sure what the exact difference is. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning: zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0 +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wcomma" // warning: possible misuse of comma operator here +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-id-macro" // warning: macro name is a reserved identifier +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-identifier" // warning: identifier '_Xxx' is reserved because it starts with '_' followed by a capital letter +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wconversion" // warning: conversion to 'xxxx' from 'xxxx' may alter its value +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wstack-protector" // warning: stack protector not protecting local variables: variable length buffer +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead +#endif + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] STB libraries implementation (for stb_truetype and stb_rect_pack) +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Compile time options: +//#define IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE ImStb +//#define IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME "my_folder/stb_truetype.h" +//#define IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME "my_folder/stb_rect_pack.h" +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION +//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION + +#ifdef IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE +namespace IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE +{ +#endif + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (push) +#pragma warning (disable: 4456) // declaration of 'xx' hides previous local declaration +#pragma warning (disable: 6011) // (stb_rectpack) Dereferencing NULL pointer 'cur->next'. +#pragma warning (disable: 6385) // (stb_truetype) Reading invalid data from 'buffer': the readable size is '_Old_3`kernel_width' bytes, but '3' bytes may be read. +#pragma warning (disable: 28182) // (stb_rectpack) Dereferencing NULL pointer. 'cur' contains the same NULL value as 'cur->next' did. +#endif + +#if defined(__clang__) +#pragma clang diagnostic push +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-prototypes" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-fallthrough" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual" // warning: cast from 'const xxxx *' to 'xxx *' drops const qualifier +#endif + +#if defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic push +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wtype-limits" // warning: comparison is always true due to limited range of data type [-Wtype-limits] +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual" // warning: cast from type 'const xxxx *' to type 'xxxx *' casts away qualifiers +#endif + +#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION // in case the user already have an implementation in the _same_ compilation unit (e.g. unity builds) +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION // in case the user already have an implementation in another compilation unit +#define STBRP_STATIC +#define STBRP_ASSERT(x) do { IM_ASSERT(x); } while (0) +#define STBRP_SORT ImQsort +#define STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME +#include IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME +#else +#include "imstb_rectpack.h" +#endif +#endif + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE +#ifndef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION // in case the user already have an implementation in the _same_ compilation unit (e.g. unity builds) +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION // in case the user already have an implementation in another compilation unit +#define STBTT_malloc(x,u) ((void)(u), IM_ALLOC(x)) +#define STBTT_free(x,u) ((void)(u), IM_FREE(x)) +#define STBTT_assert(x) do { IM_ASSERT(x); } while(0) +#define STBTT_fmod(x,y) ImFmod(x,y) +#define STBTT_sqrt(x) ImSqrt(x) +#define STBTT_pow(x,y) ImPow(x,y) +#define STBTT_fabs(x) ImFabs(x) +#define STBTT_ifloor(x) ((int)ImFloorSigned(x)) +#define STBTT_iceil(x) ((int)ImCeil(x)) +#define STBTT_STATIC +#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION +#else +#define STBTT_DEF extern +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME +#include IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME +#else +#include "imstb_truetype.h" +#endif +#endif +#endif // IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE + +#if defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic pop +#endif + +#if defined(__clang__) +#pragma clang diagnostic pop +#endif + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) +#pragma warning (pop) +#endif + +#ifdef IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE +} // namespace ImStb +using namespace IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE; +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Style functions +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle* dst) +{ + ImGuiStyle* style = dst ? dst : &ImGui::GetStyle(); + ImVec4* colors = style->Colors; + + colors[ImGuiCol_Text] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled] = ImVec4(0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] = ImVec4(0.06f, 0.06f, 0.06f, 0.94f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg] = ImVec4(0.08f, 0.08f, 0.08f, 0.94f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Border] = ImVec4(0.43f, 0.43f, 0.50f, 0.50f); + colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg] = ImVec4(0.16f, 0.29f, 0.48f, 0.54f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg] = ImVec4(0.04f, 0.04f, 0.04f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive] = ImVec4(0.16f, 0.29f, 0.48f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.51f); + colors[ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg] = ImVec4(0.14f, 0.14f, 0.14f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg] = ImVec4(0.02f, 0.02f, 0.02f, 0.53f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab] = ImVec4(0.31f, 0.31f, 0.31f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered] = ImVec4(0.41f, 0.41f, 0.41f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive] = ImVec4(0.51f, 0.51f, 0.51f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_CheckMark] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrab] = ImVec4(0.24f, 0.52f, 0.88f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Button] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonActive] = ImVec4(0.06f, 0.53f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Header] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.31f); + colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Separator] = colors[ImGuiCol_Border]; + colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered] = ImVec4(0.10f, 0.40f, 0.75f, 0.78f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive] = ImVec4(0.10f, 0.40f, 0.75f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.20f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Tab] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]; + colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines] = ImVec4(0.61f, 0.61f, 0.61f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered] = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.43f, 0.35f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered] = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.60f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg] = ImVec4(0.19f, 0.19f, 0.20f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong] = ImVec4(0.31f, 0.31f, 0.35f, 1.00f); // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here + colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight] = ImVec4(0.23f, 0.23f, 0.25f, 1.00f); // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here + colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.06f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.35f); + colors[ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 0.00f, 0.90f); + colors[ImGuiCol_NavHighlight] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.70f); + colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg] = ImVec4(0.80f, 0.80f, 0.80f, 0.20f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] = ImVec4(0.80f, 0.80f, 0.80f, 0.35f); + colors[ImGuiCol_WindowShadow] = ImVec4(0.08f, 0.08f, 0.08f, 0.35f); +} + +void ImGui::StyleColorsClassic(ImGuiStyle* dst) +{ + ImGuiStyle* style = dst ? dst : &ImGui::GetStyle(); + ImVec4* colors = style->Colors; + + colors[ImGuiCol_Text] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.90f, 0.90f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled] = ImVec4(0.60f, 0.60f, 0.60f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.85f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg] = ImVec4(0.11f, 0.11f, 0.14f, 0.92f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Border] = ImVec4(0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f); + colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg] = ImVec4(0.43f, 0.43f, 0.43f, 0.39f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered] = ImVec4(0.47f, 0.47f, 0.69f, 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive] = ImVec4(0.42f, 0.41f, 0.64f, 0.69f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg] = ImVec4(0.27f, 0.27f, 0.54f, 0.83f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive] = ImVec4(0.32f, 0.32f, 0.63f, 0.87f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed] = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.80f, 0.20f); + colors[ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg] = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.55f, 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg] = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.25f, 0.30f, 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab] = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.80f, 0.30f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered] = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.80f, 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive] = ImVec4(0.41f, 0.39f, 0.80f, 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_CheckMark] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.90f, 0.90f, 0.50f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrab] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.30f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive] = ImVec4(0.41f, 0.39f, 0.80f, 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Button] = ImVec4(0.35f, 0.40f, 0.61f, 0.62f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered] = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.48f, 0.71f, 0.79f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonActive] = ImVec4(0.46f, 0.54f, 0.80f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Header] = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.90f, 0.45f); + colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered] = ImVec4(0.45f, 0.45f, 0.90f, 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive] = ImVec4(0.53f, 0.53f, 0.87f, 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Separator] = ImVec4(0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f, 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered] = ImVec4(0.60f, 0.60f, 0.70f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive] = ImVec4(0.70f, 0.70f, 0.90f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.10f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered] = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.82f, 1.00f, 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive] = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.82f, 1.00f, 0.90f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Tab] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]; + colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered] = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.60f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg] = ImVec4(0.27f, 0.27f, 0.38f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong] = ImVec4(0.31f, 0.31f, 0.45f, 1.00f); // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here + colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.26f, 0.28f, 1.00f); // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here + colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.07f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 1.00f, 0.35f); + colors[ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 0.00f, 0.90f); + colors[ImGuiCol_NavHighlight] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]; + colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.70f); + colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg] = ImVec4(0.80f, 0.80f, 0.80f, 0.20f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 0.35f); + colors[ImGuiCol_WindowShadow] = ImVec4(0.08f, 0.08f, 0.08f, 0.35f); +} + +// Those light colors are better suited with a thicker font than the default one + FrameBorder +void ImGui::StyleColorsLight(ImGuiStyle* dst) +{ + ImGuiStyle* style = dst ? dst : &ImGui::GetStyle(); + ImVec4* colors = style->Colors; + + colors[ImGuiCol_Text] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled] = ImVec4(0.60f, 0.60f, 0.60f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] = ImVec4(0.94f, 0.94f, 0.94f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.98f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Border] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.30f); + colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg] = ImVec4(0.96f, 0.96f, 0.96f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive] = ImVec4(0.82f, 0.82f, 0.82f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed] = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.51f); + colors[ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg] = ImVec4(0.86f, 0.86f, 0.86f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg] = ImVec4(0.98f, 0.98f, 0.98f, 0.53f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab] = ImVec4(0.69f, 0.69f, 0.69f, 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered] = ImVec4(0.49f, 0.49f, 0.49f, 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive] = ImVec4(0.49f, 0.49f, 0.49f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_CheckMark] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrab] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.78f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive] = ImVec4(0.46f, 0.54f, 0.80f, 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Button] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonActive] = ImVec4(0.06f, 0.53f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Header] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.31f); + colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Separator] = ImVec4(0.39f, 0.39f, 0.39f, 0.62f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered] = ImVec4(0.14f, 0.44f, 0.80f, 0.78f); + colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive] = ImVec4(0.14f, 0.44f, 0.80f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip] = ImVec4(0.35f, 0.35f, 0.35f, 0.17f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f); + colors[ImGuiCol_Tab] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.90f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]; + colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive] = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines] = ImVec4(0.39f, 0.39f, 0.39f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered] = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.43f, 0.35f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram] = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered] = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.45f, 0.00f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg] = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.87f, 0.98f, 1.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong] = ImVec4(0.57f, 0.57f, 0.64f, 1.00f); // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here + colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight] = ImVec4(0.68f, 0.68f, 0.74f, 1.00f); // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here + colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg] = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt] = ImVec4(0.30f, 0.30f, 0.30f, 0.09f); + colors[ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.35f); + colors[ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget] = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f); + colors[ImGuiCol_NavHighlight] = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]; + colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight] = ImVec4(0.70f, 0.70f, 0.70f, 0.70f); + colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg] = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f); + colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 0.35f); + colors[ImGuiCol_WindowShadow] = ImVec4(0.08f, 0.08f, 0.08f, 0.35f); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig::SetupDefaults() +{ + TexCornerSize = 16; + TexEdgeSize = 1; + TexFalloffPower = 4.8f; + TexDistanceFieldOffset = 3.8f; + TexBlur = true; +} + +int ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig::CalcConvexTexWidth() const +{ + // We have to pad the texture enough that we don't go off the edges when we expand the corner triangles + return (int)((TexCornerSize / ImCos(IM_PI * 0.25f)) + (GetConvexTexPadding() * 2)); +} + +int ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig::CalcConvexTexHeight() const +{ + return CalcConvexTexWidth(); // Same value +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImDrawList +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImDrawListSharedData::ImDrawListSharedData() +{ + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(ArcFastVtx); i++) + { + const float a = ((float)i * 2 * IM_PI) / (float)IM_ARRAYSIZE(ArcFastVtx); + ArcFastVtx[i] = ImVec2(ImCos(a), ImSin(a)); + } + ArcFastRadiusCutoff = IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_R(IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, CircleSegmentMaxError); +} + +void ImDrawListSharedData::SetCircleTessellationMaxError(float max_error) +{ + if (CircleSegmentMaxError == max_error) + return; + + IM_ASSERT(max_error > 0.0f); + CircleSegmentMaxError = max_error; + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(CircleSegmentCounts); i++) + { + const float radius = (float)i; + CircleSegmentCounts[i] = (ImU8)((i > 0) ? IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC(radius, CircleSegmentMaxError) : IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX); + } + ArcFastRadiusCutoff = IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_R(IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, CircleSegmentMaxError); +} + +// Initialize before use in a new frame. We always have a command ready in the buffer. +void ImDrawList::_ResetForNewFrame() +{ + // Verify that the ImDrawCmd fields we want to memcmp() are contiguous in memory. + IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, ClipRect) == 0); + IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, TextureId) == sizeof(ImVec4)); + IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) == sizeof(ImVec4) + sizeof(ImTextureID)); + if (_Splitter._Count > 1) + _Splitter.Merge(this); + + CmdBuffer.resize(0); + IdxBuffer.resize(0); + VtxBuffer.resize(0); + Flags = _Data->InitialFlags; + memset(&_CmdHeader, 0, sizeof(_CmdHeader)); + _VtxCurrentIdx = 0; + _VtxWritePtr = NULL; + _IdxWritePtr = NULL; + _ClipRectStack.resize(0); + _TextureIdStack.resize(0); + _Path.resize(0); + _Splitter.Clear(); + CmdBuffer.push_back(ImDrawCmd()); + _FringeScale = 1.0f; +} + +void ImDrawList::_ClearFreeMemory() +{ + CmdBuffer.clear(); + IdxBuffer.clear(); + VtxBuffer.clear(); + Flags = ImDrawListFlags_None; + _VtxCurrentIdx = 0; + _VtxWritePtr = NULL; + _IdxWritePtr = NULL; + _ClipRectStack.clear(); + _TextureIdStack.clear(); + _Path.clear(); + _Splitter.ClearFreeMemory(); +} + +ImDrawList* ImDrawList::CloneOutput() const +{ + ImDrawList* dst = IM_NEW(ImDrawList(_Data)); + dst->CmdBuffer = CmdBuffer; + dst->IdxBuffer = IdxBuffer; + dst->VtxBuffer = VtxBuffer; + dst->Flags = Flags; + return dst; +} + +void ImDrawList::AddDrawCmd() +{ + ImDrawCmd draw_cmd; + draw_cmd.ClipRect = _CmdHeader.ClipRect; // Same as calling ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy() + draw_cmd.TextureId = _CmdHeader.TextureId; + draw_cmd.VtxOffset = _CmdHeader.VtxOffset; + draw_cmd.IdxOffset = IdxBuffer.Size; + + IM_ASSERT(draw_cmd.ClipRect.x <= draw_cmd.ClipRect.z && draw_cmd.ClipRect.y <= draw_cmd.ClipRect.w); + CmdBuffer.push_back(draw_cmd); +} + +// Pop trailing draw command (used before merging or presenting to user) +// Note that this leaves the ImDrawList in a state unfit for further commands, as most code assume that CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL +void ImDrawList::_PopUnusedDrawCmd() +{ + while (CmdBuffer.Size > 0) + { + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0 || curr_cmd->UserCallback != NULL) + return;// break; + CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + } +} + +void ImDrawList::AddCallback(ImDrawCallback callback, void* callback_data) +{ + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0); + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL); + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0) + { + AddDrawCmd(); + curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + } + curr_cmd->UserCallback = callback; + curr_cmd->UserCallbackData = callback_data; + + AddDrawCmd(); // Force a new command after us (see comment below) +} + +// Compare ClipRect, TextureId and VtxOffset with a single memcmp() +#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize (IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) + sizeof(unsigned int)) +#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(CMD_LHS, CMD_RHS) (memcmp(CMD_LHS, CMD_RHS, ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize)) // Compare ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset +#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy(CMD_DST, CMD_SRC) (memcpy(CMD_DST, CMD_SRC, ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize)) // Copy ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset +#define ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(CMD_0, CMD_1) (CMD_0->IdxOffset + CMD_0->ElemCount == CMD_1->IdxOffset) + +// Try to merge two last draw commands +void ImDrawList::_TryMergeDrawCmds() +{ + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0); + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + ImDrawCmd* prev_cmd = curr_cmd - 1; + if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(curr_cmd, prev_cmd) == 0 && ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(prev_cmd, curr_cmd) && curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL && prev_cmd->UserCallback == NULL) + { + prev_cmd->ElemCount += curr_cmd->ElemCount; + CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + } +} + +// Our scheme may appears a bit unusual, basically we want the most-common calls AddLine AddRect etc. to not have to perform any check so we always have a command ready in the stack. +// The cost of figuring out if a new command has to be added or if we can merge is paid in those Update** functions only. +void ImDrawList::_OnChangedClipRect() +{ + // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0); + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0 && memcmp(&curr_cmd->ClipRect, &_CmdHeader.ClipRect, sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0) + { + AddDrawCmd(); + return; + } + IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL); + + // Try to merge with previous command if it matches, else use current command + ImDrawCmd* prev_cmd = curr_cmd - 1; + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0 && CmdBuffer.Size > 1 && ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(&_CmdHeader, prev_cmd) == 0 && ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(prev_cmd, curr_cmd) && prev_cmd->UserCallback == NULL) + { + CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + return; + } + + curr_cmd->ClipRect = _CmdHeader.ClipRect; +} + +void ImDrawList::_OnChangedTextureID() +{ + // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0); + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0 && curr_cmd->TextureId != _CmdHeader.TextureId) + { + AddDrawCmd(); + return; + } + IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL); + + // Try to merge with previous command if it matches, else use current command + ImDrawCmd* prev_cmd = curr_cmd - 1; + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0 && CmdBuffer.Size > 1 && ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(&_CmdHeader, prev_cmd) == 0 && ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(prev_cmd, curr_cmd) && prev_cmd->UserCallback == NULL) + { + CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + return; + } + + curr_cmd->TextureId = _CmdHeader.TextureId; +} + +void ImDrawList::_OnChangedVtxOffset() +{ + // We don't need to compare curr_cmd->VtxOffset != _CmdHeader.VtxOffset because we know it'll be different at the time we call this. + _VtxCurrentIdx = 0; + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0); + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + //IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->VtxOffset != _CmdHeader.VtxOffset); // See #3349 + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0) + { + AddDrawCmd(); + return; + } + IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL); + curr_cmd->VtxOffset = _CmdHeader.VtxOffset; +} + +int ImDrawList::_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(float radius) const +{ + // Automatic segment count + const int radius_idx = (int)(radius + 0.999999f); // ceil to never reduce accuracy + if (radius_idx >= 0 && radius_idx < IM_ARRAYSIZE(_Data->CircleSegmentCounts)) + return _Data->CircleSegmentCounts[radius_idx]; // Use cached value + else + return IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC(radius, _Data->CircleSegmentMaxError); +} + +// Render-level scissoring. This is passed down to your render function but not used for CPU-side coarse clipping. Prefer using higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() to affect logic (hit-testing and widget culling) +void ImDrawList::PushClipRect(const ImVec2& cr_min, const ImVec2& cr_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect) +{ + ImVec4 cr(cr_min.x, cr_min.y, cr_max.x, cr_max.y); + if (intersect_with_current_clip_rect) + { + ImVec4 current = _CmdHeader.ClipRect; + if (cr.x < current.x) cr.x = current.x; + if (cr.y < current.y) cr.y = current.y; + if (cr.z > current.z) cr.z = current.z; + if (cr.w > current.w) cr.w = current.w; + } + cr.z = ImMax(cr.x, cr.z); + cr.w = ImMax(cr.y, cr.w); + + _ClipRectStack.push_back(cr); + _CmdHeader.ClipRect = cr; + _OnChangedClipRect(); +} + +void ImDrawList::PushClipRectFullScreen() +{ + PushClipRect(ImVec2(_Data->ClipRectFullscreen.x, _Data->ClipRectFullscreen.y), ImVec2(_Data->ClipRectFullscreen.z, _Data->ClipRectFullscreen.w)); +} + +void ImDrawList::PopClipRect() +{ + _ClipRectStack.pop_back(); + _CmdHeader.ClipRect = (_ClipRectStack.Size == 0) ? _Data->ClipRectFullscreen : _ClipRectStack.Data[_ClipRectStack.Size - 1]; + _OnChangedClipRect(); +} + +void ImDrawList::PushTextureID(ImTextureID texture_id) +{ + _TextureIdStack.push_back(texture_id); + _CmdHeader.TextureId = texture_id; + _OnChangedTextureID(); +} + +void ImDrawList::PopTextureID() +{ + _TextureIdStack.pop_back(); + _CmdHeader.TextureId = (_TextureIdStack.Size == 0) ? (ImTextureID)NULL : _TextureIdStack.Data[_TextureIdStack.Size - 1]; + _OnChangedTextureID(); +} + +// Reserve space for a number of vertices and indices. +// You must finish filling your reserved data before calling PrimReserve() again, as it may reallocate or +// submit the intermediate results. PrimUnreserve() can be used to release unused allocations. +void ImDrawList::PrimReserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count) +{ + // Large mesh support (when enabled) + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(idx_count >= 0 && vtx_count >= 0); + if (sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 && (_VtxCurrentIdx + vtx_count >= (1 << 16)) && (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset)) + { + // FIXME: In theory we should be testing that vtx_count <64k here. + // In practice, RenderText() relies on reserving ahead for a worst case scenario so it is currently useful for us + // to not make that check until we rework the text functions to handle clipping and large horizontal lines better. + _CmdHeader.VtxOffset = VtxBuffer.Size; + _OnChangedVtxOffset(); + } + + ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + draw_cmd->ElemCount += idx_count; + + int vtx_buffer_old_size = VtxBuffer.Size; + VtxBuffer.resize(vtx_buffer_old_size + vtx_count); + _VtxWritePtr = VtxBuffer.Data + vtx_buffer_old_size; + + int idx_buffer_old_size = IdxBuffer.Size; + IdxBuffer.resize(idx_buffer_old_size + idx_count); + _IdxWritePtr = IdxBuffer.Data + idx_buffer_old_size; +} + +// Release the a number of reserved vertices/indices from the end of the last reservation made with PrimReserve(). +void ImDrawList::PrimUnreserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count) +{ + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(idx_count >= 0 && vtx_count >= 0); + + ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + draw_cmd->ElemCount -= idx_count; + VtxBuffer.shrink(VtxBuffer.Size - vtx_count); + IdxBuffer.shrink(IdxBuffer.Size - idx_count); +} + +// Fully unrolled with inline call to keep our debug builds decently fast. +void ImDrawList::PrimRect(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& c, ImU32 col) +{ + ImVec2 b(c.x, a.y), d(a.x, c.y), uv(_Data->TexUvWhitePixel); + ImDrawIdx idx = (ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx; + _IdxWritePtr[0] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); + _IdxWritePtr[3] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+3); + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = a; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = b; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = c; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = d; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr += 4; + _VtxCurrentIdx += 4; + _IdxWritePtr += 6; +} + +void ImDrawList::PrimRectUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_c, ImU32 col) +{ + ImVec2 b(c.x, a.y), d(a.x, c.y), uv_b(uv_c.x, uv_a.y), uv_d(uv_a.x, uv_c.y); + ImDrawIdx idx = (ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx; + _IdxWritePtr[0] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); + _IdxWritePtr[3] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+3); + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = a; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv_a; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = b; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv_b; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = c; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = uv_c; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = d; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = uv_d; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr += 4; + _VtxCurrentIdx += 4; + _IdxWritePtr += 6; +} + +void ImDrawList::PrimQuadUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& d, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, const ImVec2& uv_c, const ImVec2& uv_d, ImU32 col) +{ + ImDrawIdx idx = (ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx; + _IdxWritePtr[0] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); + _IdxWritePtr[3] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+3); + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = a; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv_a; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = b; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv_b; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = c; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = uv_c; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = d; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = uv_d; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr += 4; + _VtxCurrentIdx += 4; + _IdxWritePtr += 6; +} + +// On AddPolyline() and AddConvexPolyFilled() we intentionally avoid using ImVec2 and superfluous function calls to optimize debug/non-inlined builds. +// - Those macros expects l-values and need to be used as their own statement. +// - Those macros are intentionally not surrounded by the 'do {} while (0)' idiom because even that translates to runtime with debug compilers. +#define IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(VX,VY) { float d2 = VX*VX + VY*VY; if (d2 > 0.0f) { float inv_len = ImRsqrt(d2); VX *= inv_len; VY *= inv_len; } } (void)0 +#define IM_FIXNORMAL2F_MAX_INVLEN2 100.0f // 500.0f (see #4053, #3366) +#define IM_FIXNORMAL2F(VX,VY) { float d2 = VX*VX + VY*VY; if (d2 > 0.000001f) { float inv_len2 = 1.0f / d2; if (inv_len2 > IM_FIXNORMAL2F_MAX_INVLEN2) inv_len2 = IM_FIXNORMAL2F_MAX_INVLEN2; VX *= inv_len2; VY *= inv_len2; } } (void)0 + +// TODO: Thickness anti-aliased lines cap are missing their AA fringe. +// We avoid using the ImVec2 math operators here to reduce cost to a minimum for debug/non-inlined builds. +void ImDrawList::AddPolyline(const ImVec2* points, const int points_count, ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness) +{ + if (points_count < 2 || (col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + const bool closed = (flags & ImDrawFlags_Closed) != 0; + const ImVec2 opaque_uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel; + const int count = closed ? points_count : points_count - 1; // The number of line segments we need to draw + const bool thick_line = (thickness > _FringeScale); + + if (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines) + { + // Anti-aliased stroke + const float AA_SIZE = _FringeScale; + const ImU32 col_trans = col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK; + + // Thicknesses <1.0 should behave like thickness 1.0 + thickness = ImMax(thickness, 1.0f); + const int integer_thickness = (int)thickness; + const float fractional_thickness = thickness - integer_thickness; + + // Do we want to draw this line using a texture? + // - For now, only draw integer-width lines using textures to avoid issues with the way scaling occurs, could be improved. + // - If AA_SIZE is not 1.0f we cannot use the texture path. + const bool use_texture = (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex) && (integer_thickness < IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX) && (fractional_thickness <= 0.00001f) && (AA_SIZE == 1.0f); + + // We should never hit this, because NewFrame() doesn't set ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex unless ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines is off + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(!use_texture || !(_Data->Font->ContainerAtlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines)); + + const int idx_count = use_texture ? (count * 6) : (thick_line ? count * 18 : count * 12); + const int vtx_count = use_texture ? (points_count * 2) : (thick_line ? points_count * 4 : points_count * 3); + PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count); + + // Temporary buffer + // The first items are normals at each line point, then after that there are either 2 or 4 temp points for each line point + _Data->TempBuffer.reserve_discard(points_count * ((use_texture || !thick_line) ? 3 : 5)); + ImVec2* temp_normals = _Data->TempBuffer.Data; + ImVec2* temp_points = temp_normals + points_count; + + // Calculate normals (tangents) for each line segment + for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++) + { + const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : i1 + 1; + float dx = points[i2].x - points[i1].x; + float dy = points[i2].y - points[i1].y; + IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy); + temp_normals[i1].x = dy; + temp_normals[i1].y = -dx; + } + if (!closed) + temp_normals[points_count - 1] = temp_normals[points_count - 2]; + + // If we are drawing a one-pixel-wide line without a texture, or a textured line of any width, we only need 2 or 3 vertices per point + if (use_texture || !thick_line) + { + // [PATH 1] Texture-based lines (thick or non-thick) + // [PATH 2] Non texture-based lines (non-thick) + + // The width of the geometry we need to draw - this is essentially pixels for the line itself, plus "one pixel" for AA. + // - In the texture-based path, we don't use AA_SIZE here because the +1 is tied to the generated texture + // (see ImFontAtlasBuildRenderLinesTexData() function), and so alternate values won't work without changes to that code. + // - In the non texture-based paths, we would allow AA_SIZE to potentially be != 1.0f with a patch (e.g. fringe_scale patch to + // allow scaling geometry while preserving one-screen-pixel AA fringe). + const float half_draw_size = use_texture ? ((thickness * 0.5f) + 1) : AA_SIZE; + + // If line is not closed, the first and last points need to be generated differently as there are no normals to blend + if (!closed) + { + temp_points[0] = points[0] + temp_normals[0] * half_draw_size; + temp_points[1] = points[0] - temp_normals[0] * half_draw_size; + temp_points[(points_count-1)*2+0] = points[points_count-1] + temp_normals[points_count-1] * half_draw_size; + temp_points[(points_count-1)*2+1] = points[points_count-1] - temp_normals[points_count-1] * half_draw_size; + } + + // Generate the indices to form a number of triangles for each line segment, and the vertices for the line edges + // This takes points n and n+1 and writes into n+1, with the first point in a closed line being generated from the final one (as n+1 wraps) + // FIXME-OPT: Merge the different loops, possibly remove the temporary buffer. + unsigned int idx1 = _VtxCurrentIdx; // Vertex index for start of line segment + for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++) // i1 is the first point of the line segment + { + const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : i1 + 1; // i2 is the second point of the line segment + const unsigned int idx2 = ((i1 + 1) == points_count) ? _VtxCurrentIdx : (idx1 + (use_texture ? 2 : 3)); // Vertex index for end of segment + + // Average normals + float dm_x = (temp_normals[i1].x + temp_normals[i2].x) * 0.5f; + float dm_y = (temp_normals[i1].y + temp_normals[i2].y) * 0.5f; + IM_FIXNORMAL2F(dm_x, dm_y); + dm_x *= half_draw_size; // dm_x, dm_y are offset to the outer edge of the AA area + dm_y *= half_draw_size; + + // Add temporary vertexes for the outer edges + ImVec2* out_vtx = &temp_points[i2 * 2]; + out_vtx[0].x = points[i2].x + dm_x; + out_vtx[0].y = points[i2].y + dm_y; + out_vtx[1].x = points[i2].x - dm_x; + out_vtx[1].y = points[i2].y - dm_y; + + if (use_texture) + { + // Add indices for two triangles + _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); // Right tri + _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); // Left tri + _IdxWritePtr += 6; + } + else + { + // Add indexes for four triangles + _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); // Right tri 1 + _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); // Right tri 2 + _IdxWritePtr[6] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[7] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[8] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); // Left tri 1 + _IdxWritePtr[9] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[10] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[11] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); // Left tri 2 + _IdxWritePtr += 12; + } + + idx1 = idx2; + } + + // Add vertexes for each point on the line + if (use_texture) + { + // If we're using textures we only need to emit the left/right edge vertices + ImVec4 tex_uvs = _Data->TexUvLines[integer_thickness]; + /*if (fractional_thickness != 0.0f) // Currently always zero when use_texture==false! + { + const ImVec4 tex_uvs_1 = _Data->TexUvLines[integer_thickness + 1]; + tex_uvs.x = tex_uvs.x + (tex_uvs_1.x - tex_uvs.x) * fractional_thickness; // inlined ImLerp() + tex_uvs.y = tex_uvs.y + (tex_uvs_1.y - tex_uvs.y) * fractional_thickness; + tex_uvs.z = tex_uvs.z + (tex_uvs_1.z - tex_uvs.z) * fractional_thickness; + tex_uvs.w = tex_uvs.w + (tex_uvs_1.w - tex_uvs.w) * fractional_thickness; + }*/ + ImVec2 tex_uv0(tex_uvs.x, tex_uvs.y); + ImVec2 tex_uv1(tex_uvs.z, tex_uvs.w); + for (int i = 0; i < points_count; i++) + { + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 0]; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = tex_uv0; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; // Left-side outer edge + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 1]; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = tex_uv1; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col; // Right-side outer edge + _VtxWritePtr += 2; + } + } + else + { + // If we're not using a texture, we need the center vertex as well + for (int i = 0; i < points_count; i++) + { + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = points[i]; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; // Center of line + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 0]; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col_trans; // Left-side outer edge + _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 1]; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col_trans; // Right-side outer edge + _VtxWritePtr += 3; + } + } + } + else + { + // [PATH 2] Non texture-based lines (thick): we need to draw the solid line core and thus require four vertices per point + const float half_inner_thickness = (thickness - AA_SIZE) * 0.5f; + + // If line is not closed, the first and last points need to be generated differently as there are no normals to blend + if (!closed) + { + const int points_last = points_count - 1; + temp_points[0] = points[0] + temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE); + temp_points[1] = points[0] + temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness); + temp_points[2] = points[0] - temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness); + temp_points[3] = points[0] - temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE); + temp_points[points_last * 4 + 0] = points[points_last] + temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE); + temp_points[points_last * 4 + 1] = points[points_last] + temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness); + temp_points[points_last * 4 + 2] = points[points_last] - temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness); + temp_points[points_last * 4 + 3] = points[points_last] - temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE); + } + + // Generate the indices to form a number of triangles for each line segment, and the vertices for the line edges + // This takes points n and n+1 and writes into n+1, with the first point in a closed line being generated from the final one (as n+1 wraps) + // FIXME-OPT: Merge the different loops, possibly remove the temporary buffer. + unsigned int idx1 = _VtxCurrentIdx; // Vertex index for start of line segment + for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++) // i1 is the first point of the line segment + { + const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : (i1 + 1); // i2 is the second point of the line segment + const unsigned int idx2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? _VtxCurrentIdx : (idx1 + 4); // Vertex index for end of segment + + // Average normals + float dm_x = (temp_normals[i1].x + temp_normals[i2].x) * 0.5f; + float dm_y = (temp_normals[i1].y + temp_normals[i2].y) * 0.5f; + IM_FIXNORMAL2F(dm_x, dm_y); + float dm_out_x = dm_x * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE); + float dm_out_y = dm_y * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE); + float dm_in_x = dm_x * half_inner_thickness; + float dm_in_y = dm_y * half_inner_thickness; + + // Add temporary vertices + ImVec2* out_vtx = &temp_points[i2 * 4]; + out_vtx[0].x = points[i2].x + dm_out_x; + out_vtx[0].y = points[i2].y + dm_out_y; + out_vtx[1].x = points[i2].x + dm_in_x; + out_vtx[1].y = points[i2].y + dm_in_y; + out_vtx[2].x = points[i2].x - dm_in_x; + out_vtx[2].y = points[i2].y - dm_in_y; + out_vtx[3].x = points[i2].x - dm_out_x; + out_vtx[3].y = points[i2].y - dm_out_y; + + // Add indexes + _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); + _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); + _IdxWritePtr[6] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[7] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[8] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); + _IdxWritePtr[9] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[10] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[11] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); + _IdxWritePtr[12] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[13] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[14] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 3); + _IdxWritePtr[15] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 3); _IdxWritePtr[16] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 3); _IdxWritePtr[17] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2); + _IdxWritePtr += 18; + + idx1 = idx2; + } + + // Add vertices + for (int i = 0; i < points_count; i++) + { + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 0]; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col_trans; + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 1]; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 2]; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 3]; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col_trans; + _VtxWritePtr += 4; + } + } + _VtxCurrentIdx += (ImDrawIdx)vtx_count; + } + else + { + // [PATH 4] Non texture-based, Non anti-aliased lines + const int idx_count = count * 6; + const int vtx_count = count * 4; // FIXME-OPT: Not sharing edges + PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count); + + for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++) + { + const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : i1 + 1; + const ImVec2& p1 = points[i1]; + const ImVec2& p2 = points[i2]; + + float dx = p2.x - p1.x; + float dy = p2.y - p1.y; + IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy); + dx *= (thickness * 0.5f); + dy *= (thickness * 0.5f); + + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.x = p1.x + dy; _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.y = p1.y - dx; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.x = p2.x + dy; _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.y = p2.y - dx; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[2].pos.x = p2.x - dy; _VtxWritePtr[2].pos.y = p2.y + dx; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr[3].pos.x = p1.x - dy; _VtxWritePtr[3].pos.y = p1.y + dx; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr += 4; + + _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2); + _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 3); + _IdxWritePtr += 6; + _VtxCurrentIdx += 4; + } + } +} + +// - We intentionally avoid using ImVec2 and its math operators here to reduce cost to a minimum for debug/non-inlined builds. +// - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing. +void ImDrawList::AddConvexPolyFilled(const ImVec2* points, const int points_count, ImU32 col) +{ + if (points_count < 3 || (col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + const ImVec2 uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel; + + if (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill) + { + // Anti-aliased Fill + const float AA_SIZE = _FringeScale; + const ImU32 col_trans = col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK; + const int idx_count = (points_count - 2)*3 + points_count * 6; + const int vtx_count = (points_count * 2); + PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count); + + // Add indexes for fill + unsigned int vtx_inner_idx = _VtxCurrentIdx; + unsigned int vtx_outer_idx = _VtxCurrentIdx + 1; + for (int i = 2; i < points_count; i++) + { + _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + ((i - 1) << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i << 1)); + _IdxWritePtr += 3; + } + + // Compute normals + _Data->TempBuffer.reserve_discard(points_count); + ImVec2* temp_normals = _Data->TempBuffer.Data; + for (int i0 = points_count - 1, i1 = 0; i1 < points_count; i0 = i1++) + { + const ImVec2& p0 = points[i0]; + const ImVec2& p1 = points[i1]; + float dx = p1.x - p0.x; + float dy = p1.y - p0.y; + IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy); + temp_normals[i0].x = dy; + temp_normals[i0].y = -dx; + } + + for (int i0 = points_count - 1, i1 = 0; i1 < points_count; i0 = i1++) + { + // Average normals + const ImVec2& n0 = temp_normals[i0]; + const ImVec2& n1 = temp_normals[i1]; + float dm_x = (n0.x + n1.x) * 0.5f; + float dm_y = (n0.y + n1.y) * 0.5f; + IM_FIXNORMAL2F(dm_x, dm_y); + dm_x *= AA_SIZE * 0.5f; + dm_y *= AA_SIZE * 0.5f; + + // Add vertices + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.x = (points[i1].x - dm_x); _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.y = (points[i1].y - dm_y); _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; // Inner + _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.x = (points[i1].x + dm_x); _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.y = (points[i1].y + dm_y); _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col_trans; // Outer + _VtxWritePtr += 2; + + // Add indexes for fringes + _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i1 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i0 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_outer_idx + (i0 << 1)); + _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_outer_idx + (i0 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_outer_idx + (i1 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i1 << 1)); + _IdxWritePtr += 6; + } + _VtxCurrentIdx += (ImDrawIdx)vtx_count; + } + else + { + // Non Anti-aliased Fill + const int idx_count = (points_count - 2)*3; + const int vtx_count = points_count; + PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count); + for (int i = 0; i < vtx_count; i++) + { + _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = points[i]; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; + _VtxWritePtr++; + } + for (int i = 2; i < points_count; i++) + { + _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + i - 1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + i); + _IdxWritePtr += 3; + } + _VtxCurrentIdx += (ImDrawIdx)vtx_count; + } +} + +void ImDrawList::_PathArcToFastEx(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_sample, int a_max_sample, int a_step) +{ + if (radius < 0.5f) + { + _Path.push_back(center); + return; + } + + // Calculate arc auto segment step size + if (a_step <= 0) + a_step = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX / _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(radius); + + // Make sure we never do steps larger than one quarter of the circle + a_step = ImClamp(a_step, 1, IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE / 4); + + const int sample_range = ImAbs(a_max_sample - a_min_sample); + const int a_next_step = a_step; + + int samples = sample_range + 1; + bool extra_max_sample = false; + if (a_step > 1) + { + samples = sample_range / a_step + 1; + const int overstep = sample_range % a_step; + + if (overstep > 0) + { + extra_max_sample = true; + samples++; + + // When we have overstep to avoid awkwardly looking one long line and one tiny one at the end, + // distribute first step range evenly between them by reducing first step size. + if (sample_range > 0) + a_step -= (a_step - overstep) / 2; + } + } + + _Path.resize(_Path.Size + samples); + ImVec2* out_ptr = _Path.Data + (_Path.Size - samples); + + int sample_index = a_min_sample; + if (sample_index < 0 || sample_index >= IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX) + { + sample_index = sample_index % IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + if (sample_index < 0) + sample_index += IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + } + + if (a_max_sample >= a_min_sample) + { + for (int a = a_min_sample; a <= a_max_sample; a += a_step, sample_index += a_step, a_step = a_next_step) + { + // a_step is clamped to IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, so we have guaranteed that it will not wrap over range twice or more + if (sample_index >= IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX) + sample_index -= IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + + const ImVec2 s = _Data->ArcFastVtx[sample_index]; + out_ptr->x = center.x + s.x * radius; + out_ptr->y = center.y + s.y * radius; + out_ptr++; + } + } + else + { + for (int a = a_min_sample; a >= a_max_sample; a -= a_step, sample_index -= a_step, a_step = a_next_step) + { + // a_step is clamped to IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, so we have guaranteed that it will not wrap over range twice or more + if (sample_index < 0) + sample_index += IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + + const ImVec2 s = _Data->ArcFastVtx[sample_index]; + out_ptr->x = center.x + s.x * radius; + out_ptr->y = center.y + s.y * radius; + out_ptr++; + } + } + + if (extra_max_sample) + { + int normalized_max_sample = a_max_sample % IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + if (normalized_max_sample < 0) + normalized_max_sample += IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + + const ImVec2 s = _Data->ArcFastVtx[normalized_max_sample]; + out_ptr->x = center.x + s.x * radius; + out_ptr->y = center.y + s.y * radius; + out_ptr++; + } + + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(_Path.Data + _Path.Size == out_ptr); +} + +void ImDrawList::_PathArcToN(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments) +{ + if (radius < 0.5f) + { + _Path.push_back(center); + return; + } + + // Note that we are adding a point at both a_min and a_max. + // If you are trying to draw a full closed circle you don't want the overlapping points! + _Path.reserve(_Path.Size + (num_segments + 1)); + for (int i = 0; i <= num_segments; i++) + { + const float a = a_min + ((float)i / (float)num_segments) * (a_max - a_min); + _Path.push_back(ImVec2(center.x + ImCos(a) * radius, center.y + ImSin(a) * radius)); + } +} + +// 0: East, 3: South, 6: West, 9: North, 12: East +void ImDrawList::PathArcToFast(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12) +{ + if (radius < 0.5f) + { + _Path.push_back(center); + return; + } + _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius, a_min_of_12 * IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX / 12, a_max_of_12 * IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX / 12, 0); +} + +void ImDrawList::PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments) +{ + if (radius < 0.5f) + { + _Path.push_back(center); + return; + } + + if (num_segments > 0) + { + _PathArcToN(center, radius, a_min, a_max, num_segments); + return; + } + + // Automatic segment count + if (radius <= _Data->ArcFastRadiusCutoff) + { + const bool a_is_reverse = a_max < a_min; + + // We are going to use precomputed values for mid samples. + // Determine first and last sample in lookup table that belong to the arc. + const float a_min_sample_f = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX * a_min / (IM_PI * 2.0f); + const float a_max_sample_f = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX * a_max / (IM_PI * 2.0f); + + const int a_min_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImFloorSigned(a_min_sample_f) : (int)ImCeil(a_min_sample_f); + const int a_max_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImCeil(a_max_sample_f) : (int)ImFloorSigned(a_max_sample_f); + const int a_mid_samples = a_is_reverse ? ImMax(a_min_sample - a_max_sample, 0) : ImMax(a_max_sample - a_min_sample, 0); + + const float a_min_segment_angle = a_min_sample * IM_PI * 2.0f / IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + const float a_max_segment_angle = a_max_sample * IM_PI * 2.0f / IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX; + const bool a_emit_start = ImAbs(a_min_segment_angle - a_min) >= 1e-5f; + const bool a_emit_end = ImAbs(a_max - a_max_segment_angle) >= 1e-5f; + + _Path.reserve(_Path.Size + (a_mid_samples + 1 + (a_emit_start ? 1 : 0) + (a_emit_end ? 1 : 0))); + if (a_emit_start) + _Path.push_back(ImVec2(center.x + ImCos(a_min) * radius, center.y + ImSin(a_min) * radius)); + if (a_mid_samples > 0) + _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius, a_min_sample, a_max_sample, 0); + if (a_emit_end) + _Path.push_back(ImVec2(center.x + ImCos(a_max) * radius, center.y + ImSin(a_max) * radius)); + } + else + { + const float arc_length = ImAbs(a_max - a_min); + const int circle_segment_count = _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(radius); + const int arc_segment_count = ImMax((int)ImCeil(circle_segment_count * arc_length / (IM_PI * 2.0f)), (int)(2.0f * IM_PI / arc_length)); + _PathArcToN(center, radius, a_min, a_max, arc_segment_count); + } +} + +ImVec2 ImBezierCubicCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, float t) +{ + float u = 1.0f - t; + float w1 = u * u * u; + float w2 = 3 * u * u * t; + float w3 = 3 * u * t * t; + float w4 = t * t * t; + return ImVec2(w1 * p1.x + w2 * p2.x + w3 * p3.x + w4 * p4.x, w1 * p1.y + w2 * p2.y + w3 * p3.y + w4 * p4.y); +} + +ImVec2 ImBezierQuadraticCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, float t) +{ + float u = 1.0f - t; + float w1 = u * u; + float w2 = 2 * u * t; + float w3 = t * t; + return ImVec2(w1 * p1.x + w2 * p2.x + w3 * p3.x, w1 * p1.y + w2 * p2.y + w3 * p3.y); +} + +// Closely mimics ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau() in imgui.cpp +static void PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(ImVector* path, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float x4, float y4, float tess_tol, int level) +{ + float dx = x4 - x1; + float dy = y4 - y1; + float d2 = (x2 - x4) * dy - (y2 - y4) * dx; + float d3 = (x3 - x4) * dy - (y3 - y4) * dx; + d2 = (d2 >= 0) ? d2 : -d2; + d3 = (d3 >= 0) ? d3 : -d3; + if ((d2 + d3) * (d2 + d3) < tess_tol * (dx * dx + dy * dy)) + { + path->push_back(ImVec2(x4, y4)); + } + else if (level < 10) + { + float x12 = (x1 + x2) * 0.5f, y12 = (y1 + y2) * 0.5f; + float x23 = (x2 + x3) * 0.5f, y23 = (y2 + y3) * 0.5f; + float x34 = (x3 + x4) * 0.5f, y34 = (y3 + y4) * 0.5f; + float x123 = (x12 + x23) * 0.5f, y123 = (y12 + y23) * 0.5f; + float x234 = (x23 + x34) * 0.5f, y234 = (y23 + y34) * 0.5f; + float x1234 = (x123 + x234) * 0.5f, y1234 = (y123 + y234) * 0.5f; + PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(path, x1, y1, x12, y12, x123, y123, x1234, y1234, tess_tol, level + 1); + PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(path, x1234, y1234, x234, y234, x34, y34, x4, y4, tess_tol, level + 1); + } +} + +static void PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(ImVector* path, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float tess_tol, int level) +{ + float dx = x3 - x1, dy = y3 - y1; + float det = (x2 - x3) * dy - (y2 - y3) * dx; + if (det * det * 4.0f < tess_tol * (dx * dx + dy * dy)) + { + path->push_back(ImVec2(x3, y3)); + } + else if (level < 10) + { + float x12 = (x1 + x2) * 0.5f, y12 = (y1 + y2) * 0.5f; + float x23 = (x2 + x3) * 0.5f, y23 = (y2 + y3) * 0.5f; + float x123 = (x12 + x23) * 0.5f, y123 = (y12 + y23) * 0.5f; + PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(path, x1, y1, x12, y12, x123, y123, tess_tol, level + 1); + PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(path, x123, y123, x23, y23, x3, y3, tess_tol, level + 1); + } +} + +void ImDrawList::PathBezierCubicCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments) +{ + ImVec2 p1 = _Path.back(); + if (num_segments == 0) + { + IM_ASSERT(_Data->CurveTessellationTol > 0.0f); + PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(&_Path, p1.x, p1.y, p2.x, p2.y, p3.x, p3.y, p4.x, p4.y, _Data->CurveTessellationTol, 0); // Auto-tessellated + } + else + { + float t_step = 1.0f / (float)num_segments; + for (int i_step = 1; i_step <= num_segments; i_step++) + _Path.push_back(ImBezierCubicCalc(p1, p2, p3, p4, t_step * i_step)); + } +} + +void ImDrawList::PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, int num_segments) +{ + ImVec2 p1 = _Path.back(); + if (num_segments == 0) + { + IM_ASSERT(_Data->CurveTessellationTol > 0.0f); + PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(&_Path, p1.x, p1.y, p2.x, p2.y, p3.x, p3.y, _Data->CurveTessellationTol, 0);// Auto-tessellated + } + else + { + float t_step = 1.0f / (float)num_segments; + for (int i_step = 1; i_step <= num_segments; i_step++) + _Path.push_back(ImBezierQuadraticCalc(p1, p2, p3, t_step * i_step)); + } +} + +IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft == (1 << 4)); +static inline ImDrawFlags FixRectCornerFlags(ImDrawFlags flags) +{ +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + // Obsoleted in 1.82 (from February 2021) + // Legacy Support for hard coded ~0 (used to be a suggested equivalent to ImDrawCornerFlags_All) + // ~0 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll or 0 + if (flags == ~0) + return ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll; + + // Legacy Support for hard coded 0x01 to 0x0F (matching 15 out of 16 old flags combinations) + // 0x01 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft (VALUE 0x01 OVERLAPS ImDrawFlags_Closed but ImDrawFlags_Closed is never valid in this path!) + // 0x02 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight + // 0x03 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight + // 0x04 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBotLeft + // 0x05 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBotLeft + // ... + // 0x0F --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll or 0 + // (See all values in ImDrawCornerFlags_) + if (flags >= 0x01 && flags <= 0x0F) + return (flags << 4); + + // We cannot support hard coded 0x00 with 'float rounding > 0.0f' --> replace with ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone or use 'float rounding = 0.0f' +#endif + + // If this triggers, please update your code replacing hardcoded values with new ImDrawFlags_RoundCorners* values. + // Note that ImDrawFlags_Closed (== 0x01) is an invalid flag for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect() etc... + IM_ASSERT((flags & 0x0F) == 0 && "Misuse of legacy hardcoded ImDrawCornerFlags values!"); + + if ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll; + + return flags; +} + +void ImDrawList::PathRect(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags) +{ + if (rounding >= 0.5f) + { + flags = FixRectCornerFlags(flags); + rounding = ImMin(rounding, ImFabs(b.x - a.x) * (((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop) || ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom) ? 0.5f : 1.0f) - 1.0f); + rounding = ImMin(rounding, ImFabs(b.y - a.y) * (((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft) || ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight) ? 0.5f : 1.0f) - 1.0f); + } + if (rounding < 0.5f || (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone) + { + PathLineTo(a); + PathLineTo(ImVec2(b.x, a.y)); + PathLineTo(b); + PathLineTo(ImVec2(a.x, b.y)); + } + else + { + const float rounding_tl = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft) ? rounding : 0.0f; + const float rounding_tr = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight) ? rounding : 0.0f; + const float rounding_br = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight) ? rounding : 0.0f; + const float rounding_bl = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft) ? rounding : 0.0f; + PathArcToFast(ImVec2(a.x + rounding_tl, a.y + rounding_tl), rounding_tl, 6, 9); + PathArcToFast(ImVec2(b.x - rounding_tr, a.y + rounding_tr), rounding_tr, 9, 12); + PathArcToFast(ImVec2(b.x - rounding_br, b.y - rounding_br), rounding_br, 0, 3); + PathArcToFast(ImVec2(a.x + rounding_bl, b.y - rounding_bl), rounding_bl, 3, 6); + } +} + +void ImDrawList::AddLine(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, ImU32 col, float thickness) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + PathLineTo(p1 + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + PathLineTo(p2 + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + PathStroke(col, 0, thickness); +} + +// p_min = upper-left, p_max = lower-right +// Note we don't render 1 pixels sized rectangles properly. +void ImDrawList::AddRect(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + if (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines) + PathRect(p_min + ImVec2(0.50f, 0.50f), p_max - ImVec2(0.50f, 0.50f), rounding, flags); + else + PathRect(p_min + ImVec2(0.50f, 0.50f), p_max - ImVec2(0.49f, 0.49f), rounding, flags); // Better looking lower-right corner and rounded non-AA shapes. + PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddRectFilled(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + if (rounding < 0.5f || (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone) + { + PrimReserve(6, 4); + PrimRect(p_min, p_max, col); + } + else + { + PathRect(p_min, p_max, rounding, flags); + PathFillConvex(col); + } +} + +// p_min = upper-left, p_max = lower-right +void ImDrawList::AddRectFilledMultiColor(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left) +{ + if (((col_upr_left | col_upr_right | col_bot_right | col_bot_left) & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + const ImVec2 uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel; + PrimReserve(6, 4); + PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 1)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2)); + PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 3)); + PrimWriteVtx(p_min, uv, col_upr_left); + PrimWriteVtx(ImVec2(p_max.x, p_min.y), uv, col_upr_right); + PrimWriteVtx(p_max, uv, col_bot_right); + PrimWriteVtx(ImVec2(p_min.x, p_max.y), uv, col_bot_left); +} + +// modified by asphyxia +void ImDrawList::AddRectFilledMultiColorRounded(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags) +{ + if (((col_upr_left | col_upr_right | col_bot_right | col_bot_left) & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + rounding = ImMin(rounding, ImFabs(p_max.x - p_min.x) * (((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop) || ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom) ? 0.5f : 1.0f) - 1.0f); + rounding = ImMin(rounding, ImFabs(p_max.y - p_min.y) * (((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft) || ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight) ? 0.5f : 1.0f) - 1.0f); + + // https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3710#issuecomment-758555966 + if (rounding > 0.0f) + { + const int size_before = VtxBuffer.Size; + AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, IM_COL32_WHITE, rounding, flags); + const int size_after = VtxBuffer.Size; + + for (int i = size_before; i < size_after; i++) + { + ImDrawVert* vert = VtxBuffer.Data + i; + + ImVec4 upr_left = ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col_upr_left); + ImVec4 bot_left = ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col_bot_left); + ImVec4 up_right = ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col_upr_right); + ImVec4 bot_right = ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col_bot_right); + + float X = ImClamp((vert->pos.x - p_min.x) / (p_max.x - p_min.x), 0.0f, 1.0f); + + // 4 colors - 8 deltas + + float r1 = upr_left.x + (up_right.x - upr_left.x) * X; + float r2 = bot_left.x + (bot_right.x - bot_left.x) * X; + + float g1 = upr_left.y + (up_right.y - upr_left.y) * X; + float g2 = bot_left.y + (bot_right.y - bot_left.y) * X; + + float b1 = upr_left.z + (up_right.z - upr_left.z) * X; + float b2 = bot_left.z + (bot_right.z - bot_left.z) * X; + + float a1 = upr_left.w + (up_right.w - upr_left.w) * X; + float a2 = bot_left.w + (bot_right.w - bot_left.w) * X; + + + float Y = ImClamp((vert->pos.y - p_min.y) / (p_max.y - p_min.y), 0.0f, 1.0f); + float r = r1 + (r2 - r1) * Y; + float g = g1 + (g2 - g1) * Y; + float b = b1 + (b2 - b1) * Y; + float a = a1 + (a2 - a1) * Y; + ImVec4 RGBA(r, g, b, a); + + RGBA = RGBA * ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(vert->col); + + vert->col = ImColor(RGBA); + } + return; + } + + const ImVec2 uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel; + PrimReserve(6, 4); + PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 1)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2)); + PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 3)); + PrimWriteVtx(p_min, uv, col_upr_left); + PrimWriteVtx(ImVec2(p_max.x, p_min.y), uv, col_upr_right); + PrimWriteVtx(p_max, uv, col_bot_right); + PrimWriteVtx(ImVec2(p_min.x, p_max.y), uv, col_bot_left); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddQuad(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + PathLineTo(p1); + PathLineTo(p2); + PathLineTo(p3); + PathLineTo(p4); + PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddQuadFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + PathLineTo(p1); + PathLineTo(p2); + PathLineTo(p3); + PathLineTo(p4); + PathFillConvex(col); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddTriangle(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + PathLineTo(p1); + PathLineTo(p2); + PathLineTo(p3); + PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddTriangleFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + PathLineTo(p1); + PathLineTo(p2); + PathLineTo(p3); + PathFillConvex(col); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddCircle(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || radius < 0.5f) + return; + + if (num_segments <= 0) + { + // Use arc with automatic segment count + _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius - 0.5f, 0, IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, 0); + _Path.Size--; + } + else + { + // Explicit segment count (still clamp to avoid drawing insanely tessellated shapes) + num_segments = ImClamp(num_segments, 3, IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX); + + // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points + const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments; + PathArcTo(center, radius - 0.5f, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1); + } + + PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || radius < 0.5f) + return; + + if (num_segments <= 0) + { + // Use arc with automatic segment count + _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius, 0, IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, 0); + _Path.Size--; + } + else + { + // Explicit segment count (still clamp to avoid drawing insanely tessellated shapes) + num_segments = ImClamp(num_segments, 3, IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX); + + // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points + const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments; + PathArcTo(center, radius, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1); + } + + PathFillConvex(col); +} + +// Guaranteed to honor 'num_segments' +void ImDrawList::AddNgon(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || num_segments <= 2) + return; + + // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points + const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments; + PathArcTo(center, radius - 0.5f, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1); + PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness); +} + +// Guaranteed to honor 'num_segments' +void ImDrawList::AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || num_segments <= 2) + return; + + // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points + const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments; + PathArcTo(center, radius, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1); + PathFillConvex(col); +} + +// Cubic Bezier takes 4 controls points +void ImDrawList::AddBezierCubic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + PathLineTo(p1); + PathBezierCubicCurveTo(p2, p3, p4, num_segments); + PathStroke(col, 0, thickness); +} + +// Quadratic Bezier takes 3 controls points +void ImDrawList::AddBezierQuadratic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + PathLineTo(p1); + PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(p2, p3, num_segments); + PathStroke(col, 0, thickness); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddText(const ImFont* font, float font_size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width, const ImVec4* cpu_fine_clip_rect) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + if (text_end == NULL) + text_end = text_begin + strlen(text_begin); + if (text_begin == text_end) + return; + + // Pull default font/size from the shared ImDrawListSharedData instance + if (font == NULL) + font = _Data->Font; + if (font_size == 0.0f) + font_size = _Data->FontSize; + + IM_ASSERT(font->ContainerAtlas->TexID == _CmdHeader.TextureId); // Use high-level ImGui::PushFont() or low-level ImDrawList::PushTextureId() to change font. + + ImVec4 clip_rect = _CmdHeader.ClipRect; + if (cpu_fine_clip_rect) + { + clip_rect.x = ImMax(clip_rect.x, cpu_fine_clip_rect->x); + clip_rect.y = ImMax(clip_rect.y, cpu_fine_clip_rect->y); + clip_rect.z = ImMin(clip_rect.z, cpu_fine_clip_rect->z); + clip_rect.w = ImMin(clip_rect.w, cpu_fine_clip_rect->w); + } + font->RenderText(this, font_size, pos, col, clip_rect, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width, cpu_fine_clip_rect != NULL); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddText(const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end) +{ + AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, col, text_begin, text_end); +} + +// modified by asphyxia +void ImDrawList::AddMultiColorText(const ImFont* pFont, const float flFontSize, const ImVec2& vecPosition, const char* szText, const ImU32 colRight, const ImU32 colLeft) +{ + if (colRight == colLeft) + { + this->AddText(pFont, flFontSize, vecPosition, colRight, szText); + return; + } + + const ImVec2 vecTextSize = pFont->CalcTextSizeA(flFontSize, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, szText); + constexpr float flSmooth = 175.f; + float flVtxOut = flSmooth * 0.5f; + float flVtxIn = flVtxOut - flSmooth; + + // dummy draw to get the vertex count + const int nVtxStartIdx = this->VtxBuffer.Size; + this->AddText(pFont, flFontSize, vecPosition, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), szText); + const int nVtxEndIdx = this->VtxBuffer.Size; + + // add vertexes + ImVec2 textcenter(vecPosition.x + (vecTextSize.x / 2), vecPosition.y + (vecTextSize.y / 2)); + + const float flAlpha0 = (0.5f / flVtxOut); + const float flAlpha1 = 1.0f / 6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + (0.5f / flVtxOut); + + ImVec2 vecGradient0(textcenter.x + ImCos(flAlpha0) * flVtxIn, textcenter.y + ImSin(flAlpha0) * flVtxIn); + ImVec2 vecGradient1(textcenter.x + ImCos(flAlpha1) * flVtxIn, textcenter.y + ImSin(flAlpha1) * flVtxIn); + ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(this, nVtxStartIdx, nVtxEndIdx, vecGradient0, vecGradient1, colLeft, colRight); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddImage(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min, const ImVec2& uv_max, ImU32 col) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + const bool push_texture_id = user_texture_id != _CmdHeader.TextureId; + if (push_texture_id) + PushTextureID(user_texture_id); + + PrimReserve(6, 4); + PrimRectUV(p_min, p_max, uv_min, uv_max, col); + + if (push_texture_id) + PopTextureID(); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddImageQuad(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec2& uv2, const ImVec2& uv3, const ImVec2& uv4, ImU32 col) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + const bool push_texture_id = user_texture_id != _CmdHeader.TextureId; + if (push_texture_id) + PushTextureID(user_texture_id); + + PrimReserve(6, 4); + PrimQuadUV(p1, p2, p3, p4, uv1, uv2, uv3, uv4, col); + + if (push_texture_id) + PopTextureID(); +} + +void ImDrawList::AddImageRounded(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min, const ImVec2& uv_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags) +{ + if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + flags = FixRectCornerFlags(flags); + if (rounding < 0.5f || (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone) + { + AddImage(user_texture_id, p_min, p_max, uv_min, uv_max, col); + return; + } + + const bool push_texture_id = user_texture_id != _CmdHeader.TextureId; + if (push_texture_id) + PushTextureID(user_texture_id); + + int vert_start_idx = VtxBuffer.Size; + PathRect(p_min, p_max, rounding, flags); + PathFillConvex(col); + int vert_end_idx = VtxBuffer.Size; + ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(this, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, p_min, p_max, uv_min, uv_max, true); + + if (push_texture_id) + PopTextureID(); +} + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImDrawList Shadow Primitives +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - AddSubtractedRect() [Internal] +// - ClipPolygonShape() [Internal] +// - AddSubtractedRect() [Internal] +// - AddRectShadow() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Adds a rectangle (A) with another rectangle (B) subtracted from it (i.e. the portion of A covered by B is not drawn). Does not handle rounded corners (use the version that takes a convex polygon for that). +static void AddSubtractedRect(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& a_min, const ImVec2& a_max, const ImVec2& a_min_uv, const ImVec2& a_max_uv, ImVec2 b_min, ImVec2 b_max, ImU32 col) +{ + // Early out without drawing anything if A is zero-size + if (a_min.x >= a_max.x || a_min.y >= a_max.y) + return; + + // Early out without drawing anything if B covers A entirely + if (a_min.x >= b_min.x && a_max.x <= b_max.x && a_min.y >= b_min.y && a_max.y <= b_max.y) + return; + + // First clip the extents of B to A + b_min = ImMax(b_min, a_min); + b_max = ImMin(b_max, a_max); + if (b_min.x >= b_max.x || b_min.y >= b_max.y) + { + // B is entirely outside A, so just draw A as-is + draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 4); + draw_list->PrimRectUV(a_min, a_max, a_min_uv, a_max_uv, col); + return; + } + + // Otherwise we need to emit (up to) four quads to cover the visible area... + // Our layout looks like this (numbers are vertex indices, letters are quads): + // + // 0---8------9-----1 + // | | B | | + // + 4------5 + + // | A |xxxxxx| C | + // | |xxxxxx| | + // + 7------6 + + // | | D | | + // 3---11-----10----2 + + const int max_verts = 12; + const int max_indices = 6 * 4; // At most four quads + draw_list->PrimReserve(max_indices, max_verts); + + ImDrawIdx* idx_write = draw_list->_IdxWritePtr; + ImDrawVert* vtx_write = draw_list->_VtxWritePtr; + ImDrawIdx idx = (ImDrawIdx)draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx; + + // Write vertices + vtx_write[0].pos = ImVec2(a_min.x, a_min.y); vtx_write[0].uv = ImVec2(a_min_uv.x, a_min_uv.y); vtx_write[0].col = col; + vtx_write[1].pos = ImVec2(a_max.x, a_min.y); vtx_write[1].uv = ImVec2(a_max_uv.x, a_min_uv.y); vtx_write[1].col = col; + vtx_write[2].pos = ImVec2(a_max.x, a_max.y); vtx_write[2].uv = ImVec2(a_max_uv.x, a_max_uv.y); vtx_write[2].col = col; + vtx_write[3].pos = ImVec2(a_min.x, a_max.y); vtx_write[3].uv = ImVec2(a_min_uv.x, a_max_uv.y); vtx_write[3].col = col; + + const ImVec2 pos_to_uv_scale = (a_max_uv - a_min_uv) / (a_max - a_min); // Guaranteed never to be a /0 because we check for zero-size A above + const ImVec2 pos_to_uv_offset = (a_min_uv / pos_to_uv_scale) - a_min; + + // Helper that generates an interpolated UV based on position +#define LERP_UV(x_pos, y_pos) (ImVec2(((x_pos) + pos_to_uv_offset.x) * pos_to_uv_scale.x, ((y_pos) + pos_to_uv_offset.y) * pos_to_uv_scale.y)) + vtx_write[4].pos = ImVec2(b_min.x, b_min.y); vtx_write[4].uv = LERP_UV(b_min.x, b_min.y); vtx_write[4].col = col; + vtx_write[5].pos = ImVec2(b_max.x, b_min.y); vtx_write[5].uv = LERP_UV(b_max.x, b_min.y); vtx_write[5].col = col; + vtx_write[6].pos = ImVec2(b_max.x, b_max.y); vtx_write[6].uv = LERP_UV(b_max.x, b_max.y); vtx_write[6].col = col; + vtx_write[7].pos = ImVec2(b_min.x, b_max.y); vtx_write[7].uv = LERP_UV(b_min.x, b_max.y); vtx_write[7].col = col; + vtx_write[8].pos = ImVec2(b_min.x, a_min.y); vtx_write[8].uv = LERP_UV(b_min.x, a_min.y); vtx_write[8].col = col; + vtx_write[9].pos = ImVec2(b_max.x, a_min.y); vtx_write[9].uv = LERP_UV(b_max.x, a_min.y); vtx_write[9].col = col; + vtx_write[10].pos = ImVec2(b_max.x, a_max.y); vtx_write[10].uv = LERP_UV(b_max.x, a_max.y); vtx_write[10].col = col; + vtx_write[11].pos = ImVec2(b_min.x, a_max.y); vtx_write[11].uv = LERP_UV(b_min.x, a_max.y); vtx_write[11].col = col; +#undef LERP_UV + draw_list->_VtxWritePtr += 12; + draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx += 12; + + // Write indices for each quad (if it is visible) + if (b_min.x > a_min.x) // A + { + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 0); idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 8); idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 11); + idx_write[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 0); idx_write[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 11); idx_write[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 3); + idx_write += 6; + } + if (b_min.y > a_min.y) // B + { + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 8); idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 9); idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 5); + idx_write[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 8); idx_write[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 5); idx_write[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 4); + idx_write += 6; + } + if (a_max.x > b_max.x) // C + { + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 9); idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 1); idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 2); + idx_write[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 9); idx_write[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 2); idx_write[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 10); + idx_write += 6; + } + if (a_max.y > b_max.y) // D + { + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 7); idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 6); idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 10); + idx_write[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 7); idx_write[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 10); idx_write[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx + 11); + idx_write += 6; + } + + const int used_indices = (int)(idx_write - draw_list->_IdxWritePtr); + draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = idx_write; + draw_list->PrimUnreserve(max_indices - used_indices, 0); +} + +// Clip a polygonal shape to a rectangle, writing the results into dest_points. The number of points emitted is returned (may be zero if the polygon was entirely outside the rectangle, or the source polygon was not valid). dest_points may still be written to even if zero was returned. +// allocated_dest_points should contain the number of allocated points in dest_points - in general this should be the number of source points + 4 to accommodate the worst case. If this is exceeded data will be truncated and -1 returned. Stack space work area is allocated based on this value so it shouldn't be too large. +static int ClipPolygonShape(ImVec2* src_points, int num_src_points, ImVec2* dest_points, int allocated_dest_points, ImVec2 clip_rect_min, ImVec2 clip_rect_max) +{ + // Early-out with an empty result if clipping region is zero-sized + if (clip_rect_max.x <= clip_rect_min.x || clip_rect_max.y <= clip_rect_min.y) + return 0; + + // Early-out if there is no source geometry + if (num_src_points < 3) + return 0; + + // The four clip planes here are indexed as: + // 0 = X-, 1 = X+, 2 = Y-, 3 = Y+ + ImU8* outflags[2]; // Double-buffered flags for each vertex indicating which of the four clip planes it is outside of + outflags[0] = (ImU8*)alloca(2 * allocated_dest_points * sizeof(ImU8)); + outflags[1] = outflags[0] + allocated_dest_points; + + // Calculate initial outflags + ImU8 outflags_anded = 0xFF; + ImU8 outflags_ored = 0; + for (int point_idx = 0; point_idx < num_src_points; point_idx++) + { + const ImVec2 pos = src_points[point_idx]; + const ImU8 point_outflags = (pos.x < clip_rect_min.x ? 1 : 0) | (pos.x > clip_rect_max.x ? 2 : 0) | (pos.y < clip_rect_min.y ? 4 : 0) | (pos.y > clip_rect_max.y ? 8 : 0); + outflags[0][point_idx] = point_outflags; // Writing to buffer 0 + outflags_anded &= point_outflags; + outflags_ored |= point_outflags; + } + if (outflags_anded != 0) // Entirely clipped by any one plane, so nothing remains + return 0; + + if (outflags_ored == 0) // Entirely within bounds, so trivial accept + { + if (allocated_dest_points < num_src_points) + return -1; // Not sure what the caller was thinking if this happens, but we should handle it gracefully + + memcpy(dest_points, src_points, num_src_points * sizeof(ImVec2)); + return num_src_points; + } + + // Shape needs clipping + ImVec2* clip_buf[2]; // Double-buffered work area + clip_buf[0] = (ImVec2*)alloca(2 * allocated_dest_points * sizeof(ImVec2)); //-V630 + clip_buf[1] = clip_buf[0] + allocated_dest_points; + + memcpy(clip_buf[0], src_points, num_src_points * sizeof(ImVec2)); + int clip_buf_size = num_src_points; // Number of vertices currently in the clip buffer + + int read_buffer_idx = 0; // The index of the clip buffer/out-flags we are reading (0 or 1) + + for (int clip_plane = 0; clip_plane < 4; clip_plane++) // 0 = X-, 1 = X+, 2 = Y-, 3 = Y+ + { + const int clip_plane_bit = 1 << clip_plane; // Bit mask for our current plane in out-flags + if ((outflags_ored & clip_plane_bit) == 0) + continue; // All vertices are inside this plane, so no need to clip + + ImVec2* read_vert = &clip_buf[read_buffer_idx][0]; // Clip buffer vertex we are currently reading + ImVec2* write_vert = &clip_buf[1 - read_buffer_idx][0]; // Clip buffer vertex we are currently writing + ImVec2* write_vert_end = write_vert + allocated_dest_points; // End of the write buffer + ImU8* read_outflags = &outflags[read_buffer_idx][0]; // Out-flag we are currently reading + ImU8* write_outflags = &outflags[1 - read_buffer_idx][0]; // Out-flag we are currently writing + + // Keep track of the last vertex visited, initially the last in the list + ImVec2* last_vert = &read_vert[clip_buf_size - 1]; + ImU8 last_outflags = read_outflags[clip_buf_size - 1]; + + for (int vert = 0; vert < clip_buf_size; vert++) + { + ImU8 current_outflags = *(read_outflags++); + bool out = (current_outflags & clip_plane_bit) != 0; + if (((current_outflags ^ last_outflags) & clip_plane_bit) == 0) // We haven't crossed the clip plane + { + if (!out) + { + // Emit vertex as-is + if (write_vert >= write_vert_end) + return -1; // Ran out of buffer space, so abort + *(write_vert++) = *read_vert; + *(write_outflags++) = current_outflags; + } + } + else + { + // Emit a vertex at the intersection point + float t = 0.0f; + ImVec2 pos0 = *last_vert; + ImVec2 pos1 = *read_vert; + ImVec2 intersect_pos; + switch (clip_plane) + { + case 0: t = (clip_rect_min.x - pos0.x) / (pos1.x - pos0.x); intersect_pos = ImVec2(clip_rect_min.x, pos0.y + ((pos1.y - pos0.y) * t)); break; // X- + case 1: t = (clip_rect_max.x - pos0.x) / (pos1.x - pos0.x); intersect_pos = ImVec2(clip_rect_max.x, pos0.y + ((pos1.y - pos0.y) * t)); break; // X+ + case 2: t = (clip_rect_min.y - pos0.y) / (pos1.y - pos0.y); intersect_pos = ImVec2(pos0.x + ((pos1.x - pos0.x) * t), clip_rect_min.y); break; // Y- + case 3: t = (clip_rect_max.y - pos0.y) / (pos1.y - pos0.y); intersect_pos = ImVec2(pos0.x + ((pos1.x - pos0.x) * t), clip_rect_max.y); break; // Y+ + } + + if (write_vert >= write_vert_end) + return -1; // Ran out of buffer space, so abort + + // Write new out-flags for the vertex we just emitted + *(write_vert++) = intersect_pos; + *(write_outflags++) = (intersect_pos.x < clip_rect_min.x ? 1 : 0) | (intersect_pos.x > clip_rect_max.x ? 2 : 0) | (intersect_pos.y < clip_rect_min.y ? 4 : 0) | (intersect_pos.y > clip_rect_max.y ? 8 : 0); + + if (!out) + { + // When coming back in, also emit the actual vertex + if (write_vert >= write_vert_end) + return -1; // Ran out of buffer space, so abort + *(write_vert++) = *read_vert; + *(write_outflags++) = current_outflags; + } + + last_outflags = current_outflags; + } + + last_vert = read_vert; + read_vert++; // Advance to next vertex + } + + clip_buf_size = (int)(write_vert - &clip_buf[1 - read_buffer_idx][0]); // Update buffer size + read_buffer_idx = 1 - read_buffer_idx; // Swap buffers + } + + if (clip_buf_size < 3) + return 0; // Nothing to return + + // Copy results to output buffer, removing any redundant vertices + int num_out_verts = 0; + ImVec2 last_vert = clip_buf[read_buffer_idx][clip_buf_size - 1]; + for (int i = 0; i < clip_buf_size; i++) + { + ImVec2 vert = clip_buf[read_buffer_idx][i]; + if (ImLengthSqr(vert - last_vert) <= 0.00001f) + continue; + dest_points[num_out_verts++] = vert; + last_vert = vert; + } + + // Return size (IF this is still a valid shape) + return (num_out_verts > 2) ? num_out_verts : 0; +} + +// Adds a rectangle (A) with a convex shape (B) subtracted from it (i.e. the portion of A covered by B is not drawn). +static void AddSubtractedRect(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& a_min, const ImVec2& a_max, const ImVec2& a_min_uv, const ImVec2& a_max_uv, ImVec2* b_points, int num_b_points, ImU32 col) +{ + // Early out without drawing anything if A is zero-size + if (a_min.x >= a_max.x || a_min.y >= a_max.y) + return; + + // First clip B to A + const int max_clipped_points = num_b_points + 4; + ImVec2* clipped_b_points = (ImVec2*)alloca(max_clipped_points * sizeof(ImVec2)); //-V630 + const int num_clipped_points = ClipPolygonShape(b_points, num_b_points, clipped_b_points, max_clipped_points, a_min, a_max); + IM_ASSERT(num_clipped_points >= 0); // -1 would indicate max_clipped_points was too small, which shouldn't happen + + b_points = clipped_b_points; + num_b_points = num_clipped_points; + + if (num_clipped_points == 0) + { + // B is entirely outside A, so just draw A as-is + draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 4); + draw_list->PrimRectUV(a_min, a_max, a_min_uv, a_max_uv, col); + } + else + { + // We need to generate clipped geometry + // To do this we walk the inner polygon and connect each edge to one of the four corners of our rectangle based on the quadrant their normal points at + const int max_verts = num_b_points + 4; // Inner points plus the four corners + const int max_indices = (num_b_points * 3) + (4 * 3); // Worst case is one triangle per inner edge and then four filler triangles + draw_list->PrimReserve(max_indices, max_verts); + + ImDrawIdx* idx_write = draw_list->_IdxWritePtr; + ImDrawVert* vtx_write = draw_list->_VtxWritePtr; + ImDrawIdx inner_idx = (ImDrawIdx)draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx; // Starting index for inner vertices + + // Write inner vertices + const ImVec2 pos_to_uv_scale = (a_max_uv - a_min_uv) / (a_max - a_min); // Guaranteed never to be a /0 because we check for zero-size A above + const ImVec2 pos_to_uv_offset = (a_min_uv / pos_to_uv_scale) - a_min; + + // Helper that generates an interpolated UV based on position +#define LERP_UV(x_pos, y_pos) (ImVec2(((x_pos) + pos_to_uv_offset.x) * pos_to_uv_scale.x, ((y_pos) + pos_to_uv_offset.y) * pos_to_uv_scale.y)) + for (int i = 0; i < num_b_points; i++) + { + vtx_write[i].pos = b_points[i]; + vtx_write[i].uv = LERP_UV(b_points[i].x, b_points[i].y); + vtx_write[i].col = col; + } +#undef LERP_UV + + vtx_write += num_b_points; + + // Write outer vertices + ImDrawIdx outer_idx = (ImDrawIdx)(inner_idx + num_b_points); // Starting index for outer vertices + + ImVec2 outer_verts[4]; + outer_verts[0] = ImVec2(a_min.x, a_min.y); // X- Y- (quadrant 0, top left) + outer_verts[1] = ImVec2(a_max.x, a_min.y); // X+ Y- (quadrant 1, top right) + outer_verts[2] = ImVec2(a_max.x, a_max.y); // X+ Y+ (quadrant 2, bottom right) + outer_verts[3] = ImVec2(a_min.x, a_max.y); // X- Y+ (quadrant 3, bottom left) + + vtx_write[0].pos = outer_verts[0]; vtx_write[0].uv = ImVec2(a_min_uv.x, a_min_uv.y); vtx_write[0].col = col; + vtx_write[1].pos = outer_verts[1]; vtx_write[1].uv = ImVec2(a_max_uv.x, a_min_uv.y); vtx_write[1].col = col; + vtx_write[2].pos = outer_verts[2]; vtx_write[2].uv = ImVec2(a_max_uv.x, a_max_uv.y); vtx_write[2].col = col; + vtx_write[3].pos = outer_verts[3]; vtx_write[3].uv = ImVec2(a_min_uv.x, a_max_uv.y); vtx_write[3].col = col; + + draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx += num_b_points + 4; + draw_list->_VtxWritePtr += num_b_points + 4; + + // Now walk the inner vertices in order + ImVec2 last_inner_vert = b_points[num_b_points - 1]; + int last_inner_vert_idx = num_b_points - 1; + int last_outer_vert_idx = -1; + int first_outer_vert_idx = -1; + + // Triangle-area based check for degenerate triangles + // Min area (0.1f) is doubled (* 2.0f) because we're calculating (area * 2) here +#define IS_DEGENERATE(a, b, c) (ImFabs((((a).x * ((b).y - (c).y)) + ((b).x * ((c).y - (a).y)) + ((c).x * ((a).y - (b).y)))) < (0.1f * 2.0f)) + + // Check the winding order of the inner vertices using the sign of the triangle area, and set the outer vertex winding to match + int outer_vertex_winding = (((b_points[0].x * (b_points[1].y - b_points[2].y)) + (b_points[1].x * (b_points[2].y - b_points[0].y)) + (b_points[2].x * (b_points[0].y - b_points[1].y))) < 0.0f) ? -1 : 1; + for (int inner_vert_idx = 0; inner_vert_idx < num_b_points; inner_vert_idx++) + { + ImVec2 current_inner_vert = b_points[inner_vert_idx]; + + // Calculate normal (not actually normalized, as for our purposes here it doesn't need to be) + ImVec2 normal(current_inner_vert.y - last_inner_vert.y, -(current_inner_vert.x - last_inner_vert.x)); + + // Calculate the outer vertex index based on the quadrant the normal points at (0=top left, 1=top right, 2=bottom right, 3=bottom left) + int outer_vert_idx = (ImFabs(normal.x) > ImFabs(normal.y)) ? ((normal.x >= 0.0f) ? ((normal.y > 0.0f) ? 2 : 1) : ((normal.y > 0.0f) ? 3 : 0)) : ((normal.y >= 0.0f) ? ((normal.x > 0.0f) ? 2 : 3) : ((normal.x > 0.0f) ? 1 : 0)); + ImVec2 outer_vert = outer_verts[outer_vert_idx]; + + // Write the main triangle (connecting the inner edge to the corner) + if (!IS_DEGENERATE(last_inner_vert, current_inner_vert, outer_vert)) + { + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(inner_idx + last_inner_vert_idx); + idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(inner_idx + inner_vert_idx); + idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(outer_idx + outer_vert_idx); + idx_write += 3; + } + + // We don't initially know which outer vertex we are going to start from, so set that here when processing the first inner vertex + if (first_outer_vert_idx == -1) + { + first_outer_vert_idx = outer_vert_idx; + last_outer_vert_idx = outer_vert_idx; + } + + // Now walk the outer edge and write any filler triangles needed (connecting outer edges to the inner vertex) + while (outer_vert_idx != last_outer_vert_idx) + { + int next_outer_vert_idx = (last_outer_vert_idx + outer_vertex_winding) & 3; + if (!IS_DEGENERATE(outer_verts[last_outer_vert_idx], outer_verts[next_outer_vert_idx], last_inner_vert)) + { + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(outer_idx + last_outer_vert_idx); + idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(outer_idx + next_outer_vert_idx); + idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(inner_idx + last_inner_vert_idx); + idx_write += 3; + } + last_outer_vert_idx = next_outer_vert_idx; + } + + last_inner_vert = current_inner_vert; + last_inner_vert_idx = inner_vert_idx; + } + + // Write remaining filler triangles for any un-traversed outer edges + if (first_outer_vert_idx != -1) + { + while (first_outer_vert_idx != last_outer_vert_idx) + { + int next_outer_vert_idx = (last_outer_vert_idx + outer_vertex_winding) & 3; + if (!IS_DEGENERATE(outer_verts[last_outer_vert_idx], outer_verts[next_outer_vert_idx], last_inner_vert)) + { + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(outer_idx + last_outer_vert_idx); + idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(outer_idx + next_outer_vert_idx); + idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(inner_idx + last_inner_vert_idx); + idx_write += 3; + } + last_outer_vert_idx = next_outer_vert_idx; + } + } +#undef IS_DEGENERATE + + int used_indices = (int)(idx_write - draw_list->_IdxWritePtr); + draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = idx_write; + draw_list->PrimUnreserve(max_indices - used_indices, 0); + } +} + +void ImDrawList::AddShadowRect(const ImVec2& obj_min, const ImVec2& obj_max, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags, float obj_rounding) +{ + if ((shadow_col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0) + return; + + ImVec2* inner_rect_points = NULL; // Points that make up the shape of the inner rectangle (used when it has rounded corners) + int inner_rect_points_count = 0; + + // Generate a path describing the inner rectangle and copy it to our buffer + const bool is_filled = (flags & ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground) == 0; + const bool is_rounded = (obj_rounding > 0.0f) && ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) != ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone); // Do we have rounded corners? + if (is_rounded && !is_filled) + { + IM_ASSERT(_Path.Size == 0); + PathRect(obj_min, obj_max, obj_rounding, flags); + inner_rect_points_count = _Path.Size; + inner_rect_points = (ImVec2*)alloca(inner_rect_points_count * sizeof(ImVec2)); //-V630 + memcpy(inner_rect_points, _Path.Data, inner_rect_points_count * sizeof(ImVec2)); + _Path.Size = 0; + } + + if (is_filled) + PrimReserve(6 * 9, 4 * 9); // Reserve space for adding unclipped chunks + + // Draw the relevant chunks of the texture (the texture is split into a 3x3 grid) + // FIXME-OPT: Might make sense to optimize/unroll for the fast paths (filled or not rounded) + for (int x = 0; x < 3; x++) + { + for (int y = 0; y < 3; y++) + { + const int uv_index = x + (y + y + y); // y*3 formatted so as to ensure the compiler avoids an actual multiply + const ImVec4 uvs = _Data->ShadowRectUvs[uv_index]; + + ImVec2 draw_min, draw_max; + switch (x) + { + case 0: draw_min.x = obj_min.x - shadow_thickness; draw_max.x = obj_min.x; break; + case 1: draw_min.x = obj_min.x; draw_max.x = obj_max.x; break; + case 2: draw_min.x = obj_max.x; draw_max.x = obj_max.x + shadow_thickness; break; + } + switch (y) + { + case 0: draw_min.y = obj_min.y - shadow_thickness; draw_max.y = obj_min.y; break; + case 1: draw_min.y = obj_min.y; draw_max.y = obj_max.y; break; + case 2: draw_min.y = obj_max.y; draw_max.y = obj_max.y + shadow_thickness; break; + } + + ImVec2 uv_min(uvs.x, uvs.y); + ImVec2 uv_max(uvs.z, uvs.w); + if (is_filled) + PrimRectUV(draw_min + shadow_offset, draw_max + shadow_offset, uv_min, uv_max, shadow_col); // No clipping path (draw entire shadow) + else if (is_rounded) + AddSubtractedRect(this, draw_min + shadow_offset, draw_max + shadow_offset, uv_min, uv_max, inner_rect_points, inner_rect_points_count, shadow_col); // Complex path for rounded rectangles + else + AddSubtractedRect(this, draw_min + shadow_offset, draw_max + shadow_offset, uv_min, uv_max, obj_min, obj_max, shadow_col); // Simple fast path for non-rounded rectangles + } + } +} + +// Add a shadow for a convex shape described by points and num_points +void ImDrawList::AddShadowConvexPoly(const ImVec2* points, int points_count, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags) +{ + const bool is_filled = (flags & ImDrawFlags_ShadowCutOutShapeBackground) == 0; + IM_ASSERT((is_filled || (ImLengthSqr(shadow_offset) < 0.00001f)) && "Drawing circle/convex shape shadows with no center fill and an offset is not currently supported"); + IM_ASSERT(points_count >= 3); + + // Calculate poly vertex order + const int vertex_winding = (((points[0].x * (points[1].y - points[2].y)) + (points[1].x * (points[2].y - points[0].y)) + (points[2].x * (points[0].y - points[1].y))) < 0.0f) ? -1 : 1; + + // If we're using anti-aliasing, then inset the shadow by 0.5 pixels to avoid unpleasant fringing artifacts + const bool use_inset_distance = (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill) && (!is_filled); + const float inset_distance = 0.5f; + + const ImVec4 uvs = _Data->ShadowRectUvs[9]; + + int tex_width = _Data->Font->ContainerAtlas->TexWidth; + int tex_height = _Data->Font->ContainerAtlas->TexHeight; + float inv_tex_width = 1.0f / (float)tex_width; + float inv_tex_height = 1.0f / (float)tex_height; + + ImVec2 solid_uv = ImVec2(uvs.z, uvs.w); // UV at the inside of an edge + ImVec2 edge_uv = ImVec2(uvs.x, uvs.w); // UV at the outside of an edge + + ImVec2 solid_to_edge_delta_texels = edge_uv - solid_uv; // Delta between the solid/edge points in texel-space (we need this in pixels - or, to be more precise, to be at a 1:1 aspect ratio - for the rotation to work) + solid_to_edge_delta_texels.x *= (float)tex_width; + solid_to_edge_delta_texels.y *= (float)tex_height; + + // Our basic algorithm here is that we generate a straight section along each edge, and then either one or two curved corner triangles at the corners, + // which use an appropriate chunk of the texture to generate a smooth curve. + const int num_edges = points_count; + + // Normalize a vector +#define NORMALIZE(vec) ((vec) / ImLength((vec), 0.001f)) + + const int required_stack_mem = (num_edges * sizeof(ImVec2)) + (num_edges * sizeof(float)); + ImU8* base_mem_for_normals_and_edges = (ImU8*)alloca(required_stack_mem); + ImU8* mem_for_normals_and_edges = (ImU8*)base_mem_for_normals_and_edges; + + // Calculate edge normals + ImVec2* edge_normals = (ImVec2*)(void*)mem_for_normals_and_edges; + mem_for_normals_and_edges += num_edges * sizeof(ImVec2); + + for (int edge_index = 0; edge_index < num_edges; edge_index++) + { + ImVec2 edge_start = points[edge_index]; // No need to apply offset here because the normal is unaffected + ImVec2 edge_end = points[(edge_index + 1) % num_edges]; + ImVec2 edge_normal = NORMALIZE(ImVec2(edge_end.y - edge_start.y, -(edge_end.x - edge_start.x))); + edge_normals[edge_index] = edge_normal * (float)vertex_winding; // Flip normals for reverse winding + } + + // Pre-calculate edge scales + // We need to do this because we need the edge strips to have widths that match up with the corner sections, otherwise pixel cracking can occur along the boundaries + float* edge_size_scales = (float*)(void*)mem_for_normals_and_edges; + mem_for_normals_and_edges += num_edges * sizeof(float); + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(mem_for_normals_and_edges == (base_mem_for_normals_and_edges + required_stack_mem)); // Check we used exactly what we allocated + + { + ImVec2 prev_edge_normal = edge_normals[num_edges - 1]; + for (int edge_index = 0; edge_index < num_edges; edge_index++) + { + ImVec2 edge_normal = edge_normals[edge_index]; + float cos_angle_coverage = ImDot(edge_normal, prev_edge_normal); + + if (cos_angle_coverage < 0.999999f) + { + // If we are covering more than 90 degrees we need an intermediate vertex to stop the required expansion tending towards infinity. + // And thus the effective angle will be halved (matches the similar code in loop below) + float angle_coverage = ImAcos(cos_angle_coverage); + if (cos_angle_coverage <= 0.0f) // -V1051 + angle_coverage *= 0.5f; + edge_size_scales[edge_index] = 1.0f / ImCos(angle_coverage * 0.5f); // How much we need to expand our size by to avoid clipping the corner of the texture off + } + else + { + edge_size_scales[edge_index] = 1.0f; // No corner, thus default scale + } + + prev_edge_normal = edge_normal; + } + } + + const int max_vertices = (4 + (3 * 2) + (is_filled ? 1 : 0)) * num_edges; // 4 vertices per edge plus 3*2 for potentially two corner triangles, plus one per vertex for fill + const int max_indices = ((6 + (3 * 2)) * num_edges) + (is_filled ? ((num_edges - 2) * 3) : 0); // 2 tris per edge plus up to two corner triangles, plus fill triangles + PrimReserve(max_indices, max_vertices); + ImDrawIdx* idx_write = _IdxWritePtr; + ImDrawVert* vtx_write = _VtxWritePtr; + ImDrawIdx current_idx = (ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx; + + //ImVec2 previous_edge_start = points[0] + offset; + ImVec2 prev_edge_normal = edge_normals[num_edges - 1]; + ImVec2 edge_start = points[0] + shadow_offset; + + if (use_inset_distance) + edge_start -= NORMALIZE(edge_normals[0] + prev_edge_normal) * inset_distance; + + for (int edge_index = 0; edge_index < num_edges; edge_index++) + { + ImVec2 edge_end = points[(edge_index + 1) % num_edges] + shadow_offset; + ImVec2 edge_normal = edge_normals[edge_index]; + const float size_scale_start = edge_size_scales[edge_index]; + const float size_scale_end = edge_size_scales[(edge_index + 1) % num_edges]; + + if (use_inset_distance) + edge_end -= NORMALIZE(edge_normals[(edge_index + 1) % num_edges] + edge_normal) * inset_distance; + + // Add corner section + float cos_angle_coverage = ImDot(edge_normal, prev_edge_normal); + if (cos_angle_coverage < 0.999999f) // Don't fill if the corner is actually straight + { + // If we are covering more than 90 degrees we need an intermediate vertex to stop the required expansion tending towards infinity. + // And thus the effective angle has been halved (matches the similar code in loop above) + int num_steps = (cos_angle_coverage <= 0.0f) ? 2 : 1; + + for (int step = 0; step < num_steps; step++) + { + if (num_steps > 1) + { + if (step == 0) + edge_normal = NORMALIZE(edge_normal + prev_edge_normal); // Use half-way normal for first step + else + edge_normal = edge_normals[edge_index]; // Then use the "real" next edge normal for the second + + cos_angle_coverage = ImDot(edge_normal, prev_edge_normal); // Recalculate angle + } + + // Calculate UV for the section of the curved texture + + const float angle_coverage = ImAcos(cos_angle_coverage); + const float sin_angle_coverage = ImSin(angle_coverage); + + ImVec2 edge_delta = solid_to_edge_delta_texels; + edge_delta *= size_scale_start; + + ImVec2 rotated_edge_delta = ImVec2((edge_delta.x * cos_angle_coverage) + (edge_delta.y * sin_angle_coverage), (edge_delta.x * sin_angle_coverage) + (edge_delta.y * cos_angle_coverage)); + + // Convert from texels back into UV space + edge_delta.x *= inv_tex_width; + edge_delta.y *= inv_tex_height; + rotated_edge_delta.x *= inv_tex_width; + rotated_edge_delta.y *= inv_tex_height; + + ImVec2 expanded_edge_uv = solid_uv + edge_delta; + ImVec2 other_edge_uv = solid_uv + rotated_edge_delta; // Rotated UV to encompass the necessary section of the curve + + float expanded_thickness = shadow_thickness * size_scale_start; + + // Add a triangle to fill the corner + ImVec2 outer_edge_start = edge_start + (prev_edge_normal * expanded_thickness); + ImVec2 outer_edge_end = edge_start + (edge_normal * expanded_thickness); + + vtx_write->pos = edge_start; vtx_write->col = shadow_col; vtx_write->uv = solid_uv; vtx_write++; + vtx_write->pos = outer_edge_end; vtx_write->col = shadow_col; vtx_write->uv = expanded_edge_uv; vtx_write++; + vtx_write->pos = outer_edge_start; vtx_write->col = shadow_col; vtx_write->uv = other_edge_uv; vtx_write++; + + *(idx_write++) = current_idx; + *(idx_write++) = current_idx + 1; + *(idx_write++) = current_idx + 2; + current_idx += 3; + + prev_edge_normal = edge_normal; + } + } + + // Add section along edge + const float edge_length = ImLength(edge_end - edge_start, 0.0f); + if (edge_length > 0.00001f) // Don't try and process degenerate edges + { + ImVec2 outer_edge_start = edge_start + (edge_normal * shadow_thickness * size_scale_start); + ImVec2 outer_edge_end = edge_end + (edge_normal * shadow_thickness * size_scale_end); + ImVec2 scaled_edge_uv_start = solid_uv + ((edge_uv - solid_uv) * size_scale_start); + ImVec2 scaled_edge_uv_end = solid_uv + ((edge_uv - solid_uv) * size_scale_end); + + // Write vertices, inner first, then outer + vtx_write->pos = edge_start; vtx_write->col = shadow_col; vtx_write->uv = solid_uv; vtx_write++; + vtx_write->pos = edge_end; vtx_write->col = shadow_col; vtx_write->uv = solid_uv; vtx_write++; + vtx_write->pos = outer_edge_end; vtx_write->col = shadow_col; vtx_write->uv = scaled_edge_uv_end; vtx_write++; + vtx_write->pos = outer_edge_start; vtx_write->col = shadow_col; vtx_write->uv = scaled_edge_uv_start; vtx_write++; + + *(idx_write++) = current_idx; + *(idx_write++) = current_idx + 1; + *(idx_write++) = current_idx + 2; + *(idx_write++) = current_idx; + *(idx_write++) = current_idx + 2; + *(idx_write++) = current_idx + 3; + current_idx += 4; + } + + edge_start = edge_end; + } + + // Fill if requested + if (is_filled) + { + // Add vertices + for (int edge_index = 0; edge_index < num_edges; edge_index++) + { + vtx_write->pos = points[edge_index] + shadow_offset; + vtx_write->col = shadow_col; + vtx_write->uv = solid_uv; + vtx_write++; + } + + // Add triangles + for (int edge_index = 2; edge_index < num_edges; edge_index++) + { + *(idx_write++) = current_idx; + *(idx_write++) = (ImDrawIdx)(current_idx + edge_index - 1); + *(idx_write++) = (ImDrawIdx)(current_idx + edge_index); + } + + current_idx += (ImDrawIdx)num_edges; + } + + // Release any unused vertices/indices + int used_indices = (int)(idx_write - _IdxWritePtr); + int used_vertices = (int)(vtx_write - _VtxWritePtr); + _IdxWritePtr = idx_write; + _VtxWritePtr = vtx_write; + _VtxCurrentIdx = current_idx; + PrimUnreserve(max_indices - used_indices, max_vertices - used_vertices); +#undef NORMALIZE +} + +// Draw a shadow for a circular object +// Uses the draw path and so wipes any existing data there +void ImDrawList::AddShadowCircle(const ImVec2& obj_center, float obj_radius, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags, int num_segments) +{ + // Obtain segment count + if (num_segments <= 0) + { + // Automatic segment count + const int radius_idx = (int)obj_radius - 1; + if (radius_idx < IM_ARRAYSIZE(_Data->CircleSegmentCounts)) + num_segments = _Data->CircleSegmentCounts[radius_idx]; // Use cached value + else + num_segments = IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC(obj_radius, _Data->CircleSegmentMaxError); + } + else + { + // Explicit segment count (still clamp to avoid drawing insanely tessellated shapes) + num_segments = ImClamp(num_segments, 3, IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX); + } + + // Generate a path describing the inner circle and copy it to our buffer + IM_ASSERT(_Path.Size == 0); + const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments; + if (num_segments == 12) + PathArcToFast(obj_center, obj_radius, 0, 12 - 1); + else + PathArcTo(obj_center, obj_radius, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1); + + // Draw the shadow using the convex shape code + AddShadowConvexPoly(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, shadow_col, shadow_thickness, shadow_offset, flags); + _Path.Size = 0; +} + +void ImDrawList::AddShadowNGon(const ImVec2& obj_center, float obj_radius, ImU32 shadow_col, float shadow_thickness, const ImVec2& shadow_offset, ImDrawFlags flags, int num_segments) +{ + IM_ASSERT(num_segments != 0); + AddShadowCircle(obj_center, obj_radius, shadow_col, shadow_thickness, shadow_offset, flags, num_segments); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImDrawListSplitter +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// FIXME: This may be a little confusing, trying to be a little too low-level/optimal instead of just doing vector swap.. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImDrawListSplitter::ClearFreeMemory() +{ + for (int i = 0; i < _Channels.Size; i++) + { + if (i == _Current) + memset(&_Channels[i], 0, sizeof(_Channels[i])); // Current channel is a copy of CmdBuffer/IdxBuffer, don't destruct again + _Channels[i]._CmdBuffer.clear(); + _Channels[i]._IdxBuffer.clear(); + } + _Current = 0; + _Count = 1; + _Channels.clear(); +} + +void ImDrawListSplitter::Split(ImDrawList* draw_list, int channels_count) +{ + IM_UNUSED(draw_list); + IM_ASSERT(_Current == 0 && _Count <= 1 && "Nested channel splitting is not supported. Please use separate instances of ImDrawListSplitter."); + int old_channels_count = _Channels.Size; + if (old_channels_count < channels_count) + { + _Channels.reserve(channels_count); // Avoid over reserving since this is likely to stay stable + _Channels.resize(channels_count); + } + _Count = channels_count; + + // Channels[] (24/32 bytes each) hold storage that we'll swap with draw_list->_CmdBuffer/_IdxBuffer + // The content of Channels[0] at this point doesn't matter. We clear it to make state tidy in a debugger but we don't strictly need to. + // When we switch to the next channel, we'll copy draw_list->_CmdBuffer/_IdxBuffer into Channels[0] and then Channels[1] into draw_list->CmdBuffer/_IdxBuffer + memset(&_Channels[0], 0, sizeof(ImDrawChannel)); + for (int i = 1; i < channels_count; i++) + { + if (i >= old_channels_count) + { + IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(&_Channels[i]) ImDrawChannel(); + } + else + { + _Channels[i]._CmdBuffer.resize(0); + _Channels[i]._IdxBuffer.resize(0); + } + } +} + +void ImDrawListSplitter::Merge(ImDrawList* draw_list) +{ + // Note that we never use or rely on _Channels.Size because it is merely a buffer that we never shrink back to 0 to keep all sub-buffers ready for use. + if (_Count <= 1) + return; + + SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 0); + draw_list->_PopUnusedDrawCmd(); + + // Calculate our final buffer sizes. Also fix the incorrect IdxOffset values in each command. + int new_cmd_buffer_count = 0; + int new_idx_buffer_count = 0; + ImDrawCmd* last_cmd = (_Count > 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size > 0) ? &draw_list->CmdBuffer.back() : NULL; + int idx_offset = last_cmd ? last_cmd->IdxOffset + last_cmd->ElemCount : 0; + for (int i = 1; i < _Count; i++) + { + ImDrawChannel& ch = _Channels[i]; + if (ch._CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && ch._CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && ch._CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL) // Equivalent of PopUnusedDrawCmd() + ch._CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + + if (ch._CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && last_cmd != NULL) + { + // Do not include ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset() in the compare as we rebuild IdxOffset values ourselves. + // Manipulating IdxOffset (e.g. by reordering draw commands like done by RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow()) is not supported within a splitter. + ImDrawCmd* next_cmd = &ch._CmdBuffer[0]; + if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(last_cmd, next_cmd) == 0 && last_cmd->UserCallback == NULL && next_cmd->UserCallback == NULL) + { + // Merge previous channel last draw command with current channel first draw command if matching. + last_cmd->ElemCount += next_cmd->ElemCount; + idx_offset += next_cmd->ElemCount; + ch._CmdBuffer.erase(ch._CmdBuffer.Data); // FIXME-OPT: Improve for multiple merges. + } + } + if (ch._CmdBuffer.Size > 0) + last_cmd = &ch._CmdBuffer.back(); + new_cmd_buffer_count += ch._CmdBuffer.Size; + new_idx_buffer_count += ch._IdxBuffer.Size; + for (int cmd_n = 0; cmd_n < ch._CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_n++) + { + ch._CmdBuffer.Data[cmd_n].IdxOffset = idx_offset; + idx_offset += ch._CmdBuffer.Data[cmd_n].ElemCount; + } + } + draw_list->CmdBuffer.resize(draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size + new_cmd_buffer_count); + draw_list->IdxBuffer.resize(draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size + new_idx_buffer_count); + + // Write commands and indices in order (they are fairly small structures, we don't copy vertices only indices) + ImDrawCmd* cmd_write = draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data + draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - new_cmd_buffer_count; + ImDrawIdx* idx_write = draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size - new_idx_buffer_count; + for (int i = 1; i < _Count; i++) + { + ImDrawChannel& ch = _Channels[i]; + if (int sz = ch._CmdBuffer.Size) { memcpy(cmd_write, ch._CmdBuffer.Data, sz * sizeof(ImDrawCmd)); cmd_write += sz; } + if (int sz = ch._IdxBuffer.Size) { memcpy(idx_write, ch._IdxBuffer.Data, sz * sizeof(ImDrawIdx)); idx_write += sz; } + } + draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = idx_write; + + // Ensure there's always a non-callback draw command trailing the command-buffer + if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback != NULL) + draw_list->AddDrawCmd(); + + // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0) + ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader); // Copy ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset + else if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader) != 0) + draw_list->AddDrawCmd(); + + _Count = 1; +} + +void ImDrawListSplitter::SetCurrentChannel(ImDrawList* draw_list, int idx) +{ + IM_ASSERT(idx >= 0 && idx < _Count); + if (_Current == idx) + return; + + // Overwrite ImVector (12/16 bytes), four times. This is merely a silly optimization instead of doing .swap() + memcpy(&_Channels.Data[_Current]._CmdBuffer, &draw_list->CmdBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->CmdBuffer)); + memcpy(&_Channels.Data[_Current]._IdxBuffer, &draw_list->IdxBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->IdxBuffer)); + _Current = idx; + memcpy(&draw_list->CmdBuffer, &_Channels.Data[idx]._CmdBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->CmdBuffer)); + memcpy(&draw_list->IdxBuffer, &_Channels.Data[idx]._IdxBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->IdxBuffer)); + draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size; + + // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command + ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0) ? NULL : &draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1]; + if (curr_cmd == NULL) + draw_list->AddDrawCmd(); + else if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0) + ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader); // Copy ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset + else if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader) != 0) + draw_list->AddDrawCmd(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImDrawData +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImDrawData::Clear() +{ + Valid = false; + CmdListsCount = TotalIdxCount = TotalVtxCount = 0; + CmdLists.resize(0); // The ImDrawList are NOT owned by ImDrawData but e.g. by ImGuiContext, so we don't clear them. + DisplayPos = DisplaySize = FramebufferScale = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + OwnerViewport = NULL; +} + +// Important: 'out_list' is generally going to be draw_data->CmdLists, but may be another temporary list +// as long at it is expected that the result will be later merged into draw_data->CmdLists[]. +void ImGui::AddDrawListToDrawDataEx(ImDrawData* draw_data, ImVector* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list) +{ + if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0) + return; + if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 1 && draw_list->CmdBuffer[0].ElemCount == 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer[0].UserCallback == NULL) + return; + + // Draw list sanity check. Detect mismatch between PrimReserve() calls and incrementing _VtxCurrentIdx, _VtxWritePtr etc. + // May trigger for you if you are using PrimXXX functions incorrectly. + IM_ASSERT(draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_VtxWritePtr == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size); + IM_ASSERT(draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_IdxWritePtr == draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size); + if (!(draw_list->Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset)) + IM_ASSERT((int)draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size); + + // Check that draw_list doesn't use more vertices than indexable (default ImDrawIdx = unsigned short = 2 bytes = 64K vertices per ImDrawList = per window) + // If this assert triggers because you are drawing lots of stuff manually: + // - First, make sure you are coarse clipping yourself and not trying to draw many things outside visible bounds. + // Be mindful that the lower-level ImDrawList API doesn't filter vertices. Use the Metrics/Debugger window to inspect draw list contents. + // - If you want large meshes with more than 64K vertices, you can either: + // (A) Handle the ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset value in your renderer backend, and set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset'. + // Most example backends already support this from 1.71. Pre-1.71 backends won't. + // Some graphics API such as GL ES 1/2 don't have a way to offset the starting vertex so it is not supported for them. + // (B) Or handle 32-bit indices in your renderer backend, and uncomment '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' line in imconfig.h. + // Most example backends already support this. For example, the OpenGL example code detect index size at compile-time: + // glDrawElements(GL_TRIANGLES, (GLsizei)pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer_offset); + // Your own engine or render API may use different parameters or function calls to specify index sizes. + // 2 and 4 bytes indices are generally supported by most graphics API. + // - If for some reason neither of those solutions works for you, a workaround is to call BeginChild()/EndChild() before reaching + // the 64K limit to split your draw commands in multiple draw lists. + if (sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2) + IM_ASSERT(draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx < (1 << 16) && "Too many vertices in ImDrawList using 16-bit indices. Read comment above"); + + // Add to output list + records state in ImDrawData + out_list->push_back(draw_list); + draw_data->CmdListsCount++; + draw_data->TotalVtxCount += draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size; + draw_data->TotalIdxCount += draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size; +} + +void ImDrawData::AddDrawList(ImDrawList* draw_list) +{ + IM_ASSERT(CmdLists.Size == CmdListsCount); + draw_list->_PopUnusedDrawCmd(); + ImGui::AddDrawListToDrawDataEx(this, &CmdLists, draw_list); +} + +// For backward compatibility: convert all buffers from indexed to de-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering! +void ImDrawData::DeIndexAllBuffers() +{ + ImVector new_vtx_buffer; + TotalVtxCount = TotalIdxCount = 0; + for (int i = 0; i < CmdListsCount; i++) + { + ImDrawList* cmd_list = CmdLists[i]; + if (cmd_list->IdxBuffer.empty()) + continue; + new_vtx_buffer.resize(cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size); + for (int j = 0; j < cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size; j++) + new_vtx_buffer[j] = cmd_list->VtxBuffer[cmd_list->IdxBuffer[j]]; + cmd_list->VtxBuffer.swap(new_vtx_buffer); + cmd_list->IdxBuffer.resize(0); + TotalVtxCount += cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Size; + } +} + +// Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. +// Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than draw_data->DisplaySize, +// or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution. +void ImDrawData::ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& fb_scale) +{ + for (ImDrawList* draw_list : CmdLists) + for (ImDrawCmd& cmd : draw_list->CmdBuffer) + cmd.ClipRect = ImVec4(cmd.ClipRect.x * fb_scale.x, cmd.ClipRect.y * fb_scale.y, cmd.ClipRect.z * fb_scale.x, cmd.ClipRect.w * fb_scale.y); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Helpers ShadeVertsXXX functions +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Generic linear color gradient, write to RGB fields, leave A untouched. +void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1) +{ + ImVec2 gradient_extent = gradient_p1 - gradient_p0; + float gradient_inv_length2 = 1.0f / ImLengthSqr(gradient_extent); + ImDrawVert* vert_start = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx; + ImDrawVert* vert_end = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx; + const int col0_r = (int)(col0 >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF; + const int col0_g = (int)(col0 >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF; + const int col0_b = (int)(col0 >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF; + const int col_delta_r = ((int)(col1 >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) - col0_r; + const int col_delta_g = ((int)(col1 >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) - col0_g; + const int col_delta_b = ((int)(col1 >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) - col0_b; + for (ImDrawVert* vert = vert_start; vert < vert_end; vert++) + { + float d = ImDot(vert->pos - gradient_p0, gradient_extent); + float t = ImClamp(d * gradient_inv_length2, 0.0f, 1.0f); + int r = (int)(col0_r + col_delta_r * t); + int g = (int)(col0_g + col_delta_g * t); + int b = (int)(col0_b + col_delta_b * t); + vert->col = (r << IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) | (g << IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) | (b << IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) | (vert->col & IM_COL32_A_MASK); + } +} + +// Distribute UV over (a, b) rectangle +void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp) +{ + const ImVec2 size = b - a; + const ImVec2 uv_size = uv_b - uv_a; + const ImVec2 scale = ImVec2( + size.x != 0.0f ? (uv_size.x / size.x) : 0.0f, + size.y != 0.0f ? (uv_size.y / size.y) : 0.0f); + + ImDrawVert* vert_start = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx; + ImDrawVert* vert_end = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx; + if (clamp) + { + const ImVec2 min = ImMin(uv_a, uv_b); + const ImVec2 max = ImMax(uv_a, uv_b); + for (ImDrawVert* vertex = vert_start; vertex < vert_end; ++vertex) + vertex->uv = ImClamp(uv_a + ImMul(ImVec2(vertex->pos.x, vertex->pos.y) - a, scale), min, max); + } + else + { + for (ImDrawVert* vertex = vert_start; vertex < vert_end; ++vertex) + vertex->uv = uv_a + ImMul(ImVec2(vertex->pos.x, vertex->pos.y) - a, scale); + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImFontConfig +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImFontConfig::ImFontConfig() +{ + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); + FontDataOwnedByAtlas = true; + OversampleH = 2; + OversampleV = 1; + GlyphMaxAdvanceX = FLT_MAX; + RasterizerMultiply = 1.0f; + EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)-1; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// A work of art lies ahead! (. = white layer, X = black layer, others are blank) +// The 2x2 white texels on the top left are the ones we'll use everywhere in Dear ImGui to render filled shapes. +// (This is used when io.MouseDrawCursor = true) +const int FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W = 122; // Actual texture will be 2 times that + 1 spacing. +const int FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H = 27; +static const char FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS[FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W * FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H + 1] = +{ + "..- -XXXXXXX- X - X -XXXXXXX - XXXXXXX- XX - XX XX " + "..- -X.....X- X.X - X.X -X.....X - X.....X- X..X -X..X X..X" + "--- -XXX.XXX- X...X - X...X -X....X - X....X- X..X -X...X X...X" + "X - X.X - X.....X - X.....X -X...X - X...X- X..X - X...X X...X " + "XX - X.X -X.......X- X.......X -X..X.X - X.X..X- X..X - X...X...X " + "X.X - X.X -XXXX.XXXX- XXXX.XXXX -X.X X.X - X.X X.X- X..XXX - X.....X " + "X..X - X.X - X.X - X.X -XX X.X - X.X XX- X..X..XXX - X...X " + "X...X - X.X - X.X - XX X.X XX - X.X - X.X - X..X..X..XX - X.X " + "X....X - X.X - X.X - X.X X.X X.X - X.X - X.X - X..X..X..X.X - X...X " + "X.....X - X.X - X.X - X..X X.X X..X - X.X - X.X -XXX X..X..X..X..X- X.....X " + "X......X - X.X - X.X - X...XXXXXX.XXXXXX...X - X.X XX-XX X.X -X..XX........X..X- X...X...X " + "X.......X - X.X - X.X -X.....................X- X.X X.X-X.X X.X -X...X...........X- X...X X...X " + "X........X - X.X - X.X - X...XXXXXX.XXXXXX...X - X.X..X-X..X.X - X..............X-X...X X...X" + "X.........X -XXX.XXX- X.X - X..X X.X X..X - X...X-X...X - X.............X-X..X X..X" + "X..........X-X.....X- X.X - X.X X.X X.X - X....X-X....X - X.............X- XX XX " + "X......XXXXX-XXXXXXX- X.X - XX X.X XX - X.....X-X.....X - X............X--------------" + "X...X..X --------- X.X - X.X - XXXXXXX-XXXXXXX - X...........X - " + "X..X X..X - -XXXX.XXXX- XXXX.XXXX ------------------------------------- X..........X - " + "X.X X..X - -X.......X- X.......X - XX XX - - X..........X - " + "XX X..X - - X.....X - X.....X - X.X X.X - - X........X - " + " X..X - - X...X - X...X - X..X X..X - - X........X - " + " XX - - X.X - X.X - X...XXXXXXXXXXXXX...X - - XXXXXXXXXX - " + "------------- - X - X -X.....................X- ------------------- " + " ----------------------------------- X...XXXXXXXXXXXXX...X - " + " - X..X X..X - " + " - X.X X.X - " + " - XX XX - " +}; + +static const ImVec2 FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT][3] = +{ + // Pos ........ Size ......... Offset ...... + { ImVec2( 0,3), ImVec2(12,19), ImVec2( 0, 0) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow + { ImVec2(13,0), ImVec2( 7,16), ImVec2( 1, 8) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput + { ImVec2(31,0), ImVec2(23,23), ImVec2(11,11) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll + { ImVec2(21,0), ImVec2( 9,23), ImVec2( 4,11) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS + { ImVec2(55,18),ImVec2(23, 9), ImVec2(11, 4) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW + { ImVec2(73,0), ImVec2(17,17), ImVec2( 8, 8) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW + { ImVec2(55,0), ImVec2(17,17), ImVec2( 8, 8) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE + { ImVec2(91,0), ImVec2(17,22), ImVec2( 5, 0) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand + { ImVec2(109,0),ImVec2(13,15), ImVec2( 6, 7) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed +}; + +ImFontAtlas::ImFontAtlas() +{ + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); + TexGlyphPadding = 1; + PackIdMouseCursors = PackIdLines = -1; + ShadowRectIds[0] = ShadowRectIds[1] = -1; + ShadowTexConfig.SetupDefaults(); +} + +ImFontAtlas::~ImFontAtlas() +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + Clear(); +} + +void ImFontAtlas::ClearInputData() +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + for (ImFontConfig& font_cfg : ConfigData) + if (font_cfg.FontData && font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas) + { + IM_FREE(font_cfg.FontData); + font_cfg.FontData = NULL; + } + + // When clearing this we lose access to the font name and other information used to build the font. + for (ImFont* font : Fonts) + if (font->ConfigData >= ConfigData.Data && font->ConfigData < ConfigData.Data + ConfigData.Size) + { + font->ConfigData = NULL; + font->ConfigDataCount = 0; + } + ConfigData.clear(); + CustomRects.clear(); + PackIdMouseCursors = PackIdLines = -1; + ShadowRectIds[0] = ShadowRectIds[1] = -1; + // Important: we leave TexReady untouched +} + +void ImFontAtlas::ClearTexData() +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + if (TexPixelsAlpha8) + IM_FREE(TexPixelsAlpha8); + if (TexPixelsRGBA32) + IM_FREE(TexPixelsRGBA32); + TexPixelsAlpha8 = NULL; + TexPixelsRGBA32 = NULL; + TexPixelsUseColors = false; + // Important: we leave TexReady untouched +} + +void ImFontAtlas::ClearFonts() +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + Fonts.clear_delete(); + TexReady = false; +} + +void ImFontAtlas::Clear() +{ + ClearInputData(); + ClearTexData(); + ClearFonts(); +} + +void ImFontAtlas::GetTexDataAsAlpha8(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel) +{ + // Build atlas on demand + if (TexPixelsAlpha8 == NULL) + Build(); + + *out_pixels = TexPixelsAlpha8; + if (out_width) *out_width = TexWidth; + if (out_height) *out_height = TexHeight; + if (out_bytes_per_pixel) *out_bytes_per_pixel = 1; +} + +void ImFontAtlas::GetTexDataAsRGBA32(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel) +{ + // Convert to RGBA32 format on demand + // Although it is likely to be the most commonly used format, our font rendering is 1 channel / 8 bpp + if (!TexPixelsRGBA32) + { + unsigned char* pixels = NULL; + GetTexDataAsAlpha8(&pixels, NULL, NULL); + if (pixels) + { + TexPixelsRGBA32 = (unsigned int*)IM_ALLOC((size_t)TexWidth * (size_t)TexHeight * 4); + const unsigned char* src = pixels; + unsigned int* dst = TexPixelsRGBA32; + for (int n = TexWidth * TexHeight; n > 0; n--) + *dst++ = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, (unsigned int)(*src++)); + } + } + + *out_pixels = (unsigned char*)TexPixelsRGBA32; + if (out_width) *out_width = TexWidth; + if (out_height) *out_height = TexHeight; + if (out_bytes_per_pixel) *out_bytes_per_pixel = 4; +} + +ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg) +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + IM_ASSERT(font_cfg->FontData != NULL && font_cfg->FontDataSize > 0); + IM_ASSERT(font_cfg->SizePixels > 0.0f); + + // Create new font + if (!font_cfg->MergeMode) + Fonts.push_back(IM_NEW(ImFont)); + else + IM_ASSERT(!Fonts.empty() && "Cannot use MergeMode for the first font"); // When using MergeMode make sure that a font has already been added before. You can use ImGui::GetIO().Fonts->AddFontDefault() to add the default imgui font. + + ConfigData.push_back(*font_cfg); + ImFontConfig& new_font_cfg = ConfigData.back(); + if (new_font_cfg.DstFont == NULL) + new_font_cfg.DstFont = Fonts.back(); + if (!new_font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas) + { + new_font_cfg.FontData = IM_ALLOC(new_font_cfg.FontDataSize); + new_font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas = true; + memcpy(new_font_cfg.FontData, font_cfg->FontData, (size_t)new_font_cfg.FontDataSize); + } + + if (new_font_cfg.DstFont->EllipsisChar == (ImWchar)-1) + new_font_cfg.DstFont->EllipsisChar = font_cfg->EllipsisChar; + + // Invalidate texture + TexReady = false; + ClearTexData(); + return new_font_cfg.DstFont; +} + +// Default font TTF is compressed with stb_compress then base85 encoded (see misc/fonts/binary_to_compressed_c.cpp for encoder) +static unsigned int stb_decompress_length(const unsigned char* input); +static unsigned int stb_decompress(unsigned char* output, const unsigned char* input, unsigned int length); +static const char* GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85(); +static unsigned int Decode85Byte(char c) { return c >= '\\' ? c-36 : c-35; } +static void Decode85(const unsigned char* src, unsigned char* dst) +{ + while (*src) + { + unsigned int tmp = Decode85Byte(src[0]) + 85 * (Decode85Byte(src[1]) + 85 * (Decode85Byte(src[2]) + 85 * (Decode85Byte(src[3]) + 85 * Decode85Byte(src[4])))); + dst[0] = ((tmp >> 0) & 0xFF); dst[1] = ((tmp >> 8) & 0xFF); dst[2] = ((tmp >> 16) & 0xFF); dst[3] = ((tmp >> 24) & 0xFF); // We can't assume little-endianness. + src += 5; + dst += 4; + } +} + +// Load embedded ProggyClean.ttf at size 13, disable oversampling +ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template) +{ + ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig(); + if (!font_cfg_template) + { + font_cfg.OversampleH = font_cfg.OversampleV = 1; + font_cfg.PixelSnapH = true; + } + if (font_cfg.SizePixels <= 0.0f) + font_cfg.SizePixels = 13.0f * 1.0f; + if (font_cfg.Name[0] == '\0') + ImFormatString(font_cfg.Name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(font_cfg.Name), "ProggyClean.ttf, %dpx", (int)font_cfg.SizePixels); + font_cfg.EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)0x0085; + font_cfg.GlyphOffset.y = 1.0f * IM_FLOOR(font_cfg.SizePixels / 13.0f); // Add +1 offset per 13 units + + const char* ttf_compressed_base85 = GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85(); + const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = font_cfg.GlyphRanges != NULL ? font_cfg.GlyphRanges : GetGlyphRangesDefault(); + ImFont* font = AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(ttf_compressed_base85, font_cfg.SizePixels, &font_cfg, glyph_ranges); + return font; +} + +ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges) +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + size_t data_size = 0; + void* data = ImFileLoadToMemory(filename, "rb", &data_size, 0); + if (!data) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(0, "Could not load font file!"); + return NULL; + } + ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig(); + if (font_cfg.Name[0] == '\0') + { + // Store a short copy of filename into into the font name for convenience + const char* p; + for (p = filename + strlen(filename); p > filename && p[-1] != '/' && p[-1] != '\\'; p--) {} + ImFormatString(font_cfg.Name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(font_cfg.Name), "%s, %.0fpx", p, size_pixels); + } + return AddFontFromMemoryTTF(data, (int)data_size, size_pixels, &font_cfg, glyph_ranges); +} + +// NB: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas, unless font_cfg_template->FontDataOwnedByAtlas == false. Owned TTF buffer will be deleted after Build(). +ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* ttf_data, int ttf_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges) +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig(); + IM_ASSERT(font_cfg.FontData == NULL); + font_cfg.FontData = ttf_data; + font_cfg.FontDataSize = ttf_size; + font_cfg.SizePixels = size_pixels > 0.0f ? size_pixels : font_cfg.SizePixels; + if (glyph_ranges) + font_cfg.GlyphRanges = glyph_ranges; + return AddFont(&font_cfg); +} + +ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_ttf_data, int compressed_ttf_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges) +{ + const unsigned int buf_decompressed_size = stb_decompress_length((const unsigned char*)compressed_ttf_data); + unsigned char* buf_decompressed_data = (unsigned char*)IM_ALLOC(buf_decompressed_size); + stb_decompress(buf_decompressed_data, (const unsigned char*)compressed_ttf_data, (unsigned int)compressed_ttf_size); + + ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig(); + IM_ASSERT(font_cfg.FontData == NULL); + font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas = true; + return AddFontFromMemoryTTF(buf_decompressed_data, (int)buf_decompressed_size, size_pixels, &font_cfg, glyph_ranges); +} + +ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char* compressed_ttf_data_base85, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges) +{ + int compressed_ttf_size = (((int)strlen(compressed_ttf_data_base85) + 4) / 5) * 4; + void* compressed_ttf = IM_ALLOC((size_t)compressed_ttf_size); + Decode85((const unsigned char*)compressed_ttf_data_base85, (unsigned char*)compressed_ttf); + ImFont* font = AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(compressed_ttf, compressed_ttf_size, size_pixels, font_cfg, glyph_ranges); + IM_FREE(compressed_ttf); + return font; +} + +int ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectRegular(int width, int height) +{ + IM_ASSERT(width > 0 && width <= 0xFFFF); + IM_ASSERT(height > 0 && height <= 0xFFFF); + ImFontAtlasCustomRect r; + r.Width = (unsigned short)width; + r.Height = (unsigned short)height; + CustomRects.push_back(r); + return CustomRects.Size - 1; // Return index +} + +int ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectFontGlyph(ImFont* font, ImWchar id, int width, int height, float advance_x, const ImVec2& offset) +{ +#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32 + IM_ASSERT(id <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX); +#endif + IM_ASSERT(font != NULL); + IM_ASSERT(width > 0 && width <= 0xFFFF); + IM_ASSERT(height > 0 && height <= 0xFFFF); + ImFontAtlasCustomRect r; + r.Width = (unsigned short)width; + r.Height = (unsigned short)height; + r.GlyphID = id; + r.GlyphAdvanceX = advance_x; + r.GlyphOffset = offset; + r.Font = font; + CustomRects.push_back(r); + return CustomRects.Size - 1; // Return index +} + +void ImFontAtlas::CalcCustomRectUV(const ImFontAtlasCustomRect* rect, ImVec2* out_uv_min, ImVec2* out_uv_max) const +{ + IM_ASSERT(TexWidth > 0 && TexHeight > 0); // Font atlas needs to be built before we can calculate UV coordinates + IM_ASSERT(rect->IsPacked()); // Make sure the rectangle has been packed + *out_uv_min = ImVec2((float)rect->X * TexUvScale.x, (float)rect->Y * TexUvScale.y); + *out_uv_max = ImVec2((float)(rect->X + rect->Width) * TexUvScale.x, (float)(rect->Y + rect->Height) * TexUvScale.y); +} + +bool ImFontAtlas::GetMouseCursorTexData(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type, ImVec2* out_offset, ImVec2* out_size, ImVec2 out_uv_border[2], ImVec2 out_uv_fill[2]) +{ + if (cursor_type <= ImGuiMouseCursor_None || cursor_type >= ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT) + return false; + if (Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors) + return false; + + IM_ASSERT(PackIdMouseCursors != -1); + ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = GetCustomRectByIndex(PackIdMouseCursors); + ImVec2 pos = FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[cursor_type][0] + ImVec2((float)r->X, (float)r->Y); + ImVec2 size = FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[cursor_type][1]; + *out_size = size; + *out_offset = FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[cursor_type][2]; + out_uv_border[0] = (pos) * TexUvScale; + out_uv_border[1] = (pos + size) * TexUvScale; + pos.x += FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W + 1; + out_uv_fill[0] = (pos) * TexUvScale; + out_uv_fill[1] = (pos + size) * TexUvScale; + return true; +} + +bool ImFontAtlas::Build() +{ + IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!"); + + // Default font is none are specified + if (ConfigData.Size == 0) + AddFontDefault(); + + // Select builder + // - Note that we do not reassign to atlas->FontBuilderIO, since it is likely to point to static data which + // may mess with some hot-reloading schemes. If you need to assign to this (for dynamic selection) AND are + // using a hot-reloading scheme that messes up static data, store your own instance of ImFontBuilderIO somewhere + // and point to it instead of pointing directly to return value of the GetBuilderXXX functions. + const ImFontBuilderIO* builder_io = FontBuilderIO; + if (builder_io == NULL) + { +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE + builder_io = ImGuiFreeType::GetBuilderForFreeType(); +#elif defined(IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE) + builder_io = ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype(); +#else + IM_ASSERT(0); // Invalid Build function +#endif + } + + // Build + return builder_io->FontBuilder_Build(this); +} + +void ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(unsigned char out_table[256], float in_brighten_factor) +{ + for (unsigned int i = 0; i < 256; i++) + { + unsigned int value = (unsigned int)(i * in_brighten_factor); + out_table[i] = value > 255 ? 255 : (value & 0xFF); + } +} + +void ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(const unsigned char table[256], unsigned char* pixels, int x, int y, int w, int h, int stride) +{ + IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(w <= stride); + unsigned char* data = pixels + x + y * stride; + for (int j = h; j > 0; j--, data += stride - w) + for (int i = w; i > 0; i--, data++) + *data = table[*data]; +} + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE +// Temporary data for one source font (multiple source fonts can be merged into one destination ImFont) +// (C++03 doesn't allow instancing ImVector<> with function-local types so we declare the type here.) +struct ImFontBuildSrcData +{ + stbtt_fontinfo FontInfo; + stbtt_pack_range PackRange; // Hold the list of codepoints to pack (essentially points to Codepoints.Data) + stbrp_rect* Rects; // Rectangle to pack. We first fill in their size and the packer will give us their position. + stbtt_packedchar* PackedChars; // Output glyphs + const ImWchar* SrcRanges; // Ranges as requested by user (user is allowed to request too much, e.g. 0x0020..0xFFFF) + int DstIndex; // Index into atlas->Fonts[] and dst_tmp_array[] + int GlyphsHighest; // Highest requested codepoint + int GlyphsCount; // Glyph count (excluding missing glyphs and glyphs already set by an earlier source font) + ImBitVector GlyphsSet; // Glyph bit map (random access, 1-bit per codepoint. This will be a maximum of 8KB) + ImVector GlyphsList; // Glyph codepoints list (flattened version of GlyphsSet) +}; + +// Temporary data for one destination ImFont* (multiple source fonts can be merged into one destination ImFont) +struct ImFontBuildDstData +{ + int SrcCount; // Number of source fonts targeting this destination font. + int GlyphsHighest; + int GlyphsCount; + ImBitVector GlyphsSet; // This is used to resolve collision when multiple sources are merged into a same destination font. +}; + +static void UnpackBitVectorToFlatIndexList(const ImBitVector* in, ImVector* out) +{ + IM_ASSERT(sizeof(in->Storage.Data[0]) == sizeof(int)); + const ImU32* it_begin = in->Storage.begin(); + const ImU32* it_end = in->Storage.end(); + for (const ImU32* it = it_begin; it < it_end; it++) + if (ImU32 entries_32 = *it) + for (ImU32 bit_n = 0; bit_n < 32; bit_n++) + if (entries_32 & ((ImU32)1 << bit_n)) + out->push_back((int)(((it - it_begin) << 5) + bit_n)); +} + +static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + IM_ASSERT(atlas->ConfigData.Size > 0); + + ImFontAtlasBuildInit(atlas); + + // Clear atlas + atlas->TexID = (ImTextureID)NULL; + atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexHeight = 0; + atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + atlas->TexUvWhitePixel = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + atlas->ClearTexData(); + + // Temporary storage for building + ImVector src_tmp_array; + ImVector dst_tmp_array; + src_tmp_array.resize(atlas->ConfigData.Size); + dst_tmp_array.resize(atlas->Fonts.Size); + memset(src_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)src_tmp_array.size_in_bytes()); + memset(dst_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)dst_tmp_array.size_in_bytes()); + + // 1. Initialize font loading structure, check font data validity + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i]; + IM_ASSERT(cfg.DstFont && (!cfg.DstFont->IsLoaded() || cfg.DstFont->ContainerAtlas == atlas)); + + // Find index from cfg.DstFont (we allow the user to set cfg.DstFont. Also it makes casual debugging nicer than when storing indices) + src_tmp.DstIndex = -1; + for (int output_i = 0; output_i < atlas->Fonts.Size && src_tmp.DstIndex == -1; output_i++) + if (cfg.DstFont == atlas->Fonts[output_i]) + src_tmp.DstIndex = output_i; + if (src_tmp.DstIndex == -1) + { + IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.DstIndex != -1); // cfg.DstFont not pointing within atlas->Fonts[] array? + return false; + } + // Initialize helper structure for font loading and verify that the TTF/OTF data is correct + const int font_offset = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex((unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, cfg.FontNo); + IM_ASSERT(font_offset >= 0 && "FontData is incorrect, or FontNo cannot be found."); + if (!stbtt_InitFont(&src_tmp.FontInfo, (unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, font_offset)) + return false; + + // Measure highest codepoints + ImFontBuildDstData& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex]; + src_tmp.SrcRanges = cfg.GlyphRanges ? cfg.GlyphRanges : atlas->GetGlyphRangesDefault(); + for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2) + { + // Check for valid range. This may also help detect *some* dangling pointers, because a common + // user error is to setup ImFontConfig::GlyphRanges with a pointer to data that isn't persistent. + IM_ASSERT(src_range[0] <= src_range[1]); + src_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest, (int)src_range[1]); + } + dst_tmp.SrcCount++; + dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest, src_tmp.GlyphsHighest); + } + + // 2. For every requested codepoint, check for their presence in the font data, and handle redundancy or overlaps between source fonts to avoid unused glyphs. + int total_glyphs_count = 0; + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + ImFontBuildDstData& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex]; + src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Create(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1); + if (dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Storage.empty()) + dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Create(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1); + + for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2) + for (unsigned int codepoint = src_range[0]; codepoint <= src_range[1]; codepoint++) + { + if (dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.TestBit(codepoint)) // Don't overwrite existing glyphs. We could make this an option for MergeMode (e.g. MergeOverwrite==true) + continue; + if (!stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&src_tmp.FontInfo, codepoint)) // It is actually in the font? + continue; + + // Add to avail set/counters + src_tmp.GlyphsCount++; + dst_tmp.GlyphsCount++; + src_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint); + dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint); + total_glyphs_count++; + } + } + + // 3. Unpack our bit map into a flat list (we now have all the Unicode points that we know are requested _and_ available _and_ not overlapping another) + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + src_tmp.GlyphsList.reserve(src_tmp.GlyphsCount); + UnpackBitVectorToFlatIndexList(&src_tmp.GlyphsSet, &src_tmp.GlyphsList); + src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Clear(); + IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size == src_tmp.GlyphsCount); + } + for (int dst_i = 0; dst_i < dst_tmp_array.Size; dst_i++) + dst_tmp_array[dst_i].GlyphsSet.Clear(); + dst_tmp_array.clear(); + + // Allocate packing character data and flag packed characters buffer as non-packed (x0=y0=x1=y1=0) + // (We technically don't need to zero-clear buf_rects, but let's do it for the sake of sanity) + ImVector buf_rects; + ImVector buf_packedchars; + buf_rects.resize(total_glyphs_count); + buf_packedchars.resize(total_glyphs_count); + memset(buf_rects.Data, 0, (size_t)buf_rects.size_in_bytes()); + memset(buf_packedchars.Data, 0, (size_t)buf_packedchars.size_in_bytes()); + + // 4. Gather glyphs sizes so we can pack them in our virtual canvas. + int total_surface = 0; + int buf_rects_out_n = 0; + int buf_packedchars_out_n = 0; + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0) + continue; + + src_tmp.Rects = &buf_rects[buf_rects_out_n]; + src_tmp.PackedChars = &buf_packedchars[buf_packedchars_out_n]; + buf_rects_out_n += src_tmp.GlyphsCount; + buf_packedchars_out_n += src_tmp.GlyphsCount; + + // Convert our ranges in the format stb_truetype wants + ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i]; + src_tmp.PackRange.font_size = cfg.SizePixels; + src_tmp.PackRange.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = 0; + src_tmp.PackRange.array_of_unicode_codepoints = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Data; + src_tmp.PackRange.num_chars = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size; + src_tmp.PackRange.chardata_for_range = src_tmp.PackedChars; + src_tmp.PackRange.h_oversample = (unsigned char)cfg.OversampleH; + src_tmp.PackRange.v_oversample = (unsigned char)cfg.OversampleV; + + // Gather the sizes of all rectangles we will need to pack (this loop is based on stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects) + const float scale = (cfg.SizePixels > 0) ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&src_tmp.FontInfo, -cfg.SizePixels); + const int padding = atlas->TexGlyphPadding; + for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size; glyph_i++) + { + int x0, y0, x1, y1; + const int glyph_index_in_font = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&src_tmp.FontInfo, src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i]); + IM_ASSERT(glyph_index_in_font != 0); + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(&src_tmp.FontInfo, glyph_index_in_font, scale * cfg.OversampleH, scale * cfg.OversampleV, 0, 0, &x0, &y0, &x1, &y1); + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w = (stbrp_coord)(x1 - x0 + padding + cfg.OversampleH - 1); + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h = (stbrp_coord)(y1 - y0 + padding + cfg.OversampleV - 1); + total_surface += src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w * src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h; + } + } + + // We need a width for the skyline algorithm, any width! + // The exact width doesn't really matter much, but some API/GPU have texture size limitations and increasing width can decrease height. + // User can override TexDesiredWidth and TexGlyphPadding if they wish, otherwise we use a simple heuristic to select the width based on expected surface. + const int surface_sqrt = (int)ImSqrt((float)total_surface) + 1; + atlas->TexHeight = 0; + if (atlas->TexDesiredWidth > 0) + atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexDesiredWidth; + else + atlas->TexWidth = (surface_sqrt >= 4096 * 0.7f) ? 4096 : (surface_sqrt >= 2048 * 0.7f) ? 2048 : (surface_sqrt >= 1024 * 0.7f) ? 1024 : 512; + + // 5. Start packing + // Pack our extra data rectangles first, so it will be on the upper-left corner of our texture (UV will have small values). + const int TEX_HEIGHT_MAX = 1024 * 32; + stbtt_pack_context spc = {}; + stbtt_PackBegin(&spc, NULL, atlas->TexWidth, TEX_HEIGHT_MAX, 0, atlas->TexGlyphPadding, NULL); + ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(atlas, spc.pack_info); + + // 6. Pack each source font. No rendering yet, we are working with rectangles in an infinitely tall texture at this point. + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0) + continue; + + stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context*)spc.pack_info, src_tmp.Rects, src_tmp.GlyphsCount); + + // Extend texture height and mark missing glyphs as non-packed so we won't render them. + // FIXME: We are not handling packing failure here (would happen if we got off TEX_HEIGHT_MAX or if a single if larger than TexWidth?) + for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++) + if (src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].was_packed) + atlas->TexHeight = ImMax(atlas->TexHeight, src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].y + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h); + } + + // 7. Allocate texture + atlas->TexHeight = (atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight) ? (atlas->TexHeight + 1) : ImUpperPowerOfTwo(atlas->TexHeight); + atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(1.0f / atlas->TexWidth, 1.0f / atlas->TexHeight); + atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 = (unsigned char*)IM_ALLOC(atlas->TexWidth * atlas->TexHeight); + memset(atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8, 0, atlas->TexWidth * atlas->TexHeight); + spc.pixels = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8; + spc.height = atlas->TexHeight; + + // 8. Render/rasterize font characters into the texture + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i]; + ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0) + continue; + + stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(&spc, &src_tmp.FontInfo, &src_tmp.PackRange, 1, src_tmp.Rects); + + // Apply multiply operator + if (cfg.RasterizerMultiply != 1.0f) + { + unsigned char multiply_table[256]; + ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(multiply_table, cfg.RasterizerMultiply); + stbrp_rect* r = &src_tmp.Rects[0]; + for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++, r++) + if (r->was_packed) + ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(multiply_table, atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8, r->x, r->y, r->w, r->h, atlas->TexWidth * 1); + } + src_tmp.Rects = NULL; + } + + // End packing + stbtt_PackEnd(&spc); + buf_rects.clear(); + + // 9. Setup ImFont and glyphs for runtime + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + // When merging fonts with MergeMode=true: + // - We can have multiple input fonts writing into a same destination font. + // - dst_font->ConfigData is != from cfg which is our source configuration. + ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i]; + ImFont* dst_font = cfg.DstFont; + + const float font_scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels); + int unscaled_ascent, unscaled_descent, unscaled_line_gap; + stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&src_tmp.FontInfo, &unscaled_ascent, &unscaled_descent, &unscaled_line_gap); + + const float ascent = ImFloor(unscaled_ascent * font_scale + ((unscaled_ascent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1)); + const float descent = ImFloor(unscaled_descent * font_scale + ((unscaled_descent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1)); + ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(atlas, dst_font, &cfg, ascent, descent); + const float font_off_x = cfg.GlyphOffset.x; + const float font_off_y = cfg.GlyphOffset.y + IM_ROUND(dst_font->Ascent); + + for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++) + { + // Register glyph + const int codepoint = src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i]; + const stbtt_packedchar& pc = src_tmp.PackedChars[glyph_i]; + stbtt_aligned_quad q; + float unused_x = 0.0f, unused_y = 0.0f; + stbtt_GetPackedQuad(src_tmp.PackedChars, atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight, glyph_i, &unused_x, &unused_y, &q, 0); + dst_font->AddGlyph(&cfg, (ImWchar)codepoint, q.x0 + font_off_x, q.y0 + font_off_y, q.x1 + font_off_x, q.y1 + font_off_y, q.s0, q.t0, q.s1, q.t1, pc.xadvance); + } + } + + // Cleanup + src_tmp_array.clear_destruct(); + + ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(atlas); + return true; +} + +const ImFontBuilderIO* ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype() +{ + static ImFontBuilderIO io; + io.FontBuilder_Build = ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype; + return &io; +} + +#endif // IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE + +void ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(ImFontAtlas* atlas, ImFont* font, ImFontConfig* font_config, float ascent, float descent) +{ + if (!font_config->MergeMode) + { + font->ClearOutputData(); + font->FontSize = font_config->SizePixels; + font->ConfigData = font_config; + font->ConfigDataCount = 0; + font->ContainerAtlas = atlas; + font->Ascent = ascent; + font->Descent = descent; + } + font->ConfigDataCount++; +} + +void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque) +{ + stbrp_context* pack_context = (stbrp_context*)stbrp_context_opaque; + IM_ASSERT(pack_context != NULL); + + ImVector& user_rects = atlas->CustomRects; + IM_ASSERT(user_rects.Size >= 1); // We expect at least the default custom rects to be registered, else something went wrong. +#ifdef __GNUC__ + if (user_rects.Size < 1) { __builtin_unreachable(); } // Workaround for GCC bug if IM_ASSERT() is defined to conditionally throw (see #5343) +#endif + + ImVector pack_rects; + pack_rects.resize(user_rects.Size); + memset(pack_rects.Data, 0, (size_t)pack_rects.size_in_bytes()); + for (int i = 0; i < user_rects.Size; i++) + { + pack_rects[i].w = user_rects[i].Width; + pack_rects[i].h = user_rects[i].Height; + } + stbrp_pack_rects(pack_context, &pack_rects[0], pack_rects.Size); + for (int i = 0; i < pack_rects.Size; i++) + if (pack_rects[i].was_packed) + { + user_rects[i].X = (unsigned short)pack_rects[i].x; + user_rects[i].Y = (unsigned short)pack_rects[i].y; + IM_ASSERT(pack_rects[i].w == user_rects[i].Width && pack_rects[i].h == user_rects[i].Height); + atlas->TexHeight = ImMax(atlas->TexHeight, pack_rects[i].y + pack_rects[i].h); + } +} + +void ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned char in_marker_pixel_value) +{ + IM_ASSERT(x >= 0 && x + w <= atlas->TexWidth); + IM_ASSERT(y >= 0 && y + h <= atlas->TexHeight); + unsigned char* out_pixel = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 + x + (y * atlas->TexWidth); + for (int off_y = 0; off_y < h; off_y++, out_pixel += atlas->TexWidth, in_str += w) + for (int off_x = 0; off_x < w; off_x++) + out_pixel[off_x] = (in_str[off_x] == in_marker_char) ? in_marker_pixel_value : 0x00; +} + +void ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned int in_marker_pixel_value) +{ + IM_ASSERT(x >= 0 && x + w <= atlas->TexWidth); + IM_ASSERT(y >= 0 && y + h <= atlas->TexHeight); + unsigned int* out_pixel = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32 + x + (y * atlas->TexWidth); + for (int off_y = 0; off_y < h; off_y++, out_pixel += atlas->TexWidth, in_str += w) + for (int off_x = 0; off_x < w; off_x++) + out_pixel[off_x] = (in_str[off_x] == in_marker_char) ? in_marker_pixel_value : IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS; +} + +static void ImFontAtlasBuildRenderDefaultTexData(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = atlas->GetCustomRectByIndex(atlas->PackIdMouseCursors); + IM_ASSERT(r->IsPacked()); + + const int w = atlas->TexWidth; + if (!(atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors)) + { + // Render/copy pixels + IM_ASSERT(r->Width == FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W * 2 + 1 && r->Height == FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H); + const int x_for_white = r->X; + const int x_for_black = r->X + FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W + 1; + if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL) + { + ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_white, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, '.', 0xFF); + ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_black, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, 'X', 0xFF); + } + else + { + ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_white, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, '.', IM_COL32_WHITE); + ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_black, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, 'X', IM_COL32_WHITE); + } + } + else + { + // Render 4 white pixels + IM_ASSERT(r->Width == 2 && r->Height == 2); + const int offset = (int)r->X + (int)r->Y * w; + if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL) + { + atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset] = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset + 1] = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset + w] = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset + w + 1] = 0xFF; + } + else + { + atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset] = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset + 1] = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset + w] = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset + w + 1] = IM_COL32_WHITE; + } + } + atlas->TexUvWhitePixel = ImVec2((r->X + 0.5f) * atlas->TexUvScale.x, (r->Y + 0.5f) * atlas->TexUvScale.y); +} + +static void ImFontAtlasBuildRenderLinesTexData(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + if (atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines) + return; + + // This generates a triangular shape in the texture, with the various line widths stacked on top of each other to allow interpolation between them + ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = atlas->GetCustomRectByIndex(atlas->PackIdLines); + IM_ASSERT(r->IsPacked()); + for (unsigned int n = 0; n < IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1; n++) // +1 because of the zero-width row + { + // Each line consists of at least two empty pixels at the ends, with a line of solid pixels in the middle + unsigned int y = n; + unsigned int line_width = n; + unsigned int pad_left = (r->Width - line_width) / 2; + unsigned int pad_right = r->Width - (pad_left + line_width); + + // Write each slice + IM_ASSERT(pad_left + line_width + pad_right == r->Width && y < r->Height); // Make sure we're inside the texture bounds before we start writing pixels + if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL) + { + unsigned char* write_ptr = &atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[r->X + ((r->Y + y) * atlas->TexWidth)]; + for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_left; i++) + *(write_ptr + i) = 0x00; + + for (unsigned int i = 0; i < line_width; i++) + *(write_ptr + pad_left + i) = 0xFF; + + for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_right; i++) + *(write_ptr + pad_left + line_width + i) = 0x00; + } + else + { + unsigned int* write_ptr = &atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[r->X + ((r->Y + y) * atlas->TexWidth)]; + for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_left; i++) + *(write_ptr + i) = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 0); + + for (unsigned int i = 0; i < line_width; i++) + *(write_ptr + pad_left + i) = IM_COL32_WHITE; + + for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_right; i++) + *(write_ptr + pad_left + line_width + i) = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 0); + } + + // Calculate UVs for this line + ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2((float)(r->X + pad_left - 1), (float)(r->Y + y)) * atlas->TexUvScale; + ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2((float)(r->X + pad_left + line_width + 1), (float)(r->Y + y + 1)) * atlas->TexUvScale; + float half_v = (uv0.y + uv1.y) * 0.5f; // Calculate a constant V in the middle of the row to avoid sampling artifacts + atlas->TexUvLines[n] = ImVec4(uv0.x, half_v, uv1.x, half_v); + } +} + +// Register the rectangles we need for the rounded corner images +static void ImFontAtlasBuildRegisterShadowCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + if (atlas->ShadowRectIds[0] >= 0) + return; + + // ShadowRectIds[0] is the rectangle for rectangular shadows + // ShadowRectIds[1] is the rectangle for convex shadows + + // The actual size we want to reserve, including padding + const ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig* shadow_cfg = &atlas->ShadowTexConfig; + const unsigned int effective_size = shadow_cfg->CalcRectTexSize() + shadow_cfg->GetRectTexPadding(); + atlas->ShadowRectIds[0] = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(effective_size, effective_size); + atlas->ShadowRectIds[1] = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(shadow_cfg->CalcConvexTexWidth() + shadow_cfg->GetConvexTexPadding(), shadow_cfg->CalcConvexTexHeight() + shadow_cfg->GetConvexTexPadding()); +} + +// Calculates the signed distance from sample_pos to the nearest point on the rectangle defined by rect_min->rect_max +static float DistanceFromRectangle(const ImVec2& sample_pos, const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max) +{ + ImVec2 rect_centre = (rect_min + rect_max) * 0.5f; + ImVec2 rect_half_size = (rect_max - rect_min) * 0.5f; + ImVec2 local_sample_pos = sample_pos - rect_centre; + ImVec2 axis_dist = ImVec2(ImFabs(local_sample_pos.x), ImFabs(local_sample_pos.y)) - rect_half_size; + float out_dist = ImLength(ImVec2(ImMax(axis_dist.x, 0.0f), ImMax(axis_dist.y, 0.0f)), 0.00001f); + float in_dist = ImMin(ImMax(axis_dist.x, axis_dist.y), 0.0f); + return out_dist + in_dist; +} + +// Calculates the signed distance from sample_pos to the point given +static float DistanceFromPoint(const ImVec2& sample_pos, const ImVec2& point) +{ + return ImLength(sample_pos - point, 0.0f); +} + +// Perform a single Gaussian blur pass with a fixed kernel size and sigma +static void GaussianBlurPass(float* src, float* dest, int size, bool horizontal) +{ + // See http://dev.theomader.com/gaussian-kernel-calculator/ + const float coefficients[] = { 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.000003f, 0.000229f, 0.005977f, 0.060598f, 0.24173f, 0.382925f, 0.24173f, 0.060598f, 0.005977f, 0.000229f, 0.000003f, 0.0f, 0.0f }; + const int kernel_size = IM_ARRAYSIZE(coefficients); + const int sample_step = horizontal ? 1 : size; + + float* read_ptr = src; + float* write_ptr = dest; + for (int y = 0; y < size; y++) + for (int x = 0; x < size; x++) + { + float result = 0.0f; + int current_offset = (horizontal ? x : y) - ((kernel_size - 1) >> 1); + float* sample_ptr = read_ptr - (((kernel_size - 1) >> 1) * sample_step); + for (int j = 0; j < kernel_size; j++) + { + if (current_offset >= 0 && current_offset < size) + result += (*sample_ptr) * coefficients[j]; + current_offset++; + sample_ptr += sample_step; + } + read_ptr++; + *(write_ptr++) = result; + } +} + +// Perform an in-place Gaussian blur of a square array of floats with a fixed kernel size and sigma +// Uses a stack allocation for the temporary data so potentially dangerous with large size values +static void GaussianBlur(float* data, int size) +{ + // Do two passes, one from data into temp and then the second back to data again + float* temp = (float*)alloca(size * size * sizeof(float)); + GaussianBlurPass(data, temp, size, true); + GaussianBlurPass(temp, data, size, false); +} + +// Generate the actual pixel data for rounded corners in the atlas +static void ImFontAtlasBuildRenderShadowTexData(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + IM_ASSERT(atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL || atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32 != NULL); + IM_ASSERT(atlas->ShadowRectIds[0] >= 0 && atlas->ShadowRectIds[1] >= 0); + + // Because of the blur, we have to generate the full 3x3 texture here, and then we chop that down to just the 2x2 section we need later. + // 'size' correspond to the our 3x3 size, whereas 'shadow_tex_size' correspond to our 2x2 version where duplicate mirrored corners are not stored. + const ImFontAtlasShadowTexConfig* shadow_cfg = &atlas->ShadowTexConfig; + + // The rectangular shadow texture + { + const int size = shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize + shadow_cfg->TexEdgeSize + shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize; + const int corner_size = shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize; + const int edge_size = shadow_cfg->TexEdgeSize; + + // The bounds of the rectangle we are generating the shadow from + const ImVec2 shadow_rect_min((float)corner_size, (float)corner_size); + const ImVec2 shadow_rect_max((float)(corner_size + edge_size), (float)(corner_size + edge_size)); + + // Remove the padding we added + ImFontAtlasCustomRect r = atlas->CustomRects[atlas->ShadowRectIds[0]]; + const int padding = shadow_cfg->GetRectTexPadding(); + r.X += (unsigned short)padding; + r.Y += (unsigned short)padding; + r.Width -= (unsigned short)padding * 2; + r.Height -= (unsigned short)padding * 2; + + // Generate distance field + // We draw the actual texture content by evaluating the distance field for the inner rectangle + float* tex_data = (float*)alloca(size * size * sizeof(float)); + for (int y = 0; y < size; y++) + for (int x = 0; x < size; x++) + { + float dist = DistanceFromRectangle(ImVec2((float)x, (float)y), shadow_rect_min, shadow_rect_max); + float alpha = 1.0f - ImMin(ImMax(dist + shadow_cfg->TexDistanceFieldOffset, 0.0f) / ImMax(shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize + shadow_cfg->TexDistanceFieldOffset, 0.001f), 1.0f); + alpha = ImPow(alpha, shadow_cfg->TexFalloffPower); // Apply power curve to give a nicer falloff + tex_data[x + (y * size)] = alpha; + } + + // Blur + if (shadow_cfg->TexBlur) + GaussianBlur(tex_data, size); + + // Copy to texture, truncating to the actual required texture size (the bottom/right of the source data is chopped off, as we don't need it - see below). The truncated size is essentially the top 2x2 of our data, plus a little bit of padding for sampling. + const int tex_w = atlas->TexWidth; + const int shadow_tex_size = shadow_cfg->CalcRectTexSize(); + for (int y = 0; y < shadow_tex_size; y++) + for (int x = 0; x < shadow_tex_size; x++) + { + const unsigned int offset = (int)(r.X + x) + (int)(r.Y + y) * tex_w; + const float alpha_f = tex_data[x + (y * size)]; + const unsigned char alpha_8 = (unsigned char)(0xFF * alpha_f); + if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8) + atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset] = alpha_8; + else + atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset] = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, alpha_8); + } + + // Generate UVs for each of the nine sections, which are arranged in a 3x3 grid starting from 0 in the top-left and going across then down + for (int i = 0; i < 9; i++) + { + // The third row/column of the 3x3 grid are generated by flipping the appropriate chunks of the upper 2x2 grid. + bool flip_h = false; // Do we need to flip the UVs horizontally? + bool flip_v = false; // Do we need to flip the UVs vertically? + + ImFontAtlasCustomRect sub_rect = r; + switch (i % 3) + { + case 0: sub_rect.Width = (unsigned short)corner_size; break; + case 1: sub_rect.X += (unsigned short)corner_size; sub_rect.Width = (unsigned short)edge_size; break; + case 2: sub_rect.Width = (unsigned short)corner_size; flip_h = true; break; + } + + switch (i / 3) + { + case 0: sub_rect.Height = (unsigned short)corner_size; break; + case 1: sub_rect.Y += (unsigned short)corner_size; sub_rect.Height = (unsigned short)edge_size; break; + case 2: sub_rect.Height = (unsigned short)corner_size; flip_v = true; break; + } + + ImVec2 uv0, uv1; + atlas->CalcCustomRectUV(&sub_rect, &uv0, &uv1); + atlas->ShadowRectUvs[i] = ImVec4(flip_h ? uv1.x : uv0.x, flip_v ? uv1.y : uv0.y, flip_h ? uv0.x : uv1.x, flip_v ? uv0.y : uv1.y); + } + } + + // The convex shape shadow texture + { + const int size = shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize * 2; + const int padding = shadow_cfg->GetConvexTexPadding(); + + // Generate distance field + // We draw the actual texture content by evaluating the distance field for the distance from a center point + ImFontAtlasCustomRect r = atlas->CustomRects[atlas->ShadowRectIds[1]]; + ImVec2 center_point(size * 0.5f, size * 0.5f); + float* tex_data = (float*)alloca(size * size * sizeof(float)); + for (int y = 0; y < size; y++) + for (int x = 0; x < size; x++) + { + float dist = DistanceFromPoint(ImVec2((float)x, (float)y), center_point); + float alpha = 1.0f - ImMin(ImMax((float)dist + shadow_cfg->TexDistanceFieldOffset, 0.0f) / ImMax((float)shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize + shadow_cfg->TexDistanceFieldOffset, 0.001f), 1.0f); + alpha = ImPow(alpha, shadow_cfg->TexFalloffPower); // Apply power curve to give a nicer falloff + tex_data[x + (y * size)] = alpha; + } + + // Blur + if (shadow_cfg->TexBlur) + GaussianBlur(tex_data, size); + + // Copy to texture, truncating to the actual required texture size (the bottom/right of the source data is chopped off, as we don't need it - see below) + // We push the data down and right by the amount we padded the top of the texture (see CalcConvexTexWidth/CalcConvexTexHeight) for details + const int padded_size = (int)(shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize / ImCos(IM_PI * 0.25f)); + const int src_x_offset = padding + (padded_size - shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize); + const int src_y_offset = padding + (padded_size - shadow_cfg->TexCornerSize); + + const int tex_width = shadow_cfg->CalcConvexTexWidth(); + const int tex_height = shadow_cfg->CalcConvexTexHeight(); + const int tex_w = atlas->TexWidth; + for (int y = 0; y < tex_height; y++) + for (int x = 0; x < tex_width; x++) + { + const int src_x = ImClamp(x - src_x_offset, 0, size - 1); + const int src_y = ImClamp(y - src_y_offset, 0, size - 1); + const float alpha_f = tex_data[src_x + (src_y * size)]; + const unsigned char alpha_8 = (unsigned char)(0xFF * alpha_f); + const unsigned int offset = (int)(r.X + x) + (int)(r.Y + y) * tex_w; + if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8) + atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset] = alpha_8; + else + atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset] = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, alpha_8); + } + + // Remove the padding we added + r.X += (unsigned short)padding; + r.Y += (unsigned short)padding; + r.Width = (unsigned short)(tex_width - (padding * 2)); + r.Height = (unsigned short)(tex_height - (padding * 2)); + + // Generate UVs + ImVec2 uv0, uv1; + atlas->CalcCustomRectUV(&r, &uv0, &uv1); + atlas->ShadowRectUvs[9] = ImVec4(uv0.x, uv0.y, uv1.x, uv1.y); + } +} + +// Note: this is called / shared by both the stb_truetype and the FreeType builder +void ImFontAtlasBuildInit(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + // Register texture region for mouse cursors or standard white pixels + if (atlas->PackIdMouseCursors < 0) + { + if (!(atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors)) + atlas->PackIdMouseCursors = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W * 2 + 1, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H); + else + atlas->PackIdMouseCursors = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(2, 2); + } + + // Register texture region for thick lines + // The +2 here is to give space for the end caps, whilst height +1 is to accommodate the fact we have a zero-width row + if (atlas->PackIdLines < 0) + { + if (!(atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines)) + atlas->PackIdLines = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 2, IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1); + } + + ImFontAtlasBuildRegisterShadowCustomRects(atlas); +} + +// This is called/shared by both the stb_truetype and the FreeType builder. +void ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + // Render into our custom data blocks + IM_ASSERT(atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL || atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32 != NULL); + ImFontAtlasBuildRenderDefaultTexData(atlas); + ImFontAtlasBuildRenderLinesTexData(atlas); + ImFontAtlasBuildRenderShadowTexData(atlas); + + // Register custom rectangle glyphs + for (int i = 0; i < atlas->CustomRects.Size; i++) + { + const ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = &atlas->CustomRects[i]; + if (r->Font == NULL || r->GlyphID == 0) + continue; + + // Will ignore ImFontConfig settings: GlyphMinAdvanceX, GlyphMinAdvanceY, GlyphExtraSpacing, PixelSnapH + IM_ASSERT(r->Font->ContainerAtlas == atlas); + ImVec2 uv0, uv1; + atlas->CalcCustomRectUV(r, &uv0, &uv1); + r->Font->AddGlyph(NULL, (ImWchar)r->GlyphID, r->GlyphOffset.x, r->GlyphOffset.y, r->GlyphOffset.x + r->Width, r->GlyphOffset.y + r->Height, uv0.x, uv0.y, uv1.x, uv1.y, r->GlyphAdvanceX); + } + + // Build all fonts lookup tables + for (ImFont* font : atlas->Fonts) + if (font->DirtyLookupTables) + font->BuildLookupTable(); + + atlas->TexReady = true; +} + +// Retrieve list of range (2 int per range, values are inclusive) +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault() +{ + static const ImWchar ranges[] = + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement + 0, + }; + return &ranges[0]; +} + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesGreek() +{ + static const ImWchar ranges[] = + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement + 0x0370, 0x03FF, // Greek and Coptic + 0, + }; + return &ranges[0]; +} + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesKorean() +{ + static const ImWchar ranges[] = + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement + 0x3131, 0x3163, // Korean alphabets + 0xAC00, 0xD7A3, // Korean characters + 0xFFFD, 0xFFFD, // Invalid + 0, + }; + return &ranges[0]; +} + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesChineseFull() +{ + static const ImWchar ranges[] = + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement + 0x2000, 0x206F, // General Punctuation + 0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana + 0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions + 0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters + 0xFFFD, 0xFFFD, // Invalid + 0x4e00, 0x9FAF, // CJK Ideograms + 0, + }; + return &ranges[0]; +} + +static void UnpackAccumulativeOffsetsIntoRanges(int base_codepoint, const short* accumulative_offsets, int accumulative_offsets_count, ImWchar* out_ranges) +{ + for (int n = 0; n < accumulative_offsets_count; n++, out_ranges += 2) + { + out_ranges[0] = out_ranges[1] = (ImWchar)(base_codepoint + accumulative_offsets[n]); + base_codepoint += accumulative_offsets[n]; + } + out_ranges[0] = 0; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas glyph ranges helpers +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesChineseSimplifiedCommon() +{ + // Store 2500 regularly used characters for Simplified Chinese. + // Sourced from https://zh.wiktionary.org/wiki/%E9%99%84%E5%BD%95:%E7%8E%B0%E4%BB%A3%E6%B1%89%E8%AF%AD%E5%B8%B8%E7%94%A8%E5%AD%97%E8%A1%A8 + // This table covers 97.97% of all characters used during the month in July, 1987. + // You can use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters. + // (Stored as accumulative offsets from the initial unicode codepoint 0x4E00. This encoding is designed to helps us compact the source code size.) + static const short accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00[] = + { + 0,1,2,4,1,1,1,1,2,1,3,2,1,2,2,1,1,1,1,1,5,2,1,2,3,3,3,2,2,4,1,1,1,2,1,5,2,3,1,2,1,2,1,1,2,1,1,2,2,1,4,1,1,1,1,5,10,1,2,19,2,1,2,1,2,1,2,1,2, + 1,5,1,6,3,2,1,2,2,1,1,1,4,8,5,1,1,4,1,1,3,1,2,1,5,1,2,1,1,1,10,1,1,5,2,4,6,1,4,2,2,2,12,2,1,1,6,1,1,1,4,1,1,4,6,5,1,4,2,2,4,10,7,1,1,4,2,4, + 2,1,4,3,6,10,12,5,7,2,14,2,9,1,1,6,7,10,4,7,13,1,5,4,8,4,1,1,2,28,5,6,1,1,5,2,5,20,2,2,9,8,11,2,9,17,1,8,6,8,27,4,6,9,20,11,27,6,68,2,2,1,1, + 1,2,1,2,2,7,6,11,3,3,1,1,3,1,2,1,1,1,1,1,3,1,1,8,3,4,1,5,7,2,1,4,4,8,4,2,1,2,1,1,4,5,6,3,6,2,12,3,1,3,9,2,4,3,4,1,5,3,3,1,3,7,1,5,1,1,1,1,2, + 3,4,5,2,3,2,6,1,1,2,1,7,1,7,3,4,5,15,2,2,1,5,3,22,19,2,1,1,1,1,2,5,1,1,1,6,1,1,12,8,2,9,18,22,4,1,1,5,1,16,1,2,7,10,15,1,1,6,2,4,1,2,4,1,6, + 1,1,3,2,4,1,6,4,5,1,2,1,1,2,1,10,3,1,3,2,1,9,3,2,5,7,2,19,4,3,6,1,1,1,1,1,4,3,2,1,1,1,2,5,3,1,1,1,2,2,1,1,2,1,1,2,1,3,1,1,1,3,7,1,4,1,1,2,1, + 1,2,1,2,4,4,3,8,1,1,1,2,1,3,5,1,3,1,3,4,6,2,2,14,4,6,6,11,9,1,15,3,1,28,5,2,5,5,3,1,3,4,5,4,6,14,3,2,3,5,21,2,7,20,10,1,2,19,2,4,28,28,2,3, + 2,1,14,4,1,26,28,42,12,40,3,52,79,5,14,17,3,2,2,11,3,4,6,3,1,8,2,23,4,5,8,10,4,2,7,3,5,1,1,6,3,1,2,2,2,5,28,1,1,7,7,20,5,3,29,3,17,26,1,8,4, + 27,3,6,11,23,5,3,4,6,13,24,16,6,5,10,25,35,7,3,2,3,3,14,3,6,2,6,1,4,2,3,8,2,1,1,3,3,3,4,1,1,13,2,2,4,5,2,1,14,14,1,2,2,1,4,5,2,3,1,14,3,12, + 3,17,2,16,5,1,2,1,8,9,3,19,4,2,2,4,17,25,21,20,28,75,1,10,29,103,4,1,2,1,1,4,2,4,1,2,3,24,2,2,2,1,1,2,1,3,8,1,1,1,2,1,1,3,1,1,1,6,1,5,3,1,1, + 1,3,4,1,1,5,2,1,5,6,13,9,16,1,1,1,1,3,2,3,2,4,5,2,5,2,2,3,7,13,7,2,2,1,1,1,1,2,3,3,2,1,6,4,9,2,1,14,2,14,2,1,18,3,4,14,4,11,41,15,23,15,23, + 176,1,3,4,1,1,1,1,5,3,1,2,3,7,3,1,1,2,1,2,4,4,6,2,4,1,9,7,1,10,5,8,16,29,1,1,2,2,3,1,3,5,2,4,5,4,1,1,2,2,3,3,7,1,6,10,1,17,1,44,4,6,2,1,1,6, + 5,4,2,10,1,6,9,2,8,1,24,1,2,13,7,8,8,2,1,4,1,3,1,3,3,5,2,5,10,9,4,9,12,2,1,6,1,10,1,1,7,7,4,10,8,3,1,13,4,3,1,6,1,3,5,2,1,2,17,16,5,2,16,6, + 1,4,2,1,3,3,6,8,5,11,11,1,3,3,2,4,6,10,9,5,7,4,7,4,7,1,1,4,2,1,3,6,8,7,1,6,11,5,5,3,24,9,4,2,7,13,5,1,8,82,16,61,1,1,1,4,2,2,16,10,3,8,1,1, + 6,4,2,1,3,1,1,1,4,3,8,4,2,2,1,1,1,1,1,6,3,5,1,1,4,6,9,2,1,1,1,2,1,7,2,1,6,1,5,4,4,3,1,8,1,3,3,1,3,2,2,2,2,3,1,6,1,2,1,2,1,3,7,1,8,2,1,2,1,5, + 2,5,3,5,10,1,2,1,1,3,2,5,11,3,9,3,5,1,1,5,9,1,2,1,5,7,9,9,8,1,3,3,3,6,8,2,3,2,1,1,32,6,1,2,15,9,3,7,13,1,3,10,13,2,14,1,13,10,2,1,3,10,4,15, + 2,15,15,10,1,3,9,6,9,32,25,26,47,7,3,2,3,1,6,3,4,3,2,8,5,4,1,9,4,2,2,19,10,6,2,3,8,1,2,2,4,2,1,9,4,4,4,6,4,8,9,2,3,1,1,1,1,3,5,5,1,3,8,4,6, + 2,1,4,12,1,5,3,7,13,2,5,8,1,6,1,2,5,14,6,1,5,2,4,8,15,5,1,23,6,62,2,10,1,1,8,1,2,2,10,4,2,2,9,2,1,1,3,2,3,1,5,3,3,2,1,3,8,1,1,1,11,3,1,1,4, + 3,7,1,14,1,2,3,12,5,2,5,1,6,7,5,7,14,11,1,3,1,8,9,12,2,1,11,8,4,4,2,6,10,9,13,1,1,3,1,5,1,3,2,4,4,1,18,2,3,14,11,4,29,4,2,7,1,3,13,9,2,2,5, + 3,5,20,7,16,8,5,72,34,6,4,22,12,12,28,45,36,9,7,39,9,191,1,1,1,4,11,8,4,9,2,3,22,1,1,1,1,4,17,1,7,7,1,11,31,10,2,4,8,2,3,2,1,4,2,16,4,32,2, + 3,19,13,4,9,1,5,2,14,8,1,1,3,6,19,6,5,1,16,6,2,10,8,5,1,2,3,1,5,5,1,11,6,6,1,3,3,2,6,3,8,1,1,4,10,7,5,7,7,5,8,9,2,1,3,4,1,1,3,1,3,3,2,6,16, + 1,4,6,3,1,10,6,1,3,15,2,9,2,10,25,13,9,16,6,2,2,10,11,4,3,9,1,2,6,6,5,4,30,40,1,10,7,12,14,33,6,3,6,7,3,1,3,1,11,14,4,9,5,12,11,49,18,51,31, + 140,31,2,2,1,5,1,8,1,10,1,4,4,3,24,1,10,1,3,6,6,16,3,4,5,2,1,4,2,57,10,6,22,2,22,3,7,22,6,10,11,36,18,16,33,36,2,5,5,1,1,1,4,10,1,4,13,2,7, + 5,2,9,3,4,1,7,43,3,7,3,9,14,7,9,1,11,1,1,3,7,4,18,13,1,14,1,3,6,10,73,2,2,30,6,1,11,18,19,13,22,3,46,42,37,89,7,3,16,34,2,2,3,9,1,7,1,1,1,2, + 2,4,10,7,3,10,3,9,5,28,9,2,6,13,7,3,1,3,10,2,7,2,11,3,6,21,54,85,2,1,4,2,2,1,39,3,21,2,2,5,1,1,1,4,1,1,3,4,15,1,3,2,4,4,2,3,8,2,20,1,8,7,13, + 4,1,26,6,2,9,34,4,21,52,10,4,4,1,5,12,2,11,1,7,2,30,12,44,2,30,1,1,3,6,16,9,17,39,82,2,2,24,7,1,7,3,16,9,14,44,2,1,2,1,2,3,5,2,4,1,6,7,5,3, + 2,6,1,11,5,11,2,1,18,19,8,1,3,24,29,2,1,3,5,2,2,1,13,6,5,1,46,11,3,5,1,1,5,8,2,10,6,12,6,3,7,11,2,4,16,13,2,5,1,1,2,2,5,2,28,5,2,23,10,8,4, + 4,22,39,95,38,8,14,9,5,1,13,5,4,3,13,12,11,1,9,1,27,37,2,5,4,4,63,211,95,2,2,2,1,3,5,2,1,1,2,2,1,1,1,3,2,4,1,2,1,1,5,2,2,1,1,2,3,1,3,1,1,1, + 3,1,4,2,1,3,6,1,1,3,7,15,5,3,2,5,3,9,11,4,2,22,1,6,3,8,7,1,4,28,4,16,3,3,25,4,4,27,27,1,4,1,2,2,7,1,3,5,2,28,8,2,14,1,8,6,16,25,3,3,3,14,3, + 3,1,1,2,1,4,6,3,8,4,1,1,1,2,3,6,10,6,2,3,18,3,2,5,5,4,3,1,5,2,5,4,23,7,6,12,6,4,17,11,9,5,1,1,10,5,12,1,1,11,26,33,7,3,6,1,17,7,1,5,12,1,11, + 2,4,1,8,14,17,23,1,2,1,7,8,16,11,9,6,5,2,6,4,16,2,8,14,1,11,8,9,1,1,1,9,25,4,11,19,7,2,15,2,12,8,52,7,5,19,2,16,4,36,8,1,16,8,24,26,4,6,2,9, + 5,4,36,3,28,12,25,15,37,27,17,12,59,38,5,32,127,1,2,9,17,14,4,1,2,1,1,8,11,50,4,14,2,19,16,4,17,5,4,5,26,12,45,2,23,45,104,30,12,8,3,10,2,2, + 3,3,1,4,20,7,2,9,6,15,2,20,1,3,16,4,11,15,6,134,2,5,59,1,2,2,2,1,9,17,3,26,137,10,211,59,1,2,4,1,4,1,1,1,2,6,2,3,1,1,2,3,2,3,1,3,4,4,2,3,3, + 1,4,3,1,7,2,2,3,1,2,1,3,3,3,2,2,3,2,1,3,14,6,1,3,2,9,6,15,27,9,34,145,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,2,2,2,3,1,2,1,1,1,2,3,5,8,3,5,2,4,1,3,2,2,2,12, + 4,1,1,1,10,4,5,1,20,4,16,1,15,9,5,12,2,9,2,5,4,2,26,19,7,1,26,4,30,12,15,42,1,6,8,172,1,1,4,2,1,1,11,2,2,4,2,1,2,1,10,8,1,2,1,4,5,1,2,5,1,8, + 4,1,3,4,2,1,6,2,1,3,4,1,2,1,1,1,1,12,5,7,2,4,3,1,1,1,3,3,6,1,2,2,3,3,3,2,1,2,12,14,11,6,6,4,12,2,8,1,7,10,1,35,7,4,13,15,4,3,23,21,28,52,5, + 26,5,6,1,7,10,2,7,53,3,2,1,1,1,2,163,532,1,10,11,1,3,3,4,8,2,8,6,2,2,23,22,4,2,2,4,2,1,3,1,3,3,5,9,8,2,1,2,8,1,10,2,12,21,20,15,105,2,3,1,1, + 3,2,3,1,1,2,5,1,4,15,11,19,1,1,1,1,5,4,5,1,1,2,5,3,5,12,1,2,5,1,11,1,1,15,9,1,4,5,3,26,8,2,1,3,1,1,15,19,2,12,1,2,5,2,7,2,19,2,20,6,26,7,5, + 2,2,7,34,21,13,70,2,128,1,1,2,1,1,2,1,1,3,2,2,2,15,1,4,1,3,4,42,10,6,1,49,85,8,1,2,1,1,4,4,2,3,6,1,5,7,4,3,211,4,1,2,1,2,5,1,2,4,2,2,6,5,6, + 10,3,4,48,100,6,2,16,296,5,27,387,2,2,3,7,16,8,5,38,15,39,21,9,10,3,7,59,13,27,21,47,5,21,6 + }; + static ImWchar base_ranges[] = // not zero-terminated + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement + 0x2000, 0x206F, // General Punctuation + 0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana + 0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions + 0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters + 0xFFFD, 0xFFFD // Invalid + }; + static ImWchar full_ranges[IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges) + IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00) * 2 + 1] = { 0 }; + if (!full_ranges[0]) + { + memcpy(full_ranges, base_ranges, sizeof(base_ranges)); + UnpackAccumulativeOffsetsIntoRanges(0x4E00, accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00, IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00), full_ranges + IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges)); + } + return &full_ranges[0]; +} + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesJapanese() +{ + // 2999 ideograms code points for Japanese + // - 2136 Joyo (meaning "for regular use" or "for common use") Kanji code points + // - 863 Jinmeiyo (meaning "for personal name") Kanji code points + // - Sourced from official information provided by the government agencies of Japan: + // - List of Joyo Kanji by the Agency for Cultural Affairs + // - https://www.bunka.go.jp/kokugo_nihongo/sisaku/joho/joho/kijun/naikaku/kanji/ + // - List of Jinmeiyo Kanji by the Ministry of Justice + // - http://www.moj.go.jp/MINJI/minji86.html + // - Available under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International (CC BY 4.0). + // - https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/legalcode + // - You can generate this code by the script at: + // - https://github.com/vaiorabbit/everyday_use_kanji + // - References: + // - List of Joyo Kanji + // - (Wikipedia) https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_j%C5%8Dy%C5%8D_kanji + // - List of Jinmeiyo Kanji + // - (Wikipedia) https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jinmeiy%C5%8D_kanji + // - Missing 1 Joyo Kanji: U+20B9F (Kun'yomi: Shikaru, On'yomi: Shitsu,shichi), see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/pull/3627 for details. + // You can use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters. + // (Stored as accumulative offsets from the initial unicode codepoint 0x4E00. This encoding is designed to helps us compact the source code size.) + static const short accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00[] = + { + 0,1,2,4,1,1,1,1,2,1,3,3,2,2,1,5,3,5,7,5,6,1,2,1,7,2,6,3,1,8,1,1,4,1,1,18,2,11,2,6,2,1,2,1,5,1,2,1,3,1,2,1,2,3,3,1,1,2,3,1,1,1,12,7,9,1,4,5,1, + 1,2,1,10,1,1,9,2,2,4,5,6,9,3,1,1,1,1,9,3,18,5,2,2,2,2,1,6,3,7,1,1,1,1,2,2,4,2,1,23,2,10,4,3,5,2,4,10,2,4,13,1,6,1,9,3,1,1,6,6,7,6,3,1,2,11,3, + 2,2,3,2,15,2,2,5,4,3,6,4,1,2,5,2,12,16,6,13,9,13,2,1,1,7,16,4,7,1,19,1,5,1,2,2,7,7,8,2,6,5,4,9,18,7,4,5,9,13,11,8,15,2,1,1,1,2,1,2,2,1,2,2,8, + 2,9,3,3,1,1,4,4,1,1,1,4,9,1,4,3,5,5,2,7,5,3,4,8,2,1,13,2,3,3,1,14,1,1,4,5,1,3,6,1,5,2,1,1,3,3,3,3,1,1,2,7,6,6,7,1,4,7,6,1,1,1,1,1,12,3,3,9,5, + 2,6,1,5,6,1,2,3,18,2,4,14,4,1,3,6,1,1,6,3,5,5,3,2,2,2,2,12,3,1,4,2,3,2,3,11,1,7,4,1,2,1,3,17,1,9,1,24,1,1,4,2,2,4,1,2,7,1,1,1,3,1,2,2,4,15,1, + 1,2,1,1,2,1,5,2,5,20,2,5,9,1,10,8,7,6,1,1,1,1,1,1,6,2,1,2,8,1,1,1,1,5,1,1,3,1,1,1,1,3,1,1,12,4,1,3,1,1,1,1,1,10,3,1,7,5,13,1,2,3,4,6,1,1,30, + 2,9,9,1,15,38,11,3,1,8,24,7,1,9,8,10,2,1,9,31,2,13,6,2,9,4,49,5,2,15,2,1,10,2,1,1,1,2,2,6,15,30,35,3,14,18,8,1,16,10,28,12,19,45,38,1,3,2,3, + 13,2,1,7,3,6,5,3,4,3,1,5,7,8,1,5,3,18,5,3,6,1,21,4,24,9,24,40,3,14,3,21,3,2,1,2,4,2,3,1,15,15,6,5,1,1,3,1,5,6,1,9,7,3,3,2,1,4,3,8,21,5,16,4, + 5,2,10,11,11,3,6,3,2,9,3,6,13,1,2,1,1,1,1,11,12,6,6,1,4,2,6,5,2,1,1,3,3,6,13,3,1,1,5,1,2,3,3,14,2,1,2,2,2,5,1,9,5,1,1,6,12,3,12,3,4,13,2,14, + 2,8,1,17,5,1,16,4,2,2,21,8,9,6,23,20,12,25,19,9,38,8,3,21,40,25,33,13,4,3,1,4,1,2,4,1,2,5,26,2,1,1,2,1,3,6,2,1,1,1,1,1,1,2,3,1,1,1,9,2,3,1,1, + 1,3,6,3,2,1,1,6,6,1,8,2,2,2,1,4,1,2,3,2,7,3,2,4,1,2,1,2,2,1,1,1,1,1,3,1,2,5,4,10,9,4,9,1,1,1,1,1,1,5,3,2,1,6,4,9,6,1,10,2,31,17,8,3,7,5,40,1, + 7,7,1,6,5,2,10,7,8,4,15,39,25,6,28,47,18,10,7,1,3,1,1,2,1,1,1,3,3,3,1,1,1,3,4,2,1,4,1,3,6,10,7,8,6,2,2,1,3,3,2,5,8,7,9,12,2,15,1,1,4,1,2,1,1, + 1,3,2,1,3,3,5,6,2,3,2,10,1,4,2,8,1,1,1,11,6,1,21,4,16,3,1,3,1,4,2,3,6,5,1,3,1,1,3,3,4,6,1,1,10,4,2,7,10,4,7,4,2,9,4,3,1,1,1,4,1,8,3,4,1,3,1, + 6,1,4,2,1,4,7,2,1,8,1,4,5,1,1,2,2,4,6,2,7,1,10,1,1,3,4,11,10,8,21,4,6,1,3,5,2,1,2,28,5,5,2,3,13,1,2,3,1,4,2,1,5,20,3,8,11,1,3,3,3,1,8,10,9,2, + 10,9,2,3,1,1,2,4,1,8,3,6,1,7,8,6,11,1,4,29,8,4,3,1,2,7,13,1,4,1,6,2,6,12,12,2,20,3,2,3,6,4,8,9,2,7,34,5,1,18,6,1,1,4,4,5,7,9,1,2,2,4,3,4,1,7, + 2,2,2,6,2,3,25,5,3,6,1,4,6,7,4,2,1,4,2,13,6,4,4,3,1,5,3,4,4,3,2,1,1,4,1,2,1,1,3,1,11,1,6,3,1,7,3,6,2,8,8,6,9,3,4,11,3,2,10,12,2,5,11,1,6,4,5, + 3,1,8,5,4,6,6,3,5,1,1,3,2,1,2,2,6,17,12,1,10,1,6,12,1,6,6,19,9,6,16,1,13,4,4,15,7,17,6,11,9,15,12,6,7,2,1,2,2,15,9,3,21,4,6,49,18,7,3,2,3,1, + 6,8,2,2,6,2,9,1,3,6,4,4,1,2,16,2,5,2,1,6,2,3,5,3,1,2,5,1,2,1,9,3,1,8,6,4,8,11,3,1,1,1,1,3,1,13,8,4,1,3,2,2,1,4,1,11,1,5,2,1,5,2,5,8,6,1,1,7, + 4,3,8,3,2,7,2,1,5,1,5,2,4,7,6,2,8,5,1,11,4,5,3,6,18,1,2,13,3,3,1,21,1,1,4,1,4,1,1,1,8,1,2,2,7,1,2,4,2,2,9,2,1,1,1,4,3,6,3,12,5,1,1,1,5,6,3,2, + 4,8,2,2,4,2,7,1,8,9,5,2,3,2,1,3,2,13,7,14,6,5,1,1,2,1,4,2,23,2,1,1,6,3,1,4,1,15,3,1,7,3,9,14,1,3,1,4,1,1,5,8,1,3,8,3,8,15,11,4,14,4,4,2,5,5, + 1,7,1,6,14,7,7,8,5,15,4,8,6,5,6,2,1,13,1,20,15,11,9,2,5,6,2,11,2,6,2,5,1,5,8,4,13,19,25,4,1,1,11,1,34,2,5,9,14,6,2,2,6,1,1,14,1,3,14,13,1,6, + 12,21,14,14,6,32,17,8,32,9,28,1,2,4,11,8,3,1,14,2,5,15,1,1,1,1,3,6,4,1,3,4,11,3,1,1,11,30,1,5,1,4,1,5,8,1,1,3,2,4,3,17,35,2,6,12,17,3,1,6,2, + 1,1,12,2,7,3,3,2,1,16,2,8,3,6,5,4,7,3,3,8,1,9,8,5,1,2,1,3,2,8,1,2,9,12,1,1,2,3,8,3,24,12,4,3,7,5,8,3,3,3,3,3,3,1,23,10,3,1,2,2,6,3,1,16,1,16, + 22,3,10,4,11,6,9,7,7,3,6,2,2,2,4,10,2,1,1,2,8,7,1,6,4,1,3,3,3,5,10,12,12,2,3,12,8,15,1,1,16,6,6,1,5,9,11,4,11,4,2,6,12,1,17,5,13,1,4,9,5,1,11, + 2,1,8,1,5,7,28,8,3,5,10,2,17,3,38,22,1,2,18,12,10,4,38,18,1,4,44,19,4,1,8,4,1,12,1,4,31,12,1,14,7,75,7,5,10,6,6,13,3,2,11,11,3,2,5,28,15,6,18, + 18,5,6,4,3,16,1,7,18,7,36,3,5,3,1,7,1,9,1,10,7,2,4,2,6,2,9,7,4,3,32,12,3,7,10,2,23,16,3,1,12,3,31,4,11,1,3,8,9,5,1,30,15,6,12,3,2,2,11,19,9, + 14,2,6,2,3,19,13,17,5,3,3,25,3,14,1,1,1,36,1,3,2,19,3,13,36,9,13,31,6,4,16,34,2,5,4,2,3,3,5,1,1,1,4,3,1,17,3,2,3,5,3,1,3,2,3,5,6,3,12,11,1,3, + 1,2,26,7,12,7,2,14,3,3,7,7,11,25,25,28,16,4,36,1,2,1,6,2,1,9,3,27,17,4,3,4,13,4,1,3,2,2,1,10,4,2,4,6,3,8,2,1,18,1,1,24,2,2,4,33,2,3,63,7,1,6, + 40,7,3,4,4,2,4,15,18,1,16,1,1,11,2,41,14,1,3,18,13,3,2,4,16,2,17,7,15,24,7,18,13,44,2,2,3,6,1,1,7,5,1,7,1,4,3,3,5,10,8,2,3,1,8,1,1,27,4,2,1, + 12,1,2,1,10,6,1,6,7,5,2,3,7,11,5,11,3,6,6,2,3,15,4,9,1,1,2,1,2,11,2,8,12,8,5,4,2,3,1,5,2,2,1,14,1,12,11,4,1,11,17,17,4,3,2,5,5,7,3,1,5,9,9,8, + 2,5,6,6,13,13,2,1,2,6,1,2,2,49,4,9,1,2,10,16,7,8,4,3,2,23,4,58,3,29,1,14,19,19,11,11,2,7,5,1,3,4,6,2,18,5,12,12,17,17,3,3,2,4,1,6,2,3,4,3,1, + 1,1,1,5,1,1,9,1,3,1,3,6,1,8,1,1,2,6,4,14,3,1,4,11,4,1,3,32,1,2,4,13,4,1,2,4,2,1,3,1,11,1,4,2,1,4,4,6,3,5,1,6,5,7,6,3,23,3,5,3,5,3,3,13,3,9,10, + 1,12,10,2,3,18,13,7,160,52,4,2,2,3,2,14,5,4,12,4,6,4,1,20,4,11,6,2,12,27,1,4,1,2,2,7,4,5,2,28,3,7,25,8,3,19,3,6,10,2,2,1,10,2,5,4,1,3,4,1,5, + 3,2,6,9,3,6,2,16,3,3,16,4,5,5,3,2,1,2,16,15,8,2,6,21,2,4,1,22,5,8,1,1,21,11,2,1,11,11,19,13,12,4,2,3,2,3,6,1,8,11,1,4,2,9,5,2,1,11,2,9,1,1,2, + 14,31,9,3,4,21,14,4,8,1,7,2,2,2,5,1,4,20,3,3,4,10,1,11,9,8,2,1,4,5,14,12,14,2,17,9,6,31,4,14,1,20,13,26,5,2,7,3,6,13,2,4,2,19,6,2,2,18,9,3,5, + 12,12,14,4,6,2,3,6,9,5,22,4,5,25,6,4,8,5,2,6,27,2,35,2,16,3,7,8,8,6,6,5,9,17,2,20,6,19,2,13,3,1,1,1,4,17,12,2,14,7,1,4,18,12,38,33,2,10,1,1, + 2,13,14,17,11,50,6,33,20,26,74,16,23,45,50,13,38,33,6,6,7,4,4,2,1,3,2,5,8,7,8,9,3,11,21,9,13,1,3,10,6,7,1,2,2,18,5,5,1,9,9,2,68,9,19,13,2,5, + 1,4,4,7,4,13,3,9,10,21,17,3,26,2,1,5,2,4,5,4,1,7,4,7,3,4,2,1,6,1,1,20,4,1,9,2,2,1,3,3,2,3,2,1,1,1,20,2,3,1,6,2,3,6,2,4,8,1,3,2,10,3,5,3,4,4, + 3,4,16,1,6,1,10,2,4,2,1,1,2,10,11,2,2,3,1,24,31,4,10,10,2,5,12,16,164,15,4,16,7,9,15,19,17,1,2,1,1,5,1,1,1,1,1,3,1,4,3,1,3,1,3,1,2,1,1,3,3,7, + 2,8,1,2,2,2,1,3,4,3,7,8,12,92,2,10,3,1,3,14,5,25,16,42,4,7,7,4,2,21,5,27,26,27,21,25,30,31,2,1,5,13,3,22,5,6,6,11,9,12,1,5,9,7,5,5,22,60,3,5, + 13,1,1,8,1,1,3,3,2,1,9,3,3,18,4,1,2,3,7,6,3,1,2,3,9,1,3,1,3,2,1,3,1,1,1,2,1,11,3,1,6,9,1,3,2,3,1,2,1,5,1,1,4,3,4,1,2,2,4,4,1,7,2,1,2,2,3,5,13, + 18,3,4,14,9,9,4,16,3,7,5,8,2,6,48,28,3,1,1,4,2,14,8,2,9,2,1,15,2,4,3,2,10,16,12,8,7,1,1,3,1,1,1,2,7,4,1,6,4,38,39,16,23,7,15,15,3,2,12,7,21, + 37,27,6,5,4,8,2,10,8,8,6,5,1,2,1,3,24,1,16,17,9,23,10,17,6,1,51,55,44,13,294,9,3,6,2,4,2,2,15,1,1,1,13,21,17,68,14,8,9,4,1,4,9,3,11,7,1,1,1, + 5,6,3,2,1,1,1,2,3,8,1,2,2,4,1,5,5,2,1,4,3,7,13,4,1,4,1,3,1,1,1,5,5,10,1,6,1,5,2,1,5,2,4,1,4,5,7,3,18,2,9,11,32,4,3,3,2,4,7,11,16,9,11,8,13,38, + 32,8,4,2,1,1,2,1,2,4,4,1,1,1,4,1,21,3,11,1,16,1,1,6,1,3,2,4,9,8,57,7,44,1,3,3,13,3,10,1,1,7,5,2,7,21,47,63,3,15,4,7,1,16,1,1,2,8,2,3,42,15,4, + 1,29,7,22,10,3,78,16,12,20,18,4,67,11,5,1,3,15,6,21,31,32,27,18,13,71,35,5,142,4,10,1,2,50,19,33,16,35,37,16,19,27,7,1,133,19,1,4,8,7,20,1,4, + 4,1,10,3,1,6,1,2,51,5,40,15,24,43,22928,11,1,13,154,70,3,1,1,7,4,10,1,2,1,1,2,1,2,1,2,2,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,2,1,1,1, + 3,2,1,1,1,1,2,1,1, + }; + static ImWchar base_ranges[] = // not zero-terminated + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement + 0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana + 0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions + 0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters + 0xFFFD, 0xFFFD // Invalid + }; + static ImWchar full_ranges[IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges) + IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00)*2 + 1] = { 0 }; + if (!full_ranges[0]) + { + memcpy(full_ranges, base_ranges, sizeof(base_ranges)); + UnpackAccumulativeOffsetsIntoRanges(0x4E00, accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00, IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00), full_ranges + IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges)); + } + return &full_ranges[0]; +} + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesCyrillic() +{ + static const ImWchar ranges[] = + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement + 0x0400, 0x052F, // Cyrillic + Cyrillic Supplement + 0x2DE0, 0x2DFF, // Cyrillic Extended-A + 0xA640, 0xA69F, // Cyrillic Extended-B + 0, + }; + return &ranges[0]; +} + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesThai() +{ + static const ImWchar ranges[] = + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + 0x2010, 0x205E, // Punctuations + 0x0E00, 0x0E7F, // Thai + 0, + }; + return &ranges[0]; +} + +const ImWchar* ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesVietnamese() +{ + static const ImWchar ranges[] = + { + 0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + 0x0102, 0x0103, + 0x0110, 0x0111, + 0x0128, 0x0129, + 0x0168, 0x0169, + 0x01A0, 0x01A1, + 0x01AF, 0x01B0, + 0x1EA0, 0x1EF9, + 0, + }; + return &ranges[0]; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end) +{ + while (text_end ? (text < text_end) : *text) + { + unsigned int c = 0; + int c_len = ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, text, text_end); + text += c_len; + if (c_len == 0) + break; + AddChar((ImWchar)c); + } +} + +void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges) +{ + for (; ranges[0]; ranges += 2) + for (unsigned int c = ranges[0]; c <= ranges[1] && c <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX; c++) //-V560 + AddChar((ImWchar)c); +} + +void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::BuildRanges(ImVector* out_ranges) +{ + const int max_codepoint = IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX; + for (int n = 0; n <= max_codepoint; n++) + if (GetBit(n)) + { + out_ranges->push_back((ImWchar)n); + while (n < max_codepoint && GetBit(n + 1)) + n++; + out_ranges->push_back((ImWchar)n); + } + out_ranges->push_back(0); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImFont +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ImFont::ImFont() +{ + FontSize = 0.0f; + FallbackAdvanceX = 0.0f; + FallbackChar = (ImWchar)-1; + EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)-1; + EllipsisWidth = EllipsisCharStep = 0.0f; + EllipsisCharCount = 0; + FallbackGlyph = NULL; + ContainerAtlas = NULL; + ConfigData = NULL; + ConfigDataCount = 0; + DirtyLookupTables = false; + Scale = 1.0f; + Ascent = Descent = 0.0f; + MetricsTotalSurface = 0; + memset(Used4kPagesMap, 0, sizeof(Used4kPagesMap)); +} + +ImFont::~ImFont() +{ + ClearOutputData(); +} + +void ImFont::ClearOutputData() +{ + FontSize = 0.0f; + FallbackAdvanceX = 0.0f; + Glyphs.clear(); + IndexAdvanceX.clear(); + IndexLookup.clear(); + FallbackGlyph = NULL; + ContainerAtlas = NULL; + DirtyLookupTables = true; + Ascent = Descent = 0.0f; + MetricsTotalSurface = 0; +} + +static ImWchar FindFirstExistingGlyph(ImFont* font, const ImWchar* candidate_chars, int candidate_chars_count) +{ + for (int n = 0; n < candidate_chars_count; n++) + if (font->FindGlyphNoFallback(candidate_chars[n]) != NULL) + return candidate_chars[n]; + return (ImWchar)-1; +} + +void ImFont::BuildLookupTable() +{ + int max_codepoint = 0; + for (int i = 0; i != Glyphs.Size; i++) + max_codepoint = ImMax(max_codepoint, (int)Glyphs[i].Codepoint); + + // Build lookup table + IM_ASSERT(Glyphs.Size < 0xFFFF); // -1 is reserved + IndexAdvanceX.clear(); + IndexLookup.clear(); + DirtyLookupTables = false; + memset(Used4kPagesMap, 0, sizeof(Used4kPagesMap)); + GrowIndex(max_codepoint + 1); + for (int i = 0; i < Glyphs.Size; i++) + { + int codepoint = (int)Glyphs[i].Codepoint; + IndexAdvanceX[codepoint] = Glyphs[i].AdvanceX; + IndexLookup[codepoint] = (ImWchar)i; + + // Mark 4K page as used + const int page_n = codepoint / 4096; + Used4kPagesMap[page_n >> 3] |= 1 << (page_n & 7); + } + + // Create a glyph to handle TAB + // FIXME: Needs proper TAB handling but it needs to be contextualized (or we could arbitrary say that each string starts at "column 0" ?) + if (FindGlyph((ImWchar)' ')) + { + if (Glyphs.back().Codepoint != '\t') // So we can call this function multiple times (FIXME: Flaky) + Glyphs.resize(Glyphs.Size + 1); + ImFontGlyph& tab_glyph = Glyphs.back(); + tab_glyph = *FindGlyph((ImWchar)' '); + tab_glyph.Codepoint = '\t'; + tab_glyph.AdvanceX *= IM_TABSIZE; + IndexAdvanceX[(int)tab_glyph.Codepoint] = (float)tab_glyph.AdvanceX; + IndexLookup[(int)tab_glyph.Codepoint] = (ImWchar)(Glyphs.Size - 1); + } + + // Mark special glyphs as not visible (note that AddGlyph already mark as non-visible glyphs with zero-size polygons) + SetGlyphVisible((ImWchar)' ', false); + SetGlyphVisible((ImWchar)'\t', false); + + // Setup Fallback character + const ImWchar fallback_chars[] = { (ImWchar)IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID, (ImWchar)'?', (ImWchar)' ' }; + FallbackGlyph = FindGlyphNoFallback(FallbackChar); + if (FallbackGlyph == NULL) + { + FallbackChar = FindFirstExistingGlyph(this, fallback_chars, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fallback_chars)); + FallbackGlyph = FindGlyphNoFallback(FallbackChar); + if (FallbackGlyph == NULL) + { + FallbackGlyph = &Glyphs.back(); + FallbackChar = (ImWchar)FallbackGlyph->Codepoint; + } + } + FallbackAdvanceX = FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX; + for (int i = 0; i < max_codepoint + 1; i++) + if (IndexAdvanceX[i] < 0.0f) + IndexAdvanceX[i] = FallbackAdvanceX; + + // Setup Ellipsis character. It is required for rendering elided text. We prefer using U+2026 (horizontal ellipsis). + // However some old fonts may contain ellipsis at U+0085. Here we auto-detect most suitable ellipsis character. + // FIXME: Note that 0x2026 is rarely included in our font ranges. Because of this we are more likely to use three individual dots. + const ImWchar ellipsis_chars[] = { (ImWchar)0x2026, (ImWchar)0x0085 }; + const ImWchar dots_chars[] = { (ImWchar)'.', (ImWchar)0xFF0E }; + if (EllipsisChar == (ImWchar)-1) + EllipsisChar = FindFirstExistingGlyph(this, ellipsis_chars, IM_ARRAYSIZE(ellipsis_chars)); + const ImWchar dot_char = FindFirstExistingGlyph(this, dots_chars, IM_ARRAYSIZE(dots_chars)); + if (EllipsisChar != (ImWchar)-1) + { + EllipsisCharCount = 1; + EllipsisWidth = EllipsisCharStep = FindGlyph(EllipsisChar)->X1; + } + else if (dot_char != (ImWchar)-1) + { + const ImFontGlyph* glyph = FindGlyph(dot_char); + EllipsisChar = dot_char; + EllipsisCharCount = 3; + EllipsisCharStep = (glyph->X1 - glyph->X0) + 1.0f; + EllipsisWidth = EllipsisCharStep * 3.0f - 1.0f; + } +} + +// API is designed this way to avoid exposing the 4K page size +// e.g. use with IsGlyphRangeUnused(0, 255) +bool ImFont::IsGlyphRangeUnused(unsigned int c_begin, unsigned int c_last) +{ + unsigned int page_begin = (c_begin / 4096); + unsigned int page_last = (c_last / 4096); + for (unsigned int page_n = page_begin; page_n <= page_last; page_n++) + if ((page_n >> 3) < sizeof(Used4kPagesMap)) + if (Used4kPagesMap[page_n >> 3] & (1 << (page_n & 7))) + return false; + return true; +} + +void ImFont::SetGlyphVisible(ImWchar c, bool visible) +{ + if (ImFontGlyph* glyph = (ImFontGlyph*)(void*)FindGlyph((ImWchar)c)) + glyph->Visible = visible ? 1 : 0; +} + +void ImFont::GrowIndex(int new_size) +{ + IM_ASSERT(IndexAdvanceX.Size == IndexLookup.Size); + if (new_size <= IndexLookup.Size) + return; + IndexAdvanceX.resize(new_size, -1.0f); + IndexLookup.resize(new_size, (ImWchar)-1); +} + +// x0/y0/x1/y1 are offset from the character upper-left layout position, in pixels. Therefore x0/y0 are often fairly close to zero. +// Not to be mistaken with texture coordinates, which are held by u0/v0/u1/v1 in normalized format (0.0..1.0 on each texture axis). +// 'cfg' is not necessarily == 'this->ConfigData' because multiple source fonts+configs can be used to build one target font. +void ImFont::AddGlyph(const ImFontConfig* cfg, ImWchar codepoint, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float u0, float v0, float u1, float v1, float advance_x) +{ + if (cfg != NULL) + { + // Clamp & recenter if needed + const float advance_x_original = advance_x; + advance_x = ImClamp(advance_x, cfg->GlyphMinAdvanceX, cfg->GlyphMaxAdvanceX); + if (advance_x != advance_x_original) + { + float char_off_x = cfg->PixelSnapH ? ImFloor((advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f) : (advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f; + x0 += char_off_x; + x1 += char_off_x; + } + + // Snap to pixel + if (cfg->PixelSnapH) + advance_x = IM_ROUND(advance_x); + + // Bake spacing + advance_x += cfg->GlyphExtraSpacing.x; + } + + Glyphs.resize(Glyphs.Size + 1); + ImFontGlyph& glyph = Glyphs.back(); + glyph.Codepoint = (unsigned int)codepoint; + glyph.Visible = (x0 != x1) && (y0 != y1); + glyph.Colored = false; + glyph.X0 = x0; + glyph.Y0 = y0; + glyph.X1 = x1; + glyph.Y1 = y1; + glyph.U0 = u0; + glyph.V0 = v0; + glyph.U1 = u1; + glyph.V1 = v1; + glyph.AdvanceX = advance_x; + + // Compute rough surface usage metrics (+1 to account for average padding, +0.99 to round) + // We use (U1-U0)*TexWidth instead of X1-X0 to account for oversampling. + float pad = ContainerAtlas->TexGlyphPadding + 0.99f; + DirtyLookupTables = true; + MetricsTotalSurface += (int)((glyph.U1 - glyph.U0) * ContainerAtlas->TexWidth + pad) * (int)((glyph.V1 - glyph.V0) * ContainerAtlas->TexHeight + pad); +} + +void ImFont::AddRemapChar(ImWchar dst, ImWchar src, bool overwrite_dst) +{ + IM_ASSERT(IndexLookup.Size > 0); // Currently this can only be called AFTER the font has been built, aka after calling ImFontAtlas::GetTexDataAs*() function. + unsigned int index_size = (unsigned int)IndexLookup.Size; + + if (dst < index_size && IndexLookup.Data[dst] == (ImWchar)-1 && !overwrite_dst) // 'dst' already exists + return; + if (src >= index_size && dst >= index_size) // both 'dst' and 'src' don't exist -> no-op + return; + + GrowIndex(dst + 1); + IndexLookup[dst] = (src < index_size) ? IndexLookup.Data[src] : (ImWchar)-1; + IndexAdvanceX[dst] = (src < index_size) ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[src] : 1.0f; +} + +const ImFontGlyph* ImFont::FindGlyph(ImWchar c) const +{ + if (c >= (size_t)IndexLookup.Size) + return FallbackGlyph; + const ImWchar i = IndexLookup.Data[c]; + if (i == (ImWchar)-1) + return FallbackGlyph; + return &Glyphs.Data[i]; +} + +const ImFontGlyph* ImFont::FindGlyphNoFallback(ImWchar c) const +{ + if (c >= (size_t)IndexLookup.Size) + return NULL; + const ImWchar i = IndexLookup.Data[c]; + if (i == (ImWchar)-1) + return NULL; + return &Glyphs.Data[i]; +} + +// Wrapping skips upcoming blanks +static inline const char* CalcWordWrapNextLineStartA(const char* text, const char* text_end) +{ + while (text < text_end && ImCharIsBlankA(*text)) + text++; + if (*text == '\n') + text++; + return text; +} + +// Simple word-wrapping for English, not full-featured. Please submit failing cases! +// This will return the next location to wrap from. If no wrapping if necessary, this will fast-forward to e.g. text_end. +// FIXME: Much possible improvements (don't cut things like "word !", "word!!!" but cut within "word,,,,", more sensible support for punctuations, support for Unicode punctuations, etc.) +const char* ImFont::CalcWordWrapPositionA(float scale, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width) const +{ + // For references, possible wrap point marked with ^ + // "aaa bbb, ccc,ddd. eee fff. ggg!" + // ^ ^ ^ ^ ^__ ^ ^ + + // List of hardcoded separators: .,;!?'" + + // Skip extra blanks after a line returns (that includes not counting them in width computation) + // e.g. "Hello world" --> "Hello" "World" + + // Cut words that cannot possibly fit within one line. + // e.g.: "The tropical fish" with ~5 characters worth of width --> "The tr" "opical" "fish" + float line_width = 0.0f; + float word_width = 0.0f; + float blank_width = 0.0f; + wrap_width /= scale; // We work with unscaled widths to avoid scaling every characters + + const char* word_end = text; + const char* prev_word_end = NULL; + bool inside_word = true; + + const char* s = text; + IM_ASSERT(text_end != NULL); + while (s < text_end) + { + unsigned int c = (unsigned int)*s; + const char* next_s; + if (c < 0x80) + next_s = s + 1; + else + next_s = s + ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, text_end); + + if (c < 32) + { + if (c == '\n') + { + line_width = word_width = blank_width = 0.0f; + inside_word = true; + s = next_s; + continue; + } + if (c == '\r') + { + s = next_s; + continue; + } + } + + const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[c] : FallbackAdvanceX); + if (ImCharIsBlankW(c)) + { + if (inside_word) + { + line_width += blank_width; + blank_width = 0.0f; + word_end = s; + } + blank_width += char_width; + inside_word = false; + } + else + { + word_width += char_width; + if (inside_word) + { + word_end = next_s; + } + else + { + prev_word_end = word_end; + line_width += word_width + blank_width; + word_width = blank_width = 0.0f; + } + + // Allow wrapping after punctuation. + inside_word = (c != '.' && c != ',' && c != ';' && c != '!' && c != '?' && c != '\"'); + } + + // We ignore blank width at the end of the line (they can be skipped) + if (line_width + word_width > wrap_width) + { + // Words that cannot possibly fit within an entire line will be cut anywhere. + if (word_width < wrap_width) + s = prev_word_end ? prev_word_end : word_end; + break; + } + + s = next_s; + } + + // Wrap_width is too small to fit anything. Force displaying 1 character to minimize the height discontinuity. + // +1 may not be a character start point in UTF-8 but it's ok because caller loops use (text >= word_wrap_eol). + if (s == text && text < text_end) + return s + 1; + return s; +} + +ImVec2 ImFont::CalcTextSizeA(float size, float max_width, float wrap_width, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, const char** remaining) const +{ + if (!text_end) + text_end = text_begin + strlen(text_begin); // FIXME-OPT: Need to avoid this. + + const float line_height = size; + const float scale = size / FontSize; + + ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0, 0); + float line_width = 0.0f; + + const bool word_wrap_enabled = (wrap_width > 0.0f); + const char* word_wrap_eol = NULL; + + const char* s = text_begin; + while (s < text_end) + { + if (word_wrap_enabled) + { + // Calculate how far we can render. Requires two passes on the string data but keeps the code simple and not intrusive for what's essentially an uncommon feature. + if (!word_wrap_eol) + word_wrap_eol = CalcWordWrapPositionA(scale, s, text_end, wrap_width - line_width); + + if (s >= word_wrap_eol) + { + if (text_size.x < line_width) + text_size.x = line_width; + text_size.y += line_height; + line_width = 0.0f; + word_wrap_eol = NULL; + s = CalcWordWrapNextLineStartA(s, text_end); // Wrapping skips upcoming blanks + continue; + } + } + + // Decode and advance source + const char* prev_s = s; + unsigned int c = (unsigned int)*s; + if (c < 0x80) + s += 1; + else + s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, text_end); + + if (c < 32) + { + if (c == '\n') + { + text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width); + text_size.y += line_height; + line_width = 0.0f; + continue; + } + if (c == '\r') + continue; + } + + const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[c] : FallbackAdvanceX) * scale; + if (line_width + char_width >= max_width) + { + s = prev_s; + break; + } + + line_width += char_width; + } + + if (text_size.x < line_width) + text_size.x = line_width; + + if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f) + text_size.y += line_height; + + if (remaining) + *remaining = s; + + return text_size; +} + +// Note: as with every ImDrawList drawing function, this expects that the font atlas texture is bound. +void ImFont::RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const +{ + const ImFontGlyph* glyph = FindGlyph(c); + if (!glyph || !glyph->Visible) + return; + if (glyph->Colored) + col |= ~IM_COL32_A_MASK; + float scale = (size >= 0.0f) ? (size / FontSize) : 1.0f; + float x = IM_FLOOR(pos.x); + float y = IM_FLOOR(pos.y); + draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 4); + draw_list->PrimRectUV(ImVec2(x + glyph->X0 * scale, y + glyph->Y0 * scale), ImVec2(x + glyph->X1 * scale, y + glyph->Y1 * scale), ImVec2(glyph->U0, glyph->V0), ImVec2(glyph->U1, glyph->V1), col); +} + +// Note: as with every ImDrawList drawing function, this expects that the font atlas texture is bound. +void ImFont::RenderText(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const ImVec4& clip_rect, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width, bool cpu_fine_clip) const +{ + if (!text_end) + text_end = text_begin + strlen(text_begin); // ImGui:: functions generally already provides a valid text_end, so this is merely to handle direct calls. + + // Align to be pixel perfect + float x = IM_FLOOR(pos.x); + float y = IM_FLOOR(pos.y); + if (y > clip_rect.w) + return; + + const float start_x = x; + const float scale = size / FontSize; + const float line_height = FontSize * scale; + const bool word_wrap_enabled = (wrap_width > 0.0f); + + // Fast-forward to first visible line + const char* s = text_begin; + if (y + line_height < clip_rect.y) + while (y + line_height < clip_rect.y && s < text_end) + { + const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(s, '\n', text_end - s); + if (word_wrap_enabled) + { + // FIXME-OPT: This is not optimal as do first do a search for \n before calling CalcWordWrapPositionA(). + // If the specs for CalcWordWrapPositionA() were reworked to optionally return on \n we could combine both. + // However it is still better than nothing performing the fast-forward! + s = CalcWordWrapPositionA(scale, s, line_end ? line_end : text_end, wrap_width); + s = CalcWordWrapNextLineStartA(s, text_end); + } + else + { + s = line_end ? line_end + 1 : text_end; + } + y += line_height; + } + + // For large text, scan for the last visible line in order to avoid over-reserving in the call to PrimReserve() + // Note that very large horizontal line will still be affected by the issue (e.g. a one megabyte string buffer without a newline will likely crash atm) + if (text_end - s > 10000 && !word_wrap_enabled) + { + const char* s_end = s; + float y_end = y; + while (y_end < clip_rect.w && s_end < text_end) + { + s_end = (const char*)memchr(s_end, '\n', text_end - s_end); + s_end = s_end ? s_end + 1 : text_end; + y_end += line_height; + } + text_end = s_end; + } + if (s == text_end) + return; + + // Reserve vertices for remaining worse case (over-reserving is useful and easily amortized) + const int vtx_count_max = (int)(text_end - s) * 4; + const int idx_count_max = (int)(text_end - s) * 6; + const int idx_expected_size = draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size + idx_count_max; + draw_list->PrimReserve(idx_count_max, vtx_count_max); + ImDrawVert* vtx_write = draw_list->_VtxWritePtr; + ImDrawIdx* idx_write = draw_list->_IdxWritePtr; + unsigned int vtx_index = draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx; + + const ImU32 col_untinted = col | ~IM_COL32_A_MASK; + const char* word_wrap_eol = NULL; + + while (s < text_end) + { + if (word_wrap_enabled) + { + // Calculate how far we can render. Requires two passes on the string data but keeps the code simple and not intrusive for what's essentially an uncommon feature. + if (!word_wrap_eol) + word_wrap_eol = CalcWordWrapPositionA(scale, s, text_end, wrap_width - (x - start_x)); + + if (s >= word_wrap_eol) + { + x = start_x; + y += line_height; + word_wrap_eol = NULL; + s = CalcWordWrapNextLineStartA(s, text_end); // Wrapping skips upcoming blanks + continue; + } + } + + // Decode and advance source + unsigned int c = (unsigned int)*s; + if (c < 0x80) + s += 1; + else + s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, text_end); + + if (c < 32) + { + if (c == '\n') + { + x = start_x; + y += line_height; + if (y > clip_rect.w) + break; // break out of main loop + continue; + } + if (c == '\r') + continue; + } + + const ImFontGlyph* glyph = FindGlyph((ImWchar)c); + if (glyph == NULL) + continue; + + float char_width = glyph->AdvanceX * scale; + if (glyph->Visible) + { + // We don't do a second finer clipping test on the Y axis as we've already skipped anything before clip_rect.y and exit once we pass clip_rect.w + float x1 = x + glyph->X0 * scale; + float x2 = x + glyph->X1 * scale; + float y1 = y + glyph->Y0 * scale; + float y2 = y + glyph->Y1 * scale; + if (x1 <= clip_rect.z && x2 >= clip_rect.x) + { + // Render a character + float u1 = glyph->U0; + float v1 = glyph->V0; + float u2 = glyph->U1; + float v2 = glyph->V1; + + // CPU side clipping used to fit text in their frame when the frame is too small. Only does clipping for axis aligned quads. + if (cpu_fine_clip) + { + if (x1 < clip_rect.x) + { + u1 = u1 + (1.0f - (x2 - clip_rect.x) / (x2 - x1)) * (u2 - u1); + x1 = clip_rect.x; + } + if (y1 < clip_rect.y) + { + v1 = v1 + (1.0f - (y2 - clip_rect.y) / (y2 - y1)) * (v2 - v1); + y1 = clip_rect.y; + } + if (x2 > clip_rect.z) + { + u2 = u1 + ((clip_rect.z - x1) / (x2 - x1)) * (u2 - u1); + x2 = clip_rect.z; + } + if (y2 > clip_rect.w) + { + v2 = v1 + ((clip_rect.w - y1) / (y2 - y1)) * (v2 - v1); + y2 = clip_rect.w; + } + if (y1 >= y2) + { + x += char_width; + continue; + } + } + + // Support for untinted glyphs + ImU32 glyph_col = glyph->Colored ? col_untinted : col; + + // We are NOT calling PrimRectUV() here because non-inlined causes too much overhead in a debug builds. Inlined here: + { + vtx_write[0].pos.x = x1; vtx_write[0].pos.y = y1; vtx_write[0].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[0].uv.x = u1; vtx_write[0].uv.y = v1; + vtx_write[1].pos.x = x2; vtx_write[1].pos.y = y1; vtx_write[1].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[1].uv.x = u2; vtx_write[1].uv.y = v1; + vtx_write[2].pos.x = x2; vtx_write[2].pos.y = y2; vtx_write[2].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[2].uv.x = u2; vtx_write[2].uv.y = v2; + vtx_write[3].pos.x = x1; vtx_write[3].pos.y = y2; vtx_write[3].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[3].uv.x = u1; vtx_write[3].uv.y = v2; + idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_index); idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_index + 1); idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_index + 2); + idx_write[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_index); idx_write[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_index + 2); idx_write[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_index + 3); + vtx_write += 4; + vtx_index += 4; + idx_write += 6; + } + } + } + x += char_width; + } + + // Give back unused vertices (clipped ones, blanks) ~ this is essentially a PrimUnreserve() action. + draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size = (int)(vtx_write - draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data); // Same as calling shrink() + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size = (int)(idx_write - draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data); + draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1].ElemCount -= (idx_expected_size - draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size); + draw_list->_VtxWritePtr = vtx_write; + draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = idx_write; + draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx = vtx_index; +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGui Internal Render Helpers +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Vaguely redesigned to stop accessing ImGui global state: +// - RenderArrow() +// - RenderBullet() +// - RenderCheckMark() +// - RenderArrowPointingAt() +// - RenderRectFilledRangeH() +// - RenderRectFilledWithHole() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Function in need of a redesign (legacy mess) +// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Render an arrow aimed to be aligned with text (p_min is a position in the same space text would be positioned). To e.g. denote expanded/collapsed state +void ImGui::RenderArrow(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, ImGuiDir dir, float scale) +{ + const float h = draw_list->_Data->FontSize * 1.00f; + float r = h * 0.40f * scale; + ImVec2 center = pos + ImVec2(h * 0.50f, h * 0.50f * scale); + + ImVec2 a, b, c; + switch (dir) + { + case ImGuiDir_Up: + case ImGuiDir_Down: + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) r = -r; + a = ImVec2(+0.000f, +0.750f) * r; + b = ImVec2(-0.866f, -0.750f) * r; + c = ImVec2(+0.866f, -0.750f) * r; + break; + case ImGuiDir_Left: + case ImGuiDir_Right: + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) r = -r; + a = ImVec2(+0.750f, +0.000f) * r; + b = ImVec2(-0.750f, +0.866f) * r; + c = ImVec2(-0.750f, -0.866f) * r; + break; + case ImGuiDir_None: + case ImGuiDir_COUNT: + IM_ASSERT(0); + break; + } + draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(center + a, center + b, center + c, col); +} + +void ImGui::RenderBullet(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col) +{ + // FIXME-OPT: This should be baked in font. + draw_list->AddCircleFilled(pos, draw_list->_Data->FontSize * 0.20f, col, 8); +} + +void ImGui::RenderCheckMark(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz) +{ + float thickness = ImMax(sz / 5.0f, 1.0f); + sz -= thickness * 0.5f; + pos += ImVec2(thickness * 0.25f, thickness * 0.25f); + + float third = sz / 3.0f; + float bx = pos.x + third; + float by = pos.y + sz - third * 0.5f; + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx - third, by - third)); + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx, by)); + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx + third * 2.0f, by - third * 2.0f)); + draw_list->PathStroke(col, 0, thickness); +} + +// Render an arrow. 'pos' is position of the arrow tip. half_sz.x is length from base to tip. half_sz.y is length on each side. +void ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col) +{ + switch (direction) + { + case ImGuiDir_Left: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return; + case ImGuiDir_Right: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return; + case ImGuiDir_Up: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return; + case ImGuiDir_Down: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return; + case ImGuiDir_None: case ImGuiDir_COUNT: break; // Fix warnings + } +} + +static inline float ImAcos01(float x) +{ + if (x <= 0.0f) return IM_PI * 0.5f; + if (x >= 1.0f) return 0.0f; + return ImAcos(x); + //return (-0.69813170079773212f * x * x - 0.87266462599716477f) * x + 1.5707963267948966f; // Cheap approximation, may be enough for what we do. +} + +// FIXME: Cleanup and move code to ImDrawList. +void ImGui::RenderRectFilledRangeH(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& rect, ImU32 col, float x_start_norm, float x_end_norm, float rounding) +{ + if (x_end_norm == x_start_norm) + return; + if (x_start_norm > x_end_norm) + ImSwap(x_start_norm, x_end_norm); + + ImVec2 p0 = ImVec2(ImLerp(rect.Min.x, rect.Max.x, x_start_norm), rect.Min.y); + ImVec2 p1 = ImVec2(ImLerp(rect.Min.x, rect.Max.x, x_end_norm), rect.Max.y); + if (rounding == 0.0f) + { + draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, col, 0.0f); + return; + } + + rounding = ImClamp(ImMin((rect.Max.x - rect.Min.x) * 0.5f, (rect.Max.y - rect.Min.y) * 0.5f) - 1.0f, 0.0f, rounding); + const float inv_rounding = 1.0f / rounding; + const float arc0_b = ImAcos01(1.0f - (p0.x - rect.Min.x) * inv_rounding); + const float arc0_e = ImAcos01(1.0f - (p1.x - rect.Min.x) * inv_rounding); + const float half_pi = IM_PI * 0.5f; // We will == compare to this because we know this is the exact value ImAcos01 can return. + const float x0 = ImMax(p0.x, rect.Min.x + rounding); + if (arc0_b == arc0_e) + { + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x0, p1.y)); + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x0, p0.y)); + } + else if (arc0_b == 0.0f && arc0_e == half_pi) + { + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x0, p1.y - rounding), rounding, 3, 6); // BL + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x0, p0.y + rounding), rounding, 6, 9); // TR + } + else + { + draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x0, p1.y - rounding), rounding, IM_PI - arc0_e, IM_PI - arc0_b, 3); // BL + draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x0, p0.y + rounding), rounding, IM_PI + arc0_b, IM_PI + arc0_e, 3); // TR + } + if (p1.x > rect.Min.x + rounding) + { + const float arc1_b = ImAcos01(1.0f - (rect.Max.x - p1.x) * inv_rounding); + const float arc1_e = ImAcos01(1.0f - (rect.Max.x - p0.x) * inv_rounding); + const float x1 = ImMin(p1.x, rect.Max.x - rounding); + if (arc1_b == arc1_e) + { + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x1, p0.y)); + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x1, p1.y)); + } + else if (arc1_b == 0.0f && arc1_e == half_pi) + { + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x1, p0.y + rounding), rounding, 9, 12); // TR + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x1, p1.y - rounding), rounding, 0, 3); // BR + } + else + { + draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x1, p0.y + rounding), rounding, -arc1_e, -arc1_b, 3); // TR + draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x1, p1.y - rounding), rounding, +arc1_b, +arc1_e, 3); // BR + } + } + draw_list->PathFillConvex(col); +} + +void ImGui::RenderRectFilledWithHole(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& outer, const ImRect& inner, ImU32 col, float rounding) +{ + const bool fill_L = (inner.Min.x > outer.Min.x); + const bool fill_R = (inner.Max.x < outer.Max.x); + const bool fill_U = (inner.Min.y > outer.Min.y); + const bool fill_D = (inner.Max.y < outer.Max.y); + if (fill_L) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(outer.Min.x, inner.Min.y), ImVec2(inner.Min.x, inner.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_U ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft) | (fill_D ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft)); + if (fill_R) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Max.x, inner.Min.y), ImVec2(outer.Max.x, inner.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_U ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight) | (fill_D ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight)); + if (fill_U) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Min.x, outer.Min.y), ImVec2(inner.Max.x, inner.Min.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_L ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft) | (fill_R ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight)); + if (fill_D) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Min.x, inner.Max.y), ImVec2(inner.Max.x, outer.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_L ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft) | (fill_R ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight)); + if (fill_L && fill_U) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(outer.Min.x, outer.Min.y), ImVec2(inner.Min.x, inner.Min.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft); + if (fill_R && fill_U) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Max.x, outer.Min.y), ImVec2(outer.Max.x, inner.Min.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight); + if (fill_L && fill_D) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(outer.Min.x, inner.Max.y), ImVec2(inner.Min.x, outer.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft); + if (fill_R && fill_D) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Max.x, inner.Max.y), ImVec2(outer.Max.x, outer.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight); +} + +// Helper for ColorPicker4() +// NB: This is rather brittle and will show artifact when rounding this enabled if rounded corners overlap multiple cells. Caller currently responsible for avoiding that. +// Spent a non reasonable amount of time trying to getting this right for ColorButton with rounding+anti-aliasing+ImGuiColorEditFlags_HalfAlphaPreview flag + various grid sizes and offsets, and eventually gave up... probably more reasonable to disable rounding altogether. +// FIXME: uses ImGui::GetColorU32 +void ImGui::RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags) +{ + if ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == 0) + flags = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersDefault_; + if (((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) < 0xFF) + { + ImU32 col_bg1 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColors(IM_COL32(204, 204, 204, 255), col)); + ImU32 col_bg2 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColors(IM_COL32(128, 128, 128, 255), col)); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col_bg1, rounding, flags); + + int yi = 0; + for (float y = p_min.y + grid_off.y; y < p_max.y; y += grid_step, yi++) + { + float y1 = ImClamp(y, p_min.y, p_max.y), y2 = ImMin(y + grid_step, p_max.y); + if (y2 <= y1) + continue; + for (float x = p_min.x + grid_off.x + (yi & 1) * grid_step; x < p_max.x; x += grid_step * 2.0f) + { + float x1 = ImClamp(x, p_min.x, p_max.x), x2 = ImMin(x + grid_step, p_max.x); + if (x2 <= x1) + continue; + ImDrawFlags cell_flags = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone; + if (y1 <= p_min.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight; } + if (y2 >= p_max.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight; } + + // Combine flags + cell_flags = (flags == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone || cell_flags == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone : (cell_flags & flags); + draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x1, y1), ImVec2(x2, y2), col_bg2, rounding, cell_flags); + } + } + } + else + { + draw_list->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col, rounding, flags); + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Decompression code +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Compressed with stb_compress() then converted to a C array and encoded as base85. +// Use the program in misc/fonts/binary_to_compressed_c.cpp to create the array from a TTF file. +// The purpose of encoding as base85 instead of "0x00,0x01,..." style is only save on _source code_ size. +// Decompression from stb.h (public domain) by Sean Barrett https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/stb.h +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +static unsigned int stb_decompress_length(const unsigned char *input) +{ + return (input[8] << 24) + (input[9] << 16) + (input[10] << 8) + input[11]; +} + +static unsigned char *stb__barrier_out_e, *stb__barrier_out_b; +static const unsigned char *stb__barrier_in_b; +static unsigned char *stb__dout; +static void stb__match(const unsigned char *data, unsigned int length) +{ + // INVERSE of memmove... write each byte before copying the next... + IM_ASSERT(stb__dout + length <= stb__barrier_out_e); + if (stb__dout + length > stb__barrier_out_e) { stb__dout += length; return; } + if (data < stb__barrier_out_b) { stb__dout = stb__barrier_out_e+1; return; } + while (length--) *stb__dout++ = *data++; +} + +static void stb__lit(const unsigned char *data, unsigned int length) +{ + IM_ASSERT(stb__dout + length <= stb__barrier_out_e); + if (stb__dout + length > stb__barrier_out_e) { stb__dout += length; return; } + if (data < stb__barrier_in_b) { stb__dout = stb__barrier_out_e+1; return; } + memcpy(stb__dout, data, length); + stb__dout += length; +} + +#define stb__in2(x) ((i[x] << 8) + i[(x)+1]) +#define stb__in3(x) ((i[x] << 16) + stb__in2((x)+1)) +#define stb__in4(x) ((i[x] << 24) + stb__in3((x)+1)) + +static const unsigned char *stb_decompress_token(const unsigned char *i) +{ + if (*i >= 0x20) { // use fewer if's for cases that expand small + if (*i >= 0x80) stb__match(stb__dout-i[1]-1, i[0] - 0x80 + 1), i += 2; + else if (*i >= 0x40) stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in2(0) - 0x4000 + 1), i[2]+1), i += 3; + else /* *i >= 0x20 */ stb__lit(i+1, i[0] - 0x20 + 1), i += 1 + (i[0] - 0x20 + 1); + } else { // more ifs for cases that expand large, since overhead is amortized + if (*i >= 0x18) stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(0) - 0x180000 + 1), i[3]+1), i += 4; + else if (*i >= 0x10) stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(0) - 0x100000 + 1), stb__in2(3)+1), i += 5; + else if (*i >= 0x08) stb__lit(i+2, stb__in2(0) - 0x0800 + 1), i += 2 + (stb__in2(0) - 0x0800 + 1); + else if (*i == 0x07) stb__lit(i+3, stb__in2(1) + 1), i += 3 + (stb__in2(1) + 1); + else if (*i == 0x06) stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(1)+1), i[4]+1), i += 5; + else if (*i == 0x04) stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(1)+1), stb__in2(4)+1), i += 6; + } + return i; +} + +static unsigned int stb_adler32(unsigned int adler32, unsigned char *buffer, unsigned int buflen) +{ + const unsigned long ADLER_MOD = 65521; + unsigned long s1 = adler32 & 0xffff, s2 = adler32 >> 16; + unsigned long blocklen = buflen % 5552; + + unsigned long i; + while (buflen) { + for (i=0; i + 7 < blocklen; i += 8) { + s1 += buffer[0], s2 += s1; + s1 += buffer[1], s2 += s1; + s1 += buffer[2], s2 += s1; + s1 += buffer[3], s2 += s1; + s1 += buffer[4], s2 += s1; + s1 += buffer[5], s2 += s1; + s1 += buffer[6], s2 += s1; + s1 += buffer[7], s2 += s1; + + buffer += 8; + } + + for (; i < blocklen; ++i) + s1 += *buffer++, s2 += s1; + + s1 %= ADLER_MOD, s2 %= ADLER_MOD; + buflen -= blocklen; + blocklen = 5552; + } + return (unsigned int)(s2 << 16) + (unsigned int)s1; +} + +static unsigned int stb_decompress(unsigned char *output, const unsigned char *i, unsigned int /*length*/) +{ + if (stb__in4(0) != 0x57bC0000) return 0; + if (stb__in4(4) != 0) return 0; // error! stream is > 4GB + const unsigned int olen = stb_decompress_length(i); + stb__barrier_in_b = i; + stb__barrier_out_e = output + olen; + stb__barrier_out_b = output; + i += 16; + + stb__dout = output; + for (;;) { + const unsigned char *old_i = i; + i = stb_decompress_token(i); + if (i == old_i) { + if (*i == 0x05 && i[1] == 0xfa) { + IM_ASSERT(stb__dout == output + olen); + if (stb__dout != output + olen) return 0; + if (stb_adler32(1, output, olen) != (unsigned int) stb__in4(2)) + return 0; + return olen; + } else { + IM_ASSERT(0); /* NOTREACHED */ + return 0; + } + } + IM_ASSERT(stb__dout <= output + olen); + if (stb__dout > output + olen) + return 0; + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Default font data (ProggyClean.ttf) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// ProggyClean.ttf +// Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Tristan Grimmer +// MIT license (see License.txt in http://www.upperbounds.net/download/ProggyClean.ttf.zip) +// Download and more information at http://upperbounds.net +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// File: 'ProggyClean.ttf' (41208 bytes) +// Exported using misc/fonts/binary_to_compressed_c.cpp (with compression + base85 string encoding). +// The purpose of encoding as base85 instead of "0x00,0x01,..." style is only save on _source code_ size. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +static const char proggy_clean_ttf_compressed_data_base85[11980 + 1] = + "7])#######hV0qs'/###[),##/l:$#Q6>##5[n42>c-TH`->>#/e>11NNV=Bv(*:.F?uu#(gRU.o0XGH`$vhLG1hxt9?W`#,5LsCp#-i>.r$<$6pD>Lb';9Crc6tgXmKVeU2cD4Eo3R/" + "2*>]b(MC;$jPfY.;h^`IWM9Qo#t'X#(v#Y9w0#1D$CIf;W'#pWUPXOuxXuU(H9M(1=Ke$$'5F%)]0^#0X@U.a$FBjVQTSDgEKnIS7EM9>ZY9w0#L;>>#Mx&4Mvt//L[MkA#W@lK.N'[0#7RL_&#w+F%HtG9M#XL`N&.,GM4Pg;--VsM.M0rJfLH2eTM`*oJMHRC`N" + "kfimM2J,W-jXS:)r0wK#@Fge$U>`w'N7G#$#fB#$E^$#:9:hk+eOe--6x)F7*E%?76%^GMHePW-Z5l'&GiF#$956:rS?dA#fiK:)Yr+`�j@'DbG&#^$PG.Ll+DNa&VZ>1i%h1S9u5o@YaaW$e+bROPOpxTO7Stwi1::iB1q)C_=dV26J;2,]7op$]uQr@_V7$q^%lQwtuHY]=DX,n3L#0PHDO4f9>dC@O>HBuKPpP*E,N+b3L#lpR/MrTEH.IAQk.a>D[.e;mc." + "x]Ip.PH^'/aqUO/$1WxLoW0[iLAw=4h(9.`G" + "CRUxHPeR`5Mjol(dUWxZa(>STrPkrJiWx`5U7F#.g*jrohGg`cg:lSTvEY/EV_7H4Q9[Z%cnv;JQYZ5q.l7Zeas:HOIZOB?Ggv:[7MI2k).'2($5FNP&EQ(,)" + "U]W]+fh18.vsai00);D3@4ku5P?DP8aJt+;qUM]=+b'8@;mViBKx0DE[-auGl8:PJ&Dj+M6OC]O^((##]`0i)drT;-7X`=-H3[igUnPG-NZlo.#k@h#=Ork$m>a>$-?Tm$UV(?#P6YY#" + "'/###xe7q.73rI3*pP/$1>s9)W,JrM7SN]'/4C#v$U`0#V.[0>xQsH$fEmPMgY2u7Kh(G%siIfLSoS+MK2eTM$=5,M8p`A.;_R%#u[K#$x4AG8.kK/HSB==-'Ie/QTtG?-.*^N-4B/ZM" + "_3YlQC7(p7q)&](`6_c)$/*JL(L-^(]$wIM`dPtOdGA,U3:w2M-0+WomX2u7lqM2iEumMTcsF?-aT=Z-97UEnXglEn1K-bnEO`gu" + "Ft(c%=;Am_Qs@jLooI&NX;]0#j4#F14;gl8-GQpgwhrq8'=l_f-b49'UOqkLu7-##oDY2L(te+Mch&gLYtJ,MEtJfLh'x'M=$CS-ZZ%P]8bZ>#S?YY#%Q&q'3^Fw&?D)UDNrocM3A76/" + "/oL?#h7gl85[qW/NDOk%16ij;+:1a'iNIdb-ou8.P*w,v5#EI$TWS>Pot-R*H'-SEpA:g)f+O$%%`kA#G=8RMmG1&O`>to8bC]T&$,n.LoO>29sp3dt-52U%VM#q7'DHpg+#Z9%H[Ket`e;)f#Km8&+DC$I46>#Kr]]u-[=99tts1.qb#q72g1WJO81q+eN'03'eM>&1XxY-caEnO" + "j%2n8)),?ILR5^.Ibn<-X-Mq7[a82Lq:F&#ce+S9wsCK*x`569E8ew'He]h:sI[2LM$[guka3ZRd6:t%IG:;$%YiJ:Nq=?eAw;/:nnDq0(CYcMpG)qLN4$##&J-XTt,%OVU4)S1+R-#dg0/Nn?Ku1^0f$B*P:Rowwm-`0PKjYDDM'3]d39VZHEl4,.j']Pk-M.h^&:0FACm$maq-&sgw0t7/6(^xtk%" + "LuH88Fj-ekm>GA#_>568x6(OFRl-IZp`&b,_P'$MhLbxfc$mj`,O;&%W2m`Zh:/)Uetw:aJ%]K9h:TcF]u_-Sj9,VK3M.*'&0D[Ca]J9gp8,kAW]" + "%(?A%R$f<->Zts'^kn=-^@c4%-pY6qI%J%1IGxfLU9CP8cbPlXv);C=b),<2mOvP8up,UVf3839acAWAW-W?#ao/^#%KYo8fRULNd2.>%m]UK:n%r$'sw]J;5pAoO_#2mO3n,'=H5(et" + "Hg*`+RLgv>=4U8guD$I%D:W>-r5V*%j*W:Kvej.Lp$'?;++O'>()jLR-^u68PHm8ZFWe+ej8h:9r6L*0//c&iH&R8pRbA#Kjm%upV1g:" + "a_#Ur7FuA#(tRh#.Y5K+@?3<-8m0$PEn;J:rh6?I6uG<-`wMU'ircp0LaE_OtlMb&1#6T.#FDKu#1Lw%u%+GM+X'e?YLfjM[VO0MbuFp7;>Q&#WIo)0@F%q7c#4XAXN-U&VBpqB>0ie&jhZ[?iLR@@_AvA-iQC(=ksRZRVp7`.=+NpBC%rh&3]R:8XDmE5^V8O(x<-+k?'(^](H.aREZSi,#1:[IXaZFOm<-ui#qUq2$##Ri;u75OK#(RtaW-K-F`S+cF]uN`-KMQ%rP/Xri.LRcB##=YL3BgM/3M" + "D?@f&1'BW-)Ju#bmmWCMkk&#TR`C,5d>g)F;t,4:@_l8G/5h4vUd%&%950:VXD'QdWoY-F$BtUwmfe$YqL'8(PWX(" + "P?^@Po3$##`MSs?DWBZ/S>+4%>fX,VWv/w'KD`LP5IbH;rTV>n3cEK8U#bX]l-/V+^lj3;vlMb&[5YQ8#pekX9JP3XUC72L,,?+Ni&co7ApnO*5NK,((W-i:$,kp'UDAO(G0Sq7MVjJs" + "bIu)'Z,*[>br5fX^:FPAWr-m2KgLQ_nN6'8uTGT5g)uLv:873UpTLgH+#FgpH'_o1780Ph8KmxQJ8#H72L4@768@Tm&Q" + "h4CB/5OvmA&,Q&QbUoi$a_%3M01H)4x7I^&KQVgtFnV+;[Pc>[m4k//,]1?#`VY[Jr*3&&slRfLiVZJ:]?=K3Sw=[$=uRB?3xk48@aege0jT6'N#(q%.O=?2S]u*(m<-" + "V8J'(1)G][68hW$5'q[GC&5j`TE?m'esFGNRM)j,ffZ?-qx8;->g4t*:CIP/[Qap7/9'#(1sao7w-.qNUdkJ)tCF&#B^;xGvn2r9FEPFFFcL@.iFNkTve$m%#QvQS8U@)2Z+3K:AKM5i" + "sZ88+dKQ)W6>J%CL`.d*(B`-n8D9oK-XV1q['-5k'cAZ69e;D_?$ZPP&s^+7])$*$#@QYi9,5P r+$%CE=68>K8r0=dSC%%(@p7" + ".m7jilQ02'0-VWAgTlGW'b)Tq7VT9q^*^$$.:&N@@" + "$&)WHtPm*5_rO0&e%K&#-30j(E4#'Zb.o/(Tpm$>K'f@[PvFl,hfINTNU6u'0pao7%XUp9]5.>%h`8_=VYbxuel.NTSsJfLacFu3B'lQSu/m6-Oqem8T+oE--$0a/k]uj9EwsG>%veR*" + "hv^BFpQj:K'#SJ,sB-'#](j.Lg92rTw-*n%@/;39rrJF,l#qV%OrtBeC6/,;qB3ebNW[?,Hqj2L.1NP&GjUR=1D8QaS3Up&@*9wP?+lo7b?@%'k4`p0Z$22%K3+iCZj?XJN4Nm&+YF]u" + "@-W$U%VEQ/,,>>#)D#%8cY#YZ?=,`Wdxu/ae&#" + "w6)R89tI#6@s'(6Bf7a&?S=^ZI_kS&ai`&=tE72L_D,;^R)7[$so8lKN%5/$(vdfq7+ebA#" + "u1p]ovUKW&Y%q]'>$1@-[xfn$7ZTp7mM,G,Ko7a&Gu%G[RMxJs[0MM%wci.LFDK)(%:_i2B5CsR8&9Z&#=mPEnm0f`<&c)QL5uJ#%u%lJj+D-r;BoFDoS97h5g)E#o:&S4weDF,9^Hoe`h*L+_a*NrLW-1pG_&2UdB8" + "6e%B/:=>)N4xeW.*wft-;$'58-ESqr#U`'6AQ]m&6/`Z>#S?YY#Vc;r7U2&326d=w&H####?TZ`*4?&.MK?LP8Vxg>$[QXc%QJv92.(Db*B)gb*BM9dM*hJMAo*c&#" + "b0v=Pjer]$gG&JXDf->'StvU7505l9$AFvgYRI^&<^b68?j#q9QX4SM'RO#&sL1IM.rJfLUAj221]d##DW=m83u5;'bYx,*Sl0hL(W;;$doB&O/TQ:(Z^xBdLjLV#*8U_72Lh+2Q8Cj0i:6hp&$C/:p(HK>T8Y[gHQ4`4)'$Ab(Nof%V'8hL&#SfD07&6D@M.*J:;$-rv29'M]8qMv-tLp,'886iaC=Hb*YJoKJ,(j%K=H`K.v9HggqBIiZu'QvBT.#=)0ukruV&.)3=(^1`o*Pj4<-#MJ+gLq9-##@HuZPN0]u:h7.T..G:;$/Usj(T7`Q8tT72LnYl<-qx8;-HV7Q-&Xdx%1a,hC=0u+HlsV>nuIQL-5" + "_>@kXQtMacfD.m-VAb8;IReM3$wf0''hra*so568'Ip&vRs849'MRYSp%:t:h5qSgwpEr$B>Q,;s(C#$)`svQuF$##-D,##,g68@2[T;.XSdN9Qe)rpt._K-#5wF)sP'##p#C0c%-Gb%" + "hd+<-j'Ai*x&&HMkT]C'OSl##5RG[JXaHN;d'uA#x._U;.`PU@(Z3dt4r152@:v,'R.Sj'w#0<-;kPI)FfJ&#AYJ&#//)>-k=m=*XnK$>=)72L]0I%>.G690a:$##<,);?;72#?x9+d;" + "^V'9;jY@;)br#q^YQpx:X#Te$Z^'=-=bGhLf:D6&bNwZ9-ZD#n^9HhLMr5G;']d&6'wYmTFmLq9wI>P(9mI[>kC-ekLC/R&CH+s'B;K-M6$EB%is00:" + "+A4[7xks.LrNk0&E)wILYF@2L'0Nb$+pv<(2.768/FrY&h$^3i&@+G%JT'<-,v`3;_)I9M^AE]CN?Cl2AZg+%4iTpT3$U4O]GKx'm9)b@p7YsvK3w^YR-" + "CdQ*:Ir<($u&)#(&?L9Rg3H)4fiEp^iI9O8KnTj,]H?D*r7'M;PwZ9K0E^k&-cpI;.p/6_vwoFMV<->#%Xi.LxVnrU(4&8/P+:hLSKj$#U%]49t'I:rgMi'FL@a:0Y-uA[39',(vbma*" + "hU%<-SRF`Tt:542R_VV$p@[p8DV[A,?1839FWdFTi1O*H&#(AL8[_P%.M>v^-))qOT*F5Cq0`Ye%+$B6i:7@0IXSsDiWP,##P`%/L-" + "S(qw%sf/@%#B6;/U7K]uZbi^Oc^2n%t<)'mEVE''n`WnJra$^TKvX5B>;_aSEK',(hwa0:i4G?.Bci.(X[?b*($,=-n<.Q%`(X=?+@Am*Js0&=3bh8K]mL69=Lb,OcZV/);TTm8VI;?%OtJ<(b4mq7M6:u?KRdFl*:xP?Yb.5)%w_I?7uk5JC+FS(m#i'k.'a0i)9<7b'fs'59hq$*5Uhv##pi^8+hIEBF`nvo`;'l0.^S1<-wUK2/Coh58KKhLj" + "M=SO*rfO`+qC`W-On.=AJ56>>i2@2LH6A:&5q`?9I3@@'04&p2/LVa*T-4<-i3;M9UvZd+N7>b*eIwg:CC)c<>nO&#$(>.Z-I&J(Q0Hd5Q%7Co-b`-cP)hI;*_F]u`Rb[.j8_Q/<&>uu+VsH$sM9TA%?)(vmJ80),P7E>)tjD%2L=-t#fK[%`v=Q8WlA2);Sa" + ">gXm8YB`1d@K#n]76-a$U,mF%Ul:#/'xoFM9QX-$.QN'>" + "[%$Z$uF6pA6Ki2O5:8w*vP1<-1`[G,)-m#>0`P&#eb#.3i)rtB61(o'$?X3B2Qft^ae_5tKL9MUe9b*sLEQ95C&`=G?@Mj=wh*'3E>=-<)Gt*Iw)'QG:`@I" + "wOf7&]1i'S01B+Ev/Nac#9S;=;YQpg_6U`*kVY39xK,[/6Aj7:'1Bm-_1EYfa1+o&o4hp7KN_Q(OlIo@S%;jVdn0'1h19w,WQhLI)3S#f$2(eb,jr*b;3Vw]*7NH%$c4Vs,eD9>XW8?N]o+(*pgC%/72LV-uW%iewS8W6m2rtCpo'RS1R84=@paTKt)>=%&1[)*vp'u+x,VrwN;&]kuO9JDbg=pO$J*.jVe;u'm0dr9l,<*wMK*Oe=g8lV_KEBFkO'oU]^=[-792#ok,)" + "i]lR8qQ2oA8wcRCZ^7w/Njh;?.stX?Q1>S1q4Bn$)K1<-rGdO'$Wr.Lc.CG)$/*JL4tNR/,SVO3,aUw'DJN:)Ss;wGn9A32ijw%FL+Z0Fn.U9;reSq)bmI32U==5ALuG&#Vf1398/pVo" + "1*c-(aY168o<`JsSbk-,1N;$>0:OUas(3:8Z972LSfF8eb=c-;>SPw7.6hn3m`9^Xkn(r.qS[0;T%&Qc=+STRxX'q1BNk3&*eu2;&8q$&x>Q#Q7^Tf+6<(d%ZVmj2bDi%.3L2n+4W'$P" + "iDDG)g,r%+?,$@?uou5tSe2aN_AQU*'IAO" + "URQ##V^Fv-XFbGM7Fl(N<3DhLGF%q.1rC$#:T__&Pi68%0xi_&[qFJ(77j_&JWoF.V735&T,[R*:xFR*K5>>#`bW-?4Ne_&6Ne_&6Ne_&n`kr-#GJcM6X;uM6X;uM(.a..^2TkL%oR(#" + ";u.T%fAr%4tJ8&><1=GHZ_+m9/#H1F^R#SC#*N=BA9(D?v[UiFY>>^8p,KKF.W]L29uLkLlu/+4T" + "w$)F./^n3+rlo+DB;5sIYGNk+i1t-69Jg--0pao7Sm#K)pdHW&;LuDNH@H>#/X-TI(;P>#,Gc>#0Su>#4`1?#8lC?#xL$#B.`$#F:r$#JF.%#NR@%#R_R%#Vke%#Zww%#_-4^Rh%Sflr-k'MS.o?.5/sWel/wpEM0%3'/1)K^f1-d>G21&v(35>V`39V7A4=onx4" + "A1OY5EI0;6Ibgr6M$HS7Q<)58C5w,;WoA*#[%T*#`1g*#d=#+#hI5+#lUG+#pbY+#tnl+#x$),#&1;,#*=M,#.I`,#2Ur,#6b.-#;w[H#iQtA#m^0B#qjBB#uvTB##-hB#'9$C#+E6C#" + "/QHC#3^ZC#7jmC#;v)D#?,)4kMYD4lVu`4m`:&5niUA5@(A5BA1]PBB:xlBCC=2CDLXMCEUtiCf&0g2'tN?PGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CP" + "GT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CP-qekC`.9kEg^+F$kwViFJTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5o,^<-28ZI'O?;xp" + "O?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xp;7q-#lLYI:xvD=#"; + +static const char* GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85() +{ + return proggy_clean_ttf_compressed_data_base85; +} + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_freetype.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_freetype.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a11e582 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_freetype.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,942 @@ +// dear imgui: FreeType font builder (used as a replacement for the stb_truetype builder) +// (code) + +// Get the latest version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/misc/freetype +// Original code by @vuhdo (Aleksei Skriabin). Improvements by @mikesart. Maintained since 2019 by @ocornut. + +// CHANGELOG +// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details) +// 2023/08/01: added support for SVG fonts, enable by using '#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG' (#6591) +// 2023/01/04: fixed a packing issue which in some occurrences would prevent large amount of glyphs from being packed correctly. +// 2021/08/23: fixed crash when FT_Render_Glyph() fails to render a glyph and returns NULL. +// 2021/03/05: added ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bitmap to load bitmap glyphs. +// 2021/03/02: set 'atlas->TexPixelsUseColors = true' to help some backends with deciding of a prefered texture format. +// 2021/01/28: added support for color-layered glyphs via ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LoadColor (require Freetype 2.10+). +// 2021/01/26: simplified integration by using '#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE'. renamed ImGuiFreeType::XXX flags to ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_XXX for consistency with other API. removed ImGuiFreeType::BuildFontAtlas(). +// 2020/06/04: fix for rare case where FT_Get_Char_Index() succeed but FT_Load_Glyph() fails. +// 2019/02/09: added RasterizerFlags::Monochrome flag to disable font anti-aliasing (combine with ::MonoHinting for best results!) +// 2019/01/15: added support for imgui allocators + added FreeType only override function SetAllocatorFunctions(). +// 2019/01/10: re-factored to match big update in STB builder. fixed texture height waste. fixed redundant glyphs when merging. support for glyph padding. +// 2018/06/08: added support for ImFontConfig::GlyphMinAdvanceX, GlyphMaxAdvanceX. +// 2018/02/04: moved to main imgui repository (away from http://www.github.com/ocornut/imgui_club) +// 2018/01/22: fix for addition of ImFontAtlas::TexUvscale member. +// 2017/10/22: minor inconsequential change to match change in master (removed an unnecessary statement). +// 2017/09/26: fixes for imgui internal changes. +// 2017/08/26: cleanup, optimizations, support for ImFontConfig::RasterizerFlags, ImFontConfig::RasterizerMultiply. +// 2017/08/16: imported from https://github.com/Vuhdo/imgui_freetype into http://www.github.com/ocornut/imgui_club, updated for latest changes in ImFontAtlas, minor tweaks. + +// About Gamma Correct Blending: +// - FreeType assumes blending in linear space rather than gamma space. +// - See https://www.freetype.org/freetype2/docs/reference/ft2-base_interface.html#FT_Render_Glyph +// - For correct results you need to be using sRGB and convert to linear space in the pixel shader output. +// - The default dear imgui styles will be impacted by this change (alpha values will need tweaking). + +// FIXME: cfg.OversampleH, OversampleV are not supported (but perhaps not so necessary with this rasterizer). + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE +#include "imgui_freetype.h" +#include "imgui_internal.h" // ImMin,ImMax,ImFontAtlasBuild*, +#include +#include +#include FT_FREETYPE_H // +#include FT_MODULE_H // +#include FT_GLYPH_H // +#include FT_SYNTHESIS_H // + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG +#include FT_OTSVG_H // +#include FT_BBOX_H // +#include +#if !((FREETYPE_MAJOR >= 2) && (FREETYPE_MINOR >= 12)) +#error IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG requires FreeType version >= 2.12 +#endif +#endif + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (push) +#pragma warning (disable: 4505) // unreferenced local function has been removed (stb stuff) +#pragma warning (disable: 26812) // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). +#endif + +#ifdef __GNUC__ +#pragma GCC diagnostic push +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wsubobject-linkage" // warning: 'xxxx' has a field 'xxxx' whose type uses the anonymous namespace +#endif + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Data +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Default memory allocators +static void* ImGuiFreeTypeDefaultAllocFunc(size_t size, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); return IM_ALLOC(size); } +static void ImGuiFreeTypeDefaultFreeFunc(void* ptr, void* user_data) { IM_UNUSED(user_data); IM_FREE(ptr); } + +// Current memory allocators +static void* (*GImGuiFreeTypeAllocFunc)(size_t size, void* user_data) = ImGuiFreeTypeDefaultAllocFunc; +static void (*GImGuiFreeTypeFreeFunc)(void* ptr, void* user_data) = ImGuiFreeTypeDefaultFreeFunc; +static void* GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData = nullptr; + +// Lunasvg support +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG +static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortInit(FT_Pointer* state); +static void ImGuiLunasvgPortFree(FT_Pointer* state); +static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortRender(FT_GlyphSlot slot, FT_Pointer* _state); +static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortPresetSlot(FT_GlyphSlot slot, FT_Bool cache, FT_Pointer* _state); +#endif + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Code +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +namespace +{ + // Glyph metrics: + // -------------- + // + // xmin xmax + // | | + // |<-------- width -------->| + // | | + // | +-------------------------+----------------- ymax + // | | ggggggggg ggggg | ^ ^ + // | | g:::::::::ggg::::g | | | + // | | g:::::::::::::::::g | | | + // | | g::::::ggggg::::::gg | | | + // | | g:::::g g:::::g | | | + // offsetX -|-------->| g:::::g g:::::g | offsetY | + // | | g:::::g g:::::g | | | + // | | g::::::g g:::::g | | | + // | | g:::::::ggggg:::::g | | | + // | | g::::::::::::::::g | | height + // | | gg::::::::::::::g | | | + // baseline ---*---------|---- gggggggg::::::g-----*-------- | + // / | | g:::::g | | + // origin | | gggggg g:::::g | | + // | | g:::::gg gg:::::g | | + // | | g::::::ggg:::::::g | | + // | | gg:::::::::::::g | | + // | | ggg::::::ggg | | + // | | gggggg | v + // | +-------------------------+----------------- ymin + // | | + // |------------- advanceX ----------->| + + // A structure that describe a glyph. + struct GlyphInfo + { + int Width; // Glyph's width in pixels. + int Height; // Glyph's height in pixels. + FT_Int OffsetX; // The distance from the origin ("pen position") to the left of the glyph. + FT_Int OffsetY; // The distance from the origin to the top of the glyph. This is usually a value < 0. + float AdvanceX; // The distance from the origin to the origin of the next glyph. This is usually a value > 0. + bool IsColored; // The glyph is colored + }; + + // Font parameters and metrics. + struct FontInfo + { + uint32_t PixelHeight; // Size this font was generated with. + float Ascender; // The pixel extents above the baseline in pixels (typically positive). + float Descender; // The extents below the baseline in pixels (typically negative). + float LineSpacing; // The baseline-to-baseline distance. Note that it usually is larger than the sum of the ascender and descender taken as absolute values. There is also no guarantee that no glyphs extend above or below subsequent baselines when using this distance. Think of it as a value the designer of the font finds appropriate. + float LineGap; // The spacing in pixels between one row's descent and the next row's ascent. + float MaxAdvanceWidth; // This field gives the maximum horizontal cursor advance for all glyphs in the font. + }; + + // FreeType glyph rasterizer. + // NB: No ctor/dtor, explicitly call Init()/Shutdown() + struct FreeTypeFont + { + bool InitFont(FT_Library ft_library, const ImFontConfig& cfg, unsigned int extra_user_flags); // Initialize from an external data buffer. Doesn't copy data, and you must ensure it stays valid up to this object lifetime. + void CloseFont(); + void SetPixelHeight(int pixel_height); // Change font pixel size. All following calls to RasterizeGlyph() will use this size + const FT_Glyph_Metrics* LoadGlyph(uint32_t in_codepoint); + const FT_Bitmap* RenderGlyphAndGetInfo(GlyphInfo* out_glyph_info); + void BlitGlyph(const FT_Bitmap* ft_bitmap, uint32_t* dst, uint32_t dst_pitch, unsigned char* multiply_table = nullptr); + ~FreeTypeFont() { CloseFont(); } + + // [Internals] + FontInfo Info; // Font descriptor of the current font. + FT_Face Face; + unsigned int UserFlags; // = ImFontConfig::RasterizerFlags + FT_Int32 LoadFlags; + FT_Render_Mode RenderMode; + }; + + // From SDL_ttf: Handy routines for converting from fixed point + #define FT_CEIL(X) (((X + 63) & -64) / 64) + + bool FreeTypeFont::InitFont(FT_Library ft_library, const ImFontConfig& cfg, unsigned int extra_font_builder_flags) + { + FT_Error error = FT_New_Memory_Face(ft_library, (uint8_t*)cfg.FontData, (uint32_t)cfg.FontDataSize, (uint32_t)cfg.FontNo, &Face); + if (error != 0) + return false; + error = FT_Select_Charmap(Face, FT_ENCODING_UNICODE); + if (error != 0) + return false; + + // Convert to FreeType flags (NB: Bold and Oblique are processed separately) + UserFlags = cfg.FontBuilderFlags | extra_font_builder_flags; + + LoadFlags = 0; + if ((UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bitmap) == 0) + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_NO_BITMAP; + + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_NoHinting) + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_NO_HINTING; + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_NoAutoHint) + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_NO_AUTOHINT; + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_ForceAutoHint) + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_FORCE_AUTOHINT; + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LightHinting) + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_TARGET_LIGHT; + else if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_MonoHinting) + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_TARGET_MONO; + else + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_TARGET_NORMAL; + + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Monochrome) + RenderMode = FT_RENDER_MODE_MONO; + else + RenderMode = FT_RENDER_MODE_NORMAL; + + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LoadColor) + LoadFlags |= FT_LOAD_COLOR; + + memset(&Info, 0, sizeof(Info)); + SetPixelHeight((uint32_t)cfg.SizePixels); + + return true; + } + + void FreeTypeFont::CloseFont() + { + if (Face) + { + FT_Done_Face(Face); + Face = nullptr; + } + } + + void FreeTypeFont::SetPixelHeight(int pixel_height) + { + // Vuhdo: I'm not sure how to deal with font sizes properly. As far as I understand, currently ImGui assumes that the 'pixel_height' + // is a maximum height of an any given glyph, i.e. it's the sum of font's ascender and descender. Seems strange to me. + // NB: FT_Set_Pixel_Sizes() doesn't seem to get us the same result. + FT_Size_RequestRec req; + req.type = (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bitmap) ? FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_NOMINAL : FT_SIZE_REQUEST_TYPE_REAL_DIM; + req.width = 0; + req.height = (uint32_t)pixel_height * 64; + req.horiResolution = 0; + req.vertResolution = 0; + FT_Request_Size(Face, &req); + + // Update font info + FT_Size_Metrics metrics = Face->size->metrics; + Info.PixelHeight = (uint32_t)pixel_height; + Info.Ascender = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.ascender); + Info.Descender = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.descender); + Info.LineSpacing = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.height); + Info.LineGap = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.height - metrics.ascender + metrics.descender); + Info.MaxAdvanceWidth = (float)FT_CEIL(metrics.max_advance); + } + + const FT_Glyph_Metrics* FreeTypeFont::LoadGlyph(uint32_t codepoint) + { + uint32_t glyph_index = FT_Get_Char_Index(Face, codepoint); + if (glyph_index == 0) + return nullptr; + + // If this crash for you: FreeType 2.11.0 has a crash bug on some bitmap/colored fonts. + // - https://gitlab.freedesktop.org/freetype/freetype/-/issues/1076 + // - https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4567 + // - https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4566 + // You can use FreeType 2.10, or the patched version of 2.11.0 in VcPkg, or probably any upcoming FreeType version. + FT_Error error = FT_Load_Glyph(Face, glyph_index, LoadFlags); + if (error) + return nullptr; + + // Need an outline for this to work + FT_GlyphSlot slot = Face->glyph; +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG + IM_ASSERT(slot->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE || slot->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP || slot->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_SVG); +#else +#if ((FREETYPE_MAJOR >= 2) && (FREETYPE_MINOR >= 12)) + IM_ASSERT(slot->format != FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_SVG && "The font contains SVG glyphs, you'll need to enable IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG in imconfig.h and install required libraries in order to use this font"); +#endif + IM_ASSERT(slot->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_OUTLINE || slot->format == FT_GLYPH_FORMAT_BITMAP); +#endif // IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG + + // Apply convenience transform (this is not picking from real "Bold"/"Italic" fonts! Merely applying FreeType helper transform. Oblique == Slanting) + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bold) + FT_GlyphSlot_Embolden(slot); + if (UserFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Oblique) + { + FT_GlyphSlot_Oblique(slot); + //FT_BBox bbox; + //FT_Outline_Get_BBox(&slot->outline, &bbox); + //slot->metrics.width = bbox.xMax - bbox.xMin; + //slot->metrics.height = bbox.yMax - bbox.yMin; + } + + return &slot->metrics; + } + + const FT_Bitmap* FreeTypeFont::RenderGlyphAndGetInfo(GlyphInfo* out_glyph_info) + { + FT_GlyphSlot slot = Face->glyph; + FT_Error error = FT_Render_Glyph(slot, RenderMode); + if (error != 0) + return nullptr; + + FT_Bitmap* ft_bitmap = &Face->glyph->bitmap; + out_glyph_info->Width = (int)ft_bitmap->width; + out_glyph_info->Height = (int)ft_bitmap->rows; + out_glyph_info->OffsetX = Face->glyph->bitmap_left; + out_glyph_info->OffsetY = -Face->glyph->bitmap_top; + out_glyph_info->AdvanceX = (float)FT_CEIL(slot->advance.x); + out_glyph_info->IsColored = (ft_bitmap->pixel_mode == FT_PIXEL_MODE_BGRA); + + return ft_bitmap; + } + + void FreeTypeFont::BlitGlyph(const FT_Bitmap* ft_bitmap, uint32_t* dst, uint32_t dst_pitch, unsigned char* multiply_table) + { + IM_ASSERT(ft_bitmap != nullptr); + const uint32_t w = ft_bitmap->width; + const uint32_t h = ft_bitmap->rows; + const uint8_t* src = ft_bitmap->buffer; + const uint32_t src_pitch = ft_bitmap->pitch; + + switch (ft_bitmap->pixel_mode) + { + case FT_PIXEL_MODE_GRAY: // Grayscale image, 1 byte per pixel. + { + if (multiply_table == nullptr) + { + for (uint32_t y = 0; y < h; y++, src += src_pitch, dst += dst_pitch) + for (uint32_t x = 0; x < w; x++) + dst[x] = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, src[x]); + } + else + { + for (uint32_t y = 0; y < h; y++, src += src_pitch, dst += dst_pitch) + for (uint32_t x = 0; x < w; x++) + dst[x] = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, multiply_table[src[x]]); + } + break; + } + case FT_PIXEL_MODE_MONO: // Monochrome image, 1 bit per pixel. The bits in each byte are ordered from MSB to LSB. + { + uint8_t color0 = multiply_table ? multiply_table[0] : 0; + uint8_t color1 = multiply_table ? multiply_table[255] : 255; + for (uint32_t y = 0; y < h; y++, src += src_pitch, dst += dst_pitch) + { + uint8_t bits = 0; + const uint8_t* bits_ptr = src; + for (uint32_t x = 0; x < w; x++, bits <<= 1) + { + if ((x & 7) == 0) + bits = *bits_ptr++; + dst[x] = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, (bits & 0x80) ? color1 : color0); + } + } + break; + } + case FT_PIXEL_MODE_BGRA: + { + // FIXME: Converting pre-multiplied alpha to straight. Doesn't smell good. + #define DE_MULTIPLY(color, alpha) (ImU32)(255.0f * (float)color / (float)alpha + 0.5f) + if (multiply_table == nullptr) + { + for (uint32_t y = 0; y < h; y++, src += src_pitch, dst += dst_pitch) + for (uint32_t x = 0; x < w; x++) + { + uint8_t r = src[x * 4 + 2], g = src[x * 4 + 1], b = src[x * 4], a = src[x * 4 + 3]; + dst[x] = IM_COL32(DE_MULTIPLY(r, a), DE_MULTIPLY(g, a), DE_MULTIPLY(b, a), a); + } + } + else + { + for (uint32_t y = 0; y < h; y++, src += src_pitch, dst += dst_pitch) + { + for (uint32_t x = 0; x < w; x++) + { + uint8_t r = src[x * 4 + 2], g = src[x * 4 + 1], b = src[x * 4], a = src[x * 4 + 3]; + dst[x] = IM_COL32(multiply_table[DE_MULTIPLY(r, a)], multiply_table[DE_MULTIPLY(g, a)], multiply_table[DE_MULTIPLY(b, a)], multiply_table[a]); + } + } + } + #undef DE_MULTIPLY + break; + } + default: + IM_ASSERT(0 && "FreeTypeFont::BlitGlyph(): Unknown bitmap pixel mode!"); + } + } +} // namespace + +#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION // in case the user already have an implementation in the _same_ compilation unit (e.g. unity builds) +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION +#define STBRP_ASSERT(x) do { IM_ASSERT(x); } while (0) +#define STBRP_STATIC +#define STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME +#include IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME +#else +#include "imstb_rectpack.h" +#endif +#endif + +struct ImFontBuildSrcGlyphFT +{ + GlyphInfo Info; + uint32_t Codepoint; + unsigned int* BitmapData; // Point within one of the dst_tmp_bitmap_buffers[] array + + ImFontBuildSrcGlyphFT() { memset((void*)this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +struct ImFontBuildSrcDataFT +{ + FreeTypeFont Font; + stbrp_rect* Rects; // Rectangle to pack. We first fill in their size and the packer will give us their position. + const ImWchar* SrcRanges; // Ranges as requested by user (user is allowed to request too much, e.g. 0x0020..0xFFFF) + int DstIndex; // Index into atlas->Fonts[] and dst_tmp_array[] + int GlyphsHighest; // Highest requested codepoint + int GlyphsCount; // Glyph count (excluding missing glyphs and glyphs already set by an earlier source font) + ImBitVector GlyphsSet; // Glyph bit map (random access, 1-bit per codepoint. This will be a maximum of 8KB) + ImVector GlyphsList; +}; + +// Temporary data for one destination ImFont* (multiple source fonts can be merged into one destination ImFont) +struct ImFontBuildDstDataFT +{ + int SrcCount; // Number of source fonts targeting this destination font. + int GlyphsHighest; + int GlyphsCount; + ImBitVector GlyphsSet; // This is used to resolve collision when multiple sources are merged into a same destination font. +}; + +bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithFreeTypeEx(FT_Library ft_library, ImFontAtlas* atlas, unsigned int extra_flags) +{ + IM_ASSERT(atlas->ConfigData.Size > 0); + + ImFontAtlasBuildInit(atlas); + + // Clear atlas + atlas->TexID = (ImTextureID)nullptr; + atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexHeight = 0; + atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + atlas->TexUvWhitePixel = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + atlas->ClearTexData(); + + // Temporary storage for building + bool src_load_color = false; + ImVector src_tmp_array; + ImVector dst_tmp_array; + src_tmp_array.resize(atlas->ConfigData.Size); + dst_tmp_array.resize(atlas->Fonts.Size); + memset((void*)src_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)src_tmp_array.size_in_bytes()); + memset((void*)dst_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)dst_tmp_array.size_in_bytes()); + + // 1. Initialize font loading structure, check font data validity + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcDataFT& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i]; + FreeTypeFont& font_face = src_tmp.Font; + IM_ASSERT(cfg.DstFont && (!cfg.DstFont->IsLoaded() || cfg.DstFont->ContainerAtlas == atlas)); + + // Find index from cfg.DstFont (we allow the user to set cfg.DstFont. Also it makes casual debugging nicer than when storing indices) + src_tmp.DstIndex = -1; + for (int output_i = 0; output_i < atlas->Fonts.Size && src_tmp.DstIndex == -1; output_i++) + if (cfg.DstFont == atlas->Fonts[output_i]) + src_tmp.DstIndex = output_i; + IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.DstIndex != -1); // cfg.DstFont not pointing within atlas->Fonts[] array? + if (src_tmp.DstIndex == -1) + return false; + + // Load font + if (!font_face.InitFont(ft_library, cfg, extra_flags)) + return false; + + // Measure highest codepoints + src_load_color |= (cfg.FontBuilderFlags & ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LoadColor) != 0; + ImFontBuildDstDataFT& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex]; + src_tmp.SrcRanges = cfg.GlyphRanges ? cfg.GlyphRanges : atlas->GetGlyphRangesDefault(); + for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2) + { + // Check for valid range. This may also help detect *some* dangling pointers, because a common + // user error is to setup ImFontConfig::GlyphRanges with a pointer to data that isn't persistent. + IM_ASSERT(src_range[0] <= src_range[1]); + src_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest, (int)src_range[1]); + } + dst_tmp.SrcCount++; + dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest, src_tmp.GlyphsHighest); + } + + // 2. For every requested codepoint, check for their presence in the font data, and handle redundancy or overlaps between source fonts to avoid unused glyphs. + int total_glyphs_count = 0; + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcDataFT& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + ImFontBuildDstDataFT& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex]; + src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Create(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1); + if (dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Storage.empty()) + dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Create(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1); + + for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2) + for (int codepoint = src_range[0]; codepoint <= (int)src_range[1]; codepoint++) + { + if (dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.TestBit(codepoint)) // Don't overwrite existing glyphs. We could make this an option (e.g. MergeOverwrite) + continue; + uint32_t glyph_index = FT_Get_Char_Index(src_tmp.Font.Face, codepoint); // It is actually in the font? (FIXME-OPT: We are not storing the glyph_index..) + if (glyph_index == 0) + continue; + + // Add to avail set/counters + src_tmp.GlyphsCount++; + dst_tmp.GlyphsCount++; + src_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint); + dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint); + total_glyphs_count++; + } + } + + // 3. Unpack our bit map into a flat list (we now have all the Unicode points that we know are requested _and_ available _and_ not overlapping another) + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcDataFT& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + src_tmp.GlyphsList.reserve(src_tmp.GlyphsCount); + + IM_ASSERT(sizeof(src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Storage.Data[0]) == sizeof(ImU32)); + const ImU32* it_begin = src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Storage.begin(); + const ImU32* it_end = src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Storage.end(); + for (const ImU32* it = it_begin; it < it_end; it++) + if (ImU32 entries_32 = *it) + for (ImU32 bit_n = 0; bit_n < 32; bit_n++) + if (entries_32 & ((ImU32)1 << bit_n)) + { + ImFontBuildSrcGlyphFT src_glyph; + src_glyph.Codepoint = (ImWchar)(((it - it_begin) << 5) + bit_n); + //src_glyph.GlyphIndex = 0; // FIXME-OPT: We had this info in the previous step and lost it.. + src_tmp.GlyphsList.push_back(src_glyph); + } + src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Clear(); + IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size == src_tmp.GlyphsCount); + } + for (int dst_i = 0; dst_i < dst_tmp_array.Size; dst_i++) + dst_tmp_array[dst_i].GlyphsSet.Clear(); + dst_tmp_array.clear(); + + // Allocate packing character data and flag packed characters buffer as non-packed (x0=y0=x1=y1=0) + // (We technically don't need to zero-clear buf_rects, but let's do it for the sake of sanity) + ImVector buf_rects; + buf_rects.resize(total_glyphs_count); + memset(buf_rects.Data, 0, (size_t)buf_rects.size_in_bytes()); + + // Allocate temporary rasterization data buffers. + // We could not find a way to retrieve accurate glyph size without rendering them. + // (e.g. slot->metrics->width not always matching bitmap->width, especially considering the Oblique transform) + // We allocate in chunks of 256 KB to not waste too much extra memory ahead. Hopefully users of FreeType won't mind the temporary allocations. + const int BITMAP_BUFFERS_CHUNK_SIZE = 256 * 1024; + int buf_bitmap_current_used_bytes = 0; + ImVector buf_bitmap_buffers; + buf_bitmap_buffers.push_back((unsigned char*)IM_ALLOC(BITMAP_BUFFERS_CHUNK_SIZE)); + + // 4. Gather glyphs sizes so we can pack them in our virtual canvas. + // 8. Render/rasterize font characters into the texture + int total_surface = 0; + int buf_rects_out_n = 0; + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcDataFT& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i]; + if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0) + continue; + + src_tmp.Rects = &buf_rects[buf_rects_out_n]; + buf_rects_out_n += src_tmp.GlyphsCount; + + // Compute multiply table if requested + const bool multiply_enabled = (cfg.RasterizerMultiply != 1.0f); + unsigned char multiply_table[256]; + if (multiply_enabled) + ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(multiply_table, cfg.RasterizerMultiply); + + // Gather the sizes of all rectangles we will need to pack + const int padding = atlas->TexGlyphPadding; + for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size; glyph_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcGlyphFT& src_glyph = src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i]; + + const FT_Glyph_Metrics* metrics = src_tmp.Font.LoadGlyph(src_glyph.Codepoint); + if (metrics == nullptr) + continue; + + // Render glyph into a bitmap (currently held by FreeType) + const FT_Bitmap* ft_bitmap = src_tmp.Font.RenderGlyphAndGetInfo(&src_glyph.Info); + if (ft_bitmap == nullptr) + continue; + + // Allocate new temporary chunk if needed + const int bitmap_size_in_bytes = src_glyph.Info.Width * src_glyph.Info.Height * 4; + if (buf_bitmap_current_used_bytes + bitmap_size_in_bytes > BITMAP_BUFFERS_CHUNK_SIZE) + { + buf_bitmap_current_used_bytes = 0; + buf_bitmap_buffers.push_back((unsigned char*)IM_ALLOC(BITMAP_BUFFERS_CHUNK_SIZE)); + } + IM_ASSERT(buf_bitmap_current_used_bytes + bitmap_size_in_bytes <= BITMAP_BUFFERS_CHUNK_SIZE); // We could probably allocate custom-sized buffer instead. + + // Blit rasterized pixels to our temporary buffer and keep a pointer to it. + src_glyph.BitmapData = (unsigned int*)(buf_bitmap_buffers.back() + buf_bitmap_current_used_bytes); + buf_bitmap_current_used_bytes += bitmap_size_in_bytes; + src_tmp.Font.BlitGlyph(ft_bitmap, src_glyph.BitmapData, src_glyph.Info.Width, multiply_enabled ? multiply_table : nullptr); + + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w = (stbrp_coord)(src_glyph.Info.Width + padding); + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h = (stbrp_coord)(src_glyph.Info.Height + padding); + total_surface += src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w * src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h; + } + } + + // We need a width for the skyline algorithm, any width! + // The exact width doesn't really matter much, but some API/GPU have texture size limitations and increasing width can decrease height. + // User can override TexDesiredWidth and TexGlyphPadding if they wish, otherwise we use a simple heuristic to select the width based on expected surface. + const int surface_sqrt = (int)ImSqrt((float)total_surface) + 1; + atlas->TexHeight = 0; + if (atlas->TexDesiredWidth > 0) + atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexDesiredWidth; + else + atlas->TexWidth = (surface_sqrt >= 4096 * 0.7f) ? 4096 : (surface_sqrt >= 2048 * 0.7f) ? 2048 : (surface_sqrt >= 1024 * 0.7f) ? 1024 : 512; + + // 5. Start packing + // Pack our extra data rectangles first, so it will be on the upper-left corner of our texture (UV will have small values). + const int TEX_HEIGHT_MAX = 1024 * 32; + const int num_nodes_for_packing_algorithm = atlas->TexWidth - atlas->TexGlyphPadding; + ImVector pack_nodes; + pack_nodes.resize(num_nodes_for_packing_algorithm); + stbrp_context pack_context; + stbrp_init_target(&pack_context, atlas->TexWidth - atlas->TexGlyphPadding, TEX_HEIGHT_MAX - atlas->TexGlyphPadding, pack_nodes.Data, pack_nodes.Size); + ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(atlas, &pack_context); + + // 6. Pack each source font. No rendering yet, we are working with rectangles in an infinitely tall texture at this point. + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcDataFT& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0) + continue; + + stbrp_pack_rects(&pack_context, src_tmp.Rects, src_tmp.GlyphsCount); + + // Extend texture height and mark missing glyphs as non-packed so we won't render them. + // FIXME: We are not handling packing failure here (would happen if we got off TEX_HEIGHT_MAX or if a single if larger than TexWidth?) + for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++) + if (src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].was_packed) + atlas->TexHeight = ImMax(atlas->TexHeight, src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].y + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h); + } + + // 7. Allocate texture + atlas->TexHeight = (atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight) ? (atlas->TexHeight + 1) : ImUpperPowerOfTwo(atlas->TexHeight); + atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(1.0f / atlas->TexWidth, 1.0f / atlas->TexHeight); + if (src_load_color) + { + size_t tex_size = (size_t)atlas->TexWidth * atlas->TexHeight * 4; + atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32 = (unsigned int*)IM_ALLOC(tex_size); + memset(atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32, 0, tex_size); + } + else + { + size_t tex_size = (size_t)atlas->TexWidth * atlas->TexHeight * 1; + atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 = (unsigned char*)IM_ALLOC(tex_size); + memset(atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8, 0, tex_size); + } + + // 8. Copy rasterized font characters back into the main texture + // 9. Setup ImFont and glyphs for runtime + bool tex_use_colors = false; + for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcDataFT& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i]; + if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0) + continue; + + // When merging fonts with MergeMode=true: + // - We can have multiple input fonts writing into a same destination font. + // - dst_font->ConfigData is != from cfg which is our source configuration. + ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i]; + ImFont* dst_font = cfg.DstFont; + + const float ascent = src_tmp.Font.Info.Ascender; + const float descent = src_tmp.Font.Info.Descender; + ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(atlas, dst_font, &cfg, ascent, descent); + const float font_off_x = cfg.GlyphOffset.x; + const float font_off_y = cfg.GlyphOffset.y + IM_ROUND(dst_font->Ascent); + + const int padding = atlas->TexGlyphPadding; + for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++) + { + ImFontBuildSrcGlyphFT& src_glyph = src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i]; + stbrp_rect& pack_rect = src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i]; + IM_ASSERT(pack_rect.was_packed); + if (pack_rect.w == 0 && pack_rect.h == 0) + continue; + + GlyphInfo& info = src_glyph.Info; + IM_ASSERT(info.Width + padding <= pack_rect.w); + IM_ASSERT(info.Height + padding <= pack_rect.h); + const int tx = pack_rect.x + padding; + const int ty = pack_rect.y + padding; + + // Register glyph + float x0 = info.OffsetX + font_off_x; + float y0 = info.OffsetY + font_off_y; + float x1 = x0 + info.Width; + float y1 = y0 + info.Height; + float u0 = (tx) / (float)atlas->TexWidth; + float v0 = (ty) / (float)atlas->TexHeight; + float u1 = (tx + info.Width) / (float)atlas->TexWidth; + float v1 = (ty + info.Height) / (float)atlas->TexHeight; + dst_font->AddGlyph(&cfg, (ImWchar)src_glyph.Codepoint, x0, y0, x1, y1, u0, v0, u1, v1, info.AdvanceX); + + ImFontGlyph* dst_glyph = &dst_font->Glyphs.back(); + IM_ASSERT(dst_glyph->Codepoint == src_glyph.Codepoint); + if (src_glyph.Info.IsColored) + dst_glyph->Colored = tex_use_colors = true; + + // Blit from temporary buffer to final texture + size_t blit_src_stride = (size_t)src_glyph.Info.Width; + size_t blit_dst_stride = (size_t)atlas->TexWidth; + unsigned int* blit_src = src_glyph.BitmapData; + if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != nullptr) + { + unsigned char* blit_dst = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 + (ty * blit_dst_stride) + tx; + for (int y = 0; y < info.Height; y++, blit_dst += blit_dst_stride, blit_src += blit_src_stride) + for (int x = 0; x < info.Width; x++) + blit_dst[x] = (unsigned char)((blit_src[x] >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF); + } + else + { + unsigned int* blit_dst = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32 + (ty * blit_dst_stride) + tx; + for (int y = 0; y < info.Height; y++, blit_dst += blit_dst_stride, blit_src += blit_src_stride) + for (int x = 0; x < info.Width; x++) + blit_dst[x] = blit_src[x]; + } + } + + src_tmp.Rects = nullptr; + } + atlas->TexPixelsUseColors = tex_use_colors; + + // Cleanup + for (int buf_i = 0; buf_i < buf_bitmap_buffers.Size; buf_i++) + IM_FREE(buf_bitmap_buffers[buf_i]); + src_tmp_array.clear_destruct(); + + ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(atlas); + + return true; +} + +// FreeType memory allocation callbacks +static void* FreeType_Alloc(FT_Memory /*memory*/, long size) +{ + return GImGuiFreeTypeAllocFunc((size_t)size, GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData); +} + +static void FreeType_Free(FT_Memory /*memory*/, void* block) +{ + GImGuiFreeTypeFreeFunc(block, GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData); +} + +static void* FreeType_Realloc(FT_Memory /*memory*/, long cur_size, long new_size, void* block) +{ + // Implement realloc() as we don't ask user to provide it. + if (block == nullptr) + return GImGuiFreeTypeAllocFunc((size_t)new_size, GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData); + + if (new_size == 0) + { + GImGuiFreeTypeFreeFunc(block, GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData); + return nullptr; + } + + if (new_size > cur_size) + { + void* new_block = GImGuiFreeTypeAllocFunc((size_t)new_size, GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData); + memcpy(new_block, block, (size_t)cur_size); + GImGuiFreeTypeFreeFunc(block, GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData); + return new_block; + } + + return block; +} + +static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithFreeType(ImFontAtlas* atlas) +{ + // FreeType memory management: https://www.freetype.org/freetype2/docs/design/design-4.html + FT_MemoryRec_ memory_rec = {}; + memory_rec.user = nullptr; + memory_rec.alloc = &FreeType_Alloc; + memory_rec.free = &FreeType_Free; + memory_rec.realloc = &FreeType_Realloc; + + // https://www.freetype.org/freetype2/docs/reference/ft2-module_management.html#FT_New_Library + FT_Library ft_library; + FT_Error error = FT_New_Library(&memory_rec, &ft_library); + if (error != 0) + return false; + + // If you don't call FT_Add_Default_Modules() the rest of code may work, but FreeType won't use our custom allocator. + FT_Add_Default_Modules(ft_library); + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG + // Install svg hooks for FreeType + // https://freetype.org/freetype2/docs/reference/ft2-properties.html#svg-hooks + // https://freetype.org/freetype2/docs/reference/ft2-svg_fonts.html#svg_fonts + SVG_RendererHooks hooks = { ImGuiLunasvgPortInit, ImGuiLunasvgPortFree, ImGuiLunasvgPortRender, ImGuiLunasvgPortPresetSlot }; + FT_Property_Set(ft_library, "ot-svg", "svg-hooks", &hooks); +#endif // IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG + + bool ret = ImFontAtlasBuildWithFreeTypeEx(ft_library, atlas, atlas->FontBuilderFlags); + FT_Done_Library(ft_library); + + return ret; +} + +const ImFontBuilderIO* ImGuiFreeType::GetBuilderForFreeType() +{ + static ImFontBuilderIO io; + io.FontBuilder_Build = ImFontAtlasBuildWithFreeType; + return &io; +} + +void ImGuiFreeType::SetAllocatorFunctions(void* (*alloc_func)(size_t sz, void* user_data), void (*free_func)(void* ptr, void* user_data), void* user_data) +{ + GImGuiFreeTypeAllocFunc = alloc_func; + GImGuiFreeTypeFreeFunc = free_func; + GImGuiFreeTypeAllocatorUserData = user_data; +} + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG +// For more details, see https://gitlab.freedesktop.org/freetype/freetype-demos/-/blob/master/src/rsvg-port.c +// The original code from the demo is licensed under CeCILL-C Free Software License Agreement (https://gitlab.freedesktop.org/freetype/freetype/-/blob/master/LICENSE.TXT) +struct LunasvgPortState +{ + FT_Error err = FT_Err_Ok; + lunasvg::Matrix matrix; + std::unique_ptr svg = nullptr; +}; + +static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortInit(FT_Pointer* _state) +{ + *_state = IM_NEW(LunasvgPortState)(); + return FT_Err_Ok; +} + +static void ImGuiLunasvgPortFree(FT_Pointer* _state) +{ + IM_DELETE(*_state); +} + +static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortRender(FT_GlyphSlot slot, FT_Pointer* _state) +{ + LunasvgPortState* state = *(LunasvgPortState**)_state; + + // If there was an error while loading the svg in ImGuiLunasvgPortPresetSlot(), the renderer hook still get called, so just returns the error. + if (state->err != FT_Err_Ok) + return state->err; + + // rows is height, pitch (or stride) equals to width * sizeof(int32) + lunasvg::Bitmap bitmap((uint8_t*)slot->bitmap.buffer, slot->bitmap.width, slot->bitmap.rows, slot->bitmap.pitch); + state->svg->setMatrix(state->svg->matrix().identity()); // Reset the svg matrix to the default value + state->svg->render(bitmap, state->matrix); // state->matrix is already scaled and translated + state->err = FT_Err_Ok; + return state->err; +} + +static FT_Error ImGuiLunasvgPortPresetSlot(FT_GlyphSlot slot, FT_Bool cache, FT_Pointer* _state) +{ + FT_SVG_Document document = (FT_SVG_Document)slot->other; + LunasvgPortState* state = *(LunasvgPortState**)_state; + FT_Size_Metrics& metrics = document->metrics; + + // This function is called twice, once in the FT_Load_Glyph() and another right before ImGuiLunasvgPortRender(). + // If it's the latter, don't do anything because it's // already done in the former. + if (cache) + return state->err; + + state->svg = lunasvg::Document::loadFromData((const char*)document->svg_document, document->svg_document_length); + if (state->svg == nullptr) + { + state->err = FT_Err_Invalid_SVG_Document; + return state->err; + } + + lunasvg::Box box = state->svg->box(); + double scale = std::min(metrics.x_ppem / box.w, metrics.y_ppem / box.h); + double xx = (double)document->transform.xx / (1 << 16); + double xy = -(double)document->transform.xy / (1 << 16); + double yx = -(double)document->transform.yx / (1 << 16); + double yy = (double)document->transform.yy / (1 << 16); + double x0 = (double)document->delta.x / 64 * box.w / metrics.x_ppem; + double y0 = -(double)document->delta.y / 64 * box.h / metrics.y_ppem; + + // Scale and transform, we don't translate the svg yet + state->matrix.identity(); + state->matrix.scale(scale, scale); + state->matrix.transform(xx, xy, yx, yy, x0, y0); + state->svg->setMatrix(state->matrix); + + // Pre-translate the matrix for the rendering step + state->matrix.translate(-box.x, -box.y); + + // Get the box again after the transformation + box = state->svg->box(); + + // Calculate the bitmap size + slot->bitmap_left = FT_Int(box.x); + slot->bitmap_top = FT_Int(-box.y); + slot->bitmap.rows = (unsigned int)(ImCeil((float)box.h)); + slot->bitmap.width = (unsigned int)(ImCeil((float)box.w)); + slot->bitmap.pitch = slot->bitmap.width * 4; + slot->bitmap.pixel_mode = FT_PIXEL_MODE_BGRA; + + // Compute all the bearings and set them correctly. The outline is scaled already, we just need to use the bounding box. + double metrics_width = box.w; + double metrics_height = box.h; + double horiBearingX = box.x; + double horiBearingY = -box.y; + double vertBearingX = slot->metrics.horiBearingX / 64.0 - slot->metrics.horiAdvance / 64.0 / 2.0; + double vertBearingY = (slot->metrics.vertAdvance / 64.0 - slot->metrics.height / 64.0) / 2.0; + slot->metrics.width = FT_Pos(IM_ROUND(metrics_width * 64.0)); // Using IM_ROUND() assume width and height are positive + slot->metrics.height = FT_Pos(IM_ROUND(metrics_height * 64.0)); + slot->metrics.horiBearingX = FT_Pos(horiBearingX * 64); + slot->metrics.horiBearingY = FT_Pos(horiBearingY * 64); + slot->metrics.vertBearingX = FT_Pos(vertBearingX * 64); + slot->metrics.vertBearingY = FT_Pos(vertBearingY * 64); + + if (slot->metrics.vertAdvance == 0) + slot->metrics.vertAdvance = FT_Pos(metrics_height * 1.2 * 64.0); + + state->err = FT_Err_Ok; + return state->err; +} + +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE_LUNASVG + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifdef __GNUC__ +#pragma GCC diagnostic pop +#endif + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (pop) +#endif + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_freetype.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_freetype.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc58ba6 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_freetype.h @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +// dear imgui: FreeType font builder (used as a replacement for the stb_truetype builder) +// (headers) + +#pragma once +#include "imgui.h" // IMGUI_API +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE + +// Forward declarations +struct ImFontAtlas; +struct ImFontBuilderIO; + +// Hinting greatly impacts visuals (and glyph sizes). +// - By default, hinting is enabled and the font's native hinter is preferred over the auto-hinter. +// - When disabled, FreeType generates blurrier glyphs, more or less matches the stb_truetype.h +// - The Default hinting mode usually looks good, but may distort glyphs in an unusual way. +// - The Light hinting mode generates fuzzier glyphs but better matches Microsoft's rasterizer. +// You can set those flags globaly in ImFontAtlas::FontBuilderFlags +// You can set those flags on a per font basis in ImFontConfig::FontBuilderFlags +enum ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags +{ + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_NoHinting = 1 << 0, // Disable hinting. This generally generates 'blurrier' bitmap glyphs when the glyph are rendered in any of the anti-aliased modes. + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_NoAutoHint = 1 << 1, // Disable auto-hinter. + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_ForceAutoHint = 1 << 2, // Indicates that the auto-hinter is preferred over the font's native hinter. + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LightHinting = 1 << 3, // A lighter hinting algorithm for gray-level modes. Many generated glyphs are fuzzier but better resemble their original shape. This is achieved by snapping glyphs to the pixel grid only vertically (Y-axis), as is done by Microsoft's ClearType and Adobe's proprietary font renderer. This preserves inter-glyph spacing in horizontal text. + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_MonoHinting = 1 << 4, // Strong hinting algorithm that should only be used for monochrome output. + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bold = 1 << 5, // Styling: Should we artificially embolden the font? + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Oblique = 1 << 6, // Styling: Should we slant the font, emulating italic style? + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Monochrome = 1 << 7, // Disable anti-aliasing. Combine this with MonoHinting for best results! + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_LoadColor = 1 << 8, // Enable FreeType color-layered glyphs + ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_Bitmap = 1 << 9 // Enable FreeType bitmap glyphs +}; + +namespace ImGuiFreeType +{ + // This is automatically assigned when using '#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE'. + // If you need to dynamically select between multiple builders: + // - you can manually assign this builder with 'atlas->FontBuilderIO = ImGuiFreeType::GetBuilderForFreeType()' + // - prefer deep-copying this into your own ImFontBuilderIO instance if you use hot-reloading that messes up static data. + IMGUI_API const ImFontBuilderIO* GetBuilderForFreeType(); + + // Override allocators. By default ImGuiFreeType will use IM_ALLOC()/IM_FREE() + // However, as FreeType does lots of allocations we provide a way for the user to redirect it to a separate memory heap if desired. + IMGUI_API void SetAllocatorFunctions(void* (*alloc_func)(size_t sz, void* user_data), void (*free_func)(void* ptr, void* user_data), void* user_data = nullptr); + + // Obsolete names (will be removed soon) + // Prefer using '#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE' +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + static inline bool BuildFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas* atlas, unsigned int flags = 0) { atlas->FontBuilderIO = GetBuilderForFreeType(); atlas->FontBuilderFlags = flags; return atlas->Build(); } +#endif +} + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..243850a --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,602 @@ +// dear imgui: Renderer Backend for DirectX11 +// This needs to be used along with a Platform Backend (e.g. Win32) + +// Implemented features: +// [X] Renderer: User texture binding. Use 'ID3D11ShaderResourceView*' as ImTextureID. Read the FAQ about ImTextureID! +// [X] Renderer: Large meshes support (64k+ vertices) with 16-bit indices. + +// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this. +// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need. +// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp. +// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs + +// CHANGELOG +// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details) +// 2022-10-11: Using 'nullptr' instead of 'NULL' as per our switch to C++11. +// 2021-06-29: Reorganized backend to pull data from a single structure to facilitate usage with multiple-contexts (all g_XXXX access changed to bd->XXXX). +// 2021-05-19: DirectX11: Replaced direct access to ImDrawCmd::TextureId with a call to ImDrawCmd::GetTexID(). (will become a requirement) +// 2021-02-18: DirectX11: Change blending equation to preserve alpha in output buffer. +// 2019-08-01: DirectX11: Fixed code querying the Geometry Shader state (would generally error with Debug layer enabled). +// 2019-07-21: DirectX11: Backup, clear and restore Geometry Shader is any is bound when calling ImGui_ImplDX10_RenderDrawData. Clearing Hull/Domain/Compute shaders without backup/restore. +// 2019-05-29: DirectX11: Added support for large mesh (64K+ vertices), enable ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset flag. +// 2019-04-30: DirectX11: Added support for special ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState callback to reset render state. +// 2018-12-03: Misc: Added #pragma comment statement to automatically link with d3dcompiler.lib when using D3DCompile(). +// 2018-11-30: Misc: Setting up io.BackendRendererName so it can be displayed in the About Window. +// 2018-08-01: DirectX11: Querying for IDXGIFactory instead of IDXGIFactory1 to increase compatibility. +// 2018-07-13: DirectX11: Fixed unreleased resources in Init and Shutdown functions. +// 2018-06-08: Misc: Extracted imgui_impl_dx11.cpp/.h away from the old combined DX11+Win32 example. +// 2018-06-08: DirectX11: Use draw_data->DisplayPos and draw_data->DisplaySize to setup projection matrix and clipping rectangle. +// 2018-02-16: Misc: Obsoleted the io.RenderDrawListsFn callback and exposed ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData() in the .h file so you can call it yourself. +// 2018-02-06: Misc: Removed call to ImGui::Shutdown() which is not available from 1.60 WIP, user needs to call CreateContext/DestroyContext themselves. +// 2016-05-07: DirectX11: Disabling depth-write. + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE +#include "imgui_impl_dx11.h" + +// DirectX +#include +#include +#include +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma comment(lib, "d3dcompiler") // Automatically link with d3dcompiler.lib as we are using D3DCompile() below. +#endif + +// DirectX11 data +struct ImGui_ImplDX11_Data +{ + ID3D11Device* pd3dDevice; + ID3D11DeviceContext* pd3dDeviceContext; + IDXGIFactory* pFactory; + ID3D11Buffer* pVB; + ID3D11Buffer* pIB; + ID3D11VertexShader* pVertexShader; + ID3D11InputLayout* pInputLayout; + ID3D11Buffer* pVertexConstantBuffer; + ID3D11PixelShader* pPixelShader; + ID3D11SamplerState* pFontSampler; + ID3D11ShaderResourceView* pFontTextureView; + ID3D11RasterizerState* pRasterizerState; + ID3D11BlendState* pBlendState; + ID3D11DepthStencilState* pDepthStencilState; + int VertexBufferSize; + int IndexBufferSize; + + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data() { memset((void*)this, 0, sizeof(*this)); VertexBufferSize = 5000; IndexBufferSize = 10000; } +}; + +struct VERTEX_CONSTANT_BUFFER_DX11 +{ + float mvp[4][4]; +}; + +// Backend data stored in io.BackendRendererUserData to allow support for multiple Dear ImGui contexts +// It is STRONGLY preferred that you use docking branch with multi-viewports (== single Dear ImGui context + multiple windows) instead of multiple Dear ImGui contexts. +static ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData() +{ + return ImGui::GetCurrentContext() ? (ImGui_ImplDX11_Data*)ImGui::GetIO().BackendRendererUserData : nullptr; +} + +// Functions +static void ImGui_ImplDX11_SetupRenderState(ImDrawData* draw_data, ID3D11DeviceContext* ctx) +{ + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData(); + + // Setup viewport + D3D11_VIEWPORT vp; + memset(&vp, 0, sizeof(D3D11_VIEWPORT)); + vp.Width = draw_data->DisplaySize.x; + vp.Height = draw_data->DisplaySize.y; + vp.MinDepth = 0.0f; + vp.MaxDepth = 1.0f; + vp.TopLeftX = vp.TopLeftY = 0; + ctx->RSSetViewports(1, &vp); + + // Setup shader and vertex buffers + unsigned int stride = sizeof(ImDrawVert); + unsigned int offset = 0; + ctx->IASetInputLayout(bd->pInputLayout); + ctx->IASetVertexBuffers(0, 1, &bd->pVB, &stride, &offset); + ctx->IASetIndexBuffer(bd->pIB, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? DXGI_FORMAT_R16_UINT : DXGI_FORMAT_R32_UINT, 0); + ctx->IASetPrimitiveTopology(D3D11_PRIMITIVE_TOPOLOGY_TRIANGLELIST); + ctx->VSSetShader(bd->pVertexShader, nullptr, 0); + ctx->VSSetConstantBuffers(0, 1, &bd->pVertexConstantBuffer); + ctx->PSSetShader(bd->pPixelShader, nullptr, 0); + ctx->PSSetSamplers(0, 1, &bd->pFontSampler); + ctx->GSSetShader(nullptr, nullptr, 0); + ctx->HSSetShader(nullptr, nullptr, 0); // In theory we should backup and restore this as well.. very infrequently used.. + ctx->DSSetShader(nullptr, nullptr, 0); // In theory we should backup and restore this as well.. very infrequently used.. + ctx->CSSetShader(nullptr, nullptr, 0); // In theory we should backup and restore this as well.. very infrequently used.. + + // Setup blend state + const float blend_factor[4] = { 0.f, 0.f, 0.f, 0.f }; + ctx->OMSetBlendState(bd->pBlendState, blend_factor, 0xffffffff); + ctx->OMSetDepthStencilState(bd->pDepthStencilState, 0); + ctx->RSSetState(bd->pRasterizerState); +} + +// Render function +void ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData(ImDrawData* draw_data) +{ + // Avoid rendering when minimized + if (draw_data->DisplaySize.x <= 0.0f || draw_data->DisplaySize.y <= 0.0f) + return; + + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData(); + ID3D11DeviceContext* ctx = bd->pd3dDeviceContext; + + // Create and grow vertex/index buffers if needed + if (!bd->pVB || bd->VertexBufferSize < draw_data->TotalVtxCount) + { + if (bd->pVB) { bd->pVB->Release(); bd->pVB = nullptr; } + bd->VertexBufferSize = draw_data->TotalVtxCount + 5000; + D3D11_BUFFER_DESC desc; + memset(&desc, 0, sizeof(D3D11_BUFFER_DESC)); + desc.Usage = D3D11_USAGE_DYNAMIC; + desc.ByteWidth = bd->VertexBufferSize * sizeof(ImDrawVert); + desc.BindFlags = D3D11_BIND_VERTEX_BUFFER; + desc.CPUAccessFlags = D3D11_CPU_ACCESS_WRITE; + desc.MiscFlags = 0; + if (bd->pd3dDevice->CreateBuffer(&desc, nullptr, &bd->pVB) < 0) + return; + } + if (!bd->pIB || bd->IndexBufferSize < draw_data->TotalIdxCount) + { + if (bd->pIB) { bd->pIB->Release(); bd->pIB = nullptr; } + bd->IndexBufferSize = draw_data->TotalIdxCount + 10000; + D3D11_BUFFER_DESC desc; + memset(&desc, 0, sizeof(D3D11_BUFFER_DESC)); + desc.Usage = D3D11_USAGE_DYNAMIC; + desc.ByteWidth = bd->IndexBufferSize * sizeof(ImDrawIdx); + desc.BindFlags = D3D11_BIND_INDEX_BUFFER; + desc.CPUAccessFlags = D3D11_CPU_ACCESS_WRITE; + if (bd->pd3dDevice->CreateBuffer(&desc, nullptr, &bd->pIB) < 0) + return; + } + + // Upload vertex/index data into a single contiguous GPU buffer + D3D11_MAPPED_SUBRESOURCE vtx_resource, idx_resource; + if (ctx->Map(bd->pVB, 0, D3D11_MAP_WRITE_DISCARD, 0, &vtx_resource) != S_OK) + return; + if (ctx->Map(bd->pIB, 0, D3D11_MAP_WRITE_DISCARD, 0, &idx_resource) != S_OK) + return; + ImDrawVert* vtx_dst = (ImDrawVert*)vtx_resource.pData; + ImDrawIdx* idx_dst = (ImDrawIdx*)idx_resource.pData; + for (int n = 0; n < draw_data->CmdListsCount; n++) + { + const ImDrawList* cmd_list = draw_data->CmdLists[n]; + memcpy(vtx_dst, cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Data, cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Size * sizeof(ImDrawVert)); + memcpy(idx_dst, cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Data, cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size * sizeof(ImDrawIdx)); + vtx_dst += cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Size; + idx_dst += cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size; + } + ctx->Unmap(bd->pVB, 0); + ctx->Unmap(bd->pIB, 0); + + // Setup orthographic projection matrix into our constant buffer + // Our visible imgui space lies from draw_data->DisplayPos (top left) to draw_data->DisplayPos+data_data->DisplaySize (bottom right). DisplayPos is (0,0) for single viewport apps. + { + D3D11_MAPPED_SUBRESOURCE mapped_resource; + if (ctx->Map(bd->pVertexConstantBuffer, 0, D3D11_MAP_WRITE_DISCARD, 0, &mapped_resource) != S_OK) + return; + VERTEX_CONSTANT_BUFFER_DX11* constant_buffer = (VERTEX_CONSTANT_BUFFER_DX11*)mapped_resource.pData; + float L = draw_data->DisplayPos.x; + float R = draw_data->DisplayPos.x + draw_data->DisplaySize.x; + float T = draw_data->DisplayPos.y; + float B = draw_data->DisplayPos.y + draw_data->DisplaySize.y; + float mvp[4][4] = + { + { 2.0f/(R-L), 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f }, + { 0.0f, 2.0f/(T-B), 0.0f, 0.0f }, + { 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.5f, 0.0f }, + { (R+L)/(L-R), (T+B)/(B-T), 0.5f, 1.0f }, + }; + memcpy(&constant_buffer->mvp, mvp, sizeof(mvp)); + ctx->Unmap(bd->pVertexConstantBuffer, 0); + } + + // Backup DX state that will be modified to restore it afterwards (unfortunately this is very ugly looking and verbose. Close your eyes!) + struct BACKUP_DX11_STATE + { + UINT ScissorRectsCount, ViewportsCount; + D3D11_RECT ScissorRects[D3D11_VIEWPORT_AND_SCISSORRECT_OBJECT_COUNT_PER_PIPELINE]; + D3D11_VIEWPORT Viewports[D3D11_VIEWPORT_AND_SCISSORRECT_OBJECT_COUNT_PER_PIPELINE]; + ID3D11RasterizerState* RS; + ID3D11BlendState* BlendState; + FLOAT BlendFactor[4]; + UINT SampleMask; + UINT StencilRef; + ID3D11DepthStencilState* DepthStencilState; + ID3D11ShaderResourceView* PSShaderResource; + ID3D11SamplerState* PSSampler; + ID3D11PixelShader* PS; + ID3D11VertexShader* VS; + ID3D11GeometryShader* GS; + UINT PSInstancesCount, VSInstancesCount, GSInstancesCount; + ID3D11ClassInstance *PSInstances[256], *VSInstances[256], *GSInstances[256]; // 256 is max according to PSSetShader documentation + D3D11_PRIMITIVE_TOPOLOGY PrimitiveTopology; + ID3D11Buffer* IndexBuffer, *VertexBuffer, *VSConstantBuffer; + UINT IndexBufferOffset, VertexBufferStride, VertexBufferOffset; + DXGI_FORMAT IndexBufferFormat; + ID3D11InputLayout* InputLayout; + }; + BACKUP_DX11_STATE old = {}; + old.ScissorRectsCount = old.ViewportsCount = D3D11_VIEWPORT_AND_SCISSORRECT_OBJECT_COUNT_PER_PIPELINE; + ctx->RSGetScissorRects(&old.ScissorRectsCount, old.ScissorRects); + ctx->RSGetViewports(&old.ViewportsCount, old.Viewports); + ctx->RSGetState(&old.RS); + ctx->OMGetBlendState(&old.BlendState, old.BlendFactor, &old.SampleMask); + ctx->OMGetDepthStencilState(&old.DepthStencilState, &old.StencilRef); + ctx->PSGetShaderResources(0, 1, &old.PSShaderResource); + ctx->PSGetSamplers(0, 1, &old.PSSampler); + old.PSInstancesCount = old.VSInstancesCount = old.GSInstancesCount = 256; + ctx->PSGetShader(&old.PS, old.PSInstances, &old.PSInstancesCount); + ctx->VSGetShader(&old.VS, old.VSInstances, &old.VSInstancesCount); + ctx->VSGetConstantBuffers(0, 1, &old.VSConstantBuffer); + ctx->GSGetShader(&old.GS, old.GSInstances, &old.GSInstancesCount); + + ctx->IAGetPrimitiveTopology(&old.PrimitiveTopology); + ctx->IAGetIndexBuffer(&old.IndexBuffer, &old.IndexBufferFormat, &old.IndexBufferOffset); + ctx->IAGetVertexBuffers(0, 1, &old.VertexBuffer, &old.VertexBufferStride, &old.VertexBufferOffset); + ctx->IAGetInputLayout(&old.InputLayout); + + // Setup desired DX state + ImGui_ImplDX11_SetupRenderState(draw_data, ctx); + + // Render command lists + // (Because we merged all buffers into a single one, we maintain our own offset into them) + int global_idx_offset = 0; + int global_vtx_offset = 0; + ImVec2 clip_off = draw_data->DisplayPos; + for (int n = 0; n < draw_data->CmdListsCount; n++) + { + const ImDrawList* cmd_list = draw_data->CmdLists[n]; + for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++) + { + const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = &cmd_list->CmdBuffer[cmd_i]; + if (pcmd->UserCallback != nullptr) + { + // User callback, registered via ImDrawList::AddCallback() + // (ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState is a special callback value used by the user to request the renderer to reset render state.) + if (pcmd->UserCallback == ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState) + ImGui_ImplDX11_SetupRenderState(draw_data, ctx); + else + pcmd->UserCallback(cmd_list, pcmd); + } + else + { + // Project scissor/clipping rectangles into framebuffer space + ImVec2 clip_min(pcmd->ClipRect.x - clip_off.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y - clip_off.y); + ImVec2 clip_max(pcmd->ClipRect.z - clip_off.x, pcmd->ClipRect.w - clip_off.y); + if (clip_max.x <= clip_min.x || clip_max.y <= clip_min.y) + continue; + + // Apply scissor/clipping rectangle + const D3D11_RECT r = { (LONG)clip_min.x, (LONG)clip_min.y, (LONG)clip_max.x, (LONG)clip_max.y }; + ctx->RSSetScissorRects(1, &r); + + // Bind texture, Draw + ID3D11ShaderResourceView* texture_srv = (ID3D11ShaderResourceView*)pcmd->GetTexID(); + ctx->PSSetShaderResources(0, 1, &texture_srv); + ctx->DrawIndexed(pcmd->ElemCount, pcmd->IdxOffset + global_idx_offset, pcmd->VtxOffset + global_vtx_offset); + } + } + global_idx_offset += cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size; + global_vtx_offset += cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Size; + } + + // Restore modified DX state + ctx->RSSetScissorRects(old.ScissorRectsCount, old.ScissorRects); + ctx->RSSetViewports(old.ViewportsCount, old.Viewports); + ctx->RSSetState(old.RS); if (old.RS) old.RS->Release(); + ctx->OMSetBlendState(old.BlendState, old.BlendFactor, old.SampleMask); if (old.BlendState) old.BlendState->Release(); + ctx->OMSetDepthStencilState(old.DepthStencilState, old.StencilRef); if (old.DepthStencilState) old.DepthStencilState->Release(); + ctx->PSSetShaderResources(0, 1, &old.PSShaderResource); if (old.PSShaderResource) old.PSShaderResource->Release(); + ctx->PSSetSamplers(0, 1, &old.PSSampler); if (old.PSSampler) old.PSSampler->Release(); + ctx->PSSetShader(old.PS, old.PSInstances, old.PSInstancesCount); if (old.PS) old.PS->Release(); + for (UINT i = 0; i < old.PSInstancesCount; i++) if (old.PSInstances[i]) old.PSInstances[i]->Release(); + ctx->VSSetShader(old.VS, old.VSInstances, old.VSInstancesCount); if (old.VS) old.VS->Release(); + ctx->VSSetConstantBuffers(0, 1, &old.VSConstantBuffer); if (old.VSConstantBuffer) old.VSConstantBuffer->Release(); + ctx->GSSetShader(old.GS, old.GSInstances, old.GSInstancesCount); if (old.GS) old.GS->Release(); + for (UINT i = 0; i < old.VSInstancesCount; i++) if (old.VSInstances[i]) old.VSInstances[i]->Release(); + ctx->IASetPrimitiveTopology(old.PrimitiveTopology); + ctx->IASetIndexBuffer(old.IndexBuffer, old.IndexBufferFormat, old.IndexBufferOffset); if (old.IndexBuffer) old.IndexBuffer->Release(); + ctx->IASetVertexBuffers(0, 1, &old.VertexBuffer, &old.VertexBufferStride, &old.VertexBufferOffset); if (old.VertexBuffer) old.VertexBuffer->Release(); + ctx->IASetInputLayout(old.InputLayout); if (old.InputLayout) old.InputLayout->Release(); +} + +static void ImGui_ImplDX11_CreateFontsTexture() +{ + // Build texture atlas + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData(); + unsigned char* pixels; + int width, height; + io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height); + + // Upload texture to graphics system + { + D3D11_TEXTURE2D_DESC desc; + ZeroMemory(&desc, sizeof(desc)); + desc.Width = width; + desc.Height = height; + desc.MipLevels = 1; + desc.ArraySize = 1; + desc.Format = DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_UNORM; + desc.SampleDesc.Count = 1; + desc.Usage = D3D11_USAGE_DEFAULT; + desc.BindFlags = D3D11_BIND_SHADER_RESOURCE; + desc.CPUAccessFlags = 0; + + ID3D11Texture2D* pTexture = nullptr; + D3D11_SUBRESOURCE_DATA subResource; + subResource.pSysMem = pixels; + subResource.SysMemPitch = desc.Width * 4; + subResource.SysMemSlicePitch = 0; + bd->pd3dDevice->CreateTexture2D(&desc, &subResource, &pTexture); + IM_ASSERT(pTexture != nullptr); + + // Create texture view + D3D11_SHADER_RESOURCE_VIEW_DESC srvDesc; + ZeroMemory(&srvDesc, sizeof(srvDesc)); + srvDesc.Format = DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_UNORM; + srvDesc.ViewDimension = D3D11_SRV_DIMENSION_TEXTURE2D; + srvDesc.Texture2D.MipLevels = desc.MipLevels; + srvDesc.Texture2D.MostDetailedMip = 0; + bd->pd3dDevice->CreateShaderResourceView(pTexture, &srvDesc, &bd->pFontTextureView); + pTexture->Release(); + } + + // Store our identifier + io.Fonts->SetTexID((ImTextureID)bd->pFontTextureView); + + // Create texture sampler + // (Bilinear sampling is required by default. Set 'io.Fonts->Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines' or 'style.AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = false' to allow point/nearest sampling) + { + D3D11_SAMPLER_DESC desc; + ZeroMemory(&desc, sizeof(desc)); + desc.Filter = D3D11_FILTER_MIN_MAG_MIP_LINEAR; + desc.AddressU = D3D11_TEXTURE_ADDRESS_WRAP; + desc.AddressV = D3D11_TEXTURE_ADDRESS_WRAP; + desc.AddressW = D3D11_TEXTURE_ADDRESS_WRAP; + desc.MipLODBias = 0.f; + desc.ComparisonFunc = D3D11_COMPARISON_ALWAYS; + desc.MinLOD = 0.f; + desc.MaxLOD = 0.f; + bd->pd3dDevice->CreateSamplerState(&desc, &bd->pFontSampler); + } +} + +bool ImGui_ImplDX11_CreateDeviceObjects() +{ + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData(); + if (!bd->pd3dDevice) + return false; + if (bd->pFontSampler) + ImGui_ImplDX11_InvalidateDeviceObjects(); + + // By using D3DCompile() from / d3dcompiler.lib, we introduce a dependency to a given version of d3dcompiler_XX.dll (see D3DCOMPILER_DLL_A) + // If you would like to use this DX11 sample code but remove this dependency you can: + // 1) compile once, save the compiled shader blobs into a file or source code and pass them to CreateVertexShader()/CreatePixelShader() [preferred solution] + // 2) use code to detect any version of the DLL and grab a pointer to D3DCompile from the DLL. + // See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/pull/638 for sources and details. + + // Create the vertex shader + { + static const char* vertexShader = + "cbuffer vertexBuffer : register(b0) \ + {\ + float4x4 ProjectionMatrix; \ + };\ + struct VS_INPUT\ + {\ + float2 pos : POSITION;\ + float4 col : COLOR0;\ + float2 uv : TEXCOORD0;\ + };\ + \ + struct PS_INPUT\ + {\ + float4 pos : SV_POSITION;\ + float4 col : COLOR0;\ + float2 uv : TEXCOORD0;\ + };\ + \ + PS_INPUT main(VS_INPUT input)\ + {\ + PS_INPUT output;\ + output.pos = mul( ProjectionMatrix, float4(input.pos.xy, 0.f, 1.f));\ + output.col = input.col;\ + output.uv = input.uv;\ + return output;\ + }"; + + ID3DBlob* vertexShaderBlob; + if (FAILED(D3DCompile(vertexShader, strlen(vertexShader), nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, "main", "vs_4_0", 0, 0, &vertexShaderBlob, nullptr))) + return false; // NB: Pass ID3DBlob* pErrorBlob to D3DCompile() to get error showing in (const char*)pErrorBlob->GetBufferPointer(). Make sure to Release() the blob! + if (bd->pd3dDevice->CreateVertexShader(vertexShaderBlob->GetBufferPointer(), vertexShaderBlob->GetBufferSize(), nullptr, &bd->pVertexShader) != S_OK) + { + vertexShaderBlob->Release(); + return false; + } + + // Create the input layout + D3D11_INPUT_ELEMENT_DESC local_layout[] = + { + { "POSITION", 0, DXGI_FORMAT_R32G32_FLOAT, 0, (UINT)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, pos), D3D11_INPUT_PER_VERTEX_DATA, 0 }, + { "TEXCOORD", 0, DXGI_FORMAT_R32G32_FLOAT, 0, (UINT)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, uv), D3D11_INPUT_PER_VERTEX_DATA, 0 }, + { "COLOR", 0, DXGI_FORMAT_R8G8B8A8_UNORM, 0, (UINT)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, col), D3D11_INPUT_PER_VERTEX_DATA, 0 }, + }; + if (bd->pd3dDevice->CreateInputLayout(local_layout, 3, vertexShaderBlob->GetBufferPointer(), vertexShaderBlob->GetBufferSize(), &bd->pInputLayout) != S_OK) + { + vertexShaderBlob->Release(); + return false; + } + vertexShaderBlob->Release(); + + // Create the constant buffer + { + D3D11_BUFFER_DESC desc; + desc.ByteWidth = sizeof(VERTEX_CONSTANT_BUFFER_DX11); + desc.Usage = D3D11_USAGE_DYNAMIC; + desc.BindFlags = D3D11_BIND_CONSTANT_BUFFER; + desc.CPUAccessFlags = D3D11_CPU_ACCESS_WRITE; + desc.MiscFlags = 0; + bd->pd3dDevice->CreateBuffer(&desc, nullptr, &bd->pVertexConstantBuffer); + } + } + + // Create the pixel shader + { + static const char* pixelShader = + "struct PS_INPUT\ + {\ + float4 pos : SV_POSITION;\ + float4 col : COLOR0;\ + float2 uv : TEXCOORD0;\ + };\ + sampler sampler0;\ + Texture2D texture0;\ + \ + float4 main(PS_INPUT input) : SV_Target\ + {\ + float4 out_col = input.col * texture0.Sample(sampler0, input.uv); \ + return out_col; \ + }"; + + ID3DBlob* pixelShaderBlob; + if (FAILED(D3DCompile(pixelShader, strlen(pixelShader), nullptr, nullptr, nullptr, "main", "ps_4_0", 0, 0, &pixelShaderBlob, nullptr))) + return false; // NB: Pass ID3DBlob* pErrorBlob to D3DCompile() to get error showing in (const char*)pErrorBlob->GetBufferPointer(). Make sure to Release() the blob! + if (bd->pd3dDevice->CreatePixelShader(pixelShaderBlob->GetBufferPointer(), pixelShaderBlob->GetBufferSize(), nullptr, &bd->pPixelShader) != S_OK) + { + pixelShaderBlob->Release(); + return false; + } + pixelShaderBlob->Release(); + } + + // Create the blending setup + { + D3D11_BLEND_DESC desc; + ZeroMemory(&desc, sizeof(desc)); + desc.AlphaToCoverageEnable = false; + desc.RenderTarget[0].BlendEnable = true; + desc.RenderTarget[0].SrcBlend = D3D11_BLEND_SRC_ALPHA; + desc.RenderTarget[0].DestBlend = D3D11_BLEND_INV_SRC_ALPHA; + desc.RenderTarget[0].BlendOp = D3D11_BLEND_OP_ADD; + desc.RenderTarget[0].SrcBlendAlpha = D3D11_BLEND_ONE; + desc.RenderTarget[0].DestBlendAlpha = D3D11_BLEND_INV_SRC_ALPHA; + desc.RenderTarget[0].BlendOpAlpha = D3D11_BLEND_OP_ADD; + desc.RenderTarget[0].RenderTargetWriteMask = D3D11_COLOR_WRITE_ENABLE_ALL; + bd->pd3dDevice->CreateBlendState(&desc, &bd->pBlendState); + } + + // Create the rasterizer state + { + D3D11_RASTERIZER_DESC desc; + ZeroMemory(&desc, sizeof(desc)); + desc.FillMode = D3D11_FILL_SOLID; + desc.CullMode = D3D11_CULL_NONE; + desc.ScissorEnable = true; + desc.DepthClipEnable = true; + bd->pd3dDevice->CreateRasterizerState(&desc, &bd->pRasterizerState); + } + + // Create depth-stencil State + { + D3D11_DEPTH_STENCIL_DESC desc; + ZeroMemory(&desc, sizeof(desc)); + desc.DepthEnable = false; + desc.DepthWriteMask = D3D11_DEPTH_WRITE_MASK_ALL; + desc.DepthFunc = D3D11_COMPARISON_ALWAYS; + desc.StencilEnable = false; + desc.FrontFace.StencilFailOp = desc.FrontFace.StencilDepthFailOp = desc.FrontFace.StencilPassOp = D3D11_STENCIL_OP_KEEP; + desc.FrontFace.StencilFunc = D3D11_COMPARISON_ALWAYS; + desc.BackFace = desc.FrontFace; + bd->pd3dDevice->CreateDepthStencilState(&desc, &bd->pDepthStencilState); + } + + ImGui_ImplDX11_CreateFontsTexture(); + + return true; +} + +void ImGui_ImplDX11_InvalidateDeviceObjects() +{ + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData(); + if (!bd->pd3dDevice) + return; + + if (bd->pFontSampler) { bd->pFontSampler->Release(); bd->pFontSampler = nullptr; } + if (bd->pFontTextureView) { bd->pFontTextureView->Release(); bd->pFontTextureView = nullptr; ImGui::GetIO().Fonts->SetTexID(0); } // We copied data->pFontTextureView to io.Fonts->TexID so let's clear that as well. + if (bd->pIB) { bd->pIB->Release(); bd->pIB = nullptr; } + if (bd->pVB) { bd->pVB->Release(); bd->pVB = nullptr; } + if (bd->pBlendState) { bd->pBlendState->Release(); bd->pBlendState = nullptr; } + if (bd->pDepthStencilState) { bd->pDepthStencilState->Release(); bd->pDepthStencilState = nullptr; } + if (bd->pRasterizerState) { bd->pRasterizerState->Release(); bd->pRasterizerState = nullptr; } + if (bd->pPixelShader) { bd->pPixelShader->Release(); bd->pPixelShader = nullptr; } + if (bd->pVertexConstantBuffer) { bd->pVertexConstantBuffer->Release(); bd->pVertexConstantBuffer = nullptr; } + if (bd->pInputLayout) { bd->pInputLayout->Release(); bd->pInputLayout = nullptr; } + if (bd->pVertexShader) { bd->pVertexShader->Release(); bd->pVertexShader = nullptr; } +} + +bool ImGui_ImplDX11_Init(ID3D11Device* device, ID3D11DeviceContext* device_context) +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + IM_ASSERT(io.BackendRendererUserData == nullptr && "Already initialized a renderer backend!"); + + // Setup backend capabilities flags + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = IM_NEW(ImGui_ImplDX11_Data)(); + io.BackendRendererUserData = (void*)bd; + io.BackendRendererName = "imgui_impl_dx11"; + io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset; // We can honor the ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset field, allowing for large meshes. + + // Get factory from device + IDXGIDevice* pDXGIDevice = nullptr; + IDXGIAdapter* pDXGIAdapter = nullptr; + IDXGIFactory* pFactory = nullptr; + + if (device->QueryInterface(IID_PPV_ARGS(&pDXGIDevice)) == S_OK) + if (pDXGIDevice->GetParent(IID_PPV_ARGS(&pDXGIAdapter)) == S_OK) + if (pDXGIAdapter->GetParent(IID_PPV_ARGS(&pFactory)) == S_OK) + { + bd->pd3dDevice = device; + bd->pd3dDeviceContext = device_context; + bd->pFactory = pFactory; + } + if (pDXGIDevice) pDXGIDevice->Release(); + if (pDXGIAdapter) pDXGIAdapter->Release(); + bd->pd3dDevice->AddRef(); + bd->pd3dDeviceContext->AddRef(); + + return true; +} + +void ImGui_ImplDX11_Shutdown() +{ + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData(); + IM_ASSERT(bd != nullptr && "No renderer backend to shutdown, or already shutdown?"); + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + + ImGui_ImplDX11_InvalidateDeviceObjects(); + if (bd->pFactory) { bd->pFactory->Release(); } + if (bd->pd3dDevice) { bd->pd3dDevice->Release(); } + if (bd->pd3dDeviceContext) { bd->pd3dDeviceContext->Release(); } + io.BackendRendererName = nullptr; + io.BackendRendererUserData = nullptr; + io.BackendFlags &= ~ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset; + IM_DELETE(bd); +} + +void ImGui_ImplDX11_NewFrame() +{ + ImGui_ImplDX11_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplDX11_GetBackendData(); + IM_ASSERT(bd != nullptr && "Did you call ImGui_ImplDX11_Init()?"); + + if (!bd->pFontSampler) + ImGui_ImplDX11_CreateDeviceObjects(); +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1082b8e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_dx11.h @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +// dear imgui: Renderer Backend for DirectX11 +// This needs to be used along with a Platform Backend (e.g. Win32) + +// Implemented features: +// [X] Renderer: User texture binding. Use 'ID3D11ShaderResourceView*' as ImTextureID. Read the FAQ about ImTextureID! +// [X] Renderer: Large meshes support (64k+ vertices) with 16-bit indices. + +// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this. +// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need. +// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp. +// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs + +#pragma once +#include "imgui.h" // IMGUI_IMPL_API +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE + +struct ID3D11Device; +struct ID3D11DeviceContext; + +IMGUI_IMPL_API bool ImGui_ImplDX11_Init(ID3D11Device* device, ID3D11DeviceContext* device_context); +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplDX11_Shutdown(); +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplDX11_NewFrame(); +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData(ImDrawData* draw_data); + +// Use if you want to reset your rendering device without losing Dear ImGui state. +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplDX11_InvalidateDeviceObjects(); +IMGUI_IMPL_API bool ImGui_ImplDX11_CreateDeviceObjects(); + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0993ecf --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,864 @@ +// dear imgui: Platform Backend for Windows (standard windows API for 32-bits AND 64-bits applications) +// This needs to be used along with a Renderer (e.g. DirectX11, OpenGL3, Vulkan..) + +// Implemented features: +// [X] Platform: Clipboard support (for Win32 this is actually part of core dear imgui) +// [X] Platform: Mouse support. Can discriminate Mouse/TouchScreen/Pen. +// [X] Platform: Keyboard support. Since 1.87 we are using the io.AddKeyEvent() function. Pass ImGuiKey values to all key functions e.g. ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space). [Legacy VK_* values will also be supported unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is set] +// [X] Platform: Gamepad support. Enabled with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad'. +// [X] Platform: Mouse cursor shape and visibility. Disable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange'. + +// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this. +// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need. +// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp. +// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE +#include "imgui_impl_win32.h" +#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN +#endif +#include +#include // GET_X_LPARAM(), GET_Y_LPARAM() +#include +#include + +// Configuration flags to add in your imconfig.h file: +//#define IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD // Disable gamepad support. This was meaningful before <1.81 but we now load XInput dynamically so the option is now less relevant. + +// Using XInput for gamepad (will load DLL dynamically) +#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD +#include +typedef DWORD (WINAPI *PFN_XInputGetCapabilities)(DWORD, DWORD, XINPUT_CAPABILITIES*); +typedef DWORD (WINAPI *PFN_XInputGetState)(DWORD, XINPUT_STATE*); +#endif + +// CHANGELOG +// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details) +// 2023-04-19: Added ImGui_ImplWin32_InitForOpenGL() to facilitate combining raw Win32/Winapi with OpenGL. (#3218) +// 2023-04-04: Inputs: Added support for io.AddMouseSourceEvent() to discriminate ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse/ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen/ImGuiMouseSource_Pen. (#2702) +// 2023-02-15: Inputs: Use WM_NCMOUSEMOVE / WM_NCMOUSELEAVE to track mouse position over non-client area (e.g. OS decorations) when app is not focused. (#6045, #6162) +// 2023-02-02: Inputs: Flipping WM_MOUSEHWHEEL (horizontal mouse-wheel) value to match other backends and offer consistent horizontal scrolling direction. (#4019, #6096, #1463) +// 2022-10-11: Using 'nullptr' instead of 'NULL' as per our switch to C++11. +// 2022-09-28: Inputs: Convert WM_CHAR values with MultiByteToWideChar() when window class was registered as MBCS (not Unicode). +// 2022-09-26: Inputs: Renamed ImGuiKey_ModXXX introduced in 1.87 to ImGuiMod_XXX (old names still supported). +// 2022-01-26: Inputs: replaced short-lived io.AddKeyModsEvent() (added two weeks ago) with io.AddKeyEvent() using ImGuiKey_ModXXX flags. Sorry for the confusion. +// 2021-01-20: Inputs: calling new io.AddKeyAnalogEvent() for gamepad support, instead of writing directly to io.NavInputs[]. +// 2022-01-17: Inputs: calling new io.AddMousePosEvent(), io.AddMouseButtonEvent(), io.AddMouseWheelEvent() API (1.87+). +// 2022-01-17: Inputs: always update key mods next and before a key event (not in NewFrame) to fix input queue with very low framerates. +// 2022-01-12: Inputs: Update mouse inputs using WM_MOUSEMOVE/WM_MOUSELEAVE + fallback to provide it when focused but not hovered/captured. More standard and will allow us to pass it to future input queue API. +// 2022-01-12: Inputs: Maintain our own copy of MouseButtonsDown mask instead of using ImGui::IsAnyMouseDown() which will be obsoleted. +// 2022-01-10: Inputs: calling new io.AddKeyEvent(), io.AddKeyModsEvent() + io.SetKeyEventNativeData() API (1.87+). Support for full ImGuiKey range. +// 2021-12-16: Inputs: Fill VK_LCONTROL/VK_RCONTROL/VK_LSHIFT/VK_RSHIFT/VK_LMENU/VK_RMENU for completeness. +// 2021-08-17: Calling io.AddFocusEvent() on WM_SETFOCUS/WM_KILLFOCUS messages. +// 2021-08-02: Inputs: Fixed keyboard modifiers being reported when host window doesn't have focus. +// 2021-07-29: Inputs: MousePos is correctly reported when the host platform window is hovered but not focused (using TrackMouseEvent() to receive WM_MOUSELEAVE events). +// 2021-06-29: Reorganized backend to pull data from a single structure to facilitate usage with multiple-contexts (all g_XXXX access changed to bd->XXXX). +// 2021-06-08: Fixed ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableDpiAwareness() and ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForMonitor() to handle Windows 8.1/10 features without a manifest (per-monitor DPI, and properly calls SetProcessDpiAwareness() on 8.1). +// 2021-03-23: Inputs: Clearing keyboard down array when losing focus (WM_KILLFOCUS). +// 2021-02-18: Added ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableAlphaCompositing(). Non Visual Studio users will need to link with dwmapi.lib (MinGW/gcc: use -ldwmapi). +// 2021-02-17: Fixed ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableDpiAwareness() attempting to get SetProcessDpiAwareness from shcore.dll on Windows 8 whereas it is only supported on Windows 8.1. +// 2021-01-25: Inputs: Dynamically loading XInput DLL. +// 2020-12-04: Misc: Fixed setting of io.DisplaySize to invalid/uninitialized data when after hwnd has been closed. +// 2020-03-03: Inputs: Calling AddInputCharacterUTF16() to support surrogate pairs leading to codepoint >= 0x10000 (for more complete CJK inputs) +// 2020-02-17: Added ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableDpiAwareness(), ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForHwnd(), ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForMonitor() helper functions. +// 2020-01-14: Inputs: Added support for #define IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD/IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_LINKING_XINPUT. +// 2019-12-05: Inputs: Added support for ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed mouse cursor. +// 2019-05-11: Inputs: Don't filter value from WM_CHAR before calling AddInputCharacter(). +// 2019-01-17: Misc: Using GetForegroundWindow()+IsChild() instead of GetActiveWindow() to be compatible with windows created in a different thread or parent. +// 2019-01-17: Inputs: Added support for mouse buttons 4 and 5 via WM_XBUTTON* messages. +// 2019-01-15: Inputs: Added support for XInput gamepads (if ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad is set by user application). +// 2018-11-30: Misc: Setting up io.BackendPlatformName so it can be displayed in the About Window. +// 2018-06-29: Inputs: Added support for the ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand cursor. +// 2018-06-10: Inputs: Fixed handling of mouse wheel messages to support fine position messages (typically sent by track-pads). +// 2018-06-08: Misc: Extracted imgui_impl_win32.cpp/.h away from the old combined DX9/DX10/DX11/DX12 examples. +// 2018-03-20: Misc: Setup io.BackendFlags ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors and ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos flags + honor ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange flag. +// 2018-02-20: Inputs: Added support for mouse cursors (ImGui::GetMouseCursor() value and WM_SETCURSOR message handling). +// 2018-02-06: Inputs: Added mapping for ImGuiKey_Space. +// 2018-02-06: Inputs: Honoring the io.WantSetMousePos by repositioning the mouse (when using navigation and ImGuiConfigFlags_NavMoveMouse is set). +// 2018-02-06: Misc: Removed call to ImGui::Shutdown() which is not available from 1.60 WIP, user needs to call CreateContext/DestroyContext themselves. +// 2018-01-20: Inputs: Added Horizontal Mouse Wheel support. +// 2018-01-08: Inputs: Added mapping for ImGuiKey_Insert. +// 2018-01-05: Inputs: Added WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK double-click handlers for window classes with the CS_DBLCLKS flag. +// 2017-10-23: Inputs: Added WM_SYSKEYDOWN / WM_SYSKEYUP handlers so e.g. the VK_MENU key can be read. +// 2017-10-23: Inputs: Using Win32 ::SetCapture/::GetCapture() to retrieve mouse positions outside the client area when dragging. +// 2016-11-12: Inputs: Only call Win32 ::SetCursor(nullptr) when io.MouseDrawCursor is set. + +struct ImGui_ImplWin32_Data +{ + HWND hWnd; + HWND MouseHwnd; + int MouseTrackedArea; // 0: not tracked, 1: client are, 2: non-client area + int MouseButtonsDown; + INT64 Time; + INT64 TicksPerSecond; + ImGuiMouseCursor LastMouseCursor; + +#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD + bool HasGamepad; + bool WantUpdateHasGamepad; + HMODULE XInputDLL; + PFN_XInputGetCapabilities XInputGetCapabilities; + PFN_XInputGetState XInputGetState; +#endif + + ImGui_ImplWin32_Data() { memset((void*)this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +// Backend data stored in io.BackendPlatformUserData to allow support for multiple Dear ImGui contexts +// It is STRONGLY preferred that you use docking branch with multi-viewports (== single Dear ImGui context + multiple windows) instead of multiple Dear ImGui contexts. +// FIXME: multi-context support is not well tested and probably dysfunctional in this backend. +// FIXME: some shared resources (mouse cursor shape, gamepad) are mishandled when using multi-context. +static ImGui_ImplWin32_Data* ImGui_ImplWin32_GetBackendData() +{ + return ImGui::GetCurrentContext() ? (ImGui_ImplWin32_Data*)ImGui::GetIO().BackendPlatformUserData : nullptr; +} + +// Functions +static bool ImGui_ImplWin32_InitEx(void* hwnd, bool platform_has_own_dc) +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + IM_ASSERT(io.BackendPlatformUserData == nullptr && "Already initialized a platform backend!"); + + INT64 perf_frequency, perf_counter; + if (!::QueryPerformanceFrequency((LARGE_INTEGER*)&perf_frequency)) + return false; + if (!::QueryPerformanceCounter((LARGE_INTEGER*)&perf_counter)) + return false; + + // Setup backend capabilities flags + ImGui_ImplWin32_Data* bd = IM_NEW(ImGui_ImplWin32_Data)(); + io.BackendPlatformUserData = (void*)bd; + io.BackendPlatformName = "imgui_impl_win32"; + io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors; // We can honor GetMouseCursor() values (optional) + io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos; // We can honor io.WantSetMousePos requests (optional, rarely used) + + bd->hWnd = (HWND)hwnd; + bd->TicksPerSecond = perf_frequency; + bd->Time = perf_counter; + bd->LastMouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT; + + // Set platform dependent data in viewport + ImGui::GetMainViewport()->PlatformHandleRaw = (void*)hwnd; + IM_UNUSED(platform_has_own_dc); // Used in 'docking' branch + + // Dynamically load XInput library +#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD + bd->WantUpdateHasGamepad = true; + const char* xinput_dll_names[] = + { + "xinput1_4.dll", // Windows 8+ + "xinput1_3.dll", // DirectX SDK + "xinput9_1_0.dll", // Windows Vista, Windows 7 + "xinput1_2.dll", // DirectX SDK + "xinput1_1.dll" // DirectX SDK + }; + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(xinput_dll_names); n++) + if (HMODULE dll = ::LoadLibraryA(xinput_dll_names[n])) + { + bd->XInputDLL = dll; + bd->XInputGetCapabilities = (PFN_XInputGetCapabilities)::GetProcAddress(dll, "XInputGetCapabilities"); + bd->XInputGetState = (PFN_XInputGetState)::GetProcAddress(dll, "XInputGetState"); + break; + } +#endif // IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD + + return true; +} + +IMGUI_IMPL_API bool ImGui_ImplWin32_Init(void* hwnd) +{ + return ImGui_ImplWin32_InitEx(hwnd, false); +} + +IMGUI_IMPL_API bool ImGui_ImplWin32_InitForOpenGL(void* hwnd) +{ + // OpenGL needs CS_OWNDC + return ImGui_ImplWin32_InitEx(hwnd, true); +} + +void ImGui_ImplWin32_Shutdown() +{ + ImGui_ImplWin32_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplWin32_GetBackendData(); + IM_ASSERT(bd != nullptr && "No platform backend to shutdown, or already shutdown?"); + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + + // Unload XInput library +#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD + if (bd->XInputDLL) + ::FreeLibrary(bd->XInputDLL); +#endif // IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD + + io.BackendPlatformName = nullptr; + io.BackendPlatformUserData = nullptr; + io.BackendFlags &= ~(ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors | ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos | ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad); + IM_DELETE(bd); +} + +static bool ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateMouseCursor() +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange) + return false; + + ImGuiMouseCursor imgui_cursor = ImGui::GetMouseCursor(); + if (imgui_cursor == ImGuiMouseCursor_None || io.MouseDrawCursor) + { + // Hide OS mouse cursor if imgui is drawing it or if it wants no cursor + ::SetCursor(nullptr); + } + else + { + // Show OS mouse cursor + LPTSTR win32_cursor = IDC_ARROW; + switch (imgui_cursor) + { + case ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow: win32_cursor = IDC_ARROW; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput: win32_cursor = IDC_IBEAM; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll: win32_cursor = IDC_SIZEALL; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW: win32_cursor = IDC_SIZEWE; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS: win32_cursor = IDC_SIZENS; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW: win32_cursor = IDC_SIZENESW; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE: win32_cursor = IDC_SIZENWSE; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand: win32_cursor = IDC_HAND; break; + case ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed: win32_cursor = IDC_NO; break; + } + ::SetCursor(::LoadCursor(nullptr, win32_cursor)); + } + return true; +} + +static bool IsVkDown(int vk) +{ + return (::GetKeyState(vk) & 0x8000) != 0; +} + +static void ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down, int native_keycode, int native_scancode = -1) +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + io.AddKeyEvent(key, down); + io.SetKeyEventNativeData(key, native_keycode, native_scancode); // To support legacy indexing (<1.87 user code) + IM_UNUSED(native_scancode); +} + +static void ImGui_ImplWin32_ProcessKeyEventsWorkarounds() +{ + // Left & right Shift keys: when both are pressed together, Windows tend to not generate the WM_KEYUP event for the first released one. + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftShift) && !IsVkDown(VK_LSHIFT)) + ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_LeftShift, false, VK_LSHIFT); + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightShift) && !IsVkDown(VK_RSHIFT)) + ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_RightShift, false, VK_RSHIFT); + + // Sometimes WM_KEYUP for Win key is not passed down to the app (e.g. for Win+V on some setups, according to GLFW). + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftSuper) && !IsVkDown(VK_LWIN)) + ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_LeftSuper, false, VK_LWIN); + if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightSuper) && !IsVkDown(VK_RWIN)) + ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_RightSuper, false, VK_RWIN); +} + +static void ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateKeyModifiers() +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiMod_Ctrl, IsVkDown(VK_CONTROL)); + io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiMod_Shift, IsVkDown(VK_SHIFT)); + io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiMod_Alt, IsVkDown(VK_MENU)); + io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiMod_Super, IsVkDown(VK_APPS)); +} + +static void ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateMouseData() +{ + ImGui_ImplWin32_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplWin32_GetBackendData(); + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + IM_ASSERT(bd->hWnd != 0); + + HWND focused_window = ::GetForegroundWindow(); + const bool is_app_focused = (focused_window == bd->hWnd); + if (is_app_focused) + { + // (Optional) Set OS mouse position from Dear ImGui if requested (rarely used, only when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos is enabled by user) + if (io.WantSetMousePos) + { + POINT pos = { (int)io.MousePos.x, (int)io.MousePos.y }; + if (::ClientToScreen(bd->hWnd, &pos)) + ::SetCursorPos(pos.x, pos.y); + } + + // (Optional) Fallback to provide mouse position when focused (WM_MOUSEMOVE already provides this when hovered or captured) + // This also fills a short gap when clicking non-client area: WM_NCMOUSELEAVE -> modal OS move -> gap -> WM_NCMOUSEMOVE + if (!io.WantSetMousePos && bd->MouseTrackedArea == 0) + { + POINT pos; + if (::GetCursorPos(&pos) && ::ScreenToClient(bd->hWnd, &pos)) + io.AddMousePosEvent((float)pos.x, (float)pos.y); + } + } +} + +// Gamepad navigation mapping +static void ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateGamepads() +{ +#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGui_ImplWin32_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplWin32_GetBackendData(); + //if ((io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) == 0) // FIXME: Technically feeding gamepad shouldn't depend on this now that they are regular inputs. + // return; + + // Calling XInputGetState() every frame on disconnected gamepads is unfortunately too slow. + // Instead we refresh gamepad availability by calling XInputGetCapabilities() _only_ after receiving WM_DEVICECHANGE. + if (bd->WantUpdateHasGamepad) + { + XINPUT_CAPABILITIES caps = {}; + bd->HasGamepad = bd->XInputGetCapabilities ? (bd->XInputGetCapabilities(0, XINPUT_FLAG_GAMEPAD, &caps) == ERROR_SUCCESS) : false; + bd->WantUpdateHasGamepad = false; + } + + io.BackendFlags &= ~ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad; + XINPUT_STATE xinput_state; + XINPUT_GAMEPAD& gamepad = xinput_state.Gamepad; + if (!bd->HasGamepad || bd->XInputGetState == nullptr || bd->XInputGetState(0, &xinput_state) != ERROR_SUCCESS) + return; + io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad; + + #define IM_SATURATE(V) (V < 0.0f ? 0.0f : V > 1.0f ? 1.0f : V) + #define MAP_BUTTON(KEY_NO, BUTTON_ENUM) { io.AddKeyEvent(KEY_NO, (gamepad.wButtons & BUTTON_ENUM) != 0); } + #define MAP_ANALOG(KEY_NO, VALUE, V0, V1) { float vn = (float)(VALUE - V0) / (float)(V1 - V0); io.AddKeyAnalogEvent(KEY_NO, vn > 0.10f, IM_SATURATE(vn)); } + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadStart, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_START); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadBack, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_BACK); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_X); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_B); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_Y); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_A); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_DPAD_LEFT); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_DPAD_RIGHT); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_DPAD_UP); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_DPAD_DOWN); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadL1, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_SHOULDER); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadR1, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_RIGHT_SHOULDER); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadL2, gamepad.bLeftTrigger, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_TRIGGER_THRESHOLD, 255); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadR2, gamepad.bRightTrigger, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_TRIGGER_THRESHOLD, 255); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadL3, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB); + MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadR3, XINPUT_GAMEPAD_RIGHT_THUMB); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, gamepad.sThumbLX, -XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, -32768); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, gamepad.sThumbLX, +XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, +32767); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, gamepad.sThumbLY, +XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, +32767); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown, gamepad.sThumbLY, -XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, -32768); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickLeft, gamepad.sThumbRX, -XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, -32768); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickRight, gamepad.sThumbRX, +XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, +32767); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickUp, gamepad.sThumbRY, +XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, +32767); + MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown, gamepad.sThumbRY, -XINPUT_GAMEPAD_LEFT_THUMB_DEADZONE, -32768); + #undef MAP_BUTTON + #undef MAP_ANALOG +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD +} + +void ImGui_ImplWin32_NewFrame() +{ + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGui_ImplWin32_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplWin32_GetBackendData(); + IM_ASSERT(bd != nullptr && "Did you call ImGui_ImplWin32_Init()?"); + + // Setup display size (every frame to accommodate for window resizing) + RECT rect = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; + ::GetClientRect(bd->hWnd, &rect); + io.DisplaySize = ImVec2((float)(rect.right - rect.left), (float)(rect.bottom - rect.top)); + + // Setup time step + INT64 current_time = 0; + ::QueryPerformanceCounter((LARGE_INTEGER*)¤t_time); + io.DeltaTime = (float)(current_time - bd->Time) / bd->TicksPerSecond; + bd->Time = current_time; + + // Update OS mouse position + ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateMouseData(); + + // Process workarounds for known Windows key handling issues + ImGui_ImplWin32_ProcessKeyEventsWorkarounds(); + + // Update OS mouse cursor with the cursor requested by imgui + ImGuiMouseCursor mouse_cursor = io.MouseDrawCursor ? ImGuiMouseCursor_None : ImGui::GetMouseCursor(); + if (bd->LastMouseCursor != mouse_cursor) + { + bd->LastMouseCursor = mouse_cursor; + ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateMouseCursor(); + } + + // Update game controllers (if enabled and available) + ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateGamepads(); +} + +// There is no distinct VK_xxx for keypad enter, instead it is VK_RETURN + KF_EXTENDED, we assign it an arbitrary value to make code more readable (VK_ codes go up to 255) +#define IM_VK_KEYPAD_ENTER (VK_RETURN + 256) + +// Map VK_xxx to ImGuiKey_xxx. +static ImGuiKey ImGui_ImplWin32_VirtualKeyToImGuiKey(WPARAM wParam) +{ + switch (wParam) + { + case VK_TAB: return ImGuiKey_Tab; + case VK_LEFT: return ImGuiKey_LeftArrow; + case VK_RIGHT: return ImGuiKey_RightArrow; + case VK_UP: return ImGuiKey_UpArrow; + case VK_DOWN: return ImGuiKey_DownArrow; + case VK_PRIOR: return ImGuiKey_PageUp; + case VK_NEXT: return ImGuiKey_PageDown; + case VK_HOME: return ImGuiKey_Home; + case VK_END: return ImGuiKey_End; + case VK_INSERT: return ImGuiKey_Insert; + case VK_DELETE: return ImGuiKey_Delete; + case VK_BACK: return ImGuiKey_Backspace; + case VK_SPACE: return ImGuiKey_Space; + case VK_RETURN: return ImGuiKey_Enter; + case VK_ESCAPE: return ImGuiKey_Escape; + case VK_OEM_7: return ImGuiKey_Apostrophe; + case VK_OEM_COMMA: return ImGuiKey_Comma; + case VK_OEM_MINUS: return ImGuiKey_Minus; + case VK_OEM_PERIOD: return ImGuiKey_Period; + case VK_OEM_2: return ImGuiKey_Slash; + case VK_OEM_1: return ImGuiKey_Semicolon; + case VK_OEM_PLUS: return ImGuiKey_Equal; + case VK_OEM_4: return ImGuiKey_LeftBracket; + case VK_OEM_5: return ImGuiKey_Backslash; + case VK_OEM_6: return ImGuiKey_RightBracket; + case VK_OEM_3: return ImGuiKey_GraveAccent; + case VK_CAPITAL: return ImGuiKey_CapsLock; + case VK_SCROLL: return ImGuiKey_ScrollLock; + case VK_NUMLOCK: return ImGuiKey_NumLock; + case VK_SNAPSHOT: return ImGuiKey_PrintScreen; + case VK_PAUSE: return ImGuiKey_Pause; + case VK_NUMPAD0: return ImGuiKey_Keypad0; + case VK_NUMPAD1: return ImGuiKey_Keypad1; + case VK_NUMPAD2: return ImGuiKey_Keypad2; + case VK_NUMPAD3: return ImGuiKey_Keypad3; + case VK_NUMPAD4: return ImGuiKey_Keypad4; + case VK_NUMPAD5: return ImGuiKey_Keypad5; + case VK_NUMPAD6: return ImGuiKey_Keypad6; + case VK_NUMPAD7: return ImGuiKey_Keypad7; + case VK_NUMPAD8: return ImGuiKey_Keypad8; + case VK_NUMPAD9: return ImGuiKey_Keypad9; + case VK_DECIMAL: return ImGuiKey_KeypadDecimal; + case VK_DIVIDE: return ImGuiKey_KeypadDivide; + case VK_MULTIPLY: return ImGuiKey_KeypadMultiply; + case VK_SUBTRACT: return ImGuiKey_KeypadSubtract; + case VK_ADD: return ImGuiKey_KeypadAdd; + case IM_VK_KEYPAD_ENTER: return ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter; + case VK_LSHIFT: return ImGuiKey_LeftShift; + case VK_LCONTROL: return ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl; + case VK_LMENU: return ImGuiKey_LeftAlt; + case VK_LWIN: return ImGuiKey_LeftSuper; + case VK_RSHIFT: return ImGuiKey_RightShift; + case VK_RCONTROL: return ImGuiKey_RightCtrl; + case VK_RMENU: return ImGuiKey_RightAlt; + case VK_RWIN: return ImGuiKey_RightSuper; + case VK_APPS: return ImGuiKey_Menu; + case '0': return ImGuiKey_0; + case '1': return ImGuiKey_1; + case '2': return ImGuiKey_2; + case '3': return ImGuiKey_3; + case '4': return ImGuiKey_4; + case '5': return ImGuiKey_5; + case '6': return ImGuiKey_6; + case '7': return ImGuiKey_7; + case '8': return ImGuiKey_8; + case '9': return ImGuiKey_9; + case 'A': return ImGuiKey_A; + case 'B': return ImGuiKey_B; + case 'C': return ImGuiKey_C; + case 'D': return ImGuiKey_D; + case 'E': return ImGuiKey_E; + case 'F': return ImGuiKey_F; + case 'G': return ImGuiKey_G; + case 'H': return ImGuiKey_H; + case 'I': return ImGuiKey_I; + case 'J': return ImGuiKey_J; + case 'K': return ImGuiKey_K; + case 'L': return ImGuiKey_L; + case 'M': return ImGuiKey_M; + case 'N': return ImGuiKey_N; + case 'O': return ImGuiKey_O; + case 'P': return ImGuiKey_P; + case 'Q': return ImGuiKey_Q; + case 'R': return ImGuiKey_R; + case 'S': return ImGuiKey_S; + case 'T': return ImGuiKey_T; + case 'U': return ImGuiKey_U; + case 'V': return ImGuiKey_V; + case 'W': return ImGuiKey_W; + case 'X': return ImGuiKey_X; + case 'Y': return ImGuiKey_Y; + case 'Z': return ImGuiKey_Z; + case VK_F1: return ImGuiKey_F1; + case VK_F2: return ImGuiKey_F2; + case VK_F3: return ImGuiKey_F3; + case VK_F4: return ImGuiKey_F4; + case VK_F5: return ImGuiKey_F5; + case VK_F6: return ImGuiKey_F6; + case VK_F7: return ImGuiKey_F7; + case VK_F8: return ImGuiKey_F8; + case VK_F9: return ImGuiKey_F9; + case VK_F10: return ImGuiKey_F10; + case VK_F11: return ImGuiKey_F11; + case VK_F12: return ImGuiKey_F12; + default: return ImGuiKey_None; + } +} + +// Allow compilation with old Windows SDK. MinGW doesn't have default _WIN32_WINNT/WINVER versions. +#ifndef WM_MOUSEHWHEEL +#define WM_MOUSEHWHEEL 0x020E +#endif +#ifndef DBT_DEVNODES_CHANGED +#define DBT_DEVNODES_CHANGED 0x0007 +#endif + +// Win32 message handler (process Win32 mouse/keyboard inputs, etc.) +// Call from your application's message handler. Keep calling your message handler unless this function returns TRUE. +// When implementing your own backend, you can read the io.WantCaptureMouse, io.WantCaptureKeyboard flags to tell if Dear ImGui wants to use your inputs. +// - When io.WantCaptureMouse is true, do not dispatch mouse input data to your main application, or clear/overwrite your copy of the mouse data. +// - When io.WantCaptureKeyboard is true, do not dispatch keyboard input data to your main application, or clear/overwrite your copy of the keyboard data. +// Generally you may always pass all inputs to Dear ImGui, and hide them from your application based on those two flags. +// PS: In this Win32 handler, we use the capture API (GetCapture/SetCapture/ReleaseCapture) to be able to read mouse coordinates when dragging mouse outside of our window bounds. +// PS: We treat DBLCLK messages as regular mouse down messages, so this code will work on windows classes that have the CS_DBLCLKS flag set. Our own example app code doesn't set this flag. +#if 0 +// Copy this line into your .cpp file to forward declare the function. +extern IMGUI_IMPL_API LRESULT ImGui_ImplWin32_WndProcHandler(HWND hWnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); +#endif + +// See https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/tablet/system-events-and-mouse-messages +// Prefer to call this at the top of the message handler to avoid the possibility of other Win32 calls interfering with this. +static ImGuiMouseSource GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo() +{ + LPARAM extra_info = ::GetMessageExtraInfo(); + if ((extra_info & 0xFFFFFF80) == 0xFF515700) + return ImGuiMouseSource_Pen; + if ((extra_info & 0xFFFFFF80) == 0xFF515780) + return ImGuiMouseSource_TouchScreen; + return ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse; +} + +IMGUI_IMPL_API LRESULT ImGui_ImplWin32_WndProcHandler(HWND hwnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam) +{ + if (ImGui::GetCurrentContext() == nullptr) + return 0; + + ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO(); + ImGui_ImplWin32_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplWin32_GetBackendData(); + + switch (msg) + { + case WM_MOUSEMOVE: + case WM_NCMOUSEMOVE: + { + // We need to call TrackMouseEvent in order to receive WM_MOUSELEAVE events + ImGuiMouseSource mouse_source = GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo(); + const int area = (msg == WM_MOUSEMOVE) ? 1 : 2; + bd->MouseHwnd = hwnd; + if (bd->MouseTrackedArea != area) + { + TRACKMOUSEEVENT tme_cancel = { sizeof(tme_cancel), TME_CANCEL, hwnd, 0 }; + TRACKMOUSEEVENT tme_track = { sizeof(tme_track), (DWORD)((area == 2) ? (TME_LEAVE | TME_NONCLIENT) : TME_LEAVE), hwnd, 0 }; + if (bd->MouseTrackedArea != 0) + ::TrackMouseEvent(&tme_cancel); + ::TrackMouseEvent(&tme_track); + bd->MouseTrackedArea = area; + } + POINT mouse_pos = { (LONG)GET_X_LPARAM(lParam), (LONG)GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam) }; + if (msg == WM_NCMOUSEMOVE && ::ScreenToClient(hwnd, &mouse_pos) == FALSE) // WM_NCMOUSEMOVE are provided in absolute coordinates. + break; + io.AddMouseSourceEvent(mouse_source); + io.AddMousePosEvent((float)mouse_pos.x, (float)mouse_pos.y); + break; + } + case WM_MOUSELEAVE: + case WM_NCMOUSELEAVE: + { + const int area = (msg == WM_MOUSELEAVE) ? 1 : 2; + if (bd->MouseTrackedArea == area) + { + if (bd->MouseHwnd == hwnd) + bd->MouseHwnd = nullptr; + bd->MouseTrackedArea = 0; + io.AddMousePosEvent(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + } + break; + } + case WM_LBUTTONDOWN: case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK: + case WM_RBUTTONDOWN: case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK: + case WM_MBUTTONDOWN: case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK: + case WM_XBUTTONDOWN: case WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK: + { + ImGuiMouseSource mouse_source = GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo(); + int button = 0; + if (msg == WM_LBUTTONDOWN || msg == WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK) { button = 0; } + if (msg == WM_RBUTTONDOWN || msg == WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK) { button = 1; } + if (msg == WM_MBUTTONDOWN || msg == WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK) { button = 2; } + if (msg == WM_XBUTTONDOWN || msg == WM_XBUTTONDBLCLK) { button = (GET_XBUTTON_WPARAM(wParam) == XBUTTON1) ? 3 : 4; } + if (bd->MouseButtonsDown == 0 && ::GetCapture() == nullptr) + ::SetCapture(hwnd); + bd->MouseButtonsDown |= 1 << button; + io.AddMouseSourceEvent(mouse_source); + io.AddMouseButtonEvent(button, true); + return 0; + } + case WM_LBUTTONUP: + case WM_RBUTTONUP: + case WM_MBUTTONUP: + case WM_XBUTTONUP: + { + ImGuiMouseSource mouse_source = GetMouseSourceFromMessageExtraInfo(); + int button = 0; + if (msg == WM_LBUTTONUP) { button = 0; } + if (msg == WM_RBUTTONUP) { button = 1; } + if (msg == WM_MBUTTONUP) { button = 2; } + if (msg == WM_XBUTTONUP) { button = (GET_XBUTTON_WPARAM(wParam) == XBUTTON1) ? 3 : 4; } + bd->MouseButtonsDown &= ~(1 << button); + if (bd->MouseButtonsDown == 0 && ::GetCapture() == hwnd) + ::ReleaseCapture(); + io.AddMouseSourceEvent(mouse_source); + io.AddMouseButtonEvent(button, false); + return 0; + } + case WM_MOUSEWHEEL: + io.AddMouseWheelEvent(0.0f, (float)GET_WHEEL_DELTA_WPARAM(wParam) / (float)WHEEL_DELTA); + return 0; + case WM_MOUSEHWHEEL: + io.AddMouseWheelEvent(-(float)GET_WHEEL_DELTA_WPARAM(wParam) / (float)WHEEL_DELTA, 0.0f); + return 0; + case WM_KEYDOWN: + case WM_KEYUP: + case WM_SYSKEYDOWN: + case WM_SYSKEYUP: + { + const bool is_key_down = (msg == WM_KEYDOWN || msg == WM_SYSKEYDOWN); + if (wParam < 256) + { + // Submit modifiers + ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateKeyModifiers(); + + // Obtain virtual key code + // (keypad enter doesn't have its own... VK_RETURN with KF_EXTENDED flag means keypad enter, see IM_VK_KEYPAD_ENTER definition for details, it is mapped to ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter.) + int vk = (int)wParam; + if ((wParam == VK_RETURN) && (HIWORD(lParam) & KF_EXTENDED)) + vk = IM_VK_KEYPAD_ENTER; + + // Submit key event + const ImGuiKey key = ImGui_ImplWin32_VirtualKeyToImGuiKey(vk); + const int scancode = (int)LOBYTE(HIWORD(lParam)); + if (key != ImGuiKey_None) + ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(key, is_key_down, vk, scancode); + + // Submit individual left/right modifier events + if (vk == VK_SHIFT) + { + // Important: Shift keys tend to get stuck when pressed together, missing key-up events are corrected in ImGui_ImplWin32_ProcessKeyEventsWorkarounds() + if (IsVkDown(VK_LSHIFT) == is_key_down) { ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_LeftShift, is_key_down, VK_LSHIFT, scancode); } + if (IsVkDown(VK_RSHIFT) == is_key_down) { ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_RightShift, is_key_down, VK_RSHIFT, scancode); } + } + else if (vk == VK_CONTROL) + { + if (IsVkDown(VK_LCONTROL) == is_key_down) { ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, is_key_down, VK_LCONTROL, scancode); } + if (IsVkDown(VK_RCONTROL) == is_key_down) { ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_RightCtrl, is_key_down, VK_RCONTROL, scancode); } + } + else if (vk == VK_MENU) + { + if (IsVkDown(VK_LMENU) == is_key_down) { ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_LeftAlt, is_key_down, VK_LMENU, scancode); } + if (IsVkDown(VK_RMENU) == is_key_down) { ImGui_ImplWin32_AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_RightAlt, is_key_down, VK_RMENU, scancode); } + } + } + return 0; + } + case WM_SETFOCUS: + case WM_KILLFOCUS: + io.AddFocusEvent(msg == WM_SETFOCUS); + return 0; + case WM_CHAR: + if (::IsWindowUnicode(hwnd)) + { + // You can also use ToAscii()+GetKeyboardState() to retrieve characters. + if (wParam > 0 && wParam < 0x10000) + io.AddInputCharacterUTF16((unsigned short)wParam); + } + else + { + wchar_t wch = 0; + ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_ACP, MB_PRECOMPOSED, (char*)&wParam, 1, &wch, 1); + io.AddInputCharacter(wch); + } + return 0; + case WM_SETCURSOR: + // This is required to restore cursor when transitioning from e.g resize borders to client area. + if (LOWORD(lParam) == HTCLIENT && ImGui_ImplWin32_UpdateMouseCursor()) + return 1; + return 0; + case WM_DEVICECHANGE: +#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_WIN32_DISABLE_GAMEPAD + if ((UINT)wParam == DBT_DEVNODES_CHANGED) + bd->WantUpdateHasGamepad = true; +#endif + return 0; + } + return 0; +} + + +//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// DPI-related helpers (optional) +//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - Use to enable DPI awareness without having to create an application manifest. +// - Your own app may already do this via a manifest or explicit calls. This is mostly useful for our examples/ apps. +// - In theory we could call simple functions from Windows SDK such as SetProcessDPIAware(), SetProcessDpiAwareness(), etc. +// but most of the functions provided by Microsoft require Windows 8.1/10+ SDK at compile time and Windows 8/10+ at runtime, +// neither we want to require the user to have. So we dynamically select and load those functions to avoid dependencies. +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// This is the scheme successfully used by GLFW (from which we borrowed some of the code) and other apps aiming to be highly portable. +// ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableDpiAwareness() is just a helper called by main.cpp, we don't call it automatically. +// If you are trying to implement your own backend for your own engine, you may ignore that noise. +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Perform our own check with RtlVerifyVersionInfo() instead of using functions from as they +// require a manifest to be functional for checks above 8.1. See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4200 +static BOOL _IsWindowsVersionOrGreater(WORD major, WORD minor, WORD) +{ + typedef LONG(WINAPI* PFN_RtlVerifyVersionInfo)(OSVERSIONINFOEXW*, ULONG, ULONGLONG); + static PFN_RtlVerifyVersionInfo RtlVerifyVersionInfoFn = nullptr; + if (RtlVerifyVersionInfoFn == nullptr) + if (HMODULE ntdllModule = ::GetModuleHandleA("ntdll.dll")) + RtlVerifyVersionInfoFn = (PFN_RtlVerifyVersionInfo)GetProcAddress(ntdllModule, "RtlVerifyVersionInfo"); + if (RtlVerifyVersionInfoFn == nullptr) + return FALSE; + + RTL_OSVERSIONINFOEXW versionInfo = { }; + ULONGLONG conditionMask = 0; + versionInfo.dwOSVersionInfoSize = sizeof(RTL_OSVERSIONINFOEXW); + versionInfo.dwMajorVersion = major; + versionInfo.dwMinorVersion = minor; + VER_SET_CONDITION(conditionMask, VER_MAJORVERSION, VER_GREATER_EQUAL); + VER_SET_CONDITION(conditionMask, VER_MINORVERSION, VER_GREATER_EQUAL); + return (RtlVerifyVersionInfoFn(&versionInfo, VER_MAJORVERSION | VER_MINORVERSION, conditionMask) == 0) ? TRUE : FALSE; +} + +#define _IsWindowsVistaOrGreater() _IsWindowsVersionOrGreater(HIBYTE(0x0600), LOBYTE(0x0600), 0) // _WIN32_WINNT_VISTA +#define _IsWindows8OrGreater() _IsWindowsVersionOrGreater(HIBYTE(0x0602), LOBYTE(0x0602), 0) // _WIN32_WINNT_WIN8 +#define _IsWindows8Point1OrGreater() _IsWindowsVersionOrGreater(HIBYTE(0x0603), LOBYTE(0x0603), 0) // _WIN32_WINNT_WINBLUE +#define _IsWindows10OrGreater() _IsWindowsVersionOrGreater(HIBYTE(0x0A00), LOBYTE(0x0A00), 0) // _WIN32_WINNT_WINTHRESHOLD / _WIN32_WINNT_WIN10 + +#ifndef DPI_ENUMS_DECLARED +typedef enum { PROCESS_DPI_UNAWARE = 0, PROCESS_SYSTEM_DPI_AWARE = 1, PROCESS_PER_MONITOR_DPI_AWARE = 2 } PROCESS_DPI_AWARENESS; +typedef enum { MDT_EFFECTIVE_DPI = 0, MDT_ANGULAR_DPI = 1, MDT_RAW_DPI = 2, MDT_DEFAULT = MDT_EFFECTIVE_DPI } MONITOR_DPI_TYPE; +#endif +#ifndef _DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXTS_ +DECLARE_HANDLE(DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT); +#define DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_PER_MONITOR_AWARE (DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT)-3 +#endif +#ifndef DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_PER_MONITOR_AWARE_V2 +#define DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_PER_MONITOR_AWARE_V2 (DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT)-4 +#endif +typedef HRESULT(WINAPI* PFN_SetProcessDpiAwareness)(PROCESS_DPI_AWARENESS); // Shcore.lib + dll, Windows 8.1+ +typedef HRESULT(WINAPI* PFN_GetDpiForMonitor)(HMONITOR, MONITOR_DPI_TYPE, UINT*, UINT*); // Shcore.lib + dll, Windows 8.1+ +typedef DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT(WINAPI* PFN_SetThreadDpiAwarenessContext)(DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT); // User32.lib + dll, Windows 10 v1607+ (Creators Update) + +// Helper function to enable DPI awareness without setting up a manifest +void ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableDpiAwareness() +{ + if (_IsWindows10OrGreater()) + { + static HINSTANCE user32_dll = ::LoadLibraryA("user32.dll"); // Reference counted per-process + if (PFN_SetThreadDpiAwarenessContext SetThreadDpiAwarenessContextFn = (PFN_SetThreadDpiAwarenessContext)::GetProcAddress(user32_dll, "SetThreadDpiAwarenessContext")) + { + SetThreadDpiAwarenessContextFn(DPI_AWARENESS_CONTEXT_PER_MONITOR_AWARE_V2); + return; + } + } + if (_IsWindows8Point1OrGreater()) + { + static HINSTANCE shcore_dll = ::LoadLibraryA("shcore.dll"); // Reference counted per-process + if (PFN_SetProcessDpiAwareness SetProcessDpiAwarenessFn = (PFN_SetProcessDpiAwareness)::GetProcAddress(shcore_dll, "SetProcessDpiAwareness")) + { + SetProcessDpiAwarenessFn(PROCESS_PER_MONITOR_DPI_AWARE); + return; + } + } +#if _WIN32_WINNT >= 0x0600 + ::SetProcessDPIAware(); +#endif +} + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(NOGDI) +#pragma comment(lib, "gdi32") // Link with gdi32.lib for GetDeviceCaps(). MinGW will require linking with '-lgdi32' +#endif + +float ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForMonitor(void* monitor) +{ + UINT xdpi = 96, ydpi = 96; + if (_IsWindows8Point1OrGreater()) + { + static HINSTANCE shcore_dll = ::LoadLibraryA("shcore.dll"); // Reference counted per-process + static PFN_GetDpiForMonitor GetDpiForMonitorFn = nullptr; + if (GetDpiForMonitorFn == nullptr && shcore_dll != nullptr) + GetDpiForMonitorFn = (PFN_GetDpiForMonitor)::GetProcAddress(shcore_dll, "GetDpiForMonitor"); + if (GetDpiForMonitorFn != nullptr) + { + GetDpiForMonitorFn((HMONITOR)monitor, MDT_EFFECTIVE_DPI, &xdpi, &ydpi); + IM_ASSERT(xdpi == ydpi); // Please contact me if you hit this assert! + return xdpi / 96.0f; + } + } +#ifndef NOGDI + const HDC dc = ::GetDC(nullptr); + xdpi = ::GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSX); + ydpi = ::GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSY); + IM_ASSERT(xdpi == ydpi); // Please contact me if you hit this assert! + ::ReleaseDC(nullptr, dc); +#endif + return xdpi / 96.0f; +} + +float ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForHwnd(void* hwnd) +{ + HMONITOR monitor = ::MonitorFromWindow((HWND)hwnd, MONITOR_DEFAULTTONEAREST); + return ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForMonitor(monitor); +} + +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Transparency related helpers (optional) +//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) +#pragma comment(lib, "dwmapi") // Link with dwmapi.lib. MinGW will require linking with '-ldwmapi' +#endif + +// [experimental] +// Borrowed from GLFW's function updateFramebufferTransparency() in src/win32_window.c +// (the Dwm* functions are Vista era functions but we are borrowing logic from GLFW) +void ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableAlphaCompositing(void* hwnd) +{ + if (!_IsWindowsVistaOrGreater()) + return; + + BOOL composition; + if (FAILED(::DwmIsCompositionEnabled(&composition)) || !composition) + return; + + BOOL opaque; + DWORD color; + if (_IsWindows8OrGreater() || (SUCCEEDED(::DwmGetColorizationColor(&color, &opaque)) && !opaque)) + { + HRGN region = ::CreateRectRgn(0, 0, -1, -1); + DWM_BLURBEHIND bb = {}; + bb.dwFlags = DWM_BB_ENABLE | DWM_BB_BLURREGION; + bb.hRgnBlur = region; + bb.fEnable = TRUE; + ::DwmEnableBlurBehindWindow((HWND)hwnd, &bb); + ::DeleteObject(region); + } + else + { + DWM_BLURBEHIND bb = {}; + bb.dwFlags = DWM_BB_ENABLE; + ::DwmEnableBlurBehindWindow((HWND)hwnd, &bb); + } +} + +//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..08f657d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_impl_win32.h @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +// dear imgui: Platform Backend for Windows (standard windows API for 32-bits AND 64-bits applications) +// This needs to be used along with a Renderer (e.g. DirectX11, OpenGL3, Vulkan..) + +// Implemented features: +// [X] Platform: Clipboard support (for Win32 this is actually part of core dear imgui) +// [X] Platform: Mouse support. Can discriminate Mouse/TouchScreen/Pen. +// [X] Platform: Keyboard support. Since 1.87 we are using the io.AddKeyEvent() function. Pass ImGuiKey values to all key functions e.g. ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space). [Legacy VK_* values will also be supported unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is set] +// [X] Platform: Gamepad support. Enabled with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad'. +// [X] Platform: Mouse cursor shape and visibility. Disable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange'. + +// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this. +// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need. +// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp. +// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs + +#pragma once +#include "imgui.h" // IMGUI_IMPL_API +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE + +IMGUI_IMPL_API bool ImGui_ImplWin32_Init(void* hwnd); +IMGUI_IMPL_API bool ImGui_ImplWin32_InitForOpenGL(void* hwnd); +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplWin32_Shutdown(); +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplWin32_NewFrame(); + +// Win32 message handler your application need to call. +// - Intentionally commented out in a '#if 0' block to avoid dragging dependencies on from this helper. +// - You should COPY the line below into your .cpp code to forward declare the function and then you can call it. +// - Call from your application's message handler. Keep calling your message handler unless this function returns TRUE. + +#if 0 +extern IMGUI_IMPL_API LRESULT ImGui_ImplWin32_WndProcHandler(HWND hWnd, UINT msg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam); +#endif + +// DPI-related helpers (optional) +// - Use to enable DPI awareness without having to create an application manifest. +// - Your own app may already do this via a manifest or explicit calls. This is mostly useful for our examples/ apps. +// - In theory we could call simple functions from Windows SDK such as SetProcessDPIAware(), SetProcessDpiAwareness(), etc. +// but most of the functions provided by Microsoft require Windows 8.1/10+ SDK at compile time and Windows 8/10+ at runtime, +// neither we want to require the user to have. So we dynamically select and load those functions to avoid dependencies. +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableDpiAwareness(); +IMGUI_IMPL_API float ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForHwnd(void* hwnd); // HWND hwnd +IMGUI_IMPL_API float ImGui_ImplWin32_GetDpiScaleForMonitor(void* monitor); // HMONITOR monitor + +// Transparency related helpers (optional) [experimental] +// - Use to enable alpha compositing transparency with the desktop. +// - Use together with e.g. clearing your framebuffer with zero-alpha. +IMGUI_IMPL_API void ImGui_ImplWin32_EnableAlphaCompositing(void* hwnd); // HWND hwnd + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_internal.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_internal.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c22e4c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_internal.h @@ -0,0 +1,3356 @@ +// dear imgui, v1.89.9 +// (internal structures/api) + +// You may use this file to debug, understand or extend Dear ImGui features but we don't provide any guarantee of forward compatibility. +// To implement maths operators for ImVec2 (disabled by default to not conflict with using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA with your own math types+operators), use: +/* +#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#include "imgui_internal.h" +*/ + +/* + +Index of this file: + +// [SECTION] Header mess +// [SECTION] Forward declarations +// [SECTION] Context pointer +// [SECTION] STB libraries includes +// [SECTION] Macros +// [SECTION] Generic helpers +// [SECTION] ImDrawList support +// [SECTION] Widgets support: flags, enums, data structures +// [SECTION] Inputs support +// [SECTION] Clipper support +// [SECTION] Navigation support +// [SECTION] Columns support +// [SECTION] Multi-select support +// [SECTION] Docking support +// [SECTION] Viewport support +// [SECTION] Settings support +// [SECTION] Localization support +// [SECTION] Metrics, Debug tools +// [SECTION] Generic context hooks +// [SECTION] ImGuiContext (main imgui context) +// [SECTION] ImGuiWindowTempData, ImGuiWindow +// [SECTION] Tab bar, Tab item support +// [SECTION] Table support +// [SECTION] ImGui internal API +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas internal API +// [SECTION] Test Engine specific hooks (imgui_test_engine) + +*/ + +#pragma once +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Header mess +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifndef IMGUI_VERSION +#include "imgui.h" +#endif + +#include // FILE*, sscanf +#include // NULL, malloc, free, qsort, atoi, atof +#include // sqrtf, fabsf, fmodf, powf, floorf, ceilf, cosf, sinf +#include // INT_MIN, INT_MAX + +// Enable SSE intrinsics if available +#if (defined __SSE__ || defined __x86_64__ || defined _M_X64 || (defined(_M_IX86_FP) && (_M_IX86_FP >= 1))) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_SSE) +#define IMGUI_ENABLE_SSE +#include +#endif + +// Visual Studio warnings +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (push) +#pragma warning (disable: 4251) // class 'xxx' needs to have dll-interface to be used by clients of struct 'xxx' // when IMGUI_API is set to__declspec(dllexport) +#pragma warning (disable: 26812) // The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). [MSVC Static Analyzer) +#pragma warning (disable: 26495) // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6). +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later +#pragma warning (disable: 5054) // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types +#endif +#endif + +// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything +#if defined(__clang__) +#pragma clang diagnostic push +#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option") +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#endif +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants ok, for ImFloorSigned() +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function" // for stb_textedit.h +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-prototypes" // for stb_textedit.h +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-noreturn" // warning: function 'xxx' could be declared with attribute 'noreturn' +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic push +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead +#endif + +// In 1.89.4, we moved the implementation of "courtesy maths operators" from imgui_internal.h in imgui.h +// As they are frequently requested, we do not want to encourage to many people using imgui_internal.h +#if defined(IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS) && !defined(IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS_IMPLEMENTED) +#error Please '#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS' _BEFORE_ including imgui.h! +#endif + +// Legacy defines +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS // Renamed in 1.74 +#error Use IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS +#endif +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_MATH_FUNCTIONS // Renamed in 1.74 +#error Use IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS +#endif + +// Enable stb_truetype by default unless FreeType is enabled. +// You can compile with both by defining both IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE and IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE together. +#ifndef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE +#define IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Forward declarations +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +struct ImBitVector; // Store 1-bit per value +struct ImRect; // An axis-aligned rectangle (2 points) +struct ImDrawDataBuilder; // Helper to build a ImDrawData instance +struct ImDrawListSharedData; // Data shared between all ImDrawList instances +struct ImGuiColorMod; // Stacked color modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it +struct ImGuiContext; // Main Dear ImGui context +struct ImGuiContextHook; // Hook for extensions like ImGuiTestEngine +struct ImGuiDataVarInfo; // Variable information (e.g. to avoid style variables from an enum) +struct ImGuiDataTypeInfo; // Type information associated to a ImGuiDataType enum +struct ImGuiGroupData; // Stacked storage data for BeginGroup()/EndGroup() +struct ImGuiInputTextState; // Internal state of the currently focused/edited text input box +struct ImGuiInputTextDeactivateData;// Short term storage to backup text of a deactivating InputText() while another is stealing active id +struct ImGuiLastItemData; // Status storage for last submitted items +struct ImGuiLocEntry; // A localization entry. +struct ImGuiMenuColumns; // Simple column measurement, currently used for MenuItem() only +struct ImGuiNavItemData; // Result of a gamepad/keyboard directional navigation move query result +struct ImGuiNavTreeNodeData; // Temporary storage for last TreeNode() being a Left arrow landing candidate. +struct ImGuiMetricsConfig; // Storage for ShowMetricsWindow() and DebugNodeXXX() functions +struct ImGuiNextWindowData; // Storage for SetNextWindow** functions +struct ImGuiNextItemData; // Storage for SetNextItem** functions +struct ImGuiOldColumnData; // Storage data for a single column for legacy Columns() api +struct ImGuiOldColumns; // Storage data for a columns set for legacy Columns() api +struct ImGuiPopupData; // Storage for current popup stack +struct ImGuiSettingsHandler; // Storage for one type registered in the .ini file +struct ImGuiStackSizes; // Storage of stack sizes for debugging/asserting +struct ImGuiStyleMod; // Stacked style modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it +struct ImGuiStyleShadowTexConfig; // Shadow Texture baking config +struct ImGuiTabBar; // Storage for a tab bar +struct ImGuiTabItem; // Storage for a tab item (within a tab bar) +struct ImGuiTable; // Storage for a table +struct ImGuiTableColumn; // Storage for one column of a table +struct ImGuiTableInstanceData; // Storage for one instance of a same table +struct ImGuiTableTempData; // Temporary storage for one table (one per table in the stack), shared between tables. +struct ImGuiTableSettings; // Storage for a table .ini settings +struct ImGuiTableColumnsSettings; // Storage for a column .ini settings +struct ImGuiWindow; // Storage for one window +struct ImGuiWindowTempData; // Temporary storage for one window (that's the data which in theory we could ditch at the end of the frame, in practice we currently keep it for each window) +struct ImGuiWindowSettings; // Storage for a window .ini settings (we keep one of those even if the actual window wasn't instanced during this session) + +// Enumerations +// Use your programming IDE "Go to definition" facility on the names of the center columns to find the actual flags/enum lists. +enum ImGuiLocKey : int; // -> enum ImGuiLocKey // Enum: a localization entry for translation. +typedef int ImGuiLayoutType; // -> enum ImGuiLayoutType_ // Enum: Horizontal or vertical + +// Flags +typedef int ImGuiActivateFlags; // -> enum ImGuiActivateFlags_ // Flags: for navigation/focus function (will be for ActivateItem() later) +typedef int ImGuiDebugLogFlags; // -> enum ImGuiDebugLogFlags_ // Flags: for ShowDebugLogWindow(), g.DebugLogFlags +typedef int ImGuiFocusRequestFlags; // -> enum ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_ // Flags: for FocusWindow(); +typedef int ImGuiInputFlags; // -> enum ImGuiInputFlags_ // Flags: for IsKeyPressed(), IsMouseClicked(), SetKeyOwner(), SetItemKeyOwner() etc. +typedef int ImGuiItemFlags; // -> enum ImGuiItemFlags_ // Flags: for PushItemFlag(), g.LastItemData.InFlags +typedef int ImGuiItemStatusFlags; // -> enum ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ // Flags: for g.LastItemData.StatusFlags +typedef int ImGuiOldColumnFlags; // -> enum ImGuiOldColumnFlags_ // Flags: for BeginColumns() +typedef int ImGuiNavHighlightFlags; // -> enum ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_ // Flags: for RenderNavHighlight() +typedef int ImGuiNavMoveFlags; // -> enum ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ // Flags: for navigation requests +typedef int ImGuiNextItemDataFlags; // -> enum ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_ // Flags: for SetNextItemXXX() functions +typedef int ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags; // -> enum ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_// Flags: for SetNextWindowXXX() functions +typedef int ImGuiScrollFlags; // -> enum ImGuiScrollFlags_ // Flags: for ScrollToItem() and navigation requests +typedef int ImGuiSeparatorFlags; // -> enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_ // Flags: for SeparatorEx() +typedef int ImGuiTextFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTextFlags_ // Flags: for TextEx() +typedef int ImGuiTooltipFlags; // -> enum ImGuiTooltipFlags_ // Flags: for BeginTooltipEx() + +typedef void (*ImGuiErrorLogCallback)(void* user_data, const char* fmt, ...); + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Context pointer +// See implementation of this variable in imgui.cpp for comments and details. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifndef GImGui +extern IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* GImGui; // Current implicit context pointer +#endif + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] STB libraries includes +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +namespace ImStb +{ + +#undef STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING +#undef STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING ImGuiInputTextState +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE ImWchar +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE (-1.0f) +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT 99 +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT 999 +#include "imstb_textedit.h" + +} // namespace ImStb + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Macros +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Debug Printing Into TTY +// (since IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18729: IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG was reworked into IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF (and removed framecount from it). If you were using a #define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG please rename) +#ifndef IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF(_FMT,...) printf(_FMT, __VA_ARGS__) +#else +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF(_FMT,...) ((void)0) +#endif +#endif + +// Debug Logging for ShowDebugLogWindow(). This is designed for relatively rare events so please don't spam. +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(...) ImGui::DebugLog(__VA_ARGS__) +#else +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(...) ((void)0) +#endif +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID(...) do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS(...) do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP(...) do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV(...) do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_SELECTION(...) do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventSelection)IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_CLIPPER(...) do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventClipper) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) +#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO(...) do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0) + +// Static Asserts +#define IM_STATIC_ASSERT(_COND) static_assert(_COND, "") + +// "Paranoid" Debug Asserts are meant to only be enabled during specific debugging/work, otherwise would slow down the code too much. +// We currently don't have many of those so the effect is currently negligible, but onward intent to add more aggressive ones in the code. +//#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID +#ifdef IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID +#define IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(_EXPR) IM_ASSERT(_EXPR) +#else +#define IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(_EXPR) +#endif + +// Error handling +// Down the line in some frameworks/languages we would like to have a way to redirect those to the programmer and recover from more faults. +#ifndef IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR +#define IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(_EXP,_MSG) IM_ASSERT((_EXP) && _MSG) // Recoverable User Error +#endif + +// Misc Macros +#define IM_PI 3.14159265358979323846f +#ifdef _WIN32 +#define IM_NEWLINE "\r\n" // Play it nice with Windows users (Update: since 2018-05, Notepad finally appears to support Unix-style carriage returns!) +#else +#define IM_NEWLINE "\n" +#endif +#ifndef IM_TABSIZE // Until we move this to runtime and/or add proper tab support, at least allow users to compile-time override +#define IM_TABSIZE (4) +#endif +#define IM_MEMALIGN(_OFF,_ALIGN) (((_OFF) + ((_ALIGN) - 1)) & ~((_ALIGN) - 1)) // Memory align e.g. IM_ALIGN(0,4)=0, IM_ALIGN(1,4)=4, IM_ALIGN(4,4)=4, IM_ALIGN(5,4)=8 +#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(_VAL) ((int)((_VAL) * 255.0f + ((_VAL)>=0 ? 0.5f : -0.5f))) // Unsaturated, for display purpose +#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(_VAL) ((int)(ImSaturate(_VAL) * 255.0f + 0.5f)) // Saturated, always output 0..255 +#define IM_FLOOR(_VAL) ((float)(int)(_VAL)) // ImFloor() is not inlined in MSVC debug builds +#define IM_ROUND(_VAL) ((float)(int)((_VAL) + 0.5f)) // +#define IM_STRINGIFY_HELPER(_X) #_X +#define IM_STRINGIFY(_X) IM_STRINGIFY_HELPER(_X) // Preprocessor idiom to stringify e.g. an integer. + +// Enforce cdecl calling convention for functions called by the standard library, in case compilation settings changed the default to e.g. __vectorcall +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#define IMGUI_CDECL __cdecl +#else +#define IMGUI_CDECL +#endif + +// Warnings +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__) +#define IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(XXXX) __pragma(warning(suppress: XXXX)) +#else +#define IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(XXXX) +#endif + +// Debug Tools +// Use 'Metrics/Debugger->Tools->Item Picker' to break into the call-stack of a specific item. +// This will call IM_DEBUG_BREAK() which you may redefine yourself. See https://github.com/scottt/debugbreak for more reference. +#ifndef IM_DEBUG_BREAK +#if defined (_MSC_VER) +#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() __debugbreak() +#elif defined(__clang__) +#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() __builtin_debugtrap() +#elif defined(__GNUC__) && (defined(__i386__) || defined(__x86_64__)) +#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() __asm__ volatile("int $0x03") +#elif defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__thumb__) +#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() __asm__ volatile(".inst 0xde01") +#elif defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__arm__) && !defined(__thumb__) +#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() __asm__ volatile(".inst 0xe7f001f0"); +#else +#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() IM_ASSERT(0) // It is expected that you define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() into something that will break nicely in a debugger! +#endif +#endif // #ifndef IM_DEBUG_BREAK + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Generic helpers +// Note that the ImXXX helpers functions are lower-level than ImGui functions. +// ImGui functions or the ImGui context are never called/used from other ImXXX functions. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - Helpers: Hashing +// - Helpers: Sorting +// - Helpers: Bit manipulation +// - Helpers: String +// - Helpers: Formatting +// - Helpers: UTF-8 <> wchar conversions +// - Helpers: ImVec2/ImVec4 operators +// - Helpers: Maths +// - Helpers: Geometry +// - Helper: ImVec1 +// - Helper: ImVec2ih +// - Helper: ImRect +// - Helper: ImBitArray +// - Helper: ImBitVector +// - Helper: ImSpan<>, ImSpanAllocator<> +// - Helper: ImPool<> +// - Helper: ImChunkStream<> +// - Helper: ImGuiTextIndex +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Helpers: Hashing +IMGUI_API ImGuiID ImHashData(const void* data, size_t data_size, ImGuiID seed = 0); +IMGUI_API ImGuiID ImHashStr(const char* data, size_t data_size = 0, ImGuiID seed = 0); + +// Helpers: Sorting +#ifndef ImQsort +static inline void ImQsort(void* base, size_t count, size_t size_of_element, int(IMGUI_CDECL *compare_func)(void const*, void const*)) { if (count > 1) qsort(base, count, size_of_element, compare_func); } +#endif + +// Helpers: Color Blending +IMGUI_API ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColors(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b); + +// Helpers: Bit manipulation +static inline bool ImIsPowerOfTwo(int v) { return v != 0 && (v & (v - 1)) == 0; } +static inline bool ImIsPowerOfTwo(ImU64 v) { return v != 0 && (v & (v - 1)) == 0; } +static inline int ImUpperPowerOfTwo(int v) { v--; v |= v >> 1; v |= v >> 2; v |= v >> 4; v |= v >> 8; v |= v >> 16; v++; return v; } + +// Helpers: String +IMGUI_API int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2); +IMGUI_API int ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count); +IMGUI_API void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count); +IMGUI_API char* ImStrdup(const char* str); +IMGUI_API char* ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* str); +IMGUI_API const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str_begin, const char* str_end, char c); +IMGUI_API int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str); +IMGUI_API const char* ImStreolRange(const char* str, const char* str_end); // End end-of-line +IMGUI_API const ImWchar*ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin); // Find beginning-of-line +IMGUI_API const char* ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end); +IMGUI_API void ImStrTrimBlanks(char* str); +IMGUI_API const char* ImStrSkipBlank(const char* str); +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF +static inline char ImToUpper(char c) { return (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') ? c &= ~32 : c; } +static inline bool ImCharIsBlankA(char c) { return c == ' ' || c == '\t'; } +static inline bool ImCharIsBlankW(unsigned int c) { return c == ' ' || c == '\t' || c == 0x3000; } +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE + +// Helpers: Formatting +IMGUI_API int ImFormatString(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3); +IMGUI_API int ImFormatStringV(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3); +IMGUI_API void ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3); +IMGUI_API void ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3); +IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* format); +IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* format); +IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* format, char* buf, size_t buf_size); +IMGUI_API void ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size); +IMGUI_API const char* ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size); +IMGUI_API int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* format, int default_value); + +// Helpers: UTF-8 <> wchar conversions +IMGUI_API const char* ImTextCharToUtf8(char out_buf[5], unsigned int c); // return out_buf +IMGUI_API int ImTextStrToUtf8(char* out_buf, int out_buf_size, const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end); // return output UTF-8 bytes count +IMGUI_API int ImTextCharFromUtf8(unsigned int* out_char, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // read one character. return input UTF-8 bytes count +IMGUI_API int ImTextStrFromUtf8(ImWchar* out_buf, int out_buf_size, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end, const char** in_remaining = NULL); // return input UTF-8 bytes count +IMGUI_API int ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // return number of UTF-8 code-points (NOT bytes count) +IMGUI_API int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end); // return number of bytes to express one char in UTF-8 +IMGUI_API int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end); // return number of bytes to express string in UTF-8 + +// Helpers: File System +#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS +typedef void* ImFileHandle; +static inline ImFileHandle ImFileOpen(const char*, const char*) { return NULL; } +static inline bool ImFileClose(ImFileHandle) { return false; } +static inline ImU64 ImFileGetSize(ImFileHandle) { return (ImU64)-1; } +static inline ImU64 ImFileRead(void*, ImU64, ImU64, ImFileHandle) { return 0; } +static inline ImU64 ImFileWrite(const void*, ImU64, ImU64, ImFileHandle) { return 0; } +#endif +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS +typedef FILE* ImFileHandle; +IMGUI_API ImFileHandle ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* mode); +IMGUI_API bool ImFileClose(ImFileHandle file); +IMGUI_API ImU64 ImFileGetSize(ImFileHandle file); +IMGUI_API ImU64 ImFileRead(void* data, ImU64 size, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle file); +IMGUI_API ImU64 ImFileWrite(const void* data, ImU64 size, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle file); +#else +#define IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS // Can't use stdout, fflush if we are not using default file functions +#endif +IMGUI_API void* ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* mode, size_t* out_file_size = NULL, int padding_bytes = 0); + +// Helpers: Maths +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF +// - Wrapper for standard libs functions. (Note that imgui_demo.cpp does _not_ use them to keep the code easy to copy) +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS +#define ImFabs(X) fabsf(X) +#define ImSqrt(X) sqrtf(X) +#define ImFmod(X, Y) fmodf((X), (Y)) +#define ImCos(X) cosf(X) +#define ImSin(X) sinf(X) +#define ImAcos(X) acosf(X) +#define ImAtan2(Y, X) atan2f((Y), (X)) +#define ImAtof(STR) atof(STR) +//#define ImFloorStd(X) floorf(X) // We use our own, see ImFloor() and ImFloorSigned() +#define ImCeil(X) ceilf(X) +static inline float ImPow(float x, float y) { return powf(x, y); } // DragBehaviorT/SliderBehaviorT uses ImPow with either float/double and need the precision +static inline double ImPow(double x, double y) { return pow(x, y); } +static inline float ImLog(float x) { return logf(x); } // DragBehaviorT/SliderBehaviorT uses ImLog with either float/double and need the precision +static inline double ImLog(double x) { return log(x); } +static inline int ImAbs(int x) { return x < 0 ? -x : x; } +static inline float ImAbs(float x) { return fabsf(x); } +static inline double ImAbs(double x) { return fabs(x); } +static inline float ImSign(float x) { return (x < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : (x > 0.0f) ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } // Sign operator - returns -1, 0 or 1 based on sign of argument +static inline double ImSign(double x) { return (x < 0.0) ? -1.0 : (x > 0.0) ? 1.0 : 0.0; } +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_SSE +static inline float ImRsqrt(float x) { return _mm_cvtss_f32(_mm_rsqrt_ss(_mm_set_ss(x))); } +#else +static inline float ImRsqrt(float x) { return 1.0f / sqrtf(x); } +#endif +static inline double ImRsqrt(double x) { return 1.0 / sqrt(x); } +#endif +// - ImMin/ImMax/ImClamp/ImLerp/ImSwap are used by widgets which support variety of types: signed/unsigned int/long long float/double +// (Exceptionally using templates here but we could also redefine them for those types) +template static inline T ImMin(T lhs, T rhs) { return lhs < rhs ? lhs : rhs; } +template static inline T ImMax(T lhs, T rhs) { return lhs >= rhs ? lhs : rhs; } +template static inline T ImClamp(T v, T mn, T mx) { return (v < mn) ? mn : (v > mx) ? mx : v; } +template static inline T ImLerp(T a, T b, float t) { return (T)(a + (b - a) * t); } +template static inline void ImSwap(T& a, T& b) { T tmp = a; a = b; b = tmp; } +template static inline T ImAddClampOverflow(T a, T b, T mn, T mx) { if (b < 0 && (a < mn - b)) return mn; if (b > 0 && (a > mx - b)) return mx; return a + b; } +template static inline T ImSubClampOverflow(T a, T b, T mn, T mx) { if (b > 0 && (a < mn + b)) return mn; if (b < 0 && (a > mx + b)) return mx; return a - b; } +// - Misc maths helpers +static inline ImVec2 ImMin(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x < rhs.x ? lhs.x : rhs.x, lhs.y < rhs.y ? lhs.y : rhs.y); } +static inline ImVec2 ImMax(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x >= rhs.x ? lhs.x : rhs.x, lhs.y >= rhs.y ? lhs.y : rhs.y); } +static inline ImVec2 ImClamp(const ImVec2& v, const ImVec2& mn, ImVec2 mx) { return ImVec2((v.x < mn.x) ? mn.x : (v.x > mx.x) ? mx.x : v.x, (v.y < mn.y) ? mn.y : (v.y > mx.y) ? mx.y : v.y); } +static inline ImVec2 ImLerp(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, float t) { return ImVec2(a.x + (b.x - a.x) * t, a.y + (b.y - a.y) * t); } +static inline ImVec2 ImLerp(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& t) { return ImVec2(a.x + (b.x - a.x) * t.x, a.y + (b.y - a.y) * t.y); } +static inline ImVec4 ImLerp(const ImVec4& a, const ImVec4& b, float t) { return ImVec4(a.x + (b.x - a.x) * t, a.y + (b.y - a.y) * t, a.z + (b.z - a.z) * t, a.w + (b.w - a.w) * t); } +static inline float ImSaturate(float f) { return (f < 0.0f) ? 0.0f : (f > 1.0f) ? 1.0f : f; } +static inline float ImLengthSqr(const ImVec2& lhs) { return (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y); } +static inline float ImLengthSqr(const ImVec4& lhs) { return (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y) + (lhs.z * lhs.z) + (lhs.w * lhs.w); } +static inline float ImLength(const ImVec2& lhs, float fail_value) { float d = (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y); if (d > 0.0f) return ImSqrt(d); return fail_value; } +static inline float ImInvLength(const ImVec2& lhs, float fail_value) { float d = (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y); if (d > 0.0f) return ImRsqrt(d); return fail_value; } +static inline float ImFloor(float f) { return (float)(int)(f); } +static inline float ImFloorSigned(float f) { return (float)((f >= 0 || (float)(int)f == f) ? (int)f : (int)f - 1); } // Decent replacement for floorf() +static inline ImVec2 ImFloor(const ImVec2& v) { return ImVec2((float)(int)(v.x), (float)(int)(v.y)); } +static inline ImVec2 ImFloorSigned(const ImVec2& v) { return ImVec2(ImFloorSigned(v.x), ImFloorSigned(v.y)); } +static inline int ImModPositive(int a, int b) { return (a + b) % b; } +static inline float ImDot(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b) { return a.x * b.x + a.y * b.y; } +static inline ImVec2 ImRotate(const ImVec2& v, float cos_a, float sin_a) { return ImVec2(v.x * cos_a - v.y * sin_a, v.x * sin_a + v.y * cos_a); } +static inline float ImLinearSweep(float current, float target, float speed) { if (current < target) return ImMin(current + speed, target); if (current > target) return ImMax(current - speed, target); return current; } +static inline ImVec2 ImMul(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs) { return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y); } +static inline bool ImIsFloatAboveGuaranteedIntegerPrecision(float f) { return f <= -16777216 || f >= 16777216; } +static inline float ImExponentialMovingAverage(float avg, float sample, int n) { avg -= avg / n; avg += sample / n; return avg; } +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE + +// Helpers: Geometry +IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImBezierCubicCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, float t); +IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImBezierCubicClosestPoint(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, int num_segments); // For curves with explicit number of segments +IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, float tess_tol);// For auto-tessellated curves you can use tess_tol = style.CurveTessellationTol +IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImBezierQuadraticCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, float t); +IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImLineClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& p); +IMGUI_API bool ImTriangleContainsPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p); +IMGUI_API ImVec2 ImTriangleClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p); +IMGUI_API void ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p, float& out_u, float& out_v, float& out_w); +inline float ImTriangleArea(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c) { return ImFabs((a.x * (b.y - c.y)) + (b.x * (c.y - a.y)) + (c.x * (a.y - b.y))) * 0.5f; } + +// Helper: ImVec1 (1D vector) +// (this odd construct is used to facilitate the transition between 1D and 2D, and the maintenance of some branches/patches) +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF +struct ImVec1 +{ + float x; + constexpr ImVec1() : x(0.0f) { } + constexpr ImVec1(float _x) : x(_x) { } +}; + +// Helper: ImVec2ih (2D vector, half-size integer, for long-term packed storage) +struct ImVec2ih +{ + short x, y; + constexpr ImVec2ih() : x(0), y(0) {} + constexpr ImVec2ih(short _x, short _y) : x(_x), y(_y) {} + constexpr explicit ImVec2ih(const ImVec2& rhs) : x((short)rhs.x), y((short)rhs.y) {} +}; + +// Helper: ImRect (2D axis aligned bounding-box) +// NB: we can't rely on ImVec2 math operators being available here! +struct IMGUI_API ImRect +{ + ImVec2 Min; // Upper-left + ImVec2 Max; // Lower-right + + constexpr ImRect() : Min(0.0f, 0.0f), Max(0.0f, 0.0f) {} + constexpr ImRect(const ImVec2& min, const ImVec2& max) : Min(min), Max(max) {} + constexpr ImRect(const ImVec4& v) : Min(v.x, v.y), Max(v.z, v.w) {} + constexpr ImRect(float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2) : Min(x1, y1), Max(x2, y2) {} + + ImVec2 GetCenter() const { return ImVec2((Min.x + Max.x) * 0.5f, (Min.y + Max.y) * 0.5f); } + ImVec2 GetSize() const { return ImVec2(Max.x - Min.x, Max.y - Min.y); } + float GetWidth() const { return Max.x - Min.x; } + float GetHeight() const { return Max.y - Min.y; } + float GetArea() const { return (Max.x - Min.x) * (Max.y - Min.y); } + ImVec2 GetTL() const { return Min; } // Top-left + ImVec2 GetTR() const { return ImVec2(Max.x, Min.y); } // Top-right + ImVec2 GetBL() const { return ImVec2(Min.x, Max.y); } // Bottom-left + ImVec2 GetBR() const { return Max; } // Bottom-right + bool Contains(const ImVec2& p) const { return p.x >= Min.x && p.y >= Min.y && p.x < Max.x && p.y < Max.y; } + bool Contains(const ImRect& r) const { return r.Min.x >= Min.x && r.Min.y >= Min.y && r.Max.x <= Max.x && r.Max.y <= Max.y; } + bool Overlaps(const ImRect& r) const { return r.Min.y < Max.y && r.Max.y > Min.y && r.Min.x < Max.x && r.Max.x > Min.x; } + void Add(const ImVec2& p) { if (Min.x > p.x) Min.x = p.x; if (Min.y > p.y) Min.y = p.y; if (Max.x < p.x) Max.x = p.x; if (Max.y < p.y) Max.y = p.y; } + void Add(const ImRect& r) { if (Min.x > r.Min.x) Min.x = r.Min.x; if (Min.y > r.Min.y) Min.y = r.Min.y; if (Max.x < r.Max.x) Max.x = r.Max.x; if (Max.y < r.Max.y) Max.y = r.Max.y; } + void Expand(const float amount) { Min.x -= amount; Min.y -= amount; Max.x += amount; Max.y += amount; } + void Expand(const ImVec2& amount) { Min.x -= amount.x; Min.y -= amount.y; Max.x += amount.x; Max.y += amount.y; } + void Translate(const ImVec2& d) { Min.x += d.x; Min.y += d.y; Max.x += d.x; Max.y += d.y; } + void TranslateX(float dx) { Min.x += dx; Max.x += dx; } + void TranslateY(float dy) { Min.y += dy; Max.y += dy; } + void ClipWith(const ImRect& r) { Min = ImMax(Min, r.Min); Max = ImMin(Max, r.Max); } // Simple version, may lead to an inverted rectangle, which is fine for Contains/Overlaps test but not for display. + void ClipWithFull(const ImRect& r) { Min = ImClamp(Min, r.Min, r.Max); Max = ImClamp(Max, r.Min, r.Max); } // Full version, ensure both points are fully clipped. + void Floor() { Min.x = IM_FLOOR(Min.x); Min.y = IM_FLOOR(Min.y); Max.x = IM_FLOOR(Max.x); Max.y = IM_FLOOR(Max.y); } + bool IsInverted() const { return Min.x > Max.x || Min.y > Max.y; } + ImVec4 ToVec4() const { return ImVec4(Min.x, Min.y, Max.x, Max.y); } +}; + +// Helper: ImBitArray +#define IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(_ARRAY, _N) ((_ARRAY[(_N) >> 5] & ((ImU32)1 << ((_N) & 31))) != 0) // Macro version of ImBitArrayTestBit(): ensure args have side-effect or are costly! +#define IM_BITARRAY_CLEARBIT(_ARRAY, _N) ((_ARRAY[(_N) >> 5] &= ~((ImU32)1 << ((_N) & 31)))) // Macro version of ImBitArrayClearBit(): ensure args have side-effect or are costly! +inline size_t ImBitArrayGetStorageSizeInBytes(int bitcount) { return (size_t)((bitcount + 31) >> 5) << 2; } +inline void ImBitArrayClearAllBits(ImU32* arr, int bitcount){ memset(arr, 0, ImBitArrayGetStorageSizeInBytes(bitcount)); } +inline bool ImBitArrayTestBit(const ImU32* arr, int n) { ImU32 mask = (ImU32)1 << (n & 31); return (arr[n >> 5] & mask) != 0; } +inline void ImBitArrayClearBit(ImU32* arr, int n) { ImU32 mask = (ImU32)1 << (n & 31); arr[n >> 5] &= ~mask; } +inline void ImBitArraySetBit(ImU32* arr, int n) { ImU32 mask = (ImU32)1 << (n & 31); arr[n >> 5] |= mask; } +inline void ImBitArraySetBitRange(ImU32* arr, int n, int n2) // Works on range [n..n2) +{ + n2--; + while (n <= n2) + { + int a_mod = (n & 31); + int b_mod = (n2 > (n | 31) ? 31 : (n2 & 31)) + 1; + ImU32 mask = (ImU32)(((ImU64)1 << b_mod) - 1) & ~(ImU32)(((ImU64)1 << a_mod) - 1); + arr[n >> 5] |= mask; + n = (n + 32) & ~31; + } +} + +typedef ImU32* ImBitArrayPtr; // Name for use in structs + +// Helper: ImBitArray class (wrapper over ImBitArray functions) +// Store 1-bit per value. +template +struct ImBitArray +{ + ImU32 Storage[(BITCOUNT + 31) >> 5]; + ImBitArray() { ClearAllBits(); } + void ClearAllBits() { memset(Storage, 0, sizeof(Storage)); } + void SetAllBits() { memset(Storage, 255, sizeof(Storage)); } + bool TestBit(int n) const { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); return IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(Storage, n); } + void SetBit(int n) { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); ImBitArraySetBit(Storage, n); } + void ClearBit(int n) { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); ImBitArrayClearBit(Storage, n); } + void SetBitRange(int n, int n2) { n += OFFSET; n2 += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT && n2 > n && n2 <= BITCOUNT); ImBitArraySetBitRange(Storage, n, n2); } // Works on range [n..n2) + bool operator[](int n) const { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); return IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(Storage, n); } +}; + +// Helper: ImBitVector +// Store 1-bit per value. +struct IMGUI_API ImBitVector +{ + ImVector Storage; + void Create(int sz) { Storage.resize((sz + 31) >> 5); memset(Storage.Data, 0, (size_t)Storage.Size * sizeof(Storage.Data[0])); } + void Clear() { Storage.clear(); } + bool TestBit(int n) const { IM_ASSERT(n < (Storage.Size << 5)); return IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(Storage.Data, n); } + void SetBit(int n) { IM_ASSERT(n < (Storage.Size << 5)); ImBitArraySetBit(Storage.Data, n); } + void ClearBit(int n) { IM_ASSERT(n < (Storage.Size << 5)); ImBitArrayClearBit(Storage.Data, n); } +}; +IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE + +// Helper: ImSpan<> +// Pointing to a span of data we don't own. +template +struct ImSpan +{ + T* Data; + T* DataEnd; + + // Constructors, destructor + inline ImSpan() { Data = DataEnd = NULL; } + inline ImSpan(T* data, int size) { Data = data; DataEnd = data + size; } + inline ImSpan(T* data, T* data_end) { Data = data; DataEnd = data_end; } + + inline void set(T* data, int size) { Data = data; DataEnd = data + size; } + inline void set(T* data, T* data_end) { Data = data; DataEnd = data_end; } + inline int size() const { return (int)(ptrdiff_t)(DataEnd - Data); } + inline int size_in_bytes() const { return (int)(ptrdiff_t)(DataEnd - Data) * (int)sizeof(T); } + inline T& operator[](int i) { T* p = Data + i; IM_ASSERT(p >= Data && p < DataEnd); return *p; } + inline const T& operator[](int i) const { const T* p = Data + i; IM_ASSERT(p >= Data && p < DataEnd); return *p; } + + inline T* begin() { return Data; } + inline const T* begin() const { return Data; } + inline T* end() { return DataEnd; } + inline const T* end() const { return DataEnd; } + + // Utilities + inline int index_from_ptr(const T* it) const { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < DataEnd); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; } +}; + +// Helper: ImSpanAllocator<> +// Facilitate storing multiple chunks into a single large block (the "arena") +// - Usage: call Reserve() N times, allocate GetArenaSizeInBytes() worth, pass it to SetArenaBasePtr(), call GetSpan() N times to retrieve the aligned ranges. +template +struct ImSpanAllocator +{ + char* BasePtr; + int CurrOff; + int CurrIdx; + int Offsets[CHUNKS]; + int Sizes[CHUNKS]; + + ImSpanAllocator() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + inline void Reserve(int n, size_t sz, int a=4) { IM_ASSERT(n == CurrIdx && n < CHUNKS); CurrOff = IM_MEMALIGN(CurrOff, a); Offsets[n] = CurrOff; Sizes[n] = (int)sz; CurrIdx++; CurrOff += (int)sz; } + inline int GetArenaSizeInBytes() { return CurrOff; } + inline void SetArenaBasePtr(void* base_ptr) { BasePtr = (char*)base_ptr; } + inline void* GetSpanPtrBegin(int n) { IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < CHUNKS && CurrIdx == CHUNKS); return (void*)(BasePtr + Offsets[n]); } + inline void* GetSpanPtrEnd(int n) { IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < CHUNKS && CurrIdx == CHUNKS); return (void*)(BasePtr + Offsets[n] + Sizes[n]); } + template + inline void GetSpan(int n, ImSpan* span) { span->set((T*)GetSpanPtrBegin(n), (T*)GetSpanPtrEnd(n)); } +}; + +// Helper: ImPool<> +// Basic keyed storage for contiguous instances, slow/amortized insertion, O(1) indexable, O(Log N) queries by ID over a dense/hot buffer, +// Honor constructor/destructor. Add/remove invalidate all pointers. Indexes have the same lifetime as the associated object. +typedef int ImPoolIdx; +template +struct ImPool +{ + ImVector Buf; // Contiguous data + ImGuiStorage Map; // ID->Index + ImPoolIdx FreeIdx; // Next free idx to use + ImPoolIdx AliveCount; // Number of active/alive items (for display purpose) + + ImPool() { FreeIdx = AliveCount = 0; } + ~ImPool() { Clear(); } + T* GetByKey(ImGuiID key) { int idx = Map.GetInt(key, -1); return (idx != -1) ? &Buf[idx] : NULL; } + T* GetByIndex(ImPoolIdx n) { return &Buf[n]; } + ImPoolIdx GetIndex(const T* p) const { IM_ASSERT(p >= Buf.Data && p < Buf.Data + Buf.Size); return (ImPoolIdx)(p - Buf.Data); } + T* GetOrAddByKey(ImGuiID key) { int* p_idx = Map.GetIntRef(key, -1); if (*p_idx != -1) return &Buf[*p_idx]; *p_idx = FreeIdx; return Add(); } + bool Contains(const T* p) const { return (p >= Buf.Data && p < Buf.Data + Buf.Size); } + void Clear() { for (int n = 0; n < Map.Data.Size; n++) { int idx = Map.Data[n].val_i; if (idx != -1) Buf[idx].~T(); } Map.Clear(); Buf.clear(); FreeIdx = AliveCount = 0; } + T* Add() { int idx = FreeIdx; if (idx == Buf.Size) { Buf.resize(Buf.Size + 1); FreeIdx++; } else { FreeIdx = *(int*)&Buf[idx]; } IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(&Buf[idx]) T(); AliveCount++; return &Buf[idx]; } + void Remove(ImGuiID key, const T* p) { Remove(key, GetIndex(p)); } + void Remove(ImGuiID key, ImPoolIdx idx) { Buf[idx].~T(); *(int*)&Buf[idx] = FreeIdx; FreeIdx = idx; Map.SetInt(key, -1); AliveCount--; } + void Reserve(int capacity) { Buf.reserve(capacity); Map.Data.reserve(capacity); } + + // To iterate a ImPool: for (int n = 0; n < pool.GetMapSize(); n++) if (T* t = pool.TryGetMapData(n)) { ... } + // Can be avoided if you know .Remove() has never been called on the pool, or AliveCount == GetMapSize() + int GetAliveCount() const { return AliveCount; } // Number of active/alive items in the pool (for display purpose) + int GetBufSize() const { return Buf.Size; } + int GetMapSize() const { return Map.Data.Size; } // It is the map we need iterate to find valid items, since we don't have "alive" storage anywhere + T* TryGetMapData(ImPoolIdx n) { int idx = Map.Data[n].val_i; if (idx == -1) return NULL; return GetByIndex(idx); } +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + int GetSize() { return GetMapSize(); } // For ImPlot: should use GetMapSize() from (IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18304) +#endif +}; + +// Helper: ImChunkStream<> +// Build and iterate a contiguous stream of variable-sized structures. +// This is used by Settings to store persistent data while reducing allocation count. +// We store the chunk size first, and align the final size on 4 bytes boundaries. +// The tedious/zealous amount of casting is to avoid -Wcast-align warnings. +template +struct ImChunkStream +{ + ImVector Buf; + + void clear() { Buf.clear(); } + bool empty() const { return Buf.Size == 0; } + int size() const { return Buf.Size; } + T* alloc_chunk(size_t sz) { size_t HDR_SZ = 4; sz = IM_MEMALIGN(HDR_SZ + sz, 4u); int off = Buf.Size; Buf.resize(off + (int)sz); ((int*)(void*)(Buf.Data + off))[0] = (int)sz; return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + off + (int)HDR_SZ); } + T* begin() { size_t HDR_SZ = 4; if (!Buf.Data) return NULL; return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + HDR_SZ); } + T* next_chunk(T* p) { size_t HDR_SZ = 4; IM_ASSERT(p >= begin() && p < end()); p = (T*)(void*)((char*)(void*)p + chunk_size(p)); if (p == (T*)(void*)((char*)end() + HDR_SZ)) return (T*)0; IM_ASSERT(p < end()); return p; } + int chunk_size(const T* p) { return ((const int*)p)[-1]; } + T* end() { return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + Buf.Size); } + int offset_from_ptr(const T* p) { IM_ASSERT(p >= begin() && p < end()); const ptrdiff_t off = (const char*)p - Buf.Data; return (int)off; } + T* ptr_from_offset(int off) { IM_ASSERT(off >= 4 && off < Buf.Size); return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + off); } + void swap(ImChunkStream& rhs) { rhs.Buf.swap(Buf); } + +}; + +// Helper: ImGuiTextIndex<> +// Maintain a line index for a text buffer. This is a strong candidate to be moved into the public API. +struct ImGuiTextIndex +{ + ImVector LineOffsets; + int EndOffset = 0; // Because we don't own text buffer we need to maintain EndOffset (may bake in LineOffsets?) + + void clear() { LineOffsets.clear(); EndOffset = 0; } + int size() { return LineOffsets.Size; } + const char* get_line_begin(const char* base, int n) { return base + LineOffsets[n]; } + const char* get_line_end(const char* base, int n) { return base + (n + 1 < LineOffsets.Size ? (LineOffsets[n + 1] - 1) : EndOffset); } + void append(const char* base, int old_size, int new_size); +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImDrawList support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// ImDrawList: Helper function to calculate a circle's segment count given its radius and a "maximum error" value. +// Estimation of number of circle segment based on error is derived using method described in https://stackoverflow.com/a/2244088/15194693 +// Number of segments (N) is calculated using equation: +// N = ceil ( pi / acos(1 - error / r) ) where r > 0, error <= r +// Our equation is significantly simpler that one in the post thanks for choosing segment that is +// perpendicular to X axis. Follow steps in the article from this starting condition and you will +// will get this result. +// +// Rendering circles with an odd number of segments, while mathematically correct will produce +// asymmetrical results on the raster grid. Therefore we're rounding N to next even number (7->8, 8->8, 9->10 etc.) +#define IM_ROUNDUP_TO_EVEN(_V) ((((_V) + 1) / 2) * 2) +#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MIN 4 +#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX 512 +#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC(_RAD,_MAXERROR) ImClamp(IM_ROUNDUP_TO_EVEN((int)ImCeil(IM_PI / ImAcos(1 - ImMin((_MAXERROR), (_RAD)) / (_RAD)))), IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MIN, IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX) + +// Raw equation from IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC rewritten for 'r' and 'error'. +#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_R(_N,_MAXERROR) ((_MAXERROR) / (1 - ImCos(IM_PI / ImMax((float)(_N), IM_PI)))) +#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_ERROR(_N,_RAD) ((1 - ImCos(IM_PI / ImMax((float)(_N), IM_PI))) / (_RAD)) + +// ImDrawList: Lookup table size for adaptive arc drawing, cover full circle. +#ifndef IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE +#define IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE 48 // Number of samples in lookup table. +#endif +#define IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE // Sample index _PathArcToFastEx() for 360 angle. + +// Data shared between all ImDrawList instances +// You may want to create your own instance of this if you want to use ImDrawList completely without ImGui. In that case, watch out for future changes to this structure. +struct IMGUI_API ImDrawListSharedData +{ + ImVec2 TexUvWhitePixel; // UV of white pixel in the atlas + ImFont* Font; // Current/default font (optional, for simplified AddText overload) + float FontSize; // Current/default font size (optional, for simplified AddText overload) + float CurveTessellationTol; // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() + float CircleSegmentMaxError; // Number of circle segments to use per pixel of radius for AddCircle() etc + ImVec4 ClipRectFullscreen; // Value for PushClipRectFullscreen() + ImDrawListFlags InitialFlags; // Initial flags at the beginning of the frame (it is possible to alter flags on a per-drawlist basis afterwards) + + // [Internal] Temp write buffer + ImVector TempBuffer; + + // [Internal] Lookup tables + ImVec2 ArcFastVtx[IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE]; // Sample points on the quarter of the circle. + float ArcFastRadiusCutoff; // Cutoff radius after which arc drawing will fallback to slower PathArcTo() + ImU8 CircleSegmentCounts[64]; // Precomputed segment count for given radius before we calculate it dynamically (to avoid calculation overhead) + const ImVec4* TexUvLines; // UV of anti-aliased lines in the atlas + + int* ShadowRectIds; // IDs of rects for shadow texture (2 entries) + const ImVec4* ShadowRectUvs; // UV coordinates for shadow texture (10 entries) + + ImDrawListSharedData(); + void SetCircleTessellationMaxError(float max_error); +}; + +struct ImDrawDataBuilder +{ + ImVector* Layers[2]; // Pointers to global layers for: regular, tooltip. LayersP[0] is owned by DrawData. + ImVector LayerData1; + + ImDrawDataBuilder() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets support: flags, enums, data structures +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Flags used by upcoming items +// - input: PushItemFlag() manipulates g.CurrentItemFlags, ItemAdd() calls may add extra flags. +// - output: stored in g.LastItemData.InFlags +// Current window shared by all windows. +// This is going to be exposed in imgui.h when stabilized enough. +enum ImGuiItemFlags_ +{ + // Controlled by user + ImGuiItemFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop = 1 << 0, // false // Disable keyboard tabbing. This is a "lighter" version of ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav. + ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat = 1 << 1, // false // Button() will return true multiple times based on io.KeyRepeatDelay and io.KeyRepeatRate settings. + ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled = 1 << 2, // false // Disable interactions but doesn't affect visuals. See BeginDisabled()/EndDisabled(). See github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/211 + ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav = 1 << 3, // false // Disable any form of focusing (keyboard/gamepad directional navigation and SetKeyboardFocusHere() calls) + ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus = 1 << 4, // false // Disable item being a candidate for default focus (e.g. used by title bar items) + ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup = 1 << 5, // false // Disable MenuItem/Selectable() automatically closing their popup window + ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue = 1 << 6, // false // [BETA] Represent a mixed/indeterminate value, generally multi-selection where values differ. Currently only supported by Checkbox() (later should support all sorts of widgets) + ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly = 1 << 7, // false // [ALPHA] Allow hovering interactions but underlying value is not changed. + ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck = 1 << 8, // false // Disable hoverable check in ItemHoverable() + ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap = 1 << 9, // false // Allow being overlapped by another widget. Not-hovered to Hovered transition deferred by a frame. + + // Controlled by widget code + ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable = 1 << 10, // false // [WIP] Auto-activate input mode when tab focused. Currently only used and supported by a few items before it becomes a generic feature. +}; + +// Status flags for an already submitted item +// - output: stored in g.LastItemData.StatusFlags +enum ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ +{ + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect = 1 << 0, // Mouse position is within item rectangle (does NOT mean that the window is in correct z-order and can be hovered!, this is only one part of the most-common IsItemHovered test) + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect = 1 << 1, // g.LastItemData.DisplayRect is valid + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited = 1 << 2, // Value exposed by item was edited in the current frame (should match the bool return value of most widgets) + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection = 1 << 3, // Set when Selectable(), TreeNode() reports toggling a selection. We can't report "Selected", only state changes, in order to easily handle clipping with less issues. + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen = 1 << 4, // Set when TreeNode() reports toggling their open state. + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated = 1 << 5, // Set if the widget/group is able to provide data for the ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated flag. + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated = 1 << 6, // Only valid if ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated is set. + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow = 1 << 7, // Override the HoveredWindow test to allow cross-window hover testing. + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing = 1 << 8, // Set when the Focusable item just got focused by Tabbing (FIXME: to be removed soon) + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible = 1 << 9, // [WIP] Set when item is overlapping the current clipping rectangle (Used internally. Please don't use yet: API/system will change as we refactor Itemadd()). + + // Additional status + semantic for ImGuiTestEngine +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable = 1 << 20, // Item is an openable (e.g. TreeNode) + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened = 1 << 21, // Opened status + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable = 1 << 22, // Item is a checkable (e.g. CheckBox, MenuItem) + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked = 1 << 23, // Checked status + ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable = 1 << 24, // Item is a text-inputable (e.g. InputText, SliderXXX, DragXXX) +#endif +}; + +// Extend ImGuiHoveredFlags_ +enum ImGuiHoveredFlagsPrivate_ +{ + ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayMask_ = ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNone | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayShort | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayNormal | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoSharedDelay, + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowedMaskForIsWindowHovered = ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip | ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary, + ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowedMaskForIsItemHovered = ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoNavOverride | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip | ImGuiHoveredFlags_Stationary | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DelayMask_, +}; + +// Extend ImGuiInputTextFlags_ +enum ImGuiInputTextFlagsPrivate_ +{ + // [Internal] + ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline = 1 << 26, // For internal use by InputTextMultiline() + ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited = 1 << 27, // For internal use by functions using InputText() before reformatting data + ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem = 1 << 28, // For internal use by TempInputText(), will skip calling ItemAdd(). Require bounding-box to strictly match. +}; + +// Extend ImGuiButtonFlags_ +enum ImGuiButtonFlagsPrivate_ +{ + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick = 1 << 4, // return true on click (mouse down event) + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease = 1 << 5, // [Default] return true on click + release on same item <-- this is what the majority of Button are using + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere = 1 << 6, // return true on click + release even if the release event is not done while hovering the item + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease = 1 << 7, // return true on release (default requires click+release) + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick = 1 << 8, // return true on double-click (default requires click+release) + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold = 1 << 9, // return true when held into while we are drag and dropping another item (used by e.g. tree nodes, collapsing headers) + ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat = 1 << 10, // hold to repeat + ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren = 1 << 11, // allow interactions even if a child window is overlapping + ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap = 1 << 12, // require previous frame HoveredId to either match id or be null before being usable. + ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups = 1 << 13, // disable automatically closing parent popup on press // [UNUSED] + //ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled = 1 << 14, // disable interactions -> use BeginDisabled() or ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled + ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine = 1 << 15, // vertically align button to match text baseline - ButtonEx() only // FIXME: Should be removed and handled by SmallButton(), not possible currently because of DC.CursorPosPrevLine + ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers = 1 << 16, // disable mouse interaction if a key modifier is held + ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId = 1 << 17, // don't set ActiveId while holding the mouse (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick only) + ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus = 1 << 18, // don't override navigation focus when activated (FIXME: this is essentially used everytime an item uses ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, but because legacy specs don't requires LastItemData to be set ButtonBehavior(), we can't poll g.LastItemData.InFlags) + ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoveredOnFocus = 1 << 19, // don't report as hovered when nav focus is on this item + ImGuiButtonFlags_NoSetKeyOwner = 1 << 20, // don't set key/input owner on the initial click (note: mouse buttons are keys! often, the key in question will be ImGuiKey_MouseLeft!) + ImGuiButtonFlags_NoTestKeyOwner = 1 << 21, // don't test key/input owner when polling the key (note: mouse buttons are keys! often, the key in question will be ImGuiKey_MouseLeft!) + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnMask_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold, + ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDefault_ = ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease, +}; + +// Extend ImGuiComboFlags_ +enum ImGuiComboFlagsPrivate_ +{ + ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview = 1 << 20, // enable BeginComboPreview() +}; + +// Extend ImGuiSliderFlags_ +enum ImGuiSliderFlagsPrivate_ +{ + ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical = 1 << 20, // Should this slider be orientated vertically? + ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly = 1 << 21, // Consider using g.NextItemData.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly instead. +}; + +// Extend ImGuiSelectableFlags_ +enum ImGuiSelectableFlagsPrivate_ +{ + // NB: need to be in sync with last value of ImGuiSelectableFlags_ + ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID = 1 << 20, + ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav = 1 << 21, // (WIP) Auto-select when moved into. This is not exposed in public API as to handle multi-select and modifiers we will need user to explicitly control focus scope. May be replaced with a BeginSelection() API. + ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick = 1 << 22, // Override button behavior to react on Click (default is Click+Release) + ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease = 1 << 23, // Override button behavior to react on Release (default is Click+Release) + ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth = 1 << 24, // Span all avail width even if we declared less for layout purpose. FIXME: We may be able to remove this (added in 6251d379, 2bcafc86 for menus) + ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover = 1 << 25, // Set Nav/Focus ID on mouse hover (used by MenuItem) + ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoPadWithHalfSpacing = 1 << 26, // Disable padding each side with ItemSpacing * 0.5f + ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner = 1 << 27, // Don't set key/input owner on the initial click (note: mouse buttons are keys! often, the key in question will be ImGuiKey_MouseLeft!) +}; + +// Extend ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ +enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlagsPrivate_ +{ + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton = 1 << 20, + ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_UpsideDownArrow = 1 << 21,// (FIXME-WIP) Turn Down arrow into an Up arrow, but reversed trees (#6517) +}; + +enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_ +{ + ImGuiSeparatorFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal = 1 << 0, // Axis default to current layout type, so generally Horizontal unless e.g. in a menu bar + ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical = 1 << 1, + ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns = 1 << 2, // Make separator cover all columns of a legacy Columns() set. +}; + +// Flags for FocusWindow(). This is not called ImGuiFocusFlags to avoid confusion with public-facing ImGuiFocusedFlags. +// FIXME: Once we finishing replacing more uses of GetTopMostPopupModal()+IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf() +// and FindBlockingModal() with this, we may want to change the flag to be opt-out instead of opt-in. +enum ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_ +{ + ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild = 1 << 0, // Find last focused child (if any) and focus it instead. + ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_UnlessBelowModal = 1 << 1, // Do not set focus if the window is below a modal. +}; + +enum ImGuiTextFlags_ +{ + ImGuiTextFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText = 1 << 0, +}; + +enum ImGuiTooltipFlags_ +{ + ImGuiTooltipFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePrevious = 1 << 1, // Clear/ignore previously submitted tooltip (defaults to append) +}; + +// FIXME: this is in development, not exposed/functional as a generic feature yet. +// Horizontal/Vertical enums are fixed to 0/1 so they may be used to index ImVec2 +enum ImGuiLayoutType_ +{ + ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal = 0, + ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical = 1 +}; + +enum ImGuiLogType +{ + ImGuiLogType_None = 0, + ImGuiLogType_TTY, + ImGuiLogType_File, + ImGuiLogType_Buffer, + ImGuiLogType_Clipboard, +}; + +// X/Y enums are fixed to 0/1 so they may be used to index ImVec2 +enum ImGuiAxis +{ + ImGuiAxis_None = -1, + ImGuiAxis_X = 0, + ImGuiAxis_Y = 1 +}; + +enum ImGuiPlotType +{ + ImGuiPlotType_Lines, + ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, +}; + +enum ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy +{ + ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default, + ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox, + ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip, +}; + +struct ImGuiDataVarInfo +{ + ImGuiDataType Type; + ImU32 Count; // 1+ + ImU32 Offset; // Offset in parent structure + void* GetVarPtr(void* parent) const { return (void*)((unsigned char*)parent + Offset); } +}; + +struct ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage +{ + ImU8 Data[8]; // Can fit any data up to ImGuiDataType_COUNT +}; + +// Type information associated to one ImGuiDataType. Retrieve with DataTypeGetInfo(). +struct ImGuiDataTypeInfo +{ + size_t Size; // Size in bytes + const char* Name; // Short descriptive name for the type, for debugging + const char* PrintFmt; // Default printf format for the type + const char* ScanFmt; // Default scanf format for the type +}; + +// Extend ImGuiDataType_ +enum ImGuiDataTypePrivate_ +{ + ImGuiDataType_String = ImGuiDataType_COUNT + 1, + ImGuiDataType_Pointer, + ImGuiDataType_ID, +}; + +// Stacked color modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it +struct ImGuiColorMod +{ + ImGuiCol Col; + ImVec4 BackupValue; +}; + +// Stacked style modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it. Data type inferred from the variable. +struct ImGuiStyleMod +{ + ImGuiStyleVar VarIdx; + union { int BackupInt[2]; float BackupFloat[2]; }; + ImGuiStyleMod(ImGuiStyleVar idx, int v) { VarIdx = idx; BackupInt[0] = v; } + ImGuiStyleMod(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float v) { VarIdx = idx; BackupFloat[0] = v; } + ImGuiStyleMod(ImGuiStyleVar idx, ImVec2 v) { VarIdx = idx; BackupFloat[0] = v.x; BackupFloat[1] = v.y; } +}; + +// Storage data for BeginComboPreview()/EndComboPreview() +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiComboPreviewData +{ + ImRect PreviewRect; + ImVec2 BackupCursorPos; + ImVec2 BackupCursorMaxPos; + ImVec2 BackupCursorPosPrevLine; + float BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset; + ImGuiLayoutType BackupLayout; + + ImGuiComboPreviewData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +// Stacked storage data for BeginGroup()/EndGroup() +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiGroupData +{ + ImGuiID WindowID; + ImVec2 BackupCursorPos; + ImVec2 BackupCursorMaxPos; + ImVec1 BackupIndent; + ImVec1 BackupGroupOffset; + ImVec2 BackupCurrLineSize; + float BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset; + ImGuiID BackupActiveIdIsAlive; + bool BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive; + bool BackupHoveredIdIsAlive; + bool EmitItem; +}; + +// Simple column measurement, currently used for MenuItem() only.. This is very short-sighted/throw-away code and NOT a generic helper. +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiMenuColumns +{ + ImU32 TotalWidth; + ImU32 NextTotalWidth; + ImU16 Spacing; + ImU16 OffsetIcon; // Always zero for now + ImU16 OffsetLabel; // Offsets are locked in Update() + ImU16 OffsetShortcut; + ImU16 OffsetMark; + ImU16 Widths[4]; // Width of: Icon, Label, Shortcut, Mark (accumulators for current frame) + + ImGuiMenuColumns() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + void Update(float spacing, bool window_reappearing); + float DeclColumns(float w_icon, float w_label, float w_shortcut, float w_mark); + void CalcNextTotalWidth(bool update_offsets); +}; + +// Internal temporary state for deactivating InputText() instances. +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextDeactivatedState +{ + ImGuiID ID; // widget id owning the text state (which just got deactivated) + ImVector TextA; // text buffer + + ImGuiInputTextDeactivatedState() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + void ClearFreeMemory() { ID = 0; TextA.clear(); } +}; +// Internal state of the currently focused/edited text input box +// For a given item ID, access with ImGui::GetInputTextState() +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextState +{ + ImGuiContext* Ctx; // parent UI context (needs to be set explicitly by parent). + ImGuiID ID; // widget id owning the text state + int CurLenW, CurLenA; // we need to maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar format. UTF-8 length is valid even if TextA is not. + ImVector TextW; // edit buffer, we need to persist but can't guarantee the persistence of the user-provided buffer. so we copy into own buffer. + ImVector TextA; // temporary UTF8 buffer for callbacks and other operations. this is not updated in every code-path! size=capacity. + ImVector InitialTextA; // backup of end-user buffer at the time of focus (in UTF-8, unaltered) + bool TextAIsValid; // temporary UTF8 buffer is not initially valid before we make the widget active (until then we pull the data from user argument) + int BufCapacityA; // end-user buffer capacity + float ScrollX; // horizontal scrolling/offset + ImStb::STB_TexteditState Stb; // state for stb_textedit.h + float CursorAnim; // timer for cursor blink, reset on every user action so the cursor reappears immediately + bool CursorFollow; // set when we want scrolling to follow the current cursor position (not always!) + bool SelectedAllMouseLock; // after a double-click to select all, we ignore further mouse drags to update selection + bool Edited; // edited this frame + ImGuiInputTextFlags Flags; // copy of InputText() flags. may be used to check if e.g. ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password is set. + + ImGuiInputTextState() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + void ClearText() { CurLenW = CurLenA = 0; TextW[0] = 0; TextA[0] = 0; CursorClamp(); } + void ClearFreeMemory() { TextW.clear(); TextA.clear(); InitialTextA.clear(); } + int GetUndoAvailCount() const { return Stb.undostate.undo_point; } + int GetRedoAvailCount() const { return STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT - Stb.undostate.redo_point; } + void OnKeyPressed(int key); // Cannot be inline because we call in code in stb_textedit.h implementation + + // Cursor & Selection + void CursorAnimReset() { CursorAnim = -0.30f; } // After a user-input the cursor stays on for a while without blinking + void CursorClamp() { Stb.cursor = ImMin(Stb.cursor, CurLenW); Stb.select_start = ImMin(Stb.select_start, CurLenW); Stb.select_end = ImMin(Stb.select_end, CurLenW); } + bool HasSelection() const { return Stb.select_start != Stb.select_end; } + void ClearSelection() { Stb.select_start = Stb.select_end = Stb.cursor; } + int GetCursorPos() const { return Stb.cursor; } + int GetSelectionStart() const { return Stb.select_start; } + int GetSelectionEnd() const { return Stb.select_end; } + void SelectAll() { Stb.select_start = 0; Stb.cursor = Stb.select_end = CurLenW; Stb.has_preferred_x = 0; } +}; + +// Storage for current popup stack +struct ImGuiPopupData +{ + ImGuiID PopupId; // Set on OpenPopup() + ImGuiWindow* Window; // Resolved on BeginPopup() - may stay unresolved if user never calls OpenPopup() + ImGuiWindow* BackupNavWindow;// Set on OpenPopup(), a NavWindow that will be restored on popup close + int ParentNavLayer; // Resolved on BeginPopup(). Actually a ImGuiNavLayer type (declared down below), initialized to -1 which is not part of an enum, but serves well-enough as "not any of layers" value + int OpenFrameCount; // Set on OpenPopup() + ImGuiID OpenParentId; // Set on OpenPopup(), we need this to differentiate multiple menu sets from each others (e.g. inside menu bar vs loose menu items) + ImVec2 OpenPopupPos; // Set on OpenPopup(), preferred popup position (typically == OpenMousePos when using mouse) + ImVec2 OpenMousePos; // Set on OpenPopup(), copy of mouse position at the time of opening popup + + ImGuiPopupData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ParentNavLayer = OpenFrameCount = -1; } +}; + +enum ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_ +{ + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos = 1 << 0, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize = 1 << 1, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasContentSize = 1 << 2, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasCollapsed = 1 << 3, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint = 1 << 4, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasFocus = 1 << 5, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasBgAlpha = 1 << 6, + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasScroll = 1 << 7, +}; + +// Storage for SetNexWindow** functions +struct ImGuiNextWindowData +{ + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags Flags; + ImGuiCond PosCond; + ImGuiCond SizeCond; + ImGuiCond CollapsedCond; + ImVec2 PosVal; + ImVec2 PosPivotVal; + ImVec2 SizeVal; + ImVec2 ContentSizeVal; + ImVec2 ScrollVal; + bool CollapsedVal; + ImRect SizeConstraintRect; + ImGunSizeCallback SizeCallback; + void* SizeCallbackUserData; + float BgAlphaVal; // Override background alpha + ImVec2 MenuBarOffsetMinVal; // (Always on) This is not exposed publicly, so we don't clear it and it doesn't have a corresponding flag (could we? for consistency?) + + ImGuiNextWindowData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + inline void ClearFlags() { Flags = ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_None; } +}; + +enum ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_ +{ + ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth = 1 << 0, + ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen = 1 << 1, +}; + +struct ImGuiNextItemData +{ + ImGuiNextItemDataFlags Flags; + ImGuiItemFlags ItemFlags; // Currently only tested/used for ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap. + float Width; // Set by SetNextItemWidth() + ImGuiID FocusScopeId; // Set by SetNextItemMultiSelectData() (!= 0 signify value has been set, so it's an alternate version of HasSelectionData, we don't use Flags for this because they are cleared too early. This is mostly used for debugging) + ImGuiCond OpenCond; + bool OpenVal; // Set by SetNextItemOpen() + + ImGuiNextItemData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + inline void ClearFlags() { Flags = ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None; ItemFlags = ImGuiItemFlags_None; } // Also cleared manually by ItemAdd()! +}; + +// Status storage for the last submitted item +struct ImGuiLastItemData +{ + ImGuiID ID; + ImGuiItemFlags InFlags; // See ImGuiItemFlags_ + ImGuiItemStatusFlags StatusFlags; // See ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ + ImRect Rect; // Full rectangle + ImRect NavRect; // Navigation scoring rectangle (not displayed) + ImRect DisplayRect; // Display rectangle (only if ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect is set) + + ImGuiLastItemData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +// Store data emitted by TreeNode() for usage by TreePop() to implement ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere. +// This is the minimum amount of data that we need to perform the equivalent of NavApplyItemToResult() and which we can't infer in TreePop() +// Only stored when the node is a potential candidate for landing on a Left arrow jump. +struct ImGuiNavTreeNodeData +{ + ImGuiID ID; + ImGuiItemFlags InFlags; + ImRect NavRect; +}; + +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiStackSizes +{ + short SizeOfIDStack; + short SizeOfColorStack; + short SizeOfStyleVarStack; + short SizeOfFontStack; + short SizeOfFocusScopeStack; + short SizeOfGroupStack; + short SizeOfItemFlagsStack; + short SizeOfBeginPopupStack; + short SizeOfDisabledStack; + + ImGuiStackSizes() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + void SetToContextState(ImGuiContext* ctx); + void CompareWithContextState(ImGuiContext* ctx); +}; + +// Data saved for each window pushed into the stack +struct ImGuiWindowStackData +{ + ImGuiWindow* Window; + ImGuiLastItemData ParentLastItemDataBackup; + ImGuiStackSizes StackSizesOnBegin; // Store size of various stacks for asserting +}; + +struct ImGuiShrinkWidthItem +{ + int Index; + float Width; + float InitialWidth; +}; + +struct ImGuiPtrOrIndex +{ + void* Ptr; // Either field can be set, not both. e.g. Dock node tab bars are loose while BeginTabBar() ones are in a pool. + int Index; // Usually index in a main pool. + + ImGuiPtrOrIndex(void* ptr) { Ptr = ptr; Index = -1; } + ImGuiPtrOrIndex(int index) { Ptr = NULL; Index = index; } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Inputs support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Bit array for named keys +typedef ImBitArray ImBitArrayForNamedKeys; + +// [Internal] Key ranges +#define ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN 0 +#define ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END 512 +#define ImGuiKey_Keyboard_BEGIN (ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN) +#define ImGuiKey_Keyboard_END (ImGuiKey_GamepadStart) +#define ImGuiKey_Gamepad_BEGIN (ImGuiKey_GamepadStart) +#define ImGuiKey_Gamepad_END (ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown + 1) +#define ImGuiKey_Mouse_BEGIN (ImGuiKey_MouseLeft) +#define ImGuiKey_Mouse_END (ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY + 1) +#define ImGuiKey_Aliases_BEGIN (ImGuiKey_Mouse_BEGIN) +#define ImGuiKey_Aliases_END (ImGuiKey_Mouse_END) + +// [Internal] Named shortcuts for Navigation +#define ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow ImGuiMod_Ctrl +#define ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast ImGuiMod_Shift +#define ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow ImGuiKey_GamepadL1 +#define ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast ImGuiKey_GamepadR1 +#define ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown +#define ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight +#define ImGuiKey_NavGamepadMenu ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft +#define ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp + +enum ImGuiInputEventType +{ + ImGuiInputEventType_None = 0, + ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos, + ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel, + ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton, + ImGuiInputEventType_Key, + ImGuiInputEventType_Text, + ImGuiInputEventType_Focus, + ImGuiInputEventType_COUNT +}; + +enum ImGuiInputSource +{ + ImGuiInputSource_None = 0, + ImGuiInputSource_Mouse, // Note: may be Mouse or TouchScreen or Pen. See io.MouseSource to distinguish them. + ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard, + ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad, + ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard, // Currently only used by InputText() + ImGuiInputSource_COUNT +}; + +// FIXME: Structures in the union below need to be declared as anonymous unions appears to be an extension? +// Using ImVec2() would fail on Clang 'union member 'MousePos' has a non-trivial default constructor' +struct ImGuiInputEventMousePos { float PosX, PosY; ImGuiMouseSource MouseSource; }; +struct ImGuiInputEventMouseWheel { float WheelX, WheelY; ImGuiMouseSource MouseSource; }; +struct ImGuiInputEventMouseButton { int Button; bool Down; ImGuiMouseSource MouseSource; }; +struct ImGuiInputEventKey { ImGuiKey Key; bool Down; float AnalogValue; }; +struct ImGuiInputEventText { unsigned int Char; }; +struct ImGuiInputEventAppFocused { bool Focused; }; + +struct ImGuiInputEvent +{ + ImGuiInputEventType Type; + ImGuiInputSource Source; + ImU32 EventId; // Unique, sequential increasing integer to identify an event (if you need to correlate them to other data). + union + { + ImGuiInputEventMousePos MousePos; // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos + ImGuiInputEventMouseWheel MouseWheel; // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel + ImGuiInputEventMouseButton MouseButton; // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton + ImGuiInputEventKey Key; // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key + ImGuiInputEventText Text; // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Text + ImGuiInputEventAppFocused AppFocused; // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Focus + }; + bool AddedByTestEngine; + + ImGuiInputEvent() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +// Input function taking an 'ImGuiID owner_id' argument defaults to (ImGuiKeyOwner_Any == 0) aka don't test ownership, which matches legacy behavior. +#define ImGuiKeyOwner_Any ((ImGuiID)0) // Accept key that have an owner, UNLESS a call to SetKeyOwner() explicitly used ImGuiInputFlags_LockThisFrame or ImGuiInputFlags_LockUntilRelease. +#define ImGuiKeyOwner_None ((ImGuiID)-1) // Require key to have no owner. + +typedef ImS16 ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex; + +// Routing table entry (sizeof() == 16 bytes) +struct ImGuiKeyRoutingData +{ + ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex NextEntryIndex; + ImU16 Mods; // Technically we'd only need 4-bits but for simplify we store ImGuiMod_ values which need 16-bits. ImGuiMod_Shortcut is already translated to Ctrl/Super. + ImU8 RoutingNextScore; // Lower is better (0: perfect score) + ImGuiID RoutingCurr; + ImGuiID RoutingNext; + + ImGuiKeyRoutingData() { NextEntryIndex = -1; Mods = 0; RoutingNextScore = 255; RoutingCurr = RoutingNext = ImGuiKeyOwner_None; } +}; + +// Routing table: maintain a desired owner for each possible key-chord (key + mods), and setup owner in NewFrame() when mods are matching. +// Stored in main context (1 instance) +struct ImGuiKeyRoutingTable +{ + ImGuiKeyRoutingIndex Index[ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT]; // Index of first entry in Entries[] + ImVector Entries; + ImVector EntriesNext; // Double-buffer to avoid reallocation (could use a shared buffer) + + ImGuiKeyRoutingTable() { Clear(); } + void Clear() { for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Index); n++) Index[n] = -1; Entries.clear(); EntriesNext.clear(); } +}; + +// This extends ImGuiKeyData but only for named keys (legacy keys don't support the new features) +// Stored in main context (1 per named key). In the future it might be merged into ImGuiKeyData. +struct ImGuiKeyOwnerData +{ + ImGuiID OwnerCurr; + ImGuiID OwnerNext; + bool LockThisFrame; // Reading this key requires explicit owner id (until end of frame). Set by ImGuiInputFlags_LockThisFrame. + bool LockUntilRelease; // Reading this key requires explicit owner id (until key is released). Set by ImGuiInputFlags_LockUntilRelease. When this is true LockThisFrame is always true as well. + + ImGuiKeyOwnerData() { OwnerCurr = OwnerNext = ImGuiKeyOwner_None; LockThisFrame = LockUntilRelease = false; } +}; + +// Flags for extended versions of IsKeyPressed(), IsMouseClicked(), Shortcut(), SetKeyOwner(), SetItemKeyOwner() +// Don't mistake with ImGuiInputTextFlags! (for ImGui::InputText() function) +enum ImGuiInputFlags_ +{ + // Flags for IsKeyPressed(), IsMouseClicked(), Shortcut() + ImGuiInputFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat = 1 << 0, // Return true on successive repeats. Default for legacy IsKeyPressed(). NOT Default for legacy IsMouseClicked(). MUST BE == 1. + ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateDefault = 1 << 1, // Repeat rate: Regular (default) + ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavMove = 1 << 2, // Repeat rate: Fast + ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak = 1 << 3, // Repeat rate: Faster + ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateMask_ = ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateDefault | ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavMove | ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak, + + // Flags for SetItemKeyOwner() + ImGuiInputFlags_CondHovered = 1 << 4, // Only set if item is hovered (default to both) + ImGuiInputFlags_CondActive = 1 << 5, // Only set if item is active (default to both) + ImGuiInputFlags_CondDefault_ = ImGuiInputFlags_CondHovered | ImGuiInputFlags_CondActive, + ImGuiInputFlags_CondMask_ = ImGuiInputFlags_CondHovered | ImGuiInputFlags_CondActive, + + // Flags for SetKeyOwner(), SetItemKeyOwner() + ImGuiInputFlags_LockThisFrame = 1 << 6, // Access to key data will require EXPLICIT owner ID (ImGuiKeyOwner_Any/0 will NOT accepted for polling). Cleared at end of frame. This is useful to make input-owner-aware code steal keys from non-input-owner-aware code. + ImGuiInputFlags_LockUntilRelease = 1 << 7, // Access to key data will require EXPLICIT owner ID (ImGuiKeyOwner_Any/0 will NOT accepted for polling). Cleared when the key is released or at end of each frame if key is released. This is useful to make input-owner-aware code steal keys from non-input-owner-aware code. + + // Routing policies for Shortcut() + low-level SetShortcutRouting() + // - The general idea is that several callers register interest in a shortcut, and only one owner gets it. + // - When a policy (other than _RouteAlways) is set, Shortcut() will register itself with SetShortcutRouting(), + // allowing the system to decide where to route the input among other route-aware calls. + // - Shortcut() uses ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused by default: meaning that a simple Shortcut() poll + // will register a route and only succeed when parent window is in the focus stack and if no-one + // with a higher priority is claiming the shortcut. + // - Using ImGuiInputFlags_RouteAlways is roughly equivalent to doing e.g. IsKeyPressed(key) + testing mods. + // - Priorities: GlobalHigh > Focused (when owner is active item) > Global > Focused (when focused window) > GlobalLow. + // - Can select only 1 policy among all available. + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused = 1 << 8, // (Default) Register focused route: Accept inputs if window is in focus stack. Deep-most focused window takes inputs. ActiveId takes inputs over deep-most focused window. + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalLow = 1 << 9, // Register route globally (lowest priority: unless a focused window or active item registered the route) -> recommended Global priority. + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobal = 1 << 10, // Register route globally (medium priority: unless an active item registered the route, e.g. CTRL+A registered by InputText). + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalHigh = 1 << 11, // Register route globally (highest priority: unlikely you need to use that: will interfere with every active items) + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteMask_ = ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobal | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalLow | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteGlobalHigh, // _Always not part of this! + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteAlways = 1 << 12, // Do not register route, poll keys directly. + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteUnlessBgFocused= 1 << 13, // Global routes will not be applied if underlying background/void is focused (== no Dear ImGui windows are focused). Useful for overlay applications. + ImGuiInputFlags_RouteExtraMask_ = ImGuiInputFlags_RouteAlways | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteUnlessBgFocused, + + // [Internal] Mask of which function support which flags + ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedByIsKeyPressed = ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat | ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateMask_, + ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedByShortcut = ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat | ImGuiInputFlags_RepeatRateMask_ | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteMask_ | ImGuiInputFlags_RouteExtraMask_, + ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedBySetKeyOwner = ImGuiInputFlags_LockThisFrame | ImGuiInputFlags_LockUntilRelease, + ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedBySetItemKeyOwner = ImGuiInputFlags_SupportedBySetKeyOwner | ImGuiInputFlags_CondMask_, +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Clipper support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Note that Max is exclusive, so perhaps should be using a Begin/End convention. +struct ImGuiListClipperRange +{ + int Min; + int Max; + bool PosToIndexConvert; // Begin/End are absolute position (will be converted to indices later) + ImS8 PosToIndexOffsetMin; // Add to Min after converting to indices + ImS8 PosToIndexOffsetMax; // Add to Min after converting to indices + + static ImGuiListClipperRange FromIndices(int min, int max) { ImGuiListClipperRange r = { min, max, false, 0, 0 }; return r; } + static ImGuiListClipperRange FromPositions(float y1, float y2, int off_min, int off_max) { ImGuiListClipperRange r = { (int)y1, (int)y2, true, (ImS8)off_min, (ImS8)off_max }; return r; } +}; + +// Temporary clipper data, buffers shared/reused between instances +struct ImGuiListClipperData +{ + ImGuiListClipper* ListClipper; + float LossynessOffset; + int StepNo; + int ItemsFrozen; + ImVector Ranges; + + ImGuiListClipperData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + void Reset(ImGuiListClipper* clipper) { ListClipper = clipper; StepNo = ItemsFrozen = 0; Ranges.resize(0); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Navigation support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +enum ImGuiActivateFlags_ +{ + ImGuiActivateFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput = 1 << 0, // Favor activation that requires keyboard text input (e.g. for Slider/Drag). Default for Enter key. + ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferTweak = 1 << 1, // Favor activation for tweaking with arrows or gamepad (e.g. for Slider/Drag). Default for Space key and if keyboard is not used. + ImGuiActivateFlags_TryToPreserveState = 1 << 2, // Request widget to preserve state if it can (e.g. InputText will try to preserve cursor/selection) +}; + +// Early work-in-progress API for ScrollToItem() +enum ImGuiScrollFlags_ +{ + ImGuiScrollFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX = 1 << 0, // If item is not visible: scroll as little as possible on X axis to bring item back into view [default for X axis] + ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY = 1 << 1, // If item is not visible: scroll as little as possible on Y axis to bring item back into view [default for Y axis for windows that are already visible] + ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX = 1 << 2, // If item is not visible: scroll to make the item centered on X axis [rarely used] + ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY = 1 << 3, // If item is not visible: scroll to make the item centered on Y axis + ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX = 1 << 4, // Always center the result item on X axis [rarely used] + ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY = 1 << 5, // Always center the result item on Y axis [default for Y axis for appearing window) + ImGuiScrollFlags_NoScrollParent = 1 << 6, // Disable forwarding scrolling to parent window if required to keep item/rect visible (only scroll window the function was applied to). + ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_ = ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX, + ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_ = ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY, +}; + +enum ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_ +{ + ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault = 1 << 0, + ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin = 1 << 1, + ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw = 1 << 2, // Draw rectangular highlight if (g.NavId == id) _even_ when using the mouse. + ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding = 1 << 3, +}; + +enum ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ +{ + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX = 1 << 0, // On failed request, restart from opposite side + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY = 1 << 1, + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX = 1 << 2, // On failed request, request from opposite side one line down (when NavDir==right) or one line up (when NavDir==left) + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY = 1 << 3, // This is not super useful but provided for completeness + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapMask_ = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY, + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId = 1 << 4, // Allow scoring and considering the current NavId as a move target candidate. This is used when the move source is offset (e.g. pressing PageDown actually needs to send a Up move request, if we are pressing PageDown from the bottom-most item we need to stay in place) + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet = 1 << 5, // Store alternate result in NavMoveResultLocalVisible that only comprise elements that are already fully visible (used by PageUp/PageDown) + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY = 1 << 6, // Force scrolling to min/max (used by Home/End) // FIXME-NAV: Aim to remove or reword, probably unnecessary + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded = 1 << 7, + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DebugNoResult = 1 << 8, // Dummy scoring for debug purpose, don't apply result + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi = 1 << 9, // Requests from focus API can land/focus/activate items even if they are marked with _NoTabStop (see NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest() for details) + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsTabbing = 1 << 10, // == Focus + Activate if item is Inputable + DontChangeNavHighlight + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_IsPageMove = 1 << 11, // Identify a PageDown/PageUp request. + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Activate = 1 << 12, // Activate/select target item. + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSelect = 1 << 13, // Don't trigger selection by not setting g.NavJustMovedTo + ImGuiNavMoveFlags_NoSetNavHighlight = 1 << 14, // Do not alter the visible state of keyboard vs mouse nav highlight +}; + +enum ImGuiNavLayer +{ + ImGuiNavLayer_Main = 0, // Main scrolling layer + ImGuiNavLayer_Menu = 1, // Menu layer (access with Alt) + ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT +}; + +struct ImGuiNavItemData +{ + ImGuiWindow* Window; // Init,Move // Best candidate window (result->ItemWindow->RootWindowForNav == request->Window) + ImGuiID ID; // Init,Move // Best candidate item ID + ImGuiID FocusScopeId; // Init,Move // Best candidate focus scope ID + ImRect RectRel; // Init,Move // Best candidate bounding box in window relative space + ImGuiItemFlags InFlags; // ????,Move // Best candidate item flags + float DistBox; // Move // Best candidate box distance to current NavId + float DistCenter; // Move // Best candidate center distance to current NavId + float DistAxial; // Move // Best candidate axial distance to current NavId + + ImGuiNavItemData() { Clear(); } + void Clear() { Window = NULL; ID = FocusScopeId = 0; InFlags = 0; DistBox = DistCenter = DistAxial = FLT_MAX; } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Columns support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Flags for internal's BeginColumns(). Prefix using BeginTable() nowadays! +enum ImGuiOldColumnFlags_ +{ + ImGuiOldColumnFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder = 1 << 0, // Disable column dividers + ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize = 1 << 1, // Disable resizing columns when clicking on the dividers + ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths = 1 << 2, // Disable column width preservation when adjusting columns + ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoForceWithinWindow = 1 << 3, // Disable forcing columns to fit within window + ImGuiOldColumnFlags_GrowParentContentsSize = 1 << 4, // (WIP) Restore pre-1.51 behavior of extending the parent window contents size but _without affecting the columns width at all_. Will eventually remove. + + // Obsolete names (will be removed) +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + ImGuiColumnsFlags_None = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_None, + ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder, + ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize, + ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths, + ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoForceWithinWindow = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoForceWithinWindow, + ImGuiColumnsFlags_GrowParentContentsSize = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_GrowParentContentsSize, +#endif +}; + +struct ImGuiOldColumnData +{ + float OffsetNorm; // Column start offset, normalized 0.0 (far left) -> 1.0 (far right) + float OffsetNormBeforeResize; + ImGuiOldColumnFlags Flags; // Not exposed + ImRect ClipRect; + + ImGuiOldColumnData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +struct ImGuiOldColumns +{ + ImGuiID ID; + ImGuiOldColumnFlags Flags; + bool IsFirstFrame; + bool IsBeingResized; + int Current; + int Count; + float OffMinX, OffMaxX; // Offsets from HostWorkRect.Min.x + float LineMinY, LineMaxY; + float HostCursorPosY; // Backup of CursorPos at the time of BeginColumns() + float HostCursorMaxPosX; // Backup of CursorMaxPos at the time of BeginColumns() + ImRect HostInitialClipRect; // Backup of ClipRect at the time of BeginColumns() + ImRect HostBackupClipRect; // Backup of ClipRect during PushColumnsBackground()/PopColumnsBackground() + ImRect HostBackupParentWorkRect;//Backup of WorkRect at the time of BeginColumns() + ImVector Columns; + ImDrawListSplitter Splitter; + + ImGuiOldColumns() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Multi-select support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_MULTI_SELECT +// +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_MULTI_SELECT + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Docking support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK +// +#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Viewport support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// ImGuiViewport Private/Internals fields (cardinal sin: we are using inheritance!) +// Every instance of ImGuiViewport is in fact a ImGuiViewportP. +struct ImGuiViewportP : public ImGuiViewport +{ + int BgFgDrawListsLastFrame[2]; // Last frame number the background (0) and foreground (1) draw lists were used + ImDrawList* BgFgDrawLists[2]; // Convenience background (0) and foreground (1) draw lists. We use them to draw software mouser cursor when io.MouseDrawCursor is set and to draw most debug overlays. + ImDrawData DrawDataP; + ImDrawDataBuilder DrawDataBuilder; // Temporary data while building final ImDrawData + ImVec2 WorkOffsetMin; // Work Area: Offset from Pos to top-left corner of Work Area. Generally (0,0) or (0,+main_menu_bar_height). Work Area is Full Area but without menu-bars/status-bars (so WorkArea always fit inside Pos/Size!) + ImVec2 WorkOffsetMax; // Work Area: Offset from Pos+Size to bottom-right corner of Work Area. Generally (0,0) or (0,-status_bar_height). + ImVec2 BuildWorkOffsetMin; // Work Area: Offset being built during current frame. Generally >= 0.0f. + ImVec2 BuildWorkOffsetMax; // Work Area: Offset being built during current frame. Generally <= 0.0f. + + ImGuiViewportP() { BgFgDrawListsLastFrame[0] = BgFgDrawListsLastFrame[1] = -1; BgFgDrawLists[0] = BgFgDrawLists[1] = NULL; } + ~ImGuiViewportP() { if (BgFgDrawLists[0]) IM_DELETE(BgFgDrawLists[0]); if (BgFgDrawLists[1]) IM_DELETE(BgFgDrawLists[1]); } + + // Calculate work rect pos/size given a set of offset (we have 1 pair of offset for rect locked from last frame data, and 1 pair for currently building rect) + ImVec2 CalcWorkRectPos(const ImVec2& off_min) const { return ImVec2(Pos.x + off_min.x, Pos.y + off_min.y); } + ImVec2 CalcWorkRectSize(const ImVec2& off_min, const ImVec2& off_max) const { return ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, Size.x - off_min.x + off_max.x), ImMax(0.0f, Size.y - off_min.y + off_max.y)); } + void UpdateWorkRect() { WorkPos = CalcWorkRectPos(WorkOffsetMin); WorkSize = CalcWorkRectSize(WorkOffsetMin, WorkOffsetMax); } // Update public fields + + // Helpers to retrieve ImRect (we don't need to store BuildWorkRect as every access tend to change it, hence the code asymmetry) + ImRect GetMainRect() const { return ImRect(Pos.x, Pos.y, Pos.x + Size.x, Pos.y + Size.y); } + ImRect GetWorkRect() const { return ImRect(WorkPos.x, WorkPos.y, WorkPos.x + WorkSize.x, WorkPos.y + WorkSize.y); } + ImRect GetBuildWorkRect() const { ImVec2 pos = CalcWorkRectPos(BuildWorkOffsetMin); ImVec2 size = CalcWorkRectSize(BuildWorkOffsetMin, BuildWorkOffsetMax); return ImRect(pos.x, pos.y, pos.x + size.x, pos.y + size.y); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Settings support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Windows data saved in imgui.ini file +// Because we never destroy or rename ImGuiWindowSettings, we can store the names in a separate buffer easily. +// (this is designed to be stored in a ImChunkStream buffer, with the variable-length Name following our structure) +struct ImGuiWindowSettings +{ + ImGuiID ID; + ImVec2ih Pos; + ImVec2ih Size; + bool Collapsed; + bool WantApply; // Set when loaded from .ini data (to enable merging/loading .ini data into an already running context) + bool WantDelete; // Set to invalidate/delete the settings entry + + ImGuiWindowSettings() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + char* GetName() { return (char*)(this + 1); } +}; + +struct ImGuiSettingsHandler +{ + const char* TypeName; // Short description stored in .ini file. Disallowed characters: '[' ']' + ImGuiID TypeHash; // == ImHashStr(TypeName) + void (*ClearAllFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler); // Clear all settings data + void (*ReadInitFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler); // Read: Called before reading (in registration order) + void* (*ReadOpenFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, const char* name); // Read: Called when entering into a new ini entry e.g. "[Window][Name]" + void (*ReadLineFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, void* entry, const char* line); // Read: Called for every line of text within an ini entry + void (*ApplyAllFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler); // Read: Called after reading (in registration order) + void (*WriteAllFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* out_buf); // Write: Output every entries into 'out_buf' + void* UserData; + + ImGuiSettingsHandler() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Localization support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// This is experimental and not officially supported, it'll probably fall short of features, if/when it does we may backtrack. +enum ImGuiLocKey : int +{ + ImGuiLocKey_VersionStr, + ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeOne, + ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeAllFit, + ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeAllDefault, + ImGuiLocKey_TableResetOrder, + ImGuiLocKey_WindowingMainMenuBar, + ImGuiLocKey_WindowingPopup, + ImGuiLocKey_WindowingUntitled, + ImGuiLocKey_COUNT +}; + +struct ImGuiLocEntry +{ + ImGuiLocKey Key; + const char* Text; +}; + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Metrics, Debug Tools +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +enum ImGuiDebugLogFlags_ +{ + // Event types + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_None = 0, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId = 1 << 0, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus = 1 << 1, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup = 1 << 2, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav = 1 << 3, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventClipper = 1 << 4, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventSelection = 1 << 5, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO = 1 << 6, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventMask_ = ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventClipper | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventSelection | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO, + ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTTY = 1 << 10, // Also send output to TTY +}; + +struct ImGuiMetricsConfig +{ + bool ShowDebugLog = false; + bool ShowStackTool = false; + bool ShowWindowsRects = false; + bool ShowWindowsBeginOrder = false; + bool ShowTablesRects = false; + bool ShowDrawCmdMesh = true; + bool ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes = true; + bool ShowAtlasTintedWithTextColor = false; + int ShowWindowsRectsType = -1; + int ShowTablesRectsType = -1; +}; + +struct ImGuiStackLevelInfo +{ + ImGuiID ID; + ImS8 QueryFrameCount; // >= 1: Query in progress + bool QuerySuccess; // Obtained result from DebugHookIdInfo() + ImGuiDataType DataType : 8; + char Desc[57]; // Arbitrarily sized buffer to hold a result (FIXME: could replace Results[] with a chunk stream?) FIXME: Now that we added CTRL+C this should be fixed. + + ImGuiStackLevelInfo() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +// State for Stack tool queries +struct ImGuiStackTool +{ + int LastActiveFrame; + int StackLevel; // -1: query stack and resize Results, >= 0: individual stack level + ImGuiID QueryId; // ID to query details for + ImVector Results; + bool CopyToClipboardOnCtrlC; + float CopyToClipboardLastTime; + + ImGuiStackTool() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); CopyToClipboardLastTime = -FLT_MAX; } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Generic context hooks +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +typedef void (*ImGuiContextHookCallback)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiContextHook* hook); +enum ImGuiContextHookType { ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePre, ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePost, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePre, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePost, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPre, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPost, ImGuiContextHookType_Shutdown, ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_ }; + +struct ImGuiContextHook +{ + ImGuiID HookId; // A unique ID assigned by AddContextHook() + ImGuiContextHookType Type; + ImGuiID Owner; + ImGuiContextHookCallback Callback; + void* UserData; + + ImGuiContextHook() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiContext (main Dear ImGui context) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +struct ImGuiContext +{ + bool Initialized; + bool FontAtlasOwnedByContext; // IO.Fonts-> is owned by the ImGuiContext and will be destructed along with it. + ImGuiIO IO; + ImGuiStyle Style; + ImFont* Font; // (Shortcut) == FontStack.empty() ? IO.Font : FontStack.back() + float FontSize; // (Shortcut) == FontBaseSize * g.CurrentWindow->FontWindowScale == window->FontSize(). Text height for current window. + float FontBaseSize; // (Shortcut) == IO.FontGlobalScale * Font->Scale * Font->FontSize. Base text height. + ImDrawListSharedData DrawListSharedData; + double Time; + int FrameCount; + int FrameCountEnded; + int FrameCountRendered; + bool WithinFrameScope; // Set by NewFrame(), cleared by EndFrame() + bool WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow; // Set by NewFrame(), cleared by EndFrame() when the implicit debug window has been pushed + bool WithinEndChild; // Set within EndChild() + bool GcCompactAll; // Request full GC + bool TestEngineHookItems; // Will call test engine hooks: ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(), ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(), ImGuiTestEngineHook_Log() + void* TestEngine; // Test engine user data + + // Inputs + ImVector InputEventsQueue; // Input events which will be trickled/written into IO structure. + ImVector InputEventsTrail; // Past input events processed in NewFrame(). This is to allow domain-specific application to access e.g mouse/pen trail. + ImGuiMouseSource InputEventsNextMouseSource; + ImU32 InputEventsNextEventId; + + // Windows state + ImVector Windows; // Windows, sorted in display order, back to front + ImVector WindowsFocusOrder; // Root windows, sorted in focus order, back to front. + ImVector WindowsTempSortBuffer; // Temporary buffer used in EndFrame() to reorder windows so parents are kept before their child + ImVector CurrentWindowStack; + ImGuiStorage WindowsById; // Map window's ImGuiID to ImGuiWindow* + int WindowsActiveCount; // Number of unique windows submitted by frame + ImVec2 WindowsHoverPadding; // Padding around resizable windows for which hovering on counts as hovering the window == ImMax(style.TouchExtraPadding, WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING) + ImGuiWindow* CurrentWindow; // Window being drawn into + ImGuiWindow* HoveredWindow; // Window the mouse is hovering. Will typically catch mouse inputs. + ImGuiWindow* HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow; // Hovered window ignoring MovingWindow. Only set if MovingWindow is set. + ImGuiWindow* MovingWindow; // Track the window we clicked on (in order to preserve focus). The actual window that is moved is generally MovingWindow->RootWindow. + ImGuiWindow* WheelingWindow; // Track the window we started mouse-wheeling on. Until a timer elapse or mouse has moved, generally keep scrolling the same window even if during the course of scrolling the mouse ends up hovering a child window. + ImVec2 WheelingWindowRefMousePos; + int WheelingWindowStartFrame; // This may be set one frame before WheelingWindow is != NULL + float WheelingWindowReleaseTimer; + ImVec2 WheelingWindowWheelRemainder; + ImVec2 WheelingAxisAvg; + + // Item/widgets state and tracking information + ImGuiID DebugHookIdInfo; // Will call core hooks: DebugHookIdInfo() from GetID functions, used by Stack Tool [next HoveredId/ActiveId to not pull in an extra cache-line] + ImGuiID HoveredId; // Hovered widget, filled during the frame + ImGuiID HoveredIdPreviousFrame; + bool HoveredIdAllowOverlap; + bool HoveredIdDisabled; // At least one widget passed the rect test, but has been discarded by disabled flag or popup inhibit. May be true even if HoveredId == 0. + float HoveredIdTimer; // Measure contiguous hovering time + float HoveredIdNotActiveTimer; // Measure contiguous hovering time where the item has not been active + ImGuiID ActiveId; // Active widget + ImGuiID ActiveIdIsAlive; // Active widget has been seen this frame (we can't use a bool as the ActiveId may change within the frame) + float ActiveIdTimer; + bool ActiveIdIsJustActivated; // Set at the time of activation for one frame + bool ActiveIdAllowOverlap; // Active widget allows another widget to steal active id (generally for overlapping widgets, but not always) + bool ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss; // Disable losing active id if the active id window gets unfocused. + bool ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore; // Track whether the active id led to a press (this is to allow changing between PressOnClick and PressOnRelease without pressing twice). Used by range_select branch. + bool ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore; // Was the value associated to the widget Edited over the course of the Active state. + bool ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame; + ImVec2 ActiveIdClickOffset; // Clicked offset from upper-left corner, if applicable (currently only set by ButtonBehavior) + ImGuiWindow* ActiveIdWindow; + ImGuiInputSource ActiveIdSource; // Activating source: ImGuiInputSource_Mouse OR ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard OR ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad + int ActiveIdMouseButton; + ImGuiID ActiveIdPreviousFrame; + bool ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive; + bool ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore; + ImGuiWindow* ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow; + ImGuiID LastActiveId; // Store the last non-zero ActiveId, useful for animation. + float LastActiveIdTimer; // Store the last non-zero ActiveId timer since the beginning of activation, useful for animation. + + // [EXPERIMENTAL] Key/Input Ownership + Shortcut Routing system + // - The idea is that instead of "eating" a given key, we can link to an owner. + // - Input query can then read input by specifying ImGuiKeyOwner_Any (== 0), ImGuiKeyOwner_None (== -1) or a custom ID. + // - Routing is requested ahead of time for a given chord (Key + Mods) and granted in NewFrame(). + ImGuiKeyOwnerData KeysOwnerData[ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT]; + ImGuiKeyRoutingTable KeysRoutingTable; + ImU32 ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask; // Active widget will want to read those nav move requests (e.g. can activate a button and move away from it) + bool ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys; // Active widget will want to read all keyboard keys inputs. (FIXME: This is a shortcut for not taking ownership of 100+ keys but perhaps best to not have the inconsistency) +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + ImU32 ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask; // If you used this. Since (IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18804) : 'g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask |= (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel);' becomes 'SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_Escape, g.ActiveId) and/or SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel, g.ActiveId);' +#endif + + // Next window/item data + ImGuiID CurrentFocusScopeId; // == g.FocusScopeStack.back() + ImGuiItemFlags CurrentItemFlags; // == g.ItemFlagsStack.back() + ImGuiID DebugLocateId; // Storage for DebugLocateItemOnHover() feature: this is read by ItemAdd() so we keep it in a hot/cached location + ImGuiNextItemData NextItemData; // Storage for SetNextItem** functions + ImGuiLastItemData LastItemData; // Storage for last submitted item (setup by ItemAdd) + ImGuiNextWindowData NextWindowData; // Storage for SetNextWindow** functions + + // Shared stacks + ImVector ColorStack; // Stack for PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() - inherited by Begin() + ImVector StyleVarStack; // Stack for PushStyleVar()/PopStyleVar() - inherited by Begin() + ImVector FontStack; // Stack for PushFont()/PopFont() - inherited by Begin() + ImVector FocusScopeStack; // Stack for PushFocusScope()/PopFocusScope() - inherited by BeginChild(), pushed into by Begin() + ImVectorItemFlagsStack; // Stack for PushItemFlag()/PopItemFlag() - inherited by Begin() + ImVectorGroupStack; // Stack for BeginGroup()/EndGroup() - not inherited by Begin() + ImVectorOpenPopupStack; // Which popups are open (persistent) + ImVectorBeginPopupStack; // Which level of BeginPopup() we are in (reset every frame) + ImVector NavTreeNodeStack; // Stack for TreeNode() when a NavLeft requested is emitted. + + int BeginMenuCount; + + // Viewports + ImVector Viewports; // Active viewports (Size==1 in 'master' branch). Each viewports hold their copy of ImDrawData. + + // Gamepad/keyboard Navigation + ImGuiWindow* NavWindow; // Focused window for navigation. Could be called 'FocusedWindow' + ImGuiID NavId; // Focused item for navigation + ImGuiID NavFocusScopeId; // Identify a selection scope (selection code often wants to "clear other items" when landing on an item of the selection set) + ImGuiID NavActivateId; // ~~ (g.ActiveId == 0) && (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Enter) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate)) ? NavId : 0, also set when calling ActivateItem() + ImGuiID NavActivateDownId; // ~~ IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Space) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Enter) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate) ? NavId : 0 + ImGuiID NavActivatePressedId; // ~~ IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate) ? NavId : 0 (no repeat) + ImGuiActivateFlags NavActivateFlags; + ImGuiID NavJustMovedToId; // Just navigated to this id (result of a successfully MoveRequest). + ImGuiID NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId; // Just navigated to this focus scope id (result of a successfully MoveRequest). + ImGuiKeyChord NavJustMovedToKeyMods; + ImGuiID NavNextActivateId; // Set by ActivateItem(), queued until next frame. + ImGuiActivateFlags NavNextActivateFlags; + ImGuiInputSource NavInputSource; // Keyboard or Gamepad mode? THIS CAN ONLY BE ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard or ImGuiInputSource_Mouse + ImGuiNavLayer NavLayer; // Layer we are navigating on. For now the system is hard-coded for 0=main contents and 1=menu/title bar, may expose layers later. + bool NavIdIsAlive; // Nav widget has been seen this frame ~~ NavRectRel is valid + bool NavMousePosDirty; // When set we will update mouse position if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) if set (NB: this not enabled by default) + bool NavDisableHighlight; // When user starts using mouse, we hide gamepad/keyboard highlight (NB: but they are still available, which is why NavDisableHighlight isn't always != NavDisableMouseHover) + bool NavDisableMouseHover; // When user starts using gamepad/keyboard, we hide mouse hovering highlight until mouse is touched again. + + // Navigation: Init & Move Requests + bool NavAnyRequest; // ~~ NavMoveRequest || NavInitRequest this is to perform early out in ItemAdd() + bool NavInitRequest; // Init request for appearing window to select first item + bool NavInitRequestFromMove; + ImGuiNavItemData NavInitResult; // Init request result (first item of the window, or one for which SetItemDefaultFocus() was called) + bool NavMoveSubmitted; // Move request submitted, will process result on next NewFrame() + bool NavMoveScoringItems; // Move request submitted, still scoring incoming items + bool NavMoveForwardToNextFrame; + ImGuiNavMoveFlags NavMoveFlags; + ImGuiScrollFlags NavMoveScrollFlags; + ImGuiKeyChord NavMoveKeyMods; + ImGuiDir NavMoveDir; // Direction of the move request (left/right/up/down) + ImGuiDir NavMoveDirForDebug; + ImGuiDir NavMoveClipDir; // FIXME-NAV: Describe the purpose of this better. Might want to rename? + ImRect NavScoringRect; // Rectangle used for scoring, in screen space. Based of window->NavRectRel[], modified for directional navigation scoring. + ImRect NavScoringNoClipRect; // Some nav operations (such as PageUp/PageDown) enforce a region which clipper will attempt to always keep submitted + int NavScoringDebugCount; // Metrics for debugging + int NavTabbingDir; // Generally -1 or +1, 0 when tabbing without a nav id + int NavTabbingCounter; // >0 when counting items for tabbing + ImGuiNavItemData NavMoveResultLocal; // Best move request candidate within NavWindow + ImGuiNavItemData NavMoveResultLocalVisible; // Best move request candidate within NavWindow that are mostly visible (when using ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet flag) + ImGuiNavItemData NavMoveResultOther; // Best move request candidate within NavWindow's flattened hierarchy (when using ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened flag) + ImGuiNavItemData NavTabbingResultFirst; // First tabbing request candidate within NavWindow and flattened hierarchy + + // Navigation: Windowing (CTRL+TAB for list, or Menu button + keys or directional pads to move/resize) + ImGuiKeyChord ConfigNavWindowingKeyNext; // = ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiKey_Tab, for reconfiguration (see #4828) + ImGuiKeyChord ConfigNavWindowingKeyPrev; // = ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Tab + ImGuiWindow* NavWindowingTarget; // Target window when doing CTRL+Tab (or Pad Menu + FocusPrev/Next), this window is temporarily displayed top-most! + ImGuiWindow* NavWindowingTargetAnim; // Record of last valid NavWindowingTarget until DimBgRatio and NavWindowingHighlightAlpha becomes 0.0f, so the fade-out can stay on it. + ImGuiWindow* NavWindowingListWindow; // Internal window actually listing the CTRL+Tab contents + float NavWindowingTimer; + float NavWindowingHighlightAlpha; + bool NavWindowingToggleLayer; + ImVec2 NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos; + ImVec2 NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize; + + // Render + float DimBgRatio; // 0.0..1.0 animation when fading in a dimming background (for modal window and CTRL+TAB list) + + // Drag and Drop + bool DragDropActive; + bool DragDropWithinSource; // Set when within a BeginDragDropXXX/EndDragDropXXX block for a drag source. + bool DragDropWithinTarget; // Set when within a BeginDragDropXXX/EndDragDropXXX block for a drag target. + ImGuiDragDropFlags DragDropSourceFlags; + int DragDropSourceFrameCount; + int DragDropMouseButton; + ImGuiPayload DragDropPayload; + ImRect DragDropTargetRect; // Store rectangle of current target candidate (we favor small targets when overlapping) + ImGuiID DragDropTargetId; + ImGuiDragDropFlags DragDropAcceptFlags; + float DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface; // Target item surface (we resolve overlapping targets by prioritizing the smaller surface) + ImGuiID DragDropAcceptIdCurr; // Target item id (set at the time of accepting the payload) + ImGuiID DragDropAcceptIdPrev; // Target item id from previous frame (we need to store this to allow for overlapping drag and drop targets) + int DragDropAcceptFrameCount; // Last time a target expressed a desire to accept the source + ImGuiID DragDropHoldJustPressedId; // Set when holding a payload just made ButtonBehavior() return a press. + ImVector DragDropPayloadBufHeap; // We don't expose the ImVector<> directly, ImGuiPayload only holds pointer+size + unsigned char DragDropPayloadBufLocal[16]; // Local buffer for small payloads + + // Clipper + int ClipperTempDataStacked; + ImVector ClipperTempData; + + // Tables + ImGuiTable* CurrentTable; + int TablesTempDataStacked; // Temporary table data size (because we leave previous instances undestructed, we generally don't use TablesTempData.Size) + ImVector TablesTempData; // Temporary table data (buffers reused/shared across instances, support nesting) + ImPool Tables; // Persistent table data + ImVector TablesLastTimeActive; // Last used timestamp of each tables (SOA, for efficient GC) + ImVector DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer; + + // Tab bars + ImGuiTabBar* CurrentTabBar; + ImPool TabBars; + ImVector CurrentTabBarStack; + ImVector ShrinkWidthBuffer; + + // Hover Delay system + ImGuiID HoverItemDelayId; + ImGuiID HoverItemDelayIdPreviousFrame; + float HoverItemDelayTimer; // Currently used by IsItemHovered() + float HoverItemDelayClearTimer; // Currently used by IsItemHovered(): grace time before g.TooltipHoverTimer gets cleared. + ImGuiID HoverItemUnlockedStationaryId; // Mouse has once been stationary on this item. Only reset after departing the item. + ImGuiID HoverWindowUnlockedStationaryId; // Mouse has once been stationary on this window. Only reset after departing the window. + + // Mouse state + ImGuiMouseCursor MouseCursor; + float MouseStationaryTimer; // Time the mouse has been stationary (with some loose heuristic) + ImVec2 MouseLastValidPos; + + // Widget state + ImGuiInputTextState InputTextState; + ImGuiInputTextDeactivatedState InputTextDeactivatedState; + ImFont InputTextPasswordFont; + ImGuiID TempInputId; // Temporary text input when CTRL+clicking on a slider, etc. + ImGuiColorEditFlags ColorEditOptions; // Store user options for color edit widgets + ImGuiID ColorEditCurrentID; // Set temporarily while inside of the parent-most ColorEdit4/ColorPicker4 (because they call each others). + ImGuiID ColorEditSavedID; // ID we are saving/restoring HS for + float ColorEditSavedHue; // Backup of last Hue associated to LastColor, so we can restore Hue in lossy RGB<>HSV round trips + float ColorEditSavedSat; // Backup of last Saturation associated to LastColor, so we can restore Saturation in lossy RGB<>HSV round trips + ImU32 ColorEditSavedColor; // RGB value with alpha set to 0. + ImVec4 ColorPickerRef; // Initial/reference color at the time of opening the color picker. + ImGuiComboPreviewData ComboPreviewData; + float SliderGrabClickOffset; + float SliderCurrentAccum; // Accumulated slider delta when using navigation controls. + bool SliderCurrentAccumDirty; // Has the accumulated slider delta changed since last time we tried to apply it? + bool DragCurrentAccumDirty; + float DragCurrentAccum; // Accumulator for dragging modification. Always high-precision, not rounded by end-user precision settings + float DragSpeedDefaultRatio; // If speed == 0.0f, uses (max-min) * DragSpeedDefaultRatio + float ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter; // Distance between mouse and center of grab box, normalized in parent space. Use storage? + float DisabledAlphaBackup; // Backup for style.Alpha for BeginDisabled() + short DisabledStackSize; + short LockMarkEdited; + short TooltipOverrideCount; + ImVector ClipboardHandlerData; // If no custom clipboard handler is defined + ImVector MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame; // A list of menu IDs that were rendered at least once + + // Platform support + ImGuiPlatformImeData PlatformImeData; // Data updated by current frame + ImGuiPlatformImeData PlatformImeDataPrev; // Previous frame data (when changing we will call io.SetPlatformImeDataFn + + // Settings + bool SettingsLoaded; + float SettingsDirtyTimer; // Save .ini Settings to memory when time reaches zero + ImGuiTextBuffer SettingsIniData; // In memory .ini settings + ImVector SettingsHandlers; // List of .ini settings handlers + ImChunkStream SettingsWindows; // ImGuiWindow .ini settings entries + ImChunkStream SettingsTables; // ImGuiTable .ini settings entries + ImVector Hooks; // Hooks for extensions (e.g. test engine) + ImGuiID HookIdNext; // Next available HookId + + // Localization + const char* LocalizationTable[ImGuiLocKey_COUNT]; + + // Capture/Logging + bool LogEnabled; // Currently capturing + ImGuiLogType LogType; // Capture target + ImFileHandle LogFile; // If != NULL log to stdout/ file + ImGuiTextBuffer LogBuffer; // Accumulation buffer when log to clipboard. This is pointer so our GImGui static constructor doesn't call heap allocators. + const char* LogNextPrefix; + const char* LogNextSuffix; + float LogLinePosY; + bool LogLineFirstItem; + int LogDepthRef; + int LogDepthToExpand; + int LogDepthToExpandDefault; // Default/stored value for LogDepthMaxExpand if not specified in the LogXXX function call. + + // Debug Tools + ImGuiDebugLogFlags DebugLogFlags; + ImGuiTextBuffer DebugLogBuf; + ImGuiTextIndex DebugLogIndex; + ImU8 DebugLogClipperAutoDisableFrames; + ImU8 DebugLocateFrames; // For DebugLocateItemOnHover(). This is used together with DebugLocateId which is in a hot/cached spot above. + ImS8 DebugBeginReturnValueCullDepth; // Cycle between 0..9 then wrap around. + bool DebugItemPickerActive; // Item picker is active (started with DebugStartItemPicker()) + ImU8 DebugItemPickerMouseButton; + ImGuiID DebugItemPickerBreakId; // Will call IM_DEBUG_BREAK() when encountering this ID + ImGuiMetricsConfig DebugMetricsConfig; + ImGuiStackTool DebugStackTool; + + // Misc + float FramerateSecPerFrame[60]; // Calculate estimate of framerate for user over the last 60 frames.. + int FramerateSecPerFrameIdx; + int FramerateSecPerFrameCount; + float FramerateSecPerFrameAccum; + int WantCaptureMouseNextFrame; // Explicit capture override via SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse()/SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(). Default to -1. + int WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame; // " + int WantTextInputNextFrame; + ImVector TempBuffer; // Temporary text buffer + + ImGuiContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas) + { + IO.Ctx = this; + InputTextState.Ctx = this; + + Initialized = false; + FontAtlasOwnedByContext = shared_font_atlas ? false : true; + Font = NULL; + FontSize = FontBaseSize = 0.0f; + IO.Fonts = shared_font_atlas ? shared_font_atlas : IM_NEW(ImFontAtlas)(); + Time = 0.0f; + FrameCount = 0; + FrameCountEnded = FrameCountRendered = -1; + WithinFrameScope = WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow = WithinEndChild = false; + GcCompactAll = false; + TestEngineHookItems = false; + TestEngine = NULL; + + InputEventsNextMouseSource = ImGuiMouseSource_Mouse; + InputEventsNextEventId = 1; + + WindowsActiveCount = 0; + CurrentWindow = NULL; + HoveredWindow = NULL; + HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = NULL; + MovingWindow = NULL; + WheelingWindow = NULL; + WheelingWindowStartFrame = -1; + WheelingWindowReleaseTimer = 0.0f; + + DebugHookIdInfo = 0; + HoveredId = HoveredIdPreviousFrame = 0; + HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false; + HoveredIdDisabled = false; + HoveredIdTimer = HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f; + ActiveId = 0; + ActiveIdIsAlive = 0; + ActiveIdTimer = 0.0f; + ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false; + ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false; + ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = false; + ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = false; + ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore = false; + ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = false; + ActiveIdClickOffset = ImVec2(-1, -1); + ActiveIdWindow = NULL; + ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_None; + ActiveIdMouseButton = -1; + ActiveIdPreviousFrame = 0; + ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false; + ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore = false; + ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL; + LastActiveId = 0; + LastActiveIdTimer = 0.0f; + + ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = 0x00; + ActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys = false; +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask = 0x00; +#endif + + CurrentFocusScopeId = 0; + CurrentItemFlags = ImGuiItemFlags_None; + BeginMenuCount = 0; + + NavWindow = NULL; + NavId = NavFocusScopeId = NavActivateId = NavActivateDownId = NavActivatePressedId = 0; + NavJustMovedToId = NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId = NavNextActivateId = 0; + NavActivateFlags = NavNextActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None; + NavJustMovedToKeyMods = ImGuiMod_None; + NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard; + NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + NavIdIsAlive = false; + NavMousePosDirty = false; + NavDisableHighlight = true; + NavDisableMouseHover = false; + NavAnyRequest = false; + NavInitRequest = false; + NavInitRequestFromMove = false; + NavMoveSubmitted = false; + NavMoveScoringItems = false; + NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = false; + NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None; + NavMoveScrollFlags = ImGuiScrollFlags_None; + NavMoveKeyMods = ImGuiMod_None; + NavMoveDir = NavMoveDirForDebug = NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_None; + NavScoringDebugCount = 0; + NavTabbingDir = 0; + NavTabbingCounter = 0; + + ConfigNavWindowingKeyNext = ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiKey_Tab; + ConfigNavWindowingKeyPrev = ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Tab; + NavWindowingTarget = NavWindowingTargetAnim = NavWindowingListWindow = NULL; + NavWindowingTimer = NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f; + NavWindowingToggleLayer = false; + + DimBgRatio = 0.0f; + + DragDropActive = DragDropWithinSource = DragDropWithinTarget = false; + DragDropSourceFlags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_None; + DragDropSourceFrameCount = -1; + DragDropMouseButton = -1; + DragDropTargetId = 0; + DragDropAcceptFlags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_None; + DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = 0.0f; + DragDropAcceptIdPrev = DragDropAcceptIdCurr = 0; + DragDropAcceptFrameCount = -1; + DragDropHoldJustPressedId = 0; + memset(DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(DragDropPayloadBufLocal)); + + ClipperTempDataStacked = 0; + + CurrentTable = NULL; + TablesTempDataStacked = 0; + CurrentTabBar = NULL; + + HoverItemDelayId = HoverItemDelayIdPreviousFrame = HoverItemUnlockedStationaryId = HoverWindowUnlockedStationaryId = 0; + HoverItemDelayTimer = HoverItemDelayClearTimer = 0.0f; + + MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow; + MouseStationaryTimer = 0.0f; + + TempInputId = 0; + ColorEditOptions = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_; + ColorEditCurrentID = ColorEditSavedID = 0; + ColorEditSavedHue = ColorEditSavedSat = 0.0f; + ColorEditSavedColor = 0; + SliderGrabClickOffset = 0.0f; + SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f; + SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false; + DragCurrentAccumDirty = false; + DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f; + DragSpeedDefaultRatio = 1.0f / 100.0f; + ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = 0.0f; + DisabledAlphaBackup = 0.0f; + DisabledStackSize = 0; + LockMarkEdited = 0; + TooltipOverrideCount = 0; + + PlatformImeData.InputPos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + PlatformImeDataPrev.InputPos = ImVec2(-1.0f, -1.0f); // Different to ensure initial submission + + SettingsLoaded = false; + SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f; + HookIdNext = 0; + + memset(LocalizationTable, 0, sizeof(LocalizationTable)); + + LogEnabled = false; + LogType = ImGuiLogType_None; + LogNextPrefix = LogNextSuffix = NULL; + LogFile = NULL; + LogLinePosY = FLT_MAX; + LogLineFirstItem = false; + LogDepthRef = 0; + LogDepthToExpand = LogDepthToExpandDefault = 2; + + DebugLogFlags = ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTTY; + DebugLocateId = 0; + DebugLogClipperAutoDisableFrames = 0; + DebugLocateFrames = 0; + DebugBeginReturnValueCullDepth = -1; + DebugItemPickerActive = false; + DebugItemPickerMouseButton = ImGuiMouseButton_Left; + DebugItemPickerBreakId = 0; + + memset(FramerateSecPerFrame, 0, sizeof(FramerateSecPerFrame)); + FramerateSecPerFrameIdx = FramerateSecPerFrameCount = 0; + FramerateSecPerFrameAccum = 0.0f; + WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = WantTextInputNextFrame = -1; + } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGuiWindowTempData, ImGuiWindow +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Transient per-window data, reset at the beginning of the frame. This used to be called ImGuiDrawContext, hence the DC variable name in ImGuiWindow. +// (That's theory, in practice the delimitation between ImGuiWindow and ImGuiWindowTempData is quite tenuous and could be reconsidered..) +// (This doesn't need a constructor because we zero-clear it as part of ImGuiWindow and all frame-temporary data are setup on Begin) +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowTempData +{ + // Layout + ImVec2 CursorPos; // Current emitting position, in absolute coordinates. + ImVec2 CursorPosPrevLine; + ImVec2 CursorStartPos; // Initial position after Begin(), generally ~ window position + WindowPadding. + ImVec2 CursorMaxPos; // Used to implicitly calculate ContentSize at the beginning of next frame, for scrolling range and auto-resize. Always growing during the frame. + ImVec2 IdealMaxPos; // Used to implicitly calculate ContentSizeIdeal at the beginning of next frame, for auto-resize only. Always growing during the frame. + ImVec2 CurrLineSize; + ImVec2 PrevLineSize; + float CurrLineTextBaseOffset; // Baseline offset (0.0f by default on a new line, generally == style.FramePadding.y when a framed item has been added). + float PrevLineTextBaseOffset; + bool IsSameLine; + bool IsSetPos; + ImVec1 Indent; // Indentation / start position from left of window (increased by TreePush/TreePop, etc.) + ImVec1 ColumnsOffset; // Offset to the current column (if ColumnsCurrent > 0). FIXME: This and the above should be a stack to allow use cases like Tree->Column->Tree. Need revamp columns API. + ImVec1 GroupOffset; + ImVec2 CursorStartPosLossyness;// Record the loss of precision of CursorStartPos due to really large scrolling amount. This is used by clipper to compensate and fix the most common use case of large scroll area. + + // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation + ImGuiNavLayer NavLayerCurrent; // Current layer, 0..31 (we currently only use 0..1) + short NavLayersActiveMask; // Which layers have been written to (result from previous frame) + short NavLayersActiveMaskNext;// Which layers have been written to (accumulator for current frame) + bool NavIsScrollPushableX; // Set when current work location may be scrolled horizontally when moving left / right. This is generally always true UNLESS within a column. + bool NavHideHighlightOneFrame; + bool NavWindowHasScrollY; // Set per window when scrolling can be used (== ScrollMax.y > 0.0f) + + // Miscellaneous + bool MenuBarAppending; // FIXME: Remove this + ImVec2 MenuBarOffset; // MenuBarOffset.x is sort of equivalent of a per-layer CursorPos.x, saved/restored as we switch to the menu bar. The only situation when MenuBarOffset.y is > 0 if when (SafeAreaPadding.y > FramePadding.y), often used on TVs. + ImGuiMenuColumns MenuColumns; // Simplified columns storage for menu items measurement + int TreeDepth; // Current tree depth. + ImU32 TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask; // Store a copy of !g.NavIdIsAlive for TreeDepth 0..31.. Could be turned into a ImU64 if necessary. + ImVector ChildWindows; + ImGuiStorage* StateStorage; // Current persistent per-window storage (store e.g. tree node open/close state) + ImGuiOldColumns* CurrentColumns; // Current columns set + int CurrentTableIdx; // Current table index (into g.Tables) + ImGuiLayoutType LayoutType; + ImGuiLayoutType ParentLayoutType; // Layout type of parent window at the time of Begin() + + // Local parameters stacks + // We store the current settings outside of the vectors to increase memory locality (reduce cache misses). The vectors are rarely modified. Also it allows us to not heap allocate for short-lived windows which are not using those settings. + float ItemWidth; // Current item width (>0.0: width in pixels, <0.0: align xx pixels to the right of window). + float TextWrapPos; // Current text wrap pos. + ImVector ItemWidthStack; // Store item widths to restore (attention: .back() is not == ItemWidth) + ImVector TextWrapPosStack; // Store text wrap pos to restore (attention: .back() is not == TextWrapPos) +}; + +// Storage for one window +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow +{ + ImGuiContext* Ctx; // Parent UI context (needs to be set explicitly by parent). + char* Name; // Window name, owned by the window. + ImGuiID ID; // == ImHashStr(Name) + ImGuiWindowFlags Flags; // See enum ImGuiWindowFlags_ + ImGuiViewportP* Viewport; // Always set in Begin(). Inactive windows may have a NULL value here if their viewport was discarded. + ImVec2 Pos; // Position (always rounded-up to nearest pixel) + ImVec2 Size; // Current size (==SizeFull or collapsed title bar size) + ImVec2 SizeFull; // Size when non collapsed + ImVec2 ContentSize; // Size of contents/scrollable client area (calculated from the extents reach of the cursor) from previous frame. Does not include window decoration or window padding. + ImVec2 ContentSizeIdeal; + ImVec2 ContentSizeExplicit; // Size of contents/scrollable client area explicitly request by the user via SetNextWindowContentSize(). + ImVec2 WindowPadding; // Window padding at the time of Begin(). + float WindowRounding; // Window rounding at the time of Begin(). May be clamped lower to avoid rendering artifacts with title bar, menu bar etc. + float WindowBorderSize; // Window border size at the time of Begin(). + float DecoOuterSizeX1, DecoOuterSizeY1; // Left/Up offsets. Sum of non-scrolling outer decorations (X1 generally == 0.0f. Y1 generally = TitleBarHeight + MenuBarHeight). Locked during Begin(). + float DecoOuterSizeX2, DecoOuterSizeY2; // Right/Down offsets (X2 generally == ScrollbarSize.x, Y2 == ScrollbarSizes.y). + float DecoInnerSizeX1, DecoInnerSizeY1; // Applied AFTER/OVER InnerRect. Specialized for Tables as they use specialized form of clipping and frozen rows/columns are inside InnerRect (and not part of regular decoration sizes). + int NameBufLen; // Size of buffer storing Name. May be larger than strlen(Name)! + ImGuiID MoveId; // == window->GetID("#MOVE") + ImGuiID ChildId; // ID of corresponding item in parent window (for navigation to return from child window to parent window) + ImVec2 Scroll; + ImVec2 ScrollMax; + ImVec2 ScrollTarget; // target scroll position. stored as cursor position with scrolling canceled out, so the highest point is always 0.0f. (FLT_MAX for no change) + ImVec2 ScrollTargetCenterRatio; // 0.0f = scroll so that target position is at top, 0.5f = scroll so that target position is centered + ImVec2 ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist; // 0.0f = no snapping, >0.0f snapping threshold + ImVec2 ScrollbarSizes; // Size taken by each scrollbars on their smaller axis. Pay attention! ScrollbarSizes.x == width of the vertical scrollbar, ScrollbarSizes.y = height of the horizontal scrollbar. + bool ScrollbarX, ScrollbarY; // Are scrollbars visible? + bool Active; // Set to true on Begin(), unless Collapsed + bool WasActive; + bool WriteAccessed; // Set to true when any widget access the current window + bool Collapsed; // Set when collapsing window to become only title-bar + bool WantCollapseToggle; + bool SkipItems; // Set when items can safely be all clipped (e.g. window not visible or collapsed) + bool Appearing; // Set during the frame where the window is appearing (or re-appearing) + bool Hidden; // Do not display (== HiddenFrames*** > 0) + bool IsFallbackWindow; // Set on the "Debug##Default" window. + bool IsExplicitChild; // Set when passed _ChildWindow, left to false by BeginDocked() + bool HasCloseButton; // Set when the window has a close button (p_open != NULL) + signed char ResizeBorderHeld; // Current border being held for resize (-1: none, otherwise 0-3) + short BeginCount; // Number of Begin() during the current frame (generally 0 or 1, 1+ if appending via multiple Begin/End pairs) + short BeginCountPreviousFrame; // Number of Begin() during the previous frame + short BeginOrderWithinParent; // Begin() order within immediate parent window, if we are a child window. Otherwise 0. + short BeginOrderWithinContext; // Begin() order within entire imgui context. This is mostly used for debugging submission order related issues. + short FocusOrder; // Order within WindowsFocusOrder[], altered when windows are focused. + ImGuiID PopupId; // ID in the popup stack when this window is used as a popup/menu (because we use generic Name/ID for recycling) + ImS8 AutoFitFramesX, AutoFitFramesY; + ImS8 AutoFitChildAxises; + bool AutoFitOnlyGrows; + ImGuiDir AutoPosLastDirection; + ImS8 HiddenFramesCanSkipItems; // Hide the window for N frames + ImS8 HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems; // Hide the window for N frames while allowing items to be submitted so we can measure their size + ImS8 HiddenFramesForRenderOnly; // Hide the window until frame N at Render() time only + ImS8 DisableInputsFrames; // Disable window interactions for N frames + ImGuiCond SetWindowPosAllowFlags : 8; // store acceptable condition flags for SetNextWindowPos() use. + ImGuiCond SetWindowSizeAllowFlags : 8; // store acceptable condition flags for SetNextWindowSize() use. + ImGuiCond SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags : 8; // store acceptable condition flags for SetNextWindowCollapsed() use. + ImVec2 SetWindowPosVal; // store window position when using a non-zero Pivot (position set needs to be processed when we know the window size) + ImVec2 SetWindowPosPivot; // store window pivot for positioning. ImVec2(0, 0) when positioning from top-left corner; ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) for centering; ImVec2(1, 1) for bottom right. + + ImVector IDStack; // ID stack. ID are hashes seeded with the value at the top of the stack. (In theory this should be in the TempData structure) + ImGuiWindowTempData DC; // Temporary per-window data, reset at the beginning of the frame. This used to be called ImGuiDrawContext, hence the "DC" variable name. + + // The best way to understand what those rectangles are is to use the 'Metrics->Tools->Show Windows Rectangles' viewer. + // The main 'OuterRect', omitted as a field, is window->Rect(). + ImRect OuterRectClipped; // == Window->Rect() just after setup in Begin(). == window->Rect() for root window. + ImRect InnerRect; // Inner rectangle (omit title bar, menu bar, scroll bar) + ImRect InnerClipRect; // == InnerRect shrunk by WindowPadding*0.5f on each side, clipped within viewport or parent clip rect. + ImRect WorkRect; // Initially covers the whole scrolling region. Reduced by containers e.g columns/tables when active. Shrunk by WindowPadding*1.0f on each side. This is meant to replace ContentRegionRect over time (from 1.71+ onward). + ImRect ParentWorkRect; // Backup of WorkRect before entering a container such as columns/tables. Used by e.g. SpanAllColumns functions to easily access. Stacked containers are responsible for maintaining this. // FIXME-WORKRECT: Could be a stack? + ImRect ClipRect; // Current clipping/scissoring rectangle, evolve as we are using PushClipRect(), etc. == DrawList->clip_rect_stack.back(). + ImRect ContentRegionRect; // FIXME: This is currently confusing/misleading. It is essentially WorkRect but not handling of scrolling. We currently rely on it as right/bottom aligned sizing operation need some size to rely on. + ImVec2ih HitTestHoleSize; // Define an optional rectangular hole where mouse will pass-through the window. + ImVec2ih HitTestHoleOffset; + + int LastFrameActive; // Last frame number the window was Active. + float LastTimeActive; // Last timestamp the window was Active (using float as we don't need high precision there) + float ItemWidthDefault; + ImGuiStorage StateStorage; + ImVector ColumnsStorage; + float FontWindowScale; // User scale multiplier per-window, via SetWindowFontScale() + int SettingsOffset; // Offset into SettingsWindows[] (offsets are always valid as we only grow the array from the back) + + ImDrawList* DrawList; // == &DrawListInst (for backward compatibility reason with code using imgui_internal.h we keep this a pointer) + ImDrawList DrawListInst; + ImGuiWindow* ParentWindow; // If we are a child _or_ popup _or_ docked window, this is pointing to our parent. Otherwise NULL. + ImGuiWindow* ParentWindowInBeginStack; + ImGuiWindow* RootWindow; // Point to ourself or first ancestor that is not a child window. Doesn't cross through popups/dock nodes. + ImGuiWindow* RootWindowPopupTree; // Point to ourself or first ancestor that is not a child window. Cross through popups parent<>child. + ImGuiWindow* RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight; // Point to ourself or first ancestor which will display TitleBgActive color when this window is active. + ImGuiWindow* RootWindowForNav; // Point to ourself or first ancestor which doesn't have the NavFlattened flag. + + ImGuiWindow* NavLastChildNavWindow; // When going to the menu bar, we remember the child window we came from. (This could probably be made implicit if we kept g.Windows sorted by last focused including child window.) + ImGuiID NavLastIds[ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT]; // Last known NavId for this window, per layer (0/1) + ImRect NavRectRel[ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT]; // Reference rectangle, in window relative space + ImVec2 NavPreferredScoringPosRel[ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT]; // Preferred X/Y position updated when moving on a given axis, reset to FLT_MAX. + ImGuiID NavRootFocusScopeId; // Focus Scope ID at the time of Begin() + + int MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity; // Backup of last idx/vtx count, so when waking up the window we can preallocate and avoid iterative alloc/copy + int MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity; + bool MemoryCompacted; // Set when window extraneous data have been garbage collected + +public: + ImGuiWindow(ImGuiContext* context, const char* name); + ~ImGuiWindow(); + + ImGuiID GetID(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL); + ImGuiID GetID(const void* ptr); + ImGuiID GetID(int n); + ImGuiID GetIDFromRectangle(const ImRect& r_abs); + + // We don't use g.FontSize because the window may be != g.CurrentWindow. + ImRect Rect() const { return ImRect(Pos.x, Pos.y, Pos.x + Size.x, Pos.y + Size.y); } + float CalcFontSize() const { ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; float scale = g.FontBaseSize * FontWindowScale; if (ParentWindow) scale *= ParentWindow->FontWindowScale; return scale; } + float TitleBarHeight() const { ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; return (Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? 0.0f : CalcFontSize() + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f; } + ImRect TitleBarRect() const { return ImRect(Pos, ImVec2(Pos.x + SizeFull.x, Pos.y + TitleBarHeight())); } + float MenuBarHeight() const { ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; return (Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? DC.MenuBarOffset.y + CalcFontSize() + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f : 0.0f; } + ImRect MenuBarRect() const { float y1 = Pos.y + TitleBarHeight(); return ImRect(Pos.x, y1, Pos.x + SizeFull.x, y1 + MenuBarHeight()); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tab bar, Tab item support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Extend ImGuiTabBarFlags_ +enum ImGuiTabBarFlagsPrivate_ +{ + ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode = 1 << 20, // Part of a dock node [we don't use this in the master branch but it facilitate branch syncing to keep this around] + ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused = 1 << 21, + ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings = 1 << 22, // FIXME: Settings are handled by the docking system, this only request the tab bar to mark settings dirty when reordering tabs +}; + +// Extend ImGuiTabItemFlags_ +enum ImGuiTabItemFlagsPrivate_ +{ + ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_ = ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing, + ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton = 1 << 20, // Track whether p_open was set or not (we'll need this info on the next frame to recompute ContentWidth during layout) + ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button = 1 << 21, // Used by TabItemButton, change the tab item behavior to mimic a button +}; + +// Storage for one active tab item (sizeof() 40 bytes) +struct ImGuiTabItem +{ + ImGuiID ID; + ImGuiTabItemFlags Flags; + int LastFrameVisible; + int LastFrameSelected; // This allows us to infer an ordered list of the last activated tabs with little maintenance + float Offset; // Position relative to beginning of tab + float Width; // Width currently displayed + float ContentWidth; // Width of label, stored during BeginTabItem() call + float RequestedWidth; // Width optionally requested by caller, -1.0f is unused + ImS32 NameOffset; // When Window==NULL, offset to name within parent ImGuiTabBar::TabsNames + ImS16 BeginOrder; // BeginTabItem() order, used to re-order tabs after toggling ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable + ImS16 IndexDuringLayout; // Index only used during TabBarLayout(). Tabs gets reordered so 'Tabs[n].IndexDuringLayout == n' but may mismatch during additions. + bool WantClose; // Marked as closed by SetTabItemClosed() + + ImGuiTabItem() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); LastFrameVisible = LastFrameSelected = -1; RequestedWidth = -1.0f; NameOffset = -1; BeginOrder = IndexDuringLayout = -1; } +}; + +// Storage for a tab bar (sizeof() 152 bytes) +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTabBar +{ + ImVector Tabs; + ImGuiTabBarFlags Flags; + ImGuiID ID; // Zero for tab-bars used by docking + ImGuiID SelectedTabId; // Selected tab/window + ImGuiID NextSelectedTabId; // Next selected tab/window. Will also trigger a scrolling animation + ImGuiID VisibleTabId; // Can occasionally be != SelectedTabId (e.g. when previewing contents for CTRL+TAB preview) + int CurrFrameVisible; + int PrevFrameVisible; + ImRect BarRect; + float CurrTabsContentsHeight; + float PrevTabsContentsHeight; // Record the height of contents submitted below the tab bar + float WidthAllTabs; // Actual width of all tabs (locked during layout) + float WidthAllTabsIdeal; // Ideal width if all tabs were visible and not clipped + float ScrollingAnim; + float ScrollingTarget; + float ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility; + float ScrollingSpeed; + float ScrollingRectMinX; + float ScrollingRectMaxX; + ImGuiID ReorderRequestTabId; + ImS16 ReorderRequestOffset; + ImS8 BeginCount; + bool WantLayout; + bool VisibleTabWasSubmitted; + bool TabsAddedNew; // Set to true when a new tab item or button has been added to the tab bar during last frame + ImS16 TabsActiveCount; // Number of tabs submitted this frame. + ImS16 LastTabItemIdx; // Index of last BeginTabItem() tab for use by EndTabItem() + float ItemSpacingY; + ImVec2 FramePadding; // style.FramePadding locked at the time of BeginTabBar() + ImVec2 BackupCursorPos; + ImGuiTextBuffer TabsNames; // For non-docking tab bar we re-append names in a contiguous buffer. + + ImGuiTabBar(); +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Table support +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#define IM_COL32_DISABLE IM_COL32(0,0,0,1) // Special sentinel code which cannot be used as a regular color. +#define IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_COLUMNS 512 // May be further lifted + +// Our current column maximum is 64 but we may raise that in the future. +typedef ImS16 ImGuiTableColumnIdx; +typedef ImU16 ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx; + +// [Internal] sizeof() ~ 112 +// We use the terminology "Enabled" to refer to a column that is not Hidden by user/api. +// We use the terminology "Clipped" to refer to a column that is out of sight because of scrolling/clipping. +// This is in contrast with some user-facing api such as IsItemVisible() / IsRectVisible() which use "Visible" to mean "not clipped". +struct ImGuiTableColumn +{ + ImGuiTableColumnFlags Flags; // Flags after some patching (not directly same as provided by user). See ImGuiTableColumnFlags_ + float WidthGiven; // Final/actual width visible == (MaxX - MinX), locked in TableUpdateLayout(). May be > WidthRequest to honor minimum width, may be < WidthRequest to honor shrinking columns down in tight space. + float MinX; // Absolute positions + float MaxX; + float WidthRequest; // Master width absolute value when !(Flags & _WidthStretch). When Stretch this is derived every frame from StretchWeight in TableUpdateLayout() + float WidthAuto; // Automatic width + float StretchWeight; // Master width weight when (Flags & _WidthStretch). Often around ~1.0f initially. + float InitStretchWeightOrWidth; // Value passed to TableSetupColumn(). For Width it is a content width (_without padding_). + ImRect ClipRect; // Clipping rectangle for the column + ImGuiID UserID; // Optional, value passed to TableSetupColumn() + float WorkMinX; // Contents region min ~(MinX + CellPaddingX + CellSpacingX1) == cursor start position when entering column + float WorkMaxX; // Contents region max ~(MaxX - CellPaddingX - CellSpacingX2) + float ItemWidth; // Current item width for the column, preserved across rows + float ContentMaxXFrozen; // Contents maximum position for frozen rows (apart from headers), from which we can infer content width. + float ContentMaxXUnfrozen; + float ContentMaxXHeadersUsed; // Contents maximum position for headers rows (regardless of freezing). TableHeader() automatically softclip itself + report ideal desired size, to avoid creating extraneous draw calls + float ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal; + ImS16 NameOffset; // Offset into parent ColumnsNames[] + ImGuiTableColumnIdx DisplayOrder; // Index within Table's IndexToDisplayOrder[] (column may be reordered by users) + ImGuiTableColumnIdx IndexWithinEnabledSet; // Index within enabled/visible set (<= IndexToDisplayOrder) + ImGuiTableColumnIdx PrevEnabledColumn; // Index of prev enabled/visible column within Columns[], -1 if first enabled/visible column + ImGuiTableColumnIdx NextEnabledColumn; // Index of next enabled/visible column within Columns[], -1 if last enabled/visible column + ImGuiTableColumnIdx SortOrder; // Index of this column within sort specs, -1 if not sorting on this column, 0 for single-sort, may be >0 on multi-sort + ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx DrawChannelCurrent; // Index within DrawSplitter.Channels[] + ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx DrawChannelFrozen; // Draw channels for frozen rows (often headers) + ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx DrawChannelUnfrozen; // Draw channels for unfrozen rows + bool IsEnabled; // IsUserEnabled && (Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled) == 0 + bool IsUserEnabled; // Is the column not marked Hidden by the user? (unrelated to being off view, e.g. clipped by scrolling). + bool IsUserEnabledNextFrame; + bool IsVisibleX; // Is actually in view (e.g. overlapping the host window clipping rectangle, not scrolled). + bool IsVisibleY; + bool IsRequestOutput; // Return value for TableSetColumnIndex() / TableNextColumn(): whether we request user to output contents or not. + bool IsSkipItems; // Do we want item submissions to this column to be completely ignored (no layout will happen). + bool IsPreserveWidthAuto; + ImS8 NavLayerCurrent; // ImGuiNavLayer in 1 byte + ImU8 AutoFitQueue; // Queue of 8 values for the next 8 frames to request auto-fit + ImU8 CannotSkipItemsQueue; // Queue of 8 values for the next 8 frames to disable Clipped/SkipItem + ImU8 SortDirection : 2; // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending + ImU8 SortDirectionsAvailCount : 2; // Number of available sort directions (0 to 3) + ImU8 SortDirectionsAvailMask : 4; // Mask of available sort directions (1-bit each) + ImU8 SortDirectionsAvailList; // Ordered list of available sort directions (2-bits each, total 8-bits) + + ImGuiTableColumn() + { + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); + StretchWeight = WidthRequest = -1.0f; + NameOffset = -1; + DisplayOrder = IndexWithinEnabledSet = -1; + PrevEnabledColumn = NextEnabledColumn = -1; + SortOrder = -1; + SortDirection = ImGuiSortDirection_None; + DrawChannelCurrent = DrawChannelFrozen = DrawChannelUnfrozen = (ImU8)-1; + } +}; + +// Transient cell data stored per row. +// sizeof() ~ 6 +struct ImGuiTableCellData +{ + ImU32 BgColor; // Actual color + ImGuiTableColumnIdx Column; // Column number +}; + +// Per-instance data that needs preserving across frames (seemingly most others do not need to be preserved aside from debug needs. Does that means they could be moved to ImGuiTableTempData?) +struct ImGuiTableInstanceData +{ + ImGuiID TableInstanceID; + float LastOuterHeight; // Outer height from last frame + float LastFirstRowHeight; // Height of first row from last frame (FIXME: this is used as "header height" and may be reworked) + float LastFrozenHeight; // Height of frozen section from last frame + int HoveredRowLast; // Index of row which was hovered last frame. + int HoveredRowNext; // Index of row hovered this frame, set after encountering it. + + ImGuiTableInstanceData() { TableInstanceID = 0; LastOuterHeight = LastFirstRowHeight = LastFrozenHeight = 0.0f; HoveredRowLast = HoveredRowNext = -1; } +}; + +// FIXME-TABLE: more transient data could be stored in a stacked ImGuiTableTempData: e.g. SortSpecs, incoming RowData +// sizeof() ~ 580 bytes + heap allocs described in TableBeginInitMemory() +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTable +{ + ImGuiID ID; + ImGuiTableFlags Flags; + void* RawData; // Single allocation to hold Columns[], DisplayOrderToIndex[] and RowCellData[] + ImGuiTableTempData* TempData; // Transient data while table is active. Point within g.CurrentTableStack[] + ImSpan Columns; // Point within RawData[] + ImSpan DisplayOrderToIndex; // Point within RawData[]. Store display order of columns (when not reordered, the values are 0...Count-1) + ImSpan RowCellData; // Point within RawData[]. Store cells background requests for current row. + ImBitArrayPtr EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder; // Column DisplayOrder -> IsEnabled map + ImBitArrayPtr EnabledMaskByIndex; // Column Index -> IsEnabled map (== not hidden by user/api) in a format adequate for iterating column without touching cold data + ImBitArrayPtr VisibleMaskByIndex; // Column Index -> IsVisibleX|IsVisibleY map (== not hidden by user/api && not hidden by scrolling/cliprect) + ImGuiTableFlags SettingsLoadedFlags; // Which data were loaded from the .ini file (e.g. when order is not altered we won't save order) + int SettingsOffset; // Offset in g.SettingsTables + int LastFrameActive; + int ColumnsCount; // Number of columns declared in BeginTable() + int CurrentRow; + int CurrentColumn; + ImS16 InstanceCurrent; // Count of BeginTable() calls with same ID in the same frame (generally 0). This is a little bit similar to BeginCount for a window, but multiple table with same ID look are multiple tables, they are just synched. + ImS16 InstanceInteracted; // Mark which instance (generally 0) of the same ID is being interacted with + float RowPosY1; + float RowPosY2; + float RowMinHeight; // Height submitted to TableNextRow() + float RowCellPaddingY; // Top and bottom padding. Reloaded during row change. + float RowTextBaseline; + float RowIndentOffsetX; + ImGuiTableRowFlags RowFlags : 16; // Current row flags, see ImGuiTableRowFlags_ + ImGuiTableRowFlags LastRowFlags : 16; + int RowBgColorCounter; // Counter for alternating background colors (can be fast-forwarded by e.g clipper), not same as CurrentRow because header rows typically don't increase this. + ImU32 RowBgColor[2]; // Background color override for current row. + ImU32 BorderColorStrong; + ImU32 BorderColorLight; + float BorderX1; + float BorderX2; + float HostIndentX; + float MinColumnWidth; + float OuterPaddingX; + float CellPaddingX; // Padding from each borders. Locked in BeginTable()/Layout. + float CellSpacingX1; // Spacing between non-bordered cells. Locked in BeginTable()/Layout. + float CellSpacingX2; + float InnerWidth; // User value passed to BeginTable(), see comments at the top of BeginTable() for details. + float ColumnsGivenWidth; // Sum of current column width + float ColumnsAutoFitWidth; // Sum of ideal column width in order nothing to be clipped, used for auto-fitting and content width submission in outer window + float ColumnsStretchSumWeights; // Sum of weight of all enabled stretching columns + float ResizedColumnNextWidth; + float ResizeLockMinContentsX2; // Lock minimum contents width while resizing down in order to not create feedback loops. But we allow growing the table. + float RefScale; // Reference scale to be able to rescale columns on font/dpi changes. + ImRect OuterRect; // Note: for non-scrolling table, OuterRect.Max.y is often FLT_MAX until EndTable(), unless a height has been specified in BeginTable(). + ImRect InnerRect; // InnerRect but without decoration. As with OuterRect, for non-scrolling tables, InnerRect.Max.y is + ImRect WorkRect; + ImRect InnerClipRect; + ImRect BgClipRect; // We use this to cpu-clip cell background color fill, evolve during the frame as we cross frozen rows boundaries + ImRect Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd; // Actual ImDrawCmd clip rect for BG0/1 channel. This tends to be == OuterWindow->ClipRect at BeginTable() because output in BG0/BG1 is cpu-clipped + ImRect Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd; // Actual ImDrawCmd clip rect for BG2 channel. This tends to be a correct, tight-fit, because output to BG2 are done by widgets relying on regular ClipRect. + ImRect HostClipRect; // This is used to check if we can eventually merge our columns draw calls into the current draw call of the current window. + ImRect HostBackupInnerClipRect; // Backup of InnerWindow->ClipRect during PushTableBackground()/PopTableBackground() + ImGuiWindow* OuterWindow; // Parent window for the table + ImGuiWindow* InnerWindow; // Window holding the table data (== OuterWindow or a child window) + ImGuiTextBuffer ColumnsNames; // Contiguous buffer holding columns names + ImDrawListSplitter* DrawSplitter; // Shortcut to TempData->DrawSplitter while in table. Isolate draw commands per columns to avoid switching clip rect constantly + ImGuiTableInstanceData InstanceDataFirst; + ImVector InstanceDataExtra; // FIXME-OPT: Using a small-vector pattern would be good. + ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs SortSpecsSingle; + ImVector SortSpecsMulti; // FIXME-OPT: Using a small-vector pattern would be good. + ImGuiTableSortSpecs SortSpecs; // Public facing sorts specs, this is what we return in TableGetSortSpecs() + ImGuiTableColumnIdx SortSpecsCount; + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ColumnsEnabledCount; // Number of enabled columns (<= ColumnsCount) + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ColumnsEnabledFixedCount; // Number of enabled columns (<= ColumnsCount) + ImGuiTableColumnIdx DeclColumnsCount; // Count calls to TableSetupColumn() + ImGuiTableColumnIdx HoveredColumnBody; // Index of column whose visible region is being hovered. Important: == ColumnsCount when hovering empty region after the right-most column! + ImGuiTableColumnIdx HoveredColumnBorder; // Index of column whose right-border is being hovered (for resizing). + ImGuiTableColumnIdx AutoFitSingleColumn; // Index of single column requesting auto-fit. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ResizedColumn; // Index of column being resized. Reset when InstanceCurrent==0. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx LastResizedColumn; // Index of column being resized from previous frame. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx HeldHeaderColumn; // Index of column header being held. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ReorderColumn; // Index of column being reordered. (not cleared) + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ReorderColumnDir; // -1 or +1 + ImGuiTableColumnIdx LeftMostEnabledColumn; // Index of left-most non-hidden column. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx RightMostEnabledColumn; // Index of right-most non-hidden column. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx LeftMostStretchedColumn; // Index of left-most stretched column. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx RightMostStretchedColumn; // Index of right-most stretched column. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ContextPopupColumn; // Column right-clicked on, of -1 if opening context menu from a neutral/empty spot + ImGuiTableColumnIdx FreezeRowsRequest; // Requested frozen rows count + ImGuiTableColumnIdx FreezeRowsCount; // Actual frozen row count (== FreezeRowsRequest, or == 0 when no scrolling offset) + ImGuiTableColumnIdx FreezeColumnsRequest; // Requested frozen columns count + ImGuiTableColumnIdx FreezeColumnsCount; // Actual frozen columns count (== FreezeColumnsRequest, or == 0 when no scrolling offset) + ImGuiTableColumnIdx RowCellDataCurrent; // Index of current RowCellData[] entry in current row + ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx DummyDrawChannel; // Redirect non-visible columns here. + ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx Bg2DrawChannelCurrent; // For Selectable() and other widgets drawing across columns after the freezing line. Index within DrawSplitter.Channels[] + ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen; + bool IsLayoutLocked; // Set by TableUpdateLayout() which is called when beginning the first row. + bool IsInsideRow; // Set when inside TableBeginRow()/TableEndRow(). + bool IsInitializing; + bool IsSortSpecsDirty; + bool IsUsingHeaders; // Set when the first row had the ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers flag. + bool IsContextPopupOpen; // Set when default context menu is open (also see: ContextPopupColumn, InstanceInteracted). + bool IsSettingsRequestLoad; + bool IsSettingsDirty; // Set when table settings have changed and needs to be reported into ImGuiTableSetttings data. + bool IsDefaultDisplayOrder; // Set when display order is unchanged from default (DisplayOrder contains 0...Count-1) + bool IsResetAllRequest; + bool IsResetDisplayOrderRequest; + bool IsUnfrozenRows; // Set when we got past the frozen row. + bool IsDefaultSizingPolicy; // Set if user didn't explicitly set a sizing policy in BeginTable() + bool HasScrollbarYCurr; // Whether ANY instance of this table had a vertical scrollbar during the current frame. + bool HasScrollbarYPrev; // Whether ANY instance of this table had a vertical scrollbar during the previous. + bool MemoryCompacted; + bool HostSkipItems; // Backup of InnerWindow->SkipItem at the end of BeginTable(), because we will overwrite InnerWindow->SkipItem on a per-column basis + + ImGuiTable() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); LastFrameActive = -1; } + ~ImGuiTable() { IM_FREE(RawData); } +}; + +// Transient data that are only needed between BeginTable() and EndTable(), those buffers are shared (1 per level of stacked table). +// - Accessing those requires chasing an extra pointer so for very frequently used data we leave them in the main table structure. +// - We also leave out of this structure data that tend to be particularly useful for debugging/metrics. +// sizeof() ~ 112 bytes. +struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTableTempData +{ + int TableIndex; // Index in g.Tables.Buf[] pool + float LastTimeActive; // Last timestamp this structure was used + + ImVec2 UserOuterSize; // outer_size.x passed to BeginTable() + ImDrawListSplitter DrawSplitter; + + ImRect HostBackupWorkRect; // Backup of InnerWindow->WorkRect at the end of BeginTable() + ImRect HostBackupParentWorkRect; // Backup of InnerWindow->ParentWorkRect at the end of BeginTable() + ImVec2 HostBackupPrevLineSize; // Backup of InnerWindow->DC.PrevLineSize at the end of BeginTable() + ImVec2 HostBackupCurrLineSize; // Backup of InnerWindow->DC.CurrLineSize at the end of BeginTable() + ImVec2 HostBackupCursorMaxPos; // Backup of InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos at the end of BeginTable() + ImVec1 HostBackupColumnsOffset; // Backup of OuterWindow->DC.ColumnsOffset at the end of BeginTable() + float HostBackupItemWidth; // Backup of OuterWindow->DC.ItemWidth at the end of BeginTable() + int HostBackupItemWidthStackSize;//Backup of OuterWindow->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size at the end of BeginTable() + + ImGuiTableTempData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); LastTimeActive = -1.0f; } +}; + +// sizeof() ~ 12 +struct ImGuiTableColumnSettings +{ + float WidthOrWeight; + ImGuiID UserID; + ImGuiTableColumnIdx Index; + ImGuiTableColumnIdx DisplayOrder; + ImGuiTableColumnIdx SortOrder; + ImU8 SortDirection : 2; + ImU8 IsEnabled : 1; // "Visible" in ini file + ImU8 IsStretch : 1; + + ImGuiTableColumnSettings() + { + WidthOrWeight = 0.0f; + UserID = 0; + Index = -1; + DisplayOrder = SortOrder = -1; + SortDirection = ImGuiSortDirection_None; + IsEnabled = 1; + IsStretch = 0; + } +}; + +// This is designed to be stored in a single ImChunkStream (1 header followed by N ImGuiTableColumnSettings, etc.) +struct ImGuiTableSettings +{ + ImGuiID ID; // Set to 0 to invalidate/delete the setting + ImGuiTableFlags SaveFlags; // Indicate data we want to save using the Resizable/Reorderable/Sortable/Hideable flags (could be using its own flags..) + float RefScale; // Reference scale to be able to rescale columns on font/dpi changes. + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ColumnsCount; + ImGuiTableColumnIdx ColumnsCountMax; // Maximum number of columns this settings instance can store, we can recycle a settings instance with lower number of columns but not higher + bool WantApply; // Set when loaded from .ini data (to enable merging/loading .ini data into an already running context) + + ImGuiTableSettings() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } + ImGuiTableColumnSettings* GetColumnSettings() { return (ImGuiTableColumnSettings*)(this + 1); } +}; + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImGui internal API +// No guarantee of forward compatibility here! +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +namespace ImGui +{ + // Windows + // We should always have a CurrentWindow in the stack (there is an implicit "Debug" window) + // If this ever crash because g.CurrentWindow is NULL it means that either + // - ImGui::NewFrame() has never been called, which is illegal. + // - You are calling ImGui functions after ImGui::EndFrame()/ImGui::Render() and before the next ImGui::NewFrame(), which is also illegal. + inline ImGuiWindow* GetCurrentWindowRead() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentWindow; } + inline ImGuiWindow* GetCurrentWindow() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed = true; return g.CurrentWindow; } + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* FindWindowByID(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* FindWindowByName(const char* name); + IMGUI_API void UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcWindowNextAutoFitSize(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent, bool popup_hierarchy); + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent); + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowAbove(ImGuiWindow* potential_above, ImGuiWindow* potential_below); + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0); + IMGUI_API void SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0); + IMGUI_API void SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0); + IMGUI_API void SetWindowHitTestHole(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& size); + IMGUI_API void SetWindowHiddendAndSkipItemsForCurrentFrame(ImGuiWindow* window); + inline ImRect WindowRectAbsToRel(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& r) { ImVec2 off = window->DC.CursorStartPos; return ImRect(r.Min.x - off.x, r.Min.y - off.y, r.Max.x - off.x, r.Max.y - off.y); } + inline ImRect WindowRectRelToAbs(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& r) { ImVec2 off = window->DC.CursorStartPos; return ImRect(r.Min.x + off.x, r.Min.y + off.y, r.Max.x + off.x, r.Max.y + off.y); } + inline ImVec2 WindowPosRelToAbs(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& p) { ImVec2 off = window->DC.CursorStartPos; return ImVec2(p.x + off.x, p.y + off.y); } + + // Windows: Display Order and Focus Order + IMGUI_API void FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(ImGuiWindow* under_this_window, ImGuiWindow* ignore_window, ImGuiViewport* filter_viewport, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags flags); + IMGUI_API void BringWindowToFocusFront(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void BringWindowToDisplayFront(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void BringWindowToDisplayBack(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void BringWindowToDisplayBehind(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* above_window); + IMGUI_API int FindWindowDisplayIndex(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* FindBottomMostVisibleWindowWithinBeginStack(ImGuiWindow* window); + + // Fonts, drawing + IMGUI_API void SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font); + inline ImFont* GetDefaultFont() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.IO.FontDefault ? g.IO.FontDefault : g.IO.Fonts->Fonts[0]; } + inline ImDrawList* GetForegroundDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window) { IM_UNUSED(window); return GetForegroundDrawList(); } // This seemingly unnecessary wrapper simplifies compatibility between the 'master' and 'docking' branches. + IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetBackgroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport); // get background draw list for the given viewport. this draw list will be the first rendering one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text behind dear imgui contents. + IMGUI_API ImDrawList* GetForegroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport); // get foreground draw list for the given viewport. this draw list will be the last rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text over dear imgui contents. + IMGUI_API void AddDrawListToDrawDataEx(ImDrawData* draw_data, ImVector* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list); + + // Init + IMGUI_API void Initialize(); + IMGUI_API void Shutdown(); // Since 1.60 this is a _private_ function. You can call DestroyContext() to destroy the context created by CreateContext(). + + // NewFrame + IMGUI_API void UpdateInputEvents(bool trickle_fast_inputs); + IMGUI_API void UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags(); + IMGUI_API void StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame(); + IMGUI_API void UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame(); + + // Generic context hooks + IMGUI_API ImGuiID AddContextHook(ImGuiContext* context, const ImGuiContextHook* hook); + IMGUI_API void RemoveContextHook(ImGuiContext* context, ImGuiID hook_to_remove); + IMGUI_API void CallContextHooks(ImGuiContext* context, ImGuiContextHookType type); + + // Viewports + IMGUI_API void SetWindowViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport); + + // Settings + IMGUI_API void MarkIniSettingsDirty(); + IMGUI_API void MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void ClearIniSettings(); + IMGUI_API void AddSettingsHandler(const ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler); + IMGUI_API void RemoveSettingsHandler(const char* type_name); + IMGUI_API ImGuiSettingsHandler* FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name); + + // Settings - Windows + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings* CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name); + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings* FindWindowSettingsByID(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings* FindWindowSettingsByWindow(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void ClearWindowSettings(const char* name); + + // Localization + IMGUI_API void LocalizeRegisterEntries(const ImGuiLocEntry* entries, int count); + inline const char* LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey key) { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; const char* msg = g.LocalizationTable[key]; return msg ? msg : "*Missing Text*"; } + + // Scrolling + IMGUI_API void SetScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_x); + IMGUI_API void SetScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_y); + IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosX(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_x, float center_x_ratio); + IMGUI_API void SetScrollFromPosY(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_y, float center_y_ratio); + + // Early work-in-progress API (ScrollToItem() will become public) + IMGUI_API void ScrollToItem(ImGuiScrollFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void ScrollToRect(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 ScrollToRectEx(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags = 0); +//#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + inline void ScrollToBringRectIntoView(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& rect) { ScrollToRect(window, rect, ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY); } +//#endif + + // Basic Accessors + inline ImGuiItemStatusFlags GetItemStatusFlags(){ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.LastItemData.StatusFlags; } + inline ImGuiItemFlags GetItemFlags() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.LastItemData.InFlags; } + inline ImGuiID GetActiveID() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.ActiveId; } + inline ImGuiID GetFocusID() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.NavId; } + IMGUI_API void SetActiveID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void SetFocusID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void ClearActiveID(); + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetHoveredID(); + IMGUI_API void SetHoveredID(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API void KeepAliveID(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API void MarkItemEdited(ImGuiID id); // Mark data associated to given item as "edited", used by IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() function. + IMGUI_API void PushOverrideID(ImGuiID id); // Push given value as-is at the top of the ID stack (whereas PushID combines old and new hashes) + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetIDWithSeed(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end, ImGuiID seed); + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetIDWithSeed(int n, ImGuiID seed); + + // Basic Helpers for widget code + IMGUI_API void ItemSize(const ImVec2& size, float text_baseline_y = -1.0f); + inline void ItemSize(const ImRect& bb, float text_baseline_y = -1.0f) { ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), text_baseline_y); } // FIXME: This is a misleading API since we expect CursorPos to be bb.Min. + IMGUI_API bool ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb = NULL, ImGuiItemFlags extra_flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiItemFlags item_flags); + IMGUI_API bool IsWindowContentHoverable(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiHoveredFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API void SetLastItemData(ImGuiID item_id, ImGuiItemFlags in_flags, ImGuiItemStatusFlags status_flags, const ImRect& item_rect); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_w, float default_h); + IMGUI_API float CalcWrapWidthForPos(const ImVec2& pos, float wrap_pos_x); + IMGUI_API void PushMultiItemsWidths(int components, float width_full); + IMGUI_API bool IsItemToggledSelection(); // Was the last item selection toggled? (after Selectable(), TreeNode() etc. We only returns toggle _event_ in order to handle clipping correctly) + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetContentRegionMaxAbs(); + IMGUI_API void ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* items, int count, float width_excess); + + // Parameter stacks (shared) + IMGUI_API void PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags option, bool enabled); + IMGUI_API void PopItemFlag(); + IMGUI_API const ImGuiDataVarInfo* GetStyleVarInfo(ImGuiStyleVar idx); + + // Logging/Capture + IMGUI_API void LogBegin(ImGuiLogType type, int auto_open_depth); // -> BeginCapture() when we design v2 api, for now stay under the radar by using the old name. + IMGUI_API void LogToBuffer(int auto_open_depth = -1); // Start logging/capturing to internal buffer + IMGUI_API void LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); + IMGUI_API void LogSetNextTextDecoration(const char* prefix, const char* suffix); + + // Popups, Modals, Tooltips + IMGUI_API bool BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags); + IMGUI_API void OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = ImGuiPopupFlags_None); + IMGUI_API void ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup); + IMGUI_API void ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup); + IMGUI_API void ClosePopupsExceptModals(); + IMGUI_API bool IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags); + IMGUI_API bool BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags); + IMGUI_API bool BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags tooltip_flags, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_window_flags); + IMGUI_API ImRect GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* GetTopMostPopupModal(); + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* GetTopMostAndVisiblePopupModal(); + IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow* FindBlockingModal(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy); + + // Menus + IMGUI_API bool BeginViewportSideBar(const char* name, ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiDir dir, float size, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags); + IMGUI_API bool BeginMenuEx(const char* label, const char* icon, bool enabled = true); + IMGUI_API bool MenuItemEx(const char* label, const char* icon, const char* shortcut = NULL, bool selected = false, bool enabled = true); + + // Combos + IMGUI_API bool BeginComboPopup(ImGuiID popup_id, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiComboFlags flags); + IMGUI_API bool BeginComboPreview(); + IMGUI_API void EndComboPreview(); + + // Gamepad/Keyboard Navigation + IMGUI_API void NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit); + IMGUI_API void NavInitRequestApplyResult(); + IMGUI_API bool NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet(); + IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags); + IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags); + IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result); + IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestResolveWithPastTreeNode(ImGuiNavItemData* result, ImGuiNavTreeNodeData* tree_node_data); + IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestCancel(); + IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestApplyResult(); + IMGUI_API void NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags); + IMGUI_API void NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis axis); + IMGUI_API void NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX(); + IMGUI_API void SetNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void SetNavID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer, ImGuiID focus_scope_id, const ImRect& rect_rel); + + // Focus/Activation + // This should be part of a larger set of API: FocusItem(offset = -1), FocusItemByID(id), ActivateItem(offset = -1), ActivateItemByID(id) etc. which are + // much harder to design and implement than expected. I have a couple of private branches on this matter but it's not simple. For now implementing the easy ones. + IMGUI_API void FocusItem(); // Focus last item (no selection/activation). + IMGUI_API void ActivateItemByID(ImGuiID id); // Activate an item by ID (button, checkbox, tree node etc.). Activation is queued and processed on the next frame when the item is encountered again. + + // Inputs + // FIXME: Eventually we should aim to move e.g. IsActiveIdUsingKey() into IsKeyXXX functions. + inline bool IsNamedKey(ImGuiKey key) { return key >= ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; } + inline bool IsNamedKeyOrModKey(ImGuiKey key) { return (key >= ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END) || key == ImGuiMod_Ctrl || key == ImGuiMod_Shift || key == ImGuiMod_Alt || key == ImGuiMod_Super || key == ImGuiMod_Shortcut; } + inline bool IsLegacyKey(ImGuiKey key) { return key >= ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; } + inline bool IsKeyboardKey(ImGuiKey key) { return key >= ImGuiKey_Keyboard_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_Keyboard_END; } + inline bool IsGamepadKey(ImGuiKey key) { return key >= ImGuiKey_Gamepad_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_Gamepad_END; } + inline bool IsMouseKey(ImGuiKey key) { return key >= ImGuiKey_Mouse_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_Mouse_END; } + inline bool IsAliasKey(ImGuiKey key) { return key >= ImGuiKey_Aliases_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_Aliases_END; } + inline ImGuiKeyChord ConvertShortcutMod(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord) { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(key_chord & ImGuiMod_Shortcut); return (key_chord & ~ImGuiMod_Shortcut) | (g.IO.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors ? ImGuiMod_Super : ImGuiMod_Ctrl); } + inline ImGuiKey ConvertSingleModFlagToKey(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiKey key) + { + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + if (key == ImGuiMod_Ctrl) return ImGuiKey_ReservedForModCtrl; + if (key == ImGuiMod_Shift) return ImGuiKey_ReservedForModShift; + if (key == ImGuiMod_Alt) return ImGuiKey_ReservedForModAlt; + if (key == ImGuiMod_Super) return ImGuiKey_ReservedForModSuper; + if (key == ImGuiMod_Shortcut) return (g.IO.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors ? ImGuiKey_ReservedForModSuper : ImGuiKey_ReservedForModCtrl); + return key; + } + + IMGUI_API ImGuiKeyData* GetKeyData(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiKey key); + inline ImGuiKeyData* GetKeyData(ImGuiKey key) { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return GetKeyData(&g, key); } + IMGUI_API void GetKeyChordName(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, char* out_buf, int out_buf_size); + inline ImGuiKey MouseButtonToKey(ImGuiMouseButton button) { IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT); return (ImGuiKey)(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft + button); } + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDragPastThreshold(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold = -1.0f); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetKeyMagnitude2d(ImGuiKey key_left, ImGuiKey key_right, ImGuiKey key_up, ImGuiKey key_down); + IMGUI_API float GetNavTweakPressedAmount(ImGuiAxis axis); + IMGUI_API int CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(float t0, float t1, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate); + IMGUI_API void GetTypematicRepeatRate(ImGuiInputFlags flags, float* repeat_delay, float* repeat_rate); + IMGUI_API void SetActiveIdUsingAllKeyboardKeys(); + inline bool IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir dir) { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask & (1 << dir)) != 0; } + + // [EXPERIMENTAL] Low-Level: Key/Input Ownership + // - The idea is that instead of "eating" a given input, we can link to an owner id. + // - Ownership is most often claimed as a result of reacting to a press/down event (but occasionally may be claimed ahead). + // - Input queries can then read input by specifying ImGuiKeyOwner_Any (== 0), ImGuiKeyOwner_None (== -1) or a custom ID. + // - Legacy input queries (without specifying an owner or _Any or _None) are equivalent to using ImGuiKeyOwner_Any (== 0). + // - Input ownership is automatically released on the frame after a key is released. Therefore: + // - for ownership registration happening as a result of a down/press event, the SetKeyOwner() call may be done once (common case). + // - for ownership registration happening ahead of a down/press event, the SetKeyOwner() call needs to be made every frame (happens if e.g. claiming ownership on hover). + // - SetItemKeyOwner() is a shortcut for common simple case. A custom widget will probably want to call SetKeyOwner() multiple times directly based on its interaction state. + // - This is marked experimental because not all widgets are fully honoring the Set/Test idioms. We will need to move forward step by step. + // Please open a GitHub Issue to submit your usage scenario or if there's a use case you need solved. + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key); + IMGUI_API void SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void SetKeyOwnersForKeyChord(ImGuiKeyChord key, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void SetItemKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0); // Set key owner to last item if it is hovered or active. Equivalent to 'if (IsItemHovered() || IsItemActive()) { SetKeyOwner(key, GetItemID());'. + IMGUI_API bool TestKeyOwner(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id); // Test that key is either not owned, either owned by 'owner_id' + inline ImGuiKeyOwnerData* GetKeyOwnerData(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiKey key) { if (key & ImGuiMod_Mask_) key = ConvertSingleModFlagToKey(ctx, key); IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key)); return &ctx->KeysOwnerData[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN]; } + + // [EXPERIMENTAL] High-Level: Input Access functions w/ support for Key/Input Ownership + // - Important: legacy IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey, bool repeat=true) _DEFAULTS_ to repeat, new IsKeyPressed() requires _EXPLICIT_ ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat flag. + // - Expected to be later promoted to public API, the prototypes are designed to replace existing ones (since owner_id can default to Any == 0) + // - Specifying a value for 'ImGuiID owner' will test that EITHER the key is NOT owned (UNLESS locked), EITHER the key is owned by 'owner'. + // Legacy functions use ImGuiKeyOwner_Any meaning that they typically ignore ownership, unless a call to SetKeyOwner() explicitly used ImGuiInputFlags_LockThisFrame or ImGuiInputFlags_LockUntilRelease. + // - Binding generators may want to ignore those for now, or suffix them with Ex() until we decide if this gets moved into public API. + IMGUI_API bool IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id); + IMGUI_API bool IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0); // Important: when transitioning from old to new IsKeyPressed(): old API has "bool repeat = true", so would default to repeat. New API requiress explicit ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat. + IMGUI_API bool IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiID owner_id); + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id); + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImGuiID owner_id); + + // [EXPERIMENTAL] Shortcut Routing + // - ImGuiKeyChord = a ImGuiKey optionally OR-red with ImGuiMod_Alt/ImGuiMod_Ctrl/ImGuiMod_Shift/ImGuiMod_Super. + // ImGuiKey_C (accepted by functions taking ImGuiKey or ImGuiKeyChord) + // ImGuiKey_C | ImGuiMod_Ctrl (accepted by functions taking ImGuiKeyChord) + // ONLY ImGuiMod_XXX values are legal to 'OR' with an ImGuiKey. You CANNOT 'OR' two ImGuiKey values. + // - When using one of the routing flags (e.g. ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused): routes requested ahead of time given a chord (key + modifiers) and a routing policy. + // - Routes are resolved during NewFrame(): if keyboard modifiers are matching current ones: SetKeyOwner() is called + route is granted for the frame. + // - Route is granted to a single owner. When multiple requests are made we have policies to select the winning route. + // - Multiple read sites may use the same owner id and will all get the granted route. + // - For routing: when owner_id is 0 we use the current Focus Scope ID as a default owner in order to identify our location. + IMGUI_API bool Shortcut(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id = 0, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool SetShortcutRouting(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id = 0, ImGuiInputFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool TestShortcutRouting(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord, ImGuiID owner_id); + IMGUI_API ImGuiKeyRoutingData* GetShortcutRoutingData(ImGuiKeyChord key_chord); + + // [EXPERIMENTAL] Focus Scope + // This is generally used to identify a unique input location (for e.g. a selection set) + // There is one per window (automatically set in Begin), but: + // - Selection patterns generally need to react (e.g. clear a selection) when landing on one item of the set. + // So in order to identify a set multiple lists in same window may each need a focus scope. + // If you imagine an hypothetical BeginSelectionGroup()/EndSelectionGroup() api, it would likely call PushFocusScope()/EndFocusScope() + // - Shortcut routing also use focus scope as a default location identifier if an owner is not provided. + // We don't use the ID Stack for this as it is common to want them separate. + IMGUI_API void PushFocusScope(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API void PopFocusScope(); + inline ImGuiID GetCurrentFocusScope() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentFocusScopeId; } // Focus scope we are outputting into, set by PushFocusScope() + + // Drag and Drop + IMGUI_API bool IsDragDropActive(); + IMGUI_API bool BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API void ClearDragDrop(); + IMGUI_API bool IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted(); + IMGUI_API void RenderDragDropTargetRect(const ImRect& bb); + + // Internal Columns API (this is not exposed because we will encourage transitioning to the Tables API) + IMGUI_API void SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& clip_rect); + IMGUI_API void BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int count, ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags = 0); // setup number of columns. use an identifier to distinguish multiple column sets. close with EndColumns(). + IMGUI_API void EndColumns(); // close columns + IMGUI_API void PushColumnClipRect(int column_index); + IMGUI_API void PushColumnsBackground(); + IMGUI_API void PopColumnsBackground(); + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetColumnsID(const char* str_id, int count); + IMGUI_API ImGuiOldColumns* FindOrCreateColumns(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API float GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset_norm); + IMGUI_API float GetColumnNormFromOffset(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset); + + // Tables: Candidates for public API + IMGUI_API void TableOpenContextMenu(int column_n = -1); + IMGUI_API void TableSetColumnWidth(int column_n, float width); + IMGUI_API void TableSetColumnSortDirection(int column_n, ImGuiSortDirection sort_direction, bool append_to_sort_specs); + IMGUI_API int TableGetHoveredColumn(); // May use (TableGetColumnFlags() & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered) instead. Return hovered column. return -1 when table is not hovered. return columns_count if the unused space at the right of visible columns is hovered. + IMGUI_API int TableGetHoveredRow(); // Retrieve *PREVIOUS FRAME* hovered row. This difference with TableGetHoveredColumn() is the reason why this is not public yet. + IMGUI_API float TableGetHeaderRowHeight(); + IMGUI_API void TablePushBackgroundChannel(); + IMGUI_API void TablePopBackgroundChannel(); + + // Tables: Internals + inline ImGuiTable* GetCurrentTable() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentTable; } + IMGUI_API ImGuiTable* TableFindByID(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API bool BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImGuiTableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& outer_size = ImVec2(0, 0), float inner_width = 0.0f); + IMGUI_API void TableBeginInitMemory(ImGuiTable* table, int columns_count); + IMGUI_API void TableBeginApplyRequests(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableSetupDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableUpdateBorders(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API bool TableBeginContextMenuPopup(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableMergeDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table); + inline ImGuiTableInstanceData* TableGetInstanceData(ImGuiTable* table, int instance_no) { if (instance_no == 0) return &table->InstanceDataFirst; return &table->InstanceDataExtra[instance_no - 1]; } + inline ImGuiID TableGetInstanceID(ImGuiTable* table, int instance_no) { return TableGetInstanceData(table, instance_no)->TableInstanceID; } + IMGUI_API void TableSortSpecsSanitize(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableSortSpecsBuild(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API ImGuiSortDirection TableGetColumnNextSortDirection(ImGuiTableColumn* column); + IMGUI_API void TableFixColumnSortDirection(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column); + IMGUI_API float TableGetColumnWidthAuto(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column); + IMGUI_API void TableBeginRow(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableBeginCell(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n); + IMGUI_API void TableEndCell(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API ImRect TableGetCellBgRect(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n); + IMGUI_API const char* TableGetColumnName(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n); + IMGUI_API ImGuiID TableGetColumnResizeID(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n, int instance_no = 0); + IMGUI_API float TableGetMaxColumnWidth(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n); + IMGUI_API void TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n); + IMGUI_API void TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableRemove(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTableTempData* table); + IMGUI_API void TableGcCompactSettings(); + + // Tables: Settings + IMGUI_API void TableLoadSettings(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableSaveSettings(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableResetSettings(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSettings* TableGetBoundSettings(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void TableSettingsAddSettingsHandler(); + IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSettings* TableSettingsCreate(ImGuiID id, int columns_count); + IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSettings* TableSettingsFindByID(ImGuiID id); + + // Tab Bars + inline ImGuiTabBar* GetCurrentTabBar() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentTabBar; } + IMGUI_API bool BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags); + IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id); + IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindTabByOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, int order); + IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarGetCurrentTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar); + inline int TabBarGetTabOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab) { return tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab); } + IMGUI_API const char* TabBarGetTabName(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab); + IMGUI_API void TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id); + IMGUI_API void TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab); + IMGUI_API void TabBarQueueFocus(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab); + IMGUI_API void TabBarQueueReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab, int offset); + IMGUI_API void TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab, ImVec2 mouse_pos); + IMGUI_API bool TabBarProcessReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar); + IMGUI_API bool TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* docked_window); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 TabItemCalcSize(const char* label, bool has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker); + IMGUI_API ImVec2 TabItemCalcSize(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col); + IMGUI_API void TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImVec2 frame_padding, const char* label, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiID close_button_id, bool is_contents_visible, bool* out_just_closed, bool* out_text_clipped); + + // Render helpers + // AVOID USING OUTSIDE OF IMGUI.CPP! NOT FOR PUBLIC CONSUMPTION. THOSE FUNCTIONS ARE A MESS. THEIR SIGNATURE AND BEHAVIOR WILL CHANGE, THEY NEED TO BE REFACTORED INTO SOMETHING DECENT. + // NB: All position are in absolute pixels coordinates (we are never using window coordinates internally) + IMGUI_API void RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_hash = true); + IMGUI_API void RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width); + IMGUI_API void RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImRect* clip_rect = NULL); + IMGUI_API void RenderTextClippedEx(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImRect* clip_rect = NULL); + IMGUI_API void RenderTextEllipsis(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, float clip_max_x, float ellipsis_max_x, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known); + IMGUI_API void RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border = true, float rounding = 0.0f); + IMGUI_API void RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding = 0.0f); + IMGUI_API void RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault); // Navigation highlight + IMGUI_API const char* FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // Find the optional ## from which we stop displaying text. + IMGUI_API void RenderMouseCursor(ImVec2 pos, float scale, ImGuiMouseCursor mouse_cursor, ImU32 col_fill, ImU32 col_border, ImU32 col_shadow); + + // Render helpers (those functions don't access any ImGui state!) + IMGUI_API void RenderArrow(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, ImGuiDir dir, float scale = 1.0f); + IMGUI_API void RenderBullet(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col); + IMGUI_API void RenderCheckMark(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz); + IMGUI_API void RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col); + IMGUI_API void RenderRectFilledRangeH(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& rect, ImU32 col, float x_start_norm, float x_end_norm, float rounding); + IMGUI_API void RenderRectFilledWithHole(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& outer, const ImRect& inner, ImU32 col, float rounding); + + // Widgets + IMGUI_API void TextEx(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, ImGuiTextFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API void SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags, float thickness = 1.0f); + IMGUI_API void SeparatorTextEx(ImGuiID id, const char* label, const char* label_end, float extra_width); + IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImS64* flags, ImS64 flags_value); + IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImU64* flags, ImU64 flags_value); + + // Widgets: Window Decorations + IMGUI_API bool CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos); + IMGUI_API bool CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos); + IMGUI_API void Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis axis); + IMGUI_API bool ScrollbarEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, ImS64* p_scroll_v, ImS64 avail_v, ImS64 contents_v, ImDrawFlags flags); + IMGUI_API ImRect GetWindowScrollbarRect(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis); + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetWindowScrollbarID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis); + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetWindowResizeCornerID(ImGuiWindow* window, int n); // 0..3: corners + IMGUI_API ImGuiID GetWindowResizeBorderID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDir dir); + + // Widgets low-level behaviors + IMGUI_API bool ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); + IMGUI_API bool DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags); + IMGUI_API bool SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb); + IMGUI_API bool SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend = 0.0f, float hover_visibility_delay = 0.0f, ImU32 bg_col = 0); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end = NULL); + IMGUI_API void TreePushOverrideID(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API void TreeNodeSetOpen(ImGuiID id, bool open); + IMGUI_API bool TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags); // Return open state. Consume previous SetNextItemOpen() data, if any. May return true when logging. + + // Template functions are instantiated in imgui_widgets.cpp for a finite number of types. + // To use them externally (for custom widget) you may need an "extern template" statement in your code in order to link to existing instances and silence Clang warnings (see #2036). + // e.g. " extern template IMGUI_API float RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, float v); " + template IMGUI_API float ScaleRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type, T v, T v_min, T v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_size); + template IMGUI_API T ScaleValueFromRatioT(ImGuiDataType data_type, float t, T v_min, T v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_size); + template IMGUI_API bool DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, T* v, float v_speed, T v_min, T v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags); + template IMGUI_API bool SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, T* v, T v_min, T v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb); + template IMGUI_API T RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, T v); + template IMGUI_API bool CheckboxFlagsT(const char* label, T* flags, T flags_value); + + // Data type helpers + IMGUI_API const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* DataTypeGetInfo(ImGuiDataType data_type); + IMGUI_API int DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* p_data, const char* format); + IMGUI_API void DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, const void* arg_1, const void* arg_2); + IMGUI_API bool DataTypeApplyFromText(const char* buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format); + IMGUI_API int DataTypeCompare(ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* arg_1, const void* arg_2); + IMGUI_API bool DataTypeClamp(ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max); + + // InputText + IMGUI_API bool InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL); + IMGUI_API void InputTextDeactivateHook(ImGuiID id); + IMGUI_API bool TempInputText(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags); + IMGUI_API bool TempInputScalar(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format, const void* p_clamp_min = NULL, const void* p_clamp_max = NULL); + inline bool TempInputIsActive(ImGuiID id) { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (g.ActiveId == id && g.TempInputId == id); } + inline ImGuiInputTextState* GetInputTextState(ImGuiID id) { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (id != 0 && g.InputTextState.ID == id) ? &g.InputTextState : NULL; } // Get input text state if active + + // Color + IMGUI_API void ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags); + IMGUI_API void ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags); + IMGUI_API void ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags); + + // Plot + IMGUI_API int PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, const ImVec2& size_arg); + + // Shade functions (write over already created vertices) + IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1); + IMGUI_API void ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp); + + // Garbage collection + IMGUI_API void GcCompactTransientMiscBuffers(); + IMGUI_API void GcCompactTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window); + IMGUI_API void GcAwakeTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window); + + // Debug Log + IMGUI_API void DebugLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1); + IMGUI_API void DebugLogV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1); + + // Debug Tools + IMGUI_API void ErrorCheckEndFrameRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data = NULL); + IMGUI_API void ErrorCheckEndWindowRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data = NULL); + IMGUI_API void ErrorCheckUsingSetCursorPosToExtendParentBoundaries(); + IMGUI_API void DebugDrawCursorPos(ImU32 col = IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); + IMGUI_API void DebugDrawLineExtents(ImU32 col = IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); + IMGUI_API void DebugDrawItemRect(ImU32 col = IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); + IMGUI_API void DebugLocateItem(ImGuiID target_id); // Call sparingly: only 1 at the same time! + IMGUI_API void DebugLocateItemOnHover(ImGuiID target_id); // Only call on reaction to a mouse Hover: because only 1 at the same time! + IMGUI_API void DebugLocateItemResolveWithLastItem(); + inline void DebugStartItemPicker() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; g.DebugItemPickerActive = true; } + IMGUI_API void ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas* atlas); + IMGUI_API void DebugHookIdInfo(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_id, const void* data_id_end); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeColumns(ImGuiOldColumns* columns); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const char* label); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(ImDrawList* out_draw_list, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd, bool show_mesh, bool show_aabb); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeFont(ImFont* font); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeFontGlyph(ImFont* font, const ImFontGlyph* glyph); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage, const char* label); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeTable(ImGuiTable* table); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeTableSettings(ImGuiTableSettings* settings); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeInputTextState(ImGuiInputTextState* state); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeWindowSettings(ImGuiWindowSettings* settings); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeWindowsList(ImVector* windows, const char* label); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(ImGuiWindow** windows, int windows_size, ImGuiWindow* parent_in_begin_stack); + IMGUI_API void DebugNodeViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport); + IMGUI_API void DebugRenderKeyboardPreview(ImDrawList* draw_list); + IMGUI_API void DebugRenderViewportThumbnail(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImRect& bb); + + // Obsolete functions +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + inline void SetItemUsingMouseWheel() { SetItemKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY); } // Changed in 1.89 + inline bool TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0) { return TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(id, flags); } // Renamed in 1.89 + + // Refactored focus/nav/tabbing system in 1.82 and 1.84. If you have old/custom copy-and-pasted widgets that used FocusableItemRegister(): + // (Old) IMGUI_VERSION_NUM < 18209: using 'ItemAdd(....)' and 'bool tab_focused = FocusableItemRegister(...)' + // (Old) IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18209: using 'ItemAdd(..., ImGuiItemAddFlags_Focusable)' and 'bool tab_focused = (GetItemStatusFlags() & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Focused) != 0' + // (New) IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18413: using 'ItemAdd(..., ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable)' and 'bool tab_focused = (GetItemStatusFlags() & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedTabbing) != 0 || (g.NavActivateId == id && (g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput))' (WIP) + // Widget code are simplified as there's no need to call FocusableItemUnregister() while managing the transition from regular widget to TempInputText() + inline bool FocusableItemRegister(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id) { IM_ASSERT(0); IM_UNUSED(window); IM_UNUSED(id); return false; } // -> pass ImGuiItemAddFlags_Inputable flag to ItemAdd() + inline void FocusableItemUnregister(ImGuiWindow* window) { IM_ASSERT(0); IM_UNUSED(window); } // -> unnecessary: TempInputText() uses ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem +#endif +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO + inline bool IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true) { IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key)); return IsKeyPressed(key, repeat); } // Removed in 1.87: Mapping from named key is always identity! +#endif + +} // namespace ImGui + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas internal API +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// This structure is likely to evolve as we add support for incremental atlas updates +struct ImFontBuilderIO +{ + bool (*FontBuilder_Build)(ImFontAtlas* atlas); +}; + +// Helper for font builder +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE +IMGUI_API const ImFontBuilderIO* ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype(); +#endif +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildInit(ImFontAtlas* atlas); +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(ImFontAtlas* atlas, ImFont* font, ImFontConfig* font_config, float ascent, float descent); +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque); +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(ImFontAtlas* atlas); +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned char in_marker_pixel_value); +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned int in_marker_pixel_value); +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(unsigned char out_table[256], float in_multiply_factor); +IMGUI_API void ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(const unsigned char table[256], unsigned char* pixels, int x, int y, int w, int h, int stride); + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Test Engine specific hooks (imgui_test_engine) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE +extern void ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id, const ImRect& bb, const ImGuiLastItemData* item_data); // item_data may be NULL +extern void ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiItemStatusFlags flags); +extern void ImGuiTestEngineHook_Log(ImGuiContext* ctx, const char* fmt, ...); +extern const char* ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id); + +// In IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18934: changed IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(bb,id) to IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(id,bb,item_data); +#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(_ID,_BB,_ITEM_DATA) if (g.TestEngineHookItems) ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(&g, _ID, _BB, _ITEM_DATA) // Register item bounding box +#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(_ID,_LABEL,_FLAGS) if (g.TestEngineHookItems) ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(&g, _ID, _LABEL, _FLAGS) // Register item label and status flags (optional) +#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_LOG(_FMT,...) if (g.TestEngineHookItems) ImGuiTestEngineHook_Log(&g, _FMT, __VA_ARGS__) // Custom log entry from user land into test log +#else +#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(_BB,_ID) ((void)0) +#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(_ID,_LABEL,_FLAGS) ((void)g) +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#if defined(__clang__) +#pragma clang diagnostic pop +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic pop +#endif + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (pop) +#endif + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_tables.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_tables.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8fdcbcf --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_tables.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,4146 @@ +// dear imgui, v1.89.9 +// (tables and columns code) + +/* + +Index of this file: + +// [SECTION] Commentary +// [SECTION] Header mess +// [SECTION] Tables: Main code +// [SECTION] Tables: Simple accessors +// [SECTION] Tables: Row changes +// [SECTION] Tables: Columns changes +// [SECTION] Tables: Columns width management +// [SECTION] Tables: Drawing +// [SECTION] Tables: Sorting +// [SECTION] Tables: Headers +// [SECTION] Tables: Context Menu +// [SECTION] Tables: Settings (.ini data) +// [SECTION] Tables: Garbage Collection +// [SECTION] Tables: Debugging +// [SECTION] Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc. + +*/ + +// Navigating this file: +// - In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot. +// - With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments. + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Commentary +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Typical tables call flow: (root level is generally public API): +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - BeginTable() user begin into a table +// | BeginChild() - (if ScrollX/ScrollY is set) +// | TableBeginInitMemory() - first time table is used +// | TableResetSettings() - on settings reset +// | TableLoadSettings() - on settings load +// | TableBeginApplyRequests() - apply queued resizing/reordering/hiding requests +// | - TableSetColumnWidth() - apply resizing width (for mouse resize, often requested by previous frame) +// | - TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth()- recompute columns weights (of stretch columns) from their respective width +// - TableSetupColumn() user submit columns details (optional) +// - TableSetupScrollFreeze() user submit scroll freeze information (optional) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableUpdateLayout() [Internal] followup to BeginTable(): setup everything: widths, columns positions, clipping rectangles. Automatically called by the FIRST call to TableNextRow() or TableHeadersRow(). +// | TableSetupDrawChannels() - setup ImDrawList channels +// | TableUpdateBorders() - detect hovering columns for resize, ahead of contents submission +// | TableDrawContextMenu() - draw right-click context menu +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableHeadersRow() or TableHeader() user submit a headers row (optional) +// | TableSortSpecsClickColumn() - when left-clicked: alter sort order and sort direction +// | TableOpenContextMenu() - when right-clicked: trigger opening of the default context menu +// - TableGetSortSpecs() user queries updated sort specs (optional, generally after submitting headers) +// - TableNextRow() user begin into a new row (also automatically called by TableHeadersRow()) +// | TableEndRow() - finish existing row +// | TableBeginRow() - add a new row +// - TableSetColumnIndex() / TableNextColumn() user begin into a cell +// | TableEndCell() - close existing column/cell +// | TableBeginCell() - enter into current column/cell +// - [...] user emit contents +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - EndTable() user ends the table +// | TableDrawBorders() - draw outer borders, inner vertical borders +// | TableMergeDrawChannels() - merge draw channels if clipping isn't required +// | EndChild() - (if ScrollX/ScrollY is set) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// TABLE SIZING +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// (Read carefully because this is subtle but it does make sense!) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About 'outer_size': +// Its meaning needs to differ slightly depending on if we are using ScrollX/ScrollY flags. +// Default value is ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f). +// X +// - outer_size.x <= 0.0f -> Right-align from window/work-rect right-most edge. With -FLT_MIN or 0.0f will align exactly on right-most edge. +// - outer_size.x > 0.0f -> Set Fixed width. +// Y with ScrollX/ScrollY disabled: we output table directly in current window +// - outer_size.y < 0.0f -> Bottom-align (but will auto extend, unless _NoHostExtendY is set). Not meaningful if parent window can vertically scroll. +// - outer_size.y = 0.0f -> No minimum height (but will auto extend, unless _NoHostExtendY is set) +// - outer_size.y > 0.0f -> Set Minimum height (but will auto extend, unless _NoHostExtendY is set) +// Y with ScrollX/ScrollY enabled: using a child window for scrolling +// - outer_size.y < 0.0f -> Bottom-align. Not meaningful if parent window can vertically scroll. +// - outer_size.y = 0.0f -> Bottom-align, consistent with BeginChild(). Not recommended unless table is last item in parent window. +// - outer_size.y > 0.0f -> Set Exact height. Recommended when using Scrolling on any axis. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Outer size is also affected by the NoHostExtendX/NoHostExtendY flags. +// Important to note how the two flags have slightly different behaviors! +// - ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX -> Make outer width auto-fit to columns (overriding outer_size.x value). Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used. +// - ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY -> Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit). Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY is disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible. +// In theory ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY could be the default and any non-scrolling tables with outer_size.y != 0.0f would use exact height. +// This would be consistent but perhaps less useful and more confusing (as vertically clipped items are not useful and not easily noticeable). +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About 'inner_width': +// With ScrollX disabled: +// - inner_width -> *ignored* +// With ScrollX enabled: +// - inner_width < 0.0f -> *illegal* fit in known width (right align from outer_size.x) <-- weird +// - inner_width = 0.0f -> fit in outer_width: Fixed size columns will take space they need (if avail, otherwise shrink down), Stretch columns becomes Fixed columns. +// - inner_width > 0.0f -> override scrolling width, generally to be larger than outer_size.x. Fixed column take space they need (if avail, otherwise shrink down), Stretch columns share remaining space! +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Details: +// - If you want to use Stretch columns with ScrollX, you generally need to specify 'inner_width' otherwise the concept +// of "available space" doesn't make sense. +// - Even if not really useful, we allow 'inner_width < outer_size.x' for consistency and to facilitate understanding +// of what the value does. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// COLUMNS SIZING POLICIES +// (Reference: ImGuiTableFlags_SizingXXX flags and ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthXXX flags) +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About overriding column sizing policy and width/weight with TableSetupColumn(): +// We use a default parameter of -1 for 'init_width'/'init_weight'. +// - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, init_width <= 0 (default) --> width is automatic +// - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, init_width > 0 (explicit) --> width is custom +// - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, init_weight <= 0 (default) --> weight is 1.0f +// - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, init_weight > 0 (explicit) --> weight is custom +// Widths are specified _without_ CellPadding. If you specify a width of 100.0f, the column will be cover (100.0f + Padding * 2.0f) +// and you can fit a 100.0f wide item in it without clipping and with padding honored. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About default sizing policy (if you don't specify a ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthXXXX flag) +// - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, default Width is equal to contents width +// - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, default Width is max of all contents width +// - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, default Weight is 1.0f +// - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchWeight --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, default Weight is proportional to contents +// Default Width and default Weight can be overridden when calling TableSetupColumn(). +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About mixing Fixed/Auto and Stretch columns together: +// - the typical use of mixing sizing policies is: any number of LEADING Fixed columns, followed by one or two TRAILING Stretch columns. +// - using mixed policies with ScrollX does not make much sense, as using Stretch columns with ScrollX does not make much sense in the first place! +// that is, unless 'inner_width' is passed to BeginTable() to explicitly provide a total width to layout columns in. +// - when using ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame with mixed columns, only the Fixed/Auto columns will match their widths to the width of the maximum contents. +// - when using ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame with mixed columns, only the Stretch columns will match their weights/widths. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About using column width: +// If a column is manually resizable or has a width specified with TableSetupColumn(): +// - you may use GetContentRegionAvail().x to query the width available in a given column. +// - right-side alignment features such as SetNextItemWidth(-x) or PushItemWidth(-x) will rely on this width. +// If the column is not resizable and has no width specified with TableSetupColumn(): +// - its width will be automatic and be set to the max of items submitted. +// - therefore you generally cannot have ALL items of the columns use e.g. SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN). +// - but if the column has one or more items of known/fixed size, this will become the reference width used by SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN). +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// TABLES CLIPPING/CULLING +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About clipping/culling of Rows in Tables: +// - For large numbers of rows, it is recommended you use ImGuiListClipper to submit only visible rows. +// ImGuiListClipper is reliant on the fact that rows are of equal height. +// See 'Demo->Tables->Vertical Scrolling' or 'Demo->Tables->Advanced' for a demo of using the clipper. +// - Note that auto-resizing columns don't play well with using the clipper. +// By default a table with _ScrollX but without _Resizable will have column auto-resize. +// So, if you want to use the clipper, make sure to either enable _Resizable, either setup columns width explicitly with _WidthFixed. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About clipping/culling of Columns in Tables: +// - Both TableSetColumnIndex() and TableNextColumn() return true when the column is visible or performing +// width measurements. Otherwise, you may skip submitting the contents of a cell/column, BUT ONLY if you know +// it is not going to contribute to row height. +// In many situations, you may skip submitting contents for every column but one (e.g. the first one). +// - Case A: column is not hidden by user, and at least partially in sight (most common case). +// - Case B: column is clipped / out of sight (because of scrolling or parent ClipRect): TableNextColumn() return false as a hint but we still allow layout output. +// - Case C: column is hidden explicitly by the user (e.g. via the context menu, or _DefaultHide column flag, etc.). +// +// [A] [B] [C] +// TableNextColumn(): true false false -> [userland] when TableNextColumn() / TableSetColumnIndex() returns false, user can skip submitting items but only if the column doesn't contribute to row height. +// SkipItems: false false true -> [internal] when SkipItems is true, most widgets will early out if submitted, resulting is no layout output. +// ClipRect: normal zero-width zero-width -> [internal] when ClipRect is zero, ItemAdd() will return false and most widgets will early out mid-way. +// ImDrawList output: normal dummy dummy -> [internal] when using the dummy channel, ImDrawList submissions (if any) will be wasted (because cliprect is zero-width anyway). +// +// - We need to distinguish those cases because non-hidden columns that are clipped outside of scrolling bounds should still contribute their height to the row. +// However, in the majority of cases, the contribution to row height is the same for all columns, or the tallest cells are known by the programmer. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// About clipping/culling of whole Tables: +// - Scrolling tables with a known outer size can be clipped earlier as BeginTable() will return false. +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Header mess +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS) +#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS +#endif + +#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#endif + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE +#include "imgui_internal.h" + +// System includes +#include // intptr_t + +// Visual Studio warnings +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant +#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later +#pragma warning (disable: 5054) // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types +#endif +#pragma warning (disable: 26451) // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2). +#pragma warning (disable: 26812) // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). +#endif + +// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything +#if defined(__clang__) +#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option") +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great! +#endif +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning: use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format string is not a string literal // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning: zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0 +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wenum-enum-conversion" // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion"// warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead +#endif + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Main code +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableFixFlags() [Internal] +// - TableFindByID() [Internal] +// - BeginTable() +// - BeginTableEx() [Internal] +// - TableBeginInitMemory() [Internal] +// - TableBeginApplyRequests() [Internal] +// - TableSetupColumnFlags() [Internal] +// - TableUpdateLayout() [Internal] +// - TableUpdateBorders() [Internal] +// - EndTable() +// - TableSetupColumn() +// - TableSetupScrollFreeze() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Configuration +static const int TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG0 = 0; +static const int TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN = 1; +static const int TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP = 2; // When using ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip (this becomes the last visible channel) +static const float TABLE_BORDER_SIZE = 1.0f; // FIXME-TABLE: Currently hard-coded because of clipping assumptions with outer borders rendering. +static const float TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS = 4.0f; // Extend outside inner borders. +static const float TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_FEEDBACK_TIMER = 0.06f; // Delay/timer before making the hover feedback (color+cursor) visible because tables/columns tends to be more cramped. + +// Helper +inline ImGuiTableFlags TableFixFlags(ImGuiTableFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* outer_window) +{ + // Adjust flags: set default sizing policy + if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == 0) + flags |= ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) || (outer_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) ? ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit : ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame; + + // Adjust flags: enable NoKeepColumnsVisible when using ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame + if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame) + flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible; + + // Adjust flags: enforce borders when resizable + if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) + flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV; + + // Adjust flags: disable NoHostExtendX/NoHostExtendY if we have any scrolling going on + if (flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) + flags &= ~(ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX | ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY); + + // Adjust flags: NoBordersInBodyUntilResize takes priority over NoBordersInBody + if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize) + flags &= ~ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody; + + // Adjust flags: disable saved settings if there's nothing to save + if ((flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable)) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings; + + // Inherit _NoSavedSettings from top-level window (child windows always have _NoSavedSettings set) + if (outer_window->RootWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) + flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings; + + return flags; +} + +ImGuiTable* ImGui::TableFindByID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.Tables.GetByKey(id); +} + +// Read about "TABLE SIZING" at the top of this file. +bool ImGui::BeginTable(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiTableFlags flags, const ImVec2& outer_size, float inner_width) +{ + ImGuiID id = GetID(str_id); + return BeginTableEx(str_id, id, columns_count, flags, outer_size, inner_width); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImGuiTableFlags flags, const ImVec2& outer_size, float inner_width) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* outer_window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (outer_window->SkipItems) // Consistent with other tables + beneficial side effect that assert on miscalling EndTable() will be more visible. + return false; + + // Sanity checks + IM_ASSERT(columns_count > 0 && columns_count < IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_COLUMNS); + if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) + IM_ASSERT(inner_width >= 0.0f); + + // If an outer size is specified ahead we will be able to early out when not visible. Exact clipping criteria may evolve. + const bool use_child_window = (flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) != 0; + const ImVec2 avail_size = GetContentRegionAvail(); + ImVec2 actual_outer_size = CalcItemSize(outer_size, ImMax(avail_size.x, 1.0f), use_child_window ? ImMax(avail_size.y, 1.0f) : 0.0f); + ImRect outer_rect(outer_window->DC.CursorPos, outer_window->DC.CursorPos + actual_outer_size); + if (use_child_window && IsClippedEx(outer_rect, 0)) + { + ItemSize(outer_rect); + return false; + } + + // Acquire storage for the table + ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.GetOrAddByKey(id); + const ImGuiTableFlags table_last_flags = table->Flags; + + // Acquire temporary buffers + const int table_idx = g.Tables.GetIndex(table); + if (++g.TablesTempDataStacked > g.TablesTempData.Size) + g.TablesTempData.resize(g.TablesTempDataStacked, ImGuiTableTempData()); + ImGuiTableTempData* temp_data = table->TempData = &g.TablesTempData[g.TablesTempDataStacked - 1]; + temp_data->TableIndex = table_idx; + table->DrawSplitter = &table->TempData->DrawSplitter; + table->DrawSplitter->Clear(); + + // Fix flags + table->IsDefaultSizingPolicy = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == 0; + flags = TableFixFlags(flags, outer_window); + + // Initialize + const int instance_no = (table->LastFrameActive != g.FrameCount) ? 0 : table->InstanceCurrent + 1; + table->ID = id; + table->Flags = flags; + table->LastFrameActive = g.FrameCount; + table->OuterWindow = table->InnerWindow = outer_window; + table->ColumnsCount = columns_count; + table->IsLayoutLocked = false; + table->InnerWidth = inner_width; + temp_data->UserOuterSize = outer_size; + + // Instance data (for instance 0, TableID == TableInstanceID) + ImGuiID instance_id; + table->InstanceCurrent = (ImS16)instance_no; + if (instance_no > 0) + { + IM_ASSERT(table->ColumnsCount == columns_count && "BeginTable(): Cannot change columns count mid-frame while preserving same ID"); + if (table->InstanceDataExtra.Size < instance_no) + table->InstanceDataExtra.push_back(ImGuiTableInstanceData()); + instance_id = GetIDWithSeed(instance_no, GetIDWithSeed("##Instances", NULL, id)); // Push "##Instances" followed by (int)instance_no in ID stack. + } + else + { + instance_id = id; + } + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); + table_instance->TableInstanceID = instance_id; + + // When not using a child window, WorkRect.Max will grow as we append contents. + if (use_child_window) + { + // Ensure no vertical scrollbar appears if we only want horizontal one, to make flag consistent + // (we have no other way to disable vertical scrollbar of a window while keeping the horizontal one showing) + ImVec2 override_content_size(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) && !(flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) + override_content_size.y = FLT_MIN; + + // Ensure specified width (when not specified, Stretched columns will act as if the width == OuterWidth and + // never lead to any scrolling). We don't handle inner_width < 0.0f, we could potentially use it to right-align + // based on the right side of the child window work rect, which would require knowing ahead if we are going to + // have decoration taking horizontal spaces (typically a vertical scrollbar). + if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) && inner_width > 0.0f) + override_content_size.x = inner_width; + + if (override_content_size.x != FLT_MAX || override_content_size.y != FLT_MAX) + SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(override_content_size.x != FLT_MAX ? override_content_size.x : 0.0f, override_content_size.y != FLT_MAX ? override_content_size.y : 0.0f)); + + // Reset scroll if we are reactivating it + if ((table_last_flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) == 0) + SetNextWindowScroll(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); + + // Create scrolling region (without border and zero window padding) + ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar : ImGuiWindowFlags_None; + BeginChildEx(name, instance_id, outer_rect.GetSize(), false, child_flags); + table->InnerWindow = g.CurrentWindow; + table->WorkRect = table->InnerWindow->WorkRect; + table->OuterRect = table->InnerWindow->Rect(); + table->InnerRect = table->InnerWindow->InnerRect; + IM_ASSERT(table->InnerWindow->WindowPadding.x == 0.0f && table->InnerWindow->WindowPadding.y == 0.0f && table->InnerWindow->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f); + + // When using multiple instances, ensure they have the same amount of horizontal decorations (aka vertical scrollbar) so stretched columns can be aligned) + if (instance_no == 0) + { + table->HasScrollbarYPrev = table->HasScrollbarYCurr; + table->HasScrollbarYCurr = false; + } + table->HasScrollbarYCurr |= table->InnerWindow->ScrollbarY; + } + else + { + // For non-scrolling tables, WorkRect == OuterRect == InnerRect. + // But at this point we do NOT have a correct value for .Max.y (unless a height has been explicitly passed in). It will only be updated in EndTable(). + table->WorkRect = table->OuterRect = table->InnerRect = outer_rect; + } + + // Push a standardized ID for both child-using and not-child-using tables + PushOverrideID(id); + if (instance_no > 0) + PushOverrideID(instance_id); // FIXME: Somehow this is not resolved by stack-tool, even tho GetIDWithSeed() submitted the symbol. + + // Backup a copy of host window members we will modify + ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow; + table->HostIndentX = inner_window->DC.Indent.x; + table->HostClipRect = inner_window->ClipRect; + table->HostSkipItems = inner_window->SkipItems; + temp_data->HostBackupWorkRect = inner_window->WorkRect; + temp_data->HostBackupParentWorkRect = inner_window->ParentWorkRect; + temp_data->HostBackupColumnsOffset = outer_window->DC.ColumnsOffset; + temp_data->HostBackupPrevLineSize = inner_window->DC.PrevLineSize; + temp_data->HostBackupCurrLineSize = inner_window->DC.CurrLineSize; + temp_data->HostBackupCursorMaxPos = inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos; + temp_data->HostBackupItemWidth = outer_window->DC.ItemWidth; + temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize = outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size; + inner_window->DC.PrevLineSize = inner_window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + + // Padding and Spacing + // - None ........Content..... Pad .....Content........ + // - PadOuter | Pad ..Content..... Pad .....Content.. Pad | + // - PadInner ........Content.. Pad | Pad ..Content........ + // - PadOuter+PadInner | Pad ..Content.. Pad | Pad ..Content.. Pad | + const bool pad_outer_x = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX) ? false : (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX) ? true : (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV) != 0; + const bool pad_inner_x = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX) ? false : true; + const float inner_spacing_for_border = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV) ? TABLE_BORDER_SIZE : 0.0f; + const float inner_spacing_explicit = (pad_inner_x && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV) == 0) ? g.Style.CellPadding.x : 0.0f; + const float inner_padding_explicit = (pad_inner_x && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV) != 0) ? g.Style.CellPadding.x : 0.0f; + table->CellSpacingX1 = inner_spacing_explicit + inner_spacing_for_border; + table->CellSpacingX2 = inner_spacing_explicit; + table->CellPaddingX = inner_padding_explicit; + + const float outer_padding_for_border = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV) ? TABLE_BORDER_SIZE : 0.0f; + const float outer_padding_explicit = pad_outer_x ? g.Style.CellPadding.x : 0.0f; + table->OuterPaddingX = (outer_padding_for_border + outer_padding_explicit) - table->CellPaddingX; + + table->CurrentColumn = -1; + table->CurrentRow = -1; + table->RowBgColorCounter = 0; + table->LastRowFlags = ImGuiTableRowFlags_None; + table->InnerClipRect = (inner_window == outer_window) ? table->WorkRect : inner_window->ClipRect; + table->InnerClipRect.ClipWith(table->WorkRect); // We need this to honor inner_width + table->InnerClipRect.ClipWithFull(table->HostClipRect); + table->InnerClipRect.Max.y = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY) ? ImMin(table->InnerClipRect.Max.y, inner_window->WorkRect.Max.y) : inner_window->ClipRect.Max.y; + + table->RowPosY1 = table->RowPosY2 = table->WorkRect.Min.y; // This is needed somehow + table->RowTextBaseline = 0.0f; // This will be cleared again by TableBeginRow() + table->RowCellPaddingY = 0.0f; + table->FreezeRowsRequest = table->FreezeRowsCount = 0; // This will be setup by TableSetupScrollFreeze(), if any + table->FreezeColumnsRequest = table->FreezeColumnsCount = 0; + table->IsUnfrozenRows = true; + table->DeclColumnsCount = 0; + + // Using opaque colors facilitate overlapping lines of the grid, otherwise we'd need to improve TableDrawBorders() + table->BorderColorStrong = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong); + table->BorderColorLight = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight); + + // Make table current + g.CurrentTable = table; + outer_window->DC.NavIsScrollPushableX = false; // Shortcut for NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX(); + outer_window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = table_idx; + if (inner_window != outer_window) // So EndChild() within the inner window can restore the table properly. + inner_window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = table_idx; + + if ((table_last_flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) == 0) + table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest = true; + + // Mark as used to avoid GC + if (table_idx >= g.TablesLastTimeActive.Size) + g.TablesLastTimeActive.resize(table_idx + 1, -1.0f); + g.TablesLastTimeActive[table_idx] = (float)g.Time; + temp_data->LastTimeActive = (float)g.Time; + table->MemoryCompacted = false; + + // Setup memory buffer (clear data if columns count changed) + ImGuiTableColumn* old_columns_to_preserve = NULL; + void* old_columns_raw_data = NULL; + const int old_columns_count = table->Columns.size(); + if (old_columns_count != 0 && old_columns_count != columns_count) + { + // Attempt to preserve width on column count change (#4046) + old_columns_to_preserve = table->Columns.Data; + old_columns_raw_data = table->RawData; + table->RawData = NULL; + } + if (table->RawData == NULL) + { + TableBeginInitMemory(table, columns_count); + table->IsInitializing = table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = true; + } + if (table->IsResetAllRequest) + TableResetSettings(table); + if (table->IsInitializing) + { + // Initialize + table->SettingsOffset = -1; + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; + table->InstanceInteracted = -1; + table->ContextPopupColumn = -1; + table->ReorderColumn = table->ResizedColumn = table->LastResizedColumn = -1; + table->AutoFitSingleColumn = -1; + table->HoveredColumnBody = table->HoveredColumnBorder = -1; + for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[n]; + if (old_columns_to_preserve && n < old_columns_count) + { + // FIXME: We don't attempt to preserve column order in this path. + *column = old_columns_to_preserve[n]; + } + else + { + float width_auto = column->WidthAuto; + *column = ImGuiTableColumn(); + column->WidthAuto = width_auto; + column->IsPreserveWidthAuto = true; // Preserve WidthAuto when reinitializing a live table: not technically necessary but remove a visible flicker + column->IsEnabled = column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = true; + } + column->DisplayOrder = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[n] = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n; + } + } + if (old_columns_raw_data) + IM_FREE(old_columns_raw_data); + + // Load settings + if (table->IsSettingsRequestLoad) + TableLoadSettings(table); + + // Handle DPI/font resize + // This is designed to facilitate DPI changes with the assumption that e.g. style.CellPadding has been scaled as well. + // It will also react to changing fonts with mixed results. It doesn't need to be perfect but merely provide a decent transition. + // FIXME-DPI: Provide consistent standards for reference size. Perhaps using g.CurrentDpiScale would be more self explanatory. + // This is will lead us to non-rounded WidthRequest in columns, which should work but is a poorly tested path. + const float new_ref_scale_unit = g.FontSize; // g.Font->GetCharAdvance('A') ? + if (table->RefScale != 0.0f && table->RefScale != new_ref_scale_unit) + { + const float scale_factor = new_ref_scale_unit / table->RefScale; + //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("[table] %08X RefScaleUnit %.3f -> %.3f, scaling width by %.3f\n", table->ID, table->RefScaleUnit, new_ref_scale_unit, scale_factor); + for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++) + table->Columns[n].WidthRequest = table->Columns[n].WidthRequest * scale_factor; + } + table->RefScale = new_ref_scale_unit; + + // Disable output until user calls TableNextRow() or TableNextColumn() leading to the TableUpdateLayout() call.. + // This is not strictly necessary but will reduce cases were "out of table" output will be misleading to the user. + // Because we cannot safely assert in EndTable() when no rows have been created, this seems like our best option. + inner_window->SkipItems = true; + + // Clear names + // At this point the ->NameOffset field of each column will be invalid until TableUpdateLayout() or the first call to TableSetupColumn() + if (table->ColumnsNames.Buf.Size > 0) + table->ColumnsNames.Buf.resize(0); + + // Apply queued resizing/reordering/hiding requests + TableBeginApplyRequests(table); + + return true; +} + +// For reference, the average total _allocation count_ for a table is: +// + 0 (for ImGuiTable instance, we are pooling allocations in g.Tables[]) +// + 1 (for table->RawData allocated below) +// + 1 (for table->ColumnsNames, if names are used) +// Shared allocations for the maximum number of simultaneously nested tables (generally a very small number) +// + 1 (for table->Splitter._Channels) +// + 2 * active_channels_count (for ImDrawCmd and ImDrawIdx buffers inside channels) +// Where active_channels_count is variable but often == columns_count or == columns_count + 1, see TableSetupDrawChannels() for details. +// Unused channels don't perform their +2 allocations. +void ImGui::TableBeginInitMemory(ImGuiTable* table, int columns_count) +{ + // Allocate single buffer for our arrays + const int columns_bit_array_size = (int)ImBitArrayGetStorageSizeInBytes(columns_count); + ImSpanAllocator<6> span_allocator; + span_allocator.Reserve(0, columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableColumn)); + span_allocator.Reserve(1, columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableColumnIdx)); + span_allocator.Reserve(2, columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableCellData), 4); + for (int n = 3; n < 6; n++) + span_allocator.Reserve(n, columns_bit_array_size); + table->RawData = IM_ALLOC(span_allocator.GetArenaSizeInBytes()); + memset(table->RawData, 0, span_allocator.GetArenaSizeInBytes()); + span_allocator.SetArenaBasePtr(table->RawData); + span_allocator.GetSpan(0, &table->Columns); + span_allocator.GetSpan(1, &table->DisplayOrderToIndex); + span_allocator.GetSpan(2, &table->RowCellData); + table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder = (ImU32*)span_allocator.GetSpanPtrBegin(3); + table->EnabledMaskByIndex = (ImU32*)span_allocator.GetSpanPtrBegin(4); + table->VisibleMaskByIndex = (ImU32*)span_allocator.GetSpanPtrBegin(5); +} + +// Apply queued resizing/reordering/hiding requests +void ImGui::TableBeginApplyRequests(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + // Handle resizing request + // (We process this in the TableBegin() of the first instance of each table) + // FIXME-TABLE: Contains columns if our work area doesn't allow for scrolling? + if (table->InstanceCurrent == 0) + { + if (table->ResizedColumn != -1 && table->ResizedColumnNextWidth != FLT_MAX) + TableSetColumnWidth(table->ResizedColumn, table->ResizedColumnNextWidth); + table->LastResizedColumn = table->ResizedColumn; + table->ResizedColumnNextWidth = FLT_MAX; + table->ResizedColumn = -1; + + // Process auto-fit for single column, which is a special case for stretch columns and fixed columns with FixedSame policy. + // FIXME-TABLE: Would be nice to redistribute available stretch space accordingly to other weights, instead of giving it all to siblings. + if (table->AutoFitSingleColumn != -1) + { + TableSetColumnWidth(table->AutoFitSingleColumn, table->Columns[table->AutoFitSingleColumn].WidthAuto); + table->AutoFitSingleColumn = -1; + } + } + + // Handle reordering request + // Note: we don't clear ReorderColumn after handling the request. + if (table->InstanceCurrent == 0) + { + if (table->HeldHeaderColumn == -1 && table->ReorderColumn != -1) + table->ReorderColumn = -1; + table->HeldHeaderColumn = -1; + if (table->ReorderColumn != -1 && table->ReorderColumnDir != 0) + { + // We need to handle reordering across hidden columns. + // In the configuration below, moving C to the right of E will lead to: + // ... C [D] E ---> ... [D] E C (Column name/index) + // ... 2 3 4 ... 2 3 4 (Display order) + const int reorder_dir = table->ReorderColumnDir; + IM_ASSERT(reorder_dir == -1 || reorder_dir == +1); + IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable); + ImGuiTableColumn* src_column = &table->Columns[table->ReorderColumn]; + ImGuiTableColumn* dst_column = &table->Columns[(reorder_dir == -1) ? src_column->PrevEnabledColumn : src_column->NextEnabledColumn]; + IM_UNUSED(dst_column); + const int src_order = src_column->DisplayOrder; + const int dst_order = dst_column->DisplayOrder; + src_column->DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)dst_order; + for (int order_n = src_order + reorder_dir; order_n != dst_order + reorder_dir; order_n += reorder_dir) + table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]].DisplayOrder -= (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)reorder_dir; + IM_ASSERT(dst_column->DisplayOrder == dst_order - reorder_dir); + + // Display order is stored in both columns->IndexDisplayOrder and table->DisplayOrder[]. Rebuild later from the former. + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + table->DisplayOrderToIndex[table->Columns[column_n].DisplayOrder] = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + table->ReorderColumnDir = 0; + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + } + } + + // Handle display order reset request + if (table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest) + { + for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++) + table->DisplayOrderToIndex[n] = table->Columns[n].DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n; + table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest = false; + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + } +} + +// Adjust flags: default width mode + stretch columns are not allowed when auto extending +static void TableSetupColumnFlags(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags_in) +{ + ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = flags_in; + + // Sizing Policy + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_) == 0) + { + const ImGuiTableFlags table_sizing_policy = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_); + if (table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit || table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame) + flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed; + else + flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch; + } + else + { + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_)); // Check that only 1 of each set is used. + } + + // Resize + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize; + + // Sorting + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending) && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending)) + flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort; + + // Indentation + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentMask_) == 0) + flags |= (table->Columns.index_from_ptr(column) == 0) ? ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable; + + // Alignment + //if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignMask_) == 0) + // flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignCenter; + //IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignMask_)); // Check that only 1 of each set is used. + + // Preserve status flags + column->Flags = flags | (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_); + + // Build an ordered list of available sort directions + column->SortDirectionsAvailCount = column->SortDirectionsAvailMask = column->SortDirectionsAvailList = 0; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) + { + int count = 0, mask = 0, list = 0; + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending) == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending; list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending << (count << 1); count++; } + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending) == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Descending; list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Descending << (count << 1); count++; } + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending) == 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending) == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending; list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending << (count << 1); count++; } + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending) == 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending) == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Descending; list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Descending << (count << 1); count++; } + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate) || count == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_None; count++; } + column->SortDirectionsAvailList = (ImU8)list; + column->SortDirectionsAvailMask = (ImU8)mask; + column->SortDirectionsAvailCount = (ImU8)count; + ImGui::TableFixColumnSortDirection(table, column); + } +} + +// Layout columns for the frame. This is in essence the followup to BeginTable() and this is our largest function. +// Runs on the first call to TableNextRow(), to give a chance for TableSetupColumn() and other TableSetupXXXXX() functions to be called first. +// FIXME-TABLE: Our width (and therefore our WorkRect) will be minimal in the first frame for _WidthAuto columns. +// Increase feedback side-effect with widgets relying on WorkRect.Max.x... Maybe provide a default distribution for _WidthAuto columns? +void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked == false); + + const ImGuiTableFlags table_sizing_policy = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_); + table->IsDefaultDisplayOrder = true; + table->ColumnsEnabledCount = 0; + ImBitArrayClearAllBits(table->EnabledMaskByIndex, table->ColumnsCount); + ImBitArrayClearAllBits(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder, table->ColumnsCount); + table->LeftMostEnabledColumn = -1; + table->MinColumnWidth = ImMax(1.0f, g.Style.FramePadding.x * 1.0f); // g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing; // FIXME-TABLE + + // [Part 1] Apply/lock Enabled and Order states. Calculate auto/ideal width for columns. Count fixed/stretch columns. + // Process columns in their visible orders as we are building the Prev/Next indices. + int count_fixed = 0; // Number of columns that have fixed sizing policies + int count_stretch = 0; // Number of columns that have stretch sizing policies + int prev_visible_column_idx = -1; + bool has_auto_fit_request = false; + bool has_resizable = false; + float stretch_sum_width_auto = 0.0f; + float fixed_max_width_auto = 0.0f; + for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++) + { + const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]; + if (column_n != order_n) + table->IsDefaultDisplayOrder = false; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + + // Clear column setup if not submitted by user. Currently we make it mandatory to call TableSetupColumn() every frame. + // It would easily work without but we're not ready to guarantee it since e.g. names need resubmission anyway. + // We take a slight shortcut but in theory we could be calling TableSetupColumn() here with dummy values, it should yield the same effect. + if (table->DeclColumnsCount <= column_n) + { + TableSetupColumnFlags(table, column, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None); + column->NameOffset = -1; + column->UserID = 0; + column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth = -1.0f; + } + + // Update Enabled state, mark settings and sort specs dirty + if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) || (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide)) + column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = true; + if (column->IsUserEnabled != column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame) + { + column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame; + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + } + column->IsEnabled = column->IsUserEnabled && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled) == 0; + + if (column->SortOrder != -1 && !column->IsEnabled) + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; + if (column->SortOrder > 0 && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti)) + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; + + // Auto-fit unsized columns + const bool start_auto_fit = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) ? (column->WidthRequest < 0.0f) : (column->StretchWeight < 0.0f); + if (start_auto_fit) + column->AutoFitQueue = column->CannotSkipItemsQueue = (1 << 3) - 1; // Fit for three frames + + if (!column->IsEnabled) + { + column->IndexWithinEnabledSet = -1; + continue; + } + + // Mark as enabled and link to previous/next enabled column + column->PrevEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)prev_visible_column_idx; + column->NextEnabledColumn = -1; + if (prev_visible_column_idx != -1) + table->Columns[prev_visible_column_idx].NextEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + else + table->LeftMostEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + column->IndexWithinEnabledSet = table->ColumnsEnabledCount++; + ImBitArraySetBit(table->EnabledMaskByIndex, column_n); + ImBitArraySetBit(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder, column->DisplayOrder); + prev_visible_column_idx = column_n; + IM_ASSERT(column->IndexWithinEnabledSet <= column->DisplayOrder); + + // Calculate ideal/auto column width (that's the width required for all contents to be visible without clipping) + // Combine width from regular rows + width from headers unless requested not to. + if (!column->IsPreserveWidthAuto) + column->WidthAuto = TableGetColumnWidthAuto(table, column); + + // Non-resizable columns keep their requested width (apply user value regardless of IsPreserveWidthAuto) + const bool column_is_resizable = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) == 0; + if (column_is_resizable) + has_resizable = true; + if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth > 0.0f && !column_is_resizable) + column->WidthAuto = column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth; + + if (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00) + has_auto_fit_request = true; + if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) + { + stretch_sum_width_auto += column->WidthAuto; + count_stretch++; + } + else + { + fixed_max_width_auto = ImMax(fixed_max_width_auto, column->WidthAuto); + count_fixed++; + } + } + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && table->SortSpecsCount == 0 && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate)) + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; + table->RightMostEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)prev_visible_column_idx; + IM_ASSERT(table->LeftMostEnabledColumn >= 0 && table->RightMostEnabledColumn >= 0); + + // [Part 2] Disable child window clipping while fitting columns. This is not strictly necessary but makes it possible + // to avoid the column fitting having to wait until the first visible frame of the child container (may or not be a good thing). + // FIXME-TABLE: for always auto-resizing columns may not want to do that all the time. + if (has_auto_fit_request && table->OuterWindow != table->InnerWindow) + table->InnerWindow->SkipItems = false; + if (has_auto_fit_request) + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + + // [Part 3] Fix column flags and record a few extra information. + float sum_width_requests = 0.0f; // Sum of all width for fixed and auto-resize columns, excluding width contributed by Stretch columns but including spacing/padding. + float stretch_sum_weights = 0.0f; // Sum of all weights for stretch columns. + table->LeftMostStretchedColumn = table->RightMostStretchedColumn = -1; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByIndex, column_n)) + continue; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + + const bool column_is_resizable = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) == 0; + if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) + { + // Apply same widths policy + float width_auto = column->WidthAuto; + if (table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame && (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00 || !column_is_resizable)) + width_auto = fixed_max_width_auto; + + // Apply automatic width + // Latch initial size for fixed columns and update it constantly for auto-resizing column (unless clipped!) + if (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00) + column->WidthRequest = width_auto; + else if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && !column_is_resizable && column->IsRequestOutput) + column->WidthRequest = width_auto; + + // FIXME-TABLE: Increase minimum size during init frame to avoid biasing auto-fitting widgets + // (e.g. TextWrapped) too much. Otherwise what tends to happen is that TextWrapped would output a very + // large height (= first frame scrollbar display very off + clipper would skip lots of items). + // This is merely making the side-effect less extreme, but doesn't properly fixes it. + // FIXME: Move this to ->WidthGiven to avoid temporary lossyless? + // FIXME: This break IsPreserveWidthAuto from not flickering if the stored WidthAuto was smaller. + if (column->AutoFitQueue > 0x01 && table->IsInitializing && !column->IsPreserveWidthAuto) + column->WidthRequest = ImMax(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth * 4.0f); // FIXME-TABLE: Another constant/scale? + sum_width_requests += column->WidthRequest; + } + else + { + // Initialize stretch weight + if (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00 || column->StretchWeight < 0.0f || !column_is_resizable) + { + if (column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth > 0.0f) + column->StretchWeight = column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth; + else if (table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp) + column->StretchWeight = (column->WidthAuto / stretch_sum_width_auto) * count_stretch; + else + column->StretchWeight = 1.0f; + } + + stretch_sum_weights += column->StretchWeight; + if (table->LeftMostStretchedColumn == -1 || table->Columns[table->LeftMostStretchedColumn].DisplayOrder > column->DisplayOrder) + table->LeftMostStretchedColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + if (table->RightMostStretchedColumn == -1 || table->Columns[table->RightMostStretchedColumn].DisplayOrder < column->DisplayOrder) + table->RightMostStretchedColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + } + column->IsPreserveWidthAuto = false; + sum_width_requests += table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f; + } + table->ColumnsEnabledFixedCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)count_fixed; + table->ColumnsStretchSumWeights = stretch_sum_weights; + + // [Part 4] Apply final widths based on requested widths + const ImRect work_rect = table->WorkRect; + const float width_spacings = (table->OuterPaddingX * 2.0f) + (table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2) * (table->ColumnsEnabledCount - 1); + const float width_removed = (table->HasScrollbarYPrev && !table->InnerWindow->ScrollbarY) ? g.Style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f; // To synchronize decoration width of synched tables with mismatching scrollbar state (#5920) + const float width_avail = ImMax(1.0f, (((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) && table->InnerWidth == 0.0f) ? table->InnerClipRect.GetWidth() : work_rect.GetWidth()) - width_removed); + const float width_avail_for_stretched_columns = width_avail - width_spacings - sum_width_requests; + float width_remaining_for_stretched_columns = width_avail_for_stretched_columns; + table->ColumnsGivenWidth = width_spacings + (table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f) * table->ColumnsEnabledCount; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByIndex, column_n)) + continue; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + + // Allocate width for stretched/weighted columns (StretchWeight gets converted into WidthRequest) + if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) + { + float weight_ratio = column->StretchWeight / stretch_sum_weights; + column->WidthRequest = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(width_avail_for_stretched_columns * weight_ratio, table->MinColumnWidth) + 0.01f); + width_remaining_for_stretched_columns -= column->WidthRequest; + } + + // [Resize Rule 1] The right-most Visible column is not resizable if there is at least one Stretch column + // See additional comments in TableSetColumnWidth(). + if (column->NextEnabledColumn == -1 && table->LeftMostStretchedColumn != -1) + column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_; + + // Assign final width, record width in case we will need to shrink + column->WidthGiven = ImFloor(ImMax(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth)); + table->ColumnsGivenWidth += column->WidthGiven; + } + + // [Part 5] Redistribute stretch remainder width due to rounding (remainder width is < 1.0f * number of Stretch column). + // Using right-to-left distribution (more likely to match resizing cursor). + if (width_remaining_for_stretched_columns >= 1.0f && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths)) + for (int order_n = table->ColumnsCount - 1; stretch_sum_weights > 0.0f && width_remaining_for_stretched_columns >= 1.0f && order_n >= 0; order_n--) + { + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder, order_n)) + continue; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]]; + if (!(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)) + continue; + column->WidthRequest += 1.0f; + column->WidthGiven += 1.0f; + width_remaining_for_stretched_columns -= 1.0f; + } + + // Determine if table is hovered which will be used to flag columns as hovered. + // - In principle we'd like to use the equivalent of IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem), + // but because our item is partially submitted at this point we use ItemHoverable() and a workaround (temporarily + // clear ActiveId, which is equivalent to the change provided by _AllowWhenBLockedByActiveItem). + // - This allows columns to be marked as hovered when e.g. clicking a button inside the column, or using drag and drop. + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); + table_instance->HoveredRowLast = table_instance->HoveredRowNext; + table_instance->HoveredRowNext = -1; + table->HoveredColumnBody = -1; + table->HoveredColumnBorder = -1; + const ImRect mouse_hit_rect(table->OuterRect.Min.x, table->OuterRect.Min.y, table->OuterRect.Max.x, ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, table->OuterRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastOuterHeight)); + const ImGuiID backup_active_id = g.ActiveId; + g.ActiveId = 0; + const bool is_hovering_table = ItemHoverable(mouse_hit_rect, 0, ImGuiItemFlags_None); + g.ActiveId = backup_active_id; + + // [Part 6] Setup final position, offset, skip/clip states and clipping rectangles, detect hovered column + // Process columns in their visible orders as we are comparing the visible order and adjusting host_clip_rect while looping. + int visible_n = 0; + bool offset_x_frozen = (table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0); + float offset_x = ((table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0) ? table->OuterRect.Min.x : work_rect.Min.x) + table->OuterPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX1; + ImRect host_clip_rect = table->InnerClipRect; + //host_clip_rect.Max.x += table->CellPaddingX + table->CellSpacingX2; + ImBitArrayClearAllBits(table->VisibleMaskByIndex, table->ColumnsCount); + for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++) + { + const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + + column->NavLayerCurrent = (ImS8)(table->FreezeRowsCount > 0 ? ImGuiNavLayer_Menu : ImGuiNavLayer_Main); // Use Count NOT request so Header line changes layer when frozen + + if (offset_x_frozen && table->FreezeColumnsCount == visible_n) + { + offset_x += work_rect.Min.x - table->OuterRect.Min.x; + offset_x_frozen = false; + } + + // Clear status flags + column->Flags &= ~ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_; + + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder, order_n)) + { + // Hidden column: clear a few fields and we are done with it for the remainder of the function. + // We set a zero-width clip rect but set Min.y/Max.y properly to not interfere with the clipper. + column->MinX = column->MaxX = column->WorkMinX = column->ClipRect.Min.x = column->ClipRect.Max.x = offset_x; + column->WidthGiven = 0.0f; + column->ClipRect.Min.y = work_rect.Min.y; + column->ClipRect.Max.y = FLT_MAX; + column->ClipRect.ClipWithFull(host_clip_rect); + column->IsVisibleX = column->IsVisibleY = column->IsRequestOutput = false; + column->IsSkipItems = true; + column->ItemWidth = 1.0f; + continue; + } + + // Detect hovered column + if (is_hovering_table && g.IO.MousePos.x >= column->ClipRect.Min.x && g.IO.MousePos.x < column->ClipRect.Max.x) + table->HoveredColumnBody = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + + // Lock start position + column->MinX = offset_x; + + // Lock width based on start position and minimum/maximum width for this position + float max_width = TableGetMaxColumnWidth(table, column_n); + column->WidthGiven = ImMin(column->WidthGiven, max_width); + column->WidthGiven = ImMax(column->WidthGiven, ImMin(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth)); + column->MaxX = offset_x + column->WidthGiven + table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2 + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f; + + // Lock other positions + // - ClipRect.Min.x: Because merging draw commands doesn't compare min boundaries, we make ClipRect.Min.x match left bounds to be consistent regardless of merging. + // - ClipRect.Max.x: using WorkMaxX instead of MaxX (aka including padding) makes things more consistent when resizing down, tho slightly detrimental to visibility in very-small column. + // - ClipRect.Max.x: using MaxX makes it easier for header to receive hover highlight with no discontinuity and display sorting arrow. + // - FIXME-TABLE: We want equal width columns to have equal (ClipRect.Max.x - WorkMinX) width, which means ClipRect.max.x cannot stray off host_clip_rect.Max.x else right-most column may appear shorter. + column->WorkMinX = column->MinX + table->CellPaddingX + table->CellSpacingX1; + column->WorkMaxX = column->MaxX - table->CellPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX2; // Expected max + column->ItemWidth = ImFloor(column->WidthGiven * 0.65f); + column->ClipRect.Min.x = column->MinX; + column->ClipRect.Min.y = work_rect.Min.y; + column->ClipRect.Max.x = column->MaxX; //column->WorkMaxX; + column->ClipRect.Max.y = FLT_MAX; + column->ClipRect.ClipWithFull(host_clip_rect); + + // Mark column as Clipped (not in sight) + // Note that scrolling tables (where inner_window != outer_window) handle Y clipped earlier in BeginTable() so IsVisibleY really only applies to non-scrolling tables. + // FIXME-TABLE: Because InnerClipRect.Max.y is conservatively ==outer_window->ClipRect.Max.y, we never can mark columns _Above_ the scroll line as not IsVisibleY. + // Taking advantage of LastOuterHeight would yield good results there... + // FIXME-TABLE: Y clipping is disabled because it effectively means not submitting will reduce contents width which is fed to outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, + // and this may be used (e.g. typically by outer_window using AlwaysAutoResize or outer_window's horizontal scrollbar, but could be something else). + // Possible solution to preserve last known content width for clipped column. Test 'table_reported_size' fails when enabling Y clipping and window is resized small. + column->IsVisibleX = (column->ClipRect.Max.x > column->ClipRect.Min.x); + column->IsVisibleY = true; // (column->ClipRect.Max.y > column->ClipRect.Min.y); + const bool is_visible = column->IsVisibleX; //&& column->IsVisibleY; + if (is_visible) + ImBitArraySetBit(table->VisibleMaskByIndex, column_n); + + // Mark column as requesting output from user. Note that fixed + non-resizable sets are auto-fitting at all times and therefore always request output. + column->IsRequestOutput = is_visible || column->AutoFitQueue != 0 || column->CannotSkipItemsQueue != 0; + + // Mark column as SkipItems (ignoring all items/layout) + column->IsSkipItems = !column->IsEnabled || table->HostSkipItems; + if (column->IsSkipItems) + IM_ASSERT(!is_visible); + + // Update status flags + column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled; + if (is_visible) + column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible; + if (column->SortOrder != -1) + column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted; + if (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n) + column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered; + + // Alignment + // FIXME-TABLE: This align based on the whole column width, not per-cell, and therefore isn't useful in + // many cases (to be able to honor this we might be able to store a log of cells width, per row, for + // visible rows, but nav/programmatic scroll would have visible artifacts.) + //if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignRight) + // column->WorkMinX = ImMax(column->WorkMinX, column->MaxX - column->ContentWidthRowsUnfrozen); + //else if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignCenter) + // column->WorkMinX = ImLerp(column->WorkMinX, ImMax(column->StartX, column->MaxX - column->ContentWidthRowsUnfrozen), 0.5f); + + // Reset content width variables + column->ContentMaxXFrozen = column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen = column->WorkMinX; + column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed = column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal = column->WorkMinX; + + // Don't decrement auto-fit counters until container window got a chance to submit its items + if (table->HostSkipItems == false) + { + column->AutoFitQueue >>= 1; + column->CannotSkipItemsQueue >>= 1; + } + + if (visible_n < table->FreezeColumnsCount) + host_clip_rect.Min.x = ImClamp(column->MaxX + TABLE_BORDER_SIZE, host_clip_rect.Min.x, host_clip_rect.Max.x); + + offset_x += column->WidthGiven + table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2 + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f; + visible_n++; + } + + // [Part 7] Detect/store when we are hovering the unused space after the right-most column (so e.g. context menus can react on it) + // Clear Resizable flag if none of our column are actually resizable (either via an explicit _NoResize flag, either + // because of using _WidthAuto/_WidthStretch). This will hide the resizing option from the context menu. + const float unused_x1 = ImMax(table->WorkRect.Min.x, table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].ClipRect.Max.x); + if (is_hovering_table && table->HoveredColumnBody == -1) + { + if (g.IO.MousePos.x >= unused_x1) + table->HoveredColumnBody = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)table->ColumnsCount; + } + if (has_resizable == false && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)) + table->Flags &= ~ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable; + + // [Part 8] Lock actual OuterRect/WorkRect right-most position. + // This is done late to handle the case of fixed-columns tables not claiming more widths that they need. + // Because of this we are careful with uses of WorkRect and InnerClipRect before this point. + if (table->RightMostStretchedColumn != -1) + table->Flags &= ~ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX) + { + table->OuterRect.Max.x = table->WorkRect.Max.x = unused_x1; + table->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImMin(table->InnerClipRect.Max.x, unused_x1); + } + table->InnerWindow->ParentWorkRect = table->WorkRect; + table->BorderX1 = table->InnerClipRect.Min.x;// +((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) ? 0.0f : -1.0f); + table->BorderX2 = table->InnerClipRect.Max.x;// +((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) ? 0.0f : +1.0f); + + // Setup window's WorkRect.Max.y for GetContentRegionAvail(). Other values will be updated in each TableBeginCell() call. + float window_content_max_y; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY) + window_content_max_y = table->OuterRect.Max.y; + else + window_content_max_y = ImMax(table->InnerWindow->ContentRegionRect.Max.y, (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY) ? 0.0f : table->OuterRect.Max.y); + table->InnerWindow->WorkRect.Max.y = ImClamp(window_content_max_y - g.Style.CellPadding.y, table->InnerWindow->WorkRect.Min.y, table->InnerWindow->WorkRect.Max.y); + + // [Part 9] Allocate draw channels and setup background cliprect + TableSetupDrawChannels(table); + + // [Part 10] Hit testing on borders + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) + TableUpdateBorders(table); + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight = 0.0f; + table->IsLayoutLocked = true; + table->IsUsingHeaders = false; + + // [Part 11] Context menu + if (TableBeginContextMenuPopup(table)) + { + TableDrawContextMenu(table); + EndPopup(); + } + + // [Part 12] Sanitize and build sort specs before we have a chance to use them for display. + // This path will only be exercised when sort specs are modified before header rows (e.g. init or visibility change) + if (table->IsSortSpecsDirty && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable)) + TableSortSpecsBuild(table); + + // [Part 13] Setup inner window decoration size (for scrolling / nav tracking to properly take account of frozen rows/columns) + if (table->FreezeColumnsRequest > 0) + table->InnerWindow->DecoInnerSizeX1 = table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[table->FreezeColumnsRequest - 1]].MaxX - table->OuterRect.Min.x; + if (table->FreezeRowsRequest > 0) + table->InnerWindow->DecoInnerSizeY1 = table_instance->LastFrozenHeight; + table_instance->LastFrozenHeight = 0.0f; + + // Initial state + ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(inner_window->DrawList, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP); + else + inner_window->DrawList->PushClipRect(inner_window->ClipRect.Min, inner_window->ClipRect.Max, false); +} + +// Process hit-testing on resizing borders. Actual size change will be applied in EndTable() +// - Set table->HoveredColumnBorder with a short delay/timer to reduce visual feedback noise. +void ImGui::TableUpdateBorders(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable); + + // At this point OuterRect height may be zero or under actual final height, so we rely on temporal coherency and + // use the final height from last frame. Because this is only affecting _interaction_ with columns, it is not + // really problematic (whereas the actual visual will be displayed in EndTable() and using the current frame height). + // Actual columns highlight/render will be performed in EndTable() and not be affected. + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); + const float hit_half_width = TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS; + const float hit_y1 = table->OuterRect.Min.y; + const float hit_y2_body = ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, hit_y1 + table_instance->LastOuterHeight); + const float hit_y2_head = hit_y1 + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight; + + for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++) + { + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder, order_n)) + continue; + + const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (column->Flags & (ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_)) + continue; + + // ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize will be honored in TableDrawBorders() + const float border_y2_hit = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody) ? hit_y2_head : hit_y2_body; + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody) && table->IsUsingHeaders == false) + continue; + + if (!column->IsVisibleX && table->LastResizedColumn != column_n) + continue; + + ImGuiID column_id = TableGetColumnResizeID(table, column_n, table->InstanceCurrent); + ImRect hit_rect(column->MaxX - hit_half_width, hit_y1, column->MaxX + hit_half_width, border_y2_hit); + ItemAdd(hit_rect, column_id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav); + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(hit_rect.Min, hit_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 100)); + + bool hovered = false, held = false; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(hit_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus); + if (pressed && IsMouseDoubleClicked(0)) + { + TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(table, column_n); + ClearActiveID(); + held = hovered = false; + } + if (held) + { + if (table->LastResizedColumn == -1) + table->ResizeLockMinContentsX2 = table->RightMostEnabledColumn != -1 ? table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].MaxX : -FLT_MAX; + table->ResizedColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + table->InstanceInteracted = table->InstanceCurrent; + } + if ((hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer > TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_FEEDBACK_TIMER) || held) + { + table->HoveredColumnBorder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW); + } + } +} + +void ImGui::EndTable() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Only call EndTable() if BeginTable() returns true!"); + + // This assert would be very useful to catch a common error... unfortunately it would probably trigger in some + // cases, and for consistency user may sometimes output empty tables (and still benefit from e.g. outer border) + //IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked && "Table unused: never called TableNextRow(), is that the intent?"); + + // If the user never got to call TableNextRow() or TableNextColumn(), we call layout ourselves to ensure all our + // code paths are consistent (instead of just hoping that TableBegin/TableEnd will work), get borders drawn, etc. + if (!table->IsLayoutLocked) + TableUpdateLayout(table); + + const ImGuiTableFlags flags = table->Flags; + ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow; + ImGuiWindow* outer_window = table->OuterWindow; + ImGuiTableTempData* temp_data = table->TempData; + IM_ASSERT(inner_window == g.CurrentWindow); + IM_ASSERT(outer_window == inner_window || outer_window == inner_window->ParentWindow); + + if (table->IsInsideRow) + TableEndRow(table); + + // Context menu in columns body + if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody) + if (table->HoveredColumnBody != -1 && !IsAnyItemHovered() && IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) + TableOpenContextMenu((int)table->HoveredColumnBody); + + // Finalize table height + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); + inner_window->DC.PrevLineSize = temp_data->HostBackupPrevLineSize; + inner_window->DC.CurrLineSize = temp_data->HostBackupCurrLineSize; + inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos = temp_data->HostBackupCursorMaxPos; + const float inner_content_max_y = table->RowPosY2; + IM_ASSERT(table->RowPosY2 == inner_window->DC.CursorPos.y); + if (inner_window != outer_window) + inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = inner_content_max_y; + else if (!(flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY)) + table->OuterRect.Max.y = table->InnerRect.Max.y = ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, inner_content_max_y); // Patch OuterRect/InnerRect height + table->WorkRect.Max.y = ImMax(table->WorkRect.Max.y, table->OuterRect.Max.y); + table_instance->LastOuterHeight = table->OuterRect.GetHeight(); + + // Setup inner scrolling range + // FIXME: This ideally should be done earlier, in BeginTable() SetNextWindowContentSize call, just like writing to inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, + // but since the later is likely to be impossible to do we'd rather update both axises together. + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) + { + const float outer_padding_for_border = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV) ? TABLE_BORDER_SIZE : 0.0f; + float max_pos_x = table->InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos.x; + if (table->RightMostEnabledColumn != -1) + max_pos_x = ImMax(max_pos_x, table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].WorkMaxX + table->CellPaddingX + table->OuterPaddingX - outer_padding_for_border); + if (table->ResizedColumn != -1) + max_pos_x = ImMax(max_pos_x, table->ResizeLockMinContentsX2); + table->InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = max_pos_x; + } + + // Pop clipping rect + if (!(flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip)) + inner_window->DrawList->PopClipRect(); + inner_window->ClipRect = inner_window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back(); + + // Draw borders + if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Borders) != 0) + TableDrawBorders(table); + +#if 0 + // Strip out dummy channel draw calls + // We have no way to prevent user submitting direct ImDrawList calls into a hidden column (but ImGui:: calls will be clipped out) + // Pros: remove draw calls which will have no effect. since they'll have zero-size cliprect they may be early out anyway. + // Cons: making it harder for users watching metrics/debugger to spot the wasted vertices. + if (table->DummyDrawChannel != (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)-1) + { + ImDrawChannel* dummy_channel = &table->DrawSplitter._Channels[table->DummyDrawChannel]; + dummy_channel->_CmdBuffer.resize(0); + dummy_channel->_IdxBuffer.resize(0); + } +#endif + + // Flatten channels and merge draw calls + ImDrawListSplitter* splitter = table->DrawSplitter; + splitter->SetCurrentChannel(inner_window->DrawList, 0); + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) == 0) + TableMergeDrawChannels(table); + splitter->Merge(inner_window->DrawList); + + // Update ColumnsAutoFitWidth to get us ahead for host using our size to auto-resize without waiting for next BeginTable() + float auto_fit_width_for_fixed = 0.0f; + float auto_fit_width_for_stretched = 0.0f; + float auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min = 0.0f; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + if (IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByIndex, column_n)) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + float column_width_request = ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize)) ? column->WidthRequest : TableGetColumnWidthAuto(table, column); + if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) + auto_fit_width_for_fixed += column_width_request; + else + auto_fit_width_for_stretched += column_width_request; + if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) != 0) + auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min = ImMax(auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min, column_width_request / (column->StretchWeight / table->ColumnsStretchSumWeights)); + } + const float width_spacings = (table->OuterPaddingX * 2.0f) + (table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2) * (table->ColumnsEnabledCount - 1); + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth = width_spacings + (table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f) * table->ColumnsEnabledCount + auto_fit_width_for_fixed + ImMax(auto_fit_width_for_stretched, auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min); + + // Update scroll + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) == 0 && inner_window != outer_window) + { + inner_window->Scroll.x = 0.0f; + } + else if (table->LastResizedColumn != -1 && table->ResizedColumn == -1 && inner_window->ScrollbarX && table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent) + { + // When releasing a column being resized, scroll to keep the resulting column in sight + const float neighbor_width_to_keep_visible = table->MinColumnWidth + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->LastResizedColumn]; + if (column->MaxX < table->InnerClipRect.Min.x) + SetScrollFromPosX(inner_window, column->MaxX - inner_window->Pos.x - neighbor_width_to_keep_visible, 1.0f); + else if (column->MaxX > table->InnerClipRect.Max.x) + SetScrollFromPosX(inner_window, column->MaxX - inner_window->Pos.x + neighbor_width_to_keep_visible, 1.0f); + } + + // Apply resizing/dragging at the end of the frame + if (table->ResizedColumn != -1 && table->InstanceCurrent == table->InstanceInteracted) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->ResizedColumn]; + const float new_x2 = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS); + const float new_width = ImFloor(new_x2 - column->MinX - table->CellSpacingX1 - table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f); + table->ResizedColumnNextWidth = new_width; + } + + // Pop from id stack + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(inner_window->IDStack.back() == table_instance->TableInstanceID, "Mismatching PushID/PopID!"); + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size >= temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize, "Too many PopItemWidth!"); + if (table->InstanceCurrent > 0) + PopID(); + PopID(); + + // Restore window data that we modified + const ImVec2 backup_outer_max_pos = outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos; + inner_window->WorkRect = temp_data->HostBackupWorkRect; + inner_window->ParentWorkRect = temp_data->HostBackupParentWorkRect; + inner_window->SkipItems = table->HostSkipItems; + outer_window->DC.CursorPos = table->OuterRect.Min; + outer_window->DC.ItemWidth = temp_data->HostBackupItemWidth; + outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size = temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize; + outer_window->DC.ColumnsOffset = temp_data->HostBackupColumnsOffset; + + // Layout in outer window + // (FIXME: To allow auto-fit and allow desirable effect of SameLine() we dissociate 'used' vs 'ideal' size by overriding + // CursorPosPrevLine and CursorMaxPos manually. That should be a more general layout feature, see same problem e.g. #3414) + if (inner_window != outer_window) + { + EndChild(); + } + else + { + ItemSize(table->OuterRect.GetSize()); + ItemAdd(table->OuterRect, 0); + } + + // Override declared contents width/height to enable auto-resize while not needlessly adding a scrollbar + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX) + { + // FIXME-TABLE: Could we remove this section? + // ColumnsAutoFitWidth may be one frame ahead here since for Fixed+NoResize is calculated from latest contents + IM_ASSERT((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) == 0); + outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth); + } + else if (temp_data->UserOuterSize.x <= 0.0f) + { + const float decoration_size = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? inner_window->ScrollbarSizes.x : 0.0f; + outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x = ImMax(outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth + decoration_size - temp_data->UserOuterSize.x); + outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.x, ImMin(table->OuterRect.Max.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth)); + } + else + { + outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.x, table->OuterRect.Max.x); + } + if (temp_data->UserOuterSize.y <= 0.0f) + { + const float decoration_size = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY) ? inner_window->ScrollbarSizes.y : 0.0f; + outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.y = ImMax(outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.y, inner_content_max_y + decoration_size - temp_data->UserOuterSize.y); + outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.y, ImMin(table->OuterRect.Max.y, inner_content_max_y)); + } + else + { + // OuterRect.Max.y may already have been pushed downward from the initial value (unless ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY is set) + outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.y, table->OuterRect.Max.y); + } + + // Save settings + if (table->IsSettingsDirty) + TableSaveSettings(table); + table->IsInitializing = false; + + // Clear or restore current table, if any + IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == outer_window && g.CurrentTable == table); + IM_ASSERT(g.TablesTempDataStacked > 0); + temp_data = (--g.TablesTempDataStacked > 0) ? &g.TablesTempData[g.TablesTempDataStacked - 1] : NULL; + g.CurrentTable = temp_data ? g.Tables.GetByIndex(temp_data->TableIndex) : NULL; + if (g.CurrentTable) + { + g.CurrentTable->TempData = temp_data; + g.CurrentTable->DrawSplitter = &temp_data->DrawSplitter; + } + outer_window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = g.CurrentTable ? g.Tables.GetIndex(g.CurrentTable) : -1; + NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX(); +} + +// See "COLUMN SIZING POLICIES" comments at the top of this file +// If (init_width_or_weight <= 0.0f) it is ignored +void ImGui::TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags, float init_width_or_weight, ImGuiID user_id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableSetupColumn() after BeginTable()!"); + IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked == false && "Need to call call TableSetupColumn() before first row!"); + IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_) == 0 && "Illegal to pass StatusMask values to TableSetupColumn()"); + if (table->DeclColumnsCount >= table->ColumnsCount) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(table->DeclColumnsCount < table->ColumnsCount, "Called TableSetupColumn() too many times!"); + return; + } + + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->DeclColumnsCount]; + table->DeclColumnsCount++; + + // Assert when passing a width or weight if policy is entirely left to default, to avoid storing width into weight and vice-versa. + // Give a grace to users of ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX. + if (table->IsDefaultSizingPolicy && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_) == 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) == 0) + IM_ASSERT(init_width_or_weight <= 0.0f && "Can only specify width/weight if sizing policy is set explicitly in either Table or Column."); + + // When passing a width automatically enforce WidthFixed policy + // (whereas TableSetupColumnFlags would default to WidthAuto if table is not Resizable) + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_) == 0 && init_width_or_weight > 0.0f) + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit || (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame) + flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed; + + TableSetupColumnFlags(table, column, flags); + column->UserID = user_id; + flags = column->Flags; + + // Initialize defaults + column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth = init_width_or_weight; + if (table->IsInitializing) + { + // Init width or weight + if (column->WidthRequest < 0.0f && column->StretchWeight < 0.0f) + { + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && init_width_or_weight > 0.0f) + column->WidthRequest = init_width_or_weight; + if (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) + column->StretchWeight = (init_width_or_weight > 0.0f) ? init_width_or_weight : -1.0f; + + // Disable auto-fit if an explicit width/weight has been specified + if (init_width_or_weight > 0.0f) + column->AutoFitQueue = 0x00; + } + + // Init default visibility/sort state + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide) && (table->SettingsLoadedFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) == 0) + column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = false; + if (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort && (table->SettingsLoadedFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) == 0) + { + column->SortOrder = 0; // Multiple columns using _DefaultSort will be reassigned unique SortOrder values when building the sort specs. + column->SortDirection = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending) ? (ImS8)ImGuiSortDirection_Descending : (ImU8)(ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending); + } + } + + // Store name (append with zero-terminator in contiguous buffer) + column->NameOffset = -1; + if (label != NULL && label[0] != 0) + { + column->NameOffset = (ImS16)table->ColumnsNames.size(); + table->ColumnsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1); + } +} + +// [Public] +void ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(int columns, int rows) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableSetupColumn() after BeginTable()!"); + IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked == false && "Need to call TableSetupColumn() before first row!"); + IM_ASSERT(columns >= 0 && columns < IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_COLUMNS); + IM_ASSERT(rows >= 0 && rows < 128); // Arbitrary limit + + table->FreezeColumnsRequest = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)ImMin(columns, table->ColumnsCount) : 0; + table->FreezeColumnsCount = (table->InnerWindow->Scroll.x != 0.0f) ? table->FreezeColumnsRequest : 0; + table->FreezeRowsRequest = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY) ? (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)rows : 0; + table->FreezeRowsCount = (table->InnerWindow->Scroll.y != 0.0f) ? table->FreezeRowsRequest : 0; + table->IsUnfrozenRows = (table->FreezeRowsCount == 0); // Make sure this is set before TableUpdateLayout() so ImGuiListClipper can benefit from it.b + + // Ensure frozen columns are ordered in their section. We still allow multiple frozen columns to be reordered. + // FIXME-TABLE: This work for preserving 2143 into 21|43. How about 4321 turning into 21|43? (preserve relative order in each section) + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->FreezeColumnsRequest; column_n++) + { + int order_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[column_n]; + if (order_n != column_n && order_n >= table->FreezeColumnsRequest) + { + ImSwap(table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]].DisplayOrder, table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[column_n]].DisplayOrder); + ImSwap(table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n], table->DisplayOrderToIndex[column_n]); + } + } +} + +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Simple accessors +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableGetColumnCount() +// - TableGetColumnName() +// - TableGetColumnName() [Internal] +// - TableSetColumnEnabled() +// - TableGetColumnFlags() +// - TableGetCellBgRect() [Internal] +// - TableGetColumnResizeID() [Internal] +// - TableGetHoveredColumn() [Internal] +// - TableGetHoveredRow() [Internal] +// - TableSetBgColor() +//----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +int ImGui::TableGetColumnCount() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + return table ? table->ColumnsCount : 0; +} + +const char* ImGui::TableGetColumnName(int column_n) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return NULL; + if (column_n < 0) + column_n = table->CurrentColumn; + return TableGetColumnName(table, column_n); +} + +const char* ImGui::TableGetColumnName(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n) +{ + if (table->IsLayoutLocked == false && column_n >= table->DeclColumnsCount) + return ""; // NameOffset is invalid at this point + const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (column->NameOffset == -1) + return ""; + return &table->ColumnsNames.Buf[column->NameOffset]; +} + +// Change user accessible enabled/disabled state of a column (often perceived as "showing/hiding" from users point of view) +// Note that end-user can use the context menu to change this themselves (right-click in headers, or right-click in columns body with ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody) +// - Require table to have the ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable flag because we are manipulating user accessible state. +// - Request will be applied during next layout, which happens on the first call to TableNextRow() after BeginTable(). +// - For the getter you can test (TableGetColumnFlags() & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled) != 0. +// - Alternative: the ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled is an overriding/master disable flag which will also hide the column from context menu. +void ImGui::TableSetColumnEnabled(int column_n, bool enabled) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL); + if (!table) + return; + IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable); // See comments above + if (column_n < 0) + column_n = table->CurrentColumn; + IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount); + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = enabled; +} + +// We allow querying for an extra column in order to poll the IsHovered state of the right-most section +ImGuiTableColumnFlags ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(int column_n) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None; + if (column_n < 0) + column_n = table->CurrentColumn; + if (column_n == table->ColumnsCount) + return (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n) ? ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None; + return table->Columns[column_n].Flags; +} + +// Return the cell rectangle based on currently known height. +// - Important: we generally don't know our row height until the end of the row, so Max.y will be incorrect in many situations. +// The only case where this is correct is if we provided a min_row_height to TableNextRow() and don't go below it, or in TableEndRow() when we locked that height. +// - Important: if ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX is set but ImGuiTableFlags_PadInnerX is not set, the outer-most left and right +// columns report a small offset so their CellBgRect can extend up to the outer border. +// FIXME: But the rendering code in TableEndRow() nullifies that with clamping required for scrolling. +ImRect ImGui::TableGetCellBgRect(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n) +{ + const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + float x1 = column->MinX; + float x2 = column->MaxX; + //if (column->PrevEnabledColumn == -1) + // x1 -= table->OuterPaddingX; + //if (column->NextEnabledColumn == -1) + // x2 += table->OuterPaddingX; + x1 = ImMax(x1, table->WorkRect.Min.x); + x2 = ImMin(x2, table->WorkRect.Max.x); + return ImRect(x1, table->RowPosY1, x2, table->RowPosY2); +} + +// Return the resizing ID for the right-side of the given column. +ImGuiID ImGui::TableGetColumnResizeID(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n, int instance_no) +{ + IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount); + ImGuiID instance_id = TableGetInstanceID(table, instance_no); + return instance_id + 1 + column_n; // FIXME: #6140: still not ideal +} + +// Return -1 when table is not hovered. return columns_count if hovering the unused space at the right of the right-most visible column. +int ImGui::TableGetHoveredColumn() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return -1; + return (int)table->HoveredColumnBody; +} + +// Return -1 when table is not hovered. Return maxrow+1 if in table but below last submitted row. +// *IMPORTANT* Unlike TableGetHoveredColumn(), this has a one frame latency in updating the value. +// This difference with is the reason why this is not public yet. +int ImGui::TableGetHoveredRow() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return -1; + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); + return (int)table_instance->HoveredRowLast; +} + +void ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget target, ImU32 color, int column_n) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(target != ImGuiTableBgTarget_None); + + if (color == IM_COL32_DISABLE) + color = 0; + + // We cannot draw neither the cell or row background immediately as we don't know the row height at this point in time. + switch (target) + { + case ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg: + { + if (table->RowPosY1 > table->InnerClipRect.Max.y) // Discard + return; + if (column_n == -1) + column_n = table->CurrentColumn; + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->VisibleMaskByIndex, column_n)) + return; + if (table->RowCellDataCurrent < 0 || table->RowCellData[table->RowCellDataCurrent].Column != column_n) + table->RowCellDataCurrent++; + ImGuiTableCellData* cell_data = &table->RowCellData[table->RowCellDataCurrent]; + cell_data->BgColor = color; + cell_data->Column = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + break; + } + case ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0: + case ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1: + { + if (table->RowPosY1 > table->InnerClipRect.Max.y) // Discard + return; + IM_ASSERT(column_n == -1); + int bg_idx = (target == ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1) ? 1 : 0; + table->RowBgColor[bg_idx] = color; + break; + } + default: + IM_ASSERT(0); + } +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Row changes +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableGetRowIndex() +// - TableNextRow() +// - TableBeginRow() [Internal] +// - TableEndRow() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// [Public] Note: for row coloring we use ->RowBgColorCounter which is the same value without counting header rows +int ImGui::TableGetRowIndex() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return 0; + return table->CurrentRow; +} + +// [Public] Starts into the first cell of a new row +void ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags row_flags, float row_min_height) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + + if (!table->IsLayoutLocked) + TableUpdateLayout(table); + if (table->IsInsideRow) + TableEndRow(table); + + table->LastRowFlags = table->RowFlags; + table->RowFlags = row_flags; + table->RowCellPaddingY = g.Style.CellPadding.y; + table->RowMinHeight = row_min_height; + TableBeginRow(table); + + // We honor min_row_height requested by user, but cannot guarantee per-row maximum height, + // because that would essentially require a unique clipping rectangle per-cell. + table->RowPosY2 += table->RowCellPaddingY * 2.0f; + table->RowPosY2 = ImMax(table->RowPosY2, table->RowPosY1 + row_min_height); + + // Disable output until user calls TableNextColumn() + table->InnerWindow->SkipItems = true; +} + +// [Internal] Only called by TableNextRow() +void ImGui::TableBeginRow(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = table->InnerWindow; + IM_ASSERT(!table->IsInsideRow); + + // New row + table->CurrentRow++; + table->CurrentColumn = -1; + table->RowBgColor[0] = table->RowBgColor[1] = IM_COL32_DISABLE; + table->RowCellDataCurrent = -1; + table->IsInsideRow = true; + + // Begin frozen rows + float next_y1 = table->RowPosY2; + if (table->CurrentRow == 0 && table->FreezeRowsCount > 0) + next_y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->OuterRect.Min.y; + + table->RowPosY1 = table->RowPosY2 = next_y1; + table->RowTextBaseline = 0.0f; + table->RowIndentOffsetX = window->DC.Indent.x - table->HostIndentX; // Lock indent + + window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f; + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + table->RowCellPaddingY); // This allows users to call SameLine() to share LineSize between columns. + window->DC.PrevLineSize = window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); // This allows users to call SameLine() to share LineSize between columns, and to call it from first column too. + window->DC.IsSameLine = window->DC.IsSetPos = false; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = next_y1; + + // Making the header BG color non-transparent will allow us to overlay it multiple times when handling smooth dragging. + if (table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) + { + TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg)); + if (table->CurrentRow == 0) + table->IsUsingHeaders = true; + } +} + +// [Internal] Called by TableNextRow() +void ImGui::TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(window == table->InnerWindow); + IM_ASSERT(table->IsInsideRow); + + if (table->CurrentColumn != -1) + TableEndCell(table); + + // Logging + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(NULL, "|"); + + // Position cursor at the bottom of our row so it can be used for e.g. clipping calculation. However it is + // likely that the next call to TableBeginCell() will reposition the cursor to take account of vertical padding. + window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->RowPosY2; + + // Row background fill + const float bg_y1 = table->RowPosY1; + const float bg_y2 = table->RowPosY2; + const bool unfreeze_rows_actual = (table->CurrentRow + 1 == table->FreezeRowsCount); + const bool unfreeze_rows_request = (table->CurrentRow + 1 == table->FreezeRowsRequest); + if (table->CurrentRow == 0) + TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent)->LastFirstRowHeight = bg_y2 - bg_y1; + + const bool is_visible = (bg_y2 >= table->InnerClipRect.Min.y && bg_y1 <= table->InnerClipRect.Max.y); + if (is_visible) + { + // Update data for TableGetHoveredRow() + if (table->HoveredColumnBody != -1 && g.IO.MousePos.y >= bg_y1 && g.IO.MousePos.y < bg_y2) + TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent)->HoveredRowNext = table->CurrentRow; + + // Decide of background color for the row + ImU32 bg_col0 = 0; + ImU32 bg_col1 = 0; + if (table->RowBgColor[0] != IM_COL32_DISABLE) + bg_col0 = table->RowBgColor[0]; + else if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg) + bg_col0 = GetColorU32((table->RowBgColorCounter & 1) ? ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt : ImGuiCol_TableRowBg); + if (table->RowBgColor[1] != IM_COL32_DISABLE) + bg_col1 = table->RowBgColor[1]; + + // Decide of top border color + ImU32 border_col = 0; + const float border_size = TABLE_BORDER_SIZE; + if (table->CurrentRow > 0 || table->InnerWindow == table->OuterWindow) + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH) + border_col = (table->LastRowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) ? table->BorderColorStrong : table->BorderColorLight; + + const bool draw_cell_bg_color = table->RowCellDataCurrent >= 0; + const bool draw_strong_bottom_border = unfreeze_rows_actual; + if ((bg_col0 | bg_col1 | border_col) != 0 || draw_strong_bottom_border || draw_cell_bg_color) + { + // In theory we could call SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel() but since we know TableEndRow() is + // always followed by a change of clipping rectangle we perform the smallest overwrite possible here. + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) == 0) + window->DrawList->_CmdHeader.ClipRect = table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd.ToVec4(); + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG0); + } + + // Draw row background + // We soft/cpu clip this so all backgrounds and borders can share the same clipping rectangle + if (bg_col0 || bg_col1) + { + ImRect row_rect(table->WorkRect.Min.x, bg_y1, table->WorkRect.Max.x, bg_y2); + row_rect.ClipWith(table->BgClipRect); + if (bg_col0 != 0 && row_rect.Min.y < row_rect.Max.y) + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(row_rect.Min, row_rect.Max, bg_col0); + if (bg_col1 != 0 && row_rect.Min.y < row_rect.Max.y) + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(row_rect.Min, row_rect.Max, bg_col1); + } + + // Draw cell background color + if (draw_cell_bg_color) + { + ImGuiTableCellData* cell_data_end = &table->RowCellData[table->RowCellDataCurrent]; + for (ImGuiTableCellData* cell_data = &table->RowCellData[0]; cell_data <= cell_data_end; cell_data++) + { + // As we render the BG here we need to clip things (for layout we would not) + // FIXME: This cancels the OuterPadding addition done by TableGetCellBgRect(), need to keep it while rendering correctly while scrolling. + const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[cell_data->Column]; + ImRect cell_bg_rect = TableGetCellBgRect(table, cell_data->Column); + cell_bg_rect.ClipWith(table->BgClipRect); + cell_bg_rect.Min.x = ImMax(cell_bg_rect.Min.x, column->ClipRect.Min.x); // So that first column after frozen one gets clipped when scrolling + cell_bg_rect.Max.x = ImMin(cell_bg_rect.Max.x, column->MaxX); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(cell_bg_rect.Min, cell_bg_rect.Max, cell_data->BgColor); + } + } + + // Draw top border + if (border_col && bg_y1 >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && bg_y1 < table->BgClipRect.Max.y) + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, bg_y1), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, bg_y1), border_col, border_size); + + // Draw bottom border at the row unfreezing mark (always strong) + if (draw_strong_bottom_border && bg_y2 >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && bg_y2 < table->BgClipRect.Max.y) + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, bg_y2), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, bg_y2), table->BorderColorStrong, border_size); + } + + // End frozen rows (when we are past the last frozen row line, teleport cursor and alter clipping rectangle) + // We need to do that in TableEndRow() instead of TableBeginRow() so the list clipper can mark end of row and + // get the new cursor position. + if (unfreeze_rows_request) + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + table->Columns[column_n].NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + if (unfreeze_rows_actual) + { + IM_ASSERT(table->IsUnfrozenRows == false); + const float y0 = ImMax(table->RowPosY2 + 1, window->InnerClipRect.Min.y); + table->IsUnfrozenRows = true; + TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent)->LastFrozenHeight = y0 - table->OuterRect.Min.y; + + // BgClipRect starts as table->InnerClipRect, reduce it now and make BgClipRectForDrawCmd == BgClipRect + table->BgClipRect.Min.y = table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min.y = ImMin(y0, window->InnerClipRect.Max.y); + table->BgClipRect.Max.y = table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Max.y = window->InnerClipRect.Max.y; + table->Bg2DrawChannelCurrent = table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen; + IM_ASSERT(table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min.y <= table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Max.y); + + float row_height = table->RowPosY2 - table->RowPosY1; + table->RowPosY2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->WorkRect.Min.y + table->RowPosY2 - table->OuterRect.Min.y; + table->RowPosY1 = table->RowPosY2 - row_height; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + column->DrawChannelCurrent = column->DrawChannelUnfrozen; + column->ClipRect.Min.y = table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min.y; + } + + // Update cliprect ahead of TableBeginCell() so clipper can access to new ClipRect->Min.y + SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, table->Columns[0].ClipRect); + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, table->Columns[0].DrawChannelCurrent); + } + + if (!(table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers)) + table->RowBgColorCounter++; + table->IsInsideRow = false; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Columns changes +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableGetColumnIndex() +// - TableSetColumnIndex() +// - TableNextColumn() +// - TableBeginCell() [Internal] +// - TableEndCell() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +int ImGui::TableGetColumnIndex() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return 0; + return table->CurrentColumn; +} + +// [Public] Append into a specific column +bool ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(int column_n) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return false; + + if (table->CurrentColumn != column_n) + { + if (table->CurrentColumn != -1) + TableEndCell(table); + IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && table->ColumnsCount); + TableBeginCell(table, column_n); + } + + // Return whether the column is visible. User may choose to skip submitting items based on this return value, + // however they shouldn't skip submitting for columns that may have the tallest contribution to row height. + return table->Columns[column_n].IsRequestOutput; +} + +// [Public] Append into the next column, wrap and create a new row when already on last column +bool ImGui::TableNextColumn() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (!table) + return false; + + if (table->IsInsideRow && table->CurrentColumn + 1 < table->ColumnsCount) + { + if (table->CurrentColumn != -1) + TableEndCell(table); + TableBeginCell(table, table->CurrentColumn + 1); + } + else + { + TableNextRow(); + TableBeginCell(table, 0); + } + + // Return whether the column is visible. User may choose to skip submitting items based on this return value, + // however they shouldn't skip submitting for columns that may have the tallest contribution to row height. + return table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].IsRequestOutput; +} + + +// [Internal] Called by TableSetColumnIndex()/TableNextColumn() +// This is called very frequently, so we need to be mindful of unnecessary overhead. +// FIXME-TABLE FIXME-OPT: Could probably shortcut some things for non-active or clipped columns. +void ImGui::TableBeginCell(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + ImGuiWindow* window = table->InnerWindow; + table->CurrentColumn = column_n; + + // Start position is roughly ~~ CellRect.Min + CellPadding + Indent + float start_x = column->WorkMinX; + if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable) + start_x += table->RowIndentOffsetX; // ~~ += window.DC.Indent.x - table->HostIndentX, except we locked it for the row. + + window->DC.CursorPos.x = start_x; + window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->RowPosY1 + table->RowCellPaddingY; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x; + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = start_x - window->Pos.x - window->DC.Indent.x; // FIXME-WORKRECT + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x; // PrevLine.y is preserved. This allows users to call SameLine() to share LineSize between columns. + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = table->RowTextBaseline; + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = (ImGuiNavLayer)column->NavLayerCurrent; + + // Note how WorkRect.Max.y is only set once during layout + window->WorkRect.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + window->WorkRect.Min.x = column->WorkMinX; + window->WorkRect.Max.x = column->WorkMaxX; + window->DC.ItemWidth = column->ItemWidth; + + window->SkipItems = column->IsSkipItems; + if (column->IsSkipItems) + { + g.LastItemData.ID = 0; + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = 0; + } + + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) + { + // FIXME: if we end up drawing all borders/bg in EndTable, could remove this and just assert that channel hasn't changed. + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP); + //IM_ASSERT(table->DrawSplitter._Current == TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP); + } + else + { + // FIXME-TABLE: Could avoid this if draw channel is dummy channel? + SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, column->ClipRect); + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, column->DrawChannelCurrent); + } + + // Logging + if (g.LogEnabled && !column->IsSkipItems) + { + LogRenderedText(&window->DC.CursorPos, "|"); + g.LogLinePosY = FLT_MAX; + } +} + +// [Internal] Called by TableNextRow()/TableSetColumnIndex()/TableNextColumn() +void ImGui::TableEndCell(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn]; + ImGuiWindow* window = table->InnerWindow; + + if (window->DC.IsSetPos) + ErrorCheckUsingSetCursorPosToExtendParentBoundaries(); + + // Report maximum position so we can infer content size per column. + float* p_max_pos_x; + if (table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) + p_max_pos_x = &column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed; // Useful in case user submit contents in header row that is not a TableHeader() call + else + p_max_pos_x = table->IsUnfrozenRows ? &column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen : &column->ContentMaxXFrozen; + *p_max_pos_x = ImMax(*p_max_pos_x, window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x); + if (column->IsEnabled) + table->RowPosY2 = ImMax(table->RowPosY2, window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y + table->RowCellPaddingY); + column->ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidth; + + // Propagate text baseline for the entire row + // FIXME-TABLE: Here we propagate text baseline from the last line of the cell.. instead of the first one. + table->RowTextBaseline = ImMax(table->RowTextBaseline, window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Columns width management +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableGetMaxColumnWidth() [Internal] +// - TableGetColumnWidthAuto() [Internal] +// - TableSetColumnWidth() +// - TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle() [Internal] +// - TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll() [Internal] +// - TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Maximum column content width given current layout. Use column->MinX so this value on a per-column basis. +float ImGui::TableGetMaxColumnWidth(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n) +{ + const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + float max_width = FLT_MAX; + const float min_column_distance = table->MinColumnWidth + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f + table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) + { + // Frozen columns can't reach beyond visible width else scrolling will naturally break. + // (we use DisplayOrder as within a set of multiple frozen column reordering is possible) + if (column->DisplayOrder < table->FreezeColumnsRequest) + { + max_width = (table->InnerClipRect.Max.x - (table->FreezeColumnsRequest - column->DisplayOrder) * min_column_distance) - column->MinX; + max_width = max_width - table->OuterPaddingX - table->CellPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX2; + } + } + else if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible) == 0) + { + // If horizontal scrolling if disabled, we apply a final lossless shrinking of columns in order to make + // sure they are all visible. Because of this we also know that all of the columns will always fit in + // table->WorkRect and therefore in table->InnerRect (because ScrollX is off) + // FIXME-TABLE: This is solved incorrectly but also quite a difficult problem to fix as we also want ClipRect width to match. + // See "table_width_distrib" and "table_width_keep_visible" tests + max_width = table->WorkRect.Max.x - (table->ColumnsEnabledCount - column->IndexWithinEnabledSet - 1) * min_column_distance - column->MinX; + //max_width -= table->CellSpacingX1; + max_width -= table->CellSpacingX2; + max_width -= table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f; + max_width -= table->OuterPaddingX; + } + return max_width; +} + +// Note this is meant to be stored in column->WidthAuto, please generally use the WidthAuto field +float ImGui::TableGetColumnWidthAuto(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column) +{ + const float content_width_body = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXFrozen, column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen) - column->WorkMinX; + const float content_width_headers = column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal - column->WorkMinX; + float width_auto = content_width_body; + if (!(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth)) + width_auto = ImMax(width_auto, content_width_headers); + + // Non-resizable fixed columns preserve their requested width + if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth > 0.0f) + if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) || (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize)) + width_auto = column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth; + + return ImMax(width_auto, table->MinColumnWidth); +} + +// 'width' = inner column width, without padding +void ImGui::TableSetColumnWidth(int column_n, float width) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && table->IsLayoutLocked == false); + IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount); + ImGuiTableColumn* column_0 = &table->Columns[column_n]; + float column_0_width = width; + + // Apply constraints early + // Compare both requested and actual given width to avoid overwriting requested width when column is stuck (minimum size, bounded) + IM_ASSERT(table->MinColumnWidth > 0.0f); + const float min_width = table->MinColumnWidth; + const float max_width = ImMax(min_width, TableGetMaxColumnWidth(table, column_n)); + column_0_width = ImClamp(column_0_width, min_width, max_width); + if (column_0->WidthGiven == column_0_width || column_0->WidthRequest == column_0_width) + return; + + //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("TableSetColumnWidth(%d, %.1f->%.1f)\n", column_0_idx, column_0->WidthGiven, column_0_width); + ImGuiTableColumn* column_1 = (column_0->NextEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column_0->NextEnabledColumn] : NULL; + + // In this surprisingly not simple because of how we support mixing Fixed and multiple Stretch columns. + // - All fixed: easy. + // - All stretch: easy. + // - One or more fixed + one stretch: easy. + // - One or more fixed + more than one stretch: tricky. + // Qt when manual resize is enabled only supports a single _trailing_ stretch column, we support more cases here. + + // When forwarding resize from Wn| to Fn+1| we need to be considerate of the _NoResize flag on Fn+1. + // FIXME-TABLE: Find a way to rewrite all of this so interactions feel more consistent for the user. + // Scenarios: + // - F1 F2 F3 resize from F1| or F2| --> ok: alter ->WidthRequested of Fixed column. Subsequent columns will be offset. + // - F1 F2 F3 resize from F3| --> ok: alter ->WidthRequested of Fixed column. If active, ScrollX extent can be altered. + // - F1 F2 W3 resize from F1| or F2| --> ok: alter ->WidthRequested of Fixed column. If active, ScrollX extent can be altered, but it doesn't make much sense as the Stretch column will always be minimal size. + // - F1 F2 W3 resize from W3| --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1) + // - W1 W2 W3 resize from W1| or W2| --> ok + // - W1 W2 W3 resize from W3| --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1) + // - W1 F2 F3 resize from F3| --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1) + // - W1 F2 resize from F2| --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1) + // - W1 W2 F3 resize from W1| or W2| --> ok + // - W1 F2 W3 resize from W1| or F2| --> ok + // - F1 W2 F3 resize from W2| --> ok + // - F1 W3 F2 resize from W3| --> ok + // - W1 F2 F3 resize from W1| --> ok: equivalent to resizing |F2. F3 will not move. + // - W1 F2 F3 resize from F2| --> ok + // All resizes from a Wx columns are locking other columns. + + // Possible improvements: + // - W1 W2 W3 resize W1| --> to not be stuck, both W2 and W3 would stretch down. Seems possible to fix. Would be most beneficial to simplify resize of all-weighted columns. + // - W3 F1 F2 resize W3| --> to not be stuck past F1|, both F1 and F2 would need to stretch down, which would be lossy or ambiguous. Seems hard to fix. + + // [Resize Rule 1] Can't resize from right of right-most visible column if there is any Stretch column. Implemented in TableUpdateLayout(). + + // If we have all Fixed columns OR resizing a Fixed column that doesn't come after a Stretch one, we can do an offsetting resize. + // This is the preferred resize path + if (column_0->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) + if (!column_1 || table->LeftMostStretchedColumn == -1 || table->Columns[table->LeftMostStretchedColumn].DisplayOrder >= column_0->DisplayOrder) + { + column_0->WidthRequest = column_0_width; + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + return; + } + + // We can also use previous column if there's no next one (this is used when doing an auto-fit on the right-most stretch column) + if (column_1 == NULL) + column_1 = (column_0->PrevEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column_0->PrevEnabledColumn] : NULL; + if (column_1 == NULL) + return; + + // Resizing from right-side of a Stretch column before a Fixed column forward sizing to left-side of fixed column. + // (old_a + old_b == new_a + new_b) --> (new_a == old_a + old_b - new_b) + float column_1_width = ImMax(column_1->WidthRequest - (column_0_width - column_0->WidthRequest), min_width); + column_0_width = column_0->WidthRequest + column_1->WidthRequest - column_1_width; + IM_ASSERT(column_0_width > 0.0f && column_1_width > 0.0f); + column_0->WidthRequest = column_0_width; + column_1->WidthRequest = column_1_width; + if ((column_0->Flags | column_1->Flags) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) + TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(table); + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; +} + +// Disable clipping then auto-fit, will take 2 frames +// (we don't take a shortcut for unclipped columns to reduce inconsistencies when e.g. resizing multiple columns) +void ImGui::TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n) +{ + // Single auto width uses auto-fit + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (!column->IsEnabled) + return; + column->CannotSkipItemsQueue = (1 << 0); + table->AutoFitSingleColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; +} + +void ImGui::TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (!column->IsEnabled && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)) // Cannot reset weight of hidden stretch column + continue; + column->CannotSkipItemsQueue = (1 << 0); + column->AutoFitQueue = (1 << 1); + } +} + +void ImGui::TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + IM_ASSERT(table->LeftMostStretchedColumn != -1 && table->RightMostStretchedColumn != -1); + + // Measure existing quantities + float visible_weight = 0.0f; + float visible_width = 0.0f; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (!column->IsEnabled || !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)) + continue; + IM_ASSERT(column->StretchWeight > 0.0f); + visible_weight += column->StretchWeight; + visible_width += column->WidthRequest; + } + IM_ASSERT(visible_weight > 0.0f && visible_width > 0.0f); + + // Apply new weights + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (!column->IsEnabled || !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)) + continue; + column->StretchWeight = (column->WidthRequest / visible_width) * visible_weight; + IM_ASSERT(column->StretchWeight > 0.0f); + } +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Drawing +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TablePushBackgroundChannel() [Internal] +// - TablePopBackgroundChannel() [Internal] +// - TableSetupDrawChannels() [Internal] +// - TableMergeDrawChannels() [Internal] +// - TableDrawBorders() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Bg2 is used by Selectable (and possibly other widgets) to render to the background. +// Unlike our Bg0/1 channel which we uses for RowBg/CellBg/Borders and where we guarantee all shapes to be CPU-clipped, the Bg2 channel being widgets-facing will rely on regular ClipRect. +void ImGui::TablePushBackgroundChannel() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + + // Optimization: avoid SetCurrentChannel() + PushClipRect() + table->HostBackupInnerClipRect = window->ClipRect; + SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd); + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, table->Bg2DrawChannelCurrent); +} + +void ImGui::TablePopBackgroundChannel() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn]; + + // Optimization: avoid PopClipRect() + SetCurrentChannel() + SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, table->HostBackupInnerClipRect); + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, column->DrawChannelCurrent); +} + +// Allocate draw channels. Called by TableUpdateLayout() +// - We allocate them following storage order instead of display order so reordering columns won't needlessly +// increase overall dormant memory cost. +// - We isolate headers draw commands in their own channels instead of just altering clip rects. +// This is in order to facilitate merging of draw commands. +// - After crossing FreezeRowsCount, all columns see their current draw channel changed to a second set of channels. +// - We only use the dummy draw channel so we can push a null clipping rectangle into it without affecting other +// channels, while simplifying per-row/per-cell overhead. It will be empty and discarded when merged. +// - We allocate 1 or 2 background draw channels. This is because we know TablePushBackgroundChannel() is only used for +// horizontal spanning. If we allowed vertical spanning we'd need one background draw channel per merge group (1-4). +// Draw channel allocation (before merging): +// - NoClip --> 2+D+1 channels: bg0/1 + bg2 + foreground (same clip rect == always 1 draw call) +// - Clip --> 2+D+N channels +// - FreezeRows --> 2+D+N*2 (unless scrolling value is zero) +// - FreezeRows || FreezeColunns --> 3+D+N*2 (unless scrolling value is zero) +// Where D is 1 if any column is clipped or hidden (dummy channel) otherwise 0. +void ImGui::TableSetupDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + const int freeze_row_multiplier = (table->FreezeRowsCount > 0) ? 2 : 1; + const int channels_for_row = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) ? 1 : table->ColumnsEnabledCount; + const int channels_for_bg = 1 + 1 * freeze_row_multiplier; + const int channels_for_dummy = (table->ColumnsEnabledCount < table->ColumnsCount || (memcmp(table->VisibleMaskByIndex, table->EnabledMaskByIndex, ImBitArrayGetStorageSizeInBytes(table->ColumnsCount)) != 0)) ? +1 : 0; + const int channels_total = channels_for_bg + (channels_for_row * freeze_row_multiplier) + channels_for_dummy; + table->DrawSplitter->Split(table->InnerWindow->DrawList, channels_total); + table->DummyDrawChannel = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)((channels_for_dummy > 0) ? channels_total - 1 : -1); + table->Bg2DrawChannelCurrent = TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN; + table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)((table->FreezeRowsCount > 0) ? 2 + channels_for_row : TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN); + + int draw_channel_current = 2; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (column->IsVisibleX && column->IsVisibleY) + { + column->DrawChannelFrozen = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)(draw_channel_current); + column->DrawChannelUnfrozen = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)(draw_channel_current + (table->FreezeRowsCount > 0 ? channels_for_row + 1 : 0)); + if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip)) + draw_channel_current++; + } + else + { + column->DrawChannelFrozen = column->DrawChannelUnfrozen = table->DummyDrawChannel; + } + column->DrawChannelCurrent = column->DrawChannelFrozen; + } + + // Initial draw cmd starts with a BgClipRect that matches the one of its host, to facilitate merge draw commands by default. + // All our cell highlight are manually clipped with BgClipRect. When unfreezing it will be made smaller to fit scrolling rect. + // (This technically isn't part of setting up draw channels, but is reasonably related to be done here) + table->BgClipRect = table->InnerClipRect; + table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd = table->OuterWindow->ClipRect; + table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd = table->HostClipRect; + IM_ASSERT(table->BgClipRect.Min.y <= table->BgClipRect.Max.y); +} + +// This function reorder draw channels based on matching clip rectangle, to facilitate merging them. Called by EndTable(). +// For simplicity we call it TableMergeDrawChannels() but in fact it only reorder channels + overwrite ClipRect, +// actual merging is done by table->DrawSplitter.Merge() which is called right after TableMergeDrawChannels(). +// +// Columns where the contents didn't stray off their local clip rectangle can be merged. To achieve +// this we merge their clip rect and make them contiguous in the channel list, so they can be merged +// by the call to DrawSplitter.Merge() following to the call to this function. +// We reorder draw commands by arranging them into a maximum of 4 distinct groups: +// +// 1 group: 2 groups: 2 groups: 4 groups: +// [ 0. ] no freeze [ 0. ] row freeze [ 01 ] col freeze [ 01 ] row+col freeze +// [ .. ] or no scroll [ 2. ] and v-scroll [ .. ] and h-scroll [ 23 ] and v+h-scroll +// +// Each column itself can use 1 channel (row freeze disabled) or 2 channels (row freeze enabled). +// When the contents of a column didn't stray off its limit, we move its channels into the corresponding group +// based on its position (within frozen rows/columns groups or not). +// At the end of the operation our 1-4 groups will each have a ImDrawCmd using the same ClipRect. +// This function assume that each column are pointing to a distinct draw channel, +// otherwise merge_group->ChannelsCount will not match set bit count of merge_group->ChannelsMask. +// +// Column channels will not be merged into one of the 1-4 groups in the following cases: +// - The contents stray off its clipping rectangle (we only compare the MaxX value, not the MinX value). +// Direct ImDrawList calls won't be taken into account by default, if you use them make sure the ImGui:: bounds +// matches, by e.g. calling SetCursorScreenPos(). +// - The channel uses more than one draw command itself. We drop all our attempt at merging stuff here.. +// we could do better but it's going to be rare and probably not worth the hassle. +// Columns for which the draw channel(s) haven't been merged with other will use their own ImDrawCmd. +// +// This function is particularly tricky to understand.. take a breath. +void ImGui::TableMergeDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImDrawListSplitter* splitter = table->DrawSplitter; + const bool has_freeze_v = (table->FreezeRowsCount > 0); + const bool has_freeze_h = (table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0); + IM_ASSERT(splitter->_Current == 0); + + // Track which groups we are going to attempt to merge, and which channels goes into each group. + struct MergeGroup + { + ImRect ClipRect; + int ChannelsCount = 0; + ImBitArrayPtr ChannelsMask = NULL; + }; + int merge_group_mask = 0x00; + MergeGroup merge_groups[4]; + + // Use a reusable temp buffer for the merge masks as they are dynamically sized. + const int max_draw_channels = (4 + table->ColumnsCount * 2); + const int size_for_masks_bitarrays_one = (int)ImBitArrayGetStorageSizeInBytes(max_draw_channels); + g.TempBuffer.reserve(size_for_masks_bitarrays_one * 5); + memset(g.TempBuffer.Data, 0, size_for_masks_bitarrays_one * 5); + for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(merge_groups); n++) + merge_groups[n].ChannelsMask = (ImBitArrayPtr)(void*)(g.TempBuffer.Data + (size_for_masks_bitarrays_one * n)); + ImBitArrayPtr remaining_mask = (ImBitArrayPtr)(void*)(g.TempBuffer.Data + (size_for_masks_bitarrays_one * 4)); + + // 1. Scan channels and take note of those which can be merged + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->VisibleMaskByIndex, column_n)) + continue; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + + const int merge_group_sub_count = has_freeze_v ? 2 : 1; + for (int merge_group_sub_n = 0; merge_group_sub_n < merge_group_sub_count; merge_group_sub_n++) + { + const int channel_no = (merge_group_sub_n == 0) ? column->DrawChannelFrozen : column->DrawChannelUnfrozen; + + // Don't attempt to merge if there are multiple draw calls within the column + ImDrawChannel* src_channel = &splitter->_Channels[channel_no]; + if (src_channel->_CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && src_channel->_CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && src_channel->_CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL) // Equivalent of PopUnusedDrawCmd() + src_channel->_CmdBuffer.pop_back(); + if (src_channel->_CmdBuffer.Size != 1) + continue; + + // Find out the width of this merge group and check if it will fit in our column + // (note that we assume that rendering didn't stray on the left direction. we should need a CursorMinPos to detect it) + if (!(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip)) + { + float content_max_x; + if (!has_freeze_v) + content_max_x = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen, column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed); // No row freeze + else if (merge_group_sub_n == 0) + content_max_x = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXFrozen, column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed); // Row freeze: use width before freeze + else + content_max_x = column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen; // Row freeze: use width after freeze + if (content_max_x > column->ClipRect.Max.x) + continue; + } + + const int merge_group_n = (has_freeze_h && column_n < table->FreezeColumnsCount ? 0 : 1) + (has_freeze_v && merge_group_sub_n == 0 ? 0 : 2); + IM_ASSERT(channel_no < max_draw_channels); + MergeGroup* merge_group = &merge_groups[merge_group_n]; + if (merge_group->ChannelsCount == 0) + merge_group->ClipRect = ImRect(+FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); + ImBitArraySetBit(merge_group->ChannelsMask, channel_no); + merge_group->ChannelsCount++; + merge_group->ClipRect.Add(src_channel->_CmdBuffer[0].ClipRect); + merge_group_mask |= (1 << merge_group_n); + } + + // Invalidate current draw channel + // (we don't clear DrawChannelFrozen/DrawChannelUnfrozen solely to facilitate debugging/later inspection of data) + column->DrawChannelCurrent = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)-1; + } + + // [DEBUG] Display merge groups +#if 0 + if (g.IO.KeyShift) + for (int merge_group_n = 0; merge_group_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(merge_groups); merge_group_n++) + { + MergeGroup* merge_group = &merge_groups[merge_group_n]; + if (merge_group->ChannelsCount == 0) + continue; + char buf[32]; + ImFormatString(buf, 32, "MG%d:%d", merge_group_n, merge_group->ChannelsCount); + ImVec2 text_pos = merge_group->ClipRect.Min + ImVec2(4, 4); + ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(buf, NULL); + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRectFilled(text_pos, text_pos + text_size, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255)); + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddText(text_pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), buf, NULL); + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(merge_group->ClipRect.Min, merge_group->ClipRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + } +#endif + + // 2. Rewrite channel list in our preferred order + if (merge_group_mask != 0) + { + // We skip channel 0 (Bg0/Bg1) and 1 (Bg2 frozen) from the shuffling since they won't move - see channels allocation in TableSetupDrawChannels(). + const int LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS = 2; + g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.resize(splitter->_Count - LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS); // Use shared temporary storage so the allocation gets amortized + ImDrawChannel* dst_tmp = g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Data; + ImBitArraySetBitRange(remaining_mask, LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS, splitter->_Count); + ImBitArrayClearBit(remaining_mask, table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen); + IM_ASSERT(has_freeze_v == false || table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen != TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN); + int remaining_count = splitter->_Count - (has_freeze_v ? LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS + 1 : LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS); + //ImRect host_rect = (table->InnerWindow == table->OuterWindow) ? table->InnerClipRect : table->HostClipRect; + ImRect host_rect = table->HostClipRect; + for (int merge_group_n = 0; merge_group_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(merge_groups); merge_group_n++) + { + if (int merge_channels_count = merge_groups[merge_group_n].ChannelsCount) + { + MergeGroup* merge_group = &merge_groups[merge_group_n]; + ImRect merge_clip_rect = merge_group->ClipRect; + + // Extend outer-most clip limits to match those of host, so draw calls can be merged even if + // outer-most columns have some outer padding offsetting them from their parent ClipRect. + // The principal cases this is dealing with are: + // - On a same-window table (not scrolling = single group), all fitting columns ClipRect -> will extend and match host ClipRect -> will merge + // - Columns can use padding and have left-most ClipRect.Min.x and right-most ClipRect.Max.x != from host ClipRect -> will extend and match host ClipRect -> will merge + // FIXME-TABLE FIXME-WORKRECT: We are wasting a merge opportunity on tables without scrolling if column doesn't fit + // within host clip rect, solely because of the half-padding difference between window->WorkRect and window->InnerClipRect. + if ((merge_group_n & 1) == 0 || !has_freeze_h) + merge_clip_rect.Min.x = ImMin(merge_clip_rect.Min.x, host_rect.Min.x); + if ((merge_group_n & 2) == 0 || !has_freeze_v) + merge_clip_rect.Min.y = ImMin(merge_clip_rect.Min.y, host_rect.Min.y); + if ((merge_group_n & 1) != 0) + merge_clip_rect.Max.x = ImMax(merge_clip_rect.Max.x, host_rect.Max.x); + if ((merge_group_n & 2) != 0 && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY) == 0) + merge_clip_rect.Max.y = ImMax(merge_clip_rect.Max.y, host_rect.Max.y); + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(merge_group->ClipRect.Min, merge_group->ClipRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200), 0.0f, 0, 1.0f); // [DEBUG] + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddLine(merge_group->ClipRect.Min, merge_clip_rect.Min, IM_COL32(255, 100, 0, 200)); + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddLine(merge_group->ClipRect.Max, merge_clip_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 100, 0, 200)); + remaining_count -= merge_group->ChannelsCount; + for (int n = 0; n < (size_for_masks_bitarrays_one >> 2); n++) + remaining_mask[n] &= ~merge_group->ChannelsMask[n]; + for (int n = 0; n < splitter->_Count && merge_channels_count != 0; n++) + { + // Copy + overwrite new clip rect + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(merge_group->ChannelsMask, n)) + continue; + IM_BITARRAY_CLEARBIT(merge_group->ChannelsMask, n); + merge_channels_count--; + + ImDrawChannel* channel = &splitter->_Channels[n]; + IM_ASSERT(channel->_CmdBuffer.Size == 1 && merge_clip_rect.Contains(ImRect(channel->_CmdBuffer[0].ClipRect))); + channel->_CmdBuffer[0].ClipRect = merge_clip_rect.ToVec4(); + memcpy(dst_tmp++, channel, sizeof(ImDrawChannel)); + } + } + + // Make sure Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen appears in the middle of our groups (whereas Bg0/Bg1 and Bg2 frozen are fixed to 0 and 1) + if (merge_group_n == 1 && has_freeze_v) + memcpy(dst_tmp++, &splitter->_Channels[table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen], sizeof(ImDrawChannel)); + } + + // Append unmergeable channels that we didn't reorder at the end of the list + for (int n = 0; n < splitter->_Count && remaining_count != 0; n++) + { + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(remaining_mask, n)) + continue; + ImDrawChannel* channel = &splitter->_Channels[n]; + memcpy(dst_tmp++, channel, sizeof(ImDrawChannel)); + remaining_count--; + } + IM_ASSERT(dst_tmp == g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Data + g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Size); + memcpy(splitter->_Channels.Data + LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS, g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Data, (splitter->_Count - LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS) * sizeof(ImDrawChannel)); + } +} + +// FIXME-TABLE: This is a mess, need to redesign how we render borders (as some are also done in TableEndRow) +void ImGui::TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow; + if (!table->OuterWindow->ClipRect.Overlaps(table->OuterRect)) + return; + + ImDrawList* inner_drawlist = inner_window->DrawList; + table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(inner_drawlist, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG0); + inner_drawlist->PushClipRect(table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min, table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd.Max, false); + + // Draw inner border and resizing feedback + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); + const float border_size = TABLE_BORDER_SIZE; + const float draw_y1 = table->InnerRect.Min.y; + const float draw_y2_body = table->InnerRect.Max.y; + const float draw_y2_head = table->IsUsingHeaders ? ImMin(table->InnerRect.Max.y, (table->FreezeRowsCount >= 1 ? table->InnerRect.Min.y : table->WorkRect.Min.y) + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight) : draw_y1; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV) + { + for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++) + { + if (!IM_BITARRAY_TESTBIT(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder, order_n)) + continue; + + const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + const bool is_hovered = (table->HoveredColumnBorder == column_n); + const bool is_resized = (table->ResizedColumn == column_n) && (table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent); + const bool is_resizable = (column->Flags & (ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_)) == 0; + const bool is_frozen_separator = (table->FreezeColumnsCount == order_n + 1); + if (column->MaxX > table->InnerClipRect.Max.x && !is_resized) + continue; + + // Decide whether right-most column is visible + if (column->NextEnabledColumn == -1 && !is_resizable) + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) != ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame || (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX)) + continue; + if (column->MaxX <= column->ClipRect.Min.x) // FIXME-TABLE FIXME-STYLE: Assume BorderSize==1, this is problematic if we want to increase the border size.. + continue; + + // Draw in outer window so right-most column won't be clipped + // Always draw full height border when being resized/hovered, or on the delimitation of frozen column scrolling. + ImU32 col; + float draw_y2; + if (is_hovered || is_resized || is_frozen_separator) + { + draw_y2 = draw_y2_body; + col = is_resized ? GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive) : is_hovered ? GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered) : table->BorderColorStrong; + } + else + { + draw_y2 = (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)) ? draw_y2_head : draw_y2_body; + col = (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)) ? table->BorderColorStrong : table->BorderColorLight; + } + + if (draw_y2 > draw_y1) + inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y1), ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y2), col, border_size); + } + } + + // Draw outer border + // FIXME: could use AddRect or explicit VLine/HLine helper? + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) + { + // Display outer border offset by 1 which is a simple way to display it without adding an extra draw call + // (Without the offset, in outer_window it would be rendered behind cells, because child windows are above their + // parent. In inner_window, it won't reach out over scrollbars. Another weird solution would be to display part + // of it in inner window, and the part that's over scrollbars in the outer window..) + // Either solution currently won't allow us to use a larger border size: the border would clipped. + const ImRect outer_border = table->OuterRect; + const ImU32 outer_col = table->BorderColorStrong; + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) == ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) + { + inner_drawlist->AddRect(outer_border.Min, outer_border.Max, outer_col, 0.0f, 0, border_size); + } + else if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV) + { + inner_drawlist->AddLine(outer_border.Min, ImVec2(outer_border.Min.x, outer_border.Max.y), outer_col, border_size); + inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(outer_border.Max.x, outer_border.Min.y), outer_border.Max, outer_col, border_size); + } + else if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH) + { + inner_drawlist->AddLine(outer_border.Min, ImVec2(outer_border.Max.x, outer_border.Min.y), outer_col, border_size); + inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(outer_border.Min.x, outer_border.Max.y), outer_border.Max, outer_col, border_size); + } + } + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH) && table->RowPosY2 < table->OuterRect.Max.y) + { + // Draw bottom-most row border + const float border_y = table->RowPosY2; + if (border_y >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && border_y < table->BgClipRect.Max.y) + inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, border_y), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, border_y), table->BorderColorLight, border_size); + } + + inner_drawlist->PopClipRect(); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Sorting +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableGetSortSpecs() +// - TableFixColumnSortDirection() [Internal] +// - TableGetColumnNextSortDirection() [Internal] +// - TableSetColumnSortDirection() [Internal] +// - TableSortSpecsSanitize() [Internal] +// - TableSortSpecsBuild() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Return NULL if no sort specs (most often when ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable is not set) +// When 'sort_specs->SpecsDirty == true' you should sort your data. It will be true when sorting specs have +// changed since last call, or the first time. Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting, +// else you may wastefully sort your data every frame! +// Lifetime: don't hold on this pointer over multiple frames or past any subsequent call to BeginTable()! +ImGuiTableSortSpecs* ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL); + + if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable)) + return NULL; + + // Require layout (in case TableHeadersRow() hasn't been called) as it may alter IsSortSpecsDirty in some paths. + if (!table->IsLayoutLocked) + TableUpdateLayout(table); + + TableSortSpecsBuild(table); + return &table->SortSpecs; +} + +static inline ImGuiSortDirection TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(ImGuiTableColumn* column, int n) +{ + IM_ASSERT(n < column->SortDirectionsAvailCount); + return (column->SortDirectionsAvailList >> (n << 1)) & 0x03; +} + +// Fix sort direction if currently set on a value which is unavailable (e.g. activating NoSortAscending/NoSortDescending) +void ImGui::TableFixColumnSortDirection(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column) +{ + if (column->SortOrder == -1 || (column->SortDirectionsAvailMask & (1 << column->SortDirection)) != 0) + return; + column->SortDirection = (ImU8)TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, 0); + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; +} + +// Calculate next sort direction that would be set after clicking the column +// - If the PreferSortDescending flag is set, we will default to a Descending direction on the first click. +// - Note that the PreferSortAscending flag is never checked, it is essentially the default and therefore a no-op. +IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImGuiSortDirection_None == 0 && ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending == 1 && ImGuiSortDirection_Descending == 2); +ImGuiSortDirection ImGui::TableGetColumnNextSortDirection(ImGuiTableColumn* column) +{ + IM_ASSERT(column->SortDirectionsAvailCount > 0); + if (column->SortOrder == -1) + return TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, 0); + for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++) + if (column->SortDirection == TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, n)) + return TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, (n + 1) % column->SortDirectionsAvailCount); + IM_ASSERT(0); + return ImGuiSortDirection_None; +} + +// Note that the NoSortAscending/NoSortDescending flags are processed in TableSortSpecsSanitize(), and they may change/revert +// the value of SortDirection. We could technically also do it here but it would be unnecessary and duplicate code. +void ImGui::TableSetColumnSortDirection(int column_n, ImGuiSortDirection sort_direction, bool append_to_sort_specs) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + + if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti)) + append_to_sort_specs = false; + if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate)) + IM_ASSERT(sort_direction != ImGuiSortDirection_None); + + ImGuiTableColumnIdx sort_order_max = 0; + if (append_to_sort_specs) + for (int other_column_n = 0; other_column_n < table->ColumnsCount; other_column_n++) + sort_order_max = ImMax(sort_order_max, table->Columns[other_column_n].SortOrder); + + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + column->SortDirection = (ImU8)sort_direction; + if (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_None) + column->SortOrder = -1; + else if (column->SortOrder == -1 || !append_to_sort_specs) + column->SortOrder = append_to_sort_specs ? sort_order_max + 1 : 0; + + for (int other_column_n = 0; other_column_n < table->ColumnsCount; other_column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* other_column = &table->Columns[other_column_n]; + if (other_column != column && !append_to_sort_specs) + other_column->SortOrder = -1; + TableFixColumnSortDirection(table, other_column); + } + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; +} + +void ImGui::TableSortSpecsSanitize(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable); + + // Clear SortOrder from hidden column and verify that there's no gap or duplicate. + int sort_order_count = 0; + ImU64 sort_order_mask = 0x00; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (column->SortOrder != -1 && !column->IsEnabled) + column->SortOrder = -1; + if (column->SortOrder == -1) + continue; + sort_order_count++; + sort_order_mask |= ((ImU64)1 << column->SortOrder); + IM_ASSERT(sort_order_count < (int)sizeof(sort_order_mask) * 8); + } + + const bool need_fix_linearize = ((ImU64)1 << sort_order_count) != (sort_order_mask + 1); + const bool need_fix_single_sort_order = (sort_order_count > 1) && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti); + if (need_fix_linearize || need_fix_single_sort_order) + { + ImU64 fixed_mask = 0x00; + for (int sort_n = 0; sort_n < sort_order_count; sort_n++) + { + // Fix: Rewrite sort order fields if needed so they have no gap or duplicate. + // (e.g. SortOrder 0 disappeared, SortOrder 1..2 exists --> rewrite then as SortOrder 0..1) + int column_with_smallest_sort_order = -1; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + if ((fixed_mask & ((ImU64)1 << (ImU64)column_n)) == 0 && table->Columns[column_n].SortOrder != -1) + if (column_with_smallest_sort_order == -1 || table->Columns[column_n].SortOrder < table->Columns[column_with_smallest_sort_order].SortOrder) + column_with_smallest_sort_order = column_n; + IM_ASSERT(column_with_smallest_sort_order != -1); + fixed_mask |= ((ImU64)1 << column_with_smallest_sort_order); + table->Columns[column_with_smallest_sort_order].SortOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)sort_n; + + // Fix: Make sure only one column has a SortOrder if ImGuiTableFlags_MultiSortable is not set. + if (need_fix_single_sort_order) + { + sort_order_count = 1; + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + if (column_n != column_with_smallest_sort_order) + table->Columns[column_n].SortOrder = -1; + break; + } + } + } + + // Fallback default sort order (if no column with the ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort flag) + if (sort_order_count == 0 && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate)) + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (column->IsEnabled && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort)) + { + sort_order_count = 1; + column->SortOrder = 0; + column->SortDirection = (ImU8)TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, 0); + break; + } + } + + table->SortSpecsCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)sort_order_count; +} + +void ImGui::TableSortSpecsBuild(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + bool dirty = table->IsSortSpecsDirty; + if (dirty) + { + TableSortSpecsSanitize(table); + table->SortSpecsMulti.resize(table->SortSpecsCount <= 1 ? 0 : table->SortSpecsCount); + table->SortSpecs.SpecsDirty = true; // Mark as dirty for user + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = false; // Mark as not dirty for us + } + + // Write output + ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* sort_specs = (table->SortSpecsCount == 0) ? NULL : (table->SortSpecsCount == 1) ? &table->SortSpecsSingle : table->SortSpecsMulti.Data; + if (dirty && sort_specs != NULL) + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (column->SortOrder == -1) + continue; + IM_ASSERT(column->SortOrder < table->SortSpecsCount); + ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* sort_spec = &sort_specs[column->SortOrder]; + sort_spec->ColumnUserID = column->UserID; + sort_spec->ColumnIndex = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + sort_spec->SortOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column->SortOrder; + sort_spec->SortDirection = column->SortDirection; + } + + table->SortSpecs.Specs = sort_specs; + table->SortSpecs.SpecsCount = table->SortSpecsCount; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Headers +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableGetHeaderRowHeight() [Internal] +// - TableHeadersRow() +// - TableHeader() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +float ImGui::TableGetHeaderRowHeight() +{ + // Caring for a minor edge case: + // Calculate row height, for the unlikely case that some labels may be taller than others. + // If we didn't do that, uneven header height would highlight but smaller one before the tallest wouldn't catch input for all height. + // In your custom header row you may omit this all together and just call TableNextRow() without a height... + float row_height = GetTextLineHeight(); + int columns_count = TableGetColumnCount(); + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns_count; column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = TableGetColumnFlags(column_n); + if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled) && !(flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel)) + row_height = ImMax(row_height, CalcTextSize(TableGetColumnName(column_n)).y); + } + row_height += GetStyle().CellPadding.y * 2.0f; + return row_height; +} + +// [Public] This is a helper to output TableHeader() calls based on the column names declared in TableSetupColumn(). +// The intent is that advanced users willing to create customized headers would not need to use this helper +// and can create their own! For example: TableHeader() may be preceeded by Checkbox() or other custom widgets. +// See 'Demo->Tables->Custom headers' for a demonstration of implementing a custom version of this. +// This code is constructed to not make much use of internal functions, as it is intended to be a template to copy. +// FIXME-TABLE: TableOpenContextMenu() and TableGetHeaderRowHeight() are not public. +void ImGui::TableHeadersRow() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableHeadersRow() after BeginTable()!"); + + // Layout if not already done (this is automatically done by TableNextRow, we do it here solely to facilitate stepping in debugger as it is frequent to step in TableUpdateLayout) + if (!table->IsLayoutLocked) + TableUpdateLayout(table); + + // Open row + const float row_y1 = GetCursorScreenPos().y; + const float row_height = TableGetHeaderRowHeight(); + TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers, row_height); + if (table->HostSkipItems) // Merely an optimization, you may skip in your own code. + return; + + const int columns_count = TableGetColumnCount(); + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns_count; column_n++) + { + if (!TableSetColumnIndex(column_n)) + continue; + + // Push an id to allow unnamed labels (generally accidental, but let's behave nicely with them) + // In your own code you may omit the PushID/PopID all-together, provided you know they won't collide. + const char* name = (TableGetColumnFlags(column_n) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel) ? "" : TableGetColumnName(column_n); + PushID(column_n); + TableHeader(name); + PopID(); + } + + // Allow opening popup from the right-most section after the last column. + ImVec2 mouse_pos = ImGui::GetMousePos(); + if (IsMouseReleased(1) && TableGetHoveredColumn() == columns_count) + if (mouse_pos.y >= row_y1 && mouse_pos.y < row_y1 + row_height) + TableOpenContextMenu(-1); // Will open a non-column-specific popup. +} + +// Emit a column header (text + optional sort order) +// We cpu-clip text here so that all columns headers can be merged into a same draw call. +// Note that because of how we cpu-clip and display sorting indicators, you _cannot_ use SameLine() after a TableHeader() +void ImGui::TableHeader(const char* label) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableHeader() after BeginTable()!"); + IM_ASSERT(table->CurrentColumn != -1); + const int column_n = table->CurrentColumn; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + + // Label + if (label == NULL) + label = ""; + const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, true); + ImVec2 label_pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + + // If we already got a row height, there's use that. + // FIXME-TABLE: Padding problem if the correct outer-padding CellBgRect strays off our ClipRect? + ImRect cell_r = TableGetCellBgRect(table, column_n); + float label_height = ImMax(label_size.y, table->RowMinHeight - table->RowCellPaddingY * 2.0f); + + // Calculate ideal size for sort order arrow + float w_arrow = 0.0f; + float w_sort_text = 0.0f; + char sort_order_suf[4] = ""; + const float ARROW_SCALE = 0.65f; + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort)) + { + w_arrow = ImFloor(g.FontSize * ARROW_SCALE + g.Style.FramePadding.x); + if (column->SortOrder > 0) + { + ImFormatString(sort_order_suf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(sort_order_suf), "%d", column->SortOrder + 1); + w_sort_text = g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + CalcTextSize(sort_order_suf).x; + } + } + + // We feed our unclipped width to the column without writing on CursorMaxPos, so that column is still considering for merging. + float max_pos_x = label_pos.x + label_size.x + w_sort_text + w_arrow; + column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed, column->WorkMaxX); + column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal, max_pos_x); + + // Keep header highlighted when context menu is open. + const bool selected = (table->IsContextPopupOpen && table->ContextPopupColumn == column_n && table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent); + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + ImRect bb(cell_r.Min.x, cell_r.Min.y, cell_r.Max.x, ImMax(cell_r.Max.y, cell_r.Min.y + label_height + g.Style.CellPadding.y * 2.0f)); + ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, label_height)); // Don't declare unclipped width, it'll be fed ContentMaxPosHeadersIdeal + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + return; + + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(cell_r.Min, cell_r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG] + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG] + + // Using AllowOverlap mode because we cover the whole cell, and we want user to be able to submit subsequent items. + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap); + if (held || hovered || selected) + { + const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header); + //RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f); + TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, col, table->CurrentColumn); + } + else + { + // Submit single cell bg color in the case we didn't submit a full header row + if ((table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) == 0) + TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg), table->CurrentColumn); + } + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding); + if (held) + table->HeldHeaderColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + window->DC.CursorPos.y -= g.Style.ItemSpacing.y * 0.5f; + + // Drag and drop to re-order columns. + // FIXME-TABLE: Scroll request while reordering a column and it lands out of the scrolling zone. + if (held && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) && IsMouseDragging(0) && !g.DragDropActive) + { + // While moving a column it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x + table->ReorderColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + table->InstanceInteracted = table->InstanceCurrent; + + // We don't reorder: through the frozen<>unfrozen line, or through a column that is marked with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder. + if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < cell_r.Min.x) + if (ImGuiTableColumn* prev_column = (column->PrevEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column->PrevEnabledColumn] : NULL) + if (!((column->Flags | prev_column->Flags) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder)) + if ((column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest) == (prev_column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest)) + table->ReorderColumnDir = -1; + if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > cell_r.Max.x) + if (ImGuiTableColumn* next_column = (column->NextEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column->NextEnabledColumn] : NULL) + if (!((column->Flags | next_column->Flags) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder)) + if ((column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest) == (next_column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest)) + table->ReorderColumnDir = +1; + } + + // Sort order arrow + const float ellipsis_max = ImMax(cell_r.Max.x - w_arrow - w_sort_text, label_pos.x); + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort)) + { + if (column->SortOrder != -1) + { + float x = ImMax(cell_r.Min.x, cell_r.Max.x - w_arrow - w_sort_text); + float y = label_pos.y; + if (column->SortOrder > 0) + { + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text, 0.70f)); + RenderText(ImVec2(x + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, y), sort_order_suf); + PopStyleColor(); + x += w_sort_text; + } + RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(x, y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down, ARROW_SCALE); + } + + // Handle clicking on column header to adjust Sort Order + if (pressed && table->ReorderColumn != column_n) + { + ImGuiSortDirection sort_direction = TableGetColumnNextSortDirection(column); + TableSetColumnSortDirection(column_n, sort_direction, g.IO.KeyShift); + } + } + + // Render clipped label. Clipping here ensure that in the majority of situations, all our header cells will + // be merged into a single draw call. + //window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(ellipsis_max, label_pos.y), 40, IM_COL32_WHITE); + RenderTextEllipsis(window->DrawList, label_pos, ImVec2(ellipsis_max, label_pos.y + label_height + g.Style.FramePadding.y), ellipsis_max, ellipsis_max, label, label_end, &label_size); + + const bool text_clipped = label_size.x > (ellipsis_max - label_pos.x); + if (text_clipped && hovered && g.ActiveId == 0) + SetItemTooltip("%.*s", (int)(label_end - label), label); + + // We don't use BeginPopupContextItem() because we want the popup to stay up even after the column is hidden + if (IsMouseReleased(1) && IsItemHovered()) + TableOpenContextMenu(column_n); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Context Menu +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableOpenContextMenu() [Internal] +// - TableDrawContextMenu() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Use -1 to open menu not specific to a given column. +void ImGui::TableOpenContextMenu(int column_n) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable; + if (column_n == -1 && table->CurrentColumn != -1) // When called within a column automatically use this one (for consistency) + column_n = table->CurrentColumn; + if (column_n == table->ColumnsCount) // To facilitate using with TableGetHoveredColumn() + column_n = -1; + IM_ASSERT(column_n >= -1 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount); + if (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable)) + { + table->IsContextPopupOpen = true; + table->ContextPopupColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + table->InstanceInteracted = table->InstanceCurrent; + const ImGuiID context_menu_id = ImHashStr("##ContextMenu", 0, table->ID); + OpenPopupEx(context_menu_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None); + } +} + +bool ImGui::TableBeginContextMenuPopup(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + if (!table->IsContextPopupOpen || table->InstanceCurrent != table->InstanceInteracted) + return false; + const ImGuiID context_menu_id = ImHashStr("##ContextMenu", 0, table->ID); + if (BeginPopupEx(context_menu_id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)) + return true; + table->IsContextPopupOpen = false; + return false; +} + +// Output context menu into current window (generally a popup) +// FIXME-TABLE: Ideally this should be writable by the user. Full programmatic access to that data? +void ImGui::TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + bool want_separator = false; + const int column_n = (table->ContextPopupColumn >= 0 && table->ContextPopupColumn < table->ColumnsCount) ? table->ContextPopupColumn : -1; + ImGuiTableColumn* column = (column_n != -1) ? &table->Columns[column_n] : NULL; + + // Sizing + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) + { + if (column != NULL) + { + const bool can_resize = !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) && column->IsEnabled; + if (MenuItem(LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeOne), NULL, false, can_resize)) // "###SizeOne" + TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(table, column_n); + } + + const char* size_all_desc; + if (table->ColumnsEnabledFixedCount == table->ColumnsEnabledCount && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) != ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame) + size_all_desc = LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeAllFit); // "###SizeAll" All fixed + else + size_all_desc = LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_TableSizeAllDefault); // "###SizeAll" All stretch or mixed + if (MenuItem(size_all_desc, NULL)) + TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll(table); + want_separator = true; + } + + // Ordering + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) + { + if (MenuItem(LocalizeGetMsg(ImGuiLocKey_TableResetOrder), NULL, false, !table->IsDefaultDisplayOrder)) + table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest = true; + want_separator = true; + } + + // Reset all (should work but seems unnecessary/noisy to expose?) + //if (MenuItem("Reset all")) + // table->IsResetAllRequest = true; + + // Sorting + // (modify TableOpenContextMenu() to add _Sortable flag if enabling this) +#if 0 + if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && column != NULL && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort) == 0) + { + if (want_separator) + Separator(); + want_separator = true; + + bool append_to_sort_specs = g.IO.KeyShift; + if (MenuItem("Sort in Ascending Order", NULL, column->SortOrder != -1 && column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending, (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending) == 0)) + TableSetColumnSortDirection(table, column_n, ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending, append_to_sort_specs); + if (MenuItem("Sort in Descending Order", NULL, column->SortOrder != -1 && column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Descending, (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending) == 0)) + TableSetColumnSortDirection(table, column_n, ImGuiSortDirection_Descending, append_to_sort_specs); + } +#endif + + // Hiding / Visibility + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) + { + if (want_separator) + Separator(); + want_separator = true; + + PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup, true); + for (int other_column_n = 0; other_column_n < table->ColumnsCount; other_column_n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* other_column = &table->Columns[other_column_n]; + if (other_column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled) + continue; + + const char* name = TableGetColumnName(table, other_column_n); + if (name == NULL || name[0] == 0) + name = ""; + + // Make sure we can't hide the last active column + bool menu_item_active = (other_column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide) ? false : true; + if (other_column->IsUserEnabled && table->ColumnsEnabledCount <= 1) + menu_item_active = false; + if (MenuItem(name, NULL, other_column->IsUserEnabled, menu_item_active)) + other_column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = !other_column->IsUserEnabled; + } + PopItemFlag(); + } +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Settings (.ini data) +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// FIXME: The binding/finding/creating flow are too confusing. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableSettingsInit() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsCalcChunkSize() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsCreate() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsFindByID() [Internal] +// - TableGetBoundSettings() [Internal] +// - TableResetSettings() +// - TableSaveSettings() [Internal] +// - TableLoadSettings() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsHandler_ClearAll() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsHandler_ApplyAll() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsHandler_ReadOpen() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsHandler_ReadLine() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll() [Internal] +// - TableSettingsInstallHandler() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [Init] 1: TableSettingsHandler_ReadXXXX() Load and parse .ini file into TableSettings. +// [Main] 2: TableLoadSettings() When table is created, bind Table to TableSettings, serialize TableSettings data into Table. +// [Main] 3: TableSaveSettings() When table properties are modified, serialize Table data into bound or new TableSettings, mark .ini as dirty. +// [Main] 4: TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll() When .ini file is dirty (which can come from other source), save TableSettings into .ini file. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Clear and initialize empty settings instance +static void TableSettingsInit(ImGuiTableSettings* settings, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, int columns_count_max) +{ + IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(settings) ImGuiTableSettings(); + ImGuiTableColumnSettings* settings_column = settings->GetColumnSettings(); + for (int n = 0; n < columns_count_max; n++, settings_column++) + IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(settings_column) ImGuiTableColumnSettings(); + settings->ID = id; + settings->ColumnsCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)columns_count; + settings->ColumnsCountMax = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)columns_count_max; + settings->WantApply = true; +} + +static size_t TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(int columns_count) +{ + return sizeof(ImGuiTableSettings) + (size_t)columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableColumnSettings); +} + +ImGuiTableSettings* ImGui::TableSettingsCreate(ImGuiID id, int columns_count) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.alloc_chunk(TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(columns_count)); + TableSettingsInit(settings, id, columns_count, columns_count); + return settings; +} + +// Find existing settings +ImGuiTableSettings* ImGui::TableSettingsFindByID(ImGuiID id) +{ + // FIXME-OPT: Might want to store a lookup map for this? + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings)) + if (settings->ID == id) + return settings; + return NULL; +} + +// Get settings for a given table, NULL if none +ImGuiTableSettings* ImGui::TableGetBoundSettings(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + if (table->SettingsOffset != -1) + { + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.ptr_from_offset(table->SettingsOffset); + IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == table->ID); + if (settings->ColumnsCountMax >= table->ColumnsCount) + return settings; // OK + settings->ID = 0; // Invalidate storage, we won't fit because of a count change + } + return NULL; +} + +// Restore initial state of table (with or without saved settings) +void ImGui::TableResetSettings(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + table->IsInitializing = table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + table->IsResetAllRequest = false; + table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = false; // Don't reload from ini + table->SettingsLoadedFlags = ImGuiTableFlags_None; // Mark as nothing loaded so our initialized data becomes authoritative +} + +void ImGui::TableSaveSettings(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + table->IsSettingsDirty = false; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings) + return; + + // Bind or create settings data + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiTableSettings* settings = TableGetBoundSettings(table); + if (settings == NULL) + { + settings = TableSettingsCreate(table->ID, table->ColumnsCount); + table->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsTables.offset_from_ptr(settings); + } + settings->ColumnsCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)table->ColumnsCount; + + // Serialize ImGuiTable/ImGuiTableColumn into ImGuiTableSettings/ImGuiTableColumnSettings + IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == table->ID); + IM_ASSERT(settings->ColumnsCount == table->ColumnsCount && settings->ColumnsCountMax >= settings->ColumnsCount); + ImGuiTableColumn* column = table->Columns.Data; + ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column_settings = settings->GetColumnSettings(); + + bool save_ref_scale = false; + settings->SaveFlags = ImGuiTableFlags_None; + for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++, column++, column_settings++) + { + const float width_or_weight = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) ? column->StretchWeight : column->WidthRequest; + column_settings->WidthOrWeight = width_or_weight; + column_settings->Index = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n; + column_settings->DisplayOrder = column->DisplayOrder; + column_settings->SortOrder = column->SortOrder; + column_settings->SortDirection = column->SortDirection; + column_settings->IsEnabled = column->IsUserEnabled; + column_settings->IsStretch = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) ? 1 : 0; + if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) == 0) + save_ref_scale = true; + + // We skip saving some data in the .ini file when they are unnecessary to restore our state. + // Note that fixed width where initial width was derived from auto-fit will always be saved as InitStretchWeightOrWidth will be 0.0f. + // FIXME-TABLE: We don't have logic to easily compare SortOrder to DefaultSortOrder yet so it's always saved when present. + if (width_or_weight != column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth) + settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable; + if (column->DisplayOrder != n) + settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable; + if (column->SortOrder != -1) + settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable; + if (column->IsUserEnabled != ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide) == 0)) + settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable; + } + settings->SaveFlags &= table->Flags; + settings->RefScale = save_ref_scale ? table->RefScale : 0.0f; + + MarkIniSettingsDirty(); +} + +void ImGui::TableLoadSettings(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = false; + if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings) + return; + + // Bind settings + ImGuiTableSettings* settings; + if (table->SettingsOffset == -1) + { + settings = TableSettingsFindByID(table->ID); + if (settings == NULL) + return; + if (settings->ColumnsCount != table->ColumnsCount) // Allow settings if columns count changed. We could otherwise decide to return... + table->IsSettingsDirty = true; + table->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsTables.offset_from_ptr(settings); + } + else + { + settings = TableGetBoundSettings(table); + } + + table->SettingsLoadedFlags = settings->SaveFlags; + table->RefScale = settings->RefScale; + + // Serialize ImGuiTableSettings/ImGuiTableColumnSettings into ImGuiTable/ImGuiTableColumn + ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column_settings = settings->GetColumnSettings(); + ImU64 display_order_mask = 0; + for (int data_n = 0; data_n < settings->ColumnsCount; data_n++, column_settings++) + { + int column_n = column_settings->Index; + if (column_n < 0 || column_n >= table->ColumnsCount) + continue; + + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n]; + if (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) + { + if (column_settings->IsStretch) + column->StretchWeight = column_settings->WidthOrWeight; + else + column->WidthRequest = column_settings->WidthOrWeight; + column->AutoFitQueue = 0x00; + } + if (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) + column->DisplayOrder = column_settings->DisplayOrder; + else + column->DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + display_order_mask |= (ImU64)1 << column->DisplayOrder; + column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = column_settings->IsEnabled; + column->SortOrder = column_settings->SortOrder; + column->SortDirection = column_settings->SortDirection; + } + + // Validate and fix invalid display order data + const ImU64 expected_display_order_mask = (settings->ColumnsCount == 64) ? ~0 : ((ImU64)1 << settings->ColumnsCount) - 1; + if (display_order_mask != expected_display_order_mask) + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + table->Columns[column_n].DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + + // Rebuild index + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++) + table->DisplayOrderToIndex[table->Columns[column_n].DisplayOrder] = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; +} + +static void TableSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (int i = 0; i != g.Tables.GetMapSize(); i++) + if (ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(i)) + table->SettingsOffset = -1; + g.SettingsTables.clear(); +} + +// Apply to existing windows (if any) +static void TableSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (int i = 0; i != g.Tables.GetMapSize(); i++) + if (ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(i)) + { + table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = true; + table->SettingsOffset = -1; + } +} + +static void* TableSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name) +{ + ImGuiID id = 0; + int columns_count = 0; + if (sscanf(name, "0x%08X,%d", &id, &columns_count) < 2) + return NULL; + + if (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = ImGui::TableSettingsFindByID(id)) + { + if (settings->ColumnsCountMax >= columns_count) + { + TableSettingsInit(settings, id, columns_count, settings->ColumnsCountMax); // Recycle + return settings; + } + settings->ID = 0; // Invalidate storage, we won't fit because of a count change + } + return ImGui::TableSettingsCreate(id, columns_count); +} + +static void TableSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line) +{ + // "Column 0 UserID=0x42AD2D21 Width=100 Visible=1 Order=0 Sort=0v" + ImGuiTableSettings* settings = (ImGuiTableSettings*)entry; + float f = 0.0f; + int column_n = 0, r = 0, n = 0; + + if (sscanf(line, "RefScale=%f", &f) == 1) { settings->RefScale = f; return; } + + if (sscanf(line, "Column %d%n", &column_n, &r) == 1) + { + if (column_n < 0 || column_n >= settings->ColumnsCount) + return; + line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); + char c = 0; + ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column = settings->GetColumnSettings() + column_n; + column->Index = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n; + if (sscanf(line, "UserID=0x%08X%n", (ImU32*)&n, &r)==1) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->UserID = (ImGuiID)n; } + if (sscanf(line, "Width=%d%n", &n, &r) == 1) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->WidthOrWeight = (float)n; column->IsStretch = 0; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable; } + if (sscanf(line, "Weight=%f%n", &f, &r) == 1) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->WidthOrWeight = f; column->IsStretch = 1; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable; } + if (sscanf(line, "Visible=%d%n", &n, &r) == 1) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->IsEnabled = (ImU8)n; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable; } + if (sscanf(line, "Order=%d%n", &n, &r) == 1) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable; } + if (sscanf(line, "Sort=%d%c%n", &n, &c, &r) == 2) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->SortOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n; column->SortDirection = (c == '^') ? ImGuiSortDirection_Descending : ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable; } + } +} + +static void TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings)) + { + if (settings->ID == 0) // Skip ditched settings + continue; + + // TableSaveSettings() may clear some of those flags when we establish that the data can be stripped + // (e.g. Order was unchanged) + const bool save_size = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) != 0; + const bool save_visible = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) != 0; + const bool save_order = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) != 0; + const bool save_sort = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) != 0; + if (!save_size && !save_visible && !save_order && !save_sort) + continue; + + buf->reserve(buf->size() + 30 + settings->ColumnsCount * 50); // ballpark reserve + buf->appendf("[%s][0x%08X,%d]\n", handler->TypeName, settings->ID, settings->ColumnsCount); + if (settings->RefScale != 0.0f) + buf->appendf("RefScale=%g\n", settings->RefScale); + ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column = settings->GetColumnSettings(); + for (int column_n = 0; column_n < settings->ColumnsCount; column_n++, column++) + { + // "Column 0 UserID=0x42AD2D21 Width=100 Visible=1 Order=0 Sort=0v" + bool save_column = column->UserID != 0 || save_size || save_visible || save_order || (save_sort && column->SortOrder != -1); + if (!save_column) + continue; + buf->appendf("Column %-2d", column_n); + if (column->UserID != 0) { buf->appendf(" UserID=%08X", column->UserID); } + if (save_size && column->IsStretch) { buf->appendf(" Weight=%.4f", column->WidthOrWeight); } + if (save_size && !column->IsStretch) { buf->appendf(" Width=%d", (int)column->WidthOrWeight); } + if (save_visible) { buf->appendf(" Visible=%d", column->IsEnabled); } + if (save_order) { buf->appendf(" Order=%d", column->DisplayOrder); } + if (save_sort && column->SortOrder != -1) { buf->appendf(" Sort=%d%c", column->SortOrder, (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? 'v' : '^'); } + buf->append("\n"); + } + buf->append("\n"); + } +} + +void ImGui::TableSettingsAddSettingsHandler() +{ + ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler; + ini_handler.TypeName = "Table"; + ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHashStr("Table"); + ini_handler.ClearAllFn = TableSettingsHandler_ClearAll; + ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = TableSettingsHandler_ReadOpen; + ini_handler.ReadLineFn = TableSettingsHandler_ReadLine; + ini_handler.ApplyAllFn = TableSettingsHandler_ApplyAll; + ini_handler.WriteAllFn = TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll; + AddSettingsHandler(&ini_handler); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Garbage Collection +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TableRemove() [Internal] +// - TableGcCompactTransientBuffers() [Internal] +// - TableGcCompactSettings() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Remove Table (currently only used by TestEngine) +void ImGui::TableRemove(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("TableRemove() id=0x%08X\n", table->ID); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + int table_idx = g.Tables.GetIndex(table); + //memset(table->RawData.Data, 0, table->RawData.size_in_bytes()); + //memset(table, 0, sizeof(ImGuiTable)); + g.Tables.Remove(table->ID, table); + g.TablesLastTimeActive[table_idx] = -1.0f; +} + +// Free up/compact internal Table buffers for when it gets unused +void ImGui::TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("TableGcCompactTransientBuffers() id=0x%08X\n", table->ID); + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(table->MemoryCompacted == false); + table->SortSpecs.Specs = NULL; + table->SortSpecsMulti.clear(); + table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; // FIXME: In theory shouldn't have to leak into user performing a sort on resume. + table->ColumnsNames.clear(); + table->MemoryCompacted = true; + for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++) + table->Columns[n].NameOffset = -1; + g.TablesLastTimeActive[g.Tables.GetIndex(table)] = -1.0f; +} + +void ImGui::TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTableTempData* temp_data) +{ + temp_data->DrawSplitter.ClearFreeMemory(); + temp_data->LastTimeActive = -1.0f; +} + +// Compact and remove unused settings data (currently only used by TestEngine) +void ImGui::TableGcCompactSettings() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + int required_memory = 0; + for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings)) + if (settings->ID != 0) + required_memory += (int)TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(settings->ColumnsCount); + if (required_memory == g.SettingsTables.Buf.Size) + return; + ImChunkStream new_chunk_stream; + new_chunk_stream.Buf.reserve(required_memory); + for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings)) + if (settings->ID != 0) + memcpy(new_chunk_stream.alloc_chunk(TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(settings->ColumnsCount)), settings, TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(settings->ColumnsCount)); + g.SettingsTables.swap(new_chunk_stream); +} + + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Tables: Debugging +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - DebugNodeTable() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + +static const char* DebugNodeTableGetSizingPolicyDesc(ImGuiTableFlags sizing_policy) +{ + sizing_policy &= ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_; + if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit) { return "FixedFit"; } + if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame) { return "FixedSame"; } + if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp) { return "StretchProp"; } + if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame) { return "StretchSame"; } + return "N/A"; +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeTable(ImGuiTable* table) +{ + const bool is_active = (table->LastFrameActive >= GetFrameCount() - 2); // Note that fully clipped early out scrolling tables will appear as inactive here. + if (!is_active) { PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled)); } + bool open = TreeNode(table, "Table 0x%08X (%d columns, in '%s')%s", table->ID, table->ColumnsCount, table->OuterWindow->Name, is_active ? "" : " *Inactive*"); + if (!is_active) { PopStyleColor(); } + if (IsItemHovered()) + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(table->OuterRect.Min, table->OuterRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + if (IsItemVisible() && table->HoveredColumnBody != -1) + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(GetItemRectMin(), GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + if (!open) + return; + if (table->InstanceCurrent > 0) + Text("** %d instances of same table! Some data below will refer to last instance.", table->InstanceCurrent + 1); + bool clear_settings = SmallButton("Clear settings"); + BulletText("OuterRect: Pos: (%.1f,%.1f) Size: (%.1f,%.1f) Sizing: '%s'", table->OuterRect.Min.x, table->OuterRect.Min.y, table->OuterRect.GetWidth(), table->OuterRect.GetHeight(), DebugNodeTableGetSizingPolicyDesc(table->Flags)); + BulletText("ColumnsGivenWidth: %.1f, ColumnsAutoFitWidth: %.1f, InnerWidth: %.1f%s", table->ColumnsGivenWidth, table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth, table->InnerWidth, table->InnerWidth == 0.0f ? " (auto)" : ""); + BulletText("CellPaddingX: %.1f, CellSpacingX: %.1f/%.1f, OuterPaddingX: %.1f", table->CellPaddingX, table->CellSpacingX1, table->CellSpacingX2, table->OuterPaddingX); + BulletText("HoveredColumnBody: %d, HoveredColumnBorder: %d", table->HoveredColumnBody, table->HoveredColumnBorder); + BulletText("ResizedColumn: %d, ReorderColumn: %d, HeldHeaderColumn: %d", table->ResizedColumn, table->ReorderColumn, table->HeldHeaderColumn); + for (int n = 0; n < table->InstanceCurrent + 1; n++) + { + ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, n); + BulletText("Instance %d: HoveredRow: %d, LastOuterHeight: %.2f", n, table_instance->HoveredRowLast, table_instance->LastOuterHeight); + } + //BulletText("BgDrawChannels: %d/%d", 0, table->BgDrawChannelUnfrozen); + float sum_weights = 0.0f; + for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++) + if (table->Columns[n].Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) + sum_weights += table->Columns[n].StretchWeight; + for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[n]; + const char* name = TableGetColumnName(table, n); + char buf[512]; + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), + "Column %d order %d '%s': offset %+.2f to %+.2f%s\n" + "Enabled: %d, VisibleX/Y: %d/%d, RequestOutput: %d, SkipItems: %d, DrawChannels: %d,%d\n" + "WidthGiven: %.1f, Request/Auto: %.1f/%.1f, StretchWeight: %.3f (%.1f%%)\n" + "MinX: %.1f, MaxX: %.1f (%+.1f), ClipRect: %.1f to %.1f (+%.1f)\n" + "ContentWidth: %.1f,%.1f, HeadersUsed/Ideal %.1f/%.1f\n" + "Sort: %d%s, UserID: 0x%08X, Flags: 0x%04X: %s%s%s..", + n, column->DisplayOrder, name, column->MinX - table->WorkRect.Min.x, column->MaxX - table->WorkRect.Min.x, (n < table->FreezeColumnsRequest) ? " (Frozen)" : "", + column->IsEnabled, column->IsVisibleX, column->IsVisibleY, column->IsRequestOutput, column->IsSkipItems, column->DrawChannelFrozen, column->DrawChannelUnfrozen, + column->WidthGiven, column->WidthRequest, column->WidthAuto, column->StretchWeight, column->StretchWeight > 0.0f ? (column->StretchWeight / sum_weights) * 100.0f : 0.0f, + column->MinX, column->MaxX, column->MaxX - column->MinX, column->ClipRect.Min.x, column->ClipRect.Max.x, column->ClipRect.Max.x - column->ClipRect.Min.x, + column->ContentMaxXFrozen - column->WorkMinX, column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen - column->WorkMinX, column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed - column->WorkMinX, column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal - column->WorkMinX, + column->SortOrder, (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? " (Asc)" : (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Descending) ? " (Des)" : "", column->UserID, column->Flags, + (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) ? "WidthStretch " : "", + (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) ? "WidthFixed " : "", + (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) ? "NoResize " : ""); + Bullet(); + Selectable(buf); + if (IsItemHovered()) + { + ImRect r(column->MinX, table->OuterRect.Min.y, column->MaxX, table->OuterRect.Max.y); + GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255)); + } + } + if (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = TableGetBoundSettings(table)) + DebugNodeTableSettings(settings); + if (clear_settings) + table->IsResetAllRequest = true; + TreePop(); +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeTableSettings(ImGuiTableSettings* settings) +{ + if (!TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)settings->ID, "Settings 0x%08X (%d columns)", settings->ID, settings->ColumnsCount)) + return; + BulletText("SaveFlags: 0x%08X", settings->SaveFlags); + BulletText("ColumnsCount: %d (max %d)", settings->ColumnsCount, settings->ColumnsCountMax); + for (int n = 0; n < settings->ColumnsCount; n++) + { + ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column_settings = &settings->GetColumnSettings()[n]; + ImGuiSortDirection sort_dir = (column_settings->SortOrder != -1) ? (ImGuiSortDirection)column_settings->SortDirection : ImGuiSortDirection_None; + BulletText("Column %d Order %d SortOrder %d %s Vis %d %s %7.3f UserID 0x%08X", + n, column_settings->DisplayOrder, column_settings->SortOrder, + (sort_dir == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? "Asc" : (sort_dir == ImGuiSortDirection_Descending) ? "Des" : "---", + column_settings->IsEnabled, column_settings->IsStretch ? "Weight" : "Width ", column_settings->WidthOrWeight, column_settings->UserID); + } + TreePop(); +} + +#else // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + +void ImGui::DebugNodeTable(ImGuiTable*) {} +void ImGui::DebugNodeTableSettings(ImGuiTableSettings*) {} + +#endif + + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc. +// (This is a legacy API, prefer using BeginTable/EndTable!) +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// FIXME: sizing is lossy when columns width is very small (default width may turn negative etc.) +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel() [Internal] +// - GetColumnIndex() +// - GetColumnsCount() +// - GetColumnOffset() +// - GetColumnWidth() +// - SetColumnOffset() +// - SetColumnWidth() +// - PushColumnClipRect() [Internal] +// - PushColumnsBackground() [Internal] +// - PopColumnsBackground() [Internal] +// - FindOrCreateColumns() [Internal] +// - GetColumnsID() [Internal] +// - BeginColumns() +// - NextColumn() +// - EndColumns() +// - Columns() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// [Internal] Small optimization to avoid calls to PopClipRect/SetCurrentChannel/PushClipRect in sequences, +// they would meddle many times with the underlying ImDrawCmd. +// Instead, we do a preemptive overwrite of clipping rectangle _without_ altering the command-buffer and let +// the subsequent single call to SetCurrentChannel() does it things once. +void ImGui::SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& clip_rect) +{ + ImVec4 clip_rect_vec4 = clip_rect.ToVec4(); + window->ClipRect = clip_rect; + window->DrawList->_CmdHeader.ClipRect = clip_rect_vec4; + window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.Data[window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.Size - 1] = clip_rect_vec4; +} + +int ImGui::GetColumnIndex() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Current : 0; +} + +int ImGui::GetColumnsCount() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Count : 1; +} + +float ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset_norm) +{ + return offset_norm * (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX); +} + +float ImGui::GetColumnNormFromOffset(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset) +{ + return offset / (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX); +} + +static const float COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH = 4.0f; + +static float GetDraggedColumnOffset(ImGuiOldColumns* columns, int column_index) +{ + // Active (dragged) column always follow mouse. The reason we need this is that dragging a column to the right edge of an auto-resizing + // window creates a feedback loop because we store normalized positions. So while dragging we enforce absolute positioning. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(column_index > 0); // We are not supposed to drag column 0. + IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == columns->ID + ImGuiID(column_index)); + + float x = g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH - window->Pos.x; + x = ImMax(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index - 1) + g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing); + if ((columns->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths)) + x = ImMin(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index + 1) - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing); + + return x; +} + +float ImGui::GetColumnOffset(int column_index) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + if (columns == NULL) + return 0.0f; + + if (column_index < 0) + column_index = columns->Current; + IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size); + + const float t = columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm; + const float x_offset = ImLerp(columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMaxX, t); + return x_offset; +} + +static float GetColumnWidthEx(ImGuiOldColumns* columns, int column_index, bool before_resize = false) +{ + if (column_index < 0) + column_index = columns->Current; + + float offset_norm; + if (before_resize) + offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNormBeforeResize - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNormBeforeResize; + else + offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm; + return ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, offset_norm); +} + +float ImGui::GetColumnWidth(int column_index) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + if (columns == NULL) + return GetContentRegionAvail().x; + + if (column_index < 0) + column_index = columns->Current; + return GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm); +} + +void ImGui::SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL); + + if (column_index < 0) + column_index = columns->Current; + IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size); + + const bool preserve_width = !(columns->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths) && (column_index < columns->Count - 1); + const float width = preserve_width ? GetColumnWidthEx(columns, column_index, columns->IsBeingResized) : 0.0f; + + if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoForceWithinWindow)) + offset = ImMin(offset, columns->OffMaxX - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing * (columns->Count - column_index)); + columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm = GetColumnNormFromOffset(columns, offset - columns->OffMinX); + + if (preserve_width) + SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, offset + ImMax(g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing, width)); +} + +void ImGui::SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL); + + if (column_index < 0) + column_index = columns->Current; + SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, GetColumnOffset(column_index) + width); +} + +void ImGui::PushColumnClipRect(int column_index) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + if (column_index < 0) + column_index = columns->Current; + + ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[column_index]; + PushClipRect(column->ClipRect.Min, column->ClipRect.Max, false); +} + +// Get into the columns background draw command (which is generally the same draw command as before we called BeginColumns) +void ImGui::PushColumnsBackground() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + if (columns->Count == 1) + return; + + // Optimization: avoid SetCurrentChannel() + PushClipRect() + columns->HostBackupClipRect = window->ClipRect; + SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, columns->HostInitialClipRect); + columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, 0); +} + +void ImGui::PopColumnsBackground() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead(); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + if (columns->Count == 1) + return; + + // Optimization: avoid PopClipRect() + SetCurrentChannel() + SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, columns->HostBackupClipRect); + columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, columns->Current + 1); +} + +ImGuiOldColumns* ImGui::FindOrCreateColumns(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id) +{ + // We have few columns per window so for now we don't need bother much with turning this into a faster lookup. + for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++) + if (window->ColumnsStorage[n].ID == id) + return &window->ColumnsStorage[n]; + + window->ColumnsStorage.push_back(ImGuiOldColumns()); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage.back(); + columns->ID = id; + return columns; +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetColumnsID(const char* str_id, int columns_count) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + + // Differentiate column ID with an arbitrary prefix for cases where users name their columns set the same as another widget. + // In addition, when an identifier isn't explicitly provided we include the number of columns in the hash to make it uniquer. + PushID(0x11223347 + (str_id ? 0 : columns_count)); + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id ? str_id : "columns"); + PopID(); + + return id; +} + +void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + + IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1); + IM_ASSERT(window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL); // Nested columns are currently not supported + + // Acquire storage for the columns set + ImGuiID id = GetColumnsID(str_id, columns_count); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = FindOrCreateColumns(window, id); + IM_ASSERT(columns->ID == id); + columns->Current = 0; + columns->Count = columns_count; + columns->Flags = flags; + window->DC.CurrentColumns = columns; + window->DC.NavIsScrollPushableX = false; // Shortcut for NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX(); + + columns->HostCursorPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + columns->HostCursorMaxPosX = window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x; + columns->HostInitialClipRect = window->ClipRect; + columns->HostBackupParentWorkRect = window->ParentWorkRect; + window->ParentWorkRect = window->WorkRect; + + // Set state for first column + // We aim so that the right-most column will have the same clipping width as other after being clipped by parent ClipRect + const float column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x; + const float half_clip_extend_x = ImFloor(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f, window->WindowBorderSize)); + const float max_1 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + column_padding - ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f); + const float max_2 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + half_clip_extend_x; + columns->OffMinX = window->DC.Indent.x - column_padding + ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f); + columns->OffMaxX = ImMax(ImMin(max_1, max_2) - window->Pos.x, columns->OffMinX + 1.0f); + columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + + // Clear data if columns count changed + if (columns->Columns.Size != 0 && columns->Columns.Size != columns_count + 1) + columns->Columns.resize(0); + + // Initialize default widths + columns->IsFirstFrame = (columns->Columns.Size == 0); + if (columns->Columns.Size == 0) + { + columns->Columns.reserve(columns_count + 1); + for (int n = 0; n < columns_count + 1; n++) + { + ImGuiOldColumnData column; + column.OffsetNorm = n / (float)columns_count; + columns->Columns.push_back(column); + } + } + + for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++) + { + // Compute clipping rectangle + ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n]; + float clip_x1 = IM_ROUND(window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n)); + float clip_x2 = IM_ROUND(window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n + 1) - 1.0f); + column->ClipRect = ImRect(clip_x1, -FLT_MAX, clip_x2, +FLT_MAX); + column->ClipRect.ClipWithFull(window->ClipRect); + } + + if (columns->Count > 1) + { + columns->Splitter.Split(window->DrawList, 1 + columns->Count); + columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, 1); + PushColumnClipRect(0); + } + + // We don't generally store Indent.x inside ColumnsOffset because it may be manipulated by the user. + float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current); + float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1); + float width = offset_1 - offset_0; + PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f); + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f); + window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x); + window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding; + window->WorkRect.Max.y = window->ContentRegionRect.Max.y; +} + +void ImGui::NextColumn() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems || window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + + if (columns->Count == 1) + { + window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x); + IM_ASSERT(columns->Current == 0); + return; + } + + // Next column + if (++columns->Current == columns->Count) + columns->Current = 0; + + PopItemWidth(); + + // Optimization: avoid PopClipRect() + SetCurrentChannel() + PushClipRect() + // (which would needlessly attempt to update commands in the wrong channel, then pop or overwrite them), + ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[columns->Current]; + SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, column->ClipRect); + columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, columns->Current + 1); + + const float column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x; + columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y); + if (columns->Current > 0) + { + // Columns 1+ ignore IndentX (by canceling it out) + // FIXME-COLUMNS: Unnecessary, could be locked? + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current) - window->DC.Indent.x + column_padding; + } + else + { + // New row/line: column 0 honor IndentX. + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f); + window->DC.IsSameLine = false; + columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY; + } + window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x); + window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY; + window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f; + + // FIXME-COLUMNS: Share code with BeginColumns() - move code on columns setup. + float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current); + float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1); + float width = offset_1 - offset_0; + PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f); + window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding; +} + +void ImGui::EndColumns() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL); + + PopItemWidth(); + if (columns->Count > 1) + { + PopClipRect(); + columns->Splitter.Merge(window->DrawList); + } + + const ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags = columns->Flags; + columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y); + window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMaxY; + if (!(flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_GrowParentContentsSize)) + window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = columns->HostCursorMaxPosX; // Restore cursor max pos, as columns don't grow parent + + // Draw columns borders and handle resize + // The IsBeingResized flag ensure we preserve pre-resize columns width so back-and-forth are not lossy + bool is_being_resized = false; + if (!(flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder) && !window->SkipItems) + { + // We clip Y boundaries CPU side because very long triangles are mishandled by some GPU drivers. + const float y1 = ImMax(columns->HostCursorPosY, window->ClipRect.Min.y); + const float y2 = ImMin(window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y); + int dragging_column = -1; + for (int n = 1; n < columns->Count; n++) + { + ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n]; + float x = window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n); + const ImGuiID column_id = columns->ID + ImGuiID(n); + const float column_hit_hw = COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH; + const ImRect column_hit_rect(ImVec2(x - column_hit_hw, y1), ImVec2(x + column_hit_hw, y2)); + if (!ItemAdd(column_hit_rect, column_id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav)) + continue; + + bool hovered = false, held = false; + if (!(flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize)) + { + ButtonBehavior(column_hit_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held); + if (hovered || held) + g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW; + if (held && !(column->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize)) + dragging_column = n; + } + + // Draw column + const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator); + const float xi = IM_FLOOR(x); + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, y1 + 1.0f), ImVec2(xi, y2), col); + } + + // Apply dragging after drawing the column lines, so our rendered lines are in sync with how items were displayed during the frame. + if (dragging_column != -1) + { + if (!columns->IsBeingResized) + for (int n = 0; n < columns->Count + 1; n++) + columns->Columns[n].OffsetNormBeforeResize = columns->Columns[n].OffsetNorm; + columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized = true; + float x = GetDraggedColumnOffset(columns, dragging_column); + SetColumnOffset(dragging_column, x); + } + } + columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized; + + window->WorkRect = window->ParentWorkRect; + window->ParentWorkRect = columns->HostBackupParentWorkRect; + window->DC.CurrentColumns = NULL; + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f; + window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x); + NavUpdateCurrentWindowIsScrollPushableX(); +} + +void ImGui::Columns(int columns_count, const char* id, bool border) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1); + + ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags = (border ? 0 : ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder); + //flags |= ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths; // NB: Legacy behavior + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns; + if (columns != NULL && columns->Count == columns_count && columns->Flags == flags) + return; + + if (columns != NULL) + EndColumns(); + + if (columns_count != 1) + BeginColumns(id, columns_count, flags); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_widgets.cpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_widgets.cpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a5038b --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imgui_widgets.cpp @@ -0,0 +1,8705 @@ +// dear imgui, v1.89.9 +// (widgets code) + +/* + +Index of this file: + +// [SECTION] Forward Declarations +// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: Main (Button, Image, Checkbox, RadioButton, ProgressBar, Bullet, etc.) +// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers (Spacing, Dummy, NewLine, Separator, etc.) +// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox +// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers +// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline +// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable +// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox +// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram +// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers +// [SECTION] Widgets: MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc. +// [SECTION] Widgets: Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc. + +*/ + +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS) +#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS +#endif + +#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS +#endif + +#include "imgui.h" +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE +#include "imgui_internal.h" + +// System includes +#include // intptr_t + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Warnings +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Visual Studio warnings +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#pragma warning (disable: 4127) // condition expression is constant +#pragma warning (disable: 4996) // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen +#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later +#pragma warning (disable: 5054) // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types +#endif +#pragma warning (disable: 26451) // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2). +#pragma warning (disable: 26812) // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). +#endif + +// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything +#if defined(__clang__) +#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option") +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great! +#endif +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas" // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx' +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast" // warning: use of old-style cast // yes, they are more terse. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal" // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format string is not a string literal // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant" // warning: zero as null pointer constant // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0 +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double. +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wenum-enum-conversion" // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion"// warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated +#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion" // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision +#elif defined(__GNUC__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas" // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral" // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess" // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion" // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated +#endif + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Data +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Widgets +static const float DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER = 0.70f; // Time for drag-hold to activate items accepting the ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold button behavior. +static const float DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR = 0.50f; // Multiplier for the default value of io.MouseDragThreshold to make DragFloat/DragInt react faster to mouse drags. + +// Those MIN/MAX values are not define because we need to point to them +static const signed char IM_S8_MIN = -128; +static const signed char IM_S8_MAX = 127; +static const unsigned char IM_U8_MIN = 0; +static const unsigned char IM_U8_MAX = 0xFF; +static const signed short IM_S16_MIN = -32768; +static const signed short IM_S16_MAX = 32767; +static const unsigned short IM_U16_MIN = 0; +static const unsigned short IM_U16_MAX = 0xFFFF; +static const ImS32 IM_S32_MIN = INT_MIN; // (-2147483647 - 1), (0x80000000); +static const ImS32 IM_S32_MAX = INT_MAX; // (2147483647), (0x7FFFFFFF) +static const ImU32 IM_U32_MIN = 0; +static const ImU32 IM_U32_MAX = UINT_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFF) +#ifdef LLONG_MIN +static const ImS64 IM_S64_MIN = LLONG_MIN; // (-9223372036854775807ll - 1ll); +static const ImS64 IM_S64_MAX = LLONG_MAX; // (9223372036854775807ll); +#else +static const ImS64 IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1; +static const ImS64 IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL; +#endif +static const ImU64 IM_U64_MIN = 0; +#ifdef ULLONG_MAX +static const ImU64 IM_U64_MAX = ULLONG_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull); +#else +static const ImU64 IM_U64_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1); +#endif + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Forward Declarations +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// For InputTextEx() +static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(ImGuiContext* ctx, unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data, ImGuiInputSource input_source); +static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end); +static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImGuiContext* ctx, const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining = NULL, ImVec2* out_offset = NULL, bool stop_on_new_line = false); + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TextEx() [Internal] +// - TextUnformatted() +// - Text() +// - TextV() +// - TextColored() +// - TextColoredV() +// - TextDisabled() +// - TextDisabledV() +// - TextWrapped() +// - TextWrappedV() +// - LabelText() +// - LabelTextV() +// - BulletText() +// - BulletTextV() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::TextEx(const char* text, const char* text_end, ImGuiTextFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Accept null ranges + if (text == text_end) + text = text_end = ""; + + // Calculate length + const char* text_begin = text; + if (text_end == NULL) + text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT + + const ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); + const float wrap_pos_x = window->DC.TextWrapPos; + const bool wrap_enabled = (wrap_pos_x >= 0.0f); + if (text_end - text <= 2000 || wrap_enabled) + { + // Common case + const float wrap_width = wrap_enabled ? CalcWrapWidthForPos(window->DC.CursorPos, wrap_pos_x) : 0.0f; + const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false, wrap_width); + + ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size); + ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0)) + return; + + // Render (we don't hide text after ## in this end-user function) + RenderTextWrapped(bb.Min, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width); + } + else + { + // Long text! + // Perform manual coarse clipping to optimize for long multi-line text + // - From this point we will only compute the width of lines that are visible. Optimization only available when word-wrapping is disabled. + // - We also don't vertically center the text within the line full height, which is unlikely to matter because we are likely the biggest and only item on the line. + // - We use memchr(), pay attention that well optimized versions of those str/mem functions are much faster than a casually written loop. + const char* line = text; + const float line_height = GetTextLineHeight(); + ImVec2 text_size(0, 0); + + // Lines to skip (can't skip when logging text) + ImVec2 pos = text_pos; + if (!g.LogEnabled) + { + int lines_skippable = (int)((window->ClipRect.Min.y - text_pos.y) / line_height); + if (lines_skippable > 0) + { + int lines_skipped = 0; + while (line < text_end && lines_skipped < lines_skippable) + { + const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line); + if (!line_end) + line_end = text_end; + if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0) + text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x); + line = line_end + 1; + lines_skipped++; + } + pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height; + } + } + + // Lines to render + if (line < text_end) + { + ImRect line_rect(pos, pos + ImVec2(FLT_MAX, line_height)); + while (line < text_end) + { + if (IsClippedEx(line_rect, 0)) + break; + + const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line); + if (!line_end) + line_end = text_end; + text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x); + RenderText(pos, line, line_end, false); + line = line_end + 1; + line_rect.Min.y += line_height; + line_rect.Max.y += line_height; + pos.y += line_height; + } + + // Count remaining lines + int lines_skipped = 0; + while (line < text_end) + { + const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line); + if (!line_end) + line_end = text_end; + if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0) + text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x); + line = line_end + 1; + lines_skipped++; + } + pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height; + } + text_size.y = (pos - text_pos).y; + + ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size); + ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f); + ItemAdd(bb, 0); + } +} + +void ImGui::TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end) +{ + TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText); +} + +void ImGui::Text(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + TextV(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::TextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + const char* text, *text_end; + ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&text, &text_end, fmt, args); + TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText); +} + +void ImGui::TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + TextColoredV(col, fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col); + TextV(fmt, args); + PopStyleColor(); +} + +void ImGui::TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + TextDisabledV(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]); + TextV(fmt, args); + PopStyleColor(); +} + +void ImGui::TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + TextWrappedV(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +void ImGui::TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const bool need_backup = (g.CurrentWindow->DC.TextWrapPos < 0.0f); // Keep existing wrap position if one is already set + if (need_backup) + PushTextWrapPos(0.0f); + TextV(fmt, args); + if (need_backup) + PopTextWrapPos(); +} + +void ImGui::LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + LabelTextV(label, fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +// Add a label+text combo aligned to other label+value widgets +void ImGui::LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const float w = CalcItemWidth(); + + const char* value_text_begin, *value_text_end; + ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&value_text_begin, &value_text_end, fmt, args); + const ImVec2 value_size = CalcTextSize(value_text_begin, value_text_end, false); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + const ImRect value_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(w, value_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2)); + const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(w + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), ImMax(value_size.y, label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y * 2)); + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0)) + return; + + // Render + RenderTextClipped(value_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, value_bb.Max, value_text_begin, value_text_end, &value_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderText(ImVec2(value_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, value_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label); +} + +void ImGui::BulletText(const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + BulletTextV(fmt, args); + va_end(args); +} + +// Text with a little bullet aligned to the typical tree node. +void ImGui::BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + + const char* text_begin, *text_end; + ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&text_begin, &text_end, fmt, args); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false); + const ImVec2 total_size = ImVec2(g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? (label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2) : 0.0f), label_size.y); // Empty text doesn't add padding + ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset; + ItemSize(total_size, 0.0f); + const ImRect bb(pos, pos + total_size); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0)) + return; + + // Render + ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text); + RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize * 0.5f, g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col); + RenderText(bb.Min + ImVec2(g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x * 2, 0.0f), text_begin, text_end, false); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: Main +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ButtonBehavior() [Internal] +// - Button() +// - SmallButton() +// - InvisibleButton() +// - ArrowButton() +// - CloseButton() [Internal] +// - CollapseButton() [Internal] +// - GetWindowScrollbarID() [Internal] +// - GetWindowScrollbarRect() [Internal] +// - Scrollbar() [Internal] +// - ScrollbarEx() [Internal] +// - Image() +// - ImageButton() +// - Checkbox() +// - CheckboxFlagsT() [Internal] +// - CheckboxFlags() +// - RadioButton() +// - ProgressBar() +// - Bullet() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// The ButtonBehavior() function is key to many interactions and used by many/most widgets. +// Because we handle so many cases (keyboard/gamepad navigation, drag and drop) and many specific behavior (via ImGuiButtonFlags_), +// this code is a little complex. +// By far the most common path is interacting with the Mouse using the default ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease button behavior. +// See the series of events below and the corresponding state reported by dear imgui: +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// with PressedOnClickRelease: return-value IsItemHovered() IsItemActive() IsItemActivated() IsItemDeactivated() IsItemClicked() +// Frame N+0 (mouse is outside bb) - - - - - - +// Frame N+1 (mouse moves inside bb) - true - - - - +// Frame N+2 (mouse button is down) - true true true - true +// Frame N+3 (mouse button is down) - true true - - - +// Frame N+4 (mouse moves outside bb) - - true - - - +// Frame N+5 (mouse moves inside bb) - true true - - - +// Frame N+6 (mouse button is released) true true - - true - +// Frame N+7 (mouse button is released) - true - - - - +// Frame N+8 (mouse moves outside bb) - - - - - - +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// with PressedOnClick: return-value IsItemHovered() IsItemActive() IsItemActivated() IsItemDeactivated() IsItemClicked() +// Frame N+2 (mouse button is down) true true true true - true +// Frame N+3 (mouse button is down) - true true - - - +// Frame N+6 (mouse button is released) - true - - true - +// Frame N+7 (mouse button is released) - true - - - - +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// with PressedOnRelease: return-value IsItemHovered() IsItemActive() IsItemActivated() IsItemDeactivated() IsItemClicked() +// Frame N+2 (mouse button is down) - true - - - true +// Frame N+3 (mouse button is down) - true - - - - +// Frame N+6 (mouse button is released) true true - - - - +// Frame N+7 (mouse button is released) - true - - - - +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// with PressedOnDoubleClick: return-value IsItemHovered() IsItemActive() IsItemActivated() IsItemDeactivated() IsItemClicked() +// Frame N+0 (mouse button is down) - true - - - true +// Frame N+1 (mouse button is down) - true - - - - +// Frame N+2 (mouse button is released) - true - - - - +// Frame N+3 (mouse button is released) - true - - - - +// Frame N+4 (mouse button is down) true true true true - true +// Frame N+5 (mouse button is down) - true true - - - +// Frame N+6 (mouse button is released) - true - - true - +// Frame N+7 (mouse button is released) - true - - - - +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// Note that some combinations are supported, +// - PressedOnDragDropHold can generally be associated with any flag. +// - PressedOnDoubleClick can be associated by PressedOnClickRelease/PressedOnRelease, in which case the second release event won't be reported. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// The behavior of the return-value changes when ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat is set: +// Repeat+ Repeat+ Repeat+ Repeat+ +// PressedOnClickRelease PressedOnClick PressedOnRelease PressedOnDoubleClick +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Frame N+0 (mouse button is down) - true - true +// ... - - - - +// Frame N + RepeatDelay true true - true +// ... - - - - +// Frame N + RepeatDelay + RepeatRate*N true true - true +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +bool ImGui::ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + + // Default only reacts to left mouse button + if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonDefault_; + + // Default behavior requires click + release inside bounding box + if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDefault_; + + // Default behavior inherited from item flags + // Note that _both_ ButtonFlags and ItemFlags are valid sources, so copy one into the item_flags and only check that. + ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = (g.LastItemData.ID == id ? g.LastItemData.InFlags : g.CurrentItemFlags); + if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap) + item_flags |= ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap; + if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) + item_flags |= ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat; + + ImGuiWindow* backup_hovered_window = g.HoveredWindow; + const bool flatten_hovered_children = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredWindow && g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow == window; + if (flatten_hovered_children) + g.HoveredWindow = window; + +#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE + // Alternate registration spot, for when caller didn't use ItemAdd() + if (id != 0 && g.LastItemData.ID != id) + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(id, bb, NULL); +#endif + + bool pressed = false; + bool hovered = ItemHoverable(bb, id, item_flags); + + // Special mode for Drag and Drop where holding button pressed for a long time while dragging another item triggers the button + if (g.DragDropActive && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold) && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers)) + if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem)) + { + hovered = true; + SetHoveredID(id); + if (g.HoveredIdTimer - g.IO.DeltaTime <= DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER && g.HoveredIdTimer >= DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER) + { + pressed = true; + g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId = id; + FocusWindow(window); + } + } + + if (flatten_hovered_children) + g.HoveredWindow = backup_hovered_window; + + // Mouse handling + const ImGuiID test_owner_id = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoTestKeyOwner) ? ImGuiKeyOwner_Any : id; + if (hovered) + { + // Poll mouse buttons + // - 'mouse_button_clicked' is generally carried into ActiveIdMouseButton when setting ActiveId. + // - Technically we only need some values in one code path, but since this is gated by hovered test this is fine. + int mouse_button_clicked = -1; + int mouse_button_released = -1; + for (int button = 0; button < 3; button++) + if (flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft << button)) // Handle ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight and ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle here. + { + if (IsMouseClicked(button, test_owner_id) && mouse_button_clicked == -1) { mouse_button_clicked = button; } + if (IsMouseReleased(button, test_owner_id) && mouse_button_released == -1) { mouse_button_released = button; } + } + + // Process initial action + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers) || (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.KeyAlt)) + { + if (mouse_button_clicked != -1 && g.ActiveId != id) + { + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoSetKeyOwner)) + SetKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(mouse_button_clicked), id); + if (flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere)) + { + SetActiveID(id, window); + g.ActiveIdMouseButton = mouse_button_clicked; + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus)) + SetFocusID(id, window); + FocusWindow(window); + } + if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) || ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[mouse_button_clicked] == 2)) + { + pressed = true; + if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId) + ClearActiveID(); + else + SetActiveID(id, window); // Hold on ID + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus)) + SetFocusID(id, window); + g.ActiveIdMouseButton = mouse_button_clicked; + FocusWindow(window); + } + } + if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease) + { + if (mouse_button_released != -1) + { + const bool has_repeated_at_least_once = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[mouse_button_released] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps on release behavior + if (!has_repeated_at_least_once) + pressed = true; + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus)) + SetFocusID(id, window); + ClearActiveID(); + } + } + + // 'Repeat' mode acts when held regardless of _PressedOn flags (see table above). + // Relies on repeat logic of IsMouseClicked() but we may as well do it ourselves if we end up exposing finer RepeatDelay/RepeatRate settings. + if (g.ActiveId == id && (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)) + if (g.IO.MouseDownDuration[g.ActiveIdMouseButton] > 0.0f && IsMouseClicked(g.ActiveIdMouseButton, test_owner_id, ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat)) + pressed = true; + } + + if (pressed) + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; + } + + // Gamepad/Keyboard navigation + // We report navigated item as hovered but we don't set g.HoveredId to not interfere with mouse. + if (g.NavId == id && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == window->MoveId)) + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoveredOnFocus)) + hovered = true; + if (g.NavActivateDownId == id) + { + bool nav_activated_by_code = (g.NavActivateId == id); + bool nav_activated_by_inputs = (g.NavActivatePressedId == id); + if (!nav_activated_by_inputs && (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)) + { + // Avoid pressing multiple keys from triggering excessive amount of repeat events + const ImGuiKeyData* key1 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_Space); + const ImGuiKeyData* key2 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_Enter); + const ImGuiKeyData* key3 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate); + const float t1 = ImMax(ImMax(key1->DownDuration, key2->DownDuration), key3->DownDuration); + nav_activated_by_inputs = CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(t1 - g.IO.DeltaTime, t1, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0; + } + if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs) + { + // Set active id so it can be queried by user via IsItemActive(), equivalent of holding the mouse button. + pressed = true; + SetActiveID(id, window); + g.ActiveIdSource = g.NavInputSource; + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus)) + SetFocusID(id, window); + } + } + + // Process while held + bool held = false; + if (g.ActiveId == id) + { + if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse) + { + if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) + g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - bb.Min; + + const int mouse_button = g.ActiveIdMouseButton; + if (mouse_button == -1) + { + // Fallback for the rare situation were g.ActiveId was set programmatically or from another widget (e.g. #6304). + ClearActiveID(); + } + else if (IsMouseDown(mouse_button, test_owner_id)) + { + held = true; + } + else + { + bool release_in = hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) != 0; + bool release_anywhere = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere) != 0; + if ((release_in || release_anywhere) && !g.DragDropActive) + { + // Report as pressed when releasing the mouse (this is the most common path) + bool is_double_click_release = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseReleased[mouse_button] && g.IO.MouseClickedLastCount[mouse_button] == 2; + bool is_repeating_already = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[mouse_button] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps + bool is_button_avail_or_owned = TestKeyOwner(MouseButtonToKey(mouse_button), test_owner_id); + if (!is_double_click_release && !is_repeating_already && is_button_avail_or_owned) + pressed = true; + } + ClearActiveID(); + } + if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus)) + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; + } + else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + { + // When activated using Nav, we hold on the ActiveID until activation button is released + if (g.NavActivateDownId != id) + ClearActiveID(); + } + if (pressed) + g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = true; + } + + if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = hovered; + if (out_held) *out_held = held; + + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine) && style.FramePadding.y < window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset) // Try to vertically align buttons that are smaller/have no padding so that text baseline matches (bit hacky, since it shouldn't be a flag) + pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset - style.FramePadding.y; + ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); + + const ImRect bb(pos, pos + size); + ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + return false; + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags); + + // Render + const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button); + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id); + RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding); + + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogSetNextTextDecoration("[", "]"); + RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, bb.Max - style.FramePadding, label, NULL, &label_size, style.ButtonTextAlign, &bb); + + // Automatically close popups + //if (pressed && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) + // CloseCurrentPopup(); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags); + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg) +{ + return ButtonEx(label, size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags_None); +} + +// Small buttons fits within text without additional vertical spacing. +bool ImGui::SmallButton(const char* label) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + float backup_padding_y = g.Style.FramePadding.y; + g.Style.FramePadding.y = 0.0f; + bool pressed = ButtonEx(label, ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine); + g.Style.FramePadding.y = backup_padding_y; + return pressed; +} + +// Tip: use ImGui::PushID()/PopID() to push indices or pointers in the ID stack. +// Then you can keep 'str_id' empty or the same for all your buttons (instead of creating a string based on a non-string id) +bool ImGui::InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + // Cannot use zero-size for InvisibleButton(). Unlike Button() there is not way to fallback using the label size. + IM_ASSERT(size_arg.x != 0.0f && size_arg.y != 0.0f); + + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id); + ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, 0.0f, 0.0f); + const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size); + ItemSize(size); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + return false; + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, str_id, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags); + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id); + const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size); + const float default_size = GetFrameHeight(); + ItemSize(size, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : -1.0f); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + return false; + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags); + + // Render + const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button); + const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text); + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id); + RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, bg_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding); + RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, (size.x - g.FontSize) * 0.5f), ImMax(0.0f, (size.y - g.FontSize) * 0.5f)), text_col, dir); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, str_id, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags); + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir) +{ + float sz = GetFrameHeight(); + return ArrowButtonEx(str_id, dir, ImVec2(sz, sz), ImGuiButtonFlags_None); +} + +// Button to close a window +bool ImGui::CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + // Tweak 1: Shrink hit-testing area if button covers an abnormally large proportion of the visible region. That's in order to facilitate moving the window away. (#3825) + // This may better be applied as a general hit-rect reduction mechanism for all widgets to ensure the area to move window is always accessible? + const ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize)); + ImRect bb_interact = bb; + const float area_to_visible_ratio = window->OuterRectClipped.GetArea() / bb.GetArea(); + if (area_to_visible_ratio < 1.5f) + bb_interact.Expand(ImFloor(bb_interact.GetSize() * -0.25f)); + + // Tweak 2: We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Activate sequence can always close a window. + // (this isn't the common behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user because navigation tends to keep items visible in scrolling layer). + bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb_interact, id); + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held); + if (is_clipped) + return pressed; + + // Render + // FIXME: Clarify this mess + ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered); + ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter(); + if (hovered) + window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, ImMax(2.0f, g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f), col); + + float cross_extent = g.FontSize * 0.5f * 0.7071f - 1.0f; + ImU32 cross_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text); + center -= ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f); + window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent, +cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent, -cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f); + window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent, -cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent, +cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f); + + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize)); + bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb, id); + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_None); + if (is_clipped) + return pressed; + + // Render + ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button); + ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text); + if (hovered || held) + window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(bb.GetCenter() + ImVec2(0.0f, -0.5f), g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f, bg_col); + RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min, text_col, window->Collapsed ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f); + + // Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold + if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging(0)) + StartMouseMovingWindow(window); + + return pressed; +} + +ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowScrollbarID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis) +{ + return window->GetID(axis == ImGuiAxis_X ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY"); +} + +// Return scrollbar rectangle, must only be called for corresponding axis if window->ScrollbarX/Y is set. +ImRect ImGui::GetWindowScrollbarRect(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis) +{ + const ImRect outer_rect = window->Rect(); + const ImRect inner_rect = window->InnerRect; + const float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize; + const float scrollbar_size = window->ScrollbarSizes[axis ^ 1]; // (ScrollbarSizes.x = width of Y scrollbar; ScrollbarSizes.y = height of X scrollbar) + IM_ASSERT(scrollbar_size > 0.0f); + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) + return ImRect(inner_rect.Min.x, ImMax(outer_rect.Min.y, outer_rect.Max.y - border_size - scrollbar_size), inner_rect.Max.x - border_size, outer_rect.Max.y - border_size); + else + return ImRect(ImMax(outer_rect.Min.x, outer_rect.Max.x - border_size - scrollbar_size), inner_rect.Min.y, outer_rect.Max.x - border_size, inner_rect.Max.y - border_size); +} + +void ImGui::Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis axis) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + const ImGuiID id = GetWindowScrollbarID(window, axis); + + // Calculate scrollbar bounding box + ImRect bb = GetWindowScrollbarRect(window, axis); + ImDrawFlags rounding_corners = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone; + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) + { + rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft; + if (!window->ScrollbarY) + rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight; + } + else + { + if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) + rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight; + if (!window->ScrollbarX) + rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight; + } + float size_avail = window->InnerRect.Max[axis] - window->InnerRect.Min[axis]; + float size_contents = window->ContentSize[axis] + window->WindowPadding[axis] * 2.0f; + ImS64 scroll = (ImS64)window->Scroll[axis]; + ScrollbarEx(bb, id, axis, &scroll, (ImS64)size_avail, (ImS64)size_contents, rounding_corners); + window->Scroll[axis] = (float)scroll; +} + +// Vertical/Horizontal scrollbar +// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because: +// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab) +// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar +// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal. +// Still, the code should probably be made simpler.. +bool ImGui::ScrollbarEx(const ImRect& bb_frame, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, ImS64* p_scroll_v, ImS64 size_avail_v, ImS64 size_contents_v, ImDrawFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const float bb_frame_width = bb_frame.GetWidth(); + const float bb_frame_height = bb_frame.GetHeight(); + if (bb_frame_width <= 0.0f || bb_frame_height <= 0.0f) + return false; + + // When we are too small, start hiding and disabling the grab (this reduce visual noise on very small window and facilitate using the window resize grab) + float alpha = 1.0f; + if ((axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) && bb_frame_height < g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f) + alpha = ImSaturate((bb_frame_height - g.FontSize) / (g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)); + if (alpha <= 0.0f) + return false; + + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const bool allow_interaction = (alpha >= 1.0f); + + ImRect bb = bb_frame; + bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_width - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_height - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f))); + + // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar) + const float scrollbar_size_v = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight(); + + // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount) + // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside. + IM_ASSERT(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v) > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers. + const ImS64 win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v), (ImS64)1); + const float grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * ((float)size_avail_v / (float)win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v); + const float grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v; + + // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar(). + bool held = false; + bool hovered = false; + ItemAdd(bb_frame, id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav); + ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus); + + const ImS64 scroll_max = ImMax((ImS64)1, size_contents_v - size_avail_v); + float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate((float)*p_scroll_v / (float)scroll_max); + float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v; // Grab position in normalized space + if (held && allow_interaction && grab_h_norm < 1.0f) + { + const float scrollbar_pos_v = bb.Min[axis]; + const float mouse_pos_v = g.IO.MousePos[axis]; + + // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f) + const float clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v); + SetHoveredID(id); + + bool seek_absolute = false; + if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) + { + // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab + seek_absolute = (clicked_v_norm < grab_v_norm || clicked_v_norm > grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm); + if (seek_absolute) + g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = 0.0f; + else + g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f; + } + + // Apply scroll (p_scroll_v will generally point on one member of window->Scroll) + // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of ContentSize and before setting up our starting position + const float scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter - grab_h_norm * 0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm)); + *p_scroll_v = (ImS64)(scroll_v_norm * scroll_max); + + // Update values for rendering + scroll_ratio = ImSaturate((float)*p_scroll_v / (float)scroll_max); + grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v; + + // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated + if (seek_absolute) + g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f; + } + + // Render + const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg); + const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab, alpha); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_frame.Min, bb_frame.Max, bg_col, window->WindowRounding, flags); + ImRect grab_rect; + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) + grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, bb.Max.y); + else + grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding); + + return held; +} + +void ImGui::Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& tint_col, const ImVec4& border_col) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size); + if (border_col.w > 0.0f) + bb.Max += ImVec2(2, 2); + ItemSize(bb); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0)) + return; + + if (border_col.w > 0.0f) + { + window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(border_col), 0.0f); + window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min + ImVec2(1, 1), bb.Max - ImVec2(1, 1), uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col)); + } + else + { + window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min, bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col)); + } +} + +// ImageButton() is flawed as 'id' is always derived from 'texture_id' (see #2464 #1390) +// We provide this internal helper to write your own variant while we figure out how to redesign the public ImageButton() API. +bool ImGui::ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col, ImGuiButtonFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const ImVec2 padding = g.Style.FramePadding; + const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding * 2.0f); + ItemSize(bb); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + return false; + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags); + + // Render + const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button); + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id); + RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, ImClamp((float)ImMin(padding.x, padding.y), 0.0f, g.Style.FrameRounding)); + if (bg_col.w > 0.0f) + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min + padding, bb.Max - padding, GetColorU32(bg_col)); + window->DrawList->AddImage(texture_id, bb.Min + padding, bb.Max - padding, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col)); + + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::ImageButton(const char* str_id, ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + return ImageButtonEx(window->GetID(str_id), user_texture_id, size, uv0, uv1, bg_col, tint_col); +} + +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS +// Legacy API obsoleted in 1.89. Two differences with new ImageButton() +// - new ImageButton() requires an explicit 'const char* str_id' Old ImageButton() used opaque imTextureId (created issue with: multiple buttons with same image, transient texture id values, opaque computation of ID) +// - new ImageButton() always use style.FramePadding Old ImageButton() had an override argument. +// If you need to change padding with new ImageButton() you can use PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, value), consistent with other Button functions. +bool ImGui::ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, int frame_padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + // Default to using texture ID as ID. User can still push string/integer prefixes. + PushID((void*)(intptr_t)user_texture_id); + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID("#image"); + PopID(); + + if (frame_padding >= 0) + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2((float)frame_padding, (float)frame_padding)); + bool ret = ImageButtonEx(id, user_texture_id, size, uv0, uv1, bg_col, tint_col); + if (frame_padding >= 0) + PopStyleVar(); + return ret; +} +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + +bool ImGui::Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight(); + const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)); + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id)) + { + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0)); + return false; + } + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held); + if (pressed) + { + *v = !(*v); + MarkItemEdited(id); + } + + const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz)); + RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id); + // modified by asphyxia + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Border, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ControlBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ControlBgHovered : ImGuiCol_Border)); + RenderFrame(check_bb.Min, check_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding); + PopStyleColor(); + + ImU32 check_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark); + bool mixed_value = (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue) != 0; + if (mixed_value) + { + // Undocumented tristate/mixed/indeterminate checkbox (#2644) + // This may seem awkwardly designed because the aim is to make ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue supported by all widgets (not just checkbox) + ImVec2 pad(ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)), ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f))); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(check_bb.Min + pad, check_bb.Max - pad, check_col, style.FrameRounding); + } + else if (*v) + { + const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f)); + // modified by asphyxia + // checkbox + //window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_bb.Max - ImVec2(pad, pad), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), style.FrameRounding); + RenderFrame(check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_bb.Max - ImVec2(pad, pad), check_col, true, style.FrameRounding); + // gradient + window->DrawList->AddRectFilledMultiColor(check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_bb.Max - ImVec2(pad, pad), GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.05f)), GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.05f)), GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.40f)), GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.40f))); + + //RenderCheckMark(window->DrawList, check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Triangle), square_sz - pad * 2.0f); + } + + ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(&label_pos, mixed_value ? "[~]" : *v ? "[x]" : "[ ]"); + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderText(label_pos, label); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0)); + return pressed; +} + +template +bool ImGui::CheckboxFlagsT(const char* label, T* flags, T flags_value) +{ + bool all_on = (*flags & flags_value) == flags_value; + bool any_on = (*flags & flags_value) != 0; + bool pressed; + if (!all_on && any_on) + { + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.NextItemData.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue; + pressed = Checkbox(label, &all_on); + } + else + { + pressed = Checkbox(label, &all_on); + + } + if (pressed) + { + if (all_on) + *flags |= flags_value; + else + *flags &= ~flags_value; + } + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, int* flags, int flags_value) +{ + return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value); +} + +bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value) +{ + return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value); +} + +bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImS64* flags, ImS64 flags_value) +{ + return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value); +} + +bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImU64* flags, ImU64 flags_value) +{ + return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value); +} + +bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, bool active) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight(); + const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz)); + const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)); + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id)) + return false; + + ImVec2 center = check_bb.GetCenter(); + center.x = IM_ROUND(center.x); + center.y = IM_ROUND(center.y); + const float radius = (square_sz - 1.0f) * 0.5f; + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held); + if (pressed) + MarkItemEdited(id); + + RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id); + const int num_segment = window->DrawList->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(radius); + window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), num_segment); + if (active) + { + const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f)); + window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius - pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark)); + } + + if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f) + { + window->DrawList->AddCircle(center + ImVec2(1, 1), radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), num_segment, style.FrameBorderSize); + window->DrawList->AddCircle(center, radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), num_segment, style.FrameBorderSize); + } + + ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(&label_pos, active ? "(x)" : "( )"); + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderText(label_pos, label); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags); + return pressed; +} + +// FIXME: This would work nicely if it was a public template, e.g. 'template RadioButton(const char* label, T* v, T v_button)', but I'm not sure how we would expose it.. +bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button) +{ + const bool pressed = RadioButton(label, *v == v_button); + if (pressed) + *v = v_button; + return pressed; +} + +// size_arg (for each axis) < 0.0f: align to end, 0.0f: auto, > 0.0f: specified size +void ImGui::ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg, const char* overlay) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + + ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); + ImRect bb(pos, pos + size); + ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0)) + return; + + // Render + fraction = ImSaturate(fraction); + RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding); + bb.Expand(ImVec2(-style.FrameBorderSize, -style.FrameBorderSize)); + const ImVec2 fill_br = ImVec2(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, fraction), bb.Max.y); + RenderRectFilledRangeH(window->DrawList, bb, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram), 0.0f, fraction, style.FrameRounding); + + // Default displaying the fraction as percentage string, but user can override it + char overlay_buf[32]; + if (!overlay) + { + ImFormatString(overlay_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(overlay_buf), "%.0f%%", fraction * 100 + 0.01f); + overlay = overlay_buf; + } + + ImVec2 overlay_size = CalcTextSize(overlay, NULL); + if (overlay_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(ImClamp(fill_br.x + style.ItemSpacing.x, bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - overlay_size.x - style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), bb.Min.y), bb.Max, overlay, NULL, &overlay_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.5f), &bb); +} + +void ImGui::Bullet() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2), g.FontSize); + const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, line_height)); + ItemSize(bb); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0)) + { + SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2); + return; + } + + // Render and stay on same line + ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text); + RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize * 0.5f, line_height * 0.5f), text_col); + SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - Spacing() +// - Dummy() +// - NewLine() +// - AlignTextToFramePadding() +// - SeparatorEx() [Internal] +// - Separator() +// - SplitterBehavior() [Internal] +// - ShrinkWidths() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::Spacing() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + ItemSize(ImVec2(0, 0)); +} + +void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2& size) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size); + ItemSize(size); + ItemAdd(bb, 0); +} + +void ImGui::NewLine() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType; + window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical; + window->DC.IsSameLine = false; + if (window->DC.CurrLineSize.y > 0.0f) // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height. + ItemSize(ImVec2(0, 0)); + else + ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize)); + window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type; +} + +void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + window->DC.CurrLineSize.y = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2); + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y); +} + +// Horizontal/vertical separating line +// FIXME: Surprisingly, this seemingly trivial widget is a victim of many different legacy/tricky layout issues. +// Note how thickness == 1.0f is handled specifically as not moving CursorPos by 'thickness', but other values are. +void ImGui::SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags, float thickness) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical))); // Check that only 1 option is selected + IM_ASSERT(thickness > 0.0f); + + if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical) + { + // Vertical separator, for menu bars (use current line height). + float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineSize.y; + const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + thickness, y2)); + ItemSize(ImVec2(thickness, 0.0f)); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0)) + return; + + // Draw + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator)); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogText(" |"); + } + else if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal) + { + // Horizontal Separator + float x1 = window->Pos.x; + float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x; + + // FIXME-WORKRECT: old hack (#205) until we decide of consistent behavior with WorkRect/Indent and Separator + if (g.GroupStack.Size > 0 && g.GroupStack.back().WindowID == window->ID) + x1 += window->DC.Indent.x; + + // FIXME-WORKRECT: In theory we should simply be using WorkRect.Min.x/Max.x everywhere but it isn't aesthetically what we want, + // need to introduce a variant of WorkRect for that purpose. (#4787) + if (ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable) + { + x1 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MinX; + x2 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MaxX; + } + + // Before Tables API happened, we relied on Separator() to span all columns of a Columns() set. + // We currently don't need to provide the same feature for tables because tables naturally have border features. + ImGuiOldColumns* columns = (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? window->DC.CurrentColumns : NULL; + if (columns) + PushColumnsBackground(); + + // We don't provide our width to the layout so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit + // FIXME: This prevents ->CursorMaxPos based bounding box evaluation from working (e.g. TableEndCell) + const float thickness_for_layout = (thickness == 1.0f) ? 0.0f : thickness; // FIXME: See 1.70/1.71 Separator() change: makes legacy 1-px separator not affect layout yet. Should change. + const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y + thickness)); + ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, thickness_for_layout)); + + if (ItemAdd(bb, 0)) + { + // Draw + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator)); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogRenderedText(&bb.Min, "--------------------------------\n"); + + } + if (columns) + { + PopColumnsBackground(); + columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + } + } +} + +void ImGui::Separator() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + // Those flags should eventually be configurable by the user + // FIXME: We cannot g.Style.SeparatorTextBorderSize for thickness as it relates to SeparatorText() which is a decorated separator, not defaulting to 1.0f. + ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal; + flags |= ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns; // NB: this only applies to legacy Columns() api as they relied on Separator() a lot. + SeparatorEx(flags, 1.0f); +} + +void ImGui::SeparatorTextEx(ImGuiID id, const char* label, const char* label_end, float extra_w) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false); + const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + const ImVec2 padding = style.SeparatorTextPadding; + + const float separator_thickness = style.SeparatorTextBorderSize; + const ImVec2 min_size(label_size.x + extra_w + padding.x * 2.0f, ImMax(label_size.y + padding.y * 2.0f, separator_thickness)); + const ImRect bb(pos, ImVec2(window->WorkRect.Max.x, pos.y + min_size.y)); + const float text_baseline_y = ImFloor((bb.GetHeight() - label_size.y) * style.SeparatorTextAlign.y + 0.99999f); //ImMax(padding.y, ImFloor((style.SeparatorTextSize - label_size.y) * 0.5f)); + ItemSize(min_size, text_baseline_y); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + return; + + const float sep1_x1 = pos.x; + const float sep2_x2 = bb.Max.x; + const float seps_y = ImFloor((bb.Min.y + bb.Max.y) * 0.5f + 0.99999f); + + const float label_avail_w = ImMax(0.0f, sep2_x2 - sep1_x1 - padding.x * 2.0f); + const ImVec2 label_pos(pos.x + padding.x + ImMax(0.0f, (label_avail_w - label_size.x - extra_w) * style.SeparatorTextAlign.x), pos.y + text_baseline_y); // FIXME-ALIGN + + // This allows using SameLine() to position something in the 'extra_w' + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x = label_pos.x + label_size.x; + + const ImU32 separator_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator); + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + { + const float sep1_x2 = label_pos.x - style.ItemSpacing.x; + const float sep2_x1 = label_pos.x + label_size.x + extra_w + style.ItemSpacing.x; + if (sep1_x2 > sep1_x1 && separator_thickness > 0.0f) + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(sep1_x1, seps_y), ImVec2(sep1_x2, seps_y), separator_col, separator_thickness); + if (sep2_x2 > sep2_x1 && separator_thickness > 0.0f) + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(sep2_x1, seps_y), ImVec2(sep2_x2, seps_y), separator_col, separator_thickness); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogSetNextTextDecoration("---", NULL); + RenderTextEllipsis(window->DrawList, label_pos, ImVec2(bb.Max.x, bb.Max.y + style.ItemSpacing.y), bb.Max.x, bb.Max.x, label, label_end, &label_size); + } + else + { + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogText("---"); + if (separator_thickness > 0.0f) + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(sep1_x1, seps_y), ImVec2(sep2_x2, seps_y), separator_col, separator_thickness); + } +} + +void ImGui::SeparatorText(const char* label) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + // The SeparatorText() vs SeparatorTextEx() distinction is designed to be considerate that we may want: + // - allow separator-text to be draggable items (would require a stable ID + a noticeable highlight) + // - this high-level entry point to allow formatting? (which in turns may require ID separate from formatted string) + // - because of this we probably can't turn 'const char* label' into 'const char* fmt, ...' + // Otherwise, we can decide that users wanting to drag this would layout a dedicated drag-item, + // and then we can turn this into a format function. + SeparatorTextEx(0, label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label), 0.0f); +} + +// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise. +bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend, float hover_visibility_delay, ImU32 bg_col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav)) + return false; + + // FIXME: AFAIK the only leftover reason for passing ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap here is + // to allow caller of SplitterBehavior() to call SetItemAllowOverlap() after the item. + // Nowadays we would instead want to use SetNextItemAllowOverlap() before the item. + ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren; +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap; +#endif + + bool hovered, held; + ImRect bb_interact = bb; + bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f)); + ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags); + if (hovered) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect; // for IsItemHovered(), because bb_interact is larger than bb + + if (held || (hovered && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay)) + SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW); + + ImRect bb_render = bb; + if (held) + { + ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min; + float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x; + + // Minimum pane size + float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1); + float size_2_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size2 - min_size2); + if (mouse_delta < -size_1_maximum_delta) + mouse_delta = -size_1_maximum_delta; + if (mouse_delta > size_2_maximum_delta) + mouse_delta = size_2_maximum_delta; + + // Apply resize + if (mouse_delta != 0.0f) + { + if (mouse_delta < 0.0f) + IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1); + if (mouse_delta > 0.0f) + IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2); + *size1 += mouse_delta; + *size2 -= mouse_delta; + bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta)); + MarkItemEdited(id); + } + } + + // Render at new position + if (bg_col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, bg_col, 0.0f); + const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, 0.0f); + + return held; +} + +static int IMGUI_CDECL ShrinkWidthItemComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) +{ + const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* a = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)lhs; + const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* b = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)rhs; + if (int d = (int)(b->Width - a->Width)) + return d; + return (b->Index - a->Index); +} + +// Shrink excess width from a set of item, by removing width from the larger items first. +// Set items Width to -1.0f to disable shrinking this item. +void ImGui::ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* items, int count, float width_excess) +{ + if (count == 1) + { + if (items[0].Width >= 0.0f) + items[0].Width = ImMax(items[0].Width - width_excess, 1.0f); + return; + } + ImQsort(items, (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem), ShrinkWidthItemComparer); + int count_same_width = 1; + while (width_excess > 0.0f && count_same_width < count) + { + while (count_same_width < count && items[0].Width <= items[count_same_width].Width) + count_same_width++; + float max_width_to_remove_per_item = (count_same_width < count && items[count_same_width].Width >= 0.0f) ? (items[0].Width - items[count_same_width].Width) : (items[0].Width - 1.0f); + if (max_width_to_remove_per_item <= 0.0f) + break; + float width_to_remove_per_item = ImMin(width_excess / count_same_width, max_width_to_remove_per_item); + for (int item_n = 0; item_n < count_same_width; item_n++) + items[item_n].Width -= width_to_remove_per_item; + width_excess -= width_to_remove_per_item * count_same_width; + } + + // Round width and redistribute remainder + // Ensure that e.g. the right-most tab of a shrunk tab-bar always reaches exactly at the same distance from the right-most edge of the tab bar separator. + width_excess = 0.0f; + for (int n = 0; n < count; n++) + { + float width_rounded = ImFloor(items[n].Width); + width_excess += items[n].Width - width_rounded; + items[n].Width = width_rounded; + } + while (width_excess > 0.0f) + for (int n = 0; n < count && width_excess > 0.0f; n++) + { + float width_to_add = ImMin(items[n].InitialWidth - items[n].Width, 1.0f); + items[n].Width += width_to_add; + width_excess -= width_to_add; + } +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount() [Internal] +// - BeginCombo() +// - BeginComboPopup() [Internal] +// - EndCombo() +// - BeginComboPreview() [Internal] +// - EndComboPreview() [Internal] +// - Combo() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(int items_count) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (items_count <= 0) + return FLT_MAX; + return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + + ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags backup_next_window_data_flags = g.NextWindowData.Flags; + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together + + const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight(); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : CalcItemWidth(); + const float h = GetFrameHeight(); + + // modified by asphyxia + const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + h : 0.0f, label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.y : 0.0f), window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.y : 0.0f) + h)); + const ImRect total_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, bb.Max - ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + h : 0.0f, 0.0f)); + + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &bb)) + return false; + + // Open on click + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held); + const ImGuiID popup_id = ImHashStr("##ComboPopup", 0, id); + bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None); + if (pressed && !popup_open) + { + OpenPopupEx(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None); + popup_open = true; + } + + // Render shape + // modified by asphyxia + const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_ControlBg); + const float value_x2 = ImMax(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - arrow_size); + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id); + RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding); + + if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Max.y), frame_col, style.FrameRounding, (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft); + if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton)) + { + ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive); + // modified by asphyxia + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Min.y), bb.Max, bg_col, style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight); + //window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Min.y), bb.Max, bg_col, style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight); + if (value_x2 + arrow_size - style.FramePadding.x <= bb.Max.x) + RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(value_x2 + style.FramePadding.y, bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y + 4), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Triangle), popup_open ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down, 0.5f); + } + + RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, style.FrameRounding); + + // Custom preview + if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview) + { + g.ComboPreviewData.PreviewRect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y, value_x2, bb.Max.y); + IM_ASSERT(preview_value == NULL || preview_value[0] == 0); + preview_value = NULL; + } + + // Render preview and label + if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) + { + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}"); + RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Max.y), preview_value, NULL, NULL); + } + + if (label_size.x > 0) + // modified by asphyxia + RenderText(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, total_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label); + + if (!popup_open) + return false; + + g.NextWindowData.Flags = backup_next_window_data_flags; + return BeginComboPopup(popup_id, bb, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginComboPopup(ImGuiID popup_id, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiComboFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (!IsPopupOpen(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None)) + { + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); + return false; + } + + // Set popup size + float w = bb.GetWidth(); + if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint) + { + g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w); + } + else + { + if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular; + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_)); // Only one + int popup_max_height_in_items = -1; + if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular) popup_max_height_in_items = 8; + else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall) popup_max_height_in_items = 4; + else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge) popup_max_height_in_items = 20; + ImVec2 constraint_min(0.0f, 0.0f), constraint_max(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); + if ((g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize) == 0 || g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.x <= 0.0f) // Don't apply constraints if user specified a size + constraint_min.x = w; + if ((g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize) == 0 || g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.y <= 0.0f) + constraint_max.y = CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items); + SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(constraint_min, constraint_max); + } + + // This is essentially a specialized version of BeginPopupEx() + char name[16]; + ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.BeginPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth + + // Set position given a custom constraint (peak into expected window size so we can position it) + // FIXME: This might be easier to express with an hypothetical SetNextWindowPosConstraints() function? + // FIXME: This might be moved to Begin() or at least around the same spot where Tooltips and other Popups are calling FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx()? + if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = FindWindowByName(name)) + if (popup_window->WasActive) + { + // Always override 'AutoPosLastDirection' to not leave a chance for a past value to affect us. + ImVec2 size_expected = CalcWindowNextAutoFitSize(popup_window); + popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Down; // Left = "Below, Toward Left", Down = "Below, Toward Right (default)" + ImRect r_outer = GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(popup_window); + ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox); + SetNextWindowPos(pos); + } + + // We don't use BeginPopupEx() solely because we have a custom name string, which we could make an argument to BeginPopupEx() + ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove; + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(g.Style.FramePadding.x, g.Style.WindowPadding.y)); // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text + bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags); + PopStyleVar(); + if (!ret) + { + EndPopup(); + IM_ASSERT(0); // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above + return false; + } + return true; +} + +void ImGui::EndCombo() +{ + EndPopup(); +} + +// Call directly after the BeginCombo/EndCombo block. The preview is designed to only host non-interactive elements +// (Experimental, see GitHub issues: #1658, #4168) +bool ImGui::BeginComboPreview() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiComboPreviewData* preview_data = &g.ComboPreviewData; + + if (window->SkipItems || !(g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible)) + return false; + IM_ASSERT(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x == preview_data->PreviewRect.Min.x && g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.y == preview_data->PreviewRect.Min.y); // Didn't call after BeginCombo/EndCombo block or forgot to pass ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview flag? + if (!window->ClipRect.Overlaps(preview_data->PreviewRect)) // Narrower test (optional) + return false; + + // FIXME: This could be contained in a PushWorkRect() api + preview_data->BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos; + preview_data->BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos; + preview_data->BackupCursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine; + preview_data->BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset; + preview_data->BackupLayout = window->DC.LayoutType; + window->DC.CursorPos = preview_data->PreviewRect.Min + g.Style.FramePadding; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos; + window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal; + window->DC.IsSameLine = false; + PushClipRect(preview_data->PreviewRect.Min, preview_data->PreviewRect.Max, true); + + return true; +} + +void ImGui::EndComboPreview() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiComboPreviewData* preview_data = &g.ComboPreviewData; + + // FIXME: Using CursorMaxPos approximation instead of correct AABB which we will store in ImDrawCmd in the future + ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList; + if (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x < preview_data->PreviewRect.Max.x && window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y < preview_data->PreviewRect.Max.y) + if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size > 1) // Unlikely case that the PushClipRect() didn't create a command + { + draw_list->_CmdHeader.ClipRect = draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1].ClipRect = draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 2].ClipRect; + draw_list->_TryMergeDrawCmds(); + } + PopClipRect(); + window->DC.CursorPos = preview_data->BackupCursorPos; + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, preview_data->BackupCursorMaxPos); + window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = preview_data->BackupCursorPosPrevLine; + window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = preview_data->BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset; + window->DC.LayoutType = preview_data->BackupLayout; + window->DC.IsSameLine = false; + preview_data->PreviewRect = ImRect(); +} + +// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[] +static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text) +{ + const char* const* items = (const char* const*)data; + if (out_text) + *out_text = items[idx]; + return true; +} + +// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0" +static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text) +{ + // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited. + const char* items_separated_by_zeros = (const char*)data; + int items_count = 0; + const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros; + while (*p) + { + if (idx == items_count) + break; + p += strlen(p) + 1; + items_count++; + } + if (!*p) + return false; + if (out_text) + *out_text = p; + return true; +} + +// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can. +bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo() + const char* preview_value = NULL; + if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count) + items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value); + + // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here. + if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint)) + SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items))); + + if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None)) + return false; + + // Display items + // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed) + bool value_changed = false; + for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++) + { + PushID(i); + const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item); + const char* item_text; + if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text)) + item_text = "*Unknown item*"; + if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected) && *current_item != i) + { + value_changed = true; + *current_item = i; + } + if (item_selected) + SetItemDefaultFocus(); + PopID(); + } + + EndCombo(); + + if (value_changed) + MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID); + + return value_changed; +} + +// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings. +bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items) +{ + const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_in_items); + return value_changed; +} + +// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0" +bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int height_in_items) +{ + int items_count = 0; + const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros; // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open + while (*p) + { + p += strlen(p) + 1; + items_count++; + } + bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void*)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items); + return value_changed; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - DataTypeGetInfo() +// - DataTypeFormatString() +// - DataTypeApplyOp() +// - DataTypeApplyOpFromText() +// - DataTypeCompare() +// - DataTypeClamp() +// - GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision +// - RoundScalarWithFormat<>() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] = +{ + { sizeof(char), "S8", "%d", "%d" }, // ImGuiDataType_S8 + { sizeof(unsigned char), "U8", "%u", "%u" }, + { sizeof(short), "S16", "%d", "%d" }, // ImGuiDataType_S16 + { sizeof(unsigned short), "U16", "%u", "%u" }, + { sizeof(int), "S32", "%d", "%d" }, // ImGuiDataType_S32 + { sizeof(unsigned int), "U32", "%u", "%u" }, +#ifdef _MSC_VER + { sizeof(ImS64), "S64", "%I64d","%I64d" }, // ImGuiDataType_S64 + { sizeof(ImU64), "U64", "%I64u","%I64u" }, +#else + { sizeof(ImS64), "S64", "%lld", "%lld" }, // ImGuiDataType_S64 + { sizeof(ImU64), "U64", "%llu", "%llu" }, +#endif + { sizeof(float), "float", "%.3f","%f" }, // ImGuiDataType_Float (float are promoted to double in va_arg) + { sizeof(double), "double","%f", "%lf" }, // ImGuiDataType_Double +}; +IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT); + +const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* ImGui::DataTypeGetInfo(ImGuiDataType data_type) +{ + IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT); + return &GDataTypeInfo[data_type]; +} + +int ImGui::DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* p_data, const char* format) +{ + // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing integer arguments + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32*)p_data); + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64*)p_data); + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const float*)p_data); + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const double*)p_data); + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS8*)p_data); + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU8*)p_data); + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS16*)p_data); + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16) + return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU16*)p_data); + IM_ASSERT(0); + return 0; +} + +void ImGui::DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, const void* arg1, const void* arg2) +{ + IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-'); + switch (data_type) + { + case ImGuiDataType_S8: + if (op == '+') { *(ImS8*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1, *(const ImS8*)arg2, IM_S8_MIN, IM_S8_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImS8*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1, *(const ImS8*)arg2, IM_S8_MIN, IM_S8_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_U8: + if (op == '+') { *(ImU8*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1, *(const ImU8*)arg2, IM_U8_MIN, IM_U8_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImU8*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1, *(const ImU8*)arg2, IM_U8_MIN, IM_U8_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_S16: + if (op == '+') { *(ImS16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImS16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_U16: + if (op == '+') { *(ImU16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImU16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_S32: + if (op == '+') { *(ImS32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImS32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_U32: + if (op == '+') { *(ImU32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImU32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_S64: + if (op == '+') { *(ImS64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImS64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_U64: + if (op == '+') { *(ImU64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); } + if (op == '-') { *(ImU64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_Float: + if (op == '+') { *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 + *(const float*)arg2; } + if (op == '-') { *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 - *(const float*)arg2; } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_Double: + if (op == '+') { *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 + *(const double*)arg2; } + if (op == '-') { *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 - *(const double*)arg2; } + return; + case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break; + } + IM_ASSERT(0); +} + +// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values. +// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess.. +bool ImGui::DataTypeApplyFromText(const char* buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format) +{ + while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf)) + buf++; + if (!buf[0]) + return false; + + // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all. + const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* type_info = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type); + ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage data_backup; + memcpy(&data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size); + + // Sanitize format + // - For float/double we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in, so force them into %f and %lf + // - In theory could treat empty format as using default, but this would only cover rare/bizarre case of using InputScalar() + integer + format string without %. + char format_sanitized[32]; + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) + format = type_info->ScanFmt; + else + format = ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(format, format_sanitized, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format_sanitized)); + + // Small types need a 32-bit buffer to receive the result from scanf() + int v32 = 0; + if (sscanf(buf, format, type_info->Size >= 4 ? p_data : &v32) < 1) + return false; + if (type_info->Size < 4) + { + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8) + *(ImS8*)p_data = (ImS8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S8_MIN, (int)IM_S8_MAX); + else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8) + *(ImU8*)p_data = (ImU8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U8_MIN, (int)IM_U8_MAX); + else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16) + *(ImS16*)p_data = (ImS16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S16_MIN, (int)IM_S16_MAX); + else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16) + *(ImU16*)p_data = (ImU16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U16_MIN, (int)IM_U16_MAX); + else + IM_ASSERT(0); + } + + return memcmp(&data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size) != 0; +} + +template +static int DataTypeCompareT(const T* lhs, const T* rhs) +{ + if (*lhs < *rhs) return -1; + if (*lhs > *rhs) return +1; + return 0; +} + +int ImGui::DataTypeCompare(ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* arg_1, const void* arg_2) +{ + switch (data_type) + { + case ImGuiDataType_S8: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImS8* )arg_1, (const ImS8* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_U8: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImU8* )arg_1, (const ImU8* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_S16: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImS16* )arg_1, (const ImS16* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_U16: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImU16* )arg_1, (const ImU16* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_S32: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImS32* )arg_1, (const ImS32* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_U32: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImU32* )arg_1, (const ImU32* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_S64: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImS64* )arg_1, (const ImS64* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_U64: return DataTypeCompareT((const ImU64* )arg_1, (const ImU64* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_Float: return DataTypeCompareT((const float* )arg_1, (const float* )arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DataTypeCompareT((const double*)arg_1, (const double*)arg_2); + case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break; + } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return 0; +} + +template +static bool DataTypeClampT(T* v, const T* v_min, const T* v_max) +{ + // Clamp, both sides are optional, return true if modified + if (v_min && *v < *v_min) { *v = *v_min; return true; } + if (v_max && *v > *v_max) { *v = *v_max; return true; } + return false; +} + +bool ImGui::DataTypeClamp(ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max) +{ + switch (data_type) + { + case ImGuiDataType_S8: return DataTypeClampT((ImS8* )p_data, (const ImS8* )p_min, (const ImS8* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_U8: return DataTypeClampT((ImU8* )p_data, (const ImU8* )p_min, (const ImU8* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_S16: return DataTypeClampT((ImS16* )p_data, (const ImS16* )p_min, (const ImS16* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_U16: return DataTypeClampT((ImU16* )p_data, (const ImU16* )p_min, (const ImU16* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_S32: return DataTypeClampT((ImS32* )p_data, (const ImS32* )p_min, (const ImS32* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_U32: return DataTypeClampT((ImU32* )p_data, (const ImU32* )p_min, (const ImU32* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_S64: return DataTypeClampT((ImS64* )p_data, (const ImS64* )p_min, (const ImS64* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_U64: return DataTypeClampT((ImU64* )p_data, (const ImU64* )p_min, (const ImU64* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_Float: return DataTypeClampT((float* )p_data, (const float* )p_min, (const float* )p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DataTypeClampT((double*)p_data, (const double*)p_min, (const double*)p_max); + case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break; + } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return false; +} + +static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(int decimal_precision) +{ + static const float min_steps[10] = { 1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f }; + if (decimal_precision < 0) + return FLT_MIN; + return (decimal_precision < IM_ARRAYSIZE(min_steps)) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision); +} + +template +TYPE ImGui::RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v) +{ + IM_UNUSED(data_type); + IM_ASSERT(data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double); + const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format); + if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string + return v; + + // Sanitize format + char fmt_sanitized[32]; + ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(fmt_start, fmt_sanitized, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_sanitized)); + fmt_start = fmt_sanitized; + + // Format value with our rounding, and read back + char v_str[64]; + ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v); + const char* p = v_str; + while (*p == ' ') + p++; + v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p); + + return v; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - DragBehaviorT<>() [Internal] +// - DragBehavior() [Internal] +// - DragScalar() +// - DragScalarN() +// - DragFloat() +// - DragFloat2() +// - DragFloat3() +// - DragFloat4() +// - DragFloatRange2() +// - DragInt() +// - DragInt2() +// - DragInt3() +// - DragInt4() +// - DragIntRange2() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls) +template +bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X; + const bool is_clamped = (v_min < v_max); + const bool is_logarithmic = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) != 0; + const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double); + + // Default tweak speed + if (v_speed == 0.0f && is_clamped && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX)) + v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio); + + // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings + float adjust_delta = 0.0f; + if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && IsMouseDragPastThreshold(0, g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR)) + { + adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta[axis]; + if (g.IO.KeyAlt) + adjust_delta *= 1.0f / 100.0f; + if (g.IO.KeyShift) + adjust_delta *= 10.0f; + } + else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + { + const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0; + const bool tweak_slow = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow); + const bool tweak_fast = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast); + const float tweak_factor = tweak_slow ? 1.0f / 1.0f : tweak_fast ? 10.0f : 1.0f; + adjust_delta = GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis) * tweak_factor; + v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision)); + } + adjust_delta *= v_speed; + + // For vertical drag we currently assume that Up=higher value (like we do with vertical sliders). This may become a parameter. + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) + adjust_delta = -adjust_delta; + + // For logarithmic use our range is effectively 0..1 so scale the delta into that range + if (is_logarithmic && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX) && ((v_max - v_min) > 0.000001f)) // Epsilon to avoid /0 + adjust_delta /= (float)(v_max - v_min); + + // Clear current value on activation + // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is 300 and we are pushing to the right side, keep the 300. + bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated; + bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = is_clamped && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f)); + if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward) + { + g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f; + g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false; + } + else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f) + { + g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta; + g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true; + } + + if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty) + return false; + + TYPE v_cur = *v; + FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f; + + float logarithmic_zero_epsilon = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true + const float zero_deadzone_halfsize = 0.0f; // Drag widgets have no deadzone (as it doesn't make sense) + if (is_logarithmic) + { + // When using logarithmic sliders, we need to clamp to avoid hitting zero, but our choice of clamp value greatly affects slider precision. We attempt to use the specified precision to estimate a good lower bound. + const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 1; + logarithmic_zero_epsilon = ImPow(0.1f, (float)decimal_precision); + + // Convert to parametric space, apply delta, convert back + float v_old_parametric = ScaleRatioFromValueT(data_type, v_cur, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + float v_new_parametric = v_old_parametric + g.DragCurrentAccum; + v_cur = ScaleValueFromRatioT(data_type, v_new_parametric, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_parametric; + } + else + { + v_cur += (SIGNEDTYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum; + } + + // Round to user desired precision based on format string + if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat)) + v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormatT(format, data_type, v_cur); + + // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values. + g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false; + if (is_logarithmic) + { + // Convert to parametric space, apply delta, convert back + float v_new_parametric = ScaleRatioFromValueT(data_type, v_cur, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_new_parametric - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder); + } + else + { + g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v); + } + + // Lose zero sign for float/double + if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0) + v_cur = (TYPE)0; + + // Clamp values (+ handle overflow/wrap-around for integer types) + if (*v != v_cur && is_clamped) + { + if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f && !is_floating_point)) + v_cur = v_min; + if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f && !is_floating_point)) + v_cur = v_max; + } + + // Apply result + if (*v == v_cur) + return false; + *v = v_cur; + return true; +} + +bool ImGui::DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + // Read imgui.cpp "API BREAKING CHANGES" section for 1.78 if you hit this assert. + IM_ASSERT((flags == 1 || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_) == 0) && "Invalid ImGuiSliderFlags flags! Has the 'float power' argument been mistakenly cast to flags? Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead."); + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.ActiveId == id) + { + // Those are the things we can do easily outside the DragBehaviorT<> template, saves code generation. + if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0]) + ClearActiveID(); + else if ((g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) && g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) + ClearActiveID(); + } + if (g.ActiveId != id) + return false; + if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly) || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly)) + return false; + + switch (data_type) + { + case ImGuiDataType_S8: { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS8*) p_min : IM_S8_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS8*)p_max : IM_S8_MAX, format, flags); if (r) *(ImS8*)p_v = (ImS8)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_U8: { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU8*) p_min : IM_U8_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU8*)p_max : IM_U8_MAX, format, flags); if (r) *(ImU8*)p_v = (ImU8)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_S16: { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS16*)p_min : IM_S16_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS16*)p_max : IM_S16_MAX, format, flags); if (r) *(ImS16*)p_v = (ImS16)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_U16: { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU16*)p_min : IM_U16_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU16*)p_max : IM_U16_MAX, format, flags); if (r) *(ImU16*)p_v = (ImU16)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_S32: return DragBehaviorT(data_type, (ImS32*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS32* )p_min : IM_S32_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS32* )p_max : IM_S32_MAX, format, flags); + case ImGuiDataType_U32: return DragBehaviorT(data_type, (ImU32*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU32* )p_min : IM_U32_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU32* )p_max : IM_U32_MAX, format, flags); + case ImGuiDataType_S64: return DragBehaviorT(data_type, (ImS64*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS64* )p_min : IM_S64_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS64* )p_max : IM_S64_MAX, format, flags); + case ImGuiDataType_U64: return DragBehaviorT(data_type, (ImU64*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU64* )p_min : IM_U64_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU64* )p_max : IM_U64_MAX, format, flags); + case ImGuiDataType_Float: return DragBehaviorT(data_type, (float*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(const float* )p_min : -FLT_MAX, p_max ? *(const float* )p_max : FLT_MAX, format, flags); + case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DragBehaviorT(data_type, (double*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(const double*)p_min : -DBL_MAX, p_max ? *(const double*)p_max : DBL_MAX, format, flags); + case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break; + } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return false; +} + +// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a Drag widget, p_min and p_max are optional. +// Read code of e.g. DragFloat(), DragInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly. +bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + const float w = CalcItemWidth(); + + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)); + const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f)); + + const bool temp_input_allowed = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput) == 0; + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable : 0)) + return false; + + // Default format string when passing NULL + if (format == NULL) + format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt; + + const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags); + bool temp_input_is_active = temp_input_allowed && TempInputIsActive(id); + if (!temp_input_is_active) + { + // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an InputText + const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = temp_input_allowed && (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0; + const bool clicked = hovered && IsMouseClicked(0, id); + const bool double_clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2 && TestKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id)); + const bool make_active = (input_requested_by_tabbing || clicked || double_clicked || g.NavActivateId == id); + if (make_active && (clicked || double_clicked)) + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id); + if (make_active && temp_input_allowed) + if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || double_clicked || (g.NavActivateId == id && (g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput))) + temp_input_is_active = true; + + // (Optional) simple click (without moving) turns Drag into an InputText + if (g.IO.ConfigDragClickToInputText && temp_input_allowed && !temp_input_is_active) + if (g.ActiveId == id && hovered && g.IO.MouseReleased[0] && !IsMouseDragPastThreshold(0, g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR)) + { + g.NavActivateId = id; + g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput; + temp_input_is_active = true; + } + + if (make_active && !temp_input_is_active) + { + SetActiveID(id, window); + SetFocusID(id, window); + FocusWindow(window); + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right); + } + } + + if (temp_input_is_active) + { + // Only clamp CTRL+Click input when ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is set + const bool is_clamp_input = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp) != 0 && (p_min == NULL || p_max == NULL || DataTypeCompare(data_type, p_min, p_max) < 0); + return TempInputScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format, is_clamp_input ? p_min : NULL, is_clamp_input ? p_max : NULL); + } + + // Draw frame + const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg); + RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id); + RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding); + + // Drag behavior + const bool value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, flags); + if (value_changed) + MarkItemEdited(id); + + // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value. + char value_buf[64]; + const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}"); + RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable : 0)); + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + bool value_changed = false; + BeginGroup(); + PushID(label); + PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth()); + size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size; + for (int i = 0; i < components; i++) + { + PushID(i); + if (i > 0) + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + value_changed |= DragScalar("", data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, flags); + PopID(); + PopItemWidth(); + p_data = (void*)((char*)p_data + type_size); + } + PopID(); + + const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + if (label != label_end) + { + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + TextEx(label, label_end); + } + + EndGroup(); + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +// NB: You likely want to specify the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp when using this. +bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + PushID(label); + BeginGroup(); + PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth()); + + float min_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min; + float min_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max); + ImGuiSliderFlags min_flags = flags | ((min_min == min_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0); + bool value_changed = DragScalar("##min", ImGuiDataType_Float, v_current_min, v_speed, &min_min, &min_max, format, min_flags); + PopItemWidth(); + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + + float max_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min); + float max_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max; + ImGuiSliderFlags max_flags = flags | ((max_min == max_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0); + value_changed |= DragScalar("##max", ImGuiDataType_Float, v_current_max, v_speed, &max_min, &max_max, format_max ? format_max : format, max_flags); + PopItemWidth(); + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + + TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label)); + EndGroup(); + PopID(); + + return value_changed; +} + +// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision +bool ImGui::DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +// NB: You likely want to specify the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp when using this. +bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + PushID(label); + BeginGroup(); + PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth()); + + int min_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min; + int min_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max); + ImGuiSliderFlags min_flags = flags | ((min_min == min_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0); + bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, min_min, min_max, format, min_flags); + PopItemWidth(); + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + + int max_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min); + int max_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max; + ImGuiSliderFlags max_flags = flags | ((max_min == max_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0); + value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, max_min, max_max, format_max ? format_max : format, max_flags); + PopItemWidth(); + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + + TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label)); + EndGroup(); + PopID(); + + return value_changed; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ScaleRatioFromValueT<> [Internal] +// - ScaleValueFromRatioT<> [Internal] +// - SliderBehaviorT<>() [Internal] +// - SliderBehavior() [Internal] +// - SliderScalar() +// - SliderScalarN() +// - SliderFloat() +// - SliderFloat2() +// - SliderFloat3() +// - SliderFloat4() +// - SliderAngle() +// - SliderInt() +// - SliderInt2() +// - SliderInt3() +// - SliderInt4() +// - VSliderScalar() +// - VSliderFloat() +// - VSliderInt() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Convert a value v in the output space of a slider into a parametric position on the slider itself (the logical opposite of ScaleValueFromRatioT) +template +float ImGui::ScaleRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_halfsize) +{ + if (v_min == v_max) + return 0.0f; + IM_UNUSED(data_type); + + const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min); + if (is_logarithmic) + { + bool flipped = v_max < v_min; + + if (flipped) // Handle the case where the range is backwards + ImSwap(v_min, v_max); + + // Fudge min/max to avoid getting close to log(0) + FLOATTYPE v_min_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_min) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_min < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_min; + FLOATTYPE v_max_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_max) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_max < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_max; + + // Awkward special cases - we need ranges of the form (-100 .. 0) to convert to (-100 .. -epsilon), not (-100 .. epsilon) + if ((v_min == 0.0f) && (v_max < 0.0f)) + v_min_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon; + else if ((v_max == 0.0f) && (v_min < 0.0f)) + v_max_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon; + + float result; + if (v_clamped <= v_min_fudged) + result = 0.0f; // Workaround for values that are in-range but below our fudge + else if (v_clamped >= v_max_fudged) + result = 1.0f; // Workaround for values that are in-range but above our fudge + else if ((v_min * v_max) < 0.0f) // Range crosses zero, so split into two portions + { + float zero_point_center = (-(float)v_min) / ((float)v_max - (float)v_min); // The zero point in parametric space. There's an argument we should take the logarithmic nature into account when calculating this, but for now this should do (and the most common case of a symmetrical range works fine) + float zero_point_snap_L = zero_point_center - zero_deadzone_halfsize; + float zero_point_snap_R = zero_point_center + zero_deadzone_halfsize; + if (v == 0.0f) + result = zero_point_center; // Special case for exactly zero + else if (v < 0.0f) + result = (1.0f - (float)(ImLog(-(FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / logarithmic_zero_epsilon) / ImLog(-v_min_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon))) * zero_point_snap_L; + else + result = zero_point_snap_R + ((float)(ImLog((FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / logarithmic_zero_epsilon) / ImLog(v_max_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon)) * (1.0f - zero_point_snap_R)); + } + else if ((v_min < 0.0f) || (v_max < 0.0f)) // Entirely negative slider + result = 1.0f - (float)(ImLog(-(FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / -v_max_fudged) / ImLog(-v_min_fudged / -v_max_fudged)); + else + result = (float)(ImLog((FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / v_min_fudged) / ImLog(v_max_fudged / v_min_fudged)); + + return flipped ? (1.0f - result) : result; + } + else + { + // Linear slider + return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(SIGNEDTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(SIGNEDTYPE)(v_max - v_min)); + } +} + +// Convert a parametric position on a slider into a value v in the output space (the logical opposite of ScaleRatioFromValueT) +template +TYPE ImGui::ScaleValueFromRatioT(ImGuiDataType data_type, float t, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_halfsize) +{ + // We special-case the extents because otherwise our logarithmic fudging can lead to "mathematically correct" + // but non-intuitive behaviors like a fully-left slider not actually reaching the minimum value. Also generally simpler. + if (t <= 0.0f || v_min == v_max) + return v_min; + if (t >= 1.0f) + return v_max; + + TYPE result = (TYPE)0; + if (is_logarithmic) + { + // Fudge min/max to avoid getting silly results close to zero + FLOATTYPE v_min_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_min) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_min < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_min; + FLOATTYPE v_max_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_max) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_max < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_max; + + const bool flipped = v_max < v_min; // Check if range is "backwards" + if (flipped) + ImSwap(v_min_fudged, v_max_fudged); + + // Awkward special case - we need ranges of the form (-100 .. 0) to convert to (-100 .. -epsilon), not (-100 .. epsilon) + if ((v_max == 0.0f) && (v_min < 0.0f)) + v_max_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon; + + float t_with_flip = flipped ? (1.0f - t) : t; // t, but flipped if necessary to account for us flipping the range + + if ((v_min * v_max) < 0.0f) // Range crosses zero, so we have to do this in two parts + { + float zero_point_center = (-(float)ImMin(v_min, v_max)) / ImAbs((float)v_max - (float)v_min); // The zero point in parametric space + float zero_point_snap_L = zero_point_center - zero_deadzone_halfsize; + float zero_point_snap_R = zero_point_center + zero_deadzone_halfsize; + if (t_with_flip >= zero_point_snap_L && t_with_flip <= zero_point_snap_R) + result = (TYPE)0.0f; // Special case to make getting exactly zero possible (the epsilon prevents it otherwise) + else if (t_with_flip < zero_point_center) + result = (TYPE)-(logarithmic_zero_epsilon * ImPow(-v_min_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon, (FLOATTYPE)(1.0f - (t_with_flip / zero_point_snap_L)))); + else + result = (TYPE)(logarithmic_zero_epsilon * ImPow(v_max_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon, (FLOATTYPE)((t_with_flip - zero_point_snap_R) / (1.0f - zero_point_snap_R)))); + } + else if ((v_min < 0.0f) || (v_max < 0.0f)) // Entirely negative slider + result = (TYPE)-(-v_max_fudged * ImPow(-v_min_fudged / -v_max_fudged, (FLOATTYPE)(1.0f - t_with_flip))); + else + result = (TYPE)(v_min_fudged * ImPow(v_max_fudged / v_min_fudged, (FLOATTYPE)t_with_flip)); + } + else + { + // Linear slider + const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double); + if (is_floating_point) + { + result = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, t); + } + else if (t < 1.0) + { + // - For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above + // This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property.. + // - Not doing a *1.0 multiply at the end of a range as it tends to be lossy. While absolute aiming at a large s64/u64 + // range is going to be imprecise anyway, with this check we at least make the edge values matches expected limits. + FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (SIGNEDTYPE)(v_max - v_min) * t; + result = (TYPE)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_min + (SIGNEDTYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)(v_min > v_max ? -0.5 : 0.5))); + } + } + + return result; +} + +// FIXME: Try to move more of the code into shared SliderBehavior() +template +bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + + const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X; + const bool is_logarithmic = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) != 0; + const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double); + const float v_range_f = (float)(v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max); // We don't need high precision for what we do with it. + + // Calculate bounds + const float grab_padding = 2.0f; // FIXME: Should be part of style. + const float slider_sz = (bb.Max[axis] - bb.Min[axis]) - grab_padding * 2.0f; + float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize; + if (!is_floating_point && v_range_f >= 0.0f) // v_range_f < 0 may happen on integer overflows + grab_sz = ImMax(slider_sz / (v_range_f + 1), style.GrabMinSize); // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit + grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz); + const float slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz; + const float slider_usable_pos_min = bb.Min[axis] + grab_padding + grab_sz * 0.5f; + const float slider_usable_pos_max = bb.Max[axis] - grab_padding - grab_sz * 0.5f; + + float logarithmic_zero_epsilon = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true + float zero_deadzone_halfsize = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true + if (is_logarithmic) + { + // When using logarithmic sliders, we need to clamp to avoid hitting zero, but our choice of clamp value greatly affects slider precision. We attempt to use the specified precision to estimate a good lower bound. + const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 1; + logarithmic_zero_epsilon = ImPow(0.1f, (float)decimal_precision); + zero_deadzone_halfsize = (style.LogSliderDeadzone * 0.5f) / ImMax(slider_usable_sz, 1.0f); + } + + // Process interacting with the slider + bool value_changed = false; + if (g.ActiveId == id) + { + bool set_new_value = false; + float clicked_t = 0.0f; + if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse) + { + if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0]) + { + ClearActiveID(); + } + else + { + const float mouse_abs_pos = g.IO.MousePos[axis]; + if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) + { + float grab_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) + grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t; + const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t); + const bool clicked_around_grab = (mouse_abs_pos >= grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f - 1.0f) && (mouse_abs_pos <= grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f + 1.0f); // No harm being extra generous here. + g.SliderGrabClickOffset = (clicked_around_grab && is_floating_point) ? mouse_abs_pos - grab_pos : 0.0f; + } + if (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f) + clicked_t = ImSaturate((mouse_abs_pos - g.SliderGrabClickOffset - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz); + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) + clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t; + set_new_value = true; + } + } + else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) + { + if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) + { + g.SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f; // Reset any stored nav delta upon activation + g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false; + } + + float input_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis) : -GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis); + if (input_delta != 0.0f) + { + const bool tweak_slow = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow); + const bool tweak_fast = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast); + const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0; + if (decimal_precision > 0) + { + input_delta /= 100.0f; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds + if (tweak_slow) + input_delta /= 10.0f; + } + else + { + if ((v_range_f >= -100.0f && v_range_f <= 100.0f && v_range_f != 0.0f) || tweak_slow) + input_delta = ((input_delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / v_range_f; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps + else + input_delta /= 100.0f; + } + if (tweak_fast) + input_delta *= 10.0f; + + g.SliderCurrentAccum += input_delta; + g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = true; + } + + float delta = g.SliderCurrentAccum; + if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated) + { + ClearActiveID(); + } + else if (g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty) + { + clicked_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + + if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f) || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits + { + set_new_value = false; + g.SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f; // If pushing up against the limits, don't continue to accumulate + } + else + { + set_new_value = true; + float old_clicked_t = clicked_t; + clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta); + + // Calculate what our "new" clicked_t will be, and thus how far we actually moved the slider, and subtract this from the accumulator + TYPE v_new = ScaleValueFromRatioT(data_type, clicked_t, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat)) + v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT(format, data_type, v_new); + float new_clicked_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT(data_type, v_new, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + + if (delta > 0) + g.SliderCurrentAccum -= ImMin(new_clicked_t - old_clicked_t, delta); + else + g.SliderCurrentAccum -= ImMax(new_clicked_t - old_clicked_t, delta); + } + + g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false; + } + } + + if (set_new_value) + if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly) || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly)) + set_new_value = false; + + if (set_new_value) + { + TYPE v_new = ScaleValueFromRatioT(data_type, clicked_t, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + + // Round to user desired precision based on format string + if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat)) + v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT(format, data_type, v_new); + + // Apply result + if (*v != v_new) + { + *v = v_new; + value_changed = true; + } + } + } + + if (slider_sz < 1.0f) + { + *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min, bb.Min); + } + else + { + // Output grab position so it can be displayed by the caller + float grab_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize); + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) + grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t; + const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t); + // modified by asphyxia + if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) + *out_grab_bb = ImRect(slider_usable_pos_min - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding); + else + *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, slider_usable_pos_min + grab_sz * 0.5f); + } + + return value_changed; +} + +// For 32-bit and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range. +// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok. +// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders. +bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb) +{ + // Read imgui.cpp "API BREAKING CHANGES" section for 1.78 if you hit this assert. + IM_ASSERT((flags == 1 || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_) == 0) && "Invalid ImGuiSliderFlags flag! Has the 'float power' argument been mistakenly cast to flags? Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead."); + + switch (data_type) + { + case ImGuiDataType_S8: { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS8*)p_min, *(const ImS8*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS8*)p_v = (ImS8)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_U8: { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU8*)p_min, *(const ImU8*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU8*)p_v = (ImU8)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_S16: { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS16*)p_min, *(const ImS16*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS16*)p_v = (ImS16)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_U16: { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU16*)p_min, *(const ImU16*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU16*)p_v = (ImU16)v32; return r; } + case ImGuiDataType_S32: + IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32*)p_min >= IM_S32_MIN / 2 && *(const ImS32*)p_max <= IM_S32_MAX / 2); + return SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32*)p_v, *(const ImS32*)p_min, *(const ImS32*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); + case ImGuiDataType_U32: + IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32*)p_max <= IM_U32_MAX / 2); + return SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32*)p_v, *(const ImU32*)p_min, *(const ImU32*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); + case ImGuiDataType_S64: + IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64*)p_min >= IM_S64_MIN / 2 && *(const ImS64*)p_max <= IM_S64_MAX / 2); + return SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64*)p_v, *(const ImS64*)p_min, *(const ImS64*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); + case ImGuiDataType_U64: + IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64*)p_max <= IM_U64_MAX / 2); + return SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64*)p_v, *(const ImU64*)p_min, *(const ImU64*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); + case ImGuiDataType_Float: + IM_ASSERT(*(const float*)p_min >= -FLT_MAX / 2.0f && *(const float*)p_max <= FLT_MAX / 2.0f); + return SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, data_type, (float*)p_v, *(const float*)p_min, *(const float*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); + case ImGuiDataType_Double: + IM_ASSERT(*(const double*)p_min >= -DBL_MAX / 2.0f && *(const double*)p_max <= DBL_MAX / 2.0f); + return SliderBehaviorT(bb, id, data_type, (double*)p_v, *(const double*)p_min, *(const double*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); + case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break; + } + IM_ASSERT(0); + return false; +} + +// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a slider, they are all required. +// Read code of e.g. SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly. +bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + const float w = CalcItemWidth(); + const float h = GetFrameHeight(); + + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + // modified by asphyxia + const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + h : 0.0f, label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.y : 0.0f), window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.y : 0.0f) + h)); + const ImRect total_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, frame_bb.Max - ImVec2((label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + h : 0.0f), 0.0f)); + + const bool temp_input_allowed = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput) == 0; + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable : 0)) + return false; + + // Default format string when passing NULL + if (format == NULL) + format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt; + + const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags); + bool temp_input_is_active = temp_input_allowed && TempInputIsActive(id); + if (!temp_input_is_active) + { + // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box + const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = temp_input_allowed && (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0; + const bool clicked = hovered && IsMouseClicked(0, id); + const bool make_active = (input_requested_by_tabbing || clicked || g.NavActivateId == id); + if (make_active && clicked) + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id); + if (make_active && temp_input_allowed) + if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || (g.NavActivateId == id && (g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput))) + temp_input_is_active = true; + + if (make_active && !temp_input_is_active) + { + SetActiveID(id, window); + SetFocusID(id, window); + FocusWindow(window); + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right); + } + } + + if (temp_input_is_active) + { + // Only clamp CTRL+Click input when ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is set + const bool is_clamp_input = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp) != 0; + return TempInputScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format, is_clamp_input ? p_min : NULL, is_clamp_input ? p_max : NULL); + } + + // Draw frame + // modified by asphyxia + const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_ControlBgActive : g.HoveredId == id ? ImGuiCol_ControlBgHovered : ImGuiCol_Border); + RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id); + RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, g.Style.FrameRounding); + + // Slider behavior + ImRect grab_bb; + const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, flags, &grab_bb); + if (value_changed) + MarkItemEdited(id); + + // Render grab + if (grab_bb.Max.x > grab_bb.Min.x) + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding); + + // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value. + char value_buf[64]; + const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}"); + + //window->DrawList->AddText(frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + GetFrameHeight(), -GetFrameHeight()), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), value_buf, value_buf_end); + RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f)); + + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, total_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable : 0)); + return value_changed; +} + +// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components +bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + bool value_changed = false; + BeginGroup(); + PushID(label); + PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth()); + size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size; + for (int i = 0; i < components; i++) + { + PushID(i); + if (i > 0) + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + value_changed |= SliderScalar("", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, flags); + PopID(); + PopItemWidth(); + v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size); + } + PopID(); + + const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + if (label != label_end) + { + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + TextEx(label, label_end); + } + + EndGroup(); + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min, float v_degrees_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + if (format == NULL) + format = "%.0f deg"; + float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2 * IM_PI); + bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, format, flags); + *v_rad = v_deg * (2 * IM_PI) / 360.0f; + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size); + const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f)); + + ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id)) + return false; + + // Default format string when passing NULL + if (format == NULL) + format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt; + + const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags); + const bool clicked = hovered && IsMouseClicked(0, id); + if (clicked || g.NavActivateId == id) + { + if (clicked) + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id); + SetActiveID(id, window); + SetFocusID(id, window); + FocusWindow(window); + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down); + } + + // Draw frame + const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg); + RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id); + RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding); + + // Slider behavior + ImRect grab_bb; + const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, flags | ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical, &grab_bb); + if (value_changed) + MarkItemEdited(id); + + // Render grab + if (grab_bb.Max.y > grab_bb.Min.y) + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding); + + // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value. + // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding + char value_buf[64]; + const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format); + RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.0f)); + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label); + + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags) +{ + return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ImParseFormatFindStart() [Internal] +// - ImParseFormatFindEnd() [Internal] +// - ImParseFormatTrimDecorations() [Internal] +// - ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting() [Internal] +// - ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning() [Internal] +// - ImParseFormatPrecision() [Internal] +// - TempInputTextScalar() [Internal] +// - InputScalar() +// - InputScalarN() +// - InputFloat() +// - InputFloat2() +// - InputFloat3() +// - InputFloat4() +// - InputInt() +// - InputInt2() +// - InputInt3() +// - InputInt4() +// - InputDouble() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%' +const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* fmt) +{ + while (char c = fmt[0]) + { + if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%') + return fmt; + else if (c == '%') + fmt++; + fmt++; + } + return fmt; +} + +const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* fmt) +{ + // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format. + if (fmt[0] != '%') + return fmt; + const unsigned int ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I'-'A')) | (1 << ('L'-'A')); + const unsigned int ignored_lowercase_mask = (1 << ('h'-'a')) | (1 << ('j'-'a')) | (1 << ('l'-'a')) | (1 << ('t'-'a')) | (1 << ('w'-'a')) | (1 << ('z'-'a')); + for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++) + { + if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0) + return fmt + 1; + if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0) + return fmt + 1; + } + return fmt; +} + +// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations +// fmt = "blah blah" -> return "" +// fmt = "%.3f" -> return fmt +// fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6 +// fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f" +const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* fmt, char* buf, size_t buf_size) +{ + const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt); + if (fmt_start[0] != '%') + return ""; + const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start); + if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data. + return fmt_start; + ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_start) + 1, buf_size)); + return buf; +} + +// Sanitize format +// - Zero terminate so extra characters after format (e.g. "%f123") don't confuse atof/atoi +// - stb_sprintf.h supports several new modifiers which format numbers in a way that also makes them incompatible atof/atoi. +void ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size) +{ + const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_in); + IM_UNUSED(fmt_out_size); + IM_ASSERT((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_in + 1) < fmt_out_size); // Format is too long, let us know if this happens to you! + while (fmt_in < fmt_end) + { + char c = *fmt_in++; + if (c != '\'' && c != '$' && c != '_') // Custom flags provided by stb_sprintf.h. POSIX 2008 also supports '. + *(fmt_out++) = c; + } + *fmt_out = 0; // Zero-terminate +} + +// - For scanning we need to remove all width and precision fields and flags "%+3.7f" -> "%f". BUT don't strip types like "%I64d" which includes digits. ! "%07I64d" -> "%I64d" +const char* ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size) +{ + const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_in); + const char* fmt_out_begin = fmt_out; + IM_UNUSED(fmt_out_size); + IM_ASSERT((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_in + 1) < fmt_out_size); // Format is too long, let us know if this happens to you! + bool has_type = false; + while (fmt_in < fmt_end) + { + char c = *fmt_in++; + if (!has_type && ((c >= '0' && c <= '9') || c == '.' || c == '+' || c == '#')) + continue; + has_type |= ((c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') || (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z')); // Stop skipping digits + if (c != '\'' && c != '$' && c != '_') // Custom flags provided by stb_sprintf.h. POSIX 2008 also supports '. + *(fmt_out++) = c; + } + *fmt_out = 0; // Zero-terminate + return fmt_out_begin; +} + +template +static const char* ImAtoi(const char* src, TYPE* output) +{ + int negative = 0; + if (*src == '-') { negative = 1; src++; } + if (*src == '+') { src++; } + TYPE v = 0; + while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9') + v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0'); + *output = negative ? -v : v; + return src; +} + +// Parse display precision back from the display format string +// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed. +int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* fmt, int default_precision) +{ + fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt); + if (fmt[0] != '%') + return default_precision; + fmt++; + while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9') + fmt++; + int precision = INT_MAX; + if (*fmt == '.') + { + fmt = ImAtoi(fmt + 1, &precision); + if (precision < 0 || precision > 99) + precision = default_precision; + } + if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation + precision = -1; + if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX) + precision = -1; + return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision; +} + +// Create text input in place of another active widget (e.g. used when doing a CTRL+Click on drag/slider widgets) +// FIXME: Facilitate using this in variety of other situations. +bool ImGui::TempInputText(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + // On the first frame, g.TempInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id. + // We clear ActiveID on the first frame to allow the InputText() taking it back. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const bool init = (g.TempInputId != id); + if (init) + ClearActiveID(); + + g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min; + bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, buf_size, bb.GetSize(), flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem); + if (init) + { + // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget, we expect it to take the active id. + IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id); + g.TempInputId = g.ActiveId; + } + return value_changed; +} + +static inline ImGuiInputTextFlags InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(ImGuiDataType data_type, const char* format) +{ + if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double) + return ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific; + const char format_last_char = format[0] ? format[strlen(format) - 1] : 0; + return (format_last_char == 'x' || format_last_char == 'X') ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal; +} + +// Note that Drag/Slider functions are only forwarding the min/max values clamping values if the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp flag is set! +// This is intended: this way we allow CTRL+Click manual input to set a value out of bounds, for maximum flexibility. +// However this may not be ideal for all uses, as some user code may break on out of bound values. +bool ImGui::TempInputScalar(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format, const void* p_clamp_min, const void* p_clamp_max) +{ + // FIXME: May need to clarify display behavior if format doesn't contain %. + // "%d" -> "%d" / "There are %d items" -> "%d" / "items" -> "%d" (fallback). Also see #6405 + const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* type_info = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type); + char fmt_buf[32]; + char data_buf[32]; + format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf)); + if (format[0] == 0) + format = type_info->PrintFmt; + DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, p_data, format); + ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf); + + ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited; + flags |= InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(data_type, format); + + bool value_changed = false; + if (TempInputText(bb, id, label, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), flags)) + { + // Backup old value + size_t data_type_size = type_info->Size; + ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage data_backup; + memcpy(&data_backup, p_data, data_type_size); + + // Apply new value (or operations) then clamp + DataTypeApplyFromText(data_buf, data_type, p_data, format); + if (p_clamp_min || p_clamp_max) + { + if (p_clamp_min && p_clamp_max && DataTypeCompare(data_type, p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max) > 0) + ImSwap(p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max); + DataTypeClamp(data_type, p_data, p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max); + } + + // Only mark as edited if new value is different + value_changed = memcmp(&data_backup, p_data, data_type_size) != 0; + if (value_changed) + MarkItemEdited(id); + } + return value_changed; +} + +// Note: p_data, p_step, p_step_fast are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For an Input widget, p_step and p_step_fast are optional. +// Read code of e.g. InputFloat(), InputInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly. +bool ImGui::InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_step, const void* p_step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + + if (format == NULL) + format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt; + + char buf[64]; + DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, p_data, format); + + // Testing ActiveId as a minor optimization as filtering is not needed until active + if (g.ActiveId == 0 && (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0) + flags |= InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(data_type, format); + flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited; // We call MarkItemEdited() ourselves by comparing the actual data rather than the string. + + bool value_changed = false; + if (p_step == NULL) + { + if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags)) + value_changed = DataTypeApplyFromText(buf, data_type, p_data, format); + } + else + { + const float button_size = GetFrameHeight(); + + BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive() + PushID(label); + SetNextItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2)); + if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view + value_changed = DataTypeApplyFromText(buf, data_type, p_data, format); + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable); + + // Step buttons + const ImVec2 backup_frame_padding = style.FramePadding; + style.FramePadding.x = style.FramePadding.y; + ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups; + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) + BeginDisabled(); + SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags)) + { + DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step); + value_changed = true; + } + SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags)) + { + DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step); + value_changed = true; + } + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) + EndDisabled(); + + const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + if (label != label_end) + { + SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + TextEx(label, label_end); + } + style.FramePadding = backup_frame_padding; + + PopID(); + EndGroup(); + } + if (value_changed) + MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID); + + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_step, const void* p_step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + bool value_changed = false; + BeginGroup(); + PushID(label); + PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth()); + size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size; + for (int i = 0; i < components; i++) + { + PushID(i); + if (i > 0) + SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + value_changed |= InputScalar("", data_type, p_data, p_step, p_step_fast, format, flags); + PopID(); + PopItemWidth(); + p_data = (void*)((char*)p_data + type_size); + } + PopID(); + + const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + if (label != label_end) + { + SameLine(0.0f, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + TextEx(label, label_end); + } + + EndGroup(); + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific; + return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, (void*)v, (void*)(step > 0.0f ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast > 0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step, int step_fast, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle prefixes. + const char* format = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d"; + return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)v, (void*)(step > 0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast > 0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags); +} + +bool ImGui::InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step, double step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags) +{ + flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific; + return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Double, (void*)v, (void*)(step > 0.0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast > 0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline, InputTextWithHint +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - InputText() +// - InputTextWithHint() +// - InputTextMultiline() +// - InputTextGetCharInfo() [Internal] +// - InputTextReindexLines() [Internal] +// - InputTextReindexLinesRange() [Internal] +// - InputTextEx() [Internal] +// - DebugNodeInputTextState() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +bool ImGui::InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data) +{ + IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline() + return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data); +} + +bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data) +{ + return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data); +} + +bool ImGui::InputTextWithHint(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data) +{ + IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline() or InputTextEx() manually if you need multi-line + hint. + return InputTextEx(label, hint, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data); +} + +static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end) +{ + int line_count = 0; + const char* s = text_begin; + while (char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding + if (c == '\n') + line_count++; + s--; + if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r') + line_count++; + *out_text_end = s; + return line_count; +} + +static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImGuiContext* ctx, const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining, ImVec2* out_offset, bool stop_on_new_line) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + ImFont* font = g.Font; + const float line_height = g.FontSize; + const float scale = line_height / font->FontSize; + + ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0, 0); + float line_width = 0.0f; + + const ImWchar* s = text_begin; + while (s < text_end) + { + unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++); + if (c == '\n') + { + text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width); + text_size.y += line_height; + line_width = 0.0f; + if (stop_on_new_line) + break; + continue; + } + if (c == '\r') + continue; + + const float char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)c) * scale; + line_width += char_width; + } + + if (text_size.x < line_width) + text_size.x = line_width; + + if (out_offset) + *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height); // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n + + if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f) // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n + text_size.y += line_height; + + if (remaining) + *remaining = s; + + return text_size; +} + +// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and wchar) +namespace ImStb +{ + +static int STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const ImGuiInputTextState* obj) { return obj->CurLenW; } +static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) { return obj->TextW[idx]; } +static float STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx) { ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx + char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE; ImGuiContext& g = *obj->Ctx; return g.Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (g.FontSize / g.Font->FontSize); } +static int STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key) { return key >= 0x200000 ? 0 : key; } +static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n'; +static void STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow* r, ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int line_start_idx) +{ + const ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data; + const ImWchar* text_remaining = NULL; + const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(obj->Ctx, text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true); + r->x0 = 0.0f; + r->x1 = size.x; + r->baseline_y_delta = size.y; + r->ymin = 0.0f; + r->ymax = size.y; + r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx)); +} + +static bool is_separator(unsigned int c) +{ + return c==',' || c==';' || c=='(' || c==')' || c=='{' || c=='}' || c=='[' || c==']' || c=='|' || c=='\n' || c=='\r' || c=='.' || c=='!'; +} + +static int is_word_boundary_from_right(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) +{ + // When ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password is set, we don't want actions such as CTRL+Arrow to leak the fact that underlying data are blanks or separators. + if ((obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) || idx <= 0) + return 0; + + bool prev_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx - 1]); + bool prev_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx - 1]); + bool curr_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx]); + bool curr_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx]); + return ((prev_white || prev_separ) && !(curr_separ || curr_white)) || (curr_separ && !prev_separ); +} +static int is_word_boundary_from_left(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) +{ + if ((obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) || idx <= 0) + return 0; + + bool prev_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx]); + bool prev_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx]); + bool curr_white = ImCharIsBlankW(obj->TextW[idx - 1]); + bool curr_separ = is_separator(obj->TextW[idx - 1]); + return ((prev_white) && !(curr_separ || curr_white)) || (curr_separ && !prev_separ); +} +static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) { idx--; while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx--; return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx; } +static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; } +static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_WIN(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; } +static int STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx) { ImGuiContext& g = *obj->Ctx; if (g.IO.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors) return STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(obj, idx); else return STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_WIN(obj, idx); } +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL + +static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int pos, int n) +{ + ImWchar* dst = obj->TextW.Data + pos; + + // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats + obj->Edited = true; + obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n); + obj->CurLenW -= n; + + // Offset remaining text (FIXME-OPT: Use memmove) + const ImWchar* src = obj->TextW.Data + pos + n; + while (ImWchar c = *src++) + *dst++ = c; + *dst = '\0'; +} + +static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int pos, const ImWchar* new_text, int new_text_len) +{ + const bool is_resizable = (obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0; + const int text_len = obj->CurLenW; + IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len); + + const int new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len); + if (!is_resizable && (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufCapacityA)) + return false; + + // Grow internal buffer if needed + if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->TextW.Size) + { + if (!is_resizable) + return false; + IM_ASSERT(text_len < obj->TextW.Size); + obj->TextW.resize(text_len + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1); + } + + ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data; + if (pos != text_len) + memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar)); + memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar)); + + obj->Edited = true; + obj->CurLenW += new_text_len; + obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8; + obj->TextW[obj->CurLenW] = '\0'; + + return true; +} + +// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols) +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT 0x200000 // keyboard input to move cursor left +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT 0x200001 // keyboard input to move cursor right +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP 0x200002 // keyboard input to move cursor up +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN 0x200003 // keyboard input to move cursor down +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART 0x200004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND 0x200005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART 0x200006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND 0x200007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE 0x200008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE 0x200009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO 0x20000A // keyboard input to perform undo +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO 0x20000B // keyboard input to perform redo +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT 0x20000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT 0x20000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP 0x20000E // keyboard input to move cursor up a page +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN 0x20000F // keyboard input to move cursor down a page +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT 0x400000 + +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove memmove +#include "imstb_textedit.h" + +// stb_textedit internally allows for a single undo record to do addition and deletion, but somehow, calling +// the stb_textedit_paste() function creates two separate records, so we perform it manually. (FIXME: Report to nothings/stb?) +static void stb_textedit_replace(ImGuiInputTextState* str, STB_TexteditState* state, const STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE* text, int text_len) +{ + stb_text_makeundo_replace(str, state, 0, str->CurLenW, text_len); + ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, 0, str->CurLenW); + state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = 0; + if (text_len <= 0) + return; + if (ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, 0, text, text_len)) + { + state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = text_len; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + return; + } + IM_ASSERT(0); // Failed to insert character, normally shouldn't happen because of how we currently use stb_textedit_replace() +} + +} // namespace ImStb + +void ImGuiInputTextState::OnKeyPressed(int key) +{ + stb_textedit_key(this, &Stb, key); + CursorFollow = true; + CursorAnimReset(); +} + +ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ImGuiInputTextCallbackData() +{ + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); +} + +// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text +// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar) +// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance. +void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count) +{ + IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen); + char* dst = Buf + pos; + const char* src = Buf + pos + bytes_count; + while (char c = *src++) + *dst++ = c; + *dst = '\0'; + + if (CursorPos >= pos + bytes_count) + CursorPos -= bytes_count; + else if (CursorPos >= pos) + CursorPos = pos; + SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos; + BufDirty = true; + BufTextLen -= bytes_count; +} + +void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::InsertChars(int pos, const char* new_text, const char* new_text_end) +{ + // Accept null ranges + if (new_text == new_text_end) + return; + + const bool is_resizable = (Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0; + const int new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text); + if (new_text_len + BufTextLen >= BufSize) + { + if (!is_resizable) + return; + + // Contrary to STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS() this is working in the UTF8 buffer, hence the mildly similar code (until we remove the U16 buffer altogether!) + ImGuiContext& g = *Ctx; + ImGuiInputTextState* edit_state = &g.InputTextState; + IM_ASSERT(edit_state->ID != 0 && g.ActiveId == edit_state->ID); + IM_ASSERT(Buf == edit_state->TextA.Data); + int new_buf_size = BufTextLen + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1; + edit_state->TextA.reserve(new_buf_size + 1); + Buf = edit_state->TextA.Data; + BufSize = edit_state->BufCapacityA = new_buf_size; + } + + if (BufTextLen != pos) + memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos)); + memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char)); + Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0'; + + if (CursorPos >= pos) + CursorPos += new_text_len; + SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos; + BufDirty = true; + BufTextLen += new_text_len; +} + +// Return false to discard a character. +static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(ImGuiContext* ctx, unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data, ImGuiInputSource input_source) +{ + IM_ASSERT(input_source == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || input_source == ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard); + unsigned int c = *p_char; + + // Filter non-printable (NB: isprint is unreliable! see #2467) + bool apply_named_filters = true; + if (c < 0x20) + { + bool pass = false; + pass |= (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // Note that an Enter KEY will emit \r and be ignored (we poll for KEY in InputText() code) + pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput)); + if (!pass) + return false; + apply_named_filters = false; // Override named filters below so newline and tabs can still be inserted. + } + + if (input_source != ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard) + { + // We ignore Ascii representation of delete (emitted from Backspace on OSX, see #2578, #2817) + if (c == 127) + return false; + + // Filter private Unicode range. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys (FIXME) + if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF) + return false; + } + + // Filter Unicode ranges we are not handling in this build + if (c > IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX) + return false; + + // Generic named filters + if (apply_named_filters && (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific))) + { + // The libc allows overriding locale, with e.g. 'setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, "de_DE.UTF-8");' which affect the output/input of printf/scanf to use e.g. ',' instead of '.'. + // The standard mandate that programs starts in the "C" locale where the decimal point is '.'. + // We don't really intend to provide widespread support for it, but out of empathy for people stuck with using odd API, we support the bare minimum aka overriding the decimal point. + // Change the default decimal_point with: + // ImGui::GetIO()->PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint = *localeconv()->decimal_point; + // Users of non-default decimal point (in particular ',') may be affected by word-selection logic (is_word_boundary_from_right/is_word_boundary_from_left) functions. + ImGuiContext& g = *ctx; + const unsigned c_decimal_point = (unsigned int)g.IO.PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint; + if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) + if (c == '.' || c == ',') + c = c_decimal_point; + + // Full-width -> half-width conversion for numeric fields (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Halfwidth_and_Fullwidth_Forms_(Unicode_block) + // While this is mostly convenient, this has the side-effect for uninformed users accidentally inputting full-width characters that they may + // scratch their head as to why it works in numerical fields vs in generic text fields it would require support in the font. + if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)) + if (c >= 0xFF01 && c <= 0xFF5E) + c = c - 0xFF01 + 0x21; + + // Allow 0-9 . - + * / + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal) + if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != c_decimal_point) && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/')) + return false; + + // Allow 0-9 . - + * / e E + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific) + if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != c_decimal_point) && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E')) + return false; + + // Allow 0-9 a-F A-F + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) + if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F')) + return false; + + // Turn a-z into A-Z + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase) + if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') + c += (unsigned int)('A' - 'a'); + + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank) + if (ImCharIsBlankW(c)) + return false; + + *p_char = c; + } + + // Custom callback filter + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter) + { + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data; + callback_data.Ctx = &g; + callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter; + callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c; + callback_data.Flags = flags; + callback_data.UserData = user_data; + if (callback(&callback_data) != 0) + return false; + *p_char = callback_data.EventChar; + if (!callback_data.EventChar) + return false; + } + + return true; +} + +// Find the shortest single replacement we can make to get the new text from the old text. +// Important: needs to be run before TextW is rewritten with the new characters because calling STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR() at the end. +// FIXME: Ideally we should transition toward (1) making InsertChars()/DeleteChars() update undo-stack (2) discourage (and keep reconcile) or obsolete (and remove reconcile) accessing buffer directly. +static void InputTextReconcileUndoStateAfterUserCallback(ImGuiInputTextState* state, const char* new_buf_a, int new_length_a) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImWchar* old_buf = state->TextW.Data; + const int old_length = state->CurLenW; + const int new_length = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(new_buf_a, new_buf_a + new_length_a); + g.TempBuffer.reserve_discard((new_length + 1) * sizeof(ImWchar)); + ImWchar* new_buf = (ImWchar*)(void*)g.TempBuffer.Data; + ImTextStrFromUtf8(new_buf, new_length + 1, new_buf_a, new_buf_a + new_length_a); + + const int shorter_length = ImMin(old_length, new_length); + int first_diff; + for (first_diff = 0; first_diff < shorter_length; first_diff++) + if (old_buf[first_diff] != new_buf[first_diff]) + break; + if (first_diff == old_length && first_diff == new_length) + return; + + int old_last_diff = old_length - 1; + int new_last_diff = new_length - 1; + for (; old_last_diff >= first_diff && new_last_diff >= first_diff; old_last_diff--, new_last_diff--) + if (old_buf[old_last_diff] != new_buf[new_last_diff]) + break; + + const int insert_len = new_last_diff - first_diff + 1; + const int delete_len = old_last_diff - first_diff + 1; + if (insert_len > 0 || delete_len > 0) + if (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE* p = stb_text_createundo(&state->Stb.undostate, first_diff, delete_len, insert_len)) + for (int i = 0; i < delete_len; i++) + p[i] = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, first_diff + i); +} + +// As InputText() retain textual data and we currently provide a path for user to not retain it (via local variables) +// we need some form of hook to reapply data back to user buffer on deactivation frame. (#4714) +// It would be more desirable that we discourage users from taking advantage of the "user not retaining data" trick, +// but that more likely be attractive when we do have _NoLiveEdit flag available. +void ImGui::InputTextDeactivateHook(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiInputTextState* state = &g.InputTextState; + if (id == 0 || state->ID != id) + return; + g.InputTextDeactivatedState.ID = state->ID; + if (state->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) + { + g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.resize(0); // In theory this data won't be used, but clear to be neat. + } + else + { + IM_ASSERT(state->TextA.Data != 0); + g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.resize(state->CurLenA + 1); + memcpy(g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Data, state->TextA.Data, state->CurLenA + 1); + } +} + +// Edit a string of text +// - buf_size account for the zero-terminator, so a buf_size of 6 can hold "Hello" but not "Hello!". +// This is so we can easily call InputText() on static arrays using ARRAYSIZE() and to match +// Note that in std::string world, capacity() would omit 1 byte used by the zero-terminator. +// - When active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while the InputText is active has no effect. +// - If you want to use ImGui::InputText() with std::string, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h +// (FIXME: Rather confusing and messy function, among the worse part of our codebase, expecting to rewrite a V2 at some point.. Partly because we are +// doing UTF8 > U16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to easily interface with stb_textedit. Ideally should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188) +bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* callback_user_data) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + IM_ASSERT(buf != NULL && buf_size >= 0); + IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline))); // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys) + IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key) + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + + const bool RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE = false; + const bool is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0; + const bool is_readonly = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) != 0; + const bool is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0; + const bool is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0; + const bool is_resizable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0; + if (is_resizable) + IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); // Must provide a callback if you set the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag! + + if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope (including the scrollbar) + BeginGroup(); + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + const float h = GetFrameHeight(); + + // modified by asphyxia + const ImVec2 frame_size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth() - (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + h : 0.0f), (is_multiline ? g.FontSize * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line + const ImVec2 total_size = ImVec2(frame_size.x, frame_size.y); + + const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + h : 0.0f, label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.y : 0.0f), window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + h : 0.0f, label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.y : 0.0f)); + const ImRect total_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, frame_bb.Min + total_size); + + ImGuiWindow* draw_window = window; + ImVec2 inner_size = frame_size; + ImGuiItemStatusFlags item_status_flags = 0; + ImGuiLastItemData item_data_backup; + if (is_multiline) + { + ImVec2 backup_pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable)) + { + EndGroup(); + return false; + } + item_status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags; + item_data_backup = g.LastItemData; + window->DC.CursorPos = backup_pos; + + // We reproduce the contents of BeginChildFrame() in order to provide 'label' so our window internal data are easier to read/debug. + // FIXME-NAV: Pressing NavActivate will trigger general child activation right before triggering our own below. Harmless but bizarre. + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Ensure no clip rect so mouse hover can reach FramePadding edges + bool child_visible = BeginChildEx(label, id, frame_bb.GetSize(), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove); + PopStyleVar(3); + PopStyleColor(); + if (!child_visible) + { + EndChild(); + EndGroup(); + return false; + } + draw_window = g.CurrentWindow; // Child window + draw_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext |= (1 << draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrent); // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight so we can "enter" into it. + draw_window->DC.CursorPos += style.FramePadding; + inner_size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x; + } + else + { + // Support for internal ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem flag, which could be redesigned as an ItemFlags if needed (with test performed in ItemAdd) + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem)) + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable)) + return false; + item_status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags; + } + const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags); + if (hovered) + g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput; + + // We are only allowed to access the state if we are already the active widget. + ImGuiInputTextState* state = GetInputTextState(id); + + const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = (item_status_flags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0; + const bool input_requested_by_nav = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((g.NavActivateId == id) && ((g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput) || (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard))); + + const bool user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0]; + const bool user_scroll_finish = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y); + const bool user_scroll_active = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y); + bool clear_active_id = false; + bool select_all = false; + + float scroll_y = is_multiline ? draw_window->Scroll.y : FLT_MAX; + + const bool init_changed_specs = (state != NULL && state->Stb.single_line != !is_multiline); // state != NULL means its our state. + const bool init_make_active = (user_clicked || user_scroll_finish || input_requested_by_nav || input_requested_by_tabbing); + const bool init_state = (init_make_active || user_scroll_active); + if ((init_state && g.ActiveId != id) || init_changed_specs) + { + // Access state even if we don't own it yet. + state = &g.InputTextState; + state->CursorAnimReset(); + + // Backup state of deactivating item so they'll have a chance to do a write to output buffer on the same frame they report IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit (#4714) + InputTextDeactivateHook(state->ID); + + // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar) + // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode) + const int buf_len = (int)strlen(buf); + state->InitialTextA.resize(buf_len + 1); // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string. + memcpy(state->InitialTextA.Data, buf, buf_len + 1); + + // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget + // FIXME: Since we reworked this on 2022/06, may want to differenciate recycle_cursor vs recycle_undostate? + bool recycle_state = (state->ID == id && !init_changed_specs); + if (recycle_state && (state->CurLenA != buf_len || (state->TextAIsValid && strncmp(state->TextA.Data, buf, buf_len) != 0))) + recycle_state = false; + + // Start edition + const char* buf_end = NULL; + state->ID = id; + state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1); // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string. + state->TextA.resize(0); + state->TextAIsValid = false; // TextA is not valid yet (we will display buf until then) + state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, buf_size, buf, NULL, &buf_end); + state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf); // We can't get the result from ImStrncpy() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8. + + if (recycle_state) + { + // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position + // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler. + state->CursorClamp(); + } + else + { + state->ScrollX = 0.0f; + stb_textedit_initialize_state(&state->Stb, !is_multiline); + } + + if (!is_multiline) + { + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll) + select_all = true; + if (input_requested_by_nav && (!recycle_state || !(g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_TryToPreserveState))) + select_all = true; + if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl)) + select_all = true; + } + + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite) + state->Stb.insert_mode = 1; // stb field name is indeed incorrect (see #2863) + } + + const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors; + if (g.ActiveId != id && init_make_active) + { + IM_ASSERT(state && state->ID == id); + SetActiveID(id, window); + SetFocusID(id, window); + FocusWindow(window); + } + if (g.ActiveId == id) + { + // Declare some inputs, the other are registered and polled via Shortcut() routing system. + if (user_clicked) + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_MouseLeft, id); + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right); + if (is_multiline || (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory)) + g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down); + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_Home, id); + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_End, id); + if (is_multiline) + { + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_PageUp, id); + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiKey_PageDown, id); + } + if (is_osx) + SetKeyOwner(ImGuiMod_Alt, id); + if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput)) // Disable keyboard tabbing out as we will use the \t character. + SetShortcutRouting(ImGuiKey_Tab, id); + } + + // We have an edge case if ActiveId was set through another widget (e.g. widget being swapped), clear id immediately (don't wait until the end of the function) + if (g.ActiveId == id && state == NULL) + ClearActiveID(); + + // Release focus when we click outside + if (g.ActiveId == id && io.MouseClicked[0] && !init_state && !init_make_active) //-V560 + clear_active_id = true; + + // Lock the decision of whether we are going to take the path displaying the cursor or selection + bool render_cursor = (g.ActiveId == id) || (state && user_scroll_active); + bool render_selection = state && (state->HasSelection() || select_all) && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor); + bool value_changed = false; + bool validated = false; + + // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function + // FIXME-OPT: Because our selection/cursor code currently needs the wide text we need to convert it when active, which is not ideal :( + if (is_readonly && state != NULL && (render_cursor || render_selection)) + { + const char* buf_end = NULL; + state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1); + state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end); + state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf); + state->CursorClamp(); + render_selection &= state->HasSelection(); + } + + // Select the buffer to render. + const bool buf_display_from_state = (render_cursor || render_selection || g.ActiveId == id) && !is_readonly && state && state->TextAIsValid; + const bool is_displaying_hint = (hint != NULL && (buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf)[0] == 0); + + // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph + if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint) + { + const ImFontGlyph* glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*'); + ImFont* password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont; + password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize; + password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale; + password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent; + password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent; + password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas; + password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph; + password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX; + IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty()); + PushFont(password_font); + } + + // Process mouse inputs and character inputs + int backup_current_text_length = 0; + if (g.ActiveId == id) + { + IM_ASSERT(state != NULL); + backup_current_text_length = state->CurLenA; + state->Edited = false; + state->BufCapacityA = buf_size; + state->Flags = flags; + + // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget. + // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active. + g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0]; + + // Edit in progress + const float mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + state->ScrollX; + const float mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y) : (g.FontSize * 0.5f)); + + if (select_all) + { + state->SelectAll(); + state->SelectedAllMouseLock = true; + } + else if (hovered && io.MouseClickedCount[0] >= 2 && !io.KeyShift) + { + stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y); + const int multiclick_count = (io.MouseClickedCount[0] - 2); + if ((multiclick_count % 2) == 0) + { + // Double-click: Select word + // We always use the "Mac" word advance for double-click select vs CTRL+Right which use the platform dependent variant: + // FIXME: There are likely many ways to improve this behavior, but there's no "right" behavior (depends on use-case, software, OS) + const bool is_bol = (state->Stb.cursor == 0) || ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, state->Stb.cursor - 1) == '\n'; + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(&state->Stb) || !is_bol) + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT); + //state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + if (!STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(&state->Stb)) + ImStb::stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(&state->Stb); + state->Stb.cursor = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(state, state->Stb.cursor); + state->Stb.select_end = state->Stb.cursor; + ImStb::stb_textedit_clamp(state, &state->Stb); + } + else + { + // Triple-click: Select line + const bool is_eol = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, state->Stb.cursor) == '\n'; + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART); + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + if (!is_eol && is_multiline) + { + ImSwap(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end); + state->Stb.cursor = state->Stb.select_end; + } + state->CursorFollow = false; + } + state->CursorAnimReset(); + } + else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock) + { + if (hovered) + { + if (io.KeyShift) + stb_textedit_drag(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y); + else + stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y); + state->CursorAnimReset(); + } + } + else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f)) + { + stb_textedit_drag(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y); + state->CursorAnimReset(); + state->CursorFollow = true; + } + if (state->SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0]) + state->SelectedAllMouseLock = false; + + // We expect backends to emit a Tab key but some also emit a Tab character which we ignore (#2467, #1336) + // (For Tab and Enter: Win32/SFML/Allegro are sending both keys and chars, GLFW and SDL are only sending keys. For Space they all send all threes) + if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && Shortcut(ImGuiKey_Tab, id) && !is_readonly) + { + unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB + if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard)) + state->OnKeyPressed((int)c); + } + + // Process regular text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?) + // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters. + const bool ignore_char_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper); + if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0) + { + if (!ignore_char_inputs && !is_readonly && !input_requested_by_nav) + for (int n = 0; n < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; n++) + { + // Insert character if they pass filtering + unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputQueueCharacters[n]; + if (c == '\t') // Skip Tab, see above. + continue; + if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard)) + state->OnKeyPressed((int)c); + } + + // Consume characters + io.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0); + } + } + + // Process other shortcuts/key-presses + bool revert_edit = false; + if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id) + { + IM_ASSERT(state != NULL); + + const int row_count_per_page = ImMax((int)((inner_size.y - style.FramePadding.y) / g.FontSize), 1); + state->Stb.row_count_per_page = row_count_per_page; + + const int k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0); + const bool is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl; // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl + const bool is_startend_key_down = is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt; // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End + + // Using Shortcut() with ImGuiInputFlags_RouteFocused (default policy) to allow routing operations for other code (e.g. calling window trying to use CTRL+A and CTRL+B: formet would be handled by InputText) + // Otherwise we could simply assume that we own the keys as we are active. + const ImGuiInputFlags f_repeat = ImGuiInputFlags_Repeat; + const bool is_cut = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_X, id, f_repeat) || Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Delete, id, f_repeat)) && !is_readonly && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection()); + const bool is_copy = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_C, id) || Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Ctrl | ImGuiKey_Insert, id)) && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection()); + const bool is_paste = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_V, id, f_repeat) || Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Insert, id, f_repeat)) && !is_readonly; + const bool is_undo = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_Z, id, f_repeat)) && !is_readonly && is_undoable; + const bool is_redo = (Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_Y, id, f_repeat) || (is_osx && Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiMod_Shift | ImGuiKey_Z, id, f_repeat))) && !is_readonly && is_undoable; + const bool is_select_all = Shortcut(ImGuiMod_Shortcut | ImGuiKey_A, id); + + // We allow validate/cancel with Nav source (gamepad) to makes it easier to undo an accidental NavInput press with no keyboard wired, but otherwise it isn't very useful. + const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0; + const bool is_enter_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter, true) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter, true); + const bool is_gamepad_validate = nav_gamepad_active && (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate, false) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput, false)); + const bool is_cancel = Shortcut(ImGuiKey_Escape, id, f_repeat) || (nav_gamepad_active && Shortcut(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel, id, f_repeat)); + + // FIXME: Should use more Shortcut() and reduce IsKeyPressed()+SetKeyOwner(), but requires modifiers combination to be taken account of. + if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow)) { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT) | k_mask); } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_RightArrow)) { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT) | k_mask); } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline) { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f)); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask); } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline) { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY())); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask); } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageUp) && is_multiline) { state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP | k_mask); scroll_y -= row_count_per_page * g.FontSize; } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageDown) && is_multiline) { state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN | k_mask); scroll_y += row_count_per_page * g.FontSize; } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Home)) { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask); } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_End)) { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask); } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Delete) && !is_readonly && !is_cut) + { + if (!state->HasSelection()) + { + // OSX doesn't seem to have Super+Delete to delete until end-of-line, so we don't emulate that (as opposed to Super+Backspace) + if (is_wordmove_key_down) + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + } + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask); + } + else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && !is_readonly) + { + if (!state->HasSelection()) + { + if (is_wordmove_key_down) + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl) + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + } + state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask); + } + else if (is_enter_pressed || is_gamepad_validate) + { + // Determine if we turn Enter into a \n character + bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0; + if (!is_multiline || is_gamepad_validate || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl)) + { + validated = true; + if (io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive && !is_multiline) + state->SelectAll(); // No need to scroll + else + clear_active_id = true; + } + else if (!is_readonly) + { + unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line + if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard)) + state->OnKeyPressed((int)c); + } + } + else if (is_cancel) + { + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll) + { + if (buf[0] != 0) + { + revert_edit = true; + } + else + { + render_cursor = render_selection = false; + clear_active_id = true; + } + } + else + { + clear_active_id = revert_edit = true; + render_cursor = render_selection = false; + } + } + else if (is_undo || is_redo) + { + state->OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO); + state->ClearSelection(); + } + else if (is_select_all) + { + state->SelectAll(); + state->CursorFollow = true; + } + else if (is_cut || is_copy) + { + // Cut, Copy + if (io.SetClipboardTextFn) + { + const int ib = state->HasSelection() ? ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : 0; + const int ie = state->HasSelection() ? ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : state->CurLenW; + const int clipboard_data_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie) + 1; + char* clipboard_data = (char*)IM_ALLOC(clipboard_data_len * sizeof(char)); + ImTextStrToUtf8(clipboard_data, clipboard_data_len, state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie); + SetClipboardText(clipboard_data); + MemFree(clipboard_data); + } + if (is_cut) + { + if (!state->HasSelection()) + state->SelectAll(); + state->CursorFollow = true; + stb_textedit_cut(state, &state->Stb); + } + } + else if (is_paste) + { + if (const char* clipboard = GetClipboardText()) + { + // Filter pasted buffer + const int clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard); + ImWchar* clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar*)IM_ALLOC((clipboard_len + 1) * sizeof(ImWchar)); + int clipboard_filtered_len = 0; + for (const char* s = clipboard; *s != 0; ) + { + unsigned int c; + s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL); + if (!InputTextFilterCharacter(&g, &c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard)) + continue; + clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c; + } + clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0; + if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation + { + stb_textedit_paste(state, &state->Stb, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len); + state->CursorFollow = true; + } + MemFree(clipboard_filtered); + } + } + + // Update render selection flag after events have been handled, so selection highlight can be displayed during the same frame. + render_selection |= state->HasSelection() && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor); + } + + // Process callbacks and apply result back to user's buffer. + const char* apply_new_text = NULL; + int apply_new_text_length = 0; + if (g.ActiveId == id) + { + IM_ASSERT(state != NULL); + if (revert_edit && !is_readonly) + { + if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EscapeClearsAll) + { + // Clear input + IM_ASSERT(buf[0] != 0); + apply_new_text = ""; + apply_new_text_length = 0; + value_changed = true; + STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE empty_string; + stb_textedit_replace(state, &state->Stb, &empty_string, 0); + } + else if (strcmp(buf, state->InitialTextA.Data) != 0) + { + // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents. + // Push records into the undo stack so we can CTRL+Z the revert operation itself + apply_new_text = state->InitialTextA.Data; + apply_new_text_length = state->InitialTextA.Size - 1; + value_changed = true; + ImVector w_text; + if (apply_new_text_length > 0) + { + w_text.resize(ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(apply_new_text, apply_new_text + apply_new_text_length) + 1); + ImTextStrFromUtf8(w_text.Data, w_text.Size, apply_new_text, apply_new_text + apply_new_text_length); + } + stb_textedit_replace(state, &state->Stb, w_text.Data, (apply_new_text_length > 0) ? (w_text.Size - 1) : 0); + } + } + + // Apply ASCII value + if (!is_readonly) + { + state->TextAIsValid = true; + state->TextA.resize(state->TextW.Size * 4 + 1); + ImTextStrToUtf8(state->TextA.Data, state->TextA.Size, state->TextW.Data, NULL); + } + + // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer + // before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame. + // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail. + // This also allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage + // (please note that if you use this property along ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize you can end up with your temporary string object + // unnecessarily allocating once a frame, either store your string data, either if you don't then don't use ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize). + const bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !revert_edit || (validated && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0); + if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer) + { + // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back + // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer + // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect. + // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks. + + // User callback + if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)) != 0) + { + IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); + + // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment. + ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0; + ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_None; + if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && Shortcut(ImGuiKey_Tab, id)) + { + event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion; + event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab; + } + else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_UpArrow)) + { + event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory; + event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow; + } + else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_DownArrow)) + { + event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory; + event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow; + } + else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit) && state->Edited) + { + event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit; + } + else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways) + { + event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways; + } + + if (event_flag) + { + ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data; + callback_data.Ctx = &g; + callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag; + callback_data.Flags = flags; + callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data; + + char* callback_buf = is_readonly ? buf : state->TextA.Data; + callback_data.EventKey = event_key; + callback_data.Buf = callback_buf; + callback_data.BufTextLen = state->CurLenA; + callback_data.BufSize = state->BufCapacityA; + callback_data.BufDirty = false; + + // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188) + ImWchar* text = state->TextW.Data; + const int utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.cursor); + const int utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_start); + const int utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_end); + + // Call user code + callback(&callback_data); + + // Read back what user may have modified + callback_buf = is_readonly ? buf : state->TextA.Data; // Pointer may have been invalidated by a resize callback + IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == callback_buf); // Invalid to modify those fields + IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == state->BufCapacityA); + IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags); + const bool buf_dirty = callback_data.BufDirty; + if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos || buf_dirty) { state->Stb.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos); state->CursorFollow = true; } + if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start || buf_dirty) { state->Stb.select_start = (callback_data.SelectionStart == callback_data.CursorPos) ? state->Stb.cursor : ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart); } + if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end || buf_dirty) { state->Stb.select_end = (callback_data.SelectionEnd == callback_data.SelectionStart) ? state->Stb.select_start : ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd); } + if (buf_dirty) + { + IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) == 0); + IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text! + InputTextReconcileUndoStateAfterUserCallback(state, callback_data.Buf, callback_data.BufTextLen); // FIXME: Move the rest of this block inside function and rename to InputTextReconcileStateAfterUserCallback() ? + if (callback_data.BufTextLen > backup_current_text_length && is_resizable) + state->TextW.resize(state->TextW.Size + (callback_data.BufTextLen - backup_current_text_length)); // Worse case scenario resize + state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL); + state->CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen; // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen() + state->CursorAnimReset(); + } + } + } + + // Will copy result string if modified + if (!is_readonly && strcmp(state->TextA.Data, buf) != 0) + { + apply_new_text = state->TextA.Data; + apply_new_text_length = state->CurLenA; + value_changed = true; + } + } + } + + // Handle reapplying final data on deactivation (see InputTextDeactivateHook() for details) + if (g.InputTextDeactivatedState.ID == id) + { + if (g.ActiveId != id && IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() && !is_readonly && strcmp(g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Data, buf) != 0) + { + apply_new_text = g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Data; + apply_new_text_length = g.InputTextDeactivatedState.TextA.Size - 1; + value_changed = true; + //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("InputText(): apply Deactivated data for 0x%08X: \"%.*s\".\n", id, apply_new_text_length, apply_new_text); + } + g.InputTextDeactivatedState.ID = 0; + } + + // Copy result to user buffer. This can currently only happen when (g.ActiveId == id) + if (apply_new_text != NULL) + { + // We cannot test for 'backup_current_text_length != apply_new_text_length' here because we have no guarantee that the size + // of our owned buffer matches the size of the string object held by the user, and by design we allow InputText() to be used + // without any storage on user's side. + IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length >= 0); + if (is_resizable) + { + ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data; + callback_data.Ctx = &g; + callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize; + callback_data.Flags = flags; + callback_data.Buf = buf; + callback_data.BufTextLen = apply_new_text_length; + callback_data.BufSize = ImMax(buf_size, apply_new_text_length + 1); + callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data; + callback(&callback_data); + buf = callback_data.Buf; + buf_size = callback_data.BufSize; + apply_new_text_length = ImMin(callback_data.BufTextLen, buf_size - 1); + IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length <= buf_size); + } + //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("InputText(\"%s\"): apply_new_text length %d\n", label, apply_new_text_length); + + // If the underlying buffer resize was denied or not carried to the next frame, apply_new_text_length+1 may be >= buf_size. + ImStrncpy(buf, apply_new_text, ImMin(apply_new_text_length + 1, buf_size)); + } + + // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a final application of the value) + // Otherwise request text input ahead for next frame. + if (g.ActiveId == id && clear_active_id) + ClearActiveID(); + else if (g.ActiveId == id) + g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1; + + // Render frame + if (!is_multiline) + { + RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id); + RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ControlBg), true, style.FrameRounding); + } + + const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + inner_size.x, frame_bb.Min.y + inner_size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size + ImVec2 draw_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding; + ImVec2 text_size(0.0f, 0.0f); + + // Set upper limit of single-line InputTextEx() at 2 million characters strings. The current pathological worst case is a long line + // without any carriage return, which would makes ImFont::RenderText() reserve too many vertices and probably crash. Avoid it altogether. + // Note that we only use this limit on single-line InputText(), so a pathologically large line on a InputTextMultiline() would still crash. + const int buf_display_max_length = 2 * 1024 * 1024; + const char* buf_display = buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf; //-V595 + const char* buf_display_end = NULL; // We have specialized paths below for setting the length + if (is_displaying_hint) + { + buf_display = hint; + buf_display_end = hint + strlen(hint); + } + + // Render text. We currently only render selection when the widget is active or while scrolling. + // FIXME: We could remove the '&& render_cursor' to keep rendering selection when inactive. + if (render_cursor || render_selection) + { + IM_ASSERT(state != NULL); + if (!is_displaying_hint) + buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA; + + // Render text (with cursor and selection) + // This is going to be messy. We need to: + // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped) + // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation) + // - Measure text height (for scrollbar) + // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort) + // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8. + const ImWchar* text_begin = state->TextW.Data; + ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset; + + { + // Find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' (slot 0) and 'select_start' (slot 1) positions. + const ImWchar* searches_input_ptr[2] = { NULL, NULL }; + int searches_result_line_no[2] = { -1000, -1000 }; + int searches_remaining = 0; + if (render_cursor) + { + searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + state->Stb.cursor; + searches_result_line_no[0] = -1; + searches_remaining++; + } + if (render_selection) + { + searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end); + searches_result_line_no[1] = -1; + searches_remaining++; + } + + // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers + // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter. + searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0; + int line_count = 0; + //for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; (s = (const ImWchar*)wcschr((const wchar_t*)s, (wchar_t)'\n')) != NULL; s++) // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit + for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++) + if (*s == '\n') + { + line_count++; + if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) { searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; } + if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) { searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; } + } + line_count++; + if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1) + searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count; + if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1) + searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count; + + // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance + cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(&g, ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x; + cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[0] * g.FontSize; + if (searches_result_line_no[1] >= 0) + { + select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(&g, ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x; + select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[1] * g.FontSize; + } + + // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224) + if (is_multiline) + text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, line_count * g.FontSize); + } + + // Scroll + if (render_cursor && state->CursorFollow) + { + // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width + if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll)) + { + const float scroll_increment_x = inner_size.x * 0.25f; + const float visible_width = inner_size.x - style.FramePadding.x; + if (cursor_offset.x < state->ScrollX) + state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x)); + else if (cursor_offset.x - visible_width >= state->ScrollX) + state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(cursor_offset.x - visible_width + scroll_increment_x); + } + else + { + state->ScrollX = 0.0f; + } + + // Vertical scroll + if (is_multiline) + { + // Test if cursor is vertically visible + if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y) + scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize); + else if (cursor_offset.y - (inner_size.y - style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f) >= scroll_y) + scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - inner_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f; + const float scroll_max_y = ImMax((text_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f) - inner_size.y, 0.0f); + scroll_y = ImClamp(scroll_y, 0.0f, scroll_max_y); + draw_pos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y); // Manipulate cursor pos immediately avoid a frame of lag + draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y; + } + + state->CursorFollow = false; + } + + // Draw selection + const ImVec2 draw_scroll = ImVec2(state->ScrollX, 0.0f); + if (render_selection) + { + const ImWchar* text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end); + const ImWchar* text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end); + + ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg, render_cursor ? 1.0f : 0.6f); // FIXME: current code flow mandate that render_cursor is always true here, we are leaving the transparent one for tests. + float bg_offy_up = is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f; // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection. + float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f; + ImVec2 rect_pos = draw_pos + select_start_offset - draw_scroll; + for (const ImWchar* p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end; ) + { + if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize) + break; + if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y) + { + //p = (const ImWchar*)wmemchr((const wchar_t*)p, '\n', text_selected_end - p); // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit + //p = p ? p + 1 : text_selected_end; + while (p < text_selected_end) + if (*p++ == '\n') + break; + } + else + { + ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(&g, p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true); + if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = IM_FLOOR(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines + ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos + ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn)); + rect.ClipWith(clip_rect); + if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect)) + draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color); + } + rect_pos.x = draw_pos.x - draw_scroll.x; + rect_pos.y += g.FontSize; + } + } + + // We test for 'buf_display_max_length' as a way to avoid some pathological cases (e.g. single-line 1 MB string) which would make ImDrawList crash. + if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length) + { + ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text); + draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos - draw_scroll, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect); + } + + // Draw blinking cursor + if (render_cursor) + { + state->CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime; + bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) || (state->CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(state->CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f; + ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = ImFloor(draw_pos + cursor_offset - draw_scroll); + ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize + 0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x + 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - 1.5f); + if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect)) + draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text)); + + // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.) + if (!is_readonly) + { + g.PlatformImeData.WantVisible = true; + g.PlatformImeData.InputPos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize); + g.PlatformImeData.InputLineHeight = g.FontSize; + } + } + } + else + { + // Render text only (no selection, no cursor) + if (is_multiline) + text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_display_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width + else if (!is_displaying_hint && g.ActiveId == id) + buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA; + else if (!is_displaying_hint) + buf_display_end = buf_display + strlen(buf_display); + + if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length) + { + ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text); + draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect); + } + } + + if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint) + PopFont(); + + if (is_multiline) + { + // For focus requests to work on our multiline we need to ensure our child ItemAdd() call specifies the ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable (ref issue #4761)... + Dummy(ImVec2(text_size.x, text_size.y + style.FramePadding.y)); + g.NextItemData.ItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable | ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop; + EndChild(); + item_data_backup.StatusFlags |= (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow); + + // ...and then we need to undo the group overriding last item data, which gets a bit messy as EndGroup() tries to forward scrollbar being active... + // FIXME: This quite messy/tricky, should attempt to get rid of the child window. + EndGroup(); + if (g.LastItemData.ID == 0) + { + g.LastItemData.ID = id; + g.LastItemData.InFlags = item_data_backup.InFlags; + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = item_data_backup.StatusFlags; + } + } + + // Log as text + if (g.LogEnabled && (!is_password || is_displaying_hint)) + { + LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}"); + LogRenderedText(&draw_pos, buf_display, buf_display_end); + } + + if (label_size.x > 0) + // modified by asphyxia + RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, total_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label); + + if (value_changed && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited)) + MarkItemEdited(id); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Inputable); + if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0) + return validated; + else + return value_changed; +} + +void ImGui::DebugNodeInputTextState(ImGuiInputTextState* state) +{ +#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImStb::STB_TexteditState* stb_state = &state->Stb; + ImStb::StbUndoState* undo_state = &stb_state->undostate; + Text("ID: 0x%08X, ActiveID: 0x%08X", state->ID, g.ActiveId); + DebugLocateItemOnHover(state->ID); + Text("CurLenW: %d, CurLenA: %d, Cursor: %d, Selection: %d..%d", state->CurLenW, state->CurLenA, stb_state->cursor, stb_state->select_start, stb_state->select_end); + Text("has_preferred_x: %d (%.2f)", stb_state->has_preferred_x, stb_state->preferred_x); + Text("undo_point: %d, redo_point: %d, undo_char_point: %d, redo_char_point: %d", undo_state->undo_point, undo_state->redo_point, undo_state->undo_char_point, undo_state->redo_char_point); + if (BeginChild("undopoints", ImVec2(0.0f, GetTextLineHeight() * 15), true)) // Visualize undo state + { + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0)); + for (int n = 0; n < STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT; n++) + { + ImStb::StbUndoRecord* undo_rec = &undo_state->undo_rec[n]; + const char undo_rec_type = (n < undo_state->undo_point) ? 'u' : (n >= undo_state->redo_point) ? 'r' : ' '; + if (undo_rec_type == ' ') + BeginDisabled(); + char buf[64] = ""; + if (undo_rec_type != ' ' && undo_rec->char_storage != -1) + ImTextStrToUtf8(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), undo_state->undo_char + undo_rec->char_storage, undo_state->undo_char + undo_rec->char_storage + undo_rec->insert_length); + Text("%c [%02d] where %03d, insert %03d, delete %03d, char_storage %03d \"%s\"", + undo_rec_type, n, undo_rec->where, undo_rec->insert_length, undo_rec->delete_length, undo_rec->char_storage, buf); + if (undo_rec_type == ' ') + EndDisabled(); + } + PopStyleVar(); + } + EndChild(); +#else + IM_UNUSED(state); +#endif +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ColorEdit3() +// - ColorEdit4() +// - ColorPicker3() +// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard() [Internal] +// - ColorPicker4() +// - ColorButton() +// - SetColorEditOptions() +// - ColorTooltip() [Internal] +// - ColorEditOptionsPopup() [Internal] +// - ColorPickerOptionsPopup() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha); +} + +static void ColorEditRestoreH(const float* col, float* H) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.ColorEditCurrentID != 0); + if (g.ColorEditSavedID != g.ColorEditCurrentID || g.ColorEditSavedColor != ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0))) + return; + *H = g.ColorEditSavedHue; +} + +// ColorEdit supports RGB and HSV inputs. In case of RGB input resulting color may have undefined hue and/or saturation. +// Since widget displays both RGB and HSV values we must preserve hue and saturation to prevent these values resetting. +static void ColorEditRestoreHS(const float* col, float* H, float* S, float* V) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(g.ColorEditCurrentID != 0); + if (g.ColorEditSavedID != g.ColorEditCurrentID || g.ColorEditSavedColor != ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0))) + return; + + // When S == 0, H is undefined. + // When H == 1 it wraps around to 0. + if (*S == 0.0f || (*H == 0.0f && g.ColorEditSavedHue == 1)) + *H = g.ColorEditSavedHue; + + // When V == 0, S is undefined. + if (*V == 0.0f) + *S = g.ColorEditSavedSat; +} + +// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range). +// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set. +// With typical options: Left-click on color square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to go to next item. +bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight(); + const float w_full = CalcItemWidth(); + const float w_button = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + const float w_inputs = w_full - w_button; + const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + g.NextItemData.ClearFlags(); + + BeginGroup(); + PushID(label); + const bool set_current_color_edit_id = (g.ColorEditCurrentID == 0); + if (set_current_color_edit_id) + g.ColorEditCurrentID = window->IDStack.back(); + + // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions + const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags; + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) + flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions; + + // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied) + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags); + + // Read stored options + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)) + flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_); + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_)) + flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_); + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_)) + flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_); + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)) + flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_); + flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)); + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected + + const bool alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0; + const bool hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0; + const int components = alpha ? 4 : 3; + + // Convert to the formats we need + float f[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f }; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB)) + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]); + else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) + { + // Hue is lost when converting from grayscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it. + ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]); + ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &f[0], &f[1], &f[2]); + } + int i[4] = { IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3]) }; + + bool value_changed = false; + bool value_changed_as_float = false; + + const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + const float inputs_offset_x = (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left) ? w_button : 0.0f; + window->DC.CursorPos.x = pos.x + inputs_offset_x; + + if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0) + { + // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders + const float w_item_one = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR((w_inputs - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)) / (float)components)); + const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(w_inputs - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1))); + + const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x); + static const char* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" }; + static const char* fmt_table_int[3][4] = + { + { "%3d", "%3d", "%3d", "%3d" }, // Short display + { "R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d" }, // Long display for RGBA + { "H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d" } // Long display for HSVA + }; + static const char* fmt_table_float[3][4] = + { + { "%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f", "%0.3f" }, // Short display + { "R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }, // Long display for RGBA + { "H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" } // Long display for HSVA + }; + const int fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) ? 2 : 1; + + for (int n = 0; n < components; n++) + { + if (n > 0) + SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + SetNextItemWidth((n + 1 < components) ? w_item_one : w_item_last); + + // FIXME: When ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR flag is passed HS values snap in weird ways when SV values go below 0. + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) + { + value_changed |= DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f / 255.0f, 0.0f, hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]); + value_changed_as_float |= value_changed; + } + else + { + value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, 0, hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]); + } + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + } + } + else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0) + { + // RGB Hexadecimal Input + char buf[64]; + if (alpha) + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[1], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[2], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[3], 0, 255)); + else + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[1], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[2], 0, 255)); + SetNextItemWidth(w_inputs); + if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)) + { + value_changed = true; + char* p = buf; + while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p)) + p++; + i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = 0; + i[3] = 0xFF; // alpha default to 255 is not parsed by scanf (e.g. inputting #FFFFFF omitting alpha) + int r; + if (alpha) + r = sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2], (unsigned int*)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned) + else + r = sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2]); + IM_UNUSED(r); // Fixes C6031: Return value ignored: 'sscanf'. + } + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + } + + ImGuiWindow* picker_active_window = NULL; + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview)) + { + const float button_offset_x = ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) || (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)) ? 0.0f : w_inputs + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(pos.x + button_offset_x, pos.y); + + const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f); + if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags)) + { + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker)) + { + // Store current color and open a picker + g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4; + OpenPopup("picker"); + SetNextWindowPos(g.LastItemData.Rect.GetBL() + ImVec2(0.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y)); + } + } + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + + if (BeginPopup("picker")) + { + if (g.CurrentWindow->BeginCount == 1) + { + picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow; + // modify by asphyxia + //if (label != label_display_end) + //{ + // TextEx(label, label_display_end); + // Spacing(); + //} + ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar; + ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf; + SetNextItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes? + value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x); + } + EndPopup(); + } + } + + if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel)) + { + // Position not necessarily next to last submitted button (e.g. if style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left), + // but we need to use SameLine() to setup baseline correctly. Might want to refactor SameLine() to simplify this. + SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + window->DC.CursorPos.x = pos.x + ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) ? w_button : w_full + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + TextEx(label, label_display_end); + } + + // Convert back + if (value_changed && picker_active_window == NULL) + { + if (!value_changed_as_float) + for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++) + f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)) + { + g.ColorEditSavedHue = f[0]; + g.ColorEditSavedSat = f[1]; + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]); + g.ColorEditSavedID = g.ColorEditCurrentID; + g.ColorEditSavedColor = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(f[0], f[1], f[2], 0)); + } + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)) + ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]); + + col[0] = f[0]; + col[1] = f[1]; + col[2] = f[2]; + if (alpha) + col[3] = f[3]; + } + + if (set_current_color_edit_id) + g.ColorEditCurrentID = 0; + PopID(); + EndGroup(); + + // Drag and Drop Target + // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test. + if ((g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget()) + { + bool accepted_drag_drop = false; + if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F)) + { + memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3); // Preserve alpha if any //-V512 //-V1086 + value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true; + } + if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F)) + { + memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components); + value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true; + } + + // Drag-drop payloads are always RGB + if (accepted_drag_drop && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)) + ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[0], col[1], col[2]); + EndDragDropTarget(); + } + + // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4(). + if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window) + g.LastItemData.ID = g.ActiveId; + + if (value_changed && g.LastItemData.ID != 0) // In case of ID collision, the second EndGroup() won't catch g.ActiveId + MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID); + + return value_changed; +} + +bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + float col4[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f }; + if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)) + return false; + col[0] = col4[0]; col[1] = col4[1]; col[2] = col4[2]; + return true; +} + +// Helper for ColorPicker4() +static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, float bar_w, float alpha) +{ + ImU32 alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha); + ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8)); + ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8)); + ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Left, IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8)); + ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x, pos.y), half_sz, ImGuiDir_Left, IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8)); +} + +// Note: ColorPicker4() only accesses 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set. +// (In C++ the 'float col[4]' notation for a function argument is equivalent to 'float* col', we only specify a size to facilitate understanding of the code.) +// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar appears, affecting automatic width..) +// FIXME: this is trying to be aware of style.Alpha but not fully correct. Also, the color wheel will have overlapping glitches with (style.Alpha < 1.0) +bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float* ref_col) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + ImGuiIO& io = g.IO; + + const float width = CalcItemWidth(); + g.NextItemData.ClearFlags(); + + PushID(label); + const bool set_current_color_edit_id = (g.ColorEditCurrentID == 0); + if (set_current_color_edit_id) + g.ColorEditCurrentID = window->IDStack.back(); + BeginGroup(); + + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview)) + flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview; + + // Context menu: display and store options. + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + ColorPickerOptionsPopup(col, flags); + + // Read stored options + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_)) + flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_) & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_; + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)) + flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_) & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_; + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar); + + // Setup + int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4; + bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha); + ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + float square_sz = GetFrameHeight(); + float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars + float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, width - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box + float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + float bars_triangles_half_sz = IM_FLOOR(bars_width * 0.20f); + + float backup_initial_col[4]; + memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)); + + float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f; + float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f; + float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness; + ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width)*0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size * 0.5f); + + // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic. + float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f); + ImVec2 triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point. + ImVec2 triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point. + ImVec2 triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point. + + float H = col[0], S = col[1], V = col[2]; + float R = col[0], G = col[1], B = col[2]; + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) + { + // Hue is lost when converting from grayscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it. + ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V); + ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &H, &S, &V); + } + else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) + { + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B); + } + + bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false; + + PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true); + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel) + { + // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic + InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size)); + if (IsItemActive()) + { + ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center; + ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center; + float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off); + if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner - 1) * (wheel_r_inner - 1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer + 1) * (wheel_r_outer + 1)) + { + // Interactive with Hue wheel + H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI * 0.5f; + if (H < 0.0f) + H += 1.0f; + value_changed = value_changed_h = true; + } + float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI); + float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI); + if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle))) + { + // Interacting with SV triangle + ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle); + if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated)) + current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated); + float uu, vv, ww; + ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww); + V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f); + S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f); + value_changed = value_changed_sv = true; + } + } + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + } + else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar) + { + // SV rectangle logic + InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size)); + if (IsItemActive()) + { + S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size - 1)); + V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1)); + ColorEditRestoreH(col, &H); // Greatly reduces hue jitter and reset to 0 when hue == 255 and color is rapidly modified using SV square. + value_changed = value_changed_sv = true; + } + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions)) + OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight); + + // Hue bar logic + SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y)); + InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size)); + if (IsItemActive()) + { + H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1)); + value_changed = value_changed_h = true; + } + } + + // Alpha bar logic + if (alpha_bar) + { + SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y)); + InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size)); + if (IsItemActive()) + { + col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1)); + value_changed = true; + } + } + PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav + + // modified by asphyxia + //if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview)) + //{ + // SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + // BeginGroup(); + //} + + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel)) + { + const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + if (label != label_display_end) + { + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview)) + SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); + TextEx(label, label_display_end); + } + } + + // modified by asphyxia + //if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview)) + //{ + // PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true); + // ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]); + // if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel)) + // Text("Current"); + + // ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip; + // ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2)); + // if (ref_col != NULL) + // { + // Text("Original"); + // ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]); + // if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2))) + // { + // memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float)); + // value_changed = true; + // } + // } + // PopItemFlag(); + // EndGroup(); + //} + + // Convert back color to RGB + if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv) + { + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) + { + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, col[0], col[1], col[2]); + g.ColorEditSavedHue = H; + g.ColorEditSavedSat = S; + g.ColorEditSavedID = g.ColorEditCurrentID; + g.ColorEditSavedColor = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0)); + } + else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) + { + col[0] = H; + col[1] = S; + col[2] = V; + } + } + + // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor + bool value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = false; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0) + { + PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x); + ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf; + ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker; + // modified by asphyxia + // remove drag slider for RGB, HSV. Only show HEX value + //if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0) + // if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB)) + // { + // // FIXME: Hackily differentiating using the DragInt (ActiveId != 0 && !ActiveIdAllowOverlap) vs. using the InputText or DropTarget. + // // For the later we don't want to run the hue-wrap canceling code. If you are well versed in HSV picker please provide your input! (See #2050) + // value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap); + // value_changed = true; + // } + //if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0) + // value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV); + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0) + value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex); + PopItemWidth(); + } + + // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit4 call), if any + if (value_changed_fix_hue_wrap && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)) + { + float new_H, new_S, new_V; + ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V); + if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0) + { + if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V) + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]); + else if (new_S <= 0) + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]); + } + } + + if (value_changed) + { + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) + { + R = col[0]; + G = col[1]; + B = col[2]; + ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V); + ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &H, &S, &V); // Fix local Hue as display below will use it immediately. + } + else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) + { + H = col[0]; + S = col[1]; + V = col[2]; + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B); + } + } + + const int style_alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(style.Alpha); + const ImU32 col_black = IM_COL32(0,0,0,style_alpha8); + const ImU32 col_white = IM_COL32(255,255,255,style_alpha8); + const ImU32 col_midgrey = IM_COL32(128,128,128,style_alpha8); + const ImU32 col_hues[6 + 1] = { IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8) }; + + ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, style.Alpha); ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z); + ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f); + ImU32 user_col32_striped_of_alpha = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(R, G, B, style.Alpha)); // Important: this is still including the main rendering/style alpha!! + + ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos; + + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel) + { + // Render Hue Wheel + const float aeps = 0.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out). + const int segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12); + for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++) + { + const float a0 = (n) /6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps; + const float a1 = (n+1.0f)/6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps; + const int vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size; + draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc); + draw_list->PathStroke(col_white, 0, wheel_thickness); + const int vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size; + + // Paint colors over existing vertices + ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner); + ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner); + ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, col_hues[n], col_hues[n + 1]); + } + + // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel + float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI); + float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI); + ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer) * 0.5f, wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer) * 0.5f); + float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f; + int hue_cursor_segments = draw_list->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(hue_cursor_rad); // Lock segment count so the +1 one matches others. + draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments); + draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad + 1, col_midgrey, hue_cursor_segments); + draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, col_white, hue_cursor_segments); + + // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue) + ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle); + ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle); + ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle); + ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel(); + draw_list->PrimReserve(3, 3); + draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32); + draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, col_black); + draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, col_white); + draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, col_midgrey, 1.5f); + sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V)); + } + else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar) + { + // Render SV Square + draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), col_white, hue_color32, hue_color32, col_white); + draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0, 0, col_black, col_black); + RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0.0f); + sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S) * sv_picker_size), picker_pos.x + 2, picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much + sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2); + + // Render Hue Bar + for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i) + draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)), col_hues[i], col_hues[i], col_hues[i + 1], col_hues[i + 1]); + float bar0_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size); + RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f); + RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha); + } + + // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range) + float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f; + int sv_cursor_segments = draw_list->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(sv_cursor_rad); // Lock segment count so the +1 one matches others. + draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, sv_cursor_segments); + draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad + 1, col_midgrey, sv_cursor_segments); + draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col_white, sv_cursor_segments); + + // Render alpha bar + if (alpha_bar) + { + float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]); + ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size); + RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(draw_list, bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0, bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)); + draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK); + float bar1_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size); + RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f); + RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha); + } + + EndGroup(); + + if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0) + value_changed = false; + if (value_changed && g.LastItemData.ID != 0) // In case of ID collision, the second EndGroup() won't catch g.ActiveId + MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID); + + if (set_current_color_edit_id) + g.ColorEditCurrentID = 0; + PopID(); + + return value_changed; +} + +// A little color square. Return true when clicked. +// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip. +// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip. +// Note that 'col' may be encoded in HSV if ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV is set. +bool ImGui::ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id); + const float default_size = GetFrameHeight(); + const ImVec2 size(size_arg.x == 0.0f ? default_size : size_arg.x, size_arg.y == 0.0f ? default_size : size_arg.y); + const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size); + ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f); + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + return false; + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held); + + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) + flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf); + + ImVec4 col_rgb = col; + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) + ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z); + + ImVec4 col_rgb_without_alpha(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, 1.0f); + float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f; + float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f); + ImRect bb_inner = bb; + float off = 0.0f; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder) == 0) + { + off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good middle ground to reduce those artifacts. + bb_inner.Expand(off); + } + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col_rgb.w < 1.0f) + { + float mid_x = IM_ROUND((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f); + RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(window->DrawList, ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y), bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_rgb), grid_step, ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off), rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight); + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y), GetColorU32(col_rgb_without_alpha), rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft); + } + else + { + // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha + ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col_rgb : col_rgb_without_alpha; + if (col_source.w < 1.0f) + RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(window->DrawList, bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding); + else + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding); + } + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id); + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder) == 0) + { + if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f) + RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding); + else + window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border + } + + // Drag and Drop Source + // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test. + if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource()) + { + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) + SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once); + else + SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once); + ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags); + SameLine(); + TextEx("Color"); + EndDragDropSource(); + } + + // Tooltip + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ForTooltip)) + ColorTooltip(desc_id, &col.x, flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)); + + return pressed; +} + +// Initialize/override default color options +void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_; + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_; + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected + IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)); // Check only 1 option is selected + g.ColorEditOptions = flags; +} + +// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set. +void ImGui::ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + if (!BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePrevious, ImGuiWindowFlags_None)) + return; + const char* text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text; + if (text_end > text) + { + TextEx(text, text_end); + Separator(); + } + + ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2); + ImVec4 cf(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]); + int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]); + ColorButton("##preview", cf, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, sz); + SameLine(); + if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) || !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_)) + { + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) + Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]); + else + Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]); + } + else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) + { + if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) + Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2]); + else + Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f, A: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]); + } + EndTooltip(); +} + +void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_); + bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_); + if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context")) + return; + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.LockMarkEdited++; + ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions; + if (allow_opt_inputs) + { + if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB; + if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV; + if (RadioButton("Hex", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex; + } + if (allow_opt_datatype) + { + if (allow_opt_inputs) Separator(); + if (RadioButton("0..255", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8; + if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float; + } + + if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype) + Separator(); + if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1, 0))) + OpenPopup("Copy"); + if (BeginPopup("Copy")) + { + int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]); + char buf[64]; + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]); + if (Selectable(buf)) + SetClipboardText(buf); + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca); + if (Selectable(buf)) + SetClipboardText(buf); + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb); + if (Selectable(buf)) + SetClipboardText(buf); + if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)) + { + ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca); + if (Selectable(buf)) + SetClipboardText(buf); + } + EndPopup(); + } + + g.ColorEditOptions = opts; + EndPopup(); + g.LockMarkEdited--; +} + +void ImGui::ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags) +{ + bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_); + bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar); + if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !BeginPopup("context")) + return; + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + g.LockMarkEdited++; + if (allow_opt_picker) + { + ImVec2 picker_size(g.FontSize * 8, ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function + PushItemWidth(picker_size.x); + for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++) + { + // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection) + if (picker_type > 0) Separator(); + PushID(picker_type); + ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha); + if (picker_type == 0) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar; + if (picker_type == 1) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel; + ImVec2 backup_pos = GetCursorScreenPos(); + if (Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup + g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_); + SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos); + ImVec4 previewing_ref_col; + memcpy(&previewing_ref_col, ref_col, sizeof(float) * ((picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4)); + ColorPicker4("##previewing_picker", &previewing_ref_col.x, picker_flags); + PopID(); + } + PopItemWidth(); + } + if (allow_opt_alpha_bar) + { + if (allow_opt_picker) Separator(); + CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", &g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar); + } + EndPopup(); + g.LockMarkEdited--; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - TreeNode() +// - TreeNodeV() +// - TreeNodeEx() +// - TreeNodeExV() +// - TreeNodeBehavior() [Internal] +// - TreePush() +// - TreePop() +// - GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing() +// - SetNextItemOpen() +// - CollapsingHeader() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args); + va_end(args); + return is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args); + va_end(args); + return is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* label) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL); +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args); +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args); +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL); +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args); + va_end(args); + return is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) +{ + va_list args; + va_start(args, fmt); + bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args); + va_end(args); + return is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const char* label, *label_end; + ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&label, &label_end, fmt, args); + return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, label, label_end); +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const char* label, *label_end; + ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&label, &label_end, fmt, args); + return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, label, label_end); +} + +void ImGui::TreeNodeSetOpen(ImGuiID id, bool open) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStorage* storage = g.CurrentWindow->DC.StateStorage; + storage->SetInt(id, open ? 1 : 0); +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags) +{ + if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf) + return true; + + // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use the SetNextItemOpen function) + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + ImGuiStorage* storage = window->DC.StateStorage; + + bool is_open; + if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen) + { + if (g.NextItemData.OpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always) + { + is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal; + TreeNodeSetOpen(id, is_open); + } + else + { + // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently. + const int stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1); + if (stored_value == -1) + { + is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal; + TreeNodeSetOpen(id, is_open); + } + else + { + is_open = stored_value != 0; + } + } + } + else + { + is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0; + } + + // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior). + // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged. + if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogDepthRef) < g.LogDepthToExpand) + is_open = true; + + return is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const bool display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0; + const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding)) ? style.FramePadding : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, style.FramePadding.y)); + + if (!label_end) + label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false); + + // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height. + const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2), label_size.y + padding.y * 2); + ImRect frame_bb; + frame_bb.Min.x = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth) ? window->WorkRect.Min.x : window->DC.CursorPos.x; + frame_bb.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y; + frame_bb.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x; + frame_bb.Max.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height; + if (display_frame) + { + // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding, to the edge of InnerClipRect + // (FIXME: May remove this at some point and make InnerClipRect align with WindowPadding.x instead of WindowPadding.x*0.5f) + frame_bb.Min.x -= IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f - 1.0f); + frame_bb.Max.x += IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f); + } + + const float text_offset_x = g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x * 3 : padding.x * 2); // Collapser arrow width + Spacing + const float text_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); // Latch before ItemSize changes it + const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x * 2 : 0.0f); // Include collapser + ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + text_offset_x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + text_offset_y); + ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), padding.y); + + // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing + ImRect interact_bb = frame_bb; + if (!display_frame && (flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth)) == 0) + interact_bb.Max.x = frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f; + + // Compute open and multi-select states before ItemAdd() as it clear NextItem data. + bool is_open = TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(id, flags); + bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id); + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect; + g.LastItemData.DisplayRect = frame_bb; + + // If a NavLeft request is happening and ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere enabled: + // Store data for the current depth to allow returning to this node from any child item. + // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop(). + // It will become tempting to enable ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere by default or move it to ImGuiStyle. + // Currently only supports 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero, easy to increase. + if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen)) + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()) + { + g.NavTreeNodeStack.resize(g.NavTreeNodeStack.Size + 1); + ImGuiNavTreeNodeData* nav_tree_node_data = &g.NavTreeNodeStack.back(); + nav_tree_node_data->ID = id; + nav_tree_node_data->InFlags = g.LastItemData.InFlags; + nav_tree_node_data->NavRect = g.LastItemData.NavRect; + window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth); + } + + const bool is_leaf = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf) != 0; + if (!item_add) + { + if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen)) + TreePushOverrideID(id); + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0)); + return is_open; + } + + ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None; + if ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap) || (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap)) + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap; + if (!is_leaf) + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold; + + // We allow clicking on the arrow section with keyboard modifiers held, in order to easily + // allow browsing a tree while preserving selection with code implementing multi-selection patterns. + // When clicking on the rest of the tree node we always disallow keyboard modifiers. + const float arrow_hit_x1 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) - style.TouchExtraPadding.x; + const float arrow_hit_x2 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) + (g.FontSize + padding.x * 2.0f) + style.TouchExtraPadding.x; + const bool is_mouse_x_over_arrow = (g.IO.MousePos.x >= arrow_hit_x1 && g.IO.MousePos.x < arrow_hit_x2); + if (window != g.HoveredWindow || !is_mouse_x_over_arrow) + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers; + + // Open behaviors can be altered with the _OpenOnArrow and _OnOnDoubleClick flags. + // Some alteration have subtle effects (e.g. toggle on MouseUp vs MouseDown events) due to requirements for multi-selection and drag and drop support. + // - Single-click on label = Toggle on MouseUp (default, when _OpenOnArrow=0) + // - Single-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDown (when _OpenOnArrow=0) + // - Single-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDown (when _OpenOnArrow=1) + // - Double-click on label = Toggle on MouseDoubleClick (when _OpenOnDoubleClick=1) + // - Double-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDoubleClick (when _OpenOnDoubleClick=1 and _OpenOnArrow=0) + // It is rather standard that arrow click react on Down rather than Up. + // We set ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease on OpenOnDoubleClick because we want the item to be active on the initial MouseDown in order for drag and drop to work. + if (is_mouse_x_over_arrow) + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick; + else if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick) + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick; + else + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease; + + bool selected = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected) != 0; + const bool was_selected = selected; + + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags); + bool toggled = false; + if (!is_leaf) + { + if (pressed && g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId != id) + { + if ((flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) == 0 || (g.NavActivateId == id)) + toggled = true; + if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow) + toggled |= is_mouse_x_over_arrow && !g.NavDisableMouseHover; // Lightweight equivalent of IsMouseHoveringRect() since ButtonBehavior() already did the job + if ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2) + toggled = true; + } + else if (pressed && g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId == id) + { + IM_ASSERT(button_flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold); + if (!is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again. + toggled = true; + } + + if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open) + { + toggled = true; + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_X); + NavMoveRequestCancel(); + } + if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority? + { + toggled = true; + NavClearPreferredPosForAxis(ImGuiAxis_X); + NavMoveRequestCancel(); + } + + if (toggled) + { + is_open = !is_open; + window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open); + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen; + } + } + + // In this branch, TreeNodeBehavior() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger. + if (selected != was_selected) //-V547 + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection; + + // Render + const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text); + ImGuiNavHighlightFlags nav_highlight_flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin; + if (display_frame) + { + // Framed type + const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header); + RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, true, style.FrameRounding); + RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags); + if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet) + RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.60f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col); + else if (!is_leaf) + RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y), text_col, is_open ? ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_UpsideDownArrow) ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down) : ImGuiDir_Right, 1.0f); + else // Leaf without bullet, left-adjusted text + text_pos.x -= text_offset_x -padding.x; + if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton) + frame_bb.Max.x -= g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x; + + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogSetNextTextDecoration("###", "###"); + RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size); + } + else + { + // Unframed typed for tree nodes + if (hovered || selected) + { + const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header); + RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, false); + } + RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags); + if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet) + RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.5f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col); + else if (!is_leaf) + RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.15f), text_col, is_open ? ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_UpsideDownArrow) ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down) : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f); + if (g.LogEnabled) + LogSetNextTextDecoration(">", NULL); + RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false); + } + + if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen)) + TreePushOverrideID(id); + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0)); + return is_open; +} + +void ImGui::TreePush(const char* str_id) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + Indent(); + window->DC.TreeDepth++; + PushID(str_id); +} + +void ImGui::TreePush(const void* ptr_id) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + Indent(); + window->DC.TreeDepth++; + PushID(ptr_id); +} + +void ImGui::TreePushOverrideID(ImGuiID id) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + Indent(); + window->DC.TreeDepth++; + PushOverrideID(id); +} + +void ImGui::TreePop() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + Unindent(); + + window->DC.TreeDepth--; + ImU32 tree_depth_mask = (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth); + + // Handle Left arrow to move to parent tree node (when ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere is enabled) + if (window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask & tree_depth_mask) // Only set during request + { + ImGuiNavTreeNodeData* nav_tree_node_data = &g.NavTreeNodeStack.back(); + IM_ASSERT(nav_tree_node_data->ID == window->IDStack.back()); + if (g.NavIdIsAlive && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()) + NavMoveRequestResolveWithPastTreeNode(&g.NavMoveResultLocal, nav_tree_node_data); + g.NavTreeNodeStack.pop_back(); + } + window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask &= tree_depth_mask - 1; + + IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much. + PopID(); +} + +// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet() +float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f); +} + +// Set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state. +void ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems) + return; + g.NextItemData.Flags |= ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen; + g.NextItemData.OpenVal = is_open; + g.NextItemData.OpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always; +} + +// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag). +// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior closer to normal TreeNode(). +bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label); +} + +// p_visible == NULL : regular collapsing header +// p_visible != NULL && *p_visible == true : show a small close button on the corner of the header, clicking the button will set *p_visible = false +// p_visible != NULL && *p_visible == false : do not show the header at all +// Do not mistake this with the Open state of the header itself, which you can adjust with SetNextItemOpen() or ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen. +bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_visible, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + if (p_visible && !*p_visible) + return false; + + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader; + if (p_visible) + flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlap | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton; + bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags, label); + if (p_visible != NULL) + { + // Create a small overlapping close button + // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc. + // FIXME: CloseButton can overlap into text, need find a way to clip the text somehow. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiLastItemData last_item_backup = g.LastItemData; + float button_size = g.FontSize; + float button_x = ImMax(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max.x - g.Style.FramePadding.x - button_size); + float button_y = g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y; + ImGuiID close_button_id = GetIDWithSeed("#CLOSE", NULL, id); + if (CloseButton(close_button_id, ImVec2(button_x, button_y))) + *p_visible = false; + g.LastItemData = last_item_backup; + } + + return is_open; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - Selectable() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Tip: pass a non-visible label (e.g. "##hello") then you can use the space to draw other text or image. +// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id. +// With this scheme, ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns and ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap are also frequently used flags. +// FIXME: Selectable() with (size.x == 0.0f) and (SelectableTextAlign.x > 0.0f) followed by SameLine() is currently not supported. +bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + + // Submit label or explicit size to ItemSize(), whereas ItemAdd() will submit a larger/spanning rectangle. + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y); + ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset; + ItemSize(size, 0.0f); + + // Fill horizontal space + // We don't support (size < 0.0f) in Selectable() because the ItemSpacing extension would make explicitly right-aligned sizes not visibly match other widgets. + const bool span_all_columns = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) != 0; + const float min_x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x : pos.x; + const float max_x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x : window->WorkRect.Max.x; + if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth)) + size.x = ImMax(label_size.x, max_x - min_x); + + // Text stays at the submission position, but bounding box may be extended on both sides + const ImVec2 text_min = pos; + const ImVec2 text_max(min_x + size.x, pos.y + size.y); + + // Selectables are meant to be tightly packed together with no click-gap, so we extend their box to cover spacing between selectable. + ImRect bb(min_x, pos.y, text_max.x, text_max.y); + if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoPadWithHalfSpacing) == 0) + { + const float spacing_x = span_all_columns ? 0.0f : style.ItemSpacing.x; + const float spacing_y = style.ItemSpacing.y; + const float spacing_L = IM_FLOOR(spacing_x * 0.50f); + const float spacing_U = IM_FLOOR(spacing_y * 0.50f); + bb.Min.x -= spacing_L; + bb.Min.y -= spacing_U; + bb.Max.x += (spacing_x - spacing_L); + bb.Max.y += (spacing_y - spacing_U); + } + //if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) { GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); } + + // Modify ClipRect for the ItemAdd(), faster than doing a PushColumnsBackground/PushTableBackground for every Selectable.. + const float backup_clip_rect_min_x = window->ClipRect.Min.x; + const float backup_clip_rect_max_x = window->ClipRect.Max.x; + if (span_all_columns) + { + window->ClipRect.Min.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x; + window->ClipRect.Max.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x; + } + + const bool disabled_item = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) != 0; + const bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id, NULL, disabled_item ? ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled : ImGuiItemFlags_None); + if (span_all_columns) + { + window->ClipRect.Min.x = backup_clip_rect_min_x; + window->ClipRect.Max.x = backup_clip_rect_max_x; + } + + if (!item_add) + return false; + + const bool disabled_global = (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) != 0; + if (disabled_item && !disabled_global) // Only testing this as an optimization + BeginDisabled(); + + // FIXME: We can standardize the behavior of those two, we could also keep the fast path of override ClipRect + full push on render only, + // which would be advantageous since most selectable are not selected. + if (span_all_columns && window->DC.CurrentColumns) + PushColumnsBackground(); + else if (span_all_columns && g.CurrentTable) + TablePushBackgroundChannel(); + + // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries + ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0; + if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId; } + if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner) { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoSetKeyOwner; } + if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick) { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick; } + if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease) { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease; } + if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick) { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick; } + if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowOverlap) || (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_AllowOverlap)) { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap; } + + const bool was_selected = selected; + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags); + + // Auto-select when moved into + // - This will be more fully fleshed in the range-select branch + // - This is not exposed as it won't nicely work with some user side handling of shift/control + // - We cannot do 'if (g.NavJustMovedToId != id) { selected = false; pressed = was_selected; }' for two reasons + // - (1) it would require focus scope to be set, need exposing PushFocusScope() or equivalent (e.g. BeginSelection() calling PushFocusScope()) + // - (2) usage will fail with clipped items + // The multi-select API aim to fix those issues, e.g. may be replaced with a BeginSelection() API. + if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav) && g.NavJustMovedToId != 0 && g.NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId == g.CurrentFocusScopeId) + if (g.NavJustMovedToId == id) + selected = pressed = true; + + // Update NavId when clicking or when Hovering (this doesn't happen on most widgets), so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard + if (pressed || (hovered && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover))) + { + if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent) + { + SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent, g.CurrentFocusScopeId, WindowRectAbsToRel(window, bb)); // (bb == NavRect) + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; + } + } + if (pressed) + MarkItemEdited(id); + + // In this branch, Selectable() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger. + if (selected != was_selected) //-V547 + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection; + + // Render + if (hovered || selected) + { + const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header); + + // modified by asphyxia + // selectable + RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f); + // gradient + window->DrawList->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.05f)), GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.05f)), GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.30f)), GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.30f))); + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding); + } + if (g.NavId == id) + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding); + + if (span_all_columns && window->DC.CurrentColumns) + PopColumnsBackground(); + else if (span_all_columns && g.CurrentTable) + TablePopBackgroundChannel(); + + RenderTextClipped(text_min, text_max, label, NULL, &label_size, style.SelectableTextAlign, &bb); + + // Automatically close popups + if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups) && !(g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup)) + CloseCurrentPopup(); + + if (disabled_item && !disabled_global) + EndDisabled(); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags); + return pressed; //-V1020 +} + +bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg) +{ + if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg)) + { + *p_selected = !*p_selected; + return true; + } + return false; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - BeginListBox() +// - EndListBox() +// - ListBox() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, use size.x = -FLT_MIN and pass an non-visible label e.g. "##empty" +// Tip: If your vertical size is calculated from an item count (e.g. 10 * item_height) consider adding a fractional part to facilitate seeing scrolling boundaries (e.g. 10.25 * item_height). +bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = GetID(label); + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + // Size default to hold ~7.25 items. + // Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar. + ImVec2 size = ImFloor(CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.25f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)); + ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y)); + ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size); + ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f)); + g.NextItemData.ClearFlags(); + + if (!IsRectVisible(bb.Min, bb.Max)) + { + ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y); + ItemAdd(bb, 0, &frame_bb); + return false; + } + + // FIXME-OPT: We could omit the BeginGroup() if label_size.x but would need to omit the EndGroup() as well. + BeginGroup(); + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + { + ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y); + RenderText(label_pos, label); + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, label_pos + label_size); + } + + BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize()); + return true; +} + +void ImGui::EndListBox() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && "Mismatched BeginListBox/EndListBox calls. Did you test the return value of BeginListBox?"); + IM_UNUSED(window); + + EndChildFrame(); + EndGroup(); // This is only required to be able to do IsItemXXX query on the whole ListBox including label +} + +bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_items) +{ + const bool value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_items); + return value_changed; +} + +// This is merely a helper around BeginListBox(), EndListBox(). +// Considering using those directly to submit custom data or store selection differently. +bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Calculate size from "height_in_items" + if (height_in_items < 0) + height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7); + float height_in_items_f = height_in_items + 0.25f; + ImVec2 size(0.0f, ImFloor(GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)); + + if (!BeginListBox(label, size)) + return false; + + // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different height, + // you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper. + bool value_changed = false; + ImGuiListClipper clipper; + clipper.Begin(items_count, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to. + while (clipper.Step()) + for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++) + { + const char* item_text; + if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text)) + item_text = "*Unknown item*"; + + PushID(i); + const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item); + if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected)) + { + *current_item = i; + value_changed = true; + } + if (item_selected) + SetItemDefaultFocus(); + PopID(); + } + EndListBox(); + + if (value_changed) + MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID); + + return value_changed; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - PlotEx() [Internal] +// - PlotLines() +// - PlotHistogram() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// Plot/Graph widgets are not very good. +// Consider writing your own, or using a third-party one, see: +// - ImPlot https://github.com/epezent/implot +// - others https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Useful-Extensions +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +int ImGui::PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, const ImVec2& size_arg) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return -1; + + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + + const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + const ImVec2 frame_size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); + + const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size); + const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding); + const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0)); + ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y); + if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb)) + return -1; + const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id, g.LastItemData.InFlags); + + // Determine scale from values if not specified + if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX) + { + float v_min = FLT_MAX; + float v_max = -FLT_MAX; + for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++) + { + const float v = values_getter(data, i); + if (v != v) // Ignore NaN values + continue; + v_min = ImMin(v_min, v); + v_max = ImMax(v_max, v); + } + if (scale_min == FLT_MAX) + scale_min = v_min; + if (scale_max == FLT_MAX) + scale_max = v_max; + } + + RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding); + + const int values_count_min = (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? 2 : 1; + int idx_hovered = -1; + if (values_count >= values_count_min) + { + int res_w = ImMin((int)frame_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0); + int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0); + + // Tooltip on hover + if (hovered && inner_bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos)) + { + const float t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f); + const int v_idx = (int)(t * item_count); + IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count); + + const float v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count); + const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count); + if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) + SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx + 1, v1); + else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram) + SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0); + idx_hovered = v_idx; + } + + const float t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w; + const float inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min)); + + float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count); + float t0 = 0.0f; + ImVec2 tp0 = ImVec2( t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale) ); // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle + float histogram_zero_line_t = (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (1 + scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f); // Where does the zero line stands + + const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram); + const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered); + + for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++) + { + const float t1 = t0 + t_step; + const int v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f); + IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count); + const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count); + const ImVec2 tp1 = ImVec2( t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale) ); + + // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU. + ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0); + ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t)); + if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) + { + window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, idx_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base); + } + else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram) + { + if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f) + pos1.x -= 1.0f; + window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, idx_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base); + } + + t0 = t1; + tp0 = tp1; + } + } + + // Text overlay + if (overlay_text) + RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.0f)); + + if (label_size.x > 0.0f) + RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label); + + // Return hovered index or -1 if none are hovered. + // This is currently not exposed in the public API because we need a larger redesign of the whole thing, but in the short-term we are making it available in PlotEx(). + return idx_hovered; +} + +struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData +{ + const float* Values; + int Stride; + + ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(const float* values, int stride) { Values = values; Stride = stride; } +}; + +static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx) +{ + ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData* plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData*)data; + const float v = *(const float*)(const void*)((const unsigned char*)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride); + return v; +} + +void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride) +{ + ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride); + PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size); +} + +void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size) +{ + PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size); +} + +void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride) +{ + ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride); + PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size); +} + +void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size) +{ + PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size); +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers +// Those is not very useful, legacy API. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - Value() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, bool b) +{ + Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false")); +} + +void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, int v) +{ + Text("%s: %d", prefix, v); +} + +void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v) +{ + Text("%s: %d", prefix, v); +} + +void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format) +{ + if (float_format) + { + char fmt[64]; + ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format); + Text(fmt, prefix, v); + } + else + { + Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v); + } +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - ImGuiMenuColumns [Internal] +// - BeginMenuBar() +// - EndMenuBar() +// - BeginMainMenuBar() +// - EndMainMenuBar() +// - BeginMenu() +// - EndMenu() +// - MenuItemEx() [Internal] +// - MenuItem() +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +// Helpers for internal use +void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(float spacing, bool window_reappearing) +{ + if (window_reappearing) + memset(Widths, 0, sizeof(Widths)); + Spacing = (ImU16)spacing; + CalcNextTotalWidth(true); + memset(Widths, 0, sizeof(Widths)); + TotalWidth = NextTotalWidth; + NextTotalWidth = 0; +} + +void ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcNextTotalWidth(bool update_offsets) +{ + ImU16 offset = 0; + bool want_spacing = false; + for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Widths); i++) + { + ImU16 width = Widths[i]; + if (want_spacing && width > 0) + offset += Spacing; + want_spacing |= (width > 0); + if (update_offsets) + { + if (i == 1) { OffsetLabel = offset; } + if (i == 2) { OffsetShortcut = offset; } + if (i == 3) { OffsetMark = offset; } + } + offset += width; + } + NextTotalWidth = offset; +} + +float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(float w_icon, float w_label, float w_shortcut, float w_mark) +{ + Widths[0] = ImMax(Widths[0], (ImU16)w_icon); + Widths[1] = ImMax(Widths[1], (ImU16)w_label); + Widths[2] = ImMax(Widths[2], (ImU16)w_shortcut); + Widths[3] = ImMax(Widths[3], (ImU16)w_mark); + CalcNextTotalWidth(false); + return (float)ImMax(TotalWidth, NextTotalWidth); +} + +// FIXME: Provided a rectangle perhaps e.g. a BeginMenuBarEx() could be used anywhere.. +// Currently the main responsibility of this function being to setup clip-rect + horizontal layout + menu navigation layer. +// Ideally we also want this to be responsible for claiming space out of the main window scrolling rectangle, in which case ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar will become unnecessary. +// Then later the same system could be used for multiple menu-bars, scrollbars, side-bars. +bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)) + return false; + + IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending); + BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0 // FIXME: Misleading to use a group for that backup/restore + PushID("##menubar"); + + // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect. + // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks particularly glitchy. + ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect(); + ImRect clip_rect(IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize), IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize), IM_ROUND(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - ImMax(window->WindowRounding, window->WindowBorderSize))), IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Max.y)); + clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped); + PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false); + + // We overwrite CursorMaxPos because BeginGroup sets it to CursorPos (essentially the .EmitItem hack in EndMenuBar() would need something analogous here, maybe a BeginGroupEx() with flags). + window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y); + window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal; + window->DC.IsSameLine = false; + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu; + window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true; + AlignTextToFramePadding(); + return true; +} + +void ImGui::EndMenuBar() +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + + // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings. + if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) + { + // Try to find out if the request is for one of our child menu + ImGuiWindow* nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow; + while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) + nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow; + if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded) == 0) + { + // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame. + // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window (probably not worth bothering) + const ImGuiNavLayer layer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu; + IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext & (1 << layer)); // Sanity check (FIXME: Seems unnecessary) + FocusWindow(window); + SetNavID(window->NavLastIds[layer], layer, 0, window->NavRectRel[layer]); + g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection. + g.NavDisableMouseHover = g.NavMousePosDirty = true; + NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, g.NavMoveClipDir, g.NavMoveFlags, g.NavMoveScrollFlags); // Repeat + } + } + + IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6011); // Static Analysis false positive "warning C6011: Dereferencing NULL pointer 'window'" + IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar); + IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending); + PopClipRect(); + PopID(); + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos. + g.GroupStack.back().EmitItem = false; + EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0 + window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical; + window->DC.IsSameLine = false; + window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main; + window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false; +} + +// Important: calling order matters! +// FIXME: Somehow overlapping with docking tech. +// FIXME: The "rect-cut" aspect of this could be formalized into a lower-level helper (rect-cut: https://halt.software/dead-simple-layouts) +bool ImGui::BeginViewportSideBar(const char* name, ImGuiViewport* viewport_p, ImGuiDir dir, float axis_size, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags) +{ + IM_ASSERT(dir != ImGuiDir_None); + + ImGuiWindow* bar_window = FindWindowByName(name); + if (bar_window == NULL || bar_window->BeginCount == 0) + { + // Calculate and set window size/position + ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)(viewport_p ? viewport_p : GetMainViewport()); + ImRect avail_rect = viewport->GetBuildWorkRect(); + ImGuiAxis axis = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X; + ImVec2 pos = avail_rect.Min; + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right || dir == ImGuiDir_Down) + pos[axis] = avail_rect.Max[axis] - axis_size; + ImVec2 size = avail_rect.GetSize(); + size[axis] = axis_size; + SetNextWindowPos(pos); + SetNextWindowSize(size); + + // Report our size into work area (for next frame) using actual window size + if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Left) + viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMin[axis] += axis_size; + else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down || dir == ImGuiDir_Right) + viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMax[axis] -= axis_size; + } + + window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove; + + // Create window + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_WindowShadow, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0)); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Lift normal size constraint + bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags); + PopStyleVar(2); + PopStyleColor(); + + return is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)GetMainViewport(); + + // For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set. + // FIXME: This could be generalized as an opt-in way to clamp window->DC.CursorStartPos to avoid SafeArea? + // FIXME: Consider removing support for safe area down the line... it's messy. Nowadays consoles have support for TV calibration in OS settings. + g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f)); + ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar; + float height = GetFrameHeight(); + bool is_open = BeginViewportSideBar("##MainMenuBar", viewport, ImGuiDir_Up, height, window_flags); + g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); + + if (is_open) + BeginMenuBar(); + else + End(); + return is_open; +} + +void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar() +{ + EndMenuBar(); + + // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window + // FIXME: With this strategy we won't be able to restore a NULL focus. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main && !g.NavAnyRequest) + FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(g.NavWindow, NULL, NULL, ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_UnlessBelowModal | ImGuiFocusRequestFlags_RestoreFocusedChild); + + End(); +} + +static bool IsRootOfOpenMenuSet() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if ((g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.BeginPopupStack.Size) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) + return false; + + // Initially we used 'upper_popup->OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back()' to differentiate multiple menu sets from each others + // (e.g. inside menu bar vs loose menu items) based on parent ID. + // This would however prevent the use of e.g. PushID() user code submitting menus. + // Previously this worked between popup and a first child menu because the first child menu always had the _ChildWindow flag, + // making hovering on parent popup possible while first child menu was focused - but this was generally a bug with other side effects. + // Instead we don't treat Popup specifically (in order to consistently support menu features in them), maybe the first child menu of a Popup + // doesn't have the _ChildWindow flag, and we rely on this IsRootOfOpenMenuSet() check to allow hovering between root window/popup and first child menu. + // In the end, lack of ID check made it so we could no longer differentiate between separate menu sets. To compensate for that, we at least check parent window nav layer. + // This fixes the most common case of menu opening on hover when moving between window content and menu bar. Multiple different menu sets in same nav layer would still + // open on hover, but that should be a lesser problem, because if such menus are close in proximity in window content then it won't feel weird and if they are far apart + // it likely won't be a problem anyone runs into. + const ImGuiPopupData* upper_popup = &g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size]; + if (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent != upper_popup->ParentNavLayer) + return false; + return upper_popup->Window && (upper_popup->Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) && ImGui::IsWindowChildOf(upper_popup->Window, window, true); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginMenuEx(const char* label, const char* icon, bool enabled) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label); + bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None); + + // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent menu) + // The first menu in a hierarchy isn't so hovering doesn't get across (otherwise e.g. resizing borders with ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren would react), but top-most BeginMenu() will bypass that limitation. + ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus; + if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) + window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow; + + // If a menu with same the ID was already submitted, we will append to it, matching the behavior of Begin(). + // We are relying on a O(N) search - so O(N log N) over the frame - which seems like the most efficient for the expected small amount of BeginMenu() calls per frame. + // If somehow this is ever becoming a problem we can switch to use e.g. ImGuiStorage mapping key to last frame used. + if (g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.contains(id)) + { + if (menu_is_open) + menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, window_flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display) + else + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // we behave like Begin() and need to consume those values + return menu_is_open; + } + + // Tag menu as used. Next time BeginMenu() with same ID is called it will append to existing menu + g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.push_back(id); + + ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent without always being a Child window) + // This is only done for items for the menu set and not the full parent window. + const bool menuset_is_open = IsRootOfOpenMenuSet(); + if (menuset_is_open) + PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck, true); + + // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu, + // However the final position is going to be different! It is chosen by FindBestWindowPosForPopup(). + // e.g. Menus tend to overlap each other horizontally to amplify relative Z-ordering. + ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + PushID(label); + if (!enabled) + BeginDisabled(); + const ImGuiMenuColumns* offsets = &window->DC.MenuColumns; + bool pressed; + + // We use ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner to allow down on one menu item, move, up on another. + const ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups; + if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) + { + // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar + // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction. + // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin() + popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight()); + window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y)); + float w = label_size.x; + ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); + pressed = Selectable("", menu_is_open, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, label_size.y)); + RenderText(text_pos, label); + PopStyleVar(); + window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar(). + } + else + { + // Menu inside a regular/vertical menu + // (In a typical menu window where all items are BeginMenu() or MenuItem() calls, extra_w will always be 0.0f. + // Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system. + popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y); + float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f; + float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f); + float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, 0.0f, checkmark_w); // Feedback to next frame + float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w); + ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); + pressed = Selectable("", menu_is_open, selectable_flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth, ImVec2(min_w, label_size.y)); + RenderText(text_pos, label); + if (icon_w > 0.0f) + RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetIcon, 0.0f), icon); + RenderArrow(window->DrawList, pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetMark + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), ImGuiDir_Right); + } + if (!enabled) + EndDisabled(); + + const bool hovered = (g.HoveredId == id) && enabled && !g.NavDisableMouseHover; + if (menuset_is_open) + PopItemFlag(); + + bool want_open = false; + bool want_close = false; + if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) + { + // Close menu when not hovering it anymore unless we are moving roughly in the direction of the menu + // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive. + bool moving_toward_child_menu = false; + ImGuiPopupData* child_popup = (g.BeginPopupStack.Size < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) ? &g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size] : NULL; // Popup candidate (testing below) + ImGuiWindow* child_menu_window = (child_popup && child_popup->Window && child_popup->Window->ParentWindow == window) ? child_popup->Window : NULL; + if (g.HoveredWindow == window && child_menu_window != NULL) + { + float ref_unit = g.FontSize; // FIXME-DPI + float child_dir = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? 1.0f : -1.0f; + ImRect next_window_rect = child_menu_window->Rect(); + ImVec2 ta = (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta); + ImVec2 tb = (child_dir > 0.0f) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR(); + ImVec2 tc = (child_dir > 0.0f) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR(); + float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, ref_unit * 0.5f, ref_unit * 2.5f); // add a bit of extra slack. + ta.x += child_dir * -0.5f; + tb.x += child_dir * ref_unit; + tc.x += child_dir * ref_unit; + tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -ref_unit * 8.0f); // triangle has maximum height to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus + tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +ref_unit * 8.0f); + moving_toward_child_menu = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos); + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_toward_child_menu ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); // [DEBUG] + } + + // The 'HovereWindow == window' check creates an inconsistency (e.g. moving away from menu slowly tends to hit same window, whereas moving away fast does not) + // But we also need to not close the top-menu menu when moving over void. Perhaps we should extend the triangle check to a larger polygon. + // (Remember to test this on BeginPopup("A")->BeginMenu("B") sequence which behaves slightly differently as B isn't a Child of A and hovering isn't shared.) + if (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && !moving_toward_child_menu && !g.NavDisableMouseHover) + want_close = true; + + // Open + if (!menu_is_open && pressed) // Click/activate to open + want_open = true; + else if (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_toward_child_menu) // Hover to open + want_open = true; + if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open + { + want_open = true; + NavMoveRequestCancel(); + } + } + else + { + // Menu bar + if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it + { + want_close = true; + want_open = menu_is_open = false; + } + else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others + { + want_open = true; + } + else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open + { + want_open = true; + NavMoveRequestCancel(); + } + } + + if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) { ..use object.. }' + want_close = true; + if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None)) + ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true); + + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable | (menu_is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0)); + PopID(); + + if (want_open && !menu_is_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size) + { + // Don't reopen/recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame. + OpenPopup(label); + } + else if (want_open) + { + menu_is_open = true; + OpenPopup(label); + } + + if (menu_is_open) + { + ImGuiLastItemData last_item_in_parent = g.LastItemData; + SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always); // Note: misleading: the value will serve as reference for FindBestWindowPosForPopup(), not actual pos. + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.PopupRounding); // First level will use _PopupRounding, subsequent will use _ChildRounding + menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, window_flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display) + PopStyleVar(); + if (menu_is_open) + { + // Restore LastItemData so IsItemXXXX functions can work after BeginMenu()/EndMenu() + // (This fixes using IsItemClicked() and IsItemHovered(), but IsItemHovered() also relies on its support for ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck) + g.LastItemData = last_item_in_parent; + if (g.HoveredWindow == window) + g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow; + } + } + else + { + g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values + } + + return menu_is_open; +} + +bool ImGui::BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled) +{ + return BeginMenuEx(label, NULL, enabled); +} + +void ImGui::EndMenu() +{ + // Nav: When a left move request our menu failed, close ourselves. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup); // Mismatched BeginMenu()/EndMenu() calls + ImGuiWindow* parent_window = window->ParentWindow; // Should always be != NULL is we passed assert. + if (window->BeginCount == window->BeginCountPreviousFrame) + if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()) + if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window) && parent_window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) + { + ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1, true); + NavMoveRequestCancel(); + } + + EndPopup(); +} + +bool ImGui::MenuItemEx(const char* label, const char* icon, const char* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled) +{ + ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow(); + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + // See BeginMenuEx() for comments about this. + const bool menuset_is_open = IsRootOfOpenMenuSet(); + if (menuset_is_open) + PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoWindowHoverableCheck, true); + + // We've been using the equivalent of ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover on all Selectable() since early Nav system days (commit 43ee5d73), + // but I am unsure whether this should be kept at all. For now moved it to be an opt-in feature used by menus only. + bool pressed; + PushID(label); + if (!enabled) + BeginDisabled(); + + // We use ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner to allow down on one menu item, move, up on another. + const ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease | ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoSetKeyOwner | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover; + const ImGuiMenuColumns* offsets = &window->DC.MenuColumns; + if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) + { + // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful + // Note that in this situation: we don't render the shortcut, we render a highlight instead of the selected tick mark. + float w = label_size.x; + window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f); + ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset); + PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y)); + pressed = Selectable("", selected, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f)); + PopStyleVar(); + if (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible) + RenderText(text_pos, label); + window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar(). + } + else + { + // Menu item inside a vertical menu + // (In a typical menu window where all items are BeginMenu() or MenuItem() calls, extra_w will always be 0.0f. + // Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system. + float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f; + float shortcut_w = (shortcut && shortcut[0]) ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL).x : 0.0f; + float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f); + float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, shortcut_w, checkmark_w); // Feedback for next frame + float stretch_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w); + pressed = Selectable("", false, selectable_flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth, ImVec2(min_w, label_size.y)); + if (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible) + { + RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetLabel, 0.0f), label); + if (icon_w > 0.0f) + RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetIcon, 0.0f), icon); + if (shortcut_w > 0.0f) + { + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]); + RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetShortcut + stretch_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false); + PopStyleColor(); + } + if (selected) + RenderCheckMark(window->DrawList, pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetMark + stretch_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), g.FontSize * 0.866f); + } + } + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (selected ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0)); + if (!enabled) + EndDisabled(); + PopID(); + if (menuset_is_open) + PopItemFlag(); + + return pressed; +} + +bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled) +{ + return MenuItemEx(label, NULL, shortcut, selected, enabled); +} + +bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled) +{ + if (MenuItemEx(label, NULL, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled)) + { + if (p_selected) + *p_selected = !*p_selected; + return true; + } + return false; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - BeginTabBar() +// - BeginTabBarEx() [Internal] +// - EndTabBar() +// - TabBarLayout() [Internal] +// - TabBarCalcTabID() [Internal] +// - TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth() [Internal] +// - TabBarFindTabById() [Internal] +// - TabBarFindTabByOrder() [Internal] +// - TabBarGetCurrentTab() [Internal] +// - TabBarGetTabName() [Internal] +// - TabBarRemoveTab() [Internal] +// - TabBarCloseTab() [Internal] +// - TabBarScrollClamp() [Internal] +// - TabBarScrollToTab() [Internal] +// - TabBarQueueFocus() [Internal] +// - TabBarQueueReorder() [Internal] +// - TabBarProcessReorderFromMousePos() [Internal] +// - TabBarProcessReorder() [Internal] +// - TabBarScrollingButtons() [Internal] +// - TabBarTabListPopupButton() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +struct ImGuiTabBarSection +{ + int TabCount; // Number of tabs in this section. + float Width; // Sum of width of tabs in this section (after shrinking down) + float Spacing; // Horizontal spacing at the end of the section. + + ImGuiTabBarSection() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } +}; + +namespace ImGui +{ + static void TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar); + static ImU32 TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, ImGuiWindow* docked_window); + static float TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth(); + static float TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling); + static void TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiTabBarSection* sections); + static ImGuiTabItem* TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar); + static ImGuiTabItem* TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar); +} + +ImGuiTabBar::ImGuiTabBar() +{ + memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); + CurrFrameVisible = PrevFrameVisible = -1; + LastTabItemIdx = -1; +} + +static inline int TabItemGetSectionIdx(const ImGuiTabItem* tab) +{ + return (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading) ? 0 : (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing) ? 2 : 1; +} + +static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerBySection(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) +{ + const ImGuiTabItem* a = (const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs; + const ImGuiTabItem* b = (const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs; + const int a_section = TabItemGetSectionIdx(a); + const int b_section = TabItemGetSectionIdx(b); + if (a_section != b_section) + return a_section - b_section; + return (int)(a->IndexDuringLayout - b->IndexDuringLayout); +} + +static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerByBeginOrder(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) +{ + const ImGuiTabItem* a = (const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs; + const ImGuiTabItem* b = (const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs; + return (int)(a->BeginOrder - b->BeginOrder); +} + +static ImGuiTabBar* GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(const ImGuiPtrOrIndex& ref) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return ref.Ptr ? (ImGuiTabBar*)ref.Ptr : g.TabBars.GetByIndex(ref.Index); +} + +static ImGuiPtrOrIndex GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (g.TabBars.Contains(tab_bar)) + return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(g.TabBars.GetIndex(tab_bar)); + return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(tab_bar); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id); + ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.GetOrAddByKey(id); + ImRect tab_bar_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->WorkRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2); + tab_bar->ID = id; + return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused); +} + +bool ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0) + PushOverrideID(tab_bar->ID); + + // Add to stack + g.CurrentTabBarStack.push_back(GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(tab_bar)); + g.CurrentTabBar = tab_bar; + + // Append with multiple BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar() pairs. + tab_bar->BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos; + if (tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible == g.FrameCount) + { + window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY); + tab_bar->BeginCount++; + return true; + } + + // Ensure correct ordering when toggling ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable flag, or when a new tab was added while being not reorderable + if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) != (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) || (tab_bar->TabsAddedNew && !(flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable))) + ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerByBeginOrder); + tab_bar->TabsAddedNew = false; + + // Flags + if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0) + flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_; + + tab_bar->Flags = flags; + tab_bar->BarRect = tab_bar_bb; + tab_bar->WantLayout = true; // Layout will be done on the first call to ItemTab() + tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible; + tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible = g.FrameCount; + tab_bar->PrevTabsContentsHeight = tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight; + tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight = 0.0f; + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY = g.Style.ItemSpacing.y; + tab_bar->FramePadding = g.Style.FramePadding; + tab_bar->TabsActiveCount = 0; + tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = -1; + tab_bar->BeginCount = 1; + + // Set cursor pos in a way which only be used in the off-chance the user erroneously submits item before BeginTabItem(): items will overlap + window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY); + + // Draw separator + const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive); + const float y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y - 1.0f; + { + const float separator_min_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f); + const float separator_max_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f); + window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f); + } + return true; +} + +void ImGui::EndTabBar() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar; + if (tab_bar == NULL) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Mismatched BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar()!"); + return; + } + + // Fallback in case no TabItem have been submitted + if (tab_bar->WantLayout) + TabBarLayout(tab_bar); + + // Restore the last visible height if no tab is visible, this reduce vertical flicker/movement when a tabs gets removed without calling SetTabItemClosed(). + const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount); + if (tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted || tab_bar->VisibleTabId == 0 || tab_bar_appearing) + { + tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight = ImMax(window->DC.CursorPos.y - tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y, tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight); + window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight; + } + else + { + window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->PrevTabsContentsHeight; + } + if (tab_bar->BeginCount > 1) + window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BackupCursorPos; + + tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = -1; + if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0) + PopID(); + + g.CurrentTabBarStack.pop_back(); + g.CurrentTabBar = g.CurrentTabBarStack.empty() ? NULL : GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(g.CurrentTabBarStack.back()); +} + +// Scrolling happens only in the central section (leading/trailing sections are not scrolling) +static float TabBarCalcScrollableWidth(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabBarSection* sections) +{ + return tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - sections[0].Width - sections[2].Width - sections[1].Spacing; +} + +// This is called only once a frame before by the first call to ItemTab() +// The reason we're not calling it in BeginTabBar() is to leave a chance to the user to call the SetTabItemClosed() functions. +static void ImGui::TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + tab_bar->WantLayout = false; + + // Garbage collect by compacting list + // Detect if we need to sort out tab list (e.g. in rare case where a tab changed section) + int tab_dst_n = 0; + bool need_sort_by_section = false; + ImGuiTabBarSection sections[3]; // Layout sections: Leading, Central, Trailing + for (int tab_src_n = 0; tab_src_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_src_n++) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n]; + if (tab->LastFrameVisible < tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible || tab->WantClose) + { + // Remove tab + if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) { tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0; } + if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID) { tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; } + if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab->ID) { tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; } + continue; + } + if (tab_dst_n != tab_src_n) + tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n] = tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n]; + + tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n]; + tab->IndexDuringLayout = (ImS16)tab_dst_n; + + // We will need sorting if tabs have changed section (e.g. moved from one of Leading/Central/Trailing to another) + int curr_tab_section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab); + if (tab_dst_n > 0) + { + ImGuiTabItem* prev_tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n - 1]; + int prev_tab_section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(prev_tab); + if (curr_tab_section_n == 0 && prev_tab_section_n != 0) + need_sort_by_section = true; + if (prev_tab_section_n == 2 && curr_tab_section_n != 2) + need_sort_by_section = true; + } + + sections[curr_tab_section_n].TabCount++; + tab_dst_n++; + } + if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size != tab_dst_n) + tab_bar->Tabs.resize(tab_dst_n); + + if (need_sort_by_section) + ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerBySection); + + // Calculate spacing between sections + sections[0].Spacing = sections[0].TabCount > 0 && (sections[1].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount) > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f; + sections[1].Spacing = sections[1].TabCount > 0 && sections[2].TabCount > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f; + + // Setup next selected tab + ImGuiID scroll_to_tab_id = 0; + if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId) + { + tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId; + tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; + scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId; + } + + // Process order change request (we could probably process it when requested but it's just saner to do it in a single spot). + if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId != 0) + { + if (TabBarProcessReorder(tab_bar)) + if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == tab_bar->SelectedTabId) + scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId; + tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = 0; + } + + // Tab List Popup (will alter tab_bar->BarRect and therefore the available width!) + const bool tab_list_popup_button = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton) != 0; + if (tab_list_popup_button) + if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = TabBarTabListPopupButton(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Min.x! + scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID; + + // Leading/Trailing tabs will be shrink only if central one aren't visible anymore, so layout the shrink data as: leading, trailing, central + // (whereas our tabs are stored as: leading, central, trailing) + int shrink_buffer_indexes[3] = { 0, sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount, sections[0].TabCount }; + g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.resize(tab_bar->Tabs.Size); + + // Compute ideal tabs widths + store them into shrink buffer + ImGuiTabItem* most_recently_selected_tab = NULL; + int curr_section_n = -1; + bool found_selected_tab_id = false; + for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n]; + IM_ASSERT(tab->LastFrameVisible >= tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible); + + if ((most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)) + most_recently_selected_tab = tab; + if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId) + found_selected_tab_id = true; + if (scroll_to_tab_id == 0 && g.NavJustMovedToId == tab->ID) + scroll_to_tab_id = tab->ID; + + // Refresh tab width immediately, otherwise changes of style e.g. style.FramePadding.x would noticeably lag in the tab bar. + // Additionally, when using TabBarAddTab() to manipulate tab bar order we occasionally insert new tabs that don't have a width yet, + // and we cannot wait for the next BeginTabItem() call. We cannot compute this width within TabBarAddTab() because font size depends on the active window. + const char* tab_name = TabBarGetTabName(tab_bar, tab); + const bool has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton) == 0 || (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument); + tab->ContentWidth = (tab->RequestedWidth >= 0.0f) ? tab->RequestedWidth : TabItemCalcSize(tab_name, has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker).x; + + int section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab); + ImGuiTabBarSection* section = §ions[section_n]; + section->Width += tab->ContentWidth + (section_n == curr_section_n ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f); + curr_section_n = section_n; + + // Store data so we can build an array sorted by width if we need to shrink tabs down + IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6385); + ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* shrink_width_item = &g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[shrink_buffer_indexes[section_n]++]; + shrink_width_item->Index = tab_n; + shrink_width_item->Width = shrink_width_item->InitialWidth = tab->ContentWidth; + tab->Width = ImMax(tab->ContentWidth, 1.0f); + } + + // Compute total ideal width (used for e.g. auto-resizing a window) + tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal = 0.0f; + for (int section_n = 0; section_n < 3; section_n++) + tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal += sections[section_n].Width + sections[section_n].Spacing; + + // Horizontal scrolling buttons + // (note that TabBarScrollButtons() will alter BarRect.Max.x) + if ((tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal > tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons) && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll)) + if (ImGuiTabItem* scroll_and_select_tab = TabBarScrollingButtons(tab_bar)) + { + scroll_to_tab_id = scroll_and_select_tab->ID; + if ((scroll_and_select_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) == 0) + tab_bar->SelectedTabId = scroll_to_tab_id; + } + + // Shrink widths if full tabs don't fit in their allocated space + float section_0_w = sections[0].Width + sections[0].Spacing; + float section_1_w = sections[1].Width + sections[1].Spacing; + float section_2_w = sections[2].Width + sections[2].Spacing; + bool central_section_is_visible = (section_0_w + section_2_w) < tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth(); + float width_excess; + if (central_section_is_visible) + width_excess = ImMax(section_1_w - (tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - section_0_w - section_2_w), 0.0f); // Excess used to shrink central section + else + width_excess = (section_0_w + section_2_w) - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth(); // Excess used to shrink leading/trailing section + + // With ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll policy, we will only shrink leading/trailing if the central section is not visible anymore + if (width_excess >= 1.0f && ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown) || !central_section_is_visible)) + { + int shrink_data_count = (central_section_is_visible ? sections[1].TabCount : sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount); + int shrink_data_offset = (central_section_is_visible ? sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount : 0); + ShrinkWidths(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.Data + shrink_data_offset, shrink_data_count, width_excess); + + // Apply shrunk values into tabs and sections + for (int tab_n = shrink_data_offset; tab_n < shrink_data_offset + shrink_data_count; tab_n++) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index]; + float shrinked_width = IM_FLOOR(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width); + if (shrinked_width < 0.0f) + continue; + + shrinked_width = ImMax(1.0f, shrinked_width); + int section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab); + sections[section_n].Width -= (tab->Width - shrinked_width); + tab->Width = shrinked_width; + } + } + + // Layout all active tabs + int section_tab_index = 0; + float tab_offset = 0.0f; + tab_bar->WidthAllTabs = 0.0f; + for (int section_n = 0; section_n < 3; section_n++) + { + ImGuiTabBarSection* section = §ions[section_n]; + if (section_n == 2) + tab_offset = ImMin(ImMax(0.0f, tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - section->Width), tab_offset); + + for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < section->TabCount; tab_n++) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[section_tab_index + tab_n]; + tab->Offset = tab_offset; + tab->NameOffset = -1; + tab_offset += tab->Width + (tab_n < section->TabCount - 1 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f); + } + tab_bar->WidthAllTabs += ImMax(section->Width + section->Spacing, 0.0f); + tab_offset += section->Spacing; + section_tab_index += section->TabCount; + } + + // Clear name buffers + tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.resize(0); + + // If we have lost the selected tab, select the next most recently active one + if (found_selected_tab_id == false) + tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; + if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0 && most_recently_selected_tab != NULL) + scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = most_recently_selected_tab->ID; + + // Lock in visible tab + tab_bar->VisibleTabId = tab_bar->SelectedTabId; + tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false; + + // Apply request requests + if (scroll_to_tab_id != 0) + TabBarScrollToTab(tab_bar, scroll_to_tab_id, sections); + else if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll) && IsMouseHoveringRect(tab_bar->BarRect.Min, tab_bar->BarRect.Max, true) && IsWindowContentHoverable(g.CurrentWindow)) + { + const float wheel = g.IO.MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap ? g.IO.MouseWheel : g.IO.MouseWheelH; + const ImGuiKey wheel_key = g.IO.MouseWheelRequestAxisSwap ? ImGuiKey_MouseWheelY : ImGuiKey_MouseWheelX; + if (TestKeyOwner(wheel_key, tab_bar->ID) && wheel != 0.0f) + { + const float scroll_step = wheel * TabBarCalcScrollableWidth(tab_bar, sections) / 3.0f; + tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = 0.0f; + tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget - scroll_step); + } + SetKeyOwner(wheel_key, tab_bar->ID); + } + + // Update scrolling + tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingAnim); + tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget); + if (tab_bar->ScrollingAnim != tab_bar->ScrollingTarget) + { + // Scrolling speed adjust itself so we can always reach our target in 1/3 seconds. + // Teleport if we are aiming far off the visible line + tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, 70.0f * g.FontSize); + tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, ImFabs(tab_bar->ScrollingTarget - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim) / 0.3f); + const bool teleport = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount) || (tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility > 10.0f * g.FontSize); + tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = teleport ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : ImLinearSweep(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget, g.IO.DeltaTime * tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed); + } + else + { + tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = 0.0f; + } + tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x + sections[0].Width + sections[0].Spacing; + tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - sections[2].Width - sections[1].Spacing; + + // Actual layout in host window (we don't do it in BeginTabBar() so as not to waste an extra frame) + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min; + ItemSize(ImVec2(tab_bar->WidthAllTabs, tab_bar->BarRect.GetHeight()), tab_bar->FramePadding.y); + window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x + tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal); +} + +// Dockable windows uses Name/ID in the global namespace. Non-dockable items use the ID stack. +static ImU32 ImGui::TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, ImGuiWindow* docked_window) +{ + IM_ASSERT(docked_window == NULL); // master branch only + IM_UNUSED(docked_window); + if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) + { + ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(label); + KeepAliveID(id); + return id; + } + else + { + ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow; + return window->GetID(label); + } +} + +static float ImGui::TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + return g.FontSize * 20.0f; +} + +ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id) +{ + if (tab_id != 0) + for (int n = 0; n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; n++) + if (tab_bar->Tabs[n].ID == tab_id) + return &tab_bar->Tabs[n]; + return NULL; +} + +// Order = visible order, not submission order! (which is tab->BeginOrder) +ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindTabByOrder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, int order) +{ + if (order < 0 || order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size) + return NULL; + return &tab_bar->Tabs[order]; +} + +ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarGetCurrentTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar) +{ + if (tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx <= 0 || tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size) + return NULL; + return &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx]; +} + +const char* ImGui::TabBarGetTabName(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab) +{ + if (tab->NameOffset == -1) + return "N/A"; + IM_ASSERT(tab->NameOffset < tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.Size); + return tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.Data + tab->NameOffset; +} + +// The *TabId fields are already set by the docking system _before_ the actual TabItem was created, so we clear them regardless. +void ImGui::TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id) +{ + if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id)) + tab_bar->Tabs.erase(tab); + if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0; } + if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; } + if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; } +} + +// Called on manual closure attempt +void ImGui::TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab) +{ + if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) + return; // A button appended with TabItemButton(). + + if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument)) + { + // This will remove a frame of lag for selecting another tab on closure. + // However we don't run it in the case where the 'Unsaved' flag is set, so user gets a chance to fully undo the closure + tab->WantClose = true; + if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) + { + tab->LastFrameVisible = -1; + tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; + } + } + else + { + // Actually select before expecting closure attempt (on an UnsavedDocument tab user is expect to e.g. show a popup) + if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId != tab->ID) + TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab); + } +} + +static float ImGui::TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling) +{ + scrolling = ImMin(scrolling, tab_bar->WidthAllTabs - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth()); + return ImMax(scrolling, 0.0f); +} + +// Note: we may scroll to tab that are not selected! e.g. using keyboard arrow keys +static void ImGui::TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiTabBarSection* sections) +{ + ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id); + if (tab == NULL) + return; + if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) + return; + + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + float margin = g.FontSize * 1.0f; // When to scroll to make Tab N+1 visible always make a bit of N visible to suggest more scrolling area (since we don't have a scrollbar) + int order = TabBarGetTabOrder(tab_bar, tab); + + // Scrolling happens only in the central section (leading/trailing sections are not scrolling) + float scrollable_width = TabBarCalcScrollableWidth(tab_bar, sections); + + // We make all tabs positions all relative Sections[0].Width to make code simpler + float tab_x1 = tab->Offset - sections[0].Width + (order > sections[0].TabCount - 1 ? -margin : 0.0f); + float tab_x2 = tab->Offset - sections[0].Width + tab->Width + (order + 1 < tab_bar->Tabs.Size - sections[2].TabCount ? margin : 1.0f); + tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = 0.0f; + if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget > tab_x1 || (tab_x2 - tab_x1 >= scrollable_width)) + { + // Scroll to the left + tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim - tab_x2, 0.0f); + tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x1; + } + else if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget < tab_x2 - scrollable_width) + { + // Scroll to the right + tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax((tab_x1 - scrollable_width) - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, 0.0f); + tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x2 - scrollable_width; + } +} + +void ImGui::TabBarQueueFocus(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab) +{ + tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab->ID; +} + +void ImGui::TabBarQueueReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab, int offset) +{ + IM_ASSERT(offset != 0); + IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0); + tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = tab->ID; + tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset = (ImS16)offset; +} + +void ImGui::TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* src_tab, ImVec2 mouse_pos) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0); + if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) == 0) + return; + + const bool is_central_section = (src_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) == 0; + const float bar_offset = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - (is_central_section ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : 0); + + // Count number of contiguous tabs we are crossing over + const int dir = (bar_offset + src_tab->Offset) > mouse_pos.x ? -1 : +1; + const int src_idx = tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(src_tab); + int dst_idx = src_idx; + for (int i = src_idx; i >= 0 && i < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; i += dir) + { + // Reordered tabs must share the same section + const ImGuiTabItem* dst_tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[i]; + if (dst_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder) + break; + if ((dst_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) != (src_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_)) + break; + dst_idx = i; + + // Include spacing after tab, so when mouse cursor is between tabs we would not continue checking further tabs that are not hovered. + const float x1 = bar_offset + dst_tab->Offset - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + const float x2 = bar_offset + dst_tab->Offset + dst_tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; + //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(ImVec2(x1, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(x2, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); + if ((dir < 0 && mouse_pos.x > x1) || (dir > 0 && mouse_pos.x < x2)) + break; + } + + if (dst_idx != src_idx) + TabBarQueueReorder(tab_bar, src_tab, dst_idx - src_idx); +} + +bool ImGui::TabBarProcessReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar) +{ + ImGuiTabItem* tab1 = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId); + if (tab1 == NULL || (tab1->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder)) + return false; + + //IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable); // <- this may happen when using debug tools + int tab2_order = TabBarGetTabOrder(tab_bar, tab1) + tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset; + if (tab2_order < 0 || tab2_order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size) + return false; + + // Reordered tabs must share the same section + // (Note: TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos() also has a similar test but since we allow direct calls to TabBarQueueReorder() we do it here too) + ImGuiTabItem* tab2 = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab2_order]; + if (tab2->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder) + return false; + if ((tab1->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) != (tab2->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_)) + return false; + + ImGuiTabItem item_tmp = *tab1; + ImGuiTabItem* src_tab = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab1 + 1 : tab2; + ImGuiTabItem* dst_tab = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab1 : tab2 + 1; + const int move_count = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset : -tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset; + memmove(dst_tab, src_tab, move_count * sizeof(ImGuiTabItem)); + *tab2 = item_tmp; + + if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings) + MarkIniSettingsDirty(); + return true; +} + +static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + const ImVec2 arrow_button_size(g.FontSize - 2.0f, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); + const float scrolling_buttons_width = arrow_button_size.x * 2.0f; + + const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + //window->DrawList->AddRect(ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255)); + + int select_dir = 0; + ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text]; + arrow_col.w *= 0.5f; + + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col); + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0)); + const float backup_repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; + const float backup_repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate; + g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = 0.250f; + g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = 0.200f; + float x = ImMax(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width); + window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y); + if (ArrowButtonEx("##<", ImGuiDir_Left, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat)) + select_dir = -1; + window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(x + arrow_button_size.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y); + if (ArrowButtonEx("##>", ImGuiDir_Right, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat)) + select_dir = +1; + PopStyleColor(2); + g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = backup_repeat_rate; + g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = backup_repeat_delay; + + ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_scroll_to = NULL; + if (select_dir != 0) + if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_item = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->SelectedTabId)) + { + int selected_order = TabBarGetTabOrder(tab_bar, tab_item); + int target_order = selected_order + select_dir; + + // Skip tab item buttons until another tab item is found or end is reached + while (tab_to_scroll_to == NULL) + { + // If we are at the end of the list, still scroll to make our tab visible + tab_to_scroll_to = &tab_bar->Tabs[(target_order >= 0 && target_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? target_order : selected_order]; + + // Cross through buttons + // (even if first/last item is a button, return it so we can update the scroll) + if (tab_to_scroll_to->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) + { + target_order += select_dir; + selected_order += select_dir; + tab_to_scroll_to = (target_order < 0 || target_order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? tab_to_scroll_to : NULL; + } + } + } + window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos; + tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x -= scrolling_buttons_width + 1.0f; + + return tab_to_scroll_to; +} + +static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + + // We use g.Style.FramePadding.y to match the square ArrowButton size + const float tab_list_popup_button_width = g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y; + const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - g.Style.FramePadding.y, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y); + tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x += tab_list_popup_button_width; + + ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text]; + arrow_col.w *= 0.5f; + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col); + PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0)); + bool open = BeginCombo("##v", NULL, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest); + PopStyleColor(2); + + ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL; + if (open) + { + for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n]; + if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) + continue; + + const char* tab_name = TabBarGetTabName(tab_bar, tab); + if (Selectable(tab_name, tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID)) + tab_to_select = tab; + } + EndCombo(); + } + + window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos; + return tab_to_select; +} + +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc. +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- +// - BeginTabItem() +// - EndTabItem() +// - TabItemButton() +// - TabItemEx() [Internal] +// - SetTabItemClosed() +// - TabItemCalcSize() [Internal] +// - TabItemBackground() [Internal] +// - TabItemLabelAndCloseButton() [Internal] +//------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +bool ImGui::BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar; + if (tab_bar == NULL) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!"); + return false; + } + IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)); // BeginTabItem() Can't be used with button flags, use TabItemButton() instead! + + bool ret = TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, p_open, flags, NULL); + if (ret && !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId)) + { + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx]; + PushOverrideID(tab->ID); // We already hashed 'label' so push into the ID stack directly instead of doing another hash through PushID(label) + } + return ret; +} + +void ImGui::EndTabItem() +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return; + + ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar; + if (tab_bar == NULL) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!"); + return; + } + IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= 0); + ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx]; + if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId)) + PopID(); +} + +bool ImGui::TabItemButton(const char* label, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar; + if (tab_bar == NULL) + { + IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!"); + return false; + } + return TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, NULL, flags | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button | ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder, NULL); +} + +bool ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* docked_window) +{ + // Layout whole tab bar if not already done + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + if (tab_bar->WantLayout) + { + ImGuiNextItemData backup_next_item_data = g.NextItemData; + TabBarLayout(tab_bar); + g.NextItemData = backup_next_item_data; + } + ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; + if (window->SkipItems) + return false; + + const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style; + const ImGuiID id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label, docked_window); + + // If the user called us with *p_open == false, we early out and don't render. + // We make a call to ItemAdd() so that attempts to use a contextual popup menu with an implicit ID won't use an older ID. + IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags); + if (p_open && !*p_open) + { + ItemAdd(ImRect(), id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav); + return false; + } + + IM_ASSERT(!p_open || !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)); + IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing)) != (ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing)); // Can't use both Leading and Trailing + + // Store into ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton, also honor ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton passed by user (although not documented) + if (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton) + p_open = NULL; + else if (p_open == NULL) + flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton; + + // Acquire tab data + ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, id); + bool tab_is_new = false; + if (tab == NULL) + { + tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(ImGuiTabItem()); + tab = &tab_bar->Tabs.back(); + tab->ID = id; + tab_bar->TabsAddedNew = tab_is_new = true; + } + tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = (ImS16)tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab); + + // Calculate tab contents size + ImVec2 size = TabItemCalcSize(label, (p_open != NULL) || (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument)); + tab->RequestedWidth = -1.0f; + if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth) + size.x = tab->RequestedWidth = g.NextItemData.Width; + if (tab_is_new) + tab->Width = ImMax(1.0f, size.x); + tab->ContentWidth = size.x; + tab->BeginOrder = tab_bar->TabsActiveCount++; + + const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount); + const bool tab_bar_focused = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) != 0; + const bool tab_appearing = (tab->LastFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount); + const bool tab_just_unsaved = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument); + const bool is_tab_button = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) != 0; + tab->LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount; + tab->Flags = flags; + + // Append name _WITH_ the zero-terminator + if (docked_window != NULL) + { + IM_ASSERT(docked_window == NULL); // master branch only + } + else + { + tab->NameOffset = (ImS32)tab_bar->TabsNames.size(); + tab_bar->TabsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1); + } + + // Update selected tab + if (!is_tab_button) + { + if (tab_appearing && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs) && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0) + if (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0) + TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab); // New tabs gets activated + if ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected) && (tab_bar->SelectedTabId != id)) // _SetSelected can only be passed on explicit tab bar + TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab); + } + + // Lock visibility + // (Note: tab_contents_visible != tab_selected... because CTRL+TAB operations may preview some tabs without selecting them!) + bool tab_contents_visible = (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == id); + if (tab_contents_visible) + tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = true; + + // On the very first frame of a tab bar we let first tab contents be visible to minimize appearing glitches + if (!tab_contents_visible && tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar_appearing) + if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size == 1 && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs)) + tab_contents_visible = true; + + // Note that tab_is_new is not necessarily the same as tab_appearing! When a tab bar stops being submitted + // and then gets submitted again, the tabs will have 'tab_appearing=true' but 'tab_is_new=false'. + if (tab_appearing && (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_is_new)) + { + ItemAdd(ImRect(), id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav); + if (is_tab_button) + return false; + return tab_contents_visible; + } + + if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == id) + tab->LastFrameSelected = g.FrameCount; + + // Backup current layout position + const ImVec2 backup_main_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + + // Layout + const bool is_central_section = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) == 0; + size.x = tab->Width; + if (is_central_section) + window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(IM_FLOOR(tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim), 0.0f); + else + window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(tab->Offset, 0.0f); + ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos; + ImRect bb(pos, pos + size); + + // We don't have CPU clipping primitives to clip the CloseButton (until it becomes a texture), so need to add an extra draw call (temporary in the case of vertical animation) + const bool want_clip_rect = is_central_section && (bb.Min.x < tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX || bb.Max.x > tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX); + if (want_clip_rect) + PushClipRect(ImVec2(ImMax(bb.Min.x, tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX), bb.Min.y - 1), ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX, bb.Max.y), true); + + ImVec2 backup_cursor_max_pos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos; + ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y); + window->DC.CursorMaxPos = backup_cursor_max_pos; + + if (!ItemAdd(bb, id)) + { + if (want_clip_rect) + PopClipRect(); + window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos; + return tab_contents_visible; + } + + // Click to Select a tab + // Allow the close button to overlap + ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ((is_tab_button ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlap); + if (g.DragDropActive) + button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold; + bool hovered, held; + bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags); + if (pressed && !is_tab_button) + TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab); + + // Drag and drop: re-order tabs + if (held && !tab_appearing && IsMouseDragging(0)) + { + if (!g.DragDropActive && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)) + { + // While moving a tab it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x + if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < bb.Min.x) + { + TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(tab_bar, tab, g.IO.MousePos); + } + else if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > bb.Max.x) + { + TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(tab_bar, tab, g.IO.MousePos); + } + } + } + +#if 0 + if (hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > TOOLTIP_DELAY && bb.GetWidth() < tab->ContentWidth) + { + // Enlarge tab display when hovering + bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + IM_FLOOR(ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->ContentWidth, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f))); + display_draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window); + TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive)); + } +#endif + + // Render tab shape + ImDrawList* display_draw_list = window->DrawList; + const ImU32 tab_col = GetColorU32((held || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_TabHovered : tab_contents_visible ? (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive) : (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_Tab : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused)); + TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_col); + RenderNavHighlight(bb, id); + + // Select with right mouse button. This is so the common idiom for context menu automatically highlight the current widget. + const bool hovered_unblocked = IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup); + if (hovered_unblocked && (IsMouseClicked(1) || IsMouseReleased(1)) && !is_tab_button) + TabBarQueueFocus(tab_bar, tab); + + if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton) + flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton; + + // Render tab label, process close button + const ImGuiID close_button_id = p_open ? GetIDWithSeed("#CLOSE", NULL, id) : 0; + bool just_closed; + bool text_clipped; + TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(display_draw_list, bb, tab_just_unsaved ? (flags & ~ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument) : flags, tab_bar->FramePadding, label, id, close_button_id, tab_contents_visible, &just_closed, &text_clipped); + if (just_closed && p_open != NULL) + { + *p_open = false; + TabBarCloseTab(tab_bar, tab); + } + + // Restore main window position so user can draw there + if (want_clip_rect) + PopClipRect(); + window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos; + + // Tooltip + // (Won't work over the close button because ItemOverlap systems messes up with HoveredIdTimer-> seems ok) + // (We test IsItemHovered() to discard e.g. when another item is active or drag and drop over the tab bar, which g.HoveredId ignores) + // FIXME: This is a mess. + // FIXME: We may want disabled tab to still display the tooltip? + if (text_clipped && g.HoveredId == id && !held) + if (!(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip)) + SetItemTooltip("%.*s", (int)(FindRenderedTextEnd(label) - label), label); + + IM_ASSERT(!is_tab_button || !(tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID && is_tab_button)); // TabItemButton should not be selected + if (is_tab_button) + return pressed; + return tab_contents_visible; +} + +// [Public] This is call is 100% optional but it allows to remove some one-frame glitches when a tab has been unexpectedly removed. +// To use it to need to call the function SetTabItemClosed() between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar(). +// Tabs closed by the close button will automatically be flagged to avoid this issue. +void ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(const char* label) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + bool is_within_manual_tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar && !(g.CurrentTabBar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode); + if (is_within_manual_tab_bar) + { + ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar; + ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label, NULL); + if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id)) + tab->WantClose = true; // Will be processed by next call to TabBarLayout() + } +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(const char* label, bool has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + ImVec2 size = ImVec2(label_size.x + g.Style.FramePadding.x, label_size.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); + if (has_close_button_or_unsaved_marker) + size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + (g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + g.FontSize); // We use Y intentionally to fit the close button circle. + else + size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + 1.0f; + return ImVec2(ImMin(size.x, TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()), size.y); +} + +ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(ImGuiWindow*) +{ + IM_ASSERT(0); // This function exists to facilitate merge with 'docking' branch. + return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f); +} + +void ImGui::TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col) +{ + // While rendering tabs, we trim 1 pixel off the top of our bounding box so they can fit within a regular frame height while looking "detached" from it. + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + const float width = bb.GetWidth(); + IM_UNUSED(flags); + IM_ASSERT(width > 0.0f); + const float rounding = ImMax(0.0f, ImMin((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) ? g.Style.FrameRounding : g.Style.TabRounding, width * 0.5f - 1.0f)); + const float y1 = bb.Min.y + 1.0f; + const float y2 = bb.Max.y - 1.0f; + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, y2)); + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 6, 9); + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 9, 12); + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x, y2)); + draw_list->PathFillConvex(col); + if (g.Style.TabBorderSize > 0.0f) + { + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + 0.5f, y2)); + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding + 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 6, 9); + draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding - 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 9, 12); + draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - 0.5f, y2)); + draw_list->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 0, g.Style.TabBorderSize); + } +} + +// Render text label (with custom clipping) + Unsaved Document marker + Close Button logic +// We tend to lock style.FramePadding for a given tab-bar, hence the 'frame_padding' parameter. +void ImGui::TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImVec2 frame_padding, const char* label, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiID close_button_id, bool is_contents_visible, bool* out_just_closed, bool* out_text_clipped) +{ + ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; + ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true); + + if (out_just_closed) + *out_just_closed = false; + if (out_text_clipped) + *out_text_clipped = false; + + if (bb.GetWidth() <= 1.0f) + return; + + // In Style V2 we'll have full override of all colors per state (e.g. focused, selected) + // But right now if you want to alter text color of tabs this is what you need to do. +#if 0 + const float backup_alpha = g.Style.Alpha; + if (!is_contents_visible) + g.Style.Alpha *= 0.7f; +#endif + + // Render text label (with clipping + alpha gradient) + unsaved marker + ImRect text_pixel_clip_bb(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x, bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x, bb.Max.y); + ImRect text_ellipsis_clip_bb = text_pixel_clip_bb; + + // Return clipped state ignoring the close button + if (out_text_clipped) + { + *out_text_clipped = (text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min.x + label_size.x) > text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x; + //draw_list->AddCircle(text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, 3.0f, *out_text_clipped ? IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255) : IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); + } + + const float button_sz = g.FontSize; + const ImVec2 button_pos(ImMax(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x - button_sz), bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y); + + // Close Button & Unsaved Marker + // We are relying on a subtle and confusing distinction between 'hovered' and 'g.HoveredId' which happens because we are using ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlapMode + SetItemAllowOverlap() + // 'hovered' will be true when hovering the Tab but NOT when hovering the close button + // 'g.HoveredId==id' will be true when hovering the Tab including when hovering the close button + // 'g.ActiveId==close_button_id' will be true when we are holding on the close button, in which case both hovered booleans are false + bool close_button_pressed = false; + bool close_button_visible = false; + if (close_button_id != 0) + if (is_contents_visible || bb.GetWidth() >= ImMax(button_sz, g.Style.TabMinWidthForCloseButton)) + if (g.HoveredId == tab_id || g.HoveredId == close_button_id || g.ActiveId == tab_id || g.ActiveId == close_button_id) + close_button_visible = true; + bool unsaved_marker_visible = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument) != 0 && (button_pos.x + button_sz <= bb.Max.x); + + if (close_button_visible) + { + ImGuiLastItemData last_item_backup = g.LastItemData; + if (CloseButton(close_button_id, button_pos)) + close_button_pressed = true; + g.LastItemData = last_item_backup; + + // Close with middle mouse button + if (!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton) && IsMouseClicked(2)) + close_button_pressed = true; + } + else if (unsaved_marker_visible) + { + const ImRect bullet_bb(button_pos, button_pos + ImVec2(button_sz, button_sz) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f); + RenderBullet(draw_list, bullet_bb.GetCenter(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text)); + } + + // This is all rather complicated + // (the main idea is that because the close button only appears on hover, we don't want it to alter the ellipsis position) + // FIXME: if FramePadding is noticeably large, ellipsis_max_x will be wrong here (e.g. #3497), maybe for consistency that parameter of RenderTextEllipsis() shouldn't exist.. + float ellipsis_max_x = close_button_visible ? text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x : bb.Max.x - 1.0f; + if (close_button_visible || unsaved_marker_visible) + { + text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= close_button_visible ? (button_sz) : (button_sz * 0.80f); + text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max.x -= unsaved_marker_visible ? (button_sz * 0.80f) : 0.0f; + ellipsis_max_x = text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x; + } + RenderTextEllipsis(draw_list, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x, ellipsis_max_x, label, NULL, &label_size); + +#if 0 + if (!is_contents_visible) + g.Style.Alpha = backup_alpha; +#endif + + if (out_just_closed) + *out_just_closed = close_button_pressed; +} + + +#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_rectpack.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_rectpack.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f6917e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_rectpack.h @@ -0,0 +1,627 @@ +// [DEAR IMGUI] +// This is a slightly modified version of stb_rect_pack.h 1.01. +// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes. +// +// stb_rect_pack.h - v1.01 - public domain - rectangle packing +// Sean Barrett 2014 +// +// Useful for e.g. packing rectangular textures into an atlas. +// Does not do rotation. +// +// Before #including, +// +// #define STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION +// +// in the file that you want to have the implementation. +// +// Not necessarily the awesomest packing method, but better than +// the totally naive one in stb_truetype (which is primarily what +// this is meant to replace). +// +// Has only had a few tests run, may have issues. +// +// More docs to come. +// +// No memory allocations; uses qsort() and assert() from stdlib. +// Can override those by defining STBRP_SORT and STBRP_ASSERT. +// +// This library currently uses the Skyline Bottom-Left algorithm. +// +// Please note: better rectangle packers are welcome! Please +// implement them to the same API, but with a different init +// function. +// +// Credits +// +// Library +// Sean Barrett +// Minor features +// Martins Mozeiko +// github:IntellectualKitty +// +// Bugfixes / warning fixes +// Jeremy Jaussaud +// Fabian Giesen +// +// Version history: +// +// 1.01 (2021-07-11) always use large rect mode, expose STBRP__MAXVAL in public section +// 1.00 (2019-02-25) avoid small space waste; gracefully fail too-wide rectangles +// 0.99 (2019-02-07) warning fixes +// 0.11 (2017-03-03) return packing success/fail result +// 0.10 (2016-10-25) remove cast-away-const to avoid warnings +// 0.09 (2016-08-27) fix compiler warnings +// 0.08 (2015-09-13) really fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0) +// 0.07 (2015-09-13) fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0) +// 0.06 (2015-04-15) added STBRP_SORT to allow replacing qsort +// 0.05: added STBRP_ASSERT to allow replacing assert +// 0.04: fixed minor bug in STBRP_LARGE_RECTS support +// 0.01: initial release +// +// LICENSE +// +// See end of file for license information. + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// INCLUDE SECTION +// + +#ifndef STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H +#define STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H + +#define STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION 1 + +#ifdef STBRP_STATIC +#define STBRP_DEF static +#else +#define STBRP_DEF extern +#endif + +#ifdef __cplusplus +extern "C" { +#endif + +typedef struct stbrp_context stbrp_context; +typedef struct stbrp_node stbrp_node; +typedef struct stbrp_rect stbrp_rect; + +typedef int stbrp_coord; + +#define STBRP__MAXVAL 0x7fffffff +// Mostly for internal use, but this is the maximum supported coordinate value. + +STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects (stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects); +// Assign packed locations to rectangles. The rectangles are of type +// 'stbrp_rect' defined below, stored in the array 'rects', and there +// are 'num_rects' many of them. +// +// Rectangles which are successfully packed have the 'was_packed' flag +// set to a non-zero value and 'x' and 'y' store the minimum location +// on each axis (i.e. bottom-left in cartesian coordinates, top-left +// if you imagine y increasing downwards). Rectangles which do not fit +// have the 'was_packed' flag set to 0. +// +// You should not try to access the 'rects' array from another thread +// while this function is running, as the function temporarily reorders +// the array while it executes. +// +// To pack into another rectangle, you need to call stbrp_init_target +// again. To continue packing into the same rectangle, you can call +// this function again. Calling this multiple times with multiple rect +// arrays will probably produce worse packing results than calling it +// a single time with the full rectangle array, but the option is +// available. +// +// The function returns 1 if all of the rectangles were successfully +// packed and 0 otherwise. + +struct stbrp_rect +{ + // reserved for your use: + int id; + + // input: + stbrp_coord w, h; + + // output: + stbrp_coord x, y; + int was_packed; // non-zero if valid packing + +}; // 16 bytes, nominally + + +STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target (stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes); +// Initialize a rectangle packer to: +// pack a rectangle that is 'width' by 'height' in dimensions +// using temporary storage provided by the array 'nodes', which is 'num_nodes' long +// +// You must call this function every time you start packing into a new target. +// +// There is no "shutdown" function. The 'nodes' memory must stay valid for +// the following stbrp_pack_rects() call (or calls), but can be freed after +// the call (or calls) finish. +// +// Note: to guarantee best results, either: +// 1. make sure 'num_nodes' >= 'width' +// or 2. call stbrp_allow_out_of_mem() defined below with 'allow_out_of_mem = 1' +// +// If you don't do either of the above things, widths will be quantized to multiples +// of small integers to guarantee the algorithm doesn't run out of temporary storage. +// +// If you do #2, then the non-quantized algorithm will be used, but the algorithm +// may run out of temporary storage and be unable to pack some rectangles. + +STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem (stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem); +// Optionally call this function after init but before doing any packing to +// change the handling of the out-of-temp-memory scenario, described above. +// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default (false). + + +STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic (stbrp_context *context, int heuristic); +// Optionally select which packing heuristic the library should use. Different +// heuristics will produce better/worse results for different data sets. +// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default. + +enum +{ + STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default=0, + STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default, + STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight +}; + + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// the details of the following structures don't matter to you, but they must +// be visible so you can handle the memory allocations for them + +struct stbrp_node +{ + stbrp_coord x,y; + stbrp_node *next; +}; + +struct stbrp_context +{ + int width; + int height; + int align; + int init_mode; + int heuristic; + int num_nodes; + stbrp_node *active_head; + stbrp_node *free_head; + stbrp_node extra[2]; // we allocate two extra nodes so optimal user-node-count is 'width' not 'width+2' +}; + +#ifdef __cplusplus +} +#endif + +#endif + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// IMPLEMENTATION SECTION +// + +#ifdef STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION +#ifndef STBRP_SORT +#include +#define STBRP_SORT qsort +#endif + +#ifndef STBRP_ASSERT +#include +#define STBRP_ASSERT assert +#endif + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v) (void)(v) +#define STBRP__CDECL __cdecl +#else +#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v) (void)sizeof(v) +#define STBRP__CDECL +#endif + +enum +{ + STBRP__INIT_skyline = 1 +}; + +STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic(stbrp_context *context, int heuristic) +{ + switch (context->init_mode) { + case STBRP__INIT_skyline: + STBRP_ASSERT(heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight || heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight); + context->heuristic = heuristic; + break; + default: + STBRP_ASSERT(0); + } +} + +STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem) +{ + if (allow_out_of_mem) + // if it's ok to run out of memory, then don't bother aligning them; + // this gives better packing, but may fail due to OOM (even though + // the rectangles easily fit). @TODO a smarter approach would be to only + // quantize once we've hit OOM, then we could get rid of this parameter. + context->align = 1; + else { + // if it's not ok to run out of memory, then quantize the widths + // so that num_nodes is always enough nodes. + // + // I.e. num_nodes * align >= width + // align >= width / num_nodes + // align = ceil(width/num_nodes) + + context->align = (context->width + context->num_nodes-1) / context->num_nodes; + } +} + +STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes) +{ + int i; + + for (i=0; i < num_nodes-1; ++i) + nodes[i].next = &nodes[i+1]; + nodes[i].next = NULL; + context->init_mode = STBRP__INIT_skyline; + context->heuristic = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default; + context->free_head = &nodes[0]; + context->active_head = &context->extra[0]; + context->width = width; + context->height = height; + context->num_nodes = num_nodes; + stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(context, 0); + + // node 0 is the full width, node 1 is the sentinel (lets us not store width explicitly) + context->extra[0].x = 0; + context->extra[0].y = 0; + context->extra[0].next = &context->extra[1]; + context->extra[1].x = (stbrp_coord) width; + context->extra[1].y = (1<<30); + context->extra[1].next = NULL; +} + +// find minimum y position if it starts at x1 +static int stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(stbrp_context *c, stbrp_node *first, int x0, int width, int *pwaste) +{ + stbrp_node *node = first; + int x1 = x0 + width; + int min_y, visited_width, waste_area; + + STBRP__NOTUSED(c); + + STBRP_ASSERT(first->x <= x0); + + #if 0 + // skip in case we're past the node + while (node->next->x <= x0) + ++node; + #else + STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > x0); // we ended up handling this in the caller for efficiency + #endif + + STBRP_ASSERT(node->x <= x0); + + min_y = 0; + waste_area = 0; + visited_width = 0; + while (node->x < x1) { + if (node->y > min_y) { + // raise min_y higher. + // we've accounted for all waste up to min_y, + // but we'll now add more waste for everything we've visted + waste_area += visited_width * (node->y - min_y); + min_y = node->y; + // the first time through, visited_width might be reduced + if (node->x < x0) + visited_width += node->next->x - x0; + else + visited_width += node->next->x - node->x; + } else { + // add waste area + int under_width = node->next->x - node->x; + if (under_width + visited_width > width) + under_width = width - visited_width; + waste_area += under_width * (min_y - node->y); + visited_width += under_width; + } + node = node->next; + } + + *pwaste = waste_area; + return min_y; +} + +typedef struct +{ + int x,y; + stbrp_node **prev_link; +} stbrp__findresult; + +static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(stbrp_context *c, int width, int height) +{ + int best_waste = (1<<30), best_x, best_y = (1 << 30); + stbrp__findresult fr; + stbrp_node **prev, *node, *tail, **best = NULL; + + // align to multiple of c->align + width = (width + c->align - 1); + width -= width % c->align; + STBRP_ASSERT(width % c->align == 0); + + // if it can't possibly fit, bail immediately + if (width > c->width || height > c->height) { + fr.prev_link = NULL; + fr.x = fr.y = 0; + return fr; + } + + node = c->active_head; + prev = &c->active_head; + while (node->x + width <= c->width) { + int y,waste; + y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, node->x, width, &waste); + if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight) { // actually just want to test BL + // bottom left + if (y < best_y) { + best_y = y; + best = prev; + } + } else { + // best-fit + if (y + height <= c->height) { + // can only use it if it first vertically + if (y < best_y || (y == best_y && waste < best_waste)) { + best_y = y; + best_waste = waste; + best = prev; + } + } + } + prev = &node->next; + node = node->next; + } + + best_x = (best == NULL) ? 0 : (*best)->x; + + // if doing best-fit (BF), we also have to try aligning right edge to each node position + // + // e.g, if fitting + // + // ____________________ + // |____________________| + // + // into + // + // | | + // | ____________| + // |____________| + // + // then right-aligned reduces waste, but bottom-left BL is always chooses left-aligned + // + // This makes BF take about 2x the time + + if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight) { + tail = c->active_head; + node = c->active_head; + prev = &c->active_head; + // find first node that's admissible + while (tail->x < width) + tail = tail->next; + while (tail) { + int xpos = tail->x - width; + int y,waste; + STBRP_ASSERT(xpos >= 0); + // find the left position that matches this + while (node->next->x <= xpos) { + prev = &node->next; + node = node->next; + } + STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > xpos && node->x <= xpos); + y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, xpos, width, &waste); + if (y + height <= c->height) { + if (y <= best_y) { + if (y < best_y || waste < best_waste || (waste==best_waste && xpos < best_x)) { + best_x = xpos; + //STBRP_ASSERT(y <= best_y); [DEAR IMGUI] + best_y = y; + best_waste = waste; + best = prev; + } + } + } + tail = tail->next; + } + } + + fr.prev_link = best; + fr.x = best_x; + fr.y = best_y; + return fr; +} + +static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height) +{ + // find best position according to heuristic + stbrp__findresult res = stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(context, width, height); + stbrp_node *node, *cur; + + // bail if: + // 1. it failed + // 2. the best node doesn't fit (we don't always check this) + // 3. we're out of memory + if (res.prev_link == NULL || res.y + height > context->height || context->free_head == NULL) { + res.prev_link = NULL; + return res; + } + + // on success, create new node + node = context->free_head; + node->x = (stbrp_coord) res.x; + node->y = (stbrp_coord) (res.y + height); + + context->free_head = node->next; + + // insert the new node into the right starting point, and + // let 'cur' point to the remaining nodes needing to be + // stiched back in + + cur = *res.prev_link; + if (cur->x < res.x) { + // preserve the existing one, so start testing with the next one + stbrp_node *next = cur->next; + cur->next = node; + cur = next; + } else { + *res.prev_link = node; + } + + // from here, traverse cur and free the nodes, until we get to one + // that shouldn't be freed + while (cur->next && cur->next->x <= res.x + width) { + stbrp_node *next = cur->next; + // move the current node to the free list + cur->next = context->free_head; + context->free_head = cur; + cur = next; + } + + // stitch the list back in + node->next = cur; + + if (cur->x < res.x + width) + cur->x = (stbrp_coord) (res.x + width); + +#ifdef _DEBUG + cur = context->active_head; + while (cur->x < context->width) { + STBRP_ASSERT(cur->x < cur->next->x); + cur = cur->next; + } + STBRP_ASSERT(cur->next == NULL); + + { + int count=0; + cur = context->active_head; + while (cur) { + cur = cur->next; + ++count; + } + cur = context->free_head; + while (cur) { + cur = cur->next; + ++count; + } + STBRP_ASSERT(count == context->num_nodes+2); + } +#endif + + return res; +} + +static int STBRP__CDECL rect_height_compare(const void *a, const void *b) +{ + const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a; + const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b; + if (p->h > q->h) + return -1; + if (p->h < q->h) + return 1; + return (p->w > q->w) ? -1 : (p->w < q->w); +} + +static int STBRP__CDECL rect_original_order(const void *a, const void *b) +{ + const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a; + const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b; + return (p->was_packed < q->was_packed) ? -1 : (p->was_packed > q->was_packed); +} + +STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects) +{ + int i, all_rects_packed = 1; + + // we use the 'was_packed' field internally to allow sorting/unsorting + for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) { + rects[i].was_packed = i; + } + + // sort according to heuristic + STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_height_compare); + + for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) { + if (rects[i].w == 0 || rects[i].h == 0) { + rects[i].x = rects[i].y = 0; // empty rect needs no space + } else { + stbrp__findresult fr = stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(context, rects[i].w, rects[i].h); + if (fr.prev_link) { + rects[i].x = (stbrp_coord) fr.x; + rects[i].y = (stbrp_coord) fr.y; + } else { + rects[i].x = rects[i].y = STBRP__MAXVAL; + } + } + } + + // unsort + STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_original_order); + + // set was_packed flags and all_rects_packed status + for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) { + rects[i].was_packed = !(rects[i].x == STBRP__MAXVAL && rects[i].y == STBRP__MAXVAL); + if (!rects[i].was_packed) + all_rects_packed = 0; + } + + // return the all_rects_packed status + return all_rects_packed; +} +#endif + +/* +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License +Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett +Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of +this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in +the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to +use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies +of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do +so, subject to the following conditions: +The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all +copies or substantial portions of the Software. +THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER +LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, +OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE +SOFTWARE. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org) +This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain. +Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this +software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose, +commercial or non-commercial, and by any means. +In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this +software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public +domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to +the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an +overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to +this software under copyright law. +THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN +ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION +WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +*/ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_textedit.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_textedit.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8a8231 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_textedit.h @@ -0,0 +1,1437 @@ +// [DEAR IMGUI] +// This is a slightly modified version of stb_textedit.h 1.14. +// Those changes would need to be pushed into nothings/stb: +// - Fix in stb_textedit_discard_redo (see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/321) +// - Fix in stb_textedit_find_charpos to handle last line (see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/6000) +// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes. + +// stb_textedit.h - v1.14 - public domain - Sean Barrett +// Development of this library was sponsored by RAD Game Tools +// +// This C header file implements the guts of a multi-line text-editing +// widget; you implement display, word-wrapping, and low-level string +// insertion/deletion, and stb_textedit will map user inputs into +// insertions & deletions, plus updates to the cursor position, +// selection state, and undo state. +// +// It is intended for use in games and other systems that need to build +// their own custom widgets and which do not have heavy text-editing +// requirements (this library is not recommended for use for editing large +// texts, as its performance does not scale and it has limited undo). +// +// Non-trivial behaviors are modelled after Windows text controls. +// +// +// LICENSE +// +// See end of file for license information. +// +// +// DEPENDENCIES +// +// Uses the C runtime function 'memmove', which you can override +// by defining STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove before the implementation. +// Uses no other functions. Performs no runtime allocations. +// +// +// VERSION HISTORY +// +// 1.14 (2021-07-11) page up/down, various fixes +// 1.13 (2019-02-07) fix bug in undo size management +// 1.12 (2018-01-29) user can change STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE, fix redo to avoid crash +// 1.11 (2017-03-03) fix HOME on last line, dragging off single-line textfield +// 1.10 (2016-10-25) supress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual +// 1.9 (2016-08-27) customizable move-by-word +// 1.8 (2016-04-02) better keyboard handling when mouse button is down +// 1.7 (2015-09-13) change y range handling in case baseline is non-0 +// 1.6 (2015-04-15) allow STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove +// 1.5 (2014-09-10) add support for secondary keys for OS X +// 1.4 (2014-08-17) fix signed/unsigned warnings +// 1.3 (2014-06-19) fix mouse clicking to round to nearest char boundary +// 1.2 (2014-05-27) fix some RAD types that had crept into the new code +// 1.1 (2013-12-15) move-by-word (requires STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE ) +// 1.0 (2012-07-26) improve documentation, initial public release +// 0.3 (2012-02-24) bugfixes, single-line mode; insert mode +// 0.2 (2011-11-28) fixes to undo/redo +// 0.1 (2010-07-08) initial version +// +// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS +// +// Ulf Winklemann: move-by-word in 1.1 +// Fabian Giesen: secondary key inputs in 1.5 +// Martins Mozeiko: STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove in 1.6 +// Louis Schnellbach: page up/down in 1.14 +// +// Bugfixes: +// Scott Graham +// Daniel Keller +// Omar Cornut +// Dan Thompson +// +// USAGE +// +// This file behaves differently depending on what symbols you define +// before including it. +// +// +// Header-file mode: +// +// If you do not define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this, +// it will operate in "header file" mode. In this mode, it declares a +// single public symbol, STB_TexteditState, which encapsulates the current +// state of a text widget (except for the string, which you will store +// separately). +// +// To compile in this mode, you must define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE to a +// primitive type that defines a single character (e.g. char, wchar_t, etc). +// +// To save space or increase undo-ability, you can optionally define the +// following things that are used by the undo system: +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE small int type encoding a valid cursor position +// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT the number of undo states to allow +// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT the number of characters to store in the undo buffer +// +// If you don't define these, they are set to permissive types and +// moderate sizes. The undo system does no memory allocations, so +// it grows STB_TexteditState by the worst-case storage which is (in bytes): +// +// [4 + 3 * sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE)] * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT +// + sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE) * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT +// +// +// Implementation mode: +// +// If you define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this, it +// will compile the implementation of the text edit widget, depending +// on a large number of symbols which must be defined before the include. +// +// The implementation is defined only as static functions. You will then +// need to provide your own APIs in the same file which will access the +// static functions. +// +// The basic concept is that you provide a "string" object which +// behaves like an array of characters. stb_textedit uses indices to +// refer to positions in the string, implicitly representing positions +// in the displayed textedit. This is true for both plain text and +// rich text; even with rich text stb_truetype interacts with your +// code as if there was an array of all the displayed characters. +// +// Symbols that must be the same in header-file and implementation mode: +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE the character type +// STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE small type that is a valid cursor position +// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT the number of undo states to allow +// STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT the number of characters to store in the undo buffer +// +// Symbols you must define for implementation mode: +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING the type of object representing a string being edited, +// typically this is a wrapper object with other data you need +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(obj) the length of the string (ideally O(1)) +// STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r,obj,n) returns the results of laying out a line of characters +// starting from character #n (see discussion below) +// STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(obj,n,i) returns the pixel delta from the xpos of the i'th character +// to the xpos of the i+1'th char for a line of characters +// starting at character #n (i.e. accounts for kerning +// with previous char) +// STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(k) maps a keyboard input to an insertable character +// (return type is int, -1 means not valid to insert) +// STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(obj,i) returns the i'th character of obj, 0-based +// STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE the character returned by _GETCHAR() we recognize +// as manually wordwrapping for end-of-line positioning +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(obj,i,n) delete n characters starting at i +// STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(obj,i,c*,n) insert n characters at i (pointed to by STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE*) +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT a power of two that is or'd in to a keyboard input to represent the shift key +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT keyboard input to move cursor left +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT keyboard input to move cursor right +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP keyboard input to move cursor up +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN keyboard input to move cursor down +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP keyboard input to move cursor up a page +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN keyboard input to move cursor down a page +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART keyboard input to move cursor to start of line // e.g. HOME +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND keyboard input to move cursor to end of line // e.g. END +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART keyboard input to move cursor to start of text // e.g. ctrl-HOME +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND keyboard input to move cursor to end of text // e.g. ctrl-END +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO keyboard input to perform undo +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO keyboard input to perform redo +// +// Optional: +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT keyboard input to toggle insert mode +// STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE(ch) true if character is whitespace (e.g. 'isspace'), +// required for default WORDLEFT/WORDRIGHT handlers +// STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(obj,i) custom handler for WORDLEFT, returns index to move cursor to +// STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(obj,i) custom handler for WORDRIGHT, returns index to move cursor to +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT keyboard input to move cursor left one word // e.g. ctrl-LEFT +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT keyboard input to move cursor right one word // e.g. ctrl-RIGHT +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of line +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of line +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of text +// STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of text +// +// Keyboard input must be encoded as a single integer value; e.g. a character code +// and some bitflags that represent shift states. to simplify the interface, SHIFT must +// be a bitflag, so we can test the shifted state of cursor movements to allow selection, +// i.e. (STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) should be shifted right-arrow. +// +// You can encode other things, such as CONTROL or ALT, in additional bits, and +// then test for their presence in e.g. STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT. For example, +// my Windows implementations add an additional CONTROL bit, and an additional KEYDOWN +// bit. Then all of the STB_TEXTEDIT_K_ values bitwise-or in the KEYDOWN bit, +// and I pass both WM_KEYDOWN and WM_CHAR events to the "key" function in the +// API below. The control keys will only match WM_KEYDOWN events because of the +// keydown bit I add, and STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT only tests for the KEYDOWN +// bit so it only decodes WM_CHAR events. +// +// STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW returns information about the shape of one displayed +// row of characters assuming they start on the i'th character--the width and +// the height and the number of characters consumed. This allows this library +// to traverse the entire layout incrementally. You need to compute word-wrapping +// here. +// +// Each textfield keeps its own insert mode state, which is not how normal +// applications work. To keep an app-wide insert mode, update/copy the +// "insert_mode" field of STB_TexteditState before/after calling API functions. +// +// API +// +// void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line) +// +// void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y) +// void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y) +// int stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state) +// int stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len) +// void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXEDIT_KEYTYPE key) +// +// Each of these functions potentially updates the string and updates the +// state. +// +// initialize_state: +// set the textedit state to a known good default state when initially +// constructing the textedit. +// +// click: +// call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse down; it will update the cursor +// and reset the selection start/end to the cursor point. the x,y must +// be relative to the text widget, with (0,0) being the top left. +// +// drag: +// call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse drag/up; it will update the +// cursor and the selection end point +// +// cut: +// call this to delete the current selection; returns true if there was +// one. you should FIRST copy the current selection to the system paste buffer. +// (To copy, just copy the current selection out of the string yourself.) +// +// paste: +// call this to paste text at the current cursor point or over the current +// selection if there is one. +// +// key: +// call this for keyboard inputs sent to the textfield. you can use it +// for "key down" events or for "translated" key events. if you need to +// do both (as in Win32), or distinguish Unicode characters from control +// inputs, set a high bit to distinguish the two; then you can define the +// various definitions like STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT have the is-key-event bit +// set, and make STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOCHAR check that the is-key-event bit is +// clear. STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE defaults to int, but you can #define it to +// anything other type you wante before including. +// +// +// When rendering, you can read the cursor position and selection state from +// the STB_TexteditState. +// +// +// Notes: +// +// This is designed to be usable in IMGUI, so it allows for the possibility of +// running in an IMGUI that has NOT cached the multi-line layout. For this +// reason, it provides an interface that is compatible with computing the +// layout incrementally--we try to make sure we make as few passes through +// as possible. (For example, to locate the mouse pointer in the text, we +// could define functions that return the X and Y positions of characters +// and binary search Y and then X, but if we're doing dynamic layout this +// will run the layout algorithm many times, so instead we manually search +// forward in one pass. Similar logic applies to e.g. up-arrow and +// down-arrow movement.) +// +// If it's run in a widget that *has* cached the layout, then this is less +// efficient, but it's not horrible on modern computers. But you wouldn't +// want to edit million-line files with it. + + +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +//// +//// Header-file mode +//// +//// + +#ifndef INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H +#define INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H + +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// STB_TexteditState +// +// Definition of STB_TexteditState which you should store +// per-textfield; it includes cursor position, selection state, +// and undo state. +// + +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT 99 +#endif +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT 999 +#endif +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE int +#endif +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE int +#endif + +typedef struct +{ + // private data + STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE where; + STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE insert_length; + STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE delete_length; + int char_storage; +} StbUndoRecord; + +typedef struct +{ + // private data + StbUndoRecord undo_rec [STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT]; + STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE undo_char[STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT]; + short undo_point, redo_point; + int undo_char_point, redo_char_point; +} StbUndoState; + +typedef struct +{ + ///////////////////// + // + // public data + // + + int cursor; + // position of the text cursor within the string + + int select_start; // selection start point + int select_end; + // selection start and end point in characters; if equal, no selection. + // note that start may be less than or greater than end (e.g. when + // dragging the mouse, start is where the initial click was, and you + // can drag in either direction) + + unsigned char insert_mode; + // each textfield keeps its own insert mode state. to keep an app-wide + // insert mode, copy this value in/out of the app state + + int row_count_per_page; + // page size in number of row. + // this value MUST be set to >0 for pageup or pagedown in multilines documents. + + ///////////////////// + // + // private data + // + unsigned char cursor_at_end_of_line; // not implemented yet + unsigned char initialized; + unsigned char has_preferred_x; + unsigned char single_line; + unsigned char padding1, padding2, padding3; + float preferred_x; // this determines where the cursor up/down tries to seek to along x + StbUndoState undostate; +} STB_TexteditState; + + +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// StbTexteditRow +// +// Result of layout query, used by stb_textedit to determine where +// the text in each row is. + +// result of layout query +typedef struct +{ + float x0,x1; // starting x location, end x location (allows for align=right, etc) + float baseline_y_delta; // position of baseline relative to previous row's baseline + float ymin,ymax; // height of row above and below baseline + int num_chars; +} StbTexteditRow; +#endif //INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H + + +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +//// +//// Implementation mode +//// +//// + + +// implementation isn't include-guarded, since it might have indirectly +// included just the "header" portion +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION + +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove +#include +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove memmove +#endif + + +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Mouse input handling +// + +// traverse the layout to locate the nearest character to a display position +static int stb_text_locate_coord(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, float x, float y) +{ + StbTexteditRow r; + int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + float base_y = 0, prev_x; + int i=0, k; + + r.x0 = r.x1 = 0; + r.ymin = r.ymax = 0; + r.num_chars = 0; + + // search rows to find one that straddles 'y' + while (i < n) { + STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i); + if (r.num_chars <= 0) + return n; + + if (i==0 && y < base_y + r.ymin) + return 0; + + if (y < base_y + r.ymax) + break; + + i += r.num_chars; + base_y += r.baseline_y_delta; + } + + // below all text, return 'after' last character + if (i >= n) + return n; + + // check if it's before the beginning of the line + if (x < r.x0) + return i; + + // check if it's before the end of the line + if (x < r.x1) { + // search characters in row for one that straddles 'x' + prev_x = r.x0; + for (k=0; k < r.num_chars; ++k) { + float w = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, i, k); + if (x < prev_x+w) { + if (x < prev_x+w/2) + return k+i; + else + return k+i+1; + } + prev_x += w; + } + // shouldn't happen, but if it does, fall through to end-of-line case + } + + // if the last character is a newline, return that. otherwise return 'after' the last character + if (STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, i+r.num_chars-1) == STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) + return i+r.num_chars-1; + else + return i+r.num_chars; +} + +// API click: on mouse down, move the cursor to the clicked location, and reset the selection +static void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y) +{ + // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse + // goes off the top or bottom of the text + if( state->single_line ) + { + StbTexteditRow r; + STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0); + y = r.ymin; + } + + state->cursor = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y); + state->select_start = state->cursor; + state->select_end = state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; +} + +// API drag: on mouse drag, move the cursor and selection endpoint to the clicked location +static void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y) +{ + int p = 0; + + // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse + // goes off the top or bottom of the text + if( state->single_line ) + { + StbTexteditRow r; + STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0); + y = r.ymin; + } + + if (state->select_start == state->select_end) + state->select_start = state->cursor; + + p = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y); + state->cursor = state->select_end = p; +} + +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Keyboard input handling +// + +// forward declarations +static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state); +static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state); +static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length); +static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length); +static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length); + +typedef struct +{ + float x,y; // position of n'th character + float height; // height of line + int first_char, length; // first char of row, and length + int prev_first; // first char of previous row +} StbFindState; + +// find the x/y location of a character, and remember info about the previous row in +// case we get a move-up event (for page up, we'll have to rescan) +static void stb_textedit_find_charpos(StbFindState *find, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int n, int single_line) +{ + StbTexteditRow r; + int prev_start = 0; + int z = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + int i=0, first; + + if (n == z && single_line) { + // special case if it's at the end (may not be needed?) + STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0); + find->y = 0; + find->first_char = 0; + find->length = z; + find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin; + find->x = r.x1; + return; + } + + // search rows to find the one that straddles character n + find->y = 0; + + for(;;) { + STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i); + if (n < i + r.num_chars) + break; + if (i + r.num_chars == z && z > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, z - 1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) // [DEAR IMGUI] special handling for last line + break; // [DEAR IMGUI] + prev_start = i; + i += r.num_chars; + find->y += r.baseline_y_delta; + if (i == z) // [DEAR IMGUI] + break; // [DEAR IMGUI] + } + + find->first_char = first = i; + find->length = r.num_chars; + find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin; + find->prev_first = prev_start; + + // now scan to find xpos + find->x = r.x0; + for (i=0; first+i < n; ++i) + find->x += STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, first, i); +} + +#define STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(s) ((s)->select_start != (s)->select_end) + +// make the selection/cursor state valid if client altered the string +static void stb_textedit_clamp(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) { + if (state->select_start > n) state->select_start = n; + if (state->select_end > n) state->select_end = n; + // if clamping forced them to be equal, move the cursor to match + if (state->select_start == state->select_end) + state->cursor = state->select_start; + } + if (state->cursor > n) state->cursor = n; +} + +// delete characters while updating undo +static void stb_textedit_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int len) +{ + stb_text_makeundo_delete(str, state, where, len); + STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, where, len); + state->has_preferred_x = 0; +} + +// delete the section +static void stb_textedit_delete_selection(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) { + if (state->select_start < state->select_end) { + stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_start, state->select_end - state->select_start); + state->select_end = state->cursor = state->select_start; + } else { + stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_end, state->select_start - state->select_end); + state->select_start = state->cursor = state->select_end; + } + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + } +} + +// canoncialize the selection so start <= end +static void stb_textedit_sortselection(STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + if (state->select_end < state->select_start) { + int temp = state->select_end; + state->select_end = state->select_start; + state->select_start = temp; + } +} + +// move cursor to first character of selection +static void stb_textedit_move_to_first(STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) { + stb_textedit_sortselection(state); + state->cursor = state->select_start; + state->select_end = state->select_start; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + } +} + +// move cursor to last character of selection +static void stb_textedit_move_to_last(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) { + stb_textedit_sortselection(state); + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + state->cursor = state->select_end; + state->select_start = state->select_end; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + } +} + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE +static int is_word_boundary( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int idx ) +{ + return idx > 0 ? (STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str,idx-1) ) && !STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, idx) ) ) : 1; +} + +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT +static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c ) +{ + --c; // always move at least one character + while( c >= 0 && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) ) + --c; + + if( c < 0 ) + c = 0; + + return c; +} +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous +#endif + +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT +static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_next( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c ) +{ + const int len = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + ++c; // always move at least one character + while( c < len && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) ) + ++c; + + if( c > len ) + c = len; + + return c; +} +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT stb_textedit_move_to_word_next +#endif + +#endif + +// update selection and cursor to match each other +static void stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + if (!STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + state->select_start = state->select_end = state->cursor; + else + state->cursor = state->select_end; +} + +// API cut: delete selection +static int stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) { + stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicitly clamps + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + return 1; + } + return 0; +} + +// API paste: replace existing selection with passed-in text +static int stb_textedit_paste_internal(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len) +{ + // if there's a selection, the paste should delete it + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); + // try to insert the characters + if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, text, len)) { + stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, len); + state->cursor += len; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + return 1; + } + // note: paste failure will leave deleted selection, may be restored with an undo (see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/734 for details) + return 0; +} + +#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE +#define STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE int +#endif + +// API key: process a keyboard input +static void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE key) +{ +retry: + switch (key) { + default: { + int c = STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(key); + if (c > 0) { + STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE ch = (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE) c; + + // can't add newline in single-line mode + if (c == '\n' && state->single_line) + break; + + if (state->insert_mode && !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state) && state->cursor < STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str)) { + stb_text_makeundo_replace(str, state, state->cursor, 1, 1); + STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, state->cursor, 1); + if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) { + ++state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + } + } else { + stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicitly clamps + if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) { + stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, 1); + ++state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + } + } + } + break; + } + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT: + state->insert_mode = !state->insert_mode; + break; +#endif + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO: + stb_text_undo(str, state); + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO: + stb_text_redo(str, state); + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT: + // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to start of selection + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_move_to_first(state); + else + if (state->cursor > 0) + --state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT: + // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to end of selection + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state); + else + ++state->cursor; + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + // move selection left + if (state->select_end > 0) + --state->select_end; + state->cursor = state->select_end; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT: + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_move_to_first(state); + else { + state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor); + stb_textedit_clamp( str, state ); + } + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) ) + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + + state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor); + state->select_end = state->cursor; + + stb_textedit_clamp( str, state ); + break; +#endif + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT: + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state); + else { + state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor); + stb_textedit_clamp( str, state ); + } + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) ) + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + + state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor); + state->select_end = state->cursor; + + stb_textedit_clamp( str, state ); + break; +#endif + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + // move selection right + ++state->select_end; + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + state->cursor = state->select_end; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: { + StbFindState find; + StbTexteditRow row; + int i, j, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0; + int is_page = (key & ~STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) == STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN; + int row_count = is_page ? state->row_count_per_page : 1; + + if (!is_page && state->single_line) { + // on windows, up&down in single-line behave like left&right + key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + goto retry; + } + + if (sel) + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state); + + // compute current position of cursor point + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line); + + for (j = 0; j < row_count; ++j) { + float x, goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x; + int start = find.first_char + find.length; + + if (find.length == 0) + break; + + // [DEAR IMGUI] + // going down while being on the last line shouldn't bring us to that line end + if (STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, find.first_char + find.length - 1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) + break; + + // now find character position down a row + state->cursor = start; + STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor); + x = row.x0; + for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) { + float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, start, i); + #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE + if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE) + break; + #endif + x += dx; + if (x > goal_x) + break; + ++state->cursor; + } + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + + state->has_preferred_x = 1; + state->preferred_x = goal_x; + + if (sel) + state->select_end = state->cursor; + + // go to next line + find.first_char = find.first_char + find.length; + find.length = row.num_chars; + } + break; + } + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: { + StbFindState find; + StbTexteditRow row; + int i, j, prev_scan, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0; + int is_page = (key & ~STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) == STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP; + int row_count = is_page ? state->row_count_per_page : 1; + + if (!is_page && state->single_line) { + // on windows, up&down become left&right + key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT); + goto retry; + } + + if (sel) + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_move_to_first(state); + + // compute current position of cursor point + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line); + + for (j = 0; j < row_count; ++j) { + float x, goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x; + + // can only go up if there's a previous row + if (find.prev_first == find.first_char) + break; + + // now find character position up a row + state->cursor = find.prev_first; + STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor); + x = row.x0; + for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) { + float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, find.prev_first, i); + #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE + if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE) + break; + #endif + x += dx; + if (x > goal_x) + break; + ++state->cursor; + } + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + + state->has_preferred_x = 1; + state->preferred_x = goal_x; + + if (sel) + state->select_end = state->cursor; + + // go to previous line + // (we need to scan previous line the hard way. maybe we could expose this as a new API function?) + prev_scan = find.prev_first > 0 ? find.prev_first - 1 : 0; + while (prev_scan > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, prev_scan - 1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) + --prev_scan; + find.first_char = find.prev_first; + find.prev_first = prev_scan; + } + break; + } + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state); + else { + int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + if (state->cursor < n) + stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor, 1); + } + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE: + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) + stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state); + else { + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + if (state->cursor > 0) { + stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor-1, 1); + --state->cursor; + } + } + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART: + state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = 0; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND: + state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + state->select_start = state->select_end = 0; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + state->cursor = state->select_end = 0; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + state->cursor = state->select_end = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART: + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_move_to_first(state); + if (state->single_line) + state->cursor = 0; + else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) + --state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND: { + int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_move_to_first(state); + if (state->single_line) + state->cursor = n; + else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) + ++state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + } + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + if (state->single_line) + state->cursor = 0; + else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) + --state->cursor; + state->select_end = state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + +#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: +#endif + case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: { + int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str); + stb_textedit_clamp(str, state); + stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state); + if (state->single_line) + state->cursor = n; + else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE) + ++state->cursor; + state->select_end = state->cursor; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + break; + } + } +} + +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Undo processing +// +// @OPTIMIZE: the undo/redo buffer should be circular + +static void stb_textedit_flush_redo(StbUndoState *state) +{ + state->redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT; + state->redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT; +} + +// discard the oldest entry in the undo list +static void stb_textedit_discard_undo(StbUndoState *state) +{ + if (state->undo_point > 0) { + // if the 0th undo state has characters, clean those up + if (state->undo_rec[0].char_storage >= 0) { + int n = state->undo_rec[0].insert_length, i; + // delete n characters from all other records + state->undo_char_point -= n; + STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char, state->undo_char + n, (size_t) (state->undo_char_point*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE))); + for (i=0; i < state->undo_point; ++i) + if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0) + state->undo_rec[i].char_storage -= n; // @OPTIMIZE: get rid of char_storage and infer it + } + --state->undo_point; + STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec, state->undo_rec+1, (size_t) (state->undo_point*sizeof(state->undo_rec[0]))); + } +} + +// discard the oldest entry in the redo list--it's bad if this +// ever happens, but because undo & redo have to store the actual +// characters in different cases, the redo character buffer can +// fill up even though the undo buffer didn't +static void stb_textedit_discard_redo(StbUndoState *state) +{ + int k = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT-1; + + if (state->redo_point <= k) { + // if the k'th undo state has characters, clean those up + if (state->undo_rec[k].char_storage >= 0) { + int n = state->undo_rec[k].insert_length, i; + // move the remaining redo character data to the end of the buffer + state->redo_char_point += n; + STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point, state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point-n, (size_t) ((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT - state->redo_char_point)*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE))); + // adjust the position of all the other records to account for above memmove + for (i=state->redo_point; i < k; ++i) + if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0) + state->undo_rec[i].char_storage += n; + } + // now move all the redo records towards the end of the buffer; the first one is at 'redo_point' + // [DEAR IMGUI] + size_t move_size = (size_t)((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT - state->redo_point - 1) * sizeof(state->undo_rec[0])); + const char* buf_begin = (char*)state->undo_rec; (void)buf_begin; + const char* buf_end = (char*)state->undo_rec + sizeof(state->undo_rec); (void)buf_end; + IM_ASSERT(((char*)(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point)) >= buf_begin); + IM_ASSERT(((char*)(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point + 1) + move_size) <= buf_end); + STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point+1, state->undo_rec + state->redo_point, move_size); + + // now move redo_point to point to the new one + ++state->redo_point; + } +} + +static StbUndoRecord *stb_text_create_undo_record(StbUndoState *state, int numchars) +{ + // any time we create a new undo record, we discard redo + stb_textedit_flush_redo(state); + + // if we have no free records, we have to make room, by sliding the + // existing records down + if (state->undo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT) + stb_textedit_discard_undo(state); + + // if the characters to store won't possibly fit in the buffer, we can't undo + if (numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) { + state->undo_point = 0; + state->undo_char_point = 0; + return NULL; + } + + // if we don't have enough free characters in the buffer, we have to make room + while (state->undo_char_point + numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) + stb_textedit_discard_undo(state); + + return &state->undo_rec[state->undo_point++]; +} + +static STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *stb_text_createundo(StbUndoState *state, int pos, int insert_len, int delete_len) +{ + StbUndoRecord *r = stb_text_create_undo_record(state, insert_len); + if (r == NULL) + return NULL; + + r->where = pos; + r->insert_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) insert_len; + r->delete_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) delete_len; + + if (insert_len == 0) { + r->char_storage = -1; + return NULL; + } else { + r->char_storage = state->undo_char_point; + state->undo_char_point += insert_len; + return &state->undo_char[r->char_storage]; + } +} + +static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate; + StbUndoRecord u, *r; + if (s->undo_point == 0) + return; + + // we need to do two things: apply the undo record, and create a redo record + u = s->undo_rec[s->undo_point-1]; + r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1]; + r->char_storage = -1; + + r->insert_length = u.delete_length; + r->delete_length = u.insert_length; + r->where = u.where; + + if (u.delete_length) { + // if the undo record says to delete characters, then the redo record will + // need to re-insert the characters that get deleted, so we need to store + // them. + + // there are three cases: + // there's enough room to store the characters + // characters stored for *redoing* don't leave room for redo + // characters stored for *undoing* don't leave room for redo + // if the last is true, we have to bail + + if (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length >= STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) { + // the undo records take up too much character space; there's no space to store the redo characters + r->insert_length = 0; + } else { + int i; + + // there's definitely room to store the characters eventually + while (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length > s->redo_char_point) { + // should never happen: + if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT) + return; + // there's currently not enough room, so discard a redo record + stb_textedit_discard_redo(s); + } + r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1]; + + r->char_storage = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length; + s->redo_char_point = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length; + + // now save the characters + for (i=0; i < u.delete_length; ++i) + s->undo_char[r->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u.where + i); + } + + // now we can carry out the deletion + STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, u.where, u.delete_length); + } + + // check type of recorded action: + if (u.insert_length) { + // easy case: was a deletion, so we need to insert n characters + STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, u.where, &s->undo_char[u.char_storage], u.insert_length); + s->undo_char_point -= u.insert_length; + } + + state->cursor = u.where + u.insert_length; + + s->undo_point--; + s->redo_point--; +} + +static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state) +{ + StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate; + StbUndoRecord *u, r; + if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT) + return; + + // we need to do two things: apply the redo record, and create an undo record + u = &s->undo_rec[s->undo_point]; + r = s->undo_rec[s->redo_point]; + + // we KNOW there must be room for the undo record, because the redo record + // was derived from an undo record + + u->delete_length = r.insert_length; + u->insert_length = r.delete_length; + u->where = r.where; + u->char_storage = -1; + + if (r.delete_length) { + // the redo record requires us to delete characters, so the undo record + // needs to store the characters + + if (s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length > s->redo_char_point) { + u->insert_length = 0; + u->delete_length = 0; + } else { + int i; + u->char_storage = s->undo_char_point; + s->undo_char_point = s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length; + + // now save the characters + for (i=0; i < u->insert_length; ++i) + s->undo_char[u->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u->where + i); + } + + STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, r.where, r.delete_length); + } + + if (r.insert_length) { + // easy case: need to insert n characters + STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, r.where, &s->undo_char[r.char_storage], r.insert_length); + s->redo_char_point += r.insert_length; + } + + state->cursor = r.where + r.insert_length; + + s->undo_point++; + s->redo_point++; +} + +static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length) +{ + stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, 0, length); +} + +static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length) +{ + int i; + STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, length, 0); + if (p) { + for (i=0; i < length; ++i) + p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i); + } +} + +static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length) +{ + int i; + STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, old_length, new_length); + if (p) { + for (i=0; i < old_length; ++i) + p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i); + } +} + +// reset the state to default +static void stb_textedit_clear_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line) +{ + state->undostate.undo_point = 0; + state->undostate.undo_char_point = 0; + state->undostate.redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT; + state->undostate.redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT; + state->select_end = state->select_start = 0; + state->cursor = 0; + state->has_preferred_x = 0; + state->preferred_x = 0; + state->cursor_at_end_of_line = 0; + state->initialized = 1; + state->single_line = (unsigned char) is_single_line; + state->insert_mode = 0; + state->row_count_per_page = 0; +} + +// API initialize +static void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line) +{ + stb_textedit_clear_state(state, is_single_line); +} + +#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic push +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual" +#endif + +static int stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE const *ctext, int len) +{ + return stb_textedit_paste_internal(str, state, (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *) ctext, len); +} + +#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic pop +#endif + +#endif//STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION + +/* +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License +Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett +Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of +this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in +the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to +use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies +of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do +so, subject to the following conditions: +The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all +copies or substantial portions of the Software. +THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER +LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, +OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE +SOFTWARE. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org) +This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain. +Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this +software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose, +commercial or non-commercial, and by any means. +In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this +software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public +domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to +the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an +overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to +this software under copyright law. +THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN +ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION +WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +*/ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_truetype.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_truetype.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35c827e --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui/imstb_truetype.h @@ -0,0 +1,5085 @@ +// [DEAR IMGUI] +// This is a slightly modified version of stb_truetype.h 1.26. +// Mostly fixing for compiler and static analyzer warnings. +// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes. + +// stb_truetype.h - v1.26 - public domain +// authored from 2009-2021 by Sean Barrett / RAD Game Tools +// +// ======================================================================= +// +// NO SECURITY GUARANTEE -- DO NOT USE THIS ON UNTRUSTED FONT FILES +// +// This library does no range checking of the offsets found in the file, +// meaning an attacker can use it to read arbitrary memory. +// +// ======================================================================= +// +// This library processes TrueType files: +// parse files +// extract glyph metrics +// extract glyph shapes +// render glyphs to one-channel bitmaps with antialiasing (box filter) +// render glyphs to one-channel SDF bitmaps (signed-distance field/function) +// +// Todo: +// non-MS cmaps +// crashproof on bad data +// hinting? (no longer patented) +// cleartype-style AA? +// optimize: use simple memory allocator for intermediates +// optimize: build edge-list directly from curves +// optimize: rasterize directly from curves? +// +// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS +// +// Mikko Mononen: compound shape support, more cmap formats +// Tor Andersson: kerning, subpixel rendering +// Dougall Johnson: OpenType / Type 2 font handling +// Daniel Ribeiro Maciel: basic GPOS-based kerning +// +// Misc other: +// Ryan Gordon +// Simon Glass +// github:IntellectualKitty +// Imanol Celaya +// Daniel Ribeiro Maciel +// +// Bug/warning reports/fixes: +// "Zer" on mollyrocket Fabian "ryg" Giesen github:NiLuJe +// Cass Everitt Martins Mozeiko github:aloucks +// stoiko (Haemimont Games) Cap Petschulat github:oyvindjam +// Brian Hook Omar Cornut github:vassvik +// Walter van Niftrik Ryan Griege +// David Gow Peter LaValle +// David Given Sergey Popov +// Ivan-Assen Ivanov Giumo X. Clanjor +// Anthony Pesch Higor Euripedes +// Johan Duparc Thomas Fields +// Hou Qiming Derek Vinyard +// Rob Loach Cort Stratton +// Kenney Phillis Jr. Brian Costabile +// Ken Voskuil (kaesve) +// +// VERSION HISTORY +// +// 1.26 (2021-08-28) fix broken rasterizer +// 1.25 (2021-07-11) many fixes +// 1.24 (2020-02-05) fix warning +// 1.23 (2020-02-02) query SVG data for glyphs; query whole kerning table (but only kern not GPOS) +// 1.22 (2019-08-11) minimize missing-glyph duplication; fix kerning if both 'GPOS' and 'kern' are defined +// 1.21 (2019-02-25) fix warning +// 1.20 (2019-02-07) PackFontRange skips missing codepoints; GetScaleFontVMetrics() +// 1.19 (2018-02-11) GPOS kerning, STBTT_fmod +// 1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function +// 1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix +// 1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support +// 1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const +// 1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function +// 1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts +// 1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual +// 1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning +// 1.10 (2016-04-02) user-defined fabs(); rare memory leak; remove duplicate typedef +// 1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use allocation userdata properly +// 1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges +// 1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints; +// variant PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases; +// fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?); +// fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer +// replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer +// +// Full history can be found at the end of this file. +// +// LICENSE +// +// See end of file for license information. +// +// USAGE +// +// Include this file in whatever places need to refer to it. In ONE C/C++ +// file, write: +// #define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION +// before the #include of this file. This expands out the actual +// implementation into that C/C++ file. +// +// To make the implementation private to the file that generates the implementation, +// #define STBTT_STATIC +// +// Simple 3D API (don't ship this, but it's fine for tools and quick start) +// stbtt_BakeFontBitmap() -- bake a font to a bitmap for use as texture +// stbtt_GetBakedQuad() -- compute quad to draw for a given char +// +// Improved 3D API (more shippable): +// #include "stb_rect_pack.h" -- optional, but you really want it +// stbtt_PackBegin() +// stbtt_PackSetOversampling() -- for improved quality on small fonts +// stbtt_PackFontRanges() -- pack and renders +// stbtt_PackEnd() +// stbtt_GetPackedQuad() +// +// "Load" a font file from a memory buffer (you have to keep the buffer loaded) +// stbtt_InitFont() +// stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex() -- indexing for TTC font collections +// stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts() -- number of fonts for TTC font collections +// +// Render a unicode codepoint to a bitmap +// stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap() -- allocates and returns a bitmap +// stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap() -- renders into bitmap you provide +// stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox() -- how big the bitmap must be +// +// Character advance/positioning +// stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics() +// stbtt_GetFontVMetrics() +// stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2() +// stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance() +// +// Starting with version 1.06, the rasterizer was replaced with a new, +// faster and generally-more-precise rasterizer. The new rasterizer more +// accurately measures pixel coverage for anti-aliasing, except in the case +// where multiple shapes overlap, in which case it overestimates the AA pixel +// coverage. Thus, anti-aliasing of intersecting shapes may look wrong. If +// this turns out to be a problem, you can re-enable the old rasterizer with +// #define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 1 +// which will incur about a 15% speed hit. +// +// ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION +// +// Immediately after this block comment are a series of sample programs. +// +// After the sample programs is the "header file" section. This section +// includes documentation for each API function. +// +// Some important concepts to understand to use this library: +// +// Codepoint +// Characters are defined by unicode codepoints, e.g. 65 is +// uppercase A, 231 is lowercase c with a cedilla, 0x7e30 is +// the hiragana for "ma". +// +// Glyph +// A visual character shape (every codepoint is rendered as +// some glyph) +// +// Glyph index +// A font-specific integer ID representing a glyph +// +// Baseline +// Glyph shapes are defined relative to a baseline, which is the +// bottom of uppercase characters. Characters extend both above +// and below the baseline. +// +// Current Point +// As you draw text to the screen, you keep track of a "current point" +// which is the origin of each character. The current point's vertical +// position is the baseline. Even "baked fonts" use this model. +// +// Vertical Font Metrics +// The vertical qualities of the font, used to vertically position +// and space the characters. See docs for stbtt_GetFontVMetrics. +// +// Font Size in Pixels or Points +// The preferred interface for specifying font sizes in stb_truetype +// is to specify how tall the font's vertical extent should be in pixels. +// If that sounds good enough, skip the next paragraph. +// +// Most font APIs instead use "points", which are a common typographic +// measurement for describing font size, defined as 72 points per inch. +// stb_truetype provides a point API for compatibility. However, true +// "per inch" conventions don't make much sense on computer displays +// since different monitors have different number of pixels per +// inch. For example, Windows traditionally uses a convention that +// there are 96 pixels per inch, thus making 'inch' measurements have +// nothing to do with inches, and thus effectively defining a point to +// be 1.333 pixels. Additionally, the TrueType font data provides +// an explicit scale factor to scale a given font's glyphs to points, +// but the author has observed that this scale factor is often wrong +// for non-commercial fonts, thus making fonts scaled in points +// according to the TrueType spec incoherently sized in practice. +// +// DETAILED USAGE: +// +// Scale: +// Select how high you want the font to be, in points or pixels. +// Call ScaleForPixelHeight or ScaleForMappingEmToPixels to compute +// a scale factor SF that will be used by all other functions. +// +// Baseline: +// You need to select a y-coordinate that is the baseline of where +// your text will appear. Call GetFontBoundingBox to get the baseline-relative +// bounding box for all characters. SF*-y0 will be the distance in pixels +// that the worst-case character could extend above the baseline, so if +// you want the top edge of characters to appear at the top of the +// screen where y=0, then you would set the baseline to SF*-y0. +// +// Current point: +// Set the current point where the first character will appear. The +// first character could extend left of the current point; this is font +// dependent. You can either choose a current point that is the leftmost +// point and hope, or add some padding, or check the bounding box or +// left-side-bearing of the first character to be displayed and set +// the current point based on that. +// +// Displaying a character: +// Compute the bounding box of the character. It will contain signed values +// relative to . I.e. if it returns x0,y0,x1,y1, +// then the character should be displayed in the rectangle from +// to = 32 && *text < 128) { + stbtt_aligned_quad q; + stbtt_GetBakedQuad(cdata, 512,512, *text-32, &x,&y,&q,1);//1=opengl & d3d10+,0=d3d9 + glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y0); + glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y0); + glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y1); + glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y1); + } + ++text; + } + glEnd(); +} +#endif +// +// +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Complete program (this compiles): get a single bitmap, print as ASCII art +// +#if 0 +#include +#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION // force following include to generate implementation +#include "stb_truetype.h" + +char ttf_buffer[1<<25]; + +int main(int argc, char **argv) +{ + stbtt_fontinfo font; + unsigned char *bitmap; + int w,h,i,j,c = (argc > 1 ? atoi(argv[1]) : 'a'), s = (argc > 2 ? atoi(argv[2]) : 20); + + fread(ttf_buffer, 1, 1<<25, fopen(argc > 3 ? argv[3] : "c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb")); + + stbtt_InitFont(&font, ttf_buffer, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(ttf_buffer,0)); + bitmap = stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(&font, 0,stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, s), c, &w, &h, 0,0); + + for (j=0; j < h; ++j) { + for (i=0; i < w; ++i) + putchar(" .:ioVM@"[bitmap[j*w+i]>>5]); + putchar('\n'); + } + return 0; +} +#endif +// +// Output: +// +// .ii. +// @@@@@@. +// V@Mio@@o +// :i. V@V +// :oM@@M +// :@@@MM@M +// @@o o@M +// :@@. M@M +// @@@o@@@@ +// :M@@V:@@. +// +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Complete program: print "Hello World!" banner, with bugs +// +#if 0 +char buffer[24<<20]; +unsigned char screen[20][79]; + +int main(int arg, char **argv) +{ + stbtt_fontinfo font; + int i,j,ascent,baseline,ch=0; + float scale, xpos=2; // leave a little padding in case the character extends left + char *text = "Heljo World!"; // intentionally misspelled to show 'lj' brokenness + + fread(buffer, 1, 1000000, fopen("c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb")); + stbtt_InitFont(&font, buffer, 0); + + scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, 15); + stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&font, &ascent,0,0); + baseline = (int) (ascent*scale); + + while (text[ch]) { + int advance,lsb,x0,y0,x1,y1; + float x_shift = xpos - (float) floor(xpos); + stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(&font, text[ch], &advance, &lsb); + stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(&font, text[ch], scale,scale,x_shift,0, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1); + stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(&font, &screen[baseline + y0][(int) xpos + x0], x1-x0,y1-y0, 79, scale,scale,x_shift,0, text[ch]); + // note that this stomps the old data, so where character boxes overlap (e.g. 'lj') it's wrong + // because this API is really for baking character bitmaps into textures. if you want to render + // a sequence of characters, you really need to render each bitmap to a temp buffer, then + // "alpha blend" that into the working buffer + xpos += (advance * scale); + if (text[ch+1]) + xpos += scale*stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(&font, text[ch],text[ch+1]); + ++ch; + } + + for (j=0; j < 20; ++j) { + for (i=0; i < 78; ++i) + putchar(" .:ioVM@"[screen[j][i]>>5]); + putchar('\n'); + } + + return 0; +} +#endif + + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +//// +//// INTEGRATION WITH YOUR CODEBASE +//// +//// The following sections allow you to supply alternate definitions +//// of C library functions used by stb_truetype, e.g. if you don't +//// link with the C runtime library. + +#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION + // #define your own (u)stbtt_int8/16/32 before including to override this + #ifndef stbtt_uint8 + typedef unsigned char stbtt_uint8; + typedef signed char stbtt_int8; + typedef unsigned short stbtt_uint16; + typedef signed short stbtt_int16; + typedef unsigned int stbtt_uint32; + typedef signed int stbtt_int32; + #endif + + typedef char stbtt__check_size32[sizeof(stbtt_int32)==4 ? 1 : -1]; + typedef char stbtt__check_size16[sizeof(stbtt_int16)==2 ? 1 : -1]; + + // e.g. #define your own STBTT_ifloor/STBTT_iceil() to avoid math.h + #ifndef STBTT_ifloor + #include + #define STBTT_ifloor(x) ((int) floor(x)) + #define STBTT_iceil(x) ((int) ceil(x)) + #endif + + #ifndef STBTT_sqrt + #include + #define STBTT_sqrt(x) sqrt(x) + #define STBTT_pow(x,y) pow(x,y) + #endif + + #ifndef STBTT_fmod + #include + #define STBTT_fmod(x,y) fmod(x,y) + #endif + + #ifndef STBTT_cos + #include + #define STBTT_cos(x) cos(x) + #define STBTT_acos(x) acos(x) + #endif + + #ifndef STBTT_fabs + #include + #define STBTT_fabs(x) fabs(x) + #endif + + // #define your own functions "STBTT_malloc" / "STBTT_free" to avoid malloc.h + #ifndef STBTT_malloc + #include + #define STBTT_malloc(x,u) ((void)(u),malloc(x)) + #define STBTT_free(x,u) ((void)(u),free(x)) + #endif + + #ifndef STBTT_assert + #include + #define STBTT_assert(x) assert(x) + #endif + + #ifndef STBTT_strlen + #include + #define STBTT_strlen(x) strlen(x) + #endif + + #ifndef STBTT_memcpy + #include + #define STBTT_memcpy memcpy + #define STBTT_memset memset + #endif +#endif + +/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +//// +//// INTERFACE +//// +//// + +#ifndef __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__ +#define __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__ + +#ifdef STBTT_STATIC +#define STBTT_DEF static +#else +#define STBTT_DEF extern +#endif + +#ifdef __cplusplus +extern "C" { +#endif + +// private structure +typedef struct +{ + unsigned char *data; + int cursor; + int size; +} stbtt__buf; + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// TEXTURE BAKING API +// +// If you use this API, you only have to call two functions ever. +// + +typedef struct +{ + unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap + float xoff,yoff,xadvance; +} stbtt_bakedchar; + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset, // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf) + float pixel_height, // height of font in pixels + unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, // bitmap to be filled in + int first_char, int num_chars, // characters to bake + stbtt_bakedchar *chardata); // you allocate this, it's num_chars long +// if return is positive, the first unused row of the bitmap +// if return is negative, returns the negative of the number of characters that fit +// if return is 0, no characters fit and no rows were used +// This uses a very crappy packing. + +typedef struct +{ + float x0,y0,s0,t0; // top-left + float x1,y1,s1,t1; // bottom-right +} stbtt_aligned_quad; + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, // same data as above + int char_index, // character to display + float *xpos, float *ypos, // pointers to current position in screen pixel space + stbtt_aligned_quad *q, // output: quad to draw + int opengl_fillrule); // true if opengl fill rule; false if DX9 or earlier +// Call GetBakedQuad with char_index = 'character - first_char', and it +// creates the quad you need to draw and advances the current position. +// +// The coordinate system used assumes y increases downwards. +// +// Characters will extend both above and below the current position; +// see discussion of "BASELINE" above. +// +// It's inefficient; you might want to c&p it and optimize it. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetScaledFontVMetrics(const unsigned char *fontdata, int index, float size, float *ascent, float *descent, float *lineGap); +// Query the font vertical metrics without having to create a font first. + + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// NEW TEXTURE BAKING API +// +// This provides options for packing multiple fonts into one atlas, not +// perfectly but better than nothing. + +typedef struct +{ + unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap + float xoff,yoff,xadvance; + float xoff2,yoff2; +} stbtt_packedchar; + +typedef struct stbtt_pack_context stbtt_pack_context; +typedef struct stbtt_fontinfo stbtt_fontinfo; +#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION +typedef struct stbrp_rect stbrp_rect; +#endif + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int width, int height, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context); +// Initializes a packing context stored in the passed-in stbtt_pack_context. +// Future calls using this context will pack characters into the bitmap passed +// in here: a 1-channel bitmap that is width * height. stride_in_bytes is +// the distance from one row to the next (or 0 to mean they are packed tightly +// together). "padding" is the amount of padding to leave between each +// character (normally you want '1' for bitmaps you'll use as textures with +// bilinear filtering). +// +// Returns 0 on failure, 1 on success. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd (stbtt_pack_context *spc); +// Cleans up the packing context and frees all memory. + +#define STBTT_POINT_SIZE(x) (-(x)) + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size, + int first_unicode_char_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range); +// Creates character bitmaps from the font_index'th font found in fontdata (use +// font_index=0 if you don't know what that is). It creates num_chars_in_range +// bitmaps for characters with unicode values starting at first_unicode_char_in_range +// and increasing. Data for how to render them is stored in chardata_for_range; +// pass these to stbtt_GetPackedQuad to get back renderable quads. +// +// font_size is the full height of the character from ascender to descender, +// as computed by stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight. To use a point size as computed +// by stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels, wrap the point size in STBTT_POINT_SIZE() +// and pass that result as 'font_size': +// ..., 20 , ... // font max minus min y is 20 pixels tall +// ..., STBTT_POINT_SIZE(20), ... // 'M' is 20 pixels tall + +typedef struct +{ + float font_size; + int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range; // if non-zero, then the chars are continuous, and this is the first codepoint + int *array_of_unicode_codepoints; // if non-zero, then this is an array of unicode codepoints + int num_chars; + stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range; // output + unsigned char h_oversample, v_oversample; // don't set these, they're used internally +} stbtt_pack_range; + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges); +// Creates character bitmaps from multiple ranges of characters stored in +// ranges. This will usually create a better-packed bitmap than multiple +// calls to stbtt_PackFontRange. Note that you can call this multiple +// times within a single PackBegin/PackEnd. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample); +// Oversampling a font increases the quality by allowing higher-quality subpixel +// positioning, and is especially valuable at smaller text sizes. +// +// This function sets the amount of oversampling for all following calls to +// stbtt_PackFontRange(s) or stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects for a given +// pack context. The default (no oversampling) is achieved by h_oversample=1 +// and v_oversample=1. The total number of pixels required is +// h_oversample*v_oversample larger than the default; for example, 2x2 +// oversampling requires 4x the storage of 1x1. For best results, render +// oversampled textures with bilinear filtering. Look at the readme in +// stb/tests/oversample for information about oversampled fonts +// +// To use with PackFontRangesGather etc., you must set it before calls +// call to PackFontRangesGatherRects. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetSkipMissingCodepoints(stbtt_pack_context *spc, int skip); +// If skip != 0, this tells stb_truetype to skip any codepoints for which +// there is no corresponding glyph. If skip=0, which is the default, then +// codepoints without a glyph recived the font's "missing character" glyph, +// typically an empty box by convention. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, // same data as above + int char_index, // character to display + float *xpos, float *ypos, // pointers to current position in screen pixel space + stbtt_aligned_quad *q, // output: quad to draw + int align_to_integer); + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects); +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects); +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects); +// Calling these functions in sequence is roughly equivalent to calling +// stbtt_PackFontRanges(). If you more control over the packing of multiple +// fonts, or if you want to pack custom data into a font texture, take a look +// at the source to of stbtt_PackFontRanges() and create a custom version +// using these functions, e.g. call GatherRects multiple times, +// building up a single array of rects, then call PackRects once, +// then call RenderIntoRects repeatedly. This may result in a +// better packing than calling PackFontRanges multiple times +// (or it may not). + +// this is an opaque structure that you shouldn't mess with which holds +// all the context needed from PackBegin to PackEnd. +struct stbtt_pack_context { + void *user_allocator_context; + void *pack_info; + int width; + int height; + int stride_in_bytes; + int padding; + int skip_missing; + unsigned int h_oversample, v_oversample; + unsigned char *pixels; + void *nodes; +}; + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// FONT LOADING +// +// + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data); +// This function will determine the number of fonts in a font file. TrueType +// collection (.ttc) files may contain multiple fonts, while TrueType font +// (.ttf) files only contain one font. The number of fonts can be used for +// indexing with the previous function where the index is between zero and one +// less than the total fonts. If an error occurs, -1 is returned. + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index); +// Each .ttf/.ttc file may have more than one font. Each font has a sequential +// index number starting from 0. Call this function to get the font offset for +// a given index; it returns -1 if the index is out of range. A regular .ttf +// file will only define one font and it always be at offset 0, so it will +// return '0' for index 0, and -1 for all other indices. + +// The following structure is defined publicly so you can declare one on +// the stack or as a global or etc, but you should treat it as opaque. +struct stbtt_fontinfo +{ + void * userdata; + unsigned char * data; // pointer to .ttf file + int fontstart; // offset of start of font + + int numGlyphs; // number of glyphs, needed for range checking + + int loca,head,glyf,hhea,hmtx,kern,gpos,svg; // table locations as offset from start of .ttf + int index_map; // a cmap mapping for our chosen character encoding + int indexToLocFormat; // format needed to map from glyph index to glyph + + stbtt__buf cff; // cff font data + stbtt__buf charstrings; // the charstring index + stbtt__buf gsubrs; // global charstring subroutines index + stbtt__buf subrs; // private charstring subroutines index + stbtt__buf fontdicts; // array of font dicts + stbtt__buf fdselect; // map from glyph to fontdict +}; + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset); +// Given an offset into the file that defines a font, this function builds +// the necessary cached info for the rest of the system. You must allocate +// the stbtt_fontinfo yourself, and stbtt_InitFont will fill it out. You don't +// need to do anything special to free it, because the contents are pure +// value data with no additional data structures. Returns 0 on failure. + + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// CHARACTER TO GLYPH-INDEX CONVERSIOn + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint); +// If you're going to perform multiple operations on the same character +// and you want a speed-up, call this function with the character you're +// going to process, then use glyph-based functions instead of the +// codepoint-based functions. +// Returns 0 if the character codepoint is not defined in the font. + + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// CHARACTER PROPERTIES +// + +STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels); +// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose "height" is 'pixels' tall. +// Height is measured as the distance from the highest ascender to the lowest +// descender; in other words, it's equivalent to calling stbtt_GetFontVMetrics +// and computing: +// scale = pixels / (ascent - descent) +// so if you prefer to measure height by the ascent only, use a similar calculation. + +STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels); +// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose EM size is mapped to +// 'pixels' tall. This is probably what traditional APIs compute, but +// I'm not positive. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap); +// ascent is the coordinate above the baseline the font extends; descent +// is the coordinate below the baseline the font extends (i.e. it is typically negative) +// lineGap is the spacing between one row's descent and the next row's ascent... +// so you should advance the vertical position by "*ascent - *descent + *lineGap" +// these are expressed in unscaled coordinates, so you must multiply by +// the scale factor for a given size + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap); +// analogous to GetFontVMetrics, but returns the "typographic" values from the OS/2 +// table (specific to MS/Windows TTF files). +// +// Returns 1 on success (table present), 0 on failure. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1); +// the bounding box around all possible characters + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing); +// leftSideBearing is the offset from the current horizontal position to the left edge of the character +// advanceWidth is the offset from the current horizontal position to the next horizontal position +// these are expressed in unscaled coordinates + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2); +// an additional amount to add to the 'advance' value between ch1 and ch2 + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1); +// Gets the bounding box of the visible part of the glyph, in unscaled coordinates + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing); +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2); +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1); +// as above, but takes one or more glyph indices for greater efficiency + +typedef struct stbtt_kerningentry +{ + int glyph1; // use stbtt_FindGlyphIndex + int glyph2; + int advance; +} stbtt_kerningentry; + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetKerningTableLength(const stbtt_fontinfo *info); +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetKerningTable(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_kerningentry* table, int table_length); +// Retrieves a complete list of all of the kerning pairs provided by the font +// stbtt_GetKerningTable never writes more than table_length entries and returns how many entries it did write. +// The table will be sorted by (a.glyph1 == b.glyph1)?(a.glyph2 < b.glyph2):(a.glyph1 < b.glyph1) + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// GLYPH SHAPES (you probably don't need these, but they have to go before +// the bitmaps for C declaration-order reasons) +// + +#ifndef STBTT_vmove // you can predefine these to use different values (but why?) + enum { + STBTT_vmove=1, + STBTT_vline, + STBTT_vcurve, + STBTT_vcubic + }; +#endif + +#ifndef stbtt_vertex // you can predefine this to use different values + // (we share this with other code at RAD) + #define stbtt_vertex_type short // can't use stbtt_int16 because that's not visible in the header file + typedef struct + { + stbtt_vertex_type x,y,cx,cy,cx1,cy1; + unsigned char type,padding; + } stbtt_vertex; +#endif + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index); +// returns non-zero if nothing is drawn for this glyph + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices); +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **vertices); +// returns # of vertices and fills *vertices with the pointer to them +// these are expressed in "unscaled" coordinates +// +// The shape is a series of contours. Each one starts with +// a STBTT_moveto, then consists of a series of mixed +// STBTT_lineto and STBTT_curveto segments. A lineto +// draws a line from previous endpoint to its x,y; a curveto +// draws a quadratic bezier from previous endpoint to +// its x,y, using cx,cy as the bezier control point. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *vertices); +// frees the data allocated above + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_FindSVGDoc(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl); +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, const char **svg); +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl, const char **svg); +// fills svg with the character's SVG data. +// returns data size or 0 if SVG not found. + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// BITMAP RENDERING +// + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata); +// frees the bitmap allocated below + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff); +// allocates a large-enough single-channel 8bpp bitmap and renders the +// specified character/glyph at the specified scale into it, with +// antialiasing. 0 is no coverage (transparent), 255 is fully covered (opaque). +// *width & *height are filled out with the width & height of the bitmap, +// which is stored left-to-right, top-to-bottom. +// +// xoff/yoff are the offset it pixel space from the glyph origin to the top-left of the bitmap + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff); +// the same as stbtt_GetCodepoitnBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel +// shift for the character + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint); +// the same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap, but you pass in storage for the bitmap +// in the form of 'output', with row spacing of 'out_stride' bytes. the bitmap +// is clipped to out_w/out_h bytes. Call stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox to get the +// width and height and positioning info for it first. + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint); +// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel +// shift for the character + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint); +// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel, but prefiltering +// is performed (see stbtt_PackSetOversampling) + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1); +// get the bbox of the bitmap centered around the glyph origin; so the +// bitmap width is ix1-ix0, height is iy1-iy0, and location to place +// the bitmap top left is (leftSideBearing*scale,iy0). +// (Note that the bitmap uses y-increases-down, but the shape uses +// y-increases-up, so CodepointBitmapBox and CodepointBox are inverted.) + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1); +// same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox, but you can specify a subpixel +// shift for the character + +// the following functions are equivalent to the above functions, but operate +// on glyph indices instead of Unicode codepoints (for efficiency) +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff); +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff); +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph); +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph); +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph); +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1); +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1); + + +// @TODO: don't expose this structure +typedef struct +{ + int w,h,stride; + unsigned char *pixels; +} stbtt__bitmap; + +// rasterize a shape with quadratic beziers into a bitmap +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, // 1-channel bitmap to draw into + float flatness_in_pixels, // allowable error of curve in pixels + stbtt_vertex *vertices, // array of vertices defining shape + int num_verts, // number of vertices in above array + float scale_x, float scale_y, // scale applied to input vertices + float shift_x, float shift_y, // translation applied to input vertices + int x_off, int y_off, // another translation applied to input + int invert, // if non-zero, vertically flip shape + void *userdata); // context for to STBTT_MALLOC + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Signed Distance Function (or Field) rendering + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata); +// frees the SDF bitmap allocated below + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff); +STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff); +// These functions compute a discretized SDF field for a single character, suitable for storing +// in a single-channel texture, sampling with bilinear filtering, and testing against +// larger than some threshold to produce scalable fonts. +// info -- the font +// scale -- controls the size of the resulting SDF bitmap, same as it would be creating a regular bitmap +// glyph/codepoint -- the character to generate the SDF for +// padding -- extra "pixels" around the character which are filled with the distance to the character (not 0), +// which allows effects like bit outlines +// onedge_value -- value 0-255 to test the SDF against to reconstruct the character (i.e. the isocontour of the character) +// pixel_dist_scale -- what value the SDF should increase by when moving one SDF "pixel" away from the edge (on the 0..255 scale) +// if positive, > onedge_value is inside; if negative, < onedge_value is inside +// width,height -- output height & width of the SDF bitmap (including padding) +// xoff,yoff -- output origin of the character +// return value -- a 2D array of bytes 0..255, width*height in size +// +// pixel_dist_scale & onedge_value are a scale & bias that allows you to make +// optimal use of the limited 0..255 for your application, trading off precision +// and special effects. SDF values outside the range 0..255 are clamped to 0..255. +// +// Example: +// scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(22) +// padding = 5 +// onedge_value = 180 +// pixel_dist_scale = 180/5.0 = 36.0 +// +// This will create an SDF bitmap in which the character is about 22 pixels +// high but the whole bitmap is about 22+5+5=32 pixels high. To produce a filled +// shape, sample the SDF at each pixel and fill the pixel if the SDF value +// is greater than or equal to 180/255. (You'll actually want to antialias, +// which is beyond the scope of this example.) Additionally, you can compute +// offset outlines (e.g. to stroke the character border inside & outside, +// or only outside). For example, to fill outside the character up to 3 SDF +// pixels, you would compare against (180-36.0*3)/255 = 72/255. The above +// choice of variables maps a range from 5 pixels outside the shape to +// 2 pixels inside the shape to 0..255; this is intended primarily for apply +// outside effects only (the interior range is needed to allow proper +// antialiasing of the font at *smaller* sizes) +// +// The function computes the SDF analytically at each SDF pixel, not by e.g. +// building a higher-res bitmap and approximating it. In theory the quality +// should be as high as possible for an SDF of this size & representation, but +// unclear if this is true in practice (perhaps building a higher-res bitmap +// and computing from that can allow drop-out prevention). +// +// The algorithm has not been optimized at all, so expect it to be slow +// if computing lots of characters or very large sizes. + + + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Finding the right font... +// +// You should really just solve this offline, keep your own tables +// of what font is what, and don't try to get it out of the .ttf file. +// That's because getting it out of the .ttf file is really hard, because +// the names in the file can appear in many possible encodings, in many +// possible languages, and e.g. if you need a case-insensitive comparison, +// the details of that depend on the encoding & language in a complex way +// (actually underspecified in truetype, but also gigantic). +// +// But you can use the provided functions in two possible ways: +// stbtt_FindMatchingFont() will use *case-sensitive* comparisons on +// unicode-encoded names to try to find the font you want; +// you can run this before calling stbtt_InitFont() +// +// stbtt_GetFontNameString() lets you get any of the various strings +// from the file yourself and do your own comparisons on them. +// You have to have called stbtt_InitFont() first. + + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags); +// returns the offset (not index) of the font that matches, or -1 if none +// if you use STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE, use a font name like "Arial Bold". +// if you use any other flag, use a font name like "Arial"; this checks +// the 'macStyle' header field; i don't know if fonts set this consistently +#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE 0 +#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_BOLD 1 +#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_ITALIC 2 +#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_UNDERSCORE 4 +#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_NONE 8 // <= not same as 0, this makes us check the bitfield is 0 + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2); +// returns 1/0 whether the first string interpreted as utf8 is identical to +// the second string interpreted as big-endian utf16... useful for strings from next func + +STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID); +// returns the string (which may be big-endian double byte, e.g. for unicode) +// and puts the length in bytes in *length. +// +// some of the values for the IDs are below; for more see the truetype spec: +// http://developer.apple.com/textfonts/TTRefMan/RM06/Chap6name.html +// http://www.microsoft.com/typography/otspec/name.htm + +enum { // platformID + STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE =0, + STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC =1, + STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_ISO =2, + STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT =3 +}; + +enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE + STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_0 =0, + STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_1 =1, + STBTT_UNICODE_EID_ISO_10646 =2, + STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_BMP=3, + STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_FULL=4 +}; + +enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT + STBTT_MS_EID_SYMBOL =0, + STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP =1, + STBTT_MS_EID_SHIFTJIS =2, + STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL =10 +}; + +enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC; same as Script Manager codes + STBTT_MAC_EID_ROMAN =0, STBTT_MAC_EID_ARABIC =4, + STBTT_MAC_EID_JAPANESE =1, STBTT_MAC_EID_HEBREW =5, + STBTT_MAC_EID_CHINESE_TRAD =2, STBTT_MAC_EID_GREEK =6, + STBTT_MAC_EID_KOREAN =3, STBTT_MAC_EID_RUSSIAN =7 +}; + +enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT; same as LCID... + // problematic because there are e.g. 16 english LCIDs and 16 arabic LCIDs + STBTT_MS_LANG_ENGLISH =0x0409, STBTT_MS_LANG_ITALIAN =0x0410, + STBTT_MS_LANG_CHINESE =0x0804, STBTT_MS_LANG_JAPANESE =0x0411, + STBTT_MS_LANG_DUTCH =0x0413, STBTT_MS_LANG_KOREAN =0x0412, + STBTT_MS_LANG_FRENCH =0x040c, STBTT_MS_LANG_RUSSIAN =0x0419, + STBTT_MS_LANG_GERMAN =0x0407, STBTT_MS_LANG_SPANISH =0x0409, + STBTT_MS_LANG_HEBREW =0x040d, STBTT_MS_LANG_SWEDISH =0x041D +}; + +enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC + STBTT_MAC_LANG_ENGLISH =0 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_JAPANESE =11, + STBTT_MAC_LANG_ARABIC =12, STBTT_MAC_LANG_KOREAN =23, + STBTT_MAC_LANG_DUTCH =4 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_RUSSIAN =32, + STBTT_MAC_LANG_FRENCH =1 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_SPANISH =6 , + STBTT_MAC_LANG_GERMAN =2 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_SWEDISH =5 , + STBTT_MAC_LANG_HEBREW =10, STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED =33, + STBTT_MAC_LANG_ITALIAN =3 , STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_TRAD =19 +}; + +#ifdef __cplusplus +} +#endif + +#endif // __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__ + +/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +//// +//// IMPLEMENTATION +//// +//// + +#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION + +#ifndef STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE +#define STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE 8 +#endif + +#if STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE > 255 +#error "STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE cannot be > 255" +#endif + +typedef int stbtt__test_oversample_pow2[(STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE & (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1)) == 0 ? 1 : -1]; + +#ifndef STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION +#define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 2 +#endif + +#ifdef _MSC_VER +#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v) (void)(v) +#else +#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v) (void)sizeof(v) +#endif + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// stbtt__buf helpers to parse data from file +// + +static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_get8(stbtt__buf *b) +{ + if (b->cursor >= b->size) + return 0; + return b->data[b->cursor++]; +} + +static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_peek8(stbtt__buf *b) +{ + if (b->cursor >= b->size) + return 0; + return b->data[b->cursor]; +} + +static void stbtt__buf_seek(stbtt__buf *b, int o) +{ + STBTT_assert(!(o > b->size || o < 0)); + b->cursor = (o > b->size || o < 0) ? b->size : o; +} + +static void stbtt__buf_skip(stbtt__buf *b, int o) +{ + stbtt__buf_seek(b, b->cursor + o); +} + +static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__buf_get(stbtt__buf *b, int n) +{ + stbtt_uint32 v = 0; + int i; + STBTT_assert(n >= 1 && n <= 4); + for (i = 0; i < n; i++) + v = (v << 8) | stbtt__buf_get8(b); + return v; +} + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__new_buf(const void *p, size_t size) +{ + stbtt__buf r; + STBTT_assert(size < 0x40000000); + r.data = (stbtt_uint8*) p; + r.size = (int) size; + r.cursor = 0; + return r; +} + +#define stbtt__buf_get16(b) stbtt__buf_get((b), 2) +#define stbtt__buf_get32(b) stbtt__buf_get((b), 4) + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__buf_range(const stbtt__buf *b, int o, int s) +{ + stbtt__buf r = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); + if (o < 0 || s < 0 || o > b->size || s > b->size - o) return r; + r.data = b->data + o; + r.size = s; + return r; +} + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_get_index(stbtt__buf *b) +{ + int count, start, offsize; + start = b->cursor; + count = stbtt__buf_get16(b); + if (count) { + offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(b); + STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4); + stbtt__buf_skip(b, offsize * count); + stbtt__buf_skip(b, stbtt__buf_get(b, offsize) - 1); + } + return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, b->cursor - start); +} + +static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__cff_int(stbtt__buf *b) +{ + int b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(b); + if (b0 >= 32 && b0 <= 246) return b0 - 139; + else if (b0 >= 247 && b0 <= 250) return (b0 - 247)*256 + stbtt__buf_get8(b) + 108; + else if (b0 >= 251 && b0 <= 254) return -(b0 - 251)*256 - stbtt__buf_get8(b) - 108; + else if (b0 == 28) return stbtt__buf_get16(b); + else if (b0 == 29) return stbtt__buf_get32(b); + STBTT_assert(0); + return 0; +} + +static void stbtt__cff_skip_operand(stbtt__buf *b) { + int v, b0 = stbtt__buf_peek8(b); + STBTT_assert(b0 >= 28); + if (b0 == 30) { + stbtt__buf_skip(b, 1); + while (b->cursor < b->size) { + v = stbtt__buf_get8(b); + if ((v & 0xF) == 0xF || (v >> 4) == 0xF) + break; + } + } else { + stbtt__cff_int(b); + } +} + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__dict_get(stbtt__buf *b, int key) +{ + stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0); + while (b->cursor < b->size) { + int start = b->cursor, end, op; + while (stbtt__buf_peek8(b) >= 28) + stbtt__cff_skip_operand(b); + end = b->cursor; + op = stbtt__buf_get8(b); + if (op == 12) op = stbtt__buf_get8(b) | 0x100; + if (op == key) return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, end-start); + } + return stbtt__buf_range(b, 0, 0); +} + +static void stbtt__dict_get_ints(stbtt__buf *b, int key, int outcount, stbtt_uint32 *out) +{ + int i; + stbtt__buf operands = stbtt__dict_get(b, key); + for (i = 0; i < outcount && operands.cursor < operands.size; i++) + out[i] = stbtt__cff_int(&operands); +} + +static int stbtt__cff_index_count(stbtt__buf *b) +{ + stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0); + return stbtt__buf_get16(b); +} + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_index_get(stbtt__buf b, int i) +{ + int count, offsize, start, end; + stbtt__buf_seek(&b, 0); + count = stbtt__buf_get16(&b); + offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(&b); + STBTT_assert(i >= 0 && i < count); + STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4); + stbtt__buf_skip(&b, i*offsize); + start = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize); + end = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize); + return stbtt__buf_range(&b, 2+(count+1)*offsize+start, end - start); +} + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// accessors to parse data from file +// + +// on platforms that don't allow misaligned reads, if we want to allow +// truetype fonts that aren't padded to alignment, define ALLOW_UNALIGNED_TRUETYPE + +#define ttBYTE(p) (* (stbtt_uint8 *) (p)) +#define ttCHAR(p) (* (stbtt_int8 *) (p)) +#define ttFixed(p) ttLONG(p) + +static stbtt_uint16 ttUSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; } +static stbtt_int16 ttSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; } +static stbtt_uint32 ttULONG(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; } +static stbtt_int32 ttLONG(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; } + +#define stbtt_tag4(p,c0,c1,c2,c3) ((p)[0] == (c0) && (p)[1] == (c1) && (p)[2] == (c2) && (p)[3] == (c3)) +#define stbtt_tag(p,str) stbtt_tag4(p,str[0],str[1],str[2],str[3]) + +static int stbtt__isfont(stbtt_uint8 *font) +{ + // check the version number + if (stbtt_tag4(font, '1',0,0,0)) return 1; // TrueType 1 + if (stbtt_tag(font, "typ1")) return 1; // TrueType with type 1 font -- we don't support this! + if (stbtt_tag(font, "OTTO")) return 1; // OpenType with CFF + if (stbtt_tag4(font, 0,1,0,0)) return 1; // OpenType 1.0 + if (stbtt_tag(font, "true")) return 1; // Apple specification for TrueType fonts + return 0; +} + +// @OPTIMIZE: binary search +static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__find_table(stbtt_uint8 *data, stbtt_uint32 fontstart, const char *tag) +{ + stbtt_int32 num_tables = ttUSHORT(data+fontstart+4); + stbtt_uint32 tabledir = fontstart + 12; + stbtt_int32 i; + for (i=0; i < num_tables; ++i) { + stbtt_uint32 loc = tabledir + 16*i; + if (stbtt_tag(data+loc+0, tag)) + return ttULONG(data+loc+8); + } + return 0; +} + +static int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, int index) +{ + // if it's just a font, there's only one valid index + if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection)) + return index == 0 ? 0 : -1; + + // check if it's a TTC + if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) { + // version 1? + if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) { + stbtt_int32 n = ttLONG(font_collection+8); + if (index >= n) + return -1; + return ttULONG(font_collection+12+index*4); + } + } + return -1; +} + +static int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal(unsigned char *font_collection) +{ + // if it's just a font, there's only one valid font + if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection)) + return 1; + + // check if it's a TTC + if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) { + // version 1? + if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) { + return ttLONG(font_collection+8); + } + } + return 0; +} + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subrs(stbtt__buf cff, stbtt__buf fontdict) +{ + stbtt_uint32 subrsoff = 0, private_loc[2] = { 0, 0 }; + stbtt__buf pdict; + stbtt__dict_get_ints(&fontdict, 18, 2, private_loc); + if (!private_loc[1] || !private_loc[0]) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); + pdict = stbtt__buf_range(&cff, private_loc[1], private_loc[0]); + stbtt__dict_get_ints(&pdict, 19, 1, &subrsoff); + if (!subrsoff) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); + stbtt__buf_seek(&cff, private_loc[1]+subrsoff); + return stbtt__cff_get_index(&cff); +} + +// since most people won't use this, find this table the first time it's needed +static int stbtt__get_svg(stbtt_fontinfo *info) +{ + stbtt_uint32 t; + if (info->svg < 0) { + t = stbtt__find_table(info->data, info->fontstart, "SVG "); + if (t) { + stbtt_uint32 offset = ttULONG(info->data + t + 2); + info->svg = t + offset; + } else { + info->svg = 0; + } + } + return info->svg; +} + +static int stbtt_InitFont_internal(stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *data, int fontstart) +{ + stbtt_uint32 cmap, t; + stbtt_int32 i,numTables; + + info->data = data; + info->fontstart = fontstart; + info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); + + cmap = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "cmap"); // required + info->loca = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "loca"); // required + info->head = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "head"); // required + info->glyf = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "glyf"); // required + info->hhea = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hhea"); // required + info->hmtx = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hmtx"); // required + info->kern = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "kern"); // not required + info->gpos = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "GPOS"); // not required + + if (!cmap || !info->head || !info->hhea || !info->hmtx) + return 0; + if (info->glyf) { + // required for truetype + if (!info->loca) return 0; + } else { + // initialization for CFF / Type2 fonts (OTF) + stbtt__buf b, topdict, topdictidx; + stbtt_uint32 cstype = 2, charstrings = 0, fdarrayoff = 0, fdselectoff = 0; + stbtt_uint32 cff; + + cff = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "CFF "); + if (!cff) return 0; + + info->fontdicts = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); + info->fdselect = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); + + // @TODO this should use size from table (not 512MB) + info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(data+cff, 512*1024*1024); + b = info->cff; + + // read the header + stbtt__buf_skip(&b, 2); + stbtt__buf_seek(&b, stbtt__buf_get8(&b)); // hdrsize + + // @TODO the name INDEX could list multiple fonts, + // but we just use the first one. + stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); // name INDEX + topdictidx = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); + topdict = stbtt__cff_index_get(topdictidx, 0); + stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); // string INDEX + info->gsubrs = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); + + stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 17, 1, &charstrings); + stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 6, 1, &cstype); + stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 36, 1, &fdarrayoff); + stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 37, 1, &fdselectoff); + info->subrs = stbtt__get_subrs(b, topdict); + + // we only support Type 2 charstrings + if (cstype != 2) return 0; + if (charstrings == 0) return 0; + + if (fdarrayoff) { + // looks like a CID font + if (!fdselectoff) return 0; + stbtt__buf_seek(&b, fdarrayoff); + info->fontdicts = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); + info->fdselect = stbtt__buf_range(&b, fdselectoff, b.size-fdselectoff); + } + + stbtt__buf_seek(&b, charstrings); + info->charstrings = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b); + } + + t = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "maxp"); + if (t) + info->numGlyphs = ttUSHORT(data+t+4); + else + info->numGlyphs = 0xffff; + + info->svg = -1; + + // find a cmap encoding table we understand *now* to avoid searching + // later. (todo: could make this installable) + // the same regardless of glyph. + numTables = ttUSHORT(data + cmap + 2); + info->index_map = 0; + for (i=0; i < numTables; ++i) { + stbtt_uint32 encoding_record = cmap + 4 + 8 * i; + // find an encoding we understand: + switch(ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record)) { + case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT: + switch (ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record+2)) { + case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP: + case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL: + // MS/Unicode + info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4); + break; + } + break; + case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE: + // Mac/iOS has these + // all the encodingIDs are unicode, so we don't bother to check it + info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4); + break; + } + } + if (info->index_map == 0) + return 0; + + info->indexToLocFormat = ttUSHORT(data+info->head + 50); + return 1; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint) +{ + stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data; + stbtt_uint32 index_map = info->index_map; + + stbtt_uint16 format = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 0); + if (format == 0) { // apple byte encoding + stbtt_int32 bytes = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 2); + if (unicode_codepoint < bytes-6) + return ttBYTE(data + index_map + 6 + unicode_codepoint); + return 0; + } else if (format == 6) { + stbtt_uint32 first = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 6); + stbtt_uint32 count = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 8); + if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint >= first && (stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < first+count) + return ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 10 + (unicode_codepoint - first)*2); + return 0; + } else if (format == 2) { + STBTT_assert(0); // @TODO: high-byte mapping for japanese/chinese/korean + return 0; + } else if (format == 4) { // standard mapping for windows fonts: binary search collection of ranges + stbtt_uint16 segcount = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+6) >> 1; + stbtt_uint16 searchRange = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+8) >> 1; + stbtt_uint16 entrySelector = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+10); + stbtt_uint16 rangeShift = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+12) >> 1; + + // do a binary search of the segments + stbtt_uint32 endCount = index_map + 14; + stbtt_uint32 search = endCount; + + if (unicode_codepoint > 0xffff) + return 0; + + // they lie from endCount .. endCount + segCount + // but searchRange is the nearest power of two, so... + if (unicode_codepoint >= ttUSHORT(data + search + rangeShift*2)) + search += rangeShift*2; + + // now decrement to bias correctly to find smallest + search -= 2; + while (entrySelector) { + stbtt_uint16 end; + searchRange >>= 1; + end = ttUSHORT(data + search + searchRange*2); + if (unicode_codepoint > end) + search += searchRange*2; + --entrySelector; + } + search += 2; + + { + stbtt_uint16 offset, start, last; + stbtt_uint16 item = (stbtt_uint16) ((search - endCount) >> 1); + + start = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*2 + 2 + 2*item); + last = ttUSHORT(data + endCount + 2*item); + if (unicode_codepoint < start || unicode_codepoint > last) + return 0; + + offset = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item); + if (offset == 0) + return (stbtt_uint16) (unicode_codepoint + ttSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*4 + 2 + 2*item)); + + return ttUSHORT(data + offset + (unicode_codepoint-start)*2 + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item); + } + } else if (format == 12 || format == 13) { + stbtt_uint32 ngroups = ttULONG(data+index_map+12); + stbtt_int32 low,high; + low = 0; high = (stbtt_int32)ngroups; + // Binary search the right group. + while (low < high) { + stbtt_int32 mid = low + ((high-low) >> 1); // rounds down, so low <= mid < high + stbtt_uint32 start_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12); + stbtt_uint32 end_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+4); + if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < start_char) + high = mid; + else if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint > end_char) + low = mid+1; + else { + stbtt_uint32 start_glyph = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+8); + if (format == 12) + return start_glyph + unicode_codepoint-start_char; + else // format == 13 + return start_glyph; + } + } + return 0; // not found + } + // @TODO + STBTT_assert(0); + return 0; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices) +{ + return stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, unicode_codepoint), vertices); +} + +static void stbtt_setvertex(stbtt_vertex *v, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy) +{ + v->type = type; + v->x = (stbtt_int16) x; + v->y = (stbtt_int16) y; + v->cx = (stbtt_int16) cx; + v->cy = (stbtt_int16) cy; +} + +static int stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index) +{ + int g1,g2; + + STBTT_assert(!info->cff.size); + + if (glyph_index >= info->numGlyphs) return -1; // glyph index out of range + if (info->indexToLocFormat >= 2) return -1; // unknown index->glyph map format + + if (info->indexToLocFormat == 0) { + g1 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2) * 2; + g2 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2 + 2) * 2; + } else { + g1 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4); + g2 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4 + 4); + } + + return g1==g2 ? -1 : g1; // if length is 0, return -1 +} + +static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1); + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1) +{ + if (info->cff.size) { + stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, x0, y0, x1, y1); + } else { + int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index); + if (g < 0) return 0; + + if (x0) *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 2); + if (y0) *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 4); + if (x1) *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 6); + if (y1) *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 8); + } + return 1; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1) +{ + return stbtt_GetGlyphBox(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), x0,y0,x1,y1); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index) +{ + stbtt_int16 numberOfContours; + int g; + if (info->cff.size) + return stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL) == 0; + g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index); + if (g < 0) return 1; + numberOfContours = ttSHORT(info->data + g); + return numberOfContours == 0; +} + +static int stbtt__close_shape(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_vertices, int was_off, int start_off, + stbtt_int32 sx, stbtt_int32 sy, stbtt_int32 scx, stbtt_int32 scy, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy) +{ + if (start_off) { + if (was_off) + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+scx)>>1, (cy+scy)>>1, cx,cy); + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, sx,sy,scx,scy); + } else { + if (was_off) + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve,sx,sy,cx,cy); + else + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline,sx,sy,0,0); + } + return num_vertices; +} + +static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices) +{ + stbtt_int16 numberOfContours; + stbtt_uint8 *endPtsOfContours; + stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data; + stbtt_vertex *vertices=0; + int num_vertices=0; + int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index); + + *pvertices = NULL; + + if (g < 0) return 0; + + numberOfContours = ttSHORT(data + g); + + if (numberOfContours > 0) { + stbtt_uint8 flags=0,flagcount; + stbtt_int32 ins, i,j=0,m,n, next_move, was_off=0, off, start_off=0; + stbtt_int32 x,y,cx,cy,sx,sy, scx,scy; + stbtt_uint8 *points; + endPtsOfContours = (data + g + 10); + ins = ttUSHORT(data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2); + points = data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2 + 2 + ins; + + n = 1+ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours + numberOfContours*2-2); + + m = n + 2*numberOfContours; // a loose bound on how many vertices we might need + vertices = (stbtt_vertex *) STBTT_malloc(m * sizeof(vertices[0]), info->userdata); + if (vertices == 0) + return 0; + + next_move = 0; + flagcount=0; + + // in first pass, we load uninterpreted data into the allocated array + // above, shifted to the end of the array so we won't overwrite it when + // we create our final data starting from the front + + off = m - n; // starting offset for uninterpreted data, regardless of how m ends up being calculated + + // first load flags + + for (i=0; i < n; ++i) { + if (flagcount == 0) { + flags = *points++; + if (flags & 8) + flagcount = *points++; + } else + --flagcount; + vertices[off+i].type = flags; + } + + // now load x coordinates + x=0; + for (i=0; i < n; ++i) { + flags = vertices[off+i].type; + if (flags & 2) { + stbtt_int16 dx = *points++; + x += (flags & 16) ? dx : -dx; // ??? + } else { + if (!(flags & 16)) { + x = x + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]); + points += 2; + } + } + vertices[off+i].x = (stbtt_int16) x; + } + + // now load y coordinates + y=0; + for (i=0; i < n; ++i) { + flags = vertices[off+i].type; + if (flags & 4) { + stbtt_int16 dy = *points++; + y += (flags & 32) ? dy : -dy; // ??? + } else { + if (!(flags & 32)) { + y = y + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]); + points += 2; + } + } + vertices[off+i].y = (stbtt_int16) y; + } + + // now convert them to our format + num_vertices=0; + sx = sy = cx = cy = scx = scy = 0; + for (i=0; i < n; ++i) { + flags = vertices[off+i].type; + x = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].x; + y = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].y; + + if (next_move == i) { + if (i != 0) + num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy); + + // now start the new one + start_off = !(flags & 1); + if (start_off) { + // if we start off with an off-curve point, then when we need to find a point on the curve + // where we can start, and we need to save some state for when we wraparound. + scx = x; + scy = y; + if (!(vertices[off+i+1].type & 1)) { + // next point is also a curve point, so interpolate an on-point curve + sx = (x + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x) >> 1; + sy = (y + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y) >> 1; + } else { + // otherwise just use the next point as our start point + sx = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x; + sy = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y; + ++i; // we're using point i+1 as the starting point, so skip it + } + } else { + sx = x; + sy = y; + } + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vmove,sx,sy,0,0); + was_off = 0; + next_move = 1 + ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours+j*2); + ++j; + } else { + if (!(flags & 1)) { // if it's a curve + if (was_off) // two off-curve control points in a row means interpolate an on-curve midpoint + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+x)>>1, (cy+y)>>1, cx, cy); + cx = x; + cy = y; + was_off = 1; + } else { + if (was_off) + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, x,y, cx, cy); + else + stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline, x,y,0,0); + was_off = 0; + } + } + } + num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy); + } else if (numberOfContours < 0) { + // Compound shapes. + int more = 1; + stbtt_uint8 *comp = data + g + 10; + num_vertices = 0; + vertices = 0; + while (more) { + stbtt_uint16 flags, gidx; + int comp_num_verts = 0, i; + stbtt_vertex *comp_verts = 0, *tmp = 0; + float mtx[6] = {1,0,0,1,0,0}, m, n; + + flags = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2; + gidx = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2; + + if (flags & 2) { // XY values + if (flags & 1) { // shorts + mtx[4] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2; + mtx[5] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2; + } else { + mtx[4] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1; + mtx[5] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1; + } + } + else { + // @TODO handle matching point + STBTT_assert(0); + } + if (flags & (1<<3)) { // WE_HAVE_A_SCALE + mtx[0] = mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2; + mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0; + } else if (flags & (1<<6)) { // WE_HAVE_AN_X_AND_YSCALE + mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2; + mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0; + mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2; + } else if (flags & (1<<7)) { // WE_HAVE_A_TWO_BY_TWO + mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2; + mtx[1] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2; + mtx[2] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2; + mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2; + } + + // Find transformation scales. + m = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[0]*mtx[0] + mtx[1]*mtx[1]); + n = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[2]*mtx[2] + mtx[3]*mtx[3]); + + // Get indexed glyph. + comp_num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, gidx, &comp_verts); + if (comp_num_verts > 0) { + // Transform vertices. + for (i = 0; i < comp_num_verts; ++i) { + stbtt_vertex* v = &comp_verts[i]; + stbtt_vertex_type x,y; + x=v->x; y=v->y; + v->x = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4])); + v->y = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5])); + x=v->cx; y=v->cy; + v->cx = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4])); + v->cy = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5])); + } + // Append vertices. + tmp = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc((num_vertices+comp_num_verts)*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata); + if (!tmp) { + if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata); + if (comp_verts) STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata); + return 0; + } + if (num_vertices > 0 && vertices) STBTT_memcpy(tmp, vertices, num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex)); + STBTT_memcpy(tmp+num_vertices, comp_verts, comp_num_verts*sizeof(stbtt_vertex)); + if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata); + vertices = tmp; + STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata); + num_vertices += comp_num_verts; + } + // More components ? + more = flags & (1<<5); + } + } else { + // numberOfCounters == 0, do nothing + } + + *pvertices = vertices; + return num_vertices; +} + +typedef struct +{ + int bounds; + int started; + float first_x, first_y; + float x, y; + stbtt_int32 min_x, max_x, min_y, max_y; + + stbtt_vertex *pvertices; + int num_vertices; +} stbtt__csctx; + +#define STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(bounds) {bounds,0, 0,0, 0,0, 0,0,0,0, NULL, 0} + +static void stbtt__track_vertex(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y) +{ + if (x > c->max_x || !c->started) c->max_x = x; + if (y > c->max_y || !c->started) c->max_y = y; + if (x < c->min_x || !c->started) c->min_x = x; + if (y < c->min_y || !c->started) c->min_y = y; + c->started = 1; +} + +static void stbtt__csctx_v(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy, stbtt_int32 cx1, stbtt_int32 cy1) +{ + if (c->bounds) { + stbtt__track_vertex(c, x, y); + if (type == STBTT_vcubic) { + stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx, cy); + stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx1, cy1); + } + } else { + stbtt_setvertex(&c->pvertices[c->num_vertices], type, x, y, cx, cy); + c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cx1 = (stbtt_int16) cx1; + c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cy1 = (stbtt_int16) cy1; + } + c->num_vertices++; +} + +static void stbtt__csctx_close_shape(stbtt__csctx *ctx) +{ + if (ctx->first_x != ctx->x || ctx->first_y != ctx->y) + stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->first_x, (int)ctx->first_y, 0, 0, 0, 0); +} + +static void stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy) +{ + stbtt__csctx_close_shape(ctx); + ctx->first_x = ctx->x = ctx->x + dx; + ctx->first_y = ctx->y = ctx->y + dy; + stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vmove, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0); +} + +static void stbtt__csctx_rline_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy) +{ + ctx->x += dx; + ctx->y += dy; + stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0); +} + +static void stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx1, float dy1, float dx2, float dy2, float dx3, float dy3) +{ + float cx1 = ctx->x + dx1; + float cy1 = ctx->y + dy1; + float cx2 = cx1 + dx2; + float cy2 = cy1 + dy2; + ctx->x = cx2 + dx3; + ctx->y = cy2 + dy3; + stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vcubic, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, (int)cx1, (int)cy1, (int)cx2, (int)cy2); +} + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subr(stbtt__buf idx, int n) +{ + int count = stbtt__cff_index_count(&idx); + int bias = 107; + if (count >= 33900) + bias = 32768; + else if (count >= 1240) + bias = 1131; + n += bias; + if (n < 0 || n >= count) + return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); + return stbtt__cff_index_get(idx, n); +} + +static stbtt__buf stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index) +{ + stbtt__buf fdselect = info->fdselect; + int nranges, start, end, v, fmt, fdselector = -1, i; + + stbtt__buf_seek(&fdselect, 0); + fmt = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect); + if (fmt == 0) { + // untested + stbtt__buf_skip(&fdselect, glyph_index); + fdselector = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect); + } else if (fmt == 3) { + nranges = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect); + start = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect); + for (i = 0; i < nranges; i++) { + v = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect); + end = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect); + if (glyph_index >= start && glyph_index < end) { + fdselector = v; + break; + } + start = end; + } + } + if (fdselector == -1) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0); // [DEAR IMGUI] fixed, see #6007 and nothings/stb#1422 + return stbtt__get_subrs(info->cff, stbtt__cff_index_get(info->fontdicts, fdselector)); +} + +static int stbtt__run_charstring(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt__csctx *c) +{ + int in_header = 1, maskbits = 0, subr_stack_height = 0, sp = 0, v, i, b0; + int has_subrs = 0, clear_stack; + float s[48]; + stbtt__buf subr_stack[10], subrs = info->subrs, b; + float f; + +#define STBTT__CSERR(s) (0) + + // this currently ignores the initial width value, which isn't needed if we have hmtx + b = stbtt__cff_index_get(info->charstrings, glyph_index); + while (b.cursor < b.size) { + i = 0; + clear_stack = 1; + b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b); + switch (b0) { + // @TODO implement hinting + case 0x13: // hintmask + case 0x14: // cntrmask + if (in_header) + maskbits += (sp / 2); // implicit "vstem" + in_header = 0; + stbtt__buf_skip(&b, (maskbits + 7) / 8); + break; + + case 0x01: // hstem + case 0x03: // vstem + case 0x12: // hstemhm + case 0x17: // vstemhm + maskbits += (sp / 2); + break; + + case 0x15: // rmoveto + in_header = 0; + if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rmoveto stack"); + stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-2], s[sp-1]); + break; + case 0x04: // vmoveto + in_header = 0; + if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vmoveto stack"); + stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, 0, s[sp-1]); + break; + case 0x16: // hmoveto + in_header = 0; + if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hmoveto stack"); + stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-1], 0); + break; + + case 0x05: // rlineto + if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rlineto stack"); + for (; i + 1 < sp; i += 2) + stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]); + break; + + // hlineto/vlineto and vhcurveto/hvcurveto alternate horizontal and vertical + // starting from a different place. + + case 0x07: // vlineto + if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vlineto stack"); + goto vlineto; + case 0x06: // hlineto + if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hlineto stack"); + for (;;) { + if (i >= sp) break; + stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], 0); + i++; + vlineto: + if (i >= sp) break; + stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, 0, s[i]); + i++; + } + break; + + case 0x1F: // hvcurveto + if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("hvcurveto stack"); + goto hvcurveto; + case 0x1E: // vhcurveto + if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("vhcurveto stack"); + for (;;) { + if (i + 3 >= sp) break; + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, 0, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i + 4] : 0.0f); + i += 4; + hvcurveto: + if (i + 3 >= sp) break; + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], 0, s[i+1], s[i+2], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i+4] : 0.0f, s[i+3]); + i += 4; + } + break; + + case 0x08: // rrcurveto + if (sp < 6) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack"); + for (; i + 5 < sp; i += 6) + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]); + break; + + case 0x18: // rcurveline + if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack"); + for (; i + 5 < sp - 2; i += 6) + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]); + if (i + 1 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack"); + stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]); + break; + + case 0x19: // rlinecurve + if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack"); + for (; i + 1 < sp - 6; i += 2) + stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]); + if (i + 5 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack"); + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]); + break; + + case 0x1A: // vvcurveto + case 0x1B: // hhcurveto + if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("(vv|hh)curveto stack"); + f = 0.0; + if (sp & 1) { f = s[i]; i++; } + for (; i + 3 < sp; i += 4) { + if (b0 == 0x1B) + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], f, s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], 0.0); + else + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, f, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], 0.0, s[i+3]); + f = 0.0; + } + break; + + case 0x0A: // callsubr + if (!has_subrs) { + if (info->fdselect.size) + subrs = stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(info, glyph_index); + has_subrs = 1; + } + // FALLTHROUGH + case 0x1D: // callgsubr + if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("call(g|)subr stack"); + v = (int) s[--sp]; + if (subr_stack_height >= 10) return STBTT__CSERR("recursion limit"); + subr_stack[subr_stack_height++] = b; + b = stbtt__get_subr(b0 == 0x0A ? subrs : info->gsubrs, v); + if (b.size == 0) return STBTT__CSERR("subr not found"); + b.cursor = 0; + clear_stack = 0; + break; + + case 0x0B: // return + if (subr_stack_height <= 0) return STBTT__CSERR("return outside subr"); + b = subr_stack[--subr_stack_height]; + clear_stack = 0; + break; + + case 0x0E: // endchar + stbtt__csctx_close_shape(c); + return 1; + + case 0x0C: { // two-byte escape + float dx1, dx2, dx3, dx4, dx5, dx6, dy1, dy2, dy3, dy4, dy5, dy6; + float dx, dy; + int b1 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b); + switch (b1) { + // @TODO These "flex" implementations ignore the flex-depth and resolution, + // and always draw beziers. + case 0x22: // hflex + if (sp < 7) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex stack"); + dx1 = s[0]; + dx2 = s[1]; + dy2 = s[2]; + dx3 = s[3]; + dx4 = s[4]; + dx5 = s[5]; + dx6 = s[6]; + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, 0, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0); + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, -dy2, dx6, 0); + break; + + case 0x23: // flex + if (sp < 13) return STBTT__CSERR("flex stack"); + dx1 = s[0]; + dy1 = s[1]; + dx2 = s[2]; + dy2 = s[3]; + dx3 = s[4]; + dy3 = s[5]; + dx4 = s[6]; + dy4 = s[7]; + dx5 = s[8]; + dy5 = s[9]; + dx6 = s[10]; + dy6 = s[11]; + //fd is s[12] + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3); + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6); + break; + + case 0x24: // hflex1 + if (sp < 9) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex1 stack"); + dx1 = s[0]; + dy1 = s[1]; + dx2 = s[2]; + dy2 = s[3]; + dx3 = s[4]; + dx4 = s[5]; + dx5 = s[6]; + dy5 = s[7]; + dx6 = s[8]; + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0); + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, dy5, dx6, -(dy1+dy2+dy5)); + break; + + case 0x25: // flex1 + if (sp < 11) return STBTT__CSERR("flex1 stack"); + dx1 = s[0]; + dy1 = s[1]; + dx2 = s[2]; + dy2 = s[3]; + dx3 = s[4]; + dy3 = s[5]; + dx4 = s[6]; + dy4 = s[7]; + dx5 = s[8]; + dy5 = s[9]; + dx6 = dy6 = s[10]; + dx = dx1+dx2+dx3+dx4+dx5; + dy = dy1+dy2+dy3+dy4+dy5; + if (STBTT_fabs(dx) > STBTT_fabs(dy)) + dy6 = -dy; + else + dx6 = -dx; + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3); + stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6); + break; + + default: + return STBTT__CSERR("unimplemented"); + } + } break; + + default: + if (b0 != 255 && b0 != 28 && b0 < 32) + return STBTT__CSERR("reserved operator"); + + // push immediate + if (b0 == 255) { + f = (float)(stbtt_int32)stbtt__buf_get32(&b) / 0x10000; + } else { + stbtt__buf_skip(&b, -1); + f = (float)(stbtt_int16)stbtt__cff_int(&b); + } + if (sp >= 48) return STBTT__CSERR("push stack overflow"); + s[sp++] = f; + clear_stack = 0; + break; + } + if (clear_stack) sp = 0; + } + return STBTT__CSERR("no endchar"); + +#undef STBTT__CSERR +} + +static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices) +{ + // runs the charstring twice, once to count and once to output (to avoid realloc) + stbtt__csctx count_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1); + stbtt__csctx output_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(0); + if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &count_ctx)) { + *pvertices = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc(count_ctx.num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata); + output_ctx.pvertices = *pvertices; + if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &output_ctx)) { + STBTT_assert(output_ctx.num_vertices == count_ctx.num_vertices); + return output_ctx.num_vertices; + } + } + *pvertices = NULL; + return 0; +} + +static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1) +{ + stbtt__csctx c = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1); + int r = stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &c); + if (x0) *x0 = r ? c.min_x : 0; + if (y0) *y0 = r ? c.min_y : 0; + if (x1) *x1 = r ? c.max_x : 0; + if (y1) *y1 = r ? c.max_y : 0; + return r ? c.num_vertices : 0; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices) +{ + if (!info->cff.size) + return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(info, glyph_index, pvertices); + else + return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(info, glyph_index, pvertices); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing) +{ + stbtt_uint16 numOfLongHorMetrics = ttUSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 34); + if (glyph_index < numOfLongHorMetrics) { + if (advanceWidth) *advanceWidth = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index); + if (leftSideBearing) *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index + 2); + } else { + if (advanceWidth) *advanceWidth = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*(numOfLongHorMetrics-1)); + if (leftSideBearing) *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*numOfLongHorMetrics + 2*(glyph_index - numOfLongHorMetrics)); + } +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetKerningTableLength(const stbtt_fontinfo *info) +{ + stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern; + + // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0. + if (!info->kern) + return 0; + if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1 + return 0; + if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format + return 0; + + return ttUSHORT(data+10); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetKerningTable(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_kerningentry* table, int table_length) +{ + stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern; + int k, length; + + // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0. + if (!info->kern) + return 0; + if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1 + return 0; + if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format + return 0; + + length = ttUSHORT(data+10); + if (table_length < length) + length = table_length; + + for (k = 0; k < length; k++) + { + table[k].glyph1 = ttUSHORT(data+18+(k*6)); + table[k].glyph2 = ttUSHORT(data+20+(k*6)); + table[k].advance = ttSHORT(data+22+(k*6)); + } + + return length; +} + +static int stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2) +{ + stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern; + stbtt_uint32 needle, straw; + int l, r, m; + + // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0. + if (!info->kern) + return 0; + if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1 + return 0; + if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format + return 0; + + l = 0; + r = ttUSHORT(data+10) - 1; + needle = glyph1 << 16 | glyph2; + while (l <= r) { + m = (l + r) >> 1; + straw = ttULONG(data+18+(m*6)); // note: unaligned read + if (needle < straw) + r = m - 1; + else if (needle > straw) + l = m + 1; + else + return ttSHORT(data+22+(m*6)); + } + return 0; +} + +static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetCoverageIndex(stbtt_uint8 *coverageTable, int glyph) +{ + stbtt_uint16 coverageFormat = ttUSHORT(coverageTable); + switch (coverageFormat) { + case 1: { + stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2); + + // Binary search. + stbtt_int32 l=0, r=glyphCount-1, m; + int straw, needle=glyph; + while (l <= r) { + stbtt_uint8 *glyphArray = coverageTable + 4; + stbtt_uint16 glyphID; + m = (l + r) >> 1; + glyphID = ttUSHORT(glyphArray + 2 * m); + straw = glyphID; + if (needle < straw) + r = m - 1; + else if (needle > straw) + l = m + 1; + else { + return m; + } + } + break; + } + + case 2: { + stbtt_uint16 rangeCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2); + stbtt_uint8 *rangeArray = coverageTable + 4; + + // Binary search. + stbtt_int32 l=0, r=rangeCount-1, m; + int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph; + while (l <= r) { + stbtt_uint8 *rangeRecord; + m = (l + r) >> 1; + rangeRecord = rangeArray + 6 * m; + strawStart = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord); + strawEnd = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 2); + if (needle < strawStart) + r = m - 1; + else if (needle > strawEnd) + l = m + 1; + else { + stbtt_uint16 startCoverageIndex = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 4); + return startCoverageIndex + glyph - strawStart; + } + } + break; + } + + default: return -1; // unsupported + } + + return -1; +} + +static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetGlyphClass(stbtt_uint8 *classDefTable, int glyph) +{ + stbtt_uint16 classDefFormat = ttUSHORT(classDefTable); + switch (classDefFormat) + { + case 1: { + stbtt_uint16 startGlyphID = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2); + stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 4); + stbtt_uint8 *classDef1ValueArray = classDefTable + 6; + + if (glyph >= startGlyphID && glyph < startGlyphID + glyphCount) + return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classDef1ValueArray + 2 * (glyph - startGlyphID)); + break; + } + + case 2: { + stbtt_uint16 classRangeCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2); + stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecords = classDefTable + 4; + + // Binary search. + stbtt_int32 l=0, r=classRangeCount-1, m; + int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph; + while (l <= r) { + stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecord; + m = (l + r) >> 1; + classRangeRecord = classRangeRecords + 6 * m; + strawStart = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord); + strawEnd = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 2); + if (needle < strawStart) + r = m - 1; + else if (needle > strawEnd) + l = m + 1; + else + return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 4); + } + break; + } + + default: + return -1; // Unsupported definition type, return an error. + } + + // "All glyphs not assigned to a class fall into class 0". (OpenType spec) + return 0; +} + +// Define to STBTT_assert(x) if you want to break on unimplemented formats. +#define STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(x) + +static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2) +{ + stbtt_uint16 lookupListOffset; + stbtt_uint8 *lookupList; + stbtt_uint16 lookupCount; + stbtt_uint8 *data; + stbtt_int32 i, sti; + + if (!info->gpos) return 0; + + data = info->data + info->gpos; + + if (ttUSHORT(data+0) != 1) return 0; // Major version 1 + if (ttUSHORT(data+2) != 0) return 0; // Minor version 0 + + lookupListOffset = ttUSHORT(data+8); + lookupList = data + lookupListOffset; + lookupCount = ttUSHORT(lookupList); + + for (i=0; i= pairSetCount) return 0; + + needle=glyph2; + r=pairValueCount-1; + l=0; + + // Binary search. + while (l <= r) { + stbtt_uint16 secondGlyph; + stbtt_uint8 *pairValue; + m = (l + r) >> 1; + pairValue = pairValueArray + (2 + valueRecordPairSizeInBytes) * m; + secondGlyph = ttUSHORT(pairValue); + straw = secondGlyph; + if (needle < straw) + r = m - 1; + else if (needle > straw) + l = m + 1; + else { + stbtt_int16 xAdvance = ttSHORT(pairValue + 2); + return xAdvance; + } + } + } else + return 0; + break; + } + + case 2: { + stbtt_uint16 valueFormat1 = ttUSHORT(table + 4); + stbtt_uint16 valueFormat2 = ttUSHORT(table + 6); + if (valueFormat1 == 4 && valueFormat2 == 0) { // Support more formats? + stbtt_uint16 classDef1Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 8); + stbtt_uint16 classDef2Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 10); + int glyph1class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef1Offset, glyph1); + int glyph2class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef2Offset, glyph2); + + stbtt_uint16 class1Count = ttUSHORT(table + 12); + stbtt_uint16 class2Count = ttUSHORT(table + 14); + stbtt_uint8 *class1Records, *class2Records; + stbtt_int16 xAdvance; + + if (glyph1class < 0 || glyph1class >= class1Count) return 0; // malformed + if (glyph2class < 0 || glyph2class >= class2Count) return 0; // malformed + + class1Records = table + 16; + class2Records = class1Records + 2 * (glyph1class * class2Count); + xAdvance = ttSHORT(class2Records + 2 * glyph2class); + return xAdvance; + } else + return 0; + break; + } + + default: + return 0; // Unsupported position format + } + } + } + + return 0; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int g1, int g2) +{ + int xAdvance = 0; + + if (info->gpos) + xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2); + else if (info->kern) + xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2); + + return xAdvance; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2) +{ + if (!info->kern && !info->gpos) // if no kerning table, don't waste time looking up both codepoint->glyphs + return 0; + return stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch1), stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch2)); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing) +{ + stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), advanceWidth, leftSideBearing); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap) +{ + if (ascent ) *ascent = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 4); + if (descent) *descent = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 6); + if (lineGap) *lineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 8); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap) +{ + int tab = stbtt__find_table(info->data, info->fontstart, "OS/2"); + if (!tab) + return 0; + if (typoAscent ) *typoAscent = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 68); + if (typoDescent) *typoDescent = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 70); + if (typoLineGap) *typoLineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 72); + return 1; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1) +{ + *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 36); + *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 38); + *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 40); + *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 42); +} + +STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float height) +{ + int fheight = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 4) - ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 6); + return (float) height / fheight; +} + +STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels) +{ + int unitsPerEm = ttUSHORT(info->data + info->head + 18); + return pixels / unitsPerEm; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *v) +{ + STBTT_free(v, info->userdata); +} + +STBTT_DEF stbtt_uint8 *stbtt_FindSVGDoc(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl) +{ + int i; + stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data; + stbtt_uint8 *svg_doc_list = data + stbtt__get_svg((stbtt_fontinfo *) info); + + int numEntries = ttUSHORT(svg_doc_list); + stbtt_uint8 *svg_docs = svg_doc_list + 2; + + for(i=0; i= ttUSHORT(svg_doc)) && (gl <= ttUSHORT(svg_doc + 2))) + return svg_doc; + } + return 0; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl, const char **svg) +{ + stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data; + stbtt_uint8 *svg_doc; + + if (info->svg == 0) + return 0; + + svg_doc = stbtt_FindSVGDoc(info, gl); + if (svg_doc != NULL) { + *svg = (char *) data + info->svg + ttULONG(svg_doc + 4); + return ttULONG(svg_doc + 8); + } else { + return 0; + } +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, const char **svg) +{ + return stbtt_GetGlyphSVG(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, unicode_codepoint), svg); +} + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// antialiasing software rasterizer +// + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1) +{ + int x0=0,y0=0,x1,y1; // =0 suppresses compiler warning + if (!stbtt_GetGlyphBox(font, glyph, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1)) { + // e.g. space character + if (ix0) *ix0 = 0; + if (iy0) *iy0 = 0; + if (ix1) *ix1 = 0; + if (iy1) *iy1 = 0; + } else { + // move to integral bboxes (treating pixels as little squares, what pixels get touched)? + if (ix0) *ix0 = STBTT_ifloor( x0 * scale_x + shift_x); + if (iy0) *iy0 = STBTT_ifloor(-y1 * scale_y + shift_y); + if (ix1) *ix1 = STBTT_iceil ( x1 * scale_x + shift_x); + if (iy1) *iy1 = STBTT_iceil (-y0 * scale_y + shift_y); + } +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1) +{ + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, glyph, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0, iy0, ix1, iy1); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1) +{ + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(font,codepoint), scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1) +{ + stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, codepoint, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1); +} + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Rasterizer + +typedef struct stbtt__hheap_chunk +{ + struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *next; +} stbtt__hheap_chunk; + +typedef struct stbtt__hheap +{ + struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *head; + void *first_free; + int num_remaining_in_head_chunk; +} stbtt__hheap; + +static void *stbtt__hheap_alloc(stbtt__hheap *hh, size_t size, void *userdata) +{ + if (hh->first_free) { + void *p = hh->first_free; + hh->first_free = * (void **) p; + return p; + } else { + if (hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk == 0) { + int count = (size < 32 ? 2000 : size < 128 ? 800 : 100); + stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = (stbtt__hheap_chunk *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * count, userdata); + if (c == NULL) + return NULL; + c->next = hh->head; + hh->head = c; + hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk = count; + } + --hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk; + return (char *) (hh->head) + sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk; + } +} + +static void stbtt__hheap_free(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *p) +{ + *(void **) p = hh->first_free; + hh->first_free = p; +} + +static void stbtt__hheap_cleanup(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *userdata) +{ + stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = hh->head; + while (c) { + stbtt__hheap_chunk *n = c->next; + STBTT_free(c, userdata); + c = n; + } +} + +typedef struct stbtt__edge { + float x0,y0, x1,y1; + int invert; +} stbtt__edge; + + +typedef struct stbtt__active_edge +{ + struct stbtt__active_edge *next; + #if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==1 + int x,dx; + float ey; + int direction; + #elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==2 + float fx,fdx,fdy; + float direction; + float sy; + float ey; + #else + #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION" + #endif +} stbtt__active_edge; + +#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1 +#define STBTT_FIXSHIFT 10 +#define STBTT_FIX (1 << STBTT_FIXSHIFT) +#define STBTT_FIXMASK (STBTT_FIX-1) + +static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata) +{ + stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata); + float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0); + STBTT_assert(z != NULL); + if (!z) return z; + + // round dx down to avoid overshooting + if (dxdy < 0) + z->dx = -STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * -dxdy); + else + z->dx = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * dxdy); + + z->x = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * e->x0 + z->dx * (start_point - e->y0)); // use z->dx so when we offset later it's by the same amount + z->x -= off_x * STBTT_FIX; + + z->ey = e->y1; + z->next = 0; + z->direction = e->invert ? 1 : -1; + return z; +} +#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2 +static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata) +{ + stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata); + float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0); + STBTT_assert(z != NULL); + //STBTT_assert(e->y0 <= start_point); + if (!z) return z; + z->fdx = dxdy; + z->fdy = dxdy != 0.0f ? (1.0f/dxdy) : 0.0f; + z->fx = e->x0 + dxdy * (start_point - e->y0); + z->fx -= off_x; + z->direction = e->invert ? 1.0f : -1.0f; + z->sy = e->y0; + z->ey = e->y1; + z->next = 0; + return z; +} +#else +#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION" +#endif + +#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1 +// note: this routine clips fills that extend off the edges... ideally this +// wouldn't happen, but it could happen if the truetype glyph bounding boxes +// are wrong, or if the user supplies a too-small bitmap +static void stbtt__fill_active_edges(unsigned char *scanline, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, int max_weight) +{ + // non-zero winding fill + int x0=0, w=0; + + while (e) { + if (w == 0) { + // if we're currently at zero, we need to record the edge start point + x0 = e->x; w += e->direction; + } else { + int x1 = e->x; w += e->direction; + // if we went to zero, we need to draw + if (w == 0) { + int i = x0 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT; + int j = x1 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT; + + if (i < len && j >= 0) { + if (i == j) { + // x0,x1 are the same pixel, so compute combined coverage + scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) ((x1 - x0) * max_weight >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT); + } else { + if (i >= 0) // add antialiasing for x0 + scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) (((STBTT_FIX - (x0 & STBTT_FIXMASK)) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT); + else + i = -1; // clip + + if (j < len) // add antialiasing for x1 + scanline[j] = scanline[j] + (stbtt_uint8) (((x1 & STBTT_FIXMASK) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT); + else + j = len; // clip + + for (++i; i < j; ++i) // fill pixels between x0 and x1 + scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) max_weight; + } + } + } + } + + e = e->next; + } +} + +static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata) +{ + stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 }; + stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL; + int y,j=0; + int max_weight = (255 / vsubsample); // weight per vertical scanline + int s; // vertical subsample index + unsigned char scanline_data[512], *scanline; + + if (result->w > 512) + scanline = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(result->w, userdata); + else + scanline = scanline_data; + + y = off_y * vsubsample; + e[n].y0 = (off_y + result->h) * (float) vsubsample + 1; + + while (j < result->h) { + STBTT_memset(scanline, 0, result->w); + for (s=0; s < vsubsample; ++s) { + // find center of pixel for this scanline + float scan_y = y + 0.5f; + stbtt__active_edge **step = &active; + + // update all active edges; + // remove all active edges that terminate before the center of this scanline + while (*step) { + stbtt__active_edge * z = *step; + if (z->ey <= scan_y) { + *step = z->next; // delete from list + STBTT_assert(z->direction); + z->direction = 0; + stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z); + } else { + z->x += z->dx; // advance to position for current scanline + step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list + } + } + + // resort the list if needed + for(;;) { + int changed=0; + step = &active; + while (*step && (*step)->next) { + if ((*step)->x > (*step)->next->x) { + stbtt__active_edge *t = *step; + stbtt__active_edge *q = t->next; + + t->next = q->next; + q->next = t; + *step = q; + changed = 1; + } + step = &(*step)->next; + } + if (!changed) break; + } + + // insert all edges that start before the center of this scanline -- omit ones that also end on this scanline + while (e->y0 <= scan_y) { + if (e->y1 > scan_y) { + stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y, userdata); + if (z != NULL) { + // find insertion point + if (active == NULL) + active = z; + else if (z->x < active->x) { + // insert at front + z->next = active; + active = z; + } else { + // find thing to insert AFTER + stbtt__active_edge *p = active; + while (p->next && p->next->x < z->x) + p = p->next; + // at this point, p->next->x is NOT < z->x + z->next = p->next; + p->next = z; + } + } + } + ++e; + } + + // now process all active edges in XOR fashion + if (active) + stbtt__fill_active_edges(scanline, result->w, active, max_weight); + + ++y; + } + STBTT_memcpy(result->pixels + j * result->stride, scanline, result->w); + ++j; + } + + stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata); + + if (scanline != scanline_data) + STBTT_free(scanline, userdata); +} + +#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2 + +// the edge passed in here does not cross the vertical line at x or the vertical line at x+1 +// (i.e. it has already been clipped to those) +static void stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(float *scanline, int x, stbtt__active_edge *e, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1) +{ + if (y0 == y1) return; + STBTT_assert(y0 < y1); + STBTT_assert(e->sy <= e->ey); + if (y0 > e->ey) return; + if (y1 < e->sy) return; + if (y0 < e->sy) { + x0 += (x1-x0) * (e->sy - y0) / (y1-y0); + y0 = e->sy; + } + if (y1 > e->ey) { + x1 += (x1-x0) * (e->ey - y1) / (y1-y0); + y1 = e->ey; + } + + if (x0 == x) + STBTT_assert(x1 <= x+1); + else if (x0 == x+1) + STBTT_assert(x1 >= x); + else if (x0 <= x) + STBTT_assert(x1 <= x); + else if (x0 >= x+1) + STBTT_assert(x1 >= x+1); + else + STBTT_assert(x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1); + + if (x0 <= x && x1 <= x) + scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0); + else if (x0 >= x+1 && x1 >= x+1) + ; + else { + STBTT_assert(x0 >= x && x0 <= x+1 && x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1); + scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0) * (1-((x0-x)+(x1-x))/2); // coverage = 1 - average x position + } +} + +static float stbtt__sized_trapezoid_area(float height, float top_width, float bottom_width) +{ + STBTT_assert(top_width >= 0); + STBTT_assert(bottom_width >= 0); + return (top_width + bottom_width) / 2.0f * height; +} + +static float stbtt__position_trapezoid_area(float height, float tx0, float tx1, float bx0, float bx1) +{ + return stbtt__sized_trapezoid_area(height, tx1 - tx0, bx1 - bx0); +} + +static float stbtt__sized_triangle_area(float height, float width) +{ + return height * width / 2; +} + +static void stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(float *scanline, float *scanline_fill, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, float y_top) +{ + float y_bottom = y_top+1; + + while (e) { + // brute force every pixel + + // compute intersection points with top & bottom + STBTT_assert(e->ey >= y_top); + + if (e->fdx == 0) { + float x0 = e->fx; + if (x0 < len) { + if (x0 >= 0) { + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,(int) x0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,(int) x0+1,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom); + } else { + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom); + } + } + } else { + float x0 = e->fx; + float dx = e->fdx; + float xb = x0 + dx; + float x_top, x_bottom; + float sy0,sy1; + float dy = e->fdy; + STBTT_assert(e->sy <= y_bottom && e->ey >= y_top); + + // compute endpoints of line segment clipped to this scanline (if the + // line segment starts on this scanline. x0 is the intersection of the + // line with y_top, but that may be off the line segment. + if (e->sy > y_top) { + x_top = x0 + dx * (e->sy - y_top); + sy0 = e->sy; + } else { + x_top = x0; + sy0 = y_top; + } + if (e->ey < y_bottom) { + x_bottom = x0 + dx * (e->ey - y_top); + sy1 = e->ey; + } else { + x_bottom = xb; + sy1 = y_bottom; + } + + if (x_top >= 0 && x_bottom >= 0 && x_top < len && x_bottom < len) { + // from here on, we don't have to range check x values + + if ((int) x_top == (int) x_bottom) { + float height; + // simple case, only spans one pixel + int x = (int) x_top; + height = (sy1 - sy0) * e->direction; + STBTT_assert(x >= 0 && x < len); + scanline[x] += stbtt__position_trapezoid_area(height, x_top, x+1.0f, x_bottom, x+1.0f); + scanline_fill[x] += height; // everything right of this pixel is filled + } else { + int x,x1,x2; + float y_crossing, y_final, step, sign, area; + // covers 2+ pixels + if (x_top > x_bottom) { + // flip scanline vertically; signed area is the same + float t; + sy0 = y_bottom - (sy0 - y_top); + sy1 = y_bottom - (sy1 - y_top); + t = sy0, sy0 = sy1, sy1 = t; + t = x_bottom, x_bottom = x_top, x_top = t; + dx = -dx; + dy = -dy; + t = x0, x0 = xb, xb = t; + } + STBTT_assert(dy >= 0); + STBTT_assert(dx >= 0); + + x1 = (int) x_top; + x2 = (int) x_bottom; + // compute intersection with y axis at x1+1 + y_crossing = y_top + dy * (x1+1 - x0); + + // compute intersection with y axis at x2 + y_final = y_top + dy * (x2 - x0); + + // x1 x_top x2 x_bottom + // y_top +------|-----+------------+------------+--------|---+------------+ + // | | | | | | + // | | | | | | + // sy0 | Txxxxx|............|............|............|............| + // y_crossing | *xxxxx.......|............|............|............| + // | | xxxxx..|............|............|............| + // | | /- xx*xxxx........|............|............| + // | | dy < | xxxxxx..|............|............| + // y_final | | \- | xx*xxx.........|............| + // sy1 | | | | xxxxxB...|............| + // | | | | | | + // | | | | | | + // y_bottom +------------+------------+------------+------------+------------+ + // + // goal is to measure the area covered by '.' in each pixel + + // if x2 is right at the right edge of x1, y_crossing can blow up, github #1057 + // @TODO: maybe test against sy1 rather than y_bottom? + if (y_crossing > y_bottom) + y_crossing = y_bottom; + + sign = e->direction; + + // area of the rectangle covered from sy0..y_crossing + area = sign * (y_crossing-sy0); + + // area of the triangle (x_top,sy0), (x1+1,sy0), (x1+1,y_crossing) + scanline[x1] += stbtt__sized_triangle_area(area, x1+1 - x_top); + + // check if final y_crossing is blown up; no test case for this + if (y_final > y_bottom) { + int denom = (x2 - (x1+1)); + y_final = y_bottom; + if (denom != 0) { // [DEAR IMGUI] Avoid div by zero (https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/1316) + dy = (y_final - y_crossing ) / denom; // if denom=0, y_final = y_crossing, so y_final <= y_bottom + } + } + + // in second pixel, area covered by line segment found in first pixel + // is always a rectangle 1 wide * the height of that line segment; this + // is exactly what the variable 'area' stores. it also gets a contribution + // from the line segment within it. the THIRD pixel will get the first + // pixel's rectangle contribution, the second pixel's rectangle contribution, + // and its own contribution. the 'own contribution' is the same in every pixel except + // the leftmost and rightmost, a trapezoid that slides down in each pixel. + // the second pixel's contribution to the third pixel will be the + // rectangle 1 wide times the height change in the second pixel, which is dy. + + step = sign * dy * 1; // dy is dy/dx, change in y for every 1 change in x, + // which multiplied by 1-pixel-width is how much pixel area changes for each step in x + // so the area advances by 'step' every time + + for (x = x1+1; x < x2; ++x) { + scanline[x] += area + step/2; // area of trapezoid is 1*step/2 + area += step; + } + STBTT_assert(STBTT_fabs(area) <= 1.01f); // accumulated error from area += step unless we round step down + STBTT_assert(sy1 > y_final-0.01f); + + // area covered in the last pixel is the rectangle from all the pixels to the left, + // plus the trapezoid filled by the line segment in this pixel all the way to the right edge + scanline[x2] += area + sign * stbtt__position_trapezoid_area(sy1-y_final, (float) x2, x2+1.0f, x_bottom, x2+1.0f); + + // the rest of the line is filled based on the total height of the line segment in this pixel + scanline_fill[x2] += sign * (sy1-sy0); + } + } else { + // if edge goes outside of box we're drawing, we require + // clipping logic. since this does not match the intended use + // of this library, we use a different, very slow brute + // force implementation + // note though that this does happen some of the time because + // x_top and x_bottom can be extrapolated at the top & bottom of + // the shape and actually lie outside the bounding box + int x; + for (x=0; x < len; ++x) { + // cases: + // + // there can be up to two intersections with the pixel. any intersection + // with left or right edges can be handled by splitting into two (or three) + // regions. intersections with top & bottom do not necessitate case-wise logic. + // + // the old way of doing this found the intersections with the left & right edges, + // then used some simple logic to produce up to three segments in sorted order + // from top-to-bottom. however, this had a problem: if an x edge was epsilon + // across the x border, then the corresponding y position might not be distinct + // from the other y segment, and it might ignored as an empty segment. to avoid + // that, we need to explicitly produce segments based on x positions. + + // rename variables to clearly-defined pairs + float y0 = y_top; + float x1 = (float) (x); + float x2 = (float) (x+1); + float x3 = xb; + float y3 = y_bottom; + + // x = e->x + e->dx * (y-y_top) + // (y-y_top) = (x - e->x) / e->dx + // y = (x - e->x) / e->dx + y_top + float y1 = (x - x0) / dx + y_top; + float y2 = (x+1 - x0) / dx + y_top; + + if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x2) { // three segments descending down-right + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x2,y2); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3); + } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x2) { // three segments descending down-left + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x1,y1); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3); + } else if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x1) { // two segments across x, down-right + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3); + } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x1) { // two segments across x, down-left + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3); + } else if (x0 < x2 && x3 > x2) { // two segments across x+1, down-right + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3); + } else if (x3 < x2 && x0 > x2) { // two segments across x+1, down-left + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2); + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3); + } else { // one segment + stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x3,y3); + } + } + } + } + e = e->next; + } +} + +// directly AA rasterize edges w/o supersampling +static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata) +{ + stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 }; + stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL; + int y,j=0, i; + float scanline_data[129], *scanline, *scanline2; + + STBTT__NOTUSED(vsubsample); + + if (result->w > 64) + scanline = (float *) STBTT_malloc((result->w*2+1) * sizeof(float), userdata); + else + scanline = scanline_data; + + scanline2 = scanline + result->w; + + y = off_y; + e[n].y0 = (float) (off_y + result->h) + 1; + + while (j < result->h) { + // find center of pixel for this scanline + float scan_y_top = y + 0.0f; + float scan_y_bottom = y + 1.0f; + stbtt__active_edge **step = &active; + + STBTT_memset(scanline , 0, result->w*sizeof(scanline[0])); + STBTT_memset(scanline2, 0, (result->w+1)*sizeof(scanline[0])); + + // update all active edges; + // remove all active edges that terminate before the top of this scanline + while (*step) { + stbtt__active_edge * z = *step; + if (z->ey <= scan_y_top) { + *step = z->next; // delete from list + STBTT_assert(z->direction); + z->direction = 0; + stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z); + } else { + step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list + } + } + + // insert all edges that start before the bottom of this scanline + while (e->y0 <= scan_y_bottom) { + if (e->y0 != e->y1) { + stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y_top, userdata); + if (z != NULL) { + if (j == 0 && off_y != 0) { + if (z->ey < scan_y_top) { + // this can happen due to subpixel positioning and some kind of fp rounding error i think + z->ey = scan_y_top; + } + } + STBTT_assert(z->ey >= scan_y_top); // if we get really unlucky a tiny bit of an edge can be out of bounds + // insert at front + z->next = active; + active = z; + } + } + ++e; + } + + // now process all active edges + if (active) + stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(scanline, scanline2+1, result->w, active, scan_y_top); + + { + float sum = 0; + for (i=0; i < result->w; ++i) { + float k; + int m; + sum += scanline2[i]; + k = scanline[i] + sum; + k = (float) STBTT_fabs(k)*255 + 0.5f; + m = (int) k; + if (m > 255) m = 255; + result->pixels[j*result->stride + i] = (unsigned char) m; + } + } + // advance all the edges + step = &active; + while (*step) { + stbtt__active_edge *z = *step; + z->fx += z->fdx; // advance to position for current scanline + step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list + } + + ++y; + ++j; + } + + stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata); + + if (scanline != scanline_data) + STBTT_free(scanline, userdata); +} +#else +#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION" +#endif + +#define STBTT__COMPARE(a,b) ((a)->y0 < (b)->y0) + +static void stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(stbtt__edge *p, int n) +{ + int i,j; + for (i=1; i < n; ++i) { + stbtt__edge t = p[i], *a = &t; + j = i; + while (j > 0) { + stbtt__edge *b = &p[j-1]; + int c = STBTT__COMPARE(a,b); + if (!c) break; + p[j] = p[j-1]; + --j; + } + if (i != j) + p[j] = t; + } +} + +static void stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(stbtt__edge *p, int n) +{ + /* threshold for transitioning to insertion sort */ + while (n > 12) { + stbtt__edge t; + int c01,c12,c,m,i,j; + + /* compute median of three */ + m = n >> 1; + c01 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[m]); + c12 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[m],&p[n-1]); + /* if 0 >= mid >= end, or 0 < mid < end, then use mid */ + if (c01 != c12) { + /* otherwise, we'll need to swap something else to middle */ + int z; + c = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[n-1]); + /* 0>mid && midn => n; 0 0 */ + /* 0n: 0>n => 0; 0 n */ + z = (c == c12) ? 0 : n-1; + t = p[z]; + p[z] = p[m]; + p[m] = t; + } + /* now p[m] is the median-of-three */ + /* swap it to the beginning so it won't move around */ + t = p[0]; + p[0] = p[m]; + p[m] = t; + + /* partition loop */ + i=1; + j=n-1; + for(;;) { + /* handling of equality is crucial here */ + /* for sentinels & efficiency with duplicates */ + for (;;++i) { + if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[i], &p[0])) break; + } + for (;;--j) { + if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0], &p[j])) break; + } + /* make sure we haven't crossed */ + if (i >= j) break; + t = p[i]; + p[i] = p[j]; + p[j] = t; + + ++i; + --j; + } + /* recurse on smaller side, iterate on larger */ + if (j < (n-i)) { + stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p,j); + p = p+i; + n = n-i; + } else { + stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p+i, n-i); + n = j; + } + } +} + +static void stbtt__sort_edges(stbtt__edge *p, int n) +{ + stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p, n); + stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(p, n); +} + +typedef struct +{ + float x,y; +} stbtt__point; + +static void stbtt__rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__point *pts, int *wcount, int windings, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int off_x, int off_y, int invert, void *userdata) +{ + float y_scale_inv = invert ? -scale_y : scale_y; + stbtt__edge *e; + int n,i,j,k,m; +#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1 + int vsubsample = result->h < 8 ? 15 : 5; +#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2 + int vsubsample = 1; +#else + #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION" +#endif + // vsubsample should divide 255 evenly; otherwise we won't reach full opacity + + // now we have to blow out the windings into explicit edge lists + n = 0; + for (i=0; i < windings; ++i) + n += wcount[i]; + + e = (stbtt__edge *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*e) * (n+1), userdata); // add an extra one as a sentinel + if (e == 0) return; + n = 0; + + m=0; + for (i=0; i < windings; ++i) { + stbtt__point *p = pts + m; + m += wcount[i]; + j = wcount[i]-1; + for (k=0; k < wcount[i]; j=k++) { + int a=k,b=j; + // skip the edge if horizontal + if (p[j].y == p[k].y) + continue; + // add edge from j to k to the list + e[n].invert = 0; + if (invert ? p[j].y > p[k].y : p[j].y < p[k].y) { + e[n].invert = 1; + a=j,b=k; + } + e[n].x0 = p[a].x * scale_x + shift_x; + e[n].y0 = (p[a].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample; + e[n].x1 = p[b].x * scale_x + shift_x; + e[n].y1 = (p[b].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample; + ++n; + } + } + + // now sort the edges by their highest point (should snap to integer, and then by x) + //STBTT_sort(e, n, sizeof(e[0]), stbtt__edge_compare); + stbtt__sort_edges(e, n); + + // now, traverse the scanlines and find the intersections on each scanline, use xor winding rule + stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(result, e, n, vsubsample, off_x, off_y, userdata); + + STBTT_free(e, userdata); +} + +static void stbtt__add_point(stbtt__point *points, int n, float x, float y) +{ + if (!points) return; // during first pass, it's unallocated + points[n].x = x; + points[n].y = y; +} + +// tessellate until threshold p is happy... @TODO warped to compensate for non-linear stretching +static int stbtt__tesselate_curve(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n) +{ + // midpoint + float mx = (x0 + 2*x1 + x2)/4; + float my = (y0 + 2*y1 + y2)/4; + // versus directly drawn line + float dx = (x0+x2)/2 - mx; + float dy = (y0+y2)/2 - my; + if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough! + return 1; + if (dx*dx+dy*dy > objspace_flatness_squared) { // half-pixel error allowed... need to be smaller if AA + stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, x0,y0, (x0+x1)/2.0f,(y0+y1)/2.0f, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1); + stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, mx,my, (x1+x2)/2.0f,(y1+y2)/2.0f, x2,y2, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1); + } else { + stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x2,y2); + *num_points = *num_points+1; + } + return 1; +} + +static void stbtt__tesselate_cubic(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n) +{ + // @TODO this "flatness" calculation is just made-up nonsense that seems to work well enough + float dx0 = x1-x0; + float dy0 = y1-y0; + float dx1 = x2-x1; + float dy1 = y2-y1; + float dx2 = x3-x2; + float dy2 = y3-y2; + float dx = x3-x0; + float dy = y3-y0; + float longlen = (float) (STBTT_sqrt(dx0*dx0+dy0*dy0)+STBTT_sqrt(dx1*dx1+dy1*dy1)+STBTT_sqrt(dx2*dx2+dy2*dy2)); + float shortlen = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dx*dx+dy*dy); + float flatness_squared = longlen*longlen-shortlen*shortlen; + + if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough! + return; + + if (flatness_squared > objspace_flatness_squared) { + float x01 = (x0+x1)/2; + float y01 = (y0+y1)/2; + float x12 = (x1+x2)/2; + float y12 = (y1+y2)/2; + float x23 = (x2+x3)/2; + float y23 = (y2+y3)/2; + + float xa = (x01+x12)/2; + float ya = (y01+y12)/2; + float xb = (x12+x23)/2; + float yb = (y12+y23)/2; + + float mx = (xa+xb)/2; + float my = (ya+yb)/2; + + stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, x0,y0, x01,y01, xa,ya, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1); + stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, mx,my, xb,yb, x23,y23, x3,y3, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1); + } else { + stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x3,y3); + *num_points = *num_points+1; + } +} + +// returns number of contours +static stbtt__point *stbtt_FlattenCurves(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float objspace_flatness, int **contour_lengths, int *num_contours, void *userdata) +{ + stbtt__point *points=0; + int num_points=0; + + float objspace_flatness_squared = objspace_flatness * objspace_flatness; + int i,n=0,start=0, pass; + + // count how many "moves" there are to get the contour count + for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) + if (vertices[i].type == STBTT_vmove) + ++n; + + *num_contours = n; + if (n == 0) return 0; + + *contour_lengths = (int *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(**contour_lengths) * n, userdata); + + if (*contour_lengths == 0) { + *num_contours = 0; + return 0; + } + + // make two passes through the points so we don't need to realloc + for (pass=0; pass < 2; ++pass) { + float x=0,y=0; + if (pass == 1) { + points = (stbtt__point *) STBTT_malloc(num_points * sizeof(points[0]), userdata); + if (points == NULL) goto error; + } + num_points = 0; + n= -1; + for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) { + switch (vertices[i].type) { + case STBTT_vmove: + // start the next contour + if (n >= 0) + (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start; + ++n; + start = num_points; + + x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y; + stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x,y); + break; + case STBTT_vline: + x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y; + stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x, y); + break; + case STBTT_vcurve: + stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, &num_points, x,y, + vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy, + vertices[i].x, vertices[i].y, + objspace_flatness_squared, 0); + x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y; + break; + case STBTT_vcubic: + stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, &num_points, x,y, + vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy, + vertices[i].cx1, vertices[i].cy1, + vertices[i].x, vertices[i].y, + objspace_flatness_squared, 0); + x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y; + break; + } + } + (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start; + } + + return points; +error: + STBTT_free(points, userdata); + STBTT_free(*contour_lengths, userdata); + *contour_lengths = 0; + *num_contours = 0; + return NULL; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, float flatness_in_pixels, stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int x_off, int y_off, int invert, void *userdata) +{ + float scale = scale_x > scale_y ? scale_y : scale_x; + int winding_count = 0; + int *winding_lengths = NULL; + stbtt__point *windings = stbtt_FlattenCurves(vertices, num_verts, flatness_in_pixels / scale, &winding_lengths, &winding_count, userdata); + if (windings) { + stbtt__rasterize(result, windings, winding_lengths, winding_count, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, x_off, y_off, invert, userdata); + STBTT_free(winding_lengths, userdata); + STBTT_free(windings, userdata); + } +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata) +{ + STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata); +} + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff) +{ + int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1; + stbtt__bitmap gbm; + stbtt_vertex *vertices; + int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices); + + if (scale_x == 0) scale_x = scale_y; + if (scale_y == 0) { + if (scale_x == 0) { + STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata); + return NULL; + } + scale_y = scale_x; + } + + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1); + + // now we get the size + gbm.w = (ix1 - ix0); + gbm.h = (iy1 - iy0); + gbm.pixels = NULL; // in case we error + + if (width ) *width = gbm.w; + if (height) *height = gbm.h; + if (xoff ) *xoff = ix0; + if (yoff ) *yoff = iy0; + + if (gbm.w && gbm.h) { + gbm.pixels = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(gbm.w * gbm.h, info->userdata); + if (gbm.pixels) { + gbm.stride = gbm.w; + + stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0, iy0, 1, info->userdata); + } + } + STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata); + return gbm.pixels; +} + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff) +{ + return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f, 0.0f, glyph, width, height, xoff, yoff); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph) +{ + int ix0,iy0; + stbtt_vertex *vertices; + int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices); + stbtt__bitmap gbm; + + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,0,0); + gbm.pixels = output; + gbm.w = out_w; + gbm.h = out_h; + gbm.stride = out_stride; + + if (gbm.w && gbm.h) + stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0,iy0, 1, info->userdata); + + STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph) +{ + stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, glyph); +} + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff) +{ + return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), width,height,xoff,yoff); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint) +{ + stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, oversample_x, oversample_y, sub_x, sub_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint)); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint) +{ + stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint)); +} + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff) +{ + return stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint, width,height,xoff,yoff); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint) +{ + stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint); +} + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// bitmap baking +// +// This is SUPER-CRAPPY packing to keep source code small + +static int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal(unsigned char *data, int offset, // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf) + float pixel_height, // height of font in pixels + unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, // bitmap to be filled in + int first_char, int num_chars, // characters to bake + stbtt_bakedchar *chardata) +{ + float scale; + int x,y,bottom_y, i; + stbtt_fontinfo f; + f.userdata = NULL; + if (!stbtt_InitFont(&f, data, offset)) + return -1; + STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels + x=y=1; + bottom_y = 1; + + scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&f, pixel_height); + + for (i=0; i < num_chars; ++i) { + int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1,gw,gh; + int g = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&f, first_char + i); + stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(&f, g, &advance, &lsb); + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(&f, g, scale,scale, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1); + gw = x1-x0; + gh = y1-y0; + if (x + gw + 1 >= pw) + y = bottom_y, x = 1; // advance to next row + if (y + gh + 1 >= ph) // check if it fits vertically AFTER potentially moving to next row + return -i; + STBTT_assert(x+gw < pw); + STBTT_assert(y+gh < ph); + stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(&f, pixels+x+y*pw, gw,gh,pw, scale,scale, g); + chardata[i].x0 = (stbtt_int16) x; + chardata[i].y0 = (stbtt_int16) y; + chardata[i].x1 = (stbtt_int16) (x + gw); + chardata[i].y1 = (stbtt_int16) (y + gh); + chardata[i].xadvance = scale * advance; + chardata[i].xoff = (float) x0; + chardata[i].yoff = (float) y0; + x = x + gw + 1; + if (y+gh+1 > bottom_y) + bottom_y = y+gh+1; + } + return bottom_y; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int opengl_fillrule) +{ + float d3d_bias = opengl_fillrule ? 0 : -0.5f; + float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph; + const stbtt_bakedchar *b = chardata + char_index; + int round_x = STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f); + int round_y = STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f); + + q->x0 = round_x + d3d_bias; + q->y0 = round_y + d3d_bias; + q->x1 = round_x + b->x1 - b->x0 + d3d_bias; + q->y1 = round_y + b->y1 - b->y0 + d3d_bias; + + q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw; + q->t0 = b->y0 * iph; + q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw; + q->t1 = b->y1 * iph; + + *xpos += b->xadvance; +} + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// rectangle packing replacement routines if you don't have stb_rect_pack.h +// + +#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION + +typedef int stbrp_coord; + +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// // +// // +// COMPILER WARNING ?!?!? // +// // +// // +// if you get a compile warning due to these symbols being defined more than // +// once, move #include "stb_rect_pack.h" before #include "stb_truetype.h" // +// // +//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// + +typedef struct +{ + int width,height; + int x,y,bottom_y; +} stbrp_context; + +typedef struct +{ + unsigned char x; +} stbrp_node; + +struct stbrp_rect +{ + stbrp_coord x,y; + int id,w,h,was_packed; +}; + +static void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *con, int pw, int ph, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes) +{ + con->width = pw; + con->height = ph; + con->x = 0; + con->y = 0; + con->bottom_y = 0; + STBTT__NOTUSED(nodes); + STBTT__NOTUSED(num_nodes); +} + +static void stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *con, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects) +{ + int i; + for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) { + if (con->x + rects[i].w > con->width) { + con->x = 0; + con->y = con->bottom_y; + } + if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->height) + break; + rects[i].x = con->x; + rects[i].y = con->y; + rects[i].was_packed = 1; + con->x += rects[i].w; + if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->bottom_y) + con->bottom_y = con->y + rects[i].h; + } + for ( ; i < num_rects; ++i) + rects[i].was_packed = 0; +} +#endif + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// bitmap baking +// +// This is SUPER-AWESOME (tm Ryan Gordon) packing using stb_rect_pack.h. If +// stb_rect_pack.h isn't available, it uses the BakeFontBitmap strategy. + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context) +{ + stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*context) ,alloc_context); + int num_nodes = pw - padding; + stbrp_node *nodes = (stbrp_node *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*nodes ) * num_nodes,alloc_context); + + if (context == NULL || nodes == NULL) { + if (context != NULL) STBTT_free(context, alloc_context); + if (nodes != NULL) STBTT_free(nodes , alloc_context); + return 0; + } + + spc->user_allocator_context = alloc_context; + spc->width = pw; + spc->height = ph; + spc->pixels = pixels; + spc->pack_info = context; + spc->nodes = nodes; + spc->padding = padding; + spc->stride_in_bytes = stride_in_bytes != 0 ? stride_in_bytes : pw; + spc->h_oversample = 1; + spc->v_oversample = 1; + spc->skip_missing = 0; + + stbrp_init_target(context, pw-padding, ph-padding, nodes, num_nodes); + + if (pixels) + STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels + + return 1; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd (stbtt_pack_context *spc) +{ + STBTT_free(spc->nodes , spc->user_allocator_context); + STBTT_free(spc->pack_info, spc->user_allocator_context); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample) +{ + STBTT_assert(h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); + STBTT_assert(v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); + if (h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE) + spc->h_oversample = h_oversample; + if (v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE) + spc->v_oversample = v_oversample; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetSkipMissingCodepoints(stbtt_pack_context *spc, int skip) +{ + spc->skip_missing = skip; +} + +#define STBTT__OVER_MASK (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1) + +static void stbtt__h_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width) +{ + unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE]; + int safe_w = w - kernel_width; + int j; + STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze + for (j=0; j < h; ++j) { + int i; + unsigned int total; + STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width); + + total = 0; + + // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide + switch (kernel_width) { + case 2: + for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) { + total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i]; + pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 2); + } + break; + case 3: + for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) { + total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i]; + pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 3); + } + break; + case 4: + for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) { + total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i]; + pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 4); + } + break; + case 5: + for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) { + total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i]; + pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 5); + } + break; + default: + for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) { + total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i]; + pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width); + } + break; + } + + for (; i < w; ++i) { + STBTT_assert(pixels[i] == 0); + total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width); + } + + pixels += stride_in_bytes; + } +} + +static void stbtt__v_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width) +{ + unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE]; + int safe_h = h - kernel_width; + int j; + STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze + for (j=0; j < w; ++j) { + int i; + unsigned int total; + STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width); + + total = 0; + + // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide + switch (kernel_width) { + case 2: + for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) { + total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes]; + pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 2); + } + break; + case 3: + for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) { + total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes]; + pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 3); + } + break; + case 4: + for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) { + total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes]; + pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 4); + } + break; + case 5: + for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) { + total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes]; + pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 5); + } + break; + default: + for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) { + total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes]; + pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width); + } + break; + } + + for (; i < h; ++i) { + STBTT_assert(pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] == 0); + total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK]; + pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width); + } + + pixels += 1; + } +} + +static float stbtt__oversample_shift(int oversample) +{ + if (!oversample) + return 0.0f; + + // The prefilter is a box filter of width "oversample", + // which shifts phase by (oversample - 1)/2 pixels in + // oversampled space. We want to shift in the opposite + // direction to counter this. + return (float)-(oversample - 1) / (2.0f * (float)oversample); +} + +// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects) +{ + int i,j,k; + int missing_glyph_added = 0; + + k=0; + for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) { + float fh = ranges[i].font_size; + float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh); + ranges[i].h_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->h_oversample; + ranges[i].v_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->v_oversample; + for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) { + int x0,y0,x1,y1; + int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j]; + int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint); + if (glyph == 0 && (spc->skip_missing || missing_glyph_added)) { + rects[k].w = rects[k].h = 0; + } else { + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info,glyph, + scale * spc->h_oversample, + scale * spc->v_oversample, + 0,0, + &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1); + rects[k].w = (stbrp_coord) (x1-x0 + spc->padding + spc->h_oversample-1); + rects[k].h = (stbrp_coord) (y1-y0 + spc->padding + spc->v_oversample-1); + if (glyph == 0) + missing_glyph_added = 1; + } + ++k; + } + } + + return k; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int prefilter_x, int prefilter_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph) +{ + stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, + output, + out_w - (prefilter_x - 1), + out_h - (prefilter_y - 1), + out_stride, + scale_x, + scale_y, + shift_x, + shift_y, + glyph); + + if (prefilter_x > 1) + stbtt__h_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_x); + + if (prefilter_y > 1) + stbtt__v_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_y); + + *sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_x); + *sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_y); +} + +// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects) +{ + int i,j,k, missing_glyph = -1, return_value = 1; + + // save current values + int old_h_over = spc->h_oversample; + int old_v_over = spc->v_oversample; + + k = 0; + for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) { + float fh = ranges[i].font_size; + float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh); + float recip_h,recip_v,sub_x,sub_y; + spc->h_oversample = ranges[i].h_oversample; + spc->v_oversample = ranges[i].v_oversample; + recip_h = 1.0f / spc->h_oversample; + recip_v = 1.0f / spc->v_oversample; + sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->h_oversample); + sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->v_oversample); + for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) { + stbrp_rect *r = &rects[k]; + if (r->was_packed && r->w != 0 && r->h != 0) { + stbtt_packedchar *bc = &ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j]; + int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1; + int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j]; + int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint); + stbrp_coord pad = (stbrp_coord) spc->padding; + + // pad on left and top + r->x += pad; + r->y += pad; + r->w -= pad; + r->h -= pad; + stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, glyph, &advance, &lsb); + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(info, glyph, + scale * spc->h_oversample, + scale * spc->v_oversample, + &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1); + stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, + spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes, + r->w - spc->h_oversample+1, + r->h - spc->v_oversample+1, + spc->stride_in_bytes, + scale * spc->h_oversample, + scale * spc->v_oversample, + 0,0, + glyph); + + if (spc->h_oversample > 1) + stbtt__h_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes, + r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes, + spc->h_oversample); + + if (spc->v_oversample > 1) + stbtt__v_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes, + r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes, + spc->v_oversample); + + bc->x0 = (stbtt_int16) r->x; + bc->y0 = (stbtt_int16) r->y; + bc->x1 = (stbtt_int16) (r->x + r->w); + bc->y1 = (stbtt_int16) (r->y + r->h); + bc->xadvance = scale * advance; + bc->xoff = (float) x0 * recip_h + sub_x; + bc->yoff = (float) y0 * recip_v + sub_y; + bc->xoff2 = (x0 + r->w) * recip_h + sub_x; + bc->yoff2 = (y0 + r->h) * recip_v + sub_y; + + if (glyph == 0) + missing_glyph = j; + } else if (spc->skip_missing) { + return_value = 0; + } else if (r->was_packed && r->w == 0 && r->h == 0 && missing_glyph >= 0) { + ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j] = ranges[i].chardata_for_range[missing_glyph]; + } else { + return_value = 0; // if any fail, report failure + } + + ++k; + } + } + + // restore original values + spc->h_oversample = old_h_over; + spc->v_oversample = old_v_over; + + return return_value; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects) +{ + stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info, rects, num_rects); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges) +{ + stbtt_fontinfo info; + int i, j, n, return_value; // [DEAR IMGUI] removed = 1; + //stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info; + stbrp_rect *rects; + + // flag all characters as NOT packed + for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) + for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) + ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x0 = + ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y0 = + ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x1 = + ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y1 = 0; + + n = 0; + for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) + n += ranges[i].num_chars; + + rects = (stbrp_rect *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*rects) * n, spc->user_allocator_context); + if (rects == NULL) + return 0; + + info.userdata = spc->user_allocator_context; + stbtt_InitFont(&info, fontdata, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(fontdata,font_index)); + + n = stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects); + + stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(spc, rects, n); + + return_value = stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects); + + STBTT_free(rects, spc->user_allocator_context); + return return_value; +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size, + int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range) +{ + stbtt_pack_range range; + range.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = first_unicode_codepoint_in_range; + range.array_of_unicode_codepoints = NULL; + range.num_chars = num_chars_in_range; + range.chardata_for_range = chardata_for_range; + range.font_size = font_size; + return stbtt_PackFontRanges(spc, fontdata, font_index, &range, 1); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetScaledFontVMetrics(const unsigned char *fontdata, int index, float size, float *ascent, float *descent, float *lineGap) +{ + int i_ascent, i_descent, i_lineGap; + float scale; + stbtt_fontinfo info; + stbtt_InitFont(&info, fontdata, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(fontdata, index)); + scale = size > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&info, size) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&info, -size); + stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&info, &i_ascent, &i_descent, &i_lineGap); + *ascent = (float) i_ascent * scale; + *descent = (float) i_descent * scale; + *lineGap = (float) i_lineGap * scale; +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int align_to_integer) +{ + float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph; + const stbtt_packedchar *b = chardata + char_index; + + if (align_to_integer) { + float x = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f); + float y = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f); + q->x0 = x; + q->y0 = y; + q->x1 = x + b->xoff2 - b->xoff; + q->y1 = y + b->yoff2 - b->yoff; + } else { + q->x0 = *xpos + b->xoff; + q->y0 = *ypos + b->yoff; + q->x1 = *xpos + b->xoff2; + q->y1 = *ypos + b->yoff2; + } + + q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw; + q->t0 = b->y0 * iph; + q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw; + q->t1 = b->y1 * iph; + + *xpos += b->xadvance; +} + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// sdf computation +// + +#define STBTT_min(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) +#define STBTT_max(a,b) ((a) < (b) ? (b) : (a)) + +static int stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(float orig[2], float ray[2], float q0[2], float q1[2], float q2[2], float hits[2][2]) +{ + float q0perp = q0[1]*ray[0] - q0[0]*ray[1]; + float q1perp = q1[1]*ray[0] - q1[0]*ray[1]; + float q2perp = q2[1]*ray[0] - q2[0]*ray[1]; + float roperp = orig[1]*ray[0] - orig[0]*ray[1]; + + float a = q0perp - 2*q1perp + q2perp; + float b = q1perp - q0perp; + float c = q0perp - roperp; + + float s0 = 0., s1 = 0.; + int num_s = 0; + + if (a != 0.0) { + float discr = b*b - a*c; + if (discr > 0.0) { + float rcpna = -1 / a; + float d = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discr); + s0 = (b+d) * rcpna; + s1 = (b-d) * rcpna; + if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0) + num_s = 1; + if (d > 0.0 && s1 >= 0.0 && s1 <= 1.0) { + if (num_s == 0) s0 = s1; + ++num_s; + } + } + } else { + // 2*b*s + c = 0 + // s = -c / (2*b) + s0 = c / (-2 * b); + if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0) + num_s = 1; + } + + if (num_s == 0) + return 0; + else { + float rcp_len2 = 1 / (ray[0]*ray[0] + ray[1]*ray[1]); + float rayn_x = ray[0] * rcp_len2, rayn_y = ray[1] * rcp_len2; + + float q0d = q0[0]*rayn_x + q0[1]*rayn_y; + float q1d = q1[0]*rayn_x + q1[1]*rayn_y; + float q2d = q2[0]*rayn_x + q2[1]*rayn_y; + float rod = orig[0]*rayn_x + orig[1]*rayn_y; + + float q10d = q1d - q0d; + float q20d = q2d - q0d; + float q0rd = q0d - rod; + + hits[0][0] = q0rd + s0*(2.0f - 2.0f*s0)*q10d + s0*s0*q20d; + hits[0][1] = a*s0+b; + + if (num_s > 1) { + hits[1][0] = q0rd + s1*(2.0f - 2.0f*s1)*q10d + s1*s1*q20d; + hits[1][1] = a*s1+b; + return 2; + } else { + return 1; + } + } +} + +static int equal(float *a, float *b) +{ + return (a[0] == b[0] && a[1] == b[1]); +} + +static int stbtt__compute_crossings_x(float x, float y, int nverts, stbtt_vertex *verts) +{ + int i; + float orig[2], ray[2] = { 1, 0 }; + float y_frac; + int winding = 0; + + // make sure y never passes through a vertex of the shape + y_frac = (float) STBTT_fmod(y, 1.0f); + if (y_frac < 0.01f) + y += 0.01f; + else if (y_frac > 0.99f) + y -= 0.01f; + + orig[0] = x; + orig[1] = y; + + // test a ray from (-infinity,y) to (x,y) + for (i=0; i < nverts; ++i) { + if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) { + int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x, y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y; + int x1 = (int) verts[i ].x, y1 = (int) verts[i ].y; + if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) { + float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0; + if (x_inter < x) + winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1; + } + } + if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) { + int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x , y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y ; + int x1 = (int) verts[i ].cx, y1 = (int) verts[i ].cy; + int x2 = (int) verts[i ].x , y2 = (int) verts[i ].y ; + int ax = STBTT_min(x0,STBTT_min(x1,x2)), ay = STBTT_min(y0,STBTT_min(y1,y2)); + int by = STBTT_max(y0,STBTT_max(y1,y2)); + if (y > ay && y < by && x > ax) { + float q0[2],q1[2],q2[2]; + float hits[2][2]; + q0[0] = (float)x0; + q0[1] = (float)y0; + q1[0] = (float)x1; + q1[1] = (float)y1; + q2[0] = (float)x2; + q2[1] = (float)y2; + if (equal(q0,q1) || equal(q1,q2)) { + x0 = (int)verts[i-1].x; + y0 = (int)verts[i-1].y; + x1 = (int)verts[i ].x; + y1 = (int)verts[i ].y; + if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) { + float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0; + if (x_inter < x) + winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1; + } + } else { + int num_hits = stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(orig, ray, q0, q1, q2, hits); + if (num_hits >= 1) + if (hits[0][0] < 0) + winding += (hits[0][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1); + if (num_hits >= 2) + if (hits[1][0] < 0) + winding += (hits[1][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1); + } + } + } + } + return winding; +} + +static float stbtt__cuberoot( float x ) +{ + if (x<0) + return -(float) STBTT_pow(-x,1.0f/3.0f); + else + return (float) STBTT_pow( x,1.0f/3.0f); +} + +// x^3 + a*x^2 + b*x + c = 0 +static int stbtt__solve_cubic(float a, float b, float c, float* r) +{ + float s = -a / 3; + float p = b - a*a / 3; + float q = a * (2*a*a - 9*b) / 27 + c; + float p3 = p*p*p; + float d = q*q + 4*p3 / 27; + if (d >= 0) { + float z = (float) STBTT_sqrt(d); + float u = (-q + z) / 2; + float v = (-q - z) / 2; + u = stbtt__cuberoot(u); + v = stbtt__cuberoot(v); + r[0] = s + u + v; + return 1; + } else { + float u = (float) STBTT_sqrt(-p/3); + float v = (float) STBTT_acos(-STBTT_sqrt(-27/p3) * q / 2) / 3; // p3 must be negative, since d is negative + float m = (float) STBTT_cos(v); + float n = (float) STBTT_cos(v-3.141592/2)*1.732050808f; + r[0] = s + u * 2 * m; + r[1] = s - u * (m + n); + r[2] = s - u * (m - n); + + //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[0]+a)*r[0]+b)*r[0]+c) < 0.05f); // these asserts may not be safe at all scales, though they're in bezier t parameter units so maybe? + //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[1]+a)*r[1]+b)*r[1]+c) < 0.05f); + //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[2]+a)*r[2]+b)*r[2]+c) < 0.05f); + return 3; + } +} + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff) +{ + float scale_x = scale, scale_y = scale; + int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1; + int w,h; + unsigned char *data; + + if (scale == 0) return NULL; + + stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale, scale, 0.0f,0.0f, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1); + + // if empty, return NULL + if (ix0 == ix1 || iy0 == iy1) + return NULL; + + ix0 -= padding; + iy0 -= padding; + ix1 += padding; + iy1 += padding; + + w = (ix1 - ix0); + h = (iy1 - iy0); + + if (width ) *width = w; + if (height) *height = h; + if (xoff ) *xoff = ix0; + if (yoff ) *yoff = iy0; + + // invert for y-downwards bitmaps + scale_y = -scale_y; + + { + int x,y,i,j; + float *precompute; + stbtt_vertex *verts; + int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &verts); + data = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(w * h, info->userdata); + precompute = (float *) STBTT_malloc(num_verts * sizeof(float), info->userdata); + + for (i=0,j=num_verts-1; i < num_verts; j=i++) { + if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) { + float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y; + float x1 = verts[j].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[j].y*scale_y; + float dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt((x1-x0)*(x1-x0) + (y1-y0)*(y1-y0)); + precompute[i] = (dist == 0) ? 0.0f : 1.0f / dist; + } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) { + float x2 = verts[j].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[j].y *scale_y; + float x1 = verts[i].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i].cy*scale_y; + float x0 = verts[i].x *scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y *scale_y; + float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2; + float len2 = bx*bx + by*by; + if (len2 != 0.0f) + precompute[i] = 1.0f / (bx*bx + by*by); + else + precompute[i] = 0.0f; + } else + precompute[i] = 0.0f; + } + + for (y=iy0; y < iy1; ++y) { + for (x=ix0; x < ix1; ++x) { + float val; + float min_dist = 999999.0f; + float sx = (float) x + 0.5f; + float sy = (float) y + 0.5f; + float x_gspace = (sx / scale_x); + float y_gspace = (sy / scale_y); + + int winding = stbtt__compute_crossings_x(x_gspace, y_gspace, num_verts, verts); // @OPTIMIZE: this could just be a rasterization, but needs to be line vs. non-tesselated curves so a new path + + for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) { + float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y; + + if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline && precompute[i] != 0.0f) { + float x1 = verts[i-1].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[i-1].y*scale_y; + + float dist,dist2 = (x0-sx)*(x0-sx) + (y0-sy)*(y0-sy); + if (dist2 < min_dist*min_dist) + min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2); + + // coarse culling against bbox + //if (sx > STBTT_min(x0,x1)-min_dist && sx < STBTT_max(x0,x1)+min_dist && + // sy > STBTT_min(y0,y1)-min_dist && sy < STBTT_max(y0,y1)+min_dist) + dist = (float) STBTT_fabs((x1-x0)*(y0-sy) - (y1-y0)*(x0-sx)) * precompute[i]; + STBTT_assert(i != 0); + if (dist < min_dist) { + // check position along line + // x' = x0 + t*(x1-x0), y' = y0 + t*(y1-y0) + // minimize (x'-sx)*(x'-sx)+(y'-sy)*(y'-sy) + float dx = x1-x0, dy = y1-y0; + float px = x0-sx, py = y0-sy; + // minimize (px+t*dx)^2 + (py+t*dy)^2 = px*px + 2*px*dx*t + t^2*dx*dx + py*py + 2*py*dy*t + t^2*dy*dy + // derivative: 2*px*dx + 2*py*dy + (2*dx*dx+2*dy*dy)*t, set to 0 and solve + float t = -(px*dx + py*dy) / (dx*dx + dy*dy); + if (t >= 0.0f && t <= 1.0f) + min_dist = dist; + } + } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) { + float x2 = verts[i-1].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[i-1].y *scale_y; + float x1 = verts[i ].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i ].cy*scale_y; + float box_x0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(x0,x1),x2); + float box_y0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(y0,y1),y2); + float box_x1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(x0,x1),x2); + float box_y1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(y0,y1),y2); + // coarse culling against bbox to avoid computing cubic unnecessarily + if (sx > box_x0-min_dist && sx < box_x1+min_dist && sy > box_y0-min_dist && sy < box_y1+min_dist) { + int num=0; + float ax = x1-x0, ay = y1-y0; + float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2; + float mx = x0 - sx, my = y0 - sy; + float res[3] = {0.f,0.f,0.f}; + float px,py,t,it,dist2; + float a_inv = precompute[i]; + if (a_inv == 0.0) { // if a_inv is 0, it's 2nd degree so use quadratic formula + float a = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by); + float b = 2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by); + float c = mx*ax+my*ay; + if (a == 0.0) { // if a is 0, it's linear + if (b != 0.0) { + res[num++] = -c/b; + } + } else { + float discriminant = b*b - 4*a*c; + if (discriminant < 0) + num = 0; + else { + float root = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discriminant); + res[0] = (-b - root)/(2*a); + res[1] = (-b + root)/(2*a); + num = 2; // don't bother distinguishing 1-solution case, as code below will still work + } + } + } else { + float b = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by) * a_inv; // could precompute this as it doesn't depend on sample point + float c = (2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by)) * a_inv; + float d = (mx*ax+my*ay) * a_inv; + num = stbtt__solve_cubic(b, c, d, res); + } + dist2 = (x0-sx)*(x0-sx) + (y0-sy)*(y0-sy); + if (dist2 < min_dist*min_dist) + min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2); + + if (num >= 1 && res[0] >= 0.0f && res[0] <= 1.0f) { + t = res[0], it = 1.0f - t; + px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2; + py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2; + dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy); + if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist) + min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2); + } + if (num >= 2 && res[1] >= 0.0f && res[1] <= 1.0f) { + t = res[1], it = 1.0f - t; + px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2; + py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2; + dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy); + if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist) + min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2); + } + if (num >= 3 && res[2] >= 0.0f && res[2] <= 1.0f) { + t = res[2], it = 1.0f - t; + px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2; + py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2; + dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy); + if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist) + min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2); + } + } + } + } + if (winding == 0) + min_dist = -min_dist; // if outside the shape, value is negative + val = onedge_value + pixel_dist_scale * min_dist; + if (val < 0) + val = 0; + else if (val > 255) + val = 255; + data[(y-iy0)*w+(x-ix0)] = (unsigned char) val; + } + } + STBTT_free(precompute, info->userdata); + STBTT_free(verts, info->userdata); + } + return data; +} + +STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff) +{ + return stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(info, scale, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint), padding, onedge_value, pixel_dist_scale, width, height, xoff, yoff); +} + +STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata) +{ + STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata); +} + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// font name matching -- recommended not to use this +// + +// check if a utf8 string contains a prefix which is the utf16 string; if so return length of matching utf8 string +static stbtt_int32 stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(stbtt_uint8 *s1, stbtt_int32 len1, stbtt_uint8 *s2, stbtt_int32 len2) +{ + stbtt_int32 i=0; + + // convert utf16 to utf8 and compare the results while converting + while (len2) { + stbtt_uint16 ch = s2[0]*256 + s2[1]; + if (ch < 0x80) { + if (i >= len1) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != ch) return -1; + } else if (ch < 0x800) { + if (i+1 >= len1) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0xc0 + (ch >> 6)) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + (ch & 0x3f)) return -1; + } else if (ch >= 0xd800 && ch < 0xdc00) { + stbtt_uint32 c; + stbtt_uint16 ch2 = s2[2]*256 + s2[3]; + if (i+3 >= len1) return -1; + c = ((ch - 0xd800) << 10) + (ch2 - 0xdc00) + 0x10000; + if (s1[i++] != 0xf0 + (c >> 18)) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >> 12) & 0x3f)) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f)) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f)) return -1; + s2 += 2; // plus another 2 below + len2 -= 2; + } else if (ch >= 0xdc00 && ch < 0xe000) { + return -1; + } else { + if (i+2 >= len1) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0xe0 + (ch >> 12)) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch >> 6) & 0x3f)) return -1; + if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch ) & 0x3f)) return -1; + } + s2 += 2; + len2 -= 2; + } + return i; +} + +static int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal(char *s1, int len1, char *s2, int len2) +{ + return len1 == stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix((stbtt_uint8*) s1, len1, (stbtt_uint8*) s2, len2); +} + +// returns results in whatever encoding you request... but note that 2-byte encodings +// will be BIG-ENDIAN... use stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian() to compare +STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID) +{ + stbtt_int32 i,count,stringOffset; + stbtt_uint8 *fc = font->data; + stbtt_uint32 offset = font->fontstart; + stbtt_uint32 nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name"); + if (!nm) return NULL; + + count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2); + stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4); + for (i=0; i < count; ++i) { + stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i; + if (platformID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0) && encodingID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2) + && languageID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4) && nameID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6)) { + *length = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8); + return (const char *) (fc+stringOffset+ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10)); + } + } + return NULL; +} + +static int stbtt__matchpair(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 nm, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 nlen, stbtt_int32 target_id, stbtt_int32 next_id) +{ + stbtt_int32 i; + stbtt_int32 count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2); + stbtt_int32 stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4); + + for (i=0; i < count; ++i) { + stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i; + stbtt_int32 id = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6); + if (id == target_id) { + // find the encoding + stbtt_int32 platform = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0), encoding = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2), language = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4); + + // is this a Unicode encoding? + if (platform == 0 || (platform == 3 && encoding == 1) || (platform == 3 && encoding == 10)) { + stbtt_int32 slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8); + stbtt_int32 off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10); + + // check if there's a prefix match + stbtt_int32 matchlen = stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(name, nlen, fc+stringOffset+off,slen); + if (matchlen >= 0) { + // check for target_id+1 immediately following, with same encoding & language + if (i+1 < count && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+6) == next_id && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12) == platform && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+2) == encoding && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+4) == language) { + slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+8); + off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+10); + if (slen == 0) { + if (matchlen == nlen) + return 1; + } else if (matchlen < nlen && name[matchlen] == ' ') { + ++matchlen; + if (stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char*) (name+matchlen), nlen-matchlen, (char*)(fc+stringOffset+off),slen)) + return 1; + } + } else { + // if nothing immediately following + if (matchlen == nlen) + return 1; + } + } + } + + // @TODO handle other encodings + } + } + return 0; +} + +static int stbtt__matches(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 offset, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 flags) +{ + stbtt_int32 nlen = (stbtt_int32) STBTT_strlen((char *) name); + stbtt_uint32 nm,hd; + if (!stbtt__isfont(fc+offset)) return 0; + + // check italics/bold/underline flags in macStyle... + if (flags) { + hd = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "head"); + if ((ttUSHORT(fc+hd+44) & 7) != (flags & 7)) return 0; + } + + nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name"); + if (!nm) return 0; + + if (flags) { + // if we checked the macStyle flags, then just check the family and ignore the subfamily + if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, -1)) return 1; + if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 1, -1)) return 1; + if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 3, -1)) return 1; + } else { + if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, 17)) return 1; + if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 1, 2)) return 1; + if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 3, -1)) return 1; + } + + return 0; +} + +static int stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, char *name_utf8, stbtt_int32 flags) +{ + stbtt_int32 i; + for (i=0;;++i) { + stbtt_int32 off = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(font_collection, i); + if (off < 0) return off; + if (stbtt__matches((stbtt_uint8 *) font_collection, off, (stbtt_uint8*) name_utf8, flags)) + return off; + } +} + +#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic push +#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual" +#endif + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset, + float pixel_height, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, + int first_char, int num_chars, stbtt_bakedchar *chardata) +{ + return stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal((unsigned char *) data, offset, pixel_height, pixels, pw, ph, first_char, num_chars, chardata); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index) +{ + return stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal((unsigned char *) data, index); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data) +{ + return stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal((unsigned char *) data); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset) +{ + return stbtt_InitFont_internal(info, (unsigned char *) data, offset); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags) +{ + return stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal((unsigned char *) fontdata, (char *) name, flags); +} + +STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2) +{ + return stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char *) s1, len1, (char *) s2, len2); +} + +#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__) +#pragma GCC diagnostic pop +#endif + +#endif // STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION + + +// FULL VERSION HISTORY +// +// 1.25 (2021-07-11) many fixes +// 1.24 (2020-02-05) fix warning +// 1.23 (2020-02-02) query SVG data for glyphs; query whole kerning table (but only kern not GPOS) +// 1.22 (2019-08-11) minimize missing-glyph duplication; fix kerning if both 'GPOS' and 'kern' are defined +// 1.21 (2019-02-25) fix warning +// 1.20 (2019-02-07) PackFontRange skips missing codepoints; GetScaleFontVMetrics() +// 1.19 (2018-02-11) OpenType GPOS kerning (horizontal only), STBTT_fmod +// 1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function +// 1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix +// 1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support +// 1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const +// 1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function +// 1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts +// 1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual +// 1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning +// 1.10 (2016-04-02) allow user-defined fabs() replacement +// fix memory leak if fontsize=0.0 +// fix warning from duplicate typedef +// 1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use alloc userdata for PackFontRanges +// 1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges +// 1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints; +// allow PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases; +// fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?); +// fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer +// replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer +// 1.06 (2015-07-14) performance improvements (~35% faster on x86 and x64 on test machine) +// also more precise AA rasterizer, except if shapes overlap +// remove need for STBTT_sort +// 1.05 (2015-04-15) fix misplaced definitions for STBTT_STATIC +// 1.04 (2015-04-15) typo in example +// 1.03 (2015-04-12) STBTT_STATIC, fix memory leak in new packing, various fixes +// 1.02 (2014-12-10) fix various warnings & compile issues w/ stb_rect_pack, C++ +// 1.01 (2014-12-08) fix subpixel position when oversampling to exactly match +// non-oversampled; STBTT_POINT_SIZE for packed case only +// 1.00 (2014-12-06) add new PackBegin etc. API, w/ support for oversampling +// 0.99 (2014-09-18) fix multiple bugs with subpixel rendering (ryg) +// 0.9 (2014-08-07) support certain mac/iOS fonts without an MS platformID +// 0.8b (2014-07-07) fix a warning +// 0.8 (2014-05-25) fix a few more warnings +// 0.7 (2013-09-25) bugfix: subpixel glyph bug fixed in 0.5 had come back +// 0.6c (2012-07-24) improve documentation +// 0.6b (2012-07-20) fix a few more warnings +// 0.6 (2012-07-17) fix warnings; added stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels, +// stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox, stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty +// 0.5 (2011-12-09) bugfixes: +// subpixel glyph renderer computed wrong bounding box +// first vertex of shape can be off-curve (FreeSans) +// 0.4b (2011-12-03) fixed an error in the font baking example +// 0.4 (2011-12-01) kerning, subpixel rendering (tor) +// bugfixes for: +// codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=12 +// codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=4 +// stbtt_GetBakedQuad with non-square texture (Zer) +// updated Hello World! sample to use kerning and subpixel +// fixed some warnings +// 0.3 (2009-06-24) cmap fmt=12, compound shapes (MM) +// userdata, malloc-from-userdata, non-zero fill (stb) +// 0.2 (2009-03-11) Fix unsigned/signed char warnings +// 0.1 (2009-03-09) First public release +// + +/* +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License +Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett +Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of +this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in +the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to +use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies +of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do +so, subject to the following conditions: +The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all +copies or substantial portions of the Software. +THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER +LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, +OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE +SOFTWARE. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org) +This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain. +Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this +software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose, +commercial or non-commercial, and by any means. +In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this +software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public +domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to +the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an +overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to +this software under copyright law. +THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR +IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE +AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN +ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION +WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +*/ diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui_notify.h b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui_notify.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5cb8c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/imgui_notify.h @@ -0,0 +1,368 @@ +// imgui-notify by patrickcjk +// https://github.com/patrickcjk/imgui-notify + +#ifndef IMGUI_NOTIFY +#define IMGUI_NOTIFY + +#pragma once +#include +#include +#include +#include "../resources/fa_solid_900.h" +#include "../resources//font_awesome_5.h" + +#define NOTIFY_MAX_MSG_LENGTH 4096 // Max message content length +#define NOTIFY_PADDING_X 20.f // Bottom-left X padding +#define NOTIFY_PADDING_Y 20.f // Bottom-left Y padding +#define NOTIFY_PADDING_MESSAGE_Y 10.f // Padding Y between each message +#define NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME 150 // Fade in and out duration +#define NOTIFY_DEFAULT_DISMISS 3000 // Auto dismiss after X ms (default, applied only of no data provided in constructors) +#define NOTIFY_OPACITY 1.0f // 0-1 Toast opacity +#define NOTIFY_TOAST_FLAGS ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing +// Comment out if you don't want any separator between title and content +#define NOTIFY_USE_SEPARATOR + +#define NOTIFY_INLINE CS_INLINE +#define NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(str) (str == nullptr || CRT::StringLength(str) == 0) +#define NOTIFY_FORMAT(fn, format, ...) if (format) { va_list args; va_start(args, format); fn(format, args, ##__VA_ARGS__); va_end(args); } + +typedef int ImGuiToastType; +typedef int ImGuiToastPhase; +typedef int ImGuiToastPos; + +enum ImGuiToastType_ +{ + ImGuiToastType_None, + ImGuiToastType_Success, + ImGuiToastType_Warning, + ImGuiToastType_Error, + ImGuiToastType_Info, + ImGuiToastType_COUNT +}; + +enum ImGuiToastPhase_ +{ + ImGuiToastPhase_FadeIn, + ImGuiToastPhase_Wait, + ImGuiToastPhase_FadeOut, + ImGuiToastPhase_Expired, + ImGuiToastPhase_COUNT +}; + +enum ImGuiToastPos_ +{ + ImGuiToastPos_TopLeft, + ImGuiToastPos_TopCenter, + ImGuiToastPos_TopRight, + ImGuiToastPos_BottomLeft, + ImGuiToastPos_BottomCenter, + ImGuiToastPos_BottomRight, + ImGuiToastPos_Center, + ImGuiToastPos_COUNT +}; + +class ImGuiToast +{ +private: + ImGuiToastType type = ImGuiToastType_None; + char title[NOTIFY_MAX_MSG_LENGTH]; + char content[NOTIFY_MAX_MSG_LENGTH]; + int dismiss_time = NOTIFY_DEFAULT_DISMISS; + uint64_t creation_time = 0; + +private: + // Setters + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto set_title(const char* format, va_list args){ stbsp_vsnprintf(this->title, sizeof(this->title), format, args); } + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto set_content(const char* format, va_list args) { stbsp_vsnprintf(this->content, sizeof(this->content), format, args); } + +public: + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto set_title(const char* format, ...) -> void { NOTIFY_FORMAT(this->set_title, format); } + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto set_content(const char* format, ...) -> void { NOTIFY_FORMAT(this->set_content, format); } + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto set_type(const ImGuiToastType& type) -> void { IM_ASSERT(type < ImGuiToastType_COUNT); this->type = type; }; + +public: + // Getters + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_title() -> char* { return this->title; }; + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_default_title() -> const char* + { + if (!strlen(this->title)) + { + switch (this->type) + { + case ImGuiToastType_None: + return NULL; + case ImGuiToastType_Success: + return "Success"; + case ImGuiToastType_Warning: + return "Warning"; + case ImGuiToastType_Error: + return "Error"; + case ImGuiToastType_Info: + return "Info"; + default: + return NULL; + } + } + + return this->title; + }; + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_type() -> const ImGuiToastType& { return this->type; }; + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_color() -> const ImVec4 + { + switch (this->type) + { + case ImGuiToastType_None: + return { 255, 255, 255, 255 }; // White + case ImGuiToastType_Success: + return { 0, 255, 0, 255 }; // Green + case ImGuiToastType_Warning: + return { 255, 255, 0, 255 }; // Yellow + case ImGuiToastType_Error: + return { 255, 0, 0, 255 }; // Error + case ImGuiToastType_Info: + return { 0, 157, 255, 255 }; // Blue + default: + return { 255, 255, 255, 255 }; // White + } + } + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_icon() -> const char* + { + switch (this->type) + { + case ImGuiToastType_None: + return NULL; + case ImGuiToastType_Success: + return ICON_FA_CHECK_CIRCLE; + case ImGuiToastType_Warning: + return ICON_FA_EXCLAMATION_TRIANGLE; + case ImGuiToastType_Error: + return ICON_FA_TIMES_CIRCLE; + case ImGuiToastType_Info: + return ICON_FA_INFO_CIRCLE; + default: + return NULL; + } + } + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_content() -> char* { return this->content; }; + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_elapsed_time() { return get_tick_count() - this->creation_time; } + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_phase() -> const ImGuiToastPhase + { + const auto elapsed = get_elapsed_time(); + + if (elapsed > NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME + this->dismiss_time + NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME) + { + return ImGuiToastPhase_Expired; + } + else if (elapsed > NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME + this->dismiss_time) + { + return ImGuiToastPhase_FadeOut; + } + else if (elapsed > NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME) + { + return ImGuiToastPhase_Wait; + } + else + { + return ImGuiToastPhase_FadeIn; + } + } + + NOTIFY_INLINE auto get_fade_percent() -> const float + { + const auto phase = get_phase(); + const auto elapsed = get_elapsed_time(); + + if (phase == ImGuiToastPhase_FadeIn) + { + return ((float)elapsed / (float)NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME) * NOTIFY_OPACITY; + } + else if (phase == ImGuiToastPhase_FadeOut) + { + return (1.f - (((float)elapsed - (float)NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME - (float)this->dismiss_time) / (float)NOTIFY_FADE_IN_OUT_TIME)) * NOTIFY_OPACITY; + } + + return 1.f * NOTIFY_OPACITY; + } + + NOTIFY_INLINE static auto get_tick_count() -> const unsigned long long + { + using namespace std::chrono; + return duration_cast(steady_clock::now().time_since_epoch()).count(); + } + +public: + // Constructors + + ImGuiToast(ImGuiToastType type, int dismiss_time = NOTIFY_DEFAULT_DISMISS) + { + IM_ASSERT(type < ImGuiToastType_COUNT); + + this->type = type; + this->dismiss_time = dismiss_time; + this->creation_time = get_tick_count(); + + CRT::MemorySet(this->title, 0, sizeof(this->title)); + CRT::MemorySet(this->content, 0, sizeof(this->content)); + } + + ImGuiToast(ImGuiToastType type, const char* format, ...) : ImGuiToast(type) { NOTIFY_FORMAT(this->set_content, format); } + + ImGuiToast(ImGuiToastType type, int dismiss_time, const char* format, ...) : ImGuiToast(type, dismiss_time) { NOTIFY_FORMAT(this->set_content, format); } +}; + +namespace ImGui +{ + inline std::vector notifications; + + /// + /// Insert a new toast in the list + /// + NOTIFY_INLINE std::size_t InsertNotification(const ImGuiToast& toast) + { + notifications.push_back(toast); + return notifications.size() - 1U; + } + + /// + /// Remove a toast from the list by its index + /// + /// index of the toast to remove + NOTIFY_INLINE void RemoveNotification(int index) + { + notifications.erase(notifications.begin() + index); + } + + /// + /// Render toasts, call at the end of your rendering! + /// + NOTIFY_INLINE void RenderNotifications() + { + const auto vp_size = GetMainViewport()->Size; + + float height = 0.f; + + for (auto i = 0; i < notifications.size(); i++) + { + auto* current_toast = ¬ifications[i]; + + // Remove toast if expired + if (current_toast->get_phase() == ImGuiToastPhase_Expired) + { + RemoveNotification(i); + continue; + } + + // Get icon, title and other data + const auto icon = current_toast->get_icon(); + const auto title = current_toast->get_title(); + const auto content = current_toast->get_content(); + const auto default_title = current_toast->get_default_title(); + const auto opacity = current_toast->get_fade_percent(); // Get opacity based of the current phase + + // Window rendering + auto text_color = current_toast->get_color(); + text_color.w = opacity; + + // Generate new unique name for this toast + char window_name[50]{}; + snprintf(window_name, sizeof(window_name), "##TOAST%d", i); + + //PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, text_color); + SetNextWindowBgAlpha(opacity); + SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(vp_size.x - NOTIFY_PADDING_X, vp_size.y - NOTIFY_PADDING_Y - height), ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f)); + Begin(window_name, NULL, NOTIFY_TOAST_FLAGS); + + // Here we render the toast content + { + PushTextWrapPos(vp_size.x / 3.f); // We want to support multi-line text, this will wrap the text after 1/3 of the screen width + + bool was_title_rendered = false; + + // If an icon is set + if (!NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(icon)) + { + //Text(icon); // Render icon text + TextColored(text_color, icon); + was_title_rendered = true; + } + + // If a title is set + if (!NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(title)) + { + // If a title and an icon is set, we want to render on same line + if (!NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(icon)) + SameLine(); + + Text(title); // Render title text + was_title_rendered = true; + } + else if (!NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(default_title)) + { + if (!NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(icon)) + SameLine(); + + Text(default_title); // Render default title text (ImGuiToastType_Success -> "Success", etc...) + was_title_rendered = true; + } + + // In case ANYTHING was rendered in the top, we want to add a small padding so the text (or icon) looks centered vertically + if (was_title_rendered && !NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(content)) + { + SetCursorPosY(GetCursorPosY() + 5.f); // Must be a better way to do this!!!! + } + + // If a content is set + if (!NOTIFY_NULL_OR_EMPTY(content)) + { + if (was_title_rendered) + { +#ifdef NOTIFY_USE_SEPARATOR + Separator(); +#endif + } + + Text(content); // Render content text + } + + PopTextWrapPos(); + } + + // Save height for next toasts + height += GetWindowHeight() + NOTIFY_PADDING_MESSAGE_Y; + + // End + End(); + } + } + + /// + /// Adds font-awesome font, must be called ONCE on initialization + /// Fonts are loaded from read-only memory, should be set to false! + /// + NOTIFY_INLINE void MergeIconsWithLatestFont(float font_size, bool FontDataOwnedByAtlas = false) + { + static const ImWchar icons_ranges[] = { ICON_MIN_FA, ICON_MAX_FA, 0 }; + + ImFontConfig icons_config; + icons_config.MergeMode = true; + icons_config.PixelSnapH = true; + icons_config.FontDataOwnedByAtlas = FontDataOwnedByAtlas; + + GetIO().Fonts->AddFontFromMemoryTTF((void*)fa_solid_900, sizeof(fa_solid_900), font_size, &icons_config, icons_ranges); + } +} + +#endif diff --git a/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/json.hpp b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/json.hpp new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d1a37a --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/cs2-silent-aim-master/dependencies/json.hpp @@ -0,0 +1,24596 @@ +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + +/****************************************************************************\ + * Note on documentation: The source files contain links to the online * + * documentation of the public API at https://json.nlohmann.me. This URL * + * contains the most recent documentation and should also be applicable to * + * previous versions; documentation for deprecated functions is not * + * removed, but marked deprecated. See "Generate documentation" section in * + * file docs/README.md. * +\****************************************************************************/ + +#ifndef INCLUDE_NLOHMANN_JSON_HPP_ +#define INCLUDE_NLOHMANN_JSON_HPP_ + +#include // all_of, find, for_each +#include // nullptr_t, ptrdiff_t, size_t +#include // hash, less +#include // initializer_list +#ifndef JSON_NO_IO + #include // istream, ostream +#endif // JSON_NO_IO +#include // random_access_iterator_tag +#include // unique_ptr +#include // accumulate +#include // string, stoi, to_string +#include // declval, forward, move, pair, swap +#include // vector + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +// This file contains all macro definitions affecting or depending on the ABI + +#ifndef JSON_SKIP_LIBRARY_VERSION_CHECK + #if defined(NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MAJOR) && defined(NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MINOR) && defined(NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_PATCH) + #if NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MAJOR != 3 || NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MINOR != 11 || NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_PATCH != 2 + #warning "Already included a different version of the library!" + #endif + #endif +#endif + +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MAJOR 3 // NOLINT(modernize-macro-to-enum) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MINOR 11 // NOLINT(modernize-macro-to-enum) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_PATCH 2 // NOLINT(modernize-macro-to-enum) + +#ifndef JSON_DIAGNOSTICS + #define JSON_DIAGNOSTICS 0 +#endif + +#ifndef JSON_USE_LEGACY_DISCARDED_VALUE_COMPARISON + #define JSON_USE_LEGACY_DISCARDED_VALUE_COMPARISON 0 +#endif + +#if JSON_DIAGNOSTICS + #define NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAG_DIAGNOSTICS _diag +#else + #define NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAG_DIAGNOSTICS +#endif + +#if JSON_USE_LEGACY_DISCARDED_VALUE_COMPARISON + #define NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAG_LEGACY_DISCARDED_VALUE_COMPARISON _ldvcmp +#else + #define NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAG_LEGACY_DISCARDED_VALUE_COMPARISON +#endif + +#ifndef NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_NO_VERSION + #define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_NO_VERSION 0 +#endif + +// Construct the namespace ABI tags component +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAGS_CONCAT_EX(a, b) json_abi ## a ## b +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAGS_CONCAT(a, b) \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAGS_CONCAT_EX(a, b) + +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAGS \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAGS_CONCAT( \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAG_DIAGNOSTICS, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAG_LEGACY_DISCARDED_VALUE_COMPARISON) + +// Construct the namespace version component +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION_CONCAT_EX(major, minor, patch) \ + _v ## major ## _ ## minor ## _ ## patch +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION_CONCAT(major, minor, patch) \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION_CONCAT_EX(major, minor, patch) + +#if NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_NO_VERSION +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION +#else +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION_CONCAT(NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MAJOR, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_MINOR, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_VERSION_PATCH) +#endif + +// Combine namespace components +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_CONCAT_EX(a, b) a ## b +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_CONCAT(a, b) \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_CONCAT_EX(a, b) + +#ifndef NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE \ + nlohmann::NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_CONCAT( \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAGS, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION) +#endif + +#ifndef NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN \ + namespace nlohmann \ + { \ + inline namespace NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_CONCAT( \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_ABI_TAGS, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_VERSION) \ + { +#endif + +#ifndef NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END \ + } /* namespace (inline namespace) NOLINT(readability/namespace) */ \ + } // namespace nlohmann +#endif + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // transform +#include // array +#include // forward_list +#include // inserter, front_inserter, end +#include // map +#include // string +#include // tuple, make_tuple +#include // is_arithmetic, is_same, is_enum, underlying_type, is_convertible +#include // unordered_map +#include // pair, declval +#include // valarray + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // nullptr_t +#include // exception +#include // runtime_error +#include // to_string +#include // vector + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // array +#include // size_t +#include // uint8_t +#include // string + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // declval, pair +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +// #include + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +namespace detail +{ + +template struct make_void +{ + using type = void; +}; +template using void_t = typename make_void::type; + +} // namespace detail +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +namespace detail +{ + +// https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/experimental/is_detected +struct nonesuch +{ + nonesuch() = delete; + ~nonesuch() = delete; + nonesuch(nonesuch const&) = delete; + nonesuch(nonesuch const&&) = delete; + void operator=(nonesuch const&) = delete; + void operator=(nonesuch&&) = delete; +}; + +template class Op, + class... Args> +struct detector +{ + using value_t = std::false_type; + using type = Default; +}; + +template class Op, class... Args> +struct detector>, Op, Args...> +{ + using value_t = std::true_type; + using type = Op; +}; + +template class Op, class... Args> +using is_detected = typename detector::value_t; + +template class Op, class... Args> +struct is_detected_lazy : is_detected { }; + +template class Op, class... Args> +using detected_t = typename detector::type; + +template class Op, class... Args> +using detected_or = detector; + +template class Op, class... Args> +using detected_or_t = typename detected_or::type; + +template class Op, class... Args> +using is_detected_exact = std::is_same>; + +template class Op, class... Args> +using is_detected_convertible = + std::is_convertible, To>; + +} // namespace detail +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include + + +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2016-2021 Evan Nemerson +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + +/* Hedley - https://nemequ.github.io/hedley + * Created by Evan Nemerson + */ + +#if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION) || (JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION < 15) +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION 15 + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_STRINGIFY_EX) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_STRINGIFY_EX +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_STRINGIFY_EX(x) #x + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_STRINGIFY) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_STRINGIFY +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_STRINGIFY(x) JSON_HEDLEY_STRINGIFY_EX(x) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT_EX) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT_EX +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT_EX(a,b) a##b + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT(a,b) JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT_EX(a,b) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT3_EX) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT3_EX +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT3_EX(a,b,c) a##b##c + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT3) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT3 +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT3(a,b,c) JSON_HEDLEY_CONCAT3_EX(a,b,c) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major,minor,revision) (((major) * 1000000) + ((minor) * 1000) + (revision)) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_MAJOR) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_MAJOR +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_MAJOR(version) ((version) / 1000000) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_MINOR) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_MINOR +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_MINOR(version) (((version) % 1000000) / 1000) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_REVISION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_REVISION +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_DECODE_REVISION(version) ((version) % 1000) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__GNUC__, __GNUC_MINOR__, __GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__) +#elif defined(__GNUC__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__GNUC__, __GNUC_MINOR__, 0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(_MSC_FULL_VER) && (_MSC_FULL_VER >= 140000000) && !defined(__ICL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(_MSC_FULL_VER / 10000000, (_MSC_FULL_VER % 10000000) / 100000, (_MSC_FULL_VER % 100000) / 100) +#elif defined(_MSC_FULL_VER) && !defined(__ICL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(_MSC_FULL_VER / 1000000, (_MSC_FULL_VER % 1000000) / 10000, (_MSC_FULL_VER % 10000) / 10) +#elif defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__ICL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(_MSC_VER / 100, _MSC_VER % 100, 0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#elif defined(_MSC_VER) && (_MSC_VER >= 1400) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (_MSC_FULL_VER >= ((major * 10000000) + (minor * 100000) + (patch))) +#elif defined(_MSC_VER) && (_MSC_VER >= 1200) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (_MSC_FULL_VER >= ((major * 1000000) + (minor * 10000) + (patch))) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (_MSC_VER >= ((major * 100) + (minor))) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && defined(__INTEL_COMPILER_UPDATE) && !defined(__ICL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__INTEL_COMPILER / 100, __INTEL_COMPILER % 100, __INTEL_COMPILER_UPDATE) +#elif defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && !defined(__ICL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__INTEL_COMPILER / 100, __INTEL_COMPILER % 100, 0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && defined(__INTEL_COMPILER_UPDATE) && defined(__ICL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__INTEL_COMPILER, __INTEL_COMPILER_UPDATE, 0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__PGI) && defined(__PGIC__) && defined(__PGIC_MINOR__) && defined(__PGIC_PATCHLEVEL__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__PGIC__, __PGIC_MINOR__, __PGIC_PATCHLEVEL__) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__SUNPRO_C) && (__SUNPRO_C > 0x1000) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE((((__SUNPRO_C >> 16) & 0xf) * 10) + ((__SUNPRO_C >> 12) & 0xf), (((__SUNPRO_C >> 8) & 0xf) * 10) + ((__SUNPRO_C >> 4) & 0xf), (__SUNPRO_C & 0xf) * 10) +#elif defined(__SUNPRO_C) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE((__SUNPRO_C >> 8) & 0xf, (__SUNPRO_C >> 4) & 0xf, (__SUNPRO_C) & 0xf) +#elif defined(__SUNPRO_CC) && (__SUNPRO_CC > 0x1000) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE((((__SUNPRO_CC >> 16) & 0xf) * 10) + ((__SUNPRO_CC >> 12) & 0xf), (((__SUNPRO_CC >> 8) & 0xf) * 10) + ((__SUNPRO_CC >> 4) & 0xf), (__SUNPRO_CC & 0xf) * 10) +#elif defined(__SUNPRO_CC) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE((__SUNPRO_CC >> 8) & 0xf, (__SUNPRO_CC >> 4) & 0xf, (__SUNPRO_CC) & 0xf) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__EMSCRIPTEN__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__EMSCRIPTEN_major__, __EMSCRIPTEN_minor__, __EMSCRIPTEN_tiny__) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_EMSCRIPTEN_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__CC_ARM) && defined(__ARMCOMPILER_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__ARMCOMPILER_VERSION / 1000000, (__ARMCOMPILER_VERSION % 1000000) / 10000, (__ARMCOMPILER_VERSION % 10000) / 100) +#elif defined(__CC_ARM) && defined(__ARMCC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__ARMCC_VERSION / 1000000, (__ARMCC_VERSION % 1000000) / 10000, (__ARMCC_VERSION % 10000) / 100) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__ibmxl__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__ibmxl_version__, __ibmxl_release__, __ibmxl_modification__) +#elif defined(__xlC__) && defined(__xlC_ver__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__xlC__ >> 8, __xlC__ & 0xff, (__xlC_ver__ >> 8) & 0xff) +#elif defined(__xlC__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__xlC__ >> 8, __xlC__ & 0xff, 0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION +#endif +#if \ + defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__) && \ + ( \ + defined(__TMS470__) || defined(__TI_ARM__) || \ + defined(__MSP430__) || \ + defined(__TMS320C2000__) \ + ) +#if (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ >= 16000000) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ / 1000000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000000) / 1000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000)) +#endif +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__) && defined(__TMS320C2000__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ / 1000000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000000) / 1000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__) && defined(__MSP430__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ / 1000000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000000) / 1000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__) && (defined(__TMS470__) || defined(__TI_ARM__)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ / 1000000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000000) / 1000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__) && defined(__TMS320C6X__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ / 1000000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000000) / 1000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__) && defined(__C7000__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ / 1000000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000000) / 1000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__) && defined(__PRU__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ / 1000000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000000) / 1000, (__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__ % 1000)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(_CRAYC) + #if defined(_RELEASE_PATCHLEVEL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(_RELEASE_MAJOR, _RELEASE_MINOR, _RELEASE_PATCHLEVEL) + #else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(_RELEASE_MAJOR, _RELEASE_MINOR, 0) + #endif +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__IAR_SYSTEMS_ICC__) + #if __VER__ > 1000 + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE((__VER__ / 1000000), ((__VER__ / 1000) % 1000), (__VER__ % 1000)) + #else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__VER__ / 100, __VER__ % 100, 0) + #endif +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__TINYC__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__TINYC__ / 1000, (__TINYC__ / 100) % 10, __TINYC__ % 100) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__DMC__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__DMC__ >> 8, (__DMC__ >> 4) & 0xf, __DMC__ & 0xf) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DMC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__COMPCERT_VERSION__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__COMPCERT_VERSION__ / 10000, (__COMPCERT_VERSION__ / 100) % 100, __COMPCERT_VERSION__ % 100) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__POCC__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__POCC__ / 100, __POCC__ % 100, 0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION +#endif +#if defined(__LCC__) && defined(__LCC_MINOR__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(__LCC__ / 100, __LCC__ % 100, __LCC_MINOR__) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION +#endif +#if \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION) && \ + !defined(__clang__) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION) && \ + !defined(__COMPCERT__) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION >= JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor, patch)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if \ + defined(__has_attribute) && \ + ( \ + (!defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION) || JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,5,9)) \ + ) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) __has_attribute(attribute) +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if defined(__has_attribute) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if defined(__has_attribute) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if \ + defined(__has_cpp_attribute) && \ + defined(__cplusplus) && \ + (!defined(JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION) || JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,15,0)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) __has_cpp_attribute(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE_NS) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE_NS +#endif +#if !defined(__cplusplus) || !defined(__has_cpp_attribute) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE_NS(ns,attribute) (0) +#elif \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION) && \ + (!defined(JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION) || JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,15,0)) && \ + (!defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION) || JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(19,20,0)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE_NS(ns,attribute) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(ns::attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE_NS(ns,attribute) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if defined(__has_cpp_attribute) && defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) __has_cpp_attribute(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if defined(__has_cpp_attribute) && defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) __has_cpp_attribute(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN +#endif +#if defined(__has_builtin) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin) __has_builtin(builtin) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_BUILTIN) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_BUILTIN +#endif +#if defined(__has_builtin) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin,major,minor,patch) __has_builtin(builtin) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_BUILTIN) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_BUILTIN +#endif +#if defined(__has_builtin) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin,major,minor,patch) __has_builtin(builtin) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_FEATURE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_FEATURE +#endif +#if defined(__has_feature) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_FEATURE(feature) __has_feature(feature) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_FEATURE(feature) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_FEATURE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_FEATURE +#endif +#if defined(__has_feature) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_FEATURE(feature,major,minor,patch) __has_feature(feature) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_FEATURE(feature,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_FEATURE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_FEATURE +#endif +#if defined(__has_feature) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_FEATURE(feature,major,minor,patch) __has_feature(feature) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_FEATURE(feature,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_EXTENSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_EXTENSION +#endif +#if defined(__has_extension) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_EXTENSION(extension) __has_extension(extension) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_EXTENSION(extension) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_EXTENSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_EXTENSION +#endif +#if defined(__has_extension) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_EXTENSION(extension,major,minor,patch) __has_extension(extension) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_EXTENSION(extension,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_EXTENSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_EXTENSION +#endif +#if defined(__has_extension) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_EXTENSION(extension,major,minor,patch) __has_extension(extension) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_EXTENSION(extension,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if defined(__has_declspec_attribute) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) __has_declspec_attribute(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if defined(__has_declspec_attribute) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) __has_declspec_attribute(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#if defined(__has_declspec_attribute) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) __has_declspec_attribute(attribute) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING +#endif +#if defined(__has_warning) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING(warning) __has_warning(warning) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING(warning) (0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_WARNING) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_WARNING +#endif +#if defined(__has_warning) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_WARNING(warning,major,minor,patch) __has_warning(warning) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_HAS_WARNING(warning,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GNUC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_WARNING) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_WARNING +#endif +#if defined(__has_warning) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_WARNING(warning,major,minor,patch) __has_warning(warning) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_WARNING(warning,major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if \ + (defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L)) || \ + defined(__clang__) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(18,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,7,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(2,0,1) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(5,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK(0,9,17) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) && defined(__C99_PRAGMA_OPERATOR)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(value) _Pragma(#value) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(15,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(value) __pragma(value) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(value) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +#endif +#if defined(__clang__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH _Pragma("clang diagnostic push") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP _Pragma("clang diagnostic pop") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH _Pragma("warning(push)") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP _Pragma("warning(pop)") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,6,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH _Pragma("GCC diagnostic push") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP _Pragma("GCC diagnostic pop") +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(15,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH __pragma(warning(push)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP __pragma(warning(pop)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(5,6,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH _Pragma("push") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP _Pragma("pop") +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(8,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH _Pragma("diag_push") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP _Pragma("diag_pop") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(2,90,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH _Pragma("warning(push)") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP _Pragma("warning(pop)") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +#endif + +/* JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_ is for + HEDLEY INTERNAL USE ONLY. API subject to change without notice. */ +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_ +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) +# if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wc++98-compat") +# if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wc++17-extensions") +# if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wc++1z-extensions") +# define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_(xpr) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wc++98-compat\"") \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wc++17-extensions\"") \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wc++1z-extensions\"") \ + xpr \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +# else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_(xpr) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wc++98-compat\"") \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wc++17-extensions\"") \ + xpr \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +# endif +# else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_(xpr) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wc++98-compat\"") \ + xpr \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +# endif +# endif +#endif +#if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_(x) x +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONST_CAST) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CONST_CAST +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_CONST_CAST(T, expr) (const_cast(expr)) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wcast-qual") || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,6,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_CONST_CAST(T, expr) (__extension__ ({ \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CAST_QUAL \ + ((T) (expr)); \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP \ + })) +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_CONST_CAST(T, expr) ((T) (expr)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_REINTERPRET_CAST) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_REINTERPRET_CAST +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_REINTERPRET_CAST(T, expr) (reinterpret_cast(expr)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_REINTERPRET_CAST(T, expr) ((T) (expr)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(T, expr) (static_cast(expr)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(T, expr) ((T) (expr)) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CPP_CAST) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CPP_CAST +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) +# if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wold-style-cast") +# define JSON_HEDLEY_CPP_CAST(T, expr) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wold-style-cast\"") \ + ((T) (expr)) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +# elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,3,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_CPP_CAST(T, expr) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("diag_suppress=Pe137") \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +# else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_CPP_CAST(T, expr) ((T) (expr)) +# endif +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_CPP_CAST(T, expr) (expr) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wdeprecated-declarations") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wdeprecated-declarations\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("warning(disable:1478 1786)") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED __pragma(warning(disable:1478 1786)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(20,7,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("diag_suppress 1215,1216,1444,1445") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("diag_suppress 1215,1444") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wdeprecated-declarations\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(15,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED __pragma(warning(disable:4996)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("diag_suppress 1215,1444") +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("diag_suppress 1291,1718") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,13,0) && !defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("error_messages(off,E_DEPRECATED_ATT,E_DEPRECATED_ATT_MESS)") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,13,0) && defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("error_messages(off,symdeprecated,symdeprecated2)") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("diag_suppress=Pe1444,Pe1215") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(2,90,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED _Pragma("warn(disable:2241)") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_DEPRECATED +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wunknown-pragmas") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wunknown-pragmas\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("warning(disable:161)") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS __pragma(warning(disable:161)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("diag_suppress 1675") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wunknown-pragmas\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(15,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS __pragma(warning(disable:4068)) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(16,9,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,3,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("diag_suppress 163") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("diag_suppress 163") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("diag_suppress=Pe161") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS _Pragma("diag_suppress 161") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wunknown-attributes") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wunknown-attributes\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,6,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wdeprecated-declarations\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(17,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("warning(disable:1292)") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES __pragma(warning(disable:1292)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(19,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES __pragma(warning(disable:5030)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(20,7,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("diag_suppress 1097,1098") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("diag_suppress 1097") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,14,0) && defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("error_messages(off,attrskipunsup)") +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(18,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(8,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("diag_suppress 1173") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("diag_suppress=Pe1097") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES _Pragma("diag_suppress 1097") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_CPP_ATTRIBUTES +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CAST_QUAL) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CAST_QUAL +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wcast-qual") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CAST_QUAL _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wcast-qual\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CAST_QUAL _Pragma("warning(disable:2203 2331)") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CAST_QUAL _Pragma("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wcast-qual\"") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CAST_QUAL +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNUSED_FUNCTION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNUSED_FUNCTION +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wunused-function") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNUSED_FUNCTION _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wunused-function\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,4,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNUSED_FUNCTION _Pragma("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wunused-function\"") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(1,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNUSED_FUNCTION __pragma(warning(disable:4505)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNUSED_FUNCTION _Pragma("diag_suppress 3142") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNUSED_FUNCTION +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(14,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED(since) __declspec(deprecated("Since " # since)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR(since, replacement) __declspec(deprecated("Since " #since "; use " #replacement)) +#elif \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_EXTENSION(attribute_deprecated_with_message) && !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(5,6,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,13,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(18,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(18,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(8,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED(since) __attribute__((__deprecated__("Since " #since))) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR(since, replacement) __attribute__((__deprecated__("Since " #since "; use " #replacement))) +#elif defined(__cplusplus) && (__cplusplus >= 201402L) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED(since) JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[deprecated("Since " #since)]]) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR(since, replacement) JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[deprecated("Since " #since "; use " #replacement)]]) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(deprecated) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED(since) __attribute__((__deprecated__)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR(since, replacement) __attribute__((__deprecated__)) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(13,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(6,50,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED(since) __declspec(deprecated) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR(since, replacement) __declspec(deprecated) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED(since) _Pragma("deprecated") + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR(since, replacement) _Pragma("deprecated") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED(since) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_DEPRECATED_FOR(since, replacement) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNAVAILABLE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_UNAVAILABLE +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(warning) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNAVAILABLE(available_since) __attribute__((__warning__("Not available until " #available_since))) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNAVAILABLE(available_since) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT_MSG) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT_MSG +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(warn_unused_result) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,15,0) && defined(__cplusplus)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT __attribute__((__warn_unused_result__)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT_MSG(msg) __attribute__((__warn_unused_result__)) +#elif (JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(nodiscard) >= 201907L) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[nodiscard]]) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT_MSG(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[nodiscard(msg)]]) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(nodiscard) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[nodiscard]]) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT_MSG(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[nodiscard]]) +#elif defined(_Check_return_) /* SAL */ + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT _Check_return_ + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT_MSG(msg) _Check_return_ +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT + #define JSON_HEDLEY_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT_MSG(msg) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_SENTINEL) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_SENTINEL +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(sentinel) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(5,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SENTINEL(position) __attribute__((__sentinel__(position))) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_SENTINEL(position) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN __noreturn +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN __attribute__((__noreturn__)) +#elif defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && __STDC_VERSION__ >= 201112L + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN _Noreturn +#elif defined(__cplusplus) && (__cplusplus >= 201103L) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[noreturn]]) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(noreturn) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,11,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN __attribute__((__noreturn__)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN _Pragma("does_not_return") +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(13,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN __declspec(noreturn) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN _Pragma("FUNC_NEVER_RETURNS;") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION_CHECK(3,2,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN __attribute((noreturn)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(9,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN __declspec(noreturn) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_RETURN +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_NO_ESCAPE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_NO_ESCAPE +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(noescape) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_ESCAPE __attribute__((__noescape__)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_ESCAPE +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE_RETURN) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE_RETURN +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(13,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(expr) __assume(expr) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_assume) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(expr) __builtin_assume(expr) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) + #if defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(expr) std::_nassert(expr) + #else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(expr) _nassert(expr) + #endif +#endif +#if \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_unreachable) && (!defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION))) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(18,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(13,1,5) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(10,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE() __builtin_unreachable() +#elif defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE() JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(0) +#endif +#if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME) + #if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(expr) JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(void, ((expr) ? 1 : (JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE(), 1))) + #else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(expr) JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(void, expr) + #endif +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE) + #if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE_RETURN(value) return (JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(void, JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(0)), (value)) + #else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE_RETURN(value) JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE() + #endif +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE_RETURN(value) return (value) +#endif +#if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNREACHABLE() JSON_HEDLEY_ASSUME(0) +#endif + +JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wpedantic") + #pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wpedantic" +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wc++98-compat-pedantic") && defined(__cplusplus) + #pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wc++98-compat-pedantic" +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_WARNING("-Wvariadic-macros",4,0,0) + #if defined(__clang__) + #pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wvariadic-macros" + #elif defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION) + #pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wvariadic-macros" + #endif +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_NON_NULL) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_NON_NULL +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(nonnull) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NON_NULL(...) __attribute__((__nonnull__(__VA_ARGS__))) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NON_NULL(...) +#endif +JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PRINTF_FORMAT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PRINTF_FORMAT +#endif +#if defined(__MINGW32__) && JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(format,4,4,0) && !defined(__USE_MINGW_ANSI_STDIO) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRINTF_FORMAT(string_idx,first_to_check) __attribute__((__format__(ms_printf, string_idx, first_to_check))) +#elif defined(__MINGW32__) && JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(format,4,4,0) && defined(__USE_MINGW_ANSI_STDIO) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRINTF_FORMAT(string_idx,first_to_check) __attribute__((__format__(gnu_printf, string_idx, first_to_check))) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(format) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(5,6,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRINTF_FORMAT(string_idx,first_to_check) __attribute__((__format__(__printf__, string_idx, first_to_check))) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRINTF_FORMAT(string_idx,first_to_check) __declspec(vaformat(printf,string_idx,first_to_check)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_PRINTF_FORMAT(string_idx,first_to_check) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONSTEXPR) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CONSTEXPR +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) + #if __cplusplus >= 201103L + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CONSTEXPR JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_(constexpr) + #endif +#endif +#if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONSTEXPR) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CONSTEXPR +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_LIKELY) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_LIKELY +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNLIKELY) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_UNLIKELY +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNPREDICTABLE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_UNPREDICTABLE +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_unpredictable) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNPREDICTABLE(expr) __builtin_unpredictable((expr)) +#endif +#if \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_expect_with_probability) && !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(9,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT(expr, value, probability) __builtin_expect_with_probability( (expr), (value), (probability)) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT_TRUE(expr, probability) __builtin_expect_with_probability(!!(expr), 1 , (probability)) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT_FALSE(expr, probability) __builtin_expect_with_probability(!!(expr), 0 , (probability)) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_LIKELY(expr) __builtin_expect (!!(expr), 1 ) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_UNLIKELY(expr) __builtin_expect (!!(expr), 0 ) +#elif \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_expect) && !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,15,0) && defined(__cplusplus)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,7,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(3,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(6,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK(0,9,27) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(8,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT(expr, expected, probability) \ + (((probability) >= 0.9) ? __builtin_expect((expr), (expected)) : (JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(void, expected), (expr))) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT_TRUE(expr, probability) \ + (__extension__ ({ \ + double hedley_probability_ = (probability); \ + ((hedley_probability_ >= 0.9) ? __builtin_expect(!!(expr), 1) : ((hedley_probability_ <= 0.1) ? __builtin_expect(!!(expr), 0) : !!(expr))); \ + })) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT_FALSE(expr, probability) \ + (__extension__ ({ \ + double hedley_probability_ = (probability); \ + ((hedley_probability_ >= 0.9) ? __builtin_expect(!!(expr), 0) : ((hedley_probability_ <= 0.1) ? __builtin_expect(!!(expr), 1) : !!(expr))); \ + })) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_LIKELY(expr) __builtin_expect(!!(expr), 1) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_UNLIKELY(expr) __builtin_expect(!!(expr), 0) +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT(expr, expected, probability) (JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(void, expected), (expr)) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT_TRUE(expr, probability) (!!(expr)) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT_FALSE(expr, probability) (!!(expr)) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_LIKELY(expr) (!!(expr)) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_UNLIKELY(expr) (!!(expr)) +#endif +#if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_UNPREDICTABLE) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_UNPREDICTABLE(expr) JSON_HEDLEY_PREDICT(expr, 1, 0.5) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MALLOC) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_MALLOC +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(malloc) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,11,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(12,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MALLOC __attribute__((__malloc__)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MALLOC _Pragma("returns_new_memory") +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(14,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MALLOC __declspec(restrict) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_MALLOC +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PURE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PURE +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(pure) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(2,96,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,11,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PURE __attribute__((__pure__)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,10,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PURE _Pragma("does_not_write_global_data") +#elif defined(__cplusplus) && \ + ( \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(2,0,1) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) \ + ) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PURE _Pragma("FUNC_IS_PURE;") +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PURE +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CONST) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CONST +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(const) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(2,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,11,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CONST __attribute__((__const__)) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CONST _Pragma("no_side_effect") +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_CONST JSON_HEDLEY_PURE +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_RESTRICT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_RESTRICT +#endif +#if defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L) && !defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_RESTRICT restrict +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(14,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(17,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,2,4) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(8,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,14,0) && defined(__cplusplus)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) || \ + defined(__clang__) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_RESTRICT __restrict +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,3,0) && !defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_RESTRICT _Restrict +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_RESTRICT +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE +#endif +#if \ + (defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L)) || \ + (defined(__cplusplus) && (__cplusplus >= 199711L)) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE inline +#elif \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(6,2,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE __inline__ +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(12,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(3,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE __inline +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ALWAYS_INLINE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_ALWAYS_INLINE +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(always_inline) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,11,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,10,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_ALWAYS_INLINE __attribute__((__always_inline__)) JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(12,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_ALWAYS_INLINE __forceinline +#elif defined(__cplusplus) && \ + ( \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(6,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) \ + ) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_ALWAYS_INLINE _Pragma("FUNC_ALWAYS_INLINE;") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_ALWAYS_INLINE _Pragma("inline=forced") +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_ALWAYS_INLINE JSON_HEDLEY_INLINE +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(noinline) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,11,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(10,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_VERSION_CHECK(15,12,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION_CHECK(5,2,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION_CHECK(6,4,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,0,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(4,3,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION_CHECK(1,2,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION_CHECK(2,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,10,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE __attribute__((__noinline__)) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(13,10,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE __declspec(noinline) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(10,2,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE _Pragma("noinline") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) && defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE _Pragma("FUNC_CANNOT_INLINE;") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE _Pragma("inline=never") +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_COMPCERT_VERSION_CHECK(3,2,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE __attribute((noinline)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(9,0,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE __declspec(noinline) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NEVER_INLINE +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PRIVATE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PRIVATE +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PUBLIC) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_PUBLIC +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IMPORT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_IMPORT +#endif +#if defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PRIVATE +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PUBLIC __declspec(dllexport) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport) +#else +# if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(visibility) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,11,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(13,1,0) || \ + ( \ + defined(__TI_EABI__) && \ + ( \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,2,0) && defined(__TI_GNU_ATTRIBUTE_SUPPORT__)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(7,5,0) \ + ) \ + ) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PRIVATE __attribute__((__visibility__("hidden"))) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PUBLIC __attribute__((__visibility__("default"))) +# else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PRIVATE +# define JSON_HEDLEY_PUBLIC +# endif +# define JSON_HEDLEY_IMPORT extern +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_NO_THROW) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_NO_THROW +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(nothrow) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,3,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_THROW __attribute__((__nothrow__)) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(13,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_THROW __declspec(nothrow) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NO_THROW +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_FALL_THROUGH) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_FALL_THROUGH +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(fallthrough) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(7,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_FALL_THROUGH __attribute__((__fallthrough__)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE_NS(clang,fallthrough) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_FALL_THROUGH JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[clang::fallthrough]]) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(fallthrough) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_FALL_THROUGH JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_([[fallthrough]]) +#elif defined(__fallthrough) /* SAL */ + #define JSON_HEDLEY_FALL_THROUGH __fallthrough +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_FALL_THROUGH +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_RETURNS_NON_NULL) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_RETURNS_NON_NULL +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(returns_nonnull) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,9,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_RETURNS_NON_NULL __attribute__((__returns_nonnull__)) +#elif defined(_Ret_notnull_) /* SAL */ + #define JSON_HEDLEY_RETURNS_NON_NULL _Ret_notnull_ +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_RETURNS_NON_NULL +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_ARRAY_PARAM) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_ARRAY_PARAM +#endif +#if \ + defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L) && \ + !defined(__STDC_NO_VLA__) && \ + !defined(__cplusplus) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ARRAY_PARAM(name) (name) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_ARRAY_PARAM(name) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTANT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTANT +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_CONSTEXPR) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_CONSTEXPR +#endif +/* JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_ is for + HEDLEY INTERNAL USE ONLY. API subject to change without notice. */ +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_ +#endif +#if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_constant_p) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK(0,9,19) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(4,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(13,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION_CHECK(6,1,0) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION_CHECK(5,10,0) && !defined(__cplusplus)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(8,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MCST_LCC_VERSION_CHECK(1,25,10) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTANT(expr) __builtin_constant_p(expr) +#endif +#if !defined(__cplusplus) +# if \ + JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_types_compatible_p) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(3,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(13,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(8,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(5,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION_CHECK(0,9,24) +#if defined(__INTPTR_TYPE__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_(expr) __builtin_types_compatible_p(__typeof__((1 ? (void*) ((__INTPTR_TYPE__) ((expr) * 0)) : (int*) 0)), int*) +#else + #include + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_(expr) __builtin_types_compatible_p(__typeof__((1 ? (void*) ((intptr_t) ((expr) * 0)) : (int*) 0)), int*) +#endif +# elif \ + ( \ + defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 201112L) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_SUNPRO_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION) && \ + !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION)) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_EXTENSION(c_generic_selections) && !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,9,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(17,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_IBM_VERSION_CHECK(12,1,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_ARM_VERSION_CHECK(5,3,0) +#if defined(__INTPTR_TYPE__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_(expr) _Generic((1 ? (void*) ((__INTPTR_TYPE__) ((expr) * 0)) : (int*) 0), int*: 1, void*: 0) +#else + #include + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_(expr) _Generic((1 ? (void*) ((intptr_t) * 0) : (int*) 0), int*: 1, void*: 0) +#endif +# elif \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION) || \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION) || \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TINYC_VERSION) || \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_ARMCL_VERSION) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL430_VERSION_CHECK(18,12,0) || \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL2000_VERSION) || \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL6X_VERSION) || \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CL7X_VERSION) || \ + defined(JSON_HEDLEY_TI_CLPRU_VERSION) || \ + defined(__clang__) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_(expr) ( \ + sizeof(void) != \ + sizeof(*( \ + 1 ? \ + ((void*) ((expr) * 0L) ) : \ +((struct { char v[sizeof(void) * 2]; } *) 1) \ + ) \ + ) \ + ) +# endif +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_) + #if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTANT) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTANT(expr) JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_(expr) + #endif + #define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_CONSTEXPR(expr) (JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTEXPR_(expr) ? (expr) : (-1)) +#else + #if !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTANT) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_IS_CONSTANT(expr) (0) + #endif + #define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_CONSTEXPR(expr) (expr) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_BEGIN_C_DECLS) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_BEGIN_C_DECLS +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_END_C_DECLS) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_END_C_DECLS +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_C_DECL) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_C_DECL +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_BEGIN_C_DECLS extern "C" { + #define JSON_HEDLEY_END_C_DECLS } + #define JSON_HEDLEY_C_DECL extern "C" +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_BEGIN_C_DECLS + #define JSON_HEDLEY_END_C_DECLS + #define JSON_HEDLEY_C_DECL +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_ASSERT) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_ASSERT +#endif +#if \ + !defined(__cplusplus) && ( \ + (defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && (__STDC_VERSION__ >= 201112L)) || \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_FEATURE(c_static_assert) && !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(6,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) || \ + defined(_Static_assert) \ + ) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_ASSERT(expr, message) _Static_assert(expr, message) +#elif \ + (defined(__cplusplus) && (__cplusplus >= 201103L)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(16,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_ASSERT(expr, message) JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_(static_assert(expr, message)) +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_ASSERT(expr, message) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_NULL) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_NULL +#endif +#if defined(__cplusplus) + #if __cplusplus >= 201103L + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NULL JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_CPP98_COMPAT_WRAP_(nullptr) + #elif defined(NULL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NULL NULL + #else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NULL JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(void*, 0) + #endif +#elif defined(NULL) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NULL NULL +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_NULL ((void*) 0) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wunknown-pragmas") +# define JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE(msg) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(message msg) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(message msg) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_CRAY_VERSION_CHECK(5,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(_CRI message msg) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_IAR_VERSION_CHECK(8,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(message(msg)) +#elif JSON_HEDLEY_PELLES_VERSION_CHECK(2,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(message(msg)) +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE(msg) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_WARNING) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_WARNING +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wunknown-pragmas") +# define JSON_HEDLEY_WARNING(msg) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_DISABLE_UNKNOWN_PRAGMAS \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(clang warning msg) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(4,8,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_PGI_VERSION_CHECK(18,4,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(13,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_WARNING(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(GCC warning msg) +#elif \ + JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(15,0,0) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_WARNING(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_PRAGMA(message(msg)) +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_WARNING(msg) JSON_HEDLEY_MESSAGE(msg) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE +#endif +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_MSG) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_MSG +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(diagnose_if) +# if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wgcc-compat") +# define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE(expr) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wgcc-compat\"") \ + __attribute__((diagnose_if(!(expr), #expr, "error"))) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +# define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_MSG(expr,msg) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("clang diagnostic ignored \"-Wgcc-compat\"") \ + __attribute__((diagnose_if(!(expr), msg, "error"))) \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP +# else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE(expr) __attribute__((diagnose_if(!(expr), #expr, "error"))) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_MSG(expr,msg) __attribute__((diagnose_if(!(expr), msg, "error"))) +# endif +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE(expr) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_REQUIRE_MSG(expr,msg) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(flag_enum) && (!defined(__cplusplus) || JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING("-Wbitfield-enum-conversion")) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS __attribute__((__flag_enum__)) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS_CAST) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS_CAST +#endif +#if JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_VERSION_CHECK(19,0,0) +# define JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS_CAST(T, expr) (__extension__ ({ \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH \ + _Pragma("warning(disable:188)") \ + ((T) (expr)); \ + JSON_HEDLEY_DIAGNOSTIC_POP \ + })) +#else +# define JSON_HEDLEY_FLAGS_CAST(T, expr) JSON_HEDLEY_STATIC_CAST(T, expr) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_EMPTY_BASES) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_EMPTY_BASES +#endif +#if \ + (JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(19,0,23918) && !JSON_HEDLEY_MSVC_VERSION_CHECK(20,0,0)) || \ + JSON_HEDLEY_INTEL_CL_VERSION_CHECK(2021,1,0) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_EMPTY_BASES __declspec(empty_bases) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_EMPTY_BASES +#endif + +/* Remaining macros are deprecated. */ + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_NOT_CLANG_VERSION_CHECK) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_NOT_CLANG_VERSION_CHECK +#endif +#if defined(__clang__) + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_NOT_CLANG_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) (0) +#else + #define JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_NOT_CLANG_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) JSON_HEDLEY_GCC_VERSION_CHECK(major,minor,patch) +#endif + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_CPP_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_BUILTIN) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_BUILTIN +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_BUILTIN(builtin) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_FEATURE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_FEATURE +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_FEATURE(feature) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_FEATURE(feature) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_EXTENSION) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_EXTENSION +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_EXTENSION(extension) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_EXTENSION(extension) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_DECLSPEC_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_DECLSPEC_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_DECLSPEC_ATTRIBUTE(attribute) + +#if defined(JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_WARNING) + #undef JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_WARNING +#endif +#define JSON_HEDLEY_CLANG_HAS_WARNING(warning) JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_WARNING(warning) + +#endif /* !defined(JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION) || (JSON_HEDLEY_VERSION < X) */ + + +// This file contains all internal macro definitions (except those affecting ABI) +// You MUST include macro_unscope.hpp at the end of json.hpp to undef all of them + +// #include + + +// exclude unsupported compilers +#if !defined(JSON_SKIP_UNSUPPORTED_COMPILER_CHECK) + #if defined(__clang__) + #if (__clang_major__ * 10000 + __clang_minor__ * 100 + __clang_patchlevel__) < 30400 + #error "unsupported Clang version - see https://github.com/nlohmann/json#supported-compilers" + #endif + #elif defined(__GNUC__) && !(defined(__ICC) || defined(__INTEL_COMPILER)) + #if (__GNUC__ * 10000 + __GNUC_MINOR__ * 100 + __GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__) < 40800 + #error "unsupported GCC version - see https://github.com/nlohmann/json#supported-compilers" + #endif + #endif +#endif + +// C++ language standard detection +// if the user manually specified the used c++ version this is skipped +#if !defined(JSON_HAS_CPP_20) && !defined(JSON_HAS_CPP_17) && !defined(JSON_HAS_CPP_14) && !defined(JSON_HAS_CPP_11) + #if (defined(__cplusplus) && __cplusplus >= 202002L) || (defined(_MSVC_LANG) && _MSVC_LANG >= 202002L) + #define JSON_HAS_CPP_20 + #define JSON_HAS_CPP_17 + #define JSON_HAS_CPP_14 + #elif (defined(__cplusplus) && __cplusplus >= 201703L) || (defined(_HAS_CXX17) && _HAS_CXX17 == 1) // fix for issue #464 + #define JSON_HAS_CPP_17 + #define JSON_HAS_CPP_14 + #elif (defined(__cplusplus) && __cplusplus >= 201402L) || (defined(_HAS_CXX14) && _HAS_CXX14 == 1) + #define JSON_HAS_CPP_14 + #endif + // the cpp 11 flag is always specified because it is the minimal required version + #define JSON_HAS_CPP_11 +#endif + +#ifdef __has_include + #if __has_include() + #include + #endif +#endif + +#if !defined(JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM) && !defined(JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM) + #ifdef JSON_HAS_CPP_17 + #if defined(__cpp_lib_filesystem) + #define JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM 1 + #elif defined(__cpp_lib_experimental_filesystem) + #define JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM 1 + #elif !defined(__has_include) + #define JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM 1 + #elif __has_include() + #define JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM 1 + #elif __has_include() + #define JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM 1 + #endif + + // std::filesystem does not work on MinGW GCC 8: https://sourceforge.net/p/mingw-w64/bugs/737/ + #if defined(__MINGW32__) && defined(__GNUC__) && __GNUC__ == 8 + #undef JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM + #undef JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM + #endif + + // no filesystem support before GCC 8: https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/compiler_support + #if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(__clang__) && __GNUC__ < 8 + #undef JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM + #undef JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM + #endif + + // no filesystem support before Clang 7: https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/compiler_support + #if defined(__clang_major__) && __clang_major__ < 7 + #undef JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM + #undef JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM + #endif + + // no filesystem support before MSVC 19.14: https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/compiler_support + #if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER < 1914 + #undef JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM + #undef JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM + #endif + + // no filesystem support before iOS 13 + #if defined(__IPHONE_OS_VERSION_MIN_REQUIRED) && __IPHONE_OS_VERSION_MIN_REQUIRED < 130000 + #undef JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM + #undef JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM + #endif + + // no filesystem support before macOS Catalina + #if defined(__MAC_OS_X_VERSION_MIN_REQUIRED) && __MAC_OS_X_VERSION_MIN_REQUIRED < 101500 + #undef JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM + #undef JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM + #endif + #endif +#endif + +#ifndef JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM + #define JSON_HAS_EXPERIMENTAL_FILESYSTEM 0 +#endif + +#ifndef JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM + #define JSON_HAS_FILESYSTEM 0 +#endif + +#ifndef JSON_HAS_THREE_WAY_COMPARISON + #if defined(__cpp_impl_three_way_comparison) && __cpp_impl_three_way_comparison >= 201907L \ + && defined(__cpp_lib_three_way_comparison) && __cpp_lib_three_way_comparison >= 201907L + #define JSON_HAS_THREE_WAY_COMPARISON 1 + #else + #define JSON_HAS_THREE_WAY_COMPARISON 0 + #endif +#endif + +#ifndef JSON_HAS_RANGES + // ranges header shipping in GCC 11.1.0 (released 2021-04-27) has syntax error + #if defined(__GLIBCXX__) && __GLIBCXX__ == 20210427 + #define JSON_HAS_RANGES 0 + #elif defined(__cpp_lib_ranges) + #define JSON_HAS_RANGES 1 + #else + #define JSON_HAS_RANGES 0 + #endif +#endif + +#ifdef JSON_HAS_CPP_17 + #define JSON_INLINE_VARIABLE inline +#else + #define JSON_INLINE_VARIABLE +#endif + +#if JSON_HEDLEY_HAS_ATTRIBUTE(no_unique_address) + #define JSON_NO_UNIQUE_ADDRESS [[no_unique_address]] +#else + #define JSON_NO_UNIQUE_ADDRESS +#endif + +// disable documentation warnings on clang +#if defined(__clang__) + #pragma clang diagnostic push + #pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdocumentation" + #pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdocumentation-unknown-command" +#endif + +// allow disabling exceptions +#if (defined(__cpp_exceptions) || defined(__EXCEPTIONS) || defined(_CPPUNWIND)) && !defined(JSON_NOEXCEPTION) + #define JSON_THROW(exception) throw exception + #define JSON_TRY try + #define JSON_CATCH(exception) catch(exception) + #define JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH(exception) catch(exception) +#else + #include + #define JSON_THROW(exception) std::abort() + #define JSON_TRY if(true) + #define JSON_CATCH(exception) if(false) + #define JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH(exception) if(false) +#endif + +// override exception macros +#if defined(JSON_THROW_USER) + #undef JSON_THROW + #define JSON_THROW JSON_THROW_USER +#endif +#if defined(JSON_TRY_USER) + #undef JSON_TRY + #define JSON_TRY JSON_TRY_USER +#endif +#if defined(JSON_CATCH_USER) + #undef JSON_CATCH + #define JSON_CATCH JSON_CATCH_USER + #undef JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH + #define JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH JSON_CATCH_USER +#endif +#if defined(JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH_USER) + #undef JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH + #define JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH JSON_INTERNAL_CATCH_USER +#endif + +// allow overriding assert +#if !defined(JSON_ASSERT) + #include // assert + #define JSON_ASSERT(x) assert(x) +#endif + +// allow to access some private functions (needed by the test suite) +#if defined(JSON_TESTS_PRIVATE) + #define JSON_PRIVATE_UNLESS_TESTED public +#else + #define JSON_PRIVATE_UNLESS_TESTED private +#endif + +/*! +@brief macro to briefly define a mapping between an enum and JSON +@def NLOHMANN_JSON_SERIALIZE_ENUM +@since version 3.4.0 +*/ +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_SERIALIZE_ENUM(ENUM_TYPE, ...) \ + template \ + inline void to_json(BasicJsonType& j, const ENUM_TYPE& e) \ + { \ + static_assert(std::is_enum::value, #ENUM_TYPE " must be an enum!"); \ + static const std::pair m[] = __VA_ARGS__; \ + auto it = std::find_if(std::begin(m), std::end(m), \ + [e](const std::pair& ej_pair) -> bool \ + { \ + return ej_pair.first == e; \ + }); \ + j = ((it != std::end(m)) ? it : std::begin(m))->second; \ + } \ + template \ + inline void from_json(const BasicJsonType& j, ENUM_TYPE& e) \ + { \ + static_assert(std::is_enum::value, #ENUM_TYPE " must be an enum!"); \ + static const std::pair m[] = __VA_ARGS__; \ + auto it = std::find_if(std::begin(m), std::end(m), \ + [&j](const std::pair& ej_pair) -> bool \ + { \ + return ej_pair.second == j; \ + }); \ + e = ((it != std::end(m)) ? it : std::begin(m))->first; \ + } + +// Ugly macros to avoid uglier copy-paste when specializing basic_json. They +// may be removed in the future once the class is split. + +#define NLOHMANN_BASIC_JSON_TPL_DECLARATION \ + template class ObjectType, \ + template class ArrayType, \ + class StringType, class BooleanType, class NumberIntegerType, \ + class NumberUnsignedType, class NumberFloatType, \ + template class AllocatorType, \ + template class JSONSerializer, \ + class BinaryType> + +#define NLOHMANN_BASIC_JSON_TPL \ + basic_json + +// Macros to simplify conversion from/to types + +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND( x ) x +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_GET_MACRO(_1, _2, _3, _4, _5, _6, _7, _8, _9, _10, _11, _12, _13, _14, _15, _16, _17, _18, _19, _20, _21, _22, _23, _24, _25, _26, _27, _28, _29, _30, _31, _32, _33, _34, _35, _36, _37, _38, _39, _40, _41, _42, _43, _44, _45, _46, _47, _48, _49, _50, _51, _52, _53, _54, _55, _56, _57, _58, _59, _60, _61, _62, _63, _64, NAME,...) NAME +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(...) NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_GET_MACRO(__VA_ARGS__, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE64, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE63, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE62, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE61, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE60, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE59, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE58, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE57, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE56, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE55, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE54, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE53, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE52, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE51, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE50, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE49, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE48, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE47, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE46, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE45, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE44, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE43, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE42, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE41, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE40, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE39, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE38, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE37, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE36, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE35, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE34, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE33, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE32, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE31, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE30, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE29, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE28, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE27, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE26, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE25, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE24, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE23, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE22, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE21, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE20, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE19, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE18, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE17, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE16, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE15, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE14, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE13, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE12, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE11, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE10, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE9, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE8, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE7, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE6, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE5, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE4, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE3, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2, \ + NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE1)(__VA_ARGS__)) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) func(v1) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE3(func, v1, v2) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v2) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE4(func, v1, v2, v3) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE3(func, v2, v3) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE5(func, v1, v2, v3, v4) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE4(func, v2, v3, v4) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE6(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE5(func, v2, v3, v4, v5) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE7(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE6(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE8(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE7(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE9(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE8(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE10(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE9(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE11(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE10(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE12(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE11(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE13(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE12(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE14(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE13(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE15(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE14(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE16(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE15(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE17(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE16(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE18(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE17(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE19(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE18(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE20(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE19(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE21(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE20(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE22(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE21(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE23(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE22(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE24(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE23(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE25(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE24(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE26(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE25(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE27(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE26(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE28(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE27(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE29(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE28(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE30(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE29(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE31(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE30(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE32(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE31(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE33(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE32(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE34(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE33(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE35(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE34(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE36(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE35(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE37(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE36(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE38(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE37(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE39(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE38(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE40(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE39(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE41(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE40(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE42(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE41(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE43(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE42(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE44(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE43(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE45(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE44(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE46(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE45(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE47(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE46(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE48(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE47(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE49(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE48(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE50(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE49(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE51(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE50(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE52(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE51(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE53(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE52(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE54(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE53(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE55(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE54(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE56(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE55(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE57(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE56(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE58(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE57(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE59(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE58(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE60(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE59(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE61(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE60(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE62(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60, v61) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE61(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60, v61) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE63(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60, v61, v62) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE62(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60, v61, v62) +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE64(func, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60, v61, v62, v63) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE2(func, v1) NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE63(func, v2, v3, v4, v5, v6, v7, v8, v9, v10, v11, v12, v13, v14, v15, v16, v17, v18, v19, v20, v21, v22, v23, v24, v25, v26, v27, v28, v29, v30, v31, v32, v33, v34, v35, v36, v37, v38, v39, v40, v41, v42, v43, v44, v45, v46, v47, v48, v49, v50, v51, v52, v53, v54, v55, v56, v57, v58, v59, v60, v61, v62, v63) + +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_TO(v1) nlohmann_json_j[#v1] = nlohmann_json_t.v1; +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_FROM(v1) nlohmann_json_j.at(#v1).get_to(nlohmann_json_t.v1); +#define NLOHMANN_JSON_FROM_WITH_DEFAULT(v1) nlohmann_json_t.v1 = nlohmann_json_j.value(#v1, nlohmann_json_default_obj.v1); + +/*! +@brief macro +@def NLOHMANN_DEFINE_TYPE_INTRUSIVE +@since version 3.9.0 +*/ +#define NLOHMANN_DEFINE_TYPE_INTRUSIVE(Type, ...) \ + friend void to_json(nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, const Type& nlohmann_json_t) { NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_TO, __VA_ARGS__)) } \ + friend void from_json(const nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, Type& nlohmann_json_t) { NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_FROM, __VA_ARGS__)) } + +#define NLOHMANN_DEFINE_TYPE_INTRUSIVE_WITH_DEFAULT(Type, ...) \ + friend void to_json(nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, const Type& nlohmann_json_t) { NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_TO, __VA_ARGS__)) } \ + friend void from_json(const nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, Type& nlohmann_json_t) { Type nlohmann_json_default_obj; NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_FROM_WITH_DEFAULT, __VA_ARGS__)) } + +/*! +@brief macro +@def NLOHMANN_DEFINE_TYPE_NON_INTRUSIVE +@since version 3.9.0 +*/ +#define NLOHMANN_DEFINE_TYPE_NON_INTRUSIVE(Type, ...) \ + inline void to_json(nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, const Type& nlohmann_json_t) { NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_TO, __VA_ARGS__)) } \ + inline void from_json(const nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, Type& nlohmann_json_t) { NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_FROM, __VA_ARGS__)) } + +#define NLOHMANN_DEFINE_TYPE_NON_INTRUSIVE_WITH_DEFAULT(Type, ...) \ + inline void to_json(nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, const Type& nlohmann_json_t) { NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_TO, __VA_ARGS__)) } \ + inline void from_json(const nlohmann::json& nlohmann_json_j, Type& nlohmann_json_t) { Type nlohmann_json_default_obj; NLOHMANN_JSON_EXPAND(NLOHMANN_JSON_PASTE(NLOHMANN_JSON_FROM_WITH_DEFAULT, __VA_ARGS__)) } + + +// inspired from https://stackoverflow.com/a/26745591 +// allows to call any std function as if (e.g. with begin): +// using std::begin; begin(x); +// +// it allows using the detected idiom to retrieve the return type +// of such an expression +#define NLOHMANN_CAN_CALL_STD_FUNC_IMPL(std_name) \ + namespace detail { \ + using std::std_name; \ + \ + template \ + using result_of_##std_name = decltype(std_name(std::declval()...)); \ + } \ + \ + namespace detail2 { \ + struct std_name##_tag \ + { \ + }; \ + \ + template \ + std_name##_tag std_name(T&&...); \ + \ + template \ + using result_of_##std_name = decltype(std_name(std::declval()...)); \ + \ + template \ + struct would_call_std_##std_name \ + { \ + static constexpr auto const value = ::nlohmann::detail:: \ + is_detected_exact::value; \ + }; \ + } /* namespace detail2 */ \ + \ + template \ + struct would_call_std_##std_name : detail2::would_call_std_##std_name \ + { \ + } + +#ifndef JSON_USE_IMPLICIT_CONVERSIONS + #define JSON_USE_IMPLICIT_CONVERSIONS 1 +#endif + +#if JSON_USE_IMPLICIT_CONVERSIONS + #define JSON_EXPLICIT +#else + #define JSON_EXPLICIT explicit +#endif + +#ifndef JSON_DISABLE_ENUM_SERIALIZATION + #define JSON_DISABLE_ENUM_SERIALIZATION 0 +#endif + +#ifndef JSON_USE_GLOBAL_UDLS + #define JSON_USE_GLOBAL_UDLS 1 +#endif + +#if JSON_HAS_THREE_WAY_COMPARISON + #include // partial_ordering +#endif + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +namespace detail +{ + +/////////////////////////// +// JSON type enumeration // +/////////////////////////// + +/*! +@brief the JSON type enumeration + +This enumeration collects the different JSON types. It is internally used to +distinguish the stored values, and the functions @ref basic_json::is_null(), +@ref basic_json::is_object(), @ref basic_json::is_array(), +@ref basic_json::is_string(), @ref basic_json::is_boolean(), +@ref basic_json::is_number() (with @ref basic_json::is_number_integer(), +@ref basic_json::is_number_unsigned(), and @ref basic_json::is_number_float()), +@ref basic_json::is_discarded(), @ref basic_json::is_primitive(), and +@ref basic_json::is_structured() rely on it. + +@note There are three enumeration entries (number_integer, number_unsigned, and +number_float), because the library distinguishes these three types for numbers: +@ref basic_json::number_unsigned_t is used for unsigned integers, +@ref basic_json::number_integer_t is used for signed integers, and +@ref basic_json::number_float_t is used for floating-point numbers or to +approximate integers which do not fit in the limits of their respective type. + +@sa see @ref basic_json::basic_json(const value_t value_type) -- create a JSON +value with the default value for a given type + +@since version 1.0.0 +*/ +enum class value_t : std::uint8_t +{ + null, ///< null value + object, ///< object (unordered set of name/value pairs) + array, ///< array (ordered collection of values) + string, ///< string value + boolean, ///< boolean value + number_integer, ///< number value (signed integer) + number_unsigned, ///< number value (unsigned integer) + number_float, ///< number value (floating-point) + binary, ///< binary array (ordered collection of bytes) + discarded ///< discarded by the parser callback function +}; + +/*! +@brief comparison operator for JSON types + +Returns an ordering that is similar to Python: +- order: null < boolean < number < object < array < string < binary +- furthermore, each type is not smaller than itself +- discarded values are not comparable +- binary is represented as a b"" string in python and directly comparable to a + string; however, making a binary array directly comparable with a string would + be surprising behavior in a JSON file. + +@since version 1.0.0 +*/ +#if JSON_HAS_THREE_WAY_COMPARISON + inline std::partial_ordering operator<=>(const value_t lhs, const value_t rhs) noexcept // *NOPAD* +#else + inline bool operator<(const value_t lhs, const value_t rhs) noexcept +#endif +{ + static constexpr std::array order = {{ + 0 /* null */, 3 /* object */, 4 /* array */, 5 /* string */, + 1 /* boolean */, 2 /* integer */, 2 /* unsigned */, 2 /* float */, + 6 /* binary */ + } + }; + + const auto l_index = static_cast(lhs); + const auto r_index = static_cast(rhs); +#if JSON_HAS_THREE_WAY_COMPARISON + if (l_index < order.size() && r_index < order.size()) + { + return order[l_index] <=> order[r_index]; // *NOPAD* + } + return std::partial_ordering::unordered; +#else + return l_index < order.size() && r_index < order.size() && order[l_index] < order[r_index]; +#endif +} + +// GCC selects the built-in operator< over an operator rewritten from +// a user-defined spaceship operator +// Clang, MSVC, and ICC select the rewritten candidate +// (see GCC bug https://gcc.gnu.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=105200) +#if JSON_HAS_THREE_WAY_COMPARISON && defined(__GNUC__) +inline bool operator<(const value_t lhs, const value_t rhs) noexcept +{ + return std::is_lt(lhs <=> rhs); // *NOPAD* +} +#endif + +} // namespace detail +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +// #include + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +namespace detail +{ + +/*! +@brief replace all occurrences of a substring by another string + +@param[in,out] s the string to manipulate; changed so that all + occurrences of @a f are replaced with @a t +@param[in] f the substring to replace with @a t +@param[in] t the string to replace @a f + +@pre The search string @a f must not be empty. **This precondition is +enforced with an assertion.** + +@since version 2.0.0 +*/ +template +inline void replace_substring(StringType& s, const StringType& f, + const StringType& t) +{ + JSON_ASSERT(!f.empty()); + for (auto pos = s.find(f); // find first occurrence of f + pos != StringType::npos; // make sure f was found + s.replace(pos, f.size(), t), // replace with t, and + pos = s.find(f, pos + t.size())) // find next occurrence of f + {} +} + +/*! + * @brief string escaping as described in RFC 6901 (Sect. 4) + * @param[in] s string to escape + * @return escaped string + * + * Note the order of escaping "~" to "~0" and "/" to "~1" is important. + */ +template +inline StringType escape(StringType s) +{ + replace_substring(s, StringType{"~"}, StringType{"~0"}); + replace_substring(s, StringType{"/"}, StringType{"~1"}); + return s; +} + +/*! + * @brief string unescaping as described in RFC 6901 (Sect. 4) + * @param[in] s string to unescape + * @return unescaped string + * + * Note the order of escaping "~1" to "/" and "~0" to "~" is important. + */ +template +static void unescape(StringType& s) +{ + replace_substring(s, StringType{"~1"}, StringType{"/"}); + replace_substring(s, StringType{"~0"}, StringType{"~"}); +} + +} // namespace detail +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // size_t + +// #include + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +namespace detail +{ + +/// struct to capture the start position of the current token +struct position_t +{ + /// the total number of characters read + std::size_t chars_read_total = 0; + /// the number of characters read in the current line + std::size_t chars_read_current_line = 0; + /// the number of lines read + std::size_t lines_read = 0; + + /// conversion to size_t to preserve SAX interface + constexpr operator size_t() const + { + return chars_read_total; + } +}; + +} // namespace detail +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2018 The Abseil Authors +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // array +#include // size_t +#include // conditional, enable_if, false_type, integral_constant, is_constructible, is_integral, is_same, remove_cv, remove_reference, true_type +#include // index_sequence, make_index_sequence, index_sequence_for + +// #include + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +namespace detail +{ + +template +using uncvref_t = typename std::remove_cv::type>::type; + +#ifdef JSON_HAS_CPP_14 + +// the following utilities are natively available in C++14 +using std::enable_if_t; +using std::index_sequence; +using std::make_index_sequence; +using std::index_sequence_for; + +#else + +// alias templates to reduce boilerplate +template +using enable_if_t = typename std::enable_if::type; + +// The following code is taken from https://github.com/abseil/abseil-cpp/blob/10cb35e459f5ecca5b2ff107635da0bfa41011b4/absl/utility/utility.h +// which is part of Google Abseil (https://github.com/abseil/abseil-cpp), licensed under the Apache License 2.0. + +//// START OF CODE FROM GOOGLE ABSEIL + +// integer_sequence +// +// Class template representing a compile-time integer sequence. An instantiation +// of `integer_sequence` has a sequence of integers encoded in its +// type through its template arguments (which is a common need when +// working with C++11 variadic templates). `absl::integer_sequence` is designed +// to be a drop-in replacement for C++14's `std::integer_sequence`. +// +// Example: +// +// template< class T, T... Ints > +// void user_function(integer_sequence); +// +// int main() +// { +// // user_function's `T` will be deduced to `int` and `Ints...` +// // will be deduced to `0, 1, 2, 3, 4`. +// user_function(make_integer_sequence()); +// } +template +struct integer_sequence +{ + using value_type = T; + static constexpr std::size_t size() noexcept + { + return sizeof...(Ints); + } +}; + +// index_sequence +// +// A helper template for an `integer_sequence` of `size_t`, +// `absl::index_sequence` is designed to be a drop-in replacement for C++14's +// `std::index_sequence`. +template +using index_sequence = integer_sequence; + +namespace utility_internal +{ + +template +struct Extend; + +// Note that SeqSize == sizeof...(Ints). It's passed explicitly for efficiency. +template +struct Extend, SeqSize, 0> +{ + using type = integer_sequence < T, Ints..., (Ints + SeqSize)... >; +}; + +template +struct Extend, SeqSize, 1> +{ + using type = integer_sequence < T, Ints..., (Ints + SeqSize)..., 2 * SeqSize >; +}; + +// Recursion helper for 'make_integer_sequence'. +// 'Gen::type' is an alias for 'integer_sequence'. +template +struct Gen +{ + using type = + typename Extend < typename Gen < T, N / 2 >::type, N / 2, N % 2 >::type; +}; + +template +struct Gen +{ + using type = integer_sequence; +}; + +} // namespace utility_internal + +// Compile-time sequences of integers + +// make_integer_sequence +// +// This template alias is equivalent to +// `integer_sequence`, and is designed to be a drop-in +// replacement for C++14's `std::make_integer_sequence`. +template +using make_integer_sequence = typename utility_internal::Gen::type; + +// make_index_sequence +// +// This template alias is equivalent to `index_sequence<0, 1, ..., N-1>`, +// and is designed to be a drop-in replacement for C++14's +// `std::make_index_sequence`. +template +using make_index_sequence = make_integer_sequence; + +// index_sequence_for +// +// Converts a typename pack into an index sequence of the same length, and +// is designed to be a drop-in replacement for C++14's +// `std::index_sequence_for()` +template +using index_sequence_for = make_index_sequence; + +//// END OF CODE FROM GOOGLE ABSEIL + +#endif + +// dispatch utility (taken from ranges-v3) +template struct priority_tag : priority_tag < N - 1 > {}; +template<> struct priority_tag<0> {}; + +// taken from ranges-v3 +template +struct static_const +{ + static JSON_INLINE_VARIABLE constexpr T value{}; +}; + +#ifndef JSON_HAS_CPP_17 + template + constexpr T static_const::value; +#endif + +template +inline constexpr std::array make_array(Args&& ... args) +{ + return std::array {{static_cast(std::forward(args))...}}; +} + +} // namespace detail +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // numeric_limits +#include // false_type, is_constructible, is_integral, is_same, true_type +#include // declval +#include // tuple + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +#include // random_access_iterator_tag + +// #include + +// #include + +// #include + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +namespace detail +{ + +template +struct iterator_types {}; + +template +struct iterator_types < + It, + void_t> +{ + using difference_type = typename It::difference_type; + using value_type = typename It::value_type; + using pointer = typename It::pointer; + using reference = typename It::reference; + using iterator_category = typename It::iterator_category; +}; + +// This is required as some compilers implement std::iterator_traits in a way that +// doesn't work with SFINAE. See https://github.com/nlohmann/json/issues/1341. +template +struct iterator_traits +{ +}; + +template +struct iterator_traits < T, enable_if_t < !std::is_pointer::value >> + : iterator_types +{ +}; + +template +struct iterator_traits::value>> +{ + using iterator_category = std::random_access_iterator_tag; + using value_type = T; + using difference_type = ptrdiff_t; + using pointer = T*; + using reference = T&; +}; + +} // namespace detail +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +// #include + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN + +NLOHMANN_CAN_CALL_STD_FUNC_IMPL(begin); + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + + + +// #include + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN + +NLOHMANN_CAN_CALL_STD_FUNC_IMPL(end); + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +// #include + +// #include + +// #include +// __ _____ _____ _____ +// __| | __| | | | JSON for Modern C++ +// | | |__ | | | | | | version 3.11.2 +// |_____|_____|_____|_|___| https://github.com/nlohmann/json +// +// SPDX-FileCopyrightText: 2013-2022 Niels Lohmann +// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT + +#ifndef INCLUDE_NLOHMANN_JSON_FWD_HPP_ + #define INCLUDE_NLOHMANN_JSON_FWD_HPP_ + + #include // int64_t, uint64_t + #include // map + #include // allocator + #include // string + #include // vector + + // #include + + + /*! + @brief namespace for Niels Lohmann + @see https://github.com/nlohmann + @since version 1.0.0 + */ + NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN + + /*! + @brief default JSONSerializer template argument + + This serializer ignores the template arguments and uses ADL + ([argument-dependent lookup](https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/language/adl)) + for serialization. + */ + template + struct adl_serializer; + + /// a class to store JSON values + /// @sa https://json.nlohmann.me/api/basic_json/ + template class ObjectType = + std::map, + template class ArrayType = std::vector, + class StringType = std::string, class BooleanType = bool, + class NumberIntegerType = std::int64_t, + class NumberUnsignedType = std::uint64_t, + class NumberFloatType = double, + template class AllocatorType = std::allocator, + template class JSONSerializer = + adl_serializer, + class BinaryType = std::vector> + class basic_json; + + /// @brief JSON Pointer defines a string syntax for identifying a specific value within a JSON document + /// @sa https://json.nlohmann.me/api/json_pointer/ + template + class json_pointer; + + /*! + @brief default specialization + @sa https://json.nlohmann.me/api/json/ + */ + using json = basic_json<>; + + /// @brief a minimal map-like container that preserves insertion order + /// @sa https://json.nlohmann.me/api/ordered_map/ + template + struct ordered_map; + + /// @brief specialization that maintains the insertion order of object keys + /// @sa https://json.nlohmann.me/api/ordered_json/ + using ordered_json = basic_json; + + NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_END + +#endif // INCLUDE_NLOHMANN_JSON_FWD_HPP_ + + +NLOHMANN_JSON_NAMESPACE_BEGIN +/*! +@brief detail namespace with internal helper functions + +This namespace collects functions that should not be exposed, +implementations of some @ref basic_json methods, and meta-programming helpers. + +@since version 2.1.0 +*/ +namespace detail +{ + +///////////// +// helpers // +///////////// + +// Note to maintainers: +// +// Every trait in this file expects a non CV-qualified type. +// The only exceptions are in the 'aliases for detected' section +// (i.e. those of the form: decltype(T::member_function(std::declval()))) +// +// In this case, T has to be properly CV-qualified to constraint the function arguments +// (e.g. to_json(BasicJsonType&, const T&)) + +template struct is_basic_json : std::false_type {}; + +NLOHMANN_BASIC_JSON_TPL_DECLARATION +struct is_basic_json : std::true_type {}; + +// used by exceptions create() member functions +// true_type for pointer to possibly cv-qualified basic_json or std::nullptr_t +// false_type otherwise +template +struct is_basic_json_context : + std::integral_constant < bool, + is_basic_json::type>::type>::value + || std::is_same::value > +{}; + +////////////////////// +// json_ref helpers // +////////////////////// + +template +class json_ref; + +template +struct is_json_ref : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_json_ref> : std::true_type {}; + +////////////////////////// +// aliases for detected // +////////////////////////// + +template +using mapped_type_t = typename T::mapped_type; + +template +using key_type_t = typename T::key_type; + +template +using value_type_t = typename T::value_type; + +template +using difference_type_t = typename T::difference_type; + +template +using pointer_t = typename T::pointer; + +template +using reference_t = typename T::reference; + +template +using iterator_category_t = typename T::iterator_category; + +template +using to_json_function = decltype(T::to_json(std::declval()...)); + +template +using from_json_function = decltype(T::from_json(std::declval()...)); + +template +using get_template_function = decltype(std::declval().template get()); + +// trait checking if JSONSerializer::from_json(json const&, udt&) exists +template +struct has_from_json : std::false_type {}; + +// trait checking if j.get is valid +// use this trait instead of std::is_constructible or std::is_convertible, +// both rely on, or make use of implicit conversions, and thus fail when T +// has several constructors/operator= (see https://github.com/nlohmann/json/issues/958) +template +struct is_getable +{ + static constexpr bool value = is_detected::value; +}; + +template +struct has_from_json < BasicJsonType, T, enable_if_t < !is_basic_json::value >> +{ + using serializer = typename BasicJsonType::template json_serializer; + + static constexpr bool value = + is_detected_exact::value; +}; + +// This trait checks if JSONSerializer::from_json(json const&) exists +// this overload is used for non-default-constructible user-defined-types +template +struct has_non_default_from_json : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct has_non_default_from_json < BasicJsonType, T, enable_if_t < !is_basic_json::value >> +{ + using serializer = typename BasicJsonType::template json_serializer; + + static constexpr bool value = + is_detected_exact::value; +}; + +// This trait checks if BasicJsonType::json_serializer::to_json exists +// Do not evaluate the trait when T is a basic_json type, to avoid template instantiation infinite recursion. +template +struct has_to_json : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct has_to_json < BasicJsonType, T, enable_if_t < !is_basic_json::value >> +{ + using serializer = typename BasicJsonType::template json_serializer; + + static constexpr bool value = + is_detected_exact::value; +}; + +template +using detect_key_compare = typename T::key_compare; + +template +struct has_key_compare : std::integral_constant::value> {}; + +// obtains the actual object key comparator +template +struct actual_object_comparator +{ + using object_t = typename BasicJsonType::object_t; + using object_comparator_t = typename BasicJsonType::default_object_comparator_t; + using type = typename std::conditional < has_key_compare::value, + typename object_t::key_compare, object_comparator_t>::type; +}; + +template +using actual_object_comparator_t = typename actual_object_comparator::type; + +/////////////////// +// is_ functions // +/////////////////// + +// https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/types/conjunction +template struct conjunction : std::true_type { }; +template struct conjunction : B { }; +template +struct conjunction +: std::conditional(B::value), conjunction, B>::type {}; + +// https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/types/negation +template struct negation : std::integral_constant < bool, !B::value > { }; + +// Reimplementation of is_constructible and is_default_constructible, due to them being broken for +// std::pair and std::tuple until LWG 2367 fix (see https://cplusplus.github.io/LWG/lwg-defects.html#2367). +// This causes compile errors in e.g. clang 3.5 or gcc 4.9. +template +struct is_default_constructible : std::is_default_constructible {}; + +template +struct is_default_constructible> + : conjunction, is_default_constructible> {}; + +template +struct is_default_constructible> + : conjunction, is_default_constructible> {}; + +template +struct is_default_constructible> + : conjunction...> {}; + +template +struct is_default_constructible> + : conjunction...> {}; + + +template +struct is_constructible : std::is_constructible {}; + +template +struct is_constructible> : is_default_constructible> {}; + +template +struct is_constructible> : is_default_constructible> {}; + +template +struct is_constructible> : is_default_constructible> {}; + +template +struct is_constructible> : is_default_constructible> {}; + + +template +struct is_iterator_traits : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_iterator_traits> +{ + private: + using traits = iterator_traits; + + public: + static constexpr auto value = + is_detected::value && + is_detected::value && + is_detected::value && + is_detected::value && + is_detected::value; +}; + +template +struct is_range +{ + private: + using t_ref = typename std::add_lvalue_reference::type; + + using iterator = detected_t; + using sentinel = detected_t; + + // to be 100% correct, it should use https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/iterator/input_or_output_iterator + // and https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/iterator/sentinel_for + // but reimplementing these would be too much work, as a lot of other concepts are used underneath + static constexpr auto is_iterator_begin = + is_iterator_traits>::value; + + public: + static constexpr bool value = !std::is_same::value && !std::is_same::value && is_iterator_begin; +}; + +template +using iterator_t = enable_if_t::value, result_of_begin())>>; + +template +using range_value_t = value_type_t>>; + +// The following implementation of is_complete_type is taken from +// https://blogs.msdn.microsoft.com/vcblog/2015/12/02/partial-support-for-expression-sfinae-in-vs-2015-update-1/ +// and is written by Xiang Fan who agreed to using it in this library. + +template +struct is_complete_type : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_complete_type : std::true_type {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_object_type_impl : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_object_type_impl < + BasicJsonType, CompatibleObjectType, + enable_if_t < is_detected::value&& + is_detected::value >> +{ + using object_t = typename BasicJsonType::object_t; + + // macOS's is_constructible does not play well with nonesuch... + static constexpr bool value = + is_constructible::value && + is_constructible::value; +}; + +template +struct is_compatible_object_type + : is_compatible_object_type_impl {}; + +template +struct is_constructible_object_type_impl : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_constructible_object_type_impl < + BasicJsonType, ConstructibleObjectType, + enable_if_t < is_detected::value&& + is_detected::value >> +{ + using object_t = typename BasicJsonType::object_t; + + static constexpr bool value = + (is_default_constructible::value && + (std::is_move_assignable::value || + std::is_copy_assignable::value) && + (is_constructible::value && + std::is_same < + typename object_t::mapped_type, + typename ConstructibleObjectType::mapped_type >::value)) || + (has_from_json::value || + has_non_default_from_json < + BasicJsonType, + typename ConstructibleObjectType::mapped_type >::value); +}; + +template +struct is_constructible_object_type + : is_constructible_object_type_impl {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_string_type +{ + static constexpr auto value = + is_constructible::value; +}; + +template +struct is_constructible_string_type +{ + // launder type through decltype() to fix compilation failure on ICPC +#ifdef __INTEL_COMPILER + using laundered_type = decltype(std::declval()); +#else + using laundered_type = ConstructibleStringType; +#endif + + static constexpr auto value = + conjunction < + is_constructible, + is_detected_exact>::value; +}; + +template +struct is_compatible_array_type_impl : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_array_type_impl < + BasicJsonType, CompatibleArrayType, + enable_if_t < + is_detected::value&& + is_iterator_traits>>::value&& +// special case for types like std::filesystem::path whose iterator's value_type are themselves +// c.f. https://github.com/nlohmann/json/pull/3073 + !std::is_same>::value >> +{ + static constexpr bool value = + is_constructible>::value; +}; + +template +struct is_compatible_array_type + : is_compatible_array_type_impl {}; + +template +struct is_constructible_array_type_impl : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_constructible_array_type_impl < + BasicJsonType, ConstructibleArrayType, + enable_if_t::value >> + : std::true_type {}; + +template +struct is_constructible_array_type_impl < + BasicJsonType, ConstructibleArrayType, + enable_if_t < !std::is_same::value&& + !is_compatible_string_type::value&& + is_default_constructible::value&& +(std::is_move_assignable::value || + std::is_copy_assignable::value)&& +is_detected::value&& +is_iterator_traits>>::value&& +is_detected::value&& +// special case for types like std::filesystem::path whose iterator's value_type are themselves +// c.f. https://github.com/nlohmann/json/pull/3073 +!std::is_same>::value&& + is_complete_type < + detected_t>::value >> +{ + using value_type = range_value_t; + + static constexpr bool value = + std::is_same::value || + has_from_json::value || + has_non_default_from_json < + BasicJsonType, + value_type >::value; +}; + +template +struct is_constructible_array_type + : is_constructible_array_type_impl {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_integer_type_impl : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_integer_type_impl < + RealIntegerType, CompatibleNumberIntegerType, + enable_if_t < std::is_integral::value&& + std::is_integral::value&& + !std::is_same::value >> +{ + // is there an assert somewhere on overflows? + using RealLimits = std::numeric_limits; + using CompatibleLimits = std::numeric_limits; + + static constexpr auto value = + is_constructible::value && + CompatibleLimits::is_integer && + RealLimits::is_signed == CompatibleLimits::is_signed; +}; + +template +struct is_compatible_integer_type + : is_compatible_integer_type_impl {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_type_impl: std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_compatible_type_impl < + BasicJsonType, CompatibleType, + enable_if_t::value >> +{ + static constexpr bool value = + has_to_json::value; +}; + +template +struct is_compatible_type + : is_compatible_type_impl {}; + +template +struct is_constructible_tuple : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_constructible_tuple> : conjunction...> {}; + +template +struct is_json_iterator_of : std::false_type {}; + +template +struct is_json_iterator_of : std::true_type {}; + +template +struct is_json_iterator_of : std::true_type +{}; + +// checks if a given type T is a template specialization of Primary +template